i 
 
nFi7SRsirrI 
 
ti, /i.ThUu^ 
 
 CYCLOPEDIA OP MISSIONS: 
 
 CX)NTAINma A 
 
 COMPREHENSIVE VIEW OF MISSIONARY OPERATIONS 
 
 THROUGHOUT THE WORLD; 
 
 WITH GEOGRAPHICAL PESCRIPTIONS, AND ACCOUNTS f)F THE SO 
 CIAL, MORAL, AND RELIGIOUS CONDITION OF THE PEOPLE. 
 
 BY 
 
 REV. HARVEY NEWCOMB 
 
 REVISED EDITION. FOURTH THOUSAND, 
 
 
 UFIYEESITy] 
 
 oar 
 
 NEW YORK: . 
 CHAKLES SCKIBNEE, 145 NASSAU STKEET 
 1855. 
 

 3-7 '^.r^ 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, ite the year 1854, by 
 
 CHARLES SCRIBNER, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District 
 
 of New York. . 
 
 Taw8, Ri'SsELL & Co., Printers 
 No. 20 Beekman-street. 
 
 Stereolyped by 
 
 TURNEY & BROTHER, 
 
 24 Beekman street 
 
PREFACE 
 
 In presenting to the Christian public the " Cyclopedia of Missions," it becomes 
 me, first of all, to acknowledge the good Providence of God, which has enabled me 
 to accomplish a work of such difficulty and magnitude, in so short a time. The en= 
 terprise was entered upon with much misgiving ; but every obstacle has been removed 
 out of the way, as the work has proceeded. The preparation of the manuscript was 
 commenced on the 12th of January last. On the 10th of June, we commenced the 
 process of stereotyping, having about half the manuscript in hand. The work of 
 printing has progressed as rapidly as it could conveniently be done ; and we have not 
 been delayed a single day for want of copy, though the manuscripts have often been 
 received by mail the very day they w^ere wanted. The whole will be completed a lit- 
 tle before the first of November, making more than four months occupied in printing. 
 If it be asked how such a work could be thoroughly prepared, in so short a time, we 
 answer, hy division of labor. There have been more than twenty different persons 
 engaged upon it. It has been a work of immense labor ; but the labor has been so 
 divided that each one has had ample time to do his part thoroughly. At the same 
 time, a general unity of plan and design has been secured, an outline of every article 
 having been furnished by the Editor. And here I would acknowledge my great obli- 
 gations to those gentlemen who have kindly consented, at my request, to aid me in 
 this important undertaking ; as, without such aid, it would have required years to ac- 
 complish it. Their names appear at the close of their several articles, and will afford 
 a sufficient guaranty of thoroughness and accuracy. The articles which appear with- 
 out a name have been prepared, either in whole or in part, by the Editor. The por- 
 tions relating to the missions of the American Baptist Union have been furnished by 
 the author of the valuable and interesting " History of American Baptist Missions ;" 
 and those of the Methodists in this country and England, by a respected clergyman 
 of that denomination, whose name was mentioned to me by the Secretary of the Meth- 
 odist Missionary Society, as the most suitable person to undertake it. The missions 
 of the Presbyterian Board, have been chiefly taken (by permission,) from Rev. J. C. 
 Lowrie's " Manual of Missions." The article on the church of Rome and its missions 
 was prepared by a Roman Catholic layman. 
 
 We have aimed to make the entire work truly catholic in its character and spirit, 
 giving to every mission the degree of prominence to which it is properly entitled by 
 its age, importance, and success, without respect to the denomination of Christians 
 which supports it ; and nothing can present a brighter or more cheering view of the 
 essential unity of the different denominations of evangelical Protestants, than their 
 operations on missionary ground, where they are found adopting the same general 
 measures, preaching the same Christ, and receiving the seal of the same Holy Spirit 
 upon their labors. But, while I hold myself responsible for the general character of 
 the work, I would not be understood as adopting every opinion expressed, or of vouch- 
 ing for every statement made by my respected contributors. 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 The gentlemen whohaTo furnished these contributions have been induced to under- 
 take the ivork, from the interest which they liave felt in the cause of missions, and 
 their belief of the importance of this enterprise to that cause. They have fulfilled 
 their enpragements faithfully, and with great promptness ; and I have the satisfaction 
 of believing that the work is much more valuable than it would have been, if I had 
 done the whole myself.' They will accept this public expression of my thanks, as well 
 as of my high appreciation of their labors. I would also, in this place, return my sin- 
 cere thanks to the officers of the several Missionary Societies, for the kind encourage- 
 ment which they have given me, in the prosecution of this w^ork, and especially to the 
 American Board, who have granted me the free use of their extensive and valuable 
 library, and also encouraged the enterprise by subscribing for 100 copies of the w^ork. 
 I return thanks, also, to those numerous friends of the cause, who have given me kind 
 words of encouragement, and subscribed for copies of the work. 
 
 In the preparation of the matter and in the supervision of the press, no pains have 
 been spared to secure accuracy ; and yet it would be strange, if, in so large a work, 
 consisting, to so great an extent, of statements of facts and numbers, no mistakes 
 should occur. Yet, if an error should be occasionally discovered, we think it should 
 not, in the mind of a reasonable man, impair confidence in the general accuracy of the 
 whole. 
 
 This volume brings down the history and results of missionary operations to the 
 present time. It contains a large amount of valuable information that is generally 
 inaccessible, and only to be found in a few missionary libraries, spread out in series 
 of volumes, extending through a period of half a century. 
 
 It is here presented in a convenient form for reading, consultation, and reference. 
 It is, however, not only a book to be consulted for reference, but a book to be read ; 
 many of the sketches and narratives being of thrilling interest. No future revision 
 or alteration is contemplated in this volume, beyond the correction of errors. It will 
 always be as valuable a record of the past, as it is now. But if anything further shall 
 be called for, to bring up the history of missions and the progress of Christianity, to 
 any future time, other volumes may be added, either periodically or occasionally, ac- 
 cording to the demand. 
 
 It will readily be perceived that the copyright of this work has cost me no incon- 
 siderable outlay of means, in addition to my own time and labor ; as such contributions 
 as appear in this book could not be expected without compensation. It will require a 
 sale of ten thousand copies to remunerate me. It has, likewise, been a very expensive 
 work to my publisher ; and the price of the book has been put so low, in order to se- 
 cure a general circulation, that his profits will be very small, and it will require a large 
 sale to repay what he has already advanced. But, knowing the value of the book, 
 and having confidence in the disposition of the Christian public to patronize a good 
 object, we have ventured upon the undertaking, with the confident expectation that 
 we should be sustained by a remunerative sale. 
 
 Explanations, Sfc. — The sketches of missionary operations are chiefly given under 
 geographical heads. For example, full accounts of the missions of the several societies 
 in India are given under the head of Hindostan. Other geographical articles relate 
 to Christian lands, as Europe, United States, &c., showing the religious condition and 
 resources of the Christian world. There are several articles, however, which derive 
 their title from the people, as Armenians, Nestorians, &c. There are likewise a num- 
 ber of articles relating to the work of afi&liated societies, which have an indirect bear- 
 ing upon missionary operations. All the missions to the ancient people of God, are 
 comprised under the head of Jews. The notices of missionary stations are designed 
 chiefly as a guide to finding them on the maps. But, when any interesting informa- 
 tion respecting the places occupied as missionary stations, not contained in the ac- 
 counts of the mission, has come to hand, it has been inserted under the head of the 
 station. From the very nature of the case, however, these notices are incomplete, as 
 new stations are being occupied continually ; and concerning many old ones, it has 
 been impossible to find any information that would be of any value even in finding them 
 on the maps. There are also many articles on miscellaneous topics, connected with mis- 
 
PREFACE. y 
 
 sionary operations, the condition of the heathen, &c., which contain valuable informa- 
 tion. The Missionary Societies are treated under their several titles, giving an account 
 of their origin, the number of their missions, missionaries, converts, amount of receipts, 
 &c. Thus, a greater amount of valuable information, in regard to the movements of 
 the age, is compressed within these pages than was ever before comprised in a single 
 volume, or any one series of volumes. And the matter here given to the public is not 
 a mere compilation, but almost the whole of it has been written anew expressly for 
 this work. As the materials have been collected from a very wide range, and to a 
 great extent from original sources, I have not thought it necessary always to give 
 specific credit, except where the reference might be of advantage, in a more full exa- 
 mination of the subject. 
 
 Maps. — The various maps, which accompany the work, will be found to cover nearly 
 all the ground occupied by foreign missions. They will generally be placed near the 
 descriptions of missionary operations in the countries which they describe. But, some- 
 times, a place described will be found on a map placed at a distance from the matter 
 which relates to it. For instance, some of the stations of the Baptist Mission in As- 
 sam will be found on the map of Bengal. The following is a list of the maps, arranged 
 according to location: On Africa, T, viz.: Africa South of the Equator, South- 
 ern Africa, Western Africa, Liberia, Cape Palmas,Sherhro Sf MendiYoruba ; On India, 
 5 : India, Southern India and Ceylon, Western India, Bengal, and Northern India ; 
 Burmah, Siam, ^c. 1 ; China, 1 ; Fuhchau, 1 ; Sandwich Islands, 1 ; Other Pacific 
 Islci, 2 ; New- Zealand and Van Dieman^s Land, 1 ; Australia, 1 ; West Indies, 4, 
 viz. : St. Kitts and Antigua, Jamaica, St. Thomas and St. Croix and Surinam ; In- 
 dian Territory, 1 ; Labrador and Greenland, 1 ; Western Asia, 6, viz. : Armenia, 
 Aintab and vicinity, Nestorians, Constantinople and vicinity, Syria, Thessalonica ; mak- 
 ing 32 in all. These maps are some of them original, having been drawn by mis- 
 sionaries who have been on the ground. Others have been compiled with much labor. 
 They may not contain all the stations ; but where any are lacking, they can easily 
 be located from a description, and with the aid of the scale of miles. 
 
 Spelling and Pronunciation of Proper Names. — I have been requested to give 
 the accurate spelling and pronunciation of the foreign names, which occur in Mission- 
 ary intelligence ; and at first I designed to do so ; but I soon found that it was utter- 
 ly impracticable. The diversity of spelling is so great that it would be impossible to 
 follow any rule ; and as the missionaries, in spelling, use the Roman letters to express 
 as nearly as possible the sound of a foreign tongue, it would be presumptuous in me 
 to attempt, by any other combination of the same letters, to express more perfectly 
 sounds that I have never heard. What leads to the diversity of spelling is, the at- 
 tempts of different persons to express, by different combinations of the Roman charac- 
 ters, sounds that have no corresponding utterances in our language. The most that I 
 can do, is to give a few simple rules, and endeavor to be consistent with myself in 
 spelling the same words alike in different parts of the book ; in which last particular, 
 however, I am not confident that, in every instance, I have succeeded. The following 
 systems have been adopted by missionaries in different parts of the world : 
 
 I. Chinese.— The following system of spelling and pronouncing Chinese names is that 
 adopted by Williams, in his " Middle Kingdom." 
 
 Powers of the Letters. 
 
 1. a as in far ; ^ 11. au as oio ; 
 
 2. d as- in American ; 12. eu, as in colloquial phrase say'em. 
 
 3. e as in men ; 13. ia as in yard ; e. g. hia, kiang, prose, /tea, 
 
 4. i as in they ; hedng. 
 
 5. i as in pin ; 14. iau is made by joining Nos. 5 and 11. 
 
 6. i as in machine ; 15. ie as in Sierra (Spanish.] 
 
 7. as in long ; 16. iu as in pew, pure, lengthened to a diph- 
 
 8. u as in full ; thong. 
 
 9. u as mfune (Fr.) or union ; ^ 17. iue is made by adding a short e to th© 
 
 10. ai as in aisle, longer than i in pine. The preceding. 
 
 combination ei is more slender than ai, 18. ui as in Louisiana. 
 though the difference is slight. 
 
Yi PREFACE. 
 
 Tlie consonants are generally sounded as they are in the English alphabet. 
 
 II. Hawaiian.— The misaionaries at the Sandwich Islands, in reducing the language to writ- 
 ing, have adopted a portion of the Roman alphabet, giving the vowels the following sounds : 
 
 a as in faOier; i as in machine, or as long e; 
 
 « as in theijt or as long o in pale ; o as in wo ; m as oo in too. 
 
 The full accent is usually on the last vowel but one, and a secondary accent two syllables 
 before the full. In the diphthongal combinations, ae, ai, ao, and au, each letter retains its origi- 
 nal sound, but when spoken in quick succession, combine together in a diphthong. Consonants 
 are not doubled, and never end a word or syllable. — Bingliam^s History of the Sandwich Islands 
 
 III. Armknian and Turkish. — ^1. Sounds qf Vowels. 
 
 a as in far. u as in but, 
 
 « aa a in fate. oo as in moon. 
 
 i as in machine. ai as i in ivy. 
 
 as in note. eu as the French eu in peu. 
 
 u as in unit. 
 Note. — Some of the above are but approximations to the vowel sounds designed to be ex- 
 pressed. E and o, for example, are not quite so broad and open as the corresponding English 
 sounds, Ai is strictly a diphthong, the elements of which are indeed the same as our long i, but 
 not so closely united in pronunciation. U in Armenian names is best represented as above ; 
 but in Turkish words it corresponds more exactly with the French m as in une. The sound 
 represented by it is more exactly that of the French e in le, me, &c. 
 
 2. Sounds of Consonants. 
 g always hard, as in good, ch as in chain, 
 
 s as in sun. zh as in -pleasure. 
 
 Gh and kh are guttural sounds, having no corresponding sounds or characters in English 
 or French. The former resembles the modern Greek y, and the latter x, but both are deeper. 
 C to be used only in connection with h, except in words that have become anglicized with 
 c in them. 
 
 /, sh, and in general the consonants not mentioned above, to be sounded as in English. 
 The combination th does not occur ; when, therefore, the letters occur together, they are to be 
 regarded as belonging to different syllables, and each to have its own proper sound ; e. g. Fethi, 
 pronounced Fet-hi. 
 
 3. Accent. — The accent, which is slight, is uniformly on the last syllable in Armenian 
 proper names, and nearly so in Turkish. All the other syllables should be uttered fully, and 
 with equal stress of voice. 
 
 4. Anglicized Proper Names. — Names which have been long familiar to English and 
 American readers, and have thus become anglicized, not to be changed. Such are Constanti- 
 nople, Smyrna, Scio, Mitylene, Nicomedia, Philadelphia, &c. In fact, being for the most part 
 Greek names, they do not strictly fall within the rules above given. 
 
 Monthly Concert. — One object which I have had in view, in the preparation of 
 this work, has been to provide the means of adding interest and value to the Monthly 
 Concert. The practice of appointing committees to report at this meeting on the va- 
 rions portions of the Missionary Field, is extending in the churches ; and where it is 
 well carried out, it adds greatly to the interest of the meeting, and by engaging the 
 leading minds in the church in the personal examination of the field, it tends greatly 
 to extend and deepen the missionary spirit. But, whenever this is attempted, those 
 engaged in it are met with the insurmountable difficulty of not having access to the 
 materials for giving a complete view of scarcely a single mission in the world. This 
 book will obviate this difficulty, not only by giving a complete, though brief historical 
 sketch of almost every existing mission in the world ; but it will generally point out 
 where further information can be obtained. It also provides the means of examining 
 the localities on the maps. And from these maps, rough ones may be constructed for 
 use in the lecture room, (in addition to BidwelPs large maps,) with very little labor, and 
 no other expense than a few sheets of cartridge paper, some India ink, and a little car- 
 mine. And besides what is strictly missionary, the work contains a great amount of 
 information respecting the resources of Christendom and the religious movements of 
 the age, which may be made the basis of effective remark. 
 
 "With these explanations of the author's views, this work, which has cost him so 
 great an amount of thought, labor, and anxiety, is commended to the kind considera- 
 tion of the Christian public, in the humble yet confident hope that it may be useful. 
 Brooklyn, Nov. 1, 1854. 
 

 ">:: 
 
 CYCLOPEDI 
 
 MiSSIOIfS 
 
 ABBEOKUTA : The capital town of the 
 Torubas, in West Africa, and the principal 
 station of the Church Missionary Society in 
 that country. It is situated 100 miles inland 
 North of Badagry in the Bight of Benin, and 
 contains 30,000 inhabitants. (See Yoruba, 
 and Africa West.) 
 
 ABENAQUISt A tribe of Indians^ in 
 Lower Canada, among whom the American 
 Board support a native missionary. 
 
 ABYSSINIA : A rich, mountainous dis- 
 trict of Eastern Africa, known to the ancients 
 as Ethiopia. It is bounded on the northwest by 
 Nubia, on the northeast by the Eed Sea, on the 
 south by the country of the Gallas, and on the 
 west by countries almost unknown. Its extent is 
 estimated at about 245,000 geographical miles. 
 The country rises in terraces from the shores 
 of the Red Sea, till it swells into lofty pyra- 
 mids and abrupt peaks, whose heads are crown- 
 ed with imperishable snows. Pasture lands 
 almost entirely destitute of trees, though well 
 watered, stretch themselves before the eye in 
 the perspective, through a great part of the 
 more elevated regions, some portions of which 
 are cultivated with care. They are richly 
 stocked with flocks and herds. The country is 
 plentifully supplied with streams. 
 
 For about 1400 miles from its mouth, the 
 Nile receives no tributary. Here, in latitude 
 18° N. flows in the Takkazie, from Abyssinia, 
 around whose head-waters is the modern king- 
 dom of Tigre. The Blue Nile unites with this 
 at Khartum, in latitude 15^ 37' N.j and 
 around its sources and to the North, is Am- 
 hara. The country, encircled by its spiral 
 course, is Gojam. In latitude 9*^ 35' N., at the 
 verge of the table land, which terminates the 
 water-shed from the East, is Ankobar the capi- 
 tal of the kingdom of Shoa, the most impor- 
 tant and best known of the kingdoms into 
 which modern Abyssinia is divided. There is 
 every variety of climate, from the stifled and in- 
 tense heat of the narrow valleys, to the delicious 
 and exhilarating atmosphere of the elevated ta- 
 ble lands, and even to the perpetual frosts of the 
 snow-capt mountains. The year divides itself 
 
 into two seasons — the one of storms and inun- 
 dations, and the other of drought and burning 
 heat. Every tree and every bush in Abyssinia 
 not only retains its verdure, but bears blossoms 
 and fruit at all seasons of the year. This re- 
 gion is rich in iron and gold, the latter being" 
 found in the sands on the shores and in the 
 bed of the streams. The entrance to Abys- 
 sinia for Europeans is the town of Massowah, 
 built on an island in the Eed Sea. The place 
 of greatest note, at present, is Adowa, which 
 contains about 6000 people. Till Abyssinia 
 was overrun by the Gallas, Amhara was the 
 residence of the sovereign, who now makes 
 Gondar his capital. 
 
 InJiabitants. — The population is estimated 
 at 4,000,000 to 5,000,000. The color of the 
 Abyssinians varies from black to transpar- 
 ent copper color. They are well made and 
 active, and distinguished from the negro by 
 the regularity of their features. They are 
 not deficient in the capacities of the un- 
 derstanding or the affections of the heart. 
 In the southwestern part of the country they 
 are better informed and more civilized than the 
 people of Tigre, who are rude and uncultivated, 
 passionate and violent. The Abyssinians, in 
 their high mountain-home, have been able to 
 maintain their liberty and independence, never 
 having been subdued by the Turks ; but the 
 Gallas have recently made inroads upon their 
 territory. The country is covered with cities 
 and villages, and isolated habitations are here 
 and there seen clinging to the sides of the moun- 
 tains. The houses are mostly composed of 
 mud, straw, and rushes. Caves are also some- 
 times used for human habitations. The dwell- 
 ings of the superior families consist of a num- 
 ber of rooms, arranged around an open court. 
 The clothing of the poorer classes is very sim- 
 ple, consisting of skins or pieces of cotton. 
 Their food is principally milk and bread, but' 
 ter, honey, beef, mutton, and fowls. 
 
 In Abyssinia the women are charged with the 
 most oppressive and irksome labors, both in the 
 house and in the field. They cultivate the 
 ground, gather the harvest, grind the corn, afl 
 
8 
 
 AUYSSmiA. 
 
 procure provisions nnd wafer for the families, 
 and that often with their infanta in their arms. 
 Hut the iHliu'iition of the children is better at- 
 tendeii to than in most eastern countries, and 
 they are distinguished for filial affection and 
 obedience, and respect for the aged. The 
 common people generally marry, the sons at 
 18, and the daughters at 14. When arrived at 
 an advancetl age most of them become monks 
 or nuns. If sick, they deliver over their pro- 
 perty to their children, who support them till 
 their death, with much filial piety. About 
 half the young people enter into service at 15 
 or 16, mostly for tne remainder of their lives. 
 The servants are kindly treated. The Chris- 
 tians do not sell their slaves ; but sometimes 
 give them away. 
 
 Lanpiage. — The ancient language of Ethio- 
 pia, called the Gheez, was, down to the 14th 
 century, spoken throughout Ethiopia ; and all 
 the ancient records are in this language ; but 
 it has generally fallen into disuse, and the pre- 
 sent spoken language is the Amharic. 
 
 Government. — The old Abyssinian, or Ethio- 
 pic empire, is now broken into fragments, each 
 constituting a petty kingdom, the governments 
 of which are, so far as our information ex- 
 tends, arbitrary and despotic. 
 
 Religion. — The fragments of the old empire 
 still profess Christianity, though both Moham- 
 medans and Pagans have broken in and settled 
 among them. Among these, the Gallas are 
 the most remarkable. About the year 1500 
 they poured into the country in multitudes, and 
 seized many of its fairest portions ; and they 
 have kept up a perpetual and harassing war- 
 fare ; but many of their tribes have been made 
 tributary to the modern kingdom of Shoa, and 
 not a few of them have been reduced to slavery. 
 
 The best writers consider the conversion 
 of the Abyssinians to Christianity to have 
 taken place about the year 330, when Atha- 
 nasius was Bishop of Alexandria. Meropius, 
 a gentleman of Tyre, a Greek and a Chris- 
 tian, being cast away on the rocks of Abys- 
 sinia, was slain by the barbarous natives. 
 Two young men, Frumentius and Edesius, his 
 companions, on whom he had bestowed a libe- 
 ral education, being carried to the king, he, on 
 account of their diligence and industry, gave 
 them their liberty. They afterwards rose into 
 favor with the court, and were appointed to 
 important offices, that of Frumentius being the 
 charge of the young prince's education. And 
 besides instructing him in the learning of the 
 times, he inspired him with a love and venera- 
 tion for the Christian religion. After the king's 
 death, Frumentius, thinking it his duty to take 
 advantage of the position in which Providence 
 had placed him, to propagate the faith among 
 the Abyssinians, procured ordination as Bishop 
 of Ethiopia, from Atbanasius, Bishop of Alex- 
 andria, and returning, baptized a great number 
 of the people, ordained a regular clergy, and 
 built churches. Ever since their conversion, 
 
 the Abyssinians have received their Patriarchs 
 from Alexandria, and their creed has always 
 been the same as that of the Copts. (See Copts.) 
 
 The first discovery of the existence of this 
 church appears to have been made by some 
 adventurers sent out by John II., king of Por- 
 tugal. The king was so much interested in the 
 account which they gave of these Christians 
 that he sent out Pedro Cavilham, to ascertain* 
 the state of the people, who entered Abyssinia 
 in 1490. After this, several embassies passed 
 between the two courts, and at length a sort ot 
 alliance was entered into between the two 
 countries, which 'excited the jealousy of their 
 Mohammedan neighbors, and brought upon 
 Abyssinia a ruinous and destructive war. Zag- 
 ba Zaba, the ambassador sent by Abyssinia, in 
 1527, having published his creed, was, at the 
 instance of Bermudas, thrown into prison for 
 heresy. The emperor of Abyssinia, finding 
 himself engaged in a war, in consequence of 
 his alliance with Portugal, sent Bermudas, a 
 Portuguese then in Abyssinia, to Rome and 
 Lisbon for succors. But before Bermudas 
 started on his embassy, the Abuna or Patri- 
 arch of Abyssinia, was ordered to consecrate 
 him bishop, and nominate him his successor. 
 Bermudas first went to Rome, and was con- 
 secrated Patriarch of Ethiopia by the Pope, 
 and recommended to the king of Portugal to 
 solicit succors for Ethiopia. In the mean time, 
 the emperor died, and his son Claudius gained 
 some advantages over the Mohammedans before 
 any Portuguese arrived, but was afterwards 
 driven to the mountains. Bermudas, on his 
 return, succeeded in joining the young emperor, 
 with a few Portuguese ; and in an encounter, 
 the Mohammedan chief lost his life, and Clau- 
 dius was put in quiet possession of his throne. 
 The Portuguese now demanded that the em- 
 peror should embrace the Catholic faith, and 
 give up one-third of his kingdom to the Por- 
 tuguese. And this demand was accompanied 
 with a threat of excommunication, and the 
 loss of the service of the Portuguese. The em- 
 peror replied to Bermudas, declaring that he, 
 as Patriarch, had no authority in the empire, 
 and that the Pope himself w^as a heretic. He 
 also ordered Bermudas to be seized and put 
 in prison, and sent immediately to Alexandria 
 for an Abuna for the Abyssinian church. 
 
 Soon after this, Ignatius Loyola sent a Pa- 
 triarch, two bishops, and ten Jesuits to convert 
 Abyssinia to Rome. Claudius was by no 
 means pleased with this new arrival. Oviedo, 
 the bishop, soon after his arrival, haughtily de- 
 manded his submission to Rome, which demand 
 was promptly resisted. Yet, Oviedo persevered, 
 growing more insolent in his demands. The 
 matter was submitted to a Council, in which 
 the emperor entered into a public debate with 
 the Jesuit, and afterwards wrote an answer to 
 a tract published by the bishop. Being foiled 
 in this way, Oviedo resorted to the terrors of 
 excommunication, and meanwhile sent a re- 
 
ABYSSINIA. 
 
 9 
 
 quest to Goa for some Poiiuguese soldiers to aid 
 in tlie conversion of the Abyssinians. But this 
 wise king was soon after slain in battle, in 
 defending his dominions from the invasion of 
 the Mohammedan king of Adel. Oviedo still 
 plied his arts with the successors of Claudius, 
 but with no better success; in the midst of 
 which, he was recalled by the Pope, and sent 
 to Japan ; not, however, without assuring the 
 Pope that, " with the assistance of 500 or 600 
 good Portuguese soldiers, he could at any time 
 reduce the empire of Abyssinia to the obedience 
 of the Pontificate," and intimating that it was 
 a region abounding with the finest gold. 
 
 But, notwithstanding the failure of these at- 
 tempts,Jhe Jesuits sent another mission to 
 Abyssinia in 1588, one of whom was Peter 
 Pays, who arrived in Ethiopia in 1603. Find- 
 ing Za Dangel, a weak prince, on the throne, 
 these Jesuits succeeded in ingratiating them- 
 selves into his favor, inducing him not only to 
 embrace the Komish faith, but to order all his 
 subjects to follow his example. In this, the 
 emperor was strongly opposed by the Patriarch, 
 his son-in-law, viceroy of the Tigre, and a ma- 
 jority of the people. Yet, in spite of all en- 
 treaty, and after being warned of the ruin he 
 was bringing upon his country, he persisted in 
 adhering to the policy set on foot by the Jesu- 
 its. The result was, a civil war, which raged 
 with great violence for a number of years ; the 
 emperor, for some time being victorious, and 
 pursuing the Eomish plan of burning heretics, 
 drenched his dominions in blood, his subjects 
 rising in all quarters, and in one instance, 
 20,000 peasants coming against him from the 
 mountains. At length, he was so far brought 
 to his senses as to proclaim an act of tolera- 
 tion ; and on his death, his son re-established 
 the religion of his fathers, and drove from his 
 dominions those execrable Jesuits, who for more 
 than 25 years had been sowing discord, and 
 stirring up a weak prince to massacre his peo- 
 ple, and even to call in the aid of Moham- 
 medans to butcher his own Christian subjects ! 
 
 In the beginning of the 18 th century, a 
 French Jesuit, Brevedent, attempted a mission 
 to Abyssinia, accompanied by a physician 
 named Poncet; but the former died on the 
 way. The latter visited Abyssinia, and after- 
 wards published a book containing valuable 
 information respecting the state of the country 
 at that time. In 1714, Pope Clement XI. 
 sent out four German monks as missionaries to 
 Abyssinia, who got in favor with the emperor ; 
 but as soon as the Abyssinian monks got wind 
 of it, they raised a rebellion, dethroned the 
 emperor, and placed a youthful prince on the 
 throne, who condemned the missionaries to be 
 stoned. A reprieve was offered them, if they 
 would abjure the faith of Rome. They recoiled 
 with horror at the suggestion, and the punish- 
 ment was commuted to exile. But the monks 
 urged the execution of the original sentence, 
 and the emperor yielded. This event, though 
 
 by no means to be palliated, shows how intense 
 was the hatred excited by the intrigues of the 
 Jesuits, against Rome ; and how the persecut- 
 ing spirit, which they introduced, recoiled upon 
 their own heads. 
 
 Thus it appears that the Abyssinians have 
 preserved their ancient faith, both against the 
 sword of Mohammed and the more insidious 
 and dangerous arts of the Jesuits. Yet, whe- 
 ther there remains any vitality or spiritual life 
 among them, may be questioned. The Edin- 
 burgh Encyclopedia says : " The religion of 
 Abyssinia consists of a motley collection of 
 traditions, tenets, and ceremonies, derived from 
 the Jewish and Christian churches. In their 
 form of worship, Judaism seems to predominate. 
 The rites of Moses are strictly observed. Both 
 sexes are circumcised ; meats prohibited by the 
 Jews are abstained from ; brothers marry the 
 wives of their deceased brothers ; women ob- 
 serve the legal purifications ; Saturday and 
 Sunday are held sacred as sabbaths ; and per- 
 sons under Jewish disqualifications are pro- 
 hibited from entering the church. They have 
 festivals and saints innumerable. One day is 
 consecrated to Balaam's ass ; another to Pon- 
 tius Pilate and his wife, because he washed his 
 hands before pronouncing sentence on Christ, 
 and because she warned him to have nothing 
 to do with that just person. The Epiphany is 
 celebrated with peculiar festivity, and they have 
 four seasons of lent, in which many abstain 
 even from fish. They so abound in legends and 
 miracles, that the Jesuits were obliged to deny 
 that miracles are a sufficient proof of the truth 
 of a religion. Images they abhor, but have 
 their churches hung round with pictures, to 
 which they pay the highest veneration. Their 
 canon of Scripture is the same as ours. Upon 
 the whole, it may be said that the religion of 
 the Abyssinians is a monstrous heap of super- 
 stitions, giving rise to disputes and persecutions, 
 without producing any salutary effect upon the 
 sei?timents and conduct of its professors." 
 
 Bishop Gobat, however, says that, " Al- 
 though the Christian religion in Abyssinia has 
 entirely degenerated into superstition, yet there 
 is still sufficient of it to attach us to the Chris- 
 tians of that country, and to engage us to con- 
 sider them as brethren." He thinks their rn 
 ligion exerts some good effects upon them ; yet 
 he says, " They have no idea of the salutary 
 doctrines of Christianity ; such as justification 
 by faith ; the work of grace ; and the sanctify- 
 ing influences of the Holy Spirit ;" and that 
 "their morals are exceedingly corrupt. But, 
 in the midst of the chaos of corruption, there 
 are some traces of goodness, which, like pre- 
 cious stones, have remained dispersed among 
 the moral ruins of Abyssinia." 
 
 Mohammedans. — The Mohammedans appear 
 to have lately multiplied in Abyssinia. They 
 live on friendly terms with the Christians'. 
 They are engaged principally in trade, and 
 have the exclusive traffic in slaves,, tlio Chris- 
 
10 
 
 ABYSSINIA. 
 
 tiuns never engaging in it. They are ignorant 
 of their own crwd, and pay little attention to 
 the rites of Islamism ; and in morals, they are, 
 in every respeet, inferior to the Christians. 
 
 Falas/uKs or Jeics.—T\\c Falashas live entirely 
 separate from the Christians, and are much 
 ,M...... :.r,„>rant. They are chiefly found in the 
 
 I .d of Gondar and Shelga, and to 
 1 Acst of the LakeTsana. They have 
 
 the 8ame superstitions, a little modified after 
 the Jewish fashion. 
 
 The Cumaountcs are a people few in number, 
 inhabiting the mountains about Gondar, prin- 
 cipally engaged in agriculture. Bishop Gobat 
 r(",-:ii(ls tliem as Deists. They, however, have 
 priests, and assemble in private houses, where 
 they have a repast, which they call " Corban," 
 communion or Eucharist. 
 
 The Zalanttf are a migratory people, who 
 are said to believe in the existence of one God, 
 but to have no other religion. 
 
 MISSION. 
 
 ChurdL Missionary Society.— ThQ attention 
 of this Society has been, for many years, di- 
 rected to this interesting country. In 1815, 
 the Society's missionaries at Malta learned that 
 a native of Abyssinia had been engaged for 
 some years at Cairo in translating the Scrip- 
 tures into Amharic, the principal vernacular 
 Abyssinian language. This Amharic version 
 of the entire Bible was purchased for the Brit- 
 ish and Foreign Bible Society in 1820, by 
 Rev. W. Jowett. In 1826, Rev. Samuel Go- 
 bat and Rev. Cliristian Kugler, were sent to 
 Egypt, with the view of entering on a mission 
 to Abyssinia ; and after various hindrances, 
 they arrived at Massowah on the 28th of De- 
 cember, 1829, where they were received in a 
 friendly manner. They carried with them por- 
 tions of the Amharic Scriptures, which had 
 been printed by the British and Foreign Bible 
 Society, and which the people gladly received. 
 They obtained permission to fix their residence 
 at Adowah ; while Mr. Gobat proceeded fur- 
 ther into the interior, and remained some time 
 at Gondar, the capital, distributing the Scrip- 
 tures and conversing with the people. But 
 war breaking out, and the whole country be- 
 ing thrown into disturbance, he was detained 
 at that place till October, 1830, when he joined 
 Mr. Kugler at Adowah, in the province of Ti- 
 gre. On the 29th of December, Mr. Kugler was 
 called to his rest ; and his peaceful death made 
 a strong impression upon the natives, who said 
 they had never seen a man die in such full confi- 
 dence of the Saviour. Soon after this, the chief 
 Sebagdis, who had shown himself very friendly 
 to the mission, and who refused to go out to 
 battle on the Sabbath, was attacked and slain. 
 After his death, each of the chiefs contended 
 for the mastery, and the country was kept in 
 a state of civil war. Mr. Gobat soon after left 
 the country, and arrived at Cairo. In 1833 
 he visited England, where he published his 
 
 Journal, containing a full account of his re- 
 sidence in Abyssinia; and several other mis- 
 sionaries were preparing to return with him 
 to that country. On the 20th of December, 
 1834, Messrs. Gobat and Isenberg arrived at 
 Massowah, in Abyssinia, where they were re- 
 ceived by the governor, with much civility. In 
 1836, Mr. Gobat was visited with a protracted 
 illness, which obliged him to withdraw from 
 his labors. Rev. J. H. Knox died at Cairo on 
 his way to Abyssinia ; and the mission was re- 
 inforced by the arrival of Rev. C. H. Blum- 
 hardt. Opposition began to manifest itself, 
 on the part of the ecclesiastics, on learning that 
 the missionaries rejected some of the rites of 
 their church, and set up worship of their own ; 
 but the governor reftised to listen to their com- 
 plaints. 
 
 In 1837, Rev. L. Krapf joined the mission, 
 at Adowah ; and in March of the following 
 year, a Frenchman and an Italian priest ar- 
 rived at the same place, their object being to 
 revive the Roman Catholic Mission in Abys- 
 sinia. The people having had enough of Ro- 
 manism, were aroused by their appearance; 
 and this contributed to raise the clamor against 
 the Protestant mission, so that the governor 
 could no longer resist it, and they were obliged 
 to leave the country ; which they did with sor- 
 rowful hearts, reaching Cairo on the 24th of 
 June. But the Papists penetrated to Gondar, 
 and were active in endeavoring to re-establish 
 their mission. Messrs. Isenberg and Krapf, 
 having received an invitation from the king 
 of Shoa to visit his country, determined to at- 
 tempt an entrance into Abyssinia by the way 
 of Zeila, south of the straits of Babel Mandel, 
 Shoa lies to the southward of Amhara, the 
 province where the mission was located. They 
 left Suez on this enterprize January 27, 1839, 
 and after encountering many difficulties, reach- 
 ed Shoa on the 31st of May, and met with a 
 favorable reception from the king. They re- 
 mained there, continually occupied in discus- 
 sion and preaching, till November 6th, when 
 Mr. Isenberg returned to England. Mr. Krapf 
 continued in Shoa, laboring among the Abys- 
 sinian Christians, having secured the confidence 
 of the king of Shoa to a very remarkable de- 
 gree, so that the king assured him of his pro- 
 tection as long as he should live. Mr. Krapf 
 had made an expedition, with the King of 
 Shoa, among the Galla tribes, by whom the 
 slave trade was carried on to a considerable 
 extent; but it was considered a favorable 
 time to labor for its abolition. The Commit- 
 tee were so impressed with the providential 
 openings, not merely as regarded Abyssinia it- 
 self, but also the heathen Galla tribes, that 
 they resolved to form the Abyssinian into a 
 new mission, to be called the East African 
 Mission, and Messrs. Mullheisen and Mijller 
 were sent out to reinforce it. As this mission 
 will, hereafter, extend beyond the bounds of 
 Abyssinia, it will be treated under the head ot 
 
^'^ 0? THB*^^ 
 
 [TJSIVBRSITT] 
 
AFRICA. 
 
 11 
 
 Afriza East, which see. — GobaVs Abyssinia; 
 Edinburgh Encyclopedia ; Reports and Period- 
 icals of tlte Church Missionary Society ; African 
 Repository for January, 1850. 
 
 APAKEAITU : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on Eiraeo, South Sea. 
 
 AFIUOA : The continent of Africa is a 
 vast peninsula, in the form of an irregular 
 triangle, of which the north is its base. 
 " Africa," says the learned Prof. Guiyot, " is 
 the most singular in its form of all the conti- 
 nents. Its mass, nearly round, or ellipsoidal, 
 is concentrated upon itself. It projects into 
 the ocean no important peninsula, nor any- 
 where lets into its bosom the waters of the 
 ocean. It seems to close itself against every 
 influence from without. Thus the extension of 
 the line of coasts is only 14,000 geographical 
 miles, for a surface of 8,720,000 square miles ; 
 so that Africa has only one mile of coast ibr 
 623 miles of surface." 
 
 Africa is separated from Europe on the 
 north by the Mediterranean Sea, and from 
 Asia on the east, by the Isthmus of Suez, the 
 Red Sea, and the Indian Ocean. On tlie south 
 is the Southern Ocean, and on the west, the 
 Atlantic. The equinoctial line divides it into 
 two parts of nearly equal length. It extends 
 from Cape Blanco, opposite Sicily, in lat. 
 37*^ 21' N., to the extreme point of the Cape 
 of Good Hope, (Cape Needles,) in 34° 52' _S., 
 being nearly 72 degrees, or 5,000 English 
 miles in length. Its breadth at the Equator 
 is computed at 4,760 English miles. Its super- 
 ficial extent has never been accurately deter- 
 mined. It is estimated in the Encyclopedia 
 Britannica, which is among the latest authori- 
 ties, at 8,550,000 geographical square miles, 
 which does not vary materially from that of 
 Prof. Guizot, as above. It is larger than 
 either Europe or Australia, but smaller than 
 Asia and America. 
 
 Progress of Discovery. — The ancients have 
 transmitted to us very little knowledge of this 
 great continent We derive the first infor- 
 mation concerning the interior of Northern 
 Africa from the Arabs, who, by means of the 
 camel, were able to penetrate across the great 
 desert to the very centre of the continent, 
 along the two coasts as far as the Senegal and 
 the Gambia on the west, and to Sofala on the 
 east. On this latter coast, they not only ex- 
 plored to an extent far beyond any supposed 
 limits of ancient discovery, but_ planted colo- 
 nies at Sofala, Mombas, Melinda, and at 
 various other places. But the Portuguese 
 were the first to give any thing like an accu- 
 rate outline of the two coasts, and to complete 
 the circumnavigation of Africa. The dis- 
 covery of America and the West Indies gave 
 rise to the horrid traffic in African slaves ; 
 but this traffic has been the means of a more 
 extended knowledge of the coast between the 
 Senegal and Cameroons, and of the manners 
 and customs of the people. With the English 
 
 and French settlements in Africa began a 
 systematic survey of the coast, and portions of 
 the interior. 
 
 In 1788, a society was formed in London 
 for promoting the exploration of Inner Africa. 
 Under its auspices, important additions were 
 made to the geography of Africa by Houghton, 
 Mungo Park, Hornemann and Burckhardt. 
 In 1831, this association was merged in the 
 Royal Geographical Society. 
 
 During the last sixty years, more has been 
 done to make us acquainted with the geography 
 of Africa than during the whole of the 1700 
 years since Ptolemy. Mungo Park com- 
 mences the era of unceasing endeavors to 
 explore the Interior. He proceeded in 1795 
 from the river Gambia on the west coast to 
 the Joliba, or Niger, traced this river as far as 
 Silla, explored the intervening countries, deter- 
 mined the southern confines of the Sahara, 
 and returned in 1797. In 1805, he embarked 
 on a second journey, with the intention of fol- 
 lowing this river to its mouth. He passed 
 Timbuktu, and reached Bonsee, where he was 
 killed by the natives. 
 
 Hornemann, in 1799, penetrated from Cairo 
 to Murzuk, and transmitted from that place 
 valuable information respecting the countries 
 to the south, especially Bornu ; but no intel- 
 ligence was received from him, and it is sup- 
 posed that he soon after perished. 
 
 In 1822, Denham, Clapperton, and Oudney 
 crossed the Great Desert, and reached the 
 great Lake Tsad, Feb. 4, 1823. The sur- 
 rounding country was explored as far as Sa- 
 katu in the west, and Mandara in the south. 
 Oudney died in Bornu. Clapperton crossed 
 the Kawara, from the coast of Guinea, and 
 arrived at Sakatu, at which place he also died. 
 His servant, Richard Lander, returned to Eng- 
 land after having explored a part of the ad- 
 joining regions. Major Laing succeeded in 
 reaching Timbuktu from Tripoli, but was 
 murdered on his return, in the desert. In 
 1827 and 1828, Caillie set out from the Rio 
 Nunez on the western coast, reached Timbuktu, 
 and returned from that place through the 
 Great Desert to Marocco. 
 
 The termination of the Joliba, Kawara, or 
 Niger, remained in obscurity till 1830, when 
 it was ascertained by Lander and his brother, 
 who succeeded in tracing the river from Yaouri 
 down to its mouth. The great Niger expe- 
 dition, consisting of three large steam vessels, 
 was despatched by the British Government in 
 1845, under Captain Trotter ; but it proved a 
 failure, and resulted in a melancholy loss of 
 life. Mr. Duncan, one of the survivors of the 
 expedition, made some additions to our geo- 
 graphical knowledge, between the Kawara and 
 the coast, by his journey to Adafoodiah, in 
 1845-6 ; but, in a second journey, in attempt- 
 ing to reach Timbuktu, he met with an un- 
 timely death 
 
 A much greater number of travelers havo 
 
la 
 
 Al'UlCA. 
 
 exploretl the region of the Nile, among the 
 most distinguished of whom are, Bruce, Brown, 
 Bunkhiirdt, Cailliaud, liuppell, llusseger, 
 Bcke, and the Egyptian expeditious up the 
 Nile. 
 
 Though tlie Dutch settlement in South 
 Africa was founded as earlv as 1G50, not much 
 information concerning the interior of that 
 portion of the continent was gained till the 
 end of the 18th century, when a series of jour- 
 neys was commenced by Sparrmann, and fol- 
 lowed up by Yaillant, Barrow, Trotter, Somcr- 
 ville, Lichtenstcin, Bruchell, Campbell, Thom- 
 son, Smith, Alexander, and Harris. 
 
 Within the last five or six years, a number 
 of important discoveries have been made in 
 various parts of Inner Africa, and the present 
 time bids fair to outstrip all previous periods 
 in lifting the veil that has hitherto enveloped 
 Central Africa in impenetrable mystery. Rev. 
 Messrs. Krapf and llebmann, missionaries of 
 the Church Missionary Society in East Africa, 
 have explored the interior, from that direction, 
 with untiring perseverance, since 1847. (See 
 Africa, Eastern.) At several hundred miles 
 from the coast, they have discovered high 
 mountains, covered with perpetual snow, which 
 is the more interesting from the position being 
 so near the equator. 
 
 In South Africa, also, missionaries have 
 been pioneers of geographical discovery. (See 
 Africa, Soxdhern.) 
 
 A caravan, of native traders recently made 
 a journey across the whole continent, from the 
 coast of Zanzibar to Benguela, in which they 
 crossed Nyassa, the great lake of South Africa. 
 
 To the north of the equator, the mission to 
 Lake Tsad, originated by Mr. James Richard- 
 son, promises to exceed in importance all pre- 
 vious expeditions to Central Africa. He left 
 England in 1849, for the purpose of concluding 
 commercial treaties with the chiefs of Northern 
 Africa, as far as Lake Tsad, by which legiti- 
 mate trade might be extended, and the slave 
 trade abolished. Drs. Barth and Overweg ac- 
 companied Mr. Richardson, for the purpose of 
 making scientific observations. The party 
 started from Tripoli, March 23, 1850, after 
 having minutely surveyed the mountainous 
 region to the south of that place. The first 
 year, they successfully crossed the whole of 
 Sahara, in a very circuitous westerly direction, 
 and thus explored a great portion of Northern 
 Africa, which had never before been \nsited by 
 any European. Their route from Ghat to 
 Kano, leading them through the powerful 
 kingdom of Air, or Asben, was highly inter- 
 esting. The second year, they explored a 
 large portion of Sudan, in different directions. 
 Messrs. Barth and Overweg reached Kuka, the 
 capital of Bornu, but Richardson died on the 
 way, in March, 1851. Dr. Barth penetrated 
 350 miles to the south, as far as Yola, the 
 capital of the kingdom of Adamana; and 
 Overweg navigated Lake Tsad in a boat, 
 
 which had been conveyed in pieces across the 
 Sahara, on the backs of camels. In September, 
 1851, they set out together on a journey to 
 Borgu, a mountainous country lying to tlie 
 northeast of Lake Tsad, about midway be- 
 tween it and Egypt. Tliey went in company 
 with a sheikh of Bornu, with a large army ; 
 but the party were attacked and put to flight, 
 and Barth and Overweg saved their lives by a 
 quick retreat. Returning to Kuka, they set 
 out to the southward, accompanied by about 
 10,000 horse and the same number of foot sol- 
 diers. They ^plored the country beyond 
 Mandara, the farthest point of Denliam's jour- 
 ney, and found it to be one of great fertility. 
 The third year. Dr. Barth made a journey to 
 Maseiia, the capital of the kingdom of Bagher- 
 mi, to the southeast of Lake Tsad ; while 
 Overweg traveled in a southwesterly direction, 
 and reached within 150 miles of Yacoba, the 
 gr^at town of the Fellatalis. But on his re- 
 turn to Kuka, he was seized with a fever, of 
 which he died after a short illness. Dr. Barth 
 was about to start for Timbuktu ; and a rein- 
 forcement, consisting of Dr. Vogel and two 
 sappers and miners, was sent to his assistance 
 on the 20th of February, 1852. The latest in- 
 formation obtained by these expeditions is 
 summed up in a valuable article in the new 
 edition of the Encyclopedia Britannica, now in 
 course of publication, of which free use has 
 been made in the preparation of this article. 
 
 Topography. — The physical configuration of 
 Africa may be considered under two heads : 
 the great Plain of Northern Africa ; and the 
 great Table Lands, with their mountain ranges 
 and groups, of Central and Southern Africa. 
 The great Plain comprises the Sahara, the 
 Lake Tsad region, and the valley of the Lower 
 Nile. The Sahara is by no means a plain 
 throughout, but for the greater part it rises 
 into table-lands, interspersed with mountain 
 groups of 6,000 feet elevation, and probably 
 more ; and the term plain can only be applied 
 to it in a general way, to distinguish it from 
 the more elevated region to the south. The 
 Sahara has often been pictured as an immense 
 and monotonous expanse of sand. But no- 
 thing could be more erroneous, as the greatest 
 variety exists in the physical configuration of 
 its surface, as well as in its geological features. 
 The western half is surrounded by a broad belt 
 of plains and depressions, the central parts 
 being formed by extensive table-lands and 
 mountainous regions, comprising the kingdom 
 of Air or Asben, lately explored by Messrs. 
 Richardson, Barth, and Overweg. The route 
 of Dr. Barth, in his journey to Agadez, the 
 capital of that kingdom, was girded by moun- 
 tain ranges and groups, rising to 3,000 and 
 4,000 feet ; and Mount Dogem, the culminating 
 point in that region, is even between 4,000 
 and 5,000 feet high. The eastern portion of 
 Sahara appears for the greater part to be a 
 considerably elevated table-land, comprising 
 
AFRIUA. 
 
 13 
 
 the mountainous country of Borgu. The nar- 
 row valley of the Nile forms the eastern boun- 
 dary of the Great Desert. 
 
 To the south of the Desert, Africa may be 
 considered as one connected mass of elevated 
 land, rising more or less above the sea, and 
 comprising the most extensive table-lands, as 
 well as high mountain groups and chains. 
 Commencing at the Cape of Good Hope, and 
 traversing the three terraces which rise one 
 above another from the coast, an almost unin- 
 terrupted table-land has recently been ascer- 
 tained to extend to the north for at least 1,000 
 geographical miles. The southern portion is 
 formed by the basin of the Orange river, fol- 
 lowed by the desert of Kalihari, which is 
 again succeeded by the basin of the river 
 Sesheke and Lake Ngami, with many other 
 rivers, traversing a region which presents a 
 dead level, its elevation at Lake Ngami being 
 2,825 feet. That region probably is in con- 
 nection with the basin of Zambezi. Farther 
 north the ground ascends to the line of water- 
 parting with the basins of Congo river and 
 Lake Nyassa. In this region are supposed to 
 be the celebrated Mountains of the Moon, run- 
 ning, not as formerly supposed, east and west, 
 but having a direction from north to south, 
 and running parallel to the eastern coast, 
 forming the southern continuation of the Abys- 
 sinian table-land. It is a remarkable feature 
 that the most elevated peaks rise on the outer 
 edge of this table-land, and even between it 
 and the coast, as isolated cones. One of them, 
 the Abba Yared, rises out of the northern edge 
 of the Abyssinian table-land to the height of 
 15,000 feet. The system of the Atlas moun- 
 tains is quite distinct from either of these two 
 divisions. It occupies the northwestern region 
 of Africa, consisting of several ranges, and its 
 highest summits are said to reach an altitude 
 of 15,000 feet 
 
 Rivers. — Africa is emphatically a land of 
 deserts, resulting, of course, in a scarcity of 
 rivers. Many of the smaller rivers and lakes, 
 and not a few of the larger ones, present only 
 dry water-courses during certain periods of 
 the year. Even Lake Tsad is said at times to 
 be nearly dry. With the rains, floods are 
 prevalent all over the country, even in the 
 desert, as the recent observations made by the 
 expedition under Richardson testify. That 
 traveler relates that, when on the borders of 
 the kingdom of Air, on the 30th of Sep. 1850, 
 rain had been seen in the south, and black 
 clouds covering the zone in the heavens ; and 
 Iq an hour afterwards, the cry was heard in 
 the encampment, " The wady is coming !" 
 Going out to look, he saw a white sheet of 
 foam advancing from the south, between the 
 trees of the valley. In ten minutes after, a 
 river of water came pouring along, and spread 
 all around them, converting the place of their 
 encampment into an isle of the valley. The 
 current in its deepest part was powerful, ca- 
 
 pable of carrying away sheep and cattle, and 
 uprooting trees. 
 
 Africa is chiefly drained into the Atlantic 
 ocean and its branch the Mediterranean Sea, 
 the river system of the Indian Ocean being 
 very inconsiderable. The Nile is the oldest of 
 historical rivers, and afforded the only means of 
 subsistence to the earliest civilized people on 
 earth ; but the origin or source of the river it- 
 self remains an enigma to this day. The area 
 drained by this river is at least 2,000,000 
 English square miles. 
 
 The river Senegal has a length of 1,100 
 miles, and has its sources in the same elevated 
 tract of land as those of the Kawara. The 
 Gambia and Rio Grande, south of the Sene- 
 gal, are also considerable rivers. The Ka- 
 wara, or Niger, is, next to the Nile, the largest 
 of the African rivers. Its sources, like that of 
 the Nile, are still unknown. It appears to be 
 the Ahmar, which is said to rise in a high group 
 of mountains east of Sierra Leone. As far 
 as Timbuktu it is called Joliba, and its course 
 is pretty well known ; but from that place to 
 the Yaouri, it is as yet unexplored. Thence 
 down to the mouth, it was first traced by Lan- 
 der. It is there called Kawara, in general, 
 though it has several names in the different 
 languages of the tribes which inhabit its 
 shores. The Tshadda is its principal tribu- 
 tary, extending far into the heart of Inner 
 Africa. It was recently explored by Dr. Earth 
 in its upper course, where it flows through the 
 kingdom of Adamana. The length of the 
 Kawara is about 3,000 miles, and it drains 
 about 1,500,000 square miles. 
 
 South of the equator, the west coast receives 
 many large rivers which are yet unexplored. 
 Such are the Zaire or Congo, the Goanza, and 
 the Nourse, or Cunene. The Swakop has re- 
 cently been explored by Mr. Galton. The 
 Orange river is about 1,000 miles in length. 
 Its head streams are the Ki, Garicp or Vaal, 
 and the New Gariep, consisting of the Cale- 
 don and Cradock. The Orange river drains 
 350,000 English square miles. 
 
 Rounding the southern extremity of Africa, 
 and proceeding up its eastern coast, the Lim- 
 popo is the first river requiring notice. Its 
 head streams and middle course are known, but 
 whether it empties into the sea at Delagoa Bay, 
 or at Inhambane, is a matter of doubt. The 
 Zambezi is the largest river of the eastern 
 coasts. Its sources are not known but it is 
 probable that its head-streams are the Ses- 
 heke and Chobe, recently discovered by Messrs. 
 Livingston and Oswell. 
 
 Africa possesses several considerable lakes, 
 of which lake Tsad is probably the largest and 
 most interesting. It contains about 100 
 islands of large size, scattered over the lake. 
 They are wooded and inhabited by the Biddu- 
 ma, a Pagan tribe, who have remained inde- 
 pendent of the Mohammedan nations living 
 around the lake. Dr. Overweg was received 
 
14 
 
 APRICA. 
 
 by them with great kindness, on his landing 
 upon tlicir islands. I^ake Tsad hius no connec- 
 tion with the Kawara or the Nile, but forms 
 an inland rt^ceptacle receiving the waters of 
 some of the most distant regions of Inner 
 Africa. 
 
 Lake Fittri forms a distinct hydrographical 
 system between it and the Nile, with which 
 it has no connection. Lake Tsana or Dem- 
 bea is the chief lake within the basin of the 
 Nile, 80 far as known. It is situated on the 
 table-land of Abyssinia, at an elevation of 
 6,110 feet. Other lakes on the Abyssinian 
 table-lands are Zuwai, Haik, and Ashangi. 
 
 In Inner Africa, a number of considerable 
 lakes are reportetl to exist, but only two are 
 known with any degree of certainty, south of 
 the equator, the Nyassa and Ngami. Nyassa, 
 the great lake or sea in 10^ south latitude, is 
 as yet only approximately laid down on the 
 maps, according to native information, and 
 whether it be the feeder of a large river, or 
 merely a recipient lake, is unknown. Another 
 lake in that region has recently been reported 
 by the natives to Dr. Krapf, as being situated 
 west of Mombas, beyond Kilimanjaro, and in 
 the country of Uniamezi. (For a description 
 of Ngami, see SoiUh Africa.) These are fresh 
 water lakes ; besides which there are numerous 
 small salt and natron lakes in various parts of 
 A frica. 
 
 Climate. — " The general climate of Africa," 
 says Malte Brun, " is that of the torrid zone ; 
 more than three-fourths of the continent being 
 situated between the tropics. The great mass 
 of heated air, incumbent in these hot regions, 
 has ready access to its northern and southern 
 parts, situated in the zones called temperate, so 
 that the portions of them adjoining the tropics 
 are equally torrid with the regions actually 
 inter-tropical. Nothing really moderates the 
 heat and dryness of the African climate, except 
 the annual rains, the sea breezes, and the eleva- 
 tion of the surface. These three circumstances 
 are sometimes united in a greater degree under 
 the equator than in the temperate zones. It is 
 not impossible that in the centre of Africa, 
 there may be lofty table lands, like those of 
 Quito, or valleys like the valley of Cashmere, 
 where, as in those two happy regions, spring 
 holds an eternal reign." Recent discoveries in 
 the interior of Africa favor this hypothesis. 
 Rev. Dr. Krapf, in his recent missionary tours 
 in north-eastern Africa, has discovered ranges 
 of mountains covered with perpetual snow. 
 
 The greatest heat is not found under the 
 equator, but to the north of it, in consequence 
 of the northern portion being of greater ex- 
 tent than the southern, and of less elevation. 
 The highest temperature is found throughout 
 the Sahara, particularly in its eastern portions, 
 toward the Red Sea. In upper Egypt and Nu- 
 bia, eggs may be baked in the hot sands, and 
 the saying of the Arabs is, " In Nubia the soil 
 is like fire, and the wind like a flame." The 
 
 regions along the Atlantic and Mediterranean 
 coasts are rendered more temperate by the in- 
 fluence of the sea. To the south of the Great 
 Desert, where the country becomes more ele- 
 vated, the temperature decreases. The inten- 
 sity of radiation, and its influence upon the 
 temperature, are very great in Northern Africa. 
 While in the day time, the soil of the Sahara 
 rapidly absorbs the solar rays, during the night 
 it cools also so rapidly that often ice is formed. 
 Africa is not much under the influence of regu- 
 lar winds, except the monsoons of the Indian 
 ocean. From hurricanes, Africa is nearly ex- 
 empt, except its southern extremity, to which 
 at times the Mauritius hm*ricanes extend. 
 Northern Africa is exposed to the hot winds 
 and storms from the Sahara, which are called 
 in Egypt Khamsin ; in the Mediterranean, 
 Sirocco ; and in the western regions, Har mat- 
 tan. Extreme heat and dryness are the char- 
 acteristics of these winds, which, raising the 
 sand, filling the air with dust, and prodigiously 
 favoring the powers of evaporation, are often 
 fatal to the vegetable and animal creation in 
 the regions visited by them. 
 
 The People. — From the shores of the Medi- 
 terranean to about latitude 20^ north, the pop- 
 ulation of Africa consists largely of tribes 
 not originally native to the soil, but Arabs 
 and Turks, planted by conquest, with a consi- 
 derable number of Jews, the children of the 
 dispersion ; and the recently introduced French. 
 The Berbers of the Atlas region, the Tuaricks 
 and Tibbus of the Sahara, and the Copts of 
 Egypt may be viewed as descendants of the 
 primitive stock, while those to whom the 
 general name of 3Ioors is applied are perhaps 
 of mixed descent, native and foreign. From 
 the latitude stated, to Cape Colony, tribes 
 commonly classed together under the title of 
 the Ethiopic or negro family are found, though 
 many depart very widely from the physiogno- 
 my of the negro, which is most apparent in 
 the natives of the gold coast. In the Cape 
 Colony, and on its borders, the Hottentots 
 form a distinct variety, closely resembling the 
 Mongolian races of Asia. (See Hottentots.) 
 
 The Copts, (pron. Ckoobt or Ckibt,) are re- 
 garded as the descendants of the ancient 
 Egyptians. They do not now compose more 
 than one-sixth of the population of Egypt, not 
 exceeding in number 150,000, of which 10,000 
 reside at Cau-o. In some parts of Upper 
 Egypt there are villages exclusively inhabited 
 by Copts. Their complexion is somewhat dark- 
 er than that of the Arabs, their foreheads flat, 
 hair soft and woolly, nose short but not flat, 
 mouth wide, lips thick, eyes large, high cheek 
 bones. They are not an unmixed race, their 
 ancestors, in the earlier ages of Christianity, 
 having intermarried with the Greeks, Nubians, 
 and Abyssinians. (See Copts.) 
 
 The countries above Egypt are inhabited by 
 two tribes of people resembling each other in 
 their physical characters, but of distinct Ian 
 
AFRICA. 
 
 u 
 
 guage and origin ; the Eastern Nubians, and 
 Nubians of tiie Nile, the latter called Berber- 
 ines. 
 
 The country of the Nubians is limited on the 
 west by that of the Tibbus, who are spread 
 over the eastern portions of the Sahara, as far 
 as Ferran and Lake Tsad. Their color is not 
 uniform, some being quite black, and others 
 copper-colored. They are a pastoral people, 
 and live in square villages, a portion of which 
 is devoted to their flocks. 
 
 " All that is not Arabic in the kingdom of 
 Marocco," says Dr. Latham, " in the French 
 provinces of Algeria, in Tunis, Tripoli, and 
 Ferran, is Berber. The language also of the 
 ancient Cyrenaica, indeed the whole country 
 bordering on the Mediterranean, between Tri- 
 poli and Egypt, is Berber. The extinct lan- 
 guage of the Canary Isles was Berber ; and, 
 finally, the language of Sahara is Berber. The 
 Berber languages are essentially inland lan- 
 guages. As a general rule, the Arabic is the 
 language for the whole of the sea coast, from the 
 Delta of the Nile to the straits of Gibraltar, 
 and from the straits of Gibraltar to the mouth 
 of the Senegal. The Berber nation is one of 
 great antiquity, and from the times of the ear- 
 liest history, has been spread over the same ex- 
 tent of country as at present. 
 
 The Moors inhabit large portions of the em- 
 pire of Marocco, and are spread all along the 
 Mediterranean coast. They are a mixed race, 
 grafted upon the ancient Mauritanian stock, 
 whence their name. After the conquest of 
 Africa by the Arabs, they became mixed with 
 their conquerors. Having conquered Spain, in 
 their turn, they intermarried with the natives 
 of that country, from which they were after- 
 wards driven back to Mauritania. They are a 
 handsome people, having a resemblance to the 
 European. They are also intellectual and not 
 altogether unlettered ; but they are cruel, 
 bloodthirsty, and revengeful. Their religion is 
 Mohammedan. They generally lead a settled 
 life as merchants, mechanics, or agriculturists, 
 but there are many wandering tribes ; and 
 along the coast of Marocco, they carry on 
 piracy with armed boats. 
 
 At two different periods, separated from each 
 other by perhaps a thousand years, Africa was 
 invaded by Arabic tribes, which took a lasting 
 possession of the districts they conquered, and 
 whose descendants form no inconsiderable por- 
 tion of the population of North and Central 
 Africa, while their language has superseded all 
 others as that of civilization and religion. The 
 second of these was effected by the first succes- 
 sors of Mohammed, who conquered Egypt, and 
 subsequently the whole north of Africa, as far 
 as the shores of the Atlantic, in the course of 
 the first century of the Hegeira, or the seventh 
 of the Christian era. 
 
 After the destruction of Jerusalem, the 
 Jews spread rapidly over all the Roman pos- 
 sessions in Africa ; and when Philip II. drove 
 
 them from Spain, thousands of families took 
 refuge on the opposite shores of Africa. They 
 are now numerous in all the northern towns. 
 They live in great degradation, except in Al- 
 giers, where the French have given them free- 
 dom and independence. 
 
 Ever since the conquest of Egypt by Sultan 
 Selim, Turks have settled in the north of 
 Africa, and as they were the rulers of the 
 country, the Turkish became the language of 
 the government ; but they can hardly be con- 
 sidered as permanent settlers. 
 
 For a description of the Abyssinians, see 
 Abyssinia. The Ethiopian race comprehends 
 by far the greater number of African nations, 
 extending over the whole of the middle and 
 South of Africa, except its southernmost pro- 
 jection towards the Cape of Good Hope. A 
 line drawn from the mouth of the Senegal in 
 the west to Cape Jerdaffur in the east, forms 
 its northern limits ; but this race are not all 
 negroes. The latter are only one of its numer- 
 ous offshoots. The principal negro nations are 
 the Mandingoe.% who are numerous and power- 
 ful, and partially civilized, in Senegambia, and 
 farther inland, around the head waters of the 
 Kawara, where they have established a great 
 many kingdoms and smaller sovereignties. 
 They are black, with a mixture of yellow, and 
 their hair is completely woolly. The iVolofs or 
 Yolofs, whose language is totally different from 
 those of their neighbors, are the handsomest 
 and blackest of all negroes, although they live 
 at a greater distance from the equator than 
 most of the other black tribes, their principal 
 dwelling-places being between the Senegal and 
 the Gambia, along the coast of the Atlantic. 
 
 The Foulahs or Fellatahs occupy the central 
 parts of Sudan. Their color is black, with a 
 striking copper hue. They are one of th.Q 
 most remarkable nations in Africa, very in- 
 dustrious, live in commodious and clean habita- 
 tions, and are mostly Mohammedans. Of the 
 principal nations of Guinea, among whom the 
 negro type is particularly distinct, especially 
 around the Bight of Benin, are the Feloofs, 
 near Caramanca, very black yet handsome, 
 and the Ashanti, who surpass all their neigh- 
 bors in civilization. In South Guinea we 
 meet with three principal nations, the Con- 
 go, the Abunda, and the Benguela negro&s. 
 The next great branch of the Ethiopic race 
 comprehends the Galla, who occupy an im- 
 mense tract in Eastern Africa, from Abyssinia 
 as far as the inland Portuguese possessions in 
 Mozambique, to the south of the equator. An 
 interesting tribe of them, the Somali, have 
 lately been brought to the knowledge of Eu- 
 ropeans, a widely scattered nation, who lead a 
 pastoral life on the uplands, and also nearer to. 
 the coast of the Indian Ocean from Cape Jer- 
 daffur southward to a considerable distance. 
 They seem to be of a mild and peaceful dis- 
 position, while the other Galla tribes are a 
 warlike race. The Kafifres, Hottentots, and. 
 
16 
 
 AFRICA- 
 
 Bashmcn, occupy the irrcatcr portion of South- 
 ern A fricii. (iii'ii Kaffrcs ixnd Hottentots.) The 
 island of Madaf^iLscur is inhabitcd.by a race of 
 Malay ori^^in, exhibiting traces of Negro and 
 Arabic mixture. 
 
 The toUil population of Africa is vaguely 
 eetimated, according to the most recent re- 
 searches, at 100,000,000. 
 
 Lanirmges. — The Arabic is the language of 
 the North, and the Mandingo is used from 
 the Senegal to the Niger. But the languages 
 or dialects of the negroes are as multifarious 
 as the nations. According to Seetzcn, the 
 languages of Africa must amount to 100 or 
 1.50 ; but some trace them to a common origin. 
 Rev. John Leighton Wilson, late missionary 
 of the American Board at the Gaboon, in an 
 article in the Bibliotheca Sacra for November, 
 1847, says : " Too little is yet known of the 
 numerous and diversified dialects of Africa, to 
 determine with certainty the precise number of 
 families which they form. 
 
 " In the northern half of the continent, or 
 that portion of it inhabited by the black 
 races, the number of languages is very great, 
 the different families of which show very little, 
 if any, affinity for each other ; while in the 
 southern division, one great family prevails 
 over nearly the whole of it, even to the Cape 
 of Good Hope." 
 
 Government. — ^Most forms of government 
 may be found in Africa. Despotism, however, 
 in its worst and most offensive shape, is by far 
 the most prevalent ; and, with few exceptions, 
 slavery and anarchy reign triumphant through- 
 out Africa. 
 
 Industry, in Africa, is at the lowest ebb. 
 The Africans have, of themselves, generally 
 made little progrc^ in the arts. All the more 
 laborious occupations are imposed on the fe- 
 males. In some parts, the wives of kings and 
 petty princes till the land for the support of 
 their lords. The Mandingoes, however, have 
 made considerable advances in civilization, and 
 the Ovas of Madagascar are an industrious 
 people. 
 
 Commerce. — An extensive intercourse has 
 been carried on, from the remotest antiquity, 
 between very distant parts of the continent, in 
 consequence of the natural adaptation of the 
 products of one part to supply the wants of 
 another. Thus Northern Africa supplies Cen- 
 tral Africa with dates and salt, and receives, in 
 return, gold dust, ivory, gums, palm-oil, feath- 
 ers and slaves. Egypt and the towns in the 
 Barbary States have always been the great 
 seats of trade, which is carried on wholly by 
 'Caravans, numbering from 500 to 2000 camels. 
 
 Slave Trade. — Slaves have been the staple 
 article of export from the African coast ; and 
 •in some years as many as 110,000 or 120,000 
 have been carried across the Atlantic. In or- 
 der to supply slaves for the market, a wholo 
 'Sale system of brigandage and robbery has 
 ft)ecn organized in many extensive districts, the 
 
 people being hunted down like game by the 
 petty princes, and by the Mohammedans, who 
 affect to believe that they are entitled to cap- 
 ture and sell the " idolators," to serve as beasts 
 of burden in another hemisphere. 
 
 The sufferings and misery which result from 
 this traffic, the merciless waste of human life, 
 and the " horrors of the middle passage," no 
 tongue can tell, no imagination can paint ; yet 
 these are but the lesser evils of this horrid 
 trade. Its deepest wound has been inflicted 
 upon the moral and social condition of the 
 country. It has undermined all the deep foun- 
 dations of society, dissolved the bonds of friend- 
 ly alliance between adjoining villages, destroy- 
 ed the peace of families, and extinguished the 
 last remaining spark of parental affection. 
 Even the mother will sell her own child for a 
 few strings of beads or a gallon of rum. It is 
 gratifying, however, to know that the efforts 
 of the British government, together with the 
 influence of the American colony at Liberia, 
 have nearly extinguished the inhuman traffic 
 irpon a large extent of the western and south- 
 eastern coasts, where it has heretofore been car- 
 ried on to the greatest extent. 
 
 The traffic has also received a considerable 
 check on the eastern coast, in consequence of a 
 treaty for its suppression between the British 
 Government and the Imaum of Muscat. 
 
 Religion. — Christianity is professed in Abys- 
 sinia, and in Egypt by the Copts, but its doc- 
 trines and precepts are little understood or 
 obeyed. Mohammedanism prevails in all the 
 northern countries ; but the native mind gen- 
 erally is surrendered to superstitions of indefi- 
 nite number and character. The labors of 
 Christian missionaries have, however, especially 
 in South Africa, done much towards turnijig 
 the benighted Africans from idols to the living 
 God. (See Western and Southern Africa.) 
 
 The social condition of Africa is, of course, 
 extremely depressed. The lowest form of polyg- 
 amy is diffused all over Africa ; and although 
 forbidden in Abyssinia, the marriage tie is there 
 so slight as hardly to have any sensible influ- 
 ence ; and morals are in a state of almost total 
 dissolution. Cannibalism formerly prevailed 
 to a frightful extent throughout Africa ; and 
 though checked by the motive of providing 
 slaves for market, is still found to exist in some 
 parts. Among some considerable nations, the 
 exposure of children, and the slaughter of 
 those that are deformed or maimed, is not only 
 tolerated but enforced. In some parts human 
 blood is mixed with the mortar used in the 
 construction of temples. McCvllocJCs Geogra- 
 phy; Malte Brun; McQueen's Geographical 
 Survey; Cmdor's Dictimmry of Geography ; 
 and especially the Encyclopedia Britannica. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 Africa, notwithstanding its terrible climate, 
 bad government and petty wars, forms one of 
 the most interesting missionary fields in the 
 
AFRICA, EASTERN. 
 
 17 
 
 world. Its native inhabitants, though deeply 
 degraded, are found peculiarly susceptible to 
 religious influences. And wherever the gospel 
 has been preached long enough to penetrate 
 through their ignorance and superstition, it 
 has generally found a congenial soil. No mis- 
 sions in the world have been more successful, 
 in proportion to the means employed, than 
 those of the Moravians and the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, in South Africa, and the 
 Church Missionary Society in West Africa. 
 
 The way is opening up for the extension of 
 Christian missions into the interior ; and so 
 much preparatory work has already been ac- 
 complished, in reducing the languages to writ- 
 ing and translating the Scriptures, that we 
 may look for rapid changes, and confidently 
 hope that the day is not distant when a large 
 portion of the continent will be Christianized. 
 The results of the missionary work in Africa 
 will be seen by the following 
 
 TABULAE YIEW. 
 
 Western Africa. 
 
 Ohorch Missionary Society 
 
 Wesleyan do 
 
 English Baptist do 
 
 German Miss. Societies 
 
 United Synod of Scotland 
 
 American Baptist Union 
 
 American Board 
 
 American Prot. Episcopal 
 
 American Methodist Epis 
 
 Amer. Miss. Association.' 
 
 Amer. Presb. Board 
 
 Southern Bap . Convention 
 
 Total West Africa 
 
 Southern Afrki-v. 
 
 United Brethren. 
 
 Ix)ndon Missionary Society 
 
 Wesleyan do 
 
 Free Church of Scotland, and \ 
 
 United Scotch Presbyterian Church J 
 
 French Protestant Mssions 
 
 American Board 
 
 Rhenish Missionary Society 
 
 Norwegian do 
 
 Berlin do 
 
 Total South Africa 
 
 Afkican Islands. — London Miss. Soc. 
 East Africa. — Church Miss. Soc 
 
 Total Africa 
 
 
 § 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 a a 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 1^ 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 05 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 •a 
 
 3 
 
 en 
 
 1 
 
 Scholars or 
 Persons un 
 der Instruc 
 tion. 
 
 R 
 
 22 
 
 116 
 
 24 
 
 79 
 
 23 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
 2,976 
 
 69 
 
 5822 
 
 .S 
 
 12 
 
 27 
 
 22 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 6,608 
 
 48 
 
 3919 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 118 
 
 7 
 
 450 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 58 
 
 
 3 
 
 16 
 
 10 
 
 fi 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 16 
 
 1 
 
 46 
 
 
 3 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 22 
 
 5 
 
 70 
 
 
 11 
 
 26 
 
 22 
 
 4 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 101 
 
 11 
 
 213 
 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1100 
 
 
 200 
 
 
 3 
 
 14 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 32 
 
 2 
 
 100 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 15 
 
 15 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 114 
 
 7 
 
 179 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 13 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 600 
 
 11 
 
 400 
 
 20 
 
 93 
 
 279 
 
 127 
 
 100 
 
 53 
 
 3 
 
 29 
 
 56 
 
 11,687 
 
 162 
 
 11,457 
 
 .S 
 
 8 
 
 29 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 1882 
 
 
 6935 
 
 fi 
 
 28 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 4301 
 
 60 
 
 3883 
 
 5 
 
 44 
 
 46 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4206 
 
 
 7877 
 
 2 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 109 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 15 
 
 14 
 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 
 1283 
 
 12 
 
 310 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 38 
 
 29 
 
 9 
 
 13 
 
 
 15 
 
 8 
 
 166 
 
 11 
 
 155 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 26 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1604 
 
 
 760 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 833 
 
 
 170 
 
 24 
 
 139 
 
 223 
 
 63 
 
 9 
 
 35 
 
 |15 
 
 41 
 
 14,384 
 
 83 
 
 20,090 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1170 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 236 
 
 513 
 
 195 
 
 112 
 
 88 
 
 
 44 
 
 97 
 
 27,241 
 
 245 
 
 31,547 
 
 Owing to the manner in which some of the 
 societies make their returns, it was not possi- 
 ble to make the foregoing table perfect in all 
 its parts, as several items are not reported at 
 all, by many of them. But few of the socie- 
 ties give any account of the female members 
 of the missions ; and but few give any distinct 
 intimation whether their laborers are clergy- 
 men or not. But on several points of chief 
 importance they are complete, viz. : the whole 
 number of laborers, communicants, and schol- 
 ars in school. These items will indicate 
 very clearly the state of the work. Deducting 
 the females and native helpers, it appears 
 that there are less than four hundred Euro- 
 pean and American missionary laborers, on 
 the whole continent of Africa ; which will give 
 270,000 to each laborer. This presents an ap- 
 palling aspect of the destitution of that dark, 
 benighted land. On the other hand we have 
 a mosi encouraging and cheering view of the 
 2 
 
 success of missionary labor in this portion of 
 the vineyard of the Lord, which fally sustains 
 what we have said of the susceptibility of 
 the African character to religious impression ; 
 for we have but little less than eighty converts 
 to each missionary laborer on the continent 
 and islands of Africa. The missions are gen- 
 erally represented as in a prosperous condition, 
 except that in some portions of South Africa, 
 they have suffered from the Kafire war, and in 
 Madagascar, the converts still suffer persecu- 
 tion. These statistics can be corrected at any 
 future time on referring to the January and 
 February numbers of the London Missionary 
 Eegister for the current year. 
 
 AFRICA, Eastern. East Africa, according 
 to McCulloch, comprises the region to the north 
 of the Zambezi river, round by the sea coast, 
 to the confines of Abyssinia. The Encyclo- 
 pedia Britannica makes it extend from Natal 
 to the Red Sea, (which would take in a per- 
 
18 
 
 A1«RICA, EASTERN. 
 
 tioii of the limits we have allotted to Southern 
 Africa.) comprisiiif? Sofala, Moztimbiqiie, Zan- 
 zibar, and the Somali country. But little is 
 known of that region beyond the coast. The 
 Sofala country, extending: from Dela<,^oa Bay 
 to the Zambezi river, is Hat, sandy, and marshy, 
 gradually ascending towards the interior. The 
 soil is very fertile and produces chiefly rice. 
 In the interior gold and other metals and pre- 
 cious stones are found. 
 
 Mozambi([uc extends from the Zambezi to 
 Cape Delgoda, and is similar in its natural fea- 
 tures to the Sofala coast. The country is in- 
 habited by the large and powerful tribe of the 
 Macuas. The principal river is the Zambezi. 
 
 Zanzibar or Sawahili coast extends from 
 Cape Delgoda to the river Jub, near the equa- 
 tor. The coast is generally low, and has out 
 few bays or harbors. Its northern portion is 
 rendered dangerous by a line of coral reefs. 
 The region possesses a great number of rivers, 
 but none of the first magnitude. The climate 
 is similar to that of other tropical coasts of 
 Africa, hot and unhealthy. In some portions, 
 however, the elevated ground, which is more 
 temperate and healthful, approach^ near to 
 the coast. 
 
 The island of Zanzibar is the residence of 
 the Imaum of Muscat, (whose dominion ex- 
 tends a considerable distance along the coast,) 
 and is the seat of an extensive commerce. 
 Mombas, on a small island close to the main 
 shore, possesses the finest harbor on the coast. 
 
 The Somali comprises the eastern horn of 
 Africa, from the equator northward to the Bay 
 of Tudjurra, near the Red Sea. The coast is 
 generally bold and rocky ; and the extensive 
 region it encloses, presents a slightly ascending 
 plain, traversed by large and fertile valleys. 
 Along the Arabian gulf, the coast is very 
 abrupt, and girded with a range of mountains, 
 the highest of which, Jebel Ahl, reaches an 
 elevation of 6,500 feet. The Somali country 
 is famous for its aromatic productions. The 
 inhabitants belong to the Galla tribe. — En- 
 cyclopedia Britannica ; Harris's Highlands of 
 Ethiopia; 7 he Nile and its Tributaries; Mc- 
 CuUoch's Geography ; African Repository, Jan. 
 1850. 
 
 Church Missionary Society. — The Abys- 
 sinian Mission, which was commenced in 1829, 
 was, in 1841, changed into the East African 
 Mission, embracing a much wider range than 
 was originally contemplated by it. (See Abys- 
 sinia.) Mr. Krapf \vrites from Ankobar, in 
 1841, that the people of Shoa manifested a 
 great desire for the word of God, and that 
 they besieged his house from morning till even- 
 ing, to procure copies of the Scriptures. He 
 had translated the four Gospels into the Galla 
 language. 
 
 During the year 1842, the Mission was inter- 
 rupted by various causes ; but a treaty of 
 
 friendship and commerce was concluded be« 
 tween the British Government and the King 
 of Shoa, which provides protection for British 
 subjects in the territories of Shoa. Mr. 
 Krapf undertook a difficult and dangerous 
 journey to the capital of Abyssinia, in order 
 to ascertain what encouragement the new 
 Abuna would give to missionary operations in 
 Abyssinia. He afterwards proceeded to Alex- 
 andria to meet Messrs. Isenberg and Miihlie- 
 sen, who were on their way to join him. 
 
 About this time there arose a fierce dispute 
 between the more enlightened party and the 
 monks, in the Shoa province, respecting some 
 frivolous points of speculation ; and the monks 
 prevailed with the king, by threatening excom- 
 munication, which gave the more ignorant and 
 bigoted party the ascendancy. Mr. Krapf be- 
 fore leaving expressed a fear that their influ- 
 ence might prove unfavorable to the mission. 
 And, on his return, with the brethren, he found 
 that the king had prohibited their retm-n, and 
 all efforts to induce the chiefs of the countries 
 lying between the sea and Abyssinia to let 
 them pass were unavailing. 
 
 Messrs. Isenberg and Muhliesen proceeded 
 to Abyssinia by the way of Massowah, to ascer- 
 tain the disposition of the new Abuna, and 
 see whether there might not be an opening for 
 the renewal of the mission at the Capital. 
 But in this they were disappointed. They 
 found the enemies of the mission in the ascen- 
 dancy ; the Abuna gave them no encourage- 
 ment ; and the chief Oubea ordered them to 
 quit Abyssinia. They had no alternative but 
 to return to Cairo. But during their stay in 
 Abyssinia, they were able to dispose of more 
 than two thousand copies of the Scriptures. 
 
 Dr. Krapf, meantime, visited Aden, in order to 
 concert a plan for reaching the Galla tribes in 
 Eastern Africa, from the Indian Ocean ; and 
 from that place he wrote a letter to the com- 
 mittee, asking their approval of the plan, 
 which he afterwards received ; but while waltz- 
 ing for it he went to Massowah, and learning 
 the difficulties encountered by his associates, he 
 remained on the frontier of Tigre, and em- 
 ployed himself in the distribution of the Scrip- 
 tures. 
 
 After receiving the approval of the com- 
 mittee, Dr. and Mrs. Krapf sailed for Zanzibar, 
 but were driven back and exposed to great 
 danger ; and after a very trying voyage they 
 arrived at Zanzibar, Jan. 7, 1844. There he 
 was kindly received by the Imaum of Muscat, 
 to whom they were introduced by the British 
 Consul, The Imaum wrote a letter to the 
 governors on the coast, after this manner ; 
 " This note is given in favor of Dr. Krapf, the 
 German, a good man, who desires to convert 
 the world to God. Behave ye well toward 
 him, and render him services every where." 
 After remaining there about two months, he 
 proceeded on his way, touching at several 
 places, and arrived at Mombas, a small island 
 
AFRICA, EASTERN. 
 
 19 
 
 at the mouth of the Tiiaca river, about 4° south 
 latitude, which he selected as the site of the 
 mission. After his arrival there, Mrs. Krapf 
 was called home, some of her last words being, 
 " Do uot praise me in your account of my last 
 hours ; but tell our friends that the Saviour has 
 pardoned me, a poor miserable sinner." She 
 had endured great hardships, in the tossings to 
 and fro to which they had been subjected for 
 months previous. 
 
 After this afflictive bereavement, Dr. Krapf 
 devoted himself with energy and zeal to the 
 work of his mission, giving his first attention 
 t-o the study of the languages spoken in those 
 regions. He, however, made several excur- 
 sions among the Wonica and Wakamba tribes 
 on the continent, declaring to them the blessed 
 gospel, and surveying the ground Math refer- 
 ence to future operations. He found the natives 
 extremely degraded, indulging to a fearful ex- 
 tent in habits of intoxication, and frequently 
 selling their children to obtain the means of 
 indulgence. He also applied himself to the 
 work of translation ; and three years after the 
 establishment of the mission, he had translated 
 Genesis, Acts, Komans, Galatians, Peter, and 
 1 John into the Sooahelee language ; and 
 Luke and John into both Sooahelee and Won- 
 ica. He had also compiled a dictionary of 
 10,000 words of the Sooahelee, Wonica and 
 Wakamba languages. In 1846, Eev. J. Eebb- 
 man was appointed to this mission. Dr. Krapf 
 had suffered from severe and repeated attacks of 
 fever, which greatly impaired his constitution. 
 He had, however, continued his missionary 
 tours, in which he gathered much valuable 
 information respecting the interior tribes, 
 laboring to preach the gospel every where ; 
 and wherever he could make himself under- 
 stood, the natives Vould repeat what they 
 heard to others, and thus spread the message 
 of salvation. 
 
 On the arrival of Mr. Rebbman, immediate 
 arrangements were made for commencing a 
 mission among the Wonicas, and New Rabbai 
 was selected as the location ; which is situated 
 about four miles to the west of the extremity 
 of the bay, at a considerable elevation, com- 
 manding an extensive view. The people, with 
 one mind, cheerfully gave their consent to the 
 establishment of the mission, assuring the mis- 
 sionaries of their friendship and protection. 
 Both Dr. K. and Mr. R. were laid aside some 
 weeks with the fever ; and before they had 
 fully recovered, they set out in great weakness, 
 for the new mission. Dr. K. saying, " The mis- 
 sion MUST be commenced ; and should death 
 or life result to me, I can now 'have no regard 
 to sickness whatever." They found this place 
 more salubrious than Mombas ; and though 
 encountering many difficulties, yet met with 
 some encouragement. Although of a peace- 
 able disposition, the Wonicas are deeply sunk 
 in ignorance, indifference, superstition, and 
 sensuality. In Sept. 1847, after laboring 13 
 
 months, they had established a small school and 
 erected a small cottage for worship, which 
 would hold 60 or 80 persons, but only a few had 
 been induced to attend. These indefatigable 
 missionaries continued to make exploring tours 
 in the interior, and in one of their excursions 
 to the north, they came in sight of the Galla 
 country, so long the object of desire on the 
 part of Dr. Krapf. Their journeys to the 
 west opened a new country, of which the phys- 
 ical _ character and the disposition of the in- 
 habitants present facilities for missionary labor 
 of the most encouraging kind. The Wakam- 
 bas, with whom the missionaries are in daily 
 intercourse, carry on a traffic with the main 
 body of their tribe, from 400 to 600 miles dis- 
 tant in the interior. Three groups of moun- 
 tains, 4,000 to 5,000 feet high, enclose the 
 Faita country, whose inhabitants are estimated 
 at 170,000 souls ; and Dr. Krapf thinks there 
 are no insurmountable obstacles in the way of 
 establishing a mission among them. In 1848, 
 Mr. Rebbman explored the country beyond 
 Faita, called Jagga, travelling on foot amidst 
 a thorny jungle, infested by wild beasts, for 
 seven days. But having ascended the second 
 range of mountains, he felt as if walking in 
 the Jura mountains, in the Canton of Basle, 
 so cool was the air, so beautiful the scenery. 
 
 It will be recollected, that in 1843, the mis- 
 sionaries were forcibly driven from Abyssinia, 
 through the influence of the emissaries of 
 Rome. Since that time the Jesuits themselves 
 have been obliged to leave the country. In 
 June, 1849, Mr. Lieder writes that the young 
 king of Shoa, Beshaheh Ouered, had written to 
 the Queen of Great Brjtain, desiring a renew- 
 al of the friendly intercourse that had existed 
 between the British Government and his fa- 
 ther, and to Dr. Krapf, requesting his return. 
 The young king, only 14 years of age, had re- 
 nounced the heterodox notions of liis father, 
 and delivered hundreds of persons whom the 
 late king had thrown into prison, because they 
 would not embrace his views. He had also 
 taken the Metropolitan, Amba Salame, (see 
 Abyssinia,) as his spiritual guide. Amba 
 Salame himself, had also written to Mr. Lieder 
 for two good teachers, as he was anxious to 
 open a school of a superior character, in Gon- 
 dar. And the king of Abyssinia and the 
 Abuna had both written to Bishop Gobat, 
 proposing that he should undertake the super- 
 inteudance of the Abyssinian Convent at Je- 
 rusalem ; in consequence of which the Com- 
 mittee determined to establish a mission at Je- 
 rusalem, to provide, among other objects, for 
 the instruction of Abyssinian pilgrims. 
 
 Dr. Krapf and his associates, in their reports 
 for 1849, speak discouragingly of their pros- 
 pects at the new station of B,ahhsd-Empia, 
 owing to the depths of ignorance and super- 
 stition to which the people were reduced. 
 Their minds are enslaved by sorcery ; and 
 many cruel customs, such as putting to death 
 
20 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 all ilefDrmed chiKlroii, prevail amon^ them ; 
 yet the missionuriw huil bwn encouraj^ed by 
 the awakening of a i)Oor cripple. This year 
 the mission recciveu a reiutbrcemcut ; but 
 one of the newly arrived missionaries was cut 
 off by intiaramatory fever soon after their ar- 
 rival. 
 
 They had continued to prosecute the ex- 
 ploring tours, showing wonderful openings for 
 the entrance of the Gospel into the interior. 
 In the mean time, Dr. Krapf prosecuted the 
 study of tlie languages, and the translation of 
 the Scriptures, with zeal and success. He has 
 come to the conclusion that, from the Galla 
 boundary down to the Cape of Good Hope, 
 there is one family of languages, which he calls 
 the Suaheli stock ; which stock, he thinks, 
 from specimens he has received of West Afri- 
 can languages, commences on the southern 
 bank of the Gaboon River. 
 
 Tlie report of the mission for 1850 is en- 
 couraging. The poor cripple noticed the pre- 
 vious year had been baptized and died in hope ; 
 and two others had made an open profession 
 of their belief in Christianity,/one of whom 
 was the father of a family, in independent cir- 
 cumstances, and the other a learned Moham- 
 medan, the Cadi of his village, who gave up 
 his office, and the gains attached to it, for the 
 Gospel's sake, and placed himself under the 
 instruction of the missionaries. 
 
 The missionary tours have been continued ; 
 and Dr. Krapf gives the following view of the 
 great results to which his discoveries may lead : 
 
 " When once the time has fully come that 
 the Hamitic race shall be made acquainted 
 with the Gospel, and be received into the fa- 
 mily of God's children on earth, the high 
 roads of Africa will take every observer by 
 surprise. It will then be manifested that the 
 facilities of communication on the African 
 continent, are not inferior to those of Europe, 
 Asia and America. God's Providence has 
 certainly paved the way for the speedy ac- 
 complishment of his sublime designs. The 
 Niger will carry the messengers of peace to 
 the various states of Nigritia, while the 
 Tshadda, together with the Congo, will convey 
 them to the western centre of Africa, toward 
 the northern tribes of Uniamesi. The differ- 
 ent branches of the Nile will lead the mission- 
 aries toward the same centre from the north 
 and north-east, while the Jub and the Dana 
 will bring them in from East Africa ; and the 
 Kiliraani will usher them in from the south, 
 The sources of thi'se great rivers are not so dis- 
 tant from each other as our present geograph- 
 ical knowledge would lead us to believe. Shall 
 we propose, therefore, and undertake the form 
 ation of a mission chain, linking together the 
 eastern and western coasts of Africa? Or, 
 shall we follow up the water-courses of the 
 continent, by establishing missions at the 
 sources and estuaries of those gi-eat rivers ^ 
 The Tshadda, the Congo, the Nile and the Kill 
 
 mani rivers, take their rise either from the 
 great lake in Uniamesi, or very near it. And 
 if the communication with Central Africa shall 
 be found so simple and so easy, why should we 
 question the speedy spread of Christianity and 
 Christian civilization in Africa?" 
 
 In these tours, the missionaries obtained 
 much valuable geographical information ; and 
 among other objects of interest, they saw a 
 range of mountains, the tops of which were 
 covered with perpetual snow. After the com- 
 pletion of these tours, Dr. Krapf visited Eng- 
 land, in order to print his translations, and to 
 confer with the Society upon future plans for 
 the East African Missicm. He also visited 
 Germany, where he selected three pious me- 
 chanics to accompany him to Africa, and one 
 of the students at Basle, who was ordained by 
 the Bishop of London. Dr. Krapf having 
 fully explained to the .Committee his views 
 upon the East African Mission, he returned at 
 the beginning of 1851, with the view of e&- 
 tablishing new stations, retaining Rabbai as 
 a starting point on the coast. He returned 
 accordingly, with his new associates ; and, after 
 their arrival at Rabbai, he began preparations 
 for going with Mr. Pfefiferle to Usambara, to 
 redeem a pledge given to King Kmeri, of es- 
 tablishing a mission among his people. But 
 Mr. Pfefierle soon after died of nervous fever, 
 the fever of the country, and Dr. K. prosecuted 
 the journey alone, with some native servants, 
 who deserted him in the hour of danger. He 
 was attacked by robbers on the way, and 
 obliged to give up the object, and to return to 
 the coast. But while attempting to reach the 
 river Dana, he was again attacked, and came 
 near losing his life. And, after a fatiguing 
 journey, suffering from hunger and thirst, and 
 amid many perils, he at length reached the sta- 
 tion. But, with indomitable resolution, he 
 still pursues his object of establishing a chain 
 of missions across the continent ; but thinks 
 they cannot at once penetrate far into the in- 
 terior, but that they must first occupy a nearer 
 post. 
 
 Dr. Krapf afterwards visited Usambara, and 
 King Kmeri received him well, and desired 
 that the mission might be established on a 
 mountain thirty or forty miles from the 
 estuary of the river Pangani ; and offered 
 to order a considerable number of his sub- 
 jects to build houses and cultivate the land 
 for him ; and also to afford them protection 
 and give them an opportunity to carry on their 
 labors. A wide door for usefulness here pre- 
 sented itself, but at the latest dates, he had not 
 entered upon the work. 
 
 AFRICA, Southern : The region south of 
 Cape Negro, on the west, and of the river 
 Zambezi, on the east, embracing, within its 
 limits, the English colony of the Cape of Good 
 Hope. 
 
 Topop-aphy. — ^The country consists of three 
 successive plateaus, increasing in elevation ac- 
 
iTJNIVERSITr] 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 21 
 
 cording to their distance from tlie sea, and sep- 
 arated from each other by as many chains of 
 mountains. The first of these is called the 
 Lange Kloof, or Long Pass ; and between it 
 and the sea is an irregular belt of fertile land, 
 well watered with small streams and frequent 
 rains, from 20 to 60 miles in breadth. It is 
 well wooded with forest trees, and from its 
 proximity to the ocean has a mild climate. 
 The next chain is the Great Black Mountain, 
 (Groote Zwaite Bergen.) It is more lofty and 
 rugged than the first, consisting, in many 
 places, of double and treble ranges, and some- 
 times rising to the height of 4,000 feet. Be- 
 tween these two is a belt of about the same 
 area as that outside the first, composed in some 
 parts of barren hills, in others, of naked 
 arid plains of clay, called Karroo, interspersed 
 with fertile and well-watered patches of land. 
 The third chain of mountains, called the Niew- 
 veldt Gebirgte, unites toward the east, with the 
 Schneeuw-bergen (Snow Mountain,) the high- 
 est in South Africa, its most elevated peak be- 
 ing 10,000 feet above the sea ; and covered 
 with perpetual snow. Between this and the 
 second range is an arid, desert plain, nearly 
 300 miles in length by 80 to 100 in width, 
 called the Great Karroo. This is not a sandy 
 plain, like the great desert, but ot sort of table- 
 land, thinly covered with an argillaceous soil, 
 impregnated with iron, upon a substratum of 
 rock. It is about 3,000 feet above the level 
 of the sea. The beds of numberless rivulets, in 
 which water is rarely to be found, cross it like 
 veins, in a thousand directions. Mr. Moffat 
 says, the entire country, extending in some 
 places hundreds of miles on each side of the 
 Orange river, and from where it empties into 
 the Atlantic to beyond the 24th degree of east 
 longitude, appears to have the curse of G-ilboa 
 upon it. It is rare that rains to any ex- 
 tent or quantity fall in those regions. Ex- 
 treme drought continues for years together. 
 The fountains are few and precarious, and some 
 of them have dried up altogether. 
 
 From the west coast the country ascends, 
 in a similar manner towards the interior, by 
 successive plateaus, separated by mountain 
 chains. The Roggeveldt (Rye-field,) the lofti- 
 est of these, rises to more than 5,000 feet above 
 the level of the sea. To the north of all, and 
 near the boundary line of the territory, there 
 is a chain of mountains 9,000 feet in height. 
 The whole tract of country to the north is 
 much more sandy, barren and thinly inhabited 
 than that to the east, which, as it recedes from 
 the Cape, seems to increase in fertility and 
 beauty. 
 
 The third great chain of mountains forms 
 the watershed, or division between the streams 
 which flow north, into the country of the Bos- 
 jesmans or Bushmen, and those which run 
 southwest, through the colony. On its northern 
 side, rise the tributaries of the Orange river, 
 and on its south the Great Doom, (Thorn.) 
 
 Gamba, Camtoos, Sunday, Great Fish, and other 
 rivers. On the' west coast, the principal 
 streams are the Great Berg, (Mountain,) and 
 Olifant or Elephant river. Both are naviga- 
 ble for small craft about twenty miles. On 
 the south coast are the Brecde or Broad river, 
 the Gauritz, Camtoos, ^unday and Great Fish. 
 The Broad river is navigable for small craft 
 about 30 miles. Considering the extent of the 
 coast, good harbors are few. Saldanha Bay, 
 Cape Town, is the best. 
 
 The Great Lake.— On the 1st of June, 1849, 
 Rev. David Livingston, son-in-law of Mr. 
 Mafiat,of Kolobeng, more than 200 miles N. 
 E. by N. from Kuruman, proceeded on a tour 
 of discovery to Lake Ngami, 300 miles N. W. 
 from Kolobeng. But by the circuitous route 
 which he pursued, he traveled about 600 
 miles. After proceeding about 300 miles 
 through the desert of Kalihari, the party ' 
 struck on a magnificent river, the Zouga, and 
 following it to its source, it proved to be the 
 Great Lake. The banks of this river are beau- 
 tiful, covered with gigantic trees, some of them 
 bearing fruit. Two of the Boabob variety 
 measured 70 to 76 feet in circumference. The 
 higher they ascended the broader the river be- 
 came. It has a periodical rise of water, sup- 
 posed to be occasioned by the melting of the 
 snow on the mountains. Its waters are clear 
 and soft, and it is said to be connected with 
 other large rivers, running from the north. 
 Another party visited this lake in 1852, and 
 ascertained its length to be sixty-five, and its 
 average breadth 12 miles. It is at an eleva- 
 tion of 2,825 feet above the sea. Mr. Living- 
 ston found a tribe of natives on the banks of 
 the Zouga, called Bakoba or Bayciye, in whom 
 he was deeply interested. They are a totally 
 distinct race from the Bechuanas, their com- 
 plexion being darker, and they speaking a dif- 
 ferent language. He admired their frank, 
 manly bearing. They listened to the state- 
 ments which he made respecting the Divine 
 Word, and seemed to understand them. 
 They were found dwelling around the lake, 
 and on the banks of all the rivers to the north, 
 which seemed to open a highway capable of 
 being quickly traversed by boats. Thus is the 
 way opening in every direction, for the en- 
 trance of the gospel into that dark region. 
 
 In 1851, Messrs. Livingston and Orwell 
 again started for the north, but in a more east- 
 erly direction, when they reached the latitude 
 of 17^ 25' S., and discovered the Ohobe and 
 Sesheke, deep and constantly flowing rivers, 
 supposed to be the feeders of the Zambezi. 
 The Zouga was ascertained to be absorbed in 
 sands and salt pans. The country through 
 which the former rivers flow, is level and very 
 fertile. 
 
 Capt. Vardon explored the region north- 
 east of Kolobeng, tracing the Limpopo river 
 to a considerable distance. In 1851, Mr. Gal 
 ton explored a part of South Africa from 
 
92 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 Walfish Bay, on the west coast as far as lat. 
 17° 58' 8. and 21° E. long., accurately deter- 
 mining the whole region. 
 
 In 1852, a journey was made by Mr. Plant, 
 from Natal to Delagoa Bay, in which he dis- 
 covered that St. Lucia Bay leads into an ex- 
 tensive inlet, hitherto unknown. 
 
 Climate— The climate is in general temper- 
 ate and healthy, but unsteady, disagreeable, 
 and not well suited to agriculture. In the 
 south-western districts, the rains in the cold 
 season are profuse, but of rare occurrence in 
 the summer. In the more northerly districts, 
 sometimes no rain falls for years ; which, how- 
 ever, Mr. Moffat attributes to the universal 
 destruction of the forests. Generally, through- 
 out the colony, the rain, when it does come, 
 pours down in torrents, occasioning great dam- 
 age. Sometimes the southeast wind is a spe- 
 cies of Simoom, excessively hot, and loaded 
 with an impalpable sand. The mean tempera- 
 ture of the Cape is about 67 1-2° Fahr., the 
 coldest being 57° and the hottest 79^. Yet 
 Mr. Moffat thinks the climate of the colony 
 perhaps the healthiest to be found in any 
 part of the world. With reference to the cli- 
 mate of the whole of Southern Africa, Mr. 
 Moffat says, " It varies from that in which 
 thunder-storms and tornadoes shake the moun- 
 tains, and the scorching rays of an almost ver- 
 tical sun produce the mirage, to that which is 
 salubrious and mild, within the boundaries of 
 the colony along Kaffre-land to the fruitful 
 and well-watered plains of the Zulu country, 
 in the vicinity of Port Natal ; while the more 
 mountainous and elevated regions are visited 
 by keen frosts and heavy falls of snow." 
 
 Native Population. — AVhen the Cape was 
 first discovered by Bartholomew Diaz, and 
 when it was taken possession of by the Dutch 
 in 1662, the whole of what is now designated 
 as the colony was inhabited by the Hottentots 
 proper. 
 
 The Kaffres proper live beyond the fish river, 
 on the eastern boundary of the colony. They 
 form one tribe of the great Bcchuana family. 
 Their national character is bold and warlike. 
 Their country is bounded by the ocean on the 
 south, and a range of mountains on the north, 
 and beyond them lie the Amopomlo and Zulu 
 tribes, belonging to the same family. North 
 of Kaffre-land, between the Winterberg moun- 
 tains and the higher branches of the Yellow 
 river, lies the country inhabited by the Basu- 
 tos, a tribe of Bechuanas. Beyond the Basu- 
 tos to the north of Orange river, lie the other 
 Bechuana tribes, whose numbers and extent 
 are yet unknown. 
 
 The country from the limits of the desert to 
 the west coast is called Great Namaqualand, 
 and contains a thin population of the Hotten- 
 tot race. To the north of the Namaquas, lie the 
 Damara tribes, of whom comparatively little 
 is known, except that they approximate, in 
 physical ajjpearance and color, to the negroes 
 
 on the west coast. These tribes inhabit a 
 country extending from the tropic of Capri- 
 corn to the Cape of Good Hope, and from the 
 Atlantic to the shore of the Indian ocean. 
 
 The tribes which have been mentioned arc 
 those which have been the objects of mission- 
 ary labor. (See Cape Colony, Kaffres, Hot- 
 tentots.) — 3IcCul loch's Geography ; Mojfafs 
 Labois and Scenes in Southern Africa, C/iav. L; 
 Encyclopedia Britannica. 
 
 Moravian Mission. — Missionary operations 
 were first commenced in South Africa, by the 
 United Brethren. In 1737, George Schmidt 
 arrived at Cape Town, a free passage having 
 been granted him by the Dutch East India 
 Company. His object was to make known 
 the gospel to the Hottentots; and he soon 
 commenced his labors at Bavian's Kloof, after- 
 wards called Genadendal, (Vale of Grace.) 
 Though obliged to preach through an inter- 
 preter, his self-denying efforts were followed by 
 considerable success. The Hottentots regarded 
 him with sentiments of unfeigned love and 
 admiration ; and in the course of a few years 
 a number of them received his message as the 
 truth of God. Finding himself, however, 
 much embarrassed in his operations by the in- 
 terference of 'the colonial government, he re- 
 paired to Europe in 1744 to obtain a removal 
 of his grievances. But he not only failed to 
 secure this important object ; the Dutch East 
 India Company even refused to sanction his 
 return to the scene of his labors ; and for fifty 
 years the harvest which he had begun to gath- 
 er, was left without a reaper. 
 
 At length, however, in July, 1792, Marsveld, 
 Schwinn and Kuhnel were permitted to search 
 for the few sheep, who had been left so long 
 without a shepherd at Genadendal. They found 
 a part of the wall of the old mission-house 
 standing ; and in the garden attached to it 
 were some of the fruit-trees which Schmidt 
 had planted. An aged female whom he had 
 baptized, and who still retained a remem- 
 brance of her beloved teacher, rejoiced exceed- 
 ingly when she was told that the new mission- 
 aries were his brethren. The Hottentots, — 
 some of whom recollected their old pastor, while 
 many had heard of his brief but beneficent ca- 
 reer, — rallied around his successors ; and before 
 the end of 1793, seven persons were baptized. 
 Great opposition, however was encountered, 
 from the Dutch farmers, or boers, as they arc 
 called, who, thinking the instruction of the 
 Hottentots likely to prove injurious to their 
 temporal interests, manifested their hostility 
 by poisoning the minds of the natives, and by 
 threatening violence against the missionaries. 
 They also preferred charges against them, to 
 the colonial government, thereby securing or- 
 ders for embarrassing their proceedings. By 
 these means the mission was for a long time 
 kept in a state of constant alarm. In one 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 23 
 
 instance, a numerous body of the colonists rose 
 in arms, to obtain a redress of alleged griev- 
 ances, among which was the attempt to evan- 
 gelize the Hottentots ; in consequence of which, 
 the missionaries were, at one time, driven from 
 their post. 
 
 Mr. Schwinn, while traveling to Cape 
 Town, on one occasion, was refused either lodg- 
 ing or refreshment by the colonists, and was 
 compelled to ride all night, attended by a sin- 
 gle Hottentot, through a desert country infest- 
 ed with runaway slaves. Through all these 
 trials, hoAvever, the native converts stood by 
 their teachers, in the greatest extremities. 
 
 But in 1795, the colony was taken posses- 
 sion of by the British Government, and the 
 mission at Bavian's-Kloof, was taken under 
 protection by the new government. After this, 
 they enjoyed more quietness and peace, a con- 
 siderable number of new people came to them, 
 and the word of God was owned and blessed 
 to the conversion of souls. A Church was 
 built, and before the close of the year, twenty 
 adult converts were baptized. Still their ene- 
 mies were not quiet. In February, 1796, some 
 of the neighboring farmers assembled a hundred 
 armed men, with the design of murdering the 
 missionaries, and destroying their settlement ; 
 but the plot was discovered by the govern- 
 ment, and prevented. Afterwards the boers 
 undertook to starve the missionaries and their 
 people, by refusing them provisions, which oc- 
 casioned much sufiering. But the Lord turned 
 the hearts of some of the worst of their perse- 
 cutors, who acknowledged the utility of their 
 labors, and sent a wagon load of corn to the 
 settlement, at a lower price than it would have 
 been sold elsewhere. 
 
 The mission now began to be visited by per- 
 sons of influence at Cape Town, who bore hon- 
 orable testimony to its good effects ; and 
 among others, Mr. Borrow, who gives the fol- 
 lowing account of what he saw : " Early on 
 Sunday morning, I was awakened by some of 
 the finest voices I had ever heard, and looking 
 out, saw a group of Hottentot women neatly 
 dressed in calico, sitting on the ground, and 
 chanting their morning hymn. The mission- 
 aries were middle-aged men, plain in their 
 dress, meek and humble in deportment, but in- 
 telligent and lively in conversation, zealous in 
 their cause, but free from bigotry. Every 
 thing partook of their characteristic neatness 
 and simplicity. Their church was a neat plain 
 building, and their mill the best in the colony. 
 Their garden produced abundance of vege- 
 tables. Almost every thing had been done by 
 the work of their hands, their society requiring 
 every one to understand some trade. They have 
 upwards of six hundred Hottentots, and their 
 numbers are daily increasing. These live in 
 huts dispersed over the valley, to each of 
 which is attached a piece of land, and their 
 housas and gardens are very neat and comfort- 
 able ; and 
 
 occupations. On Sunday they all regularly 
 attended public worship, and it is astonishing 
 how neat and clean they appear at church. 
 Their deportment was truly devout. The dis- 
 course of the missionary was short, pathetic, 
 and full of good sense. The women sung in a 
 plaintive and affecting style, and their voices 
 were sweet and harmonious." 
 
 In 1798, a reinforcement arrived from Eu- 
 rope, and the old church was converted into 
 dwellings, and a new one built, capable of 
 holding 1,500 persons, the settlement having 
 increased to 1,230. Eighty-four were baptized 
 during this year. 
 
 In the summer of 1800, an epidemic fever 
 raged for some months, carrying off sometimes 
 eight or ten a day. To meet the occasion an ar- 
 rangement was made by which each missiona- 
 ry and his wife visited a certain district every 
 week, making a circuit of four or five miles, at 
 great peril to their own lives. They found the 
 poor people lying in the greatest misery, upon 
 nothing but a sheep-skin spread on the bare 
 ground, without medical aid, and often with- 
 out food ; the convalescent tormented with 
 hunger, and the poor, naked children crying 
 for food. When they spoke to them, in those 
 circumstances, of the love of Jesus, they were 
 cheered by seeing them listen with eagerness, 
 seeming to forget all their sufferings, and re- 
 signing themselves to the will of the Lord, ex- 
 pressing their confident hope that he M'^ould 
 receive them to himself, and extolling his good- 
 ness, in sending them teachers to instruct them 
 in the knowledge of their Eedeemer. 
 
 By this time, (1801,) the fame of Bavian's- 
 Kloof had spread far and wide, and the natives 
 came in companies, some of them the distance 
 of a six weeks' journey. One poor woman 
 came, who said she understood Bavian's-Kloof 
 to be an asylum for poor sinners like herself 
 who had become tired of the service of Satan, 
 and were desirous of finding rest for their 
 souls. Peace being concluded between the 
 English and Dutch, the colony was restored to 
 the latter, and the new governor proved friend- 
 ly to the mission, and one of the missionaries 
 was appointed chaplain to the colony. At the 
 suggestion of Gen. Jansen, the Governor, the 
 name of the place was changed to Gnadenthal, 
 or Genadendal, which means GracevaJe. 
 
 In January, 1806, the colony was again con 
 quered by the British ; but the government 
 continued friendly to the mission. In 1807, a 
 new settlement was formed at Groenckloof, or 
 Green-glen, in the high road between Cape 
 Town and Saldanha Bay, and Messrs. Schmitt 
 and Kohrhammer removed there with their 
 wives in 1808. They soon gathered a settlo- 
 ment around them, and their labors were 
 blessed by the Holy Spirit, and many were 
 turned to the Lord, giving evidence of repent- 
 ance and faith. The following remarks of one 
 of these converts is a specimen of the feelings 
 generally expressed, giving evidence of the 
 
 /f^>0-^ Ot tW¥ 
 
■Jl 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 geuuiuencss of the work of grace in the heart : 
 " I se^'ui to be surrouiuled by my sins, like a 
 man sUvmling iu the midst of the tire, and am 
 ready to be consumed by the anguish of my 
 spirit ; but in this situation, I stretch out my 
 arms toward heaven, and exclaim, Lord Jesus, 
 sufllr some droi)s of thy heavenly grace to 
 quench the Uame which threatens to destroy 
 me." 
 
 The mission still continued to enjoy the pro- 
 tection of government and the blessing of God, 
 and Uie converts made good progress iu their 
 knowledge of divine truth. The heathen from 
 a distance were led in a remarkable manner, 
 as by some unseen influence on their minds, to 
 flock to the mission settlements. One Avoman 
 siiid that her father one day called his family 
 around him and said, " My dear children, 
 though you are Hottentots and despised by 
 men, yet })ehave well ; for I believe that God 
 will, at some future time, send us teachers from 
 a distant country. I may not live to see that 
 day, but you will hereafter know that I have 
 told you the truth. As soon as you hear that 
 such persons have arrived, hasten to them, and 
 obey their instructions." Soon after the old 
 man's death, the teachers arrived, and as soon 
 as the daughter heard of it, she went to them, 
 was instructed in the way of salvation, and 
 after some time, was received into the church. 
 
 In 1815, Rev. C. J. Latrobe, Secretary of 
 the United Brethren's Society, visited the mis- 
 sion, accompanied by four male and two female 
 missionaries. This visit was productive of 
 muc;h good ; and while there, he made an ex- 
 pedition into the interior, accompanied by 
 three of the missionaries, and the surveyor of 
 the government, and selected a site for a new 
 station, on the banks of Witte Revier, near the 
 frontiei*3 of KaSraria, which was afterwards 
 called Shiloli. 
 
 In December of this year, the inhabitants 
 of Genadendal were suddenly involved in dis- 
 tress, by the descent of a torrent from the 
 mountains, which overwhelmed the greater 
 part of their premises with destructive violence, 
 and occasioned great damage. But when the 
 missionaries spoke to the poor Hottentots of 
 the damage done to their grounds, they replied, 
 that they had cause to thank the Lord for his 
 mercy, that notwithstanding their great de- 
 merit, they had been chastised with so much 
 lenity. 
 
 In 1817, the Governor of the colony, Jjord 
 Somerset, visited the mission at Genadendal, 
 and after expressing the highest gratification 
 at what he saw, presented them with three 
 hundred dollars for the use of the school. 
 
 On the 7th of April, 1818, Rev. H.Schmitt, 
 and his wife, with three single men ' and the 
 widow of Kohrhammer, commenced the mis- 
 sion at Shiloh, or Witte Revier, or White river, 
 Considerable numbers of natives began to at- 
 tend on their preaching, when they were in- 
 volved in the greatest calamities by a predar 
 
 tory excursion of the Koflres, which resultxid in 
 the loss of their cattle, and the murder of nine of 
 their Hottentots, and compelled tlie missiona- 
 ries to leave the station. On the 18th of May, 
 Mr. Hoftman visited Witte Revier, and found 
 the mission premises burnt, and everything 
 destroyed. But, in October, peace having 
 been concluded between the Kaftres and the 
 colonial government, the mission was resumed, 
 and rapid and interesting improvements were 
 effected at the new settlement. Rev. H. P. 
 Hallbeck says, in 1821 : " On the spot where, 
 two years ago, wc knelt in the iVceh track of 
 an elephant, and offered up our first prayer for 
 the prosperity of this establisliment, I now 
 found a beautiful orange tree, adorned at once 
 with ripe fruit and fragrant blossoms; and short- 
 ly after my arrival, I was invited to tea, under 
 the huge yellow tree, in the shade of which, but 
 lately, there were no assemblies but those of 
 wild buffaloes, elephants, and other dreaded 
 inhabitants of the desert." 
 
 The Tambookics were a wild race, on the 
 borders of the Kaffres ; and the missionaries 
 frequently complain of their intractableness, 
 indifference, superstition and insubordination ; 
 yet, from the fii'st, they appear to have 
 regarded the missionaries with esteem and ven- 
 eration, going to them for advice and for the 
 settlement of their difficulties ; and down to 
 the period of the breaking up of the station, 
 during the late Kaffre war, they have been 
 gradually improving, and assimilating more 
 and more to the habits and usages of Europe- 
 ans. The gospel appears also to have taken 
 effect upon the hearts of many of them. 
 
 In July, 1822, the settlements at Genadendal 
 and Groenckloof again suffered severely by 
 flood, involving them almost in complete ruin. 
 The buildings were damaged to the amount of 
 thousands of dollars, and the huts of the Hot- 
 tentots, together with their grounds, very much 
 injured. They also lost a great many cattle. 
 At the same time the settlement at Enon was 
 suffering severely from famine. 
 
 In 1826, the missionary writes : " A new 
 dwelling-house is building under the inspection 
 of a Hottentot mason of Genadendal, and I 
 am surprised at the neatness and accuracy with 
 which the work is done. This Hottentot has 
 not his equal, as a mason, either among the 
 Africans or Europeans, in the neighborhood. 
 He is an excellent character and a pattern of 
 sobriety, industry, and Clu'istian temper :" thus 
 showing the effect of missions in elevating the 
 general character of the heathen, and qualify- 
 ing them for the arts of civilized life. 
 
 In the year 1822, the Brethren were solicited 
 by government to undertake the religious in- 
 struction of a number of lepers, for whom the 
 Hospital Hemel-en-Aarde had been erected, in 
 a romantic situation, at the foot of a mountain 
 called the " Tower of Babel," near the sea. 
 Rev. J. P. Lietner, in obedience to this re- 
 quest, removed there witt his wife, in Decern- 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 25 
 
 ber of that year, and the poor patients were 
 overjoyed at their arrival. Some of them, who 
 had previously belonged to the church, at the 
 stations, exclaimed, " Now we know that Jesus 
 has heard our prayers and sent us help ; for we 
 have often entreated him to send our teachers 
 to us." Others who had spent their time in 
 fiddling and dancing, now broke their fiddles 
 and became serious and attentive hearers of 
 the word. This mission has been continued to 
 the present time ; but the hospital was subse- 
 quently removed to Eobbin's Island, that the 
 patients might enjoy the benefits of searbath- 
 ing, the missionaries accompanying them. 
 
 The year 1832 was signalized by an encour- 
 aging work of grace among the neighboring 
 farmers. They had begun to attend public 
 worship at the different stations, and in several 
 families a striking change had taken place. " In 
 view of this work, our churches have been 
 filled with attentive hearers, our schools with 
 crowds of children, and both churches and 
 schools have been filled with the hallowed pre- 
 sence of the Spirit of God, who has wrought 
 a marvelous change in the hearts of many, 
 both old and young. Wonderful indeed has 
 been the revival of religion around us, by 
 which the tone of society has been changed, 
 and the farmers, who in former years opposed 
 the work, are now brethren and fellow labor- 
 ers in Christ, sympathising in our sorrows, and 
 rejoicing in, and praying for our success." 
 
 The awakening among the farmers contin- 
 ued throughout the years 1833 and 1834, and 
 the converts among them remained steadfast 
 in the faith. One of the brethren called on a 
 woman who was dangerously ill, who grasped 
 his hand and with great fervency exclaimed, 
 " The Lord himself sent you to this land, in 
 order to be the means of saving my soul from 
 perdition : this I wanted to tell you before I 
 die." She informed him that she was awakened 
 by a conversation he had with her in 1829, 
 every word of which she remembered. Her 
 husband also had been awakened, and had es- 
 tablished family prayer. 
 
 There has continued to be, down to the pre- 
 sent time, a steady increase of numbers at the 
 several settlements, the natives sometimes 
 crowding in, in great numbers. There has, 
 also, been a steady improvement in industry, 
 agriculture, mechanical employments, houses, 
 dress and the arts of civilized life. And gen- 
 erally, every year, there has been evidence of 
 the special presence of the Holy Spirit in the 
 conversion of souls, and sometimes in large 
 numbers. The converts have for the most 
 part, given evidence of growth in grace, and 
 general improvement ; though almost every 
 year it has been necessary to cut off some 
 members for disorderly conduct. The general 
 influence of the gospel in elevating the charac- 
 ter of the natives, has been very marked and 
 striking. The Governor of the colony on visit- 
 ing Genadendal, in 1849, remarked to Eev. Mr. 
 
 Teutsch, "Tour missionaries have been the 
 greatest benefactors of the Hottentots ; and 
 you have conferred the greatest benefits on the 
 Colony." 
 
 Great eagerness has often been manifested 
 to hear the word. In 1849, Eev. Mr. Franke, 
 on visiting the out-stations of Gocdverwacht, 
 some distilnce from Groenckloof, remarks : 
 " Every time we visit that spot, our hearts are 
 gladdened. Every word appears to be, as it 
 were, devoured by those hungering souls, many 
 of whom come from a distance, some from 
 twelve to sixteen miles. They are constantly 
 making inquiries whether they will not soon 
 again be visited, and great joy is manifested 
 by the arrival of the missionary among them." 
 And often at the settlements the crowds are 
 too great to be accommodated in the churches, 
 and many stand outside. But at some of the 
 stations the settlements have grown so large 
 that many of the people have to go to an in- 
 convenient distance to find employment, which 
 frequently takes them for weeks from Christian 
 privileges. 
 
 Th^ missions generally have large farms 
 connected with each station ; and in several in- 
 stances the government has appropriated three 
 thousand acres of land to a station. Besides 
 this, they have various kinds of mechanical* 
 employments in operation. These arrange- 
 ments, while they furnish employment for the 
 natives, and instruction in agriculture, and the 
 mechanic arts, and afford a partial support to 
 the missions, occupy too much of the time and 
 attention of the missionaries in secular pur- 
 suits. 
 
 In 1839, at the request of the colonial gov- 
 ernment, a mission was commenced among the 
 Fingoes, who being delivered from a state of 
 bondage among the Kaffi'cs, found refuge to 
 the number of many thousands within the col- 
 ony. This new station was called Clarkson, 
 and the number of Fingoes residing there was 
 1,000. They had large herds of oxen, with 
 flocks of sheep and goats, and had settled every 
 place in the vicinity where the soil was capa- 
 ble of cultivation. The Fingoes received the 
 missionaries with open arms, and their atten- 
 tion to the word was truly edifying. Such 
 was their eagerness to hear, and the concourse 
 of people, that they were obliged to hold the 
 service in the open air ; and very soon the most 
 pleasing traces of the work of the Holy Spirit 
 on their hearts were visible. In April, 1840, 
 this became still more marked. At one of 
 their meetings, the Fingoes poured in from all 
 quarters, and great emotion was manifest 
 among them, which was shown in various 
 ways, some weeping for themselves and others 
 for their unbelieving parents and relations ; 
 and in the afternoon, there were few dry eyes 
 in the congregation. The blessing of God has 
 continued to follow the labors of his servants 
 at this station. The Fingoes are the relics of 
 several inland tribes, who have been expelled, 
 
96 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 and almost anuilulatcd by their more power- 
 ful ueiglibors. llicy took refuge M-ith the 
 Kaffres, who treated them as serfs ; and when 
 the colonial trooi)S overran a large portion of 
 KafTriiria, they put themselves under the pro- 
 tection of the British government. 
 
 The efiFect of the emancipation of the slaves, 
 or apprentices as they were then* called, was 
 greatly to increase the number of those who 
 flocked to the mission stations, and especially, 
 of the children in school. The missionaries at 
 Gcnadendal, speaking of the genuine effects of 
 the admission of the gospel into the heart, as 
 manifested by the converts, say, "And among 
 none more so than the lately enfranchised 
 slaves, whose growth in grace and knowledge 
 is most encouraging." In one instance, a man 
 came a distance of two or three hundred miles, 
 to obtain a missionary for a settlement of 
 emancipated slaves, and oflfered a salary of 
 $500, but was obliged to return wiUiout 
 one. 
 
 In the Diary of the station at Genadendal 
 for 1841, it is stated that " The emancipated 
 slaves seem animated by an uncommon desire 
 after spiritual blessings. There is a fire in 
 their hearts which has not been kindled by 
 , man, but by the Spirit of God. Freedom ap- 
 pears, by the divine blessing, to have awak- 
 ened in their minds the feeling that they are 
 beings who belong not to time only, but to 
 eternity. 'The chains,' said one of them, 
 * were on my limbs from infancy. I could not 
 come to the house of God, but was obliged to 
 live like a brute. Now, God has broken my 
 chains, and I am here ; but my heart is quite 
 blank ; I am old, and can understand but little. 
 My God ! let but some drops of heavenly dew 
 fall upon my barren soul !' " 
 
 The Kaflre wars have affected the missions 
 of the United Brethren less than those of some 
 other societies ; yet several of their missions 
 were disturbed, and some of them temporarily 
 abandoned in consequence. Companies were 
 drafted into the Colonial army from the differ- 
 ent stations, which took them away from the 
 means of grace. However, they were led 
 thereby to prize them more highly. They kept 
 up meetings at their camps, which were attend- 
 ed by the Dutch farmers, to their edification ; 
 and the British officers bore honorable testi- 
 mony to the good conduct of the Christian 
 Hottentots. Yet some of the young men re- 
 turned with habits of dissipation, which led to 
 their prompt discipline, and was the means of 
 introducing the temperance reformation among 
 the converts. Various measures were resorted 
 to, from time to time, to prevent the use of in- 
 toxicating liquors. The farmers were en- 
 treated not to furnish them to the Hottentots ; 
 but this failing, Bishop Hallbeck addressed an 
 earnest letter to the congregation at Groenc- 
 kloof on the subject, and a general resolution 
 was passed that no brandy, and but a limited 
 quantity of wine should be brought into the 
 
 settlement ; and on a petition from Genaden- 
 dal, the civil commissioner refused to license 
 the sale of liquors at that place. 
 
 Schools have been sustained from the begin- 
 ing at all the stations, with increasing interest ; 
 and especially the infant school is spoken of 
 from time to time, as producing a very happy 
 effect, not only upon the children, but the pa- 
 rents. 
 
 In 1837, an institution was opened at Gena- 
 dendal, for training Hottentot assistants, with 
 eleven boarding pupils ; and the foundation 
 stone was laid, on the first of November, for a 
 two-story building, 74 feet by 23. The first ex- 
 amination proved highly satisfactory, and those 
 present were not a little astonished to hear 
 several of the pupils explain everything with 
 fluency in English, when called on to solve va- 
 rious problems with the use of the globe. At 
 the latest dates, the whole number of pupils 
 admitted was 26, of whom 11 had received ap- 
 pointments as assistants ; two of whom, how- 
 ever, had been cast off for improper conduct. 
 There were, in 1851, ten pupils in the institu- 
 tion, five of whom were Kaffres. 
 
 After the mission at Genadendal had been 
 in operation a sufficient time to attract the at- 
 tention of the public, the frecpent visits of the 
 English at the station suggested the idea of 
 collecting a library of religious books for their 
 use, which was effected and proved a means of 
 much good to strangers, who, from time to 
 time, became temporary residents of the mis- 
 sion settlement. 
 
 The brethren early introduced the practice 
 of speaking individually to all the people, on 
 the concerns of the soul, which they found very 
 profitable. Mr. Lehman, describing such a 
 conversation, in 1841, says, " Many of those 
 with whom we conversed declared that they 
 had been led to us by a secret impulse ; and 
 that though at first they could not comprehend 
 much, they now began to understand and relish 
 the word, and could not be sufficiently thank- 
 ful for the grace of God." Their pious ex- 
 pressions, on these occasions, were often truly 
 edifying. An officer of the church, on recov- 
 ering from a severe illness, acknowledged his 
 backslidings, and said, " I was like a dying, 
 half-withered tree ; but my Saviour in mercy 
 remembered me and visited me with sickness. 
 As the gardener saws off the whole crown of 
 a withered tree, leaving only the stump to pro- 
 duce new and healthy branches, so has my 
 Saviour done for me." A Fingo captain said, 
 " My Saviour has not only purchased me with 
 his blood, but in the days of my ignorance and 
 misery, he showed himself an Almighty Ee- 
 deemer in me, and subdued my desperately 
 wicked heart. Now I sincerely believe he will 
 keep me so that the powers of darkness shall 
 not be able to separate me from him." An- 
 other, on being asked where true sanctification 
 was to be found, replied, " On Golgotha, at 
 the foot of the cross. When I am not there 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 27 
 
 in spirit, I have no power to resist sin." One 
 on being asked wherein meetness for heaven 
 consisted, replied, " It is his grace alone on 
 which I build. He forgives my sins, for the 
 sake of his precious blood. I come to him 
 daily as a beggar." One who had been a slave, 
 said her mistress used to reprove her, and she 
 laughed at her ; but haviug through God's 
 mercy, been convinced of sin, she had gone 
 and asked her pardon. "O, I am happy," 
 said another, " for I love my Saviour. He is 
 my treasure." 
 
 The genuineness of the work is also indi- 
 cated by the happy deaths of the converts, no- 
 tices of Avhich appear in the journals of the 
 missionaries every year. We mention, as spe- 
 cimens, two remarkable cases, in extreme 
 youth. Also one of advanced age. Char- 
 lotte Orzom, a youth of fifteen, died in Febru- 
 ary, 1841. She had been baptized the year 
 before. On being visited by a missionary, she 
 said, " Ah, I love the Lord with all my heart ! 
 With my whole heart, I cleave to thee, and 
 thou wilt come and dwell with me. This is 
 my consolation. In joy and pain, my soul de- 
 pends on thee with humble confidence, thou 
 rock of my salvation !" In two hours after- 
 wards, she was with the Lord. 
 
 Eev. Mr. Fritsch, writing from Elim, in 
 1849, says, " Of late, we have been much edi- 
 fied by the happy departure of several mem- 
 bers of our flock. We were particularly 
 struck with the happy frame of a young girl, 
 eleven years of age, who expressed the happi- 
 ness she enjoyed in the prospect of soon going 
 to her Saviour, and entreated all who were 
 present to remain faithful to Jesus, that she 
 might meet them in eternity. Her grand- 
 father, who soon followed her, after a short ill- 
 ness, said, " I suffer great pain, but what is it, 
 compared with the torments which my Saviour 
 endured for me on the cross ?" 
 
 In 1845, some new regulations were intro- 
 duced, among which were the annual contribu- 
 tion of a small sum by every able-bodied in- 
 habitant, toward the expenses of the place ; 
 the formation of a Missionary Association ; 
 for securing a, better attendance of the child- 
 ren at school ; and for the more effectual ban- 
 ishment of spirituous liquors. Missionary col- 
 lections had previously been taken up at some 
 of the stations. In 1843, the Fingoes at 
 ClarksoD, after an address from their mission- 
 ary, came forward with the utmost cheerful- 
 ness, the smallest offering being Is. 6rf. sterling, 
 and the largest Is. Gd. At Shiloh, the first 
 public contribution was made in 1844, when 
 young and old pressed to the boxes, with coun- 
 tenances beaming with joy. Showing that, 
 among the first effects of "the gospel is a bene- 
 volent desire, and a readiness to make sacrifices, 
 that others may participate in its benefits. 
 
 In 1849, the station at Shiloh, was destroyed 
 by the Kaffres. It was a frightful scene ; but 
 the missionaries escaped. Some of the people, 
 
 however, joined the rebels, but mostly by con- 
 straint. Many of the houses were burnt down, 
 and the church was changed into a castle. In 
 April, 1850, Messrs. Bonatz and Gysin visited 
 Shiloh, and found all the huts of the Kaffres 
 and Fingoes burnt ; some houses of the Hotten- 
 tots were standing, but occupied by the English 
 and Fingoes. The dwelling-house of the mis- 
 sionaries, with its blackened walls, bore wit- 
 ness of sad events. The Mamre and Goshen 
 stations have also been broken up by the war. 
 The following table presents the state of 
 the mission before these sad events. 
 
 Genadendal, ' 
 Groenckloof, - 
 Elim, - - . 
 Enon, - - - 
 Shiloh, - - 
 Clarkson, 
 Kobben Island, 
 
 Total, 
 
 911 
 558 
 369 
 120 
 152 
 
 949 
 345 
 
 92 
 
 2210 1882 1731 
 
 536 
 212 
 364 
 
 26 
 464 
 113 
 
 16 
 
 2846 
 1341 
 1214 
 304 
 762 
 323 
 45 
 
 6835 
 
 The whole number of male European labor- 
 ers at these stations is 29. — Choides's History qf 
 Missions ; London Missionary Register. 
 
 London Missionary Society. — The London 
 Missionary Society, three years after its fir|^ 
 formation, in 1795, sent out to Southern 
 Africa, four laborers, two of whom. Dr. Yan- 
 derkemp and Mr. Edmonds, were appointed to 
 that part of the colony bordering on Kaffra- 
 ria ; and the other two, to the country north 
 of the colony, inhabited by different tribes 
 of Bushmen or Bosjesmans. Dr. Yanderkemp 
 was a son of a minister of the Reformed 
 Dutch Church at Rotterdam, He was born 
 in 1747, educated at the University of Ley- 
 den, and for some time practiced as a physi- 
 cian. In 1791, the loss of his wife and child 
 at sea was the means of his awakening and 
 conversion ; after which, he devoted himself to 
 the self-denying labors of a missionary. Mr. 
 Moffat says of him : " He came from a uni- 
 versity, to stoop to teach the alphabet to the 
 poor native Hottentot and Kaffi-e ; from the 
 society of nobles to associate with beings of 
 the lowest grade in the scale of humanity ; 
 from stately mansions, to the filthy hovel of the 
 greasy African ; from the army, to instruct 
 the fierce savages the tactics of a heavenly war- 
 fare, under the banner of the Prince of Peace ; 
 from the study of physic, to become the guide 
 to the balm in Gilead and the physician there ; 
 and, finally, from a life of earthly honor and 
 ease, to be exposed to perils of waters, of rob- 
 bers, of his own countrymen, of the heathen, 
 in the city, in the wilderness." 
 
d8 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 In 1799, Dr. Vandcrkemp, in company 
 with Mr. Edmonds, proceeded through many 
 clangers, to the land of the wild and warlike 
 Kaif"rcs ; and after no little parley and delay, 
 the chief gave his consent that they should re- 
 main in his dominions. They selected a spot 
 for a house, felled trees, and cut down long 
 grass for a thatching, and then kneeled down 
 on the grass, thanking the Lord Jesus that he 
 had provided them a resting-place, and pray- 
 ing " that from under this roof, the seed of the 
 gospel might spread northwards through all 
 Africa." But, the next year, Mr. Edmonds 
 went away, and Dr. Yanderkemp was left 
 alone. He labored on alone for some time, 
 but owing to untoward circumstances, left 
 Kaffreland for Graaff Reinet ; but not until 
 he had sown some good seed ; for thirty 
 years afterwards, an aged woman was admit- 
 ted to the church who received the gospel from 
 his lips. 
 
 After this, the Doctor and Mr. Read at^ 
 tempted to establish a mission among the Hot- 
 tentots near Algoa Bay ; but after much opposi- 
 tion from the colonists, and sundry attacks trom 
 the plundering Hottentots, they were obliged to 
 take refuge with about 300 Hottentots, whom 
 they had collected in Fort Frederick. After the 
 cession of the colony to the Dutch, a spot was 
 granted them on Kooboo, where they com- 
 menced the station called Bethelsdorp ; which, 
 however, from its sterility and want of water, 
 was unsuitable for a mission farm. Five years 
 after its commencement, they wrote to the di- 
 apctors that they had been without bread for a 
 long time, and did not expect to procure any 
 for three or four months, nor had they any veg- 
 etables. Yet notwithstanding all these discour- 
 aging circumstances, there were many indica- 
 tions of the Divine blessing on their labors. 
 The progress of their scholars was astonishing, 
 and above all, their facility in acquiring reli- 
 gioas knowledge, considering the apathy, stu- 
 pidity, and aversion to eflfort, which character- 
 ize the natives. Dr. Yanderkemp closed his 
 useful labors, Dec. 15, 1811, after breathing 
 out the Christian assurance, " All is well." 
 
 Bethelsdorp, under many difficulties and dis- 
 advantages, grew and multiplied. In 1822 it 
 was in a most flourishing condition, having 
 large schools and other institutions, and a 
 printing press. New churches were also 
 planted at Pacaltsdorp, Theopolis, and other 
 places, through the instrumentality of Rev. J. 
 Campbell. 
 
 A mission was commenced at Kat river, 
 among the Kafifres, in 1816, by Mr. Joseph 
 Williams. Short as Dr. Yanderkemp's labors 
 were among the Kafifres, he left a savor of 
 the gospel behind him, which still remained. 
 The commencement of the mission wjvs most 
 auspicious. Temporary houses were raised, 
 ground was cleared for cultivation, a water- 
 course and a dam were constructed, and the 
 Kafi&-es assembled for instruction. A little 
 
 more than two years after, Mr. Williams was 
 removed by death. His lonely widow, how- 
 ever, found sympathy in the hearts of the na- 
 tives, who had just begun to appreciate their 
 teachers. She instructed her half-ci\ilized at- 
 tendants to prepare the wood and make the 
 coffin, and with a weeping band, followed the 
 desire of her eyes to the silent dust. No suc- 
 cessor was appointed, at that time, and the 
 mission to the Kaffres was suspended. 
 
 At the same time that Dr. Yanderkemp 
 proceeded to the land of the Kaffres, Messrs. 
 Kircherer, Kramer and Edwards, took up their 
 course for Zak river, between 400 and 500 
 miles north from Cape Town. Mr. Kircherer 
 had been designated to Kaffreland. But the 
 Bushmen, on making a treaty with Mr. Fisch- 
 er, one of the colonists, who was a good man, 
 beheld him solemnly appealing to God to wit- 
 ness the transaction, and observed that he was 
 in the habit of assembling his family for wor- 
 ship morning and evening, and were thus led to 
 inquire about God, and solicit a Christian 
 teacher. Mr. Fischer took some of their prin- 
 cipal men to the Cape, to see what could be 
 done for them. And Providence so ordered it, 
 that they arrived just before the missionaries, 
 who received it as a call from God to labor in 
 that quarter. They received great kindness 
 and attention from the government, and assist- 
 ance from the farmers, who accompanied 
 them to the spot, and loaded them with things 
 requisite to commence the station. 
 
 Zak river became the finger-post to the Na- 
 maquas, Corannas, Griquas, and Bechuanas ; 
 for it was by means of that mission that 
 these tribes and their condition became known 
 to the Christian world. The farmers contin- 
 ued friendly, and many Hottentots and Bas- 
 tards flocked to the station ; but the Bush- 
 men, for whom the mission was designed, could 
 never appreciate its object. The missionary's 
 life was more than once threatened by them ; 
 but his labors were blessed to the conversion 
 of a number of Hottentots and Bastards, who 
 afterwards became pillars in the Griqua JMis- 
 sion. Mr. Kircherer having left, the mission, 
 with no small regret, was abandoned in 1806. 
 
 In 1814, another mission was commenced 
 among the Bushmen at Colesberg, south of 
 the Great river, by Messrs. Smith and Cor- 
 ner. The settlement was commenced with 
 about 500 Bushmen. For some time, how- 
 ever, they were jealous of the missionaries, 
 fearing that they were employed to deliver 
 them into the hands of the farmers, between 
 whom and themselves, there had been a long 
 and a mortal enmity. But it was not long be- 
 fore the light and power of the gospel reached 
 their hearts, and many of them believed. A 
 church arose, and with it the usual results 
 ! of Christianity appeared, among which were 
 j extensive gardens, cultivated by the hands that 
 used only to handle the bow and spear, as they 
 I roamed wildly over the country. 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 Another mission was commenced among the 
 Bushmen at Hephzibah. But in consequence 
 of some conflict between the ^((tpiiers and the 
 Bushmen, the missionaries were ordered by 
 government to retire within the colony ; and 
 so these stations, in the midst of much pro- 
 mise, were broken up. Some of the Bush- 
 men had acquired a good knowledge of the 
 principles of Christianity, and appeared to 
 receive it into their hearts; and they were 
 zealous in endeavoring to convey it to their 
 countrymen. And the experiment proved that 
 the conversion of this wdd, untractable race 
 was not impossible. The last effort of the so- 
 ciety to establish a mission among this people 
 was attempted in the vicinity of the Caledon 
 river ; but the mission was afterwards trans- 
 ferred by Dr. Philip to the Paris Society. 
 • In the month of January, 1806, the Orange 
 or Gariep river was crossed by the missiona- 
 ries of the London Missionary Society, for the 
 pui7)ose of carrying the gospel to the inhabit- 
 ants of the wild and desolate regions of Great 
 Namaqualand. Of this region, Mr. Moffat 
 Bays, "As an inhabited country, it is scarcely 
 possible to conceive of one more destitute and 
 miserable." On his way there, he met a per- 
 son who had spent years in that country, and 
 on inquiring about it, his reply was, " Sir, you 
 will find plenty of sand and stones, a thinly 
 scattered population, always suffering for want 
 of water, on plains and hills roasted like a 
 burnt loaf, under the scorching rays of a cloud- 
 less sun ;" of the truth of which, he says he had 
 ample demonstration. The inhabitants are 
 Hottentots, distinguished by all the singular 
 characteristics of that nation, which includes 
 Hottentots, Corannas, Namaquas aud Bush- 
 men. After a long journey of great hard- 
 ships, and much suffering for want of adequate 
 supplies, the missionaries arrived at the Orange 
 river, where they waited at a place which they 
 named Silent Hope, till Christian Albrecht 
 visited Great Namaqualand and returned with 
 encouraging prospects, when they went forward 
 to the spot selected, which they named Happy 
 Deliverance. Their prospects were alternately 
 bright and gloomy. Their proximity to Afri- 
 caner added not a little to their anxieties. But 
 he came to them and welcomed them to the 
 country, because they were sent by the En- 
 glish, saying that though he hated the Dutch, 
 he loved the English, because he had heard 
 they were friends of the poor l:i3lick man. This 
 man, being driven to desperation, by the op- 
 pressions of the Dutch boers, had risen upon 
 his master, and putting himself at the head of 
 his tribe, had become the terror of the whole 
 country. 
 
 Africaner, hearing that it was the intention 
 of the missionaries to remove to another place, 
 came to them and entreated them not to leave 
 that part ^f the country. They did, however, 
 remove to Warm Bath, about 100 miles west 
 of Africaner's neighborhood. Here they re- 
 
 sumed their labors, among a mixed population 
 of Namaquas and Bastards from the Colony, 
 whom they found it difficult to manage. For 
 a season their prospects were cheering, and 
 their labors blest ; though they labored in a 
 debilitating climate, in want of the necessaries 
 of life, spreading their scanty fare upon the lid 
 of a wagon chest for a table. While here, 
 their congregation was increased, by that des- 
 perado, Africaner, who with part of his people, 
 drew near and attended occasionally the in- 
 structions of the missionaries, who visited his 
 place in return. But some jealousy and per- 
 haps alarm were excited in the minds of the 
 people of the station, which induced him to 
 retire to his former place. But Abraham Al- 
 brecht's health failing, he took an affectionate 
 leave, on the 14th of May, 1810, accompanied 
 by his brother, leaving the mission in charge 
 of Mr. Tromp. After a tedious journey, he 
 expired at the house of Mr. Botmas, at Honing 
 Berg, on the 30th of July. His last wor(S 
 were, " I go to Jesus ; I am a member of his 
 body." After this. Christian Albrecht pro- 
 ceeded to the colony, married a lady of supe- 
 rior education, and returned to his field of la- 
 bor. But in consequence of the imprudence 
 of some of the people at Warm Bath, in join- 
 ing an expedition against Africaner, he be- 
 came enraged and vowed vengeance on tho 
 mission. For a whole month, the missionaries 
 were kept in the greatest terror, and at length 
 were obliged to flee, and return to the colony. 
 Africaner and his men soon arrived, and after 
 obtaining what booty they could find, set fire 
 to the premises, and left them in ruins. In 
 Dec, 1811, they set out to return again to 
 the scence of their labors and trials. After 
 a most distressing journey, they arrived at 
 Silver Fountain, the residence of Cornelius 
 Kok ; where, five days after, Mrs. Albrecht 
 breathed her last. The Namaqua mission was 
 resumed at Pella, south of the river, where 
 they were joined by about 500 of the Warm 
 Bath people. Mr. Christian Albrecht, having 
 occasion to go to the Cape for medical advice, 
 suddenly expired, leaving behind him a bright 
 testimony of zeal, love, and self-denial. But 
 before leaving the country he had the unspeak- 
 able joy of making peace with Africaner, and 
 seeing the standard of the Prince of Peace 
 raised in the very village of the man 
 who once "breathed out threatenings and 
 slaughter," against not only his fellow heathen 
 but against the saints of the Most High. Kev. 
 J. Campbell, on his first visit to Africa, while 
 passing through Namaqualand, had written a 
 conciliatory Letter to Africaner, to which the 
 chief returned a favorable reply through Mr. 
 Albrecht, who sent Mr. Ebner to occupy a sta- 
 tion at Africaner's Kraal. Mr. Ebner's la^ 
 bors were blessed, and in a short time, Africa- 
 ner and his two brothers, David and Jacobus, 
 with a number of others, were baptized. Yet 
 he does not appear to have been altogether the 
 
30 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 man for the plnce ; for by some means he got 
 the ill-will of the natives, and on the arrival 
 of Mr. Moffat, in Jan., 1818, he was in great 
 danger of losing his life ; and he soon after 
 left the mission. 
 
 Soon after Mr. MoflRit's arrival, Christian 
 Africaner made his appearance, and inquired 
 if he was the missionary appointed by the di- 
 rectors in London ; and being answered in the 
 affirmative, seemed pleased, and said as Mr. M. 
 was young:, he hoped he would live long with 
 him and his people. He then ordered a num- 
 ber of women to come, who soon made their 
 appearance, bearing bundles of native mats, 
 and long sticks like fishing rods. Africaner, 
 pointing to a spot of ground, said, " There 
 you must build a house for the missionary." 
 A circle was formed and the women fixed the 
 poles, tied them down in the hemispheric form, 
 covered them with the mats, and in about half- 
 an hour the house was done, "all ready for ha- 
 bitation. 
 
 Soon after Mr. Moffat commenced his servi- 
 ces, which were attended every morning and 
 evening, he was cheered with tokens of the 
 Divine presence ; and in none were these to- 
 kens more marked than in the chief, Africa- 
 ner, of whose wonderful change and devoted 
 piety, Mr. M. has given a thrilling account. 
 But as the memoir of this Christian chief is 
 a common book among us, the sketch will not 
 be repeated here. 
 
 After some time, Mr. Moffat visited the 
 Cape, for the double purpose of procuring 
 supplies, and of introducing Africaner to the 
 government ; and while there, he was appoint- 
 ed by the Society to the Bechuana mission. 
 
 The mission which was commenced and af- 
 terwards broken up on the Zak river, after rai- 
 CTating for a few years, finally settled down at 
 Griqua Town in 1804, with Messrs. Anderson 
 and Kramer, and a mixed multitude of dis- 
 tinct tribes, having different languages, cus- 
 toms, &c. Mr. Anderson says, when he went 
 among the Griquas, they were without the 
 smallest marks of civilization ; excepting one 
 woman, they had not one thread of European 
 clothing. The missionaries' lives were in dan- 
 ger, the natives afterwards having confessed 
 that they had frequently meditated killing them 
 but were overawed by what they had learned 
 of an Almighty power. They were in the hab- 
 it of plundering one another, and seemed to 
 see no wrong in this or any of their actions. 
 A^iolcut deaths were common. Their usual 
 manner of living was disgusting, and devoid 
 of all shame. But after a series of hardships, 
 requiring much faith and patience, the instruc- 
 tions of the missionaries were attended with 
 a blessing which produced a great change. 
 The people became honest in their dealings, 
 abhorring those acts of plunder which had be- 
 come so common among them. They entirely 
 abandoned their former manner of life, and de- 
 cency and modesty prevailed in their families. 
 
 The Griquas at first showed great aversion to 
 the labor of cultivating the ground. But af- 
 ter some time, they were prevailed upon to 
 try the experiment ; and this Avas followed by 
 a great and visible improvement in them as a 
 body. As early as 1809, the congregation 
 consisted of eight hundred persons, who re- 
 sided at or near the station. In 1810, they 
 were threatened with an attack from a maraud- 
 ing party of Kaffres. Mr. Jantz, the mis- 
 sionary, with the people, set apart a day of 
 fasting and prayer, and at the same time sent 
 a pacific message with a present to the Kaflres, 
 who immediately retired. The mission con- 
 tinued to flourish, till in 1814, Mr. Anderson 
 received an order from the colonial govern- 
 ment to send down twenty Griquas for the 
 Cape regiment. This demand greatly exasper- 
 ated the natives, and produced such an excite- 
 ment that Mr. Anderson was obliged to leave 
 them ; while the refusal of the natives to com- 
 ply with the order, led to the introduction of 
 a restrictive system by which the missionaries 
 were prevented from crossing the northern 
 boundaries of the colony. Mr. Anderson was 
 succeeded by Messrs. Moffat and Helm, the 
 former of whom, in his book, bears honorable 
 testimony to his zeal, perseverance and success 
 as well as to the warmth with which his mem- 
 ory was cherished by the natives. One object 
 of Mr. Moffat's appointment was to make a 
 vigorous stand against interference on the part 
 of the missionaries with the government of the 
 people. The former chief of the Griquas, 
 Adam Kok, had abandoned Griqua Town, and 
 the acknowledged chief, Berend, lived at the dis- 
 tance of fifty miles, and paid very little attention 
 to their interests. The consequence was, they 
 were without any regular government. The 
 hint was given them to appoint one of their 
 own number to take the government of the 
 village. The idea was eagerly embraced. The 
 choice fell unanimously on Andries Water- 
 boer, a man who had been educated at the sta- 
 tion, and employed as an assistant teacher in 
 the school, but who possessed neither name nor 
 riches. The missionaries took no part in the 
 matter ; but the choice afforded them entire 
 satisfaction. This was a new era in the mis- 
 sion, as it relieved the missionaries from con- 
 stant attention to the secular affairs of the 
 people. Waterboer, however, feeling his in- 
 sufficiency, spent several evenings every week 
 in conversing with them on the subject of his 
 duties and responsibilities. His administra- 
 tion was not unattended with difficulty and 
 trouble ; but by the blessing of God, he suc- 
 ceeded in establishing the principles of order 
 and peace. He always continued, however, to 
 preach. He obtained afterwards a liberal sal- 
 ary and supplies from the colonial government, 
 and was able, at length, to present the Griquas 
 in a most favorable aspect. The mission re- 
 ceived a new impulse in 1831, since which time 
 it has continued to increase, and to extend its 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 31 
 
 influence around, having been blessed in no 
 ordinary degree. Mr. Helmore, liaving been 
 appointed to Lekatlong, a station of Bechua- 
 nas connected witli the Griqua Mission, 190 
 of their members were transferred to his care, 
 and a new chm*cli was formed, and at the re- 
 quest of the chief, 100 of the Basutos returned 
 home, and connected themselves with the 
 French mission. 
 
 Mr. Moffat states that the missionaries ex- 
 perienced great difiBcuIties, and were frequently 
 in imminent peril of their lives, in consequence 
 of holding the office of agent of the colonial 
 government. He says, " More than twenty 
 years' experience among the aborigines beyond 
 the bounds of the colony, has convinced the 
 writer that the two offices are incompatible." 
 The reason is that it places them in a suspi- 
 cious attitude toward the natives. But it is 
 the testimony of those well acquainted with 
 the subject, that without this official character, 
 they were able to exert a wide and strong in- 
 fluence over the natives, to restrain their war- 
 like, marauding and revengeful disposition. 
 
 A mission was commenced by Mr. Hamil- 
 ton, among the Bechuanas, at Lithakoo ; 
 though with but the reluctant consent of Mo- 
 thibi, the chief. These people have no notion 
 of idolatry, and no religious ideas of any kind, 
 so that they can only be approached, at first, 
 through motives of self-interest, which, how- 
 ever, when resorted to, must ultimately react 
 against the missionary's object. In conse- 
 quence of a disastrous defeat of a marauding 
 expedition against the Bakuenas, Mothibi, 
 and a majority of his people removed to the 
 Kuruman river, in June, 1817. In 1820, Mr. 
 Moffat arrived, in company with Mr. Campbell ; 
 and in 1821, the former became permanently 
 connected with the mission, where he now re- 
 mains. This mission passed through perils and 
 dangers almost incredible, which are described 
 by Mr. Moffat with graphic power. First, they 
 were the objects of suspicion to the natives, 
 who ordered them to leave, and threatened 
 their destruction. Then the country was vis- 
 ited with a long and terrible drought, which 
 threatened to destroy every thing. A rain- 
 maker was sent for, who charged it upon the 
 missionaries ; but, after having deceived and 
 fleeced the people, he was obliged to flee for his 
 life. Afterwards a new station was commenced, 
 at a place more favorable for water ; but no 
 sooner had they commenced operations, than 
 the whole country was thrown into a scene of 
 the wildest excitement and confusion, and no- 
 thing but wars and rumors of wars, and at- 
 tacks from banditti, seemed to be the order of 
 the day. Several times the mission was scat- 
 tered. But at length, after unheard of confu- 
 sions and terrors, hardships and disasters, 
 things settled down into comparative quiet, 
 and the appearances at tlie station were indi- 
 cative of the long desired change. And short- 
 ly after the return of Mr. Hamilton from a visit 
 
 to the Cape, they were favored with- the man- 
 ifest outpouring of the Spirit from on high. 
 The simple gospel now melted the hearts of 
 men who had scorned to weep. The missiona- 
 ries were taken by surprise. So long accus- 
 tomed to indifference, the scene overwhelmed 
 their minds. Their chapel became a Bockim 
 and the sympathy spread from heart to heart, 
 so that even infants wept. An emancipated 
 slave, named Aaron Josephs, who had come to 
 the station for the education of his children, was 
 awakened, and giving evidence of a saving 
 change, was received into the church. The 
 services on this occasion gave a new impulse 
 to the work, and soon the sounds predominant 
 throughout the village were those of singing 
 and prayer. Those that were awakened held 
 prayer-meetings from house to house; and 
 when there were none able to^ engage in prayer 
 they would sing till a late hour. Before the 
 dawn of morning they would assemble again 
 at some house for worship, before going to la- 
 bor. Aaron and two other men now came 
 forward and offered to build a school-house, 
 that might serve as a place of worship, at their 
 own expense. And as all gave their assistance, 
 the building was soon completed. Many im- 
 portant improvements were also made in the 
 outward affairs of the mission, in which there 
 was no lack of native assistance, while the lan- 
 guage and translations were attended to. On 
 the first Sabbath in July, 1829, six of the con- 
 verts, after a careful examination had shown a 
 good knowledge of divine truth and a simple 
 faith relying alone on the merits of Christ, 
 were baptized and received into the church. 
 And Providence had so ordered, that a large 
 number were present from Philipolis, Camp- 
 bell, Griqua Town, and Boochaup, who were 
 profitably impressed by the solemnity. There 
 were present, also, parties from the interior, 
 who had come there to trade. The place was 
 crowded to excess. In the evening, they sat 
 down at the table of the Lord, and enjoyed a 
 cheering and encouraging season. The con- 
 verts clothed themselves in decent raiment ; 
 and soon after a sewing school was started, to 
 teach the women and girls to make their own 
 garments. The same gospel which had taught 
 them that they were spiritually miserable, 
 blind and naked, discovered to them also that 
 they needed outward reform, and thus prepared 
 their minds to adopt those modes of comfort, 
 cleanliness and convenience, which they had 
 been accustomed to view only as the peculiar- 
 ities of a strange people. And the same im- 
 provement was manifest in the other depart- 
 ments of household economy. 
 
 Prospects continued cheering. The desire for 
 instruction was great, and the experience of 
 the inquirers and converts was such as to give 
 good evidence of grace. " I seek Jesus," one 
 would say, and another, " I am feeling after 
 God. I have been wandering among beasts of 
 prey ; the day has dawned, and I see my dan- 
 
32 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 ^er." Another, " I have been sloping in a 
 lion's deu ; or been blown to and fro like a cal- " 
 abash uj)on the water, and might have sunk." 
 A woman, who was about to die, called her 
 husband and friends, and addressed them : " I 
 am going to die. Weep not because I am 
 going to leave you, but weep for your sins, and 
 weep for your souls. With me all is well, for 
 do not suppose that I die like a beast, or that 
 I shall sleep forever in the grave. No, Jesus 
 has died for my sins ; he has said he will save 
 me ; I am going to be with him." 
 
 The people now made rapid progress in civ- 
 ilization ; and as the country had been blessed 
 with plentiful rains, they hegwa. to adopt Eu- 
 roi)can modes of cultivation, and to increase 
 the variety of their agricultural productions. 
 And the spiritual affairs of the station kept pace 
 with external improvement. Progress was 
 made in reading, and knowledge increased ; 
 and early in the year 1830, the foundations of 
 a church were laid. 
 
 Mr. Moffat, having completed the translation 
 of the gospel of Luke, repaired to the Cape to 
 get it printed, and returned with the treasure, 
 together with a hymn book in the native lan- 
 guage, a printing press, type, paper and ink, 
 having learned to print during his absence ; 
 also bringing with him Mr. and Mrs. Ed- 
 wards, as a reinforcement. Nothing could ex- 
 ceed the surprise of the natives, when they 
 saw a white sheet, after disappearing for a 
 moment, emerge spangled with letters. The 
 mission continued to prosper after this. Mr. 
 Moffat made frequent excursions into the 
 interior to visit other tribes, where, in the 
 midst of great peril and strange adventures, he 
 was mercifully preserved, and permitted to 
 scatter some seeds of divine truth, and prepare 
 the way for other labors. He afterwards made 
 a visit to England, where he spent several 
 years in the translation and printing of the 
 Scriptures and other books for the mission 
 among the Bechuanas. 
 
 In the latter part of 1843, he returned to 
 his field of labor, where he arrived on the 13th 
 of December, accompanied by Rev. Messrs. 
 Ash ton and Inglis, as a reinforcement. He 
 met a warm reception. " Many were the hearty 
 welcomes," says he, " we received, all appearing 
 emulous to testify their joy. Old and young, 
 even the little children would shake hands with 
 us. Some gave vent to their joy with an air 
 of heathen wildness, and some in silent floods 
 of tears ; while others whose hearts had sick- 
 ened with deferred hope, would ask again and 
 again, " Do our eyes indeed behold you ?" Thus 
 we found ourselves again among a people who 
 loved us and who had longed for our return. 
 It has afforded us hallowed delight, and often 
 called forth from our hearts the liveliest feelings 
 of gratitude to God, to witness the progre&s of 
 the knowledge of divine things, and of the pow- 
 er of the gospel, among the people connected 
 with thLs place, as well as at our out-statious." 
 
 The missions of the Society, embracing ma- 
 ny stations not named in the foregoing sketch, 
 though subject to occasional interruptions 
 from the predatory excui-sions of hostile tribes, 
 from the former wars with the Kaffres, and 
 from hostile boers, enjoyed, in general, contin- 
 ued prosperity, till the breaking out of the 
 Kaffre war, in 1846, when the stations in Kaf- 
 freland were abandoned. 
 
 The presence of the Holy Spirit has been 
 manifested at most of the stations to a greater 
 or less extent, every year ; and, as the result of 
 seasons of refreshing, additions have been 
 made to various churches, in different years, 
 varying from a few individuals to ten, twenty, 
 and even as high as ninety at one time. In 1839, 
 the Caledon Institution was favored with a re- 
 markable awakening. Its beginnings were at 
 first small, and without noise ; it continued, till 
 men, women, and children, became anxious 
 about their salvation. At one public meet- 
 ing, after service, Mr. Helms asked all to re- 
 main who felt anxious about their souls, and 
 only fourteen retired out of three or four hun- 
 dred. A great moral reformation took place ; 
 122 were added to the church, and the mem- 
 bers appeared to walk worthy of their profes- 
 sion, their character being marked by humility, 
 their views simple and scriptural, with much 
 spirituality of mind, and disposition to converse 
 about the things of God. The next year re- 
 ports the work as still continuing, and as hav- 
 ing produced great changes in many families, 
 many having been brought in, who were 
 considered as hardened beyond hope. In 1843, 
 Mr. Helms wrote : " We have still the spirit 
 of prayer, sinners are awakened, and the new 
 converts are growing in grace." 
 
 In 1847, a revival commenced at Gossiep, 
 an out-station of the Griqua Mission, among 
 the young people, as the result of which, ninety 
 were added to the church, of whom the mis- 
 sionaries say, the following year, " Generally, 
 the new converts give us great satisfaction." 
 In 1851, there was a gracious work at Long 
 Kloof, which continued, with very little inter- 
 mission, to the following year, and fifty of the 
 converts had been received into the church. 
 
 The effects of the gospel are visible, also, in 
 outward things, at all the stations. The re- 
 port of the Caledon Institution for 1849, says, 
 " the people are gradually and steadily ad- 
 vancing, not only in knowledge, but in civili- 
 zation, which is chiefly seen in their adoption 
 of better clothing, the increase of domestic 
 comforts, and the superior quality of their 
 food. And, as long ago as 1841, Dr. Philip, 
 while on a tour among the missions, writes 
 from Caledon : " This station presents a most 
 gratifying spectacle to those who saw it in 
 former times. In 1823, the people were in 
 rags. Few of them had any covering on, ex- 
 cept the filthy sheep-skin kaross. Their huts 
 were of the most wretched description. They 
 were given to drunkenness, and its kindred 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 33 
 
 vices, and tlie ground on which they resided 
 lay waste. In 1825, and the two Ibllowing 
 years, their condition was, if possible, still more 
 miserable, and the lands were in the possession 
 of the neighboring boers. The people are 
 now dressed in British manufactures, and make 
 a very respectable appearance in the house of 
 God. The children who formerly went naked, 
 and presented a most disgusting appearance, 
 are decently clothed. Instead of a few wretch- 
 ed huts, resembling pig-styes, we have now a 
 rising and regular village ; and the valley on 
 which it stands, which till lately was unculti- 
 vated, is now laid out in gardens. While re- 
 ligion was low among the people, we could 
 not get them to build decent houses ; but last 
 year the walls of forty houses were raised." 
 
 Among the Fingoes, who are constant in 
 their attendance on the means of grace, a 
 marked and pleasing change is exhibited in 
 their outward appearance. In 1843, Mr. Pass- 
 more wrote : " The red clay, used for anointing 
 their bodies, has been superseded by the cleans- 
 ing waters of the spring, and the kaross and 
 blanket have given place to garments of Eu- 
 ropean manufacture. Many have made great 
 progress in several branches of knowledge. 
 The desire for instruction is very great. In 
 the summer, many of them come from their 
 work, and remain in school till half-past nine 
 o'clock in the evening, before they go home 
 for refreshment, and they purchase with avidity 
 all the books that are published." 
 
 Mr. Solomon, on arriving at Griquatown, in 
 December, 1843, writes : " I found the great 
 majority of them no longer living in their mat 
 huts, covered with their filthy karosses, subsist- 
 ing on roots and game, but dwelling in Europe- 
 an houses, many of them of stone or brick ; 
 decently clothed in European attire ; cultivat- 
 ing all the ground capable of cultivation ; pos- 
 sessing flocks and herds ; and enjoying many of 
 the comforts of life. I found many of them in- 
 telligent and respectable, in every sense of 
 the term, who would reflect credit on any 
 community." He says, also, that the influence 
 of the mission was not confined to that parti- 
 cular spot, but had extended to some distance 
 in all directions ; and that there were several 
 outposts where churches had been gathered, 
 some of them containing 100 to 200 members, 
 walking as becometh Christians. 
 
 Testimonies of this kind might be given to 
 an indefinite extent ; but we have room for 
 but one incident more on this point, which 
 will show that the change is perceived by the 
 heathen, and its cause acknowledged : A Fin- 
 go, traveling through Hankey, where the so- 
 ciety have a station, sat down to rest at the 
 door of the place of worship, and looking 
 round on the houses, behind which the gardens 
 were concealed, asked one of the deacons how 
 the people got food in such a place. The 
 deacon told him to look at him, and see if he 
 was not healthy and well clothed. He then 
 3 
 
 called a fine child, and told the man to look at 
 it, and see if it was not well fed. The stranger 
 assented, but seemed perplexed. The deacon 
 then told him if he would attend service the 
 next day, he would see that it was so with 
 them all. The Fingo rose to depart, and lift- 
 ing up his eyes and right hand to heaven, ex- 
 claimed, " It is always so where that God is wor- 
 shipped .'" 
 
 The following incident, which occurred in 
 1848, at Long Kloof, shows the influence of 
 the schools upon children, even of a tender 
 age, and their reflex influence upon the parents. 
 A man utterly regardless of divine things was 
 induced by a relative to send two children to 
 the school, a boy of eight and a girl of six 
 years. After a few weeks he came for the 
 boy, as he wanted him to herd calves. The 
 boy objected to going, " because," said he, 
 " there is nothing good taught at the place 
 where father lives." " But," said the father, 
 " what can such a thing as you learn here ?" 
 " Father," said the boy, " I have learned some- 
 thing." " Repeat it, then," said the father. 
 The boy replied, " ' It is a faithful saying, and 
 worthy of all acceptation, that Christ Jesus 
 came into the world to save sinners ? ' Does 
 father know who Jesus Christ is ? He is the 
 Son of God. Does father know who are sin- 
 ners ? All are sinners." This conversation 
 so affected the father that he returned home 
 without the boy, and in a few weeks came 
 back, an altered man, having, as he said, " met 
 with the precious word of God." 
 
 Polygamy has been found to be a great hin- 
 drance to the progress of the gospel. The 
 people seemed to have no idea of the sinfulness 
 of the practice. But the missionaries gave no 
 countenance to it, and required the converts 
 to give up all but one wife, and to prefer the 
 first one. Sechele, the chief at Kolobeng, was 
 the chief rain-doctor of his district, and had 
 been reckless of human life. But, from the 
 commencement of the mission, he attended 
 school and all other services. The truth took 
 hold of his heart, and he professed it boldly 
 among his people. But the great sacrifice he 
 had to make was the renunciation of polygamy. 
 His surplus wives were the most amiable 
 women, and the best scholars of any in the 
 town. Soon, the chief sent two of them to 
 their parents, with the message that the word 
 of God had come between him and their 
 daughters. The others were properly disposed 
 of. Each of them carried away all that be- 
 longed to her, and the chief supplied each of 
 them with new clothing. As soon as it was 
 known that he had renounced his wives, a gen- 
 eral consternation seized both old and young. 
 The town was as quiet as if it had been Sun- 
 day. Not a single woman was seen going to 
 her garden. Councils were held during the 
 night, in order to intimidate him.^ But he 
 remained firm, and after being tried in various 
 ways for two months, he was baptized. 
 
84 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 Many very intcrcstinj^ cases arc moutioned, 
 to show the effect of the gospel, in producing 
 a spirit of liberality. At all the stations thej^ 
 have generally shown a disposition to contri- 
 bute according to their ability. A poor 
 woman, a cripple, hired herself out to earn 
 something to give to the missionary cause. 
 When the time for the missionary meeting 
 came, she asked her mistress for five shillings, 
 who, in reply, told her that sober and indus- 
 trious people ought not to give anything, but 
 rather drunkards, who squandered their money. 
 She replied, " Mistress, such persons can do as 
 thev choose, but we feel that we must give" 
 
 At the conclusion of a Sabbath sei-vice at 
 Port Elizabeth, the missionary called on a 
 man to offer prayer. He commenced by al- 
 luding to the condition of himself and country- 
 men before they heard the gospel, when they 
 % indulged in vice, and when they were ready to 
 murder each other ; but when he came to 
 speak of God's goodness in having sent the 
 gospel to them, and in having made them par- 
 takers of its blessings, his voice faltered, and 
 his heart seemed too full for utterance. He 
 said, " How can we ever love thee as we ought 
 to do, for thy love to us ? " He could go no 
 further, but sat down, and continued sobbing 
 all the time of the last hymn. This man, who 
 was a poor Fingo, obtained his living by work- 
 ing on the beach, up to his waist in water, 
 landing goods ; and he brought the missionary 
 eight shillings for the jubilee fund, and a sove- 
 reign as liis annual subscription. In 1843, 
 there was extreme scarcity from want of rain 
 in all the villages, yet, that year, the churches 
 in South Africa, out of their deep poverty, 
 contributed £1,600 for the support and exten- 
 sion of the gospel. 
 
 The society have turned their attention to 
 the raising up of a native agency. In 1844 
 Mr. Moffat writes : " The state of our mission 
 is very promising, with regard to the native 
 agents employed in teaching and addressing 
 the people. Six men are connected w^ith Ku 
 ruman, and these, from what I know of them, 
 are, through the divine blessing, calculated to 
 do much good. It is truly delightful to ob- 
 serve the fervent zeal of these godly men. In 
 my opinion, this is the only means by which 
 the interior of the country can have a stated 
 ministry." And, again, in 1846 : " At all our 
 stations the simple, but evangelic labors of our 
 native assistants are receiving the divine bless- 
 ing." 
 
 In the report of the society for 1847, the 
 directors say, " During the greater part of last 
 year, this field of the society's labors has been 
 the theatre of war, and scenes have daily oc- 
 curred over which the friends of humanity and 
 religion must bitterly mourn. Thousands of 
 lawless Kaffres invaded the colony, destroying 
 the villages, stealing the cattle, and slaughter- 
 ing the inhabitants. During the progress of 
 these events, the four missionary stations of 
 
 the society in Kaffreland were ruined ; the 
 missionaries and their people were compelled 
 to seek refuge in the colony ; their property 
 fell into the hands of the enemy ; and the sev- 
 eral settlements, with their houses and chapels, 
 were totally destroyed. All the Christian in- 
 stitutions and villages within the colony occu- 
 pied bv our brethren suffered in various de- 
 grees, but the flourishing settlement of Kat 
 River most severely." The reports of the mis- 
 sionaries generally speak of the bad effects of . 
 the war, in engendering dissipation and vice ; 
 but they bear testimony to the good conduct 
 generally of the church-members, who were 
 called into active service in the army. 
 
 In the report of the society for 1852, the 
 directors say : " The war has continued through- 
 out the year to spread desolation and death. 
 Alarm and distress have been universally prev- 
 alent throughout the eastern districts, and many 
 valuable lives have been sacrificed. A portion 
 of the Hottentots, who, on all former occa- 
 sions, proved loyal and able defenders of the 
 colony, have been, unhappily, induced to unite 
 with the hostile Kaffres. But it is to be re- 
 gretted that the conduct of the colonists has 
 been calculated to produce, in the minds of the 
 colored people, distrust, estrangement, and en- 
 mity. At the commencement of the contest, 
 the governor, in his proclamation, doomed the 
 Kaffres ami tJieir allies to extermination, and the 
 British settlers joined heartily in the design. 
 Extermination was the watchword in the field, 
 and the motto inscribed on their banners, — 
 producing, in the minds of the native popula- 
 tion, the impression that it was a war of races. 
 But the only stations of the society at which 
 disaffection to the government has been man- 
 ifested, are those of Kat River and Theopo- 
 lis ; and, from its thirty-five stations, from four 
 only have the missionaries been obliged to re- 
 tire." 
 
 In the report for 1853, they say : " This 
 deadly conflict has at length terminated, and, 
 as might have been foreseen, by the triumph 
 of the British arms. The principal Kaffi-e 
 chiefs have been driven, with their people, out 
 of their country, and their lands allotted to 
 British set^Jjj^s and colonists, and on the widely 
 extended frontier there will be military posts, 
 from -which the troops and settlers are to guard 
 the colony against the return of the exiled 
 natives." But they justly complain of a treaty 
 which has been concluded between the British 
 government and the Dutch boers, by which the 
 territory north of the Yaal river has been 
 ceded to the latter, as the Free Dutch Republic, 
 without any provision for the protection and 
 freedom of the British missionaries, some of 
 whom have been laboring among the abori 
 gines for more than twenty years, or for the 
 numerous and prosperous Christian churches 
 which they have gathered. In this treaty, the 
 boers engage not to subject the natives to 
 slavery, but no security was taken, and the 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 35 
 
 directors have no confidence that it will be 
 executed. Already, three of the society's mis- 
 sionaries and the natives among whom they 
 were stationed, have suffered grievous outrage 
 and wrong from the Dutch emigrants. During 
 the month of August, 1852, they attacked the 
 native tribes, among whom Messrs. Livingston, 
 Inglis and Edwards labored; the men were 
 killed, and the women and children captured ; 
 the property taken as spoil, and their villages 
 destroyed. The house of Mr. Livingston was 
 broken open, his property stolen, and his books 
 torn to pieces and scattered to the winds. 
 And, in the month of October, these three 
 missionaries, after a mock trial, were sentenced 
 to be banished from the countij^. And, on 
 application by the directors to the home gov- 
 ernment for redress, they were coolly informed 
 that the treaty with the Dutch emigrants had 
 been confirmed by the government, thereby 
 precluding the expectation of future liberty 
 for the British missionaries, or of freedom for 
 the native tribes. Rev. Mr. Helmore writes, 
 Jan. 25, 1853 : " The boers are subjugating 
 the Bechuana tribes to their iron yoke. Ma- 
 musa is destroyed ; the missionaries of Matebe 
 and Mabotsa are driven out of the country ; 
 Kolobeng is destroyed. Kuruman and Lekat- 
 long are the only stations of our society that 
 yet exist in the Bechuana country. Alas ! for 
 the tribes beyond us, still enshrouded in the 
 black cloud of heathenism." 
 
 It may not be out of place here to remark 
 that, according to the statements of Dr. Philip, 
 Mr. Moffat, and others, the missions in South 
 Africa have met with greater hindrances from 
 the opposition of the colonists and the inter- 
 ference of the colonial government, than from 
 all other sources, and that the oppressive policy 
 pursued by the colonial government towards 
 the natives, has been one of the chief obstacles 
 in the way of their success. 
 
 Much complaint is made of the canteens, or 
 grog-shops, by which the mission settlements 
 have been infested, and, in some instances, suc- 
 cessful attempts have been made to counteract 
 their influence, by introducing the pledge of 
 total abstinence. At Dysaldorp, the Total 
 Abstinence Society, in 1844, numbered 420 
 members, and was the means of a great moral 
 reformation. 
 
 ^ Here, as in all parts of the world where mis- 
 sions have been successful, the emissaries of 
 Popery have come in to take possession of the 
 harvest.^ In 1846, Dr. Philip says there were 
 priests in all the villages, and some of these 
 are represented as men of learning and ability, 
 and they were employing every means that 
 their zeal could dictate to make converts. 
 
 The native converts, in speaking of their 
 own religious feelings, manifest a simple-hearted 
 piety, a knowledge of their own hearts, and of 
 the gospel, in its adaptedness to their wants, 
 with an implicit faith, truly remarkable ; and 
 the death-beds of the departed have shown that 
 
 this faith was able to sustain them in that hour 
 which brings nought but terror and wailing to 
 the heathen. 
 
 The latest intelligence from these missions 
 is encouraging. The report of the society for 
 1853 states that, "Although the stations 
 throughout the colony have suffered, in conse- 
 quence of the Kaffre war, some diminution in 
 their temporal resources, and the men who en- 
 tered the military levies have been exposed to 
 the influence of the camp and the battle-field ; 
 yet these evils have been far less than might 
 have been dreaded. Even at the Kat River 
 settlement, Rev. James Read has collected 
 the scattered members of the church, and re- 
 commenced the schools ; and at every other 
 station, with the solitary exception of Theopo- 
 lis, the believers have walked together in the 
 fear of the Lord, and in the comfort of the 
 Holy Ghost, and have been multiplied." But 
 beyond the bounds of the colony, it has been 
 otherwise. Yet it is gratifying to learn that 
 the members of the churches, at the stations 
 which have been broken up, have generally 
 sought refuge at other mission settlements, and 
 that their conduct, in these trying circum- 
 stances, has been such as to honor their pro- 
 fession. . 
 
 While the surrounding country has been 
 subjected to the lawless attacks of the emi- 
 grant boers, the station at Kuruman has been 
 unmolested. Mr. Moffat writes, in November, 
 1852, that he is going on with the work of 
 translation, and that the state of the work is 
 more encouraging than in former times ; the 
 people are more settled in their habits, and 
 better informed ; the grounds at and near the 
 station are becoming more generally cultivated. 
 Mr. Ashton writes, January, 1853, that they 
 had just admitted two young women to the 
 church who were baptized in infancy, thus 
 bringing in the fruits of the second generation. 
 At the station at Long Kloof, within the 
 colony, and at an out-station not far distant, 
 an interesting work of grace commenced in 
 1852, about the time the men returned from 
 the war. To the missionary it was an over- 
 powering time. Many who had grown old in 
 sin, as well as the youth of both sexes, were 
 crowding around to speak with him of the con- 
 cerns of their souls. In the report for 1853, 
 the work is noticed as still continuing. Sev- 
 enty-three had been received into the church, 
 as the fruits of the revival, and the church was 
 apparently in a healthy state. 
 
 The Rev. Dr. Livingston has returned from 
 his third journey into the interior of the 
 country, having penetrated 300 or 400 miles 
 northward beyond the limits of his former 
 travels. He found a country abounding with 
 rivers, some of much greater magnitude than 
 he had hitherto seen in Africa, and an interest- 
 ing population, far more numerous than the 
 native tribes further south. Though speaking 
 different languages, they generally understood 
 
86 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 the Sichuana, in which Dr. L. preached to 
 tliem the gtwpel. They recciveu him with 
 kindness, and ne purposes, with the sanction 
 which he has receive(i from the directors, to 
 return and establish a mission among them. 
 
 In 1848, Rev. J. J. Freeman, Home Secre- 
 tary of the London Missionary Society, paid a 
 visit to South Africa, for the purpose of devis- 
 ing means for rendering the missions more effi- 
 cient ; to inquire into the best means of econ- 
 omizing the society's funds ; and to aid in car- 
 rying into eflfcct any new arrangements. He 
 visited all the stations, and gave a highly en- 
 coui-aging account of their condition ; but he 
 agrees with Mr. Moffat and Dr. Philip, in his 
 views of the oppression exercised towards the 
 natives by the Dutch boers and other colonists, 
 as well as by the impolitic measures of the 
 colonial government ; — bv means of which, the 
 cause of missions is greatly embarrassed. And 
 he expresses the fear that the native tribes, 
 though yet numerous, may be destined to ex- 
 tinction. Slavery among the Dutch emigrants 
 still exists. Mr. Freeman gives an account 
 of a party of them visiting a peaceable settle- 
 ment of natives, and demanding the orphan 
 children ; and, on being refused, they took the 
 children of the people by force, and on resist- 
 ance being made, shot down the men, and car- 
 ried off their children. 
 
 The following table will exhibit the present 
 condition of the several mission stations : 
 
 by the Kaffre war and the Dutch boers. Not- 
 withstanding the excitement and the unsettled 
 state of things, consequent upon a state of 
 war, this table presents the churches in a 
 healthy state. The yearly additions have, in 
 some cases, been large ; while the average is 
 eleven to a missionary, which is, we fear, 
 greater than the average yearly additions to 
 our country churches. The aggregate of 
 church members shows the number of converts 
 to be equal to 134 to each missionary. This, 
 taken in connection with all the incidental 
 good accomplislied, shows a large return for 
 the labor bestowed. — Moffat's Southern Africa ; 
 Dr. Philip's Researches in South Africa ; Re- 
 ports of the London Missionary Society; Lon- 
 don Missionary Register; Freeman's Tour in 
 South Africa. 
 
 Wiesleyan Missionary Society. — The first mis- 
 sionary sent to South Africa by the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society was John McKenny of Colo- 
 raine, Ireland. Some pious soldiers m an En« 
 glish regiment, at the Cape of Good Hope, in 
 1812, requested the English Wesleyan Confer- 
 ence, to send them a man to preach the gospel. 
 Mr. McKenny offered himself for this service. 
 On his arrival at Cape Town, in August, 
 1814, he applied to the Governor, Lord Somer- 
 set, for permission to preach, but this was re- 
 fused ; and after several efforts at usefulness, in 
 some other way, he was ordered to Ceylon the 
 next year, to join the band of missionaries 
 which had gone out with Dr. Coke. 
 
 Barnabas Shaw, a name which will ever be 
 remembered in connection with South Africa, 
 offered himself for the mission field in 1815. 
 On his way to the Cape of Good Hope, he and 
 his devoted wife buried their only little one" in 
 the '•' deep, deep sea." On their arrival, they 
 applied to the Governor for the usual license 
 to exercise his ministry at Cape Town. " His 
 excellency replied, that considering the high 
 and responsible office which he sustained, to- 
 gether with the adequate supply of clergy- 
 men for both the Dutch and English popula- 
 tion, and that several of the slaveholders were 
 opposed to the instruction of the colored 
 classes, he could not grant the sanction required. 
 These restrictions on religious liberty had been 
 imposed by the Dutch government in 1804. 
 But Mr. Shaw believing that the command 
 of the " King of kinp," could not be counter- 
 manded by any earthly authority, proceeded to 
 open his commission as God's ambassador, on 
 the following Sabbath day to a congregation 
 composed of soldiers. His heart, however, 
 was set on preaching Christ to the perishing 
 heathen, and he earnestly looked for an oppor- 
 tunity to do so. Just at this juncture, 
 Refv. H. Schemlen, missionary of the London 
 Missionary Society, arrived in Cape Town, 
 with some Namaquas. Mr. Shaw sought an 
 interview with them, and was encouraged by 
 The stations marked * have been broken up I Mr. Schemlen to attempt a mission among the 
 
 Paarl 
 
 Caledon Institution 
 
 Pocaltsdorp 
 
 Hanke V & Kruis Fontein 
 
 Port Elizabeth 
 
 Uitenhage 
 
 Graham's Town 
 
 Graaf Reinet 
 
 Colesberg 
 
 Geor:ge Town 
 
 Somerset 
 
 Kat River* (before the war in 1860) 
 
 Cradock 
 
 liOng Kloof or Avontuur 
 
 Fort Beaufort 
 
 DysaWorp 
 
 BetheLsdorp 
 
 King William's Town 
 
 Knapp's Hope * (1850) 
 
 Peelton* (1850) 
 
 Griqua Town 
 
 liekatlong 
 
 Philopolis 
 
 Kururaan 
 
 Mamusa * (1850) 
 
 Mabotsa* (1852) 
 
 Kolobeng • 
 
 Matebe * 
 
 Stations 28 
 
 127 
 230 
 
 241 
 
 214 
 
 67 
 
 36 
 
 32 
 
 177 
 
 600 
 
 27 
 
 199 
 
 164 
 
 171 
 
 91 
 
 72 
 
 16 
 
 40 
 
 550 
 
 460 
 
 324 
 
 187 
 
 115 
 
 6 
 
 S2|4,501 
 
 12 
 
 353 
 
 105 
 
 70 
 91 
 85 
 30 
 50 
 350 
 
 250 
 125 
 40 
 16 
 
 200 
 120 
 125 
 
 70 
 
 3,483 1,757 
 
APRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 37 
 
 heathen beyond the Orange river. But the 
 difficulties surrounding him were many and 
 great. He had not yet the sanction of the 
 committee for such an undertaking ; then the 
 expense would be great, and besides, his wife's 
 health was very feeble. But in this emergency 
 this intrepid and devoted woman urged her 
 husband to undertake the arduous enterprise, 
 and pledged her personal property to sustain 
 it, should the committee in London not be 
 willing to bear the expense. This decided 
 him. A wagon and oxen, with other neces- 
 saries, were immediately purchased, and Bar- 
 nabas Shaw and his wife, without knowing 
 where they should find a resting place, or to 
 whom they should go, set off on their journey 
 through the African wilderness. They soon 
 crossed the bounds of civilLzation ; and with 
 the thermometer sometimes standing llOo in 
 the shade, they plodded on their weary journey, 
 and on the evening of the 27th day, they met 
 a party of Hottentots, accompanied by a chief, 
 who encamped near them. Mr. Shaw entered 
 into conversation with them, and to his sur- 
 prise and delight the chief informed him that 
 having heard of the " Great Word," he was on 
 his way to Cape Town to seek a Christian 
 missionary, to teach him and his people the 
 way of salvation, Th^y had already traveled 
 200 miles, and there were yet nearly 300 more 
 before they could reach Cape Town. It was 
 certain that they could obtain no missionary 
 there ; and that a peculiar providence arranged 
 this meeting. Had either party started but 
 half an hour earlier on their journey, they 
 must have missed each other, they coming 
 from Little Namaqualand, and Mr. Shaw fac- 
 ing toward Great Namaqualand. The delight 
 of this poor heathen chief may be imagined, 
 when, after listening to his affectionate state- 
 ment, Mr. Shaw informed him that he was a 
 missionary of the Cross looking for a people 
 to whom he might preach Jesus Christ ; and 
 when he agreed to go back with him to his 
 tribe, the chief wept aloud, " and rejoiced as 
 one that had found great spoil." They pur- 
 sued their way through deep forests, and across 
 the most rugged and precipitous mountains, 
 (over which even 14 oxen could hardly draw 
 the wagon,) and when within two or three 
 days' journey of their destination, the chief 
 hurried on to inform his people of his success. 
 On the last day of the journey, between 20 
 and 30 Namaquas, mounted on young oxen, 
 came hurrying on to meet and welcome the 
 missionaries. They approached at full gallop, 
 their eyes sparkling with delight, and having 
 saluted them, set off again at the top of their 
 speed to announce their approach, when the 
 whole town turned out to meet them. vNext 
 day a council was held, which was opened with 
 prayer, and a sermon from, " This is a faithful 
 saying," &c., and before the termination of the 
 discourse, the chief and many of his people 
 wept aloud. After which Mr. Scfiemlen, on 
 
 behalf of Mr. Shaw, propounded a series of 
 questions, relating to the establishment of a 
 mission, to all of which most satisfactory an- 
 swers were given. This devoted German mis- 
 sionary, having seen them safely at their desti- 
 nation, left them for his own field of labor, dis- 
 tant four weeks' journey. 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Shaw found themselves sur- 
 rounded by heathen, far from friends, and 
 scarcely yet able to speak the language, so as 
 to make themselves understood. They took up 
 their abode in a hut, with neither chimney, 
 door, or window, and without furniture, sleep- 
 ing on a mat laid upon the bare ground. The 
 day was devoted to manual labor — building a 
 house and tilling the ground,— and the evenings 
 to communicating religious instruction. With- 
 in one month of his arrival, he was rejoiced to 
 ^ee some fruit of his labor. Soon a chapel 
 was erected, a school commenced, a class 
 formed, and a deep religious feeling extended 
 itself among the people. In the month of 
 June, Mr. Shaw admitted 17 adults into the 
 Christian churcli by the ordinance of baptism ; 
 in July the Lord's Supper was administered for 
 the first time, and in December, the first Love' 
 Feast was held. The converts delivered their 
 sentiments with great freedom and simplicity, 
 of which the following are specimens : " Peter 
 Links rose and said, ' I was formerly an enemy 
 to missionaries, and when some wished to have 
 one, I opposed it ; but now I am thankful for 
 the word. I love it. It has taught me that I 
 am a great sinner. When I felt this I wan- 
 dered about eating bitter bushes hoping there- 
 by to make atonement for my sins ; but I never 
 found peace till I heard Jesus came to save 
 the lost. I am thankful for what the book 
 says, ' Come, let us reason together, though 
 your sins be as scarlet,' &c. I have been like 
 a poor little silly lamb, which is only just be- 
 ginning to go. When the ewe goes from it 
 a short distance, it turns aside, first to one 
 bush and then to another. The ewe has her 
 eye upon it, and goes back again to it, and 
 does all she can to induce it to follow her and 
 will not forsake it. So the Lord has done for 
 me.' The chief followed. His remarks were 
 very brief : 'All the sins I have committed,' 
 said he, ' from my childhood to the present 
 time, seemed to be placed before my mind.' 
 Yery soon afterward he found mercy, and told 
 Mr. Shaw, that ' though he had been extreme- 
 ly sorrowful on account of the weight of his 
 sins, the burden had been removed by the 
 grace of God, and his mind was now 'filled 
 Avith peace and joy.' Old Trooi rose up and 
 said, * When I first saw my sins I felt pain in 
 my heart ; and by night, when all the people 
 were sleeping in their huts, I could not close 
 my eyes. I got up and went out. I wandered 
 to and fro. I lay down on my hands and 
 knees to pray. When I found one who told 
 me what I should do to be saved, I was so de- 
 lighted that I knew not how to go away. ' " 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 In the depths of the African wilderness that 
 sanic Divine Spirit, which had moved his peo- 
 ple in England to undertake the mission, was 
 enlightening the darkness of this people, and 
 leadnig them to the enjoyment of a personal 
 salvation through the labors of their solitary 
 Biissionary. Early in 1818, Rev. E. Edunrds 
 arrived at Lily Fountain, (the name of the sta- 
 tion,) to assist Mr. Shaw. His coming was 
 most oj)portune, and greatly delighted the peo- 
 ple. In gratitude for his an-ival, the natives 
 cheered them with " songs in the night." In 
 tlieir state of ignorance they had often danced 
 at midnight to the sound of the kommet-pot, 
 and now, beneath the same bright moon, in the 
 calm stillness of the night, the mission party 
 are startled from their slumbers by the sound 
 of distant music. They rise and listen, and 
 as it comes nearer, they discover it to be A'- 
 happy band of the redeemed heathen going 
 from hut to hut, and the song that rose on the 
 midnight air was " a new song " — a hymn of 
 praise, in their own language, to their Redeem- 
 er, one verse of which according to their cus- 
 tom was often repeated : 
 
 " Faith loves the Saviour and beholds 
 
 His sufferings, death and pain ; 
 
 And this shall ne'er be old nor cold. 
 
 Till wo with him shall reign." 
 
 As they went onward they called on the head 
 of each family to engage in prayer, and thus 
 left in their track the cloud of incense rising up 
 from the domestic altar, acceptable before God. 
 
 The committee had sent out with Mr. Ed- 
 wards a forge and some iron, with other means 
 of improvement. They set to work, and made 
 ploughshares and other implements of indus- 
 try, and soon agriculture began to show its 
 happy effects around them. Nothing surprized 
 them more than the heated iron, and the sparks 
 from the anvil. It was to them the day of 
 wonder ; and as the Greeks bemoaned the lot 
 of their ancestors, who had not lived to see 
 Alexander on the throne of Darius, so the Nor 
 maqiLas seemed to lament the lot of their fath- 
 ers who had died before a forge was set up 
 in their camp. . A school-house was built, and 
 with the assistance of Mr. Edwards, education 
 began more rapidly to difinse its blessings. 
 
 As an illustration of the difficulties attend- 
 ing the introduction of letters among a barba- 
 rous people, Mr. Shaw, when in England, 
 about 1841, stated in the hearing of the wri- 
 ter, that for weeks he had tried in vain to 
 make the Namaquas understand that the large 
 letters he had traced on cards and hung up 
 before them, each stood for a separate sound, 
 and that their combination gave a word or 
 idea. They looked astonished and burst into 
 a loud laugh. He was growing disheartened ; 
 but recollecting they had a name for each bul- 
 lock, he again hung up his letters on a tree, 
 while the Namaquas sat in a circle on the 
 ground, and pointing to the first letter said, 
 "There is bullock A," and to the second, 
 
 " There is bullock B," and so on. Their eyes 
 brightened ; they had caught the idea, and he 
 had no more trouble. 
 
 A good chapel and a mission house were 
 erected. Meanwhile the work of God deep- 
 ened in the hearts of the people. An awaken- 
 ing commenced. Even the children held meet- 
 ings for prayer by themselves. Clad in their 
 karosses of sheepskin, they bowed before the 
 Lord, and sung joyful hosannas to the Son 
 of David. 
 
 The news of this good work spread from 
 tribe to tribe, and soon the cry was heard from 
 distant places, "Come over and help us." Some 
 of the Lily Fountain people went on a visit to 
 a tribe of Mulattoes, about sixty miles off, car- 
 rying with them two little girls who had been 
 taught to read and sing ; and so eager were 
 those poor heathen to learn something of the 
 way of life, that they kept the two little girls 
 reading, praying, singing and answering ques- 
 tions incessantly, scarcely allowing them any 
 rest day or night. A desire was thus awak- 
 ened in the breasts of many to be " taught the 
 way of God more perfectly." One of the men 
 of the tribe soon arrived at the station, and 
 told the missionaries that the people living 
 near him, who had never heard a sermon or 
 seen a missionary, were^^ longing for the gospel. 
 Mr. Shaw visited the tribe, (in Bushman-land,) 
 and preached there a few days. 
 
 In February, 1819, a Hottentot from a dis- 
 tant tribe, arrived at the station, and address- 
 ing the missionaries said, " My errand in com- 
 ing here is to request that you will come and 
 teach us, at our place, the good tidings of the 
 gospel. I am now an old man, and have long 
 thought of the world. I now desire to forget 
 the world and seek something for my soul. 
 We have many people — Bastards, (Griquas,) 
 Hottentots, and Bushmen, all of them earnest- 
 ly desiring the gospel. I could not sleep, but 
 rose early in the morning, and went to one of 
 my friends, whose house was a considerable 
 distance from mine, to speak with him. I 
 found him in the very same state of mind with 
 myself, longing to hear the gospel and greatly 
 troubled. I stood amazed, and said this must 
 be from God ; if it be not from him I know 
 not from whence it has come. I will go to 
 the Khamies mountain and hear for myself. 
 He said, if you (the missionary,) will go with 
 me, or come to us, we will send a wagon and 
 oxen for you. If I cannot procure men (though 
 I am now old) I will come myself; and be as- 
 sured I will never leave you. I will give all 
 my cattle over to the other people, and live 
 free from worldly care ; but you must come 
 soon." 
 
 Could it be possible that a mind thus 
 drawn by the Spirit of God, (or those anxious 
 ones in the tribes he represented,) would be 
 left to grope its way in darkness ? No, at the 
 very time these words were being uttered in 
 Africa, the Committee in London were raak- 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 39 
 
 ing arrangements to reinforce the mission ; 
 and soon the Rev. J. Archbcll, with his excel- 
 lent wife were on their way. They arrived at 
 Lily Fountain in July ; and two weeks after, 
 in company with Mr. Shaw, they proceeded to 
 open the new station in Bushmanland, at a place 
 called Reed Fountain, about two days' journey 
 from Lily Fountain to the east. The old Ho1> 
 tentot received them with joy ; ground was 
 selected, and a station formed, where the word 
 of life was dispensed and eagerly received by 
 this people. 
 
 The pious natives of Khamies Berg (or 
 mountain) continued to improve both in tem- 
 poral and spiritual matters ; and were as a 
 city set on a hill. Their light shone in wor- 
 shiping God in their families. Mr. Shaw 
 testifies concerning them : — " Oft have I heard 
 them engaged in family prayer, before the 
 sun had gilded the tops of the mountains, nor 
 were their evening devotions neglected. As 
 I have stood by the mission house, with the 
 curtains of night drawn around us, I could 
 hear them singing their beautiful evening 
 hymn: 
 
 "0 Christ eternal, light divine. 
 
 Who constantly on us doth shine ; 
 Thy presence shall be with us here, 
 
 Though neither sun nor moon appear." 
 
 Then falling on their knees they felt the pre- 
 sence of the Most High, and the fulfilment of 
 the promise, * The habitation of the just shall 
 be blessed.' " The happy change was thus 
 illustrated by one of their old men : " Myn- 
 heer, before we received the gospel we were 
 like an egg before the chicken is hatched ; we 
 were surrounded with darkness, and could see 
 nothing ; but when the gospel came it broke 
 the shell, and now we see the light of day ! " 
 Religion also led to temporal comfort. When 
 the mission commenced in 1816, the habits of 
 the people were filthy in the extreme, so that 
 the effluvia from a congregation of them was 
 enough to make the missionary sick. But no 
 sooner did they receive the gospel than they 
 washed and clothed themselves. Instead of 
 living on roots, or by the chase, and creeping 
 into a smoky hut, or a hole in the earth to sleep, 
 they built houses and cultivated the soil and 
 received the reward of their labor ; so that of 
 many a spot in South Africa it may now be 
 said, " There he maketh the hungry to dwell, 
 that they may prepare a city for habitation, 
 and sow fields and plant vineyards, which may 
 yield the fruits of increase." Geo. Tiwmvson 
 Esq., and also Sir James E. Alexander nave 
 both, in their respective volumes of Travels, 
 put on record a most pleasing testimony con- 
 cerning this mission and others established by 
 Mr. Shaw and his associates in South Africa. 
 In 1820, Mr. Shaw undertook a journey to 
 some of the tribes beyond the Orange river in 
 order to explore the country and to avail him- 
 self of any opening which might be presented 
 for the further spread of the gospel. His jour- 
 
 nal contains a record of dangers and toils 
 and efforts, which has few parallels even in 
 missionary history. Besides the burning sun 
 and wind, they were constantly exposed to 
 wild beasts and to savage men ; often in dan- 
 ger of dying by hunger and thirst, or losing 
 their way in the wilderness, or being dashed to 
 pieces over the precipices round which they 
 had to climb. But God preserved them ; 
 and after fourteen weeks' absence, they re- 
 turned in safety. He made his report to the 
 committee in London, and applied to the col- 
 onial governor. Sir K. Donkin, who kindly per- 
 mitted and encouraged him to open missions 
 among the chiefs he had visited, many of whom 
 had requested to have Christian teachers sent 
 to them. 
 
 In 1821, the mission Avas enlarged by the 
 arrival of three more missionaries. Mr. Arch- 
 bell and the Hottentot assistant missionary, 
 Jacob Links, being sent to the Great Nama- 
 quas, Messrs. Kay and Broadbent were sent to 
 commence a mission in the Bechuana country, 
 and Mr. Hodgson to remain at the Cape, where 
 permission had at leug*th been obtained to 
 communicate religious instruction to the slave 
 population. The Albany and Kafiraria mis- 
 sion had been commenced the year before by 
 Wm. Shaw, (brother of Barnabas,) and two 
 missionaries were also appointed to Madagas- 
 car. The next year the devoted William 
 Threlfall was sent to assist Mr. William 
 Shaw. Being again reinforced in 1823, Mr. 
 W. Shaw opened a mission among the Kalfres 
 under the protection of the Kaffre monarch, 
 Pato, and Mr. Threlfall and Mr. Whitvmrth 
 proceeded to open a mission still farther east, 
 in Delagoa Bay. While Mr. Edwards left 
 Khamies Berg to establish a station among 
 the Cor annas, on the banks of the Orange 
 river, at a place called Moos. This and the 
 station at Maquasse (about three degrees east 
 of the junction of the Oradock, and one day's 
 journey north of Orange river,) were much 
 interfered with by incursions of savage tribes 
 in their vicinity. Mount Coke, on the Bufialo 
 river, was established the following year. The 
 missionaries were engaged in their great work, 
 learning the languages, building school-houses 
 and places of worship, and preaching the word 
 of life with considerable success when an 
 event transpired which filled them with the 
 deepest sorrow. They were called to resign 
 part of their number to become the first mar- 
 tyrs of the Methodist missions to South 
 Africa. Among the first fruits of Barnabas 
 Shaw's ministry at Khamies Berg, in 1816, was 
 the family of the Links. This converted Hotten- 
 tot family alone furnished three native teachers 
 of such decided piety and suitable knowledge 
 of the truth as to be very useful in the mission. 
 One of these was Jacob Links, who was at firet 
 employed as interpreter. But his progress in 
 knowledge and piety was such that he soon bo- 
 gan to preach himself, and accompanied Mr. 
 
40 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 Shaw in his various visits to neighboring 
 trilu's. He was very useful ; in 1818, the con- 
 ference accepted him us an assistant mission- 
 ary, and phieed his name upon the minutes. 
 Besides his own language, (the Namaqua,) he 
 could preach in the l>utch, and he also learned 
 English, that he might have access to its reli- 
 gious literature. As an instance of his shrewd- 
 uess : One day he and Mr. Shaw encountered 
 a Dutch boer, who stoutly denied that the Bi- 
 ble or the gospel was ever intended for Hot- 
 tentots. Links looked him in tlie face and 
 replied, " Master, you told me that our names 
 did not stand in the Book. Will you now tell 
 me whether the name of Dutchman or English- 
 man is to be found in it ?" No answer was 
 given, and Jacob continued, " Master, you call 
 us heathens. That is our name. Now I find 
 that the Book says that Jesus came as a light 
 to lighten the heathen, so we reati our name in 
 the Book ! " The Dutchman was silenced. 
 
 On another occasion, Mr. Shaw says, "At 
 the time of our going into Namaqualand, most 
 of the distant (Dutch) farmers not only disap- 
 proved of the heathen being instructed, but 
 some of them endeavored to turn it all into 
 ridicule. One of them declared to me that he 
 believed the Namaquas were only a species of 
 wild dog, and had no souls. I therefore called 
 Jacob Links, who was with me at the time, 
 and offered to prove that Jacob, though a dog, 
 could both read and write better than the far- 
 mer. I believe the farmer could do neither ; 
 and finding himself in an awkward situation, 
 he called for his horse and rode hastily away." 
 In gratitude for his recognition as an assistant 
 missionary by the committee in London, Jacob 
 Links wrote them the following very interesting 
 letter, which gives additional particulars of his 
 personal history. This letter was written in 
 Dutch, in a very good hand. Only three years 
 previous to its date the writer of it was an ig- 
 norant Hottentot ; let the reader bear this in 
 mind, and then answer the question to his own 
 conscience, whether or no the gospel of Christ 
 is adequate to elevate and save the most de- 
 graded of mankind ? The following is a lite- 
 ral translation : 
 
 EINE, ) 
 
 >• L 
 
 nen ;— Tl 
 
 "Africa, Leelie Fonteine 
 Nov. 19, 1819 
 '^Unknown but Reverend. Gentlemen :— The 
 salutations which you sent, I received from 
 our beloved teachers, and wish you and the So- 
 ciety much peace and prosperity in the name 
 of the Lord. I have long been desirous of 
 writing you concerning my former and present 
 state, but on account of weakness in the Dutch 
 language, I have been hindered. I hope, how- 
 ever, your goodness will excuse and wank at 
 my fault. Before I heard the gospel I was in 
 gross darkness, ignorant of myself as a sinner, 
 and knew not that I had gfn immortal soul ; 
 nor had I any knowledge of him who is called 
 Jesus. I was so stupid that when a Hottentot 
 
 camo by us who prayed to the Lord, I thought 
 he was asking his teacher* for all these things 
 of which he spoke in his prayer. Sometime 
 after this another Namaqua came upon our 
 place. He spoke much of sin and also of J e- 
 sus. By means of his conversation I was very 
 sorrowful and much affected, and knew not 
 what to do. My mother having some leaves 
 of an old Dutch psalm boolfj I thought if I ate 
 them I might then find comfort. I ate the 
 leaves up but my sorrow was not lessened. I 
 then ^ot upon the roof of an old house to pray, 
 thinking if I were high the Lord would hear 
 me better ; but I found no deliverance. I then 
 ate all sorts of bitter bushes, for I thought the 
 Lord might possibly have mercy on me. But 
 my heaviness did not then go away. I then 
 heard that I must give my cause over to Jesus, 
 and tried to do so, by which I found much 
 lighter. There was then no one in this coun- 
 try to tell us of Jesus, and I desired to go to 
 the Great river, (the Orange river, near 200 
 miles off,) to learn from the word. I was now 
 persecuted both by black and white. I^he 
 [Dutch] farmers said if we were taught by mis- 
 sionaries we should be seized as slaves. Some 
 said I had lost my senses ; and my mother be- 
 lieving this to be the case, wept over me. Af- 
 ter this a missionary on his journey to Pella, 
 remained some weeks with our chief ; but as 
 I was tending cattle in the Bushman-land, I 
 heard nothing. Then our chief and four other 
 persons went to seek one who could teach us. 
 I was at this full of joy ; and when they re- 
 turned, and I saw the teacher (Mr. Shaw) 
 whom the Lord had sent us, it was the happi- 
 est day for me that I ever knew. Through the 
 word that the Lord gave the missionary to 
 speak I learnt that my heart was bad, and that 
 nothing but the precious blood of Christ could 
 cleanse me from my sins. I also found Jesus 
 to be the way of life and the sinner's friend ; 
 and I now feel the most tender pity for all 
 those who are ignorant of God. I often feel 
 sweetness for my soul whilst I speak about the 
 gospel, and my own experience in the Lord. 
 Before our English teacher came we were all 
 sitting in the shadow of death. The farmers 
 around us told us that if we prayed they would 
 flog us, and some of them eY&a threatened to 
 shoot us dead if we attempted to pray. They 
 said we were not men but baboons, and that 
 God was blasphemed by the prayers of Nama- 
 quas, and would punish us for daring to call 
 upon him. Now, however, we thank the Lord 
 that he has taught us by his servants, and thAt 
 he hath also given His son to die for us. We 
 hear likewise, that many people in England ro- 
 member us in their prayers ; and we hope they 
 
 * This was the Jate Mr. Albrecht, missionary at Pella. 
 The Hottentot above mentioned held service among the 
 people where be happened to go. Jacob Links heard him 
 pray, but had no idea of God as a Being to be thus ad- 
 dressed. 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 41 
 
 will not forget us. The society ot all praying 
 people are by me saluted. 
 
 An unworthy Namaqua, 
 
 JACOB LINKS." 
 
 This monument of the mercy of God con- 
 tinued to grow in grace and knowledge, and 
 with great acceptance to exercise his abilities 
 in preaching Christ to his own people and to 
 the tribes around them. About this time a 
 deep feeling of commiseration for the perish- 
 ing heathen beyond the Orange river, had ta- 
 ken hold of the church at Lily Fountain. And 
 notwithstanding the distance and the danger, 
 Jacob Links had already offered, if no Euro- 
 pean missionary could be obtained, that he 
 would take one of his Christian brethren with 
 him, and go and live among the G-reat Nama- 
 
 this time (early in 1825) the Rev. W. Threl- 
 fall arrived at Lily Fountain. Mr. Threlfall 
 was a young man of amiable spirit and man- 
 ners, of deep piety and of great promise as a 
 Christian missionary. He left a home in Eng- 
 land where the attractions of wealth and so- 
 cial enjoyment presented their charms in vain 
 to detain him from the settled purpose of his 
 heart to preach Christ to the heathen. He 
 was appointed to Africa in 1822. But his de- 
 cided predilection was for Madagascar, and he 
 hoped to be allowed to proceed there from Af- 
 rica. When on the point of embarking, (in 
 addition to a donation of £100 which he for- 
 warded to the Missionary Society,) he nobly 
 intimated to the committee that if the low 
 state of their funds was the difficulty which 
 prevented their assent to commence a mission 
 in Madagascar, if they would furnish another 
 missionary to go with him, he would himself 
 meet that difficulty. There never went fortli 
 a more devotad missionary than W. Threlfall. 
 On landing in Africa and beholding what had 
 been done already by the labors of the mis- 
 sionaries, he was so delighted that he wept for 
 joy. After laboring in Albany for a time, he 
 proceeded to Delagoa Bay. He made great 
 proficiency in acquiring the language ; but in 
 the midst of his labors and usefulness his 
 health failed and he set sail for Cape Town. 
 On the voyage he and all on board were pros- 
 trated with fever ; eleven of the crew died, in- 
 cluding first and second mates, and the helm 
 of the ship was tied a-lee, for no one had 
 strength to steer, and she drifted in distress, 
 till discovered, when she was run into Table 
 Bay. Believing himself dying, Mr. Threlfall 
 took his pocket book and wrote, " My request 
 to my beloved father is, that whatever proper- 
 ty he intended to give me may be devoted to 
 the missionary cause." The vessel was pro- 
 hibited from entering the harbor, and no com- 
 munication allowed between her and the town. 
 No one would venture to the ship. In this 
 awful emergency the Rev. J. W/iitworth, Wes- 
 leyan missionary, then at the Cape, volunteered 
 
 to go on board the infected vessel and attend 
 to the sufferers, and under express stipulation 
 that he was not to return till the quarantine 
 was taken off. Providing himself with medi- 
 cines, (fee, he went on board, and God not only 
 preserved him but also made him the instrument 
 of raising up all the rest ; and on the 25th of 
 May, Mr. Threlfall, with the captain and crew 
 landed, praising God for their deliverance. 
 Mr. Threlfall then proceeded to Lily Fountain 
 to join Mr. Shaw, and concert measures with 
 him for extending the cause of Christ among 
 the heathen. Mr. Shaw was delighted with 
 him. His piety and zeal and love for souls 
 was ever apparent. After regaining his health 
 in some good measure, he projected a mission to 
 the Great Namaquas on the north-west ; and 
 finding " a true yoke-fellow" in Jacob Links, 
 
 quas, and teach them the way of life. Just at! levpry thing was soon arranged, and he, with Ja- 
 
 cob Links and Jonas Jager, a native exhorter, 
 left Lily Fountain on their perilous journey 
 in June, 1825. Mr. Shaw heard from the party 
 up to Aug. 6th. They were at that date suffer- 
 ing much from the disturbed state of the coun- 
 tries through which they were passing, and also 
 from deficiency of food ; but still trusting in 
 God. No further information arriving, and 
 several months passing over, fears began to 
 be entertained for their safety, which were 
 soon afterwards confirmed. It appears that a 
 cruel ruffian, well known to the different tribes 
 in Namaqualand as a blood-thirsty savage, 
 who lived by plunder and murder, had with 
 some others like minded, placed himself in Mr. 
 Threlfall's path, and offered to become guide to 
 the party. One night while they were asleep, 
 he and his confederates rose and murdered 
 them. Jonas Jager was shot while asleep. 
 They then turned on Jacob Links and shot 
 him, his last breath being spent in warning 
 and exhorting his murderers and commending 
 his soul to his Eedeemer. Mr. Threlfall at- 
 tempted to fly, but a shot struck him and he 
 fell, and the cruel assassin came up and pierced 
 him near the heart with his assagay, and killed 
 him. 
 
 The only motive for this dreadful act was 
 to obtain the few trifling articles which they 
 had taken with them to provide food. Both 
 Jacob and Jonas left wives and families to be- 
 moan their loss, and all of them were under 
 thirty years of age ; cut down thus mysteriously 
 in their bloom, at a time when the Church was 
 expecting great results from their holy and 
 zealous efforts. 
 
 Information having reached the chief Afri- 
 caner, he pursued and at length arrested the 
 party, and then sent information to the British 
 authorities at the Cape. The murderer was 
 sent to the colony to be executed. On his way 
 he was led through Lily Fountain, and the 
 whole village turned out to see him ; but 
 mark the change Christianity had wrought. 
 The friends of the murdered men crowded 
 round him, not to upbraid or torment, Ibut to 
 
42 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 exhort him to think of his awfiil condition, 
 and earnestfy repent before he left the world ; 
 and with an exonplification of the most ex- 
 alted Christian charity, Martha, the sister of 
 Jacob Links, said to the uuhappy wretch— 
 • Although yOQ haTe munloreil my brother, 
 nevertheleaB, I am sorry for you, because yon 
 are indifl^voit to the mlvation of yoor sonL" 
 The death of Mr. ThrelM produced a deep 
 sensation in England, as well as in AJrica; 
 and the Christian bard, JUbii<^;oM«ry, celebrat- 
 ed his untimely end in one of his most beautiful 
 and pathetic productions. There was no re- 
 serve in the cmring iThich Mr. Threlfall laid 
 npon the miswfmaiy altar; his life, his 
 blood, his property, his aU, were joyfuUy 000- 
 secrated in sndi a serrice. And, although, 
 
 themsdves among the savages of Eaffiraria. — 
 From their labors have resulted 19 stations, 
 besides those of Wesley ville and Coke's Mount, 
 in the Albany and Kaffraria District. In the 
 Port Natai atid Amaziua Distriet ihssre are five 
 stations ; and in the Cape of Good Hope Dis- 
 trict there are nine, all of which with full infor- 
 mation will be found in the tabular view at 
 the end of this article. 
 
 The peculiar difficulties which our misdon- 
 ariee have to encounter in their labors among 
 these peonle, arise from their feudal customs, 
 their wandering life, (being herdsmen,) and the 
 restless and warlike spirit of the Kaffi^es on the 
 east coast. But, notwithstanding these diffi- 
 culties the Gospel has been planted ; schools 
 and churches gathered; education and the 
 
 none living know where he sleeps — his devoted | press have he&n introduced ; hundreds have 
 life has not heesa in vain, either to the posterity, .been truly converted to God ; the savagism 
 
 of Ham, or to the living Church of God. Re- 
 deemed Afrka wiU yet place his name in the 
 calendar of her saints and martyrs; and 
 iHien "the Chief Shqoherd shall appear," 
 Thrdfall shall *" be with him in glory.'' 
 
 It is but just io add, that the wish he penned 
 in his monorandnm l>ook, on board the plague 
 Am^ was honored, after hk death, by his ex- 
 cdL^t father, so tiiat, including his own do- 
 nalioos and his effects, the noble sum of nearly 
 $8,000 was preseitted, in his behalf, to md 
 mi^onary cause. 
 
 Ajiimated by suc^ an example, his brethren 
 followed un his efibrt Great Namaquahnd 
 was altered; andtintheooantiywhereheMl, 
 ibe society in whose service he sacrifioed his 
 fife, has now two s t ati on s, two missionaries, 
 six local preadios, and tiraoitf-one teachera, 
 with nearly 400 church membeis, and more 
 than 1800 Great Xamaquas under religiDos in- 
 struction. 
 
 Barnabas Shaw came home to England, to 
 recrait his health in 1837 ; but he shortly afti»> 
 ictomed to Africa, to resume his labors, and 
 after 45 years of ministerial toil and sufi^ing, 
 this ** Apostle of Wesleyan Miasioiis in Soom 
 Airica," is still at his po^ diligently emploved ; 
 while his son, on the qpoi wnere he first ^w 
 tiaefaiealhof fife^becune the sncoessor of his 
 Tenoable fether, in the care of the Skawties 
 Berg Ghirc^ till forced firam hia positioii by 
 iaifaire of health in 1848. 
 
 W. Shaw, the brother of Bainahas, mean^ 
 i^die, was engaged with his associates in ex- 
 tenfiog the Gospel on tiweasi eoaBt^andin 
 tiie interior, among the Bechoanasi, as fer np 
 asPIaalberginkL28. 
 
 The JBrnoi nission was of^pnally 
 
 of the unreclaimed, in some measure, softened 
 down ; and a large number are now before the 
 Throne, who have died rejoicing in the faith 
 which the missionaries first carried to them 30 
 years ago. An hutitutionfor training native 
 teaAen is in qporation in Kaffiraria, and also a 
 vnntiMg press, from whidli, besides Bibles, 
 Hymn Boo^ &C there is regularly issued a 
 periodical in the KaflGre language. There isalso 
 anotha* press at Grahams Town, and another 
 among ue BeAuanai, The langui^^ employ- 
 ed by the missionaries are ih% Engiith, the 
 Dutdh^ the Kaffre, the Basso, the SesutOj the 
 6rre6o, and the Sickuana. 
 
 The leading authorities for this article are 
 the " Annual Bg^orts/* and " Misskmary No- 
 tices/* of the Wesl^an MissiooaiT Society; 
 the "" Annuai Minutes " of the Wesleyan Con- 
 ference ; " The WesUyan Methodist Magazine T 
 '^ Shames Memoriab ef £buf& M^"^^ '^ 
 « Ms§q£s SanA, 4/riai."— Rev. Wiluam But^ 
 
 It is especially gratifying to see, in the self- 
 denying luNMS of all denominations on mis- 
 sionazy ground, and the blessed results that 
 foUow, ue substantial nnify of Protestant 
 Christians. The Apostle expressed his earnest 
 deare, tiiat the {Hrimitive dis^iks, to whom he 
 wrote, might all speak the same thing, and be 
 joined together in one mind and one spirit ; 
 and this is fuffilled in the foreign missionary 
 fidd. B^f whatever diverse names they are 
 called, wbe&er Moravian, Wesleyan, ^isco- 
 pal, Presbyterian, or Bap&t, they qpeak the 
 same \m^gn^ <jt Canaan, and their ccmverts, 
 whether «'PaiihiaaB, Medes, the dwdl^s in 
 Mesopotamia," or Hottentots, Kaffires, Hindoos, 
 with ^the aettiers who wait out frtom li Chinese, or Xew Zealanders. all hear in their 
 England, in the hope tiat it would connect it-i own tongne, and speak alflce the language 
 ■elf with the -HbtJarfofa, and uHimalely provide | of penitence and feith. And, in the forgoing 
 the means for extendisg itself among ttie£G^iT' sketch, we find the €rerman Presbyterian 
 tribes. ^ Tfaoe hopes have been realized;! taking bv the hand the English Wesleyan, and 
 and the br^iren oecopying tbem have sac-[ going a mar months' joum^ into the wilder- 
 oeedvely given way to the new miaaionaries ness, to introdnce him into tbe field : and soon 
 sent oat from England^ and have planted 1 we hear the ''song in the night,'' rising up from 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 43 
 
 the joyous hearts of those who have receired 
 the Gospel firom his hands. 
 
 The following tables give a comprehensive 
 and cheering view of the results of the labors 
 of the Wesleyan Missionaries in South Africa. 
 
 There is a slight discrepancy between these 
 statistics and the table at the end of the article 
 on Africa, that ha\'ing been made out for the 
 year 1852, and these for 1854. A comparison 
 of the two will show the growth. 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 -I » pi «^ « JC ^ 
 
 illlfill 
 
 SI 
 
 o 
 
 I— < 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 3 
 
 
 <8 pc -I s: S> «w C3 ts 
 
 7 
 ? 
 
 -i 
 i 
 
 
 --^ 
 
 
 
 a|: 
 
 ^ ?ff\ \\ \ ! 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 =- 
 
 
 
 Si-: i«»ac» 
 
 
 OB 
 
 • J— tS U ,J !-»>-« i— 
 
 § 
 
 •»»CC3t»"»S»S»C 
 
 Xumber of 
 Chapels- 
 
 s|Sc»<.«o 
 
 
 g 
 
 ' oa«k.i-«*».3»aD» 
 
 «>- 
 
 »t : w-i — T : ^ 
 
 No. of othe/ 
 Preaching-Plaees. 
 
 - -- 
 
 »3>- 
 
 
 a> 
 
 »-i,_r ' '■ i-i-i^ 
 
 c 
 
 i-ii->^j-> — — ta 
 
 IGsskmariesand 
 Aisostant ditto. 
 
 tc 
 
 I 
 
 oe 
 
 : i-«^.-«»ata: M 
 
 o» 
 
 •: o.: : : : : : 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ! .. . 
 
 o 
 
 S 1 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .»-»»: »: M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 »S: ge 
 
 tzj 
 
 & 
 
 : : ooia#>>Mat 
 
 s 
 
 • SoSoodS^S 
 
 pi.| 
 
 J 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 ; : : o<»3i(^oae 
 
 o 
 
 • •-•09>-*t3: »->»« 
 
 P 
 
 i 
 
 S§iSsl 
 
 g 
 
 1 
 
 5:Ts«»§li 
 
 1 
 
 •IslSfessS 
 
 Xumber of Fan 
 and Accredited 
 Chuch Membexs. 
 
 s 
 
 §«»»« 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 ca a» '• caoo^ 
 
 i 
 
 •SSISS.o.»S 
 
 On trial fior 
 Maiboah^ 
 
 5 
 
 ——»««»«• 
 
 
 o 
 
 : t-N»-»a->-«K: 
 
 e 
 
 •c»i-«ask3».'»»ii-«ss 
 
 Niamberof SalK 
 bath-«choofe. 
 
 
 i§§iS 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 • sisiiii 
 
 1 
 
 •ligSEsal 
 
 No. of Sabbatb. 
 Seholanofbotli 
 Sexes. 
 
 cs 
 
 t-u: {->: 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 : * : Mts^ksta 
 
 i^ 
 
 •cuMWtS^ M^ i— 
 
 NomberorSaT- 
 Sehools. 
 
 3 
 
 •g- 2^ 
 
 >^ 
 
 1 
 
 ■ • • sssis 
 
 "i 
 
 •llgr 8= s 
 
 Number of Daj- 
 Scbdiaisofbath 
 Sens. 
 
 1 
 
 S§£SS 
 
 
 1 
 
 : §S§SgSI 
 
 a 
 
 *sslssas§ 
 
 1 
 
 
 II ^ 
 
 II ^ 
 
 SSrJSS 
 
 
 1 
 
 : ggggggi 
 
 i 
 
 
 5§i 
 
 1 
 
 •IsiSJi 
 
 § 
 
 issiS 
 
 
 1 
 
 ' sssilii 
 
 « 
 
 -« 
 
 *llli£iS2 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 -illii 
 
 
 • 
 
 8"* — * 
 
 1 
 
 • S £ 5 =; v' ? =? § 
 
 No. of Attendants 
 oaPabKe 
 
 dadinsltobas 
 andSdkolais. 
 
 > 
 
 I 
 
u 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 
 •kJiqoqos paw 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 ooo ooo 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O O O O O O O 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 -uj 'Juiiuo^vi. 
 
 o 
 
 § 
 
 O O O O 00 o 
 1- C^^ift O «0 00 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 SO 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 o o o o o o o 
 
 O O O O © 00 «o 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 ft r-i 
 
 
 
 <M 
 
 (N O rH <M CO rH rH 
 
 CO' 
 
 
 
 onqnj uo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 B»n«pa9uv JO ON 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iiii 
 
 . 
 
 «n 
 
 CO 
 
 CO OOCICO «ooo 
 
 tn 
 
 «o 
 
 Oi 
 
 O SO O O SO CSI © 
 
 00 
 
 OS 
 
 
 1 
 
 Q 
 
 -^ 
 
 c^ o ooco to 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 iO 
 
 rH C2 -.l^ 00 00 OS OO 
 
 o 
 
 t- 
 
 
 00 
 
 r^ 
 
 r-( CO C^ (M rH GVJ 
 
 rH 
 
 
 (M 
 
 rH CO r-i 1-i r^ r-i 
 
 00 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 Number of 
 ducting for lb 
 ittend both Se 
 d Week-Day 
 
 4i 
 
 rH 
 
 (M 
 
 »o «o r- CO CI O 
 
 t- 
 
 Ol 
 
 -* 
 
 ©O © © SO OS 00 
 
 in 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 Of) 
 
 O O OS O 00 CO 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 m 
 
 1- t- (Tl rH © © OS 
 
 in 
 
 t- 
 
 
 1 
 
 '«* 
 
 
 <M rH r-l 
 
 
 
 r-A 
 
 r—i r—i r-i r-i 
 
 --1 
 
 CO 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 lO 
 
 I-l 
 
 00 2^ O Ot1< 00 
 
 QQ 
 
 r- 
 
 »o 
 
 O© © to ©CO <M 
 
 CO 
 
 SO 
 
 
 S 
 
 if5 
 
 o 
 
 O OOOOCO 
 
 '<1< 
 
 -^ 
 
 o 
 
 -<* in (M f 00 00 00 
 
 © 
 
 «- 
 
 
 |-§ - 
 
 CO 
 
 
 rH rH rH rH 
 
 
 
 
 <-< 
 
 iH 
 
 
 •89X98 
 
 .-^ 
 
 <M 
 
 t- o o «o 
 
 
 
 as 
 
 © ©in so '^ © 
 
 CO 
 
 so 
 
 
 
 r- O • • i-H CS 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 • o Tti 00 00 m c^ 
 
 t- 
 
 i~- 
 
 
 moq JO sa«ioqog 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 rH . . 
 
 , 
 
 , 
 
 <M 
 
 .r-i r^ r-i r-i 
 
 co 
 
 r-t 
 
 
 ■Sva jo^jaqranx 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 
 •siooqag 
 
 iH 
 
 CO 
 
 C^ i-l • • rH Cq 
 
 
 • 
 
 CO 
 
 • 0=1 rH C^ rH rH rH 
 
 rH 
 
 t- 
 
 
 -i^a JO JaquinN 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 • 
 
 CO 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 •saxas moq 
 
 IM 
 
 CO 
 
 O00C<IC0 OOO 
 
 lO 
 
 «o 
 
 as 
 
 © SO ©'in © c<) © 
 
 in 
 
 ^ 
 
 on 
 
 'sIH 
 
 (M O O OCO «3 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 rH <M -rjf 00 © OS 00 
 
 -tl^ 
 
 © 
 
 JO BJBloqos-qiBq 
 
 r- 
 
 rH 
 
 rH CO <M CS rH (M 
 
 rH 
 
 
 cs 
 
 rH CO r-ir-ir-ij-i 
 
 t-> 
 
 OS 
 
 p3 
 
 -q«S JO JaquiTiN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 so" 
 
 OQ 
 
 •8iooqos-q:>t5q 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO C^ CO CO CO CO 
 
 rH 
 
 r-i 
 
 CO 
 
 rH CO rH <M CO rH rH 
 
 o 
 
 r-i 
 
 
 -qtiS JO JoquinN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •djqsjoqmaK 
 
 o 
 
 '^ 
 
 OOtO 'ITS oo 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 t- 
 
 ■^ O JC- © SO rH OS 
 
 zi 
 
 © 
 
 40J iBu; uo 
 
 CO 
 
 r-i 
 
 »0 . rH (M t- 
 
 • 
 
 ' 
 
 (M 
 
 rH CO rH 
 
 ^ 
 
 SO 
 
 •waqmare qoxnq^ 
 
 CO 
 
 ?R 
 
 co 00 00 t- t-i^- 
 (^^ 00 «o 00 £^ so 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 00 
 
 ©i^- ©t-»nri< SO 
 
 00 <M rH OS rH t- SO 
 
 CO 
 
 in 
 
 © 
 © 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 (M 
 
 rH rH r-i 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 r-{ r-i 
 
 1-i 
 
 
 ij 
 
 nnj JO Joqoin^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 Tt< 
 
 pR 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12; 
 
 
 r3 ® 
 
 31 
 
 i-H 
 
 ^ 
 
 O • ^'<4<(M£- 
 
 r-i 
 
 i-i 
 
 ■^ 
 
 •<# t- rH tII Jr- CO O 
 
 
 1-^ 
 
 <1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «i 
 
 111 
 
 CO 
 
 «> 
 
 Cl (M lO O O «0 
 
 O 
 
 ■^ 
 
 OS 
 
 SO ©-^^ 00 SO -^ 
 
 os 
 
 in 
 
 5 
 
 b 
 
 00 
 
 rH 
 
 rH C^ (M r-< rH (M 
 
 rH 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 III 
 
 (M 
 
 CO 
 
 (M(M • -rHO 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 CO 
 
 • C<J rH C<I(M rH rH 
 
 co 
 
 S 
 ■^ 
 
 1 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 "1^ 
 
 s 
 
 • 
 
 rH 
 
 • ' r-ir-i * rH 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 . . rH-<M (MrHrH 
 
 r-i 
 r-i 
 
 OS 
 CO 
 
 
 •omp jutrisissy 
 
 CO 
 
 1— t 
 
 
 (M 
 
 r-i 
 
 T-i 
 
 r-i r-i ' • r-ir-i ' 
 
 00 
 
 OS 
 
 
 puB sauBUoissire 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 
 •BaoBiJ-Snrqotjaij 
 
 io 
 
 ^ 
 
 '* -CO to oot- 
 
 r-i 
 
 . 
 
 «5 
 
 • SO CO "<* SO CO JO 
 
 SO 
 
 £2 
 
 
 J9q;o JO iaqoinx 
 
 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 ,rH 
 
 
 •siadisqO 
 
 Ttf 
 
 CO 
 
 Ti( C<J CSI CO <M CO 
 
 CO 
 
 r-i 
 
 . 
 
 rH O rH CO Ti< rH rH 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 JO joqmnx 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,~A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 _- M^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ ' ^ tS 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 if 
 
 Graham's Town . 
 Salem and Far- 
 mei-field . . . . 
 Bathurst, &c. . . 
 FortrBcaufort, & 
 Port-Elizabeth, & 
 
 c 
 
 ) 2 
 
 . c 
 
 II 
 
 Fort-Peddie, &c. 
 MounirCoke, &c. 
 Wesleyville . . . 
 
 P : 
 
 • 6 
 
 il 
 II 
 
 Lesseyton, &c. . . 
 Wittebergcn . . . 
 Butterworth . . . 
 Beecham-Wood . 
 
 -> 
 
 11 
 
 :6m 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 p^ 
 
 i-l c<i 
 
 co-^idsor-^oocJOrH 
 
 C^CO'x^iOtOt^odosOrH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 i-i 
 
 rH rH 
 
 pH,HrHrHiHrH(MCM 
 
 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 45 
 
 Society for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign 
 Parts. — Soon after the Colony of the Cape of 
 Good Hope came into the possession of the 
 British Government, in 1806, a colonial chap- 
 lain was appointed; but for a considerable 
 period, but little interest was felt in the reli- 
 gious condition of the population, and no effort 
 was made for the conversion of the heathen. 
 In 1820, the Society sent out Eev. W. Wright 
 to Cape Town, where he was succeeded in 
 1831 by Rev. Dr. E. J. Burrow. In 1840, a 
 second clergyman was added to the Society's 
 list. In 1847, there were found in all only 13 
 clergymen and one catechist, ministering to 
 widely scattered congregations, throughout a 
 territory which, exclusive of the recent addi- 
 tions of British Kaffraria, the Sovereignty, 
 and Natal, was as large as Great Britain itself. 
 In that year, the Diocese of Cape Town was 
 constituted, including, together with all the 
 British possessions in South Africa, the Island 
 of St. Helena ; and Bishop Gray having been 
 consecrated on St. Peter's Day, 1847, arrived 
 at Cape Town Feb. 28, 1848. The change 
 which had been effected in the short space of 
 three years, at the time of the Society's Jubi- 
 lee in 1851, " shows," the Society say in their 
 report, " how the presence of a single man, full 
 of zeal for the glory of God and the extension 
 of Christ's Kingdom, can, with God's blessing, 
 infuse life and energy wherever he goes." At 
 that time, the Bishop of Cape Town had made 
 four visitations, which had been performed on 
 foot or in a wagon ; or, occasionally on horse- 
 back. In 1850, he crossed the Orange River, 
 to visit the boers at Bloem Fontein and Yrede 
 Dorp, whence he descended to Peter Maritz- 
 burg. On his way back, he passed throughout 
 Kaffraria, sometimes into spots before uuvis- 
 ited by travelers, or at least unknown to geo- 
 graphers, for the purpose of bearing the Gospel 
 to those savage tribes. 
 
 *' The clergy h?ive been multiplied nearly 
 four-fold ; two Archdeacons, Merriman and 
 Welby, prove themselves noble coadjutors of 
 their noble-hearted Bishop, and between forty 
 and fifty active laborers were, in 1851, engaged 
 in missionary labor throughout the long-neg- 
 lected diocese. New churches were springing 
 up in every direction, and the colonists were 
 exhibiting their sense of the benefits conferred 
 upon them, by making some efforts on their 
 part to correspond with those of the church 
 at home. A Collegiate Institution has been 
 established at Woodlands, near Cape Town, 
 which is in active and efiicieut operation. A 
 Mission has been organized to the Mohamme- 
 dans in and about Cape Town; and other 
 missions, on a scale of unusual magnitude, are 
 contemplated to the Kaffres and Zulus. — So- 
 ciety's Report, at its Third Jubilee, in 1851, 
 p. f)4. 
 
 Scotch Missions. — Some time about the year 
 1820, the Glasgow Missionary Society sent 
 out Rev. W. R. Thompson as missionary, and 
 
 Mr. John Bennie as catechist, to accompany a 
 colony of people from Glasgow, who went out 
 with the intention of settling on the border 
 of Kaffraria, the Society hoping a door would 
 be opened for missionary operations among the 
 natives ; but the vessel which contained them 
 suffered shipwreck, and the greater part of the 
 company were lost. The missionaries, however, 
 were saved ; and the Government appointed 
 Mr. Thompson as a missionary to the Kaffres, 
 in conjunction with Rev. John Brownlee, the 
 catechist, to be supported by the society. The 
 Mission is located on the river Chumie, at the 
 residence of the chief Gaika. Soon after the 
 mission was established, Sicana, the chief of a 
 Kraal near Kat River Mission, died. In the 
 morning of the day of his decease, it being 
 Sabbath, he went to the place of worship, and 
 told the people that God had aflQicted him 
 with sickness, and that he should die that day, 
 resigning his soul and body into His hands ; 
 and advising them to remove to the Teacher, 
 as the situation of all without Christ was 
 wretched. He died at the time signified, and 
 all his people removed to the station at Chu- 
 mie in June. It pleased the Lord to pour out 
 his spirit in this wilderness, and in June, 1823, 
 five Kaffres were baptized, and there were as 
 many more candidates. 
 
 December 16, 1823, Rev. Mr. Ross and hig 
 wife arrived as a reinforcement. At this time, 
 the schools, both male and female, were well 
 attended, and the progress of the children en- 
 couraging. A printing press was in operation. 
 From the chiefs of different tribes the mission- 
 aries had received warm invitations to become 
 their instructors. 
 
 In 1830, a new and commodious church had 
 been built, which would hold 400 persons, and 
 not less than 300 attendants every Sabbath. 
 Morning prayer was daily attended by about 
 150 persons, who were assembled in the even- 
 ing and questioned on what they had heard in 
 the morning. The settlement was in a flour- 
 ishing state. The Kafires had built a great 
 number of houses for themselves, and had well- 
 cultivated gardens. A new station had been 
 formed at Lovedale, 12 miles from Chumie, to 
 which Messrs. Ross and Bennie had been as- 
 signed. And the Gospel of John had been 
 translated into the Kaffre language. In 183«, 
 another station had been added, named Bal- 
 four, and it was stated that other societies 
 were supplied with portions of Scripture from 
 their press. 
 
 The Glasgow Missionary Society was origi- 
 nally formed of a union of members of the 
 Established Church of Scotland, and Dissent- 
 ers. On the 9th of January, 1838, this union 
 was amicably dissolved, the members of the 
 Established Church retaining the old name, 
 and the Dissenters taking the name of the 
 Glasgow African Missionary Society, and re 
 taining the stations of Chumie, Iggibigha, 
 Glenthorn, and Kirkwood : while the old So 
 
 O -- Of TSM '^**2^ 
 
46 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 ciety took Lovedalc, Burnshill, Pirric, and 
 Kweleha, 
 
 On the 28lh of February, 1813, the mission- 
 ary brethren at Lovedale formed themselves 
 into a session, for the purpose of conducting 
 the ecclesiastical aflUirs of the station. At 
 their first meeting, it was resolved to observe 
 the first Monday of the month as a day of 
 prayer for the extension of the Redeemer's 
 kingdom, and at the morning and evening 
 service of that day to direct the attention of 
 the natives to the subject. On the 18th of the 
 same month, Jacob, one of the young men of 
 their seminary, professing to see himself as a 
 lost and undone sinner, and to put confidence 
 alone in Christ, was received as a candidate 
 for baptism. 
 
 At Lovedalc, public worship is kept up both 
 on the Sabbath and week days. Four meet- 
 ings are held on the Sabbath. On week days 
 there is a meeting at sunrise, and in the evening 
 the people are called together and examined 
 on the passage read in the morning. 
 
 At Firrie the church was enlarged, Mr. 
 Ross, the missionary, building the walls, his 
 son doing the wood-work of the roof during 
 Lis vacation, native assistants did the plaster- 
 ing and built the seats, Mrs. Ross glazed the 
 windows, and the native women laid the floor, 
 which was of clay, and whitewashed the whole 
 within and without, coloring the inside with 
 yellow ochre, which the school girls brought 
 two miles. When all hands set to work with 
 equal alacrity upon the spiritual building, how 
 soon will its walls go up ! 
 
 The station at Kweleha was abandoned, on 
 account of the oppressive conduct of a native 
 chief. 
 
 After the division which took place in the 
 Church of Scotland in 1843, the Glasgow Mis- 
 sionary Society became merged in the foreign 
 mission scheme of the Free Church of Scot- 
 land ; and its missionaries all being in South 
 Africa, were placed under the care of the latter 
 body. The vote of dissolution and transfer 
 was passed on the 29th of October, 1844. At 
 the time of the transfer, there was a mission 
 seminary, valued at 2000/. to 3000/., free from 
 debt, with twelve or fourteen native youths in 
 prraaration for the ministry ; and some of the 
 pupils trainefl in the seminary were engaged in 
 communicating Christian knowledge to their 
 countrjmien. 
 
 The mission continued to prosper till the 
 breaking out of the Kaffre war, in 1846, when 
 the missionaries and their people were obliged 
 to flee, some taking refuge at the Kat River 
 settlement, and some in other places. Mr. 
 Gowan returned to Scotland, and Mr. and 
 Mrs. Gorrie repaired to Cape Town, to labor 
 among the colonists. Mr. Gowan thus de- 
 scribes the desolation left behind : " Burnshill 
 station is destroyed, and several others have 
 been burned. Some of the missionaries nar- 
 rowly escaped with their lives. The houses at 
 
 Lovedale have been converted into a garrison. 
 The seminary is occupied by 200 soldiers,' witii 
 commissariat and military stores. The walls 
 of our hous6s are loop-holed, and om* gardens 
 converted into cattle kraals." 
 
 In 1848, the missionaries were again at their 
 posts ; and at Lovedale, where they had been 
 for some time, every thing was full of hope. 
 At the other stations, things presented a sad 
 appearance. The loss occasioned by the war 
 was about 1,258/., of which the government 
 repaid about 1^9/. The personal loss to the 
 missionaries was over 500/. In 1849, the semi- 
 nary at Lovedale was reopened, with seven 
 native and ten European pupils ; and the Gov- 
 ernor of the Colony had granted 100/. per 
 annum towards the expense of the seminary, 
 and 12/. a year to each native teacher, after 
 leaving the institution. 
 
 In 1850, Rev. Mr. Macfarline makes the fol- 
 lowing comparison of the present with the 
 past : " When our missionaries began their 
 labors, the Kafire language had not been re- 
 duced to letters. The Scriptures, Catechisms, 
 school books, and other publications are now 
 translated. Native husbandry was conducted 
 with wooden instruments instead of iron, and 
 was unworthy of the name. Now, wheat and 
 barley are grown in luxuriance, and oxen are 
 trained for the plough. Polygamy was almost 
 universal, and the women were treated as brute 
 beasts. Now, Christian females refuse to 
 marry in such circumstances. They dress in a 
 becoming manner, and some of them earn their 
 bread by the use of the needle. Then tlierc 
 was little or no Sabbath beyond the mission 
 premises. Now, the Sabbath is generally re- 
 spected over the district. There are prol)ably 
 a thousand native Christians in the district, 
 and these are, in many cases, educated, and able 
 to instruct others. The worship of God may 
 be heard from many a Kaffre hut. The native 
 mind has been found equal to any ordinary de- 
 gree of culture. Both sons and daughters of 
 the missionaries are employed in the work. 
 All is full of hope." 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 i 
 
 Slations. 
 Lovedale 
 
 g 
 s 
 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 220 
 
 1540 
 
 7700 
 
 35 
 
 Burnshill 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 270 
 
 1890 
 
 9450 
 
 17 
 
 l>irrie 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 168 
 
 1155 
 
 5775 
 
 
 Total 
 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 655 
 
 4585 
 
 22,925 
 
 52 
 
 In 1852, Mr. Ross and his assistant were 
 compelled, for the fifth time, to leave the sta- 
 tion at Pirrie, on account of the war. The rest 
 of the brethren were laboring under many 
 difficulties, yet with encouraging success. — 
 There were then 21 candidates for baptism at 
 Lovedale. The foregoing table will show the 
 state of the mission, at the several stations, in 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 47 
 
 1844, before the war ; the returns since the 
 resumption of the missions, being very incom- 
 plete. — Lomlon Missionary Register. ■ 
 
 Glasgow African Missionary Society. — The 
 help of native assistants, in the conduct of 
 meetings, was beginning to be called in requi- 
 sition at Ohumie, in 1843. At Iggibigha, 
 in 1842, a man and two women, after being 
 under the closest observation for four years, 
 were baptized, as the first fruits of missionary 
 labor at the stations ; and soon after, another, 
 who was a candidate for baptism, died, saying, 
 among his last words, " I love to go to Jesus ; I 
 cast myself upon him. God has taught me to 
 hope in Him who died for me ; I desire to 
 dwell with him for ever. I am going home." 
 The first Christian marriage was celebrated 
 this year ; the heathen father of the young 
 woman, after much persuasion, with prayer on 
 the part of the young man, relinquishing the 
 usual present of cattle, which was regarded 
 as a heathenish claim. The operations at Glen- 
 thon have been suspended. 
 
 Our schools are supported, at these stations, 
 and the missionaries itinerate in the villages 
 around, making these preaching places; and 
 they say not a few of their candidates for 
 baptism come from these schools. As an il- 
 lustration of the cruelty of heathenism, they 
 relate that a girl, who was afflicted with epilep- 
 tic fits, was left to fall into the fire, burning 
 herself severely, and was then carried out and 
 left in the field, where, after remaining in this 
 condition a day or two in great distress, she 
 was carried ofi" and devoured by the wolves. 
 
 This mission continued to prosper, till the 
 breaking out of the Kafifre war, in 1846, when 
 the stations at Ohumie and Iggibigha were 
 burnt and laid in ruins, the missionaries taking 
 refuge at the Kat River settlement. On the 
 27th of July, 1847, this society transferred its 
 missionary operations to the care of the United 
 Presbyterian Church. 
 
 The Kaffre war has been most disastrous to 
 the operations of this society. It has laid 
 waste the mission stations, scattered the mis- 
 sionaries and converts, suspended entirely the 
 work of iitstructiou, and done an amount of 
 evil, which can scarcely be exaggerated. And 
 yet there is no disposition to abandon the field. 
 The following table will show the condition of 
 the stations in 1844, before the war. Whether 
 they have recovered from the disasters of the 
 war, we have no means of knowing. These 
 facts have been gathered from the London 
 Missionary Register. 
 
 Stations. 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 Assistants. 
 
 Na- lEuro- 
 tives. pean. 
 
 a 
 
 J 
 
 Chumie 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 44 
 13 
 
 90 
 
 Iggibigha 
 
 Kirkwood 
 
 '• 
 
 
 
 Total 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 57 
 
 90 
 
 French Protestant Missions. — The " Soci'ete 
 des Missions Evang'eliques de Paris," which was 
 formed in 1822, sent its first missionaries to 
 South Africa, to labor among their refugee 
 countrymen, together with the Hottentots of 
 Wagonmaker Valley, near Talbagh. But the 
 farmers generally being unfavorable to the in- 
 struction of their slaves, and the colonists being 
 adequately supplied with religious teachers, 
 they, upon the advice of Dr. Philip, determined 
 on the establishment of a mission beyond the 
 bounds of the Colony. Messrs. Lemue & Rol- 
 land, therefore, leaving Mr. Bisseux with the 
 descendants of the French Refugees, set for- 
 ward on the 9th of January, 1830, and were 
 soon after joined by Dr. Philip ; and after vis- 
 iting the various stations of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, they determined to establish 
 themselves in connection with Lattakoo, among 
 the Bechuanas, where they arrived, July 24, 
 1830, after a toilsome journey of nearly ten 
 weeks, from Bethelsdorp. They immediately 
 set about the study of the Sichuana language 
 with such ardor, that they suffered in health, 
 and were obliged to relax for some time, for 
 which purpose, they visited Griqua Town. 
 
 On the first of September, 1831, Mr. Bis- 
 seux writes from Wagonmaker Yalley, that he 
 was about to baptize ten slaves, the first fruits of 
 his ministry ; and that the Gospel had wrought 
 an advantageous change in the manners of 
 many. On the 22nd of January, 1832, Mr. 
 Pellissier joined the mission at Lattakoo, and 
 in pursuance of an arrangement, previously 
 made, visited the Chief of the Baharootzes 
 for the purpose of establishing a new station ; 
 but the design was frustrated by the jealousy 
 of the chiefs ; and in this journey he had a 
 narrow escape from two lions, by which he 
 was pursued. 
 
 On the 21st of March, 1833, another rein- 
 forcement arrived, consisting of one missionary, 
 and one male and one female assistant. On 
 the 17th of February, 1832, the three mission- 
 aries set forward to renew the attempt to es- 
 tablish a mission among the Baharootzes. For 
 three weeks they passed through vast solitudes, 
 which the want of water prevented being cul- 
 tivated ; after which, they traveled many days 
 through an inhabited country, till they reached 
 Mosika, the residence of Mokatla, the chief of 
 the Baharootzes. The town (fonsisted of a 
 great number of huts, scattered at the foot of 
 two high hills, forming a chain of mountains, in- 
 tersected with valleys. The chief received them 
 with apparent cordiality, and on the Sabbath, 
 ordered all work to cease, and the missionaries 
 addressed a congregation of not less than 
 eight hundred persons. But, in consequence 
 of the jealousy of Moselekatsi, king of the 
 Zulus, to whom Mokatla was tributary, they 
 were obliged to leave the country ; and, by the 
 advice of Dr. Philip, they repaired to Motito, 
 seven or eight miles from Old Lattakoo, Ma- 
 90 1 hura, the chief, having desired that missionaries 
 
48 
 
 I, 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 should settle there. Moselckatsi, having made 
 war upon the Baharootzes, and driven them 
 out of their country, many of them were hunted 
 out in the desert, by the missionaries, and in- 
 duced to settle at the new station. Motito has 
 a good supply of water, and the laud is good 
 for cultivation. 
 At AVagoumaker Valley, in 1833, there was 
 
 auitc an awakening among the people, and 
 lere were about forty who gave evidence of 
 piety. The mission at Motito was, at this time, 
 the advanced guard, being eighty-five leagues 
 north of the colony, and no other settlement 
 bemg so far in the interior. But the prospect 
 seemed discouraging. The mission was estab- 
 lished for the special benefit of a tribe of Be- 
 chuanas, called Batlapis, residing at Old Lat- 
 takoo. But, none of them had as yet come 
 to reside at the station ; and when the mis- 
 sionaries, after a fatiguing ride of two hours, 
 inhaling the sand which the wind raised around 
 them, arrived at the miserable dirty village 
 of the chief, they were met with the great- 
 est indifierence, except when the chief wished 
 to ask a favor, when the men would be seen 
 retiring to the rocks from all quartei*s, for 
 prayer ! Yet, the settlement at Motito was 
 greatly improved at the end of the first year. 
 The few people collected there were attentive 
 to the Gospel ; schools were established, and 
 the chief sent his son and daughter. 
 
 In 1833, the station called Caledon, a settle- 
 ment at the junction of the Caledon and Or- 
 ange rivers, was ceded to the Society by the 
 London Missionary Society, and taken posses- 
 sion of by Mr. G. P. Pellisier. But, finding 
 that the 13osjesman3, who had been collected 
 there, had abandoned the spot, he turned his 
 attention to the Bechuanas wandering near 
 Philipolis ; and a chief with 1,200 followers 
 was induced to join him. In a short time, 
 the appearance of the station was entirely 
 changed. The people had laid out a great 
 number of gardens ; and the inhabitants at 
 the station amounted to about 1,800, most of 
 them Batlapis. 
 
 On the 28th of June, 1833, a station was 
 commenced at Morija, 54 leagues east of Cal- 
 edon, near the residence of Moshesh, the chief 
 of the Bcchuana Bassoutos ; and the chief 
 quit his mountain, and settled with his people 
 at the station. • The plan of a new town was 
 speedily traced, and all hands, old and young, 
 were soon busied in collecting and preparing 
 bamboos, laths, reeds and rushes. They set to 
 the work with vigor, and pursued it with alac- 
 rity, until a new town arose before their eyes. 
 The site of the mission, which was secured 
 by regular purchase, was considered to bo the 
 best in the whole country. 
 
 In 1834, a house of worship was built at 
 Motito, and J-he " sound of the church-going 
 bell," was first heard in the valley of Motito ; 
 five adults were baptized, and the inhabitants 
 greatly improved in their condition. Mahura, 
 
 having offended Moselekatsi, whose power was 
 dreaded, flew from old Lattikoo, taking most 
 of his people with him, so that the hrtpe of 
 reaching them by this mission was given up. 
 The inhabitants of Caledoi^ had increased to 
 2,500 ; and some of the people gave evidence 
 of being truly awakened. The prompt and 
 unexpected assemblage of so many people 
 there was considered as an event unequalcd in 
 the missions in that country. On account of 
 the departure of Mahura from Motito, and 
 Mr. Roiland not being required there, ho com- 
 menced a new station in 1835, at Beersheba, 
 18 leagues from Caledon, within the territory 
 claimed by Moshesh. The missionaries at Mo- 
 rija had just began to preach in the native 
 language. 
 
 In 1836, a great change was visible at 
 Wagonmaker's Valley, and the hostility of the 
 colonists to the instruction and baptism of 
 slaves was giving way. The departure of Mar 
 hura from Old Lattikoo, had proved advanta- 
 geous to Motito, in opening the way for many 
 natives to settle there without fear. The 
 name of Caledon was changed to Bethulia ; 
 and the station was considered to be in a re- 
 markably prosperous condition, with evidence 
 of the special presence of the Holy Spirit. 
 The first general conference of the missiona- 
 ries, which they have continued to hold annu- 
 ally since, was held on the 5th of July, 1835, 
 at Beersheba. 
 
 In 1837, a religious awakening occurred 
 among the Bassoutos at Beersheba, and the la- 
 bors of the last six months were blessed to 
 many souls. A new station was formed among 
 the same people at Thaba Bossioil, by Rev. 
 Mr. Gosselin, and another at MoMlong, 
 among the Lighoijas, by Rev. Mr. Daumas, 
 who was very cordially received by the people, 
 the women presenting their children to him, 
 and saying, " Come ! see your father !" 
 
 In 1838, the station at Motito had increased 
 in population to 1,000 ; but had been visited 
 with sore trial by the severe and protracted 
 illness of Mrs. Lemue, in view of which Mr. 
 Lemue had presented to his mind the alterna- 
 tive of sacrificing his wife or the mission. If 
 he remained, he was persuaded she could not 
 survive another season. If he left, he feared 
 that the people, intimidated by Mahura would 
 be scattered abroad. At Bethulia 28 persons 
 were baptized. The administration of the or- 
 dinance was a scene of deep interegt. "The 
 audience, which had kept a profound silence, 
 because they felt the presence of the Lord, at 
 length interrupted it to give free course to 
 tears, which the scene before them called 
 forth." After the baptism of the candidates, 
 they presented their young children, to conse- 
 crate them to the Lord, in the same ordinance. 
 In the afternoon, the Church, with this new 
 addition, making 48 in all, sat down to the ta- 
 ble of the Lord. The converts generally were 
 faithful and steadfast, maintaining family 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 prayer, and other religious duties. Fifty-five 
 more professed converts vrere candidates for 
 baptism, and there was about the same num- 
 ber of inquirers. Civilization also keeps pace 
 with the gospel. All who embrace the gospel 
 adopt, as much as possible, the manners of the 
 civilized. At Morija, Molapo, eldest son of 
 Moshesh, and second chief, was received as a 
 candidate for baptism with ten others. Great 
 progress had been made in the observance 
 of the Sabbath, throughout the whole tribe, 
 and the people were anxious to learn to read. 
 The station was also advancing rapidly in 
 temporal things. The new station at Thaba 
 Bossiou is on an isolated hill of a pentago- 
 nal form, about 400 feet high, on the summit 
 of which are the towns of Moshesh and his 
 father Mokachane, from which 22 villages are 
 seen. The missionary is greatly encouraged 
 by the appearance of things. Moshesh, on a 
 neighboring chief inviting him to join him in 
 a marauding expedition, sent this reply : " Go 
 tell your master that there is a house of prayer 
 at Thaba Bossiou. I learn there to make 
 power to consist in wisdom, and not in the 
 number of cattle. My children at Morija are 
 got ahead of me ; it is time that I should get 
 instruction." At Beersheba, the following 
 year, after a rigid examination, 42 were ad- 
 mitted to the church by baptism. In this ex- 
 amination, Mr. Holland availed himself of the 
 assistance of some of the elder members, who, 
 from their knowledge of the persons brought 
 out many things by their questions which he 
 would not have thought of. 
 
 In 1841, Eev. Mr. Casalis writes from Tha- 
 ba Bossiou, on the eighth year after the estab- 
 lishment of the mission, that in his view, there 
 were three periods in the missionary work : 
 during' the first, the natives manifest indiffer- 
 ence and apathy, arising from ignorance of the 
 true object of the missionary. To remove this 
 ignorance, in this instance, required five years. 
 The second era was distinguished by a remark- 
 able effusion of the Holy Spirit, which en- 
 
 riched the church with many enlightened mem- 
 bers. The third period was that of thought- 
 ful, argumentative opposition ; and this spirit 
 had already begun to manifest itself ; the loss 
 of those Avho unite with the church giving se- 
 rious offence to those that are wedded to their 
 sins. This was very strong among the villages 
 around, and had manifested itself decidedly at 
 other stations, especially among the polyga- 
 mists, who cannot bear the thought of giv- 
 ing up their wives. ITie aged chief, Moka- 
 chane was baptized at this station, saying, " I 
 have done so much evil to Moshesh, by my per- 
 nicious counsels and flatteries, that, as long as 
 I Jive, I shall not cease my endeavors to c^aw 
 him to God by my words and my prayers." Per- 
 secution had manifested itself at some of the 
 stations. A young convert on the Hart river, 
 was subject to the bitter opposition and railing 
 of his father and wife, and his life was re- 
 peatedly threatened by the people ; but his re- 
 ply was, " you may kill the body, but you have 
 no power to kill the soul." This year a very 
 successful attempt was made at several sta- 
 tions to secure contributions for the support of 
 the gospel, the people, in their poverty exhib- 
 iting great liberality. 
 
 In August, 1841, a new station was formed 
 among the Corannas at Friedau, 183 miles 
 east of Motito, by Kev. J. A. Pfrimmer. 
 
 At Morija, in 1843, an awakening spread 
 far around the station in more than 100 vil- 
 lages. The members of the church continued 
 to make progress in grace. They were simple, 
 affectionate, united and zealous. There were 
 about thirty, who were regarded as having 
 truly received the gospel during the year. In 
 1851, Mr. Freeman, the missionary, says, " By 
 dividing 280 villages into 28 districts, 12,000 
 souls are placed under the instruction of the 
 word of God by means of native teachers." 
 
 The latest intelligence gives the results of 
 missionary labor, at the several stations of this 
 society, as seen in the following table : 
 
 Stations. 
 
 
 ^%, 
 
 a g 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 Wagonmaker's Yalley, now Wellington, 
 
 Bethulia, 
 
 Carmel, 
 
 Beersheba, 
 
 Bethesda, 
 
 Morija, 
 
 Thaba Bossiou, 
 
 Berea, 
 
 Mekuatling, 
 
 Motito, • 
 
 Friedau, - • 
 
 13 
 
 1830 
 1833 
 1846 
 1835 
 1843 
 1833 
 1827 
 1843 
 1837 
 1833 
 
 6000 
 2500 
 
 4000 
 
 300 
 400 
 
 600 
 
 250 
 
 190 
 100 
 
 44 
 200 
 
 40 
 391 
 
 22 
 326 
 121 
 
 23 
 
 16 
 
 100 
 
 80 
 
 15 
 
 106 
 
 146 
 9 
 
 41 
 
 14 1 12,5001,8401,183 310 25 31 
 
60 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 Tho Kuiiro wai ' ' ' '1 so much de^truo- 
 
 tiou and confu«it ^ missions, that for 
 
 several years no i* ,. . :^ received. Prcvi- 
 0U8 to this time the missions were generally in a 
 prosperous state; evidences of the presence of 
 the llolv Spirit apix^areii at all the stations, 
 and atldi'ilons were yearly made to the churches. 
 The church members gave gratifying evidence 
 of piety amidst temptiitiou, and in many in- 
 stances, persecution. Many, even of non-pro- 
 faBors, were abandoning polygamy, and other 
 heathen customs. Civilization was generally 
 advancing, the schools prosperous, many learn- 
 ing to read, and the work of translation and 
 Printing the scriptures was going forward, 
 [any also had died in the triumplis of faith. 
 In 1846, a new station was established at 
 Carmcl, between Bethulia and Becrsheba, for 
 the training of native schoolmasters. An 
 awakening had taken place among the youth, 
 and sixtetMi of them were candidates for bap- 
 tism. At Bethesda, in 1851, the brethren say, 
 " Never was our spiritual horizon more encour- 
 aging than at present. Some young persons 
 have been awakened." At Thaba Bossiou the 
 station had been greatly disturbed by politi- 
 cal commotions, and by the conduct of the 
 three sons of Moshesh, who had renounced 
 their profession of the gospel. 
 
 On some of the points embraced in this tar 
 ble, the returns are imperfect ; but enough ap- 
 pears to show that the labors of this society 
 nave been quite successful ; and from the ex 
 amination we have given the subject, we think 
 tho number admitted as communicants may be 
 regarded as giving credible evidence of piety. 
 It has been the practice of the missionaries to 
 keep them standing a long time as candidates 
 after professing conversion, before admitting 
 them to the church. 
 
 American Board. — In 1834, the Board re- 
 solved on a mission among the Zulus; the 
 design being to establish one mission among 
 the maritime tribe, under Dingaan, near Port 
 Natal, and one in the interior, among the 
 tribe of which Moselekatsi was chief. To the 
 former. were designated Rev. Messrs. Aldin 
 Grout and George Champion, missionaries, and 
 Newton Adams, M. D., physician, with their 
 wives ; and to the latter. Rev. Messrs. Daniel 
 Lindlay, Alexander E. Wilson, M. D., and 
 Henry I. Venable, missionaries, with their 
 wives. ITiey sailed December 3, 1834, in the 
 Burlington, and arrived at Cape Town on the 
 5th of February, 1835. The brethren destined 
 for the interior commenced their journey of 
 1000 miles, on the 19th of March, in three 
 large wagons, drawn by twelve yoke of oxen, 
 accompanied by Rev. Mr. Wright, a mis- 
 sionary of the London Society, residing at 
 Griqua Town, which place they reached May 
 16, 48 days after leaving Cape Town. Here 
 they were detained five months to recruit their 
 cattle. They were kindly and hospitably en- 
 tertained by the English missionaries; and 
 
 they occupied themselves in learning the Sl- 
 chuana language, and in preparing a small 
 spelling-book in the Sitibeli, the language 
 spoken by the tribe to which they were going. 
 The brethren destined to the maritime tribe 
 were detained at the Cape, in consequence of 
 a war between the KafFres and the Colony, as 
 their route lay through Kaffraria. Mean- 
 while, they were employed in missionary labor 
 at the Cape ; and the church under the care 
 of Rev. Dr. Philip presented them with £45 
 to defray their expenses. In July they sailed 
 for Algoa Bay, near Bethelsdorp ; and leaving 
 their wives at Bethelsdorp and Port Elizabeth, 
 with the missionaries at these places, they 
 sailed from Algoa Bay, December 7, and reached 
 Port Natal on the 20th. About 30 white 
 men then resided at Port Natal, as hunters 
 and traders, by whom they were kindly receiv- 
 ed, and furnished with cattle for their wagon. 
 A fortnight brought them to the residence of 
 Dingaan, about 160 miles from Port Natal. 
 The chief consented that they should come to his 
 country, but proposed that they should first 
 stop at Natal, till he should see the effect 
 of a school which they might open at his 
 place ; to which they consented. Mr. Cham- 
 pion was left at Natal to make arrangements, 
 and the other two returned to Algoa Bay for 
 their families and effects. On their arrival, 
 Mrs. Grout was found to be ill beyond hope of 
 recovery. She died of consumption, on the 
 24th of February following, full of faith, and 
 rejoicing that she had been counted worthy 
 to leave her country and home on such an er- 
 rand. 
 
 January 22, 1836, Messrs. Lindlay and Te- 
 nable proceeded from Griqua Town to visit 
 Moselekatsi, and reached his place about the 
 middle of May. The chief gave his consent 
 to their commencing a mission among his 
 people ; but their impressions of his character 
 were unfavorable, and the extent of his terri- 
 tory and number of his people fell short of 
 their expectations. The mission was com- 
 menced at Mosika on the 16th of June, 1836. 
 But having entered their houses before the 
 mud floors were sufficiently dried, all of them 
 but Dr. Wilson were attacked with fever, and 
 Mrs. Wilson died, after being sick eight days. 
 The survivors were afflicted with distressing 
 rheumatism for three or four months. And 
 they had scarcely recovered, when the Dutch 
 farmers, having^^lsedn plundered of their cattle 
 by Moselek5atsi, invaded his country, destroyed 
 fourteen villages, slaughtered great numbers 
 of his people, and carried off* 6000 head ot 
 cattle. They threatened to renew the attack, 
 and advised the missionaries to leave the coun- 
 try, which they did, taking their course over- 
 land, to join the brethren at Port Natal, where 
 they arrived July 27, 1837, after a journey of 
 ten weeks, in which they traveled not less 
 than 1300 miles, over the worst roads they had 
 seen in Africa. 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 61 
 
 Messrs. Grout and Champion and Dr. Adams 
 arrived with their families, at Port Natal, on 
 the 21st of May, 1836. Diugaan gave them a 
 cordial reception, with permission to form a 
 station at his capital. Mr. Champion was 
 destined to the interior station at Ginani, 
 about midway between Natal and the chief's 
 residence ; Dr. Adams to Umlazi, 6 miles from 
 Port Natal ; and Mr. Grout to divide his la- 
 bors between the two. The king sent seven 
 girls and four boys to be taught by the mis- 
 sionaries. At the end of eight or nine months, 
 Mr. Champion had ten boys and twenty fe- 
 males under instruction, with a congregation 
 on the Sabbath of about 200. But the des- 
 potic power of Dingaan, who held his subjects 
 m abject slavery, was a serious obstacle in the 
 way. Dr. Adams had about fifty children in 
 his school, besides a morning class of adults. 
 The Sabbath school for adults contained 250, 
 and that for others, under the care of Mrs. 
 Adams, 250 to 300. She also instructed 30 or 
 40 females twice a week in sewing. The Sab-, 
 bath congregation was about 600, assembled 
 in the shade of a great tree. Four boys were 
 taken as boarding scholars. The press had 
 been set up at Umlazi, and two or three ele- 
 mentary books printed for the schools. Mr. 
 Lindley commenced a station at the Illovo 
 Biver, 15 miles north-west of Natal, and Messrs. 
 Yenable and Wilson, at Klangezoa, 30 miles 
 farther from Port Natal. Mr. Grout, with 
 the permission of the committee, returned to 
 the United States, bringing his own mother- 
 less child and that of Dr. Wilson. 
 
 The Dutch emigrants, after having destroyed 
 the power of Moselekatsi, proceeded toward 
 Port Natal. And, although Dingaan did not 
 claim jurisdiction over the territory, they 
 thought it prudent to gain his consent ; and 
 for this purpose, they sent their governor, Mr. 
 Ratief, with a number of attendants, to con- 
 sult him. Just before, some of Dingaan's cat- 
 tle had been carried off by a party of Mantalis, 
 disguised as boers. Dingaan required Eatief 
 to see the cattle returned before he would 
 treat with them ; and he accordingly pursued 
 the party of marauders, and recovered the cat- 
 tle, without bloodshed, and returned with them 
 to Dingaan's capital, with about 60 of his 
 men, who, three days after their arrival, were 
 all treacherously seized and put to death. At 
 the same time, a party of soldiers were sent to 
 attack the boers at their encampment; by 
 whom, however, although surprised in the 
 night, they were repulsed. The farmers now 
 rallied their forces, and with the newly arrived 
 emigrants and whites and Hottentots at Port 
 Natal, prepared to attack the treacherous 
 chief. The missionaries were obliged to retire ; 
 and leaving Mr. Lindley at Port Natal to 
 watch the course of events, they sailed, with 
 their families, for Port Elizabeth, on the 30th 
 of March. By this time a righteous Provi- 
 dence had made a vagabond of Moselekatsf. 
 
 Four times he was attacked and plundered, 
 after the breaking up of the mission. 
 
 The Zulus were victorious in a pitched bat- 
 tle with the people residing at Natal, and on 
 the 23d of April, they invaded that place, and 
 Mr. Lindley left on board a vessel, and after 
 visiting Delagoa Bay, joined his family and 
 associates at Port Elizabeth, on the 22d of 
 June. The war continuing, Mr. Yenable re- 
 moved with his wife to Cape Town, and de- 
 voted himself to evangelical labors amongst a 
 destitute class of its inhabitants. They after- 
 wards returned to the United States, and Mr. 
 and Mrs Champion soon followed. The for- 
 mer, at their own request, received an honora- 
 ble discharge from the service of the Board. 
 The latter waited, with the hope of being able 
 to return ; but his wife's health had received 
 such a shock from the hardships she had en- 
 dured in Africa as to give little prospect of 
 that cherished hope ever being realized. After 
 laboring several years in the ministry in this 
 country he was attacked with a pulmonary 
 complaint ; and having visited Santa Cruz, in 
 the West Indies, with the hope of being bene- 
 fited, he entered into his rest, at the age of 31. 
 His life was one of rare consecration to the 
 cause of Christ. Possessing an ample fortune, 
 and the esteem of a most respectable circle of 
 friends, he left all and entered on the mission- 
 ary work ; and his fondest desire to the last, 
 was, to resume his missionary labors, and spend 
 his life among the degraded Zulus in South 
 Africa. His wife, after a few years of suffer- 
 ing, followed him to the grave, leaving a son 
 an orphan. Mr. Champion, after providing 
 for his family, left the residue of his estate to the 
 Board. Dr. Wilson returned to this country, and 
 afterwards joined the West African Mission. 
 
 The Colonial Government resolved to take 
 military possession of Port Natal, and the 
 boers gained a decided victory over Dingaan, 
 and took his capital, .and drove him from his 
 dominions. Umpandi, the brother of Din- 
 gaan, to save his life, as was supposed, from 
 the jealous cruelty of his brother, withdrew 
 from the Zulu territory. Being joined by a 
 majority of his people, he was declared king, 
 defeated Dingaan in a bloody battle, and com- 
 pelled him to flee. The Dutch afterwards 
 chased Dingaan to a great distance. 
 
 Mr. Lindley and Dr. Adams with Mrs. 
 Adams, returned to Port Natal on the 12th 
 of June, 1839. Mrs. Lindley was detained till 
 autumn, by the illness of one of their children. 
 Meanwhile, the English withdrew their mili- 
 tary force, and left the boers and the natives 
 to themselves. Mr. Lindley immediately com- 
 menced his labors for the intellectual and 
 spiritual good of the emigrants. 
 
 Mr. Grout returned to Port Natal, from the 
 United States, with Mrs. Grout, June 30, 1840. 
 By this time, a congregation of 500 had been 
 collected by Dr. Adams at Umlazi, with a 
 Bible class, and a Sabbath school of 200 chil- 
 
52 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 drou. Mr. Grout accompanietl a Dutch dele- 
 gation to the residence of Unipandi, and ob- 
 taineil his nennission for the settlement of a 
 miasionarv in the Zulu country. Passing by 
 Ginani. where Messrs. Grout and Champion for- 
 merly resideil, they found the buildings burnt, 
 and the place solitary. A station was after- 
 wards formed in the Zulu country, at a place 
 calleil lukanyezi, which means astar. Thirty- 
 Beven villages were so near this place that 
 their inhabitants could be collected lor worship 
 on the Sabbath. The attendance on preaching 
 at lukanyezi was about 250, and at Umlazi 
 about 800 at two different places. Each sta- 
 tion had a school of about fifty pupils. Mr. 
 Adams had a school for girls once a week, and 
 a prayer meeting for adult females, both classes 
 being instructed in needlework. One of the 
 women gave evidence of having been born 
 again. The mission, up to this date (1841) 
 hod printed 55,380 pages, more than half of it 
 portions of the word of God. 
 
 ISIr. Lindley, at his own request, received a 
 dismission from the service of the Board, in 
 order to accept the appointment of minister 
 of the Eeformed Dutch church, with liberty 
 to resume his connection, should unexpected 
 changes render it expedient. 
 
 At length, the interest and confidence of the 
 people in the mission awakened the jealousy 
 of Umpandi ; and some of the people being 
 accused by those who wished to obtain his favor, 
 of forsaking him and attaching themselves to 
 Mr. Grout, sentence of death was passed upon 
 them, before they knew anything of the matter. 
 At daybreak, on the morning of July 25th, 
 1842, it was announced at Mr. Grout's window 
 that an army was upon the place. Not know- 
 ing whether it was for him, or the people, or for 
 both, he commended himself and his family to 
 God, before leaving his room. An attack was 
 made on the six places nearest the mission 
 house, upon those who had been most friendly 
 to the mission, with orders to put to death 
 every man, woman, and child, in three of them. 
 Mr. Grout immediately left the station, and ar- 
 rived at Umlazi with his family early in Au- 
 gust ; and about a month afterwards, he com- 
 menced a new station on the Umgeni river, six 
 miles north-east of Port Natal, where he imme- 
 diately collected a congregation of 600 to 1000 
 attentive hearers. Meanwhile, the English, 
 after some conflict with the boers, again took 
 possession of Port Natal, 
 
 Since the overthrow of Dingaan, the Zulus, 
 weary of his intolerable cruelty, and the 
 scarcely less bloody proceedings of his succes- 
 sor, had been escaping from their country and 
 taking refuge near Natal, until, including the 
 country about 100 miles back, they amounted 
 probably to 24,000. 
 
 In view of the repeated disasters which the 
 mission had experienced, and the discouraging 
 aspect of things, as well as of the fact that 
 the Wesleyan Methodists were extending their 
 
 missions nearly to Port Natal, the Prudential 
 Committee decided that it was inexpedient 
 to continue the mission ; and on the 151st of 
 August, 1843, a letter was sent, instructing 
 the brethren to bring it to a close. Previous 
 to this, the native settlements about Umlazi 
 and Umgeni had received great accessions of 
 emigrants from the Zulu country. The Colo- 
 nial Government, in creating a new colony at 
 Port Natal, had officially announced that no 
 laws should be allowed, recognizing any dis- 
 tinction on account of color ; that no attack 
 should be made upon any people without the 
 colony, by persons not acting under the direc- 
 tion of the Colonial Government ; and that 
 slavery should not bo tolerated in any form. 
 A commissioner had also arrived, who declared 
 himself in favor of giving the natives land on 
 which they might form distinct settlements ; 
 of having one or more missionaries in each 
 district; and of employing all the influence 
 of the Government to induce the people to 
 conform to the instructions of the missionaries. 
 Dr. Adams had also visited Umpandi, and a 
 request had been received from him that a 
 colonial agent and a missionary might be sent 
 to reside near him. About the middle of No- 
 vember, Mr. Grout had about 10,000 people 
 around him, within the extent of an ordinary 
 New-England parish, and a congregation of 
 500 to 1000 on the Sabbath, to whom ho 
 preached in the open air, under a scorching 
 African sun. 
 
 It was in these circumstances that the breth- 
 ren received the decision of the Committee. 
 They at once began making arrangements for 
 carrying it into effect. Hearing of a vessel to 
 sail from Cape Town for the United States, 
 Mr. Grout immediately proceeded to that 
 place. On his arrival there, a strong desire 
 was manifested by the ministers of the Gospel 
 and others, that the mission should not be 
 given up. A public meeting was called. 
 After hearing Mr. Grout's statement, addresses 
 were made by Dr. Philip, the American con- 
 sul, and others, and a collection of about $800 
 was raised to defray Mr. Grout's expenses, till 
 he could communicate with the Prudential 
 Committee. Dr. Philip wrote to the commit- 
 tee, declaring that, rather than have it given 
 up, he would visit America to beg for the mis- 
 sion. A joint letter was also written, to the 
 same effect, by all the ministers at Cape Town. 
 The Committee, therefore, could not hesitate 
 to authorize the missionaries to resume their 
 labors at Natal. 
 
 Before leaving Cape Town, Mr. Grout re- 
 ceived the most encouraging assurances from 
 the Governor of the Colony, together with the 
 appointment of government missionary, with 
 a salary of £150 a year, with the same offer to 
 Dr. Adams ; and Mr, Lindley was appointed 
 preacher to the boers. 
 
 Within the limits of the new Colony there 
 ■^ere supposed to be 100,000 Zulus, besides 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 53 
 
 20,000 immediately around the two stations 
 occupied by Mr. Grout and Dr. Adams. 
 
 Dr. Adams was ordained as a minister of the 
 Gospel at Cape Town, on the 10th of Decem- 
 ber, 1844, the ser\-ices being performed by 
 Drs. Philip and Adamson and Messrs. Faure 
 and Brown, clergymen of that place. 
 
 On returning to Port Xatal, having, by 
 some means, lost the right of resuming his 
 station at Umgeni, Mr. Grout turned his atten- 
 tion to a site on the Umvote river, about forty 
 miles north of Port Natal, which he regarded 
 as a most eligible post, well watered and well 
 wooded, with good arable and pasture grounds. 
 Under date of October 15, Dr. Adams wrote 
 that they had about 100 under instruction in 
 the day schools ; and that there had never been 
 a time before, when the people, young and old, 
 manifested so much interest in learning. 
 
 On the 18th of April, 1846, Rev. James C. 
 Bryant, who had been for about five years 
 settled as pastor over a united and attached 
 people in Littleton, Mass., sailed for this mis- 
 sion, with his wife, and arrived August 15. 
 About the middle of January following, Mr. 
 and Mrs. Lewis Grout also arrived from the 
 United States. Mr. Alden Grout resigned his 
 appointment from the Government, (which 
 resignation was kindly accepted,) and resumed 
 his connection with the Board, in April, 1845. 
 Dr. Adams had previously declined the ap- 
 pointment. 
 
 In 1846, five commissioners were appointed 
 by the Colonial Government, for locating the 
 natives, and adjusting their relations to the 
 emigrant farmers, and among them were 
 Messrs. Adams and Lindley ; it being the 
 wish of the Lieutenant-Governor to effect the 
 safe and permanent settlement of all classes ; 
 to secure the country lying between the allot- 
 ments assigned to the natives, so as to impose 
 a restraint upon their migratory habits ; to 
 stimulate them to industry by establishing 
 markets ; and also to make provision for the 
 new villages that would spring up, and for the 
 internal management and defence of the whole 
 district. 
 
 In September, 1846, Mr. Bryant wrote from 
 Umlazi, that, within a few months previous, 
 there had been unusual seriousness among the 
 natives, and that a few gave good evidence of 
 piety. The converts, of their own accord, had 
 established a prayer meeting among them- 
 selves ; and, in December. Mr. Grout wrote 
 from Umvoti, that the respect and attention 
 with which many listened to preaching, was 
 truly gratifying ; and he was not without a 
 hope that a young married couple had been 
 truly converted. They were married in a 
 Christian way, pledging themselves to abandon 
 polygamy ; and very soon after commencing 
 house-keeping, they set up family prayer. 
 
 In pursuance of the plans df the Colonial 
 Government, five allotments of land were made 
 to the natives, comprising about 2500 square 
 
 miles, with a population of about 50,000. The 
 missionaries of the Wesleyan Society agreed 
 to leave their American brethren in the undis- 
 turbed possession of the coast between the 
 Uratogela and Umzinkulu rivers, a distance 
 of 160 miles. 
 
 In 1847, five stations had been commenced, 
 and permanent buildings erected at two of 
 them. Dr. Adams had removed twelve miles 
 south-west, to be nearer the centre of his dis- 
 trict, and the name Umlazi had been transfer- 
 red to his new abode, the place he left being 
 called Umlazi River. Six were admitted to 
 the church at Umlazi, this year, as the result 
 of what seemed clearly to be a gracious visita- 
 tion of the Holy Spirit. There had also been 
 some seriousness at Umvoti, and a native 
 helper had there been admitted to the church. 
 Two or three boys, also, were regarded as 
 hopeful converts. 
 
 Speaking of an evening school, which he 
 had, of sixteen regular attendants, Mr. Grout 
 says : " They do not confine their study of 
 books to the particular hour appropriated to 
 their instruction, but seize also upon other 
 opportunities. Not unfrequently have I seen 
 them reading or studying at intervals of labor, 
 or reading the Scriptures together, by the light 
 of a wood fire in the evening. I have seen the 
 same young men and boys, eight or ten in num- 
 ber, singing their morning and evening hymn 
 of praise to God in their own tongue ; and I 
 learn that one of their number is in the habit 
 of leading the rest in prayer at these times." 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Ireland arrived at Port Natal 
 on the 13th of February, 1848, and were fol- 
 lowed soon after by Rev. Andrew Abraham, 
 Rev. Hyman A. Wilder, and Rev. Joseph 
 Tyler, with their wives. At this period, free 
 schools had been established at each of the 
 stations. A few of the pupils could read all 
 the books which the mission had printed. 
 Among the pupils were several pious young 
 men, who, it was hoped, would become future 
 helpers in the missionary Avork. At Umlazi, 
 most of the congregation had committed to 
 memory the Catechism, the Commandments, 
 and many passages of Scripture. The num- 
 bers that assembled at the different stations 
 for public worship varied from 50 to 1000, 
 who listened with great apparent interest, and 
 behaved with decorum during all the services. 
 This disposition to assemble and listen to 
 preaching is an interesting feature of the mis- 
 sion, and one that promises much for its suc- 
 cess. Evidences of the special presence of the 
 Holy Spirit were manifested at all the differ- 
 ent stations, this year, and twenty-four were 
 received into the several churches. Some op- 
 position had been manifested, but it was short- 
 lived. At the close of 1848, which seems to 
 be a later date, 15 members had been added 
 to the church at L^mlazi and 16 at Umvoti, 
 Prayer-meetings had been sustained at all the 
 stations, and the native converts took part in 
 
64 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 tbem with a ffood dorree of readiness and pro- 
 priety. And Mrs. Gront and Mrs. Adams 
 field weekly pniyer-meetings with the females. 
 The monthly concert was sustained at Umvoti 
 and Umlazi, and was the most spirited meeting 
 of all. AH the male members took part in it 
 with delight and to edification. About fifteen 
 dollars had been contributed at Umvoti, to 
 support a native missionary among their des- 
 titute countrymen, and about seventeen dollars 
 at Uralazi. 
 
 December 23, 1850, Mr. Bryant was called 
 to his rest. He was an excellent missionary, 
 and the close of his course was eminently in 
 keeping with his life. Rev. Jacob Ludwig 
 Dohne, a native of Germany, who went to 
 South Africa in 1836, in connection with the 
 Berlin Missionary Society, was, at his request, 
 and the strong recommendation of the breth- 
 ren of the mission, appointed by the Board ; 
 and in the year 1851, the mission was rein- 
 forced by llev. Seth B. Stone and Rev.* Wil- 
 liam Mellen, with their wives. At the close 
 of 1850, there were churches at nine of the 
 eleven stations, containing 123 members, 36 
 of whom were received during the year. Re- 
 gular preaching was maintained at 23 places. 
 Three free schools, taught by pious natives, 
 contained 89 pupils. The printing press was 
 in operation, and 317,100 pages had been 
 printed. The average population connected 
 with each station was about 3000. 
 
 The distance between the extreme stations 
 is about one hundred and fifty miles. The 
 neai-est English missionary station is 150 miles 
 from the most southerly station, at Umtwa- 
 lumi. 
 
 Dr. Adams died on the 16th of September, 
 1851, in the midst of his usefulness. His end 
 was peace. 
 
 Evidences of an incipient civilization are 
 making their appearance at the older stations. 
 At Umvoti, for instance, nearly eighty persons, 
 men, women, and children, come decently clad 
 to the Sabbatjb worship, and some persons are 
 usually clad while at work during the week. 
 Three families live in civilized-looking houses, 
 and some seven or eight natives are erecting 
 similar habitations. These are substituting 
 iron pots for cooking, in place of the old 
 earthen ; and are using spades, axes, saws, and 
 other kindred instruments of husbandry and the 
 arts. One native has procured a cart and oxen, 
 and thus takes produce to the market. House- 
 hold furniture is naturally found in the im- 
 proved houses, and clothing to correspond, and 
 some have procured writing materials, and 
 learned how to use them. 
 
 The following table will show the state of 
 the mission at the close of the year 1851, and 
 the statistics of the following year, which are 
 not so full, will not materially vary the re- 
 sult: 
 
 ZULU MISSION. 
 
 Native Assistants 
 
 Out-stations 
 
 Sabbath Preaching Places for Missionaries - 
 Week-day Preaching Places . - - . 
 Average Sabbath Congregation at the Stations 
 
 Schools 
 
 Male Pupils 
 
 Female Pupils 
 
 Total 
 
 Christian Marriages - - . - . 
 
 Children Baptized 
 
 Churches 
 
 Members received during the year - . - 
 
 Suspended 
 
 Excommunicated 
 
 Died 
 
 Male Members in good standing . . . 
 Female do. do. .... 
 
 Whole number of Church Members - - - 
 Candidates for admission . . - . 
 
 3 
 2 
 1 
 
 150 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 17 
 
 20 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 150 
 .1 
 
 7 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 800 
 
 12 
 
 188 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 
 50 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 91 
 
 75 
 
 166 
 
 28 
 
 * Jlr. Dohne makes it a rule to go from kraal to kraal daily, visiting and preaching to the people. 
 
APRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 55 
 
 Eight churches have been organized in this 
 mission, the largest of which has fifty-five 
 members, and the smallest four. The gospel 
 is preached on the Sabbath, and at other times, 
 at each of the twelve stations, and with more 
 or less regularity at seven out-stations, either 
 on the Sabbath or during the week. Sabbath 
 schools also are sustained, and weekly meetings 
 for prayer and religious instruction. Eighteen 
 persons were received into the churches during 
 the year 1852. The report of the mission 
 speaks also of twenty-five other cases regarded 
 as "hopeful." "Such is t^j^ beginning of 
 things. The work moves on as yet slowly. 
 Still the light is spreading — knowledge is in- 
 creasing. The fallow ground is being broken 
 up, and the seed is falling, some by the way- 
 side, some on stony ground, some among 
 thorns, and some on good ground, as in other 
 parts of the world. The harvest is not yet ; 
 but it will surely come. The number of per- 
 sons constituting the Sabbath congregations 
 varies from thirty or forty up to two hundred." 
 
 In the report of his station for 1852, Mr. 
 Lindley remarks : 
 
 "With several of my church members, I 
 continue, as I ever have been, well pleased. 
 With most, I see no cause to find serious fault ; 
 yet my observation and experience, during the 
 past year, have tended to weaken my confi- 
 dence in the religious professions of this people. 
 They do not give such evidence as I could wish 
 of a thorough change of heart. And this ques- 
 tion, always a difficult one, has now become 
 painful : ' How much allowance ought to be 
 made for imperfection in the Christian charac- 
 ter of those who have barely, and but lately, 
 emerged from the depths of a truly degrading 
 heathenism ? ' " 
 
 Rhenish Missionary Society. — In the summer 
 of 1829, this society sent to South Africa 
 four graduates of their Mission Seminary, at 
 Barmen. They sailed in company with Dr. 
 Philip and the missionaries of the Paris 
 Society. Soon after their arrival, two of 
 them, Messrs. LiJckhoff and Zahn, entered 
 into the service of two local associations at 
 Stellenbosch and Tulbagh ; but afterwards 
 these associations transferred their chapels and 
 other buildings to the Rhenish society. The 
 other two proceeded with Dr. Philip farther 
 into the interior, and purchased' the property 
 of a boer, near Olanwilliam, which they named 
 Wupperthal. This estate contained 60,000 
 acres of land, on which they established a mis- 
 sion* colony. WTioever promised to submit to 
 its regulations received a piece of land, and 
 aid in the erection of a dwelling house. He 
 was required to clothe himself, shun theft and 
 drunkenness, remain with his family, and yield 
 obedience to the missionaries. Thus speedily 
 arose the flourishing African Wupperthal, 
 which, crowned with beautiful gardens, looks 
 like a village in Germany. The new settlers 
 were instructed in all sorts of trades ; and the 
 
 oldest colonists already enjoy considerable pros- 
 perity. Mr. Zahn established a similar colony 
 in 1844, in the neighborhood of Kokfontein, 
 where he bought 954 acres for thp, sura of 
 $3 500, on the following plan : Each family 
 receives a piece of land for a house and garden, 
 for which he pays a rent of $12. The rent 
 pays the interest on the money which Mr. 
 Zahn borrowed for the purpose, in Cape Town, 
 and the surpWs is applied to the liquidation of 
 the principal ; and when the property becomes 
 free, these families will own their pla'ces. 
 
 The Dutch boers call these colonies " Insti- 
 tutes" and are very hostile to them, because 
 they interfere with their designs of oppressing 
 the natives. Artisans, some of whom are sent 
 out by the society, settle in these colonies, and 
 instruct the natives in the various handicraft 
 occupations. The Institute of Wupperthal 
 maintains itself and requires no assistance 
 from home. A strict discipline is kept up, 
 and every one exerts himself to earn a living, 
 and to leave off the former habits of filth and 
 theft. But some of the German colonists, who 
 have settled among them, have set them a bad 
 example, and the society have determined to 
 send no more such colonists in future. 
 
 In 1830, three more missionaries were sent 
 from Barmen, and 2 new stations were founded. 
 One of them, called Ebenezer, at the mouth of 
 Elephant River, was also an Institute. The 
 other was at Worcester. The station at Ebe- 
 nezer, being dependent for its fertility upon 
 the overflow of the river, often suffers severely 
 from drought, as the river sometimes does not 
 overflow for six or seven years. There are 
 300 or 400 inhabitants at this station, most of 
 whom are baptized. On account of its drought, 
 this station would have been given up, but for 
 the fact that it furnishes an important starting 
 point for the intercourse with the territories of 
 Naraaqua and Damara. The society have also 
 stations at Saron, near Tulbagh and at Kom- 
 maggas, in the north-west corner of the col- 
 ony. 
 
 At all the stations, buildings for the schools, 
 and churches, and dwelling-houses for the mis- 
 sionaries, have been erected ; and everywhere 
 a formal living in community has been organ- 
 ized ; that is, in every missionary community 
 there are chosen, from among the baptized na- 
 tives, elders or presbyters who form the church 
 session to the missionary, and who maintain 
 discipline over the community. Clerks and 
 church officers are chosen, native assistants are 
 educated, who especially give their aid in the 
 schools. Missionary associations are establish- 
 ed ; and the people, though nearly all very 
 poor, contribute according to their ability to 
 the support of their ministers. The preaching 
 of the gospel has nowhere encountered systema- 
 tic opposition from the natives themselves ; and 
 the government has shown itself, for the most 
 part, very favorable to the operations of the 
 missionaries. But the boers are bitter foes of 
 
50 
 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 the missionaries, because they rescue the ne- 
 groes from their cruel oppressors. 
 
 Until tlie ywir 1840, the missionaries of the 
 society yi Africa had not advanced farther 
 to the nortli than Kbenezer. Is ear to the 
 boandarv of Komniaggas, Mr. Sckmelen, an 
 esteemed Uennan missionary, was stationed, in 
 connection with the Loudon Missionary So- 
 ciety. At an earlier period he had been in 
 Namaqualand, on the other side'of the Orange 
 River, and he was now worn out with age. 
 The Loudon Missionary Society declined to 
 send him any assistants, because they had given 
 up the western coasts of South Africa, to be 
 occupied by the Rhenish Society ; thus 
 Schmelen turned to this society, and prayed 
 for fellow-laborers. The first brother sent him 
 was Kleinschmidt, who went out to hun in 
 the year 1840 ; and in the following year, five 
 others went. 
 
 In the year 1842, three of the brethren re- 
 moved into Great Namaqualand, and as far as 
 the tropic of Capricorn, where the boundaries 
 of Negroland or Damara close, opposite to the 
 territory of the Yellow Kamaquas. The next 
 year they were followed by two other missiona- 
 ries into Little Namaqualand ; and when, in 
 1848, the old Schmelen died, Kommaggas con- 
 tinued to be occupied by one of the society's 
 missionaries. They have to the south of the 
 Orange River, in Little Namaqua, three star 
 tions, Kommaggas, Kokfontein, and Fella, 
 with several out-stations. In these are placed 
 three missionaries, with several native assist- 
 ants. They carry on their labors among some 
 two thousand Namaquas, who are scattered 
 over many hundred miles of these deserts, 
 and, besides their Namaqua tongue, for the 
 most part understand also the Dutch. About 
 three hundred had been baptized in 1850, 
 and the desire to obtain baptism was universal. 
 The people are poor andiilthy ; but little grain 
 is grown ; and for cattle little grass can be 
 found. The whole country is now English ter- 
 ritory ; and thus it is sure to happen that the 
 rapacious boers will take from these poor people 
 their last wells and their fertile strips of land. 
 
 Of the three brethren who proceeded into 
 Great Namaqualand, two advanced to where 
 the Zwakop flows into Whale-bay, and forms 
 the northern boundary of Namaqualand. The 
 third remained in the heart of the country, 
 and built himself a house and a church near a 
 beautiful fountain, and called the place Betha- 
 ny. From this centre he commenced his labors 
 all round, in a wide circle, which is larger than 
 all Ireland. But very few people reside in 
 these districts, only some three thousand ; who, 
 in order to find food for their small cattle, travel 
 incessantly from one pasturage to another, keep 
 as long as possible by their teachers in Bethany, 
 but must always soon pull down their huts, in 
 order to set them up again, for a short time, in 
 more suitable localities. The missionary, too, 
 travels the greater part of the year, and visits 
 
 all the separate parties in the desert, remains 
 with each a few weeks or months, teaches and 
 administers the sacraments, and then returns 
 again to the centre at Bethany. With each 
 troop is a native assistant, who carries on the 
 work of instruction in the absence of the mis- 
 sionary. About 1000 were baptized in 1850, of 
 whom, probably, the half partake of the Lord's 
 Supper. The missionaries usually employ an in- 
 terpreter, as the pronunciation of the Nama- 
 qua dialect is too difiicult. But they have 
 already succeeded in fixing the language by 
 writing, and, brides a catechism, they have 
 translated the Gospel of Luke into that tongue ; 
 and by the assistance of the British and For- 
 eign Bible Society have had it printed at the 
 Cape, and distributed among the people. The 
 large circuit of the desert of Great Namaqua- 
 land is divided into two parts ; and a second 
 missionary has been sent. 
 
 The two missionaries who proceeded in the 
 year 1842, to the northern boundaries of Nama- 
 qualand, met with a very friendly reception 
 from Jonker, the Namaqua chief of that dis- 
 trict, who had dwelt before in Little Nama- 
 qualand, and had there been baptized. They 
 were the means of suppressing the desolating 
 warfare which had hitherto been waged be- 
 tween the Namaquas and the Damaras, and of 
 establishing peace. Upon this they thought 
 that the door was opened to them to visit the 
 populous tribes that live to the north, towards 
 the Niger ; but disputes in their own neigh- 
 borhood prevented all extension of missionary 
 undertakings ; and, on account of them, the 
 locality was abandoned to the Wesley ans, who 
 claimed prior occupancy. But Jonker with 
 his people have relapsed into the abominations 
 of heathenism; and they have become the 
 worst robbers and murderers, so that the mis- 
 sionaries in that district have no more danger- 
 ous foe than that Jonker, who formerly sat at 
 their feet. Directly after the missionaries 
 abandoned Jouker's locality, two brethi-eii 
 were sent out to their aid in 1845. They now 
 divided themselves ; two went forward into 
 Damaraland, and one established at AVhalc-bay 
 the station of Scheppmansdorf, of the highest 
 importance for intercourse by sea; and one, 
 somewhat farther to the south, and towards 
 the interior, founded the flourishing Rehoboth, 
 at some hot springs which are pretty numerous 
 in that district, and the country round about 
 is rather fertile. The Namaqua tribe, which 
 has settled there to the number of 1800 souls, 
 is not compelled, by the want of food for ^^heir 
 cattle, to disperse at every instant ; but reside 
 so constantly that the chief and several of his 
 principal retainers have begun to build for 
 themselves stone houses near the beautiful 
 church and school, a thing hitherto unheard of 
 in Namaqualand. The congregation numbers 
 four hundred baptized persons, and about one 
 hundred participants of the Lord's Supper ; 
 and though it has existed only for a short time, 
 
AFRICA, SOUTHERN. 
 
 67 
 
 it is one of the most prosperous of the mission- 
 ary communities. The two elders, the four 
 deacons and deaconesses, discharge their offices 
 in an exemplary manner ; public worship is 
 very regularly attended ; a strict discipline is 
 administered. Amidst the tumults of war, 
 always raging around, Kehoboth has hitherto 
 been preserved as a community of peace. A 
 missionary association has also been formed. 
 
 The two missionaries who resolved to pene- 
 trate northwards into Damaraland, and to 
 whom lately two other brethren have gone, 
 have had to struggle with very great difficul- 
 ties among the rude and savage negro tribes. 
 Without an interpreter and without any assist- 
 ance, they had to master a language to which 
 they were perfect strangers, and which, from 
 the hoarse throats of the people, sounds unin- 
 telligible in the highest degree, and appears to 
 be extremely copious in inflections. It would 
 seem that the Damara language is allied to 
 that of the Kaffres. The missionaries have, 
 with unspeakable pains and labor, reached 
 that point, that they can both preach in the 
 language, and they have printed some little 
 books in it. At first they kept together at 
 one station ; but they have now three separate 
 stations, and will probably extend them to a 
 wider circle, as soon as the travels undertaken 
 to explore the country beyond Whale-bay to- 
 wards Lake Ngami have opened paths into 
 the interior. In Damaraland, though the mis- 
 sionaries cannot yet speak of the fruits of their 
 labors, they can ' speak of many lovely buds 
 and blossoms. 
 
 This mission has planted an offshoot, far 
 into the interior of the country. On the 
 northern boundary of the Cape colony, not far 
 from the middle, lie the Karroo mountains, on 
 one extremity of which live a tribe of Bastards, 
 on the other a tribe of Kaffres, that have been 
 separated from their kindred tribes, and have 
 wandered up and down for many years. Among 
 both tribes a mission has been commenced ; 
 in 1845, among the Bastards (600), of whom 
 150 have been baptized ; in 1847, among 
 the Kaffres (700), of whom already 100 are 
 baptized. The two stations are called Aman- 
 delboom and Schietfontein. They would all 
 have the prospect of pleasing prosperity, if 
 the hostile Dutch boers did not penetrate to 
 them, with an intention to drive out the tribes, 
 and to seize upon their fine pasture lands for 
 their own herds. 
 
 In 1854, the mission was in a prosperous 
 condition. Of its seventeen stations, ten are 
 within the limits of the colony, four among 
 the Namaquas, and three among the Hereros. 
 Scheppmansdorf, the most northerly of the 
 Namaqua stations, is near Whalefish Bay. 
 New Barmen lies about two hundred mi' 
 north-east from Scheppmansdorf. Of the other 
 two Ilerero stations, Otjimbingue is situated 
 five days' journey west of New Barmen, and 
 Schmelen's Expectation is one day east of the 
 
 same place. The following table, though im- 
 perfect, will give a pretty correct idea of the 
 condition of the different stations : 
 
 
 '6 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 II 
 
 Stations. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 If 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 
 ftaj 
 
 g ■+^ 2 
 
 
 5 
 
 (S 
 
 a^ 
 
 a^l 
 
 Stellenbosh - - 
 
 1830 
 
 2400 
 
 900 
 
 292 
 
 Sarepta - - - - 
 
 1843 
 
 400 
 
 145 
 
 72 
 
 Worcester - - - 
 
 1832 
 
 200() 
 
 303 
 
 120 
 
 Tulbagh - - - - 
 
 1830 
 
 1000 
 
 190 
 
 75 
 
 Saron ~ . 9 . 
 
 1846 
 
 500 
 
 109 
 
 58 
 
 Ebenezer - - - 
 
 1834 
 
 300 
 
 158 
 
 60 
 
 Wupperthal - - 
 
 1830 
 
 400 
 
 217 
 
 117 
 
 Amandelboom - - 
 
 1845 
 
 800 
 
 182 
 
 48 
 
 Schietfontein - - 
 
 1847 
 
 800 
 
 191 
 
 88 
 
 Kommaggas 
 
 1829 
 
 400 
 
 200 
 
 72 
 
 Richtersfeld - - 
 
 1843 
 
 400 
 
 107 
 
 41 
 
 Steinkopf - - - 
 
 1821 
 
 600 
 
 250 
 
 60 
 
 Pella 
 
 1849 
 
 400 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 Bethany - - - 
 
 1814 
 
 300 
 
 240 
 
 70 
 
 Beersheba - - - 
 
 1842 
 
 600 
 
 462 
 
 190 
 
 Rehoboth - - - 
 
 1845 
 
 900 
 
 430 
 
 160 
 
 Kam - - - - 
 
 1842 
 
 400 
 
 209 
 
 90 
 
 Scheppmansdorf - 
 
 1846 
 
 300 
 
 47 
 
 30 
 
 New Barmen 
 
 1848 
 
 500 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Otjimbingue - - 
 
 1849 
 
 200 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 13000 
 
 4,340 
 
 1,647 
 
 Berlin Missionary Society. — This society 
 commenced operations in South Africa in 
 1833. One of the stations first occupied by 
 its missionaries was Beaufort. Some of them 
 went among the Oorannas and Kaffres. Since 
 1838, they have had stations at Cape Town 
 and Zoar. Its stations in 1847 were, Zoar, 
 Bethel, Itembia, Emmaus, Bethany, and Priel. 
 The number of its missionaries is 14 ; of bap- 
 tized persons, 907 ; of scholars, 418. 
 
 Norwegian Protestant Missionary Society. — 
 This society have recently commenced a mis- 
 sion near Port Natal, where they have sent 
 four missionaries ; but we have no particulars 
 concerning their operations. 
 
 The following table presents a general sum- 
 mary of missionary operations in Southern 
 Africa. The United Brethren and the Wes- 
 leyans do not distinguish, in their reports, be- 
 tween ordained missionaries and assistants. _ In 
 several other respects, the returns are wanting, 
 leaving the table incomplete ; but, in the most 
 important particulars, they are so nearly full 
 as to give a fair impression of the work. The 
 missionaries of the Society for Propagating the 
 Gospel in Foreign Parts are chiefly employed 
 in ministering to the established churches in 
 the colony, and the results of their labors are 
 not reported. 
 
58 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 
 
 MisBionaries. 
 
 Assistants. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 «' 
 
 ii 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 a 
 
 Societies. 
 
 d 
 
 (3 d 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 5< 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 d 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 le- 
 ts -3 
 
 Moravians, 
 
 8 
 
 29 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 1882 
 
 
 
 1733 
 
 6935 
 
 London Missionary Soc, 
 
 28 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4301 
 
 60 
 
 3483 
 
 
 
 Scotch Missions, 
 
 10 
 
 8 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 109 
 
 
 
 
 
 French Protest. Missions, 
 
 11 
 
 14 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1183 
 
 
 310 
 
 
 312 
 
 American Board, 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 9 
 
 166 
 
 12 
 
 188 
 
 28 
 
 
 Weslevan Society, 
 
 42 
 
 39 
 
 154 
 
 
 646 
 
 
 
 4970 
 
 
 7479 
 
 
 41,790 
 
 Gospei Propagation Soc., 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Rhenish Miss. Society, 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 1647 
 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 Norwegian Miss. Society, 
 Berlin Miss. Society, 
 
 
 » 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 
 907 
 
 
 
 
 418 
 
 
 
 Total, 
 
 137 
 
 225 
 
 154 
 
 10 
 
 672 
 
 
 
 14,258 
 
 
 11,878 
 
 
 62,037 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN :* That part of the 
 continent of Africa, which lies along the At- 
 lantic ocean, from the Southern borders of the 
 Great Desert of Sahara, in latitude 16° or 17° 
 north, to Cape Negro, near the river Nourse, 
 or the Southern boundary of Benguela, in 
 about the same latitude South. It varies in 
 width, from 200 to 350 miles, and bears about 
 the same geographical relation to the continent 
 of Africa, that the Atlantic States do to North 
 America. The Kong Mountains form the 
 eastern boundary of the northern half of West 
 Africa, and the Sierra del Crystal mountains 
 the eastern boundary of the Southern half 
 The former take their rise about 200 miles 
 east of the Gulf of Benin, and run in a north- 
 westerly direction, keeping nearly parallel to 
 the sea-coast, and not more than 200 miles dis- 
 tant, until they reach the latitude of Sierra 
 Leone, where they make an immense sweep 
 into the interior, inclining to the north-east, 
 until they lose themselves in the sands of the 
 Desert 700 or 800 miles from the sea-coast, and 
 more than 1 500 miles from their starting point. 
 The latter rise nearer to the sea-coast, and for 
 the first hundred miles are in sight of it ; after 
 which, they bear off in a southerly direction, 
 for 200 miles, and then resume a parallel line 
 to the sea-coast, till their termination, in the 
 latitude of Benguela, 1000 or 1200 miles from 
 the place of beginning. 
 
 The three grand divisions of Western Africa, 
 are Senegambia, Upper or Northern Guinea, 
 and Southern Guinea or Southern Ethiopia. 
 The first of these extends from the southern 
 
 ♦ For the principal portion of the introductory part of this 
 article, embracing the geography of the country and the 
 character and the condition of the people, the author is 
 indebted to a work on Western Africa, in preparation for 
 the press, by Rev. John Leighton WiUon, the manuscript 
 of which was kindly loaned for the purpose by the writer ; 
 the chapters on these subjects having been copied, with 
 some slight abridgment, but in manv parts, nearly verba- 
 tim . The paragraph on moral a/ndition is condensed from 
 a printed pamphlet by the same writer. 
 
 borders of Sahara to Cape Verga, 10° north 
 latitude, reaching inward 700 miles. The 
 second extends from Cape Yerga to the Cam- 
 eroon mountains, in the Gulf of Benin, a dis- 
 tance, on the coast, of more than 1500 miles, 
 but not more than 250 miles wide. The third 
 extends from the Cameroon mountains, in 49 
 north latitude, to Benguela. 
 
 The physical aspect of the country presents 
 some of the richest and most exuberant nat- 
 ural scenery in the world. In the vicinity of 
 Sierra Leone, Cape Mount, and Cape Messu- 
 rado, the eye rests upon bold headlands and 
 high promontories, enveloped in the richest 
 tropical verdure. In the region of Cape Pal- 
 mas, there are extended plains, somewhat un- 
 dulated, and beautified with almost every vari- 
 ety of the palm and palmetto. On the Derwin 
 coast, the country rises to high table land, of 
 the richest aspect, and of immense extent. 
 The Gold Coast presents hills and dales of 
 almost every conceivable form and variety. 
 And, in the neighborhood of Fernando Po and 
 the Cameroons, mountain scenery presents it- 
 self of exceeding beauty and surpassing mag- 
 nificence. 
 
 The western coasts of Africa are watered by 
 four great and noble rivers ; the Senegal and 
 Gambia in Senegambia, the Niger in Northern 
 Guinea, and the Congo in Southern Guinea ; 
 besides which, are several small rivers and 
 streams, which run into the Gulf of Guinea. 
 
 The discharge of the rivers and small streams 
 is frequently obstructed by the heavy swells 
 from the open ocean, and ^orm themselves into 
 back waters or lagoons, in consequence of 
 the exposed condition of the searcoast. These 
 lagoons are separated from the ocean by a 
 narrow sand bank, thrown up by the outer 
 swell. They are sometimes 200 or 300 miles 
 long, but generally only a few feet deep, and 
 seldom more than a quarter or half a mile wide. 
 They furnish great facilities of intercourse and 
 
ft 
 
 ;UFI7ERSIT7] 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 59 
 
 commerce to the maritime tribes, but are too 
 shallow for ordinary shipping. Tlie coast of 
 Africa is greatly wanting in good bays and 
 harbors. 
 
 The extent of territory belonging to the 
 English colony at Sierra Leone, is about 3000 
 miles. The British possess also several small 
 settlements on the coast of Guinea, viz., Cape 
 Coast Castle, Succondee, Dix Cove, Annamaboe, 
 AJcra and Lagos. The town of Bonny is sit- 
 uated at the mouth of the river Niger, and haa 
 been a groat mart for the slave trade. The 
 Islands of Ascension and St. Helena belong 
 to Great Britain ; the Madeira and Cape De 
 Verde Islands, to the Portuguese. The Por- 
 tuguese have also formed settlements bglow 
 the Niger, on the coasts of Congo, Loangho 
 and Benguela. 
 
 Climate. — The heat is seldom oppressive on 
 the sea-coast. Alternate land and sea-breezes 
 blow fresh every day. The mercury seldom 
 rises to 90°, and usually ranges between 74 and 
 84°. In-doors, the air is seldom oppressive. 
 During the Harmatton winds, the mornings 
 are cool, and the wind blows very strongly. 
 On the coast of Senegambia the heat is op- 
 pressive, but not so on the coast of Guinea. 
 In the interior, beyond the reach of the land 
 and sea breezes, the climate no doubt would 
 be oppressive. 
 
 Inhabitants. — The inhabitants of Western 
 Africa are divided into three great families, 
 corresponding with the three grand geograph- 
 ical divisions. Although these families belong 
 to one race, yet there are marked and essential 
 differences between them. 
 
 In Senegambia there are three leading fami- 
 lies, Icnown as the Jalofs, Mandingoes, _ and 
 Foulahs. By many it is doubted whether either 
 of these are pure negroes. The Foulahs are 
 evidently a mixed race. They are Mohamme- 
 dans, while the inhabitants of Northern and 
 Southern Guinea are essentially Pagan. 
 
 Northern Guinea is inhabited by the Nigri- 
 tian family, so called from their supposed de- 
 scent from the great negro families living in 
 the valley of the Niger. They are here sub- 
 divided into six or seven families. 
 
 Southern Guinea is inhabited by the Nilotic 
 family, so called from their supposed descent 
 from the ancient nations of the Nile. They are 
 spread over the whole of the south half of the 
 continent. They differ in many respects from 
 the inhabitants of Upper Guinea. They are not 
 so robust and energetic as the Nigritian race. 
 Their forms are more slender, their features 
 are better, and they are characterized by more 
 shrewdness and pliancy of character. 
 
 Government. — There are no extended politi- 
 cal organizations in Western Africa, excepting 
 the kingdoms of Ashantee and Dahomey, and 
 neither of these is larger or more powerful 
 than the second-rate kingdoms of Europe. 
 As a general thing, the people live together 
 in small independent communities, varying in 
 
 population from 1000 to 20,000. The form 
 of government, nominally, is monarchy, but 
 in reality, it is more patriarchal than mon- 
 archical. 
 
 Social Condition. — Though greatly debased 
 by their heathenism, yet the inhabitants of 
 Western Africa are not to be ranked among 
 the lowest of the human race. They have 
 fixed habitations ; they cultivate the soil, have 
 herds of domestic animals ; and show as much 
 foresight as most other people in providing for 
 their future wants. They have made consid- 
 erable proJSciency in most of the mechanic 
 arts, and evince a decided taste and capacity 
 for commercial pursuits. They have no writ- 
 ten literature, (excepting the Mohammedans 
 among them ; ) but they have abundance of 
 unwritten lore, in the form of fables, allego- 
 ries, traditions, and proverbial sayings, in 
 which are displayed no small share of close 
 observation, lively imagination, and extraordi- 
 nary shrewdness of character. 
 
 Moral Condition. — Selfishness, the control- 
 ling principle of the heathen heart, has full 
 sway here. The principles of justice, the 
 rights of individuals, the rules of decency, the 
 voice of humanity, the ties of kindred and 
 friendship, are trampled under foot. Theft, 
 falsehood, fraud, deceit, duplicity, injustice, 
 and oppression, are favorite agents and con- 
 stant companions. Intemperance, licentious- 
 ness, gluttony and debauchery furnish the 
 aliment upon which it feeds. It is almost 
 impossible, says Mr. Wilson, to say what vice 
 is preeminent among these degraded natives. 
 Falsehood is universal. No man speaks the 
 truth, who can find a motive for telling a lie. 
 Theft, fraud, and intemperance, are considered 
 as praiseworthy acts. Chastity is an idea for 
 which they have no word in their language, 
 and of which they can scarcely form a concep- 
 tion. Envy, jealousy, and revenge, enthrone 
 themselves in every heart, and wield their 
 triple sceptre with uncontrolled power. Hence, 
 there can be no confidence between man and 
 man, no sympathy of interests, — in fact, no 
 such thing as society. As might be expected, 
 in such a state, their intellectual faculties are 
 obtuse and circumscribed, almost beyond con- 
 ception. Beyond a few local associations, the 
 ideas of the most intelligent native on the 
 coast of Africa are not one particle above the 
 speculations of a child in this country of two 
 or three years of age. And over such minds, 
 superstition reigns with absolute sway. Al- 
 though the African is by nature preeminently 
 social, yet polygamy, ivitchcraft, and the slave 
 trade, together with the general influence of 
 heathenism, render him an entire stranger to 
 social happiness. Even cannibalism prevails 
 to some extent, in connection with punishment 
 for witchcraft. A man's importance in so- 
 ciety is regulated by the number of his wives ; 
 I but between them and himself, there exists no 
 affection. The African woman detests her 
 
60 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 husband above all others, and strifes, jealous- 
 iee, and endlt>*« bickerings, nrovail among the 
 women of his houseliold. The belief in witch- 
 craft sunders all the ties of nature, brings 
 fatal 8usj)icion upon the nearest relatives, and 
 fills the minds of all with a fearful sense of 
 insecurity. Their persons, houses, and almost 
 every article of property, must be guarded bv 
 /(tislies, and a man must be careful what path 
 ne walks, whose house he enters, on what stool 
 he sits, and what he touches. The cere- 
 mony of " taking oflf the fetish " must be per- 
 formed before a particle of food or drink is 
 tasted. The hair of the head, and the parings 
 of the nails, are concealed with studied care ; 
 and yet, notwithstanding these and a thousand 
 other expedients, yet more silly and stupid, 
 these people enjoy no sense of security, but 
 are WTetched and miserable among themselves, 
 and know not where to turn for relief. 
 
 Religioxis Belief, and Superstitious Customs 
 and Traditions. — It has been found very diffi- 
 cult to ascertain or describe the religious views 
 of the Pagan tribes of Africa, owing partly 
 to their indefiuiteness, and partly to their habits 
 of concealment in relation to what might ex- 
 pose them to ridicule. The belief in One 
 Great Supreme Being, the Creator and Up- 
 holder of all things, Mr. Wilson thinks is uni- 
 versal. This conviction stands out in every 
 man's creed ; so much so, that any theory of 
 Atheism would strike them as absurd and in- 
 defensible. Their conceptions of the character 
 and attributes of God, however, are extremely 
 low. They think of his power over the natural 
 world as great and irresistible ; but they have 
 no just ideas of his moral purity ; but ascribe 
 to him motives and feelings utterly at variance 
 with his true character. The tribes along the 
 coast have a name for Jehovah, and most of 
 them, two or more, significant of his character 
 as Creator, Preserver, and Benefactor. The 
 general impression, however, is, that He exer- 
 cises very little agency in the government of 
 the world, feeling too little interest in the 
 affairs of men, or being too far off, to concern 
 himself with what is transpiring upon earth. 
 On some great occasions, his name is invoked, 
 and in the Grebo country he is called upon 
 three times, in a loud voice, to witness any very 
 solemn transaction, as the establishment of 
 peace after war, the ratification of some great 
 treaty, or other measures of national imix)rt> 
 ance. The same thing ia done by an indivi- 
 dual when he is about to drink the " red wood 
 ordeal." Whether the practice of calling upon 
 God three times, about which they are very 
 particular, has any reference to the Trinity is 
 matter of conjecture ; but it is not improbable 
 that it may have been liandcd down by tradi- 
 tion, or borrowed from Christianity. 
 
 The belief in a future state of existence is 
 also general ; but they have no very definite or 
 consistent views as to what that state is. 
 Some believe in transmigration, and hence 
 
 animals in certain localities, as the monkeys 
 about Fishtown, are regarded as sacred, be- 
 cause they are suj)posed to be animated by the 
 spirits of their deceased friends. The soul of 
 one man is supposed to have been revived in 
 another, especially when there is any marked 
 resemblance between the two. The Mpongwe 
 people suppose there is a place where the spi- 
 rits of the dead will be ultimately collected ; 
 and the Grebos connect with it the idea of an 
 ordeal that must be passed through in going 
 to that place, which may, perhaps, have been 
 derived from the Popish doctrine of Purgatory, 
 taught by the Portuguese missionaries, who 
 visited this coast in the IGth and 17th centu- 
 ries. But at present, the spirits of the dead 
 ar^ supposed to mingle freely with the living ; 
 hence their dreams and sudden impressions 
 upon their minds are regarded as visitations 
 from the dead ; and any hints or admonitions 
 received from such som-ces will be more readily 
 followed than the dictates of reason and com- 
 mon sense. Sometimes the living are repri- 
 manded by the dead for their remissness in 
 duty, and not unfrequently the streets and 
 precincts of the largest towns are swept and 
 thoroughly cleansed, in obedience to some such 
 hint from the dead. 
 
 The idea of a future state of rewards and 
 punishments is not clearly developed ; but a 
 separate burying place is kept for atrocious 
 criminals, and there is a repugnance felt to 
 mingling with the notoriously wicked and 
 cruel. 
 
 Fetishism and Devil-worship are the charac- 
 teristic and leading forms of religion of the 
 Pagan tribes of all Africa. The two things 
 are entirely distinct in themselves ; but they 
 run together at so many points, and have been 
 so much confounded by those who have written 
 on the subject, that it is by no means an easy 
 task to set them in their separate and true 
 light. A Fetish, strictly speaking, is little 
 less than a charm, amulet, or talisman, worn 
 about the body, or suspended from some part 
 of the dwelling, and is intended either to 
 guard the owner from some apprehended evil, 
 or to secure for him some coveted good. On 
 some parts of the coast it is called a grigri, 
 (greegree,) at other places, a juju, ( jewjew,) 
 and others still, a, fetish, all implying the same 
 thing. It may be a piece of wood, in the 
 form of an ornament, the horn of a goat or 
 sheep, a piece of metal or ivory, or any thing 
 else that has been consecrated by one of the 
 priests. There are several classes of these fe- 
 tishes, for which they have separate names : 
 those worn about their persons ; such as are 
 siispended over the doors, and in different parts 
 of their dwellings, corresponding somewhat to 
 the penates of the ancient Komans ; such as 
 may be found along their highways, to protect 
 their farms and fruit trees from depredation ; 
 such as are used in war ; and finally, such as 
 belong to the town and are kept in a house at 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 61 
 
 the entrance of the village, or at the residence 
 of the chief. 
 
 The fetishes are supposed to possess extra- 
 ordinary and varied powers. They preserve 
 the life and health of one who uses them, and 
 guard not only from visible evils, but from the 
 secret machinations of witchcraft, so much 
 dreaded by the simple-minded African. The 
 fetish is also supposed to be able to j^rotect itself 
 against violence ; which power the superstitious 
 people are afraid to test. If the fetish fails, in a 
 given instance, it only proves that this particu- 
 lar one has no efficacy, and it is thrown away for 
 a better one ; but every one is considered effec- 
 tive till experience has proved the contrary. 
 And, if nine out of ten fail, the success of the one 
 is balanced against the failure of the nine, and 
 the successful one is the more valued. They talk 
 to their fetishes, try to stir them up to action in 
 great emergencies, pour rum upon them, and act 
 as if they supposed they possessed life and intel- 
 ligence : but in no other sense can their fetishes 
 be considered objects of religious worship. As 
 a general thing, they are regarded as inanimate 
 objects, without intelligence, but nevertheless, 
 exercising a silent mysterious influence, either 
 for their protection and preservation, or to the 
 injury of their fellow men. They regard this 
 as an established fact ; and think it as easy to 
 see the connection between the fetish and the 
 result, as between poison taken into the stom- 
 ach and death that follows. 
 
 The practice of wearing and using fetishes 
 is universal. They may be seen along every 
 path, at the gate of every village, over the 
 door of every house, and around the neck of 
 every one. The young, especially those who 
 have had some intercourse with the civilized 
 world, show some skepticism on the subject ; 
 but the older people, especially when they be- 
 come contemplative, and feel the infirmities of 
 age, cling to them with greater tenacity. The 
 people, however, have less feeling of security 
 than if they had none of these charms ; and 
 they never rely upon them in any very trying 
 or dangerous emergency. Indeed, when flying 
 from imminent danger, they will tear off their 
 fetishes and throw them away, to relieve them- 
 selves of the incumbrance. 
 
 Fetishes are extensively employed to protect 
 property, and to punish offenders. They are 
 made fast to fruit trees, set upon the borders of 
 a farm, or tied around the neck of a goat ; by 
 which it is supposed that trespassers will be 
 punished. And so, when any great national 
 law has been adopted, a fetish is made, to 
 punish the offender. But this is more fre- 
 quently done, when they are too feeble to take 
 the execution of the law into their own hands. 
 The use of fetishes is intimately connected 
 with the belief in witchcraft. 
 
 Devil-worship. — The only thing in Western 
 Africa that can strictly be regarded as religious 
 worship, is that which is offered to the spirits 
 of the dead, aud usually denominated " Devil- 
 
 worship." Some of them are regarded as good 
 spirits, and their aid and protection sought, 
 others are considered as evil spirits, and their 
 displeasure deprecated. But it is doubtful 
 whether they have any idea of evil spirits dis- 
 tinct from those which are supposed to have 
 proceeded from wicked men. The presence of 
 some spirits is courted ; houses are built for 
 their accommodation, and occasional offeringg 
 of food, drink, clothing, and furniture are taken 
 to these houses for their use. They place large 
 quantities of cloth, beads, knives, pipes, tobac- 
 co, and ornaments in the coffin, and large ar- 
 ticles of furniture around the grave outside, 
 for the use of the dead. 
 
 There are also other spirits, whose presence 
 is much dreaded. They are supposed to cause 
 sickness, drought, wars, pestilence, and other 
 forms of national evil; and, in some places, 
 they make offerings to the devil to appease his 
 wrath, and induce him to withdraw the scourge. 
 On the Gold coast, there are stated occasions 
 when the people turn out at night to drive the 
 devil away from town with clubs and torches. 
 At a given signal, the whole community start 
 up, commence a most hideous howling, beat 
 about in every nook and corner of their houses, 
 then rush into the streets like frantic maniacs, 
 beat the air with their clubs, brandish their 
 torches, and scream at the top of their voices. 
 Soon, some one announces that the devil is 
 leaving the town by some particular gate, 
 when they all rush in that direction, and pur- 
 sue him for miles from the town. 
 
 Supposed demoniacal possessions are very 
 common, and the feats performed by those 
 who are believed to be under the influence of 
 these agents, are not unlike those described in 
 the New Testament. Frantic gestures, con- 
 vulsions, foaming at the mouth, feats of super- 
 natural strength, furious ravings, bodily lace- 
 rations, gnashing of the teeth, and other things 
 of a similar nature, characterize all those cases 
 which they regard as being under the influence 
 of evil spirits. But some of these, Mr. Wilson 
 says he found out had been occasioned by the 
 administration of powerful narcotics, and oth- 
 ers were the natural results of a highly excited 
 state of the nerves. But there were other ex- 
 hibitions of feeling and actions, which could 
 scarcely be ascribed to either of these causes. 
 However, we cannot tell what effects may be 
 produced by frequent and violent strain upon 
 the nervous system. 
 
 In the beginning, it is not easy to distin- 
 guish these possessions from an ordinary attack 
 of disease ; and when it is determined to be 
 a possession, it is no easy matter to ascertain 
 what kind of a spirit it is. On the Pongo coast> 
 there are four or five classes of these spirits ; 
 and when a man is known to be possessed, he 
 passes through the hands of the priests of these 
 different orders, till some one pronounces it to 
 be a case with which he is acquainted and is 
 able to cure. A temporary house is built 
 
0:i 
 
 AililCA, WESTEUN. 
 
 dancing commcnoos, a variety of ceremonies 
 arc ])erforuied, meilicines are ndniinistorod, and 
 nfior a fortuiglit spent in this way, uij^ht and 
 day, the friends of the invalid furnishing abun- 
 dance of rum and food for the performers, he 
 is pronounced cured. A house is then built 
 near his own residence, for the accommodation 
 of this outcast doil, who is henceforth to be- 
 come his tutelar god ; and so long as he treats 
 him with proper respect, and obeys the injunc- 
 tions imposed on him when he was healed, he 
 will do well. But if the disease returns, it is 
 evidence of neglect of duty towards his patron 
 spirit, and the ceremonies must be repeated. 
 
 The spirits who are objects of worship in 
 the country, are supposed to inhabit certain 
 great rocks, trees, mountains, rivers, caverns, 
 and groves ; and these places are always sa- 
 cred. They are passed in silence, and not with- 
 out dropping some kind of offering, if nothing 
 more than u leaf of a tree, or a shell picked 
 up on the beach. To these places they carry 
 oiferings of food, drink, cloth, or furniture ; but 
 they must be presented by the priest, who 
 pretends to hold intercourse with these spirits. 
 When the priests would make an impression 
 upon the people, one of their own number is 
 concealed in some recess of the grove, or cor- 
 ner of the rock, and answers are given to the 
 questions proposed, but always in an unnatural 
 tone. There is no danger of the exposure of 
 the trick, for no one has courage to venture 
 near the spot, lest a legion of angry spirits 
 should rush out and tear him in pieces. One 
 of these oracles near the mouth of the Cavali 
 river has acquired great celebrity ; and it is 
 visited by pilgrims from the distance of nearly 
 200 miles ; and as offerings are always brought, 
 it is a source of considerable revenue to the 
 king of Cavali, It has been visited by several 
 white men, and found to be nothing but a cav- 
 ern, in which is an echo, that the priests inter- 
 pret to moan whatever they please, and the 
 people arc simple enough to credit the word 
 of men, of whose dishonesty they have daily 
 proofs. 
 
 These patron spirits are supposed also to in- 
 habit certain animals, and hence such become 
 sacred. At Fishtown, on the Grain coast, 
 certain monkeys found in the wood about the 
 grave-yard are sacred, because it is thought 
 they are animated by the spirits of their de- 
 parted friends. At DLxcove, on the Gold 
 coast, the crocodile is sacred. At Papo and 
 Whidah, on the slave coast, a certain kind 
 of snake is sacred. At Calabar and Bonny 
 the shark is sacred, and human victims are 
 occasionally offered to it. At the Gaboon, the 
 natives will not eat the parrot, because it talks, 
 and, as they say, is too much like man ; but in 
 reality, perhaps, because they have some suspi- 
 cion that these birds have the spirits of their 
 forefathers. A certain tiger, at Cape St. 
 Catherine, is also sacred. 
 
 These animals have the sagacity to find out 
 
 that they arc not liable to be molested, and 
 therefore appear to be very presuming-. 'I'he 
 monkeys about Fishtown are quite tiiino ; the 
 alligator at Dixcove will come at cull, and fol- 
 low a man with a white fowl in his hand, to 
 the distance of half a mile from his den ; the 
 snake at Papo has become so much domestica- 
 ted that it may be handled with impunity, and 
 so far trained that it will bite or refrain from 
 biting, according to the pleasure of its keeper. 
 The shark at Benin will come up to the river's 
 edge every day, to see if a victim is prepared 
 for him ; and the tiger of St. Catherine will 
 traverse the streets of the village at night, and 
 will burrow somewhere during the day, in the 
 immediate neighborhood, without any appa- 
 rent apprehension of being disturbed. 
 
 The spirits of the dead are supposed to take 
 an active part in the affairs of the world ; 
 hence, when in great distress, they go into the 
 woods and call upon them for help, in the most 
 piteous strains. They sometimes send messa- 
 ges to their friends in another world, by one 
 that is about to die. Mr. Wilson says he has 
 known mothers who have shunned their own 
 sons, lest they should use some unfair means 
 to get them out of this world, with the hope 
 that they would do them more service in an- 
 other. They frequently invoke the spirits of 
 their forefathers, when about to discuss any 
 important matter ; and the leading men in the 
 Pongo country rub their foreheads with chalk 
 that has been kept in the skull of some great 
 chief, for the purpose of imbibing his wisdom 
 and courage. 
 
 The practice of sacrificing human beings to 
 the manes of the dead, which is more common 
 in Ashantee and Dahomey than any where else, 
 grows out of this belief in a future existence. 
 The victims offered at the death of any member 
 of the royal family, or of any great personage, 
 and which are repeated at stated periods after- 
 wards, are intended to be servants or escorts to 
 such persons in another w^orld. _ They have no 
 right conceptions of a purely spiritual state of 
 existence, and hence they reason from the visi- 
 ble to the invisible. Although they have no 
 distinct impression of the resurrection, they 
 suppose that their deceased friends have all 
 the bodily wants which they had in this world, 
 and that they would be gratified by the same 
 kind of attentions that Avould be acceptable 
 here. 
 
 A deranged man is regarded as one who has 
 lost his soul, and the same is said of the imbe- 
 cility of age. In sleep, they suppose it not 
 uncommon for th# soul to wander out of the 
 body, and sometimes to come in conflict with 
 other w^andering spirits. If a man wakes up 
 in the morning with pains in his bones or 
 muscles, he suspects at once that his spirit has 
 been wandering about in the night, and has 
 received a severe flagellation from some other 
 spirit. 
 
 PFtYcAcro/iJ.— Nearly allied to the foregoing, 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN 
 
 63 
 
 is the universal belief in witchcratt, which is, 
 perhaps, the heaviest curse that rests on Africa, 
 and one of the last evils to be rooted out of 
 the African mind. In its leading and essen- 
 tial features, it docs not differ materially from 
 that form of it which prevails in other parts 
 of the world. (See Witchcraft.) A person 
 who professes this art, is supposed to exercise 
 nothing less than omnipotent power, not only 
 over the minds and bodies of his fellow men, 
 but over wild animals and the elements of na- 
 ture. He can transform himself into a tiger 
 and keep the community in a state of agita- 
 tion for months or years ; he can turn himself 
 into an elephant, and destroy their farms and 
 fruit trees. He can turn another man into an 
 elephant, so that he may be shot by his own 
 father or brother. The wind and the light- 
 ning are his agents, and they never fall upon 
 any one but they have been directed by his 
 machinations. It is not known how this mys- 
 terious power is acquired. By some it is sup- 
 posed to be secured by eating a certain kind 
 of leaf in the woods, and by others to be con- 
 ferred by evil spirits. No very logical proofs 
 are required to show that a man has exercised 
 these extraordinary powers. It is known that 
 he once had a pique at one of his fellow men, 
 and because this man happened to die the same 
 day that an elephant was killed, he is suspect- 
 ed of having turned him into that elephant, 
 and so arranged every thing that he should be 
 put to death. A thunder storm passes over a 
 village, a house is struck with lightning, and 
 some one is killed. The whole community is 
 thrown into the most direful agitation. The 
 inquiry is raised, " Who brought the lightning 
 down upon that man ?" the meaning of which 
 is little else than " Who had a grudge against 
 him ?" The friends and family of the deceas- 
 ed have the right to single out the person and 
 require him to drink the " redwood draught." 
 This is a sure and infallible test of guilt or in- 
 nocence. No man can hesitate submitting to 
 it, without acknowledging his guilt. This 
 draught is a decoction made from the inner 
 bark of a large forest tree, called by the Gre- 
 bos, gimi, and by the Ashantees, adum. The 
 bark is pounded in a mortar, and then thrown 
 into a pot of water until the strength is 
 extracted, when it is drawn off for use. Its 
 appearance is like the water of a tan vat, and 
 it is both astringent and narcotic, and when 
 taken in large quantities, it acts as an emetic. 
 The accused, before he takes the draught, makes 
 confession of all the evil deeds he has commit- 
 ted in his past life, and then* invokes God to 
 make *' redwood draught " kill him if he is 
 guilty of the crime with which he is charged, 
 but if he is innocent to let it pass off without 
 harm. He is required to drink more or less 
 according to circumstances. If he vomits 
 freely, he is declared innocent. But if other- 
 wise, he is the more strongly suspected, an ad- 
 ditional portion is administered, and if death 
 
 follows, it seals his guilt. The greatest indig- 
 nities are then heaped upon his body, some- 
 times even before life is extinct. Women and 
 children are summoned, and required to beat, 
 kick, and spit upon it ; and even the friends 
 and relatives of the victim have to join in these 
 outrages, or else they are suspected of partici- 
 pating in his crime. And besides this, the fa- 
 mily are heavily fined, and it is a long time 
 before the stain upon their character is wiped 
 out. 
 
 On the other hand, if the accused comes off 
 clear it is the occasion of great exultation. 
 He is washed, decked out in his best, and pa- 
 rades the streets with no little pride and com- 
 placency. He receives presents from all his 
 friends, and the party who accused him wrong- 
 fully are mulcted in a large sum. But a man 
 who has drank this portion once, is not entire- 
 ly exempt from it in the future. 
 ^ The use of the " redwood draught" is not en- 
 tirely confined to the case of persons suspected 
 of witchcraft. It is used as a punishment for 
 some other crimes ; and when it is the deter- 
 mination of those who administer it to kill the 
 man, it can be forced upon him in such quan- 
 tities as to insure the result. This mode of 
 punishment appears to have been adopted for 
 the purpose of exonerating the administra- 
 tors of justice from the responsibility of put- 
 ting men to death in cases of doubtful guilt. 
 They say it was the " redwood " that killed 
 him ; and it is the general impression that the 
 " redwood " has in itself the discrimination to 
 detect guilt ; and thus the people exonerate 
 themselves from the tedious process of search- 
 ing out evidence. They never assign any rea- 
 son for the use of this ordeal, except that tlieir 
 fathers did it, and because of the many marvel- 
 ous stories they can tell of the wonderful feats 
 of this mysterious agency. 
 
 A different article is used in Lower Guinea 
 for this ordeal. It is a small shrub with a red 
 root, from which the decoction is made, called 
 by the Mpongwe people nkazya. This is a 
 diuretic and narcotic ; and if it operates freely 
 as the former, and does not affect the brain to 
 produce delirium, the man is considered inno- 
 cent ; but if it produces vertigo, he is guilty. 
 Small sticks are laid on the ground, a few feet 
 apart, and after having taken the draught, he 
 is required to step over them. If he does this 
 without difficulty, he is innocent ; but, if he 
 fancies they are great logs, and raises his feet 
 high to get over them, he is, of course, guilty. 
 The quantity in this case is not more than half 
 a pint ; but in the other it is half a gallon or 
 a gallon. 
 
 The natives on the Grain Coast have another, 
 called the " hot oil ordeal," which is used to 
 detect petty thefts, and in cases where women 
 are suspected of infidelity to their husbands. 
 The suspected person is required to plunge the 
 hand into a pot of boiling oil. If it is with- 
 drawn without pain, he is innocent. If he 
 
u 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 soflers pain, he is guilty, and is fined or punished 
 88 Uie case may reauire. 
 
 rra</»</am\— Although the Africans have no 
 knowletlj^e of letters, they have a great deal of 
 what may bo called unwritten literature, in the 
 form of 'legends, traditions, fables, and pro- 
 verbial sayings. Their fables are highly dra- 
 matic, animals being made to act and speak 
 with life and naturalness. They have several 
 traditions, which would seem to have been 
 derived from the Bible. They believe in the 
 common origin of the human race, and have a 
 curious legend to account for the difference 
 between the white and black man, for which 
 see Ashaiitee and Gold Coast. They have tradi- 
 tions also of a deluge and of the advent of the 
 Saviour, but coupled with much that is extra- 
 vagant and gross. 
 
 Among all the tribes of both Upper and 
 Lower Guinea, there are many unmistakeable 
 traces of Judaism. The existence of twelve 
 families in most of the large communities on 
 the coast ; the extreme care taken to keep 
 them distinct ; the rigid interdiction of mar- 
 riages between members of the same family ; 
 and various other customs, show that they 
 have views akin to those of the Israelites. On 
 the Gold Coast, they divide time into weeks, 
 have their lucky and unlucky days, and observe 
 the new moons with as much interest as the 
 Israelites. Circumcision is practiced among 
 all the tribes in Western Africa, with the ex- 
 ception of those on the Grain Coast ; and the 
 neglect of it exposes a man to much ridicule. 
 The practice of sprinkling the blood of ani- 
 mals, as they invariably do, on the door-posts 
 of their houses, and about the places where their 
 fetishes are kept, would seem to indicate a 
 Jewish origin. In the house of the chief- 
 priest, there is usually an allar with two horns, 
 and criminals fly to it and lay hold of these 
 horns, as the Jews did of old, and no one can 
 remove them but the chief-priest himself. They 
 have their stuted ablutions and their purifica- 
 tions ; they shave their heads and wear the 
 poorest kind of clothes as marks of mourning. 
 At the funerals, the women are the chief 
 mourners, and the time of mourning corres- 
 ponds with that of the Jews. 
 
 Funerals. — African funerals are attended 
 with great pomp and display. The corpse is 
 washed, painted, and decked out in the grand- 
 est style. It is then laid on boards, or in a 
 rude cofiBn, in a conspicuous place, during the 
 funeral ceremonies, which occupy the greater 
 part of the day ; the character depending up- 
 on the standing of the man. At an early hour, 
 the friends and townsmen of the deceased as- 
 semble in a circle, in front of the house. A 
 bullock tied by the fore feet is brought to be 
 slaughtered in honor of the dead. Every visitor 
 is expected to bring some kind of present, to be 
 laid in or beside the coffin. The male relatives 
 and others, to the number sometimes of forty or 
 fifty^ get within the circle, and keep up a rapid 
 
 I discharge of muskets for hours. When the cere- 
 monies have been continued long enough, as 
 they suppose, to gratify the dead man, two 
 bearers take the coffin on their heads to carry 
 it to the burying ground. But sometimes the 
 dead refuses to go, and the bearers are whirled 
 round, first one way and then another, and 
 finally run back into the town. Some one 
 then comes and soothes and coaxes the dead 
 man to consent to be carried to the grave 
 yard. The bearers start off again in a trot ; 
 but before they get out of town, they are vio- 
 lently forced aga-inst some man's house, which 
 is an accusation that the owner has been acces- 
 sory to his death ; and he is forthwith arrested 
 and subjected to the red-wood ordeal. After 
 some delay, the corpse is deposited at the usual 
 place of burial, and the bearers run and plunge 
 themselves into the water. The female rela- 
 tives assemble morning and evening to mourn 
 for the dead, for one month ; after which they 
 wash themselves, put aside all the badges of 
 mourning, and resume their wonted duties. 
 The wives of the dead man are then divided 
 among the brothers of the deceased ; but before 
 they enter upon this new arrangement they are 
 permitted to go and visit their respective 
 families. 
 
 Many of the efforts hitherto made to intro 
 duce the gospel into West Africa, it is well 
 known, have been singularly disastrous. The 
 United Brethren directed their attention to the 
 Gold Coast as early as 1736 ; but after repeat- 
 ed attempts to establish themselves at Chris- 
 tiansborg, extending through a period of nearly 
 forty years, and after eleven of their number 
 had fallen by the diseases incident to the cli 
 mate, they relinquished the undertaking as 
 impracticable and hopeless. In 1795 two 
 missionaries were sent to Sierra Leone by the 
 English Baptist Missionary Society ; but, owing 
 to the indiscretion of one and the ill-health of 
 the other, the enterprise was abandoned. In 
 the following year three societies, the Scottish 
 Missionary Society, the London Missionary So- 
 ciety, and the Glasgow Missionary Society, — 
 made a joint effort to establish a mission among 
 the Foulahs ; but this plan was defeated by 
 the combined agency of disease and dissension ; 
 and the only one of six laborers who promised 
 to accomplish anything, was cruelly murdered. 
 Two years later (1797) the Glasgow Mission- 
 ary Society attempted to introduce the gospel 
 among the Timnehs, and sent out two mission- 
 aries for this purpose ; but they were grievously 
 disappointed in the character of their agents. 
 And even those societies which have been able 
 to maintain their position till the present time, 
 have suffered frequently and severely from the 
 loss of valued missionaries. The hope may be 
 indulged, however, that a better acquaintance 
 with the diseases of West Africa will cause a 
 diminution in the number of deaths. The oc- 
 
APEICA, WESTERN. 
 
 65 
 
 casional return of missionaries to their native 
 land is already proving higlily beneficial. It 
 may be found also, as many expect, that a resi- 
 dence upon the hills and mountains of the in- 
 terior will be comparatively free from danger, 
 But whatever may be the obstacles, the gospel 
 must be carried to all parts of Africa, in obe- 
 dience to the Saviour's last command ; and we 
 may encourage ourselves with the hope that 
 "Ethiopia shall soon stretch out her hands 
 unto God." 
 
 Church Missionary Society. — This society 
 sent missionaries to the Susoo country in 1804 ; 
 but one of them left the service, and the other. 
 Mr. Renner, remained as chaplain at Sierra 
 Leone. In 1806, Messrs. Bretscher and Prasse, 
 with Mr. Renner, went to the Susoo country, 
 and met with a friendly reception from several 
 chiefs ; and a trader named Curtis gave Mr. 
 Renner a house and garden, in a pleasant lo- 
 cation, on condition that he would teach his 
 children. Messrs. Bretscher and Prasse built 
 a house at another town called Fantimania, 
 further up the country. Soon after, Mr. Prasse 
 died. This station was reinforced in 1809, by 
 the arrival .of Messrs. Barnett and Wenzel ; 
 but Mr. Barnett soon after died of fever. 
 
 Supposing that the slave trade had exerted 
 such an influence upon the adults that there 
 was no hope of doing them any good, they did 
 not attempt to preach, but confined their efforts 
 to the children, thus erroneously limiting the 
 power of the gospel Some of the children 
 they ransomed from slavery, and others they 
 supported. In 1810, Mr. Bretscher had thirty 
 boys in a school-house, which he had built ; 
 and Mrs, Renner had a school of twenty- 
 eight girls, all neatly dressed in frocks and 
 gowns, made with their own hands. But they 
 were often much straitened. At one time, 
 they could not even buy a basket of rice, and 
 they had not provisions for a fortnight. But 
 Fananda, a chief about 40 miles distant, who 
 had been educated in England, being applied 
 to, offered to thresh two tons of rice for them, 
 leaving them to pay when they could, assuring 
 them that Jie looked more to the good object 
 they had in view than to the money. But 
 they met with much opposition from the slave- 
 traders, who feared the effect of Christianizing 
 the natives, upon their inhuman traffic, which 
 exerted a most debasing influence on the peo- 
 ple ; thus in effect making gain of the souls as 
 well as the bodies of men. 
 
 In 1813, Mr. Bretscher visited England, and 
 returning with his wife and seven other per- 
 sons, was shipwrecked with the loss of $13,000 
 worth of stores. A new station was now com- 
 menced on the Rio Dembia, called Gambler, 
 and one had been recently established on the 
 Bullom shore. 
 
 At Canoffee a church had been erected, and 
 
 on the 7th of August, 1815, 50 children were 
 
 baptized. But by the arrival of a slaver, every 
 
 thing was thrown into confusion, the mission 
 
 5 
 
 premises, school-house, and church at Bashia 
 were burnt, and the missionaries compelled to 
 leave, saving nothing but a single trunk and a 
 bed, Mrs. Meisner being taken into the field, 
 from a sick bed, in a blanket. Other indig- 
 nities were heaped upon the missionaries, and 
 they were threatened with death. They, how- 
 ever, escaped to Canoffee. 
 
 On the 13th of February, 1815, Rev. J. C. 
 Sperrhacker and wife, and four other persons 
 arrived as a reinforcement ; but Mr. S. was 
 removed by death soon after his arrival, and 
 several other missionaries fell victims to the 
 yellow fever. 
 
 In January, 1816, Rev. Edward Bickersteth, 
 secretary of the society, visited the mission ; 
 and in vi^ew of the repeated fires, and violent 
 opposition of the people, he directed the station 
 at Bashia to be abandoned. He also brought 
 about a change of policy in the mission ; re- 
 minding the missionaries that their great 
 business was to preach the gospel, and inducing 
 them to make the attempt. But in conse- 
 quence of the continued hostility of the dealers 
 in human flesh, the stations among the Susoos 
 and the Bulloms were both broken up, and the 
 missionaries and most of their pupils retired 
 within the colony. 
 
 After the abolition of the slave trade, a 
 great number of negroes with hundreds of 
 children, were rescued from slave ships, and 
 settled in different parts of the country, and 
 fed and clothed at the expense of the govern- 
 ment. To provide for these children, the 
 Church Missionary Society obtained a grant 
 of land at Leicester Mountain, and erected the 
 necessary buildings for what was called the 
 " Christian Institution." This was afterwards 
 changed into a sort of college, where a su- 
 perior education might be given to the most 
 promising youths, to qualify them to labor as 
 missionaries, or to fill important stations in 
 the Colony. Some years afterwards, the es- 
 tablishment was removed to Regent's Town, 
 and subsequently to Fourah Bay. The mission- 
 aries also established schools for the children 
 of the recaptured slaves, in their different vil- 
 lages, in Avhich they were countenanced and 
 assisted by the government. The preaching 
 of the gospel was also commenced among the 
 adults, and in many instances crowned with 
 great success. 
 
 When these people were brought together 
 at Regent's Town, in 1813, they were in a most 
 deplorable condition. In 1816, about 1100 
 congregated at that place, from almost every 
 tribe in that part of the continent. A church 
 had been erected, and much improvement made 
 in their condition. In June, of that year, Mr. 
 Johnson was appointed to the care of Regent's 
 Town ; but the aspect of things appeared dis- 
 couraging. Natives of 22 different nations 
 were collected together, mostly taken from the 
 holds of slave-ships. They were in a state of 
 continual hostility, with no means of commu- 
 
66 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 nicating with each otlier, but a little broken 
 English. When clothing was given them, they 
 would sell it, or throw it away. None of them 
 lived in the married state, but they herded 
 together like brutes. From ten to twenty of 
 them were crowded together in a single hut. 
 Many of them were gnastly as skeletons, and 
 six or eight of them sometimes died in a day. 
 Only six children were born in a year. Super- 
 stition tyrannized over their minds, and there 
 was little desire for instruction. Hardly any 
 land was cultivated by them. Some would live 
 by themselves in the wootls, and others sub- 
 sisted by thieving and plunder. Many of them 
 would prefer any kind of refuse meat to the 
 rations they received from Government. 
 
 So many negroes continued to arrive from 
 slave vessels, that Mr. Johnson had to issue 
 rations twice a week for a thousand persons. 
 He was greatly tried with their indifference, 
 when he attempted to preach Christ to them, 
 and was often on the point of giving up in dis- 
 couragement. But he soon began to see that 
 his labors were not in vain. The people were 
 beginning to improve in appearance and man- 
 ners. Their natural indolence began to give 
 {)lace to habits of industry. Those who had 
 ived in the woods came and asked for lots in 
 the town, which was now regularly laid out in 
 streets, and built upon with avidity. The 
 church, which originally contained 500, was 
 five times enlarged, in the course of a few 
 years. 
 
 In the course of a year from the commence- 
 ment of Mr. Johnson's labors, an astonishing 
 progress was made. One evening, when he was 
 praying, and was much cast down, a young 
 man followed him and said, " Massa, me want 
 to speak about my heart. For some time my 
 heart bad too much. When I lie down, or get 
 up, or eat or drink, me thinks about sins com- 
 mitted in my own country, and since me came 
 to Regent's Town ; and me dont know what 
 to do." He was pointed to the " Lamb of God, 
 which taketh away the sin of the world." 
 The next week, several more came on the same 
 errand. And from this time, the work of 
 grace made progress. Young persons were 
 seen retu-ing to the woods for prayer, and little 
 groups assembled by moonlight to chant the 
 praises of the Redeemer. Both old and young 
 appeared anxious to be instructed in the way 
 of salvation. Polygamy, greegrees, and the 
 worship of the devil, were universally aban- 
 doned. In April, 1818, when Mr. Johnson 
 sailed for England, the number of communi- 
 cants was 263. All the people were decently 
 clothed, and most of the females had learned to 
 make their own apparel. About 400 couples 
 were married. Their heathen customs were 
 laid aside ; and for a year before Mr. J. left, 
 not an oath had been heard, nor a solitary case 
 of drunkenness witnessed by him. The schools 
 contained upwards of 500 scholars, and an 
 equal number regularly attended church every 
 
 day, at morning and evening prayers ; while 
 the average attendance at public worship on 
 the Sabbath was from 1200 to 1300. 
 
 At this time, the town contained 19 streets, 
 made plain and level, with good roads round 
 the town. A large stone church rose in the 
 midst of the habitations ; a government house, 
 parsonage, hospital, school-houses, store-houses, 
 a bridge of several arches, some native houses, 
 and other dwellings, all of stone, were finished 
 or in process of erection. Gardens, fenced, 
 were attached to every dwelling. All the land 
 in the immediate neighborhood was under cul- 
 tivation, producing a profusion of vegetables 
 and fruits, and about 75 of the natives had 
 learned various trades. 
 
 The parting of the natives with Mr. Johnson 
 was very affecting. Hundreds, of both sexes, 
 followed him five miles to Freetown, and on 
 his embarkation, said, " Massa, suppose no wa- 
 ter live here, we go with you all the way, till 
 no feet more move 1 " 
 
 After his departure, a mortal sickness broke 
 out in the settlement, which carried off many 
 of the people, as well as several of the devoted 
 friends and agents of the society, Mr. Wil- 
 helm took charge of the station, during Mr. 
 Johnson's absence. On the Slst of January, 
 1820, Mr. Johnson arrived at Freetown, on his 
 return. The news of his arrival soon reached 
 Regent's Town, and a number of the people 
 came down that night, and many more in the 
 morning, and he says he never in his life shook 
 hands with so many persons in one day. The 
 joy of the people was beyond all bounds. In 
 1822, his wife returned to England, in a feeble 
 state of health ; and in 1823, he embarked for 
 England to meet her; but on the way, was 
 seized with a violent fever, of which he died. 
 
 The society, at this time, had stations at 
 Bathurst, Charlotte, Gloucester, Kent, Leopold, 
 Waterloo, Wilberforce, and York, villages of re- 
 captured Africans ; in several of which, their 
 efforts were crowned with success similar to 
 that at Regent's Town, particularly at Glou- 
 cester, under Rev. Mr. During, where the work 
 of grace and the general improvement were 
 quite as remarkable. 
 
 The committee of the society attribute the 
 distinguished success of these two missionaries, 
 under God, to their tender, affectionate spirit. 
 They say that the parental spirit is that which 
 is alone likely to influence a people in the cir- 
 cumstances of the liberated Africans. " The 
 magisterial spirit, which, in its mildest actings, 
 must still tend to coercion and restraint, will 
 repel and shut up the minds of men who have 
 known little of Europeans, but as tyrants and 
 oppressors." Sir Charles McCarthy, who vis- 
 ited them in 1821, states that some of them 
 had " all the appearance and regularity of the 
 neatest village in England, with a church, a 
 school, and a commodious residence for the 
 missionaries and teachers, though in 1817 they 
 had not been more than thought of." 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 67 
 
 Having thus given a sketcli of the early his- 
 tory of this mission, instead of following it in 
 detail during the succeeding thirty years, we 
 shall give a topical notice of its general pro- 
 gress, with the most prominent points of inter- 
 est, down to the present time. 
 
 Reverses, for want of Laborers. — For a num- 
 ber of years, the mission experienced sad re- 
 verses in the loss of many of its most valued 
 missionaries. By a mortal sickness prevailing 
 in Sierra Leone, and by disasters at sea, in the 
 short space of seven or eight months, in the 
 spring and summer of 1823, the society lost 
 no less than fourteen of its friends and fellow 
 laborers, eleven of whom were missionaries 
 and their wives, and among them, Rev. Mr. 
 Johnson, who died at sea, as before stated, and 
 Rev. Mr. During and Mrs. Diirin^, who per- 
 ished, as was supposed, by shipwreck, the vessel 
 in which they sailed for England never having 
 been heard of. The following year, the mis- 
 sion was reinforced by the addition of seven 
 new laborers ; but before the close of the next 
 year, an equal number was removed by death, 
 and three others returned home. The follow- 
 ing year, six returned home, and three were 
 removed by death. And for several years, the 
 loss of health and the death of missionaries 
 were most discouraging. In some instances, 
 this mortality could be traced to excessive 
 labor, soon after arriving in the country. The 
 society appointed a medical committee, who 
 entered into an examination of the subject, 
 and reported a precautionary plan, which was 
 adopted, with good effect, in succeeding years. 
 They also adopted the rule of allowing all their 
 missionaries to return to England once in six 
 years, in order to recover from the debilitating 
 effects of the climate. 
 
 In consequence of this loss of laborers, the 
 affairs of the mission were thrown into great 
 confusion. Regent's Town was, for two or 
 three years after the death of Mr. Johnson, 
 destitute of a resident clergyman, and the at- 
 tendance upon public worship on the Sabbath 
 had fallen off to about 250 ; and the Christian 
 Institution, for want of instructors, was quite 
 deserted. In 1826, Mr. Betts gives a deplora- 
 ble account of the state of things at this sta- 
 tion ; and similar reverses were experienced at 
 other places, most of the stations having been 
 left to the care of native assistants, who had 
 not yet acquired the ability and experience 
 necessary for assuming such responsibilities. 
 
 There was a general falling off of attendance 
 on public worship, and loss of interest in Di- 
 vine things. Yet, most of the communicants 
 remained steadfast, though suffering some 
 decline of interest. The society made great 
 efforts to supply the deficiency of laborers ; 
 and for a time, there was no lack of self-devo- 
 tion, on the part of missionary candidates, 
 who were willing to enter the breach. But 
 the loss of valuable lives -was appalling. At 
 length, however, this frightful mortality in a 
 
 measure c6ased ; and, as soon as the stations 
 were supplied with missionaries, they began to 
 revive, and to advance with a steady progress, 
 which has continued, with slight interruptions, 
 to the present time. 
 
 Evils of Connection with Government. — As 
 in South Africa, so here, the connection of the 
 missions with the Government, has proved a 
 serious evil. Although the Government were 
 influenced by the kindest intentions, yet the 
 connection proved a constant source of embar- 
 rassment. Its relations to the Church Mission- 
 ary Society were two-fold : first, in regard to 
 the ministry j and second, in the management 
 of education. In 1823 or 1824, an arrange- 
 ment was made between the Society and the 
 Secretary of State for the Colonial Depart- 
 ment, by which they were to take upon them- 
 selves the preparation and support of all the 
 English clergymen of the colony, subject to 
 the approval of the Secretary ; while the Gov- 
 ernment should provide for the education of 
 the inhabitants, in the country parishes, and 
 erect houses of worship, and provide houses 
 and gardens for the residence of the clergy- 
 men and teachers. 
 
 In 1827, the Governor of the Colony intro- 
 duced some new regulations, considerably af- 
 fecting the Society's proceedings, as well as its 
 relation to the government. The villages of 
 liberated Africans were formed into three divi- 
 sions : The River District, comprising, Kis- 
 sey, Wellington, Allen Town, Hastings, Water- 
 loo and Calmcmt, all lyin^ to the south-east of 
 Freetown ; the Central, or Mountain Dis- 
 trict, on the eastern border of the colony, on 
 the Bunco river, and the Timneh country ; the 
 Western or Sea District, comprising York, 
 Kent, and the Bananas. This regulation was 
 approved by the Society. Another regulation, 
 which was also approved, relieved the mission- 
 aries of the civil superintendence of the set- 
 tlements ; this office having been found bur- 
 densome and embarrassing to the mission. 
 
 In August, 1826, Gov. Campbell, thinking 
 that he could place the education of the libe- 
 rated African children on a more economical 
 footing, and to give them early habits of in- 
 dustry, directed that the boys should not be 
 kept in school beyond the age of ten or twelve 
 years ; after which, they should be distributed 
 among the liberated adults, to be actively em- 
 ployed. The missionaries were released from 
 the charge of the schools, except occasional 
 inspection, and natives were appointed to con- 
 duct them. 
 
 This arrangement greatly diminished the at- 
 tendance on the schools ; and the missionaries 
 afterwards finding that they could exert no 
 beneficial influence upon the schools, broke off 
 all connection with them, and established 
 schools of their own. 
 
 The missionaries at Freetown greatly de- 
 plored the obstacles to the due performance of 
 their spiritual duties, which had arisen out of 
 
68 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 their connection with the Government ; and 
 contrasttnl their circumstances unfavorably 
 with tlioso of the Wesleyans, who were not 
 hampered with any such connection. 
 
 The Government not having fulfilled their 
 part of the arrangement respecting the sup- 
 port of religion, bv which they agreed to fur- 
 nish houses of public worship and dwellings 
 for the clergy, the society applied, in 1846, for 
 a termination of the arrangement, which was 
 agreed to ; and the Committee believed the 
 change would facilitate the operations of the 
 Society. 
 
 Sierra Leone, as a Nursery of Missionaries 
 for tlie Interior. — The missionaries regard the 
 collection of persons from so many different 
 tribes in the interior, at Sierra Leone, as a pro- 
 vidential arrangement for the supply of labor- 
 ers for the evangelization of Africa ; and, with 
 this in view, they have directed their efforts 
 both to the education of native helpers, and 
 to the acquisition of the languages of the dif- 
 ferent tribes repesented in the colony. 
 
 The work of reducing these languages to 
 writing was commenced as early as 1829, and 
 has been steadily prosecuted ever since. The 
 society's report for 1853 says that some pro- 
 gress had been made in this department during 
 the year. A Tirmieh English Dictionary had 
 been prepared by Mr. Schlenker ; and the 
 Epistle to the Romans had been translated 
 into that language by Mr. Schmid. Rev. S. 
 W. Koelle had completed his grammar of the 
 Yei and Bornu languages. He has also pre- 
 pared specimens, counting of 250 words and 
 short sentences, translated into 200 different 
 languages or dialects, showing that no fewer 
 than 200 different nations, speaking 150 differ- 
 ent languages, besides numerous dialects of 
 the same, have their representatives in Sierra 
 Leone. These tribes or nations lie along 4,000 
 miles of coast, beginning from beyond the 
 Senegal, in the north, to the Portuguese settle- 
 ments, south of the line. They extend in the 
 interior through the whole course of the Niger, 
 from its sources in the mountains behind Sierra 
 Leone to its estuaries, comprising Timbuctoo, 
 the emporium of African commerce, and the 
 vast provinces subdued by the Mohammedan 
 Foutahs, besides numerous small tribes. And 
 even southern Africa has also its representa- 
 tives. There are those in Sierra Leone who 
 can tell of their native towns in that part of 
 the southern continent which has been hitherto 
 a perfect blank on the maps, which require a 
 day or more to pass from one end to the other. 
 They also tell of broad and deep rivers, of nar 
 tions of tall and strongly-built warriors, of sav- 
 age cannibals, and of peaceable and generous 
 nomadic hunters. " Their breasts heave with 
 emotion when a friendly inquiry is made re- 
 specting their fatherland, and appeal in fervid 
 language and moving eloquence to those who 
 possess the best gift of God to a fallen world." 
 
 The Africans generally entertain a strong 
 
 affection for their native land ; and when 
 Christianized they manifest an earnest desire 
 that their own countrymen should partake of 
 the same benefits. The evangelization and ed- 
 ucation of these liberated Africans will, there- 
 fore, furnish the agency required to carry the 
 gospel to the interior. And it has been ascer- 
 tained that the gospel message is readily re- 
 ceived from their lips by their countrymen. 
 In a number of tours to the interior, under- 
 taken by the missionaries, they have discovered 
 a desire for the gospel, and a willingness 
 to listen to it, from their friends, who nave 
 learned it in the colony. It appears, also, that 
 the fact of these friends having been liberated, 
 provided for and educated, by the English, 
 has created a favorable impression upon the 
 native tribes, and prepared them to receive the 
 missionaries with open arms. In view of this 
 state of things, much progress has been made 
 in reducing the different languages of the in- 
 terior to writing, and preparing the way for 
 future missionary operations. 
 
 Education. — Schools have been maintained 
 at all the stations, from the commencement. 
 And the high school, already noticed, has 
 been sustained with various degrees of effi- 
 ciency, until the present time. A few years 
 ago, extensive buildings were erected, and it 
 now holds the relation of a college to the oth- 
 er educational institutions of the colony. Re- 
 ligious instruction is made prominent in all the 
 studies and exercises. The report of the Prin 
 cipal, Rev. E. Jones, for the year 1852, pre- 
 sents an interesting view of the advancing 
 character of the studies prosecuted by the stu- 
 dents, and the increasing importance of the 
 institution. During the year two of the 
 students were sent to the Yoruba mission, and 
 three appointed to labor in the colony. The 
 number remaining at the close of the year, 
 was 17. 
 
 In 1843, a grammar school was organized, 
 as an intermediate step between the village 
 schools and the Christian Institution. In this 
 school it was intended to give a sound religious 
 and general education to boys and youths who 
 have received some previous training in the 
 lower schools ; and those who give proof 
 of suitable dispositions and qualifications, will 
 be admitted into the Christian Institution. 
 The report of this school for 1852, was 
 highly satisfactory. The number of pupils 
 was 73. 
 
 A high school for females has also been es- 
 tablished, which in 1852 was in a flourishing 
 condition, containing 26 pupils, of whom 15 
 were boarders, and in their report for that 
 year, the directors of the society say that 
 their village schools present a peculiarly hope- 
 ful character. 
 
 Native Agency. — It has been a leading ob- 
 ject with the Society, from the first, to train 
 up a native agency. As early as 1820, two 
 young men, while pursuing their studies, visit- 
 
AFRICA, WESTERl^. 
 
 ed their countrymen evenings and Sundays, to 
 teach them the gospel ; in 1822, both of them 
 had charge of stations, and were doing well 
 During the trying period alluded to, when the 
 Society was deprived of so many of its mis- 
 sionaries by death, many of the stations and 
 even the Christian Institution, were left wholly 
 to the charge of natives. In 1827, the Com- 
 mittee tried the experiment of educating two 
 African youths in England, under the care of 
 a clergyman. 
 
 But in 1829, the missionaries express their 
 deep concern at the numerous disappointments 
 which they had met with in their expectations 
 of raising up efficient native assistants ; and 
 at one time, a correspondence was opened with 
 the Episcopal church in the United States, 
 with the design of procuring persons of color 
 competent to act as missionaries. 
 
 Yet in their report for 1838, the Committee 
 present a more cheering aspect of this subject. 
 They say that the native assistants, proceeding 
 generally from the Institution at Fourah Bay, 
 increase in efficiency. In 1844, they say the 
 prospect of reaching the point at which they 
 nave all along aimed in this matter was never 
 before so encouraging. Some of them were 
 found qualified to go forth to distant stations 
 in the interior, with the entire confidence of 
 the missionaries. One of them named Samuel 
 Crowther, was torn from his country and kin- 
 dred in early life, and consigned to the hold of 
 a Portuguese slaver ; rescued by a British crui- 
 ser ; and carried into Sierra Leone, where he 
 received Christian training, first in a village 
 school, and afterwards in the Fourah Bay Insti- 
 tution. His course was satisfactory and con- 
 sistent ; and as he appeared to possess qualifica- 
 tions for the ministry, he was sent to England, 
 where he completed his education at the Soci- 
 ety's Institution in Islington, and was after- 
 wards ordained by the Bishop of London, and 
 sent by the Society to Sierra Leone with the 
 intention of his being employed as a missionar 
 ry to the Yoruba country, of which he was a 
 native. In 1850, two other native Africans, 
 Messrs. Nicol and Matthews, were ordained by 
 the Bishop of London, and sent out by the 
 Society. 
 
 In the report for 1852, the Committee say, 
 that many of the stations formerly under the 
 care of European missionaries, have now been 
 placed in charge of natives, with occasional 
 European superintendence. The whole of the 
 Mountain district had been, for the last year, 
 under the superintendence of one European 
 missionary, and had kept up its character for 
 regular attendance upon the means of grace. 
 Mr. Denton writes from Sierra Leone in 1852, 
 that Mr. Crowther had visited and preached in 
 all the Mountain churches, and that his ser- 
 mons had been deeply interesting and profitable 
 to the people. On any point, where there was 
 the least danger of misapprehension, he had re- 
 course to his native language, and thus render- 
 
 ed Gospel truth clear and plain to their under- 
 standings. 
 
 Translations. — It is an interesting fact that 
 the work of translation of the Scriptures into 
 the BuUom language, was commenced pre- 
 vious to the year 1818, by a native, Mr. George 
 Caulker, a chief at the Plantain Islands. In 
 1820, he had completed the book of Genesis, 
 and was proceeding with the Psalms and New 
 Testament. He had also translated the Prayer 
 Book. He belongs to one of the principal 
 families in Sherbro, and was educated in Eng- 
 land. 
 
 In 1837, arrangements were made for carry- 
 ing on the work of translation vf ith vigor, and 
 portions of Scripture and elementary works 
 have been translated, by different missionaries, 
 into the Timneh, Haussa, Yoruba, and Susa 
 languages, and in some of them the Liturgy. 
 Thus is the way preparing for the more efficient 
 prosecution of the missionary work in the in- 
 terior. 
 
 Character and Ability of the Natives. — 
 Rev. Mr. Diiring says, " six years' experience 
 has taught me that Africans can learn any 
 thing. I have seen them rise from the chains 
 of the slave dejiler, to become industrious men 
 and women, faithful subjects, pious Christians, 
 affectionate husbands and wives, tender fathers 
 and mothers, and peaceable neighbors." But 
 cautions are given against elevating them too 
 suddenly, as in this way they rise so high in 
 their estimation of themselves, that they prove 
 useless in the end. 
 
 Calls for Instruction. — The calls for instruc- 
 tion from every quarter, are beyond the means 
 of the society to supply ; and petitions come 
 in from the inhabitants of the villages, and 
 from distant tribes, pleading earnestly for mis- 
 sionaries. One of the newly arrived missiona- 
 ries relates that, on his way from Freetown to 
 Gloucester, there were many children on the 
 road, who, when they saw him as he passed, 
 said one to another, " New white man — new 
 Mission ! " and all exclaimed, " Thank God ! " 
 
 Missionary Tours. — The missionaries have 
 been, for a number of years, in the practice of 
 making tours among the neighboring tribes, 
 and into the interior, for the purpose of ex- 
 ploring the country, and ascertaining where 
 openings exist for missionary labor. In most 
 cases, they find the people ready to listen with 
 eagerness to the preaching of the Gospel, and 
 the chiefs desirous of receiving missionaries. 
 Their journals, however, furnish many painful 
 proofs of the sufferings entailed on the interior 
 of Africa, by the foreign slave trade. The 
 petty warfare, which is carried on between the 
 chiefs, with all its attendant cruelties, may 
 almost always be traced to that cause. 
 
 At the close of 1848, Captain Forbes, of 
 the English ship "Bonetta," informed the 
 missionaries that, near Cape Mount, he had 
 met with individuals of an African tribe, 
 which possessed a written language, and that 
 
70 
 
 AI'RICA, WESTEliN. 
 
 he hiul brought with him some of their books, 
 aud a man who could read them. This created 
 a lively interest at 8ierra Leone, as it had 
 been generally a&ii'rted and believed tliat, 
 among one hundred and fifty languages of 
 Africa, not one had been raised by the natives 
 to a written language. In the hope that this 
 discovery might be improved to the furtherance 
 of the Gospel, Mr. Koellc was immediately sent 
 by the local committee at Sierra Leone, to 
 visit the tribe, and investigate the circum- 
 stances respecting the language. lie made 
 the tour in about four months, at the cost of 
 much suffering from privation and illness. He 
 discovered that the art of writing was of re- 
 cent invention, and confined to the single tribe 
 of Vei, on the coast. The writing is syllabic, 
 about two hundred characters representing all 
 the syllables in the language. Mr. K. found 
 the inventor, who lived about twenty miles in 
 the interior. He was a man about forty years 
 of age, of great intelligence and much religious 
 feeling. He had learned the Roman alphabet, 
 from an American missionary, when a child. He 
 stated that, after he was grown up, and about 
 sixteen years previous to Mr. K.'s visit, he re- 
 ceived the first impulse to express his language 
 in writing from a dream. He told the dream to 
 a few of his companions, who assisted him to 
 invent the characters, and to procure, through 
 the favor of the chief of his tribe, the means 
 of establishing schools, and teaching the peo- 
 ple. But war soon broke out, the town was 
 destroyed by fire, the tribe depressed and dis- 
 persed, and they had had no schools since. 
 Vet, in the chief town, all the grown up peo- 
 ple were able to read, and in all the towns, 
 there were some who could read They had a 
 considerable number of books, on various sub- 
 jects ; but the religion found in them was 
 mainly Mohammedan. In consequence of this 
 report, it was determined, as soon as the way 
 should be opened, to establish a mission among 
 the Vei tribe. 
 
 General Improvemerit. — The general improve- 
 ment of the natives, and of the country as a 
 consequence, has, from the beginning, steadily 
 kept pace with the prosperity of the mission. 
 
 In 1821, Mr. Johnson writes that the gen- 
 tlemen of Freetown were so fully convinced 
 of the good effects produced by the preaching 
 of the gospel, that they publicly confessed that, 
 above all other institutions, the mission had 
 proved the most beneficial to Africa, and 
 acknowledged that the gospel was the only 
 efificient means of civilizing the heathen. The 
 same year, the experiment was tried of calling 
 the natives from the Christian villages to serve 
 on juries at the colonial sessions ; and the re- 
 sult was so satisfactory, that the practice was 
 continued; and the chief-justice observed that, 
 ten years before, when the population was only 
 4,000, there were forty cases on the calendar 
 for trial, while at that time, with a population 
 of 16,000, there were only six, and not a single 
 
 case from any village that was under the 
 superintendence of a missionary or a school- 
 master. 
 
 Tlie Work of Grace. — From the time that 
 the truth began to be fairly understood by 
 these people, the work of divine grace on their 
 hearts has been noticed by the missionaries, in 
 their rcjports, from year to year. Mr. Gerber 
 writes from Kent, in 1826 : " Since the begin- 
 ning of last month, there has arisen among the 
 inhabitants of this settlement not only a long- 
 ing after the bread of life, but also, a contin- 
 ued inquiry after the way of salvation ; and, 
 instead of being annoyed, as formerly, with 
 settling daily palavers, and silencing noisy 
 school children at night, I am now rejoiced 
 with different prayer-meetings in the town, 
 and by the school-children singing at night, 
 and before day-break in the morning." This 
 is but a specimen of the notices, which frequent- 
 ly occur in the journals of the missionaries, 
 evincing the special presence of the Holy Spirit, 
 in awakening, convincing, and converting the 
 people, so recently turned from the most do- 
 basmg heathenism. . 
 
 CJiarader of Converts. — The fruits of divine 
 grace are manifest in the character of the con- 
 verts. The committee, speaking of the ac- 
 counts given of them by Mr. Johnson, say that 
 this gracious influence is manifest in their 
 acknowledgment of the hand of Providence 
 in bringing them from their own country ; in 
 the manner in which convictions of sin are 
 awakened or deepened ; in the conflicts of the 
 Christian mind ; in their sense of the divine 
 forbearance and mercy ; in a watchful jealousy 
 over the state of their hearts ; in their faith and 
 patience under afflictions ; and in their culti- 
 vation of domestic happiness. 
 
 And, in regard to their feelings and conduct 
 toward each other, Mrs. Jesty writes, " They 
 dwell in love, and live a life of prayer and 
 praise, to Him who loved them, and gave him- 
 self for them. The hearts of many of them 
 seem to be full of the love of Christ the whole 
 day ; and when merry, they sing Psalms. 
 Such vocal music resounds from all parts of 
 the town. A dispute is seldom known among 
 them. Their benevolence was especially man- 
 ifested, on the arrival of new cargoes of liber- 
 ated Africans, taken from the slave ships. 
 Formerly, their chief interest was, to know 
 whether any of their relatives were among 
 them. But after the love of God entered their 
 hearts, thfey would rush to the landing, and 
 seizing the poor, famished creatures, bear them 
 off on their shoulders to their own dwellings, 
 and take care of them as tenderly as if they 
 had been their own near relations. They also 
 attended prayer-meetings, took part in the 
 exercises, and generally maintained family 
 worship. Mr. Norman writes from Regent's 
 Town, in 1821 : " A spirit of prayer is poured '• 
 out on the people in a remarkable mannei* ; ] 
 so that we md, as we pass through the streets, j 
 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 n 
 
 on returning from evening school, that almost 
 every house is become a house of prayer." 
 And Mr. Johnson says, the sami3 year, " Family 
 prayer is observed by all the communicants, 
 and by some who have not yet been admitted 
 to the Lord's table, in their respective houses." 
 
 Twenty years, or more, after this. Rev. J. 
 F. Sessing, in speaking of the character of some 
 of these converts who had emigrated to Jamai- 
 ca, in the West Indies, says : " They can read 
 and write, both males and females. They 
 work nine hours a day, and are most conscien- 
 scious in the discharge of their duties. In order 
 to find time to cultivate their own grounds, 
 they commence their labor at 5 A. M. ; and 
 yet, early as they go to work, they never leave 
 home without first collectively singing a hymn, 
 and offering up a prayer for protection and 
 guidance during the day ; and they never re- 
 tire in the evening, without doing the same." 
 
 The Sabbath is strictly observed by the 
 native Christians, and to a great extent, by 
 the people generally, who have come under 
 Christian instruction ; though at some places, 
 there is great complaint of a relapse, in this 
 respect. It is stated that, in 1845 two cap- 
 tains of vessels landed at a village of about 500 
 inhabitants, where no missionary or catechist 
 resided, in order to purchase poultry ; but the 
 people would not sell on the Lord's day. The 
 people of Abbeokuta go a long distance to 
 market, and travel in large parties for protec- 
 tion against kidnappers. An interval of seven- 
 teen days elapses between one market day and 
 another ; so that if they lose the day, they 
 must wait for another. And yet, notwithstand- 
 ing these difficulties, the converts determined 
 not to travel on the Sabbath, though they ran 
 the risk of having to travel in small companies 
 and of losing their market day. 
 
 The reports of the missionaries abound in 
 accounts of the expression of pious feeling, on 
 the part of the natives, couched in simple lan- 
 guage, yet corresponding with the experience 
 of true Christians in all ages ; also, in a va- 
 riety of personal narratives of thrilling interest, 
 and of peaceful and happy deaths ; which, how- 
 ever, it is impossible for us to give in detail. 
 One of the communicants at Kent, who had 
 been torn from his kindred and country in 
 childhood, and suffered great hardships on 
 board the slave ships, declared that his com- 
 passion for the man who kidnapped him was 
 so great, and his desire for his salvation so 
 strong, that, when thinking of it, he could not 
 sleep at night. 
 
 Church Discipline. — Church discipline is 
 strictly maintained in the native churches of 
 the Society in Sierra Leone. Any palpable in- 
 consistency in a professed member of the church 
 is noticed and reproved ; and, if not corrected, 
 the person is removed from the list of mem- 
 bers. This, under God, is often made the 
 means of bringing the careless or disobedient 
 to a better mind. In most congregations, there 
 
 is a " backsliders' class," who are under instruc- 
 tion and probation, previous to their re-admis- 
 sion. 
 
 Remaining Superstitions. — With a people so 
 recently raised from the lowest depths of super- 
 stition, it is not surprising to find them some- 
 times returning to their former habits, or re- 
 taining, in their ignorance, some of their old 
 ideas. Among the things earliest associated 
 with the African mind, is, a disposition to trust 
 in charms, or greegrees, as they call them. One 
 missionary says he believes all the inhabitants 
 of the colony would press to the baptismal 
 font, if they might be allowed to regard it 
 merely as the best of all greegrees ; and com- 
 municants have been found wearing their gree- 
 grees at the communion table. Yet, this is not 
 to be wondered at, when we consider that the 
 same thing is encouraged, in a different form, 
 by the greater portion of nominal Christians, 
 and even by some Protestants. 
 
 Desire for the Word of God. — Mr. Kissling 
 says, "As soon as the natives can put letters 
 together to form syllables, and syllables to form 
 words, they are anxious to get a Bible ; and, 
 if attending our places of worship, a Prayer 
 Book also. Nor is it from mere curiosity that 
 they desire it. Many, I am sure, use them in 
 private as well as in church ; and when assem- 
 bled around their family altar, and by the side 
 of the sick, and on their visits to their heathen 
 countrymen." During the eight years ending 
 May, 1838, 2860 copies of the Scriptures had 
 been issued, and most of them paid for. In 
 18-16, Mr. Beale writes : " Seven years ago, a 
 large stock of Scriptures was always on hand ; 
 but latterly, as fast as they have arrived, they 
 have been purchased by eager applicants. The 
 last two shipments were hailed by the people 
 with peculiar joy. They completely beset my 
 house, and within a fortnight after each arri- 
 val, nearly the whole of the smaller Bibles, 
 1500 in number, were exhausted." 
 
 Missionary Spirit. — ^The native Christians 
 manifest an earnest desire to impart the word 
 of life to their destitute countrymen ; and in 
 order to cultivate this spirit, the missionaries, 
 at an early period, organized missionary asso- 
 ciations at the stations, and took up regular 
 contributions. These societies hold anniver- 
 sary meetings, at which addresses arc made by 
 the natives, as well as by the missionaries. 
 Collections, respectable in amount, have been 
 reported from th^se auxiliaries every year. In 
 1851, the amount collected at one station was 
 £123 5s. 8d. This amount was given by 134 
 communicants and fifty candidates, including 
 £30 5s. lid. from 150 children in school. 
 
 Timneh {or Timmanee) Mission. — In the au- 
 tumn of 1840, an expedition was sent into the 
 Timneh country, and it was ascertained that a 
 favorable opening existed for preaching the 
 Gospel ; and Rev. C. F. Schlenker and Messrs. 
 N. Denton and AV. 0. Thompson were set 
 apart for the work, and entered upon their 
 
72 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 labors. The location fixed upon for the mission 
 Wiis Port Lokkoh, {which see.) The missionaries 
 devotoil thcnisolves to truiislatious, schools, and 
 proachinj; the (iosi)el ; but at the latest dates 
 nothing of special interest had occurred. The 
 people are Mohammedans ; and " that perni- 
 cious s}'stem," says Mr. Bchmid, " appears to 
 present a most formidable barrier against the 
 reception of Christian truth." The station is 
 now imder the charge of a native teacher, and 
 Mr. Schmid visits it once a quarter, inspects 
 the school, and preaches to the natives. 
 
 Yoruha Mission. — We liave abeady alluded 
 to the early history and ordination of Rev. 
 Samuel Crowther, a native African. On the 
 3d of December, 1843, Mr. Crowther preached 
 in English, his first sermon in Africa, in the 
 Mission church, Freetown, which excited great 
 interest. On the 9th of January following, he 
 established a service at the same place in Yo- 
 ruba, his native language. The novelty of the 
 occasion brought together a large number of 
 people, Torubas, Ibos, Calabaa, &c. The ser- 
 vice was continued, Mr. T. King officiating 
 after Mr. Crowther left. 
 
 For a considerable time previous, there had 
 been a movement among the liberated Afri- 
 cans of the Yoruba tribe, towards their native 
 land. For the purpose of making arrange- 
 ments to enable them to carry the Grospel with 
 them, Mr. Townsend visited their country, 
 arriving in January, 1843, at Abbcokuta, 
 where he met the chief, Sodeke, who appeared 
 friendly, expressed a desire for the return of 
 his people, and for missionaries to accompany 
 them ; and wrote a letter to the Governor of 
 Sierra Leone, expressing his thanks to the 
 British Government for what it had done for 
 his people, and his determination to suppress 
 the slave-trade in his country. Mr. Townsend 
 found many liberated Africans from Sierra 
 Leone, at Abbeokuta ; and he' describes some 
 very affecting scejies, on their meeting their 
 friends and relatives. The country he found 
 to be salubrious and fruitful. (See YoriAa.) 
 ^ On hearing Mr. Thompson's report, the de- 
 sire of the Yorubas to return to their country 
 was greatly increased; and hundreds imme- 
 diately began preparations for leaving the col- 
 ony. On the 4th of November following, the 
 inhabitants of Hastings addressed a letter to 
 Mr. Graf, their missionary, expressing their 
 desire to return to their country, and present- 
 ing^ through him, to the Society, a request for 
 a missionary. This was responded to, by the 
 appointment of Andrew Wilhelm, a native 
 teacher of established character, to accompany 
 them. A farewell meeting was held, and 
 addresses and parting advice given to the emi- 
 grants by Mr. Graf and several of the natives. 
 The Committee decided on occupying Ab- 
 beokuta as a missionary station ; and Mr. 
 Townsend went to England to receive ordina- 
 tion, in order to accompany Mr. Crowther, 
 who had been appointed to the new mission. 
 
 He returned to the colony in December, 1 844 ; 
 and on the 18th of that month, Ilev. Messrs. 
 Thompson, Golmer, and Crowther, with their 
 wives and four native teachers, sailed in an 
 American vessel that happened to be at Free- 
 town, carrying with them a frame house, con- 
 structed for Mr. Townsend in England. They 
 were favored with a prosperous voyage, and 
 arrived safely at Badagry on the 17th of Jan- 
 uary, 1845. There they heard that Sodeke, 
 the chief of Abbeokuta, was dead, and were 
 advised not to proceed till after the funeral 
 ceremonies were over. Soon after, the Yoru- 
 bas were attacked by the king of Dahomey, 
 and a serious war broke out, the consequence 
 of the slave-trade. Being thus prevented from 
 going immediately into the interior, they com- 
 menced missionary labors at Badagry, among 
 a mixed population. The Gospel was preached 
 under the shade of a tree. Mr. Townsend's 
 frame house was put up, and a native house 
 erected. The service was conducted in the 
 Yoruba language, the greater part of the Lit- 
 urgy having been translated by Mr. Crowther. 
 
 After a detention of eighteen months at 
 Badagry, Rev. Messrs. Townsend, and Crow- 
 ther succeeded in reaching Abbeokuta, leav- 
 ing Mr. Golmer at Badagry ; which was to be 
 maintained as a branch of the mission, to keep 
 open the communication with the coast. As 
 soon as their arrival in the vicinity was an- 
 nounced, the crier was commissioned to give 
 public notice that the heaviest punishment 
 would be visited on any one who should dare 
 to insult or steal from the strangers who were 
 coming. The whole of the Lord's day previ- 
 ous to their arrival was spent by the chiefs in 
 wrangling with each other for the right of re- 
 ceiving the missionaries, in their respective 
 districts. On their arrival at the ferry of the 
 river Ogun, they were met by a party of Sierra 
 Leone people ; and on the opposite bank, an- 
 other la^-ge party, dressed out in their English 
 clothes, were ready to welcome them. 
 
 After visiting all the chiefs, which it took 
 them four days to accomplish, an assembly of 
 the chiefs was convened, to hear from them 
 their intentions, on coming into their country. 
 The meeting was conducted with great deco- 
 rum. Mr. Crowther addressed them, giving a 
 history of the proceedings, and explaining the 
 objects of the mission. He then read a letter 
 from the Governor of the Colony to them. 
 Their answer was highly satisfactory, ex- 
 pressing their gratitude, and promising their 
 cooperation in carrying out the objects of the 
 mission. They immediately set about the 
 erection of buildings ; but in the mean time, 
 commenced service partly under the shelter of 
 a narrow pii\zza, and partly in the open air, 
 and were listened to attentively by all. They 
 also learned that Andrew Wilhelm, the native 
 teacher who had preceded them, had been 
 faithfully laboring to prepare their way. 
 
 Under date of August 21, Mr. Crowther 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 73 
 
 states that his mother, from whom he had been 
 torn away about twenty-five years before, came 
 with his brother, in quest of him. Their meet- 
 ing was most affecting ; and she readily received 
 the truth from the lips of her son, and became 
 one of the first fruits of the mission. 
 
 In the beginning of the year 1848, Rev. J. 
 Smith, and Eev. J. C. Miiller, with their wives, 
 arrived at Badagry ; but in the course of three 
 weeks, Mrs. Miller was carried off' by the fever, 
 and the alarming illness of Mrs. Townsend, 
 oblig-ed her husband to return with her to 
 England. At Badagry, there was very little 
 that was encouraging. The same friendly 
 feeling continued at Abbeokuta. Rev. Mr. 
 Miiller considered the Yorubas a superior class 
 of Africans ; and their minds were prepared 
 to receive the truth. They were not so dull 
 and corrupt as those on the coast. Already, 
 the blessing of God had attended the labors of 
 the missionaries. On the 6th of Feb., 1848, 
 just before sailing for Europe, Mr. Townsend, 
 after receiving satisfactory evidence of their 
 true conversion, baptized three women, one 
 of whom was Mr. Orowther's mother, and two 
 men. On this occasion, a large number as- 
 sembled in the church. The three women were 
 neatly dressed in white. The candidates re- 
 ceived Christian names at their baptism. Af- 
 ter the service, Mr. Crowther preached an im- 
 pressive sermon, which was listened to with the 
 deepest attention. The number of candidates 
 for baptism, at this time, was about 100. 
 
 From Badagry, Mr. Marsh, as an instance 
 of the cruel bondage of superstition, writes, 
 April 17, 1849, that there exists, among the 
 Popos, at Badagry, a custom, bearing resem- 
 blance to monastic vows. The people are mostly 
 under vows to some idols, which cannot be 
 violated by themselves or others, with im- 
 punity. Under these vows, they are often shut 
 up for a long time in their idol temples. There 
 were, at that time, about five hundred young 
 men and women, shut up in these temples. 
 When these come out, they are regarded as 
 sacred, and any one who touches their heads 
 or treads on their feet, must pay a large sum 
 of money, or if unable, must be sold or put to 
 death. In crossing from one part of the town 
 to another, Mr. Smith passed a piece of ground 
 where these victims of superstition were put 
 to death, which was literally strewed with 
 human bones ; so truly are the " dark places 
 of the earth full of the habitations of cruelty." 
 
 Three years after the establishment of the 
 mission at Abbeokuta, so great was the bless- 
 ing of God upon it, that there were five hun- 
 dred constant attendants on the means of 
 grace, eighty communicants, and nearly two 
 hundred candidates ; and the religion of Jesus 
 Christ had become a topic of conversation in 
 the war expedition, on the farms, and in the 
 market places. The people pressed eagerly to 
 hear the word, and were deeply moved with it, 
 sometimes speaking out and inquiring what 
 
 they should do. Those who came to oppose, were 
 convinced. The word, also, exercised a general 
 and pervading influence over the people at 
 large ; and there was a waning of the power of 
 idols and of the ancient superstitions. Yet, the 
 converts were subject to persecution from those 
 who adhered to the old customs. The priests of 
 the national superstition, being nearly deserted, 
 set up a persecution in four or five of the town- 
 ships of which the District of Abbeokuta is 
 composed, putting the converts in stocks, 
 cruelly beating them, threatening them with 
 death, and fining them to a heavy amount ; but 
 at length, on the urgent request of the mis- 
 sionaries, the principal chiefs interfered, and put 
 a stop to these cruel proceedings. The attempt 
 to renew persecution was again made, in 1850. 
 The cause was believed to be the close blockade 
 of Lagos, by the British squadron, by means 
 of which no slaves could be shipped ; which so 
 enraged the head slave trading chief at Abbeo- 
 kuta, that he sought to annoy, defeat, and 
 drive away, if possible, the friends of the mis- 
 sion, even threatening death to those who ven- 
 tured to go to church. But the British Con- 
 sul, Capt. Beecroft soon arrived at Abbeokuta, 
 and effectually stirred up the chiefs to protect 
 the converts. 
 
 The priests are inveterate against Christian- 
 ity, and do what they can to oppose it ; but 
 they and the chiefs seemed to be held under a 
 remarkable restraint. They have a way of 
 consulting their gods, through an Oracle, which 
 is their great superstition. This oracle has 
 again and again been consulted by them, in 
 regard to the missionaries, but has never been 
 induced to utter a word against them ; but 
 from first to last, it has said that the welfare of 
 the country was in the hands of the white 
 people, and that they must be permitted to 
 teach what they please. Their oracles are in 
 the hands of the heathen priests, who, by a 
 certain process, ai'rive at a conclusion as to the 
 will of the god. But, though they are open 
 and avowed persecutors of Christianity, they 
 are unable to make their oracles utter a word 
 against it. 
 
 Toward the end of the year 1850, it became 
 evident that the various parties interested in 
 the slave trade were preparing for a desperate 
 and combined attempt to crush the rising 
 Christianity of Abbeokuta, and expel the mis- 
 sionaries from the land. At length, an inva- 
 sion was attempted by the king of Dahomey. 
 On the hostile army appearing before Badag-ry, 
 some of the boys at the missionary boarding 
 school were taken away to places of safety ; 
 but Rev. Mr. Gollmer remained at his post. 
 On Sunday evening, March 2, the enemy ap- 
 proached Abbeokuta. Many of the Christian 
 converts went from public worship and from 
 their special prayer meetings, to man the walls, 
 for the whole male population was summoned 
 to the defence. Many of the timid inhabitants 
 fled, but the missionaries remained at their 
 
u 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 posts, with a stcdfast coufidcuce in God. 
 MasBOS of well trained warriors, male and fe- 
 male, armed with musketa, bore down upon the 
 town, defended only with a mud wall. They 
 fought with desixjration, but were completely 
 routed, with great loss ; while the loss of the 
 Yorubas was small. The missionaries exerted 
 themselves to save the lives of the prisoners, 
 and they were at length exchanged for the 
 means of defence against future attacks. The 
 immediate moral effect upon the inhabitants of 
 Abbeokuta was most striking. The victory 
 was by them unanimously attributed to the 
 goodness of the Christian's God. All persecu- 
 tion ceased. The principal chiefs sent their 
 children to the schools. And it was hoped 
 that great advantage would accrue to the 
 cause of Christ, from this deep and bloody 
 plot against the very existence of the mission 
 at Abbeokuta. It is thus that the Lord makes 
 the WTath of man to praise him. 
 
 An attack was made on Badagry, and near- 
 ly the whole town reduced to ashes ; but the 
 premises of the mission escaped. At this 
 stage, the British cruisers interfered, and drove 
 away Kosoko, the usurper of Lagos, who made 
 the attack, and the most decisive measures 
 were taken to put down the slave traffic. 
 Treaties were made with Abbeokuta and 
 Lagos, in which protection was secured both 
 to the missionaries and to lawful commerce. 
 In the course of the persecutions which have 
 been alluded to, many instances are mentioned 
 of constancy in the converts, which would have 
 done honor to the early Christian martyrs. 
 
 The mission is extending its operations on 
 every side, and making exploring expeditious 
 into the interior, and bringing to light con- 
 stantly new fields of labor, to which the way 
 is already prepared, by all these tribes being 
 represented among the liberated Africans in 
 
 the Colony ; so that they are likely to prove 
 Josephs, lost and recovered again, to save their 
 people, not from temporal, but from eternal 
 death. 
 
 Present State of the Missions. — The report 
 of the society, for 1852, represents the work as 
 going forward at the different stations, with a 
 steady progress. The Yoruba country had 
 continued to be the scene of " wars and rumors 
 of wars;" but from the threatened danger 
 Abbeokuta had been happily pr&servcd. The 
 missionary work has been successfully pros- 
 ecuted, and several new stations commenced. 
 But, in consequence of the war, and other cir- 
 cumstances, Badagry was reduced to a small 
 and unimportant place ; and the mission has 
 been removed to Lagos, about 36 miles east of 
 Badagry. Lagos is a large and populous town, 
 having water communication far into the in- 
 terior, as well as for hundreds of miles along 
 the coast. It has hitherto been a great slave 
 mart ; but the British government have occu- 
 pied the place, and driven out the traffic. 
 
 Several deaths occurred among the mission- 
 aries in 1852 ; but a considerable reinforce- 
 ment was sent out, and Eev. 0. E. Vidal, D. D., 
 having been consecrated Bishop of Sierra 
 Leone, arrived at Freetown Dec. 27, 1852, and 
 preached his first ordination sermon on the 
 admission of Messrs. Maser, Kefer, and Gerst 
 to deacon's orders. 
 
 The report for 1853, represents the pastoral 
 work within the colony as in a satisfactory 
 state of progress, and the educational establish- 
 ments as in a hopeful condition. Xot much 
 progress was making at the Timneh mission ; 
 but the year has been one of peace to the 
 Yoruba mission. A good beginning had been 
 made at Lagos. 
 
 The following table will show the state of 
 these missions in 1853 : 
 
 DlbTKICrS AND 
 PRLVCIPAL 
 STATIONS. 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 Clergy- 
 
 Teachers. 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 Baptisms 
 during 
 
 11 
 
 u 
 
 Seminarists and Scholars. 
 
 men. 
 
 M'le. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 the year. 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 5? 
 
 d 
 
 ciS 
 
 £ 
 
 i 
 
 'A 
 
 -2 
 
 "a 
 
 < 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 3 C S 
 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 Freetown District .... 
 
 River Distnct 
 
 Mountain District.... 
 Sea District 
 
 1818 
 1820 
 1816 
 1819 
 1840 
 1846 
 1845 
 
 4 
 2 
 6 
 3 
 
 1 
 4 
 3 
 
 "22" 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 6 
 2 
 
 18 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 16 
 12 
 20 
 10 
 
 13 
 6 
 
 79 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 976 
 500 
 926 
 335 
 6 
 233 
 
 8 
 38 
 21 
 11 
 
 51 
 
 161 
 113 
 111 
 44 
 3 
 31 
 2 
 
 13 
 14 
 18 
 12 
 2 
 8 
 2 
 
 598 
 252 
 481 
 248 
 38 
 
 454 
 209 
 367 
 235 
 
 7 
 
 155 
 101 
 
 929 
 429 
 729 
 227 
 6 
 357 
 
 1,981 
 890 
 
 1,577 
 
 710 
 
 51 
 
 512 
 
 101 
 
 Timneh Mission 
 
 Abbeokuta Diatrict... 
 Coast District 
 
 Totals 
 
 9 
 
 2,976 
 
 129 
 
 465 
 
 69 
 
 1,617 
 
 1,272 
 
 256 
 
 2,677 
 
 5,822 
 
 
 
 English Baptist Missionary Society. — Allu- 
 sion has already been made to an unsuccessful 
 effort of the Baptist Missionary Society to 
 introduce the Gospel into Sierra Leone in 
 1795. From the failure of that enterprise to 
 1840, this society appears to have attempted 
 nothing for West Africa. At length, how- 
 
 ever, it was resolved that measures should be 
 taken, having in view the exploration and oc- 
 cupancy of an entirely new field. The Kev. 
 John Clarke and Dr. Prince, who had both 
 resided for some years in Jamaica, were invited 
 to go forth as pioneers, and lay the foundation 
 of the contemplated mission. They arrived at 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 76 
 
 the island of Fernando . Po, January 1, 1841 ; 
 and on the following Sabbath public worship 
 was held in Clarence, where they first landed. 
 (See Fernando Po.) They subsequently vis- 
 ited the adjacent coast, to ascertain the feasi- 
 bility of commencing missionary operations. 
 Such was their report to the society at home 
 that the latter soon sent out a number of ad- 
 ditional laborers, a part of whom were station- 
 ed on the island of Fernando Po, and a part 
 upon the main land. The agency of colored 
 persons from Jamaica is to be employed ex- 
 tensively in this mission ; and a number have 
 already joined their white brethren. 
 
 The prospects of this enterprise were quite 
 flattering till near the close of 1845. At that 
 time three stations had been commenced upon 
 the main land ; making the whole number of 
 stations four, and the ou1>stations five. There 
 were also five missionaries, three male Euro- 
 pean assistant missionaries, and nine male 
 colored teachers. 
 
 Early in the year 1846, however, all the 
 missionaries on Fernando Po were ordered by 
 the Spanish authorities to desist from their 
 appropriate work, twelve months being allowed 
 them to dispose of the mission property. 
 
 This year was also one of peculiar trial, in 
 the removal of two of the missionaries, Messrs. 
 Thompson and Sturgeon, by death. The 
 Spanish consul regarding their labors as a 
 great benefit to the people, consented to let 
 them remain, provided they would give up 
 preaching and cease to teach the Bible in their 
 schools. But this proposition they declined, 
 and employed the interval allowed them for 
 removal in their usual labors. Two Catholic 
 priests were left at Clarence, but they have 
 since returned to Spain. Seven persons were 
 baptized, during the year. Meanwhile, the 
 providence of God was opening other doors 
 at Bimbia and Cameroons. The former of 
 these is healthy, and surrounded by 140 vil- 
 lages. The report for 1851 states that cheer- 
 ing information of success had been received 
 from Mr. Johnson at Cameroons. The attend- 
 ance on preaching was good, there were several 
 inquirers, and 14 or 15 gave evidence of piety. 
 This year the mission was again afilicted with 
 the loss by death of two of its mi^ionaries, 
 Messrs. Merrick and Newbegin ; but one addi- 
 tional missionary was sent out, and Mr. Saker, 
 who was on a visit to England, returned to his 
 field of labor. In 1852, Kev. J. Wheeler re- 
 turned home, not being able to endure the 
 climate. 
 
 In the report for May, 1853, the committee 
 say that, notwithstanding the reduction of mis- 
 sionary strength, the blessing of God evidently 
 rests on the enfeebled labors of the remnant. 
 At all of the three stations there have been 
 conversions, and the labors of the negro teach- 
 ers have been the means of salvation to many. 
 The ca.re of the churches has of necessity been 
 committed to native helpers, who have shown no 
 
 small capacity and fitness for the ofiice. The 
 work of translation has been prosecuted, and 
 several thousand pages of the word of God 
 printed. Tet, the work has met with opposi- 
 tion, and more than once, at the Cameroons, the 
 lives of the people attending Christian wor- 
 ship have been threatened. 
 
 The latest complete returns from this mis- 
 sion are for the year 1849, as follows : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?f 
 
 
 
 s- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •jU 
 
 
 
 ^■■s 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 It. 
 
 
 I 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 i§ 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^^3 
 
 d3^ 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 6 
 
 G^ 
 
 .^ 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 & 
 
 Fernando Po, Qar- "1 
 ence, &c J 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 113 
 
 
 
 Cameroons 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 '?ft 
 
 5 
 
 fi 
 
 350 
 
 Bimbia, Jubilee, &c. . . . 
 
 3 
 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 100 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Totals. . 
 
 ' 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 11 
 
 2 
 
 25 
 
 118 
 
 7 
 
 450 
 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society. — I. Sierra 
 Leone. — ^The Wesleyan Missionary Society 
 commenced a mission at Sierra Leone in the 
 year 1796— (not in 1811, as stated in " T/ie 
 Missionary Guide-Book" p. 21). During the 
 eleven years preceding, that Society had es- 
 tablished missions in jNova Scotia, Newfound- 
 land, and the West Indies ; and the success 
 which God had vouchsafed to those efforts 
 encouraged the Wesleyan Conference to at- 
 tempt to open a field of missions on the west 
 coast of Africa. Sierra Leone was chosen as 
 the place where to begin these efforts ; and 
 this was the first mission of any kind to that 
 part of Africa. 
 
 In 1795, the venerable Dr. Coke, the father 
 of Wesleyan missions, united himself with a 
 scheme then on foot, by gentlemen of different 
 denominations, for the civilization of the Fou- 
 lahs, in West Africa. This expedition, which 
 originated in motives so purely benevolent, 
 proved an entire failure, not merely from the 
 want of adaptation in the agents employed, 
 but from a mistake akin to that of the Mora- 
 vians, when they thought they could first civ- 
 ilize and then evangelize the Esquimaux. 
 From similar causes, this expedition failed. 
 The persons engaged and sent forth by Doctor 
 Coke on this mission, were a band of mechan- 
 ics, with a surgeon at their head ; and they 
 were directed to teach the Foulalis the arts of 
 civilized life. On arriving in the colony, they 
 became discontented, and were soon dispersed. 
 Some died, and others returned home, without 
 ever having reached the scene of their intended 
 labors in the interior. The enterprise " came 
 to naught," for its fundamental principle was 
 not that ordained by the great head of the 
 Church, for establishing Christian missions 
 among heathen nations. This was the only 
 mivstake of the kind, which, in their long expe- 
 rience, the Wesleyans ever fell into, and may 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 be exensed in view of the immature views en 
 tertained of the missionary enterprise nearly 
 seventy years ago * The Wesloyan Conler- 
 once felt the rebuke, and promptly rectified the 
 mistake, so far as it was connected with them, 
 for, in the annual minutes of the Conference 
 held in August of that year, J1796) we find 
 the following entry : " Dr. Coke laid before 
 the Conference an account of the failure of the 
 colony intended to be established in the Fou- 
 lah country in Africa ; and, after prayer and 
 mature consideration, the Conference unani- 
 mously judged, that a trial should be made in 
 that part of Africa, an the p^'oper missionary 
 plan. The two brethren above-mentioned, 
 Messrs. A. Murdoch and W. Patten, having 
 voluntarily offered themselves for this import- 
 tant work, the Conference solemnly appomted 
 them for it, and earnestly recommended them 
 and their great undertaking to the public and 
 private prayers of the Methodist Society." 
 
 Little infoi-mation can now be obtained as 
 to the extent or results of the enterprise thus 
 set on foot by the Conference. No report was 
 published for many years afterwards ; and the 
 only sources from whence to glean our scanty 
 knowledge of this mission, are the "Annual 
 Minutes," and the "Arminian Magazine." 
 We cannot, therefore, tell how many agents 
 were sent out, or what amount of success they 
 continued to have. But, that a commence- 
 ment was made, and considerable good accom- 
 plished, and that, too, very soon, is evident 
 from the following notice, being part of a 
 Narrative of Methodist Missions, first drawn 
 up by a Christian of another denomination 
 for the Edinburgh ^^ Missionary Magazine," 
 and thence copied into the " Arminian Maga- 
 zine," for February, 1797 :— « There are also 
 in Sierra Leone, upon the coast of Africa, 400 
 persons in connexion with the Methodist Soci- 
 etv, of whom 223 are blacks and mulattoes." 
 The next reference to this mission turns up in 
 1804, when the preacher, Mr. Brown, appealed 
 earnestly to Dr. Coke for ministerial help. 
 
 • In explanation of the above we find a note in the Mis- 
 sionary Magazine, published in Edinburg in August, 1796, 
 which says :— '• Wo understand that the mission to the 
 Foulah country, which is said to have failed, was not pro- 
 perly a Methodist mission ; as the famihes that went out 
 with Mr. Macaulay, with the design to settle on the bor- 
 ders of that country, were not sent by the Methodist Con- 
 ference. They were mechanics, who had been members 
 of the Methodist Societies in England, some of whom had 
 oflSciated as local preachers, and who had been recom- 
 mended by Dr. Coke to Mr. Macaulay. But it seems they 
 had either not rightly understood the engagements they 
 had entered into, or had not fully counted the cost. We 
 therefore, insert this note, lest any of our readers, by at- 
 taching the common idea to the phrase Methodist Missim, 
 should be led to conclude that these persons must have 
 been missionaries, sent out by that body of people, for the 
 express purpose of preaching to the heathen : whereas, 
 they were neither so sent, nor was their mission so imme- 
 diately to preach, as to form a Christian colony, and open 
 a friendly intercourse with the natives of the Foulah 
 country." This explanation wiU also eerve to correct a 
 mistake in Mr. Moister's work, '* Memorials of Missicmai'y 
 Labors in Western Africa," (London, 1850, p. 31,) where 
 he seems to make Dr. Coke and the Conference responsible 
 for the whole undertaking. Other writers besides Mr. M. 
 have fallen into the same mistake. 
 
 Mr. B. was assisted by Mr. Gordon, and 
 though only local preachers,, they faitlifully 
 cared for the little flock that had been gath- 
 ered. They had also the assistance of a colored 
 preacher, a devoted young man. In 1808 we 
 find a communication from this native preacher, 
 Mingo Jordan, to Dr. Adam Clarke, giving an 
 account of his labors as a missionary among 
 the Maroons, from 1805 up to 1808, and stat- 
 ing that, including the Maroons that had been 
 converted, the number of church members in 
 and around Sierra Leone amounted to 100. He 
 earnestly requests in his letter a supply of. 
 hjmn-books and some wearing apparel for the 
 preachers. Dr. Colje tried to sustain the mis- 
 sion until he could find a suitable man to go 
 and take the general superintendence of it ; 
 and, in 1811, he sent out Rev. George Warren 
 for this purpose, who, on his arrival in Sierra 
 Leone, was received with open arms by the 
 officers and members of the church which had 
 been gathered there. Mr. Warren's report to 
 Dr. Coke gives the following as the statistics 
 of the mission, as he found it : — " The society, 
 at our arrival, amounted to 110 ; a great pro- 
 portion of these profess to enjoy a sense of 
 the divine favor ; and the society in general, 
 as far as I can learn, conduct themselves with 
 considerable propriety. I found among them, 
 at my coming, three local preachers, two of 
 whom meet classes, and six class-leaders be- 
 sides. Since this, one brother, who had been 
 in the country for his health, has returned. 
 Seven have been admitted on trial, while sev- 
 eral more appear to be under serious impres- 
 sions.* Sierra Leone had then about 4,000 
 inhabitants, only about one in forty being Eu- 
 ropean. The rest were Nova-Scotians, Maroons, 
 Timnehs, Bidloms, Kroomen, and recaptured 
 slaves. The places of worship were two 
 Methodist chapels, one Episcopal, and one 
 Baptist church. 
 
 To do anything like justice to our sketch of 
 this mission, it is necessary that we be allowed 
 to state briefly what was the condition of soci- 
 ety then at Sierra Leone. Even at the present 
 day, after the Gospel (like the disinfecting fluid 
 acting on this mass of moral corruption) has 
 removed so large a proportion of the elements 
 of death, the population of Sierra Leone is 
 unique, having no parallel in any other part 
 of the world. But what was the state of that 
 anomalous population, as a field for Christian 
 missions, more than fifty years ago ? All the 
 elements of the worst forms of heathenism were 
 here united to the most degrading vices of 
 civilization. And, in the midst of these abom- 
 inations, missionaries were set down to attempt 
 to spread the blessings of a sanctifying Chris- 
 tianity through such " a hell upon earth " as this 
 place then was. At that time the colony was but 
 ten square miles in extent. It was originally 
 settled with the avowed object -of the moral 
 
 * See MethMist Magazine for 1807, p. 283 ; ^ 1808, p 
 572 ; for 1812, p. 316, and pp. §37 and 795. 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 77 
 
 improvement of the natives. But at the close 
 of the war with the United States, the negroes 
 who had served under the British flag, either 
 on land or in the navy, were located in Nova 
 Scotia, or the Bahama Isles. Being dissatis- 
 fied with their situation, numbers of them made 
 their way to Loudon, where they were found, 
 collected together, in the most deplorable state, 
 " subject to every misery, and familiar with 
 every vice." Public attention was called to 
 their condition, chiefly by the efforts of the 
 celebrated Granville Sharpe, and, in 1787, 
 "The African Company" was formed. The 
 committee purchased land from the negro 
 princes at Sierra Leone, on which to locate 
 these pests of London society ; and, a few 
 months after, 400 blacks and about 60 whites 
 embarked for Sierra Leone. The whites are 
 said to have been chiefly women of the most 
 abandoned character. Such were the materi- 
 als of the first English colony in Western 
 Africa. A company of American refugee 
 slaves and London prostitutes sent out by Brit- 
 ish philanthropy to enlighten and civilize Af- 
 rica I The results may be anticipated. From 
 the combined influence of the climate and the 
 vicious habits of the colonists, the mortality 
 was fearful. In a few months, nearly one half 
 of them had either died or escaped from the 
 colony, and, in little more than a year, the 
 whole were dispersed, and the town burnt to 
 ashes by an African chief. 
 
 In the year 1791, another association was 
 formed, by whose efforts a few of the dispersed 
 colonists were again collected, and about 1200 
 more negroes were transported from Nova 
 Scotia. About three years after, Sierra Leone 
 was destroyed by a French squadron ; and, in 
 1808, disappointed and dismayed by the spirit 
 of the colonists, and the various disasters which 
 overtook the colony, the company transferred 
 their whole establishment to the British gov- 
 ernment. From this period may be dated the 
 rising prosperity of Sierra Leone. Law and 
 order soon reigned throughout the colony, and 
 provision was made for its defence. The Brit- 
 ish crown had, just the year before, declared 
 the slave trade to be piracy, and it now decreed 
 that all captured slaves, rescued from slave 
 ships by the English cruisers, should be brought 
 into Sierra Leone, as their asylum. Such are 
 the sources whehce the population of Sierra 
 Leone has been drawn, numbering 41,73.5 in 
 the year 1847, and which presents in that 
 place the representatives of about 200 different 
 nations of Africa, each with its own language, 
 superstitions, and abominable wickedness, and, 
 when landed there, possessing no idea of order, 
 discipline, honesty, or morality. 
 
 Among these wretched outcasts of man- 
 kind, the Wesley an missionaries have been la- 
 boring from the first; and surely in such a 
 place, whatever good has been achieved must 
 bo attributed alone to the hand of God. 
 When to these considerations we add the dead- 
 
 ly character of the climate, some Idea may be 
 formed of the nature of that sphere where the 
 Wesleyan missionaries have been toiling for 
 half a century. It has been the grave of our 
 missionaries, and frequently at a time too when 
 they had just become qualified for usefulness 
 among this polyglot people. From 1811 to 
 1850, there were sent from England, as nearly 
 as can be ascertained, by the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society, about 123 missionaries, includ- 
 ing their wives ; and of these there were no 
 fewer than 54 who died, while many others re- 
 turned home on account of the failure of their 
 health. Nor was this merely aft^ a length- 
 ened course of labor. In consequence of the 
 unhealthiness of the climate, the Committee, 
 after a short trial of seven years, restricted the 
 period of service first to three, and then to two 
 years ; and it was only in a few instances that 
 this period was exceeded. Many died within 
 the first year, some in a few months, a few 
 weeks, or even a few days, after their landing. 
 Instances were not wanting of husbands and 
 wives lying ill in different rooms of the same 
 house at the same time, and dying within a 
 short time of each other. The frequent sick- 
 ness and death of so many of the missionaries, 
 and the early return of others to England, could 
 not fail to affect materially the progress of the 
 missions. Stations were sometimes left with 
 only one missionary, or without any mission- 
 ary at all. 
 
 The events and circumstances which we have 
 placed before the reader will, in a great meas- 
 ure, explain why the 400 members connected 
 with the mission in 1797 should have dwindled 
 to 1X0 in 1811, when Mr. Warren arrived to 
 take charge of the mission. He entered on his 
 work with great zeal, and extensive prospects 
 of usefulness, but fell a victim to the climate 
 the year after he landed there. William Davis 
 then ofiered himself for the vacant post, and 
 Samuel Brown was sent out to assist him, in 
 the various openings of usefulness which pre- 
 sented themselves. The work soon spread from 
 Free Town to Wellington, Hastings, Waterloo, 
 Murraytown, &c., on the east, and to York and 
 Plantains Island on the South. And notwith- 
 standing the occasional checks to which the 
 mission has been subject, among the greatest 
 of which, may be reckoned each fresh cargo of 
 slaves, yet this mission has been crowned with 
 continued prosperity. And some of the most 
 remarkable instances of powerful awakenings 
 and revivals with which the Wesleyan missions 
 have been blest have taken place in Sierra Le- 
 one. Here thousands of the afflicted children 
 of Ham, drawn up from the reeking holds of 
 the slave vessels, have been made the joyful 
 partakers of a richer liberty than British pTii- 
 lanthropy could confer upon them. And it 
 is the testimony of gentlemen who resided 
 there for years, that the religious experience of 
 " the converts to Christianity in that country 
 is generally clear and satisfactory, and will 
 
78 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 bear u comparison with that of the professors 
 of religion in more highly favored lands." 
 
 Schools have also been established for the 
 training of the rising generation, in which 
 over 3,()00 children are receiving an evangeli- 
 cal etlucation ; and an Institution for the train- 
 ing of a native ministry is in successful opera- 
 tion. 
 
 Nor have the labors of the missionaries and 
 their zealous associates, the native preachers, 
 been restricted to the heathen within the col- 
 ony. They have brought the word of life to 
 thousands of idolators beyond the limits of the 
 colony ; so that the Kossos and the heathen 
 round Murray town have turned to God from 
 " dumb idols." At the close of the year 1852, 
 one of those remarkable movements took 
 place at Sierra Leone, which occasionally start- 
 les the church and the world, evincing a 
 special omnipotent agency over the minds of 
 men, and indicating to us how vast are those 
 resources of influence which God has in reserve 
 and by which he may yet accelerate the con- 
 version of the world to the faith of Christ. 
 The nature of this movement may be best seen 
 from the communications of the missionaries at 
 Sierra Leone, under date of December 24, 
 1852. Rev. Messrs. Fletcher and Gilbert 
 write, " The Committee will be glad to hear 
 that the idolators of Sierra Leone are casting 
 their idols * to the moles and the bats.' The 
 kingdom of Satan is falling as lightning to the 
 ground. A few weeks since, Mr. George, our 
 schoolmaster at Murraytown, came to the mis- 
 sion house, and requested that one or two 
 missionaries would come immediately to that 
 place, as the idolators wxre giving up their 
 idols. As it was past five on Sunday evening 
 when he came, we postponed it until the next 
 day. On the following morning Mr. Reay 
 and myself rose at four o'clock, and started oflF 
 to the village. We arrived just as it was get- 
 ting light, and proceeded at once to the con- 
 stable's house. We were rather surprised to 
 find his piazza full of idols, and other supersti- 
 tious stuff which had been brought to him the 
 day previous. He very kindly look us to the 
 houses of the idolators. We talked to them 
 about their souls, and exhorted them to look 
 to Christ as their Saviour, Redeemer and God. 
 One man who voluntarily gave up his idol to us, 
 said he had been an idolater twenty-five years, 
 but now he intended to go to the Chapel. On 
 Sunday I Avent to Murraytown and preached 
 to those people who had lately given up their 
 idols. The Chapel, which had been lately re- 
 built, was crowded ; and all paid great atten- 
 tion, while I enforced the words, ' Little child- 
 ren, keep yourselves from idols.' On the same 
 day I baptized 28 males and females, 25 of 
 whom were adults ; and I received 5 as mem- 
 bers on trial ; but some of these were back- 
 sliders. As I looked upon these people as they 
 knelt down to be baptized, my feelings over- 
 
 At Free Town such a number of idols 
 were given up as no one suspected the place to 
 have contained. The people took the matter 
 into their own hands, and seemed to be simul- 
 taneously moved by an invisible impulse, bo- 
 coming such enthusiastic Iconoclasts, that Mr. 
 l^'letcher tells us all other work was suspended. 
 In crowds, but not tumultuously, they paraded 
 through the streets, carrying the heathen dei- 
 ties in procession, to deliver them up to the 
 magistrates and missionaries. Mr. Fletcher 
 turned his apartments into a museum for the 
 exhibition of those unsightly abominations, 
 and thousands of people came to look at them. 
 The fame of this movement has spread fail 
 along the coast, producing deep impressions 
 among the various tribes, and leading the re- 
 lenting heathen in many instances to say with 
 Ephraim — " What have I to do any more with 
 idols ?" The work is extensive and spreading, 
 and is another of those illustrations which fre- 
 quently occur to show how powerful and effi- 
 cient are the resources of Him in whose hand 
 are the hearts of all men, and before whose Al- 
 mighty Spirit every obstacle must give way. 
 The proximity of Sierra Leone to Liberia, in- 
 vests this great work with an additional inter- 
 est, as both of these colonies bear a relation to 
 the evangelization of Africa, the value of which 
 is incalculable. Events like these give a pow- 
 erful impetus to a mission ; and it is so in this 
 case. The prospects in Sierra Leone, were 
 never so bright as now. The schools are 
 well attended, and the chapels cannot hold all 
 who desire the word of God. The Native 
 Training Institution is also doing well. At 
 a late public examination of the students, 
 held in the presence of the Colonial Sec- 
 retary and other official persons and resi- 
 dents in the colony, the students were exam- 
 ined as to their knowledge of Theology, Latin, 
 Greek, Mathematics, English Grammar and 
 Geography, and acquitted themselves most sat- 
 isfactorily. One of their number has been just 
 recommended by the district meeting as a can- 
 didate for the holy ministry. 
 
 Those who remember the struggles and dif- 
 ficulties which marked the early history of this 
 mission, can best appreciate its present encour- 
 aging condition, and see with delight their 
 hopes not only realized, but even far exceeded. 
 
 In 1811 there was but one missionary, three 
 local preachers, 110 members, and about 100 
 children in the schools, with two small chapels. 
 Now there are thirty-one chapels, (some of 
 which are very large,) seven mfesionaries, 107 
 local preachers, over 6000 church members, 
 3608 scholars, and more than 11,000 persons 
 in the pastoral care of the missionaries. "Ac- 
 cording to this time," it may well be said, 
 " what hath God wrought ? " For more defi- 
 nite information on the present state of the 
 mission, see the Tabular View near the end of 
 this article. 
 
 11. The Gambia District. — This mission was 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 79 
 
 commenced by the Wesleyan Society in the 
 year 1821. It lies further north than any 
 other on the west coast of Africa ; and the field 
 is entirely in the hands of the Wesleyan Society. 
 That portion of Western Africa which is drain- 
 ed by the rivers Senegal and Gambia, is named 
 Senegambia. The tribes inhabiting this district 
 of country are chiefly the Jaloqfs, which lie 
 to the north; the Mandingoes, who inhabit 
 tl\,e sea-board ; and the Foulahs, who are chiefly 
 found deep in the country, to the east. 
 
 The Jaloofs and Mandingoes are mostly 
 Mohammedans; but they are very difierent 
 from each other in their opinions and disposi- 
 tions. One -portion of them, called Mara- 
 boots, or "religious people," are excessively 
 superstitious, and put implicit confidence in 
 their " greegrees," (charms,) which they hang 
 about them in great numbers and variety. 
 They also practice witchcraft, of all sorte. 
 Mohammedanism has been carried to the west 
 of Africa by its priests in the capacity of 
 schoolmasters, using the Arabic language ; 
 and, though grossly ignorant themselves, they 
 have acquired a powerful hold over the native 
 mind. 
 
 The Foulahs, who are a wandering people, 
 are mostly Pagans, and are greatly oppressed 
 by the Mandingoes, who abuse and plunder 
 them without any ceremony. The French, the 
 Portuguese, and the English, have settlements 
 on the coast in these parts, as the rivers Sene- 
 gal and Gambia are exceedingly advantageous 
 for trade. The Gambia, especially, whose 
 source, in the Tenda country is said to be 
 only a few days' journey from the renowned 
 Niger, can be navigated by vessels of large 
 burden for nearly 400 miles, and with small 
 craft for nearly 700 miles. Ships from Europe 
 supply the whole country on both sides of its 
 banks, on which lie numerous towns and vil- 
 lages, the centres of trade to the country for 
 hundreds of miles inland. 
 
 The mission schools, which were established 
 by the missionary Dart, about the year 1820, 
 in the island of St. Louis, a French settlement 
 at the mouth of the Senegal, were not kept 
 up ; neither were others that were established 
 in the island of Goree, near Cape Verd ; and 
 the first standing missions that we meet with 
 are these at the Gambia. Not far from its estu- 
 ary, which is twelve miles broad, is the island 
 of St. Mary, in lat. 30 degs. 30 min. north, and 
 long. 15 degs. 10 min. west, close to the south- 
 ern shore. It is four miles long by one broad. 
 The English have had a settlement here since 
 1816. The principal town is Bathurst, on the 
 north side, feeing the main branch of the river. 
 It contains a number of excellent houses, 
 among which may be noted the government 
 house, the hospital, the Wesleyan chapel, with 
 the dwellings of the merchants, &c. The 
 population in 1846 was 3689, of whom only 
 50 were white persons ; the rest were Mandin- 
 goes, Jaloofe, and liberated slaves. Several 
 
 missionaries have died here ; and the schools 
 which were opened here by the Society of 
 Friends, in the year 1823, as also those which 
 they established, at the same time, on the 
 neighboring coast at Birkow, Mahmadi, and 
 Sandani, have sunk under the unhealthiness 
 of the climate. The immediate foundress of 
 these schools was the celebrated Hamiah Kil- 
 ham, that spirited lady who, for ten years to- 
 gether, itinerated the west coast of Africa, 
 commenced schools in many places, and in 
 each of them devoted her particular attention 
 to the languages and dialects, of which she 
 printed a number of valuable specimens. She 
 had herself brought up and educated two Afri- 
 can youths in England, and it was with the 
 assistance of these she opened the schools at 
 Birkow. But she fell a victim to the country 
 fever in the year 1832. The Wesleyan mission 
 has stood better, inasmuch as it still continues ; 
 though one Christian messenger after another 
 has sunk into the grave, and almost yearly 
 some such mournful tidings reach us from this 
 station. The Wesleyan mission commenced 
 its labors in 1821, at a place called Mandara- 
 nee, in the territory of the king of Combo, on 
 the south bank of the river, about eight miles 
 from St. Marys. This locality, however, 
 proved to be ineligible, and the health of the 
 missionaries, Morgan and Baker, having failed, 
 the mission was removed to Bathurst, where, 
 as also in Melville Town and Soldier Town on 
 the island, and in Berwick Town on the conti- 
 nent, they have new chapels which are very 
 regularly frequented by native converts and the 
 heathen. 
 
 The Rev. Richard Marsliall and his wife were 
 sent out, in 1823, to strengthen and extend the 
 mission at St. Marys. Mr. Morgan and Mr. 
 Hawkins were then laboring there ; but in a 
 short time we find Mr. Marshall laboring alone. 
 He toiled on, however, assisted in the school 
 department by his devoted companion. But 
 in August, 1830, he was laid low, and in five 
 days the malignant fever carried him off. As 
 soon as an opportunity offered, the desolate 
 widow, with her little infant, embarked for 
 England, taking with her an African girl, 
 Sally, to take care of them during the voyage. 
 But great bodily weakness and extreJbe mental 
 suffering soon prostrated her, and within 48 
 hours of the ship reaching the port of Bristol, 
 Mrs. Marshall, unable to proceed to her friends 
 in the north of England, died among strangerS; 
 though on her native shore, leaving her baby in 
 the hands of his African nurse, both strangers in 
 a strange land. One cold morning in the month 
 of October of that year, several young men, can- 
 didates for the missionary ministry of Method- 
 ism, were passing through the streets of London, 
 on their way to meet the secretaries and com- 
 mittee, to be examined in reference to their 
 qualifications, and the fields of labor to which 
 they should be sent. Just as they arrived at 
 the Old Mission House in Hatton-Garden, they 
 
80 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 met a negro girl, canving in her arms a poor, 
 sickly-looking white child. They spoke to her, 
 and while her sable arms were folded affection- 
 ately round her little charge, and the tears 
 flowed down her face, she told them of her 
 country, and of the missionary and his dear 
 wife, whom she had so much loved ; how they 
 had toiled and suffered for Africa, and how 
 they were dead, and no one to carry on the 
 work ; and here she stood before the commit- 
 tee, that had sent out the man of God and his 
 wife, bearing back the missionary's orphan 
 boy, and pleading that poor Africa be not 
 given up. The devoted creature's appeal, ut- 
 tered with an energy and a pathos truly affect- 
 ing, produced an immediate and powerful im- 
 pression upon tlie missionary candidates ; and 
 one of their number, William Moister, imme- 
 diately offered himself to fill the vacated post. 
 In a few weeks he was on his way ; and when 
 he arrived opposite Bathurst, and it became 
 known that there was a missionary and his 
 wife on board, the Christian natives gathered 
 to the beach, plunging into the water to meet 
 the boat, out of which they lifted them and 
 carried them ashore. They set them down 
 and then wept aloud for joy, kissing their 
 hands again and again, and, as they bedewed 
 them with their tears, exclaiming, " Tank God, 
 tank God, Mr. Marshall die, but God send us 
 nuder minister ! " They proceeded to the mis- 
 sion house ; but the wild flowers had grown 
 upon the unused steps during the few preced- 
 ing months. Mr. Moister entered upon his 
 work in faith, and his labors were soon owned 
 of God ; and others having been sent to his 
 assistance, he extended the mission to Macar- 
 thys Island, a most important position for a 
 mission. This move brought them into con- 
 nexion with the Foulak tribe, the very people 
 that were the objects of Dr. Coke's benevolent 
 but unsuccessful enterprise in 1796. Macar- 
 thy's Island is situated in the Gambia river, 
 about 250 miles from its mouth. It is nearly 
 seven miles long and one broad, having the 
 Gambia on both sides. From the central 
 situation of this island its trade, in gold, ivory, 
 hides, and beeswax — its being the resort of 
 the shipping, and the facilities which its noble 
 river affords for communication with the coast 
 and the interior — no better position can be 
 found in all Africa for a missionary station. 
 Here, therefore, the Wesleyan committee estab- 
 lished a stroni^ centre of operation, including, 
 as part. of their plan, an institution for educa- 
 ting the sons of the neighboring kings and 
 chiefs. The committee were encouraged to 
 engage in this enterprise by the noble munifi- 
 cence of a single individual — Dr. Limine, of 
 Southampton — and whose benevolent zeal is 
 the more to be appreciated, inasmuch as he was 
 not connected with the Wesleyan denomina- 
 tion of Christians. From 1833 to 1848, Dr. 
 Lindoe and his family expended upon the Fou- 
 lah Missimi over ^19,000. A tract of 600 
 
 acres of land having been given by the Gov- 
 ernment, the wandering and persecuted Faur 
 lahs were invited to settle upon it. School 
 houses were built, and the llev. Mr. Macbrair, 
 formerly the Society's missionary in Egypt, 
 was sent out to Macartliy's Island to translate 
 the Scriptures into the language of the Man- 
 dingoes and Foulahs. Several able native 
 missionaries were raised up, upon whom the 
 work has since chiefly devolved, and the society 
 there, with the genuine spirit of a missionary 
 church, are laboring and praying that the na- 
 tions contiguoua to them may also be favored 
 with the light of saving truth. The record 
 of mortality in this mission is truly painful. 
 During the past 32 years, out of 24 persona 
 sent out, 15 have left the field disabled, and 12 
 have fallen into the arms of death I And yet 
 men are found who, with their lives in their 
 hand, rush forward and offer themselves for 
 these posts as often as they are left unfilled by 
 the ravages of disease and death. The longest 
 term of service was that of Rev. W. Fox, who 
 was enabled to stand his ground for ten years. 
 And next to him was Rev. H. Badger, who, 
 after spending twelve years in the South Afri- 
 can missions, went to the Gambia in 1848, and 
 remained there until the death of his noble 
 wife last year obliged him also to retire. The 
 late Mrs. Badger was one of the most devoted 
 female missionaries that ever was sent out by 
 any Christian society. Twenty years of her 
 life she devoted to the instruction and salva- 
 tion of the African race, in the West Indies, 
 at Sierra Leone, and at the Gambia. The 
 languages employed at the Gambia, beside the 
 English, are the Jaloof, the Mandingo, and the 
 Fotdah. For information as to the present 
 state of this mission, the reader is referred to 
 the table near the end of this article. 
 
 Ill The Cape Coast District—With the ex- 
 ception of the German Mission at Akropong 
 and Ussa, the only missions on the Gold Coast 
 are those of the Wesleyan Society. This coast 
 runs from the mouth of the river Adirio or 
 Yolta, to Cape Appolina, a distance of about 
 240 miles. The leading power in this district 
 of Africa is the Ashantee nation, the capital of 
 which is Coomassie or Kumasi. The coast of 
 Guinea, of which the Gold Coast is a part, 
 first became known to Europeans in the six- 
 teenth century. At that period the spirit of 
 discovery, which during the middle ages, had 
 been confined to the Arabs, manifested itself 
 in Europe in a most remarkable manner. The 
 Portuguese, who led the way, prosecuted their 
 researches with enthusiastic ardor, and along 
 the western coast of Africa, and from various 
 points penetrated into the interior. The Eng- 
 lish first commenced trading with Guinea in 
 the latter end of the reign of Edward YI.; 
 but the merchants who engaged in such com- 
 merce were exposed to considerable risk, -"ji 
 consequence of the pretensions of the Portu- 
 guese, who having built the fort of St. George 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 81 
 
 del Mina, endeavored to enforce their claim to 
 an exclusive right to trade with the Gold 
 Coast, as well as the other parts of Western 
 Africa. The Dutch deprived the Portuguese 
 of their forts and settlements, on the Gold 
 Coast ; and their attempt to serve the English 
 in the same way, led to the war between the 
 Dutch and English in 1667. At its conclusion 
 the English company were left in possession of 
 only one fort, that of Cape Coast Castle. But 
 they soon extended themselves on the coast 
 again. At this time the Fantees governed 
 the whole country round Cape Coast—having 
 the powerful and warlike Ashnntees on the 
 nor^ of them. The eruption of the Ashan- 
 toes into the Fantee country first brought 
 them into collision with the British, in the 
 year 1807. The Ashantees desolated the 
 country — and their great military power may 
 be imagined from the fact of the immense and 
 disciplined armies they brought into the field. 
 It is stated that, in some of the wars in which 
 this powerful people engaged, often 30,000 men, 
 and in two instances, as many as 100,000, have 
 been left dead on the field of battle. In the 
 war of 1807 they took the Dutch fort at Cor- 
 mantine, they then fiercely attacked the Bri- 
 tish fort of Annamaboe, when a negociation 
 ensued, and Ckibbu, the author of the war, had 
 to be given up to them. A second and a third 
 invasion followed, until the Fantees were com- 
 pletely subdued, and the British found that, to 
 retain their own possessions they must concili- 
 ate these powerful conquerors. An embassy 
 therefore was sent to Coomassie, a treaty con- 
 cluded, and a resident appointed to represent 
 British interests at the capital. Symptoms of 
 disquietude, follov/ed by another treaty, having 
 occurred, the Home Government resolved to 
 try harsher measures, and appointed Sir 
 Charles McCarthy Governor of Cape Coast." 
 He adopted a warlike policy. Hostilities were 
 commenced between the British and the As- 
 hantees, in which at first the British were suc- 
 cessful, but in the fatal battle near Assamacow, 
 Sir Charles was defeated and slain, and his 
 army cut to pieces. As an illustration of the 
 spirit and temper of the savage Ashantees, it 
 may be mentioned that they cut the heads of 
 Sir Charles and several of his officers from 
 their bodies, and having seized the Secretary 
 of the General, Mr. Williams, they confined 
 him in a room where the heads were kept. 
 They also tore open Sir Charles' body and took 
 out his heart, and having divided it, it was 
 eaten by the Ashantee Generals, in order that 
 they might, as they imagined, imbibe his 
 bravery. His flesh having been dried, was dij- 
 vided,^ together with his bones, among the 
 captains of the army, who kept their respective 
 shares about their persons, as charms to in- 
 spire them with courage. 
 
 About two years from this period, in Sep- 
 tember, 1826, another and a decisive battle 
 was fought, in which the British were victo- 
 6 
 
 rious. Among the trophies was a human 
 head, enveloped in a silk handkerchief, and a 
 paper covered with Arabic characters ; and 
 over the whole was thrown a tiger skin, the 
 emblem of royalty. On the supposition that 
 this was the head of the unfortunate General 
 McCarthy, it was afterwards sent to England 
 by Colonel Purdon ; but it was really the 
 head of the old king Osai Tutu Quamina, (a 
 sovereign remarkable for his prowess) which the 
 new king carried about with him as a charm. 
 It is said that on the morning of the battle, he 
 offered it a libation of rum, and invoked it to 
 cause all the heads of the whites to come and 
 lie near it ; and during the day, when intelli- 
 gence was brought to him of the death of any 
 of his principal officers, he immediately, in the 
 heat of. the battle, offered human sacrifices to 
 their shades. 
 
 But the blow struck by the British was so 
 decisive that the Ashantee monarch had to 
 submit to the terms imposed on him, whicli 
 were, that he should lodge 4000 ounces of gold 
 in the castle at Cape Coast, to be appropriated 
 in purchasing arms and ammunition for the Bri- 
 tish allies, in case the Ashantees should again 
 commence hostilities ; and that two of the 
 royal family of Ashantee should be sent to 
 Cape Coast as hostages. To these terms he 
 was obliged to conform, and in April, 1831, 
 his son Quantimissah, and his nephew Ansah, 
 arrived at the Castle. These princes were 
 kindly treated ; they received a good education, 
 under the direction of the African Committee, 
 by whom the British Government now con- 
 ducts the affairs of the Gold Coast ; and 
 through the faithful ministry of Rev. J. Dun- 
 well, the first Wesleyan missionary to the 
 Gold Coast, they both became convinced of 
 the truth and excellence of the Christian relig- 
 ion, the public profession of which they assumed 
 during their subsequent visit to England, — 
 Quantamissah receiving in baptism the name 
 of William, and Ansah, that of John. They 
 returned to Africa with the Niger Expedition, 
 and were accompanied to Coomassie by the 
 Rev. T. B. Freeman, Wesleyan missionary at 
 Cape Coast Castle. The favorable impression 
 produced on the mind of the Ashantee monarch, 
 by these two princes, as well as by a few na- 
 tive Christians who had returned to Coomassie 
 from Sierra Leone, to which they had been 
 carried as rescued slaves, by the British cruis- 
 ers, were thus the meaiks employed by Provi- 
 dence for opening Ashantee to the labors of 
 the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 Here we leave the narrative for the present, 
 in order to glance at the work which had pre- 
 viously been begun in the regions on the south 
 of the Ashantee kingdom nearer thet sea. 
 Between Coomassie and the South Atlantic 
 Ocean there are several kingdoms, as Asin, 
 Aquapim, Akim, Fantee, &c., over which the 
 monarchs of Ashantee formerly claimed supreme 
 sovereignty. And it is humiliating to reflect 
 
82 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 that though three Protestant jpowcrs of Europe 
 — the Danes, the Dutch, aud the English— have 
 saccoaaivcly had intercourse with these and 
 other parts of Guinea for three centuries, yet 
 until a comparatively late period, but few at- 
 tempts have been mtule to communicate to the 
 native population the light and blessings of 
 Christianity. In the year 1751, a clergyman 
 of the Church of England went out under the 
 Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in 
 Foreign Parts, to the Gold Coast, to see what 
 couldl)e done in establishing a mission there. 
 During the four years of his stay he oCBciatcd 
 as chaplain of the troops and residents at Cape 
 Coast Castle, but was much discouraged in his 
 attempts to establish the faith of the Gospel 
 among the natives. His health having failed 
 he returned to England in 1756, and published 
 an account of his efforts. Before leaving, he 
 had sent home three native boys from Cape 
 Coast, who were placed by the society to 
 which he belonged, in a school in Islington, 
 under the care of Mr. Hickman, with whom 
 they are reported as having made considerable 
 proficiency in useful learning, and in the knowl- 
 edge of the Christian religion. One of these 
 youths, of the name of Quaque, was afterward 
 sent to the University of Oxford, and having 
 completed his education there, he received or- 
 dination, aud returned to exercise the Christian 
 ministry in his native countrj'. He was chai> 
 lain at Cape Coast Castle for more than fifty 
 years ; but does not appear to have been in- 
 strumental in turning any of his countrymen 
 to Christianity. Nor will this excite surprise, 
 when it is known that on his death-bed he 
 gave evidence that he had at least as much 
 confidence in the influence of the Fetish, as in 
 the power of Christianity. The case of this 
 individual furnishes matter for grave consider- 
 ation on the part of those who are anxious to 
 promote the enlightenment and salvation of 
 Africa. It yields no support to the theory of 
 Christianizing heathen lands, primarily or 
 chiefly, by bringing natives to England or the 
 United States, for education, with a view to 
 their being employed as the principal instruc- 
 tors of their countrymen ; and shows that if 
 on their return, they are left to their own re- 
 sources, it is more likely that they will sink 
 down again to the level of their former state, 
 than that they will prove the regenerators of 
 their country. Instructed natives may main- 
 tain their consistency, and act a useful part, 
 where they are placed under the eye and direc- 
 tion of the missionaries ; but if they be thrown 
 back into heathen society without such sup- 
 port, it ought not to excite surprise, should 
 the result prove that the time and care cm- 
 ployed upon their culture have been expended 
 m vain. Some English chaplains, who were 
 sent to the Gold Coast after the deceovse of 
 Quaque, successively died soon after their arri- 
 val at Cape Coast Castle. 
 
 About twenty-four years since, a mission 
 
 was commenced by the Bask Missionary Society 
 at Danish Akra, and in the adjoining country 
 of Aquapim ; but this truly philanthropic un- 
 dertaking does not appear to have met with 
 the desired success. The missionaries encoun- 
 tered opposition in quarters where they ought 
 to have found encouragement and support ; * 
 several of them were removed by death, and 
 the last survivor, Mr. Riis, returned to Europe 
 in 1840. 
 
 Such was the state of the Gold Coast about 
 the time that the providence of God directed 
 the attention of the Wesleyan Missionary So- 
 ciety to it. It was in the autumn of 1834 that 
 the committee of this society were inducai, by 
 a peculiar train of inviting circumstances, to 
 send a missionary on a visit of observation to 
 the Gold Coast. A few native youths, who 
 had learned to read the English translation of 
 the Bible, in the excellent government school 
 at Cape Coast Castle, became so interested by 
 the contents of the sacred volume, that they 
 agreed to meet at regular times for the pur- 
 pose of reading it together, and of carefully 
 inquiring into the nature and claims of the 
 Christian religion. The formation of this in- 
 teresting society took place in October, 1831 ; 
 and, in the year 1833, William De Graft, one 
 of these native youths, and who himself had 
 begun to read the Scriptures privately in the 
 spirit of prayer and inquiry, received at Dix 
 Cove, where he was then residing, a request 
 from his young friends at Cape Coast Town, 
 that he would engage some suitable person, 
 who might be proceeding to England, to pur- 
 chase for their use a number of copies of the 
 New Testament. Shortly after, the late ex- 
 cellent Captain Potter, master of a merchant 
 vessel from the port of Bristol, arrived at Dix 
 Cove ; to whom De Graft applied as one likely 
 to execute with promptness and care the com- 
 mission for the purchase of the Scriptures. 
 The captain was surprised at receiving such 
 an application from a native young man, and 
 became so greatly interested by the information 
 which his questions elicited, that he was led to 
 ask whether the instructions of a missionary 
 would not be highly appreciated by those native 
 inquirers after the true religion ? De Graft 
 replied in the affirmative, but appeared doubt- 
 ful whether so high a privilege was attainable. 
 Captain Potter next proceeded to Cape Coast, 
 where he saw the other members of the meet- 
 ing or society, and, having consulted President 
 Maclean, he returned to England, resolved to 
 exert himself, in order that, on his next voy- 
 age, he might, together with copies of the 
 scriptures, take out a Christian missionary 
 who should " preach the word " to those who 
 were already united in seeking the way to 
 eternal salvation, and proclaim the gospel of 
 Christ to other portions of the heathenish na- 
 tive population of the Gold Coast. Immedi- 
 ately after his arrival at Bristol, Capt. Potter 
 communicated to the Wesleyan Missionarv 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 88 
 
 Committee in London his views as to the pro- 
 mising opening- for missionary exertion in that 
 part of Africa, and generously offered to take 
 a missionary with him on the next voyage, 
 who might make personal observation and in- 
 quiry upon the spot ; and, should he conclude 
 that the prospect was not such as to warrant 
 his continuance for the purpose of commencing 
 a mission, Captain Potter engaged that in 
 that case he would bring him back to England 
 without any expense to the missionary society. 
 This noble offer met with acceptance on the 
 part of the missionary committee, and the Eev. 
 Joseph Dunwell was selected for the interesting 
 service. 
 
 This devoted missionary embarked with 
 Capt. Potter at Bristol, Oct. 11th, 1834. The 
 entries in his private journal sufficiently indi- 
 cate the views with which he entered upon his 
 arduous undertaking. He landed at Cape 
 Coast Castle on or about January 1, 1835, 
 and immediately wrote to President Maclean 
 informing him of his arrival, and stating the 
 objects contemplated by the Wesleyan Mission- 
 ary Committee, in sending him to that part of 
 Africa. The President gave him a kind recep- 
 tion. By the native young men who formed 
 the society for reading the Holy Scriptures, 
 Mr. Dunwell was received " as an angel of 
 God." They at once placed themselves under 
 his care, and he commenced his ministry at 
 Cape Coast town on the first Sabbath after h\3 
 landed. Speaking of the congregation to 
 whom he preached his first sermon, composed 
 of the members of the above mentioned soci- 
 ety and a few others, Mr. D. remarks, " The 
 deepest attention was manifested ; joy beamed 
 on every countenance," and adds, " Their gra- 
 titude is without bounds, and they say, ' we 
 never did think of the missionaries coming to 
 teach black men.' " 
 
 One class of persons, however, the fetish 
 men, speedily took the alarm, and used their in- 
 fluence to prevent the people from attending 
 Christian worship, and many of their steadfast 
 votaries employed ridicule and threats for the 
 purpose of deterring their friends and neigh- 
 bors from listening to the truths of the gospel. 
 But in spite of such opposition, the people 
 flocked to the ministry of Mr. D. at Cape Coast 
 Castle, Annamaboe, and other places which 
 he visited. And under the Divine blessing, 
 the great doctrines of Christianity produced 
 their salutary effect on many minds, and 
 the _ number of those who felt interested in the 
 subject of their personal salvation steadily in- 
 creased. Mr. Dunwell, in his correspondence 
 at the time, mentioned with much satisfaction 
 a striking instance of decision in the case of a 
 woman who brought out her household gods 
 and publicly burned them in the presence of 
 her heathen neighbors. 
 
 The mission soon assumed a most promising 
 appearance. The large room in which public 
 service was held in Cape Coast town proved 
 
 too small, and a subscription was commenced 
 among the natives for the erection of a suita- 
 ble place of worship. Mr. Dunwell had se- 
 cured great respect among all classes of 
 society, and was receiving applications from 
 distant places to afford them also the benefit 
 of his latiors. But in the midst of the antici- 
 pations which this hopeful state of things in- 
 spired, he was attacked by fever, under which 
 he sunk in a few days ; and left the societies 
 which he had been instrumental in forming 
 " as sheep without a shepherd." He died June 
 14, 1835. Upon his dying bed no word of 
 discouragement or regret escaped his lips, 
 on account of his having so early sacrificed 
 his life in the missionary enterprise ; but a 
 quenchless zeal for the cause of his Divine 
 Master sustained him to the last, and all the 
 solicitude he manifested was for the infant 
 church formed by his instrumentality. 
 
 This aflflictive dispensation produced the 
 deepest feeling among all who took any inter- 
 est in the mission. On the following morning 
 a native wrote, " Sad news in the town ; the 
 shepherd is taken away ! The poor missionary 
 is dead !" Great numbers of the native people 
 and the resident English gentlemen attended 
 his funeral, at which his Excellency, the Presi- 
 dent officiated. On the day after the funeral, 
 the church met to take into consideration the 
 painful circumstances of their bereaved state. 
 The artless manner in which a record of this 
 meeting was made in the minute-book of the 
 Society, will best explain the conclusion that 
 was adopted : " I met the class on purpose to 
 know whether they would continue in the pro- 
 fessions they had recently entered into, or re- 
 turn to their former ways, in consequence of 
 the death of their missionary? They said, 
 They would remain in the new 'profession : for 
 though tJie missionary was dead, God lives. ^^ 
 Another appeal was forwarded to London, 
 which was replied to by the Committee in the 
 appointment of Mr. Wrigley and his wife to 
 the vacant station. Tliey arrived in Sept., 
 1836, and were followed next year by Mr. and 
 Mrs. Harrop ; but in a short time Mrs. Wrig- 
 ley sunk under the hand of death, and both 
 Mr. and Mrs. Harrop, within a few weeks of 
 their arrival on the coast, were attacked by 
 fever and in a few days after were both laid in 
 the grave. Mr. Wrigley was but just recover- 
 ing from an attack of the fever when he was 
 bereaved of Mr. and Mrs. Harrop. But 
 though left alone he toiled on at the erection 
 of the large new chapel, and preached the 
 gospel till November, when he also was taken 
 ill and died. The arrival of Rev. Thomas B. 
 Freeman and his wife early in January, 1838, 
 once more revived the drooping spirits of the 
 native church. Mr. Freeman had zealously 
 entered upon the duties of his mission when he 
 was attacked with the seasoning fever ; and 
 while watching with solicitude at his sick bed, 
 Mrs. Freeman was seized with a violent inflam- 
 
84 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 matory complaint, which tcrmiuatcd licr valu- 
 able liYo in a few hours. Mr. Freeman gradu- 
 ally recovered his health ; and from that period 
 to the present, except during his occasional visr 
 
 its to England, has been engaged in the exe* 
 cution of plans which have coutributeti great- 
 ly, under the Divine blessing, to the enlarge- 
 ment of the mission on the Gold Coast. 
 
 
 •saoioqos pa« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 MoquidW auipnp 
 
 :? 3 s 
 
 1 
 
 
 SS8 
 
 io 
 
 
 ®§ggg 
 
 i 
 
 z 
 
 S 
 
 
 -u} 'diqsaoAV 
 
 »-" M i-r 
 
 
 0>riS 
 
 IH. 
 
 
 ^-* ^^ ^-^- 
 
 «o 
 
 00 
 
 
 ojiquj no 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s^owpna^^v JO -o^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of Scholars, 
 those who 
 Sabbath 
 y Schools. 
 
 1 
 
 iii 
 
 i 
 
 CO 
 
 i=sg 
 
 i 
 
 
 %^H: 
 
 s 
 
 i § 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 S S 
 
 1 
 
 
 sss« 
 
 rH 
 
 
 Ot-OiO 
 
 OD 
 
 o> 
 
 e> 
 
 
 Total Number 
 
 deducting for 
 
 attend both 
 
 and Week-Da 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S-'-S : 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 S- 
 
 
 . 
 
 th" 
 
 t 
 
 |SS 
 
 1 
 
 
 iPi^ 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 
 •soxag 
 TOoq JO SJTfioqos 
 
 s s g 
 
 t 
 
 i^s 
 
 3 
 
 
 l§-|: 
 
 28 
 
 s 
 
 § 
 
 
 -;C«a JO Jaqtunj,! 
 
 rH 
 
 cf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 •siooqog 
 
 rH <o la 
 
 S5 
 
 iHrHiH 
 
 eo 
 
 
 a>«w*- • 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 
 -iftJd JO Jaqmn^ 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •saxag 
 
 iSS 
 
 » 
 
 ?£2S 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 qt^oq JO SJVioqog 
 
 § 
 
 
 '^^^ 
 
 >o 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 -m^qq^s JO -ON 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J-1 
 
 
 •siooqos-q;«q 
 
 (M t- i« 
 
 ■^ 
 
 i-lrHr-l 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 1 
 
 -qt-S JO Jaquin^ 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 ^-y-' 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 •diqsjaqmaK 
 joj luij^ no 
 
 sg' 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 S 
 
 ? 
 
 B 
 
 5S^J5 : 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 g 
 
 sjaqmoj^ qoanq^ 
 
 CO t- CJ 
 
 <^ 
 
 si 
 
 ^ 
 
 1— 1 
 
 IIS-" 
 
 *- 
 
 (N 
 
 T-i 
 
 w. 
 
 pa:|!pajoav pa^ 
 
 s 8 i 
 
 
 3 
 
 5S 
 
 
 g 
 
 b^ 
 
 s 
 
 nnj JO jaquinx 
 
 -^"^ rH 
 
 ro 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 ~ oo" 
 
 
 li 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 !h 
 
 £ s ;3 
 
 § 
 
 S 
 
 >0 M 
 
 00 
 
 g 
 
 s 
 
 t,us^o . 
 
 c« 
 
 S5 
 
 1 
 
 >A 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 '" "' 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .4-.S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 'A 
 
 Sabbat 
 
 Schoo 
 
 Teache 
 
 s ^ s? 
 
 S 
 
 §^§ 
 
 s 
 
 Q 
 
 : : : : : 
 
 : 
 
 
 i 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 III 
 
 1- -^ 00 
 
 « 
 
 W 111 
 
 t- 
 
 k 
 
 IM'«*TJ( to . 
 
 GO 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 •gf^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 s 
 
 
 ifs 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 .-^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 So 
 
 1^ 
 
 x* (M rS 
 
 t- 
 
 
 : : : 
 
 
 
 (NrH .rH . 
 
 ©* 
 
 CO 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •OWp ^UB^SISSV 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 puT? satJBaojssTW 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •s90Bia-3aiqoBejj 
 
 rH « . 
 
 i» 
 
 31 . . 
 
 CI 
 
 
 ntiOrHTjirH 
 
 N 
 
 
 (M 
 
 
 Jeq?o JO -o^fi 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •siadBqo 
 
 »- 00 « 
 
 
 MrHM 
 
 CS 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 JO jaquin|i{ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 us 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 -r?: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : . 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 II 
 
 n r 
 
 
 
 
 OQ "^ 
 
 
 iii 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 
 i|g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 pL. 
 
 |-(N CO 
 
 
 r4(NCO 
 
 
 rH(Ne0'*>O® 
 
 
 
AFRICA, WESTEEN. 
 
 85 
 
 ^ Mr. Freeman is a colored mau, and though 
 not born in Africa, yet of African parentage. 
 He has received the benefits of a thorough ed- 
 ucation, which added to his great natural abil- 
 ities, and all sanctified by a zeal for Christ and 
 for Africa which nothing can quench, renders 
 him an agent of preeminent ability. On his 
 arrival at Cape Coast in 1838, he found that, 
 notwithstanding the bereavements which death 
 had made in the missionary ranks, the cause 
 of God was in a state of increasing prosperity, 
 chiefly by the labors of the local preachers and 
 class leaders, so that there were over 450 
 church members scattered over the district 
 where the missionaries and their devoted assist- 
 ants had itinerated. There were also a few 
 schools, with five or six places of worship, one 
 of which could hold from 6 to 700 persons, and 
 was well filled with attentive hearers. The 
 new chapel at Cape Coast was completed soon 
 after Mr. Freeman's recovery. This is proba- 
 bly the largest place of worship out of Sierra 
 Leone, on the west coast of Africa ; and on 
 the day of dedication it was crowded to its 
 utmost capacity by a deeply interested con- 
 gregation of Africa's sons and daughters. The 
 Gospel had been introduced in Annamaboe by 
 the lamented Mr. Dunwell, and the claims of 
 Christianity were first introduced to the inhab- 
 itants of Winnebah, on the east of Cape Coast 
 Town, by William I)e Graft, who had now be- 
 come a local preacher and a useful agent ' of 
 the Society. Mr. Freeman had also the joy 
 of seeing the gospel established and extended 
 in Akra, and at Domonasi, Dix Cove, and sev- 
 eral other places. But it is in connection with 
 his visits to Ashantee (pronounced As-hanti,) 
 that Mr. Freeman's name has come so pro- 
 minently before the public of late years. 
 
 The territory over which the king of Ashan- 
 tee reigns, including the dependencies of that 
 power, are not much, if at all, inferior in ex- 
 tent to England and Wales united. The pop- 
 ulation is estimated by Mr. Beecham at over 
 4,000,000 ; while the capital city, Coomassie, 
 (pronounced Kumasi,) is said to contain at least 
 100,000 persons. They are a powerful race of 
 men, but, to a frightful degree reckless of human 
 life ; and some of their manners and customs 
 are not to be exceeded on earth for blood- 
 thirstiness and brutality. Their monarchy is 
 very powerful — they have a large army, of over 
 150,000 men, well disciplined, and also great 
 wealth, which they delight to exhibit in truly 
 barbarian magnificence. 
 
 This remarkable people claim a remote an- 
 tiquity, but from the want of written records 
 among them, little can be known of their early 
 history. The mountains of Kong, on the north 
 of their territory, seem to have opposed a suc- 
 cessful barrier to the desolating tide of Moham- 
 medanism as it swept over the regions through 
 which the Niger rolls its course. During, or 
 about, the thirteenth century, that portion of 
 the pure Negro race which could not brook 
 
 the Mohammedan rule, took refuge to the 
 south of this great mountain range, and have 
 there maintained their independence to the 
 present day. Among all the negro kingdoms, 
 Ashantee holds the foremost place ; and the 
 conversion of such a people to the faith of 
 Christ, should it take place, would be " life 
 from the dead " to the nations around them. 
 And hence the surpassing interest which at- 
 taches to any opening for the Gospel, however 
 small, among this remarkable people. (See 
 Ashantee and tlie Gold Coast.) 
 
 ]\Ir. Freeman felt the importance of attempt- 
 ing to introduce Christianity into Ashantee, 
 and at length an opportunity offered ; and 
 leaving the mission at Cape Coast under the 
 care of William De Craft, he made preparation 
 for the arduous undertaking. As an evidence 
 of their desire to spread the Gospel among 
 their countrymen, it may here be mentioned, 
 that the native Christians at Cape Coast not 
 only were willing to relinquish the benefits of 
 their missionary's care for several months, that 
 he might perform this service, but they also 
 contributed of their own little means $600 
 toward the expenses of his journey. Ilefer- 
 ring those who desire more information on this 
 interesting subject than the limits of this arti- 
 cle will allow, to the published Journals of Mr. 
 Freeman, we will merely state a few facts in 
 conclusion. He left Cape Coast on the 29ih 
 of January, 1839, accompanied by a few at- 
 tendants, and, after being detained at various 
 towns along his route by the superstitious fears 
 of the Ashantee king, who could not compre- 
 hend why a missionary should want to see 
 him and visit his capital, no stranger ever 
 having gone there, except to trade or conclude 
 a treaty, or for some secular object ; and yet, 
 under the idea that Mr. Freeman was a pow- 
 erful fetishman, whose wrath it would be im- 
 politic to provoke, the king at length gave 
 consent that he might approach the capital. 
 Mr. Freeman afterward learned, that previous 
 to leave being granted for his approach, a sac- 
 rifice of two human victims had been made 
 with a view to avert any evil that might, 
 without such precaution, result from his visit. 
 Great preparations were made for his recep- 
 tion. At length, on the 1st of April, he 
 entered Coomassie, and was received in the 
 spacious market place, by the king and his 
 officers and army, with others, to the amount 
 of over 40,000 persons. And there he stood, 
 the first herald of the Gospel that had ever 
 entered the dark and blood-stained capital of 
 Ashantee to offer to its monarch and its people 
 the religion of purity and peace. 
 
 The king, though kind, would not commit 
 himself as to the establishment of schools and 
 a mission station in his capital, but requested 
 time to think of it, and wished Mr. Freeman 
 to return soon again and he should give him 
 an answer. After a delay of fifteen days, in 
 consequence of a " custom " for a deceased 
 
86 
 
 AFRICA, TVESTERN. 
 
 relative, to whose shade 42 human beings were 
 sacrificed in two days, while Mr. F. was there, 
 he was alloweil to' depart; having striveu to 
 coimniinicate to the monarch and his coimscl- 
 lors, as far as they were disposed to give him 
 audience, as full an exposition of the Gospel 
 as he posi^bly could. He evidently made a 
 
 good impression at Coomassie, and though the 
 oor was not opened, yet, by his being kindly 
 received in his avowed character as a mission- 
 ary, its bolts had been drawn, and he hoped a 
 future visit would result in a free access for 
 the Gospel. The publication of Mr. F.'s jour- 
 nal greatly increased the interest already exists 
 ing on behalf of Ashantee, and a special fund 
 of 825,000 was soon raised to open a mission 
 in tliat kingdom. Accompanied by the two 
 Ashantee princes, who had iust returned from 
 England, the youngest of whom is heir to the 
 throne, Mr. Freeman set out on a second visit 
 to Coomassie in November, 1841. He was 
 kindly received, and succeeded in obtaining 
 ground for a mission-house and permission to 
 cstablisli a school, and have the Gospel preach- 
 ed in the streets and markets of Coomassie 
 without any restraint. And though little has 
 as yet been accomplished in the way of gath- 
 ering a church, yet the fact that ten or twelve 
 hundred persons statedly attend Christian wor- 
 ship in the capital of Ashantee is cause of 
 great encouragement, and we look forward 
 with hope that this citadel of the Powers of 
 Darkness will yet be surrendered to the Cap- 
 tain of our Salvation. 
 
 In addition to introducing the gospel into 
 Ashantee, Mr. Freeman was enabled the next 
 year to visit Sode/ce, the powerful chief of 
 Abbeokuta, and obtained permission to preach 
 the gospel and open a school in the capital, 
 which Mr. F. considers to be larger than even 
 Coomassie ; so that there are now Christian 
 missions in Ashantee, Badagry, and Abbeo- 
 kuta, besides Cape Coast Town, Dix Cove, 
 Annamaboe, Domouasi, Akra and other im- 
 portant places. The queen of Jabin also, haS 
 lately applied to Mr. Freeman, very earnestly 
 requesting him to establish a mission in her 
 dominions. 
 
 Badagry and Abbeokuta have been descri- 
 bed by travelers, particularly by Laivier, as the 
 seat of the most sanguinary superstitions, and 
 the scene of the worst atrocities and cruelties 
 of the slave-trade ; and yet even here have the 
 returned and christianized emigrants from 
 Sierra Leone been kindly received by the 
 savage monarch, and the foundation of a Chris- 
 tian church been laid. But for further infor- 
 mation we must refer the reader to the forego- 
 ing tables. An institution for training a 
 native ministry is in operation at British Akra, 
 under the care of Mr. Wharton. All the re- 
 ports for 1853 from this district speak of the 
 continued prosperity of the work in highly 
 gratifying terms. A recent letter of the gen- 
 eral superintendent says : " Never has the work 
 
 of God in this district been kno^Mi to assume 
 so cheering an aspeet. The influence of Chris- 
 tianity is rapidly extending itself into the in- 
 terior. All the out stations, except perhaps 
 Kumasi, are in a healthy, vigorous, and flour- 
 ishing condition — the pastoral visits to the 
 stations in the interior delight us much ; they 
 are means of grace to ourselves." The writer 
 goes on to exemplify this latter statement by 
 the details of a recent journey taken for the 
 double purpose of opening a new native chapel 
 at Abuadi, which has been built by the chief 
 of that town, at his own expense, and presented 
 to the mission, dnd of laying the foundation of 
 a chapel at Thinquah, whore the Gospel is ex- 
 tending its power among the people. — Wedeii- 
 an Missi&nai'y Notices, Annual Reports, and the 
 Annual Minutes and Magazine; Fox's History oj 
 Missions on the IVest Coast of Africa ; Moist er's 
 Missionary Memorials of Western Africa ; Blurnr 
 luirdt's Manual of Missionary History and Ge- 
 ography ; and Beccham's Ashantee and the Gold 
 Coast.— B^EX. W. Bdtler. 
 
 American Baptist Missionary Union. — 
 This mission is restricted to that part of the 
 coast of Africa known as Liberia, and to the 
 Bassa tribe of its inhabitants, a people occu- 
 pying a strip of the coast, ninety miles in length 
 lying between Junk river and the river Scsters, 
 extending nearly seventy miles in the interior. 
 They are supposed to be about one hundred 
 and twenty-five thousand in number. 
 
 The first missionaries sent by the Board to 
 Africa were Rev. Lott Carey and Rev. Collin 
 Teage, two colored men, who were ordained at 
 Richmond,Va.,in January,1821,andsoonafter- 
 ward3 sailed for Liberia as emigrants of the 
 American Colonization Society. This society 
 had then no colony upon the coast, and Messrs. 
 Carey and Teage went to Freetown, in the 
 PJnglish colony of Sierra Leone. In February, 
 1822, they removed to Monrovia, a settlement 
 planted by colonists from America, and com- 
 menced their labors as missionaries. During 
 the following year a church was formed and 
 six persons were added to it by baptism, and 
 in 1824 nine more were baptized, and a house 
 of worship was erected. Of this church Mr. 
 Carey became the pastor, his associate having 
 meanwhile returned to Sieira Leone. He 
 was a man of unusual intelligence and energy 
 of character, and his career was one of great 
 usefulness to the people of his race, with whom 
 he was brought in contact on the shores of 
 Africa. 
 
 Early in 1825 Rev. Calvin Holton was ap 
 pointed to this mission by the Board, and sailed 
 for the American colonies which had been 
 planted on the coast. He had, however, scarce 
 ly arrrived, when he fell a victim to the fevei 
 which in that climate seldom fails to attack 
 Europeans from other latitudes. Meanwhile, 
 the mission was sustained by Mr. Carey with 
 the aid of two or three pious assistants whom 
 he found among the emigrants. He provided 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 8T 
 
 most of the resources by which it was kept 
 alive, for the allowance of the Board was at 
 this time, very small, and gave direction and 
 character to all its operations. These em- 
 braced the emigrant colonists at Monrovia, also 
 the natives dwelling upon the coast, especially 
 those at Grand Mount, where he preached and 
 established schools. In September, 1826, he 
 was elected vice-agent of the colony, and sub- 
 sequently, on the return of Mr. Ashmun to 
 the United States, he was appointed for the 
 interim to the post of governor, the duties of 
 which he was discharging at the time of his 
 death. Serious depredations had been made 
 upon the property of the colony by some na- 
 tives, and Mr. Carey had called out the troops, 
 and was making arrangements for its defense 
 when the accidental explosion of a large mass 
 of gunpowder suddenly put an end to his life. 
 At the period of his death the church of which 
 he was pastor contained a hundred members. 
 It was committed to the charge of Mr. Teage, 
 who now returned from Sierra Leone, and of 
 Mr. Waring, one of its members lately ordained 
 a minister. The agencies which had been es- 
 tablished by Mr. Carey, long survived his 
 death, and continued to bless the race for which 
 he had toiled. The church at Monrovia soon 
 numbered two hundred members, and the in- 
 fluences of the gospel were extended to the 
 natives of the coast, of whom nearly a hundred 
 were united with the several churches of the 
 colony. 
 
 In 1830, Rev. Benjamin Skinner was ap- 
 pointed a missionary to Africa, and arrived at 
 Monrovia with his family in December. Soon 
 after their arrival they wtre all prostrated 
 with the fever of the coast, and in the course 
 of the following six months they all fell vic- 
 tims to its ravages, Mr. Skinner himself dy- 
 ing at sea on his passage to the United States. 
 After these disastrous issues of the attempts of 
 the managers to employ missionaries in Africa, 
 five years elapsed before any reinforcement 
 was sent to the mission. During the interval 
 the gospel was preached, and public worship 
 and the ordinances of religion were maintained 
 by preachers who were appointed from among 
 the pious emigrants. The most conspicuous 
 of these, in addition to those already named, 
 were Rev. A. W. Anderson, Rev. John Lewis, 
 and Rev. Hilary Teage son of Collin Teage. 
 In the summer of 1834, Dr. Ezekiel Skinner, 
 father of the missionary, went to reside in Li- 
 beria. He had been a physician, and also a 
 minister in Connecticut, and now emigrated 
 to Liberia from motives of philanthropy to- 
 wards the race for whose interests his son had 
 sacrificed his life. This gentleman was sub- 
 sequently chosen governor, and exerted both 
 his personal and official influence in favor of 
 the mission and the spiritual objects it was in- 
 tended to promote. 
 
 In 1835 Rev. W. G. Crocker and Rev. W. 
 Myine oflered themselves to the Board, and 
 
 were appointed missionaries to Africa. Their 
 proposal was a noble sacrifice, which the man- 
 agers, though they did not feel at liberty to 
 solicit it, yet were unwilling to decline. They 
 were persons of education and of high qualifi- 
 cations for the service to which they devoted 
 themselves. They sailed from Philadelphia 
 on the 11th of July, 1835, and arrived after a 
 brief passage, at Monrovia, and immediately 
 repaired to Millsburg, a town in the vicinity, 
 in order to go through with the process of 
 acclimation. They were soon all attacked with 
 the fever of the coast, which terminated the 
 life of Mrs. Mylne, the only lady of the com- 
 pany. Mr. Mylne and Mr. Crocker, though 
 with reduced strength, were soon able to enter 
 upon their labors as missionaries, and for this 
 purpose they selected, with the advice of Dr. 
 Skinner, Edina as the place of their residence. 
 This was a settlement of the Colonization So- 
 cieties of Pennsylvania and New York, at the 
 mouth of the Mecklin river, opposite Bassa 
 Cove, the principal trading place of the Bassa 
 tribe, a numerous people whose language was 
 widely spoken along the coast and in the in- 
 terior. They began to acquire the language 
 with the aid of a young colonist who could 
 speak both Bassa and English. They iffade 
 themselves acquainted with the people of the 
 country by several excursions into the interior, 
 and at the same time preached and established 
 schools among the emigrant colonists both at 
 Bassa Cove and Edina. At the former place 
 a house of worship was erected by funds which 
 they collected, and during the year 1836 six- 
 teen persons were baptized and added to the 
 church of which Mr. Mylne was temporarily 
 the pastor. 
 
 During the same period, also, Mr. Crocker 
 was able so far to master the language as to 
 prepare a spelling-book and small vocabulary 
 of words and phrases ; to which was also ap- 
 pended a brief outline of the facts of divine 
 revelation. These were printed in December, 
 1836, and contributed very perceptibly to the 
 progress of the schools and to the general intel- 
 ligence of the tribe. It was not till June, 1837, 
 that the mission buildings at Edina were ready 
 to be occupied, and at this time the missiona- 
 ries, who had sufiered repeatedly from attacks 
 of disease, established themselves there and 
 commenced their work more immediately 
 among the native population. They had also 
 frequently visited a district up the river, whose 
 chief manifested so great interest in their 
 labors, that in October, 1837, Mr. Crocker 
 took up his residence at Madebli, the princi- 
 pal village of the district. The chief's name 
 was Sante Will, and he claimed to be an im- 
 portant patron of the mission, and was the 
 first to entrust his sons to the care of the mis- 
 sionaries. The number of children now sent 
 to the school at Edina was quite as large as 
 could be provided for, and many of them were 
 sons of th« principal chiefs among the Bassas ; 
 
88 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 the son of kinjf Kobor luinjr the most promi 
 ncnt. both for intelligonco and for excollencc 
 cf character. 
 
 The mission at Ediiia wrw now ftilly C8tab- 
 lished, but it« heroic comhietoro, though tho,y 
 appear to have taken a nu).st hopeful view of 
 their condition and pr<)spect8, yet found tiieni- 
 8plve« in the midst ()f igiuu-anee and stupidity, 
 of degrading supei*stitions and brutal wrongs, 
 such as could scarcely have been found in any 
 other portion of the world. The coloninls in 
 the neighboring settlenu'nt.s often presented 
 an example and exerted an intluence nio.st un- 
 fri(>ndly to the interests of the mission ; while 
 the nativcij of the coast were so debjised by 
 barbarian piussions, and so brutalized by siiper- 
 stitions, lus hardly to be capable of conntre- 
 hen«ling spiritual truth. In addition to this, 
 thev were near the marts in which the horricl 
 tralVic in slaves wius constantly carried on, in 
 many instances by the very persons to whom 
 they were engaged in preacliing the gosi)el. 
 They, however, were not dishearteiu'd, and 
 even prei)ar(Hl to extend the iiitluence of the 
 mission to other tribes, both on the coast and 
 in the interior. 
 
 I*. January, 1838, this mi.saion was strength- 
 ened by the arrival of Rev. Ivory Clarke and 
 his wife, who, so soon as they had recovered 
 from the acclimating fever — which with them 
 wa.s unusually mild — entered upon the studv 
 of the language and the performanct! of such 
 labors jus their inex^)erience would admit. Th(> 
 prospects of the mission were brightened i)y 
 this accwssion, but only for a brief sea.son ; for 
 Mr. Mylne, who had siillered from repeatcid 
 fevers, in the following May wjih obliged to 
 return to the United States, and with a consti- 
 tution hopelessly shattered, to withdraw from 
 the service of the IJoard. The station at Edina 
 was now committcid to the care of Mr. ( llarke, 
 assisted by two of the emigrant colonists ; 
 while Mr. Crocker still dwelt at Madcjbli, en- 
 gaged in preaching, teaching in the schools, 
 and tran.slating tlu; Scriptures ; in the hitter 
 of wiiich \\v wius assisted by tlu^ young ])rin('(! 
 alrea<ly mentioned, the son of king Kober, the 
 great chief of the Haasas. In Heptember, 1 H.'li), 
 the mission welcomed to Kdina, Mi.ss Itizpah 
 Warren, a lady who had been annointed by 
 the Board a missionary teacher, harly in the 
 following 8umuu?r she was married to Jiev. \V. 
 G. Crocker, and went to reside with him at 
 the village of ^fadebli, where she was soon 
 attacked by the tierce fever of the climate and 
 died in eight davs, on the 28th of August, 
 1840. Mr. Crocker was iirst attacked, but 
 recovering from the imnuMliate violence of the 
 disease, he wiw able, after the d(!ath of his 
 wife, to escape to Cape l*alnuus, and thus to 
 prolong his life by a chang(! of climate. 'I'hus 
 cnfe(!bled by disea.se and <lepressed by sorrow, 
 he retm-ned to Madebli in October, and again 
 entered upon the lal)ors of the mission. Karly 
 in 1840, Messrs. Alfred A. Con.staiitinc and 
 
 Josejdi I'^iehling oflered themselves to the 
 Hoard lus missionarii's either to the western 
 coast or to the interior of Africa. An imjjn's- 
 sion at that tinu^ prevailed that the clinnite of 
 tlu^ interior might be found less injurious to 
 iMU'opean constitutions than lhati>f the coast; 
 and tlu» ib-itish government was prej)aring an 
 expedition to luscend the; Niger for the purpose 
 of intro<lueing among the tribes of the country 
 the arts and the commerce of Europe. Jn ac 
 cordanci! with this impression, and the hopes 
 which were inspired by the Niger cxj)edition, 
 the new missionaries were sj)eeially designated 
 by the nmnagci-s to the country lying uj)on 
 that river. They accordingly sailed with their 
 wives in SeptendKT, 18-10, and reached l'>(linu 
 on th(! .'Id of December; and here tliey deter- 
 mine<l to pass the neriod of tlu'ir acclimation, 
 and also to await tne results of the expedition 
 that wjus about to ascend the Niger. 
 
 The African fever soon seized them with its 
 accustomed violence, and within six weeks of 
 their arrival, both Mr. and Mrs. ]<Melding be- 
 came it« victims. Mr. atid Mrs. Const antine, 
 though they survived the fever, were wholly 
 luiable to engage; in the labors of tlu; mi.ssion. 
 They remained at Kdiiui, hoj)ing to regain 
 their health by nuiking excursions along tlu^ 
 coiust/, and in which they were also able to 
 extend their aenuuintance with the character 
 of its people. Meanwhile, the Jb-itish expedi- 
 tion made its disastrous i)as.sage up the Niger, 
 late in the summer of J 84 1. 'I'Ik; frightful 
 d(!strnction of hunum life which attended it, 
 and the reduced aiul disabled condition in 
 which it returned to tlu; coast, put an end to 
 the hones with whleh it hiid been undertaken, 
 of finding a nu)re salubrious climate! in the 
 interior. The design of establishing a branch 
 of the mission there was entirely abandoned. 
 Mr. Constantino, no longer able to (;ndure the 
 climate of Africa, retiu'ned with his wife to 
 America in June, 184*2, and soon after dis- 
 solved his coniKJction with tlu! Hoard. 
 
 Jn duly of the ))receding year, Mr. (Crocker, 
 in conse(|uenee of <lee,Iining health, had ro- 
 turned to the United States. Jl(! had left the 
 mission with the utmost reluctance, at what to 
 him was tin; period of it>< greatest interest and 
 promise. Much good laid been accomplislKul ; 
 schools had b(!en established, and W(!r(! largely 
 attended ; ])rejudices and sujwrstitions luul 
 b(!en ov<',rconi(! ; and more than all, the power (;f 
 tlu; gosfx'l had been disjjlayed in th(! conversion 
 of several of tlu; natives and a large nundxT of 
 theetnigrants. The; churches coniKK'.lcd with tlu- 
 mission were multiplied and enlarg(!d, anel their 
 m(!inbers had begun tf» appreciate th(;ir obli- 
 gations to spread the gosfx;' among those who 
 knew it not. A new station was also estab- 
 lishe<l at Hexley, a little town on the M(!cklin, 
 six miles from I'idina ; and a })rinting im'MH 
 had been received, and a [)rinter only was 
 want,ed in order to put to ])ress se^veral por- 
 tions of the New Testament, and other volunu^s 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 89 
 
 which the missionaries had prepared in the 
 Bassa language. Mr. Crocker, in hastening 
 away, as he felt obliged to do in order to save 
 the remnant of his enfeebled constitution, was 
 compelled to abandon all these interests and 
 prospects, over which he had long watched 
 with the fondest care. After his departure, 
 the entire charge of the mission devolved upon 
 Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who had under their 
 direction three or four assistants employed 
 either as teachers or preachers. The press was 
 set in operation in September, 1842, under the 
 superintendence of a printer olDtained from the 
 cftlony, and several books were printed for the 
 schools, and also for circulation among the few 
 who could read. Two schools were maintain- 
 ed, one at Edina and one at Bexley, contain- 
 ing, together, about 90 pupils, of whom 55 
 were natives. Companies were also assembled 
 at both the stations on the Sabbath, and often 
 on several evenings during the week, for in- 
 struction in the doctrines of the Bible and of 
 Christian morals. An out-station was estab- 
 lished at Duawi's town, a large village 30 or 
 40 miles in the interior, at which the chief 
 promised to build a^chool-house, and to sup- 
 port a teacher, if Mr. Clarke would provide 
 one. The school was begun by a young native, 
 who had for several years been under the in- 
 struction of the missionaries. 
 
 Mr. Crocker, on reaching the United States, 
 abandoned all hope of ever returning to the 
 mission, so shattered did his constitution ap- 
 
 Eear to have become. He however soon betook 
 imself to the South, and after a residence of 
 several months in a more friendly climate, he 
 found himself so far restored that he again 
 presented himself to the Board and asked to 
 be sent back to his place in the mission which 
 he had loved so well. His proposal was gladly 
 accepted, and he sailed from IBoston, January 
 1, 1844, in company with Mrs. Crocker, he 
 having been married a little time before to 
 Miss Mary B. Chadbourne, of Newburyport. 
 He reached the coast on the 24th of February, 
 apparently in excellent health ; but on the sec- 
 ond day after his arrival, while engaged in the 
 services of the pulpit at Monrovia, he was 
 fatally seized with a violent hermorrhage of 
 the stomach, and died after an illness of two 
 days. The fall of this rare missionary, in a 
 manner thus unexpected, seemed to blight the 
 prospects of the mission and almost to extin- 
 guish the hopes of its friends. Scarcely had 
 the intelligence of his return been spread along 
 the coast v/hen the tidings of his death carried 
 mourning to every village and almost every 
 dwelling. He was a missionary of truly apos- 
 tolic stamp, and his name deserves to be en- 
 rolled among the foremost of the heroic men 
 who in different- ages of the church have braved 
 every peril and at length sacrificed life itself 
 for the benefit of the benighted children 
 of Africa, 
 Mrs. Crocker, thus early widowed on the 
 
 desolate shore of a distant continent, attached 
 herself to the family of Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, 
 at Edina, and immediately set about prepar- 
 ing for the labors of the mission, on which she 
 was soon able to enter. In January, 1845, the 
 principal station was removed from Edina to 
 Bexley, a locality deemed more favorable to 
 health and nearer to the Bassa people ; but a 
 subordinate station was still maintained at 
 Edina and new out-stations were commenced 
 at Zuzo and at Little Bassa, the latter under 
 the charge of the young Chief Kong Kober, 
 or as he now chose to style himself Lewis 
 Kong Crocker, in honor of his lamented teach- 
 er. At these several stations the assistants, 
 under the guidance of the missionary and of- 
 ten associated with him, preached the Gospel 
 to the people. The ladias of the mission were 
 engaged in schools, while Mr. Clarke employed 
 himself as much as possible in translating the 
 Scriptures, and preparing books for instructing 
 the natives in useful and religious knowledge. 
 He compiled a dictionary of the Bassa lan- 
 guage, and translated the gospels and some of 
 the epistles of the New Testament, which by 
 the close of 1846 were ready for the press ; 
 but which appear never to have been pub- 
 lished. 
 
 The health of Mrs. Crocker was rapidly 
 declining, and after one or two unavailing voy- 
 ages along the coast she was obliged to aban- 
 don the mission and return to this country. 
 Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who had generally been 
 blessed with better health than their associates, 
 now began to experience the injurious effects 
 of that pestilential climate. Mr. Clarke had 
 often represented the condition of the mission, 
 and appealed in the most earnest manner for 
 its relief, but none had offered themselves for 
 the perilous service, and the solitary mission- 
 ary, fearing that if he went away, all would bo 
 lost, determined to remain at his post until his 
 ability to labor was entirely exhausted. He 
 carried forward the work of translating the 
 Scriptures and preparing books ; he increased 
 the number of the schools, and perfected their 
 organization, and in all the villages of the 
 tribe he preached the gospel amd urged the 
 people to repent and be converted. These lar 
 bors were attended with most beneficial results. 
 The morals and manners of the people were 
 greatly improved — all the interests of civiliza- 
 tion were promoted, and many of the natives 
 in the villages where the missionary had 
 preached, embraced the Gospel and were bap- 
 tized in accordance with its requirements. 
 But the life of the missionary was rapidly 
 wearing away ,• yet, though repeatedly urged 
 by the Executive Committee to return to the 
 United States, he lingered at his post in the 
 hope that some one would at length come to 
 take his place. The hope was constantly defer- 
 red, and without its being realized he was pros- 
 trated by disease, and compelled to leave the 
 mission, in April, 1848. He died after a few 
 
00 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 days, at sea, on his passage to America, on the 
 26th of the same month. 
 
 Thus terminated another period of effort 
 and trial, of hope and of disappointment for 
 the Bassa people— a worthy succession of noble- 
 hearted men haJ laid down their lives in the 
 service of the mission till now none were left 
 to carry forward the plans which had been 
 formed and the labors which had been begun. 
 Mrs. Crocker and Mrs. Clarke of necessity re- 
 mained in the United States, and the interests of 
 the mission were committed wholly to the care 
 of native assistants. The station at Bexley 
 was placed under the charge of llev. Jacob 
 Yonbrunn, assisted by two teachers, while that 
 at Little Bassa was superintended by Lewis 
 Kong Crocker. The schools at both were main- 
 tained, and were well attended. Public worship 
 was also held on the Sabbath, and each year 
 witnessed some accessions to the native church. 
 The assistants proved themselves to be men of 
 fidelity and discretion, but the mission, as was 
 to be anticipated, was shorn of its energy by 
 the bereavements it had sustained. 
 
 After many unsuccessful attempts by the 
 Board to revive the mission. Rev. Messrs. J. 
 S. Goodman and H. B. Shermer, were ap- 
 pointed for this pui-pose, and sailed with their 
 families and Mrs. Crocker, from Norfolk, Va., 
 November 27, 1852. They reached Bexley 
 on the 15th of the following January, in ex- 
 cellent health, and were welcomed by the na- 
 tive assistants and the Christian disciples with 
 enthusiastic delight. They found that the pro- 
 perty of the mission had. been carefully pre- 
 served by the assistants ; that the schools and 
 the public worship, on the Sabbath, were still 
 well sustained, and that the persons who had 
 represented the Board, during an interval of 
 more than four years, had commanded the con- 
 fidence and respect of their countrymen. Mrs. 
 Crocker immediately put in requisition her 
 previous attainments in the language and 
 knowledge of the people, in reorganizing the 
 mission, and the other members entered upon 
 such labors as their circumstances would per- 
 mit. 
 
 But the period of prosperity was again des- 
 tined to be short, and as before, so now again, 
 the little missionary band was soon to be in- 
 vaded by death, and to be bereft of more than 
 half its members within a year of their arrival 
 in the country. Mrs. Shermer died at Bexley 
 in September, 1853, and Mrs. Crocker at Mon- 
 rovia, in November of the same year. Mr. 
 Shermer was so reduced by repeated attacks 
 of disease that he was soon obliged to return 
 to the United States. Mr. and Mrs. Goodman 
 are now the only missionaries remaining to oc- 
 cupy the stations, and prosecute the labors of 
 the mission, and the health even of these has 
 begun to yield beneath the noxious climate 
 that perpetually reigns along that pestilential 
 coast. — See Professor GammelVs History of Am. 
 Baptist Missions. — Pkof. "W. Gammell. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 MisHionaries aud 
 Assistants. 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 c 
 s 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Minis! Lay Teachers, 
 terH. 1 &c. 
 
 Scholars. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 •E 
 
 e 
 < 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 American. 
 
 i 
 
 rt 
 5« 
 
 
 1, 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 4J 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Bexley ) 
 
 Little Baasa/ 
 
 1842 
 1845 
 
 ¥\ 
 
 ^|. 
 
 " 
 
 31 |, 2 
 
 43 
 
 ToUl.... 
 
 VI 
 
 2 1 2 1171 ai 1 12 
 
 43 
 
 American Presbyterian MissiONs.-The mis- 
 sions of the Board of Missions of the General 
 Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in the 
 United States, (0. S.) in Africa are found in 
 Liberia, — at Monrovia, Sinoe, Kentucky, and 
 Settra Kroo ; and near the Equator, on the 
 island of Corisco. These are two distinct mis- 
 sionary fields, distant from each other more 
 than a thousand miles. Each has its own fea- 
 tures of interest, and both are highly impor- 
 tant spheras of Christian benevolence. 
 
 The mission to Liberia was commenced in 
 1832, but has been repeatedly suspended, on 
 account of the death or the return to this 
 country of the missionaries. The Rev. Messrs. 
 John B. Pinney and Joseph Barr were the 
 brethren first appointed to this field. Mr. Barr 
 was called suddenly to his rest by an attack 
 of cholera in Richmond, Ya., while on his way 
 to embark for Africa. His removal was a se- 
 rious loss, as he was a man qualified by nature 
 and grace for eminent usefulness. 
 
 Mr. Pinney proceeded alone on his mission, 
 and arrived at Monrovia, in February, 1833. 
 After a few months spent in making the requi- 
 site inquiries and arrangements, he returned on 
 a visit to this country to confer with the Com- 
 mittee concerning the plans of the mission, 
 and to enlist recruits for its service. Previous 
 to his return, two brethren had been accepted 
 as missionaries for this field ; and in Novem- 
 ber the missionary company, consisting of the 
 Rev. Messrs. Pinney, Laird and Cloud, with 
 Mrs. Laird, and Mr. James Temple, a colored 
 young man, who was a candidate for the min- 
 istry, embarked at Norfolk for Liberia. Mr. 
 and Mrs. Laird and Mr. Cloud were called to 
 their rest within a few months after their arri- 
 val at Monrovia, leaving a memorial of 
 piety singularly pure and devoted. Mr. Tem- 
 ple returned to the United States, and Mr. 
 Pinney was again left alone in the mission. 
 For a time he discharged the duties of Gov- 
 ernor of the colony with great benefit to all its 
 interests ; but withdrawing from this post as 
 soon as it was practicable for him to resigi: 
 its duties, he resumed his missionary labors. 
 Having been joined in September, 18.34, by 
 Mr. J. F. C. Finley, Mr. Pinney had a house 
 built for the use of the mission on a small 
 farm, at Millsburgh, a few miles from Moiu-o- 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 91 
 
 via. One or t^^o colored assistants were en- 
 gaged as teachers for schools among the 
 natives ; and Mr. E. Tytler, a colored man and 
 a licensed preacher, was employed among the 
 Bassas, a native trilDC, at a station selected by 
 Mr. Pinney on the St. Johns, eighteen miles 
 from the sea. 
 
 The health of Messrs. Pinney and Finley 
 having given way, they were compelled to re- 
 turn to this country in 1835. Mr. Tytler con- 
 ducted a small school for two or three years 
 longer among the Bassas, but no very encour- 
 aging results appear to have followed his la- 
 bors. The mission was now virtually sus- 
 pended. 
 
 Considerable hesitation was felt about re- 
 suming the work of missions in Africa. The 
 loss of several valuable lives, and the failure of 
 the health of other brethren, proved extremely 
 discouraging to many persons. Yet others 
 were clear in their convictions that the Church 
 ought not to abandon this missionary field. 
 The door was open, and all things invited the 
 labors of the servants of Christ, with the 
 exception of the deleterious climate. To 
 guard against this, it was thought that a more 
 healthy station could be found than those pre- 
 viously occupied, and it was considered expe^ 
 dient for missionaries to return after a few 
 years to their native country, on a visit for the 
 sake of health. Brethren of approved quali- 
 fications had offered themselves specially for 
 this field. It appeared therefore to be the 
 duty of the Board to make another effort to 
 establish this mission. 
 
 Accordingly in 1839, the Eev. Oren K. 
 Canfield and Mr. Jonathan P. Alward, with 
 Mr. Pinney, the pioneer of the mission, made 
 an exploring vi^it along the coast for nearly a 
 hundred and fifty miles, during which they 
 were led to select a station among the Kroo 
 people, about half-way between Cape Palmas 
 and Moiu'ovia. An interesting account of 
 the Kroos is given in the annual report of the 
 Board for 1840. They are described as the 
 most intelligent and enterprising of the na- 
 tives on the western coast, having farms in a 
 high state of cultivation, and always opposed 
 to the slave-trade. Their distinctive name is 
 probably derived from the fact that many of 
 them are empjoyed as crcAvs on board of trad- 
 ing-vessels. This leads them to visit various 
 parts of the coast, although they commonly re- 
 turn to their own country after a few years 
 spent in this service. 
 
 The return of African fever soon forbade Mr, 
 Pinney's attempt to resume his missionary la- 
 bors ; but the other brethren enjoyed good 
 health, and after completing their exploration, 
 they returned home, were married, and Mr. Al- 
 ward was ordained ; and then they proceeded, 
 in February, 1841, to their chosen work, with 
 many hopes of a useful if not a long life. 
 These hopes were destined to be disappointed. 
 Mr. Alward was called to his rest in the fol- 
 
 lowing April, and Mr. Canfield in May of the 
 next year. They were both men of devoted 
 piety, and were qualified to be eminently use- 
 ful in the missionary work. Their bereaved 
 companions returned to their friends in this 
 country ; and for a month the station was un- 
 der the charge of a colored female teacher, 
 who had accompanied Messrs. Canfield and 
 Alward. The Rev. Eobert W. Sawyer and his 
 wife, who had arrived at Monrovia in Decem- 
 ber, 1841, then succeeded the brethren whom 
 they had hoped to join at Settra Kroo ; but 
 in December, 1843, Mr. Sawyer was called to 
 join them in the Saviour's presence. He was 
 a man worthy to be their associate, both in 
 the church on earth and in heaven. Previous 
 to his death, schools had been established, and 
 at one time thirty boys and six girls were 
 boarded and lodged on the mission premises, 
 enjoying the benefits of Christian instruction 
 and example. 
 
 In the year 1842, three colored ministers be- 
 came connected with the mission. One of 
 these, the Rev. James Eden, had been for some 
 years at Monrovia, where he was pastor of the 
 Presbyterian church. This station he contin- 
 ued to occupy until his peaceful death, at an 
 advanced age, in 1846. The Rev. Thomas 
 Wilson and the Rev. James M. Priest reached 
 Monrovia in 1842. Mr. Wilson's station was 
 at Sinou, where, however, he was not permit- 
 ted long to labor, having been called to his re- 
 ward in 1846. He was a man of energy, and 
 his talents and piety gave promise of no ordi- 
 nary usefulness. Mr. Priest was at first sta- 
 tioned at Settra Kroo, but removed to the sta- 
 tion at Sinou in 1846, where he has been much 
 encouraged in his work. Mr. Washington 
 McDonough, a colored teacher, was sent out 
 also in 1842, and he has continued to be con- 
 nected with a station among the Kroos until 
 the present time. 
 
 At Settra Kroo the education of native 
 youth continued to engage the attention of 
 Mrs. Sawyer, who with great devotedness had 
 remained at her post, although she was the 
 only white woman in sixty miles of the sta- 
 tion. She was assisted by Mr. McDonough, 
 and by Cecilia Yan Tyne, an excellent colored 
 teacher, until the return of the latter for health 
 in 1844. In the same year the Rev. James 
 M. Connelly joined the mission, with whom 
 Mrs, Sawyer was united in marriage in the fol- 
 lowing December. They continued at Settra 
 Kroo, engaged in faithful efforts for the con- 
 version of the people, but meeting with no 
 marked encouragement, until they were com- 
 pelled to return to this country by the failure 
 of health in 1850. Since that time the sta- 
 tion among the Kroos has been under the care 
 of Mr. McDonougb ; a small school has been 
 maintained, but no brighter days have been 
 witnessed. 
 
 In January, 1847, the Rev. Harrison W. 
 Ellis, a colored man, formerly a slave, who 
 
92 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN 
 
 with his family had been redeemed from bond- 
 age by Christian friends in the South, wiis 
 Bcut as a missionary to Monrovia. As he pos- 
 sessed considerable talent and energy, and nad 
 acquired more than ordinary learning for a 
 person so unfavorably situated, it was reasona- 
 ble to expect that his efforts to do good would 
 prove encouraging to those who had taken 
 such a kind and liberal interest in his welfare. 
 He was for some time minister of the church 
 in Monrovia, and gave some attention to a 
 school; but he is not now connected with 
 either. To the want of grace — more grace — 
 may be ascribed his not fulfilling the expecta- 
 tions of his friends ; but we would hope that 
 he may yet become a useful laborer in the 
 vineyard of the Lord. At Kentucky, a set- 
 tlement a few miles from Monrovia, Mr. H. 
 W. Erskine, a colored teacher and a licentiate 
 
 greacher, has been stationed since 1849, and 
 as met with much encouragement in his work. 
 About twenty members are connected with the 
 church at this station. Mr. B. V. 11. James, 
 another colored teacher, who had been for 
 some years under the patronage of a society 
 of ladies in New York for promoting edu- 
 cation in Africa, became connected, at the 
 instance of his former patrons, with the mis- 
 sion of the Board at Monrovia in 1849. He 
 has continued to be faithfully and successfully 
 employed in a large school at that place. 
 
 The llev. David A. Wilson and his wife 
 arrived at Monrovia in July, 1850. Mr. Wil- 
 son joined this mission with a special view to 
 the work of Christian education, and he has 
 had the charge of the Alexander High School, 
 an academy established by the Board in 1849. 
 The number of scholars has never been large, 
 but their progress in study has evinced capa- 
 city to make respectable acquirements. This 
 institution, it is hoped, will train up many 
 young men for the Church and the State, It 
 may form the germ of a college in future years. 
 Besides teaching in this academy, Mr. Wilson 
 pr(;aches to the church, at present without a 
 pastor. His work is one of vital importance 
 to Liberia. 
 
 The repeated bereavements of the mission 
 on the Liberia coast had led to the inquiry 
 whether a more healthy location could not be 
 discovered elsewhere; and the comparative 
 exemption from fever enjoyed by the mission- 
 aries of the American Board on the Gaboon 
 river, turned the attention of many to the re- 
 gion near the Equator. Accordingly, in 1849, 
 the Rev. Messrs. James L. Mackey and George 
 W. Simpson and their wives went out to form 
 a new mission in this part of the African field. 
 They were greatly aided in their inquiries by 
 the counsels of the brethren connected with 
 the American Board, and particularly of the 
 Rev. J. Leighton Wilson, a respected minister 
 of our body, who had been long a missionary — 
 first at Cape Palmas and afterwards at the 
 Gaboon — and who is now one of the Secreta- 
 
 ries of the Board. After making full exami- 
 nation of various places, they were led to select 
 the island of Corisco as their station. This is 
 a small island, four miles long from north to 
 south, and about the same in breadth at the 
 south end, but at the north not exceeding a 
 mile — having a circumference of al^out tifteeii 
 miles, and an irregular surface, diversified willi 
 narrow valleys and steep hills of no great 
 height. It is fifty-five miles north of the 
 equator, and from fifteen to twenty miles from 
 the mainland. Its population is about 4,000, 
 and its situation, midway in the sea-line of the 
 Bay of Corisco, affords a ready access to peo- 
 ple of the same language, the Benga, who 
 live on the shores of the bay and on the 
 sea-coast. In this part of Africa there are no 
 roads, and journeys can be most conveniently 
 made in boats along the coast or on the rivers, 
 so that the situation of the missionaries on an 
 island is rather an advantage than a hindrance 
 to their intercourse with the natives. The 
 chief inducement, however, for choosing Co- 
 risco as the site of the mission, was the hope 
 that it would prove a healthy place. It con- 
 tains few local causes of disease, while it is 
 removed from the malaria of the coast on the 
 mainland, and enjoys the atmosphere of the 
 sea. 
 
 Thus far the missionaries have enjoyed 
 remarkable health for foreigners in Africa. 
 Mrs. Mackey was early called to her rest by a 
 disease not connected with her new abode. 
 Mr. and Mrs. Simpson, in the mysterious prov- 
 idence of God, were lost at sea with all on 
 board the ship except a native sailor, their 
 vessel having been struck by a typhoon. This 
 sad event occurred in April, 1851, causing 
 great sorrow to the friends of this new mis- 
 sion. The other missionaries — Mr. Mackey, 
 and Miss Sweeny, who embarked for Corisco in 
 August, 1851, and was married to Mr. Mackey 
 in 1852, and the Rev. George McQueen, Jr., 
 who joined the mission in the same year — have 
 all enjoyed good health. The Rev. Messrs. 
 Edwin T. Williams and William Clemens and 
 their wives sailed for Corisco in August, 1853. 
 
 Small schools for boys and girls have been 
 opened, religious worship has been conducted 
 on the Lord's-day, and Mr. Mackey has exerted 
 a happy influence over the natives by his medi- 
 cal skill. Already many of their superstitious 
 practices have been abandoned, the Sabbath 
 is in some degree honored, and the influence 
 of the mission is visible in the improved con- 
 duct of the people. The principal employment 
 of the missionaries, however, has been the 
 acquisition of the native language. Some 
 interesting tours have been made on the main- 
 land, one extending nearly one hundred and 
 fifty miles into the interior, which have tended 
 to confirm the hope that this mission will afford 
 a door of entrance to a very large population. 
 Its location on an island may remind the reader 
 of the celebrated island of lona, on the borders 
 
 I 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN 
 
 98 
 
 of Scotland — the home of a Presbyterian and 
 missionary clergy in the sixth century. May 
 Corisco become to Africa what lona was to 
 
 Great Britain, Ireland, and many parts of the 
 continent of Europe! — Lowrie's Manual of 
 Missions. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 inssioNs. 
 
 NAMES OF STA- 
 TIONS. 
 
 d 
 
 Missionaries and Assistants. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 Scholars. 
 
 mnis- 
 ters. 
 
 Lay Teachers 
 and others. 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 American. 
 
 Boarding. 
 
 Day. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 LIBERIA . ... 
 
 Monrovia 
 
 1842 
 1850 
 1847 
 1841 
 1850 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 3 
 
 
 40 
 33 
 41 
 
 4 
 "9 
 
 12 
 
 78 
 
 18 
 28 
 
 6 
 
 78 
 28 
 
 18 
 55 
 
 KROO PEOPLE, 
 
 NEAR THE EQUATOR 
 
 
 Sinoe 
 
 
 
 
 
 Total 1 
 
 •t 
 
 M 
 
 6 
 
 
 114 
 
 . 
 
 12 
 
 148 
 
 6 
 
 179 
 
 American Board.— On the Sabbath evening 
 following the meeting of the Board in 1833, 
 Eev. John Leighton Wilson, their first mission- 
 ary to Western Africa, received his instructions, 
 in the presence of a numerous audience, in the 
 First Presbyterian church in Philadelphia; 
 and on the 24th of November following, he 
 embarked at Baltimore, in company with Mr. 
 Stephen R. Wyncoop, to explore his future 
 field of labor. After examining the coast from 
 Grand Cape Mount to Cape Palmas, a distance 
 of 300 miles, they fixed on Cape Palmas as the 
 site of the mission, and returned to this coun- 
 try, arriving at New York, April 13, 1834. 
 In the commencement of this mission, the com- 
 mittee instructed their missionaries to have a 
 primary regard to the preservation of health 
 and life, and to extend their operations gradu- 
 ally, as their knowledge, experience, ability, 
 and the blessing of God should enable them 
 to do so. The object of this mission was, to 
 prepare the way for an extensive system of op- 
 erations among the populous nations of West- 
 ern Africa, 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Wilson, with a colored female, 
 embarked from New York, Nov. 4, 1834, and 
 arrived at Cape Palmas the following month, 
 where they were received by the native popu- 
 lation with joyful acclamations. The frame 
 house, which Mr. Wilson had carried out with 
 him on his former visit, he found erected on 
 the spot he had selected, and furnished. They 
 were subjected, during their acclimation, to 
 considerable suffering from fever, Mrs. W. hav- 
 ing had two attacks, and Mr. W. three, the 
 last of which brought him to the borders of 
 the grave. After their recovery, they enjoyed 
 good health. Schools were commenced, and 
 by the following year, Mr. W. had prepared a 
 small elementary book in the native language. 
 
 On the 25th of December, 1836, Rev. David 
 White and his wife, and Mr. James, a colored 
 man, and a printer, arrived, as a reinforcement. 
 In about a month after their arrival, Mr. and 
 Mrs. White both died of fever ; but they ex- 
 pressed no regret, in the prospect of death, that 
 they had devoted themselves to Africa. Mr. 
 
 and Mrs. Wilson were prosecuting their labors, 
 with good health, comfort, and success. During 
 the year, Mr. W. made three tours of explora- 
 tion in the interior, performing his journeys 
 mostly on foot. Their boarding school num- 
 bered 50, one-fourth of whom were females. 
 One boy gave evidence of piety, and others 
 were inquiring. In April, there were four or 
 five candidates for admission to the church. In 
 1837, Mr. Wilson succeeded, by his judicious 
 interposition and influence, in suppressing a 
 tumultuous rise of the native population against 
 the colonists, before it resulted in bloodshed. 
 And about this time, he commenced preaching 
 to a native congregation of about 600. But 
 this mission, in common with otners, suffered 
 from the crisis, which occasioned a reduction 
 of the appropriations to the missions. Two 
 of the day schools, and one-third of the board- 
 ing scholars in the seminary, were dismissed. 
 The effect of this was disastrous upon the mis- 
 sion, the natives not being able to appreciate 
 the cause. 
 
 Dr. A. E. Wilson having left the mission in 
 South Africa, on account of the war between 
 Dingaan and the Dutch boers, arrived with 
 his wife at Cape Palmas, Oct. 4, 1839. Their 
 attacks of fever, in the process of acclimating, 
 were slight, and the mission generally enjoyed 
 good health. Two native youths were admit- 
 ted to the church during the year, and others 
 were in an inquiring state of mind. Early in 
 September, 1840, Dr. and Mrs. Wilson com- 
 menced a new station at Fishtown, ten or 
 twelve miles from Fair Hope, the original and 
 principal station. There were, also, three out- 
 stations, and six preaching places connected' 
 with the mission. The church numbered 23, 
 12 of whom were natives. Religious knowl- 
 edge was increasing, and many had discarded 
 their greegrees. Yet, there was great apathy 
 on the subject of religion. On the 13th of 
 October, 1841, Dr. A. E. Wilson died of an 
 epidemic dysentery, meeting death with much 
 cheerfulness and joy. Stephen Williams, also, 
 a native African, employed as an interpreter, 
 died of the same disease, and in a similar state 
 
94 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 of mind. Mrs. Wilson removed to Fair Hope, 
 and took charge of the female department of 
 the seraiuarv. On tJie 3d of February, 1842, 
 Ri'v. Messrs* Wallcer and Griswold, with Mrs. 
 Wiilker, joined the mission at Cape Pahnas. 
 Up to this time, the amount of printing in the 
 native lanjruage, at this mission, was 2,252,132 
 pages. Mrs. Walker died of fever, May 2, 
 1842, her chief concern being lest her death 
 should deter others from coming to the field. 
 
 But this mission experienced no small em- 
 barrassment, from being situated within the 
 bounds of the colony. The native teachers 
 and pupils, though from distinct tribes, and 
 owing no fealty to the colony, were required 
 to do military duty ; and it became obvious 
 that the leading object of the colony, and that 
 of the mission, in respect to the natives of 
 Africa, were far from being the same. There 
 was also too much reason to believe that the 
 colonists, as a body, regarded the missionaries 
 and their enterprise with jealousy and ill-will. 
 And, as it never entered into the plan of the 
 West African mission that its principal oper- 
 ations should long be at Cape Palmas, it was 
 determined to seek a location elsewhere ; and, 
 accordingly, Messrs. Wilson and Griswold, on 
 the 17th of May, commenced a voyage east- 
 ward, with this object in view ; and, after 
 touching at a number of points, fixed on a 
 location at the mouth of the Gaboon River, 
 which seemed decidedly more favorable than 
 any other they had seen. Though so near the 
 equator, the climate at the Gaboon is more 
 salubrious than at Cape Palmas. 
 
 The chiefs received them in a friendly man- 
 ner, and they selected a site about eight miles 
 from the mouth of the river, and 20 north of 
 the equator. As soon as the necessary arrange- 
 ments could be made, the mission was removed 
 to this place, the stations at Fishtown and 
 Bocktown being transferred to the Episcopal 
 Missionary Society. At the new station, the 
 first school was opened in July, 1842, with 15 
 pupils; and in the course of a year, three 
 schools were established, with 50 pupils, and 
 public worship was held at the station, and at 
 three other towns, within the distance of three 
 miles, where the people assembled in good 
 numbers. They appeared friendly, and one 
 head man renounced his greegrees in presence 
 of the people of his town, and had them sunk 
 in the river. They rested from labor on the 
 Sabbath, and such was their regard for the 
 commandment that they refused to furnish 
 wood for a British war steamer on that day. 
 
 On the 23d of August, 1843, Mr. Griswold 
 and Mrs. M. H. Wilson were united in mar- 
 riage. On the 1st of January, 1844, Rev. 
 Messrs. Campbell and Bushnell sailed from 
 Boston for this mission, and arrived at Cape 
 Palmas on the 9th of March, where they were 
 both taken with the acclimating fever, of 
 which Mr. Campbell died. Near the close of 
 1843, Mr. Griswold commenced a new station 
 
 at Oshunga, Prince Glass's town, where a 
 boarding-school for girls was opened with six 
 pupils. The people were anxious for schools, 
 and at King Duka's town, had built a school-' 
 house and residence for the teacher. This 
 people had made considerable advances in 
 civilization. 
 
 July 21, 1843, the members of the church 
 who had removed from Cape Palmas, with a few 
 others, met and organized themselves into a 
 church, adopted articles of faith, and elected 
 Mr. Wilson their pastor. On the 30th, B. B. 
 Wisner, a native of Cape Palmas, was admit- 
 ted to the church, and the Lord's Supper ad- 
 ministered for the first time. The church 
 consisted of fifteen members, of whom seven 
 were native Africans. July 14, 1844, Mr. 
 Griswold rested from his labors; and Mrs. 
 Griswold, whose health was suffering from the 
 climate, returned to the United States. 
 
 In July, 1845, Prince Glass's town was 
 bombarded by a French brig-of-war, and taken 
 possession of by armed men, the natives having 
 fled to " the bush." The missionaries were 
 exposed to great danger, both from cannon 
 balls and musket shot, which were scattered 
 profusely on their premises, and with apparent 
 design. After this, the French admiral spent 
 nearly three months at the Gaboon, without 
 having any intercourse with the mission ; but 
 in FebruaiT, 1846, the commander expressed 
 his regret that the mission premises had been 
 endangered ; and in the following summer, 
 Commodore Read, of the frigate United States, 
 arrived off the mouth of the river, and during 
 his stay, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson received much 
 kindness from him ; and he left a letter to the 
 French admiral, which was delivered to him 
 in September, and after that, they received the 
 most civil treatment from the French officers 
 and the local authorities. The Roman mis- 
 sionaries brought there by their ships of war, 
 did not appear to be doing much. 
 
 The Committee have adopted a rule, in re- 
 lation to this mission, similar to the one adopted 
 by the Church Missionary Society, allowing a 
 periodical return of the missionaries to their 
 native land, to recruit their health ; and in ac- 
 cordance with this rule, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson 
 visited this country in 1847. Their visit was 
 highly useful ; and in June of the following 
 year, they returned to their field of labor, with 
 the greatest possible cheerfulness, accompanied 
 by Rev. Messrs. Preston and Wheeler, and Mrs. 
 Preston, as a reinforcement. April 23, 1848, 
 Mrs. Walker departed this life, two months 
 after the birth of an infant. She never regret- 
 ted having gone to Africa. Early in the 
 morning of tlie day of her death, Mrs. Walker 
 sent for the he^ men in the towns, and they 
 came, and wept like children ; and nearly every 
 man, woman, and child came, feeling that they 
 were losing one of their best friends. She 
 was followed, the last of January, 1849, by 
 Mrs. Griswold, who was suddenly called home, 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 95 
 
 Bpeaking sweetly and confidingly of her Savior, j hilly and apparently salubrions ; and the way 
 in her lucid moments, and manifesting entire is open for missionary efforts among numerous 
 
 submission to His Avill. February 25, 1850 
 Mrs. Bushnell entered into peaceful rest, she 
 having returned from her visit to the United 
 States, though in a consumption, that she 
 might finish her course in the beloved field of 
 her missionary labor. 
 
 In 1849 and 1850, the mission was reinforced 
 by the arrival of Eev. Mr. Best and Dr. Ford, 
 the former about six months before the latter. 
 Mr. and Mrs. Preston, who had arrived in 
 
 1848, had commenced a new station among 
 the I3akali, about 25 miles above Baraka, in 
 
 ■ August, 1849. Messrs. Wilson and Bushnell 
 preached in Mpongwe, and Mr. Walker in 
 Mpongwe and Bakali ; and in these dialects, 
 the Gospel was preached in ninety villages, in 
 
 1849. Eleven members were received to the 
 church in that year. But polygamy, in its 
 lowest forms, was found to be a great hindrance 
 to the Gospel, and the evil was greatly aggra- 
 vated by the introduction of American rum, 
 which was exerting a most pernicious influence 
 along the coast. 
 
 Rev. Mr. Porter and his wife arrived as a 
 reinforcement, June 6, 1851 ; and early in the 
 following year, Messrs. Walker and Preston 
 returned to their field of labor. The Gospel 
 of St. John, in Mpongwe, translated by Mr. 
 Bushnell, was printed in New York, in 1852, 
 under his superintendance, while on a visit to 
 this country for his health. Mr. Wilson, being 
 on his periodical visit to this country, was de- 
 clared by physicians to be under the influence 
 of a chronic disease, unfitting him for a longer 
 residence at the Gaboon. He accordingly ac- 
 cepted the appointment of a secretaryship in 
 the General Assembly's Board of Missions. 
 The Committee, in their annual report for 
 1853, bear honorable testimony to his excel- 
 lence as a missionary, and express their deep 
 regret for the loss of his valuable services. 
 
 Early in 1851, the brethren at Baraka suf- 
 fered from an unusual prevalence of fever. 
 Mr. Porter, who had recently arrived, was called 
 away by means of it on the 6 th of July. He 
 died in the full faith and consolation of the 
 Gospel, and Mrs. Porter followed him on the 
 16th of the same month. Both of them said 
 that they did not regret having joined the mis- 
 sion, and hoped that their early death would 
 not deter others from entering the field. The 
 Committee say, in their report for 1853, that 
 the actual danger to life, as the Gaboon mission 
 is now conducted, is not greater there than in 
 many other missions, which awaken but little 
 apprehension. 
 
 The labors of this mission are directed to 
 three communities, each probably the repre- 
 sentatives of migrations from the interior : 
 the Mpongwes, Bakales, and Pangwes. _ The 
 last of these have but recently made their ap- 
 pearance. The country has been explored to 
 some distance in the interior, and found to be 
 
 friendly tribes ;. but 
 enter in and reap the harvest. The labors of 
 the mission have been, to a great extent, pre- 
 paratory ; and its direct results are not so 
 clearly seen, as they will probably be a few 
 years hence. 
 
 The report of the mission for 1853, repre- 
 sents the health of the missionaries to have 
 been generally good throughout the year. 
 And, though a spirit of opposition had begun 
 to manifest itself among those who do not like 
 the restraints of Christianity, yet, the truth 
 is making progress. The intercourse of the 
 missionaries with the people and with the gov- 
 ernment has been most friendly throughout the 
 year. But, owing to the diminished force of 
 the mission, they have been able to occupy but 
 two stations. 
 
 Number of stations, 
 Missionaries, 
 
 Physician, - - - 
 Female helpers, 
 Native helpers. 
 Church members. 
 Scholars in the schools, - 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 1 
 2 
 4 
 22 
 70 
 
 United Presbyterian Synod of Scotland. 
 — When the converted negroes of Jamaica 
 obtained their freedom, their thoughts were at 
 once directed to their heathen friends in Africa. 
 Many said, " Wo must carry the gospel to 
 Africa." The missionaries constituting the 
 Jamaica Presbytery, representing the Scottish 
 Missionary Society, the United Secession 
 Church, and the Scotch Free Church, entered 
 fully into the feelings of the colored people 
 around them, and resolved to embody them in 
 action. Old Calabar was selected as their 
 field of labor, the King and chiefs having sent 
 a formal request that a mission might be com- 
 menced among them. The Secession Synod 
 having also sanctioned the movement. Rev. 
 Mr. Waddell was designated to kike charge of 
 the enterprise. He accordingly proceeded to 
 Scotland, and was soon followed by five others. 
 One of these was an Englishman, who had 
 lived eighteen years in Jamaica, a printer by 
 trade ; another was his wife, a colored woman ; 
 another was a negro lad, about sixteen years 
 of age ; the remaining two were both persons 
 of color. A merchant of Liverpool granted 
 the free use of a fine schooner, the Warree, to 
 the mission as long as she should be wanted ; 
 and he also subscribed £100 to keep her in a 
 sailing condition. 
 
 The mission sailed from Liverpool, January 
 6, 1846 ; and arrived at Fernando Po, April 
 3. They proceeded with as little delay as 
 practicable to Old Calabar, and were cordially 
 received by th,e natives. On the 6th of May 
 they opened a school in Duke Town, about 
 fifty miles from the mouth of Old Calabar 
 
96 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 Bivor, in a house of Kiug Eyamba. Every 
 thing seemed to bo propitious. 
 
 This mi^ou hus bci'U prosecuted with con- 
 siderable suceess. lu.lb.>3, it Imd three stations, 
 Roek Town, Duke Town, und Old Town. Its 
 prt)6pcetii oie becoming more and more favor- 
 ttble. A few have applied for baptism, but, at 
 the latest dates, none had been admitted to the 
 ordinance. The number of seholai-s in the 
 schools was about 200. There were connected 
 with this mission, in 1862, ten European agents, 
 including females, four of the number being 
 ordained missionaries. From the beginning 
 the missionaries have publicly preached the 
 word on the Sabbath, and already several atro- 
 cious customs have fallen before its influence, 
 among which is the use of the poisoned nut, 
 as a test of witchcraft. The missionaries have 
 made several exploring tours into the interior ; 
 and they say that these regions present a wide 
 field for missionary labor ; that they are easy 
 of access, by water communication on the 
 rivers ; and that the country becomes more 
 elevated, and the atmosphere purer and more 
 bracii\g, in proportion to the distance from the 
 coast. 
 
 Stations, 3 
 
 Missionaries, - - - - - - 4 
 
 European male assistants, - - - 1 
 
 Do. female, .... 5 
 African assistants, - - - - - 6 
 
 American Episcopal Mission. — The For- 
 eign Missionary Society of the Protestant 
 Episcopal Church in the United States, as 
 early as the year 1822, entertained the design 
 of establishing a mission in Western Africa, 
 and considerable sums were collected for the 
 purpose. But the design was frustrated 
 chiefly through the difliculty of obtaining suit- 
 able men, till 1834, when it was determined to 
 establish a school at Cape Palmas, and Mr. 
 James M. Thompson, secretary to the colonial 
 agent, with his wife, were appointed teachers ; 
 and the Maryland Colonization Society made 
 a grant of ^and, as a site for the mission, 
 about two miles from the town of Harper, on 
 the main government road leading to the Ca- 
 valla river. The situation is pleasant and sa- 
 lubrious, and well adapted to a manual labor 
 school. The work of preparation was imme- 
 diately commenced, the land was cleared, and 
 suitable buildings erected. 
 
 In March, 1836, Mr. and Mrs. Thompson 
 commenced a school in a small building, near 
 their residence in the town of Harper, with 20 
 to 30 scholars. In the summer of this year, 
 Mr. John Paine and Rev. L. B. Minor, of the 
 1'heological Seminary at Alexandria, Va., 
 were appointed to this mission. Kev. Thomas 
 S. Savage, M. D., who had the advantage of 
 several years' practice as a physician, preceded 
 them, in order to become acclimated and pre- 
 pare for their reception before their arrival. 
 Messrs. Minor and Payne, after spending some 
 
 time in presenting the cause to the churches, 
 and collecting funds, arrived at Ca]X3 Palmas, 
 on the 4th of July, 1837. They lonnd that 
 Mr. Thompson had made a good commence- 
 ment, having three acres of land under good 
 cultivation, with a small thatched house on the 
 premises, but still residing at Harper. 
 
 The Cape itself was at this time mostly oc- 
 cupied with houses belonging to the Agrincy, 
 and older colonists. Commencing with the 
 main land was a native town, of about 1,500 
 inhabitants. The houses or huts were con- 
 structed of narrow strips of boards, four or 
 five feet in height, three or four inches wide, 
 and half an inch thick, placed perpendicularly 
 in the ground, arranged in the form of a cir- 
 cle. On this is placed the roof, made of palm 
 leaves, running high up to a point, like a sugar- 
 loaf. This town had its grce-gree place, where 
 some sort of religious ceremonies were per- 
 formed, said to be addressed to the Devil. 
 
 March 4, 1837, Dr. Savage, with the mission 
 family, removed from the Cape, and took pos- 
 session of the mission house at Mount Vaughan, 
 as the station was named, after the foreign 
 secretary of the society. The missionary ope- 
 rations were formally opened on Easter day, 
 which was kept as a day of fasting, humilia- 
 tion and prayer. Mr. and Mrs. Payne, and 
 Mr. Minor, who arrived July 4, passed safely 
 through the acclimating fever. 
 
 Dr. Savage made several tours among the 
 native tribes, and found them friendly, and de- 
 sirous of instruction. It was supposed that, 
 within 50 miles, there were 70,000 accessible 
 to missionary effort ; all of whom belonged to 
 on% stock, and spoke dialects of the same lan- 
 guage, (Grebo.) 
 
 The care of the newly arrived missionaries, 
 during their acclimation, together with the re- 
 sponsibilities and labors of the mission, so af- 
 fected the health of Dr. Savage, as to make it 
 necessary for him to return to the United 
 States, which he did in June, 1838. But 
 he expressed the firm belief that, under dii- 
 ferent circumstances, his health would have 
 continued good. He did not regard the cli- 
 mate as fatal to the white man's health. 
 " With a moderate share of prudence," he says, 
 " we can live here, and enjoy good health." 
 
 In 1838, Mr. E. S. Byron, of Boston, was 
 sent out as a teacher. Dr. Savage having been 
 united in marriage with Mrs. Metcalf, of Fred- 
 ericksburg, Va., returned with his wife and 
 Mr. George A. Perkins and wife, missionary 
 teachers to Cape Palmas, where they arrived 
 on the 19th of January, 1839. Mrs. Savage 
 was removed by death on the 16th of April 
 following. 
 
 The mission was embarrassed by the jealous- 
 ies between the natives and the colonists : 
 the missionaries being identified with the lat- 
 ter, found it difficult to gain access to the na- 
 tives. This led them to the conclusion that, 
 in the selection of mission stations, they should 
 
I 
 
TJSltBRSITT; 
 
AFKICA, WESTERN. 
 
 97 
 
 disconnect themselves from the colonies, and 
 hold themselves neutral between the natives 
 and colonists. 
 
 Two unsuccessful attempts had been made 
 to establish a station at Garraway, a native 
 town about 30 miles to the windward of Cape 
 Palmas. It was opposed by the Bushmen, on 
 the ground that the effect of it would be to 
 stop the trade in rum. At the leeward, they 
 succeeded in establishing two out-stations, with 
 teachers in each. 
 
 Mr. Thompson, the colored teacher, who 
 commenced the mission, died of a protracted 
 and painful illness, which he bore without a 
 murmur, and departed in the exercise of a firm 
 hope and triumphant faith in the Redeemer. 
 Mr. Minor returned to the United States for 
 his health. On the 23d of January, 1840, he 
 was united in marriage to Miss Mary Stewart, 
 of Baltimore, and on the 15th of February, 
 they sailed for Africa, accompanied by Rev. 
 Joshua, Smith, who was sent out by the Board 
 to labor among the colonists. 
 
 This year, the mission commenced the forma- 
 tion of a native town, near the principal sta- 
 tion, to be composed of such native families as 
 were willing to abandon their superstitious and 
 idolatrous practices, and come under the influ- 
 ence of Christianity and civilization. In this 
 town, those educated at the mission afterwards 
 settled ; and it soon began to assume an ap- 
 pearance of civilization. 
 
 In 1839, three years from its commence- 
 ment, there were in connection with the mis- 
 sion, nine missionaries and teachers, three 
 stations, 70 native, children in schools, a 
 church of It members, and a population of 
 10,000 or 12,000, whom they were reaching 
 with their instructions. Rev. Dr. Savage was 
 rector of the Church at this station, by whom 
 two services were held on the Sabbath. A 
 Sunday school was held in the chapel for the 
 colonists, and another for the children and 
 other members of the mission ; and religious 
 services were regularly held at the out-stations 
 and native towns. 
 
 For some time previous to March, 1840, an 
 unusual seriousness had been observed at the 
 principal station, which continued to increase ; 
 and in April, nineteen appeared to give evi- 
 dence of a saving change. Many were inquir- 
 ing the way of life ; and at the station at 
 Cavalla, unwonted attention to the word was 
 manifested, and there was one case of deep 
 conviction. 
 
 In 1841, a new station was commenced by 
 Rev. Mr. Minor, at Taboo, on the coast, about 
 40 miles to the leeward, and beyond the bounds 
 of the colony, where the people expressed a 
 strong desire for a mission. The station at 
 Garraway was abandoned, and the teacher 
 removed to Rockbookah, the capital of the 
 Bahbas, whose chief had two sons in the 
 school. 
 
 The committee, in their report for 1842, 
 
 complain of the restrictions put upon the mis- 
 sion, by the colonial government, and of their 
 compulsory laws, requiring military duty of 
 the youth in the schools, as threatening the 
 mission with serious difficulties. 
 
 The year 1841 was a time of unusual sick- 
 ness, both among missionaries, colonists, and 
 natives, though less fatal than at some other 
 times. During this sickness, Mr. Smith, at 
 Cavalla, was roused eai'ly one morning by an 
 unusual noise, and on looking out, saw men, 
 women, and children, running towards the 
 woods, shouting and making various noises, 
 and when they seemed to reach the end of their 
 race, the report of two guns was heard. On 
 inquiry, he was informed that the native doc- 
 tors had directed the people to beat their 
 houses with sticks,- and chase away the sick- 
 ness to the bush ! 
 
 In 1842, death again invaded the missionary 
 circle. Miss Coggeshall, who had recently ar- 
 rived, was stricken down, after a short illness. 
 Rev. Dr. Savage had been united with Miss 
 M. V. Chapin ; who, after entering on h/?r 
 duties, and advancing the female department 
 of the high school at Cape Palmas to a h'g;h 
 degree of prosperity, was suddenly called to 
 her rest, cheerfully yielding up her spirit to 
 the Saviour whom she served. The following 
 year, Rev. Mr. Minor, whose health had for 
 some time been declining, was removed by 
 death, uttering, with his last breath, prav^'s 
 for the mission, and exhortations to his breth- 
 ren to " go forward." Mrs. Minor returned -o 
 this country. Rev. Dr. Savage visited this 
 country for his health, and returned with a rt> 
 inforcement, consisting of Rev. E. W. Hening 
 and wife and two female teachers. The reports 
 of the missionaries this year were decidedly 
 favorable, the divine blessing having followed 
 their labors. 
 
 The report for 1846, in a review of the mis- 
 sion the 10th year from its commencement, 
 says, " the result of past efforts is beginning to 
 show itself in the growing up of a generation 
 of young persons educated in the nurture and 
 admonition of the Lord, who are already ^ou' 
 dering assistance in the mission, and lr>m 
 among whom we may expect, at no distant 
 day, to select candidates for the minist ^." 
 There were then 24 persons, including ns+i/e 
 assistants, engaged in the mission. Relii^i' «s 
 services were regularly held in five differ-yit 
 places, and other points were frequently visited. 
 The boarding schools contained about 150 
 children. More than that number attended 
 the Sunday schools, and about 1500 were regu- 
 lar hearers of the gospel. The number of com- 
 municants was about fifty. 
 
 Since that time, the mission has been stead- 
 ily progressing, without many marked inci- 
 dents requiring notice. In 1846, the mission 
 was again bereaved by the death of Rev. E. J. 
 P. Messenger, of the acclimating fever, soon 
 after his arrival, and also of Mrs. C. L. Patch. 
 
98 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 Thi- i 'thor incml)cr of the mis- 
 sion -Ml! . and the senior mission- 
 ary, lit. V. 1 .. . Siivago, M. I)., was so com- 
 pletely proalratitl aa to he oblige*! to resign, and 
 return to the Uniteil States. The committee 
 this year resolved to give the missionaries leave 
 to rt'turn to the United States every fourth 
 year. The year following, Rev. Mr. Hening 
 and wife returned to this country, on account 
 of the loss of his sight, and Mr. and Mrs. Aj> 
 pleby resigned their appointments, in conse- 
 quence of her ill health. 
 
 To show how much labor can be performed 
 by one man, even in the climate of Africa, the 
 committee state that, during the year 1847, 
 Rev. Mr. Payne preached every Sabbath morn- 
 ing to about 200 natives ; conducted the mis- 
 sion Sunday school every Sabbath afternoon ; 
 preached four times a week in the native towns 
 in the vicinity ; lectured every Thursday even- 
 ing to the pupils and mission family ; conduct- 
 ed daily evening service for the schools; de- 
 voted two hours each dav to the translation of 
 the Scriptures ; made three visits to each of 
 the more remote stations ; and officiated in the 
 colony forty-five times. 
 
 In 1848, the mission was strengthened by 
 the addition of two ordained missionaries, Rev. 
 Messrs. Jacob Rambo and C. C. Hoffman, and 
 a lady of high qualifications as assistant ; and 
 in 1849, Mr. and Mrs. Hening returned to 
 Africa, accompanied by Rev. E. W. Stokes, a 
 colored clergyman, and Miss AVilliford of 
 Georgia. Dr. Perkins, the missionary physi- 
 cian, was obliged, on account of ill-health, to 
 relinquish his connection with the mission. 
 
 In the year 1851, Rev. John Payne, senior 
 missionary, was elected by the General Con- 
 vention, Missionary Bishop at Cape Palmas 
 and parts adjacent ; and the vestry of Trinity 
 Church, New York, appropriated $5,000 to- 
 wards the endowment of the Episcopate. On 
 the 11th of July following, he was consecrated 
 in St Paul's church, Alexandria, Va. 
 
 In 1852, the mission was reinforced by Rev. 
 G. W. Home and three male and three female 
 assistants ; and it was determined to occupy 
 Monrovia and Bassa Cove, as stations within 
 the colony. Bishop Payne returned to Africa 
 July 7, 1852 ; and active measures were com- 
 menced by him for vigorous and enlarged oper- 
 ations. He held his first confirmation in the 
 new chiu-ch at St. Mark's, in the colony, on 
 Christmas day, in presence of a large congre- 
 gation. Twenty-five persons were confirmed. 
 
 In March, 1852, a small newspaper, called 
 " The Cavalla Messenger," was commenced at 
 the mission, printed in Grebo and English by 
 two young native Christians. 
 
 From Bishop Payne's report, dated Cape 
 Palmas, June 6, 1853, we gather the following 
 summary of the results of the mission : Since 
 its commencement in 1836, there have been 
 connected with the mission 31 white mission- 
 aries, male and female. Four principal star 
 
 tions have been established, at FisJitoiim, Rock 
 town, Cape Palmas, and Cavalla. At all these 
 points native boarding schools have been main- 
 tained. Day schools have also been taught, in 
 which many heathen children have learned to 
 read. Sunday schools, also, have been sus- 
 tained. The gospel has been preached to 
 nearly the whole Grebo tribe, numbering about 
 25,000, and a congregation of colonists has 
 been supplied with stated services. More than 
 100 have been received into the church. Some 
 of these have died in the faith, others have 
 apostatized, and about 80 still remain members 
 of the church; A high school has been es- 
 tablished at Mount Vaughan, for training col- 
 onist teachers and missionaries. Six youths 
 have been sustained at an annual expense of 
 $75. A female colonist day school is in oper- 
 ation at Mount Vaughan, with 40 to 45 schol- 
 ars. The Grebo native dialect has been 
 reduced to writing, and many portions of 
 Scripture and other books printed in it. A 
 printing press is in operation. A wide-spread 
 conviction of the truth of Christianity has been 
 produced in the native mind, and an cxpectar 
 tion raised that it must supersede the religion 
 of the country. Two churches were in process 
 of erection, and the means had been raised for 
 a third, and an orphan asylum is being erected 
 at the point of the Cape. There were in the 
 mission two colonist and three native candi- 
 dates for orders. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 flshtown 
 
 Rocktown 
 
 Cape Palmas 
 
 Monnt Vaughan, 
 
 Cavalla 
 
 Taboo 
 
 Green Hill 
 
 Sinee 
 
 Bassa Cove 
 
 Monrovia 
 
 Clay- Ashland . . . 
 
 -d 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?, 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 •^ 
 
 •a 
 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 s 
 
 § 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 £ 
 
 6 
 
 r)^ 
 
 rg 
 
 4 
 
 2000 
 
 .') 
 
 
 12 
 
 5 
 
 1600 
 
 7 
 
 
 16 
 
 3 
 
 3000 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 60 
 
 5 
 
 1900 
 1500 
 
 50 
 1 
 
 20 
 
 2 
 
 100 
 10 
 15 
 
 50 
 
 Total I 11 im 4| 17 |10,000|101 | 8|213 | 60 
 
 Methodist Episcopal Church in the 
 United States — Mission in Liberia. — The 
 Church of Christ has a profound interest in 
 the great experiment now being tried on the 
 West Coast of Africa; and the Methodist 
 Episcopal Church, feeling that God had 
 thrown a portion of the responsibility upon 
 her, was early on the ground ; and has already 
 expended much treasure and devoted many 
 consecrated lives, to Africa's evangelization, 
 in Liberia. The mortal remains of her sons 
 and daughters are lying in African grave- 
 yards, and she stands pledged by every sacred 
 engagement to carry on this work. This field 
 was her earliest foreign mission. Among the 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 99 
 
 emigrants who left tlie United States, at the 
 commencement of the Liberian Colony, were 
 several members of the Methodist E. Church, 
 and with them several local preachers. On 
 their arrival in Liberia they at once set up 
 those religious services with which they had 
 been familiar in this country. They built 
 places of worship and held their class and oth- 
 er meetings. But they desired regular minis- 
 terial help, and the church in this country be- 
 came increasingly interested in their case, until 
 at lengtk, in 1832, the Rev. Melville B, Cox 
 was appointed and sent forth as the first 
 missionary of the Methodist E. Church to Af- 
 rica. He arrived there 9th March, 1833, and 
 though in feeble health, entered at once upon 
 the duties of his mission. He gathered to- 
 gether all the members and officers of the 
 church then in Monrovia, and organized a 
 branch of the Methodist E. Church, under the 
 authority of the General Conference in Amer- 
 ica. The Swiss mission at Monrovia having 
 been broken up by the sickness and death 
 of most of its agents, the remainder of the 
 missionaries were ordered to Sierra Leone, and 
 Mr. Cox purchased their premises, and was 
 thus furnished with the means of at once enter- 
 ing upon his labors. His love for the heathen 
 soon led him to devise means for preaching the 
 gospel in the regions beyond the colony. The 
 plan of action which he proposed as sketched 
 by himself, was, "■ (1) To establish a mission at 
 Grand Bassa ; (2) Another at Sego, on the 
 Niger; (3) To establish a good school at 
 Monrovia, on the model of the Maine Wesley- 
 an Seminary ; and (4) Another mission either 
 in the interior, or at Cape Mount. He held a 
 camp-meeting commencing March 29, the first 
 probably ever held on that continent ; or- 
 ganized Sunday schools ; communicated with 
 the MissionaryBoard at home ; and was pro- 
 ceeding with his projects of usefulness, when 
 he experienced the first attack of the African 
 fever on the 12th of April. He rallied, how- 
 ever, but again took cold and was again re- 
 duced, and on the 21st of July, this devoted 
 missionary slept in Jesus. This result, how- 
 ever, had not come upon him unexpectedly. 
 He had contemplated it as probable before he 
 left the United States. But when his own ease 
 or life was weighed against the salvation of 
 Africa, he conferred nat a moment with flesh 
 and blood. He was willing to sacrifice all, if 
 by so doing the great cause in which he en- 
 gaged could thereby be promoted — joyfully 
 willing that Christ should be magnified in his 
 body whether by life or death. On his way 
 south, before leaving the United States, he 
 visited Middletown University, and on taking 
 leave of a young friend there, he said to him, 
 " If I die in Africa, you must come and write 
 my epitaph." " I will," was the reply ; " but 
 wJiat sImU I write ?"■ " Write," replied Mr. Cox, 
 " Let a thousand fall before Africa be 
 GIVEN ur !" These words, so worthy a mis- 
 
 sionary of the Cross, have become a motto for 
 many who have followed him, even to an early 
 grave in Africa. He had been appointed to 
 superintend the mission, and Rev. Messrs. 
 Spaulding and Wright, with Miss Farrington, 
 were commissioned as his assistants. But they 
 were delayed and did not arrive in Liberia 
 until the 1st of Jan., 1834, nearly six months 
 after the death of Mr. Cox. He had left a 
 request that Bro. Spaulding, on his arrival, 
 should preach his funeral sermon from the text, 
 "BeMd, I die ; but god shall be with you." 
 His successors entered into his labors, but 
 were soon attacked by the African fever, and 
 only five weeks after her arrival in Liberia the 
 estinlable Mrs. Wright was laid beside Mel- 
 ville Cox, and on the 29th of the next month 
 her husband was carried to the same humble 
 resting place. Shortly after, Mr. and Mrs. 
 Spaulding were obliged, by prostration of 
 health, to sail for the United States, and Miss 
 Farrington was thus left alone, resolved, to 
 use her own words, to " ofier her soul upon the 
 altar of God, for the salvation of that long- 
 benighted continent." In 1834 the Rev. John 
 Seys was sent out, accompanied by Rev. Fran- 
 cis Burns and Unice Sharp, (both colored,) Mr. 
 B. being a local preacher and Unice a teacher. 
 They found on their arrival, 13 preachers, 
 6 teachers in the schools, and a membership 
 of 191. This year missions were established 
 at New Georgia, Edina, and at Grand Bassa. 
 Considerable prosperity attended their labors, 
 and at the close of the year they reported an 
 accession to their numbers of 160, of whom 
 20 were native Africans; but three of the 
 preachers had been removed by death, and 18 
 of the colonists had been cruelly massacred at 
 Port Cresson, by king Joe Harris. Arrange- 
 ments were also made for establishing a mission 
 in the Condo country, and another at Bushrod 
 Island. Dr. Goheen, as missionary physician, 
 arrived with two teachers in 1837 ; and at the 
 close of that year the statistics of the mission 
 were reported as follows : 15 missionaries, one 
 physician, 7 school teachers, 221 scholars, and 
 6 Sabbath schools with 300 scholars, the church 
 members being 418. The work of God was 
 extended by the establishment of four new 
 stations, at Jacks Town, Since, Junk, and 
 Boporo. In 1838 a printing office and a period- 
 ical [Africa's Luminary) were established, and 
 an academy under the charge of Mr. Barton, 
 of Allegany College, was organized. A manual 
 labor school was established at White Plains, 
 for the purpose of giving instruction in the 
 various agricultural and mechanical branches. 
 The steady light which shone forth to the dark 
 regions around them, in connection with the 
 few missions which they had already estab- 
 lished among the heathen tribes, led to many 
 earnest invitations from chiefs and people to 
 give them also the benefits of the gospel. 
 Deputations would frequently arrive from such 
 tribes as the Dey, the Goulah, the Pessah, the 
 
100 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 Bfussa, the (Inoah, und the Grcbo jxioplc, aslc- 
 injj; t'lir missioimrii^s and schools. Mr. Soys 
 visitiNl many of their tribes, as far as 150 miles 
 into the interior, and established as many mis- 
 sions and schools as the means at liis disposal 
 would allow. Cape Palmas also was added 
 to the stations in the mission, and a strong in- 
 terest established there. 
 
 At the close of 1845 there were, 17 raission- 
 ari(«, about 20 chapels, 837 church members, 
 and 16 dav schools with 363 pupils, 12 Sab- 
 bath schools and 488 scholars. In December 
 of this year the Rev. Messrs. Benham, Wil- 
 liams, and Hoyt, arrived, to reinforce the 
 mission. A few days afterwards, intelligence 
 was received at Monrovia that Capt. Boll, of 
 the United States slooi>of-war Yorktoum., had 
 captured a slave-ship, the Pons of Philadelphia, 
 with 756 slaves on board. She had been only 
 three days out from Cabenda, where she had 
 shipped 913 slaves, and during those three 
 days such was the barbarity practiced and the 
 diseases engendered that 20 died ; and during 
 the fourteen days the captors were getting her 
 •to Monrovia, 150 more died. Governor Rob- 
 erts, Judge Benedict, and Dr. Lugcnbccl, with 
 Bome of the missionanes, went on board the 
 slaver, and there witnessed a scene of horror 
 which language is inadequate to describe. The 
 Buffering and dying creatures were landed, and 
 distributed among the colonists ; and one hun- 
 dred of the children were taken in charge by 
 the mission, to be brought up and educated at 
 the expense of the Missionary Society. 
 
 Bishop Payne estimates that the jurisdiction 
 of the Liberian Republic will eventually ex- 
 tend itself 600 miles along the coast, and 200 
 into the interior. "Here, then," to use his 
 own words, "a territory containing, besides 
 American colonists, 120,000 square miles, and 
 not far from 5,000,000 of aborigines, is the 
 sphere to which Providence directs American 
 pnilanthropy and Christianity." Forty years 
 since, in his celebrated speech on the Slave- 
 Trade, before the British Parliament, Mr. Pitt 
 made the following remarks : " We may live," 
 said he, " to behold the natives of Africa en- 
 gaged in the calm occupations of industry, in 
 the pursuits of just and legitimate commerce. 
 We may behold the beams of science and phi- 
 losophv breaking in upon that land, which at 
 some Iiappy period in still later times, may 
 blaze with full lustre, and, joining their influ- 
 ence to that of pure religion, may illuminate 
 and invigorate the most distant extremities of 
 that immense continent." That happy period 
 has dawned upon Africa ; for these glowing 
 anticipations are now being realized in the 
 Republic of Liberia. The Board of Missions 
 of the Methodist E. Church have evinced a 
 laudable anxiety to meet their part of the 
 great responsibility growing out of such a 
 state of things as this. But the impractica- 
 bility and inutility of depending in any mea- 
 sure upon the labors of white missionaries for 
 
 its accomplishment, has led them to transfer 
 the duties of the mission entirely to colored 
 ministers. So that, at present, the only white 
 agent of the Board in the Republic is Mr. 
 Home, the principal of the Monrovia acad- 
 emy. This decision has been made on the 
 following grounds: They believe that, (1) 
 Whites may not expect sufficient health to 
 enable them to perform sufficient labor, without 
 frequent interruptions of long continuance, even 
 if they escape with their lives ; while, on the 
 contrary, colored men do generally, after their 
 acclimation, enjoy as good health as in Amer- 
 ica. (2) The ccHorcd missionaries, by a previous 
 residence in the country, have to some extent 
 become acquainted with native habits, preju- 
 dices, and language. (3^ The membership 
 of the Methodist Mission in Liberia has now 
 become so large, and of such a character, that 
 we may confidently look to it as the source 
 from which to obtain our future supply of 
 laborers, in proportion as the necessity for 
 their labor becomes apparent, and the genius 
 of Christianity tends to render the piety and 
 talents of every one in the church available. 
 And, finally. Because the results of this great 
 experiment in Liberia have exhibited to the 
 world the competency of colored men to 
 govern themselves, and to take charge of all 
 matters of importance. With the requisite 
 amount of piety, they are as capable of attend- 
 ing to religious, as to secular, concerns — to the 
 a^irs of the Church as well as to matters 
 of State. Up to 1850, the Missionary Society 
 of the Methodist E. Church had sent to Libe- 
 ria twenty-five white agents : Melville B. Cox, 
 in 1832, who died in six months after his arri- 
 val ; in 1833, Messrs. Wright and Spaulding 
 and their wives, and Miss Farrington. Mr. and 
 Mrs. Wright both died within three months 
 of their arrival, and the others, after a few 
 months, were obliged to return to America, 
 broken down by frequent attacks of African 
 fever. In 1835, John Seys and his wife were 
 sent out, and they also had to return, leaving 
 four of their children in the grave-yard of 
 Monrovia. In 1836, J. B. Barton was sent ; 
 and after a brief residence, he returned to the 
 United States to recruit his health, and then 
 went back to Liberia, where he soon after died. 
 The same year Squire Chase went out, but was 
 forced to return, and though he went back 
 again, he had again to leave, and died from 
 the effects of the African climate, shortly after 
 his second return from that coast Dr. Goheen, 
 the missionary physician, went out, with Mr. 
 Jayne, the printer, in 1837, but both were 
 obliged to come back. The next year. Miss 
 Wilkins and Miss Beers were sent ; the latter 
 left ; the former still lives and labors, the de- 
 voted matron of the mission school for native 
 girls at Millsburg, the only one, of all the white 
 missionaries sent out by this Board, now living 
 in Africa. J. Barton and W. Stocker went 
 out in 1839 ; the latter died in seven months ; 
 
APRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 101 
 
 the former lived two years, and then fell a 
 victim to the fever. Mr. Pingree joined the 
 mission in 1842, and then returned ; and in 
 1845, Messrs. Benham, Hoyt, and Williams, 
 with their wives, arrived ; but Mr. Williams 
 died in a month after his arrival ; and the rest, 
 enfeebled by disease, returned at dififerent 
 times. Mr. Bastion and his wife next went 
 out ; but Mrs. B. and their child died, and he 
 returned. Now during all this time, but four 
 of the colored preachers have died, though 
 tlieir numbers have been to the whites as ten to 
 one. Nor have they been under the necessity 
 of leaving Liberia to recruit their health. 
 
 The General Conference of 1852, arranged 
 to send Bishop Scott to visit the mission and 
 preside in the annual Conference there in 1853. 
 He went, and spent more than two months 
 there, and gave the whole work a thorough in- 
 spection, and made such arrangements as it is 
 hoped will tend to the greater efficiency of 
 the mission. Here, in substance, is a descrip- 
 tion of his first Sunday and first sermon in 
 Africa, with other leading points in his report : 
 " Sabbath morning came, and at ' the sound of 
 the church-going bell ' I repaired to the place 
 of worship, and there, to a well-clad, well-be- 
 haved, intelligent assembly, preached my first 
 sermon in Africa, from the text, ' For tlie pro- 
 mise is unto you,' Sfc. I said it was an intelli- 
 gent audience. I will describe it. There sat 
 the President of Liberia, and his wife, each 
 having a Bible and Hymn Book, (and this 
 was the case with all present ;) just beyond sat 
 the Vice-President ; in the next pew was the 
 tall and fine-looking figure of Chief-Justice 
 Benedict, and near him the Speaker of the 
 House of Eepresentatives. And there we had 
 our first interview, in God's name, with our 
 colored brethren in Africa. I visited all the 
 settlements, except Marshall, in which churches 
 are established. These are luminous spots, ray- 
 ing out light along the dark coast of that conti- 
 nent. I also visited Bexley, Louisiana, Lexing- 
 ton, Puddington, and Mount Tubman ; all in- 
 teresting places, and concerning which I have 
 many pleasing reminiscences. In my interview 
 with the King of Cape Palmas, the King treat- 
 ed me as the father of all America, and said : — 
 ' Merica been here twenty years and yet (al- 
 luding to the colonists and the natives,) we are 
 two people. We want one school for both. 
 I want bring our people (said he, suiting the 
 action to the word,) half round ; by and by, 
 bring them whole round : not do this all at 
 once.' The Government of the Eepublic of 
 Liberia, which is formed on the model of our 
 own, and is wholly in the hands of colored 
 men, seems to be exceedingly well adminis- 
 tered. I never saw so orderly a people. I saw ' 
 but one intoxicated colonist while in the coun- 
 try, and I heard not one profane word. The 
 Sabbath is kept with singular strictness, and 
 the churches are crowded with attentive and 
 orderly worshipers." 
 
 The Bishop also gives an account of the 
 meeting of the Conference, and of the value of 
 our African missions. He says, " At length 
 the time of meeting the Conference arrived, 
 and we entered on business. The Conference 
 had its president and secretary, and proceeded 
 to business with as much form and accuracy as 
 we are accustomed to do at home. On Sabbath 
 our religious exercises were held under the 
 shade of two large tamarind trees, at the con- 
 clusion of which I ordained eight to the office 
 of elder. After having surveyed the whole 
 ground, I am well satisfied with the church in 
 Liberia. While there I witnessed some of the " 
 clearest, brightest and strongest evidences of 
 religion I ever became acquainted with in my 
 life. The African mission is one of great pro- 
 mise to the church of God ; it is not only des- 
 tined to bless Liberia, but to pour the blessings 
 of light and salvation all over the continent of 
 Africa ; and God designs to awaJieu and 
 Christianize its millions through the agency of 
 her own sons." 
 
 The Bishop enumerates the leading difficul- 
 ties with which this mission has had to contend. 
 The first is the want of missionaries who can 
 speak the language of the natives, and the conse- 
 quent necessity of still employing interpreters — 
 then there is the custom of dashing (or making 
 presents,) which the natives tenaciously endea- 
 vor to keep up ; then there is the difficulty of 
 polygamy which keeps hundreds from deciding 
 for God; then their vicious domestic organization 
 which makes the wives the mere slaves of their 
 lazy husbands ; then their superstitions, their 
 greegrees and witches ; and then there is the 
 vice and debasement which the natives con- 
 stantly contract in their intercourse with the 
 ships and traders on the coast. Holding offices 
 under government, and engaging in trade, by 
 the preachers, used formerly to exist — but of 
 late it is discontinued. — Amiiial Reports, and 
 Msssionary Advocate ; National Magazine ; Lon- 
 don Watchman ; Cox's Life ; Hoyfs Laiul of 
 Hope. — Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 MEMBERS. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Monrovia 
 
 Lower Caldweli Circuit. 
 Upper Caldwell Circuit . 
 MiUsburgh and White " 
 
 Plains 
 
 Heddington and Rob- 
 
 ertsville 
 
 Marshall Circuit 
 
 Bassa and Edina Circuit 
 Sinou and Reedsville'l 
 
 Circuit. .' J 
 
 Cape Palmas ■. 
 
 Total 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (3 
 
 
 k 
 
 t 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 >5 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 19 
 
 15 
 
 6 
 
 16 
 17 
 
 i 
 
 ll 
 
 7 
 
 .. 
 
 
 2 
 
 58 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 48 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 18 
 
 
 4 
 
 116 
 
 115 
 
 4 
 
 19 
 
 ^25 35 
 10 00 
 40 00 
 
 15 00 
 
 135 00 
 150 00 
 
 $1,*543 01 
 
lod 
 
 AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 DAY AND SUNDAY 
 
 SCHOOLS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 >% 
 
 1 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 eg 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 * 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 • Monrovia 
 
 1 
 
 
 80 
 
 84 
 
 155 
 
 90 
 
 140 
 120 
 120 
 
 '5 
 10 
 15 
 
 10 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 16 
 20 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 
 '4 
 3 
 1 
 
 88 
 128 
 
 *36 
 
 "44 
 200 
 300 
 300 
 
 1 
 3 
 2 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 '4 
 2 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 '2 
 
 1 
 
 *2 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 40 
 84 
 55 
 81 
 10 
 
 i()3 
 
 80 
 50 
 10 
 
 * "5 
 
 '62 
 10 
 
 10 
 20 
 10 
 10 
 
 1 
 3 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 3 
 2 
 
 i Lower Caldwell Circuit 
 
 3 
 
 
 Upper Caldwell Circuit * . 
 
 2 
 
 
 Millsburgh and White Plains 
 
 1 
 
 
 Uoddinpton and Robertsville 
 
 Marsha 1 Circuit 
 
 Bassa and Edina Circuit 
 
 Sinou and Readsville Circuit 
 
 4 
 3 
 
 
 Cape Palmas 
 
 1 
 
 
 Cajx; Mount 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lanesborough and Peter Harris's .... 
 Total 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 789 
 
 50 
 
 85 
 
 14 
 
 1096 
 
 20 
 
 7 
 
 513 
 
 127 
 
 15 
 
 Southern Baptist Convention.— The South- 
 ern Baptist Convention have a flourishing mis- 
 sion in Liberia ; and they are commencing one 
 also in the Yoruba country. The board say, in 
 their report for 1853, that their mission in JA- 
 beria is exercising an immediately salutary 
 influence ; and that the facilities for beneficial- 
 ly affecting the heathen are abundant. The 
 missionaries are all colored men, and though 
 none of them have had the advantage of thor- 
 ough mental training, yet they are in advance 
 of the people among whom they labor, in piety, 
 talents, and knowledge. The reports of the 
 different stations indicate a healthy state of 
 the churches, and in several of the churches 
 revivals have been experienced the past year. 
 In the year 1852, the Board sent Rev. Mr. 
 Boweu on an exploring tour to the Yoruba 
 country ; and his report was so favorable that 
 they immediately resolved on sending out a 
 missionary force to occupy three stations in 
 that field, and Rev. Messrs. J. S. Dennard, John 
 H. Lacy, and W. H. Clarke were subsequently 
 appointed ; and the intention was to send out 
 three more. Messrs. Lacy, Dennard, and 
 Bowcn reached Lagos Aug. 28, 1853. It was 
 determined that they should locate, and for 
 the present, remain together at Ajaye. Mr. 
 Dennard, having gone to the coast on business, 
 writes, Jan. 10, 1854, conveying the sorrowful 
 news of the death of his wife. Mr. Lacy has 
 returned to this country on account of the in- 
 flamed condition of his eyes. At the latest 
 advices, Mr. Dennard was at Lagos, and Mr. 
 Bowen at Ijaye. At the meeting of the Board 
 in April, Mr. Clark was expected to sail in 
 May, and the Board were corresponding with 
 other brethren, with reference to this mission. 
 [See Yoruba and Map.) 
 
 The report for 1854 gives a cheering view 
 of the state of the mission at Liberia. The 
 
 churches have been visited with revivals the 
 past year, and some of them have received 
 large accessions. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Liberia. 
 
 Cape Palnias 
 
 Sinou 
 
 Bas.sa Cove 
 
 Bexley 
 
 Edina 
 
 Junk 
 
 Monrovia 
 
 New Georgia 
 
 New Virginia 
 
 Caldwell 
 
 Millb'burg \ 
 
 Louisiana J 
 
 YOKUBA. 
 
 Awaye "| 
 
 Ishakki Y 
 
 Igboho J 
 
 Stations 14 ' 
 
 80 
 
 13 11 153t SOf lit 30t 
 
 * No returns. 
 
 f Incomplete. 
 
 American Missionary Association. — The 
 mission of this society in West Africa, is called 
 the Mendi Mission,, and is situated in the Sher- 
 bro country. This name is generally given to 
 a section of country lying south and south-east 
 from the colony of Sierra Leone, between 70 
 and 80° N. latitude, and from the 13th degree 
 of longitude west from Greenwich, eastward 
 into the interior. It embraces not only the 
 Sherbro country proper, but the Mperi country, 
 the Bulloms, Jong, Boom, Timneh, Boompe, 
 and Looboo countries, and sometimes even a 
 portion of the Mendi country. In general that 
 
APRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 103 
 
 part of it which lies near the coast is low, with 
 numerous rivers running into each other, by 
 which it is really divided into several islands, 
 Ascending the Jong river some 30 or 40 miles 
 from the ocean, we reach the high lands at 
 Wela, or following the line of the Boom for a 
 much greater distance, the highlands are reach 
 ed as you enter the Boompe country. At the 
 native town Tissana, or the mission station 
 Mo-Tappan, there is a considerable fall of 
 w^ater, as there is also at Wela, on the Jong. 
 At these places Indian corn, beans, melons and 
 many other kinds of vegetables that are com- 
 mon to the gardens of the United States are 
 easily cultivated. Of some of them three or 
 four successive crops are produced in the same 
 season. Small villag;es, or African towns, are 
 very frequent all along the numerous rivers. 
 The population of these towns varies from 50 
 up to 1000, or more, inhabitants. There are 
 also scores of sites of towns destroyed in the 
 numerous wars instigated by the slave trade, 
 that curse of Western Africa. 
 
 The general condition of the people of that 
 part of Africa, before the establishment of the 
 mission, was that of heathen. Many of the 
 chiefe, however, are Mohammedans some of 
 whom can read the Arabic readily, and pos- 
 sess parts of the Koran. The government of 
 the country is generally in the hands of these 
 men. The last few years has developed the 
 existence of idolatry much more wide spread 
 than the missionaries had previously any idea 
 of. Many of their idols, of the most hideous 
 and revolting form, have been voluntarily given 
 up to the missionaries. 
 
 The history of this mission properly com- 
 mences with the seizure of the schooner Amis- 
 tad, by Lieut. Gedney, U. S. N., near the east 
 end of Long Island, in 1839. He found on 
 board the vessel about forty Africans and two 
 Spaniards, one of whom declared himself the 
 owner of the negroes and claimed the Lieu- 
 tenant's protection. 
 
 After an examination before a judge of the 
 United States District Court, for Connecticut, 
 the Africans were committed to the jail at 
 New Haven, for trial on a charge of murder 
 on the high seas. When ft was ascertained that 
 they were recently from Africa, and had been 
 illegally bought at Havana, to be carried to 
 Principe, to be enslaved, and that they had risen 
 upon their enslavers, and recovered their liber- 
 tv, much interest was excited in their behalf. 
 A few friends of freedom met at New York 
 and appointed a committee to receive dona- 
 tions, employ counsel, and act as circumstances 
 might require. Legal counsel were employed, 
 native African interpreters were obtained, and 
 a committee of gentlemen at New Haven un- 
 dertook to secure suitable instruction for these 
 unfortunate and benighted pagans. 
 ^ Hon. John Quincy Adams, at the solicita- 
 tion of the Committee, consented to act as 
 senior counsel, and the cause was jfinally argued 
 
 by him and Hon. Eoger S. Baldwin before the 
 Supreme Court of the United States, at the 
 city of Washington, February and March, 1841. 
 The following letter addressed to a member 
 of the Committee, gives the result : 
 
 " Washington, 9th March, 1841. 
 
 " The captives are free ! 
 
 " The part of the decree of the District Court, 
 which placed them at the disposal of the Pre- 
 sident of the United States, to be sent to Af- 
 rica, is reversed. They are to be discharged 
 from the custody of the Marshal— /rce. 
 
 " The rest of the decision of the courts below 
 is affirmed. 
 
 " ' Not unto us — not unto us,' &c. 
 
 " But thanks— thanks ! in the name of human- 
 ity and of justice, to you. J. Q. Adams." 
 
 As these Africans had been instructed in 
 the elements of knowledge, as particular care 
 had been taken to enlighten them on the sub- 
 ject of Christianity, and as they all expressed 
 a strong desire that some of their religious 
 teachers should accompany them to their nor 
 tive land, the Committee deemed it a duty to 
 make their return, after such a providential 
 train of circumstances, the occasion of plant- 
 ing a mission in the heart of Africa. As 
 the funds had been contributed by persons of 
 various denominations, most of whom were of 
 anti-slavery principles, it was thought proper 
 to make the mission anti-slavery and anti-sec- 
 tarian in its character. Accordingly the fol- 
 lowing resolution was adopted : 
 
 '^Resolved, That it would be contrary to the 
 feelings and principles of a large majority of 
 the donors to the Amistad fund, and of the 
 friends of the liberated Africans, to connect 
 their return with any missionary society that 
 solicits or receives donations from slave- 
 holders." 
 
 A passage was secured for them in a vessel 
 bound for Sierra Leone, and a farewell public 
 meeting held in the Broadway Tabernacle, 
 New York, Nov. 27, 1841 ; by the Union 
 Missionary Society ; when the instructions of 
 the Committee were delivered by S. S. Joce- 
 lyn to the missionaries under appointment, 
 viz., Rev. James Steele, Rev. William Ray- 
 mond and Mrs. Raymond ; and parting coun- 
 sels were given to the Mendians, some of whom 
 took part in the exercises. 
 
 They arrived at Sierra Leone, January IS, 
 1842, after a passage of fifty days. All their 
 stores, tools and implements of agriculture 
 were admitted free of duty, and even without 
 examination. Governor Ferguson proffered 
 every necessary assistance. Soon after arriv- 
 ing, Messrs. Steele and Raymond became sat- 
 isfied of the impracticability of their reaching 
 the Mendi country, and, ascertaining that part 
 of the Amistads belonged to the Sherbro 
 country, and that all were willing to go there, 
 Mr. Steele, accompanied by Cinque and sev- 
 
104 
 
 Ai^RICA, WESTERN. 
 
 oral others, ^-isitod Shci-bro. King irenry 
 Tiicker, to whom tliey went, lived at Kaw- 
 Meiuli, (a town of the yherbro) and seemed 
 willing to receive the people into his territory. 
 The eonditions were, however, too hard to be 
 accepted, and Mr. Kuymoud, with the Afri- 
 cans, spent the ue^t miny season at York, 
 Sierra L'one. Mr. Steele was compelled by 
 ill health to return to the United States. 
 
 In November, 1842, a location was selected 
 for the mission about a mile below the village 
 of Kaw-Mendi, and IGO square rods of laud 
 were obtained, half a mile on the river, extend- 
 ing- a mile back, for which was paid an annual 
 rent of $100. 
 
 On the arrival of the missionary and the 
 Africans at Kaw-Mendi, the King ordered a 
 swivel to be loaded and fired, as a token of 
 joy. The women and girls began to sing and 
 dance. A multitude of men, women and chil- 
 dren flocked around to see the white woman, 
 having never seen one before. In the morn- 
 ing, many people were drawn together by their 
 singing and praying at family devotions. On 
 Lord's day, Mr. Raymond held religious servi- 
 ces, and preached his first sermon here from 
 John iii. 16 : " For God so loved the world," 
 Ac. The king attended, and seemed much 
 impressed. 
 
 The influence of the mission on the slave- 
 ti*ade, on the king, and on the people, quickly 
 became apparent. A flourishing school was 
 soon in operation, and Mr. Raymond felt 
 greatly encouraged. His language was, " This 
 mission is evidently planted by God himself. 
 I am more and more satisfied of it. It will 
 prosper." 
 
 On the first Lord's day in January, 1845, he 
 organized a church with five members. His 
 cares and labors were great ; but he was per- 
 mitted to see fruits abounding amidst the diffi- 
 culties with which the mission was surrounded. 
 A t^jrrible war commenced in the Sherbro 
 country in 1845. Many towns were burned. 
 Hundreds fled from the scenes of war to the 
 mission, as a place of refuge. The persons and 
 property of all connected with it were respect- 
 ed. Its character as a place of freedom, peace, 
 temperance, and Christianity, was kown far and 
 wide. Rev. Henry Badger at that time wrote, 
 " Did you ever hear of a mission being establish- 
 ed in the midst of war ? Here is one, and it has 
 advanced during the war more than previously. 
 A school has been formed, and is doing well. 
 The Mission Establishment, at first regarded 
 with much suspicion, is now looked upon with 
 great respect. It is a sanctuary. And while 
 other towns and places are consumed by fire, 
 and their inhabitants destroyed by sword, or 
 can-ied into slavery, tliis flourishes and im- 
 proves." 
 
 After the death of Mr. Raymond, in Nov. 
 1845, the mission, with its school of over sixty 
 children, was for eight months under the care 
 of Thomas Bunyan, a native Meudian, who 
 
 had previously acted as an interpreter and 
 teacher. Two missionaries sailed from New 
 York for the mission, April 8, 1848. One of 
 them, Mr. Carter, died eight days after his 
 arrival at the mission ; the other, Geo. Thonij^ 
 son, labored there alone for two years, suilur- 
 ing much of the time from sickness. During 
 this time, there was much deep religious inter- 
 est manifested by those about the mission, and 
 many were received into the mission church : 
 the first one was Te-i7}e, one of the girls taken 
 in the ^\juistad. The next reinforcement con- 
 sisted of Mr. and Mi-s. Brooks, and Mar-Grvy 
 another one of the girls taken in the schooner, 
 who had been at school in Ohio. Mrs. Brooks 
 died before reaching the mission. They were 
 followed to Africa in Dec. 1850, by a company 
 of eight ; and Dec. 25, 1852, another company 
 of seven newly appointed missionaries sailed 
 from New York for that mission. Since that 
 time, only one missionary has joined the mission. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Kaw-Mendi 
 
 Good Hope .... 
 Mo-Tappan . ; . . 
 
 Total 
 
 1842 
 1853 
 1853 
 
 One female assistant not located. 
 
 Besides the stations which appear in the 
 foregoing table, the missionaries are under 
 instruction to open a station, either at Mo- 
 Bwavi, in the Looboo country, or at Wcla, in 
 the Timneh country. — Rev. George Whipple. 
 
 Basle Missionary Society. — The Basle 
 Missionary Society turned its attention to the 
 Gold Coast in 1826 ; and four of its agents 
 arrived at Christiansborg, near Akra, in 1828. 
 Three of them soon died ; and the fourth found 
 himself under the necessity of taking the place 
 of the Danish chaplain, who had also deceased, 
 only to follow him, however, in 1831. In 1832 
 three other laborers reached Christiansborg; 
 one of them, a physician, soon fell a victim 
 to the climate ; and another did not long sur- 
 vive. In 1835, Riis, who alone remained, went 
 to Akropong, which is a considerable place in 
 the Aquapim mountains, north-east from Akra. 
 He was kindly received by the king and his 
 people, and he commenced his labors among 
 them. Two fellow-laborers came to his aid in 
 1836, but both soon deceased. At length, after 
 many disappointments, a new plan was adopts 
 ed. Riis (accompanied by Widmann, and a 
 

 ^-^- 
 
 ^i 
 
AFRICA, WESTERN. 
 
 105 
 
 colored man who liad been educated in Swit- 
 zerland,) conducted twenty-four Christian ne- 
 groes from Jamaica to Akropong, where they 
 arrived in 1843. A chapel was erected at this 
 place in 1844. This mission has been prose- 
 cuted to the present time ; and at the anniver- 
 sary of the Society, held July 6, 1853, its 
 
 affairs were in a prosperous and hopeful condi- 
 tion. The number of laborers was 16, and the 
 Qougregations had increased. The station at 
 Christiansborg had been particularly favored. 
 It has stations at Akropong, and at Ussu, 
 (Danish Akra.) 
 
 TABULAR VIEW OP MISSIONS IN WESTERN AFRICA. 
 
 SOUIETLKS. 
 
 <f, 
 
 Church Missionary Society 
 
 English Baptist ilission 
 
 English Wesleyan Mission 
 
 Basle Missionary Society 
 
 American Board 
 
 Scotch Missions 
 
 Presbyterian Board 
 
 Episcopal Board 
 
 Southern Baptist Convention 
 
 American Methodist Episcopal Church 
 American Baptist Union 
 
 Totals 
 
 2976 
 118 
 8021 
 
 22 
 
 114 
 101 
 600 
 1185 
 17 
 
 5921 
 450 
 5343 
 
 120 4 42 239 17 7 11 13,154 642 154 12,877 
 
 It will be seen, by the foregoing statements, 
 that a good beginning has been made in the 
 evangelization of Western Africa. Many val- 
 uable lives have been sacrificed, in the attempt 
 to plant the gospel on these inhospitable shores. 
 But they have not been sacrificed in vain. If 
 more than 13,000 souls, or a moiety of them, 
 have been saved through the instrumentality 
 of these missions, it would be worth the sacri- 
 fice of every missionary who has landed there. 
 But, the results of these self-sacrificing labors 
 reach far beyond what appears in these statis- 
 tical tables. A large amount of preparatory 
 work has been accomplished ; native helpers 
 have been raised up ; communications have 
 been opened into the interior, and the way 
 prepared for establishing missions among a 
 great number of large tribes, inhabiting the 
 more elevated and healthy portions of the con- 
 tinent, who are in a more hopeful condition 
 for missionary labors than those on the coast. 
 And, experience has removed, in a great de- 
 gree, the dangers of acclimation on the coast, 
 A large number of the native languages have 
 been mastered, and a number of them reduced 
 to writing. A good beginning has also been 
 made in the departments of translation and 
 printing. 
 
 Rev. Dr. Krapf, of the mission of the Church 
 Missionary Society in Eastern Africa, has made 
 to the mission at Gaboon a deeply interesting 
 proposal — the forming of a South African con- 
 tinental mission line, from the Gaboon to the 
 starting point of their mission in the neighbor- 
 hood of Zanzcbar. North of the equator, this 
 
 would be difficult, on account of the variety 
 of languages and the hostility of the different 
 tribes. But it is a remarkable feature of all 
 the dialects south of the equator, spoken by 
 the black man as distinguished from the 
 Hottentots and Kaffres, that these dialects all 
 have a common language for their basis. The 
 people, likewise, are essentially one people in 
 manners and customs. It has been discovered, 
 that, by an intercourse of a few weeks, the na- 
 tives of the eastern coast, and of the Gaboon, 
 converse with each other. This great family 
 of languages seems also to be remarkable for 
 the excellence of its structure. The place of 
 meeting on this continental mission line would 
 be some one of the central mountains, supposed 
 to divide the great basins from which flow the 
 waters of the Nile, and of the Zaire, and of 
 the shorter rivers running into the Indian 
 ocean. These mountains may be 800 or 1000 
 miles from either coast ; and it is a cheering 
 fact that three or four hundred miles of the 
 eastern portion have already been traversed by 
 Dr, Krapf and his associates. The missionary 
 aspects of the two opposite sides of the conti- 
 nent have some strong points of resemblance. 
 On the east, a healthful upland was found much 
 nearer the coast than was expected ; and moun- 
 tains are seen from more than one of the Ga- 
 boon stations. The shores of the Gaboon are 
 healthful, compared with most rivers of Africa, 
 but will probably not compare with the eleva- 
 ted table lands of the interior ; and no more 
 will the coast from the east. A thick jungle 
 covers the plains and valleys on both sides, 
 
106 
 
 AMERICAN BOARD. 
 
 creating the necessity of traveling on foot 
 But the opening of the rivers to navigation 
 may, in a measure, obviate this. And the 
 increasing desire for missionaries among the 
 interior tribes, shows that Providence is open- 
 ing wide the doors for the entrance of the 
 gospel on every side. 
 
 AHMEDNUGGUR : The city of Ahmed- 
 nuggur is situated on the table land of the 
 Ghauts, in Hiudoostan, in a plain 12 or 15 
 miles in extent each way, and is about 175 
 miles north-east from Bombay. It contains 
 about 50,000 souls, and the population is in- 
 creasing since it has become a military station. 
 It was once the seat of the Mussulman power 
 in tliis part of India, and appears, from its 
 palaces, mosques, aqueducts, and numerous 
 ruins, to have been a place of much splendor. 
 It is four or five miles in circuit, and entirely 
 surrounded by a high wall of stone and clay. 
 It was occupied as a mission station by the 
 American Board in 1831. 
 ^ AHURIRI : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand. 
 
 AINTAB : A large garrison town on the 
 northern frontier of Syria, in the pashalic of 
 Aleppo. It is 65 miles north of Aleppo, 50 
 miles east of Scanderoon, and 30 miles west 
 of Bir. It has a population of 35,000 to 
 40,000. It is one of the most interesting 
 stations of the American Board among the 
 Armenians. 
 
 AITUTAKI : One of the Hervey islands, 
 and a station of the London Missionary So- 
 ciety. 
 
 AK-HISSAR: An out-station of the 
 American Board among the Armenians ; it is 
 the ancient Thyatira, the seat of one of the 
 Apocalyptic churches ; population 7000. 
 
 AKRA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society in Africa, on the Gold coast, 
 a short distance to the east of Cape Coast 
 Castle. 
 
 AKROFUL : An outrstation of the Wes- 
 leyans in West Africa. (See Annamaboe.) 
 
 AKROPONG : A station of the Basle 'Mis- 
 sionary Society, on Cape Coast, Africa. 
 
 AKYAB : The name of a district and a 
 city in Arracan, one of the provinces of British 
 Burmah. The city contams from 16,000 to 
 20,000 inhabitants. Since 1840 the city has 
 been a station of the American Baptist Mis- 
 sion in Arracan. 
 
 ALBANY : A district and town in Sierra 
 Leone, West Africa, occupied by the Wesleyan 
 and Church Missionarv Societies. 
 
 ALDERVILLE, in Upper Canada : A sta- 
 tion of the Wesleyan Miss. Society among the 
 Indians; commenced in "'817; has now two 
 missionaries, several out-&' ations, 80 members, 
 an industrial school with 54 pupils, and over 
 700 attendants on public worship, 
 
 ALEPPO : A town of SjTia, the capital 
 of a pashalic situated in the vast plain which 
 
 extends from tlie Orontes to the Eupliratea. 
 It is built on eight hills or einincnces, and is 
 three and a half miles in circunifcTence, sur- 
 rounded by an ancient strong stone wall forty 
 feet high. It is a station of the London 
 Jews' Society, and some Protestants are 
 found among the Armenian and Greek popu- 
 lation. 
 
 ALLAHABAD : A large city at the junc- 
 tion of the Ganges and the Jumna, in Northern 
 India, a station of the Presbyterian Board. 
 
 ALLEN TOWN : Station of the Church 
 Missionary Society among the liberated Afri- 
 cans in the river district of .Sierra Leone, 
 W. Africa, south-east of Freetown. 
 
 AMALONGUA : Station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Zulus, near Port Natal, 
 in South Africa. 
 
 AMAPURA : Tlie ancient capital of the 
 Burman Empire, situated on the Irrawaddy, 
 seven miles below Ava, the present capital. 
 The government was removed in 1824. 
 
 AMBALA : A station of the Presbyterian 
 Board in Northern India, nearly equi-distant 
 from Lodiana, Saharunpur, and Sabatten. 
 
 AMBOYNA: One of the Molucca or 
 Spice islands, in lat. 3° 41' south, and long. 
 128° 10' east. It belongs to the Dutch, and 
 contains a population of 29,660. The Nether- 
 lands Missionary Society have a flourishing 
 mission on this island. (See Indian Archi- 
 pelago.) 
 
 AMERICA : (See United States, Canada, 
 Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Labrador and 
 Greenland, Indians, Mexico, and South America.) 
 i>AMERICAN BOARD OF COMMIS- 
 SIONERS FOR FOREIGN MISSIONS : 
 Of all the foreign missionary boards and 
 societies now preeminent among the bene- 
 volent institutions of the United States, 
 the A. B. C. F. M. was first in the date 
 of its organization. Yet it must not be 
 supposed that the spirit of benevolence — or 
 even what may be regarded as more specifi- 
 cally the missionary spirit — had previously no 
 existence in the American churches. Nor 
 must it be supposed that all the influence on 
 the churches, which led them to enter on the 
 foreign missionary work, was exerted by any 
 one, or any few individuals. The missionary 
 spirit is but the Christian spirit looking upon 
 the unevangelized ; and from the first settle- 
 ment of New England there had been much 
 of this spirit in the churches. Earnest, and 
 by no means unsuccessful, efforts for the evan- 
 gelization of the native Indian tribes, had been 
 made by the Mayhews, Eliot, Sargent, Brain- 
 ard, Wheelock, Kirkland, and many others, 
 extending through a period of more than 160 
 years, from 1643 to 1808, before Mills or Hall, 
 Judson or Newell, ofiered themselves as mis- 
 sionaries to the heathen. 
 
 About the commencement of the present 
 century it began to be obvious that the mis- 
 sionary feeling was rising and extending in 
 
AMERICAN BOARD. 
 
 107 
 
 the IJnited States, and wonld be likely soon to 
 open for itself new channels of effort ; and " no 
 man was the leader of the movement f^ God 
 was working for his own cause. In 1799, the 
 Massachusetts Missionary Society was formed 
 at Boston. In 1804 the constitution was modi- 
 fied, and the object of the society was defined 
 to be " to diSuse the gospel among the people 
 of the newly-settled and remote parts of our 
 country — among the Indians of the country, 
 dnd through more distant regions of the earth, 
 as circumstances shall invite and the ability 
 of the society shall admit." Under this con- 
 stitution this society, had the means been fur- 
 nished it, might have sent missionaries to any 
 of the " distant regions of the earth ; " and 
 some of the sermons preached at the annual 
 meetings of the society, as also sermons before 
 other missionary societies in the earlier years 
 of this century, and especially one by Dr. 
 Griffm before the General Assembly of the 
 Presbyterian Church in 1806, urge the claims 
 of the heathen, and the greatness and excel- 
 lency of a universal missionary work, with 
 eloquence and earnestness which have seldom, 
 if ever, been surpassed. Dr. Parish, the 
 preacher before this society in 1807, alludes 
 to '•' five societies in Massachusetts for propa- 
 gating the gospel," to " similar societies in all 
 the states of New England," and to " mission- 
 ary societies in the middle states," as then 
 existing. The Connecticut Evangelical Maga- 
 zine, commenced in 1800 ; the Massachusetts 
 Missionary Magazine, commenced in 1803 ; 
 the Massachusetts Baptist Missionary Maga- 
 zine, commenced the same year ; the General 
 Assembly's Missionary Magazine or Religious 
 Intelligencer, commenced in 1805 ; diffused 
 among the churches much intelligence in re- 
 gard to missionary operations in foreign lands. 
 Mr. N orris, of Salem, when applied to by Dr. 
 Spring, in 1806, to aid in endowing a Theologi- 
 cal seminary at Andover, found himself em- 
 barrassed by a previous determination as to 
 th© use of his means. " My great object," he 
 said, " is the foreign missionary enterprise ; " 
 and he gave $10,000 to the Theological school 
 because convinced that the effort to establish 
 it was one with this enterprise, for " we must 
 raise up ministers if we would have men to go 
 as missionaries." The same year, 1806, Rob- 
 ert Ralston remitted for himself and others 
 of Philadelphia $3,357 to aid the Baptist 
 Mission at Serampore. Dr. Carey, of that 
 mission, acknowledged the receipt of $6,000 
 from American Christians in 1806 and 1807. 
 
 There were thus many indications of a mis- 
 sionary spirit in the churches of the United 
 States. Still it is true, that as yet, "American 
 Christians had never combined in any great 
 enterprise or plan for spreading the knowledge 
 of Christ, or advancing his kingdom ; had 
 never sent, from their shores, a single mis- 
 sionary, with the message of heavenly mercy, 
 to any portion of the widely extended pagan 
 
 world" abroad. The different eflbrts which 
 " had been made for the benefit of some of the 
 native tribes of the American forest " had been 
 " scattered and transient," and " without any 
 general union, or any expansive and systematic 
 plan of operations-." 
 
 In 1806, Samuel J. Mills became a member 
 of Williams College. While a child he had 
 heard his mother say, " I have consecrated this 
 child to the service of God as a missionary," 
 and from the time of his conversion, in 1802, 
 he had ardently desired to engage in the mis- 
 sionary work. In college, while laboring faith- 
 fully to promote true piety among the students, 
 he kept this work constantly in mind. In 
 1807 he invited Gordon Hall and James Rich- 
 ards to a walk, and led them to a retired spot 
 in a meadow, where they spent all day in fast- 
 ing and prayer, and in conversing on the duty 
 of missions to the heathen. He was surprised 
 and gratified to learn that the subject was not 
 new to these brethren, but that their hearts 
 were already set upon engaging in such a 
 work. September 7, 1808, a society was pri- 
 vately formed at Williams College, by these 
 and a few other pious students, the object 
 of which, the constitution says, "shall be to 
 effect, in the persons of its members, a mission 
 or missions to the heathen." The 5th article 
 provided that "no person shall be admitted 
 who is under an engagement of any kind 
 which shall be incompatible with going on a 
 mission to the heathen ; " and the 6th article 
 was, " Each member shall keep absolutely free 
 from every engagement which, after his prayer- 
 ful attention, and after consultation with the 
 brethren, shall be deemed incompatible with 
 the objects of this society, and shall hold him- 
 self in readiness to go on a mission when and 
 where duty may call." 
 
 Designing now so to operate on the public 
 mind as to lead to the undertaking of a foreign 
 missionary work, and proceeding with great 
 modesty, and great practical wisdom, they re- 
 published and circulated some impressive mi&- 
 sionary sermons, and opened a correspondence 
 with some of the eminently wise and good men 
 among the clergy of the country, such as Rev. 
 Messrs. Griffin, Worcester, Morse, and Dana. 
 With the same end in view, and to influence 
 young men, one of the number transferred his 
 relation to Middlebury College in Vermont. 
 Mills visited Yale College, and some efforts 
 were made at other institutions. 
 
 In the autumn of 1809 Richards became a 
 member of the Theological Seminary at Ando- 
 ver, and " labored with diligence and success 
 in promoting a spirit of missions among the 
 students." Mills followed him to Andover in 
 the spring of 1810, and Hall soon joined them. 
 At least one other young man was there also, 
 whose thoughts had been independently direct- 
 ed to the same great subject — Samuel Nott, 
 Jr. " There seemed now to be," says one who 
 was there, " a movement of the Spirit, turning 
 
108 
 
 AMERICAN BOARD. 
 
 the anouuon :uid the hearts of the students in 
 the seminary to the eomlition of the perishing 
 heathen." Several had already come, or soon 
 came to the resolution of spending their lives 
 in pagan lauds, among whom were Adoniram 
 Judsmi, Jr., and Samuel Newell. The faculty 
 of the seminary were consulted and approved 
 the di-sigu, and on the 25th of June, 1810, 
 according to previous arrangement. Rev. Dr. 
 Spring of Newbur}T)0rt, and Rev. Samuel 
 Worcester of Salem, met with the professors 
 and a few others, for further consultation. It 
 was thought the time for action had come, and 
 the young men were advised to present their 
 case to the General Association of Massachu- 
 setts, which was about to meet at Bradford. 
 The next day Rev. Messrs. Spring and Wor- 
 cester rode together in a chaise to Bradford, 
 and during that ride, between those two men, 
 " the first idea of the American Board of Com- 
 missioners for Foreign Missions was suggested ; 
 and the form, the number of members, and the 
 name, were proposed." On Thursday, June 
 28th, Messrs. Judson, Nott, Newell, and Hall, 
 came before the Association and presented a 
 written paper in which they stated •' that their 
 minds had been long impressed with the duty 
 and importance of personally attempting a 
 mission to the heathen ; " and they solicited 
 the opinion and advice of the Association as to 
 their duty, and as to the source to which they 
 might look for support in their contemplated 
 work. The subject was referred to a commit- 
 tee, who reported the next day, recommending 
 " that there be instituted by this Association a 
 Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 
 for the purpose of devising ways and means, 
 and adopting and prosecuting measures for 
 
 })romoting the spread of the gospel in heathen 
 ands." The report was adopted, and the fol- 
 lowing persons were chosen to constitute, in 
 the first instance, that Board : His excellency 
 John Treadwell, Esq., Rev. Timothy Dwight, 
 D. D., Gen. Jedediah Huntington, and Rev. 
 Calvin Chapin, of Connecticut ; Rev. Joseph 
 Lyman, J). D., Rev. Samuel Spring, D. D., 
 William Bartlett, Esq., Rev. Samuel Worces- 
 ter, and Dea. Samuel H. Walley, of Massa- 
 chusetts. 
 
 The commissioners had their first meeting 
 at Farmington, Connecticut, on the 5th of the 
 following September, five only being present. 
 A constitution was adopted, and officers were 
 chosen. The Prudential Committee appointed 
 consisted of William Bartlett, Esq., and Rev. 
 Messrs. Spring and Worcester. Mr. Worces- 
 ter was chosen Corresponding Secretary, and an 
 address to the Christian public was prepared, 
 accompanied by a form of subscription. 
 
 A beginning was thus made ; but though 
 the objects of the Board were regarded with 
 favor by some liberal individuals, it was doubt- 
 ful whether means could be very soon secured 
 in this country to send out and support a dis- 
 tant mission. Yet four young men were ready 
 
 and waiting to be sent. The eyes of the Pru- 
 dential Committee wore turned to the London 
 Missi#iury Society, which was already in suc- 
 cessful operation, and in Jan., 1811 , Mr. Judsou 
 was sent to England to confer with the Direc- 
 tors of that society on various points, and to 
 ascertain whether any satisfactory arrangement 
 could be made for prosecuting the work of 
 missions in concert; so that American mis- 
 sionaries might for a time receive their sup- 
 port in part from the London society without 
 committing themselves wholly to its direction. 
 No such arrangement, however, was made. 
 
 In June, 1812, an act of incorporation for 
 the Board was obtained from the Legislature 
 of Massachusetts. The second annual meeting 
 was held at Worcester, Mass., Sept. 18, 1811 ; 
 seven members being present. Donations to 
 the amount of $1,400 had been received. 
 Messrs. Judson, Nott, Hall and Newell were 
 appointed as missionaries to labor under the 
 direction of this Board ; and it was resolved, 
 as soon as practicable, to establish a mission 
 in the East, attention being turned specially to 
 the Burman Empire, and another in the West, 
 among the Indians of this continent. Late in 
 January, 1812, Messrs. Newell and Hall, who 
 had been attending to medical studies in Phil- 
 adelphia, returned hastily with the intelligence 
 that a vessel was to sail from that port in 
 about two weeks for Calcutta, and would ac- 
 commodate the missionaries. The Prudential 
 Committee immediately met. It was short 
 notice, and only about 1,200 dollars were at 
 their disposal ; yet, on the 27th of Jan. they 
 resolved to send out the four missionaries. 
 Then another, Mr. Luther Rice, desired to join 
 the mission, and they " dared not reject his re- 
 quest." Measures were at once taken to se- 
 cure, if possible, the requisite funds, and in 
 about three weeks, more than $6,000 was col- 
 lected. The missionaries were ordained on 
 the 6th of Feb., in the Tabernacle at Salem, 
 and after some delay sailed, Messrs. Judson 
 and Newell, with their wives, in the Caravan, 
 from Salem, Feb. 19, and Messrs. Nott, Hall, 
 and Rice, with the wjfe of Mr. Nott, in the 
 Harmony from Philadelphia, about the same 
 time. — See Tracy's History of tlie A. B. C. F. 
 M. ; Life of Dr. Worcester, Vol. II, Clvap. 2 ; 
 Memoir of Dr. Judson, page 39 and on ; and Re- 
 ports of t/ie Board. 
 
 From this small beginning the Board has 
 gone on until now its annual receipts are about 
 §300,000, and it has under its care, in different 
 parts of the world, near 400 missionary la- 
 i)orers, male and female, sent from this coun- 
 try, and more than 200 native helpers. The 
 annual meetings, which are held in September, 
 from being attended by seven members, as in 
 1811, or by nine as in 1812, in the parlor of a 
 private dwelling, have come to be occasions 
 of fully as deep and extensive interest as 
 any annually recurring religious occasion in 
 the United States. They commence usually 
 
AMERICAN BOARD. 
 
 109 
 
 on Tuesday afternoon and close in the forenoon 
 of the next Friday. They are always open to 
 the public, and can be held only in towns of 
 considerable population, that lodgings may be 
 furnished for the many hundreds who come 
 together from every section of the country. 
 The largest houses of worship are not sufficient- 
 ly large to accommodate all who wish to 
 hear, and usually on "Wednesday and Thurs- 
 day evenings simultaneous meetings, for pop- 
 ular address, are held in two and sometimes in 
 three different houses. This is the case also 
 on Thursday afternoon, when the Lord's Supper 
 is celebrated. 
 
 Organization, Mode of Operation, ^c. — The 
 officers of the Board are chosen annually, by 
 ballot, and are, at present, a President, Vice- 
 President, Kecording Secretary, Treasurer, two 
 Auditors, four Corresponding Secretaries, and 
 a Prudential Committee of eight. This com- 
 mittee, whose members receive no compensa- 
 tion for their services, meets at the missionary 
 house at least once every week, on Tuesday 
 afternoon, for the transaction of business. 
 There are now about 200 corporate members 
 of the Board residing in at least 21 different 
 States of the Union. These alone, by the char- 
 ter, are voting members, forming the body cor- 
 porate ; but the payment of $50, if the person 
 be a clergyman, or $100, if a layman, consti- 
 tutes any one an honorary member, who may 
 share fully in the deliberations of the annual 
 meetings. About 9,000 persons have, since 
 the beginning, been thus constituted honorary 
 members. There is also a small number of 
 corresponding members, residing mostly in 
 foreign lands, and chosen, as are the corporate 
 members, by ballot. 
 
 This Board is neither an ecclesiastical nor 
 a denominational body, and is not supported 
 by denominations as such, but by individual 
 Christians. The Commissioners were at first 
 appointed by the General Association of Mass- 
 achusetts, which is Congregational, with pow- 
 er to adopt their own form of organization and 
 their own rules and regulations. By its char- 
 ter, obtained from the Legislature of Massa- 
 chusetts, in 1812, the Board elects its own mem- 
 bers without limitation as to numbers, or resi- 
 dence, or religious denomination ; but not less 
 than one-third of the members must at all times 
 be respectable laymen, and not less than one- 
 third respectable clergymen. In 1812, the Sec- 
 retary, in behalf of the Board, suggested to the 
 General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church, 
 " the expediency of forming an institution simi- 
 lar to theirs, between which and theirs there 
 might be such cooperation as should promote 
 the great object of missions amongst the une- 
 vangelized nations." The Assembly, however, 
 while they urged the churches under their care 
 to aid in this good work, thought " the business 
 of foreign missions might probably be best 
 managed under a single Board," and so decli- 
 ned forming any separate institution. At the 
 
 very next meeting of the Board, (Sept., 1812) 
 thirteen new members were elected, from seven 
 different states, of whom eight, 4 from New 
 York, 2 from New Jersey, and 2 from Penn- 
 sylvania, were Presbyterians. In 1831, of 62 
 corporate members, 31 were Presbyterians, 
 24 Congregationalists, 6 Reformed Dutch, and 
 one Associate Reformed ; and of the 70 or- 
 dained missionaries, 39 were Presbyterians, 29 
 Congregationalists, and 2 Reformed Dutch. 
 Until the division of the General Assembly 
 in 1837, most of the efforts of Presbyterian 
 churches in the United States for foreig-n mis- 
 sions were made through this Board ; and this 
 is still true of what are called New School 
 Presbyterian churches, and also of the Reform- 
 ed Dutch and the Associate Reformed churches. 
 Missionaries from these different denominations 
 have always been sent out without distinction, 
 and generally without even considering their 
 ecclesiastical relations in designating them to 
 their fields of labor. 
 
 The missions thus formed, are not controlled 
 by ecclesiastical bodies ; though they may 
 themselves be considered as in some sense, 
 such bodies. They are organized and governed 
 as communities, the votes of a majority of the 
 missionaries and male assistant missionaries 
 deciding all questions, in their regular meet- 
 ings. Thus the missions provide for the organi- 
 zation, government and care of churches, which 
 they form, and may enter into organizations 
 among themselves, for fraternal or ecclesiasti- 
 cal purposes, as associations or presbyteries, 
 according to circumstances and the views and 
 preference of the majority. So far as any use 
 of the funds of the Board is involved, the ac- 
 tion of the mission is, of course, subject to the 
 revision of the Prudential Committee. 
 
 By its charter the Board is limited to the 
 work of " propagating the Gospel in heathen 
 lands, by supporting missionaries and diffusing 
 a knowledge of the Holy Scriptures." Its 
 missions are conducted with reference to the 
 ultimate complete evangelization of the nations 
 or communities to which they are sent. They 
 are not regarded as permanent institutions, but 
 are established to plant the institutions of the 
 Gospel, and to prepare the people themselves 
 to support these institutions ; — to gather 
 churches which are expected to be ultimately 
 self-supporting churches, sustaining their own 
 religious teachers^ and acting for the still fur- 
 ther propagation of the truth. A leading ob- 
 ject therefore, has ever been, as fast as possible, 
 to educate and train a pious native ministry, 
 who may be fitted to act as pastors of the na- 
 tive churches, and as evangelists in gathering 
 churches. For this purpose not only have 
 schools of a lower order been established, but 
 seminaries, in which native young men of piety 
 and promise might be thoroughly educated, 
 and also boarding-schools for girls, from which 
 educated native preachers and teachers might 
 obtain suitable partners for life. 
 
110 
 
 AMERICAN BOARD. 
 
 With the same end in view, to raise up Chris- 
 tian ohurc'lu^ and conimunitiet?, which shall be 
 indepenilont of all foreign aid and foreign iu- 
 Btruction, much labor has been expended to re- 
 duce unwritten languages to a written form, 
 to prepare faithful translations of the Scrip- 
 taree, and to give a Christian literature to 
 those for whose evangelization the missions 
 have been established. By the missionaries of 
 this Board fifteen diflFerent languages have 
 been reduced to writing, and the Scriptures 
 have been translated wholly or in part into 
 more than twenty languages. Still it is ever 
 inculcated upon the missionaries that they are 
 to regard themselves as sent, emphatically, to 
 preach the Gospel, and thus, with Divine assist- 
 ance, to turn men individually, and at once, 
 " from darkness to light ; and from the power 
 of Satan unto God ;" and that, in all ordinary 
 cases, every other work is to be subordinate to 
 this in the labors of the missions. In relation to 
 other societies the Board acts strictly upon the 
 principle of non-interference ; in agreement 
 with others considering " certain great centres 
 of human society and marts of commerce, as 
 common ground " to some extent, but in all 
 other cases avoiding fields of labor which are 
 already occupied by others. 
 
 Results — Statistics, ^c. — The operations of the 
 Board have been crowned witn many tokens 
 of Divine favor. This is not the place to give 
 particular accounts of revivals, with which the 
 missions have been favored ; these accounts 
 will be found in the notices of the several mis- 
 sions ; but simple reference may here be made 
 to revivals at Ceylon in 1819, 1821, 1824, and 
 '25, 1830 and '31, and 1835 ; to the great re- 
 vival at the Sandwich Islands, in 1838, '39 and 
 '40, as the fruits of which more than twenty 
 thousand persons, giving hopeful evidence of 
 piety, were received into the churches ; to revi- 
 vals among the Nestorians in 1846, 1849, 1850, 
 and 1851 ; to repeated revivals among the 
 Choctaws and other tribes of Indians on this 
 continent ; and to the reformation among the 
 Armenians, obviously, a work of Divine 
 grace, and a work of deep interest and great 
 promise, though differing from many of the re- 
 vivals already referred to, which has been in 
 progress for the last ten or twelve years. In 
 all, from the beginning, more than forty thous- 
 and hopeful converts have been gathered into 
 churches connected with the dififerent missions. 
 None but those who are thought to give evi- 
 dence of true piety are received to the churches 
 and much care is exercised by the missionaries 
 in receiving members. 
 
 The receipts and expenditures of the Board, 
 for each year since its organization, and for 
 each period of four years, are presented in the 
 following table. 
 
 It is a fact of great significance, that all 
 missionary societies and boards, after a certain 
 period in their history, begin to receive back 
 their expenditures from the missions which 
 
 they have planUnl. The sum thus received by 
 this Board in 1853 was $12,905, which is more 
 than one twenty-fifth part of their whole 
 receipts. And this proportion is much greater 
 in the case of the large London societies, which 
 have been much longer in operation. 
 
 i 
 
 ■1 
 
 Rocoipts. 
 
 Periods of 4 
 YeaiB. 
 
 Expen- 
 ditures. 
 
 Periods. 
 
 A. 
 
 (S 
 
 
 
 
 
 1811 
 1812, 
 
 
 $999 52 
 
 $900 
 
 $0,609 
 
 
 13,611 60 
 
 
 1813, 
 
 
 ll,3(fl 18 
 
 
 8,611 
 
 
 1814 
 
 
 12,265 56 
 
 
 7,078 
 
 
 1815, 
 
 
 9,493 89 
 
 
 6,027 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 $46,732 
 
 
 $30,415 
 
 1816, 
 
 
 12,601 03 
 
 15,934 
 
 1817, 
 
 
 29,948 63 
 
 
 20,485 
 
 
 1818, 
 
 
 34,727 72 
 
 
 30,346 
 
 
 1819, 
 
 
 37,620 63 
 
 
 40,337 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 114,698 
 
 
 113,102 
 
 1820, 
 
 39,949 45 
 
 57,621 
 
 1821, 
 
 
 46:354 96 
 
 
 46,771 
 
 
 1822, 
 
 
 60,087 87 
 
 
 60,474 
 
 
 1823, 
 
 
 65,758 94 
 
 
 66,380 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 202,151 
 
 
 231,246 
 
 1824, 
 
 47,483 68 
 
 54,157 
 
 1826, 
 
 
 65,716 18 
 
 
 41,469 
 
 
 1826, 
 
 
 61,616 25 
 
 
 59,012 
 
 
 1827, 
 
 4. 
 
 88,341 89 
 
 253,157 
 
 103,430 
 
 258,068 
 
 1828, 
 
 102,009 64 
 
 107,676 
 
 1829, 
 
 
 106,928 26 
 
 
 92,533 
 
 
 ?f!?' 
 
 
 83,019 37 
 
 
 84,798 
 
 
 1831, 
 
 
 100,934 09 
 
 
 98,313 
 
 
 
 5. 
 
 
 392,891 
 
 
 383,320 
 
 1832, 
 
 130,574 12 
 
 120,954 
 
 1833, 
 
 
 145,847 77 
 
 
 149,906 
 
 
 1834, 
 
 
 152,386 10 
 
 
 159,779 
 
 
 1835, 
 
 6. 
 
 163,340 19 
 
 592,148 
 
 163,254 
 
 
 
 
 593,893 
 
 1836, 
 
 
 176,232 15 
 
 
 210,407 
 
 
 1837, 
 
 
 252,076 56 
 
 
 254,589 
 
 
 1838, 
 
 
 236,170 98 
 
 
 230;642 
 
 
 1839, 
 
 
 244,169 82 
 
 
 227;491 
 
 
 
 7. 
 
 
 908,649 
 
 
 923,129 
 
 1840, 
 
 241,691 04 
 
 246,601 
 
 1841, 
 
 
 235,189 30 
 
 
 268,914 
 
 
 1842, 
 
 
 318,396 53 
 
 
 201,147 
 
 
 1843, 
 
 8. 
 
 244,254 43 
 
 1,039,531 
 
 256,687 
 
 1,033,349 
 
 1844, 
 
 
 236,394 37 
 
 244,371 
 
 1845, 
 
 
 255,112 96 
 
 
 216,817 
 
 
 1846, 
 
 
 262,073 55 
 
 
 257,605 
 
 
 1847, 
 
 
 211,402 76 
 
 
 264,783 
 
 
 1848, 
 
 9. 
 
 
 964,983 
 
 
 
 254,056 46 
 
 282,330 
 
 983,570 
 
 1849, 
 
 
 291,705 27 
 
 
 263,418 
 
 
 1850, 
 
 
 251,862 28 
 
 
 264,329 
 
 
 1851, 
 
 10. 
 
 274,902 21 
 
 1,072,526 
 
 274,830 
 
 1,084,907 
 
 
 
 
 1852. 
 
 
 301,732 70 
 
 
 257,727 
 
 
 1853, 
 
 
 314,922 88 
 
 616,655 
 
 310,607 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 568,334 
 
 6,205,120 
 
 6,203,339 
 
 It will be seen, that with only one exception, 
 in each period of four years there has been an 
 advance upon the receipts of the previous 
 period. But though there has been, on the 
 whole, constant progress, the receipts have 
 often fallen below the expenditures, and there 
 have been seasons of great pecuniary embar- 
 rassment in the operations of the society. In 
 1837 embarrassments of this kind occurred, 
 the sad effects of which were deeply and widely 
 felt. For some years previous to 1836 the 
 
AMERICAN BOARD. 
 
 Ill 
 
 means provided had been sufficient ; tlie Pru- 
 dential Committee felt encouraged to enter 
 upon new and enlarged operations, and the 
 call was specially for men, while the churches 
 supposed there would be no difficulty in regard 
 to means. In the mean time laborers, in an- 
 swer to the call, offered their services in 
 increasing numbers, and within four years, 
 from 1833 to 1836 inclusive, no less than 185 
 new laborers, male and female, were sent 
 abroad. Expenses were thus greatly increas- 
 ed, and the receipts did not increase in pro- 
 portion. At the annual meeting in 1836 it 
 was announced that 64 missionary laborers 
 were then under appointment, who were ex- 
 pecting soon to be sent abroad ; but there was 
 a balance of about ^39,000 against the trea- 
 sury at the close of the financial year, (July 
 31,) and that balance was increasing. The 
 voice of the meeting, however, and the voice 
 of the churches, still was " let the missionaries 
 be sent ; " and the means seemed likely to be 
 provided. From October, 1836, to February, 
 1837, the receipts greatly increased, and in the 
 mean time 60 laborers, male and female, had 
 embarked for their respective fields. But now 
 there came a financial crisis in the affairs of 
 the country. Pecuniary difficulties began to 
 press upon the business community with very 
 great severity ; the receipts of the Board 
 rapidly diminished, and the debt rapidly in- 
 creased. The committee felt obliged to stop. 
 Laborers under appointment were detained, 
 and new missionaries were appointed only on 
 condition that they would not be sent out, and 
 must be at no expense to the Board, until the 
 state of the treasury should warrant it. Thus 
 discouraged, many turned from regarding the 
 heathen world and looked for other fields of 
 labor, and never since have there been so many 
 ready to offer themselves for the foreign ser- 
 vice. But this was not all. Difficulties still 
 increasing, the committee felt called upon, in 
 June, to curtail the appropriations which had 
 been made in the missions for the year 1838, 
 by $40,000 ; and the missions were informed 
 of the painful necessity, and required to con- 
 tract their operations. With 60 more laborers 
 to be supported, the pecuniary means of the 
 missions were thus reduced $45,000 below 
 what had been allowed in 1836. The effect 
 was deeply painful. Every missionary was 
 embarrassed, and every branch of missionary 
 operations crippled. Schools were broken up 
 or greatly reduced, and in Ceylon alone 5,000 
 children were dismissed from under Christian 
 instruction " to the wilderness of heathenism ; " 
 the facilities for preaching were abridged ; the 
 operations of presses were greatly diminished ; 
 native teachers and other helpers were de- 
 prived of employment ; native Christians were 
 disheartened, and the opposing heathen tri- 
 umphed. 
 
 Still the influence of this reverse was not 
 simply evil. The missions, the Christain public 
 
 at home, and the I'rudential Committee all learn- 
 ed some important lessons ; and a new impulse 
 was given to missionary effort, particularly in 
 the rural districts of the country, where the in- 
 telligence of the disastrous influence of such 
 reduced appropriations was received. The 
 financial embarrassments were felt first and 
 most severely in the cities and larger towns ; 
 those in such communities who would have 
 given liberally, found themselves deprived of 
 the means of giving; the country churches 
 were thus called upon to come with more lib- 
 erality to the support of the missionary work, 
 and in these churches the amount contributed, 
 and doubtless also the number of contributors, 
 greatly increased. 
 
 Such painful consequences of financial diffi- 
 culty have never since occurred, and it is 
 believed will never again occur in the history 
 of this society. The treasury was not fully 
 relieved until 1842. Indeed, in 1841 the debt 
 had increased to $57,000 ; and for five years 
 again, from 1847 to 1851, there was a constant 
 balance against the treasury. In 1848 this 
 balance was $59,890. But while all proper 
 economy has been used, and the appropriations 
 to the missions have been limited to the lowest 
 safe amount, the operations have been steadily 
 carried forward, and contributions have been 
 so increased as again to relieve the Board. 
 
 Until 1838 the Board had no permanent 
 building for the accommodation of its business 
 at Boston, which has ever been the centre of 
 its operations ; and much inconvenience and 
 loss had been experienced from frequent remo- 
 vals. This year an eligible site was purchased 
 in Pemberton Square, and a substantial build- 
 ing erected ; the whole expense being met 
 from permanent funds, which could not be used 
 to sustain the missions or to pay the debts. 
 In addition to this building, the Board now 
 has invested funds, of which the interest only 
 may be used, amounting to $96,000. 
 
 The missions now under the care of the Board 
 are the following, of each of which a particular 
 notice will be found in its appropriate place : 
 
 The mission to the Zulus, and the Gaboon 
 mission, in Africa ; the mission to Greece, 
 and the mission to the Jews, in Europe ; the 
 mission to the Armenians, the Syrian mission, 
 the Assyrian mission, and the mission to the 
 Nestorians, in Western Asia ; the Bombay, 
 Ahmednuggur, Satara, Kolapur, Madras, Ar- 
 cot, Madura, and Ceylon missions, in Southern 
 Asia ; the Canton, Amoy, and Fuh-chau mis- 
 sions, in China ; missions to the Choctaws, 
 the Oherokees, the Dakotas, the Ojibwas, the 
 Senecas, the Tuscaroras, and the Abenaquis, 
 among the North American Indians ; and the 
 Micronesian mission in the NorthPacific Ocean. 
 The large and successfui Sandwich Islands mis- 
 sion has just passed from under the care of the 
 Board as an organized mission, it being merg- 
 ed in the Christian community of the islands, 
 which have been virtually christianized ; but 
 
112 
 
 AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION. 
 
 necessary aid is still furnished for the support 
 of roligioos and educational institutions. 
 
 The following table presents the more im- 
 portAut 8tAtij?tica of the missions at different 
 
 periods, separated by intervals of ten yeai-g, 
 commencing "vvith 1823, eleven years after the 
 first missionaries wore sent out. 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 .1 
 25 
 
 1 
 
 29 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 as 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 42 
 
 66 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 -2 . 
 
 |i 
 it 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 bo 
 
 .s 
 
 1 
 
 'fcl 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 lo" 
 
 1 
 
 a « 
 
 "is 
 
 1* 
 
 1823.... 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 
 3,000 
 
 1S33.... 
 
 24 
 
 66 
 
 
 85 
 
 
 44 
 
 137 
 
 4 
 
 50 
 
 39 
 
 1,940 
 
 6 
 
 
 2 
 
 204 
 
 1 
 
 50 
 
 534 
 
 66,000 
 
 1843.... 
 
 26 
 
 86 
 
 
 131 
 
 
 39 
 
 178 
 
 14 
 
 116 
 
 62 
 
 20,797 
 
 16 
 
 442,066,185 
 
 7 
 
 624 
 
 22 
 
 699 
 
 610 
 
 30,778 
 
 1863.... 
 
 28 
 
 111 
 
 38 
 
 167 
 
 1 
 
 26 
 
 205 
 
 39 
 
 192 
 
 103 
 
 26,714 
 
 11 
 
 958,132,478 
 
 9 
 
 487 
 
 23 
 
 645 
 
 712 
 
 21,993 
 
 AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONARY 
 UNION : This is the name at present adopt- 
 ed by the Foreign Missionary Association of the 
 regular or Calvmistic Baptists of the non-slave- 
 holding States, and with few exceptions, it is 
 entirely dependent on them for its maintenance 
 and direction. Existing, at first, with a different 
 organization, and under the name of the Bap- 
 tist Triennial Convention, it was founded at 
 Philadelphia, in May, 1814, near the date at 
 which the Baptists of the United States entered 
 upon the work of propagating the Gospel 
 among the heathen. It owes its origin to a 
 series of events which have always been deemed 
 extraordinary and providential, and are, on 
 that account, worthy of a brief narration. 
 
 In the earliest company of missionaries sent 
 to the east, by the American Board of Com- 
 missioners for Foreign Missions, were Rev. 
 Adoniram Judson and Rev. Luther Rice, who 
 in separate ships, sailed from the United States 
 in 1812. During the passage to Calcutta, Mr. 
 and Mrs. Judson found reason to change their 
 sentiments respecting the mode and the subjects 
 of Christian baptism. On their arrival in In- 
 dia they repaired to Serampore, and on making 
 knowm their views, were baptized by immersion 
 by Rev. Mr. Ward, one of the missionaries of 
 the English Baptist mission, who were stationed 
 there. A few weeks later Rev. Mr. Rice 
 avowed a similar change in his sentiments, and 
 was also baptized at Serampore. It was this 
 unexpected announcement that these American 
 Missionaries, who had already arrived in the 
 East, had become Baptists and had thrown 
 themselves on the Baptist churches of the 
 United States for the means of prosecuting the 
 self-denying and heroic mission they had un- 
 dertaken, that first enlisted the general sym- 
 pathy of that denomination in this country, 
 and led to the formation of their earliest foreign 
 missionary organization. 
 
 Immediately on the receipt of letters from 
 Messrs. Judson and Rice, containing this an- 
 nouncement, a society was formed in Boston, 
 which was styled, " The Baptist Society for 
 
 Rre. I. R. Wokcestkb. 
 
 Propagating the Gospel in India and other 
 Foreign Parts." The new Society, whicli was 
 designed to be the parent of numerous auxil- 
 iaries, immediately pledged to Mr. Judson an 
 adequate support in the prosecution of his mis- 
 sion, whenever the Commissioners of the Ameri- 
 can Board should discontinue their patronage ; 
 and at the same time, thinking that such an 
 arrangement might be more acceptable to him 
 as well as more advantageous in its results, they 
 proposed that he should become connected with 
 the English Baptist Mission at Serampore. 
 This proposal was very wisely and fortunately 
 declined by the managers of that mission, who 
 urged upon their American brethren the forma- 
 tion of a general missionary society, in the 
 United States. At this juncture, early in the 
 year 1814, Mr. Rice arrived in America from 
 Calcutta, having returned for the special pur- 
 pose of enlisting the Baptist churches of the 
 country in the enterprise of forming missions 
 among the heathen. He was immediately ap- 
 pointed traveling agent of the society already 
 formed, and was directed to visit the churches 
 in the middle and southern states, and at the 
 same time, an address to the members of the 
 denomination was prepared by the society's 
 managers, setting forth the obligations which 
 God in his providence had imposed on them, 
 in consequence of the secession of Messrs. 
 Judson and Rice from the missions which they 
 had been sent to establish. Through the agency 
 of these causes, numerous local societies for 
 missions were soon formed in nearly all the older 
 states, most of them auxiliary to the society 
 originally established at Boston. The appeal 
 which had been made was not disregarded, and 
 as a consequence of the awakened sense of ob- 
 ligation, a general meeting of ministers and 
 laymen, delegates from societies and religioua 
 bodies in different parts of the Union, assem- 
 bled at Philadelphia, in May, 1814. At this 
 meeting was formed, " The General Missionary 
 Convention of the Baptist Denomination in 
 the United States of America, for Foreign 
 Missions." The Constitution provided that the 
 
AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION. 
 
 113 
 
 Convention should meet once in three years 
 and that it should be composed of persons who 
 should annually contribute one hundred dollars 
 or who should represent societies contributiug 
 that sura. The affairs of the Convention were 
 entrusted to a board of managers who were to 
 be elected once in three years, and in whom 
 was vested the appointment of the Secretary, 
 Treasurer, and other officers, and also of all 
 the missionaries. By a subsequent alteration 
 in its Constitution, the Convention for a con- 
 siderable period, embraced not only the foreign, 
 but also the home missions of the Baptist de- 
 nomination, and also, for a still longer period, 
 the management of the Columbian College, an 
 institution of learning established at Washing- 
 ton, in the District of Columbia. These latter 
 objects, however, were always regarded as se- 
 condary, and were at length entirely laid aside, 
 and the Convention left to its own proper work 
 of founding and directing foreign missions. 
 
 The Triennial Convention, thus collecting its 
 members from all parts of the country, con- 
 tinued, with the slight exceptions already stated, 
 unchanged in its organization till the year 1845, 
 when, in common with similar associations in 
 other denominations, its councils became dis- 
 tracted and its treasury embarrassed by the 
 sectional feuds generated by the discussion of 
 the institution of slavery. At this time the 
 churches in most of the slaveholding States, 
 becoming dissatisfied with the principles avow- 
 ed by its managers, united in a separate organi- 
 zation, under the name of the " Southern Bap- 
 tist Convention." In November, 1845, at a 
 special meeting of the Triennial Convention, an 
 H entire change was effected in its composition 
 and a new Constitution adopted, which declared 
 its single object to be to " diffuse the knowl- 
 edge of the religion of Jesus Christ, by means of 
 missions, throughout the world." According 
 to its new Constitution, the principle of repre- 
 sentative membership is laid aside, and the as- 
 sociation is now composed of life members who 
 are made such by the payment of one hundred 
 dollars. Its name has likewise been changed to 
 the " American Baptist Missionary Union." 
 Its meetings are annual, and its affairs are com- 
 mitted to a board of managers composed of 75 
 persons, of whom at least one -third must not 
 be ministers of the Gospel, and who appoint 
 from their own number an executive commit- 
 tee of nine persons, by whom, in connection 
 with two corresponding secretaries and a trea- 
 surer, missionaries are appointed, missions are 
 established, and all the actual business of the 
 society is transacted. The members of the 
 Union, as has been stated, generally belong to 
 the Baptist churches in the non-slaveholding 
 States, but this results from the influence of 
 common sentiments and not from any provi- 
 sion of its Constitution. It is in reality as 
 comprehensive as was the convention which 
 preceded it, and of which it is the legal and 
 lineal successor. 
 
 Thus organized arid composed, the Ameri- 
 can Baptist (Foreign) Missionary Union, from 
 the humble beginnings with which it com- 
 menced, has steadily advanced in its work and 
 has extended its missions from Rangoon in the 
 kingdom of Burmah, where the first was estab- 
 lished, to all parts of that kingdom, to Siam, 
 China and Assam, to the Teloogoos in India, 
 to the western coast of Africa, to Greece, Ger- 
 many and France, and to the Indians of the 
 American continent. In the number of its 
 missions, in the extent of its resources, and the 
 amount of its annual revenues, it ranks second 
 only to the American Board of Commissioners 
 among the foreign missionary organizations 
 of the United States. Its missionaries have 
 been sent forth for the simple purpose of 
 preaching the Gospel. They have been in all 
 cases instructed to make this their great object 
 and to regard the introduction of science and 
 art, the education of the young and even the 
 translation of the Scriptures as subsidiary to 
 it. The number of those who have been ap- 
 pointed and sent from this country, and who 
 are now in the employment of the managers of 
 the Union, is sixty-six missionaries and sixty- 
 four female assistants, exclusive of two hundred 
 and twenty preachers, teachers, and other as- 
 sistants who have been appointed from among 
 the native converts in the several countries 
 where the missions have been established. 
 These missionaries are now engaged in preach- 
 ing the Gospel in the languages of upwards of 
 twenty different divisions of the human race. 
 They have established twenty-one organized 
 missions, embracing 84 stations and five hun- 
 dred and thirty-nine out-stations, and in the 
 churches, 192 in number, which they have 
 planted in the different parts of the world, are 
 embraced about 15,219 persons who have been 
 converted by their labors. Their schools are 
 88, and contain 1,992 pupils. 
 
 Of these missions the most interesting and 
 successful are those among the Burmans and 
 Karens in the kingdom of Burmah and the 
 neighboriug provinces, and those in several of 
 the states of Germany. The Karens present a 
 singular example of a people for the most part 
 without any form of idolatry, but possessed of 
 singular moral sensibility and unusually dis- 
 posed to receive the doctrines of the Gospel of 
 Jesus Christ. Oppressed and despised by their 
 Burman masters, they have hailed the advance- 
 ment of English power in the East, and have 
 entered with gladness into the freedom and se- 
 curity which it everywhere brings. They have 
 received Christianity from the teaching of the 
 missionaries with an eagerness which has sel- 
 dom been paralleled among any other portion 
 of mankind. After these no other missions of 
 the Union have had a success equal to that 
 which has been bestowed on the mission in 
 Germany. It was commenced by the baptism 
 of a devoted and liberal minded German, Mr. 
 J. G. Ouckeu, in the waters of the Elbe at 
 
lU 
 
 AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION. 
 
 Hambarg, in 1833, by Rev. Dr. Soars, who 
 at thiit time was residing: iu Gcrniftuy as a 
 student Since then, by theprsevering'labors 
 of this earliest convert, a mission has been es- 
 tablished which, without a single missionary 
 sont from the United States, now extends 
 
 through nearly all tho states of Germany and 
 into Denmark and Holland. 
 
 The following table presents a comprehen- 
 sive view of tho missions of the Union, and 
 their results : 
 
 MISSIONS OP THE UNION, 1853-54. 
 
 iOSSQLONS. 
 
 Iff Asia: 
 
 Haulmain Burman 
 
 Maulraain Karcu 
 
 Tavoy 
 
 Arracan 
 
 Bassein 
 
 Bangoon 
 
 Proine j 
 
 Shwaygyeen 
 
 Toungoo 
 
 Siam 
 
 HoDgkong 
 
 Ningpo 
 
 Assam 
 
 Teloogoo 
 
 Whole number in Asia 14. 
 
 IrAtbica: Bassa 1. 
 
 InEpkofk: 
 
 French 
 
 German 
 
 Greek 
 
 Whole n umber in Europe. . 8. 
 
 IsDiAN MiaaiONB : 
 
 Qjibwa 
 
 Shawanoe 
 
 Cherokee 
 
 Whole number in America. 3. 
 
 Totals 21. 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 "E 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 k 
 
 •2-? 
 
 ■H 
 
 11 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 
 .a 
 
 to 
 a 
 
 * 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 S 
 
 
 1 
 
 .a 
 
 3 
 
 t 
 
 £ 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 170 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 100 
 
 
 100 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 11 
 
 19 
 
 14 
 
 29 
 
 869 
 
 2 
 
 44 
 
 3 
 
 40 
 
 
 84? 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 22 
 
 22 
 
 68 
 
 1,046 
 
 2 
 
 96 
 
 15? 
 
 300 
 
 17 
 
 396 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 16 
 
 
 15 
 
 1 
 
 50 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 56 
 
 60 
 
 470 
 
 5,000 
 
 1 
 
 80 
 
 20? 
 
 280 
 
 21 
 
 360 
 
 2 
 
 32 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 11 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 433 
 
 1,673 
 
 1 
 
 180 
 
 
 
 
 180 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 36? 
 
 
 43? 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 35 
 
 2 
 
 21 
 
 2 
 
 20? 
 
 
 41? 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 .. 
 
 ., 
 
 6 
 
 75 
 
 
 75 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 86 
 
 3 
 
 86 
 
 8 
 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 i2 
 
 79 
 
 8 
 
 73 
 
 5 
 
 216 
 
 8 
 
 289 
 
 1 
 19 
 
 132 
 
 2 
 49 
 
 2 
 50 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 50 
 
 2 
 
 63 
 
 98 
 
 159 
 
 124 
 
 1,027 
 
 8,873 
 
 13 
 
 614 
 
 65 
 
 1,168 
 
 78 
 
 1,682 
 
 2 
 
 •• 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 .... 
 
 17 
 
 1 
 
 31 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 43 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 16 
 
 8 
 
 83 
 
 330 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 44 
 
 388 
 
 5 
 
 
 5 
 
 31 
 
 44 
 
 681 
 
 4,618 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 55 
 
 397 
 
 2 
 8 
 
 - 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 .... 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 52 
 
 1 
 
 52 
 
 12 
 
 48 
 
 53 
 
 714 
 
 4,958 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 52 
 
 2 
 
 56 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 21 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 74? 
 
 3 
 
 80? 
 
 8 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 10? 
 
 100 
 
 2 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 46 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 69 
 
 1,250? 
 
 1 
 
 86 
 
 •• 
 
 
 1 
 
 85 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 15 
 
 » 
 
 14 
 
 79 
 
 1,371 
 
 4 
 
 136 
 
 2 
 
 74 
 
 6 
 
 210 
 
 84 
 
 539 
 
 66 
 
 64 
 
 129 
 
 220 
 
 192 
 
 1,820 
 
 15,219 
 
 19 
 
 685 
 
 69 
 
 1,306 
 
 88 
 
 1,992 
 
 * Including theological and normal. 
 
 The officers of the American Baptist Mis- 
 sionai-y Union chosen at the annual meeting 
 in May, 1854, are as follows, viz. : 
 
 Hon. George N. Briggs, L.L. D., President ; 
 Rev. Bartholomew T. Welsh, D.D., Kev. Silas 
 Bailey, D.D., Vice-Presidents. 
 
 Rev. Wm. H. Shailer, D.D. Recording Sec- 
 retary. 
 
 The Board of Managers is composed of 75 
 members, who are annually elected, and of 
 whom at least one-third are not ministers of 
 the Gospel. Of this Board, the officers in 1854 
 were as follows : 
 
 Hon. Ira Harris, Chairmain. 
 " Rev. Sewall S. Cuttting, Recording Secre- 
 tary. 
 Executive Officers : 
 
 Rev. Solomon Peck, D.D., Corresponding 
 Secretary for the Foreign Department. 
 
 Rev. Edward Bright, D.D., Corresponding 
 Secretary for the Home Department. 
 
 Richard E. Eddy, Treasurer. 
 
 The subjoined table will present a complete 
 
 view of the financial 
 
 growth and present ro- 
 
 sources ( 
 
 )f the " Missionary Union" : 
 
 Contributions to the American Baptist 
 
 
 Missionary Union. 
 
 
 1815 
 
 $13,476 10 
 
 1830 
 
 21,622 00 
 
 1816 
 
 not recorded. 
 
 1831 
 
 15,266 00 
 
 1817 
 
 11,986 87 
 
 1832 
 
 16,556 00 
 
 1818 
 
 10,240 78 
 
 1833 
 
 27,600 30 
 
 1819 
 
 8,076 51 
 
 1834 
 
 23,941 20 
 
 1820 
 
 12,296 21 
 
 1835 
 
 30,747 00 
 
 1821 
 
 7,758 16 
 
 1836 
 
 40,547 06 
 
 1822 
 
 3,615 27 
 
 1837 
 
 45,567 00 
 
 1823 
 
 4,944 29 
 
 1838 
 
 34,583 21 
 
 1824 
 
 9,127 63 
 
 1839 
 
 51,289 30 
 
 1825 
 
 5,186 20 
 
 1840 
 
 57,781 00 
 
 1826 
 
 9,499 50 
 
 1841 
 
 52,598 68 
 
 1827 
 
 9 246 35 
 
 1842 
 
 50,706 20 
 
 1828 
 
 10,639 00 
 
 1843 
 
 45,883 04 
 
 1829 
 
 9,158 60 
 
 1844 
 
 62,062 29 
 
AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRISTIAN UNION. 
 
 116 
 
 1845 
 
 71,876 21 
 
 1851 97,900 00 
 
 1846 
 
 100,150 02 
 
 1852 104,755 90 
 
 184Y 
 
 85,009 24 
 
 1853 114,697 97 
 
 1848 
 
 85,894 42 
 
 1854 122,757 42 
 
 1849 
 
 88,902 99 
 
 
 
 1850 
 
 89,818 00 
 
 $1,663,763 92 
 
 
 
 Prof. W. Gammjjix. 
 
 AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRIS- 
 TIAN UNION : This Society was organ 
 ized in the city of New- York in the month of 
 May, 1849. It was formed by the union, or fu- 
 sion rather, of three societies which had existed 
 for several years. (1) There was The Foreign 
 Evangelical Society. The history of this soci- 
 ety is as follows: Shortly after the French 
 Revolution of July, 1830, several Christian 
 brethren in Paris wrote to gentlemen in New- 
 York, — some of whom had formerly resided in 
 France, in pursuit of commercial business, and 
 others had visited that country as travelers, — 
 to say that the new constitution to which that 
 Revolution had given existence, granted to 
 Protestants a large amount of religious liberty, 
 and thus opened the door for evangelical effort. 
 The communication of this cheering intelli- 
 gence was accompanied by an earnest entreaty 
 for help, from Christians of this land — a land 
 which had been blest by receiving into its bo- 
 som thousands of the excellent but persecuted 
 Huguenots, at the Revocation of the Edict 
 of Nantes, and for whose liberties La Fayette 
 and thousands of other brave Frenchmen had 
 suffered and bled. 
 
 This appeal was not made in vain. The sum 
 of $2,000 was raised and sent, and the sugges- 
 tion was made that a Home Missionary Socie- 
 ty, or something equivalent, should be formed, 
 to carry forward the work in France. This 
 led to the formation of The Evangelical Society 
 of France in the year 1833. In 1834, at the 
 request of that Society, a small association 
 was formed in New York, called The French 
 Association. This association two years later 
 took the name of The Evangelical Association. 
 In the month of May, 1834, at the request of 
 that committee, the Rev. Mr. Baird, (now the 
 Rev. Dr. Baird,) agreed to go to France in the 
 spring of 1835, with his family, for three years, 
 and make Paris his home, for the purpose of 
 learning what could be done by the American 
 churches to aid their Protestant brethren in 
 France. This mission was fulfilled, and not 
 only was much information acquired in rela- 
 tion to France, Belgium, Italy, and other Pa- 
 pal countries on the Continent, but a good deal 
 was done in that period to promote the cause 
 of temperance in the northern portions of it. 
 Besides what The Fiench Association was en- 
 abled to do for the cause of the gospel in France 
 during those three years, the American Home 
 Missionary Society was induced to make grants 
 to the amount of $4,500 ; whilst the Amer- 
 ican Bible and Tract Societies also did much. 
 
 In the spring of 1838, Dr. Baird returned 
 
 and reported to two public meetings in New 
 York the state of things in France and other 
 parts of Europe. In the month of May, 1839, 
 The Foreign Evangelical Society was organ- 
 ized, for the promotion of the work in Papal 
 countries generally. The gentlemen who form- 
 ed it were members of the Presbyterian, Con- 
 gregational, and Reformed Dutch Churches. 
 This Society existed from 1839 to 1849. Dur- 
 ing this period of ten years the interest which 
 was felt in the evangelization of the Papal 
 world, steadily and perceptibly increased. The 
 Rev. Dr. Baird returned to Europe, and his 
 family made Paris and Geneva their home for 
 four years more, whilst he on the one hand 
 traveled extensively on the Continent in pros- 
 ecution of the work, and on the other, re- 
 turned twice to this country for the same object. 
 At the end of ten years the society had mis- 
 sionaries in France, Belgium, Sweden, Canada, 
 Hayti, and South America, besides having 
 aided the work in Germany, Poland, Russia, 
 and Italy. The receipts of tlie Society were 
 $10,127 in 1840, $13,725 in 1841, $15,733 in 
 1842, $9,303 in 1843, $12,392 in 1844, $16,- 
 037 in 1845, $19,930 in 1846, $14,670 in 1847, 
 $19,214 in 1848, and 23,805 in 1849 : making 
 in all, the sum of $154,345, received during a 
 period of ten years ; all of which sum was ex- 
 pended in the various branches of the Society's 
 operations. The receipts of The French Asso- 
 ciation, and The Evangelical Association, which 
 preceded The Foreign Evangelical Society, 
 were $19,759. Besides all this, there passed 
 through the hands of Dr. Gurdon Buck, a 
 member of the Board, for the Grande Ligne 
 Mission in Canada from first to last, nearly if 
 not quite, $20,000, not including some $6,000 
 which were granted to that mission by the For- 
 eign Evangelical Society, and which also passed 
 through Dr. Buck's hands. 
 
 (2) In the year 1843, The American 
 Protestant Society was formed. It owed 
 its existence to the fact that the immigra- 
 tion of Roman Catholics from Europe had 
 become very great, and was increasing every 
 year with a fearful rapidity. It was felt that this 
 foreign and un-Protestant element was becom- 
 ing very large, and demanded special and appro- 
 priate effort. Indeed, a similar movement in 
 some respects, had been made some years earlier, 
 when an "American Reformation Society" 
 was formed by the exertions of the Rev. Dr. 
 Brownlee and others. And although that So- 
 ciety did not exist long, it prepared the way 
 for The American Protestant Society, of which 
 we are speaking. 
 
 This Society existed from 1843 to 1849. 
 Its objects were : 1. To enlighten Protestants 
 of this country in regard to the errors of Rome ; 
 2. To convert and save the votaries of Rome 
 who are among us. In prosecution of these 
 objects, the press was employed and a goodly 
 number of colporteurs and other missionaries 
 were maintained — laboring among the Irish, 
 
110 
 
 AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRISTIAN UNION. 
 
 German aiul iMlur forcij^u Romanists in the 
 country. 'J'he Society interested itself greatly 
 in the winter of 1848-'4y in behalf of the 
 I'ortugiieso exiles from Madeira, who were in 
 IViuidad, and took measures to bring them 
 to this country. The receipts of the Society 
 were about §4,000 in 1844, 36,742 in 1845, 
 ^9,014 in 1846, «19,365 in 1847, $24,672 in 
 1848 and $28,363 in 1849 ; making a total of 
 ^92,160, all of which was laid out in prosecut- 
 ing the good work in our own country. 
 
 (3) In the year 1843 also, an association was 
 forniid, in New- York, called The Philo-Italian 
 Society, which afterwards took the name of 
 The Christian Alliance. This society, as well 
 as the American Protestant Society, embraced 
 
 good men of many if not all the evangelical 
 enominations. It is known that its object 
 was to aid in causing the truth to enter into 
 Italy — a diificnlt work before the year 1848, 
 as rep:ards all parts of that country, and still 
 a diflicult work excepting in the kingdom 
 of Sardinia alone. As this society did not 
 publish its proceedings, we are not able to say 
 anything of them further than that it em- 
 ployed an active agent, a Protestant Italian 
 ibr years on the confines of Italy, who lost no 
 opportunity for sending tracts and the Sacred 
 Scriptures into that country. Nor are we 
 able to state the amount of its receipts. 
 
 It was by the union of these three societies 
 in the month of May, 1849, that Tlie Ameri- 
 can and Foreign Christian Union was formed. 
 The new Board of directors as well as the offi- 
 cers, were chosen from among the boards and 
 officers of the three societies. The new society 
 undertook the work and assumed the responsi- 
 bilities of the three societies, and entered at 
 once upon its appropriate labors. 
 
 It will be seen, therefore, that the field of 
 this society's operations includes our own 
 country and foreign lands. As to its objects, 
 and the mode by which it aims to accomplish 
 them, the following article (No. II.) of its con- 
 stitution is full and explicit : " The object of 
 this society shall be by missions, colportage, 
 the press, and other appropriate agencies, to 
 diffiLse and promote the principles of religious 
 liberty, and a pure and evangelical Chris- 
 tianity, both at hoine and abroad, wherever a 
 corrupted Christianity exists." 
 
 The society contemplates imparting, so far 
 as it may be able, a pure Christianity to those 
 ifho now only know a corrupt form, whether 
 in this land or in foreign countries. It may 
 well deem its field a great and important one. 
 The present Po{)e says that there are two hun- 
 dred millions of Roman Catholics in the world. 
 The present Emperor of Russia says that there 
 are fifty millions of followers of the Greek 
 Church in his vast empire. These two esti- 
 mates make two hundred and fifty millions, 
 and ecfual the fourth part of the human race. 
 And although his holiness may make quite too 
 high an estimate of the number of his " child- 
 
 ren," yet if M'c include all the members of the 
 Oriental Churches, (in the Turkish Empire, 
 Independent Greece, the Ionian Isles, and the 
 Austrian Empire) we shall certainly find that 
 the Church of Rome and the six Oriental 
 Churches embrace not much less than one 
 quarter of the inhabitants of the globe. And 
 how important that these two hundred and 
 fifty millions should have the true gospel 1 
 They embrace powerful nations — France, 
 Austria, Russia, to say nothing of the Italian, 
 the Spanish, and the Portuguese races. 
 
 The society has made a noble beginning. 
 In the ycai- ending in May, 1854, {tha Jiflh of 
 its existence,) it employed between 130 and 
 140 missionaries of all classes, at home and 
 abroad, (more than half of whom were ordained 
 ministers) belonging to seven different nations 
 and speaking as many languages. Of these, 
 90 labored among the Romanists in the United 
 States. Besides this, the Society aided the 
 work directly and indirectly in many ways, 
 both at home and abroad. In the two first 
 years of its existence, 1850 and '51, it expend- 
 ed nearly $15,000 for the removal to Illinois 
 of some 500 or 600 Portuguese exiles, to whom 
 we have already referred. It publishes a 
 monthly Magazine of 48 pages, The American 
 and Foreign Christian Union, which has a 
 large circulation, and two monthly sheets, one 
 in English and the other in German. It has 
 issued quite a number of excellent books and 
 tracts relating to Romanism, and is constantly 
 publishing more. Its receipts were $57,223 in 
 1850, $45,707 in 1851, $55,653 in 1852, 
 $67,597 in 1853 and $75,751 in the year end- 
 ing in May, 1854. Making a total of $301,- 
 931 in five years, all of which, save a balance of 
 $2,706, was expended in the prosecution of the 
 work at home and abroad. 
 
 This important society, still in its infancy, 
 has indeed a great work on its hands. Be- 
 sides all its other objects, it has the cause of 
 " Religious Liberty," the " Protection of Amer- 
 ican citizens when abroad in their rights of 
 conscience and public worship," the " Defence 
 of the public schools," and the proper " Ten- 
 ure of church property" to look after. The 
 great meetings which it held in the city of 
 New-York, in behalf of some of these objects, 
 in January, 1853 and 1854, (the Madiai, and 
 religious rights of Americans when abroad) 
 exerted a happy influence, and are an earnest 
 of what it may, with God's blessing, be expected 
 to achieve in the future. — Officer op the Soc. 
 AMERICAN INDIAN mSSION ASSO- 
 CIATION.— This Association is connected 
 with the Baptist churches in the South-west. It 
 was organized in Cincinnati, on the 26th of Oo- 
 tober, 1842, and the Executive Board located at 
 Louisville. At its first annual meeting, the year 
 following, six missionaries were under appoint- 
 ment, four of whom were in the field, and the 
 amount of receipts was $3,000. The next report 
 gives 15 missionaries and assistants ; 75 bap- 
 
AMERICAN MISSIONARY ASSOCIATION. 
 
 117 
 
 tisms; receipts $8,090. The third, seventeen 
 laborers, two small schools, and about forty 
 baptisms. The report for 1852, shows $15,811, 
 receipts ; four missions, located among the 
 Ohoctaws, Creeks, "Weas, Piankeshaws, Mia- 
 mies, and Putawatamies ; with six stations and 
 eight out^stations ; 28 missionaries and as- 
 sistants ; 21 churches ; 126 baptisms during 
 the year; 165 pupils in schools; and over 
 L300 communicants. (See Indians.) 
 
 AMERICAN MISSIONARY ASSOCI- 
 ATION. — This society was formed at Albany, 
 N. Y., September 3, 1846, by a convention of 
 friends of missions, who were dissatisfied with 
 what they understood to be the position of ex- 
 isting missionary bodies, relative to slavery, 
 oppression, idolatry, polygamy, caste, &c., &c. 
 Among the declared objects sought to be at- 
 tained by the Convention, were the following : 
 To institute arrangements for the propagation 
 of a pure and free Christianity, and for gather- 
 ing and sustaining churches in heathen lands, 
 from which these and other like forms of ini- 
 quity should be excluded by terms of admis- 
 sion, or by disciplinary process ; to unite evan- 
 gelical Christians in an effort to give the Gos- 
 pel to those who were destitute of it, without 
 insisting upon those points on which the best 
 and most enlightened friends of Christ still dif- 
 fer ; and to secure a more direct responsibility 
 in the management of the society, by giving 
 to its evangelical supporters a vote in the con- 
 trol of its operations. 
 
 In the address issued by the Convention, it 
 was said that the crisis then apparent in the 
 cause of missions, afforded a favorable oppor- 
 tunity " for the review of existing usages and 
 methods of missionary effort ; of comparing 
 them with the New Testament standard ; of 
 discarding whatever might be found wrong or 
 defective, and supplying their place in such 
 manner as might be found to accord with pri- 
 mitive teachings and examples." The Consti- 
 tution of the Association provides that " any 
 person of evangelical sentiments, who professes 
 faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, who is not a 
 slaveholder, or in the practice of other immo- 
 ralities, and who contributes to its funds, may 
 become a member of the society." Its affairs 
 are managed by an Executive Committee of 
 twelve, subject to the revision of the annual 
 meeting. Churches or local missionary bodies, 
 agreeing to the principles of the society, may 
 appoint and sustain missionaries of their own, 
 through the agency of this body. " The so- 
 ciety, in collecting funds, in appointing officers, 
 agents, and missionaries, and in selecting fields 
 of labor, and conducting the missionary work, 
 will endeavor particularly to discountenance 
 slavery, by refusing to receive the known fruits 
 of unrequited labor, or to welcome to its em- 
 ployment those who hold slaves." 
 
 Soon after the formation of the Association, 
 the Union Missionary Society, the Committee 
 
 for the West Indian Mission, and the Western 
 Evangelical Missionary Association were merged 
 in it, and their missions were transferred to its 
 care. These missions were in the island of 
 Jamaica ; among the Ojibwa or C/iippeway In- 
 dians of Minnesota ; and in Western Africa. 
 The society has now, in addition to these, a 
 mission in the Sandwich Islands; in Siam ; 
 among the fugitives in Canada; among the 
 Chinese and other foreigners in California ; and 
 a number of home missionaries in the destitute 
 parts of the United States ; it has also recently 
 undertaken a mission to the Copts in Egypt. 
 
 Missionaries and assistant missionaries, male 
 and female, in Africa 13 ; Jamaica 21 ; Siam 
 6 ; Sandwich Islands 2 ; Canada 2 ; California 
 2 ; among the Ojibwa Indians 19 ; for the Copts 
 
 2: Total, 90 
 
 Native teachers and assistants, - - 9 
 
 Churches in the Foreign field, - - - 14 
 Number of Church members, - - 1160 
 
 The following table shows the receipts of the 
 society, for each year since its formation : 
 First year ending Sept. 1, 1847, $13,033 67 
 Second" " « 1848, 17,095 74 
 
 Third « « « 1849, 21,982 96 
 
 Fourth " « " 1850, 25,159 56 
 
 Fifth " " " 1851, 34,535 47 
 
 Sixth « " « 1852, 30,233 54 
 
 Seventh, « « 1853, 42,496 20 
 
 Total, 184,537 14 
 
 It will thus be seen that the aggregate of 
 the society's receipts for the first seven years of 
 its existence, has been $184,537 14, and its 
 average increase about 24 per cent, per annum. 
 
 The home missionaries of the Association 
 are specially instructed to discourage intempe- 
 rance and slavery, and labor for their removal. 
 The churches to which they minister, as well 
 in the slave states as elsewhere, regard slave- 
 holding as a disciplinable offence, and exclude 
 those who practice it from their communion. 
 Twelve churches have been formed on these 
 principles in Kentucky and North Carolina, 
 and are reported to be in a prosperous condition. 
 The number of home missionaries aided by 
 the Association, the first year of its existence, 
 was four ; in the seventh year, ninety. The 
 number of churches under their care was one 
 hundred and eight. The whole number of 
 church membei-s is not known, a portion of the 
 missionaries having made their reports to an 
 auxiliary society. — Rev. Geo. Whipple. 
 
 AMHERST : A town in the province of 
 Maulmain, in British Burmah. It was founded 
 in 1826 by Lord Amherst, at which time it be- 
 came a station of the American Baptist Mis^ 
 sion in Burmah. It is the burial-place of Mi's. 
 Ann H. Judson. 
 
 AMOY : A city of China, situated on an 
 island of the same name, on the coast north- 
 ward from Canton ; being one of the five j)orts 
 open to the foreign trade. 
 
118 
 
 ANEITEUM— ARMENIANS. 
 
 ANEITEUM : An island of New ITebrides, 
 where is a station of the Loudon Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 ANXAMABOE: On the Gold Coast, 
 West Africa, lat. 5° 10' N. lou^. 1° 5' W. A 
 station of the Wcsleyan Missionary Society, 
 commenced in 1835 :*has now 1 missionary, 3 
 cbapcls, 5 local preachers, 15 teachers, 237 
 scholars, 254 members, and 900 attendants on 
 public worship. 
 
 ANTIG U A : One of the West India Isles, 
 lat. 17^ 8' N. long. 61^ 52' W. A district of 
 the Wcsleyan Missionary Society, commeuccd 
 in 1786 ; has now 17 missionaries, 8 stations, 
 44 chapels, 42 local preachers, 508 teachers, 
 12,000 members, 5,523 scholars, and 33,G50 
 attendants on public worship. 
 
 AOTEA: (Beecham-Dale) in New Zea. 
 land. A station of the AVesleyan Missionary 
 Society. Commenced in 1823. Has now one 
 missionary, 10 chapels, 26 local preachers, 315 
 mcmbers,'590 scholars, and 600 attendants on 
 public worship. 
 
 APIA : A station of the London Mission- 
 ary Society on the Island of Upolu, one of the 
 Samoan group. 
 
 ARABIAN COAST : An outrstation of 
 the "W'esleyan Missionary Society, in South 
 Ajnerica. (See Demerara.) 
 
 ARABKIR : A station of the American 
 Board among the Armenians, in the Eastern 
 part of Asia Minor, not far from the Euphra- 
 tes. Population 6000 in the town, and 15,000 
 including the immediately surrounding dis- 
 trict. 
 
 ARCOT : A city of Eastern Hindoostan, 
 seventy miles S. W. of Madras. It is the 
 centre of a very populous district, and was 
 occupied by the American Board in 1852. 
 
 ARMENIANS : Armenia, in the most 
 flourishing period of its history, was divided 
 into fifteen provinces, the central one of which 
 was Ararad, the second cradle of the human 
 race. (Gen. 8 : 4, Jer. 51 : 27, and in Heb., 
 2 Kings 19 : 37, Is. 37 : 38.) Its situation is 
 at the eastern extremity of Asia Minor, lying 
 at short distances from the Mediterranean on 
 the south-west, the Black sea on the north- 
 west, the Caspian sea on the north-east, and 
 at a much greater distance from the Persian 
 Gulf on the south-east. Its western boundary 
 is not far from six hundred miles east of Con- 
 stantinople. It extends about 430 miles in 
 longitude, and about 300 in latitude ; having 
 on the north the ancient Albania, Iberia, and 
 Colchis ; on the west, Pontus and Cappadocia ; 
 on the south, Mesopotamia and Assyria ; and 
 on the east, Media Atropatane, or the modern 
 Aderbaijan. It is an elevated region, abound- 
 ing in lofty mountains, and having a climate 
 of considerable severity. Several large and 
 celebrated rivers go out from it ; the Euphror 
 tes and Tigris towards the Persian Gulf ; the 
 Jorokh (Akampsis) to the Black sea ; the 
 Aras (Araxes) and the Koor (Cyrus) to the 
 
 Caspian Sea. Some portions of the country, 
 particularly the province of Ararad (Ararat) 
 which in the Bible gives name to the whole 
 of Armenia, are of great fertility. 
 
 History. — The Armenian race is claimed to 
 be, and probably is, of the highest antiquity. 
 The father of it, according to their own tradi- 
 tion, was Haig, a son of Togarmah, the son of 
 Gomer, who was one of the sons of Japhet. 
 Hence to this day, in their own language, they 
 call themselves Haik ; their country, also, they 
 designate by the same name, or by the deriva- 
 tive Ilaiasdan. The seventh of the dynasty 
 of Haig was the famous hero Aram, from whom 
 the names Armenia and Armenian originated, 
 by which the country and people have been 
 known among foreigners for many ages. That 
 distinguished monarch, after freeing his own 
 territory from invaders, against whom the Ar- 
 menians seem to have had to maintain a con- 
 stant resistance, extended his arms into Cappa- 
 docia, and gave laws and his name successive- 
 ly to the regions called. First, Second, and 
 Third Armenia ; which, united under the gen- 
 eral name of Armenia Minor, extended from the 
 Euphrates to Cajsarea, and from the mountains 
 of Pontus to those of Cilicia. Armenia Minor 
 passed early into the hands of the Romans, 
 but deserves even at this day, on account of 
 the number of its Armenian inhabitants, to 
 retain its ancient name. 
 
 The principal foreign relations of Armenia, 
 during the early part of its history, were doubt- 
 leas with the neighboring kingdoms of Assyria, 
 Media, and Babylon. The minute details giv- 
 en by Armenian historians of this traditionary 
 period, are, of course, entitled to little confi- 
 dence, although the occasional intermingling 
 of this portion of their history with that of 
 Scripture, gives us certain stand-points of in- 
 terest and certainty from which to view it. 
 In 328 A. C, Alexander, whose empire absorb- 
 ed so many oriental monarchies, extended his 
 conquests over Armenia, and extinguished the 
 dynasty of Haig, which is said, with a few 
 grafts upon it of foreign stocks, to have held 
 during eighteen centuries uninterrupted pos- 
 session of the throne. After the death of A lex- 
 ander, Armenia was ruled by governors, 
 sometimes of Greek and sometimes of native 
 origin, who derived their authority from So 
 leucia and Macedonia, and at times laid claim 
 to entire independence. It was next subdued 
 by the power that overturned the empire of 
 the Seleucida; in the East and formed an im- 
 passable barrier to the ambition of Rome. 
 A. C. 149, Arshag the Great, (Arsaces, called 
 also Mithridates I.) grandson of the founder 
 of the Parthian Empire, placed his brother 
 Yagharshag (Valarsaces) upon the throne of 
 Armenia. Thus commenced this branch oi 
 the ArsacidiE, under whose reign of 577 years, 
 the Armenians enjoyed greater prosperity than 
 during any other period of their history. Dik- 
 ran (Tigraues) the fourth of this dynasty, was 
 
'Uiri7BRSIT7] 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 119 
 
 an ally of Mihrtad, (Mithridates) the great 
 king of Pontus, in his wars with Sylla and 
 Lucullus. Thus he became involved in a war 
 with Eome, which Pompey ended by imposing 
 upon him humiliating conditions of peace. 
 New alliances against Rome led to the over- 
 running of his country by Anthony, in his Par- 
 thian wars, 34 A. 0. The part north of the 
 Aras was given to his son, who was soon ex- 
 pelled, and the remainder became permanently 
 tributary to Augustus. With this division the 
 reigning family, after the leading members 
 had died in captivity, was also divided. The , 
 northern branch, alternately upheld and de- 
 throned by the Romans and Persians, was at 
 length supplanted by Georgian princes, who 
 again yielded to a brother of the king of Per- 
 sia, and finally after a separation of 85 years 
 the whole country was reijnited under the 
 southern branch. This branch had its capital 
 at Medzpin, (Nisibis.) From a remote anti- 
 quity the north-west part of Mesopotamia was 
 inhabited by a race resembling the Armenians 
 in person, manners, and language ; and at the 
 commencement of the Christian era, constitu- 
 ted, according to Armenian report, under the 
 name of Mesopotamia of the Armenians, an 
 integral part of their kingdom, and was the 
 residence of the court for 228 years. Abgar, 
 one of their sovereigns, they say, transferred 
 the seat of government to Oorfa, and was there 
 converted to Christianity. Having believed 
 in Christ from mere report, he corresponded 
 with him, received from him his portrait miracu- 
 lously impressed upon a handkerchief, and was 
 then instructed and baptized, together with 
 many of his people, by Thaddeus, whom the 
 apostle Thomas, in obedience to the command 
 of Christ, sent on this mission, and who extend- 
 ed his labors, with success, to other places. 
 But the successors of Abgar apostatized from 
 the faith, and martyred, besides many common 
 Christians, several of the apostles and disciples 
 of our Lord, and nearly exterminated Chris- 
 tianity from the country. The third in suc- 
 cession from Abgar having obtained from 
 Vespasian, A.D. 75, the dominion of the whole 
 of Armenia proper, by ceding to the Romans 
 his possessions in Mesopotamia, removed his 
 court to the province of Ararat. In A.D. 302 
 Durtad (Tiridates) the king and his court were 
 baptized and the nation received Christianity. 
 The instrument of this great work was Gre- 
 gory the Illuminator, since the highest saint in 
 the Armenian calendar. Without receiving 
 the stories of his numerous and wonderful mi- 
 racles, we must admit him to have been a re- 
 markable man. Their conversion to Chris- 
 tianity increased their hatred to the Armenian 
 royal house of the Sassanian dynasty of Persia, 
 which inflicted on the country unspeakable 
 misery until A. D. 381, Armenia was divided 
 between the king of Persia and the emperor 
 of Constantinople. It was not, however, until 
 A. D. 428 that the Arsacidaj dynasty came to 
 
 an end and the country was reduced to the 
 condition of a dependent province. 
 
 This brief sketch allows no details of the 
 subsequent conflicts of the Armenians against 
 their Magian persecutors of Persia ; their fall 
 into the hands of the khalifs of Mohammed, 
 A. D. 637 ; the miseries which they suffered 
 from the rival claims of the courts of Damas- 
 cus and Constantinople ; their varying fortunes 
 to the invasion of the Seljookian Turks, from 
 which they suffered terrible massacres, A. D. 
 1049 ; of the petty independent kingdom in 
 Cilicia with its changing relations to Moghul, 
 Crusader, Turkish, etc., neighbors, to its over- 
 throw by the sultans of Egypt and its annexor 
 tion to that dominion, A. D. 1375 ; of the 
 awful devastations inflicted by the waves of 
 invasion that rolled over them under the g-ui- 
 dance, successively in the 13th and 14th cen- 
 turies, of Chingiz Khan and Timurlane ; and 
 the final conquest effected by the Turkmans 
 and Osmanli Turks, the latter of whom still 
 rule over a large part of Armenia ; Russia 
 since the beginning of the present century, 
 having obtained a large portion of it from 
 Turkey and Persia, between whom it was for 
 a long time shared. Few countries have a his- 
 tory more painful than Armenia. 
 
 Tke Armenian Church. — Receiving Chris- 
 tianity in the beginning of the fourth century, 
 the Armenians received it in the form which 
 had then become common in the East. Its 
 subsequent development was natiu'ally in the 
 same line of direction as in other national 
 churches starting from substantially the same 
 point of departure. While soon separated, on 
 the doctrine relating to the person of Christ, 
 from the Roman and Greek churches, it has 
 never ceased to be much influenced by them. 
 Previous to the invention of the Armenian 
 character by the learned monk Mesrob, A. D. 
 406, writing was done among them in the 
 Syriac and Greek characters, and the state of 
 letters was very low. This invention intro- 
 duced a new era, the first and most important 
 literary effort being the translation of the Bible 
 into Armenian, A. D. 411, by Mesrob and 
 Isaac the Catholicos. The version was made 
 from the Septuagint, and of course has all the 
 faults of the latter with some serious ones of 
 its own. It is still in use, and has been a boon 
 of immense value to the nation. It is held in 
 considerable estimation by Biblical scholars. 
 It is the oldest Armenian book extant, the 
 next being the history of the nation by Moses 
 Chorenensis, which was written about half a 
 century later. The Armenians were unaffected 
 by the Arian and Nestorian heresies, but in 
 the year 491 a synod of their bishops rejected 
 the decisions of the council of Chalcedon, while, 
 most inconsistently, it also anathematized 
 Eutyches. Although strenuously contending 
 for the formula of one nature in Christ, and 
 thereby cut off as heretical and schismatical 
 by the Greek and Romish Churches, modern 
 
120 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 missionaries nr. \ dii^posed to regard 
 
 the Armoniuns ; more ii) termiuolofry 
 
 than in idea rn.m uu .-iihodox faitli on tliut 
 point Tijey agree with the Greeks and otlier 
 oriental Churches in rejecting the " filio-que " 
 from the Niccne creed and maintaining the 
 procc»ion of the Holy Spirit from the Father 
 only. With some dillerence in forms and 
 modes of worship, the religions opinions of the 
 Armenians arc mostly like those of the Greeks. 
 The sign of the cross is used on all occasions 
 but made by the Greeks with three fingers, by 
 the Armenians with two, by the Jacobites with 
 one — the Greek usage pointing to the Trinity, 
 the Armenian to the two natures made one in 
 the person of Christ, and the Jacobite to the 
 Divine unity. They profess to hold to the 
 seven sacraments of the Latin church ; but in 
 fact extreme unction exists among them only 
 in name, the prayers so designated being inter- 
 mingled with those of confirmation, which 
 latter rite is performed by the priest at the 
 time of baptism. Infants are baptized, as 
 commonly in the Greek and other oriental 
 churches, by a partial immersion in the fount 
 and three times pouring water on the head. 
 Converted Jews, etc., though adults, are bap- 
 tized in the same manner, for the reason tlfet, 
 according to the tradition of their church, 
 the Saviour was thus baptized in Jordan. 
 They readily admit to their communion Ro- 
 manists and Protestants baptized by sprink- 
 ling, differing in this from the Greeks, who, 
 claiming orthodoxy to their church alone and 
 denying salvation to all others, receive none, 
 however previously baptized, without rebap- 
 tizing them. They believe firmly in transub- 
 stantiation, and adore the host in the mass, 
 which stupendous perversion of the sacrament 
 is followed by the same evils that are witnessed 
 from it in the Romish Church. The people 
 partake, however, in both kinds, the wafer 
 or broken bread (unleavened) being dipped 
 in undiluted wine, (the Greeks use leavened 
 bread and wine mixed with water,) and laid 
 carefully on the tongue. It must be received 
 fasting. They reject the Latin purgatory, but 
 believing that the souls of the departed may 
 be benefited by the aid of the Church, (which, 
 of course, must be paid for,) they pray for the 
 dead. Saint-worship is carried to an extraor- 
 dinary length, the addresses to saints being 
 often grossly idolatrous, and the mediation of 
 Christ lost sight of in the liturgical services 
 of the Church as it is in the minds of the peo- 
 ple. The cross and pictures of the saints are 
 also objects of worship as possessing inherent 
 eflBcacy. The Supreme Being is likewise re- 
 presented under the form of an aged, venerable 
 man, with whom, and the Son under the form 
 of a yoiing man, and th6 Holy Spirit symbol- 
 ized as a dove, the Virgin Mary is associated 
 in the same picture. The perpetual virginity 
 of the latter is held as a point of preeminent 
 importance. Confession to the priesthood, in 
 
 order to absolution, is deemed essential to sal- 
 vation, rcnanccs are imposed ; but absolution 
 is without money, and indulgences arc never 
 given. Baptism confers regeneration and 
 cleansing from sin, original and actual ; spirit- 
 ual life is maintained by penances and sacra- 
 ments ; and the priest holds in his hand the 
 passport to heaven. The merit of good works 
 IS acknowledged, particularly of asceticism. 
 Monachism, celibacy, fasting, etc., are viewed 
 as in other Eastern and Western churches ; 
 the number of fast-days, when no animal food 
 of any kind can be eaten, is 165 in the year. 
 On the fourteen great feast-days the observance 
 of the day is more strict than that of the Sab- 
 bath, which last is as in Roman Catholic 
 countries. Minor feasts are even more numer- 
 ous than the days in the year. The church 
 services arc performed in the ancient tongue, 
 not now understood by the common people, 
 and in a manner altogether perfunctory and 
 painful to an enlightened mind. There are 
 nine different grades of clergy, each receiving 
 a distinct ordination by the laying on of hands. 
 Four of these are below the order of dea- 
 con, and are called porters, readers, exorcists, 
 and candle-lighters. After these come the 
 sub-deacons, the deacons, the priests, then the 
 bishops, and last of all, the catholicos. The 
 catholicos is ordained by a council of bishops. 
 He is the spiritual head of the church, who 
 alone ordains bishops, and can furnish the mei- 
 ron or sacred oil used by bishops in ordaining 
 the inferior clergy, and in the various ceremo- 
 nies of the church. The priests are obliged to be 
 married men, and can never rise higher than 
 the priesthood, except in case of the death of a 
 wife, when, not being allowed to marry a second 
 time, they may enter among the vartabeds, an 
 order of celibate priests, who are attached to 
 the churches as preachers, (the married priests 
 do not usually preach,) or live together m mo- 
 nasteries, and from among whom the bishops, 
 etc., on whom the law of celibacy is imposed, 
 are taken. The ecclesiastical polity is modi- 
 fied somewhat according to the political gov- 
 ernments under which, in the countries of their 
 dispersion, the Armenians live. Originally, 
 there was but one head to the church, whose 
 residence was at the seat of the imperial or 
 kingly government. Subsequently, in the dis- 
 tracted condition of civil affairs, rival catholi- 
 coses rose up. At present three are acknowl- 
 edged — one at Aghtamar, in the Lake Van ; 
 one at Sis, with a small body of folloTvers in 
 the ancient Cilicia and neighboring territory ; 
 and one at Echmiadzin, acknowledged by 
 the Armenians in Europe, Asia Minor, and 
 Armenia proper. There are two patriarchs, 
 one at Constantinople and the other at Jeru- 
 salem ; the latter, however, being of little ac- 
 count compared with the former. This office is 
 not an ecclesiastical, but a civil one, as an eccle- 
 siastic the patriarch being only a bishop, hav- 
 ing properly no spiritual authority above that 
 
"ARMENIANS. 
 
 121 
 
 afiy otlier bishop. He receives his appoint- 
 ment from the Sultan, on a nomination of the 
 primates of the nation. His powers are defined 
 by an imperial Jirman, and he ranks, civilly, 
 with the great pashas of the empire. The 
 Armenian patriarchate of Jerusalem, the juris- 
 diction of which is very limited, dates back to 
 A. D. 1311, and owes its existence to the Sul- 
 tan of Egypt. Mohammed II., on the capture 
 of Constantinople in 1453, finding a patriarch 
 with spiritual jurisdiction over the whole 
 Greek church, sagaciously continued him at 
 the head of the Greeks that he might govern 
 them through him ; and transferring the Ar- 
 menian bishop of Brusa to the capital, he made 
 him, in like manner, patriarch of the Arme- 
 nians. As this officer is made responsible for 
 the good conduct of his people, he is clothed 
 with such prerogatives as are necessary to ena- 
 ble him to maintain his authority. Important 
 limitations have recently {see article on Turkey) 
 been imposed, but his powers are still great. 
 Heretofore there has been so little check that 
 his power has been almost absolute in respect 
 to the infliction of punishment. A prison 
 exists within his own precincts, over which he 
 has had entire control. A note from him to 
 the Porte (Turkish government^ has been, in 
 most cases, sufficient to secure tlie banishment 
 of any person, ecclesiastic or layman, to a dis- 
 tant part of the empire. If, owing to the rank 
 or influence of the individual, difficulty inter- 
 posed in procuring the order, a bribe was ready 
 and generally settled the question. The patri- 
 arch's sanction being required to such applica- 
 tions, it has been easy to practice the heaviest 
 oppressions by defeating attempts to procure 
 the official passports needed to go from place to 
 place, or licenses for occupying houses or shops, 
 or prosecuting trades, marrying, burying the 
 dead, etc., etc. ; and as our history will show, 
 the power to oppress thus possessed, has been 
 wielded with terrible severity, to prevent the in- 
 troduction of a purer faith and practice among 
 this people. The despotic power of the patri- 
 archs is practically, however, much modified 
 by the power of the primates of the commu- 
 nity, who are chiefly bankers, and all of them 
 men of great wealth. The patriarch is really 
 the creature of the primates, and can do little 
 without their approval. A permanent central- 
 ization of power, like that of Rome, is hindered 
 by the intrigues of rival parties in this body, 
 making and unmaking and controlling the 
 patriarch, who is thus, in general, merely the 
 tool of the party, which, for the time being, 
 by influence derived from its relations to those 
 in high places of the Turkish government, or 
 by its more liberal use of money, happens to 
 be in the ascendant. As circumstances change 
 and parties fluctuate, measures in process, or 
 in prospect, are liable to be interfered with 
 and frustrated ; and it will be seen how perse- 
 cution has often been averted, and quiet secured 
 to missionaries and their native coadjutors in 
 
 the prosecution of their evangelical labors, by 
 jealousies and party feuds among the spiritual 
 and temporal leaders of the Armenian com- 
 munity. The patriarch enjoys the title of arch- 
 bishop, and has the appointment of bishops to 
 their sees, but, as before stated, does not or- 
 dain to the office. One of the darkest features 
 of the state of the church is the universality 
 of simony in practice, although condemned in 
 its standards, and denounced in words ; but it 
 is notorious that the patriarch has to expend 
 large sums in obtaining and retaining his 
 office, to reimburse which, and for his own 
 emolument, he sells to the bishops their sees,. 
 who again ordain to the priesthood for money. 
 The moral character of the priests (being mar- 
 ried men) is superior to that of the vartabeds 
 and higher clergy, that of the latter being 
 generally confessedly bad. Their acquaintance 
 with the scriptures is very limited ; many 
 among them are unable to read them in the 
 ancient tongue. The state of education in 
 general is lamentably low. A gross supersti- 
 tion has taken the place of true religion, and 
 the light of truth and holiness, recently re- 
 kindled, beginning to shine with more than its 
 pristine splendor among that people, had well 
 nig^h gone out in utter darkness. The annals 
 of the Armenian church for the last few cen- 
 turies are a record of corruption, intrigue, and 
 crime, that cannot be contemplated without 
 the deepest sorrow and disgust. There is little, 
 indeed, in its history, from the beginning, to 
 cheer the heart, but the unshrinking fii-mness 
 with which it has in successive ages adhered 
 to the profession of its faith and the Christian 
 name, under the dreadful oppression of pagan 
 and Mohammedan conquerors and the strong- 
 est worldly inducements to apostatize ; and it 
 has also resisted wily efforts, repeatedly put 
 forth, and in some instances with sanguine 
 expectation of success, to subject it to the iron 
 rule of Rome. 
 
 Language and Literature. — Many of the 
 Armenians claim, for their nation, that it has 
 preserved the language of Noah, unaffected by 
 the confusion of tongues at Babel, and therefore, 
 that it has the original speech of our first parents 
 in Paradise; without conceding this modest 
 claim we are probably safe in allowing their 
 language a very early origin. Its relations 
 with other languages are fewer than those 
 which obtain in the case of most others ; yet 
 it clearly belongs to the Indo-Germanic family. 
 It is enriched very considerably from the San- 
 scrit ; and it has no affinity with the Semitic 
 tongues. As found in its earliest existing, as 
 well as later forms, it abounds in gutturals, and 
 is harsh to the ear of the foreigner ; but it has 
 strength, flexibility, and compass, and is capa- 
 ble of expressing thought by evolving from it- 
 self, without drawing from abroad, new terms 
 for the purpose. The conversion of the nation 
 to Christianity, led naturally to the introduo- 
 I tion of certain words from the Greek, and im- 
 
122 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 pressed a new character upon it in several re- 
 spects. It has also received accessions from 
 other languages, and as now spoken, differs 
 very considerably from the ancient tongue pro- 
 served in books. The Ararat, or eastern dia- 
 lect, spoken in Armenia, (excepting the pasha- 
 lie of Erzrftm,) and to the east of it, has de- 
 parted less from the ancient than the Constan- 
 tinopolitan or western dialect. The latter has 
 become moulded in its idioms and construction 
 by the Turkish, and is usually spoken with an 
 infusion of Turkish words. As now cultivated, 
 it is becoming purified from these, and receiv- 
 ing, as needed, added wealth from the ancient 
 or original Armenian. There has been little 
 published in this dialect as yet, by adherents 
 to the Armenian Church, but the publications 
 of convents at Vienna and Venice and Eomish 
 and Protestant missionaries have ushered in a 
 new era for this form of the Armenian tongue, 
 and the new intellectual life called into action 
 by missionary labors, and the contact of the 
 occidental civilization with that of the Orient, 
 has begun the creation of a valuable literature 
 in it. The modern dialects differ from the an- 
 cient language, chiefly in the disuse of certain 
 words, the introduction of certain words and 
 phrases not known to the ancient, and a change 
 m grammatical forms, collocations of words and 
 idiomatic expressions. The literature of the 
 ancient consists mainly of historical, ecclesias- 
 tical, liturgical, doctrinal, and polemical writ- 
 ings of the so-called Christian Fathers ; and of 
 these some are well worthy the study of the 
 learned. 
 
 Amount of Population and where found. — The 
 number of the Armenians is variously esti- 
 mated at from 2 1-2 to 6 or 7 millions. It is 
 impossible to ascertain it with any degree of 
 accuracy. They have become widely dispersed 
 from their original seat, everywhere, like the 
 Jews, preserving their distinct nationality and 
 characteristics. Multitudes of them were car- 
 ried away captives, by Saracens and Greeks ; 
 Toghrul and Timurlane carried thousands to 
 unknown countries ; the Egyptians removed 
 60,000 to Egypt; and it is known that the 
 Persians have always carried their captives 
 into servitude. Multitudes, moreover, have, at 
 various periods, been induced by oppression at 
 home, voluntarily to seek an asylum in distant 
 countries, to say nothing of other multitudes 
 that commerce has enticed away. We are not 
 surprised, therefore, at finding them, not only 
 in almost every part of Turkey and Persia, but 
 also in India, as well as in Russia, Poland, and 
 many other parts of Europe. 
 
 C/iaractfT^-A sad depravation of morals pre- 
 vails among all the populations of the East ; 
 but in respect to moral traits the Armenians 
 compare favorably with other races. Physi- 
 cally, they are athletic and vigorous : the Ar- 
 menian porters of Smyrna and Constantinople, 
 are men of great strength. In the mountains 
 of Cilicia and in some other localities, we still 
 
 find traces of the martial spirit, for which once 
 the nation was distinguished ; but in general, 
 ages of subjection hav(; disposed them to (luiet 
 submission, and abandoning hope of political 
 restoration as a nation, to seek compensation 
 in the diligent cultivation of the arts of peace. 
 The Armenians are cultivators of the soil, ar- 
 tizans, and merchants ; in industry, enterprise, 
 shrewdness, and perseverance they take pre- 
 cedence of other populations in the East, and 
 make themselves indispensable to the Turks 
 who rule over them. They build palaces for 
 the Sultan and his ministers, make his powder 
 and cast his cannon, collect and disburse his 
 revenue, and in fine, make themselves every 
 where indispensable to the government, and in 
 the business transactions of society. They 
 have supplanted the Jews in their special pre- 
 rogative of dealers in money. The Armenian 
 bankers of Constantinople, from their wealth 
 and relation, as creditors, to pashas and minis- 
 ters of state, have much consideration and in- 
 fluence, while in demeanor servile to those 
 from whom their wealth is gained, and often 
 made to suffer under the pressure of despotic 
 power. The employment most congenial to 
 the Armenian, and in which he reaps the most 
 sure and richest harvest of success, is that of 
 traffic. Through the agency of the merchants 
 of this class the products of the far East and 
 the West are exchanged across the countries 
 of Western and Central Asia, and by means 
 of the constant intercourse thus kept up, a bond 
 of sympathy is maintained between the most 
 distant portions of the race. Sedate and staid, 
 the Armenian is a striking contrast to the vi- 
 vacious and talkative Greek ; but in solid qual- 
 ities of mind and heart is, to say the least, not 
 his inferior. With less of imagination and 
 emotion, the bent of his mind is more to the 
 practical and the real. He learns languages with 
 less facility than many others, but in mathe- 
 matics, in the physical sciences, and in intel- 
 lectual and moral science, he shows an aptitude, 
 and makes proficiency equal to that of any 
 European race. 
 
 The Armenians show a high degree of reli- 
 gious sentiment, manifesting itself not merely 
 in a zealous and bigoted devotion to a religion 
 of forms, but in an impressibility under the 
 presentation of the great truths relating to 
 man's spiritual condition and prospects. In 
 this respect they differ greatly from races like 
 the Greek, Persian, and others ; and furnish a 
 ground of hope, which the remarkable progress 
 of an evangelical reformation among them is 
 daily strengthening, that they will receive, and 
 spread throughout the vast regions over which 
 they are scattered, the blessings of a pure and 
 saving Christianity. 
 
 Preparation for a work of Evangelization. — 
 It was a favorable circumstance that the er- 
 rors and corruptions introduced into the Arme- 
 nian Church had never been reduced to sys- 
 tematic form and set forth by authority of 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 123 
 
 Synod or Council, as was done in the Council 
 of Trent for the Romish Church. No Synod- 
 ical decision had ever rejected the word of God 
 as the ultimate authority to bind the con- 
 science ; and, however practically the tra- 
 ditions of men and authority of the Church 
 were exalted above the Bible, the sentiment 
 has been inwrought into the Armenian mind, 
 too deeply to be eradicated, that the Scrip- 
 tures, (not including the Apocryphal books, 
 which though sometimes read in the churches, 
 have never been considered canonical) are the 
 court of last resort, against whose decisions 
 nothing can be made to stand. The writings 
 of their own fathers contain abundant testi- 
 mony to the true Protestant doctrine on this 
 point. The Bible was locked up from the 
 mass of the people in the ancient language, 
 but the educated among them could read it, 
 and there was no ecclesiastical rule to forbid 
 the reading on the part of any. The New 
 Testament was even used as a common text- 
 book in commencing the study of the language 
 in the schools. The honor of having made 
 the first attempt in modern days for the refor- 
 mation of the Armenian church, is due to 
 a priest by the name of Debajy Oghlu, about 
 A. D. 1760. He lived in the quarter of Con- 
 stantinople called Psamatia. He appears to 
 have been acquainted with the character of 
 Luther, of whom he speaks in terms of decided 
 approbation, in a book which he wrote on the 
 errors of the Church, and in which he casti- 
 gates both clergy and people with an unspar- 
 ing hand. But while he makes constant re- 
 ference to the Bible, testing every principle 
 and ceremony by that high standard, and 
 severely reproves superstition and vice, he ex- 
 hibits no correct appreciation of the only wea- 
 pon that can overthrow error, the doctrine of 
 justification by faith alone through grace. 
 His book was never printed, but copies of it 
 were circulated from hand to hand, and at the 
 beginning of the present reformation in the 
 Church they were brought out from the ob- 
 scurity in which they had been kept, and used 
 with considerable effect. How much influence 
 this book may have had in preparing the way 
 for the reformation now in progress, cannot be 
 known. 
 
 In the year 1813, the British and Russian 
 Bible societies, becoming interested in the 
 Armenians, undertook to aid them with a sup- 
 ply of the word of God, copies of which were 
 very rare and dear. An edition of the Arme- 
 nian Bible (the version of the 5th century,) 
 was commenced by the latter society at St 
 Petersburgh, and by the former at Calcutta. 
 In 1815, the former edition, (of 5,000 copies) 
 was completed ; the latter edition (of 2,000 
 copies) was furnished two years afterwards. 
 The Russian Society also soon published an 
 edition of 2,000 copies of the ancient Arme- 
 nian New Testament by itself. The report of 
 the British Society for 1814, says, " The print- 
 
 ing of the Armenian Testament has awakened 
 great attention among the Armenians, parti- 
 cularly in Russia ; and a fervent desire has 
 been manifested on their part to possess that 
 invaluable treasure." The Emperor Alexan- 
 der being at that time a warm promoter of the 
 objects of the Bible Society throughout his 
 dominions, archbishops and bishops, governors 
 and generals, and nearly all the nobility of the 
 empire were among the patrons and supporters 
 of the institution. Among the rest was 
 Eprem (Ephraim) the Catholicos of the Ar- 
 menian Church, having his residence in Rus- 
 sian Armenia, who was elected one of the vice- 
 presidents of the society, and strongly favored 
 its efforts in behalf of his own co-religionists. 
 The British Society also put into circulation 
 among the Armenians of Turkey large num- 
 bers of New Testaments previous to 1823 ; and 
 in that year we find it publishing at Constan- 
 tinople an edition of 5000 copies of the New 
 Testament, and of 3,000 copies of the four 
 gospels alone. These were widely distributed 
 through various agencies. The teachers of 
 schools, some of the priests and deacons and all 
 of the higher clergy, having made the ancient 
 language their special study, were prepared to 
 be benefited by these ; and in the sequel the 
 reformation began among the teachers. But 
 the discovery then made that that language 
 was not understood by the mass of the people, 
 led to the issuing by the Russian Society of 
 the New Testament translated into the Arme- 
 no-Turkish, in 1822, and in the following year 
 by the British Society in the vulgar Armenian 
 tongue. A portion of the Armenians of Tur- 
 key (perhaps one-third, chiefly in the more 
 southern parts of Asia Minor,) have lost en- 
 tirely the use of their vernacular tongue, and 
 speak only Turkish ; and it was for them espe- 
 cially that the first named translation was in- 
 tended, being in the Turkish language written 
 with the Armenian character. These transla- 
 tions were very defective, yet were useful. 
 They have since been supplanted by new and 
 greatly improved translations made and pub- 
 lished under the auspices of the British and 
 American Bible Societies by missionaries of 
 the American Board. Up to this period, the 
 Armenian ecclesiastics made no opposition, so 
 far as is known, to the circulation of the Bible 
 among their people, and some of them favored 
 it ; but when Messrs. Lewis and Baker, agents 
 of the Bible Society in 1823, sought the ap- 
 probation of the Patriarch at Constantinople 
 to the printing of a version of the New Tes- 
 tament in the modern Armenian, which the 
 common people could understand, that digni- 
 tary refused his sanction in the most positive 
 terms. He even threatened that if such a 
 work were attempted, he would prohibit the 
 perusal of it, and punish such as should be 
 found in the possession of it ; and the clergy 
 generally, so far as they were consulted, unan- 
 imously reprobated the plan of such a transla- 
 
124 
 
 ARMENIANS 
 
 tion. nierarcbism dreads the lipht of God's 
 word, and must chiinj^'c its nature before it can 
 tolerate any movcmeut towards truly spiritual 
 reform. 
 
 Mission op thk American Board.— Early 
 in 1621, Mr. Parsons, of the mission to S}Tia 
 and the Holy Land, on his first visit to Jerusa- 
 lem, found there some Armenian pilgrims, with 
 whom he had an interesting conversation on 
 religious subjects. Deeply interested in their 
 appearance, he ventured to suggest the thought 
 of having a mission from the American 
 churches sent to Armenia itself. The sugges- 
 tion was favorably received. Mr. Fisk soon 
 after ^^TOte from Smyrna to Boston, recom- 
 mending this measure. Before any thing liad 
 been heard from them on the subject, it had 
 also been thought of in Boston, and subse- 
 quent events decided the adoption of the plan. 
 One of these events was the conversion, at 
 Beirut, of three Armenian ecclesiastics, as the 
 first fruits of the labors of the brethren there. 
 Considering the small number of Armenians 
 in Syria, and that the brethren of that mission 
 were not sent to them, that the first conver- 
 sions should be from among thera is a singular 
 fact Two of the converts, Dionysius Cara- 
 bet and Hagop (Yacob or Jacob Agha) were 
 bishops ; the other, Krikor^ (Gregory Worta- 
 bet) was a distinguished preacher (vartabed). 
 ThifSQ persons, by their correspondence with 
 Constantinople and other parts of Turkey, did 
 much towards preparing the minds of their 
 countrymen for the interesting spiritual work 
 which afterwards commenced among them. 
 Another circumstance was also influential. 
 Mr. King, — now Rev. Dr. King, of Athens, — 
 on leaving Syria in 1825, addressed a farewell 
 letter to the Roman Catholics, stating the 
 reasons why he could not be a Papist. This 
 letter was translated into Armenian by Bishop 
 Dionysius, and a copy in manuscript was sent 
 to some Armenians of distinction in Constan- 
 tinople. An extraordinary effect was pro- 
 duced on those who read it. A meeting, it is 
 said, was called in the patriarchal church, at 
 which the letter was read, and the references 
 to Scripture examined, and, as if by common 
 consent, it was agreed to do something for the 
 improvement of their church. Out of this 
 grew immediately the famous school of Pesh- 
 timaljian. This individual was, in many re- 
 spects, an extraordinary man. He was a crit- 
 ical and accurate scholar in the ancient Arme- 
 nian tongue ; deeply versed in all the lore of his 
 own nation ; familiar with the theology of the 
 Eastern and Romish churches, — the doings of 
 their councils, and the general history of the 
 Church ; — and, withal, a diligent student of 
 the Bible. Disgusted with the superstitions 
 around him and the character of the clergy, 
 he was easily led, by the writings of certain 
 French infidels, for a time to regard all reli- 
 gion as a delusion and a lie ; but afterwards 
 was brought back to the ground that the 
 
 Bible is the true word of God, and the oply 
 standard of faith. It is a rcniarkai)le circum- 
 stance that such a man should have been 
 placed at the head of a school established 
 within the precincts of the Patriarchate, and 
 had committed to him the training of the can- 
 didates for the priesthood, the completion of 
 the regular course of study in this instit\ition 
 being required as a condition to ordination. 
 Cautious although he was, in speaking of the 
 errors of the Church, — and even timid and 
 sometimes time-serving in the presence of the 
 bigoted, — in a silent, unostentatious manner, 
 he gradually l(?d his pupils into new paths of 
 inquiry, and, almost before they were aware of 
 it themselves, they came to believe that the 
 church may err, and actually does err, in many 
 of her teachings. Afterwards, when the Gos- 
 pel began to take effect, and he saw some of 
 his former pupils boldly advocating the doc- 
 trines of evangelical religion, he became 
 alarmed, and tried to keep them ba^'k ; but, 
 subsequently convinced that they were right, 
 and, in fact, only carrying into practice what 
 they had learned of himself, he ever after 
 strongly, though still privately, encouraged 
 them in their endeavors for the spiritual re- 
 generation of their countrymen. Never, till 
 the day of his death, in the year 1838, did he 
 so far overcome his native timidity, as openly 
 to avow himself an evangelical man ; but it is 
 impossible to calculate the amount of influence 
 exerted by him, in preparing the minds of men 
 to experience the power of the gospel, as 
 taught by foreign laborers when they came 
 into that field of evangelization. All the first 
 converts under the labors of the missionaries 
 of the Board in Constantinople, and many of 
 the later ones, were from among the alumni of 
 Peshtimaljean's school. 
 
 The establishment of a mission among the 
 Armenians of Turkey was resolved upon by 
 the Prudential Committee of the Board in the 
 year 1829. As a preparatory step, Rev. Eli 
 Smith, and Rev. H. G. 0. Dwight wej:c sent to 
 explore the field. The tour was commenced 
 in the spring of 1830, and occupied somewhat 
 more than a year ; and a mass of new informor 
 tion was obtained, both in regard to the Ar- 
 menians and the Nestorians, which has since 
 been of essential service in prosecuting mission- 
 ary operations in that part of the world. Early 
 in the year 1831, the Rev. W. Goodell, then at 
 Malta, was instructed to proceed to Constan- 
 tinople with his family. They arrived on the 
 9tti of June of the same year; and shortly 
 after, he called upon the Armenian patriarch, 
 and sought his cooperation in establishing 
 schools on an improved plan among the people. 
 The patriarch received him with true oriental 
 politeness, and promised to furnish some school- 
 masters, or priests, to learn the new system of 
 instruction, so as to be able to open schools ; 
 but the promise was all he did in the matter 
 
 On the 5th of June, 1832, Rev. H. G. 
 
A Of THB^ 
 
 'UiriVBIlSITY] 
 
 k 
 
AEMENIiffS. 
 
 125 
 
 Dwiglit took up his permanent residence at 
 Constantinople, with his family, having been 
 appointed to labor among the Armenians. 
 Kev. W. G. Schaiiflfler joined the Constantino- 
 ple station tha last of July of the same year, 
 his labors being confined chiefly to the Jews. 
 
 The number of Armenian visitors at the 
 mission gradually increased ; and early in the 
 year 1833, Hohannes Sahakyan, a pupil in the 
 school of Peshtimaljian, became a deeply inte- 
 rested inquirer, and an earnest student of the 
 Scriptures, in which he found sympathy and 
 aid from his beloved preceptor. The follow- 
 ing year he found a friend to whom he com- 
 municated his views, and who, after some 
 opposition, embraced them. Mr. Sahakyan 
 soon became a most efficient instrument in 
 promoting the truth, as he has continued to be 
 up to the present time ; and never, from that 
 moment, has the mission been without the most 
 satisfactory evidence of the special presence 
 of the Holy Spirit among the Armenian peo- 
 ple. On the 18th of July, 1833, Mr. Sahakyan 
 and his companion, in a very solemn manner, 
 committed themselves to the instruction and 
 guidance of the missionaries. One of them 
 was employed as a translator of the mission, 
 and the other as teacher of a school for Arme- 
 nian youth. They v/ere soon brought into the 
 clear light of the gospel, and led to trust, with 
 a calm and joyful confidence, in Jesus Christ 
 as the only and all-sufficient Saviour. 
 
 But opposition now began to manifest itself. 
 By secret clerical interference, both Armenian 
 and Eoraish, the school was broken up. An 
 Armenian jeweler of great respectability and 
 influence, and strongly attached to the doc- 
 trines and rites of his church, had his mind 
 wrought up into a state of great alarm, in 
 reference to the course of these two young 
 men, by the secret insinuations of a Roman 
 priest. They were represented as being the 
 hired tools of certain foreigners, employed to 
 seduce the people, and lead them into danger- 
 ous heresy. The jeweler prevailed upon Pesh- 
 timaljian to summon the delinquents before 
 him, in order to examine them as to the alleged 
 heresy. He himself was present, and began 
 the examination with great sternness and se- 
 verity ; charging them with violating their 
 obligations to the church, and dishonoring 
 God. They were proceeding to vindicate 
 themselves, when Peshtimaljian took the busi- 
 ness wholly out of their hands, and poured 
 upon the astonished jeweler such a flood of 
 light, from history as well as Scripture, to show 
 that their church is wrong, and in many things 
 idolatrous, that even the young men themselves 
 were amazed. They afterwards had an oppor- 
 tunity of speaking for themselves, Peshtimal- 
 jian aiding them in their references to the 
 Scriptures whenever their own memories failed; 
 and the result was, that the jeweler was not only 
 entirely satisfied that they were in the right, 
 but immediately became himself an open and 
 
 powerful advocate of the evangelical doctrines 
 The circumstance of the closing of the school 
 became a subject of some notoriety, and some 
 minds were by this means put upon a new train 
 of thought. Mr. Sarkis Varjabed, teacher 
 of grammar in the school of Peshtimaljian, 
 became a convert at this time, and was after- 
 wards highly useful to the mission as a trans- 
 lator. 
 
 In the autumn of 1833, the missionaries 
 were invited to witness the ordination of fifteen 
 Armenian priests at the Patriarchal church in 
 Constantinople. None had been ordained for 
 many years, in consequence of the new rule 
 which required that only such as had received 
 a regular education at the school of Peshtimal- 
 jian should be eligible for ordination. Nearly 
 all the candidates on the present occasion were 
 comparatively well educated men ; and one of 
 them had a high reputation for learning. He 
 had a peculiarly serious and devout appear- 
 ance, and when, some days afterwards, the 
 missionaries called upon him in one of the 
 cloisters of the patriarchate, he seemed deeply 
 impressed by the remarks made to him on tho 
 solemn responsibilities resting upon the oJ95ce- 
 bearers of the church of Christ, and feelingly 
 begged an interest in their prayers. This was 
 Der Kevork, a man whose subsequent influence 
 in promoting the reformation was highly im- 
 portant. 
 
 Up to this period, the missionary press had 
 remained in Malta, and had been chiefly em- 
 ployed in printing in Greek and Italian. On 
 the 23d of December, 1833, the Eev. Daniel 
 Temple, and Mr. Homan Hallock, missionary 
 printer, arrived in Smyrna with the press, 
 accompanied by bishop Dionysius, as Arme- 
 nian translator. But a combination of Arme- 
 nian and Romish influences induced the Pasha 
 peremptorily to order Mr. Temple's departure 
 from Smyrna with only ten days' notice. The 
 Pasha, however, who had acted hastily and 
 under a misapprehension of the facts in the 
 case, revoked his order, on hearing the expla- 
 nations of the American consul ; but it was 
 thought best that the bishop should return to 
 Beirut, where he had formerly resided ; the 
 Armenians being incensed against him on 
 account of his having married and become a 
 Protestant. 
 
 The indications of the special presence of the 
 Holy Spirit became more numerous and deci- 
 sive. The meetings at Mr. Goodell's residence 
 had been gradually increasing in solemnity and 
 interest. On the first Monday of Jan. 1834, 
 the monthly concert was observed, for the first 
 time, in the Turkis]| language. Intelligence 
 was communicated from the missions, and 
 every heart seemed deeply interested, and 
 many eyes were suffused with tears. The 
 native brethren there received a new impulse 
 to go on with their labors for the salvation 
 of their own countrymen. ITie number stea- 
 dily increased of those who frequented the 
 
126 
 
 AMtfENIANS. 
 
 hoiL<»os (»f the mi&uonarics. and the mam topics 
 of in(|uirv were deeply practical ami spiritual, 
 relatiug Ilirectly to the salvation of tJie soul. 
 In the course of the year, two or three priests 
 in Constttutinople were awakened, and tho- 
 roughly convinced of the truth of the evan- 
 gelical system. The Bible was much sought 
 for and read ; many eyes were opened to see 
 the folly of their own sui)erstitions ; and a 
 few, it is believed, were added to the number 
 of sincere believers in Jesus Christ. The two 
 young men whose interesting history has been 
 briefly given, and who became native assist- 
 ants, were active in spreading the truth, and 
 exerted no small amount of instrumentality in 
 bringing about the results that followed. 
 
 Every effort made to induce the Armenian 
 ecclesiastical authorities to take the lead in 
 enlarging and improving their schools having 
 provetl a failure, the mission at length deter- 
 mined to cstalDlish, independently, a high 
 school in Pera, the objects being to educate 
 promising boys and young men in useful 
 Dranches, to stimulate the Armenians to efforts 
 in this department, and to furnish a model 
 school for them to imitate. The school was 
 opened, October 27, 1834, under the superin- 
 tendence of Mr. Paepati, a native of Scio, 
 who had been educated in America, and who, 
 by his religious character, as well as his intel- 
 lectual training, proved himself to be well 
 fitted for this post. 
 
 Rev. John B. Adger joined the Smyrna 
 station in the month of October, 1834. Two 
 new stations were occupied, one at Brusa and 
 the other at Trebizond. Rev. B. Schneider 
 arrived at Brusa with his family on the 15th 
 of July, 1834. The Greek bishop forbade his 
 people furnishing the missionary with a house, 
 although one had previously been pledged to 
 him by a prominent member of the Greek 
 community. But the independence of the 
 owner enabled Mr. Schneider to secure a resi- 
 dence in spite of the bishop. And, after some 
 opposition, he was enabled to open a school 
 of 70 children, his labors at first being divided 
 between the Armenians and Greeks. Rev. T. 
 P. Johnson first visited Trebizond in Novem- 
 ber, 1834. Through priestly interference, he 
 was foiled in three successive attempts to pro- 
 cure a house, and at last he only secured a 
 contract for one, on condition that he should 
 obtain a firman or imperial order, from Con- 
 stantinople, which he succeeded in doing, 
 through the kind interposition of Commodore 
 Porter, the United States Minister at the 
 Porte ; and he removed there with his family 
 in the spring of 1835. The breaking out 
 of the plague, however, prevented him from 
 having much intercourse with the people for 
 some months. At the capital, the number 
 of those who declared themselves Protestants 
 rapidly increased. Not only in the city proper, 
 but throughout the suburbs and the villages 
 on the Bosphorus, wherever Armenians were 
 
 found, there nnu^s ;m iiicrcasiii"; disposition to 
 talk on religioim subjects. The missionaries 
 avoided controversy al>out forms and ceremo- 
 nies; and instead of attacking directly the 
 superstitions of the church, determined to 
 " know nothing but Christ and him crucified." 
 Cases of true conversion were every now and 
 then occurring, among whom was Der Kevork, 
 before alluded to. He had charge of a school 
 of about 400 boys, supported by the Arme- 
 nians themselves, and m no way connected 
 with the missionaries. He soon introduced 
 the custom of reading the Scriptures daily, 
 and explaining' them to the whole school ; and 
 he also formed a class of twentv of his most 
 promising scholars, for the critical study of the 
 New Testament under his immediate direction. 
 
 One room in Mr. Goodell's house was always 
 open for Armenians to come together for 
 prayer ; and in some instances family prayer 
 was established by the new converts, and a 
 prayer-meeting was maintained by a few pupils 
 m the high school, which had now increased 
 to thirty pupils, and had also grown greatly in 
 favor with the people. The English, French, 
 Italian, Armenian, Turkish, Greek, and He- 
 brew languages were taught, as well as the 
 mathematics, geography, &c., and lectures were 
 given, illustrated by experiments on various 
 branches of the natural sciences. Mr. Paspati 
 having left for Paris, Mr. Hohannes Sahakyan 
 was appointed to the superintendency of the 
 school, assisted by several other teachers. Yia- 
 itors of all classes were numerous, and the lec- 
 tures were attended by many deeply-interested 
 spectators. Externally, friendly relations were 
 still preserved with the ecclesiastical authori- 
 ties of the Armenian church ; but they already 
 began to manifest their uneasiness at the cir- 
 culation of the Bible, and the popularity and 
 success of the school established by the mis- 
 sion. Matteos, the newly appointed bishop of 
 Brusa, was one of the earliest friends of the 
 mission, having imbibed many enlightened 
 views of the truth. Even after his removal to 
 Brusa, he expressed, by letter, the most friendly 
 sentiments; and when Mr. Schneider called 
 upon him, soon after his arrival, he avowed, 
 in very decided terms, his approbation of the 
 school recently established by the mission in 
 Brusa. Not many months elapsed, however, 
 before this school was entirely broken up, 
 through the influence of this same prelate, 
 who also endeavored, in other ways, to circum- 
 scribe the operations of the missionaries. He 
 afterwards made himself notorious as Matteos 
 Patriarch, the persecutor of the Protest- 
 ants IN Turkey. This fact shows how little 
 dependence could be placed upon professions 
 of friendship made by the high ecclesiastics, 
 who, though often convinced of the truth, yet 
 having no fixed principles, are ready to do any 
 thing to please the rich and influential among 
 their people. 
 
 The Brusa station was strengthened by the 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 127 
 
 arrival of the Eev. P. 0. Powers and wife, in 
 February, 1835, who took up their abode in 
 the Armenian quarter of the town. 
 
 The preparation of books and tracts in 
 Armeno-Turkish and the modern Armenian 
 language, became more and more an object 
 of attention, and Mr. Hallock, the missionary 
 printer, visited the United States to superintend 
 the manufacture, at New York, of punches for 
 making Armenian type for the press in Smyrna; 
 and the liberal sum of $5000 was appropriated 
 to this object, and for the purchase of materials 
 for a foundry and printing office, by the Pru- 
 dential Committee. Mr. Sarkis, one of the 
 pious Armenians in Constantinople, and an 
 eminent scholar in his own language and liter- 
 ature, removed to Smyrna, to be employed as 
 translator, in connection with the press, under 
 the superintendence of Mr. Adger. 
 
 Early in 1836, two weekly meetings were 
 established in Constantinople, one of which 
 was conducted by Mr. Goodell, and the other 
 by Mr. Schauffler, in the Turkish language, 
 which afforded constant evidence of the pro- 
 gress of the work. The houses of the mission- 
 aries were frequented by ecclesiastics, as well 
 as laymen, some four of the former, chiefly 
 from among the parochial clergy, appearing to 
 be sincere inquirers after the truth. One of 
 these, attached to the Patriarchal Church, pro- 
 posed, of his own accord, that the missionaries 
 should publish a new and revised edition of the 
 modern Armenian New Testament, so that all 
 the people might have access to the Word of 
 God in an intelligible language. He offered to 
 subscribe 500 piastres, (about $23) himself, to- 
 wards the object, and to procure more from 
 others. Some of the most influential vartabeds 
 at the patriarchate were disposed to encourage, 
 rather than hinder educational efforts. 
 
 It was now not an uncommon thing, to hear of 
 one and another of the bishops and vartabeds, 
 preaching what were called evangelical ser- 
 mons. Subsequent facts, however, have shown, 
 in regard to most of them, that public opinion, 
 at that time somewhat clamorous for reform, 
 more than personal conviction and interest in 
 the subject, led to this new style of address. 
 
 One of the converts, who was rather promi- 
 nent as a reformer, was publicly accused of in- 
 fidelity by a priest ; and on the following Sab- 
 bath, one of the vartabeds of the Church de- 
 nounced him before the people, as a heretic and 
 an infidel, whose case was soon to be tried by 
 a council of ecclesiastics and laymen. The 
 council was afterwards held, and although the 
 accused declared plainly that he had no confi- 
 dence whatever in the mediation of the saints, 
 and that he received the Gospel as his only and 
 all-sufficient guide ; — yet he was fully acquitted. 
 
 The most diligent and persevering efforts 
 were made, by certain adherents of the Koniish 
 Church, to stir up the Armenians against the 
 missionaries. No direct means had been used 
 by them, to enlighten that portion of the Ar 
 
 menian race, who acknowledge the supremacy 
 of the Pope. They may amount, perhaps, to 
 15,000 or 20,000, having a Patriarch of their 
 own. In July, 1836, this functionary came out 
 with a public denunciation of all the books cir- 
 culated by the missionaries, including the New 
 Testament, and he expressly prohibited his 
 people from purchasing or procuring from 
 them copies of an edition of the Armenian 
 Scriptures which had been printed at their own 
 press in Venice. 
 
 Indications now began more and more to 
 manifest themselves, that the Word of God was 
 operating like silent leaven, especially in the 
 schools where it was daily read as a text book ; 
 and many interesting incidents are mentioned 
 in the journals of the missionaries, to illustrate 
 the influence that was operating upon the 
 minds of the people ; which Mr. Goodell cha- 
 racterized as a simple and entire yielding up of 
 the heart and life to the sole direction o/" God's 
 Word and Spirit." 
 
 The gospel had now been proclaimed to mul- 
 titudes of people by conversation in private 
 circles, both in the Turkish and Armenian 
 languages, and a formal expository service had 
 been held in Turkish, by Mr. Goodell, for some 
 time. The first regular sermon in the Arme- 
 nian tongue, was preached by Mr. Dwight, on 
 the 9th of September, 1836, to a small select 
 company in his own house. The monthly con- 
 cert of prayer increased in interest. Female 
 education, which had been almost entirely neg- 
 lected, was beginning to attract attention. 
 At Constantinople parents were beginning to 
 provide instruction for their daughters, and 
 one of the evangelical brethren had a class of 
 Armenian girls who were learning to read. In 
 Smyrna, a school of 40 Armenian girls was 
 established by the mission, in the summer of 
 1836, with the express approbation of a num- 
 ber of influential men in the community. 
 Owing to one or two jealous spirits, however, 
 a meeting of the community was soon called, 
 and it was agreed to take the new enterprise 
 into their own hands ; and it was cheerfully 
 relinquished to them by the missionaries. 
 
 In Brusa, there were many who professed to 
 be friendly to the missionaries ; but in general, 
 the silence and insensibility of death reigned 
 among them. Bishop Matteos showed more 
 openly a hostile disposition. The station at 
 Trebizond was reinforced in August, 1836, by 
 the arrival of the Kev. W. C. Jackson and 
 wife. 
 
 The principal bankers in the country, at 
 that time, belonged to the Armenian commu- 
 nity. According to the system then prevail- 
 ing, the Pashas and governors of the empire 
 derived their support, not by a salary from the 
 government, but by taxes, levied by them- 
 selves, on the produce of the territory over 
 which they had jurisdiction, and by extortion. 
 Every Pasha had his banker, who furnished 
 him with money on interest, when out of office, 
 
128 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 or when newly ftppoiiitcd to ofBoc, recciviii}? 
 his pay by participuliiif? in the spoils filched 
 afterwards I'rom tlie poor people. This ar- 
 rangement gave great i)ower to these capital- 
 ists ; and neiu-ly all the important appointments 
 of the government were in their hands. With- 
 in their own community their word was law. 
 Patriarchs, as we have shown, were elect- 
 ed and deposed by them ; and through 
 them, bishops and vartabeds received their 
 appointments to dioceses and churches. A 
 few of the richest and most powerful of 
 these men decided nearly every question of any 
 importance pertaining to the civil or ecclesi- 
 astical affairs of the Armenian nation. As a 
 class, they were ignorant and bigoted, and, 
 therefore, quite ready to believe any misrepre- 
 sentations of Protestantism which their own 
 religious guides should give them. In this 
 state of things, any office-bearer in the church, 
 high or low, might be deterred from acting, in 
 his official capacity, according to the policy 
 dictated by his own mind. Some rival in the 
 holy orders, even much lower than himself in 
 rank, might, through his superior influence 
 with one or more of these bankers, procure the 
 removal from office of the obnoxious individ- 
 ual. In the year 1837, it was resolved in the 
 counsels of the Armenian community, that is, 
 by a few bankers, as a first step, to break up 
 the High School. In preparation for this, a 
 large college had been founded some months 
 before, at Scutary ; and the public school, su- 
 perintended by Der Kevork, in the quarter of 
 Hass Keuy, had been committed to the gene- 
 ral supervision of one of the gieat bankers re- 
 siding there, a truly noble-spirited man, that it 
 might be remodeled according to his own wishes, 
 so as to make it a firs1>rate school. As learn- 
 ing was now becoming popular, these were 
 necessary steps in order to reconcile the people 
 to the shutting up of the Armenian High 
 School. In January, 1837, the parents of the 
 scholars of the missionaiy school were sum- 
 moned before the Yicar, and peremptorily or- 
 dered to withdraw their sons from the school. 
 Sorrow was depicted on every face, as the 
 pupils came bacK to get their books, and say 
 their farewells. 
 
 The plan of the opposing party in this case, 
 was, after breaking up the school, to procure 
 from the Turkish government, the banishment 
 of Mr. Sahakyan, its principal, and several oth- 
 ers who were considered most influential 
 among the evangelical brethren. Great was 
 ^ their astonishment when they heard that, no 
 sooner was this hated individual released, by 
 their act, from his connection with the mission, 
 than he was engaged by the banker of Hass 
 Keuy, to take the superintendence of the great 
 national school, which had been placed by 
 them in his hands ! Every effort was made by 
 the anti-evangelical party to persuade him to 
 change his purpose ; but he remained firm, and 
 declai'cd that if they did not allow him to 
 
 manage the school in his own way, he would 
 leave the Armenian community altogether. 
 They were obliged to yield, and soon a school 
 of 600, instead of 40, as before, was in suc- 
 cessful operation, under the superintendence of 
 Mr. Hohannes Sahakyan ; havjng Der Kevork, 
 the pious priest, for one of his principal 
 teachers ! 
 
 The Hass Keuy school was formally adopted 
 as the school of the nation, and Mr. Sahakyan 
 received a regular appointment from the Arme- 
 nian Synod as its principal. He had there- 
 fore, more liberty of action, and could give 
 religious instruction officially. He devoted an 
 hour a day to this special purpose, in a select 
 class of sixty of the most advanced pupils, ha- 
 sides more general instruction, and the daily 
 good influence exerted by himself and Der 
 Kevork. 
 
 There was a liberal course of study adopted, 
 and the school was arranged, throughout, af- 
 ter the model of the mission school. Lectures 
 were given in the natural sciences, the whole 
 of the philosophical apparatus of the mission 
 having been purchased and paid for, by the 
 directors. 
 
 This institution became deservedly popular ; 
 there was now much more boldness, on the part 
 of the enlightened Armenians, in spreading the 
 truth ; and the light of truth and piety seemed 
 to be kindled in every part of the city. 
 
 Inquiry was extending, also, at the interior 
 stations, and the spirit of opposition was like- 
 wise awakened. 
 
 In September, 1837, a convention of mis- 
 sionaries was held in Smyrna, the chief object 
 of which was, to ascertain, by prayerful in- 
 quiry, the mistakes and deficiencies of the past, 
 both in regard to personal qualifications for 
 the work, and the means and measures adopted 
 for bringing the claims of the gospel in con- 
 tact with the hearts of the people. Eecent 
 afflictive dispensations in the mission had pro- 
 duced a mellowed tone of Christian feeling, 
 which greatly prepared the minds of the breth- 
 ren for a profitable discussion of these subjects. 
 The Lord was felt to be indeed present, and it 
 is believed that each one returned to the toils 
 of missionary life, with a more prayerful and 
 confiding spirit, and a more fixed purpose of 
 heart, to make the salvation of the soul the 
 immediate and all-absorbing object of labor, 
 and the preaching of " Jesus Christ, and him 
 crucified," the grand means. 
 
 Mr. Adger was enabled to commence an ex- 
 pository service in Smyrna, in the Armenian 
 language, at which some five or six were usually 
 present. His translator, Mr. Sarkis, froni 
 Constantinople, had increasing intercourse 
 with the people ; and Armenian mothers began 
 to be eloquent in their lamentations over the 
 neglected education of their daughters. Up 
 to the first of January, 1838, there were 
 printed, at the Smyrna press, about two and a 
 half million pages in the Armenian language. 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 129 
 
 A pocket edition of the New Testament, in 
 ancient Armenian, was completed on the last 
 day of the year 1837. 
 
 The plague, that scourge of Turkey, was 
 permitted this year to enter the family of Mr. 
 Dwight, and a beloved wife and child became 
 its victims. This afflictive dispensation called 
 forth the tenderest expression of sympathy 
 from the native brethren and other friends of 
 the missionaries ; and, in various ways, it was 
 truly a sanctified, though most sorrowful event. 
 This terrible disease, in its annual visitations 
 to the capital, and other parts of the Turkish 
 empire, has proved a far more serious obsta- 
 cle to missionary labor, than can well be 
 imagined in America. The season of the 
 plague was a season of non-intercourse, to a 
 very great extent. Schools must be closed ; 
 public worship suspended ; and the giving and 
 receiving of visits, in a great measure inter- 
 rupted. This has happened, again and again, 
 at all the stations. Sometimes, when the mis- 
 sionaries had made a successful and promising 
 beginning of some new plan of usefulness, this 
 dreadful scourge would come down upon them 
 with all its violence, and suddenly arrest the 
 enterprise, and frustrate all their hopes. And 
 in such a country as Turkey, when a school is 
 closed, or public worship suspended for several 
 months, more ground may be lost than can be 
 gained in a whole year. But for 16 years 
 past, since quarantines have been established, 
 Constantinople has not been visited with the 
 plague, showing that it did not originate there. 
 
 As the doctrines of the gospel gained a hold 
 on the hearts of the people, superstitions gave 
 way; and, as error became eradicated from 
 the mind, the external symbols of that error 
 were naturally removed from use and from 
 sight. The progress of correct religious opin- 
 ion was evinced, especially, by the gradual dis- 
 appearance of pictures from the Armenian 
 churches. In one instance, near the beginning 
 of the year 1838, the vartabed and leading 
 men in the large village of Orta Keuy, on the 
 Bosphorus, went together to the church, and 
 carefully removed every picture, except the 
 altar pieces, which were so situated that they 
 could not be approached for worship. This is 
 the village in which the missionaries resided, 
 when they first began to get access to the Ar- 
 menians. The patriarch Stepan remarked to 
 one of the native brethren, that many of the 
 observances in their church were not prescribed 
 by the gospel, and that probably they would 
 not exist ten years longer. 
 
 The reformation was daily gaining strength. 
 The converted Armenians were active and 
 prayerful. They delighted in the communion 
 of saints ; and they also sought and found fre- 
 quent opportunities for religious conversation 
 with their fellow-countrymen, who, as yet, had 
 not felt the power of the gospel. Mr. Sahak- 
 yan continued his connection with the High 
 School at Hass Keuy, and his opportunities 
 
 for usefulness were many and great. But, such 
 was the opposition of the leading Armenians 
 to Mr. Sahakyan, that its distinguished patron 
 determined to abandon it altogether ; and, 
 before the close of the year 1838, most of the 
 teachers were dismissed, and the school reduced 
 to its former footing. Many of the people 
 were strongly in favor of its continuance, and 
 particularly the leading men of the village 
 where it was located ; and they sent a delega- 
 tion to the patriarch, to implore his aid, to 
 prevent the approaching disaster. All they 
 obtained from him was fair promises, that were 
 never fulfilled. 
 
 Mr. Sahakyan, being thrown out of em- 
 ployment, was very gladly taken up by the 
 mission. The necessity had for some time 
 been felt, of having a man to superintend the 
 distribution of books, which were rapidly in- 
 creasing in number. To this post Mr. Sahak- 
 yan was appointed, with the confident expec- 
 tation that it would prove a station of great 
 usefulness. 
 
 The kingdom of Christ now began to make 
 evident inroads on the kingdom of Satan, in 
 the interior of the country. Two Armenian 
 priests, in Nicomedia, who had never seen a 
 missionary, had been converted to the truth. 
 One of them afterwards came to Constantino- 
 ple, and visited the missionaries. He appeared 
 to be a man of a most devout and humble 
 spirit, who had inward experience of the grace 
 of God. The doctrine of salvation, by grace 
 alone, was quite familiar and very precious to 
 him ; and he readily discriminated between a 
 living and a dead faith. In 1832, Mr. Goodell 
 left with an old priest at Nicomedia, as he 
 was passing, a copy of the Armeno-Turkish 
 New Testament, and gave to some Armenian 
 boys several tracts in the same language. 
 One of these tracts — a translation of the 
 Dairyman's Daughter — fell into the hands of 
 another priest, whom Mr. Goodoll did not see. 
 The perusal of it was the means of his awaken- 
 ing and conversion ; and, through his influ- 
 ence, another priest was brought to the know- 
 ledge of the truth, and their united prayers 
 and efforts were now directed to the enlighten- 
 ment and conversion of their flock. The spirit 
 of inquiry began to spread among the people. 
 
 In the spring of 1838, Mr. Dwight visited 
 the place and found 16 men, who appeared to 
 be truly enlightened and converted. He was 
 received by them with the greatest cordiality, 
 and they seemed to hang on his lips like men 
 hungering for the bread of life. 
 
 The two priests, Der Yertaness, and Der 
 Harutun, removed, of their own accord, to 
 Constantinople ; and were subsequently placed 
 together, as the only priests in a village church 
 on the Bosphorus. Here they could act with 
 a good degree of independence, and many op- 
 portunities of doing good were presented. 
 During the summer of 1838, the Patriarch 
 Stepan, being an old acquaintance, spent sev- 
 
130 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 eral weeks with them ; and they had free con- 
 ▼crsfttlons toprotlior on religious subjects, the 
 
 T'tTi^iinli r.iH i.illv as.-;enting to their views. 
 
 f„ 1, ;,' \\rn , a'lulTrebizond every possible 
 ol>sttu-lf >vjus thrown in the way of the progress 
 of the truth ; and yet the Word of God could 
 not be bound. In both places there were in- 
 creasing friendliness on the part of the people, 
 more extended intercourse, and the special 
 presence of the Holy Spirit. Among those 
 whose minds seemed to be especially opened to 
 religious impressions at Trebizond, were the 
 vartabed himself, or acting bishop, and also a 
 priest of the Church. At Brusa, the two 
 teachers, Mr. Serope, and Mr. Ilohannes, 
 seemed to be growing in grace and in the 
 knowledge of Christ. An influential and dis- 
 tinguished man became a serious inquirer for 
 the way of salvation, and opposition thus far, 
 was overruled for good. In October, 1838, Mr. 
 Schneider began a regular preaching service 
 at his own house, every Sabbath, in the Turkish 
 language, for the benefit of both Armenians 
 and Greeks. The Kev. E. Riggs joined 
 tiie station at Smyrna, with his family, on the 
 2d of November, 1838. 
 
 By a series of intrigues, commenced near the 
 beginning of the year 1839, the leading bankers 
 were gradually dispossessed of much of their 
 former power ; and three or four men from the 
 artisan classes, stood before the nation as its 
 guides and dictators, and especially as defenders 
 of its ancient faith, and the zealous extirpators 
 of heresy. One of these was the Sultan's chief 
 architect, and another was his second. An- 
 other was superintendent of the government 
 powder works. The first two were employed 
 at the time, in erecting the most splendid of 
 all the imperial palaces ; and this brought 
 them into closer contact with the Sultan than 
 was enjoyed by any of the bankers ; and he 
 was so much delighted with their work, that he 
 seemed ready to grant them any request they 
 might make. The expulsion of Protestantism 
 from the land was an object that lay near their 
 hearts ; and they now resolved to make use of 
 the strong arm of the Sultan to effect it. Ac- 
 cusations were presented against the evangeli- 
 cal brethren, and the most false and scandalous 
 representations were made, as to the character 
 and tendencies of Protestantism, calculated 
 not only to prejudice the minds of the Turkish 
 cabinet, ])ut to excite the feelings of the popu- 
 lace. The Sultan was easily persuaded, and 
 the architects and powder-maker were fully 
 authorized to call upon the civil power, to aid 
 them in extirpating this dangerous heresy. 
 
 But the Patriarch Stepan, was altogether 
 too mild a man for their purpose ; and it was 
 reported and believed that his ^mpathies were 
 with the evangelical party. They procured 
 from the interior of the country, Hagopos, a 
 man who had once been Vicar of the Patri- 
 archate of Constantinople, and who was noto- 
 rious for his bigotry and sternness of charac- 
 
 ter, to be associated with Stepan, as assistant 
 Patriarch. He soon had the whole power 
 virtually put into his hands, and Stei)an sunk 
 to a mere cypher. On the 19th of Febrnary, 
 Mr. Sahakyan was arrested, and thrown into 
 the Patriarch's prison, without even the form 
 of an examination, and without being informed 
 of the charges alleged against him. He wus 
 a mild, amiable, inoffensive man ; of unblem- 
 ished character, and against whom, as a subject 
 and a citizen, not the slightest imputation 
 could be brought. And yet, while the same so 
 called Christian Patriarchate would use all 
 possible means to protect felons of every de- 
 scription, who belonged to the Armenian com- 
 munity, even to the murderer himself, from the 
 regular action of the Turkish law, it could 
 rudely seize an innocent man, and deliver him 
 over to the civil authorities, to be punished for 
 daring to think and act for himself, in matters 
 pertaining only to his own soul and God ! 
 
 The Armenian Patriarchal power at Con- 
 stantinople has always been a persecuting 
 Eower, but more especially within the last one 
 undred and fifty- years, during which, much 
 blood even has been shed by it, in the endeavor 
 to prevent proselytism from that Church to the 
 Church of Rome. In the present instance, 
 therefore, the ecclesiastical authorities of the 
 Church were only acting out the true spirit of 
 the establishment. Mr. Boghos Fizika was 
 also arrested and put into the same prison 
 with Mr. Sahakyan. Four days afterwards, 
 these two individuals were put under charge 
 of a Turkish police officer, who was armed 
 with pistols and sword, and, without the least 
 show of trial or expressed accusation, they 
 were sent into banishment by an imperial fir- 
 man, to a monastery near Kaisery, (the an- 
 cient Cajsarea of Cappadocia,) about 400 miles 
 east of Constantinople. The Patriarch Stepan 
 took leave of them with tears. He did not 
 participate in the act of his compeers, and 
 knew well its deep injustice. The police offi- 
 cer, a Turk, stopped at his mother's house in 
 Scutary, and sent back word that Mr. Fizika 
 was too feeble to bear the fatigues of the jour- 
 ney ; but the most positive orders were returned 
 to carry him to Kaisery, either alive or dead. 
 At Nicomedia, he was refreshed with an in- 
 terview with the evangelical brethren : and 
 having recruited his health, he went on his 
 way. But the Turkish officer who conducted 
 him, finding they had friends there, treated Mr. 
 Sahakyan with the greatest cruelty, for the 
 purpose of extorting money, till he was com- 
 pelled to give an order for $100 to secure 
 relief. On their arrival at Kaisery, the Arme- 
 nians, on being informed that they had been 
 banished merely because they received the 
 Bible as the only infallible guide, replied that 
 the Patriarch might as well banish them all, 
 for they were all of the same opinion. 
 
 The greatest efforts were now made at the 
 capital to frighten the brethren into submit- 
 
ARMENIANS, 
 
 131 
 
 sion. Very few dared to Tisit the mission- 
 aries, and those only under cover of the dark- 
 ness. On the 3d of March, a Patriarchal bull 
 was issued by Hagopos, adjunct Patriarch, 
 forbidding the reading of all books printed or 
 circulated by the missionaries ; and all who 
 had such books in their possession were re- 
 ^ quired to deliver them, without delay, to their 
 ' bishop or confessor. The brethren, though 
 appalled by such violent proceedings, still ex- 
 hibited great constancy ; and seemed ready to 
 suffer joyfully the spoiling of their goods, and, 
 if need be, imprisonment, banishment, and the 
 bastinado, for their Master's sake. 
 
 On the 14th of March, Der Kevork, the 
 pious priest of Hass Keuy, was arrested and 
 thrown into prison. Eight days after, the 
 Patriarch Stepan was deposed from office, and 
 permitted to retire to his convent at Armash, 
 near Nicomedia ; and on the following day, 
 his assistant, Hagopos, was installed in his 
 place. During the same week, the Greek 
 Patriarch issued a bull, excommunicating all 
 who should buy, sell, or read the books of the 
 Lutherans or Calvinists, as the missionaries 
 were called ; and an imperial firman was also 
 published, requiring all the patriarchs to look 
 well to their flocks, and guard them against 
 foreign influence and infidelity. It was now 
 quite evident that the Sultan himself was an 
 interested party in these transactions. After 
 lying in prison for more than a month, Der 
 Kevork was banished into the interior ; and 
 two vartabeds, who had presided over dioceses 
 as bishops, one more teacher, and several other 
 persons, were sent into exile about the same 
 time. As there was no examination of any 
 case, some who were made the victims of this 
 cruel fanaticism, had never in any way been 
 associated with the evangelical men, but were 
 made to participate in their punishment by a 
 mere mistake. 
 
 April 28, the Patriarch issued a new bull, 
 more violent than the former, threatening ter- 
 rible anathemas, in the name of the Father, 
 Son, and Holy Ghost, against all who should 
 be found having any intercourse with the mis- 
 sionaries, or reading their books ; and also 
 against all who neglected to inform, when made 
 acquainted with offenders. Within two or 
 three days, a rich banker, who had been for 
 years on friendly terms with the missionaries, 
 and who was especially the patron of Mr. 
 Boghos Fizika, was arrested and imprisoned 
 in the hospital, as an insane person : this is a 
 method of persecution not unfi-equently resorted 
 to in this country. The banker was released 
 after about a week's confinement, on paying a 
 large sum towards the college at Scutary, to 
 atone for the mischief he had done by his 
 insanity ! 
 
 The list of suspected persons had now swell- 
 ed to a very large number ; and a strong effort 
 was being made to procure the expulsion of the 
 iBdissionaries themselves from the country. Mul- 
 
 titudes of persons of diverse characters, were 
 active, from diverse motives, in keeping alive 
 the spirit of fanaticism. The native brethren 
 were at their wits' end, and even the missiona- 
 ries could not see how God was going to 
 deliver his people. Providence solved the 
 problem, however, with the greatest imagina- 
 ble ease. The persecuting powers were sud- 
 denly thrown into the deepest consternation, 
 by a demand from the Sultan to all the Patri- 
 archs, that each should fornish him with seve- 
 ral thousand men, to recruit his broken army, 
 and enable him to prosecute his war with Mo- 
 hammed AH of Egypt. Though an unprece- 
 dented demand, it must be promptly obeyed. 
 Public attention was now entirely absorbed 
 in this subject, and the doomed Protestants 
 were for the moment forgotten. The army 
 was raised, and marched to the field. It was 
 estimated to consist of 80,000 men ; and on 
 the plains of Nezib, near Aleppo, it encoun- 
 tered an Egyptian force of about the same 
 number. The battle was fought on the 24th 
 of June, 1839, and the Turkish troops were 
 utterly defeated, and scattered in all directions. 
 Tidings of this disaster, however, never reached 
 the ears of the Sultan Mahmud. He died in 
 his own palace, on the Bosphorus, on the first 
 day of July. His son, Abdul Mejid, was 
 girded with the imperial sword, on the 11th ; 
 and a few days after, the news reached the 
 capital that the Capudan Pasha had treacher- 
 ously surrendered up the whole Turkish fleet 
 to Mohammed AH. Thus, both the army and 
 navy were gone, and a mere boy of seventeen 
 was upon the throne, in the place of the great 
 Mahmud ; and the entire dissolution of the 
 empire seemed inevitable. Nothing but the 
 intervention of the great powers of Europe 
 prevented this catastrophe. 
 
 By this rapid succession of remarkable 
 events, God rebuked the persecutors of his 
 people, and effectually removed from them the 
 power of carrying into effect their unholy de- 
 signs. Judgment succeeded judgment. A fire 
 broke out in Pera, which consumed between 
 three and four thousand houses, destroying an 
 immense amount of property and several lives. 
 Immediately after, a meeting of the Armenian 
 Synod was called, and, after much violent 
 debating, it was resolved that a part of the 
 exiles should be recalled. Mr. Sahakyan, be- 
 ing considered a " ring-leader," was to be left 
 in perpetual banishment. AH the others re- 
 turned to their homes before winter set in. 
 Some of them were restored to their former 
 stations. The converted brethren, generally, 
 soon took courage. They cautiously resumed 
 their intercourse with the missionaries, and 
 gradually became bolder than ever in their 
 efforts to spread the knowledge of the truth. 
 In the mean time, at the suggestion of others, 
 Mr. Sahakyan wrote two or three letters, suc- 
 cessively, to the Patriarch, petitioning for his 
 own release. They were couched in terms of 
 
132 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 great respect, bnt as they contained no confes- 
 sion of error, and no promise of future submis- 
 sion, his request was denied. The bishop of 
 Kaisery also wrote to the Patriarch in his 
 behalf, saying that he had watched Mr. S. 
 very ila^ely, and hud " found no fault in him ; " 
 but this application also failed. But, through 
 the intervention of an English gentleman, who 
 was one of the physicians of the palace, the 
 Patriarch, by recpiest of the Sultan, after many 
 delays, and sorely against his will, sent an order 
 for the release of Mr. S. on the 10th of Feb- 
 ruary, 1840. 
 
 Steps were taken to make this persecution 
 general ; and similar measures of oppression 
 and cruelty were resorted to at Brusa, Trebi- 
 zond, and other places. 
 
 But, while these violent measures imposed 
 an outward check upon the work, it was evi- 
 dent that the truth was spreading ; even the 
 measures taken to check the reformation, be- 
 ing in many instances the means of awakening 
 inquiry ; and at the very time when the storm 
 was raging at the capital, and at different 
 points on the sea-coast of the empire, the mis- 
 sion was pushing its advanced posts into the 
 very heart of the enemy's country. In April, 
 Mr. Jackson, from Trebizond, visited Erzrum, 
 almost in the centre of ancient Armenia, in 
 order to make arrangements for commencing 
 operations in thaX town. While he was there, 
 a letter was publicly read in the church from 
 the Patriarch, warning the people against in- 
 tercourse with the Americans, and against 
 patronizing their schools and reading their 
 books ; and ordering them to seize such books, 
 wherever they could be found, and to commit 
 them to the flames. This did not prevent Mr. 
 Jackson from procuring a dwelling house, 
 which he accomplished through the kind as- 
 sistance of the British consul, and on the 11th 
 of September, 1839, he removed there with 
 his family. In February of the same year, 
 the station at Constantinople was strengthened 
 by the arrival of the Eev. 0. Hamlin and wife, 
 he being designated to open a seminary for 
 Armenian boys. 
 
 The first Monday in January, of the year 
 1840, was observed as a day of special fasting, 
 humiliation and prayer, throughout all the 
 mission stations of the Board in Turkey. The 
 events of the preceding year, and the existing 
 state of things in the country, rendered it a 
 season of deep interest. It became more and 
 more evident that the persecuting power had 
 received a check from which it would not im- 
 mediately recover. The efforts of the persecu- 
 tors to dest/oy the truth had only made it 
 more extensively known ; while the injustice, 
 violence and cruelty of the clergy had brought 
 them into contempt. 
 
 At the commencement of the year 1840, in- 
 tercourse was resumed with most of those 
 whom the persecution had temporarily repell- 
 ed from the missionaries, and there was evi- 
 
 dently no diminution of interest in religious 
 inquiry. One striking providence after an- 
 other occurred, calculated to lead the hearts 
 of the faithful to repose in God, and to be 
 " nothing terrified by their adversaries." lu 
 several instances, signal judgments followed 
 the persecutor, so that even the enemies them- 
 selves were constrained to acknowledge that 
 God himself was uttering his reproving voice. 
 The sudden manner in which the late Sultan 
 was cut off, and his forces by land and sea de- 
 stroyed, at the very time when he was aiding 
 by his authority to vex the church, has already 
 been noticed. The chief instrument in induc- 
 ing him to use his mighty power for such a 
 purpose, was, by the Sultan's death, deprived 
 of his influence ; and shortly after, his wife 
 was removed by death, and he himself brought 
 down to the grave's mouth. Another power- 
 ful man, who had actively opposed and perse- 
 cuted the evangelical brethren, within a short 
 space of time lost two daughters by sudden 
 death ; a third daughter became deranged, and 
 also a daughter-in-law ; his wife was deformed 
 by sickness, and also made nearly blind, and 
 he himself became a miserable invalid. And 
 soon after the young Sultan came upon the 
 throne, a charter of rights was granted to the 
 people, without their asking for it, providing 
 for some fundamental changes in the internal 
 administration of the government. In the 
 presence of all the foreign ambassadors, the 
 sovereign solemnly pledged himself to guard, as 
 far as in him lay, the liberty, property, and 
 honor of every individual subject, without re- 
 ference to his religious creed. No one was to 
 be condemned, in any case, without an impar- 
 tial trial, and no one was to suffer the penalty 
 of death, without the sanction of the Sultan 
 himself. Under this charter changes the most 
 momentous, particularly for the Christian and 
 Jewish population, have already taken place 
 in Turkey ; and everything now mdicates, that 
 according to the honest intention and policy 
 of the present government, there is ultimately 
 to be a complete carrying out of its provisions, 
 in every part of the empire. 
 
 Under the old system, bankers were needed 
 to furnish capital to the pashas, until they 
 should procure their supplies from the op- 
 pressed people. An important part of the 
 new system, however, was, that thenceforward 
 the ruling pashas and governors throughout 
 the country, should each receive a fixed salary 
 from the government ; and in no case meddle 
 with the collection of taxes. Accordingly, 
 near the beginning of the year 1840, all the 
 bankers of the government received orders 
 to settle up their accounts, as they were to 
 be no longer needed in the capacity in which 
 they had heretofore served the state. This 
 threw many of them into great distress, and 
 some it completely ruined. One was driven, in 
 his desperation, to the crime of suicide. Thus 
 did God put another obstacle out of the way, 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 133 
 
 which hitherto had seriously obstructed the 
 progress of his kingdom. 
 
 In the spring of 1840 the Greek Patriarch, 
 who had joined hands with the Armenian Pa- 
 triarch in persecuting the people of God, was 
 suddenly deposed from office, by order of the 
 Turkish government ; and it was not long be- 
 fore the Armenian Patriarch followed him into 
 retirement. He became so odious, on account 
 of his overbearing, violent spirit, as well as his 
 follies, that he was obliged to resign to save him- 
 self from being deposed ; and Stepan, who had 
 been ejected for his mildness and his forbear- 
 ance towards Protestants, was reelected to the 
 Patriarchate, first by vote of the principal 
 bankers, and afterwards by acclamation, in 
 an immense popular assembly. 
 
 On the 24th of May, 1840, Mr. Sahakyan 
 returned from his banishment, and his presence 
 tended greatly to strengthen the native breth- 
 ren. He soon commenced a series of active 
 labors for the good of his countrymen. Priest 
 Vertaness also, not being able conscientiously 
 to perform all the duties required of him as 
 priest, quietly and unostentatiously withdrew ; 
 and resolved to devote his whole time in labor- 
 ing for the spread of the truth among his 
 countrymen. He thus abandoned, voluntarily, 
 a situation in which he was honored and sup- 
 ported, for one in which he was exposed to 
 constant suspicion, reproach and persecution, 
 and, at the same time, with very uncertain 
 means of subsistence. Priest Kevork seemed 
 to be " full of faith and of the Holy Ghost," 
 preaching more boldly than before his banish- 
 ment, that there is but " one name given under 
 heaven among men whereby we must be 
 saved ;" and ready to suffer again, if need be, 
 for his beloved Lord and Master. The doc- 
 trinal views of the converted Armenians 
 seemed, in general, wonderfully clear ; which 
 was the more surprising, considering the im- 
 mense rubbish of superstition and error that 
 originally encumbered their minds. The stan- 
 dard doctrine of the reformation in Europe — 
 salvation by grace alone, without the deeds of 
 the law, was usually the great central truth, 
 first apprehended by their awakened and inquir- 
 ing minds, and made the ground of satisfactory 
 repose. 
 
 The number of inquirers steadily increased, 
 and indeed nearly all who called upon the mis- 
 sionaries, came for the avowed purpose of reli- 
 gious conversation. The story had been very 
 industriously circulated, especially during the 
 persecution, that the Americans were a nation 
 of infidels, without even the form of religion ; 
 and that the missionaries were aiming to con- 
 vert all the Armenians to infidelity, and only 
 pretended at first to believe the Bible, so as the 
 more easily to draw people into their snares ; 
 and in more than one instance, their visitors 
 showed at first no little anxiety to know ex- 
 actly what was the truth of the matter ; and 
 whether we have any churches in America, 
 
 and whether any number of people ever assem- 
 ble for worship on the Sabbath ! 
 
 Before the end of the year 1840, a room in 
 the business quarter of the city, for receiving 
 visitors, and for conference on religious sub- 
 jects, was procured and kept open on two 
 stated days of each week, and gradually be- 
 came a place of much resort for religious 
 inquiry. 
 
 About the same time, the book depository 
 was removed to the heart of the city ; and in 
 the most public manner the products of the 
 press, so lately anathematized by the Patri- 
 arch, were daily sold by an agent, who was 
 himself an Armenian. More than three hun- 
 dred dollars' worth of books, in the different 
 languages, were sold at Constantinople during 
 the year 1840. 
 
 A weekly meeting in the Armenian lan- 
 guage, commenced by Mr. Dwight in the 
 autumn of 1839, with only three individuals, 
 and that privately, for fear of the persecutors, 
 gradually increased, and before the end of 
 1840, it was held twice a week, publicly, and 
 more than 25 different individuals had at- 
 tended. 
 
 November 24, 1840, a boarding-school for 
 Armenian boys and young men was opened at 
 Bebek, on the Bosphorus, under the superin- 
 tendence of Mr. Hamlin, with three pupils, 
 and within about a week, applications had 
 been made for 15 boarding scholars, though 
 their means, at first, would allow them to re- 
 ceive only 12. An effort was soon made to 
 crush the infant seminary, though it proved 
 entirely futile, and was in itself not a little 
 ludicruus. A deputation from the village 
 of Bebek itself, consisting of the Armenian 
 priest, two Greek priests, one of the village 
 rulers, and several of the inhabitants, called 
 upon the Armenian Patriarch, and expressed 
 to him their deep regret that such a danger- 
 ous man as Mr. Hamlin should be allowed to 
 reside in their quarter. They accused him of 
 eating meat, eggs, butter, milk, &c., both in 
 Lent and also on Wednesdays and Fridays, 
 the days of their weekly fast ! He also taught 
 his scholars that it is no more wricked to eat 
 butter than oil ; or meat than bread ; or eggs 
 than olives ! Another grievous offence was, 
 that neither Mr. H. nor his scholars made the 
 sign of the cross ; nor worshiped the Virgin 
 Mary, or the saints ! Of course, they said, he 
 must be a confirmed infidel, and he can teach 
 nothing better in his school than the works 
 of Voltaire! The Patriarch was too well 
 informed, and too well disposed, to be moved 
 by such an applicatioa ; and the petitioners 
 had leave to withdraw. 
 
 During the month of June, 1840, Mr. Ham- 
 lin and Mr. Dwight visited Nicomedia. The 
 brethren there were sorely threatened, during 
 the reign of violence at the capital, but no 
 serious persecution was actually attempted. 
 They had had little spiritual aid or comfort 
 
 ; M 
 
134 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 from abroad. Thoy had hocn thrown upon 
 their Bibles for rehpious teachinjr. and upon 
 the Holy Spirit for their expounder of reli- 
 gious truth, and upon God as their only 
 protector; and they had grown rapidly in 
 knowledsrc and grace. The missionaries sat 
 with them, on the Sabbath, conversing of the 
 tilings of God, for ten hours, and so intense was 
 their interest that they would have sat for ten 
 hours more. 
 
 While they were there, a stranger from a 
 neighboring town, a merchant, being in Nico- 
 media on Imsiness, had the curiosity to call 
 upon them. He said that the report of them 
 had reached his place through the Patriarch's 
 letter of warning, and that he, in common with 
 many of his brethren, was very anxious to know 
 what this new way was. They explained to 
 him their views, and gave him a copy of the 
 New Testament in the modern Armenian, and 
 also several tracts, and he took his leave, ex- 
 pressing his high gratification with the inter- 
 vieAV. In this way was the knowledge of the 
 gospel first carried to Adabazar, the residence 
 of this individual. It is situated about 27 
 miles directly east of Nicomedia. 
 
 The reaction after the persecution, was not 
 confined to the capital. In Brusa and Trebi- 
 zond the demand for books increased, and there 
 were some who gave evidence of being truly 
 converted ; and even at the new station at 
 Erzrum there were signs of promise. 
 
 The Rev. H. J. Van Leunep was connected 
 with the Smyrna station during April, 1840. 
 The labors of the missionaries here were chiefly 
 through the press, and during the year 1840 
 more than six millions of pages were printed 
 in the Armenian and Armeno-Turkish lan- 
 guages alone. The most important work in 
 the latter was the Pentateuch, translated under 
 M r. Goodell's supervision. Its publication was 
 hailed with joy by multitudes. The Armenians 
 of Smyrna also established a press, and pub- 
 lished a newspaper. 
 
 The year 1841 opened with many indicar 
 tions that a thorough reformation was going 
 forward in the Armenian community. A very 
 marked difference was observed in the general 
 style of preaching in the Armenian churches 
 at the capital. There was a growing desire 
 to study the scriptures, and a disposition to 
 comi)are every doctrine and practice with the 
 written Vord ; and this could not, with safety, 
 be disregarded. It was not an uncommon 
 thing to hear of sermons on repentance, on the 
 Sabbath, on the Judgment day, &c., altogether 
 based upon the Bible ; and, in some instances, 
 the jjreachei-s borrowed largely from the publi- 
 cations of the missionaries for their materials ; 
 and they had repeated applications to furnish 
 matter directly for sermons, for one of the 
 most respectable vartabeds in Constantinople. 
 Another of the vartabeds went so far even as 
 to combat the prevailing error of substituting I 
 Mary and the saints as mediators for Christ, I 
 
 declaring that the name of Christ is the only 
 one given under heaven, among men, whereby 
 we can be saved. 
 
 As the reformation advanced, instances of 
 pungent conviction of sin, and a strong and 
 deep apprehension of spiritual things became 
 more common than had before been noticed. 
 Some persons of infamous character became 
 the subjects of an entire change, so that many 
 of those who were without, were constrained 
 to speak of the change as most wonderful. 
 The converted brethren also, with scarcely an 
 exception, appeared to be growing in grace, 
 and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ, and in 
 an active zeal for the salvation of others. 
 
 Priest Vertaness was full of activity and 
 hope. Almost every day he brought word 
 of some new and interesting case of inquiry in 
 some part of the city. His whole time was 
 occupied in going from house to house. In 
 the spring of 1841, a report came to Constan- 
 tinople that a number of Armenians in Nico- 
 media were about going over to the Jesuits ; 
 and the Patriarch commissioned this same 
 priest Yertaness to go there with all speed, 
 and endeavor to bring them back to their 
 mother church. Thus fortified by a commis- 
 sion from the highest power, he had perfectly 
 free access to every family in the Armenian 
 community in that town. He was quite suc- 
 cessful in the object of his mission, and while 
 he heartily and faithfully obeyed the Patriarch, 
 and endeavored to persuade men not to suffer 
 themselves to fall into the clutches of Eome, 
 he also labored still more zealously to bring 
 them to a sense of their sins against God, and 
 to a hearty reception of Christ alone, as the 
 Saviour of their souls. His visit was a great 
 comfort to the brethren in Nicomedia, as well 
 as an advantage to the cause at large. 
 
 In Adabazar regular meetings for prayer and 
 reading the Scriptures, were held every Sab- 
 bath, and from 25 to 50 were usually present. 
 One of the priests seemed to have become obe- 
 dient to the faith. A handbill tract, contain- 
 ing simply the ten commandments, in the 
 modern tongue, without note or comment, was 
 the means of opening many eyes to see the 
 folly and sin of picture worship. One year 
 previously there could not probably have been 
 found a single soul, among the 4,000 Arme- 
 nian inhabitants of Adabazar, who was not 
 groping in the deepest spiritual darkness. Now 
 two scores or more were convinced of the er- 
 rors of their Church, and ready to take the 
 Bible as their only religious guide, and several 
 appeared to be truly converted men, and were 
 willing even to lay down their lives for Christ. 
 All this took place before any missionary had 
 visited them. In the autumn of 1841, Mr. 
 Schneider, in compliance with their oft-repeat- 
 ed invitations for a missionary to visit them, 
 went to Adabazar, and returned from the 
 visit with the most cheering impressions, that 
 what had been done was truly the work of 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 135 
 
 God's Spirit. A spirit of inquiry was found 
 to be extending itself through many of the 
 neighboring villages. 
 
 In Constantinople a most singular state of 
 things existed. The Patriarch was personally 
 well-disposed towards the evangelical party, 
 but still, by no means a decided friend, and 
 easily influenced by the bankers. His Vicar, 
 or rather colleague, for such he became, though 
 by no means bigoted, probably not much of a 
 believer in anything, was time-serving and 
 somewhat cunning. A strong portion of the 
 tradesmen were in favor of a change of Pa- 
 triarch, and as a most ready means of accom- 
 plishing their object, they spread the story 
 everywhere, that Stepan, the occupant of the 
 see, was a Protestant, and was playing into 
 the hands of the missionaries. As an evidence 
 of this, they pointed triumphantly to the Sem- 
 inary at Bebek, consisting altogether of Ar- 
 menian boys, and yet their parents were not 
 ordered to keep them at home. It was neces- 
 sary for the poor Patriarch to do something. 
 The Vicar summoned before him a priest 
 and two laymen, who had children there, and 
 privately told them to remove their boys ; but 
 charged them not to speak about it in public. 
 The priest obeyed, but after a few days, brought 
 his boy back. The Vicar again ordered him 
 to remove his child. He again obeyed, but 
 soon returned him as before. This was repeat- 
 ed four or five times. At length the school 
 was voluntarily suspended for a few weeks ; 
 and then went on more prosperously than 
 ever. 
 
 A fierce quarrel soon broke out between 
 the bankers and the tradesmen, in reference 
 chiefly to the alleged mismanagement of the 
 pecuniary aflairs of their college at Scutary, 
 which kept the whole community in a state 
 of intense excitement and agitation for many 
 months ; and, in the mean time, the mission- 
 aries and the native brethren were left to pros- 
 ecute their labors unmolested. The real cause 
 of this rupture is to be traced to the domineer- 
 ing spirit of some of the bankers, to whose 
 irresponsible rule, the increasing intelligence 
 of the tradesmen was teaching them no longer 
 quietly to submit. The latter succeeded in 
 procuring the appointment, by the people, of 
 a committee of counsellors, consisting of 24 
 persons, to whom every question of importance, 
 pertaining to the business matters of the Ar- 
 menian community, was to be referred. After 
 a brief interval of repose, a list of charges, 
 which had been made out by the united efforts 
 of some of the bankers, and some of the clergy, 
 was presented by the Patriarch to the Porte, 
 against these 24 men ; one of which was, that 
 they had formed the plan of placing themselves 
 and the people under the protection of Russia, 
 and thus bidding defiance to the Turks ! The 
 whole 24 were immediately thrown into prison. 
 As soon as the people heard of it, they rushed 
 to the Sublime Porte, to the number of from 
 
 4 to 6,000, and called upon the Grand Vizir 
 either to release their representatives, or im- 
 prison them all. This officer replied that their 
 own bankers and Patriarch were their accusers. 
 The people exclaimed, " We do not acknowl- 
 edge the authority of our bankers or clergy ; 
 we are subjects of the Sultan." It soon be- 
 came evident that the true policy of the gov- 
 ernment was to yield, and the prisoners were 
 accordingly released. The people then de- 
 manded the immediate removal of the Patri- 
 arch. Upon this the bishops and vartabeds 
 were all summoned to the Porte, and the 
 tradesmen were called upon to select from 
 among them the one they would prefer as Pa- 
 triarch. The reply was, " We will have none 
 of these men ; they are all alike bad men ; 
 men who live by extorting money from the 
 poor people. We want none of them. We 
 will take time to consider the matter." The 
 assembly was then dismissed, and the clergy 
 went away in disgrace. As they passed through 
 the crowd, remarks like the following were 
 heard from the lips of the people : " There go 
 our oppressors !" " Whoever goes with them 
 goes to destruction !" " Let no man step his 
 foot again in the Armenian Ckurch, on the 
 peril of his salvation, so long as these men are 
 there !" " Behold the deceivers and robbers 
 of the people!" For some days afterwards, 
 the wickedness of the clergy was a subject of 
 universal remark. Many said, " We thought 
 that Stepan, our present Patriarch, was one 
 of the best of them ; and we called him a dove, 
 but he has proved to be a raven. He has be- 
 trayed his people into the hands of the Mo- 
 hammedans ! If he is the best, what must the 
 others be ?" 
 
 This struggle continued for several months, 
 each party alternately triumphing, and suc- 
 cumbing, until at last a peremptory order was 
 issued by the Sultan, that the belligerents 
 should forthwith make peace, and that a cer- 
 tain number of men should be regularly chosen, 
 to be associated with the Patriarch in adminis- 
 tering the affairs of the community. Subse- 
 quently it was arranged that two committees 
 should be appointed, one for ecclesiastical, and 
 the other for secular matters, and the Patri- 
 arch be the chairman of each ; and this order 
 of things still prevails. 
 
 The Patriarch, Stepan, was soon removed 
 from office, and as the people and bankers 
 could not agree upon any of the prominent 
 candidates, they selected an obscure old bishop, 
 by the name of Asduadzadur, who had always 
 been an eccentric character, and was now in 
 his dotage. This also was so overruled as to 
 work mightily for the spread of the truth in 
 the land. Such was the peculiar oddity and 
 capriciousness of this man, that nobody wished 
 to go to the Patriarchate for any purpose, ex- 
 cept through dire necessity. Everybody seem- 
 ed to feel that the less they had to do with theii- 
 Patriarch the better. And when any thing 
 
136 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 was said about the need of adopting rigorous 
 mciusurcs to check the spread of ProtcKtautism, 
 tlie reply usually was, " What docs that con- 
 cern us ? Let every man do as he likes." 
 
 The Vicar of the new Patriarch was one of 
 those exiled for Protestantism, in the year 
 1839. lie was formerly acting bishop atTre- 
 bizond, and there became pretty thoroughly 
 enlightened as to the errors of his Church. 
 His exaltation to the office of Patriarch's Yi- 
 car, was as unexpected to him as it was to the 
 missionaries and to the evangelical brethren 
 generally ; and that also was of God. Only 
 a short time previous he had applied to the 
 mission for employment in the Dook-makiug 
 department. 
 
 The brethren were still exempt from perse- 
 cution, though they did not rest from prayer 
 and labor. They walked " in the fear of the 
 Lord and in the comfort of the Holy Ghost," 
 and " were multiplied." It was a period of 
 quiet and steady increase to the church. There 
 was among the native brethren, a very delight- 
 ful increase of spirituality of mind, and an 
 extraordinary spirit of prayer. They often as- 
 sembled in small circles to ask for God's bless- 
 ing on the means of grace ; and often, after 
 sermon on the Sabbath, would several of them 
 remain, in order to have a season of social 
 prayer. If the^ found any individual in the 
 congregation giving indications of special se- 
 riousness, they did not fail to stop, and con- 
 verse and pray with him. 
 
 The year 1842 was distinguished for the 
 special presence of the Holy Spirit. The 
 whole city of Constantinople was filled with 
 rumors of " the new doctrines," and they form- 
 ed the topics of discussion in almost all assem- 
 blies of Armenians. The minds of some were 
 wonderfully wrought upon. The thoughtless 
 and gay became sober and prayerful ; the 
 worldly became spiritually minded ; the proud 
 became meek and lowly ; opposers and perse- 
 cutors were disarmed, and a few were trans- 
 formed into decided friends and helpers. 
 Priests and vartabeds, and even monks, were 
 obedient to the faith; of which the mission- 
 aries give in detail some most interesting in- 
 stances. 
 
 The zeal of the Armenian Christian breth- 
 ren, in endeavoring to enlighten and reclaim 
 their own countrymen, whether far or near, 
 was one of their most striking characteristics. 
 In the summer of 1842, several of them met 
 in a retired spot among the hills that surround 
 the capital, and after uniting in prayer for the 
 guidance and blessing of the Holy Spirit, they 
 resolved to send forth one of their number, at 
 their own expense, on a missionary tour among 
 the Armenians in the interior of Asia Minor. 
 The individual selected for this service was 
 priest Vertaness, who readily accepted the 
 call, and soon proceeded on his way. It was a 
 tour attended with many good results. 
 
 Nor did they forget the claims of other races 
 
 around them, who were living in ignorance of 
 the Gospel. With the Jews especially, they 
 had almost daily conversation in reference to 
 the one only Saviour, Jesus Christ ; and this 
 was the more remarkable, since there could 
 scarcely be found among the other classes of 
 people in Turkey, any other feeling than that 
 of contempt for the outcast children of Abra- 
 ham. 
 
 There was also a very marked increase of 
 interest and religious inquiry among females. 
 Hitherto the important element of female influ- 
 ence had been in a great measure wanting in the 
 reformation. The cause of this was two-fold ; 
 first, the extreme ignorance and consequent 
 bigotry of the female portion of the population, 
 there never having been the least provision for 
 their education ; and, secondly, the difficulty of 
 access to them, and of their availing themselves, 
 even when disposed, of the privileges of the 
 gospel, owing to the peculiar customs of society 
 in the East respecting the seclusion of women. 
 The priests, from their official character as con- 
 fessors, have free access to the females of the 
 community. The pious priests were not back- 
 ward in availing themselves of this privilege, 
 and chiefly through their instrumentality, in 
 the years 1842 and 1843, several of the Arme- 
 nian females became deeply interested in relig- 
 ious concerns, and some few gave evidence of 
 being truly converted. From that time they 
 began to form a part of the regular visitors, 
 and some few became regular attendants at the 
 preaching service in the Seminary. About 
 the same time Mr, Dwight opened a week-day 
 preaching service in Armenia, exclusively for 
 females. 
 
 The distribution of the publications of the 
 press became an important branch of labor, 
 and quite sufficient to occupy the best part of 
 one man's time. Mr. Homes was designated 
 to this particular work, and he soon found that 
 in connection with his other labors, he was 
 fully and most usefully employed. There was 
 a constantly increasing demand for books, so 
 that by the spring of 1843, it was impossible 
 to procure a supply from the press and bindery 
 in Smyrna, with the limited funds they had, to 
 meet seasonably all the orders that came in. 
 Eight or ten booksellers at the capital were 
 kept constantly supplied, and the products of 
 the press were also sent to almost every part of 
 the interior, even into Russia, Georgia, and 
 Persia. An Armenian archbishop near Odessa, 
 on receiving some of these, expressed the great- 
 est joy ; and remarked that they ought to be 
 grateful towards those who were engaged in 
 preparing such excellent books for their coun- 
 trymen. More than 40,000 volumes and tracts 
 were issued from the Smyrna depot to the dif- 
 ferent stations, during the year 1842. The 
 translation of the whole Old Testament into 
 the Armeno-Turkish language, to which Mr. 
 Goodell had devoted his undivided attention and 
 strength for many years, was happily completed 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 137 
 
 on the 6th of November, 1841, and was pub- 
 lished at Smyrna, in the spring of 1842 ; and 
 before the end of the following winter, the re- 
 vision of the New Testament in the same lan- 
 guage was also finished by Mr. Goodell, and 
 the translation published. And by its side may 
 be placed an edition of the New Testament in 
 the modern Armenian, published about the 
 same time in Smyrna, as revised by Mr. Adger. 
 The expense of the latter work was defrayed 
 by the British and Foreign Bible Society, 
 while that of the former came from the Ameri- 
 can Bible Society. 
 
 One of the most striking traits of the re- 
 formed Armenians is, their reverence and 
 love of the Word of God. Some have been 
 known to sit up all night to read and study the 
 Bible, when it was first furnished to them in 
 an intelligible language ; and the prevailing 
 desire of all seemed to be, to understand what 
 God teaches through his Word, and to conform 
 their belief and practice wholly to his teach- 
 ings. A distinguished Armenian having pub- 
 lished a book against Protestantism, under the 
 direction and at the expense of the Jesuits, the 
 Vicar of the Patriarch condemned the proce- 
 dure, admitted that there were errors in their 
 church, and said that this book would call forth 
 a reply from the missionaries, which would ex- 
 pose these errors to the people. 
 
 The seminary still survived all the shocks it 
 received from the jealousy and hatred of its 
 enemies. For several months the most vigorous 
 efforts were made by bankers, priests, varta- 
 beds, and bishops, especially those who were 
 endeavoring to uphold the Scutary College, to 
 crush this institution ; when lo ! the Scutary 
 College was closed in spite of all their efforts, 
 and the mission Seminary still lived and flour- 
 ished ! 
 
 The Rev. G. W. Wood, who arrived at Con- 
 stantinople with his wife, in the summer of 
 1842, was associated with Mr. Hamlin in the 
 instruction of the seminary, the number of 
 scholars being 25, all of whom boarded in 
 the establishment. Besides the incalculably 
 important bearing of such an institution on 
 the cause of evangelical religion in Turkey, it 
 proved itself to be highly useful also as an ob- 
 ject of attraction to visitors, drawing them 
 within the sound of the gospel, and those, too, 
 often of a class that could not be induced to 
 go for instruction to the private house of a 
 missionary. 
 
 Two of those who were numbered with the 
 converted brethren, in the autumn of 1842, 
 became disaftected, and left, the occasion being 
 a paragraph or two in the Missionary Herald, 
 respecting the probability and desirableness, 
 in certain circumstances, of a separation of 
 the evangelical brethren from the Armenian 
 Church. Mr. Southgate, (afterwards bishop) 
 of the American Protestant Episcopal Church', 
 first directed their attention to the article, and 
 translated the paragraphs alluded to for them, 
 
 neither of them being acquainted with the 
 English language. 
 
 The work progressed also at the interior 
 stations. But success, as usual, awakened 
 opposition ; and an enlightened priest, at Erz- 
 rum, who had begun to preach the truth to his 
 people, was suspended from office, and basti- 
 nadoed by the bishop with his own hands. 
 The sufferer, after counting 25 blows, swooned 
 away, and in this condition was bound with a 
 chain, and thrown into prison, where he re- 
 mained till the next morning. After being 
 released, he told the bishop, in the presence of 
 witnesses, that he should continue to read and 
 teach the gospel. This same bishop was once a 
 serious inquirer, and even suffered persecution 
 for Protestantism. He was one of the exiles 
 in 1839 ; but, since his restoration to power, 
 he has been a bitter and violent persecutor. 
 
 The Providence of God wonderfully favored 
 the brethren in Adabazar. In the spring of 
 1842, the vartabed gave them formal permis- 
 sion to meet every Sabbath day in a private 
 house, for prayer and reading the Scriptures ; 
 and there were usually from 25 to 50 present. 
 Enemies they still had, however, who were 
 always watchful for opportunities of thwarting 
 and distressing them. A visit from the bishop 
 of the diocese, — the ex-patriarch Stepan, — in 
 the spring of 1843, seemed to offer such an 
 opportunity. It was represented to him that 
 a new sect had sprung up among them, which 
 had embraced very strange and heretical no- 
 tions, and was spreading its poison in all direc- 
 tions. He took down the names of the lead- 
 ing men of this so-called sect, whom he after- 
 wards summoned before him, and asked them 
 to give an account of themselves. They re- 
 plied that they had not separated themselves 
 from the Armenian Church, but that they re- 
 ceived the Scriptures as the only rule of faith 
 and practice ; that they tried to keep holy the 
 Sabbath day ; that they endeavored to refrain 
 from lying, swearing, and blasphemy, and in 
 all things to follow strictly the rules of Christ. 
 The bishop, after questioning them still fur- 
 ther, for his own satisfaction, decided that 
 there was no fault in them at all in this mat- 
 ter, and, expressing the wish that all the Ar- 
 menians would do the same, dismissed them. 
 
 At Nicomedia, the work received a new im- 
 pulse in 1842, when the attendance on a 
 weekly prayer-meeting was suddenly increased 
 from six or eight to 40 or 50. Many minds 
 were in an inquiring state. Opposition was 
 made, but the bishop gave a decision similar 
 to that he had given at Adabazar, and pub- 
 licly charged his people to abstain from med- 
 dling with these men. The awakening influ- 
 ences of the Holy Spirit were also felt in 
 Smyrna to some extent, as in almost every 
 part of the Armenian field. 
 
 In 1843, a young Armenian, who had, in an 
 unguarded moment, embraced Mohammedan- 
 ism, and afterwards returned to his former 
 
138 
 
 AKMENLAJS'S. 
 
 profession, was publicly bchciuletl in the streets 
 of Constant iiioplo, in opposition to the renion- 
 Btranci>8 of Sir Stratford Canninjif, the liritish 
 minister ; in coiiscciuence of which, that gen- 
 tleman, in behalf of his government, anil backed 
 by the French, Prussian, and Russian ambassa- 
 dors, demanded from the Sultan a written pledge 
 that no person who had embraced the Moham- 
 medan religion, and afterwards returned to 
 Christianity, should, on that account, be put to 
 death. The Turks yielded, through necessity, 
 after holding out for several weeks, and the 
 
 E ledge required was given, signed by the Sultan 
 imself, the conccdexl interpretation of which 
 is, that henceforth, no person should be per- 
 secuted FOR his religious OPINIONS IN TUR- 
 KEY. So plainly was the finger of God mani- 
 fest in this whole transaction, that His Excel- 
 lency, Sir Stratford Canning, afterwards dis- 
 tinctly acknowledged that God alone had 
 done it, and added, that to him it seemed litr 
 tie less than a miracle. No reference was 
 made, in these proceedings, to the persecuted 
 people of God in Turkey ; yet, in this indirect 
 way, the foundation was laid for their full en- 
 joyment of religious liberty. 
 
 During the winter of 1843-4, the stations 
 in Turkey were favored with a visit from the 
 Rev. Rufus Anderson, D.D., Secretary of the 
 American Board of Commissioners for Foreign 
 Missions, and the Rev. Joel Hawes, D.D., a 
 corporate member of the Board. An oppor- 
 tunity was thus afforded for full consultations 
 on various subjects, having a practical bearing 
 on the missionary work, the results of which 
 clearly attested the expediency of the measure. 
 An important change followed in reference to 
 one department of labor. The mission to the 
 Greeks in Turkey was abandoned. Mr. Riggs, 
 of Smyrna, and Mr. Ladd, of Brusa, hitherto 
 laboring exclusively in this department, now 
 gave themselves up to the work among the 
 Armenians. Mr. Benjamin, of Athens, joined 
 the station at Trebizond, with a view to the 
 same field. Mr. Calhoun removed fi^om Smyrna 
 to Syria, and Mr. Temple, much to the regret 
 of all who knew him, returned to America, as, 
 at the age of fifty-four, it would not have been 
 wise for him to attempt the acquisition of a 
 new and difficult language. 
 
 From 1843 to 1846, there was no. long 
 period of exemption from persecution, though, 
 throughout the whole field, the spirit of inquiry 
 and discussion wonderfully spread, and believ- 
 ers were multiplied. On the whole, there was 
 a very decid(id increase in the size of the con- 
 gregations on the Sabbath, though, both at 
 Trebizond and Erzrum, it became necessary, 
 during a portion of the time, to suspend pub- 
 lic worship, on account of the hostility of the 
 hierarchy. There was, indeed, such a hunger- 
 ing for the "Word, as has probably been rarely 
 witnessed in this world. Family worship — 
 consisting of reading the Scriptures and 
 prayer in the vulgar tongue, was established 
 
 in many households ; and often did the request 
 come from females, living in different (juarters 
 of the city, that meetings might be oi)ened in 
 their neighborhood expressly for the women. 
 
 To meet the wants of the times, and in obe- 
 dience to what seemed plainly to be a provi- 
 dential intimation, a female seminary was 
 opened at Pera in the autumn of 1845. It 
 was kept in the house of Mr. Goodell, in 
 whose family the pupils boarded, and Miss Lo- 
 vell, who had arrived from America for the 
 purpose the preceding spring, took charge of 
 the educational department. The school 
 opened with eight scholars, which were as 
 many as could then be sustained by the funds, 
 though many parents were sadly disappointed 
 when they were told no more could be re- 
 ceived. 
 
 In the autumn of 1844, the Patriarch As- 
 duadzadiir, resigned his office, and Matteos, 
 formerly bishop of Brusa, but then of Smyrna, 
 was appointed in his place. The former, be- 
 fore his resignation, became more and more 
 openly intolerant towards Protestantism. By 
 his orders, priest Vertaness was again subjected 
 to persecution, being divested of his office, cast 
 into prison, and afterwards rudely banished. 
 The new Patriarch was a vacillating man ; 
 well convinced of the errors of his Church, and 
 sometimes appearing to favor reform, but ex- 
 tremely afraid of offending the party that was 
 strongest for the time being. Peshtimaljian 
 represented him as a man of enlightened views, 
 but without principle, and always governed by 
 what he considered the prevailing opinions and 
 wishes of those whom he desired to please. 
 " In short," said the teacher, " he is just like 
 an empty cistern. If you put your head to its 
 mouth and say boo, the cistern says boo ; if you 
 say bah, the cistern answers bah.'' Matteos is 
 a man of more than common ability and 
 shrewdness, and withal exceedingly plausible 
 in his manner, and deep in his schemes. 
 
 Soon after he came into power, many of the 
 evangelical brethren called upon him ; some 
 in obedience to custom, and others by special 
 invitation. To all he manifested a friendly 
 spirit ; and professed to be in favor of educar 
 tion and even of reform, and opposed to perse- 
 cution.- He was, however, exceedingly anx- 
 ious that both the missionaries, and the " Bible- 
 men" in the Armenian community should 
 " keep still," and avoid all " agitation." 
 
 The position of the Patriarch was a most 
 difficult one. The enemies of the truth were 
 clamorous for some decisive measures which 
 should effectually check the alarming tendency 
 to Protestantism. They would neither allow 
 their Patriarch to let the matter rest, nor to 
 make any compromise. Already had the re- 
 port gone abroad that Matteos himself was a 
 Protestant. And in sober truth he knew and 
 doubtless acknowledged to his own soul, that 
 the Protestants were right and his own Church 
 wrong. But he knew well, that the great 
 
A.RMENIANS. 
 
 139 
 
 mass of wealth and influence in the Armenian 
 community was on the other side. He was 
 ambitious ; and now that he had attained to 
 the highest post in his nation, he was resolved 
 to keep it. He found the evangelical breth- 
 ren much less disposed to yield in matters of 
 faith and conscience, than his own indiflerentism 
 had led him to expect. As the only means of 
 saving himself, he firmly resolved to sacrifice 
 the Protestants. From that moment, all his 
 powers, personal and official, were employed 
 in the effort to eradicate Protestantism from 
 the land. And, in the persecution that fol- 
 lowed, Eev. Mr. Dwight {Christianity revived 
 in the East, pp. 211, 213,) states that the Rt. 
 Eev. Horatio Southgate, missionary Bishop of 
 the American Episcopal Church to the Otto- 
 man Empire, appeared before the public as a 
 sympathiser and counsellor with the Patriarch ; 
 which Mr. D. substantiates by extracts from 
 published documents, bearing the bishop's sig- 
 nature. It is but just, however, to state that 
 the church to which Bishop S. belonged, has 
 since utterly repudiated his favorite policy, in 
 the conduct of Eastern missions. (See Orien- 
 tal Christians.) 
 
 Almost every shopkeeper and artisan in 
 Turkey depends for the chief profits of his bu- 
 siness, upon the patronage of some wealthy 
 and influential individuals ; and young men es- 
 pecially, have very little prospect of advanc- 
 ing in the world, without the assistance of 
 some such friend. The Patriarch, by a skill- 
 ful manoeuvre, threw a large number of the ad- 
 herents to the gospel, into the greatest distress. 
 He secretly directed all the faithful among his 
 own flock, who stood in the relation of patrons, 
 or regular customers to any of the evangelical 
 brethren, silently to withdraw their patronage. 
 The consequence was, that many who supposed 
 they were in a fair way of obtaining a compe- 
 tent support, found themselves suddenly with- 
 out any business. Some of these had friends 
 depending on them for daily food ; when all at 
 once, it appeared that they had not the ability 
 to provide for their own wants. And they 
 soon found, also, that all appeals and remon- 
 strances were useless, unless accompanied by a 
 pledge to withdraw from the preaching of the 
 missionaries and cease to open their mouths in 
 favor of evangelical views. Another, and still 
 more threatening measure of opposition was, 
 that all the priests were ordered to hand over 
 to the Patriarch the names of those who did 
 not come to confession and receive absolution, 
 and partake of the communion in their respec- 
 tive churches. Those whose consciences were 
 fully enlightened (and- they were specially 
 aimed at in the measure,) were not able to 
 conform to these rites, because of the supersti- 
 tion and idolatry involved. Now, excommu- 
 nication was threatened to disobedience, the 
 consequences of which, in a temporal point of 
 view, must necessarily, in a community organ- 
 ized as this was, be very serious. There was 
 
 a delay, however, in following up this part of 
 the plan, perhaps in order to see what would 
 be the result of the other. The experiment 
 was to be made throughout the country, as 
 well as in the metropolis, and orders similar to 
 the above were sent to the bishops in the inte- 
 rior, wherever Protestants were found. 
 
 In the mean time, some few of the ecclesias- 
 tics themselves were showing strong inclina- 
 tions towards the evangelical side of the ques- 
 tion. Two or three vartabeds, as well as 
 some of the priests, had gone so far as to per- 
 severe, from Sabbath to Sabbath, in attending 
 the public preaching of the missionaries. 
 Others were known to be friendly. Something 
 must be done at once to check this tendency 
 to Protestantism among the spiritual guides 
 of the people. Bedros, vartabed, was the first 
 selected to be made an example of. It was 
 known through the whole city that he had em- 
 braced evangelical views, and the Patriarch, 
 as a test of his opinions, had already ordered 
 him to perform mass on a certain occasion, 
 which Bedros had declined on conscientious 
 grounds. The Patriarch now instructed him 
 to proceed forthwith to a town on the Russian 
 frontier, ostensibly to take charge of a diocese. 
 The real object, however, was, plainly to get 
 him into a position, from whence he might 
 easily be conveyed as a prisoner to the monas- 
 tery of Echmiadzin. The vartabed very po- 
 litely declined the honor of this appointment, 
 and the Patriarch was not then prepared to 
 resort to force. After some little delay, it 
 was arranged that Bedros should proceed to 
 the monastery at Jerusalem. The Patriarch 
 drew up a paper for him to sign, in which he 
 was required to promise that he would perform 
 all the rites of the Church, and, in all re- 
 spects, be obedient to his superiors. This he 
 resolutely persisted in refusing, on the ground 
 that there were many things in the ceremo- 
 nies of his Church, which he could not con- 
 scientiously perform. He never got nearer 
 Jerusalem than Beirut ; from whence he pro- 
 ceeded to Aleppo and Aintab. For several 
 years he labored in these towns and their 
 vicinity, with great zeal and fidelity for the 
 spiritual good of his countrymen, though in 
 the midst of many persecutions, trials and 
 dangers. He distributed large numbers of 
 evangelical books, and preached the gospel 
 successfully to many people. He was suddenly 
 cut off by the cholera in the autumn of 1849 ; 
 but his end was peace. 
 
 But Priest Vertaness was fairly in the Pa- 
 triarch's hands, being already a prisoner at the 
 monastery of Armash, whither he had been . 
 sent by the preceding Patriarch. And this 
 priest had been adding sin to sin, by preaching 
 to the monks, most zealously and faithfully, 
 salvation through the blood of Chriit alone, 
 without the deeds of the law. Several of them 
 were awakened and convinced, and some, it 
 was hoped, really believed; and word was 
 
140 
 
 ARNfENIANS. 
 
 brought to Constantinople that if the Protes- 
 tant priest Wtts not removed, all the inmates 
 of the monastery would soon become corrupt- 
 ed. An imperial tirman was forthwith pro- 
 cured (February, 1845,) by Mattcos Patriarch, 
 for the further banishment of priest Yertaness 
 to Kaiscry (Cajsarea,) where Mr. Sahakyan 
 had been conlined six years before, for a like 
 offence. While on his way to that place, in 
 charge of a Turkish officer, he everywhere 
 
 E reached the Gospel, for which he was " in 
 onds ;" nor could he, in the place of his se- 
 cond banishment, cease to make known " Christ 
 and him crucified," to all unto whom he had 
 access. In July of the same year, the Sultan, 
 on the occasion of a great feast, gave orders to 
 have all the exiles in the country set at liber- 
 ty ; and Vertaness returned to Constantinople 
 on the 4th of August. Letters afterwards 
 came to the Patriarch from Kaisery, saying 
 that Vertaness had seduced many, and that if 
 he had remained there much longer, all would 
 have gone after him. 
 
 Before this, a highly respectable inhabitant 
 of Trebizond, Tateos by name, who had been 
 a member of the Armenian municipal council, 
 became much interested in the study of the 
 Bible. Being a man of some property, he 
 went on a tour to Constantinople, Smyrna, 
 Brusa, Nicomedia, and Adabazar, solelv for 
 the purpose of becoming acquainted witn the 
 missionaries and native brethren in those 
 places, and learning more of the work of God's 
 Spirit, as well as of the truths of his' Word. 
 He returned to Trebizond, very much strength- 
 ened in his faith, and quickened in his zeal for 
 the truth. Just before his arrival, the most 
 stringent measures had been adopted to com- 
 pel the evangelical brethren to submit to the 
 Church, in obedience to a very urgent denun- 
 ciatory letter from the Patriarch Matteos. 
 Nearlj^ one-half of the reputed Protestants had 
 been induced to recant, and the persecuting 
 party, fearing, with good reason, that the in- 
 fluence of such a man might turn the scale, 
 resolved to put him out of the way, with all 
 possible despatch. Accordingly, just as the 
 steamer was leaving for Constantinople, he was 
 decoyed on board by stratagem, and immediate- 
 ly thrust down into the hold, and there confined, 
 by order of the Turkish pasha, who acted at 
 the instigation of the Armenian vartabed. 
 AiTived at Constantinople, he was conducted 
 first to the Patriarchate, and from thence to 
 the Armenian hospital, to be confined in the 
 mad-house, in a sitting posture, and fastened 
 with two chains, one from his neck to the wall, 
 and the other from his feet to the floor. On 
 the Sabbath, the eighth day of his imprison- 
 ment, while the Armenian congregation were 
 engaged in singing in the chapel in Pera, he 
 entered the room — a free man ! Much suppli- 
 cation had been made for him, and his sudden 
 appearance among them, without their know- 
 ing how he had been liberated, strongly re- 
 
 minded them of the case of Peter. They uni- 
 ted in special thanksgiving to God for his 
 deliverance, and took courage. His case had 
 been made known to Sir Stratford Canning, 
 and there is no reason to doubt that his re- 
 monstrances caused the Patriarch to loosen his 
 grasp upon this innocent victim of his oppres- 
 sion. 
 
 The Patriarch labored with the most un- 
 wearied diligence to overthrow the Seminary 
 at Bebek ; but his opposition only increased 
 its prosperity. 
 
 Another method adopted by the Patriarch 
 and his party,- was to engage the Protestants 
 in public discussions ; but in this, also, they 
 were signally defeated, the- Protestants mani- 
 festly having the best of the argument, till as 
 a last resort, they were treated with brow- 
 beating and abuse. 
 
 About this time, a censorship of the press 
 was established, which threatened to be a se- 
 rious obstacle in the way of the distribution 
 of evangelical books ; but the object of the 
 law being to shut out inflammatory political 
 works, the character of the missionaries with 
 the Turkish officers aflbrded a sufficient protec- 
 tion to the books circulated by them. 
 
 Among the evangelical brethren, a tempe- 
 rance society was formed, which was the first 
 one of the kind that ever existed in Turkey. 
 This movement was rendered the more inter- 
 esting from its being entirely self-prompted. 
 It has been since carried out to the extent 
 that the principle of total abstinence is of al- 
 most universal adoption by the Protestants, 
 wherever found. 
 
 The missionary circle was invaded by the 
 hand of death. Mrs. Yan Lennep died. Sept 
 27, 1844, less than a year from the time of 
 her embarkation from America. Mr. and Mrs. 
 Yan Lennep had been removed from Smyrna 
 to Constantinople during the preceding spring, 
 for the express purpose of taking charge of 
 the female seminary then in prospect, and her 
 early removal was on this account an uncom- 
 monly grievous affliction to the mission. 
 
 The persecution which had broken out anew 
 at Constantinople, extended its fury to other 
 parts of the empire, and was prosecuted with 
 the same bitter spirit. Instances of cruelty 
 and suffering, shocking to humanity, occurred, 
 the details of which we are obliged to omit 
 It raged with the greatest violence and fury 
 at Trebizond, where the evangelical party were 
 harassed, turned out of their houses, imprisoned 
 and banished, or " compelled to lolaspheme," 
 till scarcely one of them was left, and even the 
 house of the missionary, Mr. Bliss, was attack- 
 ed and pelted with stones till all the windows 
 were broken in. 
 
 But in most cases, these violent measures 
 only tended to confirm the individuals in their 
 new views, as they more clearly developed the 
 true spirit of the ruling authorities in the 
 Church ; and, in some instances, the persecu- 
 
[tjitivbksitt; 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 141 
 
 tors themselves were convinced and con- 
 verted. 
 
 A young man of superior mind and attain- 
 ments, belonging to the Papal Armenian 
 denomination, who had, for some time, given 
 the most satisfactory evidence of piety, was 
 called to his rest in the spring of 1844. He 
 had been greatly troubled by his priest, who 
 made every effort to reclaim him, even to the 
 very last moment of his life. Mugurdich, for 
 that was his name, was very decided, and a few 
 days before his death he made a formal renun- 
 ciation of his Church, in writing ; and peace- 
 fully committed his all to Christ. His body 
 was not permitted burial in the graveyard, or 
 with the usual religious ceremonies, but at a 
 late hour of a very dark and stormy night, it 
 was carried out by common street porters, un- 
 der the direction of a Turkish police ofQcer, 
 and placed under the ground, in the midst of 
 a waste place about a mile from the city. They 
 had previously attempted to frighten him 
 back to his Church by threatening to bury 
 him like a dog, and faithfully did they execute 
 the threat ; though, as he told them at the 
 time, they could do him no real harm, for they 
 could not reach his soul. 
 
 Aji attempt was made to reclaim a husband 
 and sons, by refusing Christian burial to the 
 wife and mother, although she had remained 
 faithful to the Church to the very last. They 
 would not yield, however, and after the great- 
 est trouble, and being obliged to keep the 
 body an unwonted time, they were at length 
 compelled to carry it out, amid the jeers and 
 spittings of the crowd, and bury it at a distance 
 from the city, in the corner of a Mussulman's 
 farm. 
 
 Hitherto, the Evangelical Armenians had 
 remained members of the ecclesiastico-civil 
 community in which they were born. They 
 lived in different degrees of conformity with 
 the requisitions of the Church, according to 
 the amount of light they had, and their readi- 
 ness to endure reproach and suffering for 
 Christ's sake. Some absented themselves en- 
 tirely from the public services in their church- 
 es, feeling that to be present where there was 
 so much of superstition and idolatry, was vir- 
 tually to sanction Avhat their consciences con- 
 demned. Others were occasionally present to 
 hear a sermon, though they made it a point to 
 retire from the other parts of the service. 
 Others still, chiefly those who were only intel- 
 lectually convinced of the truth, were as regu- 
 lar in the external observance of the forms of 
 the Armenian religion as custom required ; 
 and, it should be mentioned, that previous to 
 the Protestant movement, a great diversity 
 had existed in this respect, in the practice of 
 different individuals, and there had never been 
 in the Armenian Church any of that rigor 
 in enforcing ecclesiastical rules and obser- 
 vances, wliich so characterises the Church of 
 Rome. 
 
 According to the fundamental laws of the 
 Turkish empire, every individual of its Chris- 
 tian subjects must be enrolled in some one of 
 the existing communities, having a Patriarch 
 at his head. To secede from one body, in or- 
 der to join another, had repeatedly been for- 
 bidden by the Sultan, and was always attended 
 with danger ; although Papal diplomacy and 
 Papal gold had often atoned for the offence, 
 where the secession was to the Papal faith. 
 To detach oneself from one community with- 
 out coming into connection with another, 
 was equivalent to a renunciation of every civil 
 right and privilege, and necessarily exposed 
 the individual to all the evil consequences of 
 complete outlawry. To make this fully under- 
 stood, it will be necessary to enter somewhat 
 into detail. 
 
 In the city of Constantinople, as well as in 
 other large towns in Turkey, each trade is in- 
 corporated, and its affairs are regulated by a 
 committee, consisting of a small number of the 
 most wealthy and powerful individuals in the 
 business ; and no person is permitted to open 
 a shop, without a license from this committee. 
 Frequently, a single individual, who may be 
 called the presiding officer, has, in practice, if 
 not in form, the whole matter of granting and 
 withholding licenses, in his own hands. A 
 Turkish officer presides over all the trades, 
 whose official sanction is necessary to give 
 force and effect to the doings of the trade 
 committees. Every journeyman, and appren- 
 tice even, must be furnished with a permit, to 
 show to the Turkish police officers, whenever 
 he is challenged in the streets, and if he fails 
 to produce one, he is liable to be thrown into 
 prison, as a disorderly man and a vagrant. 
 On taking out these licenses, each individual 
 is required to give two or more sureties for 
 good conduct, and the Patriarch is held as 
 general surety for the whole community. If 
 the evangelical Armenians had declared that 
 they no longer acknowledged the authority of 
 the Patriarch, it would have been tantamount 
 to civil rebellion, and they would have been 
 dealt with as outlaws. In spiritual matters, 
 those who were decided among them, carefully 
 abstained — as they were taught by the mis- 
 sionaries, and had learned from the Word of 
 God to do — from all participation in supersti- 
 tion and idolatry. They attended regularly 
 upon the ministry of the missionaries, and sat 
 down at the table of the Lord with them, as 
 guests ; because they could neither profitably 
 nor conscientiously unite in this service at the 
 Armenian Church. They retained connection, 
 however, with their own people, and generally 
 cherished the hope, amounting in some cases 
 to a strong expectation that, by degrees, the 
 great body of the Armenians would come 
 over to the evangelical faith, and thus a serious 
 rupture be avoided. The Patriarch Matteos 
 effectually cut off this hope. 
 
 In the beginning of the year 1846, he re- 
 
142 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 8olve<l to ontor upon more coercive measures. 
 The first subuTt selocte*! for the new experi- 
 meDt, was IViest Vertaness, whose zealous and 
 penevering labors for the spread of pure 
 Christianity, were doubly odious on account 
 of his being a member of the priesthood, and 
 who had already been twice banished for his 
 religion. One of the Patriarch's beadles was 
 sent to his lodgings, together with the chief 
 municipal officer of the Armenians in that 
 quarter, in order to arrest him. The owner of 
 tne house, who was friendly to his lodger, 
 though not himself a Protestant, did not scru- 
 ple to tell a falsehood, declaring that Verta- 
 ncss was absent, and thus sent the officers 
 away. The priest made his escape the same 
 night to anotlier part of the city, where he re- 
 mained for several weeks, concealed in the 
 house of a friend. 
 
 On Sunday, Jan. 25, after the usual morning 
 services in the patriarchal church were finished, 
 the house was darkened by extinguishing the 
 candles, and the great veil was drawn in front 
 of the main altar, and a bull of excision and 
 anathema was solemnly read against Priest 
 Yertancss, including all the followers of the 
 " modern sectaries." He was styled by the 
 Patriarch " a contemptible wretch," who, 
 " following his carnal lusts," had forsaken the 
 Church and was going about as a " vaga- 
 bond," " babbling out errors," and being an 
 " occasion of stumbling to many." He was 
 said to be " a traitor, and murderer of Christ, 
 a child of the devil, and an oflspring of Anti- 
 christ, worse than an infidel or a heathen," for 
 teaching " the impieties and seductions of 
 modern sectaries, (Protestants)." ♦' Where- 
 fore," says the Patriarch, " we expel him and 
 forbid him as a devil, and a child of the devil, 
 to enter into the company of believers. We 
 cut him off from the priesthood, as an ampu- 
 tated member of the spiritual body of Christ, 
 drid as a branch cut off from the vine, which 
 is good for nothing but to be cast into the fire. 
 By this admonitory bull, 1 therefore command 
 and warn my beloved in every city, far and 
 near, not to look upon his face — regarding it 
 as the face of Belial ; not to receive him into 
 your holy dwellings ; for he is a house-destroy- 
 ing and ravening wolf ; not to receive his sal- 
 utation, but as a soul-destroying and deadly 
 Eoison ; and to beware, with all your house- 
 olds, of the seducing and impious followers 
 of the false doctrine of the modern sectaries 
 
 e'rotcstants) ; and to pray for them to the 
 od who remembereth not iniquity, if per- 
 chance they may repent and turn from their 
 wicked pathe, and secure the salvation of their 
 souls, through the grace of our Lord and 
 Saviour Jesus Christ, who is blessed for ever. 
 Amen," 
 
 This bull of excision and anathema was fol- 
 lowed by a violent denunciatory discourse from 
 the Patriarch, against all the Protestants in 
 general, and the priest in particular, which 
 
 called forth many loud " amens " from the in- 
 flamed people. 
 
 On the following day the ^rektest activity 
 prevailed among the priests, m every part of 
 the city and 8ubu;'bs. All moved like the dif- 
 ferent parts of a machine, as if by one impulse, 
 and it was not difficult to trace the direction 
 from which that impulse had come. The reso- 
 lute Patriarch was determined not to trust 
 merely to the impression made upon the people 
 by the anathema, and his accompanying de- 
 nunciations on the preceding day. He, there- 
 fore, issued orders to his clergy to see that the 
 temporal penalties threatened in that instru- 
 ment were immediately inflicted to the very 
 letter. The priests went forth simultaneously 
 to their work, — most of them apparently with 
 good-will, but some reluctantly, their sympa- 
 thies being with the innocent victims of op- 
 pression, rather than with the oppressor. The 
 Armenian heads of all the trade corporations 
 in the city were commanded to withdraw their 
 countenance from all Protestants who would 
 not recant. The keepers of khans and the 
 owners of houses were ordered to eject all 
 lodgers and tenants who would not comply 
 with this condition. Families were also 
 visited by the priests, wherever any one lived 
 who was suspected of heresy, and it was en- 
 joined upon them to expel the offending mem- 
 ber, or separate from it, even though it were 
 a son or daughter, brother or sister, husband 
 or wife. The Protestant brethren were sum- 
 moned to repair immediately to the Patriarch- 
 ate in order publicly to recant and become 
 reconciled to the Church. To give force to 
 the whole, the threat was issued that all who 
 refused to aid in carrying out these measures 
 against the " new sectaries," should themselves 
 be anathematized. 
 
 A wild spirit of fanaticism now reigned. 
 Before it, all sense of right, all regard to truth 
 and justice, all " bowels of mercies " vanished 
 away. Even the strong and tender afiection 
 subsisting between husbands and wives, bro- 
 thers and sisters, parents and children, was, 
 in some instances, exchanged for the cruel and 
 relentless hate of the persecutor. The very 
 constancy of the people of God provoked still 
 more the wrath of their enemies. Their readi- 
 ness to.sufier joyfully the spoiling of their 
 goods was considered as a proof that large 
 temporal rewards had been offered them by 
 the missionaries ; and their unwavering fidel- 
 ity to Christ was interpreted into obstinacy. 
 Some on the side of the Church, who at first 
 were signally wanting in zeal, in furthering 
 the Patriarch's violent measures, were stimu- 
 lated into active persecutors, by what appeared 
 to them, in their religious indifferentism, as 
 mere stubbornness on the part of the Protest- 
 ants. 
 
 The leading men in the different trade cor- 
 porations, showed more resoluteness than any 
 other class, in attempting to force the eyan- 
 
AEMENIANS. 
 
 143 
 
 g-elical brethren to a compliance with the 
 Patriarch's demands ; and they could urge 
 motives more potent than almost any other of 
 a worldly nature. Whatever method of coer- 
 cion was resorted to, whether by priests or 
 people, it was everywhere publicly declared to 
 be by the express command of the Patriarch 
 Matteos. 
 
 During the week after the jBrst anathema 
 was read, although many were forcibly driven 
 from their houses and shops, and prevented 
 from doing business to support themselves and 
 families, and some were expelled from the 
 paternal roof, and otherwise afflicted, yet not 
 one was induced to recant. On the following 
 Sabbath, the passions of an ignorant and su- 
 perstitious people were still more inflamed by 
 a second anathema, which, like the first, was 
 read in all the churches, and accompanied by 
 the most violent denunciations from the Patri- 
 arch, the bishops, and the vartabeds. In this 
 bull it was declared that not only the " cursed 
 nonentity, Yertaness," " falsely called priest," 
 was anathematized by ' the " holy Church," 
 but likewise " all that were of his senti- 
 ments." They were together pronounced to 
 be " accursed, and excommunicated, and ana- 
 thematized, by God, and by all his saints, 
 and by us,"" that is, Matteos Patriarch. 
 " Wherefore," he says, " whoever has a son 
 that is such an one, or a brother, or a partner, 
 (in businessj and gives him bread, or assists 
 him in making money, or has intercourse with 
 him as a friend, or does business with him, let 
 such persons know that they are nourishing a 
 venomous serpent in their houses, which will 
 one day injure them with its deadly poison, 
 and they will lose their souls. Such persons 
 give bread to Judas. Such persons are ene- 
 mies of the Holy faith of Christianity, and 
 destroyers of the holy orthodox Church of the 
 Armenians, and a disgrace to the whole 
 nation. Wherefore, their houses and shops 
 also are accursed ; and whoever goes to visit 
 them, we shall learn, and publish them to the 
 Holy Church, by terrible anathemas." 
 
 The spirit of exasperation knew no bounds. 
 One after another, the brethren were summoned 
 before the Patriarch, or the local ecclesiastical 
 authorities of their particular quarter of the 
 city, and required to sign a paper of recanta- 
 tion, on penalty of being " terribly anathema- 
 tized," which involved their being deprived of 
 all business and treated as outlaws. The first 
 paper presented for their signature was, in 
 substance, a confession that under " the wicked 
 enticements of Satan" they had " separated 
 from the spotless bosom of the Holy Church," 
 and joined the " impious sect" of the Protest- 
 ants ; which now they saw to be " nothing else 
 but an invention of arrogance, a snare of Sa- 
 tan, a sect of confusion, a broad road which 
 lead-eth to destruction." Wherefore repenting 
 of their " impious deeds," they fled for pardon 
 * to the bosom of the holy and immaculate 
 
 Armenian Church," and confessed that " her 
 faith is spotless, her sacraments divine, her 
 rites of apostolic origin, her ritual pious ;" and 
 promised to receive " whatever this same holy 
 Church receiveth, whether it be a matter of 
 faith or ceremony," and " to reject with ana- 
 themas," " whatever doctrines she rejects." 
 
 This first paper not being sufficiently expli- 
 cit to suit some of the persecuting party, an- 
 other was drawn up in the form of a creed, 
 to which all were required to subscribe, as the 
 only condition of being restored to the favor 
 of the Patriarch, that is to their civil privileges. 
 This creed contained substantially all the er- 
 rors of Popery. It acknowledged that good 
 works justify a man as well as faith ; that the 
 Church is infallible ; that there are seven sa- 
 craments ; that baptism by water, and private 
 confession to a priest are essential to salvation ; 
 that the soul of one dying without full pen- 
 ance for his sins, is after death, purified by the 
 prayers of the church, by the bloodless sacri- 
 fice of the m£iss, and by the alms-giving of his 
 friends ; that the bread and wine of commun- 
 ion are the true body and blood of Christ ; 
 that Mary is the mother of God ; that " the 
 holy anointed" material crosses are worthy of 
 adoration, as also relics and pictures ; that the 
 intercession of the saints is acceptable to 
 God ; and that the Patriarchs rule the Church 
 as Christ's vicegerents. It also required those 
 who subscribed it to join in anathematizing 
 all who call the worship of the holy cross, and 
 of relics and pictures, idolatry, and who reject 
 the ceremonies of the church as superstitious. 
 
 These two papers, the first having been com- 
 monly called, The Paper of Recantation, and 
 the second. The Patriarch Matteos's New Creed, 
 were issued under the high authority of the 
 Patriarch himself, and sent by him through- 
 out the country for the signature of the Pro- 
 testants. In Smyrna, in Nicomedia, in Ada- 
 bazar, in Trebizond, and in Erzrum, the evan 
 gelical brethren were summoned before their 
 respective ecclesiastical rulers, and presented 
 with identically the same creed, which, they 
 were told, had been received from the Patri- 
 arch, and which they were required, by his 
 command, to sign. 
 
 One individual, a very respectable merchant 
 who was in partnership with his father-in-law, 
 was driven from his shop, and separated also 
 from his wife and children, and defrauded of 
 his property for refusing to yield to these re- 
 quisitions of the Patriarch. Another, who 
 was in the silk business, was summoned before 
 the Patriarch, who, when he found no signs of 
 repentance, so far forgot himself, as to address 
 this brother with rude and angry profaneness ; 
 and, declaring that he and all like minded 
 with him are accursed, he drove him away. 
 The individual returned to his shop, but was 
 soon followed by a beadle from the Patriarch, 
 who summoned his partner before this digni- 
 tary. The partner was required forthwith to 
 
lU 
 
 ARMENIANS 
 
 dissolve all connection with the heretic, which 
 fear led him to do without delay. Since the 
 shop and most of the capital belonged to the 
 partner, the brother was at once reduced to 
 circumstances of the deepest distress. As a 
 still further act of coercion, the Patriarch sent 
 for his father, and enjoined it upon him to 
 drive his own son from home, and deprive him 
 of his inheritance. This command, in sub- 
 stance, was afterwards committed to writing, 
 and addressed to a priest, under the Patriarch's 
 own seal, two other sons being now included 
 in it. The following is a literal translation of 
 the original, which the writer of this article 
 has seen, with the Patriarch's own signature 
 and seal attached : 
 
 " My beloved Priest. — This Khachadur, a 
 penitent, has said ' I have sinned,' and pro- 
 mised to confess to you, and to commune in 
 the bosom of our church. But his three sons, 
 (one of whom was the silk merchant^ are im- 
 penitent and hardened in iniquity. If tney come 
 to the house of their father, he is not to re- 
 ceive them, and he is not to retain them as 
 his heirs ; but let them be stripped of their 
 inheritance, if they do not turn from their 
 wickedness. Farewell." 
 Janmrv 18, (0. S.) 1846, At 
 the Patriarchate of the Ar- 
 menians, Constantinople. 
 
 (Sealed) 
 
 Matteos 
 Patriarch. 
 
 Many other cases of like cruelty and oppres- 
 sion are related by the missionaries as speci- 
 mens of the cruelties practiced upon the peo- 
 ple of God, by their enraged persecutors. 
 
 Nearly forty individuals in Constantinople 
 had their shops closed and their licenses to 
 trade taken away, and were thereby prevented 
 from laboring for an honest livelihood. Nearly 
 seventy were obliged to leave father, mother, 
 brother, sister, husband, wife, or child, for 
 Christ's sake ; and were forced by the Patri- 
 arch's orders from their own hired houses, and 
 sometimes even from houses owned by them- 
 •selves. In order to increase their distress, 
 bakers were repeatedly and stringently order- 
 ed not to furnisn them with bread, and water- 
 carriers to cut off" their supply of water. As 
 multitudes of families in the metropolis depend 
 eutkely upon the latter for all the water they 
 use, and the greater part of the water-carriers 
 are bigoted Armenians, this measure operated 
 with great severity. Many, who were thrown 
 out of business, were compelled to dissolve 
 partnerships, and to bring their accounts to a 
 forced settlement, which involved their entire 
 ruin. And the greatest activity prevailed 
 among the Patriarch's agents, to ascertain 
 where debts were due from any of the anathe- 
 matized to a faithful son of the Church ; and 
 the latter, however reluctant he might be per- 
 sonally to distress his friend, was compelled to 
 urge an immediate settlement. In short, there 
 
 was displayed the greatest ingenuity in invent- 
 ing various refined methods of afflicting the 
 people of God, so as if possible to " compel 
 them to blaspheme." Large numbers of sus- 
 pected Protestants were carried before the 
 Patriarch, and urged to submit to the Church 
 and sign the creed ; but only four or five of 
 those who were previously known to the mis* 
 sionaries as decidedly evangelical in sentiment, 
 were led to give in their adhesion to the Par 
 triarch ; and they almost immediately renounc- 
 ed the forced confession they had made, and, 
 returning to the Protestants, were anathemar 
 tizod with the rest. Attempts were also made, 
 but without success, to persuade them by mild- 
 er means, and even by offers of pecuniary ad- 
 vantage, to return to their mother church. 
 
 Nothing could be more evident than that 
 the suffering brethren had special grace given 
 them from above, to enable them to bear as 
 they did these severe trials. Driven from their 
 houses and shops, their families and friends, 
 and having no certain dwelling-place; and 
 many of them reduced to penury ; subject to 
 constant insult in the streets, and sometimes 
 to personal injury ; and having every reason 
 to apprehend persecution in still more violent 
 forms, they yet exhibited a calm and quiet 
 spirit of endurance, a readiness to suffer the 
 loss of all for Christ, and a peace and joy in 
 the midst of their sufferings, which could be 
 accounted for only on the supposition, that 
 God was with them in very deed. One, who 
 in fact spoke the feelings of many, said one 
 day to a missionary, "My daily prayer to 
 God is, that even if there should not be left a 
 single person except myself to witness for the 
 truth. He would still give me faith to 
 stand firm for the doctrine of salvation by 
 grace in Christ alone. I know that all the 
 resistance we now make to error, we are mak- 
 ing for coming generations. We may never 
 reap the fruits ourselves, but our exercise of 
 firmness and faith now, will enable thousands, 
 and perhaps millions, in after days to enjoy 
 the rights of conscience in pure and holy wor- 
 ship." 
 
 Another brother, to whom an offer of up- 
 wards of 20,000 piastres (about $1,000) was 
 made by a rich friend, on condition that he 
 would conform to the Church, replied : " If 
 you knew anything of the value of the Gospel, 
 or the preciousness of faith in Christ, you 
 would not have thought to influence me either 
 by a thousand, or a hundred thousand dollars." 
 
 Many of whom the missionaries had known 
 but little, were led by these violent measures 
 to take a decided stand for the truth ; and in 
 the midst of the most violent ragings of the 
 enemy, the missionaries' houses and the room 
 in the Khan, in the heart of the city, kept for 
 the reception of visitors, were more than ever 
 thronged. The persecuted brethren wrote let- 
 ters to the Patriarch and to the primates of 
 the Armenian community, setting forth their 
 
ARMENIANS, 
 
 145 
 
 doctrinal views, declaring their attachment to 
 their nation, and expressing their desire to be 
 further enlightened, yet declaring that they 
 could do nothing against their consciences. 
 But they found no relief ; and at length, they 
 presented a petition to Eeshid Pasha, Turk- 
 ish Minister of Foreign Affairs, containing a 
 plain, dignified statement of their grievances. 
 
 This petition was treated with respect ; but, 
 orwing to the influence of some of the Arme- 
 nian primates, it procured no relief. Subse- 
 quently, a letter was addressed by the persecu- 
 ted brethren to the English, Prussian, and 
 American Ministers, asking for the influence 
 of these high public functionaries to procure 
 their release from present suffering, and the 
 guarantee of their civil rights. The kindest 
 interest was taken in their case by the liberal- 
 minded and humane gentlemen who occupied 
 these posts, and repeated efforts were made to 
 procure for them exemption from suffering ; 
 but the persecution still went on. There was 
 evidently a connivance of some of the Turkish 
 authorities in this thing, and the Patriarch 
 was so much encouraged by his success, thus 
 far, that he sent to the Porte the names of 
 thirteen leading men among the Protestants, 
 requesting their banishment. The reply of 
 the Porte was fatal to his plans. The sub- 
 stance of it was, that having adopted the prin- 
 ciple of freedom of conscience, they could not 
 banish men for imputed religious errors. The 
 English Ambassador, Sir Stratford Canning, 
 had already been urging upon the attention 
 of the Turkish ministry, the pledge given three 
 years before by the Sultan, and, in accordance 
 with the true spirit of this pledge, it was now 
 decided that the persecution of the evangelical 
 Armenians could not be allowed. The humane 
 endeavors of the American charge, Mr. Brown, 
 and subsequently of the American minister, 
 Mr. Carr, and also of the Prussian minister, 
 Mr. Le Coq, contributed essentially to bring 
 about this happy issue. A petition from the 
 suffering brethren, directly to the Sultan him- 
 self, no doubt, had its share of influence. By 
 the agency of Sir Stratford, lleshid Pasha 
 summoned before him the Patriarch, and 
 charged him to desist from his persecuting 
 course. 
 
 The persecution began the last week in Jan- 
 uary, and it was now past the middle of March, 
 and during the whole of this interval, the 
 Protestants had struggled in vain, until this 
 moment, to procure their civil and social rights. 
 As regularly as the Sabbath came round, the 
 Armenian churches, in and around the capital, 
 rung with anathemas against all the followers 
 of the " new sect." None were more violent 
 in their public addresses than the Patriarch 
 himself, who seemed determined that the exci- 
 ted passions of an uninformed and bigoted 
 populace against the so called " infidels " and 
 " atheists," should not subside, so long as he 
 oculd find fuel to feed the flame. The most 
 10 
 
 foolish calumnies in regard to the religious 
 views and practices of the Protestants, were 
 uttered from all the pulpits, and even publish- 
 ed in books under the Patriarchal sanction. 
 In one of the latter, having the imprimatur of 
 the Patriarch upon the title page, it was cool- 
 ly asserted of the whole Protestant Church, 
 that it formally approves of polygamy, adultery, 
 and theft, and sanctions rebellion against the 
 civil powers ! With such examples, and such 
 untiring effort on the part of their spiritual lead- 
 ers, in the use of means like these, to stimulate 
 the fanatical feelings of the people, it was not 
 strange that the brethren could not pass 
 through the streets without being abused by 
 the most filthy language, and even spit upon 
 and stoned. Great care was taken, particu- 
 larly after it was known that the foreign am- 
 bassadors were keeping an eye on all these 
 proceedings, not to exceed, if possible, the 
 bounds of the law ; so that when even as many 
 as threescore and ten men, women, and chil- 
 dren, who had refused to bow the knee in idol- 
 atry, had been sent to wander houseless in the 
 streets, it was still declared that there was no 
 persecution ! 
 
 To the missionaries, however, it was known 
 that, for the faith of Christ, they were driven 
 out, and for the love of Christ they could not 
 refuse to take them in. Very providentially, 
 the Kev. Mr. Allan, missionary to the Jews, 
 from the Free Church of Scotland, had, a short 
 time previously, secured a large house, with 
 reference to a preaching place, as .well as a 
 dwelling for his family ; and, with true Chris- 
 tian sympathy and generosity, he opened his 
 doors for the oppressed. Twenty individuals of 
 the persecuted, found a comfortable lodging- 
 place there. For the rest, the missionaries hired 
 such tenements as could be found, at the same 
 time providing the starving with bread, while 
 they were cut off from all means of procuring 
 their own subsistence.'* A statement was drawn 
 up of the grievous things that had befallen 
 the brethren in Turkey, accompanied by an 
 appeal to evangelical Christians throughout 
 the world for sympathy and aid ; and the 
 generous contributions that flowed in from all 
 quarters of the globe, wherever the story had 
 gone, and pious hearts were found, showed 
 how_ strong a bond of union is the love of 
 Christ. Letters of the tenderest Christian 
 sympathy were received, accompanied, by dona- 
 tions for the sufferers, from every Protestant 
 country in Europe, from England, Malta, and 
 India, as well as from the United States ; and 
 in this spontaneous movement in behalf of the 
 persecuted people of God, denominational dis- 
 tinctions were forgotten. Nearly or quite five 
 hundred dollars were contributed by foreign 
 Protestant residents upon the ground, who 
 naturally felt the more deeply, because they 
 were personal spectators of the sufferings they 
 were called upon to relieve. 
 
 By these means the brethren who were scat- 
 
146 
 
 AEMENIANS. 
 
 toed orer an area of 8 or 10 miles were brought 
 together, and had opportunity to meet for 
 prayer, to become acquainted and sympathise 
 with each other ; thus forming a bond of union, 
 which remains to this day. 
 
 The Patriarch had now received such lessons 
 from high quarters, as greatly to modify his 
 expectations of putting down Protestantism 
 by force ; and he was even compelled, reluct- 
 ftntly, to issue public orders to his clergy, in 
 certain cases, against persecution ; though it 
 is known that secret instructions were, at the 
 same time, given of a contrary nature. 
 
 Printed copies of the Patriarch's two ana* 
 themas were sent to every part of Turkey, to 
 be read in all the churches ; and similar scenes 
 followed in Nicomedia, Adabazar, Trebizond, 
 Erzrum, Brftsa, Smyrna, and other places ; and 
 in some of them, scenes of a still more revolt- 
 ing character were enacted. 
 
 Sir Stratford Canning, whose noble efforts 
 for religious liberty in Turkey are worthy of 
 all praise, did not cease to urge upon the 
 Turkish government the necessity of securing 
 to its Protestant subjects the right of pursuing 
 their lawful callings without molestation. Be- 
 tween thirty and forty in Constantinople alone, 
 were still excluded from their shops and their 
 business, on the plea that they were without 
 eureties. The Ambassador represented that 
 the demands of the law might be met, by their 
 becoming sureties for one another. This im- 
 portant concession was at length made by the 
 government, and Reshid Pasha, the Minister 
 of Foreign Affairs, or Grand Vizer, as he soon 
 after became, gave orders that the Protestants 
 be permitted to resume their business on this 
 condition. This decision, which, with a limited 
 application, had already released four imprison- 
 ed watchmakers, being now made general, vir- 
 tually settled the question of religious liberty 
 for the Protestants in Turkey. The immediate 
 relief afforded was important, though far from 
 being entire. The brethren were still tried in 
 various ways. Many, from the very circum- 
 stances of the case, could not hope to regain 
 the situations from which they had been thrust. 
 Others were still subject to secret persecution, 
 which was the harder to bear, because it could 
 not easily be traced to its proper source, and 
 brought in a tangible form under the cogni- 
 zance of the civil courts. The Patriarch, 
 seeing which way the current was turning, 
 very adroitly attempted to set himself forth 
 before the world as a friend of religious liberty, 
 and a sympathizer with the suffering ; although, 
 at the same time, he was repeating his ana- 
 themas in his own church every Sabbath-day, 
 and exciting the people, by his appeals to their 
 fanaticism, as before. This kept alive the 
 spirit of persecution, and various arts were 
 practiced, often successfully, to prevent the 
 brethren who had opened their shops, from 
 doing any business. Numberless vexations 
 were practiced from time to time, and there 
 
 was often a great want of promptness in the 
 Turkish courts in relieving the innocent suf- 
 ferers of their oppressions, even when they had 
 tangible ground of complaint. These irregu- 
 larities, however, were to be expected in such 
 a country, and under such circumstances. 
 There was still satisfactory proof that the 
 Turkish government was disposed to be sincere 
 and consistent in its declarations in favor of re- 
 ligious liberty. A vizirial letter, dated early 
 in June, 1846, commanding the Pasha of 
 Erzrum to see that the civil rights of the 
 Protestants were not infringed, so long as they 
 were faithful subjects of the Sultan, is worthy 
 of mention, as the first imperial document ever 
 issued by the Turkish government, for the pro- 
 tection of its Protestant subjects. 
 
 In the course of the persecutions that have 
 now been described the Patriarch was incessant 
 in his efforts to break up the Mission Seminary 
 at Bebek. He succeeded at different times, 
 in getting away seventeen, in all, out of twenty- 
 seven students ; but five of these soon returned, 
 and ten others joined the institution, several of 
 whom were pious and promising young men, 
 who having been driven by persecution from 
 their business, were led to consecrate them- 
 selves to the service of God in the ministry, 
 and to seek from the Mission Seminary the in- 
 tellectual and moral discipline they needed for 
 this work. Mr. and Mrs. Everett, who had 
 been connected with the Smyrna station since 
 April, 1845, removed to Constantinople in the 
 summer of 1846, and Mrs. Everett was asso- 
 ciated with Miss Lovell in the instruction of 
 the Female Seminary. 
 
 For nearly six months continuously, the ana- 
 thema had been publicly repeated every Sab- 
 bath in the Patriarchal Church, as well as in 
 other churches, until many of the people be- 
 gan to grow weary of the sound ; and the 
 changes were so frequently rung on the various 
 forms of denunciation, which had been contrived 
 to give force to the bull, that their efficiency 
 seemed rapidly wasting away. And yet, up 
 to the middle of the vear 1846, through the 
 influence of the Church authorities, bread and 
 water were still withheld from many Protest- 
 ant families, by the regular dealers in those 
 articles, and everything was done, that could 
 with safety be attempted, to vex those who re- 
 mained steadfast in the truth. The sufferers 
 had again and again petitioned to their Patri- 
 arch, and to the primates for relief, but they 
 were uniformly repulsed with the declaration 
 that there was no hope of any melioration of 
 their condition, except by unconditional sMb- 
 mission to the Church. Hitherto, no one had 
 voluntarily separated himself from the Arme- 
 nian community. Those who were called 
 schismatics, had become such by the exscind- 
 ing act of the Patriarch himself, who was the 
 sole author of the schism, and who seemed to 
 try every method in his power to render the 
 separation perpetual. 
 
ARMENIANS 
 
 147 
 
 On the 21st of June, 1846, he gave the 
 finishing- blow to this work, by a public official 
 act, which resulted, through necessity, in the 
 organization of the Evangelical Protestant 
 Churches in Turkey. On that day, it being 
 the day of a solemn festival for the Church, he 
 issued a new bull of excommunication and ana- 
 thema against all who remained firm to their 
 evangelical principles, decreeing that it should 
 be publicly read at each annual return of this 
 festival, in all the Armenian Churches through- 
 out the Ottoman Empire. Thus were the 
 Protestants cut off and cast out forever. And 
 although they had no power to organize them- 
 selves into a civil community, yet nothing 
 could be plainer than their duty, immediately 
 to secure to themselves and their children, as 
 far as they were able, the full possession of all 
 the spiritual privileges of the Gospel. 
 
 They made a written request to the mission- 
 aries, for aid in a matter in which they them- 
 Belves had had no experience. Accordingly, a 
 meeting was held in Constantinople, of dele- 
 gates from the different stations of the mission 
 to Turkey. The Eev. Messrs. Allan and 
 Koenig, missionaries of the Free Church of 
 Scotland to the Jews of Constantinople, and 
 the Rev. Dr. Pomroy, then pastor of a Congre- 
 gational Church in Bangor, Maine, and now 
 one of the Secretaries of the Board, who was 
 providentially on a visit to the Levant at that 
 time, were also present by invitation, and took 
 part in the deliberations. All felt that God 
 was there ; and the overwhelming importance 
 of the business on which they were convened, 
 and their sense of their own ignorance and im- 
 potence, seemed to compel them to throw them- 
 selves directly upon him. Much prayer was 
 offered, both by the members of the convention 
 and the native brethren, and to this it must be 
 ascribed that although there were representa- 
 tives of four different denominations of Chris- 
 tians among them, yet the most entire harmony 
 of feeling pervaded their deliberations, and the 
 result was attained by a unanimous vote. 
 
 On the 1st day of July, 1846, the Evangeli- 
 cal Armenians in Constantinople, to the num- 
 ber of forty, three of whom were females, 
 came together for the purpose of organizing 
 themselves into a Church. The plan of organ- 
 ization, as drawn up at the above mentioned 
 meeting, was read and explained, article by 
 article, and those present gave their solemn 
 assent to the whole, and with perfect unanimity, 
 adopted it as theirs, and were thus constituted 
 into The First Evangelical Armenian 
 Church of Constantinople. After the names 
 of the church members had been recorded, a 
 pastor was chosen by ballot, and without pre- 
 vious consultation, the choice fell unanimously 
 on Mr. Apisoghom Khachaduryan. The other 
 church officers were then elected, and the meet- 
 ing was adjourned. Although the whole had 
 occupied from four to five hours, the deepest in- 
 terest was maintained throughout; much ten- 
 
 derness of feeling was manifested, and many 
 eyes were suSused with tears. 
 
 The articles of church organization here 
 adopted, provide for the trial of offenders by a 
 standing committee, or church session, chosen 
 for a limited time, and consisting of deacons 
 and " helpers," who, after conducting a case to 
 its close, report their proceedings with the evi- 
 dence, to the male members of the Church, 
 and a vote is taken of assent or dissent. In 
 the event of dissent, the case goes up to the 
 pastors and delegates of the associated churches, 
 whose decision in all cases, is final. Provision is 
 made for appeal to this body, before which the 
 trial of ministers accused of offences is to be had. 
 The Confession of Faith is similar to those of 
 the orthodox Calvinistic churches in this coun- 
 try. ( For these documents in full, see " Chris- 
 tianity Revived in the East," Appendix F.) 
 
 In one week from the organization of the 
 church, the person chosen was publicly ordained 
 to the work of the Gospel ministry, as pastor 
 of the newly formed Church. Under the cir 
 cumstances it was necessary to perform the 
 ordination by an ecclesiastical council invited 
 by the Church, and which consisted of the 
 missionaries of the board resident at Constan- 
 tinople, and the Rev. Mr. Allan of the mission 
 of the Free Church of Scotland to the Jews 
 of the capital. 
 
 A scene so new as a Protestant ordination in 
 the capital of the Turkish Empire drew forth a 
 crowd to the chapel, several of whom were of the 
 Patriarch's party. The strictest silence, how- 
 ever, prevailed, and the most fixed and solemn 
 attention was given to every part of the service. 
 
 As an act of justice to themselves, the mem- 
 bers of this new church lost no time in setting 
 forth before the world the declaration of their 
 faith, and their reasons for the step they had 
 taken. This document will be found in the ap- 
 pendix of " Christianity Revived in the East." 
 
 In the course of the same summer, churches 
 were formed on the same basis, in Nicomedia, 
 Adabazar, and Trebizond ; with the most evi- 
 dent good results, although the original num- 
 ber of members was, in each case, small. It 
 is not known that the least objection was ever 
 made to these organizations, by the Turkish 
 government, or any of its officers. Indeed, the 
 sympathies of the Mohammedans were with 
 the persecuted, rather than with their enemies. 
 The use of pictures in worship ; the invoca- 
 tion of saints ; and the doctrine of transub- 
 stantiation and priestly absolution, are as ab- 
 horrent to the Koran as they are to the Bible. 
 The government of the Sultan had ordered 
 that the Protestants be no longer molested in 
 their civil rights, on account of their religious 
 sentiments. Their shops were reopened, but 
 it was comparatively easy for their busy ene- 
 mies to prevent'traffic with them, without open- 
 ly infringing the law, and this was repeatedly 
 done. They could not be imprisoned or ban- 
 ished merely for their religious sentiments; 
 
148 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 but false claims of debt could and did imprison 
 them ; and false charges of vicious conduct, 
 established by i>erjury, could and did secure 
 their banishment. In Constantinople consider- 
 able sums of money were paid by different indi- 
 viduals to avoid imprisonment for pretended 
 debts ; and more than a score of Protestants, 
 at different times, were shut up with felons for 
 alleifcd crimes which false witnesses had proved 
 agamst them, and which they, from the very 
 organization of the Turkish courts, could not 
 disprove. As an example of the length to 
 which the Patriarch could even now go in his 
 persecuting measures, the following story is 
 related : A place of Protestant worship was 
 opened in the city proper, fpr the accommoda- 
 tion of many families who, on account of the 
 distance, could not often be present at the 
 chapel in Pera. The house hired for this pur- 
 pose vcfxs built by a former Patriarch, though 
 now owned by his brother, who was a worthy 
 member of the Protestant community and 
 Church. It was situated near the Patriarchate, 
 which no doubt was an additional cause of 
 vexation to this dignitary. At that time no 
 other house could be obtained in all Constanti- 
 nople, for such a purpose. By a cunning de- 
 vice, the Patriarch procured the imprisonment 
 of Stcpan, the owner of the house, by the Tur- 
 kish police, on charge of flogging one of his 
 priests 1 The priest had been sent by his su- 
 perior to Stepan's house, in his absence, to 
 endeavor to persuade his wife to separate from 
 him ; and the injured husband merely called 
 at the priest's door, and warned him not to en- 
 ter his house again, on pain of civil prosecu- 
 tion. This was a sufficient ground for a pre- 
 text, the futility of which was transparent on 
 the trial, the whole object and aim of the 
 charges being to prevent the holding of Pro- 
 testant worship in the house in question. The 
 Patriarch first claimed the house as the pro- 
 perty of the Church, having been built by 
 a Patriarch. And when this was decided 
 against him, he begged that Stepan might be 
 removed from the house, since all his neigh- 
 bors were complaining against him as a dis- 
 turber of the peace. This also was set aside. 
 After several other vain shifts on the part of 
 the Patriarch to accomplish his object, the 
 Judge at length took up the same side, and 
 said to Stepan, " The government gives you no 
 permission to hold meetings in that house." 
 " Sir," said Stepan, with solemn earnestness, 
 " I beg that you will not fatigue yourselves 
 with efforts to prevent us from meeting ; for I 
 declare that not only I, but all the Protestant 
 Armenians also, are ready to shed our blood 
 for this thing. Consult together, if you please, 
 as to the best method of getting rid of us, 
 whether by exiling, drowning, or by cutting off j 
 our heads ; but it is useless to try to prevent j 
 us from meeting. The Holy Gospel commands \ 
 us to meet ; it is a matter of conscience and | 
 duty with us ; and we can never cease to meet i 
 
 for the worship of God." The Judge had no 
 rq)ly to make to this noble*answer, but merely 
 directed his clerk to record that " the Protes- 
 tants say it is a matter of faith and conscience 
 with them to hold meetings." Stepan was 
 soon liberated. 
 
 In interior places, where the new order of 
 things was not so well understood, and whero 
 the local governors were more completely 
 the creatures and the tools of rich and influen- 
 tial Armenians, it was still more easy to afflict 
 the Protestants with impunity. In Nicome- 
 dia, after religious liberty had been proclaimed 
 to the Protestants, the brethren were often 
 abused in the streets, and their houses stoned. 
 In Adabazar, a Protestant teacher was put in 
 chains and sent to prison, on the general 
 charge of disturbing the peace, though no one 
 in the town was really more peaceable than 
 he. At Trebizond, a mob of women attacked 
 with heavy stones, two females who were re- 
 turning from the preaching of the missionaries, 
 and because their husbands endeavored to 
 shield them from harm, these husbands were 
 thrown into prison, and there stretched out, 
 with their faces downwards, upon the cold, 
 damp ground, and their feet confined in the 
 stocks! In this painful position they were 
 left for a whole day, without food, so that one 
 became insensible, and was more dead than 
 alive when he was removed. The other was 
 carried to Constantinople, and there kept in 
 close confinement for several months, his per- 
 secutors, who were influential, insisting upon 
 it that he was a disturber of the peace and a 
 dangerous man. In the same place, on the oc- 
 casion of the death of a Protestant brother, the 
 house where the body lay was assailed by 
 stones from a furious mob, and every effort 
 was made to prevent the burial. This neces- 
 sary duty could only be performed, at last, un- 
 der shelter of the night, and by paying twenty- 
 one dollars for permission to dig a grave in 
 the public highway 1 At Erzrum an infuriated 
 mob forced its way into the house of Dr. 
 Smith, and bore away a priest of the church, 
 who had escaped thither to avoid persecution, 
 he being a Protestant in sentiment. They 
 afterwards returned with renewed fury, broke 
 Into the house a second time, felled to the 
 ground a native assistant and also a patient of 
 the doctor, and destroyed seven or ei^ht hun- 
 dred dollars' worth of books and furniture. 
 
 Even in the capital itself, at the burial of 
 the first Protestant adult after the separation, 
 the procession, in returning from the grave, 
 was followed by a mob of Armenians, who 
 first began to shout in a highly insulting and 
 disgraceful manner, using the most filthy lan- 
 guage ; and afterwards to hurl stones, some of 
 which were of an enormous size. The mob 
 thus followed the procession for a quarter of a 
 mile or more, when they amounted to at least 
 a thousand persons. Several of the Armenian 
 brethren, and one at least of the missionaries, 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 149 
 
 were struck with tlie stones, though providen- 
 tially no one was seriously injured. In all 
 these cases, and numberless others of a similar 
 kind, the Turkish tribunals were immediately 
 appealed to for redress ; and this was, sooner 
 or later, almost sure to be obtained, though 
 not always to the full extent that was due. 
 At Nicomedia the governor ordered the civil 
 and ecclesiastical leaders of the Armenian 
 community to desist from their oppressions, 
 saying, " The Protestants no longer belong to 
 you, and you have no right to interfere with 
 their religion." A file of soldiers, even, was 
 sent on one occasion to disperse the mob. At 
 Trebizond, police officers were regularly sta- 
 tioned at the entrance of the Protestant place 
 of worship, as long as such a step was consid- 
 ered necessary. By the prompt and decisive 
 intervention of the United States Minister at 
 the Porte, the damages sustained at Erzrum 
 by Dr. Smith were repaid, and four of the 
 leaders in the mob were imprisoned. And in 
 Constantinople, the police took effectual meas- 
 ures to prevent the recurrence of such dis- 
 graceful scenes as those described in connec- 
 tion with the first funeral. 
 
 The position of the Protestants was still an 
 anomalous one in Turkey. They were separ- 
 ated from the Armenian community, but not 
 united with any other. The Turkish govern- 
 ment was determined they should not be mo- 
 lested by the Patriarch or his ministers, but 
 exactly what to do with them was not so easily 
 decided. According to the municipal regula- 
 tions of Constantinople, neither marriage, 
 baptism, nor burial can be performed without 
 the cognizance of the civil power. A certifi- 
 cate from the Patriarch must be presented to 
 the head of the police, to procure a permit for 
 marriage. The name of every child baptized 
 must be communicated by the Patriarch to the 
 same officer, for enrolment ; and previous per- 
 mission must be obtained, through the Patri- 
 arch, from the Board of Health, for every burial. 
 Besides this, no person can travel in the coun- 
 try without a passport, and no passport can be 
 obtained without the Patriarch's voucher for 
 the honesty of the man. At first it seemed to be 
 the plan of the government, that while the 
 Protestants should be entirely separated from 
 the Patriarch, so far as religious matters were 
 concerned, he might still be left to act for 
 them as their civil representative at the Porte. 
 This was soon found to be utterly impractica- 
 ble. There seemed to be two principal ob- 
 jections to organizing them regularly into a 
 separate civil community ; namely, the fewness 
 of their numbers, and the strong objections of 
 certain parties having great influence with the 
 government. They were consequently left for 
 more than a year and a half with their rights 
 acknowledged, and yet without any regular 
 provision for secm'ing those rights from inva- 
 sion ; and subject, in the interval, to frequent 
 grievances and even oppressions, such as have 
 
 been described. And it is always to be under- 
 stood, that Protestants in the interior were 
 exposed to greater trials of this sort in pro- 
 portion to the remoteness of their situation 
 from the capital. 
 
 But though the patience of the evangelical 
 Armenians was long tried in various ways, 
 through their imperfect acknowledgment by 
 the government, still there was a gradual 
 melioration of their condition evidently going 
 on, which, to such as were watching with 
 reasonable expectations, the signs of the times, 
 was highly encouraging. It is impossible for 
 those who have never been in like circumstan- 
 ces, to conceive of the degree of satisfaction 
 and encouragement felt by the Protestants 
 when they were for the first time permitted to 
 bury their dead in peace, under the protection 
 of the civil power, and to procure a permit 
 for marriage, and a passport for traveling, 
 without the mediation of the Patriarch. The 
 second adult funeral among them was in strik- 
 ing contrast with the first. It occurred on 
 the Sabbath, and in the procession were from 
 100 to 150 native Protestants, with their pas- 
 tor at their head, carrying a copy of the Scrip- 
 tures in his hand. All marched silently and 
 solemnly, at mid-day, through the most public 
 street of Pera, to the Protestant burying- 
 ground, under the protection of a body of the 
 police. It was a new and wonderful spectacle 
 for Turkey; and shop-keepers and artisans 
 along the way turned aside from business for 
 the moment, and inquired. What new thing is 
 this? Hitherto the funeral processions of 
 native Christians had been accompanied with 
 gilded crosses elevated in the air, and candles, 
 and priestly robes, and chantings. It was 
 whispered from mouth to mouth, " These are 
 the Protestants. See how the government 
 protects them !" Some of the Mussulmans 
 said, " Look ! There are no crosses ! no sing- 
 ing ! This is as it should be." 
 
 Several hundreds of people of different 
 classes gathered around the grave, where a 
 hymn was sung, and a short but earnest and 
 appropriate address was delivered by the pas- 
 tor. Many went home from that burial with 
 new and more correct impressions of what 
 Protestantism really is. The moral influence 
 of the whole spectacle was highly salutary, 
 and it was felt by all that an important point 
 had been gained to the Protestant cause. The 
 internal growth of the community was ever 
 in advance of the external. No week passed 
 without furnishing evidence of the special pre- 
 sence of God's Spirit. 
 
 But in eight short months a heavy affliction 
 befell the church in the capital in the death of 
 its beloved and useful pastor. His labors, and 
 cares, and anxieties had been abundant, and 
 he was the object of many a shaft from the 
 enemy. He was sometimes thrown into vary 
 exciting scenes, in the midst of mobs, raised 
 in the streets to vex the Protestants. Only a 
 
160 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 short time previous to hia death, he visited 
 Nicomedia; aud while there, was called to 
 attend the funeral of a Protestant brother. 
 As the procession passed along the street, 
 thousands of hostile Armenians were assem- 
 bled, to meet it with insults and abuse. Ar- 
 rived at the place of burial, this rabble gath- 
 ered around the grave, and Mr. Khachaduryan 
 took the opportunity of preaching to them the 
 Gospel of Christ. They listened in perfect 
 silence, and then went quietly to their homes. 
 The pastor returned to Constantinople, over- 
 come by exertion and excitement. Within a 
 week, he was exposed to the worrying influence 
 of a similar outrage, at the funeral of a Pro- 
 testant child, in the capital. His last disease 
 immediately developed itself, which was pro- 
 nounced by a judicious physician to be a dis- 
 ease of the brain, induced by excessive mental 
 effort and excitement, a disease in this form, 
 scarcely known in the country. During most 
 of his illness he was delirious, but his ruling 
 passion was constantly showing itself. Scarce- 
 ly anything else was heard to proceed from 
 his lips but the name of the beloved Saviour, or 
 what pertained to his kingdom and glory. The 
 report went abroad among his superstitious 
 enemies that God had smitten him with raving 
 madness and despair, in consequence of the 
 anathemas of the Church, which rested upon 
 him ; and great would have been their glory- 
 ing, had his sun thus set under a cloud. But 
 the earnest supplications of his Church were 
 heard ; the cloud was lifted up ; the laboring 
 mind was unshackled ; and the departing 
 saint was permitted to magnify the grace of 
 Christ, by declaring how abundantly ho was 
 sustained in that solemn hour. A short time 
 before he died, in answer to inquiries, he said, 
 that his heart was " full of sin, but Jesus Christ 
 was his righteousness, his sanctification, and 
 his redemption ;" and that his hope was " not 
 at all in his own merits ; but only in the free 
 and infinite grace of God." 
 
 A brother of the deceased, Mr. Simon Kha- 
 chaduryan, was shortly after elected, and or- 
 dained pastor in his place. He had been 
 educated at the Bebek Seminary, and possess- 
 ed rare qualities for the oflBce to which he was 
 called, and which he still continues to adorn. 
 
 Two other pupils of the same seminary, Mr. 
 Avedis, and Mr. Mugurdich, were licensed to 
 preach the Gospel. The latter was subse- 
 
 2uently ordained as pastor of the Evangelical 
 Ihurch in Trebizond, and the former as co-pas- 
 tor in Constantinople. Another pastor was 
 ordained in Nicomedia in the latter part of 
 November, 1847. This was Mr. HarCitun Mi- 
 Dosian. His ordination was attended by circum- 
 stances of peculiar interest. His little flock had 
 been for many years exposed to alntost constant 
 persecution. Oftentimes they were driven 
 from the abodes of men, and compelled to hold 
 their worship in the distant fields ; and even 
 there, they were never sure of being left un- 
 
 molested. Now they had a place for publie 
 worship in the very heart of the city; and 
 there, at raid-day, on the Sabbath, the ordina- 
 tion services were iMirformcd — no one daring 
 to " molest them or make them afraid." 
 
 Missionary tours performed through various 
 parts in the interior of the country, brought 
 to light many encouraging facts in regard to 
 the extent of the work of reform. In no place 
 was there a more remarkable movement than 
 at Aintab, a town situated about three days* 
 ride north-east from Aleppo. Some copies of 
 the Scriptures, and other books from the mis- 
 sion press, hijd found their way to this town, 
 chiefly through the agency of Bedros vartabed, 
 who labored as a colporteur in those parts ; 
 and a few individuals, by the blessing of God 
 on the simple reading of the word, had their 
 eyes opened to see the errors of their Church. 
 Soon after, the Patriarchal bull against priest 
 Vertaness and the other evangelical brethren, 
 was received from Constantinople, and publicly 
 read in the Church. Those who had been con- 
 vinced of the truth now learned, for the first 
 time, that there existed in the Armenian com- 
 munity a body of men who take the Bible as 
 their only guide. This greatly encouraged and 
 strengthened them. Soon after, a vartabed 
 came to Aintab, and began to preach the 
 evangelical doctrines in the Armenian Church, 
 in the most bold and zealoas manner. He was 
 interesting in his appearance, and eloquent in 
 his speech ; and with great fearlessness did he 
 expose the errors of his Church, and with 
 great power set forth the peculiar doctrines of 
 the Gospel. Very many were convinced by 
 him of the truth, and were led to renounce 
 their previous errors, and openly avow tl\pm- 
 selves as Protestants. It seemed as though 
 the whole fabric of superstition in Aintab 
 must speedily fall. It was soon discovered 
 that this new and zealous preacher of the evan- 
 gelical doctrines, was himself evangelical only 
 in name. His moral character proved to be 
 infamous, and he -was sent away in disgrace. 
 The fruits of his preaching, however, remained, 
 although he proved so unworthy an instrument. 
 The evangelical brethren immediately prepared 
 a letter, signed by eighty-two heads of families, 
 requesting that a missionary might forthwith 
 be sent to them. Mr. Van Lennep, of Con- 
 stantinople, went in obedience to the call, 
 though not to remain permanently, as they had 
 hoped. His visit was timely and useful. The 
 place was afterwards visited by Mr. Johnston, 
 by Dr. Smith, and by Mr. Schneider ; and a 
 flourishing church was gathered, and one of the 
 largest congregations of Protestants in the 
 Turkish empire ! The condition of the Ar- 
 menians in all that section of the country was 
 highly encouraging. 
 
 In the latter part of the summer of 1847, 
 Rev. Isaac G. Bliss and wife arrived in the 
 country from America, and proceeded to join 
 Mr. Peabody in his labor in Erzrfira. An 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 151 
 
 evangelical Armenian Church had been organ- 
 ized there in April, and another was formed 
 in Brusa in July, making seven in all. 
 
 In the year 1 847 Sir Stratford Canning re- 
 turned for a season to his native land, and 
 Lord Cowley was appointed to occupy, tempo- 
 rarily, his place. He proved himself to be as 
 warm and firm a friend of religious freedom as 
 his predecessor. He exerted himself with the 
 most unremitting zeal to secure to the Pro- 
 testant Armenians a distinct recognition on the 
 part of the Porte, and a formal organization, 
 which should place them on the same footing 
 with all other Christian communities in the 
 empire ; and his noble efforts were crowned 
 with complete success. On the 15th of No- 
 vember, 1847, he procured from the Turkish 
 Government an imperial decree, recognizing 
 native Protestants as constituting a separate 
 and independent community in Turkey. In 
 this high official paper it was declared that 
 " no interference whatever should be permitted 
 in their temporal or spiritual concerns, on the 
 part of the patriarchs, monks, or priests of 
 other sects." This decree was immediately 
 sent to all the Pashas in the interior, under 
 whose jurisdiction Protestants were known to 
 exist. An individual elected by the new com- 
 munity was formally recognized by the gov- 
 ernment as the agent and representative of the 
 Protestants at the Porte. 
 
 The evangelical brethren in Constantinople 
 immediately appointed a day for special 
 thanksgiving and prayer. Great was the joy 
 of the Protestants in every part of the land, 
 though still it was, in many cases, rejoicing 
 with trembling. At the different missionary 
 stations greater boldness in attending the 
 preaching of the Gospel was noticed, and a 
 new impulse seemed to be given to the spirit 
 of inquiry. The special influences of the 
 Spirit were extensively enjoyed, though in no 
 case, except at the Female Seminary in Con- 
 stantinople, was the movement general enough 
 to be designated as a revival of religion. In 
 the district of Geghi, south-west of Erzrum, 
 containing from twelve to fifteen thousand 
 souls, Mr. Peabody found very promising indi- 
 cations of an extensive religious awakening. 
 The vartabed himself was the most decided 
 evangelical man in the community. For per- 
 sonal security, he was obliged to flee to Erzrum, 
 where, after a sufficient trial, he was received 
 into the Evangelical Church. At Aintab, the 
 development was more rapid, perhaps, than any- 
 where else. Mr. Schneider, of the Brusa station, 
 spent the summer of 1848 in labors there, 
 during which time the congregation steadily 
 increased, and many were affected to tears, un- 
 der the preaching of the Word. A very intel- 
 ligent priest became obedient to the faith, and 
 his sincerity was called, more than once, to the 
 severe test of persecution. At a communion 
 season in October, 1848, seventeen persons 
 were added to the Church, five of whom were 
 
 females. During the same month. Dr. Smith 
 returned to Aintab, where he took up his resi- 
 dence as a missionary of the Board, together 
 with his wife. The importance of the station 
 was such, that it was determined that Mr. and 
 Mrs. Schneider, of Brusa, should become per. 
 manently connected with it ; the same steamer 
 which brought away Mr. Schneider from 
 Ghemlik, the port of Brusa, carried back thither 
 to occupy his place, the Eev. Oliver Crane and 
 wife, who had just arrived from America. 
 
 Among the evangelical Christians at Ain- 
 tab a most commendable zeal had shown itself 
 for the spread of the gospel in the towns and 
 villages around. Several attempts had been 
 made by individuals to labor as colporteurs, 
 but they were never suffered to remain long in 
 a place. The Armenian primates easily suc- 
 ceeded in persuading the Turkish authorities 
 to order them away as vagabonds. A novel 
 experiment was made, early in the year 1849, 
 to accomplish the object in view without sub- 
 jecting themselves to the charge of being mere 
 idlers, and " busybodies in other men's matters." 
 Five individuals who had trades, went forth to 
 different towns, with their tools in one hand, and 
 the sword of the Spirit in the other. Wherever 
 they went they worked at their trades, while, at 
 the same time, they labored for the spiritual 
 good of the people. The experiment succeeded 
 to admiration. The spirit of religious inquiry 
 was spreading from Aintab in almost all direc- 
 tions. The congregation in the town itself 
 had become so large, that two places were 
 opened for worship at the same time. And 
 from various towns and villages throughout 
 the country, the most urgent appeals came 
 from souls hungering for the bread of life. 
 
 In November, 1848, Mr. Hohannes Sahak- 
 yan, having spent several years in study in 
 America, was licensed at Constantinople to 
 preach the gospel ; and in the following spring, 
 he was ordained as pastor of the evangelical 
 Armenian Chm-ch in Adabazar, where he has 
 been since laboring with great diligence and 
 success. Mr. Khachadur, a pupil of the Be- 
 bek Seminary, was licensed as a preacher in 
 February, 1849. 
 
 In Trebizond, formal permission was given 
 by the governor to the Protestants, to use as a 
 burying-ground a piece of land purchased for 
 this purpose three years previously. As long 
 ago as January, 1848, a vizirial letter had 
 been procured, through the generous efforts of 
 Mr. Carr, the United States Minister at the 
 Porte, ordering the authorities in Trebizond 
 to see that the Protestants be permitted to 
 have a cemetery of their own, but various dif- 
 ficulties had prevented an earlier accomplish- 
 ment of the design. 
 
 The following table presents a comprehen- 
 sive view of the present state of the mission. 
 The figure at the left of each group of out- 
 stations, indicates the station under whose su- 
 pervision they respectively are. 
 
 '."^ 
 
152 
 
 ARMENIANS. 
 
 oSao 
 
 fir 
 
 WE 
 
 ii^o<oos-«a>o<it^( 
 
 
 Mlff||||l i 
 
 •^ a> <31 tl^ M t« M 
 
 Isrs 
 
 feSSSfSSS 
 
 When Ck)mmenced. 
 
 CO bO»9b9tOi«-1 
 
 Preachers. 
 
 I toiofcototeo 
 
 Females. 
 
 a to M to CO to -» 
 
 Total. 
 
 Preachers, 
 
 M M fcO CO CO to 
 
 ClM MUlM® 
 
 Assistants. 
 
 tSkOtOtOtOCO^MM 
 
 HJ (-• CO I*!' »*>■ CO 
 
 0>M MfcOMCO 
 
 Places of Stated 
 Pi-eaching. 
 
 1 O K> «;» C3 C< to K) to M •« M M tO M Or M^ Ol 
 ' O O © © O Cn © © tn © © © © en «» © O 
 
 O. M •« !(». to Wi *. 
 O Ifk CO to © <o 
 
 Average Sabbath 
 Congregations. 
 
 Seminaries. 
 
 Pupils in Sem- 
 inaries. 
 
 High Schools. 
 
 Pupils in High 
 Schools. 
 
 Female Boarding 
 Schools. 
 
 Pupils in Female 
 Board'g Schools. 
 
 Free Schools. 
 
 Male Pupils in 
 Free Schools. 
 
 Female PupUs in 
 Free Schools. 
 
 ;k-§ 
 
 ooto«j<^C>&ie;<©< 
 
 , C «T CO 
 
 O© (O© CO 
 
 Total of all 
 Pupils. 
 
 Teachers, Church 
 Members. 
 
 Pupils, Church 
 Members. 
 
 Number of 
 Churches. 
 
 Members re- 
 ceived. 
 
 Excommunica- 
 tions. 
 
 Number of 
 Members. 
 
 to ( 
 
 CO-a-i < 
 
 Whole Do. from 
 beginning. 
 
 to tota«;«eoC7'tototoi-i eoto toco©o>cn 
 S>*».«'toa>to©©«D>-'ooe;»©to©©cooi©ic 
 
 ® to CO © )f». M *. 
 © en © w it *> en 
 
 Number of Enrolled 
 Protestants. 
 
ARMENIANS. 
 
 163 
 
 The year 1848 "vvas remarkable ior the num- 
 ber and extent of its conflagrations in the city 
 of Constantinople ; and among tlie providen- 
 tial interpositions in behalf of the Protestant 
 cause, must be mentioned the fact, that in five 
 or six different instances the devouring element 
 approached so near to the chapel and Female 
 Seminary in Pera, as to leave but a faint 
 hope that they could escape ; and once even 
 they actually began to burn, but the flames 
 were speedily extinguished. Again and again 
 was it shouted in the camp of the enemy, " The 
 Protestant Chapel is consumed ;" but in each 
 case,, an unseen hand was stretched out to ar- 
 rest the destroyer, and save the Protestant 
 cause from so great a disaster. 
 
 The Patriarch Matteos' plans for the over- 
 throw of Protestantism in the country, had 
 met with a most signal failure. His own re- 
 moval from office wound up the scene. He 
 was found guilty of various frauds upon the 
 public treasury, and according to the ofl&cial 
 announcement of the case in the French jour- 
 nal of Constantinople, "of acts of injustice 
 inconsistent with patriarchal dignity." He 
 was accordingly degraded, and sentenced to 
 banishment. A friendly banker, however, be- 
 came surety for him, and procured his release 
 from this part of the punishment. He has 
 since been living in retirement on the shores of 
 the Bosphorus. 
 
 Our limits will not permit us even in the 
 brief manner in which that of the previous 
 years has been given, to continue the sketch of 
 this interesting portion of missionary history. 
 We can only add a few words. In 1850 the posi- 
 tion of the Armenian Protestants was improv- 
 ed and its permanency secured by a firman of 
 the Sultan, obtained through the interposition 
 of Sir Stratford Canning, now Lord Stratford 
 de Pedcliffe, as the completion of his noble ef- 
 forts in behalf of the rights of conscience in 
 Turkey, which gives to the Protestants all the 
 privileges granted to the other Christian 
 communities. What had before been done 
 was liable to be reversed by a change of ad- 
 ministration, or of the policy of the govern- 
 ment. This is beyond recall ; and the firman 
 given in 1853, in answer to the demands of 
 Russia for another object, to the Protestants 
 as to the other rayah (non-mussulman) com- 
 munities, carries forward the cause of religious 
 liberty another step by declaring these com- 
 munities on an equality before the law with 
 the Mohammedan population. What is to be 
 the issue of the fearful conflict, which while 
 we write, Turkey is waging for national exist- 
 ence, is unknown to us ; but the analogy of 
 the past, and the continued progress of the 
 work of enlightenment and spiritual regenera- 
 tion within her borders, encourage the hope 
 that it will be auspicious to the interests of 
 the Saviour's kingdom. A mighty social, 
 moral, and religious revolution is in progress ; 
 and this political changes may favor, but cannot 
 
 defeat. We may confidently expect that the 
 religious freedom granted to others will soon 
 be secured equally to the Mohammedans, so as 
 to allow the profession of Christianity by 
 them ; and when that shall come, the work 
 accomplished among the Armenians will be a 
 noble preparation for another and still more 
 glorious one among those heretofore excluded 
 from the direct efforts of the Church for their 
 salvation. 
 
 The progress for the last six years of the 
 mission under review can easily be learned 
 from the reports and other publications of the 
 Board. The cost at which Protestantism is 
 still professed, keeps the increase of the Pro- 
 testant civil community, as yet, healthfully 
 low ; while evidence of the spread of evangel- 
 ical sentiments and the leavening influence of 
 the Gospel is multiplying on every hand. In 
 some places the outward development is more 
 rapid than in others. The greatest is in Cili- 
 cia and on the borders of Mesopotamia. Dur- 
 ing the year embraced in the report for 1853, 
 five new churches were organized ; one in Eo- 
 dosto, on the European shore of the Marmora ; 
 one in Smyrna ; one in Marsovan ; one in 
 Killis ; and one in Kessab. Ten others pre- 
 viously existed : viz., three in Constantinople, 
 and one each in Nicomedia, Adabazar, Brusa, 
 Trebizond, Erzrum, Sivas, and Aintab. The 
 increase of members in their communion dur- 
 ing the year was 90 ; making the total to be 
 351 ; which at the end of 1853 was increased 
 to 395. The number in the Protestant civil 
 community was about 2,000 ; of whom about 
 160 were in Kessab, a village of the Aintab 
 district, in which two years before not an 
 avowed Protestant was to be found. Brusa 
 has ceased to be a station of the mission ; the 
 missionaries having been transferred to other 
 places, and this left to the care, under the over- 
 sight of the Constantinople station, of the na- 
 tive pastor, Mr. Stepan Khachaduryan, bro- 
 ther to the two brothers who succeeded one the 
 other in the pastorate at the capital. The 
 press, formerly at Smyrna, has been removed 
 to the capital. The Female Boarding School, 
 now having 25 pupils, has become established 
 in the suburb of Hasskeuy. The seminary at 
 Bebek has enlarged its numbers to 50, and is 
 yearly sending forth educated young men to 
 preach the Gospel, and occupy other posts of 
 importance in connection with the work of 
 the mission. On both these schools the Holy 
 Spirit has descended and wrought a work of 
 conversion and sanctification in the hearts of 
 their pupils. The churches maintain discipline 
 with great strictness, and exhibit a gratifying 
 spectacle of Christian consistency and activity. 
 The converted Armenians are indeed a zealous 
 and effective body of evangelists, whose labors 
 are not confined to any one class or place. In 
 all the divisions of society the influence of the 
 Gospel is becoming more extended and power- 
 ful. A most encouraging feature of the re* 
 
154 
 
 ARBAH— ASHANTEE. 
 
 formation is tho wide extent of its influence 
 
 Sjographically considered. Mr. Layard, of the 
 hurch of Eugland, who has gained so deserv- 
 ed a celebrity by his discoveries at Nineveh, in 
 his recent nublication, gives incidents pleasing- 
 ly illustrating this ; and in a passage, too long 
 for quotation, in which ho eulogizes the Amer- 
 ican missionaries for their "judicious, earnest, 
 and zealous exertions," and speaks of the 
 changes for the better which they are cflect> 
 iug in the Armenian Church and on its cler- 
 gy, he says that " there is now scarcely a town 
 of any importance in Turkey without a Pro- 
 testant community." (Nineveh and Babylon, 
 p. 405.) In the reports of the Board for 1852 
 and 1853, lists of towns containing considera- 
 bly more than 100 names are introduced, in 
 which there is so decided a development of a 
 spirit of inquiry, in connection with the fact 
 of the presence in each of truly enlightened, 
 and one or more of whom hope is entertained 
 that they are truly regenerated, individuals, as 
 to impose an urgent necessity for evangelical 
 instruction to be extended to them. " From 
 every part of the land," says Mr. Dwight, 
 " comes to us one appeal, ' Send us preachers,' 
 * Send us preachers.' " And, says Mr. Schnei- 
 der of the Aintab station, '• We are constantly 
 receiving calls for some one to preach the gos- 
 pel. These calls wax more loud and more 
 earnest every month. Sometimes I almost 
 fear to have the post arrive, lest some such 
 appeal, to which we cannot respond, come to 
 increase our perplexity." 
 
 The mission in connection with the mission of 
 the Board to the Jews in Turkey, has ten fonts 
 of t}^e in the Armenian, Greek, Bulgarian, 
 and Hebrew languages. There are enrolled 
 Protestants in places where the mission has 
 no laborers, and who, therefore, are not inclu- 
 ded in the tabular view : viz., IJivrik, 23 ; 
 Mashgerd, 10, etc. The whole number in 
 the country is not known, 
 
 PRINTING. 
 
 Whole number of vela, printed in the year. . 19,000 
 
 " " " tracts " " " .. 13,000 
 
 " " " pages of Scripture " .. 1,672,000 
 
 " " " " tracts and books " .. 3,596,600 
 
 Whole No. of copies printed during the year 32 000 
 
 *' " Pagea " " " " 6,268'600 
 
 «' " copies from the beginning 1 043 210 
 
 " " pages " " " 121,780,060 
 
 During the present year (1854) at least eight 
 missionaries, with their wives, are expected to 
 be added to the mission, and the following 
 places to be speedily occupied as stations, viz., 
 Tocat, Kaisery, Sivas, and perhaps Oorfa, Ma- 
 rash, and Kharpoot. 
 
 In the preparation of the foregoing article, 
 free use has been made of Smith and Dwight's 
 Researches in Armenia, and Dwight's Christian- 
 ity Revived in the East. — Rev. G. W. Wood. 
 
 ARRAH : A town in Bahar, 35 miles W. 
 by S. from Patna, in Cochin, India ; a station 
 of Gosner's Missionary Society. 
 
 ARORANGAI: A station of the London 
 
 Missionary Society on the Island of Raroton- 
 ga, one of the Hervey Ishinds. 
 
 ARRACAN : A province of the Burman 
 Empire ceded to the English East India Com- 
 pany, in 182G. It lies on tho eastern shore 
 of the Bay of Bengal, and embraces 1G,500 
 square miles, and contains a population of 
 about 250,000. It is divided into four dis- 
 tricts, Akyab, Sandoway, Aeng and Rarasu. 
 It is the seat of a flourisliing mission of tho 
 American Baptist Missionary Union, which 
 was begun in 1835. 
 
 ASCENSION ISLAND: An island 
 in Micronesia, three hundred miles from 
 Strong's Island, a station of the American 
 Board. 
 
 AS-HAN' TEE : Ashantee is included in 
 that general division of Western Africa which 
 has been denominated Guinea. The empire of 
 Ashantee is not so much one state, as an assem- 
 blage of states, owing a kind of feudal obedience 
 to the sovereign of Ashantee. The empire, ac- 
 cording to Dupuis, extends westward from the 
 river Volta, about four degrees, and about four 
 degrees inland from the Gold coast, comprising 
 an area of about 60,000 square miles. It 
 embraces, also, several provinces east of the 
 Volta. Over the whole of this territory the 
 king of Ashantee exercises absolute sway, 
 all the kings, viceroys, or caboceers, being his 
 absolute and unconditional vassals. But the 
 power of the king is somewhat limited, by the 
 principle of the ancient Medes and Persians, 
 that a law once passed can never be changed ; 
 and the caboceers and captains claim to be 
 heard on all questions relating to war and for- 
 eign politics, which are considered in a general 
 assembly. The king employs a number of 
 boys, trained for the purpose, who are placed 
 as spies on the great men, and report to the 
 king all they see and hear ; thus verifying the 
 words of Solomon : " Curse not the king, for a 
 bird of the air shall carry the voice, and that 
 which hath wings shall tell the matter." 
 Speaking against the king is punished as trear 
 son. The king has the property as well as the 
 lives of his people in his power. He is the 
 legal heir of all his people, and can claim all 
 their gold at their death. The produce of the 
 gold mines is the property of the king. The 
 gold contained in the soil of the market place 
 of Kumasi also belongs to the king ; and on 
 two occasions, the washings of this soil yielded 
 1600 ounces of gold. Frequently, after a rain, 
 lumps of gold are laid bare ; but they are 
 covered up again, for any one picking them 
 up would lose his head. On the public recep- 
 tion of visitors at the capital, the king is mag- 
 nificently attired in silk, with necklaces, brace- 
 lets, knee-bands and ankle-strings of gold and 
 beads, with various other ornaments, some of 
 which are of massive gold. The throne is 
 covered with plates of gold ; and all his at- 
 tendants are decked in a corresponding stylei, 
 each bearing the emblems of his office : alto^ 
 
ASHANTEE. 
 
 155 
 
 tlier presenting a very imposing appearance. 
 
 n these occasions, the market place, which is 
 about a mile in circumference, is generally 
 crowded. When Mr. Freeman was received, 
 he estimated the number present at 40,000, 
 half of whom were soldiers. The Ashautee 
 monarchy is hereditary ; but instead of de- 
 scending from father to son, it passes from 
 brother to brother. A female cannot ascend 
 the throne ; but if, when the last of the line of 
 brothers dies, his sister has a son, the crown 
 descends to him. 
 
 Domestic slavery exists in Ashantee, and the 
 lives and services of the slaves are at the dis- 
 posal of their masters. Yet the treatment of 
 tlie slaves is not uniformly harsh and severe ; 
 and sometimes a slave becomes heir to his mas- 
 ter ; and in many instances, they rise to power 
 and office. The foreign slave-trade, says Bee- 
 cham, is valued by the native princes, not only 
 for its profit, but as an outlet for a redundant 
 slave population, which often becomes so great 
 by reason of captives taken in war, as to be 
 l^ared. 
 
 Polygamy prevails in Ashantee to a fright- 
 ful extent. It is said that the law allows tlie 
 king to have 3333 wives ; about half a dozen 
 of whom are kept at the palace at a time, and 
 the rest live on his plantation, or at the capi- 
 tal, where two streets are devoted to their use, 
 into wliich no one is permitted to enter ; and 
 when they go abroad, no one is allowed to look 
 upon them. The chief men of the nation have 
 as many wives as they are able to procure. Mar- 
 riages are contracted without consulting the 
 woman, and often in infancy and childhood. 
 In Ashantee and the neighboring countries, 
 where polygamy prevails, the husband lives 
 separate from his wives, who dwell in houses 
 or sheds, contiguous to each other, in the form 
 of a square. In some cases, they remain with 
 their mothers after marriage. They cook and 
 carry food to their husband, but are not al- 
 lowed to eat with him. Sometimes his child- 
 ren eat with him, but more frequently, he eats 
 alone. The children are left chiefly to the 
 care of their mothers, and grow up without 
 correction, till, when the perverseness of the 
 boy can be no longer endured, the father pun- 
 ishes him by cutting off an ear. Unfaithful- 
 ness on the part of a wife, is punished with 
 severity ; both parties being sometimes pun^ 
 ished with death, but more frequently with a 
 fine from her parents and her paramour, in de- 
 fault of which, her husband cuts off her nose. If 
 she is found listening to his private conversa- 
 tion, she loses an ear. In Ashantee one of 
 the king's sisters is made governor of all the 
 women in the kingdom. The women of As- 
 hantee, as in most heathen lands, are made the 
 drudges of the men, the heaviest work being 
 put upon them. 
 
 Roads have been made from Kumasi, or 
 Coomassie, the capital of Ashantee, to the 
 most distant parts of the empire, and these are 
 
 intersected by numerous cross-roads. The 
 population of the capital has been estimated 
 at 100,000. and of the whole kingdom, at 
 4,000,000. ' 
 
 Homes. — The Ashantees, and other natives 
 contiguous to the coast, build their houses of 
 mud and sticks, with a verandah in front, from 
 which the door opens intS an open court, 
 around which are built huts or sheds, for the 
 different members of the household. All the 
 houses in the capital of Ashantee are of this 
 sort, except the castle of the king, which is of 
 stone. 
 
 Arts. — The Ashantees are ingenious artists 
 in the precious metals which their country pro- 
 duces. Iron is manufactured to a considerable 
 extent. They carve and work in wood with 
 no little skill. The art of tanning leather is 
 understood. They have made considerable pro- 
 gress in weaving, and have done something at 
 pottery. 
 
 Trade. — The spirit of trade does not prevail 
 as much with the Ashantees as with some of 
 the adjoining countries, and the trade is mostly 
 confined to the king and his chiefs, who carry 
 on a considerable traffic with the interior. 
 
 Religion. — The notion of a Supreme Being 
 lies at the foundation of their religious system. 
 He is called Yankumpon, from yanku, friend, 
 and pon, great. Another name used by the 
 Pantees, Yehmi, from yeh, to make, and emi, 
 me, recognizes him as the Creator. The As- 
 hantees also give him a title which signifies eter- 
 nal existence. They have a curious tradi- 
 tion of the creation, which represents God as 
 having created three white men and three 
 black, with as many women of each'color, and 
 allowing them to fix their destiny, by the 
 choice of good and evil. A box or calabash, 
 and a sealed paper were placed on the ground. 
 The black men, who had the first choice, took 
 the box, in which they found only a piece of 
 gold, some iron, and other metals, which 
 they did not know how to use. The white 
 men opened the paper, and it taught them 
 every thing. The blacks were left in Afri- 
 ca, under the care of inferior deities, while the 
 whites were conducted to the water-side, where 
 God communicated with them every day, and 
 taught them to build a vessel, which carried 
 them to another country, &c. To this tradi- 
 tion, it is supposed their polytheism may be 
 traced ; which is very similar to that of the 
 Yorubas. (See Yoruba.) To the innumerable 
 objects of worship in nature is added images 
 of the same. But they do not profess to wor- 
 ship the objects themselves but the spirits, 
 which make their abode in them. To these 
 they make offerings, having such crude notions 
 of spiritual beings as to suppose that they re- 
 quire food. 
 
 The notion of a future state universally pro- 
 vails. It is believed that, at death, the soul 
 passes into another world, where it exists in a 
 state of consciousness and activity. They be- 
 
156 
 
 ASIA. 
 
 licve that the spirits of their denarted relatives 
 exercise a guardian care over them, and lience 
 prayers are oQ'ered to them. They have, how- 
 ever, no correct ideas of the immateriality of 
 separate spirits ; nor do they appear to have 
 anv just i^a of the immortality of the soul. 
 
 They believe in the existence of the devil, 
 an evil being supposed to be ever at hand for 
 purposes of miscliief ; but he does not appear 
 to bo an object of worship with the Ashan- 
 tees. 
 
 Traces of the Sabbath are found in this part 
 of Africa, the year being divided into moons, 
 and the moons into weeKs, the seventh day of 
 which is regarded as sacred. Along the coast, 
 the sacred day is Tuesday ; on which the peo- 
 ple rest from labor, dress in white, and mark 
 themselves with white clay. They have also 
 their " lucky " and " unlucky days." 
 
 The priests or " fetish-men," are a numerous 
 order, and employ a variety of stratagems and 
 impostures to keep up their influence. The 
 word ''fetish,'' seems to be employed as a gene- 
 ral term for things sacred ; thus, the deities 
 themselves are called fetishes, as well as the 
 religious rites, and the offerings presented. 
 These acts of worship are daily performed by 
 the people, and they consult their deities by 
 various superstitious practices, answering to 
 the lot, to ascertain what course of conduct to 
 pursue ; a practice which necessarily leads to 
 the subjection of judgment and reason to blind 
 superstition. It would be tedious to describe 
 all the ceremonies by which this worship is 
 carried on. It is by consulting the deities by 
 means of oracles, that the priests hold their 
 sway over the minds of the people ; and on 
 great occasions, when the questions to be de- 
 termined are of public importance, human sar 
 orifices are offered, sometimes to the number 
 of many hundreds. This consulting of the 
 fetish is also connected with witchcraft. Oaths 
 are administered by it; and accused persons 
 are tried by what is called the " oath-draught," 
 which is the drinking of a poisonous draught 
 as a test of guilt or innoccncy, in which it is 
 supposed that the spirit or fetish goes down 
 withit, and searches the heart of the accused, 
 and if it finds him innocent, returns with it, as 
 he vomits it up ; but if guilty the fetish re- 
 mains to destroy him. It will readily be per- 
 ceived that such a system, in the hands of wily 
 priests and powerful chiefs, is capable of being 
 made an engine of immense oppression and 
 cruelty. To obtain a supply of victims for 
 their altars, is the principal end for which the 
 national deities are supposed to promote war ; 
 and the sacrifice of their prisoners becomes a 
 religious obligation. Hence, dreadful are the 
 scenes of barbarity exhibited after a victorious 
 campaign. — Beecham's Asltantee and tJie Gold 
 Coast. The English Wesleyans have a mission 
 to Ashantee and the Gold Coast, for which see 
 Western Africa. 
 ASIA : An immense continent, presenting 
 
 every possible variety of climate, from the 
 dreary confines of the polar world, to the 
 heart of the tropical regions. Every thing 
 in Asia is on a vast scale : its mountains, 
 its table-lands, its deserts. The grandest 
 feature, and one which makes a complete 
 section of the continent, is a chain of moun- 
 tains, which, at various heights, and under 
 various names, but with very little, if any, in- 
 terruption, crosses Asia from the Mediterra- 
 nean sea to the Eastern ocean, "i'aurus, Cau- 
 casus, and the Himalaya, are the best known 
 portions of this chain. On the one side it has 
 Southern Asia; the finest and most extensive 
 plain in the world, covered with the richest 
 tropical products, and watered by magnificent 
 rivers proceeding from this great store-house, 
 and filled with populous nations and great em- 
 pires. On the other side, this chain serves as 
 a bulwark to the wide table-land of Thibet, 
 which, though under the latitude of the south 
 of Europe, has many of the characteristics of a 
 northern region. To the north, the recent 
 observations of Humboldt exhibit three par- 
 allel chains, the Eientim or Moor Tagh, the 
 Thiunchan or Celestial Mountains, and the 
 Altaian, which also support table-lands. But 
 these do not exceed 4,000 to 5,000 fcet, accord- 
 ing to Humboldt, and in many places enjoy a 
 mild and temperate climate, yielding not only 
 grain, but wine and silk. Elsewhere, they are 
 covered with rich pastures, and tenanted with 
 numerous wandering races, at once pastoral 
 and warlike, whose victorious bands have over- 
 run and subjugated the empires of the South. 
 The Altaian chain separates Middle Asia from 
 Siberia : a long range of the bleakest land on 
 the face of the earth. Some of the southern 
 districts have been found, by the Russians, ca- 
 pable of supporting numerous herds of cattle ; 
 but the rest is abandoned to wild animals, not 
 generally of a ferocious character, but covered 
 with rich and precious furs, which afford a 
 grand object for hunting and trade. Asia has 
 been the scene of the most remarkable events 
 in the history of the human race. In Asia, 
 man was created, and fell. In Asia, his re- 
 demption was accomplished by the incarna- 
 tion, sufferings, and death of the Son of God : 
 and from thence proceeded the messengers of 
 the Saviour, the heralds of His gospel, who 
 published those tidings of Divine mercy, which 
 are now proclaimed on every continent, and on 
 many of the remotest islands of the sea. Asia 
 was the nursery of learning, and of the arts, in 
 their earliest infancy. It has been the school, 
 and also the victim of the successive forms of 
 false philosophy, and of idol worship. In Asia 
 have existed some of the greatest empires, 
 through which have originated the most ex- 
 traordinary revolutions in the affairs of the 
 world. This immense continent, moreover, 
 teems with nations, and contains, on the most 
 moderate estimate, 500,000,000 of mankind. — 
 Hook's Year Book of Missions. 
 
ASIA. 
 
 157 
 
 Races of People. — Not only the majority of 
 the human race, in number, but also the 
 greatest variety of the species, is found 
 within xhe limits of Asia. The first family, 
 the Caucasian, comprises all the original in- 
 habitants of the mountainous region lying 
 between the Black Sea and the Caspian, from 
 about the 38th to the 42d degree of N. lati- 
 tude. It includes the mountaineers of the val- 
 leys of the Caucasus, such as the Abasians, 
 Ossetes, Lesghians, and Kisti ; and in the more 
 level country, the Georgians, Mingrelians, and 
 Armenians. In personal form, this family may 
 be described as European, but in mind, Asi- 
 atic. The face is of an oval form ; the fore- 
 head high and expanded ; the nose elevated, 
 with a slight convexity ; the lips moderate in 
 size, and the chin full and round. The com- 
 plexion is fair, but without the clearness of 
 the European. The eyes are generally dark, 
 and the hair black. The stature is nearly 
 et][ual to the European, and the form symmet- 
 rical and handsome. 
 
 2. The second is the Arabian, called Semitic, 
 on the hypothesis that they are descended from 
 Shem. It embraces all the aboriginal inhab- 
 itants of Palestine, i^ia Minor, Syria, and 
 Arabia, from the east coast of the Mediterra- 
 nean and Red Sea, up to the west coast of the 
 Persian Gulf. A brunette complexion ; black 
 or dark brown eyes ; long, lank, black hair ; 
 large bushy heads ; an oval face, in bold, dis- 
 tinct relief, with a nose always elevated, and 
 not unfrequently aquiline ; high forehead — 
 are among the most prominent characteristics 
 cif the family. From the condition of the 
 country they inhabit, they have naturally be- 
 come divided into two opposite and hostile 
 classes, the roving and predatory, and the 
 settled and industrious. 
 
 3. Between the Caspian Sea and the Per- 
 sian Gulf, to the west, the ocean to the south, 
 India to the east, and an indefinite line to the 
 north, there are several races which have 
 much rasemblance, but which differ enough in 
 person, mind, and language, to be classed as sep- 
 arate families. The first of these, beginning 
 at the west, is the Persian : complexion fair, 
 without transparency ; hair long, straight, and 
 almost jet black ; beard abundant and bushy ; 
 features regular and handsome ; stature little 
 short of the European standard, but less ro- 
 bust. The present inhabitants of Persia, how- 
 ever, are much mixed with the blood of Ara- 
 bian and Turkish settlers. 
 
 The next of these families is the Turkish or 
 Scythian. The parent country of this family 
 lies between the 35th and 60th degrees of lat- 
 itude, from the Hindoo coast to the Belar 
 Tagh, and from the Caspian Sea to the west- 
 ern boundary of the desert of Cobi, where they 
 are mixed with the Mongols. The complexion 
 of this family is a light brunette ; hair gene- 
 rally black, strong and long ; eye, light brown, 
 somewhat contracted ; skull remarkably glob- 
 
 ular ; proportions of the face symmetrical ; 
 body stout, but shorter than the liluropcan. 
 They have made little progress in civilization. 
 
 In the south-east angle of what is commonly 
 considered Persia, are three races of men, the 
 Belochees, Brahoos and Dehwars. The first of 
 these have dark brown complexion, black hair, 
 long visage, elevated features, with tall, active, 
 but not robust persons. The Brahoos, have 
 thick, short bones, and are a squab instead of 
 a tall people. The Dehwars have blunt fea- 
 tures, high cheek-bones, bluff cheeks, short per- 
 sons, and are an ill-favored race. 
 
 To the north of these is the Afghan race, 
 marked by a brown complexion, black hair, 
 sometimes brown, a profusion of beard, high 
 noses, high cheek-bones, long faces, a robust 
 person, and a stature short of the European. 
 
 Among the high mountains and narrow ele- 
 vated valleys, east of the Afghans, exists a 
 people called Kaffres or infidels, by their Mo- 
 hammedan neighbors. They are described as 
 remarkable for fairness, possessing occasionally 
 light hair, blue eyes, and great personal beauty. 
 They speak many languages unknown to Eu- 
 ropeans. 
 
 4. Proceeding eastward, we come to the 
 great and numerous Hindoo family, spread 
 from the 7th to the 35th degree of N. latitude, 
 and from the 68th to the 95th of E. longitude. 
 Correctly speaking, this is, perhaps, not one 
 family, but an aggregate of races, bearing 
 such a general resemblance to each other as 
 the European varieties do among themselves. 
 The color is commonly black, or at least a 
 deep brown ; and hence the name of Hindoo, 
 applied to them by their Tartar and Persian 
 invaders ; for that word, in Persian, is equiva- 
 lent to negro in ours. The hair is long, coarse 
 and black ; beard of the same color ; the eye 
 black or deep brown ; the face oval, and the 
 features handsome ; except softie defect in the 
 lower limbs, the person is well formed. The 
 stature is short of the European, and the body 
 spare and deficient in strength. Clearness and 
 subtlety, rather than depth and vigor, charac- 
 terize their intellectual capacities. JBut this 
 race is subdivided into several others, having 
 distinct peculiarities, as the Cashmerians, the 
 Bengallees, the Oriyas, the Telingas, the Mah- 
 rattas, and the Hindoo-Chinese, inhabiting a 
 country from the 7th to the 36th degrees of N. 
 latitude, from the eastern limits of the Hindoo 
 country, to the western limits of China, and 
 consisting of several different varieties, viz., the 
 semi-barbarous people of Cassay, Cachar and 
 Assam, and to the south and east of these, the 
 Arracanese, Burmese, Peguans, Laos or Shans, 
 Siamese and Cambojans ; and east of thern, 
 the Anam race, comprising the Cochin-Chi- 
 nese and Tonquinese. 
 
 5. The Chinese. (See China.) 
 
 6. Near the Chinese is another great fam- 
 ily, bearing it some resemblance, and yet a 
 distinct class, the Japanese. They occupy a 
 
158 
 
 ASIA. 
 
 country of ffreat extent and fine temperature, 
 extending rrom 30° to 45° N. Their color 
 is tawny, stature short but robust, uose llat- 
 tish, eyelids thick and putted, eyes dark, lower 
 limbs large and thick. 
 
 North-east of China arc the Coreans, occu- 
 pying a peninsula equal in extent with Great 
 Britain. They are superior in strength to the 
 Chinese and J apauese, but inferior in mental 
 capacity. 
 
 7. The inhabitants of two-thirds of the 
 ?uperficies of Asia, from the seats of the fam- 
 ilies already specified, to the frozen ocean, re- 
 main to be described. These have a common 
 resemblance, in some important features ; but 
 it is only such a resemblance aa exists in all 
 the families already mentioned, from the east- 
 ern shore of the Atlantic to the eastern con- 
 fines of Hindoostau. The first of these races 
 comprises the inhabitants of Bootan, a stout, 
 active race, their stature rising occasionally to 
 six feet. They are a long settled agricultural 
 race, having a peculiar language of their own. 
 West of these is the Yorklia family, a short, 
 robust people, of an olive complexion. North 
 of these, on the terrace of the Himalaya, at 
 an elevation of 12,000 to 13,000 feet above 
 the sea, are the Tibetian family, having a Tartar 
 countenance, angular face, broad across the 
 cheek-bones, small black eyes, and very little 
 head. They are short, squat, broad-shoulder- 
 ed, and sluggish both in mind and body. 
 
 We come now to the Mongolian family, 
 inhabiting the vast plateau and extensive as- 
 cents between the Himalaya and Altai ranges, 
 as far as the 140th degree of longitude, and 
 then between the former and the right l3ank 
 of the Amur. Their general features are, 
 forehead low and slanting ; head square, broad 
 cheek-bones, chin prominent; body short, 
 broad, square, and robust. Hair black, long, 
 and lank, beard scant. There are two great 
 divisions of this family, the Eastern and West- 
 ern Tartars, the former being the present lords 
 •of China. 
 
 The true Mongols extend westward from 
 1160 longitude to the sea of Aral, a sweep 
 of at least 3,000 miles, and embrace the 
 communities known as Mongols, Kalkas, 
 Eluths, Ogurs, Kokonors, Kami, and Kalumes. 
 These were the instruments of the conquests 
 of Jenghis Khan and his sons. They have 
 firm and robust bodies, lean and pallid coun- 
 tenances, high and broad shoulders, short and 
 distorted noses, pointed and prominent chins, 
 a low and deep upper jaw, long teeth, distant 
 from each other, eyelids stretched out from 
 the temple to the nose, eyes black and un- 
 steady, an expression oblique and stem, ex- 
 tremities bony and nervous, large and muscu- 
 lar tliighs, short legs, and stature equal to the 
 European. The country of the Mongols is 
 cold, elevated and dry, few parts of it being 
 fit for culture, and a great portion of it con- 
 sisting of deserts or seas of sand. It abounds, 
 
 however, in game and wild animals. With 
 the exception of a very small number, they 
 live exclusively on animal food ; and their 
 clothing and dwellings are for the most ])art 
 made of animal tegument or fibre. Their 
 employment consists in tending cattle, the 
 chase, and war. The native capacity of this 
 family is sufficiently attested by the production 
 of such men as Attila, Jenghis, Timur, llabe, 
 and Kublay Khan ; as well as in the conquest, 
 retention, and government of China for 200 
 years. 
 
 Between the Altai range and river Amur, 
 tribes exist almost as numerous as in any 
 equal extent of the American continent, 
 and far more distinct in physical form. And 
 near to, and on the banks of the Amur are 
 four nations, called Soloni, Kertching, Daguri, 
 and Natkis, all of which have languages wholly 
 different from their immediate neighbors, the 
 Manchoos ; rude, dull, without the knowledge 
 of letters, living on fish. 
 
 Sherbani, the grandson of Jenghis Khan, 
 led a colony of Mongols into Siberia, amount- 
 ing to 15,000 families, and his descendants 
 reigned there for 300 years, till conquered by 
 the Russians ; so that the Mongols, though 
 originally foreigners, now form a considerable 
 part of the population of Siberia. Besides 
 these, there are a number of families, distinct 
 from each other, inhabiting these regions. 
 Among all the native races to the north of the 
 Altai mountains, letters are wholly unknown, 
 agriculture is scarcely practiced, and to obtain 
 food and clothing nearly the whole time of the 
 people is consumed in fishing and the chase. — 
 Abridged from McCulloch. 
 
 Relipon. — Maltebrun gives the following 
 raournnil, but just picture of the moral and re- 
 ligious condition of the immense population of 
 this vast continent : " The mental torpor sub- 
 sisting in combination with some virtuous, 
 mild, and hospitable feelings, keeps alive the 
 empire of religious superstition, under the yoke 
 of which we find all the eastern and central 
 parts of Asia languishing ; while the Christi- 
 anity of the Greek Church slowly penetrates 
 by the north, and Mohammedanism still flour- 
 ishes in the western regions. Polygamy, sup- 
 ported by the same spirit throughout Asia, 
 with the single exception of Japan, debases 
 family connections, and deprives life of its en- 
 dearments, by taking from the female all con- 
 sideration and influence ; at the same time, 
 being averse to the laws of nature, it diminishes 
 the population, and deteriorates the human 
 race." 
 
 Population. — We have no means of ascertain- 
 ing with any degree of certainty the extent 
 and population of this vast continent. The 
 following estimate, which we find in Harper's 
 new Universal Gazeteer, is probably somewhat 
 above the mark : 
 
ASIA. 
 
 159 
 
 Turkey in Asia, 
 
 Arabia, 
 
 Persia, 
 
 Hindoostan, 
 
 Further India, 
 
 China Proper, 
 
 Chinese dependencies 
 
 Turkestan, 
 
 Russia, 
 
 Islands, 
 
 Total 
 
 area in sq. milafi 
 
 Population. 
 
 516,000 
 
 13,700,000 
 
 834,000 
 
 10 000,000 
 
 900,000 
 
 16,700,000 
 
 1,665,090 
 
 168,697,277 
 
 917,575 
 
 25,182,540 
 
 1,300,000 
 
 367,000,000 
 
 3,810,000 
 
 76,800,000 
 
 700,000 
 
 12,000,000 
 
 5,200,000 
 
 7,400,000 
 
 1,075,400 
 
 55,326,676 
 
 16,918,065 
 
 752,806,493 
 
 Pop. according to Religious Profession. 
 
 Budhists, - - _ - 
 Brahminists, - . - 
 Mussulmans, . - - - 
 Shamans, - - - - 
 Sikhs, ... - 
 Sect of Lao Kiun in China, 
 Sect of Confucius, 
 Sect of Sinto ia Japan, 
 Ghebirs, - . , - 
 Jews, - - . - , 
 Christians of all denominiations, 
 
 360,000,000 
 
 150,000,000 
 
 130,000,000 
 
 9,000,000 
 
 5,000,000 
 
 - 2,500,000 
 
 - 1,500,000 
 1,300,000 
 
 - 500,000 
 800,000 
 
 - 50,000,000 
 
 TABULAR VIEW OF MISSIONS IN ASLi. 
 
 India, including Ceylon, Burmah, and Siam. 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 
 
 London Missionary Society, 
 
 Gospel Propagation Society, 
 
 General Baptist Missionary Society, (Eng.) . . . 
 
 Baptist Missionary Society, (Eng.) 
 
 English Wesleyan Society, 
 
 American Board, 
 
 American Baptist Miss. Union, including China, 
 
 American Presbyterian Board, 
 
 Irish Presbyterians, 
 
 Scotch Presbyterians, 
 
 German Missionary Societies, 
 
 Free-Will Baptists, . . . , . 
 
 American Missionary Association, 
 
 China. 
 
 American Board, 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 
 
 American Episcopal Church, 
 
 Southern Baptist Board, 
 
 German Societies, 
 
 Methodists, North and South, 
 
 Wesleyans, 
 
 American Presbyterian Board, 
 
 English Presbyterians, 
 
 Asiatic Islands. 
 Gospel Propagation Society in Borneo, . . . . 
 
 Rhenish Society in Borneo, 
 
 Gosner's Society in Java, 
 
 Netherlands Society, Amboyna, Celebas, Java, ] 
 and Samarang, j 
 
 Westbrn Asia. 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 
 
 American Board, in Syria, Assyria, and Persia, . 
 Among the Jews in Syria, 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 
 -g 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 53 
 
 83 
 
 
 6,182 
 
 625 
 
 24,036 
 
 21 
 
 47 
 
 23 
 
 1,024 
 
 44 
 
 8,919 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 4,629 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 225 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 35 
 
 
 1,656 
 
 81 
 
 3,492 
 
 
 37 
 
 
 2,137 
 
 
 4,936 
 
 30 
 
 35 
 
 24 
 
 926 
 
 215 
 
 8,042 
 
 19 
 
 49 
 
 124 
 
 8,873 
 
 78 
 
 1,682 
 
 13 
 
 25 
 
 6 
 25 
 
 
 226 
 
 
 2,932 
 9,405 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 2,179 
 
 
 3,274 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 5 
 
 
 47 
 
 
 151 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 26 
 
 6 
 
 130 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 62 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 24 
 
 8 
 
 200 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 4 
 
 
 90 
 
 
 80 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 
 23 
 
 
 146 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 68 
 
 
 550 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 
 10,000 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 77 
 
 9 
 
 24 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 29 
 
 22 
 
 554 
 
 206 
 
 577 
 
 176 
 
 28,372 
 
 1,084 
 
 84,168 
 
160 
 
 ASSAM. 
 
 Owing to the imperfect reports of the mis- 
 Bions, it is impossible to make such a table as 
 this complete; and it is possible that some 
 slight errors may be discovered in the statis- 
 tica; but it is an approximation sufficiently 
 uear to give a fair view of the present state of 
 the missionary work on the continent of Asia, 
 as compared with its vast population. De- 
 ducting the 50,000,000 nominal Christians 
 from the estimate of the population, wc have 
 left about 700,000,000 of Mohammedans, 
 Jews, and heathens in Asia, which would give 
 more than 1,000,000 to each missionary. But 
 then it is to be considered that the modern 
 missionary enterprise commenced but a little 
 more than fiftv years ago ; and besides these 
 missionaries, there are now probably not less 
 than 2,000 native assistants laboring for the 
 evangelization of their countrymen on the 
 same field. More than 1600 have been re- 
 ported ; some of the societies make no reports 
 of native assistants ; and most of the reports 
 are very deficient on this head. And then, a 
 vast amount of preparatory work has been 
 done in the way of education and the printing 
 and circulation of books. The 20,000 con- 
 verts from heathenism, and the 80,000 pupils 
 in the mission schools, and the millions of 
 pages of Bible truth in circulation, must be 
 now exerting a powerful influence in sapping 
 the foundations of heathenism. 
 
 ASSAM : The country known as Assam, 
 lies on the north-western frontier of Burmah, 
 and from that frontier stretches across the 
 plains of the Brahmaputra, from 70 to 100 
 miles in breadth towards the Himmalaya 
 mountains. On the north-east it reaches to 
 the borders of China. Its inhabitants are of 
 many diflerent races, though they are known 
 by the common name of Shuans or Shans, a 
 term which has given rise to the English name 
 Assam. It was foriierly an independent state, 
 but in 1822 it was incorporated with the Em- 
 pire of Burmah and in 1826 it was ceded to 
 the English. The tribes that inhabit the coun- 
 try are numerous, and differ widely from each 
 other, the most important being the Assamese, 
 the Klmmtis, the Singphos and the Nagas. 
 
 Mission — American Baptist Union. — The 
 attention of the Board was first directed to 
 the inhabitants of this country by Captain 
 Francis Jenkins, Commissioner of the Gover- 
 nor-General of India for Assam. This gentle- 
 man feeling a lively interest in the singular 
 people whom he had been appointed to govern, 
 m 1834 addressed a letter to some of his 
 friends in Calcutta, requesting them to invite 
 some of the missionaries of the American 
 Baptists to come and settle in the country. 
 Captain Jenkins also promised to contribute 
 1000 rupees for the establishment of a mission 
 on the arrival of the first missionary, and 1000 
 more on the arrival of a printing-pre??. This 
 proposal was communicated to the Board of 
 managers and was favorably received by them, 
 
 being recommended by several special conside- 
 rations. The latiguage of the people was similar 
 to the Burman, and the characters used in print- 
 ing were essentially the same. 'J'he proposed 
 mission also appeared to open a nearer access to 
 China, which was at that time barred to all 
 missionary effort by the exclusive policy puN 
 sued by its government. It was imagined that 
 while the Imperial officers were carefully ex- 
 cluding foreigners from the ports, the mission- 
 aries from Assam might join the caravans that 
 traded to the interior of China, and thus bear 
 the Gospel tQ the very centre of the empire. 
 
 With views like these, the Board determined 
 to comply with the request of Captain Jen- 
 kins, and immediately referred the matter to 
 the missionaries at Maulmain to carry their 
 plan into execution. It was at the time when 
 Rev. Mr. Brown and Mr. Cutter, a printer, 
 had just been obliged to leave Rangoon, and 
 they were immediately selected to commence 
 the proposed mission at Sadiya — the place 
 deemed most eligible for the purpose. These 
 gentlemen with their families reached Calcut- 
 ta in September, 1835, where they provided 
 themselves with a printing-press, a standing- 
 press, and a suitable supply of paper and oth- 
 er materials for their work ; securing at the 
 same time from the Board the assurance of an 
 additional press and a complete apparatus for 
 printing to be sent from this country. Thus 
 provided, they embarked at Calcutta, in boats, 
 on the Brahmaputra, and after a passage of four 
 months they reached Sadiya on the 23d of 
 March, 1836. They were kindly received by 
 Captain Jenkins, who immediately fulfilled his 
 promise to the mission, and continued for many 
 years its liberal benefactor and constant frienoL 
 
 Sadiya is the principal town of a district, 
 bearing the same name. It is beautifully sit>- 
 uated in the north-eastern portion of Assam, 
 about 400 miles north of Ava, and half that 
 distance from the Chinese frontier. It coi>- 
 tains a large population, composed of the sev- 
 eral races that occupy the country. Among 
 these people the missionaries immediately pro- 
 pared to commence their labors. So soon as 
 a suitable building could be erected, the ladies 
 of the mission established schools, Mrs. Brown 
 for boys and Mrs. Cutter for girls, both of 
 which were well attended. Meanwhile Mr. 
 Brown and Mr. Cutter employed themselves in 
 learning the condition of the people, in per- 
 fecting their acquaintance mth the language, • 
 in the printing of which they decided to adopt 
 the Roman instead of the Burman or other 
 oriental alphabet.* Mr. Cutter soon printed 
 
 * The idea of using the Roman alphabet in the printing 
 of books in the languages of India, was first commended 
 to the missionaries in 1834, by Mr. E. T. Trevelyan, a gen- 
 tleman connected with the government in Bengal, a dis- 
 tinguished oriental scholar and an intelligent and devoted 
 friend of missions. The method was for a time adopted 
 by the missionaries of several denominations in India, but 
 has been wholly abandoned. It is often referred to 
 in the midsionary correspondence of the time as Trevel- 
 
ASSAM. 
 
 161 
 
 a spelling-book for the schools, and Mr. Brown 
 began to prepare works for the press, both in 
 the Assamese and Shyan languages. 
 
 In April, 1837, Rev. Miles Bronson, and 
 Rev. Jacob Thomas, with their wives, arrived 
 at Calcutta as missionaries to Assam. They 
 had sailed from Boston in the preceding Oc- 
 tober, having with them an additional printing 
 press, and a full supply of all the materials for 
 printing. They soon again embarked at Cal- 
 cutta on the Brahmaputra, for the distant 
 place of their destination. They had been 
 several weeks on their passage against the ra- 
 pid current of the river, and had nearly reached 
 Sadiya, when Mr. Bronson having become dan- 
 gerously ill of the jungle fever, Mr. Thomas 
 was hastening forward in a small boat to pro- 
 cure medical assistance for his associate. He 
 had already come within sight of the town of 
 Sadiya, and even of the mission premises, when 
 two trees, whose roots were united, suddenly 
 fell from the loosened bank of the river, direct- 
 ly upon the boat in which he was seated, 
 crushing the boat and causing Mr. Thomas to 
 drown. A calamity so unexpected could not 
 but darken the prospects of the mission. A 
 few days afterwards, Mrs. Thomas and her as- 
 sociates reached Sadiya, where they were wel- 
 comed by the mission families. 
 
 So soon as the newly-arrived missionaries 
 were prepared to enter upon their appropriate 
 labors, it was found expedient to distribute 
 their labors among the several races of the 
 province. Mr. Brown gave his attention prin- 
 cipally to the Assamese and the Khamtis ; 
 Mr. Bronson to the Singphos ; while Mr. Cut- 
 ter was constantly occupied at the two presses 
 and in the supervision of the schools of the 
 mission. It should also be remarked that a 
 leading object had in view by the Board in 
 establishing the mission in Assam was, if pos- 
 sible, to penetrate the northern parts of Bur- 
 mah and Siam, and also the upper provinces 
 of China. In accordance with this general 
 design, Mr. Kincaid, of the Burman mission, 
 attempted a journey from Ava to Sadiya, in 
 1837. He was able only to reach Mo-gaung, 
 whence he returned to Ava, through the many 
 perils of a general insurrectipn of the provin- 
 ces of the north. For the same purpose, also, 
 the missionaries at Sadiya made several excur- 
 sions eastward, and proceeded almost to the con- 
 fines of China. These excursions led to no 
 other result than to make them acquainted 
 with new multitudes of heathen, who were 
 already accessible to the preaching of the 
 gospel. The entrance to Burraah proper and 
 to China, however, continued to be controlling 
 objects of inquiry and aspiration both to the 
 missionaries and the Board, till the barriers 
 that so long shut them out of these countries 
 were finally broken down. 
 
 In May, 1838, Mr. Bronson and his family 
 removed to Jaipur, an important post of the 
 East India Company, on the river Dihing, 
 11 
 
 three or four days' journey south-east from Sar 
 diya. It was in this region that the Sing- 
 phos, the people to whom he was particularly 
 sent, were the most numerous. It was also 
 in the immediate vicinity of the Nagas, a 
 people living among the hills, who had been 
 visited by the missionaries, and had awakened 
 the interest of the English residents. Mr. 
 Bronson was warmly welcomed to Jaipur by 
 Mr. Bruce, a friend of the mission, who was 
 then residing there as the Company's agent 
 for promoting the culture of the tea-plant. 
 Other British officers and residents then at 
 Jaipur contributed liberally towards the estab- 
 lishment of the new station, and the personal 
 comfort of the missionary and his family ; and 
 several of the ladies of the post joined with 
 Mrs. Bronson in opening schools and teaching 
 the heathen children who attended them. At 
 about the same period, Captain Jenkins, in 
 addition to his previous benefactions, also con- 
 tributed 500 rupees for replenishing the fonts 
 of type, and offered 500 more towards the 
 support of a superintendent of the schools, in 
 case one was appointed by the Board. The 
 interest which this gentleman manifested in 
 the plans and operations of the mission is a 
 high testimonial to the beneficent results which 
 it was producing aniong the people over whom 
 he ruled. Not only was he the constant ad- 
 viser of the missionaries in all their enterprises, 
 but he often addressed communications direct- 
 ly to the Board, suggesting such measures as 
 he deemed important to its growth and pros- 
 perity, and coupling with his suggestions the 
 most liberal offers of aid in carrying them 
 into execution. 
 
 In 1839, the labors of the mission at both 
 its stations were for a time interrupted by an 
 insurrection among the Khamtis, who had unit- 
 ed portions of other tribes in a league against 
 the power of the English. They began with 
 an attack upon Sadiya, and a large number 
 of the English soldiers and residents werc^lain 
 in the fury of the onset. The missionaries at 
 this station fled to the cantonments of the 
 troops, where they remained in safety till the 
 insurrection was quelled, when they removed 
 to Jaipur. At the time of the insurrection, 
 Mr. Bronson was absent on a tour among the 
 Nagas, among whom he was preparing to es- 
 tablish a station. He immediately hastened 
 back to Jaipur, where he found the schools 
 broken up, and the whole population distract- 
 ed with alarms. The whole body of the mis- 
 sionaries being now at Jaipur, it was deemed 
 best to remove thither also the entire property 
 of the mission, and abandon altogether the 
 station at Sadiya. The expenses of the re- 
 moval were generously defrayed by Mr. Bruce ; 
 but in consequence of the agitation and alarm 
 produced among the people by the insurrec- 
 tion, it was several months before the mission 
 fully recovered from the shock it had sus- 
 tained. Sadiya was soon afterwards aban- 
 
162 
 
 ASSAM. 
 
 donoil by tiit- government ofliccrs and P^ngllsh 
 residents, most of whom also removed to Jai- 
 pur. Meanwhile the missionaries, in the sus- 
 pension of their external labors, devoted 
 themselves with the more assiduity to the 
 study of the language, the preparation of 
 tracts and books, and the translation of the 
 Scriptures. In the spring of 1839, the Gospel 
 of Matihcw, translated by Mr. Brown, was 
 printed at the mission press. 
 
 In January, 1840, Mr. Bronson made a 
 second visit to the Nagas among the hills 
 around Jaipur. Finding them now in a quiet 
 condition, and apparently eager for instruction, 
 he determined immediately to settle among 
 them, and establish a branch of the mission. 
 He was greatly encouraged in this undertak- 
 ing by several English officers and re^dents, 
 of whom Mr. Bruce contributed 600 rupees 
 and Capt. Hannay 250 for the establishment 
 of schools. In the following March Mr. 
 Bronson, having made the necessary preparur 
 tions, removed his family to the country of the 
 Nagas, and commenced his labors among the 
 people. 
 
 In May, Kev. Cyrus Barker and his wife, 
 and Miss Rhoda Bronson, sister of Rev. Mr. 
 Bronson, were added to the mission. They 
 had sailed from the United States with an ap- 
 pointment specially to the Nagas ; but finding 
 that Mr. Bronson had already begun the sta- 
 tion among the hills, Mr. Barker decided to 
 devote himself to the Assamese, while Miss 
 Bronson soon went to join her brother at his 
 new residence. But the several departments 
 of the mission were scarcely organized when 
 changes and afflictions began to fall upon 
 them. Mr. and Mrs. Brown were obliged 
 temporarily to leave the mission to recruit 
 their health. Mr. Bronson soon found the 
 climate of the hills exceedingly unhealthy; 
 and on account of the severe illness of mem- 
 bers of his family, he was soon obliged to re- 
 turn .to Jaipur, where Miss Bronson died of 
 fever in December, 1840, before she had 
 scarcely begun her work as a missionary. Mr. 
 Barker, after acquiring the language at Jai- 
 pur, selected as the place of his residence Sib- 
 sagor, a flourishing post of the East India 
 Company on the Brahmaputra, about three 
 days' journey below Jaipur. He settled here 
 with his family in May, 1841, and in the fol- 
 lowing July was followed by Mr. and Mrs. 
 Brown. This place proved to be particularly 
 favorable to the culture of the tearplant, and 
 soon withdrew most of the English residents 
 from Jaipur, — from which, without entirely 
 abandoning it as a station, the missionaries at 
 length also removed to Sibsagor. Mr. Bron- 
 son, however, went to Nowgong, a flourishing 
 town in Central Assam, to which he was spe- 
 cially invited by Captain G. T. Gordon, an 
 English officer who had long been a friend and 
 benefactor of the mission. The misvsionaries, 
 too, at all the stations, finding the other races 
 
 comjiarativcly inaccessible to the gospel, de» 
 termincd to restrict their labors to the Assam- 
 ese population. At Nowgong, Mrs. Bronson, 
 with the aid of Captain Gordon, soon opened 
 a large mission school, in which she employed 
 as assistants two native converts from Calcut- * 
 ta. This school still continued to flourish, 
 and has been productive of much religious 
 benefit to its members. 
 
 Meanwhile Mr. Cutter still continued at 
 Jaipur, conducting the presses belonging to 
 the mission. The Gospels of Matthew and 
 John, and also the Acts of the Apostles, had 
 been translated by Mr. Brown, and, together 
 with school books prepared in various lan- 
 guages, were now printed for the use of the 
 numerous schools. In the winter of 1842-3, 
 the insurrectionary spirit began again to show 
 itself among the people, and Jaipur was for 
 several weeks exposed to attacks from parties 
 of insurgents. During this time Mr. Cutter 
 was obliged to take down the presses, and con- 
 ceal them with the other property belonging to 
 the mission. On the restoration of tranquil- 
 lity they were again set up and put in opera- 
 tion ; but the events which had occurred, and 
 the exposed condition of the mission property, 
 decided the missionaries on the total abandon- 
 ment of Jaipur, and the removal of the sta- 
 tion to Sibsagor. This was accomplished 
 with the approbation of the Board in Novem- 
 ber, 1843. At about the same time, in order 
 to prevent a concentration of the mission at 
 too few points, Mr. Barker removed into Cen- 
 tral Assam, first to Tezpur, and then to Gow- 
 ahatti, the residence of Major Jenkins — for 
 this was now his military rank, — and the most 
 important town in the province. Here a sta- 
 tion was begun, and Jaipur was wholly aban- 
 doned. 
 
 The three stations of Sibsagor, Nowgong, 
 and Gowahatti, into which the mission was 
 now divided, still continue to be the centres of 
 its operation, which have been for some time 
 past entirely restricted to the Assamese popu- 
 lation, instead of embracing the Khamtis, the 
 Singphos, and the Nagas, as was originally 
 designed. A church was constituted at each 
 of the stations #)on after its establishment, 
 and these churches have gone gradually for- 
 ward in winning converts to the gospel from 
 the heathen population of the country. At 
 each of these stations, also, the work of preach- 
 ing, translating, and teaching has been con- 
 stantly prosecuted by the ^lissionaries, with 
 only such hindrances as usually attend the dis- 
 semination of the gospel among men. In ad- 
 dition to the strictly religious schools which 
 are directly supported by the mission, there 
 are also others which are sustained in a great 
 degree by English residents ; and though 
 taught generally by native assistants, either 
 belonging to the country or brought from Cal- 
 cutta, are yet under the general care of the 
 mission, and are to be numbered among its 
 
ASSAM. 
 
 163 
 
 fruits. These scliools have become very nu- 
 merous, and are widely scattered among the 
 villages of the country. But the school to 
 which the missionaries attach the most import- 
 ance, and which has been productive of the 
 best results, is the Orphan Institution at Now- 
 gong*. It aims to collect from all parts of the 
 province destitute orphan children, and train 
 them to useful occupations and to a knowledge 
 of the gospel. It went into operation in 1844, 
 and for several years past it has numbered 
 from fifty to seventy members. Its expenses 
 for several years were wholly defrayed, and are 
 still very much lightened, by the generous 
 contributions of the philanthropic English 
 residents in Assam. Many of its pupils have 
 become Christians, and several have been 
 employed as assistants in the mission. Prior 
 to 1846, only here and there a native convert 
 had been baptised, but in the course of that 
 year seven of the elder pupils of the Nowgong 
 institution, and several other persons at the 
 same station, were admitted to the church. 
 At the close of the year 1847, the church at 
 Gowahatti numbered twenty-seven members, 
 and those of the three stations contained to- 
 gether upwards of sixty native disciples. 
 
 In 1846, Mrs. Brown visited the United 
 States, and awakened an increased interest in 
 behalf of the mission among the churches and 
 the members of the Board, and early in the fol- 
 lowing year, two missionaries. Rev. A. H. 
 Danforth, and Rev. Ira J. Stoddard, offered 
 their services to the managers, and were ap- 
 pointed to Assam — the former to join the sta- 
 tion at Gowahatti ; the latter to relieve Mr. 
 Bronson in the charge of the orphan institu- 
 tion at Nowgong. They arrived at the places 
 of their destination early in the spring of 1848. 
 In the following year, Mr. and Mrs. Brown, 
 and Mrs. Cutter, were obliged, by ill health, to 
 come for a season to the United States. They 
 remained here until the summer of 1850, when 
 they returned to their stations, accompanied 
 by Rev. Messrs. Whiting and Ward, and their 
 wives, and Miss Shaw, a teacher, all of whom 
 were appointed to the mission. They reached 
 Assam in the following June. Mr. G. Dauble, 
 a gentleman who had been employed as a 
 teacher at Dacca, in Bengal, by the Basle Mis- 
 sionary Society, came to Assam in 1850, and 
 having become a Baptist, was temporarily con- 
 nected with the Nowgong institution. He was 
 afterwards ordained as a missionary, and in 1851, 
 married to Miss Shaw. He died at Nowgong 
 in March, 1853. Rev. Cyrus Barker, also,, 
 after a long period of declining health, em-' 
 barked for the United States, and died at sea, 
 in January, 1850. His family now live in this 
 country. Mr. Cutter, the printer, was also 
 dismissed- from the mission in the autumn of 
 1852. 
 
 The translation of the New Testament in 
 Assamese, was completed by Mr. Brown, and 
 printed at Sibsagar in 1849. Since then it 
 
 has passed through other editions ; and several 
 books of the Old Testament have also been 
 printed, together with a long list of books to 
 be used in the schools. The English ofGcers 
 and residents in the province, still continue to 
 evince their wonted interest in the prosperity 
 of the mission, and in the results which it aims 
 to accomplish for the people. The religion of 
 the Brahmins has, for some time, been losing 
 its hold on the popular mind, and the impres- 
 sion is widely prevailing, not only in Assam, 
 but in other parts of India, that it must give 
 place to the religion which is taught by the 
 English. This however is only a negative and 
 comparatively unimportant result. The mis- 
 sionaries have still before them their great 
 work of persuading the people to embrace the 
 gospel — a work for which, thus far, a prepara- 
 tion only has been made, but which has of 
 itself scarcely begun to be accomplished. — See 
 Professor Gammell's History of Am. Baptist 
 Missions, and recent Reports of Managers of 
 Missionary Union. — Prof. W. Gammell. 
 
 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Missionaries and 
 Assistants. 
 
 1 
 
 
 ? 
 
 Minis- 
 ters. 
 
 Lay Teach- 
 ers, &c. 
 
 Scholars^.. 
 
 i 
 
 "-A 
 
 
 i 
 
 d 
 < 
 
 
 1 
 
 E 
 
 < 
 
 ' 
 
 1 
 
 Day 
 Sch':s 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 
 Sibsagor... 
 Nowgong. . 
 Gowahatti 
 
 1841 
 1841 
 184S 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Ich. 
 
 10 
 
 48 
 15 
 
 
 216 
 
 Totals.. 
 
 79 
 
 8 Sch'ls. 
 
 289 
 
 ATHENS: ^^^ Greece. 
 
 AUCKLAND : Capital of New Zealand, 
 in lat. 360 51' S. long. 174° 45' E. _A station 
 of the Wesleyan Missionary Society com- 
 menced in 1823. Population 1800, has now 4 
 missionaries, 5 chapels, 26 local preachers, 53 
 teachers, 291 members, 492 scholars, and 810 
 attendants on public worship. Auckland con- 
 tains besides a college and seminary for the 
 education of the sons of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionaries in Australia and Polynesia, having 
 now 70 students ; and there is also a native in- 
 stitution, giving the benefit of an education in 
 the English and Maori languages to native 
 young men, to fit them for future usefulness. 
 Also, a station of the Church Missionary So- 
 ciety. 
 
 AUSTRAL ISLANDS : A group of five 
 islands in the Southern Pacific, between 22^ 
 27' and 27° 36' S. lat, and 144© 11' and 150° 
 47' W. long. The names of the islands are, 
 Raivavai, Tubuai, Rurutu, Rimatara, and 
 Rapa. 
 
 AUSTRALASIA : The Encyclopedia 
 
164 
 
 AUSTRALIA. 
 
 Britannica gives the followinff as the boundar 
 rics of Australasia : " Take tno tn^uator as the 
 northern line, from 132^ to 176^ K. lonjf. ; 
 continue a line on the meridian to the GSth 
 pnruilel, (bendinjr a little to take in NewZear 
 ian<l,) for the eastern ; a line on the same par- 
 allel to 65'-> E. long^. for the southern ; and a 
 slanting' point on the equator, so as to include 
 Kerg^uelands Land, and pass on the eastern 
 side of Timorlant, Cerara, Mysol, and Sal- 
 walty, for the western boundary ; those lines 
 will embrace the whole of the Australasian 
 Islands, viz., Australia or New Holland, Van 
 Dieniiin's land or Tasmania, New Guinea, 
 and the Louiscade Archipelago, New Britain, 
 New Ireland and neighborinpr islands, Solo- 
 mon's L^huids, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, 
 New Zealand and isles to the southward, Ker- 
 gueland Islands, St. Paul and Amsterdam, and 
 numerous coral reefs and islets. 
 
 AUSTRALIA, or NEW HOLLAND lies 
 between 10^ 30' and 39° S. lat. and between 
 112- 20' and 153° 40' E. long. Its extreme 
 length is about 2603 miles, and its average width 
 1200, making about 2,690,810 square miles ; 
 the continent of Europe embracing 3,684,841, 
 which will give the reader a comparative 
 idea of the size of this new continent. The 
 prevailing features of the country are barren 
 and wooded plains, traversed by long ridges of 
 precipitous, but not very lofty mountains, 
 and rivers which often spread into marshes, 
 and do not continue their course to any great 
 distance in proportion to the extent of the 
 country. There are few deep bays ; nor does 
 the sea, so far as yet discovered, receive any 
 river, whose magnitude corresponds to that of 
 the land. Great portions of that part which 
 has been explored are unfit for cultivation, or 
 even for traveling. There are, however, fine 
 meadow tracts, on a grand scale, where the 
 richest herbage grows spontaneously, and 
 where industry may raise the most plentiful 
 crops. In its geographical features and in 
 some of its productions, Australia differs wide- 
 ly from all other portions of the known world. 
 The discovery of gold has recently attracted 
 comiderable attention, and drawn great num- 
 bers of emigrants from Great Britain to that 
 far off land. 
 
 Lihahiiants. — We have no definite and reliar 
 ble information as to the number of the abo- 
 riginal population ; but it is supposed to be 
 about 15,000. Major T. S. Mitchell, however, 
 who has made three tours into the interior, 
 thinks there are less than 6,000. This gentle- 
 man expresses a high opinion of their charac- 
 ter. He says that, in manners and general 
 intelligence, they appear superior to any class 
 of white rustics he had seen. The tribes of 
 the northern Coast of Australia possess a 
 peculiar interest, on account of their proximity 
 to the Indian Archipelago. Here, within a 
 circle of .500 miles, may be found a large num- 
 ber of distinct tribes, varying in color from 
 
 the black of the negro to the freckled-yellow 
 of the Polynesian mountaineer, and differing 
 in social condition as much as in person. 
 
 'J'he British colony of New South Wales 
 was originally a penal settlement, to which 
 criminals were transported from Great Britain- 
 After this, it was opened to independent and 
 bounty emigrants. And, within a few years 
 past, the discovery of gold has caused a great 
 rush of emigration. In 1810, the population 
 was but 8,923. In 1851, it was 264,000. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 United Brethren. — The Moravians estab- 
 lished a mission to the aborigines of Austra- 
 lia in 1849, aud'have one missionarv laboring 
 at Lake Boga ; but no specific results are yet 
 reported. 
 
 Society for Propagating the Gospei. in 
 Foreign Parts. — New South Wales having 
 been occupied by the British Government 
 as a penal settlement, chaplains were ap- 
 pointed as their services were required. In 
 1795 the Society began, on the recommenda- 
 tion of the local chaplain, to pay two school- 
 masters in the settlement. In 1798, Rev. C. 
 Haddock became the Society's first mission- 
 ary in Norfolk Island. In 1825, when the 
 population of Australia was 31.133, there were 
 only 10 chaplains maintained by the Govern- 
 ment, and but 14 in 1837, when the population 
 had more than doubled. In 1836, Rev. Wil- 
 liam G. Boughton was consecrated bishop, and 
 £2,000 were granted by the Society for Pro- 
 moting Christian Knowledge, and £1,000 by 
 the Society for Propagating the Gospel in 
 Foreign Parts, to aid the work ; and soon 
 after 10 missionaries were sent out by the lat- 
 ter Society. Year after year, more clergymen 
 were sent out, and considerable grants of 
 money were placed by the Society at the 
 Bishop's disposal. In 1843 the Society was 
 assisting to maintain 40 clergymen in Austra- 
 lia, and 10 in Yan Dieman's Land ; and in 
 1851, the number aided was about 50. In 1847, 
 the Diocese was divided, and three new sees, 
 Newcastle, Adelaide, and Melbourne were con- 
 stituted. The increase of clergy since that 
 time will be seen by the following table : 
 
 1847 1850 
 
 Newcastle .... 17 27 
 
 Adelaide .... 11 22 
 
 Melbourne 
 
 1851 
 
 20 
 
 A meeting has been held, attended by the 
 four bishops of Australia, and the bishops of 
 New Zealand and Yan Dieman's Land, and a 
 Board of Missions constituted, for the propa- 
 gation of the Gospel among the aboriginal 
 inhabitants of the Australian continent and 
 the islands of the W^estcrn Pacific. 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society. — The Wes- 
 leyan Society opened a mission in New South 
 Wales, in 1815 ; in South Australia in 1838 ; 
 and the following year they began their opera- 
 tions in Western Australia, at a place called 
 

AUSTRALIA. 
 
 166' 
 
 Perth. Fifty years ago, New South Wales 
 was a penal settlement. There were a few 
 thousand settlers, also, scattered over the coun- 
 try, engaged chiefly in rearing sheep and in 
 agricultural pursuits. The rest of the popula- 
 tion were aborigines. A few of the settlers 
 who had been Methodists in England, and had 
 gone to Australia either as farmers or as school 
 teachers, finding themselves without religious 
 services, and being surrounded by criminals 
 on the one hand, and by heathens on the other, 
 dreaded the consequences to themselves and 
 their children; and in the year 1812 one of 
 these settlers addressed a letter to the Mis- 
 sionary Committee imploring help. The state 
 of society was frightful in the extreme. The 
 most debasing crimes were openly perpetrated ; 
 and when any one remonstrated, the reply was, 
 " It is the custom of the country ! " The writer 
 of the letter alluded to, pleads most earnestly, 
 for himself, and in behalf of the little com- 
 pany associated with him, and also for the 
 aborigines ; and intimates that light might 
 yet break forth from that place to the thous- 
 ands of isles by which Australia is surrounded. 
 Such was the foundation of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sions to Australia. What finite mind can 
 grasp the results of those labors which were 
 then so earnestly invited ! A day is coming 
 fvhen the great Southern Commonwealth, 
 Duilt up by Gold, and Commerce, and Agri- 
 culture, and Manufactures, may stand almost 
 peerless among the nations of the earth, repos- 
 ing upon freedom and evangelical faith, and 
 looking back with meek adoration upon the 
 humility of her origin ! 
 
 The first class meeting ever held in Austra- 
 lia was on the evening of March 6, 1812 ; and 
 by July, a division of that little band had 
 formed three such small companies, united to 
 pray and exhort one another to " work out 
 their own salvation," two at Sydney, and one 
 at Windsor. " We have here," says the writer 
 of the letter, " in society, the following persons: 
 in Sydney, Mr. John H., who leads a class in 
 his own house, consisting of Mrs. H., Mrs. B,, 
 and Mrs. T., and three of the senior girls in the 
 school. Mr. B. has also a class in his house, on 
 a Friday evening, consisting of Mr. H., J. F., 
 T. J., and a soldier or two of the 75th Regi- 
 ment. Our meetings are generally very com- 
 fortable and profitable. At Windsor we have 
 a class under the care of Mr. E., consisting of 
 six. Mr, E. is a pious, sensible young man, 
 sent here from Ireland, where he was converted 
 while under sentence of death for forgery. He 
 was bred to the bar. Being of an humble, af- 
 fectionate disposition, and zealous in the cause 
 of God, I doubt not, (especially could his re- 
 proach be wiped away,) he would make a useful 
 man among us. He hte been employed for some 
 months past in teaching school, and he goes 
 some miles into the country on the Sunday, 
 where he reads the Church Liturgy, and ex- 
 pounds, or preaches, to the settlers, several of 
 
 whom are thankful for his labors." Such was 
 the first class, and such was the first preacher 
 of Methodism in Australia ! This little band 
 of 20 Christians assembled at Windsor, on the 
 3rd of April, to hold their first Love Feast. 
 They enjoyed a season of great blessing, and 
 at the close of the service, they resolved them- 
 selves into a Committee of Consultation, to 
 see what could be done to obtain the ordinances 
 of the Gospel for themselves, and the blessings 
 of an itinerant ministry for Australia. They 
 appointed one of their number to address the 
 Missionary Committee in London, on their be- 
 half, and to plead for the sake of the perishing 
 thousands of settlers, convicts, and savages 
 around them, to send them a missionary ; at 
 the same time engaging to meet his support. 
 The communication bears date July 20, 1812. 
 
 And thus originated that action, which, un- 
 der the blessing of God, has resulted, (1st) In 
 the establishment of one of the largest of the 
 British Colonial Churches, having had an inde- 
 pendent Conference, and nearly 100,000 persons 
 under its pastoral care ; which (2d) has also 
 rescued from sin and a sinner's doom, hundreds 
 of those whose crimes had driven them from 
 their native land ; for the Missionaries have 
 sought out the unhappy, branded exiles ; and 
 in many a delightful instance have those 
 " banished ones," in " the land of their captivi- 
 ty," repented beneath the influence of Chris- 
 tian admonition, and found mercy at the hand 
 of God ; and the morning of eternity alone 
 will tell how many of those children of crime 
 and punishment shall be welcomed in Heaven, 
 by the parents and friends, who in shame and 
 despair had seldom dared to mention their 
 names on earth ; and, (3) such was the agency 
 from which originated the Australian and 
 Polynesian Wesleyan Missions, to the abori- 
 ginies of the southern hemisphere, and which 
 this day yields (including members, scholars, 
 and regular hearers,) a result of more than 
 25,000 christianized heathens, to the pastoral 
 care of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 " What hath God wrought !" To Him alone 
 be all the glory ! 
 
 In answer to their request, the Missionary 
 Committee sought out a suitable man, in the 
 person of Mr. Leigh, who arrived at Australia 
 in August, 1815. He was joyfully received, 
 and was favored with great and increasing 
 prosperity. Soon three chapels were erected, 
 at Sydney, Winsdor 35 miles, and Castlereagh, 
 50 miles from Sydney, and four Sundaj^-schools 
 were commenced, a circuit was formed, em- 
 bracing 15 preaching stations, extending over 
 150 miles of the colony. Mr. Lawry was sent 
 to help Mr, Leigh, in the following year. The 
 Committee say in the report, " As many of the 
 aboriginal natives of the country are occa- 
 sionally met with by Mr. Leigh on his excur- 
 sions, it is hoped that, on the arrival of Mr. 
 Lawry, not only will the calls of the settlers 
 for religious help be met, but something eftec- 
 
166 
 
 AUSTRALIA. 
 
 taal be done by the brethren for the civiliza- 
 tion and Christian instruction of the natives 
 themselves, Mr. Lawry was encouraged by 
 the Committee to make the attempt, and to 
 consider this one of the objects of his mission." 
 In 1817, the missionaries had the pleasure of 
 entertaining eight missionary brethren, (among 
 whom was that devoted man who twenty-two 
 years afterwards became " The Martyr of Er- 
 romanga,") sent out by the London Missionary 
 Society, to what was then called, Otaheite. 
 During their visit to the Wesleyan mission 
 stations in Australia, they zealously engaged in 
 preaching the Gospel, and conducted them- 
 selves toward the Missionaries, and the work 
 in which they were employed, in such a manner 
 as to leave behind them " a sweet savor of 
 Christ." 
 
 The Rev. Walter Lawry arrived in Sydney, 
 May 1, 1818, and was joyfully met by Mr. 
 Leigh. The population of the colony was 
 then about 20,000, of whom not one in five 
 had any opportunity of attending public wor- 
 ship ; and in some districts the runaway con- 
 victs, who prowled around the homes of the 
 settlers, made it dangerous to leave their resi- 
 dences to go any distance to the house of God, 
 even had there been places of worship provided. 
 The itinerancy, therefore, was the only mode 
 of searching out these destitute people. There 
 were at this time only four chaplains in all 
 the colony ; and it is due to truth and charity 
 to state that these clerical gentlemen welcomed 
 the Methodist itinerants to their adopted coun- 
 try with hearty good will, and showed them- 
 selves ready on all occasions to assist them. 
 The missionaries had gi-eat trials to pass 
 through. The roads were few, the rides long, 
 and the lodgings often very indifferent. Fre- 
 quently had they to lie on boards or on the 
 ground, with their saddle-bags for a pillow, 
 their only covering being their top-coat. But 
 the cause of God was triumphing, and this 
 reconciled them to every privation. In such 
 circumstances and with such encouragement, 
 
 " Labor was rest, and pain was sweet." 
 
 The cause of God gained strength. Chapels 
 were erected, churches and congregations gath- 
 ered, and missionaries multiplied to meet the 
 growing necessities of this great work. But 
 here we must leave the delightful record of 
 prosperity, as the great object of this publica- 
 tion is to trace the rise and progress of the 
 Christian religion among the heathen. 
 
 The providence of God overruled the mis- 
 sions in Australia so as to accomplish this 
 gi'cat end ; for while the Gospel was gaining 
 its triumphs among the Anglo-Saxon settlers 
 and the convicts, and thus turning a colony 
 which was once literally "• a den of thieves," 
 into a peaceful Christian community, the at- 
 tention of these renewed and enlightened peo- 
 ple was turned in pity toward the degraded 
 aborigines around them, as well as to those 
 
 heathen in the isles of the South Seas, with 
 which they now began to have commercial 
 relations. Accordingly in 1820, a fom-th mis- 
 sionary was appointed for New South Wales, 
 whose labors were to be devoted exclusively 
 to the aboriginal population, and whose civil- 
 ization and moral improvement were then 
 considered by many to be utterly hopeless 
 An institution for the children of the aborigi 
 nal natives had been established at Paramatta, 
 under the Governor's auspices ; allotments of 
 ground for cultivation were made ; and an 
 annual general friendly meeting was estab- 
 lished by proclamation. This meeting was 
 well attended by most of the tribes in the col- 
 ony. They were kindly treated, and good im- 
 pressions were made upon their minds ; but it 
 was found that unless Christian missionaries 
 were obtained, to reside among them, who 
 " would have compassion on the ignorant, and 
 on them that are out of the way," and teach 
 them "the path of life," little good could 
 otherwise be accomplished. The Governor 
 nobly offered to bear the expense for two years 
 out of his private purse, and the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society supplied the man. 
 
 Mr. Walker commenced with a tribe who 
 understood English, and through whom he 
 endeavored to acquire the native language. 
 The commencement of the mission was very 
 encouraging. The fact of a missionary being 
 appointed expressly for their benefit and in- 
 struction, impressed them with surprise and 
 conciliated their regard. The only object of 
 worship to which Mr. Walker found them dis- 
 posed to pay any adoration was the Avaxing 
 moon. They were also much influenced by 
 fear of the evil spirit, and had a terror of 
 darkness. But the missionary had hard work 
 to make any impression whatever upon them. 
 Nevertheless, though they had sunk so low, 
 they so much the more needed the application 
 of that only power which could awaken the 
 torpor of their minds, and conquer their savage 
 habits. As a sample of some of the difficul- 
 ties which our missionary had to encounter 
 with his flock of wild Papoos, take the follow- 
 ing : Mr. Walker says, " They arc very idle 
 and vagrant ; and the colonists often encour- 
 age their vices. For instance, if they cut 
 wood, or do any other trifling work for them, 
 they are rewarded by the colonists with what 
 they call bidl ; sometimes this is composed of 
 a mixture of spirituous liquors, and at others 
 it is the washing of liquor puncheons. When 
 they are permitted, they take a bucket of boil- 
 ing water, put it into the puncheon, when they 
 agitate it until it has drawn out the strength 
 of the liquor. They then surround the pun- 
 cheon and drink till they are intoxicated. 
 Quarreling of course ensues. I was lately re- 
 turning from Paramatta to Sydney, having 
 visited the Native Institution, when I fell in 
 with a tribe of these revelers. Some were not 
 at all intoxicated, others were fearfully so; 
 
k 
 
 ^^^TOut both the dranken and the sober knew me. 
 ^^^H asked them to go into the woods, knowing 
 ^^^Bf the convicts met them they would be ex- 
 ^Hcited to fight, and probably to murder one 
 ^^another ; all followed me. But such a noise I 
 never heard before ; and so much wanton bar- 
 barity I never witnessed. The men would 
 take their waddies, which are made of hard 
 wood, about three feet long, and four or five 
 inches in circumference at tlie end, and strike 
 the heads of their women with such violence 
 that I expected nothing less than the death of 
 some of them, as the husbands stood up to 
 defend their wives. When one man lifted up 
 his waddy to strike another, I stepped in be- 
 tween them. I then turned round and found 
 another bleeding most profusely. Before I 
 had wiped away the blood from the head of 
 one, another would be in danger. At last I 
 declared I would not live with so quarrelsome 
 a people. This produced a clamor which made 
 the woods ring, and all vociferated, " Parson, 
 do stay," a hundred times repeated. This 
 threat of leaving them, acted like oil on the 
 angry waters. It ended the row ; and all 
 proceeded peaceably to their homes. Though 
 degraded to such an extent, yet they were not 
 willing to lose their best e&rthly friend. They 
 had become conscious of his value. Mr. Walk- 
 er employed all his strength in visiting them 
 at their temporary settlements, gaining their 
 confidence, and giving them elements of in- 
 struction. He established preaching, and class 
 and prayer meetings among them. He also 
 kept a school, where he taught the children. 
 Some fruit of his labor was given him. One 
 youth in particular, of the name of Thomas, 
 became truly converted to God, and soon learn- 
 ed to read the Bible, and began to be useful 
 in holding meetings. But he sickened and 
 died, as did also another equally pious, though 
 not so efficient as Thomas. Both of these 
 youths died well — " the first-fruits " of the Aus- 
 tralian aborigines to Christ. But here a new 
 difficulty arose. They are so superstitious that 
 they believe the place where one has died to 
 be equally fatal to themselves. They therefore 
 fled from the mission house, lest they also 
 should die. This dispersion, and the ill-health 
 of the missionary, together with the unsettled 
 habits of this tribe, and the vices they had ac- 
 quired by their intercourse with the lower 
 classes of the colonists, all proved unfriendly 
 to this enterprise, and the committee resolved 
 to try what could be done among those tribes 
 which were located in the interior and more 
 distant parts of the country, and which, by 
 their position, were more out of the reach of 
 many of those counteracting causes to which 
 allusion has been made. They therefore open- 
 ed a mission at Wellington Bay, where there 
 were six tribes, the Bathurst, the Murrylong, 
 the Nury, the Bendjanz, the Mudjee, and the 
 My awl. 
 -fimong these tribes the agents of the So- 
 
 AUSTEALIA 
 
 167 
 
 ciety labored for a time, but with small suo- 
 cess, owing chiefly to their migratory hab- 
 its, joined to their want of appreciation of 
 those means which were adopted for their 
 benefit. Had the committee been able to 
 have incurred the expense of adopting some 
 vigorous and extensive plan of localizing the 
 tribes, and thus bringing them under constant 
 and regular instruction, success, on a large 
 scale, might have been realized. But they 
 were unable to do this, and the mission to 
 these people was therefore suspended in 1828. 
 But the committee, finding themselves in a 
 better position in 1836, again renewed their 
 efforts among the Australian aborigines, and 
 three missionaries were sent out. They loca- 
 ted themselves, two at Port Philip, in South 
 Australia, and the other at Perth, on Swan 
 River, in Western Australia. These missions 
 have been blest with considerable success, and 
 have been strengthened from time to time by 
 an increase of agents. 
 
 In 1838 a mission among the aborigines 
 was commenced at a place called Buntingdale, 
 (now called Geelong) in Australia Felix, and 
 two missionaries were placed there. The gov- 
 ernment kindly donated a tract of land for the 
 use of the natives brought under Christian in- 
 struction. From that time, to the present, 
 considerable prosperity, mingled with many 
 trials, has attended their labors. The mission- 
 aries have mastered the languages of the na- 
 tives ; schools have been opened at each sta- 
 tion ; the printing-press has also been brought 
 into requisition ; and school-books, with Cat- 
 echisms and the Holy Scriptures, printed for 
 their benefit. An institution for training na- 
 tive young men for usefulness among their own 
 tribes, is in operation at Perth, in Western 
 Australia. It has now been open for about 
 eight years, and has from twenty to thirty 
 students. 
 
 Farms have been attached to each of these 
 three missions, and also sheep-raising, by which, 
 not only is a large part of the expense of the 
 missions provided for, but the tribes which have, 
 in each case, settled on the mission reserve, are 
 thereby trained to remain in a settled home, 
 where they are stimulated to industry, and en- 
 joy those comforts of life, which, in their hea- 
 then state, they never knew. At each station, 
 delightful instances of the saving power of the 
 Gospel are constantly witnessed among these 
 once degraded people, who, 30 years ago, were 
 regarded as almost, if not altogether, beyond 
 the reach of civilization or renewal. They are 
 now beginning to repay the labor and suffer- 
 ings endured on their behalf, and have been 
 thus brought into connection with that Christi- 
 anity which stands as the only barrier between 
 them and utter destruction. 
 
 The statistics of the mission to the aborigines 
 are not separated, in the following table, from 
 those which have reference to the English 
 population. 
 
168 
 
 AUSTRALIA. 
 
 MUVfOIIOg 
 
 Suipnpa} 'djqii 
 »ta«puj;tV JO ON 
 
 i 
 
 hi 
 
 H 
 
 ii.||ijjiiiii 
 
 iiil S||SS| 
 
 
 is.8" ii§i 
 
 I rH CO p © © © fH O 00 © . 
 iSSm r;J ■* ■* rH »« S • 
 
 'S'9 9 go>o©<Nio 
 
 0Q*r-l©iO t- SmWpI^'^ • 
 
 OOJ »0 00«00«rtO 
 
 © ® J. 55 «o ^ ® U5 o t- 
 
 'B3X9S 
 
 iRoq JO BJBioqag 
 -£v(i JO 4»qain>i 
 
 •«*©qp *- 
 CI 00 ^ 'IH 
 
 l§. 
 
 •siooqog 
 -/■Bq JO jaqmn]^ 
 
 IWrH .N . « • 
 
 •saxog q^oq 
 JO BJtqoqDg-V^q 
 -q«g JO jaquinjj 
 
 »->OrHMO rH©«©eO© . 
 
 t- CO 00 i-( o » «ot-t-5ioi» • 
 'i'aoeoc^M rH CO 
 
 sssig isss^s 
 
 •siooqos-q^Bq 
 -q«S JO Jaqoinx 
 
 «O00(N-*iO « 00 i-t ■^(1 r-< « « 
 
 (^«|H U9t-eOiHf-(« 
 
 'diq&i8qaiap( 
 joj t«ux no 
 
 »<NrHC<iH © ei« .eoc^ 
 
 © Oi rH kO © tfl © ( 
 
 'SJaqtneN qunxio 
 TIM JO Jaqmnjj 
 
 S?» CO © © ^ 10 00 rH ©00 ©rM < 
 WrHrHrH rH CO rH < 
 
 OUS»«© ©©00"*C<5C'l 
 
 II 
 
 •3^ 
 II 
 
 t-©®00'»l' IM O0ia«rHlft< 
 rH rH i-» (N 
 
 ©OrHUS IN © © »0 1 
 
 
 
 e^so (M .CO 
 
 §J8 
 
 •wjatrjqssy 
 
 INOIrHC^ M <N • -rHT-li 
 
 •B90«x<I-8inqoBaij 
 Joq^o JO jaqmn^ 
 
 iweoeo© t- '*t-o>©<MW 
 
 .(^^©rHrH(^^ 
 
 •siadBqo 
 JO aaquinjij 
 
 ^©Ci©© u» ^>0«frHCQ< 
 
 00©'*<« (NtJI 
 
 gig 
 
 •III! 
 
 2:5 
 
 ititi||i||lli|i'^ 
 
 ^ en dc^dfft, P « Eh a O ;S ^ O S (i< 
 te rHcirtTjIiao't^oooio'rHcqw-* 
 
 II 
 
 g 4~-§ iai^ 
 
 C U5 © t-^06 
 
 
 
 IS?; 
 
I 
 
 AVA— BAPTIST MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 169 
 
 'It is to be lamented that the rapid in- 
 flux of the Anglo-Saxon race, during the 
 past five or six years, has made serious 
 encroachment upon their little settlements, 
 and upon the means adopted for their wel- 
 fare ; and which has also left the aborigi- 
 nal missions unaugmented, in the anxiety 
 of the committee to provide ministers and 
 Christian institutions for the gold seekers and 
 others, who have of late flocked by thousands 
 to Australia. But it is to be hoped that when 
 " the gold fever " is over, and society settles 
 down into calmness, and begins its efforts to 
 improve the country of their adoption, the 
 Anglo-Saxon Christians of Australia, which 
 are now being counted by tens of thousands, 
 will remember in mercy those aborigines in 
 whose country they have found a home of 
 comfort and of wealth. It was worthy the 
 wisdom of Him " who worketh all things after 
 the counsel of his own will," to convert " the 
 hid treasures" of Australia into a lure by 
 which should be drawn to that far-off land, a 
 Protestant population, whose evangelical zeal, 
 at some future day, will convert the millions 
 in the Isles of Malaysia and Polynesia, to the 
 faith of Christ. Already are the Wesleyans 
 of Australia moving in this great enterprise. 
 They have guaranteed soon to sustain all their 
 ministers, now nearly sixty in number ; they 
 have also received from the parent body a 
 separate and independent ecclesiastical organi- 
 zation ; and they have adopted the missions to 
 the Papoos, and those in Polynesia, as their 
 own special responsibility, to God and to his 
 Church. And in future years it will be grate- 
 fully remembered, that the same year which 
 witnessed their organization as an independent 
 church, also witnessed the establishment of 
 their Missionary Society for the heathen of 
 Australasia. — Wesleyan Missimiary Notices and 
 ^Annual Reports, and The Arminian Magazine. 
 — Eev. W. Butler. 
 
 AVA : The capital of Burmah, situated 
 on the Irrawaddy, three hundred and fifty miles 
 from its mouth. It has been at different pe- 
 riods a station of the American Baptist mis- 
 sion in Burmah. 
 
 AYARUA : A station of the Loudon 
 Missionary Society on the island of Earoton- 
 ga, one of the Hervey Islands. 
 
 AW A YE : A station of the Southern 
 Baptist Convention, in Yoruba, West Africa, 
 do miles north of Abbeokuta. 
 
 BAD AGE Y : A town and port in West 
 Africa on the Gold Coast, in the Bight of 
 Benin, 50 miles N. N. E. of Whydah, at 
 first the coast station of the mission of the 
 Church Missionary Society to the Yorubas. 
 But, in consequence of the wars of the native 
 tribes, the town was subsequently reduced in 
 importance and in the number of its inhabit- 
 ants, and the station was transferred to Lagos. 
 The Wesleyans also have a station there. 
 
 BADDAGAME : A station of the Church 
 
 Missionary Societv in Ceylon, 10 miles north 
 of Point de Galle" 
 
 BAD RIVEE : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Ojibwa Indians, near 
 Lake Superior. 
 
 BAGDAD : A large city on the Tigris, 
 the metropolis of an extensive pashalic which 
 bears its name. The Jewish population is 
 6,000, and the whole trade of the town is in 
 their hands. It is a station of the London 
 Jews' Society, whose missionaries have been 
 visited by crowds of Jews, eager for instruc- 
 tion. 
 
 BAHAMAS : See West Indies. 
 
 BAHAEUTSE : Station of the London 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, about 25 
 miles from Touns ; inhabited by a numerous 
 tribe of the Baharutse, who were, some time 
 ago, driven from their own country, which was 
 a considerable distance to the north. 
 
 BAPTIST MISSIONAEY SOCIETY, 
 (ENGLISH :) The origin of this Society is 
 traced to the workings of the mind of Eev. 
 William Carey, which had been intensely di- 
 rected to the conversion of the heathen for 
 nine or ten years previous. He was at this 
 time pastor of a small Baptist church at Moul- 
 ton. He was born in obscurity, in the county 
 of Northampton, Aug. 17, 1761, made a pub- 
 lic profession of religion in 1783 ; and was or- 
 dained, 1787. Under the pressure of poverty, 
 first as a journeyman shoemaker, and after- 
 wards as a village schoolmaster, he had ac- 
 quired several languages. With the earliest 
 dawn of missionary purpose in his mind, was 
 associated the study of geography and history. 
 He addicted himself to the construction of 
 maps of the world ; in doing which, he 
 reflected much on its spiritual destitution. 
 In 1784, at a meeting of the association to 
 which he belonged, at Nottingham, it was 
 resolved to set apart an hour on the first Mon- 
 day evening of every month, " for extraordii> 
 ary prayer for the revival of religion, and for 
 the extending of Christ's kingdom in the 
 world." This was done at the suggestion of 
 the venerable Mr. Sutcliff. This concert of 
 prayer has since become almost universal in 
 the churches. At these meetings, Mr. Carey 
 was incessantly introducing and descanting 
 upon the importance and practicability of a 
 mission to the heathen, and of his own wil- 
 lingness to engage in it. But he met with 
 little sympathy. Some regarded him as in- 
 fatuated, and denounced his project as wild 
 and hopeless ; and others hesitated, amid 
 doubts and fears. On one occasion, a request 
 being made for a topic for discussion, at a 
 meeting of ministers, Mr. Carey proposed 
 " The duty of Christians to attempt the spread 
 of the Gospel among heathen nations ; " when 
 Mr. Eyland, father of Dr. Ryland, expressed 
 great surprise, and called him an enthusiast for 
 entertaining such a notion. 
 
 While laboring as a schoolmaster and 
 
170 
 
 liAl'TlST MISSION Alt V fcJUClETY. 
 
 prcnohinpr at Moulton, he wrote an essay, which 
 was afterwards published under th« title of 
 "An Inquiry into the obligation of Christians 
 to use means for the convei-sion of the heathen." 
 This appeal i)roduced a strong impression. In 
 1788, Air. Carev became pastor of a church in 
 Leicester. AVhile there, his anxiety for the 
 spread of the Gospel abroad increased, till it 
 became an habitual and irrepressible passion 
 of his soul. In 1791, at a ministers' meeting, 
 he urged forward the discussion, " whether it 
 were not practicable, and our bounden duty, to 
 attempt somewhat towards spreading the Gos- 
 pel in the heathen world." About this time, 
 two sermons were preached on the subject by 
 Mr. Sutcliff and Mr. Fuller which deepened 
 the impression. At the anniversary of the 
 association at Nottingham, in May, 1792, Mr. 
 Carey preached a sermon from Isa. 54 : 2, 3, 
 arranged under two divisions. (1) *• Expect 
 great things from God, (2) attempt great 
 Slings /or God," which produced such a pow- 
 erful impression as led the association to resolve 
 that a plan for a missionary society should be 
 presented at the fall meeting ; and on the se- 
 cond of October, the plan was adopted, the 
 society formed, and a contribution of £13 2s. 
 6fZ. made on the spot. Several meetings were 
 held soon after, and the contributions in- 
 creased. 
 
 Mr. Carey had his attention directed to the 
 South Seas ; and he proposed to go, if any so- 
 ciety would send him out, with the means of 
 support for one year. But, after the formation 
 of the society, he became acquainted with the 
 fact that a Mr. Thomas, who had been a surgeon 
 in the East Indies, and afterwards had become 
 a preacher, was collecting funds for a mission 
 in Bengal ; and sought to unite the two ob- 
 jects. And the committee, having satisfied 
 themselves as to the character of Mr. Thomas, 
 and being fully of opinion that a door was 
 opened in the East Indies for preaching the 
 Gospel to the heathen, agreed to invite him to 
 go out under the patronage of the Society, 
 agreeing to furnish him with a companion, if 
 one could be obtained. Mr. Carey was asked 
 if he was inclined to accompany him, to which 
 he answered in the affirmative. While they 
 were discussing the matter, Mr. Thomas came 
 in, and Mr. Carey rising from his seat, they 
 fell on each other's necks and wept. " From 
 Mr. Thomas' account," said Mr. Fuller, " there 
 is a gold mine in India, but it seems almost as 
 deep as the centre of the earth. "Who will 
 venture to explore it ? " "I will go down," 
 said Mr. Carey, " but remember, that yaa must 
 hold the ropes." This they solemnly engaged 
 to do. 
 
 But Mr. Carey found difficulties in his way. 
 His wife was utterly adverse to the mission, 
 and refused to accompany him. She consented, 
 however, to his taking with him their eldest son 
 Felix. 
 
 An effort was made in London, in behalf of 
 
 the object ; but it was viewctl with great dis- 
 trust, and the leading men were afraid of com- 
 mitting the denomination to the Society. Mr. 
 Thomas visited different parts of the country, 
 to awaken interest and collect funds. Mr. Carey 
 made repeated attempts to persuade his wife 
 to accompany him ; but she resolutely refused. 
 Yet, he considered his duty to God paramount, 
 and amidst the severest struggles of mind, re- 
 solved to go, intending to return for her as soon 
 as he had secured a footing for the mission. But, 
 being dissappointed of sailing at the time set, 
 in the interval before another vessel was to 
 sail, Mr. Carey visited her again, with the 
 hope that she might change her mind ; but she 
 still refused. Mr. Thomas, however, took up 
 the case of his friend, and after renewing his 
 appeals with reiterated urgency, she yielded, 
 and accompanied her husband. They em- 
 barked, June 13, 1793, and arrived at Bala- 
 sore, on the 7th of November. For the history 
 of the early trials and struggles of this mission, 
 the reader is referred to the appropriate head, 
 under the article " Hindoostan." 
 
 In 1795, the Society determined on establish- 
 ing a mission in Africa ; and two young men 
 were sent out, who reached Sierra Leone on the 
 first of December the same year. But one of 
 them was obliged to return on account of his 
 health the next year, and the other embroiled 
 himself in disputes with a principal person in 
 Sierra Leone, so that the Governor insisted on 
 his leaving the colony, and he was discharged 
 from the service of the Society. 
 
 The organization of this Society is very 
 simple, a contribution of 10s. G</., constituting 
 membership, with the right of voting at its 
 meetings. Its officers are chosen at the an- 
 nual meeting by ballot. Its affairs are con- 
 ducted by a committee of 36 ; and all honor- 
 ary and corresponding members of the com- 
 mittee, together with all ministers who are 
 members of the Society, and officers of Lon- 
 don auxiliaries, are entitled to vote at the 
 meetings of the Committee. 
 
 This Society have extended their missions to 
 the different portions of India, and haA-e them 
 now in operation, in Calcutta, Bengal, North- 
 ern India, Madras and Ceylon ; also, in the 
 West Indies : in Jamaica, Trinidad, Bahamas, 
 and Hayti ; in Africa, and in France. The 
 table at the close of this article exhibits the 
 present state of their missions, and shows the 
 success which has attended their labors. 
 
 Receipts. — The following table shows an ap- 
 proximation to the aggregate receipts of the 
 society from its organization to March 31, 
 1853, with the average annual receipts for 
 the periods specified. It is not, however, per- 
 fectly accurate, as no financial statements ap- 
 pear in the reports for the first five years ; and 
 in two other years in which they are lacking, 
 we have given the amounts of the preceding 
 and following years : 
 

 BAEAKA— BASLE MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 171 
 
 1792 to 1812, 20 years, 
 
 £54,647= 
 
 = Annual 
 
 average, £2,732 
 
 1813 " 1816, 4 " 
 
 30,646 
 
 " 
 
 " 7,661 
 
 1817 " 1820, 4 " 
 
 39,011 
 
 '< 
 
 " 9,752 
 
 1821 " 1824, 4 " 
 
 55,099 
 
 <' 
 
 " 13,774 
 
 1825 " 1828, 4 " 
 
 43,553 
 
 u 
 
 " 10,888 
 
 1829 " 1832, 4 " 
 
 56,086 
 
 tt 
 
 " 14,021 
 
 1833 " 1836, 4 " 
 
 70,317 
 
 " 
 
 " 19,079 
 
 1837 " 1840, 4 " 
 
 78,970 
 
 << 
 
 " 19,742 
 
 1841 " 1844, 4 " 
 
 106,854 
 
 «t 
 
 " 26,713 
 
 1845 " 1848, 4 " 
 
 89,317 
 
 
 22,329 
 
 1849 "1852-3 4 " 
 
 72,082 
 
 << 
 
 18,020 
 
 1854 " 
 
 24,759 
 £627,341 
 
 
 
 The receipts for tlie year ending March 31, 
 1853, were £17,225. These receipts present 
 the same general feature contained in the 
 financial reports of all missionary societies : a 
 general and steady advance in the contribu- 
 tions. The large amount for the period end- 
 ing in 1844, is explained by the fact that it 
 includes a special jubilee fund, collected for the 
 Society's 50th anniversary. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 § 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 i 
 1 
 1 
 
 Church Members. 
 
 1 
 
 60 
 .9 
 3 
 
 Is 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 a 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 § 
 
 It 
 II 
 
 < 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 & 
 
 ^ 
 & 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 India 
 
 Ceylon 
 
 4 
 2 
 4 
 
 27 
 13 
 67 
 
 33 
 2 
 7 
 1 
 1 
 
 92 
 11 
 24 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 561 
 17 
 18 
 
 1140 
 
 516 
 
 2656 
 
 90 
 57 
 99 
 
 52 
 4 
 71 
 
 38 
 
 74 
 
 197 
 
 1498 
 1020 
 4695 
 
 82 
 36 
 19 
 
 10 
 
 3 
 
 209 
 
 44 
 37 
 16 
 
 2451 
 
 1041 
 
 753 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 40 
 
 147 
 
 176 
 
 2039 
 
 West Indies 
 
 Africa 
 
 France 
 
 Totals , 
 
 10 
 
 107 
 
 44 
 
 133 
 
 596 
 
 4312 
 
 246 
 
 127 
 
 309 
 
 7213 
 
 137 
 
 222 
 
 97 
 
 4245 
 
 51 
 
 2362 
 
 BARAK A : Station of the American 
 Board in West Africa, at the mouth of the 
 Gaboon river. 
 
 BARAPUTSA : A station of the Wes- 
 leyan Missionary Society in South Africa. 
 
 BARBADOES : See West Indies. 
 
 B ARODA : The chief city of a district of 
 the same name, in India, 230 miles from Bom- 
 bay and 78 from Surat : Pop. 100,000. Near 
 the city is a bridge, over the River Yisuamitra, 
 which is remarkable as being the only one in 
 Gujerat. A station of the London Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 BARRA POINT : A station of the Wes- 
 leyan Missionary Society in West Africa, near 
 St. Mary's. 
 
 BARRIPORE : A station of the Gospel 
 Propagation Society in India, 16 miles south- 
 east of Calcutta. 
 
 BARTICA GROVE : A station of the 
 Church Missionary Society in British Guiana. 
 
 BASLE MISSIONARY SOCIETY : A 
 seminary was established at Basle, in Switzer- 
 land, in 1815, for the education of missionaries 
 to the heathen. That year, a Russian army 
 was encamped on one side of the town, and a 
 Hungarian army on the other, and a torrent 
 of bombs was opened upon the town. But the 
 Lord sent a violent east wind, which had such 
 an effect upon the fire of the enemy, that the 
 bombs were exhausted in the air before they 
 could reach the houses. In consequence of this 
 remarkable deliverance, the people of God re- 
 solved to establish a mission seminary, to train 
 up pious teachers for the heathen. The first 
 year, they had only a few rooms, and a small 
 number of scholars, their income being £50 ; 
 but in the sixth year, they were able to build 
 a missionary college, their receipts having in- 
 
 creased to £5,000. More than 40 auxiliary 
 societies had been formed, in Switzerland, Ger- 
 many, and France. This institution has since 
 sent out a large number of valuable and de- 
 voted laborers, who have been employed iu 
 different parts of the world. It has furnished 
 the Church Missionary Society many of their 
 most efficient laborers. In 1842, the institu- 
 tion had sent out 175 missionaries, and 28 
 more were pursuing their studies. 
 
 It was no part of the original plan to send 
 out missionaries to the heathen ; but in 1821, 
 a society was regularly organized, (Die Evau- 
 gelische Missionsgesellschaft zu Basel,) with the 
 design of engaging fully in the missionary 
 work. Its first representatives went forth in 
 the following year. It now has 16 mission- 
 aries in Western Africa ; 28 in India ; and 3 
 in China. It has also a mission in North 
 America. From the last report it appears 
 that the receipts of the previous year were 
 304,298 fr. The disbursements were as fol- 
 lows : — for the African mission, 71,291 fr. ; for 
 the India mission, 156,849 fr. ; for the Chinese 
 mission, 21,193 fr. ; for North America, 1,443 
 fr. ; for the Missionary Institute, 39,815 fr. ; 
 for other expenses, 22,221 fr. The payments 
 exceeded the receipts in the sum 8,514 fr. One 
 year before, the debt of the society was 55,000 fr. 
 Towards the liquidation of this amount, 26,402 
 fr. have since been paid, 12,568 fr. having been 
 received from the city of Basle for this purpose. 
 
 BASSETERRE : A station of the United 
 Brethren in St. Kitts, West Indies. 
 
 BATH : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society in Jamaica, West Indies. 
 
 BASSEIN : A district and a city in Bur- 
 mah, near the borders of Arracan, and the seat 
 of a mission of the Am. Baptist Missionary 
 
172 
 
 BASSA COVE— liKTHABAKA. 
 
 Uuion. The mission is principally for the 
 Karens. 
 
 BASSA C0YP3 : A settlement on the W. 
 coast of Africa, at the mouth of the Mechlin 
 river, a station of the Am. Baptist and Epis- 
 copal Missions in Liberia. 
 
 J3ATAVIA : A city and seaport of Java, 
 capital of the Dutch possessions in the east, 
 and of residency of same name, at the mouth 
 of the Jaccatra river, on the north coast of the 
 island. Pop. in 1842, 53,861, of whom about 
 3,000 were Europeans, the rest Chinese, Java- 
 nese, Malays, &c. 
 
 BATHURST : A village of recaptured Af- 
 ricans, in the parish of St. James, Sierra 
 Leone, "West Africa, a station of the Church 
 Missionary Society. Also a station of the 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, in Great Na-. 
 ma(jualand, South Africa. 
 
 BATnCALOA : A town and district on 
 an island three miles in cii'cumference, on the 
 east coast of Ceylon, 66 miles S. S. E. from 
 Trincomale. A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 BATTICOTTA : A station of the Am. 
 Board, in the northern part of Ceylon, about 
 6 miles north-west of Jaffnapatam, and 7 miles 
 south-west from Tillipally. It is the seat of 
 the male seminary, now in charge of Mr. 
 Hastings. 
 
 BAU : One of the Feejee Islands, about two 
 miles in circumference, most inconveniently 
 situated for every thing except defence. The 
 town is continually in ruins from fire, some 
 part of it being constantly ignited by careless 
 or malicious people. It is one of the largest 
 towns, and the metropolis of Feejee. A sta- 
 tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 BEAUFORT : A station of the United 
 Brethren, in Jamaica, West Indies* 
 
 BEECHAM-DALE : See Aotea. 
 
 BEERSHEBA : A station of the Rhenish 
 Missionary Society, in Great Namaqualand, 
 South Africa, near Bethany. 
 
 BEERSHEBA: Station of the French 
 Protestants, in South Africa, on the Caledon 
 river, 60 miles south-west of Plaatberg. 
 
 BEKA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society in Kaffraria, South Africa. 
 
 BELGAUM : A town in the province of 
 Bejapoor, India, lat. 15° 53' N., and long. 74° 
 42' E. Its climate is healthy, but all external 
 trade is stopped for six montlis in tlie year, by 
 the rains. Population in 1820, 7,654, one- 
 third Mahrattas, one-sixth Mohammedans, one- 
 eighth Jains, and one-ninth Brahmins. A 
 station of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 BELIZE : A town of 400 houses, situated 
 at the mouth of a river of the same name, in 
 Honduras Bay. A station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 BELLARY : A fortified town in the Balar 
 gaut ceded districts, India, and the head quar- 
 ters of a civil and military division ; lat. 15<^ 
 6' N., long. 70° 59' E. The town is large and 
 
 populous. Population of the district, 927,857. 
 A station of the London Missionary So(?iety. 
 
 BENARES : A large and celebrated city, 
 in the Presidency of Bengal, capital of a pro- 
 vince and district of the same name. It is sit- 
 uated on the north bank of the Ganges, 460 
 miles north-west of Calcutta. l*opulation 
 632,000. It is the most holy city of the Hin- 
 doos, the ecclesiastical metropolis of India, and 
 is resorted to by pilgrims from all quarters. 
 Benares is crowded with mendicant priests. 
 There are said to be 8,000 houses occupied by 
 Brahmins, who live upon the alms and offer- 
 ings of the pilgrims. This city is believed by 
 the Hindoos to form no part of the terrestrial 
 globe, but to rest upon the point of Siva's tri- 
 dent ; hence, they say, no earthquake can ever 
 affect it. 
 
 BERBICE : A colony in British Guiana, 
 about 70 miles east of Georgetown, in which 
 there are several stations of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 BEREA : Station of the French Protes- 
 tants in South Africa, on the Caledon river. 
 
 BERHAMPORE : A town in Bengal, sit- 
 uated on the east bank of the Cossinibazar 
 river, about six miles south from Moorshedabad. 
 Population 20,000. It became a station of 
 the London Missionary Society in 1824. 
 
 BERHAMPORE : A town in Orissa, in 
 Hindoostan, on the coast of the Bay of Bengal. 
 It is the most southern station of the General 
 Baptists in Orissa. 
 
 BERLIN MISSIONARY SOCIETY: 
 An institution was formed at Berlin, in 1800, 
 by members of the Lutheran Church, designed 
 to qualify pious young men for missionaries. 
 The number of students who had been educa- 
 ted there, amounted, in 1825, to 40. The So- 
 ciety has 14 missionaries in South Africa ; but 
 it has, in general, assisted other bodies of 
 Christians in the work of evangelizing the 
 heathen, rather than sought to establish mis- 
 sions itself. 
 
 BERLIN MISSIONARY UNION FOR 
 CHINA : This society was formed in June, 
 1850, during a visit of Dr. Giitzlaff to Berlin. 
 Dr. F. W. Krummacher was chosen President, 
 and Prof. Lachs, Secretary. The object of the 
 society is to send forth European laborers, male 
 and female, and also to support institutions for 
 the training of native preachers ; and it hopes 
 to aid in evangelizing, not only China, but 
 Thibet and the adjacent countries. 
 
 BERMUDAS : A numerous cluster of 
 small islands in the Atlantic Ocean, extending 
 about 45 miles from S. W. to N. E., and hav- 
 ing their northern point in long. 63° 28' W., 
 lat. 320 34' N. Population 9 or 10,000. The 
 AYesleyan Missionary Society have several 
 stations on these islands. (See West Indies.) 
 
 BETHANY : A station of the Berli^ 
 Missionary Society in S. Africa. 
 
 BETHABARA : A station of the Morar 
 vians in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
BIBLE SOCIETIES. 
 
 1T3 
 
 BETHEL : A station of tlie Berlin Mis- 
 sionary Society, South Africa. 
 
 BETHEL : A station of the Moravians 
 an St. Kitts, W. L 
 
 BETHELSDORP : Station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society, a settlement of Hot- 
 tentots in South Africa, 450 miles east of 
 Cape Town, and 7 miles north of Fort Fred- 
 eric. 
 
 BETHESDA: Station of the French 
 Protestants in South Africa, 73 miles N. E. 
 of Cape Town. 
 
 BETHESDA : A station of the Moravians 
 on St. Kitts, W. L 
 
 BETHULIA : Station of the French Pro- 
 testant Society in South Africa, 54 miles S. E. 
 of Philipolis. Inhabitants, 2,500, chiefly 
 Batlapis. 
 
 BETTIGHERRY : A station of the Ger- 
 man Missionary Society in India. 
 
 BETHANY : A station of the Rhenish 
 Missionary Society in Great Namaqualand, 
 South Africa. 
 
 BEULAH : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society in the Society Islands. 
 
 BEXLEY: A settlement in Western Af- 
 rica, on the Mechlin river, six miles from the 
 coast, the chief station of the American Bap- 
 tist Mission. 
 
 BEIRUT : The ancient Bcrytus. a seaport, 
 and the chief town of the Druses. Its streets 
 are narrow and irregular, and the suburbs are 
 nearly as large as the town, consisting of 
 houses interspersed with gardens planted with 
 trees, which give it a beautiful appearance. 
 The environs are laid out in plantations full of 
 fine trees, and a stream descending from Mount 
 Lebanon winds through the country to the 
 sea. The mountains enclose a fine plain filled 
 with mulberry-trees, on which is reared the 
 Quest silk in Syria. Population estimated from 
 12,000 to 20,000. Beirut is the first commer- 
 cial port of Syria, and is visited by the Turk- 
 ish and European steamers, and vessels from 
 different parts of the world. The people are 
 divided into different sects, but are principally 
 of the Arab race, and speak the Arabic lan- 
 guage. Beirut is the principal station of 
 the American Board in Syria. 
 
 BHAGALPUR : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society, in North India. 
 
 BHINGAR: In Hindoostan, two miles 
 east of Ahmednuggur, and was occupied as a 
 station by that mission in 1846. Pop. 4,000. 
 
 BIABOU: A station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society on the Island of St. Vin- 
 cent, W. I. 
 
 BIBLE SOCIETIES : Orz^m.— Until the 
 formation of the British and Foreign Bible 
 Society, in 1804, it is believed that there did 
 not exist in the world any society having for 
 its sole object the distribution of the Holy 
 Scriptures without note or comment among 
 the people generally. An association had ex- 
 isted in London for several years, having for 
 
 its object the supply of the Scriptures to the 
 soldiers and sailors. It was afterwards some- 
 what remodeled, and called the " Naval and 
 Military Bible Society," but its efforts were di- 
 rected to a single point, and were somewhat 
 limited even there. A society called the 
 " French Bible Society," was formed in 
 France, in 1792, but its operations were impe- 
 ded from various causes, and after struggling 
 along for a few years, the society disposed of 
 the Bibles on hand, settled up their accounts, 
 and dissolved in August, 1803. It is not, how- 
 ever, to be supposed that no effort had been 
 put forth to furnish a supply of Bibles for the 
 destitute generally, for the several missionary 
 societies in England and Scotland published 
 large editions of Bibles and Testaments, as well 
 as other religious books, and tracts. One 
 society alone, "The Society for Promoting 
 Christian Knowledge," formed in 1698, printed 
 the New Testament in Arabic, the whole Bible 
 in the language of the Isle of Man, and four 
 editions of it in the Welsh language, besides 
 many editions in English. The operations of 
 this society are still increasing. By the 
 efforts of these societies many copies of the 
 Scriptures were put in circulation, while as yet 
 there was no general society to supervise the 
 effort, and carry forward the work with an 
 energy and system becoming its importance. 
 The supply of an edition of the Welsh Bible, 
 for distribution in that principality, seems to 
 have been the moving spring of the establish- 
 ment of the British and Foreign Bible Society. 
 The Rev. Mr. Charles, a Welsh minister, had 
 urged that something should be done, and at 
 length, the Rev. Joseph Hughes, a dissenting 
 minister, who had traversed the ground, wrote 
 and published an essay, setting forth the im- 
 portance of the subject, the necessity of speedy 
 and vigorous action, and suggesting the forma- 
 tion of a large national institution. Thcjge 
 hints rested with weight in the minds of many 
 benevolent men, a general meeting was invited, 
 and the British and Foreign Bible Society 
 was duly organized on the 7th of March, 1804. 
 Immediately after the formation of the society 
 a correspondence was opened with many 
 friends of the Bible, in all the large cities on 
 the continent of Europe, and in other places 
 more distant, unfolding the views entertained, 
 as well as the plans proposed ; urging cooper- 
 ation either by the formation of distinct soci- 
 eties, or becoming auxiliary, and offering pecu- 
 niary aid if needed. It was not long before a 
 response came from Germany. The friends of 
 the cause at the city of Nurenberg assembled 
 and formed a Bible Society on the general 
 principles of the British and Foreign Society, 
 calling it the " Nurenberg Bible Society." In 
 about two years the seat of the society was 
 transferred to Basle, as possessing more facili- 
 ties for printing and distributing the Scrip- 
 tures. The Society is now kno^^^n as the 
 " German Bible Society." 
 
IH 
 
 BIBLE SOCIETIES. 
 
 Other places soon followetl, and in a few 
 ycai-s the pront work wius fairly under way. 
 In ten years from the formation of the British 
 and Foreipn Bible Society, and mainly through 
 their advice and cooperation, 8*2 large, inde- 
 pendent Bible societies had been formed in 
 Kurope, several having many auxiliaries of 
 their own ; five important branches had been 
 established in Asia, four of them auxiliary to 
 the British Society, viz., Calcutta, Colombo, 
 Bombay and Java, and one, viz., Astrachan, 
 auxiliary to the Russian. Two auxiliary so- 
 cieties had been formed in Africa, viz., one on 
 the isles of Mauritius and Bourbon, and the 
 other at St. Helena. One hundred and 
 twenty-nine Bible societies had been formed 
 on the American continent, exclusive of one 
 at Quebec, and one at Pictou, with the " Nova 
 Scotia Bible Society," established at Halifax, 
 with branches in all the principal towns in that 
 Province. Two auxiliaries to the British So- 
 ciety were formed in the West Indies, viz., one 
 at »famaica, of colored people, and one at An- 
 tigua. The same time that the work was thus 
 advancing in the four great quarters of the 
 globe, no less than 559 societies auxiliary to 
 the great parent society in London, had been 
 formed within the British dominions. 
 
 The following table will exhibit the names 
 of the several large independent societies on 
 the continent of Europe, and in Asia and Af- 
 rica, previous .to the formation of the Amer- 
 ican Bible Society, with the date of their sev- 
 eral organizations. j 
 
 TABLE. 
 
 DATE OF 
 XAHE. ORGANIZATION. 
 
 German Bible Societv May 10, 1804 
 
 Berlin Bible Society.' Feb. 11, 1805 
 
 Rati8bon (Catholic) Bible Society 1805 
 
 Dublin Bible Society ^afterwards aux.^ . . 1806 
 
 Hibei-nian Bible Soc. (afterwards aux.) . . 1807 
 
 Edinburgh Bible Soc. (afterwards aux.) . July 31, 1809 
 
 Hungarian Bible Society 1811 
 
 Zurich Bible Society Sept., 1812 
 
 Wirtembcrg Bible Society 1812 
 
 Finni.sh Bible Society 1812 
 
 Koninpsburgh Bible Society 1812 
 
 Chur Bible Society (Catholic) 1813 
 
 Schafiliaufien Bible Society 1813 
 
 RuBsian Bible Society with ten large aux- 
 
 iliaricfl, formed in 1813, 1814, and 1815 Jan. 23, 1813 
 
 St. Gall Bible Society July 3, 1813 
 
 Island of Gothland Bible Society Oct. 13, 1813 
 
 Gothenburg Bible Society Nov. 4, 1813 
 
 Wettera.s Bible Society 1813 
 
 Berne Bible Society 
 
 Amsterdam English Bible Society Uarch 23, 1814 
 
 Netherlands Bible Society, with 33 branch 
 
 Bocietie.? 
 
 Hanover Bible Society with an auxiliary 
 
 at Osnaburg July 25, 1814 
 
 Elberfield Bible Society with auxiliaries. . July, 1814 
 
 Prussian Bib. Soc. with many auxiliaries Aug. 2, 1814 
 
 Thuringian Bible Society Aug. 10, 1814 
 
 Saxon Bible Society Sept. 16, 1814 
 
 Lubec Bible Society Oct. 12, 1814 
 
 Hambro-Altona Bible Society 1814 
 
 Swedish Bible Society 1814 
 
 Danish Bible Society 
 
 Stras))urg Bible Society Dec. 30, 1814 
 
 Lausanne Bible Society Dec. 30, 1814 
 
 Geneva Bible Society Dec. 31, 1814 
 
 Eichslicld Bible Society March 15, 1815 
 
 DiTB OF 
 
 NAMK. ORQANI/anOR 
 
 Cleve Bible Society igjj 
 
 Bremen Bible Society ',,',[ April. 1 8H 
 
 Lund Bible Society ij<]{ 
 
 Iceland Bible Society ,,[, Julv, 181{ 
 
 Brunswick Bible Society ■' j„no ix\ 181{ 
 
 Na8.sau Hamburg Bible Society Jan. 1 ]81( 
 
 Frankfort Bible i^ociety Jan. 4 ISlf 
 
 New Wied and Wied Runckel Bible Soc, Jan! 8,' 1816 
 
 ASIA. 
 
 Calcutta ^auxiliary) Bible Society igll 
 
 Colombo (auxQiary; Bible Society 1 812 
 
 Bombay (auxiliary) Bible Society iglJ 
 
 Java (auxiliary) Bible Society June 4, 1814 
 
 Astrachan (auxiliary) Bible Society 1816 
 
 AHtlCA. 
 
 Mauritius and Bourbon j^aux.) Bible Soc. 1812 
 
 St. Helena (auxiliary) Bible Society 1814 
 
 The establishment of the American Bible 
 Society forms a grand era in the Bible opera- 
 tions on the globe. It is believed that the 
 first Bible Society in the United States, was 
 the Philadelphia Bible Society, which was 
 formed in the year 1808, but not very long 
 after this Bible societies were also formed 
 in Connecticut, Massachusetts, Maine, New 
 Hampshire, New York, New Jersey, Virginia, 
 and other southern states, while the active sx- 
 ertions of Messrs. Mills and Schcrmerhorn, who 
 performed a missionary four to the south-west 
 and west, in 1814, aided by the Philadelphia, 
 Connecticut, and New York Bible Societies, 
 were instrumental in arousing the churches, 
 and procuring ultimately, the establishment of 
 Bible societies in Ohio, Kentucky, Tennessee, 
 Mississippi, and Louisiana, comprehending 
 both state and county societies, so that on the 
 establishment of the American Bible Society, 
 in 1816, there existed more than fifty Bible 
 Societies in the United States in active opera- 
 tion, forty-three of which became at once aiuc- 
 iliary to the National Institution. 
 
 ■ The subject of forming a national society, 
 had been agitated from year to year, among 
 friends of the Bible cause in various parts of 
 the country, but nothing definite had been 
 efiected, until the year 1815, when a plan was 
 sketched by the New Jersey Bible Society, 
 and sent out to the sister societies for concur- 
 rence. This plan met with very general favor, 
 and not long after, the managers of the New- 
 York Bible Society expressed their views in a 
 series of resolutions, approving of the plan, and 
 concluding by requesting the Hon. Eiias Bou- 
 dinot, then President of the New Jersey Bible 
 Society, to invite a general meeting to be held 
 in the city of New York on the second Wed- 
 nesday in May, 1816. This was done, and the 
 meeting was held accordingly, and 61 dele- 
 gates, from ten different states in the Union, 
 appeared with credentials from between 30 
 and 40 different local societies; the subjects 
 involved were all carefully examined, and on 
 the second day of meeting, viz. Thursday, May 
 11th, 1816, a constitution was adopted, and 
 "The American Bible Society" was duly 
 organized. 
 
 From that time to the present, the American 
 
BIBLE SOCIETIES. 
 
 175 
 
 Bible Society has gone steadily onward, en- 
 larging its operations from year to year until 
 its influence has been felt to some extent by 
 almost every nation under heaven. Every 
 State and Territory in the Union has cooperated 
 in the good work, either directly or through 
 societies auxiliary to the national institution, 
 of which, up to May, 1853, there were 1457, 
 with 2500 branches, scattered throughout the 
 United States. For about twenty years, most 
 if not all of the evangelical denominations co- 
 operated harmoniously in the operations of 
 the American Bible Society. At length, in 
 1835, a disagreement arose between the Bap- 
 tist denomination and the Managers of the 
 American Bible Society, in relation to the 
 principles on which new versions should be 
 made in foreign languages; and in conse- 
 quence of the action of the latter, in adopting 
 a resolution to the etfect that they " feel at 
 liberty to encourage only such versions as 
 conform in the principles of their translation 
 to the common English version, at least so 
 far as that all the religious denominations, 
 represented in this Society, can consistently 
 use and circulate said versions in their several 
 schools and communities," the principal part 
 of the Baptist denomination in the United 
 States withdrew from the Am. B. S., and in 
 1837, they formed the American and Foreign 
 Bible Society; a provisional organization, 
 under the same name, having been formed in 
 Kew York the year before. This Society now 
 has about 350 auxiliaries. But a portion of 
 those who left the American Bible Society, on 
 this occasion, were desirous of making an en- 
 tire revision of the English version. This pro- 
 duced a division in the American and Foreign 
 Bible Society, which led to the formation of 
 the Am.erican Bible Union in 1850. 
 
 We have sketched the history of the British 
 and Foreign Bible Society on the foregoing 
 pages, from its formation in 1804 to the form- 
 ation of the American Society in 1816. Its 
 progress for the thirty-seven years which have 
 transpired since that time has been, in a most 
 emphatic sense, upward and onward. From a 
 handful of men at the beginning, not more 
 than could sit around a table, it has become a 
 Samson in strength, stretching its giant arms, 
 laden with blessings, to the utmost limits of 
 the world. The Bible Societies in continental 
 Europe, as well as in Asia and Africa, have 
 experienced many changes in the last thirty- 
 seven years. Some which were then formed 
 have ceased to exist, and many others have 
 been organized, and at the present time Bible 
 societies are found in successful operation in 
 every European nation, as well as in many im- 
 portant places in Asia, on the African coast, 
 and in many isles of the sea. It might be 
 difficult to name them all, were we to attempt 
 the task, but we are safe in the assertion that 
 as many as one hundred independent societies 
 are now in operation, exclusive of many hun- 
 
 dreds of auxiliaries and branches which are 
 clustering around them. Such is a very brief 
 sketch of the origin . and progress of Bible so- 
 cieties to the present time. We turn now to 
 trace the 
 
 Results. — ^Very great and .encouraging re- 
 sults may be stated here in very few words. 
 The British and Foreign Bible Society cele- 
 brated a jubilee on the 8th of March, 1853, on 
 entering the fiftieth year of their existence, 
 and then reported that the society had issued 
 Bibles and Testaments to the number of 25,- 
 402,309 copies, and had expended in that work 
 four millions of pounds sterling, about twenty 
 millions of dollars. The number of languages 
 and dialects in which it had printed and 
 circulated the Scriptures was 148. The num- 
 ber of its auxiliaries direct, was 4,257. 
 
 The American Bible Society, from its insti- 
 tution, in 1816, up to May 1, 1853, a p'eriod 
 of thirty-seven years, has put into circulation, 
 9,088,352 copies of the Scriptures, in many dif- 
 ferent languages, raising from various sources 
 about four and a half millions of dollars, at 
 least $400,000 of which has been expended to 
 aid in furnishing the Scriptures for distribution 
 among the heathen. 
 
 In addition to what has been accomplished 
 by these two great national institutions, with 
 their host of auxiliaries, the Bible societies in 
 continental Europe, in Asia, and in Africa, 
 have published and circulated some five or six 
 millions of copies of the Holy Scriptures, in 
 the various languages spoken there ; while the 
 American and Foreign Bible Society, during 
 the sixteen years of its existence, has put into 
 circulation more than half a million of copies 
 of the Scriptures, in 35 different languages, 
 and as many more in English, and expended 
 more than half a million of dollars, nearly 
 265,000 of which was expended in the foreign 
 work. The aggregate of all these operations 
 is the publication and circulation of nearly 
 50,000,000 copies of the Holy Scriptures, in 
 almost all the languages spoken upon eartli, 
 and the expenditure in this important work of 
 at least thirty millions of dollars. Such arc 
 the great results of the operations of Bible 
 societies in the last fifty years. These results 
 encourage the hope that the time promised is 
 at hand, when the gospel shall blossom and 
 bud, and fill the face of the world with fruit. 
 For the details of this subject, the reader is 
 referred to the Annual Reports of the Brit, and 
 Foreign Bib. Soc. ; Owen's History of the first 
 ten years of tliat society ; the Annual Reports of 
 the Am. Bib. Soc. ; and the Annual Reports of 
 the Am. and For. Bib. Soc. ; and also to Strick- 
 land's History of the Am. Bib. Soc, published in 
 1849. — Rev. J. Greenleaf. 
 
 The following table embodies much valuable 
 information, showing the progressive advance- 
 ment of the Bible cause in this country for 
 the last 22 years ; and the proportion of do- 
 mestic and foreign appropriations : 
 
176 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 BBCBZFTS 
 
 OP THK AMKRICAN BIBLE SOCIETY AS THE RESULT OF DONATIONS, AND THE 
 Al'rROPRIATIGNS MADE OP TUE SAME. 
 
 Yew. 
 
 Receipts. 
 
 Period*. 
 
 Donations 
 for For. Dis. 
 
 Appropriated 
 for For. Uses. 
 
 reriods. 
 
 For Home Uses. 
 
 1832, . . 
 
 1833, . . 
 
 1834, . . 
 
 1835, . . 
 
 1836, . . 
 
 1837, . . 
 
 1838, . . 
 
 1839, . . 
 
 1840, . . 
 
 1841, . . 
 
 1842, . . 
 
 1843, . . 
 
 1844, . . 
 
 1845, . . 
 
 1846, . . 
 
 1847, . . 
 
 1848, .' . 
 
 1849, . . 
 
 1850, . . 
 
 1851, . . 
 
 1852, 
 
 $47,564 
 46,091 
 54,570 
 62,868 
 
 58,781 
 35,728 
 44,365 
 53,285 
 
 211,093 
 192,159 
 249,644 
 314,571 
 424,168 
 
 13,789 
 6,589 
 3,631 
 5,840 
 
 6,418 
 2,686 
 3,843 
 2,419 
 
 1,247 
 
 1,091 
 
 1,526 
 
 965 
 
 1,938 
 
 10,762 
 
 1,483 
 
 631 
 15,300 
 17,000 
 35,500 
 
 68,431 
 85,091 
 73,480 
 57,237 
 
 47,788 
 
 142,662 
 
 107,068 
 176,164 
 257,33^1 
 376,380 
 
 39,070 
 
 6,326 
 
 20,230 
 
 19,465 
 
 48,030 
 61,840 
 74,530 
 65,244 
 
 10,549 
 30,794 
 16,619 
 15,518 
 
 67,606 
 
 68,468 
 
 104,551 
 
 73,946 
 
 23,945 
 
 13,792 
 
 1,500 
 
 18,000 
 
 94,505 
 
 91,804 
 
 117,794 
 
 120,065 
 
 9,500 
 11,188 
 17,900 
 
 9,100 
 
 
 1,391,635 
 
 332,027 
 
 1,059,609 
 
 BIMBIA : A station of the English Bap- 
 tists at Old Calabar, West Africa. 
 
 BINTENNE : A station of the Wesleyans 
 on an island on the east coast of Ceylon. 
 
 BIRKLANDS : Station of the London 
 Missionary Society, in South Africa, containing 
 a large population of Kaffres. 
 
 BLACK TOWN : The fortified and most 
 populous portion of the city of Madras, on the 
 eastern coast of Hindoostan. It was occupied 
 as a station of the Am. Board, in 1849. 
 
 BLINK WATER : A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society, on the Buffalo river, 
 in South Africa. 
 
 BLUEFIELDS : A station of the Gospel 
 Propagation Society, in Jamaica, W. I. ' 
 
 BLYENDAAL : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, in Berbice. 
 
 BOMBAY : A city on the west coast of 
 India, occnpying an island of the same name, 
 8 miles in length N. to S., and 2 or 3 in 
 width. The population, as reported in 1851, 
 is 556,000. Of these, 297,000 are Hindoos, 
 speaking the Mahratta and Gujathe languages, 
 and 124,000 are Mohammedans. The rest are 
 Parsees, Jains, &c. The Mohammedans gen- 
 erally speak Hindostanee. The Parsees of 
 Bombay are about 100,000 in number, while 
 the Jains number only a few thousands. The 
 Roman Catholics are numerous. Bombay, next 
 
 to Madras, is the oldest of the British posses- 
 sions in India, and commands the whole Trade 
 of the north-west coast, and of the Persian 
 Gulf. The Am. Board commenced its mission 
 here in 1812. 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES : The 
 Bible itself is a series of inspired tracts, gath- 
 ered into a sacred volume. Wickliff was the 
 author of more than one hundred volumes 
 against Popery, besides commentaries on the 
 Scriptures, and numerous tracts, which were 
 extensively read, notwithstanding they were 
 ordered to be burned. Some of his tracts, 
 borne to Bohemia by an Oxford student in 
 1389, sowed the seeds of truth in the heart of 
 John Huss, whose writings in turn were 
 blessed to Martin Luther, who was the author 
 of 740 tracts and books, which bore no incon- 
 siderable part in the Great Reformation. The 
 Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge y^iJi^ 
 formed in England in 1701, partly " to dis- 
 perse both at home and abroad, Bibles and 
 tracts of religion." In 1750, was formed the 
 first institution of a catholic character, of 
 which there is any notice — "The Society for 
 Promoting Religious Knowledge among the 
 Poor," and its works were extensively useful. 
 In 1756, similar institutions were formed in 
 Edinburgh and Glasgow. Near the close of 
 the last century, the deluge of infidel publica- 
 
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 nr 
 
 tions, the ofispring of the French Eevolution, 
 prompted Mrs. Hannah More to prepare a 
 series of tracts, entitled " The Cheap Keposi- 
 tory Tracts," which had an immense and use- 
 ful circulation. More than 2,000,000 copies 
 were scattered abroad. The demonstration of 
 the power of a cheap, popular religious litera- 
 ture, in the success of Mrs. More's efforts, and 
 the benevolent zeal of the Eev. George Bur- 
 der, let to the formation of 
 
 The Religious Tract Society, London, in 
 1799 ; which may be regarded, perhaps, as the 
 parent of the numerous and respectable pro- 
 geny of tract societies throughout the world. 
 The object of their organization was to publish 
 and circulate evangelical truth, in simple, un- 
 sectarian forms. The committee was composed 
 of equal numbers of churchmen and dissenters ; 
 and their first address declares that its publi- 
 cations shall contain " nothing of the shibboleth 
 of sect ; nothing to recommend one denomina- 
 tion, or to throw odium on another ; nothing 
 of the acrimony of contending parties against 
 those that differ from them ; but pure good- 
 natured Christianity, in which all the followers 
 of the Lamb, who are looking for the mercy 
 of the Lord Jesus Christ unto eternal life, 
 can unite with pleasure, as in one great com- 
 mon eause. Kor should any worldly scheme 
 be interwoven with the truth, or attempted to 
 be concealed under its folds. Here should not 
 be seen the slightest vestige of any carnal end, 
 in any form or for any purpose, however lauda- 
 ble some may think it ; nothing but divine 
 truth, unmingled, unadulterated, and pure as it 
 came from heaven, fit for the whole human 
 race to imbibe." 
 
 The site occupied by the Society's edifice in 
 London is one of the most interesting in his- 
 torical association to be found in the metro- 
 polis. It adjoins St. Paul's church-yard, where 
 Wickliff met his persecutors, and Tyndale's 
 Testaments and Luther's writings were com- 
 mitted to the flames, and where martyrs suf- 
 fered for the truth. It is a befitting spot for 
 the multiplication of those gospel writings 
 which symbolize the revived power and ulti- 
 mate triumph over all error and opposition, 
 of the Gospel itself, in all lands. . 
 
 The publications of the " Religious Tract 
 Society" are about 5,000 in number, and are 
 so varied in character, style and language, as 
 tx) meet the wants of all classes. Besides a 
 valuable series of tracts and children's tracts, 
 several hundred books for the young, a rich 
 variety of standard, practical treatises, and 
 many helps to the study of the Scriptures, the 
 Society issues four or five periodicals for young 
 and old, with a wide and useful circulation. 
 Of " The Leisure Hour," about 80,000 are circu- 
 lated; of the " Sunday at Home," about45,000 ; 
 and of the " Child's Companion" about 40,000. 
 
 The total circulation of the London Soci- 
 ety's publications exceeds six hundred millions 
 of copies. Its total annual receipts are about 
 12 
 
 £70,000 or about $350,000, including £8,000 
 or £10,000 in donations. Its total receipts for 
 the first fifty years were, in donations £152,552, 
 and for sales £1,023,215 = £1,202,242, or 
 about $6,000,000. Its gratuitous issues an<? 
 grants of money, paper, engravings, &c., for 
 the foreign Christian press in fifty years, 
 amounted to £155,372, or about $750,000.^ 
 
 The fruits of these stupendous operations 
 are found in every part of the world, and many 
 have been garnered for the great day. A fact 
 of pleasing interest in the early history of thir 
 society must conclude our condensed sketch 
 Scarcely were its own foundations laid, and it^j 
 special work commenced, before its founden 
 and early managers were providentially led to 
 consider the necessity of a kindred society fa ■ 
 the circulation of the Holy Scriptures. Th< 
 secretary and committee of the Tract Society 
 became the founders of the British and For 
 eign Bible Society in 1804, and the Rev. John 
 Hughes, secretary of the former, became thr> 
 first secretary of the latter. Thus were linkec? 
 together by parental and filial ties two of tho 
 most influential and useful of the benevolen/ 
 institutions of the world. 
 
 The American Tract Society was formed 
 in New York, May 11, 1825, and has become 
 the largest institution of its class in the world 
 A brief sketch of its history befits these pages 
 Soon after the organization of the Religious 
 Tract Society, London, the Massachusetts So- 
 ciety for Promoting Christian Knowledge, com- 
 menced in 1803 the publication of tracts and 
 books. The Connecticut Tract Society, Rev. 
 Dr. Dwight, president, and Jeremiah Evarts, 
 secretary, was formed in 1807, and other kin- 
 dred institutions came into being. The tracts 
 of Hannah More found their way to Boston, 
 and reached the youthful members of a com- 
 mercial firm, by whom they w6re highly 
 prized. They caused several numbers to be 
 reprinted, and were in the habit of accompa- 
 nying the packages of goods sent from their 
 store to various parts of the country, with 
 some of these tracts. During long and useful 
 lives. Homes and Homer continued the active 
 friends of the Society which owed its origin 
 in a considerable degree to their influence. In 
 1814 the New England (afterwards the Amer- 
 ican) Tract Society, was formed at Boston^ — a 
 suggestion at a meeting of half a dozen Chris- 
 tian friends having led to the contribution of 
 sums for printing several tracts, and after a 
 few months of deliberation and experiment, to 
 the organization of a society which put in 
 circulation about 4,250,000 of publications in 
 the t€n succeeding years. Other societies, 
 catholic or denominational, were formed in va- 
 rious parts of the United States, and the total 
 circulation previous to 1825, reached about 
 10,000,000 copies. 
 
 In 1824, a correspondence commenced be- 
 tween the New York Religious Tract Society 
 and the American Tract Society at Boston, 
 
178 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 which resulted in a ])nl)lic mcotinp held in the 
 city of New York, March 11, 1825, at which 
 the plan of a national tract society was 
 adoptetl, to bo 8ubnnttx}d to the principal tract 
 societies; and a subscription for the erection 
 of a tract-house was commenced with $5,000 
 by Mr. Arthur Tappan, $3,000 by Mr. Moses 
 Allen, and $1,000 each by W. W. Chester 
 and Ilichai'd T. Haines, which were aftei-wards 
 increased to more than $25,000 by donors in 
 New York city. A convention of delep^ates 
 from various tract societies assembled in New 
 York, May 10, 1825, tlie Rev. Dr. Milnor, 
 chairman ; the constitution was approved, and, 
 on the succeeding day the organization was 
 effected, and the corner stone of the tract- 
 house laid with solemn religious services ; S. 
 V. S. Wilder, Esq., president; Rev. Wm. 
 A. Hallock, secretary; Moses Allen, Esq., 
 treasurer ; Rev. Drs. Milnor, Spring, Knox and 
 Edwards, and Rev. Messrs. Sommers and Sum- 
 merfield, Publishing Committee. It was near 
 the close of this meeting that the lamented 
 Summerfield made his last public address, in 
 which he said, " In all the anniversaries I have 
 ever attended, in Europe or America, I have 
 never been so conscious of the presence of the 
 Holy Spirit and Christian love pervading 
 every heart. Again and again I could not re- 
 frain from weeping. The very atmosphere we 
 breathe is the atmosphere of heaven ; * one 
 which angels come down to inhale, and in which 
 God himself delights to dwell." Of the insti- 
 tution so auspiciously formed, the American 
 Tract Society at Boston, became a branch, 
 transferring its stereotype plates, and render- 
 ing the most efficient cooperation to the pre- 
 sent time. Other catholic societies also be- 
 came auxiliaries of the new institution. 
 
 " The basis of union" was declared in the 
 first address of the Executive Committee to 
 the Christian public to be the following great 
 doctrines of the Gospel, in which evangelical 
 believers are agreed : " Man's native sinfulness : 
 the purity and obligation of the law of God • 
 the true and proper divinity of our Lord 
 Jesus Christ ; the necessity and reality of his 
 atonement and sacrifice; the efficiency of the 
 Holy Spirit in the work of renovation ; the 
 free and full offers of the Gospel, and the duty 
 of men to accept it ; the necessity of personal 
 holiness ; and an everlasting state of rewards 
 and punishments beyond the grave." 
 
 Besides the preparation of a series of tracts 
 and children's tracts for domestic circulation, 
 the claims of the Christian press in Pagan 
 lands were recognised from the outset, and 
 appropriations were made for this object in 
 the second and third years, as in all the subse- 
 quent years of its history. The principles gov- 
 erning foreign grants were drawn up by Jere- 
 miah Evarts, Esq., then the far-sighted Secre- 
 tary of the A. B. C. F/ M. How extensive 
 and useful this cooperation with the missionary 
 work has been, will appear hereafter. 
 
 Volume Enterprise. — In the third year, the 
 Society commenced the Volume Eutcnrrisc, by 
 stereotyping Doddridge's Rise and Progress, 
 at the expense of benevolent friends, followed 
 by Baxter's Saint's Rest, and Call to the Un- 
 converted, Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress, and 
 other practical works. The Rev. Dr. Plumer, 
 of Virginia, prompted an enterprise for sup- 
 plying the southern Atlantic States with these 
 volumes, which was extended to other states. 
 Agents were raised up who visited congrega- 
 tions in various parts of the country to pro- 
 mote the circulation of good books by the aid 
 of voluntary distributors ; and the foundations 
 were laid for the employment of the standard 
 religious press as a means of popular evangel- 
 ization. The various " Boards of Publication," 
 and the unprecedented activity of religious 
 book-publishing, may be traced, in a good de- 
 gree, to the prosperity and success of the " Vol- 
 ume Enterprise." 
 
 Systematic Distribution of Tracts. — In the 
 fourth year attention was directed to systematic 
 tract visitation, or the employment of faithful 
 personal effort for the salvation of individual 
 souls, in connection with the systematic distri- 
 bution of religious tracts. Harlan Page, then 
 the Society's depositary, enlisted his energies 
 in this work, and furnished an illustration of 
 the efficiency of the principle underlying this 
 system of doing good. Numerous auxiliary 
 societies were formed, especially in our great 
 cities and larger towns, which still persevere 
 in the tract-mission work, and are widely use- 
 ful to the neglected classes of the population. 
 The New York City Tract Society employs 26 
 missionaries, including three for German and 
 other emigrants, and one for seamen, who 
 have associated with them 1,110 visitors, and 
 distribute annually about 1,500,000 tracts. 
 The results are most cheering, as appears from 
 the following statistics for 1853 : Tracts dis- 
 tributed in English and other languages, 
 1,579,756, embracing 6,319,030 pages ; Bibles 
 and Testaments supplied to the destitute, 2,434 ; 
 volumes lent from ward libraries, 5,416 ; child- 
 ren gathered into Sabbath-schools, 2,247 ; into 
 public schools, 284 ; into Bible classes, 121 ; 
 into church, 1,602 ; temperance pledges ob- 
 tained, 562; district prayer-meetings held, 
 1,483 ; backsliders reclaimed, 32 ; persons re- 
 ported as hopefully converted, ]'73 ; converts 
 united in the evangelical churches, 154. 
 
 Colportage. — In May, 1841, the system of 
 Colportage commenced. The Volume Enter- 
 prise had not reached the destitute classes, and 
 tract visitation had been restricted mainly to 
 large cities and towns. The combination of 
 the elements of both enterprises, systematically 
 applied to the destitute, constituted the basis 
 of the new movement ; and competent agen- 
 cies for directing and superintending the labors 
 of colporteurs had been providentially trained 
 in the Volume Enterprise. The annual report 
 for 1841 presented a view of the destitutions 
 
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 179 
 
 of the country. The secretary for this depart- 
 ment, (Mr. Cook,) immediately after the anni- 
 versary at New York, addressed the annual 
 meeting of the Society at Boston, and made an 
 appeal for men and funds to begin the colpor- 
 teur enterprise ; he has been the author of 
 all the public documents and appeals relating 
 to it. From the four or five candidates who 
 presented themselves the next morning, two 
 were selected and commissioned; Mr. Asa 
 Prescott, now a pastor in Illinois, who went 
 to a destitute part of Indiana ; and Eev. P. 
 Follansbee, who labored with great acceptance 
 for four years in Kentucky, and then entered 
 on his gracious reward. They were the first 
 American colporteurs. The number increased 
 from 11 in 1841, to 508 in 1850, and 619 in 
 1854, for the whole or part of the year. 
 
 In the summer of 1842, one of the secreta- 
 ries made an official extended tour at the West, 
 and became familiar with the condition and 
 wants of the German emigrant population. 
 His representations led to the successful appli 
 cation of colportage to the various classes of 
 emigrants, Germans, French, Irish, Welsh 
 Dutch, Norwegian, and Spanish, both Protes- 
 tant and Papal. An average of about 100 
 colporteurs are employed among them; and 
 perhaps no feature of the Society's work is 
 more important and hopeful than this. Some 
 of the most cheering records of modern evan- 
 gelization may be found among the reports of 
 the German and Norwegian colporteurs. The 
 first German colporteur in this country was 
 Leger Eitty, a converted Eoman Catholic. 
 
 The plan pursued in the prosecution of col- 
 portage is as follows ; the qualifications of the 
 colporteur having been investigated and a 
 commission issued, he is supplied with the pub- 
 lications of the Society and proceeds to his 
 prescribed field, ordinarily one or two counties. 
 He goes from house to house, selling his books 
 when practicable, but supplying the families of 
 the poor and the erring gratuitously, accom- 
 panying his visits with personal religious con- 
 versation and prayer ; holding prayer-meetings, 
 deliveriug public addresses, forming. Sabbath- 
 schools, promoting temperance, and advancing 
 the kingdom of the Eedeemer in all appropri- 
 ate ways. Monthly reports of his labors are 
 made to the Superintendent of colportage, and 
 quarterly reports both to the Superinten- 
 dent and to the Committee. Superintending 
 agencies are established at important commer- 
 cial centres, with depositories, as at Eochester, 
 Philadelphia, Baltimore, Eichmond, New Or- 
 leans, Mobile, St. Louis, Cincinnati, Chicago, 
 &c., with experienced agents, having each the 
 oversight of 30, 50, or 100 colporteurs. Mi- 
 nute attention is thus given to the wants, 
 character and labors of this self-denying baud of 
 Christian men. They also have .the oversight 
 of the Society's general agents, as they tra- 
 verse their fields, and come in contact with the 
 colporteurs, and of the executive officers, who 
 
 occasionally convene them, and spend several 
 days in intercourse with them. It is much 
 due, under God, to these precautions that the 
 system has thus far worked without friction or 
 disappointment. 
 
 Among the three thousand different persons 
 enlisted in this cause, since the enterprise be- 
 gan, more than 1000 have been connected with 
 about 60 different colleges, universities and 
 theological seminaries, of about 20 different 
 denominations, engaged in a course of train- 
 ing for the gospel ministry. And besides 
 accomplishing untold good to others, their dis- 
 cipline has been of much benefit to themselves, 
 in preparing them for the practical duties of 
 pastoral life. Many who are usefully employed 
 in the sacred office in this or other lands will 
 unite in the testimony recently borne by the 
 first American colporteur : " Among all the 
 means of preparation which the Lord has 
 spent upon me, 1 look upon my colporteur lar 
 bors as holding an important, if not the most 
 important place, except the agency of the 
 Holy Spirit." 
 
 The statistics of colportage furnish an im- 
 pressive illustration of its practical efficiency 
 and usefulness. In the first 13 years of the en- 
 terprise, no less than 3,820,101 families have 
 been visited, with 1,887,225 of whom the colpor- 
 teurs had religious conversation or prayer, gen- 
 erally both. The number of religious books sold 
 to these households was 3,900,739; and the num- 
 ber granted to the destitute was 1,068,662, of 
 the pecuniary value of $178,000. The aggro- 
 gate circulation of books by the Society dur- 
 ing these thirteen years was 7,875,224. The 
 moral and religious condition of the families 
 reached by colportage may be inferred from 
 the fact that 483,135 of them habitually neg- 
 lected evangelical worship ; 541,397 were des- 
 titute of all religious books except the Bible, 
 and 235,002 had not a copy of the Holy 
 Scriptures. The number of Eoman Catholic 
 families, or other errorists, was 365,166. The 
 number of prayer-meetings held or public meet- 
 ings addressed was 100,169. These statistics 
 embrace the emigrant population, and relate 
 to all the States and Territories in the Union, 
 They are worthy of attention and study on the 
 part of Christian philanthropists. 
 
 The bearings of such a wide-spread system 
 of evangelical effort, among our unevan- 
 gelized population, cannot but be the most 
 happy, on all interests, civil, social and reli- 
 gious. As a practical demonstration of evan- 
 gelical unity ; as an illustration of the power 
 of the Christian press, and a restraint and cor- 
 rective for the ills of a corrupt literature ; as 
 a means of awakening the spirit of active 
 piety ; as an agency for exploring and reveal- 
 ing our moral wastes, and dispensing the 
 means of grace among the scattered house- 
 holds in our new settlements, as well as among 
 the neglected abodes of crowded cities •, as a 
 well-adapted agency for reaching the emigrant 
 
180 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 cla.>^rs, who crowd our shores ; as an instru 
 iiKMilaUty for imj)UJ-ting the truth in love to 
 papist.-;, 'iulidels uud others who come not to 
 the oYuugelioal sanctuary, and are not other- 
 wise blessed with saving truth ; as the hand- 
 maid of the Sabbath-School and temperance 
 and Bible and Sabbath observance enterpri- 
 ses ; as a cementing influence, in Church and 
 State ; and above all as a heaven-blessed means 
 of edifying the body of Christ, converting 
 souls and promoting the revival of God's 
 ■work among men, Colportage has demon- 
 strated its claim to the regard of those who 
 love their country, and especially of those who 
 love the Redeemer's Kingdom. 
 
 Foreign Distribution. — The enterprises of 
 the American Tract Society in foreign and 
 pagan lands, have been carried forward stear 
 dily, almost from its foundation. Limiting its 
 appropriations to the preparation and circula- 
 tion of publications accordant with its princi- 
 ples, and aiming to meet the wants of the mis- 
 sions and societies especially of American ori- 
 gin, in all parts of the world, it has come to 
 be identified with almost every plan for fur- 
 nishing the nations with a Christian literature. 
 The following schedule of the appropriations 
 in money, amounting to ^423,794, aside from 
 « the grants of publications, engravings, &c., up 
 to 1B54, will show how wide is the sphere of 
 its operations in this department. There have 
 been remitted in cash to the Sandwich Islands 
 $2.5,300 ; Java, Borneo and Malacca, $800 ; 
 China, the various missions, $49,150 ; Siam, 
 $20,300 ; Assam, $3,900 ; Burmah and Karens, 
 $32,G00 ; Northern India, $37,500 ; Calcutta, 
 $800 ; Orissa, $10,250 ; Teloogoos, $2,600 ; 
 Madras, $19,750 ; Madura. $7,750 ; Ceylon, 
 $32,300 ; Bombay, $14,198 ; Ahmcdnuggur, 
 &c., $2,901 ; xifrica, $4,200 ; Nestorians, 
 $4,500; Syria, $5,750; Turkey, $35,930; 
 Greece, $21,200; Italy, $2,800; Russia and 
 Poland $22,900 ; Sweden, $2,200 ; Denmark, 
 $1,400 ; Berlin, $2,800 ; Hamburg, $19,200 ; 
 Bremen, Barmen, Calw and Hungary, $4,550 ; 
 Basle, $1,500 ; Belgium and Holland, $2,650 ; 
 Societies in France, $23,020 ; Spain, $1,400 ; 
 Moravian missions, $3,000; Indian missions, 
 $3,144 : add grants for the blind, $1,500— to- 
 tal, $423,794. 
 
 The number of books and tracts approved 
 for distribution in foreign lands is 2,885, in- 
 cluding 282 volumes ; and the Society and the 
 institutions it aids, have issued publications in 
 one hundred and nineteen languages and dialects, 
 as follows : 
 
 Seneca, Mohawk, Delaware, Ojibwa, Otoe, 
 or Iowa, Wea, Putawatomie, Shawanoe, Kan- 
 sas, Osage, Ottawa, Abenaquis, Sioux, or 
 Dakota, Pawnee, Creek, Choctaw. Cherokee, 
 Nez Perces, Creole, or Negro-German, Negro- 
 English, English, Welsh, Irish, French, Low 
 Breton, Flemish, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, 
 Dutch, German, Romanese, Lithuanian, Bohe-| 
 raian, Hungarian or Magyar, Slavonian, Up- 1 
 
 per "Wendish, Nether Wcndish, VandaliaD, 
 Servian, Wallachian, Croatian, Danish, Nor^ 
 wegian, Icelandic, Greenlandish, Esquimaux, 
 Swedish. Polish, Judco-Polish, Finnish, Lap- 
 pish, Russ, Rival-Estonian, Dorpat-Estonian, 
 Mongolian, Lettish, Tartar-Turkish, Thibetan, 
 Bulgarian, Armenian, Armeno-Turkish, He- 
 brew, Hebrew-German, Hebrew-Spanish, Mo- 
 dern Greek, Greco-Turkish, Arabic, Syriac, 
 Nestorian, Persian, Grebo, Mpongwe, Bakali, 
 Bassa, Kaffre, Zula, Sessuto, Wanika, Kinika, 
 Timneh, Mahratta, Goojuratee, Latin, Tamul, 
 Cingalese, Teloogoo, Oriya, Bengali, Canarese, 
 Malayalim, Tulu, Ilindui, or Dev Nagare, 
 Hindoostani, or Urdu, Panjabi, or Gurmukhi, 
 Cashmire, Burman, Peguan, Salong, Sgau Ka- 
 ren, Sho Karen, Kemmee, Siamese, Assamese, 
 Tai, or Khamti, Singpho, Naga, Chinese, 
 Japanese, Malay, Bugis, Javanese, Lettinese, 
 Dyak, Hawaiian, Marquesas, Feejee. Total, 
 119. 
 
 One or two illustrations of the usefulness of 
 tract distribution abroad, from the countless 
 instances in the records of this branch of bene- 
 volence, must suffice. The Rev. Dr. Duff, the 
 eminent Scotch missionary from India, stated 
 at the last anniversary of the American Tract 
 Society, that a missionary visited the west of 
 Bengal, and found that several years before his 
 visit, a tract called the " Ten Commandments" 
 had fallen into the hands of a Hindoo devotee. 
 The devotee, had died unaffected, but the good 
 seed had come in contact with the soil of 
 honest hearts, and did a noble work. Very 
 soon one hundred souls were baptized, all the 
 fruit of that single tract. 
 
 The present amazing revolution in China, 
 threatening the existence of the Tartar dynasty 
 and the overthrow of idolatry in that vast 
 Empire, may be traced, in the wonder-working 
 Providence of God, to the influence of a 
 Chinese tract, which fell into the hands of 
 Tae-Ping-Wang, the insurgent chief, in 1834. 
 Leang-Afa, the faithful native preacher, was 
 the author of " Good Words to admonish the 
 Age," copies of which he distributed among 
 the literati during the examinations at Canton, 
 in 1833-4, suffering persecution for his zeal. 
 The head of the present movement was among 
 the literati, and gained his first knowledge of 
 the Christian scheme from the tract thus 
 placed in his hand. Ten years later " he is 
 found traveling through Kwangsi, preaching 
 the new doctrine ;" and in 1846, receiving the 
 instructions of the American missionary. As 
 the insurgent army, of which he is the leader, 
 advances in its progress toward the capital of 
 the Empire, 400 printers are employed in mul- 
 tiplying copies of the Pentateuch and the 
 Gospel of Matthew, Gutzlaff's version, so num- 
 bered as to indicate the purpose of printing 
 the sacred volume entire ; and one account re- 
 presents the forces of the chief, as " an army of 
 colporteurs," scattering publications more or 
 less pure in their religious tenets, among the 
 
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 181 
 
 provinces they traverse. They are described 
 by a missionary as follows : " These tracts 
 show a very correct knowledge of all the most 
 important points of Christian doctrine, and 
 were prepared and printed by the insurgents 
 themselves. One of them contains a summary 
 of the Ten Commandments, each command- 
 ment being accompanied by a brief explana- 
 tion and a verse of a hymn. Forms of prayer 
 are also given, one of which contains several 
 of the petitions of the Lord's Prayer. Prayer 
 is offered for the influences of the Holy Spirit 
 to change the corrupt heart, and for the inter- 
 cession of Jesus Christ as Mediator. The ob- 
 servance of the Sabbath is enjoined, as also 
 morning and evening worship, and giving of 
 thanks at meals. These precepts, it is believed, 
 are strictly observed by the whole army. 
 Theft and opium-smoking are both capital 
 offences." 
 
 Wliatever may be the issue of this remark- 
 able movement, and how much soever of super- 
 stition may be mingled in the religious ele- 
 ments of the insurrection, it is an impressive 
 illustration of the power of the Christian press, 
 and a' demonstration of the efficiency of the 
 humblest means when employed by the Pro- 
 vidence and Spirit of God for the accom- 
 plishment of vast results. 
 
 Religious Periodicals. — Besides the enter- 
 prises thus noticed, the Tract Society has be- 
 come one of the most extensive publishers of 
 Religious Periodicals in the world. In 1843 the 
 ''American Messenger," a monthly newspaper of 
 a highly evangelical, practical character, was 
 commenced, and it has advanced in circulation 
 from year to year, till it has reached the immense 
 number of 204,000 copies monthly, or about 
 two and a half million copies in a year. The 
 "AmerikaniscJier BotscJmfter," (American Mes- 
 senger in German) was issued m 1847, and has 
 gained a circulation (about 25,000 monthly) 
 greater than any religious periodical in that lan- 
 guage. " T/ie Child's Paper," a beautifully illus- 
 trated newspaper for the young, began Jan. 
 1852, and already reaches more families than 
 were supplied with juvenile papers of all classes, 
 at the time it was issued ; while most others have 
 since improved in character and in circulation. 
 The number printed monthly is not far from 
 300,000 copies, requiring the time of a power- 
 press forty-six days for each monthly issue, print- 
 ing two papers each stroke of the press. A 
 demand has arisen for the " Child's Paper" in 
 Great Britain, and several thousand copies are 
 sent monthly to Edinburgh, Scotland. Since 
 these enterprises commenced, there have been 
 printed of the American Messenger, 16,125,600 
 copies ; of the Botschafter, 1,366,000 ; and of 
 the Child's Paper, 6,611,000 ; total, 24,102,- 
 600. 
 
 Publications. — ^The publications of the soci- 
 ety printed in this country, now number about 
 2,000, including more than 400 books. Of 
 these 65 volumes and 186 tracts and children's 
 
 tracts are in the German language ; 21 books 
 and 102 tracts in the French; 13 books and 
 65 tracts in the Spanish ; 22 books and tracts 
 in the Portuguese; 16 in the Italian; 35 in 
 the Welsh ; 27 in the Dutch ; 44 in the Banish; 
 28 in the Swedish ; and 4 in the Hungarian ; 
 the remainder being in English. They em- 
 brace as rich and varied a collection of stand- 
 ard works in practical theology as exists in 
 any language. The style of printing and illus- 
 tration in which they are issued does credit to 
 American art. In cheapness they are believed 
 to be unrivaled. The circulation of some of 
 the tracts has exceeded half a million copies ; 
 and of particular volumes, 200,000 or 300,000. 
 Baxter's Call has had a circulation of 400,000 
 copies ; the Pictorial Tract Primer, 300,000 ; 
 and D'Aubigne's History of the Reformation, 
 82,000, sets of 4 or 5 volumes. The aggregato 
 circulation of tracts has been about 140,000,000, 
 and of volumes about 10,000,000, embracing 
 15,000 libraries; making a total, including 
 24,102,600 copias of periodicals, of about one 
 
 HUNDRED AND SEVENTY-FIVE MILLIONS OF PUB- 
 LICATIONS. If to this be added the publications 
 distributed in foreign lands by the society's 
 friends, estimated to average 20 pages each, 
 21,115,200 copies, it will make a grand total 
 
 of about TWO HUNDRED MILLIONS OF PUBLICA- 
 TIONS, or an average of more than one for each 
 family of the human race. 
 
 Tract House. — The Tract Society's House is 
 a spacious edifice near the City Hall, New- 
 York, about 80 feet on Nassau street, and 100 
 feet on Spruce street, and is five stories high 
 in front and six stories in the rear, with a cen- 
 tral court for light and air. It was built in, 
 1825 on the site previously occupied by a small 
 tavern or grocery, and rebuilt in 1846 to pro- 
 vide for new machinery, and to meet the in- 
 creasing necessities of the Society's business. 
 Its fifty apartments are heated throughout by 
 steam. Besides the two stores and offices now 
 rented to others, it furnishes accommodations 
 for nearly thirty printing and hydraulic press- 
 es, propelled by steam, and for neiuly 300 
 persons engaged in the executive, commercial 
 and manufacturing departments of the Soci- 
 ety's service. A debt of about $40,000 still 
 incumbers the estate of the Society. The 
 first building was the scene of the extensive 
 revivals of religion, connected with the labors 
 of Harlan Page ; and a daily prayer-meeting 
 of the employees in the Tract House, now 
 hallows all its influences for good. The meet- 
 ings of every committee are uniformly opened 
 with prayer. 
 
 Executive Officers of the American Tract So- 
 ciety. — Hon. Thomas S. Williams, President ; 
 Rev, Wm. A. Hallock, D.D., Rev. 0. Eastman 
 and Rev. R. S. Cook, Corresponding Secreta- 
 ries ; Rev. Charles G. Sommcrs, Recording 
 Secretary, 0. R. Kingsbury, Assistant Secre- 
 tary ; Moses Allen, Esq. Treasurer and Isaac 
 W. Brinckerhoff, Depositary. 
 
182 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES 
 
 THE AMERICAN TRACT SOCIETY'S RECEIPTS, ISSUES, GRANTS, ETC., DURING TWENTY-NINE YEAR& 
 
 
 
 
 
 mSTED. 
 
 cmcrnjkTKD. 
 
 GIU.VISI. 
 
 Foreign 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Grants iu 
 Cash. 
 
 DonatiuDB. 
 
 Saloa. 
 
 Total. 
 
 Pages. 
 
 Pages. 
 
 Pages. 
 
 1 
 
 $6,925 56 
 
 $3,233 22 
 
 $10,158 78 
 
 18,053,500 
 
 .3,611,500 
 
 148,000 
 
 
 215 
 
 2 
 
 8,666 96 
 
 21,843 06 
 
 *30,413 01 
 
 36,114,500 
 
 24,768,232 
 
 1,648,056 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 12,464 88 
 
 82,670 20 
 
 45,134 68 
 
 63,667,000 
 
 46,321,784 
 
 8,806,704 
 
 
 10.3 
 
 4 
 
 25,173 18 
 
 84,980 80 
 
 60,153 98 
 
 68,316,000 
 
 48,896,262 
 
 2,992,881 
 
 ""$650 
 
 92 
 
 5 
 
 11,755 65 
 
 48,454 59 
 
 60,210 24 
 
 63,429,930 
 
 62,360,444 
 
 6,086,261 
 
 300 
 
 67 
 
 6 
 
 8,784 82 
 
 34,137 77 
 
 42,922 69 
 
 68,786,000 
 
 68,622,704 
 
 4,163,800 
 
 300 
 
 73 
 
 7 
 
 24,474 78 
 
 37,430 29 
 
 61,905 07 
 
 88.647,000 
 
 ' 66,160,457 
 
 4,788,110 
 
 5,044 
 
 46 
 
 8 
 
 31,229 25 
 
 . 31,117 68 
 
 62,846 83 
 
 39,700,808 
 
 48,400,607 
 
 7,480,607 
 
 10,000 
 
 35 
 
 9 
 
 35,212 25 
 
 81,169 26 
 
 66,381 51 
 
 51,534,624 
 
 57,633,070 
 
 9,956,829 
 
 20,000 
 
 46 
 
 10 
 
 60,727 42 
 
 31,580 39 
 
 92,307 81 
 
 63,804,652 
 
 53,916,358 
 
 8,635,267 
 
 30,000 
 
 55 
 
 11 
 
 66,638 04 
 
 47,673 37 
 
 104,211 41 
 
 101,293,684 
 
 72,4iB0,229 
 
 9,839,760 
 
 +35,500 
 f36,()00 
 
 55 
 
 12 
 
 71,932 36 
 
 59,058 92 
 
 130,991 28 
 
 125,682,000 
 
 96,851,174 
 
 10,867,616 
 
 41 
 
 13 
 
 37,173 74 
 
 54.558 36 
 
 91,732 10 
 
 48,377,100 
 
 86,479,621 
 
 8,893,743 
 
 10,000 
 
 48 
 
 14 
 
 55,852 81 
 
 75,226 96 
 
 131,079 77 
 
 124,744,000 
 
 119,733,856 
 
 10,631,676 
 
 30.000 
 
 33 
 
 15 
 
 41,475 49 
 
 76,120 67 
 
 117,596 16 
 
 117,970,000 
 
 123,687,707 
 
 15,973,446 
 
 20,000 
 
 34 
 
 16 
 
 41,751 61 
 
 57,210 98 
 
 98,962 59 
 
 95,958,500 
 
 80,581,565 
 
 11,908,265 
 
 25,000 
 
 26 
 
 17 
 
 34,941 03 
 
 66,214 11 
 
 91,155 14 
 
 100,108,000 
 
 94,329,045 
 
 15,604,610 
 
 15,000 
 
 32 
 
 IS 
 
 42,433 98 
 
 49,904 13 
 
 •96,240 53 
 
 78,844,000 
 
 80,806,460 
 
 18,682,456 
 
 15,000 
 
 64 
 
 19 
 
 56,680 31 
 
 61,804 13 
 
 108,484 44 
 
 96,118,000 
 
 91,471,456 
 
 24,315,121 
 
 20,000 
 
 41 
 
 20 
 
 62,306 38 
 
 86,296 01 
 
 *152,376 78 
 
 157,018,000 
 
 152,727,229 
 
 26,749,445 
 
 6,000 
 
 68 
 
 21 
 
 71,132 16 
 
 82,784 00 
 
 153,916 16 
 
 116,173,000 
 
 123,642,593 
 
 30,705,246 
 
 15,000 
 
 73 
 
 22 
 
 67,770 88 
 
 92,360 24 
 
 160,131 12 
 
 150,013,696 
 
 153,575,624 
 
 35,926,208 
 
 10,000 
 
 48 
 
 23 
 
 105,915 15 
 
 129,744 31 
 
 235,659 46 
 
 217,499,000 
 
 211,730,285 
 
 40,948,459 
 
 11,000 
 
 68 
 
 24 
 
 94,081 43 
 
 164,218 73 
 
 258,300 16 
 
 298,264,000 
 
 234,409,300 
 
 47,890,225 
 
 14,000 
 
 145 
 
 26 
 
 105,894 80 
 
 202,371 92 
 
 308,266 72 
 
 307,636,200 
 
 280,697,500 
 
 58,138,820 
 
 15,000 
 
 73 
 
 26 
 
 109,897 76 
 
 200,720 33 
 
 310,618 09 
 
 285,914,500 
 
 269,984,615 
 
 56,638,543 
 
 20,000 
 
 78 
 
 27 
 
 116,406 41 
 
 226,343 50 
 
 342,749 91 
 
 316,518,500 
 
 283,296,568 
 
 65,164,181 
 
 20,000 
 20,000 
 
 
 28 
 
 147,374 64 
 
 237,252 21 
 
 384,626 85 
 
 287,479,500 
 
 268,902,315 
 
 72,224,841 
 
 157 
 
 L^ 
 
 156,033 48 
 
 269,126 12 
 
 415,158 60 
 
 303,851,000 
 
 315,100,857 
 
 73,224,824 
 
 20,000 
 
 TG 
 
 1 
 
 $1,700,996 71 
 
 $2,515,505 15 
 
 $4,224,191 67 
 
 3,861,416,594 
 
 3,621,076,917 
 
 682,932,900 
 
 $423,794 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 ♦ Including receipts from rents, 2d year, $13 ; 18th year, $3,902 42 ; 20th year, $3,774 39. 
 t Including grants for the blind, 11th year, $500 ; 12th year, $1,000. 
 
 The Presbyterian Board of Publication 
 was organized by the General Assembly in 
 1840. Its great design was to cooperate with 
 the Christian ministry in publishing divine 
 truth. One of the specific objects of the Board 
 is, to counteract the influence of licentious lit- 
 erature. Another is, " to furnish a thoroughly 
 sound Calvinistic literature." It does not, 
 however, attempt to furnish exclusively doc- 
 trinal works, but also such as are practical 
 and devotional. A large portion of its issues 
 arc of the latter description, and such as may 
 be read without ofifence by all evangelical 
 denominations. 
 
 Pvtblishing Department. — During the year 
 ending March 31, 1854, the Board have pub- 
 lished 16 new books, one of which is in the 
 German language. Of these books, there have 
 been printed 38,250 copies. They have also 
 added to their Catalogue 9 tracts in 12mo, 
 and 1 in 18mo, of which have been printed 
 26,000 copies. They have also printed 25,000 
 copies of the Presbyterian Family Almanac. 
 Total copies of new books and tracts, 89,250. 
 The reprints of former publications during the 
 year, amount to 506,500 copies. Total amount 
 of copies published during the year, 595,750. 
 The aggregate number of volumes published 
 by the Board, from their organization in 1840, 
 to March 31, 1853, has amounted to 2,020,450. 
 The aggregate number of tracts published dur- 
 ing the same period has amounted to 2,131,450. 
 
 The total number of volumes and tracts pub- 
 lished by the Board, from 1840, to March 31, 
 1853, has amounted to 4,151,900. 
 
 Besides this, the Board printed and circu- 
 lated, the last year, 15,000 copies of the Home 
 and Foreign Eecord, and of the Sabbath- 
 School Visitor, 41,000. 
 
 Receipts. — The receipts of the past year have 
 been, for books and tracts sold, $77,648 ; dona- 
 tions for salaries and expenses of colporteurs, 
 $15,866 ; for Sabbath-School Visitor, $6,111 ; 
 for distribution of books and tracts, $1,413 ; 
 for stereotyping certain books, $1,175. The 
 aggregate amount of sales, from the 1st of April, ' 
 1841, to April 1, 1853, is $466,573 75. The 
 aggregate receipts fo'^ colportage, from April 1, 
 
 1847, to April 1, 1853, have amounted to 
 $47,677 10. The aggregate receipts for distri- 
 bution, from April 1, 1848, to April 1, 1853, 
 have amounted to $6,085 19. Total amount 
 of receipts for colportage and distribution, 
 during the periods above mentioned, being 
 $53,762 29. The total increase of receipts from 
 all sources, the year past, amounts to $12,- 
 052 35, which is nearly 14 per cent, compared 
 with the receipts of 1844. It appears that the 
 income of the Board has been trebled in ten 
 years, and, indeed, compared with that of 
 
 1848, the year in which the colporteur enter- 
 prise commenced, the increase has been nearly 
 as great, presenting $103,544 46, instead of 
 $38,213 92, or $65,330 54 increase. 
 
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 183 
 
 The Colporteur Enterprise. — " This branch of 
 service is every year increasing in interest, and 
 opening before the Church most pleasing pros 
 pects of great and permanently beneficial re- 
 sults." The following summary will show 
 what has been done the past year : 
 
 1. Whole number of Colporteurs, 151 ; of 
 whom one was in India, six in the British Pro- 
 vinces, three in Maine, two in New Hampshire, 
 twenty-two in New York, four in New Jersey. 
 sixteen in Pennsylvania, one in Maryland, two 
 in Virginia, ticelve in North Carolina, six in 
 South Carolina, //it^m in Georgia, two in Flo- 
 rida, one in Alabama, one in Mississippi, one 
 in Louisiana, five in Texas, one in Arkansas, 
 two in Kentucky, one in Michigan, six in Ten- 
 nessee, nine in Ohio, three in Iowa, fourteen in 
 Indiana, ten in Illinois, four in Missouri, and 
 one in Wisconsin ; or 144 distributed in 25 
 States of the Union. 
 
 2. Distribution of Booh. — Sales 91,885 vol- 
 umes. Gifts, 9,581 volumes. To which add 
 28,000 volumes distributed by the Synods of 
 Pittsburgh (23,000) and Virginia (5,000), and 
 6,517 included in the report of donations ; the 
 total is 135,983 volumes. 
 
 Distribution of Tracts. — By the colporteurs, 
 871,547 pages ; by the Synods of Pittsburgh 
 (25,000) and Virginia (23,000)— -48,000, and 
 included in the report of donations 381,000 ; 
 making a total of 1,300,547 pages. 
 
 4. Families visited, 65,734 ; and 2,451 in Sy- 
 nod of Pittsburgh ; total, 68,185. 
 
 5. Presbyterian families without the Con- 
 fession of Faith, 2,340. 
 
 6. Families without any religious book ex- 
 cept the Bible, 1,603. 
 
 7. Time spent by colporteurs, 41 years and 
 a few days. 
 
 Of the practical results of this enterprise, the 
 Board say, in their report : — " By the testimo- 
 nies of clergymen of our own and other church- 
 es, as well as those of colporteurs, and by the 
 opinions of others, well qualified to judge, we are 
 satisfied that the books of this Board are exert- 
 ing a most potent and salutary influence on the 
 religious character of our nation. This is done, as 
 well by a positive effect in informing men's 
 minds and moving their hearts, as by the indi- 
 rect, but no less valuable operation of convert- 
 ing wrong tastes and moulding religious think- 
 ing to some definite shape. The historical, 
 biographical, and practical works are extend- 
 ing and deepening the impressions of a com- 
 mon Christianity and a common Protestantism, 
 and aiding other influences in fixing upon the 
 hearts of our people the great principle, that 
 the Christianity of the Bible is the strong de- 
 fence, as it is the true source, of our civil and 
 religious liberty. Of actual conversions through 
 the instrumentality of books and tracts, our 
 colporteurs relate numerous pleasing accounts." 
 
 Gratuitous Distribution. — The Board have 
 made donations of books and tracts the past 
 year, exclusive of those given away by colpor- 
 
 teurs, to the amount of $2,358, viz. : to Sab- 
 bath-schools, 2,535 volumes; to naval and 
 military stations and ships-of-war, 142 ; to 
 humane institutions, 60 ; to literary and theo- 
 logical institutions, 226 ; to ministers, 850 ; 
 to feeble churches, 1376 ; to individuals for 
 gratuitous distribution, 1328 ; total, voluraos, 
 6,517, and 381,032 pages of tracts ; 9,581 vols, 
 and 871,547 pages of tracts have been given 
 away by colporteurs. 
 
 The aggregate number of volumes given 
 away, independent of the donations made by 
 colporteurs, from 1847, when the Board com- 
 menced making donations, to 1854, is 32,285. 
 The aggregate number of pages of tracts given 
 away during the same period, is 1,467,300. 
 
 The "Methodist Book Concern," New 
 York, is the extensive and enterprising pub- 
 lishing agency of the Methodist Episcopal 
 Church, North. By a recent decision of the 
 Courts a pro rata portion of its accumulated 
 funds have been or are to be paid over to the 
 Methodist Church, South ; and the latter or- 
 ganization formed an establishment in 1854, 
 for publishing at the South. From the im- 
 perfect data available, we can only give the 
 facts of 1853-4, as follows : the number of 
 volumes of general catalogue books printed, 
 680,500 ; number of Sunday-school books, 
 1,128,000 ; number of tract books, 110,000, 
 making the issues of a single year, of larger 
 or smaller books, not far from 2,000,000. The 
 " Sunday-School Advocate," has a circulation 
 of about 115,000, semi-monthly. The " Mia^ 
 sionary Advocate" has a monthly circulation 
 of 50,000. The Christian Advocate and 
 Journal, weekly, a circulation of 33,000. llie 
 statistics of the " Concern" at Cincinnati, 0., 
 are not included, for the most part, in the 
 above. 
 
 The American Baptist Publication So- 
 ciety was formed in 1824. Its publications, 
 denominational and general, now number 450, 
 of which 208 are volumes. Of the tracts, 218 
 are in English, 15 in German and 3 in French. 
 The receipts for 1853-4 were $49,612, of 
 which $35,218 were for sales of publications. 
 The number of colporteurs employed was 62, 
 including 13 students for short periods, who 
 sold 18,866 books ; granted 609 books and 
 236,308 pages of tracts ; visited 32,690 fami- 
 lies and 3,758 vessels and canal boats ; held 
 1,081 meetings ; preached 1,558 sermons, and 
 organized 10 churches, and 7 Sunday-schools. 
 The Society has a building fund of $25,000. 
 
 Congregational Board of Publication. — 
 The Doctrinal Tract Society w^s formed in 
 1829. For about 20 years its operations were 
 confined to the publication of Doctrinal 
 Tracts, setting forth and defending the doc- 
 trinal views, which have from the beginning, 
 distinguished the leading divines among the 
 orthodox Congregationalists of New England. 
 In 1850, its constitution was revised, so as to 
 embrace the publication of books ; Kev. Sew- 
 
184 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 all Harding, was appointed Secretary and 
 General Agent ; and un act of incorporation 
 wod obtained. The obiect of the Society is 
 thu3 stated in the second article of its consti- 
 tation : 
 
 " It is the object of this Society to procure 
 oud circulate such tracts and books, as are 
 adapted to explain, prove, vindicate and illus- 
 trate the peculiar and essential doctrines of the 
 gospel, and to discriminate between genuine and 
 spurious religious affections and experience." 
 
 In their report for 1852, the Executive Com- 
 mittee say : " In pursuance of this object, the 
 Society first published a series of tracts, forty- 
 five in number, on important subjects of Chris- 
 tian doctrine and practice. More recently they 
 have given their attention to the publication 
 of books ; and they design to make this Soci- 
 ety, for the Congregational churches of our 
 land, what the Presbyterian Board of Publi- 
 cation is for the Presbyterian churches. And 
 it might be appropriately called, as it is in 
 fact, the Congregational Board of Publication. 
 "We have commenced the work of publishing 
 the writings of the most distinguished New 
 England theologians ; and we hope to be able 
 to continue this, until we have issued editions 
 of the works of that class of men, so distin- 
 guished for their theological acumen, and 
 whose writings and labors have been so highly 
 appreciated, and bo signally blessed, in the 
 formation and prosperity of our religious char- 
 acter and institutions." 
 
 IJ8T OP PRINCIPAL BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES. 
 
 American 
 
 " Boston 
 
 ** Miscellaneous 
 
 Basle, Switzerland 
 
 Prussian, Berlin 
 
 Calcutta and others, India 
 
 Evangelical Society, Brussels . . . 
 
 Jaffna, Ceylon 
 
 Italian Committee, Geneva 
 
 Lower Saxony, Hamburg 
 
 Hamburg Mission 
 
 Monthly ReL London 
 
 Paris 
 
 Stirling, Scotl'nd (Peter Drum- \ 
 
 mond) J 
 
 St. Peteruburgh, RuBsia 
 
 Stockholm, Sweden 
 
 Toulouse, France 
 
 Toronto 
 
 Copenhagen, Sweden 
 
 Rel. Tract Society, London 
 
 Soc. for Promoting Rel. Knowl. ") 
 
 England J 
 
 Meth. Epis. Tract Society 
 
 Book Concern. , 
 
 " <« " (South) 
 
 Pres. Board of Publication. . 
 
 Bap. Board of Pub 
 
 Cong. Board of Pub 
 
 Evang. Knowl. Soc. Prot. E^ii 
 
 
 1825 
 1814 
 
 1844 
 1815 
 1823 
 1839 
 1825 
 1848 
 1820 
 
 1820 
 1847 
 1830 
 1808 
 1835 
 
 1820 
 1799 
 
 1750 
 
 1853 
 
 1854 
 
 1840 
 
 1824 
 1854 
 
 TOTAL CIRCULATION. 
 
 220,000,000 
 
 * 4,217,000 
 
 * 5,783,000 
 2,000,000 
 2,000,000 
 
 25,000,000 
 2,000,000 
 8,500,000 
 1,000,000 
 7,500,000 
 1,733,475 
 2,000,000 
 
 11,604,576 
 
 10,000,000 
 
 4,396,000 
 6,000,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 600,000,000 
 
 20,000,000 
 
 f for 1853-4, 
 \ 2, 000, 000 books. 
 
 f vols. 202,945, 
 \ tracts, 2,131,450 
 
 * Previous to 1825. 
 For Sunday-School Publication Societies, see Sunday- 
 Schools. 
 
 General Inore.\se op Religious Books. — 
 The foregoing statements show the mo.st grat- 
 ifying results of the Christian press, in furnish- 
 ing to the mus.ses a truly Christian literature. 
 But vast and beyond calculation as they appear, 
 they by no means present a complete view of 
 the immense diffusion of religions truth, by 
 this instrumentality, for the last half century. 
 The improvements in the art of printing, the 
 more general diffusion of wealth, the enterprise 
 of Christian societies, and the progress of reli- 
 gion, have greatly stimulated the production 
 and circulatiou of books, and especially good 
 books. In England, a century ago^ the sales 
 of books and periodicals amounted to less than 
 $500,000 per annum. Now, they exceed $10,- 
 500,000. In 1471, Sweynheira and Pannartz, 
 printers at Rome, whose entire stock of books 
 was 12,000 volumes, tell the Pope, in a peti- 
 tion, "You will admire how and where we 
 could procure a sufficient quantity of paper, or 
 even rags, for such a number of volumes," 
 which 1,000 reams of paper would have pro- 
 duced I Isaiah Thomas, in his History of the 
 Art of Printing, says, " The paper manufac- 
 tured and used for book printing (in 1810) may 
 be calculated at about 70,000 reams, (probably 
 equal in weight and size to 30,000 reams of 
 the style now used,) a considerable part of 
 which is used for spelling and other small 
 school-books. The price, at $3 50 a ream, 
 amounts to $245,000, and it may weigh about 
 630 tons." Such was the book-trade in this 
 country less than forty years ago. In 1848. 
 the sum of $142,122 was paid for paper alone 
 by the American Bible, Tract, and Sunday- 
 school societies — $67,000 by the Tract Society 
 — an amount exceeding one-half the amount 
 paid in the whole country in 1810. Probably 
 a single private publishing house pay as much 
 as all these societies together — possibly as 
 much as all publishers in 1810. 
 
 As late as 1825, publishers of religious books 
 often resorted to subscriptions to secure them- 
 selves from loss. Such works as are now abun- 
 dant, at the lowest prices, could hardly be 
 procured at bookstores ; and bookstores were 
 few in number, and of doubtful success. An 
 examination of the files of the New York Ob- 
 server shows that the whole number of reli- 
 gious books noticed in any way in its columns 
 in 1826, was seventeen. For months together, 
 there was no advertisement of a religious book. 
 Scott's Commentary was offered for $24. In 
 1835, the "new publication" list \\2i(\. twenty- 
 four new books by the trade. At this period 
 commenced the vigorous prosecution of the 
 " volume circulation " by the American Tract 
 Society, and other institutions were stimulated 
 to effort, or brought into being. The issues 
 of the book-trade rapidly increased, and, in 
 1841, the Observer's " new publication " list 
 noticed one hundred and twenty-five religious 
 works by the trade — exclusive of all by pub- 
 lishing societies — or five times as many as in 
 
BRAHMINS. 
 
 185 
 
 1835. In 1841, colportage, or the systematic 
 circulation of good books, especially among 
 the destitute, commenced, and it has been con- 
 stantly increasing since. Other institutions 
 have greatly extended their efforts for the dis- 
 tribution of good books. But the book-trade 
 has also stretched forward its successful enter- 
 prises simultaneously ; and one hundred and 
 sixty-eight religious books issued by the trade, 
 are noticed in the Observer of 1848, or an ad- 
 vance of seven hundred per cent, on the issues 
 of 1835. Publishers now issue editions of 
 3,000 or 5,000 copies of such books, as in 1826, 
 they would have regarded it hazardous to pub- 
 lish, except by subscription. The bookselling 
 business was never so safe, lucrative, and pros- 
 perous as now. Several extensive houses are 
 engaged exclusively in the publication of reli- 
 gious books ; and it- is probable that one of 
 them issues more practical religious works an- 
 nually, than were sold by the whole corps of 
 booksellers in the United States twenty-five 
 years ago. Thus showing that the production 
 and circulation of cheap religious books by 
 benevolent societies, while it may deprive the 
 trade of a certain class of books, far more than 
 compensates for this loss by the taste which it 
 creates for solid and religious reading. 
 
 The foregoing statements respecting the 
 operations of benevolent institutions, including 
 the Christian press, show that they are the 
 right arm of the missionary enterprise, in all 
 lands. The domestic missionary who wisely 
 avails himself of the aid he may derive from 
 Sabbath-school publications, tracts, books and 
 periodicals, either as a means of edification and 
 salvation for the people of his charge, or as an 
 instrumentality for extending his influence be- 
 yond the boundaries of his congregation, may 
 multiply his power for good indefinitely. And, 
 by calling in the help of a faithful colporteur, 
 to penetrate the ' regions beyond,' and convey 
 the knowledge of Christ to the destitute and 
 erring whom he may not personally reach, the 
 leaven of the Gospel may be made to pervade 
 the masses of the people, and a demand be crea- 
 ted for pulpit ministrations, such as might not 
 exist in long years, were these auxiliary in- 
 fluences neglected or overlooked. And so of 
 the Foreign Missionary. If succeeding gener- 
 ations of missionaries are to profit by the ex- 
 perience of their predecessors, the results of 
 that experience must be committed to the 
 press. If the schools on heathen ground are 
 to be made the source of abiding good, there 
 must be a Christian literature provided for the 
 generations of readers thus trained. If the G os- 
 pel is to be proclaimed beyond the restricted 
 precincts of the several missions, and any 
 considerable portion of the existing generation 
 of heathen are to have the word of life, it must 
 be conveyed to them by the printed page. If 
 the mountains of superstition and error and 
 ignorance are to be lifted off from the heathen 
 mind, the lever of the press must be applied. 
 
 If the advances made from year to year in the, 
 acquisition of languages and in the adaptation 
 of truth to simple minds, are to be perpetuated, 
 the missionaries must employ their pens, and 
 the printing-press must embody and multiply 
 the results of missionary toil. The stupendous 
 undertaking of printing a Christian literature for 
 the world must be prosecuted with steady zeal 
 and enlarged liberality. The improvements 
 constantly making in all that relates to the 
 printing art must be potent to the missionary 
 cause ; and the religious literature of standard 
 worth in the English language must be made 
 the heritage of the reading world. The sys- 
 tems of aggressive Christian effort nv^w asso- 
 ciated with the press in America, should be- 
 come a part of the machinery of missions uni- 
 versally ; so that native piety may find active 
 employment, and the unevangelized hordes be 
 approached with adapted agencies for their 
 elevation and salvation. Way-side, fire-side 
 preaching, oral and printed, should attend and 
 complement the more formal proclamations of 
 divine truth, until the time comes when none 
 need say to his brother, " know the Lord, 
 for all shall know him from the least even 
 unto the greatest." 
 
 BOODALOOR ; A station of the Gospel 
 Propagation Society in India. 
 
 BOOTAN : A village in the district of 
 Maulmain in Burmah — an out-station of the 
 Maulmain Baptist mission. 
 
 BOEABORA : One of the Society Islands 
 and a station of the London Missionary So- 
 ciety. 
 
 BORNEO : See Indian Archipelago. 
 
 BOSJESMANS : The same as Bushmen, 
 which see. 
 
 BRAHMA: The supreme god of the 
 Hindoos. In Hindustani, the word is a neuter 
 noun, derived by grammarians from the verb 
 hrih to grow, and the suflQx man, and thus 
 means that which grows, or the Supreme Being 
 regarded under the aspect of development, and 
 revealed by the creation of worlds. The word, 
 however, is used in a secondary sense, also, 
 and means the Supreme Absolute Spirit, not 
 regarded as a creative force, but shut up in 
 himself without external manifestations of any 
 kind. 
 
 BRAHMINS : The name employed to 
 designate that body or order of priests, who 
 have always been the sole guardians, precep 
 tors and ministers of the Hindoo religion. 
 This order is of extreme antiquity, and they 
 and their followers are universally acknowl- 
 edged as a tribe sprung from the Caucasian 
 variety of the human species. Their sacred 
 books or vedas represent them as invading In- 
 dia from the north-west, through Afghanistan 
 and the Punjaub, at a very early period, when 
 they seem to have made more considerable pro- 
 gress in literature, philosophy, mathematics 
 and medicine, than their cotemporaries in 
 other regions of the world. 
 
186 
 
 BUAll.\li.S..-.M. 
 
 BRAEMINISM : Tho religion of tlie Brah- 
 mins, which is the prevailing religion of II in- 
 doostan, and professed by about 150,000,000 of 
 people, is one of the grossest impositions ever 
 made ujwn nn ignorant and degraded people, 
 by a cormpt and avaricious priesthood, bear- 
 ing, in many particulars, a striking resem- 
 blance to Popery. 
 
 lileas of God. — The Hindoos, in general, en- 
 tertain vague, incongruous, and unworthy no- 
 tions of the Deity. Some call him the invisi- 
 ble and ever blessed ; others ascribe to him a 
 form ; others suppose he exists like an incon- 
 ceivably small atom ; sometimes he is repre- 
 sented as male, and at other times, as female ; 
 sometimes both male and female, producing a 
 world by conjugal union ; sometimes the ele- 
 ments assume his place, and at other times he 
 is a deified hero. According to the Hindoo 
 theology, Brdime, the great Being, is the 
 supreme, eternal, uncreated Being. I3ramha 
 the first created being, by whom he made and 
 governs the world, is the prince of good spir- 
 its. — ^Veeshnu, or Vishnoo, is the great pre- 
 server of men. He is said to have appeared 
 on earth nine times, in so many incarnations. 
 Seeva, or Siva, is the destroyer. This three- 
 fold divinity, armed with almighty power, has 
 under him no less than 333,000,000 of inferior 
 deities. These are represented in innumerable 
 forms, by dumb idols of wood and stone. The 
 Hindoos also worship men, cows, monkeys, ti- 
 
 fers, serpents, trees, stones, rivers, and even Satan 
 imself. 
 Character of their gods. — The Hindoo gods 
 are represented as practising without restraint 
 every species of wickedness that can be im- 
 agined ; and their sacred books arc filled with 
 details of these disgusting abominations, too 
 polluting to be recited. In obscenity, nothing 
 can be compared with one of these sacred 
 books, called Bhagawata. Yet it is the de- 
 light of the Hindoos, and the first book they 
 put in the hands of their children ; as if they 
 deliberately intended to form them to dissolute 
 habits. The most frightful images are made 
 as representations of their gods. Doorga, the 
 wife of Siva or Seeva, the Destroyer, is repre- 
 sented with a frowning countenance and naked 
 breast. Her right foot treads on a lion. She 
 has four hands, in one of which she holds an 
 infant by the hair of the head, while its body 
 is pierced through with a trident she holds in 
 the second hand. The other two hands are 
 filled with weapons of destruction ; and she is 
 ornamented with a necklace of human skulls. 
 Siva, also, is represented in a most terrific 
 form, ornamented with serpents, covered with 
 the ashes of a funeral pile, alighting in cemeter- 
 ies, and accompanied by a train of ghosts and 
 goblins. In this character, human victims, or 
 the blood of beasts, is necessary to appease 
 their wrath. 
 
 Character of their Priesthood. — The Brah- 
 mins are the legal priests of Hindoostan ; and 
 
 from them it is called Brahminism. They ex- 
 alt themselves above every other ela.>^s of their 
 countrymen. They are arrogant, subtle, ava- 
 ricious, deceitful, selfish, and vicious. They 
 make great pretensions to learning and sanc- 
 tity ; while they are really ignorant and ex- 
 ceedingly dissolute and destitute of principlo. 
 Hindooism, from the foundation to the top- 
 stone, is one cold system of selfishnt^ss. Its 
 ultimate object is the aggrandizement of the 
 priesthood ; and to accomplish this, they keep 
 the people in darkness and ignorance. Their 
 sacred books are kept in a language unknown 
 and forbidden to tne people, and can be ex- 
 plained only by the Brahmins. All learning 
 is monopolized by them ; and the people are 
 discouraged from any attempts to elevate their 
 intellectual condition. In their domestic and 
 social capacity, nothing can be done without a 
 Brahmin ; and a Brahmin cannot work with- 
 out a fee or a feast. All offerings made to the 
 gods, go to these avaricious priests ; and the 
 giving of presents and distribution of money 
 to Brahmins is the most effectual way of gain- 
 ing the favor of the gods, and obtaining the 
 pardon of sin. The Brahmin is revered as a 
 god, and addressed and worshiped as a god. 
 The people fall down before him, and lick the 
 very dust of his feet. They believe that the 
 Brahmin can, by his enchantments and right- 
 eousness, control both the gods and men ; and 
 this gives him a wonderful preeminence. In 
 all things he domineers over the multitude ; 
 works on their fears ; turns every superstition 
 to his own account ; and takes every advan- 
 tage of their ignorance, superstition, and cre- 
 dulity, to enrich himself and increase his 
 power. The pride and dissimulation, and the 
 intrigue and dishonesty of a Brahmin, are 
 proverbial. 
 
 Religions Mendicants, — Monkery is a very 
 necessary appendage to every system of priest- 
 craft ; and, of course, might be expected to 
 find a place in Brahminism. The monks of 
 Brahminism, like those of Popery, are divided 
 into numerous classes ; and several of the 
 highest of these classes are only open to the 
 Brahmins. Some persons become ascetics by 
 inheritance, and in consequence, enjoy certain 
 revenues ; others become such from necessity ; 
 others, on account of their pretended sanctity 
 and abstraction from the world ; others, on 
 account of a vow, devote themselves to what 
 they call a religious life. Most of them pre- 
 tend to be religious teachers. The Hindoos 
 entertain the idea that religion is some wild 
 vagary, attainable only by priests and devo- 
 tees, but not practicable for people in common 
 life. These Religious Orders are beggars by 
 profession ; and it is esteemed meritorious to 
 give to them. They are a great scourge to the 
 country, contributing greatly not only to im- 
 poverish it, but also to corrupt and debase the 
 morals of the people. These idle and pretend- 
 ed devotees assemble sometimes in armies of 
 
BRAHMINISM. 
 
 187 
 
 ten or twelve thousand, and, under pretense of 
 making pilgrimages to certain temples, lay 
 whole countries under contribution. They ai-e 
 generally robust and stout. They wear no 
 clothes, and commit all manner of excesses. 
 These men inflict voluntary penances upon 
 themselves, of an extraordinary character. 
 They sometimes hold up one arm, in a fixed 
 position, till it becomes stiff, and remains in 
 that situation during the rest of their lives. 
 Some clench their fists very hard, and keep 
 them so till their nails grow into their palms, 
 and appear through the back of their hands. 
 Others turn their faces over their shoulders, 
 and keep them so, till they fix their heads 
 looking backwards. By such means they in- 
 crease their celebrity, and become objects of 
 greater veneration. The supposed Jwliness of 
 these men seems to sanctify, in the minds of 
 the people, all their licentiousness and abomi- 
 nations. 
 
 Character of their Worship. — From what we 
 have seen of the character of their gods, it 
 may be readily perceived what kind of wor- 
 ship would be supposed to be pleasing to them. 
 The most unbridled and disgusting licentious- 
 ness is made a part of the public worship of 
 these false gods ; and every temple has a com- 
 pany of dancing girls, who are married to the 
 fvds, and are kept for purposes of impurity, 
 n the presence of some of the most celebrated 
 idols, among which is Juggernaut, all distinc- 
 tions of sex and caste are abolished, so that 
 men may gratify their evil desires with impu- 
 :uty. 
 
 Hindoo notions of sin, — The notions of sin, 
 inculcated in the Hindoo sacred books, like 
 pvery other part of the system, are calculated 
 T/-) exalt the priesthood. Even the Brahmins, 
 their religious teachers, show the most stupid 
 deficiency in distinguishing between good and 
 evil. They call good evil, and evil good ; 
 light darkness, and darkness light. Lying is 
 good, if it result in immediate benefit ; to 
 speak the truth is evil, if it terminate in im- 
 mediate loss. Meats and drinks, divers wash- 
 ings and corporeal inflictions, make up their 
 righteousness, while sin is really but a trans- 
 gression of the laws of caste. To lie, steal, 
 cheat, deceive, commit adultery, and wallow 
 like swine in moral turpitude, is too trifling a 
 thing to be named ; it is only what their gods 
 did before them. But to eat with a man of 
 another caste, however respectable he may be, 
 or to drink out of the same cup, is a sin only 
 pardonable by a large sum of money. He who 
 breaks his word with a Brahmin, or occasions 
 him any detriment, directly or indirectly, in 
 his temporal concerns, will, according to the 
 Hindoo scriptures, be condemned, in his second 
 birth, to become a devil. He will not be per- 
 mitted to dwell on the earth or live in the air ; 
 but will be obliged to make his abode in a 
 thick forest, among the branches of a bushy 
 tree, where he shall never cease to groan by 
 
 night and day, cursing his unhappy lot, and 
 deprived of all food but toddy, mixed with the 
 slaver of a dog, which he shall drink oat of the 
 skull of a death's head. It is in this way that 
 oflenccs, imaginary or of small account, are 
 menaced with endless punishment ; while 
 adulterers, perjurers, robbers, and other real 
 offenders, are absolved by the Brahmins of 
 their actual crimes, for selfish objects, and as- 
 sured of a recompense after death. 
 
 Hindoo ideas of Atonement. — The fact that 
 all false systems of religion contain devices of 
 atonement for sin, is a strong testimony that 
 an atonement is necessary ; while the Gospel 
 of Jesus Christ alone reveals the only true and 
 rational method of reconciliation between of- 
 fending man and offended Deity. But, the 
 blind heathen, conscious of his guilt, resorts 
 to vain and foolish expedients for taking away 
 sin. Brahminism abounds in atonements. 
 Holy bathing, reading the shastras, pilgrimage, 
 fasting, giving to the Brahmins, feeding devo- 
 tees or religious beggars, building temples, with 
 the endless routine of sacrifices, penances, and 
 religious austerities, which make up a very im- 
 portant part of Hindooism, constitute their 
 atonements for sin. Some of these penances 
 are very expensive, and most of them attended 
 with great bodily mortifications ; while others 
 are disgusting, filthy, and degrading. Among 
 these are, drinking the water in which a Brah- 
 min has washed his foot, and taking atonement 
 pills, which are composed of the milks, curds, 
 clarified butter, and excrement of a cow. A 
 man in Bombay had been performing a penance 
 of a very painful character for sixteen years. 
 He sat in a miserable shed, holding on his left 
 hand a vessel of about ten pounds weight, 
 which contains the sacred shrub. His whole 
 arm was withered, and the finger nails had shot 
 out like ram's horns, five or six inches in length. 
 Another man sat in the open air, for three 
 months, during the coldest part of the year, 
 almost naked ; confining himself to a spot about 
 eight feet in diameter. Passing a rod of iron 
 through the tongue ; hanging suspended by 
 the legs from a tree, over a slow burning fire, 
 inhaling the smoke and sparks ; leaping on a 
 plank set full of sharpened plates of iron; 
 lying on a bed made of a plank set with iron 
 spikes ; looking at the meridian sun for whole 
 days in succession ; falling on the face, mark- 
 ing the place of the head, rising and falling 
 again from the marks, and repeating this, till 
 a specified distance has been measured ; swing- 
 ing through the air, suspended from a hook in- 
 serted in the back ; and other penances, too 
 numerous and too foolish to be mentioned, are 
 resorted to as expedients for taking away sin, 
 and accumulating righteousness. And their 
 sacred books prescribe even the most indecent 
 crimes, as atonements for sin. 
 
 Fate— Accountability. —The Hindoos are the 
 most cold-blooded fatalists in the world. Every 
 occurrence in life is, according to their notions, 
 
188 
 
 BRAHMINISM. 
 
 the result of dire necessity. If they arc pros- 
 perous, it is fate. If they are in distress, it is 
 fate. To lie, cheat, or steal, hfuie. To be 
 idle, dissipattnl, poor, and imprisoned, is fate. 
 The poor sufll-ror apparently feels no remorse 
 that his own sin has brought misery oii him. 
 lie only curses his hard fate. When the cri- 
 minal is detected and condemned, he seems 
 never to regard himself as suffering the just 
 iwnalty of the law ; it is all fate. The Hindoo 
 Avritings teach, that it is the Great Spirit 
 which is diffused through every form of ani- 
 mated matter ; that actions of every kind are 
 his. By this doctrine, all accountability is de- 
 stroyed, and liability to punishment rendered 
 preposterous. 
 
 JSotioiis of FiUurity. — The Hindoo scriptures 
 teach that the soul must pass, in certain 
 circumstances, into eight million four hundred 
 thousand different animal bodies, after it leaves 
 the humjin. Yet, the people are wholly in the 
 dark on the subject of futurity. They say 
 they can know nothing about it. Beyond the 
 present life, all is impenetrable darkness to the 
 Hindoos. 
 
 Different Ages of the World. — The Hindoos 
 hold that there are four ages of the world, the 
 first three of which are already past. The 
 first was the golden age, of 1,728,000 years 
 duration ; the second, the silver age of 1,296,000 
 years ; the third, the brazen age, of 864,000 
 years ; and the fourth, which is the present, 
 the iron age, of 432,000 years. They believe 
 that in the first age, men were as tall as trees, 
 and lived many thousand years : but as every 
 age became worse and worse, the people dimin- 
 ished in size, and their lives were shortened ; 
 that even the Brahmins themselves, the gods 
 of the people, have lost their holiness, and are 
 now filled with covetousness and many vices. 
 Thus they account for the prevailing vice and 
 degradation, instead of tracing it to the deprar 
 vity of their own hearts. 
 
 Caste. — There is no part of the Hindoo sys- 
 tem, which exerts such despotic sway, and so 
 effectually prevents all improvement, as caste. 
 They were originally divided into four castes 
 or tribes, viz., the Brahmins, the Ksliatriyas or 
 Ketras, the Vaisyas or Bices, and the Siulres or 
 Sooders, each of which is again subdivided into 
 a large number of branches. Every indivi- 
 dual remains invariably in the caste in which 
 he was born, practices its duties, and is debar- 
 red from ever aspiring to a higher, whatever 
 may be his merit or his genius. The members 
 of each tribe must adhere invariably to the 
 profession of their ancestors, and continue from 
 generation to generation, to pursue one uni- 
 form walk of life. In consequence of this un- 
 natural distinction of caste, all motives to ex- 
 ertion, inquiry, or improvement, are completely 
 extinguished among the Hindoos ; for the most 
 honorable actions, the most beneficial discov- 
 eries, the most virtuous conduct, secure no re- 
 spect or advantage to a person of inferior 
 
 caste. None of the high castes will eat with 
 any of the low castes. The fourth and most 
 numerous castes are the Sudres or Sooders. 
 Their business is servile labor ; and whenever 
 the original spirit of the institution has not 
 been infringed on, their degradation is inhu- 
 man. They are compelled to work for the 
 Brahmins, being considered as created solely 
 for their use. They are not allowed to collect 
 property because such a spectacle would give 
 pain to the Brahmins. To them, the Vedas, 
 or sacred books, must never be read. There 
 is also a race, of the most degraded and uni- 
 versally insulted outcasts, called Parayas. In 
 many places, their very approach is sufficient 
 to pollute a whole neighborhood. They must 
 not enter a street where the Brahmins live. 
 When they transgress, the higher classes will 
 not assault them, for it is pollution even to 
 touch them with a long pole ; but through the 
 medium of others, they often beat thc>m at 
 pleasure, and sometimes put them to dcatli, 
 without dispute or inquiry. For every species 
 of labor, there is a distinct class of men. This 
 division of labor is regulated according to 
 caste. The divisions of the former, however, 
 are so much more extensive than the nominal 
 grades of the latter, that different individuals 
 of the same caste are engaged in different oc- 
 cupations. Still, whatever be a man's capaci- 
 ties, he can never rise above the calling of his 
 father. He will perform only that kind of 
 labor to which his own subdivision of caste 
 are accustomed. One man of low caste may 
 be a dobee or washerman, and another of the 
 same caste, a coolie or carrier of burdens, and 
 a third, a palanquin bearer. But a dobee 
 would scorn to act as a coolie. Even the foot 
 pedlar will not carry his own pack of goods ; 
 nor will the Hindoo servant, who provides for 
 his master's table, bring from the market a 
 piece of meat, or a basket of vegetables. He 
 must employ a coolie. The coolie in his turn 
 can do nothing that does not come within the 
 sphere of his business. The first missionaries 
 in Southern India undertook to accommodate 
 Christianity to the prevailing prejudices of the 
 people. The Kev. Hollis Read, who has tra- 
 veled extensively among the Hindoos, regards 
 caste as one of the most exceptionable features 
 of Hindooism ; and the Bishop of Calcutta has 
 become so well convinced of its utter incon- 
 sistency with Christianity, that he has address- 
 ed two charges to the missionaries of the 
 Church of England, requiring them no longer 
 to tolerate the distinction of caste in the nar 
 tive churches. " The main barrier to all per- 
 manent improvement," says he, " is the heathen 
 usages of caste, in the Christian churches." 
 He says, " the different castes sat on different 
 mats, on different sides of the church, to which 
 they entered by different doors. They ap- 
 proached the Lord's table at different times, 
 and had once different cups, or managed to get 
 the catechists to change the cup, before the 
 
BRAHMINISM. 
 
 189 
 
 lower castes began to communicate ; they 
 would allow no persons at baptism, of an in- 
 ferior caste ; and they had separate divisions 
 in the burial grounds." The usages of caste 
 enter so deeply into the social constitution of 
 the Hindoos, that every thing is affected by it 
 It creates great inconvenience, and constitutes 
 the greatest barrier against improvement either 
 of the social or religious condition of the peo- 
 ple. There can be nothing more at variance 
 with the spirit of the Gospel than the spirit of 
 caste. 
 
 Rev. Dr. Allen, late missionary at Bombay, 
 makes the following statements respecting the 
 bearing of Caste upon the missionary work : 
 
 '' The missionaries of the American Board, 
 in India and Ceylon, have always required a 
 renunciation of Caste, just as much as of idol- 
 atry, and other parts of heathenism, of all con- 
 verts l^efore they were baptized. No arrange- 
 ments, nor accommodations, nor changes have 
 ever been made in the scats, or in the sitting 
 in tlie churches, or in the administration of the 
 ordinances on account of the Caste. Caste 
 was in no respect recognized. All were treated 
 as of one class, as much as Christians in this 
 country are so treated. 
 
 " It would naturally be expected that such 
 a public renunciation of Caste, and such sub- 
 sequent treatment of it, would be sufficient to 
 extinguish it in the church. But experience 
 has shown that it was not sufficient. Caste 
 has been found to be surprisingly insidious in 
 its influence ; and to be capable of assuming 
 almost any complexion and shape, suited to the 
 native character and their circumstances. In 
 some places, as in the north part of Ceylon, 
 Caste, though religious in its origin, yet retains 
 now but little of its religious character. It 
 has now become chiefly a social distinction, 
 and is valued as conferring personal and fam- 
 ily respectability. In proportion as it loses its 
 religious character, it becomes easy for those 
 who have abandoned it to be restored to their 
 former state. This state of feeling in the com- 
 munity presents a constant motive for those 
 native Christians who were originally of high 
 Caste, to abstain from those things in their 
 habits, and from those persons in their social 
 intercourse, which affect their personal or fam- 
 ily respectability. In such circumstances, 
 Caste becomes analogous to the civil distinc- 
 tions of society, and resembles those antipa- 
 thies and aversions which exist between differ- 
 ent classes and races of people. 
 
 " The lower castes are also very uncleaivin 
 their food, drink, &c. In some districts where 
 I have been, their food consisted chiefly of 
 cattle and other creatures, that died of them- 
 selves in the adjacent cities and villages. They 
 appeared almost to live on carrion, and their 
 roads and houses are exceedingly offensive, dis- 
 gusting and filthy. Now the Brahmins never 
 eat any kind of meat ; and the Hindoos of all 
 respectable castes hold the eating of beef in tlie 
 
 greatest abhorrence. With what feelings, then, 
 must all such castes regard the Pariars or 
 Parayas and Mahars ; and what must be their 
 involuntary shrinking from contact, or close 
 personal intimacy with them ? The Brahmins 
 and other high castes naturally and necessarily 
 feel far more aversion to associate intimately 
 with Mahars and Pariars, and to have personal 
 contact with them, than the most refined and 
 delicate people in this country would feel in 
 associating intimately with the most degraded 
 and filthy. 
 
 " It should not appear strange, then, in view 
 of these things, if persons recently converted 
 from the darkness and ignorance of heathen- 
 ism, should yield to the influence and motives 
 which continually surround them, and exhibit 
 the feelings, and perform, or refuse to perform 
 the actions which are ascribed to Caste ; esp&- 
 cially when they know what respect was for- 
 merly shown to such feelings and actions by 
 some of the best men, (as Schwartz, and his 
 fellow-laborers,) ever engaged in the mission- 
 ary cause ; and know also, how such feelings 
 and actions are still regarded in some native 
 churches, and by some missionaries. Feelings 
 of this character are sometimes developed un- 
 expectedly and in much strength, where none 
 were supposed to exist. These facts show the 
 importance of continually watching such a 
 hydra-headed monster as Caste. Various 
 ways and means have been tried to develop 
 these feelings, and so to extinguish, as far as 
 possible, the spirit in which they originate. 
 
 " The Madras Missionary Conference ' re- 
 commend a love feast, at which all the mem- 
 bers of the church, including the pastor and 
 teachers, shall partake of a simple and suitable 
 repast.' This custom has been observed in the 
 missions of the American Board, and with 
 very good effect. When the spirit of Caste 
 at these meetings, or on any other occasions, 
 has appeared, it has been made the subject of 
 admonition, or suspension, or exclusion from 
 the church, according to the nature of the 
 offence. 
 
 " During a residence of more than a quarter 
 of a century in India, I had opportunities of 
 seeing missionary operations and mission 
 churches in Bengal, in Madras, in Ceylon, and 
 in Bombay ; and I can fully concur in the sen- 
 timent of the Madras Missionary Conference, 
 that ' Caste is one of the greatest obstacles to 
 the progress of the Gospel in India. It meets 
 and thwarts the missionary, not only in bear- 
 ing the unsearchable riches of Christ to the 
 unconverted Hindoos, but also in building up 
 the native church in faith and love ; and to 
 tolerate it in any form, is to oppose the law of 
 Christ.' And again, in a communication of 
 a subsequent date, they say, ' We have long 
 regarded Caste as a most formidable opponent 
 to genuine Christianity, and a deadlier enemy, 
 in some respects, to the souls of this people, 
 than even idolatry. We are called to unceas- 
 
190 
 
 BRAIIMINISM. 
 
 ing effort to extinguish its spirit and power in 
 native Christians who have openly renounced 
 it.' ' Caste is a deudlior enemy to the souls of 
 the Hindoos tlian idolatry,' on account of its 
 assuming, as experience shows, almost any 
 compleocion— adapting itself to circumstances 
 and exigencies, and then again assuming its 
 positive character. In the system of Hindoo- 
 ism, it is decidedly religious in its nature — and 
 yet, in connection with the Danish and Ger- 
 man missions, it became so far divested of its 
 religious character that it was admitted into 
 the church, and there tolerated for a long time, 
 as containing only civil and social distinctions 
 not inconsistent with the principle and spirit 
 of Christianity. After it had gained admis- 
 sion into the native Christian community, it 
 again assumed a religious character, and those 
 of high Caste became as much Attached to it, 
 and as reluctant to abandon its usages, as the 
 heathen around them. And considering how 
 little was known of the nature of this peculiar 
 feature of Hindooism, when the first mission- 
 aries of the Board went to India and Ceylon, 
 and the state of the Protestant churches in 
 India, in connection with the high character 
 and great veneration of Schwartz and his fel- 
 low-laborers, who formed these churches and 
 presided over them, there is cause for gratitude 
 and thankfulness, that Caste has never been 
 knowingly admitted into any of our mission 
 churches ; has never been recognized by any 
 arrangements to favor it ; and when its spirit 
 has been manifested in any manner which has 
 called for the consideration of the missionaries 
 and their churches, discipline has been admin- 
 istered in the way of admonition, suspension, 
 and excommunication, according to the nature 
 of the offence. Thus, while in looking back 
 we see reason to thank God, the present state 
 of this cause is such, that in looking forward 
 we see reason to take courage." 
 
 Superstitions.^-Ukc the votaries of all false 
 religions, the Hindoos are very superstitious. 
 And, in proportion to their ignorance and de- 
 gradation, their absurd superstitions have do- 
 minion over them. There is scarce an occur- 
 rence in life, which, to the superstitious Hindoo, 
 is not ominous of good or evil ; and scarcely 
 an hour of the day when he is not bound to 
 the performance of gome ceremony, or not 
 made a slave to some superstition. He leaves 
 his house in the morning ; but if he sees a bird 
 fly in a WTong direction, or meets an animal 
 of ill-omen, or first sees a person of a certain 
 caste, or any object betokening ill, he must re- 
 turn, and relinquish his enterprise, and perhaps 
 may not go out of his house again that day. 
 These superstitions are of endless variety ; and 
 only a few will be specified here. The cholera 
 is regarded as a malignant goddess, whom they 
 worship, in order to deprecate her anger. They 
 believe that this goddess walks to and fro, up 
 and down the earth, afflicting the people in 
 one place, and then moving off to another, 
 
 where she commences the same work without 
 mercy or compassion. In order to propitiate 
 this malignant demon, they make otll-rings of 
 rice, ghee, flowers, fruits, and the like, and sa- 
 crifice to her sheep, goats, buffaloes, and fowls. 
 Consistently with their belief, they cannot take 
 medicine for the cholera. The only way is to 
 exorcise the demon. This, they pretend, may 
 be done by the numtra, which is the grand 
 charm of the Brahmins. This bears a very 
 prominent place in the Hindoo religion. It is 
 a mystic verse or incantation, the repetition of 
 which is declared to be attended with the; most 
 wonderful effects. None but Brahmins and 
 the higher order of Hindoos, are allowed to 
 repeat it. The lower castes are forbidden to 
 repeat or even hear it, on pain of eternal tor- 
 ment. All things are subservient to the num- 
 tra. The gods themselves cannot resist it. It 
 is the essence of the Vedas, or sacred books ; 
 it is the united power of Bramha, Vishnoo, 
 and Siva. By its magic power, it confers all 
 sanctity ; pardons all sin ; secures all good, 
 temporal and spiritual, and procures everlast- 
 ing blessedness in the world to come. It pos- 
 sesses the wonderful charm of interchanging 
 good for evil, truth for falsehood, light for 
 darkness, and of confii-ming such perversions 
 by the most holy sanctions. There is nothing 
 so difficult, so silly, or so absurd, that it may 
 not be achieved by this extraordinary numtra. 
 As might be expected, it is employed very ex- 
 tensively for removing pains, for the curing of 
 diseases, the bite of venomous snakes, &c., <fec. 
 But the cholera is by no means the only disease 
 which is suppossd to be the effect of an evil 
 spirit ; or of some animal or other object in 
 the part affected. Every disease is represent- 
 ed as possessed of a bodily form. A liver 
 complaint is said to be caused by a crab, who 
 is eating the liver ; a cough, by a large cater- 
 pillar in the throat ; the tooth-ache, from the 
 gnawings of a little worm in the decayed tooth. 
 The Hindoos believe that if they look at the 
 moon on a certain day, they shall be instantly 
 struck dead. Nothing will induce a man to 
 raise his eyes to the moon on that day. 
 
 The Hindoo sacred books abound with di- 
 rections about such frivolous things as cleaning 
 the teeth, bathing and washing, cooking and 
 eating, washing or drying clothes, &c., there 
 being some lucky or unlucky omen connected 
 with the particular manner in which every 
 thing is done. Of these, only a very few spe- 
 cimens can be given. Eating with the face to 
 th(? east, ensures long life; with it to the 
 south, celebrity ; to the west, wealth ; to the 
 north, pecuniary embarrassment. If, before 
 eating, they do not make a circular mark, with 
 water, around where they set the dish, it is said 
 the demons will devour the food. On the first 
 day of the moon, he who eats a pumpkin be- 
 comes indigent. Ignorance follows eating the 
 cocoa-nut on the eighth. It is said to be sinful 
 to eat beans on the eleventh; and so on, through 
 
BRAHMINISM. 
 
 191 
 
 the whole month. He who puts on new apparel 
 on Sunday, becomes poor ; on Monday, is 
 afflicted with boils ; on Tuesday, is subject to 
 much trouble ; on Wednesday, will have means 
 of purchasing new clothes ; on Thursday, will 
 become learned and happy ; on Saturday, will 
 be involved in trouble and disputes. He who 
 shaves on Sunday, becomes miserable ; on 
 Monday, happy ; on Tuesday, hastens his own 
 death ; on Wednesday, accumulates wealth ; 
 on Thursday, becomes dishonorable ; on Fri- 
 day, childless ; on Saturday, brings on his head 
 every misfortune. And, so on, to every action 
 of life. To sneeze, when one is about to sit 
 down, or lie down, or eat, or is dressing, or be- 
 stowing gifts, is highly inauspicious. These 
 are but a few, among a vast multitude of such 
 ridiculous notions, by which the minds of the 
 people are held in bondage. Their notions of 
 ceremonial impurity are also equally burden- 
 some and inconvenient. 
 
 The Hindoos believe that a person about to 
 be executed, imparts an extraordinary sanctity 
 to every thing he touches. For this reason, he 
 throws flowers, fruits, and spices, to the crowd 
 about the gibbet, who eagerly catch them, and 
 preserve them as a sort of charm. In one in- 
 stance, they actually worshiped the dead car- 
 cass of a man who had been executed, while 
 hanging on the gibbet, in consequence of a re- 
 port that miraculous cures had been experienc- 
 ed by touching his body. Amulets are almost 
 miiversally worn by the Hindoos, for prevent- 
 ing or curing diseases and the bite of serpents. 
 The Hindoos suffer exceedingly, on account of 
 their superstitions in reference to sickness and 
 disease. Many a wretched creature spends all 
 his living for the prescriptions of some quack, 
 or drags out a miserable existence, and dies in 
 the midst of the charms and the enchantments 
 of the Brahmin. The number of the blind, 
 lame, maimed, leprous, and diseased in India, 
 is astonishingly great ; and no doubt one prin- 
 cipal reason for this is the bad treatment, or 
 the want of good treatment, in the original 
 complaint. They have a singular superstition 
 respecting the eclipse of the sun. They sup- 
 pose that a kind of corporeal divinity, very 
 malignant and mischievous, very black, foul, 
 and impure, seizes on the sun, blackens it as 
 with ink, and thus infects and obscures it. 
 The sun, which they suppose to be a similar 
 divinity, but of a benevolent and perfect order, 
 is put into extreme pain and terrible anguish, 
 at thus seeing himself seized and tortured by 
 the monster ; and in order to relieve him of 
 this distress, they make use of many prayers 
 and foolish ceremonies. There is no slavery 
 so grievous as the slavery of superstition ; and 
 none which so much exposes an ignorant peo- 
 ple to the cupidity of an avaricious priesthood. 
 Cruelties of Brahminism. — A superstitious 
 religion is invariably a religion of cruelty. 
 Such, then, we may expect Hindooism to be. 
 And, in no respect is this cruelty more conspi- 
 
 cuous than in the treatment of females ; but 
 especially widows and female children. The 
 Suttee, or burning of widows on the funeral 
 piles of their husbands, arose from their op- 
 pressive customs in relation to widows. Reli- 
 gion and custom have rendered widowhood so 
 wretched and disgraceful, that the Hindoo 
 wife, on the demise of her husband, chooses 
 death rather than so miserable a life. The 
 widow is stripped of her ornaments, compelled 
 to wear white clothing, have her head shaven, 
 and submit to many other tokens of degrada- 
 tion. She is excluded from all ceremonies of 
 joy ; forbidden to marry, and shut out from re- 
 spectable society. This is no doubt the cause 
 of the burning of widows, and burying them 
 alive with their deceased husbands. The for 
 mer of these practices, has, however, been 
 abolished by the British government. When 
 the aged become burdensome, they are often 
 dragged to the borders of some sacred river, 
 by their own children, their mouths filled with 
 mud, and thus abandoned to die. There is no 
 benevolence, no disinterestedness, no mercy, in 
 the Hindoo character. In times of prevailing 
 disease, this is perspicuously manifest. People 
 are left to expire unattended, and their bodies 
 to consume in their own houses. Women, in 
 performance of some vow, cast their children, 
 in cold blood, into the sacred rivers, and coolly 
 look on, and see them devoured by the sharks. 
 And, in some sections of the country, a large 
 portion of the female children are murdered by 
 their parents as soon as they are born. Surely, 
 the Hindoos are " without natural affection." 
 The various tortures resorted to for penance, 
 also indicate the cruelty of Hindooism. 
 
 Holy Days. — These are among the most 
 fruitful sources of poverty, covetousness, and 
 depravity, among the Hindoos. Of these, they 
 have no less than one hundred and forty-five ; 
 ten of which occur monthly, and twenty-fivo 
 are anniversaries. When it is considered that, 
 on these days, they abandon all their employ- 
 ments, and give themselves up to all manner 
 of licentiousness, the effect upon society may 
 readily be imagined. We see the demoraliz- 
 ing effects of two or three of these holy-days in 
 a year, in our own country ; what then may we 
 suppose them to be, where they embrace nearly 
 one half the days of the year, on which all 
 manner of restraint is thrown off. A descrip- 
 tion of the ceremonies of these holy-days would 
 be both tedious and disgusting. The festival 
 of the dewalee is perhaps the worst of the 
 whole. It continues three days, during which, 
 gambling revelry, debauchery, lying, roguery, 
 and dissipation of every description, are not 
 only tolerated, but esteemed praiseworthy and 
 religious acts. And to these may be added a 
 multitude of private observances, on account 
 of births, marriages, deaths, &c. From the 
 first existence of the child, to his death, there 
 is probably not a month, perhaps not a week, 
 in which it is not required that some ceremony 
 
192 
 
 BRAUMINISM. 
 
 be performed, wbcn a Brahmin must be called, 
 and presents given ; and when he is dead, he 
 must be feasted through a Brahmin's mouth, 
 and offerings must bo made for his benefit 
 through a Brahmin's hand. 
 
 Hoiy Places. — Another fruitful source of 
 poverty and vice among the people, and of ag- 
 grandizement on the part of the Brahmins, is 
 the multitude of Holv Places, celebrated for 
 their sanctity, to which pilgrimages are made, 
 as means of accumulating merit. To an igno- 
 rant and self-righteous people, the idea of pil- 
 grimage is extremely fascinating, and the subtle 
 priest is not slow to turn this principle of hu- 
 man nature to his own account. Various ex- 
 pedients are resorted to by the Brahmins, to 
 keep up the reputation of these Holy Places. 
 The principal ones are Benares, Jugunath, and 
 Rameshwur ; but there are a great number of 
 other places which are held in high estimation ; 
 and to all of them, crowds of pilgrims are con- 
 tinually flockiug : persons who have left their 
 homes, and sacrificed their all, with the vain 
 expectation of laying up a stock of merit, by 
 visiting a sacred place. They are soon, by the 
 wiles of old pilgrims and covetous Brahmins, 
 stripped of every thing, and plunged into all 
 manner of excesses. Those who have read the 
 disgusting accounts of pilgrimages to Jugu- 
 nath, " of the roads for fifty miles being marked 
 by the skulls of those who have perished on 
 the way ; " and of the thousands who are left 
 to die on the banks of the Gauges ; and those 
 who will take the pains to calculate what 
 must be the probable consequences of a com- 
 pany of people, both poor and unprincipled, 
 leaving their houses for nearly a year, travel- 
 ing across the country, and visiting the cen- 
 tral places of iniquity in India, may form 
 some idea of the effects of these pilgrimages. 
 
 Degradation of Females. — There is no fea- 
 ture of Brahminism more revolting to the be- 
 nevolent heart, and the ingenuous mind, than 
 the condition of Hindoo females. The genius 
 of Hindooism saps in the heart of man the 
 rery foundation of all those tender and noble 
 affections of his soul, which capacitate him to 
 appreciate and admire those excellencies which 
 are peculiar to the other sex. Hindooism must 
 make its votaries selfish, distrustful, and brutish. 
 Love, tenderness, sympathy, weakness, modesty 
 and dependence, which we accord to the female 
 as her appropriate virtues, are ri^uled, if not 
 despised, by the Hindoo. He maffies, or rather 
 llgys a wife, as he would a beast of burden, 
 and afterwards regards her in very much the 
 same light. All those civilities and attentions 
 which females receive in a Christian country 
 are unknown in India. Were a Hindoo to in- 
 quire after the health of his neighl^or's wife 
 or daughter, the husband and father would 
 deem himself insulted. A Hindoo is never 
 seen to treat his wife with familiarity or fond- 
 ness. All this is in accordance with the prin- 
 ciples of the Hindoo scriptures. According to 
 
 them, " the supreme duty of the wife is to obey 
 the husband. Let the wife, who wishes to per- 
 form sacred ablution, wash the feet of her 
 lord, and drink the water ; for the husband is 
 to a wife greater than Slmnura or Vishnoo. 
 Her husband is her god and gooroo, (teacher,) 
 and religion and its services ; wherefore, aban- 
 doning every thing else, she ought chiefly to 
 worship her husband." This implicit obedience 
 of the wife extends to any thing which flie 
 husband may choose to command. His will 
 and authority are paramount to any law, hu- 
 man or divine. If he command his wife to lie, 
 steal, or commit adultery, she must obey. 
 Such is the language of the Hindoo scriptures. 
 To become the father of a son is regarded the 
 greatest honor and happiness ; but the birth 
 of a daughter is a calamity. Thus the girl, 
 from her infancy, is made to feel her inferiority. 
 She is regarded as incapable of mental im- 
 provement, and is doomed to a servile life. 
 Ignorant and indolent, she becomes a wife, 
 without any choice of her own, and often sadly 
 against her wishes. If she be of high birth 
 she is little more than the prisoner of her hus- 
 band. He immures her within the walls of a 
 gloomy mansion, and watches over her with a 
 jealous eye. But if of low caste, she becomes 
 the wife and the drudge at the same time ; 
 carrying burdens, laboring in the field, bring- 
 ing water, gathering cow-dung, kneading into 
 cakes, and drying it for fuel, are her appro- 
 priate departments of labor. Nearly every 
 occupation which nature points out as the 
 sphere of the hardier sex, is, in this country, 
 assigned to the woman ; while her appropriate 
 labors are performed by men. Her washing is 
 done by the washerman ; her sewing, by the 
 tailor ; her milk and butter, and all articles of 
 food, which require but little cookery, are pur- 
 chased in the bazar. She has no furniture to 
 clean, no floors to sweep or scrub. A coat of 
 cow dung and water, once a week, settles that 
 long account, which the industrious housewife 
 in this country, has with her floors. Indolence 
 and dirt at home, and drudgery and disgrace 
 abroad, seem the only alternatives of Hindoo 
 women. Such is the condition of females in 
 Hindoostan ; and for this there is no remedy 
 but Christianity. Wherever this has prevailed, 
 the rights of women have been acknowledged, 
 and their character and condition elevated. 
 
 Character of tJie People. — After what has 
 been already said, little need be added under 
 this head. It can hardly be expected that the 
 character of any people will be better than 
 that of their gods, their priests, and their moth- 
 ers. And when to these sources of corruption, 
 are added the demoralizing influence of igno- 
 rance, superstition, the doctrine oi fate, and 
 heathen festivals and pilgrimages, we are pro- 
 pared to contemplate a people reduced to the 
 lowest state of moral degradation. To pro- 
 vide for the daily wants of the body, seenjs to 
 absorb the whole soul of the Hindoo. His 
 
BRAHMINISM. 
 
 193 
 
 immortal mind is permitted to remain envelop- 
 ed in ail its ignorance, without making any 
 proper efforts for its illumination. The great 
 ma.ss of the people are content to do as their 
 fathers did, and to worship what their fathers 
 worshiped, and whether that object be a god 
 or a devil, it matters not, provided it be the cus- 
 tom of the people to do so. Custom with 
 them is law, to which reason and conscience 
 must submissively bow. Moral principle and 
 benevolent feeling seem to be entirely obliter- 
 ated in the heart of the Hindoo ; and he 
 knows no higher motive of action than selfish- 
 ness. He will lie, cheat, steal, and commit 
 all manner of licentiousness, whenever it will 
 serve his turn, without the least compunction. 
 Although exceedingly zealous in their religion, 
 scrupulously maintaining, in their way, their 
 daily devotions, and having temples in every 
 village ; yet, all their holiness is ceremonial, 
 having no respect whatever to the state of the 
 heart, or the character of the actions. 
 
 Brahminism and Popery compared. — The simi- 
 larity of Popery and Brahminism, is so strik- 
 ing, that it is worth while to occupy a small 
 space in drawing a comparison between the two 
 systems ; especially as this resemblance has 
 fallen under the eyes of the missionaries, who 
 see them both in operation, side by side ; there 
 being many Koman Catholic convents and 
 churches in India. The following comparison, 
 somewhat abridged, was drawn upon the spot, 
 by Rev. Mr. Ramsay, missionary in India. 
 The Hindoos acknowledge one supreme god, 
 with many subordinate deities, entitled to wor- 
 ship. The Brahmins are held to be the repre- 
 sentatives of God, possessing the keys of life 
 and death, heaven and hell, and therefore they 
 are worshiped by bowing down before them, 
 and kissing their great toe. The Pope, in like 
 manner, considers himself the vicar of Christ, 
 and every priest is his representative. He too 
 holds the keys of heaven and hell, and his toe 
 has been favored with many a kiss. By the 
 Hindoo laws, none but their priests are per- 
 mitted to read their sacred books ; and to se- 
 cure this end, the priests oppose education, and 
 labor to keep the people in ignorance. The 
 Romish priests will not allow the people to 
 read the Scriptures ; and to secure their own 
 ascendancy, they strive to keep the people in 
 ignorance. The Hindoos have a multitude of 
 idols, which they daily worship. Some of 
 them consider the idol as the representative of 
 God, and others worship the thing itself, and 
 go no further. Besides temple deities, they 
 have household gods, which they worship daily. 
 The Romanists in India have also images of 
 saints in their chapels, and in their houses, to 
 which they bow down daily. In the streets, 
 crosses are set up ; and in the evenings, lamps 
 are placed at the feet of them, after the Hin- 
 doos' mode of placing lamps before their idols. 
 As they pass these crosses, the Romanists take 
 off their hats and bow down to them, or pros- 
 13 
 
 trate themselves before them. The worship of 
 images is sanctioned by the church in India, as 
 it is also by the second council of Nice. The 
 Hindoos have many millions of inferior deities, 
 corresponding to which the Romanists have 
 multitudes of angels. The Hindoos have their 
 Gooroos to intercede for them ; and the Roman- 
 ists have their saints, for the same purpose. 
 The Hindoos hold that a man may obtain 
 righteousness by his own works, and more 
 than he needs for himself, the surplus of which 
 he may sell. The Romanists also have their 
 works of supererogation, which lead to the 
 sale of indulgences. • The Hindoos observe a 
 ceremony, in which they offer up prayers for 
 the dead, and for which they feed and fee the 
 Brahmins ; the Romanists also fee the priests to 
 say mass for the benefit of the souls of their de- 
 ceased relatives. The Hindoos say prayers and 
 count their beads, and undergo severe penances 
 to obtain righteousness. The Romanists do the 
 same. They both alike have their fasts, in 
 which they eat no meat. They both have their 
 festivals, in honor of their saints. They both 
 have their holy places and their pilgrimages. 
 They both have their holy water. The Hin- 
 doos divide their sins into two classes, inward 
 and outward ; the Romanists, into venial and 
 mortal. They both have their monks and her- 
 mits, and religious mendicants, of equally de- 
 based character. The Hindoos have their fe- 
 males married to the gods ; and the Roman- 
 ists have their nuns, who are formally married 
 to Christ. Both are devoted to the same pur- 
 pose. Both carry out their images in solemn 
 procession, in great 'display. Both have their 
 small bells, to jingle during their religious ser- 
 vices in their temples. They both use rosaries, 
 and carry images about their persons. Many 
 more marks of resemblance might be named : 
 but these are sufficient to show that both" sys- 
 tems have a common origin. 
 
 The Remedy. — The Gospel of the Lord 
 Jesus Christ is the only remedy for heathenism. 
 This, with the power of' the Holy Ghost, can 
 raise them from the lowest depths of filth and 
 degradation. It has done it, and it can do it 
 again. But, when we look at the state of 
 things in Hindoostan, we must despair of help 
 from man, and look to the power of God, 
 which alone is able to accomplish so great a 
 work. The labors ^of the missionary alone 
 surely cannot accomplish such a change. The 
 power of God alone can produce it. — The 
 Christian Brahmin ; Ramsay's Journal ; Ward's 
 India and the, Hindoos ; Hooker's Plea for tf/^ 
 Heathen. 
 
 BRIDGETOWN : Capital of the Island 
 of Barbadoes ; one of the gayest and hand- 
 somest towns in the West Indies. A station 
 of the United Brethren. 
 
 BRITISH AKRA : See AJcra. 
 
 BRITISH GUIANA includes Essequibo, 
 Demerara and Berbice, or -all the maritime 
 : tract between the river Corenten, the western 
 
194 
 
 BUDIIISM. 
 
 limit of Surinam, and the frontier of ISpanish 
 Guiana, at Cape Nassau, in lat.. 70^ 40', a 
 space of about 30Q miles, including the sinu- 
 osities of the coast See West Indies. 
 
 JiRUSA : An out-station of the American 
 Board among tlic Armenians ; once the capi- 
 tal of the Turkish empire — is famed for its 
 silk manufactures. Population from 80,000 
 to 100,000, of which the Turks are by far the 
 largest part. It is at the base of the Bythin- 
 ian Mt. Olympus, about 60 miles south from 
 Constantinople. 
 
 BROWN'S TOWN; A Wesleyan star 
 tion in Jamaica, W. L 
 
 BRUNSWICK ; A station of the Lon- 
 don-Missionary Society in Berbice. 
 
 BUDHISM : The religious system, called 
 Budhism, is exceedingly complicated, being 
 made up of legends, superstitions, and absurdi- 
 ties so numerous and strange that to give a 
 condensed and intelligible view of them is al- 
 most impossible. Volumes have been written 
 on the subject by missionaries, distinguished 
 travelers, and English gentlemen of learning 
 and research, resident in India, and from this 
 mass of materials the summary here given is 
 derived. The work of R. Spence Hardy, 
 member of the Royal Asiatic Society, has 
 been found especially serviceable on account 
 of its systematic arrangement of topics, al- 
 though it devotes nearly 450 octavo pages to a 
 consideration of the subject. The substantial 
 agreement of authors in regard to the origin 
 and character of Budhism leads to the belief 
 that they have attained to a great degree of 
 accuracy, an^ the following view, though it 
 omits numerous details, will, it is hoped, be 
 found to be a correct presentation of the lead- 
 ing facts of the system. 
 
 Qrigin of Budhism. — The founder of the 
 sect of Budhists was Gotama Budha, born 
 B. C. 624. At the moment of his birth, (so 
 says the legend) he stepped upon the ground, 
 and after looking around towards the four 
 quarters and the four half quarters, above and 
 below, without seeing any one in those ten direc- 
 tions who was equal to himself, he exclaimed, 
 " I am the most exalted in the world ; I am 
 chief in the world ; I am the most excellent in 
 the world ; this is my last birth ; hereafter 
 there is to me no other existence." He had 
 however previously existed through a vast 
 number of ages, and exercised all the virtues 
 which were necessary to his future office, and 
 taking his position in the sixth of the divine 
 Worlds, the gods and brahmas, after the appro- 
 priate period had passed, went to his dwelling 
 and begged his appearance in this human 
 world. Thereupon he was born, and proclaimed 
 his own greatness as above. He then passed 
 twenty-nine years in worldly wealth and gran- 
 deur, and six more in mortification and pen- 
 ance ; and then sitting down under a bo-tree, de- 
 clared he would not rise up till he became Bud- 
 ha, Lord of the Universe. Upon this a great 
 
 number of chiefs, brahmas, and gods, made 
 their appearance as his retinue, and then his 
 adversary, Maraya, came with a great army 
 to try to hinder his becoming lord of the world. 
 Upon this, panic-struck, the gods and brahniaa 
 all fled and hid themselves. Maraya tlieu 
 brought on thick darkness, bat the body of 
 Budh was light as a thousand suns. He then 
 attempted to strike him, and asked him, " Who 
 is your witness that you have done works of 
 merit, for which you should deserve this seat ?" 
 Then Budh exclaimed, " I have no rational 
 witness here," and called upon the earth to 
 
 Proclaim his actions in the course of his eu- 
 eavors to become Budh. Upon this the earth 
 rumbled 100,000 times, and began to turn 
 round. Whereupon Maraya was dismayed 
 and defeated, and acknowledging the superior- 
 ity of Budh, fled ashamed, and all the gods and 
 brahmas of the universe came and ministered 
 to Budh triumphant; thus completely extin- 
 guishing evil, and acquiring omniscience, he 
 became perfect Budha. 
 
 The places near which he exercised his min- 
 istry were Benares, and other parts of northern 
 India, and he is said to have proceeded as far 
 south as Ceylon. He died at the age of eighty, 
 or as some say eighty-five, having previously 
 foretold that his religion, after extending over 
 the world, would become extinguished, S-nd be 
 renewed by his successor, Maitra Budha, who 
 is now in a divine state, and after the appro- 
 priate age will become Budha. 
 
 The Budhas are beings who appear after in- 
 tervals of time inconceivably vast. Previous 
 to their reception of the Budhaship, they pass 
 through countless phases of being, and in the 
 birth in which they become Budha, they are 
 of woman born. At their death they cease to 
 exist. They do not continue to be Budhas, 
 nor do they enter upon any other state of 
 being. 
 
 Doctrines of Budha. — According to the doc- 
 trines propounded or rather ascribed to Gotama 
 Budha, there are innumerable systems of 
 worlds, called Sakwalas, which attain their 
 prime, and then decay and are destroyed, at 
 periods regularly recurring, and by agents that 
 are as regularly recurring. Budhism teaches 
 that there is no Creator, no being that is self- 
 existent and eternal. All sentient beings are 
 homogeneous. The difference between one 
 being and another is only temporary, and re- 
 sults from the difference in their degrees of 
 merit. Any being whatever may be a candi- 
 date for the. Budhaship ; but it is only by the 
 uniform pursuit of this object through innu- 
 merable ages that it can be obtained. 
 
 The power that controls the universe is kar- 
 ma, literally action ; consisting of kusala and 
 -aJcusala, or merit and demerit. There is no 
 such thing as an immaterial spirit, but at the 
 death of any being, the aggregate of his merit 
 and demerit is transferred to some other being, 
 which new being is caused by the karma of 
 
BUDHISM. 
 
 196 
 
 le previous being, and receives from that 
 [rma all the circumstances of its existence, 
 bus, if the karma be good, the circumstances 
 ■e favorable, producing happiness ; but if it 
 ; bad, they are unfavorable, producing misery. 
 The manner in which being commenced, 
 ;cording to Budhism, cannot now be ascer- 
 ined. The cause of continuance of existence 
 ignorance, from which merit and demerit are 
 oduced, whence comes consciousness, then 
 )dy and mind, and afterwards the six organs 
 ' sense. Again, from the organs of sense 
 imes contact ; ft-om contact desire ; from dc- 
 'e sensation ; from sensation the cleaving to 
 :isting objects ; from this cleaving, reproduc- 
 3n ; and from reproduction disease, decay, 
 id death. Thus, like the revolutions of a 
 beel, there is a regular succession of death 
 id birth, the moral cause of which is the 
 saving to existing objects, whilst the instru- 
 ental cause is karma. It is therefore the 
 ■eat object of all beings who would be releas- 
 [ from the sorrow of successive birth, to seek 
 e destruction of the moral cause of contin- 
 (d existence, that is to say, the cleaving to 
 :isting objects, or evil desire. It is possible 
 ' accomplish this destruction, by attending to 
 prescribed course of discipline, which results 
 
 an entrance to one of the four paths, with 
 leir fruition, that lead, by different modes, 
 1 the attainment of nirwana, or annihilation, 
 bey in whom evil desire is entirely destroyed 
 'e called rahats. The freedom from evil de- 
 re ensures the possession of miraculous ener 
 J. At his death the rahat invariably attains 
 'rwana, or ceases to exist. 
 
 The Sacred Books. — The sacred books of the 
 udhists are called Dharma, which means 
 nphatically, the truth. They contain the 
 cidcnts of Gotama Budha's life, his discour- 
 s, and the voluminous commentaries that 
 ive been added. From the moment that 
 otama obtained the state of a supreme 
 udha, to the time of his dissolution, an inter- 
 il of forty-five years, in all that he uttered, to 
 batever order of intelligence, he had only 
 le design, which was, to assist sentient beings 
 
 the reception of nirwana. The discourses 
 ' Budha are divided into 84,000, and include 
 1 that was spoken by him. These discourses 
 'e divided into 275,250, as to the stanzas of 
 le original text, and into 361,550 as to the 
 anzas of the commentary. All the discour- 
 8, including those of Budha and those of the 
 )mmeutator, are divided into 2,547 vana- 
 aras, resembling the sidarim into which the 
 Doks of the Old Testament were divided by 
 le Jews, being the portion read in the syna- 
 3gue upon one Sabbath day ; and these con- 
 lin 737,000 stanzas, and 29,368,000 letters. 
 
 The system propounded by Gotama Budha, 
 as not committed to writing either by him- 
 ilf or his immediate disciples. It is asserted 
 lat his discourses were preserved in the raem- 
 cy of his followers during the space of 450 
 
 years, after which they were reduced to writ- 
 ing in the Island of Ceylon. The documents 
 themselves are an evidence that a considerable 
 period must have elapsed between the death of 
 Budha and the compilation of the Pttakas in 
 their present form. They contain the record 
 of numerous events that never could possibly 
 have happened ; they are distorted by fictions 
 and legends which it must have taken a long 
 time to invent and impose upon the people ; 
 and they abound in the grave recital of mira- 
 culous events and supernatural interferences, 
 that any inhabitant of earth would have 
 known to be false ; and 400 years would be no 
 more than a sufficient period for all these per- 
 versions. 
 
 For the establishment of the text of the 
 Pitakas, or sacred books, it is said that three 
 several convocations were held ; but it is im- 
 possible in so short a space, to go into the his- 
 tory of these convocations and the rules by 
 which they were governed, so unintelligible is 
 much of the language, and so numerous and 
 senseless the repetitions. 
 
 In size the Pitakas surpass all western com- 
 positions, and are only exceeded by the sacred 
 books of the Brahmins. Josephus mentions 
 that his own antiquities contain 60,000 lines ; 
 but the sacred books of the Budhists, it is esti- 
 mated, contain 2,000,000 of lines. These 
 books were written in the Pali language, which 
 was the vernacular tongue in the time of 
 Gotama Budha. It was carried to a high 
 state of cultivation, as is evident from the fact 
 that in Ceylon a modern writer found as many 
 as thirty works on Pali grammar, some of 
 them of considerable extent. 
 
 The sacred books are literally worshiped, 
 and benefits are expected to result from this 
 adoration as from the worship of an intelligent 
 being. The books are usually wrapped in 
 cloth, and they are often placed upon a rude 
 altar near the roadside, after the manner of 
 images in Roman Catholic countries, that 
 those who pass by may place money upon 
 them and obtain merit. The praises of the 
 bana, or word, are a favorite subject with the 
 native authors. Whenever an opportunity is 
 presented they launch out into a strain of com- 
 mendation, heaping epithet upon epithet with 
 untiring zeal, as in the following instance: 
 "The discourses of Budha are as a divine 
 charm to cure the poison of evil desire ; a divine 
 medicine to heal the disease of anger ; a lamp 
 in the midst of the darkness of ignorance ; a 
 fire like that which burns at the end of a kal- 
 pa, to destroy the evils of repeated existence ,- 
 a meridian sun to dry up the mud of covetous- 
 nes3 ; a great rain to quench the flame of 
 sensuality ; a thicket to block up the road 
 that leads to the narakas ; a ship in which 
 to sail to the opposite shore of the ocean 
 of existence ; a collyrium for taking away 
 the eye-film of heresy; a moon to bring 
 out the nightrblowing lotus of merit ; a sue- 
 
100 
 
 BUDIUSM. 
 
 cessiou of trees bcarinj? immortal fruit, placed 
 hei*e uiul there, by which the traveler may be 
 enabled to cro4« the desert of existence ; a 
 straight highway by which to pass to the in- 
 comparable wisdom ; a door of entrance to 
 the eternal city of Nirwana ; a talismanic 
 tree to give whatever is requested ; a flavor 
 more exquisite than any in the three worlds ; 
 a treasury of the best things it is possible to 
 obtain, and>a power by which may be appe-ased 
 the sorrow of every sentient being." 
 
 The advantages to be derived from listen- 
 ing to the bana are represented by the native 
 authors as being immensely great. In the 
 early ages of Budhism, when the bana was in 
 the vernacular language of the people, it is 
 evident that gi'eat effects were produced by its 
 recitation, and by the discourses that were 
 given in explanation of its doctrines and 
 duties ; but its rehearsal has now degenerated 
 into an unmeaning form, and is attended 
 with very little power. 
 
 Males of Worship. — The Budhists of the 
 present age are image-worshipers ; but it is 
 not known at what period they adopted this 
 custom, nor indeed at what period it was intro- 
 duced into India. The Budhists of Ceylon 
 have a legend that in the lifetime of Gotama 
 Budha, an image of the founder of their reli- 
 gion was made by order of the king of Ko- 
 sala, and the Chinese have a similar story ; but 
 it is rejected by the more intelligent of the 
 priest? . who regard it as an invention to at- 
 tract worshipers to the temples. The images 
 are sometimes recumbent, at other times up- 
 right, or in a sitting posture, either in the act 
 of contemplation, or with the hand uplifted in 
 the act of giving instruction. At Cotta, near 
 Colombo, in Ceylon, there is a recumbent im- 
 age 42 feet in length. Upon the altar, in ad- 
 dition to flowers, there are frequently smaller 
 images, either of marble or metal, the former 
 being brought from Burmah and the latter 
 from Siam. In the shape of the images each 
 nation appears to have adopted its own ideas 
 of beauty ; those of Ceylon resembling a 
 well proportioned native of the island, while 
 those of 8iam are of a more attenuated figure, 
 fuad in Nepaul they often have three heads and 
 six or ten arms. The idol manufactories pre- 
 sent strange sights to the eye of a Christian, 
 such as sign boards with the inscription, 
 " Precious Budhas manufactured or repaired ;" 
 " The Golden Budha Shop ;" and these shops 
 containing groups of images, some black with 
 age and sent thither for gilding, and others 
 gaudily painted and fresh from the hand of 
 the artist. 
 
 The Budhists have numerous temples, pago- 
 das, and sacred places, to which the people 
 resort to hear the bana read and to perform 
 their religious rites. From the ruins which 
 appear in various places it is evident that 
 these temples were anciently very costly 
 aad beautiful, much more so than any of mod- 
 
 ern construction ; but a particular descrlptlo 
 of them must be omitted. The l)0-tre<', und( 
 which Gotatna attained the Budhaship, was a 
 object of worship at a very early period. Net 
 this tree the city of Jiudha-Gaya was afterwan 
 built, which, from the vast extent of its ruin 
 must have had, at one time, a numerous ])opi 
 lation ; but it declined rapidly, and in tl 
 fifth century was entirely deserted. A bo-tr( 
 flourishes at present on the same spot, ami 
 believed by the Budhists to be the very tr( 
 under which Gotama sat. This place is sit 
 ated in British India, in 4he Presidency i 
 Bengal, about 40 miles S. AV. of Bahar. 
 is a good deal resorted to by pilgrims, and 
 supposed to have once been the centre < 
 Budhism, but now no Budhists reside at < 
 near it. In the court-yard of nearly cvei 
 wihara (temple) in Ceylon there is a bo-tre 
 said to be taken from the original tree. N 
 merous forms of relic-worship are observed 1; 
 the Budhists, and many of them, for extren 
 folly and absurdity, will compare with an, 
 thing ever invented by Rome herself. Tht 
 have, for example, the left canine tooth of the 
 sage, and it is regarded by the Kandians i 
 Ceylon as the palladium of their country. Tl 
 impressions of Gotama's foot are also worshi] 
 ed. There are believed to be many of thei 
 impressions in various parts of India, but tl 
 most important one is on the top of Adam 
 Peak, in Ceylon, 7,420 feet above the level i 
 the sea, and the summit of this peak is visitc 
 by great numbers of pilgrims. The soles ( 
 Budha's foot are represented as being divide 
 into 108 compartments, like a pictorial alphi 
 bet, each of which contains a figure. One ( 
 the titles of the monarch of Siam is, " Tl 
 pre-eminently merciful and munificent, tl 
 soles of whose feet resemble those of Budha.' 
 
 It was an ordinance of Budha, that tl 
 priests, who were then supposed to dwell mo! 
 commonly in the wilderness, should reside du 
 ing the three months of the rainy season in 
 fixed habitation. This season is called was 
 and it is at this period that the priests rea 
 bana to the people. The place of reading 
 called the bana-maduwa, is usually a temporal 
 erection in the form of a pagoda. In the centi 
 of the interior is an elevated platform for tl 
 convenience of the priests, and the people s 
 around it upon mats spread on the groun* 
 
 No part of the rough material of the m: 
 duwa is seen, as the pillars and the roof ai 
 covered with white cloth, upon which mosse 
 flowers, and the tender leaf of the cocoa m 
 are worked up into various devices. Lani] 
 and lanterns are suspended in great profusi* 
 and variety, and the impression produced 1 
 the scene in some localities is most strikin 
 and forms the most magnificent sight ev 
 seen by many of the worshipers. The femal- 
 are arrayed in their gayest attire, and flaj 
 and streamers and figured handkerchiefs flo; 
 from every co-nvenient point. At intcrva 
 
 4 
 
BcmmsM. 
 
 197 
 
 >mtoms arc beat, the rude trumpet sends forth 
 s screams, musketry and jinjalls add their 
 )ar, and with the help of glaring lamps, floral 
 isplays, and the noise of the people, a most 
 sciting and bewildering effect is produced. 
 The copies of the sacred books now used 
 re beautifully written in large characters, 
 pon the best talipot leaves that can be pro- 
 ired, with marks to point out the conclusion 
 t' the sentences. Upon some occasions one 
 L'iest reads the original Pali, while another 
 Lterprcts what is read in the vernacular 
 )Dgue ; but generality the Pali alone is read, 
 > that the people understand not a word of 
 ; and even when the word is explained, most 
 ' them fall asleep, or idly chew their favorite 
 3etle, regardless of what is said. The folly 
 ' the priests, in confining their public minis- 
 ations to the simple reading of the bana, 
 is caused a class of persons, called upasakas, 
 . some districts, to go about from house to 
 )use, after the manner of the Scripture read- 
 s, reading works that are written in the ver- 
 icular tongue, accompanied with familiar 
 :positions. It is by this means that Budhism 
 many places is principally supported. 
 The Modern Priesthood. — The number of 
 udhist priests in Ceylon is estimated at 
 iOO, which is about one in 400 of the popu- 
 tion. In Burmah the proportion of priests 
 much larger, and in Siam it is larger still, 
 ae priests of Ceylon trace their origin from 
 remote period, as, according to the native 
 ^ends, Budhism has there been professed 
 ore than 2000 years. But different sects 
 -ve arisen, and the doctrines and ministra- 
 ms of Budhism are not everywhere identical, 
 lere appears to be a general similarity be- 
 '^een the Budhism of Ceylon, Burmah, Siam, 
 id China ; but in Nepaul, Thibet, and Japan 
 is essentially different. In Thibet the supe- 
 )r priests are called lajnas, and are regarded 
 incarnations of Budha ; and they possess so 
 [•ge a share of political authority that they 
 n depose the sovereign of the country and 
 bstitute another in his stead. The dress of 
 e grand lama is yellow, that of other lamas 
 superior rank red ; and as these dignitaries 
 3ar broad-brimmed hats, their costume closely 
 sembles that of the cardinals of Rome. The 
 Lidhism of Thibet and of Japan resemble 
 .ch other, in having a visible representative 
 ' Gotama, possessed of unlimited power. 
 The Burmans, Siamese, Nepaulese, Chinese, 
 ipanese, and Thibetans, are the principal na- 
 ons, in addition to the Ceylonese, who now 
 •ofess Budhism, once the predominant religion 
 iroughout Hindoostan ; it is now nearly un- 
 lown in that vast region, where it has been 
 iperseded by other forms of superstition. 
 It has already been intimated that the sys- 
 m of Budhism includes two leading and fatal 
 ements — atheism ^d annihilation. When 
 otama Budha died, he did not enter upon a 
 ture state of being ; his existence was not 
 
 renewed in another world ; he forever ceased 
 to be, as truly as the light of a lamp ceases to 
 be when its flame is extinguished. Budha 
 can, therefore, in no sense, be an object of trust 
 or confidence ; his guidance and blessing can- 
 not be sought, and when his name is invoked, 
 it is under the vague supposition that by some 
 latent, unknown 'process, the prayer will be 
 answered, without the agency of an intelligent 
 cause. And as Budha ceased to exist, so does 
 every other being. There is no such thing as 
 an immortal soul. The attainment of nir- 
 wana, or extinction, is the only hope to which 
 the Budhist can aspire ; though this extinc- 
 tion necessarily produces another being to 
 whom are transferred all the merit and de- 
 merit that have been accumulated during an 
 unknown period and by an almost endless suc- 
 cession of similar beings, all distinct from each 
 other, but all bound by this singular law of 
 production to every individual in the preceding 
 link of the chain. 
 
 With such withering skepticism at its foun- 
 dation, it is impossible that Budhism should 
 be productive of any good fruits. There are 
 indeed some good moral precepts in the sacred 
 books ; but as explained in the commentaries 
 and received by the people, they are wholly 
 inoperative. Man has no Maker, is responsible 
 to no superior being, and has before him no 
 future. If he has enjoyment, it is the result of 
 merit acquired in other ages and by other 
 births ; and the sense of gratitude, obligation, 
 and dependence, is unknown to him. Little 
 motive can exist therefore for the restraint of 
 the passions or for purity of life, and the -de- 
 based and corrupt state of Budhist communi- 
 ties is the natural fruit of their religious belie£ 
 
 As to what Budha himself taught, little can 
 be known, for he left nothing in wTiting ; and 
 those who have most thoroughly studied this 
 intricate system, are of the opinion that the 
 works which profess to record his discourses 
 have little if any foundation in truth ; that he 
 never laid claim to the miracles with which his 
 name is connected, and which have been for 
 ages one of the principal supports of the sys- 
 tem ; and that the accounts given of Budha's 
 life, except the mere outlines relating to his 
 birth, family, and death, are the merest fictions. 
 
 Those who wish more thoroughly to explore 
 the depths of the system of Budhism — the in- 
 volved and endless definitions, rules and rites^.^ 
 contained in the sacred books ; the history of ' 
 mosques, temples, pagodas, and sacred places ; 
 the disgusting legends relating to miracles, 
 relics, and images ; the celibacy, mendicancy, 
 diet, and dress of the priests; and mimcrous 
 minor points connected with these, are referred 
 to the extended and elaborate works of R. 
 Spence Hardy, D. J. Gogerly, Rev. Howard 
 Malcom, and others. — Rev. E."D. Moore. 
 
 BUFFALO : A Karen village in Arra- 
 can and an out-station of the Arracan mis- 
 sion of the Am. Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
198 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 BUNAAUAl : A station of the London 
 Mksionnry Society, on Tahiti, South Sea. 
 
 BUNTINCDALE : A station of the 
 Wt'slcyans in Australia, 90 miles west of 
 Melbourne. 
 
 BUNTINGVILLE : A station of the 
 Wesloyans in Kaflraria, S. A. 
 
 BUN(jALOAV : The name given in India 
 to a house or villa of a single floor. Dak Bun- 
 galows are thatched houses, constructed at the 
 public expense, and placed at intervals, in many 
 parts of India, for the accommodation of tra- 
 velei-s. 
 
 BURDWAN : A town in the province of 
 Bengal, the capital of a district of the same 
 name, GO miles N. X. W. of Calcutta. Pop- 
 ulation about 54,000. The population of the 
 whole district is estimated at 1,444,000. 
 
 BURISAL : The principal town in the 
 district of Bahargany, India, about 185 miles 
 north-east from Calcutta. It stands on the 
 point of an oblong island, formed by the broad 
 branches of the great Ganges, which here pre- 
 sent an immense expanse of water, and a very 
 great facility of inland navigation. It is a 
 station of the English Baptist Missionary So- 
 ciety. 
 
 BURMAH : A country situated in south- 
 eastern Asia, in the region beyond the river 
 Brabma])Ootra. It is possessed by the Bur- 
 mese, the limits of whose dominions have been 
 greatly contracted by British conquests. On 
 the west, where it is conterminous with British 
 territories in India, Burmah is bounded by the 
 province of Arracan, surrendered to the Bri 
 tish by the treaty concluded with the Burmese 
 in 1826, and by the petty states of Tipperah 
 Munnepore, and Assam, from which countries 
 it is separated by lofty ridges of mountains ; 
 on the south, by the newly acquired British 
 province of Pegu ; on the north by Assam and 
 Thibet ; and on the east by China. Its limits 
 extend from lat. 19^ 25' to 28° 15', and from 
 long. 93^ 2' to 100^ 40' ; comprising a territory 
 540 miles in length, from north to south, and 
 420 in breadth, with an area of 96,000 square 
 miles. 
 
 Topog7op^i/.— Til at portion of Asia in which 
 Burmah is situated slopes from the central 
 mountains towards the south ; and as it ap- 
 proaches the Indian Ocean, it subsides into an 
 extensive champaign country, which is over- 
 flowed in the rainy season, by the swelling of 
 the rivers. The Burmese territory is watered 
 by three great streams, the Irrawaddy, the 
 Salwcn, and the Kyen-dwen, a tributary of 
 the Irrawaddy. These rivers have their sour- 
 ces in the northern chain of mountains in the 
 interior, some of which are covered with per- 
 petual snow; and they run in a southerly 
 course to the Indian Ocean. The Irrawaddy 
 and the Salwen are large rivers, which over- 
 flow the flat country on their banks, during 
 the season of the rains. Burmah, having been 
 despoiled of Pegu, contains neither maritime 
 
 districts nor alluvial plains, but is altogrthor 
 an upland territory, bounded at its soutlK^n 
 extremity by a frontier line at the distance of 
 about 200 miles from the mouth of the Irra- 
 waddy. From this point, the country bctiins 
 to rise, and thence for about 300 miles faiihor 
 it may be considered hilly and elevated. Be- 
 yond this, it is wild and mountainous. To the 
 W. and N. W., it is divided from Arracan, 
 Munnepore, and Assam, by mountainous ridges, 
 often of great elevation. 
 
 Population. — From their resemblance in fea- 
 tures and form, the Burmese appear to be of 
 the 'same race as the inhabitants of the coun- 
 tries that lie between Hindoostan and China. 
 They may be generally described as of a stout, 
 short, active, but well-proportioned form ; of a 
 brown, but never of an intensely dark com- 
 plexion ; with black, coarse, lank, and abun 
 dant hair, and a little more beard than tli 
 Siamese. The population has been variously 
 estimated and exaggerated from seventeen to 
 thirty-three millions ; but Mr. Crawford, from 
 the best data that he could procure, estimated 
 the population so as to give the present limits 
 of Burmah 2,112,000. 
 
 Social and Political Institutions, Aiis, fyc. — The 
 Burmese appear to be inferior to the Hindoos, 
 and still more to the Chinese, in arts, manu- 
 factures, industry, and all the institutions of 
 civil life. Their government is a pure des- 
 potism, the king dispensing torture, imprison- 
 ment, or death, according to his sovereign 
 discretion. The chief object of the govern- 
 ment appears to be the personal honor and 
 aggrandizement of the monarch ; and the only 
 restraint on the exercise of his prerogative is 
 the fear of insurrection. He is assisted hy a 
 public and privy council, but may punish any 
 of his high officers at his pleasure. The country 
 at large is ruled by provincial governors, and 
 is divided into provinces, townships, districts, 
 and hamlets. In all the townships and vil- 
 lages there are judges of subordinate jurisdic- 
 tion ; but as no officer receives a fixed salary, 
 the people are subject to the most shameful 
 extortion. The criminal code is barbarous and 
 severe, and the punishments shocking to hu- 
 manity. The Burmese are divided into seven 
 classes, viz. : the royal family ; the public offi- 
 cers ; the priesthood ; the rich men ; the culti- 
 vators and laborers ; and the slaves and out- 
 casts ; each of which have their badges of 
 distinction. But any subject, except slaves 
 and outcasts, may aspire to the highest offices. 
 
 In the useful arts, the Burmese have not 
 made any great advances ; and their currency 
 is of the rudest description, being composed of 
 uncoined lead, silver, and gold, valued by 
 weight. The Burmese are entirely ignorant 
 of literature and science. Morality is at a low 
 ebb among them, and their rulers have no con- 
 ception of either the excellence or utility of 
 good faith. 
 
 Religion. — Budhism is the religion of Bur- 
 
 1 
 
%L 
 
 IIUUJO 
 
 Sooiiwocc> 
 
 Ld^f^,, 
 
 
 « BITRMAH 
 SIAM 
 
 and. part of 
 STOr ATJIA. — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 }oOuke-sima ) 
 
 PersaJta. jorjj 
 Jlas.s 
 
 
 ^Cr.Coco 
 
 °Xic.Coco 
 
 Jiarrenl '. 
 JJidjiioaB.' C. 
 iArcUipeUuj o 
 
 P.CfuaTMin 
 JiuzUnidJTs* 
 \ Xir.AjuUanaf. 
 
 JTavovPugoda ^r^i^a.fy^,o 
 o • "^ 1 1 '• ■ 
 
 \CaTntcohar 
 
 ^ HCeanoTOL 
 
 ^' 
 
 ^5^ 
 
 Jli&*cfts7«-^1 
 
 
 
 rNico^arJ[slaa4^ ^"^^'^^^^^^ ^^'^f««^ 
 
 Tartjang^ c* <^cu^ 
 
 
 IPatig" 
 
 
 CKjnctibitr 
 
 Trxmxgo 
 
 ■emsiui 
 ^ ,„S«ru/o»-« '.'-H"" 
 
 
 ^.</>' 
 
 
 jl.Tr-inffuTiy 
 
 Xcm. 9 
 
 
 otthe 
 '''grorcainljoj 
 
 •«'Ka,- 
 
 jr.H'antnas 
 
 ^axmhaXs. 
 
 ^^om-. 
 
 jcatuuas 
 
 
 5 E . of Greenwich. 
 
 
 A 
 
(fft THB 
 
I 
 
 BURMAH 
 
 199 
 
 inali. (See Budhism.) Foreigners enjoy re- 
 ligious toleration ; but the Burmese rulers view 
 any attempts to convert the natives to the 
 Christian, or any other foreign faith, as an 
 interference with their allegiance, and there- 
 fore discourage them. — Encyclopedia Britan- 
 nica. 
 
 Mission — American Baptist Union. — The 
 first mission of the American Baptists in Bur- 
 mah was commenced by Kev. Adoniram Jud- 
 son,* who, with Mrs. Judson, landed at Ean- 
 goon, in July, 1813, and immediately began to 
 study the language of the country. So soon 
 as Mr. Judson had sufficiently mastered the 
 language, he prepared a tract, to be read in 
 manuscript by the Burmans, on the nature of 
 the Christian religion, containing an abstract 
 of its leading doctrines. This was his first 
 public labor. In 1816, Rev. George H. Hough 
 and his wife arrived at Rangoon, as mission- 
 aries of the Board. Mr. H. had been a print- 
 er, and on his way, at Serampore, had received 
 a printing-press and a font of Burman types, 
 which were presented to the mission, and which 
 had preceded him to Rangoon. Mr. Judson's 
 tract and a catechism were immediately print- 
 ed, and they were soon followed by a transla- 
 tion of the (jrospel of Matthew. In the summer 
 of 1818, the mission was for a time interrupted 
 by persecution, and Mr. and Mrs. Hough sailed 
 for Bengal, taking with them the printing- 
 press. Mr. Judson was absent at the time, but 
 Mrs. Judson determined to remain at her post, 
 and was soon afterwards rejoined by her hus- 
 band, and they together quietly waited till the 
 storm had passed away. 
 
 In September, 1818, the mission was in- 
 creased by the arrival of Rev, Messrs.. Colman 
 and Wheelock, with their wives. Mr. Whee- 
 lock, however, was, at the close of a single 
 year, compelled, by failing health, to withdraw 
 from the mission, and was drowned at sea on 
 his passage to Bengal. It was not till 1819 
 that the first zayat was opened for public 
 worship and religious teaching. It was a 
 small low building, situated on the Great 
 Pagoda road, and surrounded by the • mag- 
 nificent temples of heathenism. Here Mr. 
 Judson began his public labors as a Christian 
 teacher, and here for the first tim6 he cele- 
 brated the public worship of God. In June of 
 the same year, nearly six years after his arrival 
 in Rangoon, he had the satisfaction of bap- 
 tizing and receiving into the mission-church 
 Moung Nau, the first Burman convert to 
 Christianity. In the following November, two 
 others were in like manner baptized and ad- 
 mitted to the Church. These instances of bap- 
 tism, together with the increasing number of 
 inquirers who frequented the zayat, attracted 
 the interposition of the Budhist priests, also 
 of the Viceroy, and in consequence attendance 
 at the zayat for a time almost entirely ceased. 
 
 * For previous notice of Mr. Judson, see article on Am. 
 Jiaptut MintiioTiary Union. 
 
 This fact revealed to Mr. Judson most dis- 
 tinctly the precarious situation of the mission, 
 and determined him to go immediately to 
 Amarapura, the seat of the imperial govern- 
 ment, in order, if possible, to obtain tqjeration 
 for the Christian religion. Accompanied by 
 Mr. Colman, his associate in the mission, in the 
 winter of 1819, he ascended the Irrawaddy to 
 the capital, and presented himself before the 
 Burman king, with rich and showy offerings, 
 in order the better to secure a favorable hear- 
 ing for his humble request. The occasion was 
 one of great ceremony, but the petition of the 
 missionaries was contemptuously rejected, and 
 they immediately returned to Rangoon. This 
 stern repulse at first decided Messrs. Judson 
 and Colman to abandon Rangoon and retire to 
 the adjacent district of Arracan, which was 
 under the government of Bengal ; but on 
 announcing their decision and its cause to the 
 three Burman disciples, these recent converts 
 from heathenism evinced such fi^rmness of faith, 
 andv so eagerly entreated them not to abandon 
 the mission, that it was at length determined 
 that Mr. and Mrs. Judson should remain at 
 Rangoon, while Mr. and Mrs. Colman repair- 
 ed to Chittagong, in order to provide a place 
 of refuge, in case of persecution, for the mem- 
 bers of the mission, and others who might 
 hereafter join them. The plan, however, was 
 entirely frustrated, and Mr. Colman fell a vic- 
 tim to the fever of the climate, at Cox's 
 Bazaar, in 1822. 
 
 Meanwhile the mission at Rangoon was 
 awakening a wider and wider interest among 
 the people. In the summer of 1820, Mr. Judson 
 baptized seven additional converts, who at the 
 peril of their lives, professed their faith in 
 Christ. Among them was a learned teacher, 
 who was able to render most important service 
 to the missionaries in translating the Scrip- 
 tures, and in other labors of the mission. The 
 failing health of Mrs. Judson now rendered it 
 necessary that she should for a time leave the 
 climate, and in the summer of 1821, she em- 
 barked for Calcutta for the purpose of taking 
 passage thence to England and the United 
 States. The visit of this accomplished and 
 heroic lady to this country in 1822 and 1823, 
 was productive of many important benefits. 
 It awakened a deeper interest in the mission, 
 and enlarged the contributions of the churches, 
 and especially it was the occasion of several 
 young men dedicating themselves to the ser- 
 vice of Christ among the heathen. On her 
 return to Burmah she was accompanied by 
 Rev. Jonathan Wade and Mrs. Wade, and 
 they all reached Rangoon in December, 1823. 
 _ During the absence of Mrs. Judson the mis- 
 sion had been also reinforced by the arrival o( 
 the Rev. Jonathan Price, a physician as well 
 as minister, who with Mrs. Price arrived at 
 Rangoon near the close of the year 1821, and 
 about the same time Mr. and Mrs. Hough 
 also returned to the mission with the much' 
 
200 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 Dcc<led printinff-prcss and tvpes. So soon as 
 the Burman km^^ learned that Dr. Price was 
 possessetl of medical skill, he summoned him 
 to Ava, which wius now become the capital of 
 the emigre. Accordingly Dr. Price accompa- 
 nietl by Mr. Judson, who alone understood the 
 languiigc, proceeded up the Irrawaddy and pre- 
 sented themselves at the court of the Burman 
 monarch. Mr. J. was recognized by several 
 of the ministers of the court, and in one of his 
 visits at the palace he was particularly ques- 
 tioned by the king respecting his religion, and 
 whether any Burmans had embraced it, and 
 also commanded to show the members of the 
 court the nxanner in which he preached. Dur- 
 ing his stay of several months at the capital, 
 while Dr. Price was in high favor with the 
 monarch, Mr. Judson also had many opportu- 
 nities to commend the new religion to persons 
 in high official stations, and to bespeak for it 
 a toleration from the government. He returned 
 to Rangoon early in 1823, not without a pro- 
 mise given to the king that he would soon come 
 back and bring Mrs. Judson to reside with 
 him at Ava. Accordingly so soon as Mrs. J. 
 landed at Rangoon on her return from the 
 United States, it was arranged that Mr. and 
 Mrs. Judson should proceed to Ava, while Mr. 
 and Mrs. Hough, and Mr. and Mrs. Wade 
 were to remain at Rangoon. Scarcely had 
 these arrangements been carried into exe- 
 cution when the threatened hostilities be- 
 tween Burmah and Great Britain began to 
 spread their blighting influence over the pros- 
 pects of the mission. These hostilities broke 
 out in open war in May, 1824, when Rangoon 
 was captured by a small fleet of English trans- 
 ports which landed the forces of Europeans and 
 Sepoys under 'the command of Sir Archibald 
 Campbell. 
 
 The war which now began was not termin- 
 ated till the close of February, 1826, nearly 
 two years from its commencement, by the 
 treaty of Yandaboo, by the terms of which 
 the provinces of Arracan, Maulmain and Mer- 
 gui, together with a part of Martaban w^ere 
 ceded to the English. It of course, immedi- 
 ately suspended all the operations of the 
 mission at Rangoon, and compelled Messrs. 
 Hough and Wade to retire from the country 
 — while upon Messrs. Judson and Price and 
 their families at Ava it brought calamities and 
 sufferings, protracted through the entire con- 
 tinuance of the war, whose record forms one 
 of the most afiecting passages in the history of 
 modern missions. For a full account of these 
 sufiferings and the manner in which they were 
 endured by the heroic missionaries, the reader 
 is referred to the lives of Dr. and Mrs. Judson, 
 and also to the history of the American Bap- 
 tist Missions. 
 
 But, notwithstanding the frightful cruelties 
 to which the missionaries had been subjected, 
 they rendered most important services to the 
 Burman king in conducting the negociations 
 
 for peace, and on their conclusion, were strongly 
 urged to remain at Ava. Dr. Price acceded 
 to the renuest and passed the remainder of his 
 life at the Burman capital. Mr. and Mrs. 
 Judson, however, decided to withdraw with 
 the English commander, and henceforward to 
 prosecute the labors of the mission in that por- 
 tion of the country which had been ceded to 
 the British Government. The place finally se- 
 lected for this purpose, was Amherst, a town 
 planted by the English as the seat of govern- 
 ment for the newly acquired territories, and 
 named for Lord Amherst, at that tin]e the 
 Governor-General of India. Here he left his 
 family under the protection of the British flag, 
 and in the society of British officers, while he 
 accompanied, as translator, the embassy of 
 Mr. Crawford, who in the summer of 1826, re- 
 paired to Ava for the purpose of negociating 
 a commercial treaty with the king. Mr. Jud- 
 son's motive was to obtain, if possible, a clause 
 in the treaty for securing religious toleration, 
 an enterprise which terminated in failure, and 
 was also associated with events of the most 
 afflictive character ; for it was while detained 
 at Ava, by the duties of the embassy, that he 
 received the intelligence of the death of Mrs. 
 Judson, a calamity which was soon followed by 
 the death of his infant daughter. On his return 
 to Amherst he thus found himself a widowed 
 and childless man, on the f^ot where he had 
 hoped long to share the sympathies of the faith- 
 ful wife, who during the weary months of his im- 
 prisonment had ministered to his necessities 
 with a fidelity that never failed, and a fortitude 
 that was equal to every emergency. 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Wade had already removed to 
 Amherst, and early in 1827 they were joined 
 by Rev. George D. Boardman, and Mrs. Board- 
 man, as missionaries from the United States. 
 But Amhei-st proved to be inconveniently situ- 
 ated for the purposes of the capital of British 
 Burmah, and Sir Archibald Campbell soon re- 
 moved the head-quarters of the army to Maul- 
 main, a new town on the Salwen river, about 
 twenty-five miles from its mouth. It was at 
 first arranged that Mr. and Mrs. Boardman 
 should settle at Maulmain and that Mr. and 
 Mrs. Wade should remain at Amhei-st, while 
 Mr. Judson should divide his labors between 
 the two settlements. But Amhei-st declined 
 as Maulmain grew, and before the beginning 
 of 1828 the entire mission was removed to the 
 new seat of government. This arrangement, 
 however, was not designed to be permanent, 
 and in April, 1828, Mr. Boardman, with his 
 family, settled at Tavoy, a place^ which had 
 been fixed on as a station of the mission, about 
 one hundred and fifty miles south of Maulmain. 
 It was one of the principal strongholds of 
 Budhism in British Burmah, and was celebrated 
 for the magnificence of its temples, the number 
 of its priests, and the splendor of its idolatry. 
 Here Mr. Boardman immediately opened a 
 zayat, and commenced [the work of teaching, 
 
BURMAH. 
 
 20J 
 
 preaching, and conversing with all who would 
 visit him. 
 
 From this period the chief stations of the 
 mission in British Burmah, for several years 
 were at Mauimain and Tavoy. These were the 
 permanent homes of the missionaries and the 
 seats of their principal councils and labors. 
 Around these cities, in the neighboring jungle, 
 were also soon established numerous ou1>sta- 
 tions, or places of preaching and instruction, 
 which became at length the seats of Christian 
 churches and congregations. In Burmah Pro- 
 per, a little church was still maintained at 
 Rangoon, under the charge of a native pastor, 
 and the missionaries from Mauimain, in 1830, 
 resided several months in this part of the coun- 
 try — Mr. Wade at Rangoon, and Mr. Judson at 
 Prome, a large town on the Irrawaddy, about 
 midway between Rangoon and Ava. The main 
 operations of the mission, however, were of 
 necessity still confined to those portions of 
 Burmah which were under the government of 
 Great Britain. It was during Mr. Judson's 
 residence in Burmah Proper, and especially at 
 Rangoon, that he was able to hasten forward 
 the translation of the Scriptures, which he had 
 previously commenced. He also took advan- 
 tage of the great assemblages of merchants and 
 others, who came from all parts of the empire 
 to Rangoon, at the great festivals of their re- 
 ligion, to scatter as widely as possible the 
 tracts and books which he had printed, as well 
 as to preach the doctrines of the Gospel. 
 During one of these festivals, which was cele- 
 brated with unusual pomp, he was frequently 
 visited by persons from a great distance in the 
 interior, who came to him with the inquiries : 
 " Are you Jesus Christ's man ? Give us a 
 writing that tells about Jesus Christ." Others 
 would say to him, " Sir, we hear there is an 
 eternal hell. Pray give us a writing that will 
 tell us how to escape it;" and others still would 
 say, " We have seen a writing that tells about 
 an eternal God. Are you the man that gives 
 away such writings, for we want to know the 
 truth." He estimated the number who visited 
 the mission-house on this occasion alone, with 
 inquiries like these, at not less than six thou- 
 sand. These inquiries were gratifying fruits 
 of the labors of the mission, which had now 
 been in progress many years, and evidently 
 spread their influence to the remotest portions 
 of the Burman territories. . 
 
 In the summer of 1831, Mr. Judson returned 
 to Mauimain, where he found that part of the 
 mission greatly advanced during the thirteen 
 months of his absence. It had iDcen strength- 
 ened by the arrival of Rev. Messrs. Mason, 
 Kincaid, and Jones, with their wives. The 
 church had been enlarged by numerous bap- 
 tisms, and the missionaries had extended their 
 labors to distant villages in the jungle, at seve- 
 ral of which converts had been baptized. In 
 the annual report of the mission for the year 
 1831, it is stated that the number who had 
 
 been baptized during the year was in all two 
 hundred and seventeen. Of these eighty-nine 
 were Europeans, the rest being natives of the 
 country. During the eighteen years which had 
 elapsed since Mr. Judson first landed at Ran- 
 goon, the growth of the mission had been slow 
 but constant and healthy. Besides its original 
 seat it now had stations at Mauimain, Tavoy, 
 and Mergui, three of the principal cities on 
 that part of the coast which had been ceded 
 to the English. The missionaries were now 
 fourteen in number — seven males and seven 
 females, and the number who had been baptized 
 and admitted to the churches was three hun- 
 dred and ninety-three of whom two hundred and 
 eighty were natives, the others being chiefly 
 soldiers of British regiments stationed in the 
 country. The press had printed not less than 
 two hundred thousand tracts and books, among 
 which were the New Testament and several 
 books of the Old Testament. Schools were 
 also established and in successful operation at 
 all the stations in British Burmah, and the 
 mission, in all its departments, was just enter- 
 ing on that career of eminent usefulness and 
 success, which it has since pursued. 
 
 For many years after the commencement of 
 the mission in Burmah, the missionaries direct- 
 ed their entire efforts to the conversion of the 
 Burman race, without having much intercourse, 
 or becoming much acquainted with the other 
 races that inhabit the country. When, how- 
 ever, Mr. Boardman went to reside in Tavoy, 
 there was living in his family a man of middle 
 age, who had been a slave, but whose freedom 
 had been purchased by the missionaries. His 
 name was Ko-Thah-byu, one of the race of 
 Karens, or Karians, who are found in great 
 numbers in all parts of Burmah and the neigh- 
 boring kingdom of Siam. He had already 
 been converted to the Christian faith while at 
 Mauimain, and was baptized soon after his re- 
 moval to Tavoy. This man's conversion, and 
 his subsequent character, were the means of 
 attracting the particular attention of the mis- 
 sionaries to the singular race to which he 
 belonged, and of establishing among them a 
 mission, whose growth and success have scarce- 
 ly been equaled by any other of modern 
 times. 
 
 This interesting people are widely scattered 
 over the Burman empire, but are entirely dis- 
 tinct from the Burmans, by whom they are 
 regarded as inferiors and slaves. They have 
 adopted many of the customs and modes of 
 life of the Burmans ; they are generally indus- 
 trious, and, with the exception of intemperance, 
 are but little addicted to the vices of barbarian 
 tribes. Their condition is a degraded one, 
 being everywhere oppressed by their Burman 
 masters, and compelled to perform every kind 
 of servile labor. Hence they lead a wander- 
 ing life, and dwell in temporary villages plant- 
 ed in remote places, in order to escape the 
 exactions of their oppressors. With few ex- 
 
202 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 ccptions thoy reject Bndhism, and present the 
 extraordinary phenomenon of a people without 
 any form of religion or established priesthood, 
 but believing in the existence of God and in a 
 state of future retribution, and cherishing a set 
 of religious traditions resembling the truths of 
 revelation, which they transmit from age to 
 age in the poetic legends of their race. Blend- 
 ing with these traditions are some singular 
 prophecies asserting their future elevation as a 
 race, and that white strangers from across the 
 sea would come to bring them " the word of 
 God." It was on this account that when the 
 missionaries first became acquainted with them, 
 they evinced unusual interest in the truths of 
 the Gospel, and regarded them as the fulfilment 
 of the predictions which had been delivered to 
 them by the " Elders" of a former age. These 
 traditions of their race, acting on a people long 
 crushed by oppression, but possessed of unusual 
 moral sensibility, unquestionably gave the mis- 
 sionaries great advantages in their early labors 
 among the Karens. 
 
 Mr. Boardman, on his removal to Tavoy, im- 
 mediately found himself in intimate relations 
 with these people, many of whom were first 
 brought to him b^ the converted slave, Ko- 
 Thah-byu. The tidings of the arrival of a 
 " White Teacher" soon spread beyond the city 
 into the distant jungle, and brought the Karens 
 in great numbers to the house of the missionary 
 to listen to his instructions. As an illustra- 
 tion of their moral sensibility, the story of the 
 deified book is often mentioned. It had been 
 left in one of their villages some twelve years 
 before by a traveling Mussulman, who was 
 understood to have told the people it was to 
 be worshiped as sacred. Though entirely 
 ignorant of its contents, the person with whom 
 it was left carefully preserved it, and in virtue 
 of possessing it became a kind of sorcerer, of 
 great importance among the people. It was 
 brought one day to Mr. Boardman, and on 
 being unrolled from the coverings in which it 
 was enveloped, it proved to be the " Book of 
 Common Prayer and the Psalms," printed at 
 Oxford. From this period Mr. Boardman 
 devoted the remnant of his too brief life almost 
 exclusively to labors among the Karens. Early 
 in 1829, he made an excursion to the jungle 
 Mid mountains where their villages were most 
 numerous, and saw much of their condition and 
 modes of life in their native wilds. He also 
 conferred with the British Commissioner for 
 the district, and formed liberal plans for 
 schools, and other agencies of civilization, 
 while he gave a large part of every day to 
 preaching and conversation among the people. 
 In the summer of 1 830, however, his strength 
 had become exceedingly reduced by repeated 
 attacks of hemorrhage of the lungs, and he 
 sailed for Maulmain. Here he regained a 
 temporary strength, and after a few months 
 returned to Tavoy, where he found many con- 
 verts waiting to be baptized, and still many 
 
 more daily visiting the zavat for religious 
 inquiry and instruction. A large number 
 were baptized by Moung-Ing.one of the native 
 Burman preachers, under the direction of Mr. 
 Boardman. Just at this time Mr. and Mrs. 
 Mason arrived at Tavoy as auxiliaries to the 
 mission, and in their company and that of Mi-s. 
 Boardman, this excellent missionary made an 
 excursion into the country for the purpose of 
 meeting and baptizing a large number of con- 
 verts, who had often visited him in the city. 
 The journey of three days was accomplished, 
 and the baptism of thirty-four persons was per- 
 formed in his presence by Rev. Mr. Mason. 
 But ere he could reach his home in Tavoy he 
 sunk beneath the exhausting malady which had 
 long pressed upon his constitution. His tomb 
 is at Tavoy, and the marble slab which covers 
 it is inscribed with a simple epitaph, which 
 records his heroic services for the Karens of 
 the neighboring forests and mountains.* 
 
 The labors thus nobly begun by Mr. Board- 
 man were continued by Mr. Mason, his suc- 
 cessor in the mission at Tavoy, which has been 
 ever since that period almost entirely devoted 
 to the benefit of the Karens. They have, both 
 here and in other parts of Burmah, received 
 the Gospel with far greater readiness than the 
 Burmaus themselves. The mission, from its 
 very beginning, was marked by unusual pros- 
 perity and success. So rapid was the spread 
 of Christian truth, and the ennobling influence 
 which it exerts, that when, in 1832, Mr. Mason 
 visited the Karen villages, to the south of 
 Tavoy, which had been under the superin- 
 tendence established by Mr. Boardman, he was 
 surprised at their condition of neatness and 
 order, their regular industry, and their well- 
 ordered worship. In a letter written on the 
 spot, he gives utterance to his feelings in these 
 strong expressions : " I no longer date from a 
 heathen land. Heathenism has fled these 
 banks. I eat the rice and fruits cultivated by 
 Christian hands, look on the fields of Chris- 
 tians, see no dwellings but those of Christian 
 families. I am seated in the midst of a Chris- 
 tian village, surrounded by a people that love 
 as Christians, converse as Christians, act like 
 Christians, and, in my eyes, look like Chris- 
 tians." 
 
 The Karens, though they are usually, in 
 some imperfect degree, acquainted with the 
 Burman language, yet have a language of their 
 own, which, however, at this time, had not been 
 reduced to writing. This deficiency not only 
 presented an obstacle to the labors of the mis- 
 sionaries, but it also opposed an effectual 
 barrier to the progress of the people in re- 
 ligious knowledge. Accordingly, in 1832, Mr. 
 Wade, who had been longest acquainted with 
 their spoken tongue, with such aid as he could 
 derive from the Christian Karens, made an 
 alphabet of its elemental sounds, compiled a 
 
 » Life of Mr. Boardman, by Kev. Alonzo King. 
 
I 
 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 203 
 
 Bpelliug-book of its most common words, and 
 translated two or three of tlje tracts already 
 printed in Burman. This was the beginniug- 
 of a most useful and important work. It has 
 since been carried onward to its completion 
 and perfection ; and the Karens now rejoice in 
 a Avritten language taught in their schools, and 
 containing already the rudiments of a Chris- 
 tian literature. 
 
 The interval which elapsed between the 
 years 1832 and 1835 was marked by the arri- 
 val of large reinforcements of missionaries, 
 and also by the adoption of arrangements for 
 the more systematic prosecution of their diver- 
 sified labors. At the beginning of this period 
 the number of missionaries, both male and 
 female, at all the stations in Burmah, was four- 
 teen. On the first of January, 1833, were 
 added Kev. Thomas Simons, Mr. Hancock, a 
 printer, and his wife, and Miss Cummings, 
 a teacher ; and in the following June, Eev. 
 Messrs. Brown and Webb, with their wives, 
 and Miss Harrington, afterwards Mrs. Simons, 
 the latter company repairing almost immedi- 
 ately to Rangoon. In connection with the 
 former of these missionary companies were 
 also received two additional printing-presses, 
 a large font of types, and the materials for a 
 type foundry, by means of which tracts and 
 portions of the Scriptures were soon printed 
 at Maulmain in the Burman, the Karen, and 
 the Taling or Peguan languages. These mis- 
 sionary companies were followed by a third 
 company, who landed at Amherst on the 6th 
 of December, 1834, consisting of Rev. Messrs. 
 Howard, Yinton, Dean, and Comstock, and 
 Mr. Osgood, a printer, with their wives, and 
 Miss Gardner, who was to be employed as a 
 teacher. Mr. Dean was destined for a new 
 mission just at that time established in the 
 kingdom of Siam. Thus within the space of 
 two years there arrived in Burmah reinforce- 
 ments numbering in all not less than eighteen 
 missionaries, both male and female, with othel*- 
 important accessions to the apparatus of the 
 mission. During the period in question, also, 
 Mr. Judson brought to its completion his 
 translation of the Bible into the Burman 
 tongue. It had been his daily task amid the 
 vicissitudes of many years. It had been his 
 solace in grief, his companion in solitude, his 
 support in weariness and depression. It was 
 completed on the 31st of January, 1834, and 
 on its completion the heroic and faithful mis- 
 sionary " retires alone, and with the last leaf 
 of his imperishable work in his hand, he prays 
 for the forgiveness of Heaven on all the sins 
 that have mingled with his labors, and de- 
 voutly commends it to the mercy and the 
 grace of God, to be used as an instrument in 
 converting the heathen to Himself." Mr. Kin- 
 caid, who was attached to the department of 
 the mission in Burmali Proper, in April, 1833, 
 ascended the Irrawaddy from Rangoon, and, 
 after landing at a multitude of villages on the 
 
 banks of the river, reached Ava, the Burman 
 capital, on the 30th of May, where he main- 
 tained ft branch of the mission for a period of 
 more than four years. Early in 1836 he was 
 joined by Mr. Cutter, the printer, from Ran- 
 goon, who also brought one of the printing- 
 presses ; but the mission was jealously watched 
 by the Budhist priests and the officers of gov- 
 ernment, and though Mr. Kincaid had an op- 
 portunity of studying Burman character in 
 favorable circumstances, and also of exploring" 
 the country beyond Ava, he was able to ac- 
 complish but few results that have contributed 
 to the advancement of the mission in that 
 portion of the empire. He, however, lingered 
 at Ava, with several of his associates of the 
 mission, until the summer of 1837, when, in 
 consequence of a civil war and the accession 
 of a new king, who threatened again to com- 
 mence hostilities with the English, they aban- 
 doned the station, and soon afterwards, with 
 the missionaries at Rangoon, repaired to Maul- 
 main or to other portions of British Burmah. 
 They left at Ava a church of twenty-seven 
 members, which had been gathered by their 
 labors. 
 
 One of the most important undertakings 
 belonging to this period of the mission was 
 tlfe attempt fb unite the Christian Karens, 
 who were scattered over the jungle, in compact 
 villages, where they might pursue the avoca- 
 tions of regular industry, and be united in 
 Christian churches, supplied with ministers and 
 the ordinances of the Gospel. In this manner 
 a number of Christian villages were formed 
 under the auspices of the missionaries, and 
 adopted as out-stations of the mission. The 
 principal of these villages were within a dis- 
 trict sixty miles around Maulmain and Tavoy, 
 and among them were Wadesville, Newville, 
 Chummerah, Dong-Yahn, and Matah. They 
 were composed principally of Karens, but 
 their formation belongs to a period prior to 
 any separate organization of the Karen and 
 Burman missions. As a step in the civiliza- 
 tion of the people, and their progress in the 
 social virtues which Christianity enjoins, it 
 was exceedingly important, and, it is believed, 
 has been productive of many beneficial results. 
 
 In April, 1835, the American Baptist Tri- 
 ennial Convention — the name which the mis- 
 sionary organization of the Baptists of the 
 United States then bore — held its eighth tri- 
 ennial session at Richmond, Ya. Twenty- 
 three years had now elapsed since, in poverty 
 and weakness, in misgiving and doubt, this 
 association had been formed for the spread of 
 the Gospel among the heathen. The number 
 of missionaries who were now in the field, and 
 the results which they had been enabled to 
 accomplish, filled its members with new energy 
 and hope. Large and liberal plans were de- 
 vised, and assurances were given of more effec- 
 tive aid from the churches in all parts of the 
 country. The Board of the Convention de- 
 
204 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 tcrminod to send one of their mniibor, Rev. 
 Howard Malcom, D.D., to visit the stations 
 and advise with the missionaries rt^^octinjr 
 the best mode of conduct injj their labors. 'J'his 
 service was performed by Dr. Maleom, who 
 sailed from the United States in the year 1835, 
 and returned in 1838, durin*? which period he 
 visitetl the missions of the Board in Burmah 
 and other countries of Asia.* 
 
 The early periods of a Christian mission 
 planted in a heathen land are necessarily 
 periods of experiment. This was particularly 
 true in the infancy of modern Protestant 
 missions. They were undertaken without ex- 
 perience, and the best mode of conducting 
 them was but imperfectly apprehended. Even 
 now, after the lapse of more than forty years, 
 many questions are still unsettled and many 
 principles yet remain to be adequately tested 
 and establi"shed. This remark finds frequent 
 illustration in the operations of the Burman 
 mission at the period of which we now write. 
 In this outline, however, it is impossible to do 
 more than refer to the leading features of the 
 general plan in accordance with which those 
 operations were conducted. 
 
 The general organization of the mission for 
 some years subsequent to 1835. was but an 
 expansion and development of tnat which had 
 been established on the settlement of the mis- 
 sionaries in British Burmah. The three great 
 stations of the mission were at the three cap- 
 ital cities of the provinces ceded to the English, 
 Maulmain, Tavoy and Mergui. Besides these, 
 a station, as we have already seen, was main- 
 tained, not without several interruptions, at 
 Rangoon, in the kingdom of Burmah, and also 
 for short intervals at Ava and at Prome. In 
 the districts around each of these central sta- 
 tions, there were numerous villages designated 
 as out-stations, at which Zayats for preaching 
 were maintained and in some of which schools 
 were established and churches were organized. 
 At some of these villages missionaries and 
 teachers resided during as much of the year 
 as the climate would allow, while to others 
 they made only occasional visits, the preaching 
 being performed principally by the ordained 
 native assistants, who had now become quite 
 numerous both among Burmans and Karens. 
 The labors of the missionaries were exceed- 
 ingly varied, and amid the inequalities of an 
 eastern climate and the imperfect physical com- 
 forts with which they were obliged to be con- 
 tent, often proved exceedingly injurious to 
 the constitution. At the principal stations of 
 the mission they were (iigaged in frequent 
 public preaching, in daily conversation with 
 all who would come to inquire, jn the study 
 of the language, in the writing of tracts and 
 the translation of the Scriptures, and in super- 
 intending the operations of the several presses, 
 of which they were now in possession. Dur- 
 
 * See Malcom's Travels in South-Eastern Asia. 
 
 ing the rainy season they were for the most 
 part restricted {o the large towns and fully 
 occupied in the employments above indicated. 
 So soon, however, as the raias had erased, 
 they went forth from their homes to visit the 
 villages and out-stations that were scattered 
 over the jungle within the field of their opera- 
 tions. Traveling in litters over the mountains 
 or embarking in boats upon the rivers, they 
 made their way once or twice each year to all 
 the out-stations of the mission — preaching and 
 distributing books as they went, instructing 
 the churches and their pastors, inspecting the 
 schools — baptizing new converts, forming new 
 churches, planting new stations according to 
 the wants of the rural population whom they 
 met. The incidents of their excursions to the 
 jungle are often recorded in the journals of 
 the missionaries, and they furnish the best illus- 
 tration which can be given of the modes of 
 life in the mission. 
 
 The schools were for the most part under the 
 direction of the ladies who were attached to 
 the several stations, and it sometimes happened 
 that a solitary female teacher would spend the 
 entire dry season at one of these distant vil- 
 lages, engaged in the work of instructing the 
 rude people around her. This was especially 
 true of the villages of Dong-Yahn and Chum- 
 merah, the former thirty-five and the latter 
 some sixty miles from Maulmain. At these 
 places schools were maintained for several 
 years by Miss Macomber at one and Miss 
 Cummings at the other, which were brought 
 to a close only by the early death of these in- 
 defatigable and heroic ladies. Separate schools 
 were usually maintained for the Burmans and 
 Karens, and in some places for other races of 
 the country, and those in Maulmain and Tavoy 
 were in part supported by allowances from the 
 British East India Company, and embraced in- 
 struction in English and in the rudiments of 
 general education as well as of religious 
 knowledge. This arrangement, however, was 
 not permanent, as it proved to impair the con- 
 trol which it was necessary that the mission- 
 aries should exercise over the schools. In ad- 
 dition to these a higher seminary was estab- 
 lished at Tavoy in 1836, for instnicting native 
 converts of suitable qualifications in the doc- 
 trines of Christianity, in order to prepare 
 them to preach the Gospel to their country- 
 men. It was opened in May of that year with 
 eighteen pupils, of whom twelve were Karens, 
 — five were Burmans and Peguans, and one 
 was a Hindoo. It was at first placed under 
 the charge of Mr. Wade, but on the failure of 
 his health, at the close of 1837, the school at 
 Tavoy was suspended and another especially 
 for Burmans was immediately opened at 
 Maulmain, to which the Burman pupils were 
 removed. This was placed under the charge 
 of Rev. Edward A Stevens, who has ever since 
 devoted himself largely to this department of 
 labor. 
 
BURMAH. 
 
 205 
 
 In 1835 a branch of the mission was com- 
 menced by Kev. Mr. Comstock and Mrs. Coni- 
 stock at Kyouk-Phyoo, in Arracan, one of the 
 provinces which had been ceded to the English 
 by the treaty of Yandaboo in 1826, containing 
 a population of about two hundred and fifty 
 thousand souls of the same races as the people 
 of Burmah. This part of the mission however, 
 was but imperfectly sustained for several years, 
 in consequence of the feeble health of Mr. and 
 Mrs. Comstock, and the early death of Rev. 
 Levi Hall and Mrs. Hall, who arrived in Arra- 
 can in 1837, but died before their labors be- 
 gan. After a year's absence Mr. and. Mrs. 
 Comstock, in 1839,. returned to Arracan bring- 
 ing with them Rev. Lyman Stilsou and his 
 wife, but they now settled in Ramree, where 
 they hoped to find a climate more favorable to 
 health than that of Kyouk-Phyoo. They were 
 accompanied by four or five native assistants, 
 by whose aid they immediately established 
 schools and the other agencies usually employ- 
 ed in a mission. This was the condition of 
 affairs in Arracan when Messrs. Kincaid and 
 Abbott arrived in the province in 1840, on 
 finding themselves obliged to abandon their 
 stations in Burmah Proper. Their object in 
 going to Arracan was to be in a situation as 
 favorable as possible for keeping up a commu- 
 nication with the native churches and pastors, 
 and the numerous inquirers whom they had 
 left under the cruel sway of the Burman king. 
 For this purpose Mr. Kincaid went to Akyab, 
 where he established a mission for the Arra- 
 canese, and Mr. Abbott repaired to Sandoway, 
 near the Burman frontier, in order to be as 
 near as possible to the Karens in the districts 
 of Bassein and Rangoon. He soon contrived 
 to send information of his residence, to the 
 people on the otlier side of the mountain ridge 
 which separates the two countries, and though 
 the passes were constantly guarded by jealous 
 Burman officers, the eager Karens found their 
 way in great numbers across the mountains to 
 Mr. Abbott, some asking for baptism, others 
 seeking books for their countrymen at home, 
 and others still desiring to remain and study 
 with the missionary. They came from the 
 districts of Maubee and^ Pantanau, and even 
 from the vicinity of Raj^goon, telling him of 
 the progress of the Gospel among their coun- 
 trymen. Through a wide extent of country, 
 village after village received the Gospel, and 
 within the first year of his residence at San- 
 doway Mr. Abbott baptized nearly two hun- 
 dred of those simple-hearted and interesting 
 people. He made occasional visits to the Bur- 
 man frontier and entered the territory of the 
 king, always finding scores of converts await- 
 ing his coming, and desiring to be baptized. 
 In one of these excursions in which he was 
 absent thirty-one days, he visited all the church- 
 es along the frontier, received reports from 
 all the native pastors and preachers, and ad- 
 ministered the ordinance of baptism to two 
 
 hundred and seventy-nine persons who professed 
 their faith in Christ. During the year 1844 
 the number of persons baptized by Mr. Abbott 
 and his native assistants through the regions 
 here referred to was upwards of two thousand, 
 and the whole number thus baptized within 
 five years after his arrival at Sandoway was 
 considerably more than three thousand, a num- 
 ber larger than had at that time been baptized 
 in all the other missions of the American Bap- 
 tist Board taken together. But these num- 
 bers but imperfectly indicate the extent to 
 which the Gospel began to exert its influence 
 on the Karens of that district. Multitudes 
 more were instructed in its doctrines, and be- 
 came obedient to its precepts, though they 
 never presented themselves to the missionary 
 for baptism. An entire change came over the 
 population of the district. They assumed an 
 aspect of higher civilization. They became 
 honest and industrious ; the vices common to 
 their race disappeared, and they were eager 
 for knowledge, and every kind of personal and 
 social improvement. 
 
 In 1843 the persecution of the Christian 
 Karens, which for a time had been intermitted, 
 was renewed with increased violence, and these 
 poor people were subjected to cruel and venge- 
 ful sufferings inflicted on them by their Bur- 
 man oppressors. Large numbers of them were 
 seized and chained together, and marched away 
 in companies to distant prisons, from which 
 they were liberated only by the payment of a 
 ransom which exhausted their entire wealth. 
 They bore these persecutions with heroic Chris* 
 tian fortitude. They refused to abandon the 
 faith which they had embraced, and maintain- 
 ed it with a firmness which commanded the 
 respect even of their persecutors, and com- 
 mended the Gospel still more widely to the 
 people around them. So frequent and violent 
 were these persecutions that the Karens, in 
 large companies, abandoned their homes and 
 their country and fled across the mountains to 
 Arracan. In the course of a single season Mr. 
 Abbott received upwards of two hundred fam- 
 ilies at Sandoway. Many others went to other 
 regions, and many perished by the way from 
 the ravages of the cholera ; but the emigration 
 of those humble martyrs for conscience sake, 
 still went on till the districts to which they 
 belonged were well nigh depopulated. They 
 awakened the sympathy not only of the mission- 
 aries, but also of the resident English, who made 
 contributions for their comfort and support. The 
 pages of missionary history do not record a 
 more signal display of divine grace than was 
 seen among these simple dwellers among the 
 mountains of Arracan. With but little instruc- 
 tion from human lips, they seem to have been 
 largely taught of the Ho^' Ghost. With no 
 outward aids or encouragements, they clung to 
 their faith with a tenacity that nothing could 
 subdue, and in the day of frightful persecution 
 they literally gave up all for Christ. 
 
206 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 Such were the labors of Mr. Abbott at San- 
 doway, during this interesting period of Karen 
 awakening and persecution. He was to them not 
 merely their religious teaclicr, but protector and 
 friend. lie provided for the necessities qf the 
 emigrant families, found them places of settle- 
 ment and productive occupation, and enlisted in 
 their behalf the sympathies and active charities 
 of the humane Euroijeaus who were residing in 
 the country. These varied cares and labors, 
 however, combining with the heaviest of do- 
 mestic afflictions, soon made serious inroads up- 
 on his strong constitution, and in 1845 he was 
 compelled to seek a change of climate by a 
 brief return to the United States. 
 
 Meanwhile Messrs. Kincaid and Stilson re- 
 mained for two or three years at Akyab, where 
 they found a small native church, which had 
 been planted many years before by some Eng- 
 lish missionaries. Their arrival immediately 
 gave new life to the Christian disciples, and in 
 a little time they were surrounded by a large 
 congregation, among whom several appeared to 
 be sincere inquirers respecting the new religion. 
 This indication of interest, however, soon awak- 
 ened the jealousy of the Budhist priests and 
 other persons of influence, but the church still 
 increased in spite of the opposition, and another 
 was now planted at an out-station called Cru- 
 da, five days' journey from Akyab. In the 
 course of the year 1841, the missionaries were 
 visited by several persons belonging to a tribe 
 dwelling among the mountains, and known as 
 the Kcmees. They were, in many respects, es- 
 pecially in their docility and moral sensibility, 
 very similar to the Karens. These people 
 soon sent to Mr. Kincaid a formal invitation, 
 signed by their chief and several of his sub- 
 ordinates, urging him to visit them in their 
 mountains, and promising to send their children 
 to school, if he would establish one in their vil- 
 lage. The invitation was soon followed by a 
 visit from the chief himself, who came in per- 
 son, to urge his request. Both the missionaries 
 soon afterwards visited these interesting people 
 and in several subsequent visits and frequent 
 intercourse with them at Akyab, Mr. Stilson 
 mastered the peculiarities of their dialect, and 
 prepared to reduce it to writing, in order that 
 a branch of the mission might soon be estab- 
 lished among them. But Mr. Kincaid was 
 soon obliged, by ill-health, to leave the pro- 
 vince ; and the absence of Mr. Abbott and 
 the lamented death of both Mr. and Mrs. 
 Comstock, left Mr. and Mrs. Stilson the soli- 
 tary conductors of the entire mission in Arra- 
 can. The plans which had been formed for 
 the Kemees were, in consequence, of necessity 
 abandoned, and they have since been but im- 
 perfectly carried into execution. 
 
 While these changes, both joyous and sad, 
 were in progress in Arracan, the branches of 
 the mission established in the other provinces of 
 British Burmah, or Tenasserim, as it was now 
 called, were still prosecuted with varying suc- 
 
 cess. Their principal stations, as has be(>u 
 mentioned, were at Mauhnain, Tavoy and Mor- 
 gui, the two former of which had become so 
 extensive as to be organi'/ed into separate mis- 
 sions, and to be designated as such. At Maul- 
 main there were residing in 1840, Messrs. Jud- 
 son, Howard, Stevens, Osgood and Simons, in 
 connection with the Burman department, and 
 Mr. Vinton, in connection with the Karen de- 
 partment of the mission. At Amherst, also, 
 was a secondary station, where Mr. Hiuswell 
 waa engaged in preaching to the Talings or 
 Peguans, and In translating the New Testa- 
 ment into their language. The ladies of the 
 mission, at both these stations, were usually 
 employed in the schools, some for Burmans 
 and others for Karens. Around Maulmain 
 were now seven other tributary stations, all for 
 Karens, which were generally under the charge 
 of native assistants, but were visited by the 
 missionaries at least once during every dry sea- 
 son. The number of churches thus connected 
 with what was called the Maulmain mission 
 was seven, containing in all, four hundred and 
 fifty-four members. 
 
 The mission at Tavoy, though embracing a 
 single Burman church, was devoted almost ex- 
 clusively to the Karen population of the city 
 and district. There were dwelling there in 
 1840, only Messrs. Wade and Mason, with 
 their wives, Messrs. Bennett and Hancock 
 being at the time absent on account of ill- 
 health. Around Tavoy were eight outrstations, 
 all having churches, now numbering four hun- 
 dred and seventy-three members. Mergui was 
 a tributary station of this mission, and was the 
 residence of Mr. Ingalls, a preacher in Burman, 
 and Mr. Brayton, a preacher in Karen. In 
 the vicinity of Mergui, and under the care of 
 its missionaries, were also eight out-stations, 
 with six churches, numbering in all, one hun- 
 dred and thirty-one members. Under ihe di- 
 rection of the missionaries at Maulmain were 
 thirty native assistants and seven schools of 
 different grades, for a population of several dif- 
 ferent races, while at Tavoy there were sixteen 
 schools, nearly all for Karens, and twenty na- 
 tive assistants. The schools and the native as- 
 sistants, both at Tavoy and Maulmain, however, 
 were supported in part by contributions of be- 
 nevolent individuals residing in those cities. 
 
 Mr. Judson, though usually preaching on the 
 Sabbath to the Burman congregation at Maul- 
 main, devoted his largest labor to the work of 
 revising his translation of the Burman Bible, 
 a work which he prosecuted with the utmost 
 care, and which he found to cost him even more 
 time and labor than the translation itself. It 
 was committed to press in October, 1840, 
 twenty-seven years after his first attempt at 
 learning the language. It has been often ex- 
 amined by critics and philologists acquainted 
 with the Burman tongue, and* has been, we be- 
 lieve, invariably pronounced to be an excellent 
 translation. It w'ill for ever remain in the lit- 
 
BURMAH. 
 
 207 
 
 erature of tlie country, the noblest memorial 
 of the illustrioiis missionary who first intro- 
 duced the Gospel to the Burman people. Soon 
 after its completion Mr. Judson began the pre- 
 paration of a Dictionary in English and Bur- 
 mese, a work to which he had been repeatedly 
 urged by missionaries, and which he now un- 
 dertook at the special request of the Board, as 
 an important and much needed aid in prosecut- 
 ing the mission. The Burman Theological 
 School at Maulmain, was continued by Mr. 
 Stevens till 1841, when, in consequence of the 
 small number of pupils, it was suspended till 
 1844, and then reopened, though with only 
 eight members. The Burman race, though 
 that to which the missionaries were originally 
 sent, at this time had received the Gospel with 
 far less readiness than the Karens, whom they 
 everywhere despised and oppressed. Superior 
 in intelligence and in social position, they yet 
 clung to their ancient superstitions, and turned 
 away from the revelation of God which had 
 been given to them. The Karens, on the con- 
 trary, though furnished with more limited 
 means of instruction, presented one of the 
 most remarkable instances on record, of a peo- 
 ple readily accepting the Gospel of Christ. Its 
 influence was now perceptible wherever their 
 villages were scattered throughout the pro- 
 vinces of Tenasserim, in the elevation of indi- 
 vidual and social eharacter and the growth of 
 all the kindly charities and domestic virtues of 
 civilized life. The entire New Testament was 
 not translated into their language till 1843, 
 but long before that time, the churches and 
 schools which had sprung up among them 
 were so numerous as to far transcend the ability 
 of the missionaries to give them adequate su- 
 pervision and instruction. ^ The officers of the 
 East India Company, in these provinces, co- 
 operated with the missionaries in promoting 
 their improvement, and protecting them from 
 Burman oppression, and though of necessity 
 left, in a great degree, to the care of native 
 assistants, who Avere but imperfectly instructed 
 themselves, they yet exhibited a striking illus- 
 tration of the power of Christian truth over 
 the characters and manners of a rude and bar- 
 barous people. In order to supply these ob- 
 vious deficiencies in the Karen department of 
 the mission, it was decided by the Board of 
 managers, to establish, without delay, a school 
 for the instruction of Karen preachers, and 
 Rev. J. G. Binney, pastor of the First Baptist 
 Church in Savannah, Ga., was appointed to 
 assume the charge of it. He sailed from Bos- 
 ton, in November, 1843, in company with Rev. 
 E. B. Bullard, and Mr. T. S. Ranney, a prin- 
 ter, with their wives, and Miss Julia Lathrop, 
 all appointed to the mission at Tavoy, with the 
 exception of Mr. and Mrs. Binney, who were 
 to be stationed at Maulmain. They were fol- 
 lowed in the succeeding year by Rev. E. B. 
 Cross and his wife, and also a teacher for the 
 Karens. 
 
 The missionaries at Mergui, at this period, 
 became acquainted with a singular people in- 
 habiting the islands on the coast and known 
 by the general name of Salongs. They evinced 
 much interest in the teachings that were im- 
 parted to them, and a large number of them 
 professed their faith in Christ and were bap- 
 tized. Their language was reduced to writing 
 by Mr.^ Stevens, and schools were established 
 for their instruction, for the support of which 
 a thousand rupees were contributed by Major 
 Broadfoot, the liberal-minded and generous 
 Commissioner for the district of Mergui. 
 
 In April, 1834, Dr. Judson had married 
 Mrs. Sarah II. Boardman, who since the death 
 of Mr. Boardman, had been connected with 
 the mission at Tavoy, as one of the most effi- 
 cient and devoted of its members. From the 
 date of her marriage to Dr. Judson she had been 
 residing at Maulmain, and had shared in all 
 the vicissitudes of labor and patience through 
 which her husband had been called to pass. But 
 her health had now become seriously and it was 
 apprehended fatally impaired, and her physi- 
 cians prescribed a voyage beyond the tropics 
 as the only means of prolonging her valuable 
 life. Accordingly, in April, 1845, Dr. Judson 
 and Mrs. Judson embarked at Maulmain on a 
 voyage to the United States. He took with him 
 his two Burman interpreters, thinking thus to 
 hasten forward the preparation of the Burman 
 and English Dictionary to which he was then 
 devoting his constant labors. On his arrival 
 at the Isle of France, however, he sent back 
 the interpreters, hoping from the apparent im- 
 provement of Mrs. Judson's health, that he 
 might soon return himself. But in this he was 
 doomed to be disappointed. The health of 
 Mrs. Judson soon began again to decline, and 
 she died on her arrival at St. Helena, Sept. 1, 
 1845. The now solitary missionary, with his 
 three eldest children, who had accompanied 
 their parents, proceeded on his voyage and ar- 
 rived at Boston on the 15th of the following 
 October. He remained in the United States 
 till the following July, a period of nearly nine 
 mouths, when he took his final leave of his na- 
 tive land, and returned to his station in the 
 mission. 
 
 The circumstances and results of this visit 
 of Dr. Judson to the land of his birth were 
 marked with unusual interest, and are worthy 
 of a brief mention in this narrative. He had 
 been absent thirty-three years, during which he 
 had been living in the midst of oriental hea- 
 thenism, associating with races of inferior 
 civilization and speaking languages of strange 
 and uncouth structure. From the honored 
 Board of Commissioners under whose auspi- 
 ces he had first become a missionary, he had 
 withdrawn, and for many years had been acting 
 under the direction and depending upon the 
 support of those whom he had never seen. 
 The country too, which he had left thirty-three 
 years before, had entirely changed in nearly 
 
208 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 every phase of its social and religious life. 
 Art and commerce and Christianity bad mul- 
 tiplied their wondrous triumphs on every 
 hand. The missionary was bewildered at the 
 amazing contrast, between all that he had left 
 and all that he had now gazed upon. The 
 homes of his boyhood — the places of his edu- 
 cation — the large cities and the humble vil- 
 lages were alike changed, till the land seemed 
 no longer to bo the land of his nativity. He 
 was everywhere received with an honor and 
 respect for which nothing could have prepared 
 him. He was publicly welcomed at Boston by 
 the oflScers of the Board, and in every city 
 which he visited throughout the land he was 
 received with an interest and attention such as 
 are seldom accorded to any private individual. 
 Members of every Christian denomination and 
 citizens of every rank were eager to do honor 
 to a man who had proved himself, by a lifelong 
 service, to be a benefactor of mankind. In 
 November, 1845, a month after his arrival, he 
 was present at the meeting of the American 
 Baptist Missionary Union, and for the first time 
 became acquainted with the brethren and 
 friends under whose guidance and support the 
 noble labors of his missionary life had been 
 performed. His presence everywhere awakened 
 the liveliest interest and enthusiasm. The 
 history of American missions seemed to be 
 embodied in him, and the cause in which he 
 had so long toiled and suffered touched new 
 sensibilities in the hearts of the people. Dur- 
 ing his visit in the United States, he married 
 Miss Emily Chubbuck, of Hamilton, New 
 York, with whom he embarked for Maulmaiu 
 on the 11th July, 1846. The same ship also 
 bore to the missions Eev. Messrs. Harris and 
 Beecher and their wives, and Miss Lydia 
 Lillybridge ; Mr. and Mrs. Harris being 
 appointed to the Karen department of the 
 mission at Maulmain, and Mr. and Mrs. 
 Beecher to Arracan, while Miss Lillybridge 
 was to remain with Dr. and Mrs. Judson in 
 the Burman department of the mission. They 
 reached the port of their destination in the 
 following December, and soon afterwards en- 
 tered their several spheres of labor. 
 
 During the absence of Dr. Judson, Mrs. 
 Mason and Mrs. Ingalls had been removed by 
 death, Mr. Simons had returned to the United 
 States and . Mr. and Mrs. Osgood had with- 
 drawn from the mission in consequence of ill 
 health. The brutal and tjTannical Burman 
 king Thara-wadi, who usurped the throne in 
 1837, had been overthrown, and a regency had 
 been formed which it was hoped would prove 
 less unfriendly to the labors of the mission- 
 aries. In this new state of affairs. Dr. Judson, 
 a few weeks after his arrival, repaired to Kan- 
 goon in order to ascertain the disposition of 
 the new government with respect to the mis- 
 sion. He continued to reside there for several 
 mouths, but received neither encouragment 
 nor prohibition from either the local or the 
 
 imperial government. Few ventured to visit 
 him for religious instruction, and though he 
 was gradually gathering the scattered mem- 
 bera of the Rangoon church, he at l(;ngth 
 learned that an order had been issued to 
 watch the missionary's house, and apprehend 
 any who might visit him to inquire about the 
 new religion.* Dr. Judson at first thought 
 of proceeding to Ava, again to solicit tolera- 
 tion from the imperial government, but in the 
 limited resources of the treasury of the mis- 
 sion, he was compelled to abandon the attempt 
 and soon afterwards returned to Maulmain, 
 where he continued to reside and to work 
 upon his Dictionary with but little interruption 
 to the end of his life. 
 
 In August, 1847, Mr. Abbott left the United 
 States on his return to Arracan. He went by 
 the way of England, and hastening by the 
 overland route to Calcutta, reached Sandoway 
 early in December. By journeying thus rap- 
 idly he was able to fulfil an engagement which 
 he had made with his native assistants, that 
 if his life should be spared he would meet them 
 in January, 1848, at Ong-kyoung, where he 
 had given them his parting instructions three 
 years before. He immediately announced his 
 arrival among the scattered villages of the Ka- 
 rens, both in Arracan and across the mountains 
 in Burmah Proper. The assistants came to- 
 gether at Ong-kyoung according to their ap- 
 pointment, early m January, and reported the 
 condition of their several flocks and the labors 
 in which they had been engaged ; and most 
 encouraging was the report which they made. 
 Of the two ordained ministers, Tway-poh, who 
 was at the head of the churches in Arracan, 
 had baptized six hundred converts ; and Myat- 
 Kyan, who, though living in Arracan, had 
 preached principally among the Karens of 
 Burmah, had baptized five hundred and fifty. 
 The period of the missionary's absence had 
 been one of remarkable progress in the inter- 
 ests of the mission. Mr. Abbott had left 
 twenty native assistants, who were preachers 
 but not ordained to the ministry. Of them 
 two had died, and one had been suspended by 
 his associates, while sixteen others had been 
 added to the number, and the thirty-three na- 
 tive preachers now reported not less than 
 twelve hundred converts in their several dis- 
 tricts, who were waiting to be baptized and 
 received into the churches. 
 
 In the autumn of 1847, Rev. VV. Moore and 
 his wife, and in the foljowing summer. Rev. 
 Messrs. Yan Meter, C. C. Moore, and Judson 
 Benjamin, and their wives, w^re appointed 
 missionaries, to Burmah, and sailed for the 
 scene of their future labors ; one of them being 
 designated to the Burmese department of the 
 mission at Arracan, and the other three to 
 
 * For a full account of the effect of this order, see Pre- 
 sident Wayland's Memoir of Dr. Judson, Vol. H. Cliap. 
 vii. The same work is also filled with interesting passages 
 relating to the progress of the Burman missions. 
 
BURMAH. 
 
 209 
 
 tliG Karen missions at Maulmain, Sandoway, 
 and Tavoy. 
 
 Early in 1849, the Burman and the Karen 
 departments of the mission at Maulmain were 
 separated from each other, and for the purpose 
 of greater economy and efficiency were organ- 
 ized as separate missions, tlie Karen mission 
 having already been established in a separate 
 part of the city, which had received the name 
 of Newton. In the same manner and at about 
 the same time, the Karen department of the 
 mission in Arracan was erected into a separ- 
 ate mission of which the principal seat was San- 
 doway. Thus organized in independent bodies, 
 these missions greatly extended the sphere of 
 their influence, and by a judicious division of 
 their labors and endeavors, entered upon an 
 era of enlarged prosperity and usefulness. 
 From the report of the managers in 1850, just 
 after the new organization of these missions, 
 it appears that there were attached to the 
 Maulmain Burman Mission, Kev. Messrs. Jud- 
 son, Stevens, and Stilson, Mr. Ranney, a print- 
 er, and their wives. Rev. Mr. Simons, and Miss 
 Lillybridge, a teacher, all of whom resided in 
 Maulmain, while Rev. Messrs. Wade, Haswell, 
 and Howard with their families, were members 
 of the mission, but absent on account of ill- 
 health. In addition to these there were thir- 
 teen native assistants, three of whom were sta- 
 tioned at Amherst. Attached to the Maul- 
 main Karen Mission at this period, were Rev. 
 Messrs. Binney, Harris, and W. Moore, with 
 their wives, and Miss Yinton and Miss Wright, 
 teachers. Rev. Mr. Yinton and his wife being 
 absent in the United States. In addition to 
 these were thirty-four native assistants, of whom 
 five were ordained preachers, and three were 
 teachers, at Maulmain and the numerous out- 
 stations of the mission. Connected with the 
 nine churches of these two missions were up- 
 wards of nineteen hundred members, of whom 
 more than seventeen hundred were Karens. 
 There were also at Maulmain, a theological 
 school for Karen preachers, and a normal 
 school for teachers, together with a number of 
 other schools, both for the Karen and the Bur- 
 man population. In the mission at Tavoy, of 
 which Mergui had now become a station, were 
 Rev. Messrs. Mason, Bennett, Cross, Benjamin, 
 and Brayton, with their wives, Mr. Brayton re- 
 siding at Mergui. This mission has been al- 
 most exclusively for the Karens, and around 
 its two stations were fourteen out-stations at 
 the Karen villages which are scattered over 
 the jungle, where were also employed under 
 the direction of the missionaries, nineteen na- 
 tive assistants of various orders. In its twenty- 
 seven churches were also about eighteen hun- 
 dred members. The Arracan Mission was 
 now established at two stations, Akyab and 
 Ramree, the former embracing Rev. Messrs. C. 
 0. Moore and L. Ingalls; the latter Rev. 
 Messrs. Knapp and Campbell, with their wives, 
 who had been appointed but had not arrived 
 14 
 
 at the station. Near Akyab was the single 
 out-station of Cruda, and the number of native 
 assistants attached to the mission was six. 
 The Sandoway mission, which was designed for 
 the Karens in its immediate vicinity, and also 
 for those beyond the mountains in Burmah 
 Proper, where the Gospel could not be preach- 
 ed, comprised at this time Rev. Messrs. Abbott, 
 Beecher, and Yan Meter, with their wives. It 
 embraced one station and thirty-six out-stations, 
 and in addition to its missionaries, gave em- 
 ployment to forty-four native preachers and 
 assistants. The number of churches was thirty- 
 six, and the whole number of church members 
 about four thousand five hundred. 
 
 Of these several missions, that at Sandoway 
 probably extended its labors over the widest 
 sphere, for it was designed for the persecuted 
 Karens who dwelt in the neighboring districts 
 of Burmah Proper, and who, beneath the se- 
 vere oppressions of a cruel government, evinced 
 the most extraordinary readiness to receive the 
 Gospel of Christ. Though each of the missions 
 was to some extent supported by contribu- 
 tions gathered from its own churches, yet this 
 was true of the Sandoway mission more fully 
 than of any other. The efforts and sacrifices 
 of these humble Christians to secure the bless- 
 ings of the Gospel and to maintain its institu- 
 tions in their villages, afford the noblest proof 
 of the sincerity of their faith and the fervor of 
 their piety. Several churches erected chapels 
 at their own expense ; others supported their 
 native pastors, while all contributed in some 
 way or other to the pecuniary maintenance of 
 the mission. Mr. Abbott repeatedly attempt- 
 ed to obtain a permanent footing for the mis- 
 sion in Burmah Proper, where so many of its 
 converts were found, but though he occasionally 
 visited Bassein and the neighboring districts 
 he was wholly unsuccessful in securing the 
 toleration of the government or even a per- 
 mission for permanent residence. He, how- 
 ever, was accustomed as frequently as practi- 
 cable to meet the native pastors and preachers 
 of these districts for the purpose of becoming 
 familiar with their labors, and advising in 
 their prosecution ; and at these interviews he 
 would often administer the rite of baptism to 
 large numbers of converts whom the assistants 
 brought to him for the purpose. At these and 
 other similar meetings in all the missions, the 
 missionaries were accustomed to impart in- 
 struction and give advice to the assistants and 
 the converts, on all subjects which might re- 
 quire their attention, whether relating to the 
 doctrines and duties of the Gospel, or their 
 own interests and prosperity as a people. 
 
 Associated with the mission at Tavoy were 
 the labors which were undertaken among the 
 Salongs, a rude and oppressed people, about 
 10,000 in number, scattered among the islands 
 on the coast ; and with the mission in Arracan 
 was connected a department for the Kemees, 
 an interesting people, among the mountains of 
 
210 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 that province, whose character and condition, 
 as has already boon statoil, have enlisted the 
 itympathit« of the niissionai-ies. 
 
 Thi' rt>turn of Dr. .) uiison to ]3urmah, and his 
 aettlcDiont at Maulmain, after an attempt to 
 QiUblish himself at Rangoon, or at Ava, have 
 already been mentioned. Here he continued 
 to reside, constantly occupied with the pre- 
 paration of the Barman and English Diction- 
 ary, to which the closing years of his life were 
 principally devoted. He was excluded from 
 the kinn^dom of Burmah ; but at Maulmain, 
 under the protection of the British govern- 
 ment, and with many facilities for the prose- 
 cution of his work, he gave himself to the com- 
 pletion of a task, whose accomplishment he 
 fondly hoped would confer immeasurable ad- 
 vantages on all future missionaries, and thus 
 greatly promote the progress of the Gospel 
 wherever the Burmaa language is spoken. 
 The English-Burmese portion had already been 
 completed and nearly printed ; and the Bur- 
 mese and English portion was well advanced 
 when the venerable compiler was obliged to 
 lay down the pen with which he was com- 
 pleting his noble work. In the autumn of 
 1849, his enfeebled constitution began to give 
 signs of decay, and in a few weeks he was com- 
 pelled to abandon his labors, and seek such 
 means of recruiting his strength as the coun- 
 try and the climate would'allow. He made a 
 trip to Mergui, and repaired to Amherst for 
 sea-bathing ; but his strength continued to 
 decline the more rapidly in consequence of an 
 attack of fever, and his physicians pronounced 
 a protracted voyage the only prescription with 
 which they could associate any hope of benefit. 
 In accordance with their directions, he took 
 passage early in April, on board a French 
 ship bound to the Isle of France. It was 
 several days before the vessel was fairly at sea ; 
 but the ocean airs brought no invigoration to 
 his worn and fevered frame. The pilot left 
 the vessel on the 8th of April, and on the 12th 
 of the same month Dr.* Judson breathed his 
 latest breath, and on the same day his remains 
 were buried at sea. His life had been wholly 
 devoted to the mission, which, in solitude and 
 
 gjrsecution, he had planted on the shores of 
 urmah ; and the tidings of his death awaken- 
 ed a profound sense of bereavement and sorrow 
 among its members. As the intelligence spread 
 from land to land, it carried grief to Christian 
 hearts in every part of the world ; while in the 
 country of his birth, and among the churches 
 with which he was particularly connected, it 
 called forth the sinccrest demonstrations of 
 respect for his memory, and of gratitude for 
 the good he had wrought. Mrs. Judson, her- 
 self in declining health, and those of his children 
 who were in Burmah, returned to the United 
 States in the autumn of 1851, and retired to 
 the home of her parents, at Hamilton, N. Y. 
 Here she has employed the hours which could 
 be spared from the care of her family, in en- 
 
 richinj^ the literature of Christian missions 
 with the productions of her own beautiful ge- 
 nius, and especially in contributing many a pas- 
 sago of touching reminiscence and life-like de- 
 lineation to the memoirs of her departed hus- 
 band — passages without which, in the absence 
 of other materials, that admirable work must 
 have been divested of many of its most attrac- 
 tive features. As we write these closing pages 
 of this rapid sketch of the missions in Bur- 
 mah, the beautiful and heroic life of Mrs. 
 Judson has been brought to a peaceful close, 
 in June, 1854, at her home in Hamilton. The 
 works which *ghe contributed to the literature 
 of the age, are a fitting illustration of her rare 
 genius, while the brief records of her mission- 
 ary career will transmit to other ages the 
 memorials of her piety, and the sentiments of 
 duty, faith and love which ever dwelt in the 
 depth of her woman's heart. 
 
 In October, 1849, there sailed from the 
 United States, under appointment for the 
 several missions in Burmah, Rev. Messrs. Har- 
 vey E. Knapp, Harvey E. Campbell, and their 
 wives, and Miss Elizabeth T. Wright. In the 
 course of the year 1850, they were followed 
 by Rev. Eugenio Kincaid and Mrs. Kincaid, 
 who had formerly been connected with the mis- 
 sions, and also by Dr. John Dawson, a physi- 
 cian, and Rev. Benjamin C. Thomas, and their 
 wives ; Mr. Thomas being appointed especially 
 to Mergui, or the Tavoy mission, while Mr. 
 Kincaid and Dr. Dawson were commissioned 
 to repair, if possible, to Ava, or to some other 
 leading place in the kingdom of Burmah, and 
 there to commence a mission. They arrived 
 at Maulmain early in 1851, and repaired to 
 Rangoon in the following March, where, hav- 
 ing established their families, they commenced 
 their labors, designing, as soon as the rainy 
 season ceased, to ascend the Irrawaddy to 
 Ava. They soon found themselves jealously 
 and closely watched by the Burman governor of 
 Rangoon. They were forbidden to distribute 
 books or to associate with the people, and 
 those who visited them were punished with 
 fines, scourging and imprisonment. At length, 
 early in May, a message came from the king, 
 that " the American teachers were to be treat- 
 ed with all possible favor," and an entire 
 change was immediately wrought in the man- 
 ner and bearing of the governor. Public wor- 
 ship, and the various operations of a mission 
 were commenced. A medical dispensary was 
 opened, and multitudes of Burmans and Ka- 
 rens, many of them from a great distance in 
 the interior, both converts and inquirers, 
 flocked to the residence of the missionaries. 
 The scriptures were widely circulated; four 
 Burmans and five Karens soon received the 
 rite of Christian baptism, and the Christian 
 converts of former years were gathered from 
 their wide dispersion to the instructions of the 
 missionaries and the ordinances of the Gospel 
 
 But in the midst of these scenes of tempo- 
 
BURMAH. 
 
 211 
 
 rary encouragement which marked the sum- 
 mer and autumn of 1851, was preparing an 
 event that was destined to alter the entire 
 condition of the Burman people, and to pre- 
 pare the way for the universal dissemination 
 of the Gospel over a thickly peopled country, 
 in which the missionaries had sought, in vain, 
 for nearly forty years, to obtain a permanent 
 footing. This event was the war between 
 Burmah and Great Britain— a war which was 
 wantonly provoked by the faithlessness of the 
 Burman government and its reckless encroach- 
 ments on the interests and rights of the Bri- 
 tish East India Company. Hostilities were 
 commenced, in November, 1851, by the un- 
 expected firing of the Burman stockades, on 
 some British war steamers which were ascend- 
 ing the river. Negotiations were attempted, 
 in order to settle difficulties which had been of 
 long standing, but with no other effect than to 
 delay a war which had now become inevitable. 
 The relations of the two parties became daily 
 more and more disturbed, and after several col- 
 lisions between the forces, war was formally 
 declared on February 15th, 1852. The mis- 
 sionaries, and other foreign residents at Ean- 
 goon, took refuge on board the English ships, 
 in the preceding December, and soon after- 
 ward sailed to Maulmain, where they remained 
 till Eangoon, Martaban, and Bassein had 
 fallen before the advance of the British arms. 
 So soon as hostilities ceased, they returned to 
 what was formerly Eangoon, but they found 
 the ancient city almost entirely destroyed, and 
 a new city already rising from the ruins — laid 
 out according to English ideas of order and 
 regularity, and rapidly filling up with a popu- 
 lation gathered from all parts of India. They 
 immediately established themselves in a part 
 of the town well suited to their purpose, in a 
 large Kyoung or Burman monastery, and re- 
 sumed their labors as missionaries among all 
 classes of the heterogeneous population. Un- 
 usual success soon crowned their labors. 
 British sMdiers were converted to Christ ; and 
 Burmans and Karens, no longer deterred by 
 the jealous tyranny of priests or rulers, eagerly 
 embraced the Gospel. They were soon after- 
 wards joined by other missionaries from Maul- 
 main and Sandoway, who came to preach the 
 Gospel in a region from which they had hith- 
 erto been excluded, but where they found 
 multitudes, especially of Karens, already in- 
 structed in its doctrines and clinging to its 
 hopes. Meanwhile British arms were every- 
 where triumphant, and on the 20th of Decem- 
 ber, 1852, the entire southern portion of Ifce 
 kingdom of Burmah, including tjie ancient 
 province of Pegu, was incorporated with the 
 territories of British India. This district em- 
 braces the whole of Burmah, lying between 
 the Sahvcn river on the east, the Yoma 
 mountains on the west, and the Bay of Ben- 
 gal on the south, and extending north to the 
 19th parallel of north latitude, about fifty 
 
 miles above the city of Prome. It embraces 
 an area of about 45,000 square miles, and a 
 population of 2,500,000 : Burmans, Karens, 
 Peguans, and the other races common in Bur- 
 mah. 
 
 The portion of this territory around Marta- 
 ban is annexed to the Amherst district, of 
 which Maulmain is the capital, while the re- 
 maining part is divided for the purposes of 
 civil government into five separate districts, 
 each of which is placed under the charge of an 
 Assistant-Commissioner, who is accountable to 
 the Commissioner of the territory, and through 
 him to the Governor-General of India. These 
 districts are Pegu — which includes Eangoon, 
 Toungoo, Henthada, Prome, and Bassein. 
 Such is the region which, as the result of the 
 late war, has been liberated forever from Bur- 
 man oppression, and incorporated with the 
 British possessions in the East. It embraces 
 districts in which, in spite of intolerance and 
 persecution, the Gospel has already won some 
 of its most remarkable triumphs among the 
 Karens, and it is now placed under the general 
 rule of a liberal-minded and pious Commis- 
 sioner,''^ who, during his long residence in the 
 East, has proved himself the active and unfail- 
 ing friend of Christian missions, and the moral 
 improvement of the people. 
 
 In anticipation of this altered condition of 
 the missions in Burmah, and the new fields 
 which the progress of British power might 
 open for their occupancy, the Executive Com- 
 mittee of the Board of Managers requested 
 the missionaries in Burmah to assemble in 
 convention in Maulmain in the spring of 1853, 
 to consider what changes should be made iu 
 the organization and modes of prosecuting the 
 missions. They also appointed Eev. Solomon 
 Peck, D.D., the Senior Corresponding Secre- 
 tary of the Board, and Eev. James N. Granger, 
 Pastor of the First Baptist Church in Provi- 
 dence, E. I., as a deputation to visit these, 
 and the other missions of the Board in Asia, 
 clothed with full discretionary authority to 
 decide questions which might require immedi- 
 ate decision, and to act for the Committee in 
 all matters which could not be referred to the 
 Committee for consideration. Eeceiving* in- 
 structions according to the nature of the pow- 
 ers with which they were clothed, the members 
 of the deputation embarked on their distant 
 embassy. They met with the convention, 
 which assembled at Maulmain, according tc 
 appointment, April 4th, 1853, and continued 
 its sessions for six weeks, to the 17th of May, 
 The convention was attended by all the mis^ 
 sionaries in Burmah, except those who were 
 detained by causes not within their control, 
 and all the leading subjects connected with 
 the organization and conduct of the missions 
 were thoroughly scrutinized and discussed, and, 
 
 * Captain Arthur P. Phayre, who is intimately acquaint- 
 ed with the missions in Burmah, and extends all proper 
 facilities for their pr'isecution. 
 
212 
 
 BUKMAH. 
 
 f^l fj,,. o.,..,.. ♦;,„.> niuch iufonnation was ob- 
 tain .0 portions of the recently 
 coiK^ . - which were deemed favor- 
 able tor missionary oiKTations. The principal 
 questions on which the deputation were called 
 to act related to the following : 
 
 1. The selection of points at which new 
 missions were to be established in the conquer- 
 ed territory, and the designation of mission- 
 aries to commence them. 2. The manner in 
 which the missions should be conducted ; what 
 should be embraced in their work, and by 
 whom and in what proportions that work 
 should be performed, together with the agen- 
 cy of the native preachera and pastors., and 
 their relations to the missionaries. 3. The 
 true uses of mission schools, and the proper 
 limits to the operations of the^mission press. 
 In relation to all these subjects, certain gen- 
 eral conclusions were furnished by the con- 
 vention as the result of the experience of 
 the missionaries ; and these conclusions, to- 
 gether with the general precepts and examples 
 contained in the New Testament, touching the 
 propagation of the Gospel, were made the basis 
 of the action of the deputation. This action 
 was also understood to be in accordance with 
 the views of the missionaries themselves, and 
 though involving many important changes and 
 some personal sacritices, it has by them been 
 cheerfully adopted and carried into execution, 
 to the larger extension and the increased effi- 
 ciency and usefulness of the missions. 
 
 Of these changes, the plan of this sketch re- 
 quires that we notice only those which relate to 
 the reorganization of the missions in order to 
 secure the difiusion of the Gospel with the 
 greatest success through the territory recently 
 annexed to British India. For the purpose 
 of accomplishing this, several important mod- 
 ifications were made in the missions already 
 existing, and five new missions were established 
 or are contemplated : one in each of the sev- 
 eral districts into which the territory has been 
 divided ; and to carry these changes into efiect, 
 the missionaries in Burmah, instead of being 
 stationed at five or six of the principal cities, 
 are now widely scattered in nine or ten, and 
 are brought in contact with a vastly larger 
 proportion of the population of the country. 
 Schools in some instances have been discon- 
 tinued or their operations restricted ; and the 
 printing establishments have been brought 
 together in one, and that one at Maulmain, in 
 order to liberate the missionaries from other 
 cares, that they may give themselves more fully 
 to preaching the Gospel to the heathen. 
 
 In that portion of the country which is still 
 subject to the Burman king, no mission has 
 been established, or is at present contemplated. 
 The war with the British East India Company 
 has wrought no change in his exclusive and 
 despotic policy, and the teachers of Christiani- 
 ty are stiil shut out from all access to the peo- 
 ple. Indeed, though the war has ceased, it can 
 
 not bo said that a permanent peace has been 
 established, no treaty has been concluded, and 
 no concessions have been made. The barbarian 
 king has yielded up his territory only to the 
 superior force of the civilized enemy, whose 
 hostilities he had provoked, and the time can- 
 not be distant, when the same necessity again 
 recurring, will compel him to surrender the last 
 vestige of independent jurisdiction, and to bo- 
 come a tributary of Great Britain. Mean- 
 while, the mission at Ava, which had been con- 
 templated, and to which missionaries had been 
 appointed, is, for the present, abandoned, and 
 the )iew missions have been established only in 
 those portions of Burmah which have been 
 placed under British jurisdiction, and where the 
 missionaries may prosecute their work in secu- 
 rity beneath the protection of British power. 
 These new missions are, 1, at Rangoon, in the 
 district of Pegu ; 2, at Bassein, in the district of 
 Bassein ; 3, at fcJhwaygyeen, in the district of 
 Amherst; 4, at Prome in the district of 
 Prome ; 5, at Toungoo, in the district of Touu- 
 goo. A mission is also contemplated at Ueu- 
 thada, in the district of the same name, and 
 ultimately at Tounghoop on the coast of Arra- 
 can, the terminus of the great road to Prome. 
 The missions which have been established all 
 lie within the valleys of the three great rivers, 
 along which are scattered the most thickly- 
 peopled cities and villages of both Burmans 
 and Karens. Throughout these districts, the 
 uninterrupted progress of British arms, and the 
 quiet establishment of British rule, have been 
 attended with results of great importance in 
 their bearing on the interests of the missions 
 and the progress of the Gospel. The reign of 
 intolerance and persecution is ended. The 
 despotism beneath which the people had groan- 
 ed for ages has been broken up for ever, and 
 'has given place to a government of justice and 
 right, and more than all, the religious system 
 of the country has lost its hold on the minds 
 of men, in part, no doubt, from its being iden- 
 tified with the defeated cause, while Gforistian- 
 ity has assumed a higher authority, from ite 
 being the religion of the conquerors and rulers 
 of the East. While it has been, embraced, 
 and is now professed by whole villages of 
 Karens, it is also making its way in the most 
 encouraging manner among the Burmans at 
 each of the several stations where it is regularly 
 preached, alike in the old and the new provinces 
 of British Burmah. At some of these sta- 
 tions it is already planted in the faith and 
 wrought into the daily lives of the people, so 
 th^t if the missionaries were all withdrawn it 
 would still be perpetuated to future genera- 
 tions, and at all of them it finds as inviting a 
 field as is now presented in any part of the 
 world. The prayers of the earliest mission- 
 aries have been answered and their fondest hope 
 has been fully realized. 
 
 During the year 1852, Rev. Messrs. M. H. 
 Bixby and J. L. Douglas, both of whom had 
 
BURMAH. 
 
 213 
 
 n pastors of churclies in this country, and 
 iGV. Messrs. C. Hibbard, D. Whitaker, J. 11. 
 isbet, T. Allen and A. T. Eose, were ap- 
 inted missionaries in Burmah, and soon after- 
 ards repaired to their several stations; and dur- 
 j^ the year 1853, Kev. A. R. Crawley was also 
 ded to the number. The missionaries of the 
 American Baptist Missionary Union who are 
 stationed in the several provinces of Burmah, 
 are thirty-one ; several of whom are now on 
 temporary visits to the United States. With 
 these are associated about the same number 
 of female assistants and one hundred and forty- 
 five native assistants, of whom some fifteen or 
 twenty are ordained preachers. These mis- 
 sionaries and their assistants, according to the 
 latest report of the Managers of the Mission- 
 ary Union, are distributed among the follow- 
 ing missions, which are now in operation in the 
 several districts of Burmah, viz. ; 
 
 I. Maulmain Burman Mission. — It com- 
 prises Rev. Messrs. Has well, Howard, Stillson, 
 Bixby and Mr. Ranney a printer, with their 
 wives and five native preachers and assist- 
 ants. The Burman church at Maulmain 
 numbers 138 members and that at Amherst 
 which is also included in this mission, numbers 
 28 members. At Maulmain the printing 
 operations both in the Burman and Karen lan- 
 guages for all the Burman missions are at pre- 
 sent concentrated. This mission has (1854) 2 
 stations, 5 missionaries, 5 female assistants, 5 
 native preachers and assistants, 3 churches, 170 
 members, 6 day-schools, 100 pupils. 
 
 II. Maulmain Karen Mission. — This is es- 
 tablished in a distinct portion of the city, 
 which among the missionaries is styled, New- 
 ton. It comprises Rev. Messrs. Wade, Ben- 
 nett, Hibbard, W. Moore and Whitaker with 
 their wives and nineteen native assistants. It 
 is the seat of a theological school for training 
 native preachers and of a normal school for 
 the education of teachers. Around Maulmain, 
 which is the central station, are fifteen out-sta- 
 tions, and the entire mission embraces fourteen 
 churches, numbering about 900 members. Its 
 operations are designed for the Karen race in 
 the district of Amherst, which includes the 
 adjoining and newly organized province of 
 Martaban, whose seat of government is also 
 at Maulmain. This mission has (1854) 1 sta- 
 tion, 15 out-stations, 5 missionaries, 6 female 
 assistants, 19 native preacliers and assistants, 
 14 churches 869 members, 2 boarding schools, 
 44 pupils, 3 day schools, 40 pupils — total 5 
 schools, 84 pupils. 
 
 III. Tavoy Mission. — This is a mission both 
 for Burmans and Karens, though its operations 
 have hitherto been principally among the lat- 
 ter. It embraces Rev. Messrs. Cross, Thomas, 
 Benjamin, and Allen, with their wives, and 
 two Barman and twenty Karen native assist- 
 ants. The operations of the mission are de- 
 signed to comprise the provinces both of Ta- 
 
 voy and Mergui ; though at present the mis- 
 sionaries all reside at Tavoy. 
 
 In 1854, 1 station, 20 out-stations, 4 mission- 
 aries, 4 female assistants, 22 native preachers 
 and assistants, 22 churches, 1,046 members, 2 
 boarding-schools, 96 pupils, 15 day schools, 
 300 pupils ; total, 17 schools, 396 pupils. 
 
 lY. Arracan Mission. — This mission, both 
 Burman and Karen, is designed to embrace 
 the whole province of Arracan. It has now 
 two stations, Akyab and Sandoway, with out- 
 stations at Cheduba and Ramree, Kyouk-Phyoo 
 having been abandoned as a station by the 
 advice of the deputation in 1853. At Ak- 
 yab the missionaries are stationed. They are 
 Rev. Messrs. C. C. Moore and Mrs. Moore, Rev. 
 A. T. Rose, and Mrs. B. H. Knapp, Mrs. C. 0. 
 Campbell ; Mr. Knapp having died in 1853, 
 and with them are associated eight native as- 
 sistants. 
 
 In 1854, 2 stations, 2 out-stations, 2 mission- 
 aries, 3 fqipale assistants, 8 native preachers 
 and assistants, 1 church, 60 members, 1 day- 
 school, 15 pupils. 
 
 Y. Bassein Mission. — This is in the new ter- 
 ritory, and embraces many of the churches and 
 Christian villages in Burmah, formerly con- 
 nected with the mission at Sandoway in Arra- 
 cant It is designed hereafter to be both 
 Karen and Burman, though the Gospel has 
 thus far been embraced principally by the Ka- 
 rens of the Bassein district. The mission em- 
 braces in the Karen department, Rev. J. S. 
 Beecher, and Rev. J. R. Nisbet, Rev. H. L. 
 Yan Meter, and Mrs. Yan Meter, Mrs. Beech- 
 er having died in March, 1854, while on a 
 voyage to the United States ; in the Burman 
 department. Rev. J. L. Douglass and Mrs. 
 Douglass. Rev. E. L. Abbott is also attached 
 to this mission, but he is now in the United 
 States. Bassein is on a river of the same 
 name, one of the outlets of the Irrawaddy, 
 about 60 miles from its mouth ; and around 
 this principal station are fifty out-stations, 
 among which are scattered fifty-six native 
 preachers and assistants. The region is filled 
 with Karen converts, who, under the Burman 
 despotism, were obliged to cross the Yoraa 
 mountains to Sandoway, to receive instructions 
 and be baptized by the missionary, and these 
 churches are now very numerous. The Bur- 
 mans, since the Gospel has had access to them, 
 are evincing a most encouraging interest in 
 its truths. 
 
 In 1854, 1 station, 50 out-stations, 5 mission- 
 aries, 3 female assistants, 56 native preachers 
 and assistants, 50 churches, 5,000 members, 1 
 boarding-school, 80 pupils, 20 day-schools, 280 
 pupils — total, 21 schools, 360 pupils. 
 
 YI. Rangoon Misnon. — This mission, like 
 the others which have been mentioned, has 
 both a Burman and a Karen department, and 
 though established where the original mission 
 in Burmah was first planted, is yet, in its pre- 
 sent organization, to be regarded as a new 
 
214 
 
 BURMAH. 
 
 mission. In the Bui-man deportment it em- 
 braces Rev. Mt^jwi-s. Stevens, lugalls, Dawson, 
 and Crawley, with their wives, and six native 
 preachers and assistants; and in the Karen 
 department llev. J. H. Vinton, Mrs. Vinton 
 and Miss Vinton, with twenty-nine native 
 preachers and assistants. The Karen depart- 
 ment of the mission is established at Kemmen- 
 dine, a town about three miles north-west of 
 Rangoon. There arc two Burman churches 
 in the mission, one at Rangoon, and one at 
 Kambet, an out-station in the vicinity, and 
 they together number 106 members. The Kar 
 reu churches are twenty-three in number, most 
 of them having been formed by missionaries 
 from Maulmaiu, in the occasional visits which 
 they made during the period in which the 
 country was closed to the Gospel by the des- 
 potism of the government. They contain 1476 
 members. 
 
 In 1854, 2 stations, 32 outstations, 5 mission- 
 aries, 6 female assistants, 29 native preachers 
 and assistants, 25 churches, 1573*members, 1 
 boarding-school, 180 pupils. 
 
 VII. Prome Mission. — This is a new mission, 
 exclusively Burman, established near the city 
 of Prome, on the Irrawaddy, the centre of the 
 district of the same name, the most northerly 
 of the districts comprised in the territory re- 
 cently annexed. The mission is established at 
 Shwaydoung, a chief seat of Burman education, 
 eight miles distant from Prome. It was com- 
 menced in January, 1854, according to the 
 recommendation of the recent deputation, by 
 Rev. Messrs. Kincaid and Simons, who about 
 that time removed thither with their families 
 and native assistants. As in almost all the 
 large towns of Burmah, there were residing 
 there several Christian converts, who welcomed 
 the missionaries with the utmost eagerness. 
 As the kingdom of Burmah is still closed to 
 the labors of the missionaries, the design of 
 establishing a mission at Ava, is for the pre- 
 sent abandoned, and Messrs. Kincaid and Daw- 
 son, who were appointed for that purpose, have 
 been assigned — the former to the Prome and 
 the latter to the Rangoon mission. The mis- 
 sion at Prome or Shwaydoung has been com- 
 menced with two missionaries, and two female 
 assistants, (Messrs. Kincaid and Simons, and 
 their wives) and two native assistants. It has 
 one station and two out-stations. 
 
 In 1854, 1 station, 2 out-stations, 2 mission- 
 aries, 2 female assistants, 2 native preachers 
 and assistants ; no church has yet been formed, 
 and no schools have been established. 
 
 VIII. Skwaygyeen Mission. — This is both a 
 Burman and a Karen mission, established in 
 1853, at Shwaygyeen, a large town at the 
 junction of the Shwaygyeen and the Sitang 
 rivers, about 100 miles northward from Ran- 
 goon, It is one of the chief places in Marta- 
 ban which now is in the district of Amherst. 
 The mission has been commenced by Rev. 
 Messrs. Harris and Brayton, both of whom are 
 
 missionaries for the Karens, whose villages are 
 exceedingly numerous and populous in the re- 
 gion. They have with thorn two native assist- 
 ants, and the auspices of the mission are most 
 encouraging. 
 
 In 1854, 1 station, 2 missionaries, 1 female 
 assistant, 2 native preachers, 1 church, 11 mem- 
 bers ; no schools have yet been establishcii. 
 
 IX. Toungoo Mission. — Toungoo is a large 
 walled city, the chief town of the district of 
 the same name, on the Sitang river, about one 
 hundred miles above Shwaygyeen. It is one of 
 the places fixed on by the deputation as the seat 
 of a new mission in the conquered territory. 
 The mission was commenced by Rev. Dr. 
 Mason, who, with two or three assistants, 
 reached the city in October, 1853. It is the 
 centre of a large population of Burmans, Shy- 
 ans and Karens, and the mission is designed 
 for all these races. The Karens of the region 
 regarded the arrival of a missionary, — bring- 
 ing his sacred books printed in their own lan- 
 guage, as a fulfilment of the ancient prophetic 
 traditions of their race, and evinced even more 
 than their wonted readiness to hear and be- 
 lieve the Gospel. A little church was soon 
 organized, and the native assistants appointed 
 to their respective labors, when Dr. Mason, 
 whose health was already greatly impaired, 
 was obliged to leave the mission for a time 
 and return to the United States. The care of 
 the mission has been committed to Tau Quala, 
 an experienced Karen preacher from Tavoy. 
 He has with him one Burmese assistant. 
 
 In 1854, 1 station, 3 out-stations, 1 mission- 
 ary, 1 female assistant, 2 native preachers and 
 assistants, 1 church, 7 members, 1 boarding- 
 school, 7 pupils, 3 day-schools, 36 pupils ; 
 total, 4 schools and 43 pupils. 
 
 X. HoitJwda Mission. — Henthada is the capi- 
 tal of the district of the same name, and is situ- 
 ated on the Irrawaddy, at the point where that 
 stream branches into the Bassein and Rangoon 
 rivers. The district embraces the very fertile 
 and populous delta lying between these rivers. 
 A mission has been appointed for Henthada, 
 but no missionaries have yet actually arrived 
 to establish it. — Prof. W. Gammell. 
 
 TABLE OF MISSIONS IN BURMAH FOR 1854. 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 1? 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 1 
 < 
 
 F 
 
 Si 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 .5 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 "3 
 
 s 
 
 en 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 £ 
 
 |S 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 cS 
 
 (S 
 
 a 
 
 (2 
 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 124 
 
 31 
 
 31 
 
 145 
 
 117 
 
 8,736 
 
 7 
 
 407 
 
 48 
 
 771 
 
 55 
 
 3 
 
 1,178 
 
 BURNSniLL: A station of the Free 
 Church of Scotland in South Africa, about 18 
 miles east of Lovedale. 
 
 BUSHMEN : A nomadic race of Hotten- 
 
BUSHMEN— CALPENTYN. 
 
 215 
 
 tots in South Africa, who hve a_ wandering 
 life, remote from towns, in a condition of ex- 
 treme degradation. They have, says Mr. Mof- 
 fat, neither house nor shed, neither flocks nor 
 herds. Their most delightful home is afar off 
 in the desert, the unfrequented mountain pass, 
 or the secluded recesses of a cave or ravine. 
 They remove from place to place, as conveni- 
 ence or necessity requires. The man takes his 
 spear, and suspends his bow and quiver on his 
 shoulder ; while the woman frequently, in ad- 
 dition to the burden of a helpless infant, car- 
 ries a mat, an earthen pot, a number of ostrich 
 egg-shells, and a few ragged skins, bundled on 
 her head or shoulders. Hunger compels them 
 to feed on everything edible. Ixias, wild gar- 
 lic, the core of "^aloes, gum of acacias, and sev- 
 eral other plants and berries, some of which 
 are extremely unwholesome, constitute their 
 fruits of the field ; while almost every kind of 
 living creature is eagerly devoured, lizards, 
 locusts and grasshoppers not excepted. The 
 poisonous, as well as innoxious serpents, they 
 roast and eat, extracting first the venom of the 
 former, with which they poison the points of 
 their arrows. Their dwellings are hardly fit 
 abodes for the beasts of the field. In a bushy 
 country, they will form a hollow in a central 
 position, and bring the branches together over- 
 head. Here the man and his wife, with per- 
 haps a child or two, lie huddled in a heap, on 
 a little grass, in a hollow spot not larger than 
 an ostrich's nest. Where bushes are scarce, 
 they form a hollow under the edge of a rock, 
 covering it partially with reeds or grass, and 
 they are often found in fissures and caves of 
 the mountains. In these places, they lie close 
 together, like pigs in a sty. They are ex- 
 tremely lazy, so that nothing will rouse them 
 to action but excessive hunger. They are 
 total strangers to domestic happiness. The 
 men have several wives, but conjugal affection 
 is little known. They take no great care of 
 their children, and never correct them, except 
 in a fit of rage, when they almost kill them 
 with severity. In a quarrel between father 
 and mother, or between the several wives of a 
 husband, the defeated party wreaks vengeance 
 on the child of the conqueror, which, in gene- 
 ral, loses its life. Bushmen will kill their 
 children without remorse, when they are ill- 
 shaped, when in want of food, when the 
 father of a child has forsaken its mother, or 
 when obliged to flee from pursuers. They will 
 even throw them to the hungry lion, which 
 stands roaring before their cavern, refusing to 
 depart till some peace-offering is made to him. 
 In general, the children cease to be the objects 
 of a mother's care, as soon as they are able to 
 crawl about the field. In some few instances, 
 however, we meet with a spark of natural af- 
 fection, which places them on a level with the 
 brute creation. 
 
 The Bushman knows no God, no eternity, 
 yet dreads death. He worships at no shrine — 
 
 has no religion. We can scarcely conceive of 
 human beings descending lower in the scale of 
 ignorance and vice. Yet they can be kind 
 and grateful, and faithful to their charge. 
 And it is their habitual practice, when they 
 receive food, to share it with their friends, re- 
 serving the smallest portion for themselves ; 
 and the hungry mother will give food to her 
 emaciated children without tasting it herself. 
 (For attempts to Christianize the Bushmen, 
 see South Africa). — MoffaVs Southern Africa, 
 pp. 16-21 ; 46-50. 
 
 BUSSORAH : A great city to the south- 
 east of Bagdad, 7 miles in circumference, a 
 part of which is laid out in gardens, intersected 
 with canals. Pop. 60,000 ; Arabs, Turks, 
 Jews, Hindoos and Persians. A station of 
 the London Jews' Society. 
 
 BUTTERWORTH: A station of the Wes- 
 leyans in Kaffraria, on the Buffalo river, S. A. 
 
 CABALIST : A Jewish doctor, who pro- 
 fesses the study of the Cabala, or the mysteries 
 of Jewish traditions. 
 
 CAIRO : The capital city of Egypt, the 
 residence of the viceroy, and the seat of gov- 
 ernment, near the right bank of the Nile, and 
 five miles from the origin of its delta. Popu- 
 lation, including the suburbs of Boulac and 
 Old Cairo, about 250,000, comprising about 
 125,000 Mohammedans, 60,000 Copts, 3,000 
 to 4,000 Jews, and numerous foreigners. Cli- 
 mate, healthy and little variable. The Church 
 Missionary Society have here a mission to the 
 Copts. See Egypt. 
 
 CALCUTTA : The chief of the British 
 Presidencies in India — the seat of the first Pro- 
 testant Bishop's See, the diocese extending 
 over all the territories of the company. Pop- 
 ulation, as estimated in 1849, 250,000 within 
 the " ditch," and 500,000 in the immediate 
 suburbs. Within a circumference of twenty 
 miles, the population is generally supposed to 
 be two millions. The city contains a mixed 
 population of Chinese, English, Portuguese, 
 French, Armenians, Jews, Monghols, Par- 
 sees, Arabs, &c., the great mass consisting of 
 Hindoos and Mohammedans. The Hindoos 
 alone number about 200,000. Calcutta is 
 the seat of missionary operations for various 
 societies. 
 
 CALEDON : Station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society in South Africa, 120 miles 
 east of Cape Town, near a branch of the 
 Cradock river, Caledon district. 
 
 CALIF, Caliph, or Kalif : A represent- 
 ative of Mohammed, bearing the same relation 
 to him that the Pope pretends to bear to St. 
 Peter. 
 
 CALOTERS or Calogeki : Monks of the 
 Greek Church, of three orders. 
 
 CALPENTYN : A peninsula, extending 
 about 60 miles along the west coast of Ceylon, 
 a station of the Society for the Propagation of 
 the Gospel. 
 
 CALTURA : A station of the Wesleyan 
 
216 
 
 CALICUT— CANADA. 
 
 Missionary Society, in Ceylon, 26 miles from 
 ColomlK). 
 
 CALICUT: A town in the province of 
 Malabar, India. 103 milc3 south west of Sering- 
 apatara. In 1800, it contained 5,000 houses. 
 The inlmbitanta are chiefly Mapillas, who are 
 of Arabian extraction. It is a station of the 
 German Missionary Society. 
 
 C ALMOXT : Station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society, in the River District, Sierra 
 Leone, to the S. E. of Freetown. 
 
 C AMEROONS : A region of country bor- 
 dering on the river and mountains of that 
 name, in Upper Guinea, Africa, occupied by 
 the Baptist Missionary Society. 
 
 CANADA : This extensive country, lying 
 on the northern border of the States of 
 Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York 
 and Ohio, and the eastern border of Michi- 
 gan, was discovered by the French navi- 
 gator, Jacques Cartier, in the middle of the 
 sixteenth century, but was not entered upon 
 as a place of European settlement, until the 
 beginning of the seventeenth. At about the 
 same period the Pilgrim Fathers of New 
 England landed there, with an open and 
 loved Bible, an evangelical faith, and a manly 
 attachment to freedom, both civil and reli- 
 gious, — and the French adventurers landed 
 at Stadacona (Quebec) and at Ilochelaga, 
 (Montreal), accompanied by ecclesiastics, to 
 take possession of the land in the name of 
 the French monarch and of the Papacy. Both 
 parties brought with them as a most cher- 
 ished object, their religion, designing to 
 stamp the country which they respectively 
 came to occupy, with that great element of a 
 people's greatness. They founded their 
 respective Colonies on a religious basis, and 
 amid acts of homage to God, they set up 
 their banners. Yet was there a mighty dif- 
 ference between these two events, — a differ- 
 ence lying mainjy in the character of the 
 religion they brought with them. The 
 founders of New England were Protestants — 
 the founders of Canada were Romanists. 
 The former were enlightened and free, — the 
 latter were superstitious and spiritually en- 
 slaved. And although the Protestants land- 
 ed upon barren rocks, and the Romanists in 
 the midst of fertile valleys, the respective 
 history of the lands they came to people, 
 proclaims trumpet-tongued, the superiority 
 of a free Bible Christianity, over superstition 
 and priestism, in moulding the character and 
 influencing the destinies of a nation. 
 
 The first missions to Canada were those 
 of Rome, which were immediately and muni- 
 ficently endowed by the French monarch. 
 The Jesuits were early in the field. They 
 founded a college at Quebec and stretched 
 their dependent missions to the small settle 
 ments on the river. They established, more 
 over, a chain of posts, westward, many of 
 which belong rather to the history of the 
 
 United States than to that of Canada. Tn^ 
 the year 1G41, they erected their first church 
 in the city of Montreal, which with accus- 
 tomed mariolatry, they dedicated to the Vir- 
 gin, It would not comport with the design 
 of this work to narrate the conflicts which 
 occurred between the several orders of ec- 
 clesiastics for the possession of this fair and 
 promising field of missions. Suffice it to 
 state, that at length the Jesuits obtained the 
 preeminence at Quebec and at St. Francis, 
 while the St. Sulpicians had possession of 
 Montreal. There were also orders of friars 
 and nuns who formed an important part of 
 the ecclesiastical machinery of the country. 
 Ample endowments were secured to all these 
 parties, — which the progress of events and 
 the development of the country commercially 
 and otherwise, by a difierent race and Pro- 
 testant in religion, have rendered of vast 
 value. The Jesuits became the seigneurs 
 of Quebec. By gift and purchase they 
 acquired lands in various places between that 
 city and Montreal ; so that the estates which 
 bear their name, hare now a money value of 
 not far from one million of pounds currency, 
 or four millions of dollars. At the cession 
 of the country to Great Britain, this Order 
 was declared illegal, and their estates were ' 
 confiscated to the Crown on the death of the 
 last of them. They are now in the hands of 
 the colonial government, administered in an 
 unprofitable manner, and their avails, which 
 it is presumed might be easily doubled in 
 amount, are mainly assigned to the support 
 of Roman Catholic schools and colleges. 
 
 The Seminary of St. Sulpice received the 
 seigniory of the city and island of Montreal, 
 the seigniory of the Lake of the Two Mount- 
 ains, and some other property from which it 
 is estimated they derive an income of at least 
 one hundred and twenty thousand per annum. 
 They have retained this property under the 
 British government, and have been incor- 
 porated by the local Legislature, for the pur- 
 pose of holding it as an endowment for their 
 churches, missions to the Indians, and 
 schools. But as they are never called effect- 
 ually to account for their use of the money 
 they receive, it can be, without fear of com- 
 plaint, assigned to any object that would bid 
 fair to advance the interests of the Church 
 of Rome on this continent. 
 
 The ancient nunneries of Quebec, Three 
 Rivers, and Montreal, were also richly en 
 do wed. The writer has not the means at 
 hand of ascertaining the wealth of those at 
 ijuebec and Three Rivers, but the two in 
 Montreal have large and increasing revenues. 
 Some of their most valuable estates have 
 been placed in enterprising hands at long 
 leases, which now yield to their holders a 
 large return, and will ultimately give to the 
 revered sisterhood a vast accessional income. 
 It is to be undej^stood that these acquisitions 
 
CANADA. 
 
 2ir 
 
 bj gift and purchase were made by the cor- 
 porate bodies indicated, during the French 
 colonial history of Canada. At that period 
 the country west of Montreal, afterwards 
 made a distinct province under the name of 
 Upper Canada, and subsequently reunited 
 with its eastern sister bearing the name of 
 Canada West, was not inhabited except by 
 tribes of Indians and wandering traders in 
 furs. 
 
 Canada was ceded to Great Britain in 
 1763 : the conquerors dealing with the people 
 in the most lenient and liberal manner — 
 coniirraing their laws, language and religion, 
 their tithes to the clergy, and their ecclesias- 
 tical endowments. But speedily a Protestant 
 and Anglo-Saxon element was introduced, 
 which has steadily increased until it is now, 
 in respect of the whole of Canada, the pre- 
 dominant element. At the above date the 
 population of the country did not exceed 
 70,000. In 1783, it had increased in Lower 
 Canada to about 112,000, but at this time Up- 
 per Canada had about 10,000 inhabitants, of 
 whom the dwellers at the numerous frontier 
 forts and the garrisons constituted by far the 
 greater part. After this period, the number 
 of settlers was augmented by a great accession 
 of United Empire loyalists and disbanded 
 soldiers, and by immigrants from the United 
 States and from Great Britain, so that in the 
 year 1814, the inhabitants of Upper Canada 
 had increased to 95,000, and in 1824 to 
 152,000 ; while at the latter date. Lower 
 Canada contained a population of 450,000. 
 United Canada now contains a population of 
 two millions, of whom not more than 700,000 
 are the descendants of the original French set- 
 tlers ; moreover, Canada West now slightly 
 exceeds the Eastern section of the province 
 in population, — a circumstance which must 
 necessarily become more prominent in the 
 future history of the country, seeing that 
 there is a constant tide of immigration into 
 the country, no part of which comes from 
 France. 
 
 Whenever the number of Protestants be- 
 came such as to invite the attention of their 
 co-religionists in England, the venerable 
 Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in 
 Foreign Parts, sent out a few Episcopalian 
 ministers and sustained them ; there came 
 also on to the field a few Scottish Presby- 
 terian ministers, and from the United States, 
 Episcopal Methodist missionaries. Later, 
 namely, in 1829, the American Home Mission- 
 ary Society had several Congregational and 
 Presbyterian missionaries introduced to the 
 country, and continued for about ten years 
 to do something for Canada. The Wesleyan 
 Methodists of England, sent out several mis- 
 sionaries earlier than the above date, and 
 assisted not only in their support, but also 
 in training promising young men for their 
 itinerant ministry. In 1836, the Congrega- 
 
 tionalists of England entered the Odiiadian 
 field, and have had ever since a growing mis- 
 sion in the country. The United Presby- 
 terian Church of Scotland, and later the Free 
 Church of Scotland, have done good mission- 
 ary service in the land. These hints will 
 suffice to show that up to this hour Canada 
 is missionary ground, and that all the leading 
 Protestant denominations have entered upon 
 its cultivation. There are now in the cities 
 numerous self-sustaining churches, but by far 
 the largest portion of those in the rural dis- 
 tricts are partly dependent on missionary funds 
 for the support of their pastors. It must be 
 obvious that in estimating the religious con- 
 dition of Canada as represented by the num- 
 ber of churches, ministers, and other Chris- 
 tian agencies found within its precincts, it will 
 be needful to define the stand-point from 
 which the character of the several religious 
 bodies are viewed. It must, alas ! be 
 acknowledged by all observing disciples of 
 Christ, that there exist throughout Chris- 
 tendom many organizations bearing the 
 name of churches, which have little in them 
 of the spirit and character of our Divine 
 Master. There are individuals in them all 
 probably more or less numerous, who love 
 the truth as it is in Jesus, but the character 
 of the whole body is the reverse of evangeli- 
 cal. This definition need not be given in 
 respect to the Church of Rome, as her char- 
 acter for Christian illumination and influence 
 will be readily estimated by the readers of 
 this work. They will find her describod 2 
 Thess. ii. 3 — 12. But in relation to the 
 other bodies to be noted, it may be well to 
 say that their measure of evangelical influ- 
 ence is estimated from a stand-point such as 
 that occupied by the American Board of 
 Commissioners for Foreign Missions, by its 
 Secretaries, Committee, and principal sup- 
 porters. Viewing the Episcopalian Church, 
 called " the United Church of England and 
 Ireland," from that point, it cannot, as ex- 
 hibited in Canada, be termed as a whole, or 
 even mainly evangelical. Its communion is 
 usually without restriction as to the piety or 
 want of piety of its members. Its clergy, 
 with some bright and delightful exceptions, 
 are, so far as can be judged, ignorant of sav- 
 ing truth ; and as a consequence, its ministry 
 is not eflective in the conversion of sinners. 
 There are in each of the three Dioceses of 
 Canada bright exceptions to this descrip- 
 tion : men of God who love the Lord Jesus 
 Christ in sincerity, and seek by all means in 
 their power to promote the advancement of 
 our Lord's Kingdom. There are also lay- 
 men of remarkable excellence connected with 
 this church whose influence is most decided 
 in the cause of evangelical religion. But the 
 writer has no doubt that these excellent men 
 would endorse as true, the general represen- 
 tation given above. It should be borne in 
 
218 
 
 CANADA. 
 
 mindf throughout, howovor, that tho regular 
 services of tho Church, bring before tho 
 minds of tho people a large portion of Scrip- 
 ture, and consequently of saving truth. 
 These few men hope much from this. 
 
 Before proceeding with an estimate of 
 other bodies, some statistical facts regarding 
 the foregoing, may be placed on record. The 
 Roman Catholic Church in Canada is divided 
 into seven dioceses, namely : Quebec, Three 
 Rivers, Montreal, and St. Hyacinthe, in East- 
 ern Canada, and Bytown, Kingston, and 
 Toronto, in Western Canada. That of Que- 
 bec contains 111 parishes, exclusive of those 
 of the city. There are an archbishop, a 
 coadjutor bishop, and 184 clergy, including 
 chaplains of nunneries, officers of colleges, 
 &c. That of Three Rivers contains, includ- 
 ing the town, 38 parishes. It has a bishop 
 and a body of clergy in all the offices num- 
 bering 51. That of Montreal contains 108 
 parishes. It has a bishop and a coadjutor, 
 and including the ecclesiastics of the Serai- 
 nary of St. Sulpice, the professors in colleges, 
 (the Jesuits among them) and other clerical 
 officials, the body of clergy numbers 209. 
 This does not include brotherhoods and sis- 
 terhoods in convents. That" of St. Hyacinthe 
 contains 36 parishes, but some of these are 
 rather stations amid Protestant communities. 
 It has a bishop*and 55 clergymen. 
 
 "Western Canada being Protestant ground, 
 there are no Roman Catholic parishes, but 
 there are three bishops and 112 priests 
 laboring there, chiefly among the Irish 
 Roman Catholic settlers. The entire people 
 to whom these bishops and clergy minister, 
 nearly as much need the circulation of the 
 Bible among them, and the mission of evan- 
 gelical agencies, as heathendom itself. 
 
 The Churph of England in Canada, has 
 three dioceses, namely, Quebec, Montreal, 
 and Toronto ; the latter more extensive than 
 the two former put together. There are 
 three bishops, and including arch-deacons, 
 and other officials gathered around the three 
 bishops, there are of clergy in the diocese 
 of Quebec, 42, in that of Montreal, 53, 
 and 4 retired missionaries ; and in that of 
 Toronto, 148. It is estimated that in the 
 diocese of Montreal there are about 30,000 
 nominal adherents, but the number of com- 
 municants is only about 3,000. Of the other 
 dioceses the writer has not the particulars on 
 these points. 
 
 The Presbyterians in Canada are divided 
 into three principal sections, namely: the 
 Synod which retains its connection with the 
 Established Church of Scotland — the Synod 
 which without formal ecclesiastical connec- 
 tion, yet represents the Free Church of 
 Scotland — and the Synod of the United 
 Presbyterian Church, a branch of that Church 
 in Scotland, but without formal ecclesiastical 
 connection with it. The first of these is very 
 
 similar in th\j character of its pastorate and 
 its membership to the Established Church 
 of Scotland. The discourses of the pulpit arc 
 sound and evangelical, but not usually pointed. 
 The clergy are well educated and respecta- 
 ble. The membership contains many of 
 God's saints, but like that of all established 
 churches, it is mixed in its character. The 
 second of these bodies possesses a large 
 amount of energy ; it is one of the youngest 
 of the denominations in Canada, but it has 
 already done an extensive and good work. 
 Coming out from the churches connected 
 with the establishment, its pastorate and 
 membership will be without difficulty esti- 
 mated by all who are aware of the religious 
 history of Scotland during the last ten years. 
 The third of these bodies, though the small- 
 est, is highly respectable as to character and 
 influence. They are eminently sound in the 
 faith, and preach the Word of the Lord with 
 boldness. . There are seventy-three ministers 
 and three retired, in connection with tlie 
 first mentioned sections of Presbyterianisra, 
 and forty-three vacant charges are reported j 
 but it is to be presumed that some of these 
 are little more than nominal. The full sta- 
 tistics of this body are not in the hands of 
 the writer. 
 
 The following facts relating to the second 
 of these three sections of Presbyterianism are 
 given in the words of a thoroughly furnished 
 officer of Synod, and have relation to the pre- 
 sent year, (June, 1854.) '• I may mention 
 generally, that ten years ago, when our Church 
 was organized, there were twenty-five min- 
 isters ; now we have on our roll 92 names of 
 ordained ministers, embraced in eight Pres- 
 byteries, seven in Canada West, and one in 
 in Canada East. During the past year, 
 nearly £12,000 ($48,000), has been raised 
 within the church for the support of our 
 Theological Institution ; about £430(!$1,720) 
 for the French Canadian Missionary Society 
 and nearly £400 (-^1,600), for foreign mis- 
 sions. The church also supports a mission- 
 ary in the Buxton settlement, among the 
 colored population. In our various presby- 
 teries there are at least 50 vacant congrega- 
 tions and mission stations, which (the latter) 
 are multiplying every year. Knox's College 
 is attended by about 40 students, and has 
 been the means of sending forth upwards of 
 30 of the ministers now on the roll of the 
 Synod." 
 
 The third section of Presbyterians reporti^ 
 in 1853, forty-nine ordained ministers and 
 three probationers ; but the names of 73 con- 
 gregations appear upon the tables, of which 
 eighteen are vacant. The " average attend- 
 ance" throughout the church amounts to 
 12,845, showing an increase of 2,287 upon the 
 returns of the previous year. The total in- 
 come has been £6,425 (i$24,500) ; of which 
 $16,000 were expended on stipend and 
 
CANADA— CANNIBALS. 
 
 219 
 
 ^8,000 on 'Church property." For mis- 
 lions, including Theological Fund Chair, the 
 ;hurch raised ^2,200. Compared with pre- 
 vious returns, increase is observable in most 
 >f these items. 
 
 Of the remaining Christian organizations 
 Q Canada, it is not needful to do more than 
 record statistics, inasmuch as their char- 
 cter in respect to the pastorate and mem- 
 bership is similar to that of the bodies of the 
 ame name in the United States. 
 
 The Methodist body is divided into four 
 ections, as follows : 
 
 The Wesleyan Methodist Church in Canada 
 aises about ^21,000 for domestic and In- 
 ian missions, of which it has 81 in number, 
 applied by 91 ministers. The total minis- 
 irial force of this body, including the above 
 lentioned missionaries, is 216. The sister 
 hurch in Eastern Canada, numbers 20 min- 
 sters. The congregations raised last year 
 ;2.800 for missions, but more .than this 
 mount was expended on the Canadian sta- 
 ions. In future, the East and West will be 
 nited in one organization. 
 
 The Methodist New Connection Church 
 as fifty-two ministers. The Methodist 
 Ipiscopal Church has 91 ministers, includ- 
 ig the supernumeraries, but excluding those 
 rh.0 are superannuated. The Primitive 
 lethodist Church numbers thirty-two min- 
 sters. 
 
 The remaining denominations of any im- 
 ortance are the Congregational and the 
 Japtist. 
 
 Eighteen years since there were only nine 
 /ongregational churches in the country ; there 
 re now sixty-two, having 123 principal sta- 
 ions. The number of ministers is fifty-nine, 
 aving about 10,000 hearers, and a member- 
 hip of 2,750. There are 60 Sabbath Schools 
 rith nearly 400 teachers and 3000 pupils, 
 'his body contributed for the support of the 
 astorate and of worship during the year 
 jst closed, £4,690, or ^18,760 ; for debt on 
 laces of worship, building and repairs, 
 ;10,226 ; for missions, ^3,600 ; Theological 
 nstitute, .$900 ; other objects $1,270. 
 
 Concerning the Baptist churches the 
 writer has no access to statistics, beyond the 
 lumber of ministers, which is 131. 
 
 There are two missions of importance, and 
 wo others that are in a state of formation 
 or the evangelization of the French Cana- 
 lian people. The French Canadian Mission- 
 ^y Society expended last year about $10,000 
 >n this work. It is catholic, i. e., not de- 
 lominational. The Grand Eigne Mission, 
 v^hich is Baptist, spent nearly as much. The 
 )ther two are in the hands of the Church of 
 England and the Church of Scotland. They 
 ire small and unimportant. A valuable im- 
 )ression has been made on the mind of the 
 French Canadian people. Canada has this 
 rear resolved to enter into the foreign mis 
 
 sionary work. No missionaiy has yet been 
 sent forth however. — Rev. Henry Wilkes. 
 D. D., of Montreal. 
 
 CANDY : See Kajidy. • 
 
 CANANORE: A maritime town in the 
 province of Malabar, India, situated at the 
 bottom of a small bay, 45 miles N. W. of 
 Calicut, and 66 S. S. E. of Mangalore. con- 
 taining 11,000 houses : a station of the Basle 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 CANTON: The capital of Kwangtung, 
 China, situated on the north bank of Pearl 
 river, in lat. 23* 7', N. and 113* 14' E. long. 
 
 CANNIBALS: Man-eaters; those who 
 feed on human flesh. It seems incredible that 
 men can be reduced so far below the brutes 
 as to devour one another, as the most ferocious 
 wild beasts rarely prey upon their own spe- 
 cies. Yet, in all ages, as far back as the re- 
 cords of history can be traced, men have been 
 found so far lost to the instincts of nature as 
 to devour the flesh of their fellow-creatures. 
 Herodotus, Mela, Strabo, and Pliny, speak 
 of such, and describe the particular regions 
 in which they dwelt. Herodotus describes a 
 nation, apparently in India, who regularly 
 killed and ate the more aged among them- 
 selves. The ancient Scythians were Canni- 
 bals; and Herodotus speaks of a distinct 
 tribe adjoining them, who led a rural life, 
 obeyed no laws, and acknowledged no au- 
 thority, who fed on human flesh. Jerome 
 states that, when he was in Gaul, he had seen 
 the Atticotti, a British tribe, feeding on hu- 
 man flesh. At a late period, traces of the 
 same barbarous custom are found in Scot- 
 land. During a war with England, in 1138, 
 the men of Galloway not only slaughtered the 
 innocent, without distinction of age or sex ; 
 but they cut out the bowels, devoured the 
 flesh, and drank the blood of their victims. 
 The inhabitants of the British Isles are sup- 
 posed, by many, to have sprung from the an- 
 cient Scythians, who drank the blood of their 
 enemies, and made drinking cups of their 
 skulls. There was a certain ceremony at 
 which none could drink, who had not killed 
 an enemy ; and it at length became connected 
 with religious rites, as well as being a token 
 of conquest. The early European navigators, 
 from the time of Columbus, have reported 
 the existence of Cannibalism among the abori- 
 gines of America. But the practice does 
 not seem to have been common among the 
 North American Indians; and when prac- 
 ticed, it appears to have been upon enemies 
 taken in war, and connected with supersti- 
 tious observances. Cannibalism was preva- 
 lent in the South Sea Islands, and probably 
 on the Pacific shores of South America, as 
 well as in New Zealand and New Caledonia, 
 from the earliest discoveries ; and the horrid 
 custom still prevails among the unevangelized 
 tribes. M. de Fresne, a cotemporary of 
 Capt. Cooke, with seventeen of his compan- 
 
220 
 
 CANNIBALS. 
 
 ions, were slaughtered and eaten in New 
 
 Ziuluiul. 
 
 A fow years ago, a native teacher, while 
 tHlveliug in New Caledonia, in the district of 
 Eugene, witnessed a horrible transaction, 
 which shows how the chiefs are trained up to 
 the most ferocious habits. A feast was held, 
 and the people of the chief brought him food. 
 The son of the chief, a lad of about six years, 
 observing among them a very corpulent man, 
 asked his father for him. The father com- 
 plied with his request, and ordered the man 
 to remain after the rest went away. The 
 chief then asked his son what should be done 
 with the man, and the boy replied, " Let him 
 be cut in pieces alive !" One of the chief's 
 attendants then cut off one arm, then the 
 other, and one leg after the other, till only 
 the head and trunk remained ; yet the man 
 lived till his head was severed from his body. 
 The teacher was informed that this was a 
 privilege only granted to the son of the chief 
 during his minority ; and that, as often as 
 the tenants bring him food, and the son de- 
 sires any one among them, his wish is grant- 
 ed, and the victim is either killed for food, or 
 cut up alive. 
 
 So late as 1809, the captain and crew of 
 an English vessel, who had visited New Zea- 
 land for the purchase of timber, were trea- 
 cherously slaughtered, and their bodies de- 
 voured. The natives of New Caledonia also 
 have been seen greedily devouring human 
 flesh. Commander Wilkes, of the U. S. Ex- 
 ploring Expedition, says, there can be no 
 question that Cannibalism is practiced in the 
 Fejee Islands, '• for the mere pleasure of eat- 
 ing human flesh as food!" " Their fondness 
 for it will be understood from the custom 
 they have of sending portions of it to their 
 friends at a distance, as an acceptable pre- 
 sent ; and the gift is eaten, even if decompo- 
 sition have begun before it is received. So 
 highly do they esteem this food, that the 
 greatest praise they can bestow on a deli- 
 cacy is, to say that it is as tender as a dead 
 man! Even their sacrifices are made more 
 frequent, in order to indulge their taste for 
 this horrid food. The bodies of enemies 
 slain in battle are always eaten. But war 
 does not furnish enough to satisfy their de- 
 sires. " They embrace opportunities to seize 
 victims wherever they can find them. They 
 will even banquet on the flesh of their friends ; 
 and in times of scarcity, families will make an 
 exchange of children for this horrid purpose." 
 " The flesh of women is preferred to that of 
 men ;" but the women are not allowed to eat 
 of it openly, though it is said the wives of 
 the chiefs do partake of it privately. The 
 common people are forbidden to eat of it, un- 
 less there is plenty ; but they are allowed to 
 pick the bones. In 1834, the mate and seve- 
 ral of the crew of an American vessel were 
 decoyed on shore by Vendovi, Chief of 
 
 Reeva, with the pretence that he was sick 
 and wanted medicine, when they were 1 1\ u- 
 cherously massacred and eaten. 
 
 Dr. Spry, a gentleman connected with the 
 Bengal medical staff', gives the following :if- 
 count of a Cannibal tribe in Chittagoiu. n 
 the eastern portion of the province of I » i:- 
 gal, the particulars of which he had IVoni 
 Major Gardner. The Rookies, as these Nrii- 
 tal wretches are called, are corpulant, low in 
 stature, with set features, and muscular 
 limbs. They speak a dialect peculiar to 
 themselve^ and build their villages on the 
 boughs of the forest trees. They appear to 
 have no settled habitation, but wander in the 
 wilderness in herds. When they have select- 
 ed a site, the whole community set to work 
 to collect bamboos and branches of trees, 
 which are afterwards fashioned into ])lat- 
 forms, and placed across the lofty boughs of 
 the different trees. On this foundation, tlie 
 rude grass superstructure is raised, which 
 forms the hut. When completed*, the womeM 
 and children are taken into theiraerial aljol* s. 
 and then the men lop off all the lower branch- 
 es of the trees, and make a rough ladder of 
 bamboos, on which they ascend, and take it 
 up after them. Though such a mode of life 
 may seem incredible, yet Mr. Moffat gives an 
 account of an inhabited tree, which he f(^".iul 
 in Africa. 
 
 The Kookies openly boast of their feats of 
 Cannibalism, showing with the strongest ex- 
 pressions of satisfaction, the bones of their 
 fellow-creatures, who have fallen a prey to 
 their horrible appetites. These people, 
 strange as it may appear, live within one 
 hundred and fifty miles of Calcutta, the me- 
 tropolis and seat of government of British 
 India, secluded in the woods and jungles of 
 the savage portions of Bengal. The same 
 writer also states that the Goands or Ghonds, 
 who inhabit the hill forests of Nagpore, are 
 Cannibals, but that the latter partake of hu- 
 man flesh only occasionally, as a religious 
 custom, while the former banquet with de- 
 light on the horrid repast. 
 
 The Edinburgh Encyclopedia remarks, that 
 " It is uniformly attested by persons in op- 
 posite parts of the globe, under various cli- 
 mates, in different circumstances, that an un- 
 common degree of ferocity is speedily gene- 
 rated by feeding on human flesh." And it is 
 by no means improbable that the origin of 
 the practice is to be found in the thirst f^' 
 blood engendered by savage warfare. It ^ 
 however, one of the terrible fruits of heathen- 
 ism, the remedy for which is alone to be 
 found in the elevating and genial influence 
 of Christianity. — Edinburgh Encyclopedia ; 
 London Miss. Mag. for Nov., 1849, p. 102; 
 U. S. Exploring Expedition, Vol. Ill, p. 97; 
 Spry^s Modern India. 
 
 CAPE HAYTIEN : A seaport toAvn of the 
 Island of Hayti, on its north coast, 90 m. N. 
 
CAPE HAYTIEN— CARNIVAL. 
 
 221 
 
 f Port-au-Prince. Population 12,000 to 
 5.000. A station of the Wesleyan Mission- 
 ?j Society. 
 
 CAPE COAST TOWN : a station of the 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society on the Gold 
 oast. 
 
 CAPE FLATS : A station of the Wesleyan 
 [issionary Society in Little Namaqualand, 
 3uth Africa. 
 
 CANON : In ecclesiastical affairs, a law 
 
 • rule of doctrine or discipline, enacted by 
 council and confirmed by the sovereign ; a 
 jcision in matters of religion, or a regula- 
 on of policy or discipline, by a general or 
 •ovincial council. 
 
 CAPUCHINS : Monks of the order of St. 
 panels, who cover their heads with a stuff- 
 ip or cowl. They are clothed in brown or 
 •ay, go barefoot, and never shave their faces. 
 CAPE COLONY: A colony in South 
 frica, belonging to Great Britain. It takes 
 3 name from the Cape of Good Hope, and 
 [tends from thence to the Orange River in 
 le north, and to the Fugela river in the east, 
 large proportion of the territory included 
 ithin their limits is either unoccupied, or, 
 fcepting the missionary stations, entirely in 
 le hands of the natives. Apart from the 
 lores, the country consists of high lands, 
 rming parallel mountain ridges, with eleva- 
 id plains or terraces of varying extent be- 
 veen. The climate is exceedingly fine and 
 dubrious. 
 
 The Cape was discovered by Diaz, the 
 ortuguese navigator, in 1486. The Dutch 
 )lonists began to settle here in 1600. In 
 )2P, two English commanders took posses- 
 on of the Cape, in the name of Great Bri- 
 ,in ; but no settlement was then made by 
 le English. In 1650, the Dutch government 
 int out one hundred men and as many wo- 
 en from the houses of industry at Amster- 
 im to people the Colony ; and, according 
 
 • some authorities, it was made a penal set- 
 ement. In 1652, the Dutch East India 
 ompany took possession, and appointed 
 ohn Van Kiebeck Governor, with instruc- 
 ons to extend Christianity among the na- 
 ves. In 1795, the Cape was captured by 
 le British, and Lord Macartney Avas appoint- 
 1 Governor. At the peace of Amiens, in 
 300, it was restored to the Dutch, but in 
 B06, it was again taken by the English, to 
 horn it was finally ceded in 1815. The 
 luropcan inhabitants are of English, Dutch, 
 tid German origin. In the Pearl district, 
 lere are about 4,000 French Protestants, 
 'hose ancestors emigrated from France about 
 700, in consequence of the revocation of the 
 diet of Nantez. The Dutch occupy the in- 
 srior, and are mostly farmers. The Eng- 
 sh reside chieflv in the Albany district. 
 
 The Orange River sovereignty, arlded to 
 he British territories in 1819. extends north 
 'f the Orange River as far as the Ky Gariep 
 
 or Vaal River. Natal, or Victoria, a district 
 on the east coast, and separated from Cape 
 Colony by Kaffraria, is a recently formed 
 British settlement, containing an area of 
 18,000 square miles. It is highly favored in 
 those respects in which the Cape is most de- 
 ficient, having abundance of wood and water, 
 with coal and various metallic ores, a fine 
 alluvial soil, and a climate adapted to the 
 production of cotton, silk, and indigo. 
 
 CAPE PALMAS : The seat of the Colony 
 of the Maryland Colonization Society, in Li- 
 beria, West Africa, and a station of the 
 American Episcopal Missionary Society. Its 
 situation is high and prominent, and is visit- 
 ed every hour with a cool refreshing breeze 
 from the sea. It projects into the sea about 
 one hundred rods, forming the turning point 
 from the windward to the leeward coasts. — 
 The bar and landing are said to be the best 
 in all Western Africa. 
 
 CAPE TOWN : Station of the London 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, being the 
 capital of the Cape Colony. The missionary 
 stationed here, preaches in the " Union 
 Chapel,''^ and is the General Agent and 
 Superintendent of the Society's Missions in 
 South Africa. This post was for many years 
 filled by the venerable Dr. Philip. It is now 
 occupied by Rev. William Thompson, former- 
 ly one of the Society's missionaries in India. 
 Mr. Thompson, on his return to England, 
 touched at Cape Town, while Rev. Mr. Free- 
 man, Secretary of the Society, was on a visit 
 there. Mr. T. preached at the Union Chapel, 
 and was invited to the pastorate ; and sub- 
 sequently receiving an appointment from the 
 Directors, as their agent, he thought it his 
 duty to accept, and entered upon his duties 
 in the summer of 1850. 
 
 CARAVAN : A company of travelers, pil- 
 grims, or merchants, marching or proceeding 
 in a body over the deserts of Arabia, or other 
 regions infested with robbers. 
 
 CARAVANSARY: A place appointed for 
 receiving and lodging caravans ; a kind of 
 inn, where the caravans rest at night, being 
 a large square building, with a spacious court 
 in the middle. 
 
 CARMELITES: An order of mendicant 
 friars, named from Mount Carmel. They 
 have four tribes, and thirty-eight provinces, 
 besides the congregation in Mantua, in which 
 are fifty-four monasteries, under a vicar- 
 general, and the congregations of barefooted 
 Carmelites in Italy and Spain. They wear 
 a scapulary, or small woolen habit, of a brown 
 color, thrown over the shoulders. 
 
 CARNIVAL: The feast or season of re- 
 joicing, before Lent, observed in Catholic 
 countries, with great solemnity, by feasts, 
 balls, operas, concerts, &c. 
 
 CARTHUSIAN: An order of monks, so 
 called from Chartreuse, the place of their in- 
 stitution. They are remarkable for their 
 
CARlfEL—CEYLON. 
 
 axiRtority. They cannot go out of their 
 cells, except to church, nor speak to any per- 
 son without leave. 
 
 C A H M E L : Station of the French Protest- 
 aiit- in South Africa, between Bethulia and 
 I'm risljeha, established in 1846, as an Insti- 
 Luiiuu for training native teacners. 2 mis- 
 sionaries, 40 communicants. 
 
 CASTE : See Brahminism. 
 
 CATTARAUGUS : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Cattaraugus Indians, in 
 the State of New York. 
 
 CATHOLIC : Universal or general. Ori- 
 ginall}' applied to the Christian Church in 
 general, but now improperly appropriated by 
 the Church of Rome. 
 
 CAUNPOOR,orCAWNPORE: A town 
 in the province of Allahabad, India ; capital 
 of a district of the same name, on the west 
 side of the Ganges, 45 miles south-west of 
 Lucknow. A station of the Gospel Propa- 
 gation Society. 
 
 C AVALLA : A station of the American 
 Episcopal Board in West Africa, 13 miles 
 from Cape Palmas. 
 
 CEDAR HILL : A station of the Mora- 
 vians in Antigua, West Indies, where is an 
 institution for the training of teachers. 
 
 CELESTINS : A religious order so named 
 from Pope Celestin. They have 39 convents 
 in Italy, and 21 in France. Their habit is a 
 white gown, a capuche, and a black scapu- 
 lary. 
 
 CENOBITE : One of a religious order, 
 who lives in a convent or community; in op- 
 position to an anchoret or hermit, who lives 
 alone. 
 
 CEYLON: The island of Ceylon lies 
 chiefly between the 6th and 10th degrees of 
 north latitude, and the 80th and 82d east lon- 
 gitude, and has the bay of Bengal on the N. 
 and E., the Indian ocean on the S. and S. W., 
 and is separated from Hindoostan on the N. 
 W. by the gulf of Manaar. Its length is 
 about 300 miles N. to S., and its breadth varies 
 from 40 to 100 miles. }^\ form it resembles 
 the section of a pear cut lengthwise through 
 the middle. The coasts on the N. and N. W. 
 are low and flat, but on the S. and E. they are 
 bold and rocky, affording some of the best 
 harbors in the world. The interior of the 
 island consists of three distinct natural divi- 
 sions : the low country, the hills, and the 
 mountains. The mountains of the central and 
 northern regions rise from 1000 to 4000 feet 
 above the sea, and are clothed to the summits 
 with magnificent forests. The rivers and 
 lakes are numerous, but only a few of the 
 former are navigable, and of the latter only 
 those along the eastern coast can be used for 
 purposes of traffic. Ceylon is rich in mine- 
 rals, but they have not been made of much 
 commercial importance. Its soil is generally 
 a mixture of sand and clay, but in the cinna- 
 
 mon region, near Colombo, it consists of pnic 
 quartz, and is perfectly white. Being situated 
 so near the equator, the days and nighte are 
 nearly of equal length throughout the year, 
 and the temperature during the day varies hnt 
 little. The seasons, however, are more; rcf^^i- 
 
 lated by the monsoons than by the con^ • 
 
 the sun, and the hottest part of the \ 
 from January to April. The climate is ' 
 brious, except in the low and less cultivated 
 regions ; the principal diseases being those of 
 the liver and intestmes. Measles and whoop- 
 ing cough occur only in a mild form, and con- 
 sumption of the lungs is wholly unknown. 
 The small-pox, which was once so fatal, is al- 
 most entirely checked by vaccination. 
 
 The vegetable productions of the island are 
 numerous and valuable, and consist of cinna- 
 mon, cocoa-nut, palm, bread-fruit, coflee, in- 
 digo, areca, betel-nut, tobacco, ebony, gam- 
 boge, gum-lac, &c. The most important of 
 these is the cinnamon, which grows only in 
 Ceylon and Cochin China. In its wild state 
 it grows from twenty to thirty feet high, and 
 the cinnamon forests present a very beautifiU 
 appearance. This spice constitutes the great 
 wealth of Ceylon, and together with the other 
 productions named, has rendered the island of 
 vast importance to the commercial world. 
 
 The principal animals found here are the 
 elephant, bear, leopard, hyena, jackal, elk, 
 deer, gazelle, buffalo, horse, ox, wild hog, 
 monkey, racoon, porcupine, squirrel, &c. Pea- 
 cocks, pheasants, snipes, pigeons, and a great 
 variety of other birds, with almost every spe- 
 cies of domestic poultry, are found in great 
 abundance ; and serpents, alligators, and rep- 
 tiles of all sorts, are numerous. 
 
 Population. — The native population of Cey- 
 lon consists of four classes : first, the Ceylon- 
 ese or Singalese, occupying the Kandian terri- 
 tories and the coasts ; second, the Moors, who 
 are found in all parts of the island ; third, the 
 Veddahs, who live in the mountains and unex- 
 plored regions ; and fourth, the Hindoos, who 
 occupy chiefly the N. and E. coasts. Besides 
 these there are also in the island some Portu- 
 guese, Dutch, and English colonists ; and an 
 intermixture of these with each other, and 
 with the native races, forms still another class. 
 The total population, according to the latest 
 estimates, is 1,368,838. The Singalese believe 
 themselves to have been the original inhabit- 
 ants ;' and they have a tradition that their 
 island was the ancient paradise, from which 
 Adam was expelled, after which a company of 
 Chinese adventurers accidentally landed upon 
 their coasts. No importance is attached to 
 this tradition, however. There is no very 
 authentic information respecting Ceylon pre- 
 vious to its discovery by the Portuguese, in 
 1505. They subsequently became masters of 
 the island, and from them it was conquered by 
 the Dutch, in 1656, just a century and a half 
 after the arrival of the Portuguese. In 11')6, 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 223 
 
 Colombo surrendered to the English, who took 
 possession of Kandy also in 1815. 
 
 Government. — The government of Ceylon is 
 vested in the hands of a British Governor, who 
 is assisted by three classes of officers, and any 
 person of requisite qualifications may fill the 
 highest offices, whether he be a European or a 
 native, and without reference to his religion. 
 A knowledge of the English language, how- 
 ever, is indispensable. For the administration 
 of justice the island is divided into three dis- 
 tricts, and these are divided into smaller ones, 
 each with a court, judge and assessors, while a 
 Supreme Court, and the only court of appeal, 
 is established at Colombo. Trial by jury is 
 3ecured to all the people. 
 
 Language, Arts, fyc. — The language of the 
 Singalese resembles the Burraan in its con 
 struction, though the natives think the Arabic 
 is their original language. They appear to 
 bave had scarcely any literature beyond some 
 pretended skill in astrology. Their agricul- 
 ture is in a very rude state, and in the arts 
 they have displayed little skill beyond the con- 
 struction of immense tanks, in which water 
 5vas collected during the rains, for the irriga- 
 tion of their rice lands. These are now mostly 
 in ruins. 
 
 Religion. — Brahminism and Budhism have 
 been, from time immemorial, the prevailing 
 systems of religion among the natives of Cey- 
 ion. Brahm is regarded by that sect as the 
 miversal and selt-existcnt intelligence, from 
 svhom proceeded the Hindoo Triad, Brahma 
 :he Creator, Yishnu the preserver, and Siva 
 ihe Destroyer. Vishnu and Siva are the prin- 
 iipal objects of worship. Brahminism, now 
 generally denominated Hindooism, proclaims 
 m active resistance to every other form of re- 
 igion, is despotic and persecuting in its spirit, 
 md derives much of its authority and power 
 rom its mysterious antiquity, the profound 
 md inscrutable teachings of its sacred books, 
 md the boundless extent and dimensions of 
 lie system is such as to give it a dim and appal 
 ing aspect in the minds of its votaries. Caste 
 s one of its immutable laws and is enforced 
 vith great rigor. 
 
 Budhism is of an opposite character, being 
 iolerant and liberal towards other systems, and 
 itrangely indifferent to its own. Brahminism 
 s a science confided only to an initiated priest- 
 lood, and its Vedas and Shasters are kept with 
 ealousy from the eyes of the people. Budhism, 
 )n the contrary, rejoices in its universality, 
 md opens its sacred pages to the perusal of 
 ill. The priests of Brahm invest themselves 
 ivith mystery and oracles of authority, while 
 ;hose of Bfidh claim only to be teachers of 
 ithics — the clergy of reason. Caste, although 
 :o some extent practiced by the Budhists is 
 liscarded in their sacred books. It may be 
 said, therefore, that Biadhism is more a school 
 )f philosophy than a form of religion,— more 
 m appeal to reason, than an attempt to operate 
 
 upon the imagination and the conscience 
 through the medium of imposing rites. But 
 while the latter is free from the fanatical into- 
 lerance and revolting rites of the Brahminical 
 faith, and vastly superior to it in the purity of 
 its code of morals, it yet exerts no elevating or 
 transforming power, but has admitted of con- 
 stant deterioration and corruption. See Budh- 
 ism and Brahminism. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 Portuguese Missions. — Immediately after 
 taking possession of Colombo, in 1505, the 
 Portuguese erected the adjoining districts into 
 a bishopric, and Christianity, in the form of 
 Romanism, was proclaimed ; but it was not 
 publicly taught till 1544, when St. Francis 
 Xavier first preached to the Tamils of the 
 North. From this time the Portuguese pur- 
 sued their schemes of ecclesiastical supremacy, 
 till the whole peninsula of Jaffiia was brought 
 under the authority of the church, a college of 
 Jesuits erected, convents established, and al- 
 most the entire population of this province led 
 to abjure their " ancient faith and submit to 
 baptism. The means by which this surprising 
 change was effected were, authority, appeals to 
 the hope of gain, and the pomp and pageantry 
 so congenial to the Roman Catholic religion. 
 Some attempts were made by the priests to ex- 
 tend the Romish religion into the interior of 
 the island, but this was not until near the close 
 of the Portuguese rule, and their labors were 
 interrupted by the approach of a hostile power. 
 Dutch Missions.- — The Dutch established 
 themselves at Colombo in 1656, and at Jaffna 
 in 1658, and having driven the Portuguese 
 from every fortress on the coast, they succeed- 
 ed by right of conquest, to the whole of their 
 possessions in Ceylon. They immediately di- 
 rected their power against the Roman Catho- 
 lic clergy, summarily transporting large num- 
 bers of them to the continent of India, and 
 offering every indignity to the images in the 
 Catholic chapels. This hostility to the church 
 of Rome continued to inspire the policy of the 
 Dutch, and their resistance of its priesthood 
 was even more emphatic and determined than 
 their opposition to the Brahmins and the Bud- 
 hists. Their success among the natives was 
 outwardly great. Within five years after their 
 arrival in the island, 12,387 children had been 
 baptized, 18,000 pupils were under instruction 
 in the schools, and 65,000 converts to Chris- 
 tianity were reckoned in the kingdom of Jaft- 
 napatam. At the close of the Dutch rule in 
 Ceylon, the number of professors of Christian- 
 ity was estimated as high as 420,000 ; but the 
 Dutch themselves regarded a large proportion 
 of these as merely nominal believers, and it is 
 a remarkable fact, that notwithstanding the 
 hundreds of thousands of conversions and bap- 
 tisms ascribed to the labors of the Dutch Pres^ 
 byterians, their religion and discipline are now % 
 almost unknown in the island of Ceylon. This 
 
224 
 
 CEYT-ON. 
 
 failure has been ascrlbeil to the superficial 
 mjiniuT in which tJic Dutch ministers devel- 
 op..! •..>.! inculcated the doctrines of Christi- 
 ,, ; inability to preach in the vernao- 
 
 n: s of the island, and their employ- 
 
 ment of interpreters ; the verv limited amount 
 of instruction given in the schools ; and espe- 
 cially the system of political bribery adopted 
 by the Dutch to encourage conversions ; and 
 the hasty and indiscriminate manner in which 
 all outward appearances were welcomed as 
 evidences of converaion to Christianity. Thus 
 the clergy of the church of Holland at the 
 close of their ministrations in Ceylon, left be- 
 hind a superstructure of Christianity prodi- 
 gious in its outward dimensions, but so inter- 
 nally unsound as to be distrusted even by those 
 who had erected it, and so unsubstantial that it 
 has long since disappeared almost from the 
 memory of the natives of the island. 
 
 LoKDOX MissioxARY SOCIETY. — Inl804,this 
 Society entered upon a mission in Ceylon, and 
 Rev. Messrs. Yos, Ehrhardt, Palm, and Read 
 were employed as missionaries for several years. 
 Tkeir labors were confined chiefly to Jaffna, 
 Matura, Galle, and Colombo, and were attend- 
 ed with many good results. They made con- 
 siderable progress in the acquisition of the 
 native language and established some schools, 
 especially at Colombo. But the opposition 
 was formidable, and the government not always 
 favorable to their operations, and after several 
 years of self-denying effort, the mission was 
 abandoned. 
 
 English Baptist Missionaey Society. — The 
 English Baptists commenced a mission in Cey- 
 lon in 1812, in the person of Mr. Chater, whose 
 efforts to Christianize the Singalese, or Bud- 
 hists, and to systematize the study of their lan- 
 guage, have made his name memorable. He 
 died in 1829, and was succeeded by Mr. Dan- 
 iel, who labored in that field fifteen years, 
 preaching and establishing congregations and 
 schools in Colombo and the adjacent villages. 
 In the midst of his usefulness, the health of his 
 children failed, and on his passage to England 
 for their health, his wife died. Thus bereaved, 
 he returned to Ceylon, and spent two years in 
 incessant wandering and labors in the mari- 
 time provinces and forests to the east of Co- 
 lombo. He then resumed his educational 
 labors in Colombo, giving attention also to 
 preaching and the press, and died in 1844, 
 leaving a name honored and endeared among 
 the Singalese. He was succeeded by Mr. 
 Dawson and Mr. Davis, the former of whom 
 died two or three years since, and was suc- 
 ceeded by Mr. Allen. Their labors extend to 
 131 villages of the Singalese, in which they 
 maintain 31 schools, with an average attend- 
 ance of 830 pupils. They have also 483 en- 
 rolled as church members, the greater portion 
 of whom are an honor to their profession. It 
 was the testimony of Sir J. Emerson Tennent, 
 in 1850, after having visited this section of the 
 
 island, that the Singalese who had received 
 their instruction at the hands of the mission- 
 aries, were filling places of honor and emolu- 
 ment in the public service, and engaged in 
 private profceeions, and that many who had 
 made no open profession of Christianity, re- 
 spected it and inspired a veneration for it in 
 the minds of the heathen around them. 
 
 TABULAR view FOR 1854. 
 
 STATIONS/- 
 
 Colombo 
 
 Kandy & ilatate 
 
 1812 
 
 1001 
 102 
 
 11 483 31 1103 4 U'^ 
 
 American Board. — The first missionaries 
 of the American Board to the East, were com- 
 missioned Feb. 7, 1812. Their names were 
 Rev. Messrs. Adoniram Judson, Samuel Nott, 
 Samuel Newell, Gordon Hall and Luther 
 Rice. This company, with the wives of four 
 of them, soon embarked for Calcutta, without 
 definite instructions as to their fields of labor. 
 They reached the place of their destination in 
 safety, but were greatly embarrassed by gov- 
 ernment opposition and other causes, the par- 
 ticulars of which may be found in connection 
 with the Bombay mission. Of this missionary 
 band, Mr. Newell was the only one who spent 
 any time at Ceylon, he having first visited the 
 Isle of France, where his wife sickened and 
 died. He commenced no mission at the island, 
 but remained there long enough to acquire in- 
 formation of great importance to the Ameri- 
 can Board, and which had much to do in 
 determining its future action. In a letter, 
 dated Colombo, Dec. 20, 1813, Mr. Newell 
 offered among other reasons for establishing a 
 mission in Ceylon, the fact that the govern- 
 ment (English) was friendly to missions ; that 
 the population of the island was from one to 
 two millions ; that there were great facilities 
 for evangelizing the people, such as that there 
 were but two languages spoken in the island, 
 — that on learning these a missionary could 
 preach to three millions of people ; that the 
 natives could read and write ; that the whole 
 Bible had been translated into Tamil, the lan- 
 guage spoken in the north of the island, and 
 the New Testament into Singalese, which was 
 spoken in the interior and south ; that there 
 were 200,000 native Christians, so called, but 
 who were totally ignorant of Christianity ; 
 that at least 100 schools were in operation, and 
 that the mission would be perfectly secure un- 
 der the British government. He also urged 
 the fact that there were but two missionaries 
 in the whole island, Mr. Errhardt, a German 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 225 
 
 from the London society, and Mr. Chater, from 
 the Baptist Society, and that neither of these 
 could speak to the people in their native 
 tongue ; and the further consideration that the 
 Tamil language was spoken by seven or eight 
 millions on the continent, between which and 
 the island intercourse was almost as easy and 
 frequent as if they were contiguous. 
 
 These considerations, with others, led the 
 Board to decide upon Ceylon as a field of mis- 
 sionary labor ; and in 1815, five missionaries, 
 viz.: Eev. Messrs. Meigs, Richards, Warren, 
 Bardwell and Poor, embarked in the Dryad for 
 Columbo, at which place they arrived March 
 22, 1816. After spending six months at Co- 
 lombo, it was determined that Mr. Bardwell 
 should go to Bombay, and that Messrs. Rich- 
 ards and Meigs should establish themselves at 
 Batticotta, and Messrs. Warren and Poor at 
 Tillipally, both of these stations being in the 
 province of Jaffna. In a joint letter, dated 
 Jaffnapatam, Oct. 9, 1816, these brethren com- 
 municate information of importance, and which 
 may be referred to as showing the condition of 
 the island at the period of commencing the 
 mission of the American Board in that field. 
 
 Tillipally, they say, is situated about ten 
 miles north, and Batticotta about six miles 
 north-west of Jafihapatam. At each of these 
 places they found a salubrious climate ; glebes 
 and buildings, the property of the English 
 government ; churches and mansion houses, 
 built of coral stone, by the Portuguese, and 
 capable of being repaired for use, the churches 
 being large enough for both public worship 
 and schools. In the province of Jafiiia there 
 were some relics of the Roman Catholic re- 
 ligion, introduced by the Portuguese ; some 
 traces of religious knowledge, afterwards com- 
 nmnicated by the Dutch ; and some decaying 
 fruits of the labors of later missionaries ; and 
 ^et the great mass of the people were pagans. 
 [n the northern portion of the island, however, 
 the missionaries found the people generally, 
 xnd even the Brahmins, less devotedly attached 
 to their idolatrous rites, feebler in their preju- 
 dices against Christianity, and more easily ac- 
 cessible, than in almost any other part of the 
 pagan world. They spoke also of an almost 
 total destitution of Bibles and school books. 
 Copies of the Tamil Bible, a translation by 
 the Dutch missionaries, were extremely scarce, 
 and an English Bible was rarely to be met 
 with, though many of the people could speak 
 and read English. The missionaries therefore 
 suggested to the Board the importance of at 
 once establishing a printing press at Jaffna, 
 with hands and means of putting it into vigor- 
 ous operation, as the only method of meeting 
 the demand for books. 
 
 In accordance with a previous arrangement, 
 Messrs. Warren and Poor took up their resi- 
 dence at Tillipally, in October after their arri- 
 val, and immediately commenced preaching, 
 through an interpreter, both at that place and 
 15 
 
 at Mallagura, two miles distant. Mr. Poor at 
 once entered upon the study of the Tamil lan- 
 guage, and in one year he was able to preach 
 to the people in their native tongue. From 
 this time his hearers increased, and more 
 marked impressions were produced. Simulta- 
 neously with this effort a school was established 
 at Tillipally, for the instruction of children in 
 both Tamil and English, and soon another was 
 commenced at Mallagum, and others at Milette, 
 and at Oodooville. Messrs. Richards and Meigs 
 were prosecuting similar labors at Batticotta. 
 
 About the time that these brethren entered 
 upon their respective fields, an event of much 
 importance occurred, viz., the abolition of 
 slavery in the island. This measure, effected 
 chiefly by the instrumentality of Sir Alexan- 
 der Johnstone, liberated a large number of 
 slaves, and placed multitudes of children in a 
 most interesting relation to the missions. 
 
 After sixteen months of successful labor, 
 Messrs. Warren and Richards were taken off 
 from their work by severe illness, and finding 
 every expedient for their recovery unavailing, 
 they embarked, April, 1818, for the Cape of 
 Good Hope. Mr. Warren died at Cape Town 
 in the following August, and Mr. Richards 
 took passage for Madras. Mr. Poor was thus 
 left alone at Tillipally, and Mr. Meigs at Bat- 
 ticotta, subjected to a severe disappointment 
 and to augmented labors. Relief, however, 
 was not far distant. 
 
 In November, 1818, Rev. Messrs. Miron 
 Winslow, Levi Spaulding, and Henry Wood- 
 ward, were ordained as missionaries to Ceylon, 
 and to these was added John Scudder, M.D., 
 a young physician of promise, and of devoted 
 piety. On the 8th of June, 1819, these three 
 missionaries and the physician, with their 
 wives, embarked at Boston on board the Indus, 
 and in the following February they were all at 
 Tillipally, Dr. and Mrs. Scudder having buried 
 their only child at Calcutta. 
 
 A little more than three years had now 
 elapsed since the arrival of the first mission- 
 aries of the American Board in Ceylon, during 
 which time fifteen schools had been established, 
 nine in connection with Tillipally, and six with 
 Batticotta, and the whole number of pupils 
 was seven hundred. Besides these, there was 
 a boarding-school, composed of youths under 
 the special care of the missionaries, supported 
 by contributions in America, and bearing the 
 names suggested by the donors. Special 
 tokens of the Divine presence began, at this 
 period, to be enjoyed by the mission. 
 
 The Board had already forwarded a print- 
 ing-press to Ceylon, and in August, 1820, Mr. 
 James Garrett was sent out to superintend its 
 operations. Unfortunately, Governor Brown- 
 rig, a zealous friend of the mission, was absent, 
 and the LieutenantrGovernor, Sir Edward 
 Barnes, gave notice through his secretary, that 
 the government would not allow any increase 
 of American missionaries in Ceylon, and that 
 
226 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 Mr. Garrett could not be pennilted to remain 
 ou the island. 2klenioriaIs to tUo Lieutenantr 
 Governor were unavailing, aud Mr. Garrett 
 embtirked for Bombay. 
 
 Soon after the arrival of the reiuforccmeut, 
 Messrs. Winslow and Spaulding commenced 
 their laboi*s at Oodoovillc. Dr. Scuddcr took 
 up his residence at rauditeripo, and Mr. 
 W oodward joined Mr. Poor at Tillipally. In 
 1821, five years from the commencement of 
 the mission, five stations were occupied, and 
 the • missionaries, besides the labor of preach- 
 ing and visiting, were superintending 24 
 schools, containing 1,150 childi-en, and educat- 
 ing eighty-seven heathen children in their own 
 families. Nine young men had given evidence 
 of true conversion, and had been gathered 
 into the church, aud three of them hud been 
 licensed to preach the Gospel. 
 
 Mrs. Poor, the wife of Rev. Daniel Poor, 
 died on the 7th of May, 1821, after a short 
 illness, and Kev. Mr. Richards, who had long 
 since been compelled to relinquish his labors, 
 died in August of the same year, at Tillipally. 
 
 In 1822, the missionaries drew up a pros- 
 pectus of a college or high school for Tamil 
 and other youth, setting forth with great par- 
 ticularity its plan and course of study, its ob- 
 jects, and its contemplated benefits. Some of 
 the more prominent of these were, the inculca- 
 tion of true science in connection with Chris- 
 tianity, a higher standard of education among 
 the people, the raising up of native preachers, 
 translators, teachers, &c., and the influence of 
 such an institution on the primary schools. 
 This subject was laid before the Board in an 
 elaborate aud urgent form, and the proposed 
 college, or higher seminary, was subsequently 
 established. 
 
 The scenes and events of 1824 were of very 
 marked and peculiar interest to this mission. 
 In January of that year, indications of unusual 
 seriousness were observed at Tillipally, and in 
 a little time, proofs of the presence of the 
 Holy Spirit appeared at all the other stations. 
 A revival of religion, of undoubted genuine- 
 ness and great power, had commenced, and, 
 within a few months, changes of a most sur- 
 prising and affecting character were witnessed. 
 At Panditeripo, Dr. Scudder's station, the re- 
 ligious interest increased till, on the 12th of 
 February, the convictions of sin and of the 
 need of salvation, became as deep and earnest 
 as ever marked a revival in a Christian land. 
 The boys of the school were so deeply im- 
 pressed, that, on retiring to their rooms in the 
 evening, they could not sleep. Between 30 
 and 40 of them went out into the garden, 
 where they were heard in supplication, weep- 
 ing and asking, "What shall I do to be 
 saved?" and "Lord, send thy Spirit." Of 
 this company more than 20 soon gave evidence 
 of a saving change. Similar scenes were wi1> 
 nessed in all the boarding-schools, and, as a 
 result, fifty-six native converts were admitted 
 
 to the church. Most of them continued t| 
 give evidence of true conversion. 
 
 The contemplated high school at Batticotta 
 having been established, a class of the best 
 scholars was received into it from the school 
 at Tillipally, making room for others at the 
 latter place, and more than one hundred ap- 
 plied for admission at a single examination — 
 a great change from the time when the mis- 
 sionaries could not persuade nor hire a single 
 child to live on their premises. During the 
 year 1826 several seasons of special religious 
 interest were enjoyed by the mission, attended 
 with the same results, though not as extensive, 
 as during the first revival. 
 
 These wonderful changes were wrought by 
 no such means as were employed by the Por- 
 tuguese and Dutch missions. A totally difler- 
 ent policy had been pursued. The mis.si(jn- 
 aries simply preached, prayed, conversed, and 
 distributed Bibles and tracts among the adults, 
 and estabKshed schools among the children, 
 till more than 2000 had been taught the rudi- 
 ments of learning and the simple truths of 
 Christianity. This, without external pomp or 
 force, or the enticing words of man's wisdom, 
 became the wisdom and the power of God i 
 among a people who, just before, were involved j 
 in the ignorance, degradation and idolatry of ' 
 paganism. It was a demonstration of the 
 fact, — too little understood by many at that 
 day, — that the regeneration of the heathen 
 was to be effected, not by might nor by power, 
 but by the Spirit of the Lord. 
 
 In reviewing their work in August, 1827, 
 after eleven years of toil, the missionaries were 
 enabled to speak of large accessions to the 
 church ; the abandonment of idolatry by many 
 of the natives who had not embraced Chris- 
 tianity ; a general spirit of inquiry among the 
 people ; a press in operation, and a bette 
 supply of the Scriptures, which were read wit 
 avidity ; more than 80 schools in successfn 
 operation ; and about 30 native assistants i 
 various departments of the work. One ye 
 later, August, 1828, the missionaries say, " Th 
 attachment of the people to their gods is dd 
 creasing, and there is a great stir among th< 
 Roman Catholics, in consequence of a trad 
 recently addressed to their priests, who ha« 
 commanded the people to burn our books. 
 In April, 1829, they allude with special intd 
 est to the qualification of a number of pioi 
 youths to make known the Gospel, an incres 
 ing spirit of inquiry among the natives, 
 the distrust they were beginning to feel : 
 their systems of geography, astronomy ai 
 philosophy, long held by them to be divint 
 Particularly had the confidence of learne' 
 natives in their systems been shaken, by a 
 ous error in their calculations of an eclipsl 
 which was pointed out to them by the missic 
 aries, and proved by the event. The circr 
 stance did much to destroy the authority 
 their sacred books. In October, 1830, t 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 22T 
 
 nission was favored witli another season of 
 iwakening, during \^icli many were con- 
 certed, and the church and the missionaries 
 were quickened and encouraged. 
 
 In March, 1831, a disastrous fire occurred, 
 n which the house, church, study, and large 
 ichool bungalow at Manepy were destroyed, 
 ogether with the furniture, library, clothing, 
 fcc, of Mr. and Mrs. Woodward. In this ca- 
 amity many of the natives rejoiced, believing 
 t to be an evidence that the anger of the gods 
 ested upon the missionary. On the 21st of 
 he same month 34 persons were received to 
 he church at Oodooville. On the 24th of 
 Fuly of this year, Mr. and Mrs. Meigs were 
 lalled to bury an amiable and beloved daughter, 
 larriet, aged 11 years. She had dedicated 
 lerself to the Saviour ten months before, and 
 lad given decided evidence of piety. At the 
 (lose of this year it was said, in regard to the 
 female boarding school at Oodooville, that 
 lone had been long members of it without be- 
 aming hopeful subjects of converting grace, 
 ind that none had dishonored their profession. 
 Ul who had left the school were married to 
 Christian husbands, and were training upfa- 
 nilies in a Christian manner. During this 
 rear, also, twenty-eight from the seminary at 
 3atticotta, were added to the church. 
 
 On the 15th of January, 1832, thirteen na- 
 iivcs from Tillipally and Oodooville, were add- 
 5d to the church, and on the 4th of March, 
 «n more were received. At this period the 
 nissiouaries commenced the plan of sending 
 mt the most intelligent and pious young men 
 )f the seminary, to visit the people regularly 
 rom house to house, carrying tracts, and a cir- 
 cular letter from the missionaries to the peo- 
 3le. The result was highly favorable. At 
 ;he close of this year a theological class was 
 brmed in the seminary at Batticotta, consist- 
 ng of about thirty students, who had comple- 
 «d their course in the seminary. This was 
 riewed by the missionaries as a most important 
 itep ; for they considered, that while European 
 md American missionaries must be pioneers 
 n this work, it could not be carried on and 
 jompleted without the aid of a native ministry. 
 
 In January, 1833, the mission was afflicted 
 3y the sudden death of Mrs. Winslow. She 
 iepurted in great joy and triumph, and her 
 nemoir, as well as that of Mrs. Newell, will 
 ive to quicken the zeal of the church and sti- 
 mulate the hopes and labors of other mission- 
 iries, till the heathen are all converted to 
 God. On the 24th of this month, at the quar- 
 terly church meeting at Oodooville, twelve 
 new members were admitted, one of them a 
 daughter of Mr. Spaulding. In July of this 
 year, a reinforcement, consisting of Rev. Messrs. 
 Todd, Hutchins, Hoisington, and Apthorp, 
 and Dr. Nathan Ward, embarked at Boston, 
 taking with them a printing press. In June, 
 Mr. Winslow baptized the interpreter of the 
 court of Mallagum, a man of sterling charac- 
 
 ter and of high respectability among the na- 
 tives. He had embraced Christianity amid 
 much opposition. During this month several 
 buildings belonging to the mission at Tillipally 
 were destroyed by fire, and in the following 
 August the church was set on fire, and nearly 
 all the Tamil books and tracts were destroyed. 
 
 On the 28th of October the missionaries who 
 embarked at Boston in July, arrived in Ceylon. 
 Dr. Ward being now on the ground. Dr. 
 Scudder commenced a new station at Chava- 
 gachery, a parish containing a numerous popu- 
 lation. " Mr. Winslow, after the death of his 
 wife, embarked for America, taking with him 
 his three children, and seven belonging to 
 other families in the mission. 
 
 Near the close of the year 1834, the mission 
 experienced another signal visitation of mercy. 
 Two of the most pleasing features attending 
 this work, say the missionaries, were its quick- 
 ness and depth. Conversion almost immedi- 
 ately followed conviction, and the depth of 
 feeling was manifested by uninterrupted prayer 
 and praise, in their general meetings, social 
 circles, and private rooms. This revival was 
 carried on in connection with protracted meet^ 
 ings, at nearly all the stations. At the quar- 
 terly communion of the seven local churches 
 of the mission, in March, 1835, forty-seven na- 
 tives, male and female, were publicly received 
 into the church, and a daughter of Mr. Meigs 
 was received at the same time. In the latter 
 partof the year 1835, the seminary at Batticotta 
 was again visited with the influences of the Holy 
 Spirit; and in September, 1836, the female sem- 
 inary at Oodooville received a like visitation. 
 
 In May, 1837, there was another revival in 
 the seminary at Batticotta. During this year 
 there were 49 admissions to the church, and 
 24 excommunications, many of them for marry- 
 ing heathen wives. The mission this year ex- 
 perienced a most painful reverse, in being 
 obliged, through a deficiency of the funds of 
 the Board, to dismiss 45 students from the 
 seminary at Batticotta, and 8 from the female 
 seminary at Oodooville. They were compelled 
 also, from the same cause, to relinquish nearly 
 all the village schools, to curtail their printing 
 operations, and to reduce their own expenses 
 below the demands of health and comfort. 
 By the dispersion of the schools, the Sabbath 
 congregations were nearly broken up, and in 
 every direction efficient missionary labor was 
 made nearly impossible. " We could have 
 wished," say the missionaries, " that Christians 
 in America could have turned aside for a day, 
 from buying, and selling, and getting gain, to 
 see these 45 boys, as they left the seminary to 
 go back to their heathen homes." It was to the 
 mission, a sudden, unforeseen blow, coming, as 
 they said, like a thunderbolt, and breaking up 
 plans and operations whose success, under God, 
 depended very much upon their permanency. 
 In the aggregate, not less than 171 schools 
 were disbanded, and the number of pupils dis- 
 
228 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 ^ mined cxceedcni 5000. One of the older mis- 
 sionaries, in dismissing the schools from his star 
 tion, Paj-s, in lit and most offectiuff language, 
 •• I told them the reason, exhorted them to read 
 the IJible, and not to enter into temptation, to 
 keep the Sabbath holv,— prayed with them, 
 commending them to the Friend of little chil- 
 dren, and then sent them awav — from me, 
 from the Bible class, from the Sabbath-school, 
 from the house of prayer, — to feed on the 
 mountains of heathenism, with the idols under 
 the green trees ; a prey to the roaring lion, to 
 evil demons, and to a people more ignorant 
 than they, even to their blind, deluded and de- 
 luding guides, — and when I looked after them 
 as they went out, my heart failed me. what 
 an offering to Swamy \—Jive thousand children /" 
 These events, on becoming known, moved the 
 deepest sympathies of the Board and of the 
 churches, and with the least possible delay the 
 Prudential Committee removed the restrictions 
 which they had imposed, not willingly, but be 
 cause they could not disburse what was not in 
 their treasury. The receipts of the Board had 
 been cut short by the extreme pecuniary pressure 
 which, at that time, prevailed in this country. 
 
 This information from the Committee, reliev- 
 ing the mission of its embarrassments, was re- 
 ceived in November 1838, upon which joyful 
 occasion a day of special thanksgiving was 
 kept. Though the injury could not be repaired 
 at once, schools enough were soon resumed to 
 give a degree of efficiency to the system. At 
 this date four presses were in operation, giving 
 employment to 70 natives, and issuing a much 
 larger amount of missionary and other publi- 
 cations, than any other establishment of the 
 kind in Southern India. 
 
 Thirty-seven native converts were received 
 to the church in 1839. The number in the 
 female seminary at Oodoovilie at this date was 
 95 — within five of the number in 1837, before 
 the calamity above referred to. A view of the 
 domestic habits of the pupils of this school is 
 thus given : " When they take their food they 
 sit in rows, facing each other, each with a brass 
 plate or dish to receive her portion of rice and 
 curry, or congee. When all are served, one 
 implores a blessing on the food, after which 
 they begin to eat. They eat with the hand, if 
 it be rice, or with a leaf instead of a spoon if 
 it be congee. Their dress is of white cotton 
 cloth, consisting of a short loose jacket, and a 
 cloth varying in length from two to five yards, 
 according to their size, wrapped about them 
 and flowing down to their feet. Both in food 
 and dress it is thought best for them to follow 
 the usages of native society. The girls of the 
 school, of whatever caste or family, all eat 
 together without complaint." 
 
 In the year 1840 there were 9,520,000 pages 
 of Scripture, and 1,788,000 pages of tracts 
 printed, making a total of more than eleven 
 millions of pages. A very full and elaborate 
 report was made by the mission this year, on 
 
 the importance of giving instruction through 
 the English language.. They represent the 
 native language as so much a part and parcel of 
 heathenism, so deficient in scientific and theo- 
 logical terms, and so unwieldy, that it cannot 
 be made the vehicle of correct ideas, and esj^c- 
 cially not of doctrinal truths and the senti- 
 ments of a pure Christian morality. 
 
 Two important regulations were adopted in 
 1841. The first was, that the pupils then be- 
 longing to the seminary at Batticotta should 
 be required in future to furnish their own 
 clothing ; and the second was, that every 
 youth, on entering the seminary, should be re- 
 quired to give security for the payment of his 
 board during the whole seminary course. 
 These measures were well received by the com- 
 munity, and a new class was admitted on this 
 plan. In 1842 a small paper was published in 
 Tamil, with about 700 subscribers, its columns 
 being open to communications from native 
 Christians, and from heathens. In a report to 
 the Board this year, mention is made of the 
 temporal advantages which the natives derived 
 from Christianity ; " When I arrived in Jaffna 
 twenty-six years ago," says Mr. Meigs, " there 
 were but five bullock carts in the whole dis- 
 trict J now there are more than 500. The i 
 temporal condition of the people has also 
 greatly improved during that period, in many 
 other ways. They have more learning, more 
 wealth, more enterprise, and fewer taxes." 
 
 From the very outset, the missionaries had 
 taken special care not to admit any to baptism ! 
 and to the church who did not give evidence \ 
 of having been regenerated by the Spirit of i 
 God, and who were not thus prepared for the \ 
 trials they must meet with on leaving the ' 
 seminaries. Never were instructions more 
 faithful and searching, and yet heathenism 
 could not be at once and entirely eradica- 
 ted from the hearts of the natives, and pain- 
 ful defections were often witnessed, 'i'he 
 most disheartening instance of the kind that 
 ever occurred in connection with this mis- ion 
 was in the spring of 1843, when it was discov- 
 ered that a system of deception, lying, mi id 
 other gross forms of corruption, had crept into 
 the Batticotta seminary. A thorough in v( -li- 
 gation was made, and 61 scholars, includinii' tlic 
 whole of the select class, were immediately ( x- 
 pelled from the school. Several of the native 
 teachers were at the same time dismissed, ruul 
 those that remained were divested of much of 
 their responsibility, the missionaries themselves 
 assuming their duties. Trying as such a pro- 
 cess was, there was no alternative, and the result 
 showed its wisdom. It illustrated to the peo- , 
 pie of the whole district the high requisitions 
 of the Bible, the purity and sacredness of the 
 church, and the utter repugnance of Christian- 
 ity to the vices of heathenism. It inspired 
 confidence in the missionaries also, as being 
 unselfish, and concerned for nothing but the 
 morals and welfare of the youth under their 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 229 
 
 care. Accordingly but a few weeks had elaps- 
 ed before heatheu parents were beseeching 
 the missionaries to take their sons back into 
 the school, promising to watch over them, pay 
 for their books, &c. One year later the semi- 
 nary at Batticotta was found in a more flour- 
 ishing condition than ever before, the qualifi- 
 cations for admission having been raised, and 
 the pupils paying more largely and freely for 
 tuition, board, and books. 
 
 In 1845 heathenism began to develop itself 
 in new forms of opposition. So far had the 
 mission progressed, so high were the demands 
 5f Christianity, and so steady and resistless 
 ivas its pressure upon the surrounding idolatry, 
 that the missionaries were led to remark, 
 ' We are now made to feel that we have come 
 into closer contact than ever with the benight- 
 3d and benumbed mind and iron-hearted soul 
 )f Hindooism ; and that nothing but the sword 
 3f the Spirit, wielded by God himself, can 
 3au3e one of the enemy to fall before us." 
 
 In November, 1846, Mr. Spaulding, who 
 lad been spending a little season in his native 
 country, sailed from Boston, with his wife, to 
 •ejoin the mission at Ceylon. He was accom- 
 janied by Rev. William Scudder, a son of 
 Dr. Scudder, and by Rev. E. P. Hastings. 
 
 At no period was the importance of schools 
 md a high standard of education in connection 
 Nith. the mission, more manifest, than in 1841, 
 Nhen it was remarked by the missionaries that 
 ;he Brahmins, .the highest caste, who had uni- 
 "ormly refused the education proffered them, 
 vere sinking in influence, while the lower, but 
 3etter educated classes, were rising above them 
 md filling the places of office and trust under 
 he government. Brahminical influence had 
 sver been one of the strongest holds of heathen- 
 sra in the northern portion of Ceylon, and it 
 vas thus coming into disgrace and losing its 
 iower. It was in this year that Sir J. Emer- 
 on Tennent, the British Colonial Secretary in 
 ]eyloft, published his testimony respecting the 
 nission. In a letter to one of the secretaries 
 ►f the Board, he says : " Having at length vis- 
 ted in person all your stations, however un-« 
 isual a spontaneous communication of this 
 dnd may be, I cannot resist the impulse to 
 ;onvey to you my strong sense of the sustained 
 ixertions of your missionaries, and of their un- 
 exampled success in this colony. Much as I 
 lad heard of their usefulness and its results, I 
 vas not prepared to witness such evidences of 
 t as I have seen ; not in their school rooms 
 )nly, or in the attainments and conduct of 
 ;heir pupils, but in the aspect of the whole 
 community, amongst whom they have been 
 toiling, and the obvious effect which their care 
 md instructions have been producing on the 
 industrial, social, and moral character of the 
 surrounding population. The whole appear- 
 ince of this district bespeaks the efficacy of 
 S^our system. Its domestic character is chang- 
 ing, and its social aspect presents a contrast 
 
 to any other portion of Ceylon, as distinct and 
 remarkable as it is delightful and encouraging. 
 Civilization and secular knowledge are rapidly 
 opening the eyes of the heathen community to 
 a conviction of the superiority of the external 
 characteristics of Christianity, and thereby 
 creating a wish to know something of the in- 
 ward principles which lead to an outward de- 
 velopment so attractive." 
 
 In 1849, the Governor of Ceylon visited the 
 mission stations, and on his return to Colombo 
 he published a notice of his observations, in 
 which he said, " His excellency cannot omit 
 to dwell with peculiar satisfaction on the pleas- 
 ure afforded him by his personal inspection of 
 the great educational establishments, which 
 are the distinguishing characteristics of the 
 northern province. To those noble volunteers 
 in the cause of Christianity and education, the 
 gentlemen of the American mission, who by 
 their generous self-devotion in a foreign and 
 distant land, have produced so marked an im- 
 provement in the scene of their labors, his 
 excellency feels that he should pay a special 
 tribute of grateful acknowledgement. He is 
 glad to hail, in this dedication of American 
 enterprise and American charity to the work 
 of civilizing and enlightening a distant depen- 
 dency of the British crown, one more tie of 
 kindred with the great nation that sends them 
 forth — one more pledge that between the Old 
 and the New England, there can henceforth be 
 only a generous rivalry in the cause of knowl- 
 edge and truth." 
 
 In 1849, a new version of the whole Bible 
 into Tamil was completed, with great labor and 
 care, by committees, both in Jaffna and Ma- 
 dras, and beautifully printed in one royal oc- 
 tavo volume. Of this translation Mr. Meigs 
 says, " I find it very exactly conformed to the 
 Hebrew, as well as to our English version, 
 while it is also pure and idiomatic Tamil. It 
 will, I have no doubt, prove a great blessing 
 to the whole Tamil people, and many thousands 
 will bless God for the labors of those who 
 have prepared it." 
 
 A summary of the mission of the American 
 Board in Ceylon, from its commencement 
 to the close of 1852, a period of thirty-six 
 years, presents very important and gratifying 
 results. 
 
 Missionaries and Helpers. — The whole num- 
 ber of persons who have been connected with 
 the mission, is 60-; 28 males and 32 females. 
 Of these 18 have died, and an equal number 
 havQ been obliged, for various reasons, to re- 
 linquish the missionary work. Eleven left 
 after a service of from 9 to 17 years ; 10 have 
 been in the field from 16 to 36 years. Of 85 
 children born to these missionary families in 
 Ceylon, only 12 have died in the island, and 
 but three or four after leaving for America. 
 
 Churches. — The following table presents the 
 statistics of the churches, for the year 1852 an(ft> 
 1853: 
 
230 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 TABULAB VIKW. 
 
 STATION'S. 
 
 TUlipaUy.. 
 BRtticottA . 
 Oodooville. 
 
 Uanepj 
 
 Pandlteripo 
 
 CbHTagacheny., 
 
 Varany 
 
 Oodoopitty 
 
 Total. 
 
 In r^rular 
 Btandii 
 
 ing. 
 
 224 
 
 
 £ «. d. 
 5 9 
 46 7 5 
 10 4 10 
 36 2 6 
 9 
 
 II 
 
 3 10 
 
 1 4 
 
 14 
 
 Membore reported, 1852 
 
 Beooived by profession In 1853. 
 ♦' on certificato " 
 
 Dismissed on certificate 10 
 
 Deaths 5 
 
 Excommunicated 1 
 
 Error in statistics of 1852 7- 
 
 Present number. 
 
 385 
 23 
 10 
 
 418 
 
 -23 
 895 
 
 The whole number received to the churches 
 from the commencement, is about 800 ; and 
 not far from 120 have been excommunicated. 
 Over 300 of the church members were educa- 
 ted in the Batticotta seminary, and about 150 
 at the female boarding-school at Oodooville. 
 
 Schools. — ^The statistics of the two classes of 
 schools, the vernacular and the English, for 
 1853, are as follows : 
 
 TABULAB VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 •nilipally . . . , 
 Batticotta... 
 Oodooville . . . 
 
 Mftnepy 
 
 Panditeripo.. 
 Chavagach'y. 
 
 Varany 
 
 Oodoopitty . . 
 
 Vernacular Schools. 
 
 Pupils. 
 
 578 208 
 580 251 
 229 207 
 116 
 
 102 
 96 
 21 
 116 
 
 Total.... 77 72 11 2659 1304 3963 1352 341 9 11 279 
 
 53 
 100 
 68 
 40 
 23 
 23 
 4 
 30 
 
 English 
 Schools. 
 
 Christian idea, are fast disappearing from the 
 stage, and giving place to a generation who 
 understand Scripture language, and have some 
 knowledge of Scripture doctrine. 
 
 I^^atiye Helpers. — The following table gives 
 a classified view of the native helpers : 
 
 In view of the vast number of children and 
 youth who, from year to year have been taught 
 in these schools, and the 4,000 now in a course 
 of training, the missionaries are led to the 
 cheering observation, that the old generation, 
 ^vhose minds were steeped in heathenism, and 
 to whom it was difficult to communicate a 
 
 Native Preachers 
 
 Catcchists 
 
 School Superintendents 
 
 Secular Agents 
 
 Christian Teachers 
 
 Printing-office ■workmen 
 
 Writers 
 
 Total Native Assistants 
 
 Nominal Christian Teachers. . 
 
 Heathen Teachers 
 
 Nominal Christian and Hea- \ 
 then Teachers, total.. . j 
 
 Of the catechists four are physicians, two of 
 whom spend most of their time in catecheti- 
 cal work. 
 
 Printing. — This department has been con- 
 ducted with great efficiency, printing some 
 years 7 or 8,000,000 of pages of Scripture 
 and of tracts. The whole number of pages 
 printed since the Inissiou press went into ope- 
 ration, in 1834, is estimated at 166,000,000; 
 " The Morning Star," a semi-monthly paper, is 
 still continued. 
 
 Medical Department. — ^The dispensary, under 
 the care of Dr. Greene, besides its physical 
 benefits, has served as an important aid in 
 preaching the Gospel. The number of pa- 
 tients treated during the year 1852, was 1,881. 
 Medical classes are constantly under instruc- 
 tion. Dr. Greene has been recently preparing 
 a Tamil nomenclature for anatomy, physi- 
 ology, and hygiene, and hopes soon to publish 
 some elementary works on these subjects, in 
 the native language. Besides their medicul 
 Joenefits, such works would help to undermine 
 the gross superstition with which the practice 
 of native physicians is connected, and prepare 
 the way for the reception of Christianity. 
 
 Female education. — In no department hag| 
 progress been more marked in Jaffna than iUj 
 that of female education, especially among the; 
 higher classes. The number who have beec.' 
 educated in the female boarding school at; 
 Oodooville, from the first, is 288. Of these 
 204 have left the school, 136 of them being 
 members, of the church at the time of leaving, 
 and 13 having joined since leaving. Of the 
 whole number who have left the school, 126 
 have been married to Christians, and only 16 
 to heathens. 
 
 Temperance. — ^Vigorous efforts have been 
 made by the missionaries to arrest the pro- 
 gress of intemperance, which prevails ex- 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 231 
 
 teiisively in Ceylon. Temperance societies 
 have been formed, lectures delivered, and 
 pledges of total abstinence signed by a large 
 number of the people. It is easy to gather 
 from 500 to 1000 people to hear addresses on 
 this subject. On one of these occasions, in 
 1852, 200 signed the pledge. These meetings 
 are conducted in a strictly religious manner, 
 being opened and closed with prayer ; and in 
 connection with the addresses, much instruc- 
 tion is given in regard to other prevailing 
 vices. The people learn, by this very means, 
 that the missionaries are their best friends, and 
 are thus led in great numbers to hear the Gos- 
 pel preached. It should be added that the 
 temperance movement originated chiefly with 
 the young men educated at the Batticotta se- 
 minary, and is carried on by them, with the 
 cooperation of the missionaries. 
 
 Native Contributions. — For several years 
 there has been a "Native Evangelical So- 
 ciety " in Jaffna, designed to call into acti 
 vity the Christian benevolence of the native 
 converts. Some of them manifest a very 
 strong desire to spread the knowledge of 
 Christ This society, besides contributing 
 frequently to the funds of the American 
 Board, supports a catechist at Yarany, and 
 has also the entire care of the Island of Delft, 
 sustaining there a Christian family and a large 
 school. This island is within the jBeld of the 
 Ceylon mission, and contains an ignorant and 
 degraded population of about three thou- 
 sand. 
 
 Present state of Heathenism and prospects of 
 the Missio7i. — After thirty-six years of unwea- 
 ried Christian effort in this field, the mission- 
 aries and the Christian world are permitted to 
 contemplate a degree of progress as surprising 
 as it is gratifying ; and to the question : 
 " Watchman, what of the night ? " is confi- 
 dently answered, "The morning cometh." 
 " It may be true," say the missionaries, " that 
 some forms of wickedness increase ; that ido- 
 latry even may assume a bolder and more 
 offensive front ; but this is only the natural 
 effect of the increase of light. There is no 
 doubt that heathenism is disturbed. While 
 the mass of the people are losing their confi- 
 dence in the rites and ceremonies of their an- 
 cestors, there are many who are roused by this 
 very fact, to greater efforts to sustain them ; 
 but they only thereby publish their own shame, 
 and hasten the destruction of their cause. 
 That the people are extensively hypocritical in 
 their idol worship, is abundantly evident. This 
 is remarkably true throughout our field, and is a 
 fact full of encouragement. We need not, as 
 in former years, spend our time in attacking 
 idolatry, but can directly preach Christ, and 
 him crucified." 
 
 Church Missionary Society. — The Church 
 Missionary Society commenced its labors in 
 Ceylon, in 1818, establishing missions simul- 
 taneously among the Hindoos of the northern 
 
 province, and among the Budhists of Colombo 
 and Point Be Galle, and of the Kandian hills 
 in the central portion of the island. Two 
 energetic men, Mr. Mayor and Mr. Lambrick, 
 stationed themselves at once in Kandy, about 
 90 miles N. E. from Colombo. It is sur- 
 rounded by woody hills and mountains, and 
 was anciently the capital of an independent 
 kingdom of the same name. The town itself 
 has only about 3,000 people, but in the neigh- 
 boring highlands, to which the labors of these 
 missionaries extended, there is a population of 
 200,000. 
 
 In no part of Ceylon has progress been so 
 difficult and slow as among the Kandians. It 
 was four years after the arrival of the mission- 
 aries before there was encouragement to build 
 a school-house, even in the capital of the pro- 
 vince ; and after the lapse of ten years the 
 number of pupils was small. The number of 
 conversions was still more limited. These 
 discouragements arose in part from the se- 
 cluded and solitary condition of the province, 
 for the boundaries of the Kandian territory 
 were defended by dense forests, and every 
 opening was guarded by a species of palm, 
 covered with knobs, from the points of which 
 protruded spikes as sharp as the beak of a 
 hawk. Besides the natural fortifications, 
 watches were stationed at every pass from the 
 low country, beside gates of thorns, which 
 were only opened for the passage of the king's 
 people. Within these gloomy confines, Euro- 
 peans seldom entered ; and when the mission 
 was commenced, in 1818, the British govern- 
 ment discouraged the attempt, as it could not 
 assure them of any adequate protection in such 
 a region. The priesthood of Budhism thus 
 secluded, exerted undisputed sway, and the 
 Kandians preserved a rigid conformity to all 
 its teachings. On the arrival of the mission- 
 aries they could conceive of no possible advan- 
 tages to be derived from having their children 
 educated, and it was impossible to assemble a 
 class. After a perseverance of five years, how- 
 ever, five schools had been established, num- 
 bering 127 pupils, and so indefatigable were 
 the labors of these men, that in 1839 the 
 number of schools had increased to thirteen, 
 and the number of scholars to 400. 
 
 To attempt the education of females seemed 
 for a long time utterly hopeless ; for even the 
 little instruction that was given to the boys 
 in the temples of the Budhist priests, was with- 
 held from the girls, who were regarded as 
 unfit for tuition of any kind. It was there- 
 fore ten years before a school for the instruc- 
 tion of girls could be opened in Kandy. The 
 Church missionaries, with an intimate knowl- 
 edge of the native language, have sought to 
 explain the doctrines of Christianity to the 
 Kandians, in their secluded villages, and they 
 have secured, to a great degree, the confidence 
 of the native peasantry ; but owing to the as- 
 cendancy of the priesthood, very few have 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 avowed their belief in the truth of Chris- 
 tianity. During the last ten or twelve years, 
 Kuro[x?ana have settled among the Kandian 
 hills, cttusiiig some irritation to the peasants, 
 but aflbrtling protection to the mission, which 
 is still continued. It is stated, however, in a 
 recent lieport of the Church Missionary Soci- 
 ety, that the labors of the missionaries are 
 confined in a great measure to sojourners from 
 the raaratime provinces, who reside at Kandy 
 and other places in the interior, and who are 
 nominal Christians, and that the native Kau- 
 dians have received comparatively little atten- 
 tion. There are now at the Kandy station 
 five schools : one English, three Singalese, and 
 one for girls. The number of boys is 117, 
 girls 10. There are five regular congregar 
 tions, with an average attendance of one 
 hundred. 
 
 The mission station of the Church of Eng- 
 land, at Baddagame, in the low country, ten 
 miles north of Point De Galle, although com- 
 menced as early as that at Kandy, has been 
 even less successful, though not without some 
 important results. Schools have been estab- 
 lished, printed books have been circulated and 
 read, and many have been made acquainted 
 with the principles of Christianity. Still 
 there have been but few conversions, and after 
 the labor ofnearly forty years, the missionaries 
 have very little to cheer them. In the annual 
 report for 1852, Rev. Mr. Parsons, one of the 
 missionaries, says : " At this place the church 
 is built (it was dedicated by Bishop Heber,) 
 and here are the mission residences, seminary, 
 and girls' school ; but here, alas, is the great- 
 est indifference to the good news of salvation. 
 It seems as if the people were hardened to the 
 sound of the church bell and the missionary's 
 voice, and accustomed to treat both with silent 
 
 contempt. Last year I cstablisho;! an early 
 service for the heathen, who objected to eomo 
 to the ordinary service. Like everything else 
 at Baddagame, it succeeded for a time, but 
 within three months fell to nothing." 
 
 By far the most important of the stations of 
 the Church of England mission in Ceylon, is 
 that at Cotta, a populous district within a few 
 miles of Colombo. The situation of Cotta is 
 peculiarly beautiful, being on the verge of vast 
 gardens of cinnamon, and surrounded by na- 
 tural forests, and interspersed with plantations 
 of spices and groves of cocoa nut and palm. 
 Here the ifiission commenced its labors in 
 1823, by the opening of schools and the preach- 
 ing of the Gospel to the natives throughout 
 their hamlets. In connection with this mis- 
 sion, a collegiate institution was founded in 
 1827, for the training of native teachers and 
 assistants destined for the ministry. It com- 
 menced with ten pupils, and has continued to 
 the present time with remarkable success. To 
 this institution have^ resorted the Tamils of 
 Jaffna, the Kandians from the hills, and the 
 Singalese from the low country. In this 
 "oriental college" there are at present 22 
 students, extending their studies to Greek and 
 Latin, i^uclid. Scripture history, &c. There 
 are also at Cotta 28 vernacular schools for 
 boys and 38 for girls, containing in all 750 
 children, besides English schools for boys and 
 girls. There are at present two missionaries 
 at Cotta, Rev. Messrs. Gordon and Wood, and 
 the number of services held on the Sabbath is 
 15. The average attendance is about 1000, 
 more than half of them being adults. A 
 printing-press has been for some years in ope- 
 ration at this station, and from this was issued 
 a translation of the scriptures, known as the 
 " Cotta version." 
 
 TABULAR tiEW FOR 1853. 
 
 d 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ■i 
 
 e9 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 si 
 
 
 
 
 
 -3 
 < 
 
 "2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 d 
 
 u 
 
 5 
 .£ 
 
 
 6 
 
 a> 
 •-3 
 'A 
 
 P 
 ^ 
 
 II 
 
 c 
 S 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 >> 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 
 1 
 ■a' 
 
 1852 
 
 5 
 
 
 11 
 
 45 
 
 19 
 
 121 
 
 41 
 
 asi 
 
 448 
 
 20 
 
 1,299 
 
 1818 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 11 
 
 2 
 
 35 
 
 10 
 
 ICG 
 
 64 
 
 22 
 
 252 
 
 1819 
 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 17 
 
 2 
 
 47 
 
 20 
 
 534 
 
 58 
 
 21 
 
 613 
 
 1818 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 18 
 
 1 
 
 49 
 
 14 
 
 608 
 
 119 
 
 
 6,127 
 
 1847 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 19 
 
 3 
 
 89 
 
 13 
 
 447 
 
 69 
 
 38 
 
 549 
 
 1842 
 
 10 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 23 
 
 12 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 
 10 
 
 355 
 
 77 
 
 
 432 
 
 122 
 
 28 
 
 362 
 
 108 
 
 2,941 
 
 835 
 
 101 
 
 9,272 
 
 Cotta, . . . , 
 
 Kandy, . . . , 
 
 Baddagame, . . 
 
 Nellore, . . , 
 
 Chundicully, . . 
 
 Copay, . . . , 
 
 Totals, 
 
 In the JaflEha district the Church Missionary 
 Society has three mission stations, viz. : at 
 Nellore, Chundicully, and Copay. These are 
 all in the neighborhood of the town of Jafiha, 
 
 Chundicully being a suburb, Nellore about two 
 miles distant, and Copay five miles distant. 
 There is a missionary and a church at each 
 place, but the attendance is small, the total 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 233 
 
 number of adults at the three stations being 
 200, and of children 400. They have also 37 
 schools, in some of which only Tamil is taught, 
 iu others only English, In Nellore a girls' 
 boarding-school has been established, similar 
 to that of the American mission at Oodooville. 
 It has 42 pupils, most of them the children of 
 heathen parents. The principal of this school 
 is a superior native young woman, who was 
 brought up in the school, and who speaks and 
 writes English with remarkable accuracy. 
 There is also a high school for boys at Chundi- 
 cully, with 29 pupils. — Rev. E. D. Moore. 
 
 Wesleyan MissioNARY Society. — The Wes- 
 leyan mission to Ceylon was undertaken at the 
 suggestion of Sir Alexander Johnston, Chief- 
 Justice of that island. He had attentively 
 studied the character and results of the Wes- 
 leyan missions in the West Indies, and most 
 earnestly urged upon the Wesleyan Conference 
 the importance of extending their operations 
 to Ceylon. Some temporary difficulties pre- 
 vented the immediate adoption of the sugges- 
 tion ; but the impression produced upon the 
 Methodist Conference by his appeals, led to 
 the establishment of their Eastern Missions. 
 Dr. Coke had set his heart upon sending or 
 carrying the Gospel to India ; and as soon as it 
 was agreed to undertake the mission, he, though 
 advanced in years, determined to embark in 
 it. Being possessed of considerable property, 
 he proposed not only to introduce and estab- 
 lish the present mission, but also to advance 
 whatever money might be required for the 
 outfit and settlement of the missionaries ; a 
 rare instance of individual generosity and de- 
 votion to the cause of- missions. After some 
 discussion, it was finally agreed that six mis- 
 sionaries for Ceylon, and one for the Cape of 
 Good Hope, should sail with Dr. Coke. Those 
 for Ceylon were, Messrs. William Ault, James 
 Lynch, George Erskine, William Martin Har- 
 vard, Thomas Hall Squance, and Benjamin 
 Clough. Two of the party, Harvard and 
 Squance, were acquainted with the manage- 
 ment of the printing-press, which subsequently 
 proved of great service to the mission. Dr. 
 Coke, accompanied by six missionaries, set sail 
 from Portsmouth on the 30th of December, 
 1813. On the passage, Mrs. Ault, wife of one 
 of the missionaries, died, happy in God, and 
 was committed to the great deep, in joyful 
 hope of a resurrection to eternal life. This 
 was a great affliction ; but one still greater 
 soon followed. On the 3d of May following. 
 Dr. Coke was suddenly called to his eternal re- 
 ward. He had been indisposed a few days be- 
 fore, but there was no apprehension of danger ; 
 and on the day previous to his death, he ap- 
 peared considerably better. It was supposed 
 that he died of apoplexy, as no noise was heard 
 in the adjoining cabins, and he was found dead. 
 Deep and mysterious are the ways of Provi- 
 dence ! The" Doctor believed he had a call to 
 the East ; he had devoted himself to the work ; 
 
 and, to use his own language, " Only lived for 
 India ; " yet before he could reach his destina- 
 tion, he died alone, in his cabin, and was. com' 
 mitted to a watery grave. The missionaries 
 were thro^vn by this sad calamity into a state 
 of painful apprehension ; they had not only 
 lost their counsellor and guide ; but they were 
 left also, without immediate pecuniary support. 
 The whole enterprise had rested so entirely on 
 their departed friend, that they did not know 
 whether any provision had been made for the 
 event which they had to deplore. But the loss, 
 however, of the human arm, on which they had 
 leaned, led them, by the grace of God, to a 
 more entire dependence on Him. 
 
 They arrived at Bombay, May 21, and the 
 letters of introduction which they had brought 
 to several persons of distinction, obtained for 
 them a kind reception. Among them was one 
 to W. T. Money, Esq., a principal agent at Bom- 
 bay, from Dr. Buchanan ; and he relieved their 
 anxiety by assuring them he should be happy 
 to advance them any funds they might need, 
 on the credit of their Society at home. The 
 Governor, Sir Evan Nepean, to whom likewise 
 they had letters, showed them all the kindness 
 which their circumstances required, and had a 
 house of his own prepared for their accommo- 
 dation. 
 
 On the 20th of June, the mission family, with 
 the exception of Mr. and Mrs. Harvard, sailed 
 from Bombay, and landed at Point de Galle, 
 after a voyage of nine days. Their generous 
 friend, Mr. Money, had written to Mr. Gibson, 
 the Master Attendant of Galle, informing him 
 of the probable time of their arrival, and de- 
 scribing the signal which the captain would 
 make on coming in sight of land. In conse- 
 quence, he had been looking out for the ship, 
 and paid them all the attention they required. 
 This proof of the lively interest which Mr. 
 Money took in their affairs, filled them with 
 gratitude to him and to God ; but what were 
 their emotions of surprise and thankfulness, 
 when they learned that Sir Evan Nepean also 
 had taken the trouble of writing favorably 
 concerning them, to the Governor of Ceylon, 
 Sir Robert Brownrigg, who had in conse- 
 quence immediately written to Lord Moles- 
 worth, commandant of Galle, directing that 
 the Government House in the fort should be 
 prepared for their reception! Lord Moles- 
 worth executed these instructions, not with 
 mere official punctuality, but, though an entire 
 stranger to them, with all the feelings of per- 
 sonal friendship. These favors were rendered 
 to the missionaries for the sake of the cause in 
 which they were embarked ; and they serve to 
 mark the rapid transition now going on in the 
 public mind. The Rev. George Bisset, episco- 
 pal chaplain at Colombo, as well as the Gov- 
 ernor and other gentlemen, showed them every 
 brotherly kindness, and wished them all success. 
 The Governor offered to allow them fifty-sixdol- 
 lars a month for each school that they might 
 
234 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 establish. After mature deliberation and fer- 
 vent prayer, it appeared to them advisable to 
 occupy only four stations for the present; 
 namely, Jalina and Batticaloa, for the Tamil 
 division of the island, Galle and Matura for 
 the Singolese ; and it was agreed that Messrs. 
 Lynch and Squance should go to Jaffna, Mr. 
 Ault to JJatticaloa, Mr. Erskine to Matura, 
 and that Mr. Clough should remain at Galle. 
 
 In a few days, after celebrating the Lord's 
 Supper together, in which Lord Molesworth 
 requested permission to join them, Messrs. 
 Lynch and Squancc set out for Jaffna. On 
 their an-ival at Colombo they were hospitably 
 entertained by Mr. Twistleton, and much re- 
 freshed in spirit by their intercourse with other 
 friends. Sir Robert and Lady Brownrigg, Sir 
 Alexander and Lady Johnston, gave them a 
 cordial welcome, and encouraged them to pro- 
 ceed. Mr. Armour received them as brethren, 
 and Mr. Chatcr, the Baptist missionary, was 
 no less kind, and invited them to preach in his 
 chapel, where the military of the garrison at- 
 tended. Their attention was called to the case 
 of a convert from Mohammedanism, who had 
 been baptized in the fort church by the name 
 of Daniel Theophilus, said to be the first con- 
 version from Islamism which had been known 
 in Ceylon. He was a man of strong mind and 
 considerable learning ; and hopes were enter- 
 tained that his public rcfiiunciation of his for- 
 mer faith, and his open acknowledgement of 
 Christianity, would have an extensive effect on 
 others of the same faith. The change in his 
 religious profession had called down upon him 
 the indignation of his relatives and former 
 connexions, some of whom were fully bent upon 
 his destruction. But he was taken under the 
 protection of the government, and by them 
 committed to the care of Messrs. Lynch and 
 Sqnance, that he might accompany them to 
 Jaffnapatam, and there be further instructed 
 in the doctrines and duties of Christianity. 
 
 On the first of August they set out with this 
 interesting companion : and on their arrival 
 at Jaffna, the sub-collector, Mr. Mooyart, re- 
 ceived them with great kindness. Here they 
 were also welcomed by Christian David, the 
 Tamil preacher from Tranquebar, who presided 
 over the Tamil Christians in that province. 
 He told Mr. Lynch that he had for more than 
 ten years prayed that some missionaries might 
 be sent to Ceylon, and that he regarded their 
 arrival as an answer to his prayers. While he 
 was able to afford them considerable aid in 
 farthering the objects of their mission, they 
 in their turn greatly assisted him in the 
 way of religious instruction. They had now 
 a gratifying proof of the liberal intentions 
 of the government towards them in the pro- 
 posal for the endowment of English schools 
 to be placed under their care. Since Jaffna 
 was to be the residence of two missionaries, 
 they found that the stipulated allowance 
 for each school was, in their case, doubled. 
 
 I At the request of the European residents, 
 who were without the means of public in- 
 struction, they held Divine service in English, 
 alternately reading the church prayers and 
 preaching; and they were much encouraged 
 by the apparent effects of their ministrations. 
 
 The other missionaries joined their stations ^ 
 about the same time, and met with similar aid 
 in the prosecution of their work. Matura, to 
 which Mr. Erskine was appointed, was about 
 thirty miles from Galle. The civil authorities 
 afforded him every facility he required in the 
 opening of the promised English school, which 
 the children of the highest classes of natives 
 attended with manifest pleasure. He soon 
 commenced his English ministration, also, in 
 the Dutch church in the fort ; but his con- 
 gregation was small, the European garrison 
 consisting of few troops. The native popula- 
 tion was considerable, and the district was 
 found to be one of tlie strongholds of their su- 
 perstition : he lost no time, therefore, in begin- 
 ning the study of Singalcse, that he might at- 
 tack the enemy in his quarters. 
 
 Batticaloa, Mr. Ault's station, was above 
 150 miles beyond Matura. It is a small is- 
 land, containing a fort, with a few houses ; but 
 it is the central point of an important district 
 of the same name, which carries on a constant 
 trade with the interior, and contains a large 
 population. Mr. Ault proceeded to Batticaloa, 
 in a native dhoney, a kind of sailing barge, 
 which was expected to make the passage in 
 three days ; but it took more than eight to 
 reach the destined port. As he had not pro- 
 vided for so long a passage, his sufferings and 
 privations by the way, added to his affliction 
 from the recent loss of his wife, so shook his 
 constitution, that he was ill-suited to enter upon 
 his arduous duties. There was no habitation 
 vacant for him ; but the Collector, Mr. Sawers, 
 and the Magistrate, Mr. Atkinson, received him 
 into their houses, and showed him every atten- 
 tion, and he was soon suflBciently recovered to 
 open the English school. On Sunday mornings 
 he performed divine service for the civilians 
 and military, when his congregation was sel- 
 dom less than 150, the soldiers being marched 
 to church. He had an evening service also, 
 at which their attendance was optional ; and 
 the numbers that came were sufficient to show 
 a desire to hear the Word, while a few applied 
 to him under serious concern. The station was 
 crowded with the sick ; they ,saw their com- 
 rades dying daily ; and the missionary sought 
 to improve the solemn season to their souls. 
 He did not, however, suffer these labors to di- 
 vert him from the natives. He labored hard 
 at the Tamil language, and soon began to itin- 
 erate among the huts in the neighboring 
 country. 
 
 At Galle, Mr. Clough performed the English 
 service, in the Dutch church, every Sunday ; 
 and a private house in the fort was fitted up, 
 by some of his hearers, for preaching on an 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 235 
 
 evening during the week, and for religious con- 
 versation witli those under serious impressions. 
 The marked attention of Lord Molesworth 
 not only encouraged him, but exerted a good 
 influence among the officers and troops. His 
 Lordship often appeared in company with the 
 humble missionary on public occasions, and 
 was seldom absent from the cottage in which 
 their religious meetings were held. The good 
 efiect produced upon the European inhabitants 
 and the military was soon very apparent. But, 
 though encouraged by these things, Mr. Olough 
 could not permit himself to be detained from 
 his missionary work. Besides the numerous 
 Europeans and the inhabitants of Dutch and 
 Portuguese extraction in the fort, at Galle, the 
 Mohammedans resided there in great numbers, 
 and had a mosque in the garrison, the only one 
 in the whole island. There was a very large 
 population of Singalese in the adjacent coun- 
 try, whose docility and gentleness of disposi- 
 tion were not surpassed by the natives of any 
 other district in the British territories ; but 
 they were heathen. To these, Mr. Clough's 
 attention was anxiously directed ; and he wish- 
 ed to live among them, to study their language, 
 and to exert himself for their spiritual welfare ; 
 and it was not long before Providence opened 
 the way for him to do so. He received a visit 
 at the Government-house, from Don Abraham 
 Dias Abeyesinhe Amavasekara, the Malm or 
 great Moodeliar of Galle, a fine-looking man, 
 of good understanding, and of a liberal mind, 
 and who, from his rank, was possessed of un- 
 bounded inflaence throughout the district. 
 After the usual compliments, he addressed Mr. 
 dough in English, stating that he was come to 
 jDlace his own children under his protection and 
 instructions ; that, haviag heard that he was 
 desirous to establish a school for the sons of 
 native head-men, he was glad to offer him a 
 good house, ready furnished for the purpose, 
 near his own residence, which, if it suited him, 
 was at his service ; adding, that he should 
 think it an honor to have such a reverend gen- 
 tleman living near him, and that he would as- 
 sist him in all things in his power. Mr. 
 Clough having accepted the offer, was thus, 
 without any expense to the mission fund, 
 placed at once in a situation of comfort and 
 respectability, in which he could prosecute the 
 study of the language, and commence his labors 
 among the natives. His school was soon 
 opened, and attended by some of the most in- 
 telligent boys upon the island. The Moodeliar 
 manifested great anxiety for his comfort, fur- 
 nished him with a horse, and afforded him as- 
 sistance whenever he required it. The patron- 
 age and friendship of this person had great in- 
 fluence on the surrounding natives. Curiosity 
 was powerfully excited, and in his new residence 
 Mr. Olough was visited by learned priests, and 
 persons of various classes who came to inquire 
 respecting the religion he professed. W^ith 
 the help of an interpreter, he had frequent op- 
 
 portunities to converse with these visitors con- 
 cerning the faith tliat is in Christ, and had the 
 pleasure, in some instances, of seeing them de- 
 part, apparently impressed with the results of 
 their inquiries. By the Moodeliar's assistance 
 he obtained a competent Singalese teacher, un- 
 der whose instruction he applied himself dili- 
 gently to the study of that language. He soon 
 had reason to trace the providence of God in 
 these arrangements, which were ordered so en- 
 tirely in accordance with his design, and yet 
 so independently of himself. He began im-^ 
 mediately to hold intercourse with the Singa- 
 lese, and especially with the priests ; and Pro- 
 vidence cast him in the way of one of the 
 most influential in the island, who was well 
 known both in the Kandiau and British domin- 
 ions. This high-priest was everywhere extolled 
 for his extensive knowledge, both of the relig- 
 ion and literature of Ceylon, as well as of the 
 Oriental languages, and several marks of dis- 
 tinction had been conferred upon him. He had 
 resided for a considerable time at the Court of 
 Kandy ; and at his inauguration as a priest he 
 had the honor of riding on the king's own 
 elephant. Mr. Clough, desirous of becoming 
 acquainted with the native superstitions, that 
 he might be the better prepared to expose 
 their absurdity and impiety, took every oppor- 
 tunity to be present at their religious services, 
 and endeavored, on such occasions, to engage 
 the priests in conversation, in the hearing of 
 their followers. A celebrated festival, called 
 Banna maddua, at which the priest was carried 
 in great pomp on the shoulders of his disciples, 
 furnished the first opportunity of conversing 
 with the high-priest, who appeared to be deep- 
 ly impressed with what he heard, and visited 
 Mr. Clough in private, for further informa- 
 tion. Mr. Clough gave him a copy of the Gos- 
 pels at his own heathen temple, in presence of 
 some of his pupils, educating for the Budhist 
 priesthood, who were not a little surprised at 
 the joy which he expressed, and the care with 
 which he wrapped up the book. He read it 
 with diligence, and it furnished him with topics 
 of inquiry, which led to the gradual develop- 
 ment of the whole system of human redemp- 
 tion. After about two months, the priest 
 avowed an entire revolution of sentiment, pro- 
 fessed his firm conviction of the Divine origin 
 of Christianity, and expressed a wish openly to 
 renounce Budhism, and to make a public pro- 
 fession of his faith in Christ. He now became 
 anxious for baptism, declaring that he regarded 
 it as the characteristic mark of those who • 
 were not worshipers of idols. But as this 
 step would inevitably subject him to the pri- 
 vations of poverty, and perhaps to the attacks 
 of infuriated idolaters upon his life, Mr. Clough 
 made the Governor acquainted with all the 
 circumstances of the case, and received an im- 
 mediate answer from his Excellency, that if 
 the priest, from conviction, embraced the Chris- 
 tian religion, protection should be afforded him. 
 
236 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 Meanwhile, every effort was tried by his friends 
 a!ul the prii^ts to shake his resolution ; but 
 throats and iktsuju^Ious were alike unavailing, 
 he had " counted the cost." On the 25th of 
 l)ceember. 1814, he put off the yellow robes of 
 his profession, and was publicly admitted into 
 the visible Church of Cnrist, in the presence 
 of a crowded conpegation, by the ordinance 
 of Baptism, receiving the name of Peterus 
 Panditta Sekarras. Thus did he give up rank, 
 aflluence, connexions, family, and all that the 
 world holds dear, to embrace the religion of 
 Jesus, in obedience to the dictates of consci- 
 ence. ITirough the interposition of Sir Robert 
 Brownrigg, ho was placed in a situation to 
 maintain himself. His literary qualifications 
 obtained for him the oflQce of Cingalese trans- 
 lator to the government, at a fixed salary. 
 His studies were directed with a view to his 
 becoming, at a future period, a preacher of the 
 Gospel among his own countrymen. Many of 
 the priests were so shaken by this conduct of 
 their leader, that they, also, were desirous of 
 embracing Christianity ; but there was this 
 diificultv in the way : when they cast off their 
 robes, they lost all, even their freehold estates, 
 if they had any. 
 
 Not long after the arrival of the missionaries 
 they had to mourn the loss of one of their 
 companions, Mr. Ault, who sank under a severe 
 disease with which he had for some time been 
 afflicted. He died at Baiticaloa, and was in- 
 terred with every mark of respect from all 
 classes of inhabitants. His career was short, 
 but not without effect. In the article which 
 appeared in the Government Gazette announc- 
 ing his death, after bearing testimony to his 
 piety and zeal, it is added — " Possessing rare 
 qualifications for the meritorious and useful 
 work which he had undertaken, his success in 
 the short space of eight months, in raising at 
 that place, a respect for, and a decent obser- 
 vance of, at least the external form of religion, 
 was truly remarkable. And although it could 
 not be said that he made any converts from 
 either the heathen or Mohammedan faith to 
 that of Christianity ; yet, by the establishment 
 of eight schools for the education of Hindoo 
 children, and by his talents and address having 
 80 far overcome the scruples and prejudices of 
 their parents, as to introduce the reading of 
 the New Testament as the only school-book 
 to the more advanced scholars, he has laid the 
 foundation for a most extensive propagation of 
 our faith." 
 
 About this time it was proposed to establish 
 a system of village preaching on the Lord's 
 day, in the vicinity of Colombo, where Mr. 
 Harvard was then stationed, by means of in- 
 terpreters. For this purpose they were provi- 
 ded with Singalese youths from the govern- 
 ment seminary, who were deemed competent 
 to interpret the missionaries' discourses. Two 
 or tiiree of the government interpreters were 
 associated with them, and Sir A. Johnston di- 
 
 rected that the principal Singalese interpreter of 
 the Supreme Court should accompany Mr. Har- 
 vard whenever required. The j)orsons so em- 
 ployed were previously instructed what to do ; 
 the native congregations were assembled in 
 the government schools ; the meetings were 
 always opened and closed with prayer, and 
 were productive of considerable benefit to 
 those who attended them. Thus, under the 
 immediate superintendence of flie missionaries, 
 from twelve to fifteen villages were regularly 
 supplied with public religious instruction every 
 Sabbath. While, however, we admire the 
 spirit that prompted these proceedings, we must 
 not omit to record the personal inconvenience 
 which they suffered from them, as a warning 
 to others. Mr. Harvard confesses that " zeal, 
 undisciplined by prudence, impelled us to exer- 
 tions, in these itinerating labors, which were too 
 violent to be lasting. In company with my 
 interpreter, I have frequently traveled twelve 
 or fifteen miles in one day, addressing three 
 congregations, and returning in the evening to 
 preach in English, in the Pettah. Mr. Clough 
 was no less regardless of himself. The leading 
 of the singing also devolved on us, which was 
 even more laborious than preaching. The 
 abundance of the harvest and the paucity of 
 laborers, is the only apology to be made for 
 efforts which cannot be wholly justified ; and 
 which at length inflicted injuries upon my 
 constitution from which probably it will never 
 wholly recover." 
 
 An English service, for natives understand- 
 ing the English language, was also opened at 
 this time in Colombo ; and their place of woi" 
 ship having become too small, a larger build- 
 ing was commenced. A Sabbath-school of 
 over 200 children was also organized. The 
 printing-press was put in operation, under the 
 direction of Mr. Harvard, and soon spelling- 
 books, hymn-books, and religious books, or 
 tracts of different kinds were printed in the 
 Singalese, Tamil, and Portuguese languages. 
 The mission house being situated on the main 
 road from the country to the fort, the mission- 
 aries had frequent opportunities to converse 
 with the natives, on their way to and from the 
 town. The results of these interviews were 
 often encouraging ; and in one instance were 
 productive of the happiest effects. A Budhist 
 priest, known by the title of the Ava Priest, 
 was introduced to them by a note from the 
 Rev. G. Bisset. This man possessed much 
 acuteness of intellect enriched by scientific 
 and literary research ; he was highly respected 
 by his disciples, and had attained the honora- 
 ble distinction of Maha Maiaka. He avowed 
 himself an atheist in principle ; but after much 
 discussion his unbelief and prejudice were over- 
 come, and he became a sincere inquirer after 
 truth. In proof of his sincerity, he consented 
 to Mr. Harvard's preaching in the temple of 
 which he was the chief-priest. His pride was 
 renounced, and he became a docile scholar, 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 2a7 
 
 receiving with meekness instruction in the first 
 principles of the doctrine of Christ, with a 
 view to his baptism, which he earnestly desired. 
 After some time> Mr. Harvard preached in his 
 temple, through an interpreter, in front of the 
 great image, to a large congregation of priests 
 and people, from 1 Cor. 8:4: " We know 
 that an idol is nothing in the world, and there 
 is none other God but one." On their return 
 to Colombo the Ava Priest publicly renounced 
 his former notions and was baptized in the 
 fort church, by the name of Georgr Nado- 
 
 RIS DE SiLVA. 
 
 In their visits to the native Christians in 
 the villages, the missionaries were occasionally 
 met or accompanied by Sir. A. Johnston, Mr. 
 Twistleton, and. even the Governor with his 
 lady and suite, who attended divine service, with 
 the Singalese Christians, in churches of the 
 humblest structure. This countenance of the 
 highest official authorities in the island tended 
 to obviate difficulties which they would other- 
 wise have found it hard to remove. There 
 was one prejudice, however, which they could 
 not immediately overcome. The native Chris- 
 tians had a strong objection to their women 
 appearing in a place of worship, except at the 
 administration of baptism, and the celebration 
 of marriage. This was so prejudicial to the 
 domestic character of the people that the mis- 
 sionaries resolved to persevere until they should 
 see the mothers and daughters of the Chris- 
 tians taking their proper place in the church ; 
 in which, after much effort, they were success- 
 ful. 
 
 The converted Ava Priest, George Nadoris, 
 manifested a strong desire for the conversion of 
 his idolatrous countrymen. It appeared that 
 half the priests and temples in the island had 
 been under his control. He accompanied the 
 missionaries in their preaching excursions 
 round the country, when he addressed large 
 companies of people, from 800 to 1,000 at a 
 time, in the most lively and eloquent manner ; 
 and his character as a priest was so well 
 known before his conversion, that wherever he 
 went the people recognized him, and the effects 
 produced by his public discourses were re- 
 markable. The priests came from almost 
 every part of the country, even from the inte- 
 rior, to contend with him. Great numbers of 
 the superior order of priests avowed themselves 
 convinced of the truth of Christianity ; but 
 they were not willing, like George Nadoris, to 
 deny themselves and take up the cross. There 
 was, however, one exception. Nadoris had a 
 friend among them, who possessed considerable 
 property, good natural abilities, and an ex- 
 tensive acquaintance with foreign languages. 
 His disposition was meek, and his manners 
 prepossessing. When introduced to the mis- 
 sionaries by his friend and instructor, he pro- 
 fessed to be dissatisfied with the pagan super- 
 stitions ; offered himself for baptism, and beg- 
 ged to be instructed in the principles of 
 
 Christianity. The knowledge which the 
 brethren had by this time acquired of the de- 
 ceptive character of the natives, made them 
 cautious in the admission of candidates. In 
 the present instance their examination of the 
 man's motives was more than usually severe ; 
 but they could detect no sinister design. His 
 replies to their questions were given with the 
 greatest apparent sincerity ; and, after putting 
 him off for a considerable time, they felt so 
 well satisfied with him, that they could no 
 longer resist his importunity to be received 
 into the Christian church. He was baptized 
 by the name of Benjamin Parks. "It was 
 most gratifying," observed Sir Alexander 
 Johnston on the occasion, "to see the very 
 men who had been devoted to a heathen priest- 
 hood, surmounting every prejudice of education 
 and profession, and convinced of the delusion 
 of that idolatry which they had been taught 
 to preach." He also further remarked " that 
 it was one of many proofs of the good 
 effect produced among the natives by the cir- 
 culation of the Scriptures." 
 
 In the month of June, 1815, Rev. John Mc- 
 Kenny arrived from the Cape of Good Hope, 
 and was followed, early in 1816, by four more, 
 Messrs. Callaway, Carver, Broadberd, and Jack- 
 son, as a reinforcement; and a young man, 
 named Salmon, was appointed as an assistant 
 missionary. He was the first preacher they 
 had obtained from among the inhabitants of 
 the island. His acquaintance with several 
 languages rendered him a valuable acquisition 
 as an interpreter, and he was received on trial, 
 and appointed to the Matura station, with 
 Mr. Callaway, to whom he proved a useful col- 
 league. Not long after, a second young man, 
 named John Anthoniez, also born in the coun- 
 try, was employed as a local preacher at Galle. 
 The building commenced at Colombo was 
 finished and opened for public worship on 
 Sunday, December 23d, 1816. An appro- 
 priate discourse was preached by Mr. Clough 
 from Ps. 122 : 6. It was provided with an 
 organ, purchased at Galle. In the evening a 
 second service was held, which was crowded, 
 the Governor and his lady, and most of the 
 civilian^ and military officers of the station 
 being present, together with a number of re- 
 spectable natives. 
 
 It was now agreed to have service in Eng- 
 lish every Sabbath at 7 A.M., and at the 
 same hour in the evening ; also a Singalese 
 service at half-past ten in the forenoon. 
 The missionaries now began to hold annual 
 conferences for the regulation of the concerns 
 of the mission. It is said of them in the So 
 ciety's Eeport, "By preaching, catechizing, 
 conducting native schools, and printing the 
 Scriptures and useful books, they are lay- 
 ing the foundation of a work, which, 
 if zealously supported, promises, under the 
 blessing of God, to re-erect the temples of 
 Christ now in ruins, through the neglect of 
 
238 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 Christians ; to arrest the tlevnstatiug progress 
 of Paganism and Mohammedanism, now almost 
 triumphant over the feeble remains of Christ- 
 ianity ; to reassert the honor and victories of 
 the cross ; and convev the knowledge of God 
 and salvation through an island, the essential 
 principle of whose religion is, to deny God, 
 and wliose almost universal practice is, to wor- 
 ship devils." 
 
 The concerns of the mission were daily 
 gathering strength, and the missionaries, 
 hoping to occupy Caltura the ensuing year, 
 asked for four additional missionaries, to en- 
 able them to occupy all the coast to Galle ; 
 and two more to go northward. In pursu- 
 ance of this arrangement, they established 
 themselves among the Tamil population of 
 Jaffna, Trincomalee, and Batticaloa ; and so 
 early as 1819, they had opened schools in the 
 principal villages along the western coast, 
 from Negombo to Galle. For twenty years 
 the Wesleyan missionaries carried on the work 
 of general education in the maritime provin- 
 ces, which was afterwards taken up by the 
 Government in 1834. They did not aspire to 
 the communication of the higher branches of 
 learning, which had already been provided for 
 in the seminary of Colombo — an institution 
 maintained by the Government for the educa- 
 tion of the sons of the chiefs and higher order 
 of the natives ; but in the principal villages, 
 to which they extended their operations, the 
 children of the peasantry were instructed by 
 the Wesleyans in the principles of Christianity, 
 and the essentials of general elementary know- 
 ledge. 
 
 The usual objection was at first urged to fe- 
 males learning to read; but this was soon 
 overcome ; and at a very early period the at- 
 tention of the missionaries was directed 
 strongly to an object which has since been 
 kept steadily in view : the education of the 
 Singalese, through the medium of their own 
 vernacular tongue. Until taken up by the 
 Wc«leyans, this important department had 
 been exclusively in the hands of the priest- 
 hood, who occupied themselves in every paw- 
 sela and temple, in teaching to write upon 
 olas, and read from the legendary books of the 
 Budhists. In their hands education was of the 
 lowest description, and the priests themselves 
 were but a stage in advance of their pupils. 
 Science formed no feature in their own educa- 
 tion ; history is confined to the events con- 
 nected with religion and its movements ; me- 
 dicine is culled from the imperfect notices of 
 their ojicient Sanskrit authorities ; and astro- 
 nomy, degi-aded into the mere dreams of 
 astrology, is affected to be studied by the 
 priests, who, by a singular anomaly, share its 
 cultivation with the tom-tom beaters, or berra- 
 wagos, one of the lowest and least respected 
 castes in Ceylon. 
 
 Vernacular education was begun by the 
 Wesleyans in 1817, in the hope of superceding 
 
 the Budhist priesthood in this department; 
 and so successful was the effort, that before 
 the close of the year, upwards of 1000 scholars 
 were in attendance ; twelve months after the 
 number increased to 4000 ; and during thirty 
 years that the system has been in operation, 
 upwards of 21,000 pupils, females as well as 
 males, have from time to time been instructed 
 in the numerous schools of the mission. No 
 religious test is required for admission, and no 
 compulsion is exerted to enforce participation 
 in the Christian services of the schools. The 
 objections of parents are at once respected, if 
 advanced ; but the instances have been rare in 
 which any scruples have ever been urged, 
 either by the priesthood or by the people, to 
 any portion of the system. 
 
 But laborious and extended as have been 
 these efforts of the Wesleyans, the tenor of 
 their observation and experience has pro- 
 duced a conviction that however efficient edu- 
 cation may have proved among the Budhists 
 as a pioneer and precursor for the introduction 
 of Christianity, its value is but secondary 
 as compared with preaching to adults, and 
 awaking the native mind through the instru- 
 mentality of the pulpit and printing-press. 
 " Under this conviction," says Sir E. Tennant, 
 " the Methodists have been the closest investi- 
 gators of Budhism, the most profound students 
 of its sacred books in the original, and the 
 most accomplished scholars both in the classi- 
 cal and vernacular languages of Ceylon." 
 The information thus acquired has been sedu- 
 lously employed by them in the preparation of 
 works in Singalese, demonstrative of the errors 
 of Budhism, and illustrative of the evidences 
 and institutions of Christianity. To the value 
 of these publications and the influence exer- ' 
 cised by their promulgation throughout Cey- 
 lon, the missionaries of other churches who 
 labor in the same field with the Methodists, 
 have borne their cordial and concurrent attes- 
 tation. 
 
 Of the converts made from paganism to 
 Christianity, by the instrumentality of our 
 missionaries in Ceylon, we have the following 
 testimony from Mr. Harvard, in answer to the 
 inquiry of the committee : " As it respects 
 the nature of the change which our converts 
 have undergone, I have no hesitation in say- 
 ing, that in every case it has been real, accord- 
 ing to its degree. There has been a real con- 
 viction of the falsehood of their previous faith, 
 and a real persuasion of the truth and excel- 
 lence of the Gospel. I have had every oppor- 
 tunity of being satisfied on this point. As in 
 each case of conversion from heathenism the 
 change has been real, so it has been operative. 
 In none of them have there been any linger- 
 ings after their former idolatry. They have 
 renounced their former practices ; and, so far 
 as my knowledge has gone, their conduct has 
 been a constant conformity to Christian 
 practice. To a very gratifying extent the 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 239 
 
 cliange in our converts lias been experimental. 
 It is scarcely to be expected that a man com- 
 ing out of the darkness of heathenism, under 
 the ordinary influence of the Spirit, should 
 very rapidly apprehend the things of God. 
 However, in all we have been satisfied of a 
 conviction of sin, and an earnest desire to be 
 saved. In some cases we have had professions 
 of religious enjoyment that we dare not call 
 in question, and which have been justified by 
 a corresponding faithfulness and consistency 
 of life." " I have heard," says Mr. Fox, 
 writing in 1823, " in this country, both in the 
 Singalese and Portuguese languages, as art- 
 less and satisfactory sentiments of Christian 
 experience as I ever heard in the English lan- 
 guage ; and I have seen the colored face 
 beaming with smiles, while the last audible 
 sound, ' Yesus, Wahansey,' Jesus, my Saviour, 
 passed the dying lips." 
 
 In the years 1826 and 1827, several other 
 priests of the highest class were converted to 
 the Christian faith, and have become active 
 agents in the mission. An institution for the 
 instruction of young native converts, with a 
 view to the Christian ministry, has been in 
 successful operation since 1826. 
 
 Kandy, the capital of the interior of the 
 island, was occupied as a mission station in 
 1840. This mission, besides its immediate 
 benefit to the people, led to an investigation of 
 the subject of government support of idola- 
 try. This exposure roused the astonishment 
 and indignation of the Christian world, which 
 was followed by the issuing of those instruc- 
 tions which led to the disseverance of the 
 guilty and mischievous connexion between the 
 government and the idolatrous and supersti- 
 tious practices of their Budhist, Hindoo, and 
 Mohammedan subjects. 
 
 In 1842 a mission was established among 
 that wild and barbarous people, called the 
 Veddahs, who, in a state of savage indepen- 
 dence, inhabit the jungle in the interior of the 
 island, a -few days' journey from Batticaloa. 
 God has crowned the enterprize with his bless- 
 ing, and granted his servants great success. 
 Under the direction of the learned and devoted 
 missionaries with which God has favored the 
 Ceylon mission, the press, in the different lan- 
 guages spoken there, has done a noble work. It 
 has not only presented them with the Holy Scrip- 
 tures, in a language which they can read, but 
 has also furnished them with school-books, and 
 works on history, biography, science, and the- 
 ology, besides a periodical literature. The 
 Ceylon native ministry are a class of very able, 
 devoted, and zealous men, continually growing 
 in number and efficiency. 
 
 The manner in which the missionaries have 
 to meet and combat the Budhism and devil- 
 worship in Ceylon, is well exhibited in the fol- 
 lowing communication from the Eev. Joseph 
 Rippon, of Point de Galle, addressed to the 
 secretaries of the society in 1851 : " On my 
 
 arrival here, I found Mr. Dickson doing the 
 full work of this large and important circuit, 
 and laboring among the people with great 
 acceptability and success, preaching in three 
 different languages weekly, and taking long, 
 fatiguing journeys, but so worn down by dis- 
 ease and incessant labors, that it was painful 
 to see him or hear him speak. I was thankful 
 that I came out by the quickest route, or 
 otherwise the life of a valuable missionary 
 must have been sacrificed, and this important 
 station left unoccupied. He much needed the 
 rest which he is now taking on the continent, 
 and I sincerely pray that it may be blessed to 
 his complete restoration to health, though there 
 is too much reason to fear that his disease is 
 too far advanced to be arrested. I relieved 
 him at once of the English work, and, in a 
 month, had so far acquired the Ceylon-Portu- 
 guese, as to be able to preach in it. I found 
 it a miserably corrupt, and, in a literary point 
 of view, worthless dialect, but still valuable to 
 a missionary, as the only means by which he 
 can communicate the Gospel to many thou- 
 sands of perishing souls. My Singalese work 
 is assuming an intensely interesting character. 
 Though I am diligently studying the language, 
 I am afraid it will be a month or two before I 
 can reach the people through this medium as 
 effectually as I wish ; and I am, therefore, for 
 the present, using an interpreter. The head 
 master of the government mixed school kindly 
 offered his service gratuitously, and, as he pos- 
 sessed peculiar qualifications for the work, wc 
 spend many evenings in the surrounding vil- 
 lages, preaching to a deeply interesting, but 
 fearfully deluded people, the unsearchable 
 riches of Christ. The difficulties in the way 
 of their conversion are stupendous. My cir- 
 cuit embraces about half of the southern pro- 
 vinces, — the whole island being divided into 
 five provinces for government purposes, — and 
 extends along a densely populated sea-coast 
 for thirty-five miles, and as far into the jungle 
 as the imagination can reach, for, unfortu- 
 nately, this is the only means I have at present 
 of penetrating there. The people are in theory 
 all Budhists ; but in practice, all devil-wor- 
 shipers. 
 
 " Within four miles of my house there are six- 
 teen Budhist temples. In one of these alone 
 there_ are thirty priests ! The whole number 
 of priests in this circuit is perhaps 500. It is 
 not by human might, nor by power, that we 
 can prevail against such a host as this ! Fre- 
 quently, in the dead of the night, I hear the 
 music from the devil dances in the neighbor- 
 hood. I have attended these midnight orgies, 
 and it is only by doing so that any person can 
 form an idea of the strength v/ith which this 
 superstition binds down an otherwise acute, 
 ingenious and intelligent people. Never did 
 a Christian congregation in England listen 
 with more unbroken silence, nor an audience 
 in Exeter Hall hang with more complete ab- 
 
240 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 nrpCion of scml on the lips of its most choeen 
 ipeaketB, than these people do on the frontic 
 gestures, and hideous yellings, and senseless 
 incantations of the deril priest. To their con- 
 ceptions, he is penetrating the invisible world. 
 and communing with spirits. His ascendancy 
 over their min^ is complete. He is the great 
 int«rc€S8or between devils and men, for the 
 removal of all evil, and bestowment of all 
 good. Without the priest, nothing can be 
 done. If a house is to be built, if a journey is 
 to be taken, if a child is to be bom, devils 
 must be propitiated, and their favor secured ; 
 but, especially, in cases of sickness where all 
 ordinary methods of cure have failed, devil 
 dances and incantations are the last resort, the 
 poor deluded wretches often dying in the midst 
 of the ceremonies, although the priest has per- 
 haps offered a fowl in sacrifice, dug open graves 
 and slept in them, and fried eggs in human 
 skulls, in order to obtain the necessary influence 
 to perform the cure ! ' An evil so wide^read 
 and so deep-rooted will not be easily de- 
 stroyed ; and a conviction of its magnitude, 
 and of the necessity of resorting to some extra- 
 ordinary means for its extinction, has grown 
 upon me daily. 
 
 " The whole sj?tem received a severe shock 
 last autumn at Matura, its great stronghold. 
 The priests there are considered the cleverest 
 in the island ; and Mr. Murdock, the Secretary 
 of the Singalese Tract Society, being at that 
 place on business, challenged the priests pub- 
 licly, and oflfered them a large reward if they 
 would cause any of their incantations to take 
 effect upon him, by causing him to fall down 
 dead ; for these priests profess to be the dis- 
 pensers of death to the living, as well as of 
 life to the dying. They used all the methods 
 of preparation I have already mentioned, sleep- 
 ing in graves for many nights, and met Mr. 
 Murdock, in the presence of many hundreds of 
 Singalese, who had gathered together to wit- 
 ness the experiment on the day appointed. 
 Their first effort was to evade the challenge. 
 They excused themselves on the ground that 
 they should be tried for murder if they killed 
 him. Application was therefore made to the 
 government authorities, and an iindesired per- 
 mission obtained for them to do their worst 
 Thdr next attempt was to intimidate. Their 
 incantations never failed ; his death was cer- 
 tain if he tried them ; and he had better spare 
 himself at once and run no risk. When they 
 failed, they were driven lastly to the test, and a 
 miserable failure it was. They stood reading 
 their incantations, burning resin, and blowing 
 its fumes upon him, for more than an hour, 
 * and the people looked when he should have 
 swollen or fallen down dead suddenly, but after 
 they had looked a great while, and saw no 
 harm come to him, they changed their minds,' j 
 if not with reference to him, at least with 
 reference to the power of these charms. A ; 
 derisive cry was raised throughout the crowd, I 
 
 and the devil priests have since been hooted 
 through the streets of Matura. I have tried 
 the same plan with great success in the neigh- 
 borhood of Galle ; and, even to-night, I have 
 just returned from a village where I had been 
 undergoing a test, in some respects similar. I 
 challenged the priests some weeks ago, when 
 they refused to meet me, assigning various rea- 
 sons why they could * do me no hurt/ as, that 
 I was of a different nation, &c. I have spent 
 several evenings in replying to their excuses 
 publicly, to the people of the village ; and, 
 being driven to extremitv, they resolved to 
 make a granS effort to-night to put me down, 
 as they term it, which means, to make me fall 
 senseless to the ground, and to cause blood to 
 gush from my nose, ears, and mouth. The 
 spirit which can conceive such a thing is dia- 
 bolical ; but the cool determination that can 
 resolve to accomplish it, shows to tchat a degree 
 these men can imbibe liie evil spirit of ^eir 
 master. 
 
 " They brought priests twenty-seven miles 
 from Matura to help them, and spent many days 
 in preparation by digging open graves, &c 
 They have also had two devil dances in the 
 village to-day, but whether to gain power for 
 the experiment or not, I cannot say. The 
 news reached Galle ; and six coaches full of 
 people, with about thirty on foot, flocked to 
 the village, where a number of Singalese peo- 
 ple were gathered to receive me. I preached 
 to them for nearly an hour, while two different 
 parties of priests, who did not dare to face 
 me, were reading their incantations against 
 me in the immediate neighborhood, and the 
 people were watching with intense interest, 
 not knowing what moment I should fall to the 
 ground. When all was over, and they saw I 
 was uninjured, their astonished looks showed 
 that to their minds at least I had passed 
 through a perilous ordeal, however ridiculous 
 it was to me. My chief difficulty is to con- 
 vince the q)ectators that they are as safe from 
 these influences as I am. To make this point 
 quite sure, I have promised to take a little Sin- 
 galese boy, next Tuesday night, and have 
 offered a reward of ten rupees to any priest 
 who will cause incantation to take effect upon 
 him, on condition that the child shall not 
 know what they are attempting, and that no 
 effort shall be made to frighten him. Failures 
 such as that of to-night, go like an electric 
 shock through the whole population, and the 
 effect will be seen after many days. I find 
 this the most effectual method of arousing the 
 people and gaining their attention, and can 
 ever after raise a good congregation in the 
 villages where the experiments have been 
 tried. I have one last blow to strike at this 
 system, by a challenge to all the priests in the 
 province, to meet me publicly before the face 
 of the people ; and then, with this kind of 
 opposition to them I shall have done. 
 
 " Our prospects with reference to the over 
 
CEYLON. 
 
 241 
 
 throw of Budhism were never so cheering as 
 they are at present. Our excellent chairman, 
 the Eev. Daniel J. Gogerlv, has published a 
 series of pamphlets, entitled The Institutes of 
 Christianity, in which the errors of Budhism, 
 geographical, philosophical, and theological, 
 are pointed out with unanswerable force. The 
 system reels under the blow. There is perhaps 
 • ' a more profound Budhist scholar in the 
 1 than he, not even among the priests 
 — ^.selves. The priests are reading them and 
 comparing the extracts with the works of 
 B'jdha ; and if a priest be asked, why none of 
 attempt an answer, his reply general- 
 . 'Who is able?' and his rueful counte- 
 nance is a suflBcient attestation of his sincerity. 
 I am making arrangements to furnish every 
 priest in my circuit with a complete set. 
 
 ''One of the mightiest agencies which is 
 now at work for the evangelization of South 
 Ceylon, is a Singalese Religious Tract Society. 
 It is entirely unsectarian in its character, and 
 is supported by Christians of all denomina- 
 tions. Its income is above £500 a year, with 
 an annual grant of 150 reams of paper from 
 the London Tract Society. It has already 
 printed and put into active circulation 397,600 
 Singalese tracts ; 140,600 of which were print- 
 ed during the last year. It has also a widely 
 circulated monthly periodical, and has issued 
 a Singalese hymn book, and a history of the 
 patriarchs. It is conducted with great energy 
 and efficiency by its secretary, Mr. Murdock, 
 who was mainly instrumental in its establish- 
 ment, and who relinquished a highly lucrative 
 government situation that he might give his 
 undivided attention to these and kindred ob- 
 jects. 
 
 " On the whole, therefore, our prospects are 
 hopeful ; our movements against Budhism 
 and devil worship are on a comprehensive scale, 
 and we have manifest tokens of the presence 
 and blessing of God upon om- labors. Impres- 
 sions are widely scattered ; the Gospel seed is 
 Eown in many hearts to grow in secret for a 
 time ; convictions are produced, and souls are 
 saved. 
 
 " The most available portion of the circuit 
 for missionary effort is within a circle of four 
 miles around my dwelling ; but even this con- 
 tains one hundred and seventy villages, and 
 there are jungle districts where I fear the foot 
 of a missionary mnst not tread for years to 
 come. The extent of pop'ilation may be esti- 
 mated from the fact that though my residence 
 is a mile from the fort and town of Galle, on 
 the Matura high road, 600 persons pass it 
 every hour throughout the day." 
 
 The mission in South Ceylon is the oldest 
 Wesleyan mission among a heathen population 
 in the eastern world ; itls now in its forty-first 
 year, having been commenced in the year 1814. 
 In this quarter of the world, the nussionaries 
 have had to encounter the most formidable 
 ty^tf ms of pas^an idolatry ; systems consecra- 
 16 
 
 ted by immemorial antiquity, wrapped in all 
 the subtilties of metaphysical sophistry ; em 
 bodied in books of poetry and philosophy, 
 venerable in the eyes of the people for talent 
 and age ; inculcated by a numerous and learned 
 priesthood, and intimately associated with 
 every circumstance of civil and domestic life ; 
 systems too, which avowedly encourage the 
 vilest passions of the human heart, promote 
 an utter dereliction of sacred principle, and 
 reduce the glorious privilege of immortality to 
 an imaginary state of unimpassioned repose, in 
 which no joy shall gladden, and no pain afflict, 
 no activity arouse, and no desire ruffle ; but in 
 which the human mind of " large discourse," 
 and lofty presage, shall sink into eternal qui- 
 escence and annihilation. Yet truth is pre- 
 vailing over these forms of error. Several of 
 the "priests have become obedient to the 
 faith," and many thousands of the people have 
 joyfully renounced the boasted advantages of 
 their former worship for "The unsearchable 
 riches of Christ." It is possible that the So- 
 ciety's mission in South Ceylon is undervalued. 
 The mission has, however, an interest of its 
 own, both present and prospective. Budhism 
 is the most gigantic form of error with which 
 the Christian church has to contend. But the 
 southern district of Ceylon is at once its cra- 
 dle and its strength. Strike it here, and the 
 wound will be felt to its very centre. Budhism 
 is a connected system ; its doings in other 
 lands are reported here, and occurrences in 
 this land are told in the courts of kings in 
 Siam and Burmah, and travel wherever its 
 connecting machinery is found. The progress 
 and triumph of Christianity here would tell in 
 every part of the system, and be a prelude to 
 its entire downfall. Prospectively also this 
 mission has a peculiar interest ; it is the first 
 fruits of all the future missions of the society in 
 Budhist lands. The Budhism of China is only 
 a reflection of that of Ceylon, which was its 
 source. Even locally it is situated in the di- 
 rect route to the other strongholds of this form 
 of error. And therefore the destinies of the 
 future only confirm the demand which the 
 duties of the present enforce that existing mis- 
 sions to the Budhists should be well sustained 
 in all the means that are necessary to secure 
 their greatest present and permanent effi- 
 ciency. 
 
 In his late visitation journal, the Bishop of 
 Colombo gives an account of the great success 
 which the head of the church has conferred 
 upon the labors of the Wesleyan missionaries 
 in Ceylon ; we had intended to present a por- 
 tion of that report to the reader, but the space 
 alloted to this article is already exhausted, and 
 we can only in conclusion direct attention for 
 more particular information to the annexed 
 table. — Wesleyan Missionary Notices, Annual 
 Reports and Methodist Magazine ; Hough's 
 Christianity in India; Sir. J. E. Tennent's 
 Christianity in Ceylon.— Hex. W. Butleb. 
 
242 
 
 CEYLON. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Ifil 
 
 •saxag 
 inoq JO u«ioqos 
 ■Avg JO joqmnfj 
 
 ■Biooqog 
 -■Cng JO aaqmnx 
 
 -saxag moq 
 JO BJ«ioqos-il>Bq 
 -qws JO jaqain>i 
 
 •8iooq3s-qi«q 
 -q«S JO jaqranx 
 
 -diqsjaquiajt - 
 
 •Bjoqniore qwnqo 
 pojipaaoay puB 
 WKi JO jaqmn^ 
 
 I. 
 
 og 
 
 St 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 wo s? 
 
 ia2msis^-S^« 
 
 sa*'^sgK*asss§ : : 
 
 
 >io*e5^»t-3T-i-«»it-f-i«oeo 
 
 t-iOW^00»^'^'*eilrHeCrHf-« 
 
 lO r-c g <* t- to o .eo(NOioo>i 
 
 rH &< r^ i-H CO tH i-l 
 
 » « « » * 
 
 *»»*** 
 
 ef 
 
 t-iOC0T)tO>5OTl<iaT»(rHT-tiOi-(r-( 
 
 •g^UB^SIBBy 
 pniB B9TJ'gnOTB8Tpy 
 
 •saDBXJ-2nTqoBaj<j 
 »q^o JO jaqtnn]ij 
 
 •eiadBqo 
 JO jaqmnjj 
 
 g 
 
 eO«rMrH(Ni-<C<>rHC« 
 
 * * * • • 
 
 II 
 
 a 
 
 5S 
 
 I,- 
 
 § » S .SP S ■§ -o 
 
 •aoa> o iH c» ( 
 
 S 3 
 
 C4aS 
 
 i3§S§ 
 
 >n S o> S 
 
 00 lOClOCO 
 
 • • • « » 
 
 CO • •>o 
 
 » lAiomiM 
 
 eO THrHlH 
 
 ^•g 
 
 sl 
 
 lill 
 
 o £ 5 o o 
 
 J (S 8-3-3 
 
 *> 8 .S .2 
 
 §(S 
 
 r-l WeOT»(iO 
 
 Society for the Propagation op the 
 Gospel in Foreign Parts. — This society 
 has three stations in Ceylon. The first was es- 
 tablished at Newera Ella, in 1838, and has now 
 
 one missionary. The second was commenced in 
 1840, at Matura, and has now one missionary, 
 113 church members, 9 schools, 381 scholars; 
 of which 71 are females. That at Calpentyn, 
 
I 
 
 CHALDEANS. 
 
 243 
 
 was commenced in 1842, and has one mission- 
 ary, with a native missionary at Putlam. 
 
 The labors of the London Missionary So- 
 ciety ill Ceylon do not appear in a statistical 
 form, for the reason that they were discon- 
 tinued many years since. The missions of the 
 English Baptists, the Wesleyan Methodists, 
 the American Board, and the Church of Eng- 
 land, though occupying the same field, and 
 often in close proximity with each other, have 
 been conducted with the utmost harmony, and 
 without the intrusion at any time of denomi- 
 national strife or jealousy. Upon this fact the 
 British colonial officers have often remarked 
 with great particularity and pleasure. Fre- 
 quent mention is made in missionary reports, 
 and by intelligent travelers who have visited 
 the various missions of the island, of the Roman 
 Catholics, who have been somewhat numerous 
 there ever since the possession of the island by 
 the Portuguese, and of their hostility to the 
 Protestants and their labors. In the very last 
 report of one of the Church of England sta- 
 tions, the missionary says, " The Eomanists are 
 exerting themselves, and making every effort 
 to injure us, and having lately obtained a grant 
 from government for education ; they are seek- 
 ing to destroy or injure our schools, and 
 threaten any Romanist parent who dares to 
 send his children to a Protestant school. Fes- 
 tivals, processions, and theatrical representa- 
 tions, are the means by which they decoy the 
 unwary and the ignorant." But though the 
 Catholics have been among the bitterest ene- 
 mies of Protestant missions in Ceylon, it does 
 not appear that the missionaries have ever 
 entered into much controversy with them, or 
 been hindered by them from the steady and 
 successful prosecution of their work. 
 
 Below is given a comprehensive view of all 
 the missions in Ceylon, as at present existing : 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 English Baijtist.. .. 
 Wesleyan Method st., 
 
 American Board 
 
 Church Miss. Society 
 Gospel Prop. Soc. . . . , 
 
 1812 
 1814 
 1816 
 1818 
 1838 
 
 Totals 47 313 3,101298 12,978 
 
 483 
 1,749 
 385 
 371 
 113 
 
 & 
 
 1,003 
 3,753 
 
 4,242 
 
 3,599 
 
 381 
 
 CHALDEANS. —This name is applied by 
 some to the Nestorians, but belongs more pro- 
 perly to that portion of them who have fallen 
 off to the Pope. As long ago as 1681 a 
 Patriarch was ordained over such Nestorians 
 as had seceded to Rome, under the title of 
 Mar Yoosuf, Patriarch of the Chaldeans. His 
 seat was at iDiarbekir till about the year 1780, 
 
 when Papal emissaries secured the defection 
 of Mar Elias of Elkosh, one of the two patri- 
 archs of the Nestorians, the other being Mar 
 Shimon, whose seat was at Kochannes, near 
 Julamerk, in Kurdistan. This defection is 
 said to have been brought about by the Pa- 
 pists refusing to surrender a firman essential 
 to his accession to the patriarchate till he 
 consented to acknowledge allegiance to Rome. 
 Even then an attempt was made to set aside 
 his claim in favor of that of Mar Yoosuf, but 
 the measure excited so decided an opposition, 
 that Rome was induced to resort to a more 
 conciliatory course. This and similar manoeu- 
 vres at the death of that Patriarch, when a 
 Chaldean from Khosrova was appointed in 
 his room, instead of the regular successor, and 
 the name changed from Mar Elias to Mar 
 Nicolas, have interfered with the thorough 
 subjection of this sect to Rome. But ever 
 true to the one end of subduing all things to 
 herself, she perseveres in fastening more firmly 
 her iron yoke as its members become more 
 subservient to her sway. 
 
 The Chaldean clergy consists of (1) the 
 Karooya, or reader; (2) the Hoopodiakono, 
 or sub-deacon ; (3) the Shemmasha, or deacon ; 
 (4) the Kusha, Kushisha, or priest ; (5) the Kho- 
 repiskopa, Archidiakono, or Deputy Bishop 
 ^Archdeacon) ; (6) the Episkopa, or Bishop ; 
 (7) the Mootran, or Metropolitan Bishop; 
 and (8) the Katoleeka, Patriarcha, or Patri- 
 arch. All of these, except the two last, may 
 marry before ordination, but not after. 
 
 Their books are written in ancient Syriac. 
 and are the same with those of the Nestorians, 
 save as they are gradually altered in confor- 
 mity to the creed of Rome. At first only the 
 name of Cyril w^as substituted for Nestorius, 
 &c. ; but greater innovations are made as the 
 people are able to bear them. 
 
 Besides the vicinity of Mosul, Chaldeans are 
 found at Diarbekir, Sert, Khosrova in Persia, 
 Arbela and Bagdad. 
 
 This sect is accessible through the missions 
 of the A. B. C. F. M. at Oroomiah and Diar- 
 bekir, but principally through the station at 
 Mosul, where some of the members of the Pro- 
 testant church are converted Chaldeans. Re- 
 cently, through Papal intrigues with the 
 Pasha, the large Chaldean village of Telkeif 
 has been closed to missionary efforts, and even 
 Protestants who own property there have been 
 forbidden to visit it. But such a state of things 
 cannot last, and we may hope soon to hear 
 that such measures have redounded, as they 
 always do, to the furtherance of the truth. — 
 See Assemani ; Smith and DwighVs Armenia; 
 Bishop Southgaie's First and Second Journey ; 
 Layard's Nineveh; Badger's Nestorians and 
 their Ritxmls ; and Dr. Grant and the Mountain 
 Nestorians. — Rev. T. Laurie. 
 
 CHAVAOACHERRY : A station of the 
 Am. Board, in the southern or central part of 
 Jaffna, or Tamul district, Ceylon. 
 
244 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 CHAGA : A station of the General Bap- 
 tists in nintlostan, a little distance from Cut- 
 tuck, and near the cojust of the Bay of Bengal 
 
 CilARLOTTK: A village of recaptured 
 Africans, in the parish of St. John, Sierra 
 Leone, West Africa, occupied by the Church 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 CHERKAPOONJEE : A town on the 
 Cassia, or Kossaya hills, 250 m. N. E. of Cal- 
 cutta, where is a Welsh Calvinistic mission. 
 
 ClIEDUBA : A Karen village in Arra- 
 can, and an out-station of the mission of the 
 Am. Baptist Miss. Union in Arracan. 
 
 CHEK0KP:E: a chief town of the 
 Cherokee nation in the Indian territory, and 
 the seat of the Cherokee Mission of the Am. 
 Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
 CHEK CHIN : An out station of the Hong- 
 Kong Am. Baptist Mission in China. 
 
 CHETTHIxXGSVJLLE : A Karen village 
 in the Amherst dist. of Burmah, and an outr 
 station of the Maulmain Karen Mission of the 
 Am. Baptist Miss. Union. 
 
 CHICIIACOLE : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, in the Northern Circar, 
 India, 50 m. N. E. of Yizagapatam. 
 
 CHINA : On account of its great antiquity, 
 its extent of territory, its vast population, its 
 physical, social, and moral condition, its poli- 
 tical and commercial importance, China pre- 
 sents a high claim upon the attention of the 
 scholar, the philanthropist, and especially the 
 Christian. And this claim is greatly aug- 
 mented at the present time, by the wonder- 
 ful movement among its native population, 
 for the reformation of its political, social, and 
 religious institutions. Little was known of 
 this great empire, in the Western world, till 
 it was visited by the Venetian traveler, Marco 
 Paulo ; nor were his discoveries generally 
 known in his day. The researches of the 
 Catholic missionaries in Peking, early in the 
 16th century, together with the efforts of the 
 Western powers to secure a profitable trade 
 "with China, contributed to extend our know- 
 ledge of the country ; and these have subse- 
 quently been followed up by Christian mis- 
 sions and commerce ; and yet, with all these 
 aids, the interior of this vast kingdom is but 
 very imperfectly known. 
 
 Territorial Extent. — The Chinese Empire is 
 bounded on the south-east by the Pacific 
 Ocean, and on the south-west by Cochin-china, 
 Laos, and Burmah. By the Himalaya moun- 
 tains on the side of Thibet, it is separated from 
 Ai5sam, Bootan, and India. Its western bor- 
 der, including Thibet, Ladak and Hi, extend- 
 ing north to the Russian territories, is bounded 
 by the provinces of Lahore, Cashmere, Badak- 
 shan, Kokand and the Kirghis steppe. Rus- 
 sia is conterminous with China from the 
 Kirghis steppe on the west, to the sea of Ok- 
 hotsk on the east, 3,300 miles, the Altai and 
 Haourian mountains forming a natural bound- 
 ary between these two great empires. The 
 
 whole Chinese Empire is 12,550 miles in cir- 
 cumference, (about half that of the globo.J 
 comprising, according to McCulloch, 5,300,000 
 square miles, and covering about one-third of 
 the continent of Asia and about one-ninth of 
 the land area of the globe. Russia is nearly 
 6000 miles in its greatest length, its average 
 breadth, about 1,500 miles, and measures 
 7,725,000 sq. miles, being nearly one-seventh 
 of the land on the globe. The area of the 
 British Empire, at thQ lowest calculation is 
 6,508,000 square miles. Brazil comprises an 
 area of 3,390,000 square miles, and the United 
 States and territories measure 3,235,148 square 
 miles, situated, as to soil and climate, within 
 the most eligible portion of the earth, while a 
 large part of the British, Russian, and Chinese 
 empires, can never be otherwise than very thinly 
 settled. 
 
 Political Divisions. — The Chinese divide their 
 empire into three principal parts, according to 
 the form of government adopted in each : — 
 (1] The Eigliteen Provinces; (2) Manchuria, 
 lying north of the gulf of Leantung, and cast 
 of the Inner Haourian mountain to the Pacific ; 
 (3) Colonial Possessions, including Mongolia, 
 Ili, Kokonor and Thibet. 
 
 The first only of these is, by other nations, 
 called China. It lies on the eastern slope of 
 the high table-land «of Central Asia, in the 
 south-eastern angle of the continent. In its 
 scenery, soil, climate, navigable rivers and va- 
 rious and abundant productions, it will com- 
 pare with the most favored portions of the ha- 
 bitable globe. The Chinese call it "The 
 Eighteen Provinces," " The Middle Kingdom," 
 and other pompous names. They regard it as 
 including within its area, the major part of the 
 earth, and as occupying a central position 
 among the nations. 
 
 Com'parAtive Dimensimis of China Proper, — 
 The dimensions of the Eighteen Provinces, as 
 defined by the Chinese, cannot be much below 
 2,000,000 square miles, including the provinces 
 of Cansuh and Chihli, a little exceeding two- 
 fifths of the whole empire. But estimating 
 China Proper, according to the old limits, 
 McCulloch makes its area 1,348,870 sq. miles. 
 Its length from north to south, is 1474 miles, 
 and its breadth 1355 miles. The coast jinel 
 from Hainan to Leautung is above 2,500 mileij 
 its inland frontier is 4,400 miles, making '" 
 seven times larger than France, fifteen tij 
 larger than the United Kingdom, and nc 
 half as large as all Europe, which containfi 
 3,650,000 square miles. The area of China 
 Proper is nearly equal to that of the thirty-' 
 one United States of America, which is about 
 1,558,424 square miles. In the relative posi- 
 tion of the United States and China, there if 
 considerable resemblance, which involves mucl.' 
 similarity of climate. They are both, on theii' 
 eastern shores, washed by great oceans. Bu i 
 in the same latitude, China is considerabh 
 colder than this country. 
 

 
 Poaadijg 
 
 (/I 
 
 
 
 
 
 

CHINA. 
 
 245 
 
 Mountains. — The principal mountains of the 
 I Chinese empire, are the outer Hingan, Daou- 
 I rian, and Altai, separating it from Eussia in 
 I Asia on the north. These mountains seldom 
 I ri^e more than 7,000 feet above the sea. On its 
 tern border are the Ak-tak, Belar-tag, and 
 iiakara mountains. On the southern border 
 ■ are the lofty Himalaya, running south-easterly 
 to about 95° east long,, a distance of more 
 than 1,000 miles. In the interior of its vast 
 colonial dominions, are the Celestial Mountains, 
 separating Eastern Turkistan from Soungaria ; 
 . 'd, running nearly parallel with them to the 
 south, are the Kwanlun mountains running 
 easterly between Hi on the north, and Thibet 
 on the south. These ranges, with partial in- 
 terruptions, extend to the western borders of 
 China Proper, and between them lies the Great 
 Desert of Gobi, and much of the high table 
 land of Central Asia. Besides these are the 
 Tauguu mountains on the north-west, the Bay- 
 ankara in Kokonor, the Inner Hingan, run- 
 ning south, near the western border of Man- 
 churia ; and there is still another long range 
 commencing near the mouth of the Sagalien 
 river, on the north, and running nearly paral- 
 lel with the sea-coast to the northern point of 
 Corea. The south-western and southern pro- 
 vinces are a mountainous region, though to a 
 large extent capable of cultivation, and very 
 productive. In the mountains, and lofty table 
 lands of Central Asia, the great rivers of China 
 originate. Nearly four-fifths of the empire are 
 mountainous, aside from the Desert of Gobi, 
 but generally well rewarding the husbandman 
 for his toil. The character of the Chinese in- 
 habiting those mountainous regions differs wide- 
 ly from that of those residing in the Great 
 Plain, the former being rough in their man- 
 ners, and bold, hardy, and independent, in their 
 bearing. 
 
 Great Desert of Gobi. — Next to the Great 
 Desert of Sahara, in Africa, the Desert of Gobi 
 is the most remarkable. It lies between the 
 Celestial Mountains on the north and the 
 Kwanlun range on the north-west, reaching 
 from the Belar-tag mountains on the west, to 
 the Inner Hingan or Sialkoi, on the east, a dis- 
 tance of 2,200 miles, with an average breadth 
 of between 350 and 400 miles, and a superfi- 
 cial area of about 1,200,000 square miles. 
 Though this tract is not all entirely desert, 
 none of it is very fertile. Its great altitude is 
 supposed to be the principal cause of its sterility. 
 Along the southern side of the Celestial Moun- 
 tains, is a strip of arable land of from 50 to 
 80 miles in width, in which lie nearly all the 
 Mohammedan cities and forts of the southern 
 circuit, as Kashgar, Oksu, Hami, and others. 
 The Tarim or Yarkand river flows eastward 
 through this fertile tract, and empties its waters 
 into the Lop-nor lake. About east long. 96°, 
 at the Kiayu pass, the desert is only 50 miles 
 wide. West of this point lies what is called 
 the Desert of Lop-nor, and east of the same is 
 
 what is properly termed the Desert of Gobi. 
 The former desert is about 1200 miles in length, 
 and 4500 feet above the level of the sea, wliile 
 the latter seldom reaches the elevation of 4000 
 feet. The province of Kansah reaches across 
 this desert tract to the base of the Celestial 
 Mountains, Between the Altai and the In- 
 shan mountains, the desert is from 500 to 700 
 miles in width. Within this tract lies the de- 
 pressed valley, called the Shah-moh, i. e. sandy 
 floats, varying in width from 150 to 200 miles, 
 the lowest depression being from 2,600 to 3,000 
 feet above the level of the ocean. This valley 
 is almost entirely covered with sand, sometimes 
 rising into low hills, but generally level, with a 
 scanty and stinted vegetation ; and the water, 
 in its numerous small streams and lakes, is 
 brackish and unwholesome. This desert is an 
 almost complete waste, but north of Kokonor, 
 it assumes its most terrific appearance, being 
 rendered intolerably hot, by the reflection of 
 the sun's rays from the dazzling stones and the 
 mountains of sand, with which it is covered, 
 and which are said to move like the waves of 
 the sea. North and south of the Shah-moh, 
 there is a gravelly and sometimes rocky sur- 
 face, which, in many places, affords good pas- 
 turage for the herds of the Kalkas tribes. 
 From the south of the Inner Hingan range, 
 the desert lands reach nearly to the Chaug-peh- 
 shan, north of Leautung. Thus, almost from 
 the extreme western limits of the Chinese em- 
 pire to its eastern coast there is nearly a con- 
 tinuous desert, variable in width, and elevated 
 several thousand feet above the sea. 
 
 Rivers and Lakes. — China is peculiarly fa- 
 vored as to the means of internal navigation. 
 Th^ four principal rivers are the Yellow river, 
 the Yangtszkiang, the Sagalien or Amour, and 
 the Tarim or Yarkand. The Yamchangbu, in 
 the southern borders of Thibet, supposed to be 
 the same with the Brahmaputra, which emp- 
 ties into the Bay of Bengal, is also a noble 
 stream flowing east within the southern bor- 
 der of Thibet, upwards of 1000 miles. Of 
 these the Yellow river is the most renowned 
 in Chinese history ; but by reason of its rapid- 
 ity incomparably less useful than the Yangtsz- 
 kiang. Besides the rivers of China Proper, 
 which rise in the mountains and highlands of 
 Thibet and Kokonor, there are numerous 
 streams in the colonial possessions of the em- 
 pire, which are either lost in the Great Desert 
 or empty themselves into lakes, or find their 
 way to the north sea, into regions south of 
 the Himalaya, or west of the Karakorum 
 mountains. Though the lakes are numerous 
 and useful as the sources of rivers, the chan- 
 nels of navigation, and the means of subsist- 
 ence to millions of the people, yet none of 
 them can compare with the great lakes of 
 North America. The lakes lying both north 
 and south of the Desert of Gobi, are in gene- 
 ral salt, owing, perhaps, to their great evapo- 
 ration. 
 
246 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 Boundaries and Civil Divisions of China 
 p,.oper.— China Proper is bounded on the east 
 and south-oast by the Pacilic Ocean ; on the 
 south by the Pacific, Cochin-china, and the 
 uncivilized tribes between it and Burmah ; 
 west by Burmah, Thibet and Kokouor ; north- 
 we^«t and north by the province of Kausuh 
 and Inner Mongolia, from which it is separ 
 rated by the great wall. The great wall is 
 strictly the northern boundary of China Pro- 
 
 r, though a part of Chihli lies north of it. 
 eighteen provinces into which it is di- 
 videcl>^re arranged by the Chinese into the 
 northers and eastern, southern and western 
 provinces, according to their relative location. 
 
 The coast of China is dotted by many 
 small islands, which, together with the main 
 land, afford numerous and safe retreats to ves- 
 sels during the terrible storms that at times 
 sweep their shores. They are inhabited by a 
 numerous and hardy race of men, who subsist 
 by fishing and occasional piracy. Between 
 Hong-Kong and Ningpo the coast is high, 
 and barren, giving little promise of the rich 
 and fruitful regions in their rear. 
 
 Climate. — The climate of China Proper, 
 compared with most other countries in the 
 same latitude, is healthy. China has not been 
 subject to those wide-spread and destructive 
 pestilences which have so often swept over 
 Hindostan, and other portions of the eastern 
 world. It is seldom visited with extreme 
 drought. Its average temperature is esti- 
 mated lower than that of any other country in 
 the same latitude. The climate on the coasts, 
 like that of our Atlantic States, is changeable, 
 and rheumatic and pulmonary complaints are 
 common. On the Great Plain, which reaches 
 from the Chinese wall to the Yangtszkiang, a 
 distance of 700 miles, and comprises an area 
 of about 210,000 square miles, the climate 
 varies according to its latitude and elevation. 
 The northern part is more elevated and salu- 
 brious ; the southern and eastern sections, bor- 
 dering on the rivers and the searcoast, are low 
 and marshy, and agues, fevers and kindred 
 complaints prevail ; yet, considering its enor- 
 mous population of 177 millions, it must be, 
 to the natives, in the main, a healthy country. 
 But, to foreigners, it has proved very unhealth- 
 ful. 
 
 The maximum heat of Shanghai, in lat. 
 31° 24' N., according to Dr. Lockhart, is 
 100'^ Fah. and the minimum 24°. The ice is 
 not thick, and the snow continues only a short 
 time. In a single day the thermometer some- 
 times varies 20^, and the spring winds, both 
 here and even downwards to Canton, are 
 chilly. The climate of Ningpo is considered 
 more pleasant and salubrious than Shanghai. 
 In the course of the year the thermometer at 
 this place is reported to range between 24© 
 and 107°, and changes of 20^ in two hours 
 sometimes occur. In Shanghai, Ningpo, 
 Fuh-chau, Amoy, and to some extent in Can- 
 
 ton, fires are necessary to foreigners in tho 
 winter and spring ; but the Chinese dispense 
 with them in their dwellings, and in sorao 
 measure supply the deficiency by clothing 
 themselves in skins, and by wearing, at tho 
 same time, several suits of apparel, which 
 give them a grotesque appearance. They 
 often carry about with them small stoves, filled 
 with charcoal. Fuh-chau, in about 29<^ N. 
 lat., is among the healthiest of the five porta. 
 Amoy has a delightful climate, its insular 
 position moderating the heat of summer, and 
 giving it tlie full advantage of the sea breeze. 
 The thermometer ranges between 40^ and 
 96°, and compared witli Ningpo, the changes 
 are not rapid. The heaviest rains on the Chi- 
 nese coast are usually in the spring and early 
 part of summer ; and in August terrible ty- 
 phoons sometimes occur, producing great 
 destruction of life and property, among both 
 native and foreign shipping. The latter half 
 of the fall and the entire winter, arc the most 
 pleasant and healthy portions of the year, the 
 air being clear and bracing, with little rain. 
 Four or five months in the year warm apparel 
 is necessary. Canton, situated about 22^ 
 N., compared with most other places in the 
 tropics, has a fine climate. The thermometer 
 ranges between 50° and 88° ; consequently 
 the heat, though of longer continuance, is 
 there less severe than at the more northern 
 ports. The inequalities of climate in the 
 eighteen provinces of China are probably no 
 greater than in the United States. A good 
 proportion of the Chinese, compared with 
 other nations, attain to old age. 
 
 Soil. — China Proper is among the most fa- 
 vored of the nations, as to the fertility of its 
 soil. The most fertile portion of her territory 
 is the^ Great Plain, of which the fact of its 
 containing such an immense population, is 
 conclusive proof. It is the most densely pop- 
 ulated territory of its size on the globe. The 
 other portions of China are to a great extent 
 either hilly or mountainous, though on the 
 banks of the rivers there are large tracts of 
 rich soil, and the high lands are capable 
 of supporting a numerous and hardy popu- 
 lation. 
 
 Persons of the Chinese. — The Chinese, in gen- 
 eral, are in stature considerably below the 
 average height of Europeans, but well-built ; 
 and compared with other Asiatics, strong, 
 hardy, and athletic. They have coarse black 
 hair and small black eyes, the inner angle of 
 the eye inclining downwards, and the eye- 
 lids seeming but partially opened, which 
 detracts from the animation and expressive- 
 ness of the countenance. They have high 
 cheek bones, short and somewhat flattened 
 noses ; foreheads of moderate elevation ; fea- 
 tures oval ; hands and feet small ; and com- 
 plexion a ligh't olive, with sometimes a yellow 
 tinge. But their complexion is modified by j 
 their mode of life and the latitude in whidftl 
 
CHINA. 
 
 247 
 
 they reside. Many of tlieir delicately-bred 
 females might pass among us for fair and even 
 beautiful. 
 
 Intellectual Character. — In native capacity, 
 the Chinese are not inferior to the Europeans. 
 They have shown themselves capable of com- 
 peting with the most gifted minds in literary 
 pursuits, and w^ith the shrewdest foreign mer- 
 chants in trade. Their literati possess vigor- 
 ous and powerful minds, and the Chinese states- 
 men have exercised great ability as diploma- 
 tists. The imperial civil code is a work of 
 great ability. They have a voluminous litera- 
 ture, evincing great intellectual attainments. 
 
 Population. — The most reliable information 
 accessible to European and American scholars 
 in China leads to the conclusion that the pre- 
 sent population of the Eighteen Provinces, 
 cannot be much short of 367,000,000. This 
 conclusion is the result of a comparison of the 
 several censuses made by different emperors, 
 the last of which was in 1812. This is deemed 
 incredible, by some distinguished scholars; 
 and in many of the geographies the number is 
 placed much below this figure. But those who 
 have had the best opportunities of learning the 
 truth on the subject, generally favor the larger 
 number ; among whom are. Sir Francis Davis, 
 and Messrs. Medhurst, GutzlaflF, Bridgman, 
 and Williams. 
 
 History. — The Chinese have strong claims 
 to great antiquity. Their traditionary records 
 carry us back about 4,000 years, to the Em- 
 peror Yu, the founder of the Hea dynasty, 
 2,204 B. c. Yet China, like other great na- 
 tions, has been the theatre of frequent and 
 bloody convulsions. Previous to the present 
 dynasty, 20 different dynasties had risen and 
 fallen, each rising like the present, and also 
 closing its career, amid scenes of violence and 
 blood. The Manchu was not firmly establish- 
 ed until 20 years after the occupation of Pe- 
 king by the first Manchu emperor in 1644. 
 Like the ancient eastern and modern European 
 nations, China has often been made a " field of 
 blood." The armies which have been successive- 
 ly brought into the field, in these conflicts, have 
 been vast, and the carnage in proportion. No 
 quarter has usually been shown to the vanquish- 
 ed; but death has rioted in his slaughtered 
 victims. Twice, within less than 600 years, 
 it has been overrun by foreign princes, con- 
 nected with the savage hordes on her frontiers ; 
 first by the Monguls in 1280, who governed 
 the empire 88 years, and were expelled by the 
 Chinese at the commencement of the Ming 
 dynasty in 1368, which held the throne 276 
 years. Then again was it subjugated by the 
 Mauchus, w^hose dynasty dates from 1644, 
 having lasted 260 years. But its days seem 
 now almost numbered. Happy will it be if 
 the next dynasty shall be a Christian one, 
 agreeing in character with the name of its 
 leader, the " Prince of Peace." Happier still 
 the day when Christ the true Prince of Peace 
 
 shall reign without a rival in the hearts of 
 China's unknown millions. 
 
 There is reason to believe that the primitive 
 domains of the Chinese monarchs were very 
 small, lying mostly within the " Great Plain," 
 and comprehending only a small part of that. 
 The dominions of the present dynasty are more 
 extensive than of any preceding line of mon- 
 archs. Until a late period that part of China 
 Proper lying south of the Yangtszkiang, was 
 in a state of barbarism ; and even now in its 
 southern and south-western quarter there are 
 independent aboriginal tribes, cajled Meautsz, 
 children of the soil, who have never submitted 
 to the Chinese government. Their homes are 
 in the mountainous regions, where they main- 
 tain their savage state. 
 
 National Works— Great Wall. — The Chinese, 
 until within a comparatively short period, 
 greatly excelled the nations of the western 
 world, both in the arts, and in internal im- 
 provements. Among the earliest of these is 
 the great national wall, built by Tsim-Chi, 
 about B. c. 220, which, for its magnitude, may 
 be classed among the wonders of the world. 
 It was designed to protect his dominions from 
 the incursions of the northern barbarians. As 
 evidence of its original solidity, it has to the 
 present day resisted the elements and the frosts 
 of a wintry region. Its entire length, includ- 
 ing its windings, is estimated by McCulloch at 
 1,250 miles. Its height is from 15 to 30 feet, 
 being 25 feet wide at the base, and 15 at the 
 top ; having square towers at short intervals, 
 generally about 37 feet high, and 40 feet 
 square at the base, built without the wall. 
 This immense structure is composed of earth, 
 faced with masonry, and covered with tiles, 
 and extends over the highest mountains, 
 through the deepest valleys, and over rivers by 
 bridges. It is at present in a state of decay, 
 being no longer needed for its original use, 
 since the incorporation of the Mongul and 
 Manchu territories in the Chinese empire, 
 
 T?ie Grand Canal commences in Hangchau, 
 in about 30° 20' N. lat, and 119° 45' E. long., 
 and extending north, unites first with the 
 Yangtszkiang, and subsequently with the 
 Hoang-ho, and terminates at Lintsin, in about 
 37° N. lat. and 116° E. long., being in a direct 
 line 512 miles long ; but, including its bends, 
 above 650 ; and, by its union with navigable 
 rivers, forming a water communication be- 
 tween Hangchau and Peking, across ten 
 degrees of latitude. By its union with other 
 smaller canals and navigable rivers, it not only 
 aids in irrigating immense tracts of land, but 
 facilitates the conveyance of produce to all 
 parts of the empire. Though its construction 
 must have required a vast amount of labor, 
 yet, aside from its great utility, it ranks not 
 high as a work of art, and in this respect can- 
 not compare with similar works in Europe and 
 America. This canal was dug in 1344, by the 
 last prince of the Mongul dynasty. 
 
248 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 National Roads.—*' In the public roads," 
 <»)•» McCullocli, " and where rupeed steppes 
 arc only accessible by means of laboriously- 
 formed passes, Chinese industry is fully ap- 
 parent Wherever intercourse is expedient 
 between any two points, no natural impedi- 
 ments, no labor or expense, are too great for 
 the Chinese to overcome." Yet, we are not 
 to conclude that the celestial empire abounds 
 with good roads, in our sense of the term; 
 for, as goods are transported in boats by water, 
 or carried overland by porters, the roads are 
 generally unaaited to wheel carriages. They 
 are usually mere foot-paths, sometimes paved 
 and sometimes not. 
 
 Cities. — In the number and magnitude of its 
 cities, no other country can compare with 
 China. In their architecture, however, there 
 is little to interest or to excite admiration. 
 The houses are generally but one story high, 
 covered with tiles, without glass windows, mis- 
 erably lighted and ventilated, and often 
 crowded together without much respect to 
 order. Their plastering is niud, overlaid 
 with a thin coat of lime. Their floors are 
 either tiles, boards, a cement made of lime, 
 sand, and red earth, or the mere ground a litr 
 tie elevated. The rooms are sometimes ceiled 
 above with thin boards, but as often, perhaps, 
 without any ceiling. They plaster the walls 
 of their rooms, but never the ceiling, except 
 in the houses of foreigners. The frame-work 
 of their dwellings is simple and peculiar, 
 and is not allowed to rest on the outer walls. 
 As a protection both against fire and robbers, 
 the houses of the more wealthy are often sur- 
 rounded by a wall from 18 to 20 feet high, 
 commonly made of earth, capped with project- 
 ing tiles, and plastered on both sides. These 
 walls are sometimes two or more feet thick at 
 the base, and, with proper care, will stand 60 
 or 80 years. If well made, they in time be- 
 come almost as hard as brick. The dwellings 
 of the Chinese, in their general form, are much 
 after the model of a tent. Those of the rich 
 frequently contain, each a spacious court, with 
 side rooms for the different members of the 
 household, and with more private apartments 
 in its rear. This court is the reception room 
 for guests, and in its back part are the domes- 
 tic idols. Gardens, in which there is an at- 
 tempt to imitate lake, woodland, and moun- 
 tain scenery, are often found connected with 
 their dwellings. The houses of the rich are 
 adorned with carved work and a profusion of 
 ctfarse paintings, and the door-posts of the 
 dwellings of all classes are ornamented with 
 red paper, on which sentences from the classics 
 are written in large characters. So also above 
 the doors, and sometimes on them. Some of 
 their temples and other public dwellings are 
 vast structures, abounding in carved work, 
 both in wood and stone ; and in paintings and 
 gildings ; and, in their general construction, 
 they show much architectural skill. But they 
 
 are wanting in good taste, being suited to a 
 barbarous, or uncivilized age. The streets in 
 Chinese cities are very narrow, the widest sel- 
 dom exceeding 15 or 20 feet ; and they are 
 often so crowded with articles of merchandise 
 and various handicraft operations, that pass- 
 ing is difficult, especially in the filthy markets, 
 early in the day. The stench arising from the 
 articles of food exposed for sale, and the smoke 
 and dust from the numerous cooking establish- 
 ments in the streets, is very oflFensive. As the 
 use of wheel carriages is impracticable, pas- 
 sengers, goods, building materials, and every 
 other article in use among the people, must be 
 carried by coolies. Sedan chairs are used by 
 many of the more respectable citizens. A 
 horse is seldom seen in the streets. The Chi- 
 nese merchants and traders exhibit much taste 
 and skill in the arrangement of their goods. 
 In the evening especially, their spacious shops, 
 illumined by numerous lamps and by large 
 ornamented lanterns suspended in front, present 
 quite a splendid appearance. Their drug- 
 stores will compare very well with similar 
 establishments in this country. There is, how- 
 ever, no comparison between their mercantile 
 buildings and the superb establishments of 
 European and American merchants. The 
 shops are often lighted from windows in the 
 roof. 
 
 The Chinese have a method of guarding 
 against extensive fires, which is peculiarly 
 their own. They divide their cities into sec- 
 tions by fire-proof walls, from 20 to 30 feet 
 high, made of earth, plastered on both sides, 
 and protected from the rains by a projecting 
 cap of tiles. No one is allowed to build 
 higher than this wall, unless he will raise the 
 wall to an equal height with his house. 
 
 With these preliminary observations, we 
 proceed to notice briefly some of the more im- 
 portant of the Chinese cities, embracing the 
 principal cities on the coast, in which there 
 are or have been Christian missions, and those 
 which have become by treaty the centres of 
 trade. And as the particular descriptions 
 given of the capital will apply to other cities 
 also, we shall not repeat them ; as, in these 
 respects, all their cities are nearly alike, every- 
 thing, almost, being stereotyped. 
 
 Peking, or the Nortliern Capital, if not the 
 largest, is yet the most important, being th0 
 seat of the imperial power. It is situated in 
 the Chihli province, amid a sandy plain, in 
 latitude 39° 54' north, and longitude llGo 27' 
 east, nearly on the parallel of Philadelphia. 
 Its entire circuit, including the suburbs, has 
 been estimated at 25 miles, and its area at 27 
 sq. m. ; and its population from 1,500,000 to 
 3,000,.000. The truth may be between the 
 two extremes, perhaps about 2,000,000. It is- 
 an ancient city, but did not become the seat 
 of government until 1282, during the reign of 
 the celebrated Mogul emperor, Kublai Khan, 
 who subsequently made Hangchau, Ins impe- 
 
TJiriVSIlSITT] 
 
CHINA 
 
 249 
 
 rial residence. After the expulsion of tlie 
 Monguls, the emperors of the Ming dynasty held 
 their court at Hiang-ning-foo, now called Nan- 
 king, until Yungloh its third monarch, in 
 1411, made Poking the seat of government, 
 which has ever since been the residence of the 
 imperial court. This city consists of two parts, 
 the one containing about 12 sq. ra., being the 
 northern or Tartar city, including the imperial 
 palace and the government buildings ; and the 
 other, called the southern or outer city, being 
 occupied by the Chinese. The- walls are 30 
 feet high, 25 thick at the base, and 12 at the 
 top, being surmounted with a parapet, and sur- 
 rounded with a ditch. Near the gates, 16 in 
 all, the walls are faced with stone, and else- 
 where with large bricks, laid in mortar, which 
 in time become nearly as hard as stone. Be- 
 tween the facings, the wall is composed of 
 earth taken from the surrounding ditch. 
 Square towers, projecting 50 feet from the 
 outer margin of the walls, occur at intervals of 
 about 60 yards, and one of these defences stands 
 on each side of every gate. The gateways are 
 covered by strong arches, which are surrounded 
 by wooden buildings, several stories high, with 
 painted port-holes. The towers on each side 
 of the gateways are connected in front by 
 a semi-circular fort, which is entered on the 
 Bide. 
 
 Canton is the largest of the five ports open 
 to foreign commerce. It is the capital of 
 Kwangtung, situated on the north bank of the 
 Pearl river, in lat. 23o 7' N., and 113o_14' E. 
 long. It was for a long period, the principal 
 foreign emporium, but is now rivaled by Shan- 
 hai. The city proper is about 6 miles in cir- 
 cumference, being divided into two unequal 
 parts, by a wall running east and west ; but 
 the entire city, including the suburbs, is about 
 10 miles in circuit. In magnitude it is regard- 
 ed as the third city in the empire, containing 
 a population probably of 1,000,000. In wealth 
 it may be next to Peking. The foreign fac- 
 tories are the best buildings in the city, and an 
 honor to the distinguished nations to whose 
 enterprising merchants they belong. The 
 promenade grounds, between the mercantile 
 hongs and the river are beautiful, and when, 
 morning and evening, enlivened by merchants 
 and strangers, seeking exercise and diversion, 
 they are a pleasant resort. The contrast be- 
 tween the enlightened and polished citizens of 
 Uie west, and the surrounding Chinese is strik- 
 ingly apparent. The English Episcopal church 
 on these grounds is a tasteful edifice. The 
 city proper is yet closed against the entrance 
 of strangers. The populace of Canton have 
 heretofore been peculiarly unfriendly to for- 
 eigners, and their treatment of them in lan- 
 guage and demeanor uncommonly reproachful ; 
 but of late there has been a great change for 
 the better, at least so far as Christian mission- 
 aries are concerned. The immense amount 
 and variety of native craft in the river oppo- 
 
 site Canton, is not among the least interesting 
 and surprising objects to the traveler. They 
 constitute a vast floating city. 
 
 Whampoa, the "Yedow Anchorage," is 
 about 14 miles below Canton, and is the an- 
 chorage ground of the foreign shipping. Above 
 this point large vessels cannot safely venture. 
 There are two floating chapels for seamen, the 
 one Protestant, the other Roman Catholic. 
 The first is furnished with a chaplain by the 
 American Seamans' Friend Society, and con- 
 tains apartments for the chaplain, and a reading- 
 room for sailors. On the south side of the an- 
 chorage are two islands, called French and 
 Danes Islands, on which foreigners are allowed 
 to bury their dead, and ramble at pleasure. In 
 this neighborhood is a dense population, and 
 the lands are rich and highly cultivated, and 
 largo herds of cattle are raised for the use of 
 the shipping, the Chinese eating little beef. 
 
 Macao is a Portuguese settlement, about 8 
 miles in circuit, on a small peninsula at the 
 north-western extremity of the large island 
 called Iliugshan, between 60 and 70 miles 
 south-east of Canton. It was occupied by the 
 Portuguese early in the 16th century, and was 
 formerly a place of much trade ; but in a com- 
 mercial aspect, it is not now of much impor- 
 tance. It is, however, a very pleasant and 
 healthful locality. The population of the pen- 
 insula is about 30,000, of whom upwards of 
 5,000 are Portuguese and other foreigners, 
 subject to Portuguese officers ; but the Chinese 
 are governed by their own magistrate» This 
 place is the head-quarters of the Catholic mis- 
 sions in China, and the seat of a college, in 
 which many Chinese youth have been educated 
 to become preachers of that faith in different 
 parts of China. The town is protected by 
 three forts, on commanding eminences, and 
 others outside of its walls defend its waters. 
 
 Hong-Kong is a flourishing English settle- 
 ment, about 40 miles eastward of Macao. Vic- 
 toria, its chief city, is in lat. 22° 16' north, and 
 long. 114° 8' east. The island, which is nine 
 miles long, eight broad, and 26 in circuit, was 
 ceded by the Chinese to the English in 1842, 
 at the treaty of Nanking. It is mountainous, 
 with little productive soil, but on its northern 
 side, where stands the long and beautiful town 
 of Victoria, is a spacious and safe harbor. 
 The town contains many elegant buildings, 
 beautiful roads, and a mixed population, of 
 whom, probably more than two-thirds are Chi- 
 nese, whose families for the most part reside on 
 the main land. The governor of this colony 
 is also superintendent of British trade at the 
 Five Ports. Here is stationed a considerable 
 military force for the protection of the British 
 interests in China. It is now regarded as a 
 healthy place. It is the residence of a bishop 
 of the Church of England, having the oversight 
 of her Chinese missions. The Catholics are 
 numerous. The amount of money expended 
 in buildings in this colony, since its session, is 
 
250 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 thought to exceed 2,000,000 of dollars. It is 
 a place of much trade, and a large opium de- 
 pot. Several iiewsptiiHirs are pnblished here." 
 Amoy is situated on the coast northward 
 of Canton, in latitude 24^ 40' N., and long. 
 118^ 20' K. having an excellent harbor, a large 
 native and an increasing foreign trade. It 
 stands on the south-western corner of the 
 island after which it is called, at the mouth 
 of the Dragon river, which leads to Chiang- 
 chan-foo. This island is about 40 miles in 
 circumference, and besides the city it is dotted 
 with numerous large villages. The scenery 
 in and around the bay is quite picturesque. 
 Across the channel from Amoy is the island 
 of Koolungsoo, on which is the missionary 
 burial ground, and a place of interment for 
 other foreigners. The city and its suburbs is 
 about 8 miles in circuit, with a population, 
 probably, of upwards of 200,000 ; while that 
 of the remaining part of the island may be 
 100,000. This city was captured by the 
 English in 1841, and restored again to the 
 Chinese in 1845. The surrounding country is 
 densely populated, and in a high state of culti- 
 vation. 
 
 i'MAcAaM.-Fuhchau-foo,that is, happy district, 
 is in latitude 26° 5' N., and longitude 119° 
 20' E. It stands on the north bank of the 
 Min, about 34 miles from its mouth. The 
 walled part of the city is about three miles 
 from the river, the intervening space on the 
 south being a beautiful plain, under the high- 
 est cult^ation, with moderate elevations, suflfi- 
 cient to give a pleasing variety to the land- 
 scape. On the north, the city walls are near 
 the base of the mountains, which bound the 
 valley of the Min, from a long distance above 
 the city, to its mouth. Some miles to the west 
 is also a mountain range of moderate eleva- 
 tion, and the mountains on the south bank 
 of the river also reach from above the city to 
 its mouth. These two mountain ranges con- 
 verge 8 or 10 miles below the city, thus plac- 
 ing Fuhchau in a vast natural amphitheatre, 
 through which the Min winds majestically, 
 diffusing beauty and fertility throughout the 
 extensive valley through which it flows. The 
 British consulate stands on a hilly eminence in 
 the southern borders of the city, from which 
 is an extensive view of grand and beautiful 
 scenery. From the southern and eastern bor- 
 ders of the city proper, the suburbs extend for 
 about three miles south-east to the northern 
 bank 'of the river. At Tongchiu, a small islet 
 amid the stream, the river is spanned by a 
 stone bridge, 420 paces long, on the north side, 
 resting on 40 stone piers, and on the south 
 side of the island by another, resting on 90 
 abutments, extending to the south shore. 
 These bridges are ancient structures, and on 
 one side are lined with shops. The intervening 
 island is about an eighth of a mile in diam- 
 eter, and a quarter of a mile long, and dense- 
 ly inhabited. On the south bank of the river 
 
 is a large suburb of about 3 miles in length. 
 The whole city within and without the walls 
 is supposed to contain a population of not leas 
 than 000,000 souls. The foreign trade at this 
 port has hitherto been small, owing in part to 
 the difficult entrance to the river, though navi- 
 gable for large vessels to within 12 miles of the 
 city. The native trade is large, and the float- 
 ing population vast. To perform the circuit of 
 the walls on foot requires about two and a half 
 hours, and the entire circuit is probably about 
 eight miles. This city is the residence during 
 a part of the- year of the viceroy of Fuhkien 
 and Chekiang, and of other high officers ; 
 among whom are the lieutenant-governor and 
 the commander of the Tartar troops. The 
 Manchus occupy the eastern section of the city, 
 between whom and the Chinese there is little 
 intercourse. Outside of the south gate is a 
 handsome Catholic church, in which a Spanish 
 priest officiates. Timber and paper are among 
 the most considerable exports from Fuhchau. 
 Within a circuit of 20 miles in either direction 
 from this city, there is a large number of towns 
 and villages, all speaking one dialect, which, 
 including the city, may be the abode of 2,000,- 
 000. In a political and missionary aspect, 
 Fuhchau is among the most important of the 
 Five Ports, and in view of its commercial ad 
 vantages may yet become a place of much 
 trade. The opium trade is here vigorously 
 prosecuted, and its destructive and demoraliz- 
 ing influence is widely felt. 
 
 Ningpo is the only important city on the 
 coast, northward from Fuhchau. It is situated 
 in 290 55' N. lat., and 121° 22' E. long., 
 near the head of navigable water, about 12 
 miles from the sea. Like Fuhchau, its native 
 commerce is large, but its foreign trade has 
 hitherto been small, excepting the opium trade, 
 which is there also vigorously prosecuted by 
 two or three receiving ships, stationed a little 
 off the mouth of the river leading to the city. 
 Its walls are about five miles in circuit, and 
 the city and suburbs are thought to contain a 
 population of near 300,000. It is one of the 
 neatest and best built cities on the coast, con- 
 taining some streets respectable for width, and 
 many large and well furnished shops. Many 
 of its dwellings are of two stories. It stands 
 in the midst of a large and fertile plain, densely 
 peopled, and skirted by mountains on one side, 
 about 18 miles distant. During the late war 
 it was captured by the English troops, and 
 held by them till the termination of hostilities. 
 At Chinghai, below Ningpo, near the river's 
 mouth, there was a bloody engagement, and 
 great carnage among the Chinese forces. 
 
 Shanghai, in lat. 31© 10' N., and long. 121° 
 30' E., is now the rival of Canton, in the foreign 
 trade, and bids fair to become the largest 
 foreign emporium in China. It is the princi- 
 pal seaport of Kiangs«, and lies on the north 
 shore of the Wusung, about 14 miles from its 
 mouth, and near its junction with the Hwang- 
 
CHINA. 
 
 251 
 
 I pee. By means of this river, it communicate? 
 
 ' with Suchau, Sung-kiang, and other citieagon 
 the Grand Canal ; while by the Yangtszkiang, 
 it receives produce from the south-western pro- 
 vinces of the empire. It hence enjoys the 
 greatest advantages for an extensive commerce. 
 The city lying within the walls is three miles 
 in circuit, and the entire city is estimated to 
 contain a population of 225,000. It has, for 
 some time, been in the hands of the insurgents. 
 After an unsuccessful attack, the imperial 
 troops burnt the eastern quarter of the city, 
 which is now a desolation. The section occu- 
 pied by the foreign merchants, in its streets 
 and tasteful buildings, much resembles a west- 
 ern city, presenting a strong contrast to the 
 neighboring dwellings of the poor Chinese. 
 This city also stands on a large and fertile 
 plain, and the whole surrounding country is 
 occasionally overflowed, causing great ^ mor- 
 tality, by the generation of noxious miasma. 
 Such was the case in 1849. The native trade 
 of Shanghai is said to be larger than at any 
 other city in the empire. Nevertheless, Shang- 
 hai is a poorly built and dirty place, with nar- 
 row and densely* crowded streets, almost block- 
 ed up with articles of traffic. A large fleet of 
 opium receiving-ships are stationed outside the 
 river Wusung. Among its heaviest exports 
 are tea and silks. This city is now occupied 
 by a larger number of Protestant missionaries 
 than any other in the empire, and three or four 
 tasteful and commodious Christian churches 
 have been built within the walls, in which large 
 congregations have convened to hear the word 
 of God. A large Catholic church stands just 
 outside the walls, on the banks of the Wusung. 
 Nanking. — Kiangningfoo, or Nanking, the 
 capital of the Kiangsu province, stands on the 
 southern bank of the Yangtszkians;, in about 
 32° N. lat. and 119° E. long. Next to Pe- 
 king, it is, perhaps, the most celebrated city in 
 China, though now shorn of its former glory, 
 and apparently greatly abridged in its limits, 
 and diminished in population. It was the ca- 
 pital of the empire only about 50 years, in- 
 cluding the earlier part of the Ming dynas- 
 ty, the court having been transferred to Peking 
 in 1411, by the emperor Yungloch. It was 
 here that the Chinese were compelled to sub- 
 mit to humiliating terms of peace with Eng- 
 land, in 1842. It has recently become cele- 
 brated, as the theatre of conflict between the 
 imperial troops and the insurgents, and by the 
 latter is still held. At the taking of this city 
 by the insurgents, the Manchu troops made 
 but a feeble resistance, and were indiscrimin- 
 ately put to the sword. The walls are still very 
 extensive, making its defence difficult. The 
 ancient palaces have disappeared, and few 
 monuments of ancient royalty now remain, ex- 
 cept the mementos of the princely dead. 
 
 Nanking is celebrated for its porcelain tower 
 completed in 1430, after the lapse of 19 years 
 from its commencement, and at a total cost of 
 
 ^3,313,978. It is celebrated also for its manu- 
 factures, including satin, crape, nankeen, paper, 
 ink, and artificial flowers of pith paper. It is 
 also renowned for its scholars, and was, till 
 taken by the insurgents, the residence of a gov- 
 ernor-general of these provinces, and the abode 
 of a host of officials and literary men, anxious 
 for promotion. Its population is estimated 
 at 400,000. Only a part of the area within the 
 walls is covered with dwellings. The surround- 
 ing country is beautified by hills, valleys, vil- 
 lages, and fruitful fields. 
 
 The Arts. — The productions of the Chinese 
 in the department of the fine arts, have little 
 comparative merit, though a few centuries ago, 
 China was in advance of Europe. Her land- 
 scape and other paintings, though excellent as 
 regards their coloring, generally fail in per- 
 spective, and their portraits want expression. 
 Some of their paintings on rice paper, how- 
 ever, are very pretty, and their delineations of 
 the persons and costume of their own country- 
 men, are many of them quite accurate. Their 
 music is harsh, nasal, sonorous, and wanting 
 both in harmony and melodyj though admired 
 by themselves. Their statuary, even the best 
 of it, cannot compare with the Grecian and 
 the Roman, and with that of western artists of 
 the present day. 
 
 Though, in the mechanic arts, the Chinese 
 excel in some things, yet in general, they are 
 far behind the Western world. Their imple- 
 ments are few and simple, though well suited to 
 their use ; but they are totally ignorant of the 
 multifarious and powerful machinery by which 
 Christian nations can so rapidly and so taste- 
 fully perform the most delicate work, and exe- 
 cute the most magnificent undertakings. They 
 however in some degree make up in numbers, 
 and the cheapness of labor, what they lack in 
 machinery and in mechanical skill. Works 
 have been executed in China, which in magni- 
 tude may compare with the pyramids of 
 Egypt, and far exceed the proudest monuments 
 of human labor in the Western world. 
 
 The art of printing from blocks, which is a 
 species of stereotyping, the manufacture of 
 paper, of gunpowder, of the most beautiful 
 porcelain, and the discovery and use of the 
 compass, all originated among the Chinese ; 
 besides their exquisite workmanship in cotton, 
 silk, wood, stone, ivory, and the precious me- 
 tals. Of what they know in the arts, they 
 have borrowed next to nothing from other 
 nations. In this respect we have learned more 
 from the Chinese than they from us. While we 
 were in comparative barbarism, they in me- 
 chanical knowledge and skill, were equal, if not 
 superior to their descendants of the present 
 day. Consequently for the improvements 
 which the Chinese have made, they, under 
 God, have been mainly indebted to their own 
 genius and researches. 
 
 Agriculture, Productions, Sfc. — Next to offi- 
 cial promotion and literary eminence, agricul- 
 
252 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 tare is regarded by the Chinese as the most 
 honorable, as well as the most nscful profes- 
 sion. It is encouraged by the example ol" their 
 emperor, who, at the capital, annually holds 
 the plouj^h in the presence of his high officers 
 and thousands of the people; and a like cere- 
 mony is performed in the chief cities of the 
 provinces, by his high officers, as his vice- 
 gerents. It is thus honored because it is the 
 main support of the state. Though their 
 agricultural implements are few, simple, and 
 rude, yet practically, agriculture has been 
 made very effective, as evinced by the unex- 
 ampled density of the population. Though for 
 thousands of years the same lands have been 
 under culture, producing annually two, and 
 sometimes three crops, yet so far from becom- 
 ing sterile, they appear to be increasing in fer- 
 tility ; not only are the alluvial plains on the 
 margins of the great rivers carefully culti- 
 vated, but lofty hills are in many cases ter- 
 raced from the base to summit. For fertiliz- 
 ing their lands, the Chinese depend much on 
 night soil, which they obtain from the cities 
 and villages. The manure is collected for future 
 use in pits, on the margins of their fields. The 
 rice is first thickly sown in a small patch, and 
 the shoots, when nearly a foot high, are trans- 
 planted in rows in the soft mud, and by and 
 by between these rows the shoots for a second 
 crop are planted, which rapidly matures after 
 the first is gathered. For their crops of rice, 
 especially, the Chinese, like the ancient Egyp- 
 tians, are greatly dependent upon diligent arti- 
 ficial irrigation. To overflow their fields, they 
 resort to a great variety of ingenious expe- 
 dients ; sometimes diverting the mountain 
 streams from their regular channels, watering 
 first the highest plots of ground, made level 
 and bounded by low embankments, and from 
 thence descending, as the proprietor wills, into 
 the lower grounds. In other cases, water is 
 raised from canals, rivers, and ponds, by 
 wheels propelled by water power, by buffaloes, 
 or by a species of treadmill, worked by two 
 persons. The water is forced upwards through 
 a box trough by a chain of paddles which re- 
 volves over two axles, one at each end of the 
 trough. It reminds one of the Israelites, who, 
 while in Egypt, are said to have watered their 
 lands with the foot. The Chinese gardener 
 is assiduous in irrigating his plants. Chinese 
 agriculture in general is much like gardening, 
 each family at the most, ordinarily owning and 
 cultivating but a few acres. Oxen and buffa- 
 loes are much employed in plowing, furrow- 
 ing, and rolling the ground. Women labor 
 in the fields in common with the men. The 
 land, theoretically, belongs to the emperor ; 
 yet it descends to the eldest son, so long as 
 the taxes are promptly paid. The younger 
 brothers, however, with their families, being 
 joint laborers, have a perpetual right to a 
 support from the proceeds of the land. Daugh- 
 ters cannot inherit. The Chinese beat out 
 
 their grain in the field on a board, one end of 
 which rests in the bottom of a tub that re- 
 ceives the grain. The straw is carried home 
 on the shouliiers of men. Carts are little used, 
 man, to a groat extent, performing the labor, 
 which here is devolved upon the beast. The 
 agricultural classes do not generally live upon 
 their lands, but in villages located upon the 
 more elevated grounds. Fences are very rare, 
 the lands being divided by ridges of earth, or 
 embankments, which serve as footpaths. In 
 the neighborhood of the cities, they are paved 
 with flat stonQs, lying transversely. Some of 
 these walks are many miles long. The rich 
 plains on the rivers are minutely traversed by 
 creeks and canals. Over these streams on the 
 main routes, are thrown strong stone bridges. 
 
 Productions. — In the northern and eastern 
 provinces, rice is the most important agricul- 
 tural product, grown mostly on the plains. 
 Wheat may rank next. Sweet potatoes are 
 produced on the hill sides, as also tobacco, 
 peas, beans, and a great variety of vegetables. 
 In the southern provinces, sugar is made from 
 the cane in considerable quantity. Cotton, 
 upon which the Chinese mainly depend for 
 clothing, is raised in large quantities on the 
 Great Plain. The fruits of China are much 
 the same as in other countries in the same 
 latitude; but they are not distinguished for 
 their excellence. The Chinese are fond of 
 flowers, which are extensively cultivated in the 
 neighborhood of the large cities. And not 
 content with these, artificial flowers of great 
 beauty are manufactured and worn by females 
 of all classes and ages. Money may procure 
 in China almost any article of food, clothing, 
 or furniture that may be desired, and at mo- 
 derate prices. Foreign merchandise may be 
 obtained for about the same prices as in this 
 country. Compared with the price of food, 
 the relative value of the dollar in China is 
 several times greater than in this country. 
 But the lot of the poor man in China, who 
 must labor for a mere pittance, is a difficult 
 and trying one. 
 
 Commerce. — The Chinese may be called a 
 commercial people. They have an extensive 
 internal trade, and make large exports in tea, 
 silks, camphor, cinnamon, fans, fire-crackers, 
 porcelain, and other products of the soil and 
 of the shop. A vast amount of native ship- 
 ping may be found in all the principal cities 
 situated on navigable waters. The merchants 
 are found in the most distant nations of her 
 wide colonial possessions, in the cold regions 
 of Manchuria and Mongolia, far west in the 
 broad territory of Hi, and in the remotest 
 bounds of Thibet. Her ships find their way 
 to Japan, and throughout the ports of the In- 
 dian Archipelago, Cochin-china Camboja, and 
 Siara, and some few have reached Burmah and 
 British India. Multitudes of Chinese adven- 
 turers are found in the Sandwich Islands, and 
 on the western shores of the American conti- 
 
CHINA. 
 
 nent. The commercial enterprise is the more 
 remarkable, in view of the little protection 
 afforded it by the imperial government, and 
 the vexatious duties imposed on internal 
 trade. Chinese merchantmen, trading at the 
 different ports between Shanghai and Canton, 
 have been obliged, at great cost, to hire foreign 
 armed vessels as convoys to protect them from 
 the pirates which swarm along the coast. 
 When once at sea, Chinese vessels have little 
 or no protection from government vessels, and 
 if they venture into foreign ports, they are by 
 ilicir own laws regarded as aliens. But such 
 ■ ; the commercial spirit of the Chinese, that 
 
 11 spite of these obstacles, their trade is of 
 great extent. Necessity makes them a trad- 
 ing as well as an agricultural people ; and 
 they are skilful managers of trade. Placed 
 side by side with western merchants in Singa- 
 pore, Batavia, Siam, and China, they do not 
 iali behind them in the acquisition of wealth, 
 ^ome of the richest men in Singapore and 
 
 kitavia are said to be Chinese. 
 Fishing. — Multitudes of the Chinese depend 
 upon fishing for a livelihood. Large fleets of 
 fishing craft swarm at the mouths of the prin- 
 cipal rivers, and in the neighborhood of the 
 large cities on the coast, sometimes numbering 
 from one to two hundred sail. Vessels often 
 fish two and two, for mutual aid in dragging 
 their nets. The rivers and lakes of China 
 also abound with fishing craft, and great 
 quantities of fish are raised in artificial 
 ponds. The number of large fish sometimes 
 taken from a small pond, is surprising. 
 Birds are trained to catch fish, and other 
 ingenious modes of fishing are adopted in 
 which the Chinese excel. Sharks, some- 
 times of large size, are common in the Chi- 
 nese fish markets. Fish, both fresh and 
 salted, forms an important part of the food 
 of the people, which they eat with rice and 
 vegetables. The fishermen are generally poor 
 and illiterate, and when reduced to straits, 
 sometimes turn pirates. 
 
 Literary Examinations, — Literary attain- 
 ment is greatly prized in China, as being a 
 passport to ofiice, and to distinction and influ- 
 ence in society. In the chief cities of the pro- 
 vinces, the lower literary degrees are conferred 
 on those whose essays are adjudged to possess 
 the highest merit. The themes are assigned 
 by imperial officers to all alike. The candi- 
 dates, while composing their essays, are shut up 
 in a large hall, and allowed nothing but im- 
 plements of writing ; and every avenue to the 
 premises is guarded to prevent communication 
 from without. The names of the competitors 
 are not known to the judges till after their 
 decision. Only a fixed nun;ber of degrees, 
 bearing a small proportion to the number of 
 aspirants, can be conferred at one time. The 
 fii'st degree is called the siu-tsai, answering im- 
 perfectly to our A. B. The second is kurjin, 
 indicating a higher grade of literary attain- 
 
 ment, and makes the possessor eligible to office. 
 The third degree, called tsin-sz, (entered 
 scholars or doctors,) is triennialiy conferred 
 at Peking, only those of the ku-jiu, who have 
 not been appointed to office, being eligible, as 
 candidates. The fourth and highest degree, 
 called hanlin, entitles to enrolment, as mem- 
 bers of the Imperial Academy, with fixed sa- 
 laries. The triennial examination for this de- 
 gree is held in the palace. In the conferring 
 of degrees, great impartiality is professed. 
 The meritorious scholar, however poor, has 
 legally the same chance for success, with the 
 sons of the rich and influential. Yet, it is gen- 
 erally thought that there is much of favorit- 
 ism and bribery. But very few among the 
 lens of thousands of annual competitors reach 
 even the lowest degree, a,nd of the successful 
 ones but few secure the second degree, though 
 many struggle for it from youth to hoary age. 
 The government makes no provision for the 
 support of primary schools, nor does it com- 
 pel the people to provide instruction for their 
 children. But the making of distinguished 
 scholarship a passport to office and honor, ex- 
 erts a mighty influence upon the youth of 
 China, in stimulating them to the pursuit of 
 knowledge. 
 
 Character and influence of the Chinese Clas- 
 sics. — With regard to physical, social, and 
 moral education, Chinese authors give many 
 excellent rules. But while they give direc- 
 tions as to the best methods of study, and the 
 means of preserving health, and enforce the 
 social duties of man to man, they make no 
 allusion to the higher and more solemn duties 
 of man to his Creator. The ceremonies to be 
 observed in the mutual intercourse of j^arents 
 and children, husbands and wives, brothers 
 and sisters, rulers and subjects, &c. are mi- 
 nutely described, and strenuously enforced ; and 
 their works on morals are not without allu- 
 sions to a future recompense of the evil and 
 the good. Honesty, truth, benevolence, and 
 even purity of heart, in their sense of the 
 term, are inculcated. But their views of inter- 
 nal purity and of virtuous conduct are radically 
 different from the Bible standard. Truth is in- 
 culcated, but falsehood is practiced ; even Con- 
 fucius, their idolized sage, setting the example. 
 But the consciences of the Chinese are in favor 
 of virtue. 
 
 The classical writings of the Chinese are 
 chiefly political in their bearing, designed to 
 instruct and admonish the ruler in the good gov- 
 ernment of himself and of the people. Their 
 influence over prince and people is very pow- 
 erful; and the writings and instructions of Con- 
 fucius, as reported and explained by his disci- 
 ples, have, doubtless, been the main support of 
 the Chinese government, since his day. (This 
 illustrious man was born 551 B. C.) He says 
 little on religious subjects ; but besides con- 
 niving at the popular superstitions of his day, 
 he gave his influence in support of ancestral 
 
954 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 worship, by inculcating the religions venera- 
 tion or both the dead and the living. Dr. 
 Bridgnmn says of him : " Through a long 
 life, of IhrtH'score and twelve years, Confucius 
 busied hiinaelf exclusively with the things of 
 this world. lie not only wrapped himself up 
 with the tissues and tatters of his pagan an- 
 cestors, but all his energies were exerted, from 
 first to last, in dissuading his fellow mortals 
 from all thought of a world to come. He 
 neither searched himself, nor would he allow 
 others to inquire, after the wisdom and attri- 
 butes, or even the existence, of heaven and 
 earth. Creator, Divinity, and divine things 
 had few if any charms for him. Time and 
 sense, and things present and visible, alone en- 
 grossed all his time and all his thoughts. 
 In the arduous labors of collecting and ar- 
 ranging the fragmentary records of the an- 
 cients, and in repeated endeavors to reform the 
 men who were liis contemporaries, almost his 
 whole life was occupied. He seems to have 
 felt that the gods of his nation were vain ; 
 and yet it docs not appear that he ever was 
 conscious of man's insufficiency. Thus he was 
 " without God in the world." On the part of 
 his disciples, he is a principal object of reli- 
 gious veneration. 
 
 The Chinese classics are decidedly superior 
 in moral purity, to the Grecian and Roman 
 authoi-s ; but they teach the perfectibility of 
 human nature. They maintain that, however 
 corrupt a man may become through the influ- 
 ence of evil example, he may, by his own un- 
 aided efforts, restore himself to primeval purity. 
 Such a doctrine is hostile to the humbling 
 truths of the Gospel, fostering the pride of the 
 human heart. Confucius seems to have had 
 no very distinct idea of an intelligent Great 
 First Cause, and his followers are regarded as 
 atheistical in their sentiments. So true it is, 
 that " the world by wisdom knew not God." 
 
 Chinese Schools. — The Chinese schools ori- 
 ginate in the private enterprise of the teach- 
 ers, whose wages depend on the number of 
 their pupils. They seldom number over 20. 
 Three or four dollars a month would be 
 thought good wages. Sometimes several 
 families unite in hiring a teacher by the year. 
 Children usually enter school between the ages 
 of six and seven. Each morning on entering 
 the school-room, the children are required to 
 bow, first to the tablet of Confucius, before 
 which incense is burning, and then to salute 
 the teacher. He then reads the lesson, and 
 the boys repeat after him the characters, until 
 they can do so independently. Then each 
 one reads them by himself, till he can repeat 
 them from memory. Chinese education is a 
 constant exercise of the memory, until the 
 classics can be rehearsed verbatim. These em- 
 brace the writings of Confucius and Mencius, 
 with copious commentaries, by distinguished 
 scholars. Each day's lesson is rehearsed by 
 the pupil, in the presence of his teacher, 
 
 and writing is a daily exercise. Durinff tho 
 first two or three years of study, they do little, 
 except to learn the forms and sounds of the 
 characters in their particular dialect, which in 
 most cases widely differ from the vulgar tongue. 
 Consequently the books which they have me- 
 morized are not understood. After three or 
 four years of hard study, they begin to be ini- 
 tiated into the meaning of the characters, the 
 teacher daily explaining a few of them marked 
 with red ink, and requiring his pupils to repeat 
 the explanations after him. The number thus 
 explained is gradually increased, until simple 
 sentences are explained, and ultimately the en- 
 tire text. The constant use of the pencil, first 
 in copying the characters, and afterwards in 
 composing, gives the Chinese student great 
 skill and celerity in writing. 
 
 The Chinese Language. — The Chinese char- 
 acters were originally symbols, not of sounds, 
 but of ideas ; but most of them now bear not 
 the remotest resemblance to the things signi- 
 fied. In the imperial dictionary there are 
 about 80,000 characters, composed of 214 
 radicals, or elements, according to which they 
 are arranged. Thousands of these characters 
 are now nearly obsolete, and not above 8,000 
 or 10,000 of the remainder are in common 
 use. But the thorough mastery of these — in 
 their forms, sounds, and significations — is a 
 herculean work, especially including the ready 
 and felicitous use of them in composition. 
 But such is the attachment of the Chinese to 
 their system of writing, that it would be no 
 easy matter to induce them to relinquish it, 
 and adopt an alphabetic system. The Chinese 
 character serves them as a universal medium 
 of communication, which no alphabetic system 
 could do, in view of the multiplicity and diver- 
 sity of dialects spoken within the eighteen 
 provinces. In Fokien alone are eleven princi- 
 pal dialects. The Chinese written character 
 has, without doubt, powerfully contributed to 
 the integrity of the empire, amid its frequent 
 change of dynasties. It has likewise availed 
 to maintain identity of manners, customs, sen- 
 timents and feelings. The empire, in its grand 
 characteristics, has thereby become stereo- 
 typed, and new modes of thought and action 
 are difficult to be introduced. In this lan- 
 guage, free, bold, eloquent and pathetic ad- 
 dress is next to impossible. As a medium of 
 thought, it has great advantages and marked 
 defects. 
 
 The Chinese system of education, though it 
 supplies valuable mental discipline, yet rather 
 cramps the mental energies, and impedes ex- 
 pansive, vigorous, independent thought. The 
 memory is sorely tasked, while the reasoning 
 powers are but partially exercised. It imparts 
 little knowledge. One may hold the first rank 
 among the Chinese literati, and yet be igno- 
 rant of the most common branches of educa- 
 tion in our common schools. Many respect- 
 able Chinese scholars are not acquainted with 
 
CHINA. 
 
 255 
 
 the geography even of their own country. 
 There are men who are familiar with the geo- 
 graphy, and civil and political condition of the 
 principal Christian nations, but this knowledge 
 they did not acquire at school. 
 
 Ability to Read. — There is a diversity of 
 opinion as to the proportion of intelligent 
 readers in China, according to the locality of 
 the observer. Among farmers, fishermen, boat- 
 men, small mechanics, and petty tradesmen, 
 there are comparatively few intelligent read- 
 ers, though some of them are familiar with the 
 few characters used in their particular voca- 
 tions. As the result of somewhat extensive 
 inquiry, the writer has come to the conclusion 
 that scarcely one in ten of the adult popula- 
 tion of China can understand books written in 
 the simplest and most popular style. Many 
 read the characters fluently, who do not under- 
 stand their meaning. Female education is not 
 appreciated in China, and few females can 
 read. 
 
 Industry and Frugality. — Compared with 
 other eastern nations, the Chinese are an in- 
 dustrious people, though among them are found 
 multitudes of idle vagabonds. The mass of 
 the people are frugal from necessity. By their 
 skill in cooking, they secure considerable vari- 
 ety of food with very limited means. Multi- 
 tudes feed themselves for less than four cents 
 a day. Salt fish, rice and vegetables, with a 
 few simple condiments, constitute a large part 
 of their food ; though a variety of other arti- 
 cles may be had in the cities by those who are 
 able to buy. 
 
 Marriage. — Children are often very early 
 betrothed by their parents, sometimes even in 
 infancy. This is done through a class of per- 
 sons who make a regular profession of match- 
 making. And, however unsuitable the match, 
 when once made, it is inviolable. In many 
 cases, they never see each other until the period 
 of their marriage. Instances have been known 
 of betrothed damsels committing suicide, to 
 escape union with the persons to whom they 
 had been betrothed. Before the consummation 
 of the marriage, a stipulated sum must be paid 
 to the parents of the bride, generally from 20 
 to 100 dollars, according to the circumstances 
 of the parties. Their marriages are pompous 
 and expensive. The bride, locked up in a red 
 quilt sedan, borne by four men, and sometimes 
 followed by an immense train gaily dressed, 
 with music, banners, and other parapharnalia, 
 is carried by night to the house of the bride- 
 groom, where the parties pledge each other in 
 a cup of wine, and the joint worship of the 
 ancestral tablets, sometimes joined with pro- 
 stration to the parents of the bridegroom. At 
 the marriage feast, spirituous liquors are freely 
 used. The sexes eat and drink separately, 
 when the young wife is subjected to many 
 severe jokes. 
 
 Condition of Females. — The Chinese females 
 are very rigidly confined to the house, and en- 
 
 joy limited opportunities of social intercourse, 
 even with their own sex. Brothers and sisters 
 are in a great degree isolated from each other. 
 When a visitor enters the house, the betrothed 
 girl must retire into a private apartment. 
 Almost from the cradle to the grave, the 
 Chinese females lead a life of painful degrada- 
 tion and toil : at home, imprisoned, and after 
 marriage subjected to the tyrannical rule of an 
 unfeeling husband and a cruel mother-in-law, 
 until she in turn is allowed to domineer over 
 the unhappy wives of her sons. How enviable 
 the lot of daughters born and educated in 
 Christian lands I 
 
 Funerals and Burying Grounds. — On the 
 decease of parents, their remains are enclosed 
 in air-tight coffins, and for 1 weeks retained in 
 the house, and every fourth day is devoted to 
 special funeral rites. Food is offered them, the 
 essence of which they are supposed to eat, and 
 prayers are offered by Budhists and Tauist 
 priests for the happiness of their spirits. In 
 these ceremonies there appears a striking 
 resemblance to the tenets and practices of the 
 Romish Church. Much importance is attach- 
 ed by the Chinese to the circumstances and 
 place of interment of their dead, as affecting 
 the peace and prosperity of survivors. Wo- 
 men are their principal mourners. To see 
 them kneeling and howling in lonely burial 
 grounds, as the writer has seen them, by the 
 graves of their husbands and children, is in- 
 deed heart-rending. Into their dark minds, 
 their religion sheds no ray of light to illumi- 
 nate the gloomy regions of the dead. 
 
 The barren hills and the mountain sides are 
 the chosen places of sepulture, but necessity, 
 in some parts, compels them to bury on the 
 plains. Vaults are not uncommon. Great 
 numbers of the dead are placed in plank cof- 
 fins and retained above ground for many years. 
 They are arranged sometimes in open sheds, 
 often to the number of 15 or 20, side by side, 
 being the deceased members of the same fami- 
 ly. Within the city walls, interments are 
 seldom allowed. The Budhist priests burn 
 the bodies of their dead and place the ashes in 
 common vaults. 
 
 Government. — The Chinese government is 
 supposed to have existed under different dy- 
 nasties, nearly 4000 years. It is a system ven- 
 erable for its antiquity, and wonderful for its 
 unity and official responsibility, from the low- 
 est to the highest of its officers ; the emperor, 
 however, being theoretically responsible to 
 none, unless to heaven, whose vicegerent he 
 professes to be. There are nine orders of civil 
 and military mandarins, distinguished by the 
 color and material of the buttons on their 
 caps, by the ornaments on their girdles, and 
 some other insignia on their robes. Civil and 
 military officers are on nearly an equal footing ; 
 and as the highest of the latter are commonly 
 held by Manchus, they operate as checks and 
 spies upon each other. Every officer through- 
 
256 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 out the provinces, is obliged to render an ac- 
 count or his administration to the emperor, 
 through the officer next in rank above him ; 
 80 that the relative merits of all may be 
 known and awarded. A general council, 
 composed of the most distinguished personages 
 in tne empire, assembles daily, at the palace 
 in Peking, in the imperial presence. This coun- 
 cil is of ivcent origin, and is thought to corres- 
 pond practically with the ministry of western 
 nations. It consists of both Chinese and 
 Manchus, and includes the chancellors of the 
 cabinet, the presidents and vice-presidents of 
 the Six Boards, and the chief officers of all 
 the other courts in the capital, all being se- 
 lected by the emperor. Its business is to 
 write the imperial edicts, and to aid the empe- 
 ror by its joint consultations. The imperial 
 cabinet is a still more select council, composed 
 of the four high chancellors, and two assistant 
 chancellors, consisting equally of Chinese and 
 Manchus. Subordinate to the cabinet is a 
 large body of officers, of six different grades, a 
 majority of whom are Manchus. The first on 
 the list of the chancellors, is regarded as the 
 premier. Their business is to deliberate on 
 the government of the empire, proclaim the 
 imperial will, and aid in all matters affi^cting 
 the peace and well-being of the empire ; all 
 concerns, from the highest official appoint- 
 ments, down to the lowest police court of 
 crime, being through this cabinet, brought 
 before the imperial court. Other minor duties 
 also devolve on this body. The opinions of 
 these ministers on the numerous documents 
 which come before them, are expressed in 
 writing, on slips of paper appended to the 
 same, which, early on the following morning 
 are submitted to the emperor, being read by 
 the prime minister, usually a Manchu, and 
 the decision of the sovereign is immediately 
 written by one of the Chinese chancellors. 
 Business is thus rapidly expedited. Subor- 
 dinate to these two councils, are the Six 
 Boards, the Colonial Office, the Censorate, 
 Courts of Representation and Appeal, and the 
 Imperial Academy, making in all, thirteen de- 
 partments. 
 
 The Peking Gazette is compiled from the doc- 
 uments of the General Council, and is to the 
 people the main source of information touch- 
 ing the affairs of the empire. Copies of this 
 paper are transmitted to the high provincial 
 officers, and without change or comment are 
 allowed to be reprinted and widely circulated. 
 The Six Boards are the Board of Civil Office, 
 of Revenue, of Rites, of War, of Public Works, 
 and of J'unishments. At the head of each of 
 these Boards are two presidents and four vice- 
 presidents, in which the Chinese and Manchus 
 are equally represented ; and subordinate to 
 each of these is a large retinue of officers of 
 different grades. The Censorate is, in its influ- 
 ence, one of the most important of the Courts ; 
 and examples have not been wanting of great 
 
 fidelity in the reproof even of enij)prors them- 
 selves, by courageous ministers. Its powers 
 are extensive in connection with the adminis- 
 tration of the courts, the provincial officers, and 
 the criminal jurisprudence. Ordinarily, liow- 
 ever, no great reliance can be placed upon the 
 fidelity of these public censors. 
 
 The whole number holding civil offices in 
 the empire, is estimated at about 14,000 ; but 
 the dependents on the government are much 
 more numerous. In the empire are eight vice- 
 roys and 15 lieutenant-governors, each viceroy 
 having the government of two provinces, or 
 two high offices in one province. The lieuten- 
 ant-governors are sometimes subordinate to 
 the viceroys ; but, in other cases, they govern 
 independently. Every important position, both 
 in the civil and military departments, is pro- 
 vided with its appropriate officer, down to the 
 lowest rank. In theory, the Chinese govern- 
 ment would seem to be the most perfect gov- 
 ernment on earth ; but in practice, it is far 
 otherwise, owing chiefly to a want of integrity 
 in its officers. They look for gain, and are sel- 
 dom very scrupulous as to the means of secur- 
 ing it. The Edinburgh Review, speaking of 
 Sir George Stanton's translation of the Chinese 
 Code of Law, sayS, " When we turn from the 
 ravings of the Zendavesta or the Purauas, to 
 the tone of sense and business in this Chinese 
 collection, it is like passing from darkness to 
 light, and from the drivelings of dotage to the 
 exercise of an improved understanding ; and 
 redundant and minute as these laws are, in 
 many particulars, we scarcely know a Euro- 
 pean code, that is at once so copious and so 
 consistent, or so free from intricacy, bigotry, 
 and fiction." But, whatever may be the excel- 
 lency of the Chinese laws, the government is 
 oppressive and corrupt in its practice, often 
 illegal in its exactions, and, frequently, for a 
 bribe, screening the guilty and oppressing the 
 innocent. Woe to him who, whether innocent , 
 or guilty, falls into the hands of the Chinese j 
 officials, for he is not likely to escape without'", 
 being fleeced, if nothing worse. It is probable ■ 
 that as many perish in the wretched prisons^ 
 of China, from want and cruel treatment, aa j 
 by the hands of the executioner. \ 
 
 The nominal salaries of Chinese officials are"^ 
 thought to form but a small part of thoir 
 actual receipts, a vast amount being the fruit' 
 of bribery and illegal exaction. Their retain-j 
 ers also are greedy dogs, which can hardly be'^ 
 satisfied. Pity lias little place in their hearts, 
 and the prisoner, whether innocent or guilty, 
 is severely taxed for his scanty privileges;: 
 Chinese legislation is defective, neither defining j 
 nor acknowledging the rights of the subject. A i 
 watchful and rapacious police swarm in every j 
 city and hamlet, as spies on the people, and no i 
 one know\s when he is safe and in whom h? J 
 may confide : and he prefers suffering heavy j 
 exactions to resistance or complaint, lest he \ 
 should expose himself to ten-fold worse evils: I 
 
CHINA. 
 
 257 
 
 But wlien large bodies of the people are 
 jointly subjected to heavy exactions^ they do 
 sometimes resist, and inflict sore retribution 
 on their oppressors. Th^ere is nothing like 
 popular representation in the government, and 
 appeals from iniquitous judicial decisions are, 
 in most cases, impossible. The judges report 
 to their superiors as suits their own conveni- 
 ence. The peaceable disposition of the Chi- 
 nese is mainly the result of slavish fear, gene- 
 rated by constant surveillance and the absence 
 of mutual confidence and legal responsibility. 
 Every neighborhood has its local overseers, 
 who are responsible for the good conduct of 
 their charge, and no member of a family or 
 clan can oJBend the government without in- 
 volving his relatives in suffering. This system 
 of fear and espionage extends from the hum- 
 blest of the people, through all ranks upwards, 
 to the highest minister of the realm. In the 
 Chinese civil polity, there is much resemblance 
 to the regulations of the camp. The fact, 
 however, that this system of government has 
 continued for thousands of years, securing to 
 so many millions such an amount of peace and 
 prosperity, speaks much in its favor. Both 
 the Monguls and Manchus, though originally 
 barbarians, were obliged to conform to the 
 maxims, usages and laws of the ancient Chi- 
 nese sovereigns, as detailed by Confucius and 
 his disciples. In theory, the Chinese govern- 
 ment is patriarchal, the emperor being re^ 
 garded as the father of his people ; and as, in 
 China, the father has, under certain regula- 
 tions, the power of life and death over his 
 children, so the emperor, according to his 
 pleasure, though not irrespective of law, in- 
 flicts upon his erring children his fatherly cor- 
 rections, even to death itself, through his con- 
 stituted official agents. As deceased parents 
 and ancestors are the objects of religious ven- 
 eration, so the emperors are worshiped both 
 before and after their decease. This worship 
 is required of the high officers when they con- 
 vene in the palace. The emperor is theoreti- 
 cally Heaven's vicegerent, and the ceremonies 
 and objects of worship of the state religion 
 are not allowed to the people. He only and 
 the high officers to whom he delegates the 
 right, must sacrifice to high Heaven. For 
 others to do it would be rebellion. No one 
 can be an official In China, without being an 
 idolator, the officers being required on certain 
 occasions to honor the local deities. In the 
 ceremonies of the state religion, the emperor 
 is the chief-priest. Like the Pope of Rome, 
 he sits in the temple of God, showing himself, 
 that he is Cod. The grand objects of imperial 
 worship are heaven, earth, the temple of imperial 
 ancestors, and the gods of the land and of grain. 
 Stmuling Army. — The army of the present 
 dynasty is numerically large, being estimated 
 at 1,200,000 ; but, in the late war with Eng- 
 land, as well as in the conflict with the insur- 
 gents, it has proved inefficient. The Tartar 
 17 
 
 soldiers are the most reliable part of the army, 
 but they have become enervated by idleness 
 and vice. But the greater part of the army 
 consists of a sort of militia, who are main- 
 tained in part by a small stipend from the 
 government, and in part by their own labors. 
 Several times a year they meet to be drilled, 
 presenting, on such occasions, a truly grotesque 
 appearance. Chinese forts are manned with 
 rudely-constructed ordiiance, wanting in some 
 cases even a clumsy gun-carriage. Their port 
 holes are of immoderate size. Their navy, 
 though numerous, is furnished with inexpe- 
 rienced officers and seamen, and is despised 
 even by its own people. The admirals know 
 little of the sea, and when called to meet the 
 enemy, are said sometimes to depute their sub- 
 alterns to the command. They cannot even 
 cope with the pirates that infest the coast, 
 having, at times, been obliged to buy their 
 friendship with silver. 
 
 Revenue and Disbursements. — The annual 
 revenue of China has been variously estimated 
 at from $120,000,000 to $200,000,000. Aside 
 from the maintenance of the palace, the sup- 
 port of the Manchu nobility, who are related 
 to the throne, and the presents sent to the 
 Mongul and Mohammedan tribes in the coIq- 
 nies, the main expenditures are for the support 
 of the army and navy, and for the mainten- 
 ance of the civil officers. The nominal sala- 
 ries of the latter are small, compared with 
 that of western civilians. The salary of a 
 viceroy or governor-general, who rules over 
 more than 50,000,000, is only about $27,000 ; 
 that of a lieutenant-governor, $21,333 ; that 
 of a treasurer, $12,000 ; and from thence the 
 salaries gradually decrease, according to rank, 
 to about $170. As regards legal taxation, 
 both direct and indirect, for the support of 
 government, China is favored above every 
 principal country in Europe. And, as there is 
 no powerfCil aristocracy in China, the money 
 that is squeezed out of the people by the offi- 
 cers, returns back among the masses., 
 
 Physical, Social, and Morat, Condition. — The 
 mass of the Chinese, according to our stand- 
 ard of competency, are miserably poor ; and 
 yet such is their great simplicity as to style of 
 living, and skill in making the most of their 
 little, that their actual suffering from want is 
 not great. Their system of clanship, though 
 the source of many and great evils, yet inclines 
 them to afford relief to their kindred. Living 
 as they do, in large families, often including 
 parents, children, grand-children, and even 
 great-grand-children, numbering, in some 
 cases, sixty or more individuals, there is 
 something like equality of condition. But 
 in seasons of general scarcity the suffer- 
 ing must be very great and general ; and 
 notwithstanding all that the government, out 
 of its storehouses, can impart to the poor, mul- 
 titudes die of famine, and others are driven to 
 robbery and piracy. Granaries are provided 
 
25S 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 by the government in tbc walloil towns, lo be 
 opened in 8cason8 of scarcity, from which food 
 is either soki at u reduced price, or gratui- 
 tously distributed, according to the circum- 
 stances of the applicant. It is a politic and be- 
 nevolent provision, reminding us of the plan of 
 Joseph, in anticipation of the Egyptian famine. 
 According to our ideas of comfort, the 
 dwellings of the mass of the Chinese are mise- 
 rable in the extreme. They are low, damp, 
 dark, and ill-ventilated, and abounding in 
 filth. Their furniture is meagre, often con- 
 sisting of only a few rude stools and a board 
 platform for a bedstead, on which is spread a 
 mat, with sometimes a block of wood for a 
 pillow. The houses of the wealthy are com- 
 paratively spacious, and well-furnished with 
 chairs, bedsteads, light-stands, tables, cup- 
 boards, and other articles, both tasteful and 
 convenient ; but even their dwellings are want- 
 ing in cleanliness and comfort,jQi they are much 
 more comfortable than we should be in the same 
 circumstances. Knowing nothing better, they 
 think their condition an enviable one, and 
 would not willingly exchange circumstances 
 ■with any people. Among the lower orders 
 the separation of the sexes is not rigidly 
 maintained ; and the cruel practice of bind- 
 ing the feet of female children does not exist 
 to much extent among the farming classes, nor 
 among boat-women — servants are often free 
 from it. Fashion, however, still binds and 
 shrivels the feet of the daughters of civilians, 
 merchants, mechanics, and humble artizans ; 
 and when poverty is conjoined with disability 
 for active labor, the wretched female becomes 
 the subject of extreme sufifering and degrada- 
 tion. Small feet are necessary to complete a 
 Chinaman's idea of beauty ; and consequently 
 daughters can seldom be respectably married 
 without being thus tortured and fettered. The 
 daughters of the Manchu are never subjected to 
 this practice. 
 
 The present Chinese custom of shaving the 
 head, and allowing the hair on the crown to 
 grow to an indefinite length, was forced upon 
 them by the present dynasty, as a badge of sub- 
 jection. Wliat was then tneir shame is now 
 their pride. The Chinese possess much corpo- 
 real vigor, can endure much toil, and a good 
 proportion of them attain to old age. Though 
 among the more respectable classes there is an 
 excessive and favorite attention to ceremony, 
 yet in general their minds and manners are 
 gross, and their conversation indecent. Their 
 Bacchanalian revels are frequent and noisy, 
 accompanied with ingenious devices to excite 
 them to the excessive use of intoxicating 
 drinks. The refining influence of intelligent 
 and virtuous female society is greatly needed. 
 Moral Condition. — Most of those vices which 
 are known to exist among other heathen na- 
 tions, prevail among the Chinese. The lan- 
 guage of the Apostle in the 1st of Eomans, 
 is a faithful description of their character as a 
 
 people. The Chinese are a nation of liars, 
 and they are adepts in the arts of deception. 
 They are also given to gambling, from the 
 highest to the lowest. A great amount of 
 spirituous liquor is drank in connection with 
 their food, and on other occasions, but beastly 
 intoxication is not common in open day. 
 
 Notwithstanding the rigid seclusion of the 
 daughters of the Chinese, there are probably 
 few countries in which prostitution is more 
 common and public, or attended with less dis- 
 grace ; to say nothing of the system of legaliz- 
 ed concubinage. 
 
 • 2'he Opium Trade and Opium Smoking. — 
 Of all the vices prevailing among the Chinese, 
 the smoking of opium is the most destructive 
 t(j property, health, and life. It appears to 
 have been first brought to China by the Por- 
 tuguese, as early as 1767. That year 1,000 
 chests were sold at Macao. The English East 
 India Company commenced the importation 
 of opium in 1673. In 1780, two receiving 
 ships were stationed a little south of Macao, 
 at Lark's Bay. As early as the year 1800, an 
 Imperial edict was issued against its sale and 
 use in China, in consequence of the disastrous 
 effects of its use. In 1809, the Hong merchants 
 were, by the government, compelled to give 
 bonds that opium should be discharged from 
 no vessel at Whampoa. But though steadily 
 opposed by the supreme government of China, 
 its subordinate agents, at the principal points 
 on the coast, have never been proof against 
 the seductive power of gold, and their own 
 love of this poisonous drug ; and with slight 
 interruptions, this iniquitous and contraband 
 trade has, till the present time, continued 
 steadily to increase. The opium is chiefly of 
 two kinds, Benares and Patna, produced with 
 compulsory labor, by the East India Com- 
 pany, and sold at Calcutta ; and the Malwa 
 produced in a province in the western part of 
 India, under the government of native princes, 
 and sold at Bombay. It pays the Company 
 a transit .duty of 400 rupees per chest, the 
 number of chests in 1846 being 25,000, and 
 furnishing the government a n^t income of 
 £1,000,000. In the same year, the income from 
 the opium sold at Calcutta was £2,000,000, 
 making a gross amount of income from this 
 article of £3,000,000. In 1847, at Calcutta 
 alone, the revenue from Opium, amounting to 
 upwards of 31,000 chests, was £3,000,000. 
 Most of the opium sold at these two ports, is 
 exported to China, at an estimated profit of 
 about 15 per cent, to the merchant. About 
 50 armed vessels are constantly employed in 
 this trade, including the large number of re- 
 ceiving ships, stationed at Lintin, below Can- 
 ton, and at the mouths of most of the princi- 
 pal rivers, and in the vicinity of the most im- 
 portant cities along the coast to Shanghai, in- 
 cluding Nomoa, Amoy, Chin-Chin, Fuhchau 
 and Ningpo. These receiving ships are all 
 abundantly supplied with opium, and attended 
 
CHINA. 
 
 259 
 
 witli clippers constantly passing up and down 
 the coast. Including the irregular craft, the 
 number of foreign vessels employed in the 
 3pium trade must be much larger than has 
 aeen mentioned. It is stated by Dr. Na-than 
 A.llen, in his valuable Essay on the Opium 
 rrade, that Mr. Jardine, of the firm of Jar- 
 line, Matheson & Co., being about to return 
 ;o England a few years since, divided with his 
 jartuers £3,000,000, almost $15,000,000 of 
 jrofit in trade, the greater portion of which 
 lad been accumulated in the space of ten years. 
 Thus both the production and sale of opium 
 ire powerfully stimulated by the love of gain, 
 egardless of the ruinous consequences of this 
 xade. Notwithstanding the cupidity of all 
 ■anks of the imperial ofificers in the provinces, 
 nanifested in their readiness to receive bribes 
 allow the introduction and use of this drug, 
 he government at Peking has been uni- 
 brmly opposed to the trade. In 1839, just 
 )efore the commencement of hostilities be- 
 ween England and China, upwards of 20,000 
 ;hests, valued at $12,000,000, having been de- 
 ivered up to Commissioner Lin, at Canton, 
 hrough his compulsory measures, were de- 
 itroyed by command of the emperor. This 
 •emarkable act, committed as it was in the 
 ace of a threatened invasion, which soon actu- 
 illy followed, is sufficient evidence of the sin- 
 sere opposition of the Chinese government to 
 he opium trade. It has been computed that 
 lot less than 4,000,000 of the Chinese are ha- 
 )itual opium smokers, and that the average 
 ength of the lives of these wretched men, 
 iter becoming addicted to this habit, is not 
 ibove ten years. On this calculation, 400,000 
 >f the Chinese, in consequence of the use of 
 pium, are annually . hurried into the grave. 
 )n whose souls must the blood of these 
 lauglitered multitudes rest? In the light 
 if God's word, what a weight of criminal 
 esponsibility must press upon that company 
 rhose coffers are annually filled with the price 
 >f so much blood ? And no less guilty are 
 hose who aid and abet it for the sake of gain. 
 ?he emperor of China, when urged to increase 
 is revenue, by legalizing the opium trade, re- 
 died : " It is true, I cannot prevent the intro- 
 iuction of the flowing poison ; gain-seeking 
 ind corrupt men will, for profit and sensuality, 
 lefeat my wishes ; but nothing will induce me 
 
 derive a revenue from the vice and misery 
 >f ray people." A noble sentiment, worthy of 
 
 1 Christian mind ! What a contrast to the 
 3ractice of the East India Company, and its 
 nultitudes of nominally Christian coadjutors, 
 a the sale of opium ! Very naturally may 
 he Chinese regard with abhorrence that reli- 
 gion which in their view tolerates, if not en- 
 :;ourages, such iniquity. The use of it rapidly 
 nervates, emaciates, and destroys the body, 
 'ften speedily reducing the infatuated smoker 
 the appearance of a walking skeleton, and 
 ts Lffects upon the immortal mind are even 
 
 more to be deplored, wasting its vigor and in- 
 capacitating it for powerful and continuous 
 effort. The bodily and mental sufferings of 
 the confirmed smoker are too great to be 
 described. His state may be called one of liv- 
 ing death. While he has the means of pro- 
 curing wholesome food, the injurious efiects 
 of his indulgence are less powerful ; but when, 
 as a consequence of his excessive vice, he can 
 no longer procure healthful aliment, and opium 
 likewise fails him, then diarrhea comes, and 
 often amid his own filth, and by the way side, 
 the wretched man dies like a brute. On this 
 subject the writer can speak from personal ob- 
 servation. The use of this drug turns out a 
 numerous, miserable, and abandoned class of 
 men, who subsist, while they have strength to 
 move, by begging in the streets, a mere pit- 
 tance, from shop to shop, and finally, in many 
 cases, perish by the way side, without an eye 
 to pity them or a hand to help. Numbers by 
 the use of opium suddenly terminate their 
 wretched lives, and rush, uncalled, into a mise- 
 rable eternity. Multitudes of unhappy fe- 
 males in the same way wilfully destroy them- 
 selves, often as a consequence of the vices of 
 their husbands. The misery which this drug 
 introduces into families and communities, and 
 the vice and crime of which it is the occasion, 
 cannot be told. In the opinion of the Chinese 
 there is little or no hope of the reformation of 
 the opium smoker ; and he himself, while he 
 groans beneath his chains, and hates, with pe- 
 culiar malignity, the instruments of his ruin, 
 despairingly surrenders himself to his fate, 
 having neither the physical nor the moral re- 
 solution to abandon the drug. Such is the 
 almost hopeless condition of millions of the 
 Chinese. The evil is constantly and rapidly 
 increasing, and threatens, like a resistless 
 flood, to overwhelm the empire. At a mode- 
 rate calculation the first cost of opium to the 
 Chinese is about $40,000,000 annually, most 
 of which is paid in silver, though of late Chi- 
 nese products have, to some extent, been taken 
 in exchange. Opium and the implements 
 used in smoking it are publicly sold, and the 
 dens in which its victims congregate now need 
 little concealment. The higher classes are 
 much addicted to this vice. From careful and 
 repeated inquiries of intelligent individuals, 
 the writer is of the opinion that opium is used 
 by more than one-half of the adult male popu- 
 lation of Fuhchau. Probably the proportion 
 is about the same at the other ports. But the 
 first cost of opium to the Chinese is only a 
 part of its actual expense. The officers must 
 be bribed to wink at its sale ; the native mer- 
 chants must fill their coffers ; and the prepar- 
 ers and retailers of the drug must all live by 
 their iniquitous business. But the pecuniary 
 loss, though enormous, weighs but a feather in 
 comparison with the physical, social, and moral 
 evils which result from the traffic. The exam- 
 ple of Christian nations in obstinately perse- 
 
260 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 veriug in this ti-ude, in opposition to national 
 law, and in the face of these terrible evils, 
 tcnils most ])Owcrfully to prtjudice the Chi- 
 nese ajrain.^l the glorious Gospel. The writer 
 has hiul ample evidence of this fact in his ex- 
 perience as a missionary. Next to the deep 
 corruption of the heart, the sale by foreigners 
 and use by the Chinese of thiiB drug, consti- 
 tute the most formidable obstacle to the suc- 
 cess of the Gospel in China. And yet there 
 seems little hope of their emancipation from 
 this evil, except through the power of Divine 
 truth, accompanied by the Holy Spirit, recti- 
 fying public sentiment and purifying the 
 heart. But if professedly Christian nations 
 would arrest the sale, there would be much 
 hope for the salvation of China. Such a 
 course would, in the end, be an incalculable 
 advantage to lawful commerce. Trade with 
 China nnist ultimately be extensive and pro- 
 fitable, in proportion to the wealth and pros- 
 perity of the people, to which the use of opium 
 IS terribly rumous. Commerce, humanity, ro- 
 ligion, the good of the undying soul, all re- 
 quire its immediate suppression. 
 
 Female Infanticide in China. — Another of 
 the crimes more or less prevailing among 
 the Chinese is the unnatural one of female in- 
 fanticide. This crime is known to a great ex- 
 tent to prevail in sections of the Fokien and 
 Kwangtung provinces. The degree and extent 
 of its prevalence in other parts of the empire is 
 unknown ; but considering the small degree of 
 criminality which public opinion, in China, at- 
 taches to this practice, it may be expected to 
 prevail elsewhere, under similar external circum- 
 stances. Eev. David Abeel made particular in- 
 quiries on this subject in the vicinity of Amoy. 
 In 40 towns and villages in the department of 
 Tsienchau, he learned that on an average, about 
 40 per cent, of the girls born there, were mur- 
 dered by their parents in infancy, and about 
 one-fourth of those born in 17 towns in the de- 
 partment of Chiangchau. It is known to pre- 
 vail in Fuhchau and vicinity. A country woman 
 a few miles below the city, of her own accord, 
 informed the writer and other friends that she 
 had destroyed four daughters, as if the thing 
 were common and innocent. Intelligent Chi- 
 nese residing in Fuhchau, represent the prac- 
 tice as being very common in the neighboring 
 villages. The unfeeling manner in which the 
 matter is spoken of, gives us reason to suppose 
 that the custom is general. It is probably 
 more common among the poor than among 
 the rich. Their sons they do not destroy, be- 
 cauHC they regard them as profitable to their 
 parents. Poverty, the difficulty of rearing 
 them, and the expenses of their marriage, are 
 the more common reasons assigned for the 
 destruction of their female infants. Mothers 
 seem no less ready to strangle or drown their 
 infant daughters, than fathers, perhaps antici- 
 pating their sufferings and future degradation 
 jif spared to live. 
 
 Religious Sects. — The principal religious sects 
 in China are the Budhists, the Tauists, and the 
 Confucianists. The latter, however, hardly 
 merits the name of a religious a.ssori!ition. 
 Budhism does not exist in China in its purest 
 form, fts in Siam and Burmah ; but among the 
 people it is combined with the early supersti- 
 tions of the Chinese. It was introduced in the 
 year of our Lord 60, through an imperial em- 
 bassy sent westward in search of a sage, who 
 had appeared or was expected soon to appear. 
 In Hindostan they met with the Budiiists, 
 and returned to the emperor with several 
 priests, and with some of tne books and relics 
 of that sect, and from that time Budhism spread 
 rapidly in China, through the means of its 
 books and the conformity of its priests to the 
 popular idolatry. The opinions of this scci arc 
 widely prevalent in China, and their teni])le3 
 and monasteries abound ; although few oi" llie 
 people are its professed devotees. Their priests 
 are employed at funerals, and in seasons of 
 public calamity, and have much influence over 
 the popular mind. They derive their main- 
 tenance partly from presents and partly from 
 the cultivation of the lands appropriated to 
 their monasteries, many of whicn are liberallj 
 endowed. 
 
 Tauists. — The sect of the Tauists, or Ration 
 alists of China, claim as their founder, Lautsz 
 or Laukiun, born b. c. 604, in the province 
 of Ilupeh, and is believed by his followers tc 
 have been carried in the womb 80 years, ant 
 to have been born with white hair and whit( 
 eye-brows. He is represented to have been o 
 humble parentage, a diligent and succcssfu 
 student in historical and sacred lore and t( 
 have traveled through Central Asia. His M^ 
 moir on Eeason and Yirtue is his only phil^ 
 sophical work. In his doctrines, he is said t< 
 resemble Zeno, recommending retirement an» 
 meditation as the principal means for the pur; 
 fication of the soul, and restoring it to th 
 bosom of the supreme Eeason, from which al 
 material, visible forms are said, by him, to b 
 emanations. In one section he says, " All th 
 visible parts of the universe, all beings con 
 posing it, the heavens and all the stellar syi 
 tems, all have been formed of the first elemei 
 tary matter ; before the birth of heaven an 
 earth, there existed only an immense silenc 
 in illimitable space, an immeasureable void i 
 endless silence. Reason alone circulated i 
 this infinite void and silence." He regards a 
 good beings as emanating from, and returnin 
 again into the bosom of Eeason, there to dwe 
 forever : but the bad are to be subjected 1 
 successive births, with their accompanying mi' 
 cries. Mixed with these ideas, there is muo 
 confused speculation. In his language there 
 somewhat to remind us of the actual creatio 
 of the world by the eternal Word, but neithi 
 he nor any of the pagan philosophers by theis 
 reasonings attained to clear ideas of the Gref! 
 First Cause. He lived an ascetic life, and ei' 
 
CHINA. 
 
 261 
 
 .Ltl contemplation united with good deeds. 
 ill his writings are many excellent sayings. 
 Laukiun's followers believe him to have been 
 an impersonation of Tau or Eeason, the last 
 of three incarnations having been a. p. 623. 
 The Tauist sect is made up of priests, who with 
 their families, live in the temples, and are sup- 
 ported by the cultivation of the grounds be- 
 longing to these establishments, the sale of 
 charms and nostrums, and by presents received 
 from the people on funeral and other occasions. 
 They shave the sides of their heads, and coil 
 the remainder of the hair on the crown, and 
 wear slate-colored robes. They study astrolo- 
 gy, profess to deal with spirits, pretend to have 
 found a liquor, the drinking of which will in- 
 sure immortality. Some of the emperors are 
 reported to have tried it to their cost. By 
 some of the emperors this sect has been much 
 honored. A splendid temple was erected to 
 Laukiun containing his statue, and in a. d. 674 
 literary examinations were ordered to be held 
 in his Memoir on Eeason. The Tauists are 
 now extensively regarded as cheats and jug- 
 glers. The ceremony of running through the 
 fire is still observed by them and by their de- 
 luded followers, both of whom are at times 
 severely burned. They worship a great num- 
 ber of idols, and are very superstitious. Pro- 
 bably Pantheism is the prolific mother of their 
 idols. 
 
 Confucianism. — The Confiicianists are the 
 literary men of China. They have no distinct 
 religious system, except such as is comprehend- 
 ed in the worship of Confucius, and the rever- 
 ence of his doctrines. Confucius said little on 
 religious subjects ; his instructions being polit- 
 ical in their bearing, attaching great impor- 
 tance to ceremonies in social and official inter- 
 course, and in conjunction with the worship 
 of the dead. There is much reason to doubt 
 whether Confucius had any distinct idea of an 
 almighty, spiritual Intelligence, distinct from 
 the material universe. An intelligent agency 
 is liowever allowed by him and his followers to 
 exist in the persons of the sages, who, from time 
 to time, have risen up to expound the will of 
 heaven and earth, the male and female powers 
 of nature ; and witll them they form a trinity. 
 They sometimes seem to be placed on an 
 equality with heaven itself. The most renown- 
 ed of these sages are Yau and Shun, two an- 
 cient emperors, and Confucius, the instructor 
 of 10,000 ages, to whom, accordiog to theChi- 
 nese Kepository, there are, in connection with 
 the examination halls, 1560 temples dedicated. 
 In these temples are offered tens of thousands 
 of pigs, rabbits, sheep, and deer, and 27,000 
 pieces of silk ; all of which are appropriated 
 by the worshipers. His followers are regarded 
 as materialists or atheists ; yet they conform 
 to the popular idolatry, and probably, in fact, 
 differ not much from the multitude, in their 
 religious sympathies. 
 
 In the Confucian system, a holy life is not" 
 
 enforced by future sanctions, and the duty of 
 man to his Maker is entirely unnoticed. Dr. 
 Bridgman expresses the opinion decidedly that 
 the Chinese pay divine honors to Confucius. 
 He says : " In their moral codes and in their 
 religious systems, the Chinese place Confucius 
 in the highest rank, and give to him the high- 
 est honors. There is in each one, of all the 
 fifteen hundred and odd districts of the Empire, 
 a temple dedicated to him. There twice an- 
 nually, once in spring, and once in autumn, 
 the local magistrates, as priests, must enter 
 and offer to him, to the sage Confucius, prayers 
 and sacrifices. On one of those occasions, in 
 the city of Shanghai, I was, with other mission- 
 aries, an eye-witness of these solemnities. A 
 bullock, pigs and goats, and many other offer- 
 ings were all duly prepared and laid before the 
 altar ; and then the magistrates, in their robes 
 of state, officiated as priests, kneeling, prostrat- 
 ing themselves, and offering prayers. Thus, in 
 their official stations, clothed with authority, 
 they go forth in public and lead on these devo- 
 tions ; offering to a mortal man that worship 
 which is due only to Jehovah. The Emperor, 
 his ministers of highest rank, and all his rep- 
 resentatives, " the shepherds of the whole flock 
 in all the Empire," engage in these acts of 
 devotion, doing honor to Confucius, not as a 
 mere man, but as a god. As they honor Heav- 
 en and Earth, so they honor this man ! " 
 
 Tlie ancient popular idolatry of China. — Be- 
 fore Confucius's day, there prevailed a popular 
 idolatry in which ancestral worship was prom- 
 inent. To no other form of idolatry are the 
 Chinese more attached at the present day, and 
 in no other worship are they more serious. 
 How much of the nature of divinity they atr 
 tach to the deified spirits of their progenitors, 
 it is difficult to decide ; but on the pantheistic 
 principle, so prevalent in the eastern world, 
 they may legitimately regard the authors of 
 their existence as constituting a part of the 
 divine essence, and worship them as such. This 
 principle lays an indefinitely broad foundation 
 for polytheism. Everything mysterious and 
 spiritual seems in their view to partake of the 
 divine, and hence, shin, not a very uncommon 
 term for spirit, is the generic name of all their 
 objects of religious worship, and as corres- 
 ponding to thcos and theoi, the Greek terms for 
 God and gods, in English, has been preferred 
 by the majority of Protestant missionaries in 
 China, as the word to be used in the transla- 
 tion of the Scriptures, for both the true God 
 and for false gods. In the worship of ances- 
 tors, all the pagan sects unite, and it was 
 tolerated by the Jesuits in their Chinese con- 
 verts. 
 
 Besides the worship of ancestors, the Chi- 
 nese have innumerable other objects of reli- 
 gious reverence, as the god of wealth, the pat- 
 ron deities of the various professions, and the 
 gods and goddess^ of the sea, hills, rivers, and 
 other localities. From the common practice 
 
262 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 amonp the people of appealing to heavm in 
 their oaths, they would seem to ha^-e an idea, 
 though doubtless a confused one, of some supe- 
 rior power, more to be feared than their com- 
 mon ol)jects of worship ; but how much the 
 difl'rrent deities or powers of nature, on the 
 pantheistic principle, are in their minds asso- 
 ciated and blended, it is diflBcult to determine. 
 The God in whose hand their breath is, they 
 do not honor. Their motives to religious wor- 
 ship seem to be chiefly to avoid temporal calam- 
 ities, and procure temporal blessings ; and to 
 this end they offer their prayers and sacrifices to 
 their innumerable local deities. With regard 
 to the destiny of their souls, tliey seem to allow 
 themselves no great anxiety, except so far as 
 thoy imagine their future happiness to be de- 
 
 Sendent upon the worship to be rendered them 
 y their descendants after their decease. ITie 
 Chinese regard it as among the greatest of 
 calamities to die without any sons to perpetu- 
 ate their name and make offerings to their 
 spirits, at their graves. Their fears are to a 
 great extent imaginary, and their hopes are 
 shrouded in the gloom of a dark and doubtful 
 futurity. Like the ancient heathen, they are 
 led away by dumb idols, aod yield themselves 
 to the guidance of the prince of the power of 
 the air, the Spirit that worketh in the children 
 of disobedience. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 Nestorian Missions. — The Nestorians, at 
 an early period, appear to have established 
 Christian missions in China, though few or no 
 traces of their labors are now known to re- 
 main. Arnobius, in the third century, men- 
 tions the Ceres, as Christians, whom Mosheira 
 regards as Chinese. The Nestorian patriarchs 
 are said in the fifth century to have sent me- 
 tropolitans into China, thus indicating the 
 long existence of Christian churches in the 
 empire. Between a. d. 636 and 781, no less 
 than seventy Nestorian missionaries, whose 
 names are preserved, labored in that empire, 
 among whom Olopun, the earliest of the num- 
 ber, was especially distinguished. The record 
 discovered by the Jesuit missionaries, in 1625, 
 in Singanfoo, in Shensi, is the most celebrated 
 monument of the zeal of the Xestorians in 
 China. This record is engraven on a stone 
 tablet, and Mosheim regards it as genuine. It 
 purports to have been erected in a. d. 781, in 
 the second year of Kienchung, the ninth em- 
 peror of the Tang dynasty ; Kingtsing, a 
 priest from the church in Tatsing (India) 
 oeing the author of the preface to the procla- 
 mation issued by the emperor Taitsung, in 
 favor of Christianity. This proclamation is 
 dated in the 12th year of his reign, corres- 
 ponding to the year of our Lord 639. The 
 preface gives the history of the Nestorian 
 missions in China, for 145 years, from a. d. 
 636 to 781. It eulogizes the emperors who 
 reigned during this period, fpid recounts their 
 
 efforts in favor of Christianity, in the builil'in.r 
 of churches in numerous cities ; honoiin;^ 
 the ministers of religion, among whom Olo- 
 pun, who arrived in 696, was raised to the 
 rank of high-priest and national protector, j 
 Some of the emperors of this period, however, 
 seem not to have patronised Christianity, 
 One or more persecutions were raised by t& 
 Budhists and literati, and the churches were 
 allowed to go to decay. But in the mean time 
 among the priests there were able defenders of 
 the Gospel. Making all due allowance for the 
 inflated language of this document, it seemg 
 probable that there were at this time, Chrii- 
 tian churches in the chief cities of the empii^ 
 A translation of the Scriptures is said to hatp 
 been in the library of the palace. The statil^ 
 ments contained in this inscription respecting 
 India are glaringly incorrect. The Nestori n ns, 
 moreover, are represented as using images a, id 
 praying for the dead — whereas they abhor 
 image worship ; and Christ is spoken of as 
 having succored the confined spirits. It is 
 possible, however, that the word translated 
 images, may have some other signification. 
 But, however this may be, it is evident, from 
 other sources, that there were Nestorian 
 churches in China at this time. The patri 
 arch Salibazacha is reported to have sent a 
 metropolitan to China, in 714. Timol]i(ii>, 
 who appears to have been the Nestorian ]>:\\vi- 
 arch upwards of forty years, was zealously de- 
 voted to Christian missions. During his patri- 
 archate, Sabchaljune, a learned monk, from 
 the convent of Beth-oben, after having been 
 ordained bishop, and successfully preaching 
 the Gospel on the eastern shores of the Cas- 
 pian sea, penetrated China, and there exten- 
 sively published the word. On his return to 
 Syria he was murdered by barbarians. Others 
 soon followed him to the Chinese. Christians 
 were found in Southern China in the ninth 
 century, by two Arabian travelers, and many 
 Jews, Mohammedans, Persians, and Christians, 
 in A. D. 877, are said to have been massacred 
 in Canton by one Baichu, who had revolted 
 from the emperor. In a. d. 845, Wutsung or- 
 dered 3,000 priests from Ta^tsin, to retire to 
 private life. Marco Polo, a distinguished Ve- 
 netian, who visited China about the middle of 
 the thirteenth century, and there spent more 
 than twenty years, for a time holding a high 
 office in Chih-Kiang, under Hublai Khan, 
 often speaks of meeting with the Nestorian 
 Christians in Tartary and China. In the ele- 
 ventli century the missionary zeal of the Nes- 
 torians was stimulated by the remaTkable con- 
 version of a Mogul prince, called after his 
 baptism Prester John, whose subjects, 200,000 
 in number, became nominal Christians. His 
 domains are supposed to have been on the 
 northern borders of China Proper. His de- 
 scendants, for several generations, were re- 
 nowned for their military achievements, and 
 the third in succession as conqueror on the 
 
CHINA. 
 
 263 
 
 fields of Transoxonia and Persia. The last of 
 
 this race of Christian kings was slain by 
 
 Gengis Khan, about 1202. The victorious 
 
 arms of the Mohammedan princes, about the 
 
 !:egiuning of the fifteenth century, overran 
 
 'li.' regions in which Nestorian missions had 
 
 a planted, to the coast of the Caspian sea, 
 
 I the expulsion of the Monguls from China, 
 
 i 369, by the Ming dynasty, probably nearly 
 
 irpated the surviving N'estorians in this land. 
 
 -yria and Persia have, since the tenth cen- 
 
 y, been ruled by the followers of Moham- 
 
 ] iucd. Christians in those countries have been 
 
 bitterly harrassed ; and the Nestorians, from 
 
 being a numerous and powerful community, 
 
 are now few and despised. Their missions are 
 
 no more. No Nestorian churches, and no 
 
 copies of the Scriptures translated by them 
 
 into Chinese, or any books of theirs, are known 
 
 to exist in China. Yet it is to be hoped that 
 
 many souls may have been saved, by means of 
 
 their missions. There may have been much 
 
 admixture of error in their teachings ; but we 
 
 have reason to believe that the flickering flame 
 
 of true piety lingered much longer with them 
 
 than with any other of the ancient Christian 
 
 sects. (See Nestorians.) 
 
 Papal Missions. — The Roman Catholic 
 Missions in Chin^ began in the 13th century. 
 An interesting account of them is given in 
 Williams's Middle Kingdom, to which we are 
 chiefly indebted for the following facts. John 
 de Monte Corvino went to China by the way of 
 India, and was kindly received by the emperor 
 Kublai Khan. At Cambalu, the present Pe- 
 king, he built a church, and in eleven years 
 is said to have baptized nearly GOOO persons, 
 and purchased 150 children, whom he taught 
 Greek and Latin, and • for whom he composed 
 devotional works. His success procured him 
 the office "of archbishop from Clement Y. in 
 1307, with seven assistant suffragan bishops. 
 He died in 1330. In 1336 he was succeeded by 
 Nicholas de Bentra, with 26 assistant mission- 
 ary laborers. Corvino in one of his letters 
 speaks of having translated the New Testa- 
 ment and the Psalms into the Tartar language. 
 These missionaries appear to have labored 
 chiefly among the Monguls, and their subse- 
 quent expulsion from China by the Ming Dy- 
 nasty, was accompanied by the annihilation of 
 Christianity among them. For upwards of 
 200 years between the rise of the Ming Dy- 
 nasty, in 1368, and the arrival of Ricci, in 
 Canton, jn 1.581, we hear little respecting 
 either the Nestorians or Catholics. From the 
 commencement of Ricci's labors to the death of 
 Yunching, in 1136, is a highly interesting 
 period of Papal missionary history in China. 
 Ricci and his associate Ruggiero were much 
 opposed by the government, and attempted 
 the concealment of their real intention, by 
 affirming that their only wish was the acquisi- 
 tion of the Cliiuese language, arts, and sciences 
 of the country. Ricci was finally allowed to 
 
 reside at Shanchau-foo, where, habited as a Bud- 
 hist priest, he remained for some years, ingra- 
 tiating himself by his courtesy, presents, and 
 scientific attainments, though his doctrines 
 were opposed by the Confucianists and suspi- 
 cious magistrates. He and his associates sub- 
 sequently adopted the dress of the literati, left 
 Shanchau, and after temporary residences in 
 Nanchang, Suchau, and Nanking, he was 
 admitted into Peking in 1601, and courteously 
 treated by the emperor AVanleigh. Other 
 Jesuits joined him, and under his direction 
 successfully prosecuted their work. Ricci's 
 manners, acquirements, and liberal presents, 
 gained him the favor of men in authority, some 
 of whom he ere long numbered as converts. 
 Among these, Siu, baptized Paul, a native of 
 Shanghai, . was an early, and very efficient 
 cooperator. His daughter, named Candida, 
 was an illustrious and able coadjutor in the 
 missionary work. But among the imperial 
 officers there were powerful opposers, and in 
 1617 the missionaries were ordered to leave 
 the country. They, however, maintained their 
 position, and by the year 1636, had published 
 340 treatises, some religious, but mostly scienti- 
 fic. Ricci, the superior of all the missions, among 
 his published rules, allowed to the converts 
 the practice of ancestral worship, regarding 
 these rites as merely civil in their nature. This 
 subject subsequently became a bone of con- 
 tention between the Jesuits and the Francis- 
 cans, and the source of much alarm to the 
 Chinese. Ricci died in 1610, at the age of 80 
 years. By the Jesuits, he has been greatly 
 extolled for his virtues ; and by others mar 
 ligned. A Catholic author thus speaks of him, 
 " The kings found in him a man full of com- 
 plaisance ; the pagans, a minister who accom- 
 modated himself to their superstitions ; the 
 mandarins, a polite courtier, skilled in all the 
 trickery of courts ; and the devil a faithful 
 servant, who, far from destroying, established 
 his reign among the people, and even extended 
 it to the Christians." After his death, the 
 work prospered under the patronage of Paul 
 Siu, who in 1622, obtained the repeal of the 
 edict of expulsion, and arrested the persecution. 
 Schaal, a German Jesuit, recommended to the 
 emperor Siu in 1628, by his great attain- 
 ments, secured imperial honor and authority 
 among his brethren. During the bloody com- 
 motions intervening between the decline of the 
 Ming dynasty, and the firm establishment of 
 the Manchus on the throne, lasting about 30 
 years, the missions suffered much. In this 
 contest the northern missionaries sided with 
 the Manchus, while the Romish missionaries at 
 the south favored Tunglieh, the surviving claim- 
 ant to the throne of the fallen Ming Dynasty, 
 in whose family were some distinguished con- 
 verts, and whose troops were led by two Chris- 
 tian Chinese officers, Thomas Kiu, and Luke 
 Chin, During the reign of Shunchi, Schaal 
 and his coadjutors were honored, and converts 
 
264 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 were multiplied in the provinces ; but the re- 
 gents into whoso hands the government fell 
 at his death in IGOl, Issued a decree that Scliaal 
 and his associates merited the punishmeut of 
 seducers, who announce to the people false and 
 pernicious doctrines. Schaal, though tutor to 
 the young emperor Kanghe, was proscribed 
 and degraded, and in the following year died 
 of grief, aged 78 years. Onbiest, the next 
 most distinguished of the missionaries, was 
 with others imprisoned, and numbers were 
 banished from the country. On Kanghe's as- 
 suming the reins of government in 1671, then 
 but 8 years of age, he released Onbiest, to ap- 
 point him his astronomer in place of Schaal, 
 and allowed the missionaries to return to 
 their stations, though ho forbade his sub- 
 jects embracing Christianity. The missionaries 
 requited the kindness of the emperor, not only 
 by their scientific labors, but by casting cannon 
 for his army. In 1636 Schaal cast some for 
 Shemchi, and Onbiest cast the total number 
 of 450 pieces, more than 300 of which he 
 blessed and called after the names of different 
 saints. On the arrival in China while Ricci 
 was yet living, of the Franciscan and Domi- 
 nican orders, a violent dispute arose between 
 them and the Jesuits, regarding ancestral wor- 
 ship, and the proper term in Chinese for God, 
 which continued into the reign of the successor 
 of Kanghe, and was referred to the emperor 
 himself and to the decision of Popes Innocent 
 X., Alexander YIL, and Clement XL, whose 
 successive decrees nullified each other. The 
 final decision, however, was adverse to the 
 Jesuits, establishing Thien Chu, as the term' 
 for trod, and forbidding the practice of the 
 ancestral rites to the Chinese converts. The 
 spirit with which these disputes were conducted, 
 the pomp and arrogance of the priests, and 
 the interference of the popes with the laws of 
 the realm regarding its rites and ceremonies, 
 at length aroused the jealousy of the govern- 
 ment, and awakened a determined and bitter 
 opposition, manifesting itself in a succession of 
 persecuting edicts. Kanghe would not allow 
 the Pope the right to legislate over his subjects, 
 and in 1706 decreed to countenance only those 
 missionaries who preached the doctrines of 
 Ricci. 
 
 In 1718, he decreed that no missionary 
 should remain in the country without his per- 
 mission, given only after the promise to follow 
 the rules of Ricci ; and yet no missionary 
 could leave for China without the most solemn 
 promise to follow the instructions of Clement 
 XI., respecting these ceremonies. Kanghe's 
 policy was to restrain the missionaries, and 
 keep them about him at court, while he allow- 
 ed the work of persecution in the provinces. 
 After the death of Kanghe, in 1723, the hos- 
 tility of the government to the missionaries in- 
 creased, and the Catholic faith was strictly 
 prohibited, except the few wanted at Peking 
 for scientific purposes. The missionaries were 
 
 all ordered to leave the country, and more than 
 300,000 converts were left without teaclicrs. 
 Some missionaries secreted themselves, and 
 others, after reaching Canton, contrived to re- 
 turn to their flocks, who were every where 
 subjected to severe persecutions. Since tliat 
 time they have seldom been free from persecu- 
 tion. 
 
 The character of the Catholic missionaries 
 may be seen from the following remarks of 
 Ripa, one of their missionaries at Peking : — 
 " The diffusion of our holy religion in these 
 parts, has .been almost entirely owing to 
 the catechists, who are in their service, to other 
 Clu'istians, or to the distribution of books in 
 the Chraese language. There is scarcely a 
 single missionary who can boast of having 
 made a convert by his own preaching ; for 
 they merely baptize those who have been al- 
 ready converted by others. He even adds, 
 that up to his time, in 1714, none of the mis- 
 sionaries had been able to surmount the lan- 
 guage, so as to make themselves understood by 
 the people at large." 
 
 Between 1580 and 1724, about 500 mission- 
 aries had been sent out. The empire is parti- 
 tioned into Bishoprics, and Vicariates, divided 
 between the Portuguese, the Spanish Domini- 
 cans, the Lazarists, the French Society, whose 
 missionaries are mostly Jesuits, and the Pro- 
 paganda, whose missionaries are principally 
 Italians. The summary for 1846 gives 12 
 bishops, and 7 or 8 coadjutors, about 80 
 foreign missionaries, 90 native priests, and 
 about 400,000 converts. The schools are not 
 given. There are six colleges for educating 
 native priests, including that at Naples. The 
 above statistics are the latest we have found. 
 Undoubtedly the number of Catholic mission- 
 aries has greatly increased in China since 
 1846. In the report of the Lazarist missions 
 in the empire in 1849, found in the Annals of 
 the Faith, including Macao, the Vicariates of 
 Houan, Kiangsi, Chihkiang, Mongul, Tar- 
 tary, Eastern Thibet, and the diocese of Peking, 
 there are stated to be 33 European priests, 45 
 auxiliary priests, 6 nunneries for the education 
 of native clergy, 50 schools for both sexes, 
 and a total of about 50,000 neophytes. If the 
 other bishoprics have increased in the same ra- 
 tio as the Lazarists, within the last few years, 
 the estimate for 1846 must be much below the 
 present numbers. 
 
 The Catholic church requires no evidence of 
 spiritual regeneration, as a condition of bap- 
 tism ; but this ordinance is itself regarded as 
 producing this great change. They attach 
 the greatest importance to the baptism of the 
 dying children of the heathen, and make this 
 a distinct department of their missionary work. 
 Statements are annually made to their societies 
 of the number of dying and other infants of the 
 pagans baptized. " The agents in this work," 
 says Verolles, " are usually elderly women, who 
 have experience in infantile diseases. Fur- 
 
CHINA. 
 
 265 
 
 iiislied with innocent pills, and a bottle of holy 
 v'. ;iter, whose virtues they extol, they introduce 
 lliomselvcs into the houses where there are 
 sick infants, and discover whether they are in 
 dung-er of death, and in this case, they inform 
 the parents, and tell them that before adminis- 
 (( ring other remedies, they must wash their 
 I lands with the purifying waters of their bottle. 
 ,' parents, not suspecting this pious ruse, 
 ulily consent, and by these innocent frauds, 
 ^', L' i)rocure in our mission the baptism of 7 or 
 H.OOO infants every year." One missionary 
 speaks of the employment of the sponge for 
 this purpose, to whose use the Chinese were 
 led to attach peculiar medicinal virtue, and con- 
 sequently were much delighted to have their sick 
 children washed, that is, baptized with it. The 
 preaching of the Gospel is regarded as a secon- 
 dary matter, their work being, to a large ex- 
 tent, ceremonial. We hear little of them as 
 preachers, tliis work being entrusted to their 
 native assistants. The word of life is never 
 distributed ; for its influence is feared. 
 
 Protestant Missions. — The first efforts of 
 the Protestant churches for the salvation of 
 the Chinese were chiefly directed to. the Chi- 
 nese emigrants in the Indian Archipelago and 
 Siam, with a view to the ultimate spiritual 
 regeneration of China itself. It was hoped 
 that laborers might thus be raised up who 
 should become the ministers of mercy to their 
 own people. To some extent these hopes were 
 realized. And when China was opened par- 
 tially to the Gospel, some who had been labor- 
 ing and praying for China's perishing millions, 
 were prepared to enter into this great field ; 
 but others had already entered into their rest. 
 London Missionary Society. — The opera- 
 tions of this society in China were commenced 
 in 1807. The subject had been under consid- 
 eration for a considerable time previous ; 
 their first object being to secure a faithful 
 translation of the Scriptures into Chinese. 
 Their first missionary was Kev. Eobert Mor- 
 rison, who may be regarded under God as the 
 father of Protestant missions in China. By 
 talent, education, and. piety, he was peculiarly 
 fitted for the post. Having been engaged for 
 some time previous in the study of Chinese, 
 under the instruction of a learned native then 
 in England, he embarked in January, 1807, 
 going by the way of New York, and while in 
 the United States, he received from Mr. Madi- 
 son, then Secretary of State, a letter of intro- 
 duction to our consul at Canton, from which 
 he subsequently derived much advantage. On 
 his arrival in Canton, he devoted himself to 
 study, at first occupying a retired room, eating 
 and dressing like the Chinese, and having lit- 
 tle intercourse, except with the natives in his 
 service, with whom he held a religious service 
 in private. He subsequently deemed it wise 
 to throw off the Chinese costume. He hired 
 apartments in a factory, and through Sir 
 George Stanton, formed an advantageous ac- 
 
 quaintance with Mr. Roberts, the chief of the 
 Company's factory at Canton. Near the close 
 of 1808, he was married to Miss Morton, 
 daughter of John Morton, Esq., and on the 
 day of his marriage, was appointed translator 
 to the Company's factory at Canton, with a 
 salary which rendered him independent of the 
 society's funds. This appointment greatly 
 aided him in his great object of translating 
 the Scriptures, and preparing a dictionary 
 and elementary books in Chinese. In this 
 work, he was much assisted by a manuscript 
 Latin and Chinese Dictionary, furnished him 
 by the Royal Asiatic Society, a Harmony of 
 the Gospels, and the Pauline Epistles in Chi- 
 nese, the work of some unknown hand, and a 
 copy of the Acts of the Apostles in Chinese,, 
 which he brought out with him. He also ac- 
 knowledges valuable aid from an Exposition of 
 the Decalogue, in three volumes, furnished him 
 by a native Roman Catholic convert. Sam 
 Tok, the Chinese with whom he studied in 
 London, continued to be a valuable assistant. 
 At the close of 1808, he writes to the direc- 
 tors : — " The grammar is prepared for the 
 press, and the dictionary is filling up. The 
 manuscript of the New Testament is in part 
 fit to be printed." His revision of the Acts 
 of the Apostles was printed in 1810, being the 
 first portion of the Scriptures in Chinese 
 printed by any Protestant missionary. His 
 Chinese grammar was printed at Serampore 
 in 1815, at the expense of the East India 
 Company. The Gospel of Luke was published 
 in 1812. 
 
 About this time, an edict was issued by the 
 Chinese government, prohibiting the printing 
 of religious books, and the preaching of the 
 Gospel, followed with acts of persecution ; 
 but Mr. Morrison unobtrusively continued his 
 work, and in the same year the directors sent 
 out Mr. Milne, as his fellow-laborer. In Julj, 
 1813, he reached Macao, but was allowed to 
 remain there only 10 days. The following five 
 months he spent at Canton, in the study of the 
 language. In February, 1814, he left for a 
 tour in the Indian Archipelago, taking wdth 
 him 2,000 Testaments, 10,000 tracts, and 
 5,000 catechisms. 
 
 In his letter of January 11, 1814, communi- 
 cating to the Society the fact of the comple- 
 tion of the New Testament, Mr. Morrison re- 
 marks, " I give this to the world, not as a per- 
 fect translation. I have done my best ; it only 
 remains, that I commit it by prayer to Divine 
 blessing. The Gospels, the closing Epistles, 
 and the Book of Revelation are entirely my 
 own translating." For the middle part of the 
 volume he acknowledges his obligations to the 
 labors of some unknown individual. During 
 this year the Company testified their value of 
 Mr. Morrison's Dictionary by furnishing an 
 experienced printer, Mr. P. P. Thorns, with 
 the necessary apparatus for printing the work. 
 In 1814 Mr. Morrison baptized the first Chi- 
 
CHINA. 
 
 neeo convert to Protestant Christianity, Tsae 
 A-hh aj?cd 27, after much instruction, long 
 trial, and a full confession of his faith in the 
 Ix>ni Jesus. This was done, to use Mr. Mor- 
 rison's own words, " at a spring of water issu- 
 ing from the foot of a loftv hill, by the sea- 
 side, away from human observation." He 
 continued stedfast in his Christian profession 
 till his death, in 1818. Mr. Milne rejoined Mr. 
 Morrison September 27, after his return from 
 his tour in the Archipelago. In one year, 
 after entering the missionary field, he publish- 
 ed a farewell address to the Chinese in the 
 •Archipelago, a singular instance of linguistic 
 proficiency. In January, 1816, Mr. Milne went 
 to Penang, and while there obtained from the 
 government laud for a missionary establish- 
 ment at Malacca, which latter place became 
 the permanent field of his missionary labors, 
 where he afterwards became the head of an 
 Ajiglo- Chinese college, founded in part by the 
 liberality of Dr. Morrison. 
 
 On the 7th of July, 1816, Mr. Morrison and 
 Lord Amherst visited Peking ; which visit fur- 
 nished a good opportunity of obtaining in- 
 formation respecting the country and its dif- 
 ferent dialects. In 1817, he was honored 
 by the University of Glasgow with the title 
 of D. D. ; and during this year he published 
 his " View of China for Philological Purposes," 
 and a *' Chinese translation of the Morning and 
 Evening Prayers of the Church of England." 
 In the translation of the Old Testament he 
 cliosc the Pentateuch, the Psalms, and the Pro- 
 phetical books, and Dr. Milne the remainder. 
 
 In November, 1818, the entire Bible was 
 completed, and published, by the joint labors 
 of Morrison and Milne, a glorious work, which 
 the Catholic missionaries in China have not 
 yet executed, notwithstanding they boast of 
 about 400,000 converts. Dr. Morrison also 
 published other smaller works. The British 
 and Foreign Bible Society, during his lifetime 
 gave at dijBerent times the aggregate sum of 
 £6000 for the printing of the Chinese Scrip- 
 tures, and £400 were for the same object 
 collected in the United States. In his trans- 
 lation of the Scriptures, he did not adopt an 
 elevated and recondite style, intelligible only 
 to the highly educated ; but he chose language 
 plain and simple, suited to the comprehension 
 .of the common people. He says, " In my 
 translation I have studied fidelity, perspicuity, 
 and simplicity. I have preferred common words 
 to classical ones ; and would rather be deemed 
 inelegant, than hard to be understood. To 
 the task 1 have brought patient endurance of 
 labor and seclusion from society, a* calm and 
 unprejudiced judgment, and, I hope, an accu- 
 rate mode of thinking. With a reverential 
 sense of the awful responsibility of misrepre- 
 senting God's word,^ I have made no departure 
 in any sensible degree from the sense of the 
 English Version; and have not affected to 
 make a new translation, or an improved ver- 
 
 sion, immediately and solely from the origi- 
 nal." 
 
 Those who have thoroughly tested Morri- 
 son's translation, as the writer has done, by 
 reading it extensively with Chinese of different 
 degrees of literary attainment, can hardly 
 deny its general perspicuity; and as to its 
 fidelity, it has not probably been surpassed by 
 any succeeding Chinese version of the Scrip- 
 tures. His style is not pleasing to Chinese 
 scholars, preferring, as they do, the terse and 
 recondite, unintelligible to ordinary readers. 
 His principal I'ault consisted in the use of too 
 many connective particles, giving to his com- 
 position an unnecessary verbosity. Fewer 
 words might have been used, and the meaning 
 of the Spirit have been made equally clear. 
 
 In 1821, Dr. Morrison was bereaved of his 
 wife, who died of the cholera in the sweet hope 
 of heaven. This year his valuable Dictionary 
 was completed. As a Chinese lexicographer 
 he performed an invaluable service to com- 
 merce and Christian missions ; and his name 
 deserves to be held in grateful and honored 
 remembrance. His Dictionary was published 
 by the East India Company at the expense of 
 £15,000.' 
 
 In 1824, Dr. Morrison returned to England, 
 after 17 years of severe missionary toil, and was 
 there received with distinguished honor. After 
 his marriage to Miss Armstrong of liverpool, 
 they embarked in May, 1826, and arrived at 
 Macao on the 19th of Sept. following. 
 
 Leang Afa, a distinguished Chinese con- 
 vert, baptized by Dr. Milne, and ordained by 
 Dr. Morrison before he sailed for England, d^ 
 serves a brief notice. He is the author of sev- 
 eral valuable tracts, and has distinguished him- 
 self by his usefulness to individuals, several of 
 whom he has baptized, and likewise by his zeal 
 and boldness in the preaching of the Gospe^ 
 and in the distribution of books at the literary 
 examinations. In Aug. 1834, the rage of thel 
 mandarins was excited against him. Two of*? 
 his friends were seized, and one of them was 
 cruelly beaten because he refused to betray Afa's 
 concealment ; and he himself, with great diffi- 
 culty escaped to Macao, and was taken on, 
 board one of the English ships at Lintin. 
 
 One of the tracts distributed on this occar, 
 sion fell into the hands of the distinguished- 
 leader of the insurgents, and was the founda^^ 
 tion of his earliest Christian impressions. Afsi 
 has ever remained steadfast in his Christian 
 profession, and continued to be a diligenj^ 
 preacher of the word. 
 
 Dr. Morrison's health was not vigorous after, 
 his return to China ; yet he conducted religiouft 
 services on the Sabbath, often both in English 
 and Chinese, and prepared tracts for distribu- 
 tion. About this time, he had the satisfactioir 
 to baptize Choo-Tsing, a Chinese teacher once 
 employed at the Malacca college. In 1832 he I 
 w^rites, "I have been 25. years in China, and* 
 am now beginning to see the work prosper. 
 
CHINA. 
 
 267 
 
 I>y tlie press, we have been able to scatter 
 ]<noAvledge far and wide." The following year 
 ):o and his assistants, Afa and Agang, were 
 diligent in scattering the word of life ; 60,000 
 sheet tracts, and 10,000 copies of prayers and 
 hymns having been printed, and most of them 
 distributed, partly among the students at the 
 literary examinations. Though feeble, he con- 
 tinued his work in the absence of his family, 
 who had sailed for England. On the 1st of 
 Aug., 1834, this devoted missionary was sud- 
 denly called from his earthly labors to his home 
 in heaven, having continued his Chinese ser- 
 vices with his domestics to the close of his life. 
 His last service was characterized by much 
 holy ardor. His remains were taken to Ma- 
 cao for interment. China shall yet rise up 
 and call him blessed. By his decease, the mis- 
 sion was left without any one to look after the 
 few who had been brought under Christian 
 instruction, and who were dispersed by the 
 persecution which broke out shortly after his 
 death. In 1835, Eev. W. H. Medhurst and 
 Eev._ Edwin Stevens arrived in China, but 
 nothing permanent was done by this Society, 
 in Canton, for 14 years after the death of Dr. 
 Morrison. In Feb. 1848, Benjamin HolDson, 
 M. p., a missionary of the Society, secured an 
 eligible position some distance above the for- 
 eign factories, on the margin of the river. He 
 met with a kind reception in the neighborhood, 
 and the patients who visited him three times a 
 week, numbered from 100 to 150, and were 
 attentive to the preaching of the word by Afa, 
 followed by remarks Jrom himself. The Sab- 
 bath was reserved for special religious services, 
 in which Afa was a bold and faithful preach- 
 er. The reports of this mission, from year to 
 year, down to 1853, represent it as continuing 
 a steady and encouraging course of Christian 
 effort in the way of medical and surgical aid 
 to the sick, accompanied with the teaching 
 and preaching .of the word of life by the vener- 
 able Afa and Dr. Hobson, assisted by Low 
 Ting Shun, agent of the Eeligious Tract So- 
 ciety. The number of hospital patients for 
 1852 and 1853 was 44,366. Four weekly ser- 
 vices were held with the patients. Between 
 10 and 80 usually attended the public services, 
 conducted alternately by Afa and Dr. Hobson. 
 In 1853, there were 11 church members, and 
 5 native agents. Dr. Hobson remarks, "With 
 respect to any visible effects upon the heart 
 and conscience of our hearers and readers, in- 
 ducing them to seek salvation from the wrath 
 to come, we are still very much in the same 
 position as when the missionary hospital was 
 opened here five years ago." Yet he believes 
 that favorable impressions, with regard to the 
 Gospel, are manifesting themselves. Syste- 
 matic opposition to its truths is decidedly di- 
 minishing, and its teachers are treated with 
 more respect by the rude and turbulent sur- 
 rounding population. In 1852 he published a 
 valuable work on the Elements of Physiologi- 
 
 cal Science and Anatomy, which has been read 
 with interest by the Chinese. 
 
 Hong-Kong. — Soon after the termination of 
 hostilities between England and China, the 
 Directors of the London Missionary Society 
 decided on the relinquishment of their mis- 
 sions in the Archipelago, and concentrating 
 their efforts for the Chinese in China itself. 
 Instructions were accordingly given to their 
 Chinese missionaries to meet in Hong-Kong, 
 to consider the plan of future operations. This 
 meeting was held in August, 1843, at which 
 were present Messrs. Medhurst, Legge, Milne, 
 Hobson, J. and A. Stronach, S. Dyer, and 
 the Hon. J. E. Morrison. Agreeably to the 
 recommendation of this committee, the society 
 resolved on converting the Anglo-Chinese 
 College in Malacca into a Theological Semin- 
 ary, for the training of a native ministry for 
 China, selected Hong-Kong for the seat of this 
 Institution, and appointed Eev. James Legge 
 as its superintendent. Eev. Dr. Legge and 
 family arrived in Hong-Kong on the 10th of 
 August, accompanied by three promising native 
 Chinese Christians from Malacca. The printing 
 apparatus, and other moveable property at 
 Malacca, were soon transferred to Hong-Kong. 
 A medical establishment was also opened in 
 connection .with the mission, by Dr. Benjamin 
 Hobson, who, since 1848, had been assisted by 
 the Canton Medical Missionary Society. 
 Agong and Chin Seen, who came with Dr. 
 Legge from Malacca, and Leang Afa, preach- 
 ed in the hospital, and in other parts of the 
 settlement with much encouragement. The 
 report for May, 1*845, gives a cheering view of 
 the mission. During the year, the native 
 evangelists had been ■diligent in preaching the 
 Gospel to large and attentive congregations 
 in the Chinese part of the settlement. Eev. 
 William Gillespie arrived there July, 1844. 
 Ground for a missionary establishment had 
 been obtained, convenient to the Chinese po- 
 pulation, and the requisite buildings erected 
 thereon, and the roreign residents in Hong- 
 Kong had liberally responded to an appeal for 
 the erection of a chapel for English and Chi- 
 nese worship, called the Union Chapel. In 
 June, ] 846, two aged Chinese were received 
 into the Mission Church, and on that occasion 
 seven Chinese surrounded the table of the 
 Lord. Chin Seen, who had long enjoyed the 
 care and instructions of Dr. Legge, was ordain- 
 ed to the Gospel ministry. Dr. Hobson had 
 previously been obliged to leave for England 
 on account of the health of his wife. She ex- 
 pired on the borders of her native land. Dur- 
 ing his absence he was married to a daughter 
 of the Eev. Dr. Morrison, and on the 10th 
 of March, 1847, embarked the second time for 
 the East, together with J. H. Herschberg, M. 
 D., subsequently medical missionary at Hong- 
 Kong. Eev. Dr. Legge, by reason of ill-health, 
 returned home in 1846, accompanied by three 
 intelligent Chinese youth, who, during their 
 
CHINA. 
 
 stay in England, were there baptized by him 
 In the pmjonce of the grout congregation. 
 These voung men were natives of Malacca, 
 and wore baptized in the church in which Dr. 
 Milne, the ri-esident of the Malacca College, 
 used to worship. It was a thrilling scene. 
 After Dr. Legge's return to Hong-Kong, he 
 mentions, under date of November, 1848, the 
 reception of an. aged Chinese, and three young 
 men of much promise, into the church. The 
 latter were members of his seminary. Their 
 names were A-chiong, Ach'heong and A-King. 
 Thirteen others, including three seminarists, 
 wore also applicants for baptism. In 1850, he 
 had four candidates for the ministry under his 
 instruction, besides the oversight of a male 
 boarding school of 30 pupils, and the stated 
 preaching of the Gospel in the Union Chapel. 
 The native church, under the pastoral care of 
 Chin Seen, then numbered upwards of 20 
 members, and the Bazar Chapel, in which he 
 preached, was filled with attentive hearers. 
 During the year, six members had been added 
 to the native church, one of whom was a man 
 of talent and highly educated. It is remarked, 
 that for one candidate received, the missiona- 
 ries were compelled to decline many. The Ma- 
 gazine and Chronicle for June, 1850, contains 
 an extract of a letter from Dr. Herschberg, 
 giving a cheering account of the influence of 
 his hospital, from which it appears to have 
 been the birth-place of some precious souls. 
 His average daily patients were between 50 
 and 60, and in connection with the medical 
 practice, about 100 daily heard the Gos- 
 pel. 
 
 In their annual view of their Chinese Mis- 
 sions for 1851, the directors remark : " It is 
 therefore with peculiar satisfaction that the 
 directors report that the New Testament tho- 
 roughly and carefully revised, principally by 
 our missionaries at Shanghai, has been printed 
 in that city, and also at Hong-Kong." By 
 the introduction of metal if^e of reduced size, 
 and of beautiful form, for which we are indebt- 
 ed mainly to the patient labors of the Kev. 
 Samuel Dyer, the Scriptures in Chinese can 
 now be printed in a small volume, and at a 
 greatly reduced price. According to this re- 
 ^rt, there were then in the school at Hong- 
 Kong, under the superintendence of Dr. and 
 Mrs. Legge, 40 boj^s and 20 girls, all domesti- 
 cated amidst the habits and enjoyments of a 
 Christian family, and carefully instructed in the 
 several branches, both of useful and Christian 
 knowledge. In the theological class were 
 five young men. Since the opening of Dr. 
 Hcrschberg's Hospital, in September, 1849, 
 3,066 patients had been relieved. The report 
 of 1853, represents tlie missionary operations 
 at Hong-Kong, as being in a prosperous state, 
 though, in October, 1852, the mission was af- 
 flicted by the sudden death of ^Mrs, Lcgge, 
 leaving three children and an afflicted husband, 
 to mourn her departure. The number of church 
 
 members was then 24, male pupils m the 
 boarding school, 45, and 10 girls. In this 
 mission is one of the most valuable printing 
 establishments in China. 
 
 The London Society's mission at Shanghai 
 was commenced by Messrs. Medhurst and 
 Lockhart in December, 1843, with encouraging 
 prospects. It was the earliest Protestant mis- 
 sion in that city. Dr. Lockhart, under date 
 of Feb. 1, 1845, states the number of his 
 patients, since the preceding February, to have 
 been 10,600, to whom Mr. Medhurst preached 
 three times a-week, and distributed tracts to 
 readers. At his house he had attentive con- 
 gregations. In the surrounding villages, as 
 far distant as 15 miles from the city, they luid 
 preached and distributed tracts, and had been 
 invited to large towns 25 miles distant. In 
 March of the same year, two interesting in- 
 quirei-s are mentioned, and subscriptions to the 
 amount of $1,000 for a Union Chapel by the 
 foreign residents in the city, designed for Eng- 
 lish and Chinese worship. An English ser- 
 vice on Sabbath morning was. held in the 
 Consulate, and there was weekly preaching in 
 a Chinese temple. Mr. Medhurst's valuable 
 printing establishment at Batavia was brought 
 to Shanghai, and now began to be employed 
 in the printing of weekly sermons, and other 
 publications. Opposition from the numerous 
 Catholics at Shanghai began to appear. A 
 later communication remarks, " Our sanctuary 
 was opened on the 24th of August, (1846,) 
 when every part of it was crowded with hear- 
 ers, who listened attentively to the preached 
 word. Since that time, divine service has 
 been continued therein every Sunday after- 
 noon, attended by crowded congregations, who 
 come regularly and sit quietly to the end." 
 At the meeting of the Society in May, 1847, 
 it was reported that three Chinese had already 
 been baptized, one of whom was a literary 
 graduate. During the year ending May, 
 1847, 34,400 copies of different works were 
 printed, and about 500 tracts had been given 
 weekly to the attendants on the religious ser- 
 vices, besides those distributed in the hospital, 
 in the neighboring villages, and on the junks 
 trading to Peking and other cities. The 
 medical department was flourishing. Nov. 
 26, 1846, Rev. Mr. Milne and his wife arrived 
 at Shanghai, and April 1, 1847, Rev. Messrs. 
 Muirhead and Southwell, and Mr. A. Wylie, 
 superintendent of the press, sailed for that 
 city. 
 
 In June, 1847, delegates from several sta- 
 tions convened in Shanghai, for the revision 
 of the New Testament in Chinese. After a 
 long discussion on the proper term for God and 
 gods to be employed in a Chinese translation 
 of the Holy Scriptures, not being able to 
 agree in opinion, they concluded to proceed 
 in the work of revision, and leave the terms 
 for God and the Holy Spirit, for future settle-, 
 ment. Canton, Amoy and Ningpo, wove rep- 
 
CHINA. 
 
 269 
 
 rented by Rev. Messrs. E. 0. Bridgman, J. 
 
 rronach, and W. C. Milne ; and Shanghai, 
 l>y Rev. Messrs. Boone and Medhurst. Rev. 
 jlcssrs. Johnson and White were chosen to 
 represent Fuhchau, but circumstances did not 
 allow of their acting on the committee. The 
 ill-health of Bishop Boone prevented him 
 IVom taking much part in the revision. 
 
 The Report for 1847 mentions the forma- 
 
 n of a church of nine members. In the 
 M-Uowing year, ending May, 1848, the labors 
 )(■ the mission continued much as usual, and 
 the attendance on the preached word was en- 
 couraging. The printing amounted to 71,400 
 copies of various works. In 1849, besides the 
 English service in the chapel, conducted in 
 rotation by brethren of different missions on 
 Sabbath mornings, there were held on other 
 hours of the clay, three native services, 
 and one in the hospital, besides two weekly 
 services in the former, and two daily exercises 
 in the latter place for the patients and others 
 employed on the premises. In most of these 
 services there was a good attendance. The 
 colporteur Wang Show-yih was a zealous 
 laborer in Shanghai and the neighboring vil- 
 lages. In September of this year, the writer 
 visited Shanghai, and there spent some weeks 
 in the hospitable family of Rev. Dr. Bridg- 
 man. It was a season of severe sickness, es- 
 pecially in this mission, two of whose mem- 
 bers. Rev. Mr. Southwell and Mrs. Mary 
 Wylie, were there called to their heavenly rest. 
 Rev. Mr. Southwell had recently entered the 
 field, and Mrs. Wylie was called home, after 
 having long toiled for Christ among the Kaf- 
 fres in South Africa, then known as Miss 
 Mary Hanson, Agent of the Ladies' Society 
 in London for the Instruction of Females in 
 the East. A letter from Rev. Mr. Muirhead 
 in 1850, remarks, " In the chapel we have on 
 the Sabbath six services, from half-an-hour to 
 an hour each, and during the week we have 
 service once every morning, and in the even- 
 ings twice. Every week, there are not less, 
 on the average, than from 800 to 1,000 indi- 
 viduals within the walls of the chapel, hear- 
 ing the words of eternal life." This comprised 
 only a part of the weekly labors of these 
 brethren in the preaching of the Gospel. In 
 the following year, the labors of the mission 
 were unremitted, and health prevailed among 
 them. The missionaries remark that, though 
 many are willing to hear the word, they have 
 no personal convictions, and like not the 
 exclusiveness of the Gospel, however much 
 they affect to admire the excellency of its 
 moral precepts. The hopeful conversion and 
 baptism of 8 Fokien men, through the labors 
 of Rev. J. Stronach, during less than a year, 
 deserves grateful mention. While engaged in 
 the revision of the Scriptures, he statedly 
 preached to the Fokien residents in Shanghai, 
 with blessed results. 
 
 Between April and October, 1850, there 
 
 were printed at the Shanghai mission press, 
 50,000 copies of evangelical publications. 
 The revision of the New Testament had been 
 completed, and that of the Old Testament had 
 been commenced. Soon after the completion 
 of the revision of the New Testament, Rev. 
 Messrs. Medhurst, Milne, and Stronach, in 
 compliance with the instructions of the direc- 
 tors of the society, withdrew from the general 
 committee for Scripture revision, and prose- 
 cuted their work on the Old Testament alone. 
 Dr. Bridgman being a minority of the com- 
 mittee, on the revision of the New Testament, 
 does not regard himself responsible for the 
 style of the revision, or its principles of trans- 
 lation. This work is essentially the produc- 
 tion of Messrs. Medhurst, Milne, and Stronach. 
 A letter from Rev. J. Stronach, in July, 1851, 
 gives the gratifying intelligence of the recep- 
 tion to church membership of eight other Fo- 
 kien Chinese, making in all sixteen within the 
 space of twelve months. The latest intelli- 
 gence from this mission, preceding the report 
 for 1852, represents the various services at the 
 chapels, as being well sustained, though for 
 the most part, as usual, consisting of transient 
 visitors. Preaching in the temples and by the 
 wayside was continued, favored with a listen- 
 ing ear among the people. The hospital was 
 sustained, and the press was kept in vigorous 
 operation. During the year there were printed 
 5,000 copies of the Gospels and Acts ; 10,000 
 of a condensed statement of Christianity ; 
 10,000 of the Three Character Classic ; 10,000 
 catechisms ; 3,000 of Sabbath calendar ; 5,500 
 copies of the New Testament, and 2,000 copies 
 of Two Friends, making together, 45,500 
 copies. The preaching of the Gospel has been 
 the main instrumentality used for the salvation 
 of souls, for which purpose, besides the hospi- 
 tal and temporary halls, in 1853, the mission 
 had, in the centre of the city, two chapels, 
 jointly accommodating 800 hearers. This 
 year the revision of the Old Testament, by 
 Rev. Messrs. Medhurst, Milne and Stronach, 
 was completed. The whole number of Dr. 
 Lockhart's patients, since the commencement 
 of the mission, in 1843, is stated at 100,000, 
 and the entire amount of printing by the mis- 
 sion, during about ten years, including fly 
 sheets, tracts, books, and Testaments in the 
 Chinese language, was estimated at about 
 500,000 distinct copies. A boarding-school 
 of eighteen male pupils had, as early as 1853, 
 been opened by Mr. Muirhead, designed to 
 teach various branches of useful knowledge, 
 solely through the medium of the Chinese. 
 The native church then numbered twenty-one 
 members, sixteen of whom were Fokien resi- 
 dents, and three Shanghai Chinese. The bre- 
 thren, while not discouraged by their limited 
 success and the obstacles to the triumph of the 
 Gospel, yet deplore the extreme religious apa- 
 thy of the people. They remark, "All 
 around us, we find proofs of civilization and 
 
270 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 refinement. Increased intercourse, however, 
 with this world of souls, has greatly unfolded 
 its moral and relijrious charactoristic!^, and we 
 see that the masses are either the dupes of an 
 atheistical philosophy, or the slaves of despi- 
 cably puerile superstitions. Though several 
 systems of idolatry obtain among them, each 
 witli its numerous temples and cumbersome 
 rites, yet the religious apathy spread over all 
 the ix?ople is woeful. * Like priest, like peo- 
 ple,' all seem utterly devoid of serious thought 
 and concern." 
 
 Amoy. — This city and its vicinity is one of 
 the most promising missionary fields in China, 
 owing in part to the frank and friendly dispo- 
 sition of its inhabitants towards strangers. 
 This society's mission in Amoy was commenc- 
 ed by Rev. Messrs. J. Stronach and William 
 Young, in July, 1844 ; Rev. Dr. Abeel, of the 
 American Board, having already been in this 
 field upwards of two years. On the 1st of De- 
 cember they commenced Christian worship in 
 a large hou^, in a jpopulous part of the city, 
 which they had previously fitted up for a cha- 
 pel, and here, daily, morning and evening, 
 preaching in Chinese was sustained, with au- 
 diences varying from 100 to 150. A letter, 
 written in July, 1845, speaks of increasing de- 
 corum during religious services, and of the 
 wide difthsion of the Gospel, through preach- 
 ing and tract distribution. Under date of 
 June 29, 1846, Messrs. Stronach and Young 
 speak of having, during the last three or four 
 months, visited upwards of twenty towns and 
 villages in the neighborhood of the city, some 
 of which contained 10,000 inhabitants. In 
 all these places they met with a friendly recep- 
 tion, and preached the word. Owing to the 
 small proportion of readers, they were deeply 
 convinced of the importance of the living 
 preacher, and were shocked by the extensive 
 prevalence of infanticide. In May, 1847, the 
 meeting for Chinese women is described as in- 
 creasing in attendance, and the truth seemed 
 to be producing a powerful impression upon 
 the hearts of the people. By reason of ill- 
 
 health. Rev. Mr. Young and wife, in tnc sum- 
 mer of this year, left Amoy for England. Rev. 
 A. Stronach, under date of March 10, 1848, 
 gratefully announces the hopeful conversion 
 and baptism of a father and his son, the latter 
 aged 28, being the first fruits of this mission. 
 Rev. Mr. Pohlman was present, and assisted in 
 the solemn services. Another letter of De- 
 cember 6, 1848, describes the conversion of a 
 Chinese soldier, called Tan Tai, an intelligent 
 and courageous man, and who subserjuently 
 signalized his devotion to Christ amid perse- 
 cution from ills military associates, but who, 
 notwithstanding his Christian principles, was 
 subsequently promoted to office in the army. 
 
 Mrs. William Young's female boarding 
 school, which commenced before their depar- 
 ture for England, in July, 1846, was resumed 
 soon after their return, in the fall of 1848. 
 On the 1st of November, 1849, it contained 
 six boarders and nine day scholars, and funds 
 only were wanting, indefinitely to increase the 
 number of pupils. Besides studying the Chi- 
 nese character, they were then learning to 
 read their mother tongue, through the medium 
 of the Roman letters. In 1851, this school 
 had thirteen boarders and seven day scholars. 
 The Chinese boys' boarding school, under the 
 care of Rev. A. Stronach, then contained eight 
 pupils, whose studies included the Chinese 
 classics, the English language, and the careful 
 reading of the Holy Scriptures. Rev. T. Gil- 
 fillan joined this mission in March, 1850, but 
 within about two years returned to England. 
 On the first Sabbath in January, 1852, two 
 other Chinese were added to the church. 
 Two of the church members were employ- 
 ed, as colporteurs. A joint prayer-meeting of 
 the mission churches of the L. M. S. and of 
 the American Board had been established by 
 a voluntary movement of the native Chris- 
 tians. In 1853, a spirit of active piety per- 
 vaded the native church, and ten individuals 
 were candidates for baptism, three of whom 
 were expected soon to be admitted into the 
 church. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 § 
 
 ? 
 
 fi 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 
 -s 
 
 H 
 
 si 
 
 E 
 
 i^ 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 li 
 
 
 
 -Sa 
 
 "* 
 ^ 
 
 g.2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 l. 
 
 1 
 
 & 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 Canton . . . . 
 
 1807 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 Hong Kong . . 
 
 1843 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 45 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 
 24 
 
 Shanghai . . . 
 
 1843 
 
 3 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 Amoy .... 
 
 1844 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 Totals . . . 
 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 3. 
 
 73 
 
 2 
 
 25 
 
 5 
 
 64 
 
CHINA. 
 
 271 
 
 American Board. — The following account 
 of the origin of American Missions in China 
 j has been kindly furnished us by Rev. Joshua 
 Leavitt, who was, at the time, Correspond- 
 ing Secretary of the American Seamen's Friend 
 Society : 
 
 After the lamented decease of Dr. Milne, 
 Dr. Morrison was left for several years to labor 
 alone, and without the solace of any Christian 
 society that would sympathize in his work. At 
 length, a kind Providence sent to Canton a 
 true brother, in the person of the late excellent 
 David W. C. Olyphant, Esq., who went to 
 China in a mercantile capacity, in connection 
 first with the house of Thomas H. Smith & 
 Co., and afterwards with that of Talbot & Co. 
 Mr. Olyphant entered deeply into the situation 
 and plans of Dr. Morrison. Together they es- 
 tablished the monthly concert of prayer — the 
 first on the eastern coast of Asia. As the 
 London Missionary Society delayed year after 
 year, the sending of additional helpers, Mr. 
 Olyphant suggested that an appeal should be 
 made to the American churches to enter into 
 the work. A joint letter was actually forward- 
 ed to Dr. Spring, and some publications were 
 made through the New York Observer ; but 
 up to the year 1829, nothing effectual had been 
 done in the matter. 
 
 In the summer of 1828, the American Sea- 
 men's Friend Society went into operation. 
 Shortly afterwards, the acting secretary came 
 into possession of communications, and a small 
 collection of publications, which had been for- 
 warded by Mr. Olyphant to his friend Mr. 
 George Douglass of New York, who was also, 
 like himself, a Baltimorean. Among the pub- 
 lications were some accounts, by Dr. Milne, 
 of his explorations among the ancient Dutch 
 churches in the island of Java, as well as his- 
 torical sketches of the movements in China. 
 The perusal of all these documents produced a 
 strong desire to see the American church en- 
 listed in the evangelization of China. A labor- 
 ed article on the subject was published in the 
 Christian Spectator. One of the plans suggest- 
 ed was, that the Seamen's Friend Society should 
 make a beginning, by sending out a chaplain 
 for the numerous body of American and Eng- 
 lish sailors in the port of Canton, who might 
 after a while become qualified to preach to the 
 Chinese. Another suggestion was, that by a 
 mission to Java, the Reformed Dutch churches 
 in this country, who were then doing but little 
 for missions, might be aroused to a zealous co- 
 operation in the work. 
 
 In February, 1829, the executive committee 
 of the A. S. F. S., formally resolved to estab- 
 lish a mission at Canton, as soon as the proper 
 man could be found. In September, of that 
 year, Mr. Olyphant wrote to the Society at 
 Is'ew York, and simultaneously to the Ameri- 
 can Board at Boston, that the good ship Ro- 
 man, Captain Lavender, belonging to him, 
 would sail for Canton early in October, and if 
 
 a missionary could be sent out in her, the pas- 
 sage should be free. Mr. Evarts went at once 
 to Andover, and there found Elijah C. Bridg- 
 man, a young man who had just finished hia 
 theological studies, and was still undecided as 
 to his future field of labor. Mr. Bridgman was 
 so much impressed by the providential aspect 
 of the call, that he at once resolved to respond 
 to it and devote his life to China, and he there* 
 upon went to his native place, Belchertowu, 
 Mass., and was ordained as a missionary to 
 the heathen. 
 
 On the same day that Mr. Evarts went to 
 Andover, the Seamen's Secretary was led, 
 through a suggestion from John Nitchie, Esq., 
 to make a proposition to the Rev. David Abeel, 
 a zealous young clergyman of the Reformed 
 Dutch Church, who had just returned to his 
 father's house in New Brunswick, N. J., hav- 
 ing resigned his parochial charge at Athens, 
 N. Y., on account of the delicate state of his 
 health. He also gave a favorable response, 
 and in less than two weeks from the day the 
 application was made, both the missionaries 
 arrived in New York on the same day, and 
 prepared to embark for China. Mr. Abeel re- 
 mained about a year in the service of the Sea- 
 men's Friend Society, and then, as had been 
 at first proposed, transferred his services to 
 the American Board, under whom he visited 
 Java and other eastern countries. He was 
 succeeded as Seamen's Chaplain by Rev. Edwin 
 Stevens, a tutor in Yale College, whose inter- 
 est in behalf of China originated from the 
 perusal of the article in the Christian Specta- 
 tor. Dr. Bridgman still remains in China, and 
 is acknowledged to be the most accomplished 
 and learned Chinese scholar of the age. — J. L. 
 
 Canton. — Mr. Abeel, having connected him- 
 self with the Board as their missionary, made 
 exploring tours to Java, Singapore, and Siam. 
 Mr. Bridgman entered at once on the study 
 of the Chinese. He also became editor of the 
 Chinese Repository, which was established in 
 May, 1831, a post which he continued to hold 
 for 16 years. Preaching to foreign residents, 
 also, continued for many years to form a prom- 
 inent part of his work. He had under instruc- 
 tion a number of Chinese youth, among whom 
 was a son of Leang Afa ; and part of his 
 time was devoted to the distribution of books, 
 and personal conversation with the natives. 
 
 A printing-press, types, and office furniture, 
 were presented to this mission by the Bleecker 
 street Church and Society, New York, and 
 called the " Bruin press," in memory of their 
 former pastor. 
 
 The mission was reinforced by the arri- 
 val of Rev. Ira Tracy, and Mr. S. Wells Wil- 
 liams, October 26, 1833, and of Rev. Peter 
 Parker, M. D., June 3, 1834. Mr. Williams 
 took charge of the printing-press, giving him- 
 self also to the study of the Canton dialect. 
 
 Rev. Mr. Tracy soon left to establish a mis- 
 sion at Singapore. Rev. Edward Stroms, who 
 
272 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 had been employed as Seamen's Chaplain, while 
 acquiring? the language, was now a missionary 
 of the Hoard, and in 1834, he accompanied 
 Rev. 0. (Jutzlaff, and a gentleman from Ben- 
 mil, on a tour, with the intention of visiting 
 me tea plantations in Fokein. On the Gth of 
 May they reached the mouth of the Min, 
 whfch leads to Fuhchau. After proceeding 
 up the river, unmolested, four days, they were 
 suddenly tired upon, on the morning of the 5th, 
 by the soldiers on both sides of the river. Two 
 of their men were slightly wounded, and they 
 Avcre compelled to return. This was the first 
 visit of any Protestant missionary in this re- 
 gion. In August, 1835, Messrs. Medhurst and 
 Stroms proceeded northward to Shantung, in 
 the American brig Hudson, with a cargo, con- 
 sisting of a few bags of rice, and 20,000 vo- 
 lumes of Christian books. They visited 
 Shanghai, and a number of villages on the 
 coast, and distributed many thousand books to 
 eager multitudes. They returned in safety, 
 after an absence of two months. This vessel 
 carried no opium. 
 
 Mr. "Williams was at Macao, in 1836, print- 
 ing Mr. Medhurst's dictionary. Dr. Parker, 
 having visited the United States, returned in 
 September to Canton, and opened a dispen- 
 sary, to which great numbers of ophthalmic 
 and other patients resorted. Mr. Stroms, being 
 on a missionary voyage in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago, was suddenly called away by death at 
 Singapore, January 5, 1837. 
 
 In 1838, Mr. Williams was still at Macao, 
 studying the Chinese and Japanese languages. 
 This year, Messrs. King, Parker, Gutzlaff and 
 Wiliiams undertook a voyage to Jeddo, in the 
 ship Morrison, to return to their country seven 
 shipwrecked Japanese, and also to ascertain 
 whether there was any opening for Christian 
 intercourse with Japan. But the shipwrecked 
 Japanese were not permitted to land, and the 
 vessel was subjected to a brisk Cannonade, 
 both at Jeddo and Kagosima Bay, and with 
 difficulty escaped. They embarked on this 
 voyage July 3, and returned to Macao Au- 
 gust 29. 
 
 Rev. Mr. Abeel, who had returned to the Uni- 
 ted States in 1833, on account of his health, 
 rejoined the mission in Feb. 1839 ; and Wm. B. 
 Diver, M. D., arrived in September following. 
 It was during this year that the Chinese go- 
 vernment took those vigorous measures at 
 Canton to suppress the opium traffic, which re- 
 sulted in the war with England. The disturb- 
 ances at Canton interrupted the operations of 
 the mission, and the hospital was temporarily 
 closed, having, previous to this time, given aid 
 to 6,540 patients. A revised edition of the 
 New Testament, prepared in part by Mr. 
 Bridgman, had already been printed in Sing- 
 apore, and, to some extent, distributed in Can- 
 ton. Dr. Parker took this opportunity to visit 
 the United States and England, and plead the 
 cause of Christian philanthropy. He return- 
 
 ed again to his work in 1842. Rev. Dyer 
 Ball, M. D., having been obliged to leave Sin- 
 gapore on account of the health of his wife, re- 
 moved to China. He remained at Macao till 
 the close of the war ; after which, he joined 
 Dr. Bridgman, at Hong-Kong, .which hud 
 been ceded to England by the treaty of Nan- 
 king, in 1842. Here mission premises were 
 erected on land appropriated for the purpose 
 by the government, and missionary operations 
 were steadily prosecuted in the several depart- 
 ments of preaching, printing, and tract distri' 
 bution, and the healing art for about three 
 years. Here Mrs. Ball died in 1844. In 
 the summer of 1845, the brethren left 
 Hong-Kong, and resumed the partially sus- 
 pended missionary operations at Canton. 
 
 In 1845, Mr. James Bridgman, who had 
 been connected with the Mission High School, 
 became an assistant missionary of the Board, 
 and was subsequently ordained at Canton. 
 
 In June, 1846, Dr. Bridgman was married 
 to Miss Eliza Gillett, a member of the American 
 Episcopal Mission ; and Dr. Ball was subse- 
 quently married to Miss Robertson from Scot- 
 land. On the return of the missionaries to 
 Canton, a strong prejudice against foreign 
 teachers was found to exist ; but in the hos- 
 pital there was an encouraging field of labor, 
 where the word might be sometimes addressed 
 to 100 souls. The missionaries, however, were 
 much restricted, being obliged mostly to live 
 within the limits of me foreign factories. In 
 
 1846, a party, consisting of Messrs. Bridgman, 
 Pohlmau, and Bonney, with Mrs. Bridgman, 
 while passing under a bridge in a boat, nar- 
 rowly escaped with their lives from a shower 
 of stones thrown upon them from the bridge, 
 by an infuriated mob. Mr. Bonney had for- 
 merly been a teacher in the Morrison School ; 
 but in 1846, he became an assistant mission- 
 ary of the Board, and has since been a devoted 
 laborer, in preaching, teaching, and distribut- 
 ing books. 
 
 Dr. Ball superintended the Chinese printing, 
 dispensed medicine statedly to the sick, kept a 
 boarding-school of eleven pupils, and conduct- 
 ed a Chinese service in his own house^ on the 
 Sabbath, where an interesting audience con- 
 vened. Dr. Bridgman's time was divided be- 
 tween the Repository, the revision of the 
 Scriptures, the preaching of the Word at the 
 hospital, and occasionally to Dr. Ball's con- 
 gregation, and the instruction of an interest- 
 ing Bible class, two of whom gave increasing 
 evidence of piety, and five of whom desired to 
 profess Christianity. Mrs. Bridgman had a 
 promising school of Chinese youth under her 
 tuition. Rev. Dr. Parker having accepted 
 the appointment of Secretary of Legation to 
 the United States Embassy, his connection 
 with the Board was consequently dissolved in 
 
 1847. Almost from the first the Hospital had 
 been sustained independently of the Board. 
 His labors continue much as heretofore. 
 
CHINA. 
 
 273 
 
 Dr. Bridgraan thus speaks of the moral char- 
 acter of the people, after 16 years continuous 
 residence in China : " The longer I live in this 
 country the more do I see of the wickedness 
 of this people ; the more do I see the necessity 
 of great efforts to bring them to a knowledge 
 of the truth. The great bulk of the people 
 know not God nor bis truth. They are the 
 willing servants of sin ; they love unrighteous- 
 ness, and there is no wickedness which they 
 will not commit. All that Paul said of the 
 ancient heathen is true of the Chinese, and 
 true to an extent that is dreadful. Their in- 
 most soul, their very conscience seems to be 
 seared, dead, so insensible, that they are, as re- 
 gards a future life, like the beasts that per- 
 ish. It often fills my heart with inexpressi- 
 ble sorrow to see what I see, to hear what I 
 hear. It is truly a great valley of death, of 
 putrefaction, of living death. No painting, 
 no imagination can portray, and lay open be- 
 fore the Christian world, the awful sins, the 
 horrible abominations which fill the land." 
 The writer's experience of about 18 years 
 among them confirms his description. 
 
 With the approval of the Committee, Mr. 
 Williams returned to this country in 1846, 
 and while here published his " Middle King- 
 dom," one of the most valuable works that 
 have been issued upon that country. He re- 
 turned to his post in 1848. 
 
 In March, 1847, Dr. Ball secured a house by 
 the river side, about a mile and a half below 
 the factory, and there soon after opened pub- 
 lic worship in Chinese, with an audience of 
 from 60 to 100. In July a meeting for females 
 was commenced by Mrs. Ball and her daugh- 
 ter, now Mrs. Hopper, which was at times 
 attended by 30 or 40. This movement was 
 an important advance in regard to missionary 
 liberty. 
 
 The Report for 1848 acknowledges the print- 
 ing of 10,000 copies of tracts by Milne, Abeel, 
 and Afa, at the expense of Rev. Dr. Parker. 
 I'he word of life was everywhere dispensed 
 among the people. One member of Dr. Bridg- 
 man's Bible-class had been baptized, and ano- 
 ther gave^uch evidence of piety. On the 1st 
 of June, 1847, he removed to Shanghai, to aid 
 in the revision of the New Testament. Since 
 that time the general course of missionary 
 labor has been essentially the same from year 
 to year. The missionaries in that field have 
 been enabled to maintain their ground, and 
 gradually, by private teaching, by the diligent 
 preaching of the Gospel in stated places and by 
 the wayside, by the healing of the sick, and the 
 manifestation of a uniform spirit of love to the 
 people, to dissipate their bitter prejudices, and 
 win their confidence and respect. For a time 
 Mr. Bonney labored with much encouragement 
 atWhampoa, and widely preached and dis- 
 persed among the numerous villages the word 
 
 '■ ilvation. Dr. Ball's school, in 1849, num- 
 1 14 boys, who, in addition to the study 
 18 
 
 of their own classics, were instructed in geo- 
 graphy, astronomy, natural philosophy, and 
 the truths of the Bible, through the medium 
 of the Chinese. The Chinese Repository was 
 suspended at the close of 1850, after having 
 reached its 19th volume. In December, 1850, 
 this mission was afflicted by the death of Rev. 
 James G. Bridgman, occasioned by a wound 
 inflicted upon himself in a fit of temporary in- 
 sanity, connected with greatly impaired health. 
 He survived the wound but a few days. In 
 1850 Mrs. Bridgman had an interesting girls' 
 school of 20 scholars at Shanghai, 12 of whom 
 were boarders. In 1852 two Chinese at Can- 
 ton are reported as furnishing good evidence 
 of piety, and Dr. Ball's school had amounted 
 to 20 pupils. 
 
 On the 15th of March, 1852, the mission was 
 reinforced by the arrival of Rev. Daniel Yroo- 
 man and wife. Rev. Frederick Brewster and 
 wife arrived at Canton, January, 1853, and on 
 the 27th of the same month our beloved bro- 
 ther died of the small pox. His last words 
 were, " Trusting in Jesus." The afflicted widow 
 remains in the field. Early in 1852, Dr. Bridg- 
 man visited this country on account of his 
 health, after an absence of about 23 years ; 
 and on the 11th of October, he re-embarked 
 at New York for China. Dr. Bridgman is 
 still at Shanghai, engaged in the revision of 
 the Old Testament. On the 12th of September, 
 1853, the native helper, Theen Fae, died in 
 the hopes of the Gospel. Lai Sun, the other 
 native helper, has left the mission. Mr. Wil- 
 liams, besides his other duties, has performed 
 a valuable service to the cause in the prepara- 
 tion of the Easy Lessons in Chinese, and a 
 Chinese and English Vocabulary of the Can- 
 ton dialect. In May, 1853, with the concur- 
 rence of the mission, he left for Japan, as 
 interpreter to Commodore Perry, and returned 
 in August. Dr. Ball's health was feeble, but he 
 was still engaged in the way of tours for tract 
 distribution, trying to regain his strength, and 
 to extend the savor of Christ's name ; and 
 Messrs. Bonney and Yrooman had made a 
 tour up the river, 36 miles, for tract distribu- 
 tion, and were well received. Since 1846, 
 14,257,690 pages of tracts and scriptures, be- 
 sides 225,120 volumes of religious matter, are 
 reported as printed by this mission ; and this 
 probably falls much short of the entire amount 
 of printing done by it during the past eight 
 years. How much printed matter has been 
 scattered far and near by the mission since its 
 commencement in 1830, we have no means of 
 determining. It must have been very great. 
 In the religious movement connected with the 
 present revolution, we are probably now seeing 
 the effects both of the preaching of the Gospel 
 at Canton, and the distribution of the printed 
 page. By the grace of God this mission, in 
 the midst of great difficulties and discourage- 
 ments, has labored and has not fainted. A 
 brighter day shall yet dawn on it from on high. 
 
274 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 Amoij.—'lUi^ inijiijion began with the arrival 
 at Amoy of Rev. David Abecl, in February, 
 1842, while the place was yet occupied by the 
 English troops. Soon after his arrival he was 
 joined by Dr. Cumming, a self-supporting mis- 
 sionary from this country, who continued in 
 that field, devoting himself to hospital practice, 
 combined with religious instruction, until his 
 return to the United States, February 10th, 
 1847. In January, 1844, two hongs were 
 rented in Ariioy, one of which was used as a 
 chapel, and the other for the in-door patients. 
 The apartments above the chapel were occu- 
 pied by Dr. Gumming. Mr. Abeel writes : 
 Sabbath, January 28th, the first religious ser- 
 vices were held in the new chapel, and about 
 70 united with us in worshiping the true God. 
 On Mr. Pohlman's arrival in June following, 
 from 60 to 100 daily attended the preaching 
 of the Gospel in the hospital. On the 21st of 
 March, a Bible class was commenced with 12 
 attendants. Mr. Abeel, besides his English 
 services, labored assiduously and successfully 
 among the Chinese in the way of preaching 
 and tract distribution ; and he is still remem- 
 bered by the people in Amoy with afiection. 
 He exerted a salutary influence among the 
 high officers. The late Lieutenant-Governor 
 of Fuhchau makes grateful mention of him 
 as an assistant in the preparation of his valua- 
 ble Geography. On the 22d of June, 1844, 
 Bev. Messrs. Doty and Pohlman, from Borneo, 
 joined the mission with their families, being 
 obliged to reside for a time on the island of 
 Koolongsoo, opposite Amoy. Their families 
 suffered much fron»- sickness, and a promising 
 son of Mr. Doty, aged 6 years, was committed 
 to the grave. Rev. Dr. Abeel visited Hong- 
 Kong in August, 1844, for the benefit of his 
 health. 
 
 In September following, Dr. Abeel returned 
 to Amoy still feeble, and after a series of 
 boat excursions in the vicinity of the city, for 
 the double object of publishing the Gospel, and 
 improving his health, he finally, as the only 
 means of prolonging his life, embarked for the 
 United States, and arrived at New York on 
 the 3d of April, 1845, about 15 years from his 
 original embarkation for the heathen world. 
 He closed his valuable and eventful life at 
 Albany, N. Y., September 4th, 1846. His 
 remains repose in Greenwood Cemetery, beneath 
 a tasteful monument, in a locality commanding 
 a fine view of the sea, on whose bosom he had, 
 for Christ's sake, so extensively journeyed. 
 His works do follow him. Mrs. Pohlman 
 died on the 30th of September, 1845, and 
 Mrs. Doty, on the 5th of the following month. 
 Both were faithful to Christ in life, happy in 
 death, and each left behind her an afflicted 
 husband and two children. Rev. Mr. Doty, 
 with these motherless children, left Amoy, 
 November 12th, 1845, and arrived at New 
 York on the 6th of March, 1846. 
 
 December 16th, 1845, the first meeting for 
 
 Chinese females was held at Rev. William 
 Young's, when upwards of 40 adults were ])re» 
 sent. The missionaries were treated with 
 marked politeness by the government. In 
 December, 1845, a new chapel was opened for 
 dailj7 meetings, and on the 5th of January fol- 
 lowing the first Chinese monthly concert was 
 held, being a union meeting of the Amoy Pro- 
 testant missionaries. The morning of the day 
 was devoted to prayer, and the afternoon to 
 communicating missionary intelligence in Chi- 
 nese. 
 
 In April, 1846, two aged men were baptized 
 by Mr. Pohlman, being the first fruits of this 
 mission. They received their first religioua 
 impressions from the preaching of Mr. Abeel. 
 During the absence of Mr. Doty, Mr. Pohlman 
 enjoyed the cooperating labors of brethren of 
 the American Presbyterian Board, and of the 
 London Missionary Society. Near the close 
 of 1846, he and Rev. Mr. Brown visited 32 
 out of 136 villages situated on the island of 
 Amoy. They were well received, and preached 
 the word to large and attentive audiences, and 
 distributed books and tracts to the old men, 
 schoolmasters, and other influential persons. 
 Rev. Mr. Doty and wife, and Rev. John Yan- 
 nest Talmage reached Amoy on the 19 th of 
 August, 1847. In March, 1848, Mr. Doty 
 writes, " On the 5th instant, our regular com- 
 munion season occurred, when two more from 
 among this people, father and son, were ad- 
 mitted to the table of the Lord. It is about 
 a year since the father first heard the truth 
 from our evangelist. His attention seems soon 
 to have been arrested, and what he learned he 
 communicated to his son. The evangelist here 
 mentioned was originally from the Kwangtung 
 province, and about 1841 emigrated to Siam. 
 There he was long employed by the writer as 
 a teacher, and with him in social prayer, he 
 learned to bow the knee to our Lord Jesus 
 Christ, and by him was there baptized. After 
 his conversion, he was employed by myself as 
 an assistant in publishing among the Chinese 
 the glorious Gospel. In August, 1846, he left 
 with me for China, and at the desii^ of Rev. 
 Mr. Pohlman, and in accordance wiM my own' 
 advice, he became connected with the Amo}- 
 mission, in March, 1847. He was commonly 
 called U Sim, or the teacher U. Many othei 
 cheering facts are mentioned as to the state 
 of feeling among the attendants on Christian 
 worship, indicatmg the presence of the Holj 
 Spirit. 
 
 In June, 1847, a promising day-school wa.« 
 opened by Rev. Mr. Peet, formerly with the 
 writer in Siam, and subsequently his mission- 
 ary associate in Fuhchau. Rev. Mr. Pohlmar 
 gives an interesting account of two excur- 
 sions, of two days each, made in March and[ 
 September, 1847, to Chiang-chau, where h6 
 was politely received, his preaching listened tc 
 by large and attentive assemblies, and boob 
 received with eagerness. Bundles of 6elected|| 
 
CHINA. 
 
 275 
 
 books were sent to the officers and literary 
 ira?n of the city. The walls of Chiang-chau 
 arc about 5 miles in circuit, and in good pre- 
 servation, and this city, together with the val 
 ley, 10 miles wide and 15 long, in which it is 
 situated, is supposed to contain about 1,000,000 
 cf souls. Mr. Pohlman regarded it as a pro- 
 mising and inviting field. Bible "class instruc 
 tion, begun in Amoy in March, 1844, still con- 
 tinued. In July, 1847, the class in the New 
 Testament numbered about 25. In 1846 a 
 second Bible class was formed for the study of 
 the Old Testament. On Tuesday afternoon 
 was a meeting for Chinese women, which was 
 punctually attended by many of the same per- 
 sons. The cliurch members, in their week-day 
 meetings, were active in exhorting their be- 
 nighted countrymen. A daily meeting was 
 held by the teacher U, in a house standing on 
 the site of the intended new place of worship. 
 At times the room was crowded to overflow- 
 ing, and a lively attention was given to his 
 exhortations. On Thursday evening is a na- 
 tive prayer meeting ; and a prayer-meeting 
 Ereparatory to their monthly communion is 
 eld on the preceding Saturday. 
 
 On the 19th of December, 1848, Eev. Mr. 
 Pohlman left Amoy to accompany his sister, 
 then in feeble health, to Hong-Kong. His 
 object having been accomplished, he embarked 
 for Amoy, Jan. 2d, 1849, in the schooner 
 Omega. On the morning of Jan. 5th, about 
 2 o'clock, she struck on Breaker's Point, about 
 half way to Amoy. The sea rolled over her, 
 and Mr. Pohlman and several others were 
 drowned by the capsizing of the boat in which 
 they hoped to reach shore. This is the first 
 instance of the loss of life by shipwreck of any 
 missionary of the Board. His death was an 
 unexpected and heavy affliction to the mission, 
 and the missionary cause. The health of Miss 
 Pohlman, which had received a severe shock 
 from her brother's sudden death, required the 
 return of Mr. Talmage with her to America. 
 They left Amoy, March 25, 1849, and arrived 
 at New York on the 23d of August. 
 
 The mission chapel, the site for which had 
 been secured by Mr. Pohlman, and in the 
 building of which he had been active, was 
 dedicated on Sabbath, Feb. 11, 1849. It is a 
 neat brick edifice, one story high, with a flat 
 roof, 36 feet wide and 68 long, including a 
 verandah 10 feet wide, and will seat from 350 
 to 400 persons. On each side of the pulpit 
 are apartments for females, where they may 
 hear the Gospel without the violation of Chi- 
 nese custom. Its completion was followed by 
 a large increase of attendants upon the 
 preached word. 
 
 July 29, 1849, a mother and her two sons, 
 who, amid deep trials, had manifested great 
 Christian steadfastness, were baptized and ad- 
 mitted to church-fellowship. The occasion 
 was one of deep interest to God's people. Of 
 the church members, Mr. Doty writes ; " They 
 
 appear to be praying, growing Christians, 
 walking in the ways of the Lord, and ex- 
 periencing the joy of the Holy Spirit's 
 presence. 
 
 Kev. Mr. Talmage, with Mrs. Talmage, ar- 
 rived at Amoy, on his return, July 16, 1850. 
 On the 22d of December following, he preach- 
 ed his first regular sermon at the opening of a 
 place of worship connected with his own house. 
 The room, which will seat about IQO, was 
 crowded. The regular attendance here and in 
 the chapel on the Sabbath, is from 150 to 200. 
 
 May 19, 1850, Mr. Doty baptized his infant 
 son, and three children of native converts, being 
 the first instance of the baptism of a child of 
 a native Christian in connection with this mis- 
 sion. Two men and three women were receiv- 
 ed into the church on the last Sabbath of July, 
 1850, and on the last Sabbath of March, 1851, 
 three others, a man and two women. The na- 
 tive evangelist was daily occupied in convers- 
 ing with inquirers in the chapel, in holding 
 meetings, and in occasional tours to other 
 places. Another church member was acting 
 as colporteur in the city, under the direction 
 of Dr. Young, of the Free Church of Scotland. 
 Early in 1850, the day-school was transferred 
 by Mr. Doty to Dr. Young, owing to the press- 
 ure of more important duties. The Eoman 
 letters had begun to be used in preparing books 
 for the native Christian females. 
 
 The attendance at the chapel was from 150 
 to perhaps 300. Weekly female prayer-meet- 
 ings were held both by Mrs. Doty and Mrs. 
 Talmage, with encouraging results. Including 
 the three baptized in March, ten were add- 
 ed to the church in 18M, making with the 
 native evangelist, 19 church members, one 
 having died in May. The trials of the native 
 Christians from poverty and other causes have 
 been great ; but they appear to be growing in 
 grace. In 1852 two young men were admit- 
 ted into the church, who were called to suffer 
 for Christ's sake. Two others selected from a 
 large number of inquirers, who had been exam- 
 ined during the preceding month, were received 
 into the church. There was unusual evidence of 
 the presence of the Holy Spirit. At the close 
 of that year, the number of communicants was 
 21 ; and from the beginning, the whole number 
 of admissions to the church had been thirty- 
 three. During the year, 12 children of church 
 members had been baptized and two Christian 
 marriages celebrated. A monthly collection, 
 originating among themselves, is taken up for 
 the assistance of needy church members, amountr 
 ing to about $40 a year. " The first we knew 
 of it," says Mr. Doty, " was from being asked 
 if we would not ' join in giving something.' " 
 The mission pleads for additional laborers. 
 
 In May, 1853, the mission suffered a great 
 loss in the death of U Sien, the native evangel- 
 ist. He had been sent with a Christian col- 
 porteur to Chiang-chau to commence a new 
 station. Arriving just before the insurrection 
 
276 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 broke out iu that city, he was snspected of 
 bcint? associated with the insurgouts, and was 
 takon by tlie imporialiata and beheaded. The 
 colporteur narrowly ascaned with his life. The 
 writer saw U Sien for tJie last time in Dec. 
 1852. Uc trusts that one, in whose conversion 
 he was an humble instrument, is now in heav- 
 en. He was much esteemed for his piety, good 
 judgment, and Christian activity. Earlv in 
 June, during one of those days when the blood 
 of civil war profusely flowed in the neighbor- 
 hood of the chapel, four young men were bap- 
 tized and added to the little flock, making six 
 added during the first half of 1853, and 26 the 
 total number of surviving church members. 
 
 FuJidiau. — The mission at Fuhchau was 
 commenced in 1847. In accordance with the 
 earnest wishes and advice of the Canton mis- 
 sion, Rev. Stephen Johnson, formerly stationed 
 in Siam, left Canton, Nov. 23, 1846, and pro- 
 ceeded by the way of Hong-kong and Amoy 
 to Fuhchau, where he arrived January 2, 
 
 1847. His first work was the study of the lo- 
 cal dialect. After about six months he com- 
 menced religious services in his own house, on 
 the Sabbath, beside daily worship with his 
 domestics, making the study of the Fuhchau 
 dialect his main business. At his house he 
 had frequent Chinese visitors, to whom he dis- 
 tributed tracts, and made known Christ cruci- 
 fied for sinners. In September, 1847, he was 
 joined by Rev. Lyman B. Peet and wife, with 
 whom it was his privilege to be associated in 
 Siam. On the 7th of May, 1848, the mission 
 was fm-ther reinforced by the arrival of Messrs. 
 Seneca Cummings and Caleb C. Baldwin, and 
 their wives, and Rer. William Richards, son 
 of the distinguished missionary of that name 
 at the Sandwich Islands. For the first two 
 brethren, houses in eligible situations were soon 
 erected. For tlie first two years of their resi- 
 dence in Fuhchau, the study of the Chinese 
 was necessarily the main business of the newly 
 arrived brethren. The first three houses of 
 the mission were on Tong-chieu, a small island 
 in the Min, about three miles from the south 
 gate of the city proper ; and the fourth was 
 on the south bank of the river, about a quar- 
 ter of a mile from the island, on the main 
 thoroughfare, with a commanding view. This 
 is occupied by Mr. Cummings. In June, 
 
 1848, besides stated Sabbath worship iu his 
 house, with an intelligent audience of about 
 thirty, Mr. Johnson opened a school and com- 
 menced preaching and tract distribution in a 
 hired house, which he had fitted up for the 
 purpose, standing in the midst of a dense po- 
 pulation, on the south bank of the river, and 
 about two miles from his residence. The au- 
 diences were at first so tumultuous, that the 
 attempt to open or close the meetings with 
 prayer was not deemed pnident. Gradually 
 the people were more orderly and respectful, 
 and the audiences numbered about sixty souls. 
 For the accommodation of the laboring classes, 
 
 evening meetings were frequently held, with 
 apparently good effect. Mr. Peet secured a 
 commodious chapel near the island and on the 
 great thoroughfare, a part of which he appro- 
 priated to a Chinese school, which has gene- 
 rally numbered about twenty scholars. In tlie 
 summer of 1849, Mr. Johnson's health com- 
 pelled him to visit the northern ports. At 
 Ningpo, on the 17th of September, he was 
 married to Miss Caroline Silmer of Stock- 
 holm, Sweden. She was then an agent of the 
 London Ladies' Society for the Education of 
 Females in the East, and had been for about 
 two years a teacher in Miss Mary Aldersey's 
 Female Seminary, in that city. After visiting 
 Shanghai, he returned with Mrs: J. to Fuh- 
 chau, on the 8th December, 1849. On the 
 31st of May, 1850, the mission was further re- 
 inforced by the arrival of Rev. Justus Doo- 
 little and wife. Mr. Johnson, soon after his 
 return, resumed his usual labors. Ilis chapel 
 was about a mile from his residence, on the 
 way to the scene of his former labors. Messrs. 
 Cummings, Baldwin and Richards were now 
 making some efforts in the preaching of the 
 word and the distribution of tracts. In Sei> 
 tember, 1850, Rev. Mr. Richards was attacked 
 with hemorrhage of the lungs, and by advice 
 of his brethren and physician, he soon after 
 embarked for Canton. Physicians there re- 
 commending a long voyage, he embarked for 
 the United States early in March, but was not 
 allowed to reach this country. He calmly 
 and cheerfully breathed out his life on the 5 th 
 of June, and his remains were committed to 
 the deep, south of St. Helena. Mr. Richards 
 had made great progress in the Chinese, con- 
 sidering the, short time he had been in the 
 field, and his prospects of future usefulness 
 were bright. His heart was in his work, and 
 he labored perhaps beyond his strength. Just 
 before he was laid aside, he performed a valu- 
 able service to the mission in securing, after 
 much labor, trial and patience, the building 
 lot at Po-na-San^, now occupied by Messrs.. 
 Baldwin and Doolittle. There the writer erect-, 
 ed the house now occupied by Mr. Baldwin, 
 and moved into it early in 1851. Mr. Doolit- 
 tle preceded him. It is near the great tho- 
 roughfare leading from the island to the city, 
 and nearly midway between the two places. 
 
 In November, 1850, Mr. Baldwin opened a 
 school and chapel on the island, and with some 
 interruption from ill-health, this continued to 
 be the central point of his labors, till near the 
 close of 1851. In April of that year, Mr. 
 Cummings commenced public worship in Chi- 
 nese, in the court of his nouse, with an encou- 
 raging attendance, and in May opened a day 
 school for girls, which has since continued. 
 Mr. Peet long had a Chinese service in the 
 court of his residence, on Sabbath morning, 
 which, with his Chinese school, has been trans*' 
 ferred to the house on the island, once occu^ 
 pied by the writer. Some months after Mr; 
 
CHINA. 
 
 277 
 
 J olmsou's removal to Po-na-Sang, he secured 
 an eligible site for a chapel near his house, and 
 on tlie main street, and built a small and sim- 
 ple place of worship, large enough for about 
 180 hearers. There he opened a school, and 
 continued the preaching of the Gospel, both in 
 season and out of season, as his health would 
 allow, up to the time of his return to this coun- 
 try, December 8, 1852. His school was not 
 permanent. After its suspension, the school 
 room was for a time occupied by a flourishing 
 'school, gathered by Mr. Doolittle, which also 
 was dispersed by the alarm caused by the seiz- 
 ure and imprisonment of the Eev. Mr. Wel- 
 ton's school teachers, in April, 1852. In the 
 spring of that year, Mr. Doolittle procured a 
 site, and soon after erected a chapel on the 
 main street, about a quarter of a mile nearer 
 the city than that built by Mr. Johnson. 
 These chapels need only to be opened and or- 
 dinarily there is a good number of hearers, 
 sometimes more that a hundred. On the 27th 
 of May, Mr. Doolittle commenced religious 
 exercises in Chinese, in his chapel. During 
 the first half of 1852, Mr. Cummings erected a 
 chapel near his house, on the main street, and 
 commenced Chinese services in it, with en- 
 couraging prospects. Mr. Baldwin occupies 
 the chapel in which Mr. Johnson formerly 
 ministered. Rev. Charles Hartwell and wife 
 aiTived at Fuhchau on the 19th of June, 1853. 
 The four elder brethren now in this field, have 
 each chapels in eligible positions for securing 
 hearers, and without hindrance from the go- 
 vernment or people, can give themselves on 
 the Sabbath, and during the week, to the 
 preaching of the Gospel, and the judicious dis- 
 tribution of books. By their exemplary lives 
 and pure doctrines, a general and happy im- 
 pression, favorable to Christianity, has been 
 produced upon the popular mind. It is hoped 
 that some knowledge of the fundamental truths 
 of the Gospel has been extensively difiused, 
 though none have yet come out decidedly on 
 the Lord's side. Their religious meetings are 
 becoming more orderly and solemn, and many 
 of the youth have been carefully instructed in 
 the Scriptures. Truth is operating like leaven, 
 quietly among the masses, yet we trust power- 
 fully. The brethren here have, during the in- 
 surrection, remained at their posts, and stead- 
 ily prosecuted their work ; and the missionar- 
 ies are generally recognized as the teachers of 
 a holy religion, blameless and harmless in 
 their lives. The mission has four day schools, 
 containing about 100 scholars. Books are ex- 
 tensively prepared in the vulgar language, 
 using the Chinese characters, as symbols of its 
 sounds, when necessary. In Fuhchau from the 
 first, there has been great harmony and love 
 among the missionaries of the difierent boards, 
 being united in their English preaching on the 
 Sabbath, in their communion services, the 
 monthly cQpcert, and in a weekly prayer meet- 
 ing. To the writer, the recollection of these 
 
 precious seasons is sweet, and he would rejoice 
 again to participate in them, and in the work 
 of preaching Christ to dying souls in Fuhchau, 
 should Providence please to grant him this bles- 
 sed privilege. May this mission, which he 
 in weakness was permitted to commence, be 
 abundantly blest as the instrument of salvation 
 to the perishing. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Cantoa . 
 Amoy, . 
 Fuhchau, 
 
 Totals 
 
 1830 
 1842 
 1847 
 
 10 1 13 1 9 1 26 2 30 4 
 
 Southern Baptist Convention — Canton. — 
 This mission, which has been subject to great 
 changes, was commenced by Rev. I. J. Roberts, 
 in May, 1844. Between his arrival in China 
 in 1836, and the commencement of his labors 
 in Canton, his efforts were mainly directed to 
 the spiritual good of the Chinese in Macao 
 and Hong-kong. Shortly after entering Can- 
 ton, he gathered a church of 6 or 7 members, 
 two or three of whom were afterwards useful, 
 as assistants in publishing the Gospel. Early 
 in 1845, Messrs. Shuck and Devan came to 
 Canton. Mr. Shuck shortly after left with his 
 children for home, and Mrs. Devan died in 
 that city, Oct. 18, 1846, and Dr. Devan, after 
 a temporary sojourn in Hong-kong, returned 
 to America. Messrs. Pearcy and Clopton, 
 with their wives, arrived at Canton, in Oct. 
 1846, and Mr. Clopton died July 7, 1847, and 
 his widow, with her infant, soon after returned. 
 Rev. Francis Johnson arrived July, 1847, but 
 his health failing, he returned, and reached 
 New York in December, 1849. Rev. B. W. 
 Whilden and wife arrived at Canton early in 
 1849, where Mrs. Whilden died, Feb. 20, 1850, 
 and Mr. Whilden the same year embarked for 
 the United States. Rev. Mr. Pearcy and 
 wife, by reason of ill-health, left this station 
 for Shanghai in 1848. Thus, among all the 
 missionaries of this society, with the exception 
 of Mr. Roberts, none have been long enough 
 in Fuhchau to become able preachers in the 
 local dialect. I^e has been a diligent laborer, 
 and in his correspondence, eight persons are 
 named as having received Christian baptism. 
 In 1849, he visited the United States, where 
 he was married ; and in 1850, he resumed his 
 
 ^>'^'ft? THC 
 
 \i^S%k 
 
278 
 
 cniNA. 
 
 work in Canton. In the Society's Report for 
 1853, his dismission is announced. lie, how 
 ever, remains in Canton, prosecuting his work 
 as usual. The insurgent chief is understood 
 to have been for a time under his religious 
 instruction, and to have recently desired a 
 visit from him, which he attempted to make, 
 but without success. From an article headed 
 " Canton Mission," ia the Home and Foreign 
 Journal for January, 1854, Rev. B. W. Whil- 
 dcn appears to have resumed his labors in that 
 city. A Chinese school, containing 20 pupils, 
 is mentioned, and Yong Seen Sang, who was 
 long employed by Rev. Mr. Shuck, was then 
 laboring as an evangelist in Canton. The 
 Report for 1854 speaks of serious embarrass- 
 ments in this mission ; but the missionaries 
 speak hopefully of future prospects. 
 
 Shanghai. — Rev. J. L. Shuck and.wife em- 
 barked for China in 1835, and Macao and 
 Houg-kong became the scenes of his subse- 
 quent labors. In this latter settlement, Mrs. 
 Shuck, a highly esteemed missionary, died 
 Nov. 27, 1844," and Mr. Shuck, with his chil- 
 dren, soon after returned home. He reached 
 Shanghai, on his return to China with his 
 second wife and younger daughter, in October, 
 1847, where they were welcomed by Rev. 
 Messrs. Yates and Tobey, who had a little pre- 
 ceded them. From the arrival of these breth- 
 ren dates the commencement of this mission. 
 Dr. J. L. James and wife, destined to Shang- 
 hai, were drowned in Houg-kong harbor, 
 April 15, 1848, by the capsizing of 'the 
 schooner Paradox, in which they had taken 
 passage at Canton. Rev. Geo. Pearcy and 
 wife, formerly at Canton, arrived at Shanghai 
 Nov. 18, 1848, where they have since con- 
 tinued to labor. Like the brethren of other 
 societies who liad preceded them, they found 
 Shanghai a promising field for Christian effort, 
 and, with a knowledge of the local dialect, 
 they found no diflBculty in obtaining hearers. 
 Besides the frequent ministry of the word in a 
 smaller chapel within the walls, the brethren 
 early made arrangements for the erection, 
 within the city proper, of a substantial and 
 spacious Christian edifice. This church was 
 opened for worship on the 3d of March, 1850. 
 The house is a brick edifice, with a belfry, and 
 will accommodate upwards of 700 persons. 
 Occasionally, it has been well filled, and usually 
 some hundreds are present. In 1853, 6 schools 
 are reported as under the care of the mission, 
 containing between 70 and 80 scholars. 
 There is one out-station, having a small chapel 
 and a school-house. While the brethren much 
 value Scripture and tract distribution, they 
 devote themselves chiefly to the preaching of 
 the Gospel in the city, and in the large and 
 numerous villages in the surrounding country. 
 
 On the 2d of September, 1849, three Chi- i 
 nese were baptized. A recent letter states nese pupils was about 30, between the ages of 
 the interesting fact of the baptism of the son 12 and 18. In 1852, Dr. Moncrij^fF returne" 
 of an insurgent chief, a youth of 18, who was I to England, and resigned his contiection wit 
 
 considered as giving uncommon evidence of 
 piety. Mr. Tobey has returned to this coun- 
 try on account of ill-health. He arrived at 
 New York, May 29, 1850. Rev. Mr. Shuck, 
 having been suddenlv bereaved of his Avife, 
 late in 1852, returned with his family to the 
 United States. G. W. Burton, M.D., sailed 
 from New York, Dec. 12, 1853, on his return 
 to Shanghai, accompanied by Mrs. Burton. 
 By the last accounts, the missionaries were 
 much encouraged, though living amid the rav- 
 ages of war. The report for 1854 says, with 
 reference tp this mission, " At no time in its 
 former history, has the encouragement to per- 
 severe been stronger. The church at Shang- 
 hai have been permitted to receive into their 
 fellowship ai^ interesting young man, by the 
 name of Asou, who gives satisfactory evidence 
 of a change of heart. This young man Avaa 
 nearly related to the southern king, one of the 
 insurgent chiefs, and was on his way to Nan- 
 king to join the army. Having found protec- 
 tion in the families of the missionaries, it was 
 soon ascertained that he was a regular reader 
 of the Scriptures, and daily worshiped God. 
 He was more particularly instructed by them ; 
 and having professed faith in Christ, and a 
 readiness to obey him, he was baptized and 
 received into the church. Rev. Mr. Shuck 
 has taken a dismission, in order to enter into 
 the service of the domestic Board, among the 
 Chinese in California. 
 
 Church Missionary Society. — Hon^-kwig. — 
 This Society commenced operations m China 
 in 1844, Rev. Messrs. Geo. Smith and T. 
 McClotchie having arrived at Hong-kong on 
 the 25th of Sept. of that year. In 1846, Mr. 
 Smith returned to England ; and having been 
 appointed Bishop of Victoria, with the super- 
 vision of the missions in China, he again sailed 
 for Hong-kong, Nov. 1849, accompanied by 
 Rev. T. F. Gough, Wm. Welton, E. T. R. Mon- 
 crieff, D.D., and Mr. R. D. Jackson. The par- 
 ty arrived March 29, 1850. April 21, Mr. 
 Jackson was ordained in the cathedral at Hong- 
 kong, and soon after proceeded with Mr. Welton 
 to Fuhchau. Rev. Mr. Gough joined Rev. 
 Messrs. Cobbold and Russell at Ningpo. Rev. 
 Dr. Moncrieff entered upon his duties in what 
 is now called St. Paul's College. It then con- 
 tained 30 pupils, three of whom had been 
 members of the Morrison school. Chinese is 
 the medium of instruction. At the end of the. 
 year there were only 17 students. As early 
 Jan., 1852, the new buildings at St. Paull 
 college were completed, in which were 
 residences of the bishop, the warden of tt 
 college, and a full staff of tutors and student 
 This institution originated in the missionar 
 zeal of the Rev. Vincent Stanton, former char 
 lain at Hong-kong. About 60 persons resic 
 in the college building. The number of CI 
 
CHINA. 
 
 279 
 
 college. At the close of that year a new 
 ^llege building was opened. The number of 
 
 pupils was fluctuating. 
 I Shanghai. — This station was commenced by 
 ;v. T. McClotchie on his arrival, April 15, 
 "1845. By diligent application to the study of 
 the dialect, he was soon able to make himself 
 understood by the people. Shortly after his 
 arrival he secured a house within the city 
 walls. In less than a year he commenced a 
 Chinese service, and soon after was much en- 
 couraged by the interest manifested by his 
 crowded audiences. As early as May 29, 
 1847, he had translated the Morning Service 
 and the Collects into the Shanghai dialect, 
 through the aid of Gutzlaif 's translation of the 
 Church Liturgy. On the 17th of April, 1848, 
 he was joined by Rev. "W. Farmer and his 
 wife. Mr. Farmer was, however, soon obliged 
 to quit the field, on account of his health, and 
 he did not survive to reach his native country. 
 Early in 1850, the mission church, situated 
 in the city proper, was completed. It will 
 accommodate 300 persons. In the course of 
 
 1851, three members of Mr. McClotchie's 
 blind class were baptized, having long been 
 the subjects of Christian instruction. Rev. J. 
 Hobson arrived in 1849, expecting to join this 
 mission, but the sudden death by drowning of 
 Rev. J. Lowder, the English chaplain, while 
 bathing in the sea, led to his appointment to 
 that office, in which his society concurred. 
 Mr. McClotchie's residence is now near that 
 of the American Episcopal establishment, 
 about 3 miles below the city, on the river's 
 bank. In the Report of the China mission for 
 1853, it is stated that, through the eflforts of 
 Rev. John Hobson, a commodious educational 
 establishment, costing $5,416, contributed by 
 the English congregation, had been erected 
 and made over to the society. The school was 
 opened in December, 1852, numbering 20 
 pupils, who had been some time under Mr. 
 Hobson's instruction. Two ordained students 
 have been appointed to this station, one of 
 whom takes cliarge of the school. In July, 
 
 1852, two other members of the blind class 
 had been baptized, one of them a woman. 
 The class numbered 18 members. This class 
 has been aided by Mr. McClotchie to the 
 weekly amount of about 7 cents each. He 
 gives them stated religious instruction. 
 
 Ningpo. — This station was commenced by 
 Rev. Messrs. R. H. Cobbold and W. A. Rus- 
 sell on their arrival in May, 1848. After a 
 short time, they obtained a house within the 
 walls, the basement of which they fitted up as 
 a temporary place of worship. On the first 
 Sabbath in 1849, they commenced worship in 
 Chinese. In the course of the year, a small 
 chapel, with school-room and teachers'-room, 
 was opened in a densely-populated portion of 
 the city. The congregations were fluctuating 
 at the new chapel, averaging about 80. Rev. 
 T. F, Gough joined the mission in 1850. In 
 
 April, 1851, two persons of hopeful piety re- 
 ceived Christian baptism. The Roman letters 
 were employed in writing the vulgar tongue 
 with apparent advantage. Early in 1852, 
 Rev. Mr. Jackson, formerly at Fuhchau, was 
 associated with this mission. This year was 
 one of unusual religious interest among the 
 people. Religious services were held at four 
 places, the average attendance at the two 
 chapels being about 200. The meetings were 
 more orderly and solemn, and the G-ospel and 
 its teachers were treated with more respect. 
 During the last half of 1852, five adults, of 
 apparent piety, were baptized. This station 
 was visited by Rt. Rev. Bishop Smith, in 
 May, 1852, who speaks in the highest terms 
 of the missionaries. 
 
 •Fuhchau. — Rev. Messrs.Wiliiam Welton and 
 R. D. Jackson arrived in Fuhchau early in 
 1850, and through the assistance of the British 
 Vice - Consul obtained a lease of a temple 
 within the walls, near the consulate. The op- 
 position of the literati constrained them soon 
 after to exchange this place for another, also 
 in the city. Mr. Welton has maintained his 
 position amid much opposition from the local 
 authorities. In the spring of 1852, two Chi- 
 nese school teachers, with whom he had made 
 an agreement, were seized, imprisoned, and 
 treated with great inhumanity. A house which 
 he had originally rented for a chapel and dis- 
 pensary was pulled down. His humane and 
 Christian efforts have been mostly restrict- 
 ed to his own house. Tract distribution and 
 preaching are allowed in the city proper ; but 
 no premises can be rented for such purposes. 
 Mr. Welton has made some efforts in prepar- 
 ing portions of the Scriptures in the local dia- 
 lect, using the Chinese character as a symbol 
 of its sounds. The opposition, it has been 
 thought, is abating. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 N 
 
 "S.^5 
 
 
 
 
 (5 
 
 n 
 
 H 
 
 ^^ 
 
 a^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 J2; 
 
 ^-S 
 
 "3 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Fuhchau 
 
 1850 
 1848 
 1845 
 
 1 
 3 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 
 Ningpo 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 At Home 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 American Seventh-Day Baptist Society. 
 — ShangJiai. — This mission was begun in 1847, 
 by Rev. Messrs. S. Carpenter and N. Word- 
 ner, who with their families occupy a native 
 house within the walls of the city, situated 
 among family residences, near the small south 
 gate. A large room on the mission premises 
 has been fitted up as a chapel, which was 
 opened for worship in January, 1849. 
 
280 
 
 CUINA. 
 
 Knoush Gbner-u. Baptist Missionary 
 SociKTY. — Nins^po. — This raissiou was com- 
 raencetl in 1845, by licv. Messrs. T. H. Hud- 
 son anil William Jarrora. It has been active 
 in the preaching of the Gospel and the distri 
 bution of Christian I)ook8 ; and considerable 
 has been done in the department of schools. 
 Mr. Hudson has prepared a number of Chris- 
 tian tracts. He was early permitted to bap- 
 tize his Chinese teacher on the profession of 
 his faith in Christ. Mrs. Jarrom died in 
 Ninj^po, in February, 1848. Mr. Jarrom re- 
 turned to England late in 1850. Mr. Hudson 
 has suffered much from ill-health, but conti- 
 nues in the diligent prosecution of his work. 
 His son.. Mr. Joseph Hudson, who is a ready 
 Chinese scholar, was for some time a valuable 
 assistant in publishing the Gospel ; but he was 
 subsequently persuaded to connect himself with 
 a mercantile house in Ningpo. 
 
 Miss Aldersey's Femai.e Seminary, Ning- 
 oo. — ^This energetic and devoted Christian 
 lady, though educated amid ease and affluence, 
 has rejoiced, for Christ's sake, in the endur- 
 ance of peculiar hardships and privations. At 
 her own charge, near twenty years since, she 
 entered on the missionary work, first toiling 
 alone lor some years in Sourabaya, several 
 hundred miles east of Batavia. Since she left 
 that place, a blessed work of grace has been 
 wrought among the natives, several hundreds 
 of whom have been hopefully converted, 
 without the aid of any foreign missionary. 
 During the war between China and England, 
 she went to Chusan, and there commenced her 
 labors for Chinese females. After the close of 
 the war, she opened a female boarding-school 
 at Ningpo, which has continued in operation 
 to the present time. It has usually numbered 
 about fifty girls, and her entire household 
 about seventy persons. Several of her family 
 have become hopefully pious. Her school is 
 now within the city proper. Out of her 
 school she has labored mucn for the spiritual 
 good of Chinese females, by visiting and con- 
 versation. 
 
 Swedish Mission, Fw^c^m.— Though in the 
 mysterious providence of God this interesting 
 mission was early broken up, yet it deserves a 
 brief notice. It was commenced early in 
 1850, by Rev. C. J. Fost, joined soon after 
 by Rev. A. Elgquist. Both were young men 
 of talent and piety, and during their brief so- 
 journ in Fuhchau, made rapid progress in the 
 Chinese. After much trouble they obtained 
 the promise of a permanent residence, and in 
 October, 1850, they visited a vessel at the 
 mouth of the river to procure the funds neces- 
 sary to fulfil the bargain, amounting to about 
 $200. On entering the main river, on their 
 return, they were waylaid by a piratical boat, 
 and during the encounter, Mr. Fost was mor- 
 tally wounded, and fell into the river, and Mr. 
 Elgquist narrowly escaped to the shore with his 
 life, with some slight wounds. One of the pi- 
 
 rates, perhaps their leader, was mortally 
 wounded by a pistol-shot from Mr. FosL 
 Their village was subsequently destroyed by 
 the government. Mr. Elg^iuist's health suffer- 
 ed a severe shock from this disaster and 
 previous robberies which they had endured 
 while residing in a Budhist temple ; and 
 early in 1851 he was advised to visit Hong- 
 kong. His health not improving, in 1852 he 
 embarked for Sweden. This was the first effort 
 of the society to establish a Christian mission. 
 Free Church op Scotland, Amoy. — This 
 mission was commenced in 1850, by James H. 
 Youn^, M.D., who had previously spent several 
 years in Houg-kong, as a medical practitioner. 
 Rev. W. C. Burns, a devoted and successful 
 minister of Christ, in his native land, offered 
 himself to the Church as a missionary to 
 China, and arrived in Hong-kong in Novem- 
 ber, 1847. After having spent three years 
 and seven months in study and missionary la- 
 bor in Hong-kong and Canton, he sailed for 
 Amoy on the 26tn of June, 1851. He soon 
 so far mastered this new dialect as to be able 
 to speak it with ease and correctness. June 
 6th, 1853, he announced the completion of the 
 translation of the Pilgrim's Progress, which 
 was published at a cost of about ten cents per 
 copy. Dr. Young, soon after his arrival, 
 opened a dispensary, and likewise took charge 
 of a Chinese day school of 30 pupils, originally 
 connected with the mission of the American 
 Board in that city. Under his direction two 
 pious Chinese were employed, as colporteurs. 
 Upwards of twenty opium smokers were 
 thought to have been cured of this vice. 
 Another school of thirty pupils is superin- 
 tended by Mr. Burns. He has been diligent 
 in the preaching of the Gospel in Amoy, and 
 in neighboring cities and villages. The mis- 
 sion was expected soon to be reinforced. 
 
 The preceding portion, together with the 
 concluding part of this article was prepared 
 by Rev. Stephen Johnson, late missionary of 
 the A.B. C F.M., at Fuhchau. 
 
 American Episcopal Board. — The Board 
 of Missions of the Protestant Episcopal Church 
 in the United States resolved, on the 13th 
 of May, 1834, to establish a mission in 
 China as soon as a suitable missionary could 
 be found. On the 14th of July, Rev. Henry 
 Lockwood was appointed ; and in February 
 following, Rev. Francis R. Hanson, Rector 
 of Christ Church, Prince George's County, 
 Md., offered himself, and was accepted. The 
 mission excited so deep an interest, that the 
 necessary funds were raised in a few weeks, in 
 New York alone, and a free passage was given 
 by a mercantile house in that city. The mis- 
 sionaries embarked June 2, and arrived at 
 Canton October 29, 1835, and afterwards pro- 
 ceeded to Batavia. February 17, 1836, Mr. 
 Lockwood was married to a daughter of Rev. 
 W. H. Medhurst, and on the 9th of August 
 
CHINA. 
 
 281 
 
 following, Mrs. Lockwood was removed by 
 death. 
 
 On July 8, 1837, Rev. W. J. Boone, who 
 had received a medical as well as a theological 
 education, with reference to the missionary 
 work, sailed from Boston, with his wife, and 
 reached Batavia on the 22d of October. Mr. 
 Hanson's health had become so impaired, that 
 he was compelled to return home. 
 
 The missionaries applied themselves to the 
 study of tlite Chinese language, and in the 
 mean time, endeavored to make themselves 
 useful in holding an English service, distribut- 
 ing tracts, and establishing schools. Mr. 
 Boone found his medical knowledge of great 
 use to him. But the climate proved detri- 
 mental to their health, and Mr. Lockwood was 
 compelled to return to the United States. 
 
 During tkeir residence at Batavia, a boys' 
 school was commenced ; and finding it di^- 
 cult to retain them long enough to accomplish 
 much good, the expedient was resorted to of 
 having them bound by writing by the parents 
 for five years, the missionaries assuming all the 
 expense ; and the plan being found to work 
 well, was continued after the removal of the 
 mission to China. In August, 1839, Mr. Boone 
 had received 16 boys on these terms, and 
 scarce a week passed but he had to reject ap- 
 plications. Their improvement, in every re- 
 spect, was highly gratifying. They were do- 
 cile, studious, and afiectionate. 
 
 In September, 1840, Mr. and Mrs. Boone 
 visited Macao, on account of impaired health ; 
 and in February following, the mission was re- 
 moved to that place. On the 20th of August, 
 1842, Mrs. Boone was attacked with a bilious 
 remittant fever, and on the 30th, she departed 
 this life, with the dying declaration : " If there 
 is a mercy in life for which I feel thankful, it 
 is, that God has condescended to call me to be 
 a missionary." In consequence of her death, 
 Dr. Boone returned to this country with his 
 children, hoping also to be able to secure a 
 reinforcement to the mission. 
 
 In 1834, and before Dr. Boone's return to 
 tin's country, the mission was removed from 
 ;io to Koolongsoo, a small island half a 
 ■ from Amoy, which, in the opinion of Dr. 
 Boone, presented a most inviting field for mis- 
 sionary labor. He had frequent opportuni- 
 ties of preaching on Sundays to stated congre- 
 gations of Chinese, averaging from 60 to 70, 
 besidcs""an English service for the troops. The 
 chief magistrate of Amoy interchanged visits 
 with Dr. Boone, and invited him to reside at 
 that place, where he would have an opportu- 
 nity to preach to many more people, and where 
 he (the magistratej would have more frequent 
 intercourse with hmi. He listened to Dr. B.'s 
 declaration of the Gospel, and accepted a New 
 Testament. 
 
 Dr. Boone's visit to this country was the 
 means of exciting a greatly increased interest 
 in the China mission ; and in October, 1844, 
 
 he was consecrated Missionary Bishop. On 
 the 14th of December following, he embarked 
 for Canton, accompanied by Rev. Messrs. 
 Henry W. Woods, and Richardson Graham, 
 and Mrs. Boone, Mrs. Woods, Mrs. Graham, 
 and Misses Gillett, Jones, and Morse, mission- 
 ary teachers. Rev. Mr. Syle and wife em- 
 barked on the 24th of May following. 
 
 Bishop Boone and his associates reached 
 Hong-kong on the 24th of April, 1845 ; and 
 after much inquiry and consultation, Shanghai 
 was fixed upon as offering a most favorable 
 prospect for missionary labor ; and, as soon as 
 suitable arrangements could be made, the mis- 
 sion families proceeded to that place, and es- 
 tablished the mission there. The demeanor 
 of the people towards the missionaries was 
 highly encouraging. The magistrates were 
 courteous, and the people exhibited none of 
 the arrogance and dislike manifested by the 
 inhabitants of Canton, but showed much kind- 
 ness and good will. A school for boys was 
 immediately opened, with ten pupils, on the 
 same plan as that pursued first at Batavia, 
 and the new missionaries applied themselves 
 diligently to the study of the language. Pub- 
 lic service M^as established by the Bishop, in a 
 hall fitted up in the building occupied for a 
 school, capable of holding 250 people, which 
 was filled with an attentive audience. In 
 1846, one young man was baptized, who was 
 looking forward to the ministry. 
 
 The failure of Rev. Mr. Graham's health 
 rendered it necessary for him to return to 
 this country, and Rev. Phineas D. Spalding 
 was sent out to take his place. Bishop Boone, 
 in his report, gives a high testimonial to the 
 character and usefulness of the ladies attached 
 to the mission. 
 
 In 1847, the Bishop began to be afflicted 
 with serious illness, which has since followed 
 him, in a greater or less degree, and proved a 
 great hindrance to his labors. This year he 
 succeeded in raising about ^6000, and secured a 
 lot outside of the city, for the purjiose of erect- 
 ing a suitable building for his schools. One 
 of the earliest pupils ot the school died, giving 
 satisfactory evidence of piety. Previous to his 
 death he was received into the church. 
 
 The controversy in regard to the proper 
 word to be used for rendering God in Chinese, 
 to which allusion has been made in a former 
 part of this article, attracted the earliest atten- 
 tion of Bishop Boone, who expressed his firm 
 conviction that Shi7i was the true word ; and 
 that it would be in vain to fight against poly- 
 theism, if they chose the term used by the Chi- 
 nese as the proper name for their chief god. 
 To this subject he devoted several months, and 
 wrote and published a treati|^ upon it. 
 
 Funds were collected forftie erection of a 
 mission chapel ($1000 of which was received 
 from a member of the Episcopal Church in the 
 United States), and also a suitable dwelling 
 for the missionaries. 
 
282 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 In 1849, the mission was afflicted with the 
 .\«8 of Rev. Mr. Sj>alding, whose indefatigable 
 diligence had given him a sufficient command 
 of tTie language to enable him to preach to the 
 Chinese in their own tongue. Over exertion, 
 connected with a cold, brought on him a con- 
 sumption ; urgetl by his physicians, he em- 
 barked for his native land on board the ship 
 Coquette, which was never heard of after- 
 wards ; and it is supposed that she foundered 
 in the Chinese sea during a terrible gale, soon 
 after his embarkation. 
 
 Bishop Boone and Rev. Mr. Syle, were con- 
 tributing their share of labor to the work of a 
 revision of a translation of the Scriptures into 
 Chinese ; and in connection with the Rev. 
 Mr. McClatchie, of the Church Missionary 
 Society, they had nearly completed the whole 
 order for " Morning Prayer," in the local dia- 
 lect of Shanghai. 
 
 On Easter, 1850, the Bishop baptized six 
 persons ; and, after witnessing the administra- 
 tion of the ordinance, the teacher of the day 
 school came to Mr. Syle, and applied to be re- 
 ceived as a candidate for baptism. 
 
 The greatest vigilance is exercised bj the 
 missionaries in the examination of candidates 
 for baptism, none being admitted to the ordi- 
 nance without a knowledge of Christian truth, 
 and evidence of its gracious effects on their 
 hearts and in their lives. 
 
 The following fact, related by Mr. Syle, will 
 show the difficulty attending the translation 
 of the Bible into Chinese : " After reading 
 some chapters in the Gospel of Mark, which 
 had been translated in the very concise, ' highly 
 concentrated ' style, which is sometimes called 
 ' classical,' my old man, Soo-dong, made this 
 remark : ' A lad who has been to school two 
 or three years can read and understand the 
 Scriptures written in the Foo-pah (common 
 dialect) ; if he has read books for six or seven 
 years, he can understand and explain the mean- 
 ing of what is written in the style of Mr. Gutz- 
 laff's version (which might be called the easy 
 Mandarin;) but before he could extract the 
 meaning out of this (referring to what he had 
 just perused), he must have studied the books 
 at least ten years !' And yet this is what he 
 prefers, and would choose for translating the 
 word of God." 
 
 ^ The following fact, stated by the same mis- 
 sionary, and which he says is no unusual occur- 
 rence, shows that there must be much suffer- 
 ing from want among the Chinese : " As I 
 stepped from the boat on the quay this morn- 
 ing, I saw some old mats spread over the 
 bodies of such as had died of destitution during 
 the night. I lifted one corner of the matting, 
 and counted ni^ distinctly. I was told there 
 were eleven, awkilled with cold and hunger 
 in one night in one place !" 
 
 Mr. Syle relates the case of a poor boy, thir- 
 teen years of age, whom they had taken in, 
 who died in consequence of the habit he had 
 
 acquired of smoking opium. Mr. S. thinks 
 this drug is undermining the constitutionn of 
 mxe-third of the people of China. 
 
 In 1850, Bishop Boone published a defence 
 of his former treatise on the translation oi the 
 word God, which had been reviewed by Dr. 
 Medhurst, Sir George Stanton, and Dr. Lon^'c. 
 As an illustration of the danger of employing 
 the term Shang-te, he relates that they had ix'cn 
 teaching a catechism on the creed, in winch 
 this word was used. A man of some intelli- 
 gence, who understood his own language well, 
 applied for instruction, and was furnished with 
 a copy of fhis catechism. He came regularly 
 for ten days, and showed great interest. lie 
 read over with the missionary all the attribiites 
 of Shang-te, which we are accustomed to predi- 
 cate of God, and appeared to understand 
 thoroughly what he read. But when asked i C he 
 prayed to Shang-te every day, he replied that 
 he visited his temple twice a day for this purpose. 
 This was the name he had been accustomed to 
 apply to the idol in the temple ; and it is not 
 to be wondered at tliat he understood the mis- 
 sionaries, as teaching the worship of the same 
 idol, since they used the same name. 'J'he 
 word was immediately erased from their cate- 
 chism. There is an idol, the chief among the 
 Taouists, called Neok Wong Shang-te, and, if 
 you say Shang-te to them, they under .~t,t ml 
 you as speaking of this idol. 
 
 The interesting event of the ordinatiur if 
 Chi- Wooig, the first Chinese deacon, took place 
 in Christ Church, Shanghai, on the 7th of 
 September, 1851. He was questioned fullyj 
 on the books of Scripture, and on the 39* 
 articles, and answered very satisfactorily. H^ 
 also read two sermons, written out in the 
 lect of his region. He gives promise of mm 
 usefulness. There were, at this time, tl 
 more candidates for orders : Mr. John 
 Points, a. member of the mission, and U 
 natives, Soodong and Chu-kiung. 
 
 This year, a new building was erected 
 the female school, under the instruction 
 Miss Jones. 
 
 Bishop Boone having made arrangement 
 for as efficient conduct of missionary ope ' 
 tions as circumstances would admit, embarl 
 for the United States, and arrived in N( 
 York, Jan. 30, 1853. Mr. Syle, who ha 
 been eight years in China, found it necessa 
 this year also to return to this country. 
 
 The obstacle which the acquisition of 
 Chinese language has been supposed to pre 
 to the missionary work there, appears far 
 formidable than it once was. After se 
 months' study, the newly-arrived missionj 
 were able to read the service, and address 
 natives intelligibly in Chinese. And one cI 
 the ladies connected with the mission coir- 
 menced the study of the language in Augusf 
 and on the 31st of the following January, sbj 
 had read through the Gospel of Matthew in Oh 
 nese characters, correctly and understanding!; 
 
CHINA. 
 
 283 
 
 he mission, at the latest dates, was in a 
 }.r<)sperous condition. The followinf^ table 
 will show its present strength and the progress 
 l!iat has been made in the several depart- 
 
 mi.'uts : 
 
 Ordained American Missionaries, including the Bishop.. 3 
 
 American Catechist and Candidate for Orders 1 
 
 Ordained Native 1 
 
 Native Catechists and Candidates for Orders 2 
 
 Female Teachers (single ladies) 6 
 
 Pupils in Boys' School (on mission premises) 60 
 
 " " Girls' " " " " 40 
 
 In six other Schools 100 
 
 Whole Number of Baptisms 29 
 
 Number of Communicants 24 
 
 Under Suspension 7 
 
 During the year a mission chapel has been 
 built, 60 feet by 30, at a cost of $2,000, $600 
 of which was subscribed by members of the 
 foreign community. — Revised by one of the Sec- 
 retaries. 
 
 Presbyterian Board. — The missions of the 
 ^American) Presbyterian Board among the 
 Chinese were commenced at Singapore, in 
 1838. At that time their jealousy of foreign- 
 ers prevented a station being formed in China 
 itself. Merchants and other foreigners were 
 permitted to live only at Canton, and were 
 there restricted within the limits of a few 
 warehouses on the river. The first mission- 
 aries of the Board were the Eev. Messrs. Ro- 
 bert W. Orr and John A. Mitchell, and Mrs. 
 Orr, who arrived at their station in April, 
 1838. In October following, Mr. Mitchell, 
 whose health was delicate when he left this 
 country, JR'as called to his rest. With Mr. 
 Orr, he had visited Malacca and Penang, and 
 Mr. Orr afterwards visited Bangkok, to ob- 
 tain information concerning the most eligible 
 places for missionary work. In the next year 
 the Chinese teacher employed by Mr. Orr was 
 baptized by him. In July, 1840, the Eev. 
 Thomas L. McBryde and his wife arrived at 
 Singapore, and in December Mr. and Mrs. 
 Orr were compelled to leave their work by the 
 failure of Mr. Orr's health. In July, 1841, 
 James C. Hepburn, M.D., and his wife, reach- 
 ed Singapore, under appointment to the mis- 
 sion in Siam, but with permission to join the 
 China mission — a measure which the return of 
 Mr. Orr and other reasons made expedient. 
 Towards the end of this year Mr. and Mrs. 
 McBryde went up to Macao for the benefit of 
 a colder climate. In May, 1842, the Eev. 
 Walter M. Lowrie arrived at Macao, and 
 sailed about a month afterwards for Singapore. 
 This voyage was undertaken with reference to 
 the question of removing the mission from 
 that place to China. The war between the 
 British and the Chinese was drawing to a 
 close, and it was a deeply important matter to 
 decide wisely on the line of efforts which 
 should be followed under the new aspects of 
 this great field of labor. Mr. Lowrie's voy- 
 age, however, ended in the shipwreck of the 
 vessel, and the almost miraculous escape of 
 
 himself and most of the ship's company. 
 After sailing Ibur hundred miles in open boate, 
 and encountering a severe gale at sea, they 
 reached Luban, a small island near Manila, 
 and Mr. Lowrie returned to Macao in Octo- 
 ber. 
 
 The termination of the war between the 
 British and the Chinese in this year changed 
 the whole question as to the stations to be oc- 
 cupied. These were not required to be hence- 
 forth at places many hundreds of miles distant 
 from China ; five of the principal cities on the 
 coast of the country were now open to the re- 
 sidence of missionaries, as well as of other 
 foreigners. Accordingly it was deemed expe- 
 dient for Mr. McBryde to occupy a station on 
 Koolongsoo, a small island close by the city of 
 Amoy. To this island, in 1833, Dr. Hepburn 
 removed from Singapore, after spending a few 
 months at Macao while the question of his sta- 
 tion was under consideration. In October, 
 Mr. McBryde and his family returned to this 
 country, on account of the failure of his 
 health. In February, 1844, D. B. McCartee, 
 M.D., and Mr. Eichard Cole, a printer, and his 
 wife, arrived at Macao ; in July the Eev. 
 Eichard W. Way and wife, first appointed to 
 Siam ; in October, the Eev. Messrs. M. Simp- 
 son, Culbertson and Augustus W. Loomis, 
 and their wives, and the Eev. Messrs. John 
 Lloyd and Andrew P. Happer, M. D. ; and in 
 May, 1845, the Eev. Hugh A. Brown. The 
 number of brethren thus arriving in China 
 showed that the churches were willing to re- 
 spond to the call of Providence for enlarged 
 missionary operations in this country. It was 
 now practicable to form plans of missionary- 
 work on a wider scale, and after much consi- 
 deration it was determined to form three mis- 
 sions — at Canton, Amoy, andNingpo. Messrs. 
 Happer and Cole were connected with the 
 Canton mission ; Messrs, Lloyd, Brown, and 
 Hepburn with the mission at Amoy; and 
 Messrs. Lowrie, Way, Loomis, Culbertson, and 
 McCartee with the Ningpo mission. 
 
 An important auxiliary to these missions is 
 the printing-press. A brief account of this 
 deserves a place in these pages. Preliminary 
 to this notice it should be stated, that in no 
 other heathen country are there so many read- 
 ers as in China, and that there the process of 
 printing has long been in use. The Chinese 
 method of printing, however, is a very im- 
 perfect one ; the types are blocks of wood, on 
 which each letter or character has been en- 
 graved by the hand of the artist, and the im- 
 pressions are taken by means of a brush for 
 the ink and a block for the press ; the whole 
 being an operation so slow, that only the 
 patience of a Chinaman is equal to ite de- 
 mands. Our admiration, however, is due to 
 the invention itself, and to the neatness and 
 economy of the printing thus executed ; but in 
 this day of finished machinery, and of large 
 stereotype editions of the Scriptures and other 
 
284 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 books, this imperfect process docs not suit the 
 exigencies of the Church in her missionary 
 work. On (he other hand, a serious and appa- 
 reutly insuperable difficulty in the way of 
 printing, either by machinery or by the use of 
 metallic tyjK's, was found in the large number 
 of Chinese letters or characters. This num- 
 ber is estimated at 30,000 ; a common print- 
 in^office case contains but 56. 
 
 For a satisfactory statement of the " dis- 
 covery," as it may well be called, of the me- 
 thod of printing this multitude of Chinese 
 characters with a small number of metallic 
 types, the reader may consult the Annual Re- 
 port of the Western Foreign Missionary Soci- 
 ety, May, 1837. It turns on the distinction 
 between the formatives and primitives in the 
 Chinese language, and between the divisible 
 and indivisible characters. The divisible are 
 reduced to their simplest elements, and being 
 struck off as types, can be ro-composed in dif- 
 ferent characters, so that a comparatively 
 small number of types will serve to express 
 most of the characters in common use. At 
 the instance of the Corresponding Secretary 
 of the Board, whose previous study of this 
 language had prepared him to take a deep in- 
 terest in this matter, the committee agreed in 
 1836, to order a set of the matrices for this 
 new mode of printing Chinese. These matri- 
 ces were made in Paris, at a cost of over 
 $5,000. Types were cast from them in New 
 York, by Mr. Cole ; and at Macao both he 
 and Mr. Lowrie gave much time and labor to 
 perfecting the types, arranging the cases, and 
 other things requisite to the practical applica- 
 tion of this new invention. Many fears and 
 some predictions of failure were happily dis- 
 appointed, and its success may be regarded as 
 an era in the history of this people. For seve- 
 ral years this mode of printing has been in 
 operation. Large editions of works are print- 
 ed, from stereotype plates, on improved presses, 
 such as are in use in our own country, which 
 will be driven by steam-power when the Chi- 
 nese become a Christian people. It is of inte- 
 rest to a<id, that but for the order given by the 
 committee in 1836 for a set of these matrices, 
 this great invention would probably not have 
 been brought into use. So little confidence 
 was felt in its practicability, that no other 
 missionary institution would give it their pa- 
 tronage. Only one other order was received 
 by the artist, and without at least two orders 
 he could not proceed with the work. 
 
 In 1845 the printing-press was removed from 
 Macao to Ningpo, and upwards of 3,500,000 
 pages were printed. A station was occupied 
 at Chusan, an island not far distant from Ning- 
 po, ifhich was then in the possession of the Bri- 
 tish. This was an experiment to determine 
 whether other places besides the cities opened 
 under the treaty could be occupied by mission- 
 aries ; but it was found that the authorities 
 civilly but firmly opposed their permanent res- 
 
 idence there, although the people of tlie island 
 were friendly ; and the station was rolintjuish- 
 ed soon after the island was restored by the 
 British to the Chinese. 
 
 In 1846, Dr. and Mrs. Hepburn reached this 
 country, being compelled to return by the state 
 of Mrs. Hepburn's health. In December, the 
 Rev. Messrs. William Speer and John B. 
 French, and Mrs. Speer, arrived at Canton, 
 and the Rev. John W. Quarterman joined the 
 Ningpo mission. A church was organized at 
 Ningpo in May ; boarding-schools were open- 
 ed at Canton and Ning-po ; and most of the 
 missionaries were now sufiiciently acquainted 
 with the Chinese language to conduct religious 
 services in chapels, and to make known the 
 Gospel by the way-side. 
 
 The year 1847 was marked by the death of 
 Mrs. Speer on the 16th of April, and of Mr. 
 Lowrie on the 19th of August — the latter 
 under most afflicting circumstances, by the 
 hands of Chinese pirates.* Mr. Cole's connec- 
 tion with the mission ceased, and Mr. Happer 
 was married to a daughter of Dr. Ball, an 
 American missionary at Canton. 
 
 In 1848, the Rev. Messrs. Joseph K. AVight 
 and Henry V. Rankin, and their wives, arrived 
 in China, to join the Ningpo mission. Mr. 
 Brown was compelled to return to this country, 
 by the state of his health, and on the 6th of 
 December Mr. Lloyd was called to his rest. 
 The station at Amoy has not since been occu- 
 pied by the Board. 
 
 In 1849, Mr. Moses S. Coulter and his wife 
 arrived in China — Mr. Coulter hdling been 
 appointed to take charge of the press at Ning- 
 po, while continuing his studies for the work 
 of the ministry. 
 
 In 1850, the Rev. Messrs. Samuel N. and 
 William P. Martin, and their wives, arrived at 
 Ningpo. Mr. Loomis and his wife and Mr. 
 Speer returned to this country, on account of 
 their health. A new mission was formed at 
 Shanghai, to which Mr. Wight and Mr. Culbert- 
 son were appointed — the latter with a special 
 view to the work of translating the Scriptures. 
 
 In 1851, Mr. French was married to the 
 second daughter of Dr. Ball, the sister of Mrs. 
 Happer ; and in 1852, the Rev. John Bycrs 
 and his wife and Miss Juana M. Knight arriv- 
 ed in China, the latter to be associated with 
 her sister, Mrs. Rankin in the female boarding- 
 school at Ningpo, and Mr. Byers to be station- 
 ed at Shanghai. Mr. Coulter was called to 
 his rest, on the 12th of December, and the 
 health of Mr. Byers having given way shortly 
 after reaching his station, he and his wife start- 
 ed on their voyage homewards, but he was also 
 taken to his rest on the 8th of April, 1853. 
 In August, the Rev. John Nevius and his wife 
 
 * See Memoirs of the Rev. Walter M. Lowrie : New-York, j 
 1849. Robert Carter & Brothers. He was a member of ajj 
 Convention of Missionaries at Shanghai, engaged in th«jj 
 translation of the Scriptures, and was returning to his a^ 
 tion at Ningpo,when he was taken, as by a martyr's deat 
 to his rest. 
 
CHINA. 
 
 285 
 
 d for Ningpo, and in November the llev. 
 (Jbarles F. Preston, and J. G. Kerr, M.D., and 
 !iis wife, for Canton. In this year also, Dr. 
 
 urtee was married to Miss Knight. 
 
 I April, 1854, the Eev. Keuben Lowrie and 
 
 ,ife embarked for China, to be connected 
 
 the Shanghai mission. 
 
 ; is is but a slight sketch of the missions 
 : iiO Board in China, yet it shows that an 
 mportant work is in steady progress. Twelve 
 ninisters and two physicians, nearly all of 
 \rhom are married men, are stationed at the 
 aties of Canton, Shanghai, and Ningpo. The 
 joarding-schools contain about sixty boys and 
 hirty girls, and the day-schools about sixty 
 )oys. The church at Ningpo numbers twenty- 
 ;hree communicants. The printing-press at 
 hat city has sent forth upwards of 24,000,000 
 )f pages of the Sacred Scriptures and other 
 jhristian publications, and is still in eJSfective 
 roeration. The medico-missionary labors of 
 m. Happer and Dr. McCartee have exerted a 
 nde-spread influence in favor of the Christian 
 
 Could anything more clearly attest that the 
 Gospel is the power of God unto salvation? 
 Commonly we indulge little hope of the con- 
 version of very aged persons, even in Christian 
 lands ; but here, in the adorable exercise of 
 God's sovereignty in grace, we see an aged 
 idolater, living far distant from the ministra- 
 tions of the sanctuary, brought into the com- 
 munion of the saints I Such an example shows 
 that nothing is too hard for the Almighty. 
 
 The Mission to the Chinese in California 
 properly follows the missions in China itself. 
 The fame of the gold mines has drawn some 
 thousands of this gairi^eeking people to our 
 shores. Thus far, they have nearly all come 
 from the province of Canton, and speak the 
 dialect of that province. The Rev. William 
 Speer and his wife commenced their labors 
 amongst them at San Francisco, in the autumn 
 of 1852. Having been stationed at Canton 
 in former years, his health being now restored, 
 Mr. Speer could at once speak to them in their 
 tongue, the wonderful works of God. Their 
 civil relations to each other were now reversed ; 
 •eligion, which is perceived to inspire its fol- i they are the foreigners, and their missionary 
 owers with benevolence, and to confer evident could bid them welcome to his native land ; 
 
 accordingly, his visits were well received by 
 
 blessings on the poor and needy. Dr. McCar- 
 ;ee's influence, as a Christian physician, is such 
 IS might well be envied by the most favored 
 )f his professional brethren in any of our own 
 3ities. Numerous chapels, most of them rooms 
 lired for the purpose, are open for religious 
 services, and at Ningpo a large and convenient 
 ihurch has been erected, in which public wor 
 ihip is regularly conducted. The Gospel has 
 jeen frequently proclaimed, also, at the tem- 
 ples and other places of public concourse, and 
 n the villages in the vicinity of Ningpo. 
 
 By means of these various labors, the leaven 
 )f divine truth has been extensively diffused, 
 md is producing its appropriate influence. A 
 iignal example of this occurred during the last 
 rear, in connection with the Ningpo mission. 
 A. part of the sacred volume, received from a 
 nissionary, was carried by a Chinaman to 
 lis own village, at some distance in the in- 
 ierior of the country. It seems to have made 
 10 impression on the mind of him who first 
 received it, but it fell into the hands of an aged 
 nan, who for fourscore years had been a wor- 
 shiper of idols. His attention was awakened 
 to consider this new religion, and he concluded 
 to go in search of the giver of this strange 
 oook. He came to Ningpo, took up his abode 
 on the premises of one of the missionaries, and 
 spent his time in reading the sacred volume 
 lud attending to the instructions of his kind 
 teacher, — often coming with the Bible in 
 tiis hand to ask for explanations of difficult 
 passages, and manifesting a teachable spirit. 
 A.fter some months thus employed, he gave 
 pleasing evidence of being a subject of divine 
 ?race, and was received into the church of 
 Christ by baptism, in the presence of a large 
 congregation of his heathen countrymen. '• 
 
 them. He found several Chinese patients in 
 the hospital, who were grateful for his instruc- 
 tions and aid ; a school was opened, but the 
 attendance was not regular. After some time, 
 an eligible place of worship was secured for a 
 few months, where services were conducted 
 in the Chinese language, with a varying au- 
 dience. Eventually the liberality of residents 
 of San Francisco provided a suitable building 
 for the use of the mission, in which it is de- 
 signed to have a school and a chapel, with 
 convenient apartments for the family of the 
 missionary. Many of the Chinese gave hand- 
 some donations towards the purchase of this 
 property. 
 
 Among the favorable incidents in the brief 
 history of this mission, it may be noted that 
 some of the former pupils in the mission schools 
 in China were found in California. They were 
 predisposed to give a hearty reception to one 
 whose character and motives were at once un- 
 derstood by them. Another favorable provi- 
 dence was the return to China of an influential 
 man, whose influence would have been strongly 
 arrayed against the mission, and the choice as 
 his successor, to be the head of a company or 
 association of Chinese, of a man who looked 
 with a friendly eye upon these eflbrts for the 
 benefit of his people. Afterwards a few Chris- 
 tians were found, who had been received into 
 the church by missionaries in their native land. 
 Their conduct appears to have been worthy of 
 their profession ; they rested from work on the 
 Sabbath, even at the mines, and met together 
 for religious worship; but their wandering 
 life prevented their forming a regular congre- 
 gation. In the early part of the year 1854, 
 Mr. Speer was permitted to organize a church 
 
286 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 at San Francisco, with four Chinese commu 
 nicants, one of whom was ordained as a ruling 
 elder. Thus an auspicious beginning has been 
 made. 
 
 The future influence of this mission will of 
 course depend to a considerable extent on the 
 number of Chinese who may seek a temporary 
 or a permanent home in our land. There are 
 causes which render it not unlikely that large 
 numbers of them will come to this country. 
 Some of these have been already referred to ; 
 others need not be here specified. On the 
 other hand, their emigration may be checked, 
 as indeed it was for a flme, by the harsh and 
 un-American treatment which they met with 
 from some of our countrymen — or more likely 
 from some of the reprobate foreigners. The 
 impositions to which they are subject at the 
 mines will go far to deter them from remaining, 
 and to prevent others from coming. These 
 oppressions are disgraceful to those who are 
 guilty of them ; but with a better tone of morals 
 at the mines, every thing of this kind must 
 cease. It seems quite clear that our country- 
 men should encourage and not repel the immi- 
 
 gration of the Chinese. They will form a most 
 valuable class of laborers, being industrious, 
 peaceable, and frugal. It may easily comu to 
 pass that the Chinese will to a large extent sup- 
 plant the Negroes, in the cultivation of rice, cot- 
 ton, and sugar-cane. They will be found to be 
 a superior class of laborers, and every way less 
 expensive. Their employment in this country, 
 not merely in the mines of California, nor in 
 the slave States of the South, but in many 
 avocations in all the States, may become obvi- 
 ously desirable and quite expedient to our own 
 citizens, while it will afford a comfortable sub- 
 sistence to myriads of our now half-starving 
 fellow-creatures in China. Above all, it wiU 
 bring them within the reach of Christian in- 
 struction and example, and result in the salvar 
 tion of multitudes of them in our own day and 
 in ages to come. The wonderful ordering of 
 Providence that has already brought so many 
 of them to our shores should awaken attention 
 to their condition, and to the claims on the 
 missionary efforts of the churches of the great 
 nation whom they represent. — Lowrie's Manual 
 of Missions. 
 
 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 view. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 .a 
 
 Missionaries and Assistant 
 Missionaries. 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 E 
 
 Scholars. 
 
 Ministers. 
 
 Lay Teachers 
 and others. 
 
 Boarding. 
 
 Day. 
 
 103 
 
 78 
 
 j 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 American. 
 
 "-A 
 
 1 
 
 O - 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 Canton, 
 
 Ningpo, 
 
 Shanghai, .... 
 Chinese in Cal- ) 
 
 IFORNIA, . . . [ 
 
 Canton, .... 
 Ningpo, ... 
 Shanghai, . . 
 
 San Francisco, 
 Totals, . 
 
 1846 
 1844 
 1850 
 
 1852 
 
 3 
 6 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 30 
 4 
 
 30 
 26 
 
 6 
 29 
 
 67 
 23 
 
 13 
 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 2 
 
 34 
 
 56 
 
 35 
 
 90 
 
 
 181 
 
 Ajierican Baptist Missionary Union. — 
 The earliest missionaries appointed by this 
 Society for the Chinese were settled at Bang- 
 kok, in Siam, and also at Macao. Their labors 
 are given in full in the sketch of the Baptist 
 Mission in that country. These labors were 
 undertaken at a period when China itself was 
 comparatively inaccessible to the missionary 
 or to any foreign residents, and were estab- 
 lished at Bangkok and Macao on account of 
 the multitudes of Chinese who are found either 
 permanently residing or frequently visiting 
 those cities. They remained there until the 
 close of the late war between Great Britain 
 and China, when by the treaty, which ter- 
 minated the war in 1842, the isfand of Hong- 
 kong, having been ceded to the British Gov- 
 ernment, the five ports of Canton, Amoy, Fuh- 
 
 chau, Ningpo, and Shanghai, having been open- 
 ed to British commerce. Rev. Issachar Johnr 
 son. Rev. J. L. Shuck, and Rev. Wm. Dean, 
 removed to Hong-kong, the two former from 
 Macao, the latter from Bangkok. Messrs. 
 Dean and Shuck, with their families, establish- 
 ed themselves at Victoria, the capital of the 
 island, and Mr. Johnson at Chek-chu, a smaller 
 town on its southern shore. These missionaries 
 had already acquired the language of China, 
 and were familiar with the character and man- 
 ners of its people. They were fully prepared 
 to commence the work on which they were 
 sent. They were received in Hong-kong with 
 kindness and favor from the British officers and 
 residents, especially from Sir Henry Pottinger, 
 the English ambassador, who had negotiated 
 the treaty. With their assistance, a lot was 
 
CHINA. 
 
 287 
 
 obtained from the government on which a 
 mission-house was erected, and two commodi- 
 ous chapels were also built to be used alike for 
 public worship and for schools. A church of 
 five native members was organized, and placed 
 under the care of Mr. Shuck, to which four 
 others were added by baptism during the year 
 1842. At Chek-chu a chapel was also erect- 
 ed, in which Mr. Eoberts conducted service 
 both in Chinese and English. He also estab- 
 lished a school, which was taught principally by 
 one of the Chinese converts, who had come up 
 from Siam. In this manner, in the summer of 
 1842 were commenced the first missions of the 
 American Baptists in China. The three mis- 
 sionaries by whom they were planted, had 
 long been waiting at their distant outposts, 
 but they were now for the first time established 
 in China. They were indebted to the protec- 
 tion of the English flag for the opportunities 
 they enjoyed ; but they saw the whole empire, 
 with its almost numberless population, open- 
 ing, as it were, before them. The barriers of 
 ages had at length begun to give way. The 
 day was evidently at hand when the Gospel 
 was to be preached to the millions of China. 
 
 In 1843, the mission was bereft of Mrs. 
 Dean, an English lady, who had come to the 
 East, under the auspices of a society of her 
 countrywomen, for " Promoting Female Edu- 
 cation." She had married Mr. Dean during 
 Ms residence in Siam, and both there and in 
 ftong-kong had proved herself a faithful and 
 efficient missionary. At about the same time 
 also Mr. Dean was obliged .by ill-health to 
 suspend his labors and for a time to change the 
 climate. In the spring of the same year the 
 mission was reinforced by the arrival of Dr. D, 
 J. Macgowan. He, however, soon repaired to 
 Canton, for the purpose of consulting with Dr. 
 Parker, one of the missionary physicians of the 
 American Board, and at length decided to set- 
 tle at Ningpo, and there to commence a new 
 mission. In connection with Dr. Macartee, of 
 the American Presbyterian mission, he founded 
 a missionary hospital. The mission had from 
 the beginning been regarded with special favor 
 by many of the English officers, residents in 
 Hong-kong, who had given it their counte- 
 nance, and contributed liberally to its support. 
 It began with the most gratifying auspices, 
 and a second church was soon established at 
 Victoria. The people heard the Gospel preach- 
 ed by the missionaries in the:, several dialects 
 of their own tongue. In the summer of 1844 
 a treaty was concluded between Mr. Gushing, 
 Commissioner of the United States, and an 
 imperial commissioner of China, by the terms 
 of which all the advantages hitherto granted 
 to the English by the treaty of 1842 were 
 guaranteed to citizens of this country, and, in 
 addition, provision was made for the erection 
 of chapels, hospitals, and cemeteries, at each 
 one of the five ports. From this time Ameri- 
 can missionaries and other American residents 
 
 began to enjoy many privileges which before 
 they had procured only in consequence of their 
 connection with the English. This provision 
 in the treaty has distinctly recognized the 
 missions as among the national interests in 
 China which the American government de- 
 signs to protect. 
 
 But these prospects of the mission were soon 
 to be shaded by afflicting events, which for a 
 time retarded its progress. In November, 
 
 1844, Mrs. Shuck died at Victoria, after a 
 brief illness. She was a native of Virginia, 
 and had sailed from the United States with 
 her husband in 1835. They had resided at 
 Macao until the opening of China to the Eng- 
 lish in 1842, and she was now cut off at the most 
 interesting epoch in the history of the mission. 
 Mr. Dean, also, at nearly the same time, was 
 obliged to sail for the United States, in order 
 to recruit his health ; and was thus withdrawn 
 from his appropriate labors for upwards of two 
 years. In the autumn of 1844, Dr. Devan, a 
 missionary physician, with his wife, arrived at 
 Hong-kong. They subsequently removed to 
 Canton, where a mission-house was erected, 
 and several assistants were employed. But 
 their connection with the mission was of short 
 duration. Mrs. Devan died, much lamented, 
 at Canton, in October, 1846, and her husband, 
 finding himself unable to reside permanently 
 within the tropics, returned to the United 
 States. Mr. Shuck had already returned in 
 
 1845, and on the organization of the Southern 
 Baptist Convention, he was transferred to the 
 service of that body, by whom the mission 
 buildings at Canton were purchased. 
 
 These changes, however, did not entirely 
 suppress the energies of the missionaries, who 
 remained behind, or prevent the progress and 
 growth of the mission. Hong-kong seemed 
 at that time to offer many advantages, in con- 
 sequence of the presence of the English, but 
 more especially on account of the superior cha- 
 racter of the people who inhabit the island ; 
 and many sanguine hopes were then indulged, 
 which have been but imperfectly realized, in 
 the years that have since elapsed. In 1847, 
 Rev. E. C. Lord and his wife were added to 
 the mission at Ningpo, and in 1848, Rev. 
 John Johnson and his wife were added to that 
 at Hong-kong, though Mrs. Johnson was al- 
 most immediately removed by death. About 
 the same period, Mr. Goddard removed from 
 Bangkok, where he had, for several years, been 
 engaged in the Chinese department of the mis- 
 sion, and established himself at Ningpo, where, 
 with occasional interruptions, he has since con- 
 tinued to reside. His health had not admitted 
 of regular preaching, and though not without 
 frequent preaching, he has been for the most 
 part engaged in the translation of the Scrip- 
 tures. This work, at all times, and in all cir- 
 cumstances, is sufficiently difficult and respon- 
 sible ; but the translation into Chinese is at- 
 tended with peculiar difficulties and embarrass- 
 
cmNA. 
 
 mcnts. In 1843, a plan tras formed among 
 the mi!«»ionari08 then in Ohina, of the various 
 denominations from England and America, 
 designed to establish a standard by which the 
 translation of the Scriptures should be regu- 
 latetl and determined. The American Baptist 
 Missionaries appear at first to have thought 
 favorably of the plan ; but they afterwards, 
 with the approbation of the Board of Mana- 
 gers, decided not to adopt it, but to complete 
 Sie translation of their owfl, which ha<i already 
 been begun. To this work Rev. Messrs. Dean 
 and Goddard have since been devoting their 
 almost constant labors. The New Testament 
 is now nearly all translated ; the translation is 
 undergoing the careful revision of both these 
 missionaries, while each one has made a be- 
 ginning with certain books of the Old Testar 
 ment. 
 
 In 1851, Mr. and Mrs. Lord returned to the 
 United States, in consequence of the declining 
 health of the latter — she has since ceased from 
 her labors. The two stations of the original 
 mission, in Ilong-kong and in Ningpo, have 
 been organized as separate missions, though 
 the number of missionaries attached to each 
 remains the same. On the island of Bong 
 kong, in addition to the principal station at 
 Victoria, there are also four out-stations at 
 which schools and preaching are maintained by 
 as many native assistants and teachers, who 
 are under the immediate supervision of the 
 missionaries. The church connected with this 
 mission numbers, at the present time, about 30 
 members, who make annual contributions for 
 the support of the native assistants, and for the 
 promotion of the Gospel among their country- 
 men. The missionaries at Hong-kong are 
 Rev. Messrs Dean and Johnson, who also em- 
 ploy four assistants and three school teachers. 
 The mission at Ningpo has no out-stations. 
 It has had from the beginning a medical es- 
 tablishment, which has given to Dr. Mac- 
 gowan unusual facilities in becoming ac- 
 quainted with the people, and presenting to 
 them the claims of the Gospel. The church 
 here contains ten members. The missionaries 
 now belonging to the mission are, Rev. Messrs. 
 Lord, Goddard, and Knowlton, and Dr. Mac- 
 gowan. At both these missions, the agencies 
 hitherto employed are substantially the same. 
 They consist in preaching the Gospel and con- 
 versation with the people, the circulation of 
 the Scriptures, and of religious books, 
 and the teaching of schools. The results of 
 these agencies, which have now been sustained 
 for upwards of ten years, do not, it is true, re- 
 alize the hopes with which the missionaries 
 first entered China, on the opening of the five 
 ports in 1842. But these hopes were undoubt- 
 edly the offspring of inexperience. It has since 
 been found that it is one thing to have access 
 to the people of a country, and quite another 
 to convert them to the Gospel of Christ. The 
 missionaries, instructed by experience, arc still 
 
 at work, with hopes chastened by the lapse of 
 
 time. Great changes aro- taking place in the 
 manners and policy of the people among whom 
 
 they are dwelling; but still greater changes 
 are preparing through the agencies wliich 
 
 Christian missions have established, and will 
 develope themselves in the ages of the fu- 
 ture. 
 
 TiDo Missions in China — Statistics in 1854. 
 — Hong-kong mission, 1 station, 4 outstations, 
 2 missionaries, 1 female assistant, 4 native 
 preachers and assistants, 1 church, six day 
 schools, 75 pUpils. 
 
 Ning-po mission, 1 station, 4 missionaries, 4 
 female assistants, 2 native assistants, 1 church, 
 14 members, 3 day schools, 36 pupils. — Prop, 
 W. Gammell. 
 
 ^ Methodist Episcopal Church. — It is now 
 eight years since the Methodist Episcopal 
 Church in the United States commenced the 
 missionary work in China. The first mission- 
 aries were the Rev. Messrs. Moses C. White 
 and Judson D. Collins, the latter of whom, 
 with the wife of the former, have died in thd 
 work. This mission has suffered much in com- 
 mon with all other missions in China, from 
 the agitations growing out of the progreas of 
 the revolution going on in that empire. Pre- 
 vious to 1846, the idea of founding a mission 
 in the Empire of China, was often discussed 
 in the periodicals of the Methodist Episcopal 
 Church ; and many generous contributions werft 
 offered for the object. In conjunction with 
 the General Missionary Committee, the Board 
 in 1847 resolved on its establishment, and the 
 Providence of God soon supplied the men to 
 undertake it. They arrived in Hong-kong in 
 August, 1847, and were kindly received by 
 missionary brethren of all the other denomi- 
 nations. After remaining at Hong-kong Sk 
 few days, they sailed for their destination, at 
 Fuhchau. Here they soon obtained a resi- 
 dence and gave themselves up to the study of 
 the language, Mr. White, meanwhile, practic- 
 ing medicine ; and by the distribution of books 
 and tracts, they endeavored to make themselves 
 useful among the half-million of people com- 
 posing the population of the city. 
 
 The Rev. H. Hickok and Rev. Robert G. 
 Maclay were sent out in October, 1847, but 
 Mr. Hickok was soon obliged, by failure ff 
 his health, to return to the United States. 
 The three brethren who remained went daily 
 into the crowded streets and preached, as well 
 as they were able, " Jesus Christ and him cru- 
 cified," to the groups who stopped to listen to 
 their voice. They distributed tracts, and the . 
 scriptures printed under their own supervision, 
 and found the people eager to receive them. 
 One of the brethren having had the advan- 
 tage of a partial course of medical study, 
 opened a dispensary, in which he was enabled 
 to treat many cases of disease, giving at the , 
 same time, to the patients and their friends, I 
 religious instruction and Christian books. 
 
Bach of the missionaries had under his per- 
 j sonal supervision a day school, taught by a 
 Chinese master. In the three schools, they 
 had in 1849, 64 scholars, with an average at- 
 tendance of 50. Though the labors devoted 
 to this mission thjas far, chiefly contemplated 
 prospective results, yet the laborers employed 
 were not without some measure of present en- 
 couragement. They perceived a yielding of 
 inveterate prejudices, and a willingness to 
 allow them to occupy portions of the city, in 
 which at first they could get no foothold. 
 And as they became more familiar with the 
 language and customs of the people, they saw 
 greater openings for usefulness. They long 
 and earnestly intreated for reinforcements, and 
 for means to establish a boarding school for 
 the youth of both sexes. The report of the 
 Superintendent of the mission for 1851, gives 
 the following account of their mode of labor : 
 " The only mission chapel we occupy at pre- 
 sent, is on the street, not far from the mission 
 residences south of the river. It is small, 
 having in fact been rented rather as a room 
 for the distribution of tracts, than as a regular 
 preaching place. It will seat perhaps fifty 
 persons ; and as it is not upon a thronged street 
 it answers very well for addressing such con- 
 gregations as come in. The preacher, when he 
 goes into the desk here, finds himself in cir- 
 cumstances very different from those which 
 surround him at home. Here come in street 
 passengers, few or many, as the case may be ; 
 some will have the poles on which they carry 
 burdens ; some packages which they have been 
 buying, or are going to sell ; some will be 
 empty handed. They stand or sit, gazing list- 
 lessly about, noticing the room and its inmates, 
 especially the stranger. It may be the speaker 
 is going on with his remarks. The incomer 
 expresses aloud to his neighbor, his surprise 
 and delight, that the stranger can speak their 
 language — wonders aloud how long the man 
 has been in the country, or hoAV old he is. 
 Those who are listening to the missionary, pro- 
 bably repeat the words as they fall from his 
 lips — look to those about them, and express 
 their approbation of the truths declared. They 
 may be the most solemn teachings of God's 
 word he thus endorses ; and perhaps the next 
 sentence will be to inquire how many thick- 
 nesses of clothes the preacher wears, or what 
 viands he eats with his rice. Thus it is, a 
 sense of the solemnity of eternal truths is to 
 be inculcated as well as those truths them- 
 selves. Some seem more serious. We are 
 glad of a hearing — are encouraged by a little 
 attention. We scatter the seed, and look for- 
 ward to the time when he that soweth and he 
 that reapeth shall rejoice together. 
 
 " We have distributed a great many tracts. 
 At certain times and in certain places, the 
 people seem beside themselves, in their anxiety 
 to get possession of them. They crowd around, 
 they call out, they push e^ch other, and abuse 
 19 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 289 
 
 each other, in order to come at the books. 
 They take without asking, they grasp them 
 and will not let go their hold. Books are sel- 
 dom destroyed by the Chinese ; if not read at 
 once, they are carefully laid aside, and may be 
 read at another time. Sometimes we may go 
 gently on with the distribution ; at the same 
 time making remarks. Books distributed from 
 shop to shop are thankfully received, and al- 
 most invariably read. Printing is very cheap 
 here, and at a small cost we have published 
 and circulated more than half a million of 
 pages. We have not at present any copi^ of 
 the Scriptures on hand ; we need them, and 
 hope that ere long the questions in regard to 
 the different versktns will be so far settled as 
 to allow us to publish an edition." 
 
 In 1852, Dr. and Mrs. Wiley, Mr. and Mrs. 
 Colder, and Miss Seely arrived at Fuhchau. 
 Their entrance upon their field of labor was 
 very favorable. Messrs. White and Maclav 
 had each a small chapel erected, when the at- 
 tendance was good, and an increased attention 
 to the preached word was quite perceptible. 
 Wayside preaching and the distribution of the 
 Scriptures and tracts were prosecuted with 
 diligence : thus sowing the seed of divine truth 
 beside all waters, and humbly looking up to 
 God to give the increase. In their efforts for 
 printing and circulating the Word of God, the 
 missionaries make grateful mention of the kind 
 help they received from the American Bible 
 Society. They are endeavoring to prepare to 
 do their part in the work to which it would 
 seem that God will call the Protestant Church 
 in China, when all the results of the strange 
 revolution now in progress there shall have 
 been developed. Nov. 3d 1853, Mrs. Wiley, 
 wife of Eev. Dr. Wiley, departed this life in 
 the triumphs of faith. She was cut down in 
 the midst of her years and usefulness, far from 
 the land of her birth, and buried among the 
 tombs of idolaters ; but the cause in which 
 she rendered up her life will never die, but 
 move onward till it covers the wide domains 
 of the Celestial Empire. 
 
 The fruits of the mission to China, as the 
 fruits of all missions in old and consolidated 
 heathen states, appear slowly. Perhaps the 
 most valuable and extensive results of such 
 missions do not appear for ages. Confidence 
 in the old religion must be destroyed ; convic- 
 tion in favor of the new must be produced ; 
 and when this is done, old habits, as well as 
 the native enmity of the human heart, must be 
 overcome and changed, and new forms of 
 thought and feeling are to be introduced and 
 incorporated into society. It will require cen- 
 turies to obtain these results. — Annual Reports 
 and Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 Methodist Episcopal Church, South.-— 
 The missionary Society of the Methodist Epis- 
 copal Church South, began its operations in Chi- 
 na, in 1848. The first missionaries sent out were 
 the Rev. Charles Taylor, M.D., and Rev. Benj. 
 
890 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 Jenkins, D.D., who, with their families, sailed 
 from Boston for Shanghai, April 24, 1848. 
 Dr. Taylor's medical knowledge fitted him for 
 usefulness in that respect also, and his coUcagiic, 
 Dr. Jenkins, pos8esse<l extra advantages, being 
 one of the best linguists in the country. To a 
 knowledge of Hebrew, Greek, and Latin, he 
 added an acquaintance with the French, Ger- 
 man, and Spanish languages. He is besides, 
 a practical printer, and will be able on that 
 account also, to enlarge his field of usefulness 
 in the Celestial Empire. Both of these breth- 
 ren engaged to remain in China at least ten 
 years ; and, being in the vigor of life, are not 
 so young as to be novices, nor too old to acquire 
 a difficult language, and adapt themselves to 
 the peculiar habits and manners of the Chinese 
 people. On their arrival they devoted them- 
 selves to the acquisition of the Chinese lan- 
 guage, and meanwhile made themselves useful 
 through the medium of interpreters. The 
 church at home nobly and liberally sustained 
 the mission, and sent the Rev. G. W. E. Cun- 
 ningham to their help, in 1852. They turned 
 part of their house into a chapel, and soon had 
 an attentive and interesting congregation, and 
 a few souls became deeply concerned for their 
 salvation ; one of whom, in particular, has be- 
 gun to be useful. Accompanied by this native 
 preacher, Liew-seen-sang, they also establish- 
 ed regular preaching in the open air, at the 
 principal place of resort in the city. Their 
 school had 34 names on its roll. But the breth- 
 ren earnestly desire the establishment of two 
 boarding-schools, one for boys, and another for 
 girls. Measures were also in operation for 
 building a church, and setting up a printing- 
 press. But the health of Mrs. Taylor became 
 feeble, and she, with her children, returned to 
 the United States. Shortly after, Mrs. Jen- 
 kins's health became prostrate ; and in the 
 hope of saving her life, Dr. J. left with her for 
 America. But she continued to sink, and was 
 taken to her eternal rest before she could reach 
 her native land, leaving a bereaved husband 
 and six little ones. Soon after Dr. Jenkins 
 left, and before Shanghai had fallen into the 
 hands of the insurgents, Dr. Taylor set his 
 heart upon penetrating as far as the insurgent 
 camp at Cnin-kiang-foo, in order to ascertain 
 what were the real sentiments of the invaders 
 in reference to Christianity, and what would 
 be the result, as to Christian missions, of their 
 triumph. This was a bold and dangerous pro- 
 ject, as the city was then besieged by the 
 imperialists, both by land and water ; and 
 should he even succeed in evading their vigi- 
 lance, he knew not what reception he might 
 expect at the hands of the insurgents. But he 
 resolved to make the attempt notwithstanding, 
 and God preserved him in safety. Some ac- 
 count of this expedition will be found under 
 the head of the Chinese Revolution, near the 
 close of this article. 
 The health of Mrs. Taylor having failed, 
 
 she was under the necessity of returning to the 
 United States, in the hope of recruiting it. 
 Dr. U'aylor, several months afterward, fol- 
 lowed her ; and he, with Dr. Jenkins, itine- 
 rated through the Southern church for some 
 time, bringing the cause of China before iliom, 
 and arousing a deeper sympathy on its behalf. 
 Shortly after Mr. Taylor left Shanghai (in Oc- 
 tober, 1853), the city was taken, and for some 
 time the only remaining missionary, Mr. Cun- 
 ningham, was very much circumscribed in 
 his efforts to do good. But notwithstanding 
 the blockade by the Imperialists, matters have 
 become more settled, and he, with the native 
 local preacher, Liew, is again at his regular 
 work. 
 
 The Board of Missions of the Methodist E. 
 Church South feel an increased interest in this 
 field of Christian activity, and at their late an- 
 nual meeting the sum of $30,000 was appro- 
 priated for the support of this mission, the 
 purchase of a printing-press, the erection of a 
 church and a building for a school. They 
 have also strongly reinforced its staff of agents, 
 and by the time these sheets are before our 
 readers, the Rev. Drs. Taylor and Jenkins, ac- 
 companied bv the Rev. Messrs. Kelly, Belton, 
 and Lambeth, will be on their way to China, 
 or perhaps actually arrived there. — Annual Re- 
 ports and Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. But- 
 ler. 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society. — Jusi 
 about the time that China was thrown open t 
 missionary effort, this society had been makiui 
 extraordinary exertions for Africa, the We.- 
 Indies, and the South Seas. After the eman 
 cipation of the slaves, the missionaries wert 
 largely increased in the West Indies ; the new 
 and costly mission to the Gold Coast anc 
 Ashantee was established, and the cry fron 
 Feejee was responded to ; with, at the sanw 
 time, considerable extension in New Zealand 
 South Africa, Australia, and India. In 1844 
 the society had increased the number of 
 missionaries within ten years, by 123. Tb 
 rapid extension caused a corresponding oi 
 lay, which greatly exceeded the additional 
 come, and debts accumulated upon the col 
 mittee, which, notwithstanding many instano 
 of truly Christian liberality, have, up 
 the present time, hindered extension beyoi 
 the necessity of keeping what had alrea( 
 been gained ; yet the missionaries of the i 
 ciety are this year one hundred and one mc 
 than in 1844. Many felt that the call of t 
 society was rather to reinforce missions all 
 begun, than to enter upon a new undertakii 
 so formidable as China. Yet many yearn 
 for that land. One and another made off 
 ings for the cnterprize ; one valued branch sCT 
 ciety held a meeting and raised a considerabl 
 sum. Yet with their existing burdens the coffj 
 mittee could not proceed ; but a sub-commin 
 tee was appointed, with a view to obtain ftH 
 desirable information, and make such arrs 
 
CHINA. 
 
 291 
 
 ments as might facilitate a movement when 
 I the way seemed to open. But in the autumn 
 I of 1850, Grod selected his own instrument for 
 'the commencement of this work. George 
 P/crcy, a simple-hearted but interesting young 
 man, in Yorkshire, having been truly convert- 
 ed to God, felt his soul yearning for the salva- 
 tion of the heathen world. The Spirit of 
 God found him, like Elisha, at the plough, and 
 threw over him the commission of Heaven for 
 the evangelization of China. Without any 
 hesitation he sacrificed the secular pursuits of 
 life, and proceeded to seek direction how he 
 should find his way to that field of labor to 
 which God had called him. About thirty 
 miles from his residence there was a Christian 
 friend of his, Mr. Henry Reed, whom he con- 
 sulted in reference to his impression that it 
 was his duty to go and labor in China. Mr. 
 Reed did all he could to dissuade him, urging the 
 great difficulty of acquiring the language and 
 the obstacles that he would have to encounter 
 on his arrival, and tried to direct his attention 
 to some other missionary field, that presented 
 less difficulties. But to every argument his 
 reply was : " I believe, sir, that God has call- 
 ed me to labor in China, but I have no such 
 impression that I have a call to any other part 
 of the mission field." At length, however, the 
 young man was persuaded for the time to 
 abandon the idea. But, in about six months 
 lie waited upon Mr. Reed again, and stated 
 that the impression upon his mind not only 
 continued, but increased in strength. His 
 friend, satisfied that he was determined to fol- 
 low up what he believed to be a religious con- 
 viction, gave him a letter of introduction to 
 Bev. William Arthur, one of the general se- 
 cretaries of the society. For reasons already 
 stated, he was not recognized by the commit- 
 tee ; but nothing discouraged by their inabi- 
 lity to employ him, from his own limited 
 laeans he paid his passage, and the next in- 
 formation which his friend received was a 
 letter, in which he stated that he was then 
 on his way to that great empire. On his ar- 
 rival there, the facility with which he acquired 
 the language was amazing, and the openings 
 that he found for labor were equally remark- 
 able. 
 
 Mr. Piercy arrived at Hong-kong, January 
 30, 1851, expecting to find a pious sergeant at 
 the head of a small class of soldiers. The 
 following is his own account of his entrance 
 upon the field, in a letter to the Secretaries of 
 the Society : " Stepping ashore, a stranger in 
 a strange land, with my heart beating hard in 
 my bosom— for I hoped speedily to find Ser- 
 geant Ross, and with him and his praying few 
 to tell ■}{ the goodness of our common Lord, I 
 walked on towards the barracks. "The first I 
 met I addressed, inquiring where I might find 
 Ross. ' He is dead,' was the startling reply. 
 I felt, I knew not how, for a few moments — the 
 loneliness, the utter loneliness of my situation 
 
 seemed almost to unnerve me. With a falter- 
 ing tongue, I inquired further, and the particu- 
 lars of his death were told in tones solemn as 
 my own. The young man evidently felt much 
 as he told of his comrade's sickness and death. 
 I soon inquired as to his circumstances and 
 
 name. Corporal, now Sergeant D -, was 
 
 the individual with whom I was conversing. 
 This was most providential, and soon, in a 
 great measure, relieved the feelings which had 
 thus suddenly come into my soul. I soon learn- 
 ed all about Ross and Methodism in Hong- 
 kong. He, to use D 's words, was a 
 
 young man, but an old Christian, and had been 
 the centre of a little band, who sought to save 
 their souls, six or seven in number. They had 
 often met in his room ; but he fell, and they 
 fell, some with him, a prey to death, and others 
 
 into the indifference of the world ; and D 
 
 stood lonely as I had been myself, upon the 
 deep. He had oft, he said, longed and prayed 
 for a companion, and he thanked God for thus 
 giving him one. In a few minutes we were 
 brothers beloved, thanks be to a God of provi- 
 dence for this direction of his hand ! " 
 
 Having thus experienced the goodness of a 
 guiding Providence, he soon received a proof 
 of the catholicity of missionary affection, hon- 
 orable both to Dr. Legge and the London 
 Missionary Society. Mr. Piercy says: "We 
 thought it best to go to Dr. Legge, as he has 
 a good name for a catholic spirit. He was 
 not at home ; but we soon found him in the 
 Chinese Chapel, and I heard the Gospel in a 
 strange tongue, utterly strange ; though I had 
 tried to learn all the way as I came, a word 
 now and then was all that I could make out 
 After the service, the young corporal intro- 
 duced me to the Doctor, and he most kindly 
 offered me a bed in his house for the night, say- 
 ing, the morning would bring leisure to 
 consider further. I found Dr. Legge a man of 
 God, and soon disclosed all my heart to him. 
 He advised me to do nothing rashly, but look 
 around, and make inquiries, and watch prayer- 
 fully for the moving of the cloud of Provi- 
 dence. ' After ten or twelve days, perhaps you 
 will see your way ; in the mean time you are 
 welcome to a bed, and the room you have been 
 in, in this house.' This was kind. I thanked 
 God, and took courage." 
 
 After residing about three weeks under the 
 hospitable roof of Dr. Legge, Mr. Piercy hired 
 rooms, one of which, capable of containing 
 about sixty persons, he turned into a preach- 
 ing-place for the English soldiery. He, at the 
 same time, commenced visiting the sick sol- 
 diers in the hospital ; and, under the kind di- 
 rection of Dr. Herschberg, of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, applied himself to the acqui- 
 sition of some knowledge of medicine, with a 
 view to using it for missionary purposes. The 
 Lord blessed his labors among the soldiers and 
 their wives, and about twenty were soon for- 
 med into a society, of whose sincerity he had 
 
292 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 Sood hope Those among whom ho had la- 
 orcd showed a disposition to contribute to 
 his support ; and, though his own funds were 
 expended much sooner than he expected, what 
 they raised, coupled with small sums sent by 
 friends in England, enabled him to devote all 
 his time to mission work, without taking any 
 secular employment, as, when going out, he 
 had anticipated that he might be obliged 
 to do. 
 
 From the first, he looked upon his stay in 
 Houg-kong as but temporary, and was making 
 inquiries, with a view to select a station on the 
 Chinese mainland. After montlis of useful 
 labor among the soldiery at Hong-koiig, he 
 decided on placing himself at Canton, and 
 there he received from Dr. Hobson, also of the 
 London Missionary Society, the same brother- 
 ly kindness which he had previously received 
 from Dr. Legge. He gives this account of 
 the prospects : " As to the field before me, I 
 need not say that it is large. I am a tempo- 
 rary resident in a house not far from the fac- 
 tories, close to the river, and to a ferry which 
 9,000 persons frequently pass in a day. It is 
 a little way into the western suburbs, over 
 which, from a lofty veranda, I have an exten- 
 sive view. I can look two miles to the west, 
 and two and a half to the north, and in this 
 small space are crowded the abodes and per- 
 sons of 400,000, if not 500,000 human beings. 
 Through every street of this given space I 
 can pass unmolested, in many places enter 
 shops, and leave a tract or speak a few min- 
 utes with the people. I think I perceive a 
 difference in the treatment of foreigners since 
 November last. The free intercourse of the 
 missionary families with the people has had a 
 very beneficial effect. Freedom of movement 
 in the streets and lanes of this suburb is now 
 a settled point. As to the people themselves, 
 there is a moral and mental apathy respecting 
 the truth, which is a great discouragement to 
 the missionary. This must be stated. Yet 
 still, numbers are willing and some d^irous, to 
 receive Christian books and tracts. They 
 come into the preaching-rooms, and, in many 
 instances, pay close attention to the speaker. 
 Spiritual apathy and death are stamped deep 
 in the soul. Few ask questions, unless you 
 enter into conversation with them ; and a sin- 
 cere inquirer after God is seldom met with. 
 Their thoughts seem to be : ' This doctrine is 
 good for foreigners, but it is of no use to us : 
 we have our own sages, whose wisdom is un- 
 doubted. Jesus is a sage of the West ; let 
 the foreigners follow him.' The idolatry and 
 temple rites have no hold of their hearts, but 
 as seasons of show and mirth, of amusement 
 and relaxation from business. In this field 
 are found rich and poor, learned and unlearned 
 in vast numbers. If a Chinese is of ecjual value 
 with any other human being, what a number 
 of islands and large tracts of territory else- 
 where will even this city outweigh ! " 
 
 After a short residence in Canton, Mr. 
 Piercy offered himself to this society as an 
 agent ; and, taking from " Grindrod's Com- 
 pendium " the questions usually put to a can* 
 didate for the ministry at a district meeting, 
 gave written answers ; asking that, under the 
 peculiarities of the case, this should be ac- 
 cepted as an examination. The following is 
 his account of his mode of labor : " As to 
 what I am doing here, I wish I could say I am 
 able to do much, but not so ; my work is 
 nearly all preparatory, yet I will give you an 
 idea of my- daily engagements. Rising early, 
 the first hour is spent in prayer and reading 
 the Scriptures ; then, till eight o'clock, I read 
 or write in English, and answer a letter, if 
 pressing. The forenoon is mainly spent in the 
 study of the Chinese colloquial dialect. At 
 twelve service is held in a room below this. 
 Here, though I have not yet commenced to 
 deliver consecutive addresses, I seek to be use- 
 ful, after an address by the native teacher, who 
 labors here. I try to engage some of the peo- 
 ple on the subject of discourse, and make in- 
 quiries as to the various statements the 
 preacher has made. Our congregations are 
 not very large. Yet, day by day, they are en- 
 couraging and attentive. Tracts are given to 
 all that desire them. After service, I gener- 
 ally return to my room, and study the book 
 language, the classics, «fec., and get new words. 
 Part of the afternoon I spend in itinerating 
 through the city. From six to seven, Dr. 
 Hobson's teacher assists me. Then I spend 
 an hour till eight in instructing my boy, and , 
 talking with my old teacher on the practical! 
 truths of God's word. Afterward, for anoth(^ 
 hour, I read some spirit-stirring book in En] 
 lish ; then self-examination, review of n 
 labors, and prayer to God for mercy to pa 
 don and grace to keep me, close the duties < 
 the day. Often I have found this quiet hou 
 when all the bustle of this great city is hushe 
 a season of hallowed enjoyment. Such is t| 
 general routine. Nothing breaks it except i 
 visit to a temple, or to see an idolatrous procei 
 sion, which is a good opportunity to distribuft 
 some tracts ; perhaps a visit to one of the mii 
 sionary families. Dr. Hobson has kindly lei 
 me the second part of Dr. Morrison's Dictioi 
 ary, which is a great help. He, together witi 
 Mrs. Hobson, manifests a most affectionat 
 interest towards me, and they are even anxioi* 
 that my personal piety should not droop." 
 
 While these communications were on the 
 way from China, a friend in England was 
 urging the Committee on. One missiont 
 student at Richmond was so desirous of goil 
 out to join Mr. Piercy, that he would gh ' 
 have done so, without promise of sustenanc 
 in the hop6 of finding some situation whereb;<j 
 to support himself. Another young minist 
 had for years his heart set upon China. Ji 
 before the time Mr. Piercy 's communicatioc 
 reached the Secretaries, urgent requests to b| 
 
CHINA. 
 
 293 
 
 came from both these brethren. At the 
 . ;uuo time, also, the Treasurer of the Society, 
 Mr. Farmer, who had previously offered a 
 ilii)iisand pounds for this mission in ten annual 
 instalments, when six had been paid, said that 
 the day two missionaries sailed to join Mr. 
 i^icrcy, he would complete the payment of 
 the whole sum, and would thenceforth give 
 one hundred per annum for the Chinese mis- 
 sion. Other no less praiseworthy instances of 
 Christian liberality, helped to show the Com 
 mittee that, in undertaking the responsibility 
 of a mission to China, they would have with 
 them a large amount of practical sympathy 
 from the lovers of the souls of men. The 
 Committee felt that a providential call was 
 now plainly made upon them, and though 
 deeply regretting their inability to do justice 
 to other needy fields, saw that to withhold aid 
 any longer from China would not increase 
 their ability to strengthen old missions. 
 They therefore resolved, in dependence on the 
 bounty of God, to place China on the list of 
 their stations, adopting Mr. Piercy as a mis- 
 sionary, and sending out two brethren, Messrs, 
 William R. Beach and Josiah Cox, with Miss 
 Wannop, a trained teacher from the West- 
 minster Normal Institution. They sailed on 
 the 20th of January, 1852, and arrived safely 
 at Canton, and have entered upon the duties 
 of the mission. For the preserft, they are 
 mainly occupied in learning the Chinese lan- 
 guage. 
 
 They relieve their arduous toil by the distri- 
 bution of tracts, and seek, in all such ways as 
 may open to them, to spread the knowledge 
 and influence of divine truth. Mr. Piercy has 
 commenced preaching in a room in his own 
 house, which was opened as a chapel in June 
 last, and the continual kindness of Dr. Hob- 
 son has allowed him the occasional service of 
 Leang Afa, the first convert of Protestant mis- 
 sionaries in China. This venerable man, who 
 was baptized by Dr. Milne, in 1816, preaches 
 once on the Lord's day in the Methodist 
 Chapel. Mr. Piercy takes the other service. 
 A school for boys has also been commenced 
 during the past year, and Mrs. Piercy will 
 probably do something on behalf of the females 
 when she is better acquainted with the collo- 
 quial dialect of Canton. Mr. Piercy has 
 translated the first catechism and part of the 
 second, for the use of the mission schools ; 
 and some portions of the Scripture narratives 
 have been printed under his direction, to be 
 used as tracts. The missionaries have engaged 
 to distribute ten thousand copies each of the 
 New Testament, to be supplied by the " Mil- 
 lion Testament Fund," if spared, during the 
 coming year. 
 
 The instrumentality by which this great 
 work was commenced was humble, and to the 
 eye of human wisdom unpromising. The 
 brethren to whom the solemn charge is com- 
 mitted, are young, and the measure of support 
 
 that can be bestowed upon the enterprize is 
 but small ; but in all these points of natural 
 weakness, we see cause for both seeking and 
 expecting the strength that is above nature. 
 Their labors, if they receive grace to be faith- 
 ful, will do something toward the conversion 
 of the most populous country in existence. The 
 strength of the Wesleyan mission in China, at 
 the close of 1853, was three missionaries, one 
 catechist, one preaching place, and sixteen 
 church members. — Annual Reports, Mission- 
 ary Notices, and London Watchman. — Rev. W. 
 Butler. 
 
 Rhenish Missionary Society. — This soci- 
 ety sent out Mr. Gutzlaff, about the year 1830, 
 who displayed extraordinary activity, soon be- 
 came perfectly master of the language, and 
 then made frequent journeys through the coast 
 countries of China, sometimes hundreds of 
 leagues up the rivers. The Christian Scrip- 
 tures, which he was most intent on circulating, 
 were everywhere received with the most in- 
 tense eagerness. He availed himself of every 
 method, even during the war, for putting or 
 conveying copies of the Christian Scrip- 
 tures into the hands of the Chinese. The 
 Chinese plenipotentiaries themselves, who had 
 to treat with the English, received, after the 
 war, copies of the Scriptures from his hands. 
 
 This society now have a mission in the 
 Quang-tung province, which has about eighty 
 converts, and occupies five preaching places, 
 — six native evangelists being employed. It 
 is stated that the brethren at this post have 
 access to about a million and a half of people. 
 Another German missionary in the same pro- 
 vince states, that he has access to about ninety 
 TOWNS AND villages, somc of which contain 
 ten thousand souls. 
 
 Canton Baptist Missionary Society. — 
 This society is composed chiefly of native 
 Christians, and supports Rev. Mr. Ro- 
 berts, who first went out by himself in 1835, 
 and was subsequently supported by the 
 Baptist Board, but has since been separated 
 from it. He has a number of native assist- 
 ants. Two small chapels were opened in 1845, 
 where preaching was kept up on the Sabb,ath. 
 In another hired house, about two miles below 
 the foreign factories, a room was fitted up, to 
 accommodate 80 or 90, where preaching was 
 also maintained. Here the missionary and his 
 principal assistant reside. Jan. 19, 1845, 
 Wun, a Chinaman, was baptized, after several 
 months' instruction, and a theological class of 
 eight or ten was maintained. A number of 
 books and tracts had also been printed and 
 circulated. 
 
 Basle Missionary Society. — This society 
 have a mission at Hong-kong, with three mis- 
 sionaries, five native catechists, and ninety 
 communicants ; but we have not been able 
 to obtain any particular history of its operar 
 tions. 
 
d94 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 OENKRAL TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 Ijondon Miss. Soc 
 
 American Board 
 
 Am. Episcopal Church. . . . 
 
 Am. Bap. Union 
 
 South. Bap. Conv 
 
 Church Miss. Soc 
 
 Gkjn. Bap. Miss. Soc. . . . 
 Meth. Epis. Ch. North and South. 
 
 Presbyterian Board 
 
 English Weslejans 
 
 Seventh Day Baptists 
 
 Free Ch. Scotland 
 
 Rhenish Miss. Soc 
 
 Canton Bap. Miss. Soc 
 
 Basle Miss. Soc 
 
 Totals 
 
 1807 
 1830 
 1835 
 1842 
 1844 
 1845 
 1845 
 1846 
 1844 
 1850 
 1847 
 1850 
 1830 
 1845 
 
 26 69 
 
 
 13 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 2 
 14 
 
 40 
 
 2 24 
 
 64 
 26 
 24 
 14 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 34 
 
 16 
 
 351 12 
 
 93 
 
 30 
 
 100 
 
 5 
 100 
 100 
 111 
 
 376 20 436 29 
 
 The Chinese Revolution. — One of the 
 most -wonderful political and moral move- 
 ments in national history is the revolution 
 now in progress in China. It is wonderful 
 both in its origin and in its progress. The 
 leader of the insurgents, known as Tien- 
 TEH, Tae Ping Wong, and Hung Sow Chuen, 
 according to the accounts that have been pub- 
 lished, received his first ideas of Christianity 
 from a tract handed him by Leang-Afa, at 
 the triennial examination at Canton, in 1834. 
 About fourteen years later he placed himself 
 under the religious instruction of Rev. I. J. 
 Roberts, missionary at Canton, and at one 
 time desired baptism, but subsequently he ta- 
 citly withdrew his request for reasons un- 
 known. Mr. Roberts regarded him as vision- 
 ary in his religious views. From Canton he 
 returned into the Kwang-si province, and there 
 proclaimed his views of Christianity. There 
 he met with those who sympathized with him 
 in abhorrence of the popular idolatry and at- 
 tachment to Christianity, and he and his 
 friends soon became the objects of persecution 
 by the government. They were imprisoned 
 and subjected to such cruelties that one or 
 more of them died. The survivors were driven 
 to arms in self-defence. They issued a proclar 
 mation exposing the corruptions of the govern- 
 ment, and calling on the people to unite with 
 them in defence of their rights. The op- 
 pressed flocked to their standard, and Provi- 
 dence crowned their arms with success. Army 
 after army was sent to crush the infant rebel- 
 lion, but under God the infant was too 
 strong for the Imperial legions. The Im- 
 
 perialists were frequently routed, not only in 
 Kwang-si, but by the advancing insurgents in 
 Hupoh and Honan ; and ultimately Nanking, 
 Ching kiang-foo, and other important cities, 
 fell into their hands. No mercy is shown to 
 the Tartars, but men, women and children 
 are indiscriminately slaughtered. By the last 
 accounts they were advancing upon Peking. 
 Though we cannot as yet predict the final re- 
 sult, yet judging from the past, and from their 
 rigid discipline, and the great self-denials to 
 which the revolutionary soldiejs cheerfully sub- 
 mit, it would seem probable that victory must 
 ultimately crown their efforts, and that the 
 present idolatrous dynasty must soon fall. 
 If the primary object of this movement had 
 been of a political nature, it seems hardly 
 probable that the insurgents would, have ven- 
 tured on attacking the popular superstitions 
 by the destruction of the idols. They appear, 
 the rather, to have been impelled to this bold 
 and fearless measure by strong religious feel- 
 ing. They seem to have partaken of the 
 genuine Puritan spirit. At all events, they 
 are true Iconoclasts, the legitimate successors of 
 the renowned Claude of Turin. 
 
 Their religious views could not have been 
 received from the Romanists. They are of a 
 decidedly Protestant type. Nor can ,Ave reason- 
 ably suppose that the religious element of this 
 revolution was derived from any one individual 
 or body of men ; it is rather the consequence 
 of the joint influence of the various Protestant 
 missions in China, and on its borders. The 
 leaven of Christianity has been difiiising itself 
 for years in the popular mind, preparing the 
 
CHINA. 
 
 295 
 
 way for the revolution which now threatens 
 the very existence of the present corrupt, idol- 
 atrous and oppressive dynasty, and promises 
 to open the door to the preaching of the true 
 Gospel throughout China. It is not strange 
 tliat amid this moral fermentation much of 
 . rror in opinion and irregularity in practice 
 mid be evolved, especially considering the 
 ite of the popular mind. It is rather a won- 
 Cicv that in the principles and practice of the 
 i;isurgents there should be so much to admire 
 itl heartily approve. The One Living and 
 le God is their only object of religious wor- 
 lip, and to his aid they attribute all their 
 success, looking to Him for victory. God is 
 daily and unitedly worshiped in the camp 
 and the Sabbath is strictly observed. The 
 ten commandments they regard as their 
 rule of life ; and the Christian Trinity, the vi- 
 carious atonement of Christ, repentance, and 
 faith in Him, are prominent articles of their 
 faith. Opium and tobacco are rigorously pro- 
 hibited. They have begun to print the Word 
 of God, and to publish religious tracts. 
 
 Eev. Dr. Taylor, whose name has been men- 
 tioned in connection with the mission of the 
 Methodist Episcopal Church South, visited the 
 camp of the revolutionists, while he was at 
 Shanghai. He succeeded, after great expo- 
 sures, in reaching the city of Ching-kiang-foo, 
 which was then their head-quarters. He threw 
 himself at once upon the mercy of the in- 
 surgents, who demanded of him the object of 
 his visit. This he refused to disclose till he 
 was conducted into the presence of the chief. 
 " On my way," he says, " as I passed along, I 
 frequently heard the sound of people chanting ; 
 and inquiring of my attendants what was the 
 meaning of these sounds, I was told that the 
 people were worshiping God, and that it was 
 the hour of morning worship. I saw idols 
 thrown down in all directidns as I passed 
 through the streets, and I was frequently sa- 
 luted by the term ' brother.' This was per- 
 fectly new, for at Canton the appellation is 
 ' foreign devil ; ' and while walking in the 
 suburbs of Canton, you will hear this perhaps 
 a hundred times. I at last arrived at the 
 head-quarters, and after passing through a num- 
 ber of gateways, on either side of which were 
 curtains of yellow silk, and a great deal of em- 
 broidered drapery of various kinds, for a dis- 
 tance of upwards of 300 or 400 yards from the 
 street, I came at last to the inner recess, and 
 there I was requested to sit. Again I was in- 
 terrogated as to my object, but I said I must 
 communicate with the chief. He presently 
 made his appearance, but, owing to the sim- 
 plicity of his dress, I for some time doubted 
 whether he was the chief. In order to remove 
 my doubts, he took his seat in the middle of 
 the hall, and his attendants arrayed him in his 
 robes. And when I was persuaded he was the 
 man, I opened my carpetrbag, spread before 
 him the Gospels, the Acts, and the Tracts, and 
 
 told him the object of my visit, whicti was to 
 give him a complete knowledge of the doc- 
 trines of Christianity. He seemed grateful 
 for the books, and entertained me hospitably. 
 The hour of breakfast was approaching, and 
 they had morning prayer before breakfast. He 
 and his attendants were seated in this large 
 hall, on cushioned chairs ; one individual read 
 a portion of Scripture, and then they chanted 
 some hymns, which the leader probably had 
 composed. At the close of these hymns, I 
 noticed that they chanted a literal translation 
 of the Doxology. After this they all took their 
 cushions, placed them on the pavement, kneel- 
 ed on them, closing their eyes, and lifting up 
 their faces towards heaven, while the secretary 
 of the chief (I think it was,) read a prayer. 
 At the close of this we proceeded to breakfast 
 in the adjoining hall. As a guest it would 
 have been etiquette to have commenced with 
 my " chop sticks " first ; but I waited, thinking 
 they would ask a blessing. This I told them, 
 when they informed me it was their custom, but 
 it had been included in the previous prayer. I 
 explained to them that it was not exactly our 
 course, and asked to be allowed to do so ; 
 which they requested me to do, and I did it 
 accordingly in Chinese." 
 
 • Mr. Taylor became fully acquainted with 
 the military resources and ability of the insur- 
 gent army, and entertains a strong conviction 
 of their ultimate success. He says : 
 
 " I ascertained that these people were sin- 
 cere worshipers of the one true God ; that they 
 had sworn the extermination of idolatry in 
 every form ; that they were exceedingly friend- 
 ly to foreigners, and expressed themselves de- 
 sirous of becoming more instructed in Chris- 
 tianity, only the difficulties at present were so 
 great, that they thought I had better wait for 
 some months. This movement has for its ob- 
 ject the overthrow of the Tartar dynasty, and 
 the establishment of the old Chinese Govern- 
 ment. Therefore it is strictly a patriotic move- 
 ment ; and we are in the habit, in China, rather 
 of calling them * patriots ' than * insurgents.' " 
 
 As Christians, we cannot but regard this re- 
 markable movement with the deepest interest ; 
 and in view of its developments hitherto, we are 
 compelled to acknowledge that it is the finger 
 of God. We hope and pray that China's re- 
 demption from the thraldom of sin and Satan 
 is near at hand. The Lord will hasten his 
 work in his time. 
 
 Concluding Remarks. — In view of the few 
 conversions connected with the labors of Pro- 
 testant missionaries inChina, it may seem as if 
 little had yet been accomplished. But such 
 would not be a fair conclusion, considering the 
 short time that has elapsed since China was 
 opened to Christian missions. With the ex- 
 ception of that at Canton, no Protestant mis- 
 sion was commenced in China previous to 
 1842. In such a field as China, where idola- 
 try is very strongly fortified, and where cus- 
 
20C 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 toins and opinions arc sanctified and made 
 A'enerable by antiquity, much preparatory 
 work must be iwrformed before any very per- 
 ceptible results appear. Much preparatory 
 work has been performed, and some fruit has 
 already apwared. They have sown in tears, 
 others shall reap in joy, and ultimately both 
 sower and reaper shall rejoice together. It is 
 no small thing that already several translations 
 of the Scriptures have been made, generally 
 intelligible and faithful : a work which the 
 Catholics have not done after centuries of mis- 
 sionary labor, and the professed conversion of 
 hundreds of thousands of souls. The prepa- 
 ration and wide circulation of a great number 
 of valuable works, religious and scientific, is a 
 work not to be despised, to say nothing of the 
 helps to the acquisition of the Chinese which 
 have been furnished. It is something that 
 valuable missionary locations at the several 
 posts have been secured, and numerous cha- 
 pels built in these cities, in which the Gospel 
 is statedly preached to many thousands of 
 souls. It is impossible to calculate the influ- 
 ence which has already gone out from these 
 humble Christian sanctuaries. The name of 
 Christ, the Christian Sabbath, and the essen- 
 tial doctrines of the Gospel are already some- 
 what extensively known, if not reverenced", 
 where a few years since, no ray of Gospel 
 light had penetrated. Many children have 
 learned to lisp the name of Jesus ; and besides 
 living native Christians, some pious Chinese 
 are now, as we hope, with Christ in heaven. 
 "We might point to the present revolution, as 
 in its religious character the fruit of Protes- 
 tant missionary labor, the ultimate influence of 
 which, no finite mind can predict. But if not 
 an individual soul had been converted nor any 
 perceptible influence exerted upon the public 
 mind by all the efforts of missionaries in 
 China and its neighborhood, we should be 
 under no less obligation to pray and labor and 
 suffer for the salvation of its benighted and 
 perishing millions. The command is to preach 
 the Gospel to every creature, and the greater 
 the obstacles to the accomplishment of this 
 work, the greater should be our efforts till this 
 dark land shall be illumined with its pre- 
 cious light. Upon it a few saving drops of 
 mercy have already fallen, which may be re- 
 garded as an earnest of the rich au*d abun- 
 dant spiritual blessings yet to be poured upon 
 the land of Sinim. 
 
 CHINESE EVANGELICAL SOCIETY : 
 The principal object of this society is to send 
 out Christian medical men to China. Rev. W. 
 Lobscheid and wife have sailed during the past 
 year ; and they are expected to labor at Sai- 
 heong. Two young men are in training for the 
 missionary work ; and the society has agreed 
 to support three Chinese boys and a young 
 Malay in the school of the Rev. J. G. Bausun, 
 at Pinang, with a view to their becoming evan- 
 gelists. Christians of different denominations 
 
 unite in sustaining this missionary organiza- 
 tion. It is located in London. 
 
 CHINESE EVANGELIZATION SOCI- 
 ETY : In addition to European agents, six 
 colporteurs are employed in distributing the 
 Scriptures and tracts ; and in many places they 
 have been kindly received. The society has 
 also assisted the Rev. I. J. Roberts to prose- 
 cute his labors. Before the end of the year, 
 the society hopes to be able to print the entire 
 Scriptures in Chinese. (London.) 
 
 CHINESE SOCIETY for Furtliering tlie 
 Promulgation of the Gospel in China and the 
 Adjacent Coufitries, by means of Native Evan- 
 getists. — This society was formed recently at 
 London, during the visit of Dr. Gutzlaff to 
 England. Its object is to incite to prayer for 
 China, to diffuse information in regard to the 
 evangelization of that great empire, and to 
 aid those who enter that field. It is altogether 
 " unsectarian." 
 
 CHINTAJ)REPETTAH : a station of the 
 American Board, belonging to the Madras 
 mission, in eastern Hindostan. 
 
 CHINSURAH : A town in the province 
 of Bengal, on the west side of the Hoogly 
 river, eighteen miles north of Calcutta. Po- 
 pulation about 30,000. It became a station 
 of the Loudon Missionary Society in 1813. 
 
 CHITTAGONG : Capital of a district of 
 the same name, at the southern extremity of 
 Bengal, with the Burman empire on the east, 
 and the sea on the west. It is 340 miles east 
 of Calcutta, and is much resorted to by Eu- 
 ropeans in Bengal, on account of the benefi- 
 cial effects of the climate, seas, and salt-water 
 bathing. Here the two idolatrous systems of 
 Brahma and Budha come in contact, and the 
 influence of caste is feeble. 
 
 CHUMMORAH : A Karen village in Bri- 
 tish Burmah, 60 miles from Maulmain, and an 
 out-station of the Maulmain mission of the 
 American Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
 CHUNAR: In the north of Hindostan, 
 near Benares, and a station of the Church of 
 England Mission. 
 
 CIIUPRA: a station of Gosner's Missionary 
 Society, in India, 30 miles W. N. W. of Patna, 
 in the province of Bahar, on the north side of 
 the Ganges. 
 
 CHUNDICULLY: A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in the Jaffna district, Cey- 
 lon, being a suburb of the town of Jaffna. 
 
 CHUMIE : Station of the United Scotch 
 Presbyterian Church in Kaffraria, South Af- 
 rica, one missionary. 
 
 CHURCH OF ROME : The Roman Cath- 
 olic Church, or that which recognises the pri- 
 macy of the Bishop of Rome, at one time em- 
 braced all, or nearly all, Christendom. Several 
 of the eastern churches, at various times, adopt- 
 ed ideas which were condemned as heretical or 
 schismatical, by the bishop of Rome, and those 
 who embraced them were cut of from the Ro- 
 man communion. These formed the mass of 
 
CHURCH OP ROME. 
 
 297 
 
 those v.'lio followed the Greek, Armenian, Chal- 
 daic, and Syrian rites. A portion, however, 
 of each rite never broke off their connection 
 with Rome, or soon returned to it, and are 
 called by Catholic ^vi-iters " United." In the 
 West, the greatest secession, that of the Refor- 
 mation, took place in the 15th century, and in 
 several countries of northern Europe new sym- 
 bols were introduced, and the belief and prac- 
 tices of the Church of Rome proscribed by se- 
 peualties ; under this state of things many, 
 r voluntarily or involuntarily, embraced the 
 ^^ouiiies of the various Reformed Churches. 
 
 At present the Roman Catholic Church is 
 considered as embracing the Latin, Sclavonic, 
 Greek, Armenian, Syro-Chaldaic, and Coptic 
 rites, which differ only in the language and 
 incidentals of their liturgy^ and in some points 
 of discipline : the greatest difference being the 
 celibacy of the clergy and communion under 
 one kind, which are almost exclusively confined 
 to the followers of the Latin rite, never having 
 obtained in the East. 
 
 These various rites are jealously guarded as 
 ancient forms, in many cases of apostolical 
 origin, and persons are not without great diffi- 
 culty allowed to pass from one to another or 
 even communicate, although they may worship 
 in churches of other rites. It accordingly hap- 
 pens in some parts that there will be bishops 
 of different rites in the same city, and in Lem- 
 berg, in Austrian Poland, there are three, the 
 Latin, United Greek, and United Armenian. 
 
 The doctrines held by all these churches are 
 the same, and their form of church government 
 is identical. The superior clergy consists of 
 priests, bishops, and archbishops, some few of the 
 latter being styled Patriarchs. The inferior 
 clergy, or those in minor orders, consist of the 
 deacons, and some subordinate grades, which 
 differ in number and name in the different rites, 
 and have apparently differed at times in the 
 same rite. In most churches these orders are 
 merely used as steps to the priesthood, and are 
 no longer real offices in practice. 
 
 The Bishop of Rome, commonly called the 
 Pope, is Patriarch of the Latins, and as suc- 
 cessor of St. Peter, Primate or Supreme Pon- 
 ff of the various rites. In the government of 
 •Lurch, his immediate Council is the Col- 
 of Cardinals, whose number is limited to 
 seventy, and in whom resides the elective power 
 on the demise of a Pope. 
 
 The statistics of the Church of Rome are not 
 easily estimated. The following will perhaps 
 be not far from the truth : 
 
 Latin Rile.— Western Europe and Colonies. . . .164,000,000 
 Greek JRife.— United Greeks in Greece, Turkey ' 
 
 Russia, and Poland - ■ 
 
 Sclavonic RUe.—myria,, Dalmatia, Poland. . . . H 5,000,000 
 Aimenian Rite. — United Armenians in Turkey, 
 
 Poland, India, Persia 
 
 Syro-Chaldaic Rite. — Maronites, Chaldees.Uni 
 
 ted Copts, &c 5,000,000 
 
 184,000,000 
 
 The Latin Catholics are by far the most 
 
 numerous. In Italy, Austria, Bavaria, Bel- 
 gium, France, Spain, and Portugal, as well as 
 Spanish and Portuguese America, the Roman 
 Catholic is the religion of the people, in some 
 places established by law, and supported by 
 the government, in others, as Spain, France, 
 Sardinia, Austria, New Grenada, Hayti, more 
 or less fettered by civil laws, which hamper 
 the freedom of the clergy in the exercise of 
 their functions. 
 
 In the British Isles, Holland, the Protestant 
 states in Germany, Switzerland, Norway, Swe- 
 den, Denmark, and the Russian Dominions, 
 members of the Church of Rome are subject 
 to disabilities more or less severe, and the pre- 
 sence of their clergy rather connived at than 
 recognized by the state. In all, the church is 
 regularly organized, and governed by bishops, 
 sometimes titular, and thus forming a regular 
 hierarchy, as in Ireland, England, Switzerland, 
 and Germany, at others simply vicars apostolic 
 missionary bjshops, commonly called bishops 
 in partibus infidelium, as the see of which they 
 bear the title is now in some Mohammedan or 
 heathen country. In the United States, mem- 
 bers of the Roman Catholic Church are in 
 some states deprived of certain rights, but the 
 exercise of their religion is not fettered by any 
 law. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW OF THE LATIN RITE. 
 Country Arbps.Bps. Clergy. Population. 
 
 Italy 
 
 Spain 
 
 Portugal 
 
 Germany 
 
 France 
 
 Belgium 
 
 British Empire 
 
 Holland 
 
 Denmark 
 
 Norway and Sweden 
 
 Russia 
 
 Greece 
 
 Turkey 
 
 Turkey in Asia 
 
 India and Further India. 
 
 CHiinese Empire 
 
 Other parts 
 
 Africa (various parts) . 
 Oceanica 
 
 AMERICA. 
 
 Britlsli Possessions . . 
 
 United States 
 
 Mexico 
 
 Guatiraala 
 
 New Granada 
 
 Venezuela 
 
 Ecuador 
 
 Peru 
 
 Bolivia 
 
 Chili 
 
 Buenos Ayres 
 
 Brazil 
 
 Paraguay 
 
 Spanish West Indies. 
 
 44 
 
 216 
 
 
 8 
 
 47 
 
 
 3 
 
 20 
 
 
 13 
 
 70 
 
 
 1ft 
 
 65 
 
 40,000 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 6 
 
 44 
 
 4,000 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 10 
 
 2 
 
 18 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 34 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 220 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 2 
 
 23 
 
 
 7 
 
 32 
 
 1,600 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 2 
 6 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 2 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 110 
 
 691 
 
 
 17,000,000 
 20,000,000 
 
 9,000,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 3,000,000 
 
 164,000,000 
 
 Support of the Clergy. — Prior to the Refor- 
 mation, the Catholic clergy possessed large 
 estates and received tithes in all parts of Ea. 
 
298 
 
 CHURCH OF ROME. 
 
 rope. In the rcijrn of Edward VI. the llcgcnts 
 se&ed much of the church property in England, 
 and in tlie reign of Elizabeth, the residue, with 
 the tithes, was transferred to the now estab- 
 lishetl church. Since then, the Catholic clergy 
 in England and Ireland, as well as in Scot- 
 land, depend on the voluntary contributions of 
 their flocks. The same is the case in Holland, 
 Protestant Germany, and the Scandinavian 
 kingdoms, in the last of which the Catholic 
 religion has been most carefully watched and 
 crushed. 
 
 In France the revolution of 1789 swept 
 from the Catholic clergy all their property and 
 tithes ; and, on the re-establishment of Chris- 
 tianity by Napoleon, a regular pay was estab- 
 lished for all clergy, whether Catholic, Pro- 
 testant, or Jewish, which still subsists. In 
 1834 a similar step was taken in Spain, and 
 all church property was seized by the State, 
 which professes to give a salary to each cler- 
 gyman. In Italy, Canada, and parts Of Ger- 
 many, the tithe system still prevails, but will, 
 in all probability, soon be set aside, and other 
 provision made. 
 
 The clergy are commonly spoken of as 
 secular or regular. By secular are meant those 
 living in the world (sa3Culo),the parish priests, 
 cha})lains, &c. : by regulars, those who live 
 according to a certain rule (regula), — that is, 
 members of the various religious orders. These 
 orders consist of men who bind themselves 
 (religare) by the three vows of poverty, chas- 
 tity and obedience, to the rules of the partic- 
 ular institute which they enter. These vows 
 are called vows of religion, themselves reli- 
 gious, and their state of life religion. These 
 associations have in view, first, the sanctificar 
 tion of the members by retirement, mortifica- 
 tion and prayer ; secondly, the service of their 
 neighbor, spiritually or corporally. The houses 
 of religious are governed by superiors, some- 
 times elected by the members, at others ap- 
 pointed by the head of the order, who is gen- 
 erally elected for life. 
 
 The members of the orders are generally 
 divided into choir religious, being priests or 
 persons intended for the priesthood, and lay 
 brothers, who never become priests. The reli- 
 gious orders may be divided into the following 
 classes, viz. : 
 
 Monks liying in Monasteries governed by Abbots, Priors, 
 &c. 
 
 Friars living in Convents, governed by Provincials, Com- 
 missaries, Wardens, &c. 
 
 Regular Clerks living in Colleges, houses, and governed by 
 Provincials, Superiors, &c. 
 
 Besides these orders, and analogous to them, 
 are certain Cmgregatims, the members of 
 which are sometimes bound by vows, but 
 which have never been recognized as religious 
 orders by the head of the church. The num- 
 ber and variety of these orders and congrega- 
 tions is very great, and many no longer exist, 
 having been created to meet exigencies that 
 
 have passed. In the Greek Church, the Basil- 
 ian Monks are almost the only order, as that 
 of St. Nerses among the Armenians. In the 
 Latin Church the most wide-spread and best 
 known are : 
 
 Monastic Orders. — Purely Contemplative.— ^ 
 Carthusian, Cistercian, including Trappists, 
 Vallumbrosa. Contemplative Mixed. — Benedic- 
 tine, Camaldulensian, devoted to education, 
 literature, &c. 
 
 Friars. — Franciscan or Greyfriars, (includ- 
 ing EecoUects, Observantines, Capuchins, Con- 
 ventuals), Dominicans or Black Friars, Augus- 
 tinians or White Friars, Carmelites, Servites, 
 Minims, all devoted to Home and Foreign 
 Missions. Trinitarians, Mercedarians, devoted 
 originally to the redemption of captives from 
 the Turks. 
 
 Regular Clerks. — Society of Jesus, Bar- 
 nabites, devoted to education, home and 
 foreign missions. Regular Clerks of the Pious 
 Schools, and the Ministers of the Sick. 
 
 Congregations. 
 
 Lazarists or Priests of the Mission, devoted to Home and 
 Foreign Missions. 
 
 Priests of the Foreign Missions, devoted to Home and 
 Foreign Missions. 
 
 Oblates, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. 
 
 Marists, or Society of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and 
 Mary, devoted to Negro Missions. 
 
 Picpusians, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions. 
 
 Priests of the Holy Cross, devoted to Instruction. 
 
 Sulpibans and Eudists, devoted to Theological Semi- 
 naries. 
 
 Rodemptorists, Passionists, Order of Cliarity, Oratoriana, 
 Pretrosissimi Sanguinis, devoted to Home Missions. 
 
 Brotherhoods (not priests). 
 
 Brothers of the Christian Schools, devoted to Instruction. 
 Brothers of St. Joseph, devoted to Instruction. 
 Brothers of the Society of Mary, devoted to Instruction. 
 Brothers of St. John, of God, and of Camillas, devoted to 
 Hospitals. 
 
 Besides these orders of men, which embrace 
 many in priests' orders, there are religious or- 
 ders and congregations of women, bound by 
 the three vows of religion, and living under 
 particular rules. There are Benedictine, Do- 
 minican, Franciscan, and Carmelite nuns, all 
 of whom are contemplative. August! nian 
 nuns, devoted to the sick as the Hospital nuns, 
 or to education as the Ursnlines, the Prescntar 
 tion. Visitation, and others, devoted to educa- 
 tion. The Congregations are more extended^ 
 and the vows are generally made for a singlcf 
 year, or some definite period, after which ^"'^ 
 member is free to retire. Among them 
 
 The Ladies of the Sacred Heart, and the Sisters of 
 
 Congregation, devoted to education . 
 Sisters of Charity, devoted to education, hospitals, 
 
 lums, &c. 
 Sisters of Mercy, devoted to education, the poor and i , 
 Sisters of the Good Shepherd, devoted to the care 
 
 Magdalen Asylums. 
 The Little Sisters of the Poor, devoted to the care of 
 
 poor and infirm. 
 The Sisters of Providence, (black), devoted to the educa 
 
 tion of colored girls. 
 
 John G. Shea, Esq. 
 
CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF. 
 
 299 
 
 CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF : 
 
 Tlie principles on which the missions of the 
 Cliurch of Rome are founded, lie in her claim 
 to apostolic succession, and an unbroken chain 
 of title in her clergy to preach the Gospel and 
 administer the sacraments. The missionaries 
 whom she sends out bear the liturgy of their 
 church, its dogmas and practices, which have 
 left their impression on the language and cus- 
 toms of nations. Before the separation of the 
 Eastern Churches from Rome, the Chaldeans 
 had extended their labors to India and Tar- 
 tary, and continued their missions long after 
 embracing the doctrines of Nestorius. The 
 Greeks evangelized much of Poland and Rus- 
 sia ; and on the final rupture between the 
 Greeks and Latins, the churches in those coun- 
 tries generally adhered to the patriarch of 
 Constantinople. The missions of the Latin 
 chuLch were far more varied and extensive. 
 Under the Roman empire, all Italy, Spain, 
 Franco, and Britain, were converted, and em- 
 braced the Latin rite. When these countries 
 were overrun by the barbarians, Rome again 
 sent her missionaries gradually from country 
 to country, the Celts in Ireland and Scotland, 
 the Franks in France, Goths in Spain and 
 Italy, all embraced her forms. The Saxons in 
 England were converted by Augustine and 
 other Benedictine monks from Italy ; then 
 Irish and English monks carried the faith to 
 Germany, Scandinavia, and Iceland, founding 
 churches, which, in their development, extended 
 to Greenland and the coast of North America. 
 By the twelfth century the mass was chanted 
 in Latin from Narraganset Bay to the Baltic 
 and Adriatic. This was chiefly the work of 
 missionaries of the orders of St. Columbanus 
 and St. Benedict. The Crusades and the es- 
 tablishment of the orders of Friars gave a 
 new impulse to the missions. Franciscans 
 and Dominicans carried the faith to India, 
 Tartary, and China, in the 13th century, and 
 throughout Asia planted their convents beside 
 the Nestorian churches. Undeterred by the 
 fanaticism of Islam, they entered the various 
 Mohammedan countries in Asia and Africa, 
 hoping to restore religion on a soil where it 
 had once flourished ; and at the same time 
 struggled successfully with Paganism, which 
 still lingered near the shores of the Baltic. 
 The last missions soon triumphed ; those in 
 central Asia gradually sunk, as wars made it 
 impossible to keep up communication with 
 Europe. In Mohammedan countries the mis- 
 sionaries have, down to the present time, labored 
 almost in vain, no considerable number of the 
 followers of the prophet having ever been at 
 any one period won to the truth. 
 
 The close of the fifteenth century opened 
 to the view of Europe a new world, and a new 
 and free path to India. Spain and Portugal 
 began their career of conquest in both Indies ; 
 missionary zeal was excited, and apostolic men 
 from the various orders, and from the ranks of 
 
 the secular clergy, hastened to attempt the con- 
 version of the natives of the newly discovered 
 regions. In the East, missions were founded 
 in Ilindostan, the East India Islands, Japan, 
 China, Tonquin, Abyssinia ; in America, the 
 half civilized natives of Peru and Mexico were 
 converted, and their descendants now form the 
 mass of the people, and the Church of Rome 
 has enrolled two of Indian blood among her 
 canonized saints. The nomadic tribes from 
 Labrador to Cape Horn were visited; many 
 were completely gained, in other parts reduc- 
 tions were formed, and such as could be per- 
 suaded to enter were instructed alike in the 
 truths of Christianity and the usages of civil- 
 ized life. Close on these discoveries came the 
 religious feuds of the sixteenth century and 
 the defection of nearly every prince in North- 
 ern Europe from the Roman See. State 
 churches were formed in many of the Ger- 
 man States, the Scandinavian kingdoms, Hol- 
 land, England, and Scotland, based on the 
 doctrines of Luther and Calvin. To compel 
 conformity to these, severe laws were passed, 
 and all who adhered to the See of Rome sub- 
 jected to heavy penalties. The Catholic clergy 
 were outlawed, and every attempt made to 
 prevent any educational establishments which 
 might continue the Catholic feeling or a suc- 
 cession of clergy. This led to a new species 
 of mission : colleges were established in Catho- 
 lic countries for the education of their fellow 
 believers in the northern countries, and the 
 training of such as wished to enter the priest- 
 hood ; and from these seminaries, missionaries 
 proceeded to their native country to minister to 
 their brethren, and to gain back such as seemed 
 to repent the late change. Many suffered the pe- 
 nalty of death, but this, as usually happens, only 
 raised up others to fill their places. From this 
 period the Catholic missions are either Home 
 missions for instructing the ignorant and neg- 
 lected in Catholic countries, or those in which 
 the exercise of religion is permitted: Missions in 
 Protestant countries to supply clergy for the 
 Catholic portion : Missions among schismatics 
 to reunite them to Rome ; Missions to Pagan 
 nations. There are no missions intended to ope- 
 rate directly on Protestants of any denomina- 
 tion or Mohammedans, from the fact that any 
 such attempt jeopardized the Catholic body in 
 those countries where penal laws prevail. These 
 missions became at last so important a part 
 of the church government, that Gregory XV. 
 (1621 — 23) instituted the Congregation De 
 Propaganda Fide, which gave a new impulse 
 to the zeal and fervor of missionaries and all 
 interested in the missionary cause. This con- 
 gregation or department consisted of thirteen 
 cardinals, two priests, a religious, and a secre- 
 tary ; and to it exclusively was committed the 
 direction of missions and church matters in 
 mission countries. Considerable sums were 
 bestowed by public and private munificence 
 on this department, and under Urban VIH. 
 
300 
 
 CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OP. 
 
 tho active reformer, a colleffe, usually styled 
 tiie Urban collei^e, or the Propaganda, was 
 oreotetl and rifhly endowed. Here candidates 
 for tlie priesthood and the missions, are re 
 ceived from all quarters of the globe, and a 
 printing-press issues devotional works in a 
 great number of languages. 
 
 Besides this college, there soon rose the Ar- 
 menian College at Venice, the Germanic, Eng- 
 lish, Irish, and Scotch colleges at Rome, the 
 English college at Rheims and Douay, the Irish 
 and Scotch at Paris, the Irish college at Lou- 
 vain and Valladolid, and some others, all in- 
 tended to train the missionaries for their own 
 countries ; and at a later date, the Chinese 
 college at Naples was founded in the same 
 view, and of late years, a missionary college 
 has arisen at Drumcondra. Convents and re- 
 ligious houses of various orders were also found- 
 ed on the continent for natives of the British 
 Isles, and from these also missionaries armually 
 set out for the missions in the English domin- 
 ions. Most of these latter have, however, since 
 disappeared, swept away by the French revo- 
 lution, or transferred to England or the United 
 States. 
 
 II. Missioiiaru Societies. — There are, properly 
 speaking, no missionary societies in the Catho- 
 lic church similar to those among Protestants. 
 Three societies, of quite recent origin, the 
 Society for the Propagation of the Faith, center- 
 ing at Lyons, the Leopoldine Society at Vienna, 
 and the Society of tlie Holy Childhood in France, 
 raise funds by a small weekly contribution, 
 which the directors distribute to various mis- 
 sions, as they think proper, but over the mis- 
 sionaries and stations they exercise no control. 
 The various missions are conducted entirely in- 
 dependent of this aid, relying, in default of it, 
 on other resources. The last named society is 
 made up of children, and has a special object, 
 the raising of money to save and baptize chil- 
 dren exposed to death by their unnatural 
 parents in China and Annara. Besides the 
 aid thus given, some missions have funds es- 
 tablished before the present century, and for- 
 merly French, Spanish, and Portuguese mis- 
 sionaries received a regular stipend from the 
 government. The great mass of the missions 
 at present are individual efforts, supported by 
 the zeal and sacrifices of the bishops and clergy 
 employed on them. 
 
 III. Receipts. — The amount raised in 1852 
 by 
 
 Society for the Propagation of 
 
 the Faith, . . . 3950,000 
 
 Society of the Holy Childhood . 117,000 
 
 $1,067,000 
 
 MISSIONARY STATIONS. 
 Europe. — 1. Among the Protestant States 
 of Europe, the only countries where the Catho- 
 lic church is still a mere mission, are Denmark, 
 Norway, and Sweden. Here the number of 
 
 Catholics is very small, and no details are 
 published, as many severe civil penalties are 
 still enforced against members, and especially 
 converts of the Roman church. The whole 
 number does not probably exceed 150,000. 
 
 2. Turkey. — The United Armenians have 
 an archbishop at Constantinople ; the Latins 
 several bishops and vicars apostolic ; the dis- 
 tinct missions are those of the Franciscans in 
 Moldavia, Jesuits in Herzegovine, and Lazarists 
 at Constantinople and Salonica, the latter 
 aided in their labors by the Sisters of Charity. 
 The whole niynber of Latin Christians is esti- 
 mated at 613,000, and is constantly on the in- 
 crease. 
 
 3. Greece. — In this kingdom there are con- 
 stant accessions to the Latin and United 
 Greek Churches, especially at Athens, Piraeus, 
 Patras, Nauplia, Navariuo, and Heraclia. 
 There are, in this kingdom, and the Ionian 
 republic flourishing missions of the Capuchins 
 and Jesuits. 
 
 Asia — 1. Turkey in Asia. — The Francis- 
 cans have had missions in the Holy Land since 
 the Crusades, which, more or less active at 
 times, are now pushed with energy. The Je- 
 suits have since their origin had missions 
 among the eastern Christians, won many back 
 to Rome, established schools, and raised the 
 standard of clerical instruction. At Antioch, 
 there are Maronite, United Greek, and Sy- 
 rian patriarchs, and elsewhere an Armenian 
 and a Chaldean patriarch, all in communion 
 with Rome ; and the number of Christians 
 who acknowledge the supremacy of Pius IX., 
 is about a million. 
 
 2. Persia. — In this country there is a mis- 
 sion directed by the Lazarists, and protected 
 by France, as well as a United Armenian 
 church well established and tolerated. 
 
 3. India. — The Hindoo mission dates back to 
 the conquest of Goa, by the Portuguese, in 
 1510, and was at first conducted by the Fran- 
 ciscans, Dominicans, and zealous secular priests, 
 Its progress was, however, slow, till the arri- 
 val of St. Francis Xavier, in 1542. By his 
 labors, and those of other Fathers of the S 
 ciety of Jesus, numbers were converged on the 
 Fishery coast, the Islands of Manar and Cey- 
 lon, and Travancore, while the former mis- 
 sionaries renewed their efforts in other parts, 
 and gained to Rome all the Chaldaic Chris- 
 tians who had fallen into Nestorianism. The 
 Jesuit mission is, however, the most celebra- 
 ted, and after Xavier, owed its chief progress, 
 to Robert de Nobili nephew to Pope Marcel-; 
 lus II., who originated the plan of having mis-- 
 sionaries for each caste, adopting the life of 
 each. He himself became a Brahmin-samassi, 
 The Blessed John de Brito, converted the Mara- 
 vas, Aquaviva, at Delhi, won Akbar to the 
 Christian religion, and Goes traversed Thibet 
 and Tartary to Peking. These missions 
 were affected by the overthrow of the Portu- 
 guese and French power in India, by the pear- 
 
CHURCH OF ROME, MSSIONS OF. 
 
 301 
 
 secution of the Danes, by the disputes as to the 
 Malabar rites, by the suppression of the Jesu- 
 its, and by the troubles of the French revo- 
 lution. A large number of converts had, 
 however, been made, and their descendants re- 
 mained faithful. During the Dutch rule in 
 Ceylon, Catholicity was maintained there by 
 the labors of the Portuguese Oratorians. All 
 Hindostan is now divided into Vicariates 
 apostolic, for European and native Christians ; 
 the most extensive Hindoo missions being those 
 of Madura, conducted by the Jesuits ; of My- 
 sore, conducted by the priests of the Foreign 
 Missions ; and of Ceylon, by the priests of the 
 Oratory ; all of which are rapidly gaining the 
 ground lost in darker days. 
 
 Hindostan contains 15 vicariates, 16 bishops, 
 a large number of priests, including 500 native 
 clergymen, and nearly four million of Latin and 
 Chaldee Christians. Ceylon contains 2 vicar- 
 iates, 3 bishops, 150,000 Catholics. 
 
 4. Farther India. — The Tonquin mission was 
 founded by the Jesuit Alexander Ehodes, who 
 labored in that field from about 1624 to 1648, 
 and gathered a church of 30,000 Christians. 
 Driven at last from the country, he originated 
 at Paris the Seminary of the Foreign Missions, 
 founded in 1663, and induced the Holy See to 
 appoint bishops to Tonquin. Since then, the 
 priests of the Foreign Missions have had the 
 chief direction of the mission in Annam and the 
 neighboring province of Su Tchuen, in China. 
 The Jesuits also continued their mission, and 
 by the labors of both, many native clergy were 
 formed. The Cochin China mission was foun- 
 ded about the same time by F. Rossi, and pass- 
 ed also to the Foreign Missions. Both churches 
 have undergone terrible persecutions, even of 
 late years, under the Emperor Minh-Menh, 
 but have steadily increased. Tonquin con- 
 tains six vicariates apostolic, governed by 12 
 bishops. One of these vicariates (Retord's.) in 
 1847, contained 10 European, 91 native priests, 
 200 catechists, and about 200,000 Christians, 
 Another (Gauthier's), 2 bishops, 3 European, 
 43 native priests, 60 catechists, 70,000 Chris- 
 tians. Cochin China contains 3 vicariates 
 apostolic, all directed by clergy of the Semin- 
 ary of the Foreign Missions and native priests. 
 
 Siam, Laos, and Cambodia. — These missions 
 are also directed by the priests of the Foreign 
 Missions and native clergymen. They have 
 been subjected to repeated persecutions, but 
 are now at peace. Ava, Pegu, and Malacca 
 are vicariates, with two bishops and about 
 10,000 Catholics. 
 
 5. China. — The Chinese mission was attempt- 
 ed in tiie thirteenth century, by John de Monte- 
 corvino, who founded a metropolitan See at 
 Peking, which subsisted for over a century. 
 Xavier attempted to restore it in 1552, but 
 died near Canton. After several other at- 
 tempts, the Jesuits Ruggieri and Pazio, 
 founded a mission, which, under the great 
 Matthew Ricci (1584-1610), obtained a per- 
 
 manent fo'oting in the empire. The early Je- 
 suits adopted the dress of literati, and thus se- 
 cured the esteem of the Emperors, and would 
 probably have gained them to Christ, but for 
 the Tartar invasion. After that change, per- 
 secutions began, and as differences arose be- 
 tween the Jesuits on the one side, and the 
 Dominicans in Fokien, and the priests of For- 
 eign Missions in Suchuen on the other, as to 
 the use of certain ceremonies, these dissensions 
 formed a pretext for very severe edicts. For 
 many years the blood of the Chinese Chris- 
 tians and their missionaries flowed in torrents. 
 At present the church enjoys peace, although 
 the insurgents are decidedly hostile to the Chi- 
 nese Catholics, and treat them with great se- 
 verity. 
 
 Among the celebrated Chinese missionaries, 
 may be named Ricci, Schall, and Yerbiest, 
 mathematicians ; Marin, an American, who at- 
 tempted a mission in 1556 ; Lopez, a native 
 Chinese priest and bishop ; Denis de la Cruz, 
 another Chinese, who died at Carthagena, in 
 South America ; Navarrette, Amiot, Sanz, 
 Perboyre, a recent martyr. The suppression 
 of the Jesuits, and the French revolution, se- 
 riously affected these missions, by cutting off 
 a supply of learned and adventurous missiona- 
 ries. Since the restoration of peace in Europe, 
 and especially since the establishment of the 
 Society for the Propagation of the Faith, the 
 mission has recovered much of its former 
 extent. At the present time, China contains 
 15 sees or vicariates, 16 bishops, 84 European 
 priests, 135 native priests, many convents and 
 houses of religious women, and a population of 
 400,000 Catholics. The great mass of the old 
 Jesuit missions are directed by the French 
 Lazarists ; the missions in Suchuen, Yunnan, 
 Quaychoo, and Leaotong, by the priests of the 
 Foreign Missions ; those in Chansi, Chensi, 
 and Houquang, by Italian Franciscans ; those 
 in Fokien, by Spanish Dominicans ; and those 
 in Chantong and Kiangnan, by French Je- 
 suits, who have recently returned. 
 
 6. Corea. — Christianity was introduced here 
 from China about 1632, and has since grown 
 amid persecution of the severest kind. The 
 history of the Corean Church is written in 
 blood. Her first neophyte was a martyr ; her 
 first Chinese apostle, a martyr ; her first native 
 priest, a martyr ; her first European mission- 
 aries, all martyrs. The number of Catholics 
 is about 12,000, directed by a bishop, two Eu- 
 ropean priests, if still alive, and some native 
 clergy. This mission is entrusted to the Se- 
 minary of the Foreign Missions. 
 
 7. Mongol Tartary. — This is a Lazarist mis- 
 sion, directed by a bishop, 3 European, 10 
 native priests, a college seminary, 8 schools, 
 and 5,000 Christians. 
 
 8. Manchuria. — A mission under the priests 
 of the Foreign Missions, with a bishop and 
 some European clergymen. 
 
 9. r/w6e«.— Missions were attempted here in 
 
302 
 
 CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OP. 
 
 the 13tli and 14th centuries, by St. Hyacinth, 
 of Poland, and Odoric of Fruili ; in the 17th 
 conturv, by tiie Jesuits and Capueliins ; but in 
 the interval Ijudhism had grown up and ex- 
 pelled all but the traces of Christianity. The 
 mission was restored in 1846, by the Lazarists, 
 Hue and Gabet Others have followed, and a 
 bishop has lately been appointed. 
 
 Eoft India Islands. — Missions exist on some 
 of these of ancient date, but the data are not 
 very full or recent. 
 
 10. Japan. — Christianity was introduced into 
 this empire in 1549, by St. Francis Xavier, 
 who had converted a Japanese at Goa. During 
 a stay of two years he visited several king- 
 doms, and founded missions which he confided 
 to zealous priests of his order. The faith 
 spread rapidly. In 1562, the Prince of Omura 
 and soon after the Kings of Bungo and 
 Arima, embraced Christianity, and sent a 
 splendid embassy to Pope Gregory XIII. 
 Soon after Taycosoma, a powerful general, 
 usurped the throne, and in 1586 issued a law 
 against Christianity, which his predecessor, 
 Nabunanga, had greatly favored. The num- 
 ber of Christians increased with the persecu- 
 tion, and in 1638, they rose in arms, in Arima, 
 but were crushed by Dutch aid. Since then 
 the faith has been almost entirely extinguished. 
 The number of Christians put to death has 
 been estimated at nearly two millions, and the 
 annals of the Jesuits, Franciscans, and Domi- 
 nicans are filled with narratives of the deaths 
 of members of their orders, in Japan. Be- 
 sides Xavier, the greatest missionaries were 
 Valignani, Father John Baptist, a Spanish 
 Franciscan, Philip of Jesus, a Mexican Fran- 
 ciscan, both crucified at Nangasacki, Father 
 Charles Spinola, &c. 
 
 The last Catholic priest who entered Japan 
 was M. Sedotti, who, in 1709, found means to 
 land, but he was never again heard of. Within 
 a few years great efforts have been made to 
 reach the forsaken Christians, still said to exist 
 in Japan ; and a bishop appointed to the mis- 
 sion has already founded stations on the Lew- 
 Chew islands. 
 
 Africa. — 1. Congo. — ^The earliest missions 
 were those of Congo, begun by the Dominicans, 
 Franciscans, and Jesuits. From 1500 to about 
 1560 the success was great ; the king and many 
 of his people were converted, native priests or- 
 dained, and one raised to the episcopacy. Ca- 
 tholicity flourished here for many years, but 
 insensibly declined for want of priests. The 
 Carmelites established missions in Guinea, the 
 Jesuits in Angola and Loango ; and on these 
 chiefly the Catholics of Congo depended, as 
 late as 1622. In 1645, the Capuchins under- 
 took the mission, headed by Fray FrancisQO 
 de Pampeluna, once a military officer of high 
 rank. This body and their successors con- 
 tinued the mission till about 1700, when Cis- 
 tercians took their place. About the middle of 
 the last century, the priests of the Foreign 
 
 Missions established stations in Loango, and 
 converted many. These missions still exist in 
 several parts. 
 
 2. Barbary. — Missions have from the earliest 
 times been conducted here by Franeiscuns, 
 Dominicans, Trinitarians, and Mercedarians, 
 still later by the Jesuits and Lazarists. The 
 number of Christians is, however, very small, 
 and the clergy do not number a score. 
 
 3. Egypt. — The Latin mission here is due 
 chiefly to the Jesuits, of whom Father Si card 
 was the leader. Many Copts were recalled to 
 the Latin Church, and are now directed by La- 
 zarist missionaries, aided by Brothers of the 
 Christian School. 
 
 4. Abyssinia. — The Portuguese, about 1530, 
 attempted to convert the schismatics of Abys- 
 sinia, and revive morality and learning ; but 
 the efforts and the zeal of the Jesuits failed ; the 
 missionaries were excluded, after a long perse- 
 cution. In 1839, the mission was revived by 
 the Lazarists, and a bishop appointed, while 
 the Galla country was allotted to the Capuchins, 
 in 1846. (See Abyssinia.) 
 
 5. Madagascar. — The first missions among 
 the Malagasies, was begun by the Laaarists, 
 in 1648, and continued till 1674, when Louis 
 XIV. forbid French vessels to stop at the is- 
 land. The mission was revived in 1837, by 
 Mr. Dalmond, who founded the station of 
 Nossibe, in 1840. Since 1845, this mission 
 has been confided to the Jesuits, who have 
 made rapid progress. 
 
 6. Other parts. — Missions have been founded 
 at different spots on the eastern and western 
 coast, which have been discontinued, or are 
 not yet firmly established. That of Guinea, 
 is the most thriving. A bishop was at first 
 selected for it from among the Catholic clergy 
 in the United States; but on the failure of 
 his health, the mission was transferred to the 
 Society of the Sacred Heart of Jesus and 
 Mary, who still administer it. 
 
 OcEANicA. — The first Catholic mission in 
 Oceanica was that of Messrs. Bachelot, Ar- 
 mand, and Short, of the " Congregation of the 
 Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary," at the 
 Sandwich Islands. They began it in 1826, 
 and continued it till their expulsion by the 
 government in 1832. In the following y€ 
 Vicars apostolic were appointed, and missioi 
 begun at Gambler, Tahiti, and for a second 
 time at the Sandwich Islands. These missioi ' 
 are chiefly directed by priests of the society 
 Picpry and the Marists. Other stations wei 
 begun in New Zealand, at Futuna, in tl 
 Marquesas, Nukahwa, and elsewhere. The 
 missions extended so rapidly that several ne 
 vicariates were formed, and in spite of martj 
 dom, disease and shipwreck, they are still 
 vancing. Oceanica now contains 8 bishops, 
 10 vicariates, and 300 missionaries. 
 
 America. 1. Spanish Missions. — Missions 
 were established in all Spanish America, 
 and great numbers were converted, espe- 
 
CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 803 
 
 cially in Mexico and Peru, where their de- 
 scendants are still, the majority mingled 
 with the Spanish race. Even in Cuba the 
 Spanish blood is much mixed with Indian 
 blood. 
 
 The missions among the wild tribes were of 
 a diflFerent character. The most celebrated 
 are "those of the Jesuits in Paraguay and Cal- 
 ifornia, the missions among the Moxos, Abi- 
 pones, in Chili and New Grenada. Few of 
 these are now properly missions, and are mat- 
 ter for a history rather than a gazetteer. 
 
 2. Portuguese Missions. — The missions of 
 Brazil were chiefly conducted by Portuguese 
 Jesuits, who converted several tribes, although 
 their numbers were diminished by the cruelty 
 of the savages on land and pirates at sea. Se- 
 veral of these missions still subsist, but details 
 are not easily accessible as to their numbers 
 and extent. 
 
 3. United States and Canada. — The early 
 Catholic Missions in New Mexico, Florida, 
 and California, were Spanish. The natives of 
 New Mexico were converted, and being now 
 Christians, are not considered a mission. In 
 Florida, while a Spanish province, the Indians 
 were converted by Franciscans, and formed 
 villages on the Apalachicola and around the 
 city of St. Augustine. The English drove 
 these Indians from their villages, and their 
 descendants, now called Seminoles or wander- 
 ers, have lost all traces of Christianity. The 
 Upper California missions were conducted 
 by Franciscans, and till a recent period 
 were in a very flourishing state, but are now 
 destroyed. The Canada missions were be- 
 gun by French Jesuits, in Nova Scotia and 
 Maine, about 1612. The Kecollects followed, 
 succeeded again by the Jesuits. This mission 
 converted the Abenaquis of Maine, now form- 
 ing two villages in the state of Maine and two 
 in Canada; the Hurons of Upper Canada, a 
 part of whom are Catholics, still at Lorette, 
 near Quebec ; a part of the Iroquois or Five 
 nations, who form the three Catholic villages 
 at Caughnawaga, St. Regis and the Lake of 
 the two Mountains ; the Algonquins, who form 
 a mission village, with the last-named band of 
 Iroquois ; the Micmacs of Nova Scotia, now at- 
 tended by the secular clergy; the Montagnais, at 
 Ghicoutimi and Red River, under a bishop and 
 missionaries ; the Ottawas of Lake Superior, 
 who with the Ojibwas and Menomonees are 
 now under the care of Canadian clergy on 
 the north, and on the south, of Bishop Baraga, 
 a philologist, whose talents have been ac- 
 knowledged by government ; the Illinois and 
 Miamis, whose descendants are now on Indian 
 Territory and in Louisiana ; the Arkansas, 
 whose descendants, under the name of Kappas, 
 are also there. 
 
 The Catholics of Maryland began missions 
 among the neighboring tribes, but tribe and 
 mission have '.ong since disappeared. Since 
 the revolutioy and the estabiishment of a Ca- 
 
 tholic hierarchy in the United States, atten- 
 tion has been gradually turned to the Indian 
 missions ; two vicariates are devoted to them 
 alone. That of Upper Michigan contains one 
 bishop, five priests, five schools, and a large 
 number of Catholic Ottawas and Ojibwas ; 
 that of Indian territory with a bishop, eight 
 clergymen, four schools, 5,300 Catholics of the 
 Pottawotaraies, Osages, Miamis, Illinois, Kan- 
 sas, and Kappas. Besides these, there are in 
 the diocese of Milwaukee a Menomonee and 
 an Ojibwa mission ; in that of St. Paul's, Min- 
 nesota, a Sioux, a Winnebago, and three 
 Ojibwa missions ; and in Oregon there are 
 missions among the Waskos, Cayusus, Pointed 
 Hearts and Flatheads, — the Indian Catholics 
 of the territory numbering 3,400. Besides 
 these, a few hundred converted Indians are to 
 be found in California. 
 
 Among the celebrated missionaries in Ameri- 
 ca may be named Anchieta, Bareze, Las Casas, 
 Bertrand, Solano, Gand, Motolinia, Brebeuf, 
 Druilletes, Chaumonot, Jogues, and in later 
 times Marcoux, De Smet, Point, Belcour. 
 
 This is an outline of the widely-extended 
 and much diversified Catholic missions. As 
 to their history, the recent work of Henrion, 
 " Histoire Generale des Missions Catholiques," 
 and the Annals of the Society for the Propaga- 
 tion of the Faith will give a general idea ; but 
 the sources are the accounts of the various re- 
 ligious bodies engaged on the several missions, 
 voluminous works which would alone form a 
 library. — John G. Shea, Esq. 
 
 CHURCH HILL : A station of the 
 Church Missionary Society, on the Island of 
 Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY: 
 
 This Society was formed in the year 1800. The 
 Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 
 and that for the Propagation of the Gospel in 
 Foreign Parts, had long existed, and received 
 the benefactions from the Church of England. 
 But as they both confined themselves chiefly to 
 foreign parts, where Christianity was already 
 embraced, there was, in the view of the friends 
 of Foreign Missions, still room left for a Soci- 
 ety which should consider the heathen as its 
 principal care. 
 
 This Society was organized on the principle 
 of making a specified contribution the condi- 
 tion of membership. Seven governors and a 
 treasurer are elected by the members ; also a 
 general committee, consisting of these officers 
 and twenty-five other members, for the general 
 direction of its affairs. 
 
 The constitution and practice of this Society 
 are regarded by its members and managers as 
 in strict conformity with ecclesiastical princi- 
 ples, as they are recognized in the constitution 
 and practice of the Church of England. It 
 exercises no spiritual or ecclesiastical func- 
 tions ; but is an " institution for discharg- 
 ing the temporal and lay offices necessary 
 
304 
 
 CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 for the preaching of tho Gospel among the 
 heathen. 
 
 Tlie Society was originally designed to ope- 
 rate in Africa and the East, and this is in- 
 corporated in its name, " The Church Mission- 
 ary Society for Africa and the East." But it 
 has extended its operations beyond these 
 bounds. It now has missions in Africa, India, 
 the Mediterranean, theWest Indies, Australasia, 
 and North-west America. The missions of this 
 
 Society, particularly in Africa, India, and New 
 Zealand, have been among the most successful 
 of Protestant missions. Its missionuries have 
 generally been devoted men of God ; and the 
 Holy Spirit has been poured out in a wonder- 
 ful manner upon several of its missions, pro- 
 ducing the most surprising changes in a 
 brief period of time. The state of the mis- 
 sions of this Society in the year 1852 will ap- 
 pear from the following 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 Clergj'men. 
 
 Lay teachers and others 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 t3 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 European. 
 
 Country- 
 
 Native. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 a 
 f. 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 a 
 
 e3 
 
 1 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 West Africa.. 
 
 181C 
 
 15 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 7 
 
 261 
 
 2743 
 
 49 
 
 1061 
 
 800 
 
 1034 
 
 2514 
 
 5409 
 
 Yoruba .... 
 
 1845 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 58 
 
 203 
 
 9 
 
 25 
 
 12 
 
 453 
 
 22 
 
 512 
 
 Mediterranean 
 
 1828 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 East Africa.. 
 
 1846 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Western India 
 
 1820 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 55 
 
 
 n 
 
 55 
 
 31 
 
 
 
 
 
 1621 
 
 North India . . 
 
 1816 
 
 22 
 
 30 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 248 
 
 28 
 
 94 
 
 1087 
 
 115 
 
 5716 
 
 578 
 
 
 564 
 
 0858 
 
 South India.. 
 
 1816 
 
 20 
 
 23 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 11 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 544 
 
 93 
 
 794 
 
 4180 
 
 354 
 
 6734 
 
 3093 
 
 
 
 9827 
 
 Ceylon 
 
 1817 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 124 
 
 25 
 
 21 
 
 371 
 
 101 
 
 2820 
 
 779 
 
 
 111 
 
 3710 
 
 China 
 
 1845 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 2 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 New Zealand 
 
 1814 
 
 21 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 869 
 
 3C 
 
 551 
 
 5749 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 West Indies.. 
 
 1831 
 
 '2, 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 430 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. W. Amer. 
 
 1822 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 38 
 
 454 
 
 23 
 
 295 
 
 275 
 
 76 
 
 92 
 
 738 
 
 Totals .... 
 
 
 109 
 
 m 
 
 ' 
 
 2 
 
 21 
 
 26 
 
 15 
 
 13 
 
 3 
 
 1423 
 
 189 
 
 1834 
 
 15 306 
 
 684 
 
 
 
 
 
 25,710 
 
 This table is condensed from the Eeport of 
 1852. The following summary, from the Report 
 of 1854, shows considerable progress in several 
 particulars : 
 
 Stations 118 
 
 European missionaries . . 152 
 
 East Indian and native missionaries 24 
 
 European lay assistants ... 30 
 
 European female teachers . , 14 
 
 Country-born teachers ... 14 
 
 Native teachers . . . 1681 
 
 Communicants - . . . 17,224 
 Baptisms during the year, adults and 
 
 children 5444 
 
 Estimated attendants on public wor- 
 ship 107,000 
 
 Ditto scholars under instruction^ . 40,000 
 
 Income. — The following table shows the re- 
 ceipts of the Society, from its commencement, 
 in periods of four years, with the average an- 
 nual receipts of each period ; from which it 
 appears that the average annual receipts have 
 been regularly and steadily advancing, with 
 occasional slight depressions, from £321 to 
 £123,000, which may be regarded as a fair 
 index of the missionary spirit in the Church 
 of England. And, it is to be especially no- 
 ticed here, as in other societies, that, beyond a 
 
 certain point, they begin to receive back a 
 revenue from the churches they have planted, 
 In 1853, the Church Missionary Society re 
 ceived from its missions £10,783, being aboi 
 one-tenth of its whole income. 
 
 Years. 
 
 Amount. 
 
 Average. 
 
 1799 to 1802, 
 
 £1,284 
 
 £321 
 
 1803 " 1806, 
 
 7,096 
 
 1,774 
 
 1807 *' 1810, 
 
 11,699 
 
 2,924 
 
 1811 " 1814, 
 
 18,656 
 
 4,664 
 
 1815 " 1818, 
 
 78,074 
 
 19,518 
 
 1819 " 1822, 
 
 121,753 
 
 30,438 
 
 1823 <' 1826, 
 
 152,608 
 
 38,152 
 
 1827 " 1830, 
 
 188,467 
 
 47,114 
 
 1831 " 1834, 
 
 187,575 
 
 40,893 
 
 1835, 
 
 68,432 
 
 68,432 
 
 1836 " 1839, 
 
 332,424 
 
 83,106 
 
 1840 " 1843, 
 
 431,018 
 
 107,754 
 
 1844 " 1847, 
 
 430,628 
 
 107,456 
 
 1848 " 1851, 
 
 411,970 
 
 102,992 
 
 1852, 
 
 118,674 
 
 118,674 
 
 1853, 
 
 120,932 
 
 120,932 
 
 1854, 
 
 123,915 
 
 123,915 
 
 Total 
 
 £2,805,205 
 
 
 CISTERCIAN : A reformed Benedicts 
 monk. 
 
 CLARKSON : Station of the_ Unit 
 Brethren, on the Zitzekamma rivers, in Sout 
 Africa, among the Fingoes. 
 
CLEAR-WATER— CONSTANTINOPLE. 
 
 305 
 
 CLl^AR-WATER : Once a station of the 
 Motliodist Episcopal Church in Oregon. 
 
 CLOUDY-BAY : A station of the Wes- 
 leyan Missio*iarj Society in New Zealand, on 
 the north-eastern side of the middle island. 
 
 CLOISTER : A monastery or nunnery ; 
 a house where monks or nuns reside. 
 
 COCHIN ; The chief city of a principality 
 of the same name, extending along the western 
 coast of Southern India, between Malabar and 
 Travancore, and under the nominal govern- 
 ment of a native rajah. A station of the 
 Church of Scotland Mission to the Jews. 
 
 COIMBATOOR: The capital of a dis- 
 trict of the same name, in the Madras presi- 
 dency. South India, 270 miles south-west of 
 Madras. The London Missionary Society 
 commenced operations here in 1830. 
 
 COLOMBO : A seaport town of Ceylon, 
 the modern capital of the island and seat of 
 government, situated on the west coast. The 
 Ibrt contains the residences of the governor 
 and most of the British inhabitants. The 
 fettah, or inner town, has a mixed population 
 of Dutch, Portuguese, and their descendants. 
 The native Ceylonese reside chiefly in the sub- 
 urbs. The town within the walls is regularly 
 laid out, and built very much in the European 
 style. Colombo is situated in the centre of 
 the cinnamon country, and is the depot for 
 Dearly all the foreign trade of the island, and 
 bas a somewhat extensive trade by means of 
 internal navigation. Its climate is healthy, 
 though destructive of books, clothing, &c. 
 This is the residence of the Bishop of the 
 [Church of England for the Bishopric of Cey- 
 on, and the missionaries of the Church Mis- 
 lionary Society and of the Society for the Pro- 
 mgation of the Gospel, are under his jurisdic- 
 ion. The Baptists and Wesleyans have each 
 heir missionary stations at Colombo. 
 
 COLESBERG : Station of the London and 
 Vesleyan Missionary Societies, in South Afri- 
 a, in the district of Colesberg, near the Cra- 
 ock river. ^ 
 
 COMBACONUM : A station of the Lon- 
 
 on Missionary Society, on the eastern coast 
 
 f southern Hindostan, 25 miles from Tanjore. 
 
 t was formerly the capital of the Cholas, one 
 
 f the most ancient Hindoo dynasties in the 
 
 \ outh of India of which any traces have been 
 
 iscovered, and who gave their name to the 
 
 rhole coast of Cholamundul, or Coromandel. 
 
 'he population is about 40,000. 
 
 i CONSTANTINOPLE: The first and 
 
 irgest station of the American Board among 
 
 16 Armenians and Jews of Turkey, and where 
 
 leFree Church of Scotland and London Jews' 
 
 ociety have missions to the Jews. Lat. 41° 
 
 f-jlong. 29^ E. This magnificent city, the 
 
 japital of the Turkish empire, has a population 
 
 iiccording to the best estimates, of about 500,- 
 
 IJOO in the city proper, and of about as much 
 
 jiore in the suburbs on the north side of the 
 
 ''or, and on the Bosphorus. Taking tie 
 
 20 
 
 whole together, it may be divided as follows : 
 Turks and other Mohammedans, 500,000; 
 Greeks, (including all of the Greek church) 
 200,000 ; Armenians, 160,000 ; Jews, 80,000 ; 
 Franks (foreigners not subject to the Porte, 
 and who wear the hat instead of other head- 
 dresses,) 40,000 ; and 20,000 not included under 
 the other heads. (See Armenians and Oriented 
 Christians) 
 
 COPTS : A name given to the descendants 
 of the ancient Egyptians, who profess the 
 Christian faith according to the sect of the 
 Jacobites or Eutychians, called Monophy sites, 
 from their distinguishing tenet. They difier 
 in many points of doctrine and practice from 
 the Greeks and Latins; but the principal 
 ground of their separation from other Chris- 
 tians lies in their belief in relation to the nar 
 ture of Christ. They maintain that the divine 
 and human natures so coalesce as to become 
 one, and therefore they reject the council of 
 Chalcedon and the epistle of Leo the Great. 
 Their government is episcopal ; and they have 
 a patriarch or metropolitan, at Alexandria, 
 who is head of the whole church, and is said 
 to have 140 bishoprics in Egypt, Syria, Nubia, 
 and other countries, besides the Abuna of 
 Abyssinia, who is also nominated and consecrat- 
 ed by him. 
 
 Eutychius, Patriarch of Alexandria, was the 
 first who maintained the Monophysite doctrine, 
 for which he was excommunicated, and died 
 in exile. But his party, with Dioscorus at their 
 head, shortly after, called a council at Ephesus, 
 in opposition to that of Chalcedon, which had 
 condemned Eutychius, and in their turn excom- 
 municated the Pope and all the bishops who 
 adhered to him. This is the origin of the 
 breach between the Latin and Alexandrian 
 churches, which all the efforts of Rome, for 
 centuries, have failed to heal. Dioscorus was, 
 however, anathematized and banished ; but his 
 successor, who was nominated by the court at 
 Constantinople, was assassinated by the Mono- 
 physites. After this, there were two patri- 
 archs ; and the Greek party being favored by 
 the government, obtained the ascendancy. 
 But on the invasion by the Turks, the Mono- 
 physites joined the invaders, and thus obtained 
 the confirmation of all their privileges, and 
 ascendancy over their rivals. They practice 
 both circumcision and baptism. Confession 
 is observed, but instead of being private and 
 particular, it is public and general. They are 
 strict in their fasts, and loose in their morals. 
 Divorce is allowed on easy terms. 
 
 The Patriarch of Alexandria is chosen by 
 the bishops of the Coptic church. He is 
 obliged to preach once a year to his clergy, 
 while their province is, on set days, to read 
 homilies and legends to the laity. The priests 
 and inferior ministers are allowed to marry 
 before ordination. None but the lowest classes 
 become ecclesiastics, who are excessively igno- 
 rant, yet held in reverence by the people. Mo 
 
306 
 
 COPAY-DELAWARE. 
 
 nastic life is held in bigh esteem, those who 
 (kvotc themselves to it living in great auster- 
 ilv. in deserts, sleeping in their clothes on the 
 gioiuul, ftud every evening prostrating them- 
 Bclvcs 150 times with their face and breast ou 
 the ground. But they are all of the lowest 
 class of people, and live on alms. The present 
 condition ot the Copts may be learned from 
 the following extract of a letter written in 
 1840, to the Christian Knowledge Society, by 
 Rev. H. Tattam : " I have just returned from 
 visiting the Coptic Christians in every part of 
 Egypt ; and during my stay in the country, I 
 entered most of their convents. They are in a 
 very low state, as regards pure Christianity, hav- 
 ing only its name and form, without the influ- 
 ence of Christian principle upon the heart and 
 life. The Christian religion is now fully toler- 
 ated, and all its professors, of every denominar 
 tion, receive protection, and enjoy equal privi- 
 leges with the Mohammedans. Although learn- 
 ing is at a low ebb among the Copts, yet they 
 recognize the right of the people to possess the 
 Scriptures. They are accessible, and will read 
 any publications presented them by English 
 Christians. They have a poor translation of 
 the Old Testament, in Arabic manuscript, and 
 a better one of the New." — Edinburgh Ency- 
 clopedia; Mosheim; Buck; Missionary Guide 
 Book. For missions see Egypt and Abyssinia. 
 COPAY : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society, five miles from the town of 
 Jaffna, Ceylon. 
 
 CORISCO : A small island on the western 
 coast of Africa, 65 miles north of the equator, 
 and 15 to 20 miles from the mainland, in the Bay 
 of Corisco, having a population of about 4,000. 
 The Presbyterian Board have a station here. 
 
 CORFU : One of the Ionian islands, and 
 capital of the Ionian Republic, for some time 
 the principal residence of the American Bap- 
 tist missionaries in Greece, and still the seat 
 of the only school in their mission. 
 
 COn^AYAM : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in Southern India. 
 
 COTTA : A populous district in Ceylon, 
 within a few miles of Colombo, a principal 
 station of the Church Missionary Society. Its 
 situation is peculiarly beautiful, being on the 
 Terge of vast gardens of cinnamon, and sur- 
 rounded with natural forests, interspersed with 
 gardens of spices, and groves of cocoanut and 
 palm. 
 
 CRADOCK : Station of the London and 
 Wesleyan Missionary Societies in South Af- 
 rica, in the district of Cradock, north-east of 
 Graaf-Reinet. 
 
 CRUDA : A village in Arracan, and an out- 
 station of the Arracan Mission of the Ame- 
 rican Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
 CUDDALORE : A maritime town in the 
 Carnatic, India, extensive and populous. One of 
 the early stations of the Christian Knowledge 
 Society, and now a station of the Gospel Pro- 
 pagation Society. 
 
 CUDDAPAH : A station of the London 
 
 Missionary Society, directly west of Nellore, 
 and some 50 miles north-west of Madras. The 
 province of Cuddapah is about* 170 b^ 120 
 miles in extent, and contains a population of 
 over a million. 
 
 CUMBERLAND PRESBYTERIAN 
 CHURCH, Board of Missions : The General 
 Assembly of the Cumberland Presbyt* riun 
 Church have a I^oard of Foreign and Dohh t ic 
 Missions, which resolved at its annual met ting 
 in 1853, to establish two foreign mii^sious in 
 the course .of the year. Previous to that, lor 
 several years they had cultivated the spirit ol 
 domestic missions, by calling on the churches 
 to aid in establishing new churches and ; 
 taining preachers at Philadelphia, Cinciinuui, 
 Louisville, St. Louis, and Alton ; and also 
 in Keokuk, la. Several brethren were sent out 
 to Oregon, California, and Texas. The ]3oard 
 of Missions, have employed special agents 
 to travel through the churches, and take up 
 collections, besides using their numerous papers 
 and the pulpit, to wake a deep and lusting 
 missionary spirit throughout the 100,000 mem- 
 bers now composing their church. They have 
 a great amount of wealth among their people, 
 and with their new Theological Seminary, and 
 more than half a dozen colleges, containing a 
 large number looking forward to the ministry, 
 what may we not expect when the fact is 
 known, that the destitute thousands of a new 
 country, just reclaimed from the savages, eallec 
 their body into existence? — Rev. S. Wki; >. 
 CUTTACK: A town in Eastern Hindo.iun 
 on the coast of the Bay of Bengal, 250 mile. 
 S. W. from Calcutta, and 770 miles north-ea.^ 
 from Madras. The population of the town ii 
 supposed to be about 40,000. There are 700( 
 houses, built mostly of mud walls, thatchet 
 with a long coarse grass. A few are buil 
 of stone and brick. The town contains 
 number of idol temples, but none of th 
 much celebrated. The English General Bi 
 tists established a mission at Cuttack 
 1822. 
 
 DACCA : A large town in Bengal, 1 
 miles N.E. from Calcutta. Population ab( 
 300,000. Occupied by the English Baptists 
 1816. 
 
 DAMARA COUNTRY: The country 
 the Damara, Namaqualand, South Africa, 
 cupied by the Wesleyans. 
 DANISH AKRA: See ^ro. 
 DARJEELING : A station of Gossr 
 Missionary Society in Hindostan. 
 
 DARLISTON : A station of the G 
 Propagation Society in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 DAYYTON : A station of the Londi 
 Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. j 
 
 DEDGAUM : A station of the Am, Boa^ 
 in Hindostan, belonging to the Ahmednuggj 
 Mission. ' j 
 
 DELAWARE : The chief town of the JDll 
 laware tribe, in the Indian territory, and i 
 
DELHI— EARLY CHRISTUN MISSIONS. 
 
 307 
 
 seat of the Delaware mission of the American 
 Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
 DELHI : A celebrated city in the presi- 
 dency of Bengal, capital of a province of 
 the saaiie name, and the ancient metropolis 
 of the Palan and Mogul empires. It is sit- 
 uated on the Jumna, 830 miles N. W. of Cal- 
 cutta — traveling distance, 960. Population 
 about 200,000. In its period of splendor, 
 Delhi was a city of vast extent, as is evinced 
 by its ruins, which are supposed to cover 
 nearly as large a surface as London, "West- 
 minster, and Southwark. The present city is 
 about seven miles in circuit, and, although it 
 bears no comparison with the ancient city, 
 which is said to have contained two millions 
 I of inhabitants ; yet there are few, if any, of the 
 ancient cities of Hindostan, which, at the pre- 
 sent time, will be found to rival modern Delhi 
 in the wealth of its bazars, or in the activity and 
 enterprize of its population. The ruins of old 
 Delhi cover the plains for an extent of nearly 
 eight miles to the south of the modern city, 
 and connect it with the village of Cuttuh, ex- 
 hibiting, throughout this vast tract, one of the 
 most striking scenes of desolation to be met 
 with in the whole world. It has not been the 
 scene of much important missionary labor, ex- 
 cept by the English Baptists, who commenced 
 their operations here in 1818. 
 
 DEMARARA : See West Indes. 
 _ DHARWAR : A fortified town in the pro- 
 vince of Bejapoor, India, and capital of a dis- 
 trict of the same name. Population of the 
 district, 600,000. A station of the German 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 DIEP RIYER : A station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society in Little Namaqualand, 
 South Africa, 
 
 DINDIGUL : A station of the American 
 Board in Southern Hindostan, connected with 
 the Madura Mission. 
 
 DINAJPOOR: Capital of a district of 
 he same name in India, about 260 miles north 
 >f Calcutta. Population, 20,000. A station 
 >f the Baptist Missionary Society. 
 
 DOHNAYOOR : A station of the Church 
 iiissionary Society, in the Tinnevelly district, 
 Hindostan. 
 
 DOMINICA : See West Indies. 
 
 -ONG-YAHN: A Karen village, 33 miles 
 Maulmain, in Burmah, and an out-sta- 
 ' >f the Maulmain Mission of the American 
 ist Missionary Union. 
 
 i'RY HARBOR : A station of the Lon- 
 [ ion Missionary Society in Jamaica, W I. 
 
 DRY RIYER : A station of the Wesley- 
 [ ms in Trinidad, W. I. 
 
 ^ DUKE TOWN : Station of the United 
 '" ^byterian Synod of Scotland, about 50 
 ■ Irom the mouth of the Old Calabar river, 
 West Africa. 
 
 DURBAN : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 I iionary Society among the Fingoes, in Kaf- 
 ;raria, S. A. Also, a station of the same So- 
 
 ciety in the Natal district, same as Port 
 Natal. 
 
 DWIGHT : A station of the American 
 Board among the Cherokee Indians. 
 
 DYSALSDORP : Station of the London 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, 45 miles 
 north of Pocaltsdorp, commenced in 1838. 
 This station presents a very extensive field for 
 missionary operations. In the neighborhood, 
 there is a tract of country, the Congo, very 
 densely populated. 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS : 
 Christianity is essentially missionary. Its 
 Great Author announced it to the world as 
 the only true religion ; and it has ever been 
 aggressive in its character. The missionary 
 enterprize is but Christianity in action, carry- 
 ing out the design of its Founder, to subdue 
 the whole world to himself. This was the 
 spirit that animated the apostles after the 
 wonderful impulse which they received on the 
 day of Pentecost, as they went everywhere, in 
 obedience to Christ's last command, to preach 
 the Gospel to every creature. Paul, who re- 
 ceived his commission directly from Christ, 
 after His ascension, was the first foreign mis- 
 sionary, having been appointed as the apostle 
 to the Gentiles ; and the graphic record of 
 his labors and successes, contained in the Acts 
 of the Apostles, shows how well he fulfilled 
 his commission, and presents him, for all time 
 to come, as the Model Mlssionary. Respect- 
 ing the labors of the other apostles, we pos- 
 sess but slender information. A few brief no- 
 tices in the Acts, and some vague and uncer- 
 tain accounts from ecclesiastical history, are 
 all that have reached us. Yet these, taken in 
 connection with the established fact, that in 
 the course of a single generation, the Gospel 
 was propagated throughout the then known 
 world, are sufficient to show that their lives 
 must have been devoted to the missionary 
 work. Peter appears to have directed his 
 labors chiefly to the dispersed Jews, to whom 
 his epistles are directed. Christian antiquity 
 ascribes to him a settlement in Antioch, and 
 afterwards in Parthia ; but he appears to have 
 extended his missionary tours as far as Baby- 
 lon, where his first epistle is dated, and which 
 is supposed by some to have been the metro- 
 polis of the eastern dispersion of the Jews. 
 Eusebius states that he was brought to Rome 
 by the providence of God, to oppose the here- 
 tical schemes of Simon Magus ; and this 
 statement seems to be confirmed by the re- 
 cently discovered work of Hippolytus. And 
 tradition makes him to have sufiered crucifix- 
 ion at that place, being placed on the cross at 
 his own request, with his head downwards, 
 deeming himself unworthy to suffer after the 
 manner of his Master. But the whole state- 
 ment as to his ever having been at Rome is of 
 questionable authority. 
 
 James, the son of Zebedee, is represented 
 as having labored among the Jews who were 
 
808 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 •cattcred abroad in Asia Minor, and the 
 neighboring countries ; but as he resided seve- 
 ral years at Jerusalem, and finally fell a sacri- 
 fice *to the cruelty of Herod, it is not probable 
 that his travels were either frequent or ex- 
 tensive. Andrew seems to have chosen Sq/- 
 thia and the adjacent countries as the scene 
 of his missionary exertions. He passed along 
 the shore of the Euxine Sea, and returned to 
 Byzantium, now called Constantinople, where 
 he labored in word and doctrine with consider- 
 able success. He afterwards traveled through 
 Thrace, Macedonia, Thessaly, Achaia, and 
 Epirus, preaching repentance and forgiveness 
 of sins in the name of Jesus Christ. Philip 
 is considered as the apostle of Upper Asia, 
 and is supposed, in conjunction with Andrew, 
 to have sown the seed of Divine truth among 
 the inhabitants of Scythia. In the latter part 
 of his life he preached at Hierapolis, in Pliry- 
 gia, where he sealed his mission with his blood. 
 Bartholomew, who is supposed to be the 
 same with Nathaniel, extended his travels as 
 for as India, on this side the Ganges, where he 
 instructed the inhabitants in the revelation of 
 Divine truth, and at his departure presented 
 them a copy of the Gospel of Matthew. He 
 is also said to have preached in Lycaonia. 
 Thomas, according to the testimony of Je- 
 rome, was a very active and useful missionary, 
 who labored among the Medes, Persians, Par- 
 thians, Bactrians, Carmaniafis, Hyrcanians, 
 and Magians. The Portuguese, when they 
 visited India in the sixteenth century, discov- 
 ered traditions and ancient monuments, which 
 they regarded as evidence that this apostle had 
 preached there. The Chaldean Christians 
 throughout all Asia regard Thomas as their 
 apostle ; and the Syrian Christians of India, 
 on the Coromandel and Malabar coasts, to 
 the number of 200,000, hold, with a constant 
 and uniform tradition, that this apostle 
 was the founder of their churches. He is 
 said also to have visited Ceylon. These ex- 
 isting traditions are corroborated by ancient 
 writei-s. 
 
 Matthew, or Levi, the son of Alpheus, is 
 said to have remained for some time in Judaia, 
 declaring the glad tidings of salvation ; and 
 there to have written his Gospel, about the 
 time that the apostles Peter and Paul suffered 
 martyrdom at Rome. He then went as a mis- 
 sionary into Ethiopia, Persia, Parthia, and 
 India ; and, either in the latter of these places, 
 or in Abyssinia, he suffered martyrdom. 
 Simon, called Zelotes, appears to have traveled 
 through Efrypt, Cyrene, Asia, Libya, and Mau- 
 ritania. Nicephorus asserts that he introduced 
 the Gospel to Britain, where he preached, and 
 wrought many miracles. Othei-s, however, 
 are of opinion that he directed his route toward 
 Pers-.Of where he labored till he received the 
 crown of martyrdom. 
 
 John, the beloved disciple, called John the 
 Divine, shared, for some time, with Peter, in 
 
 preaching, working miracles, and enduring se- 
 vere persecution at Jerusalem ; and in Samaria 
 the Holy Ghost was given by imposition of their 
 hands. About a. d. 52, this apostle continued 
 as *" a pillar" of the Christian Church in 
 Judaxi ; and, after that period, he is said to 
 have carried the word of life to the inhabit- 
 ants of Parthia and India ; but it is more evi- 
 dent that he labored for some time in Atiia 
 Minor. In the persecution which raged under 
 Domitian, about a. d. 95, he was banished to 
 the isle of Patmos, where he was providentially 
 preserved, and favored with a series of the 
 most important visions. Under the reign of 
 the emperor Nerva,he was recalled from exile, 
 and returned to Ephesus, where he continued 
 to preach the Gospel of Christ, till, at length, 
 he peacefully breathed out his soul into the 
 hands of his Redeemer, in the ninety-ninth 
 year of his age. 
 
 JuDE, or Jvdas, not Iscariot, commenced liia 
 missionary labors in Judcea, Galilee, Samaria, 
 and Idumea ; and afterwards extended hia 
 travels to Mesopotamia, Peisia, Armenia, and 
 Libya ; and, either in the latter place or in 
 Persia, the faithfulness of his preaching was 
 rewarded by a cruel death. James the I>ks8 
 does not seem to have extended his laljors 
 beyond the Jewish metropolis, where he met 
 his death at the hands of the Jews. 
 
 For a fuller account of the labors of each 
 of the apostles, see a summary in Fabmius 
 Lux Evang. cap. 5, pp. 95-114 ; Lardner 
 XVII. p. 239; Prof. Burtm's Ecdes. Hist. 1. 281. 
 
 From highly respectable authorities, it 
 would appear that the Gospel was preached 
 in Britain in the first century. Bishop Stil- 
 lingfleet is decidedly of opinion that a Chris- ; 
 tian church was planted in this island, in the | 
 time of the apostles; as Eusebius distinctly; 
 states that some of them had " passed over i 
 the ocean, and preached in the British isles :" 
 and Theodoret mentions the Britons among < 
 the nations whom the "fishermen, publicans,- 
 and tentmakers," as he styles them, had in-, 
 duced to embrace the religion of the crucified] 
 Jesus. Gildas, the earliest of our British his- 1:' 
 torians, speaking of the memorable revolt ancll 
 overthrow of the Britons under Boadiceaj 
 about A. D. 60, gives us to understand that tb( 
 Gospel then began to be successfully publishet; 
 in the country ; and the correctness of hi 
 statement is supported by those ancient Cam 
 brian records, called the Friades. In these i 
 is stated that the celebrated Caractacus, wlifi 
 after a war of nine years, was betrayed to 
 Romans, was, together with his father, Br 
 nius, and the whole family, carried prisoners;^ 
 Rome, about the year 53, where they remair 
 for a period of seven years. At this time 
 word of life was preached in the imperial city* 
 and Brennius, with others of his family, becaro 
 professed members of the Christian churcF 
 At the expiration of seven years they werl 
 permitted to return, and were thus furnish© 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 309 
 
 with a favorable opportunity of introducing 
 the Gospel into their own country. It is also 
 said that three Christians, one an Israelite, 
 and the other two Gentiles, with whom they 
 had been in the habit of associating, accom 
 panied them from Rome, and became instru 
 mental, as preachers, in reclaiming many of 
 the Britons from their ancient superstitious, 
 and instructing them in " the truth, as it is in 
 Jesus." 
 
 It does not appear that Caractacus himself 
 embraced the faith of Christ at Rome ; but 
 his sou Cyllin, and his daughter Eigar, are 
 both ranked among the British saints. That 
 son is represented as the grandfather of King 
 Lucius, who made great exertions for the pro- 
 motion of Christianity in Siluria, the country 
 of his ancestors ; and even the celebrated 
 King Arthur seems to have been a descendant 
 of this family. Eigar, the daughter of Carac- 
 tacus, is said to have bestowed her hand on a 
 British chieftain, whose domain, called Caer 
 Sarllog, is now known by the name of Old 
 Sarum ; and Claudia, one of her sisters, is 
 supposed to have become the wife of a Roman 
 senator, named Pudcns. 
 
 Within little more than one hundred years 
 from our Saviour's passion, Justin Martyr 
 places Christians in every country known to 
 the Romans, which must have included Britain. 
 Irena^us also asserts, that our holy religion 
 was propagated to earth's utmost bounds by 
 the Apostles and their disciples. Again he 
 mentions the Celts among the nations then 
 enlightened, the Celtic race being then seated in 
 the British Isles. Tertullian speaks of British 
 districts inaccessible to Roman arms, but sub- 
 dued by Christ. Dr. Adam Clarke sums up 
 at length the evidence relating to this subject ; 
 and to his argument the curious reader is re- 
 ferred. It appears evident, however, not only 
 that there was Christianity in Britain at a 
 very early period, but that there was a regu- 
 lated Church, with its bishops, who were sum- 
 moned to foreign councils, where matters of 
 vital importance were discussed and deter- 
 mined, long before Augustine was sent by 
 Gregory the Great, to convert the British Isles 
 to Rome. 
 
 Most faithfully did the first preachers of 
 Christianity fulfil their commission; for by 
 them the Gospel was preached, not only to 
 Jews, Greeks, and Romans, but also to Bri- 
 tons, Gauls, Spaniards, Hindoos, Arabians, 
 Persians, and Scythians. Others were sent 
 out by them who emulated their fidelity. An 
 oriental writer relates that all Persia, all parts 
 of Assyria, Armenia, and Media, the regions 
 about Babylon, Huz, and Gala, to the borders 
 of India, received the Gospel and its institu- 
 tions, from the hands of Agheus, the silk- 
 weaver, the disciple of the Apostle Haddeus 
 or Thaddeus. This took place about fifteen 
 years after the ascension of our Lord. — See 
 Yeates's Indian Church, History, pp. 27, 29. 
 
 Century II. — In the second century, the 
 march of divine truth was steady and trium- 
 phant. Eusebius informs us that the followers 
 of the Apostles imitated their example, in 
 distributing their worldly goods among the 
 necessitous believers ; and quitting their own 
 country, went forth into distant lands to pro- 
 pagate the Gospel. Among them were An- 
 dronicus, Aristarchus, Crescens, Marcus, Sylva- 
 nus, and Trophimus ; and to these were after- 
 wards added Pantxnus, who traveled into 
 India; and Irenceus and Pothinus, who came 
 from Smyrna and settled in France. Tradition 
 relates that Irengeus was sent by Polycarp 
 into Gaul,^ (circ. a.d. 160.) It is added also, 
 that Pothinus received a similar commission. 
 (Greg. Turon. History France, I. p. 27 ; and 
 Cave's Lives Fathers, p. 162.) Panta3nus, 
 master of a school of philosophy, in Alex- 
 andria, was sent by Demetrius, bishop of that 
 city, to India, where he remained several years ; 
 and on his return, is said to have brought with 
 him a copy of the Gospel of Matthew 
 in Hebrew, which had been left by Bartho- 
 lomew. Athenagoras, who, towards the end of 
 this century wrote an apology for tlie Chris- 
 tian religion, says, " The Christians made small 
 account of the present life, but were intent 
 only on contemplating God, and the divine 
 Word, who is from him ; what union the Son 
 has with the Father ; what communion the Fa- 
 ther has with the Son ; what the Spirit is ; and 
 what are the union and distinction subsisting 
 between the Father, the Son, and the Holy 
 Spirit." Bardasones, of Mesopotamia, in allu- 
 ding to the influence of the Gospel on its pro- 
 fessors, says, " In Parthia, polygamy is allowed 
 and practiced ; but the Christians of that 
 country practice it not. In Persia, the same 
 may be said with regard to incest. And in 
 Bactria and Gaul, where the rites of matri- 
 mony are defiled with impunity, the Christians 
 act not thus. In fact wherever they reside, 
 their practice triumphs over the worst of cus- 
 toms, and the worst of laws." While the doc- 
 trines of the cross were progressively spread- 
 ing, through the labors of devoted mission- 
 aries ; while the lives and deportment of 
 the converts illustrated the divine origin and 
 beneficial effects of those doctrines ; the great 
 work of translating the Holy Scriptures occu- 
 pied the hearts and hands of many others. 
 Latin versions of the oracles of truth were 
 multiplied. That which was styled the Italic 
 version was considered decidedly the best. 
 The Syriac, Ethiopian, and Egyptian versions 
 appeared at no great distance of time ; but 
 their dates cannot now be ascertained with 
 precision. The blessed truths, however, which 
 they contained, were so powerfully owned and 
 blessed of Gqd, that wherever they circulated, 
 like a fertilizing stream, they transformed the 
 moral desert into the garden of the Lord. — 
 Smith, L p. 26. 
 
 Centuey hi.— In the third century, the 
 
810 
 
 •EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 progress of Christianity in the world was very 
 considerable, though, with respect to the par- 
 tioular countries into which it was introduced, 
 tilt' Slime degree of uncertainty prevails, as was 
 noticed in the second. Origen having jaeen 
 invited from Alexandria by an Arabian prince, 
 gucceetled in converting a tribe of wandering 
 Arabs to the Christian faith. The fierce and 
 war-like nation of the Goths, who, inhabiting 
 the countries of Moesia and Thrace, made per- 
 petual incursions into the neighboring pro- 
 vinces, and some likewise of the adjoining 
 tribes of Sarmatia, received the knowled'ge of 
 the Gospel by means of several bishops, 
 who were cither sent thither from A^ia 
 or had become their captives. These vener- 
 able teachers, by the power of their doctrine, 
 and the sanctity of their lives, became the in- 
 struments of converting great numbers, and in 
 time, of softening and civilizing this rude and 
 barbarous people. Fabian, Bishop of Home, 
 sent Dionyshis and six other missionaries into 
 Gaul ; and during the reigH of the Emperor 
 Decius (A. D. 250), and in the midst of his 
 persecutions, the Christian churches, which 
 had hitherto been chiefly confined to the neigh- 
 borhood of Lyons and Vienne, were consider- 
 ably increased. By the labors of many pious 
 and zealous men, among whom was Saturniniis, 
 the first bishop of Toulouse, churches were 
 founded at Paris, Tours, Aries, Narbonne, and 
 several other places. From these sources, the 
 knowledge of the Gospel spread, in a short 
 time, through the whole country. 
 
 In the course of this century Christianity 
 flourished in Germany, particularly in those 
 parts which border upon France. Maternus, 
 Clemens, and others, founded, in particular, the 
 churches Cologne, Treves, and Mentz. No 
 positive account has been transmitted respectr 
 ing the progress of Christianity in the British 
 Isles during the third century. The historians 
 of Scotland contended, indeed, that the Gospel 
 then first visited that country ; and there is 
 reason to believe that their account jnay be 
 true. (See Usher and Stillingfleet Antiq. et 
 Orig. Ecell. Britt.) 
 
 In this century, the clemency and mildness 
 of several of the Eoman Emperors, and the 
 encouragement which some of them gave to 
 Christianity, tended materially to augment its 
 influence. The piety and charity of the Chris- 
 tian disciples continued to excite the notice 
 and admiration of the heathen, and the zeal- 
 ous labors of Origen and others in the trans- 
 lation and dispersion of the New Testament, 
 and in the composition of different works in the 
 defence and illustration of Christianity, contri- 
 buted to increase the number of Christians, 
 and to extend the boundaries of the church. 
 (Pearson's Histmic View of the Progress of the 
 Gospel, p. 15.) Origen observed, " that so de- 
 sirous were the Christians of propagating their 
 religion throughout the world, that some of 
 them had undertaken to travel, not only to 
 
 cities, but to town^ and villages, to convert the 
 Heathen." 
 
 In the third century, Christianity had be- 
 come so extensive, that, about the year 245, 
 the emperor Philip, though evidcntly'a world- 
 ly-minded character, and but little influenced 
 by the spirit of the Gospel, was induced to 
 make a profession of the new religion, and 
 openly to patronize its friends and adherents. 
 About the same time, the light of divine truth 
 was greatly extended both in France and Ger- 
 many. And (though the power of religion 
 seemed to decline both among the pastors and 
 professors in Africa and Asia, which, from the 
 mroads of barbarians, became a scene of miser- 
 able confusion,) yet the wisdom and power of 
 God so over-ruled events, that the invaders, by 
 carrying away with them several Christian 
 ministers, forced these persons to become mis- 
 sionaries, contrary to their own intentions, and 
 rendered them instrumental in the conversion 
 of many. 
 
 Century IY. — The first Christian missiona- 
 ries to Ireland were Kieran, Aibe, Declan, and 
 Ibar, all from the British Churches in Scot- 
 land and Wales, faithful and self-denying 
 missionaries of the Christian Faith, and 
 but little sullied from its original lustre. The 
 period of their arrival is very likely to have 
 been the early part of this century, when 
 British Christians may have sought refuge^ in 
 Ireland from the fury of the Diocletian pci'so- 
 cution, then raging throughout all the pruviu- 
 ces of the Roman empire ; for, as Ireland was 
 beyond the boundary of the emperor's domin- 
 ions, it was almost the only place that could 
 afford an asylum to the Christians, until the 
 return of peace and security. Christianity 
 was for a long time confined to the southern 
 portion of the island ; but even here its pro- 
 gress was slow. A few families and solitary 
 hermits constituted the infant Church. Kieran 
 is commonly regarded as the fu-st bishop of 
 Ossory. 
 
 In the fourth century Chrijsostom, archbishop 
 of Constantinople, maintained many presbf 
 ters and others in Phcenicia, partly at his o 
 charge, and partly by the assistance of pio 
 and well disposed persons, whose only worl 
 it was to instruct the inhabitants in t' 
 truths of Christianity. During the sami 
 century, Constantine, surnamed the great, w 
 raised to the imperial sceptre ; and, in his p 
 son, Christianity ascended the throne- of t 
 Caesars. Unfortunately, Constantine prefbri 
 coercive measures for the establishment of 
 ligion, and deemed the sword a more effici 
 instrument in the destruction of idolatry, t] 
 the milder endeavors of missionary instruct! 
 But the order issued by him for the transcri' 
 ing of fifty copies of the Sacred Scriptur«8j 
 to be placed in the different churches of th« 
 empire, was a more legitimate mi,gsionars 
 work. It was about the same period that tji6 
 Gospel, having been carried to the Goths, Js^ 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 811 
 
 ?3omc Christian prisoners, Ulpliilas, who had 
 ti appointed their pastor or bishop, under- 
 lie to form an alphabet, and to translate the 
 •iptures into the Gothic language. Frag- 
 :tts of this version are still in existence, 
 
 ..in which transcripts have been made and 
 ])iib]ished by Dr. Barrett, of Dublin, and M. 
 ^hiio, of Rome. 
 
 '■ Uu'istianity was introduced into Georgia by 
 10, a pious female who was carried captive 
 i i . ! that country, and by her exhortations and 
 I 'layers, prevailed upon the Cyarmerian to 
 embrace the religion she professed ; but some 
 suppose she voluntarily left Rome to visit Je- 
 rusalem, and from thence proceeded into the 
 ancient Iberia, accompanied by Sidonia and 
 Abrata, and succeeded in establishing the Chris- 
 tian religion. (Letters from the Caucasus and 
 Georgia ; translated from the French, p. 107. 
 Lond., 1823, 8vo.) 
 
 (For the introduction of the Gospel into 
 Abyssinia, in this century, see Abyssinia) 
 
 Many of the monks, at this early period, are 
 said to have engaged in the missionary work, 
 and to have been very instrumental in extend- 
 ing the Christian faith, particularly among the 
 Persians and Saracens. A monk named Abra- 
 ham labored with success among the idolatrous 
 inhabitants in the vicinity of Edessa, until a 
 church was formed, and pastors from among 
 themselves placed over them. (See Smith, 
 Vol. I. page 32 ; and Jowetfs Christian Re- 
 searches. Yol. I. p. 171.) 
 
 In this century, Armenia, into which Chris- 
 tianity had before been introduced, was com- 
 pletely Christianized, through the labors of 
 Gregory " the Enlightener." The Gospel was 
 also further propagated, during this century, 
 in Persia. 
 
 During the reign of the emperor Yalens, a 
 large body of the Goths, who had remained at- 
 tached to their ancient superstitions, were per- 
 mitted by that prince to pass the Danube and 
 +o inhabit Dacia, Moesia, and Thrace, on con- 
 dition of living subject to the Roman laws, and 
 of embracing Christianity, which condition 
 was accepted by their king, Fritigem. And 
 TJlpliilas, bishop of those Goths, who dwelt in 
 Moesia, translated the four Gospels into the 
 Gothic language. 
 
 Notwithstanding the utmost efforts of the 
 Christian bishops in the European provinces 
 of the empire, great numbers of Pagans still 
 remained. In Gaul, however, the labors of the 
 venerable Martin of Tours were so successful 
 in the destruction of idolatry and superstition, 
 and the propagation of Christianity, that he 
 justly acquired the title of the Apostle of the 
 Gauls. 
 
 In respect to the rapidity and extent of the 
 propagation of Christianity in these early ages, 
 besides the evidence furnished by the brief 
 narrative of Luke, and the incidental allusions 
 of the Epistles, the Christian Fathers have left 
 abundant testimony. Clement, who was a co- 
 
 temporary with Paul, says of the labors of that 
 Apostle, " He preached both in the East and 
 in the West, leaving behind him the glorious 
 report of his faith ; and so, having taught the 
 whole world righteousness, and for that end, 
 traveled even unto the utmost bounds of the 
 West, he at last suffered martyrdom," &c. 
 {Clem. Ad. Cor. O.V.VI.) 
 
 Justin Martyr, who wrote about one hundred 
 and six years after the ascension, has these re- 
 markable words : " There is not a nation, 
 either of Greek or barbarian, or of any other 
 name, even those who wander in tribes, and 
 live in tents, amongst whom prayers and thanks- 
 givings are not offered to the Father and Cre- 
 ator of the universe, by the name of the cruci- 
 fied Jesus." 
 
 IrencBus, who died a. d. 202, speaks of the 
 Christians of his time living in the Court of 
 Rome : " But how is it those who are in the 
 regal halls are faithful ? Does not each one 
 of those who have charge of Caesar's utensils, 
 and those who have not, stand forth preeminent 
 according to his merit?" 
 
 TertuUian, who comes about fifty years after 
 Justin Martyr, refers very frequently to the 
 success of the "first missionaries of the cross. 
 He says, " We, so great a multitude of men, 
 almost a majority of every state, pass our lives 
 in serenity and quietude." ( TertuUian to Sca- 
 pulus.) " If we desired to deal with open ene- 
 mies and not with hidden foes, we should not 
 lack the power of numbers, and the influence ol 
 ample resources. Doubtless the Moors, and the 
 Germanic race, and the Parthians themselves, 
 or any nations, however great, are more nu- 
 merous, yet dwelling in one locality, and cir- 
 cumscribed by their own limits, rather than 
 diffused through the whole world. But we, 
 though of yesterday, have filled every sphere of 
 life : cities, castles, islands, towns, the exchange, 
 the very camps, the plebeian populace, the seats 
 of judges, the imperial palace, the senate and 
 the forum. They (the heathen adversaries of 
 Christianity) lament that every sex, age, and 
 condition, and persons of every rank also, are 
 converts to that name." " We have been able, 
 though unarmed and not seditious, but only 
 differing in opinion, to contend against you 
 by the odium of separation only ; for if we, 
 such a vast company of men, should withdraw 
 from you and retire to some remote corner of 
 the world, assuredly the loss of so many citi- 
 zens irrespective of their character, would over- 
 spread your dominion, and at last would bring 
 upon you the retribution of desertation itself. 
 Without doubt you would be greatly terrified 
 at your solitude, the stillness of things, and a 
 species of stupor as of a dead city. You 
 would search for subjects in those p'laces in 
 which you might have held the sceptre." [Ter- 
 tuUian' s Apology, Chap. 37.) 
 
 Chrysosiom, who wrote towards the close of 
 the fourth century, attests, that at that time,, 
 the Christian faith had become almost univer- 
 
512 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 sally diffused ; he says : " But consider and 
 thinit within voiirself, in how short a time 
 the whole world became filled with so many 
 churches, and such populous nations converted 
 to the faith ; people persuaded to abrogate 
 their country's laws, rooting out their old habits 
 and customs, and everywhere overturning the 
 healhen altars in the regions of the Komans, 
 Persians, Scythians, Maurians, and the Hin- 
 doos, to the world's end." 
 
 And to these may be added the testimony 
 of ancient Pagan writers. Tacitus, in giving 
 an account of the fire which happened at Rome 
 about thirtj' years after the ascension, asserts 
 that Nero, m order to suppress the rumors of 
 having been himself the author of the mischief, 
 had the Christians accused of the crime. Speak- 
 ing of this event, he writes : *' They only were 
 apprehended who confessed themselves of that 
 sect ; afterwards a vast multitude were discov- 
 ered by them." This was about six years after 
 Paul wrote his Epistle to the Romans, and 
 something more than two after his arrival in 
 Rome himself. Pliny the younger, the gover- 
 nor of Pontus and Bithynia, on applying to 
 the emperor Trajan for directions as to the 
 ti'catment of Christians, says : " Suspending 
 all judicial proceedings, I have recourse to you 
 for advice ; for it has appeared to me a matter 
 highly deserving, especially on account of the 
 great numbers of persons who are in danger of 
 suffering : for many of all ages, and of everu 
 rank, of both sexes, likewise, are accused and will 
 be accused. Nor has the contagion of this super- 
 stition seized cities only, but the lesser towns 
 also, and the open country. Nevertheless it 
 seemed to me that it might be restrained and 
 corrected. It is certain that the temples, which 
 were almost forsaken, begin to be more frequent- 
 ed ; and the sacred solemnities, after a long in- 
 termission, are revived. Victims, likewise, are 
 everywhere bought up ; whereas, for some time 
 there were few to purchase them. Whence it 
 is easy to imagine that numbers of men might 
 be reclaimed, if pardon were granted to those 
 that shall repent." We need not pursue these 
 testimonies farther. Nothing can be more 
 satisfactory as evidence of the progress which 
 Christianity achieved in the hands of its first 
 missionaries. 
 
 Century Y.— -At the beginning of the fifth 
 century the Roman empire was divided into 
 two distinct sovereignties, under the dominion 
 of Arcadius in the East, and of Honorius in the 
 West. The confusions and calamities which 
 about this period attended the incursions of 
 the Goths, the temporary possession of Italy 
 by Odoacer, and the subsequent establishment 
 of the Ostrogoths, were prejudicial to the pro- 
 gress of Christianity. The zeal of the Chris- 
 tian emperors, more especially of those who 
 reigned in the east, was, notwithstanding, suc- 
 cessfully exerted in extirpating the remains of 
 the Gentile superstitions, and the Church con- 
 tinued daily to gain ground on the idolatrous 
 
 nations in the empire. In the ICast, the inhor 
 bitants of Mount Libanus and Antilibaiius 
 were induced by the pervasions of Simeon Ike 
 Stylitc, to embrace the Christian religion. By 
 his influence also, it was introduced into a cer- 
 tain district of Arabia. In the West, the Ger- 
 man nations, who had destroyed that division 
 of the empire, gradually embraced the religion 
 of the conquered people. Some of them had 
 been converted to the Christian faith before 
 their incursions upon the empire ; and such, 
 among others, was the case of the Goths. It is 
 uncertain, however, at what time and by whose 
 labors the Vandals, Sueves, and Alans were 
 evangelized. The Burgundians, who inhabited 
 the banks of the Rhine, and passed from 
 thence into Gaul, received the Gospel, hoping 
 to be preserved by its Divine Author from the 
 ravages of the Huns. But in general these 
 fierce and barbarous nations were induced to 
 embrace Christianity, by the desire of living 
 in greater security amidst a people who, for 
 the most part professed it, and from a persua- 
 sion that the doctrines of the majority must 
 be best. This conformity, of course, must 
 have been chiefly outward and formal. — {Pear- 
 son's brief Historic View of the Progress of the 
 Gospel, p. 19.) 
 
 Pope Celestine the First sent Palladius to 
 Ireland, where he arrived a.d. 431. The mis- 
 sion was unattended with success, which gave 
 rise to a proverb among the Irish, that " Not 
 to Palladius but to Patrick did the Lord 
 grant the conversion of Ireland." St. Patrick, 
 whose original name was Succath, was next ap- 
 pointed. The place of his birth was Bonna-t 
 ven, which lay between the Scottish tow 
 Dumbarton and Glasgow, and was then reck- 
 oned to the province of Britain. This v" 
 lage, in memory of Patricus, received th 
 name of Kil-Patrick, or Kirk-Patrick. H: 
 father, a deacon in the village church, gavi 
 him a careful education ; he was instruc 
 indeed in the doctrines of Christianity, bul 
 he did not come to know what he possessed ii^ 
 this knowledge until the experience of grea^, 
 trials brought him to the consciousness of it»/ 
 At the age of sixteen he was carried ofi", with 
 many others of his countrymen, by Scottish 
 pirates, to the northern part of the island Ili- 
 bernia (Ireland). — {Neander's History of the 
 Christian Religion, Yol. II. p. 122.) He was 
 sold to a chieftain of the people, who made 
 him the overseer of his flocks. Here he re- 
 mained six years, during which time he receiv- 
 ed the renewing grace of God. At length he 
 recovered his liberty, but was again recaptured. 
 But in a short time, however, he was allowed > 
 to return home, and not long after he gave 
 himself up to the work of the ministry. After 
 his ordination in Gaul he was sent in company 
 with several others, as a missionary to Ireland. 
 The party landed at the place now occupied 
 by the town of Wicklow, either in the year 
 432 or 441. After preaching in different 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 313 
 
 parts of the country, St. Patrick visited Tara, 
 (»r Temora, the royal residence of the mon- 
 archs ; and here, notwithstanding the oppo- 
 sition of the pagan priests, his preaching was 
 most successful. He gained over to the Gos- 
 ])ol several zealous converts. In an epistle ad- 
 dressed to Caradoc, or Coroticus, prince of 
 ceilain districts in Wales, after stating that 
 ]i ' had been seized by a predatory band, and 
 CcUiied captive to Ireland, he notices the suc- 
 co" which had attended his endeavors to bring 
 o\or the natives "to the obedience of the 
 faith." He thus offers his reason for subse- 
 quently becoming a missionary : " Dwelling 
 among barbarians, a Christian and an ex- 
 ile, urged by my love and zeal for God and 
 the truth of Christ, I wished, although rudely 
 and in an unpolished manner, to declare those 
 things from my mouth ; for the love of ray 
 neighbors and my children in the Lord aroused 
 me, and compelled me to give up my country, 
 my parents, and even my life also, if I should 
 be thought worthy to teach the truth to the 
 nations." — (See Si7' William Betliam's Irish An- 
 tiquarian Researches, Yol. II. p. 433.) In the 
 course of St. Patrick's missionary journey- 
 ings he visited also the south of Ireland, 
 ^ngus, the king of Cashel, received him 
 courteously, listened to his preaching, and be- 
 came a convert ; but the earlier Christians of 
 the country, especially the bishops Ailbe, De- 
 clan, Kearan, and Ibar, did not give him so 
 glad a welcome ; they either had not been ac- 
 quainted with the extent of his labors among 
 their pagan countrymen, or they had some 
 fears lest the object of his visit might be to 
 claim supremacy over them. It is expressly 
 stated that Ibar would on no account submit 
 to him, because he did not wish a foreigner to 
 be the patron of Ireland. At length, however, 
 their differences were made up, and they were 
 persuaded to cooperate with each other in a 
 more cordial spirit. St. Patrick, after this, 
 returned to the north, where we next find him 
 engaged in the foundation of the See of Ar- 
 magh, the date of which event is assigned to 
 the year 455. From this time he appears to 
 have ceased in a measure from more arduous 
 labors, and to have employed himself in hold- 
 ing synods for the settlement of the church. 
 Several of the canons enacted in these coun- 
 cils are still in existence, and they serve to elu- 
 cidate many of the doctrines and customs of 
 the early Irish church. Whatever time St. 
 Patrick could spare from these important avo- 
 cations, was passed in retirement at Saul, 
 where, in prayer and meditation he ended his 
 days. He lived to an advanced age, and was 
 buried near the site of the present cathedral of 
 Down.-( Todd's Ancient Church in Ireland, p. 14.) 
 The efforts to evangelize the world, were 
 not, however, restricted to individual attempts. 
 In the fifth and several succeeding centuries, 
 the Nestor ians became the most missionary body 
 at that time existing, as well as the most. 
 
 •numerous. (For an account of the origin and 
 missions of this body, see Nestorians and 
 China.) 
 
 Most writers agree that the Christian reli- 
 gion was early planted in Arabia, from the 
 great number of Jews dispersed among 
 these tribes, who claim their descent from 
 Abraham and- Ishmael. Some have main- 
 tained that several tribes among the Arabians 
 had received the Christian religion long be- 
 fore the time of Mohammed. An able writer 
 mentions one Phylarchus, and a whole tribe 
 of Arabians, who in the fifth century made 
 profession of the Christian religion. " Even 
 the Arabians themselves own that the Chris- 
 tians were very numerous in Arabia, long be- 
 fore the time of Mohammed, as appears from 
 numerous passages in the Koran, where both 
 Christians and Jews are mentioned, as well as 
 in their own common histories, cited by Pocock 
 and other Orientalists. The principal tribes 
 that embraced Christianity were Hamger, and, 
 according to others, the whole kingdom of the 
 Homerites, Ghassan, Rabia, Taghlah, Bahra, 
 Tonuch, part of the tribes of Tay and Kodaa, 
 the inhabitants of Najaram and the Arabs of 
 Hira." [See Mr. Sale's Prelim. Discourses,]}. '29.) 
 
 It does not appear, however, that the Holy- 
 Scriptures had been translated into their 
 ton^^ue, which will account for the subsequent 
 extinction of their churches. All nations that 
 have had the Scriptures in their own lan- 
 guage have stood, either in whole or in part, 
 against the seductions of Mohammedanism ; 
 such are the Greeks, Syrians, Armenians, Abys- 
 sinians, Coptics, and some others. {See Yeates's 
 Indian Church, p. 41.) 
 
 In the same century, the conversion of the 
 southern or lowland Picts is said to have been 
 effected through the instrumentality of a British 
 bishop named Ninias; and though they were 
 soon after reduced by the northern Picts, their 
 heathen conquerors -permitted them to retain 
 the profession of Christianity. The baptism 
 of Clovis, king of the Franks, took place about 
 the year 496 ; and it has been justly remark- 
 ed, that, " nothwithstanding he was an ungodly 
 man, he became an instrument in the hand of 
 Providence to promote a cause of which he 
 knew not the value." Through the influence 
 of his queen Clotilda, who was a zealous Chris- 
 tian, he was induced to profess the faith of the 
 Gospel, and was baptized at Eheims, together 
 with his sister, and three thousand of his 
 troops. ( See Smith's Origin of Missionary So- 
 cieties, Yol. I. p. 23.) 
 
 In Britain, Christianity was almost extin- 
 guished by the predatory incursions of the 
 Scots and Picts, and, afterwards, by the per- 
 secutions of the Saxons. 
 
 Cextury YI. — This century was distinguish- 
 ed by some further advances of Christianity, 
 both in the East and West. The bishops of 
 Constantinople, under the influence and pro- 
 tection of the Grecian emperors, succeeded in 
 
su 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 converting some barbarous nations, inhabiting 
 the coast of the Euxine Sea, among whom 
 were the Abasgi, whoso country hiy between 
 the shores of that sea and Mount Caucasus ; 
 the Hendi, who dwelt beyond the Danube; 
 the Alani, Lani, and Zani, together with other 
 uncivilized nations, whose precise situation 
 cannot now be accurately ascertained, were 
 converted about the same time, during the 
 reign of Justinian. In the West, Remigius, 
 bishop of Rheims, was remarkably successful 
 in Gaul, where the example of Clovis continued 
 to be followed by great numbers of his sub- 
 jects. 
 
 Britain was abandoned by the Romans in 
 the fifth century, and then became subject to 
 the Saxons, who forthwith established their 
 pagan religion. The Roman language, cus- 
 toms, and manners, with all the Christianity 
 that existed, were at once swept away from 
 the largest and finest portions of the island, by 
 the Saxon invasion. The Britons were divi- 
 ded into a great number of petty kingdoms, 
 and their princes animated with as much 
 hostility against each other as against the in- 
 vaders. But they were generally too high- 
 minded to brook that foreed and ignominious 
 incorporation to which the Gauls, and Span- 
 iards, and Italians had submitted, and gradu- 
 ally retiring to the western peninsula, to the 
 land of lakes, and to the highlands of Scot- 
 land, their language ceased to be spoken in 
 that great division of the island, which now 
 obtained the name of England, from its An- 
 glican conquerors. 
 
 It is, however, to Wales and Cornwall that 
 we are to look for the progress of Christianity 
 in Britain during this period. Fuller says : 
 " The entire body of the British Church at 
 this time was in Wales, where Bangor on the 
 north, and Caerleon (on the Usk, in Mon- 
 mouthshire,) on the south, were the two eyes 
 thereof for learning and religion. The latter 
 had in it the court of King Arthur, the see of 
 an archbishop, a college of 200 philosophers, 
 who therein studied astronomy ; and was a 
 populous place of great extent." There is 
 reason to believe that Bangor, near Chester, 
 was of equal eminence with Caerleon for men 
 of learning and piety. It is said that the 
 monastery at this place contained 2,100 monks, 
 divided into seven courses, of 300 each. 
 
 The Anglo-Saxon people sprang from three 
 piratical tribes of Gothic origin. Two of 
 these were seated in what is now called Jut- 
 land, and in three adjacent islands. The emi- 
 gration of the Jutes does not seem to have 
 been extensive, its British settlements being 
 confined to Kent, the Isle of Wight, and the 
 southern part of Hampshire. The jungles, 
 whose home lay in Sleswick and Holstein, as 
 now called, emigrated entirely, and spreading 
 over the north-eastern, midland, and northern 
 counties of south Britain, eventually gave name 
 to the whole country. The Saxons, nearest 
 
 neighbors of these, found new abodes in Ksscx, 
 Middlesex, and those counties west of Kent 
 which lie between the Thames and the Chan- 
 nel. The earlier years of their settlement ia 
 Britain were little favorable to their reception 
 of the Christian religion. The people, indecnl, 
 whose fair possessions had lured them from 
 their Scandinavian abodes, had risen into im- 
 portance and wealth under an abandonment of 
 paganism. The Britons, aroused into a long 
 course of sanguinary conflict with their treach- 
 erous invaders, were little likely to think of 
 their conversion. It is therefore probable that 
 the native clergy made no attempt to humanize 
 these ferocious pagans, by communicating to 
 them a knowledge of the Gospel. The pagan 
 warriors, moreover, were likely to derive new 
 prejudices against Christianity, from the siio- 
 cess which usually waited upon their own 
 arms. Britain's trSst in the cro&s had not 
 secured her fortunes from constant declension. 
 Reliance upon Woden had been encouraged 
 unceasingly by victory. A people unacquainted 
 with true religion would naturally infer that its 
 own deities were more powerful than those of 
 its opponents. A considerable change must 
 be wrought in the whole frame of a society, 
 like this before it could be gained over to calm 
 reflection upon the religion of a people i)ro9- 
 trate under its assaults. Providence, however, 
 effected such a change. England's principal 
 monarch then was EtMbert, King of Kent. 
 He appears to have ascended his father's 
 throne about the year 560 ; and, probably, ten 
 years afterwards he married Bertfia, daughter 
 of Cherebert, King of Paris. This princt'ss 
 coming of a Christian family, was not allo\ved 
 to pass over into Kent until ample stipulations 
 had been made for the free profession of her 
 religion. She came accordingly, attended by 
 Luidhard, a Frank bishop, and for her accom- 
 modation a British church was erected, in 
 honor of St. Martin, on the eastern side of 
 Canterbury. A Christian congregation was 
 formed in the principal seat of Anglo-Saxon 
 power. As its leading member was the most 
 illustrious female in the island, we may reason- 
 ably suppose that it did not long fail of mak- 
 ing converts. Hence it became understood at 
 Rome, that among Englishmen an anxious 
 desire prevailed for admission to the church. 
 Gregory the Great, as he is termed, Bishoj) of 
 Rome, mtimated to Bertha by letter that she 
 ought early to have inclined her husband fa- 
 vorably towards her own religion. The vener- 
 able Bede gives the following account of the 
 manner in which Gregory's attention was first 
 directed to Britain as a missionary field, which, 
 Dr. Clarke says, is taken from the Saxon 
 Homily of JBlfric, written more than nine hun- 
 dred years ago : " While yet a private clergy- 
 man, Gregory, passing through a slave market 
 in his native city, found his eyes forcibly ap-| 
 rested by some light-haired,' fair-complexione * 
 youths, who stood exposed for sale. * Whei 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 315 
 
 come these lads ? ' he asked. ' From Britain 
 was the answer. ' Are the people Christians 
 there ? ' he then inquired. ' No, pagans,' he was 
 told. ' Alas ! ' he said, ' how grievous it is that 
 faces fair as these should own subjection to the 
 swarthy devil ! ' His next question was, ' What 
 do you call the tribe from which these young 
 people spring ? ' ' Angles,' said the dealer. 
 
 * Ah ! that is well,' Gregory rejoined ; ' Angels 
 they are in countenance, and choirs of angels 
 they ought to be. Where in Britain do their 
 kindred live?' 'In Deiira,' was the reply. 
 
 * Well again,' Gregory said ; ' it is our duty 
 to deliver them from God's ire. Pray, who is 
 king of the land so significantly named ? ' 
 
 * Ella,' replied the slave-merchant. ' Ah ! ' 
 the pious inquirer added, ' Hallelujah must be 
 sung in that man's country.' " Gregory resolved 
 upon undertaking a mission into Anglia. Nor 
 did the Pope discourage his intention, but the 
 Roman people would not allow him to enter 
 upon a labor so remote and perilous. How- 
 ever, after Gregory's elevation to the See of 
 Rome, A. D. 592, he selected Aastin, or Augus- 
 tine, Prior of the Monastery of St. Martin, in 
 Rome, to lead a devoted band upon the mis- 
 sion. Austin, having engaged several monks 
 as partners in his toil, left Rome, but halting 
 among the monastic recluses of Lerins, these 
 devotees, to whom the difficulties of his under- 
 taking were necessarily better known than 
 they could have been at Rome, utterly dis- 
 couraged him from the attempt. He applied 
 for Gregory's leave to withdraw from the en- 
 terprize. But the pontiff would hear nothing 
 of despondence ; he rebuked the missionary's 
 pusillanimity, refused to cancel his obligation, 
 and commanded him to lose no time in reach- 
 ing Britain. Austin now rallied his spirits, 
 proceeded northwards, and providing himself 
 with interpreters in Gaul, set sail for the 
 chalky cliffs of Kent. He landed in the island 
 of Thanet, and thence dispatched a messenger 
 to Ethelbert, informing him of his arrival, and 
 declaring that he had come thus far in hope of 
 showing him the way to heaven. By the 
 Kentish prince, however well the message 
 might have pleased him, it was cautiously re- 
 ceived. He gave no permission to his Roman 
 guests for a further advance into the country, 
 until he had gone himself and made observa- 
 tions. Austin and his companions met him in 
 procession, one of them bearing a silver cross, 
 another a picture of the Saviour, while the re- 
 mainder chanted litanies. The prior dis- 
 claimed any other object than to guide the 
 king and all his people to everlasting joys 
 above. ' Fair words and promises,' Ethelbert 
 replied, ' but still, new and uncertain. I can- 
 not relinquish for them what my countrymen 
 have long and universally professed. Your 
 distant pilgrimage, however, and charitable 
 purpose of offering us a boon so highly valued 
 by yourselves, justly claim our hospitality. I 
 shall, therefore, provide you with a residence 
 
 and means of living. Nor do I restrain you 
 from endeavors to spread your opinions among 
 my people.' The residence provided was at 
 Canterbury, and the missionaries entered that 
 city to take possession of it, with imposing 
 solemnities. 
 
 Austin's views were now directed to the 
 consolidation and extension of his authority ; 
 and he repaired to the confines of Wales, and 
 sought an interview with the native prelacy 
 of Britain. The place rendered memorable 
 by this meeting seems to have been under the 
 shade of some noble tree, afterwards known 
 as Aitgusti7ie's Oak, situated, probably within 
 the modern county of Worcester. The prelates 
 and monks in Wales, wishing to retain their 
 independence of the See of Rome, and the inte- 
 grity of their own doctrines, naturally resisted 
 the claims of Augustine. Violent altercations 
 ensued ; the Kentish prince was engaged in 
 the quarrel ; and the unfortunate Cambrians, 
 whose only crime consisted in their conscien- 
 tious resistance to a foreign yoke, were doomed 
 to suffer the invasion of their territories, and 
 in some instances, the loss of their lives. And 
 there is reason to believe, that the supremacy 
 of the Pope had as much to do with the origin 
 of this mission as the love of souls. But from 
 whatever motive it was undertaken, it was the 
 point of the papal wedge which, first insinuated 
 into the ecclesiastical hierarchy of England, 
 by Gregory I., was speedily driven deeper ; 
 until, by the authority of Innocent III. it 
 completely destroyed the independence of the 
 British Church, and laid her prostrate at the 
 feet of the Pope. It was, therefore, the policy 
 of Augustine to undermine the simplicity of 
 religious worship among the Britons, and to 
 operate upon the imagination and superstition 
 of tho Saxons, by means of sensual doctrines, 
 and a gaudy ritual, which he had imported 
 from Italy. Image worship, purgatorial inflic- 
 tions, the efficacy of good works, and the virtue 
 of old bones, designated relics, were all ready 
 and at hand. "The wily monk," says a 
 modern writer, "assumed such austerity of 
 manner, and sanctity of deportment, that he 
 effectually secured the veneration of the delu- 
 ded multitude ; and by his pretended miracles, 
 which any juggler of the present day could 
 surpass, very easily imposed on their credulity." 
 Gregory was transported with joy, on hearing 
 the continued prosperity of the mission; and in a 
 letter to Ethelbert, exhorted him " to assist Au- 
 gustine in the good work by all the expedients of 
 ^z/?orto^ww, TERROR, and CORRECTION!" The 
 whole of this affair is highly monitory. Eng- 
 land had once more become the land of pa- 
 ganism ; but by the labors of foreign mission- 
 aries, Christianity was again established. The 
 process was precisely the reverse of that by 
 which the Roman empire had been brought 
 under the influence of the Christian faith. 
 There it had begun with the poor, and had 
 made its way up, unassisted by any human 
 
816 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 e)wcr, or any worldly or interested raotiyes 
 ut here the missionaries came with the im- 
 posing: rank of anibassadors on a religious 
 errand ; they addressed themselves to the kings 
 of those iK'tty states into which England was 
 dividtnl ; and having succeeded with them, the 
 nominal conversion of their subjects followed 
 as a matter of obedience. The kings had an 
 obvious political motive for professing a reli- 
 gion, which enabled them to connect them- 
 Belves by intermarriages with the princes of 
 the Continent ; prepared a refuge for them in 
 case of expulsion from their own dominions; 
 and placed them in communication with the 
 more civilized parts of the world. — Fuller's 
 Chunk History of Britain ; Smith's Religion 
 of Ancient Britain, p. 277 ; Dr. SoiUhey awl 
 Kingsmill. 
 
 To Augustine's mission, as well as many 
 other missionary efforts of that period, the 
 judicious remarks of Dr. Mosheim will apply. 
 " The conversions and sacred exploits of this 
 age will lose much of their importance in the 
 esteem of such as examine with attention the 
 accounts which have been given of them by 
 writers of this and the succeeding ages ; for 
 by these accounts, it appears that the converted 
 nations retained a great part of their former 
 impiety, superstition, and licentiousness ; and 
 that, attached to Christ by a mere outward 
 and nominal profession, they, in effect, re- 
 nounced the purity of his doctrine, and the 
 authority of his Gospel, by their flagitious 
 lives, and the superstitious and idolatrous rites 
 and institutions which they continued to ob- 
 serve. If credit is to be given to the writers 
 of this century, the conversion of these uncivil- 
 ized nations to Christianity was principally 
 effected by the prodigies and miracles which 
 the heralds of the Gospel were enabled to work 
 in its behalf. But, in abandoning their ancient 
 superstition, the greatest part of these people 
 were more influenced by the example and au- 
 thority of their princes, than by force of argu- 
 ment, or the power of a rational conviction. 
 The missionaries required nothing of these 
 barbarous people that was difficult to be per- 
 formed, or that laid any remarkable restraint 
 upon their appetites and passions. The prin- 
 cipal injunctions they imposed upon these rude 
 proselytes were, that they should commit to 
 memory certain summaries of doctrine, and 
 pay to the image of Christ and the saints, the 
 same religious service which they had formerly 
 offered to the statues of the gods. Nor were 
 they at all delicate or scrupulous in choosing 
 the means of establishing their credit; for 
 they deemed it lawful, and even meritorious, 
 to deceive an ignorant and inattentive multi- 
 tude, by representing as prodigies, things that 
 were merely natural events, as we learn from 
 the most authentic records of these times." 
 
 It was in this century that Columba, or Co- 
 lombanus, passed over into the western parts of 
 Scotland, and promulgated the Gospel among 
 
 northern Picts. The Scots of Argyle, among 
 whom he resided, embraced Christianity in 
 Ireland, when the hostilities of their neighbors 
 compelled them to seek a temporary refuge ia 
 that country. The little island named I-colm- 
 kill, after this missionary, was the scat of a 
 mission seminary, which he conducted for a 
 period of more than thirty years, besides retain- 
 ing the charge of several other institutions, 
 which he had founded in Ireland. Columba 
 had the happiness of baptizing the British 
 sovereign ; and the neighboring Scots and Bri- 
 tons held his character and pei-son in such high 
 estimation, that it was no uncommon thing ibr 
 them to refer to him as the final umpire in the 
 adjustment of their differences. Of royal ex- 
 traction; superior talents and accomplishments ; 
 fervent in spirit ; indefatigable in his exer- 
 tions ; unbounded in his beneficence ; unmoved 
 by injuries, and undaunted by danger ; he 
 literally " overcame evil with good," and was 
 made the honored instrument of subduing 
 the prejudices, and winning the aflfectious of 
 the most violent enemies of the Gospel. He 
 expired in the act of transcribing the Holy 
 Scriptures. 
 
 The monastery of Icma, in the Hebrides, 
 founded by Columba, might justly be called a 
 missionary college, as the great object of the 
 institution was to prepare the residents for mis- 
 sionary enterprize, by previous discipline, and 
 transcription of the Scriptures. From thence 
 went forth several of those blessed men, by 
 whom many parts of Germany, and the Low 
 Countries, were first brought to the knowledge 
 of the truth. Three ancient manuscripts, in 
 the Irish character, probably written in this 
 monastery or college, are still preserved. (See 
 Sir "William Betham's Irish Antiquities.) 
 
 Such was the missionary zeal of the monks 
 of lona, that they are said to have frequently 
 undertaken expeditions, the object of which 
 was to discover any land which the Gospel had 
 not yet reached, that they might preach to its 
 inhabitants the glad tidings of salvation. The 
 Norwegians found Irish monks in Iceland, 
 when they first discovered it, about the year 
 900. The followers of Columba obtained the 
 name of Culdees, from certain terms implying, 
 " The family or servants of God," and are dis- 
 tinguished by it, from those societies, or mo- 
 nastic institutions, founded by Papal authority. 
 " From this nest of Columba," says one of his 
 biographers, speaking of lona, " these sacred 
 doves took their flight to all quarters. Where- 
 ever they went they disseminated learning and 
 true religion, and seem to have done more tow- 
 ards the revival of both, than any other society 
 at that time in Europe. In fact, lona, or I-colm- 
 kill, was, in the early ages, a seminary of all 
 kinds of learning, and a nursery of divines for j 
 planting churches." (See Smith's Life of C&- j 
 lumha.) His disciples were remarkable for the ! 
 exemplary holiness of their lives, and througii 
 the medium of their missionary labors, tWBJ 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 317 
 
 hern Picts, the Anglo-Saxons of Merda and 
 .\ /ihurnberland, and several of the northern 
 nations of Europe, were converted, at least 
 to the name and profession of Christianity. 
 (Seo Life of Colomba, published by the Mass. 
 Sill). School Society.) 
 
 IV) the sixth century have also been referred 
 
 tlio conversion of the ^iosgz, a people of Scythia, 
 
 llie Hevuli, who resided on the banks of 
 
 Danube; together with that of Zathus, a 
 
 |i: 1 icc of the Colchians ; and Almundiirus, a 
 
 pr i ! u^e of the Saracens. About the same period 
 
 i ' Paulicans arose in the East, and were so 
 
 iiiiuated from their making Paul's Epis- 
 
 • he chief rule of their lives. They were 
 
 . rbial for their endeavors to spread the 
 
 I 'cl, in opposition to the errors of the Greek 
 
 i.hii Komish churches ; and such was the rapid 
 
 iimiiiplication of this people, and so numerous 
 
 were they become in the reign of the Greek 
 
 Empress Theodora, in the ninth century, that 
 
 100,000 lost their lives during the persecution 
 
 of that Empress, by fire, sword, the gibbet, 
 
 impalement, and other cruelties. 
 
 Century VII. — Cheerless, indeed, was the 
 commencement of the seventh century, and 
 gloomy the scene on which the first Gregory 
 closed his eyes, the barbarous hosts still press- 
 ing the Roman empire on the north, and the 
 Arabian impostor breaking forth from his sul- 
 try sands, as the avenger of the Lord, scatter- 
 ing the flock from field to field, and obliterat- 
 ing the once flourishing churches in the East, 
 and along the African coast. But it does not 
 appear that any of those nations who possessed 
 the written word of God relapsed into the Mo- 
 hammedan imposture. According to Yeates, 
 there were no early translations of the Bible 
 into Arabic. 
 
 Daring this century the spirit of missionary 
 enterprize arose chiefly from the North. From 
 the monasteries of Great Britain and Ireland, 
 men went forth glowing with the desire of 
 bringing the Gotliic tribes within the fold of 
 Christ. Along the banks of the Rhine, in the 
 Black Forest, in Bavaria, and Thuringia, the 
 church extended itself by the labors of men 
 thus devoted, among whom shine the names 
 of Fridolin, Gall, Rupert, Eustasius, Willi- 
 brod, and above all, Boniface, as apostles of 
 the German nations. 
 
 Century VIII. — At the commencement of 
 the eighth century, when a considerable part of 
 Germany was buried in the darkness of pagan 
 superstition, Winfred, a Benedictine monk, 
 born in England of illustrious parents, and 
 afterwards known by the name of Bowface, at- 
 tended by two companions, went over into 
 Frieslmul, to water the churches which WUh- 
 Orod had planted. He afterwards removed to 
 Bavaria and Thuringia; and throughout the 
 greater part of Hesse, even to the frontiers of 
 Saxony, he published the word; and in the 
 year 719 Gregory the second made him bishop 
 of the new German churches. In his mission 
 
 from England, he obtained several assistants, 
 who dispersed themselves in the villages ; and 
 in a circular letter which he addressed to the 
 British prelates and people, he earnestly soli- 
 cited their prayers for his success. He con- 
 tinued his missionary labors with unabated 
 ardor till the age of seventy-five ; when going 
 to confirm some converts in the plain of Dock- 
 um,he was attacked and killed, with the whole 
 of his company, amounting to fifty-two persons, 
 by a troop of ferocious Pagans armed with 
 shields and lances. The German Christians 
 who had considered Boniface as the apostle of 
 their country, immediately raised an army, and 
 conquered the Pagans, whose lives were spared 
 only on condition of their submitting to be 
 instructed in the truths of Christianity. 
 
 Siefuvyn, another Englishman, was particu- 
 larly distinguished among those who labored 
 as missionaries in Germany. On one occasion 
 he ventured to appear before an assembly of 
 Saxons, while they were sacrificing to their 
 idols, and with a loud voice exhorted them to 
 turn from such vanities and to serve the living 
 God. This interference exasperated the idol- 
 ators to such a degree that the zealous mission- 
 ary would probably have been immolated on 
 the spot, had it not been for the remonstrances 
 of a Saxon chief, named Buto, who contended 
 that an ambassador of Heaven ought not to 
 be treated with less respect than if he had 
 come from the king of some neighboring na- 
 tion. Siefuvyn was, therefore, permitted to 
 retire without molestation, and he continued a 
 useful and active laborer in Germany until hi< 
 death. 
 
 Villehad, a native of Northumberland, is also 
 said to have been very successful among the 
 Saxons, whose ferocious spirits were softened 
 by his meekness, whose minds were illuminated 
 by his instructions, and some of whom, it ia 
 hoped, were eternally saved through his in- 
 strumentality. He became bishop of Bremen, 
 and died in Friesland, after he had preached 
 the Gospel thirty-five years with unwearied 
 perseverance and unabated zeal. 
 
 During this century a war broke out be- 
 tween Charlemagne and the Saxons, which 
 contributed materially to the ext(,'nsion of the 
 nominal Church. After a long and obstinate 
 struggle the Saxons were subdued ; and when 
 gentle means proved unavailing to induce 
 them to embrace the Gospel, coercive methods 
 were adopted, and they were then baptized by 
 thousands. What sort of converts these were, 
 may easily be conceived. However, as schools 
 and monasteries were founded, and ministers 
 were appointed to reside among them, some 
 genera] knowledge of Divine truth must hava 
 been progressively diffused, though wretchedly 
 intermingled with the superstitions of the age. 
 
 During the seventh and eighth centuries 
 the zeal of British, Scotch, and Irish Chris- 
 tians, induced many devoted individuals to 
 undertake extensive and laborious missions in 
 
318 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 Germany, Belgium, France, and the uncvan- 
 gelizcii parts of England, Scotland, and Ire- 
 land. These benevolent toils were not un fre- 
 quently shared by princes and nobles, when 
 convertetl from paganism to Christianity. As 
 instances of this, it is recorded that when Aidaii, 
 a monk of Ireland, and a zealous and success- 
 ful missionary in the north of Englaad, under- 
 took his missionary tours, Oswald, a British 
 prince, who had been baptized and educated 
 m Ireland, acted as his interpreter. About 
 this period, Corbinian, a French Benedictine 
 monk, labored assiduously among the Bavor 
 rians. Firmin, a Gaul by birth, preached in 
 Alsace, Bavaria, and Switzerland. 
 
 Century IX. — Rumold, a native of England 
 or Ireland, had long been an example of piety 
 at home, when, animated by a desire for the 
 conversion of the heathen nations, he visited 
 Rome, and earnestly solicited an appointment 
 as a missionary. His request was granted, 
 and he not only received the Papal benedic- 
 tion, but was also " ordained a reigionary, or 
 missionary bishop, without any fixed see." 
 uinasc/iarius, or Anasgar, preached the Gospel 
 to the Danes and Swedes, and other northern 
 nations, and so extraordinary were his labors 
 and success, as to cause him to be termed 
 " The Apostle of the Nm-th." 
 
 The missionaries who accompanied him, or 
 whom he sent out, were directed by him to the 
 apostle Paul, as an example of missionary zeal. 
 To these and other Christian worthies who 
 lived at this period, we may justly add the 
 name of Adalard or Alard, the cousin-german 
 of Charlemagne. He appears to have been 
 truly pious from early years ; and though 
 obliged to fill several important offices by the 
 emperor's order at court, he retained his love 
 of privacy and retirement. He founded seve- 
 ral monasteries, in which he promoted learning 
 and science. His favorite institution, how- 
 ever, was a missimmry college, as it might be 
 justly called, founded by him at New Corbie, 
 or Cosway, nine leagues from Paderborn, upon 
 the Weser, expressly instituted to be a nursery 
 of evangelical laborers in the instruction and 
 conversion of the northern nations. Anascha- 
 rius, mentioned above, was one of its greatest 
 ornaments. This period has been emphati- 
 cally called " The Age of Missions:' 
 
 The ninth century was likewise rendered re- 
 markable by the attempts of Constantine, (or 
 Cyril,) and Methodius, two Greek monks, to 
 evangelize several Sclavonian tribes. They 
 were the sons of Leo, a Greek nobleman, of 
 Thessalonica. Cyril, the younger brother, was 
 the most distinguished for his literary ac- 
 quirements and knowledge of the Holy Scrip- 
 tures. In his youth he had enjoyed the best 
 education as a companion to the young Prince 
 Michael ; but on the proposal to him of what 
 was deemed a highly important matrimonial 
 alliance, but which be disapproved, he with- 
 drew from court, and retired for some time 
 
 into a monastery. In 857 he visited Constan- 
 tinople, and shortly afterwards proceeded on a 
 mission to the country of the Khazars ; and 
 proved successful in prevailing with the 
 prince, some of his nobles, and many of his 
 people, to embrace the profession of Chrinti- 
 anity. He then visited the Bulgarians, with 
 the same design, and succeeded in baptizing 
 many of them. Methodius, the other brother, 
 filled the office of governor on the Sclavonian 
 frontiers for ten years, affording a most favor- 
 able opportunity of acquiring a knowledge of 
 the Sclavonian language. He afterwards ac- 
 companied his brother in his mission to the 
 Khazars, and other nations. An application 
 being made to the Greek emperor, by certain 
 Moravo-Sclavonian princes, for teachers to 
 instruct their people in the truths of the Holy 
 Scriptures, the two brothers were at once 
 named as the fittest persons for the undertak- 
 ing. Being appointed to the charge, they en- 
 gaged in the translation of the Scriptures, on 
 which they are said to have employed four 
 years and a half, at the same time instructing 
 the inhabitants of Moravia. Afterwards they 
 visited Kome, where Cyril became a monk, 
 and died there, in the year 871. To effect the 
 object of translation, Cyril, with the assistance, 
 as some think, of his brother, Methodius, in- 
 vented an alphabet, adapted to the language 
 of the Sclavonic tribes, to whom they wcro 
 sent. Whether they translated the whole of 
 the Old and New Testaments, or the New 
 Testament principally, is uncertain. Such, 
 however, has been the attachment to this an- 
 cient Sclavonic version, that no other is per- 
 mitted to be read in the churches ; and there 
 existed no version in the modern Russ prior to 
 the year 1816, when the Emperor Alexander 
 ordered a translation to be made, that his own 
 subjects might be favored, like other nations, 
 with the Scriptures, in their vernacular tongue, 
 the Sclavonian language having been for cen- 
 turies obsolete, and nearly as difficult to a 
 modern Russ as the Anglo-Saxon to an En- 
 glishman. — (See Repoi-t of British and Foreign 
 Bible Society.) This order of the emperor 
 having been partially carried into execution^^ 
 the whole of the New Testament was printec 
 in 1823. Since that time the printing of the 
 Scriptures in modern Russ has been sus- 
 pended principally by the intrigues of the Jesu- 
 its and the opposition of the Emperor Niche 
 las. — (Henderson's Biblical Researches, p. 132/ 
 About the year 867, under the reign of th< 
 Emperor Basilius, the Macedonian, the Scla 
 vouians, Arentani, and others, inhabitants 
 Dalrriatia, sent an embassy to Constantinople 
 declaring their resolution of submitting to thi 
 Grecian empire, and of embracing the Chrid 
 tian religion, and requesting to be suppliec 
 with suitable teachers. Their request waff 
 granted, and those provinces were included r 
 within the pale of the church. The fierce and \ 
 barbarous nation of the Russians, inhabitants I 
 
EABLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 319 
 
 of the Ukraine, embraced the Gospel under 
 the reign of the same emperof . But what has 
 already been said as to the nature of such 
 conversions, must be borne in mind. In the 
 case of individuals, the profession of Chris- 
 tianity may have been sincere ; but as to the 
 great body of the people, it was probably 
 merely formal. In the course of this century, 
 Christianity began to be preached in the fro- 
 zen regions of Scandinavia, and on the shores 
 of the Baltic, which had hitherto been involv- 
 ed in the grossest pagan darkness. In the 
 year 826, Harold, king of Jutland, being ex- 
 pelled from his dominions, implored the pro- 
 tection of the Emperor Louis, the son and 
 successor of Charlemagne. That prince pro- 
 mised him his assistance on condition that he 
 would embrace Christianity, and permit the 
 ministers of that religion to preach in his do- 
 minions, to which he consented. He was ac- 
 cordingly baptized, and returned to his own 
 country, attended by two ecclesiastics, Ansca- 
 rius and Aubert, monks of Corbri. These ven- 
 erable missionaries labored with remarkable 
 success during two years in converting the 
 rude inhabitants of Cimbria and Jutland. On 
 the death of his companion, the zealous and 
 indefatigable /l/wcm-ms went into Sweden, a. d. 
 828, where his exertions were also crowned 
 with success. After having been raised in the 
 year 831, to the archbishopric of Hamburgh, 
 and of the whole north, to which charge the 
 superintendence of the church of Bremen was 
 afterwards added, this missionary spent the re- 
 mainder of his life in traveling frequently 
 amongst the Danes, Cimbrians, and Swedes, to 
 form new churches, to confirm and establish 
 those which had been already planted, and 
 otherwise to promote the cause of Christianity. 
 He continued in the midst of these arduous 
 and dangerous enterprises till his death, in the 
 year 865. Rembert, his successor in the super- 
 intendence of the church of Bremen, began, 
 towards the close of this century, to preach 
 to the inhabitants of Brandenburgh, and made 
 some progress towards their conversion. — 
 (Pearson's Brief Historic View of tlie Progress 
 of the Gospel, page 29.) About the middle of 
 this century, the standard of the cross began 
 to be unfurled among the Bulgarians, a Scla- 
 vonic people of extraordinary fierceness, who 
 had long proved extremely troublesome, by 
 their contiguity to the Greek emperors. The 
 sister of their king Bogoris having been taken 
 prisoner in a military excursion, was carried 
 to Constantinople, where she heard and em- 
 braced the Gospel. After some time she was 
 ransomed, and on her return home she was so 
 deeply affected by her brother's idolatrous 
 practices, that she earnestly sought to convince 
 him of the absurdity of his worship. The 
 king listened attentively to her arguments, but 
 did not appear inclined to change his religion, 
 till, on the appearance of a pestilence in his 
 dominions, he was persuaded to pray to the 
 
 God of the Christians, and the plague was al- 
 most immediately removed. This circum- 
 stance convinced him of the omnipotent pow- 
 er of Jesus, and he took an early opportunity 
 of sending to Constantinople for missionaries, 
 from whom he and many of his subjects re- 
 ceived baptism. Moshiem remarks, that " the 
 missionaries of this period were superior, both 
 in their principles and conduct, to those of 
 preceding ages, as they were more anxious to 
 inform the minds of men than to extend the 
 domination of the Pope, and they made no 
 attempts to add to the number of their con- 
 verts by rigid and coercive measures, altoge- 
 ther inconsistent with the spirit of the Gospel." 
 — (Smith's History and Origin of Missionary 
 Societies, Yol. I. pp. 49, 50.) 
 
 Century X. — In the tenth century, the 
 Christian church presented a deplorable scene 
 of ignorance, superstition, and immorality. 
 Amidst the darkness, however, which universal- 
 ly prevailed, some rays of light occasionally ap- 
 pear. The Nestorians continued their missionary 
 labors. The Hungarians and Avari had re- 
 ceived some imperfect ideas of Christianity 
 during the reign of Charlemagne ; but, on his 
 decease, they relapsed into idolatry, and the 
 Christian religion was almost extinguished 
 among them. Towards the middle of this 
 century, two Turkish chiefs, Bologndes and 
 Gylas, whose territories lay on the banks of 
 the Danube, made a public profession of Chris- 
 tianity, and were baptized at Constantinople. 
 Of these, the former soon apostatised ; the 
 other steadily persevered, received instruction 
 from Hierotheus, a bishop who had accompa- 
 nied him from Constantinople, and encouraged 
 bis labors among his subjects. Yarolta, the 
 daughter of Gylas, being afterwards married 
 to Geysa, the chief of the Hungarian nation, 
 he was by her persuaded to embrace^ Christi- 
 anity. Geysa, however, still retained* a predi- 
 lection for his ancient superstitions, and was 
 only prevented from apostatising by the zeal 
 and authority of Adalbert, archbishop of 
 Prague, who visited Hungary towards the con- 
 clusion of this century. But however imper- 
 fect might be the conversion of the King, the 
 most salutary consequences followed the recep- 
 tion of the Gospel by his subjects. Humanity, 
 peace, and civilization, began to flourish 
 among a fierce and barbarous people. — The 
 inhabitants of Poland were, during this cen- 
 tury, blessed with the knowledge of Christi- 
 anity. Some Poles, traveling into Bohemia 
 and Moravia, were struck with the preaching 
 of the Gospel, and on their return, earnestly 
 recommended it to the attention of their 
 countrymen. The report at length reaching 
 the ears of Micislaus, the Duke of Poland, he 
 was induced to divorce his seven wives, and 
 married Dambronca, the daughter of Boleslaus, 
 Duke of Bohemia. He was baptized in the 
 year 965, and, by the zealous efforts of the 
 Duke and Duchess, their subjects were either 
 
320 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 persuaikxl or obligetl, by degrees, to abandon 
 their idolatry, and profess the religion of 
 Christ. The conversions which had taken 
 place in Russia during the preceding century, 
 were neither sincere nor permanent. But in 
 the year 061, Ffo/orfowj?r having married Anne, 
 sister of the Greek Emperor Basilnis the 
 Second, was prevailed upon by that princess 
 to receive the Christian faith. He was ac- 
 cordingly baptized in the year 987. The Rus- 
 sians followed, without compulsion or reluc- 
 tance, the example of their prince ; and from 
 that time Russia received a Cliristian estab- 
 lishment, and considered herself as a daughter 
 of the Greek Church. In Scandinavia Chris- 
 tianity, which had been so successfully intro- 
 duced during the preceding century, had met 
 with a severe check in Denmark, under the 
 reign of Gormo the Third, who labored to ex- 
 tirpate it entirely. At length, however, he was 
 comi)elled by Henry the First, called the Fowler, 
 the predecessor of Otho the Great, to permit the 
 profession and propagation of Christianity in 
 his dominions ; and under the protection of 
 the emperor, Unni, then Archbishop of Ham- 
 burgh, with some other ecclesiastics, came into 
 Denmark, and formed many Christian churches 
 in that kingdom. On the death of Gormo, his 
 successor Harold, being defeated by Otho the 
 Great, A. D. 949, by the command of his con- 
 queror, though not unwillingly, embraced the 
 Gospel, and zealously supported and propaga- 
 ted it amongst his subjects during his reign. 
 Suen-Otho, however, his son and successor, en- 
 tirely renounced the Christian name, and per- 
 secuted his Christian subjects in the most cruel 
 manner. At length, being driven from his 
 throne, and forced into exile among the 
 Scots, he was led to reflect on his Christian 
 education, and to repent of his apostasy ; and 
 being restored to his kingdom, spent the re- 
 mainder of his life in the most sincere and 
 earnest endeavors to promote the cause of 
 Christianity in his dominions. In Sweden, an 
 almost entire extinction of the Gospel had 
 taken place. Unni, animated by his success 
 in Denmark, determined, therefore, on at- 
 tempting a revival of it in that country. His 
 pious exertions were rendered prosperous, and 
 he had the happiness of confirming the Gospel 
 in Sweden, and of planting it even in the re- 
 moter parts of that northern region. It was 
 during this century that Noi-way first received 
 the Christian faith. Several attempts were 
 previously made in the early part of it, which 
 were altogether unsuccessful. The barbarous 
 Norwegians resisted both the exhortations of 
 the English missionaries, and the more forci- 
 ble endeavors of their princes, to convert them 
 from their idolatry, till the year 945, when 
 Haco, King of Norway, who had been driven 
 from his throne, was restored by Harold, King 
 of Denmark ; and having been converted by 
 that prince during his exile, publicly recom- 
 mended Christianity to his subjects. The im 
 
 pression, however, which was then made upon 
 their minds, was but slight ; nor were they en- 
 tirely persuaded to become Christians till the 
 reign of his successor Olaus. At length Swcinf 
 King of Denmark, having conquered Norway, 
 obliged his subjects universally to renounce 
 idolatry, and to profess the Gospel. Among 
 the missionaries whose labors were render- 
 ed successful in this work, Guthebald, an 
 English priest, was the most eminent, both in 
 merit and authority. From Norway, Chris- 
 tianity spread into the Orkney Islaiids, which 
 were then subject to that country, and pene- 
 trated in sOme degree, even into the remote 
 region of Iceland. So that in this century the 
 triumph of Christianity was complete through- 
 out Scandinavia. (Pearson's Brief Historic 
 View of the Progress of the Gospel, p. 30-33.) 
 
 Though this century was proverbially an age 
 of darkness, yet the Gospel continued to 
 spread. And it has been well remarked that 
 although " the efforts of the missionaries at 
 this period, had their defects, yet they form the 
 principal glory of those times, and appear to 
 have been attended by the power of the Holy 
 Spirit, to the genuine conversion of numbers, 
 and the improvement of human society." 
 (Burder's Miss. Anec, p. 129.) 
 
 From the end of the sixth to the ninth cen- 
 tury, the progress of the Gospel continued with 
 varied success, among the Gothic tribes. After 
 that period, in the tenth century, the field of 
 missionary labor extended itself still further 
 towards the East. Beyond the limits already 
 named, amid the barren table lands of Scla- 
 vrniia and Sarmartia, shut in by the Elbe and the 
 Oural mountains, were gathered the wandering 
 tribes distinguished by the name of Sclaves, 
 who presented a still more hopeless task to 
 Christian zeal. Uncontrolled by any govern- 
 ment or law, deeming even the formation of 
 villages an infringement of liberty, guided only 
 by traditionary custom, they dispersed through- 
 out the forests and plains of that wide district, 
 clustered in family groups, with no unity, either 
 of national existence, or of habit, or even of re- 
 ligion. A vague superstition, consisting of a 
 rude worship of nature's powers, with stated 
 sacrifices, and the dualistic notion of the East, 
 derived from contact with the Scythian tribes, 
 possessed their minds with a sense of religious 
 awe ; but, throughout the whole race, even the 
 idea of the immortality of the soul had become 
 extinct. One social virtue had the force of law 
 amongst them ; and the obligation to hospi- 
 tality aflbrded an opening for the strangers of 
 the AVest to gain an entrance among them. 
 Partly, and in the first instance, from the 
 Greek Church, by the two apostles of Poland 
 and Prussia, Cyril and Methodius ; afterwards, 
 and more perfectly, by emissaries from the , 
 Latin Church, in various ways, and at various 
 intervals, the prevailing form of Christianity 
 was propagated in these countries from the 
 tenth to the sixteenth centuries ; and during 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 321 
 
 the same period, by missionaries chiefly from 
 the monastery of Neuf Corbie, on the banks of 
 the Weser, and from the British Isles. And 
 thus, by the end of the thirteenth century, pa- 
 ganism may be said to have been well nigh 
 banished from the limits of Europe. (Grant's 
 Bampton Lecture, p. 112.) 
 
 Anschar, the apostle of Denmark and Swe- 
 den, A.D. 826, and Giselmar, who followed 
 him to Denmark, were sent from Neuf Corbie. 
 Missionaries were brought by Hakon, king of 
 Norway, into his dominions, (938.) Chris- 
 tianity was not, however, permanently intro- 
 duced before the reign of Olaf I., who was ac- 
 companied from England by John Sigard, 
 (993.) Olaf II. afterwards requested mission- 
 aries of Canute, upon which, Sigfrid, first 
 bishop of Wexia, Comkill, and others, were 
 sent into Norway, (1019.) — (History Eccles. of 
 Adam Bremensis.) 
 
 In Germany, the exertions of the Emperor 
 Otho contributed, in a signal manner, to pro- 
 mote the interests of Christianity, and to estab- 
 lish it on the most firm foundation throughout 
 the empire. At the earnest request of the 
 Rugi, a remarkably barbarous people, who in- 
 habited the country of Pomerania, between 
 the Oder and the Wipper, and the Isles of 
 Rugen in the Baltic, that zealous prince sent 
 Adalbert among them, to revive the know- 
 ledge of Christianity which had formerly ex- 
 isted, but was then extinguished. The mission, 
 bowever, was unsuccessful ; but Adalbert, who 
 was appointed the first Archbishop of Mag- 
 leburgh, was successful in converting great 
 Qumbers of Sdavonians. 
 
 Throughout this century, the Saracens in 
 Asia and Africa, successfully propagated the 
 Joctrines of Mohammed ; and multitudes, even 
 )f Christians, were the victims of their delu- 
 sions. The Turks also received the religion 
 )f the Arabian impostors ; and, turning their 
 irms against the Saracens, began to lay the 
 bundations of that powerful empire which 
 hey afterwards jBstablished. (Pearson's Brief 
 listoric View, p. 34.) 
 
 Adalbert, archbishop of Prague, visited Hun- 
 ary, and afterwards traveled as missionary 
 
 Poland, and planted the Gospel in Dantzic ; 
 id was at length, like many of the mission- 
 ries already named, murdered by the Pagans. 
 
 jp/io the Great, emperor of Germany, d'istin- 
 
 iKiislied himself in this age, by his zeal for 
 
 ii)n, by erecting and endowing churches, 
 
 I |iromoting the propagation of the Gospel 
 
 tmong barbarous nations. Nor was his em- 
 ress, Adelaide, less remarkable for her piety 
 ^ liberality. English missionaries, particu- 
 Bernard, were the active instruments in 
 ing the standard of the Cross in the 
 icy Islands and Greenland. The conversion 
 ■ : iie Normans is likewise said to have taken 
 lace in this century, on the occasion of the 
 larriage o^Rollo, Duke of Normandy, to Giesla. 
 
 1 ai^hter of Charles the Simple, king of France; 
 21 
 
 but, such matrimonial conversions may be 
 justly doubted : they might assume the name 
 without the change to Christianity. 
 
 Hungary, which had previously received 
 some faint dawnings of the Christian faith, 
 became, toward the end of this century, more 
 enlightened. Among those tribes of uncer- 
 tain origin, who assailed Europe at the time 
 of the dissolution of the Carolingan empire, 
 were the Magyars, who emerged from Asia, and 
 established themselves near the Don. Being 
 expelled from those regions, they penetrated 
 into Ukraine, from whence they were driven 
 away by the Russians, and then arrived in 
 Dacia, under the name of Hungarians, (889.) 
 At the head of the Magyar hordes was the 
 princely race of Arpad. The tribes were seven 
 in number, each being commanded by a chief, 
 almost independent. Christianity, as we have 
 seen, penetrated among them under the reign 
 of Geysa I., who was converted from heathen- 
 ism, by the exertions of his wife Sarolta ; and 
 was baptized towards 980. But the general 
 conversion of the Hungarians to Christianity 
 took place under the reign of their son Stephen, 
 one of the most celebrated kings of that na- 
 tion, who was at once the apostle and legis- 
 lator of Hungary, and the true founder of that 
 monarchy. In his reign churches were erected, 
 bishoprics established, and the profession of 
 Christianity became general in all parts of 
 the country. 
 
 The tenth century has been emphatically 
 styled " an iron age, barren of all goodness ; 
 a leaden age, abounding in all wickedness; 
 and a dark age, remarkable above all others 
 for the scarcity of writers and men of learning." 
 In this deplorable state of the church, however, 
 some rays of light, as shown in these previous 
 records, passed across the gloomy scene, and 
 some pleasing occurrences evinced that God 
 had not yet " forgotten to be gracious " to his 
 humble worshipers. Several of the churches 
 still possessed the oracles of divine truth in 
 the vulgar tongue ; the supremacy of the Ro- 
 man pontiff was in some places opposed with 
 heroic firmness, and the doctrine of transub- 
 stantiation t^as denied by many to whom the 
 Holy Spirit had revealed " the truth as it is 
 in Jesus." [Smith^YoX. I. p. 51.) In the dark- 
 est ages of Christianity, the few rays of light 
 yet unextinguished, appear in connection with 
 the efforts of missionaries to evangelize tho 
 heathen. 
 
 Century XI. — In the early part of this cen- 
 tury the Christian religion was further ex- 
 tended in the kingdoms of Siveden, Norway, 
 and Denmark, and also in Germany, by the 
 assistance of English missionaries. The con- 
 ductors of the mission were Sigefrid, Archdea- 
 con of York, Eschil, Gunechild, Rudolf, and 
 Bernard. The names of others are likewise 
 mentioned, as laborious and useful messengers 
 of truth among the barbarous European tribes : 
 thus, it is related of William, an English priest, 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 who attended Canute in one of his voyages to 
 Denmark, that he was so affected with the 
 idolatry of the Danes, that he desired to be 
 left unumg tliom as a missionary, and had the 
 happiness of finding his labors not in vain in 
 the Lord. 
 
 The zeal of the Ncstorian Christians con 
 tinned to be conspicuous in this century. In 
 Tartary and the adjacent countries they suc- 
 ceeded in converting great numbers to the 
 profession of Christianity. 
 
 The light which had been diffused during 
 the })receding centuries among the Hungari- 
 ans, Danes, Poles, and Russians, was consider- 
 ably increased and extended by the zealous en- 
 deavors of their princes, and of the mission- 
 aries who labored among them. 
 
 Century XII. — The twelfth century was 
 noted for attempts to spread the Gospel by the 
 sword. Waldcmh I., King of Denmark, in 
 particular, distinguished himself by his endeav- 
 ors to propagate Christianity by force of arms, 
 especially among the Sdavonians, Vmedi, Van- 
 dals, and other northern tribes. In these war- 
 like methods of forcing his subjects to listen 
 to evangelical instructions, he was zealously 
 encouraged and aided by Asalom, Archbishop 
 of Lunden. The inhabitants of the island of 
 Rugen, a fierce and savage people, were num- 
 bered among his conquests. The Finlanders 
 were driven to accept of peace on similar terms 
 by Erick IX., King of Sweden, who was ac- 
 companied in his bloody campaign by Henry, 
 Archbishop of Upsal. The Livomans, on re- 
 jecting the missionary instructions of Main- 
 hard, a monk of Segeberg, were, on an appeal 
 made by Mainhard to the Roman Pontiff, 
 Innocent III., subjected to the horrors of war. 
 An equestrian "military order, of " Knights 
 Sword Bearers," instituted for the express pur- 
 pose of converting pagans, was sent against 
 them. During the Livoniau war, they exer- 
 cised the greatest cruelty and injustice, not 
 merely by the slaughter of numbers of the in- 
 habitants, but by the confiscation of their pro- 
 pertv. These forced conversions, however, as 
 might have been expected, effected but little 
 more than a profession of obedience to the See 
 of Rome, and a constrained attention to cer- 
 tain forms and ceremonies, substituted for idol 
 worship, while the profoundest ignorance re- 
 mained of the true nature of the Gospel. 
 
 This, indeed, appears to have been an age 
 peculiarly distinguished by the institution of 
 religious military orders, such as the Knights 
 of St. John of Jerusalem, now called the 
 " Knights of Malta," originally instituted for 
 the care of the sick, and the protection of pil- 
 grims in the Holy Land ; the Knights Templars, 
 so called from their occupying on their first 
 establishment a house in Jerusalem, near the 
 site of the temple, and designed to guard pil- 
 grims from the violence of the infidels, when 
 visiting Jerusalem ; The Order of Montjoye, 
 instituted to fight against infidels, especially I 
 
 the Moors of Spain ; Ibe Portuguese Order of 
 Avis, established for the same purpose; the 
 Order of St. Lazarus, who received pilgrims, 
 in Jerusalem, in houses founded purj)osely for 
 them, and then conducted them on their way, 
 and defended them against the Mohammedans ; 
 the Order of Knights of St. James, united for 
 the protection of pilgrims visiting the relics of 
 St. James of Compostella from the ill-treat- 
 ment of the Moors ; and the Order of Teutonic 
 Knights, founded originally by some Germans, 
 who built a hospital at Jerusalem for the pil- 
 grims of their nation, and approved by Pope 
 Celestine III. After the loss of the Holy 
 Land, these knights returned to Germany, and, 
 by their warlike prowess, made themselves 
 masters of Prussia, Livonia, Courland, and 
 Semigallia. To these may be added the order 
 of Christ's Militia, instituted by Dominic for 
 the extirpation of the Albigenses. An emi- 
 nent Romish theologian attempts the defence 
 of the warlike character of these institutions, 
 by the following specious reasoning : " 1'wo 
 very different things," he says, " are confounded 
 by the Protestants, the object and the inten- 
 tion, the conduct of the knights, and that of 
 the missionaries. The knights were n(3ver 
 constituted preachers, and the missionaries 
 were never armed. The barbarians were wild 
 beasts ; it was necessary to make them men 
 first, and to reduce them by force, before it 
 could be expected to make them Christians. 
 The first of these exploits belonged to the 
 knights ; the rest was reserved for the mission- 
 aries. "When the warriors had done their 
 part, they remained to protect the mission- 
 aries, in order to the peaceful performance of 
 their labors." — (Bergier's Did. TJieologique, 
 Ordres Militaires, tome YI.) 
 
 Most of these military orders owed their 
 institution to the Crusades of this century, un- 
 dertaken by the Roman Catholic princes of 
 Europe for the recovery of Jerusalem from 
 the Mohammedans; an outburst of religious 
 fanaticism, by which all Europe and Western 
 Asia were convulsed. They were the legiti- 
 mate offspring of ignorance, superstition, and 
 fanaticism combined, guided by the ambi- 
 tious designs of the Church of Rome. 'J Ik} 
 deserve no notice in this connection, exceji! -r 
 far as their influence upon Europe and the t hI 
 of the world, may have tended to prepar( ilu 
 way for the Protestant Reformation, and iilii 
 mately for the universal diffusion of the (ios 
 pel. They broke the slumber of ages like ar 
 earthquake at midnight. They roused th( 
 minds of Europe, long besotted in ignoraiir( 
 and barbarism ; and thus prepared it to grast 
 the great and soul-stirring truths of the li* 
 formation. They quickened the energies o 
 nations, to provide for vast armies, and awakf ii 
 ed their enterprise to fit out fleets; and tlm 
 navigation received a new impulse, opeiiin; 
 the way for commerce, which, in its tmi 
 opened a door for Christian missions. Its e.^ 
 
 Ill 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 323 
 
 peditions also promoted geographical discov- 
 eries, and acquainted the mind of Christendom 
 somewhat with the extent of heathenism. It is 
 I thus that the overruling providence of God 
 brings good out of evil, and order out of confu- 
 sion, and makes the wildest fanaticism and the 
 most horrible scenes of war and bloodshed con- 
 tribute to the extension of his kingdom. For 
 the further examination of this subject see 
 Gibbon's Decline and Fall, ch. lxi. ; Mosheim, 
 Cent. XI. Part I. ch. i. ; Robertson's Charles 
 V. ; Channing on Associations ; Guizofs His- 
 toiij of Civilization, sec. 8 ; Encyclopedia Brit- 
 annica, ArtCnisades ; Campbell's Maritime Dis- 
 covery and Christian Missions. 
 
 The propagation of the Gospel was success- 
 fully continued in this century, chiefly in the 
 '/ of Europe. Boleslaus, duke of Poland, 
 i ig taken Stetin, the capital of Pomerania, 
 by storm, and laid waste the surrounding coun- 
 try, compelled the vanquished inhabitants to 
 submit at discretion, and imposed upon them, 
 as a condition of peace, their reception of 
 Christianity. The conqueror sent Otho, bishop 
 of Bamberg, in the year 1124, to instruct his 
 new subjects. Many of them, among whom 
 were the duke and duchess, and their attend- 
 ants, were brought over ; but great numbers of 
 the idolatrous Pomeranians, as might have been 
 expected, resisted appeals made at the point 
 of the sword, and adhered to the superstitions 
 of their ancestors. In a second visit, in the 
 year 1126, the bishop was more successful, and 
 the prevailing form of Christianity was estab- 
 lished in Pomerania. 
 
 In the year 1168, Waldemar, king of Den- 
 mark, who was foremost among the northern 
 princes of this century, by his zeal in the pro- 
 mgation of Christianity, having subdued the 
 sland of Rugen, which lies in the neighbor- 
 hood of Pomerania, obliged its rude and pira- 
 tical inhabitants to listen to the instructions 
 of the missionaries who accompanied his army. 
 Among these Absalom, archbishop of Lunden, 
 as distinguished ; and, by his exertions, 
 Christianity was introduced into this island, 
 which had hitherto baffled every attempt. 
 
 The Finlanders, whose character resembled 
 that of the inhabitants of Eugen, and who in- 
 fested Sweden with their predatory incursions, 
 received Christianity in a similar manner. 
 Eric, king of Sweden, having totally defeated 
 these barbarians, sent Henry, archbishop of 
 Upsal, to evangelize them. His success was 
 so great, that he is called The Apostle of the 
 Finlanders ; yet he was at length assassinated 
 by some of these refractory people on account 
 of a heavy penance which he had imposed on 
 a person of great authority. 
 
 In Livonia, the labors of Mainard, the first 
 missionary who attempted the conversion of 
 that barbarous people, having proved unsuc- 
 cessful, the Roman pontiff, Urban the Third, 
 who had consecrated him bishop of the Livo- 
 ■ ''^j declared a crusade against them, which 
 
 was zealously carried on by that ecclesiastic, 
 and by his successors, Berthold and Albert. 
 These warlike apostles, at the head of great 
 bodies gf troops raised in Saxony, successively 
 entered Livonia, and compelled the wretched 
 inhabitants to receive baptism. 
 
 Centuky XIII. — The thirteenth century af- 
 fords few records of missionary labor. It was 
 however, distinguished by the institution of 
 the Order of the Franciscans, or of friar mis- 
 sions, and the endeavors of James I. of Arragon 
 to communicate Christian instruction to his 
 Moorish subjects by the establishment of Arab- 
 ic schools and the translation of books into the 
 Arabic la^uage. These schools were chiefly 
 at MajorcoTand Barcelona, in which a consid- 
 erable number of youths were educated for 
 preachers ; but these efforts proving ineffectual, 
 he listened to the advice of the Romish Pon- 
 tiff, Clement IV., who exhorted him to drive 
 the Mohammedans out of Spain by force, in- 
 stead of missionary efforts. 
 
 Francis of Assisi, the founder of the Fran- 
 ciscans, undertook a mission to Palestine him- 
 self, and sent several monks of his order as 
 missionaries into Germany, Greece, France, 
 England, and to the Moors in Spain. Joha7ir 
 nes a Monte Corvine, a monk of this order, was 
 sent into Tartary, by Pope Nicholas TV., 
 resided there for many years, and translated 
 the Psalms of David, and the New Testament, 
 into the Tartar language. 
 
 The Dominicans of Spain applied themselves 
 to the oriental languages and rabbinical liter- 
 ature, and were employed by the king of Spain 
 in the instruction of the numerous Jews and 
 Saracens, who resided in his dominions. Both 
 the Franciscans and the Dominicans sent out 
 many persons as missionaries to various coun- 
 tries ; but the most of them were more solici- 
 tous to make proselytes to the Romish Church 
 than to teach their converts the scriptural way 
 of salvation. 
 
 The Waldenses and Albigenses, in this cen- 
 tury, were distinguished witnesses for the truth 
 — the martyrs of the age ; and though com- 
 pelled to maintain a defensive, rather than ag- 
 gressive position, yet they did much to prepare 
 the way for the reformation, by the secret dif- 
 fusion of the Gospel among the nominal Chris- 
 tians of Europe. But the records of their 
 labors are scanty, and they do not come pro- 
 perly under the denomination of missions to 
 the heathen. And this century furnishes little 
 more, in the way of missions to the heathen, 
 than details of military conquests, by which 
 heathen nations were compelled to yield a 
 nominal conformity to the Church of Rome. 
 
 Century XIV .—Wickliffe, "the Morning 
 Star of the Reformation," rendered the four- 
 teenth century a remarkable epoch in the histo- 
 ry of the Church, by the intrepidity and success 
 with which he contended against the errors 
 and the corruptions of the Church of Rome, 
 and by his translation of the Scriptures into 
 
8M 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 what was, at that time, the vernacular tongue 
 of Knj^land. thonjrh now utterly obsolete. The 
 followers of Wickliffe, generally called Lollards, 
 among whom was Sir John Oldcastjf, other- 
 wiso called Lord Cobham, were anxious to 
 difliLse as extensively as possible, the doctrines 
 
 ?romulgated by their learned anti-papal chief, 
 'hey expended considerable sums in collecting 
 and transcribing (printing not having been in- 
 vented,) and dispersing the works of Wickliffe, 
 and in maintaining a number of itinerant 
 preachers, who preached in churchyards and 
 market-places, particularly in the dioceses of 
 Canterbury, London, Rochester, and Hereford. 
 Bale says that Lord Cobham caused all the 
 M'orks of AVickliffe to be copied by the desire 
 of John Huss, and to be sent into France, Spain, 
 Bohemia, and other foreign countries. Queen 
 Anne of Bohemia favored the adherents of 
 Wickliffe; possessing and constantly reading 
 the Gospels in four languages, Bohemian, Ger- 
 man, Latin, and English. Many of her atten- 
 dants imbibed the same opinions, and on their 
 return to Bohemia, after her decease in 1394, 
 carried with them the writings of Wickliffe 
 and his disciples ; by which means they were 
 widely dispersed, and produced a powerful antir 
 papal influence, not only in Bohemia, but also 
 in other neighboring states. 
 
 Century XV. — The fifteenth century was 
 rendered remarkable by many important 
 events, which, though not strictly missionary, 
 yet, in their influence, have in some cases so 
 greatly forwarded, and in others so greatly re- 
 tarded, the progress of the Gospel, that we 
 may just glance at their occurrence and char- 
 acter. One of these was the discover}^ of Amer- 
 ica by Christopher Columbtis, in 1492, and the 
 subsequent landing of the Portuguese Ameri- 
 cus Vespwius, in Brazil ; a second was the dis- 
 covery of the passage to India by sea, by Va^co 
 de Gama, in 1497 ; and another was the ruin 
 of the Greek empire, in the taking of Constan- 
 tinople by the Turks, in 1453. By the first of 
 these events, an immense extent of country 
 was eventually placed under the control of the 
 Roman Catholic princes of Spain and Portu- 
 gal ; and hence these kingdoms were induced 
 to makp extraordinary and ultimately success- 
 ful efforts, to introduce and establish Popery, 
 in its most Fuperstitious and degrading forms, 
 throughout the continent of South America, 
 and the kingdom of Mexico. By the discov- 
 ery of a passage to India, by doubling the 
 Cape of Good Hope, the intercourse between 
 England and the East Indies was greatly facil- 
 itated ; the previous routes having been 
 through Egypt and Persia ; and, by the over- 
 throw of the Greek empire, many learned men 
 fled for security into various European states, 
 and, by the diffusion of literature and science, 
 prepared the way for the Reformation of the 
 following century. But, probably, no occur- 
 rence of this age proved of greater interest 
 than the Invention of Printing, by Guttemberg 
 
 and his associates and succeasors, about the 
 middle of this century ; the slow and cvxj ten- 
 sive mode of transcription being the only way 
 previously known of multiplying coj)i( s of 
 books, however valuable. But, by the inven- 
 tion of this most useful art, and the im})rovc- 
 ments of later years, copies of valuable works 
 can be rapidly and cheaply multiplied ; and 
 millions of persons have by this means been 
 furnished with the Hol^ Scriptures, who, 
 otherwise, must have remamed destitute. 
 
 The military expeditions of the Papists con- 
 tinued during this century, and some of thorn, 
 among which were those of Don Henry, Duke 
 of Viseo, (Portugal,) and Grand Master of 
 the Order of Christ, were productive of im- 
 portant results, in the way of maritime discov- 
 eries, &c. ; but the. events of this century, fjCa 
 purely missionary character, were few und 
 comparatively ineffectual. In the East, the 
 Nestorian Patriarch, who resided in Chuklca, 
 sent missionaries into Cathay and China, who 
 were empowered to exercise episcopal author- 
 ity over the Christian assemblies, which lay 
 concealed in the remote provinces of those 
 great empires, affording a demonstrative proof, 
 that notwithstanding the dreadful persecutiona 
 that had been exercised by the dominant au- 
 thorities against the Nestorian Christians, 
 there were still some churches existing in 
 those regions of darkness. 
 
 There were also individuals, whose c<tii>i;3- 
 tency of conduct and zeal for the disseniiiia- 
 tion of Christianity in this dark age, entitle 
 them to our notice and admiration. Such, foi 
 instance, were the two brothers, Vincent and: 
 Boniface Ferrer, Thomas a Kempis and Jolmi 
 Wesselus. Vincent Ferrer was a Spaniard by 
 birth ; at his own earnest request he was ap \ 
 pointed apostolical missionary, by Pope Bene 
 diet XIII., and for many years preached witl, 
 indefatigalsle ardor in different parts of Eu 
 rope. He visited Spain, France, the Nether 
 lands, Germany, and at the request of Henri 
 IV., England, Scotland, and Ireland. 'Yh 
 usual subjects of his sermons were death, 'y\(!i%, 
 ment, and eternity. Milner says, that " thoug 
 bred in the midst of darkness, and connecte 
 with the worst of ecclesiastical characters, 
 was a shining model of piety." He died i 
 1419, at the age of sixty-two. Boniface Fa 
 rer, the brother of Vincent, was a zealoi 
 preacher of the word of God, and having 
 braced the monastic life, he successively roi 
 to high oflBcial situations, and died prior of M 
 Carthusian monastery of Pontaleli, in Vale; 
 cia, in 1417, after having translated the Scri> 
 tares into the Valencian or Catalonian dialed 
 of Spain. — (See McCkie's History of the B 
 fcrrmation in Spain, p. 191.) Thomas a Keij 
 pis, whose piety has received a perpetual mo, 
 ument in his " Christian's Pattern," V'-, 
 born at Chempis or Kempis, in ColognCj 
 1380, and became one of the most illustriqj 
 members of the society of the " Brethren i 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 325 
 
 the Common Life ;" a society founded by 
 Gerard de Groot, who, having retired into a 
 monastery, devoted himself to prayer and the 
 reformation of immoral characters, and insti- 
 tuted a fraternity, having one common pro- 
 perty, and earning their livelihood by their 
 pens. Kempis died in 1471, in the ninety-first 
 year of his age. His excellent work, " The 
 Christian's Pattern," has been translated into 
 most of the European languages, and even 
 into Chinese. A beautiful copy of the Bible 
 transcribed by him, is preserved in the library 
 of the regular canons, at Cologne. — (Town- 
 ley's Illustrations of Biblical Literatii/re, Vol. I. 
 p. 328.) John de Capistrano may be added as 
 an instance of the activity and energy of the 
 pious, though mistaken, missionary agents of 
 the Romish church. He was a Franciscan 
 friar, of a wealthy Neapolitan family, and was 
 [sent to convert the Bohemians, and to preach 
 in Saxony, Misnia, and MoraA-ia, and is said to 
 have been everywhere received with banners, 
 crosses, and processions, like a sovereign prince. 
 He is said to have preached at Erfurd to 60,000 
 persons, the men being arranged on one side 
 and the women on the other. When ignorant 
 of the language, he was assisted by an inter- 
 preter, who explained what he delivered to the 
 people. His sermons were accompanied with 
 violent action, so that he is said to have 
 " preached with his hands and his feet as well 
 as with his voice," which corresponds with the 
 accounts given of him by an English historian, 
 who relates that " he itinerated through the 
 cities and towns, addressing sermons to the 
 people, in the highways and market places, 
 against the enemies of the Romish Church. 
 Ajnong the Germans and those that were ig- 
 aorant of the Italian, he is said to have affect- 
 id the minds of his audience in a wonderful 
 nanner, by using gesticulations instead of 
 PTords." — (See Turner's Modern History of 
 England, Vol. II. p. 9.) His death occurred 
 3ctober 23, 1456, being seventy-one years of 
 Lge. 
 
 Century XVI. — The happy reformation 
 rom Popery illustriously signalized the com- 
 nencement of the sixteenth century ; the year 
 L517 being regarded as its commencement, 
 vhen Luther first publicly opposed the monk 
 Tetzel, in his sale of papal indulgences. The 
 idherents of the Reformation were called Fro- 
 nds, from their protesting against an intol- 
 1 decree of the Diet of Spires, in 1529. 
 Kv.^ ihe Reformation proceeded, those who had 
 [ imbraced the views of its advocates became 
 ncreasingly desirous of emancipating the in- 
 habitants of their native lands, and of other 
 idjacent countries, from the errors of the Ro- 
 nish church. This object they pursued with 
 ndefatigable zeal ; and in order to accom- 
 '"^1 it, translations of the Holy Scriptures 
 ■ made into the vernacular tongues, and 
 
 i^'viely dispersed ; while plain and homely 
 nymes, embodying the opinions of the re- 
 
 formers, were composed, and put into the 
 hands of poor people, who made a livelihood 
 by singing them through the country. It is 
 related, that on one occasion a poor man, who 
 had received the printed copies of some of 
 these rhymes, repaired to Wittemberg, and, in 
 the course of his progress through the town, 
 sung them under Luther's windows. The at- 
 tention of Luther was caught by the subject, 
 and when on inquiry he learned the name of 
 the author, he is said to have burst into tears, 
 and rendered thanks to God for making such 
 humble expedients conducive to the propaga- 
 tion of truth. In pursuance of the same great 
 object, missionaries were sent into Roman Ca- 
 tholic States to preach the distinguishing doc- 
 trines of the Reformation, especially that of 
 justification by faith, and tracts, often denomi- 
 nated libels, or little books, were composed 
 and extensively dispersed, containing defences 
 of the Protestant tenets, detached books of 
 Scripture, or exposures of Papal errors or 
 practices. 
 
 An expedition was fitted out in the year 
 1555, by Villegagnon, a knight of Malta, un- 
 der the patronage of Henry 11, of France, 
 with the view to establish a French colony in 
 the new world. The approbation of the mo- 
 narch was secured by the medium of the excel- 
 lent Admiral de Coligny, whose favor Villegag- 
 non propitiated by the secret understanding 
 that the projected colony should protect the 
 reformed religion. Accordingly Calvin, the 
 reformer of Geneva, was applied to, in order 
 to obtain ministers to embark with the expe- 
 dition. After consultation with the other 
 pastors of Geneva, he sent two, Guillaume 
 CJmrtier and Pierre Richier, who were after- 
 wards joined by sevei-al others. Their object 
 was at once to labor among the colonists, and 
 to evangelize the heathen aborigines. This 
 was the first attempt at a foreign mission, by 
 the Protestant churches. The expedition 
 reached Fort Coligny, as it was named, on 
 the Rio de Janeiro, in Brazil, in March, 1556. 
 On their arrival the Genevan ministers proceed- 
 ed to constitute a church, according to the 
 forms and rites of the reformed churches, and 
 celebrated the Lord's Supper. But Villegag- 
 non soon betrayed his true character, and after 
 cruelly maltreating the missionaries, forced 
 them to reembark^ and return to France. The 
 next attempt to send the Gospel to heathen 
 countries was made by the celebrated re- 
 former and king of Sweden, Gustavus Vasa. 
 About the year 1559, a missionary was sent 
 by that monarch to Lapland. The natives 
 were at the same time commanded to congre- 
 gate at a certain season of the year to pay 
 their tribute and receive religious instruction 
 from this missionary. — (Baird's Christian Re- 
 trospect, p. 296.) 
 
 Internal strifes and gainsayings, hostilities 
 from without fomented by Rome, and perplex- 
 ities from wathin, exhausted the energies of 
 
826 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 Christian men in England, during the reigns 
 of Klizabeth and Juuics ; and for 150 years 
 nothinj; was undertaken for propagating the 
 GoejK'l in other lands. A scheme to rival tlie 
 Roman propaganda was devised by Cromwell, 
 but never realized. Burnet says that Crom- 
 well resolved to set up a council for the Pro- 
 testant religion, in opposition to the congegra- 
 tion De Propaganda ride at Rome. Ue in- 
 tended it should consist of several counselloi-s, 
 and four secretaries for different provinces. 
 These were, the first — France, Switzerland, and 
 the valleys ; the Palatine and other Calvin- 
 ista were the second ; Germany, the North, 
 and Turkey were the third ; and the East 
 and West Indies were the fourth. The secre- 
 taries were to have £500 salary a-picce, and to 
 keep a correspondence everywhere, to know the 
 state of religion all over the world, that so all 
 good designs might be, by their means, pro- 
 tected and assisted. Stoupe was to have the 
 first provinces. They were to have a fund of 
 £10,000 a-ycar at their disposal for ordinary 
 emergencies, but to be farther supplied as 
 occasion should require it. Chelsea College 
 was to be made up for them, which was then 
 an old decayed building, that had been at first 
 raised to be a college for writers of contro- 
 versy." — Burnet's History of his own Times, 
 Vol. I. p. 132.) 
 
 (For any further notices of Roman Catho- 
 lic missions, see " Church of Rome, Missions 
 of.") 
 
 Under the impression of duty, and that of 
 feeling and benevolence towards othei-s, cre- 
 ated by the enjoyment of experimental Chris- 
 tianity, many of the laity who had felt the 
 power of Divine grace in their own hearts, by 
 the preaching of the doctrines of the reforma- 
 tion, became exceedingly anxious that others 
 should partake of their happiness, and gladly 
 seized the opportunities presented to them by 
 mercantile intercourse to disseminate the 
 truths which they themselves had embraced. 
 France, Spain, Italy, and other countries thus 
 received the rays of Divine light for a season, 
 though partiafly or entirely extinguished by 
 the cruelties and industrious efforts of the in- 
 quisitors of those ill-fated regions. Dr. 
 McCrie, speaking of the eastern part of 
 Spain, says : " The inhabitants of Beam 
 were generally Protestants, and many of them 
 crossing the Pyrenees spread themselves over 
 Arragon, and at the same time carrying on 
 trade, found the opportunity of circulating 
 their religious books and tenets among the 
 people."— (McCrie's Hist, of the Reformation 
 in Spain, p. 234.) 
 
 The Waldensian pastors (barbes) who were 
 so numerous at this time, that 140 were present 
 at a meeting of the Synod, were not neglect- 
 ful of opportunities for dis.seminating the truth. 
 An Italian manuscript, preserved in the Uni- 
 versity of Cambridge, bearing date 1587, 
 states, that " some of these barbes traveled 
 
 into distant countries to preach the Gospel, 
 and to visit tlie Waldensian churches establish- 
 ed in France, Germany, Eombardy, CaUi))ria, 
 &c., while in 1535, an edition of the French 
 Bible had been printed at Neufchatel, by 
 Robert Olivetan, a native Vaudois." — (Gilly'b 
 Excursions, ^c. Appendix, No. XI.) 
 
 Towards the cHose of this century missions 
 were sent by the Swedish Protestants into Lap- 
 land, but as they did not understand the Laj)- 
 panesc tongue, an interpreter stood under the 
 pulpit and explained their discourses to the 
 people. But so little success followed this 
 mode of preaching, that Gustavus Adol])lius 
 founded schools for the instruction of youth 
 in a more correct knowledge of the doctrines 
 of the Gospel. The first school was cstablislv 
 ed at Pithen, prior to the year 1619, and com- 
 mitted to the care of Nicholaus Andra.'a, the 
 minister of the place, who had translated the 
 ritual, and dedicated it to the king. Gustavus 
 also committed to the same person the trans- 
 lation of necessary and useful books into the 
 Laplandish language; the Laplanders being 
 previously altogether ignorant of letters, and 
 without a book in their own language. For 
 the further encouragement of the schools, Gus- 
 tavas Adolphus allowed money for the diet 
 and clothes of the children who attended them, 
 besides a stipend for the schoolmaster. By 
 these schools and the elementary and scrijjtu- 
 ral books compiled by Nicholaus Andra^a, the 
 youth of Lapland were so greatly benefited, 
 that some of them became students at the 
 University of Upsal, and were afterwards en- 
 trusted with the Christian ministry. — (Schaf- 
 fer's History of Lapland, p. 27.) 
 
 The Protestants at length awoke to more 
 active efforts for the extension of the Gos- 
 pel, and attempts were made to form mission- 
 ary societies. Ernest, a zealous Lutheran and 
 a baron, sought to form a society for a Pro- 
 testant mission, but a variety of impediments 
 disappointed his purposes, so that no effectual 
 benefit resulted from his efforts. The learned 
 Anthony Walceus, of Leyden, recommended a 
 seminary to be founded for the education of 
 young men of known piety, prudence, zeal, and 
 diligence, to be employed as missionaries espe- 
 cially to India. This object he propos(!d tc 
 the Dutch East India Company, who ajjpcai 
 so far to have countenanced the plan as tc 
 have placed several persons under the instr 
 tions of Walaeus himself, about the year 16: 
 A brief exposition of his views was publisi 
 in the third volume of his works, printed M 
 1643, under the title of '' Necessitas ac Formi 
 erigendi Collegii sen Seminarii Indici." Th^ 
 Dutch East India Company, indeed, with 
 praiseworthy attention to the religious inte| 
 rests of the colonists in their foreign possefti 
 sions, supported ministers in mo8^> of them? 
 Millar, in his " Propagation of Christianity,*^, 
 mentions Ceylon, Sumatra, Java, Amboynd 
 Heresooia, Isles of Banda, Coast of CorGmaii' 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 327 
 
 del, Surat, China, Formosa, Trywan, Sincan 
 and Japan, in all of which churches had been 
 cr(!cted. In several of these stations the 
 })icaching of the Gospel appears to have been 
 greatly blessed. In Ceylon, Harvard [Narra- 
 Ifrc, ^c, Introduction, p. 69,) states, that "un- 
 ih-c the Dutch government there were in the 
 province of Jaffna alone, thirty-four churches 
 ui)propriated to the use of the Malabar Ohris- 
 tiiiiis, attended by neai^y 63,000 auditors, ex- 
 •' isivc of more than 2,000 baptized slaves; 
 ! the government schools belonging to 
 in included upwards of 16,000 native child- 
 i. who were under regular tuition." Since 
 1 1 period there has been a most lamentable 
 lect of religions instruction by the govern- 
 ut authority, and an awful relapse of ira- 
 iiMise numbers into idolatry, who, it is to be 
 feared, were more swayed by political motives 
 than by a love of the Gospel. — (See Art. Cey- 
 lon.) The zeal of the British Christians was 
 at length aroused, and more active measures 
 were adopted, not only to recover the nominal 
 Christianity which had been lost, but to dif- 
 fuse true religion throughout the island. 
 
 In Formosa, Mr. Robert Junius of Delft, 
 who had been sent by the Senate of the United 
 Provinces of Holland, as a missionary to the 
 pagan inhabitants, was eminently successful. 
 •He is said to have baptized 5,900 converts, 
 **■ on professing their faith, and giving proper 
 answers to questions propounded out of the 
 word of God," and to have planted twenty- 
 three churches, besides appointing school- 
 .masters, by whom about six hundred children 
 were taught to read and write. He is said 
 also to have composed certain prayers, collect- 
 ed the chief articles of religion, and translated 
 various psalms into the Formosan language. 
 Being at length grown infirm, and having set 
 pastors over various congregations, he became 
 desirous of seeing his aged mother, and of vis- 
 itiijg his native land ; he therefore returned 
 to Holland, and was succeeded by Daniel 
 Gravius, and others. The Dutch were driven 
 from their principal fort in 1659 or 1661, and 
 the island afterwards became subject to the 
 Chinese. In the American provinces, which 
 were taken from the Portuguese by the Dutch, 
 under command of Count Maurice of Nassau, 
 zealous efforts were made for the conversion of 
 the natives by their new masters, and Avith 
 much success ; but the recovery of these terri- 
 tories by the Portuguese, in the year 1644, ob- 
 scured the pleasing prospect that was begin- 
 ning to open upon them. 
 
 Among the objects contemplated by the 
 planting of the Plymouth and Massachusetts 
 Colonies, as avowed by their founders, and set 
 forth in their charter, the conversion of saVages 
 to Christianity was prominent. Their first 
 purpose was to provide an asylum, where, free 
 from the restraints imposed by the civil and 
 ecclesiastical policy of England, the Christian 
 Church might be organized in a form, as they 
 
 believed, more consonant with the primitive 
 model, and the doctrines of Christianity, as 
 they deduced them from Scripture, preached 
 without the forced admixture of dogmas and 
 rites imposed by act of parliament. Their 
 second was to make the aboriginal races par- 
 ticipators of these blessings. The first prompted 
 a jealous resistance to the introduction of any 
 adverse oj)inions or customs, which was carried, 
 in some instances, to excess. The second, 
 though its execution was delayed by the cares 
 incident to a new plantation, commenced in 
 circumstances of such peculiar hardship as 
 tried the endurance of the pilgrims, prompted 
 very early action. Individuals made some ex- 
 ertion to recommend the Gospel to the natives 
 with satisfactory, though limited results ; and 
 in 1636, the colony of Plymouth enacted a law 
 to provide for preaching among the Indians. 
 A similar act was passed in 1646, by the legisla- 
 ture of Massachusetts. By these movements, a 
 missionary spirit was awakened in England. A 
 society was organized for the propagation of 
 Christianity in North America, and raised a 
 fund yielding £500, which was applied to the 
 circulation of the Bible, and the support of mis- 
 sionaries. The formation of the Society far 
 Promoting Christian Knowledge, by members 
 of the Church of England, in 1698, is as- 
 cribed by Bishop Burnet, to a spirit of emu- 
 lation aroused by the example of the Non- 
 conformists. [Early Missionary Enterprises, by 
 Smith, p. 39.) ' 
 
 In the year 1620, a considerable number of 
 Non-conformists emigrated to America, having 
 obtained a patent for the establishment of a 
 colony and the free exercise of religion. 
 These were followed by a more numerous com- 
 pany in 1629. This new colony received the 
 designation of New England. Rev. John 
 Eliot, a holy and zealous young minister, 
 joined the emigrants in 1632. For fifteen 
 years he was the faithful and laborious pastor 
 of a congregation at Roxbury, near Boston. 
 During this period he was deeply affected by 
 the miserable and destitute state of the North 
 American Indians. He studied their difficult 
 language, and occasionally itinerated and 
 preached among them; and he had the hap- 
 piness of seeing, not only an increase of civil- 
 ization in some of the Indian tribes, but also 
 of witnessing the influence of the Gospel upon 
 the hearts of some of the people. In 1646, 
 he devoted himself to a mission among the 
 native tribes, having accomplished the difficult 
 task of a translation of the Scriptures into the 
 Mohegan dialect. Two editions of this ver- 
 sion were afterwads printed ; the first at Cam- 
 bridge, in New England, in 1661-4, in quarto. 
 Of this edition, Dr. Cotton Mather states as 
 two curious facts, that this was the first Bible 
 ever printed in America, and that the whole of 
 the translation was written with one pen. The 
 second edition was published in 1685, in quarto. 
 Towards this impression and the mission geno 
 
328 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 rally, the lion. Robert Boyle gave £500. 
 Eliot was afterwards assisted by other zealous 
 and able inij«iouaries, among whom John Cot- 
 ton and the Mayhews, are worthy of special 
 notice. The former possessed such skill and 
 dexterity in the Indian tongue, as to have the 
 correction and emendation of the second edi- 
 tion of the I3ible committed to him. 1'he 
 family of the Mayhews was eminent for its 
 missionary spirit. The Rev. Thomas Mayhew 
 was an excellent evangelist to the neighboring 
 heathen. In a few years, two hundred and 
 eighty-two Indians renounced their false gods, 
 and turned to the Lord. After the death of 
 this excellent man, his father, the governor of 
 Martha's Vineyard, felt so much concern for 
 the poor Indians, that, seeing no probability 
 of a regular minister to succeed his son, he 
 applied himself with great diligence to the at- 
 tainment of the language, and then preached 
 to them with acceptance and success. He 
 continued to labor among them to the age of 
 ninety-three, and had the pleasure of a pious 
 grandson associated with him. 
 
 Hiacoomes, who afterward became a preacher 
 of the Gk)spel, was the first fruits of the mis- 
 sion. This convert, though opposed and de- 
 rided by his brethren, manifested so much 
 boldness and intrepidity in the cause of Christ, 
 that many were Induced to renounce their 
 former idolatrous practices, and embrace the 
 Gospel. In 1650, such was the anxiety of a 
 considerable part of the Indians to hear the 
 word of life, that Mr. Mayhew, to accommo- 
 date them, preached weekly at dififerent parts 
 of the island. About this time, schools were 
 established among them. In 1674, there were 
 ' supposed to be 2 or 3,000 Indians on this and 
 a neighboring island, of whom, 1,500 were 
 praying Indians; 50 were regular church 
 members. 
 
 Soon after this, the number of Indians be- 
 gan to decrease, so that, in 1792, the whole 
 number amounted only to about 440. While 
 the Indians were fast verging toward annihi- 
 lation, the zeal of the Mayhew family in bring- 
 ing them to a knowledge of the truth, did not 
 abate. Five successive generations have been 
 indefatigable laborers on this and the neigh- 
 boring islands. 
 
 Century XVIU. — ^The eighteenth century 
 opened by the institution of the Society for tJie 
 Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, 
 for a particular account of which see the arti- 
 cle under that head. The Danish mission to 
 India was undertaken early in this century, in 
 consequence of representations to the king, 
 Frederick IV., by one of his chaplains. Appli- 
 cation having been made to the professors of 
 divinity at Halle, for suitable persons to en- 
 gage in such a mission, Messrs. Ziegenbalg and 
 Plutscho were recommended and appointed. In 
 1705 they sailed for Tranquebar, on the Coro- 
 mandel coast, and arrived there on the 9 th of 
 July, 1706. These missionaries were followed 
 
 by three others, who arrived at the Capo of 
 Good Hope in 1709. This mission was early 
 assisted by the English Society for the Propa- 
 gation of the Gospel, which sent out a print- 
 ing-press, with the requisite apparatus of typo, 
 &c., and one hundred reams of paper, accom- 
 panied by Mr. Jonas Finck, a native of Sile- 
 sia, as a printer. By this means the mission- 
 aries were enabled to print a number of books 
 for the use of the Malabar school, which they 
 had commenced, besides various tracts, but 
 especially a translation of the Scriptures into 
 Tamil, begun by B. Zeigenbalg, and completed 
 by B. Schuttze. In 1714, B. Zeigenbalg re- 
 turned to Europe for a short time, and on that 
 occasion was honored with an audience by the 
 king, George I. who took much interest in the 
 success of the mission. He was also patronized 
 by the " Society for the Promotion of Chris- 
 tian Knowledge." The king and the Society 
 encouraged the Oriental missionary to proceed 
 in his translation of the Scriptures into the 
 Tamil tongue, which they designated " the 
 grand work ;" the former addressing them let- 
 ters of commendation and encouragement, 
 signed with his own hand. After the first 
 missionary Ziegenbalg had finished his course, 
 he was followed by other learned and pious 
 men, upwards of fifty in number in the period 
 of a hundred years — among whom were 
 Schultze, Joenicke, Gericke, and Swartz, whose' 
 ministry has been continued in succession for 
 many years ; until the missions became ab- 
 sorbed in the Indian Missions of the Church 
 of England. — {See Buchanan's Researches, p. 
 65 ; and Morkison's Fatliers and Founders, 
 Vol. I. p. 159.) 
 
 In 1714, the King of Denmark established 
 the Royal College of Missions at Copenhagen, 
 for the instruction and preparation of mission- 
 aries. In connection with this college, the 
 celebrated University of Halle, in Saxony, may 
 very justly be noticed, not only on account of 
 its general objects, but more especially from 
 its having provided the Danish mission with 
 its first missionaries, and several others, pro- 
 foundly learned and most able men. This ex- 
 traordinary institution was begun by the pious 
 Dr. Herman Augustus Francke, as an orphan 
 house, erected by voluntary donations, and 
 continued increasing in other departments of 
 an important nature until it became desci-v- 
 ing of royal patronage, and the designation of 
 a university. Connected with the institution 
 are an oriental and theological college, for the 
 study of eastern languages, and the instruction 
 of missionary candidates ; a medical school ; 
 a seminary for catechists ; and an extensive 
 printing-oflBce, chiefly for the purpose of print- 
 ing and circulating the Scriptures in different 
 languages. At one period this university had 
 more than 3,000 students from different parts ^ 
 of Europe. The Canstein and Jewish institu- 
 tions are also intimately associated with the 
 other benevolent establishments of Halle. The 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 329 
 
 Canstein, or Bible Institution, was established 
 in 1710 by Charles Hildehrand, Baron de Can- 
 stein, for the purpose of printing and selling- 
 Bibles and Testaments at a moderate price, in 
 order to secure a more general circulation of 
 the Scriptures. In 1805, above three millions 
 of copies of the entire Bible or Testament had 
 been distributed. The founder of the Jewish 
 Institution, formed professedly for the conver- 
 sion of Jews and Mohammedans, was Dr. 
 John Henry CaUinberg, one of the pupils of 
 Professor Francke, and afterwards Professor of 
 Divinity in the University of Halle. One of 
 his most eminent coadjutors was Mr. Stephen 
 Schultz, who was many years engaged in the 
 East in missionary labors, and returned from 
 Turkey to Halle in 1756. 
 
 In reverting to the Danish missionaries, it 
 will be satisfactory to learn, from the follow- 
 ing questions, propounded to their mission- 
 aries, that their instructions were Scriptural 
 and sound : " Have you discovered some true 
 working of grace in the souls of the catechu- 
 mens ? Are you sure there is more in their 
 conversion than a bare external compliance 
 with, and verbal confession of the Christian 
 doctrine ? What proofs and indications have 
 you of an inward work of grace ? " The 
 venerable Schwartz was one of the missionaries 
 sent out by the Danish College, though after- 
 ward supported by the English Society for 
 Promoting Christian Knowledge, which has 
 uniformly aided the Danish Missions, by the 
 entire or partial maintenance of many of its 
 valuable missionaries. 
 
 The Danish mission to Greenland was com- 
 menced in 1721, by Rev. Hans Egede. This 
 devoted man had for thirteen years felt a desire 
 to convey the Gospel to that inhospitable 
 country, and made repeated but ineffectual at- 
 tempts to carry it into execution. At length 
 he succeeded in raising a subscription of 8,000 
 rix dollars, and purchased a ship to convey 
 himself and several settlers, who proposed to 
 winter in Greenland. The king sanctioned 
 and aided the enterprise, and settled upon 
 Mr. Egede a salary of $300 a year. On 
 their arrival they proceeded to erect a habita- 
 tion, much to the displeasure of the natives, 
 who called on their conjurors to destroy them. 
 Mr. Egede attempted to convey to the people 
 a knowledge of the most important facts of 
 revealed religion by pictures, but the following 
 year he gained some familiarity with the lan- 
 guage, and was able to undertake oral instruc- 
 tion. The arrival of a colleague in the suc- 
 ceeding year, strengthened his hands, but 
 though the people listened attentively to what 
 was told them, they showed no personal inter- 
 est in his preaching. Some of them, indeed, 
 seemed pleased with the doctrine of the im- 
 mortality of the soul, but the impression pro- 
 duced was faint, and their curiosity soon satis- 
 fied. In 1728, the King of Denmark resolved 
 on prosecuting the work with increased ener- 
 
 gy, s^ a large colony, with additional mis- 
 sionaries, was sent out, and established a new 
 settlement 200 miles northward of Good Hope, 
 the station founded by Mr. Egede. But the 
 severity of the winter and the ravages of a 
 malignant disease made them discontented, 
 and the accession of Christian YI. to the Dan- 
 ish throne put an end to the enterprise. The 
 colonists were ordered home ; Mr. Egede's 
 salary was stopped ; and he was offered the 
 alternative of returning with the rest, or re- 
 maining on his own responsibility, with such 
 persons as he could induce to stay with him. 
 He obtained a supply of provisions for one 
 year, and ten men to remain during the win- 
 ter, and with a heavy heart bade adieu to 
 his two colleagues, who returned with the 
 colony. A vessel arrived the next year with 
 provisions, and having a valuable return 
 cargo, the king was encouraged to renew the 
 trade, and made a generous donation to the 
 mission. This intelligence gave fresh strength 
 to the lonely missionary, but his faith was 
 doomed to a severer trial. A young Green- 
 lander who had visited Denmark came back, 
 and shortly after died of a disease that proved 
 to be the small-pox. The contagion spread 
 rapidly, and raged for twelve months with such 
 fatal effect, that for thirty leagues north of 
 the settlement, the country was almost wholly 
 depopulated. Such was the alarm and con- 
 sternation of the natives at this visitation, 
 that many committed suicide. Mr. Egede, in 
 conjunction with the Moravian missionaries, 
 who had recently arrived in the country, did 
 all that untiring benevolence could do to alle- 
 viate the physical sufferings and comfort the 
 hearts of the unhappy Greenlanders ; they 
 were much affected by their kindness, and 
 manifested the liveliest gratitude. The mis- 
 sion was reinforced in 1734, by the arrival of 
 three assistants, one of them a son of Mr. 
 Egede. The venerable pioneer, regarding the 
 number as wholly inadequate, returned to Den- 
 mark. His representations led to the estab- 
 lishment of several new colonies, and the send- 
 ing of additional missionaries. But the effi- 
 ciency and interest of the Danish mission 
 shortly declined. It had not been wholly in 
 vain, but its fruits were scanty, and the chief 
 agency in imparting Christianity to Greenland 
 was now manifestly committed to the United 
 Brethren, or Moravians. — [Hist. View of Earlier 
 Missions, by L. E. Smith, p. 31.) 
 
 While attending the coronation of Christian 
 VL, king of Denmark, at Copenhagen, in 1731, 
 Count Zinzendorf was brought into intercourse 
 with two Greenlanders, who had been baptized 
 by Hans Egede, and from them he learned 
 with regret that the Danish government had 
 determined on abandoning their mission to 
 that forlorn race. On the same occasion he 
 met with a West Indian negro, of the name of 
 Anthony, who told him that while in the island 
 of St. Thomas, when sitting alone on the sea- 
 
830 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 4 
 
 Bhorc, lie had frequently and carncstly^glied 
 for a revelation from heaven. IJy a renuirka- 
 blo providence of God he had been brought to 
 Copeuhajjen, where he had received instruction 
 in Christianity, and was baptized. Having 
 enlarged in a touching manner, on the deplor- 
 able state of the negro slaves of St. Thomas, 
 and referred with anguish of heart to the mis- 
 eries endured by a beloved sister, who, like 
 himself, had sighed for the light of truth ; he 
 added that if God were to send teachers to in- 
 struct the negroes in the way of salvation, he 
 had no doubt that his sister, and many others 
 similarly affected, would gladly embrace Chris- 
 tianity. 
 
 These accounts of, the poor Greenlanders, 
 and of the West Indian slaves, greatly affected 
 the benevolent mind of Zinzendorf, and on his 
 return to Herrnhut in July, he communicated 
 his impressions to the congregation. So pow- 
 erful was the effect of his narrative that several 
 of the brethren immediatelv offered themselves 
 for missionary service to the West Indies and 
 Greenland. 
 
 This extraordinary band of Christian disci- 
 ples, the feeble remnant of a once numerous 
 body, that for a century and a half, against 
 powerful enemies, maintained the doctrines of 
 revealed truth in Bohemia and Poland, found 
 a refuge from persecution on the estate of 
 Count Zinzendorf, at Bethelsdorp, in Upper 
 Lusatia. Thousands had been driven into 
 banishment, and in their scattered condition, 
 they and their descendants had either been 
 absorbed into other communions, or had lost in 
 a great measure the power of that faith which 
 had been sealed with the blood of so many 
 martyrs and confessors. 
 
 It is now, (October, 1854,) 122 years since 
 the Moravians entered the great field of mis- 
 sionary enterprise ; and though their congre- 
 gation at the time they commenced their efforts 
 in 1732 consisted of little more than six hun- 
 dred persons, most of them poor and despised 
 exiles, such was their zeal and disinterestedness 
 in their Master's service, that in less than nine 
 years after, they had sent missionaries to Green- 
 land, to St. Thomas, to St. Croix, to Sxirinam, 
 and to Berhice, to tlie North American Indians, 
 to the negroes of Smth Carolina, to Lapland, 
 to Tartary, to Guiana, to the Cape of Good 
 Hope, and to the island of Ceylon. The success- 
 es that crowned these enterprises, thus so hum- 
 bly begun, will be found narrated in their pro- 
 per places in this work. 
 
 The mission at Stockbridge among the Mohe- 
 can Indians, was commenced in 1734 by the 
 Rev. John Sergeant, then tutor in Yale College, 
 He was succeeded by Rev. Mr. Woodhridge, 
 at whose death Rev. Jonathan Edwards took 
 charge of the mission for six years. 
 
 In 1735 John Wesley arrived in Georgia, to 
 instruct the Indians of that state, where he 
 remained till 1738. The founder of Methodism 
 thus began his career as a foreign missionary. 
 
 In 1743 the devoted David Brainard began 
 his labors among the Indians under the pair 
 ronage of the Scottish Society for Promoting 
 Christian Knowledge, and after four years of 
 successful labor he expired in the home of 
 President Edwards, in Northampton, on the 
 ninth of October, 1747. The record of his 
 life by Edwards, held up his career to the ad- 
 miration of the Christian world ; and it ig 
 interesting to note that the missionary devotion 
 of William Carey and Henry Martyn, was 
 nourished, if not kindled, by the contemplatioD 
 of his brief but triumphant course, A com- 
 plete view of Indian missions in North Amer- 
 ica would not fail to include at least a passing 
 notice of Dr. WheelocJc's Seminary for the edu- 
 cation of Indians and missionaries, founded in 
 1748, at Lebanon, Ct,, and afterwards removed 
 to Hanover, N. H. ; of the life and usefulness 
 of Rev. Samson Gaum, distinguished as an 
 effective Indian preacher ; of the forty years' 
 ministry of Kirkland among the Indians of 
 New York ; of the labors and sufferings of 
 the Moravians ; and of others who did their 
 part toward the rescue of the aboriginal tribes 
 from the fate which uniformly overtakes sav- 
 ages when brought into conflict with civiliza- 
 tion, unless it is arrested by the conservative 
 force *of Christianity. The proper effect of 
 these benevolent efforts was greatly impaired 
 by the vices and rapacity of the European set- 
 tlers, and by the wars in which European pol- 
 icy involved the colonies. But that any rem- 
 nants of the once powerful tribes formerly 
 inhabiting the country east of the Alleghanies 
 have been preserved, is to be attributed to the 
 elevating influences of Christianity, imparted 
 by those devoted men whose labors have been 
 reviewed, sustained by active charity in Europe 
 and America. — (Smith, p. 47 ; Prince's Chris- 
 tian History, and Brainard' s Life, p. 47.) 
 
 The ardent zeal of Wesley and Whitefield and 
 their associates, now began to develop itself. 
 Their plans of Qjperation both in England and 
 America, were practically missionary; and 
 contributed in a high degree to restore the 
 spirit of an evangelical Christianity. To this 
 fact the grateful testimony of Christians of 
 various denominations has been willingly ren- 
 dered, and in the energetic words of Mr. Doug- 
 lass of Cavers, we may remark : " The Wcslcy- 
 ans, after Christianizing the abandoned 'i - 
 tricts of England, and encountering the i ;tuf; 
 of their own savage countrymen, often backed 
 by their ow^n civil or religious guides — the 
 neighboring magistrate or clergyman — Lave 
 carried the same zeal, dexterity and success to 
 the slaves of the West Indies, more docile than 
 their masters ; and to the savages of the re- ■ 
 motest countries and islands, less infuriated • 
 and dangerous than the rude agricultural pop- ;> 
 ulation of England." — [Encyclopedia Bntavr 
 nica. Article ''Religious Missicns." Vol. XIX., 
 Part I.) No doubt these labors for the revi- 
 val of pure religion tended to evoke that spirit 
 
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 331 
 
 of devotion from wliicli the missionary zeal of 
 the churches bodied itself forth in the organi- 
 i^ations which characterized the close of the 
 .ii^hteenth and the commencement of the niue- 
 >'uth century. 
 In 1750, the Rev. Christian Frederick Swartz 
 arrived at Tranquehar, and entered upon those 
 apostolic labors which have linked his name 
 " iperishably with the establishment' and pro- 
 ves of Christianity in India. He had gained 
 iio knowledge of the Tamil while at the 
 iversity, to aid in examining the proofs of a 
 ■sion of the Scriptures in that language, an 
 Ident which is supposed to have suggested 
 him the design of devoting himself to mis- 
 nary life. On his arrival he pursued his 
 I (lies with such ardor and success, that in 
 r months he commenced preaching. His 
 lors were indefatigable, in public and in 
 |,iivate, in Tranquebar, Trichinopoly, Tanjore, 
 and throughout the Carnatic, for the space of 
 fifty years. His purity, sincerity, and disinter- 
 estedness won the confidence of all classes, and 
 those even who rejected his doctrine gave him 
 the tribute of their unaffected veneration. In 
 the distracting wars that marked that portion 
 of the history of British India, his active be- 
 nevolence was exerted to relieve misery which 
 he could not prevent, and more than once he 
 was sent to negotiate treaties, as the only Eu- 
 ropean who could be trusted by the natives. 
 When a garrison was threatened with famine, 
 and the people could not be induced to furnish 
 provisions, through fear that the supplies would 
 be seized without compensation, they accepted 
 the security of the venerated missionary for 
 the whole amount needed. He rendered im- 
 portant services both to the British and to the 
 native princes, yet scrupulously avoided receiv- 
 ing any gifts or emoluments that might taint 
 him with the suspicion of mercenary motives, 
 and sedulously guarded himself from being in- 
 volved in any transactions that might impair 
 his influence as a Christian and a preacher of 
 the Gospel. "With all the Inimility of a child 
 and the wisdom of mature experience, the harm- 
 lessness of the dove and the wisdom of the ser- 
 pent, he was enabled to testify to the truth in 
 every place and among all grades of society. 
 At his death he was mourned as a father, and 
 the Rajah of Tanjore erected a monument to 
 his memory, with an inscription which is re- 
 markable as the only specimen of English 
 verse attempted by an Indian prince. Swartz 
 had in his life time acquired considerable pro- 
 perty, through the kindness of the English 
 government and the native princes. When 
 he was dying, he said : " Let the cause of 
 Christ be my heir." When his colleague, the 
 pious Gericke, was departing, he also bequeath- 
 ed his property to the mission. And afterwards, 
 another of the missionaries, Mr. Kohloff gave, 
 from his private funds, upwards of a thousand 
 pagodas a year. — (See Greenfield's Sketches of 
 the Danish Mission, p. 145.) At the death of 
 
 Swartz the native Christians connectea with 
 the mission were counted by thousands. The 
 fruit of his toils was gathered rapidly by his 
 successors. Bishop Heber, writing in 1826, 
 says, " There are in the south of India about 
 200 Protestant congregations ; " and he esti- 
 mated their number at about 15,000. Many 
 were undoubtedly merely nominal Christians, 
 as the Lutheran missionaries were much less 
 exacting in the qualifications they demanded 
 for admission to the sacraments, than later 
 missionaries have been ; yet, considering the 
 purity of their preaching and the devout spirit 
 in which their labors were conducted, a large 
 measure of piety must have been the result. 
 These missions have since come under the pat- 
 ronage of the London Society for the Propaga- 
 tion of the Gospel, and the superintendence of 
 the Anglican Bishop of Calcutta.— (Smith, p. 
 31.) 
 
 In 1769, the English Wesleyan Methodius 
 began to send forth their missionaries. Eleven 
 were commissioned for America, whose labors 
 laid the foundation of the Methodist Episcopal 
 Church. They next sent missionaries to the 
 West Indies, and to the East Indies ; but their 
 missionary operations were not regularly organ- 
 ized until 1816. 
 
 We now approach the commencement of 
 that period which has, by way of preeminence, 
 been designated the Missionary Age, when 
 the various churches of Christ began to wake 
 up to life and activity on behalf of the heathen 
 world ; and the isolated efibrts of individuals 
 and churches were succeeded by the great or- 
 ganized agencies of the present day ; a list of 
 which, with the time of their organization, we 
 give in the following table. For a more par- 
 ticular history of the origin and progress of 
 these societies and their operations, the reader 
 is referred to other parts of this work. All 
 the more prominent societies are noticed under 
 their respective names, in their places in the 
 alphabet :— 
 
 Great Britain. 
 
 Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in 
 Foreign Parts, 1701. 
 
 Baptist Missionary Society, 1792. 
 
 London Missionary Society, 1795. 
 
 Scottish Missionary Society, 1796. 
 
 Glasgow Missionary Society, 1796. 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 1800. 
 
 General Baptist Missionary Society, 1816. 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, 1817. 
 
 Methodist New Connection Missionary Soci- 
 ety, 1819. 
 
 Foreign Mission Scheme of the Church of 
 Scotland, 1824. 
 
 Primitive Methodist Missionary Society, 1830. 
 
 Foreign Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian 
 Church in Ireland, 1840. 
 
 Welsh Foreign Missionary Society, 1842. 
 
 Lew-chew Naval Mission, 1843. 
 
332 
 
 EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS. 
 
 Foroipn Mission Scheme of tlie Free Church 
 
 .■••-^ '•••>.1,1843, 
 
 A 1 iof Pi-esbyteriaa Churcli of Scot- 
 
 Forei{,ni Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian 
 Ciuirch in England, 1844. 
 
 Board of Missions of the United Presbyterian 
 Synod, united in 1847. 
 
 Borneo Church Mission, 1846. 
 
 Chinese Society for Furthering the Promulga- 
 tion of the Gospel in China, and the Adja- 
 cent Countries, 1850. 
 
 London Society for Promoting Christianity 
 among the Jews, 1808. 
 
 British Society for the Propagation of the 
 Gospel among the Jews, 1841. 
 
 Germany. 
 
 Missions of the United Brethren, 1732. 
 
 Society for the Promotion of Evangelical Mis- 
 sions among the Heathen, at Berlin, 1824. 
 
 Rhenish Missionary Society, 1828. 
 
 North German Missionary Society, 1836. 
 
 Evangelical Lutheran Missionary Society, at 
 Leipsic (formerly at Dresden,) 1836. 
 
 Evangelical Union for the Spread of Christi- 
 anity among the Heathen, (Gossner's) 1836. 
 
 Berlin Missionary Union for China, 1850. 
 
 Society for the Promotion of Christianity 
 among the Jews at Berlin, 1822. 
 
 Union of the Friends of Israel in Bremcrlehe 
 and Vicinity, 1839. 
 
 Rhenish-Westphalia Union for Israel, 1843. 
 
 Hamburg- Altona Union for Israel, 1844. 
 
 Evangelical Union of the Friends of Israel in 
 Hesse Cassel, 1845. 
 
 Union of the Friends of Israel in Hesse Darm- 
 stadt, 1845. 
 
 Holland. 
 
 Netherlands Missionary Society, 1797. 
 
 Netherlands Union for cooperating in the 
 Spread of Christianity among the Jews. 
 
 United States. 
 
 American Board of Commissioners for Foreign 
 Missions, 1810. 
 
 American Baptist Missionary Union, 1814. 
 
 Methodist Missionary Society, 1819. 
 
 Free-will Baptist li'oreign Mission Society, 
 1833. 
 
 Board of Missions of the Protestant Episco- 
 pal Church, 1835. 
 
 Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyte- 
 rian Church, 1837. 
 
 Foreign Missionary Society of the Lutheran 
 Church, 1837. 
 
 Seventh-day Baptist Missionary Society, 1842. 
 
 American Indian Mission Association, 1842. 
 
 Baptist Free Mission Society, 1843. 
 
 Board of Foreign Missions of the Associate 
 Reformed Presbyteri&n Church, 1844. 
 
 Board of Foreign Missions of the Southern 
 Baptist Convention, 1845. 
 
 Missionary Society of the Methodist Episcopal 
 Church South, 1845. 
 
 American Missionary Association, 1846. 
 American and Foreign Christian Union, 1849. 
 American Society for Meliorating the Condi- 
 tion of the Jews, 1823. 
 
 Switzerland. 
 
 Evangelical Missionary Society at Basle, 1816* 
 Society of the Friends of Israel, at Basle. 
 
 France. 
 
 Paris Society of Evangelical Missions, 1822. 
 Union of the Friends of Israel at Strassburg. 
 
 Sweden. 
 Swedish Missionary Society, 1835. 
 Missionary Society at Lund, 1846. 
 
 Norway. 
 Norwegian Missionary Society, 1842. 
 
 British Aj^ierica. 
 Board of Foreign Missions of the Synod .>f the 
 
 Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia. 
 
 As an approximation to an estimate of 
 what this missionary Christianity has done for 
 the world during the eighteen centuries wo 
 have sketched, in establishing the institutions 
 of the Gospel, and bringing men into that re- 
 lation to its agencies, from which their enlight- 
 enment and salvation may spring, — we shall 
 here insert a quotation from a writer of ac- 
 knowledged ability. Mr. Turner, in his " H is- 
 tory of the Anglo-Saxons," gives the following 
 tabular statement, " as a conjectural, but prob- 
 able, representation of the progressive increase 
 of the number of Christians in the world :" 
 
 10th Cent. 50,000,000 
 
 1st Cent. 
 
 2nd 
 
 » 
 
 3rd 
 
 )) 
 
 4th 
 
 
 5th 
 
 » 
 
 6th 
 
 » 
 
 7th 
 
 j> 
 
 8th 
 
 » 
 
 9th 
 
 » 
 
 500,000 
 
 2,000,000 11th „ 70,000,000 
 
 5,000,000 12th „ 80,000,000 
 
 10,000,000 15th „ 75,000,000 
 
 15,000,000 14th „ 80,000,000 
 
 20,000,000 15th „ 100,000,000 
 
 25,000,000 16th „ 125,000,000 
 
 30,000,000 17th „ 155,000,000 
 
 40,000,000 18th „ 200,000,000. 
 
 — (Ferussac. Bull, Univers. Geog. p. 4, Jan. 
 
 1827.) 
 
 " But I think," he adds, " in this nincteent 
 century, the real number of the Christian po- 
 pulation of the world is nearer to three hunr 
 dred millions, and is visibly much increasing, 
 from the missionary spirit and exertions which 
 are now distinguishing the chief Protestant; 
 nations in the world." — (Vol. HI. p. 484, notOj 
 6th edition.) 
 
 We have thus endeavored to trace the con?^' 
 necting links in that chain of Christian labo 
 which unites the missionary exertions of t 
 Apostolic Church, down through the evangeli-ifl 
 cal eflforts of subsequent centuries, to the com-/^ 
 mencement of its present glorious development' ' 
 in our own day ; and have at the same time 
 glanced at the workings of that all-wise and 
 gracious Providence, which in every age haa 
 been operating, not only in the religions, but i 
 also in the politics, the arts, the sciences, and I 
 
EGYPT. 
 
 338 
 
 the literature of our race, to prepare the world 
 for the full millennial glory of the latter days. 
 — Condensed from an original atiicle prepared 
 by Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 EAST CAPE : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New Zealand, in the 
 beautiful valley of Waiapu, through the centre 
 of which runs the river of that name. 
 
 EBENEZER : A station and a colony of 
 the Rhenish Missionary Society in South 
 ^ ^'rica, at the mouth of the Elephant river. 
 
 ; :BENEZER chapel : a station of the 
 L. 11 don Missionary Society in Demerara, W. I. 
 
 EDINA : A settlement at the mouth of 
 the Mechlin river, in Western Africa, formerly 
 a station of the American Baptist mission. 
 
 EGYPT is so well known, and the descrip- 
 tions of travelers are so generally accessible, 
 that it is not necessary to the purposes of this 
 work, to say much of its geography, topogra- 
 phy, or history. It is bounded on the east by 
 the Isthmus of Suez and the Red Sea, south 
 by Nubia, west by Lybia, and north by the 
 Mediterranean Sea, being about 500 miles ' in 
 length, and some parts of it 250 in breadth. 
 The principal parts of the country are the 
 Delta, or lower part of Egypt, and the narrow 
 valley of the Nile in the higher parts, which 
 is bounded on both sides by high hills and 
 abrupt banks. The mountains on the east of 
 the Nile extend to the Arabian Gulf, and are 
 only inhabited by Bedouins. The principal 
 towns and villages are on the eastern side of 
 the Nile. The whole area of arable soil has 
 been estimated at from 10,000 to 16,000 
 square miles, or equal to nearly half the sur- 
 face of Ireland. 
 
 This country, once the cradle of the arts and 
 sciences, has been for centuries trodden be- 
 neath the iron hoof of Moslem and Turkish 
 de^otism. It is now, however, in a kind ot 
 transition state, in which the feelings, opinions, 
 and habits of the people are undergoing a 
 great and rapid change. Fanaticism is every 
 day becoming less powerful in Egypt ; and 
 the ancient Asiatic manners and customs arc 
 fast giving way to, the European. 
 
 The political revolutions to which Egypt has 
 been subject from time immemorial, have 
 given its population a mixed character. The 
 following estimate of the. different races of its 
 present population, made by Mr. Lane, is, we 
 believe, the most recent : 
 
 Arab Egyptians . 
 
 . 1,750.000 
 
 Christian Egyptians (Copts) 
 
 150,000 
 
 Turks 
 
 10,000 
 
 Syrians 
 
 5000 
 
 Greeks .... 
 
 5000 
 
 Armenians . . . . 
 
 . ■ 2000 
 
 Jews .... 
 
 5000 
 
 1,927,000 
 
 Eg}T)t presents great facilities for the intro- 
 duction of the Gospel into the north-eastern por- 
 
 tions of Africa. Independent of the Chris- 
 tians, who, though ignorant and degraded, still 
 keep alive the name and profession of Chris- 
 tianity, there is a perpetual concourse of 
 strangers from all parts of the interior. Cara- 
 vans from Sennaar, Darfur, and Timbuctoo, 
 are, at the proper seasons, in constant ac- 
 tivity. 
 
 jnssiONS. 
 
 Church Missionary Society. — Several Ger- 
 man missionaries, with their wives, sent out by 
 this society, arrived at Alexandria, Sept. 6, 
 1826, and employed themselves, at first, in the 
 study of Arabic, preaching in English, French, 
 and German, and in making tours, distributing 
 the Scriptures and tracts, which were received 
 with great readiness by the Copts. Their 
 arrival occasioned a great sensation, especially 
 among the Franks, who considered it a hope- 
 less undertaking. 
 
 The location of this mission was at length 
 fixed at Cairo, where, in 1830, they had two 
 schools, with 51 boys and 21 girls, consisting 
 of Greeks, Copts, Armenians, and Roman 
 Catholics. They found it impracticable to 
 preach the Gospel to congregations of the 
 native Christians, who would not assemble for 
 fear of their priests ; but they made known 
 the Gospel in religious conversations, from 
 house to house, and with those who visited 
 them. The Mohammedans were inaccessible, 
 as it was death to them to change their reli- 
 gion ; but some Mohammedan boys were ad- 
 mitted into their school. In 1833, a board- 
 ing-school was commenced, with ten boys ; 
 designed for training teachers and catechists. 
 In 1834, a chapel was erected, by subscrip- 
 tions obtained on the spot. In 1835, the mission 
 was interrupted by a terrible visitation of the 
 plague, which, for some time, carried off 1,500 
 daily. In 1840, it was reported by the mis- 
 sionaries, that in the different quarters of the 
 town, no less than six religious meetings had 
 been established by the native Copts, for the 
 purpose of reading the Scriptures ; and that 
 the Patriarch had sanctioned them, remarking 
 that it was better to meet to read the word 
 of God, than to drink brandy and commit 
 sin. He had also been induced to sanction 
 a plan for the establishment of an institution 
 in Egpyt for the education of the Coptic 
 clergy. ^ 
 
 In 1841, Mr. Lieder writes, " Notwithsfand- 
 ing all the various vexations arising from 
 political, civil, and religious causes, we are 
 able to say, that not only have the education 
 of the young, and the general civilization of 
 the people, advanced beyond all expectation, 
 but that a pleasing religious movement has 
 also been observed among the Christians 
 within this city." 
 
 In consequence of the distracted state of 
 Abyssinia, the chnrch in that country had 
 been for a number of years without an Abuna, 
 or Patriarch. In 1841, a deputation applied 
 
334 
 
 EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIONS. 
 
 to the Patriarch of Alexandria for one, and 
 he appointed a young man named Andraus, 
 who liatl boon partly oducated in the society's 
 school at Cairt>. Although but 21 years of 
 ago, he received the appointment on account 
 of his learning and religious character. He 
 took with him 1,000 copies of Testaments, and 
 other portions of Scripture ; and it was hoped 
 the event might prove favorable to the pro- 
 of the Gospel in Abyssinia. 
 
 In 1846, eleven Roman Catholic nuns ar- 
 rived at Cairo, with large means, and pur- 
 chased the extensive house of the former prime 
 minister of Egypt, for purposes of education. 
 In 1849, two Roman Catholic priests in 
 Egypt, one of them Secretary of the Bishop, 
 and the other, Superior of the Convent at 
 Cairo, renounced the errors of Romanism, 
 and made a profession of Protestantism, 
 which created a great stir among the Catho- 
 lics. 
 
 In October, 1849, Bishop Gobat visited this 
 mission ; and, in a letter dated Jerusalem 
 Jan. 9, 1850, he gives the following views re- 
 specting the policy and results of the mission : 
 " The missionaries seem to follow almost too 
 strictly the plan on which the mission was be- 
 gun 24 years ago : to seek the friendship of 
 the clergy, especially of the high clergy of the 
 Easteun churches, with the view of influencing 
 them gently, in the hope that by slow degrees 
 they would become convinced of the errors, 
 and themselves reform their respective churche|^ 
 Bxd this system has foiled ; and I am convinced 
 t/iat it will ever fail, with the several Eastern 
 churches, as well as with the Church of Rome. 
 Individual conversion must be the aim, as the 
 only means of prosecuting reformation." — 
 " Besides the dissemination of the Word of God 
 and other good books, in all parts of Egypt, 
 and the scriptural, though imperfect education 
 of hundreds of youth, the results of the mission 
 are, the conversion of a few individuals, some of 
 whom have died in the faith ; a few enlighten- 
 ed youth dispersed through Egypt ; and many 
 members of the difiFereut communities have 
 been led to doubt the truth of their supersti- 
 tions and traditions, and to respect Protestant- 
 ism." This last, he represents as a great 
 change from what it was when they first began 
 to preach the Gospel in Egypt. " Yet," he 
 says, '' upon the whole, it must be confessed 
 that the Egyptian mission has not had the 
 success which might have been expected." He 
 recommends a change in the policy of the mis- 
 sion, in accordance with these views. At a 
 missionary conference, held in Jerusalem, May 
 12, 1851, it was determined to continue this 
 uission on a reduced scale. It stands thus in 
 tfhe report for 1852 : 
 
 Stations 1 
 
 Missionaries 2 
 
 Female Teacher 1 
 
 Male do 1 
 
 EIMEO : An island of the Georgian group 
 in the South Seas, about 2° west of 'J'ahiti. 
 
 ELEUTHERA : A station of the Wes- 
 leyan Missionary Society in the Bahamas, 
 W.I. 
 
 ELIM : A station of the United Brethren 
 in South Africa, on New- Year's river, GO 
 miles from Genadendal, near Cape Aiguilla. 
 
 ELIOT : The first place occupied by the 
 missionaries of the American Board among 
 the Choctaw Indians. It is within the limits 
 of the State of Mississippi; about 120 miles 
 from the noith line of that State, and nearly 
 equidistant from its eastern and western bor- 
 ders. It is about 400 miles W. S. W. of the 
 Brainerd station, in the Cherokee nation. 
 Messrs. Kingsbury and Williams commenced 
 their labors there in June, 1818. 
 
 EMMAUS : A station of the United Bre- 
 thren, in St. Thomas, W. I. 
 
 ENGKATOO : A village near Maulmain, 
 in Burmah, and an out-station of the Maul- 
 main Baptist mission. 
 
 ENON: A station of the United Brethren 
 in South Africa, on the White river, near 
 Algoa Bay. 
 
 EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIOaNS : 
 The Domestic and Foreign Missionary Society 
 of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the 
 United States, was organized by the General 
 Convention, in 1820. By the constitution, the 
 meetings of the Society were to be held at 
 the time and place of the Triennial General 
 Convention. The business of the Society was 
 conducted by a Board, of which the bishops 
 of the Church and patrons of the Society 
 were members ex-officio, and the remainder 
 were chosen at each regular meeting - of the 
 Society. The seat of operations was Phila- 
 delphia, and there were auxiliary societies in 
 almost every state in the Union. Under tiiis 
 organization, the society went on prosperously 
 for fifteen years. 
 
 At the meeting of the General Convention, 
 in 1835, an entire change was made in the 
 Board, the Church undertaking, in her char- 
 acter as a Church, to carry on the work of 
 Christian Missions. At each meeting of the 
 Convention, a Board of 30 members is elected, 
 of which the bishops and the patrons who be- 
 came such prior to 1829, are ex-officio mem- 
 bers, called " The Board of Missions of the Pro- 
 testant Episcopal Church in the United States of 
 America." This board appoints, not necessarily 
 and not usually, from its own number, two com- 
 mittees, of eight members each, four clergymen 
 and four laymen, exclusive of a secretary and 
 treasurer for each, and of which the bishop of 
 the diocese of New York is ex-officio chairman, 
 one to direct the Foreign, and the other the 
 Domestic Missions. As thus organized, the 
 society embraces as members, all the members 
 of the Episcopal Church. 
 
 The constitution provides that " no clergy- 
 man shall be appointed a missionary by the 
 
ERROMANGA—EUROPE. 
 
 335 
 
 Board, or by either of the committees, without 
 the recommendation of the ecclesiastical au- 
 thority of the diocese to which he belongs ; 
 Dor shall any missionary be sent to officiate 
 in any diocese without the consent of the ec- 
 clesiastical authority of the same ; and no 
 clergyman shall be appointed a missionary, 
 who is not at the time a minister of the Pro- 
 testant Episcopal Church, of regular standing ; 
 and the appointment of a missionary may be 
 annulled at any time by the written direction 
 or order of a majority of the bishops of the 
 Church." 
 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 § 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 ■1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 t 
 
 > 
 
 Is 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 % 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Greece 
 
 Totals.... 
 
 1834 
 1835 
 1830 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 11 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 2 
 
 20 
 
 4 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 213 
 200 
 
 10,000 
 
 13 
 
 15 
 
 413 
 
 10,000 
 
 The following table shows the aggregate re- 
 ceipts of both the Foreign and Domestic Com- 
 mittees, from their organization to the change 
 in the constitution in 1835, and, since that 
 time, of every year, with the grand totals. 
 
 Years. 
 
 Domestic. 
 
 Foreign. 
 
 1820 to 1835 
 
 $76,338 
 
 $50,683 
 
 1836 
 
 18,783 
 
 18,050 
 
 183Y 
 
 31,563 
 
 26,012 
 
 1838 
 
 25,566 
 
 27,194 
 
 1839 
 
 29,660 
 
 26,347 
 
 1840 
 
 19,609 
 
 • 23,853 
 
 1841 
 
 28,317 
 
 22,918 
 
 1842 
 
 27,517 
 
 29,279 
 
 1843 
 
 35,913 
 
 33,746 
 
 1844 . 
 
 27,899 
 
 31.032 
 
 1845 
 
 28,870 
 
 38,514 
 
 1846 
 
 36,444 
 
 34,127 
 
 1847 
 
 23,300 
 
 30,691 
 
 1848 
 
 28,635 
 
 40,019 
 
 1849 
 
 27,263 
 
 41,453 
 
 1850 
 
 36,194 
 
 34,800 
 
 1851 
 
 34,302 
 
 37,702 
 
 1852 
 
 30,395 
 
 41,048 
 
 1853 
 
 , Totals, 
 
 23,856 
 
 42,050 
 
 $590,424 
 
 $629,968 
 
 The Board now have missions in Western 
 Africa and China, which thev are prosecuting 
 vigorously and successfully. ' They have, also. 
 
 an efficient mission in Greece, but chiefly de- 
 voted to educational interests. Their mis- 
 sions to Eastern Christians, for a time, ab- 
 sorbed no small share of their means and 
 efforts; but not being as successful as was 
 anticipated, they have been withdrawn in the 
 form in which they were originally undertaken; 
 but the field, we believe, is not abandoned, the 
 committee being authorized, whenever they shall 
 think proper, to resume the work in such form 
 as they may judge to be wise and expedient. 
 They had, also, for some time, a mission among 
 the North American Indians ; but this field 
 has been transferred to the Domestic Com- 
 mittee, and as yet, but little progress has been 
 made therein. 
 
 EREOMANGA : An island of New He- 
 brides, where is a station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society. This is the place where the 
 lamented Williams was murdered by the na- 
 tives. 
 
 ERZRUM : A station of the American 
 Board among the Armenians, situated almost 
 in the centre of ancient Armenia. Popular 
 tion 36.000, of whom 10,000 are Armenians. 
 
 EUROPE : ^rm.— 3,816,936 square miles. 
 (Ungewitter's Europe.) The continent does 
 not quite equal in superficial contents, the 
 combined areas of the United States and 
 Mexico. 
 
 ^ Popit^a^^ow— 262,300,000 (U.) The propor- 
 tion is nearly that of seventy persons to a 
 square mile. The XJnited States and Terri- 
 tories would contain, if as densely occupied aa 
 Europe, 226,000,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Languages. — The principal languages are 
 thirteen, derived from three great fountains ; 
 the Latin, the Teutonic, and the Sclavonic. 
 
 Independent States. — Sixty-three. Of these 
 eight are Republics ; twenty-two. Empires or 
 Kingdoms ; eighteen. Duchies ; fifteen. Prin- 
 cipalities, Electorates, &c. Of these govern- 
 ments, seventeen are absolute ; forty-six con- 
 stitutional ; sovereigns, nineteen, of whom nine 
 are Catholics ; eight, Protestants ; one, Greek 
 Churchman ; one Mussulman. 
 
 The vitality of the Grecian and Roman 
 form of civilization was already exhausted, at 
 the opening of the Christian era. The sceptre 
 was still held in the feeble grasp of the Caesars, 
 long after all religious faith and national feel- 
 ing had perished in Rome ; a phenomenon re- 
 peated, in our day, on that magical soil. An 
 fcflfete civilization, a corrupt society, and a wild 
 combination of refinement and barbarism, pre- 
 sented a rather discouraging field of invasion 
 to the heaven-descended kingdom of Christ, 
 yet in the vigor of its youth. Its entrance 
 into Europe was silent, and almost unnoticed, 
 in the persons of Jewish converts returning to 
 their western homes from Jerusalem and the 
 celebrated feast of Pentecost. 
 
 But the first formal invasion of Paganism, 
 and the first organization of the spiritual king- 
 dom, in Christian institutions, was made by 
 
336 
 
 EUROPK 
 
 the Apostle Tanl, about a. d. 51, at Philippi, 
 a provincial Roman city in Macedon. Amid 
 weariness, watchings, fastings, stonings, 
 scourgings, imprisonments, and martyrdoms ; 
 amid the fiercest opposition of philosophers, 
 priests, and magistrates ; with all the powers 
 of Judaism and Paganism, arrayed against a 
 few feeble soldiers of Christ, was his kingdom 
 established in Europe. 
 
 Paganism as a religious system, was then so 
 completely routed from the field, that, at this 
 day there ate left only a few thousand wander- 
 ing tribes, and a few savages in Southern 
 Russia and the northern regions, to profess 
 its principles. But, as we sliall see, history 
 confirming and illustrating the language of 
 prophecy, presents to our view "the deadly 
 wound of tne beast healed, and all the world 
 wondering after the beast." The organic body of 
 paganism was killed. The spirit of it went 
 out, seeking rest, but found it not ; and re- 
 turned, finding the Roman empire and society, 
 "empty, swept, and garnished" by Chris- 
 tianity ; and entering into it, brought " seven 
 other spirits worse than the first." But at pre- 
 sent we only notice the fact that paganism, as 
 an institution, was almost demolished. Judaism, 
 too, fell before the victorious arms of the 
 church. So that though it has thousands of 
 votaries, it retains no fortress, but every where, 
 simply craves permission to exist, and to traffic. 
 Mohammedanism, in the 8th century, was 
 master of Spain ; and in the 15th century, when 
 it lost Iberia, it ascended the Byzantine 
 throne, which it still feebly retains. But this 
 false religion need scarcely be mentioned when 
 we are enumerating the forces actively con- 
 tending against Christ. Having no mission- 
 aries, and having long since laid aside the 
 policy of propagating its faith by the sword, 
 it now chiefly interests us as one of the for- 
 tresses in which Satan defends his subjects 
 against the weapons of Christ. The Greek 
 and Armenian churches may be regarded in 
 the same light, unless the present measures 
 and war policy of the Czar must be considered 
 as a form of missionary enterprise. 
 
 Among the victories of the early mission- 
 aries, must be enumerated the questionable 
 conversion of Constantine, probably the most 
 costly triumph Christianity ever made, as it 
 immediately brought about the reconciliation 
 of piety with worldliness, and of the Christian 
 name with the Pagan spirit, the desecratiorf 
 of the Gospel to be merely an arm of the civil 
 power. From that period the fatal re-action, 
 which had before manifested itself at the ex- 
 tremities, reached the heart. Paganism re- 
 vived under Christian names and forms ; and 
 Satan turned the very arms and armies of 
 Christianity against Christ. And to this day, 
 nearly three-fourths of the inhabitants of Eu- 
 rope still worship pagan gods in pagan temples, 
 with pagan rites, and pagan festivals, all of 
 them bearing Christian titles. The war cry 
 
 of this occidental paganism is now, Christ and 
 the Church ; while it has abated in no degree 
 its original hostility to both. 
 
 I. Religious Classification op the Peo- 
 ple OF Europe. — The great apostasy from 
 truth and from spiritual worship, which bcj^^au 
 to manifest itself openly as Christianity bo- 
 came popular, was subjected to many modify- 
 ing influences, political intrigues, military ad- 
 ventures ; and the curious tides of immigration 
 resulted in producing those distinctive pluuses 
 of religious sentiment and ecclesiastical organ- 
 ization, whjch now characterize respectively 
 the three principal divisions of the Euroijcan 
 family. The Sclavonic tribes, taking posses- 
 sion of north-eastern and eastern Europe, 
 assimilated with the Greek Church. The Ro- 
 manic races, occupying southern Europe, never 
 really abandoned the distinguishing spirit of 
 the old empire ; a spirit of gross super- 
 stition, servile subjection to authority ; conso- 
 lidated social organization under rigid law ; 
 and the ambition of universal dominion. 
 They still retain all the spirit of pagan hos- 
 tility to Christ, unchanged. They uphold the 
 anti-Christian power prominently portrayed in 
 prophecy: the beast, to whom Satan gives 
 energy to make war on the saints. Protes- 
 tantism has been engrafted on the old trunk 
 of the Germanic race ; a people controlled by 
 the spirit of personal independence, and of 
 loyal and intelligent submission to rulers chosen 
 by the ruled. With them originated the re- 
 formation in the 16th century, which made a 
 radical change in the intellectual, social, and 
 religious condition of the entire middle and 
 north-western sections of the continent. And 
 in fact, it had, at one period, thoroughly pene- 
 trated Italy, France, Belgium, Austria, and 
 Poland. But, by dragoons and Jesuits, by 
 massacres and banishments, those states were 
 restored to the Roman pontiff. So that the 
 present religious condition of Europe may be 
 thus roughly sketched in numbers : 
 
 A. T/te Unevangelical Sects. — Roman Ca- 
 tholic, 133,000,000, (U.) Jews, 3,000,000, (U.) 
 * Greek Church, 59,000,000, (U.) Pagans, 
 750,000, t Mohammedans, 7,000,000 (U.J other 
 sects, 1,000,000 ; inhabiting the several states 
 thus : Roman Catholics and Jews, every state 
 of Europe; Greek Christians, Greece, Ionian 
 Isles, Russia, Turkey, Austria ; Mohximmedvns, 
 Turkey and Austria ; Pagans, Russia. 
 
 B. The Evangelical Sects.— They are 
 computed to embrace about 58,750,000 per- 
 sons, X whom we may conjecturally state to be 
 thus apportioned to the several denomina- 
 tions : Episcopalians, 13,000,000; Independents, 
 3,980,000 ; Methodists, 4,000,000; Presbyteri- 
 
 * Baird'8 Retrospect, p. 190. 
 
 f A writer in the Boston Courier, (April, 1854,) asserts 
 that the professors of the Byzantine creed are not only a 
 majority in Free Greece, but also half the population of 
 Austria, Servia, &c. ; and two-thirds of the population of 
 Turkey. 
 
 J BaLrd's Retrospect, p. 196. 
 
 .11 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 337 
 
 ians, 6,973,000; Baptists, 1,912,000; Moravians, 
 1 45,000 ; Lutheran, German Reformed, and 
 I United Churches, 28,840,000. The Episcopa- 
 lians reside chiefly in Great Britain, Ireland, 
 Guernsey, Jersey, Gibraltar, and Malta. Yet 
 so many of them are constantly abroad ; and 
 the national feeling of the English is so iden- 
 tified with their religious sentiments, that they 
 have chapels in most of the great cities of the 
 Continent. The Presbyterians are found in 
 Ireland, Scotland, England, Holland, France, 
 Switzerland, and Piedmont. The Lutherans 
 inhabit Denmark, Sweden, Norway, Germany, 
 and France chiefly. The German Reformed 
 are mostly in Germany. The Baptists are in 
 Great Britain and Ireland, and a few on the 
 Continent. The Independents or Oongrega- 
 tionalists, are in Great Britain, Ireland, France, 
 and Russia. The Moravians are found in 
 England, Ireland, Lusatia, Silesia, Gosna, &c. 
 Separate organization is not so much their 
 vim, as quickening existing churches. 
 
 The distinctions of doctrine, government, 
 
 »nd rites, which separate the evangelical 
 
 jhurches of Europe into different denomina- 
 
 iions, are so generally known, as to need no 
 
 jxplanatiou here. Perhaps the division of 
 
 he German churches is less understood in this 
 
 country. It may therefore be remarked that 
 
 ;he difference between Luther and Calvin, as 
 
 nen and Christians, has extensively perpetuated 
 
 tself in the Continental churches. This 
 
 lifference has been thus expressed by Herzog 
 
 Lange, (as quoted by Professor Smith, 
 
 -iian Review, xvi. 596,) " while it was 
 
 he special office of Lutheranism to protest 
 
 igainst all Judaism in the Church, it has been 
 
 ;he special office of the Reformed Church to 
 
 )rotest against all Paganism." " The Catholic 
 
 Jhurch is the church of priests ; the Lutheran 
 
 )f theologians ; and the Reformed Church is 
 
 he church of the believing congregation. 
 
 ]he first talks most of the church ; the second, 
 
 f the speculative aspects of religion ; the 
 
 leformed Church dwells most fondly upon the 
 
 Ian of Redemption." Calvin had a clearer 
 
 itellect, and a purer logic than Luther ; less 
 
 aperstition as a catholic, and a less preponder- 
 
 ting imagination. Hence the Reformed Church 
 
 las swept away more of the rubbish of popery, 
 
 nd come to a greater degree of simplicity in 
 
 cclesiastical organization ; while it has, at 
 
 he same time, cast away the vague concep- 
 
 ■ - of the Eucharist, which make the twi- 
 
 whcre Romanism most effectually does 
 
 )rk of proselyting. They differ, then, in 
 
 1, the one being German, the otherFrench ; 
 
 , i : jutrinal bias, the one tending to Armini- 
 
 ! .nism, the other being purely Calvinistic ; 
 
 I n government, the one being episcopal, the 
 
 ther Presbyterian. They have now been 
 
 : imalgamated in some states, as Prussia, Baden, 
 
 1 EC. It was, however, a forced union, ab extra, 
 
 I lOt voluntary, and so not vital. And yet it 
 
 ?as working well in Prussia ; too well, indeed, 
 
 22 
 
 to meet the government's desire for a firmer 
 attachment to dogmas and distinctive stand- 
 ards ; as ensuring a more legal and less demo- 
 cratic spirit than the fervent union of real 
 believers. 
 
 11. Estimate of the Spiritual condition 
 OF Europe. — God alone knows the heart ; and 
 man is, at best, an imperfect judge of his own, 
 much more of his brother's spiritual state 
 before the Omniscient eye. And while an in- 
 accurate judgment is worse than useless, an 
 arrogant judging of man is hurtful to him who 
 practices it. A judgment is arrogant, either 
 when it is volunteered for a selfish end, or 
 when it is formed without adequate light, and 
 a conscientious care. But on the other hand 
 it is very important for us, both to judge the 
 religious systems under which our fellow men 
 are passing their brief probation, and also to 
 form a general estimate of their spiritual con- 
 dition, as individuals and as bodies. We 
 must therefore in justice say, that we experi- 
 ence more sadness than joy, in counting the 
 numbers in the evangelical ranks in Europe. 
 We fear, and for the most cogent reasons, 
 that the vast majority of them are in the con- 
 dition of the church of Sardis : having a name 
 to live, they are dead. And with every true 
 believer, such a conviction will incite to 
 prayer for the Spirit of life to come down and 
 breathe on the " valley of dr^ bones." We 
 shall now refer to some indications of the 
 present spiritual condition of the European 
 churches : — 
 
 1. T/ie condition of the Clergy. — The intellec- 
 tual cultivation of the evangelical clergymen 
 is generally of the highest order. And there 
 is extensively a return to the more direct study 
 of the Bible itself, which has always distin- 
 guished the ministry in the best ages of the 
 church. Fifty years ago there was left a small 
 remnant of godly men in the European minis- 
 try ; but great changes have taken place in 
 England, Scotland, Germany, France, and 
 Switzerland, within that period. In 1815 
 there was probably not one spiritual, faithful 
 preacher of Christ's Gospel in the Protestant 
 Church of France — now there are nearly 300. 
 In England the clergymen of the established 
 church were generally far from possessing the 
 spirit of their office ; now there are thousands 
 of godly, earnest men in the ministry of that 
 church. The same might be said of the kirk 
 of Scotland, and particularly of that largo 
 body called the Free Church. Even the Inde- 
 pendents in Great Britain, thirty years ago, 
 had faflen far below the type of Owen, Baxter, 
 and Howe. The change in that body of min- 
 isters is very cheering. The same may be 
 said of the German clergy, who had sunk deep 
 into the abominations of neology. About 
 half the Protestant clergy in Germany are 
 evangelical in opinion and feeling, the rest 
 embrace every shade of opinion — moderate ra- 
 tionalism, deism, pantheism, &c. The evan- 
 
888 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 gdioal clergy surpass in learning the clergy of 
 any other nation. They are generally devout 
 men. The pulpit ia disproportionately wcaJc 
 when compared with the chairs of theological 
 science. The number of firstrrate exegetes, 
 historians, theologians, is very great, in pro- 
 portion to the number of effective preachers. 
 There is too much reflection and too little 
 action. 
 
 2. Estimate of the Sabbath. — It is essential to 
 the spiritual prosperity of the church, that she 
 recognize two features of this institution : its 
 divine authority and its entirely spiritual charac- 
 ter. But the general declension of the European 
 churches has sadly manifested itself in this di- 
 rection. Yet it is cheering to witness the 
 many signs of a healthful sentiment reappear- 
 ing. Among other indications of this we may 
 notice the following facts. The Evangelical 
 Alliance has called the attention of the con- 
 tinental churches to this subject. At Metz, 
 Amiens, Agen, and Lille, in France, industrial 
 men and memljers of liberal professions have 
 engaged, by regular contracts, to abstain from 
 all work and commercial operations on Sun- 
 day. A central council for promoting the 
 voluntary observance of the Sebbath has been 
 formed in Paris. And the King of Prussia 
 has issued military orders requiring his army 
 to observe it as sacred time. The labors of 
 our brethren in the British parliament are fa- 
 miliarly known. They have led, as is always 
 the case with any important subject brought 
 before that practical body of men, to a 
 thorough investigation of facts, as to the 
 amount of outward desecration of the Divine 
 institution. The result is, an accumulation of 
 powerful testimony in favor of at least so much 
 legislation as shall throw the influence of the 
 government on the side of the Sabbath. In 
 Protestant Germany, however, the Sabbath is 
 a religious and social holiday. The people 
 follow the reformers in their loose estimate of 
 the Sabbath, and know nothing of the advan- 
 tages of a Puritan Sunday. The continental 
 reformers never reached the light attained by 
 those of Scotland and England. In Switzer- 
 land the infidel party, ascendant in the govern- 
 ment, have labored to put the Sabbath where 
 the leaders of the revolution in France placed 
 it, in the height of their frenzy. 
 
 3. Religious Reading is another test of ad- 
 vancing or declining piety. In this light the 
 vast circulation of books by the British, 
 French, and other tract societies is very full of 
 promise. The British, Freftch, and German 
 presses are pouring forth continually a stream 
 of religious truth surpassing the productions 
 of any preceding age. Religious devotional 
 books are said, by an intelligent observer, to 
 be more read in Germany than in any other 
 country. 
 
 4. Family Worship. — With Christians in 
 America the neglect of at least daily domestic 
 worship is regarded as inconsistent with the 
 
 healthy condition of a church ; and vet, out ol 
 the small circle of the evangelical churclios ol 
 Switzerland and France, Holland and Swe- 
 den, there is evidence of a very general wai)t oj 
 family worship among the evangelical churches 
 of the continent. 
 
 5. Discipline is another pillar of a true 
 church, extending its cognizance of church- 
 members to the following points: moral- 
 ity; soundness of belief ; outward fellowship ; 
 and habitual attendance on ordinances. Wc 
 know not an established church in whicli such 
 a thing as . discipline, in the Puritan sense, ig 
 recognized. 
 
 6. Social Religious Meeting are an eiTicicnl 
 means of promoting piety. But these arc ^i>n- 
 erally discountenanced in the established 
 churches, though not universally negkcted. 
 The dissenters, and the most evangelical incra- 
 bers of the established churches generally de- 
 light in adding to the more general and for- 
 mal, the more social and simple exercises of 
 prayer-meetings and conferences. 
 
 7. Revivals and Conversions. — ^We do not in- 
 sist upon one specific form of manifesting the 
 work of the Holy Spirit in the human heart. 
 Men must, however, be converted ; and if we 
 are to judge from the entire course of the 
 Church's history, conversions will be some- 
 times solitary, and at others, in great numbera 
 at a time. But it is certain that the superna- 
 tural operations of the regenerating Spirit are 
 so much modified in their manifestations bj 
 the outward influences which affect their sub- 
 jects, that it is difficult to judge the degree o 
 spiritual influences a people enjoy, except b} 
 the more uniform and universal tests of theii 
 living " soberly, righteously, and godly." Yel 
 there are many social movements in Europeai 
 churches, resembling the phenomena knowi 
 among us as revivals of religion. In France 
 Sweden, Norway, and many parts of Germany 
 they have appeared, especially in France, uu 
 der the labors of faithful evangelists^ and col 
 porteurs, and particularly in connection witl 
 the meetings of the Evangelical Alliance. 
 
 8. Religious Educatio7i is also intimatel; 
 connected with the existence and advancemen 
 of true godliness among a people. By n 
 people has more fidelity been manifested i 
 the religious education of families and in put 
 lie religious instruction, than by the Scotcl 
 The pious and patriotic exertions of Knox t 
 secure a common religious instruction f(ji th 
 children of his countrymen, have produced i\ 
 suits of immeasurable value to that people, i 
 the formation of personal character, and con 
 sequently in their national history. The re 
 cent struggles of the dissenters in Great Bi itai 
 to prevent the monopoly of religious educiitio 
 in^yublic schools by the Church of Engluiu 
 have led the dissenters to more vigorous e.xe; 
 tions to provide such education for the ]»ou 
 under their own direction. The Congregatioi 
 alists have commenced not only their own co 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 339 
 
 j leges, but what we should call a normal 
 ischool, or a school for training religious teach- 
 icrs of public schools. It is called the Homer- 
 ton College, in which were recently 21 male 
 and 28 female pupils. The necessities of the 
 case have driven the governments of Europe, 
 for centuries, to provide for the poor orphans 
 within their dominions. And private philan- 
 thropy has done much in this respect. In the 
 seventeenth century, Francke instituted at 
 Halle his celebrated orphan-house, which has 
 trained nearly 5000 children under the influ- 
 ence of the Gospel. It has grown into an im- 
 portant institution, having several branches, 
 imong which is the Canstein press, that has 
 ilready issued two million Bibles, and one mil- 
 lion New Testaments, at a low price. There 
 ure in London 150 ragged schools, which are 
 iccomplishing a work of immeasurable im- 
 portance for the long neglected pauper 
 jhildren of the metropolis. In Horn, near 
 Bamburg, is a very interesting institution 
 br reforming depraved children. It refuses to 
 bring together more than one hundred. The 
 Evangelical Society of France has a valuable 
 jchool in the city of Paris, for educating the 
 children of Eoman Catholic parents, which 
 b.as been crowned with great success. Sunday 
 schools originated in England, and are gradu- 
 ally introduced in France, Sweden, Denmark, 
 Bind other portions of the Continent. 
 
 9. Christian Union is another sign of the 
 Church's spiritual state. The divisions of the 
 church are a sign of weakness. They awaken 
 seal, indeed ; but its strength is the convulsive 
 iction of disease, not the vigorous movement 
 Df health. And Kome has obtained an ad- 
 vantage by presenting the false appearance of 
 anity in contrast with this manifest diversity, 
 md often even animosity of the different 
 branches of the evangelical church. But we 
 ttiay notice many indications of a brighter day 
 ipproaching. Among these we place, first, 
 ;he organization of the Evangelical Alliance. 
 L\\ the friends of Christian Union are not 
 f^ct convinced of its value. It must, in fact, 
 3e admitted that in England, where it origi- 
 lated, there was an outward pressure, which 
 might as fully account for the movement as 
 the simple attraction of brotherly love. In 
 France, however, it appears to exist in a purer 
 5pirit ; yet it must be said for the British Al- 
 liance, that it has nobly carried out the spirit 
 of brotherly love in its valuable efforts to 
 liberate the Madiai, and to defend the Baptists 
 in Prussia. It is slowly gaining favor in Hol- 
 land, Sweden, and Germany. In the latter 
 country there are two institutions already ex- 
 isting, which, to some extent, embody the same 
 principles— the Kirchen-Tag and the Gusta- 
 vus Adolphus Society. The first of tftese 
 grew out of the movement in London, and is 
 promoting brotherly love in the German 
 churches. Having to contend with a very 
 high church feeling in the Lutheran clergy, it 
 
 is not yet prepared for an affirmation of un- 
 qualified religious liberty as the normal state 
 of man and churches. It is engaged in dis- 
 tributing Bibles and tracts, and at its last 
 meeting thoroughly discussed the questions of 
 Union, Schism, and Separation. In all such 
 discussions we may hope that truth and char- 
 ity will gain ground. The Gustavus Adolphus 
 Society was formed in 1832, on the second 
 centenary of the Protestant hero's death from 
 whom it was named. It was organized " to 
 afford assistance to the dispersed and^scattered 
 members of the Protestant Church, especially 
 to any who may suffer oppression ; to supply 
 their spiritual wants, and to aid in the erection 
 of chapels, in which the evangelical doctrines 
 may be preached." At first it was not dis- 
 criminating in the selection of its objects ; 
 but now stands on the Word of God as its 
 platform. Among other good deeds, it has 
 saved from utter extinction a church of 1900 
 members at Santomysl, by reconstructing its 
 ruined church edifice. It expended last year 
 more than $30,000, mostly on churches suffer- 
 ing from Eomanist oppression. And not 
 least among the signs of Christian union is 
 the growth of Young Men's Christian Associ- 
 ations, which are entirely catholic in their 
 character, and are now increasing in number 
 in different states of Europe. 
 
 10. The Missionary Labors of tlie Church. — 
 Here we see one of the brightest spots in the 
 horizon, the harbinger of a new day for Europe 
 and the world. When we consider what has 
 been done in Europe and by European Chris- 
 tians since the days of the Countess of Hun- 
 tington and the Wesleys, to spread abroad 
 Bibles, religious tracts, and missionaries, we 
 feel assured that so much seed sown in so 
 much faith and prayer, must be growing, now 
 in the unnoticed blade, soon to show the ear, 
 and the full corn in the ear. Other portions 
 of this Cyclopedia will show what the Euro- 
 pean churches are doing in the great field of 
 Paganism. We shall here merely exhibit a 
 sketch of the missions conducted on their own 
 territory, and a table of their foreign opera- 
 tions. The Gustavus Adolphus Society, al- 
 ready referred to, is a Home Mission Society. 
 They have turned their attention recently to 
 the wretched condition of their countrymen in 
 the different capitals of Europe, In London 
 are 25,000 German Protestants, of whom not 
 1000 attend worship. In Paris 60,000 Ger- 
 mans are found, exceedingly degraded, for the 
 most part, having only 5 churches and 7 preach- 
 ers. In Lyons there are 12,000. They re- 
 solved, at their recent meeting in Berlin, to 
 collect information concerning the spiritual 
 condition of their expatriated countrymen, and 
 report to the several states, requesting that 
 measures might be taken to discourage emi- 
 gration, and to provide churches and schools 
 for those who are deprived of them. Besides 
 this institution, the German churches have 
 
340 
 
 EUROPK 
 
 oi^auiaetl the Inner or Home Missionary So- 
 ciety. The Episcopal and the dissenting 
 churches of Britain have organized very efiS- 
 cii'ut societies to labor in Ireland. To those 
 Irish mission churches alone which are sus- 
 tained by the Congregational Society of Eng- 
 land, more than 400 members were admitted 
 
 last year. Its labors extend to nearly half a 
 million of people, and it has 13,000 children in 
 its Sunday-schools. 
 
 The following table presents an approxima- 
 tive view of the contributions of the European 
 evangelical churches to the missionary work ; 
 and yet it is far from being complete. 
 
 MEANS AND MEN OP THE EUROPEAN EVANOELIOAL MISSIONARY SOCIETIES. 
 
 SOdETIES. 
 
 Years. 
 
 Contributod 
 in one year. 
 
 Aggregate m 
 Years. 
 
 I-ondoa Missionary 
 
 Church Missionary 
 
 Society for Propagation of Gospel. 
 
 Baptist Missions (two) 
 
 Britii-h and Foreign Bible Society. 
 
 Wesleyan Mission 
 
 London Moravian Association.. ^. . . 
 
 Geueriil Baptist Mission 
 
 Soc. for Promotion of Chr. Knowl. 
 
 Various Scottish Missions 
 
 London Jews' Society 
 
 London Religious Tract Society 
 
 Rhenish Mission 
 
 Basle Mission 
 
 Moravian Mission 
 
 Francke Evangelical Mission 
 
 Irish Evangelical Society. 
 
 Colonial Mission (Congregational).. 
 Central Society (Paris) 
 
 Evangelical Contin. Soc. (London). 
 City Missions in London (two) . . 
 English Monthly Tract Society t. 
 Home JLi.ssion (Congregational) . 
 
 Gustavus Adolphus Society 
 
 Other societies in Europe 
 
 Other societies in France 
 
 Irish Church Mission. 
 
 Hibernian Bible Society 
 
 Genera Evangelical Society 
 
 Total. 
 
 1853 
 
 1850 
 1853 
 1863c 
 
 1850 
 1852 
 
 1847 
 1849 
 1851 
 1849 
 
 1850 
 
 1852 
 1853 
 
 1853 
 1854 
 1853 
 
 $302,0000 
 620,000 
 444,700 
 129,610 
 
 1,083,300 
 
 574,430 
 
 21,900 
 
 8,750 
 
 128,625 
 
 249,975 
 
 162,287 
 
 345,120/ 
 
 25,630 
 
 54,000 
 
 63,540 
 
 25,600 
 
 10,100 
 
 26,150 
 
 16,110 
 
 5,634 
 
 130,420 
 
 7,000 
 
 56,700 
 
 37,000j 
 
 2,510,700 
 
 157,000 
 
 180,000 
 
 18,360 
 
 26,240 
 
 $9,405,000 
 10,730,645 
 7,408,530 
 2,636,305 
 
 17.789,468 
 
 650 
 1,634 
 
 $47,969,948. 
 
 (aggregate of re- 
 ceipts of five 
 societies.) 
 
 4916 
 64 
 
 427 
 507 e 
 
 50 
 133 
 289 e 
 
 10 
 
 22 
 
 95 
 
 SOOh 
 
 ,000 A; 
 18 
 
 16,000 
 15,306 
 
 5,138 
 
 1,400 
 1,185 
 
 188 
 
 30,000 
 25,710 
 
 350 
 1,035 
 
 $7,481,361 
 
 6,000 
 
 70,oo0jr 
 
 12,500 
 5,615 
 
 a About $35,000 in addition were contributed by the mission churches. 
 
 b Colonial Missionaries. c Report for 1853, in <'News of the Churches." 
 
 d Issued from beginning, 26,571,103 Bibles, in 150 languages or dialects. Other societies on the continent have dis- 
 tributed 2,937,273 copies. 
 e Laborers of all kinds. 
 
 / Has issued from beginning 547,807,184 publications, in 110 languages. 
 a See UniU<i Brethren. h More than 2,000 visitors. 
 
 i To send tracts by mail to the higher classes. 204,000 tracts Issued in 1853 
 
 i Supported 288 churclies. k Agents in Catholic districts of Ireland. 
 
 Teachers. m Theological School. n Supposed 4,000 laborers in pagan field. 
 
 All intelligent observers agree in affirming 
 that the Roman Catholic and Greek churches 
 present a spectacle of the most revolting for- 
 malism and hypocrisy on the one side, and 
 superstition, equally disgusting, on the other. 
 The absurd credulity of the people, and the 
 villainy of the priesthood, who palm upon them 
 not only lying legends of the past, but present 
 miracles, characterizes even the most highly 
 cultivated Catholic people. High dignitaries 
 in the church give their sanction to these false- 
 hoods ; and even the Pope shows his favor to 
 the monarch of a mighty nation, by sending 
 him a tooth or the toe of a saint! MateriaF- 
 ism in the lower stratum of society ; absorp- 
 
 tion in money-making, in the middle stratum ; 
 and sheer scepticism, in the upper class, gives 
 the portrait of every Catholic country. 
 
 The interesting inquiry here meets us : Is 
 the present tendency of Europe toward Pro- 
 testantism, Atheism, or Popery? So far aa 
 Elngland is concerned, we may speak with con- 
 fidence. Even the astute Wiseman was de- 
 ceived by the tractarian movement. The Ox- 
 ford apostasy and the tendency Romeward 
 have probably reached their climax. And i1 
 is now manifest to all that the Cardinal hai,j| 
 unmasked his battery prematurely. The Pre 
 testant spirit of England has been outrs 
 and will probably not slumber again spc 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 341 
 
 The London Times asserts that, from 1180 to 
 1853, the Papists have increased only from 
 70,000 to somewhat less than 200,000. In Scot- 
 laud the increase has been much greater ; but in 
 Germany, as in England, the semi-Roman de- 
 velopment has only the more effectually arous- 
 ed the Protestant spirit. And we have varied 
 and accumulating testimony to the falling away 
 of thousands from the Eoman church, besides 
 a, vast growth of Protestant populations in 
 Catholic towns and districts on the continent. 
 Coblentz, for example, had, in 1824, 23 fami- 
 lies or 60 persons in the evangelical church. 
 Now there are about 4000. Mayence, 50 years 
 igo, had 60 members ; now more than 6000. 
 Cologne in the same time has advanced from 
 LOOO to nearly 10,000. In Ireland the change 
 las been very great ; though the number of 
 jonversions is variously estimated. In West 
 jralway ten years ago there were but 500 
 ?*rotestants ; there are now more than 5000. 
 lev. W. Marable says that within two years, 
 J0,000 have been converted to the evangelical 
 iaith. In the diocese of Tuam, out of about 
 !0,000 Protestants, nearly bOOO were born 
 )apists. At the beginning of the present cen- 
 ury the King of Bavaria married a Protestant 
 ffincess, who brought a Protestant chaplain 
 
 her court. But he could not find a person 
 a Munich who would consent to rent him a 
 lOuse. He was the first avowed Protestant 
 Bttiing there. Now there are 12,000 Protes- 
 a-nts in the city ; mostly however, immigrants. 
 n France and Italy we have growing evidence 
 f changes of conviction, which are abiding 
 lieir time, but which must, ere long, be openly 
 lanifested. 
 
 The Ultramontanists in France now dare to 
 nmask their policy ; and are misinterpreting 
 16 silence of the nation at the avowal of their 
 lonstrous notions and pretensions. They are 
 ertainly completing the alienation of the 
 'ranch heart from the Roman church. After 
 le events of 1830, honest men looked to the 
 riests as the only defence against socialism, 
 ut the conviction is steadily growing, that 
 .ome is the enemy of a rational freedom. The 
 Bople are beginning to make that comparison 
 hich is so fatal to Rome, between the influ- 
 ice of Romanism and Protestantism respect- 
 'ely, on human society. Protestant England, 
 
 1 rey see, advancing ; but gradually, healthfully, 
 I Jacefully adopting various improvements in 
 
 ir government, while within sixty years Cath- 
 ie France, with violence and blood, has pass- 
 1 successively from monarchy to republic; 
 ;om that to the consulship ; then, to the em- 
 ire; then to legitimist monarchy; then to 
 )nstitutional monarchy ; then to the republic ; 
 len to absolute monarchy again ; and she is 
 ssting there only to recover breath for another 
 •merset. Even Catholic writers, as for in- 
 anee, Eugene Pelletan and Michel Chevalier, 
 Profession defoi du XLXe Si'ecle, 1 vol. 8vo.— 
 irml des D'ebats, 17 Juin, 1853.) have con- 
 
 fessed that Protestant, or at least, non-Catholic 
 nations alone are advancing in all respects ; and 
 that they are moving on to the conquest of 
 the world, whilst Catholic nations are gradually 
 dropping from their hands the sceptre of pow- 
 er and influence. 
 
 Within twenty years, the Protestant pastors 
 of the French national church have increased 
 from 250 to 500 ; and all other Protestant in- 
 terests have been advancing in the same ratio. 
 
 Atheism has made some progress in Great 
 Britain, in connection with the movements 
 toward social reformation. But these indica- 
 tions have drawn forth corresponding efforts 
 on the part of Christians, which are attended 
 with very encouraging results. The change 
 in the tone of some leading journals indicates 
 a favorable change among the educated classes. 
 In Germany there is a manifest reaction among 
 the clergy. The cold and barren regions of 
 atheistical speculation are not as popular as 
 they were a few years ago. Believing men 
 are adopting a bolder policy ; and in fact, en- 
 tertaining less respect than formerly for ration- 
 alistic theories. 
 
 In Prussia there have been some manifesta- 
 tions of favor to Popery in high places. And 
 this has certainly led to a formidable increase 
 of Roman priests and churches in that king- 
 dom. But the people have at length become 
 so sensitive on the subject, that the king will 
 probably act hereafter with more reserve in 
 this direction, and pay more regard to the 
 wishes of his Protestant subjects than to the 
 feelings of his Catholic wife. ' 
 
 It is then difficult to give a well founded 
 reply to the inquiry whether the European 
 people are tending most to Protestantism or 
 to Popery. The Catholics appear to be san- 
 guine. You may find recorded in the Dublin 
 Registry the very names of their converts from 
 the Protestant ranks, with special stress laid 
 upon the rank of the pervert or the standing 
 of his father. Thus they give the statistics of 
 conversions in England, (1845-1852.) "Clergy 
 142. Ladies, 76. Their children, 87. Noble 
 ladies, 26. Noblemen, 30. Gentlemen, all of 
 hige station, 148. Total 509. Mem. The 
 additions of 1853 will greatly swell this list." 
 
 In so brief a space as we can give to this field, 
 it is impossible to show all the encouraging in- 
 dications of reviving religious principle and 
 feeling, which the present state of Europe pre- 
 sents. The French Protestants are aiming in 
 every way to revive a love for the memory of 
 their ancestry of confessors and martyrs. Among 
 other measures they have organized a society 
 for publishing the history of French Protest- 
 antism. The British press is issuing a higher 
 style of exegetical works than we have been 
 accustomed to receive from that quarter. And 
 religious periodicals of great value are now 
 issued in every part of Protestant Europe. 
 And if it were necessary to reply to the false 
 assertions of a distinguished Roman prelate, 
 
842 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 under the title, " The DccliDe of Protestantism," 
 yvc should merely contrast the missionary en- 
 terprises of the True with those of the False 
 Church. Did we count our missionaries as 
 thev count theirs, amounting to 6,076, ours 
 would be 20,000, or 4000 ordained mission- 
 aries, and 16,000 assistants, controlling some 
 40 presses in heathen lands. We should point 
 to more than 37,000,000 spent in one year by 
 the evangelical churches of Europe alone to 
 
 S'opagate a pure Christianity ; to 2,200,000 
 ibles, which one society distributed in one 
 year, making a total of more than 26,500,000 ; 
 and to 34,700,000 religious publications ; mak- 
 ing a total of nearly 550,000,000 by one so- 
 ciety. 
 
 III. The agencies employed to dissemi- 
 nate THE Gospel in Europe. — We are not 
 at liberty to consider here any agency that 
 does not immediately affect the religious in- 
 terests of the people. Yet, Christianity re- 
 quires so imperiously the aid of popular instruc- 
 tion, to secure her highest ends, that we cannot 
 entirely omit a reference to it. The brutal 
 ignorance of the majority of Catholics who mi- 
 grate to this country from Ireland, is painful 
 to every philanthropic mind. In Kussia not 
 more than one in eight hundred can read. So 
 that we must strictly regard the majority of 
 the people of Europe as really pagans, intel- 
 lectually as well as religiously. 
 
 1. Common Schools. — Scotland took the lead 
 in popular education. And to that and the 
 character of her pulpit instruction, she is in- 
 debted for her distinguished position. England 
 moves slowly in this work, because Dissent is 
 jealous of the Established Church ; and yet the 
 government wishes to place the schools under 
 the control of the pet-church. Prussia has 
 introduced a very efficient system of com- 
 mon schools, which is now extended to all 
 Germany. Yet it should be remembered that, 
 while the children of Prussia are so exten- 
 sively instructed, we must not judge the re- 
 sults of this instruction by what we witness in 
 this country. With the peasantry it does not 
 form the basis of higher cultivation, nor the 
 guarantee of further improvement. Ireland, 
 Holland, Denmark, Protestant Switzerland, 
 Austria, Italy, Belgium, and Sardinia, have 
 adopted a system of primary instruction. Rus- 
 sia, Sweden, and Turkey, are taking some 
 steps in the matter. Much has been done in 
 Germany, France, and England to reclaim 
 vicious boys. Miss Callandrini, a lady of a 
 truly missionary spirit, more than twenty years 
 ago introduced religious infant schools into 
 Northern Italy. . But the Roman Pontiff, with 
 earnest vigilance, has guarded his little wretch- 
 ed dominions from the intrusion of infant 
 schools, railroads, and Bibles. 
 
 2. Temperance. — The northern portions of 
 the Contment present the same melancholy 
 spectacle of intemperance, which was so common 
 in this country, before the organization of 
 
 Temperance Reform ; and until very recently 
 no very manifest iinpre&sion has been made 
 any where, unless it be in Sweden. Witliin a 
 few years, however, the British people arc Ijo- 
 ginning to appreciate the immense advantaj,a'3 
 which would result from a universal cet-f^ution 
 from the use of intoxicating beverages. But 
 we now look mainly to — 
 
 3. Preaching and the distribution ofBibks and 
 Religious Tracts, lor the salvation of the pcrlHh- 
 ing. There are several organizations in this 
 country, and in England and Scotland, wliich 
 act on the people of Europe, mostly through 
 native institutions and laborers. In America 
 is the American and Foreign Christian Union, 
 which supplies the principal Continental soci- 
 eties with funds, and employs a few laliorrrs 
 under its own immediate direction. In ; 
 pendix will be found a very full statement 
 missionary labors of the Methodist Churcti iii 
 Europe. The Presbyterian Church (0. S.) ;iLso 
 contributes liberally to this object. The Bap- 
 tist Church has labored long and faithfully lo 
 support American missionaries in France; 
 thus far, with very discouraging results, IVom 
 the opposition of the priests, which has l>(eii 
 the more effectual, as directed against io' 
 ers. They have likewise sustained miss i' . 
 Germany and northern Europe, and with much 
 better success. Their churches now spread 
 through Germany, Denmark, Norway, and 
 Sweden, and into Switzerland, embracing aboir 
 5000 members. More than fifty Bible S" >■ 
 ties, and the Tract and Sunday-school S(j< 
 of Europe and America, are distributini; 
 valuable publications over the whole European 
 field; perhaps less extensively in Spain auel 
 Portugal, however, than in any other countries. 
 The native Missionary Societies in France, 
 Belgium, Switzerland, and the German Slate.- 
 laboring among their own population, an- yet 
 feeble; and mostly much restricted by the 
 civil power of the priesthood. The Belgian 
 Evangelical Society has 16 preachers and 4i' 
 stations. The French Wesleyans have 2e 
 chapels, 79 stations, 19 ministers and candi 
 dates, five evangelists and catechists, 32 loca 
 preachers, 830 members, 122 candidates, ant 
 1462 pupils in their Sunday-schools. Tb( 
 Religious Tract Society of France has dis 
 tributed more than one million publications 
 The two French Bible Societies have distri 
 buted more than 18,000 Bibles and 67,000 Nev 
 Testaments. Besides these are the Evangeiica 
 Society of the dissenters ; the Central Society 
 sustained by the evangelical members of th^ 
 French National Church, both accomplishing 
 a work of inestimable importance, employin} 
 hundreds of laborers, and with constantly eii 
 couraging results. The Church of Lyons i 
 itself a vigorous missionary society. In Gei 
 many there are various important Home Mis- 
 sionary institutions, which are working wit 
 encouraging success. In Sardinia, complet 
 toleration is now opening a wide door for evai 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 343 
 
 gelical efforts. In Central and Southern Italy, 
 as in Austria, much greater obstructions exist. 
 I Several very interesting establishments, almost 
 or quite unknown in America, exist among the 
 Protestants of Europe. One is the Deaconess 
 Houses, designed to train religious women for 
 usefulness among the poor and sick. They 
 exist in France, Germany, Switzerland, and 
 Eussia. Another is a Eetreat for ladies of 
 high families in Germany, not requiring celi- 
 bacy ; but, in case of marriage, the member 
 of the sisterhood forfeits her admission-fee. 
 This, and several others, are adapted to the 
 peculiar circumstances created by the institu- 
 tions and customs of the country. The Kough 
 House, of Horn, near Hamburg, has great 
 celebrity as a model institution for reclaiming 
 children. We now inquire — 
 
 lY. What may be done to evangelize 
 Europe ? — Wide and effectual doors are open 
 for a tenfold increase of evangelical labors. 
 And there is much reason to believe that He 
 who is so wonderfully bringing India and 
 China within the reach of his Church, will 
 soon bring eastern and southern, if not north- 
 eastern Europe before her, as an accessible 
 missionary-field. But at present our brethren 
 in France, Belgium, and Germany are con- 
 tinually pointing out to us labor to be done, 
 and laborers ready to perform it, while the 
 lack of pecuniary resources restricts their 
 operations. 
 
 V. The Hindrances to Evangelizing 
 Europe. — They are many and mighty ; such 
 as only faith in God has a right to despise. 
 Most prominent among them are : 
 
 1. The Union of the Church with the civil 
 government ; or, rather, the subjection of the 
 Church to civil rulers. The Roman Catholic 
 Church is thus united with the governments of 
 France, Belgium, Spain, Portugal, the Italian 
 States, Austria, and other German states, and 
 several Swiss cantons. The Episcopal Church 
 is thus united with the Government of Great 
 Britain in England, Ireland, Malta and Gib- 
 raltar. The Lutheran Church is united with 
 the governments of Prussia, France, Denmark, 
 Sweden, Saxony, and other German states. 
 The Presbyterian Church is united with those 
 of Holland, France, Great Britain (in Scot- 
 land,) and several Swiss cantons. The Greek 
 Church is united with those of Russia, Greece, 
 and the Ionian Isles. The Mohammedan 
 Church is united with that of Turkey. 
 France also supports the Jewish Church. The 
 vital question in regard to this relation be- 
 tween the Church and the State, is : Has 
 either a right to interfere with the self-govern- 
 ment of the other ? It is a broad question, 
 demanding a profounder discussion than would 
 be appropriate here. Yet we cannot dismiss 
 it with a dry statistical statement. Even 
 popes have advocated the complete independ- 
 ence of each of these powers. 1'heir testi- 
 mony, however, loses even its appropriate 
 
 weight, because it is always given for an occa- 
 sion, and frequently on the opposite sides of 
 the same question. Some writers pretend to 
 discover great advantages to the Church and 
 to society in this connexion, especially in the 
 periods when the forms of society were dis- 
 solved ; and also its adaptedness to the old 
 forms of civilization. To us, even this is very 
 questionable ; while, in our age, it presents 
 gross and enormous evils, with scarcely a miti- 
 gating feature. The injustice now perpe- 
 trated under the forms, and in the name of jus- 
 tice, by the most civilized governments of 
 Europe, is a constant appeal to the vengeance 
 of Heaven. We mean not to deny that good 
 men may approve of the system ; nor to cen- 
 sure those who, in their circumstances, think 
 it best to labor within the various established 
 churches. Every man stands or falls to his 
 own Master, and not to his brethren, on that 
 point. Take the case of a civil government 
 throwing the whole of its power into the cause 
 of a lie ; abetting, sustaining, enforcing on 
 the consciences of its subjects, be they thou- 
 sands or millions, to reject Christ's Gospel, and 
 embrace an invention of Satan ! How great 
 the responsibility ; how enormous the injury ; 
 how dreadful the account of such a steward- 
 ship ! It is much for a man to judge for him- 
 self what is truth, and to stake his eternal 
 well-being on it. It is more to give himself 
 to instructing and persuading others to do the 
 same. But what will at last be thought of 
 worldly princes or godless statesmen choosing 
 for themselves a false religion, and then, under 
 pains and penalties, enforcing it on their fel- 
 low-creatures ! They hinder Christ's faithful 
 servants from proclaiming his Gospel. They 
 are the tings of the earth that set themselves 
 against the Lord and his anointed. They hin- 
 der the people from coming to the light. No 
 one, for instance, can tell what would become 
 of the Roman Catholic Church in ten years, if 
 the civil and military power of France and 
 Austria did not uphold it. We have reason 
 to believe that multitudes of the people of 
 Italy and France would at once proclaim 
 themselves Protestants of some form ; and 
 that the zeal of some of its most fervent pre- 
 lates would take some other object, and flow 
 in some other channel. We might refer, in 
 confirmation, to the changes which have taken 
 place in Turin, in Genoa, and in Nice, within 
 six years. Nice is said to have become almost 
 as Protestant as Geneva. And, were it in 
 place here to cite facts from America, we 
 could show_ that Romanism melts away like 
 dew, where it is left to a fair competition with 
 Christianity. Maryland was settled by Catho- 
 lics, just as New England was settled by Puri- 
 tans. Puritans retain their ascendancy there,, 
 and have moulded the character of all the land 
 westward to the Pacific ocean. But Mary- 
 land presents at this day C5 Catholics to 800 
 Protestants. Florida was Spanish. The 
 
344 
 
 EUROPK 
 
 whole country west of the Mississippi was first 
 settled by Spanish Catholics or 1< rcnch Jesu- 
 its. And yet, with all tlie influx of Irish and 
 German Catholics,— enough, it might reason- 
 ably be thought, to have given the Roman 
 Church a majority, — the census shows in Flor- 
 ida 5 Catholics to 147 Protestants ; in Louisi- 
 ana, 55 Catholics to 223 Protestants ; and in 
 similar proportions in tlie other states.* It is 
 diflicult for Christians in America to conceive 
 of the enormous evils resulting from this vio- 
 lent conjunction of these two institutions. 
 "What man can judge for the conscience of his 
 fellow-man ? Think of such sovereigns as 
 Henry VIII. of England, and his daughter 
 Elizabeth, determining for godly men what 
 they must believe, and how they must worship ! 
 No Protestant country more clearly deter- 
 mined, at the time of the Reformation, the 
 true relations of the Church and State, than 
 Scotland ; and, at the same time, none em- 
 braced more errors than England. The only 
 difibrcnce between the supremacy of Henry, 
 however, and that of Victoria is, in omitting 
 the title of headship. Thus stands the 37th 
 article of the Church of England: "The 
 Queen's majesty hath the chief power in this 
 realm of England, and other her dominions, 
 unto whom the government of all estates of 
 this realm, whether they be ecclesiastical or 
 civil, in all causes, doth appertain." The 2d 
 canon of 1603 stands thus rf "Whosoever 
 shall affirm that the king's majesty hath not 
 the same authority in cases ecclesiastical, that 
 the godly kings had among the Jews, let him 
 be excommunicated." 
 
 Dr. Lucius, of Hesse Darmstadt, speaking 
 of his country, says : X " The prese.nt lords 
 paramount of the soil are, at the same time, 
 archbishops, born of the Protestant national 
 church — bishops in military array, with sword 
 and shield ; would that they also always bore 
 the sword of the Spirit, and girded on the 
 whole armor of God ! Even Roman Catholic 
 princes assume the arch-episcopal office, and 
 exercise its authority in the German Protest- 
 ant church." Thus, ungodly men enact eccle- 
 siastical laws, and appoint to ecclesiastical 
 offices. Do we avoid this evil wholly by our 
 system ? Alas ! no. But when worldly men 
 get power in the Church here, it is not by the 
 consent of the Church, by birth, nor by the 
 operation of a system which avows that piety is 
 not necessary in an officer of Christ's Church. 
 The Hessian Constitution for 1803 runs thus : 
 " To the Minister of the Interior " (he may be 
 an infidel, avowedly ; it would not hinder his 
 appointment to this civil office,) " belong 
 matters of police, in the widest signification of 
 the term ; the promotion of popular education, 
 and, consequently, ecclesiastical and scholastic 
 
 • Missions-Blatt, 3 Jahrgang, No. 10. 
 
 J North British Review, XV. p. 259. 
 Evangelical Christendom, VI. p. 212. We shall desig- 
 nate this work by E. C. 
 
 affairs 1 " Thus, the law makers, judges, rulera 
 and teachers of Christ's Church, are more 
 likely to be men without piety, than to be 
 regenerated men. 
 
 Look, then, at these facts, selected from 
 thousands. They show both the indittereuce 
 of the higher clergy to the real worth and 
 wants of the poorer citizens, and the violence 
 done to the Church of Christ in depriving her 
 of one of her most valuable and cherished 
 rights, the choice of teachers. Of 547,112 in- 
 habitants of Sardinia, 512,381 can neither 
 read nor wxite. And yet there are in that 
 state 11 bishops, 693 canons, 391 cures, 88 
 monasteries, 15 nunneries, and 2600 priests 1 
 or less than 160 souls to a teacher of religion. 
 The Church of England is possessed of im- 
 mense wealth, and yet the Earl of Winchelsea 
 asserted in Parliament she had left two mil- 
 lions of the people without church accommo- 
 dations ; and then, out of 10,891 Episcopal 
 churches in England, only 64 choose their own 
 pastors ! 
 
 And not among the least pernicious results 
 of the system is that a false standard is brought 
 into Christ's kingdom, and the canon law takes 
 the place of Scripture. Errors that ought to 
 be vanquished by instruction and conviction, 
 are suppressed by physical force, and thought 
 itself is stifled in the conforming and the non- 
 conforming ; and as light penetrates these 
 countries, and the minds of men are aroused to 
 a consciousness of those inalienable rights 
 which these systems destroy, there arises a 
 growing confusion. Civil and canon law are 
 coming constantly into collision with each 
 other, as now in the governments of France 
 and Bavaria, which undertake to support 
 Catholic and Protestant churches alike. In 
 Westphalia the absurd spectacle has been pre- 
 sented of a pastor (Heinrich) seized and im- 
 prisoned, his whole edition of a sermon de- 
 stroyed ; and yet the offence of the sermon 
 was, that in a Lutheran church, under a Lu- 
 theran king, he defended the doctrines of the 
 Lutheran Church against Roman heresies. 
 
 But in the case of the state supporting a 
 true church, while the immediate evil is not so 
 great, yet the principle is equally false, and 
 many hurtful results remain. There is an in- 
 justice to other sects, and an injury to the de- 
 nomination chosen. For instance, we »nay 
 cite the fact that in Prussia every person is 
 born into the church, and entitled to the " scal- 
 ing ordinances." Go into one of the princi- 
 pal prisons of Prussian Saxony, containing 
 more than 300 prisoners, and you may regu- 
 larly see the chaplain administering to them 
 the Lord's Supper indiscriminately. An eye- 
 witness reports : " Several months ago I saw 
 in Marysburg the Lord's Supper administered 
 to a company of several hundred soldiers."-^ 
 (Letters of Prof Fisher, in Congregationalist.) 
 
 Religious liberty is now, on the whole, gain- 
 ing ground. Although the French sovereign 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 345 
 
 deems it bis policy to favor the priesthood, yet 
 there is a public sentiment gradually maturing 
 in France, founded on more correct views than 
 have heretofore prevailed. The Protestants of 
 the national church boldly demand their 
 rights under the constitution. And the labors 
 of British Christians on the continent have 
 not been fruitless. The Protestant Conference 
 of France and the Kirchentag of Germany 
 have appointed a commission to take charge 
 of this subject. The Belgic Constitution guar- 
 antees religious liberty to all, although the 
 Roman Catholic Church is supported by the 
 government. Holland has a moderate degree 
 of religious liberty ; so have Turkey, Den- 
 mark, and Norway; but in Switzerland infi- 
 dels now play the tyrant, especially in Neuf- 
 ch^tel and Yaud. Russia tolerates other re- 
 ligions than the Greek ; but is very severe on 
 Bome poor churches, who come reluctantly 
 within the favored fold. Spain, Portugal, 
 Sweden, Italy (except Sardinia,) and Greece 
 have now the unenviable superiority to the 
 Turkish government in the exercise of intol- 
 erance and bigotry. 
 
 Englishmen dying in Spain are subjected to 
 the most brutal indignities. As one remarks : 
 " The gloomy intolerance of Spain pursues the 
 British Protestant, should he die on Spanish 
 soil, even to his grave." Portugal exhibits 
 some shades of improvement upon Spain ; but 
 even in that country, though it is far more 
 open to British influence than Spain is, relig- 
 ious liberty does little more than breathe. 
 Dr. Gomez, under the article of the Constitu- 
 tion which permits the exercise of the Pro- 
 testant religion to foreigners, and under British 
 protection, continues to preach the doctrines 
 of the Reformation in Lisbon, yet no Portu- 
 guese is allowed to become a member of a 
 Protestant church ; and the Jesuits are incit- 
 ing the mob against him, as they did in regard 
 to Dr. Kalley in Madeira. 
 
 It would require too much expansion of this 
 article to enter into details concerning the 
 state of religious liberty in the several states 
 of Germany. The violence involved in the 
 system, and the immeasurable wrong it inflicts 
 on an intelligent people, may be seen in a re- 
 mark made by one of the most distinguished 
 theologians of Prussia. An American inquired 
 of him, if the Church should be separated 
 from the State, how many of the existing 
 churches of Prussia would adhere to their pre- 
 sent pastors ? The reply was, Not three. The 
 British government has manifested a shameful 
 indifierence to the rights of its own subjects 
 traveling or dwelling in papal countries. Her 
 statesmen have boasted of dictating treaties 
 and constitutions to the continental powers ; 
 but, to their disgrace, they have looked with 
 indifiference upon the sacred rights of con- 
 science, which it was thus in their power to 
 advance. 
 
 In some states foreign dissenters are hardly 
 
 tolerated ; and in a large number, native dis- 
 sent is prohibited ; and, of course, all proselyt- 
 ing efiforts are crushed by the power of the 
 government. Even among the Protestant 
 governments the spirit of intolerance is mani- 
 festing itself. Great Britain has gradually 
 abandoned the narrow policy of former days, 
 under which our fathers suffered to death and 
 exile. But in Sweden persecution is now car- 
 ried on against those who, wearied with the 
 formality of the established churches, are as- 
 sembling to worship God in spirit and in truth. 
 Yet it is cheering to see the symptoms of a 
 change even there. The archbishop of Up- 
 sala, primate of Sweden, has recently held a 
 convocation of his clergy, in which it was de- 
 cided that laymen ought to participate in the 
 spiritual management of the parish ; that, ab- 
 stractly considered, religious liberty is desira- 
 ble ; and that conventicles are allowable. The 
 Baptists have peculiarly suffered in i^ermany, 
 the arm of clerical oppression mask(;d by the 
 toga of the magistrate. 
 
 Another hindrance to the progress of the 
 Gospel is, * 
 
 2. The Social penalties attached to a change of 
 religion. — This operates with peculiar power 
 over superstitious and affectionate people, like 
 the Irish and Germans. 
 
 3. The Literature of the day is deeply im- 
 bued with a worldly spirit, and to some extent, 
 with infidel opinions and an aversion to the 
 Gospel. 
 
 4. The Philosophy of Europe has been a 
 mighty hindrance to the success of evangelical 
 labors. In Scotland, Hume has had few fol- 
 lowers. In England, Locke has exerted a less 
 injurious influence than in Fra,nce. But be- 
 tween the materialism of one school of German 
 philosophers, and the pantheistic transcendent- 
 alism of another, the higher and the lower 
 classes of the continent have been strongly 
 fortified against the influence of the Gospel. 
 But a visible and powerful reaction is taking 
 place in France and Germany, in favor both 
 of a more evangelical faith and of a more 
 spiritual philosophy. 
 
 Another hindrance to the labors of evangel- 
 ical men is, 
 
 5. Tiie debasing effects of Popery on the 
 masses of the People. — It promotes ignorance, 
 superstition, and sensuality. It is, in fact, one 
 of the most demoralizing institutions in the 
 world. The Rev. Mr. Seymour has recently 
 brought out some comparisons between the 
 immorality of several countries of Europe, 
 which are very instructive and painful. The 
 more thoroughly popish a country is, the worse 
 it is. Murder and licentiousness stalk hand in 
 hand among Gothic cathedrals, gorgeous rites, 
 and mumbling priests. Take, for instance, the 
 crime of murder. The standard assumed is 
 one million inhabitants. For every million, 
 there are murdered annually in England, 4; 
 Ireland, 19 ; France, 31 ; Austria, 36 ; Lorn- 
 
 ''^ >>''^» •pTTw *^Si:^ 
 
346 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 bardy, 45 ; Sicily, 90 ; the Pope's kingdom, 
 100 ; Naples, 200. 
 
 All iIk^o causes combined have resulted in 
 counteractini?, to a great extent, the influence 
 of the few faithful heralds who have been en- 
 deavoring to proclaim the Gospel to the mis- 
 guided millions of Europe. 
 
 VI. Tub present condition op the Ro- 
 man HiERARCUY, considered as an aggressive 
 power. — In forming an estimate of the religi- 
 ous condition and prospects of Europe, a pro- 
 minent place must be assigned to this formida- 
 ble power. We consider, 
 
 1. Tlieir Home Missionary Societies. — The 
 mightiest of these, and yet the most suicidal, 
 is the Order of Jesuits. They were not or- 
 ganized to spread the Gospel in heathen lands, 
 but to defend the Papacy in civilized nations. 
 In a Jesuit's eye, schism is worse than heresy, 
 heathenism, irreligion, or immorality. And, 
 although they have been distinguished as mis- 
 sionaries, their main work was to arrest the 
 Eeformation. Loyola organized them as a 
 religious military police, for the Church of 
 Rome ; but Lainez, the second general of the 
 order, gave it its permanent form of a politi- 
 cal order, whose main instruments are shrewd, 
 unscrupulous intrigue, educating youth, and 
 confessing princes and nobles. One of their 
 early movements was the planting of two 
 powerful colleges in Rome ; that of the Jesuits 
 for general purposes, and a German college, in 
 which the course of instruction prepared men 
 to control the German mind. Belgium had be- 
 come half Protestant ; but, by education chiefly, 
 the Jesuits recovered it to Rome. The college 
 of Douai was founded for the conversion of 
 England. Poland had become almost Pro- 
 testant. But the colleges of Cracow, Grodno, 
 and Pultusk, crushed the Reformation there: in 
 the same way they saved Austria to the Pope. 
 The order has made itself, in turn, indis- 
 pensable to every despotic government of Eu- 
 rope, and then has rendered itself intolerable 
 to them all. To the best classes of every 
 civilized community, sooner or later, the pres- 
 ence of this body must be found insufierable to 
 men of probity and virtue, to true patriots, to 
 rulers, and to men of science and learning. 
 Society is against them ; for she is pressing to 
 the future ; they would anchor her to the past. 
 Even the other orders of the Roman hierar- 
 chy dan barely tolerate their arrogance. Their 
 barbarous opposition to science, genuine his- 
 tory, and classical literature, unites the educated 
 classes against them. They make unrelenting 
 war on the universities and educators of any 
 country that will tolerate them. Three hun- 
 dred and twenty-six of their authors have been 
 condemned by the tribunals of Europe as en- 
 couraging crime. 
 
 I'he Parliament of France burned their 
 books by the hands of the hangman in 1762. 
 The archbishop of Malines, in his work. Dm 
 Jesuitisme, Ancien et Moderne, says, " that of 
 
 these 326 works approved by these Jesuit theo- 
 logians, 17 encouraged immodesty, 28 perjury, 
 33 robbery, 36 homicide," Arc. In 1773 (Mem- 
 ent Xiy., in compliance with the feelii)ga of 
 the civilized world, suppressed the order. At 
 that time it had 22,787 members ; of whom 
 11,010 were priests. But the suppression was 
 only in appearance. Catharine of Russia 
 saved them as an order. But, authorized or 
 unauthorized, they have insinuated themselves 
 into every part of Europe. In 1814, Pius 
 VII. restored their order. But when the Em- 
 peror of Rqgsia found them not only opposing 
 the Bible Society he had formed, but also in- 
 terfering with the Russian mission in Peking, 
 which was purely scientific, he adopted still 
 more rigid measures against them. This is 
 the official verdict of the government : * Every 
 act of the Jesuits is founded in selfishness, 
 and directed solely to the unlimited extension 
 of their power : adepts in excusing each of 
 their unlawful proceedings by some rule of 
 their company, they have a conscience as vast 
 as it is docile.' In 1845 they had 1390 priests 
 in Europe, 1184 scholars, and 1041 lay brothers. 
 They have lost the prestige of their fame as 
 educators and as leaders of human thought. 
 They have not, at this day, one commanding 
 preacher, to reach the masses of mankind. 
 Immense wealth and untiring industry are 
 powerful instruments. But when these are 
 employed against the whole current of human 
 thought and the mighty movements of human 
 society, their possessors toil like Samson shorn 
 of his locks. They are at present recognized 
 only in some of the Italian States, and toler- 
 ated in France, where they hold immense pos- 
 sessions, under false names ; having about one 
 thousand members, so far as can be ascertain- 
 ed. Their paper in Paris, L' Univers, is bold 
 to impudence, and uncompromising in its 
 claims for Popery. It is said to be in the pay of 
 the Court of Rome. And it is a striking fact 
 that the Department of Worship in the general 
 government — that is, the superintendence and 
 care of all the churches of France, Catholic, 
 Protestant, and Jewish, is in the hands of a ! 
 Jesuit layman. ' 
 
 Beside this renowned corps, there is a great ■ 
 number of orders and institutions, embracing 
 persons of both sexes, designed for educating 
 Protestant children, and for the care of or- 
 phans and invalids. They are resorting again, 
 in self-defence, to preaching " out of season," 
 if not out of consecrated places. Series of 
 meetings are now held by the Jesuits, Re- 
 demptorists. Capuchins, Franciscans, Ligo- 
 rians, &c., sustained by various societies — St. 
 Vincentius, Borromeo, Childhood of Jesus, Ro- 
 sary Catholic, Sisters of Education, &c. 
 
 A society has been organized to pray for 
 the conversion of France. It counts 40,000 
 members in St. Brience alone. Then there 
 are fraternities attached to particular churches. 
 Almost every church in Paris has one. The 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 347 
 
 most important is that of the Sacred Heart : 
 it has had 50,000 members. They have great 
 varieties of schools for children, and asylums 
 for the aged. They have also retreats, not so 
 rigid as monasteries. The Society of St. Yin- 
 cent de Paul, in Paris, composed of young 
 people, has auxiliaries throughout the king- 
 dom. It labors indefatigably to reclaim chil- 
 dren, paupers, and apprentices, to the Catholic 
 faith. Its receipts from lotteries, ciiarity ser- 
 mons, &c., were $40,812 in one year. As a 
 specimen of the home missionary operations of 
 the Roman Catholic church, we may select 
 those established in Belgium. Twenty monas- 
 teries exist there. The majority of them are 
 of recent foundation, and have abandoned the 
 old notions of meditation, fasting, and inac- 
 tivity ; for all which they have substituted an 
 intense activity. Th3 Ignorantins have up- 
 wards of twenty houses, and are increasing in 
 number, as being peculiarly eflScient in reach- 
 ing the mass of the people. The Freres de 
 la Charite have houses, scattered through 
 the five dioceses. The Josephites have seven 
 houses, divided into three classes ; priests, 
 seminarists, and artisans. The Freres de Renaix 
 have four houses : they take care of the aged, 
 promote free schools for the poor, and work- 
 shops for needy tradesmen. The Freres de la 
 Misericorde have three houses ; attending to 
 the sick and to prisoners. The Freres Xave- 
 riens devote themselves to instructing and to 
 nursing in families, and in houses of detention 
 and correction. But female missions are still 
 more numerous. The diocese of Mechlin alone 
 contains 33 orders of nuns; comprising 109 
 communities, only eight of which are devoted 
 to a contemplative life. The whole corps of 
 archbishops and bishops in Europe is about 
 400. 
 
 2. Their Foreign Missionary operations are 
 increasing. — The missionary college in Rome, 
 called the Collegium de Propaganda Fide, insti- 
 tuted by Urban VIII., in 1627, still continues 
 to educate men of different nations as mission- 
 aries to their own people. And the Congre- 
 gatio de Propaganda Fide, founded by Gregory 
 XV., in 1622, still continues its missionary 
 labors. There are five Foreign Mission Soci- 
 eties established in Paris. 
 
 The Society for Propagating the Faith, 
 founded recently in Lyons, is a remarkable in- 
 stitution. It collects one cent a week from 
 each of its members, scattered throughout Eu- 
 rope, Asia, and America. In 1850 its receipts 
 were $620,370 ; (some say $950,000,) of which 
 $357,734 were from France. The congrega- 
 tion of St. Lazarus has increased its mission- 
 aries from 13 to 200, within thirty years. The 
 Jesuits, Dominicans, and Franciscans have 
 taken up the work of missions afresh, and new 
 orders are entering the field, Redemptorists, 
 Passionists, Oblatists, Priests of Mary's Holy 
 Heart, the Maryists, and the Monks of Picpus. 
 The united incomes of three of their missionary 
 
 societies amount to nearly $1,300,000 per an- 
 num. 
 
 The Dublin Catholic Registry reports their 
 foreign mission operations, but furnishes basis 
 for no other statistical statements than these : 
 the number of Catholics in India is 822,000 ; 
 the number of priests in Africa is 150. — (See 
 Church of Rome, Missicms of.) 
 
 3. Present internal strength of Popery. — Judged 
 by the true standard, the papal religion is a 
 failure, even on its own chosen ground. The 
 present political, social, financial, moral, intel- 
 lectual, and religious condition of the imperial 
 city is its standing condemnation : the verdict 
 of a righteous Providence, which mankind ' 
 may read and understand, if they have eyes to 
 see and ears to hear. The city of Rome, for 
 instance, has 137,866 lay citizens, and to teach 
 them how to be holy and happy, they have the 
 Pope himself, a large portion of the cardinals, 
 34 bishops, 1314 secular priests ; 1548 monks, 
 and 1686 nuns. But immorality, scepticism 
 and discontent, with a profound contempt of 
 the Pope and his reverend counsellors, charac- 
 terize the city of seven hills. A leaden atmos- 
 phere seems to oppress the respiration in that 
 doomed city ; the blasphemous corrupter of the 
 kings and nations of the earth. No man is 
 competent to judge the real condition of that 
 church. It is constructed with a cunning 
 adaptedness to conceal, even from Catholics, its 
 faults and falsehoods; and yet more energe- 
 tically to prevent the exposure of them to the 
 world, when discovered ; and therefore even 
 the Pope himself is incompetent to determine 
 anything beyond the external show of things. 
 But results cannot be concealed, and we 
 may get some definite view of a system com- 
 prising such varied and conflicting pretensions, 
 and blended ambiguously with so many civil 
 governments, by separately considering these 
 points : The temporal supremacy of the Pope ; 
 the boasted unity of the infallible church ; the 
 state of the controversy with Protestantism ; 
 and the result of the attempt to convert Great 
 Britain. How stand then 
 
 A. The pretensions of the Pope to be the Empe- 
 ror of the World ? — It should never be lost sight 
 of, that while Roman Catholics are divided in- 
 to two parties. Catholics and papists, the Popes 
 and Cardinals are always papists. They be- 
 lieve, or profess to believe, that mankind will 
 never be happy ; error and sin will never cease; 
 commerce and agriculture, education, and 
 above all, religion will never thrive ; nor, in a 
 word, Christ reign universally until the Pope 
 has reigned as a temporal despot, over every 
 kindred and people, and tribe and man. All 
 however who believe the dogmas of the church, 
 do not believe in these pretensions of the Pope. 
 After the mighty Charlemagne had called on 
 the bishop of Rome to crown him, the idea of 
 universal supremacy seems to have taken root 
 in the papal brain. But it never was fully 
 matured until the ambitious Hildebrand gave 
 
848 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 it form and uttcranco. Among the doctrines 
 ho pronnil«ratod are these ; (Baronius, Dictntus 
 Papa.) "The Pope is one universal bishop, 
 with all power to depose, restore, translate, and 
 alter the sees of other bishops. No book is 
 canonical without his sanction. No council 
 can be called general without his precept. He 
 can depose emperors ; he can absolve subjects 
 from their allegiance. He is the judge of all 
 men, and no man can judge him. All princes 
 must kiss his feet. There is only one name in 
 the world, that of the Pope ; and by the me- 
 rits of the blessed Peter, ne is endowed with 
 personal sanctity." But how far has Gregory 
 VII. convinced the world of the truth of these 
 tremendous dogmas ? The world has discov- 
 ered that the Roman Church stands upon two 
 falsehoods — two base and acknowledged for- 
 geries. We say acknowledged : for since the 
 day in which the Magdeburg centuriators 
 showed to the world that they were forgeries, 
 her ablest writers have abandoned them. And 
 yet, if these are not her ground, she has no 
 other for claiming to be more than a simple 
 Christian church, upheld, (if she stands at all, 
 like all other churches,) simply by the power 
 of the Holy Uhost. Her claim of supremacy 
 over all other churches is founded, not to say 
 upon the strange coxistruction of a promise to 
 an apostle to the Jews, by which a church of 
 gentiles is made supreme over all others, but 
 upon the ' Decretals of Isidore.' Her claim 
 for temporal authority stands upon the * Do- 
 nation of Coustautine,' both of them base 
 forgeries. 
 
 The question then before us is, how the gov- 
 ernments and churches regard these two 
 claims ? The Protestant churches and govern- 
 ments probably acquiesce unanimously in re- 
 garding the pretension as arrogant and ab- 
 surd, to the last degree. A recent writer, 
 (J. E. Shephard, A.M., " History of the Church 
 of Rome to the end of the Episcopate of Damasus, 
 A.D. 384, 1851,") says, that he undertook to in- 
 vestigate the facts on this subject, as establish- 
 ed by documents ; this is his conclusion : " What 
 is recorded of the Roman church within that 
 period, is aUnost nothing ; and that those acts 
 of interference with other churches, which ap- 
 pear in the histories and some other writings, 
 are forgeries of a much later date, manifestly 
 written to create a belief in a supremacy 
 which had never existed, but which, at the 
 time they were made, the Roman church was 
 endeavoring to introduce." He finds the gross- 
 est anachronisms in these records, for exam- 
 ple : Constantino is said to give Sylvester 
 supremacy, even over Constantinople, when 
 Constantinople has not yet an existence. 
 
 Gregory VII. proposed to himself to subju- 
 gate the world by means of the clergy. He 
 therefore exempted the monasteries from epis- 
 copal jurisdiction, and so obtained the exclu- 
 sive services of a disciplined ecclesiastical mil- 
 itia. But even the Catholic sovereigns of 
 
 Europe choose to keep their sceptres in their 
 own hands, and employ the Catholic clergy aa 
 a police. And the most intelligent Catholic 
 laymen throughout P]urope, we believe, are of 
 the same opinion with the late Abbe Lammo- 
 nais, that if the Pope is a sincere Christian, 
 and seeks the spiritual welfare of mankind, ho 
 will lay aside his triple crown, and retain only 
 the Bishop's Croisier. There is not a prince 
 in Europe who does not despise the civil au- 
 thority of the Pope, at least as much as that 
 of the Sultan. Both those characters are re- 
 tained in the list of sovereigns by suffrancc.. and 
 by the help of other peoples' soldiers. 
 
 B. The Unity of the Catholic Church.— T\m 
 is another false pretension and hypocritical 
 profession. Neither Popes, Councils, Clergy, 
 nor Laymen are any more united than the 
 members of Protestant churches. Opinions 
 and decisions of Fathers, Councils, and Popes 
 recorded and published, are not harmonious. 
 Two Popes contended for the crown ; and a 
 council without a Pope appointed a third. 
 The old Jesuit and Jansenist tendencies re- 
 main, while the Jansenist party is broken up. 
 The Gallican and Ultramontane battle is as 
 severely fought to this day in Paris, as in any 
 former period. The church has adopted two 
 sdf-destroying fundamental theories ; on the 
 one side, infallibility, and consequent immuta- 
 bility ; on the other, the developement theory 
 of Newman. She insists on absolute authority, 
 and then reasons with private judgment to 
 prove that there can be no legitimate exercise 
 of private judgment. The questions to-day 
 discussed in Catholic France go to the bottom 
 of Papal claims and pretensions. They affect 
 the union of civil and temporal power in the 
 Pope ; the agreement or antagonism of Popery 
 and modern society ; the rights of the inferior 
 clergy. And when Frenchmen take up such 
 questions, they investigate them thoroughly. 
 
 C. The State of the Doctrinal Controversy. — 
 The only real and legitimate controversy Rome 
 can maintain, is on the question of her infallibil- 
 ity. And it is striking, that when Mr. Seymour 
 in his discussions with the Jesuits, (Mornings at 
 Rome,) affirmed that Rome had never dogmat- 
 ically asserted her infallibility, and challenged 
 them to produce such affirmation, they were 
 thrown into utter confusion. The fact is, that 
 on these fundamental points, What is the 
 Church ? and, When are her utterances infal- 
 lible? she never speaks positively ; but al- 
 ways assures that she is infallible, when it 
 suits her purpose so to do. Her present doc- 
 trinal discussion makes a meagre portion of 
 theological literature. 
 
 D. Tlie Papal Movements rn England. — One 
 of the most striking events of the 19th cen- 
 tury has been the struggle of Rome, accom- 
 panied with premature shouts of victory, to 
 recover England to the Pope. Appearances 
 were certainly encouraging for them. There 
 w^ere in 1838, in England, 11 dukes, 2 earls, 
 

 EUROPE. 
 
 349 
 
 7 lords, 18 of the richest baronets, and more 
 than 50 of the wealthiest families, members of 
 the Catholic church. And within a few years 
 70 Episcopal clergymen, and 120 of the nobil- 
 ity and gentry have joined them. In 1792 
 there were not 30 chapels in Great Britain ; 
 now there are 616, (800, Dr. Cummings says,) 
 with more than 300,000 attendants, and 875 
 priests. Within seven years sixty of the larg- 
 est churches have been built by them. They 
 had not then one college. Now they have 10.* 
 They have one Quarterly Review, two or three 
 monthlies and one able weekly paper. In Ire- 
 laud the principal high offices of state were in 
 the hands of Catholics. Oxford University 
 education partook so much of the medieval 
 spirit, as to furnish good instruments for de- 
 stroying the work of the Reformation. There 
 was great formality and indifference in the 
 Episcopal ranks that had rejected the " Meth- 
 odism " of Simeon and the Clapham school. 
 So far then as these gentlemen were sincere 
 in attachment to the Protestant principles they 
 professed, they aimed to prevent the Episcopal 
 church from being latitudinarian and worldly. 
 But their remedy was worse than the disease. 
 They substituted traditions of men for the 
 "Word of God ; apostolical succession for minis- 
 terial godliness ; sacramental regeneration for 
 the work of the Holy Spirit ; the visible unity 
 of the church for the spiritual union of free 
 men ; justijfication by ceremonies for justifica- 
 tion by faith. Many of the most intelligent 
 men in England, however, give them no credit 
 for sincerity. The honest Arnold bitterly 
 complained of their want of honesty. Mr. 
 Rose affirms that the movement originated in 
 an anticipation that the established Church 
 was to be separated from the state, and then 
 these clergymen would be denuded of those 
 claims of superiority and of transcendental 
 dignity, which they have never sacrificed, and 
 be placed on a level with the ministers of other 
 denominations. They must, therefore, have 
 something to fall back upon. And they hit 
 upon the assumption that they are the Church, 
 and that all chm*ches or communions, extrinsic 
 to theirs, are heathen men and publicans. So 
 that about twenty years ago they commenced 
 their operations, and conducted them with 
 consummate skill. Three fundamental princi- 
 ples were laid down : the participation of the 
 body and blood of Christ in the Eucharist is a 
 reality ; the mystery of his body and blood has 
 been confided only to the hands of the succes- 
 sors of the Apostles, and their delegates ; since 
 the Apostles, those who derived their succes- 
 sion from them in an unbroken line, by the 
 imposition of the hands of the bishops, are the 
 only priests to give this body and blood unto 
 the people. Dr. Newman saw that their effort 
 to transfer the Nicene Church of the fourth 
 
 t *oH^^i°^ ^^°' ^®^ ^"«3, m. p. 469. Cumminga on Apoc. 
 L 890, (Am. edit.) ' *- o i- 
 
 century to the nineteenth was inadmissible. 
 He therefore resorted to the doctrine of devel- 
 opement, which is directly destructive of the 
 famous claim of Rome to infallibility. By 
 means of tracts, reviews, novels, and poetry, 
 this leaven was spread through England. It 
 has logically resulted, in seventy instances only, 
 in taking its abettors from the ministry of the 
 Episcopal to that of the Roman Church. But 
 the movement has reached its climax, and is 
 silently sinking into the oblivion it merits. 
 
 Our picture will not be complete, without 
 adding to this general view of the Continent, 
 a more specific description of the several 
 States. 
 
 YII. Review of the European States. — 
 § 1. England, Scotland, and Ireland. — Popula- 
 tion (including Guernsey) 28,500,000 (U). — 
 The English Reformation, we have already re- 
 marked, was deeply defective in many respects. 
 The king was made the Pope of England ; all 
 religious interests being put under his control, 
 even to the appointment of all the bishops ; 
 and, to complete the anomalous condition of 
 the church, her bishops became a portion of 
 the civil aristocracy, and members of the gov- 
 ernment. Liberty in matters of conscience 
 was not permitted, on the penalty of an utter 
 exclusion from all civil offices, and from the 
 privileges of the universities. After passing 
 through various phases, the Church of Eng- 
 land is now divided into three parties. They 
 are familiarly denominated the Low, High, 
 and Broad Church. The Low Church takes the 
 Calvinistic view of theArticles ; and is earnest 
 in moral reforms, in promoting spiritual reli- 
 gion, and missions to the heathen. Their or- 
 gan is the Record. The High Church has for 
 its watch-words — Judgment by works ; Bap- 
 tismal regeneration ; Church authority ; and 
 Apostolical succession. The Guardian is its 
 organ. The Broad Church is well represented 
 by the lamented Arnold. It makes much of the 
 visible church ; of symbols ; of the unity of 
 the Church under different names. The fol- 
 lowing classification has been made of the 
 18,000 episcopal clergymen in England : — 
 High Church — Anglican, 3500; Tractarian, 
 1000 ; High and Dry, 2500. Low Church— 
 Evangelical, 3300; Recordite, 2500; Low 
 and Slow, 700. Broad Church — Theoretical, 
 1000 ; Anti-theoretical, 2500. About 1000 of 
 the peasant clergy are to be ranked apart from 
 these. Of the bishops, 13 are High ; 10 Broad ; 
 5 Evangelical. 
 
 To the student of British history, this state 
 of things is encouraging, as it is an evidence 
 of progress. Indeed, the distinguishing feature 
 of all British history is the steady progress ol 
 truth and righteousness, as seen in her Consti- 
 tution, her legislation, and her ecclesiastical 
 history. Britain is moving with a slow, undo 
 viating march, onward toward a brighter age 
 A great principle once secured there, is never 
 lost to the British race, nor to the world. Re- 
 
850 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 forms do not move as ranidly as we desire ; 
 bat they arc advancing. We have seen those 
 two instruments of tyranny — the act of Uni- 
 formity and the Conventicle act, give place to 
 the act of Toleration ; which has been con- 
 tinually maintained inviolate, and even en- 
 larged. It was an immense progress from the 
 days of Laud and Jeffrey to the day when 
 Lord Chathanj, addressing his peers, said, 
 ** The Dissenters arc represented as men of 
 close ambition. They are so, my lords. And 
 their ambition is, to keep close to the college 
 of fishermen, and not of cardinals ; to the doc- 
 trine of inspired apostles, not to the decrees of 
 interested and aspiring bishops. They con- 
 tend for a spiritual creed and a spiritual wor- 
 ship." 
 
 From the days of Magna Charta to the 
 present parliamentary investigation of Oxford 
 affairs, resulting in the admission of dissenters 
 to the University, there has been a steady pro- 
 gress ; while the other European nations have 
 either remained stationary or receded. The 
 dissenters have become more discerning of 
 their rights and more courageous in advocat- 
 ing them. They have also become more pow- 
 erful in the House of Commons, which is the 
 real seat of civil power in the nation. The 
 recent papal maneuvre was premature, and 
 has made England more intelligently anti- 
 papal, more firmly Protestant than she has 
 been of late years. There is also an increase 
 of spirituality in the national and the dissent- 
 ing churches. The renowned universities of 
 the kingdom provide for the ministry a major- 
 ity of its incumbents. The prominent defect 
 of these venerable institutions is their conser- 
 vative lethargy. They do not keep pace with 
 the necessities of society, only as far as it has 
 interests in the past. The present and the 
 future are not to be learned in Oxford or Cam- 
 bridge, as they may be in the colleges of the 
 dissenters. 
 
 CHUECHES AND ATTENDANCE IN ENGLAND, 
 SCOTLAND, AND WALES. 
 
 Denomiaatiotu). 
 
 Churches. 
 
 Episcopal 
 
 Inilependent 
 
 Bapti-st 
 
 Methodist (Wesleyan) . 
 Methodist (Primitive^ . 
 Presbyterian (Englisn) 
 Presbyterian (Scotch) . 
 
 Unitarian 
 
 Lady Huntington Con. 
 Other Evangel, denom. 
 
 Roman Catholic 
 
 .lews 
 
 Quakers 
 
 Mormons 
 
 Undefined 
 
 13,718 
 3,446 
 2,066 
 6,649 
 (12)* 
 83 
 2,528 
 (5) 
 
 1 
 
 Sittings. 
 
 5,847,93.5 
 1,139,478 
 
 576,561 
 1,467,531 
 
 (2,490) 
 
 41,382 
 
 1,750,149 
 
 (2,437) 
 
 (52,776) 
 
 (67) 
 
 (2,152) 
 
 (3,182) 
 
 Attend- 
 ance. 
 
 2,568,310 
 
 818,534 
 
 480,491 
 
 915,722 
 
 620,517 
 
 28,212 
 
 851,584 
 
 37,863 
 
 29,686 
 
 81,000 
 
 349,878 
 
 4,178 
 
 (196) 
 
 (1,304) 
 
 33,304 
 
 * The numbers enclosed in parenthesis belong to Scot- 
 land alone. 
 
 The preceding table presents the results of 
 some recent efforts to ascertain the provisions 
 made in England, Wales and Scotland, for 
 the religious culture of the people, and the 
 actual attendance on divine worship. From 
 these statistics it is manifest that unle.ss the 
 room provided in churches exceeds the num- 
 ber needed, (which is highly improbable,) 
 there is still a sad indifference to God's insti- 
 tutions of grace, even in a country so Chris- 
 tianized as England. Of the 17,297,000 in- 
 habitants of England and Wales, only 6,000,000 
 or about one-third attend worship. So that 
 as many as seven and a half millions either 
 neglect public worship, or attend on the min- 
 istry of error. 
 
 Dr. Cummings, in his able and interesting 
 Lectures on the Apocalypse, has given a fear- 
 ful exhibition of the moral and religious con- 
 dition of London. (Vol. I. p. 382.) He re- 
 marks : " If all the churches and chapels were 
 as full as they could hold, not one-fourth of the 
 population would be within them. There are 
 never in church on one Sunday, in all denomi- 
 nations, more than 200,000 people out of 
 2,000,000. And how many, do you think, of 
 that number are communicants? Startling 
 fact! Awful stain upon the missionary zeal 
 of the metropolis ! There are scarcely 60,000 
 communicants in all the chapels and churches 
 of this vast city put together 1 The steam 
 boats and railways alone carry from the me- 
 tropolis every Sunday morning a greater pop- 
 ulation than are that day in all the chapels 
 and churches together. There are in London 
 12,000 children trained professionally to piclc 
 pockets and plunder houses. There are 10,000 
 gamblers, 20,000 beggars, 30,000 regular 
 thieves, 150,000 habitual gin drinkers, and 
 150,000 of both sexes habitually leading a life 
 of debauchery !" 
 
 In the report of the late imperfect investi- 
 gations of attendance on worship in Scotland 
 it is stated, that on the census day, March 30 
 1851, of the 2,888,742 people in Scotland, onlj 
 943,951 persons attended the fullest, or mornn 
 ing service ; and of these about 46,000 attend- 
 ed on the ministration of error. And there is 
 also a want of provision ; there being in every 
 kind of church only 1,834,805 sittings, and of 
 course many of these remote from the people 
 
 The Catholics have 14 colleges in England 
 and 3 English colleges on the Continent. Ir 
 Great Britain 812 churches, 1126 priests, 101 
 nunneries, &c. 
 
 The Sunday-school is less efficiently sustain- 
 ed in Scotland than in England. There mai 
 be so much more faithful parental instructioi 
 and public religious instruction there, as t( 
 diminish the necessity for this form of religion 
 influence. 
 
 Popery has made progress in Scotland. Ii 
 1831 there were 54 priests ; in 1852 they hat 
 increased to 135 — ^having 100 churches an* 
 chapels, one college, and several schools an* 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 351 
 
 convents. But the most interesting; feature in j 
 the modern history of Scotland is what is there 
 termed " the Disruption." It was a new Pro- 
 test against the usurpation of ecclesiastical 
 power by the state. In 1843 nearly 500 pas- 
 tors, 200 licentiates, and 200 students, followed 
 by a million of the inhabitants, abandoned the 
 State Church in one day, and formed the Free 
 Church. At their annual General Assembly 
 in 1854, they reported $1,347,780 as raised by 
 their churches for the sustentation, building, 
 congregational, missions, education and miscel- 
 laneous funds. They sustain two theological 
 schools, one in Edinburgh and one in Aber- 
 deen. They have about 40 Scottish foreign 
 missionaries, mostly in India, and 57 native 
 missionary assistants. 
 
 On no foreign country do we look with such 
 interest in reference to the world's conversion 
 to holiness, as on Great Britain. Her politi- 
 cal power is ascendant ; her Constitution is 
 liberal ; her national interests are less exposed 
 to the control of demagogues than those of our 
 republic ; her religion is Protestant ; her in- 
 tellectual culture is high ; her colonial posses- 
 sions stretched as a zone of Protestant con- 
 stitutional power around the globe, contain 
 131,000,000 souls. A recent writer justly re- 
 marks : " With all England's defects, it would 
 not be an easy task rightly to estimate the 
 vast instrumentalities which she contains for 
 the moral and spiritual melioration of her 
 own population and the world at large." It 
 requires six weeks to enable the various reli- 
 ious societies to hold their annual meetings 
 iu London. In the city of London millions of 
 dollars are annually expended for the benefit, 
 temporal and spiritual, of the poor and the 
 areless. Its City Mission has become a mag- 
 Qificent instrument of good, solving most satis- 
 factorily the difficult question for London and 
 11 large towns, " What can be done for the 
 oor?" The Young Men's Association is 
 )pening a new prospect to another class, here- 
 ;ofore so neglected. By tracts, lectures, Bible 
 classes, meetings for prayer, conference meet- 
 figs and libraries immeasurable good has been 
 one. Similar organizations are now spread- 
 ng throughout the kingdom, and introduced 
 nto Germany, Holland, France, Switzerland, 
 md Sardinia. 
 
 In regard to Ireland, we may be sure that 
 he Roman Church has lost great numbers by 
 amine, emigration and conversion within six 
 rears. The estimates vary from half a million 
 » two millions. Many who remain in the 
 ioman Church have at heart renounced its 
 srrors. All the Protestant bodies in Ireland 
 we actively engaged in opening the eyes of 
 heir blinded countrymen. In 1841 half the 
 Jrish natives had houses of only one room, 
 hree-fourths of these being made of mud. 
 PwQ-thirds of them lived on the potato ; one- 
 hird were without any employment ; ono- 
 aghth were beggars ; one-half neither wrote 
 
 nor rcad.^' Thq Protestants numbered in 1834 
 1,517,228 ; the Catholics, at the same time, 
 6,427,712. So that Ireland was eminently a 
 Catholic country, and a specimen of what the 
 Roman Church does to elevate and bless a 
 people. The Irish Society has 667 schools, con- 
 taining 29,000 pupils and 250 laborers. The 
 Irish Evangelical Society has 20 missionaries, 
 and 30 readers. One Methodist Society has 
 400 stations. The Irish Church Mission has 
 425 agents in the field, and the industrial 
 schools are working very successfully. The 
 Catholics have 21 colleges in Ireland, one mis- 
 sionary seminary and three high schools, be- 
 sides two colleges for the Irish on the continent. 
 
 g 2. iio//anrf.— Population, 3,208,400. (U.) 
 Holland must be had in grateful remembrance 
 for its brave defence of the Gospel in the sev- 
 enteenth century, and for furnishing a Protest- 
 ant sovereign to England, as well as a refuge 
 to our persecuted Puritan fathers. An enu- 
 meration of the sects has been made by a 
 learned Hollander, which, if designed to pre- 
 sent the whole population under these religious 
 divisions, would make the number some 
 204,000 less than Ungewetter states it. His 
 enumeration is, 9,000 separate Lutherans, 
 54,000 Lutherans, 38,000 Baptists, 58,000 
 Jews, 5,000 Armenians, 1,670,000 Dutch Re- 
 formed, 1,170,000 Catholics, of whom 5500 are 
 Jansenists. 
 
 An utter declension in religion had taken 
 place after the close of the last century. Libe- 
 ralism and Neology occupied the chairs of the 
 three universities, Leyden, Groningen, and 
 Utretcht. There was a conservative Dort 
 orthodox party ; and the young, liberal party, 
 equally dead, though differing in doctrine. 
 The Lord then raised up the great poet Bil- 
 derdyk, by whose energetic exhibitions of the 
 Gospel two learned young Jews were converted. 
 Da Costa, a barrister, and Cappadoce, a physi- 
 cian. In 1834, 80,000 persons separated from 
 the national church, and organized a " true re- 
 formed church." They have encountered great 
 difficulties from persecution, and from " false 
 brethren." The Groningen party professed 
 great attachment to the person of Christ ; and 
 exalted love above doctrine. But it turned out 
 in the end that their Christ was a mere man, 
 a divine man, but not Jehovah Jesus.- The 
 friends of pure religion are, moreover, not 
 agreed about the means of reviving religion. 
 One party look to the restoration of the I)ort 
 Constitution ; at the head of them stands Mr. 
 Van Prinsterer, Secret Counsellor of State. 
 The others resort to colportage, private mis- 
 sions, and social meetings, to revive the spirit 
 of the Church, and lead men to Christ. There 
 has been a struggle on the question of religion 
 in the public schools. The evangelical party 
 has triumphed. The mission to the colony in 
 Java is prosperous. Missionary tradesmen are 
 
 * Di". Edgar's statement in E. C. VI. p. 305. 
 
352 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 sent out, and important resalts are traced to 
 the measure. 
 
 53. 5crt/u/i/wt;ia.— Population, 6,965,000. 
 (U.) In Sweden the civil and relij?ious con- 
 aitions of the citizens are confounded together. 
 Every Swede must receive baptism, and com- 
 mune in the established Church, to retain citi- 
 zenship. No subject is allowed to change his 
 religion. A Protestant may not become a 
 Catlioiic; nor a Baptist a Pedo-baptist, «fec. 
 Laymen are not permitted to preside in reli- 
 gious meetings ; and all conventicles are for- 
 bidden. In fact Sweden has retained the in- 
 tolerant spirit longer than any other Protest- 
 ant country in the world. Of the 1800 Lu- 
 theran clergymen, it is supposed one-tenth may 
 be truly spiritual men ; and the number of such 
 is increasing. The Danes are among the most 
 highly civilized people in Europe ; but the 
 higher classes in the church are very worldly. 
 The clergy are well educated ; the Danish at 
 Copenhagen ; the German, some at Kiel, where 
 the professors are sound in the faith, and some 
 in the German universities. The government 
 has long sustained missions to the heathen ; but 
 the missionary spirit has much declined in the 
 national church. There is no home missionary 
 institution. Toleration is complete, although 
 the clergy are very jealous of any movements 
 which threaten to disturb the general apathy. 
 Bibles and tracts are circulated to some extent 
 by the native and foreign societies. Denmark 
 has small colonies in Asia, Africa, and America, 
 containing about 110,000 souls. The Lap- 
 landers are about 5000, very low in their phy- 
 sical and moral life. The Swedish mission 
 among them is quite prosperous, having en- 
 joyed a revival of great interest in 1851, under 
 the labors of the zealous Teelstrom. The re- 
 vival in Sweden was promoted both by preach- 
 ing and books. And an intelligent observer 
 remarks, that the converts made through read- 
 ing are lietter instructed than those converted 
 by preaching, but are narrower in their views. 
 The revival was most powerful at a distance 
 from the capital, and yet it extended to the 
 students of theology in the University of Up- 
 sala. 
 
 ^ 4. J?e/gm7w.— Population, 4,350,500 (U.), 
 of which 4,304,000 are Roman Catholics, 
 16,000 Protestants, 30,000 Jews. (E. C, IIL 
 234.) By a happy combination of skill and 
 firmness the politicians availed themselves of 
 the zeal of the Roman clergy in 1830, to throw 
 off the Protestant yoke of Holland, and secured 
 a Constitution guaranteeing complete religious 
 toleration. An efficient missionary society, 
 established at Brussels, is laboring earnestly, 
 but with too little sympathy and support from 
 foreign churches, to extend the kingdom of 
 Christ among that people, once so blindlj' sub- 
 missive to the Papal yoke. There are 7 Eng- 
 lish Episcopal churches ; 8 Union Evangelical 
 churches ; 12 Protestant French churches, and 
 15 churches of converted Catholics. 
 
 § 5. Fmncg.— Population, 35,401 ,000. (U.) 
 France is one of the ^cat historical nations. 
 Its life embodies principles of profound impor- 
 tance, and presents features altogether ])eculiar. 
 Its political position is at least second in Eu- 
 rope. Its social and intellectual power is 
 great, and its colonial possessions contain 
 4,060,000 inhabitants. But we are now spe- 
 cially interested in the history of religion in 
 France. And there is no church whose annals 
 make a stronger appeal to the sympathies of 
 the universal church than those of the Hugue- 
 nots. Piedmont, Scotland, and France are 
 made sacred by the toils and blood of men of 
 whom the world was not worthy. The French 
 mind is in a peculiar state, differing from that 
 of any other Roman Catholic country. In 
 Germany the privilege of intellectual specu- 
 lation and research, and an unobstructed exer- 
 cise of the social feelings is generally an abun- 
 dant compensation for any privation of a par- 
 ticipation in questions of policy, and of any 
 share in governing society. The Spanish type 
 of civilization and society is worn out, as com- 
 pletely as are those of ancient Egypt, Greece, 
 or Rome. In modern Italy this is true also, to 
 a great extent. But in France there are yet 
 vast intellectual resources, as fertile a vein, 
 perhaps, as in the Anglo-Norman race, and far 
 more social, propagandist, and missionary in 
 its tendencies. Ranke observes that '• the 
 French have ever attentively meditated the 
 great problems of the churcn and the state, 
 and communicated them to all other nations, 
 with that talent of expression which is peculiar 
 to them." France is the most important mis- 
 sionary country for the Roman Church. Of 
 three hundred foreign missionaries she employs, 
 more than half are Frenchmen. But the pre- 
 sent state of the French mind in regard to all 
 the higher interests of man and society is dis- 
 couraging. They accept an absolute, one-will 
 government, because just now they are in a 
 period of painful waiting, perhaps transition. 
 They accept the Emperor and absolute autho- 
 rity as an iron band around society, painful in 
 its pressure, but indispensable to hold together : 
 its' heterogeneous and conflicting elements.' 
 Perhaps many of the best of her people are dis- 
 couraged, regarding themselves as in the posi-J 
 tion of Rome when liberty had perished in heij 
 streets. But we know that Christ, who by hu\ 
 word and his Church penetrated that decaying 
 mass, can introduce the leaven of life into un 
 happy France. She must see that the Romai 
 type of Christianity is as much worn out a 
 was the Roman type of civilization. There i 
 outside of Romanism, and proscribed by th; 
 Latin Church, a pure Christianity, the SiMSi 
 which regenerated Roman Gaul; and it i3^ 
 now regenerate Christian Roman France 
 (Rev. Chret. Introd. LI.) 
 
 The Revolution had overthrown Romauisc- 
 and Christianity together ; for the French peo 
 pie had believed that they were identical. Bu^ 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 353 
 
 a returning religious feeling manifested itself 
 in Catholics, Protestants, and Jews. And 
 while Napoleon in the Concordate* of 1801 
 placed the Roman Church on a new footing, 
 the three religious systems were placed at the 
 same time on the same level before the law, 
 and a theological school for French Protestants 
 at Montauban was adopted by the government, 
 as also a German theological school in Alsace, 
 for the German Lutheran population of that 
 portion of France. So that the government 
 supports 507 Presbyterian pastors, 249 Luther- 
 an, and 114 Jewish teachers. There are 956 
 Protestant churches under the care of the gov-, 
 ernment, of which 660 are French, 296 Ger- 
 man, costing ^250,000, about equally divided 
 between the evangelical and rationalist clergy. 
 The Roman Church has 15 Archbishops, 65 
 Bishops, 175 Vicegerents, 661 Canons, 3,388 
 Cures, 29,537 incumbents of chapels of ease, 
 6 Chaplains of cemeteries, 7,190 Yicars, making 
 a total of 41,037, costing the government less 
 than before the Revolution, but still an enor- 
 mous sum. Before the Revolution the reve- 
 nue of the Catholic clergy in France was 
 130,000,000. It is now about $20,000,000, 
 not derived from direct tax, but from the pub- 
 lic treasury. Neither instruction, eloquence, 
 or piety is to be witnessed in many of this vast 
 body of successors to Fenelon, Massilon, Bos- 
 suet, and Bridaine. 
 
 More than forty societies are laboring to 
 give the Gospel to France. Although the 
 government favors the priesthood, yet it is 
 jealous of them, and will not come under their 
 control. There are unmistakable marks of 
 the wane of Romanism in France. The vio- 
 lent measures of the Revolution would natu- 
 rally cause a reaction. But now the minds of 
 men are receiving light gradually and health- 
 fully. We see marks of the waning power of 
 the Roman Church in the contest between the 
 Archbishop of Paris and a lay-editor, in which 
 the Pope gives his verdict against an arch- 
 bishop in favor of a layman. This weakens 
 the clerical arm. We see it also in her failure 
 to secure a change in the marriage law, and 
 in the change of feeling towards the clergy. 
 From 1830 to 1840, honest men looked to 
 them as a barrier against socialism. But it is 
 now seen that their love of liberty was hypo- 
 critical. And when the people get the power 
 again, there will probably be no door of 
 return, perhaps of escape, for the priests. 
 
 f 6. Switzerland.— FoipnMioTi, 2,424,400. 
 Of these, 971,820 are Roman Ca1:holics ; 
 1,417,474 Protestants ; 3,146 Jews. The thir- 
 teen republics constitute one confederation. 
 The Reformation left that country divided on 
 the great religious question. The two com- 
 munions, however, lived in amity until Carlo 
 Borromeo arose, who, though only an arch- 
 
 , • The Concordatfis are conventiona between the Pope 
 I and secular sovereigns. 
 
 23 
 
 bishop, governed the Roman world. He in- 
 vaded Switzerland, by founding a Swiss col- 
 lege at Milan, opening for the Swiss the Ger- 
 man college at Rome, in which they were the 
 most numerous ; for, while 21 of the pupils 
 were Hanoverian, 25 Prussian, and 40 Bava- 
 rian, 48 were Swiss. He likewise sent the 
 Jesuits to Switzerland, who established them- 
 selves at Lucerne and Fribourg. He also 
 procured that a nuncio should be sent from 
 Rome to reside among them. Th&se efforts 
 succeeded in alienating the Catholic Swiss 
 from their Protestant fellow-citizens ; and 
 " thus was gained to the Holy See the proud 
 and free country of primitive Switzerland, its 
 nationality sacrificed, the gates of the A^s 
 opened to the powerful house of Spain." 
 {Prof. Vulliemin, of Lausanne, vide E. C, v. p. 
 358.) About the time of Napoleon's abdica- 
 tion, three facts signalized the reappearance 
 of the Pope in Switzerland : the inscription 
 of an article in a new federal pact, conse- 
 crating the inviolability of the property of the 
 convents ; the organization of the episcopal 
 circumspection, in favor of Rome ; and the 
 return of the Jesuits. The ultimate result of 
 this was, that the Jesuits became insufferable, 
 and the Sunderbund was organized, which tri- 
 umphed over them. The political organization 
 of the country was then changed ; and the 
 confederation of states became one state. 
 This threw the political power into the hands 
 of the majority, who are Protestant. The 
 Jesuits were expelled ; liberty of worship was 
 guaranteed every where ; ultramontane gov- 
 ernments were overthrown ; and convent pro- 
 perty was confiscated. Five Roman Catholic 
 cantons then met together, and voted to main- 
 tain their entire sovereignty. They are now 
 patiently and confidently awaiting the day 
 when their church will again be ascendant. 
 
 The policy of the powerful European gov- 
 ernments has placed this little mountainous 
 territory out of the great whirlpool of the 
 " balance of power " system. Or, we should 
 rather go back to a higher purpose, and admire 
 the goodness of God in guaranteeing to that 
 people their civil rights, although surrounded 
 by ambitious and grasping potentates. But 
 the infidel democracy which expelled the 
 Jesuits, has been to the cantons De Yaud and 
 Neufchatel as great a scourge as a pope or an 
 emperor would have been. They threw off 
 the bands of the Jesuit, only to play the 
 tyrant themselves. 
 
 Geneva and Yaud are recovering some of 
 the spirit of the Reformation ; and the theo- 
 logical schools of Lausanne and Geneva have 
 furnished a race of well-qualified ministers for 
 their churches, and for the foreign service. A 
 band of faithful disciples at Geneva have taken 
 advantage of their central position, and la- 
 bored with great success to disseminate the 
 truth in France and in Italy. The free church 
 of the Canton of Yaud has passed through a 
 
854 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 fiery furnace ; but the arm of the Lord is with 
 bin people, 
 
 ^1. Itaty. Population, 24.573,100. (U.) 
 The triiveler from the new world to Rome and 
 Naples is forced to exclaim : " Italy, land 
 of boauty ; home of art, of priesfc», and of beg- 
 gars ! " (iod ha"? bkvssed it with his gifts ; 
 man has cursed it with hypocrisy and tyranny. 
 In the Roman States there is one priest to 
 every 51 persons ; which, together with 1,400 
 receptacles of indolence and fanaticism, called 
 moniisteries and nunneries, consume the moral 
 and financial strength of the country. Until 
 recently, it hivs been difficult to make the light 
 penetrate any section of this spiritually be- 
 oighted part of Europe. But great changes 
 have taken place within seven years. Large 
 numbers of Bibles have been distributed ; 
 many conversions have taken place ; and faith- 
 ful Italian preachers are proclaiming the pure 
 Gospel of Christ to their countrymen. 
 
 Sardinia has now become the object of pe- 
 culiar interest to the friends of religion and 
 religious liberty. The sovereign, though a 
 Roman Catholic, is following out the liberal 
 policy of his father and predecessor ; and thus, 
 both"^the Waldenses are freed from the yoke, 
 which, for centuries, has oppressed, if not dis- 
 couraged them, and the field is open for the 
 cultivation of every one who wishes to enter 
 it. The Waldenses number 23,000 ; with 16 
 pastors, and 3 Italian missionaries, recently 
 ordained for the Roman Catholic people. 
 Their college has 8 professors and 84 students. 
 They have a religious newspaper, Buona 
 Novella, and an anti-papal secular paper. 
 La Gazetta del Popolo. 
 
 There are in Italy four religious parties that 
 seriously threaten popery : the Giobertists, 
 the Infidel Catholico-politicians, the Socialist- 
 Pantheists, the Evangelicals. The Giobertists 
 are followers of the distinguished priest who 
 served the King of Sardinia as prime minister. 
 Piedmont is the stronghold of his followers, 
 who still believe that the Roman Church can 
 be brought to the pure belief and practice of 
 Christianity. The followers of Gioviui declare 
 themselves Catholics, but are really infidels. 
 They cling to religious expressions only to de- 
 ceive the people. The followers of Ansonio 
 Franchi are Socialists and Pantheists. The 
 fourth party includes the Waldenses. 
 
 § 8. Germany. — Population : Austria 12,-. 
 700,000 ; Prussia, 12,200,000 ; German States', 
 17,100,000; total, 42,000,000 (U.)* Of these 
 more than 20,000,000 are Roman Catholic ; 
 
 many millions belong to the Greek Church j 
 and 18,000,000 are of the various Prot( ' '. 
 churches; with less than 1,000,000 
 There are thirty-four sovereign states in i.^.- 
 many, each having its own church, ecclesiasti- 
 cal constitution, and liturgy. The clcrtrv of 
 one state are often not recognized in au' 
 Austria is the most heterogeneous in its 
 ture, having a population of 18,000,0()n 
 eluding Lombardy and Venice,) imnic ■ ly 
 varied in race, language, and religion. More 
 than ten millions are Germans ; about eighteen 
 millions of the Sclavonic tribes; five millions 
 Italians ; four millions Magyars ; and less i ; in 
 a million Jews. 
 
 The best thing that distinguishes any < ' 
 German states is popular education. In I lu^- 
 sia 77 per cent, of the children between the 
 ages of 6 and 14, or more than 15 per cent, of 
 the people, are in the public schools ; while in 
 England and Wales only 11 1-2 per cent, ar^ 
 in them. Protestants and Catholics being so 
 nearly equal in numbers, intolerance is not 
 carried so far as in the purely Catholic coun- 
 tries, or as in Sweden. Austria is compelled 
 even to support Protestant interests. The 
 government supports a Protestant Theolo^'-ical 
 Seminary in Vienna; but one of the cxiuiiio- 
 ers of every candidate for the ministry is a 
 Catholic. In Vienna are three Protestant 
 pastors over 20,000 souls. There are in Up 
 per Austria twelve Protestant congregations 
 containing upwards of 16,000 members. But 
 the Protestant portion of Hungary has felt 
 the rigor of Austrian bigotry. In a popula 
 tion of nearly 13,000,000 (E. C, V. 494) 
 nearly 3,000,000 are Protest^ts; but the^ 
 are kept in most degrading and painful sub 
 jection. No feature of the German churches 
 however, has so mych affected the Christian 
 of other nations as their sad declension froE 
 the simple and fervent faith which charn -t' i 
 ized the period of the Reformation, to th( > 
 phemous neology and rationalism of tin . 
 fifty years. That people seem literally to ,\ 
 undertaken to find God, a Saviour, and s a \i 
 tion in their own personal existence and coi 
 sciousness. When the venerable Krummachi 
 was called on to describe the infidelity of h 
 country, he commenced by remarking : " 
 feel as if I had to describe a new fall of man 
 He -traces the declension (E. C, V. 328), bac 
 to the very age after Luther's death. Fp 
 malism and an intellectual apprehension of ^ 
 Gospel were substituted for the life and earneg 
 ness 0^ the first period. Discipline also d 
 
 * Dr. Marriott (E. C, I., TV., V.) makes a widely dijlerent eatimate from this 
 ance witU tlie Gothaisches Taschenbuchr) : 
 
 Catholics . Greeks. Protestants. 
 
 Austria (without Lombardy) 11,113,642 3,178 244,538 
 
 Prussia 5,820,123 1,879 9,428,911 
 
 Other States 5,732,359 127 14,180,624 
 
 He reports (and in closer accoi 
 
 Jews. 
 110,044 
 206,529 
 238,296 
 
 Add Ixmbardy and Venice. 
 
 Total. 
 11,471,402 
 15,457,442 
 20,151,305 
 
 47,080,149 
 . 5,068,000 
 
 62,148,149 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 355 
 
 clined ; and when John Arndt appeared and 
 preached the necessity of regeneration, he was 
 reproached as a fanatic. The same experience 
 Speuer had, a century later. Then the " Pie- 
 tists " themselves prepared the way of the ap- 
 proaching apostasy by their opposition to doc- 
 trine. Naturalism was imported from Eng- 
 land, and Deism from France, and both found 
 a ready soil in hearts declined from God. 
 Frederic the Great contributed mightily to 
 the spread of infidelity. Kant, in a measure, 
 checked the destructive tide, though he left a 
 heathen philosophy as his legacy to his poor 
 country. Fichte and Schelling began the 
 work of philosophical reverence for the dog- 
 mas of Scripture and church theology. The 
 overthrow of Napoleon touched the heart of 
 the oppressed German nations, and they began 
 to return to the God of their fathers. Still, 
 indifference, rationalism, and radicalism great- 
 ly prevail. In Berlin, out of 400,000 persons, 
 not more than 20,000 visit the house of God. 
 " A literature diabolically insipid, and sneak- 
 ing about in darkness, does not cease to nurse 
 and fructify these principles (of scepticism.) 
 Little more is necessary than that a mighty 
 and gifted personality should appear, who 
 should set himself up as the centre of infidel- 
 ity, and represent it with energetic pathos and 
 strong decision, and the reign of ' the Man of 
 Sin ' would be among us in more than a state 
 of embryo." The artizan clubs have given 
 most favorable opportunities for spreading 
 atheism among the working classes. In the 
 smaller Saxon Principalities, the consistories 
 are rationalistic ; while in Baden, Ehenish Ba- 
 *^aria, and Hesse Darmstadt they are of the 
 'msser aller school. It is said that in these 
 countries there are ten unbelievers in the min- 
 stry to one believer. There are towns in 
 Rhenish Bavaria where not more than ten or 
 ;wenty persons are found in church on Sunday 
 norning, and where not a single individual is 
 bund to attend the sacrament on the great fes- 
 ival days. (E. 0., III. 362.) Many of the 
 iniversities and gymnasia are yet wholly rar 
 ioualistic. But there are brighter features in 
 he picture. There i.s a manifest returning 
 rom this apostasy. The evangelical portion 
 >f the church is laboring in many ways, and 
 rith the most encouraging success, to restore 
 k pure faith to the land of the Keformation. 
 liuch has been done, and systematically too, 
 n some of the universities, to arrest the pro- 
 gress of rationalism, by literary efforts, and 
 ikewise for the advancement of practical god- 
 inesa. The Inner Mission is doing an excel- 
 ent work in Eastern Prussia, Pomerania, Ber- 
 'n, Silesia, Saxony, Hamburg, «fec. It is of 
 ecent date that German Christians should 
 end out missionaries to the poor, and to pro- 
 Qote the observance of the Sabbath. In 
 _ ermansjjurg, Hanover, there is a college for 
 lome Missionaries, and a very efficient pastor 
 3 over the church there In fact, an Ameri- 
 
 can, for some time resident there, observes : 
 " In general, the cause of evangelical piety is 
 steadily advancing in Germany ; and the re- 
 turn of that great nation to the principles of 
 the Reformation can be safely predicted. The 
 change from the state of things twenty-five 
 years ago, when rationalism reigned, to the 
 present state, is wonderful." 
 
 § 9. jRussza.— Population, 62,000,000 (U.) 
 Of these we may conjecturally make the fol- 
 lowing distributions : Greek Church, 50,650,- 
 000 ; Catholics (Roman and Armenian), 2,190,- 
 000 ; Protestants, 3,770,000 ; Mohammedans. 
 2,262,000 ; Jews, 1,138,000 ; Armenians, 640,- 
 000; Pagans, 750,000. The Greek Church 
 resembles the Church of Rome in ceremonial 
 rites ; but holds in common with her only 
 those opinions which they held alike previ- 
 ously to the Nicene Council. The Greek 
 Church accords more nearly with the Protest- 
 ant on these points : the source of all religious 
 doctrine ; the corruption of human nature ; 
 the Mediator ; divine grace ; the sacraments ; 
 the church ; and the future state. This may 
 be seen more fully drawn out in Dr. Pinker- 
 ton's work on Russia, in his translation of a 
 work by Philaret, Archimandite, written in 
 1815 to counteract the influence of the Jesuits 
 over the Russian nobility. There is much 
 ignorance and superstition. It is true, as Dr. 
 Pinkerton remarks : " A church in which the 
 people are permitted to read the Scriptures in 
 a language which they understand, and which 
 acknowledges this Word as the highest tribu- 
 nal in matters of faith, is still possessed of the 
 best reformer of all superstition." Yet our 
 missionaries thus far have found the Greeks 
 more impenetrable than the Catholics. The 
 Czar is the head of the national church, which 
 accordingly has no patriarch. And the pres- 
 ent sovereign has acted up to his convictions 
 of the duties of his office in prosecuting the 
 work of proselytizing with great activity. The 
 Gazette of St. Petersburg at one time boasted 
 of 45,000 Protestants brought over to the Na- 
 tional Church in one year. These labors have 
 been put forth chiefly in the Baltic provinces, 
 and in a way not very creditable to a mighty 
 sovereign. All religions are tolerated ; but 
 no one may proselyte from the Greek Church. 
 An able writer has divided the sects into three 
 classes, one of which includes native dissenters 
 of a very remarkable stamp. They are the 
 most active and spiritual Christians in the 
 empire, probably amounting to two million 
 souls. They may not always keep within due 
 limits, but they are a kind of unlearned Puri- 
 tans in the dead Greek Church. They are 
 called Molakai. In another class appear some 
 of the most deluded fanatics ; even rivaling 
 in fierceness the pagans of India. Some 
 of them are called self-mutilators ; others, 
 self-immolators. Of the latter, as many as one 
 hundred have burned themselves to death to- 
 gether. 
 
I 
 
 856 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 On the 23(1 of Jannarv, 1813, the Bussian 
 Bible Society was formed, by permission of tlie 
 Emperor Alexander. Great zeal was mani 
 festcd, and in a few years, more than 800,000 
 cojiit's of the Scriptures, in whole or in part, 
 were distributed. An anecdote is told, show 
 ing how this zeal reached the humbler classes 
 A chimney-sweeper presented himself at a 
 meeting of the society to make his subscrip- 
 tion. Every person was surprised at his appear- 
 ing there for that object, and still more so when 
 he set down his name for seven dollars. The 
 Secretary delicately remonstrated against his 
 subscribing so much. He replied : "I intend 
 to subscribe this sum yearly. And if I might 
 ask a favor of the society, I should like to have 
 the honor of sweeping the chimneys of the 
 Bible House for nothing." Affected to tears 
 by the scene, says the narrator, they granted 
 his request. The house, being a present from 
 the Emperor, was very large ; so that the 
 sweeper's donation really amounted to nearly 
 thirty dollars. The clergy extensively shared 
 this 'zeal. But Nicholas, whose policy is to 
 make the Christian idea subordinate to the 
 Russian, in 1820 ordered the suppression of 
 the whole movement. There is still, however, 
 some circulation of the Scriptures in Finland 
 and the Baltic provinces, and among the exiles 
 as they are leaving Moscow to go to Siberia. 
 And it is an interesting fact for a Protestant 
 to record, that Dr. Haas, chairman of the 
 prison discipline committee of Moscow, takes 
 a lively interest in supplying the exiles and 
 prisoners with the New Testament ; and he is 
 A Roman Catholic. In 1812 the Princess So- 
 phia Meschessky translated an English tract, 
 " an address to the afflicted." This was pecu- 
 liarly appropriate to the circumstances of the 
 nation ; the French just then retreating from 
 Moscow. She distributed it among the ruined 
 and scattered inhabitants of that city. The 
 favorable reception it met encouraged her to 
 contmue her labors ; and she had written or 
 translated, and published at least one hundred 
 different tracts, when the Emperor Alexander 
 came to her help. The work then expanded ; 
 and it has gone forward with little interniption, 
 covering an immense field with the seeds of a 
 glorious harvest. There is a censorship that 
 extends to every tract published. But it seems 
 to be candid and liberal. The Russian news- 
 papers often speak in high commendation of 
 the tracts. A peculiarly favorable opportu- 
 nity for the sale of evangelical books occurs at 
 the annual fair of Nizney Novogorod. Here 
 arc to be met representatives from China, 
 India, Tartary, Bucharia, Persia, Turkey, 
 Greece, Italy, France, Germany, and England. 
 An American merchant disposed, at one fair, 
 of 150,000 tracts and books. The Siberian 
 exiles, on departing from Moscow, likewise re- 
 ceive them. 
 
 ^10. Spain and Portugal. — Population. — 
 Spain, 12,000,000 ; Portugal, 3,725,000 (U.) 
 
 This people are almost universally within the 
 pale of the Roman Church ; though the edu- 
 cated class, as in other Catholic countries, if 
 almost, without exception, infidel. There r«^ 
 main out of the Church in Spain, some 500,0(' 
 basques, 60,000 Moors, and 45,000 gipsies. (IJ ■, 
 Toleration by the governments is complete fui 
 foreigners, so far as their own worship is con 
 cerned. But the law was evidently constru( 
 ed on the presumption that no native won 
 ever desire to abandon the Catholic forms, ann 
 then the influence of the clergy is so powerful 
 as to greatly obstruct the action of evangeli- 
 cal missions. Spain can be approached on 
 the side of France, and from Gibraltar. The 
 faithful church at Nismes has organized a mis- 
 sion for the French Protestants in Spain, and 
 conducted it with encouraging success. A 
 Protestant pastor is about to be settled over 
 the little French church in Barcelona. Be- 
 sides the evangelical school at Gibraltar, con- 
 taining 330 children and 89 adults, the Rev. 
 Mr. Rule, a Wesleyan missionary, believes that 
 missions could be established in Madrid, Ca- 
 diz, and other large towns. And it certainly 
 was a large concession for a Catholic magis- 
 tracy in Spain to grant the Protestants of 
 Madrid permission to purchase a cemetery for 
 their dead, and conduct the funeral ceremonies 
 in their own way. 
 
 In Portugal there is less hindrance to cvaii 
 gelical labor than in Spain ; there being iv 
 other hindrance to introducing the Scrij^turc. 
 than a heavy duty. Protestant worship is al 
 lowed, if the place of worship does not assum- 
 the appearance of one. Gomez, who was one 
 a Spanish priest, converted and naturalized ai 
 a Portuguese subject, is a faithful laborer i; 
 Lisbon. He reported, in 1849, as many a| 
 four thousand enlightened by his labon' 
 Among these were several priests, but wh' 
 dared not avow the change openly. The iumi 
 ranee of the people is deplorable. In all Vo 
 tugal only 31,280 pupils in their schools, an 
 the splendid University of Salamanca, om 
 the glory of Spain, has utterly declined fro; 
 the position it held in the sixteenth centur 
 The feeble government of Spain yet holt 
 sway over nearly 5,000,000 colonists in Afric 
 America, the Philippine and Ladrone islam 
 
 1 11. Greece and the Ionian Isles. — Popul 
 tion 1,220,000. The educated Greeks are iu 
 dels ; the people generally ignorant and sup, 
 stitious. There seems to be no improveme 
 in the Church ; but the literary men are ma 
 ing most praise-worthy efforts to restore t 
 former intellectual glory of their country: a 
 their success in restoring the classic as a sr 
 stitute for the modern language, is very 
 markablc. The labors of our missionaries f 
 described under the article Greece. Perhfj 
 we may see one fruit of them in the rec< 
 work of Professor Pharmakides, Professor?j| 
 Theology in the University of Athens, 
 has written a book in answer to aBecrwl 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 357 
 
 the Ohurch of Constantinople, which aflects to 
 n;*!vcrn Greece ecclesiastically.* The mother 
 church censured the church in Greece for as- 
 serting her independence. The professor re- 
 plied to it, but in replying, he has attacked 
 tlu' history, doctrines and rites of his church, 
 ill a most efficient manner. Greece has taken 
 a high educational position since the recovery 
 of her political independence. In the capital 
 of each of her twelve states is planted a college 
 (three in Athens), a high school and a com- 
 mon school. In every country town is a high 
 and a common school. In every village of 
 400 houses is a common school, which is at- 
 tended from September to April ; and the 
 Minister of Instruction has issued an order 
 requiring all common school-masters to hold 
 a school on Sunday, for instruction in the 
 Scriptures. 
 
 George Rijari, a wealthy Greek merchant, 
 bequeathed a large portion of his property 
 for the founding a theological school in Athens, 
 which furnishes a very good five years' course 
 to the candidates for the priesthood. The uni- 
 versity of Otho has advanced greatly in the 
 numbers of pupils, having, in 1839, 52 ; in 
 1853, 590. There are but few avowed dis- 
 senters in Greece. The Protestants are gene- 
 rally foreigners. Of these, about one hundred 
 are Lutherans, who attend worship with the 
 (jueen, in the palace. The chapel in the palace 
 is used by both the king and the queen, alter- 
 nately for Roman Catholic and for Lutheran 
 worship. The English Episcopalians have a 
 chapel, with a few worshipers, for the most 
 part English and Americans, connected with 
 the British embassy and the American episco- 
 pal mission. The Baptists have met with little 
 success. There are many Catholics in the 
 island of Syra, Tenos and Naxas. They have 
 a small church in Athens, and are building 
 another quite large. They have also a church 
 at the Piraeus, and several at the islands. The 
 missionaries stationed in Greece are two Bap- 
 tists and one Congregational, one Episcopalian 
 from America, one English Episcopalian, and 
 everal Roman Catholics. The results of the 
 Roman Catholic missionary labors are, a mul- 
 tiplication of little crosses, beads, and wonder- 
 STorking medals of the Virgin Mary ; devotion 
 to her ; subjection to the Pope of Rome ; re- 
 jection of the Word of God ; the prohibition 
 of independent thought and investigation. 
 Two daughters of the Rev. Mr. S., for a long 
 time agent of the British Bible Society, have 
 gone to the Roman church, and refuse to read 
 the Book their father labored to circulate, and 
 are now in a nunnery in Syra, and treat their 
 mother in a manner to be justified only by 
 those who say, that if a man say to his father 
 
 « Tlie Patriarch of Constantinople is chief of the synod, 
 embracing Turkey, Austria, and the Ionian Isles. Independ- 
 ent Greece has tliree hishops, independent of the Patriarch 
 ot Constantinople, yet they acknowledge his supremacy in 
 matters of faith. <= f j 
 
 or mother, " Corban," he is free. (Mark vii. 
 11, 12.) 
 
 The labors of the Episcopal mission in 
 Athens ana Syra have been directed chiefly to 
 the establishment of schools and the instruc- 
 tion of children. The American Episcopal 
 missionaries have disclaimed all intention to 
 draw any one from the Greek church, and a 
 large portion of those whom they have in- 
 structed are devoted to the Greek church, and 
 conform to all its ceremonies. They have all 
 employed the New Testament in their schools, 
 and this, it is to be hoped, Avill produce some 
 salutary effect. 
 
 The Greeks are proverbially deceitful, and 
 some of the professed converts have betrayed 
 their unworthy motives. " Of those," says Mr. 
 King, "who have come to me at various 
 times, and professed to believe the doctrines I 
 preach, and offered to become, as they said, 
 my followers, while some were intelligent and 
 sincere, many were deceived, and many deceiv- 
 ing." The labors of the missionary formerly 
 employed at Mani, by the American Board 
 of Foreign Missions, produced very happy re- 
 sults. Some hundred young men, who were 
 taught in the missionary schools there, now 
 hold important stations, civil or military. And 
 many who were taught, more or less in the 
 schools, under the care of Mr. King, in Athens, 
 hold important stations under the Greek gov- 
 ernment. Several are teachers of Hellenic 
 schools ; some are military officers ; one is at 
 the head of a gymnasium ; some are in situa- 
 tions in which they can exert an influence fa- 
 vorable to religious liberty. The sacred Scrip- 
 tures have been introduced into all the schools 
 of Greece, and among the common people, 
 and thousands have heard the truth, who, but 
 for the missionaries, would never have heard 
 it. A great degree of religious liberty has 
 been secured. 
 
 § 12. Turkey (European). — Population, 
 12,500,000 (U.) ; 12,080,000 (D.*) : asfollows : 
 
 Mohammedan Osmanlees 700,000 
 
 " Albanians & Sclavonians 3,000,000 
 
 Greeks, true Hellenic 1,180,000 
 
 ''davirnT&S!:^!'..'!^\"}«'l^«'««« 
 
 7,330,000 
 
 Native Roman Catholics and Europeans 550,000 
 
 Armenians 100,000 
 
 Jews 200,000 
 
 Gipsies 200,000 
 
 12,080,000 
 
 The American Board have in this and Asi- 
 atic Turkey, a mission to each of the following 
 peoples : to the Armenians ; to the Greeks ; 
 the Jews ; the Syrians ; the Jacobites and 
 Chaldeans ; and the Nestorians. These mis- 
 sions consist of forty-three American mission- 
 
 * D. represents Rev. H. G. 0. Dwight, American mission- 
 ary to Turkey, to whom we are indebted for this view of 
 Turkey. 
 
858 
 
 EUROPK 
 
 arics and their wives, with one hundred and 
 nine native assistants. For fuller statements, 
 sec Armenians, Ncs(orian8, Syria, and Mosul. 
 
 The Free Church of Scotland Mlivc an in- 
 teresting mission to the Jews at Constantino- 
 }Je. The London Jews' Society has another 
 to the same people. Connected with the 
 American Missions are schools of various 
 grades, presses, «fec. From the beginning, the 
 American missionaries alone have printed 
 more than 120,000.000 pages. The whole 
 Bible has been translated, under the super- 
 vision of the missionaries, into Hebrew-Span- 
 ish, Armeno-Turkish, modern Armenian ; and 
 portions of it into other dialects. The Pil- 
 grim's Progress, Rise and Progress, Saints' 
 Rest, Butler's Analogv, D'Aubigne's Reforma- 
 tion, and similar works, have been translated 
 and distributed. The labors of the American 
 missionaries amon^ the Armenians, and of the 
 Scottish missionaries among the Jews of Con- 
 stantinople, have been accompanied by the 
 most visible results. Among the Turks there 
 is as yet no such TiaXional movement toward 
 reformation, and the reception of spiritual 
 Christianity, as among the Armenians. Be- 
 sides the instances of an open renunciation of 
 the old church, there are many manifest results 
 of missionary labor in those who still remain 
 in the church. The opinions and practices of 
 the people in regard to several of their ancient 
 superstitions are changing : for example, the 
 use of pictures in churches is in many cases 
 discontinued ; confession to priests is less prac- 
 ticed ; the fasts are more neglected. There 
 are now ten schools where one formerly ex- 
 isted. Discussion on the main points in con- 
 troversy between evangelical religion and the 
 multiform errors of formalism is now quite 
 common throughout the whole Armenian race 
 in Turkey. Many, still remaining in the Ar- 
 menian Church, are fully convinced of its 
 errors, and laboring to hasten the day when 
 they shall be fullv and openly renounced. 
 Fifteen evangelical churches have already 
 been formed among the Armenians in different 
 parts of European and Asiatic Turkey, and 
 more will soon be formed. Probably 2,500 
 have already been enrolled as Protestants ; 
 and the number is increasing. Protestantism 
 is now protected by the government as fully 
 as any other form of religion. 
 
 The hindrances to the coming of Christ's 
 kingdom in this country are, however, still 
 quitfi formidable. The Greeks have a pride 
 of ancestry and church antiquity, a blind su- 
 perstition and submission to a priesthood very 
 jealous of their prerogatives, and vigilant 
 against the invasion of their darkness by any 
 beam of light. The Romanists are here, as 
 every where, either bigots or infidels, and vigi- 
 lantly guarded by the Pope's emissaries. The 
 Armenians are embarrassed in their inquiries 
 by the social penalties of deserting their 
 church. The Jews have a low, deceitful, 
 
 mercenary spirit, and seem, for the most part, 
 incapable ot appreciating an appeal to any 
 lofty sentiment. 
 
 No missionaries are designated directly to 
 the Mohammedans. Probably, most, if not 
 all the missionaries in Turkey have, however, 
 more or less intercourse with this class ; and, 
 in some instances, there is opportunity to 
 preach to them the Gospel. The chief hin- 
 drance to its success among them is the unre- 
 pealed law, that an apostate from Mohamme- 
 danism must be put to death. Some years 
 ago, it is true, the English ambassador forced 
 from the Sultan a pledge that this sentence 
 should not be executed in the case of a man 
 who, from being a Christian, embraced Mo- 
 hammedanism, and then returned to the Chris- 
 tian faith. But for all true Turks this cruel 
 law is still in force ; and has, in one instance, 
 been executed even since the British fleet en- 
 tered those waters to protect the Turks against 
 the Russians ! Let this law once be repealed, 
 and liberty given to all Mohammedans to em- 
 brace what religion they please, and we have 
 the best reasons for believing that ProtestarU 
 Christianity would very soon spread among 
 them. Romanism they never will adopt. 
 
 Several large bodies of men exist in Tur- 
 key, among whom no missionaries are yet 
 laboring, — and some of these may be said to be 
 fairly open for such labors ; such as the Bul- 
 garians, — professing the Greek faith, — who, 
 for several years past, have eagerly sought for 
 the word of God ; the Wallachians, (of the 
 same faith,) who, though more worldly in their 
 views, are yet, it is said, in a great measure 
 free from the shackles of priestcraft ; and the 
 Hellenic Greeks themselves, in the Turkish 
 empire, numbering probably 2,000,000, pre- 
 sent a field, if not yet wholly open, still not by 
 any means devoid of promise, and one which 
 hitherto has been but very imperfectly sup- 
 plied with laborers. 
 
 The openings in the Armenian field are the 
 most remarkable, and, though the urgent call 
 for more laborers has not yet been fully re- 
 sponded to, we consider this field as occupied 
 by the American Board, and it may be hoped ^ 
 that the promised reinforcement will soon be 
 sent by that efficient body to occupy it fully. 
 
 Rev. E. N. Kirk. 
 
 Methodist Missions in Eubope. — I. The 
 several sections of Methodism engaged in this 
 work (in the order in which they entered" 
 upon tbeir labors) are— the (English) Wesley- 
 an Methodists ; the (Irish) Wesleyan Metho- 
 dists ; the (Irish) Primitive Wesleyan Metho- 
 dists ; the Methodist New Connexion ; the 
 (English) Primitive Methodists ; the Wesleyafi. 
 Methodist Association ; and the Methodis|j 
 Episcopal Church in the United States. ^l 
 
 II. The Countries of Europe where thesS 
 several bodies are operating are as follows:, 
 besides destitute parts of England, Methodist 
 missions have been established in the NormaHJ^ 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 359 
 
 Isles, Ireland, Wales, Spain, France, Shetland 
 Isles, Switzerland, Germany, Sweden, Norwajj 
 Corsica, and the Sardinian States. 
 
 III. The mode of operation in the manage- 
 ment of these missions. — With the exception of 
 the Continental missions, which are paid direct 
 from the General Mission Fund, the Home 
 missions of English Methodism are managed 
 in connexion with a fund designated the Con- 
 tingent Fund. This fund is made up from the 
 Yearly collection and the July collection. The 
 former is made annually in the classes at the 
 time of the March quarterly visitation. The 
 ministers meet every class ; and, after hearing 
 the religious experience of each member, hand 
 them their ticket (a certificate of continued 
 membership,) on the receipt of which each 
 member is expected to name the amount which 
 he will give to the yearly collection. This 
 sum is then entered by the leader in the class- 
 book, and collected by him. It is expected 
 that the average contribution to this fund is 
 Dot to fall short in any circuit of about 12 >i 
 cents for each member in society. And the 
 Board of Stewards is expected to do their best 
 to see this carried out in each case. The 
 July collection is publicly made in all their 
 chapels and preaching stations in the month 
 of July. The Contingent Fund also receives 
 occasional donations and legacies ; and out of 
 this fund are paid the contingent expenses of 
 the Conference ; and the remainder is employ- 
 ed in assisting the poorer circuits in maintain- 
 ing the ordinances of the Gospel, and to pro- 
 vide means of sending and sustaining addi- 
 tional preachers in destitute localities. This 
 is the oldest charity of the Methodist Connec- 
 tion, having been established by the venerable 
 Wesley himself, at the Thirteenth Annual Con- 
 ference, in 1756. It has thus been 98 years in 
 successful operation, and has done much for the 
 extension of Methodism in the British Isles. 
 This fund is distributed by a mixed committee, 
 consisting of the president and secretary of the 
 Conference, fifteen ministers appointed by that 
 body, and fifteen lay gentlemen, annually 
 chosen by the stewards exclusively, at the dis- 
 trict meetings most contiguous to the place 
 where the Conference is held. The annual 
 amount of this fund of late years varies from 
 ^50,000 to over 373,000. There is no dis- 
 tinction made between the preachers who re- 
 ceive aid from this fund and their other 
 brethren. But they are practically " Home 
 Missionaries," and this fund is " The Home 
 Mission Fund " of Methodism. After the Gos- 
 pel has been established by means of this fund 
 in any new place, it is expected of those who 
 receive the Gospel through this instrument- 
 ality, that they shall, as soon as possible, be- 
 gin to help themselves. Unless in extreme 
 poverty, the minimum of Methodist contribu- 
 tion for the support of the ministry, " a penny 
 a week, and a shilling a quarter," is expected 
 to be contributed by each member ; and the 
 
 amount which their united payments fall short 
 of the Home missionary's allowance, is made up 
 from the Contingent Fund. So that each year, 
 as the Gospel gains adherents, the circuit 
 finances increase, and, in the same proportion, 
 the grant from the fund becomes less and less, 
 until ultimately the self-supporting position is 
 reached, and the fund is entirely relieved of 
 the burden ; while, for the service rendered, this 
 circuit is considered for ever afterward bound in 
 honor to contribute to both the sources from 
 whence this fund draws its supplies, in order 
 that a similar service may be rendered for 
 other places still destitute. Jgid thus to this 
 simple, but efficient plan of Home Missionary 
 finance do more than one half of the circuits 
 in British Methodism owe their origin. 
 
 IV. The Success which has attended their 
 Efforts. — As already stated, the English Wes- 
 leyan Home Missions commenced when Mr. 
 Wesley instituted the Contingent Fund in 1756 ; 
 and the results are seen only in the general 
 diffusion of Methodism, because, in proportion 
 as they were successful, they ceased to be mis- 
 sionary. In 1786, Mr. Wesley sent Adam 
 Clarke as a missionary to the Norman Isles, 
 near the coast of Normandy, whose labors 
 were blessed ; and these isles now form a dis- 
 trict under the direction of the English Wes- 
 leyan Conference, with 11 ministers and 3161 
 members. Ireland was first included as a home 
 mission by the Wesleyans in 1799. But these 
 missions are held under the control of the Irish 
 Wesleyan Conference. Wales was taken up 
 in the year 1800. The first missionaries being 
 Owen Davisr and John Hughes (since known 
 as the learned author of Horce Britannica), and 
 the result, with the blessing of God, is now 
 seen in 49 Welsh preachers and 12,203 mem- 
 bers in society. The Shetland Isles, to the 
 north of Scotland, the natives of which are 
 said to be of Norwegian descent, were first oc- 
 cupied as a mission in 1821. For several 
 years they were under the special care of Dr. 
 A. Clarke. There are now six ministers there, 
 and 1265 members. 
 
 The English Wesleyans established a mission 
 at Gibraltar in 1808. The Gospel is now 
 preached there in both English and Spanish, 
 and of the 250 children in the schools, 224 
 are Spaniards — a hope of better days to come 
 for their noble and beautiful, but Spiritually 
 oppressed country. 
 
 France. — During the revolutionary war be- 
 tween France and England, Methodist mission- 
 aries were regularly supplied to the French 
 prisoners at Chatham, Plymouth, and Staple- 
 ton. Soon after the peace of 1815 these efforts 
 opened a way into France itself, where the 
 Wesleyans have now a strong and interesting 
 mission, which has lately been erected into a 
 separate organization, with independent action, 
 but continues to receive pecuniary aid from 
 the English Wesleyans, and also from the Me- 
 thodist Episcopal Church in the United States. 
 
300 
 
 EUROPE, 
 
 Switzerland. — This is an off-«hoot of the 
 French mission. Into Switzerland, the val- 
 K'vs of Piedmont, the hamlets of the Upper 
 Alps, and even Nice, within the confines of 
 Italy, Methodist preachers have found their 
 way, and gathered little churches. The socie- 
 ties here, and in the south of France, arc now 
 enjoying a revival of religion such as never 
 was experienced bv them before. The Ka- 
 tional Reformed Church, the Free Church, 
 and the Dissenters have also begun to share 
 largely in its blessings. The missionary in the 
 Upper Alps, Mr. Rostan, is a convert of the 
 great and good ffelix Neff, whose field of labor 
 he here cultivates as a Wesleyan missionary. 
 
 Germany. — In VVinnenden, in the kingdom 
 of Wirtemberg, the Wesleyan Missionary So- 
 ciety have a most precious work going forward, 
 conducted, under very peculiar circumstances, 
 by the venerable Mr. Mullcr, assisted by 20 
 local preachers, with 1100 church mem- 
 bers. 
 
 Sweden. — Here they have a chapel, and 
 many members in Stockholm, begun in 1826, 
 but the intolerant laws put in force against all 
 ministers not of the Establishment, obliged the 
 missionary, Mr. Scott, to quit the field. But 
 a work has been done there which intolerant 
 laws cannot extinguish — and which may yet 
 break forth on the right hand and on the 
 left. 
 
 T?ie Irish Wesleyan Methodist Home Missions 
 were commenced in 1799. These missions are 
 scattered over different parts of Ireland ; and 
 by the preaching of a pure Gospel and the main- 
 tenance of schools where the Holy Scriptures 
 are taught daily, they are instrumental in pre- 
 serving and extending the saving power of 
 Protestant truth in distant and necessitous 
 localities, which would otherwise be almost, if 
 not entirely destitute of its enlightening and 
 regenerating influences. Some remarkable 
 men have risen up in connection with these 
 missions, " whose praise is in the churches," 
 among whom are the honored names of Charles 
 Graham, Thomas Walsh, and Gideon Ousleij. 
 These men in the streets, and fairs, and mar- 
 kets of Ireland, in Ireland's own tongue, have 
 sown broadcast over the country those seeds 
 of evangelical truth, the fruits of which others 
 are now reaping, in the present reformations 
 from Popery in that land. Perhaps few fields 
 of Christian activity have yielded richer results 
 for the labor bestowed upon them. Besides 
 conserving the interests of Protestantism in 
 many places in Ireland, where Popish error 
 would otherwise have rooted up- the last vestige 
 of truth, and also during the past thirty or 
 •forty years sending thousands of evangelical 
 Methodist Christians to Canada, Australia, 
 and the United States, where they have helped 
 to spread the Gospel, this mission has given 
 McKenney, Lynch, Home, W. Arthur, and 
 others to the foreign missionary enterprize, 
 and has furnished the Methodist Episcopal 
 
 Church with a noble addition to her ministry, 
 among whom stand James Caughey and 
 Charles Elliott. 
 
 The Irish Primitive Wesleyan Methodists arose 
 in 1816, on the question ot the administration 
 of the sacraments by the Methodist preachers 
 in Ireland. They wished to adhere as closely 
 as possible to the practice of Mr. Wesley's 
 early preachers, and to consider themselves 
 merely as preachers of the Gospel, without full 
 ministerial responsibilty. They have for sev- 
 eral years sustained a missionary agency, chief- 
 ly in the destitute Protestant portions of the 
 country, under the shelter of the Chui'ch Estab- 
 lishment, among the members of which they 
 have done much good. 
 
 ■ The Methodist New Connection in England, 
 which originated in 1797, has a home mission 
 occupying England, the north of Ireland, and 
 Canada. 
 
 Tli£ Primitive Methodists, Tulgarly called 
 "Ranters," are a devoted and laborious body 
 of Christians, which rose in Staffordshire in 
 1810. God has greatly owned and blessed 
 the labors of these humble and faithful men. 
 Besides England, the home missions of the 
 Primitives are found in the north and east of 
 Ireland, and in Canada. The rapid increase 
 of this hard-working body of Christians, and 
 the efficiency of their domestic mission may be 
 seen from the fact that while in 1830 they had 
 but 420 chapels, 240 ministers, and 35,733 mem- 
 bers ; in 1853, they had 1789 chapels, 568 
 ministers, and 108,926 members ; making an 
 increase, in 23 years, of 1369 chapels, ^28 min- 
 isters, and 72,193 members. This increase has 
 been realized, under God, not by any aggres- 
 sion upon other men's labors, for they have 
 never built " upon another man's foundation," 
 but they have gone forth " into the highways 
 and hedges," and have reclaimed the outcasts 
 and the wanderers, for whose souls no one else 
 has cared. Their prosperity is a matter of re- 
 joicing to all who pray for the coming of the 
 Redeemer's kingdom. 
 
 T/ie Wesleyan Association, yihich. rose in 1834, 
 under the auspices of Dr. Warren, has domes- 
 tic missions in England, Wales, Ireland, and 
 Hamburgh. But these efforts are only lately 
 originated, and, as yet, have not enjoyed any 
 large measure of prosperity. | 
 
 The Methodist Episcopal Church, in the VniM 
 ted States, has several missions of a domesti^ 
 character in Europe, and some of which, wheth-?' 
 er from the localities where they operate, oP'] 
 from the rich grace which God has granted* 
 upon their labors, are of the most interesting! 
 character. They are conducted on the sam^i 
 general plan as their home missions in thisf 
 country, for which see Home Missions. Gm^ 
 many, the land of Luther, the home of the Re-ij 
 formation, now so gievously fallen from itfid 
 evangelical standards, is the principal posil 
 occupied by this branch of the Methodist; 
 church ; and the wonderful providence which^ 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 361 
 
 led her there is thus traced by Dr. McClintock : 
 'In 1821, two young men entered the Uni- 
 eersity of Tubingen in Germany, from the gym- 
 oasium, to complete their education. They 
 were both well trained according to the Ger- 
 man plan ; both of promise and talent ; both 
 svere to be theologians. They formed a friend- 
 ship at the university, and for six years lived, 
 studied, and formed their plans of life together ; 
 md they supposed that their lines of life would 
 be parallel ; that they would both be theolo- 
 gians — ministers probably, with the usual am- 
 jition of an enterprising and talented Ger- 
 man student. In 1827 they both finished their 
 studies at the university. The name of one of 
 ;hem is no less a name than that of David 
 Frederick Sti-aitss, the author of the " Life of 
 Fesus ; " the name of the other was William 
 Nasi. In eight years from the time he left 
 ;he university, Strauss had written that famous 
 book in comparison with which all that infi- 
 ielity had done before was as nothing. During 
 those eight years William Nast had come to 
 'A '""rica, with blasted hopes and fainting heart, 
 !io sure Christianity, with no hope in this 
 and with no hope and hardly any belief in 
 the life to come ; and in eight years he had 
 been led by Providence through many a lane 
 of sorrow and darkness, up to the hour when 
 the memorable awakening occurred which re- 
 sulted in his conversion. 
 
 Thus Providence raised up William Nast to 
 counteract the evil work of his fellow-student, 
 and to be the instrument of converting thou- 
 sands of his fellow-countrymen here, and then 
 to be a most powerful agency to convert his 
 fatherland. It is now about nineteen years 
 since Dr. Nast's conversion. After laboring 
 here with great success among the Germans 
 —(See Home Missions,) — he sailed for Germany 
 in 1848. He found the door of access wide 
 open, and having marked out a plan of action, 
 he returned and reported to the Board. The 
 Rev. L. S. Jacoby (one of Dr. Nast's own 
 children in the Lord) was accordingly appoint- 
 ed, and sailed in 1849, with instructions to 
 establish the head-quarters of the mission in 
 the free city of Bremen. The word of the 
 Lord immediately began to take effect, and to 
 spread, so that it was necessary to send out ad- 
 ditional missionaries. These were readily sup- 
 plied from the German converts which God 
 had given to Dr. Nast in the United States. 
 The mission has extended itself to Hamburgh, 
 on the north, and Frankfort on the south, 
 and its influence has to some extent pervaded 
 all the surrounding states. It is also establish- 
 ed in the kingdom of Wurtemburg. Helpers 
 have been raised up to preach the Gospel in 
 the places where they have been converted. 
 Persecutions have followed, and some of the 
 brethreo have been imprisoned and fined, but 
 they still persist in preaching the Gospel. 
 Some of the ministers of the state churches 
 oppose and persecute, but a few give their in- 
 
 fluence and favor to these brethren. The mis- 
 sion in Germany is working among the people 
 and upon the state churches, just as Mr. Wes- 
 ley's mission did in his early labors in England ; 
 and if it could have freedom and protection in 
 all the states of Germany, as it has in the city 
 and state of Bremen, and as Mr. Wesley and 
 his mission and helpers had in England, the 
 work in Germany would probably equal that 
 of early Methodism in England. Already the 
 fruits are great. In the state of Bremen they 
 are formed into churches ; in other states, 
 where this is not allowed, they are formed into 
 societies, and are met in class and prayer meet- 
 ings by the prominent persons whom God has 
 raised up among them, as in the early days of 
 Methodism. And where they may not enjoy 
 this privilege, they fly by scores to the United 
 States, bringing their certificates and joining 
 the German churches here. There are now, 
 besides five colporteurs, eleven missionaries iti- 
 nerating through various parts of Germany. 
 The localities where they preach and form so- 
 cieties and Sunday-schools, and other means 
 of evangelical instruction, are as follows : — • 
 In Bremen they have three chapels : in Bre- 
 merhaven, Hastedt, Yegesack. In the king- 
 dom of Hanover they operate in Achim, 
 Scharmbeck, and a few other minor places. 
 In the duchy of Oldenburg, in Hasbergen, Dwo- 
 bergen, and six other places ; also in the 
 possessions of the princes of Schleuss-Reuss and 
 Greitz-Reuss, and in the kingdom of Saxony, 
 where on account of persecution, they are 
 obliged to have their preaching and class- 
 meetings at the midnight hour ; they also have 
 circuits in Frankfoii-on-the-Main, and in the 
 kingdom of Wurtemberg, where they have 
 twelve appointments ; and they have also 
 established a mission in Hamburgh. 
 
 In many of these places the missionaries 
 have been invited to come and labor, because 
 the friends of the persons inviting them, who 
 emigrated to the United States in past years, 
 have been converted, and have written home 
 to their families in Germany, explaining the 
 nature and the joys of personal religion, and 
 urging it upon their acceptance. These let-' 
 ters have spread light, and excited the desire 
 to know more of this good way. The mission- 
 aries have established a printing-press and a 
 monthly periodical, and have also opened 
 a book concern for the sale and distribution 
 of evangelical publications. 
 
 France, Italy and Corsica. — ^The French 
 Methodist Conference having become inde- 
 pendent, and having peculiar means of ex- 
 tending the Gos'pel in that empire, the Board 
 of Missions of the Methodist E. Church have 
 voted appropriations to assist the brethren 
 there to extend their interesting work. The 
 appropriation this year is $5,000. By this 
 means, additional ministers have been called 
 out into the work, whose labors are under the 
 special patronage of the Board. Access to 
 
d» 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 the "Woldensian valleys, in the direction of 
 Turin, having been much enlarged, Mr. Kas- 
 tau has been stationed there, and another pro- 
 inise<l to help him. A wide and remarkable 
 door was opened in the city of Nice, in Sar- 
 dinia, which is the gateway on the Mediterra- 
 nean, between France and Italy. Besides the 
 inhabitants, there are great numbers of stran- 
 gers, who resort here to spend the winter, for 
 the benefit of their health. 
 
 There has also occurred a remarkable open- 
 ing in the island of Corsica, in the Mediterra- 
 nean, which is under the government of 
 France. Occupying, as it does, a central posi- 
 tion between France, Italy, Spain, Sardinia, 
 and Algeria, it is the best position in the 
 south of Europe for a central evangelical Pro- 
 testant mission. The Methodist missionary is 
 the only Protestant minister in the whole 
 island, containing a population of about 250,000 
 Romanists. The missionary, Mr. Gallienne, is 
 assisted by a zealous Christian, a convert from 
 Popery, of the name of Dominimie Rimathie. 
 They circulate the Scriptures and tracts, both 
 in the French and Italian languages. They 
 have also obtained a chapel and opened Pro- 
 testant services, and God is giving them favor 
 in the eyes of the people. 
 
 In Norwaij the Methodist E. Church has 
 lately established a mission. Some time ago, 
 a sailor was converted under the ministry of 
 Rev. 0. C. Hedstroom, of the Bethel ship, 
 John Wesley, New York. He soon became 
 eminent for his piety, and was known among 
 his ship-mates as " Holy Peter." His anxiety 
 for the salvation of his kindred induced him 
 to leave his profession, and return to his native 
 country, Norway, that he might " tell them 
 how great things the Lord had done for him." 
 His simple, earnest exhortations were accom- 
 panied with the unction of the Holy Spirit, 
 and many were awakened and converted, so 
 that it was with difficulty he could tear him- 
 self from the people, that he might return to 
 the United States. On his arrival here he 
 was sent off to preach among his Scandinavian 
 brethren in the State of Iowa. But the con- 
 verted souls in Norway earnestly entreated 
 that he might be sent back to them for their 
 sake, and for the sake of spreading the good 
 work among the perishing sinners around 
 them. After the usual instructions and exam- 
 inations, he was accordingly ordained, and, in 
 October, 1853, accompanied by two other con- 
 verted Norwegian sailors, as his assistants, he 
 sailed for Norway; and, when heard from, 
 they had hired a place to preach in, and had 
 begun their work with prospects of acceptance 
 and usefulness. Mr. Peterson, the missionary, 
 in a communication, dated March 1st, 1854, 
 " rejoices in God to be able to say that he 
 believes that twelve or fourteen persons have 
 been truly converted since they arrived in 
 Norway."— Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 1 
 
 
 pan B.i»qniaw ani 
 -pnpuj 'djqsJOM 
 
 
 
 """ 
 
 
 
 350 
 300 
 
 660 
 
 450 
 1750 
 
 600 
 1500 
 
 •200 
 
 o 
 
 
 ojiqn^i uo »;uii 
 
 
 
 
 
 -pna^JV JO Jsqnin^j 
 
 
 
 
 
 II fl 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 mt 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 (Camber o 
 cting for 
 end both 
 Week-day 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 «♦ .* • ino»OQ 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iPl 
 
 
 
 ** :**|SSS 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •saxag 
 
 
 
 
 q;oq jo SJBioqog 
 
 
 : : : : :S : : : 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 ■Ryui JO jaquinN 
 
 
 
 
 
 •8100 qas 
 
 
 
 
 -A«a JO Jdquin>i 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 •saxag qioq 
 
 •*» .«OU9000 
 
 
 
 JO SJBioqos-q^tjq 
 
 a 
 
 i-i US lO CO 
 
 "r! 
 
 
 -qua JO jaqranK 
 
 >5 
 
 
 
 
 •siooqog-THBq 
 
 C^lH .«<Nr-(rHOC0 
 
 
 
 -quS JO aaquin^f 
 
 
 
 
 
 •diqsaaqraaw 
 
 
 -*"':: :§5 :g : 
 
 
 
 JOJ i«iax uo 
 
 o 
 
 
 •SJaqmaK qoanto 
 
 oo>ftOMoer-oo«oiN 
 
 s 
 
 
 pajxpoaooy poB 
 
 Q 
 
 M rH 
 
 
 nn,i JO jaqranN 
 
 55 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 'I 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 H- 1 
 
 !i 
 
 < 
 
 MlHrHtH .M •» . 
 
 JS 
 
 < 
 
 t^ 
 
 J-£ 
 
 ia 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 III 
 
 m 
 
 13 
 
 73 
 
 ^^ :'«"5-'Sg 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 2 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ . 
 
 ^§-2 
 
 ^f.! 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 :::::*'::: 
 
 (M 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iH . . -.H • ■ • • 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 %■ 
 
 
 
 
 •S^UWJSISBV 
 
 
 
 
 pn'B sau^aoisBij^ 
 
 
 N r-( iH (M r^ « CI ■* i-t 
 
 s 
 
 
 •saoBiJ-SuiqoBOJj 
 
 
 
 
 jaq^o JO jaqain^[ 
 
 
 N . .««^«ajc, 
 
 It 
 
 
 •siadBqo 
 
 
 
 
 JO joquin^ 
 
 
 (N IH rH CO <N O (N ■* CO 
 
 ?; 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 "A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « H EP 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t} ' ' 
 
 0) . 
 
 
 ^ S g 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 .2 
 
 to 
 
 ill 
 
 
 
 llg 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 •slidilii 1 
 
 
 
 
 1. Pa 
 
 2. Ca 
 
 3. Bo 
 
 4. Ca 
 
 5. Ba 
 
 6. Ni 
 
 7. Ga 
 
 8. Ny 
 
 9. La 
 
EUROPE. 
 
 363 
 
 I 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 J^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «" 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 : 
 
 . §5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 -— 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 * 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 ■" — 
 
 
 
 
 t- 
 
 
 
 7* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ir^ 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 ° 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 ■* 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -<i< 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 lO 
 
 * s; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~7 
 
 o 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 1 00 ■ ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 " -^ 
 
 ^ h 
 
 
 eo 
 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 (N 
 
 cs 
 
 
 CD -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c5 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 c5 -^ 
 
 
 y. 
 
 
 S § 
 
 
 ■* 
 
 
 CO 
 
 5^ 
 
 o 
 
 : 
 
 ;2 
 
 W 
 
 CO ^~ 
 
 p 
 
 s 1 
 
 « o 
 
 S5 
 
 00 
 
 >5 
 
 • 1 
 
 § 
 
 5 
 
 ST NEW CON 
 
 S 
 
 8 
 
 — 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 — g 
 
 3 i 
 
 
 . 1 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 — § 
 
 
 — 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 : s 
 
 &3 
 
 
 
 ' 1 
 
 : 2: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 ?3 
 
 • 
 
 
 • 
 
 s ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o> 
 
 o 
 
 
 OS 
 
 O lO 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 <N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eo 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 s 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 CO M 
 
 
 ?5 
 
 CD O 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 -T- 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 -r 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 ; ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 . 
 
 I I 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 ; 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .g, 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 M 
 
 i ': 
 
 
 
 
 
 .a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 § 
 
 d 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 § 3 
 
 
 -^' 
 
 
 
 oo 
 
 
 >s 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 <S 
 
I 
 
 304 
 
 FAIRFIELD— FREETOWN. 
 
 FAIRFIELD: A station of tho Moravians 
 in Jainnirn, W. I. 
 
 FAKIR or FAQUIR: A monk in India. 
 The fakirs subject themselves to severe aus- 
 terities and mortifications. Some of them 
 condemn themselves to a standing posture 
 all their lives, supported only by a stick or 
 rope under their armpits. Some mangle 
 their bodies with scourges or knives. Others 
 wander about in companies, telling fortunes, 
 and these are said to be arrant villains. 
 
 FALMOUTH : A station of the Wesley- 
 ans, in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 FALEALILI : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on the Island of Upolu, 
 one of the Samoan group. 
 
 FAIR HARBOUR: A station of the 
 London Missionary Society in the Society 
 Islands. 
 
 FARMERFIELD : A station of the Wes- 
 leyans in Great Namaqualand, S. Africa. 
 
 FASITOOTAI : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on the Island of Upolu, 
 one of the Samoan group. 
 
 FATjfi : One of the New Hebrides Islands, 
 having a station of the London Missionary 
 Society. . 
 
 FEARN: A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society in Berbice, S. America. 
 
 FEE JEE ISLANDS : See South Sea Is- 
 lands. 
 
 FERNANDO PO: An Island in the Bight 
 of Biafra, on the western coast of Africa, 
 20 miles from the continent, 40 miles in 
 length, 20 in breadth, and 120 in circumfer- 
 ence. Like the adjacent parts of the main 
 land, it is very mountainous, Clarence Peak 
 being 10,700 feet high. The southern ex- 
 tremity is also intersected with steep moun- 
 tains, from 1,000 to 3,000 feet high j which, 
 with the intervening valleys, are covered 
 with dense forests of large and valuable tim- 
 ber, and watered by numerous rivulets. The 
 dry season commences the latter end of 
 May, and continues till the end of Novem- 
 ber. The sea breeze is regular, but the land 
 breeze generally deficient, being intercepted 
 by the high range of mountains on the maiZi 
 land. Clarence, the principal settlement, is 
 on the north side of the Island, in latitude 
 3» 53' N. and longitude 7" 40' E. and is built 
 close to the sea, upon an elevated plain, em- 
 bracing two small peninsulas. Point William 
 and Point Adelaide, with a semi-circular 
 space, forming a cove, well adapted for ship- 
 pmg. The soil is fertile, and the water of 
 the best quality, and there are no marshes 
 m the vicinity. The English Baptist Mis- 
 sionary Society have a mission here. (See 
 Africa. Western.) 
 
 FETISH : See Africa, Western. 
 
 FIRST-HILL: A station of the London 
 Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 FISHTOWN : Station of the American 
 Episcopal Missionary Society in South Afri- 
 
 ca, situated to the south-west of Cape Pal- 
 mas. 
 
 FIVE ISLANDS : A station of the Mora- 
 vians in Antigua. W. I. 
 
 FLINT : A Cherokee town in the Indian 
 territory and an out-station of the American 
 Baptist Mission. 
 
 FORT BEAUFORT: Station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society in South Africa, in 
 Beaufort district, near the head waters ot 
 the Kciskamma river. 
 
 FOUR-PATHS : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 FREDEllICKSTHAL : A station of the 
 Moravians in Greenland. 
 
 FREEDOM CHAPEL: A station of the 
 London Missionary Society in British Gui- 
 ana. 
 
 FREEMANTLE : A station of the Gospel 
 Propagation Society in Australia, situated 
 at the entrance of Swan river. 
 
 FREETOWN : Chief town of the colony 
 of Sierra Leone, situated near the mouth of 
 the Sierra Leone river. It is well situated 
 for commerce. The Church and Wesleyau 
 Societies both have stations at this place. 
 (See Africa, Western.) 
 
 FREE CHURCH OF SCOTLAND :MIS. 
 SIONS: The Free Church supports exten- 
 sive Home and Colonial Missionary opoi-a- 
 tions; together with missions to tlie Jews, 
 and Foreign Missions in Hindostan and S. 
 Africa, notices of wliich appear under those 
 heads. The income for Missions and Educa- 
 tion in 1854, was £46,232, and for all objects, 
 £287,574. 
 
 FREEWILL BAPTIST FOREIGN MIS- 
 SION SOCIETY : The members of the Free 
 Will Baptist denomination did not generally 
 engage in the Foreign Mission enterprise till 
 about twenty years ago. The founders of 
 the connection were zealous and pious men, 
 who made great sacrifices to preach the Gos- 
 pel in the destitute parts of the country. 
 But unfortunately for the cause of religiop^ 
 and the interests of the denomination, theyj{ 
 with those who sympathized with them, 
 suflfered their prejudices against what thej^v 
 called the " hireling " system to drive thei 
 into strong opposition to the regular suppoi 
 of the ministry. Hence, the appointment 
 missionari<?s with the appropriation of defi- 
 nite sums o.f money for their support was 
 discarded. Yt^^ there were some who ap-' 
 dently desired i^^ conversion of the world, 
 and wished to sec- ^^e denomination engage 
 in the great work ^ sending the Gospel to, 
 the heathen. Being X^nknown to each other, 
 hearing but little to discourage them to en- 
 gage in the missionary>nterprise, and being 
 scattered among those \¥^^ were either op-; 
 posed or indifferent to f>e cp.use, no efiorl 
 was made in the churches i^^ send the lamp 
 of life to the benighted hc-^^^en for somti 
 years after other denomina.^^^^iss ^^^ ^^°^' 
 
 V 
 
 i 
 
FREEWILL BAPTIST FOREIGN MISSION SOCIETY. 
 
 365 
 
 menced their labors for the conversion of 
 idolaters. Rev. Amos Sutton, of the Eng- 
 jlish General Baptist Mission in Orissa, was, 
 lunder God, enabled to arouse many of the 
 ministers and members from their inaction, 
 and induce them to engage in efforts for the 
 conversion of Orissa. Early in 1832 he 
 wrote to Elder John Buzzell of Parsons- 
 fu'ld, Me., who was one of the oldest and 
 most influential ministers of the Free-will 
 Baptist connection. The letter was an earn- 
 est and pathetic appeal for aid ; and as it 
 
 - published in the Morning Star, the or- 
 of the denomination, was heartily sec- 
 td by Elder Buzzell, and was written by 
 issionary of senttments similar to those 
 he Free-will Baptists, a good impression 
 made. In 1833 Mr. Sutton visited the 
 . ited States, having been compelled to 
 k'.ive Orissa for a season on account of ill 
 luulth. He came by the permission of the 
 Eiii^lish General Baptist Missionary Society, 
 \v!io generously defrayed the expense of his 
 \\>]t. His presence and earnest and perse- 
 Yi ling labors deepened the favorable im- 
 p!< ssion previously made, and much of the 
 ])Lc;iudice that had existed against the cause 
 Oi missions was removed. During his stay 
 the Free-will Baptist Foreign Mission Soci- 
 ety was formed. The organization was to a 
 considerable extent effected through his 
 means, and his services were of great value 
 as the work was new to all who were asso- 
 ciated with him in forming the Society. 
 Soon after this he went to England, but re- 
 turned in 1834, and engaged in the duties of 
 Corresponding Secretary of the Society, the 
 Directors having chosen him to that office 
 while he was in England. His health was 
 in a good degree restored, which enabled 
 him to travel and lecture in many of the 
 churches, and take collections in aid of the 
 cause. He was very cordially received not 
 only among the Free-will Baptists, but by 
 Christians of other denominations. His ar- 
 duous labors were continued for one year, 
 during which time two brethren were ap- 
 pointed as missionaries to Orissa. These 
 brethren were Rev. Eli Noyes of Jefferson, 
 Me., who was a Free-will Baptist, and Rev. 
 Jeremiah Phillips of Plainfield, N. Y., who 
 belonged to the Open Communion Baptists, 
 a sect that subsequently united with the 
 Free-will Baptist connection. These two 
 missionaries, with their wives, sailed for 
 Orissa, September 22, 1835, and were the 
 first sent out by this Society. Mr. Sutton 
 was one of their fellow passengers, and was 
 of great service to them during the voy- 
 age, and after their arrival in India. 
 
 The Society has but one mission. It has 
 sent out six male and nine female mission- 
 aries from this country, and the services of 
 one female have been secured in Orissa. 
 Rev. John Buzzell was the first President 
 
 of the Society, and retained the office about 
 fifteen years. Rev. Amos Sutton was its 
 first Corresponding Secretary, and Mr. Isaac 
 N. Sanborn of North Parsonsfield, Me., its 
 first Treasurer. He died in 1835 or 183^6. 
 Wm. Burr, Esq., editor of the Morning Star 
 and Treasurer of two other benevolent soci- 
 eties, succeeded Mr. Sanborn as Treasurer 
 of this Society, and has ever since retained 
 the office, rendering his services gratuitous- 
 ly. It has had three Corresponding Secre 
 taries since Mr. Sutton resigned, and their 
 services have been mostly gratuitous. 
 
 The affairs of the Society are conducted 
 by an Executive Committee. Its officers 
 were formerly chosen by a Board of Direc- 
 tors ; but this Board has been dispensed 
 with, and all the officers are now chosen by 
 the Society at its annual meetings. 
 
 A few years after the organization of this 
 body. Miss Sarah Chapin of Rumford, N. H., 
 made it a bequest of some four thousand dol- 
 lars, which sum was paid in annual instal- 
 ments. She had previously willed the pro- 
 perty to the missionary society of another 
 denomination of which she was a member. 
 On learning the anti-slavery character of the 
 Free-will Baptists, she revoked her will and 
 disposed of her property as stated above. 
 While the denomination held an informal 
 connection with a body of slaveholding Bap- 
 tists at the South, which union has since 
 been dissolved, the Executive Committee 
 passed a resolution not to receive the contri- 
 butions of slaveholders. 
 
 The following are the Society's annual re- 
 ceipts. From its origin to 1835, a period 
 of about three years, the amount received 
 was. S2,653 37. In 1836, it was, ^915 43 
 In 1837, $51,459 79 In 1838, ^2.504 36 
 In 1839, ,S2,336 71 In 1840, 82,777 00 
 In 1841, .1^3,137 32 In 1842, $13,556 42 
 In 1843, !$2,726 74 In 1844, $2,388 04 
 In 1845, !B3,160 66 In 1846, ^3,219 21 
 In 1847, ^3,544 00 In 1848, $5,618 63 
 In 1849, $2,992 20 In 1850, $4;215 31 
 In 1851, $4,958 14 In 1852, $4,475 98 
 In 1853, $6^245 93. Total since the organ- 
 ization of the Society, $62,885 24. 
 
 Considerable irregularity is seen in the re- 
 ceipts, as the amount of one year is com- 
 pared with that of another. This is caused 
 mostly by the irregularity of the time of 
 holding the annual meetings when the ac- 
 counts are made up. Dividing twenty of 
 the twenty-one years of the Society's exist- 
 ence into two equal parts, giving to each its 
 respective receipts, the increase of funds in 
 the last period over the first, is $17,958 51. 
 This gain was not made by an increase of 
 the numerical strength of the denomination^ 
 for there was a decrease of its numbers 
 while the funds were increasing. It was 
 caused by the increasing light on the subject 
 of missions, and the formation of churches 
 
see 
 
 FRIEDENSBERG— GABOON. 
 
 better taught than some of those previously 
 organized. As the denomination was weak 
 in numbers and resources, and most of the 
 churches were small, poor, and not trained 
 to benevolent efforts, the missionary enter- 
 prise was commenced with fears of failure, 
 and there were some apprehensions of em- 
 barrassment when Miss Chapin's bequest 
 should be expended. But former anxieties 
 and disquietudes have been happily succeed- 
 ed by the pleasing hope that, under God, the 
 Society has become permanently established, 
 though its operations are limited. However 
 small it may be "among the thousands of 
 Judah," it has something to do in the great 
 work of spreading the Gospel among all na- 
 tions, and there are indications that the 
 churches will become more active in the holy 
 enterprise. 
 
 Most of the funds of the Society have 
 been collected by subscriptions, the circula- 
 tion of missionary cards, and by contribu- 
 tions. This course, though it saves the ex- 
 pense of agents, yet lacks the efficiency of 
 the agency system. Rev. 0. R. Bachelor, a 
 returned missionary, has been on an agency 
 among the churches more than a year past, 
 and is still in the field. The amount of re- 
 ceipts for 1853 was considerably greater than 
 that of any previous year, and his efficient 
 labors were among the means that brought 
 the additional sum into the treasury. Many, 
 however, think that in most cases the ser- 
 vices of agents are not necessary, and that all 
 the funds that can be appropriated directly to 
 missionary purposes may be obtained with- 
 out their aid. The denomination consists 
 of 28 yearly meetings, 129 quarterly meet- 
 ings, 1146 churches, 10G9 preachers, and 
 about 50,000 communicants. Each quarter- 
 ly meeting is composed of delegates from a 
 convenient number of churches, and the 
 yearly meetings are made of delegates sent 
 from the quarterly meetings. Each quar- 
 terly meeting assembles four times a year 
 with such churches in its limits as are wil- 
 ling to entertain the meetings. As there are 
 some five hundred of these sessions an- 
 nually held, with about the same number of 
 churches scattered throughout the denomi- 
 nation, each meeting usually attended by 
 several ministers and often by large num- 
 bers of people, great facilities are afforded in 
 this way for obtaining funds for the cause 
 of missions. It is hoped that these facilities 
 will at no very distant period be so far im- 
 proved as to dispense with agents. 
 
 The small amount of receipts shows that 
 the Society has done but little in the work 
 of converting the heathen. The connection 
 took its rise in the then new settlements of 
 the country, and up to some ten years ago 
 it numbered scarcely a dozen churches in 
 large villages and cities. At the commence- 
 ment of the missionary enterprise among 
 
 Free-will Baptists, their churches wero 
 mostly small, poor, scattered, and many <rf 
 them without pastors, and most of the min- 
 isters were uneducated and had no regular 
 support. The mass, which was then in al' 
 most a chaotic state, is now assuming lV)n]o 
 and vitality. There are not many wealthy 
 men in the churches, and not one of the few 
 that are rich has yet made a large donation 
 to the Foreign Mission Society. — Rkv. E. 
 
 HUTCHINS. 
 
 FRIEDENSBERG: A station of the 
 Moravians on the Island of St. Thomas, 
 West Indies. 
 
 FRIEDENSFIELD : A station of the 
 United Brethren in St Thomas, W. I 
 
 FRIEDENSTHAL : A station of the 
 Moravians, on the Island of St. Thomas 
 
 FRIENDLY ISLANDS: A group of 
 islands situated between 16° 21', south lati- 
 tude, and ITG'* 186', west longitude. Some 
 of them are barren and desert spots. Others 
 are of considerable size, Tonga containing 
 a population of 10,000. 
 
 FRIEDAU: A station of the French 
 Protestants in South Africa, 183 miles east 
 of Motito. 
 
 FUH-CHAU : One of the five ports of 
 China, opened to foreigners, situated in lati- 
 tude 26* 5'. N., and longitude 119° 20', E., 
 on the north bank of the Min river. 
 
 FLTRRACKABAD : A city in the pro- 
 vince of Agra, in Hindostan, situated near 
 the south bank of the Ganges, 82 E. N. E. 
 of Agra, 156 N. W. of Allahabad. Popula- 
 tion, 70,000. It is the chief commercial city 
 of the ceded and conquered provinces, and 
 is said to be the common resort of needy 
 and dissolute characters from other parts of 
 Hindostan. It is a station of the American 
 Presbyterian Board. 
 
 FUTTEHGURH: A station of the 
 Presbyterian Board in Northern India, on 
 the Ganges, 200 miles above Allahabad. 
 
 GABOON : A river in West Africj^ 
 entering the ocean about twenty miles 
 north of the equator, in longitude 9° 18' 
 east from Greenwich, on which is situated 
 the mission of the American Board to West 
 Africa. Its width for 40 miles from its 
 mouth, varies from 8 to 14 miles. For thai 
 last 30 miles of its course, this river is ful 
 equal in size to the Senegal, Niger, ar 
 Congo, and much superior in grandeur 
 beauty. Its general course is wester! 
 Many rivers flow into it, the 
 of which are interspersed with numeroi 
 villages. Forty miles from the ocean 
 divides into the Rembwe, which is a 
 wide at its mouth, and navigable some di 
 tance for small vessels, and the big Oroml 
 or the Olombo-mpolo, which has a width 
 more than two miles at its junction wil 
 the Rembwe, and ia navigable to where 
 divides into the Kftra^ and B^kwe. Of the 
 
GABOON. 
 
 367 
 
 jibranches the B&kwe, which is a quarter of 
 
 mile wide where it unites with the K^mbA, 
 
 s said to have a boat navigation of 40 or 
 
 miles ; and the K&m^, which is twice its 
 
 ize, would allow the passage of vessels of a 
 
 oderate burden a still greater distance, 
 
 nvere it not for a sand-bar at its mouth. 
 
 Face of the Country, Climate, ^c. — The 
 country for the distance of 100 or 150 miles 
 nto the interior, is quite uniformly level, 
 md covered with forests so dense as to 
 •ender it next to impossible to thread them, 
 md the native paths (for there are no roads) 
 'e not wide enough for a horse, or even for 
 man, with a pack of any size, to pass. The 
 )anks of the rivers are in many plac^ low 
 nd marshy ; in others, for miles together, 
 elevated. Farther in the interior the coun- 
 ry is hilly, and rises at length into magnifi- 
 sent mountains. 
 
 Contrary to what would naturally be in- 
 erred, there is good reason for believing 
 hat no place on the coast is more healthy 
 han the Gaboon country. This is owing to 
 everal causes. The rainy season, which, 
 
 rhen the showers are less frequent, lasts 
 en months, is the warm season, when the 
 hermoraeter ranges from 72 to 88 degrees 
 f Fahrenheit. Then, the rains are generally 
 Q the night, so that one is still less exposed 
 o take cold. Again, at the close of the 
 ainy season, the sky becomes overcast with 
 louds, by which means the disastrous ef- 
 ects of a burning sun, operating in the lux- 
 iriant vegetation of the rainy season, are 
 ntirely obviated. The region through 
 rhich the upper waters of the Gaboon flow, 
 3 supposed to be highly salubrious ; and 
 (Then the way shall be opened to the grand 
 aountains which are in full sight from a 
 ill back of King George's Town, as fine a 
 esort will be found, it is probable, for re- 
 Dvering from the effects of a tropical climate, 
 s the world affords. 
 
 Productions are various and abundant, 
 onsisting of plantains and cassada, — the 
 taple articles of food, and which are pre- 
 ared for the table in a great variety of 
 rays, — yams, sweet potatoes, Indian corn, 
 agar cane, pumpkins, peas, beans, &c. 
 bats and fowls abound, but cattle and 
 beep have only recently been introduced, 
 "he forests swarm with wild animals, and 
 as waters with fish ; and honey is to be 
 ad at all seasons. 
 
 People, Cttstoms, Language, ^c. — The 
 ribes which now dwell on the Gaboon and 
 :s waters, are not the original occupants of 
 he country. Indeed, judging from present 
 ppearances, there is ground for very pain- 
 il conjectures as to the number of tribes 
 rhich have successively made their way 
 ither from the interior, and been swept 
 way during the hundreds of years that this 
 
 has been one of the centres of the slave 
 trade. The people spoken of by the present 
 inhabitants as the first who lived here, are 
 the Divwas ; of whom it is said, only one is 
 now left. The Mpongwes, who then dwelt 
 far back in the bush, occupy their place ; but 
 are only a remnant of what they once were, 
 being variously estimated at from six to 
 twelve thousand in number. The Shikanis 
 next came over the mountains, then a wild, 
 fierce, numerous, and powerful tribe ; but 
 who, though still more numerous than the 
 Mpongwes, have almost literally sold them- 
 selves out, and are scattered among the bor- 
 der towns of the Mpongwes and Bakilis. 
 This last named tribe came over the moun- 
 tains yet later, overpowering the Shikanis, 
 and are the principal occupants of the 
 branches of the Gaboon. They thus far 
 know but little of trade, have had little to 
 do with rum, the great bane of these tribes, 
 and are in many respects a promising people. 
 Within ten years the Pangwes have made 
 their appearance ; though rude, and possibly 
 
 muscular, healthy-looking and uncontami- 
 nated with the vices of civilization. They 
 wear scarcely any clothing, many of them 
 paint their bodies with redwood, and nearly 
 all of them wear ornaments of white beads, 
 ivory, and iron rings. The iron seems to be 
 of a superior quality, and many of their im- 
 plements are made with a taste and skill 
 equal to that of any people in the world. 
 Already not far from ten thousand of them 
 are settled on or near the waters of the 
 Gaboon ; and they say they are only the 
 pioneers of those who are to follow. 
 
 The Gaboon people are divided into four 
 distinct political communities, two of which 
 occupy the south side of the river, and two 
 the north. The number of the Gaboon people 
 proper is not large. They act as factors for 
 the interior tribes. The articles of traffic, be- 
 sides slaves, are ivory, redwood, ebony, bees- 
 wax, and gum copal. The annual export of 
 ivory, in 1843, exceeded 30 tons. The entire 
 trade of the river, besides slaves, was at 
 that time, estimated at over ^100,000. 
 The native merchants, through whom this 
 trade passes, are respectable and trust- 
 worthy men, who live in respectable style, 
 and associate with foreigners on terms of 
 equality. Their houses are supplied with 
 many useful and costly articles of European 
 manufacture, and their tables spread with 
 delicacies. Most of them speak intelligible 
 English. Most of the men are engaged in 
 trade. The women and slaves manage what 
 they call their " plantations." They pride 
 themselves not a little on their approxima- 
 tion to the habits and customs of civilized life. 
 The government in all these tribes is purely 
 patriarchal. The term king is derived from 
 Europe j no power answering to the name 
 
868 
 
 QALLE— GLOUCESTER. 
 
 tt posseMod by hira on whom it is conferred; 
 ADono central power exists, which is ac- 
 knowledgod bv the separate villages. Slav- 
 ery in a mild form, poljgarav in perhaps its 
 worst character, and on the lower waters of 
 the Gaboon, intemperance, prevail. Witch- 
 craft ia universally believed in. Death, 
 whatever its immediate cause, is very gen- 
 onilly attributed to this ; and he upon whom 
 suspicion fastens as the witch, is made 
 the victim of a relentless superstition. Still 
 the people are farther advanced in civiliza- 
 tion than any other on the whole coast, and 
 possess such elements of character as give 
 promise that they will rise rapidly under the 
 influence of the Gospel. Their general dis- 
 position is mild and peaceful, and they mani- 
 fest an unusuM d*ire for instruction. The 
 Mpongwe language is spoken very exten- 
 sively along the coast, and is supposed to be, 
 with more or less dialectic differences, very 
 largely throughout Southern Africa. It is 
 •wonderfully perfect in its structure, of great 
 flexibility, and pleasant to the ear. 
 
 GALLIi : A station of the Irish Presby- 
 terians and also of the Wesleyan Methodists 
 in Ceylon. 
 
 GARAW AY : A station of the American 
 Episcopal Board in West Africa, 8 miles 
 from Cape Palmas. 
 
 GAWAR: A district of the Mountain 
 Nestorians, 70 miles west of Oroomiah, a 
 station of the American Board. 
 
 GANJAM: A station of the General 
 Baptists in Orissa, India. 
 
 GAWLER: A station of the Wesleyans 
 in Australia. 
 
 GEELONG: A station of the Wesleyans 
 in Australia. It lies at the bottom of a deep 
 bay, which forms the inner harbor, about 50 
 miles south of Melbourne. It is rapidly in- 
 creasing, and likely to become a place of im- 
 portance. 
 
 GENADENDAL: A station of the United 
 Brethren in South Africa, 130 miles north- 
 east of Cape Town, near Sergeant's river. 
 This was the first station of the United 
 Brethren in South Africa. It was first called 
 Baviari's Kloof, and afterwards Gnadenthal 
 or Genedendcd, which means Valley of Grace, 
 or Grace Dale. It was originally commenced 
 in 1736 ; but afterwards given up, and re- 
 newed in 1792. 
 
 GEXERALBAPTIST MISSIONARY SO- 
 CIETY: The distinction between particu- 
 lar and general Baptists, is" founded on the 
 belief of the former in particular, and the 
 latter in general redemption. The former 
 are Calvinists, the latter Arminiaus. On 
 account of the prevalence of Socinianism 
 among the General Baptists of England, the 
 evangelical portion of them separated them- 
 selves and f3rmed a new connection in 1770. 
 The formation of the Missionary Society by 
 the Particular Baptists in 1701, was the 
 
 means of awakening the missionary spirit 
 among the churches of the new connection ; 
 and at length Providence raised up Rev. J. 
 G. Pike to advocate the cause among them, 
 and his appeals awakened so much interest 
 that a society was formed in 181G. Their 
 first mission was established in Orissa, the 
 province in which the idol Juggernaut ia 
 situated. To this their chief energies have 
 been directed. They have also a mission in 
 China. The reports of the Society do not 
 give statistics with sufficient dcfiniteness to 
 enable us to state the number of missionary 
 laborers, church members, &c. The amount 
 of funds raised si^nd expended by the Society 
 is about £2,000 a year. 
 
 GEOG TAPA : A village near Oroomiah. 
 Persia, an out-station of the mission of the 
 American Board. 
 
 GEORGIAN ISLANDS: A group of 
 islands in the Southern Pacific Ocean, be- 
 tween latitude 17<^ 18', S., and longitude 149" 
 15', West, embracing the islands of Tahiti, 
 Eimeo, Tabuaemanu, Tetuaroa, Matea, and 
 Meetia. 
 
 GEORGETOWN: The chief town of 
 British Guiana, a station of the Wesleyans. 
 Population 8,000 to 10 000, mostly negroes. 
 
 GERMAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY: 
 (See Basle Missionary Society.) 
 
 GIIAZIPOOR: A town of Allahabad, 
 41 miles north-east from Benares, a station 
 of the Berlin Missionary Society. 
 
 GLASGOW MISSIONARY SOCIETY: 
 One of the earliest organizations in the 
 world for sending the Gospel to the heathen, 
 was the Glasgow Missionary Society. It 
 was formed on the 9th of February, 1796 : 
 and it originally embraced members of the 
 Established Church of Scotland and Dissent- 
 ers from that communion. After the lapse 
 of more than thirty years, it was thought ex- 
 pedient to dissolve the union and form two 
 societies ; one of which should be composed 
 of persons adhering to the Church of Scot- 
 land, and the other of Dissenters. The 
 former retained the old name, and the latter 
 was called the Glasgow African Missionary 
 Society, and the missions were about equally 
 divided between the two. After the division 
 which took place in the Church of Scotland 
 in 1843, the Glasgow Missionary Society be- 
 came merged in the foreign mission scheme of 
 the Free Church of Scotland ; and its mission- 
 aries (all being in South Africa) were placed 
 under the care of the latter body. The vote 
 of dissolution and transfer was passed on the 
 29th of October, 1844, and, on the 27th of 
 July, 1847, the Glasgow African Society 
 transferred its missions to the United Pres- 
 byterian Church. See Africa, Southern. 
 
 GLOUCESTER: Town of liberated Afri- 
 cans, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, between 
 I Freetown and Regents' Town — a station of 
 1 the Church Missionary Society. 
 
GOSSNER'S MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 369 
 
 GNADENBERG : A station of Gossner's 
 Missionary Society in Hindostan. 
 
 GO GO: A station of the Irish Presby- 
 tef ians in the district of Goelwara. Hindostan. 
 
 GOLD COAST : (See Ashantce.) 
 
 GONAIVES : A station of the Wesley- 
 ans in the West Indies. 
 
 GOOBEE : A station of the Wesleyans 
 in India. 
 
 GOOD-WATER : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Choctaw Indians. 
 
 GORRUOKPORE : A town in the province 
 of Oude in northern Hindostan, and capital 
 of a district of the same name. Population 
 40,000. The Church Missionary Society 
 commenced operations here in 1823. 
 
 GOSSNER'S MISSIONARY SOCIETY : 
 Germany has one organization for the con- 
 yersion of the heathen, which is unlike all 
 o.thers. It is generally called Gossner's 
 Missionary Society, this warm-hearted, 
 but eccentric man, belonged to the committee 
 of the Berlin Missionary Society. But as 
 he could not assent to all the principles of 
 his associates in regard to the training of 
 missionaries, he resigned his office in 1836. 
 Soon afterwards he took charge of a number 
 of young men, mostly mechanics, who were 
 anxious to engage in the missionary work as 
 Christian artisans, catechists, and teachers. 
 They were to earn their livelihood by man- 
 ual labor; and such instruction as they 
 needed, was to be given them gratuitously by 
 pious students. 
 
 Gossner had scarcely entered upon this 
 new enterprise, when Dr. Lange, of the 
 Scotch Presbyterian Church in Australia, 
 invited these humble but zealous candidates 
 for missionary employment to make known 
 the Gospel to the natives of Australia, near 
 Moretou Bay ; and accordingly, on the 10th 
 of July, 1837, eleven men, one of them hav- 
 ing been ordained, and seven married, pro- 
 ceeded to Scotland, whence they sailed at a 
 subsequent date for their destination. A few 
 months later the Rev. Mr. Start, of the 
 Church of England, anxious to establish a 
 mission in Bengal, went to Berlin and se- 
 lected twelve persons for this purpose, who 
 proceeded to England, July 1, 1838. One 
 of them was a " candidate," and three were 
 married. In 1840, a reinforcement of five 
 was sent to this mission. During the same 
 year also, six laborers set out for middle 
 India, upon the invitation of several English- 
 men. In the following year another com- 
 pany left Germany for the Chatham Islands. 
 In 1843 an attempt was made to establish a 
 mission in New Caledonia ; but those who 
 were destined to this field, on arriving at 
 Sydney, concluded to join their brethren at 
 Moreton Bay. A similar fate attended an 
 effort to commence operations at Mergui, in 
 1844 ; the company sent forth for this pur- 
 pose having concluded to establish them- 
 24 
 
 selves in Ohuta Nagpoor, some three hun- 
 dred miles west of Calcutta. In 1846 a man 
 and his wife went to Madras to take charge 
 of an orphan school ; of them nothing parti- 
 cular is known. During the same year 
 Gossner was persuaded to send " a dismissed 
 Basle missionary" and three others to West 
 Africa, near Cape Coast. Quite recently 
 three brethren have been sent to Java ; and 
 a like number have gone to the Tubuai 
 Islands. 
 
 Gossner prepared his young friends for 
 their future labors with little or no expense 
 to himself. He also endeavored to make 
 the missions undertaken by them as light a 
 burden upon his treasury as possible. In- 
 deed, the support of some of these missions 
 was assumed by others. For the large com- 
 pany sent to Australia in 1837, he provided 
 merely an outfit and the cost of the journey 
 to Scotland. The expense of the passage to 
 Australia was paid by the Irish Presbyterian 
 church ; and Dr. Lange agreed that the 
 wants of the mission, after its arrival, should 
 bo supplied by the Scotch Presbyterian 
 church of Australia, it being understood 
 that the missionaries should connect them- 
 selves with that body. The two who went 
 to Madras in 1846, were supported by oth- 
 ers. How far the Bengal mission, com- 
 menced at the instance of Rev. Mr. Start, 
 was to be a charge upon Gossner, does not 
 appear ; and the same is true of the Middle 
 India mission ; though it is presumed that 
 both were expected to receive important 
 assistance, if not all which they should re- 
 quire from other sources. The Java mission 
 is to be supported, in part at least, by the 
 Dutch. 
 
 The remaining missions looked originally 
 to Berlin for all the aid they should need ; 
 but it was a part of Gossner's plan that, as 
 far as possible, they should be cheap and 
 self-supporting. This was one argument, in- 
 deed, for sending forth such a number of 
 mechanics, though their qualifications in 
 some respects must have been of a very or- 
 dinary character. 
 
 It is to be regretted that we have no full 
 and accurate history of Gossner's experi- 
 ments ; for the facts elicited thereby would 
 doubtless throw much light upon the expe- 
 diency of attempting to conduct missions 
 upon plans different from those which are 
 generally adopted. Certain points, however, 
 appear to have been pretty*vvell settled. 
 1. It is not always safe to rely upon the 
 promises of individuals for a support. Thi-s 
 has been proved, according to the author 
 of Das Missionswesen der Evangelischen 
 Kirche, by the history of the missions to 
 Australia, Bengal and Middle India; inas- 
 much as they were soon left unprovided for, 
 and were obliged to rely upon their own la- 
 bor, or look to Gossner for help; and they 
 
870 
 
 GOVERNOR'S HARBOR—GREECE. 
 
 had, for this reMon, but a sickly existence, 
 even if tliey escaped anuiliilation. The last 
 of Uic three, indeed, lived only a short time. 
 
 2. The attomi)t to carry out the self-support- 
 ing plan, as far as possible, has occasioned 
 the loss of many lives, particularly in India. 
 
 3. A number have abandoned the missions 
 with which they were at first connected, and 
 gone into the service of other societies. 4. 
 And it is even claimed by the author of the 
 Missiofiswesen, that the greater economy of 
 Gossner's missions, as compared with other 
 German missions, is rather apparent than 
 real. 
 
 If definite information is asked in regard 
 to the present state of the missions, the 
 commencement of which has been already 
 described, it is not easy to give it. Gossner 
 publishes no annual reports ; and his Biene 
 auf dem Missiousfelde is deficient in statis- 
 tics. 
 
 Prior to 1842 Gossner had the sole man- 
 agement of his various operations. In that 
 year it was deemed expedient that a society 
 should be organized ; and on the 19th of 
 September the " Evangelical Union for the 
 Spread of Christianity among the Natives 
 of Heathen Lands" obtained a legal exist- 
 ence. There has been but little change, 
 however, in the mode of conducting the 
 business. Gossner may be regarded as the 
 embodiment of the society. In an humble 
 dweUing outside of the walls of Berlin, far 
 back in a garden, where no one would think 
 of looking for him without a special direc- 
 tion, he receives those who are candidates 
 for the missionary work ; and there he 
 transacts the business of his society. Though 
 quite aged, he is exceedingly active, full of 
 vivacity, simple, benevolent, a Lutheran, yet 
 Tery catholic ; and a transient visitor will 
 have no difficulty in believing that he may 
 have a strong hold upon the confidence and 
 affections of a portion of the good people of 
 Germany. 
 
 He has never sought to establish auxilia- 
 ries, or other subordmate organizations. 
 His treasury receives the free will offerings 
 (amounting to not quite ^5,000 a year,) of 
 all such persons as see fit to make use of 
 this channel to send the Gospel to the hea- 
 then ; and that is the whole story. To those 
 who go forth from under his care he makes 
 no pledges. They must trust in God. " I 
 promise you nothing," he says ; " you must 
 go in faith. And if you cannot go in faith, 
 you had better not go at all." Those whom 
 he accounts suitable persons to preach the 
 Gospel, he ordains prior to their departure. 
 He was once asked if he had the right to 
 ordain. Ilis reply was, " Not for Germany, 
 but I have for the heathen." None of his 
 missionaries have received any other ordina- 
 tion. 
 
 From the January number of the " Biene 
 
 auf dem Missionsfeld," it appears that the 
 receipts of this society during 1853 were 
 5,308 Thl. ; and that the disbursements 
 amounted to 4,871 Thl. Four missionaries 
 were sent forth for the first time, two to the 
 stations on the Ganges, and two to the Cele- 
 bes. — See Missionary Herald, June, 1852. 
 
 GOVERNOR'S HARBOR: A station 
 of the Baptist Missionary Society in the Ba- 
 hamas W. I. 
 
 GOWHATTI : A city in Assam, a station 
 of the Mission of the American Baptist Mis- 
 sionary Union in Assam. 
 
 GRACE BAY ; A station of the Mora- 
 vians in Anti^^a, W. I. 
 
 GRACEFIELD : A station of the United 
 Brethren in Antigua. 
 
 GRAHAM'S-TOWN : The capital of the 
 frontier district of Albany, in the Colony of 
 the Cape of Good Hope, in South Africa. It 
 is situated in a rich pastoral and agricultu- 
 ral country, with fine woods, and sources of 
 wealth of every kind. The London and 
 Wesleyan Societies have stations at this 
 place. 
 
 GRAAF-REINET : A beautiful village in 
 South Africa, in the district of Graaf-Reinet, 
 on a branch of the Sunday river, and at the 
 foot of the Sneeuwbergen. The streets are 
 wide, laid out at right angles, and lined with 
 rows of lemon trees. It is copiously sup- 
 plied with water, and rich in vegetation, in 
 which it exceeds any town in the Colony. It 
 contains about 100 highly respectable Eng- 
 lish residents, and about 1,500 Hottentots, 
 Kaffres, and emancipated slaves. The Lon- 
 don Missionary Society and the Gospel Pro- 
 pagation Society both have missions at this 
 place. 
 
 GRACEHILL : A station of the Moravi- 
 ans in Antigua, W. I. 
 
 GRAND BAHAMA : One of the "West In- 
 dia Islands, 63 miles long by 9 broad, with 
 but few people — a station of the Baptist 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 GRAND CAYMAN : A small island about 
 260 miles N. W. from Jamaica, a station of 
 the Wesleyans. 
 
 GRATEFUL HILL: A station of the 
 Wesleyan Society in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 GREAT PLAINS: A Karen village in 
 Southern Arracan, an out-station of the 
 American Baptist Mission in Arracan. 
 
 GREECE is situated between the 36th 
 and 40th degrees north latitude, and the 20th 
 and 24th degrees east longitude. It is bound- 
 ed on the north by Macedonia and Albania 
 proper, on the east by the uEgean sea, on the 
 south by the Mediterranean, and on the 
 west by the Ionian sea. The length of 
 Greece proper is not more than 250 miles, 
 and its mean breadth is about 150 miles. It 
 contains a little more than 23,000 square 
 iniles, exclusive of Macedonia, Albania, and 
 the Islands. But notwithstanding the nar- 
 
GREECE—MISSIONS. 
 
 371 
 
 row limits of Greece, it has attracted more 
 attention than almost any other country for 
 three thousand years, and its poets, orators, 
 sculptors and architects, have been the ad- 
 miration of the world. By her mental su- 
 periority Greece became mistress of nations, 
 and by her own degeneracy she was precip- 
 itated from this proud eminence. But this 
 is so familiar a portion of ancient history 
 that the facts need not be repeated here. 
 
 At the time of the birth of Christ, Greece 
 had lost her liberties entirely, and was of 
 no importance in the political world. But 
 in the time of the apostles and soon after, 
 the nation was converted to Christianity, 
 and this has been a principal means of pre- 
 serving its language and of keeping it dis- 
 tinct from other nations. Passing on to the 
 9th century, we find the Greek or Romish 
 Churches engaged in a fierce controversy, 
 the Pope excommunicating the Grand Patri- 
 arch of Constantinople, the acknowledged 
 head of the Greek Church, and the Patri- 
 arch thundering bulls of excommunication 
 against the Pope. From this period histo- 
 rians date the separation of the Christian 
 world into the Romish and Greek Churches, 
 — a separation which has ever since been 
 widening. 
 
 Some of the points of difference between 
 the Romish and Greek Churches are the 
 following : The Greeks deny the supremacy 
 and infallibility of the Pope of Rome, but 
 regard their Patriarch as head of the true 
 Catholic Church. The Greek Church con- 
 demns as idolatrous the use of images, as 
 practised in the Romish Church ; but for 
 images it substitutes pictures. It does not 
 condemn its priests to celibacy, but no priest 
 can marry a second time, nor can any mar- 
 ried priest rise to the rank of bishop. It 
 rejects the doctrine of purgatory, but orders 
 masses for the souls of the dead. Unlike 
 the Romish Church, it does not condemn the 
 people to an ignorance of the Scriptures. 
 But the invocation of the saints and the 
 worship of the Virgin Mary, is carried to as 
 great an extent in the Greek as in the Rom- 
 ish Church. 
 
 For several centuries the Greeks were 
 subject to various masters, by all of whom 
 they were harshly treated. Their last op- 
 pressors were the Turks, from whose yoke 
 they freed themselves by the revolution 
 which terminated successfully in 1830, and 
 which was- followed by the acknowledged 
 independence of the Greek nation. 
 
 The geographical situation of Greece is 
 most favorable, being situated in a central 
 position between Europe, Asia and Africa ; 
 her climate is delightful without being ener- 
 vating ; her vegetable and mineral produc- 
 tions are various and inexhaustible ; her 
 people enterprising, industrious, and intelli- 
 gent ; and only the prevalence of a pure 
 
 Christianity is needed to give her again the 
 high relative position which she once held. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 The American Bqard entered upon its 
 mission to Greece in 1830, by the appoint- 
 ment of Rev. Jonas King as missionary to 
 that country. He commenced his labors in 
 the island of Tenos, where, during the first 
 year, he had under his care a female school 
 of thirty or forty pupils. At the same time 
 he employed himself in distributing Bibles 
 and tracts, and in selling a Greek Spelling 
 Book, prepared by Rev. Mr. Temple, and is- 
 sued from the Mission press of the IBoard at 
 Malta. Mr. King's school was established 
 in the principal town in Tenos, where had 
 been built a modern church called the Evan- 
 gelistria, the most magnificent edifice in 
 Greece, and to which hundreds of pilgrims 
 resorted every year, chiefly the lame, the 
 sick, and the lunatic, brought there to be 
 miraculously healed of their maladies. It 
 was the central point of superstition in 
 Greece ; and yet the principal men in the 
 place sent their daughters to Mr. King's 
 school. Scarcely a year had passed, how- 
 ever, before opposition was made by the 
 Romish bishop, to whose authority a third 
 of the inhabitants were subject, some of the 
 books used were denounced as heretical, and 
 the school became the subject of opprobrious 
 remark through the town. Still Mr. King 
 held on his way, having usually over fifty 
 scholars present ; and just at this time, as 
 if to rebuke the Romish opposition, the go- 
 vernment sent him a box of ancient Greek 
 books, and the government gazette pub- 
 lished an expression of gratitude to the 
 Americans for the books they were furnishing 
 to the Greeks, at the same time highly com- 
 mending Mr. King's school and the general 
 course of instruction pursued in it. From 
 this time the opposition ceased. In the au- 
 tumn of 1830 the Greek School Committee 
 of New York forwarded to the President of 
 Greece, through Mr. King, a box containing 
 3,456 slates and 74,000 pencils, at the same 
 time placing at the disposal of Mr. King 
 ^335 for the purchase at Malta of element- 
 ary school books in modern Greek. The 
 slates and pencils were gratefully acknow- 
 ledged in the official gazettes of Greece. 
 
 But Mr. King had been desirous from the 
 first of making Athens the centre of his ope- 
 rations, and in the spring of 1831 he re- 
 moved to that place. He immediately opened 
 a Lancasterian school, at the head of which 
 he placed a distinguished Greek scholar, and 
 in one month the school contained 176 scho- 
 lars of both sexes. He soon divided his 
 school into two, one for boys and another 
 for girls, and established a third in a neigh- 
 boring village. He also maintained a regu- 
 lar Greek, service on the Sabbath in his 
 
872 
 
 GUEECB. 
 
 principal Kchool, besides a regular preaching 
 Bervice in his own house. 
 
 In January, 1833, Mr. Elias Riggs, a grad- 
 uate of Amherst College and a thorough 
 Bcholnr, arrived in Athens, and became as- 
 Bociated with Mr. King in the work of the 
 mission. One month after his arrival the 
 now king Otho, with the regency, reached 
 the country, and Greece bec^ime free from 
 Turkish rule. The new government was 
 soon organized, and the Greek church was 
 made the established religion of the king- 
 dom. The highest ecclesiastical authority 
 was vested, under the king, in a permanent 
 council, bearing the name of the '• Holy 
 Council of the Kingdom of Greece." This 
 Council was required to watch diligently 
 over the doctrines of the Greek Church, and 
 especially over the contents of books de- 
 signed for the youth and the clergy, and 
 treating of religious subjects ; and whenever 
 they were assured that any man was en- 
 deavoring to disturb the established church 
 by false doctrine, by proselyting, or by any 
 other means, they were required to call upon 
 the secular power to apply a remedy to the 
 evil. The laws respecting common schools 
 were liberal, and designed to extend the 
 benefits of education to all the people. On 
 the whole, the missionaries apprehended 
 more embarrassment in the prosecution of 
 their efforts in the kingdom of Greece, than 
 they had experienced under the Turkish 
 government. 
 
 In the autumn of this year, Messrs. King 
 and Riggs spent a month in visiting the is- 
 lands of Syra, Hydra and Spetsae ; and Na- 
 poli and Corinth in the Peloponnessus. 
 Another month Mr. Riggs spent in travers- 
 ing the Peloponnessus, with a view to de- 
 termining upon the most eligible place for 
 his future residence, as he had resolved upon 
 removing from Athens. But at home or 
 abroad their main objects were kept in view, 
 and within a few months they distributed 
 gratuitously 8,251 school books and tracts 
 in modern Greek, 226 Testaments and Psal- 
 ters, 19 copies of the Pentateuch and book 
 of Joshua, and one Turkish Bible and one 
 Turkish Testament. 
 
 The schools at Athens were at this time 
 less in number, but of a higher order, than a 
 year or two previous. The higher school, 
 called the " Evangelical Gymnasium," plan- 
 ned by Messrs. King and Riggs with refer- 
 ence to a systematic course of instruction, 
 was noticed in a Greek newspaper called 
 "The Minerva," which, in publishing the 
 plan of the Gymnasium, prefaced it with the 
 following editorial remarks, which it is pleas- 
 ing at this date to recur to. The following 
 is an exact copy of the remarks : 
 
 '• The venerable Mr. Jonas King, known 
 for his charities and beneficence to almost 
 all the sutt'erers in the time of our struggle, 
 
 and, since the settlement of the afiairs of 
 our nation, devoted to the work of enlight- 
 ening it, has sent us the new organization 
 of his gymnasium at Athens, which we has- 
 ten to publish in our paper, that the public 
 may see how well the sincere friends of hu- 
 manity know what are the best means of 
 benefiting it, and bringing it to its true hap- 
 piness. Far from attributing to the vener- 
 able King, or others, any designs of prose- 
 lytism, which designs, did they exist, would 
 in the nineteenth century be rather ridicu- 
 lous than worthy of regard, we cannot but 
 express the gratitude of our nation to Ame- 
 ricans who have set such a worthy example 
 while we would also proclaim the virtues of 
 the venerable King, especially the diligence 
 and assiduity which he, as well as his col- 
 leagues, exhibit for our illumination." 
 
 One month after this the Gymnasium con- 
 tained sixty-six scholars, and the prepara- 
 tory school seventy-six. Mr. Riggs gave a 
 course of lessons on the evidences of Chris- 
 tianity, and went through with an epitome 
 of the Old Testament history, besides con- 
 ducting a Sabbath school composed of mem- 
 bers of the preparatory school; and Mr 
 King gave lessons twice a week, once on the 
 historical parts of the Old Testament, and 
 once on the doctrinal parts of the New. His 
 Greek preaching in his own house, on the 
 Sabbath, was also continued. 
 
 In June^ 1834, Mr. Riggs took up his 
 residence in the renowned city of Argos. 
 He immediately opened a school for females, 
 assisted by his wife, and in a month or two 
 they had 40 scholars. During the year 1835, 
 the Scriptures were very extensively dif- 
 fused among the Greeks. Mr. King alone 
 distributed by sale and gratuitously, 2,656 
 copies of the New Testament, and parts of 
 the Old, in modern Greek, and 25,896 school 
 books and religious tracts. These were dis- 
 tributed in the Peloponnessus, in continental 
 Greece, Thessaly, Macedonia, and the is- 
 lands ; and he could have disposed of many 
 more, had not his stock been exhausted. 
 Mr. King also continued his Gymnasium, 
 and in this year four of his most advanced 
 pupils came to this country to complete their 
 education. Mr. Riggs, besides continuing 
 his school at Argos, prepared a series of 
 questions in modern Greek on Genesis, and 
 also a series of maps in Greek, illustrating 
 the science of geography. About this time 
 King Otho issued a decree authorizing the 
 establishment of a national bookstore, con- 
 nected with the royal printing-press, which 
 was to furnish all books on education to be 
 used in the schools within the kingdom. A 
 Greek paper, printed at Athens, boldly took 
 the ground that this was the first systematic 
 attempt to shut out all light from Greece, 
 and that it was a measure which the Greeks 
 could not and would not endure. 
 
GREECE. 
 
 373 
 
 In November, 1836, Rev. Nathan Benja- 
 min and wife arrived at Argos as mission- 
 aries of the Board. They had begun now to 
 encounter increasing jealousy and opposition, 
 and to increase this feeling a tract was pub- 
 lished against the Americans, which meant 
 all missionaries and Bible agents from what- 
 ever quarter they had come. Still Dr. King 
 had his usual number of hearers on the Sab- 
 bath, and during the year 1836, ho distri- 
 buted nearly 5,000 copies of the New Testa- 
 ment in modern Greek, and over 4,000 school 
 books and religious tracts. Mr. Riggs also dis- 
 tributed 1,600 copies of Scriptures and tracts. 
 
 In 1837, Dr. King discontinued his Gym- 
 nasium, the government having established 
 a Gymnasium and University at Athens. 
 During this j^ear 24,736 books were distri- 
 buted, of which 4,432 were new Testaments. 
 On one day Dr. King had 45 Greek soldiers call 
 on him for books. In May of this year. Rev. 
 Messrs. Samuel R. Houston and George W. 
 Leyburnand their wives, arrived at Areopolis, 
 the chief town of the province of Laconia. 
 They immediately commenced the erection 
 of a Lancasterian school-house, large enough 
 to accommodate 200 scholars, and also took 
 measures for the establishment of two other 
 schools, one for boys, and one exclusively 
 for females. 
 
 In 1838 the station at Argos was discon- 
 tinued, and Mr. Riggs removed to Smyrna, 
 and Mr. Benjamin to Athens. The books 
 sold and distributed this year at the depot 
 established by Dr. King at Athens, amounted 
 to 32,410 copies. Not less than 20,000 copies 
 of the Scriptures, or parts of them, were 
 distributed in Greece during the year. Of 
 Areopolis and its Spartan population, Mr. 
 Houston writes at this time : — " They seem 
 never to have been either a commercial, a 
 manufacturing, or an agricultural people. 
 All their buildings, their roads, many articles 
 of their household furniture and their dress, 
 have been evidently designed for a state of 
 war. Their implements of husbandry are of 
 the most ancient and rude methods of con- 
 struction. The hand-mill, turned by women, 
 is used in most of their villages. Saddles 
 and bridles are unknown, as well as wagons 
 and carriages of every kind. Bedsteads, 
 tables, chairs, knives and forks, are very rare. 
 At the bishop's house myself and two mule- 
 teers dined out of the same dish, all sitting 
 cross-legged on the iloor. The inhabitants 
 are all Greeks. No Catholics, Jews, Arme- 
 nians, or Turks are to be found among them." 
 
 Early in 1839 the government allowed a 
 teacher to be procured for the Gymnasium 
 at Areopolis, and soon that school contained 
 170 pupils. In July of this year. Dr. King 
 began to preach in the new chapel, which 
 had been finished through the liberality of 
 friends in the city of New York. The whole 
 number of copies of books and tracts distri- 
 
 buted from the depository at Athens this 5'ear 
 was 52,285. The printing executed at Athens 
 was 26,800 copies of books, making 1,413,400 
 pages, all in modern Greek. Among the 
 books printed was Baxter's Saint's Rest, 
 translated by Dr. King. 
 
 The year 1840 witnessed the translation 
 of Barnes' Notes on the Gospel of Matthew, 
 the Youth's Book of Natural Theology, and 
 a book of Scripture Stories, by the brethren 
 at Areopolis. The printing at Athens this 
 year amounted to 2,880,000 pages. A society 
 was formed this year called the Education 
 Society, designed to provide a juvenile liter-' 
 ature, and the missionaries were recognized 
 as fellow-laborers in this work.* 
 
 In 1841 the government required that one 
 of the catechisms used in the Greek church 
 should be introduced into the school sup- 
 ported by the Board at Areopolis. This 
 catechism taught the worship of pictures, 
 with other superstitions, which could not be 
 countenanced ; and as the government would 
 not yield the point, the station at Areopolis 
 had to be abandoned. Mr. Houston joined 
 the mission to the Nestorians in Persia, and 
 Mr. Benjamin joined Mr. King at Athens. 
 The schools at Athens having been given up, 
 the missionaries employed themselves in 
 preaching, translating, and the circulation 
 of books and tracts. Among the transla- 
 tions were Dr. Beecher's sermons on tem- 
 perance. The abandonment of the station 
 at Areopolis, for the reason assigned, was a 
 testimony against the errors of the Greek 
 Church, of the most public and decisive char- 
 acter, and was regarded as honest and con- 
 sistent by the Greeks themselves. 
 
 Nothing unusual occurred in 1842. In 
 1843, Mr. Benjamin closed his connection 
 with this mission and removed to Trebizond, 
 and Dr. King alone remained a.t Athens. 
 The reasons for this change may be found in 
 a long article written by Dr. King, setting 
 forth the peculiar obstacles in the way of a 
 successful mission among the Greeks, and 
 published in the Annual Report of the Board 
 for 1844. 
 
 In the earl}'- part of 1844, the enemies of 
 the truth made an attempt to oblige Dr. 
 King to retire from the field. This brought 
 him into controversy in one of the principal 
 newspapers of Athens, on the dearest of all 
 the superstitions of the Greeks — the worship 
 of the Virgin Mary — and his opponents were 
 perplexed hy the proofs then given that one 
 of the saints of their own calender, Epipha- 
 nius, had taught the same doctrine with the 
 missionary on this subject. Dr. King pub- 
 lished also this year a' volume entitled the 
 " Prayers of the Saints," a collection of pray- 
 ers from the Bible, and appended " Direc- 
 tions with regard to Prayer," consisting of 
 passages from the Bible, showing to whom 
 prayer should be offered, and through what 
 
374 
 
 GREECE. 
 
 mediation. He had other works in view, 
 but WM interrupted by the passage of a law 
 dosijrned to secure the Greek Church against 
 duniror from this quarter. Just before the 
 passiiiro of this hiw, Dr. King wrote thus : 
 
 • Tlu- Ci reeks, though manacled and bound 
 for ages, were not made for slaves. The Greek 
 mind will ha free, and being free it will act, 
 and its action will be felt in Europe, Asia, 
 and Africa. Only think of twenty-five news- 
 papers in Athens, a Constitution, freedom 
 of the press, a University, Gymnasium, and 
 many schools both for males and females ; and 
 I, a stranger, permitted to make a defence, 
 which, in Spain or Italy, would have con- 
 signed me tft the Inquisition. And in the 
 midst of all the attacks which have been so 
 furiously made upon me, I have still con- 
 tinued my regular services on the Lord's day, 
 and have been surprised to see that so many 
 dared to attend." 
 
 This language was too complimentary, as 
 it soon appeared, for Dr. King was subjected 
 to prosecution in the courts of Greece, for his 
 work on the worship of the Virgin Mary, and 
 that notwithstanding he had drawn entirely 
 from the writings of some of the most approved 
 saints in the Greek Calendar,in the form of ex- 
 tracts from Epiphanius, Chrysostom, Basil, 
 Irenaeus, Clemens, Eusebius, Pamphili, &c. 
 This book, a duodecimo of 220 pages, received 
 the most pointed condemnation of the Greek 
 Synod, in August 1845, which Synod "ex- 
 communicated as blasphemous and impious, 
 the defence of the Oalvinist and Nestorian 
 Jonas King, and prohibited to every ortho- 
 dox Christian the reading of it, and called 
 upon one and all to deliver it immediately to 
 the fire." It prohibited also " all and every 
 kind of connection with this most impious 
 heretic," such as saluting or greeting him in 
 the street, entering his dwelling, or eating, 
 or drinking with him. And the Synod, not 
 content with this, demanded that the author 
 be prosecuted by the Government. He was 
 accordingly prosecuted, and the case went 
 against him in three successive trials, the 
 last of which was before the Areopagus, or 
 highest court of appeal. The efiect of these 
 judgments was to pass Dr. King over to the 
 Criminal Court for trial as to the truth of 
 the charges, and the infliction of punishment. 
 This trial was to take place at Syra, and to 
 that place Dr. King repaired, with the two 
 Greek lawyers who had nobly and ably de- 
 fended him before the Areopagus. But be- 
 fore landing it was ascertained that Dr. 
 King's life would be in danger, and accord- 
 ingly a postponement of the trial was se- 
 cured, and he returned to Athens. 
 
 Arriving at this place in July 1846, he at 
 once received the generous offer of British 
 protection from the Ambassador, Sir 
 Edmund Lyons ; and the American Consul 
 also, Mr. Mulligan, kindly interfered in his 
 
 behalf. Dr. King now resumed the preach- 
 ing service in his own house, which was at- 
 tended by about thirty persons. 
 
 For a little time this persecuted mission- 
 ary pursued his work, subject to frequent 
 abuse, and threats, and violence ; and on 
 learning that the " Minister of the Interior" 
 had the power and had expressed a willing- 
 ness to banish him from Athens and from 
 Greece, he determined, with the advice of 
 his lawyers and other friends, to depart 
 voluntarily, in which case he could return at 
 any time without a permit. He accordingly 
 set out for Geneva, where he arrived August 
 25, 1847. From Geneva he proceeded to 
 Malta, where he arrived November 1st ; and 
 in Juno 1848, he returned again with his 
 family to Athens. His letter to the Com- 
 mittee of the Board on this occasion, an- 
 nouncing his arrival and reception, his rea- 
 sons for returning at that time, the course of 
 the press, and the probable result of his 
 trial, is a document of extraordinary interest, 
 but it cannot be inserted in this work. It 
 may be found in the Report of the Board 
 for 1848. 
 
 Dr. King did not for some months resume 
 religious services in his chapel on the Sab- 
 bath ; but his book depository was opened, 
 and Bibles, Testaments, and religious books 
 of various kinds were in demand. 
 
 In January 1848, six months after his re- 
 turn, he had printed one thousand copies of 
 the " Prayers of the Saints ;" 6,410 copies 
 of the Decalogue ; and 2,000 copies of the 
 " Dialogue between the Bible and a Sinner ;" 
 amounting in all to 593,510 pages. On the 
 13th of February he commenced prea^ching 
 publicly, and one of his hearers was a mili- 
 tary officer, and brother of the King's at- 
 torney. He continued preaching in his 
 chapel through the year without molesta- 
 tion. 
 
 In the spring of 1850, the Government 
 took measures for a second prosecution 
 against Dr. King, on the ground of proselyt- 
 ism ; and in May he was called to appear 
 before a judge to answer to this charge. 
 The examination at this trial was in the 
 form of question and answer between the 
 judge and the accused, and sets the great 
 prudence and wisdom of the latter in a 
 strong light. See report of the Board for 
 1851. 
 
 Dr. King met with no serious interrup- 
 tion in his labors until September 1851, when 
 he received an order from the Council of 
 Judges in the Criminal Court of Athens, to 
 submit to trial as one guilty of having 
 preached in his own house doctrines, prin- 
 ciples, and opinions, contrary to the basis of 
 the religion of the Oriental Church. From 
 this Court he appealed to the higher Court of 
 the Areopagus. The Areopagus decided 
 that the penal law forbidding the expression 
 
GREECE. 
 
 375 
 
 of sentiments and opinions contrary to the 
 basis of religion and morals, did not apply 
 in the case of Dr. King. Notwithstanding 
 this, the Criminal Court, to which the case 
 was remanded for trial, declared him guilty 
 of this very offence against that law, and 
 condemned him to imprisonment, and after 
 that had expired, to banishment from the 
 kingdom. 
 
 In these circumstances Dr. King enjoyed 
 the friendly interference of our government, 
 as well as the sympathy of a large number 
 of able lawyers and other distinguished gen- 
 tlemen in Athens. The sentence was not 
 enforced to its full extent, and the persecu- 
 ted missionary continued his labors, distrib- 
 uting during the year 1852 the Scriptures 
 and other useful books to the amount of 
 nearly half a million of pages. 
 
 The Herald for May 1854, announced that 
 Dr. King had been formally notified by the 
 Greek government, that he was free " from 
 the penalty of exile imposed on him by the 
 decision of the Criminal Court of Athens." 
 He therefore continues his labors, preaching 
 and distributing the Scriptures, besides 
 printing and circulating large numbers of 
 tracts and other books. The United States 
 Government has taken up his grievances, of 
 which a full investigation has been made by 
 its representative, Hon. Mr. Marsh, who has 
 made an able report to his government, 
 favorable to Dr. King ; but the final settle- 
 ment of the case has not yet transpired 
 Rev. E. D. Moore. 
 
 American Episcopal Board. — The mis- 
 sion of this Board to Greece was pre- 
 ceded by an exploring tour by Dr. Rob- 
 ertson. In the fall of 1830, the mission 
 was commenced by him and Rev. Mr. Hill, 
 at Tenos, but was afterwards removed to 
 Athens. They took with them two printing 
 presses, under the superintendence of Mr. 
 Bingham, which were usefully employed in 
 issuing such publications as circumstances 
 called for. They were successful also in 
 collecting poor children into schools, who 
 were instructed in the word of God. This 
 small beginning grew into a large establish- 
 ment, and in 1834, it was recognized as the 
 Goveimvient Seminary for the instruction of 
 female teachers. In 1836, it numbered 
 between 600 and 700 scholars. This mission, 
 with its schools, has continued to prosper to 
 the present time, though, on several occa- 
 sions, a storm of opposition was raised, 
 which threatened its destruction. Yet, by 
 the good hand of God upon them, Mr. Hill 
 and his associates have been able to main- 
 tain their ground, with increasing prospects 
 of usefulness. The committee in their re- 
 port for 1853, say that the mission continues 
 to be an object of regard with the people ; 
 and that it is quietly, yet efficiently, doing a 
 work which must exercise an important in- 
 
 fluence upon the spiritual welfare ot those 
 among whom it is conducted. Dr. Hill says, 
 " Our schools are quite full. We are obliged 
 every day to refuse the most pressing appli- 
 cations. Our pupils are from five to fifteen 
 years of age, and from every class of society, 
 from the daughter of the Prime Minister 
 down to the poorest. The greater part of 
 them are able to read the word of God ; 
 and not a week passes without the whole 
 having learned some portion of it, and with- 
 out, at least, some important truth having 
 been taught them. I have lately received a 
 very flattering testimonial of the favor in 
 which our mission is held by the Greek 
 Government. The Minister of the Interior 
 has sent me a large and elegantly executed 
 map of Greece, accompanied by an official 
 note, in which he says, 'For the use of the 
 Institution, which is so admirably conducted 
 under your direction, and as a mark of the 
 estimation in which it is held by us, we have 
 the pleasure of offermg. Reverend Sir, a copy 
 of the new map of the kingdom of Greece.' " 
 With reference to the general state of the 
 missionary work. Dr. Hill remarks : " While 
 the influence of our missionary operations is 
 every where felt, we are happy to find that 
 God is raising up among the clergy of the 
 Greek Church those who agree with us in 
 making His word the all-important means of 
 salvation." And he quotes from a lecture 
 recently delivered by one of the educated 
 clergy of the Greek Church, who has re- 
 cently been appointed by the Government 
 as public preacher in the capital, to a Bible 
 Class of young females in one of the public 
 schools, which is replete with evangelical 
 sentiments. 
 
 Stations were also commenced and main- 
 tained for some time at Syra and Crete j but 
 they have since been abandoned. 
 
 American Baptist Missionary Union. — 
 The mission of the American Baptist Union 
 in Greece, had its origin in the sympa- 
 thies which had been awakened in the Uni- 
 ted States in behalf of a people, whose an- 
 cient splendor and power present a striking 
 contrast to their present feebleness and in- 
 significance — a people to the genius of whose 
 ancestors the civilized world with one ac- 
 cord acknowledges its unceasing obligations. 
 The Protestant denominations had already 
 established missions in the country, when in 
 the summer of 1836, the Baptist Board of 
 Missions appointed Messrs. Cephas Pasco 
 and Horace T. Love missionaries in Greece. 
 They were ordained in September of that 
 year, and sailing soon afterwards, they ar- 
 rived at Patras in the following December. 
 The place at which the mission was to be es- 
 tablished, had not been determined by the 
 managers, and the missionaries at first fixed 
 their residence at Patras, a town in the 
 kingdom of Greece containing at that time 
 
376 
 
 about 7,000 inhabitants. So soon as their 
 •cquaintancc with the lanfruage would allow, 
 they opened a school with the sanction of 
 the government, which was soon attended 
 by 40 scholars, and also devoted themselves 
 to the circulation of the Scriptures and 
 tracts. They were required to report all 
 their proceedings to the government, and 
 the Holy Synod of the Greek Church, find- 
 ing that the Scriptures which they circulated 
 were not of the authorized version, soon is- 
 sued a decree forbidding them to be read, 
 and commanding them to be burned wher- 
 ever they might be found. The decree, 
 however, was but little regarded, save by a 
 few of the priests, who alone attempted its 
 enforcement But the attempt was futile, 
 and served only to stimulate a curiosity 
 which before was latent among the people. 
 
 In July, 1839, Mrs. Harriet E. Dickson 
 was appointed a teacher in the mission, and 
 went to reside at Patras. She was a Scot- 
 tish lady who had resided several years in 
 Greece, where, with her husband, now de- 
 ceased, she had been connected with the go- 
 vernment school in the island of Corfu. Mr. 
 Pasco having returned to the United States 
 in consequence of ill-health, the operations 
 of the mission were confined to Patras and 
 its neighborhood, until April, 1840, when 
 Mr. Love was obliged by the unfriendly cli- 
 mate of that place to remove with his family 
 to Corfu, which, for several years, became 
 the principal seat of the mission. Corfu is 
 the capital of the Ionian Republic, and con- 
 tains a population of upwards of 25 000, of 
 whom perhaps 10,000 are English, Italians 
 and Jews. In August, 1840, Mr. Love bap- 
 tized the first Greek convert, who, being a 
 person of superior intelligence, soon became 
 an assistant in the mission, and was appoint- 
 ed to resume its operations at Patras, where 
 he labored among his countrymen for seve- 
 ral years with commendable fidelity. In 
 the summer of 1841 Mr. and Mrs. Buel were 
 sent by the managers to join the mission at 
 Corfu — the former being already ordained 
 as a minister of the Gospel, while the latter, 
 a lady of superior cultivation, was appointed 
 to teach in the mission schools. Mr. Love 
 preached to such congregations of Greeks 
 as he was able to gather, and Mr. Buel com- 
 menced a service in English for the English 
 residents of the island, and also distributed 
 tracts among the native population. In con- 
 sequence of this latter work in which he 
 was engaged, a report was set on foot that 
 the tracts were against the religion of the 
 country, especially against their favorite 
 Saint Speiridion, and on the day preceding 
 Christmas, 1841, the festal day of the Saint, 
 Mr. Buel having become an object of popular 
 jealousy, was insulted by the mob, and at 
 length attacked with open violence and dri- 
 ven to his own house. Hither he was pur- 
 
 GREECB. 
 
 sued by the mob, who broke into the house 
 and destroyed the bibles, tracts and other 
 books, as well as much of the furniture 
 which it contained. Mr. Buel and the mem- 
 bers of his family were rescued from the 
 peril to which they were exposed, only by 
 the interposition of the commander of the 
 British garrison, who escorted them with a 
 strong guard, to the castle. So intense was 
 the excitement among the people that a few 
 days afterward it gave rise to a collision be- 
 tween them and some soldiers of the garri- 
 son, which was brought to a close only after 
 the destruction of several lives. The affair 
 was, on subsequent inquiry, found to have 
 its origin in false and exciting reports which 
 had been circulated respecting Mr. Buel and 
 the character of his tracts. Though the 
 other missionaries were not molested, it was 
 deemed prudent that he should withdraw 
 for a period from active participation in the 
 mission. He accordingly passed the two 
 following years at Malta. Mr. Love, in ad- 
 dition to preaching, had devoted mucli of his 
 time to the preparation of evangelical tracts 
 and the translation of several of the most 
 approved school books, especially relating to 
 Christian morals and kindred subjects, some 
 of which the Commissioner of Instruction 
 allowed to be introduced into the schools of 
 the island. They were also introduced into 
 many of the schools of Patras in the king- 
 dom of Greece. The assistant, whose name 
 was Apostolos, was here still engaged in pro- 
 secuting the labors of the mission. He en- 
 tered with ability and zeal into the plan of 
 introducing the new books into the schools, 
 and in the winter of 1842 brought to Mr. 
 Love at Corfu, two converts who professed 
 to have received the Gospel, and who now 
 solicited baptism at the hands of the mission- 
 ary. They were soon baptized, but on their 
 return to Patras, they found their country- 
 men so excited against them, because they 
 had become Americans, as was said, that, 
 together with Apostolos, they withdrew to 
 Athens, and the mission at Patras was 
 henceforth discontinued. 
 
 The health of Mr. Love had long been de- 
 clining in the climate of Greece, and early in 
 1843 he was compelled to return to the Uni- 
 ted States, and here, after waiting for two 
 years in the hope of a return to the mission, 
 he withdrew from the service of the Board. 
 The school at Corfu was continued by Mrs. 
 Dickson. In 1843 the kingdom of Greece 
 was convulsed with a political revolution 
 which had long been threatening. It re- 
 sulted in the establishment of a freer consti- 
 tution, which, however, though it contained 
 provision for religious freedom, also specially 
 prohibited all attempts at proselyting. Its 
 operation has been such that, w^hile every 
 man is allowed to exercise the religious faith 
 which he already professes, no one is allowed 
 
GREECE. 
 
 377 
 
 to persuade another to change his faith. But 
 as in all other countries, the actual freedom 
 of religion has been found to depend rather on 
 the spirit of the government and the people, 
 than on any specific provisions of the consti- 
 tution, and though Protestant missionaries 
 are alwa3"s restricted in Greece, they yet 
 encounter but few obstacles which prudence 
 and address may not remove or overcome. 
 On the establishment of the new constitu- 
 tion, Mr. Buel returned to Greece and went 
 to reside at the Pirseus, where Apostolos had 
 for some time been living. He immediately 
 engaged in revising the translations already 
 made by Mr. Love, of books for schools and 
 popular reading. Of these the principal was 
 President Wayland's " Elements of Moral 
 Science," a work which has since passed 
 quite beyond the sphere of missionary influ- 
 ence, and has been received with unusual 
 favor by teachers, professors in the univer- 
 sity, and scholars of every degree. It has 
 been adopted as a text-book in the Gymna- 
 sia and Hellenic schools both of Greece pro- 
 per and the Ionian Islands, and has become 
 a common authority in morals among the 
 people, often with the avowed approval of 
 the ecclesiastics themselves. 
 
 In February, 1844, the mission was rein- 
 forced by the arrival of Rev. Albert N. Ar- 
 nold and Mrs. Arnold and Miss S. E.Waldo, 
 who had been appointed by the managers. 
 The ladies immediately associated themselves 
 with Mrs. Dickson in the management of the 
 schools. Mr. Arnold, while acquiring the 
 language, commenced a service in English for 
 the benefit of the English regiments stationed 
 at Corfu. Several other philanthropic and 
 religious labors which had hitherto been per- 
 formed by Rev. Mr. Lowndes, an English 
 clergyman of the Island, were now in conse- 
 quence of his removal devolved on Mr. Ar- 
 nold. To these his attention was of necessity 
 mainly confined for a considerable period 
 after his arrival, and in the unsettled condi- 
 tion of the republic at that time, the ques- 
 tion of discontinuing the mission was seri- 
 ously entertained by the managers. At their 
 !aieeting in May, 1845, they referred the mat- 
 *oer to the Executive Committee or Acting 
 Board, as it was then styled, with the autho- 
 rity to discontinue the mission so soon as 
 might be deemed expedient. The corres- 
 pondence which ensued, however, deter- 
 mined the committee to continue the mis- 
 sion for the present till other events should 
 enable them to decide more confidently re- 
 specting its final issue. This experiment has 
 been in progress ever since, and has perhaps 
 exerted an unfriendly influence on the spirit 
 and labors of the missionaries. The question 
 has been considered an open one whether 
 the mission would survive the changes of a 
 few years, and no reinforcements have been 
 sent to strengthen it. Its members, how- 
 
 ever, have prosecuted their work with steadi- 
 ness and fidelity, though with a measure of 
 success so small as to afford but little encour- 
 agement to their hopes and plans. In 1846 
 Mr. Arnold began to preach in the Greek 
 language to a small assembly of Greeks, num- 
 bering usually from thirty to forty, while still 
 continuing his other labors among the Eng- 
 lish population and the regiments of Corfu. 
 The school of IMrs. Dickson also continued 
 to prosper, and awakened a wide interest 
 both among the philanthropic residents of 
 the island and Christian friends in England . 
 and Scotland. Mr. Buel continued to preach 
 and prosecute other labors at the Pirasus, 
 where the mission was, in many respects, 
 more advantageously situated than it could 
 be at Corfu, or in any part of the Ionian 
 Republic. Its influences here were direct- 
 ed to the people of Greece — the descendants 
 of those whose genius once filled the world 
 with its renown, and who still cherish the 
 memories and traditions of their ancient 
 sires. In one respect, however, the mission 
 has encountered greater obstacles here than 
 in the Republic, and this is in the constitu- 
 tion and power of the " Eastern Orthodox 
 Church," as it is styled, which holds the 
 consciences of men beneath its sway, and 
 tolerates no dissent from the dogmas of its 
 established faith. It controls the authority 
 of the civil magistrate, directs the influence 
 of the press, and even holds the courts of law 
 in bondage to its spiritual despotism. The 
 power of this corrupt combination of priestly 
 bigotry and aristocratic pride has often been 
 brought to bear on those who have sought 
 the instructions of the American mission- 
 aries in Greece, and in some instances even 
 upon the missionaries themselves. This re- 
 mark finds its most prominent illustration 
 in the violent and inquisitorial proceedings 
 against Doctor King, one of the missionaries 
 of the American Board of Commissioners, 
 and is verified by the attempt made in 1847 to 
 extinguish the Baptist Mission at the Pineus. 
 Mr. Buel was suddenly ordered by the De- 
 march of the city " to dismiss the school il- 
 legally taught in his house." The order was 
 complied with, but the missionary still con- 
 tinued his Bible class and preaching on Sun- 
 day. A few weeks afterwards he was sum- 
 moned before the Court of Magistrates and 
 fined 50 drachmas for teaching the Sacred 
 Scriptures without a license. The case, 
 however, was carried before the Court of 
 Appeals at Athens, and ably argued by gen- 
 tlemen ardently devoted to the interests of 
 religious freedom, and the sentence was re- 
 versed. It was regarded as a signal triumph 
 of free principles, and has exerted an influ- 
 ence highly favorable to the independence of 
 Protestant missionaries residing in the coun- 
 try. They have since been molested less 
 frequently than before, though by no means 
 
878 
 
 GREEN-KEY— HERVEY ISLANDS. 
 
 eyen now exempt from liability to annoy- 
 ance both from government and people. 
 
 In October, 1851, Mr. Arnold removed 
 from Corfu to Athens. This step was taken 
 in accordance with the direction of the Ex- 
 ecutive Committee, on account of an impres- 
 sion which had long prevailed that the king- 
 dom of Greece, invested with independence 
 and nationality as it is, offered by far the 
 more inviting* field for missionary labor. 
 Mrs. Dickson remained to carry on her flour- 
 ishing and useful school at Corfu, which she 
 still continues to superintend and instruct. 
 But with this exception, the entire mission 
 since the autumn of 1851 has been confined 
 to Athens and the neighboring city of Pirae- 
 us. Its members have here continued their 
 accustomed labors with comparatively few 
 and feeble religious results, but to the gene- 
 ral spread of intelligence and of liberal sen- 
 timents they have undoubtedly contributed 
 an important part. The native converts 
 have at no period numbered more than 
 seven, but these, in one of their communica- 
 tions to the Board of Managers, claim to be 
 the most numerous Protestant communion 
 in Greece. Amid the changes which are 
 now going on both in the kingdom and the re- 
 public of Greece, the missionaries still cling 
 to the hope that new opportunities may be 
 presented for bringing the simple doctrines 
 of the Gospel in contact with the minds of 
 the nation. There is said to be a growing 
 dissatisfaction with the prevailing faith and 
 mode of worship, and an indication that the 
 beginning of a Protestant reformation may 
 not be distant. Meanwhile the missionaries 
 prosecuting such labors as their hands find 
 to do, are waiting to take advantage of every 
 change that may favor the dissemination of 
 the Gospel of Christ in its purity among the 
 people of the country. Prof. W. Gammell. 
 
 Statistics of the Mission for 1854.— Sta- 
 tions, 3 ; Missionaries, 2 ; Female assistants, 
 3 ; Native preacher, 1 ; Churches, 1 ; Com- 
 municants, 10 ; Schools, 1 ; Pupils, 52. 
 
 GREEN-KEY : A station of the Moravi- 
 ans on the island of St. Thomas, W. I. 
 
 GREENLAND: (See Labrador and 
 Greenland.) 
 
 GRENADA : One of the West India Is- 
 lands, about 20 miles in length and 10 in 
 breadth. A station of the "Wesleyans, also 
 of the Propagation Society. 
 
 GREEGREE ; A charm worn by the na- 
 tives of Africa, as a protection against evil 
 spirits. These charms are of various kinds 
 and forms, according with the stupid notions 
 of a, fetish religion. 
 
 GRIQUATOWN: Station of the London 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, 530 miles 
 north-east of Cape Town,with 8 out-stations. 
 
 GROENCKLOOF : A station of the Uni- 
 ted Brethren, in South Africa, 40 miles north 
 of Cape Town, 
 
 GUANGA : A station of the Wesleyans 
 in Kaffraria, S. Africa. 
 
 GUIANA: (See British Gtiiana and 
 West Indies.) 
 
 GUNGREE: A station of the London 
 Missionary Society in Hindostan. 
 
 GUY'S HILL : A station of the Wesley- 
 ans in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 HABAI : A station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society in the Friendly Islands. 
 
 IIADGEE, or HADJI : The title of a Mo- 
 hammedan who performs a pilgrimage to 
 Mecca. 
 
 HAN A : A station of the American Board 
 in the Sandwich Islands, on Maui. It is 
 situated in a beautiful locality, the whole 
 country being crowned with the richest ver- 
 dure. In front of the mission house is an 
 immense bluff, with a precipice 400 feet high, 
 in which are two caves, in one of which tradi- 
 tion says Kaahumanu was bom, and in the 
 othernursed. 
 
 HANKEY: A station of the London 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, near 
 Gamtoos, with an out-station at Kruis Fon- 
 tein, commenced in 1825. The site of this 
 station is on a dry, barren land, near the 
 Gamtoos river, surrounded by hills, render- 
 ing it unfit for sustaining a large population. 
 Here the genius and activity of the mission 
 ary have, by much perseverance, triumphed 
 over the obstacles of nature, in making a 
 tunnel through one of these hills, leading the 
 waters of the Gamtoos over a large tract of 
 land, thus giving the people labor, and afford- 
 ing the means of support and comfort. 
 
 HARMATTAN : A dry easterly wind in 
 Africa, which destroys vegetation. 
 
 HASTINGS : A town of liberated Afri- 
 cans, in the River District, Sierra Leone, 
 West Africa, near Regent's Town : Church 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 HAURAKI : A district in New Zealand, 
 containing four tribes of natives, among whom 
 the Church Missionary Society have a 
 mission. 
 
 HAWAII : The largest of the Sandwich 
 Island group, being 97 miles in length and 
 78 in breadth, 280 in circumference, contain- 
 ing a surface of 4,000 square miles. The 
 greater part of the cultivated land is near 
 the sea-shore, along which the towns and 
 villages of the natives are thickly scattered. 
 A gradual and unbroken ascent leads from 
 the sea-shore to the summits of three mount- 
 ains which enclose a central valley, the crater 
 of an immense volcano, called Mauna Loa. 
 The American Board have 6 stations on this 
 island. 
 
 HAYTI : See West Indies. 
 
 HENTHADA : A large town in southern 
 Burmah on the Irrawaddy, 120 miles from 
 Rangoon. A station of the mission of the 
 Am. Baptist Missionary Union in Burmah. 
 
 HERVEY ISLANDS : A group of is- 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 379 
 
 lands in the Southern Pacific, situated be- 
 tween lat. 19^ and 21^ S., and long. 156° and 
 161° "West. It embraces Mangaia, Atiu, 
 Aitutaki, Mauke, Mitiaro, and Hervey's 
 Island. Population, 7,000. 
 
 HIERARCHY : An ecclesiastical system, 
 comprehending different orders of clergy. 
 
 HILO : A district on the western coast 
 of the island of Hawaii, forming, in connec- 
 tion with Puna, the parish of Rev. Mr. 
 Coan, formerly a missionary of the American 
 Board, now pastor of the native church, 
 from whom he receives his support. 
 
 HINDOST AN : Boundaries and Surface.— 
 The name Hindosian, was given to the south- 
 ern portion of India by the Persians, and 
 signifies, literally, " negro''^ and '-'■ negroland?'' 
 But as now used, to designate the entire 
 country south of the Himalaya mountains, 
 the term is of European origin. The vast 
 triangular country, called Hindostan, lies 
 between the 8th and 35th degrees of north 
 latitude. It is bounded on the north by the 
 Himalaya mountains, the highest in the 
 world, on the N. E. and N. W., by the rivers 
 Brahmaputra and the Indus, and on every 
 other side by the ocean. It comprises an area 
 of over 1,200,000 square miles, or about one- 
 third part of the estimated area of Europe. 
 The proportion of solid land is even greater 
 than this, on account of the absence of inland 
 waters. The surface of the country is of a 
 very marked character. In the northern 
 portion are three great ranges of mountains, 
 rising, one higher than the other, as we pro- 
 ceed northward, with elevated valleys be- 
 tween. These vallej'^s, themselves, are from 
 2,000 to 4,000 feet above the level of the sea. 
 The east and west Ghauts are also noted 
 ranges, some of their granite peaks rising to 
 the height of 8,000 feet. The great coal 
 field, which is a distinguishing feature of this 
 country, is 65 miles in length and 12 in 
 breadth, running on both sides of the river 
 Damoda. Three pits only have been sunk 
 to the depth of 90 feet. The coal is largely 
 consumed in Calcutta for forges and steam 
 navigation. The geology of Hindostan is 
 very simple, compared with that of European 
 countries, consisting of only four classes of 
 rocks, viz. : the granite, the sand-stone and 
 clay slate, the trap, and the alluvial. 
 
 Rivers and Lakes. — The rivers of this 
 country have their sources either in the 
 Himalaya mountains, or within the great 
 central table-land. The principal of these 
 are the Brahmaputra and the Ganges. The 
 first of these, from its source to the Bay of 
 Bengal, is about 350 miles. Having a rapid 
 current, and passing generally through a wild 
 and inhospitable country, it is of but little 
 use for purposes of navigation. The Ganges 
 has its source in about 20 degrees N. lat., 
 and runs 1,350 miles, emptying into the Bay 
 of Bengal, a few miles from the Brahmaputra. 
 
 The Ganges has several important branches, 
 as the Soane, the Hoogly, the Jumna, &c. 
 Hindostan contains no lakes of importance, 
 either of salt or fresh water, at least none that 
 can be compared with those of N. America, 
 or even of Switzerland or Scotland. 
 
 Coast and Climate. — The coast of Hindos- 
 tan is very little broken by inlets of the sea. 
 The only gulfs of importance are those of 
 Cutch and Cambary. The only good harbor 
 is that of Bombay. The climate of the 
 country is greatly diversified, owing in part 
 to its alternation of lofty mountain ranges 
 and deep valleys ; partly, also, to the mon- 
 soons, which, as a general rule, blow from 
 the N. E. during the serene temperate 
 months of winter, and from the S. W. during 
 the tempestuous and hot or rainy months of 
 summer. The year has been generally 
 divided into three well-defined seasons, viz., 
 the hot, the wet, and the cold. The mean 
 temperature of Bombay is 82° Fah. At 
 Madras the mean temperature is 84°, and at 
 Dawar, on the table-land, it is 75°. At Cal- 
 cutta it is 79°. In May, the hottest month, 
 the thermometer rises at Calcutta, to 100°, and 
 in winter it falls nearly to the freezing point. 
 
 Native Population.— The number of abor- 
 iginal races in Hindostan, differing in lan- 
 guage, manners, &c., is very great. Of these 
 races, eight have been considered as distin- 
 guished from the rest by a degree of supe- 
 riority in civilization, the arts, language, liter- 
 ature, and the richer and more extensive terri- 
 tories which they occupy. These are the Ben- 
 galee, Oriya, Mahratta, Gujratee, Telinga, 
 Tamil, Karnata, and Hindi, or Hindostanee. 
 The Bengalee nation occupies above 80,000 
 square miles of fertile land, chiefly within the 
 delta of the Ganges, and comprises a population 
 of nearly 25,000,000. The Tamil nation oc- 
 cupies 56,000 square miles, at the southern 
 extremity of the peninsula, with a population 
 of nearly 7,000,000. The Telinga people 
 occupy 100,000 square miles of the N. E. 
 portion of the peninsula, and number proba- 
 bly 7,000,000 or 8,000,000. The Oriya nation, 
 covering 17,000 square miles of the low land 
 which connects the delta of the Ganges with 
 the south peninsula, numbers about 4,000,000. 
 The Mahratta nation extends over nearly 
 200,000 square miles, between the 22d and 
 23d degrees of N. lat., and its population is 
 estimated at about 12,000,000 of people. The 
 Karnata, or Canara nation, numbers about 
 5,000,000, and are found upon the extensive 
 table-land south of the 18th deg., N. lat. The 
 people speaking the Hindostanee language, 
 occupy the upper portion of the valley of 
 the Ganges, and number about 20,000,000. 
 The most enterprising of these nations, it is 
 to be observed, have occasionally passed, 
 either as conquerors or colonists, into the 
 territories of each other, or of their neigh- 
 bors. Thus we find colonies of the Tamils 
 
380 
 
 IIINDOSTAN. 
 
 •ettlod in the Malnyalim, of Tclinp^as in 
 Karnata and the Tamil country, of Mahrat- 
 tas in tho Telin^ra. Tamil, and Ivarnata coun- 
 tries, «fer. These colonies not unfro(picntly 
 prc^orvo their national lanfruajro, their ori- 
 pfhal manners, and their purity of descent, 
 in their adf)i)t4jd countries. The barbarous 
 and savajre tribes of India are to be 
 found in the recesses of mountains, never in 
 the fertile plains or extensive table-lands. 
 These barbarous tribes are considered abori- 
 ginal, in common with others of the plains, 
 and their savage character is ascribed to 
 their unfavorable situation, and the hostility 
 of the powerful occupants of the lower and 
 more fertile rep;ions. 
 
 Foreign Settlej-s. — Besides the original 
 and peculiar inhabitants of Ilindostan, a 
 crowd of foreign colonists or settlers of 
 different nations, form a considerable portion 
 of the present population of the country. 
 They are confined to particular spots, or scat- 
 tered indiscriminate!}^ over the country, ac- 
 cording to the place of their arrival, or other 
 causes. These several classes of foreign 
 population, following the order of their sup- 
 posed arrival, are as follows, viz.: Jews, 
 Syrian Christians, Arabs, Armenians, Par- 
 sees, Persians, Afghans, Tartars, Turks, 
 Abyssiniaus, Portuguese, English, Dutch, 
 French, Danes, and Chinese. 
 
 Relii^wm. — The principal religion of the 
 160,000,000 of Ilindostan— about one-half 
 the population of Europe — is Brahmitiism, 
 (which see.) The other forms of religion 
 are the Jain, Budhist. Seik, Mohammedan, 
 and Christian. The first of these forms of 
 religion prevails chiefly in the great provinces 
 of Gujrat and Talawa, on the western shore 
 of Indui, but more or less of it is found scat- 
 tered throughout the country. The Budhist 
 religion is supposed to have originated in 
 Bahar, within the great plain of the Ganges ; 
 but though so prevalent in Ceylon, and in 
 countries to the E. and N., it is nearly ex- 
 tinct in Ilindostan. The Seik form of reli- 
 gion was originated by Nanak, in 1419, and 
 is confined to the N. W. part of Ilindostan. 
 The Mohammedan religion appeared in In- 
 dia about the beginning of the 11th century, 
 and its adherents are supposed, for all India, 
 to amount to about one-seventh of the entire 
 population. The Christians abound most 
 in the southern portion of the country. The 
 greater number are Nestorians, who are sup- 
 posed to have embraced Christianity through 
 the labors of Greek missionaries from Syria, 
 as early as the 2d and 3d centuries. Most 
 of the remainder are Catholics, the descend- 
 ants of the Portuguese and persons converted 
 by Portuguese missionaries. 
 
 Languages. — There are more than fifty 
 native languages spoken throughout Ilindos- 
 tan. Some Hindoos of the northern portion 
 of the country are acquainted with three dead 
 
 languages, viz. : tho Sanscrit, tho Saraswatty 
 or Pracrit, and tlie Pali. Of these three, tho 
 Sanscrit contains internal evidence of being 
 tho oldest. It was the language of a people 
 who, according to a very probable Hindoo 
 tradition, occupied the Jumna, a little to Iho 
 N. W. of Delhi, and with it probably origin- 
 ated the Brahminical religion, and the first 
 dawn of Hindoo civilization. The Pracrit 
 was the language that succeeded it in the 
 same country, and it seems to bear the same 
 sort of relation to it that the Italian does to 
 the Latin. The Pali is a language that 
 sprung up in the province of Bahar. Of this 
 also, the Sanscrit forms the ground-work 
 With the people speaking the Pali language 
 sprung up the religion of Budha ; and the 
 Pali is to this day the sacred language of all 
 the Asiatic nations who have Budhism for 
 their national worship. The existence of 
 these three languages, that have necessarily 
 ceased to be spoken, affords evidence of the 
 great antiquity of Hindoo civilization. One 
 or other of the languages in question, is more 
 or less mixed up, not only with every lan- 
 guage of Ilindostan, but also with the lan- 
 guages of most of the neighboring countries. 
 To the north they form the ground-work of 
 these languages, as Latin does of Italian ; to 
 the south they are engrafted on the language 
 somewhat as tho French is on our Saxon 
 tongue. The literary Hindoos reckon that 
 there are ten cultivated languages, having a 
 written character and a literature. The 
 enumeration of these languages, however, is 
 not very distinct as applicable to the present 
 times. The Hindee is the most cultivated 
 and generally spoken of all the native lan- 
 guages of Ilindostan. Besides the local lan- 
 guage of each district, the Hindee is com- 
 monly spoken by all persons of education, 
 throughout all parts of India. Of the dead 
 languages the Sanscrit is as much studied in 
 India as the Latin is in Europe. Then there 
 are eight languages spoken by a very numer- 
 ous population, twenty spoken by a people 
 less numerous but still civilized, and at least 
 thirty spoken by rude tribes ; making in all 
 fifty-eight living languages. This may be 
 taken as conclusive evidence that all India 
 was never subject to one government, and 
 never thoroughly united in large masses. To 
 the native languages above enumerated, must 
 be added the Persian, as much used as Latin 
 is in Europe ; the Arabic, often studied from 
 religious motives; the Portuguese, a good 
 deal spoken in some parts of the maritime 
 coast ; and the English, which is making 
 considerable progress. 
 
 Literature. — The largest portion of Hin- 
 doo literature is contained in the dead San- 
 scrit, that which is found in the living lan- 
 guages being little else than translations, 
 or paraphrases from it. To Hindoo litera- 
 ture in any language, prose composition is 
 
^ Of thb"^. 
 
 UITI7BRSIT 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 381 
 
 hardly known. Every thing is In verse, 
 even works on astronomy, medicine, and 
 grammar. These facts are evidence of great 
 antiquity and rudeness, and they also show 
 tjiat for 2,000 or 3,000 years at least, native 
 literature has made little progress. The two 
 most celebrated works of Hindoo literature 
 are the Mahabarat and the Ramayana ; the 
 one giving an account of the wars of Bharat, 
 and the other, the adventures of Rama, king 
 of Ayndhya, a supposed incarnation of Vishnu, 
 the " Preserver of the Hindoo Triad." 
 These fictions are considered not only ex- 
 travagant and contradictory to all the physi- 
 cal laws of the globe, but prolix, trifling and 
 childish to the last degree. 
 
 Science. — Hindoo science is confined chiefly 
 to arithmetic, algebra, geometry, and astro- 
 nomy. They are allowed to be the invent- 
 ors of the system of notation, which the 
 Arabs borrowed from them and we from the 
 Arabs. In the science of geography, medi- 
 cine, botany, &c., the Hindoos are extremely 
 ignorant. In grammar they have made large 
 pretensions, and they have constructed a 
 very valuable grammar of the Tamil, and 
 the Sanscrit has been thoroughly sub- 
 jected to rules. In astronomy the Hindoos 
 pride themselves, but in this they can lay no 
 claim to originality ; neither have they ever 
 applied it to any practical purposes, except 
 in a very imperfect manner, to reckoning 
 time. 
 
 Arts and Agriculture. — The arts in which 
 the Hindoos have made the greatest progress 
 are agriculture, weaving, dyeing, and archi- 
 tecture. Their agricultural implements are 
 simple and rude, and their mode of using 
 them equally so. Their greatest skill in 
 agriculture has been displayed m works of 
 irrigation, consisting of embankments, reser- 
 voirs or tanks, and wells. The reservoirs 
 are often of vast extent, and capable of con- 
 verting 4,000 or 5,000 acres of dreary, sandy 
 desert, into productive corn-fields. Their 
 wells are often sunk to the depth of 300 
 feet. The articles cultivated by the Hindoos 
 from very early times are wheat, barley, 
 rice, millet, pulse, sugar-cane, mustard — the 
 cocoa, areca, and other palms — cardamoms, 
 black-pepper, cotton, the mulberry, indigo, 
 madder, and the banana — also many other 
 productions common to the climate. The 
 ox, horse, hog, bufialo, elephant, dog, sheep, 
 and goat, have been domesticated and used 
 by the Hindoos from the earliest antiquity. 
 The common poultry is of equal antiquity 
 among them. 
 
 In the art of weaving the Hindoos were 
 skilled at a very early period, particularly in 
 the weaving of cotton, silk, and the hair of 
 the Thibetian goat. The cotton plant is 
 
 grown almost every where in Hindostan. 
 
 Their silk weaving has never equaled that 
 
 of China, the raw material being inferior. 
 
 The Cashmerians, the manufacturers of tho 
 well known shawls which bear their name, 
 are descended from .the genuine Hindoos, 
 who were the nearest neighbors to the rudo 
 tribes to whom the shawl goat belonged. 
 The invention of the shawl manufacture may 
 therefore be fairly ascribed to the Hindoos. 
 Their architecture is of the simplest kind, 
 except that which is dedicated to religion. 
 Their temples, however, are alike distin- 
 guished for their magnitude and durabil- 
 ity, and for their grandeur and beauty. The 
 Mohammedans introduced a much higher 
 order of architecture, in the construction of 
 their mosques and mausoleums. In useful 
 architecture,such as dwelling houses, bridges, 
 roads, &c., the Hindoos have made very lit- 
 tle progress. 
 
 Physical and Intellectual Character. — In 
 respect to race, the Hindoos have been re- 
 garded by naturalists as belonging to what 
 they call the Caucasian or European j but 
 this is proved by the best modern writers to 
 be untrue. The European is white, the Hin- 
 doo black, or nearly so. The European has 
 an endless variety in the color of the hair 
 and of the eye, while with the Hindoo the 
 hair is always black, and the eye a dark 
 brown. In physical force, the Hindoo is 
 below not only the European, but even the 
 Arab, the Persian, and the Chinese. The 
 intellectual character of the Hindoos corres- 
 ponds to their physical. They have subtil- 
 ty, but not much originality or practical 
 good sense. In vigor and manliness of 
 mind they are below the Arabs and Persians. 
 In moral character the Hindoos rank ex- 
 tremely low. Candor, integrity, and ingen- 
 uousness of mind, cannot be said to exist 
 among them. Judicial perjury is said to be 
 practiced in Hindostan on a wider scale than 
 in any other country. The Hindoos are gen- 
 erally credited with frugality, patience, do- 
 cility, and even industry ; but their frugality 
 is akin to avarice, and their docility to pas- 
 siveness. They about as readily submit to 
 wrong and oppression, as make an effort to 
 improve their condition. 
 
 British Rule. — The great body of the Hin- 
 doos had, for six centuries before the com- 
 mencement of the British government, been 
 under the dominion of foreigners, and of 
 foreigners more energetic than themselves, 
 if not more civilized. Their conquerors 
 were Asiatics, with complexion, manners, 
 customs, &c., approaching to the natives, 
 with whom they to a considerable extent 
 associated. Even in matters of religion, 
 where the difference was widest, a good de- 
 gree of toleration was allowed, and the Hin- 
 doo converts to Mohammedanism were ad- 
 missible to the highest offices of state. So 
 that, on the whole, the Hindoos were rather 
 gainers by their subjection to a foreign do- 
 minion. 
 
88S 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 British rule may bo considered as having 
 been praclioally established in India for a 
 period of aboutUO years. This government, 
 fn it« practical operation, may bo reparded 
 «8 an enlightened despotism ; a good deal 
 controlled by the public opinion of English- 
 men on the spot, and to a much smaller ex- 
 tent by Purliament and public opinion in 
 England. The British Government in India 
 has been divided into three periods, the last 
 of which commenced in 1814, and comes 
 down to the present time. The influx of 
 Europeans into India since 1814, has result- 
 ed in something like a public and independ- 
 ent opinion at the principal seats of com- 
 merce, which serves to modify the despotic 
 character of the government. The press of 
 India, which was formerly under a rigorous 
 censorship, is now thrown open, and em- 
 ploys itself in redressing public and private 
 wrongs. The government which England 
 administers in India is in many respects op- 
 pressive, and liable to great abuses. An 
 English writer says, " It is not a national 
 government, nor is it as yet a government 
 carried on by conquerors who have made 
 the slightest progress towards naturalization 
 or amalgamation with the party governed. 
 "We are aliens in blood, in manners, in lan- 
 guage, and in religion, carrying on the ad- 
 ministration of 80,000,000 of people, and ex- 
 ercising a control over 50,000,000 more, at a 
 distance of 12,000 miles. The local govern- 
 ment is purely vicarial, and the essential ad- 
 ministration rests with men residing at a 
 vast distance, who never saw the country, 
 and who have no actual knowledge of its 
 manners and institutions. These men them- 
 selves are perpetually changing, and look 
 upon Indian affairs as matters of very sec- 
 ondary importance to domestic and Euro- 
 pean politics. The local governments, in- 
 stead of being responsible to the parties 
 whose administration they conduct, are only 
 amenable for their acts to their political 
 friends in Europe, while the affairs of India 
 are too complex, too extensive, and too re- 
 mote, to be understood by,' or for the most 
 part, to excite any interest in, the people 
 and Parliament of England. In India, gene- 
 rally, the acts of the local government are 
 secretly prepared without consulting or at- 
 tempting to conciliate the parties for whom 
 the laws are made." 
 
 However true and just these statements 
 may be, there is another side to the picture, 
 which it is rnore pleasing to contemplate. 
 With evident candor and fairness, the Com- 
 mittee of the American Board, in their re- 
 port for 1846, say : 
 
 '• It is a deeply interesting fact that the 
 British government in India is almost every 
 year assuming a more Christian character, 
 and adopting a more humane and liberal 
 policy. The declaration of the government 
 
 now is, that it is not pledged to the support 
 or countenance of Hindooisra, that the prm- 
 ciple which guides it is, that all religions 
 professed by its subjects shall be equally tol- 
 erated and protected ; and that, contrary, to 
 what has till recently been the law of the 
 land, the Hindoo may embrace Christianity 
 and break caste without the forfeiture of 
 property, or any other of his civil rights and 
 immunities. On this principle the govern- 
 ment is going steadily forward, suppressing 
 those disgusting and inhuman rites connect- 
 ed with Hindooism which war upon society, 
 correcting the abuses which have grown up 
 under the unn'atural state of things which 
 has long prevailed in India, encouraging edu- 
 cation, the arts and usages of more enlight-, 
 ened nations, and giving Christian truth free 
 scope to exert its purifying and elevating 
 power over the public mind. In this manner 
 God is breaking down barriers and opening 
 the way for the spread of the Gospel in 
 India." 
 
 This view of the nature and influence of 
 British rule in India, corresponds with the 
 still more recent statements of the mission- 
 aries, and will be regarded as more than 
 sufficient to counterbalance the temporal 
 and incidental evils resulting from the ad- 
 ministration of the government. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 American Board. — The missions of the 
 American Board in Hindostan, or India, 
 have been of long standing, and have been 
 eminently successful. They now occupy 
 Bombay^ Ahmednuggur, Satara, liolapur, 
 Madura^ Arcot, and Madras. Of the work 
 accomplished at each of these places only 
 a comprehensive view can bo given, and 
 this will be best done by noticing each field 
 separately, as far as practicable. 
 
 Bombay. — The first missionaries of the 
 Board to India arrived at Calcutta in June 
 1812, and were followed by others in 
 August. These brethren all received their 
 instructions from the Board at Salem, Feb. 
 7, 1812, and as this was the first foreign 
 missionary entQrprise of the American Board 
 of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, and 
 these its first missionaries, their names may 
 properly be given. They were. Rev. Messrs. 
 Adoniram Judson, Samuel Nott, Samuel 
 Newell, Gordon Hall, and Luther Rice. On 
 reaching Calcutta, they found the country 
 so embroiled in war, that to enter upon a 
 mission there was impossible, and after a 
 little delay, Messrs. Hall and Nott proceed- 
 ed to Bombay. (For a description of the 
 place, see article, Bombay.) Mr. Judson 
 and Mr. Rice, soon after reaching Calcutta, 
 changed their sentiments and joined the 
 Baptist mission. Mr. Newell spent some 
 time in visiting the Isle of France and Cey- 
 lon, before going to Bombay. It was left to 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 383 
 
 Messrs. Hall & Nott, therefore, to commence 
 the first mission of the Board in India. At 
 first they were embarrassed by the opposi- 
 tion of the government, and it was not till 
 early in the year 1814 that the missionaries 
 " were fairly settled in their work." Never 
 did men show a more earnest, self-sacrific- 
 ing devotion to their Master. In a letter 
 dated September, 1815, the missionaries 
 say : " We have made so much proficiency 
 in the Mahratta language as to be able to 
 enter upon the great work of preaching the 
 Gospel to the heathen. We have also com- 
 menced the work of translating the Scrip- 
 tures into the Mahratta language." Two 
 months later they say : "We have translated 
 a Harmony of the Gospels and several tracts, 
 copies of which are now in circulation among 
 th© heathen." In November, 1816, Mr. 
 Bardwell and his wife reached Bombay, and 
 joined the mission. In March of this year, 
 the first printing-press at Bombay went into 
 operation,and 1,500 copies of a Scripture tract 
 of eight pages were issued. During this year 
 also, the establishment and care of schools was 
 entered upon. Thus, in three years from the 
 time of entering this field, these devoted ser- 
 vants of Christ were preaching the Gospel 
 to the benighted Hindoos in their native 
 tongue, circulating, from their own press, 
 translations of the Scriptures and of tracts, 
 and gathering heathen children and youth 
 into the mission schools. In 1818 they had 
 eleven schools, and six hundred boys under 
 instruction. In view of so important a fact 
 the missionaries say : " In these schools we 
 seem to see a thousand Hindoo hands at 
 work, from year to year, in undermining the 
 fabric of Hindoo idolatry." 
 
 In 1818 the mission reported three sta- 
 tions, — one the seat of the mission, in the 
 " great native town of Bombay j" one at Ma- 
 him, about six miles north, with a popula- 
 tion of about twenty thousand ; and a third 
 at Tannah, the chief town of Salsette,distant 
 from Bombay about twenty-five miles, and 
 separated only by a narrow strait from a 
 dense and wide spread population on the 
 continent. Messrs. Nichols and Graves oc- 
 cupied the out-stations. During this year, 
 Caranja, an island near Bombay, containing 
 10,000 inhabitants, was explored ; and also 
 Choule, a place upon the coast thirty miles 
 south of Bombay. Places still farther dis- 
 tant were also visited, and their population 
 and condition ascertained. The schools had 
 now increased to twenty-five, with 1200 hea- 
 then children and a hundred Jewish, and as 
 many more of occasional attendants ; and 
 meanwhile the mission press was constantly 
 turning off portions of Scripture, tracts, and 
 elementary school books. Thus rapidly did 
 the field whiten under their labors. 
 
 In November, 1821, Mr. Bardwell arrived 
 at Boston with his wife and child, he having 
 
 been compelled to leave the mission on ac- 
 count of declining health. Four months after 
 the departure of Mr. Bardwell, the mission 
 sustained another severe loss in the death 
 of Mr. Newell, who, as has been stated, was 
 one of the four young men who first offered 
 themselves to the Board as missionaries to 
 any part of the heathen world. He fell a 
 victim to cholera morbus. In 1822 a mission 
 chapel was erected at Bombay, at an ex- 
 pense of about ^4,500, ^1,700 of which was 
 subscribed in Bombay and Calcutta, and the 
 rest in this country. The dedication of this 
 first Christian temple on the western side of 
 the Indian peninsula, took place on the 12th 
 of May, 1823, and was a memorable event. 
 The dedication services, with the exception 
 of one English hymn, were all in the Mah- 
 ratta language. In the following June the 
 observance of the monthly concert was com- 
 menced in this chapel. 
 
 Near the close of 1822, the missionaries 
 sent out two Jewish schoolmasters, with 
 6,000 copies of extracts from the Scriptures, 
 and numerous tracts, in the Mahratta lan- 
 guage, for distribution among the people. 
 They had scattered about 2,000 copies, when 
 they were arrested by the local authorities 
 and sent back with their books to Bombay, 
 the Governor in Council saying that books 
 exposing the corruptions of heathenism 
 would endanger the public tranquillity. In 
 1824 the mission was strengthened by the 
 arrival of Mr. Frost and Mrs. Graves ; but it 
 was visited with sore bereavement soon 
 after, in the death of Mr. Nichols of the tan- 
 nah station, who had been seven years 
 among the heathen, most of the time preach- 
 ing to ihem in their native language. 
 
 In 1825 a society was formed at Bombay, 
 under the auspices of the English Governor, 
 called the Bombay Native School Book and 
 School Society, designed to promote the 
 education of Hindoo children. At this pe- 
 riod the missionaries were able to report 
 very gratifying progress in the education of 
 heathen girls, in spite of the strong native 
 prejudices, 75 being under instruction. The 
 whole number of children in the schools 
 was 1,750, 133 of them of Jewish parentage. 
 
 On the 20th of March, 1826, the mission 
 suffered a severe loss in the death of Mr. 
 Hall, one of the two by whom the mission 
 of the Board at Bombay was established. 
 He was seized with the cholera, while on a 
 preaching tour on the Continent, and died 
 in eight or nine hours. One of his last ef- 
 forts was, an appeal to American Christians 
 in behalf of the 12,000,000 of people who 
 speak the Mahratta language, and on whom 
 the Bombay mission might be brought to 
 bear. Just before the death of Mr. Hall, an 
 important event occurred, viz. : the forma- 
 tion of the " Bombay Missionary Union," an 
 association of missionaries of the London, 
 
884 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 the rhurch, and the Scottish Missionary So- 
 cioties, which had stations in various parts 
 of India, and those of the American Board. 
 The members of these missions all united on 
 the basis of the distinguishing doctrines of 
 the Keformation,and for their common bene- 
 fit. It presented a pleasing instance of mu- 
 tual chari t}' and affection, among those who 
 were striving alike for the evangelization of 
 the heathen. Soon after the death of Mr. 
 Ilall, the stations at Makim and Tannah 
 were given up, and in 1826 Mr. Graves was 
 the only missionary of the Board at Bom- 
 bay. 
 
 In 1827, Rev. Messrs. Cyrus Stone and 
 D. 0. Allen joined the mission, having em- 
 barked at Boston in June of that year. Dur- 
 ing this year the Missionary Union, just 
 named, formed a " General Tract Society," 
 to aid Christians of all denominations in 
 their eflforts to benefit the people of the East. 
 In their report for 1828, the missionaries 
 state that there were at that time about 
 18,000 Catholics in Bombay, most of them 
 of Hindoo origin, whose ancestors were con- 
 verted to the Romish Church some two cen- 
 turies before, when Bombay was a Portu- 
 guese colony. The Catholics, however, were 
 found to be in the same state of superstition 
 and idolatry as the other natives, and just as 
 much in need of the Gospel. 
 
 In 1830 three more missionaries arrived at 
 Bombay, viz. : Rev. Messrs. Ramsey, Her- 
 vey and Reed. In July, 1831, Mr. Garrett, 
 for ten years the faithful printer to the mis- 
 sion, died, and soon after Mrs. Allen and 
 Mrs. Ilervey were called from their earthly 
 labors. During this year the mission re- 
 ceived S5,600 from the American Bible and 
 Tract Societies, for the publication of the 
 Scriptures and of tracts, and a legacy of 
 $3,000 from an inhabitant of Bombay, de- 
 ceased, for the support of public worship in 
 the Mission Chapel. Several Hindoo con- 
 verts were received to the Mission Church 
 this year, and the Christian marriage of a 
 Brahmin was celebrated. 
 
 In 1832, twenty years after the commence- 
 ment of the Bombay mission, there were 
 twelve schools exclusively for females, con- 
 taining 320 pupils ; and eighteen other 
 schools, containing 63 girls and 1,322 boys, 
 making a total of 30 schools, and 1,705 
 scholars. Such an advance, especially in fe- 
 male education, must be considered quite 
 wonderful, in view of the total darkness 
 which rested upon the native mind when the 
 work commenced. ''There is no doubt," 
 say the Missionaries at this period, " but 
 Hindoo girls are capable of a high degree of 
 improvement in all the departments of 
 knowledge which are appropriate to their 
 station in life." 
 
 During these 20 years, the amount of 
 Mahratta printing had been 13,000,000 of 
 
 pages, including a Mahratta version of the 
 New Testament ; five natives had been re- 
 ceived to the Mission Church ; and the Gos- 
 pel had been preached to many thousands in 
 the streets and market places of Bombay 
 and on the continent. A native temperance 
 society was also formed in 1832, on the 
 principle of total abstinence from the use of 
 ardent spirits, opium, tobacco, and other 
 intoxicating drugs. 
 
 Ahmednuggur was first occupied as a sta- 
 tion in December, 1831. It is on the Conti- 
 nent, 175 miles north-east from Bombay; 
 and Messrs. Read and Boggs were the first 
 missionaries t6 this field. In describing the 
 place, they say : " There are at least fifty 
 villages within twenty miles of Ahmednug- 
 gur. Short tours have been made through 
 most of these villages, and some thousands 
 of religious books and tracts have been dis- 
 tributed. The Hindoos have received them 
 with avidity." A number of English gen- 
 tlemen residing at Ahmednuggur opened an 
 asylum in 1832 for the infirm poor, and 
 placed it under the superintendence of Mr. 
 Read. It was recorded as an encouraging 
 fact, that within one year, and on the very- 
 day appointed by the General Assembly of 
 the Presbyterian Church and other religi- 
 ous bodies in America, for prayer for the 
 conversion of the world, a spirit of inquiry 
 was awakened in this asylum, and nearly 
 half of the inmates, who numbered about 
 forty in all, were led to ask, " What shall 
 we do to be saved ?" 
 
 A Presbyterian Church was organized at 
 Ahmednuggur on the 4th of March, 1832 
 consisting of fourteen members, ten of 
 whom were Hindoos. Babajee, the Brah- 
 minic convert from the Church of Bombay, 
 was ordained elder, and Dajeeba, also from 
 the Bombay church, deacon. The mem- 
 bers of the church soon formed themselves 
 into a society for promoting temperance and 
 Christian morals in general, and 24 rules 
 were drawn up by Babajee himself. Con- 
 sidering their source, and how lately their 
 author was a blind and degraded Brahmin, 
 they form a document of very great interest. 
 (See Annual Report of the Board for 1833). 
 In January, 1833, 20 natives requested 
 baptism, one of whom was the aged mother 
 of Dajeeba, who was strongly opposed to 
 Christianity for some time after the conver- 
 sion of her son, but who finally yielded and 
 gave up her last idol to the missionary. 
 
 Babajee died of cholera, in April, 1833. 
 His death was felt to be a very great loss to 
 the mission and to the cause of Christianity, 
 in India. Although he had become an out- 
 cast by renouncing Hindooism, he was 
 much respected by all classes. His memoir, 
 in two volumes, written by one of the mis- 
 sionaries, may be found in the Library of the 
 American Board. The mission at Bombay 
 
[tifivsrsitt; 
 
niNDOSTAN. 
 
 385 
 
 was also afflicted by the death of Mrs. 
 Stone, in August, 18*33, after an illness of 
 twelve days. About this time it was re- 
 marked by the Board, that of the nine adults, 
 missionaries and assistant missionaries, 
 from this country, who had died in India, 
 only two had died of the peculiar diseases 
 of the climate. A reinforcement of five 
 missionaries and assistants reached Bombay 
 in September, 1834. A charity school for 
 native orphan girls was opened at Bombay 
 this year, thus affording another illustration 
 of the spirit and influence of Christianity in 
 its relation to the woes even of this life. 
 
 Itinerating was found to be not only one 
 of the most important means of access to 
 the heathen, but favorable also to the health 
 of the missionaries. They therefore pur- 
 sued it very extensively. Mr. Bead alone 
 traveled not less than 1,100 miles in his ex- 
 cursions into the country around Ahmed- 
 nuggur, between October, 1833, and August, 
 1834. It is remarked also that he traveled 
 without arms or a guard, the mode of travel- 
 ing best becoming missionaries of the Gos- 
 pel of peace, and that he never met with 
 either insult or harm. After all, but a small 
 proportion of the population could be 
 reached, even by the tracts and portions 
 of Scripture that were scattered by tens of 
 thousands ; for the missionaries had before 
 them the appalling and affecting fact that 
 they were almost the only laborers in a field 
 800 by 1,000 miles in extent, containing not 
 less than 2.000 towns and villages, and a 
 population of 40,000,000. 
 
 Malcolm Peth, on the Mahaburlishwur 
 Hills, was occupied as a temporary health 
 station in 1835. In 1836, Alibag was also 
 made a centre of operations. It is in the 
 Concan, the maritime portion of the Mah- 
 ratta country, and mission schools had for 
 some time been supported there. About the 
 same time a missionary was placed at Jalna, 
 in the dominions of the Nizam, or native 
 Prince, 120 miles north-west of Ahmednug- 
 gur. 
 
 Bev. Messrs. Ebenezer Burgess, Ozro 
 French, and B. W. Hume, with their wives, 
 and Miss Cynthia Farrar, sailed for Bombay 
 in April, 1838, and arrived there in the fol- 
 lowing August. In 1839 a boarding school 
 had been established at Jalna, containing 19 
 boys; and one at Malcolm Peth for girls, 
 containing 30 pupils. 
 
 The year 1839 was one of extraordinary 
 interest to the Bombay mission, not so much 
 on account of an)"- remarkable progress 
 made, as for the opposition awakened in the 
 jninds of the natives. The immediate occa- 
 sion of the opposition was, the public pro- 
 fession of Christianity made by two Parsee 
 young men named Narayan and Harripunt. 
 They were baptized by Dr. Wilson, of the 
 Church of Scotland's mission at Bombay, 
 25 
 
 and were supposed to be the first proselytes 
 from the religion of Zoroaster in modem 
 times. Their Parsee friends became much 
 enraged, and would have laid violent hands 
 on them, but they had taken refuge with the 
 missionaries. A legal process was instituted 
 against the missionaries, but in vain. They 
 then attempted to break up the schools by 
 threats against the parents, and succeeded 
 to some extent. They published a tract in 
 defence of Hindooism, petitioned the Gov- 
 ernment for protection against the influence 
 of the missionaries, &c., but all with very 
 little effect, except to show that the progress 
 of the Gospel had begun to be such as to 
 disturb the native conscience, and awaken 
 their fears for the safety of their ancient 
 system of idolatry. One year later the 
 missionaries say, "The events of the last 
 year have done much, we think, to spread 
 the knowledge of the Gospel in Ahmednug- 
 gur and the villages around. People now 
 understand that there is something in the 
 Christian religion which is powerful to the 
 conversion of men, and they are afraid to 
 come into contact with it. Formerly very 
 few in this place knew the object for which 
 we came here. Now the great mass know 
 that it is our aim to lead men from the wor- 
 ship of idols to the worship of the one 
 living and true God, and to a belief in his 
 Son Jesus Christ. Formerly the people 
 here were not afraid to enter into argument 
 with us, thinking that their religion rested 
 on a sure foundation ; now they are un- 
 willing to argue when the subject is pro- 
 posed." Naraj^an and Harripunt now ap- 
 peared among the people with entire safety, 
 the natives simply telling them it was 
 wrong for any one to forsake his religion. 
 At this period the Prudential Committee of 
 the Board in their annual report say, " Those 
 who have attended to the history of this 
 first mission of the Board, — this earliest of 
 the foreign missions of the American 
 churches, from the beginning, must perceive 
 that the Mahrattas, as a people, stand related 
 to the Christian religion very differently 
 from what they did in 1814. Much un- 
 avoidable, preliminary ground has been gone 
 over, and the truth is nearer the great mass 
 of the native intellect and heart." 
 
 In 1841, the Bombay and Ahmednuggur 
 stations, comprising what was called the 
 mission to the Mahrattas, were divided into 
 two. to be known henceforth as the Bombay 
 and Ahmednuggur missions. These places 
 were so far apart that it became incon- 
 venient and expensive for the missionaries 
 to meet for business, and hence the division. 
 The two missions date their separate exist- 
 ence from the 1st of January, 1842, and from 
 this period will receive a separate notice. 
 The station at Malcolm Peth belonged to 
 Bombay. Mr. Graves, of this station, died 
 
886 
 
 niNDOSTAN. 
 
 in December, 1843. He embarked on his 
 mission in 1817, and had been 25 years in the 
 service of the Board. 
 
 The opposition to Christianity took quite a 
 new turn at Bombay in 1843, when the more 
 wealtliy Hindoos commenced printing by 
 subscription, a series of their most popular 
 religious books in monthly numbers. None 
 of these books had ever before been printed, 
 and the manuscripts were scarce and costly, 
 but in the printed form they were afforded 
 at little cost. A Hindoo at Bombay ex- 
 pended nearly $1,800 in printing and circu- 
 lating one of the sacred books of his reli- 
 gion. Thus, a new and extraordinary effort 
 to sustain idolatry, showed that the presence 
 and power of Christianity were beginning 
 to be felt. This was still further manifested 
 a year later, when the periodical press was 
 for the first time brought to the aid of the 
 tottering system of Hindooism. Three 
 weekly newspapers and one monthly maga- 
 zine, all in the Mahratta language, and bit- 
 terly opposed to Christianity, were published 
 at Bombay. A paper was also issued at 
 Poena, a little to the south-east of Bombay, 
 and a monthly journal and three weeklies 
 in the Goozerattee language, spoken by 
 seven or eight millions in the region north 
 of Bombay, besides two papers printed in 
 the Persian language. The Goozerattee 
 papers especially attempted to refute Chris- 
 tianity by quotations from the writings of 
 Paine, Voltaire, and other infidels. Thus 
 ten newspapers and magazines in and 
 around Bombay, armed not only with all 
 that heathen learning could furnish, but with 
 the most approved weapons of infidelity, 
 were brought to bear against the religion 
 taught by the missionaries, and of course 
 the tendency was most injurious. But 
 meanwhile the mission press at Bombay was 
 never more efficient. It had the means of 
 issuing periodicals, tracts, and portions of 
 Scripture, in English, Sanscrit, Mahratta, 
 Goozerattee, Hindostanee, Persian, Arabic, 
 &c., and thus the issues of the idolatrous 
 and infidel presses were met face to face, 
 and their influence in great measure counter- 
 acted. It was with great joy and thankful- 
 ness that the missionaries at Bombay were 
 able to say, in 1845, " Thirty-three years ago 
 the doctrine of Christ crucified was unknown 
 to the people of the Mahratta country. No 
 portion of the Sacred Scriptures had been 
 given to them in their own language. Not 
 a single tract from which they could learn 
 the way of salvation, was in existence. Un- 
 broken unmixed darkness covered the land. 
 Now the sound of the Gospel has gone out 
 into all the land. The people of the most 
 distant villages have heard, at least, that 
 . " there is none other name under heaven 
 given among men whereby we can be saved, 
 but the name of Jesus." 
 
 The year 1847 was marked by an event of 
 great importance, viz : the translation of the 
 entire Scriptures into the Mahratta language, 
 thus rendering the whole volume of inspira- 
 tion accessible to a numerous people in 
 western India. In noticing this fact, the 
 Prudential Committee say, " It may bo stated 
 as a fact of some interest to the friends of 
 missions in this country, that all the Scrip- 
 tures which have been printed in Mahratta, 
 except one of the Gospels, have issued from 
 the mission press." For a history of this 
 great work they refer to the following state- 
 ment, by one of the missionaries, Mr. Allen : 
 
 " The Gospel of Matthew was printed in 
 1817. The translation of the New Testa- 
 ment was not completed and printed till 
 1826 ; though, meanwhile, some of the Gos- 
 pels and the Acts of the Apostles had been 
 printed several times. In 1830 a second 
 and revised edition of the New Testament 
 was printed. The original translation and 
 the revised edition were both made by our 
 mission. Since then all the New Testament 
 has been printed once,* and some parts of it 
 several times, by the Bible Society, as 
 altered and revised by its translation com- 
 mittee. Of this committee I have been a 
 member for nearly fifteen years." 
 
 Mr. Allen proceeds to explain the reasons 
 which had delayed the translation and pub- 
 lication of the Old Testament till the above 
 date, and adds that the whole Bible has been 
 published, not only in the Mahratta, but also 
 in the Goozerattee language, the two princi- 
 pal languages spoken on the western side of 
 India. 
 
 Amid some discouragements, especially 
 the fact that the number of converts was 
 comparatively small, the missionaries had 
 ground for saying, in 1848, "Truth is 
 gradually making an impression upon the 
 public mind, and gradually changing the 
 views prevalent in the community. Hindoo- 
 ism is losing its hold upon the people, and 
 the Hindooism of the rising generation will 
 be a very different thing from that of their 
 fathers. Christian ideas, and Christian doc- 
 trines, are quietly gaining an influence over 
 the minds of many. There is a Christian- 
 izing, so to speak, of the ideas and even the 
 language of the people." 
 
 Satara was occupied as a missionary 
 station in 1848. It is about 170 miles south- 
 east of Bombay, and is situated in a very 
 populous and fertile district. The size of 
 the place, which is about equal to Ahmed- 
 nuggur, and the numerous villages around it, 
 seemed to point it out as a very important 
 station, as it has proved to be. 
 
 The custom recently adopted by the mis- 
 sionaries of selling tracts and books, instead 
 of distributing them gratuitously, was found 
 to work admirably, and it strikingly illus- 
 trated the increasing desire of the natives to 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 387 
 
 read and learn. " The readiness to purchase 
 Christian tracts and books," says one of the 
 missionaries in 1849, " is without a parallel 
 in any part of the heathen world. The fact 
 that we have, in a single year, sold 9,000 of 
 these publications, is full of encouragement." 
 A further proof of the waking up of the 
 heathen mind was found in the fact, that the 
 paper issued from the mission press called 
 the Dnyanadaya, was widely circulated and 
 much read by the natives. In 1849 two 
 prize essays on the Ilolee, a shameful feast 
 observed among the Hindoos, were pub- 
 lished in this paper, and read by great num- 
 bers of the Mahrattas, and one of them was 
 copied into the native papers, and translated 
 into the languages of upper India. About 
 the same date the missionaries speak of very 
 interesting discussions with the Parsees. 
 The scene of debate was the sea-side, where 
 the Parsees assembled to worship the sea or 
 the setting sun ; and the disputants were 
 accustomed to sit down on the sand, the 
 auditors, to the number of several hundreds, 
 standing around. The fact that these dis- 
 cussions lasted sometimes till two hours 
 after dark, and that the crowds listened 
 with untiring interest to the end, indicated a 
 spirit of inquiry, and a deep solicitude 
 among the people to know the difference be- 
 tween heathenism and Christianity. In 
 these debates the works of Paine, Voltaire, 
 and other infidels, were brought forward 
 with great skill and familiarity by the Par- 
 sees. 
 
 An event of deep interest to the missions 
 and to the cause of Christianity in India, in 
 1849, was the passage of a law by the gov- 
 ernment, giving equal rights to all its sub- 
 jects. Up to this time, in western and 
 southern India, there had been no special 
 law for the protection of converts to Chris- 
 tianity, who were tried by heathen laws and 
 subjected to every indignity, with confisca- 
 tion of goods. After various efforts of 
 Christians in India, they at length succeeded 
 in getting a repeal of the old laws, and the 
 passage of an act protecting converts against 
 all civil disabilities and forfeiture of rights. 
 Thus one of the most serious obstacles in the 
 way of the progress of Christianity in India 
 was removed. 
 
 The influence of Christianity and its mis- 
 sions in the education and elevation of 
 females, has ever been regarded as one of its 
 most interesting features ; and on this point 
 the missionaries at Bombay are very explicit 
 and satisfactory in their report for 1850. At 
 first there was an extreme jealousy on this 
 subject, but a gradual change was wrought, 
 the wealthiest natives began to send their 
 daughters to the mission schools, and at the 
 above date thousands of females in various 
 parts of India, of all castes, were acquiring 
 the rudiments of an education. H had been 
 
 proved, the missionaries say, that native 
 females were not wanting in capacity, and 
 the way had been prepared for the establish- 
 ment of female schools by the natives them- 
 selves, and by the government. The Gov- 
 ernor-General of India, this year, issued a 
 very important declaration, requesting that 
 the Council of Education would consider its 
 functions as comprising the superinten- 
 dence of native female education ; and that 
 wherever any disposition was shown by the 
 natives to establish female schools, said 
 Council would give them all possible encour- 
 agement. 
 
 During the years 1850 and 1851, Mr. Allen 
 had devoted himself to the work of revising 
 the Mahratta Scriptures. A complete trans- 
 lation had been made, as before noticed, but 
 different books had been issued at different 
 times, in differing type and style, and the 
 effort now was to correct the translation, 
 give uniformity to the style, and put the 
 whole into one octavo volume. This work 
 would not be completed, Mr. Allen thought, 
 till the spring of 1855. While the press was 
 thus at work, doing more, it was believed, in 
 various ways, to make known Christ among 
 the people than ten men could do faithfully 
 preaching daily in the streets and bazaars of 
 the city, the direct business of preaching was 
 by no means neglected. At the close of 
 1851 there were three stated places for 
 preaching in the city of Bombay, besides 
 which "touring among the villages" occu- 
 pied a considerable portion of each year. 
 
 Among the interesting events of 1852, was 
 a series of public lectures in the mission 
 chapel, followed by a free discussion, in 
 which the natives present were allowed to 
 make inquiries and to state objections. The 
 discussions were in the Mahratta language, 
 but were reported in the religious paper of 
 the mission in both Mahratta and English, 
 and their influence was very extensive. The 
 Native Missionary Society also held meet- 
 ings on the first Monday of each month, for 
 the communication of intelligence, prayer, 
 &c., and they were among the most interest- 
 ing of the Mahratta meetings. About ^70 
 was collected, and appropriated to the erec- 
 tion of another place of preaching in a na- 
 tive city. Another occurrence of special in- 
 terest this year, was the publication of a 
 work entitled " Principles of HindooismJ'' 
 written by an educated Brahmin, to explain 
 and defend his religion. He admits that the 
 missionaries have turned the minds of many 
 from Hindooism to Christianity, that a large 
 portion of those educated in the schools 
 abandon and seek to destroy their ancestral 
 faith, that they deny the divine appointment 
 of caste, &c., and adds : 
 
 " The' ancient and noble edifice of Hindoo- 
 ism is now on all sides stoutly assailed by 
 the adherents of a hostile faith, and we are 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 filled with dismay at finding that there is also 
 treason within. No wonder that the vener- 
 able structure is already nodding to its fall. 
 I by means of this little book, seek to prop 
 np the building ; but when its size and its 
 ruinous state arc considered, what hope is 
 there that such a feeble prop can prevent its 
 falling ?" 
 
 The year 1853 was marked by no peculiar 
 changes in the mission, yet an event oc- 
 curred that will bo celebrated in the annals 
 of Ilindostan, and so nearly related to the 
 cause of Christianity as to be entitled to a 
 notice here. It was the opening, on the 
 ICth of April of that year, of the first 
 Asiatic railway connecting Bombay and 
 Tannah, a distance of twenty-four miles. 
 One of the missionaries, Mr. Hume, in de- 
 scribing this event says, ." Great was the in- 
 terest excited in the minds of assembled 
 thousands, as the first train of ponderous 
 cars, with 400 passengers, hasted away, 
 moved by some mysterious agency. From 
 the neighboring heights, at the various cross- 
 ings, and for a considerable distance along 
 the line of the road, multitudes gazed with 
 astonishment and delight at this triumph of 
 science and skill. New and more vivid im- 
 pressions regarding the immense superiority 
 of the Christian nations of the West, were 
 unconsciously received by those living 
 masses* Many of them must have felt, as 
 they never felt before, that Hindooism is in 
 conflict with the spirit of the age, and that 
 its days must ere long be numbered." 
 
 Dating the commencement of the Bombay 
 mission in 1812, the whole period thus 
 briefly reviewed is forty-one years. The 
 general view taken is sufficient to show that 
 during this period changes of immense 
 importance have been wrought, and an 
 incalculable amount of good accomplished. 
 For general remarks and statistics the 
 reader is referred to the close of the article 
 on missions in Ilindostan. Also for a more 
 particular account of Bombay — its various 
 classes, religions, commercial importance, 
 &c.. see article under that head. 
 
 Ahmednuggur. — Previous to 1831, Ah- 
 mednuggur was simply a station of the Bom- 
 bay mission, and was noticed in that con- 
 nection. In December of that year it be- 
 came a distinct mission, and from that date 
 the present account commences. At this 
 period there were three missionaries here, 
 yiz: Messrs. Graves, Ilervey, and Read. 
 Mr. Hervey died very suddenly, of cholera, 
 in the following May. The mission church 
 at Alimednuggnr was formed in March, 1833, 
 with 14 members, and public worship and 
 preaching were regularly maintained, with 
 from forty to sixty hearers, though they had 
 no chapel, and were obliged to meet in a 
 te.iiporary building, "a sort of shed." 
 Preaching toure in the surrounding villages 
 
 were also extensively maintained. The sys- 
 tem of education was nearly the same as that 
 at Bombay, and at the close of 1835 there 
 were 9 schools and 422 scholars. The es- 
 tablishment of free schools in the neighbor- 
 ing villages, twenty or thirty miles around 
 Ahmednuggnr, was also a favorite and suc- 
 cessful method of doing good. In 1837 a sub- 
 stantial house had been erected for the sem- 
 inary, which contained fifty boys, all taken 
 from respectable castes, and the same house 
 was used also for a chapel. A boarding 
 school for girls was also in successful opera- 
 tion. 
 
 Seroor, 28 miles from Ahmednuggur, was 
 occupied as a station in 1841. At this pe- 
 riod the missionaries, after describing a 
 preaching excursion, say : " "We hope to be 
 able to adopt this plan more than we have 
 done, — to occupy a village for some days, 
 having as much intercourse with the people 
 of the village as possible, and making excur- 
 sions to the small villages in its vicinity as 
 may be convenient." The plan thus pro- 
 posed was carried out very successfully. In 
 their labors in and around Ahmednuggur, 
 the missionaries came much in contact with 
 a class of Hindoos called Mahars, who, they 
 say, " are thought to be the original inhabit- 
 ants of the country." They are a low caste, 
 and the more intelligent of them discard 
 idolatry, and maintain the doctrine of one 
 invisible God. They adhere but slightly to 
 the rules of caste, are free from bigotry, 
 manifest a desire to know the truth, and ex- 
 hibit none of that wrangling and angry dis- 
 putation which are so common among the 
 Brahmins." It was among them that the 
 missionaries, in 1842, found a remarkable 
 spirit of inquiry into the Christian religion, 
 and in their excursions through not less than 
 a hundred villages, they had access to crowds 
 of eager listeners. During this year seven- 
 teen natives were received to the Ahmed- 
 nuggur church, one of whom had been a rob- 
 ber and murderer by profession. The num- 
 ber of church members was thus more than 
 doubled. In 1843 twelve more were added, 
 and five in the beginning of the year 1844, 
 making the whole number of members 48. 
 
 The importance of this field, and the in- 
 creasing interest felt in it, may be gathered 
 from the fact, stated in 1844, that " within a 
 distance of fifteen miles around Ahmednug- 
 gur there are more than one hundred vil- 
 lages, the population of which, including 
 Ahmednuggur itself, amounts to more than 
 one hundred thousand souls. The distinc- 
 tions of caste are numerous, amounting to 60 
 in Ahmednuggur, and varying from ten to 
 thirty in the villages." It was to such a 
 people that the missionaries were carrying 
 the Gospel as they went out from their re- 
 spective stations. In their report for 1844 
 they say : " These excursions arc becoming 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 389 
 
 more and more interesting in consequence 
 of the increased knowledge of Christianity 
 which we find among the people, and of 
 their increased acquaintance with us and our 
 native converts, and also in consequence of 
 the confidence which many of them have 
 learnt to place in us, and in the doctrines 
 which we preach." In the same report they 
 say : " Women of all castes had the oppor- 
 tunity of learning the way of salvation 
 through Jesus Christ. In some places which 
 we visited, nearly all the women of the vil- 
 lage came out to see us and to hoar the mes- 
 sage of mercy." This work was prosecuted 
 during 1845 with increasing interest. 
 
 In 1846 this mission was strengthened by 
 the arrival of two new missionaries, and the 
 return of Mr. Burgess, whose health had 
 been improved by a short residence in this 
 country. At this period a new station was 
 formed at Bhingar, a large town of 4,000 in- 
 habitants, two miles east of Ahmednuggur. 
 Early in this year peculiar religious interest 
 began to be manifested in the seminary for 
 boys, and a little band were in the habit of 
 meeting together for prayer, and of visiting 
 the house of their teacher for religious con- 
 versation and worship. At length one of 
 the company, named Rama, the most ad- 
 vanced boy in the seminary, determined to 
 confess Christ, and to request baptism. This 
 he did in spite of the opposition and entrea- 
 ties of his mother and brothers. At the 
 same time another boy in the seminary, 
 named Sudoo, professed his faith in Christ. 
 This seminary, under the care of Mr. Bur- 
 gess, was considered of very great import- 
 ance to the missionary work. 
 
 Two out-stations were formed in 1845, 
 one at Wudaley, about forty miles north of 
 Ahmednuggur ; and the other at Wadagaum, 
 a village about 30 miles south of Ahmed- 
 nuggur. At the former place the Mahars 
 were favorable to Christianity and very de- 
 sirous of a station among them, and one of 
 them gave land for a chapel, with a written 
 guaranty that it should remain the property 
 of the mission. This chapel was opened in 
 February, 1846, at which time ten adults 
 were admitted to Christian fellowship. 
 Others were admitted subsequently, so that 
 the whole number of church members con- 
 nected with this out-station in January, 
 1847, was twenty-one. Not long after ele- 
 ven children were baptized, and one adult 
 was examined for admission to the church. 
 These fruits were the more remarkable, as 
 this station did not enjoy the labors of a 
 missionary, but was under the care of a na- 
 tive catechist, Dajeeba. An' interesting ac- 
 count of the opposition he met with, and the 
 numerous obstacles overcome in erecting a 
 chapel at that station, will be found in the 
 annual report of the Board for 1847. In the 
 same report will be found an account of Ha- 
 
 ripunt, the native catechist at Wudaley, who 
 was forcibly ejected from a temple, in conse- 
 quence of which the important decision was 
 obtained from a magistrate, that native 
 Christians were entitled to the same privi- 
 leges at the temples and rest houses, as are 
 conceded to Mohammedans. This decision 
 indicated the determination of the govern- 
 ment that no one should be deprived of his 
 rights merely because he professed his faith 
 in Christ. 
 
 The toilsome and ceaseless efforts of the 
 missionaries in this field, so noticeable 
 at every step, are indicated again by the 
 fact^ that in 1848 one of them made a preach- 
 ing circuit of 122 days, traveling 912 miles 
 and visiting 509 towns. In many places he 
 was heard gladly, crowds, especially of the 
 working people, flocking to his tent and lis- 
 tening attentively till late hours at night. 
 Ten persons, three males and seven females, 
 were received to the Ahmednuggur church 
 this year. Four were also added to the 
 church at Seroor. 
 
 In 1849 a new station was established at 
 Newasse. In accomplishing this object great 
 opposition and even danger were encountered, 
 an account of which will be found in the 
 Missionary Herald for August, 1850. The 
 elfort was successful, however, and in 1852 
 there was a school in Newasse of fifty schol- 
 ars. In the report of the Board for 1853, 
 the interesting fact is stated, that the num- 
 ber of baptized children was 159, and it is 
 added, " The families of the church members 
 form a most interesting field of labor, and 
 one which promises the richest fruits. As 
 the children of our converts grow up, they 
 exhibit an interest in religious things which 
 encourages us much ; and the number of 
 those of this class who have been already 
 received into the church, or are now candi- 
 dates for church membership, shows that 
 God is faithful to his covenant, and Avilling 
 to bless the instructions and prayers of pa- 
 rents to the conversion of their offspring, as 
 well as our efforts in their behalf." In the 
 same report a preaching tour of Mr. Munger 
 is described, in which he traveled over a 
 thousand miles in 135 days, and preached in 
 400 towns and villages. He found every 
 where "an open door," and an increasing 
 conviction in many minds, that they were the 
 dupes of Brahmin cupidity and selfishiiess. 
 
 In the city of Ahmednuggur there was at 
 this period, a growing disposition among an 
 interesting and increasing class of young 
 men, to inquire into the truth of Christianity. 
 Some of them were teachers in government 
 chools, and writers in the public offices. 
 They held the absurd superstitions of Hin- 
 dooism in utter contempt, but inclined to 
 deistical opinions, and were not prepared to 
 receive Christianity, though they approved 
 of some of its doctrines. This class of young 
 
390 
 
 UINDOSTAN. 
 
 won had foniicd a society, the object of 
 which v,'i\8 to discuss subjects connected 
 with morals and reUgion, and in these dis- 
 cussions the truths of Christianity were 
 ably maintained by two native converts, 
 nicinbt rs of the mission church. (See Her- 
 ald for June, 1853.) 
 
 The printing for this station is done at 
 Bombay, and is included in the report of that 
 mission. A condensed view of the churches 
 and schools will be found in the table at the 
 close of this article. From what has been 
 presented, it is apparent that Ahmednuggur 
 and the country around it, afford an exten- 
 sive and most important field of missionary 
 labor, and that it has been cultivated with 
 great diligence and most encouraging suc- 
 cess, affording reasonable ground for the 
 hope, that still greater and more rapid 
 changes will ere long be witnessed. 
 
 Salara. — This was a station of the Bom- 
 bay mission until 1851, when, in connection 
 with Mahabulishwar, it became a distinct 
 mission, and was occupied by Messrs. Bur- 
 gess and "Wood. Schools were already es- 
 tablished there, and also a church, with nine 
 native members. In 1852 this mission ex- 
 perienced a severe bereavement, in the death 
 of both Mrs. Wood and Mrs. Burgess. 
 
 The first native who embraced Christian- 
 ity at Satara, was Krishana Row, a Brah- 
 min, and his case excited extraordinary in- 
 terest in the minds of the people. " For 
 some days after his baptism hundreds came 
 to see him and his wife. Some even came 
 from distant villages to behold the great 
 wonder of a Brahmin become a Christian." 
 The excitement was attended with an un- 
 usual degree of calm inquiry. 
 
 Another event of interest at this time, was 
 the discovery of a secret society among the 
 educated Hindoos, the object of which was 
 to make war upon some of the more flagrant 
 absurdities of their religious system, such as 
 the distinction of caste, and the prejudice 
 against the remarrying of widows and female 
 education. This society numbered nearly one 
 hundred, and had several branches. Its 
 members were educated in the missionary 
 and government schools, chiefly the latter, 
 and while many of them only sought to re- 
 form Ilindooism, others exposed its utter 
 worthlessness, and advocated the peculiar 
 claims of Christianity. 
 
 A small chapel was completed by this 
 mission in 1852, and regular preaching exer- 
 cises were commenced. The exercises took 
 the form of a discussion generally, and Mr. 
 Burgess, alluding to this fact, says : " I doubt 
 if any other mission in India can present 
 such well maintained religious discussions, 
 attended with continued interest on the part 
 of the people. Certainly I never had such 
 opportunities for preaching to the masses of 
 the people as I enjoy at Satara. At the 
 
 latest dates from this mission a larger chapel 
 was about to be erected, and the villages 
 around presented an inviting fiehl of labor. 
 Two boys' schools and two girls' schools 
 were in successful operation, and there was 
 also what was called a " parochial school," 
 with from fifteen to twenty pupils, taught in 
 the yard of the mission house by a son of a 
 native Christian. About 5,000 books, tracts 
 and portions of Scripture were sold by the 
 mission during the year 1852. A reinforce- 
 ment has sailed for this mission, but no re- 
 turns have been received. 
 
 Kolapoor. — The mission at this place is of 
 quite recent date, having been commenced 
 in 1852. It is about 130 miles distant from 
 Ahmednuggur, nearly south, and contains a 
 population of some 44,000. No missionary 
 labor had ever been performed here before, 
 and the people were entirely unacquainted 
 with the Gospel. On the arrival of the mis- 
 sionary, Mr. Wilder, the people sent a re- 
 monstrance to the King and to the political 
 superintendent, against his being allowed to 
 remain ; but they soon became acquainted 
 with him, and the opposition died away. 
 Kolapoor is the centre of a population of 
 550,000 souls, and presents an immense field 
 for missionary operations. 
 
 Madura. — The mission at Madura was 
 commenced in July, 1834. A tour of obser- 
 vation was previously made by Mr. Spauld- 
 ing, of the Ceylon mission, accompanied by 
 three native helpers, and after visiting vari- 
 ous places, this was decided upon as the 
 most desirable and important in that part 
 of India for a missionary station. 
 
 Madura is in the southern part of Ilindos- 
 tan, and is the city of the ancient Tamil 
 kings and the seat of Brahminical pride in 
 that quarter. It has a population of about 
 50,000, and the district bearing the same 
 name contains 1,300,000 souls. Several largo 
 villages lie within fifteen or twenty miles of 
 the city. As the result of their observa- 
 tions concerning the country itself, the mis- 
 sionaries say : " Southern India has no vast 
 alluvial plains, like the deltas of the Ganges, 
 the Jumna, and the Burrampootur, nor is its 
 coast marshy, like those of Cuttack, Bengal, 
 and Arracan. Beheld from the sea, it ap- 
 pears mountainous down to the beach. But 
 along the eastern shore for more than 500 
 miles from Cape Comorin, there is a strip of 
 sandy waste extending three or four miles 
 from the sea ; when the land rises into de- 
 tached hills, and farther back into moun- 
 tains, till at length the scenery combines the 
 magnificent with the beautiful. The moun- 
 tains assume every varied form, and are 
 clothed with extensive forests, while the 
 smaller hills, which skirt the plain, are 
 here and there graced with temples and 
 choultries, exhibiting exquisite specimens 
 of architecture. Winding streams flow i" om 
 
fTJUIVBRSITT] 
 
liOJk. Rasrt froiM fii|o Gr««nvri«l« 
 
niNDOSTAN. 
 
 391 
 
 every hill, and the soft and lovely valleys are 
 in striking contrast with the dark and mighty 
 forests which ovcrcap them," Among these 
 hills and valleys dwell that portion of the 
 Tamil people on the continent, for whose 
 immediate benefit the mission was com- 
 menced. 
 
 In Jul}', 1834, Messrs. Todd and Iloising- 
 ton removed from Ceylon to Madura, accom- 
 panied by three interesting young natives 
 who had been connected with the boarding 
 school and seminary at Ceylon almost from 
 their commencement. It will be seen, there- 
 fore, that a very intimate relation subsisted 
 between the Ceylon and Madura missions ; 
 and this will be still better understood hy 
 quoting the preamble and resolutions adopt- 
 ed by the brethren at Ceylon. They were as 
 follows: 
 
 " Whereas, it is considered very desirable 
 that the missionaries from America stationed 
 in Jaffna and on the neighboring continent, 
 be on the niost intimate terms, not only be- 
 cause they are connected with the same 
 Board, are situated among a people of the 
 same language and religion, and are depend- 
 ent, at least for the present, on the produc- 
 tions of the same press ; but because a mu- 
 tual exchange of counsel and help, and some- 
 times an exchange of labors either for the 
 promotion of health, or for the advancement 
 of the cause generally, may be most salu- 
 tary ; therefore resolved, 
 
 " 1. That the American mission in Jaffna 
 and that about to be established on the con- 
 tinent of India, be associated missioiis. 
 
 "2. That the mission on the continent have 
 equal power with the mission in Jaifua in 
 all secular and ecclesiastical concerns ; such 
 as the erection of all necessary buildings for 
 themselves and families ; the establishment 
 of schools ; the mode and extent of church 
 discipline ; the employment of such native 
 helpers as they may consider necessary and 
 expedient for the furtherance of the cause 
 of Christ in that place ; and the general 
 management of the mission in all its bear- 
 ings. 
 
 " 3. That each mission exchange copies of 
 all its official communications to the Board, 
 journals excepted. 
 
 " 4. That in case of any serious difficulty 
 in either mission, either the majority or the 
 minority may apply to the other mission for 
 iadvice." 
 
 In Feb., 1835, Mr. Eckard and his wife 
 left Jaifnapatam to connect themselves with 
 the Madura mission; and in the May fol- 
 lowing he makes some statements which are 
 important, as showing the nature of the 
 field into which he and his brethren had en- 
 tered. He speaks of Madura as a city 
 where idolatry has peculiar power, an in- 
 tense sanctity, a numerous priesthood ; and 
 a place into which, at certain seasons of the 
 
 year, tens of thousands of votaries crowd to 
 worship, they know not what. " Heathenish 
 abominations reign here," he says, " in full 
 malignity ; and the people are generally cap- 
 tious and careless respecting any religion 
 other than their own," Their principal 
 temple, that of Meen Aatche, he describes 
 as of vast dimensions, there being no build- 
 ing in the United States that can compare 
 with it in size. This temple is almost com- 
 pletely covered over with images of human 
 and superhuman beings, executed in plaster. 
 Most of the houses in Madura are of mud, one 
 story high, covered with leaves and straw ; 
 but there are a few really good dwellings, in 
 oriental style. 
 
 In planning the Madura mission the de- 
 sign was to make it a large central station, 
 while single families and schools should be 
 established in each of the surrounding vil- 
 lages, so that the whole mass of the commu- 
 nity should he brought under the influence 
 of Christian truth, and united and concen- 
 trated action secured. Soon after entering 
 upon the mission, Mr. Eckard commenced a 
 .school upon the Lancasterian plan, similar to 
 the one in Calcutta, which had been con- 
 ducted with eminent success. Instruction 
 was given chiefly in English, and Mr. E. 
 himself assumed the duties of teacher, be- 
 lieving, as he said, that " no English schocil 
 taught by a native could compare with one 
 taught by an educated missionary." He 
 began with eighteen boys, some of them of 
 high caste, and all were required to attend 
 public worship on the Sabbath. Preaching 
 was added to teaching, and besides these 
 labors in the city, an effort was soon made 
 to reach the surrounding villages. " There 
 are two of us," said Mr. Eckard, " and our 
 immediate circle of influence sweeps in 
 about 100,000 souls. I mean by this, that 
 if our bodily strength did not fail we might 
 reside at Madura and be sensibly felt by one 
 hundred thousand people in the city and ad- 
 joining villages." 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Poor left Ceylon and joined 
 the Madura mission in 1836. At the close 
 of this year there were in connection with 
 the mission thirty-five schools, containing 
 1,149 boys and 65 girls. Nine of these 
 schools were in the city, and the others in 
 the neighboring villages. Books and tracts 
 were also freely distributed. 
 
 In general the most intimate and reliable 
 knowledge of heathen countries is derived 
 from the missionaries, and comes to us after 
 they have been upon the field a sufficient 
 time to make investigations. Hence the ne- 
 cessity of interrupting the missionary nar- 
 rative by the introduction of important his- 
 torical facts illustrative of the character of 
 the field, and essential to a correct under- 
 standing of the responsibilities and trials of 
 the missionary. In regard to that section 
 
892 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 of IlindosUn now under review, the niis- 
 sionariea sav, in 1830. "The region inhabited 
 by those who speak I'amil on the continent, 
 is bounded on tlie north by a hno which we 
 may suppose to bo drawn from Madras 
 towards the west. It extends from this 
 limit to Cape Comorin, at the extreme south 
 of llindostan, from the sea shore on the 
 east to the western branches of the southern 
 Ghaut mountains on the west. This space 
 comprises an area of from 75,000 to 100,000 
 square miles. The population has been 
 variously estimated at from 3,000,000 to 
 10,000,000. Perhaps 0,000,000 or 8,000,000 
 approximates most nearly to the truth. 
 Comparatively few of the Tamil people 
 dwell among the mountains on the west. 
 They reside chiefly in the wide plains which 
 extend to the sea, and which are known as 
 the Camatic. There are more than twenty 
 cities within the limits above described, in- 
 habited in whole or in part by Tamil 
 people ; and there are probably 500 towns 
 of from 50 to 1,000 people each." 
 
 Passing on to 1838, we find four stations 
 around Madura, viz. : Dindigul, 40 miles 
 north-west of Madura ; Sevagunga, 25 miles 
 east, Teroopoovanum, 12 miles south-east, 
 and Teroomungalum, 12 miles north-west 
 At each of these places there was a mis- 
 sionary, and in some instances two, with 
 schools, and other means of systematic 
 eflbrt. The whole number of schools con- 
 nected with the mission at this period was 
 60, and of scholars 1806. 
 
 In 1840 the work had progressed so that 
 there were in all the schools of the mission 
 a total of 3,310 echolars. About 1,000 of 
 the pupils in the native free schools could 
 read, and nearly the whole number had com- 
 mitted to memory the ten commandments, 
 the Lord's prayer, and a small catechism. 
 There were 12 additions during the year to 
 the four native churches. Mr. Spaulding 
 made a second visit to the Tamil district 
 this year, it being just seven years since his 
 first exploring tour, previous to the estab- 
 lishment of the mission. Of the changes 
 which had occurred he speaks in very strong 
 terms. The roads had been improved, 
 bridges had been constructed, numerous 
 shade trees had been planted, the tanks, 
 from which the cultivated lands were irri- 
 gated, had been repaired, and the revenue in 
 some parts of the district had been more 
 than doubled. " When I went over before, 
 our boat was blown out of its course by 
 the strong wind, and Mr. Harrington and 
 myself were obliged to walk about 70 miles 
 in the sun by day, and with no rest house 
 by night. Now we had good conveyances 
 and good rest houses and mission houses 
 and pleasant gardens through our whole 
 tour. Then there was no missionary station 
 nor Christian teacher within the district. 
 
 Now there are five stations and nine mis- 
 sionaries, who liavc under their care about 
 eighty native free schools and four English 
 boarding schools, all of which are in a very 
 interesting and flourishing state, and fifteen 
 or twenty native assistants of very good 
 promise." 
 
 The increasing importance of this field, 
 and the opportunities offered for enlarging 
 the operations of the mission, induced the 
 brethren in 1841 to make an urgent appeal 
 to the Board for twenty additional mission- 
 aries. But instead of such a reinforcement, 
 or even one additional missionary, the mis- 
 sion was weakened and severely tried by the 
 removal of Mr. Poor to Ceylon, a change 
 which his health rendered indispensable. 
 The appropriations for the schools also fell 
 short this year, and there appeared to be a 
 painful necessity of disbanding some of 
 them, but on submitting the matter to the 
 native teachers they said, " You must not 
 discharge us ; we will take what you have to 
 give." In another instance, after a consul- 
 tation among the teachers, one of them re- 
 ported to the missionary in behalf of the 
 others, " If a father have ten sons, and un- 
 fortunately loses half his property, will his 
 sons allow him to turn away five of their 
 number to starve, while the rest are sup- 
 ported in comfort ? No ! These sons will 
 consent to live on less and to have the 
 parent divide the amount equally among 
 them. This is our decision. We are each 
 of us willing to live on rice congee rather 
 than to have any of our number dismissed." 
 The schools were accordingly continued as 
 usual. 
 
 An event of great importance, about this 
 time, was an act dissolving all connection 
 between idolatry and the government of 
 British India. This act threw upon the 
 heathen themselves the whole expense of 
 building and repairing their temples. By 
 another act, passed the same year, simple 
 aflSrmation in the name of the living and 
 true God was made binding on all as an 
 oath, instead of the former swearing on the 
 sacred waters of the Ganges and on the 
 Koran. In this also the missionaries had 
 occasion greatly to rejoice, as the land would 
 no longer mourn because of the swearing by 
 false gods and a lie. These great changes 
 resulted in no small degree from the steady 
 operation of Christian missions upon the 
 public conscience, and the value and power of 
 such missions as reformatory agencies are 
 thus placed in a very strong light. 
 
 In 1843 the mission was called to a severe 
 trial. Mr. Poor had already been removed 
 to Ceylon, and Dr. Steele had died in 1842, 
 and this year Mr. Ward was transferred to 
 Madras, besides which, the cholera made its 
 appearance, mowing down great numbers of 
 the native inhabitants, and not entirely ex- 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 393 
 
 empting the mission families. Rev. Mr. 
 Dwiglit, Mrs. North, and Mrs. Cherry, with- 
 in eleven days of each other, were carried 
 from one house to the silent tomb. Other 
 missionaries however soon arrived, and the 
 work suffered but a temporary interruption. 
 
 It is recorded as a fact worthy of special 
 notice during this year, that the Papists re- 
 siding in three distant villages, amounting to 
 twenty-five families, and numbering 106 in- 
 dividuals, were received under the spiritual 
 care and instruction of the mission. And 
 further, whole communities, villages, and 
 hamlets, applied to be acknowledged as no 
 longer pagans or Roman Catholics, but as 
 Christians and Protestants. In one village 
 three families, in another four, and in an- 
 other forty families, entered into an agree- 
 ment, either by their head men or over their 
 own signatures, to renounce idolatry and re- 
 ceive the Gospel, or else refund the expense 
 the missionaries should incur to meet their 
 wishes. For copies of some of these agree- 
 ments, see annual report of the Board for 
 1844. Many interesting features in the pro- 
 gress of the Madura mission during the 
 years 1844 and 1845 must be passed over. In 
 1846 the native churches received an acces- 
 sion of ninety-seven members. At this date 
 the villages are spoken of as not only all 
 open, but more than open, as they not only 
 would receive the missionaries, but come to 
 them. Fifteen or twenty companies, from 
 villages thirty and forty miles distant, and 
 where the missionaries had never been,visit- 
 ed them for tracts and instruction, and some 
 of them manifested great anxietj^for the sal- 
 vation of their souls. Dr. Scudder removed 
 to Madura with his family, in 1847, thus 
 supplying the want of a physician,which had 
 been deeply felt. 
 
 It was in the year 1847 that the mission 
 entered upon a formal and uncompromising 
 conflict with caste, which, the missionaries 
 at this date say, " has existed to the present 
 time, with various degrees of strength in the 
 churches established by Schwartz and his 
 devoted fellow laborers, as well as in those 
 of more modern date." The missionaries 
 of the Board were at length determined to 
 free the Church of Christ from " a foe most 
 insidious as well as powerful," and seventy- 
 two were suspended from church fellowship 
 on account of their adherence to this sin. 
 At the same time many left the seminary on 
 account of the encroachments made upon the 
 rules of caste. The results, however, showed 
 the wisdom of the measure, and proved that 
 the time had fully come for so decisive a 
 step. It should be stated, however, that 
 caste has never been tolerated in the churches 
 planted by the missionaries of the Board. 
 Rev. Dr. Allen, who has been for more than 
 a quarter of a century a missionary of the 
 Board in India, says : 
 
 " The Missionaries of the American Board 
 in India and Ceylon have always required a 
 renunciation of caste, just as much as of 
 idolatry, and other parts of heathenism, of 
 all converts before they were baptized. No 
 arrangements, nor accommodations, nor 
 changes have ever been made m the seats, or 
 in the sitting in the churches, or in the ad- 
 ministration of the ordinances on account of 
 caste. Caste was in no respect recognized. 
 All were treated as of one class, as much as 
 Christians in this country are so treated. 
 
 " It would naturally be expected that such 
 a public renunciation of caste, and such sub- 
 sequent treatment of it, would be sufficient 
 to extinguish it in the church. But experi- 
 ence has shown that it was not sufficient, 
 Caste has been found to be surprisingly insi- 
 dious in its influence ; and to be capable of 
 assuming almost any complexion and shape, 
 suited to the native character and their cir- 
 cumstances." 
 
 Passing on to 1851,we find the Committee 
 of the Board drawing a new and more mod- 
 ern sketch of this great field, and one which 
 sets in a striking light both the astonishing- 
 changes which had been wrought and the 
 immense labors devolved upon the mission- 
 aries. After alluding to the fact that in 1836 
 this mission had only one station at Madu- 
 ra, and that all the schools were in its im- 
 mediate vicinity, they proceed to say that 
 now they have extended their operations till 
 they have ten stations, one of which is more 
 than thirty miles south, and another about 
 the same distance north ; one about twenty- 
 five miles east and another forty north-west 
 from Madura ; with families under their care 
 associated in the form of village congrega- 
 tions in about 100 villages, scattered singly 
 or in clusters through a populous region, ex- 
 tending in length more than 100 miles from 
 south-east to north-west, and more than 
 sixty miles in breadth. This field, thus in 
 some measure taken possession of by our 
 missionaries, has been almost wholly left to 
 them by the missionaries of other societies 
 laboring in adjoining districts in India, and 
 it seems fitting that it should be fully occu- 
 pied by this Board. It is larger than the 
 State of Massachusetts, and has a popula- 
 tion, as is supposed, of 1,500,000. It has 
 become one of great interest and great prom- 
 ise, and the labor demanded in it has obvi- 
 ously increased much beyond the ability of 
 the present band of laborers. Hitherto the 
 natural growth of the mission has been 
 one of expansion, but there is now a call for 
 more thorough culture." 
 
 The year 1852 was one of great favor to 
 this mission, 72 having been received to the 
 churches at the different stations, fifty-six 
 of whom were adults. There were now nine 
 churches in all, and 335 members in good 
 standing. The system of education had been 
 
394 
 
 II IN DOST AN. 
 
 gmdually changed, and, say the missionaries 
 at this i>eriod, ''We can have but little to do 
 hereafter with the general desire of the hea 
 then to have their children receive from us 
 an Knplish and Tamil education. The Lord 
 in his providence has given us a people to 
 educate for him. Among the members of 
 our congregations we have 1,588 children, of 
 whom 047 are studying in our free schools. 
 From these it is easy to make a selection for 
 our own boarding schools." It is the main 
 design of the boarding schools and of the 
 seminary to raise up an educated and effi- 
 cient class of helpers for the missionary 
 work, and it is considered a great advantage 
 that the pupils can now be taken from fami- 
 lies connected with the mission and nomin- 
 ally Christians. 
 
 Madras. — The mission at Madras was 
 commenced in 1836, with a special view to 
 forming there a printing establishment for 
 printing the Scriptures and religious tracts 
 in the Tamil language. But in order to the 
 successful execution of this plan, it was 
 deemed necessary to establish there a dis- 
 tinct, efficient, and responsible mission ; and 
 with this view, Mr. Winslow and Dr. Scud- 
 der removed to this new field. Madras is 
 on the eastern side of Southern India, and 
 the population of the city and suburbs is 
 estimated at 416,000. It was intended to 
 establish the press at Chintadrepettah, a 
 suburb southwesterly of the walled town, 
 and at this place Dr. Scudder took up his. 
 residence, while Mr. "Winslow resided at 
 Royapoorum, a little north of the town. 
 They immediately found the demand for 
 Tamil books and tracts to be very great, 
 and expressed the wish that they had 25,000 
 copies of the New Testament to distribute 
 within a year. Schools and preaching sta- 
 tions were immediately established, and a 
 mission church was formed in 1837, and one 
 native was admitted on profession of his 
 faith in Christ. 
 
 In 1838 the mission came into possession 
 of a large printing establishment which had 
 belonged to the Church Missionary Society. 
 It comprised eighteen printing presses, be- 
 sides a lithographic and hydraulic press, 
 fifteen fonts of type, English, Tamil, and 
 Teloogoo, together with a type foundry and 
 book bindery. This enabled the mission to 
 enter vigorously upon the work for which it 
 was chiefly commenced. In one year from 
 this date there had been printed 3,500,000 
 octavo pages of Scripture, and 2,500,000 
 duodecimo pages of tracts, making 6,000,000 
 pages in all. In 1840 the printing in Tamil 
 amounted to 11,660,700 pages, over nine mil- 
 lions of which were octavo pages of Scrip- 
 ture. At this period there were also in ex- 
 istence sixteen schools, comprising 485 
 scholars. 
 
 Important tours for preaching and dis- 
 
 tributing books were made by Messrs. Scud- 
 der and Winslow in 1840. One of these 
 tours was to Conjevezani, a sacred place 46 
 miles south-west of Madras, during which 
 they preached the Gospel to numerous small 
 companies of people, and distributed over 
 4,000 books and tracts. Dr. Scudder also 
 journeyed 200 miles south, into the Cudda- 
 lore and Tanjore districts, taking with him 
 6,000 copies of one of the Gospels, and 
 11,500 tracts. Mr. Winslow, for the special 
 benefit of his wife and child, went west 20^ 
 miles, into the Mysore district, which he de- 
 scribes as an immense terrace of table land, 
 elevated about 3,000 feet above the level of 
 the sea, and altogether a splendid country, 
 well watered, fertile, populous, and promis- 
 ing as a field of missionary labor. In all 
 their visits to the sacred places, Messrs. 
 Scudder and Winslow found a great falling 
 off in the number of attendants upon idola- 
 trous festivals. 
 
 In 1841 the mission had four places of 
 stated preaching, and the aggregate of the 
 congregations was 550. A piece of land was 
 bought this year at 'Royapooram for a 
 chapel, and ^1.500 subscribed for its erec- 
 tion. At this place Mr. Winslow estab- 
 lished an evening meeting, in a bungalow on 
 the premises of a very respectable native 
 merchant, and upon this a persecution 
 arose, in describing which Mr. Winslow 
 says, "The Romanists immediately began 
 to annoy us, and to send letters threatening 
 our lives. They threw stones, both in times 
 of meeting and at other times, at the family, 
 set up a noisy meeting in the adjoining 
 house, and disturbed us by offensive smell- 
 ing lights and fire works, as well as by the 
 noise of bells and various instruments ; and 
 when this was stopped by the authorities, 
 they burnt the bungalow with the furniture 
 it contained." The native merchant how- 
 ever, remained firm, and the persecution 
 failed entirely of its object. 
 
 In their report in 1843 the Board take oc- 
 casion to remark, that the Madras, Madura, 
 and Ceylon missions are all to a people alike 
 in religion, language, manners, and customs. 
 The station at Madras being intended to do 
 the principal part of the printing for all 
 these missions, it was not intended to en- 
 large it beyond what was necessary for this 
 purpose. The Madura mission has never 
 had a printing press within its bounds, and 
 that at Jaffna has done much less work 
 than the one at-Madras. 
 
 In 1845 the missionaries found that caste 
 was exerting an undue control over the 
 minds of the native church members, and 
 wishing to see how far this unchristian feel- 
 ing would be carried, they took measures to 
 test it. The result was that five were sus- 
 pended; but their Christian principles pre- 
 vailed, and in a few months they all came 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 395 
 
 back, made a full and humble confession, 
 and promised to conform to the rules of the 
 church respecting caste. 
 
 A prospectus for a railroad from Madras 
 to Arcot, sixty miles, issued in 1846, gives 
 the population of Madras in 1842, as up- 
 wards of 900,000, an increase of more than 
 200,000 since 1822. This increase was sup- 
 posed to be owing chiefly to political 
 causes, tending to centralize the population 
 in the cities of the coast. 
 
 This vast community is distinctly spoken 
 of in 1846, as showing signs of the wide 
 spread and powerful working of the truth, 
 and the organized opposition made to the 
 Gospel was one evidence of this fact. An 
 anti-missionary society existed among the 
 natives of Madras, which employed a press 
 in printing small tracts and a newspaper, 
 and the same society established several op- 
 position free schools, employed tract dis- 
 tributors and declaimcrs against Christian- 
 ity, and sent out agents into the country for 
 similar purposes. The people were thus 
 mightily stirred up, and on one occasion 
 8,000 people assembled to see if measures 
 could not be devised to prevent the spread 
 of Christianity. Say the missionaries, 
 " Now, light and truth have so far gone forth 
 that the bearings of missionary operations 
 on caste, custom, and idolatry, begin to be 
 manifest. The Brahmins and head men 
 begin to feel that their craft is in danger. 
 They are therefore bestirring themselves." 
 They proceeded even so far as to seize and 
 forcibly carry off several hopeful converts, 
 and one .of them was put in irons and 
 threatened with death. All this however, 
 while it showed that the pillars of supersti- 
 tion had been shaken, occasioned no perma- 
 nent interruption to the mission. In the 
 autumn of this year Dr. Scudder, who had 
 been spending a few years in his native 
 country, greatly to the edification and quick- 
 ening of the churches, returned to his chosen 
 field of labor. Instead, however, of re- 
 maining at Madras, he was persuaded, by 
 the urgent want of a physician at Madura, 
 to resume his labors at that place. 
 
 The opposition continued to be very bitter 
 and violent in 1847, and on one occasion Mr. 
 Scudder, son of Dr. Scudder, was dpenly as- 
 sailed in the streets. In defiance of the 
 popular rage however, the women came, at a 
 communion season, and sat down with the 
 men at the table, with their husbands, a 
 thing which they had never done before. 
 The most serious troubles were occasioned 
 by the spirit of caste, and Mr. Scudder is led 
 to remark, '• If I were asked to tell in one 
 breath what I thought the mightiest present 
 obstacle to the onward course of the Gospel 
 in India, I should unhesitatingly say, caste. 
 It is a monster that defies description. 
 Idolatry in no way compares with it, as to its 
 grasp on the people." 
 
 J Dr. Scudder returned to Madras in 1848, 
 and in the following year he was called to 
 mourn the death of his wife, Mrs. Harriet 
 M. Scudder. She commenced her labors in 
 connection with the Ceylon mission in 1819. 
 In November, 1850, Mr. Winslow announced 
 that the printing of the new version of the 
 Tamil Bible was completed. It had been in 
 hand three years, and for two years the 
 united labors of Messrs Percival and 
 Spaulding of Jaffna, Brotherton of the 
 Church of England, and Winslow in Madras, 
 had been devoted to it, most of tl¥3 time 
 daily except on the Sabbath. In point of 
 accuracy, conciseness, elegance, and idiom- 
 atic correctness, it was thought to be far in 
 advance of any previous work of the kind. 
 Another interesting event of this year was 
 the meeting of all the members of the 
 church except four, with the mission families, 
 on the evening preceding the annual meeting, 
 which was held in connection with the 
 Board. It is described as an interesting 
 sight. " Husbands and wives, little accus- 
 tomed to eat together, high caste and low 
 caste, and no caste, brethren and sisters in 
 Christ, thus acknowledging their unity in 
 him as members of the same bod}^." 
 
 During the years 1851 and 1852, the press 
 at Madras continued its operations, and the 
 mission moved on without any very marked 
 changes. The whole amount of printing at 
 this place since the establishment of the 
 press, is 219,408,221 pages. 
 
 Arcot. — This city is seventy miles from 
 Madras, on the road to Bangalore, and is the 
 centre of a very populous and destitute dis- 
 trict. At this place Mr. H. M. Scudder com- 
 menced a mission in March, 1850. Having 
 already become quite distinguished for his 
 medical and surgical skill, his services were 
 in immediate demand, from forty to fifty 
 visiting him daily. His custom was to meet 
 his patients in the mornmg, read and explain 
 a passage of Scripture, and pray with them, 
 after which he attended to their maladies. 
 Through his medical labors he gained access 
 to many Hindoo women, who could not have 
 been reached in any other way. A regular 
 dispensary was established, and Mrs. Scud- 
 der, who could speak Tamil fluently, visited 
 it daily to converse with the patients. 
 
 In 1852, Henry M. Scudder, William 
 Scudder, and Joseph Scudder, all sons of 
 the venerable Dr. Scudder, and all born in 
 India, were laboring as missionaries at the 
 Arcot station. In the report of the Board 
 for 1853, will be found a very interesting 
 account of the conversion of a Teloogoo 
 Brahmin, at Arcot. In addition to the labors 
 of the dispensary, the Gospel was preached 
 " in towns and villages, in streets and by- 
 ways, in choultries and under green trees." 
 The mission however is of too recent a date 
 to exhibit any very marked results, or to 
 require an extended notice. 
 
396 
 
 IILNDOSTAN. 
 
 Tlie 6Uti8tic8 of the missions of the Am. 
 Board in llimlostuu are given below, as fur 
 as it was practicable to arrange them in a 
 tabular form : 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 9\ :S 
 
 i llli 
 lliil 
 
 Boiubuv, 
 
 Ahmednugif'r 
 
 Sntnrn, 
 
 Kolupur, 
 
 Miiluni, 
 
 M:Klr:l8, 
 
 Arcot, 
 
 IM2 
 1S51 
 
 KJ4 
 
 is;>t) 
 
 1852 
 
 a 
 3 = 
 
 Ij 20 
 
 1 8 
 
 9 335 
 
 2 42 
 
 22 26 106 16' 541 127 3800 344,289,174 
 
 111 
 
 456 124.880,953 
 
 939 
 
 100 
 
 1626 
 679 
 
 219.408,221 
 
 In the above table, a-ssistant missionaries 
 and native helpers are all included under the 
 head of assistants. The summary of schools 
 also embraces those of every description. 
 The printing for the Mahratta people, it will 
 be seen, has all been done at Bombay, and 
 for the Tamil people at Madras and Ceylon. 
 Church Missionary Society. — The 
 Church Missionary Society commenced its 
 labors in Ilindostan in 1815. Beginning at 
 Madras and South India, they subsequently 
 extended their labors to Calcutta, and to 
 Bomba}^, and at each of these places they 
 have now a diocese embracing many towns 
 and villages within its sphere of effort. 
 Adopting the clironological order, we begin 
 with 
 
 Madras. — The first missionaries of the 
 Society to this field were Rev. Messrs. 
 Schnarre and Ilhenius. At the end of their 
 first year, they reported themselves as com- 
 fortably settled in Madras, as having ac- 
 quired the Tamil language sufficiently to 
 compose, converse, and publicly read in it, 
 and also as having formed a Missionary 
 Committee, and raised a small missionary 
 fund. 
 
 It should be observed here, that although 
 this society had no regular station, in India 
 previous to 1815, they had promoted mis- 
 sions in various places much earlier, through 
 English chaplains, and in connection with 
 what is termed the oldest Protestant mis- 
 sion in India, the Danish mission. Thus, 
 Messrs. Schnarre and Rhenius had been la- 
 boring for some time in Tranquebar, more 
 than a hundred miles south of Madras, part- 
 ly in aid of the schools established there by 
 the Royal Danish Mission College, and part- 
 ly for the acquisition of the Tamil language. 
 About this time the Danish mission was 
 obliged to withdraw its patronage from 
 these school establishments, and the care of 
 them was assumed by the Church Mission- 
 ary Society. To Tranquebar and its schools 
 frequent allusion will be made. 
 
 In the early journals of this society much 
 is also said of Abdool Messech. a Christian 
 reader. He was a Mohammedan by birth, 
 
 named Shekh Salih, born in Delhi, and re- 
 ceived his first Christian instniotir)!! from 
 that devoted missionary, Henry Martyn. 
 He was baptized in the '' Old Church," Cal- 
 cutta, in 1811, by the name Abdool Messech, 
 which signifies " Servant of Christ." At 
 the close of 1812 he left Calcutta and pro- 
 ceeded to Agra, 800 miles north-west of Cal- 
 cutta, in company with Mr. Corrie, chaplain 
 of the East India Company at that station. 
 There he sustained the office of reader and 
 catechist with wonderful fidelity and success, 
 and his journals fill a large space in the 
 Church Missionary Society's publications. 
 
 To return to Madras, we find at an early 
 date the reasons stated for choosing this as 
 the seat of the mission in Southern India j 
 and they may be noticed with the more pro- 
 priety because, although the American Board 
 preceded the Church Missionary Society by 
 several years in India, they were twenty-one 
 years later than that society at Madras. 
 Consequently many facts of interest belong 
 to a period over which the mission of the 
 Board does not extend. 
 
 The choice of the Corresponding Commit- 
 tee fell upon Madras for the following rea- 
 sons : " Its high consideration as head of the 
 whole peninsula, the desire for Christian 
 knowledge which appeared to prevail therein, 
 the frequent demands for the Scriptures in 
 three or four languages, the existence of a 
 Malabar congregation — a secession from the 
 Roman Catholics, and a translated liturgy of 
 the Church of England just completed for 
 this congregation, by Rev. Dr. Rottler, chap- 
 lain of the E. I. Company." To enter into 
 these labors, keep open the Taihil Chapel, 
 provide against the failure of the venerable 
 Dr. Rottler, and build upon his foundations, 
 though limited, seemed very important ; and 
 further, the society would thus commence 
 its career in the South of India, at the seat 
 and within the eye of the English govern- 
 ment. 
 
 Attention was early given to schools, and 
 the distribution of tracts. The latter, how- 
 ever, were difficult to obtain, as the mission 
 had at this period no means of printing. To 
 supply this deficiency as well as they could, 
 one of the best school boys was employed at 
 certain kours in writing, and thus two books 
 were prepared for the English Tamil school, 
 with a dictionary affixed appropriate to them. 
 These books consisted of small portions of 
 the Scriptures. At the close of one year 
 there were two. schools in 3Iadras, but the 
 want of funds and of teachers prevented an 
 immediate enlargement of the system of edu- 
 cation. A seminary for the education of na- 
 tive missionaries was a favorite idea from 
 the first ; but it was encumbered with many 
 difficulties, and the project could not be en- 
 tered upon at once. 
 
 Much interest was awakened, near the 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 397 
 
 close of the first year, by the conversion of 
 a native, who called himself a Christian, and 
 who, without any suggestion from the mis- 
 sionaries, entered at once upon the business 
 of reading from house to house. His book 
 was the New Testament. He began by the 
 request of a single heathen neighbor, who 
 saw him much devoted to this book, and by 
 this his own soul was stirred up to read the 
 word of God daily to the perishing around 
 him. 
 
 It is worthy of note, that the missionaries 
 of the Church Society at Madras, from the 
 very start, excluded caste from their schools. 
 No little surprise and opposition were awak- 
 ened, but the truly scriptural and sensible 
 answer was, that " the caste of the natives 
 is not at all compatible with true Chris- 
 tianity 5 because a man cannot be meek, 
 humble, and loving, in the manner in which 
 our Lord Jesus has set us an example, and 
 as the Holy Spirit works within the heart, 
 and, at the same time keep up his notions 
 -of caste ; in which the station, or rank, or 
 esteem of any or every person is determined 
 by birth alone, and not by intrinsic worth 
 and dignity of mind." 
 
 Such were the labors of the first year, — 
 two missionaries able to preach the Gospel 
 in Tamil ; two schools in successful opera- 
 tion, without the least encouragement of 
 caste ; a native Christian reader, sufficient- 
 ly informed to be listened to with attention 
 by respectable natives ; and a general spirit 
 of inquiry awakened among the people. 
 
 In 1816, the mission received a reinforce- 
 ment, and at the same time Mr. Schnarre 
 returned to Tranquebar to take the entire 
 care of the school establishments in that 
 place. On the first of January 1817, Mr. 
 Rhenius formed a regular congregation in 
 Madras, consisting of the mission servants 
 and their families, and a few converts re- 
 ceived the previous year. That more were 
 not received from the heathen, is accounted 
 for in a manner most creditable to the char- 
 acter and principles of this mission, when 
 Mr. Rhenius says, " If I had thought it any 
 advantage to the Christian church, or any 
 honor to our Lord Jesus Christ, to pay per- 
 sons for becoming Christians, I should have 
 had already the pleasure of reporting hun- 
 dreds, yea, thousands, that would have em- 
 braced Christianity." During this year, 
 schools were established at Vadadelli, about 
 30 miles north-west of Madras, through the 
 agency of the native Christian Sandappen, 
 residing at that place. Other native con- 
 verts were employed in a similar manner, in 
 different directions. 
 
 In the autumn of 1818, the cholera broke 
 out with great violence in this part of Hin- 
 dostan, and the natives in their consterna- 
 tion attributed it to the anger of an idol, 
 which for forty years had been locked up by 
 
 public authority, on account of the dissen- 
 sions which occurred at one of her festivals. 
 The idol was therefore brought out, and a 
 human sacrifice — an idiot boy, was offered 
 to appease her rage. Only one member of 
 the mission — a catechist — died of the epi- 
 demic. But the mission property was much 
 damaged by a whirlwind which occurred 
 about the same time — all the school-houses, 
 and man)^ other buildings, having been com- 
 pletely prostrated. 
 
 An important branch of this mission, was 
 that among the Syrian Christians, in Tra- 
 vancore, at the southern extremity of Hin- 
 dostan, on the Malabar coast. The history 
 of these Syrians, and the manner in which 
 they came to be Residents in this quarter, 
 are fully stated in the Report of the Mis- 
 sionary Society for 1818. There w^ere then 
 not less than 50,000 of these Christians, 
 with churches, a ministry (exceedingly li- 
 centious) and a form of worship resembling 
 that of the Roman Catholics. So deep was 
 the interest felt in this particular depart- 
 ment, that in 1820 a three-fold division was 
 made of the work, the instruction of the 
 Syrian clergy being assigned to one mission- 
 ary, the college and higher schools to an- 
 other, while a third took charge of the 
 schools intended for the great body of the 
 people. The clergy were regarded as the 
 first and most important branch of this mis- 
 sion. They are described at this period as 
 a numerous body, and deplorably degraded. 
 A total disregard of the Sabbath, profana- 
 tion of the name of God, drunkenness, and 
 adultery, were their prevailing crimes. Yet, 
 in this degenerated condition they were con- 
 siderably above the other castes. They did 
 not justify their crimes, but tried to conceal 
 them, and exhibited considerable moral 
 sense. They accepted most gratefully the 
 services of the missionaries, and concurred 
 in all their plans. The metropolitan even 
 remarked, that he did not expect much im- 
 provement among his people " till the Bible 
 was circulated." 
 
 The college, at Cotym. had, in 1820, forty- 
 two students. Some of them could read 
 English well, understood the simple rules of 
 arithmetic, and had considerable knowledge 
 of the Malay and Sanscrit languages. The 
 method of teaching the Syriac was found 
 very defective, and a more thorough system 
 was entered upon. The third object of at- 
 tention, that of schools, embraced the estab- 
 lishment of a school for the preparation of 
 native schoolmasters, the gradual promotion 
 of schools for general instruction, the super- 
 intendence of these schools by personal vis- 
 its, and the compiling of small tracts for 
 their use. The establishment of parochial 
 schools to be attached to every church un- 
 der the jurisdiction of the metropolitan, was 
 an object much desired, and at the above 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 date ten of these schools existed, embracing 
 253 children. 
 
 The mission at Madras and South India 
 had now become systematized, and was an- 
 nually reported under the following heads, 
 vie. : Madras and its vicinity ; Tranquchar ; 
 Tinner^Uy, lying south of Tranquebar, and 
 not far from Capo Comorin ; and Travan- 
 core. which included Cotym, Cochin, and 
 Aleppi ; Cannanore and Tellicherry, on the 
 western side of southern India, and conside- 
 rably north of Travancore ; and Vizgapa- 
 tam, north of Madras, on the eastern coast. 
 At all these places the usual missionary ope- 
 rations were carried on with zeal and marked 
 success. But it is impossible in so brief a 
 space to notice each of theAi in the annual 
 progress of the work, and many facts wor- 
 thy of record are omitted, with a simple 
 reference to the Missionary Register, the 
 Tery ably conducted monthly journal of the 
 Church Missionary Society, and to their an- 
 nual reports. 
 
 In 1824, a new mission was established in 
 the Nellore district, where the Teloogoo or 
 Gentoo language was vernacular. The rea- 
 sons which determined the Corresponding 
 Committee to occupy this field were, the 
 vast extent of country throughout which 
 the above language was spoken, the limited 
 efforts hitherto made for the enlightenment 
 of that people, and the circumstance of the 
 Madras printing-press being now furnished 
 with Teloogoo types, so as to give speedy 
 circulation to school books, tracts, and por- 
 tions of the Scriptures, in that language. 
 
 In 1825, ten years having elapsed since 
 the society commenced its labors in Hindo- 
 stan, with two Lutheran clergymen, design- 
 ed simply for the charge of the Tranquebar 
 schools, their report presented nine stations, 
 with eleven European missionaries, and one 
 on his passage ; 117 boys' schools and 101 
 girls' schools, with an aggregate of 4,585 
 scholars ; five seminaries for the training of 
 natives on a more liberal scale, with a view 
 to their becoming teachers and missionaries 
 among their countrymen ; besides a vast 
 work accomplished through the mission 
 press, congregations gathered, houses of 
 worship erected, &c. 
 
 During the next ten years there was con- 
 siderable opposition, and even bitter perse- 
 cution, from the natives, especially at Tinne- 
 velly ; yet the mission was at no time essen- 
 tially interrupted. One or two new stations 
 were added during this period, and the spirit 
 of inquiry among the Syrian Christians 
 was greatly increased. In 1838, the mis- 
 sionary at Tinnevelley reported a remarkable 
 case of the effect of the Gospel upon a 
 whole village, which had then lately oc- 
 curred. The Shanar village of Pragasa- 
 poorara, became entirely Christian ; and the 
 people, who had been ten or more years un- 
 
 der instruction, and had made great pro- 
 gress in Christian knowledge, became very 
 anxious to see a Christian church in the vil- 
 lage, which should not only last their life- 
 time, but stand and testifyto their children's 
 children, the sincerity of their religious pro- 
 fession. Accordingly a subscription was 
 set on foot among themselves, and the mis- 
 sion added a sum equal to what they could 
 raise, and the object was accomplished. It 
 was in this year that the mission at Aleppie 
 reported an extraordinary effort of the Pa- 
 pacy to establish itself in that place. A 
 largo number of priests from Ireland, with 
 their bishop, arrived, and began putting forth 
 every effort by preaching, opening a college, 
 seminary, &c. 
 
 Although the work at Tinnevelly was con- 
 sidered of a diffusive character, extending to 
 different villages through a wide district, so 
 that nothing more was expected than to see 
 here and there a few embracing the truth ; 
 yet, to the surprise of all, whole villages, as 
 in the case just noticed, were found embrac- 
 ing Christianity. The bishop of Madras, in 
 1842, says, " Among many sources of com- 
 fort during my journey through Tinnevelley, 
 one of the greatest has been a sight, for 
 which, I candidly confess, I was not pre- 
 pared — the sight of whole Christian vil- 
 lages. He alone who has passed some time 
 in a heathen land, engaged in the work of 
 the ministry, can understand the delight 
 which I felt at finding myself met, wel- 
 comed, and surrounded by crowds of na- 
 tive professing Christians, whose counten- 
 ances spoke a most intelligible welcome." 
 Some idea of the extent of the mission at 
 Tinnevelley may be gathered from the fact, 
 that at this period the field was divided into 
 six districts, each containing from 50 to 90 
 villages, and each district having a mission- 
 ary, with from 40 to 70 catechists and school- 
 masters under his superintendence. A very 
 remarkable occurrence is recorded in 1841, 
 in one of the Tinnevelley districts, and should 
 be repeated as an evidence of the divine 
 blessing upon this mission. At a village in 
 the Palamcottah district, south of Tinne- 
 velly, belonging to a respectable Brahmin, a 
 number of families applied to a catechist for 
 instruction. The Brahmin, hearing of it, as- 
 sembled the whole of the villagers, and ad- 
 dressed them as follows : " I hear that some 
 of you have determined to learn the Vedam 
 (Christian religion.) Now, I don't want any 
 divisions and quarrels in my village, nor 
 shall there be two parties here ; therefore, 
 all of you either remain in a body in your 
 old religion, or else all of you in a body join 
 the new. If you like to embrace Christiani- 
 ty, do so ; I will make no opposition. You 
 may turn your temple into a prayer-house 
 if you like, only all be of the same mind ; 
 and if you do not act justly towards me, T 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 S99 
 
 shall look to the missionaries to see me 
 righted." The result was. that they all put 
 themselves under Christian instruction, de- 
 molished their idols, and converted their 
 devil temple into a temple of the living God. 
 The evidence that real Christianity prevailed 
 along with these outward forms of it, was 
 most satisfactory, and one proof of this was 
 found in the constancy with which the na- 
 tive Christians bore persecution. In one in- 
 stance, when compelled to flee from their 
 native village, they said to the catechist, 
 " We might escape all these troubles by de- 
 nying Christ, and returning to our former 
 ways, as most of our relations have done ; 
 but we cannot do so ; and as the Lord has 
 said, when they persecute you in this city, 
 jiee ye into another, we will avail ourselves 
 of his permission." As a further evidence 
 of genuine Christianity among these con- 
 verts, it is added, that they formed religious 
 and benevolent societies among themselves, 
 thus supporting the widows of catechists, 
 relieving the sick and indigent of their own 
 number, and sustaining Christian readers, 
 who traveled about making known the Gos- 
 pel. They also established a Church build- 
 ing fund, on the principle that every person 
 in the district capable of working, should 
 give the best day's income of the whole 
 year to the fund, with as much more as they 
 liked. Besides these evidences of the reality 
 of the work of grace among the converts of 
 Tinnevelley, there were many bright exam- 
 ples of Christian faith and hope at the hour 
 of death. 
 
 Particular instances of conversion and 
 Christian fidelity might also be given, illus- 
 trating the success of the missionaries at the 
 four stations in Travancore. One is that of 
 a Syrian convert, who was reclaimed from a 
 most degraded course of life, and who soon 
 commenced preaching the Gospel with a 
 zeal and boldness seldom witnessed in a na- 
 tive. He went from place to place, and on 
 one occasion as he was preaching, a Syrian 
 became so incensed that he went out, and, 
 procuring a knife, returned and stabbed the 
 preacher (Curiathe) to the heart. Curiathe 
 put up a prayer to God not to lay this sin 
 to the charge of the murderer, and fell down 
 lifeless. 
 
 In 1844, the mission at Tinnevelly was 
 further subdivided, so as to make eight dis- 
 tricts, each having a faithful missionary. In 
 addition to the seminary in the Palamcottah 
 district, for the superior instruction of pro- 
 mising youths from all the district schools, 
 there was also established this year a nor- 
 mal school, for the instruction of native 
 children in the English language, and upon 
 Christian principles ; and also a normal fe- 
 male school, under the care of two English 
 ladies. Measures were also taken for the 
 establishment of a printing-press for the use 
 
 of the mission, thus rendering the mission 
 complete in all its departments. 
 
 The missionary in one of these districts 
 mentions this year the case of a school girl, 
 who labored unweariedly to bring her father 
 and mother to the mission church. They 
 allowed her to come into their house, with- 
 out persecution, and to pray with them, and 
 after more than a year of such efifort, her 
 mother, and then her father, came to hear 
 the missionary, renounced heathenism, and 
 were regular attendants on the preached 
 word. In another Tinnevelly district twenty- 
 five families, all that remained in heathen- 
 ism, gave up their devil temple, and came in 
 a body, and placed themselves under Chris- 
 tian instruction ; thus leaving not one i dela- 
 tor in the district. The zeal of the people 
 of these districts to erect substantial houses 
 of worship in their villages, afforded pleas- 
 ing evidence of the progress of the Gospel 
 among them. The one day's earnings which 
 they had formerly contributed did not sat- 
 isfy them, and they made quite large sub- 
 scriptions in money to this object. In re- 
 gard to real spiritual progress, in connection 
 with these wonderful outward developments, 
 the missionaries spoke favorably from time 
 to time, as they saw the converts abounding 
 in labors, in sacrifices, and in efforts to bring 
 their relatives to renounce idolatry and em- 
 brace Christianity. 
 
 An out-station was commenced this year 
 about 12 miles from Trichoor, a station in 
 Travancore, among a class of heathens called 
 Nayards, the very lowest class of natives, 
 who lived by begging, and were extremely 
 ignorant. Several dwelling houses were 
 erected for them, schools were opened, and 
 within a year as many as sixty of them 
 were under instruction, both in religion and 
 in habits of industry. 
 
 Madras had not, for several years, received 
 its proportionate share of attention, the in- 
 terest having been concentrated more upon 
 the southern portion of the field, particu- 
 larly Tinnevelley and Travancore. The con- 
 sequence was, that in 1845, thirty years 
 from the commencement of the mission, 
 there were but three congregations in Ma- 
 dras, and these not so large as at an earlier 
 period. An urgent appeal was made for 
 more missionaries, but the society could not 
 respond favorably, as they had no more men 
 to send. Two years later, however, more 
 missionaries arrived, and the mission was 
 much strengthened and revived. 
 
 The Tinnevelly mission was again subdi- 
 vided in 1845, making 11 districts, with 14 
 missionary clergymen. The number of per- 
 sons under Christian instruction at this pe- 
 riod, in these eleven districts, amounted to 
 23,868, and in January 1846, they had in- 
 creased to 30,698. The number of baptized 
 converts was now 12,525. A similar sue- 
 
400 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 C088 attended the labors of the '' Society for 
 the Propapration of the Gospel in Foreign 
 Parts," occupying in Bonie measure the same 
 field, and of which fraternal mention is 
 made by the missionaries of the Church So- 
 cietv. IJut while Christianity was thus ad- 
 vancing, and whole villages were demolish- 
 ing their idols and embracing the Gospel, 
 a spirit of violent persecution was rising. 
 In one district, several houses of worship 
 were destroyed, converts were handled witn 
 violence, and many were falsely accused ; 
 but in spite of all this, 1402 souls embraced 
 the Christian religion in that very district, 
 within six months. In the latter part of 
 this year (1845) the persecution became 
 more systematic and violent. A mob of 
 more than 3,000 attacked some Christian 
 villages, robbed the people of all their goods, 
 and beat them in the most cruel manner. 
 The destruction of property was great. A 
 civil force at length interfered, and put an 
 end to the disturbance. Some of the con- 
 verts were led, through fear, to renounce 
 Christianity, but the great body of them re- 
 mained firm, and one of the missionaries 
 wrote, a few months later, "I have often 
 been surprised at the unshaken and uncom- 
 promising attachment which, during this 
 trying season, these poor people have mani- 
 fested. They, as well as some of the cate- 
 chists, have worked night and day to sup 
 port the Christian cause, and w^ith an alacri- 
 ty and zeal which have often revived my 
 own. Uad it not been for this, I do not 
 know what, at times, I should have done. 
 I know also, that some of them have resist- 
 ed temptations which an English Christian 
 is little prepared to resist, — ^bribes, and such 
 things." 
 
 The Bishop of Madras visited the Tinne- 
 velly missions in 1845, and in his report he 
 says, "More than 18,000 souls have renounced 
 idolatry and placed themselves under Chris- 
 tian instruction, since January 1841, when I 
 last visited these missions. Thus, in four 
 ^ears and a half, the Christian community 
 in Tinnevelly has doubled itself — the increase 
 during that period being equal to the total 
 increase of the fifty-four years which pre- 
 ceded it." 
 
 Many of the chief actors in the persecu- 
 tions were, in the following year, tried and 
 punished, but some escaped altogether ; and 
 it was found that the Christian congrega- 
 tions had some of them considerably di- 
 minished. But this did not hinder others, 
 in great numbers, from coming forward to 
 fill their places. About this time the sub- 
 ject of caste was taken up by the missiona- 
 ries in Tinnevelly, and a declaration was 
 drawn up, condemning it in the severest 
 terms, with a solemn pledge forever to re- 
 nounce it, and to discourage it both by word 
 and example. This protest and pledge 
 
 every native teacher was required to sign, 
 before he could become a candidate for lioly 
 orders. 
 
 The most diligent attention continued to 
 be bestowed upon the Syrian population, in 
 the Travancore district. AVhile the progress 
 here was slow, compared with that in Tinne- 
 velly, the missionaries still felt justified in 
 saying that there was a shaking among tho 
 Syrians — a state of great disorganization in 
 their church, and a general dissatisfaction 
 with their religion and a willingness to re- 
 ceive the truth. Two years later (1851) a 
 missionary remarks, that although the Syri- 
 ans hold many doctrines in common with 
 the Roman Catholics, yet there is this 
 wide essential difference between the two 
 churches, viz. : that the Syrians do not dis- 
 allow the perusal of the Scriptures, and nei- 
 ther do they mutilate the sacred text, like 
 the Roman Catholics, to suit their owii in- 
 terpretation ; but the authorized version is 
 acknowledged by them, and they profess to 
 draw their doctrines from thence. Still a 
 year later, the sg,me missionary says, " Some 
 great crisis is probably at hand, with regard 
 to the Syrian church in this place. The 
 whole Syrian community is in a most divided 
 state, and many are anxious to be joined to 
 a purer faith." This missionary had widely 
 distributed the word of God among the 
 12,000 Syrians of his district, when a Romish 
 priest ordered the people to bring all these 
 books to his church, on pain of excommuni- 
 cation ; and, as soon as they were collected 
 they were publicly burnt. Opposition of 
 this nature from the Catholics, was among 
 the most serious hindrances to the progress 
 of the mission among the Syrian people. 
 
 Slavery is spoken of as prevailing exten- 
 sively in Travancore, the slaves numbering 
 about one-sixth of the whole population. 
 They are an extremely degraded class, being 
 regarded by the higher classes, and even by 
 the laborers, as utterly unclean and pollut- 
 ing. " Their persons are entirely at the dis- 
 posal of their masters, by whom they are 
 bought and sold like cattle, and are often 
 worse treated." Yet even these slaves were 
 often reached, and brought under Christian 
 influences. 
 
 The intelligence from the Madras and 
 South India missions is to the close of 1852. 
 Much that is of special interest might be 
 added to the foregoing statements, particu- 
 larly in regard to the Tinnevelly and Te- 
 loogoo missions, but it is necessary to omit 
 further details. It has been seen that this 
 branch of the Church of England mission, 
 extending over a period of 48 years, has 
 been conducted on a very broad scale, and 
 upon principles as enlightened and philan- 
 thropic as they have been Christian. For 
 learning, practical wisdom, and sincere and 
 unremitting exertions for the temporal and 
 
%iriVBRSITT 
 
 4£r 
 
 ow ^*v.«. 
 
 PO" 
 
 M. 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 401 
 
 spiritual elevation of the heathen, the mis- 
 sionaries of this society in Southern India 
 have been distinguished, not less, certainly, 
 than those in any other field. The results 
 of these labors appear in a table at the end 
 of the article on the Church of England 
 missions in Ilindostan. 
 
 Bombay, — The Church of England com- 
 menced its mission in Bombay in 1820, under 
 the la"bors of Rev. Mr Kenney. Although 
 it was not a new field, the American Board 
 having had an efficient mission there for 
 eight years, yet Mr. Kenney occupied a sepa- 
 rate and independent station, and had the 
 Mahratta language to learn. After laboring 
 with great zeal and success for five years, his 
 return to England was rendered necessary 
 by the health of his family, and he was suc- 
 ceeded by Rev. Messrs. Mitchell and Steward. 
 Mr. Kenney had established three schools 
 for boys, with 113 scholars, but no school for 
 girls had yet been opened. Mrs. Stew'ard 
 soon died, and Mr. Steward left for another 
 field. Other laborers succeeded from time 
 to time, but for fifteen years or more the 
 operations of the Church Missionary Society 
 in Bombay and Western India were quite 
 limited. They had however established a 
 mission at Nassuck, 100 miles east of Bom- 
 bay, and at both these places they had opened 
 schools for both boys and girls, and had 
 preached the Gospel to multitudes of people, 
 and the Arch-Deacon of Bombay was led to 
 remark that " much precious seed was vege- 
 tating in the hearts of natives, though little 
 appeared externally." For the last few 
 years more visible fruits have appeared, at 
 Bombay and at Nassuck. The latter place 
 has a population of 30.000, and is the resort 
 of numerous pilgrims, and the seat and 
 centre of Brahminism in Western India 
 Here the missionaries have had to encounter 
 very fierce opposition, the Brahmins having 
 become enraged at the weakened influence 
 of Ilindooism on the minds of those who 
 have received instruction in the mission 
 schools, and particularly on account of the 
 relinquishment of caste by two Brahmin 
 youths. The Brahmins even expressed the 
 belief that they should be able to expel the 
 missionaries, who, nevertheless, went steadily 
 on with their labors. Considerable atten- 
 tion was bestowed upon the translation of 
 the Scriptures into Mahratta, and preaching 
 tours were frequently performed into the 
 neighboring towns and villages. In the So- 
 ciety's report for 1852, they say, " The mis- 
 sionaries at Bombay and Nassuck are perse- 
 vering in their patient and faithful labors, 
 though they have hitherto reaped but little 
 fruit, and can scarcely discern its promise. 
 The advantages which have been gained have 
 been chiefly the formation of schools, the 
 translation of the Holy Scriptures and of 
 tracts, and that increased respect and atten- 
 26 
 
 tion to Christian truth which form an impor- 
 tant vantage ground for future operatons." 
 
 In 1843 mention is made of an Asylum at 
 Nassuck for poor and destitute natives, sup- 
 ported by the alms of the benevolent ; and 
 here the missionaries were accustomed to 
 give instruction to the inmates, some of 
 whom received the Gospel and were bap- 
 tized. The last notice of this mission is in 
 the Church Missionary Record for May, 
 1853, in which the missionaries say, " There 
 are no great achievements to tell of — no 
 brilliant successes to call forth acclamations. 
 Our pages contain nought but the record of 
 humble, patient and persevering labors, car- 
 ried on amid much natural discouragement, 
 but sustained by the gracious assurance that 
 they who are called to do the work of the 
 Lord shall find that their labor is not in 
 vain." The native congregation at Bombay, 
 at this period, numbered 56, of whom 22 
 were communicants. There was also a 
 divinity class of four students, and a " Money 
 Institution," so called, containing in the 
 English department 230, and in the Marathi 
 department 175 pupils. The vernacular 
 schools were eighteen in number, eight for 
 girls and ten for boys, the former containing 
 362 pupils, and the latter 630. At Nassuck 
 there was one English school, containing 20 
 boys, four Marathi schools with 272 boys, 
 and one Hindostanee school with 16 pupilsl 
 At Junin, east of Bombay about 100 miles, 
 little had been done, the station having been 
 occupied only a short time. The Sinde mis- 
 sion was commenced as late as 1850, and 
 presents no facts of importance. A com- 
 plete summary of the six stations of the 
 Church of England mission in Western 
 India, will be found in the statistical table. 
 
 Calcutta and North India. — The Church 
 Society's mission in Calcutta, was com- 
 menced in 1816, by Rev. Mr. Jetter. Early 
 attention was paid to schools, and to print- 
 ing and circulating religious tracts. Success 
 attended these labors, and in 1824 the num- 
 ber of schools reported was 22, and the 
 number of scholars 500, a large number of 
 whom were females. Great interest was 
 awakened on the subject of female education 
 in India, and a " Ladies' Society" for this 
 purpose was formed, under the patronage of 
 Lady Amherst. At an examination of 
 female schools in February, 1825, out of 323 
 girls, in eleven schools, 292 came together. 
 They were examined in Watts' Catechism 
 and the New Testament, to the gratification 
 and surprise of all present. 
 
 The death of Bishop Heber, in 1827, was 
 an afflictive event to the Calcutta mission. 
 He had been in India but little more than 
 two years, and in that short period had 
 visited almost every station where a Chris- 
 tian church could be assembled, performing 
 not only the higher duties of his office, but 
 
i02 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 the more humble and laborious duties of an 
 ordinary pastor. Ho had thus become 
 known to all his clergy and people, in the 
 phiins and mountains of Ilindostan, in the 
 wilder tracts of Central India, in the stations 
 of CJuzerat^ the Deccan, and the Western 
 Coast, in the hills and valleys of Ceylon, and 
 in the southern provinces of India, the scene 
 of his last labors, and henceforth of his 
 dearest memory." The Bishop on coming 
 in from a laborious tour, in which ho had 
 confirmed a large number of persons, went 
 to the bath as usual, and in a few moments 
 was found dead beneath the water. 
 
 The missions at Calcutta were not at any 
 time conducted upon so liberal a scale as in 
 some other places, and yet there is evidence 
 of great fidelity on the part of the mission- 
 aries and teachers, who from time to time 
 were called to labor here. In the report for 
 1852. the number of native Christians under 
 the missionaries in Calcutta and its neighbor- 
 hood, was stated at 230. Services were held 
 in the mission chapel, both in Bengali and 
 Hindostanee, and preaching to the heathen 
 was regularly kept up, in the vernacular 
 languages, both at out-stations and in the 
 public thoroughfares. 
 
 Throughout the entire history of this mis- 
 sion, schools of various grades and depart- 
 ments have been maintained. In 1853 the 
 boys' boarding school embraced 28 pupils, 
 and a similar school for girls had 30 pupils. 
 The vernacular schools connected with the 
 mission had an average attendance of 6G0 
 boys. At an out-station a little distance 
 from Calcutta, there was, at the above date. 
 a boys' school containing 87 pupils, and also 
 a school for girls with 25 pupils. These 
 were taught not only in books, but in needle- 
 work, cooking, &c. The English school con- 
 tained 350 pupils. 
 
 The native press in Calcutta has been con- 
 ducted with much energy, though not en- 
 tirely under missionary control. Rev. J. 
 Long, who at the last accounts had a con- 
 nection with this department, writes, " Cal- 
 cutta sends out from native presses, annual- 
 ly, not less than 30,000 volumes in Bengali. 
 Among these are more than twelve news- 
 papers and periodicals. Some forty native 
 presses furnish a supply of intellectual food, 
 much of which is anything but favorable to 
 Christianity. Calcutta is, in this respect, a 
 very important sphere, and I have given to 
 it as much time as I could spare." 
 
 At a little earlier period Mr. Long gives a 
 view of Calcutta as a missionary field, which 
 is so comprehensive and satisfactory that 
 parts of it may with propriety be quoted : 
 " In the city is a population of at least 
 500,000, and within a radius of fifteen miles 
 a population of more than 2,000,000. It is 
 the centre of missionary operations from 
 North India — the heart of Bengal. All 
 
 translations of the Scriptures, rules for their 
 circulating, the translation of tracts, the 
 printing of Christian school books, the 
 machinery of missions, — all are managed by 
 committees in Calcutta, and chiefly by the 
 extra labors of missionaries j for were it not 
 for the exertions of missionaries, all these 
 committees would languish, or perhaps be- 
 come defunct. Many benevolent European 
 gentlemen in Calcutta, who are brought into 
 connection with the missionaries, have their 
 attention directed to certain branches of 
 missionary work, which they support very 
 liberally." 
 
 '• Calcutta, as far as regards education, in 
 some respects resembles Cambridge or Ox- 
 ford. Thousands of youths come and lodge 
 in Calcutta for the sole purpose of their edu- 
 cation. Of my scholars — 150 in number — 
 who study the Bible, Home's Evidences of 
 Christianity, Milton, and Natural Philos- 
 ophy, through the medium of the English 
 language, four-fifths merely take lodgings in 
 Calcutta, while their parents live fifty or a 
 hundred miles in the country. Educational 
 labors afford a great field here. There are 
 more than 100,000 boys in Calcutta, of whom 
 not more than 10,000 attend school. * * 
 What a ocene for missionary labors. Be- 
 sides, it is generally admitted that Calcutta 
 missionaries do twice as much work as 
 those in the country. Their sphere of labor 
 is near them ; they have not to exhaust therr 
 physical energies in traveling, &c. All the 
 labor connected with translations, a native 
 Christian literature, &c., is performed almost 
 entirely by Calcutta missionaries ; and yet 
 the Church Missionary Society has always 
 been weak in Calcutta. The Scotch Mis- 
 sionary Society have five laborers, the 
 London Missionary Society five, the Baptist 
 Missionary Society six, while our Society 
 have only Mr. Sandys and myself. I may 
 be mistaken, but I have long been of opinion 
 that Calcutta is the Waterloo of India, — the 
 depot where the grand battle between 
 Christianity and Hindooism will be fought. 
 The English language is sweeping away as 
 with the besom of destruction, any linger- 
 ing attachment that may remain to Brah- 
 minism, in the minds of youth, and now is 
 the glorious era to control the storm, and 
 direct the mental energies into the path of 
 salvation." 
 
 Since the above was written another mis- 
 sionary, Mr. Bost, has arrived in Calcutta. 
 In other respects Mr. Long's remarks apply 
 to the present state of that mission. 
 
 Benares. — This is a city of great import- 
 ance, and is about 500 miles north-west of 
 Calcutta. The mission here was commenced 
 in 1817, by Rev. Messrs. Morris and Adling- 
 ton, successively schoolmaster, catechist, 
 and preacher ; but of their labors little is 
 recorded. They were succeeded by other 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 403 
 
 laborers, who remained but a short time, and 
 for many years there was a great deficiency 
 of systematic effort. Gradually however, a 
 change took place, and for the last ten or 
 fifteen years this has been one of the most 
 important of the Church Society's missions 
 in North India. 
 
 The mission premises are situated about a 
 mile and a half south-east of the canton- 
 ments, at a village called Sigra. The en- 
 closure contains about five acres of ground. 
 The situation is airy, healthy, and quiet, 
 with three large and one small bungalows 
 (houses), the former designed for the resi- 
 dence of ordained missionaries, and the lat- 
 ter for European schoolmasters. There is 
 another building devoted to the use of Chris- 
 tian orphan boys, who form a very interest- 
 ing part of the mission ; and not far distant 
 is the school establishment for the native 
 girls. In the city of Benares, and connected 
 with the mission, there is a large school for 
 native boys, founded by a native, named Jai 
 Nairain, who left at his death two bunga- 
 lows, the rent of which should apply to its 
 support, and also a large building to be used 
 as a school house and residence. Govern- 
 ment added a liberal monthly donation, and 
 this has been one of the most important in- 
 stitutions connected with the mission. It is 
 called " Jai Nairain's College," and has at 
 present about 500 students, which is as 
 many as the building will accommodate. At 
 the last dates, an enlargement of the prem- 
 ises had been commenced. The Brahmin 
 boys outnumber those of any other caste. 
 The usual schools for boys and girls have 
 been maintained for many years with in- 
 creasing interest. A pleasing fact is men- 
 tioned in the Record for November, 1853, by 
 Mrs. Smith, teacher of the ■' heathen girls' 
 school," viz. : that during the whole year the 
 school had not been once closed on account 
 of a heathen festival. She had told the 
 girls that she desired their attendance on 
 those days especially, that their minds might 
 not be contaminated by the ceremonies 
 practiced. 
 
 The native Christian congregation at 
 Benares numbers 314 individuals. The mis- 
 sionaries, of whom there are five, devote 
 much time to itinerating among the sur- 
 rounding towns and villages, and they 
 usually have no lack of hearers and dispu- 
 ters. 
 
 Birdwan. — At the close of the year 1816, 
 the corresponding committee received a 
 communication from Lieutenant Stewart, 
 stationed at Birdwan, 40 miles above Cal- 
 cutta, proposing an extensive plan of native 
 schools at and near that place. This pro- 
 posal was adopted, and in a short time ten 
 schools were established, one at Birdwan, 
 and the others in places not far distant. 
 Within a year from their commencement 
 
 there were 1,000 children in these schools, 
 all taught in the Bengalee language. The 
 number of schools was subsequently in- 
 creased, but disbanded again for the want of 
 means to sustain so many. The present 
 number is ten, and in the last report — 1853 — 
 the missionary says, "The number of 
 heathen children who enjoy plain education, 
 founded on the Christian religion, is about 
 500. In these schools you meet the proud 
 Brahmin sitting at the side of, or below, the 
 Sudra, in harmony and love, deriving the 
 same instruction. The fear of having 
 youths taught in mission schools has, in 
 this neighborhood, almost passed away." 
 Particular mention is made in the circular of 
 the Board for October of last year, of the 
 orphan girls' school, with 150 orphans, up- 
 wards of 30 of whom had died while re- 
 ceiving their education, some of them very 
 happily. "This," says the teacher, Mrs. 
 Weitbrecht, " has been one of the most 
 pleasing and encouraging branches of our 
 work in this mission, and has often sustained 
 our spirits when all besides has been dark 
 and trying." 
 
 Krishnagur. — This station is a little to the 
 north-west of Calcutta, and was commenced 
 in 1831. The work was continued in the 
 usual way, instruction being given in schools, 
 chapels, and by the distribution of the 
 Scriptures and tracts, till 1835, when a bit- 
 ter persecution arose against a sect com- 
 posed partly of Hindoos and partly of Mus- 
 sulmans, called "Kurta Bhoja," worship- 
 ers of the Creator. They worshiped one 
 God, had nothing to do with idols, and be- 
 lieved that God would come into the world 
 in human form. They bore persecution with 
 great patience, and the missionary, Mr. 
 Deerr, on visiting them, was convinced of 
 their sincerity, and was led to admire es- 
 pecially the great love and affection which 
 they bore one to another. In 1836, Mr. 
 Deerr renewed his visit, and" was received 
 with increased cordiality. He established 
 public worship among them, in which they 
 united with much joy ; and upon this a 
 more rigorous persecution commenced 
 against them. They were treated as out of 
 the pale of heathenism, their caste was 
 gone, and their wives and children were 
 taken from them, and only restored by an 
 order from the magistrate. In 1838, the 
 leading men in ten villages belonging to this 
 sect, avowed their belief in the Gospel, and 
 after instruction, were baptized into the 
 Christian faith. They straightway confessed 
 Christ before the heathen, and established 
 public worship in their villages. This crea- 
 ted great excitement, and a still more violent 
 opposition was the result. But the truth 
 spread, the Christians were more in earnest, 
 inquirers were multiplied, and the Word of 
 God prevailed. 
 
4U4 
 
 HINDOaTiVN. 
 
 At the request of the Corresponding Com- 
 mittee, the IJiehop of Calcutta made a care- 
 ful and thorough investigation into the facts, 
 and made a written report, from Avhich the 
 following is extracted : 
 
 "It api)ears that between fifty-flve and 
 aixtv villages are thirsting for the waters of 
 life,* in a greater or less degree. They 
 stretch to the north and north-east of 
 Krishnugur to the distance of forty or fifty 
 miles, and to the south-west fifteen or 
 twenty. The numbers described as pre- 
 pared for baptism, in various measures of 
 course, is between 3,000 and 3,500. The 
 Arch-Deacon assisted himself at the recep- 
 tion of about 500 souls, including women 
 and children, into the Christian Church, and 
 there seems the fairest prospect, if we can 
 but enter the wide and effectual door in 
 time, that not only these three or four thou- 
 sand, but the whole population of the fifty 
 or sixty villages, may receive the Christian 
 faith. Such a glorious scene has never before 
 been presented to our longing eyes in Ben- 
 gal ; and after making all deductions for 
 overstatements, sanguine hopes, &c., it ap- 
 pears that a mighty work of divine grace is 
 begun, — a work wide and permanent, as we 
 trust, — a work for which our fathers in 
 India, Brown, Buchanan, Martyn, Thomason, 
 and Bps. Corrie, Middleton, and Hebcr, 
 would have blessed and praised God in the 
 loudest strains of gratitude and joy." 
 
 Archdeacon Dealtry, who visited the dis- 
 trict, and made very diligent and patient in- 
 vestigations as to tiie origin and history of 
 the sect, says : 
 
 " It appears that they have been about 
 sixty years settled on the banks of Jelingha, 
 (a branch of the Ganges). They called 
 themselves ' Kurta Bhoja,' worshipers of 
 the Creator. They had some connection 
 with the sect of Dervishes, supposed to 
 abound in Persia. They had a firm notion 
 of one Supreme Being, rejected with abhor- 
 rence all idolatry, held very slightly if at all 
 by caste, and considered the test of prose- 
 lytism, not eating, but praying to the one 
 true God. They showed an acquaintance 
 generally with the lost estate and sinful na- 
 ture of man, with the incarnation and holy 
 life of Christ, with the atonement, justifica- 
 tion, and sanctification, in their substantial 
 import, and with the necessity of following 
 Christ's example. Jesus Christ was the be- 
 ginning and end of their religion, and 
 prayer to him was the test of discipleship. 
 They had learnt the ten commandments, the 
 Lord's Prayer, the Creed, and Dr. "Watts' 
 Catechism. It appeared further, as far as 
 could be ascertained, that they were willing 
 to forsake all for Christ, and endure ?r hat- 
 ever persecutions might come upon ^Jem," 
 
 Tile Jesuit was, that the Archdeacon said 
 to tliu missionaries, '* Can any forbid water, 
 
 that these should not be baptized, who have 
 received the Holy Ghost, in his sanctifying 
 influences, as well as we i" And upon their 
 unanimous vote, baptism was administered 
 to them in separate companies, and from 
 village to village, to the number of over 
 1,000. In 1841, the Bishop of Calcutta vis- 
 ited the Krishnagur district in person, and 
 after surveying the villages and conversing 
 with the Christians, he said, " I have not a 
 word to retract on reading over my commu- 
 nications of 1839. Time has only developed 
 and confirmed the statements then made." 
 
 In 1845, the Papists made an incursion into 
 these Christian villages, under the lead of a 
 Spanish Jesuit Priest, with a view to seduce 
 to Popery the numerous converts from 
 heathenism. They came with large chari- 
 table funds, and secured an extensive piece 
 of ground in the centre of the chief station, 
 with a view to erect thereon a church, dwell- 
 ing house, school, &c. With much force and 
 justice do the society, in their report, speak 
 of the Church of Rome as " turning aside 
 from the 130 millions of heathen in India, to 
 address its labors to a few recent Christian 
 converts who had been taught and fostered 
 by the care of others, thus seeking to en- 
 large its borders, according to its ancient 
 character, foreshown in the word of God, 
 through the apostasy of Christians rather 
 than through the conversion of the hea- 
 then." For a time the efforts of this Jesuit 
 appeared successful, but after two years it 
 is recorded, that "the priest who had in- 
 truded upon our work and led astray many 
 of our converts to his errors, has been ar- 
 rested in his career, and has evidently failed 
 of his designs. Most of his converts are 
 very anxious to be re-admitted into our 
 communion." 
 
 Although there were many apostasies 
 from time to time, of those who " did run 
 well," yet a favorable account is given of 
 the stability and Christian consistency of a 
 large number of the professed converts, and 
 in very few instances has there been a more 
 signal display of the grace of God among 
 the heathen, than at Krishnagur. In 1848, 
 the missionaries say, " Seventeen years ago 
 the name of Krishnagur first appeared in the 
 records of our society, as an out-station to 
 Birdwan. This was the first attempt of the 
 missionary to disturb the unbroken heathen- 
 ism of the district. Now, Mr. Cuthbert, 
 one of the missionaries, reports missions and 
 mission work as rooted and settled in the 
 land as firmly as the English people are in 
 India, and more so." Seven stations were 
 occupied, substantial and durable clmrches, 
 school houses and dwelling houses, had been 
 built, neat and convenient cottages had 
 sprung up in all the Christian villages, and 
 the labors of the missionaries and school 
 teachers were attended with the most grati- 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 405 
 
 fying success. Were there space for it, it 
 would be gratifying to present much more 
 full details of the revival in this district, and 
 of its results ; but the narrative must be 
 closed, with a reference to the Church Mis- 
 sionary Record for 1837, and onward, for a 
 complete history of the work. 
 
 Cliunar. — This station is near Benares, far 
 to the north-west of Calcutta, and its mis- 
 sionary operations date a ^ittle earlier than 
 those of Benares. But it has seldom, if at 
 any time, had more than one missionary, 
 and less has been expended upon it than 
 upon almost any other station of the Church 
 Society, of so long continuance. The most 
 recent report says. " This station cannot be 
 continued much longer on the Society's list, 
 being only occasionally visited by a mission- 
 ary, and the native Christian flock consist- 
 ing of persons connected with the canton- 
 ment, and therefore properly belonging to 
 the ministerial charge of the chaplain of the 
 station." 
 
 Mirut. — The first missionary to this sta- 
 tion, which is about 32 miles north-east of 
 Delhi, and near the Ganges, arrived in 1815. 
 It was considered an important position, 
 and for fifteen years or more the mission 
 was conducted with ordinary zeal and suc- 
 cess, though the number of laborers was 
 never great. In 1842 the station was left 
 without a missionary, only the Government 
 chaplain being on the ground. In his appeal 
 for help, he says, " There is still a native 
 flock of 32 Christians, without a pastor, and 
 altogether depending on the care of a native 
 reader. The widowed state of the mission 
 is a constant source of grief to the local 
 committee." At the same time the Bishop 
 of Calcutta speaks of this mission as one of 
 the oldest in that part of India, and now in 
 danger of becoming entirely extinct — a mis- 
 sion with all the heavy external apparatus 
 complete — a mission which possesses a mis- 
 sion residence, with alms-houses for native 
 Christians when destitute — a mission in one 
 of the largest stations, and most healthy, in 
 all India, and where almost unlimited funds 
 might be raised rf it were vigorously sus- 
 tained. In 1846, after four years' suspen- 
 sion of operations, a missionary, Rev. Mr. 
 Lamb, was provided for this station, and its 
 prospects brightened. During the four years 
 , preceding 1850, eleven adults were baptized, 
 and have given satisfactory evidence of sin- 
 cerity. The latest account is contained in 
 the Record for November, 1853, when the 
 congregation of native worshipers num- 
 bered 150, the English school contained 
 about fifty boys, houses had been built for 
 widows, and the Christian village was ex- 
 tending its limits. Mirut is memorable as 
 the place where the distinguished native 
 catechist, Anund Messeeh, was baptized, in 
 181G, and where he commenced those labors 
 
 which have been of such signal service to 
 the cause of missions in India. 
 
 Delhi. — For several years Delhi was the 
 seat of an interesting mission, chiefly under 
 the care of Anund Messeeh, the distin- 
 guished native catechist and reader. Ho 
 had been for some time a teacher at Mirut, 
 not far distant, and his first visit to Delhi 
 after his conversion appears to have been in 
 1818, his wife, a brother and two sisters 
 being there, and some hope of their conver- 
 sion being entertained. While there a re- 
 port was in circulation, that a number of 
 strangers from several villages to the west 
 of Delhi had assembled together, nobody 
 knew why, in a place near the imperial city, 
 and were busily employed in friendly con- 
 versation, and in reading some books in 
 their possession, which induced them to re- 
 nounce their caste, to bind themselves to 
 love and to associate with one another, and 
 intermarry only among their own sect, and 
 to lead a strict and holy life. Anund imme- 
 diately set off for the place of rendezvous, 
 and found about 500 people, men, women, 
 and children, seated under the shade of the 
 trees, and employed in reading and conver- 
 sation. On further inquiry it turned out 
 that these people belonged to a sect of na- 
 tive Christians, called Saadhs, and that the 
 book they had was the New Testament. 
 Many copies of it were in the possession of 
 the party, some printed, in the Ilindostanee 
 tongue, and some written. They professed 
 great love for this book, called it the book 
 of God, and said that the written copies 
 they wrote themselves, having no other 
 means of obtaining a supply. Subsequent 
 investigations led to the discovery, that 
 these poor strangers had existed as a dis- 
 tinct sect for 5 or 6 years, having separated 
 themselves from the authority and control 
 of the Brahmins, both in temporal and 
 spiritual things, being disgusted by their 
 tyranny and extortion, as well as determined 
 to exercise their own judgment more freely 
 in matters of religion. Before this general 
 secession of the Saadhs, the Brahmins, it is 
 said, had hated them, and subjected them to 
 such exorbitant exactions as to cause general 
 misery and discontent. When once the 
 leaven of their discontent began to work, 
 their numbers increased daily, and their 
 tenets continued to spread. The particular 
 tract of country occupied by the Saadhs, 
 lay to the north-west and west of Delhi, 
 some fifty miles. They had five villages, in 
 one of which was found ten copies of the 
 Gospel, which they accounted more precious 
 than gold, and would give any thing for a 
 larger supply. 
 
 In his tour among these villages, Annnd 
 Messeeh was received with great reverence, 
 and would have been almost worshiped had 
 he not rebuked such a tendency. At the 
 
406 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 principal village, the people gathered to- 
 gether every night, for worship, each pray- 
 ing exteraporaneously, and blessing and 
 praising the one true God for all his mercies. 
 
 It was with particular reference to the 
 care and instruction of these people, that 
 Me.'sseeh, about this time, was stationed at 
 Delhi, for there the Saadhs could visit him, 
 and ho in turn could visit them at their 
 houses, 60 that thev would bo sure of religi- 
 ous instruction. It is supposed that the 
 copies of the Gospel in their possession were 
 those distributed by a missionary, Mr. 
 Chamberlain, while on an exploring tour in 
 that quarter. Favorable accounts continued 
 to be received of Anund's labors, until 1827, 
 when he was removed from Delhi to another 
 station, and subsequently to this the intelli- 
 gence respecting the Saadhs is very imper- 
 fect. A full account of them may bo seen in 
 the Missionary Register, for 1818, pp. 17, 
 and 203. 
 
 Agra. — Incipient missionary labors appear 
 to have been commenced at Agra, some 50 
 miles south of Delhi, as early as 1815. The 
 mission was for some time under the care of 
 the Rev. Mr. Corrie, chaplain at this station, 
 assisted by a native Christian, Abdool Mes- 
 seeh, whose character and labors are spoken 
 of in terms of high commendation. An in- 
 stitution for orphan children was an object 
 of special care at this place, and in the 
 calamitous famine of 1838, when 300 chil- 
 dren were preserved from starvation by the 
 benevolence of the Christian public, these 
 children were all received by the committee 
 of the Orphan Institution, and provided with 
 a home and suitable instruction. Agra has 
 been provided with schools of various 
 grades, and with missionaries, so as to render 
 it one of the most efficient and important of 
 the Church Society in northern India. A 
 new building for the high school, or college, 
 had been completed, in 1853. and 200 boys 
 were under instruction in this institution. 
 This mission has had the advantage of a 
 
 Erinting press, and many of the orphan boys 
 ave labored in connection with it so as to 
 provide for their own support. 
 
 Jaunpore.— This was an extension of the 
 Benares mission, effected in 1838. The mis- 
 sionary was soon removed, however, and for 
 four years this station was without a mis- 
 sionary. But the Record for November, 
 1853, says, " This station has once more a 
 resident missionary, and a small Christian 
 flock, numbering about 30 individuals." 
 
 Gor7'uckpore.—Thi6 place, at a considerable 
 distance north-west of Calcutta, was visited 
 from Benares in 1823, and a mission was 
 commenced which has been continued to the 
 present time. It has now one missionary, 
 two native congregations, a large English 
 school, orphan schools, and a vernacular 
 school 
 
 Bha^ilpur.— The mission at this plac< 
 was conuncnced in IJfSO, and at the last ae 
 counts there had been 41 baptisms. Th( 
 hill tribes around this mission are said t( 
 have no caste, and no antiquated system of 
 religion, and are regarded tlicrcfore as mon 
 likely to receive the Gospel freely and a 
 once. 
 
 Himalaya. — This mission was commencec 
 in 1844. Its labors consisted for a time ii 
 the establishmeht of small village schools 
 and itinerating among the population of tlu 
 mountains, but it became a very importan 
 mission, and is still so regarded. Being ii 
 the mountain regions in the north of Iliiido 
 Stan, and among a people little known before 
 some notice of their character, religion, &c. 
 may be expected. 
 
 The principal station of the mission is 
 Kot-gurh, situated 7,000 feet above the leve 
 of the sea, and 100 miles from the plains of 
 India. It is the key of central Asia, and the 
 granary of all the countries to the north anc 
 east. The missionary. Rev. J. D. Prochnow 
 describes the country, the influence of tlu 
 Sikh war, and the various means by whicl 
 this vast field had been opened to mission- 
 ary labor ; and then proceeds to give a de- 
 scription of the people themselves. The^ 
 consist of three classes : 
 
 " First, the Hill people, who afe all Hin- 
 doos, though their ways of living and of 
 worship are very different from those of the 
 plains. In their rites, they bear a great re- 
 semblance to the Jews of old. They carrj 
 their Deotas — wooden chairs dressed up 
 with human faces fixed to them — on theii 
 shoulders, and dance before them in a pecu- 
 liar manner, as the Jews of old before the 
 ark. In their music, their observances of 
 the new moon, fasting, and many other 
 things, they also resemble the Jews ; but 
 more than any thing else, in their sacrifices 
 to atone the wrath of the Deota, viz. : the 
 sprinkling of blood on the posts and doorg 
 of the temple and houses. All this shows 
 that the hill tribes of the Himalaya mission 
 at Kot-gurh, are far from being in a savage 
 and entirely uncivilized state. They under- 
 stand all the terms of our religion. I never 
 found the least difficulty in making them, 
 even the women, understand the great truths 
 of the Gospel, if only brought before them 
 in simple language. To the Hindoo moun- 
 taineers, as we have been without assistance, 
 our labors have hitherto been chiefly con- 
 fined." 
 
 " The second class are the wandering Tar- 
 tars, or the Budhist mountaineers of the 
 higher hills. These people are very peculiar 
 every way, in their habits, religion, language, 
 &c. They come down from the high table- 
 lands by thousands, to spend the winter 
 months in the valleys, all divided into small 
 families, bringing their sheep and goats along 
 
niNDOSTAN. 
 
 407 
 
 with them, together with the produce of 
 
 their country, 
 
 borax, 'wool, dried 
 
 apricots, silk, precious 
 they dispose of during the winter months, 
 feeding their flocks in the valleys of the 
 rivers, for they would find no food for them 
 in their own country at this season ; and in 
 May all these families move again towards 
 their native hills, with their bags filled with 
 grain. So they avoid the rainy season of 
 the lower hills, and enjoy the fine summer 
 of the higher hills. These wandering tribes 
 alone form a very interesting field of labor. 
 Their religion is Budhism, and there are 
 plenty of monks and nuns among them." 
 
 " The third class is the Sikhs. They are 
 all of one caste, and are readily influenced 
 by the preaching of the missionaries. Those 
 of them who have been converted to Chris- 
 tianity at Oaunpore and Benares are very 
 highly spoken of, as being far superior to 
 the Hindoo converts." 
 
 As to the success of this mission, Mr. 
 
 Procknow says, " I must confess with deep 
 humiliation, visible fruits have been few ; 
 but considering all the difiiculties which 
 have beset us from our very first beginning 
 until now, I am by no means discouraged. 
 The seed has fallen into good ground ; it will 
 spring up in God's own time." The greatest 
 difficulty in the way of giving success to 
 this, and many other new and important 
 missions, the committee say, is the " pau- 
 city of missionary laborers." 
 
 The Pwnjaub. — The mission to the Pun- 
 jaub was commenced in 1852, and has two 
 missionaries, assisted by three native cate- 
 chists and readers. Portions of Scripture, 
 books and tracts, in Punjaub, Urdu, and 
 Hindi, have been put into circulation. A 
 school has been commenced, with 50 
 scholars, half of whom are Sikhs, and the 
 rest Hindoos and Mussulmans. For a fuller 
 account of the Punjaub mission, see Mission- 
 ary Intelligencer for May and November, 
 1852. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 NAMES OF DISTRICTS 
 
 •i 
 
 _5 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 02 
 
 Clergy- 
 men. 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 1 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 i 
 
 ? 
 
 f 
 
 § 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 9. 
 
 p 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 OR 
 
 PRINCIPAL STATIONS, 
 1853. 
 
 a- 
 
 I 
 
 
 Ig 
 
 9 
 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 r Calcutta District, 
 
 1816 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 46 
 
 4 
 
 6^ 
 
 133 
 
 12 
 
 42 
 
 54 
 
 18 
 
 513 
 
 55 
 
 10 
 
 1400 
 
 1978 
 
 
 Burdwan District, 
 
 1817 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 3 
 
 22 
 
 47 
 
 4 
 
 29 
 
 33 
 
 10 
 
 513 
 
 50 
 
 
 60 
 
 623 
 
 
 Krishnagur District, 
 
 1831 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 93 
 
 8 
 
 113 
 
 403 
 
 6 
 
 189 
 
 195 
 
 49 
 
 1759 
 
 352 
 
 30 
 
 40 
 
 2181 
 
 d 
 
 Bhagulpur, 
 
 1850 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 5 
 
 19 
 
 35 
 
 14 
 
 49 
 
 4 
 
 150 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 178 
 
 a 
 
 Benares, 
 
 1817 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 34 
 
 4 
 
 48 
 
 96 
 
 6 
 
 14 
 
 20 
 
 8 
 
 541 
 
 60 
 
 7 
 
 200 
 
 808 
 
 
 Jaunpore, 
 
 1831 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 17 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 12 
 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 396 
 
 11 
 
 21 
 
 
 428 
 
 ^' 
 
 Gorruckpore, 
 
 1823 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 4 
 
 265 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 289 
 
 % 
 
 Agra, 
 
 1813 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 27 
 
 2 
 
 36 
 
 168 
 
 2 
 
 48 
 
 50 
 
 10 
 
 456 
 
 26 
 
 
 27 
 
 509 
 
 ll 
 
 Mirut, 
 Himalaya, 
 Punjaub, 
 ,At Home, 
 
 1815 
 1844 
 1852 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 6 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 8 
 2 
 2 
 
 55 
 
 15 
 
 10 
 
 26 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 71 
 
 6 
 15 
 
 
 92 
 
 98 
 86 
 
 «• 
 
 ' Bombay, 
 
 1820 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 17 
 
 
 23 
 
 22 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 
 1219 
 
 214 
 
 
 
 1433 
 
 ■xi 
 
 Nasik, 
 
 1832 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 307 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 323 
 
 A< 
 
 Junir and Malligaum, 
 Sinde Mission, 
 
 1846 
 1850 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 2 
 5 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 
 14 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 16 
 
 6 
 
 168 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 187 
 
 ^ 
 
 I. At Home, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 72 
 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 ci 
 
 ' Madras, 
 
 1815 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 10 
 
 32 
 
 209 
 
 9 
 
 17 
 
 26 
 
 12 
 
 264 
 
 276 
 
 
 
 540 
 
 '3 
 
 Tinnevelly Districts, 
 
 1817 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 412 
 
 81 
 
 522 
 
 3357 
 
 519 
 
 875 
 
 1394 
 
 286 
 
 5203 
 
 2758 
 
 
 
 7963 
 
 a < 
 
 Travancore Districts, 
 
 1816 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 116 
 
 6 
 
 135 
 
 1256 
 
 185 
 
 195 
 
 380 
 
 76 
 
 1775 
 
 433 
 
 
 
 2208 
 
 
 Teloocoo, 
 
 1841 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 16 
 
 7 
 
 29 
 
 18 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 10 
 
 4 
 
 113 
 
 56 
 
 
 
 169 
 
 OQ 
 
 I At Home, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Totals, 1 
 
 47 
 
 64 
 
 6 
 
 13 
 
 22 
 
 14 
 
 839 
 
 127 
 
 1094 
 
 5815 
 
 809 
 
 1363 
 
 2272 
 
 526 
 
 13776 
 
 4339 
 
 6^ 
 
 
 17873 
 
 Society foii the Propagation of the 
 Gospel. — This society commenced its ope- 
 rations in Hindostan in 1818, not long after 
 the arrival of Bishop Middleton, the first 
 bishop of Calcutta. He was at this time de- 
 vising a plan for the foundation at Calcutta 
 of a missionary college, but as the Society's 
 funds were pledged to already existing mis- 
 sions in the western world, no resource was 
 left except in vigorous efforts for the aug- 
 mentation of its income. Accordingly a 
 memorial was presented to the Prince Re- 
 
 gent, praying that a royal letter, authorizing 
 a general collection, might, as in former 
 reigns, be issued ; and an appeal was made 
 to the public for the means of entering upon 
 that new sphere of labor which the estab- 
 lishment of the Episcopate in India had 
 opened. 
 
 Bishop^s College.— Ihe first great work, 
 therefore, to which the Society, under the 
 advice of the Bishop, gave itself in India, 
 was the foundation of a Missionary College 
 near Calcutta. To this the proceeds of 
 
408 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 tho royal letter of 1819, amounting alto- 
 gether to £45,747, were devoted. The col- 
 lego was designed on a scale to meet not 
 merely the pivisent wants of the missions, 
 out such as would bo required by a growing 
 church. Tlie plan combined chapel, hall, 
 library, and printing-pi-ess ; and the estab- 
 lishment was meant to afford instruction, 
 not only in the sacred and classical languages, 
 but also in the principal languages and dia- 
 lects of India. Accommodation was to be 
 provided for three professors and twenty 
 students. A most eligible site, about four 
 miles below Calcutta, and on the opposite 
 side of the Hoogley, was presented by the 
 Honorable East India Company. 
 
 The original object of the college was the 
 education of native, East Indian, and Euro- 
 pean youth, for the service of the church ; 
 but the college was some years afterwards 
 enlarged for the reception of law students. 
 Another purpose was the translation of the 
 Holy Scriptures and of the Liturgy into the 
 native languages of India. The Rev. W. II. 
 Mill, fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, 
 was appointed the first Principal, and em- 
 barked, in company with Rev. J. H. Alt, of 
 Pembroke Hall, as Professor, in August, 
 1820. It was a considerable time, however, 
 before the necessary buildings were com- 
 pleted ; and the actual work of education 
 did not commence till March, 1824, which 
 was after the death of Bishop Middleton, to 
 whom the College owed its foundation, and 
 who had done much more than provide for 
 the erection of the material fabric. He had 
 suggested that a connection should be estab- 
 lished between Bishop's College and the 
 " School for the Orphans of Clergy," in St. 
 John's Wood, which might generally be 
 looked to as a nursery of lads who might 
 afterwards be transplanted to Calcutta, and 
 be there educated for the same ministry as 
 that in which their fathers had served, 
 though it was to be exercised in a far dis- 
 tant land. This suggestion, which met with 
 the cordial and unanimous approval of the 
 Society, received also the approbation of the 
 governors of the Clergy Orphan School. 
 Three boys were, with the full consent of 
 their guardians, at once dedicated to the 
 missionary service. This connection, how- 
 ever, between the Orphan School and the 
 College, was not long continued. 
 
 As soon as the college began to send out 
 its alumni, missions were established in some 
 of the more important villages to the south 
 of Calcutta. The first ones formed were at 
 Cossipore, Tallygunge, Howrah, and Barri- 
 piir ; and no sooner had the laborers entered 
 into the harvest than fruit was gathered in. 
 Each year's report contains the account of 
 many baptisms of infants, and not a few 
 conversions of adults. Substantial stone 
 churches, which had been erected at great 
 
 cost, at BarripAr and Mogra IIAt, were con- 
 secratod toward the end of 1840 ; and at tho 
 same time eighty persons from those two 
 districts were admitted to the rite of con- 
 finnation. The last report which has been 
 received from Calcutta contains the follow- 
 ing gratifying notices : " In the missions of 
 Tallygunge and BarripAr the converts con- 
 tinue stedfast, and numerous accessions to 
 the household of faith are taking place, but 
 have ceased to attract persecution or obtain 
 notice." In the circle of Mogra Il^t and 
 Dhanghatta, the congregations have contin- 
 ued steadily to increase, and other adjoining 
 hamlets now contain believers. The mis- 
 sions extend over an area of forty miles 
 north to south, by from twelve to twenty 
 miles east to west. In the summer of 1850, 
 they embraced 113 villages, 20 chapels, 7 
 schools, 55 readers and schoolmastere, 1,127 
 communicants, 2459 baptized persons, and. 
 1,215 catechumens. 
 
 Cawnpore. — The mission of Cawnpore, a 
 large city about 000 miles north-west from 
 Calcutta, with a population of 100,000, and 
 an important military post, was established 
 in 1841. In 1845 the Society, in compliance 
 with the earnest recommendations of the 
 Bishop of Calcutta, voted the sum of £700 
 for the erection of substantial missionary 
 buildings. The two first missionaries, Rev. 
 Messrs. Perkins and Schleicher, are still on 
 the ground, and besides the ordinary duties 
 of preaching they superintend a school for 
 boys, and an asylum for orphan girls, which 
 has been the means of training several Chris- 
 tian girls for the duties of life, and preparing 
 others to meet an early death. 
 
 Madras. — The missions in the south of 
 India, which had originally been founded by 
 Frederic IV., King of Denmark, in 1705, and 
 which had afterwards passed into the hands 
 of the Society for Promoting Christian 
 Knowledge, were by them consigned to the 
 Society for the Propagation of the Gospel, 
 in 1825. (See p. 328). There were then in 
 the Madras presidency, in connection with 
 that society, only nine missionary stations 
 and seven missionaries — all of them German. 
 
 The interruption and discouragement of 
 missionary work occasioned by the death, in 
 quick succession, of four bishops of Cal 
 cutta,— Middleton in 1822, Ileber in 1826, 
 James in 1829, and Turner in 1831,— tended 
 grievously to retard the progress of the So- 
 ciety's operations in India, and though dur 
 ing this period name after name was added 
 to the missionary roll, no remarkable ad- 
 vance was made till after the subdivision of 
 the diocese of Calcutta, by the erection of 
 the See of Madras, in 1835. Even up to 
 that time, the number of missionaries in 
 that part of India had not been raised be- 
 yond nine ; but in 1836 four were added ; 
 and in the following year the total number 
 
HINDOSTAN, 
 
 409 
 
 was sixteen. Bishop Corrie was removed by 
 death, only a Httle more than a year after 
 his return to Madras as bishop, and again 
 the active direction of the missions of South- 
 ern India was suspended. Since that period, 
 however, they have been abundantly blessed, 
 more especially those in the district of Tin- 
 nevell3\ This district had, for missionary'- 
 purposes, been for a long time dependent on 
 the mission of Tanjore, and all the missions 
 in the South had for many years been sus- 
 tained by the interest of the munificent 
 legacy of X10,000, which the devoted Swartz 
 had bequeathed to them. 
 
 Tinnevelly. — The first resident missionary 
 for Tinnevelly was appointed in 1829 ; a 
 second was sent in 1834 ; and a third in 
 1843. It was in the next year, 1844, that 
 the very remarkable movement towards 
 Christianity took place in the mission of 
 Sawyerpuram. Many villages expressed their 
 desire of Christian instruction, and many 
 hundred natives were at once admitted as 
 catechumens. 
 
 Another mission in which wonderful pro- 
 gress has been made of late years, is Edeyen- 
 koody. For two or three years little appears 
 to have been effected, but from 1844 to the 
 present time, the progress of the work has 
 been very observable. The number of per- 
 sons under Christian instruction is 2,054. 
 From 1844 to 1849 inclusive, twenty adults, 
 on an average, were baptized each year. 
 During the year 1850, though the same strict 
 system of examination was maintained, 75 
 adults were admitted to baptism, of whom 
 70 were baptized in one day, in the presence 
 of a congregation of 800 native Christians. 
 
 Another mission,ChristianagramjWas open- 
 ed about the Same time as Sawyerpuram, and 
 in 1849 there were 1.579 persons under 
 Christian instruction. 
 
 The mission of Nazareth has also been a 
 very flourishing one. At the beginning of 
 1850 there were 2,292 baptized persons, and 
 1,563 more under Christian instruction. 
 Much has been done of late to raise the 
 qualifications and increase the efficiency of 
 the catechists and native readers. The sem- 
 inaries at Sawyerpuram, Vediapuram, and 
 Vepery, serve for the education of mission- 
 aries, while a school for the boarding and 
 education of native girls has forty-four pupils 
 under instruction. A seminary for theolo- 
 gical students, and such as may be candi- 
 dates for the office of catechist, has been 
 formed at Madras. 
 
 Bombay. — In the year 1839, a mission was 
 commenced in Bombay, and a substantial 
 chapel and school-houses were erected. — 
 Each school comprised one department for 
 day scholars and one for boarders. The lat- 
 ter has been made the means of rescuing 
 many orphan and other poor children from 
 destitution. 
 
 Guzerat. — The mission in the provmce of 
 Guzerat was first estabhshed in 1830, but it 
 met with a sad check in the early death of 
 its first missionary, Kev. Mr. Pettinger. 
 Years elapsed before his place was filled, but 
 at length two missionaries were sent to 
 Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat. But 
 subsequent removals weakened the mission, 
 and in 1850 it was transferred to the Bom- 
 bay Diocesan Committee. 
 
 English Baptist Missionary Society. — 
 (For an account of the origin of this Society 
 and of its mission to India, see Baptist Mis- 
 sionary Society.) In March, 1793, Messrs. 
 Carey and Thomas attended a farewell service 
 of great solemnity at Leicester, and soon 
 afterwards proceeded to Byde, in the Isle of 
 Wight, and embarked on board a ship for 
 India. The Captain, however, was informed 
 that he must not proceed with ministers who 
 were unlicensed by the East India Company, 
 and he returned to the shore. Mr. Carey 
 hastened to London in the deepest distress, 
 and even Andrew Fuller quailed at the news, 
 and said, "We are all vmdone." Mr. Thomas 
 was more hopeful and cheerful. The inter- 
 val before the sailing of another vessel was 
 employed in renewed efforts to persuade 
 Mrs. Carey to accompany her husband (she 
 having steadily refused,) and with success. 
 This joyful result indicated to Mr. Carey the 
 design of Providence in their disappoint- 
 ment. 
 
 In June, 1793, they all embarked in the 
 Kron Princessa Maria, a Danish East India- 
 man, and on the morning of sailing one of 
 them addressed a London minister, saying, 
 " The ship is come, the signal made, the guns 
 are fired, and we are going with a fine fair 
 wind. Farewell, my dear brethren and sis- 
 ters, farewell. May the God of Jacob be 
 ours and yours, by sea and land, for time 
 and eternity. Most affectionately adieu." 
 They had a prosperous voyage of about five 
 months, and arrived in Balasore roads on 
 the 7th of November, and on the 10th went 
 on shore. 
 
 After the arrival of the missionaries in 
 Bengal, they were much perplexed respecting 
 a place of residence, and after three weeks 
 they proceeded to Bandell, a Portuguese set- 
 tlement about thirty miles from Calcutta. 
 Not finding it expedient to remain long here, 
 Mr. Carey, with only his own family and a 
 native guide, removed to a considerable dis- 
 tance into the interior, and found a resting 
 place and a field of labor at Collahtullah. 
 Here he erected an humble dwelling, and en- 
 tered upon the work of teaching a wild and 
 fierce people, from whom, and from the tigers 
 and other wild animals that roamed through 
 those forests, the rest of the population had 
 fled to a distance. But this proved to be 
 but a temporary field, for another call, which 
 to the mind of Mr. Carey was imperativCj 
 
410 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 invited him to a place called Mudnnbatty. 
 about 260 miles north of Calcutta. Owing 
 to unavoidable causes, the investment of 
 money taken out for Mr. Carey's immediate 
 support was lost, and he was left in a strange 
 land with no means of subsistence: added 
 to this was personal illness, the sickness of 
 his family, and the irreligion of the Euro- 
 peans by whom he was surrounded, all which 
 pressed heavily upon his spirits. In this 
 condition, early in 1794, a gentleman who 
 afterwards filled some of the most important 
 stations in the government of India, offered 
 to Messrs. Carey and Thomas the superin- 
 tendence of two indigo factories, which he 
 was about to establish in the vicinity of 
 Malda. This opened the way for the remo- 
 val of all pecuniary difficulties, and also 
 promised the most beneficial results by pla- 
 cing each of the missionaries in the midst 
 of more than a thousand people to whom 
 they would have access. They therefore ac- 
 cepted the proposal, and Mr. Carey fixed his 
 residence at Mudnabatty, about thirty miles 
 from Malda, and Mr. Thomas settled at Moy- 
 pauldiggy, sixteen miles further north. Soon 
 after reaching his new home Mr. Carey was 
 visited withi affliction, in the death of one of 
 his children. Of this event Mr. ('arey 
 writes, January, 1795 : "When my dear boy 
 died, I could not prevail upon any one to 
 make him a coffin, though we had carpenters 
 in our own employ : and it was with diffi- 
 culty that I engaged four Mussulmen to dig 
 a grave for him. We went seven or eight 
 miles for two persons to carry the body to 
 the place of interment, but in vain, and my 
 wife and I had agreed to do it ourselves, when 
 a lad who had lost caste, and our mater (ser- 
 vant), who performed the most servile offices, 
 were induced to relieve us of this most pain- 
 ful service." The four Mussulmen lost caste, 
 and all the people in the village were forbid- 
 den to eat, drink, or smoke with them. 
 
 On the 1st of November, 1795, the mis- 
 sionaries formed a church at Mudnabatty, 
 consisting of themselves and two English- 
 men. In 1796, Mr. John Fountain was sent 
 out to reinforce the mission. In the early 
 part of 1797, Messrs. Carey and Thomas 
 made an excursion to Bootan, preaching 
 Christ in many places where his name had 
 never before been heard. During the year 
 1798 a school was established, and a printing- 
 press was set up at Mudnabatty for the print- 
 ing of the Scriptures, the translation of 
 which was nearly completed. 
 
 In April, 1799, four missionaries, Messrs. 
 Ward, Brunsdon, Grant, and Marshman, 
 sailed for India, where they arrived on the 
 12th of the following October. They pro- 
 ceeded to Serampore, a village on the banks 
 of the Hoogly, fifteen miles from Calcutta, 
 described by Mr. Grant as "a beautiful little 
 town, and esteemed the most healthy in all 
 
 India." It was a Danish settlement, an 
 very much the resort of decayed tradesmei 
 and gentlemen who had been unsuccessful i 
 business at Calcutta. It contained about 5 
 English houses, and was inhabited by Dane; 
 English, Scots, Germans, Greeks, Armenian! 
 Irish, Bengalees, and Portuguese. The 
 waited at an inn a few days, expecting th 
 arrival of Mr. Carey, when one of their num 
 ber, Mr. Grant, suddenly sickened and diec 
 In November. Messrs. Ward and Fountai 
 went to Mudnabatty, to consult with Mi 
 Carey respecting the removal of the whol 
 mission family to Serampore. The factor 
 at Mudnabatty had declined, and added t 
 this were other considerations of great forc( 
 and the removal was determined upon. 
 
 Mr. Carey arrived at Serampore on th 
 10th of January, 1800, and was kindly re 
 ceived by the Governor. They purchased 
 large house in the middle of the town, situ 
 ated by the river side, with a large piece o 
 ground walled round, a garden at the bottor 
 and a pool of water in the centre. 
 
 On the 17th of March, 1800, is recorde 
 at Serampore: "On this memorable day, th 
 first page of the New Testament was com 
 posed for printing in Bengalee." Immediate 
 ly upon their settlement at this place, the; 
 commenced a system of itineracy, and goin: 
 out, generally two and two, they preachei 
 and held discussions with the natives. Oi 
 the 24th of April, the missionaries unite( 
 together as a church, Carey being chose: 
 pastor, and Fountain and Marshman deacons 
 May 26, they began to print the first shee 
 of the New Testament ; 1700 copies wer 
 printed on Patna paper, and 300 on Englisli 
 A Bengalese school of 40 children was als 
 in operation. 
 
 In June, this missionary circle were callei 
 to a severe affliction in the death of Mi 
 Fountain. lie died at Dinagepore, at th 
 age of thirty-three. About the same tim 
 Mr. Thomas fell into a state of temporar 
 insanity, which deprived the mission for \ 
 time of his services. On the 22d of Decem 
 ber, five individuals, four natives and a so] 
 of Mr. Carey, appeared for baptism an< 
 church communion, and on the 29 th Mi 
 Carey writes, "Yesterday was a day of grea 
 joy. I had the happiness to desecrate th 
 Gunga, by baptizing the first Hindoo, Krish 
 no, and my son FeUx." In January, 1801 
 two other natives were baptized and receivei 
 to the church. The 7th of February wa 
 observed as a day of thanksgiving, it bein 
 the day on which they finished the composi 
 tion of the New Testament, which had occu 
 pied nine months. About this time, Krishnc 
 self-moved, erected a house for God opposit 
 his own, and Mr. Carey preached in it t 
 about twenty natives. This was the firs 
 native place of worship in Bengal. 
 
 In the spring of this year, Serampore 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 411 
 
 which had been under the Danish govern- 
 ment, quietly passed into the hands of the 
 English, without the firing of a gun. Mr. 
 Carey writes, '-Serampore is in the hands of 
 the English, but we have nothing to fear. I 
 was appointed Bengalee and Sanscrit pro- 
 fessor in the college of Fort William, by 
 Lord Wellesley, expressly under the char- 
 acter of a missionary. I have now gone 
 through one term." The year 1801 was 
 mournfully distinguished by the death of 
 two more of the missionaries — Mr. Bruns- 
 don, at the age of 23, and Mr. Thomas, the 
 early coadjutor of Care3^ 
 
 In May 1802, Rev. John Chamberlain 
 sailed for India, with his wife, by way of 
 America, and reached Serampore on the 
 27th of January, 1803. He added great 
 strength to the mission, both by his pious 
 zeal and his learning. His progress in ac- 
 quiring the language was so rapid, that in 
 one year he could speak the Bengalee with 
 a facility and accuracy that equaled any of 
 his cotemporaries. 
 
 The English Baptist Mission in India is 
 now brought down to the early part of 1804, 
 a period of ten years from its commence- 
 ment. During this time, amid many changes, 
 sorrows, and discouragements, the missiona- 
 ries had penetrated the regions of idolatry, 
 and gained a footing for the Gospel by the 
 breaking of caste ; they had obtained a vic- 
 tory almost as great over the language, and 
 had produced the New Testament in Ben- 
 galee ; they had established a printing-press, 
 by which the translations were capable of in- 
 definite multiplication, and by means of which, 
 also, tracts or other works could be put into the 
 most extensive circulation ; they had secured 
 the conversion of man)aiatives, some of whom 
 were becoming valuable helpers in the diffu- 
 sion of the Gospel ; they had opened schools 
 for native youth of both sexes ; and finally, 
 they had, by their letters and journals, given 
 a powerful impulse to the spirit of missions at 
 home. In view of these results, and the fact, 
 also, that this mission was prior to any other, 
 either English or American, in India, it will 
 be admitted that a degree of success had 
 been realized far beyond what could have 
 been reasonably anticipated. 
 
 On the 9th of January, 1804, Mr. Cham- 
 berlain left Serampore to visit Saugur Island, 
 whither thousands were daily flocking to 
 their annual poojah, or festival. He was ac- 
 companied in this important journey by Fe- 
 lix Carey, Krishno, and another convert 
 named Bhyrub. Some details in regard to 
 the island in question will shed light both 
 upon the shocking and degrading customs 
 of the Hindoos, and upon the obstacles 
 which the Gospel had to encounter in that 
 quarter. 
 
 The island of Gunga Saugur is situated at 
 the extreme point of land where the great 
 
 western, or holiest branch of the Ganges 
 unites its waters with those of the Indian 
 Ocean; and is so called from the Sanscrit 
 appellation sagor, or sea, and ga7iga, or river, 
 the latter term being emphatically apphed 
 to denote the Ganges, the chief of rivers. 
 The island is a flat, swampy, and cheerless 
 shore, but it is the scene of one of the most 
 celebrated places of pilgrimage in India. 
 Its peculiar sanctity arises from its situation 
 at the junction^ or point of confluence of the 
 Ganges and the ocean, where the purifying 
 virtue of the waters is believed to be 
 mightily increased. Here there is a ruin- 
 ous temple, erected in honor of the great 
 sage of Kapila, the founder of one of the 
 chief schools of Indian philosophy, who is 
 here reverenced as a god. Twice in the 
 year, vast crowds of Hindoos resort to this 
 temple and neighborhood, to perform obse- 
 quies for the good of their deceased ances- 
 tors, and to practice various ablutions in the 
 waters of such efficacy. "The reverence 
 with which the Ganges is regarded," says 
 Dr. Duff, "almost exceeds imagination. At 
 the January festival at Gunga Saugur, hun- 
 dreds of mothers were accustomed to throw 
 their unconscious infants into the turbid 
 waters; and they bewailed the sacrifice as 
 lost and the gods unpropitiated, if they com- 
 missioned not the sharks and other monsters 
 of the deep to crush and devour them before 
 their eves." Mr. Chamberlain says, Jan. 
 13th, 1804, " Words fail to give a true de- 
 scription of this scene. Here an immensely 
 populous city has been raised in a very few 
 days, full of streets, lanes, bazaars, &c., and 
 crowds upon crowds of men, women, and 
 children, high and low, rich and poor, are 
 seen bathing in the water, and worshiping 
 Gunga. The mud and water of this place 
 are esteemed very holy, and are taken hun- 
 dreds of miles on the shoulders of men. 
 The lowest computation of the people here 
 is one lac, or 100,000, and perhaps two lacs 
 is nearer the truth." To these deluded mul- 
 titudes Mr. Chamberlain preached the Gos- 
 pel, and gave books and tracts as opportuni- 
 ties occurred. 
 
 In the spring of this year Mr. Chamber- 
 lain was stationed at Cutwa, seventy-five 
 miles north of Calcutta. His wife was his 
 only companion in this dark region, and of 
 her he was bereaved in the following No- 
 vember. Fourteen months later he married 
 Mrs. Grant, widow of that lamented mis- 
 sionary. But she also died in a few months, 
 and he was left to mourn under a second be- 
 reavement. But notwithstanding his trials, 
 he pursued his work with unremitting dili- 
 gence. In reviewing his labors, Mr. Cham- 
 berlain says, "It is now five years since 
 Providence fixed my lot here. What can I 
 write of the works of God ? Millions of 
 the heathen have heard the glorious report, 
 
412 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 either from preaching, or from the distribu- 
 tion of upwards of one hundred thousand 
 tracts, and many hundreds of the Scrip- 
 tun.»8. Some read the Scriptures, some the 
 tracts, many converse on these things. The 
 leaven is at work, though as yet its opcra- 
 tio!»s are in silence. At present converts 
 are few." Amid all his other labors Mr. 
 Chajnborlain kept an occasional school of 
 about 40 scholars^or whose benefit he had 
 translated Dr. Watts's Catechism and a few 
 hymns. He also made several visits to Ber- 
 hampore, a military station 45 miles from 
 Cutwa, preaching the Gospel to the soldiers 
 with so much success that he gathered a 
 church there of twenty-four members. 
 
 In September, 1809. Mr. Chamberlain was 
 married to his third wife. Miss Underwood, 
 with whom he had been acquainted in Eng- 
 land, and who was one of the first to direct 
 his mind to the missionary service. About 
 this time, by advice of his brethren, he re- 
 moved to Agra. On account of his facility 
 in acquiring languages, his acquaintance with 
 the original Scriptures, especially the He- 
 brew, and his tried zeal and experience in 
 the missionary work, they considered him 
 as exceedingly suited to engag-e in a mission 
 where at least two versions of the Scriptures, 
 the Hindoo and the Sikh, would require to 
 be carefully examined and improved. 
 
 During the five .years through which we 
 have followed Mr, Chamberlain, the brethren 
 had been steadily pursuing their work at 
 Serampore and other places. In the early 
 part of 1805, four additional missionaries 
 from England arrived in Bengal, having 
 sailed by way of America. In January of 
 this year a new place of worship was opened 
 at Calcutta, 4,800 rupees having been con- 
 tributed for the purpose. In June following 
 they built a new printing office, with room 
 for three presses and a bindery. During 
 this year fifteen natives were added to the 
 church, and some Europeans. Some idea 
 may be formed of the labors of the indefa- 
 tigable Carey, from a letter of his to a 
 friend in England, in which he says, " You 
 may perhaps wonder that I write no more 
 letters, but when you see what I am engaged 
 in you will cease to wonder. I translate 
 into Bengalee ; and from Sanscrit into Eng- 
 lish. Every proof sheet of the Bengalee 
 and Mahratta Scriptures, the Sanscrit Gram- 
 mar, and the Ramayunee, must go three 
 times at least through my hands. A dic- 
 tionary of the Sanscrit goes once, at least, 
 through my hands. I have written and 
 printed a second edition of my Bengalee 
 grammar, wholly worked over and greatly 
 enlarged, and a Mahratta grammar ; and 
 collected materials for a Mahratta dictionary. 
 Besides this, I preach twice a week, fre- 
 quently thrice, and attend upon collegiate 
 duties. I do not mention this because I^ 
 
 think ray work a burthen, — it is a real plea- 
 sure, — but to show that my not writing 
 many letters is not because I neglect my 
 brethren, or wish them to cease writing to 
 me." 
 
 In the missionary journals of this period 
 particular mention is made of the death of 
 two native converts of distinction, — Petum- 
 ber Shingee, and Krishno Presaud ; and 
 deeply interesting obituary notices are given. 
 
 In 180G, and onward for two or three 
 years, the missionaries experienced severe 
 trials from the opposition of the Indo- 
 British government, which was determined 
 to conciliate the Hindoos by protecting their 
 idolatrous forms of worship against all inter- 
 ference from the missionaries. Prejudiced and 
 infidel Europeans circulated the most false 
 and injurious reports, and kindled in Britain 
 the fire of hatred to the missionary enter- 
 prise, on the ground that it was fraught with 
 danger to their eastern possessions. Rev. 
 Andrew Fuller was at once looked to as the 
 most suitable person, from his station, talent, 
 and familiarity with the subject, to repel 
 these assaults, and with characteristic zeal 
 and power he met the exigency. His first 
 production vras " An Apology for the late 
 Christian Missions to India, in three parts." 
 The first section was issued separately in 
 1807, and so nearly did its work that the 
 court at the India House dismissed the com- 
 plaints, and refused to interfere with the 
 propagation of Christianity in India. The 
 two other sections followed in quick succes- 
 sion, and so thoroughly silenced the adver- 
 saries of missions, that no effective opposi- 
 tion was ever afterwards made. The Quar- 
 terly Review, in this controversy, rendered 
 valuable assistance to the missionary cause. 
 
 At the close of 1809, Mr. Ward remarks, 
 in a review of the mission, " that from the 
 year 1788, when Thomas began to converse 
 with the natives in Bengalee, to the end of 
 1800, when Krishno was baptized, the work 
 of God in Bengal made but little apparent 
 progress. Much preparatory work, how- 
 ever, was performed; but from the time 
 when this, the first native who had ever 
 publicly renounced caste in Bengal, entered 
 the church, the word of the Lord seemed 
 to have a more free course, and was glorified. 
 The church at Serampore had now received 
 190 members, by the various modes of ad- 
 mission, in its two branches of Serampore 
 and Calcutta. The number baptized in all 
 the churches in 1809, amounted to sixty- 
 seven ; two or three only having been sus- 
 pended or excluded. The cost of the 
 chapel at Calcutta, amounting to about 
 30,000 rupees, was nearly paid ; several na- 
 tive itinerants had been sent forth, and a 
 valuable mission property had been created. 
 Besides the labors of brethren at Cutwa, 
 Berhampore, &c., a door of entrance had 
 
HINBOSTAN, 
 
 413 
 
 been opened in Burmah, and important pre- 
 paratory measures undertaken." 
 
 The state of the translations at this date 
 — 1809 — is given by ]Mr. Ward as follows : 
 "In Bengalee, the whole Bible was printed 
 and published in five volumes. In Sanscrit, 
 the New Testament was published, and part 
 of the Pentateuch printed. In Orissa, the 
 New Testament and the practical books 
 were printed and published, and a consider- 
 able part of the prophetical books printed. 
 In liindostanee, the New Testament was 
 printed to the end of Romans. In Mahrat- 
 ta, the New Testament was finished as far as 
 the middle of Acts. In the Sikh language, 
 the New Testament was put to press. Be- 
 sides the progress at press, the greater part 
 of the whole Bible was translated into Hin- 
 dostanee, the New Testament and part of 
 the Pentateuch into the Sikh, the New Tes- 
 tament and nearly all the practical books 
 into the Mahratta ; the New Testament and 
 part of the Pentateuch into the Kurnata and 
 Telinga ; and the blocks for nearly the whole 
 of Matthew were cut and some sheets of 
 the first part thrown off for revision, in 
 Chinese." " Thus," continues Mr. Ward, 
 "mountains of diflBculty, common to first 
 efibrts, have been removed ; formidable at- 
 tempts to overturn the work have been 
 rendered abortive ; facilities of the most im- 
 portant nature opened to us ; a number of 
 persons acquainted with the languages have 
 been raised up, and are at their posts ; ac- 
 cess to the people of Bengal, Bootan, Orissa, 
 Burmah, and China, obtained by a knowl- 
 edge of their languages ; the Holy Scrip- 
 tures are distributing or are to be distributed 
 among all these, and other nations, in their 
 own tongue ; the printing office belonging to 
 the mission contains Sanscrit, Hindostanee, 
 Arabic, Persian, Bengalee, Orissa, Telinga, 
 Sikh, Mahratta, Greek, Hebrew, and Eng- 
 lish types, besides presses, and every other 
 article necessary for printing the sacred vol- 
 ume. And now, brethren, has not God 
 completely refuted the notion that all at- 
 tempts to promote the Gospel among the 
 Hindoos arc vain ? This happy degree of 
 success, which surprises even us who are on 
 the ground, has been gained within the space 
 of nine years, for it is no more since the 
 baptism of the first Hindoo." 
 
 In 1810 the missionaries arranged their 
 labors under the specific designation of 
 " The United Missionaries in India," com- 
 prehending tlie Bengal, the Burman, the 
 Orissa, the Bootan, and the Ilindostan. 
 This afforded a convenient method of keep- 
 ing in distinct view the information they com- 
 municated respecting their diversified opera- 
 tions. 
 
 The Bengal mission included five stations, 
 Serampore and Calcutta being considered 
 one, Dinagepore and Saddamahl another, 
 
 Goamalty the third, Cutwa the fourth, and 
 Jessore the fifth. Dinagepore is about 260 
 miles north of Calcutta ; Cutwa 75 miles 
 north north-west ; and Jessore, 60 miles 
 north ; Goamalty was soon abandoned for a 
 more eligible station, called English-bazar, 
 in the Poorniya district. 
 
 The Burman mission had not yet made 
 any considerable advances, the labors being 
 of a preparatory kind. The same was true 
 of the Orissa and Bootan IMssions. 
 
 The Hindostanee mission consisted of two 
 stations, Patna and Agra. The former is a 
 large city, 300 miles north-west of Calcutta, 
 and the latter is reached by a journey of a 
 thousand miles up the Ganges. The mis- 
 sionaries, Chamberlain and Peacock, reached 
 this place in May 1811. Mr. Chamberlain 
 was soon called to great affliction in the 
 death of two daughters, one of whom could 
 read and converse in three languages, and 
 gave decided evidences of piety. A few 
 months later he was called to part with his 
 only remaining child. 
 
 In 1811 the number of members in all the 
 churches exceeded 300, one-third of whom 
 had been added within little more than a 
 year ; and among these it was said that the 
 proportion of members who were qualified 
 for public labor, was much greater than the 
 average in the British churches. Fifteen 
 years before this time the church in Bengal 
 numbered four members, and it had doubled 
 six times, or once in three years. 
 
 On the 11th of March, 1812, the mission 
 printing house was entirely destroyed by 
 fire. The building, which was 200 feet long, 
 was a total loss ; and the articles consumed 
 were, upwards 1,400 reams of English 
 paper ; 4,460 pounds of English types ; a 
 double font of Greek, and a small one of 
 Hebrew ; twelve fonts of types in the differ- 
 ent languages of India, among which were 
 a font of Persian, worth 3,000 rupees, a 
 valuable font of Arabic, and a double font 
 of Nagree, containing 1,600 lbs. weight ; all 
 the cases, frames, and other printing uten- 
 sils ; books in various languages, to the 
 amount of 5,000 rupees ; manuscripts to the 
 value of 7,000 rupees, among which were a 
 Sanscrit dictionary, in five folio volumes, and 
 the materials for a Polyglot dictionary of all 
 the languages derived from the Sanscrit. 
 There were burnt also more than fifty-five 
 thousand sheets printed off but not folded, 
 among which were seven sheets, of a thou- 
 sand copies each, of Mr. Martyn's Hindo- 
 stanee New Testament in the Persian char- 
 acter ; five sheets, five thousand each, of the 
 Tamil New Testament ; four sheets of the 
 Calcutta Bible Society's Report, &c. A 
 paper mill, and some presses and materials 
 in a building adjoining the printing office, 
 were saved. The loss amounted to nearly 
 £10,000, no part of which was insured. But 
 
414 
 
 IIINDOSTAN. 
 
 they recovered from the ruins the punches 
 and melted metal, and immediately com- 
 juenced recasting the type, and in about a 
 fortnijrht, with the presses they had saved, 
 wore able to renew the work of printing in 
 one Ijjnguage. In a month or two the fonts 
 were so far restored that the printing of the 
 Scriptures was resumed on a large scale, and 
 the presses were going day and night. This 
 sudden rising from what seemed an over- 
 whelming misfortlhe, occasioned the remark 
 in a Calcutta paper, that " zeal and perse- 
 verance are qualities that happily distinguish 
 the character of the missionaries; their 
 ardor, instead of being repressed, derives a 
 new impulse from difficulties and misfor- 
 tunes." 
 
 No sooner did the sad intelligence of the 
 fire at Serampore arrive in England, than 
 the Christian public hastened to repair the 
 loss. ''A strong sensation," writes Mr. 
 Fuller, "was felt throughout the kingdom, 
 not only in our own denomination, but 
 among Christians of every name, each 
 vieing with the other to repair the loss." 
 The entire sum required was raised in the 
 short space of fifty days, and even after this 
 contributions continued with unabated lib- 
 erality. But the greatest advantage was 
 the powerful impulse given to the mission, 
 by rendering it more generally known, and 
 producing a simultaneous feeling of interest 
 in all denominations. 
 
 In October, seven months after the con- 
 flagration, Mr. Carey writes to Mr. Fuller, 
 that though his manuscript of the Sanscrit 
 translation had been destroyed, yet he had 
 re-translated the whole of it, and had begun 
 new translations in the Nepalese ; the Push- 
 too, or that of the Affghans ; the Biblochee, 
 which was spoken on the west shore of the 
 Indus, towards Persia ; and the Maldivo 
 Islands. Mr. Chamberlain had also trans- 
 lated the Gospels into Brij-Bhasha. Such 
 was the surprising courage and energy of 
 these men. 
 
 At the close of 1812, the general state of the 
 mission was encouraging. A work of grace 
 was proceeding in the 24th regiment, then 
 in the fort at Calcutta, from which eleven 
 had made a public profession of religion 
 during the year. Nearly seventy had been 
 added to the church at Serampore and Cal- 
 cutta during the same time, and nearly 
 ever}-- native capable of speaking, itinerated 
 on the Sabbath through the neighboring 
 towns. About this time Mr. (now Dr.) 
 Carey, wrote to Mr. Fuller, that there was 
 a general spirit of inquiry about the Gospel 
 throughout the country, and that Christians, 
 either Europeans or natives, were to be 
 found in every direction. He mentioned 
 five natives of high caste, near Serampore, 
 who had recently been baptized, but who 
 had come to the knowledge of the truth 
 
 without any communication with the mis- 
 sionaries. The Bibles and tracts with which 
 they had met, had been the instruments of 
 their conversion. 
 
 Early in 1813, there was a demonstration 
 of hostility from the government, and 
 several of the missionaries were thredtenod 
 with expulsion. One was actually compelled 
 to leave in haste for England. But the 
 evil was of very limited extent, and th( 
 scene of the persecution, Calcutta and th( 
 vicinity, " blossomed like the garden of the 
 Lord." In Calcutta there was a congrega- 
 tion of 120 attentive hearers. Thirty had 
 joined the church, and many others were 
 about to do so, from the 24th regiment. In 
 the schools there were 353 boys and 117 girls, 
 making a total of 470. This year Dr. Carey 
 was permitted to rejoice over the conversion 
 of his third son, Jabez, who at once devoted 
 himself to the missionary work ; so that now 
 he had three sons, Felix, William, and Jabez, 
 engaged in preaching the Gospel to the hea- 
 then. In regard to the translations at this 
 time. Dr. Carey writes, " We are engaged 
 in translating the Bible into twenty-one 
 languages, including the Bengalee, w^hich is 
 finished. We have obtained a person to as- 
 sist in the translation of the Scriptures into 
 the Kassai language. This is an independent 
 nation of mountaineers, lying between the 
 eastern border of Bengal and the northern 
 border of the Burman dominions. We have 
 also obtained help for the Sindh and Wuch 
 languages. The country of Sindh lies on the 
 east bank of the Indus, from the sea about 
 500 miles ; Wuch then continues along the 
 same shore, till it joins the Punjaub. I be- 
 lieve we have now all the languages in that 
 part, except that of Kutch, which I hope 
 will soon be within our reach. We have 
 not yet been able to secure the languages of 
 Nepala, Bootan, Munipoora, and Siam, and 
 about five or six tribes of mountaineers; 
 besides these I am not acquainted with any 
 language on the continent of India into 
 which the word of God is not under transla- 
 tion." 
 
 At the public disputation of the students 
 of the college of Fort William, before the 
 Right Honorable Lord Minto, in Sept., 1813, 
 that gentleman after alluding to the literary 
 labors of the missionaries, concludes by say- 
 ing, " I profess a very sincere pleasure in 
 bringing the literary merits of Mr. Marsh- 
 man and the other reverend members of the 
 Serampore mission, to the notice of the pub- 
 lic, and in bearing my testimony to the 
 great and extraordinary labors which con- 
 stancy and energy in their numerous and 
 various occupations, have enabled this 
 modest and respectable community to ac- 
 complish. I am not less gratified by the op- 
 portunity which their literary achievements 
 afford, of expressing my regard for the ex- 
 
HINDOSTAN, 
 
 415 
 
 emplary worth of their lives, and the benefi- 
 cent principle which distinguishes and pre- 
 sides in the various useful establishments 
 which they have formed, and which are con- 
 ducted by themselves." 
 
 The mission of the English Baptists in 
 India now comprehended ten stations in 
 Bengal ; three in the northern part — Goa- 
 malty or Malda, Dinagepore, and Silhet; 
 five in the middle — Berhampore, Cutwa, 
 Vans-variya, Serampore, and Calcutta, and 
 two in the south-east — Jessore and Chitta- 
 gong. Employed in these twenty stations 
 there were twelve missionaries who had 
 been sent from Europe, twelve who were 
 Europeans by birth, and thirteen who were 
 descendants of Europeans, and others who 
 conversed in English. Adding to these the 
 native laborers, made the aggregate number 
 sixty-three. They preached in ten lan- 
 guages, and were preparing the Scriptures 
 in many more. Of the number of churches 
 exceeding twenty members, there were 
 eight in all j and of the smaller churches, 
 thirteen. 
 
 During this year, 1813, the question of 
 the renewal of the charter of the East In- 
 dia Company came up in England, which 
 gave occasion for the friends of missions to 
 apply for a clause to be inserted in the char- 
 ter, tolerating and protecting Christian mis- 
 sionaries. This object called into action the 
 powerful pens of Robert Hall and Andrew 
 Fuller, and the efibrt was successful, though 
 not to the full extent desired. 
 
 The year 1814 was saddened by the death 
 of Mr. Fuller. He had been the first ofiicer, 
 the earliest and best advocate, and the main 
 pillar of the Society, for more than twenty- 
 two years, and his loss was deeply felt by 
 the friends of missions in England and in 
 India. 
 
 During the years 1815, 1816, and 1817, 
 upwards of four hundred persons were in- 
 troduced into the mission churches in India. 
 Adding these to previous accessions, the 
 number of baptized individuals at the diifer- 
 ent stations in seventeen j^ears, the first one 
 having been baptized in 1800, amounted to 
 nearly twelve hundred. And besides these, 
 not less than 10,000 children, of all descrip- 
 tions, had been in some way brought under 
 Christian instruction. About this time, the 
 mission was strengthened by a fresh acces- 
 sion of laborers from England, among whom 
 were Mr. William Yates, Eustice Carey, (ne- 
 phew of the venerable doctor,) Mr. Lawson, 
 and Messrs. Randall and Penney, with their 
 wives. 
 
 About eight miles north-west of Calcutta 
 was the military station of Dum Dum. A 
 neat place of worship was erected there, and 
 a distinguished native, Ram Mohun, preached 
 in Bengalee and Hindoo. Success attended 
 this effort, and in the course of 1817 nine 
 
 were baptized, six natives and three Eng- 
 lish soldiers, and added to the little church, 
 then amounting to fourteen members. The 
 system of itinerating at Cutwa was con- 
 ducted on a large scale. Fourteen natives 
 were employed, some to preach, others to 
 read and distribute the Scriptures. 
 
 In 1818 was begun the erection of a col- 
 lege at Serampore, on a scale of great mag- 
 nificence. The buildings were designed to 
 cover eight acres of ground, and to cost 
 £10,000. The plan of such a literary insti- 
 tution, however, was deemed by some im- 
 practicable, and its ultimate failure justified 
 their apprehensions. A much better and 
 more approved object was the establishment 
 of a savings' bank at Serampore ; and about 
 the same time the formation of an agricul- 
 tural and horticultural society, which was 
 patronized by the governor-general and most 
 of the opulent natives. 
 
 The period from 1818 to 1827, although 
 filled up with arduous and successful labors, 
 is marked by no events which appear to re- 
 quire an extended notice. One of the se- 
 verest afflictions to which the mission was 
 called during this time, was the death of 
 Mr. Chamberlain. Having declined in health, 
 he sailed for England with the hope of re- 
 covery, but died on the passage. 
 
 It was during the period now under no- 
 tice, that a controversy arose between the 
 Serampore mission and the parent societ}^, 
 which resulted in placing the two upon a 
 separate and independent basis. The na- 
 ture and grounds of this separation will be 
 understood from the following "Agreement," 
 which was published March 23, 1827. 
 
 " Several years ago, it was officially an- 
 nounced, that as the missionaries at Seram- 
 pore had been enabled so far to exceed the 
 expectations of their first supporters, as 
 largely to promote the propagation of the 
 Gospel by funds which they had themselves 
 originated, a material change had resulted in 
 relation to the society from which they 
 sprang ; in consequence of which the breth- 
 ren of that station acted independently in 
 the management of their concerns. Subse- 
 quent experience has shown that the con- 
 tinued operation of the cause alluded to, 
 has occasioned considerable embarrassment 
 in the practical arrangements of the Society 
 and their brethren at Serampore. The 
 means of obviating this difficulty have been 
 seriously considered in a special meeting of 
 the committee assembled to confer with Dr. 
 Marshman on the subject, which has termi- 
 nated in the full conviction that in present 
 circumstances it is most expedient that the 
 Society at home and the missionaries at Se- 
 rampore, should be publicly understood to 
 be two distinct and independent missionary 
 bodies." 
 
 The simple fact to be gathered from the 
 
416 
 
 H1ND08TAN. 
 
 foro{?oinp 8t«lement, is, that tho missiona- 
 ric8 at Senuupore, holding and using as they 
 did, in the mission service, a large amount 
 of property which thoy had accumulated 
 without tho aid of friends at home, refused 
 to render to the parent society a strict ac- 
 count of their pecuniary transactions. — 
 Ilence the necessity of a friendly agreement 
 to become two bands. 
 
 During the next ten years, from 1827 to 
 1837, the Baptist Society and the Seram- 
 pore mission conducted their operations 
 separately, and they must therefore be kept 
 distinct in the present notices. 
 
 The stations immediately connected with 
 the Serampore mission at the commence- 
 ment of this period, were, besides Seram- 
 pore itself, the following nine, viz. : Jessore, 
 Dacca, Chittagong, Arracan, Dinagepore, 
 Benares, Allahabad, Futteghur, and Delhi. 
 The three kinds of agency employed in con- 
 nection with these stations were : 1st. Na- 
 tives, through whom it was believed the 
 Gospel would ultimately obtain its greatest 
 diffusion ; 2d. Asiatics, or those who were 
 bom in the country of European parents, at 
 least on one side, and who could be support- 
 ed with about half the sum required for a 
 missionary from England. Of this class 
 were Thompson, Fernandez, Smith, Mackin- 
 tosh, and others. 3d. Europeans, whose 
 knowledge and influence were of the high- 
 est importance, when exerted in connection 
 with bands of three, four, or five Asiatic 
 or native agents. Native schools for the in- 
 struction of boys had now been established 
 about ten years ; and recently the education 
 of female children, hitherto supposed to be 
 impracticable, had been introduced. In Se- 
 rampore there were thirteen schools for 
 girls, four or five at Dacca, and at least three 
 at Chittagong. The children included the 
 daughters of Mohammedans as well as Hin- 
 doos, who received instruction with tlie 
 greatest readiness and pleasure ; and in all 
 the schools, male and female, the Scriptures 
 were introduced. 
 
 Serampore. — At this important post were 
 Drs. Carey and Marshman, J. C. Marshman, 
 Mack, and Swan. During 1827, eleven per- 
 sons had been received into the church. 
 The college funds maintained 58 students at 
 the close of the same year, and Dr. Carey 
 lectured twice a week as theological profes- 
 sor. The report of the college in 1829 re- 
 ferred to several grounds of encouragement. 
 A charter had been obtained ; the progress 
 of the students had been good, and several 
 had entered on the work of imparting a 
 knowledge of the Scriptures to the natives 
 of India, Mr. Ward had raised a fund in 
 Europe and America of about 50,000 rupees, 
 and a library of nearly 5,000 volumes had 
 been collected. It possessed a philosophical 
 apparatus, the largest in the country. 
 
 In 1829, three now stations were entered 
 upon, viz. : Goamalty, in Assam, 240 niilee 
 north-east of Serampore ; Barripore, 31 
 miles south, and Burisal, 140 miles eastward 
 of Serampore ; thus making twelve stations 
 in connection with Serampore. And it is 
 an interesting fact, that all these stations 
 were occupied by men who were brought to 
 the knowledge of the truth in India itself 
 In May, 1831. Dr. Carey writes in an affect- 
 ing strain, saying that his race was nearly 
 run, being on the eve of seventy, and much 
 weakened by repeated bilious attacks. He 
 was able, however,to resume his labors again. 
 During this year, seventeen joined the 
 church, fifteen of whom. Were natives of 
 Bengal, and five of these were members of 
 tho college. In June, 1832, Dr. Carey 
 brought the last edition of his Bengalee 
 Scriptures through the press. In a letter, 
 April, 1833, one of the missionaries says, 
 "Our venerable Dr. Carey is in excellent 
 health, and takes his turn in all our public 
 exercises. Just forty years ago he admin- 
 istered the Lord's Supper to the church in 
 Leicester, and then started on the morrow 
 to embark for India." The entire Scriptures 
 of the Old and New Testaments had at this 
 time been printed and circulated in seven 
 different languages ; the New Testament had 
 been printed in twenty-three languages 
 more ; the Pentateuch, and other parts of 
 the Old Testament, had been printed and 
 circulated in several languages into which 
 the New Testament had been completed; 
 and portions of the Scriptures had been 
 printed in ten others — making in all forty 
 languages ; so that upwards of 212,000 vol- 
 umes of the Divine word, in forty different 
 languages, had issued from the Serampore 
 press during thirty years. "If," say the 
 missionaries, " we reckon the Chinese popu- 
 lation according to the most moderate compu- 
 tation, at one hundred and fifty millionSjthese 
 languages embrace the vernacular tongues 
 of two hundred and seventy millions of im- 
 mortal beings." Besides the Scriptures, 
 many other works had been printed at the 
 Serampore press, such as grammars, diction- 
 aries, histories, tracts, &c., so that literature 
 as well as religion was greatly indebted to 
 these distinguished translators. 
 
 On the 9th of June, 1834, Dr. Carey, the 
 original mover of this vast work, closed his 
 earthly labors, at the age of 73. In his last 
 will was found this highly characteristic pro- 
 vision : " I direct, that before every other 
 thing, all my lawful debts may be paid ; 
 that my funeral be as plain as possible ; that 
 I may be buried by the side of my second 
 wife, Charlotte Emilia Carey ; and that the 
 following inscription, and nothing more, may 
 be cut on the stone which commemorates her, 
 either above or below, as there may be room, 
 viz. : 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 4ir 
 
 " William Carey, 
 Born August 17, 1761, died— 
 
 ' A wretched, poor, and helpless worm, 
 
 On thy kind arms I fall.' " 
 
 Jessore. — During 1827, this station was 
 in a discouraging state, except that the 
 schools for boys were prosperous. In 1828, 
 there were only twenty members in the 
 church, and every one of them were cither 
 suspended or excluded. In 1820, eight were 
 restored, and two added. There were four 
 schools, with an average attendance of 176 
 scholars. In 1832, three more were added 
 to the church 5 but the mission at this place 
 continued to be of secondary importance, 
 except as the centre of extensive itinerant 
 labors. The district was estimated to con- 
 tain about 1,200,000 inhabitants, Mohamme- 
 dans and Hindoos. 
 
 Dacca. — This station suffered a great loss 
 in 1827, in the death of two of its mission- 
 aries, Mr. D'Cruz and Mr. Leonard. In 
 1828, the church was reduced to four by re- 
 movals, but others were added from time 
 to time. In 1829, the English congregation, 
 which had almost disappeared, was formed 
 anew. In 1830 there were six native schools, 
 containing between five and six hundred 
 scholars. Widows, as well as other native 
 females, were members of these schools, and 
 permitted to read at public examinations, 
 instead of burning on funeral piles. This 
 being an important military post, the officers 
 and soldiers benefitted by the labors of the 
 missionaries, and some of them became 
 members of the church. The commander 
 of a native regiment invited preaching in 
 the hall of his own house. 
 
 Chittagong; 340 miles east of Calcutta, 
 was occupied by a faithful missionary, Mr. 
 Johannes, who superintended three native 
 female schools, and supported a school him- 
 self of thirty boys. There was also a na- 
 tive boys' school of sixty pupils. Mr. Jo- 
 hannes also conducted public worship in 
 Bengalee and English, and preached in the 
 market-places and streets. Another female 
 school was subsequently established, and 
 frequent additions were made to the church. 
 Roman Catholics often attended the English 
 service, and gave good attention to the word, 
 which led the missionary to say, " I have 
 been now twelve years in Chittagong, and 
 never felt that encouragement I do now, 
 when I see Roman Catholics searching the 
 Scriptures." 
 
 Arracan. — The missionary in Arracan 
 was Mr. J. C. Fink, assisted by five native 
 preachers. They occupied a very extensive 
 field, on the east of the Bay of Bengal, and 
 south of Chittagong, among a mixed popu- 
 lation of Mugs, Mohammedans and Bur- 
 mese. Two services in English were main- 
 tained on the Sabbath, and a permanent 
 chapel was opened for the Mug congrega- 
 
 27 
 
 tion. Natives were from time to time added 
 to the churchj and a native Arracanese was 
 ordained as a missionary. He had been an 
 idolatrous priest. 
 
 Dinagepore. — The church in this place in 
 1827 numbered ninety- two. In 1828 a few 
 were added, and in 1829 three whole Mus- 
 sulman families, consisting of seventeen per- 
 sons, renounced their idols and joined the 
 Christian church. Ignatius Fernandez died 
 in December, 1829. He was a native preach- 
 er of great worth, and had long been the 
 principal supporter of the mission at this 
 place. He was born at Macao in July, 1757, 
 and was therefore 73 years old. He came to 
 Bengal in 1774, and of the fifty-six years 
 which had since passed, he had spent forty- 
 four at Dinagepore. He was the first fruit 
 of this mission, under Carey and Thomas. 
 As early as 1796, he built a dwelling house 
 at Dinagepore, which he told these mission- 
 aries, he intended for the worship of God, 
 and when it was done, he invited them to 
 preach in it, which they did. From that 
 time till his death, 33 years, there was 
 preaching in his house, and he was instru- 
 mental of gathering the largest church in 
 Bengal. Dr. Carey expressed the opinion 
 that his labors were more blessed than those 
 of any other missionary in Northern India. 
 Feeling himself worn down by disease and 
 near his end, he went to Serampore, and 
 died in the presence of his brethren. He 
 was succeeded in the mission by Mr. Hugh 
 Smylie, assisted by Mr. Bareiro, a student 
 of Serampore college. These brethren suf- 
 fered from repeated attacks of fever, and in 
 1832 were obliged to leave their stations for 
 a considerable time. 
 
 Benares. — The Society commenced a mis- 
 sion here in 1817, and a church, though never 
 large, had been sustained, and the Gospel 
 regularly preached. In 1830 and onward, 
 the schools were quite prosperous, under the 
 labors of Mr. Smith, and a native preacher, 
 Sivadas. 
 
 Allahabad. — This was an important sta- 
 tion, being at the junction of the Ganges 
 and Jumna, and the resort of multitudes of 
 pilgrims who come thither to bathe in the 
 sacred waters. Mr. L. Mackintosh was the 
 missionary here in 1827, assisted by a native 
 reader, Gopaul, who kept a promising school 
 in his own house, consisting of about twenty 
 young men. 
 
 Delhi. — The situation of this place at the 
 confluence of the Ganges and the Jumna, 
 renders it an important field of labor. Great 
 numbers of pilgrims resort thither to bathe 
 in the sacred waters, affording the missiona- 
 ries opportunity to preach the Gospel to 
 multitudes besides the permanent residents. 
 Mr. J. T. Thompson and a native preacher 
 were laboring here at the period under no 
 tice. Mr. Thompson traveled extensively 
 
418 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 at certain seasons of the year, distributinj; 
 the Scriptures in the Vikaneer language, to 
 the west of Delhi ; in the Marwar and the 
 Goozerattee, to the south-west ; in the Na- 
 palee to the Goorkhas, on the east north- 
 east ; in the Punjabce, on the north-west ; 
 in the Pushtoo, to the Palans and Aftghan 
 horse merchants ; and in the language of 
 Cashmere, to the north of Delhi. Mr. Thomp- 
 son makes particular mention of scenes wit- 
 nessed at the Pyree, a far-famed bathing 
 spot at the base of a mountain projecting 
 towards the river, where there is room for 
 only two persons to pass abrcast. This oc- 
 casions the most lamentable consequences. 
 In 1819, four hundred and thirty persons 
 were crushed to death, owing to a desperate 
 rush of the pilgrims. The assembled multi- 
 tude amounts to two or three thousand ; but 
 once in twelve years, when Jupiter is in 
 Aquarius, at the time of the sun entering 
 Aries, the number is not less than a million, 
 and in 1819 it was estimated as high as two 
 million. Mr. Thompson spent much time at 
 this place at the proper seasons, and many 
 listened with apparent seriousness to his 
 conversation and prayers. In 1829, he men- 
 tions having circulated nearly six thousand 
 books, pamphlets, and tracts, in Hindee, 
 Oordoo, Sanscrit, Napalee, Punjabee, Per- 
 sian, and Arabic. At the Hurdwar annual 
 fair, in 1830, he distributed, in at least six 
 languages, 2,200 volumes of the Gospels and 
 other books. The word preached to the 
 multitudes was regarded with great atten- 
 tion. The students of the native college of 
 Delhi evinced great anxiety to be furnished 
 with the Scriptures and other works in 
 English, Hindee, and Persian. Mr. Thomp- 
 son was much interested in a sect called the 
 Sands, who reject idolatry, and regard the 
 Ganges like any other river. They profess 
 to believe in one invisible God. and are 
 taught that the soul is immortal, but have 
 no temple nor any regular priesthood. This 
 sect is almost 200 years old. 
 
 Besides the foregoing stations in connec- 
 tion with Serampore, at the time of the 
 separation from the Society, a few others of 
 less note were formed. These were Dum- 
 Dum, Multra, Barripore, Burisal, Oawnpore, 
 and Assam. 
 
 During the same period, 1827 to 1837, the 
 parent society conducted its separate opera- 
 tions at Calcutta, Cutwa, Digha, and Mon- 
 ghyn, leaving by far the largest and most 
 important part of the field under the direc- 
 tion of the Serampore brethren. During 
 this period of ten years, efforts were made 
 to unite the two societies, but although they 
 harmonized in their spirit and aims, the di- 
 vision continued. 
 
 In the spring of 1838, however, the effort 
 at union was renewed, and resulted success- 
 fully. The particular agents or means em- 
 
 ployed in terminating the unhappy contr 
 versy, need not be specified. All were ha; 
 py at length in a cessation of strife, and 
 joining as formerly in the glorious work < 
 spreading the Gospel. Dr. Marshman, wl 
 had been greatly instrumental in bringii 
 about this happy change, died almost at tl 
 moment of the termination of the negoti 
 tions. 
 
 The plan of union provided that the tran 
 lations and all the public property at Seraii 
 pore, should be transferred to Calcutt 
 which from this time becomes the centre ( 
 interest in regard to translations, printing, & 
 
 At the commencement of 1838, the coi 
 gregations in nearly all the chapels in Ca 
 cutta and its neighborhood were increasiuj 
 Mr. Robinson, assisted by Mr. Thomas ai: 
 four native preachers, occupied the Lai Bazj 
 chapel in Calcutta, which had a church men 
 bership of nearly a hundred. In Septemb« 
 of this year twelve Hindoos were baptize 
 eight of whom were in the girls' Christie 
 boarding school, under the superintendenc 
 of Mrs. Pearce. In the beginning of 183 
 Mr. Penney died of cholera, and in Marc 
 1840, Mr. Pearce died of the same diseas 
 
 The report respecting translations in 184 
 embraced the following important partici 
 lars : An edition of the New Testament i 
 Hindostanee, with marginal references, IOC 
 copies J another edition of the New Testi 
 ment in the same language, smaller siz 
 without references, 500 copies. Of this lai 
 edition, extra copies of the Gospels and c 
 the Acts were printed, making an aggregal 
 of 9,500 volumes. An edition of the Psaln 
 in Sanscrit verse, 2,500 copies ; the thir 
 edition of the New Testament in Bengale 
 octavo, 1,500 copies, with 6,000 extra copi( 
 of each of the Gospels, 2,000 of the Act 
 and 500 of the Gospels and Acts togethe 
 making a total of 28,000 volumes ; the fourt 
 edition of the New Testament in Bengale 
 royal 12mo., 3000 copies, with 2,000 of Goi 
 pels and Acts together, making 5000 vo 
 umes ; an edition of the New Testament i 
 modern Armenian, with numerous margins 
 references, 6000 copies ; an edition of th 
 Gospel of Matthew in Hindee, Nagree chai 
 acters, 6,000 copies. 
 
 Besides the foregoing works, which had a 
 been completed, there were in progress 8,00 
 copies of the New Testament, or parts of i 
 in Sanscrit, and 8500 copies of the New Tes 
 tament, or of the Gospels and Acts togethei 
 in Hindostanee. All this, the work of th 
 mission press at Calcutta, and most of i 
 within one year, show the vast amount o 
 labor performed in this department, and it 
 importance in diffusing the light of trut 
 over benighted India. 
 
 Frequent mention is made in the journal 
 of the missionaries, of the "Benevolent Ir 
 stitution." It was established in 1809, fo 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 419 
 
 the special benefit of the multitudes of chil- 
 dren in the city who were growing up in 
 ignorance and vice, with none to care for 
 them. The institution was not denomina- 
 tional, but was common to all classes of 
 missionaries in Calcutta, though it fell to the 
 lot of this society to have the chief manage- 
 ment of its concerns. For more than twenty 
 years it was under the care of Mr. Penney, 
 whose exertions in its behalf were unremit- 
 ting. In 1842 there were 265 boys and 123 
 girls under instruction, the children of vari- 
 ous sects, as follows, viz. : Roman Catholics 
 142, Protestants 95, Hindoos 107, Moham- 
 medans 22, Burmese 3, Mugs 5, Armenians 
 4, Jews 1, Greeks 1, Chinese 7. 
 
 In 1843, 90,000 volumes of the Scriptures, 
 in whole or in part, were printed in Sanscrit, 
 Bengali, Hindostanee, and Hindee languages. 
 From the country stations, during this year, 
 favorable intelligence was received. At Del- 
 hi, Mr. Thompson baptized five persons, one 
 of them his own daughter, the rest natives. 
 At Patna a delightful work of grace was in 
 progress three or four months, as the result of 
 which eight persons were baptized, and seve- 
 ral more stood as candidates. At M»nghyn 
 four were added to the church by baptism, 
 at Burisal two, at Ohittagong six, at Patna 
 eight, &c. 
 
 In January, 1844, the London Society's 
 missionaries at Calcutta published a state- 
 ment, vindicating their Baptist brethren 
 Against an attack made upon them in the 
 London Patriot, in reference to the Sanscrit 
 version of the Scriptures, to which the Bap- 
 tist translators had devoted themselves with 
 SO much zeal. . In this vindication, they say 
 that the Sanscrit language is the language 
 of learning and religion throughout the whole 
 of Bengal, Bombay, and considerable por- 
 tions of the Madras presidency ; that all 
 Brahmins, except those wholly secularized, 
 as soldiers or merchants, are acquainted with 
 this language, which alone is taught in their 
 colleges and employed in their religious cere- 
 monials ; that the highest reverence is uni- 
 versally felt for it, and any book written in 
 Sanscrit will always be received with respect, 
 and read with more acceptance than if com- 
 posed in any of the vernacular dialects ; that 
 tens of thousands in all sections of the coun- 
 try are fully qualified to read with intelli- 
 gence any ordinary composition in this lan- 
 guage ; that a translation of the Sacred Scrip- 
 tures in Sanscrit was, in the opinion of the 
 most competent judges, every way desirable, 
 as furnishing a large Brahminical population 
 with the only version they would probably 
 receive, and as laying a critical foundation 
 and furnishing a classical model for the pre- 
 paration or improvement of vernacular ver- 
 sions; and finally, that they deem it just to 
 their brethren of the Baptist mission to give 
 these assurances, since, so far from sympa- 
 
 thizing with the writer in the Patriot (who 
 was a former missionary of the London So- 
 ciety in Burmah), they wholly approve of 
 the zealous efforts of their Baptist brethren 
 to secure a version of the sacred Scriptures 
 in the learned language of Hindostan. 
 These testimonials are considered of value, 
 as showing how the Sanscrit language ranks 
 in Hindostan, in the estimation of the most 
 learned and competent men, after almost fifty 
 years of experience, and as illustrating the 
 kind and generous spirit which prevailed 
 among missionaries of difierent denomina- 
 tions. 
 
 The annual report for 1844 gives a pleasing 
 view of the work in most parts of India. 
 In Calcutta there were eight churches, with 
 454 members, 270 of whom were natives. 
 The baptisms during the year amounted to 
 32, all natives but three. The number of 
 schools in Calcutta and its neighborhood was 
 14, and the number of scholars 954. At the 
 various stations in northern India there 
 were 16 churches, and a membership of 465. 
 Also 19 schools, and 673 scholars. During 
 this year, the cholera made fearful ravages, 
 carrying off" in two months between forty 
 and fifty thousand people. The missionaries, 
 however, were all mercifully spared. In 
 August of this year, some interesting and 
 valuable statements were made by a Calcutta 
 missionary in regard to the state of society, 
 and the spirit of love and harmony which 
 actuated and pervaded all classes of laborers. 
 He says, "On the bosom of the Ganges is 
 the shipping of every nation, as may be seen 
 in its streets the natives of every shore. 
 In the city are splendid edifices and mud 
 hovels; naked children and half naked 
 adults, various and discordant sounds, me- 
 chanics at their employ, venders sitting by 
 their goods, innumerable sledges drawn by 
 oxen, fashionable European carriages, bug- 
 gies, gazees, palankins, grooms running to 
 clear the way, &c. Degradation and idolatry 
 were around us, destruction and misery 
 walked hand in hand. We passed through 
 the crowded streets, and soon arrived at In- 
 tally, a beautiful residence, as all the dwell- 
 ings of Europeans in Calcutta are. A group 
 of Hindoos, attired in snow white muslin, 
 and with intelligent countenances, met us as 
 we entered the gates. Their whole contour 
 formed a striking contrast to those we had 
 seen previously. The explanation is simple : 
 these were Christian Hindoos. As they ut- 
 tered their salams, my eyes filled with tears, 
 Christianity finds man every where debased 
 — it blesses and elevates him. Next Sab- 
 bath I expect to be at Serampore, where a 
 Carey and a Marshman found refuge, not 
 from native violence, but from Englishmen 
 bearing the name of Christians; where a 
 Martyn, a Brown and. a Buchanan, contem- 
 plated India's welfare; where a Chamber- 
 
420 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 lain, a Judson, and a Newell found Christian 
 In'spitality and were refreshed. The spirit 
 tint animated them still remains ; we are all 
 vuv liere ; we cannot aflbrd to be jealous— 
 the common foe is too strong ; and the mis- 
 sionaries are bound together neither by 
 creeds nor human ties, but by the fear of 
 God and the love of Jesus." These words 
 are worthy of being engraven on the mem- 
 ory of Christians and Christian ministers 
 every where, differing in name and often ri- 
 valing in interests, but having professedly 
 one spirit and one purpose. 
 
 During the year ending May 1st, 1845, 
 there had been printed at Calcutta, in San- 
 scrit 2,500 volumes; in Bengali 23,500; in 
 Hindostanee 26,500; in Armenian 2,260; 
 total, 54,760 volumes. These were all vol- 
 umes of the Scriptures in some form, and 
 the distribution kept pace with the publica- 
 tion. The distinguished Doctor Yates was 
 at this date engaged in preparing for the 
 press the Old Testament in Sanscrit, and 
 large portions of it had already been 
 printed. His heart's desire was to finish 
 this work by the close of another year, and 
 to be able to report a complete translation 
 of the whole of the Scriptures into this, the 
 sacred and learned language of the East 
 But it pleased God in a few months to call 
 this devoted servant to his rest. By the 
 advice of his physicians he sailed for Eng- 
 land, and died on the passage. 
 
 In November, 1845, Serampore is brought 
 to view again, for the first time since the 
 "union" in 1837. More or less labor had 
 been performed there, but for some reason 
 no reports appeared through the regular 
 channels. Mr. Denham, on taking charge 
 of the station at this time, found a church 
 of 93 members, a good congregation, and 
 many pleasant and sacred associations. Re- 
 membering Carey and his coadjutors, he 
 asks, " Who can recall the name of Seram- 
 pore without veneration ? On its sages rest- 
 ed a sacred pentecostal fire, and from their 
 hands India and its hundreds of millions re- 
 ceived the regenerating word of life." There 
 were also at this time in Serampore two 
 schools for heathen boys, supported by the 
 Ladies' Benevolent Society of that place, and 
 a third was conducted by a European in the 
 college. Besides these, two female schools 
 were maintained, one for heathen children, 
 and one for children of nominally Christian 
 parents. The number of scholars in the va- 
 rious schools was over 800. There were 
 eight sub-stations around Serampore, at 
 which preachmg was regularly maintained, 
 and several other places that were visited 
 periodically. In May, 1846, Mr. Denham 
 speaks of arrangements then in progress for 
 rendering the college buildings available to 
 the interests of the community, and espe- 
 cially for training converted natives of India ^ 
 
 for missionary service. Years having passed 
 away since the doors of the college were 
 closed, every thing had to be done, even to 
 the obtaining of pupils; but the effort was 
 successful, and this institution, for a long 
 period so vitally connected with the welfare 
 of India, was again in a prosperous condition. 
 
 The various stations of this society having 
 now assumed a good degree of stability and 
 of uniformity in their progress, it is unne- 
 cessary to notice them further, except as we 
 find them in the last report which has been 
 received, that for 1853. 
 
 Calcutta. — Under this head is included 
 Calcutta and its neighborhood, embracing 
 eight churches, each of which is worthy of 
 a brief notice. The first four are in the city 
 proper, the others in the suburbs. 
 
 1. The Church in Circular Road. This 
 is an English church, with 91 members in 
 communion, and 16 non-resident members. 
 The Sabbath-school contains 63 children. 
 An English pastor, Mr. Leslie, has charge of 
 the church, which supports itself without 
 aid from the mission. 
 
 2. Church in Lql Bazar. This is a mixed 
 church, J. Thomas pastor, with three native 
 preachers. Number of members 137 ; non- 
 resident members, 20. The venerable and 
 distinguished native laborer, Carapeit Ara- 
 toon, continues to render important aid. 
 Five were added to the church by baptism 
 during the year. 
 
 3. South Colinga. — A native church, vnth 
 one English and one native pastor, and a 
 membership of 51. 
 
 4. Intally. — A native church, with 46 
 members. Besides the English pastor, four 
 native preachers are constantly engaged in 
 disseminating the word of life in and around 
 Calcutta. Seven persons were baptized dur- 
 ing the year. 
 
 5. Haurah and Salkiya. — A mixed church, 
 with a pastor, T. Morgan, and a native 
 preacher; and a membership of 20. Two 
 day schools are maintained, having 100 chil- 
 dren in attendance, and a Sabbath'-school 
 with 60 scholars. During the year, 4,000 
 copies of the Scriptures, or portions thereof, 
 were distributed by Mr. Morgan in his itin- 
 erant labors. In his report of these labors, 
 he states some facts of peculiar interest; 
 and being of so recent a date, they set in a 
 strong light the great though slow progress 
 which the Gospel has made in that quarter 
 since the early labors of Carey and his com- 
 panions. He says, " The desire of the peo- 
 ple to obtain the Scriptures is most intense. 
 Imagine a large market with from one to two 
 thousand people, myself on an elevated spot, 
 hundreds of hands stretched out, and hun- 
 dreds of tongues shouting, ' Sahib, a great 
 thing, holy incarnation, give me a book !' 
 Brahmins and Sudras rolling in the dust to- 
 gether, snatching the books from one another ; 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 421 
 
 respectable people with children iu their 
 hands and in their arms, imploring me to 
 put the books into tho hands of the little 
 ones; books all gone, — missionary reeling 
 from the effects of dust, noise, and speaking ; 
 people imploring for more books, and in 
 some places I have been obliged to go to 
 police offices to rest for half an hour. I 
 have seen Brahmin lads in tears because 
 they could not get the books, saying, ' 0, 
 Sahib, I ran when I heard you were here, 
 and now what shall I do ?' Of a cold, bitter 
 night, I have found men at my boat, from 
 distant places, up to their shoulders in 
 water." Mr. Morgan speaks of another im- 
 portant feature in this work, viz. : that on 
 going to a large town, if he is suspected of 
 being a government agent, the people will not 
 hear him, nor take a book from him ; but no 
 sooner do they learn that he is a missionary, 
 without any connection with the government, 
 than the whole town is at his heels, the most 
 respectable sending for him to their houses, 
 bringing milk to his boat, &c. This mission- 
 ary concludes by saying, that it is evident 
 that the Hindoos are dissatisfied with both 
 their civil and religious institutions, and 
 that while they would regard with horror 
 any attempt on the part of the English Go- 
 vernment to convert them, disinterested 
 efforts they can and do appreciate. 
 
 6. Narsigdarchoke and Bishtapore. — A 
 native church of 45 members, two missiona- 
 ries, and five native preachers. 
 
 7. Khari. — A native church, with two mis- 
 sionaries and one native preacher, and a 
 membership of 49. A school with 45 chil- 
 dren is maintained. 
 
 8. Lakhyantipur. — A native church with 
 62 members, one missionary, two assistant 
 missionaries, and two native preachers. In 
 direct or indirect connection with this church, 
 there are 74 househblds, comprising 84 men, 
 84 women, and 118 children. 
 
 9. Dum-Dum. — A native church of 13 
 members, one missionary, and one native 
 preacher. 
 
 10. Malayapur. — A native church of 5 
 members, a pastor, and two native preachers. 
 The Bengal Association met at this place in 
 January, and although many were detained, 
 the missionary brethren and delegates made 
 up a body of nearly 500. 
 
 The work of translating and printing the 
 Scriptures has been carried on with the 
 usual activity and zeal during the past year. 
 The translations have been chiefly into San- 
 scrit, Bengali, Hindee, and Hindostanee ; and 
 the number of Scriptures issued from the 
 depository during the year amounted to 
 34,036 copies. 
 
 Stations and Churches in Bengal. — Under 
 this head are embraced eight principal sta- 
 tions. 
 
 1. Serampore.—Tlh.QYQ were in the Seram- 
 
 pore college, in 1853, eleven students, four 
 of whom were natives. Their studies em- 
 braced theology, Christian evidences, mental 
 and moral science, classics, and history. 
 There were at this period two missionaries 
 at the station, Messrs. Denham and Robin- 
 son, and four native preachers. They had 
 preaching stations at eight villages, and the 
 number of church members was 121. The 
 Native Christian Asylum numbered 18 girls, 
 one having recently died in great peace. 
 The two schools for boys contained 327 
 scholars, and adding to them the schools 
 connected with the college, the whole num- 
 ber of children and youth under the care of • 
 the mission would not fall much short of 
 600. 
 
 2. Cutwa. — This station has a missionary, 
 four native preachers, and a church of 35 
 members. A day school for girls fs sus- 
 tained, and has ten scholars. The copies of 
 Scriptures distributed during the year 
 amount to 416, and of tracts to 2,780. 
 
 3. Jessore. — One missionary, eight native 
 preachers, and 234 church members. There 
 are seven sub-stations connected with this 
 mission. Five boj's' schools are supported, 
 attended by about 400 children; and one 
 boarding school attended by 14 girls. 
 
 4. Dinajpur. — One missionary, one native 
 preacher, and 19 members. There are two 
 day schools attended by 120 children, and 
 a Sabbath-school with 10 scholars. In the 
 course of a few months the missionary 
 visited 246 villages, preaching and distribu- 
 ting Scriptures and tracts. 
 
 5. Dacca. — Two missionaries, four native 
 preachers, and 36 church members. In va- 
 rious journeys made during the year the 
 missionaries distributed 5,000 tracts, and 
 4,600 copies of portions of Scripture. They 
 say, " We now want more preachers, for the 
 whole of East Bengal is open ; and on our 
 last journey we often had from 400 to 600 
 attentive hearers of all ranks and classes." 
 
 6. Chittagong. — One missionary, eight na- 
 tive preachers, and 65 members. There are 
 two day schools, attended by 23 boys, and 
 one attended by 13 girls. Eleven persons 
 have been baptized during the year. Says 
 the missionary, "The heathen do not ge- 
 nerally disregard the word now. They 
 listen with readiness and pleasure to the 
 news of salvation, and applications are un- 
 ceasingly made for Scriptures and tracts." 
 
 7. Suri. — One missionary, four native 
 preachers, and 37 church members. Five 
 day schools are taught, one English, and the 
 others Bengali. The attendance is about 
 220 boys and 16 girls. The Sabbath-school 
 contains 20 scholars, 
 
 8. Burisal. — This mission has under its 
 care ten sub-stations, and enjoys the labors 
 of two missionaries and ten native preach- 
 ers. The whole number of members is 204, 
 
422 UINDOSTAN. 
 
 A variety of sclioola are supported, not only 
 for boys and girls, but for men and women. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATioire. 
 
 Oaloutia. 
 
 Circuhir 
 Road, 
 
 Lai -Bazar. 
 
 Hiiuni, 
 ^ OoUriKa, 
 • Naralkda- 
 ohoke, 
 
 Kharl, 
 
 Lakhyanti- 
 
 InlaU\% 
 
 Dum-Dnm, 
 
 Malyapu'r, 
 
 Bengal. 
 
 Sorampore, 
 
 Outwa, 
 
 Jeasore, 
 
 Dlnsypoor, 
 
 Dacca, 
 
 Sari, 
 
 Burisal, 
 
 Chlttagong, 
 
 northebn 
 
 India. 
 Monghlr, 
 Benaros, 
 Delhi, 
 Agra, 
 Muttn-v 
 Nishtarpur, 
 Cawnpore, 
 
 Total, 
 
 1801 
 1808 
 
 1818 
 1822 
 
 1824 
 
 1817 
 1842 
 
 1799 
 1804 
 1804 
 1805 
 1818 
 1818 
 1828 
 1817 
 
 1816 
 1817 
 1818 
 1834 
 1842 
 1849 
 1851 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 8 
 1 
 4 
 4 
 
 2 11 
 
 1 
 
 I^aof 
 
 
 t)ay 
 
 Membera. 
 
 d> 
 
 aohoolg 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Oj3 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 11 
 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 ^3 
 
 ri 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 "A 
 
 <l. 
 
 Jz; 
 
 < 
 
 Bab. 
 schools 
 
 15 
 
 45 
 
 3 200 
 2 100 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 35.85 480l 932 1598 43 '2345 1 5' 147 T 
 
 Stations and Churches in Northern India. 
 — ^In Northern India the Society has under 
 its care seven principal missions, as follows : 
 
 1. Monghir. — Two missionaries are sta- 
 tioned here, and four native preachers. 
 There are three day schools with 105 chil- 
 dren in attendance. The Scriptures dis- 
 tributed during the year amounted to 2,359 
 copies ; tracts 2,370. Two Bible classes are 
 also maintained. 
 
 2. Benares. — Two missionaries, three na- 
 tive preachers, and 21 members. Scriptures 
 distributed GOO ; tracts 1,000. Preaching in 
 the native language is considered of preem- 
 inent importance, and for this purpose much 
 time has been spent in visiting the melas or 
 fairs, in the suburbs of Benares. 
 
 3. Delhi.— The death of Mr. Thompson 
 deprived this station of a missionary, and no 
 one having taken his place, it is not reported 
 in detail. 
 
 4. Agra. — Two missionaries, a native 
 church with nine members, and an English 
 church with 00 members. There is a Mission 
 Seminary with between 40 and 50 scholars, 
 and a female institution well sustained. 
 Daily preaching in the city and suburbs is 
 maintained. 
 
 5. Nishtarpur. — This is a quite recent 
 station near Agra, and has a missionary, 
 
 three native preachers, and a church of 42 
 members. Two schools are in constant 
 operation, besides a day and evening Sabbath- 
 school, and the Gospel is preached in the 
 villages and at the bathing festivals. 
 
 C. Muttra. — One missionary, one assistant 
 missionary, and three native preachers. The 
 church has 42 members. Two schools, one 
 native and one English, are maintained, and 
 the system has been adopted of making all 
 parties pay something for tuition. Tracts 
 and Scriptures are also sold to many, while 
 their gratuitous distribution is continued. 
 
 7. Cawnpore. — One missionary, two na- 
 tive preacheps, and a church of 36 members. 
 
 Southern India. — The society has had a 
 mission at Madras and Trichonopoly, in 
 Southern India, but as the missionary there 
 has derived none of his support from the 
 society, and his labors are confined chiefly 
 to the Europeans, the connection has been 
 recently dissolved. 
 
 London Missionary Society. — This So- 
 ciety commenced its operations in Hindostan 
 in 1804. In February of that year three 
 missionaries, Rev. Messrs. Ringletaube, 
 Gran, and Des Granges, sailed from Eng- 
 land, with the intention of commencing a 
 mission on the Coromandel coast, but on 
 their arrival in the country a different course 
 was determined upon, and Messrs. Gran and 
 Des Granges proceeded to establish them- 
 selves at 
 
 Vizagapatam, five hundred and fifty 
 miles south-west of Calcutta, and about the 
 same distance north-east of Madras, in the 
 Northern Circars, a place altogether unoccu- 
 pied by previous missionaries. They were 
 received with marked kindness by the com- 
 mander-in-chief of the forces at this place, 
 and also by the judge, who had for some 
 time been in the habit of conducting public 
 worship in the fort on the Sabbath, with the 
 soldiers of the garrison and such others as 
 might wish to attend. This service how- 
 ever was now committed to the missiona- 
 ries, with a government allowance for their 
 labors. A piece of ground, a mile from the 
 town, comprising about ten acres, was also 
 granted to the missionaries, on which they 
 erected a house and laid out a garden. They 
 next conceived the plan of founding a 
 charity school, towards which about 1,300 
 rupees were immediately contributed, and 
 in 180G the school was in successful opera- 
 tion, with suitable buildings, and between 
 thirt}-- and forty persons under instruction. 
 " Among our native scholars," says the mis- 
 sionary, Mr. Gran, " we have all castes, 
 from the Brahmin to the Sudra, and several 
 of them have come from a distance of ten, 
 twenty, and even thirty miles. They arc 
 instructed by a native schoolmaster, of 
 Ghristian parents, whom we brought with 
 us from Madras." 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 423 
 
 Near the close of 1806, the missionaries 
 report themselves as able to read and write 
 the Telinga language with ease, and they 
 had translated into it some passages of the 
 Scriptures for the use of the natives. They 
 also about this time formed the plan of a 
 complete translation of the Scriptures into 
 the Telinga language, spoken by all the Hin- 
 doos in the five northern Oircars, and ap- 
 pealed to the churches at home for aid in 
 this great work. 
 
 In 1808, the missionaries were joined by 
 a converted Brahmin, named Ananderayer, 
 of whom a very interesting account is given 
 in the Society's periodical, the Evangelical 
 Magazine, for Feb., 1808. In Jan., 1809, the 
 mission sustained a severe loss in the death 
 of Mr. Cran. Two new missionaries how- 
 ever, Messrs. Gordon and Lee, arrived during 
 that year, to the great joy of Mr. Des 
 Granges, who had been left alone in this 
 vast field. 
 
 The next year, 1810, Mr. Des Granges 
 himself was removed by death. Just before 
 his decease it was thought necessary to re- 
 move his wife, who was sick in an adjoining 
 apartment, in doing which she was carried 
 through the chamber of the dying mission- 
 ary, and there they exchanged their last 
 farewell till they should meet above. Before 
 his death, Mr. Des Granges had translated 
 three of the Gospels, which in 1812 were 
 printed at Serampore by the Baptist breth- 
 ren, and the surviving missionaries, Lee and 
 Gordon, spent much time in reading and cir- 
 culating these Gospels in the populous vil- 
 lages around them. 
 
 The mission was strengthened in 1817, by 
 the arrival of Rev. James Dawson, from the 
 Seminary at Gosport. In a letter dated 
 Jan. 1817, Mr. Gordon says, " The last year 
 has been better to me than any former one. 
 We are out every day among the people, and 
 I have lately held conversations with some 
 interesting characters, whose questions were 
 uncommonly striking. The children in the 
 schools also perform wonders, and by inter- 
 rogating them we find that they make an 
 actual progress in divine things. Our prin- 
 cipal school is in the very heart of the town, 
 and open to any person who passes by." 
 
 In 1819, Mr. Pritchett, who had joined 
 the mission, completed the translation of the 
 New Testament into Telinga, and secured its 
 publication at Madras, at the expense of the 
 Calcutta Bible Society. He also translated 
 several parts of the Old Testament, and en- 
 tertained the fond hope of being able to give 
 to the heathen around him a complete copy 
 of the Bible, in their native tongue. But in 
 this he was disappointed, having been called 
 to his final reward before the close of the 
 following year. 
 
 Twenty years after the establishment of 
 this mission, in 1824, there were five native 
 
 schools, and about 250 boys under mstruc- 
 tion. Mr. Gordon employed his days in 
 translating the Old Testament into the 
 Telinga language, and his evenings in visit- 
 ing the schools and the neighboring villages, 
 reading to the natives, and conversing with 
 them on the subject of religion. 
 
 In 1827, the schools had increased to 
 twelve, and the scholars to over 500. One 
 of these was a girls' school, and several girls 
 were in the schools for boys. These schools 
 were all conducted upon strictly Christian 
 principles, for besides writing, cyphering 
 &c., the Scriptures were read daily, ana 
 Watts's Catechism taught. Mr. Gordon 
 died in 1828, after having labored in 
 India for 19 years with great fidelity and 
 success. In the Society's report for 1832, 
 mention is made of the translation of 
 Pilgrim's Progress into the language of the 
 Teloogoos, and it is said to have been read 
 with extreme interest and delight by intelli- 
 gent natives who understand the Scriptures. 
 Considerable interest was awakened in 1834, 
 by the conversion of a native of high caste, 
 residing at a considerable distance from the 
 mission. Having met with a tract in Teloo- 
 goo, he perused it, and kept it by him 17 
 months, and by this means he was enlight- 
 ened and made a willing convert to the 
 Christian religion. A report of his case 
 says, "We see in this young man's case 
 what Almighty grace can do, and how easy 
 it will be for the Lord to turn this whole 
 people to himself when he is pleased to 
 pour out his Spirit upon them." 
 
 This mission has continued, with some 
 interruptions Hby death and removal, but on 
 the whole with pleasing success, to the pre- 
 sent time. It has now three missionaries, 
 Messrs. Gordon, Hay, and Johnston. The 
 number in full communion with the church 
 is forty, of whom twelve are natives, and 
 the rest East Indians and Europeans. All 
 the members meet together to partake of the 
 Lord's Supper every Sabbath morning, after 
 which is held a regular Teloogoo service, and 
 also a Sunday-school for children of Euro- 
 pean descent. A missionary association has 
 been formed, for the two-fold purpose of 
 contributing to the Society's funds, and of 
 sustaining an interest in the cause of Christ 
 throughout the world. The Native Female 
 Orphan School is conducted with success. 
 and the appearance of the pupils is highly 
 creditable and gratifying. The press has 
 been in active operation, and numerous and 
 most encouraging are the proofs furnished, 
 of good resulting from the circulation of 
 tracts and portions of Scripture. In a late 
 report one of the missionaries says, " The 
 tracts on caste and Juggernaut, are very 
 popular, and I should be glad of a lai^e 
 supply of them. I have within the last few 
 weeks had the pleasure of baptizing a 
 
424 
 
 nlNDOSTAN. 
 
 Gooroo, whose mind was first aroused and 
 enlightened by reading the tract on caste." 
 
 Madras. — X mission was commenced 
 hero by the London Society in 1805, Rev. 
 Mr. Loveless being the first missionary. For 
 several years ho labored with but little as- 
 sistance, preaching and establishing schools 
 as he was able, and as opportunity offered. 
 In 1816, he was joined by Rev. Richard 
 Knill, " whoso disposition and talents were 
 well adapted to that important post." In 
 1818, however, Mr. Knill's health declined, 
 and being obliged to seek a colder climate, 
 ho was appointed to a station in Russia. 
 Other laborers from time to time joined the 
 Madras mission, which has been conducted 
 with steadily increasing energy and success. 
 The present missionaries are Rev. Messrs. 
 Drew, Porter, and Baylis. Preaching to the 
 heathen in the bungalow, at the gate of the 
 mission compound, has been continued, with 
 an increasing number of regular hearers. It 
 has been felt to be a call for great thankful- 
 ness that these meetings have never been in- 
 terrupted by the heathen. 
 
 The native evangelists, besides prosecuting 
 their more stated labors at the various out- 
 stations, have continued to proclaim the mes 
 sages of mercy in the numerous villages 
 around Madras. The work of education, 
 by means of the various boarding and day 
 schools, has been carried forward with great 
 activity and effect. There are 14 schools for 
 boys, with 643 scholars ; and 4 for girls 
 with 232 scholars. There are 7 native con- 
 gregations, with a total attendance of 367 ; 
 and 4 native churches, with 119 communi- 
 cants. In the Missionary Magazine for Sept. 
 1852, there is a deeply interesting account of 
 the conversion and happy death of a native 
 female, — Eliza,- — for several years a member 
 of the Girls' Boarding School. One feature 
 in her death-bed experience is so remarkable 
 and affecting, that the account, as given by 
 the attending missionary, may with propriety 
 be repeated in this place. It was a last 
 struggle and conflict with Satan, and in her 
 case a living reality, as if the great enemy 
 of souls had been visible to her. "Two 
 days before her death, in the evening, she 
 became suddenly full of distress and alarm, 
 and her body full of agitation. She cried out, 
 * Oh, I am afraid ! I am afraid ! He is standing 
 close to my ear, and is continually saying to 
 me, There is no salvation for you ! There is 
 no salvation for you 1 Oh ! I am afraid ; lam 
 trembling ; this is very fearful ! How is 
 this 1 0, Jesus ! have I not believed in thee ? 
 Have I not been baptized into thy name ? 
 Have I not received the teachings of thy 
 servants ? Am I not thy child ? O how is 
 this ? This is very fearful to me !' She was 
 exhorted not to let Satan deprive her of her 
 hope, but to abide firm in her faith. The 
 Scriptures were read to her, and prayer was 
 
 offered, and after a considerable time her 
 mind became more calm, and her hope re- 
 turned, and she offered up the following 
 prayer : ' sweet Jesus, I taste that thou 
 art good. Thou hast fed me in green pas- 
 tures, and hast refreshed me at the fountain 
 of life. When we were only infants, our 
 father and mother left us (alluding to the 
 early orphanage of herself and another child), 
 but even as thou hast said, ' Although a 
 mother may forget her sucking child, I will 
 not forget thee,' so didst thou appoint for 
 us honored ladies and gentlemen, as fathers 
 and mothers, to take care of us and bring 
 us up. sweet Jesus, for that I praise thee. 
 Thou, for my sins, didst suffer much ; thou 
 didst shed thy precious blood, and give thy 
 life ; and thou dost now pray for me before 
 thy Father's face. Therefore, do thou have 
 pity on me, and wash me from my sins. 
 Thou hast cleansed me by thy blood ; thou 
 hast made me holy by thy blood ; thou hast 
 redeemed me by thy blood; therefore I 
 praise thy holy name. death, where is thy 
 sting ? grave, where is thy victory V " 
 
 The missionary remarks, " Such deaths as 
 this cheer us much. They assure us that 
 our work is real, and that God is with us." 
 They will also assure every Christian reader, 
 that a Gospel which can impart such light 
 and joy, such faith in appealing to Christ 
 against the great tempter of souls, such 
 peace and triumph in the final hour, and that 
 can do all this for a mind once lost in the 
 utter darkness of heathenism, is worthy of 
 being given with the least possible delay to 
 the whole world. 
 
 Cuddapah. — The London Society com- 
 menced operations here in 1822. Rev. Mr. 
 Howell, the first missionary, immediately 
 set about the establishment of schools, both 
 male and female, and within a year one hun- 
 dred and fifty native children were gathered 
 into these schools, all under Christian in- 
 struction. Besides these labors, Mr. Howell 
 preached in the school room to a small con- 
 gregation of natives, translated several cat- 
 echisms into Teloogoo, and distributed nu- 
 merous copies of the Teloogoo New Testa- 
 ment. In the following 3^ear, Mr. Howell 
 baptized 74 men, 25 women, 40 boys, and 
 21 girls. These had all nominally embraced 
 Christianity, but only ten had been formally 
 admitted to the church, of which three na- 
 tives were appointed deacons. During the 
 second year Mr. H. made a tour of about 100 
 miles, preached to great multitudes, and dis- 
 tributed tracts extensively. In 1826, a 
 chapel was completed, the expenses of which 
 were defrayed by subscriptions on the spot. 
 By the aid of a respectable European resident, 
 a workshop was built for native Christians, 
 affording them the means of self-support. 
 
 At Cuddapah was a settlement, called 
 " Christian Village," which was considered 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 425 
 
 the nursery of this mission. It had in 1832, 
 238 settlers, many of them being baptized 
 persons, the unbiiptized having gone there 
 for the purpose of receiving Christian in- 
 struction. 
 
 During the succeeding ten years this mis- 
 sion exhibited no marked changes, but 
 showed increasingly the blessing of God 
 upon faithful missionary labor. In 1843, 
 having made a tour through the surrounding 
 country, the missionaries say, " During the 
 present tour our minds have been strongly 
 impressed with the generally necessitous 
 condition of the province of Cuddapah. In 
 consequence of the extensive cultivation of 
 cotton and indigo, and the uncommon fertil- 
 ity of many of its valleys, it may be con- 
 sidered as enjoying more temporal prosper- 
 ity than most other provinces in Southern 
 India ; but it would be difficult to find a dis- 
 trict in which heathenism has been less dis- 
 turbed." Yet they speak of the towns and 
 villages as all accessible to the Gospel, and 
 urge upon the Society the importance of 
 sending more laborers into the field. 
 
 In 1845, still another appeal was made, 
 accompanied with a more particular descrip- 
 tion of the extent and importance of the 
 field. Addressing the churches of England, 
 the missionary says, " I would call the atten- 
 tion of the friends of Christian missions, in 
 the first place, to the extent and population 
 of this hitherto much neglected province of 
 the British possessions in India. From 
 north to south the Cuddapah province is up- 
 wards of 170 miles, and from east to west 
 about 120 miles — nearly half the size of 
 England. This immense province contains 
 a population of upwards of one million of 
 souls." The writer proceeds to give a mi- 
 nute and very curious description of the 
 omens and signs for which the people enter- 
 tain a superstitious regard, and also .of the 
 doctrine of fate, to which they ascribe their 
 most glaring sins. (See Report of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society for 1845.) In the 
 same report it is stated that no other Prot- 
 estant missionary society had ever made any 
 effort for the Christian instruction of this 
 immense population, in consequence of which 
 the great mass were involved in all the mis- 
 eries of heathenism. Self-murder prevailed 
 to an astonishing extent. In the short space 
 of three months, and in only one part of the 
 district, there were 144 cases of suicide. 
 
 One of the worst features of this mission 
 has been the difficulty of educating females. 
 The eSbrt, early commenced, has been con- 
 stantly embarrassed by the native prejudice 
 on this subject. In 1847, Mrs. Porter, in an 
 appeal to the friends of female education, 
 says, " The False Prophet of Mecca has his 
 standard, and thousands flock around it. 
 Brahma and Vishnu have their altars and 
 their priests ; but to which of these shall 
 
 woman look for comfort or for peace ? Alas ! 
 she knows too well that it is not to be found." 
 At a later period schools for girls appear to 
 have been maintained with more success. 
 
 In 1851, a deeply interesting account is 
 given of the conversion of several natives, 
 one of whom in particular came to the mis- 
 sionaries one morning, bringing his brass 
 idols, and throwing them on the ground, 
 saying, " Enough of these ; I have done with 
 them, and wish to have no more to do with 
 them. I have read much and learnt much in 
 my heathen books, but I have found no rest. 
 In Christ alone is rest." He also took from 
 his neck a silver chain bearing the name of 
 his god, and casting it on the ground, said, 
 " Enough ! nothing but sin has cleaved to 
 me all the while I have kept this close to 
 me. Please, sir, take it. I know of some- 
 thing better — the love of Jesus. how dif- 
 ferent to all this ! I know I must be perse- 
 cuted by my friends and relations, but I 
 must not mind that." This individual, with 
 others baptized at the same time, have per- 
 severed in their Christian course. 
 
 The mission has at present 34 church mem- 
 bers, 6 native teachers, 9 boys and 22 girls 
 in the orphan and boarding schools, and in- 
 cluding the vernacular day schools and the 
 English school, there is a total of 261 
 scholars. 
 
 Belgaum. — The mission was commenced 
 here in 1820, by Rev. Mr. Taylor. In 1821, 
 two native schools were established, and the 
 number of boys under instruction was 120. 
 Throughout its whole history, it has been a 
 well conducted and successful mission. Yal- 
 uable native assistants were early raised up, 
 and of one of them, Dhondaph, very parti- 
 cular mention is made in 1828. The mis- 
 sionary, Mr. Benyon, says, " He is the most 
 spiritually-minded native Christian I have 
 ever conversed with. His trials and suf- 
 ferings have been many and severe, and 
 the sacrifices he has made have been of 
 the most painful nature, and, amidst all, he 
 has sustained a most consistent character. 
 He has literally, for the sake of Christ, for- 
 saken wife and children, and brethren and 
 lands. In a conversation I had with him. 
 on adverting to his sufferings he modestly 
 observed, 'Yes, I have been called to endure 
 a few trials, and my friends frequently tell 
 me of my losses ; but it is not always they 
 tell me what I have gained by them.'' " 
 
 Seasons of special encouragement were 
 from time to time enjoyed by this mission. 
 In 1842, one of the missionaries writes, 
 "Among the Lingarts and other castes in 
 the vicinity of Belgaum, strong excitement 
 exists with reference to the faith of the Gos- 
 pel. Inquiries concerning the nature and 
 claims of the new religion, combined with a 
 perception of its immeasurable superiority 
 even to the purest parts of Hindooism, are 
 
426 
 
 rapidly spreading throughout the country." 
 In commencing their report for 1848, the 
 brethren say, '• There is much to cheer and 
 interest our hearts, and to call forth fresh 
 efforts of zeal and devotednGSS in the glorious 
 work in which wc are engaged. We hope 
 tiiat the day of gracious visitation to the 
 Canarese people is fast approaching." 
 
 No report has been received from Belgaum 
 later than 1851. At that time there were 
 two missionaries, Rev. Messrs. Taylor and 
 Benyon, 31 church members ; 10 vernacular 
 schools, embracing 272 boys and 30 girls, 
 and an English school with 60 scholars. 
 During the year there had been distributed 
 30 Bibles, 42 Testaments, 324 portions of 
 Scripture, and 5,340 tracts. 
 
 Bellary. — In the spring of 1810, Rev. John 
 Hands entered upon a mission at this place, 
 situated in the most northern part of the 
 province of Mysore, and surrounded by nu- 
 merous and densely populated villages. He 
 had at first great difficulties to contend with 
 in acquiring the native language, called the 
 Oanara, but by perseverance he not only 
 soon collected several thousand words, which 
 he formed into a vocabulary, but also began 
 the preparation of a grammar. In 1811, he 
 writes, " I now preach thrice every Lord's 
 day to my countrymen and the Portuguese 
 half-caste. A considerable stir begins to 
 appear among the soldiers (it was a military 
 station), and eight or ten seem very serious 
 and promising. My dwelling was formerly 
 a pagoda, but part of it will now be devoted 
 to the worship of God. Several huge gods 
 of stone are lying about the premises, like 
 Dagon before the ark." In 1812, Mr. Hands 
 opened a native school, which was soon at- 
 tended by about 15 native children, and 
 gradually increased to a larger number. In 
 1816, the mission was joined by Rev. Mr. 
 Reeve. In January, 1819, a juvenile Bible 
 society was formed, principally through the 
 zeal of the master of the charity school. 
 About the same time, the missionaries ob- 
 tained of a native merchant a house situated 
 at the junction of several streets, and favor- 
 able for collecting large congregations. 
 
 At the close of 1819, Mr. Reeve remarks, 
 " During this year, the Gospel has been car- 
 ried several hundred miles through the dark 
 villages, and several thousands of tracts havQ 
 been distributed. The translation and re- 
 vision of the Scriptures, in Canara, have also 
 been proceeding. A new edition of Watt? 's 
 First Catechism, in that language, has been 
 prepared for the press, and a copy of the same 
 has been prepared in Tamil. The progress of 
 the schools has been favorable, and several 
 hundreds of the pupils know perfectly the First 
 Catechism, and the greater part of the Lord's 
 sermon on the mount." In 1825, the schools 
 had increased to 17, and the average attend- 
 ance of boys was 685. The report for 1829 
 
 niNDOStAN. 
 
 mentions that there had been prepared, dur- 
 ing the previous year, in Canarese, several 
 tracts, among which were the "Warning 
 Voice," a " Dialogue between a Shastre and 
 a Christian Missionary," " Explanation of 
 the Ten Commandents," tho "Excellency 
 of Truth," "True Wisdom," "On Idolatry," 
 &c. In 1831, the tracts and portions of 
 Scriptures printed were still moro numerous 
 and important. 
 
 The mission was left in a very feeble state 
 in 1841, Rev. Mr. Reid being in January of 
 that year removed by death, and Mr. Reevo 
 having returned to England several years 
 before. Very soon, however, two missiona- 
 ries and their wives joined the mission, and 
 the work went on as usual. 
 
 At the latest report, there were at Bellary 
 three European missionaries, an assistant 
 missionary, and a native pastor. The church 
 members numbered 72, and in the 14 schools 
 there were 460 scholars. An asylum for the 
 poor was in successful operation. 
 
 Bangalore. — Rev. Messrs. Forbes and 
 Laidler commenced the mission at this place 
 in 1820. Its position, some 50 miles west 
 of Madras, has rendered it an important 
 mission, and it has been an eminently suc- 
 cessful and useful one. The great instru- 
 mentalities adopted in carrying on the mis- 
 sion have been, preaching, schools, and the 
 distribution of the Scriptures and religious 
 tracts. While there have been, each year, de- 
 velopments of peculiar interest to those on 
 the ground, there was nothing for several 
 years so marked as to require special notice. 
 
 The itinerant labors of the missionaries 
 were abundant. In regard to these they 
 say, in 1843, "In visiting the towns and vil- 
 lages, we stay in each place one, two, or 
 three days, according to the work offered to 
 us. Our mode of communication is not 
 strictly preaching, but conversation, narra- 
 tive, and argument. The heathen of this 
 country cannot follow a logical discourse." 
 The total disregard of truth among the na- 
 tives is strikingly presented in the fol- 
 lowing passage, by one of the mission- 
 aries : " One of my schoolmasters labor- 
 ing in a country town lately said, 'Sir, if 
 these people really believed that you are 
 speaking truth, or, as he expressed it, no 
 lies, they would instantly deify you ; but 
 they cannot believe that such a thing as sin- 
 cerity is possible in any one.' This general 
 disregard for truth has been instilled into 
 the minds of the Hindoos by their so called 
 sacred books, which abound in falsehoods 
 and lying wonders. Hence the common 
 saying we hear at every step, 'If I do not 
 tell lies, how shall I get through the world V 
 And hence, also, the lamentable fact, that a 
 Hindoo may be convinced ten times, without 
 being brought once to act upon his convic- 
 tions. Owing to this, the Brahmin docs not 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 ^7 
 
 blush in the least when we expose his false- 1 
 hood and deceit, but says, with the greatest 
 indifference, 'In this way I obtain my live- 
 lihood.' " 
 
 The various schools, Tamil and English, 
 have well rewarded the pains bestowed upon 
 them. In the Canarese department there 
 are five vernacular day schools, with 100 
 boys and 38 girls ; an orphan and boarding 
 school, with 22 boys and 17 girls ; and an 
 English and Canarese day school with 66 
 scholars. In the Tamil department there are 
 23 pupils in the girls' boarding school, 70 
 boys in the English Tamil school, and in the 
 vernacular school 30 boys. 
 
 Mijsorc. — Rev. C. Campbell arrived at 
 this place in February, 1839, and commenced 
 his labors under very favorable circum- 
 stances. In the following year, he describes 
 Mysore as "a noble field for missionary la- 
 bor," where he found constant opportunities 
 for publicly preaching the Gospel to the 
 people. The greater part of the people, 
 however, as in most heathen countries, hated 
 the light, and wilfully shut their eyes against 
 it. Says the missionary in 1847, "The hea- 
 then often listen to the preacher with the 
 utmost patience and politeness till they fully 
 understand the nature of the Christian doc- 
 trine, and discover the practical effects it is 
 intended to produce on the heart and life, 
 and then the natural hostility of man to God 
 immediately appears. Much that has been 
 done at this station is regarded rather as a 
 preparatory work, yet a chapel has been 
 erected, a church of 13 members o%anized, 
 and 112 scholars gathered into the schools." 
 
 Salem. — Rev. Henry Crisp arrived at this 
 station in 1827. He died soon after entering 
 upon his work, and was succeeded by other 
 laborers. As usual, the journals of this 
 mission furnish numerous facts illustrative 
 of the religion of the country and the char- 
 acter of the natives, but such details can be 
 wrought only very sparingly into the present 
 work. Several seasons of spiritual refresh- 
 ing have been enjoyed by this mission, par- 
 ticularly in 1847, when many became alarmed 
 under the conviction of sin, and eight in one 
 day came to the missionary with the inquiry, 
 "What must I do to be saved?" The mis- 
 sionaries here add their testimony to that 
 of others in saying that caste is a device of 
 Satan the most adverse to Christianity ; it 
 is, they say, like a contagion, calculated, if 
 allowed to exist in the Christian church, to 
 destroy every spark of vital godliness. 
 Within the last year or two the mission has 
 experienced much opposition, and the mis- 
 sionary himself has been once dragged be- 
 fore a heathen court on some frivolous pre- 
 tence. But he says, " Severe as these afflic- 
 tions are, we prefer them to apathy, and 
 would fain hope that they are tokens for 
 good." 
 
 In the ^lissionary Magazine for March, 
 1853, the missionary, Mr. Lechler, remarks 
 with great satisfaction upon the success of 
 the School of Industry, which has been in 
 operation some five years, and which has 
 exerted a most valuable influence upon the 
 character and habits of the native Christian 
 community, by developing their resources, 
 and supplying them with the means of inde- 
 pendent support. He adds, "Our chapel, 
 now in progress and estimated to cost £400, 
 was built by our own people, one bricklayer 
 excepted, and is, I believe, the first church 
 built in India by the hands of native Chris- 
 tians." The district is described as full of 
 iron ore, and through the efforts of the mis- 
 sionary and the School of Industry, improve- 
 ments in the manufacture of iron were being 
 introduced, the primitive method being very 
 rude, and having been unchanged for 3000 
 years. Mr. Lechler, in speaking of the ob- 
 stacles to the social prosperity of India, 
 says: "It appears to me that very wrong 
 notions are entertained in England with re- 
 gard to the state of the people in India. 
 Certainly, if one would judge from the lordly 
 appearance of the Hon. East India Company's 
 servants and officers, it might be concluded 
 that the Indians^ generally, are highly civil- 
 ized, and in the most affluent circumstances. 
 The nation, as such, is oppressed and ground 
 down both by the government and higher 
 class of natives. The soil is rich, it is true, 
 and will produce almost any and every thing ; 
 but a native once remarked to me, ' govern- 
 ment takes the grain, and leaves us only the 
 btraw.' It is also rich in metals and mine- 
 rals, but no one teaches the natives how to 
 make use of them. So long, therefore, as 
 we shall have to do chiefly with the poor, — 
 and to the poor the Gospel is preached, — 
 we must, I feel convinced, not refuse to con- 
 cern ourselves about our people's temporal 
 affairs." There are at this station 33 church 
 members, and 168 scholars gathered into the 
 various schools. 
 
 Combaconum. — This was formerly an out- 
 station of the Travancore mission ; but in 
 1830 the directors annexed it to the Madras 
 district, it having become the residence of 
 the Rev. Edmund Crisp, from Madras. In 
 1838, there were ten Tamil schools in suc- 
 cessful operation. A singular instance of 
 moral impression is related in the journal of 
 the above date, of a Brahmin, who, in pro- 
 ceeding to the court-house to take a false 
 oath, ^passed by one of the school-rooms ; 
 the cKildren were engaged at the time loudly 
 repeating the ninth commandment, on hear- 
 ing which the Brahmin hesitated, returned 
 home, and such was the impression produced 
 upon his conscience, that he relinquished his 
 guilty intention, and refused to commit the 
 sin of perjury, on which he had been pre- 
 viously determined. 
 
428 
 
 niNDOSTAN. 
 
 In 1847, nearly all the heathen festivals 
 were visited by the missionarios, on which 
 occasion they preuched the Gospel to the 
 deluded multitudes as they had opportunity, 
 and distributed lai-ge numbers of tracts and 
 portions of Scripture. Gonccrninp; the great 
 annual car or chariot festival, tlie writer 
 says. ''Five large cai-s were drawn by about 
 30,000 pei*sons. I was greatly distressed to 
 find the poor people actually beaten and 
 compelled to assist in the drawing of the 
 cars. Not a few complained to me that they 
 were treated most cruelly, and confessed 
 themselves heartily tired of idol worship." 
 The nimiber of native Christians connected 
 with Combaconum and its affiliated out-sta- 
 tions, comprised, at the latest dates, a total 
 of 207 individuals. There were also ten 
 vernacul 
 scholars 
 
 Coimbatoor, — Kev. Mr. Addis and family 
 arrived at this station, in the Madras presi- 
 dency, in October, 1830. In 1835, a Chris- 
 tian church was formed, and six natives par- 
 ticipated, for the first time, in the ordinance 
 of the Lord's Supper. In 1837, the number 
 of native assistants had increased from two 
 to twelve, and a class of promising young 
 men was in a course of preparation for the 
 work of native teachers. There were also 
 12 boys' schools, in an efficient state, and a 
 female boarding school and a girls' day 
 school, established on Christian principles. 
 In 1840 the Roman Catholics in a neighboring 
 village manifested an earnest spirit of reli- 
 gious inquiry, and a desire to be taken into 
 connection with the mission. 
 
 In 1846, Mr. Addis speaks of the extreme 
 indifference of the Hindoo to the truths of 
 Revelation, and ascribes it in a great measure 
 to his Polytheism, " which meets him with 
 its multifarious remedies for all moral evil, 
 and causes a deadness and sterility of feeling 
 which nothing but power divine can effectu- 
 ally remove. A preacher of the Gospel in 
 the most degraded parts of Christian lands 
 can form but a faint conception of the diffi- 
 culties which his missionary brethren in 
 India have constantly to encounter from 
 this source. In 1850, Mr. C. J. Addis, son 
 of the missionary, became associated with 
 his father in the labors of the mission. 
 
 There are now at this station 35 church mem- 
 bers, 13 native teachers, besides 14 other na- 
 tive helpers, 20 children in the female board- 
 ing-school, and 971 scholars in the day schools. 
 
 Soitih Travancore. — The London Missionary 
 Society has four missions in South Travancore, 
 viz. : Nagercoil, Neyoor, Quilon, and Trevan- 
 drum. The first of these stations was entered 
 upon in 1806, the second in 1828, the third in 
 1821, and the fourth in 1838. These places all 
 lie on the western coast of Southern India, at no 
 great distance from each other, Nagercoil ex- 
 tending quite down to Cape Comorin. The 
 
 country in divided into thirty districts, and has 
 a jjopulatiun of nearly a million. 'J'ho Malay- 
 ahra is generally snoken. 
 
 In 1804, Ilev. W. Ringletaubc sailed for 
 India, in company with Rev. Messrs. Cran and 
 Des Granges, but not wishing to go with them 
 to the Northern Circars, he directed his course 
 to Tinnevelley, and subsequently entered upon 
 his labors at Tranvancore. He gathered sev- 
 eral congregations there, and baptized great 
 numbers of the inhabitants, but the motive 
 with many of them was worldly advantage. 
 Alluding to the crowds of Hindoos and Mc- 
 hammedans who expressed a willingness to 
 embrace Christianity if their debts were paid, 
 Mr. R. says : " For two hundred rupees 1 could 
 have bought them all, but as I declined to pay 
 their debts, they never called on me again." 
 
 In 1816 Mr. Ringletaube was compelled by 
 ill-health to relinquish his mission, and for a 
 year the London Society had no missionary 
 in Travancore. In 1817 Rev. Charles Meade 
 arrived, and in 1818 he was joined by Rev. 
 Richard Knill. The outward success of the 
 missionaries was surprisingly great. During 
 the years 1818 and 1819, nearly three thousand 
 of the natives of Travancore placed themselves 
 under religious instruction, in addition to about 
 nine hundred previously connected with the 
 mission. It was evident, the missionaries say, 
 that they had not renounced their former super- 
 stitions from selfish considerations. 
 
 In 1828 measures were taken for dividing 
 the Travancore mission into two, the eastern 
 and the western. The eastern division embrac- 
 ed NagiTCoil and its out-stations, and the 
 western division comprised Trevandrum, Ne- 
 yoor, and Quilon, with their numerous out-sta- 
 tions. The work at these several places has 
 been carried on with great vigor and success 
 from the first, rendering it one of the most in- 
 teresting and important fields occupied by the 
 London Society in India. Particular interest 
 has been manifested in that large and neglect- 
 ed class called Parayas, most of whom are slaves, 
 so ignorant and oppressed as to be quite un- 
 able to defend themselves, or to plead in their 
 own behalf. A society has been formed for 
 the special purpose of diffusing the Gospel 
 among these people, and ten or twelve agents 
 are stationed among them in the different dis- 
 tricts. 
 
 In the Eastern, or Nagercoil district, there 
 is a local tract society, which published during 
 the year 1851, 71,600 copies of tracts, of va- 
 rious kinds. The church members at this sta- 
 tion and its out-stations number, according 
 to the latest reports, 340, and the scholars, in 
 57 schools, 2402. The congregations of this 
 district, 25 in number, are spread over 70 vil- 
 lages, comprising 867 families, and 3333 indi- 
 viduals, of whom 260 have been baptized. 
 
 Neyoor, in the western division, has 42 out- 
 stations, 953 Christian families, and 3150 indi- 
 viduals under instruction, of whom 185 are 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 429 
 
 baptized, and 93 are in church fellowship. 
 There are also 941 boys and 235 girls in the 
 gchool. 
 
 Parechaley, a branch of the Neyoor sta- 
 tion, has enjoyed special tokens of the divine 
 blessing within the last two or three years. 
 Two native theological classes have been 
 formed and much encouragement has been 
 derived from their progress. The most recent 
 report gives the number of Christian families 
 connected with the Pareychaley mission as 
 1197, comprising 4258 individuals. The out- 
 stations are 71, church members 75, readers 
 and assistants 77 : boys in the day-schools 
 1372, girls 200 ; adult Bible classes 25, schol- 
 ars 151 ; theological classes 2, students 51. 
 
 Quilon has a press in active operation, and 
 tracts to the number of 16,600, varying from 
 8 to 16 pages each, were issued during the 
 last year, to which the report extends. The 
 number of children in the day-schools was 281. 
 
 Trevandrum has 10 village congregations, 
 comprising about 800 people, scholars in the 
 village schools 148. Tracts distributed dur- 
 ing the last year, in Malay alim 10,428, Tamil, 
 4287. 
 
 These statements will show that the Trav- 
 ancore mission is very extensive, demanding 
 an immense amount of labor for its successful 
 prosecution, and rewarding those labors with 
 the most gratifying and blessed results. 
 
 Calcutta. — The London Missionary Society 
 commenced its operations in Calcutta in 1816. 
 Rev. Messrs. Townley and Keith, the first mis- 
 sionaries, began at an early period to preach 
 the Gospel in Bengalee, to establish schools, 
 and distribute the Scriptures. In 1818 a com- 
 modious chapel was erected, called " Union 
 Chapel," the funds for which were chiefly sub- 
 scribed at Calcutta. A printing-press was 
 established in 1820, and piit under the super- 
 intendance of the Bengal Auxiliary Society. 
 An institution called the Christian School So- 
 ciety was also formed at Calcutta, the object 
 of which was to introduce Christian instruc- 
 tion into the native schools, under the entire 
 management of native schoolmasters. A Bethel 
 Society was established in the same year, at 
 Calcutta, in connection with the Baptist breth- 
 ren residing at Calcutta and Serampore. In 
 1823 and 1824 the labors of the missionaries 
 were abundant and successful. Union Chapel 
 was well attended, and a flourishing Sabbath- 
 school was in operation. Bengalee preaching 
 was continued at the bungalow chapel, Mirza- 
 pore, and a bungalow chapel was opened for 
 worship in the native language, on the main 
 road of Bhopanipore. In 1825 the mission 
 was reinforced, and a new station was com- 
 menced. The year 1827 was marked by the 
 baptism of a native female, who had been 
 under serious impressions for years. The abo- 
 lition of Suttee in India, by the British Gov- 
 ernment, was a memorable event of the year 
 1830, and proved the commencement of a 
 
 brighter day for India. In 1833 mention 13 
 made of a diminution of schools, for the pur- 
 pose of giving increased attention to the 
 preaching' of the Gospel. A year or two later 
 there was a manifestation of open and decided 
 hostility to Christianity, which was regarded 
 as an encouraging feature, there having been 
 before a degree of apathy to religious matters 
 which was most trying to the patience of the 
 missionaries. The wane of idolatry was clearly 
 indicated in 1837, by the greatly diminished 
 number of attendants upon the idolatrous fes- 
 tivals, and the disappearance of the splendor 
 and pomp with which they were formerly cele- 
 brated. Another favorable change at this 
 period was the absence of Europeans — the 
 British resident gentry — from the dances given 
 in honor of the goddess Doorga by the more 
 wealthy natives. About this time Rev. Mr. La- 
 croix commenced a theological class which 
 embraced quite a number of promising young 
 men, and whose course of study consisted in 
 the practical investigation of the Scriptures, 
 systematic theology, the evidences of Chris- 
 tianity, and church history. They also com- 
 posed short sermons, which, after the needful 
 corrections, were preached to the natives in 
 the presence of the missionaries. 
 
 The annual report of 1843 speaks of the pre- 
 vious year as a most disastrous one in a tem- 
 poral point of view, the south of Calcutta hav- 
 ing been visited by cholera, devastating storms, 
 inundation, and famine. Many members of the 
 Christian congregations died, the harvests were 
 cut off', and distress and despair followed. For 
 five months the rains continued almost without 
 intermission. Still the work of the mission 
 went on with encouraging signs of success. 
 During the succeeding eight or nine years un- 
 ceasing attention was given to preaching, 
 schools, translations of the Scriptures, the pub- 
 lication and distribution of tracts, and itinera- 
 cies through the principal villages. 
 
 There are at present five stations under 
 the immediate care of the Calcutta mission, 
 one of which includes two native villages, 
 Rammakal-choke and Gungree. The church 
 members at this station number 180, and the 
 children in the vernacular schools 110. Mr. 
 Lacroix, the missionary, has been much em- 
 ployed in conducting through the press a new 
 edition of the Gospels of Matthew, Luke, and 
 John, in Bengalee, for the Calcutta Bible So- 
 ciety ; and in conjunction with Dr. Duff", has 
 superintended the printing of the book of 
 Isaiah, in Bengalese, for the same society. 
 
 The station of Ballia-Hati, under the care of 
 Mr. Lacroix, has 60 professing Christians, and 
 171 pupils in the schools. At Cooly Bazar 
 there is a branch missionary society, and a Sab- 
 bath-school and Bible class have recently been 
 established. The most important educational 
 institution is at Bowhanipore, there being in 
 its several departments 803 pupils. At the 
 opening of the year 1850, three college classes 
 
430 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 fbrmed, contain inp 70 students. A juve- 
 Bile society and a ladies' society have con- 
 tributed liberally to the ftiuds of the mission. 
 The KishnajMirc station has connected with it 
 about 100 native Christians. There are eight 
 missionaries now laboring at the Calcutta star 
 
 tiODS. 
 
 Chinsurah. — Rev. Robert May commenced 
 the mission at this place in 1813. So great 
 was his success that in 1816 he had formed 30 
 schools, with 2,600 children. In 1819 these 
 schools were reported as in a very prosperous 
 state. They were gratuitously supplied with 
 books by the Calcutta school Book Society, 
 who ordered 1000 copies of a Bengalee and 
 English Grammar to be printed at their sole 
 expense. Religious books were also much 
 called for, and extensively circulated. In 1820 
 a Bengalee chapel was erected, and in 1821 an 
 additional native school was commenced at a 
 village called Khonnian, the expense of which 
 was defrayed by the Rajah of Birdwan. A na- 
 tive female school was also opened in a room 
 of the fort, kindly assigned by the Dutch gov- 
 ernor for the purpose. In 1826, great success 
 attended the preaching of the Gospel to the 
 Europeans at this station, many embraced re- 
 ligion, and a church of about twenty members 
 was formed. The number of schools support- 
 ed by the Bengal government at this station 
 in 1828, was sixteen, in which over 2,000 boys 
 were in a course of instruction. The mission 
 schools were three in number, and contained 
 295 boys. Particular mention is made in 
 1834, of the free school in which English was 
 taught to both native and Portuguese boys ; 
 but the attendance on this school was small, 
 on account of the number of government 
 schools in which English was taught, and the 
 prejudices of the parents against the use of the 
 Bible as a class-book — a prejudice tolerated in 
 the government schools by the exclusion of the 
 Bible. During the three or four succeeding 
 years a spirit of earnest inquiry prevailed 
 among the natives of high caste, some of whom 
 abandoned Hindooism in favor of Christianity, 
 but others were deterred by the most violent 
 persecutions. The report for 1837 says, " The 
 government has established a college for the 
 education of Hindoo youths, in the immediate 
 vicinity of the station, and the applications for 
 admission have been very numerous." Rev. 
 Mr. Mundy, missionary at this station, calls 
 special attention, in 1838, to the fact, that 
 those who become acquainted with the English 
 language are much more favorably disposed to 
 Christianity than those who are ignorant of it, 
 and expresses the opinion that every college 
 and school in the country might be conducted 
 on Christian principles, without any objection 
 on the part of the natives. But over this ques- 
 tion the missionaries had no direct control, the 
 British government being pledged not to intro- 
 duce Christianity into the schools for instruc- 
 tion in English, nor in any way to interfere 
 
 with the native religion. The mission schools 
 were conducted upon entirely different princi- 
 ples, and the advancement of the pupils in 
 Christian knowledge was very observable from 
 year to year. The female schools, and also 
 the infant school, under the care of Mrs. ^Mun- 
 dy, were marked by great prosperity, and re- 
 ceived the high commendation of the Bishop 
 of Calcutta. But this devoted female mis- 
 sionary died in 1842, leaving her husband and 
 the wnole mission to mourn an irreparable 
 loss. The next year Mr. Mundy himself was 
 obliged, bv ill-health, to abandon the field in 
 which he had labored many years, and to re- 
 turn to England. He was succeeded by Rev. 
 Mr. Bradbury, from Calcutta, and the preach- 
 ing of the Gospel in Bengalee was sustained as 
 in former years. Great eagerness to obtain 
 and read the Scriptures was evinced, and many 
 young men, educated in the Government col- 
 le^es and schools, requested and thankfully re- 
 ceived copies of the Bible. These and other 
 encouraging signs led Mr. Bradbury to believe, 
 in 1845, that this locality, one of the most edu- 
 cated districts in India, would soon enjoy the 
 benefit of an extensive diffusion of divine 
 knowledge. 
 
 Special divine favor was granted to the Eng- 
 lish female school in 1849, and cheering hopes 
 were entertained of the conversion of several 
 of the pupils. The number in attendance, at 
 the latest date, was 57. The Bengalee school 
 has 100 pupils, employed in the acquisition of 
 general and religious knowledge. The older 
 boys have been conducted through the Gospel 
 of John, and the younger have learnt the First 
 Catechism. There were 70 boys in connection 
 with the English and vernacular school in 
 1847, but for want of funds this school has 
 been suspended. .Preaching to the heathen 
 and the distribution of the Scriptures are con- 
 tinued with encouraging success. 
 
 Berhampore. — The operations of the London 
 Missionary Society at this station were com- 
 menced in 1824, by Rev. Mr. Hill, who had 
 been laboring at Calcutta. He met with op- 
 position for a time, but succeeded at length in 
 establishing schools for the children of Hin- 
 doos and Mohammedans. In 1828 a chapel 
 and mission-house were erected, and a female 
 school, under the care of Mrs. Hill and another 
 lady, was in a prosperous condition. In 1831 
 an orphan asylum for native children was es- 
 tablished, to which native orphans of both 
 sexes were received, under the charge of two 
 native matrons, members of the church. The 
 girls were instructed in reading, sewing, spin- 
 ning, &c. ; and the boys, between school hours, 
 were taught gardening and weaving. 
 
 In the annual report for 1837, Mr. Hill, in 
 reviewing the work of thirteen years, says, 
 " When I entered the country the jealousy of 
 the government was great. A missionary 
 could not leave Calcutta without special license, 
 and I had to solicit from the chief secretary 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 431 
 
 permission to live at Berliampore. The na- 
 tives misrepresented my conduct to the civil 
 and military authorities, and my own country- 
 men were hostile to me. Our schools were 
 injured by secret combination and open hos- 
 tility. For some years after my arrival at 
 Berhampore, wherever I preached I was hooted 
 and hissed, and men have even followed me 
 from preaching with clubs to strike me. But 
 things are now different. People are no lon- 
 ger afraid to ask for a tract, nor try to con- 
 ceal it under their clothes to prevent the Brah- 
 mins from tearing it in pieces. The Brahmins 
 themselves are as eager for tracts and Gospels 
 as the other castes, and plead that they are 
 BraJimins as 'a reason for showing them a pre- 
 ference. We now obtain congregations when- 
 ever and wherever we wish. In all principal 
 thoroughfares, crossways, and markets, we 
 never wait five minutes until a congregation 
 assembles. The number of converts from our 
 fellow-countrymen is not small. Of his Ma- 
 
 }'esty's regiments which have been quartered 
 lere, we express with gratitude our belief that 
 all, excepting one, included at their departure 
 those whom the Holy Spirit had, during their 
 residence at the station, sealed unto the day 
 of redemption." 
 
 In 1838, after nearly 1*7 years of labor under 
 a tropical climate, Mr. Hill found it necessary 
 to seek a residence in his native country, and 
 Eev. Mr. Lessel removed from Calcutta to 
 supply his place. Mr. Hill returned to his 
 field in 1842. In 1843 the mission was visited 
 with affliction, and not a native church mem- 
 ber, nor a native catechist, nor a child in the 
 asylum or school, escaped the prevailing sick- 
 ness. Some died, leaving the most satisfactory 
 evidence of saving conversion. A deeply in- 
 teresting account of the sickness and death of 
 several children, appears in the report for 
 1847. In January of that year, Mr. and Mrs. 
 Hill removed to Calcutta, where Mrs. Hill 
 soon after died. Mrs. Patterson was also 
 about this time called to her rest, and Mr. 
 Patterson removed to England. These events 
 left almost the whole burden of the mission on 
 Mr. Lessel, who, accompanied by native cate- 
 chists, preached to the heathen, and distributed 
 tracts and scriptures extensively. The pro- 
 fessing Christian community at Berhampore at 
 the present time, comprises about 100 indi- 
 viduals. Impediments to female education, 
 arising from the force of prejudice, the apathy 
 of parents, and other causes, have been very 
 numerous at this station ; but Mrs. Bradbury, 
 wife of one of the missionaries, has succeeded 
 in establishing a girls' school, which contains 
 23 pupils, 12 of whom are day scholars, chiefly 
 Mohammedans, and 11 boarders, consisting of 
 orphans and the children of native Christians. 
 They are instructed through the medium of 
 the Bengali language, in reading, sewing and 
 knitting, and also in the Scriptures. Five of 
 the sons of native Christians are under the 
 
 care of Mr. Lessel. Divine service intne Eng- 
 lish chapel has been conducted regularly every 
 Sabbath evening, by the missionaries alter- 
 nately. In the English boys' school the ave- 
 rage attendance is 30. 
 
 Benares. — Mr. and Mrs. Adam were sent 
 out to this station in 1820. Mr. Adam im- 
 mediately organized a native school, which 
 was so far successful that he opened another 
 the following year. A chapel was opened in 
 1824, chiefly through the exertions of privates 
 in the artillery. Concerning this station Mi. 
 Adam forcibly remarks, "Benares exhibits, 
 in full operation, some of the worst principles 
 of Hindoo superstition." He describes the 
 people as rich in their own eyes and in need 
 of nothing, as already at the gate of heaven 
 and in no want of aid ; as awfully wicked in 
 their lives, and altogether presenting formida- 
 ble obstacles to missionary labor. In 1826 
 Rev. Mr. Robertson joined this mission, and 
 in 182*7 the native schools, three in number, 
 contained 170 pupils. In all these schools 
 Christian books were taught. A catechism 
 and a Hindawee translation of scriptural les- 
 sons was prepared by Mr. Adam for the use 
 of the schools. He also printed 1,000 copies 
 of his tract on the ten commandments, and 
 soon after prepared another tract entitled 
 " Jesus the Deliverer from ihe Wrath of God." 
 In 1831 the mission was strengthened by the 
 arrival of Rev. Wm. Buyers. Mr. Crawford, 
 at this date, had translated the minor prophets, 
 and a consecutive version of the books of the 
 Old Testament had been finished, as far as to 
 the Second Book of Kings. The Psalms, Pro- 
 verbs, and Isaiah, had previously been printed. 
 The work of translation was continued in the 
 following years, and besides the Scriptures, Pil- 
 grim's Progress and other books were trans- 
 lated for the use of the natives. 
 
 In 1838 the report says : " The obstacles 
 presented by the native language to the diffu- 
 sion of religious and general knowledge have 
 now almost disappeared, and, after much per- 
 severance in endeavoring to simplify the style 
 of writing and instruction so as to meet the 
 capacities of the peq)le generally, the mission- 
 aries, aided by the Benares Christian School 
 Book Society, have succeeded in correcting 
 much of the false taste formerly prevalent — a 
 taste which was so vitiated as to prefer the 
 absurdities of the native literature, clothed in 
 a style of pedantic obscurity, to the plain and 
 intelligible communication of sound and valu- 
 able instruction." 
 
 During the years 1839 and 1840, a vast 
 number of tracts and copies of th6 Scriptures 
 were put in circulation by the missionaries; 
 but a serious obstacle to the success of such 
 labors has been the inability of the people to 
 read, arising partly from the peculiar and 
 widely differing styles of printing. On this 
 subject the missionaries, in 1840, offer the fol- 
 lowing important remarks : " Though Benares 
 
432 
 
 UINDOSTAN. 
 
 is called the Athens of India, it is nstonlKliinj,' 
 to find how vcrv few of its inluibitunts can 
 read. Most of the Brahmins who chimt San- 
 scrit sloks, do not know the meaning of them. 
 The greatest number of the Mussulman prit^ts 
 who read, or rather chant the Koran, do not 
 understand it. But the great obstacle to edu- 
 cation arises from the variety of charticters. 
 The Mohammedans use the Persian character, 
 the Brahmins the Devanasati, the tradesmen 
 the Kayathi, the bankers tne Mahajani. On 
 this account few can read any printed charac- 
 ters, and among these only a small number can 
 read fluently, intelligently, and understauding- 
 ly. Whenever a man takes a tract and reads 
 it fluently, we may be almost sure that he has 
 learned to read in a mission school. In these 
 circumstances the education of the native 
 youth is of the first importance. 
 
 In their report for 1851 the missionaries say 
 that all their labors are performed with a 
 view to increase the prosperity of the native 
 church. " For it we translate the Scriptures 
 and write books. We preach the Gospel to 
 the heathen and teach it in our schools, in the 
 hope that some may be brought into the fold 
 of Christ. Our mission church, assembling at 
 Salem Chapel, consists of twenty native mem- 
 bers." Of the orphan and Christian boys, ten 
 in number, recently under the charge of this 
 mission, five have been removed to Mirzapore, 
 to learn printing. Five of the orphan girls, 
 at the latest accounts, had been married, and 
 maintained an exemplary deportment in their 
 new position. In connection with the mission 
 there are four subordinate schools, containing 
 an aggregate of 170 boys. The Bazar girls' 
 school, under the superintendence of Mrs. 
 Buyers, has an attendance of 33 scholars. All 
 of these schools are represented as in a state of 
 growing efficiency. I'he number of pupils in 
 the English free school is 200. 
 
 Mirzapore. — This is a large and important 
 inland town, about 30 miles south-\vest of Be- 
 nares, and was occupied by the Loudon Soci- 
 ety in 1838. It was at that time a newly 
 erected city, devoted to trade and commerce ; 
 and Mr. Mather, the first missionary, had to 
 encounter obstacles of a peculiar nature, aris- 
 ing from the commercial character and spirit 
 of the people. Generally speaking, however, 
 the inhabitants were disposed to attend to the 
 preaching of the word, and displayed much 
 candor in judging of the conflicting claims of 
 their own religion and that of the Bible. 
 
 One of the earliest eflbrts of Mr. and Mrs. 
 Mather, was the establishment of an orphan 
 school, to which a large number of children 
 were immediately sent from Agra, where 
 famine had deprived them of their parents. 
 These children themselves were so reduced, 
 that 14 out of 79 who left Agra, died on the 
 way, or soon after their arrival In 1840, Mr. 
 Mather was joined by Mr. Glen, who directed 
 his attention to the Mohammedan population. 
 
 The Gospel was faithfully preached, and both 
 English and native services were regularly 
 maintained. The native church received fre- 
 quent accessions, and some of the converts 
 were of such a character and position as to 
 render their influence of great value to the mis- 
 sion. In 1843 the orphan schools had been 
 increased, and contained 60 boys and 34 girls. 
 But a sad mortality occurred among them 
 about this time, and 17 of the children died. 
 The various departments of this mission have 
 been well sustained, and there are now at the 
 station two missionaries and two assistant mis- 
 sionaries. The church has twenty-five mem- 
 bers, of whom" sixteen are natives. The free 
 school has over 100 scholars, and the bazar 
 schools, three in number, contain an aggregate 
 of 70 boys. The orphan boys' school affords 
 much encouragement ; and the orphan girls' 
 school, and also the infant school of 12 mem- 
 bers, have been attended with gratifying re- 
 sults. 
 
 Surat. — The London Missionary Society 
 commenced a station at this place in 1813, and 
 continued it, at times with the most encoura- 
 ging results, until 1845, when, " for weighty 
 reasons," the directors decided to relinquish it. 
 The mission was transfeiTcd to the Irish Pres- 
 byterian Missionary Society, whose mission- 
 aries were on the ground, and qualified to sus- 
 tain the responsibilities of the mission. 
 
 Mahi-Kantha. — The mission at this place, 
 situated in the Guzerat territory, about 100 
 miles from Surat, was commenced by Rev. 
 Mr. Clarkson, in 1844. The site of the mis- 
 sion at first was Baroda, but was changed to 
 Mahi-Kantha, on the banks of the river of 
 that name. The plan of forming a Christian 
 village has been prosecuted, for which purpose 
 60 acres of land has been procured from gov- 
 ernment, on a lease of 30 years, for cultivation 
 by the Christian colonists, and six or seven 
 substantial brick houses have been built. 
 Preaching, schooli?, the distribution of books, 
 and itinerant labors; have all been entered 
 upon with vigor, and the mission promises the 
 happiest results. A very interesting account 
 of the conversion and baptism of a native, 
 Patadar, will be found in the annual report of 
 the London Mission.ary Society for 1850. 
 
 Almora. — This station, in Northern India, 
 was entered upon by Rev. J. H. Budden, in 
 1850. It was originated, and has been chiefly 
 sustained, by the liberality of J. H. Batten, 
 Esq., and Capt. Ramsay, of the East India 
 Company's service, and is at present in a pros- 
 perous condition. Schools have been estab- 
 lished, and regular preaching services are 
 maintained. 
 
 The following table gives an imperfect view 
 of the London Missionary Society's operations 
 in India, owing to the fact that in the more 
 recent reports the number of churches and of 
 communicants is not uniformly given ; and the 
 schools for boys and girls are not always men- 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 433 
 
 tioned separately. There are also many iso- 
 lated facts which could not be conveniently 
 classed ; but the account given of each mission 
 
 or station, it 
 deficiencies. 
 
 is believed, will supply these 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 ei 
 
 fi a 
 
 .9 
 2-3 
 
 Madras . . . 
 Vizagapatam 
 Cuddapah . . 
 Belgaum . . 
 Bellary . . . 
 Bangalore . 
 Mysore . . . 
 Salem .... 
 Combaconum 
 Ooimbatoor . 
 Nagercoil . . 
 Neyoor . . . 
 Quilon .... 
 Trevandrum . 
 Calcutta . . . 
 Chinsurah . . 
 Berhampore . 
 Bepares . . . 
 Mirzapore . . 
 Mahi Kantha 
 Almora . . . 
 
 Totals 
 
 1805 
 1804 
 1822 
 1820 
 1810 
 1820 
 1839 
 1827 
 1830 
 1830 
 1806 
 1828 
 1821 
 1838 
 1816 
 1813 
 1824 
 1820 
 1838 
 1844 
 1850 
 
 47 
 
 119 
 40 
 34 
 31 
 72 
 69 
 13 
 33 
 
 35 
 
 340 
 
 75 
 
 13 
 160 
 
 643 
 
 150 
 
 9 
 
 60 
 
 18 
 
 1,392 
 147 
 
 30 
 
 232 
 19 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 40 
 
 200 
 
 16 
 32 
 
 23 
 
 6 
 102 
 
 93 
 
 281 
 
 23 
 
 1,024 
 
 133 
 
 34 
 
 2,439 
 
 10 
 
 607 
 
 484 
 
 875 
 
 149 
 
 261 
 
 162 
 
 460 
 
 370 
 
 112 
 
 151 
 
 365 
 
 971 
 
 1,669 
 
 1,592 
 
 281 
 
 163 
 
 1,225 
 
 100 
 
 53 
 
 502 
 
 84 
 
 8,919 
 
 Free Church of Scotland. — Eev. Alex- 
 ander Duff, D. D., was designated by the Church 
 of Scotland as its first missionary to India, 
 early in the year 1829, and in October of the 
 same year he sailed from Portsmouth in the 
 Lady Holland. In February this noble ship 
 struck on the rocks of a barren island near 
 Cape Town, and almost everything on board, 
 except the passengers, perished. Dr. Duff 
 lost his whole library, consisting of over 800 
 different works, many of them of rare value, 
 besides all his journals, notes, essays, &c., the 
 fruits of many years of research and reflection. 
 He sailed in another ship from the Cape, and in 
 March came near being lost in another gale, and 
 on reaching the mouth of the Ganges the vessel 
 was driven ashore in a hurricane, amid all the 
 horrors of a shipwreck. At length, on the 
 27th of May, 1830, he reached Calcutta, " more 
 dead than alive." He soon entered upon his 
 favorite scheme, the establishment of a colle- 
 giate institution, in which the Bible, in Eng- 
 lish, should be the principal text book ; and 
 after a year or two of trial and experiment, the 
 institution was carried into successful operar 
 tion. The history of this college need not be de- 
 28 
 
 tailed. It has educated, on its peculiar plan, 
 many hundreds of Hindoo young men, and the 
 happy effects which it has produced are recog- 
 nized with gratitude by nearly all classes 
 throughout the province of Bengal. Native 
 youths of great promise, connected with the 
 institution, have from time to time been con- 
 verted,, and having renounced caste and all the 
 forms of Hindooism, they have received bap- 
 tism, and have often become most able and , 
 efficient assistants in the missionary work. 
 Of Dr. Duff's labors in Europe and America 
 for the last four years the Christian world is 
 fully aware, and no particulars need be stated. 
 Four or five other distinguished missionaries 
 have at different periods been sent to Calcutta, 
 one of whom, Eev. D. Sinclair, died a year or 
 two since. There are now, in the absence of 
 Dr. Duff, three European missionaries on the 
 ground, assisted by several native converts of 
 distinction. More than a dozen natives arc 
 employed as teachers in the college, having 
 themselves been trained up in it, and become 
 decided proficients in its various studies. Be- 
 sides this institution, a female school is in suc- 
 cessful operation at Calcutta. 
 
434 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 The society has a branch gt4\tion at Chin- 
 suimIi. a little distance from Calcutta, where 
 ti. IV is also a collegiate institution, on Dr. 
 Dull s plan, in a very flourishing condition. 
 It was opened in 1849, and has from seven to 
 eight hundred pupils, all boys, and these are 
 divided into fourteen classes, according to their 
 age and standing. The first class, of twenty- 
 three, are of the ages of 16 to 23 and upwanls, 
 and having been in the institution from its 
 commencement, they are far advanced in their 
 studies. The Old and New Testaments, as in 
 the college at Calcutta, are leading textrbooks, 
 und are systematically taught for at least one 
 hour each day. The boys in this class, says a 
 late report, " do not believe in idolatry now ; 
 they are full of Bible truth." Still there is 
 no evidence that any of them have been sav- 
 ingly converted. A female school of much 
 promise has been established at Chinsurah. 
 The Calcutta mission has also branch stations 
 a few miles distant, at Bansberiah and at 
 Culnah, chiefly for the purposes of education. 
 
 Madras. — The society established a mission 
 at Madras in 1835, under the labors of Rev. 
 John Anderson, who is still at that station, 
 with five others who have come to his aid. A 
 prominent feature of this mission at this place, 
 as at Calcutta and Chinsurah, is the educa- 
 tional institution, with the Bible for a leading 
 text^book. There are two divisions in the 
 school, the upper or college division being 
 taught by the missionaries and native converts ; 
 and the lower division, both male and female, 
 taught by an educated East Indian, with a 
 number of native teachers. There are nearly 
 600 pupils in the institution, about 150 of 
 whom are females. 
 
 Besides the institution at Madras there are 
 four branch schools, of which the following are 
 the statistics as furnished in the report for 
 1853. The figures show the actual attendance : 
 
 
 <n 
 
 « 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ?> 
 
 1 
 
 01 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 g 
 
 s ? 
 
 g 
 
 s.- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 s 
 
 |3 
 
 Madras 
 
 276 
 
 22 
 
 203 
 
 17 
 
 Treplecane . . . 
 
 143 
 
 32 
 
 100 
 
 15 
 
 Conjeverane . . . 
 
 221 
 
 37 
 
 66 
 
 6 
 
 Chingleput . . . 
 
 269 
 
 53 
 
 61 
 
 
 
 Nellore 
 
 179 
 
 26 
 
 115 
 
 29 
 
 Totals . . 
 
 1,088 
 
 170 
 
 545 
 
 67 
 
 The blessing of God has rested upon these 
 schools, conversions have been frequent, and 
 numbers are in a process of training for the 
 ministry and for teaching. 
 
 Bombay. — A mission at this place was com- 
 meuced in 1828 by the Scottish Missionary 
 
 Society, but has been for several ycara tinder 
 the care of the Free Church. Rev. John Wil- 
 son, D, D., has been laboring there ever since 
 1829, and he has been joined from time to 
 time by other brethren. The society has there 
 an important high school, or collegiate institu- 
 tion, aa at other places, and at the last accounts 
 there were about 400 pupils in the school. In 
 a letter of recent date Dr. Wilson says, — " We 
 are striving with all our might not only to give 
 large stores of knowledge to our pupils, but to 
 qualify them by the culture of the native lan- 
 guages which we have extensively studied, to 
 communicate that knowledge to their country- 
 men, not only by the living voice, but by the 
 wider working press. We are raising up a 
 body of native authors and translators." Quite 
 a number of the pupils are Romanists, Chal- 
 deans, Arminians, and Protestants ; and Dr. 
 Wilson says, " It is an unspeakable advantage 
 to them, that from the first they deal with the 
 Bible as the word of God." 
 
 Poonah. — This place is 100 miles S. E. of 
 Bombay, and about 75 miles from the sea-coast, 
 and has been emphatically termed " the native 
 land of the Mahrattas." It has a population 
 of about 100,000, and is the largest military 
 station in the Bombay presidency. The Free 
 Church has several missionaries at this place, 
 and besides the public preaching of the Gospel, 
 and lectures on the evidences of Christianity, 
 several schools, for males and females, are effi- 
 ciently maintained, the total number of pupils 
 being between five and six hundred. 
 
 Nagpoor. — This place is in the interior of 
 northern Hindostan, several hundred miles 
 N. E. of Bombay, and has a population of over 
 100,000. The Free Church had there at the 
 latest dates, 1853, two missionaries, a small 
 church, and English and vernacular schools 
 containing about 500 children. During the 
 year embraced in the last report six Hindoos 
 had been baptized, one of whom was a Brah- 
 min. The station at Nagpoor is regarded as 
 a very important one, occupying as it does a 
 vast section of country, where few, if any. 
 Christian influences of a similar kind are 
 brought to bear upon the native mind. But 
 the opposition is sometimes very violent, both 
 from men in power and from the lower orders 
 of the people. Still the missionaries arc ena- 
 bled to continue their labors, and they actually 
 sold during the last year over 5000 tracts. 
 
 The foregoing brief statements show that the 
 Free Church Missions in India are performing 
 a leading and most important agency in the 
 department of education, not only by the vast 
 number of youth, of both sexes, brought under 
 their tuition, but especially by the position 
 and influence given to the Bible in all their 
 schools. More full and complete statistics of 
 the schools and churches at these stations 
 would be desirable, but they are not furnished 
 in the missionary journals of the society. 
 
 Churcu op Scotland. — The Established 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 435 
 
 Church of Scotland has three missions m Hin- 
 dostan, viz., at Bombay, Calcutta, and Madras. 
 The mission at Bombay was founded by the 
 Scottish Missionary Society in 1828, and 
 transferred to the General Assembly in 1835. 
 The general course of the mission has been 
 prosperous. There is now at that station one 
 European missionary, Rev. R. Miller, and two 
 female assistants, supported by the Scottish 
 Ladies' Association. The number of scholars 
 in actual attendance upon the schools, is about 
 400. In tliree schools and an orphan asylum 
 there are 100 girls. 
 
 The Calcutta mission was established in 1830, 
 by missionaries now adhering to the Free 
 Church. It had in 1853, tAvo missionaries, 
 Messrs. John Anderson and James Ogilvie, and 
 26 native assistants. The number of pupils in 
 the schools was 1305, of whom about 1100 
 were generally in attendance. One of the na- 
 tive teachers of the "Institution," or high 
 school, had been baptized during the year, but 
 not a single pupil had been withdrawn in con- 
 sequence. " Five years ago," say the mission- 
 aries, " had a teacher been baptized, more than 
 half the pupils would instantly have been re- 
 moved. A few years ago the native newspa- 
 pers were perpetually attacking the Institu- 
 tion, and holding up to reprobation those pa- 
 rents who allowed their children to attend. 
 But this is very seldom done now ; on the con- 
 trary, the importance of this and similar insti- 
 tutions is very generally acknowledged by the 
 native press." 
 
 At Madi-as the missionaries, by the last 
 report, 1853, were Messrs. Grant, Sheriff, 
 Black, Walker, and Francis Christian. 
 The number of pupils in the schools had 
 been till quite recently, 400 boys and 200 
 girls. But the number had been diminished 
 in consequence of a report that some 
 of the children were likely to be baptized, 
 and the number of boys was reduced to 
 282, while the number of girls was increased 
 to 220. 
 
 At the time of the disruption of the 
 Church of Scotland, all the missionaries then 
 connected wdth the establishment, adhered 
 to the Free Church. 
 
 Irish Presbyterian Mission. — The Irish 
 Presbyterian Church established a mission in 
 Hindostan in 1841. The missionaries were Jas. 
 Glasgow, R. Montgomery, J. A. Speers, Adam 
 Glasgow, and J. McKee. They occupied three 
 stations, viz., Rajkote, Gogo, and Surat, situ- 
 ated in north-western Hindostan, the two for- 
 mer in Guzerat, and the latter on the opposite 
 side of the Gulf of Cambay. Immediately 
 upon entering the field these missionaries were 
 enabled, by the aid of the London Society and 
 the cooperation of government agents, to se- 
 cure ample mission premises, and to erect suit- 
 able buildings. They organized a church of 
 21 members, and entered upon the usual course 
 of missionary labor, as preaching, schools, &c. 
 
 They now have four stations, three mis- 
 sionaries, and three native assistants. Ver- 
 nacular services are held on the Sabbath and 
 week-days. There are schools for boys and 
 girls, v/ith an average attendance of 550 
 scholars. Prayer-meetings are maintained, 
 and there have been several baptisms. 
 
 General Baptist Missionary Society. — 
 The General Baptists of England commenced 
 their mission in Hindostan in 1822. They 
 chose for their field that part of the country 
 called Orissa, or Ootkul K'hand, supposed to 
 be the ancient country of the Or, or Oriya 
 tribe of Hindoos, and lying between 19° and 
 230 N. lat. and 84° and 88© E. long. The 
 boundaries of Orissa have been changed at 
 different periods, but as now generally under- 
 stood it is a long narrow strip of land, extend- 
 ing from Midnapore in the north to a few 
 miles below Ganjam in the south, and from 
 the shores of the Bay of Bengal in the east to 
 the vast range of mountains in the west, com- 
 prising a tract of about 300 miles in length, 
 and from 20 to 170 miles in breadth. The 
 principal towns in Orissa are Cuttack, Balar 
 sore, Jajepoor, Pooree, Midnapore, Ganjam, 
 and Berhampore. 
 
 Cuttack was the first place occupied by this 
 society as a station, and the first missionaries 
 were Rev. Wm. Bampton and Rev. James 
 Peggs, who arrived in Feb. 1822. They were 
 soon joined by Rev. Mr. Lacey and wife. 
 They commenced at once the study of the lan- 
 guage in which they were to make known the 
 Gospel to the benighted Orissans, and in the 
 mean time organized schools, and taught the 
 heathen as they were able. Preaching in 
 English on the Sabbath was practiced from 
 the commencement of the mission, and an in- 
 fant church was soon formed, and three con- 
 venient chapels were fitted up. Thousands of 
 tracts and Gospels were also distributed dur- 
 ing the first year or two. 
 
 Pooree. — In Sept. 1823, Mr. and Mrs. Bamp- 
 ton removed to Pooree, or Juggernaut, a little 
 to the N. E. of Cuttack. It was one of the 
 strongest holds of Satan in all India, for there 
 the idol Juggernaut had his temple, making 
 the whole region a modern Golgotha, and 
 causing desolation and wo of the most appal- 
 ling nature. The journals of the missionaries 
 at Pooree are filled with the most shocking 
 and heart>sickening details of the idolatry, des- 
 titution and wretchedness of the vast multi- 
 tudes who thronged to the temple of Jugger- 
 naut. On one occasion, June, 1825, 250,000 
 pilgrims were estimated to be in the immedi- 
 ate neighborhood of the temple, a large por- 
 tion of them without shelter, and without de- 
 cent food or clothing, and dying off in the 
 most frightful manner, of famine, cholera-mor- 
 bus, and other diseases. Says one of the mis- 
 sionaries, " In every street, corner and open 
 space, in fact wherever you turned your eyes, 
 the dead and dying met your view. At one 
 
436 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 time I counted unwards of 60 dead and dying, 
 from the temple down to the lower end of the 
 hospital, omitting the sick that had not much 
 life. At a corner opposite to the hospital, on 
 a spot of ground twelve feet square, I counted 
 ten dead, and live who were sick and nearly 
 dead. This was the case while there were 
 several sets of men in active employ carrying 
 out and burying the dead. You will now per- 
 haj)s reflect, that if the streets were thus 
 crowded, what must the various Golgothas be ? 
 I visitetl but one, and that was between the 
 town and the principal entrance. I saw things 
 that I shall never forget. The small river 
 tliere was quite glutted with corpses, and the 
 wind having drifted them together, they formed 
 a complete mass of putrifying flesh. They 
 also lay upon the ground in heaps, and the 
 dogs and vultures were able to do but little 
 towards consuming them." At a little later 
 date the same writer adds, " Pages would not 
 be sufficient to detail the miseries of the de- 
 luded worshipers of Juggernaut. The poor 
 pilgrims were to be seen in every direction, 
 dead and in the agonies of death, lying by 
 fives, tens, twenties, aud in some instances there 
 were hundreds to be seen. In one place Mr. 
 Lacey counted upwards of 90, and in another 
 Mr. Bampton counted 140. In the hospital I 
 believe I have seen 30 dead at once, and num- 
 bers more in the agonies of death, and even 
 the living using the dead bodies for pillows." 
 
 It was amicT such scenes as these that the 
 missionaries sought to diffuse the knowledge of 
 the true God, and of a pure Christianity, — a 
 hopeless attempt, except iu reliance upon the 
 almighty and regenerating Spirit of God. This 
 dependence was deeply felt; and in circum- 
 stances fitted most powerfully to impress such 
 a truth, one of the missionaries writes : " The 
 omnipotence of God is to me an encouraging 
 consideration. In the power of God is all my 
 hope. If I lad to address any advocates for 
 ministerial power to convert sinners, or for the 
 power of the Gospel apart from Divine influ- 
 ence, 1 would say, come to Juggernaut ; and if 
 that do not change your minds you are incor- 
 rigible." Again, the same missionary says, 
 " 1 am daily more convinced of the need of the 
 Holy Spirit. I have seen the people confound- 
 ed in their gods ; I have heard them acknowl- 
 edge the infinite superiority of Christ ; I have 
 seen them much affected, yea, in tears, under 
 the preaching of the Gospel ; but alas, what is 
 all this without the Holy Spirit to change 
 their hearts, to enlighten their minds, and to 
 render the word effectual ?" 
 
 The constant recurrence of such language in 
 the journals of these devoted laborers, shows 
 how scriptural were their views on fundamen- 
 tal points, and how exactly the General Bap- 
 tists accorded in their belief, with the mission- 
 aries of other evangelical societies in the va.st 
 field of India. That they should labor with 
 success, even amid the dc>solations of Jugger- 
 
 naut, was to be expected, both from their own 
 spirit and the promises of God. Accordingly 
 we find, at the end of four years, that they had 
 gathered schools in Cuttach and Pooree, com- 
 prising 380 boys and 148 girls. Many of these 
 children were able to read the Gospel with fa- 
 cility ; and besides the advantage to the child- 
 ren, these schools became chapels for the de- 
 claration of the Gospel to the heathen, like 
 the " school of Tyrannus," in which " Paul dis- 
 puted daily/' 
 
 Balasore. — In the early part of 1827, the so- 
 ciety established a third mission at Balasore, a 
 town situated about 170 miles S.W, of Calcutta, 
 and containing about 10,000 people. Rev. Mr. 
 Sutton, who had labored some time at Cuttack, 
 was the first missionary at the place. In 1832 
 the society say in their Report : " Ten years 
 ago our first missionaries opened their heavenly 
 commission in broken accents on the plains of 
 Hindostan ; and there Oriya converts have 
 been gathered to the Saviour, and Hindoos now 
 proclaim the unsearchable riches of Christ. 
 The grand contest between light and darkness 
 in one of the darkest regions of India, has 
 thus commenced. Even in the land of the 
 modern Moloch of the East, Satan no longer 
 maintains an unmolested empire." It is a fact 
 entitled to distinct and honorable mention, 
 that a field so dark, the very heart of Satan's 
 empire in Hindostan, and a region that had 
 never been penetrated by a single missionary, 
 was chosen by the General Baptists as their 
 place of toil and conflict. They entered into 
 no man's labors, and counted neither ease nor 
 life dear, that they might preach the Gos- 
 pel to the most benighted and wretched hear 
 then on earth. The report for 1832 mentions 
 the death of Mr. Bampton, one of the first mis- 
 sionaries of the society in India. The same 
 report notices the suspension of missionary ope- 
 rations at Balasore, on account of a deficiency 
 of laborers. The town had then but recently 
 been visited with an inundation, in which 
 about 20,000 persons perished. 
 
 From Pooree Mr. Sutton writes this year : 
 '* The opposition in the way of obscene abuse 
 runs very high. Oh, the abominable expres- 
 sions shouted out against me this evening. It 
 would frighten half England to hear them." 
 Persecution was very bitter, especially towards 
 those who exchanged Hindooism for Christi- 
 anity, and of this class there were some very 
 striking instances. To alleviate the trials of 
 the converts and render them helpers of each 
 other, the plan was adopted of settling them 
 together, in the vicinity of Cuttack, and form- 
 ing of them a Christian village. Being out- 
 casts whom none would assist, they could thus 
 enjoy sympathy and aid, could assemble con- 
 veniently lor worship, and would also form a 
 body of Christians, whose example would be 
 salutary. The place of their assemblage was 
 named Christianapoor. 
 
 By this time several native preachers had 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 437 
 
 been raised up, of whom the most distinguish- 
 ed were Gung-a Dhor and Rama Chundra ; 
 Gruuga especially was regarded as a powerful 
 preacher and an astounding witness against 
 his idolatrous brethren. His illustrations were 
 often exceedingly bold and impressive. For 
 example : when wishing to show how the Gos- 
 pel would spread, he said — " Suppose we were 
 enveloped in complete darkness ; but suppose 
 it was ascertained that there was fire in the 
 house of a certain individual in yonder bazar, 
 some one would soon run and light his lamp 
 from that fire ; others would light their lamps 
 at his, and others again would light their 
 [amps from them, and so on, till the light 
 «vould spread all over Cut tack. Thus it is 
 with the true light of religion. All is thick 
 iarkness, but in the padre's (missionary's) 
 liouse there is fire ; I have lighted my lamp at 
 Liis tire ; you will light yours from mine, and 
 >thers again will light theirs from you. Thus 
 the true light will become universal." Of 
 Rama it was also testified : '•' He is conscien- 
 tious, humble, teachable, and zealous. As a 
 preacher, he is a thunderer. Sometimes he 
 ilmost makes me . tremble ; and the effect on 
 la'tives, when he feels well and can get a hear- 
 ing, is very powerful." Rama's wife was the 
 earliest object of his solicitude. He con- 
 stantly taught her, and sought to impress upon 
 ler the truths of Christianity, and his efforts 
 Neve blessed. She became a well-informed 
 md decided Christian, and was a great help 
 md comfort to her husband. 
 
 In this year (1832) the plan was adopted by 
 the brethren at Cuttack, of establishing coun- 
 try bungalows and circuits around some cen- 
 tral point, at a considerable distance from the 
 principal station. They chose Bhogepoor as 
 the centre, a place eight miles from Cuttack, 
 surrounded with villages and markets to a 
 ^reat extent. It was the quarter from which 
 oaost of the converts had come, and where 
 ^reat inquiry was made in regard to Chris- 
 tianity. 
 
 From the commencement of the mission at 
 Cuttack, the missionaries labored to promote 
 religion among the European residents, preach- 
 ing twice to them every Sabbath. These 
 sfiforts were blessed, and many of the govern- 
 ment officers and soldiers became decidedly 
 pious. " At the communion service," says the 
 missionary, " our poor dark native brethren 
 and sisters are ranged round the same table 
 and on the same seats with the civil and mili- 
 tary officers of government." Thus the na- 
 tives were led to see that their rulers acknowl- 
 edged the obligations of Christianity. 
 
 In 1833 an important object was supposed 
 to be gained for Pooree and for all India, viz., 
 the abolition of the Pilgrim Tax. Hitherto 
 avarice had been joined to Satanic influence 
 in drawing pilgrims to Juggernaut. All the 
 worldly interests of the most abandoned, im- 
 pure, and depraved people were involved in 
 
 the worship of this idol. By this craft they 
 had their wealth, and of course they opposed 
 every possible obstacle to tiie effi)rts of the 
 missionaries. The sanction which the English 
 government had lent to idol worship was also 
 an insuperable difficulty. But now the govern- 
 ment passed an act, instructing its officers in 
 India to terminate the guilty support of Hin- 
 doo idolatry at Juggernaut and other temples. 
 The order, however, remained a dead letter, 
 the East India Company refusing to carry out 
 the instructions it had received. As the con- 
 nection of the British government with idola- 
 try is an important topic, and one with which 
 the General Baptists came into closer conflict 
 than any other missionaries, a somewhat full 
 statement of the facts may be desirable. lo 
 their report for 1837, the Society say : 
 
 " It appears that the servants of the Com- 
 pany, even when professedly Christians, are 
 required to attend heathen and Mohammedan 
 festivals for purposes of respect ; that in 
 some cases they are required to present offer- 
 ings and do homage to idols ; that the poor na- 
 tives are compelled, without compensation, to 
 attend heathen festivals to draw the idols' 
 cars ; and that European officers exercise so 
 entirely the management and control of vari- 
 ous temples, that no expense can be incurred 
 but under their direction ; and, horrible ! 
 not even the prostitutes connected with the 
 temple can be entertained or discharged with- 
 out their concurrence ! And those who thus 
 degrade themselves lower than the managers of 
 a house of ill-fame, are high-minded English 
 gentlemen! To what infamy will not some 
 men stoop through the accursed lust of gold ! 
 By this atrocious system has the British gov- 
 ernment in India been disgraced ; and the 
 Indian empire of Britain has been exposed to 
 the frown of that holy God who abhors idola- 
 try and those v/ho participate in the abomina- 
 tion." 
 
 Glaring and awful as was the position of 
 Great Britain in this respect, apologies for 
 inaction were found from year to year, till 
 1840, when the Society record with great joy, 
 that "the wicked Pilgrim Tax, which in its 
 results has tended so greatly to add to the 
 celebrity of Juggernaut, is at length abolished." 
 
 Strong hopes were now entertained that the 
 great popularity of Juggernaut would decline, 
 from the loss of one of its main supports ; but 
 these expectations proved fallacious. The 
 Pilgrim Tax had indeed been abolished, but 
 the government, in other forms, still extended 
 its support and patronage to the bloody Mo- 
 loch of the East. From year to year the mis- 
 sionaries remonstrated, and their efforts were 
 seconded by some members of Parliament and 
 of the East India Company ; yet in 1846 the 
 Orissa conference of missionaries had occasion 
 to adopt the following resolutions in regard to 
 this enormous evil : 
 
 ''Resolved, That as a very general opinion is 
 
438 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 prevalent that the government of India has 
 tbandoutnl ita connection with the temple of 
 Jugfferimut, wo deem it obligatory on us as a 
 missionary conference, assembled in the pro- 
 vince of Orissa, to state that such is not the 
 case. It is indeeil true that the government 
 has restored certain lands to the proprietors of 
 the temple, and abolished the rilgrim Tax ; 
 they have, moreover, ceased to receive the 
 presents and other emoluments connected with 
 .the idol : and thus far they have done well ; 
 but the government do still, in fact, though in 
 anotlier form, contribute more largely than 
 before to the support of the idol, inasmuch as 
 they have not only relinquished the lands and 
 other emoluments of the temple from which 
 they formerly received a revenue, but have 
 added an annual donation of 35,000 rupees, 
 and allow the proprietors of the temple to re- 
 ceive all presents and levy any contributions 
 they please on the pilgrims, so that a much 
 larger source of revenue than ever is now open 
 to the rajah and other interested parties. 
 
 " We do, therefore, consider the continuation 
 of this yearly grant to Juggernaut as most 
 anti-Christian in itself, and an act of partiality 
 towards this idol, which is inconsistent with 
 the neutral position the government professes 
 to sustain towards all systems of religion in 
 India." 
 
 These facts and statements are brought for- 
 ward in this place in the belief that they may 
 be needed both in England and America to 
 remove the impression that the British govern- 
 ment in India has withdrawn its direct and 
 ac^ve support from the worship of Jugger- 
 naut. Such is not the fact. In their report 
 for 1852, the missionaries say, " It is much to 
 be lamented that the government grant in 
 support of this idolatry is not yet withdrawn." 
 At the missionary conference held at Cuttack 
 in the year last named, the brethren protested 
 against this crying evil in the following terms : 
 "Resolvedy As the donation to Juggernaut has 
 not been discontinued, and as we have wit- 
 nessed through another year the wasting and 
 demoralizing effects of the system which it 
 sustains, we are constrained to repeat our 
 solemn and earnest remonstrance against this 
 iniquitous support of idolatry." 
 
 As it is due to the friends of missions every 
 where that this subject should be understood, 
 and certainly not unjust to the Indo-British 
 government, and as it comes up in no other 
 connection in the present work, the precise 
 responsibilty of the Government in the support 
 of idolatry may be given in another form of 
 statement adopted by the missionaries and an- 
 swering to the facts as still existing. They 
 say : " The rulers of India still continue, by the 
 payment of the large annual grant from the 
 public treasury, to support this wicked sys- 
 tem, (the worship of Juggernaut.) Nor is 
 this all ; a pension amounting to nearly 500 
 rupees is allowed to a byraggee (public servant 
 
 or agent) on account of daily food to the idol ; 
 and another sum of 2,666 rupees is paid to 
 another byraggee, that he may distribute the 
 holy food among the starving pilgrims." 
 
 These astounding facts tiie Hindoos have 
 the sagacity to turn to their own account. 
 Wlien rebuked for their idolatry by the mis- 
 sionary, they reply, " Why don't you teach 
 your own people to worship Jesus Christ? 
 They mind Juggernaut. They give a large 
 sum of money to support his worship. If Jug- 
 gernaut were not true, would the government 
 give money for his support ? Ask that bab- 
 bler (missionary) why the government gives 
 35,000 a year to Juggernaut if he be not true." 
 
 These, say the missionaries, are some of the 
 forms in which the British donation to Jug- 
 gernaut is mentioned by the heathen. The 
 fact of its being given is universally known, 
 they say, and only one reason for the bestow- 
 ment is ever mentioned by the idol worshipers, 
 and that is that " Juggernaut is true, and 
 therefore the wise and mighty of the land con- 
 tribute to his support." The British govern- 
 ment still persists in its open and efficient pat- 
 ronage of idolatry in its most shocking and 
 degrading form, in defiance of the fact, stated 
 by the missionaries, over and over again, that 
 the government grant is the principal support 
 of Juggernaut, that more human life is sacri- 
 ficed at the shrine of this idol than by the sut- 
 tee and the sword, and that the efforts of the 
 missionaries to enlighten and save the besotted 
 and wretched masses who annually visit Poo- 
 ree, are neutralized and baffled by British in- 
 terference. In their report for 1853 the Orissa 
 missionaries protest with the same earnestness 
 as before against this great abomination. 
 They say, " Our mission has now reached the 
 thirtieth year of its history, and consequently 
 of its contest with this gigantic evil. During 
 this long period we have seen the ground of 
 controversy continually shifting, but the con- 
 troversy itself continually renewed. In vain 
 have the various objections been met by the 
 most conclusive refutation ; ever and anon 
 some new friend of the idol, oblivious of past 
 arguments or imperfectly acquainted with the 
 real facts of the case, has come forward with 
 some new caveat." Thus, to this hour, the mis- 
 sionaries and the Christian world are doomed 
 to disappointment, and to the humiliation and 
 grief of seeing the most cruel, corrupt, and 
 shocking form of heathen worship known on 
 earth, supported by the money and influence oi 
 an enlightened and Christian nation. It is a 
 singular fact, moreover, that the devoted mis- 
 sionaries of this society have occasion to ar- 
 raign the government as the persevering patron 
 and supporter of idolatry, at the same time 
 that they speak with the highest satisfaction 
 of its generous and noble efforts for the sup- 
 pression of human sacrifices among the mur- 
 derous Khnnds. It is to be regretted that a 
 government which is doing so much to en- 
 
HESbOSTAN. 
 
 439 
 
 courage Christian missions should be any way 
 involved in the support of idolatry. 
 
 For several years past no missionaries have 
 resided permanently at Pooree ; but the mis- 
 Bionaries from several stations have uniform- 
 ly visited this place at the annual festivals, for 
 the purpose o-f distributing tracts and Scrip- 
 tures among the pilgrims, and instructing them 
 by preaching and conversation wherever hear- 
 ers could be gathered. The Balasore station 
 was continued till 1838, when it was suspended, 
 and has since remained without a missionary. 
 Bcrhampore, the most southern station of the 
 General Baptists in Orissa, has been steadily 
 and efficiently sustained. It is an important 
 post, and enjoys the labors of two missionaries 
 and their wives. The people are worshipers 
 of a most detestable idol, and of course are in 
 a state of extreme degradation. A proverb 
 of their own says, " As is the king so are the 
 subjects ; as is the god so are the worshipers." 
 There are three native preachers at this place, 
 in whom the missionaries have great confidence. 
 Two asylums, one for boys and one for girls, 
 are accomplishing great good. They originat- 
 ed in a desire to provide for the children of 
 converted natives, which could not be done 
 except on the mission premises. To these 
 were added such children as were made over 
 to the missionaries, from time to time, by their 
 parents in a season of famine. Some also were 
 picked up in a state of starvation after being 
 abandoned to death. More recently another 
 class were added, viz. ; children rescued from 
 sacrifice among the Khunds, an extremely 
 savage people inhabiting the Goomsur moun- 
 tains in the neighborhood of Berhampore, and 
 who were in the habit of sacrificing great num- 
 bers of children to their stupid and bloody 
 goddess. Through the combined efforts of the 
 government agent, J. P. Frye, Esq., and the 
 missionaries, great numbers of these poor vic- 
 tims have been rescued from the sacrificial 
 knife, and put into the asylums. Mr. Frye 
 has also greatly aided in the establishment of 
 schools among the Khunds themselves, and a 
 rescued Khund, brought up in the asylum, is 
 now superintendent of those schools. It was 
 stated in the report for 1849, that Mr. Frye 
 had been instrumental of rescuing one hundred 
 and six victims from the horrid death to which 
 they were doomed. In the same report the 
 following deeply interesting particulars are 
 given of this before almost unheard of people : 
 " The last full moon had been fixed upon for a 
 very great sacrifice, in anticipation of the 
 agent's arrival, (it is the time for sacrificing 
 through the whole sacrificing country,) but he 
 was happily in the midst of them tAvelve days 
 before the appointed time, and the fearful 
 waste of human life was mercifully prevented. 
 The torture with which the revolting rite is 
 performed in this part of the Khund country 
 exceeds, if it be possible, the worst that has 
 been heard of anywhere. The victim is sur- 
 
 rounded by a crowd of half intoxicated Khunds, 
 and is dragged round some open space, when 
 the savages, with loud shouts, rush on the vic- 
 tim, cutting the living flesh piece-meal from 
 the bones, till nothing remains but the head 
 and bowels, which are left untouched. Death 
 has, by this time, released the unhappy victim 
 from his torture ; the head and bowels are 
 then burnt, and the ashes mixed with grain. 
 The efforts of the government to suppress the 
 abhorred rites of human sacrifice and female 
 infanticide among these barbarous people, and 
 in these hills and jungles, are in a high degree 
 creditable to its character. The revolting rites 
 of sacrifice and female infanticide have prevail- 
 ed from time immemorial in the impenetrable 
 jungles and inaccessible hills of the Khund 
 country. No one can tell where they origi- 
 nated, or compute the frightful waste they 
 have occasioned, but it is estimated that, al- 
 lowing these bloody rites to have prevailed 
 from the commencement of the Christian era, 
 as they were found to prevail when the district 
 was discovered a few years since, on a moder- 
 ate computation the awful aggregate would 
 exceed three millions. We have thought, and 
 talked, and prayed about the Khunds, and God 
 has answered our supplications, though in a 
 way we did not expect. Who can calculate 
 the results of so many being brought under 
 Christian influence ? '' 
 
 A late report states that the brethren at 
 Berhampore have succeeded in obtaining a 
 considerable quantity of fertile land, for a new 
 Christian settlement. The experiment of thus 
 providing for the honorable maintenance of the 
 increasing Christian community, promises to 
 be highly successful. A chapel and mission 
 bungalow have been built for this village, 
 chiefly by the liberality of Mr. Frye, and an- 
 other government officer. The precise number 
 in the church and in the schools at Berham- 
 pore is 'not stated in the recQpt reports. The 
 report for 1853 contains some deeply interest- 
 ing accounts of the Khund boys and girls in 
 the asylums. Fourteen of these rescued chil- 
 dren were this year baptized, after giving evi- 
 dence of sincere conversion to Christ. They 
 have been, like thousands of others, stolen 
 from their parents in early childhood and sold 
 to the Khunds for sacrifice, and but for the 
 eflbrts of the missionaries and government 
 agents, their flesh would have been distributed 
 piece-meal in the fields, instead of coming 
 around the Lord's table to commemorate his 
 love. An older girl of this class was married 
 this year to a young man in the asylum, and 
 both went as teachers to their native hills. 
 Four other young men, who had been rescued 
 and trained in the asylum, also returned to the 
 Khund hills as teachers. During this year, 
 Col. Campbell, the government agent for the 
 suppression of human sacrifices, rescued 120 
 victims. His account ot the rescue of one 
 pretty little girl is full of tender interest. He 
 
440 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 had received information by an anonymous 
 letter that a sacrifice waa to take place about 
 thirty miles from their encampment. A party 
 were sent to nrevent the sacrifice, and by tra- 
 vellug all nignt through the jungle they reach- 
 ed the village mentioned at day-dawn, and 
 found everything ready for the murderous 
 offering. In a short time the people began to 
 assemble, but they were soon surprised by the 
 appearance of the Colonel's party, who made 
 the chief men prisoners, and brought the little 
 victim away. She was ready bound for sacri- 
 fice, and had the detachment been two hours 
 later, would have been cruelly cut to pieces, 
 She had been sold for this horrid death by her 
 own father. The chiefs and head men of the 
 villages have now signed an agreement to 
 abandon the inhuman practice. 
 
 Cuttack, the earliest station of the Society 
 has been uninterruptedly maintained, and is 
 still prosperous. The mission church numbers 
 125. There are two asylums for boys and 
 girls, conducted on the same plan as those at 
 Berhampore. The average number in these 
 asylums, as last reported, was 105, of whom 56 
 were rescued from a bloody death on the hills 
 of Goomsur, Boad, and Chinna Kinedy. Some 
 of the remainder are the orphan children of 
 idolatrous parents, and a large number are the 
 children of native Christians, left fatherless or 
 motherless. Eev. Mr. Sutton and his wife, 
 from Cuttack station, visited the United States 
 about twenty years since, and after laboring 
 much to promote a spirit of Christian missions 
 among their friend", returned again to their 
 chosen field. The two native ministers, of 
 whom mention has already been made, viz., 
 Gunga Dhor and Kama Chundra, have con- 
 tinued to be very faithful, and important help- 
 ers to the missionaries. Honorable mention 
 is also made of two other native preachers. 
 An interesting sketch of these four individuals, 
 with fine specimgns of their style of preach- 
 ing, will be found in the report of the Society 
 for 1852. 
 
 Mulnapore, a considerable town on the bor- 
 ders of Orissa and Bengal, and about 70 miles 
 from Calcutta, was determined upon as a sta- 
 tion by the Mission Conference in 1836, and 
 Mr. and Mrs. Brooks subsequently removed to 
 that place. A neat chapel was built, a con- 
 gregation collected, and the first Hindoo con- 
 verts soon gathered in. Means were also 
 found for the extensive distribution of Testa- 
 ments, and other religious books and tracts. 
 But though the mission promised well, it was 
 determined to remove Mr. Brooks to Calcutta, 
 for the purpose of establishing there a branch 
 mission, and after three or four years Midna- 
 pore was dropped from the Society's reports. 
 
 Gamjam, situated between the Berhampore 
 and Pooree districts, was occupied by a mis- 
 sionary in 1840. It was once a very import- 
 ant and populous European settlement ; but, 
 in consequence of the rapid growth of Cal- 
 
 cutta, and the prevalence of the Gamjam fever, 
 so called, but which was probably the plague, 
 it was forsaken by the Europeans, and the na- 
 tive population was much reduced. At the 
 time of entering upon the mission here, it was 
 believed to be a nealthy place, and prepara- 
 tions were made for permanent labors; but 
 after some two years it was found to be unsafe 
 to remain there, and the station was given up. 
 
 Khunditta, not a great distance from Poo- 
 ree, and near the great Juggernaut road, 
 is first mentioned as a station in the report for 
 1840. But no European missionary has yet 
 been stationed there, though the Society has 
 been often and strongly urged to send one. 
 Much good has been accomplished, however, 
 by native laborers, in proof of which many in- 
 teresting facts might be stated. The station 
 is still continued. 
 
 Piplee, near Pooree, and a place through 
 which nearly all of Juggernaut's pilgrims pass, 
 attracted the special attention of the mission- 
 aries in 1847, and arrangements were soon 
 made for commencing operations there. In 
 1849 two missionaries were sent to this sta- 
 tion, and since that time a church of twenty 
 members has been gathered, and quite a num- 
 ber of the natives have embraced Christianity. 
 Deeply interesting statements, in regard to 
 some of the converts, appear in the journals of 
 the brethren at this place. 
 
 Ckoga is the only remaining station of the 
 Society in India to be noticed. It is described 
 as a secluded and beautiful spot, six miles 
 from Cuttack, and its history is one of extreme 
 interest. It appears that in 1833 two in- 
 quirers came to Cuttack from one of the vil- 
 lages of Choga, having heard much of Chris- 
 tianity, and listened to the missionaries, both 
 on their journeys and in Cuttack. The Gos- 
 pel had deeply impressed them ; but they 
 felt unwilling to give up all for its sake. 
 The village to which they belonged was one 
 of sixteen exempted from the East India 
 Company's regulations, and did not enjoy the 
 benefit of British laws, and therefore the con- 
 verts were subject to confiscation, banishment, 
 and every abuse. But they at length sent a 
 message to the Cuttack missionaries to come 
 and see them, and the interview ended in their 
 deciding for Christ. They were baptized, and 
 in a moment lost caste, were stripped of every 
 possession, and persecuted in the bitterest 
 manner. But the missionaries visited the rajah, 
 and persuaded him to allow the converts to 
 remain, if they would build houses outside the 
 heathen village. This gave strength to other 
 inquirers to come out and profess Christianity, 
 and soon quite a number of families were 
 gathered together. The work went on gradu- 
 ally, and in 1843 one of the missionaries, Mr. 
 Lacey, secured a large piece of ground for a 
 Christian village. It was a hill in the middle 
 of a jungly plain, with high mountains on one 
 side, and was the favorite resort of tigers and 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 Ml 
 
 thieves. A missionary, in describing the place, 
 Bays : " Crowded cities have generally been 
 chosen by missionaries as the scene of their 
 labors ; but here is a secluded mount, far away 
 from the busy haunts of men, where the tiger 
 and the leopard and the bear have remained 
 unmolested for ages, on which the God of mis- 
 sions collects from the rude agriculturists of 
 the district a people for himselK It is cheer- 
 ing, indeed, in the midst of such a dense jun- 
 gle, to see a beautiful chapel and village ; and, 
 as the Sabbath dawns to see the Christians 
 busily preparing on every hand for the solemn 
 services of the sanctuary, and to hear the voice 
 of prayer and praise, from a spot which only a 
 few years since was darkness — dense darkness, 
 the residence of the goddess of thieves." The 
 village church of Choga, in 1853, consisted of 
 sixty-four members, besides eighty-five nominal 
 Christians. They are industrious, strict ob- 
 servers of the Sabbath, and the colony is a 
 source of great satisfaction and encourage- 
 ment to the missionaries. 
 
 The foregoing statements furnish a compre- 
 hensive view of the General Baptist missions 
 in Hindostan, the most interesting in some 
 respects of any in that vast field of idolatry. 
 But the reports are defective in respect to the 
 details needed for a statistical table, and none 
 can be furnished that would be of value. 
 
 [The preceding portion of the article on 
 Hindostan was prepared by Rev. E. D. 
 
 MoORE.] 
 
 Feee-Will Baptist Missionary Society. 
 — ^The first two missionaries of this Society, 
 Messrs. Noyes and Phillips, with their wives, 
 spent their first six months in India as labor- 
 ers in connection with the English General 
 Baptist missionaries. Mr. Phillips superin- 
 tended their bazar schools at Balasore, and 
 Mr. Noyes was in the English mission school 
 at Cuttack. At the expiration of that time, 
 it was mutually agreed that these brethren 
 should enter a separate field, and Sumhhulpore, 
 the capital of a district of the same name, 
 was selected. It lies on the Mahanadi river, 
 250 miles above Cuttack, and contains some 
 15,000 inhabitants. It is the residence of the 
 rajah, and situated in the midst of a populous 
 country. The only European family in the 
 place showed the missionaries every possible 
 kindness, and afforded them much assistance. 
 During the several months spent in building 
 and preparing for a permanent location, the 
 missionaries did what they could in preaching 
 and distributing books. Six starving children 
 were given them, and with them commenced 
 a boarding school system which has been use- 
 ful to the mission. Before they were settled 
 in their new abodes, the missionaries one after 
 another were brought very low by sickness. 
 They were almost destitute of the comforts of 
 life, and their hastily-built houses could not 
 shelter them from the scorching heat. Hav- 
 ing no physician or nurses, they assisted each 
 
 other as well as their debility would permit, 
 Mrs. Noyes on one occasion leaving her sick 
 bed to bleed her husband. After burying a 
 child, and narrowly escaping death themselves, 
 they revived so far as to be put on board a 
 boat, and were floated down to Cuttack. Mr. 
 and Mrs. Phillips were called to bury their in- 
 fant child, which she followed in a few days, 
 and was laid in the grave by her desolate hus- 
 band, attended by the six small children who 
 were her scholars. He was immediately taken 
 sick, and when hope had nearly fled, he too 
 was carried on board a boat, being almost 
 unconscious, and was taken to Cuttack. A 
 few weeks' residence at this place, where they 
 received the most kind attentions, restored the 
 health of the invalids ; but it was decided 
 that they ought not to risk their lives by a 
 return to Sumbhulpore. Balasore having been 
 recently vacated by the return to England of 
 Rev. Mr. Goadly, a General Baptist mission- 
 ary who had previously occupied that station, 
 by the advice of the missionaries at Cuttack, 
 Messrs. Noyes and Phillips located there, and 
 commenced their labors in 1847. Balasore is 
 the capital of the district of the same name. 
 It is a small river port situated on the great 
 pilgrim road leading from the northern provin- 
 ces to Pooree, and lies on the river Brundha- 
 balanga, about eight miles from the sea. It 
 contains about 14,000 inhabitants, and about 
 150 coasting vessels are owned in the place, 
 which are mostly engaged in taking salt to 
 Calcutta. The climate is comparatively cool 
 and healthy. At Balasore the missionaries 
 formed the nucleus of their boarding-schools 
 with the six native children given to them 
 in Sumbhulpore. Others were rescued from 
 death in time of famine, and the number of 
 scholars soon increased to fifty. In 1850 there 
 were seventy-nine merias or Khund children 
 in the two boarding-schools at this station, 
 with a large number of other children who, 
 like themselves, were kidnapped and kept for 
 the purpose of being oficred as sacrifices, in 
 accordance with a horrible custom that pre- 
 vails among the Khund tribes. These merias, 
 as their captors call them, were rescued from 
 their intended immolators by some of the offi- 
 cers of the British government, who commit 
 the rescued victims to the missionaries in the 
 country, by whom they are brought up and 
 educated. A considerable number of the res- 
 cued ones have died of cholera, but the survi- 
 vors are doing well. 
 
 In 1840, Rev. 0. R. Bachelerand wife were 
 located in Balasore, soOn after which ill-health 
 compelled Rev. E. Noyes to return to his na- 
 tive land. Mrs. Bacheler left the station for 
 America in 1845, but died a few days after 
 commencing her journey. Rev. R. Cooley and 
 wife, Miss Lovina Crawford, and Rev. B. B. 
 Smith and wife now occupy this station ; but 
 on account of the ill-health of his present 
 wife. Rev. Mr. Bacheler has been compelled to 
 
448 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 with hor and their children to this 
 country. 
 
 All the missionaries of the Society have 
 been obligwl sometimes to give medicine to 
 the sick and dying heathen ; but in conse- 
 quence of having studied medicine previously 
 to his going to India, Rev. Mr. Bacheler de- 
 vot^ more time and attention to this depart- 
 ment of usefulness than could be consistently 
 done by the other brethren of the mission. 
 Through his efforts a dispensary has been 
 established at Balasore, which, during ten 
 years past, has been extensively patronized. 
 All applicants for medicine have been supplied 
 aa fully as the means furnished would admit, 
 and numerous surgical operations have been 
 performed. In 1850, Mr. Bacheler treated 
 2,407 cases, besides performing 126 operations 
 in surgery. As the patients were mostly poor, 
 the medicines and services were bestowed gra- 
 tuitously. These labors for the physical com- 
 fort of destitute and suffering idolaters were 
 performed at times set apart for such services, 
 so as not to allow the duties of the physician 
 to interfere with those of the missionary. On 
 an average he devoted only an hour daily to 
 his patients. He also formed a Medical Class 
 of the native converts, to whom he lectured 
 daily. The students, by taking copious notes 
 of his lectures, were furnished with a compe- 
 tent guide in treating the ordinary diseases of 
 the country, which, if they are studious and 
 industrious, will afford them a comfortable 
 support, and make them respected among their 
 countrymen. Twelve young men have attend- 
 ed this class, six of whom have completed the 
 course of two years' study, and are now useful 
 in their calling. Mr. Bacheler's medical la- 
 bors were considered beneficial to his mission- 
 ary work, as they secured the confidence and 
 esteem of many to whom he could otherwise 
 have had no access. 
 
 Early in 1840, Rev. Mr. Phillips took a por- 
 tion of the boarding-school and some of the 
 native converts at Balasore, and went with 
 them to Jellasore, where he commenced a new 
 station. Jellasore is situated on the great 
 pilgrim road, previously named in this article, 
 thirty miles north of Balasore, and in the midst 
 of a densely populated country, one hundred 
 and twelve miles from Calcutta. It is rather 
 a collection of villages than a compact town. 
 Nominally the district in which Jellasore is 
 located belongs to the province of Bengal, but 
 its inhabitants are mostly Oriyaa, numbering 
 about half a million of souls. There is but 
 one European family within thirty miles of the 
 station, and the missionary has toiled alone 
 more than thirteen years. During this period 
 he buried his second wife, who was eminently 
 prepared for usefulness in the boarding-school. 
 A day school and a boarding-school have been 
 in operation a considerable portion of the 
 time at this station ; and some four years ago 
 a hospital was established there, mostly for the 
 
 benefit of heathen pilgrims, and large numbers 
 of the sick have received medical aid. The 
 annual number of patients has usually varied 
 from four hundred to five hundred. The hos- 
 pital was erected for the benefit of the poor ; 
 and like the dispensary at Balasore, it has 
 been sustained by subscriptions in India. The 
 natives have given small sums for its support, 
 but the principal contributions were made by 
 p]uropeaus. 
 
 Some six months after his arrival in India, 
 in 1844, Rev. J. 0. Dow located in Miduapore. 
 It is the capital of a district in the province 
 of Bengal, and contains some 20,000 inhabit- 
 ants, and the district is peopled by about one 
 and a half millions of Bengalis. The town is 
 about seventy-five miles from Calcutta, and the 
 climate is unusually healthy. A short time 
 before Mr. Dow located in Midnapore, the 
 place was vacated by the General Baptist mis- 
 sionaries. Three years of excessive toil broke 
 him down, when he was compelled to return to 
 his native land a confirmed invalid. There are 
 some twenty European families in the town, 
 who would do considerable towards the sup- 
 port of a missionary, were one sent there. 
 Three tim'es has this promising station been 
 occupied by different missionary societies, and 
 as many times has it been abandoned for want 
 of laborers. 
 
 In 1852, a new interest was commenced at 
 a place called Santipur, which is about six 
 miles from Jellasore, and near several large 
 villages. Two hundred acres of land have 
 been secured, on which a Christian settlement 
 has been commenced, especially for the benefit 
 of the Santals. There is on the lot a small 
 Santal village, and there are others near it. 
 Some thirty or forty acres of the land are un- 
 der cultivation, and the rest is covered with 
 jungle or brush wood. The settlement is re- 
 garded as the outer court of the temple, into 
 which Gentiles may be admitted. It is de- 
 signed to afford refuge and protection to inqui- 
 rers, while in their transition state from hea- 
 thenism to Christianity, where the Santals 
 may be secure from the interference and op- 
 pression of the landholders, and native Chris- 
 tians enjoy the fruit of their labors, and wor- 
 ship God unmolested. Though the heathen 
 are permitted to settle on the premises, rules 
 are adopted forbidding all idolatrous practices, 
 enjoining moral duties, the observance of the 
 Sabbath, attendance at worship, &c. 
 
 A Sabbath-school is held every Lord's-day 
 afternoon, and a day school has been opened 
 for the heathen children, from the adjacent 
 villages and the children belonging to the sta- 
 tion. It is designed to be in part a farming 
 community, and several of the native Chris- 
 tians are already cultivating small lots for agri- 
 cultural purposes. 
 
 During his residence in Jellasore, Rev. Mr. 
 Phillips has labored considerably for the bene- 
 fit of the Santals, spending what time he could 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 443 
 
 spare from his other duties, in visiting their 
 villages, acquiring their language, getting a 
 few of their children into school, and giving 
 the people a written language. Having no 
 colleague he has been able to do but little in 
 this interesting and important work, but what 
 he has done has not been lost. Several of the 
 Santal youth were brought into a school 
 which he established in Jellasore, where they 
 were taught their own language, reduced to 
 system, and written for the first time in a 
 book. But little religious concern was ob- 
 served among them, till 1847, when some of 
 the scholars began to manifest a deep interest 
 in spiritual things. Several of them soon ob- 
 tained a hope in Christ, two of whom promise 
 to be useful to the mission and their country- 
 men, either as preachers or school teachers. 
 Though alone and engaged much of the time 
 in Oriya labors, Mr. Phillips has been enabled 
 to translate the Gospel by Matthew into San- 
 tal, and is now engaged in translating Mark 
 into the same language. He has written a 
 Santal primer of 24 pp. ; a sequel to it of 44 
 pp. ; and an Introduction to the Santal lan- 
 guage, comprising a grammar, reading lessons, 
 and a vocabulary of nearly five thousand 
 words. It contains 190 pp. He has also 
 written a tract and geography in Oriya. Rev. 
 Mr. Noyes prepared an Oriya tract and Rev. 
 Mr. Bacheler a medical guide, both in Oriya 
 and Bengali. These are the principal works 
 that the missionaries have published. Mrs. 
 Phillips has recently arrived in this country. 
 She left Orissa with her children, partly with 
 a view of educating them here, and partly on 
 account of her ill-health. Her husband de- 
 signs to follow his family in a year or two, and 
 after recruiting himself, return with part of 
 them to his present field. Nothing occurring 
 to prevent it, he will then engage more ear- 
 
 nestly in the work of translating the Scrip- 
 tures into Santal. Appropriations are ex- 
 pected from the American and Foreign Bible 
 Society to aid him in the effort. 
 
 The following account of the results of the 
 mission is taken mostly from Rev. 0. R. 
 Bachelor's work, entitled Hindooism and 
 Christianity in Orissa : 
 
 1. The Gospel has been preached as exten- 
 sively as two or three missionaries, assisted by 
 four native preachers, could do it in a district 
 inhabited by more than a million souls. A 
 good impression has been made ; the minds of 
 the people have been in a measure prepared 
 for the reception of the Gospel ; and obstacles 
 to the work that at first seemed to be almost 
 insurmountable, have begun to disappear. 
 
 2. The Bible, either as a whole or in sepa- 
 rate parts, has been extensively circulated. 
 Good has been done in this way, and also by 
 the extensive scattering of religious tracts 
 among the people, multitudfis of whom have 
 read what was put into their hands. 
 
 3. Some seventy-five young men, women, 
 and children are receiving a religious educa- 
 tion in the boarding-schools, where several of 
 the most prominent members, preachers, ph}^ 
 sicians and teachers have been instructed, who 
 will exert an important influence in Orissa's 
 evangelization. 
 
 4. Four native preachers have been raised 
 up, who are qualified for extensive usefulness 
 in this great work. 
 
 5. Two churches have been organized, both 
 numbering some forty-five members, gathered 
 from the darkness and degradation of heathen- 
 ism. Some who were converted at the stations 
 have left and united with other churches, and 
 others have been removed to their heavenly 
 rest. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 Missionaries and Assistant 
 Missionaries. 
 
 i 
 
 Scholars. 
 
 Ministers. 
 
 l&y Teachers and 
 others. 
 
 Boarding. 
 
 Day. 
 
 
 
 
 American. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.2 
 
 <i 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 .2 
 1 
 
 4 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 b 
 
 1 
 
 Orissa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sumbhulpore* . . 
 
 Balasore 
 
 Jellasore 
 
 Midnapore * . . . . 
 Santipur ...... 
 
 Totals .... 
 
 1836 
 1837 
 1840 
 1844 
 1852 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 30 
 17 
 
 36 
 
 8 
 
 29 
 
 60 
 13 
 
 
 115 
 13 
 
 13 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 47 
 
 44 
 
 29 
 
 73 
 
 
 151 
 
 Unoccupied. 
 
 Rev. E. Hutchins. 
 
444 
 
 IIINDOSTAN. 
 
 American 1*rk.«^hyterian Missions.— The 
 missions of the I'resUytcriun Uoard m India were 
 OOiniuenctHl iu lb33. The first missionaries 
 were the Kev. Messrs. William Keed and John 
 
 C. Lowrie, and their wives, who arrived at 
 Calcutta iu October of that year. 'J'hey were 
 sent out by the Western Foreign Missionary So- 
 ciety, witli instructions to select a station in some 
 part of the northern provinces, if this should 
 appear to be expedient, after consulting with 
 Christian friends in that city ; otherwise, tiiey 
 were at liberty to proceed to any otlier part ot 
 India, or of the Eastern world. 'J'hey were 
 greatly favored iu obtaining information and 
 counsel from several gentlemen who were 
 largely acquainted with the country, particu- 
 larly the Kev. William II. Tearce, of the Eng- 
 lish Baptist mission, the llev. Alexander Dutf, 
 
 D. D., of the Scotch mission, and Sir Charles 
 Trevelyau, K. C. B., one of the Secretaries in 
 the political deportment of the government, who 
 had himself resided in the Upper Provinces. 
 As the result of these inquiries, it was con- 
 sidered advisable to proceed, as originally con- 
 templated, to the remote north-western part of 
 the country ; and the city of Lodiana, on the 
 river Sutlej, one of the tributaries of the Indus, 
 was chosen as the station to be first occupied. 
 
 The principal reasons for choosing the O'pper 
 Provinces as their general field of labor, were 
 these: The urgent need of missionaries and 
 teachers in that part of the country ; its being 
 in a great measure unoccupied as missionary 
 ground ; the superior energy of the people, as 
 compared with the inhabitants of the Lower 
 Provinces; the relation of the north-western 
 parts of India to other Asiatic countries west 
 and north, which suggested the hope that the 
 Gospel might be eventually extended from 
 . thence into the heart of Central Asia ; the 
 vicinity of the Himalaya Mountains, affording 
 places of resort to missionaries whose health 
 might become impaired by the hot climate of 
 the plains. Besides general considerations of 
 this kind, there were some special reasons, 
 arising out of the liberal views concerning the 
 education of the natives, which were held by 
 European gentlemen of influence at some of 
 the north-western cities, and the desire of some 
 of the native chiefs to obtain for their sons the 
 advantages of education in the English lan- 
 guage. As an example of both. Sir Claude 
 Wade, the political agent of the government 
 at Lodiana, had set on foot a school for the in- 
 struction of native youth in English, which 
 was attended by sons and other relatives of 
 certain Sikh Sai'dars or chiefs, and of the 
 Afighan exiles then living at Lodiana. This 
 school was afterwards transferred to the mis- 
 sion, and the generous support of its founder 
 was continued until his official duties called 
 him to a distant part of the country. It is 
 still in successful operation. 
 
 The missionaries recognized with grateful 
 feelings the hand of Providence, in directing 
 
 the time of their arrival in India at the precise 
 juncture of circumstances which had turned 
 the attention of Christian observers with spe- 
 cial interest to the north-wevstern provinces. 
 If they had reached India a year sooner, their 
 choice of a field of lab(jr might have been a 
 very different one ; or, if a year later, they 
 would probably have found the ground at Lo- 
 diana already occupied, and that perhaps by 
 some educational institution from which the 
 Christian religion would have been excluded. 
 They also recognized with thankfulness the 
 favor that was shown to them in the eyes of 
 some of the most influential persons in the 
 country ; so that although they had landed at 
 Calcutta, feeling uncertain what their recep- 
 tion might be, they were cordially aided in 
 their work by those who were in positions 
 greatly to promote or to prevent its success ; 
 while nothing could exceed the friendly inter- 
 est in their mission which was manifested by 
 all the European missionary brethren with 
 whom they became acquainted. Thas, having 
 favor in the sight of God and his people, their 
 missionary field was chosen and their plans of 
 work were laid. 
 
 How often do we see that the Lord's thoughts 
 are not our thoughts, neither his ways our 
 ways I Signally was this shown in the early 
 history of this mission. Only one of the first 
 company of missionaries was permitted to see 
 this carefully and well chosen field of labor ; 
 two of the others were early called to their 
 rest — Mrs. Lowrie and Mr. Reed — both by 
 consumption ; and Mrs. Reed had accompanied 
 her husband on the voyage homeward, which 
 he did not live to complete. The remaining 
 member of this company reached the Ltation at 
 Lodiana in November, 1834, and -entered on 
 his duties ; but a few days afterwards he was 
 taken with dangerous illness. For several 
 weeks the mission seemed likely to become ex- 
 tinct, by his removal from the scenes of this 
 life ; and, on his partial recovery, he was told 
 by his medical attendants that he must not 
 attempt to remain in the hot climate of India. 
 A year longer, however, was spent by him in 
 the charge of a school, preaching, and making 
 journeys and inquiries, to gain information for 
 the use of the mission and the church at home ; 
 thus doing the work of a pioneer. In January, 
 1836, he left Lodiana, and Calcutta in April, 
 on a visit to this country for health ; but 
 eventually the hope of returning to the mission 
 was, for the same reason, reluctantly aban- 
 doned. 
 
 In the mean time, the Rev. Messrs. James 
 Wilson and John Newton, and their wives, 
 hatl arrived at Lodiana in December, 1835, 
 and entered upon enlarged labors in the ser- 
 vice of Christ. Besides the school and other 
 duties, they took charge of a printing-press in 
 1836, which has been a valuable auxiliary in 
 the missionary work. 
 
 The third company of missionaries, the Rev. 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 445 
 
 Messrs. James- R. Campbell and James Mc- 
 Ewen, and Messrs. Jesse M. Jamieson, Wil- 
 liam S. Roofers and Joseph Porter, and their 
 wives, reached Calcutta in March, 1836. It 
 was Mr. Lowrie's privilege to welcome these 
 brethren on their arrival, and to aid them in 
 preparing for their journey to the Upper Pro- 
 vinces. Their meeting was of deep interest, 
 as may readily be supposed, especially to one 
 who had seen so severe bereavements and so 
 many dark hours in the short history of the 
 mission. It was now apparent that these afflic- 
 tions were not intended to discourage the sup- 
 porters of the mission, but to teach them their 
 dependence on divine grace alone ; to purify 
 their motives ; to chasten and strengthen their 
 zeal ; and thus at the latter end to do them 
 good, so that by their means God would im- 
 part the greatest blessings to those who were 
 sitting in darkness and the " region and shadow 
 of death." 
 
 The brethren of this new reinforcement soon 
 proceeded on their journey to Lodiana, but 
 Mr. McEwen was led, by what appeared to be 
 indications of the will of Providence, to stop 
 at Allahabad, a large city at the junction of 
 the Ganges and the Jumna, which has ever 
 since been occupied as a missionary station. 
 Mr. McEwen's labors were crowned with pleas- 
 ing success, and a church was formed in Jan- 
 uary, 1837, with 13 members. Besides preach- 
 ing, he gave a part of his time to the charge 
 of schools, in which he was greatly assisted by 
 his equally devoted wife ; but they were not 
 permitted to continue long in these encourag- 
 ing labors. On account of the loss of health, 
 he was compelled to leave India in 1838 ; and, 
 after serving the cause of Christ as a pastor, 
 in the State of New York, he was called to 
 his rest in 1845. 
 
 On the arrival of the other members of this 
 third company at the end of their journey, in 
 1836, two new stations were formed. One of 
 these was at Saharunpur, 130 miles south-east 
 from Lodiana ; the other was at Sabathu, 
 110 miles north-east from the same place, in 
 the lower ranges of the Himalaya Mountains, 
 at an elevation of about 4000 feet above the 
 level of the sea. The unordained brethren of 
 this company were graduates of colleges, in 
 preparation for the work of the ministry. They 
 went out as teachers, but with the expectation 
 of prosecuting their theological studies, and 
 they were afterwards ordained to the sacred 
 office. 
 
 A church was organized at Lodiana in 1837; 
 and it is remarkable that two of its first three 
 native members have since become valuable 
 laborers in the missionary work ; one as a min- 
 ister of the Gospel, and another as a teacher. 
 This must be viewed as a signal proof of God's 
 favor towards this infant church, and as a hap- 
 py example of the way in which the Gospel is 
 to be more and more extended in heathen 
 countries. The schools at Lodiana, Saharun- 
 
 pur, and Sabathu, were vigorously carried for- 
 ward, and the brethren were engaged in preach- 
 ing, distributing the sacred Scriptures and re- 
 ligious tracts, making journeys to places where 
 large assemblages of natives were collected on 
 festival occasions ; but little more will be at- 
 tempted here than to present a chronological 
 outline of the arrivals of the missionaries, with 
 some of the leading facts in their work. 
 
 The fourth company of missionaries, consist- 
 ing of Rev. Messrs. H. R. Wilson, Jr., John 
 H. Morrison, and Joseph Caldwell, Mr. James 
 Craig, teacher, and Mr. Reese Morris, printer, 
 and their wives, arrived at Calcutta in April, 
 1838. There they met Mr. and Mrs. McEwen, 
 on their return homewards, and were greatly 
 aided by them in making arrangements for 
 their journey. One of their number, however, 
 had already reached the last stage of her pil- 
 grimage ; Mrs. Morrison was taken to her rest 
 before leaving Calcutta, after a brief illness of 
 cholera. Her afflicted companions proceeded 
 to their several stations : Mr. Morrison to Alla- 
 habad, to join the Rev. James Wilson, who 
 had taken charge of the station on Mr. Mc- 
 Ewen's removal ; Mr. Morris to Lodiana ; and 
 Messrs. Caldwell and Craig to Saharunpur. 
 Mr. H. R. Wilson, while proceeding to the station 
 at Lodiana, was led by Providence to stop at Fut- 
 tehgurh, on the Ganges, two hundred miles above 
 Allahabad, a town which had been pointed 
 out by some of the earlier brethren as eligible 
 for a missionary station. Here, with an inter- 
 esting family of orphan children, a part of 
 whom were placed under his care by a pious 
 English physician, and assisted by Gopeenath 
 Nundy, the teacher previously employed in 
 their instruction, Mr. Wilson began important 
 labors, which have been steadily prosecuted 
 ever since, with evident tokens of the favor of 
 Heaven. 
 
 In February, 1839, the Rev. Messrs. Joseph 
 Warren, John E. Freeman, ^ and James L. 
 Scott, and their wives, arrived at Calcutta, 
 and became connected, the first two with Alla- 
 habad, and the last with Futtehgurh. A 
 printing-press was sent out with Mr. Warren, 
 which, under his efficient superintendence, be- 
 came an invaluable means of promoting the 
 influence of the mission. In November of this 
 year, Mrs. Caldwell, at Saharunpur, was called 
 to her rest. 
 
 In December of the next year, the Rev. 
 Messrs. John C. Rankin and William H. 
 McAuley, and their wives ; the Rev. Jos. Owen 
 and Miss Jane Yanderveer, teacher, arrived at 
 Calcutta. Mr. Owen joined the Allahabad 
 Mission, and the rest proceeded to Futtehgurh. 
 In this year, 1840, the work of translating the 
 Sacred Scriptures and preparing other reli- 
 gious books and tracts, began to be reported 
 as occupying much of the time of some of the 
 missionaries. One of these works was a trans- 
 lation of the Gospel of John from the original 
 Greek into Punjabi, the language of the Sikhs; 
 
446 
 
 IIINDOSTAN. 
 
 laotber was the Confession of Fiilth of the 
 PrasbyteriaD Church into IJiiuIustnni, with 
 the Scriptnrc references at the bottom of the 
 
 ^In the ycAT 1841, churches were organized 
 At Sahurunpur and Futtchgurh, and twcnty- 
 teven native members were reported at all the 
 stations. 
 
 The Rev. Messrs. Levi Janvier and John 
 Wray, and their wives, reached India in Jan- 
 nary, 1842, and were stationed — the former at 
 Lodiana, and the latter at AllaHttbad. Messrs. 
 Morrison and Caldwell were married. Mrs. 
 Porter was called this year to her rest. Dr. 
 Willis Green reached India in November ; 
 spent a few months at Lodiana ; and returned 
 home, the climate not suiting his health. 
 Churches were organized at Saharunpur and 
 Futtehgurh, and the year was further signal- 
 ized by the organization of three Presbyteries 
 under the instructions of the General Assem- 
 bly, composed of the ministers in each mission, 
 and taking their names, like the missions, 
 from the leading city, or the station first occu- 
 pied, in the bounds of each : Lodiana, Fur- 
 rukhabad, and Allahabad. The brethren at 
 Saharunpur being ecclesiastically related to 
 the General Synod of the Reformed Presbyte- 
 rian Church, were constituted by their Synod 
 into a separate Presbytery. Their relations 
 to the Board as missionaries are the same as 
 those of the other brethren, and the intercourse 
 between them has been mutually pleasant and 
 beneficial. A part of their support has always 
 been furnished by churches of the Reformed 
 Synod. 
 
 The year 1843 was marked by the arrival in 
 India of the Rev. John J. Walsh and his wife, 
 who were connected with the Furrukhabad 
 mission ; the death of the second Mrs. Morri- 
 son ; the return to this country of Mr. Rogers 
 and family, on account of Mrs. Rogers's ill- 
 health ; and of Mr. Morrison, also for health ; 
 the forming of a new station at Mynpurie, 40 
 miles west of Futtehgurh ; the licensure of the 
 native assistants, Golok Nath and Gopeenath 
 Nundy, by the Presbyteries of Lodiana and 
 Furrukhabad ; and the steady advance of the 
 missionary work. The church members re- 
 ported at Allahabad in January were nine 
 Americans, three Europeans, eight East In- 
 dians, and eleven natives ; in all thirty-one. 
 
 In 1844, Mr. Owen was married. Gopeenath 
 Nundy was ordained. Parts of the Bible, in a 
 revised translation, were printed at Lodiana in 
 Hindustani. A translation of the Koran into 
 the same language, by a Maulavi, with an In- 
 troduction and Notes, refuting its errors, by 
 the Rev. J. Wilson, was published at Allahur 
 bad, marking quite a new era in Mohammedan 
 literature. A larger number of tracts and 
 books were distributed in the Lodiana Mission 
 than during any former year, and all the 
 branches of missionary laVjor were faithfully 
 carried forward. I'he number of church mem- 
 
 bers reported at Futtehgurh this year was 
 twenty-seven, of whom sixteen were natives. 
 
 The next vear witnessed the death of Mr. 
 Craig at Sanarunpur, and of Mrs. Jamieson 
 at Sabathu ; the return to this country of Mr. 
 Morris on account of health ; the destruction 
 by fire of the printing-press, book-repository, 
 &c., at Lodiana, causing the loss of about 
 $10,000 worth of property, including upwards 
 of 90,000 copies of parts of the Holy Scrip- 
 tures and of tracts. In general, the labors of 
 the missionaries were continued without change. 
 In November of this year, the first meeting of 
 the Synod of North India was held at Futteh- 
 gurh. Important questions, concerning the 
 kingdom of Christ in India, received the earn- 
 est consideration of its members. 
 
 In 1846, Mr. Jamieson visited this country, 
 to provide for the education of his motherless 
 children ; Mr. H. R. Wilson and family also 
 returned, on account of Mrs. Wilson's health ; 
 and Miss Vanderveer came home also on ac- • 
 count of impaired health ; Mr. Morrison having 
 regained his health, returned to India with his 
 wife ; Mr. Rudolph, a German teacher, and his 
 wife, who had spent some years in India, be- 
 came connected with the Lodiana Mission, 
 and Mr. Rudolph was licensed to preach the 
 Gospel. A new station was formed at Agra ; 
 and a number of the members of the church 
 at Allahabad having removed to that city 
 upon the transfer of the government offices, 
 they were reorganized as a church, with other 
 members, making in all fifteen, under the min- 
 isterial charge of the missionaries. At Fut- 
 tegurh, the number of church members re- 
 ported was thirty-four. At Allahabad, a 
 church building, 78 feet by 45, was erected ; 
 while, to the communion of the church itself, 
 it was stated that from its commencement 
 seventy-four persons had been admitted, fifty- 
 one of whom were received on the profession 
 of their faith. The Government college at 
 Allahabad was transferred to the mission, and 
 the Christian religion and books became a 
 part of the daily study of the scholars. 
 
 Early in 1847, the Rev. Messrs. Augustus 
 H. Seeley and David Irving and their wives, 
 and Mr. Robert M. Munnis, licentiate preach- 
 er, arrived at Calcutta, on their way to the 
 Furrukhabad Mission. Mr. Jamieson, on his 
 return to his field of labor, with his wife, 
 reached Calcutta in November. Mr. Camp- 
 bell with his family arrived in this country on 
 a visit, on account of his wife's health. Mr. 
 Rudolph and Golok Nath were ordained as 
 Evangelists by the Presbytery of Lodiana, 
 and Mr. Munnis by the Presbytery of Furruk- 
 habad. A new station was formed at Jalan- 
 dar, in the Punjab, about thirty miles west of 
 Lodiana, which was occupied by the Rev. Go- 
 lok Nath and a native teacher. Churches 
 were organized at Sabathu and Jalandar. 
 Some new members were admitted to most of 
 the churches ; and the number reported from 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 447 
 
 all the stations, except Agra and Saharunpur, 
 was 107. 
 
 In January, 1848, the Eev. A. Alexander 
 Hodge and his wife, and the Kev. Charles W. 
 Forman, arrived in India. The former joined 
 the Allahabad, and the latter the Lodiana 
 Mission. In November, Mr. Campbell and 
 his wife reached Calcutta, on their return to 
 Saharunpur, accompanied by the Rev. John 
 S. Woodside and his wife, of the Reformed 
 Presbyterian Church, destined to the same sta- 
 tion. Mr. Julius F. UUman, a German teach- 
 er, who had lived for some years in India, be- 
 came connected with the Furrukhabad Mis- 
 sion, and was licensed to preach the Gospel by 
 the Presbytery. Mr. Porter returned to this 
 country on a visit with his motherless children, 
 and Mr. Rankin and his family came home on 
 account of his ill-health. Mrs. Scott was 
 called to her rest while on her return to this 
 country for her health. A new station was 
 formed at Ambala, a city almost equally dis- 
 tant from Lodiana, Saharunpar, and Sabathu, 
 which was occupied by Mr. Jamieson and a 
 nativ3 catechist. Some new members were 
 admitted to the churches, and a few were sus- 
 pended from church privileges. The second 
 meeting of the Synod of North India was 
 held at Agra, in December of this year. The 
 minutes of this meeting, and also of the first 
 meeting, are published in the Foreign Mission- 
 ary Chronicle of November, 1849. They will 
 be read in future ages, as well as at the present 
 time, with deep interest. 
 
 In the next year, Mr. Porter returned, with 
 his wife, to his field of labor ; Mrs. Rudolph 
 and Mrs. Freeman were taken to their rest ; 
 and Messrs. Irving and AVray and their fami- 
 lies returned to this country on account of 
 health. Mr. Ullman received ordination from 
 the Presbytery of Furrukhabad, and John 
 Hari, a native catechist, was licensed to preach 
 the Gospel by the Presbytery of Allahabad. 
 A new station was formed at Labor, the chief 
 city of the Punjab, which was occupied by 
 Messrs. Newton and Forman. A church was 
 organized at Ambala, and a special work of 
 grace was manifested at Futtehgurh, as the 
 result of which thirty-three members were ad- 
 mitted to the communion of the church. The 
 whole number of church members reported 
 this year was 16 . 
 
 The year 1850 was marked by the arrival 
 in India of the Rev. James H. Orbison, to 
 join the Lodiana Mission ; the Rev. Messrs. 
 David E. Campbell and Robert S. Fullerton 
 and their wives, to join the Furrukhabad Mis- 
 sion ; and the Rev. Messrs. Lawrence G. Hay 
 and Horatio W. Shaw and their wives, to be 
 connected with the Allahabad Mission ; and 
 by the return to this country of Mr. Hodge 
 and his wife, on account of her health, and of 
 Mr. Freeman, whose health had also become 
 impaired. The number of church members re- 
 ported this year was 209. 
 
 Messrs. J. Wilson and "W. H. McAuley and 
 their families came home in 1851, on account 
 of health. Mr. Freeman, with his wife, re- 
 turned to his field of labor, and Messrs. Ru- 
 dolph and Ullman were married. The num- 
 ber of church members reported this year was 
 231. 
 
 In 1852, Mr. Scott made a visit to this 
 country on account of his children, and Mr. 
 Newton and his family came home on account 
 of his health. The Rev. Robert E. Williams 
 embarked for India, and arrived at Agra early 
 in the following year. Schools were now 
 established at this city for the education of the 
 children of persons of mixed parentage, Euro- 
 pean and native, who are commonly called 
 East Indians, a class of growing numbers, in- 
 telligence, and influence. The members of the 
 church, according to the report of this year,^ 
 were 255. 
 
 The buildings required for their use were 
 purchased, with the aid of very handsome 
 donations from the late lamented Governor of 
 the North-western Provinces, the Hon. J. 
 Thomason, and other English friends. One 
 feature of the missionary cause in India should 
 be mentioned in this connection, as truly grati- 
 fying. From the beginning the missionaries 
 have enjoyed the confidence of many of the 
 English residents in that country — civilians, 
 officers in the army, and others. With the 
 best knowledge of the work in progress, they 
 have considered it their privilege to promote 
 it by their sympathy, influence, and very lib- 
 eral gifts ; and thus have they greatly encour- 
 aged the missionary brethren, gratified the 
 friends of missions in this country, and pro- 
 moted the cause of the Redeemer. 
 
 In 1853, Mr. Scott, with his wife, returned 
 to India ; Mr. Orbison was married ; and Mrs. 
 Seeley and Mr. Porter were called to their 
 rest. The work of the missions continued to 
 be carried forward with fidelity and zeal. 
 
 The preceding sketch conveys a very inade- 
 quate view of the work of evangelization 
 which our brethren in India have been permit- 
 ted already to accomplish. Besides preaching 
 statedly at their various stations, they are 
 accustomed during the cold months of each 
 year to make journeys into parts of the coun- 
 try not yet occupied, in order to make known 
 the way of life by public discourses, conversa- 
 tion, and the distribution of the Scriptures 
 and other Christian books. To thousands of 
 towns and villages has the Gospel been pub- 
 lished on these tours. They are accustomed 
 also to attend the Melas held at particular 
 times and places. These are assemblages of 
 the natives for religious ceremonies, but are 
 attended by many for purposes of trade or 
 amusement—so that they may be regarded as 
 a kind of fair. They are held at places ac- 
 counted holy, such as Hardwar, where the 
 Ganges enters the plains, and Allahabad, 
 where the Gauges, the Jumna, and according 
 
448 
 
 niNDOSTAN. 
 
 to the native tradition a third river, invisible, 
 unite their streams. Immense crowds, amount- 
 ing to hundreds of thousands, including many 
 pi^rims and visitors from the most distant 
 parts of the land, attend the more celebrated 
 of these Melas ; and there are numerous others 
 of less note, attended by people from the 
 neighboring towns and villages. They afford 
 opportunities for widely disseminating the 
 knowledge of the Gospel. 'Jlie good influence 
 exerted in this way will not be known until 
 the great day reveals it, but sometimes it is 
 signally displayed. An aged Brahmin had 
 made a pilgrimage from Jubbelpore to attend 
 the Mela at Allahabad, a journey of several 
 hundred miles, to wash away his sins in the 
 Ganges. There he heard a discourse by one 
 of the missionaries, which shook his faith in 
 Hindooisra. He returned home without hav- 
 • ing had an interview with the missionary, and 
 was led by the pers^aasion of a Qazi to study 
 the Koran ; but he found in Mohammedanism 
 no rest for his troubled mind. Having by 
 some means obtained a portion of the Scrip- 
 tures, he carefully studied its lessons, and 
 taught them to his only daughter. At this 
 point, an English officer became acquainted 
 with him, and found that he had renounced his 
 own religion, and was sincerely seeking a 
 knowledge of the Christian faith in the face 
 of many difficulties. A Hindi Bible for him 
 was requested from one of the missionaries at 
 Agra, and thus his history became known to 
 the missionary brethren. 
 
 Another means of promoting a knowledge 
 of the Christian religion has been afforded by 
 the press. Numerous tracts and catechisms, 
 in various Hindoo dialects, and some larger 
 works, have been published. The Way of 
 Life, by Dr. Hodge, translated into Hindus- 
 tani ; another work, with a similar title, by a 
 German missionary ; a translation of the Ko- 
 ran into Hindustani, with notes in refutation 
 of its errors ; the Westminster Confession of 
 Faith ; a volume of hymns ; revised editions 
 of the Scriptures, in whole or in part ; a trans- 
 lation of the books of Genesis, Exodus, chap- 
 ters 1-20, and Psalms, and most of the New 
 Testament, into Punjabi, by Messrs. Newton 
 and Janvier, are among the larger works is- 
 sued by the press. The whole amount of 
 printing at Lodiana and Allahabad from the 
 beginning is over one hundred millions of 
 pages, of which the sacred writings form a 
 large portion. By means of these Christian 
 books a large amount of truth, subversive of 
 idolatry and Mohammedanism, and setting 
 forth the true religion, has been widely difiused. 
 Some striking examples of good which has 
 been done in this way, sometimes in places far 
 remote from the stations of our brethren, have 
 been reported in their letters. 
 
 Still another important agency has been the 
 schools of the missions. These have been sup- 
 ported from the beginning, it having been con- 
 
 sidered from the commencement of the work 
 an object of the greatest importance to train 
 up a native ministry ; and the number of 
 scholars has gradually increased until, aa 
 stated in the report of 1854, about two thou- 
 sand nine hundred of the native youth are now 
 under instruction. A few of the scholars are 
 in elementary schools, but most of them are in 
 schools of a higher grade ; and all of them 
 have been brought in greater or less degree 
 under the influence of Christian instruction 
 and example. A large proportion of them 
 have become convinced of the folly, and in 
 some measure of the sin, of idolatry. Many of 
 them are prepared to acknowledge that Chris- 
 tianity is the true religion ; some of them have 
 become the professed followers of our Lord, 
 and a few are laboring in various ways — one 
 as an ordained minister, others as teachers, ca- 
 techists, and Scripture-readers — to bring their 
 countrymen to the knowledge of Jesus Christ 
 as the Saviour of sinners. 
 
 The preaching of the Gospel in these mis- 
 sions has not been in vain, as the preceding 
 statements have shown. It is with sincere 
 thanksgiving that we can refer to still another 
 and more impressive proof of the blessing of 
 God on the labors of his servants, — the Chris- 
 tian life and the dying testimony of some of 
 the converts, to the power of divine grace. An 
 affecting and beautiful little memoir was pub- 
 lished by Mr. Warren, a few years ago, of 
 Jatni, a member of the church at Allahabad. 
 She was the daughter of a Brahmin, but she 
 became a child of God. In all the relations 
 and events of life, her deportment was exem- 
 plary. And when called at length to pass 
 over Jordan, she was supported by a good 
 hope through grace. Mr. Warren, with ten- 
 der caution, had apprised her of the probable 
 termination of her disease ; and he adds, " I 
 was delighted to find that she had thought of 
 it, and had come to feel willing that God 
 should do with her, as to life just as he 
 pleased. I questioned her closely, and set 
 death and the judgment before her plainly; 
 but her nerves were firm, her eye clear, and 
 her voice calm and steady : ' I know Christ, 
 and can fully and completely trust him in all 
 things. He keeps my mind in perfect peace.' 
 I saw her often, and always found her the 
 same." She was enabled to resign her soul, 
 her husband and her child to the care of her 
 Father in heaven, and at the early age of 
 twenty-two she departed joyfully to be with 
 Christ. Another example hardly less striking 
 was presented in the Christian death of a na- 
 tive catcchist at Saharunpur. His missionary 
 friend, Mr. Campbell, who had frequent and 
 most pleasing interviews with him on his 
 death-bed, gives a very interesting account of 
 his religious views and hopes : " I asked hira 
 if he was afraid to die ? ' No, sir,' he said, ' I 
 am not now afraid. ... I am now fully recon- 
 ciled to the will of God. I do not wish to live 
 
flINDOSTAN. 
 
 M9 
 
 longer in this sinful world.' On being asked 
 where his hopes for salvation were placed, he 
 replied emphatically, ' On Christ alone : he is 
 the only Saviour, and I know he will not dis- 
 appoint my hopes ; ' and then, bursting into 
 tears, he said, ' sir, how much I owe to you ! 
 You are the means of leading me to Christ, 
 and of instructing me and saving my soul.' 
 This was so much more than I had expected, it 
 was too much for me, and we both wept toge- 
 
 ther. At that moment I thought that this was 
 more than enough to compensate me for all 
 the little trials I have ever been called to en- 
 dure as a missionary. I could have changed 
 places with dear Samuel, to enjoy his happi- 
 ness and assurance of hope." Examples like 
 these are precious seals of the favor of Heaven 
 towards the missionary work. — Lowrie's Manur 
 al of Missions. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 LODIAWA, 
 
 FUBBUKHABAD. . . 
 
 Agra 
 
 AiLAHABAD. 
 
 Names of Stations, 
 
 Lodiana .... 
 Saharunpur . 
 Sabathu . . . . 
 
 Ambala 
 
 Jalandar.... 
 
 Labor , 
 
 Dehra 
 
 Futtegurh. . , 
 Mynpurie . . . 
 
 Agra 
 
 Allahabad . . . 
 Futtehpore.. 
 Ida 
 
 Total 
 
 1 
 li 
 
 Missionaries & Ass't Missionaries. 
 
 i 
 
 
 SCHOLABS. 
 
 
 Ministers. 
 
 Lay Teachers and 
 others. 
 
 Boarding. 
 
 Day. 
 
 
 
 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Americaiv 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 b 
 
 ^ 
 
 Male. 
 
 Female 
 
 1834 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 19 
 
 
 18 
 
 231 
 
 
 249 
 
 1836 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 24 
 
 9 
 
 
 150 
 
 ., 
 
 159 
 
 1836 
 
 
 
 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1848 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 90 
 
 
 90 
 
 1847 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 .. 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 250 
 
 
 250 
 
 1849 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 395 
 
 
 395 
 
 1853 
 
 1 
 
 ., 
 
 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 ^, 
 
 
 
 
 
 1838 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 97 
 
 18 
 
 15 
 
 640 
 
 45 
 
 718 
 
 1843 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 220 
 
 
 220 
 
 1846 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 118 
 
 50 
 
 168 
 
 1836 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 47 
 
 
 18 
 
 415 
 
 30 
 
 463 
 
 1852 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 .. 
 
 2 
 
 ,. 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 
 100 
 
 1853 
 
 •• 
 
 
 
 
 •• 
 
 2 
 
 •• 
 
 
 
 120 
 
 
 120 
 
 23 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 26 
 
 266 
 
 27 
 
 51 
 
 2729 
 
 125 
 
 2932 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society. — For many 
 years Dr. Coke had desired to enter India as a 
 missionary field, but the keys of India were in 
 the hands of the East India Company, and they 
 kept them with the same jealous care as they 
 did the keys of their counting-houses. The 
 Doctor had often sounded individuals of the 
 Company, but without effect. The island of 
 Ceylon, not being in the Company's charter, 
 became the object of Dr. Coke's attention with 
 the hope that it might prepare the way for 
 entrance into India. Finding certain gentle- 
 men, high in ofiBce, willing to encourage the 
 Gospel in the East, Dr. Coke became satisfied 
 of his call to go, provided he could find six 
 young men of hopeful talents willing to devote 
 their lives to the work. He waited on the 
 late D^k Buchanan, and consulted him on the 
 subject. And when his intentions became 
 known, five preachers already in the work, 
 expressed their readiness to go. To these 
 were added Benjamin Clough, a local preacher. 
 The conference could not but approve of the 
 plan, as Providence obviously opened the way ; 
 the Doctor being willing if necessary to bear 
 the expense of the outfit, which amounted to 
 above £6000. After the conference of 1813, he 
 assembled the six brethren in London, and pro- 
 cured them a Portuguese tutor, together with 
 a printing-press and types, as one or two of 
 the missionaries understood the art of printing. 
 29 
 
 Their books, clothes and other necessaries, 
 were furnished suitable for a permanent resi- 
 dence in India. Having established them- 
 selves in Ceylon they soon turned their thoughts 
 to the continent of India, where God seemed 
 to be opening their way ; and it was decided 
 that Mr. Lynch, the senior missionary, should 
 proceed to Madras, which he did, Jan. 25, 1817, 
 taking with him letters of introduction from 
 persons of the highest consideration at Colum- 
 bo, to their friends at the presidency, which 
 insured for him a kind reception. His piety 
 and zeal soon endeared him to all who were 
 interested in the progress of Christianity, and 
 Madras became to him, in a short time, a 
 scene of considerable usefulness. 
 
 3fr. ^ Mrs. Horner arrived in Bombay, in 
 September, 1817, and the day following were 
 kindly received by Sir Evan Nepean, the gov- 
 ernor. On the same day he waited upon the 
 Bishop of Calcutta who expressed his good 
 opinion of the zeal and conduct of the Wesley- 
 an missionaries in Ceylon, and wished Mr. 
 Horner equal success at Bombay. Mr. Horner 
 immediately applied himself to the study of the 
 Mahratta language under the tuition of a Brah- 
 min. He soon acquired the language, and 
 began to preach to the people : he also gather- 
 ed a school of fifty boys, to whose instruction 
 he devoted himself. In 1819 the English and 
 Malabar school of Mr. Lynch was attended by 
 
450 
 
 HINDOSTAJN. 
 
 150 cbiidrcD, and Uie Mobratta school of Mr. 
 Horner had 180. lu consequence of applica- 
 tion from Europcttu residents at Bangalwc and 
 S$rinsxtyatam, in the presidency of Madras, 
 Mr. HooU and Mu if Mrs. Mowatt were ap- 
 pointed by the missionary committee to proceed 
 to those stations, Mr. Close having been pre- 
 viously directed to assist Mr. Lynch at Madras. 
 On the 19th May, 1820, Mr. and Mrs. Mowatt, 
 and Mr. Hoole embarked at Gravesend, in the 
 Tanjore, a private trader, in company with 
 Sir Richard Ottely, Chief-justice of Ceylon, Mr. 
 and Mrs. Browning, of the Church of England 
 Missionary Society, and Adam Muuhi Rathana 
 and Alexander Derma Rama, two Budhist 
 priests, who had been educated and baptized 
 in England by Dr. Adam Clarke, under the 
 eanction of the Methodist Missionary Commit- 
 tee. On the 5th of September, the vessel an- 
 chored off the river, near Batticaloa. The day 
 following having landed some baggage, they 
 weighed anchor, but had not sailed far before 
 they were overtaken by a tremendous storm, 
 in which the vessel was set on fire by lightning, 
 ond they escaped with the loss of everything 
 on board. In 1821 both the missionaries were 
 obliged to leave Bombay on account of afflic- 
 tion. But at Madras the brethren were ena- 
 bled to labor with considerable encouragement, 
 where they had then 147 persons united with 
 them in church fellowship, and 4 schools which 
 were well attended, instructions being communi- 
 cated in Tamil and English. In 1823 Seringa- 
 vaiam was added to the list of stations, Mr. Hoole 
 Deing placed there. So that this year they 
 were regularly established at Madras, where 
 they had four missionaries, at Bangalore, where 
 they had one, at Negapatam, where they had 
 two, and one at Seringapatam ; the number of 
 members being 191, composed of English, Por- 
 tuguese, Dutch, and Hindoos. They had 
 erected nine or ten chapels, with as many 
 schools; one of the chapels and two of the 
 schools being at -S^. Thomas's Mmnt. In 1827 
 the schools had increased to 16, with 542 child- 
 ren, and the church members to 251, but part 
 of this increase of the members had arisen from 
 the^ number of pious soldiers in regiments 
 which had been just landed in India, on ac- 
 count of the war then raging between the Bri- 
 tish and the Burmese, during which Dr. Judson 
 and his devoted wife were suffering such " fiery 
 trials," at the hands of the latter power. In 
 proportion as the natives began, on conviction, 
 to attach themselves to their societies, the 
 usual trials are narrated by the missionaries. 
 Many of the converts had to endure the keen- 
 est persecution, and all the injuries connected 
 with loss of caste, and expulsion from their 
 families ; but by their faith and patience they 
 showed, that they willingly " counted all things 
 loss for the excellency of the knowledge of 
 Christ Jesus their Lord." 
 
 In 1830 the number of missionaries was 
 nine ; of schools 25 ; and of scholars 1,000, of 
 
 I whom many were females ; with 314 members 
 in Society. This year Calcutta was added to 
 the list of stations, with Messrs. Fercivai and 
 liodson as the laborers there. They operated 
 chiefly among the Portuguese and Bengalee 
 inhabitants of that city, and soon found a 
 wide and promising field of labor, both among 
 the young and the adult population. Two 
 years afterwards, however, the committee in 
 London considered that this mission had not 
 presented those results which would warrant 
 its continuance. The station was given up, 
 Mr. Percival being sent to Ceylon, and Mr. 
 liodson to Bangalore. 
 
 A native ministry was raised up from tho 
 ranks of the local preachers, who cooperated 
 with their European brethren in preaching 
 Clirist to their countrymen. The printing-press 
 was, meanwhile, at work, diffusing a Christian 
 literature among the people, and quietly under- 
 mining their systems of falsehood and pollu- 
 tion, which had stood for ages, only to depravo 
 and oppress their wretched adherents. 
 
 In the year 1837, the Rev. Jonathan Crow- 
 ther was appointed General Superintendent of 
 the India Missions. He was accompanied by 
 the Rev. Messrs. Best, Jenkins, Male, Griffith, 
 and Fox, and their families. After shipwreck 
 and much suffering, they at length arrived in 
 safety. It is worthy of remark, as an exempli- 
 fication of the advantages derived to the mis- 
 sionary cause from the Theological Institution, 
 founded by the Wesleyans only three years 
 before*, that these five missionaries having been 
 students in the Theological Institution, had 
 gained such a knowledge of the lamil and 
 Canarese languages before their embarkation, 
 that on their arrival in India, four of them 
 immediately commenced preaching to the peo- 
 ple in Tamil. This year several conversions 
 took place among the natives, and they were 
 received into the Church of Christ by public 
 baptism at Madras. One of these cases justi- 
 fies a more extended notice. Arumaga Tarn- 
 hiran was a native of the province of Tanjore, 
 in Southern India, so much celebrated for 
 numerous and splendid temples, and for a pop- 
 ulation inveterately attached to caste and 
 heathen superstitions. He was born of highly 
 respectable parents, and had the advantages of 
 what is esteemed among his countrymen, as a 
 good education. He was zealous abov#many 
 his equals, in seeking knowledge, but appears 
 never to have been satisfied in the degradation 
 of heathen worship. At a very early age he 
 lost his parents, and became united to the sect 
 of Siva, under a celebrated gooroo, one of his 
 relatives. After making pilgrimages of many 
 thousand miles, he came back to the land of 
 his birth. There he had time for reflection. 
 In those moments when he brought to mind 
 what he had passed through, and how all his 
 companions that had set out with him on those 
 weary pilgrimages had perished, some by fevers, 
 some by wild beasts, and he only left alive, his 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 451 
 
 spirit was' agitated, and he groaned within | (looking at the magistrate with great respect 
 himself with disquietude of conscience. He and firmness,) offered me an asylum, a place in 
 
 conversed with several native Christians, and 
 heard the Gospel from the lips of its ministers. 
 He felt the appeals of Christians against the 
 besotted maxims and usages of a defiling sys- 
 t'em of heathenism, whose vain sacrifices and 
 bloody orgies proclaim in every high place 
 that its worship is that of devils, and not of 
 the true God. The conversion of one of his 
 pupils was the means of leading to the first 
 interview between Sambrian and Mr. Carver. 
 His intelligent mind soon opened to convic- 
 tion, and he at once entered upon an investi- 
 gation of the claims of Christianity, and the 
 result was his conversion. He soon evidenced 
 his sincerity by sacrificing all for Christ. 
 This aroused the bitterest opposition. Several 
 of his former disciples, assisted by other hea- 
 then, attempted to carry him off by force j 
 and an appeal had to be made to the protec- 
 tion of the law. In the court-house, before 
 the magistrate, and a multitude of his fellow- 
 countrymen, he "witnessed a good confession." 
 He appeared in the court in his heathen robes 
 for the last time, only that he might be iden- 
 tified there as the head of his order. On that 
 occasion he rose and addressed the magistrate 
 as follows : 
 
 " Sir, I am a man well known in Madras, 
 having resided in this city since 1824. I was 
 born in the province of I'anjore. I was united 
 when very young to the sect of Siva, in whose 
 robes I appear before you this day. For many 
 years I was engaged in traveling by way of 
 Delhi, and other great cities, to the holy places 
 of the Hindoos. I dwelt three years at Casi 
 in Bengal, thence I traveled along the coast 
 to Madras, by way of Juggernaut. I visited 
 all the holy places in the south of India, and 
 went by Ramiscram to Ceylon, visited Mannar, 
 Colombo, Candy, the holy places called Kat- 
 teragan, on the east side of Ceylon, and re- 
 turned by Batticaloa, Trincomallee, and Jaffna, 
 to the continent. Fifty years of my life have 
 been thus spent. I sought all heathen books, 
 but found ^wthingfor the soul. I have taught 
 many hundred disciples, as you know," (for the 
 magistrate knew him well, and congratulated 
 the missionary on having such a convert.) 
 He continued : " I found nothing in Iieathen 
 booh, in heathen temples, in heathen ceremo- 
 nies to satisfy the soul. I met with this minis- 
 ter, (pointing to Mr. Carver,) and he opened to 
 my understanding the way of salvation, the 
 treasures of the Scriptures : they suited my 
 dissatified heart ; I went again and again to 
 the missionary ; I determined to abandon 
 heathenism. By heathenism I got money in 
 abundance, and honors. I was worshiped by 
 my disciples ; but my soul sunk back at the 
 blasphemy against the God of whom I had 
 heard. I knew not how to escape from my 
 heathen friends and disciples, who were about 
 ibe on every side, when this minister, sir, 
 
 the Mission premises. There,' sir, I went of 
 my own free choice, there I was when the 
 heathen made the violent attempt to carry me 
 away by force, there I wish to remain and be 
 baptized in the name of Jesus; to teach others 
 also of this Saviour, as some little attempt to 
 remedy the evils of having taught so many 
 heathen disciples a false way in time past." 
 
 The circumstance of one who had occupied 
 so high a station renouncing his honors and 
 emoluments, and subjecting himself to reproach 
 and persecution, for the sake of Christianity, 
 awoke the spirit of inquiry ; and his Poem, in 
 which he contrasted Christianity and heathen- 
 ism, was eagerly inquired after, and exten- 
 sively read. Three editions in a few weeks 
 could not satisfy the demand. Every one 
 wanted a copy; they were carried far and 
 wide by the natives, sung in the streets, 
 and even reaS by the children; until the 
 spirit of the heathen was excited to opposi- 
 tion. The American missionaries at Madras 
 printed an edition of 10,000 copies, besides an 
 edition published by the Madras Religious 
 Tract Society. From 80,000 to 100,000 copies 
 were distributed in a few months. The effect 
 produced by the conversion of this distin- 
 guished individual was so great, that a Eu- 
 ropean missionary, who had spent forty years 
 in India, and who was present at his baptism, 
 declared " he had not seen any thing like it be- 
 fore." The missionaries diligently improved 
 the increasing opportunities, which this event 
 had afforded, for prosecuting the work among 
 the natives. 
 
 In 1838, Goobee, in the Mysore country, 
 was occupied by the Wesleyan missionaries, 
 and Mr. Hodson appointed "to that station. 
 In a few months after he was enabled to open 
 a mission in the city of Mysore. In the older 
 stations in India there had been an increase in 
 the number of professing Christians, several 
 of the heathens were baptized, the public ser- 
 vices were weH attended, and the schools were 
 in a prosperous condition. 
 
 About this time the various societies in 
 South India were greatly agitated by the sub- 
 ject of caste; but the universal decision of 
 the missionaries of all denominations was, that 
 this odious distinction should be abolished, so 
 far as the church of Christ was concerned. In 
 this year arrangements were made to establish 
 on the Coromandel coast an institution for 
 training a native ministry, from the operation 
 of which much assistance was expected in ad- 
 vancing the work of God. 
 
 In 1839, the Rev. Messrs. Arthur, (now one 
 of the General Secretaries of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society,) Squarehridge, Garret, and 
 Pope, were sent out to reinforce the Indian 
 Mission, and extend its operations by planting 
 new stations. Mr. Arthur was sent to Goobee 
 and Mr. Squarehridge to assist Mr. Hodson at 
 
HINDOSTAJ^. 
 
 Mysore A printing-press waa also torwarded 
 to Bangalore, to assist the missionaries to meet 
 the incronsed demand for Christian books and 
 tracts in the Canarcsc languages. In 1841, 
 this mission experienced a painful reduction 
 in its strength and efficiency. Mr. Square- 
 bridge died of cholera at Coonghull, Mr. Fox 
 was also called to his reward ; while Mr. 
 Cryer and Mr. Arthur were both obliged to 
 return home on account of the failure of their 
 health ; the committee, however, were enabled 
 during the next year partially to supply the 
 vacancies thus created, by the appointment of 
 Messi's. Hardy and Sanderson. This year a 
 perfect font of Canarese type was prepared in 
 London for the use of the mission. The head- 
 school in Mysore (the capital, with a popula- 
 tion of 70,000,) is patronized and supported 
 by the RajaJi, much to the displeasure of many 
 of the Brahmins of his court- He has shown 
 much interest in some of the operations of the 
 Mission ; and it may be hoped that this exam- 
 ple of tlie relaxation of Hindoo bigotry will 
 be followed by many of his subjects. In this 
 year, also, the officers of the Second Kegiment 
 of Native Infantry erected a chapel at the 
 French Rocks Cantonment, about five miles 
 N. E. of Seringapatam, and presented it, 
 through Mr, Hodson, to the Society. 
 
 Mr. Crowther having to return home in 
 1843, the Rev. Joseph Roberts succeeded him. 
 The next year three more missionaries were 
 sent out. 
 
 The opposition awakened about this time 
 among the Brahmins and others, showed that 
 the missionaries were making a decided im- 
 pression upon the minds of the population, and 
 this was further evident by the progressive in- 
 crease in the number of professing Christians, 
 and in the eagerness with which the people at 
 large availed themselves of the instruction 
 afforded in the Mission schools. The press at 
 Bangalore was meanwhile diligently employed ; 
 the amount of its issues this year in the Canor 
 rese, Sanscrit, and English languages was over 
 843,000 pages ; in the next year it was 922,000 
 pages ; and in 1851 and 1852 it was nearly 
 two millions of pages in each year ; and over 
 100,000 of the Canarese people, with more or 
 less regularity, had the Gospel preached to 
 them by the missionaries. In 1849 a Canarese 
 Brahmin of high caste, with several other con- 
 verts, were baptized in Mysore. 
 
 Aft^r thirty years of devoted labor among 
 the Hindoos, in Ceylon and Continental India, 
 the Rev. Joseph Roberts was called from his 
 work to his eternal rest. Mr. Roberts received 
 his first appointment to the East in the year 
 1818. His vigor of mind made the acquisition 
 of the languages in which he had to labor a 
 work of comparative ease ; and his frank and 
 generous nature endeared him to his colleagues, 
 and to all classes of the inhabitants of Ceylon, 
 for whose spiritual benefit and salvation he 
 labored for many years with faithfulness and 
 
 zeol. In 1833 he published a most interesting 
 volume, entitled, " Oriental Illustrations of the 
 Sacred Scriptures," which reached a second 
 edition, and has been very much read and ad- 
 mired, as a remarkable chapter in the history 
 of the human mind, and as throwing light 
 on numerous passages of holy Scripture, which 
 has brought out their meaning with peculiar 
 beauty and force. He also executed some 
 translations from the Tamil language, which 
 were published by the Oriental Translation 
 Society in London, connected with the Royal 
 Asiatic Society for Great Britain and Ireland, 
 of which society he was a corresponding mem- 
 ber from an early period of his residence in the 
 East. In the year 1843 he succeeded the Rev. 
 Jonathan Crowther as General Superintendent 
 of the Society's Mission in the Presidency of 
 Madras. In this vast field he found ample em- 
 ployment for his sanctified energies, and ad- 
 dressed liimself to his work with the utmost 
 zeal and devotion. In preaching the word of 
 God both to Europeans and natives, and in the 
 performance of pastoral duties, he was indefati- 
 gable, as well as in the superintendence of 
 schools for children, and catechumen classes for 
 young people. Though necessarily engaged 
 in the management of the temporal affairs of 
 the mission under his direction, he was an ac- 
 tive member of the Committee of the Madras 
 Auxiliary Bible Society, and of its Translation 
 Committee, and of several other religious and 
 charitable associations. In addition to his 
 other engagements, he prepared a lucid and 
 comprehensive "Treatise on Caste, and its 
 bearing on Christianity and Missions," which 
 was published in England a few years ago ; he 
 also contributed to the " Wesleyan Methodist 
 Magazine," and other periodicals, several valu- 
 able essays on Paganism and Popery, and on 
 other subjects connected with the work of mis- 
 sions. The labors and anxieties connected 
 with the important position he held, are sup- 
 posed to have weighed down his frame and 
 shortened his earthly career. He sunk into 
 the grave, exhausted mainly by the toils and 
 conflicts of the missionary life. His excellent 
 widow, Mrs. Roberts, continued in India to 
 render the aid of her valuable experience and 
 services in the superintendence of the native 
 female schools. 
 
 As an evidence of the impression produced 
 in favor of education upon the minds of the 
 population of Mysore, it may be stated that an 
 urgent petition from that city was presented 
 to the Wesleyan Confereuve, held in Bradford 
 in 1853, requesting the establishment of a first- 
 class English school among them. This re- 
 markable and interesting document occupied 
 many folios of India paper of a large size, 
 neatly backed with blue ribbon. It was a 
 petition from the Hindoo and Mohammedan 
 inhabitants of the city of Mysore, written in 
 the Canarese language, with an English trans- 
 lation, and signed by 3,340 persons, in nine 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 453 
 
 different languages. It represented 
 their great desire to have an Eng- 
 lish school for their childi^en, and 
 requested that one might be estab- 
 lished ; stating that, by so doing, 
 " great fame and merit would accrue 
 to their benefactors." If a qualified 
 teacher and half the expenses could 
 be provided by the Conference, 
 the bearer of the document enga- 
 ged on behalf of the natives of My- 
 sore, that they would raise the re- 
 mainder. This accomplished, a 
 monthly grant of thirty pounds 
 would be given by the liberality of 
 the Mysore Commissioner. It was 
 listened to with deep interest and 
 attention by the Conference, and 
 the request granted. Perhaps this 
 is the first instance in which an as- 
 sembly of Christian ministers has 
 received a similar petition from such 
 a number of heathens and Mussul- 
 mans, requesting the benefits of edu- 
 cation at their hands, and it re- 
 minds us of the prayer of the Man 
 of Macedonia, " Come over and help 
 us." The money for this interesting 
 object was subscribed, and a valua- 
 ble school apparatus provided and 
 taken to India at the commencement 
 of this year, by Rev. E. J. Hardey. 
 At present. Rev. D* Sanderson is 
 busily employed in London, with 
 Mr. Watts, the type-founder, in pre- 
 paring new fonts of Canarese type, 
 for the use of the printing establish- 
 ment in Bangalore, which will fur- 
 ther increase its efficiency, — already 
 so great, that few provincial offices 
 in England send out more beautiful 
 work, either as to typography or 
 binding. The labors of Mr. Gar- 
 rett in that department have been 
 of distinguished value ; and Mr. 
 Sanderson, by able translations of 
 very recondite native works, has done 
 much to secure to the Christian 
 press a command of the literature of 
 the country. 
 
 The printing establishment in 
 Bangalore was never so efficient, and 
 never promised such extensive use- 
 fulness as at the present. During 
 the year it has issued 59,448 publi- 
 cations. It is impossible by human 
 arithmetic to calculate the real bene- 
 fit which is conferred upon India by 
 this one establishment. — Crowtliefs 
 History of Methodism ; Hook's Mis- 
 sion to Madras ; W. Arthur's Re- 
 miniscences of a Mission to the My- 
 sore ; The Wesleyan Missionary No- 
 tices, and the Annual Reports. — Rev. 
 W. Butler. 
 
 
 
 •gaxag 
 H;oq JO sJBpqog 
 -Ava JO jaquin^ 
 
 •siooqog 
 -jC'Bfj JO Jaqoinjij 
 
 •saxos q^oq 
 JO SJ'BioqDg-q^'Bq 
 -q^S J" .laqtnn^ 
 
 •S|ooqos-qiiBq 
 -q^g; JO a^qaIn^J 
 
 •diqsaaquiap^ 
 joj iBux uo 
 
 •SJaqraojv qojnqQ 
 pajtpajooy pu^ 
 W^k JO aaqtxin^ 
 
 } 
 
 » re 
 
 
 
 ir 
 
 •S^Q'BJSISSV 
 
 puB sau^noissTi^ 
 
 •saOB^tl-Suiqo'Bajj 
 J9q;o JO aaqran^ 
 
 •spdBqo 
 JO jaqmn^ 
 
 O O 0> CO 
 
 O .(O'O 
 O .0 CO 
 CO iH r-l 
 
 § :§^ 
 
 § :\ 
 
 CO^li •<* (M 
 
 •* CO 00 C-l 
 
 to i» © CO 
 
 n<:^ 7-* T^ 
 
 6 
 
 ij cS g^ bo 
 t3 fcn C U a 
 
454 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 Welsh Calvinmhtio Methodist Missionary 
 SociKTY.— This society sent out Rev. Thomas 
 Jones, in November, 1840, who commenced a 
 station at Cherrapuuji, in the north-east of 
 Bengal, near Sylhet, among the Kassias, one 
 of the hill tribes. Other missionaries follow- 
 ed, and in 1850 another station was com- 
 menced at Sylhet. In 1852, the number of 
 communicants at the two stations was twenty- 
 eight. Rev. W. licwis has translated the 
 four Gospels and the Acts into Kassias ; a 
 translation of Matthew, by Mr. Jones, hav- 
 ing been previously printed in the Roman 
 character. — W. B. 
 
 American Baptist Mission among the Te- 
 Looaoos. — The country of the Tdoogoos lies on 
 the western coast of the Bay of Bengal, and 
 stretches nearly 800 miles from the northern 
 
 ?art of the Carnatic to the borders of Orissa. 
 'he Teloogoos or Telin|?is are believed to be 
 descendants of an ancient and once powerful 
 race of India, and though now subject to dif- 
 ferent jurisdictions, they are united by a com- 
 mon language and common traditions as one 
 people. They ai-e generally estimated at up- 
 wards of ten millions in number, of whom 
 three millions dwell within the Northern Cir- 
 cars, or collectorates of the presidency of Ma- 
 dras, while the remaining part are under the 
 rule of the Nizam of Hyderabad, or Golcon- 
 dah. Beyond this region also they are widely 
 scattered over the territory of Southern India, 
 especially in the districts of Tanjore, Mysore, 
 and the city of Madras. The religion of the 
 Teloogoos is Brahminism, and the system of 
 caste is established among them, separating 
 them into classes and ranks, between which in- 
 tercourse is impossible. Each trade or occu- 
 pation is a caste by itself, and its members, 
 with their families and kindred, cannot become 
 connected, nor can they even associate with 
 those belonging to any other. 
 
 The mission of the American Baptist Mis- 
 sionary Union among this people owes its ori- 
 gin to the representations of Rev. Amos Sut- 
 ton, of the English General Baptist Mission in 
 Orissa, during his visit to the United States in 
 1835. The London Missionary Society had 
 stationed its earliest missionaries in India 
 among the Teloogoos, but in consequence of 
 their death and other causes, the whole region 
 had been abandoned. Their missionaries and 
 others dwelling in the neighboring countries, 
 had prepared a gi-ammar and dictionary of the 
 language, and had translated the entire Bible, 
 of which the New Testament, and some books 
 of the Old, had been printed in two editions, 
 one at Serampore and one at Madras. The 
 language was said to possess unusual copious- 
 ness and variety, and the people to be among 
 the most interesting and intelligent to be found 
 in India. 
 
 On the 22d of September, 1835, Rev. Sar 
 muel S. Da^ and his wife, and Rev. E. L. 
 Abbott having been appointed missionaries 
 
 among these people, sailed for Calcutta in the 
 same ship which bore Rev. Mr. Malcolm, the 
 agent of the Board appointed to visit the mis- 
 sions of the East, and Rev. Mr. Sutton, who 
 was returning to Orissa. Mr. Abbott was, 
 on his arrival at Calcutta, transferred to the 
 Karen mission in Burmah, while Mr. and Mrs. 
 Day immediately proceeded to Vizagapatam, 
 where they entered upon the study of the lan- 
 guage, with the aid of the books prepared by 
 the missionaries of former years. After pass- 
 ing several months in acquiring the language 
 and observing the condition of the country and 
 its populatipn, Mr. Day, with the advice of 
 Rev. Mr. Malcom, at length, in March, 1837, 
 fixed his residence at Madras, which, though it 
 was already the seat of more than one mission- 
 ary, yet had none for the large Teloogoo popu- 
 lation of the city and its suburbs. With the 
 aid of a native convert whom he employed, he 
 established three schools, containing about 
 seventy scholars, and assisted as far as he was 
 able, in maintaining public worship in the na- 
 tive language, and also preached in English 
 and distributed tracts and portions of the 
 Scriptures to those of the population who 
 could read. In 1838, a church of sixteen 
 members, English, Eurasian, Hindoo, and 
 Burman, was organized at Madras, and a 
 branch of it, comprising soldiers of an English 
 regiment, was also organized at Bellary. The 
 preaching in English was understood by mul- 
 titudes of the native population, and the mem- 
 bers of the schools soon evinced their desire to 
 acquire the language in preference to any 
 other branch of knowledge — a fact which 
 plainly indicates that the people not unfro- 
 quently attend the missionary schools, merely 
 for the purpose of gaining some worldly ad- 
 vantage. The experience of missionaries in 
 India on this subject is rapidly convincing 
 them that teaching English is not a part of 
 their appropriate duty. 
 
 Mr. Day was obliged to prosecute his mis- 
 sion alone, and was constantly embarrassed 
 for the want of the sympathy and cooperation 
 of an associate; but the Board now found 
 themselves exceedingly restricted in funds, and 
 unable to send another missionary to his aid. 
 During the first four years of his residence in 
 the country he had baptized many soldiers of 
 the English regiments and other English resi- 
 dents of the country. He had also baptized 
 several Eurasians and Tamils, but none of the 
 Teloogoos had thus far embraced Christianity. 
 In these circumstances he decided, in the sum- 
 mer of 1839, to seek another station for tho 
 mission. He at length fixed upon Nellore, 
 and removed thither, with his family, in Feb- 
 ruary, 1840. Having rented of the govern- 
 ment a lot, and erected a suitable building to 
 serve as a mission-house and a zayat, he imme- 
 diately commenced the daily reading of the 
 Scriptures, and preaching on the Sabbath. A 
 few weeks after his settlement at Nellore, he 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 m 
 
 was joined by Kev. Stephen Yan Husen and 
 his wife, who had been appointed to the mis- 
 sion, and in September of the same year he 
 baptized the first Christian convert from the 
 Teloogoos. In a visit which Mr. Day subse- 
 quently made to Madras he found the church 
 which he had left there scattered, and to a 
 great extent, fallen from the faith which its 
 members professed. It was without a pastor, 
 and its members had ceased to meet together, 
 and though others were waiting for baptism, 
 Mr. Day recommended the dissolution of the 
 church and the organization of another at Ar- 
 cott, which should embrace all its living mem- 
 bers and receive the converts who were about 
 to be baptized. 
 
 The great external hindrances which the 
 missionaries from the beginning encountered 
 among the Teloogoos, arose from the system 
 of caste, which holds in its iron bondage all 
 classes of the people in Hindostan. They could 
 not receive the missionary into their dwellings 
 lest they should lose caste. They would allow 
 their children to attend schools for religious 
 instruction, if given by the missionary, or by 
 unconverted native teachers, but not by Chris- 
 tian natives. Children may be sent to the 
 missionary to be taught, but he may not visit 
 them in the families to which they belong. 
 
 It has been the general practice of mission- 
 aries of the various Christian denominations 
 to translate the Scriptures according to the 
 authorized English version, a practice which 
 requires the transfer of certain words from the 
 original Greek without translating them. The 
 Baptist missionaries, however, both of England 
 and America, have generally felt obliged to 
 translate these words, especially the word bap- 
 tize, according to their own convictions of its 
 meaning. The adoption of this view by the 
 Board of Managers as a rule for the guidance 
 of its missionaries, gave rise to the action on 
 the part of the American Bible Society, which 
 resulted in the formation of the American and 
 Foreign Bible Society, an institution which 
 was founded and has been supported by a por- 
 tion of the Baptists of the United States. The 
 copies of the Scriptures which Messrs. Day 
 and Yan Husen distributed in Madras and 
 Nellore had been furnished by the Madras 
 Bible Society, and printed at that city. But 
 this society could not print a translation of 
 the Scriptures made by the Baptist mission- 
 aries without abandoning their principles, and 
 the missionaries, on the other hand, could not 
 adopt any other without disregarding the in- 
 structions of the managers. This embarrass- 
 ment was experienced in all the Baptist mis- 
 sions, and however much a circulation of the 
 Bible in different translations is to be regret- 
 fed, it yet seems to be an inevitable result of 
 the existing diversity of views in the Christian 
 world. 
 
 In 1841 Messrs. Day and Yan Husen, seeing 
 the necessity of an additional missionary and 
 
 a printing-press, urged the matter in a special 
 communication upon the attention of the 
 Board, but in the condition of the treasury at 
 that time, it was impossible to comply with 
 their request. In 1843 three additional con- 
 verts were baptized, and the number of schools 
 both in the city and the adjoining districts 
 was considerably enlarged. But the health of 
 the missionaries now began to decline, and the 
 mission was soon afterwards crippled, and sub- 
 sequently doomed to an interruption of several 
 years in consequence of the disability and ab- 
 sence of the missionaries. Mrs. Day, whose 
 health first failed, was recruited after a brief 
 absence. Mr. Van Husen was obliged to re- 
 turn to the United States in 1845, and has 
 never recovered his health. Mr. Day was 
 suddenly stricken down in October of the same 
 year, and was obliged to hasten away when 
 too ill to make any adequate arrangements 
 either for his personal comfort or the contin- 
 uance of the mission. The charge of the pro- 
 perty and the care of the church at Nellore 
 and the schools were all committed to an Eu- 
 rasian assistant, while Mr. Day returned to the 
 United States. 
 
 In 1848 the Missionary Union, after having 
 long considered the question, finding that Mr. 
 Day had now recovered his health, instructed tho 
 Board to reestablish the mission. In October 
 of that year Mr. Day, in company with Eev. 
 Lyman Jewett and Mrs. Jewett, sailed for Cal- 
 cutta as missionaries at Nellore, where they 
 arrived in the following April. The missions 
 had been for more than three years wholly 
 dependent on the care of a native assistant, a 
 care which at best could not but be very inad- 
 equate to its maintenance and progress. The 
 church was scattered but not destroyed, and 
 though some had forsaken their faith, a salutary 
 discipline was productive of the restoration of 
 others. The schools were soon reassembled, 
 public worship resumed, books and tracts dis- 
 tributed, and the whole agency of the mission 
 again put in operation. The missionaries also 
 took an early opportunity to attend several 
 heathen festivals of this country, at which they 
 met thousands of people from various parts of 
 India and preached to them the doctrines of 
 the Gospel. These labors were productive of 
 much inquiry among the people, and of confes- 
 sions which are constantly made to the mis- 
 sionaries, that Brahminism is an imposture 
 and is destined soon to pass away. There 
 have also been several apparent conversions, 
 and two have been baptized; but the field 
 occupied by the mission, it must be admitted, 
 still continues to be one of great promise rath- 
 er than of fruit. The missionaries have work- 
 ed on assiduously beneath the protection of the 
 English government, among a people of una- 
 sual intelligence, among whom great preparer 
 tions would appear to have been made for the 
 spread of the Gospel. The enervating heat of 
 the climate has repeatedly prostrated their 
 
456 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 energies and oblipod them to withdraw for a 
 season to recniit, and at length in June, 1852, 
 Mr. Day was compelledby ill-health to return 
 to the United States. Mr. and Mrs. Jewett 
 have since been in sole charge of the mission. 
 The latest reports represent them as still pro- 
 secuting their accustomed work, experiencing 
 the greatest kindness and receiving a heartv 
 cooperation from the English residents at Nel- 
 lore, and still more encouraged by tokens of 
 divine approbation in the conversion of several 
 of their pupils and visitors, of whom one has 
 lately been baptized. 
 
 Statistics of Teloo^oo Mission for 1854. — 1 
 station, 2 missionaries, 2 female assistants, 1 
 native assistant, 1 church, 9 members, 1 board- 
 ing-school, 13 pupils, 1 day-school, 50 pupils, 
 total, 2 schools, 63 pupils.— Frof. W. Gammell. 
 
 Basle Missionary Society. — Of the Ger- 
 man missionary societies, that of Basle was the 
 first which established a mission in the East 
 Indies. In 1846 it had, in the province of 
 Canara, on the west coast of Hindostan, and 
 in Bodschagner, north of this, eight stations, 
 of which Mangalore is the oldest. This was 
 founded in 1834. It has, in the city and vicin- 
 ity, several common schools, a high school, and 
 a lithographic establishment. In 1837 and 
 1839, followed the stations at Dbarwar and 
 Hoobly, in the South-Mahratta country ; in 
 1841, the neighboring village of Bcttigherry. 
 There was a prophecy traditional in this place, 
 that, after the fall of the Indian kingdom, a 
 king in the West should send messengers to 
 teach Christianity and do away with caste ; 
 and as such the German missionaries were re- 
 ceived. Malsamoodra was also added in the 
 same year. In 1839, the mission work was 
 carried on with great success, by Gundert, of 
 Wurtemburg. In 1840 and 1842, stations 
 were established at Cannanore and Calicut. 
 The entire number of European laborers em- 
 ploved by the Basle Society at these stations, 
 including eleven women, was thirty-three; 
 with thirteen native helpers. 2,000 natives, 
 partly adults, partly school-children, were con- 
 nected with the mission. A Basle missionary 
 in Mangalore had translated several books of 
 the New Testament into the Tooloo language, 
 which were lithographed at Mangalore. — 
 Translated from the German of Wiggers. 
 
 The following notices of the several stations 
 of this mission will show its present condi- 
 tion. 
 
 Mangalore. — In 1846 the lithographic press 
 at this station issued 12,775 copies of 16 dif- 
 ferent works in Canarese, Teloogoo, and Ma- 
 iayalim. In the year 1847, 39 persons were 
 received into the church by baptism, 29 of 
 whom were adults and 10 children. In the 
 year following, 24 adults and 10 children were 
 baptized, and several were excommunicated. 
 During the years 1849 and 1850, about fifty- 
 adults and children — were baptized ; and a 
 boarding-school for Indo-British boys, and an 
 
 industrial department, were formed. The 
 printing in 1850 amounted to 966,230 pages. 
 
 Moolky. — At the latest dates, the station at 
 Fort Moolky, which was commenced in 1845, 
 had about 50 persons under the immediate 
 instruction of the mission, a small church, and 
 a school into which none but Christian chil- 
 dren were admitted. The missionary, Mr. 
 Amman, preached the Gospel in most of the 
 neighboring villages, and was also engaged in 
 translating the Scriptures, and revising the 
 Tooloo translation of the Testament. 
 
 Honore. — In 1847 there was at this station 
 one missionary, a small congregation, and a 
 school of 45 scholars, but at a later period the 
 missionary had been removed, and do one had 
 taken his place. 
 
 Dharwar. — In 1849 ten adults and two little 
 girls were admitted into the chusch. Six of 
 these were Tamulians, a people who up to this 
 time had rarely afforded any encouragement 
 to the missionaries. A later report says, 
 " Several Lingaites seem to be inwardly at- 
 tached to the Gospel, but the fear of man and 
 the charms of the world keep them back from 
 Christ. The thraldom in which the poor Lin- 
 gaites live, under their avaricious and insolent 
 high priests, four in number, is very galling. 
 They farm their disciples out to certain priests, 
 called priests of thousands, who squeeze from 
 the poor deluded laity all they can get." 
 
 Hoobly. — The success at this station has not 
 been of the most encouraging nature for the 
 last few years. Heathen hearers have been 
 few on the Sabbath ; and, at times, they have 
 seemed " to shun the word of God in the same 
 measure as they became more acquainted with 
 it," whether from indifference or fear, the mis- 
 sionaries could not tell. Still, the schools 
 have been well attended, and through these 
 the seed has been sown among young and old. 
 Tracts and portions of Scripture were learnt 
 by heart, and the scholars catechized concern- 
 ing them. 
 
 Bcttigherry. — The adult portion of the pop- 
 ulation at this station and in the villages 
 around have for several years shown much good 
 will to the missionaries. In most houses they 
 have been welcome ; and Hindoo men, when 
 spoken to of their hardness which prevented 
 their receiving the Gospel, have entreated the 
 missionaries to have patience till a better day 
 should come. In 1848 a Linga priest came to 
 the station, from some distance, and after mak- 
 ing careful inquiry into the doctrine preached, 
 he stayed to learn, and subsequently embraced 
 Christianity and was baptized. The event 
 created great sensation at Bcttigherry and 
 elsewhere. He became a zealous laborer, and 
 has traveled much with the missionaries in 
 their tours through the neighboring country. 
 Another priest joined them in 1849, and tra- 
 veled with them several months. A respecta- 
 ble widow also joined them, was baptized, and 
 subsequently married to the priest first named. 
 
HTNDOSTAN. 
 
 45Y 
 
 The people seem persuaded that the new teach- 
 ers are their best friends, and they come in con- 
 siderable numbers to hear the Gosi3el. The 
 schools are in good condition. 
 
 Malasamoodra. — A poor house and hospital 
 •were erected in 1846, by contributions from 
 friends in Poorah. In June of this year, on 
 a morning appointed for the purpose, several 
 prominent men, natives, entered the temple of 
 Doorga, and broke the idol and his seat in 
 pieces and cast them into the street. This 
 caused considerable excitement, but it soon 
 subsided, and the idol temple was converted 
 into a school-house, where the Scriptures were 
 daily read, and prayer offered to the living 
 God. Since that period the brethren have 
 met with serious discouragements, but have 
 continued to labor with some success, espe- 
 cially in the schools. 
 
 Catery. — This station, on the Neilgherry 
 Hills, has been attended with considerable 
 success. In 1850 a native broke off the inve- 
 terate habit of opium eating, burnt his charm 
 books, and withstood strong temptations to 
 those works of darkness so profitable among 
 the superstitious inhabitants of the Neilgher- 
 ries. He attended the school with little child- 
 ren, though a man of advanced age, because 
 he longed to be able to read the word of God. 
 He was soon to be baptized, as the first fruit 
 of the mission at this place. The missionaries 
 have visited the greater part of the several 
 hundred villages scattered over the Neilgher- 
 ries, and have become personally acquainted 
 with a large number of the people. Some of 
 them have a Tamil New Testament, which, 
 without being able to read, they worship morn- 
 ing and evening. Others, from an indefinite 
 belief in the power of Christ, have received his 
 name among the rest of the gods, and would 
 not think that anything could prosper without 
 the invocation of his name. 
 
 Cananore. — During the years 1847 and 1848 
 the people at this place were visited with cho- 
 lera and small pox, which proved fatal to 
 many, and severely taxed the time and strength 
 of the missionaries in attending upon the sick 
 and dying. The schools were much inter- 
 rupted, but have since come together as usual. 
 Several have been converted, and the mission- 
 aries record the happy deaths of two or three 
 native converts within the last few years. 
 
 Tellicherry. — The number of persons bap- 
 tized at this station in 1846 was 22. A print- 
 ing-press was set up during that year, from 
 which was issued 2150 different works. In 
 1848 this mission shared largely in the special 
 divine influences which visited the region, and 
 many of the boys and girls in the schools were 
 " shaken out of slumber and death," and have 
 since been baptized. At the out-stations also 
 several " found grace and life." Compara- 
 tively few, however, show signs of real spirit- 
 ual life. The Brahmins, who ar^few, and the 
 Nairs, a spirited class of people, keep at a dis- 
 
 tance from the missionary. The I'lers are 
 more accessible, but are altogether taken up 
 with the cares of the world. The Mussulmen 
 hate the Gospel, and show their hatred when- 
 ever they have an opportunity. 
 
 Chombala. — A mission was commenced at 
 this place in 1849, since which time a church 
 of 20 or 30 members has been gathered, and a 
 chapel has been built. Micha, a native, hav- 
 ing been converted, his wife ran av/ay from 
 him with her children, but returned after a 
 few months, " Micha's father, an old drunk- 
 ard, was driven to his house by want. At 
 first he only laughed and mocked at the Gos- 
 pel, but after some time, to the astonishment 
 of all, his mind seemed changed. The very ex- 
 pression of his countenance was altered. He 
 has been baptized, with Micha's wife and 
 children. 
 
 Calicut. — In respect to the care of the poor- 
 house, which in 1846 was committed to the 
 missionaries, they say, " There are about 150 
 inmates, for whom every Saturday a service is 
 held by one of the catechists. Such an assem- 
 bly of crippled, lame, blind, leprous, sunk in 
 the utmost ignorance and apathy, and who on 
 a kind word of exhortation generally have 
 nothing to say but ' What can I do ? It is 
 the Lord's will ; thus it is written on my skull ;' 
 is a melancholy sight." In the autumn ol 
 1847, 18 were received into the church at this 
 station. In January, 1848, six adults and 
 four girls belonging to the girls' institution 
 were baptized ; and in June a weaver with his 
 family, three persons in all, and in November 
 a Tamil family of four persons, were baptized. 
 In January, 1849, a Nair family, together 
 with two youths, two women, and two child- 
 ren, were received into the church. About 
 this time Mrs. Huber, wife of the missionary, 
 commenced an English day school for Indo- 
 British girls, and it has 'prospered remarkably, 
 in spite of the opposition of the Eomish priest. 
 Three Parsee girls joined the school soon after 
 it was opened. 
 
 Dacca. — A mission was commenced at this 
 place in 1847, and a school and a small con- 
 gregation of 12 or 14 baptized heathen was 
 gathered by an English chaplain. Others 
 were subsequently added ; but the work became 
 embarrassed by the want of local funds, and 
 in 1850 the station was given up. 
 
 Dagapom. — In 1848, six men, two women 
 and five children of natives were baptized at 
 this place. Before the rite was administered 
 to them, the inquirers had to undergo a severe 
 persecution from their pagan countrymen, but 
 they remained firm in their profession of faith 
 in the Saviour. On ' Good Friday,' 1849, 19 
 Christian natives sat down for the first time to 
 the celebration of the Lord's Supper. " On 
 the first of April Mr. Bion, with his fellow- 
 laborers, opened a school. On Sunday fifty or 
 sixty Hindoos and Mohammedans attended 
 divine service, of whom not a few were visibly 
 
40b 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 aflbcted." The missionaries received tlic most 
 pressing invitations from places at various 
 aistances, to visit them. 
 
 CornHla. — A missionary, Mr. Bost, with his 
 catcchist, reached this place on Christmas day, 
 1847, and immediately commenced preaching 
 the Gospel, which roused the opposition of the 
 enemy. On assuming a more retired activity 
 in his own house, he found himself surrounded 
 by crowds of visitors, who desired to hear the 
 word of God. The higher castes asked for 
 schools for their children. But embarrass- 
 ments overtook the mission, and it was several 
 years since discontinued. 
 
 Two of the foregoing stations having been 
 discontinued, leaves thirteen now in actual 
 existence, besides which there are 19 or 20 
 out-stations. « 
 
 In 1851 " Inspector Josenhans " visited the 
 India missions of the Basle Missionary Society, 
 and his report was of a highly gratifying na- 
 ture. He found that about 1400 persons had 
 been gathered into Christian congregations ; 
 and in one village, containing several hundred 
 souls, only three persons continued heathen. 
 Christian colonies had been established in three 
 places, and were regarded with peculiar inte- 
 rest. The inspector says, " The religious life 
 of the new converts is by no means so weak as 
 many are disposed to think." On the whole, 
 he expressed his astonishment that so much 
 had been accomplished by the mission within 
 a period of 18 years, for he found the work 
 much more difficult than Christians at home 
 had supposed it to be. Even he who had 
 been familiar with the operations and trials of 
 his brethren, had not appreciated the difficul- 
 ties of the enterprise till he had the advantages 
 of a personal inspection. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 Cakakkb Miasios. 
 
 1834 
 1845 
 1845 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 3 
 
 138 
 25 
 
 2 
 
 190 
 5 
 
 Moolky 
 
 Honore 
 
 So. Mahiutta Mission. 
 
 Dharwar ^..,. 
 
 Hoobly 
 
 1837 
 1839 
 1841 
 1841 
 
 1841 
 1839 
 1849 
 1842 
 
 1846 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 3 
 2 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 25 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 
 202 
 26 
 23 
 34 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 7 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 412 
 
 330 
 
 321 
 
 18 
 
 220 
 
 387 
 
 58 
 
 836 
 
 81 
 
 Bettigherry 
 
 
 Malataum Mission. 
 Cannanore 
 
 TeUicberry 
 
 
 Calicut 
 
 Nkilghbbbt. 
 Catery 
 
 Bengal. 
 Dayapoor 
 
 1847 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 28 
 
 487 
 
 24 
 
 2358 
 
 The preceding table will give some idea of 
 the field occupied by this Society, and the ex- 
 tent of its labors, though imperfect, aa the omis- 
 sions indicate. It is based on the reports for 
 1850. A report for 1852 supplies some of the 
 deficiencies, and swells the number of commu- 
 nicants to 780, a large number having been 
 added to the churches during the preceding 
 two years. The total number in the congrega- 
 tions is stated at 1699, 200 having been added 
 during 1851. The whole number of laborers 
 from Europe, including the wives of mission- 
 aries, is 45. The expenditures of the mission 
 for the year last reported, amounted to 64,893 
 rupees, a considerable portion of which was 
 contributed by the friends of missions in 
 India. 
 
 Berlin Missionary Society. — The Berlin 
 Society for Evangelizing the Heathen, estab- 
 lished in November, 1843, a station at Ghazi- 
 pur, a city of 50,000 inhabitants, on the 
 Ganges, with four missionaries, who, in Feb. 
 1844, having acquainted themselves with the 
 Hindoo and Urdu languages, made their first ef- 
 forts at public preaching. 
 
 Leipsic Missionary Society. — The Luthe- 
 ran Missionary Society at Leipsic has, by the 
 report for 1853, eight stations in Southern 
 Hindostan. The following table exhibits the 
 state of their missions at the above date. 
 
 tabular view. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Tranquebar 
 
 Tirumenjanam 
 
 Vorreiar 
 
 Mayayer&m ; . . 
 
 Madras 
 
 Puducottah ......... "^ 
 
 Trichinopoly > 
 
 Tanjore J 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 
 g 
 
 Si 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 il 
 1^ 
 
 1 
 
 .§8 
 
 1. 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 20 
 
 3 
 
 *454 
 
 211 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 
 111 
 
 115 
 
 75 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 21 
 
 19 
 
 2 
 
 814 
 
 310 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 26 
 
 7 
 
 66 
 
 223 
 
 20 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 330 
 
 60 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 12 
 
 35 
 
 139 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 60 
 
 45 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 150 
 
 121 
 
 30 
 
 6 
 
 21 
 
 15 
 
 36 
 
 68 
 
 55 
 
 371 
 
 2152 
 
 890 
 
 * Including Europeans. 
 
 North German Missionary Society. — This 
 society, which had two stations, one in the 
 Teloogoo country. Eastern Hindostan, and one 
 in the Neilgherries, was obliged, in consequence 
 of diminished receipts, to suspend operations 
 in the autumn of 1850, and the mission was 
 transferred to the Evangelical Lutheran 
 Church in the United States. Since that 
 time the responsibility of the mission has 
 been assumed by the Bremen Union, and the 
 committee of this society find themselves sus- 
 tained by the sympathy and cooperation of 
 many warm friends of missions in Northern 
 Germany. The station in Eastern Hindostan 
 is Kajamundry, and that in the Neilgherries is 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 459 
 
 Ootacamund. Xo recent statistics have been 
 furnished respecting either of these stations. 
 
 Gossner's Missionary Society. — Gossner's 
 missionaries, with no preparatory education 
 except that of the common schools, and accus- 
 tomed to manual labor, appeared in 1838, on 
 the middle Ganges, and joined in close fellow- 
 ship with the English preacher Stael, who was 
 laboring unconnected with any missionary or- 
 ganization. They came to Patua on the 29th 
 January, 1839, and divided themselves among 
 the stations, Hadschipur, Muzaffipur, Chuprali, 
 
 and Hibbelgandsch! Hence they visited Pat- 
 na, Monghyr and Dinapore. A small colony 
 settled at Dardschilling, on the boundaries of 
 Nepaul. Another expedition went from Bom- 
 bay to Jubblepoor, in the interior of India. 
 Partly through death, partly through its mem- 
 bers becoming connected with other societies, 
 Gossner's society met with considerable losses, 
 and the attempt was scarcely more successful 
 than that of the Moravians in India, many 
 years previous. — Wiggers. 
 
 GENERAL TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 Baptist Missionary Society (English) 
 London Missionary Society . . . 
 
 American Board 
 
 Church Missionary Society . . . 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society . . . 
 Soc. for Prop. Gospel in For. Parts 
 General Baptist Missionary Society 
 
 Church of Scotland 
 
 Free Church of Scotland .... 
 American Presbyterian Board . . 
 Basle Missionary Society .... 
 American Baptist Union .... 
 Free-Will Baptist Society .... 
 Welsh Calvinistic Methodists . .* . 
 Irish Presbyterian Church . . * . . 
 Berlin Missionary Society .... 
 Leipsic Missionary Society . . . 
 
 Totals 
 
 .• 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 S a 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 .a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 w 
 
 s 
 
 < 
 
 d 
 
 <s 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 1793 
 
 26 
 
 35 
 
 85 
 
 
 1,412 
 
 43 
 
 2,345 
 
 1804 
 
 21 
 
 47 
 
 133 
 
 23 
 
 1,024 
 
 44 
 
 8,919 
 
 1812 
 
 22 
 
 26 
 
 106 
 
 16 
 
 541 
 
 127 
 
 3,800 
 
 1813 
 
 47 
 
 83 
 
 1002 
 
 
 5,815 
 
 526 
 
 17,873 
 
 1817 
 
 9 
 
 17 
 
 21 
 
 
 428 
 
 20 
 
 1,183 
 
 1818 
 
 
 48 
 
 166 
 
 
 4,629 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 1822 
 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 
 255 
 
 
 2,932 
 
 1828 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 2,375 
 
 1829 
 
 6 
 
 18 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 7,030 
 
 1834 
 
 13 
 
 23 
 
 28 
 
 
 266 
 
 
 2,900 
 
 1834 
 
 13 
 
 26 
 
 28 
 
 
 487 
 
 24 
 
 2,358 
 
 1835 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 63 
 
 1836 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 
 47 
 
 
 151 
 
 1840 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 1841 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 
 1843 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 67 
 
 
 2,152 
 
 
 890 
 
 178 
 
 357 
 
 1663 
 
 
 17,093 
 
 787 
 
 58,340 
 
 The preceding table has been made out from 
 the materials furnished by the foregoing state- 
 ments. On some points the information is 
 quite deficient ; the number of stations in con- 
 nection with some of the societies is not fully 
 reported. The number of native assistants is 
 fully reported by few, and some societies re- 
 port the wives of missionaries as assistants, 
 and others do not report them at all. The 
 number of organized churches and of schools is 
 deficient in many of them. But the number 
 of missionaries, communicants, and scholars, 
 is pretty generally reported. It is to be re- 
 gretted, however, that in such full and valu- 
 able reports as are furnished by the Wesleyans, 
 they do not distinguish between ordained mis- 
 sionaries and assistants. In judging of the 
 comparative success of different societies, some 
 regard must be had to the degree of strictness 
 practised in the admission of ponverts to 
 church privileges. There is a difiFerence, also, 
 
 in the mode of counting stations. In some ac- 
 counts, only the central stations are given, 
 and others are reckoned as out-stations. But 
 with all its deficiencies, this table speaks, in 
 language not to be mistaken, of the results of 
 missionary labor in India. 
 
 Present State and Future Prospects of 
 THE Missionary work in India. — The fol- 
 lowing letter from the Venerable Dr. Scud- 
 DER to the author, will give the impressions 
 of one on the ground, who has witnessed the 
 changes which have been going on for the last 
 quarter of a century. We doubt not it will be 
 read with deep interest. 
 
 Madras, April 6, 1854. 
 
 My Dear Brother :— Your letter of Janu- 
 ary 1, reached me last month. India, as a field 
 of missionary labor, is very difierent from what 
 it was a few years ago — very different from 
 what it was when even the venerable Dr. Carey 
 reached it. He, as you know, was not allowed 
 
460 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 to commence his oix^rations anywhere within 
 the dominions of the Eiist India Company. It 
 was on this account that lie went to Scram- 
 pore, where he resided until his death. Now 
 the missionary may enter any part of India. 
 
 Within the last few years, other changes of 
 a very important nature have also taken place. 
 This IS witnessed, 
 
 1 . In the edxuational department. 
 
 "The Marquis of Hastings's government 
 forms the brightest page in the history of In- 
 dian improvement, after a long chapter of dark 
 * and dismal proceedings. It gave that impulse 
 to the cause of civilization, of which we are 
 now reaping the benefits. When he first came 
 to India in 1813, he found the press in the 
 hands of a censor, who struck out whatever 
 he pleased. He found that every attempt to 
 impart knowledge to the people, and to give 
 them the means of mental or social elevation 
 had not only been neglected, but discouraged ; 
 that the British empire in India was considered 
 stable, in exact proportion to the ignorance 
 of the inhabitants. The only educational efibrt 
 made in the reign of his predecessor was a pro- 
 posal by Lord Minto to set up two or three 
 colleges to teach the Sanscrit language, and 
 the sciences of the Sbasters, and the morality 
 of Ilindooism ; but not the remotest idea was 
 ever entertained of unlocking to the natives 
 the treasures of the English language, or dis- 
 seminating knowledge through their own 
 tongue. This system Lord Hastings was the 
 first to break through. He gave every encour- 
 agement, private and public, to the establish- 
 ment of schools and colleges. Under his aus- 
 pices, the Calcutta School Society, the School 
 Book Society, the Hindoo College and other 
 institutions sprung into being. He also abo- 
 lished the censorship of the press, with the full 
 knowledge that the general feeling among the 
 directors and proprietors, at the India house, 
 was against any relaxation of the restrictions 
 on the press. That he met with opposition to 
 his views in India, will appear from the follow- 
 ing circumstance : An article appeared in the 
 quarterly series of the Friend of India, on the 
 burning of widows, in which the propriety of 
 abolishing this rite was advocated with a de- 
 gree of temper and moderation suited to the 
 circumstances of the times ; but which gave 
 such oflFence to Mr. Adams, afterwards our 
 temporary Governor-General, that he took it 
 to the council chamber, and insisted on the 
 suppression of the work, which Lord Hastings 
 positively refused to sanction." 
 
 " After the censorship of the press had been 
 taken off, the Court of Directors showed their 
 opposition to what Lord Hastings had done, 
 by the preparation of a dispatch, directing the 
 imposition of the censorship again, which, how- 
 ever, George Canning nobly refused to sanc- 
 tion." 
 
 I just alluded to the opposition which was 
 formerly made by the India government to the 
 
 education of the natives. The reverse of this 
 now obtains. So anxious are they to confer 
 this benefit upon them, that they \\vi\M offered 
 to contribute their money for the support of 
 those schools which are taught by missionaries, 
 and of course in which Christianity is taught. 
 
 When speaking of the Marquis of Hastings, 
 I referred you to Mr. Adams, who thought that 
 the Friend of India should be suppressed, 
 because it had ventured to suggest the propri- 
 ety of abolishing the burning of widows on 
 the funeral pile. By contrasting his conduct 
 with that of Lord Bentick and Lord Hardinge, 
 we shall at once see how much the views of the 
 politicians of India have, in a short period, 
 been changed for the better. Lord Bentick 
 abolished the suttee throughout the British 
 possessions of India, and Lord Hardinge made 
 great exertions to have it abolished in the do- 
 minions of the native princes, not under British 
 jurisdiction. And his labors were attended 
 with great success. He returned to England, 
 six or seven years ago, crowned with many 
 worldly honors. But he has other honors — 
 honors of a higher nature than these. He 
 went home with the satisfaction of having les- 
 sened, in no small degree, the horrors of hea- 
 thenism, in regions embracing a population of 
 not less than twenty millions. This will ap- 
 pear from the following notice : " The Calcutta 
 Gazette contains a proclamation by Maha 
 Rajah Golaub Singh, prohibiting infanticide, 
 suttee, and slavery throughout his territories, 
 forming the remotest Hindoo principality of 
 India. The Governor-General, as will be seen, 
 directs his^thanks to be conveyed to a long 
 list — twenty-tliree in number — of potentates, 
 who during the last three years, have cordially 
 entered into the views of the British govern- 
 ment, in suppressing such practices. Those 
 edicts are estimated to affect not less than 
 twenty millions of human creatures." 
 
 Such innovations as Lord Hardinge has 
 been instrumental in making on the sacred 
 customs of the Hindoos among the independ- 
 ent governments of India, will be the means 
 of pulling many a stone from that fabric, 
 which they have in times past considered to be 
 as stable as the heavens. Under such circum- 
 stances, the missionary may go forth and la- 
 bor among them with a much better prospect 
 of success than he would otherwise obtain. 
 
 As I before remarked, Lord Hardinge left 
 the country six or seven years ago. He left it 
 much too soon for India's good. Had he re- 
 mained his full time, to say nothing of any- 
 thing else, the burning of widows would per- 
 haps now be unknown here. Previdusly to 
 his leaving, however, he left his protest against 
 the conduct of those powers which had not 
 abolished the rite — a protest which may issue 
 in great good. It is as follows : " The Gover- 
 nor-general abstains on this occasion from pro- 
 minently noticing those states in which these 
 barbarous usages are still observed, as he con- 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 461 
 
 fidently expects, at no distant day, to hear of 
 the complete renunciation of them in every 
 state in alliance with, or under the protection 
 of the paramount power of India," 
 
 2. Infanticide has been very extensively sup- 
 pressed. You can scarcely imagine to what a 
 frightful extent this crime has prevailed. 
 Among the Nairs in Mulwa, in Oude, and the 
 northern provinces, it is impossible to calcu- 
 late what numbers of infants have, in the times 
 which have gone by, been put to death. A 
 gentleman of the Bengal service was sent by 
 the government through the northern and in- 
 dependent kingdoms to find out the number. 
 In the provinces through which he passed the 
 principal chiefs acknowledged that they had 
 murdered many of their children, and that they 
 knew their neighbors had destroyed many of 
 theirs, and that this rite was rooted in the 
 affections of the people. In one village there 
 were fifty-one boys but only fourteen girls. In 
 a second, sixty-six boys and only fourteen girls. 
 In a third, seventy-nine boys and only twelve 
 girls. In a fourth, ten boys and only two 
 girls. In a fifth, fifty-eight boys and only four 
 girls. In a sixth, twenty-two boys and no 
 girls. 
 
 As you are aware, the Punjaub has lately 
 been brought under British rule. Since this 
 event took place, the fact has been brought to 
 light that mfanticide has been practiced ex- 
 tensively there. In the latter part of the year 
 1851 " Major Lake found it to prevail in the 
 district of which he had charge. Soon after- 
 wards it was found to prevail in Umballa, Fe- 
 rozepore, Jullundur, Hooshearpore, Lahore, 
 Mooltan, Jhelum, and Leia districts. It is 
 not, however, practiced by all of the inhabit- 
 ants. It is confined principally to the Bedees 
 and the Kajpoots, among whom the custom is 
 one of immemorial antiquity. The Khetrees, 
 however, and even some of the Mohammedan 
 tribes maintain the practice ; and the higher 
 the rank the more certain are the female 
 branches of destruction. It is believed also 
 by the most experienced officers to have in- 
 fected all classes in a greater or less degree. 
 All over the Punjaub there is a disproportion 
 in the number of female births not to be ac- 
 counted for by ordinary causes; and in cer- 
 tain districts this disproportion rises to such a 
 height, as almost to imply the extinction of 
 the female race." The subject came under the 
 notice of our present Governor-general, Earl 
 Dalhousie, several months ago, and if this prac- 
 tice has not yet been put down, as it has been 
 put down in other places, it must soon come 
 to an end. 
 
 3. One of the most appalling religious 
 sects which ever appeared in any country, has 
 been nearly, if not entirety, destroyed. Allow 
 me to give you a short description of this sect, 
 from a work, which now lies before me. Scat- 
 tered throughout India there is a lawless set 
 of men whose profession it is to get their food 
 
 by murder. They are called Phansiagars, or 
 Thugs : they owe their origin and laws to the 
 bloody goddess Karle : they say that she di- 
 rected them to become murderers and plunder- 
 ers : they are called Phansiagars, from the 
 name of the instrument which they use when 
 they murder people. Phansiagar means a 
 strangle, and they use a phansi, or noose, which 
 they throw over the necks of those whom they 
 intend to plunder, and strangle them. These 
 Phansiagars are composed of all castes, Hin- 
 doos, Mohammedans, Pariahs, and Chandellars. 
 This arises from the circumstance that they 
 never destroy the children of those whom they 
 rob and murder. These children they take 
 care of, and bring them up to their own hor- 
 rible mode of life. They always murder those 
 whom they rob, acting upon the maxim, ' that 
 dead men tell no tales.' A gang of these rob- 
 bers varies from a dozen to sixty or seventy 
 persons. These divide into small parties. 
 Those whom they murder are travelers whom 
 they happen to meet on the road. Sometimes 
 two or three of a gang will take up their sta- 
 tion in a choultry, or place where the traveler 
 stops, and while he sleeps they rouse him from 
 his sleep, and cast the noose over his head and 
 kill him. It takes two persons to kill a man. 
 One casts the noose over his head, and imme- 
 diately tightens it with all his strength ; the 
 other strikes him on the joint of the knees as 
 he rises, which causes him to fall backwards. 
 After he has fallen they kick him on the tem- 
 ples till he dies, which is usually in a minute. 
 They never commit a murder until they have 
 taken every precaution not to be found out. 
 They will follow a traveler for weeks, if neces- 
 sary, before they destroy him. After they 
 have murdered him, they gash the body all 
 over and bury it. They gash it that it may 
 not swell and cause cracks to take place in the 
 ground, which might cause the jackalls to dig 
 down to the body, and thus expose their guilt. 
 If a dog accompanies the person, they always 
 kill it, lest the faithful creature should lead to 
 the discovery of his master. They think it to 
 be a very good act to. give a part of the plun- 
 der, which they get when they murder a per- 
 son, to their goddess. If they fail to put him 
 to death according to their rules, they suppose 
 that they have made her angry, and they make 
 offerings to her, that she may be appeased. 
 Thus, their religion teaches them to commit 
 the blackest of crimes. 
 
 The reason why this people gash and bury the , 
 bodies of those whom they murder, is as follows : 
 They say that the goddess used to save them the 
 trouble of burying the corpses of their victims by 
 eating them, thus screening the murderers from 
 all chance of being found out. Once, after the 
 murder of a traveler, the body was, as usual, 
 left unburied. One of the Phansiagars em- 
 ployed, unguardedly looking behind him, saw 
 the goddess in the act of feasting on it. This 
 made her so angry, that she vowed never again 
 
462 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 to devour a body slaughtered by tdem, they 
 having by tl»is one act of curiosity forfeited 
 her favor. However, as an equivalent for 
 withdrawing her patronage, she plucked one 
 of the fangs from her celestial jaw, and gave 
 it to them, saying that they might use it as a 
 pickaxe, which would never wear out. She 
 then opened her side, and pulled out one of 
 her ribs, which she gave them for a knife, 
 whose edge nothing .could blunt. Having 
 done this she stooped down, and tore off the 
 hem of her garment, which she gave them for a 
 noose, declaring that it would never fail to 
 strangle any person about whose throat it 
 might be cast. She, moreover, commanded 
 them to gash and bury the bodies of those 
 whom they destroyed. 
 
 The Phansiagars bring up their children to 
 their own profession. To learn this the boy is 
 
 g laced under the care of a tutor. Sometimes 
 is father is his teacher. By him he is taught 
 that it is just as proper to murder a man as it 
 is to kill a snake which lies in his path, and 
 would bite him as he passes. He is not per- 
 mitted at first to see the murders, but merely 
 a dead body ; his mind being gradually pre- 
 pared for the sight. After this, the dreadful 
 secret of his trade is, by degrees, told him. 
 When he expresses a wish to be engaged in 
 this horrid business, they tell him all about it. 
 In the mean time, he is allowed a small part 
 of the plunder, in order that his desire to com- 
 mit these murders may be increased, as it is 
 only by murder that the plunder is obtained. 
 He is allowed from time to time to assist in 
 some things while the murder is taking place ; 
 or is allowed to be present to see how the busi- 
 ness is managed. It is not, however, until he 
 becomes a man that he is permitted to apply the 
 noose. To attain this privilege, he usually 
 devotes eight or ten years. Before he can 
 commit a murder, his tutor must present him 
 with a noose. This sets hira loose upon the 
 world, as a licensed murderer. When the tutor 
 is about to give him the noose, he takes him 
 apart, and solemnly enjoins it upon him to use 
 it with skill, as it is to be the means of his 
 earning his food, and as his safety will depend 
 upon the skill with which it is used. After he 
 receives it, he tries his skill in strangling a 
 person, the first opportunity that occurs. 
 
 By the course of education which the Phan- 
 siagars undergo, they become so fond of their 
 dreadful occupation, that nothing can induce 
 them to quit it. Some who have been employed 
 in the East India Company's service have 
 shown this, by returning to their business when 
 an opportunity offered of successful enterprise. 
 When the Phansiagars become old, they do 
 not quit the service ; but act as watchers, and 
 decoy the traveler, by some false tale of dis- 
 tress, into some distant place, where he is mur- 
 dered. 
 
 Women are sometimes admitted to the soci- 
 ety of these plunderers, and on some occasions 
 
 are allowed to apply the noose. They select a 
 handsome girl, and place her in a convenient 
 spot, where, by her beauty, or by a false 
 story of distress, she may decoy some unsus- 
 pecting traveler, and be the means of his de- 
 struction. Should he be on horseback, she 
 will induce him to take her up behind him, 
 after which, when an opportunity offers, she 
 throws the noose over his bead, leaps from the 
 horse, drags him to the ground and strangles 
 him. Some time since, it happened that a 
 horseman of Coorg, in the Madras Presidency, 
 was passing by a spot where one of these in- 
 teresting-lookrng girls was stationed. She 
 told him a piteous story of having been robbed, 
 and badly treated, and begged him to assist 
 her. Feeling sorry for her, ne offered to take 
 her up behind him on his horse, and thus assist 
 her a few miles on her journey. She expressed 
 much gratitude for his kindness, and mounted. 
 Soon afterwards, she suddenly passed a noose 
 over his head, and, drawing it with all her 
 might, endeavored to pull hira from his saddle. 
 At this moment a number of Phansiagars 
 started from the neighboring thicket and sur- 
 rounded him. The murderess then slipped 
 from the horse ; but the Coorg striking his 
 heels into the horse's side, it threw out its 
 hind legs with great violence, and struck the 
 girl to the ground, who immediately let go the 
 cord. He then drew his sword, and cutting 
 his way through the robbers, effected his 
 escape. He wounded two of them severely. 
 These men were shortly afterwards taken, and, 
 through their means, twelve others fell into 
 the hands of the judicial officers of the king of 
 Coorg, including the girl who attempted the 
 murder. They were all put to death. 
 
 4. A stop has been put, in a good degree, to 
 the Meriah sacrifices in the extensive hill- 
 tracts of Orissa. It was not until the military 
 operations of the British took place in Upper 
 and Lower Goomsoor, in 1836 and 1837, that 
 the cruel rite of immolating human beings in 
 these places was brought to light, and it was 
 not until that time that the first victims des- 
 tined for sacrifice were taken from them. 
 Captain Millar was the honored instrument in 
 rescuing them. They were twelve in number. 
 His services were acknowledged in the follow- 
 ing manner by the Madras Government: 
 " Captain Millar will realize in his own mind 
 an ample reward for his most commendable 
 conduct, in having rescued twelve victims 
 destined for those horrible sacrifices, as the 
 gratifying reflection of having been the means 
 of saving so many human beings from a cruel 
 and untimely death cannot fail, at all times, 
 to be a source of genuine happiness to him. " 
 The discretion, however, with which he con- 
 tinued to effect his humane purpose, is entitled 
 to the warmest and most unqualified approba- 
 tion of government." 
 
 In the year 1838, Captain Campbell rescued 
 a much larger number. He writes, " I have 
 
HINDOSTAN. 
 
 463 
 
 been most fortunate in my late expedition 
 among the wild Khunds of Goomsoor, and 
 have rescued no less than one hundred and three 
 children of various ages, who were intended 
 for sacrifice by these barbarians. The chil- 
 dren are now at head-quarters, and form a 
 most interesting; group ; happy such of them 
 as were aware of their situation, in having 
 escaped the fate which awaited them." 
 
 I am acquainted with Captain Mac Viccar, 
 who is one of the British agents " for the sup- 
 pression of human sacrifices and female infan- 
 ticide in the hill tracts of Orissa." I learned 
 from him that the whole number of victims 
 who had been rescued, up to the time when I 
 saw him, from those hill tracts, amounted to 
 more than 1,900. Of these, no less than 500 
 were rescued by himself and his assistant. Cap- 
 tain Frye, in the course of a few months. 
 Since my interview with Captain MacYiccar, 
 which was in the year 1851, other victims have 
 been rescued. 
 
 There are various tribes inhabiting the ex- 
 tensive hill districts to which I have been al- 
 luding, and their manner of offering up these 
 sacrifices have been various also. Let me give 
 you a few quotations from a little book before 
 me, to show how the Khunds were in the habit 
 of offering up their victims. " AVlien the day 
 which has been appointed for the sacrifice ar- 
 rives, the Khunds assemble from all parts of 
 the country, dressed in their finery ; some with 
 bear skins thrown over their shoulders ; others 
 with the tails of peacocks flowing behind them, 
 and the long, winding feather of the jungle- 
 cock waving over their heads. Thus decked, 
 they dance, leap, rejoice, beat druills, and play 
 on an instrument not unlike in sound to the 
 highland-pipe. In the afternoon, the priest 
 with the aid of an assistant proceeds to fasten 
 a man or a woman, or a boy or a girl to a post 
 which has been firmly fixed in the ground. 
 Around this post stand hundreds of those 
 Khunds with knives in their hands. At an 
 appointed signal they rush upon the poor 
 creature and try who can cut the first piece of 
 flesh from his bones. Great value is attached 
 to the first morsel cut out from his body, as it 
 is supposed to possess greater virtues. This is 
 buried in the earth before sunset." 
 
 In Guddapore a different sacrifice precedes 
 this. A trench, seven feet long, is dug, over 
 which a human body is suspended alive, by the 
 neck and feet, which are fastened with ropes 
 to stakes firmly fixed in the ground, at each 
 end of the excavation, so that to prevent 
 strangulation he is compelled to support him- 
 self with his hands over each side of his grave. 
 The presiding priest, after performing various 
 ceremonies in honor of their goddess, takes an 
 axe and inflicts six cuts, at equal distances 
 from the feet to the back of the neck, repeat- 
 ing the numbers, one, two, three, and so forth, 
 Eondi,. Rendi, Mungee, Nalge, Chingi, Sajgi, 
 and a^ the seventh, Argi, cuts off his head. 
 
 The body falls into into the pit and is covered 
 with earth. 
 
 Captain Mac Viccar gave me an account ot 
 other districts, where these sacrifices are per- 
 formed in a different manner. " Some destroy 
 their victims by heavy blows from the metal 
 bangles, which they purchase at the fairs, and 
 wear on these occasions. If the poor creature 
 is not killed by two or three of these heavy 
 blows inflicted on his head, they strangle him 
 with a cleft bamboo, which they slip over his 
 neck. Others destroy their victims by placing 
 them on the ground bound hand and feet, with 
 their faces downward, and by throwing large 
 stones violently on the back of their necks, 
 until life becomes extinct. 
 
 " In Fatna the people do not use much of the 
 flesh of their victims, frequently none at all. 
 In some districts they cut out the liver, in 
 others the lungs, and after chopping them up 
 in small pieces, bury them. It is customary 
 among some tribes to^raw a cup full of blood 
 from the body, and elRh family takes a little 
 of it and sprinkles it on the floor of their 
 houses. While doing this they implore bless- 
 ings on their households and on their fields." 
 
 The victims whom the Khunds sacrifice are 
 generally bought or stolen from the low coun- 
 try, and sold to them. Sometimes they escape 
 from their owners and thus are saved from 
 death. After the arrival of the British troops 
 in the Khund country, a female found her way 
 to the collector's camp y^ith fetters on her legs. 
 She had escaped from those who had charge 
 of her, and said that she had been sold by her 
 own brother for the purpose of being sacrificed, 
 
 I will mention the case of another individual 
 who escaped from the Khunds, and this case 
 is the more interesting from the circumstance 
 that he has gone back to the hills to assist in 
 establishing and superintending schools. His 
 name is Joy Sing. He had witnessed one of 
 these sacrifices by stealth. He' had seen a 
 child put in the cleft of a small tree which had 
 been split for the purpose. He had seen 
 how the child was held fast in that position, 
 by the split parts of the tree having closed 
 upon its body ; and while it was thus secured, 
 he had seen the flesh cut from its bones. "We 
 shall not therefore wonder that he was filled 
 with horror at the thought of meeting such a 
 doom. Neither shall we wonder at his deter- 
 mination to make the very last possible effort 
 to free himself from the hands of his intended 
 murderers. The effort was made, but it was, 
 at first, unsuccessful. After traveling for two 
 days through the jungle, he was recaptured by 
 his owners and put in irons. His courage 
 however did not fail. He determined to make 
 another attempt to escape, though he could 
 only crawl along, in consequence of the irons 
 on his legs. Thus fettered, he traveled for two 
 days and two nights, and when he had just 
 reached the foot of the mountains, he again 
 espied those who were in pursuit of him. Pro. 
 
464 
 
 HINDOSTAN. 
 
 videntially Captain Millar, of whom I have 
 already spoken, had encamped near the place 
 where he was. To this encampment he hasten- 
 ed with all the speed which he could command 
 scarcely daring to look behind hin^and happi- 
 ly he reached it in safety. On his arrival he 
 endeavored to make known his tale of woe by 
 his looks and his tears, and those looks and 
 tears spoke a language which this officer could 
 not misunderstand. His irons were taken off 
 and he was once more free. 
 
 Of the children rescued from the Khunds 
 and others, many have been sent by the Bri- 
 tish Government to missionary schools. Con- 
 nected with a station, where a very dear fellow- 
 laborer of mine — the Rev. Mr. Wilkinson — 
 resides, a station about ten miles distant from 
 .the first range of mountains inhabited by the 
 Khunds, there are two schools, one for the 
 boys and the other for the girls who have been 
 rescued from this wretched people. Though 
 not altogether in pl^e, I cannot conclude 
 without mentioning airinteresting case or two 
 of children in coniiection with the subject 
 which is now before us. 
 
 A few years ago, a number of these resetted 
 victims arrived at the gate of the Mission 
 house, on their way to the sea-coast. The 
 children of the schools went out to see them. 
 Belonging to the female school there was a lit- 
 tle girl, who thought that she recognized her 
 brother among the strangers. In a few min- 
 utes she was seen conMng forward, leading him 
 by the hand, and was heard exclaiming with 
 joy, " I have found ray brother." Mr. Wilkin- 
 son said to her, " How do you know that he is 
 your brother? Perhaps you are mistaken." 
 " no, papa," said she, " I am not mistaken. 
 I thought, when I saw him at the gate, that he 
 looked just like a little brother I had when I 
 was taken from my home, only he was smaller. 
 So I said to myself, if he is my brother he 
 will know his own name. So I called out 
 Pod ! Pod ! and he lifted up his head and came 
 running to my arms." And this sister WTpt 
 over her little brother, and kissed him, and at 
 last catching him up, she bore him aw^ay to 
 her school-room. 
 
 The Rev. Mr. Sutton relates the case of two 
 brothers who met under similar circumstances. 
 They had both been sold at different times 
 to the Khunds, for sacrifices, by their unnatural 
 uncle. 
 
 Among the victims formerly rescued from 
 the Khunds, there was a very awkward lad, 
 who was called David. Great pains were 
 taken to instruct him, but he was so stupid 
 that all efforts appeared to be useless. At 
 last he was devoted to the work of sweeping 
 the premises of the Mission house. " At this 
 time," says Mr. Sutton, " our school was very 
 full, and many of the young natives had been 
 converted. All at once a ray of intelligence 
 seemed to break upon the mind of poor Da- 
 vid. He seemed suddenly to be possessed of 
 
 new faculties. All were astonished at his un- 
 derstanding and his answers. He now applied 
 himself so diligently, and was profited so much 
 by the instruction afforded, that he was subse- 
 quently received into the church. Soon after- 
 wards he was taken into the printing-office, 
 and as he made rapid advances in his new 
 business, he was made a compositor. W^iile 
 thus engaged, and amazing us all by his sud- 
 den proficiency, there appeared on his skin 
 numerous white spots — the first indications of 
 leprosy, a very common and also a very fatal 
 disease in India. We sent him to the hospital, 
 and every care was taken of him ; but each of 
 the white spots became a putrid ulcer, and his 
 limbs were much eaten away. Nothing could 
 arrest the progress of his malady, or save his 
 life, and as there was danger that he might 
 communicate his disease to others, by coming 
 in contact with them, the doctor directed that 
 he should be kept by himself. A tent was 
 provided for him, from which he would creep 
 at service time to the door of the meeting- 
 room and join in the service. A more inter- 
 ested listener I never beheld. One day I went 
 with my wife to pay him a visit. He was 
 stretched on his mat. His Testament was 
 close to his side. His hymn book was in his 
 hand, and we saw that his attention had been 
 rivited on the following verses : 
 
 " Of all that decks the field or bower, 
 Thoa art the fairest, sweetest flower ; 
 Then, blessed Jesus, let not me 
 In thy kind heart forgotten be. 
 
 " Day after day youth's joys decay, 
 Death waits to seize the trembling prey ; 
 Tl)>n, blessed Jesus, let not me 
 In thy kind heart forgotten be." 
 
 When we left his tent, my wife said to mo 
 with great emphasis and emotion, " There lies 
 an heir of glory, for though like Lazarus he is 
 full of sores, like Lazarus also, he is rich in 
 assured hope." I could not but concur in the 
 remark. 
 
 Soon after this the spirit of this afflicted but 
 happy youth took its flight, as we have every 
 reason to believe, to the bosom of his Saviour, 
 rescued by the British from the bands of the 
 cruel Khunds, and rescued from eternal tor- 
 ment in consequence of his having been sold 
 to them for the purpose of being sacrificed. 
 
 5. The law which declares that a native 
 shall forfeit his paternal inheritance by becom- 
 ing a Christian, has been abrogated. This 
 was a most formidable obstacle to the spread 
 of Christianity in this land, and I need hardly 
 add that this abrogation is a very powerful 
 blow to Hindooism. 
 
 6. Caste, the greatest obstacle to the spread 
 of Christianity in India, has in some degree 
 been put down. The government do not ac- 
 knowledge it in the army. The Pariahs and 
 the Brahmins are made to stand side by side 
 when employed on duty. The government also 
 disregard it in their educational institutions. 
 
HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 465 
 
 7. In the courts the practice of swearing is 
 ill some places changed, the Bible being sub- 
 stituted for the water of the Ganges : or the 
 witnesses make only a declaration that they 
 will speak the truth. I need hardly add that 
 all such changes are undermining the faith of 
 this people. 
 
 I have now mentioned a few things to show 
 you that India is in a much better condition for 
 the promotion of missionary labor than it was 
 when you and I commenced life ; and if we 
 further take into consideration the patronage 
 and the support which missionaries receive in 
 their work from the British government, what 
 greater encouragements can Christians at home 
 need to make this land a prominent field for 
 their exertions ? This latter consideration 
 should not be overlooked. I have again and 
 again said that if we were not under the pro- 
 tection of this government, our lives would 
 not be safe — humanly speaking — for an hour. 
 But I have said enough. that the misery 
 and dying groans of the 130,000,000 of India 
 might arrest the attention of the young men 
 of our churches in America, and constrain 
 them to flee to their help before it shall be too 
 late I Is it not enough that so many myriads 
 have already taken up their abode in hell for- 
 ever ? Very sincerely, J. Sgudder. 
 
 HITIAA : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, on Tahiti, South Seas. 
 
 HOBART TOWN : A station of the Wes- 
 leyan Missionary Society in New Zealand. 
 The town is delightfully situated upon two 
 hills, between which there runs a fine stream 
 of water from the heights of Table Mountain, 
 which towers above it. 
 
 HOLAPOOR : The capital of an indepen- 
 dent state in Southern Hindostan, with a pop- 
 ulation of 550,000. It is 130 miles south of 
 Ahmednuggur, and CO miles south of Satara. 
 It was occupied as a station of the American 
 Board in 1852, no missionary labor having 
 ever before been performed there. 
 
 HOME MISSIONS : This term is applied 
 to the work of preaching the Gospel* in the 
 destitute portions of our own country, planting 
 new churches in places where the people are 
 not able to do it themselves, and aiding feeble 
 churches to sustain the preaching of the Gos- 
 pel. And this work is increasing in interest 
 and magnitude as our territory is expanding, 
 and the destitute classes of our population are 
 multiplying by the immigration of hordes of 
 ignorant and unevangelized foreigners. Not 
 only the papists of Europe, but even the hea- 
 then from Asia, are coming to our shores ; and 
 if we do not wish to see the pagoda as well as 
 the cathedral established among us, we must 
 meet the case by the most vigorous applicar 
 tion of the means of grace to our whole popu- 
 lation. It is a significant Providence that is 
 casting upon our shores these unevangelized 
 multitudes, just at the time when we have 
 arrived at such national maturity and strength 
 30 
 
 as to be able to bear them, and when wo not 
 only have the means of giving them the Gos- 
 pel, but are considering how we may most 
 easily and successfully send it to all nations. 
 
 " It was about three-quarters of a century 
 after the landing of the Pilgrims at Plymouth 
 before anything answering to our present idea 
 of Home Missions was attempted, or in fact 
 needed. Churches were all the while slowly 
 colonizing, as new settlements were rising ; 
 but always through a self-sustaining process. 
 In the most missionary aspect of the work, ifc 
 was the bestowraent of a minister upon a new 
 congregation, by some older church that had 
 furnished itself with two. In this way an ap- 
 plication was answered that came to Boston in 
 1642, from "certain well disposed people in 
 the upper and newly settled parts of Virginia, 
 bewailing their sad condition for want of the 
 means of salvation, and earnestly entreating a 
 supply of faithful ministers, whom, upon expe- 
 rience of their gifts and godliness, they might 
 call to office." The request was read on " lec- 
 ture day " in Boston ; and after long consulta- 
 tion and prayer, it seemed good to the elders 
 of the churches to recommend two of their 
 number, Rev. Messrs. Knolls of Watertown 
 and Thompson of Braintree — each of which 
 had a teaching colleague — to go on this mis- 
 sion ; and they were accordingly dismissed by 
 their people, and went.* 
 
 " A nearer approach to Home Missions was 
 made about the year 1695, when several of the 
 98 churches then in Massachusetts were found 
 to be destitute of the stated means of grace 
 and unable to procure them ; — a circumstance 
 not more distressing to the vacant churches 
 themselves, than it was appalling to the guar- 
 dians of the Commonwealth. In the archives 
 of the State are to be found about 50 applica- 
 tions from feeble parishes, presented to the 
 Legislature between 1695 and 1711 ; and a 
 record of as many appropriations, amounting 
 in all to nearly £1,000, for their relief in sus- 
 taining the ministry. This plan, of course, 
 could not continue. 
 
 " The Society for Propagating the Gospel amo7ig 
 the Indians and others in North America, was 
 founded in 1787, and has the honor of being 
 the oldest incorporated missionary society in 
 the United States. A number of gentlemen, 
 residing in Boston and its vicinity, that year 
 received a commission from the ' Society in 
 Scotland for Promoting Christian Knowledge,' 
 to superintend funds which they had devoted 
 to the purpose of Christianizing the Indians in 
 this country. * This Board of Commissioners, 
 emulous to cooperate with their foreign breth- 
 ren in a cause so benevolent and honorable to 
 the Christian character, not only as their 
 agents, but also as principals, by raising funds 
 in America for the like purpose, formed them- 
 selves into a Society similar to that iij Scot- 
 
 Winthrdp's Journal, Vol. H. p. 
 
4e6 
 
 HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 land/ and obtained an act of incorporation. 
 At their request the I/?gislaturc also granted 
 a brief for a contribution in all the Conufrega- 
 tional churclu* throughout the State, — which, 
 however, yieldeil but $1,561. A larger sum 
 was soon after obtained by private subscrij)r 
 tion among the members of the Society. In 
 about 16 years the fund had increased to 
 ^23,417, and yielded an annual income of 
 $1,145 ; — which, since that time, has been ex- 
 pended partly among the Indians in different 
 sections of New England and New York, and 
 partly in new settlements, furnishing mission- 
 aries and Bibles, and supporting charity 
 schools. 
 
 " The Conned icxU Missionary Societu, though 
 not instituted till 1798, " may be said to have 
 existed in fact, though not in form, from 1792 ;" 
 for the General Association, which at first 
 composed the Society, obtained permission 
 that year from the Legislature to raise funds 
 for missionary purposes. Indeed, several mis- 
 sionaries are known to have gone into Ver- 
 mont and Western New York under the par 
 trona^e of that body as early as 1788. And 
 there is traditional authority for believing that 
 the ' grain of mustard €eed ' from which this 
 fruitful tree has grown, was a donation of 
 three dollars, which a poor but pious woman 
 put into her pastor's hand for a missionary 
 use. Not knowing through what channel to 
 appropriate the gift so as to answer the donor's 
 purpose, he took it with him to the General 
 Association, and sought counsel of his breth- 
 ren ; which resulted in this missionary move- 
 ment, whose original object was, * to Chris- 
 tianize the heathen in North America, and to 
 support and promote Christian knowledge in 
 the new settlements within the United States.' 
 
 " The Berkshire and Columbia Missionary So- 
 cidy was organized in 1798 for the purpose* of 
 ♦propagating the Gospel in the new settle- 
 ments, and among heathen nations.' Its first 
 name was 'The Congregational Missionary 
 Soeiety originated in the counties of Berkshire 
 fMass.) and Columbia (N. Y.) ;' and for a 
 few years it received about an equal share of 
 patronage from each State. Subsequently 
 most of the New York members became asso- 
 ciated with other organizations. When this 
 Society assumed an auxiliary relation to the 
 Massachusetts Home Missionary Society, it had 
 expended about $13,000 in sustaining, on an 
 average, four missionaries per annum, under a 
 commission for three months each — or one 
 minister through the year— besides a generous 
 distribution of books on the missionary fields, 
 and the establishment of nearly twenty ' cha- 
 ritable libraries.' 
 
 " T/ie New Hampshire Missionary Society was 
 instituted in 1801, for the purpose of ' sending 
 missionaries to destitute towns, parishes and 
 socicti^ within this State, and on the borders 
 of the same.' Provision was also made for 
 the distribution of religious books. It is now 
 
 auxiliary to the American Home Missionary 
 Society ; and besides supplying the necessities 
 within its own bounds, takes part each year 
 in the work of evangelizing the West. 
 
 " T/ie Hampshire Missionary Society was insti- 
 tuted at Northampton, Mass., in 1802, whose 
 ' object and business,' as stated in the Consti- 
 tution, is ' to promote the preaching and pro- 
 pagation of the Gospel of J esus Christ among 
 the inhabitants of the new settlements of the 
 United States, and the aboriginal nations of 
 the continent.' At first the Society covered 
 the ' Old County of Hampshire,' from which 
 Hampden and Franklin counties have since 
 been separated, and now sustain their own cha- 
 ritable associations. By obtaining from be- 
 nevolent individuals 'promissory notes with 
 good securities,' a permanent fund was early 
 created, which has since been increased by 
 legacies. The income from this fund, together 
 with the annual collections, usually amounts 
 to several thousand dollars a year ; which is 
 paid in part to the American Home Mission- 
 ary Society, and in part to the Massachusetts 
 Home Missionary Society, agreeably to the 
 terms on which its present auxiliary connection 
 is based. Previously to 1827, its independent 
 disbursements amounted to $33,000 for mis- 
 sionary service, and about $10,000 in the pur- 
 chase and distribution of Bibles and other re- 
 ligious books. Its missionaries labored chiefly 
 in Western New York and in Maine, from 
 four to six men being under commission from 
 three to six months each, on an average, per 
 annum. 
 
 " The Massachusetts Society for Promoting 
 Christian Knowledge, was instituted in 1803, 
 ' for the benevolent purpose of promoting 
 evangelical truth and piety ; in the first place, 
 by a charitable distribution of religious books 
 and tracts among poor and pious Christians, 
 and also among the inhabitants of new towns 
 and plantations ; and secondly, by supporting 
 charity schools and pious missionaries in 
 places where the means of religious instruction 
 are sparingly eujOyed.' The first distribution 
 of books was made in 1804. The first mis- 
 sionary was employed in 1811 ; and during the 
 subsequent ten or fifteen years the resources of 
 the Society, amounting sometimes to $2,000 
 per annum, were expended in circulating books 
 and in helping partially supplied churches to 
 a permanent ministry. These labors were be- 
 stowed in various parts of New England, but 
 more especially in New Hampshire. As its 
 original objects are now reached through the 
 Home Missionary and Tract Societies, its 
 present income is small, and is expended in 
 supplying destitute Sabbath-schools with li- 
 braries. 
 
 " The Rhode Island Home Missionary Society 
 arose about the same time ; the Maine Mission- 
 ary Society in 1807 ; and the Vermont Domestic 
 Missionary Society in 1818 ; — all of them hav- 
 ing similar objects, and all now sustaining an 
 
HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 467 
 
 auxiliary relation to tlie American Home Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 " The Massachusetts Missionary Society was 
 formed in Boston, May 28, 1799 ; the original 
 object of which was, * to diffuse the Gospel 
 among the heathen, as well as other people, in 
 the remote parts of our country, where Christ 
 is seldom or never preached.' But, having 
 subsequently become strictly a domestic mis- 
 sionary society, the name was (in 1844) chang- 
 ed to the Massachusetts Home Missionary Society. 
 
 " The Domestic Missionary Society of Massa- 
 chusetts Proper was formed by the General As- 
 sociation in 1818, to operate exclusively within 
 the State of Massachusetts. On the formation 
 of the American Home Missionary Society, in 
 1826, these societies united, and became aux- 
 iliary to the American Society, confining their 
 operations to Massachusetts. At this time, 
 one of them had 25 missionaries, mostly in 
 Maine, and the otlier about the same number 
 in Massachusetts."* 
 
 T/te Presbyterian ChurcJi in the United States 
 has been a missionary body from its organiza- 
 tion, in 1706, to the present time. For the 
 first ten years of its existence, its operations 
 were conducted by the original Presbytery of 
 Philadelphia, under whose direction such min- 
 isters as could be had went out into the waste 
 places, making known the Gospel. In 1717 
 the oversight of the missionary work was 
 transferred to the Synod of Philadelphia, and 
 after 24 years of labor, in the year 1741, the 
 oversight was given to the Synods of Phila- 
 delphia and New York united, and remained 
 with these bodies until the formation of the 
 General Assembly, in 1789. 
 
 The business of domestic missions was con- 
 ducted by the General Assembly, as a body, 
 from 1789 to 1802, but the work having be- 
 come extended, and increasing yearly, the as- 
 sembly appointed a "standing committee of 
 missions," and that committee made its first 
 annual report in May, 1803. In 1816, the 
 style of this committee was changed for that 
 of " The Board of Missions," which name it 
 still retains. "The Board, therefore, is no 
 new creation, but the old standing committee 
 of missions, under a new name, and with en- 
 larged membership and powers." The Board 
 now consists of 60 ministers and 36 laymen, 
 elected for four years, and arranged in four 
 classes, one of which goes out each year, when 
 a new class is elected. And the reason for the 
 election of so large a body, and those scatter- 
 ed over the United States, is to secure a quo- 
 rum for business at the annual meetings of the 
 General Assembly, which are held in various 
 sections of the union ; and besides this, the 
 field is so large, that it is found necessary to 
 have two executive committees, one located in 
 Philadelphia and the other in Louisville, and 
 the oversight of the several states is divided 
 between them. The work of church extension 
 
 * Rev. J. S. Clarke. 
 
 is also committed to this Board. The tollow- 
 ing summary of a single year's work will serve 
 as a fair specimen of what has been accom- 
 plished through its instrumentality : — In the 
 year ending May 1, 1853, the number of 
 churches and missionary stations supplied, was 
 838 : organized within the year, 32 churches : 
 admissions to the churches on examination, 
 1643 ; on certificate, 1287 ; total, 2930. Total 
 number in communion in these churches, 19,966. 
 The number of Sabbath-schools in these con- 
 gregations, 432; scholars, 19,123; baptisms, 
 1876 ; houses of worship erected or finished, 
 45. "The total amount of money paid out as 
 the cost of all these operations for the year, 
 was about sixty-eight thousand dollars. The 
 following extracts, from the report of the 
 Board for 1854, give an interesting view of 
 the progress of the work : — 
 
 " In 1828, the year of the re-organization of 
 the Board, there were but 31 missionaries, and 
 an income of $2,400 only. 
 
 " In 1830, two years after, there were 198 
 missionaries and an income of $12,632. In 
 1840, two years after the division of the Church, 
 and when the parts were fairly separated, there 
 were 256 missionaries, and an income of 
 $40,734. In 1850, the number of missionaries 
 was 570, and the receipts were $67,654 19. 
 This year, 1854, the number of missionaries re- 
 ported is 523, and the receipts were $75,207 80. 
 
 " Let us now glance at the expansion of onr 
 Church, which has been mainly effected by 
 missionary labor. We will begin with 1828. 
 the year of the re-organization of the Board. 
 
 Synods. P'bt'ries. Ministers. Ch'ches. Members 
 
 1828, 16, 90, 1,285, 1,968, 146,308. 
 
 1830, 19, 98, 1,491, 2,158, 173,329. 
 
 1840, 17, 95, 1,615, 1,673, 126,583. 
 
 1850, 23, 127, 1,926, 2,595, 207,254 
 
 1853, 28, 143, 2,139, 2,879, 219,263. 
 
 " In this brief reference to the fruits of mis- 
 sionary labor, as seen in the increase of Church- 
 es, and Presbyteries, and Synods, we have said 
 nothing of the thousands of religious volumes 
 and tracts distributed by our missionaries 
 throughout our country, the tens of thousands 
 of children gathered by them into Sabbath- 
 schools, the numerous Bible and catechetical 
 classes they have formed, the thousands of tem- 
 perance societies they have organized, the nu- 
 merous parochial schools, academies, and colleges 
 they have founded, nor of the various other in- 
 strumentalities which they have set in motion, 
 and which are silently, but effectively producing 
 a harvest of immeasurable good." 
 
 The following table is worthy of study. ^ It 
 tells its own story, as to the self-sacrificing 
 spirit of our Home Missionaries ; and it is 
 probably a fair specimen of the whole. 
 
 Table showing the returns of 342 missiona- 
 ries, laboring in 29 States and territories, of 
 amounts paid them by both people and Board, 
 and average salary in each State: amount-s 
 paid in each State by the Board, and general 
 
468 
 
 HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 average salary as paid by the people and the 
 Board, and by the Board alone for the year 
 1863-4. 
 
 STATES AND 
 lERRITORlHS. 
 
 u 
 
 .2.3 
 3 » . 
 
 In 
 
 1 
 ll 
 
 1^ 
 
 a $ 
 
 '■-SI 
 
 |8^ 
 
 1 \labama 
 
 2 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 83 
 
 39 
 
 15 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 17 
 
 33 
 
 8 
 
 32 
 
 2 
 
 57 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 24 
 
 11 
 
 $820 
 2,450 
 
 600 
 
 600 
 
 1,250 
 
 1,543 
 
 11,846 
 
 15,101 
 
 5,391 
 
 2,780 
 
 650 
 
 5,977 
 
 2,392 
 
 600 
 
 625 
 
 3,929 
 
 6,395 
 
 15,351 
 
 2,935 
 
 10,484 
 
 825 
 
 22,653 
 
 275 
 
 1,882 
 
 6,265 
 
 10,322 
 
 3,725 
 
 $410 
 613 
 
 600 
 
 600 
 625 
 309 
 369 
 387 
 359 
 348 
 651 
 498 
 478 
 600 
 625 
 393 
 376 
 465 
 367 
 328 
 413 
 397 
 275 
 376 
 522 
 430 
 339 
 
 200 
 
 2 Ark<iUHft.s , , , 
 
 700 
 
 a California 
 
 4. Connecticut 
 
 6. Delaware 
 
 300 
 
 6. IMst. of Columbia. 
 
 7. Florida 
 
 300 
 550 
 
 8. Georgia 
 
 568 
 
 9. Illinois 
 
 4,563 
 
 10. Indiana 
 
 4,850 
 
 11. Iowa 
 
 2,600 
 
 12. Kentucky 
 
 13. Ix)uisiaua 
 
 14. Maryland 
 
 1,320 
 ■ 250 
 2,160 
 
 15 Michigan 
 
 1,100 
 
 16. Minnesota 
 
 17. Mississippi 
 
 18. Missouri 
 
 500 
 
 175 
 
 1,780 
 
 19. New Jersey 
 
 20. New York 
 
 21. North Carolina.... 
 
 22. Ohio 
 
 2,725 
 6,010 
 1,025 
 3,083 
 
 23. Oregon 
 
 24. Pennsvlvania 
 
 25. South Carolina.... 
 
 26. Tennesse 
 
 #600 
 
 7,078 
 
 75 
 
 750 
 
 27. Texas 
 
 2,750 
 
 28. Virginia 
 
 3,490 
 
 29. Wisconsin 
 
 No. of Miss, reported, 
 
 2,430 
 
 342 
 
 $137,666 
 
 
 $61,832 
 
 Arerage salary of missionaries (from all sources) $403. 
 Average salary of missionaries paid by the Board, $162. 
 
 American Home Missionary Society. — A de- 
 sire having arisen for a more general coopera- 
 tion, in the prosecution of Domestic Missions, 
 on the part of several denominations which 
 harmonized in doctrinal views, preliminary 
 meetings were held in Boston for consultation ; 
 and on the 13th of March, 1826, a circular was 
 issued by tie- Executive Committee of the 
 United Domestic Missionary Society of New 
 Tork, inviting a meeting of the friends of 
 the cause, which took place in the Brick 
 Church, New York, May 10, 1826, when 
 the society was formed, and a constitution 
 adopted. At its next anniversary, the United 
 Domestic Missionary Society was dissolved, 
 and its life members and life directors became 
 life members and life directors of the new so- 
 ciety ; and subsequently, the several State so- 
 cieties of the New England States became 
 auxiliary to the American Home Missionary 
 Society, on the principle of first supplying the 
 wants of their own States, and paying over to 
 the American Society their surplus funds, their 
 missionaries being commissioned by the parent 
 society. 
 
 This society is composed of life members, 
 who have become such by the payment of $30, 
 
 who now number nearly 8000. Its ^t presi- 
 dent was Hon. Stephen Van Rciisselaer, of 
 Albany, N. Y., and its first secretary, lie v. 
 Absalom Peters. Its affairs arc managed by an 
 Executive Committee of 14 members, clergymen 
 and laymen, all located in the city of New York. 
 
 Summary. — The society has existed for 
 twenty-eight years. The total amount of re- 
 ceipts, for this time, is $2,728,363 71. The 
 total number of missionaries employed, is about 
 5,400. The total number of years of labor, is 
 15,706. The total number of preaching stations 
 is about 4,000. The total number of churches 
 that have become self-supporting through this 
 society's aid, is nearly 1 ,000. The total of addi- 
 tions to the churches, is 126,705. 
 
 Interesting and important facts and compari- 
 sons. — When the society concluded its first 
 year, 120 out of its 169 missionaries for that 
 period, or nearly three-fourths, had been employ- 
 ed in the single State of New York, and onl)^ 
 thirty-three, or about one-fifth in the Mississippi 
 Valley. The largest item in its receipts was 
 less than $6,000, which included all the contri- 
 butions of auxiliary and allied associations. 
 Its foremost contributor was the " Geneva 
 Agency," which furnished the sum of $2313 
 36. When the society concluded its twenty- 
 eighth year, 153, or little more than one- 
 seventh of its missionaries had been employed 
 during the year, in the State of New York, 
 while 530 out of 1047 (or more than one-half j, 
 had labored at the West. Its foremost contri- 
 butor, the Auxiliary Society of Massachusetts, 
 alone,raised more than $46,000 (or $6,000 more 
 than twice the whole income of the national 
 Society in 1827,) of which over $38,000 went 
 for the benefit of the new settlements. The 
 first year, 11 years of labor were performed ; 
 in the twenty-eighth year, 870 years. The 
 number of Sabbath-school scholars now con- 
 nected with its churches, amounts to more than 
 65,000. In its last year, 65 houses of worship 
 were built by congregations receiving its aid ; 
 49 repaired or improved, while 88 remain in 
 process of erection, and 20 churches have built 
 parsonages. The society needs about 200 new 
 missionaries, annually. 
 
 The direction of the society's growth is 
 shown in the following table : 
 
 In 1827, Ohio 
 " " Indiana 
 « " Illinois 
 " " Missouri 
 " " Michigan 
 " 1836, Wisconsin 
 Iowa 
 
 California ) ,, 
 & Oregon f 
 
 At the same time its labors have also been 
 much extended in the older States. 
 
 Benefit to particular States and Sections. — It 
 is estimated that one-half of the churches 
 in New England have received mission- 
 ary aid — most of them from this society, 
 through its auxiliaries ; and in Maine and Ver- 
 
 bad 16 missionaries • 
 
 in 1854, 110 
 
 " 3 
 
 (' 
 
 .< .< 43 
 
 " 2 
 
 
 " •' 106 
 
 '* 3 
 
 
 <« «< 28 
 
 «j 4 
 
 
 " » 76 
 
 " 1 
 
 
 « .< 87 
 
 « 2 
 
 
 «< «' 66 
 
 1847, 
 
 12 
 
HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 469 
 
 mont, three-fourth of the churches ; in Central 
 and Western JS'ew York, Jive-sixtlis, and in the 
 states north-west of the Ohio river, out of 
 1,200, all but about 50, or eleven-twelfths. 
 
 The operations of this society from year to 
 year, its regular increase of means and labors, 
 with the results, will all be seen in the follow- 
 ing 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 Society's 
 Years. 
 
 Receipts. 
 
 Expenditures 
 
 s 
 
 S5^ 
 
 r Congre- 
 ns and 
 onary 
 icts. 
 
 1 
 
 li 
 
 O o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 1- 
 
 |ll 
 
 No. 0) 
 gatio 
 Missi 
 Distr 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 111 
 
 
 m 
 
 l_1826-27 
 
 $18,140.76 
 
 $13,984.17 
 
 169 
 
 68 
 
 196 
 
 110 
 
 not rep 
 
 not rep 
 
 $127 
 
 $ 83 
 
 2—1827-28 
 
 20,035.78 
 
 17,849.22 
 
 201 
 
 89 
 
 244 
 
 133 
 
 1,000 
 
 306 
 
 134 
 
 89 
 
 3—1828-29 
 
 26,997.31 
 
 26,814.96 
 
 304 
 
 169 
 
 401 
 
 186 
 
 1,678 
 
 423 
 
 144 
 
 88 
 
 4—1829 30 
 
 33,929.44 
 
 42,429.60 
 
 392 
 
 166 
 
 500 
 
 274 
 
 1,959 
 
 572 
 
 155 
 
 108 
 
 5_1830-31 
 
 48,124.73 
 
 47,247.60 
 
 463 
 
 164 
 
 577 _ 
 
 294 
 
 ^2,5^2 
 
 im 
 
 160 
 
 102 
 
 6—1831-32 
 
 49,422.i2 
 
 52,808.39 
 
 509 
 
 158 
 
 745 
 
 361 
 
 6,126 
 
 783 
 
 146 
 
 104 
 
 7—1832-33 
 
 68,627.17 
 
 66,277.96 
 
 606 
 
 209 
 
 801 
 
 417 
 
 4,284 
 
 1,148 
 
 159 
 
 109 
 
 8—1833-34 
 
 78,911.44 
 
 80,015.76 
 
 676 
 
 200 
 
 899 
 
 463 
 
 2.736 
 
 Pupils. 
 
 172 
 
 118 
 
 9—1834-35 
 
 88,863.22 
 
 83,394.28 
 
 719 
 
 204 
 
 1,050 
 
 490 
 
 3,300 
 
 52,000 
 
 170 
 
 116 
 
 10—1835-36 
 
 101,565.15 
 
 92,188.94 
 
 755 
 
 249 
 
 1,000 
 
 545 
 
 3,750 
 
 65,000 
 
 169 
 
 122 
 
 11—1836-37 
 
 85,701.59 
 
 99,529.72 
 
 810 
 
 232 
 
 1,025 
 
 554 
 
 3,752 
 
 80,000 
 
 180 
 
 123 
 
 12—1837-38 
 
 86,522.45 
 
 85,066.26 
 
 684 
 
 123 
 
 840 
 
 438 
 
 3.376 
 
 67,000 
 
 194 
 
 124 
 
 13—1838-39 
 
 82,564.63 
 
 82,655,64 
 
 665 
 
 201 
 
 794 
 
 473 
 
 3,920 
 
 58,500 
 
 175 
 
 124 
 
 U-1SS9~4:0 
 
 78,345.20 
 
 78,533,89 
 
 680 
 
 194 
 
 842 
 
 486 
 
 4,750 
 
 60,000 
 
 162 
 
 115 
 
 15-^1840-41 
 
 85,413.34 
 
 84.864.06 
 
 690 
 
 178 
 
 862, 
 
 601 
 
 4,618 
 
 54,100 
 
 169 
 
 123 
 
 16—1841-42 
 
 92,463.61 
 
 94,300.12 
 
 751 
 
 248 
 
 987 
 
 ' 594 
 
 '5,ol4 
 
 64,300 
 
 BO 
 
 119 
 
 17—1842-43 
 
 99,812.24 
 
 98,215.11 
 
 848 
 
 225 
 
 1,047 
 
 657 
 
 8,223 
 
 68,400 
 
 149 
 
 116 
 
 18—1843-44 
 
 101,904.99 
 
 104,276.47 
 
 907 
 
 237 
 
 1,245 
 
 665 
 
 7,693 
 
 60,300 157 
 
 115 
 
 19 1844-45 
 
 121,946.28 
 
 118,360.12 
 
 943 
 
 209 
 
 1,285 
 
 736 
 
 4,929 
 
 60,000 
 
 160 
 
 126 
 
 20—1845-46 
 
 125,124.70 
 
 126,193.15 
 
 971 
 
 223 
 
 1,453 
 
 760 
 
 5,311 
 
 76,700 
 
 166 
 
 130 
 
 21—1846-47 
 
 116,617.94 
 
 119,170.40 
 
 972 
 
 189 
 
 1,470 
 
 713 
 
 4,400 
 
 73,000 
 
 167 
 
 123 
 
 22—1847-48 
 
 140,197.10 
 
 139,233.34 
 
 1,006 
 
 205 
 
 1,447 
 
 773 
 
 6,020 
 
 77,000 
 
 180 
 
 138 
 
 23—1848-49 
 
 145,925.91 
 
 143,771.67 
 
 1,019 
 
 192 
 
 1,510 
 
 808 
 
 5,550 
 
 83,500 
 
 178 
 
 141 
 
 24—1849-50 
 
 157,160,78 
 
 145,456,09 
 
 1,032 
 
 205 
 
 1,575 
 
 812 
 
 6,682 
 
 75,000 
 
 179 
 
 141 
 
 25—1850-51 
 
 150',940.25 
 
 153,817.90 
 
 1,065 
 
 211 
 
 1,820 
 
 853 
 
 6,678 
 
 70,000 
 
 180 
 
 144 
 
 26—1851-52 
 
 160,062.25 
 
 162,831.14 
 
 1,065 
 
 204 
 
 1,948 
 
 862 
 
 6,820 
 
 66,500 
 
 189 
 
 153 
 
 27—1852-53 
 
 171,734.24 
 
 174,439.24 
 
 1,087 
 
 213 
 
 2,160 
 
 878 
 
 6,079 
 
 72,500 
 
 199 
 
 160 
 
 28—1853-54 
 
 191,209.07 
 
 184,025.76 
 
 1,047 
 
 167 
 
 2,140 
 
 870 
 
 6,025 
 
 65,400 
 
 212 
 
 171 
 
 Remarks. — The influence of this society, how- 
 ever, can hardly be estimated in figures, and is 
 not easily described in words. Its missionaries 
 are not merely pastors and preachers, they are 
 founders of schools, colleges, and theological 
 seminaries. They labor not merely in the pul- 
 pit, the conference-room, and by the bed-side of 
 the sick and the dying ; but they are abroad in 
 the world, laying the foundations of the 
 country's future, through labors, specific, and 
 direct, as well as in the general influences of 
 their sacred calling, and of the religious insti- 
 tutions that they buil'd. 
 
 Methodist Home 31issions. — The Methodist 
 Home Missions in the United States are those 
 sustained by the Methodist Episcopal Church, 
 the Methodist E. Church South, and the Pro- 
 testant Methodist Church. The mode of opera- 
 tion in raising and appropriating funds for 
 Domestic Missions is so much alike in each of 
 these churches, that one description will do for 
 
 all. There is no separate Home Missionary 
 Fund in any of these bodies. What they 
 raise for missions, is raised without any par- 
 ticular designation. But out of the whole sum 
 subscribed by the church, a certain proportion 
 is set apart for the support of Home Missions. 
 In the month of November of each year, the 
 General Missionary Committee, the Board of 
 Managers, and the Bishops of the Methodist 
 E. Church, meet together in New-York, in 
 order to make the appropriations for missions 
 for the ensuing year. This committee, after 
 having disposed of the foreign missions, takes 
 up the domestic missions. First, the missions 
 to the Germans in the United States and Ter- 
 ritories are taken up by the conferences, and 
 considered one by one, and the amount neces- 
 sary for each conference set down ; then the 
 missions to the foreign population other than 
 German are taken up and considered, and the 
 amount necessary set down ; then the domestic 
 
470 
 
 nOME MISSIONS. 
 
 English Missions iu each annual conference are 
 taken up, and the amount necessary to enable 
 each annual conference to carry on its own 
 domestic missions is determined, and set down 
 to each conference. This committee deter- 
 mines the amount for which each bishop may 
 draw for the domestic missions of those con- 
 ferences over which he shall preside, and he 
 cannot draw on the treasurer for more than this 
 amount. The J5ooA; of Discipline (Part III. ch. 
 iv.) prescribes the plan for raising the funds 
 thus appropriated. The leading provisions 
 are : (1) Each conference has an auxiliary to 
 the parent society ; (2) Every church within 
 the bounds of that conference is to have a mis- 
 sionary committee, to aid in carrying into 
 efftct the disciplinary measures for the support 
 of missions ; (3) In each church suitable mis- 
 sionary collectors are appointed to solicit sub- 
 scriptions ; (4) One Sabbath in the year is 
 given to the advocacy of this cause, when a 
 public collection is usually taken up ; (5) A 
 transcript return of all subscriptions of fifty 
 cents and upwards, is to be reported at Con- 
 ference for insertion in the Annual Report of 
 the Conference Missionary Societies. 
 
 The moneys appropriated for domestic mis- 
 sions are placed to the credit of the confer- 
 ences, severally, which have charge of these 
 missions. In each of the annual conferences 
 there is a mission committee, appointed at each 
 session, whose duty it is, in conjunction with 
 the bishop presiding, to make the estimate for 
 each mission under the care of the conference ; 
 and the estimates must be kept within the 
 credit allowed to the conference for its mis- 
 sions, and, further, must receive the sanction 
 of the bidiop presiding. Thus, it will be seen 
 that each conference is responsible for the use 
 made of the money placed to its credit for the 
 support of the missions under its care. The 
 conference missionary committee for estimating 
 for the support of the missions under its care, 
 can obtain all information of the condition 
 and prospects of each of their missions, and 
 hence make just estimates; and when these 
 estimates are made, they are brought to the 
 notice of the bishop in council with all the pre- 
 siding elders, so that the bishop has an oppor- 
 tunity of thoroughly understanding each case, 
 and thus is *^nabled to give or withhold his 
 sanction. When the estimates are approved 
 by the bishop, he draws on the treasurer at 
 New York for the same, in quarterly drafts, 
 in favor of each presiding elder, for the amount 
 estimated for the missions in his district, and 
 under his direction. In the expenditure of 
 the moneys appropriated for these missions, 
 the Board of Managers at New York are in 
 no way responsible ; but each conference and 
 the bishop presiding are responsible for the 
 specific appropriations made to the missions 
 under its care. 
 
 The Domestic Missions of the M. E. Church 
 are (1) : Missions to those who speak the Eng- 
 
 lish language in the destitute, or new por- 
 tions of the country; (2) To for cigTieis Vfho 
 have settled together in various portions of 
 the country, and in particular quarters of our 
 cities ; (3) Besides these they have also an 
 interesing mission to New Mexico. Of these, 
 the missions to the Germans are the most nu- 
 merous and successful ; but they have also 
 missions to the Swedes, Daises, Norwegians, 
 Welsh, and French. 
 
 The missions to people who speak the Eng- 
 lish language are instituted by the bishop and 
 council of presiding elders of each conference, 
 within whose bounds such mission fields lie ; 
 and the appropriations for the same are re- 
 ported to the conference for its approbation. 
 As these English domestic missions become 
 strong, they cease to be missions, and become 
 self-supporting churches, and in their turn con- 
 tribute to sustain other new or promising fields 
 of labor. 
 
 The missions to the foreign populations 
 which have settled in the country, and still 
 speak their own language, sprung up among 
 these people spontaneously. Individuals were 
 converted under the ordinary ministration of 
 the Gospel, and they began to declare to their 
 countrjTnen what they had experienced. The 
 work among the Germans began about seven- 
 teen years ago. Now there are 160 mission- 
 aries and 11,000 members, with numerous Sun- 
 day-schools, and a few day-schools. These 
 missions in the United States have reacted on 
 Germany, and produced the Foreign German 
 Missions. 
 
 Then there are the Scandinavian Missions to 
 the Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes. Of these 
 people the Swedes are the most numerous in 
 this country, and the missions are more exten- 
 sive among them. The Norwegians also have 
 received the Gospel gladly, and have carried 
 it back to Norway ; and have thus laid the 
 foundation of a mission there. The centre of 
 the missions to the Sclavonic people from the 
 north-west of Europe, is in New York, where 
 they all land. The Bethel-ship, John Wesley, 
 in the North River, is the place where, upon 
 landing, they hear for the first time the simple, 
 spiritual preaching of the Gospel of Christ. 
 These missions took form nine years ago, in 
 the city of New York, under the labors of the 
 Rev. 0. G Hedstrom. 
 
 Besides these, there are missions to the 
 Welsh and French immigrants, as will appear 
 in the table. 
 
 Oregon and California have hitherto been 
 placed among foreign missions, owing to their 
 distance, the peculiarities of their population, 
 and their dependence upon the Missionary 
 Society. It has pleased God to give the 
 Methodist Episcopal Church the earliest, and, 
 as yet, the widest and strongest occupancy of 
 these new countries. Hitherto this body have 
 prosecuted these missions vigorously and suc- 
 cessfully. They have sent a large proportion 
 
HOSfE MISSIONS. 
 
 471 
 
 of their best men into these missions ; and the 
 last General Conference judged it best to grant 
 their request to be organized each into a regu- 
 lar independent annual conference. From the 
 time of their meeting, in the spring of 1853, 
 under the presidency of Bishop Ames, they took 
 their places among their sister conferences. 
 
 The mission to New Mexico was commenced 
 about five years ago, by the Rev. E. Z. Nich- 
 olson. It was for a while suspended, but has 
 been again renewed. Santa F'e is its central 
 position. Mr. Nicholson is the superintendent, 
 having for his assistants, the Eev. Messrs. W. 
 Hansen and Benigno Cardenas. Mr. Hansen 
 is the fruit of the Swedish mission in New 
 York, and being able to preach in Spanish, 
 had long desired to go to Mexico as a mission- 
 ary. Benigno Cardenas had been an intelli- 
 'gent and well-educated Roman Catholic priest 
 of much influence at Santa Fe, and a preacher 
 of considerable eloquence. During Mr. Nich- 
 olson's previous residence in that city, Cardenas 
 had freely conversed with him upon the errors 
 of the Church of Rome, and the nature of 
 evangelical religion. He afterwards left Mex- 
 ico and visited Rome, and returned by way of 
 London, where he called upon the Rev. Mr. 
 
 Rule, who had long been a Wesleyan mission- 
 ary in Spain. There he remained for several 
 weeks, and his mind and heart underwent such 
 a change, that he renounced popery for ever, 
 and cordially embraced the Gospel of Christ. 
 He then ofiered himself to the Missionary So- 
 ciety of the Methodist Episcopal Church, as a 
 missionary for his native Mexico, where he is 
 now zealously and usefully employed. 
 
 The Methodist E. Church, South, has 
 missions in the United States : — (1) In the 
 destitute portions of their regular work ; (2) 
 Among the people of color ; (3) Among the 
 German emigrants ; and (4) In California. 
 But these missions are so like those we have 
 described, that w^e need only thus enumerate 
 them and refer to the annexed table for full 
 information. The mode of raising the money 
 is also the same as that given above. 
 
 Hie Methodist Protestant Church has 99 
 missions in the destitute portions of their regu- 
 lar work ; they have no others. 
 
 The following tables contain the results. 
 Some of the statistics are for 1853, but most 
 of them for the present year. We have made 
 the tables as complete as we could, some of 
 the Reports being quite defective. 
 
 METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH. 
 
 MISSIONS, 
 
 1 
 
 493 
 
 53 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 .2 
 
 jj 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 Missionary- 
 Contributions. 
 
 1 
 
 English Domestic Missions 
 German Domestic Missions 
 Swedish and Norwegian . 
 Welsh Mission .... 
 
 
 505 
 
 160 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 80 
 
 8 
 1 
 
 33 
 2 
 
 35,830 
 
 11,000 
 
 526 
 
 427 
 
 43 
 
 6839 
 
 271 
 
 27 
 9 
 
 27 
 
 132 
 
 8 
 2 
 
 42 
 
 $2,885.08 
 142 
 132.90 
 
 French Mission .... 
 
 
 New Mexican Mission . 
 
 
 Totals ........ 
 
 567 
 
 697 
 
 89 
 
 35 
 
 47,826 
 
 7173 
 
 142 
 
 42 
 
 $3159.98 
 
 METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH SOUTH. 
 
 MISSIOXS. 
 
 English Domestic Missions ■ 
 Missions among the Slaves • 
 
 German Missions 
 
 California Mission 
 
 Totals 350 262 
 
 26,176 
 38,844 
 
 141 
 
 XI o 
 X>M 
 
 5413 
 
 17,244 
 
 217 
 
 147 22,928 
 
 It is now thirty-five years since the Metho- 
 dist E. Church began her domestic missionary 
 operations. At the end of the year 
 
 Missions. Missionaries. Members. 
 
 1829 there were 37 
 
 30 
 
 9,539 
 
 1839 « <' 140 
 
 164 
 
 18,700 
 
 1849 " " 250 
 
 275 
 
 29,124 
 
 1854 " " 568 
 
 698 
 
 47,881 
 
 The entire expenditure during this period 
 has been about $1,000,000.— Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 American Baptist Home Missionary Society. 
 — At a meeting of the Baptist Missionary 
 Society of Massachusetts, held in Boston, in 
 November, 1832, the spiritual destitution of 
 many of the new states, and especially of the 
 Mississippi Valley, having been made a subject 
 of consideration, it was resolved to take mea- 
 sures for the awakening of interest and system- 
 atic effort, throughout the Baptist community, 
 in behalf of domestic missions. Resolutions 
 were passed, recommending the formation of a 
 General Home Mission Society, and appoint- 
 ing Rev. Jonathan Going, of Worcester, Mass., 
 an agent on the part of the Massachusetts So- 
 ciety, for the accomplishment of this plan. In 
 New York and Philadelphia the proposal was 
 favorably received. A provisional executive 
 Committee was elected in New York city, by 
 
472 
 
 HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 whom measures were taken, initiatory to a 
 convontiou of members of the denomination 
 from ttll parts of the union, for the purpose of 
 form i nV iin organ ization. This convention was 
 held in the Baptist church, in Mulberry^treet, 
 Kew York, on the 27th of April, 1832 ; four- 
 teen of the states and one territory being re- 
 presented by delegates. The American Bap- 
 tist Home JMissionary Society was formed, a 
 constitution adopted, and Hon. Heman Lin- 
 coln, of Massachusetts was elected president. 
 
 The plan of operations adopted by the exe- 
 cutive committee proposes : First, to obtain 
 and disseminate information respecting the mo- 
 ral condition of the country — especially the 
 Mississippi Valley. Second, to excite the entire 
 Baptist community to systematic, liberal, and 
 vigorous action, in support of missionary ef- 
 fort. Third, to establish state agencies, em- 
 ploying and sending to destitute regions, min- 
 isters of suitable qualifications. Fourth, the 
 collection of the necessary funds. 
 
 It was proposed to raise {$10,000 the first 
 year. The receipts amounted, however, to but 
 37,586 73, which was expended in the support 
 of 59 missionaries and agents, some of whom 
 labored only during a part of the year. Twen- 
 ty-two were appointed by the Kentucky Bap- 
 tist Convention, a separate and preexisting 
 organization. Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio 
 and Michigan chiefly formed the field of the 
 first year's operations. The receipts of the so- 
 ciety, in 1836, had risen to $16,910 ; 115 mis- 
 sionaries and agents had been employed dur- 
 ing the year, in fourteen states, two terri- 
 tories and two provinces. In 1838, 317 mis- 
 sionaries were employed during the year. 
 The annual receipts varied from 1838 to 1841, 
 from $10,000 to $20,000. In 1841, 82 agents 
 and missionaries were commissioned, who 
 occupied 300 stations, preached 10,922 ser- 
 mons, traveling 73,451 miles. The auxiliary 
 Baptist societies employed 233 laborers, mak- 
 ing a total of 315. 
 
 The society now began to receive, from the 
 churches aided, new and active auxiliaries, 
 " who will continue to repay, with large inte- 
 rest, the debt of gratitude, until their charac- 
 ter of debtors will be lost in that of benefac- 
 tors. At the annual meeting in 1842, it was 
 resolved to commence a mission to the Jews 
 in North America, provided suflBcient funds 
 should be specifically contributed for its sup- 
 port. The receipts, for this year, including 
 those of auxiliaries, rose to $57,154 72. Total 
 number of missionaries, 367. During the ten 
 years of the society's existence, from 1832, to 
 1842, great results had been eflected through 
 its instrumentality, in Kentucky, Missouri, In- 
 diana, and Michigan. Previous to 1832, tliere 
 were in those states but 955 Baptist churches, 
 484 ministers — ten only being pastors. There 
 was an anti-missionary spirit prevalent 
 among the ministers and churches, and scarce- 
 ly anything was contributed for benevolent 
 
 objects. In 1842, there were in the same 
 states, 1689 churches, with 772 ministers, of 
 whom 99 were pastors. The anti-missionary 
 spirit had greatly decreased, and $6,24 f) had 
 been then contributed for benevolent purposes. 
 In 1832, there was but one (Baptist) scientific 
 and theological institution ; in 1842 several 
 had been established. During the ten years, 
 756 missionaries had been employed by the 
 society, generally west of the Alleghanies; 
 732 destitute churches and stations had been 
 supplied ; 10,990 persons baptized, 401 
 churches organized, 142 ministers ordained. 
 
 During the decade, from 1842 to 1852, the 
 society extended its operations to Florida, 
 Arkansas, Iowa, and Wisconsin, and greatly 
 increased its labors in the Mississippi Valley. 
 In the year 1845, a controversy upon the sub- 
 ject of domestic slavery, which had existed in 
 the society for some years, reached its crisis, 
 and produced a separation. A missionary 
 body was then organized in the slaveholding 
 states, which has since received the support of 
 the majority of southern Baptists. Since 
 then, the operations of the society, with two 
 exceptions, have been directed to the free 
 states and territories only. From 1842 to 
 1852, 877 ministers were employed, 9,468 per- 
 sons baptized, 354 churches organized, 246 
 ministers ordained. In mission fields, 105 
 houses of worship had been built, and $18,845. 
 57 contributed to benevolent objects ; 65 of 
 the churches once aided, were sustaining the 
 Gospel themselves. In 1852, three mission- 
 aries were sent to Oregon and California ; one 
 to an Indian tribe in New Mexico : a Chip- 
 pewa to his countrymen. In 1854, the execu- 
 tive Board resolved to take measures for the 
 establishment of a church edifice fund. The 
 society, from its commencement, has had in 
 its employ 1750 missionaries and agents. 
 They have in the field at present, 184. The 
 entire amount of their receipts, from the be- 
 ginning, is $430,170. From New York State, 
 $160,039 of this sum. Eeceipts for the fiscal 
 year, ending 31st March, 1854, $62,730 26. 
 
 During the past 22 years, the missionaries 
 of the society nave baptized 22,814 persons, 
 organized 911 churches, ordained 466 minis- 
 ters ; and the people among whom the;^ have 
 labored have built, and in most cases paid for, 
 178 houses of worship. About 200,000 chil- 
 dren have been gathered into Sabbath-schools ; 
 and the Gospel has been preached in fourteen 
 different languages. For the past year, the 
 missionaries report the baptism of 1,322 per- 
 sons, the organization of 67 churches, the ordi- 
 nation of 30 ministers : 46 church edifices have 
 been built, or are in progress of erection. 
 About 163 have been baptized from the Cath- 
 olics and Lutherans. 
 
 Southern Baptist Board of Domestic Missions. 
 — In 1845, owing to controversy arising from 
 the discussion of slaveholding, a large number 
 of the Southern Baptist churches withdrew 
 
HOME MISSIONS. 
 
 473 
 
 from the American Baptist Home Missionary 
 Society, and a Board of Domestic Missions 
 was formed, in connection with the Southern 
 Baptist Convention. The receipts of this 
 Board, for 1852, amounted to $10,939 15 ; for 
 
 1853, to $13,074 17. During 1853, 66 mis- 
 sionaries and agents were commissioned by 
 this Board, a large number of whom have 
 labored in the rapidly growing cities on the 
 southern Mississippi and Atlantic seaboard. 
 The reports are imperfect ; 217 stations have 
 been supplied, 5,958 sermons and addresses 
 delivered, 1,521 prayer and other religious 
 meetings attended, 642 persons have been bap- 
 tized, 381 added by letter, 763 converted, not 
 baptized — making 1,786 substantial additions 
 to the strength of our cause, in place of 1,109 
 last year. 65,182 miles have been traveled, 
 8,712 religious visits made ; 59 Sabbath- 
 schools and Bible classes, 218 teachers, and 
 2,105 pupils are reported. These latter statis- 
 tics are, however, exceedingly deficient. 17 
 meeting-houses are reported as commenced, 13 
 finished ; 21 churches have been constituted, 
 24 ministers and 34 deacons ordained ; 8 are 
 preparing for the ministry. 
 
 What is doing by this Board, is as nothing 
 to what is being carried on for domestic mis- 
 sions by the denomination, through otlier chan- 
 nels. The General Association of Baptists in 
 Virginia, proposed to raise and expend $10,000 
 in domestic missions during the year 1853. 
 Nor does this include the whole of what is 
 done in that State, a single association raising 
 some $3,000 or $4,000 more. In most, if not 
 all, of the states of the South and South-west, 
 associations are carrying on, independently of 
 any State organization, a system of missions 
 within their own borders. 
 
 Board of Domestic Missions of the Protestant 
 Episcopal Church. — For a history of the organ- 
 ization and constitution of this Board, toge- 
 ther with its annual and aggregate receipts, 
 see Episcopal Board of Missions. The account 
 is given in that place, rather than this, because 
 of the intimate connection between the foreign 
 and domestic boards. The Board now have 
 under their charge 105 churches or stations, 
 13 of which are vacant. They have in their 
 employ 92 missionaries, and 8 missionary 
 bishops. These missionaries are distributed 
 as follows : in Maine, 2 ; New Hampshire, 3 ; 
 Delaware, 2 ; Florida, 1 ; Alabama, 7 ; Lou- 
 isiana, 1 ; Mississippi, 5 ; Tennessee, 4 ; Ken- 
 tucky, 3 ; Indiana, 9 ; Illinois, 11 ; Michigan, 
 9 ; Wisconsin, 11 ; Iowa, 9 ; Minnesota, 3 ; 
 Missouri, 3 ; Arkansas, 1 ; Texas, 6 ; Indian 
 Mission, 1 ; California, 1 (bishop) ; Oregon, 3. 
 
 The amount of donations received for the 
 financial year ending Sept. 30, 1853, was 
 $23,856 ; and from Oct. 1, 1853, to Aug. 15, 
 
 1854, $36,327. The aggregate amount of do- 
 nations from the beginning is $626,751. 
 
 But a new department of domestic missions 
 is opening up before the Episcopal Board of 
 
 Missions. Rev. E. W. Syle, of the Episcopal 
 Mission in China, having returned on account 
 of his health, had his attention turned to the 
 Chinese in this country. After much search- 
 ing and inquiry, he discovered about 70 China- 
 men in New York, most of them in a destitute 
 condition. He called a meeting of them at 
 the vestry-room of old St. George's Church, 
 where he continued to instruct from forty to 
 fifty, who came regularly for some time, every 
 Thursday morning and Sunday afternoon. 
 After some time, a meeting was called, and 
 measures were taken to raise funds to make 
 temporary provision for their wants. Twenty- 
 two of them were sent to California and four 
 to China. The remainder were all provided 
 with employment suited to their ability, by 
 which they could earn a living, except six, who 
 desired an education, and these are placed 
 under the instruction of a theological student, 
 to make trial of their capacities, and in the 
 mean time are provided with a support. The 
 sixteen, who are provided with employment, 
 are located at Gowanus, near Greenwood Cem- 
 etery. They attend one of the neighboring 
 churches in the morning, and Mr Byle 
 preaches to them in the afternoon. In a com- 
 munication in the " Spirit of Missions," in 
 which these facts are detailed, Mr. Syle says : 
 " Our connection with the Chinese is becoming 
 daily more intimate and inevitable. The emi- 
 gration from Canton has been so large :hat 
 old ships not considered seaworthy have been 
 bought up at enormous prices, to meet the 
 demand for passages. The now indispensable 
 guano is put on board our ships at the Chincha 
 Islands by Chinese laborers, and what unutter- 
 able sufferings are they not made to undergo in 
 the operation I The labor on the Isthmus 
 railroad is largely performed by Chinese. In 
 Kentucky, the Chinese coolies are said to be 
 employed at certain iron mills on the Cumber- 
 land River, near Eddyville. Tea-stores, owned 
 and kept by Chinamen, are to be found at 
 Boston, Albany, and other places ; not to 
 mention that Chinese are to be seen in the 
 tea-stores of this city, and at Cincinnati, Day- 
 ton, Indianapolis, and elsewhere. Chinese 
 cooks and stewards on board our ships are 
 now quite frequently to be met with." 
 
 The fact that God is sending the heathen to 
 us, as well as requiring us to go to them, oug^t 
 to be a matter of gratulation and thanksgiv- 
 ing ; and it certainly calls loudly upon us to 
 seek their evangelization. 
 
 Board of Missions of the Reformed Protestant 
 Dutch Church.— This Board has been in exist- 
 ence twenty-two years. Its receipts for the 
 year ending May 1, 1854, were $15,257. The 
 following summary of results will show what 
 the Board is doing : 
 
 1. In nineteen out of twenty-seven classes, 
 one or more churches or missionary stations 
 have been aided during a part or the whole of 
 the year. 
 
474 
 
 HONGKONG— HOTTENTOTS. 
 
 2. Sixty-nine pastors and missionnriea have 
 reccivwl aid duriug a part or the ^hole of the 
 year. 
 
 3. Eighty churches and missionary stations 
 have been aided from its funds. 
 
 4. Thirteen new churches and missionary 
 stations have been establishetl and assisted. 
 
 6. Eight churches have been organized, to 
 which appropriations have been made. 
 
 6. Twelve new houses of worship have been 
 built b^ congregations aided by the Board. 
 
 7. Three nave ceased to ask aid of the 
 Board, and several others give notice that they 
 will not need any aid beyond the present year. 
 
 8. Fcnir hundred and Jifty-nine persons have 
 been received, on confession of their faith in 
 Christ, into the churches aided. 
 
 9. Four hundred and sixty-six have been 
 received on certificate from other churches. 
 
 10. Eighty-three Sabbath-schools have been 
 in operation during the year ; besides many 
 Bible and catechetical classes, both in and out 
 of the schools. 
 
 11. Four thousand two hundred children and 
 youth have been taught in those the truths 
 
 which are able to make them wise unto salva- 
 tion. 
 
 12. Nine hundred and thirty-four dollars 
 have been contributed, by the churches and 
 missionary stations aided, to the funds of the 
 Board. , 
 
 13. Tliree thousand six hundred and seventeen 
 dollars have been contributed by them for other 
 benevolent objects. 
 
 14. One hundred and ninety-three out of three 
 hundred and forty-two of the churches have 
 contributed to the cause of Domestic Missions. 
 
 15. One hundred and forty-nine out of thr^ 
 hundred and forty-tico of tne churches have 
 given nothing. 
 
 The last report states that the Domestic 
 Missionary efforts of this Board have aided in 
 establishing a majority of the Dutch churches 
 in the country. The churches aided are repre- 
 sented to be in a good condition. Special 
 efforts are made in behalf of the Dutch and 
 German emigrants. 
 
 American Missionary Associatim. — This So^ 
 fciety has a Home Department, with 90 mis- 
 sionaries and 108 churches. 
 
 GENERAL TABULAE VIEW. 
 
 SOCffiTIES. 
 
 1 
 
 Years. 
 
 At 
 
 ?{ 
 
 "c.2 
 1^ 
 
 
 II 
 
 § 
 
 i 
 
 ft 
 
 Aggregate of 
 receipts. 
 
 Presbyterian Board . . . 
 
 38 
 
 838 
 
 523 
 
 32 
 
 45 
 
 2,930 
 
 $75,207 
 
 
 Am. Home Miss. Society . 
 
 28 
 
 4,000 
 
 1,047 
 
 
 65 
 
 6,025 
 
 191,209 
 
 $2,728,363 
 
 Methodist Episcopal Church 
 
 .35 
 
 567^ 
 
 697 
 
 
 
 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 Meth. Epis. Church South . 
 
 '■ 
 
 350* 
 
 262 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Am. Bap. Home Miss. Soc. 
 
 22 
 
 
 184 
 
 67 
 
 46 
 
 1,332 
 
 62,730 
 
 430,170 
 
 Southern Baptist Board . 
 
 9 
 
 217 
 
 60 
 
 21 
 
 
 1,786 
 
 13,074 
 
 
 Episcopal Board .... 
 
 34 
 
 105 
 
 92 
 
 
 
 
 36,327 
 
 626,751 
 
 Reformed Dutch Board . . 
 
 22 
 
 80 
 
 69 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 925 
 
 15,257 
 
 
 American Missionary Asso. 
 
 7 
 
 108 
 
 90 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6,266 
 
 3,024 
 
 128 
 
 168 
 
 12,998 
 
 $393,804 
 
 $4,785,284 
 
 * Number of missions. Probably preaching places many times greater. 
 
 HONGKONG : A flourishing English se1> 
 tlement, on an island about 40 miles east of 
 Macao. (See China.) 
 
 HONORE : A station of the Basle Mis- 
 sionary Society, in the province of Honore, 
 Hindostan. Pop. 4000. 
 
 HOOBLY : A station of the Basle Mis- 
 sionary Society, in the Mahratta country, 
 India. 
 
 HONOLULU : The chief city of the Sand- 
 wich Islands, and the seat of government. It 
 is situated in a fertile plain, which extends 9 
 or 10 miles along the southern coast of Oahu, 
 and about two miles inward to the base of the 
 mountains. A rich alluvial soil, two or three 
 feet deep, covers a layer of fine volcanic ashes 
 and cinders, extending to the depth of 14 to 
 
 16 feet. These ashes rest on a stratum of cal 
 careous rock. The harbor is considered the 
 best in the whole group, and most frequented 
 by shipping. It contains two large churches, 
 established by the missionaries. 
 
 HOPED ALE : A station of the Moravi- 
 ans in Labrador. 
 
 HOTTENTOTS: A family of affiliated 
 tribes in South Africa, formerly inhabiting 
 the territory embraced in the English colony 
 of the Cape of Good Hope, comprising the 
 Coranas, Namaquas, and Bushmen, as well as 
 the tribes on the coast. 
 
 The Hottentot is of a yellowish brown, high 
 cheek bones, spread out above, and contracted 
 to a very narrow chin ; nose remarkably flat ; 
 eyes, chestnut color ; hair grows in small tufts. 
 
HUMAN SACRIFICES. 
 
 4Y5 
 
 and does not cover the whole head. The sta- 
 ture of the Hottentot is very short, about four 
 feet six inches being the medium size for the 
 men, and four feet for the women. Their his- 
 tory and origin are involved in obscurity. 
 They resemble none of the Kaffre tribes, and 
 are equally distinct from the Negro race. Mr. 
 Moffat thinks they more nearly resemble the 
 Chinese than any other people. All these 
 tribes possess the same physical characteristics, 
 the same manners and customs, and their lan- 
 guage is so nearly identical that they readily 
 understand each other. Mr. Moffat thinks that 
 the difference between the Hottentots and 
 Bushmen is to be accounted for by the fact 
 that the former, residing in towns, are improved 
 by intercourse with each other ; while the lat- 
 ter, being scattered over thinly inhabited dis- 
 tricts, having little intercourse with each other, 
 lead an exposed and half famished life, and 
 degenerate rather than improve. The lan- 
 guage of the Hottentots is as singular as their 
 persons. Its pronunciation has been compared 
 to the clucking of the turkey. 
 
 Character. — Dr. Philip gives a very favora- 
 ble view of the native character of the Hot- 
 tentots. He says, when the Portuguese first 
 visited the Cape of Good Hope, they found the 
 inhabitants rich in cattle, and living in a com- 
 fortable manner. It was said that they were 
 remarkable for the excellence of their morals, 
 and that the records of the colony during the 
 first 50 years, unite in praising the virtues of 
 the Hottentots, so that they were distinguished 
 by the appellation of The Good Men. It is 
 said that, during the whole of that period, the 
 natives had never been detected in stealing 
 from a colonist. But the injuries inflicted on 
 them, for 150 years, during which they have 
 been driven from the most fertile portions of 
 their country, and deprived of their indepen- 
 dence, he says must have exerted upon them a 
 deteriorating influence. Mr. Barrow says that 
 Hottentots are capable of strong attachments, 
 are grateful for kindness shown, and honest 
 and trutliful. They live together in kraals or 
 villages, and have their cattle in common. 
 Eev. J. J. Freeman estimates the present num- 
 ber of the Hottentot tribes at 150,000. 
 
 Religion. — Like the Kafifres, the Hottentots 
 have no religion, except a gross, undefined su- 
 perstition. Dr. Philip says of them, "I have 
 never been able to discover, from my inter- 
 course with the natives, or from any other 
 source, that this nation had ever attained any 
 distinct notion of a Supreme Being, or that an 
 idea of a future state had at any period pre- 
 vailed among them." Eev. Mr. Moffat and 
 Rev. Mr. Schmelen also testify to the same 
 fact, and quote the conversations of the natives 
 and the declarations of the converts, to con- 
 firm their statements. Yet, Dr. Philip says 
 they were not entirely without moral restraints. 
 — Freeman's Tour in South Africa ; Moffafs 
 South Africa; Philip's Researches ; McCulloch's 
 
 Geography. (For missions to the Hottentots, 
 see Africa, Southern.) 
 
 HUAHINP] : One of the Society Islands, 
 on which is a mission of the London Mission- 
 ary Society. 
 
 HUMAN SACRIFICES : The prevalence 
 of human sacrifices among the heathen, from 
 the earliest periods of history, is a fact of mo- 
 mentous interest. It shows, first, a sense of 
 the need of an offering for sin, of the highest 
 value that the human mind can conceive ; and 
 second, false notions of the character of God, 
 in supposing that he would be pleased with 
 one man, in consequence of his imbruing his 
 hands in another's blood. It shows, also, the 
 ferocious character of their gods, who are thus 
 represented as feasting upon human gore. We 
 said the practice had prevailed from the remot- 
 est ages. The ancient Egyptians, the Cretans, 
 the Arabians, brought human blood to their 
 altars. The people of Duma sacrificed every 
 year a child, and buried it under an altar. 
 The Persians buried their sacrificial victims 
 alive. Amestris, the wife of Xerxes, entomb- 
 ed twelves persons alive, under ground, /or the 
 good of hei- soul. The Cyprians, the Rhodians, 
 the Phoenicians, the people of Chios, Lesbos, 
 Tenedos, all had human sacrifices. The king 
 of Moab offered up his eldest son, his successor 
 to the kingdom, on the wall, when the king of 
 Edom was fighting against his capital. When 
 an enemy was at the gates of Carthage, 200 
 children of the most distinguished citizens 
 were offered up to appease the sanguinary dei- 
 ties and avert the danger. The natives of 
 Taurie Chersonesus offered up to Diana every 
 stranger whom chance threw on their coasts. 
 The Pelasgi, in a time of scarcity, vowed that 
 they would give a tenth of all that should be born 
 to them for a sacrifice, in order to procure 
 plenty. Aristomenes, the Messenian, offered up 
 300 noble Lacedemonians, and among them the . 
 king of Sparta, at the altar of Jupiter, at 
 Ithome. The Spartan boys were whipped in 
 the sight of their parents, before the altar of 
 Diana Orthia, with such severity that they 
 often died under the torture. Every Grecian 
 state made it a rule, before they marched 
 toward an enemy, to seek a blessing on their 
 expedition, by the sacrifice of human victims. 
 The Romans likewise offered human sacrifices, 
 by public authority. Caius Marius offered up 
 his own daughter, to procure success in a bat- 
 tle against the Cimbri. Augustus Csesar 
 offered up on the Ides of March, after the sur- 
 render of Persia, three hundred chosen per- 
 sons, at an altar dedicated to the manes of his 
 uncle Julius. The Gauls and the Germans 
 were so devoted to this shocking custom, that 
 no business of any moment was transacted by 
 them without being prefaced by the blood of 
 men. They were offered up to various gods, 
 particularly to Hesus, Taranis, and Shantates, 
 whose altars were far removed from the com- 
 mon resort of men, being generally situated 
 
476 
 
 HUMAN SACRIFICES. 
 
 in the depth of woods, that the gloom might 
 add to the horror of the operation, and give a 
 reverence to the proceeding. 'J'here were 
 many places set apart for this i)urpose all over 
 Germany, but especially in the woods of Ardu- 
 enna, and the greater Hercurian forest, a wild 
 that extended over thirty days' journey in 
 length. These places were held in great ven- 
 eration, and only approached at particular 
 seasons. 
 
 These practices prevailed among all the peo- 
 ple of the North of Europe, and even among 
 our Saxon ancestors. Their chief gods were 
 Thor and Woden, whom they thought they 
 could never sufficiently glut with blood. Of 
 these sacrifices, none were esteemed so auspi- 
 cious and salutary as a sacrifice of the prince 
 of the coihitry. 'When the lot fell to the king 
 to die, it was received with universal acclama- 
 tions of joy. In a time of famine the lot fell 
 upon King Domakle, who was put to death. 
 Olans Triliger. another prince, was burnt alive 
 to Woden. Harold, the son of Gunild, slew 
 two of his sons to ol^tain a storm of wind to 
 destroy the ships of his enemy. Another king 
 sacrificed nine sons, to prolong his own life. 
 In Mexico, in the conrts of a single temple, 
 there were found 136,000 skulls, the remains 
 of those who had been slain in sacrifice. The 
 manner in which the victims were slaughtered 
 was various, but generally, it was attended 
 with the utmost cruelty. A native Hindoo 
 artist engraved a cut to represent a practice 
 of our forefathers, which is thus described 
 in a Bengalee paper, published by a society 
 of natives, the followers of Ram Mohun Roy, 
 who professed to have forsaken Hindoo idol- 
 atry. 
 
 After describing human sacrifices, as they 
 have existed in various countries, they say : 
 " Yet even all these frightful enormities appear 
 less surprising to us, when we hear of the hor- 
 rors practiced in their religious rites, by the 
 ancestors even of the present race of our 
 English rulers. Among them, on the com- 
 mencement of a war, or when some great 
 chieftain was attacked with disease, or when 
 any other calamity affecting the public oc- 
 curred, the Druids, who were the priests of 
 their religion, in order to secure the favor of 
 their gods, presented them with offerings of 
 human victims, attended with circumstances 
 of peculiar cruelty and horror. There was 
 one special atrocity, the recital of which makes 
 the heart tremble.* They constructed an enor- 
 mous figure, resembling a man of gigantic sta- 
 ture, formed of dried plant stems, or wicker- 
 work, in the hollow interior of which were 
 placed, as in a cage, numerous criminals, fast 
 bound, to prevent their escape. Or if these 
 could not be had in sufiBcient numbers to fill 
 the capacious cavities of this terrible image, 
 the dericiency was made up of unoffending vic- 
 tims. Surrounding the whole with straw and 
 dry wocd, they then set fire to the whole, thus 
 
 murderously consuming at once, hundreds of 
 living men, women and children." 
 
 The editor of the Ix)ndon Missionary Ma- 
 gazine says : " The instance here described, 
 is a correct specimen of the superstitions 
 of ancient Britain. When we hear of these 
 horrid practices as existing among heathen na- 
 tions, our feelings are instinctively shocked, 
 and we seem to regard them as sunk too low 
 almost for the reach of the Gospel ; but when 
 we reflect that no pagan or barbarous nation 
 that ever existed has exceeded in those cruel- 
 ties our own ancestors, and reflect that the 
 Gospel reached them, and that we are now 
 reaping its blessed fruits, how ought the reflec- 
 tion to stir us up to send the same Gospel to 
 those who dwell m similar dark places, which 
 are full of similar habitations of cruelty ! For 
 human sacrifices still exist." In the native 
 provinces of India, beyond the reach of the 
 British government, human victims are offered 
 up to appease the anger of their gods. Dr. 
 Scudder writes, in 1848, that four persons 
 had then recently been offered up as sacrifices 
 by the Khunds of Goomsoor, which forms the 
 north-western extremity of the northern Cir- 
 cars. The following description of these cruel 
 rites was published in a Madras paper, in 
 1838:— 
 
 "Miria Pooja, or human sacrifice, takes 
 place in Goomsoor once a year, in one or other 
 of the confederate districts in succession. The 
 yictims are stolen from the low country, or 
 brought from some other distant part, and sold 
 to those districts where the sacrifices are offer- 
 ed ; if children, they are kept until they attain 
 a proper age. 
 
 " When the appointed day arrives, the 
 Khunds (inhabitants of the hill country) as- 
 semble from all parts of the country, dressed 
 in their finery, some with b'ear-skins thrown 
 over their shoulders, others with the tails of 
 peacocks flowing behind them, and the long 
 winding feather of the jungle-cock waving on 
 their heads. Thus decked out, they dance, 
 leap, and revel, beating-drums, and playing on 
 an instrument not unlike in sound to the High- 
 land pipe. Soon after noon the Jani, or pre- 
 siding priest, with the aid of his assistants, fast- 
 ens the unfortunate victim to a strong post, firmly 
 fixed into the ground, and then standing erect, 
 the living sacrifice suffers the unutterable tor- 
 ture of having the flesh cut off from his bones 
 in small pieces by the knives of the savage 
 crowd who rush on him and contend with each 
 other for a portion of the gory and quivering 
 substance. Great value is attached to the 
 first morsel thus severed from the victim's body, 
 for it is supposed to possess superior virtues, 
 and a proportionate eagerness is evinced to 
 acquire it. 
 
 " Women are sacrificed as well as men. A 
 female found her way into the collector's camp, 
 at Patringia, with fetters on her limbs, who 
 related that she had been sold by her brother ! 
 
HUMAN SACRIFICES. 
 
 477 
 
 " The Khunds are in the habit of sacrificing 
 children annually at sowing time, in a most 
 cruel manner, for the purpose of propitiating 
 the demon of their worship, and of securing, as 
 they suppose, a good harvest by the blood of 
 their victims. 
 
 " In January, just before the turmeric shrub is 
 planted, the Khunds make the sacrifice alluded 
 to. They select, as their victims, male child- 
 ren who are devoted from infancy to this pur- 
 pose, and are sold to the chiefs of the different 
 villages. When the ground is ready, the vic- 
 tim is led forth, bound to bamboos for the 
 better security, and taken into the open plain. 
 The cultivators assemble, and at the supposed 
 auspicious moment, commence the dreadful 
 carnage by hacking with knives the body of 
 the truly pitiable creature ; each cutting off" a 
 part as quickly as possible, and hastening with 
 it to the field whose fertility is the object to be 
 secured. The blood, in which the Khunds 
 imagine the virtue of the spell to subsist, is 
 then made, by pressure of the hand, to fall in 
 drops upon the soil ; and the flesh, not yet cold, 
 is cast into the same ground. In hewing the 
 body great care is taken not to touch a vital 
 part, for should death occur before the blood 
 is dropped on the field, the charm, according 
 to the notions of the people, would be lost. 
 
 " Some of the Khunds, on being expostu- 
 lated with, asked what else they could do, as 
 they should have no crops if they neglected to 
 perform this ceremony." 
 
 Doct. Spry, in his " Modern India," gives 
 an account of a tribe in the Nagpore kingdom, 
 who not only sacrifice human beings, but feast 
 upon the sacrifice. 
 
 The practice of offering human sacrifices has 
 prevailed to some extent among the North 
 American Indians. In 1838 a sacrifice of this 
 kind was made by the Pawnee Loups, in con- 
 sequence of the prevalence of the small-pox. 
 Young females are the victims selected. After 
 various preliminary rites and ceremonies, she 
 is disrobed, and one half of her person painted 
 red and the other black ; the feet and hands 
 being extended, the right wrist and ankle are 
 tied to an upright piece of timber, and the left 
 wrist and ankle to another, and she is thus 
 suspended on a scaffold. At intervals, various 
 ceremonies are performed. The young men 
 and bays, each having provided a handful of 
 arrows, about a foot long, made of the stems 
 of a species of tall grass that grows on the 
 prairies, now advance, and shoot these arrows 
 into the breast and other parts of the unfor- 
 tunate sufferer. The arrows enter just enough 
 to adhere, and the breast is literally filled with 
 them ; but they do not destroy life. An old man 
 now comes forward and shoots an iron-pointed 
 arrow through the vitals. The chest is now 
 cut open, and the heart taken out and burned. 
 The smoke that rises from this fire is con- 
 sidered a most potent medicine, and their im- 
 plements of war, hunting, and agriculture are 
 
 passed through it, to insure success in their 
 use. The flesh is now wantonly slashed off 
 with knives, and thrown to be devoured by the 
 dogs, but the skeleton remains suspended till 
 it decays and falls. 
 
 The custom prevails among most of the un- 
 evangelized tribes of Southern and Western 
 Africa, and is attended with shocking bar- 
 barities. Mr. Hutchinson gives the following 
 account of a sacrifice offered by the king of 
 Ashantee, to secure the assistance of the fetish 
 in an approaching war : " The bones of the 
 king's mother and sisters were taken out of 
 their coffins, and washed with rum and water, 
 wiped with silks, rolled in gold dust, and 
 wrapped in strings of rock-gold, aggry beads, 
 and other costly materials. Those against 
 whom the king had any complaints were then 
 sent for, and immolated as they entered, that 
 their blood might ' water the graves ' of the 
 royal dead. During the whole night the king's 
 executioners traversed the streets, and dragged 
 away to execution all whom they met. The 
 next morning, desolation seemed to reign over 
 the capital, and none appeared in the market 
 but the king and his attendants. At the 
 close of the day the sacrifice was renewed. 
 The bones were removed to the sacred tomb, 
 preceded by the victims in chains, and followed 
 by a splendid procession. When the procession 
 returned the next day to the market-place, the 
 king's horns sounded the death-knell, and the 
 work of sacrifice commenced. The king sat 
 with a goblet of palm-wine in his hand, and 
 every time the executioners cut off" a head, he 
 imitated a dancing motion in the air." 
 
 In the neighboring kingdom of Dahomey, 
 the barbarous monarch paves the approaches 
 to his residence and ornaments the battle- 
 ments of his palace with the skulls of his vic- 
 tims ; and the wide-spreading branches of the 
 gigantic fetish-tree at Badagry are laden with 
 human carcases and limbs, which have been 
 offered in sacrifice. 
 
 The same rite was generally prevalent in 
 the islands of the Pacific, before the introduc- 
 tion of Christianity, and the mode much like 
 that practiced in Africa. It still prevails 
 among the Pagans in those islands. Capt. 
 Wilkes, of the United States Exploring Expe- 
 dition, thus describes the practice, as it still 
 exists in the Feejee Islands : " The victims are 
 usually taken from a distant tribe, either by 
 war or by negociation ; and, after being fattened 
 for the purpose, they are bound in a sitting 
 posture, and placed in the oven and roasted 
 alive ; after which the body is taken out, the 
 face painted black, and carried to the temple, 
 where it is offered to the gods. The Feejees 
 being cannibals, it is then cut up and dis- 
 tributed, to be eaten by the people !" Surely, 
 " the dark places of the earth are full of the 
 habitations of cruelty !" 
 
 It appears, from the foregoing, that the hor- 
 rid practice of offering human sacrifices to 
 
478 
 
 mOL— INANDA. 
 
 gain the favor of blood-thirsty deities has been 
 almost universal, except where the religion of 
 the Bible prevails, and that we owe our de- 
 liverance from it to the introduction of the 
 Gospel among our ancestors. What obliga- 
 tions, then, must rest upon us to send the Gos- 
 pel to those who are still groaning under the 
 cruelties of paganism. — Pamphlet by Mr. Peggs, 
 late missionary to Orissa ; London Missionary 
 Magazine for July, 1846 ; Beecham's Asliantee 
 and the Gold Coast; United States Exploring 
 Expedition, Vol. III. p. 97. 
 
 IDOL : A statue or image of some false 
 god, to whom divine honors are paid, altars 
 and temples erected, and sacrifices otfered. The 
 idol or image, of whatever material it consists, 
 is, by certain ceremonies, called consecrar 
 tiou, converted into a god. While under the 
 artificer's hands, it is a mere statue. Three 
 things were necessary among the ancients to 
 change the image into a god : proper orna- 
 ments, consecration, and ovation. The orna- 
 ments were various, and wholly designed to 
 blind the eyes of the ignorant and stupid mul- 
 titude, who are chiefly taken with show and 
 pageantry. Then followed the consecration 
 and ovation, which by the Romans were per- 
 formed with great solemnity. — Rees' Cydope- 
 di(U 
 
 IDOLATRY : The worship of idols, or the 
 act of ascribing to things and persons, pro- 
 perties which are peculiar to God alone. The 
 principal sources of idolatry seem to be the ex- 
 travagant veneration for creatures and beings, 
 from which benefits accrue to men. The first 
 objects of idolatrous worship are thought to 
 have been the sun, moon and stars. Soon 
 after the flood we find idolatry greatly prevail- 
 ing in the world. In process of time noted 
 patriots or deceased kings, animals, plants, 
 stones, and whatever people took a fancy to, 
 were idolized. The Egyptians worshiped pied 
 bulls, snipes, leeks, onions, and many other 
 equally insignificant objects. The Greeks had 
 about 30,000 gods. 
 
 The Apostle Paul traces idolatry to its true 
 source, the corruption of the human heart : 
 " As they did not like to retain God in their 
 knowledge, God gave them over to a repro- 
 bate mind, to do those things which are not 
 convenient." And this statement is corrobo- 
 rated by the discoveries of Layard, among the 
 ruins of Nineveh : — 
 
 " They show, in conformity with the tenor 
 of Scripture, that the earliest ages were not, 
 as many think, barbarous ages ; but that the 
 race of men, originally enlightened from a di- 
 vine source, had, at first, a high degree of gen- 
 eral knowledge which they gradually lost 
 through their defection to idolatry. It has 
 been demonstrated by these excavations, not 
 only that a high state of the arts existed in 
 Nineveh a thousand years before Chrisf, but 
 also, that in the earliest ages of thfct city, dating 
 but a few centuries from the flood, their sculp- 
 
 tures were the best. In this remarkable result, 
 the Egyptian and Assyrian antiquities also 
 agree. 
 
 " It is also proved, contrary to the general 
 impression, that idolatry was introduced when 
 men had a better knowledge of the true God 
 than afterwards prevailed; that it did not 
 grow up as a religion of nature, by the inef- 
 fectual attempts of men to find the true God. 
 jBut it was introduced as an expedient of men 
 in order to obscure what knowledge of God 
 they possessed, because they did not like to 
 retain God in their knowledge. This is shown 
 in the fact, that the earliest representations of 
 God found in these sculptures are the best, and 
 immeasurably exceed every thing of the kind 
 existing in after ages ; especially in their ap- 
 proach to the true idea of God. So that idol- 
 atry came in not for want of light, but by an 
 abuse of light. Men, knowing God, and yet 
 not willing to glorify him as God, became 
 vain in their imaginations, and their foolish 
 heart was darkened." 
 
 And the description which Paul gives in the 
 first chapter of Romans, of the debasing influ- 
 ence of idolatry upon the heathen of his day, 
 is a just description of its efiects in every age 
 and in every portion of the world. The wor- 
 ship of inferior objects tends to debase, as the 
 worship of the true God tends to exalt the hu- 
 man mind. Nor is the baptized idolatry of 
 the church of Rome essentially better than 
 that of pagans. The learned men profess, in- 
 deed, to worship, not the images and pictures, 
 but through them the objects they represent, 
 or the Supreme Being through them, as medi- 
 ators ; and so do the learned among the hea- 
 then. But it cannot be expected, that the 
 masses, whom they keep designedly in igno- 
 rance, will make this distinction. And even 
 though this distinction were made, the worship 
 of God in this manner is expressly forbidden 
 in the second commandment ; hence the Ro- 
 manists leave out this command from the de- 
 calogue. 
 
 The idolatry of the .heathen is everywhere 
 connected with superstitions the most debash 
 ing, and rites the most crael. 
 
 IFAFA : Station of the American Board 
 among the Zulus in South Africa, near Port 
 Natal. 
 
 IFUMI : Station of the American Board 
 among the Zulus, in South Africa, near Port 
 Natal. 
 
 IGBOHO : A station of the Southern Bap- 
 tist Convention in West Africa, 180 miles 
 north of Abbeokuta. 
 
 IGGIBIGHA: Station of the United 
 Scotch Presbyterian Church, in Kaffraria, 
 South Africa. 
 
 IKAI : Station of the American Board at 
 the Gaboon, West Africa. 
 
 INANDA : Station of the American 
 Board among the Zulus, in South Africa, near 
 Port Natal. 
 
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 479 
 
 _ INDIANT-WALK : A station of the Bap- 
 tist Missionary Society in Trinidad, W. I. 
 
 INDIANS : See North American Indians. 
 
 INDIA : See Hindostan. 
 
 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO : This vast 
 extent of islands, which tradition reports to be 
 the remains of a sunk continent, forms, as it 
 were, a bridge to that remote part of the world, 
 Australia, and from thence again up north- 
 ward to China. Its exterior crescent form 
 begins with the Andaman and Nicobar is- 
 lands ; then come two of the great Sunda 
 islands, Sumatra and Java, which are followed 
 by the lesser Sunda islands. Up northward 
 of these are the Moluccas, to which belong also 
 the islands of Banda, Amboyna, and Ternate. 
 These are followed by the Philippines, and 
 lastly by Formosa. Within this curve of 
 islands are embosomed the two other great 
 Sunda islands of Borneo and Celebes. The 
 whole of these islands together, comprising an 
 area of 170,000 square miles, contain about 
 20,000,000 of human beings, of all grades of 
 color and stature. The most ancient appear 
 to be the Papoos, who are the only inhabitants 
 of the Andaman Islands, but who are found 
 farther eastward as a people driven into the 
 forests, mountains, and defiles, and are not 
 found again as a leading population till we 
 reach New Guinea. They are some of the 
 most degenerate of the whole human race. 
 They were supplanted more immediately by 
 the Malays, who, having many centuries ago 
 emigrated from India beyond the Ganges, have 
 become a mysteriously heterogeneous people, 
 by mixture with Papoos, Hindoos, Arabs, 
 Chinese, Siamese, and even with Europeans. 
 The shores have of late years been more and 
 more covered with Chinese emigrants, who 
 threaten the same fate to the Malays which 
 they have inflicted upon the Papoos. The re- 
 ligions here are as various as the nations, and 
 tribes, and languages. Here we may still 
 meet with aboriginal sorcery, together with 
 the divine worship paid to mountains, rocks, 
 woods, storms, volcanoes ; then with Brah- 
 minism and Buddhism, the Chinese worship of 
 ancestors exalted into demigods, the Moham- 
 medan delusions, and the saint-worship of the 
 Romish communion. The worship of God in 
 spirit and in truth has hitherto been to these 
 wretched nations a thing unknown ; and what 
 has been attempted for these forty or fifty 
 years past by about 70 or 80 missionaries, is 
 as yet but little more than a beginning of what 
 remains to be done. 
 
 1. The Nicobar and Andaman Islands. — 
 South of Burmah Proper, and nearest to it, 
 are the Andaman Islands, for whose wild in- 
 habitants, the Papoos, nothing has hitherto 
 been done. Below them are the Nicobars, 
 which are also called Sambilang, or the Nine 
 Islands, with a Malay population, who are of 
 a tawny complexion, short stature, and strong- 
 limbed, without any modesty, or any. know- 
 
 ledge of any other superior Being except the 
 evil spirit. Here the Danish Government, in 
 1756, attempted ta establish a mercantile set- 
 tlement ; and two years afterwards, at the re- 
 quest of that Government, some missionaries 
 of the United Brethren's church set out on 
 their way thither. After an eight years' so- 
 journ at Tranquebar, they came at length, in 
 1759, to the island of Nancawery. But scarce- 
 ly ever had any mission to encounter so many 
 privations and hardships of every kind, while 
 the inhabitants continued quite unimpressible. 
 Besides which, the climate was' so deadly, that 
 new comers were perpetually swept away after 
 a very short interval. Yet the mission wag 
 not wholly abandoned till 1787, after eleven 
 missionaries had been buried in Nancawery, 
 and thirteen others had died from the injurious 
 effects of the country after they had left it, 
 while none of them had seen there any fruit of 
 their labors. 
 
 2. Sumatra. — This, first of the Sunda Islands, 
 which is almost bisected by the equator, is 
 1200 miles in length, and 200 in breadth. Its 
 western shore, facing the Indian Ocean, is 
 rugged and steep, and rises onward inland into 
 a mass of mountains pervading the length of 
 the island. Their highest summit is 13,000 
 feet. Here are brooks and rivers of no great 
 length ; but, on the eastern side, where the de- 
 scent is gradual to the low land, there are nu- 
 merous river-vales, which abound with most 
 luxuriant vegetation, but whose exhalations 
 cause a deadly fever to Europeans. Ravenous 
 animals of all kinds are abundant here. The 
 inhabitants, who are estimated at 7,000,000, 
 are Malays ; and are considered as the most 
 bigoted and fierce abettors of the Mohamme- 
 dan delusion. A remarkable, though less 
 known people, are the Batta tribes in the north 
 of the island ; as are also the Kampungs in 
 the south of the mountainous interior. The 
 Battas devour the flesh of persons who have 
 been executed. When the Portuguese arrived, 
 which was in 1511, the Malays had their prin- 
 cipal force in the peninsula of Malacca ; and 
 the sultans of Atshin, at the north point of 
 Sumatra, attacked the intruding Portuguese 
 at seven different times within the period of 
 130 years. But, in 1664, the Dutch took the 
 city of Palembang, in the south ; and during 
 very many wars they went on enlarging their 
 dominions, while the English also in the west 
 formed settlements at Bencoolen and Tapa- 
 nooly. These English settlements have been 
 consigned to the Dutch since 1825. 
 
 The English Baptists had previously com- 
 menced several missions in Sumatra ; first, at 
 Bencoolen, in 1820, in the vicinity of which is 
 Fort Marlborough; then at Padang, above 
 312 miles further north, in 1821 ; and lastly, 
 in 1822, at the Batta village of Sebolga, in 
 the vicinity of Tapanooly. But the mission 
 was broken up in consequence of the exchange 
 of governors ; for it could not act with sufB- 
 
480 
 
 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 cieiit freedom under the narrow-hearted Dutch, 
 who, moreover, had drawn upon tliomselves the 
 hatrwl of the Malays, so that war, conflagra- 
 tion, and pillapfc, were perpetually on the in- 
 crease. The missionary Uurton likewise found 
 it necessary to withdraw from Scbolga, be- 
 cause fanatical Malays, called Padrees, were 
 approaching the place with fury, to compel 
 th;)so 13attas to embrace Mohammedanism. 
 Besides the Baptist missionaries, there were 
 also others from Holland, who from time to 
 time attempted to establish themselves at Pa- 
 dang and JPalembang ; but their society, it 
 seems, wanted the means for carrying anything 
 fnto effect at those places. Lastly, in the year 
 1833, the American Board of Missions sent 
 out Messrs. Munson and Lyman to make a 
 tour of inquiry through the island. These 
 missionaries pushed their way from Tapanooly 
 through deep ravines and defiles, primeval for- 
 ests, and over steep and precipitous rocks and 
 mountains ; but were at last cruelly butchered 
 by the insensate Battas near the village of 
 Sacca. The missionary Ennis likewise, whO; 
 in 1837, ventured into the interior from Pa- 
 dang, had much difficulty to escape from the 
 perils and dangers of the country, the attacks 
 of wild beasts, and of the savage inhabitants, 
 Since that time there has been nothing further 
 attempted for the mission in Sumatra itself ; 
 and the Baptist missionary Ward, who remains 
 at Padang, can do little more than circulate 
 copies of the Scriptures and tracts, on account 
 of the extreme je Jtousy and irritability of the 
 
 ^ The mission, however, is only the more ac- 
 tive, and prospered in some islands on the east 
 coast of Sumatra ; especially in that of Bing- 
 tang with the isle of Lor, below Singapore ; 
 also, in Lingin, further south ; and in the large 
 island of Banca, over against the province of 
 Palembang. The two first mentioned islands 
 are possessed and governed by native rajahs, 
 who, however, are dependent on the Dutch, 
 who have totally subjugated Banca, To Bin- 
 tang, in 1827, came the Dutch missionary 
 Wentink, to whom Gutzlaff for some time lent 
 a successfully helping hand. They gained 
 many Chinese and Malays, as likewise in the 
 neighboring islands of Muntoc, Poolo Pinin- 
 gat, and Tercolee, so that the otherwise friend- 
 ly rajah began to be jealous. Wentink's suc- 
 c^or, the missionary Roettger, extended the 
 mission on to Lingin and Banca; and, in 
 1836, baptized in the latter island many Mo- 
 hammedans and pagans. 
 
 3. Java.— This next great Sunda island is 
 700 miles in length, and averages 100 miles in 
 breadth. Its southern coast consists of lofty 
 rocks, behind which rises a chain of mountains 
 from five to eight thousand feet high, with 
 thirty-eight volcanic craters, some of which 
 are exhausted, and others still burning. The 
 north coast is inferior to no country in beauty 
 and magnificence. The island is also one of 
 
 the healthiest of the tropical countries, except 
 in some parts of it, as at Batavia, which is 
 built upon a river in a marshy region, where 
 the climate is so deadly, that, in the space of 
 twenty-one years, more than a million of 
 human beings have been swept away, so that 
 it is called a large bnrying-ground. The na- 
 tives, who are a finer formed people than the 
 Malays, are reckoned at about five millions. 
 Their habits, education, and religion, are of 
 Indian origin, and they formerly consisted of 
 separate kingdoms, one of which at length 
 obtained dominion over the rest. But after 
 this came the Arabian invaders, in 1327, who 
 subjugated the whole island, and established 
 in it the Mohammedan religion and customs. 
 The Javanese, however, had nearly recovered 
 their independence, when the Dutch arrived, 
 and fixed themselves at Batavia and Chapara. 
 Amidst incessant insurrections and civil wars, 
 they became increasingly powerful ; they even 
 expelled the French, the Portuguese, and the 
 English from the island, and retained the sov- 
 ereignty of all Java till the year 1749. But 
 it was not till the English took Java from 
 them, in 1811, that a better and more liberal 
 government was introduced, the system of 
 which the Dutch themselves, when the country 
 was restored to them in 1815, could not avoid 
 retaining in some particulars. In the high 
 mountain regions, in the east and west, there 
 are still various pagan tribes. The Chinese 
 who have come hither, have formed a chain of 
 colonies on the northern coasts ; and in the 
 centre, and in the south, there are still two 
 native sultans, whose residence cities, Soora- 
 carta, or Solo, and Yudshyakerta, each con- 
 tain 100,000 inhabitants. The Dutch terri- 
 tory is divided into seventeen provinces, each 
 of which has a native governor ; and these 
 again are subdivided into towns and negereys, 
 or smaller circuits. The governor resides at 
 the country seat called Buitenzorg, a name 
 which, in the Dutch language, signifies, /rce 
 from care ; as Batavia, the capital, with its 
 45,000 inhabitants, is the certain grave of Eu- 
 ropeans. The other towns of most importance 
 are Samarang, with 30,000 inhabitants, and 
 Soorabaya, which has a population of 100,000. 
 The London Missionary Society was at first 
 chiefly interested about the Chinese in Java. 
 Several missionaries, who had been educated 
 in Holland and at Berlin, were consigned to 
 that society, and landed at Batavia in 1813. 
 Bruckner, who was one of them, and who, in 
 1816, joined the Baptist Society, repaired to 
 Samarang. But Supper, who was another, 
 remained at Batavia till his death, in 1816. 
 He was very zealous for the conversion of the 
 Chinese in that quarter, and was employed 
 chiefly in the circulation of the Scriptures 
 among them. No one succeeded him till 
 1S19, when the missionary Slater arrived 
 there, who brought with him a great many 
 printed works, and was received in a friendly 
 
;UFI7ERSITrl 
 
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 481 
 
 manner by the Chinese, whom he visited from 
 lio-jse to house. His dwelling was, indeed, 
 accidentally destroyed by fire, with all his 
 stock of books and furniture ; but this circum- 
 stance only served to awaken an increased in- 
 terest among the Christians at Batavia, and 
 missionary buildings and schools were soon 
 erected, together with a chapel. In 1821, the 
 missionary Medhurst came from Penang to 
 assist him ; and the zeal and activity of this 
 missionary were evinced in a particularly laud- 
 able manner. He composed a number of 
 tracts, preached at four different places, espe- 
 cially in the village of Depoc, read the Scrip- 
 tures and other books aloud in public places, 
 and stirred up much desire for salvation among 
 the Chinese, by his familiar intercourse and 
 journeys. As the government allowed him 
 entire liberty to preach and distribute books, 
 he frequently took very considerable journeys 
 in Java and the neighboring islands. Many 
 Chinese and Malays were baptized ; and the 
 ground was becoming more and more decidedly 
 prepared for a still richer harvest. 
 
 Greater difficulties were thrown in the way 
 of the Baptist missionaries, who likewise 
 arrived in 1813, and labored more immediately 
 for the benefit of the Malays. Robinson, it is 
 true, soon got together one congregation, and 
 another at Batavia, and at Weltevreden, in its 
 neighborhood ; but the Dutch mode of govern- 
 ment was not favorable to the desirable work- 
 ing of a Malay mission. As he had so many 
 and various obstacles put in his way, he re- 
 paired, in 1821, to Bencoolen, in Sumatra. 
 Trowt meanwhile had come to Samarang, 
 where he was made very useful, and set him- 
 self to learn the Cawee language, which is the 
 ancient and original language of Java, and is 
 still spoken in the island of Balee. But he 
 died in 1816. The missionary Bruckner had 
 joined him in that year ; as this missionary, 
 however, could not see much fruit of his labors 
 at Samarang, he removed in 1823 to Salatiga, 
 in the higher ground of the interior, and from 
 that place his letters communicated more 
 cheerful reports. But a dreadful insurrection 
 against the Dutch, in the kingdom of Yudshy- 
 akerta, obliged him to return to Samarang. 
 Here the Dutch refused him permission to 
 print his translation of the Scriptures in the 
 vernacular tongue, as well as to circulate 
 copies of it, after it had been printed at Sin- 
 gapore in 1831. Even Medhurst's applica- 
 tions to the government for that purpose were 
 rejected. " Let the Javanese," it was said, 
 " remain as they are ; we do not think it a 
 good thing to have them more learned and 
 knowing." On the other hand, there were 
 only the more tracts put to press, which were 
 eagerly called for, in the hospitals, prisons, and 
 markets. 
 
 The Netherlands Missionary Society has two 
 stations on this island, viz., Depok and iSbora- 
 baya. Of the former, very little is known, ex- 
 31 
 
 cept that Mr. Wentink, after labormg there 
 15 years, has been obliged by ill-health to 
 retire, and has been succeeded by another mis- 
 sionary. At Soorabaya a great work of evan- 
 gelization among the Mohammedan population 
 has been prosecuted for many years by a Ger- 
 man watchmaker, Emede, and his daughter. 
 The first fruits of their efforts were baptized 
 in Dec. 1843, viz., 18 men and 12 women. In 
 Dec. 1848, at a village 50 miles from Soora- 
 baya, 56 natives, young and old, were bap- 
 tized, after having been instructed in Chris- 
 tianity by Paul, a native evangelist. In 
 March, 1849, 21 persons were baptized at a 
 neighboring village ; and, at the close of 
 1849, there were under the care of the mis- 
 sionary, Mr. Jellesma, 347 adult Christians, or 
 baptized persons, and 183 children. He has 
 taken six Javanese youths into his own house, 
 in order to bring them up as catechists among 
 their own countrymen. 
 
 4. The Lesser Sunda Islands. — These 
 come next to Java, eastward, in succession, 
 and reach to the Straits of Ombay, beyond 
 which commence the islands of Timor, which 
 in a wider sense have been reckoned as part of 
 the Moluccas. The most important of these 
 Sunda Islands are Balee, with about 1,000,000 
 of inhabitants, who adhere to Hindooism, and, 
 agreeably to it, bury widows with their hus- 
 bands ; Lomboc, which is also called Sasac, 
 with 180,000 inhabitants, who are mostly Mo- 
 hammedans, and are subject to the Baleenese ; 
 Soombava, 200 miles in length, with 800,000 
 inhabitants, probably like the Baleenese ; also. 
 Sandalwood Island, which is but little known ; 
 and Flores, 250 miles in length, which once 
 was in the possession of the Portuguese. In 
 not one of these islands has any mission as yet 
 been established, though most of them appear 
 to be very promising fields for the purpose. 
 It is true that in the island of Balee, Mr. Med- 
 hurst, in 1831, met with a very unfriendly re- 
 ception. The rajah even forbade him to hold 
 any conferences with the inhabitants, and 
 threatened to poison those who should apply 
 to him for medicine ; and when Mr. Medhurst 
 complained of these restrictions, he was an- 
 swered, " No one sent for you hither ; if you 
 do not like it, go away to the place you came 
 from." But the missionary Ennis, when he 
 arrived there, found things quite altered, with- 
 in less than seven years afterwards ; he was 
 permitted to speak freely upon spiritual sub- 
 jects, was esteemed, and kindly treated, and 
 was frequently even requested to remain there. 
 
 5. Borneo. — This is the third great Sunda 
 Island, and is called by the natives Broonai. 
 It is 1000 miles in length, and 750 in breadth, 
 but hitherto is known only on the coasts. It 
 appears formed out of several smaller islands 
 by alluvial soil, which is especially evident on 
 the western side, where all is level inland for 
 several days' journey. In the interior, and on 
 the eastern coast, there are lofty chains of 
 
482 
 
 INDIAN ARCIUPELAGO. 
 
 mountains, which contain (liftraonik, gold and 
 inferior metals, in abundance ; and from whost 
 heii^'hts very many rivers descend in cataracts 
 und waterfalls. These mountains form the 
 boundary between the Mohammedan Malays 
 of the cosist country and the pagan Dyaks of 
 the interior and upper country. The former, 
 who are about a million, are well instructed in 
 their false faith, as well as adroit and fanati- 
 cal in defending it ; they follow agriculture, 
 traffic, and mining, and especially the cruel 
 trade of piracy. The Dyaks, of whom there 
 are several millions, are behind no nation in 
 barbarism and rude ignorance. The nearest 
 tribes, who are mostly subject to Mohamme- 
 dan chieftains, arc indeed good tempered and 
 social, but, at the same time, stupid and cow- 
 ardly ; but those of the interior find their de- 
 light only in war and murder. Their constant 
 aim is to strike off the heads of their real or 
 supposed enemies ; and to this every stranger 
 is exposed without ceremony. In many of 
 their provinces, no one is allowed to marry that 
 cannot show a certain number of human heads 
 that he has recently struck off. The grave of 
 the chief must be fenced round with human 
 heads; and the possession of many human 
 skulls constitutes the chief ornament and glory 
 of families. An offering of human skulls is 
 with them the surest safeguard against the evil 
 spirits, to whom they attribute all diseases. 
 Little is known of the rest of their religion. 
 Not less lawless are the settlers called Bug- 
 ies, from the island of Celebes, who are about 
 30,000. The most quiet inhabitants are the 
 Chinese, who work in the mines, and who 
 amount to about 300,000. Magellan's com- 
 panions were the first Europeans that entered 
 the island; this was in 1521 ; but the subse- 
 quent Portuguese settlements failed. In the 
 year 1643, the Dutch founded a factory at 
 Pontianak in the west ; and their domains on 
 the south coast have become considerably en- 
 larged since the year 1812. They have now 
 preponderant influence upon both coasts, 
 though the native princes have still much 
 power, and the Dyaks remain almost entirely 
 independent. In the east, the sultan of Cotee 
 is the most authoritative despot ; and in the 
 north, the sultan of Broonai. 
 
 Rhenish Missionary Society.— In 1835, 
 the Rhenish Missionary Society sent Barnstein 
 and Heyer to Borneo. Barnstein, who had 
 learned the Malay at Java, brought with him 
 Lucas Monton, a converted Celebese. They 
 landed at Bandschermassing. Monton was re- 
 ceived by a Chinese acquaintance, in whose 
 house he could read his books to an audience 
 of Chinese, Malays, and Arabs. Monton 
 preached here in jmblic to a large crowd until 
 evening. The Chinese received the Gospel 
 with many favorable manifestations. 
 
 Soon after landing, Barnstein made a jour- 
 ney to the Dajak country, with Monton. From 
 the chief in Gohong they received a friendly 
 
 invitation, and entered into a treaty with him. 
 Conforming to the custom of the country, they 
 allowed incisions to be made on their right 
 shoulders, and tasted of a draught with which 
 the blood thence flowing was mixed. When 
 the Dyaks heard of Christ, they appeared like 
 a people awakened from a long sleep, and con- 
 tinually heard the word with joy. At the mis- 
 sionaries' departure, one of the chiefs said to 
 them, " My brethren, do not fear to remain 
 with us. We will do you no harm, and if any 
 one molests you, you shall be defended with 
 our hearts' blood. God and this assembly 
 bear witness that this is true." And all the 
 people cried out in corroboration, " Baalak I" 
 Amen. 
 
 Returning to Bandschermassing every one 
 was filled with wonder to hear that the Dyaks 
 in the south-east were asking for a religion, as 
 they had none themselves, and would not em- 
 brace Islamism. The Malays in the city, 
 moreover, assembled themselves for the reading 
 of the New Testament. In 1836, the mission 
 was strengthened by the arrival of three new 
 Rhenish missionaries, who all had cause to be 
 rejoiced at the success of their labors. Some 
 Dyaks went in troops to a Chinese temple,where 
 one of them destroyed, with repeated blows, 
 an idol erected there, with the words, " These 
 gods must perish." They demolished the hea- 
 then temples and schools. The Chinese and 
 Dyaks were won over. A chief of the latter 
 expressed his sentiments in these words, " This 
 writing has touched my heart. It has taken 
 possession of it." Stations were established 
 at Palingkau, Sungei Bintang, Gohong, Men- 
 tangei, and Patey. Many Dyaks were freed 
 from slavery by the efforts of the missionaries ; 
 and every missionary has a little household 
 gathered around him, consisting of liberated 
 debtors, who had fallen so deeply in debt that 
 they had pledged life and limb to their credi- 
 tors, and had become their property. The 
 following table shows the present condition of 
 the mission : 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Bandschermassing 
 
 Palingkau 
 
 Bethabara 
 
 Tawa 
 
 Muaratowo 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 S^ 
 
 !^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 'O 
 
 
 a a 
 
 s* 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 •^ 
 ^ 
 
 11 
 
 
 1836 
 
 30,000 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 1840 
 
 5,000 
 
 29 
 
 7 
 
 1839 
 
 4,500 
 
 4« 
 
 20 
 
 1851 
 
 2,000 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 1851 
 
 2,000 
 
 13 
 
 7 
 
 43,500 
 
 98 
 
 40 
 
 American Board. — The first missionaries 
 of the Board to Borneo were Rev. Messrs. 
 Elihu Doty, Elbert Nevius, and William 
 Youngblood, with their wives, and Miss Azuba 
 C. Condit, teacher. Mr. Doty arrived at Sam- 
 
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 483 
 
 bas, June 17, 1839 ; and Mr. Youngblood ar- 
 rived at Pontianak about the end of the follow- 
 ing November. Mr. Nevius reached Pontia- 
 nak at a little later period. Sambas is on a 
 river of that name, in the western part of the 
 island, described as a " noble stream, in width 
 nearly a mile, and in depth sulEcient for vessels 
 of large burden. Its borders are skirted with 
 an unbroken jungle and forest, without the 
 appearance of a single habitation or trace of 
 human culture to enliven the scene." The Sam- 
 bas river afforded facilities for reaching the 
 scattered Dyak population, but besides this the 
 place held out no strong inducements for a 
 permanent location. Pontianak, in the west 
 part of the island, further south, was regarded 
 as a more desirable station, having a larger 
 population than any other place on the coast, 
 md being the entrance point, by a navigable 
 river, to large settlements of Chinese and Dyaks 
 in the interior. 
 
 The Dyaks, as seen at home, are described 
 IS mild and gentle, and given to hospitality, 
 rhey will beg, but will rarely steal, though 
 }lothes and other articles be ever so much ex- 
 posed. But when they exchange their domestic 
 labits for those of the warrior, their greatest 
 ielight seems to be to revel in blood, and their 
 greatest honor to ornament their dwellings with 
 luman heads, which are the trophies of their 
 nhuman barbarity. Mr. Doty, in a tour 
 ;hrough that part of the province of which 
 Sambas is the seat of government, distributed 
 >00 tracts and volumes, including several copies 
 )f the New Testament, and found that many 
 thousand volumes might be distributed during 
 luch a tour. 
 
 Until the arrival of the missionaries, the 
 nhabitants of western Borneo had been, in a 
 eligious point of view, almost wholly unknown. 
 rhey found there, as in many other parts of 
 he Archipelago, a variety of races, the princi- 
 )al of which were the Chinese, Arabs, Malays, 
 ind Bugies, all of foreign origin ; and the 
 )yaks, who were believed to be the aboriginal 
 ace. The Malays, Arabs, and Bugies, were 
 bund to be all Mohammedans. The chief 
 lifiBculties of prosecuting missionary labor 
 imong these people were, the variety of lan- 
 guages, the interference of petty chiefs and 
 )riests, the levity and ignorance of the people, 
 md especially the difficulty of reaching the 
 nhabitants, whose houses were generally built 
 ipon posts, on the banks of the river ; or on 
 afts or logs, which rose and fell with the water, 
 md were accessible only by boats. 
 
 The report of the Board for 1842 mentions 
 he removal of Mr. Nevius to Singapore, on 
 Lccount of ill-health, and the arrival of Rev. 
 Messrs. Thomson and Pohlman. The mission 
 Fas now concentrated chiefly in the district of 
 Pontianak, where a Malay school of about 15 
 cholars, half girls, was established, and a reg- 
 ilar preaching service maintained in Chinese 
 ind Malay. 
 
 But the mission was exceedingly annoyed 
 and embarrassed by the Dutch government in 
 Netherlands India. The missionaries were, 
 required to spend their first year at Batavia, 
 in the island of Java, which was regarded by 
 the Board as " unreasonable and of no good 
 tendency;" and even on reaching Borneo 
 their labors would be restricted to the sea-coast. 
 None but native Dutch missionaries were 
 allowed to penetrate the interior of the island, 
 and to obtain such was difficult. In this state 
 of things the Board, in connection with the 
 missionary Board of the Reformed Dutch 
 Church, sent an agent, Rev. Isaac Ferris, D.D., 
 to the government at Holland, with a view, if 
 possible, to get these restrictions removed. 
 The agent was kindly received, but was inform- 
 ed that the exclusion of all foreigners from the 
 interior of their possessions in the Indian Ar- 
 chipelago, was a principle of settled state policy, 
 and that so far as the civil policy of the gov- 
 ernment was concerned, the members of the 
 Reformed Dutch Church and the missionaries 
 from the same must be regarded as foreigners. 
 Dr. Ferris was, however, assured by the min- 
 ister for the colonies, that all proper means 
 should be taken for bringing their government 
 to the adoption of a more liberal policy. 
 
 The report of Dr. Ferris, on his return, 
 rather encouraged the Board to continue its 
 labors in Borneo, and a mission was commenc- 
 ed among the Dyaks, at Karangan, about 
 eight miles south of Landak, and 140 from 
 Pontianak. Messrs. Youngblood and Thom- 
 son took charge of this mission in September, 
 1842, and erected a house on the banks of the 
 Karangan. In their journal of this year they 
 make the following interesting statements re- 
 specting the Dyak people, concerning whom so 
 little had been previously known : 
 
 " We are fully satisfied that there is nothing 
 to prevent us from settling, with our families, 
 immediately in the midst of these interesting 
 people, and teaching them without reserve the 
 principles of the doctrine of Christ. They are 
 mild, inoffensive, and docile in their disposi- 
 tions. In our opinion there would be no more 
 danger from them, in ordinary times, than from 
 the most civilized people in the world. They 
 almost universally expressed the utmost willing- 
 ness, if not strongest desire, to receive teachets ; 
 and some at least of their rulers professed to 
 entertain the same feelings. As to the coun- 
 try, we hope it will appear from the journal to 
 be such as no one need disdain to inhabit." 
 
 In the spring of 1844 Messrs. Doty and Pohl- 
 man removed to China, leaving Pontianak 
 without a missionary. Mr. Youngblood sub- 
 sequently removed to that place, leaving 
 Messrs. Thomson and Steele at Karangan. 
 Mrs. Thomson died in December of this year, 
 soon after following a daughter to the grave. 
 The brethren at Karangan say at this period, 
 " These are truly small things, but instead of 
 faint-heartedness that we see no greater results, 
 
4Si 
 
 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 WO nsk you to join us in most fervent praise to 
 God for the cliangcs wo have witnessed, and 
 that each day brings advancement." Alluding 
 to their school they say : " We cannot paint 
 to you tlie intellig'ence and the affectionate 
 confidence of these little ones, their delight in 
 obtaining new and elevating ideas, their unself- 
 isli rivalry for an approving word or smile from 
 the teacher they nave learnt to love. The 
 number of boys has seldom been more than 
 seven ; the number of girls has been larger, 
 and they have received instruction in needle- 
 work and vocal music, in addition to the les- 
 sons in spelling, reading, and writing." 
 
 A very discouraging feature in the condition 
 of the Dyaks, was found to be their degrading 
 subjection to the Malays. It is described as 
 " a despotism the most absolute, and yet the 
 most irrational perhaps ever invented." Hence 
 the Dyaks were unspeakably and increasingly 
 wretched, and without any stimulus to rise or 
 to attempt the improvement of their condition. 
 Their ignorance was profound, especially on 
 subjects connected with the soul and a future 
 world, and, in their journal of 1845, the mis- 
 sionaries " could see no signs of moral improve- 
 ment." 
 
 In 1847 Mr. Tliomson and Mr. Toungblood, 
 were both compelled to seek the restoration 
 of their health by a cessation of labor, and a 
 temporary absence from Borneo. They sailed 
 for Singapore, at which place Mr. Thomson 
 was seized with hemorrhage of the lungs ; but 
 after a little delay he proceeded to Geneva, 
 and 1 hence to Berne, at which place he died. 
 Mr. Youngblood returned to Borneo with his 
 wife, but in such feeble health as to forbid the 
 expectation of their long continuance on the 
 island. Mr. Steele was also in feeble health, 
 and in 1849 he returned to the United States. 
 Both he and Mr. Youngblood had intended to 
 resume their labors, and earnestly desired to 
 do so, but neither of them were able to return ; 
 and neither did the Reformed Dutch Church 
 find any ministers willing to enter into this 
 field, and it was left without a missionary. 
 In their report for 1852 the Prudential Com- 
 mittee say : — " It is indeed a hard ground to 
 cultivate, though not more so than some others 
 •where success has at length come. The com- 
 mittee cannot believe that the missionary 
 labors and sacrifices that have been expended 
 on Borneo will be in vain. The existence, 
 character, necessities, and claims of a large 
 heathen people in that great island, have been 
 kept a long time before the attention of our 
 American churches, and the seed thus sown 
 may one day result in a rich harvest." 
 
 Sioce the above date, no laborers have been 
 sent to Borneo, and it remains to be seen 
 whether that mission will be resumed. 
 
 6. Celebes. — This name was given by the 
 Portuguese to the fourth great Sunda island, 
 called 
 count r 
 
 .f;u».o». lyj ijjv- njuiiij givau kJUllUU JPIUIJU, 
 
 by the natives IS igre-Orang-Bugies, 
 ry of the Bugies people, a lofty island, 
 
 with four far-stretching peninsulas, whose nat 
 ural beauties are as striking as those in Java 
 The three millions of inhabitants are dividet 
 into Bugies and Macassars. The former art 
 the most cultivated islanders of this Archipel 
 ago ; they are found in all the harbors of thes( 
 seas ; they are also the most formidable pirates 
 The latter are a coarse and clumsy race o 
 men, who inhabit the west of the island 
 Both are at present strict Mussulmans, anc 
 are subject to sultans, who, however, are verj 
 dependent on the lesser rajahs. OriginallJ 
 they were pagans ; but, in 1512, their kin^ 
 having resolved to embrace another religion 
 invited to tiis capital two Mollahs and two 
 Jesuits. The Mollahs arrived first ; and soor 
 was Mohammedanism imposed upon the inhab 
 itants, especially in the kingdom of Bonec 
 About the year 1656, the Dutch lanfled in th( 
 island of Bootong, in hostility against th( 
 Macassars, and, since 1677, the Macassars ant 
 Bugies have remained subject to the Dutch 
 notwithstanding they have made, from time t( 
 time, the most savage insurrections, to thToy\ 
 off the yoke of their masters. 
 
 Netherlands Missionary Society. — In the nortl 
 of Celebes, in the 18th century, a large numbci 
 of natives who had not embraced Islamism 
 were baptized by a native of Holland. Aftei 
 long neglect, the mission work was renewec 
 here bj the Netherlands Society. Three mis 
 sionaries went from Amboyna to Meuado,wh( 
 were followed in 1822 by Miiller, and in 182f 
 to 1839, by Hillendoorn. They found thai 
 many, of all classes, wished for baptism 
 among these the chief, Tondano. In Amu 
 rang the church numbers 1,000 souls, and th( 
 schools 115 scholars. A church of 550 was 
 gathered at Tanowanka. At Menado, 26( 
 heathen were baptized in one year. In conse 
 quence of these successes, Midel and Scliwarti 
 were sent by the society as co-laborers, whc 
 endeavored to introduce the Malay into the 
 schools, as a common medium of communica 
 tion. The number of Christians, old and new 
 in Manahasse, amounted in 1832 to 5,000 
 with 20 schools, which latter number is hoy, 
 increased to 56. The creed learned by the 
 school-children in Malay, was the means ol 
 converting many heathen. People who hac 
 passed their years in reckless debauchery 
 cheerfully begun to lead orderly and Christiar 
 lives. An aged priest, who, by his craftiness 
 had led whole villages astray, besought his 
 people to embrace "Christianity, which hac 
 brought rest to his own soul. The chief seats 
 of the Christian communities in Celebes, an 
 at Menado, Kema, Tondano, Langowang 
 Tomohou, and Amurang. In Langowang 
 Schwartz, after 11 years of hard labor, sa-w 
 the first fruits of his faithfulness, in the bap 
 tism of 30 persons. Since 1837, the missior 
 has had a printing-press, in order to prin1 
 school-books and tracts. In Macassar, also 
 in the south, there is a preacher of the Gospel 
 
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 485 
 
 On tlie neighboring island of Bonoa, lie 
 found Christians, who had so far backslidden 
 as to engage with the heathen in the practice 
 of cutting off the heads of human victims. On 
 other islands, he was compelled to silence by 
 laughter and derision. In Ternate, where Jung- 
 michel was stationed, there were, in 1819, 
 700 Christians in a population of 5000. Since 
 1821 he has paid frequent visits to the San- 
 geer islands, where Christianity appears to be 
 at a low ebb. 
 
 The Society has in this island eight sta- 
 tions. The station at Tondano has one mission- 
 ary, Mr. Riedel, who baptized * in the year 
 1847, 356 adults and 270 children, all natives. 
 In 1848 he baptized 440 adults and 223 chil 
 dreu. In 16 schools in his district he ha6i 
 768 boys and 514 girls. In 1849 he succeeded 
 in building a chapel and school-house, by the 
 assistance and contributions of the native 
 Christians. 
 
 At the Langowang station the missionary is 
 Mr. Schwartz, who baptized, in 1848, 958 adults 
 and 382 children, and numbered in the 15 
 schools under his charge 1182 boys and 423 
 girls. In February 1849, he wrote — " In near- 
 ly every one of the 26 villages in my district, 
 a desire for instruction in Christianity mani- 
 fests itself with young and old, so that I and my 
 assistant and the schoolmasters are hardly able 
 to satisfy all their wishes. The number of Chris- 
 tians on my list at the close of 1848, was 2951, 
 and those who attended preaching in my 
 seven congregations on the Sabbath numbered 
 1500. 
 
 At Amurang Mr. Herrmann baptized, in 
 1847, 195 adults and 57 children ; and in the 
 following year 321 adults and 177 children. 
 He had 23 schools, with 1261 boys and 661 
 girls, and eight places of public worship, to 
 which he devoted more or less attention. In 
 February, 1849, he wrote — " My present sphere 
 of labor includes 75 very far scattered villages, 
 with 23,000 souls. I usually preach on Sun- 
 days at two different places, in the Alfoor lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Tomokon is another station, where Mr. Wil- 
 ken has several congregations, and 16 schools, 
 containing 1415 boys and 242 girls. 
 
 Menado, a principal town, on the northern 
 extremity of the island, enjoys the labors of a 
 faithful missionary,, who has charge of Dutch 
 and Malay congregations, and also of five 
 schools, attended by 230 boys and 130 girls. 
 
 Tanavangho was occupied in 1849 by Mr. 
 Bossert, who found there more than 500 nom- 
 inal Christians, but who were very far from 
 the real life of God. But he says, " Besides 
 Tanavangho I have seven other villages com- 
 mitted to my charge, one of which gives me 
 very much hope : it is Tately, where there is a 
 
 * Baptism, with this Society, is not admission to the 
 Church, but is administered to those who nominally 
 embrace Christianity, and are subsequently received to 
 Church fellowship, if found worthy. 
 
 very good school and a good teacher. Some 
 30 or 40 have received baptism, and as many 
 more who are receiving instruction desire 
 baptism." 
 
 Kema is a new station, where the missionary 
 in 1848 baptized 299 adults and 83 children. 
 His 12 schools contain 747 boys and 107 girls. 
 
 The station at Koomelemboy was recently 
 commenced by Mr. Ulfers, who describes that 
 part of the island as " most picturesque, hilly, 
 woody, and abounding with springs of excel- 
 lent water." He lives there, in the centre of 
 a missionary circuit, comprising 25 villages, 
 with about 9,000 inhabitants, all living on high 
 mountains or in deep valleys. He has 9 
 schools under his care. 
 
 7. The Moluccas. — In a wider sense, all the 
 islands situated between New Guinea and Ce- 
 lebes are termed the Moluccas, or Spice 
 Islands ; and thus there belong to them — 1. 
 the Timor Islands in the south, Timor, liotty, 
 Simao, Dao, and others. 2. The Banda Is- 
 lands, which next form a group of ten small 
 isles, about which, in an extensive tend, are 
 situated to the south-west the islands of Wet- 
 ter, Roma, Kissor, Letty, Damm, Moa, and 
 others ; and to the south-east, Timorlaut, with 
 its surrounding isles ; and eastward, as far as 
 towards New Guinea, the Aroo Islands, 3. 
 The Amboyna Islands, Amboyna, Ceram, 
 Booro, and others. 4. The proper Moluccas, 
 or Ternatas, with the islands Jilolo, Morty, 
 Ternate, Tidor, Moteer, Machian, Bachian, 
 and others. Lastly. 5. The Sangeer Islands, 
 which form the chain of passage to the north 
 Philippine Islands. All these islands, toge- 
 ther, are splendidly adorned and gifted, and 
 are particularly rich in spices of every kind ; 
 many of them, also, have active volcanos. But 
 the intercourse of their population with civil- 
 ized countries, is considerably less than in the 
 rest of this vast Archipelago, and they seldom 
 see a European vessel. The natives consist 
 partly of untractable and proud Malays, and 
 partly of savage aborigines, called Alfoors, or 
 Fapoos, governed by their own rajahs. In the 
 year 1521, the Portuguese took possession of 
 these islands. Mohammedanism had been 
 forced upon the latter hardly forty years be- 
 fore. The chief Portaguese settlement was in 
 Ternate ; but their cruelty and barbarity 
 made them to be so hated by the natives, that 
 these oppressed people at length threw them- 
 selves into the arms of the Hollanders, who, in 
 1617, first expelled the Portuguese from Am- 
 boyna, and then extended their conquests far- 
 ther and farther. 
 
 Another sphere of missionary labor has been 
 formed in and around the island of Timor, 
 whither the Dutch missionary Lebrun came, 
 in 1819. He settled at Cupang, the seat of 
 the Dutch government, on the south coast of 
 Timor. The north coast about Dilly belongs 
 to the Portuguese. For twenty years there 
 had been no Christian minister among the na- 
 
486 
 
 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 
 
 lives thcn\ who profess Christianity. With 
 so much the greater eagerness did they now 
 crowd to the niisdionary'a preaching ; and in 
 the very first year, ninety pagans were admit- 
 ted to the church, which already consisted of 
 3,000 professed Christians. Moreover, the 
 rajah of Botty submitted himself to Christ 
 crucified; and, in 1823, Lebrun baptized in 
 Little Timor, Kissor, Letty, and Aloa, four 
 hundred and ninety-six persons. The Friendly 
 Society which he established, was subscribed 
 to even by some of the pagan princes. He 
 everywhere formed schools, and to the remote 
 churches he addressed pastoral letters, after 
 the manner of the apostles, of the good effect 
 of which there are very pleasing testimonies. 
 A few years before his death, which took place 
 in 1829, eight missionaries more arrived, who 
 distributed themselves among various stations, 
 and made it one part of their business to estab- 
 lish more fundamentally in Christianity the 
 churches and congregations that had been 
 gained to it. The islands of Timor, Babaw, 
 and Rotty, as also Kissor, Letty, Moa, lloma, 
 Wetteiraud others, are places wheie they are 
 continually visiting and laboring. Their 
 "work, indeed, is often exceedingly harassing 
 and fatiguing ; and though the missionary 
 Bar, of Basle, who, in 1825, was stationed in 
 Kissor, and at present in Amboyna, was soon 
 enabled to baptize 1,500 of the 5,000 inhabit- 
 ants, yet he has to this day, amidst his un- 
 speakably troublesome and wearisome occupa- 
 tions, had one of the most difficult of posts to 
 maintain. But the persevering patience of 
 the messenger of peace is never unaccompa- 
 nied by some blessed benefit or other. In the 
 proper Moluccas there is but little as yet done, 
 except what, since 1819, the missionary Jung- 
 michel has been effecting in Ternate. Since 
 1821, he has also periodically visited the San- 
 geer islands, 150 miles north-west of Celebes ; 
 but has found only extremely ignorant Chris- 
 tians and bad schools at those places. In 
 1850 it was reported that the natives of 
 Amboyna, being all nominal Christians, it 
 was no longer regarded as a field for mission- 
 ary labor. Harookoo, in the same neighbor- 
 hood, is also inhabited by nominal Christians, 
 over whose different congregations and schools 
 a missionary, Mr.Luyke, is placed as pastor and 
 overseer. Timor has two stations, viz. : Koo- 
 pang and Babow, at which there are four mis- 
 sionaries, the two last having been sent out in 
 1849. They have in charge various congrega- 
 tions and schools, concerning which no recent 
 reports have been made. 
 
 8. The Philippine Islands. — Of these 
 islands, which contain about three millions of 
 inhabitants, we shall say but little, as they are 
 110 theatre of Protestant missions. The fa- 
 mous circumnavigator, Magellan, began here 
 his conversions with cannon-ball, in 1521. 
 This he did, especially in the island of Zeboo, 
 where, after a cannonade, 800 Dyaks, or Al- 
 
 foors, were immediately hapLi/i'd. lie, how- 
 ever, and his officers fell a sacrifice to this zeal, 
 and Zeboo fell away again from Christianity. 
 The Spaniards and Portuguese soon contend- 
 ed for possession of these islands : and the 
 former got the mastery. Zeboo, in 15G4, re- 
 ceived a sanguinary chastisement for its apos- 
 tasy ; and as fast as the conquests proceeded, 
 did the llomish religion everywhere take root, 
 as Augustinian monks, Franciscans, and Do- 
 minicans, zealously prosecuted the work of 
 their missions. W. Hoffman, in his " Geo- 
 graphy," says : " Here is the paradise of the 
 monks. Here vegetate one thousand monks, 
 Augustinians, Dominicans, and Franciscans, 
 in luxuriant' and luxurious monasteries ; four 
 provincials command them ; one thousand two 
 hundred parishes are occupied by them. The 
 temporal government, the instruction, and the 
 whole activity of the inhabitants are all under 
 their heavy hand. The pious idleness of their 
 festivals and processions is excessive ; the 
 poorer, but without knowing it, are the native 
 secular ecclesiastics in their three thousand 
 parishes. The titular archbishop of Manilla, 
 who resides at Madrid, together with the bi- 
 shops of New Segovia, Zeboo, and New Cace- 
 res, are at the head of them. 
 
 9. The Island of Formosa. — This island, 
 which is also called Thaiwan, is between the 
 Philippines and the Chinese coast; and the 
 greater part of it is subject to the emperor of 
 China. Hither, in 1631, was sent by the 
 Dutch government, the preacher Junius, who, 
 with much labor acquired the language of the 
 country, and at the period of his death had 
 collected a Protestant church of five thousand 
 nine hundred adults. But the light was soon 
 extinguished, through perpetual wars with pi- 
 rates, and the subsequent reduction of the 
 island by the emperor of China ; and proba- 
 bly at the present day scarcely a single trace 
 of those fair beginnings can be found. 
 
 [The early history of the missions noticed 
 in the foregoing article, has been taken from 
 " A Manual of Christian Missions," by Rev. 
 C. Barth, D.D., principal of the Basle Mission- 
 ary Institution, and W^igger^s History of Missions, 
 in German. The later portions have been ga- 
 thered from various sources.] 
 
 INFANTICIDE : The practice of destroy- 
 ing infants soon after their birth. That a 
 practice so revolting to humanity should ewr 
 prevail, in any country, seems almost incredi- 
 ble. One characteristic of heathenism, how- 
 ever, as given by the Apostle Paul, is that of 
 being " without natural affection ;" and, al- 
 though there are exceptions, yet, as a general 
 rule, selfishness, in the heathen mind, rises 
 above every other principle. And hence, in 
 all ages, infanticide has been a prevalent cus- 
 tom of the heathen. It was a law of the an- 
 cient Spartans that only promising children 
 should be reared. They were submitted to the 
 examination of certain persons, and if weak or 
 
INFANTICIDE. 
 
 487 
 
 deformed, they were thrown into a cavern 
 The exposure of children was a practice com- 
 monly sanctioned by the ancients. Gimelli 
 Careri states that, in the Philippine Islands, 
 children born with imperfections, were put 
 into a hollow cave, and buried alive. In the 
 Sandwich Islands, it was estimated by the for- 
 eigners who went first among them, that two- 
 thirds of the infants that were born, were de- 
 stroyed by their own parents. The sickness 
 or deformity of the child, or the trouble of 
 taking care of it, was a sufficient excuse for 
 its destruction. Mothers would cast their 
 children into a hole dug in the earth, and cov- 
 ering them up, would trample upon them with 
 their feet, and thus stifle their cries. The wri- 
 ter of this article has seen a native of the 
 Sandwich Islands, who was buried alive by 
 his mother, and rescued from the grave and 
 reared by the missionaries. Some of the con- 
 verted native women have confessed to the 
 missionaries, with tears in their eyes, that they 
 had killed all their children. 
 
 In the Georgian and Society Islands, infan- 
 ticide prevailed to an incredible extent. It is 
 stated by one of the missionaries, that on a 
 certain occasion he inquired of three women 
 who were sitting together, how many children 
 they had destroyed. " One replied with a fal- 
 tering voice, * I have destroyed nine.' The sec- 
 ond, with eyes suffused with tears, said, * I have 
 destroyed seven,' — and the third informed him 
 she had destroyed Jive." To such an extent 
 was this cruel and unnatural practice carried, 
 that it is the opinion of the missionaries that 
 two-thirds of the children were murdered by 
 their own parents. 
 
 There are several tribes in India, in which 
 the custom has long prevailed of destroying 
 the female children. The British Government 
 have exerted themselves to put an end to the 
 practice, and to some extent have succeeded. 
 Infanticide also prevails in China. A mis- 
 sionary was conversing with a Chinaman, who 
 was away from home ; and inquiring for his 
 family, the man said he had three sons and one 
 daughter ; he had had another daughter, but 
 " did not bring her up." " Not bring her up," 
 said the missionary ; " what did you do with 
 her ?" " I smothered her," he replied. When 
 expostulated with for murdering his own child, 
 he said, " It is very common in China. We 
 put the female children out of the way, to save 
 the trouble of bringing them up. Some people 
 have smothered five or six daughters !" 
 
 Mr. Barrow computes, from authentic data, 
 that not less than 9,000 children are exposed 
 in the streets of Peking every year, and as 
 many more in the provinces. He states that 
 it is part of the duty of the police to carry 
 away in carts, every morning, those that have 
 been exposed at night, some of whom are yet 
 alive ; but they are all carried to a pit, with- 
 out the walls, and buried promiscuously. Here 
 the Roman Catholic missionaries attend, se- 
 
 lecting the most lively for future propelytes, 
 and administering baptism to others before 
 they die. The practice is connived at by the 
 government. 
 
 The people in some parts of India, particu- 
 larly in Orissa and the eastern part of Bengal, 
 frequently offer their children to the goddess 
 Gunga, by drowning them in the river. In 
 the northern districts of Bengal, if an infant is 
 sickly, it is hung up in a basket on the branch 
 of a tree, to be destroyed by the ants or birds 
 of prey. In Japan, mothers, on finding them- 
 selves too poor to bring up their children, do 
 not scruple to suffocate them at Ihe breast. In 
 Greenland, where a mother died leaving an 
 infant, the latter was buried with her. The 
 South American women on the river Oronoko 
 are said frequently to destroy their daughters, 
 to save them the hardships and sufferings to 
 which they are exposed. The Bushmen in 
 Africa take no great care of their children. 
 They kill them without remorse when they are 
 ill-shaped, or when they are in want of food ; 
 and when obliged to fly from their enemies, 
 they will cast them aside, strangle, smother, 
 or bury them alive ; and, to save themselves, 
 they will throw them to the lions, which prac- 
 tice has greatly increased the desire of the lion 
 for human flesh. In Madagascar, the fate of 
 the infant depends on the calculation of lucky 
 and unlucky days. If, judging from the time 
 of birth, its destiny is concluded to be malevo- 
 lent, it is put to death by suffocation. A poor 
 woman called on a missionary, and acknow- 
 ledged that four out of five of her children had 
 been destroyed in this way. Where the des- 
 tiny may possibly be averted, one plan adopted 
 for the purpose is, to place the infant at the 
 entrance of a cattle-fold, and then to drive in 
 the cattle. If the child is not destroyed, its 
 fate is declared to be averted ; but, if tram- 
 pled on and killed, the contrary is manifest. 
 Infanticide has also prevailed among the North 
 American Indians. From time immemorial, 
 the Choctaws had considered it no crime, un- 
 til they received Christianity. A young man 
 would take a wife, and having no means of 
 supporting her, would soon leave her. The 
 woman, seeing herself deserted, would say, the 
 child has no father to provide it a blanket ; it 
 had better be dead than alive. Sometimes the 
 mother digs a grave and -buries it alive, soon 
 after it is born. Sometimes she puts it to 
 death by stamping on it with her feet. But 
 after the establishment of a mission among 
 them, they passed a law against this crime. 
 
 We are amazed in contemplating the utter 
 extinction of parental affection, which ages of 
 heathenism has thus effected ; but what shall 
 be said of the worse than heathen, among the 
 lower classes in England, who murder their 
 own children for the sake of obtaining the 
 burial fee from some mutual benefit society to 
 which they belong! Human nature is the 
 same every where, when uuaflected by the Cos- 
 
488 
 
 IMP ARANI— JEWS. 
 
 pel : and ercn in » Christian land, those who 
 tntX it with utter contempt or neglect, often 
 ibll, if poasible, even below the heathen. 
 
 EdinbuTi 
 
 }mrgh Encyclopedia; Rees' Cydopedta ; 
 *9 (Snat Mord Evils in India ; Narrative 
 
 afl^ntetUiom in Madagascar, p. 61 ; Dibble's 
 ScMdmeh Liands ; Miss. Her., Vol. XIX., p. 9. 
 
 IRISH PRESBYTERIAN MISSIONS: 
 The General Assembly of the Irish Pres- 
 byterian Church inaintaia both Home 
 and Foreign Missions. The former have 
 been very successful among the Roman 
 Catholics of Ireland. They have a Foreign 
 Mission in Western India, with four sta- 
 tions. They have Jewish missions at 
 Hamburg, Bonn, and Damascus, and colo- 
 nial missions in British North America, 
 Australia, Van Dieman's Land, and New 
 Zealand. All these missions are prosecuted 
 with energy and zeal. 
 
 ISLE OF FRANCE : See Mauritius. 
 
 ITAFAMASI : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Zulus in South Africa, 
 near Port Natal. 
 
 JEWS, MISSIONS TO: Coeval with 
 the establishment of Christian missions among 
 the heathen, spring up in the church the spirit 
 of missions to the Jews. The voice that, com- 
 ing across the lapse of centuries, struck upon 
 the ear and thrilled the heart of Christendom, 
 " Go ye into all the world and preach the Gos- 
 pel," called attention to the moral condition 
 and wants of God's ancient people, Israel, 
 scattered among all nations. There was a 
 feeUng, that if the Gospel was to be preached 
 among all nations, it ought, as in the apostles' 
 d^, to begin at Jerusalem. There was also 
 a firm belief that " the Gospel was the power of 
 God unto salvation to every one that believeth, 
 to the Jew first ; " and that God had not cast 
 away this people from the covenant of redemp- 
 tion in a way that thej^ could not be saved by 
 grace, " for even at this present time also there 
 was a remnant, according to the election of 
 grace." Whatever may be the theories ad- 
 vanced by many, respecting the future of the 
 Jewish people, it is a prophetic and providen- 
 tial fact that they have been kept distinct 
 from all other nations from the time of the 
 Abrahamic call to the present hour. During 
 the former part of their history, they were dis- 
 tinguished as the people of God ; during the 
 latter part they have been distinguished as the 
 
 rial objects of Jehovah's indignation. In 
 respect, their relation to Christianity and 
 all other forms of religion is peculiar. While 
 all other tribes and nations, springing from 
 whatever source, have come upon the stage of 
 the world, passed through scenes of prosperity 
 and adversity, socially and morally, having a 
 common history and fate, the Jewish people 
 remain always the same, both in religious and 
 social adversity. They are alone, dwelling in 
 the valley of weeping ; a proverb among the 
 nations with whom they sojourn, but to whom 
 
 they never assimilate. As, in ancient days, in 
 respect to the covenant of redemption, the 
 whole Avorld was divided into two classes, 
 " Jews and Gentiles," so it is now, only the 
 order of the relation is reversed. The " Ammi " 
 are now the " Lo-ammi," and the " Lo-Ammi" 
 are the " Ammi." Divine Providence has 
 kept up the distinction, and an enlightened 
 Christian consciousness always recognizes it. 
 
 In order to a comprehensive view of a work 
 of Christian missions among the Jews, a briet 
 review of the rise and progress, and decline of 
 Christianity among them, is necessary. Chris- 
 tianity began ^t Jerusalem. The story tha» 
 Jesus of Nazareth, on the cross expiating the 
 sins of the people, was the long-promised Mes- 
 siah of the fathers, kings, and prophets, con- 
 tained the truth essential to their salvation. 
 It was told and reported in their hearing. It 
 lodged in their hearts, and pricked their con- 
 sciences. The Spirit was poured out from on 
 high, and brought them to embrace the truth. 
 On the day of Pentecost, three thousand were 
 converted. A few days after, five thousand 
 more were converted. The work thus begun 
 continued until the converts were numbered 
 by multitudes of men and women, and great 
 companies of priests. The apostles to the cir- 
 cumcision were as successful in preaching and 
 making proselytes to Christianity throughout 
 the world, as were the apostles to the uncir- 
 cumcision. There was no difierence during 
 the first century. The leaders and teachers of 
 the early church never supposed that Jews 
 were not as hopeful subjects of grace as Gen- 
 tiles, notwithstanding the "judicial curse of 
 blindness " was resting upon them. In every 
 province of the Roman empire, and in all 
 known countries out of the empire, Jewish 
 Christian churches were established. At the 
 close of the second century, there were no less 
 than forty-four Jewish Christian congregations 
 at Rome. The third century witnessed the 
 triumph of nominal Christianity over the ter 
 ritory of the Roman empire. The state 
 espoused the church, and promised to be her 
 protector and defender. The Roman govern- 
 ment, after subduing the adjacent states and 
 kingdoms, reduced them to provinces, and 
 caused them, by the extension of its laws, man- 
 ners, and customs, to assimilate to the empire. 
 The Jewish people alone remained unaffected. 
 In the midst of the Roman empire, they con- 
 tinued to be a distinct people, and bitter 
 despisers of both church and state. The 
 state, now a Christian government, attempted 
 to exterminate this obstinate enemy by force 
 of arms ; while the church, sympathizing with 
 her liege lord, imitated his example by exclud- 
 ing the Jews from the spiritual mercies and 
 graces of Christianity. Every effort at length 
 was abandoned to evangelize the Jews. The 
 council of Elvira forbade all familiar inter- 
 course with the Jews by Christians, under 
 pain of excommunication from the chureV 
 
JEWS. 
 
 489 
 
 Finally, a decree was passed, forbidding a Jew 
 to enter a Christian church. Thus, as through 
 corruption, Christianity ceased to be propa- 
 gated among the heathen, so, by wicked 
 decrees, it was not allowed to be extended to 
 the Jews. But, happily, the age of Christian 
 missions to the unevangelized came. The 
 Jews were not altogether forgotten. 
 
 The spirit of Jewish missions first manifest- 
 ed itself in the national Synod of the Low- 
 countries. The subject engaged the serious 
 attention of the synods of Dordrecht, Delft, 
 and Leyden, which were held 1676, '7, and '8. 
 The founders of these synods devised a scheme 
 for promoting the conversion of the Jews in 
 their own country. Many Israelites and among 
 them some distinguished scholars, embraced 
 Christianity. From this date conversions 
 among the Jews were frequent. To prcfmote 
 the work societies were formed by interested 
 Christians. In 1728 the Callenburg Institution 
 was established at Halle, which had for its 
 chief object the conversion of the Jews, by 
 means of tracts, Hebrew Scriptures, and mis- 
 sionaries. The Moravian brethren, about the 
 year 1764, had their attention turned to the 
 spiritual welfare of the Jews. Some of their 
 most distinguished men, for example, Leonard 
 Dober, Count Zinzendorf, and David Kirkhoflf, 
 did all in their power to further this object. 
 In 1736, 400 Jews were admitted into the evan- 
 gelical church at Darmstadt. In 1739, 100 
 Jews embraced the Gospel in the Grand Duchy 
 of Hesse. The infidel revolution in Europe in 
 1789 put an end to all like eflbrts to evangelize 
 the Jews. After these brief notices we arrive 
 at the period of modern missions to the Jews. 
 
 Numbers of the Jews. — In exact fulfilment of 
 the Scriptures the Jews are sojourners among 
 all nations. And so little is known respecting 
 them, in many countries, that no reliable esti- 
 mate can be obtained of their numbers. The 
 Jewish population of the whole world, as far 
 as it is known with approximate certainty, is 
 14,000,000. They are distributed as follows : 
 
 In the Mohammedan countries in 
 
 Europe, Asia, and Africa . . . 3,000,000 
 
 China 60,000 
 
 Russian Empire 1,200,000 
 
 Poland 1,000,000 
 
 Prussia Proper 150,000 
 
 Austria 453,000 
 
 German States 138,000 
 
 Holland 66,000 
 
 France 81,000 
 
 Italy 200,000 
 
 England 30,000 
 
 Ionian Isles 7,000 
 
 Danish States 15,000 
 
 Sweden 1,700 
 
 Switzerland 1,900 
 
 Gibraltar 4,000 
 
 Rhenish Provinces 250,000 
 
 Gallicia 200,000 
 
 West Indies 
 
 North and South America 
 
 Add to the above the Beni-Israel 
 among the Hindoos, found in the 
 year 1822, and reported by the 
 agent of the London Jews Soci- 
 ety, Mr. Largon, about . . . 
 
 13,500 
 200,000 
 
 6,928,900 
 
 Whole number 14,000,000 
 
 The Jews that are accessible to missionary 
 operations are distributed as follows : — Great 
 Britain, 30,000 ; France, 81,000 ; Italy, 200,- 
 000 ; Austria, 453,000 ; the Rhenish Provinces, 
 250,000 ; Silesia, 50,000 ; East and West 
 Prussia, 26,000 ; Prussia Proper, 150,000 ; 
 Danish States, 15,000; Poland, 1,000,000; 
 Holland, 66,000; Palestine, 19,000; Bagdad, 
 100,000 ; Smyrna, 15,000 ; Salonica, 35,000 ; 
 Russia, 1,000,000 ; United States, 100,000 ; 
 miscellaneous, 1,000,000. In all about 5,000,- 
 000. 
 
 Present Social State. — The social state of the 
 Jews has not changed since their dispersion. 
 The same feeling in the various governments 
 where they sojourn, that excluded them from 
 civil privileges during the sway of the Roman 
 Empire, still exists in the old world, excluding 
 them from any participation in political mat- 
 ters not only, but depriving them of many 
 privileges enjoyed by all others. In Russia, 
 Turkey, Austria, Italy, and Switzerland, they 
 are not at all regarded as citizens, but as aliens 
 that are to be rigidly watched, and that may 
 be at any time sacrificed, personally or pecu- 
 niarily, for the benefit of those governments. 
 The Russians draft their young men at an 
 earlier age and in a larger proportion to their 
 numbers, than their own legitimate subjects, 
 and make it a crime worthy of death for them 
 to leave the country. Austria, when it suits 
 her purposes, extorts enormous taxes from them, 
 oftentimes reducing them to the stages of utter 
 destitution. Rome confines them to filthy and 
 almost uninhabitable quarters, locks them in 
 at nightfall, and inflicts death upon any one 
 of them that ventures to mingle with Romans. 
 Switzerland has but lately banished them from 
 her cantons. Among the Turks it is no crime 
 to kill a Jew. In Prussia, France, and Eng- 
 land, although as Jews they cannot participate 
 in the first offices of these governments, still 
 by the force of their genius, and the power ot 
 their money, one may occasionally rise to po- 
 litical distinction. In England, the most lib- 
 eral and lenient government in Europe towards 
 them, a controversy has been for many years 
 pending upon the propriety and constitution- 
 ality of admitting Jews elect to seats in par- 
 liament. In no country of Europe have the 
 Jews been emancipated from the political 
 thraldom into which they were thrown by the 
 Roman power. In Asia, they generally live 
 in exclusion and have no desire to be received 
 
490 
 
 JEWS. 
 
 u ciiiienB. In the United States there are 
 presented no barriers to tl)eir.j)olitical aspira- 
 tkns, and the consequence is many Jewish 
 names aw found on the rolls of both the upper 
 and lower bouses of Congress. Also in some 
 of the iVco governments of the West India 
 islands Jews have a prominent voice in their 
 legislative bodies. I'he principal occupation 
 of the Jews is trade and traffic. From their 
 political relation to the governments, their 
 condition is made one of instability^ and change. 
 They do not become agriculturists, nor deal 
 largely in real estate. Having no government 
 to protect them, they have endeavored to secure 
 that which forms a very good substitute, viz., 
 money. Their investments are made in banks 
 and in public or government stocks. So that, 
 whenever the decree goes forth for them to 
 seek a new home, their possessions are imme- 
 diately, as bv magic, turned to gold to accom- 
 pany and solace them on their pilgrimage. 
 
 lutcllectwd Position.— The intellectual posi- 
 tion of the Jews ranks high. They are the 
 great thinkers for the masses of Europe. 
 
 The following eloquent passage, from a dis- 
 course on the " Present Relation of Israel to 
 the "SVorld," may serve to meet all historic de- 
 mands in a sketch like this : " The European 
 continental press is mainly in Jewish hands ; 
 every department of periodical literature 
 Bwarms with Jewish laborers. The news- 
 paper press is under their control, and the cor- 
 respondence is mainly conducted by them. Tak- 
 ing a step higher, there we find them again. 
 "VVe ask for knowledge of the mysteries of the 
 starry heavens, and the children of Israel be- 
 come our instructors. The Herschels and 
 the Aragos are the leaders of that lofty band 
 of celestial travelers that journey among the 
 stars. "We cry for light upon the mysteries of 
 revelation, and the children of Israel open the 
 pearly gates of day, and light flows around us. 
 Jahn, llengstenbe'rg, Tholuck, Krummacher, 
 and a host of others, furnish us with biblical 
 criticism, didactic theology, and general sacred 
 literature. We ask for a key to unlock a diar 
 lect of Moses and the prophets, and a Hebrew 
 takes one from his drawer. Gesenius gives us 
 our lexicon, and Nordheimer our grammar. 
 We would have the dark chasm in early 
 Church History filled up, and a bridge thrown 
 across it, in order that we may pass safely 
 from inspired to uninspired history ; the chil- 
 dren of Israel furnish the materials and cover 
 the chasm. Neander furnishes us with our 
 incomparable Christian Church History, and 
 Da Costa with a history of the Jews. What 
 need I add more ? ITiesc facts show that the 
 Hebrew intellect is exerting a powerful influ- 
 ence upon the secular and sacred literature of 
 the age." 
 
 Religious Condition. — The religious condi- 
 tion of the Jews may be viewed in relation to 
 Judaism and Christianity. In their relation to 
 Judaism they may be divided into four classes : 
 
 1. A considerable number of the older Jews 
 are strict Talmudists. 1'hey are so, however, 
 less from conviction than because they per- 
 ceive the necessary consequences of deserting 
 the old foundations. The link which binds 
 them to Talmudism is purely of a negative 
 character. They adhere to it not from love 
 to that system, but from dread of a worse. If 
 they leave traditionary ground, they know of 
 no evidence strong enough to arrest them on 
 this side of infidelity. Their state, therefore, 
 may be summed up in this aphorism, that some- 
 thing is better than nothing, and authority is 
 better than no ground at all. 
 
 2. A secotfd class of Jews having thrown 
 off the Talmud, endeavor, perhaps vainly, yet 
 earnestly, to find a resting-place in the Old 
 Testament. Having left their old moorings, 
 they endeavor to let down their anchor there ; 
 ancl, if it fixed, nothing would please them 
 more. But, missing the right interpretation 
 of the Old Testament, they can get no sure 
 bottom. They are thus driven along, whether 
 they will or not, by the spirit of the times. 
 
 3. A third class, far more numerous than 
 the other two, whose reverence for authority 
 being entirely destroyed, have thrown off tho 
 Talmud, and whose moral sense having be- 
 come darkened and debased, have cast off the 
 Old Testament too. The link which binds the 
 first class to the Talmud, and that which at- 
 taches the heart of the second to the Bible, 
 being broken, they have sunk down into avowed 
 infidelity. It is to be observed, however, that 
 all who may be reckoned fairly among this 
 class do not occupy exactly the same position. 
 With many, their infidelity is a mere nega- 
 tion. Their understandings being emanci- 
 pated, they can receive nothing without evi- 
 dence ; their hearts being callous, they do not 
 inquire after it. Still, if it were presented, 
 they would be open to conviction. Another 
 party, and it is one which is daily increasing, 
 places itself in the position of direct and active 
 antagonism. They would gladly banish all 
 systems of belief out of the world. They re- 
 gard them all alike as imposing fetters on the 
 understanding, and an unnecessary restraint 
 on the inclinations of the heart. They are, 
 for the most part, proud, high-minded, neither 
 reverencing God, nor regarding man. 
 
 4. A fourth class is found a stage lower 
 down than all the preceding ones. The last 
 mentioned., though having given up all idea of 
 revelation, stand at least on deistical ground. 
 But this goes further, and treads the dreary 
 wastes of pantheism. Of course, in dealing 
 with such, one must take up a question antece- 
 dent even to the inspiration of Scripture, viz., 
 the existence and personality of Him whose 
 revelation it professes to be. It is difficult to 
 compute the number belonging to this class. 
 There is reason to believe that it is already 
 large ; and, without any doubt, it is continu- 
 ally receiving new accessions. 
 
JEWS. 
 
 491 
 
 In their relation to Christianity, they may 
 be divided into three classes : 
 
 1. A very large proportion of the Jews 
 view Christianity in the aspect of the double 
 apostasy of Popery and infidelity, or Kation- 
 alism. They see in the one an idolatrous wor- 
 ship ; in the other, a denial of its very being. 
 There is something abhorrent to their mind in 
 the former, and nothing attractive to it in the 
 latter. A Christianity that presents itself as 
 a mitigated form of heathen idolatry, can 
 never win the regards of a Jew ; nor can it be 
 expected that a Christianity which requires to 
 be pared and pruned of its chief doctrines by 
 its own supporters, should gain his confidence 
 or engage his affections. So far, therefore, as 
 Christianity is identified in his mind with 
 either of these apostate systems, it is necessa- 
 rily rejected by him. He regards it either as 
 a vail thrown over the grosser features of hea- 
 thenism, or as a thin partition wall, employed 
 for a season to conceal the infidelity of the 
 heart, till circumstances permit its removal 
 and the free profession of the inward senti- 
 ments. Popery has been so long and so wide- 
 ly prevalent, and infidelity has acquired in re- 
 cent times so fearful an ascendancy, that we 
 need not wonder if most of the notions float- 
 ing about in Jewish society regarding Chris- 
 tianity, have been drawn from the one or the 
 other of these two sources. The natural efiect 
 is the formation of the large class of which I 
 now speak, who, whatever they may think of 
 their own position, consider that of Christians 
 as equally, if not more untenable. They are 
 not animated, however, with any special hatred 
 of Christianity, nor do they show themselves 
 actively hostile. 
 
 2. A second class, who have come into closer 
 contact with the Christian system, or with 
 true Christians, exhibits a difference of senti- 
 ment, corresponding to the difference of their 
 situation. Their views are very indistinct, nor 
 do they know well what passes in their own 
 minds. The idea, however, seems to have 
 started in many of them that possibly in Chris- 
 tianity is to be found the solution of their own 
 difficulties, and that Christianity is the termi- 
 nating point of the present movement. Those 
 who shrink back with horror from the thought 
 of infidelity, feel the necessity of some form 
 of positive belief to rest upon. To return to 
 the Talmud is out of the question. The Old 
 Testament, if they reject the Christian inter- 
 pretation, is also untenable. Christianity, 
 therefore, presents itself as the only and last 
 refuge. 
 
 3. The third and last party to be mentioned 
 entertain very different feelings towards Chris- 
 tianity from the other two. They manifest 
 towards it the greatest hostility, and persecute 
 it with the utmost rancor. The chief weapon 
 which they can at present command is the 
 tongue ; but the venom with which they poi- 
 son its arrows shows sufficiently the disposition 
 
 of their hearts, and what they would be in- 
 clined to do if they had more power. They re- 
 gard Christianity, whether as a system or as 
 embodied in the persons of its professors, as 
 their natural enemy. They consider it as the 
 one great obstacle to the leveling process 
 which they are attempting to carry out in 
 society. They declare they will not rest till 
 it is rooted out of the earth. 
 
 Reasons for distinct Missions to the Jews. — 
 The reasons for establishing distinct missions 
 to the Jews are various, and upon examination 
 they will be found to be the same in some 
 respects now that were acted upon by the 
 apostles. (1) As they were Israelites then to 
 whom pertained the adoption, and the glory, 
 and the covenants, and the giving of the law, 
 and the service of God, and the promises ; so 
 are they now. (2) They are a separate peo- 
 ple, and those among whom they dwell would 
 have no more relation to them than though 
 they did not exist. (3) As in our Saviour's 
 times it was necessary to begin at Moses and 
 all the prophets, and expound unto them in 
 the Scriptures the things concerning Christ, so 
 it is now. In order to this, the missionary 
 must not only be thoroughly versed in the 
 Hebrew Scriptures, but in Eabbinical litera- 
 ture in all its departments. Having proved 
 that the Messiah of the ancient Scriptures is 
 Jesus of Nazareth, the way opens for preach- 
 ing repentance and faith. (4) There were, at 
 the time of the establishment of modern mis- 
 sions among the Jews, no adequate means or 
 agencies for meeting the religious wants of the 
 Jews. There was also a very prevalent senti- 
 ment that all efforts made for their conversion 
 would prove abortive ; and hence, on this 
 ground, if no other, the church declined to 
 entertain the subject of Jewish missions, and 
 did not deem it expedient to project any mea- 
 sures for a work of the kind. For these and 
 like reasons, separate missions to the Jews 
 were needed and established. 
 
 The London Society for promoting Christian- 
 ity among tlie Jews. — This Society was formal- 
 ly organized in the year 1809. The " object 
 of the Society was to relieve the temporal 
 distress of the Jews, as well as to promote 
 their spiritual welfare." The fundamental 
 principle on which it was founded, was by 
 means of temporal relief to gain access to the 
 poor. In order to furnish employment to 
 converts, a printing-press was established in 
 1811, which yet continues in operation. The 
 Episcopal Jews' chapel for Christian worship, 
 and schools, were opened in 1813. Up to this 
 time there had been made 19 proselytes from 
 among the Jews in London. In the year 
 1818, the first foreign missionary to the Jews 
 was sent abroad to Poland — an enterprise that 
 has been eminently successful from the first. 
 In contemplating the wants of the field, this 
 Society. was convinced that little could be 
 done towards the conversion of the Jews with- 
 
iM 
 
 JEWS. 
 
 oot misioiuuries and editions of the Bible and 
 other books adapteti to tlieir relipious state. 
 Accordingly, in 1821, a seminary for the in- 
 struction of mbwionarics to the Jews was 
 opcnc<l. and shortly afterwards an edition of 
 tne Hebrew Sori|)turt^ was published. Sub- 
 sequently, the Scnjitures were issued in Judeo- 
 Polish fur the Polish Jews, and in Syriac for 
 the Chasidim and Cabalistic Jews. In 1840, 
 the ^lebrew College was established for the 
 instruction of missionary candidates in the 
 branches of learning requisite to promote the 
 efficiency of their missions. From this college 
 have gone forth many converted Israelites as 
 missionaries, qot only in connection with the 
 Loudon Society, but also other societies. 
 
 This Society has at the present time 31 mis- 
 sion stations in Holland, Frankfort-on-the- 
 Maine, Poland, Jerusalem, Pozcn, Khine Dis- 
 trict, Strasburg, France, Konigsburg, Danzig, 
 Smyrna, North Africa, London, Berlin, Prus- 
 sia, Constantipole, Safet, Beyrut, Sweden, 
 Bagdad, Bucharest, Salonica, I3rcslau, Jassy, 
 Adrianople. The number of missionaries is 
 78. Of this number, 59 are converted Israel- 
 ites. Since the year 1820, there have been 
 distributed among the Jews by the agents and 
 missionaries of this Society — Hebrew Old 
 Testament copies, 61,620 ; Hebrew portions 
 of Old Testament, 167,034; Hebrew New 
 Testaments, 55,745 ; Hebrew prayers of the 
 Church of England, 4,471 ; tracts and publi- 
 cations of diverse languages, 1,039,665. The 
 Society has 20 schools, in which there have 
 been taught since the year 1827, children of 
 Hebrew parentage, 9,244. Since the Socie- 
 ty's organization, there have been ordained 
 under its auspices, 50 clergymen who were 
 converted Israelites, the majority of whom are 
 now laboring as stated pastors over Christian 
 congregations. It is almost impossible to 
 state with approximate certainty the number 
 of conversions that have been made in con- 
 nection with this Society. The Society avows 
 its object to be not to baptize Jews, but to 
 promote Christianity among them ; and hence 
 a return of baptisms can form no criterion of 
 the number really converted, for the Jews are 
 generally but temporary residents in the towns 
 where they receive instruction, while only a 
 small proportion of those instructed by the 
 missionary are baptized by him, and the vast 
 majority of the proselytes connect themselves 
 with the Christian Church, unreported by the 
 missionar}-. The following is the most authen- 
 tic estimate we have seen of converts through 
 missionary eflForta. In Germany, during the 
 last 20 jears, 5,000 ; Russia, 3,000 ; London, 
 2,000; in other countries of Europe, 1,500; 
 making, through the operations of the London 
 Society, either directly or indirectly, 11,500. 
 It should be remembered here, for the benefit 
 of certain classes of American readers, that 
 the Loudon Society has always b^en com- 
 posed of the evangelical strength of the 
 
 Church of England. Tliere are found among 
 ite principal managers the following names : 
 Burgess, llyder, Nvilberforce, Simeon, Basil 
 Wood, Saunders, Hawtrey, Way, Marsh, Grim- 
 shawe, Bickersteth, Stewart, Cunninghahi, 
 MeCaul, McNeile. Consequently the mis.sion- 
 aries of the Society have been selected goner- 
 ally with a strict regard to their evangelical 
 views and piety. The manner of conducting 
 the work of missions may be seen by the fol- 
 lowing extract. Speaking of Poland, where 
 there are two millions of Jews of the most or- 
 thodox stamp, a writer says : " A great work 
 was thus begun in Poland in 1821. Public 
 preaching, pritute discussions, daily conversa- 
 tion respecting the character and coming of 
 the Messiah, and the fulfilment of the prophe- 
 cies in him ; the circulation of the Hebrew 
 Scriptures, and the Scriptures in the Judeo- 
 Polish dialect. All these means are owned and 
 blessed of God among the numerous descend- 
 ants of Abraham in that country." Again, "A 
 great extent of the kingdom of Poland has 
 been traversed every year, and the sound of the 
 Gospel has penetrated into almost every nook 
 and corner of the land, and the seed thus sown 
 has taken root in the hearts of many Israel- 
 ites." The annual income of this Society is 
 about $150,000. 
 
 The London Society is by priority of exist- 
 ence, and in the magnitude of its operations, 
 the leading Jewish mission society of Christen- 
 dom. It takes rank among the great mission- 
 ary enterprises of the day among the heathen, 
 and is equally successful under the influence of 
 the Divine Spirit in bringing souls to Christ. 
 
 The British Society for the Propagation, of the 
 Gospel among the Jews. — This Society is located 
 in London and is mainly composed of the various 
 denominations of dissenting churches in Eng- 
 land, and supported by them. It was founded 
 in 1842. Its object is to propagate the Gos- 
 pel among the Jews by means of missionaries 
 and colporteurs, who are directed to preach, 
 teach, and visit the Jews, and distribute Bibles, 
 books, and tracts among them. Its first en- 
 deavors were among the Jews resident in Great 
 Britain, with a population of 30,000. Subse- 
 quently it extended its operations to foreign 
 parts. The society has now in its employ 24 
 missionaries, mostly converted Jews, located 
 in the following places, besides the different 
 localities in England, at Tunis, in Northern 
 Africa, at Gibraltar, at one of the gates of the 
 Holy Land, at Frankfort, in Paris, in Lyons, 
 in Wurteraburg, and in Breslau, It supports 
 one female agent, who has under her charge 60 
 Jewesses, whom she instructs in the Sacred 
 Scriptures. For about seven years the society 
 sustained a Hebrew Mission College, to pre- 
 pare young men for the missionary work among 
 the Jews. Eleven of the graduates, converted 
 Jews, are now missionaries of the society, while 
 others have become missionaries of other so- 
 cieties. 
 
JEWS. 
 
 493 
 
 The number of converts made through the 
 operations of the society is 100. Its annual 
 income is about $20,000, the larger proportion 
 of which is the fruit of female piety and devot- 
 edness. 
 
 Missions to the Jews of the Free Church of 
 Scotland, and other Presbyterian bodies in Great 
 Britain. — The mission to the Jews of the Free 
 Church of Scotland is not conducted by a vol- 
 untary society, but is one of the departments 
 of the general missionary work in which that 
 church is engaged. It was originated before 
 the division took place in the Church of Scot- 
 land. A deputation was sent to the East to 
 make inquiry into the religious condition of 
 the Jews, in 1839. The result was the estab- 
 lishment of Jewish Missions at Pesth, Hun- 
 gary, and Jassy Moldavia. In 1841 the Presby- 
 terian church in the north of Ireland establish- 
 ed a mission at Damascus, and about the same 
 time the English Presbyterian Synod located 
 one at Corfu. At the time of the memorable 
 disruption, it was found that those clergymen 
 that left the established church were the friends 
 of Jewish missions, whose majority was so large 
 that the missions already established easily 
 passed over into the hands of the Free Church. 
 
 About this time, a great revival among the 
 Jews took place at Pesth. Hundreds, and 
 many Jews of distinction, were converted to 
 Christianity. This mission was interrupted by 
 the revolution in Hungary, and nearly annihi- 
 lated by the despotic decrees of the Austrian 
 government. The established missionary sta- 
 tions and number of missionaries are as fol- 
 lows : Pesth, a teacher and a school of 300 
 scholars ; Breslau, one missionary and wife aid- 
 ed by Jewish converts. Constantinople, three 
 male and three female missionaries, one female 
 teacher, a colporteur, and four Jewish teachers, 
 in all eleven laborers. Amsterdam, two mission- 
 aries, four teachers in the college, with 16 
 scholars. The number of converts is not 
 known. The income of the church devoted to 
 this branch of missionary labor was in 1854 
 about $36,000. 
 
 The Scottish Society for the Conversion of Is- 
 rael. — This society is composed of difl'erent 
 denominations. It was organized in 1845. 
 Mission stations were established at Hamburg, 
 Alton a, and Algiers. The number of mission- 
 aries is two. A number of Jews have been 
 converted. 
 
 Besides these general efforts, many local so- 
 cieties have, from time to time, been insti- 
 tuted on the Continent of Europe, for the con- 
 version of the Jews. 
 
 American Missions to the Jews. — The at- 
 tention of American Christians has also been 
 attracted to the Jews, and many efforts have 
 been put forth with varied success. In 1832, 
 Kev. W. J. Schauffler settled in Constantino- 
 ple. He had been preceded by Dr. Wolfe ; 
 but little or nothing was accomplished by him. 
 Mr. Schauffler labored alone, with extremely 
 
 limited means. His efforts were mainly do- 
 voted to the preparation of an edition of the 
 Scriptures (O.T.) in Hebrew-Spanish, and 
 Hebrew. In this he was aided by the Ameri- 
 can Bible Society. He also published an edi- 
 tion of the Psalms, and two editions of the 
 Pentateuch, in the same language. These 
 publications he distributed among the Jews. 
 He is now engaged in printing, under the aus- 
 pices of the A. B. C. F. M., a Hebrew, and 
 Hebrew-Spanish Lexicon, to accompany the 
 Old Testament. Besides aiding Mr. SchauflBier, 
 the American Board of Commissioners for 
 Foreign Missions have sent two missionaries 
 to the Jews at Salonica and Constantinople. 
 
 The Reformed Presbyterian 'Church in the 
 United States has sent two missionaries to the 
 Jews at Salonica and Damascus. The Camp- 
 bellite Baptists have a mission station at Jeru- 
 salem. The Presbyterian Board of Foreign 
 Missions has under its care three missionaries 
 to the Jews in Baltimore, Md. and New 
 York. The labors of these missionaries are 
 divided between Germans and Jews. Two 
 places of worship have been opened, which 
 are frequented on Sunday, by a promiscuous 
 congregation of German population. A few 
 individuals have been baptized by one of the 
 missionaries. 
 
 The American Society for Meliorating the 
 Condition of the Jews. — This society was organ- 
 ized in 1820. Its fundamental idea was, the 
 temporal relief of persecuted converts from 
 abroad. It aimed to affbrd an asylum for 
 such Jews, as believing in the Christian reli- 
 gion, dared not profess their faith for fear of 
 persecution from their kindred. From repre- 
 sentations made to them, the whole American 
 Christian community became deeply interested 
 in the persecuted converts in Europe. Con- 
 siderable sums of money were raised, which 
 were devoted to the purchase, and furnishing 
 of an establishment for this purpose. But 
 either because there were no converts disposed 
 or because no provision was made to enable 
 them to emigrate, no colony of converts was 
 ever fully organized, for want of subjects, '^o 
 realize the idea started with, a number of dif- 
 ferent experiments were tried, all of which 
 proved abortive. It was in 1849 that a purely 
 missionary work among the Jews in the 
 United States was projected on a grand scale. 
 Although the society had employed mission- 
 aries to the Jews previously, yet its purposes 
 were not well defined, nor its plans matured 
 until this time. The society retaining its bap- 
 tized title, so changed its constitution as to 
 admit of a grand missionary enterprize among 
 the Jews. The field upon examination is 
 found to be an extensive one, at the present 
 time. In 1851 there were found on the syna- 
 gogues' rolls, in the United States, according 
 to a Jewish publication, 60,000 males, from 
 thirteen years and upward. The number of 
 females being about equal to that of the males, 
 
494 
 
 JACOBITES-JASSORE. 
 
 not inclodioff any under thirteen years, would 
 make the religious portion of the Jewish po- 
 pulation in the country, 120,000. Add to this 
 ihe thousands of Jews that are traveling 
 through the country, and those who. have not 
 cntcreil their names on the rolls, together with 
 all the children under thirteen, and we shall 
 have a Jewish population of 150,000 souls. 
 
 The society aims to accomplish its work by 
 the distribution of the Scriptures in Hebrew, 
 German and French ; of tracts suitable to 
 their religious state ; and books which have a 
 bearing upon the question of the Mcssiahship 
 of Jesus of Nazareth. The character of the 
 society's operations is that of an itinerancy. It 
 baptizes no converts, but prepares them for 
 that ordinance, and leaves the responsibility 
 of a public profession of faith with pastors of 
 churches ; hence the society can never know 
 the amount of fruits resulting from the culti- 
 vation of this field. 
 
 During the year 1854, the society supported 
 10 regular missionaries and 7 colporteurs, who 
 labored among the Jews in forty cities and 
 large towns in difiFerent parts of the country. 
 It also delegated an agent to Palestine, on a 
 mission of inquiry as to what could be done 
 there in agriculture among the Jews, with a 
 view to reach them with the Gospel. During 
 this same year, 29 converts were reported as 
 the results of the society's labors. The in- 
 come of the society for the same year was 
 about $14,500. The whole number of con- 
 verts reported as the results of the missionary 
 operations of the society since 1849, were 59 
 Jews. 
 
 GENERAL SUMMARY. 
 Number of Jews in the world, . . 14,000,000 
 
 •' " now comprising a missionary 
 
 field, 6,000,000 
 
 " of Missionary stations, ... 115 
 
 *• " Missionaries, about . . . 200 
 
 •♦ «« Missionaries, converted Jews, 
 
 about 100 
 
 " «» Converted Jews, clergymen, (be- 
 sides) . 200 
 
 " " Hebrew children taught in Mis- 
 sion schools, . . . . 12,000 
 " ♦' Converts during the last 60 years, 20,000 
 " " " now in the church (in 1854) 15,000 
 Amount expended on all the Mission stations, $160,000 
 Proportion of converts to the whole population, 1 to 700 
 " convertfl to Jews, that are acces- 
 
 „ "i^K, 1 to 333 
 
 " clergymen to the number of con- 
 
 ▼«^. Ito 60 
 
 Rev. E. R. McGregor. 
 JACOBITES: A sect of Christians in 
 Syria and Mesopotamia, so called either from 
 Jacob, a Syrian, who lived in the reign of 
 the emperor Mauritius, or from one Jacob, a 
 monk, who flourished in the year 550. They 
 are of two sects, one following the rites of the 
 Latin church, and the other continuing separate 
 from Rome. There is also a division among 
 the latter, who have two rival patriarchs. 
 The^ number about thirty or forty thousand 
 families in Syria and Mesopotamia. They 
 hold but one nature in Christ. With r-:^jLct 
 to purgatory and prayers for the dead, they 
 
 hold with the Greeks and other Eastern Chris- 
 tians. They use unleavened bread at the enchar 
 rist, reject confession, and practice circumcision 
 before baptism. — (See Copts.) 
 
 JACKMEL : A town in ITayti, contain- 
 ing a population of about 10,000, surrounded 
 by a district containing 60,000 more. A sta- 
 tion of the Baptist Missionary Society. 
 
 JAFFA : The ancient Joppa. It is the 
 principal port of Judea, and the only point of 
 communication which David and Solomon had 
 with the Mediterranean. It is a station of the 
 London Jews' Society. 
 
 JAFFNA :, A seaport town, near the north- 
 ern extremity of the island of Ceylon, capital of 
 the district of Jaffnapatam. Population about 
 8000. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 JAIPUR: A city in Upper Assam, and 
 formerly a station of the American Baptist 
 Mission. 
 
 JAINS : A remarkable sect, scattered 
 throughout India, but nowhere comparatively 
 numerous, except in South Canara, where Jain 
 temples still remain in a state of tolerable per- 
 fection. Their temples are of two sorts : one 
 covered with a roof, named Busty ; the other, 
 an open area, called Betta, which signifies a 
 hill. In the Betta temples, the only image of 
 a saint is that of Gornuta Roya, said, when on 
 earth, to have been a powerful king. The 
 word Jain signifies a person who has renounced 
 the ordinary modes of thinking and living 
 among mankind. The Jains assert that they 
 have preserved the true and primitive religion ; 
 and say that the Brahmins have swerved from 
 all the ancient religious maxims of their an- 
 cestors ; and that, laying aside the venerable 
 traditions of their masters, they have substi- 
 tuted in the place a monstrous combination. 
 The Vedas, the eighteen Puranas, the Tri- 
 murti, the Avataras of Vishnu, the Lingam, 
 the worship of the cow and other animals, and 
 of sensible objects, the sacrifice of the Yojna, 
 are all rejected by the Jains, who hold them 
 to be a mass of abominations, innovations, and 
 corruptions of the true primitive religion. The 
 Jains are frequently confounded with the wor- 
 shipers of Buddha ; and their tenets have cer- 
 tainly, in many points, a strong resemblance 
 to those taught in Ava by the adherents of 
 Buddha. — Hook's Year Book of Missions. 
 
 JALNA : A city of Hindostan, 120 miles 
 N. W. of Ahmednuggur, and 300 miles from 
 Bombay. It is situated in the territories of 
 the Nizam, or Mohammedan prince, who has 
 nominally an independent government over a 
 territory of 95,000 square miles. It was oc- 
 cupied as a station of the American Board in 
 1837 ; and belongs to the Ahmednuggur mis- 
 sion. 
 
 JAMAICA : See West Indies. 
 
 JASSORE : A town on the Ganges, 62 
 miles N. of Calcutta. The English Baptists 
 commenced a mission here in 1800. 
 
JAUNPUR— KADATCHAPORAM. 
 
 495 
 
 JAUNPUR : The capital of a district of 
 the same name, in Northern Hindostan, about 
 40 miles north-west of Benares. It is a sta- 
 tion of the Church Missionary Society. 
 
 JAVA : See Indian Archipelago. 
 
 JERUSALEM: See Oriental Christians, 
 
 JEREMIE : A station of the Wesleyans, in 
 Hayti. 
 
 JESSORE : Capital of a district of the 
 same name, 62 miles N. E. of Calcutta. A 
 station of the Baptist Missionary Society. 
 
 JESUITS : The Society of Jesus, one of the 
 most celebrated monastic orders of the Romish 
 Church, founded in the year 1540, by Ignatius 
 Loyola. — (See Church of Rome and Europe.) 
 
 JILOLO : One of the Molucca Islands in 
 the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 JOONEER : A town in the province of 
 Arungabad, Hindostan, about 48 miles from 
 Poona. The fort has seven gates of masonry, 
 one within the other, and contains the ruins of 
 many Mohammedan tombs and Hindoo exca- 
 vations. About a mile south of Jooneer, are 
 numerous excavations and cave temples, the 
 sculptures of which prove them to be of Jain 
 origin. 
 
 JUGGERNAUT : A celebrated place of 
 Hindoo worship, in the district of Cuttack, on 
 the sea-coast of Orissa. It stands close to the 
 sea-shore, a few miles north-east of the Chil- 
 ka lake, and immediately adjacent to the town 
 of Pursottom. The town and temple are sur- 
 rounded with low sand-hills, and the surround- 
 ing country is very sterile. The idol is a 
 carved block of wood, with a frightful visage, 
 painted black, with a distended mouth of a 
 bloody color. On festival days, the throne of 
 the idol is placed upon a stupendous movable 
 tower, 60 feet high, resting on wheels, which 
 indent the ground deeply as they turn slowly 
 under the ponderous machine. He is accom- 
 panied with two other idols, his brother Bala- 
 ram, and his sister Shubudra, of a white and 
 yellow color, each on a separate tower, and 
 sitting upon thrones of nearly an equal height. 
 Attached to the principal tower are six ropes, 
 of the length and size of a ship's cable, by 
 w'hich the people draw it along. The priests 
 and attendants are stationed around the 
 throne, on the car ; and occasionally address 
 the worshipers in libidinous songs and ges- 
 tures. Both the walls of the temple and the 
 sides of the car are covered with the most in- 
 decent emblems, in large and durable sculp- 
 ture. Obscenity and blood are the character- 
 istics of the idol's worship. As the tower 
 moves along, devotees, throwing themselves 
 under its wheels, are crushed to death ; and 
 such acts are hailed by the acclamations of 
 the multitude, as the most acceptable sac- 
 rifices. I'he scenes which occur at the tem- 
 ple as acts of worship, are too indecent 
 to be described. A number of sacred bulls 
 are kept in the place, and fed with vege- 
 
 tables from the hands of the pilgrims. In the 
 temple, also, is preserved what is regarded as 
 a bone of Krishna, considered a most sacred 
 relic. The temple of Juggernaut is esteemed 
 the most sacred of all the religious establish- 
 ments of the Hindoos ; and the concourse of 
 pilgrims by which it is annually visited is 
 immense, particularly in March, when the 
 Dole Jattrah takes place, and in July, when 
 the Ruth Jattrah is celebrated. Dr. Carey 
 was of the opinion that, at the lowest calcula- 
 tion, 1,200,000 attend every year, of whom an 
 incredible portion die by the way, from want, 
 fatigue, or disease. At 50 miles distance, the 
 approach to the spot is known by the quantity 
 of human bones which are strewed by the 
 way. 
 
 Mr. Sterling, in his "Account of Orissa," 
 gives the following description of the grand 
 procession of the idol : " On the appointed 
 day, after various prayers and ceremonies, the 
 images are brought from their throne to the 
 outside of the Lion-gate, not with decency and 
 reverence, but a cord being fastened round 
 their necks, they are dragged by the priests 
 down the steps and through the mud, while 
 others keep their figures erect, and help their 
 movements by shoving from behind, in the 
 most indifferent and unceremonious manner. 
 Thus the monstrous idols go, rocking and 
 pitching along, through the crowd, until they 
 reach the cars, which they are made to ascend 
 by a similar process, up an inclined platform, 
 reaching from the stage of the machine to the 
 ground. On the other hand, a powerful senti- 
 ment of religious enthusiasm pervades the 
 admiring multitude of pilgrims, when the im- 
 ages first make their appearance through the 
 gate. They welcome them with shouts and 
 cries ; and when the monster Juggernaut, the 
 most hideous of all, is dragged forth, the la^ 
 in order, the air is rent with acclamations. 
 After the images have been safely lodged in 
 their vehicles, a box is brought forth, contain- 
 ing the golden or gilded feet, hands, and ears, 
 of the great idol, which are fixed on the proper 
 parts with due ceremony, and a scarlet scarf is 
 carefully arranged round the lower part of the 
 body, or pedestal. The joy and shouts of the 
 crowd, on the first movement of the cars, the 
 creaking sound of the wheels, as these ponder- 
 ous machines roll along, the clatter of hun- 
 dreds of harsh-sounding instruments, and the 
 general appearance of such an immense mass 
 of human beings, produce an astounding 
 eflfect." 
 
 JU-JU, or JEW- JEW : A charm ; a fe- 
 tish. (See Africa, West.) 
 
 JUNIN : In Western India, about 10 
 miles east of Bombay. It has 3,000 houses, 
 and about 25,000 inhabitants, and is a station 
 of the Church Missionary Society. 
 
 KADATCHAPORAM : A station of the 
 Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly 
 district, India. 
 
496 
 
 KAFFRARIA— KAILUA. 
 
 K AFFRARIA, or Kaffrelmul, extends from 
 the Keiskamma river, (the Kei, according to 
 the late arrangement,) which separates it from 
 Cape Colony, to an undefined line somewhere 
 OD the south of Delagoa Bay. Its extent is 
 not exactly osoertainiKl. Ita western boundary 
 is supposed to be near the source of the Orange 
 river, which flows through a vast extent of 
 country into the Atlantic Ocean, and the Ma- 
 poota, which empties itself into Delagoa Bay. 
 
 KAFFRES : The appellation of Kaffre, 
 which sio^nifies unbeliever, was originally given, 
 by the Moorish navigators of the Indian Ocean 
 to the inhabitants of the south-eastern coast 
 of Africa, and was borrowed from them by the 
 Portuguese. Afterwards, when the Dutch 
 colonists came in contact with the most south- 
 ern tribe of the Kaffres, the Koosas or Amako- 
 sa, the Moorish name was given to them ex- 
 clusively ; and in this restricted sense it is gen- 
 erally used by the Dutch and English colo- 
 nists. It is, however, well ascertained that not 
 only the tribes commonly called Kaffres, but 
 the Tambookies, Mambookies, Zulus, Dama- 
 ras, the inhabitants of Delagoa Bay, Mozam- 
 bique, and the numerous Bechuana tribes, who 
 occupy the interior of the continent to an ex- 
 tent yet unexplored, are but subdivisions of one 
 great family, allied in language, customs, and 
 mode of life. The Bechuana dialect, which 
 prevails univei-sally among the interior tribes, 
 so far as they have been visited, varies but 
 slightly from that of the Damaras, and of the 
 natives of Delagoa Bay ; and the Ataakosa is 
 a dialect of the same language. The natives 
 of the Comoro Islands and the aboriginal tribes 
 of Madagascar also speak a dialect intimately 
 allied to those of Kafiraria and Mozambique. 
 This word is variously spelled, Kaffre, Kaffir, 
 Kafir, and Caff re. Which is the more proper 
 ikis not easy to determine. We have followed 
 the Encyclopedia Britannica, on the ground 
 that such a standard work would be most likely 
 to fix and settle the orthography. 
 
 Government. — The ancient government of 
 the Kaffre tribes is feudal : an aristocracy of 
 chiefs, acknowledging the supremacy of the 
 sovereign, but except on extraordinary occa- 
 sions, acting independently of him. Each 
 tribe is divided into kraals or hamlets, each of 
 which has its petty chief. The general chief 
 is the sovereign of the nation, and in a council 
 of chiefs is very powerful, and is looked upon 
 by all the nobles and people with unbounded 
 respect. 
 
 Tfie People.— In personal appearance, the 
 Kaffres are a remarkably fine race of men. 
 Their noble figures and power of limb ; their 
 lofty stature and graceful deportment, have 
 drawn the attention and excited the admira- 
 tion of travelers. Their color is dark brown, 
 mixed with a warmer tint of yellow. Their 
 hair is black and woolly, but not the woolli- 
 ness of the Negro. Their faces approach the 
 European model. They wear no clothing but 
 
 a cloak of skin. In disposition, they are cheer- 
 ful, frank, good-natured, and intelligent. They 
 are a pastoral people, and their flocks and 
 herds constitute their chief care. 
 
 Religious and Moral Condition. — The Kaffres 
 have no national religion. They have only a 
 few unmeaning rites and superstitions, which 
 may be the ruins of some forgotten creed. 
 They practice circumcision, abhor swine's 
 flesh and fish, and have a reverential fear of 
 serpents, which may suggest their eastern ori- 
 gin. Mr. Moffat states that there is, with 
 them, an entire absence of theological ideas. 
 The venerable Dr. V"anderkemp, the first mis- 
 sionary among them, says, " If by religion we 
 mean reverence for God, or the external action 
 by which that reverence is expressed, I never 
 could perceive that they had any religion, nor 
 any idea of the existence of God." This he said 
 with reference to them as a nation, for indi- 
 viduals among them had some notions of God, 
 which they had acquired from those who had 
 associated with white people. And, as proof 
 of this, he said they had no word in their lan- 
 guage to express the idea of a Supreme Being. 
 Mr. Moffat adds his testimony to the same fact, 
 of which he says he became convinced in oppo- 
 sition to his preconceived and cherished opin- 
 ions, both by the declarations of the untutored 
 natives themselves, and the accounts given by 
 the native Christians of their former state, to 
 illustrate which he relates a number of inte- 
 resting conversations and anecdotes. But, 
 although they appear to possess no just spirit- 
 ual ideas, or to have any true conception of a 
 future state, a belief in witchcraft holds the 
 same terrible sway over them as in other Afri- 
 can tribes. So deplorably does this supersti- 
 tious dread of the sorcerer's art prevail among 
 them that they never attribute the death of 
 their people to natural causes. If a KaSre 
 should die of extreme old age, they would attri- 
 bute his death to witchcraft, and wreak their 
 vengeance on some poor innocent creature as 
 the witch. But in those portions of their 
 country which have come under British autho- 
 rity, these cruelties have been suppressed by 
 law. Polygamy is also universal among the 
 Kaffre tribes. 
 
 The various tribes of the Kaffre family are 
 estimated by Rev. J. J. Freeman, Secretary of 
 the London Missionary Society, at 2,000,000, 
 spread from the eastern frontier of Cape Colo- 
 ny to beyond Delagoa Bay, and then across 
 the whole continent, without break, to the 
 Atlantic, in latitude 20°. — Condafs Dictionary 
 of Geography ; Wrongs of the Kaffre Nation, by 
 Justus ; A Tour in South Africa, by Rev. J. J. 
 Fkeeman ; Moffat's Southern Africa ; Philip's 
 Researches in Southern Africa. (For Missions 
 among the Kaffres, see Afkica, Southern.) 
 
 KAHUKU : A station of the American 
 Board on the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. 
 
 KAILUA : The first station occupied by 
 the American Board at the Sandwich Islands, 
 
KAITOTEHE— KHARPUT. 
 
 497 
 
 Bituated about the centre of the eastern coast 
 of Hawaii. 
 
 KAITOTEHE : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New Zealand. 
 
 KAIKOHI : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand. 
 
 KAIPARA : A station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society on the western coast of 
 New Zealand, celebrated for a large muscle, 
 measuring 11 to 13 inches, found there in great 
 abundance. 
 
 KAITAI: The most northern station of 
 the Church Missionary Society in New Zea- 
 land. It lies under a fine wooded range of hills, 
 having on the east a vast plain, with a dark 
 forest in the middle, extending to the flat, 
 marshy estuary of the Awarua river, ending in 
 the Sandy Bay ; to the northward a bright 
 line of sand marks the district of Muriwenua, 
 •which reaches to the North Cape ; on the 
 "Westward the wooded range of Maungu Tanew- 
 ha bridges the whole inland country between 
 Kaitai and Waimate. 
 
 KALUAAHA : A station of the Amer- 
 ican Board on the island of Molokai. 
 
 KALIFF : See Califf. 
 
 KAMA STONE : A station of the Wes- 
 leyans in South Africa, near Buffalo's Yleij. 
 
 KAMBEL : A Burman village near Ban- 
 goon and an out-station of the Am. Baptist 
 Mission at Eangoon. 
 
 KANTHA : A Karen village in the dis- 
 trict of Tavoy, Burmah, and an out-station of 
 Am. Baptist Mission at Tavoy. 
 
 KANEOHE : A station of the American 
 Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. 
 
 KANDY: In Ceylon, about 90 miles N. 
 E. of Colombo. It is surrounded bj hills and 
 mountains, and was anciently the capital of an 
 independent kingdom of the same name. The 
 town itself has about 3000 people, but in the 
 neighboring highlands there is a population of 
 200,000. It is a station of the Church and 
 Baptist Societies. 
 
 KAPITI : An island of New Zealand, in 
 Cook's straits, whose chief sent his sons 500 
 miles for a missionary. The whole island had 
 embraced Christianity, by the labors of one 
 native, who had gone there of his own accord. 
 
 KAEANGAN : Formerly a station of 
 the American Board in Borneo. 
 
 KAPtENS : An interesting race of abori- 
 ginal inhabitants of the mountainous regions 
 of the southern and eastern portions of Bur- 
 mah Proper, and all parts of the Tenasserim 
 provinces, extending into the western portions 
 of Siam, and thence northward among the 
 Shyans. It is 'impossible to form a satisfac- 
 tory estimate of their numbers. In the pro- 
 vince of Tavoy a British census makes the 
 number 2500. Around Maulmain and Ean- 
 goon there are perhaps 20,000 more. In 
 Siam and Laos, there are probably 10,000, 
 making in all, about 30,000. They are a quiet 
 and intelligent people, living by agriculture, 
 82 
 
 and their government is patriarchal. They 
 have received the Gospel with great readiness, 
 and among them the missions of the American 
 Baptists have met with wonderful success. (See 
 Burmah.) 
 
 KAT EIYEE: A district in South Africa, 
 on the borders of Kafiraria, where the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society have a station at 
 Philipton, with 13 out-stations on Kat Eiver, 
 and four in Tambookee land. The population 
 consists chiefly of liberated Hottentots, living 
 in 50 or 60 locations. 
 
 KAUAI : One of the Sandwich Islands 
 group, about 75 miles north-west of Oahu. It 
 is 46 miles in length and 23 in breadth, moun- 
 tainous, and of romantic appearance. 
 ^ KAUKAUA : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand. It stands 
 on a plain immediately adjoining a mountain. 
 The Kaukaua district extends from Opotiki in 
 the Bay of Plenty to Waipiro in Open Bay. 
 
 K AU : A district in the south of the island 
 of Hawaii, where is a statibn of the American 
 Board. 
 
 KAWHIA : A station of the Wesleyans 
 on the west coast of New Zealand. 
 
 KEALAKEKUA : A station of the Amer- 
 ican Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the 
 north-west coast of HaAvaii. 
 
 KEALIA : A station of the American 
 Board on Hawaii, Sandwich Islands. 
 
 KEISKAMMA: A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society in Kafireland, South 
 Africa. 
 
 KEMEES : A tribe inhabiting the moun- 
 tains of Burmah, in many of their- habits re- 
 sembling the Karens. 
 
 KEMMENDINE : A Karen village near 
 Eangoon ; a station of the American Baptist 
 Mission at Eangoon. 
 
 KENT : Town of liberated Africans, in the 
 parish of St. Edward, at Cape Shilling, Sier- 
 ra Leone, West Africa, about 40 miles south 
 of Freetown — station of the Church Mission- 
 ary Society. 
 
 KEEIKEEI: A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New Zealand. 
 
 KHAMIESBEEG : A station of the Wes- 
 leyan Missionary Society in Little Namaquar 
 land. South Africa. 
 
 KHAMTIS : One of the races occupying 
 the country of Assam, to whom the missiona- 
 ries of the American Baptist Missionary Union 
 have preached. 
 
 KHAN : In Asia, a governor, a prince, a 
 king. Also, an inn. 
 
 _ KHAEI : A station of the Baptist Mis- 
 sionary Society in Bengal. 
 
 KHAEPUT : Prospectively a station of 
 the American Board among the Armenians. 
 It is in Northern Mesopotamia, on an extend- 
 ed, well-cultivated, and beautiful plain, having 
 a delightful climate ; 366 villages on the plain, 
 with an Armenian population, including that 
 of the city, of at least 100,000 souls. 
 
408 
 
 KHUNDITA— LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 KlirXDlTA: A station of the General 
 Bapti-its in Orisso. about 200 miles south 
 t Talcutto. It is surroundetl by populous 
 \ , . i\s and not fur from the large town of 
 
 J lX^:^•i'\H)n}. 
 
 KING WILLIAM'S TOWN: A station 
 of the London Missionary Society, on the Buf- 
 falo river, South Africa. 
 
 KING WILL'S TOAVN : A station of the 
 American l*rcsbyterian Board in West Africa. 
 KINGSTON : The capital of the Island of 
 St. Vincent, AV. I., and a station of the Wcs- 
 leyan Missionary Society. Pop. 8,000. It is 
 fiituatetl on the south-west side of the island, 
 and stretches along the searshore, the moun- 
 tains p^radually rising behind in the form of an 
 amphitheatre, to a considerable height. 
 KIOSK : In Turkey, a summer-house. 
 KIRKWOOD : Station of the United 
 Scotch Presbyterian Church in Tambookie- 
 land, South Africa, on the river Ixhonse. 
 
 KISSOR: One of the Banda Islands, a 
 group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 KISSEY : Town of liberated Africans, and 
 station of the Church Missionary Society, in 
 the River District, Sierra Leone, West Africa, 
 about three miles east of Freetown, on the 
 Sierra river. 
 
 KLAAS YOOK'S RIVT^R : A station of 
 the Ix)ndon Missiouarjr Society in Little Na- 
 maqualand. South Africa. 
 
 KNAPP'S HOPE: A station of the 
 London Missionary Society, among the Kaf- 
 fres in South Africa. 
 
 KOHALA : A station of the American 
 Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the north- 
 east coast of Hawaii. 
 
 KOKFONTEIN: A station of the Rhen- 
 ish Missionary Society in Little Namaqua. 
 South Africa. 
 
 KOLOA: A station of the Americafi 
 Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the island 
 of Kaui. 
 
 KOLOBENG : The most inland station 
 of the London Missionary Society, in South 
 Africa, situated on the southern borders of the 
 Kalahari desert, 200 miles N. B. by N. from 
 Kuruman. 
 
 KOMMAGGAS : A station of the Rhen- 
 ish Missionary Society in South Africa, in the 
 north-west corner of Cape Colony. 
 
 KOTGIIUR : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society, the capital of a chiefship 
 of the same name, in Himmalaya, India, be- 
 tween the Sutlej and Jumna, on a declivity of 
 the Whartoo Mountain, near the left bank of 
 the Sutlej, at an elevation of 6,634 feet above 
 the level of the sea, on the high road to 
 Thibet. The language of the inhabitants 
 is the same as that of the hilly parts of the 
 Sutlej. 
 
 KRAAL : A small village in Africa, con- 
 :sisting of a few native huts. 
 
 KRISHNAGUR: A station of the 
 
 Church Missionary Society, a little to tho 
 north-west of Calcutta. 
 
 KRISllNAPORE : A station of the 
 Chin-ch Missionary Society in Ilindostan. 
 
 KRUSFONTEIN : An out-station of the 
 London Missionary Society in South Africa, 
 situated on a dry and barren piece of land, 
 near the Gamtoos river. 
 
 KULANGSU, or KOOLANGSOO : A 
 small island near the city of Amoy, China, oc- 
 cupied as a station by the Presbyterian Board. 
 
 KUMASI, KOOMASSIE, or COOMAS- 
 SIE : The capital of Ashantee. Population, 
 15,000. A station of the Wesley an Mission- 
 ary Society, •- 
 
 KUMISS : An intoxicating liquor distilled 
 from mare's milk, in use among the Tartars. 
 
 KURUMAN : A station of the Loudon 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, 630 miles 
 north-east of Cape Town, among the Bcchu- 
 anas. 
 
 KYOUK PHYOO : A town in Arracan, 
 on Ramree Island, where the mission of the 
 American Baptist Missionary Union in Arra- 
 can was first planted. 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND : 
 These two countries are grouped together in 
 one article on account of the connection of the 
 missions, particularly those of the United 
 Brethren, which may be considered as in fact 
 but one mission. 
 
 Greenland. — Greenland is the remotest 
 tract of land in the north, lying between 
 Europe and America, and is divided into East 
 and West Greenland. The eastern coast is 
 almost inaccessible, but on the western coast 
 the Danes have erected several factories, for 
 the purpose of carrying on the whale fishery. 
 The want of large timber is in some measure 
 compensated by the drift-wood, which floats in 
 great quantities into the bays and islands, and 
 serves the Europeans for fuel, and the natives 
 for building their houses, tents, and boats. 
 The population of Greenland is estimated at 
 6,000 ; 150 or 200 of whom are Europeans. 
 They are a remarkably docile and harmless 
 people, and the missionaries have not had to 
 encounter among them any fixed forms of 
 superstition or idolatry. 
 
 The climate in this country is intensely cold, 
 sometimes so severe that beer, and even brandy, 
 freeze in a room heated by a stove, and yet it is 
 a remarkable fact, that the bays and the water 
 between the islands are seldom frozen for any 
 length of time, and sometimes they remain 
 open during the whole winter. This is of 
 great advantage to the Greenlanders, as their 
 principal subsistence is derived from fishing. 
 
 The summer seldom lasts above four months, 
 and even then it frequently snows, and the 
 frost never leaves the ground entirely, as the 
 rays of the sun seldom penetrate above a foot 
 below the surface. Yet the heat in summer is 
 said by the missionaries to be as great as in 
 any part of England or Germany, thouerh of 
 
^TftlVBHSITTJ 
 
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 499 
 
 shorter duration. There is scarce any night 
 in summer, as the sun does not remain more 
 than two or three hours below the horizon, 
 and from the tops of the mountains his beams 
 are reflected even at midnight, so that a person 
 seated in a room may read and write without 
 the aid of a candle. And, though the winter 
 nights are proportionably long, yet the dark- 
 ness is considerably lessened by the stronger 
 light of the moon, the prevalence of the aurora 
 borealis, and by reflections from the ice and 
 snow. 
 
 The natives are of a tawny hue and low 
 stature, with very dark or black eyes, and 
 strong, flowing hair. They are clad the whole 
 year round in fur dresses, made of the skins of 
 seals and reindeer, very neatly sewed by the 
 women. Their dwellings are of two kinds : 
 first, tents, which are covered with seal-skins, 
 and constitute their summer habitations ; sec- 
 ondly, winter houses, constructed of large 
 stones, the walls being a yard in thickness, 
 and the crevices filled up with earth and sods. 
 The roof is of wood, covered first with sods, 
 and the whole overspread with skins. The 
 inside breadth of such a house is generally 12 
 feet, but its length varies from 24 to 72 feet, 
 according to the number of inmates. Four, 
 or even ten, families live together in a house, 
 the apartments being separated from each 
 other by screens, made of skins. In every 
 apartment a lamp is kept constantly burning, 
 which lights and heats it, and serves also for 
 cooking. There is not a great regard for 
 cleanliness, and the smell of the train-oil is 
 offensive, but the contentment of the Green- 
 landers amid their poverty, and the order and 
 , stillness observed among those who dwell to- 
 gether, excite the admiration of Europeans. 
 
 Notwithstanding the rigors of the climate 
 and the sterility of the soil, the missionaries 
 have succeeded in laying out gardens, in which 
 they grow lettuce, cabbages, radishes, turnips, 
 and a few other vegetables. However, as they 
 cannot be sown before June, and killing frosts 
 commence again in September, they remain 
 small, but have a fine flavor. Oats and barley 
 spring up very fast, but never come to matu- 
 rity. The missionaries have introduced the 
 breeding of sheep and goats, though hay is 
 difficult to obtain, as it comes only from the 
 valleys. 
 
 Several kinds of animals and fish are ser- 
 viceable to Europeans and natives, both for 
 traffic and food, such as reindeer, hares, foxes, 
 white bears, different descriptions of , winged 
 game, and a great variety of fishes, especially 
 herrings, which, in the beginning of summer, 
 come into the bays in such shoals, that whole 
 boats can be filled with them in a few hours. 
 But the seal is the most important to the 
 Greenlanders, as it furnishes a principal article 
 of food, and also serves for clothing, bedding, 
 covering for boats, tents, and houses, oil for 
 their lamps, implements for fishing and hunt> 
 
 ing, and also serves as a medium of traffic, 
 
 instead of money. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 To Hans Egede, a Danish missionary, belongs 
 the honorable title of " Apostle of Ch-eenland" 
 and most cheerfully is this title conceded to 
 him by the Moravian brethren. It was in the 
 year 1721 that this excellent man exchanged 
 his comfortable parsonage at Vogen, in Nor- 
 way, for the bleak, desolate island of Kangek, 
 near the mouth of Baal's river, on the contig- 
 uous mainland, at Goodhab, on the western 
 coast, where he exerted himself with patient 
 and unwearied zeal, for the conversion of the 
 Greenlanders to the faith of Christ. Through 
 ten weary years, with very little apparent suc- 
 cess, he persevered in his labors ; but it ap- 
 peared as if the mission must be abandoned, 
 when a new era began to dawn upon benighted 
 Greenland. In 1831, two baptized Greenland- 
 ers, who had been taken to Denmark by some 
 colonists, gave much interesting information 
 relative to the state of the nation to which 
 they belonged, and the comparative failure of 
 the mission. This being reported to the con- 
 gregation at Herrnhut, a young brother, named 
 Matthew Stach, felt an impulse which he could 
 not resist, to offer himself as a missionary to 
 the Greenland race. His offer was accepted ; 
 and the brethren Christian Stach, cousin of 
 Matthew, and Christian David, the veteran 
 emigrant from Moravia, both common work- 
 ingmen, were commissioned to accompany 
 him. On the 19th of January, 1733, these 
 brethren set out on foot for Copenhagen, a dis- 
 tance of about 500 miles. 
 
 Nothing can more strikingly exhibit the 
 zeal of these devoted servants of Christ, and 
 their truly apostoHc spirit, than the manner in 
 which they entered upon their great work. 
 They literally obeyed the injunction, " Take 
 nothing for your journey." " There was no 
 need," says one of them, " of much time or ex- 
 pense in our equipment. The congregation 
 consisted chiefly of poor exiles, who had not 
 much to give, and we ourselves had nothing 
 but the clothes on our backs. We had been 
 used to make shift with little, and did not trou- 
 ble our heads how we should get to Greenland, 
 or how we should live there. The day before 
 our departure a friend in Venice sent a dona- 
 tion, and part of this we received for our jour- 
 ney to Copenhagen. Now we considered our- 
 selves richly provided for, and therefore would 
 take nothing of any one on the road, believing 
 that he who had procured us something for our 
 journey at the very critical moment, would 
 also supply us with everything requisite for 
 accomplishing our purpose, whenever it should 
 be needful." 
 
 On arriving at Copenhagen they were kind- 
 ly received by many friends ; but their design 
 appeared romantic and unreasonable, especially 
 as the Danish mission to Greenland was in a 
 
500 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 low Btntc, nnd the povcmnicnt was inclined to 
 vitlulnnv its colonists nltogether. In this state 
 of tliintrs a rt^idence on the const of Greenland 
 was nirartUtl as hij^hly dangerous, both on ac- 
 count of exposure to the cruelty of the natives? 
 and the liability of being left without anv reg- 
 ulor supply of provisions from Euroi)c. I'liese 
 mwrts however did not dispirit the mission- 
 aries, who on being asked by Count Pless, 
 •* How they intended to maintain themselves 
 in (jrcenland," answered, " By the labor of our 
 bonds, and God's blessing," adding, " that they 
 would build a house and cultivate a piece of 
 laud, and not be burdensome to any." On 
 being told by the Count that there was no 
 timber fit for building in that country, they 
 paid, •' If this is the case we will dig a hole in 
 the earth and live there." Astonished at their 
 ardor in the cause in which they had embarked, 
 the Count replied, " No ; you shall not be driv- 
 en to that extremity ; take timber with you 
 and build a house ; accept of these fifty dollars 
 for that purpose." They then committed 
 their cause to Him who orders all things, and 
 on the 10th of April, 1733, they sailed from 
 Copenhagen, and on the 20th of the next month 
 they reached the place of their destination, 
 having had a safe and speedy passage. 
 
 They soon fixed upon a place, to which they 
 afterwards gave the name of New Herrnhut, 
 and here they kneeled down and invoked the 
 blessing of God on themselves and their under- 
 taking. Their first labor was to erect a small 
 hut, as a shelter against the inclemency of the 
 climate. A few days after they laid the foun- 
 dations of their proper dwelling, for which they 
 had brought the timber with them from Copen- 
 hagen. The season was remarkably in their 
 favor, the ice and snow having melted a month 
 Booner than usual. Besides their own house 
 they built one after the Greenland manner, for 
 the accommodation of such of the natives as 
 might be induced to come to them for instruc- 
 tion. During the first year of their residence 
 in Gr^nlaud the small-pox prevailed to a fright- 
 ful extent, during which the brethren exerted 
 til' I'l.^elycs much for the relief of the sick and 
 il; -T. till at length they were violently attack- 
 ci ti.cmselves, and nearly lost the use of their 
 limbs. Having thus passed their first year, 
 they were strengthened ana encourajrefl m 1734. 
 by the arrival of two brethren, ^ Beck and 
 Bocnish, who came in the character of assist- 
 ants. 
 
 They now resolved to pursue their work with 
 redoubled ardor, and applied themselves to the 
 study of the language with unremitting dili- 
 gence. Unused though they were to grammars 
 of any kind, they soon conquered the greatest 
 difficulties, so as to be able to hold a short 
 conversation with the natives. They also ob- 
 tained some copies of pieces which Mr. Egede, 
 the Danish missionary, had translated, such as 
 the Ten Commandments, the Apostles' Creed, 
 and the Lord's Prayer, and embraced every 
 
 opportunity of reading these to the Greenland 
 ers, with instructions suited to make an im- 
 pression on their hearts. By these means they 
 conciliated the esteem of the natives, who often 
 visited them, though not without asking for 
 lome article that struck their fancy, showing 
 that they were actuated by selfish motives. 
 
 In 1735 some ships arrived from Europe, but 
 without bringing them supplies of any descrip- 
 tion. They were therefore reduced to great 
 distress, as their whole stock of provisions con- 
 sisted of a barrel and a half of oatmeal. They 
 had been less successful than usual in hunting 
 and fishing, and on attempting to buy seals of 
 the natives, the most exorbitant prices were 
 asked, and in some cases they refused to sell at 
 all. But in the spring of 1736 an unexpected 
 supply of provisions was sent to them from 
 Holland, and by a person from whom no aid 
 had ever been solicited. The same individual 
 promised them other supplies for the ensuing 
 season. 
 
 In July, 1736, some Danish ships arrived, 
 bringing with them the mother of Matthew 
 Stach, a widow about forty-five years of age, 
 with her two daughters, Rosina and Anna, the 
 former twenty-two, and the latter twelve years 
 of age. Their domestic affairs were now con- 
 fided to female hands; and the two younger 
 being desirous of acting as missionaries among 
 their own sex, applied themselves sedulously 
 and successfully to the study of the Greenland 
 language. 
 
 Their temporal circumstances were now more 
 comfortable, but they were severely tried with 
 the character and conduct of the savages, who 
 seldonj visited them except in quest of victuals, 
 and who were strongly averse to religious con- 
 versation. If a missionary remained with them 
 more than one night, they employed every 
 means to draw him into their dissolute prac- 
 tices, and, failing in this, they endeavored to 
 provoke him by mimicking his reading, pray- 
 ing, and singing, or by interrupting these exer- 
 cises with frightful howling and the deafening 
 noise of drums. On some occasions they even 
 pelted the brethren with stones, destroyed their 
 goods, strove to drive their boat out to sea, 
 and even threatened to assassinate them in 
 their tent. In the midst of all these dangers, 
 however, they were mercifully preserved. 
 
 Thus five years passed away, and the breth- 
 ren witnessed no abiding fruits of their self- 
 denying labor. They had tilled a soil appar- 
 ently unfit for culture, and in tears had sown 
 the seed on hearts apparently as barren as the 
 coast where they had pitched their tents. But 
 now the Lord was about to bless their work in 
 a new and peculiar manner. 
 
 " In June, 1738," write the missionaries," many 
 Southlanders, or people from the south of Green- 
 land, visited us. Brother Beck was at this time 
 translating a part of St. Matthew's Gospel. The 
 heathen being very curious to know the con- 
 tents of the book, he read a few sentences, and 
 
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 601 
 
 after some conversation with them, asked 
 whether they had an immortal soul, and where 
 that soul would go after death. Some said, 
 " Up yonder." Others said, " Down to the 
 abyss." Having rectified their notions on this 
 point, he inquired, "Who made heaven and 
 earth, man, and all other things ? " They re- 
 plied that they did not know, nor had they 
 ever heard, but that it must certainly be some 
 great and mighty being. He then gave them 
 an account of the creation of the world, the 
 fall of man, and his recovery by Christ. In 
 speaking of the redemption of man, the Spirit 
 of God enabled him to enlarge with more than 
 usual eviergy, on the sufferings and death of 
 tlfc Kedeemer, and in the most pathetic manner 
 to exhort his hearers to consider the vast ex- 
 pense at which Jesus had ransomed their souls, 
 and no longer reject the mercy offered them in 
 the Gospel. He then read to them out of the 
 New Testament the history of our Saviour's 
 agony in the garden. 
 
 Upon tills the Lord opened the heart of one 
 of the company, whose name was Kayarnak, 
 who, stepping up to the table in an earnest 
 manner, exclaimed : " How was that ? tell me 
 that once more, for I do desire to be saved." 
 These words, the like of which had never be- 
 fore been uttered by a Greenlander, so pene- 
 trated the soul of Mr. Beck, that with great 
 emotion and enlargement of heart, he gave 
 them a general account of the life and death 
 of our Saviour, and of the scheme of salvation 
 through him. 
 
 In the mean time the other missionaries who 
 had been abroad on business, returned, and 
 with delight joined their fellow-laborers in tes- 
 tifying of the grace of God in the blood of 
 Jesus Christ. Some of the pagans laid their 
 hands on their mouths, which is their usual cus- 
 tom when struck with astonishment. Others, 
 who did not relish the subject, slunk away 
 secretly, but several requested to be taught to 
 pray, and frequently repeated the expressions 
 used by the missionaries, in order to fix them 
 in their memories. In short, they manifested 
 such an earnest and serious concern for their 
 salvation, as the missionaries* had never wit- 
 nessed before, and at going away they promis- 
 ed soon to return, and hear more of this sub- 
 ject. They also promised to tell it to their 
 countrymen. 
 
 The impression made on Kayarnak was 
 not transient, for the word had taken deep 
 root in his heart. He frequently visited the 
 missionaries, and at length took up his resi- 
 dence with them. He told them that he often 
 felt a monition in his heart to pray, and when 
 they spoke to him he was often so much affect- 
 ed, that the tears rolled down his cheeks. 
 Considering the general stupidity of the 
 Greenlanders, the missionaries were not a lit- 
 tle surprised at the quickness with which he 
 comprehended every thing Avhich they told 
 him, and at the retention of his memory. He 
 
 manifested very strong attachment to them, 
 and a constant desire for further instruction. 
 
 By means of his conversion, those who lived 
 in the same tent with him were brought under 
 conviction. Thus before the end of the mouth 
 three large families came with all their pro- 
 perty, and pitched their tents near the dwell- 
 ing of the missionaries, *' in order," as they 
 said, " to hear the joyful news of man's re- 
 demption." They all appeared much affected, 
 and even some who had formerly opposed the 
 word, declared that they would now believe, 
 and winter with the missionaries. Most of 
 them, however, soon went away to hunt rein- 
 deer, but Kayarnak refused to accompany them, 
 lest thereby harm should come to his soul. If 
 enticed to go away, he would reply by some 
 short remark, such as " I will stay with my 
 teachers and hear the word of God, which I 
 have once found sweet to my taste." If they 
 railed at him he held his peace, after he had 
 borne his testimony to the truth in a few 
 serious words. At length he prevailed so far 
 on some of his nearest relatives, that tliey re- 
 solved to return, and even some other families 
 desired leave to settle near the missionaries. 
 
 Thus, in October, 1738, when the Green- 
 landers left their tents to move into their win- 
 ter houses, above twenty persons took up their 
 abode near the brethren. This induced them 
 to commence morning and evening devotions, 
 with the two families of Kayarnak, and his 
 relation Simek, besides the reading and ex- 
 pounding of the Scriptures on the Lord's day. 
 Five of these persons, who appeared most 
 serious, they selected, as suitable candidates 
 for baptism, and gave them more frequent in- 
 struction in the truths of salvation. 
 
 The year 1739 was distinguished in the mis- 
 sion, by the baptism of the first Greenland 
 converts. This interesting and solemn service 
 was performed on Sunday, March 29th. The 
 candidates having, before the whole assembly, 
 given a full account of the ground of their 
 hope, and promised to renounce all heathen 
 customs and superstitions, to remain with their 
 teachers, and walk worthily of the Gospel ; 
 were in fervent prayer, and with imposition of 
 hands, commended to the grace of God, and 
 baptized in the name of the Father and of the 
 Son and of the Holy Ghost. The presence of 
 the Great Head of the Church was felt in the 
 most powerful manner during this transac- 
 tion ; the tears flowed in streams from the eyes 
 of those just baptized, and the spectators were 
 so overcome, that they earnestly desired to be 
 made partakers of the same grace. The first 
 fruits of the Greenland nation, who by this 
 rite were publicly ingrafted into the Christian 
 church, were Kayarnak, his wife, his son and 
 his daughter. 
 
 Scarcely a month had elapsed before the 
 joy occasioned by this event was succeeded by 
 a dark cloud. The brother-in-law of Kayar- 
 nak, who also resided with the missionaries, 
 
502 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 WM mardeml by a northern banditti ; and as 
 Kayarnak and his gurviving brother-in-law 
 wero threatened with the same fate, the for- 
 mer resolved to retire with his family to the 
 aooth. The miasionaries were sorely tried 
 with the loss of these first converts, besides 
 Iiaving to bear the renroach, that though tlicy 
 might baptize Greenland paprans, they could 
 never imbue them with Christianity, nor 
 woan them from their roving habits. But 
 tliey trusted that these events might be over- 
 ruled by the great Head of the Church, for 
 the furtherance of the Gospel ; and so it 
 proved ; for but a short time had elapsed, 
 when 21 boats filled with Southlanders arrived 
 at the mission station, with the intelligence 
 that they had met with K^arnak and his 
 family, who had told them many wonderful 
 things of a religious nature, and had directed 
 them to apply to the brethren for more ample 
 and satisfactory instructions. Soon after this 
 event 9 families of the Greenlanders returned 
 to the vicinity of the missionary settlement. 
 
 The missionaries thus found occasion for 
 great thankfulness and encouragement ; but 
 amid all their rejoicings they sighed with un- 
 utterable grief over the absence of Kayarnak, 
 and could not venture to cherish the smallest 
 hope of his return. One day, however, while 
 they were attending the nuptial dinner of 
 Frederic Boenish and Anna Stach, he sudden- 
 ly entered their dwelling, after about a year's 
 absence, and on this occasion they had the sat- 
 isfaction to discover that not only had he re- 
 mained steadfast, but that he had brought with 
 him his brother and his family, to whom he 
 had communicated the glad news of salvation. 
 About the same time several other Greenland- 
 ers took up their abode at New Herrnhut, 
 and gave unquestionable proofs that they were 
 the subjects of serious and deep convictions ; 
 and in spite of the persecution of their coun- 
 trymen, they continued steadfast, and rendered 
 many important services to the missionaries. 
 
 Early in 1741, Kayarnak was attacked with 
 a pleurisy, which soon put an end to his earth- 
 ly labors. During his illness he exhibited the 
 utmost patience, and appeared alike regardless 
 of worldly concerns and of bodily sufferings. 
 Observing his relatives bathed in tears, he 
 affectionately said, " Why do you weep on my 
 account ? Are you not aware that when be- 
 lievers die thev go to Jesus, and become par- 
 takers of everlasting joy ? As I was the first 
 of our nation who was converted by his grace, 
 he has determined that I should be the first to 
 enter into his presence. He knows how to 
 provide for you in my absence, and if you 
 remain faithful to the end, we shall surely 
 meet again, and rejoice for ever before the 
 throne of God and the Lamb." These words 
 completely tranquilized the minds of his wife 
 and brother, who evinced the most pious re- 
 signation to the bereavement which they were 
 called to endure, and solicited the missionaries 
 
 to bury him according to the rites of tn^ 
 Christian religion, which request was complied 
 with, and he was buried amid the most solemn 
 and impressive services. 
 
 From this time the missionaries found the 
 field of their labors gradually extending. 
 Wherever the new converts went in quest of 
 food, they proclaimed the riches of the grace 
 of Christ, and numbers were led to the Mora- 
 vian settlement, anxious to understand those 
 things more fully. One of the baptized Green- 
 landere informed the missionaries that he had 
 found his countrymen, many leagues to the 
 north, so anxious to be instructed in the things 
 of religion, that they urged him to spend a 
 whole night with them in conversation. Evtn 
 one of their angekoks, or necromancers, was 
 brought under such serious impressions, that he 
 wept almost incessantly during two days, and 
 asserted that he had dreamed he was in hell, 
 where he witnessed scenes which it would be 
 utterly impossible to describe. When this 
 general awakening began to subside, the ne- 
 cromancers circulated the most absurd and 
 ridiculous stories about the effects of the Chris- 
 tian religion ; but God frustrated these attacks 
 of the enemy, and the company of believers 
 increased ; so that at the close of 1748 no less 
 than 230 Greenlanders resided at New Herrn- 
 hut, of whom 35 had been baptized in the 
 course of that year. 
 
 In 1747, the brethren erected tbeir first 
 church, the frame and boards of which had 
 been sent them by friends in Europe, and in 
 this house they frequently had the pleasure of 
 addressing congregations of more than 300 
 persons. At the same time some commodious 
 storehouses were built, both for the brethren 
 and their converts ; and such excellent regula- 
 tions were adopted in the settlement, that the 
 believing Greenlanders not only subsisted com- 
 fortably, but were enabled to extend aid to 
 others in times of scarcity. 
 
 The winter of 1752, and also the winter fol- 
 lowing, were rendered extremely trying by the 
 dreadful intensity of the cold, which made it 
 nearly impossible to obtain food, and threat- 
 ened a general famine ; and to this was added 
 a contagious distemper, introduced by some 
 Dutch vessels. It carried off great numbers 
 of the inhabitants, and no less than 35 of the 
 converts fell victims to this terrible malady. 
 But these trials furnished to the missionaries 
 the most pleasing evidence of the sincerity of 
 the baptized Greenlanders, who sought in 
 every way to relieve the distressed, even when 
 suffering themselves, and who were enabled to 
 meet death with great peace and composure, 
 " knowing in whom they had believed." 
 
 In 1758, the congregation at New Herrn- 
 hut having become numerous, the missionaries 
 felt anxious to establish a new settlement, 
 more contiguous to the Southlanders, many of 
 whom had repeatedly solicited them to come 
 and reside in their part of the country. On 
 
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 503 
 
 hearing of this, Matthew Stach, one of the 
 first founders of the Greenhxud mission, but 
 who was now in Europe, resolved on resuming- 
 his labors in the proposed new field. Accord- 
 ingly, in May, 1758, he set sail, with two as- 
 sistant brethren, and arrived at New Hernn- 
 hut in safety. After resting a few weeks, 
 these three brethren, with four Greenland fam- 
 ilies, proceeded in search of a situation for a 
 new settlement ; and after carefully exploring 
 that part of the country to which their atten- 
 tion had been directed, they fixed upon an 
 island about three miles from the main ocean, 
 and at an equal distance from the Danish fac- 
 tory at Fisher's Bay. This spot did not afford 
 Buch a prospect of the sea as they could desire, 
 but it possessed three advantages of great im- 
 portance, viz., fresh water, which is never 
 entirely frozen over, a secure harbor for their 
 boats, and a strand which remains open the 
 whole year. Here, therefore, they pitched 
 their tents, and called the place Lichtenfels. 
 
 Owing to the scarcity of building materials, 
 they were likely to suffer, if not to perish, for 
 want of shelter, when, by a most remarkable 
 providence, beams suitable for their purpose 
 were drifted on to the shore. 
 
 In 1760, the brethren at Lichtenfels bap- 
 tized the first heathen family at that place, 
 consisting of a man and his wife, with their son 
 and daughter ; and the congregation was now 
 rapidly increasing. The next year they ob- 
 tained a supply of building materials from 
 Europe, and erected a commodious mission 
 house and a spacious church, in which their 
 numerous hearers could be accommodated. 
 At New Herrnhut, in the mean time, the cause 
 of Christ prospered, and between 30 and 40 
 persons were annually admitted to the church 
 by baptism. 
 
 So remarkably had the lives and health of 
 the Moravian brethren been preserved, that 
 the original founders of the mission still 
 labored with undiminished energy and zeal, 
 having been almost 30 years in the field. But 
 in 1763, tlie mission sustained a severe loss in 
 the death of Frederick Boenish, who died at 
 the age of 54, after 29 years of toil on the 
 dreary coast of Greenland. In the winter of 
 1768, an aged angekok (sorcerer,) who had 
 often heard the Gospel, became alarmed about 
 his future state, renounced his mode of life, 
 confessed that he and the other angekoks had 
 deceived the people, and not only exhorted 
 them to repent and turn to God, but sent mes- 
 sengers to the brethren at New Herrnhut with 
 an earnest solicitation that a missionary might 
 be sent to instruct them in the truths of the 
 Gospel. The request was complied with ; and 
 so extensive was the awakening that took place 
 among the natives, that in little more than 
 twelve months two hundred were admitted into 
 the church by baptism, at the two settlements 
 of New Herrnhut and Lichtenfels. 
 
 In 1773, Christopher Michael Koenigseer 
 
 arrived in Greenland as superintendent of the 
 mission in that country. Having received the 
 advantages of a liberal education, he was well 
 qualified to correct the translations of his pre- 
 decessors ; and he added to their little stock a 
 Greenland hymn-book, a catechism, and some 
 other pieces of a devotional nature. 
 
 In 1774, two of the brethren sailed from 
 Lichtenfels, in order to form a third settlement 
 in the south of Greenland. After a voyage of 
 about six weeks, they arrived at the island of 
 Onartok, where they were surprised to find, at 
 the mouth of a warm spring, a verdant mea- 
 dow, abounding with different kinds of flow- 
 ers. But it was not a good place for obtain- 
 ing provisions, and they fixed upon a spot a 
 little distant, four miles from Lichtenfels, to 
 which they gave the name of Lichtenau. Here 
 they found an extensive field for their exer- 
 tions, and their labors were crowned with the > 
 most pleasing success. Even at first consider- 
 able numbers of the heathen flocked to hear 
 them preach, so that they were frequently 
 obliged to worship in the open air, previous to 
 the erection of a church ; and during the win- 
 ter of 1775 nearly 200 persons took up their 
 abode with them. Many of these were bap- 
 tized at the end of a few months, and in a few 
 years the believing Greeulanders at Lichtenau 
 exceeded in numljer those at either of the 
 other settlements. 
 
 In 1782 Greenland was visited by a pesti- 
 lence more fatal than that before noticed, and 
 within a few months the deaths at New Herrn- 
 hut amounted to 180. The disease broke 
 out later at Lichtenfels and Lichtenau, but it 
 was equally fatal. Among the heathen Green- 
 landers the mortality was still more frightful ; 
 so that the country lost by this visitation 
 nearly half its inhabitants. 
 
 About the same time the directors of the 
 Greenland Trading Company issued a man- 
 date, enjoining that fewer Greenlanders should 
 reside together in settlements. This led to a 
 partial dispersion of the converts, compelling 
 them to fix their abodes ten or twelve miles 
 from the missionaries, by which means they were 
 deprived of regular instructions. But it was 
 soon resolved that a native assistant should 
 accompany each party, and by this means, and 
 frequent visits from the missionaries, their 
 spiritual wants were in a measure provided 
 for. 
 
 In 1801, so great had been the success of 
 the missionaries, the people on the western, 
 coast of Greenland had nearly all embraced" 
 Christianity, and of the women, the last one- 
 that remained in heathenism was baptized irt 
 January of this year. During many years fol- 
 lowing the above date the general course of 
 things at the settlements was prosperous, al^ 
 though great trials were at times endured,, 
 both from sickness and the want of necessary 
 food. Particularly in 1807, the war between. 
 Great Britain and Denmark interrupted com-^ 
 
&04 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 manication, and sappllcs from Europe were 
 entirely cut off. Tho utmost distress followed, 
 and many died of hunger. It was not until 
 1811 thttt tlic British government permitted 
 tbo Dalies to send vessels with provisions to 
 Greenland. 
 
 In a letter, written July 1818, the excellent 
 Mr. Beck, of Lichtenau. says, " Of the great- 
 est port of our congregation, we may say with 
 confidence, that their words and walk give us 
 great joy and encouragement. Many of the 
 excludetl persons have been led, with weeping 
 and supplication; to confess the error of their 
 ways, and to return to the fold ; and those 
 who remain faithful have been presciTcd in 
 the conviction, that real happiness and rest 
 are only to be found in Jesus." In the same 
 year Mr. Beck wrote another letter, in which 
 were stated the following interesting particu- 
 lars : " The Southlanders, or those Green- 
 landers who reside south of Cape Farewell, 
 though not quite wild, are ignorant of the 
 things of God, and in reality a heathen race. 
 There is another description of heathen who 
 live on this side of Cape Farewell, and fre- 
 qncntly join our people at the out-stations. 
 These have acquired some knowledge of the 
 truth, and have abandoned their gross heathen- 
 ish practices." 
 
 The year 1823 was rendered remarkable, by 
 the printing and circulation of the first com- 
 plete Xew Testament in the Greenland lan- 
 guage. The translation was completed in 
 1821, and sent to England, to be printed by 
 the British and Foreign Bible Society. The 
 manuscript w^as accompanied with a note, 
 saying, " The Society will judge for themselves 
 of the number of copies which will be wanted, 
 when they are informed that the three congre- 
 gations under the care of the brethren in Green- 
 land consist of 1278 persons, viz., 359 at New 
 Herrnhut, 331 at Lichtenfels, and 588 at Lich- 
 tenau." 
 
 In 1824, a new Moravian settlement was 
 formed at the most southern extremity of 
 Greenland, at a place called by the mission- 
 aries Fredericksthal. Building materials soon 
 arrived, and a house and chapel were put up, 
 and the people seemed anxious for religious in- 
 struction ; and within a year twelve persons 
 were admitted as candidates for baptism. A 
 missionary at this place writes, under date 
 Oct. 1825, " Fifty persons have returned hither 
 from Lichtenau, and have been joined by about 
 200 heathen from this neighborhood ; so that 
 there are not far from 250 Greenlanders living 
 here. This is, indeed, a most encouraging be- 
 ginning, and our little chapel is already much 
 too small. On the 19th of Dec. last, forty can- 
 didates were baptized, and during the winter 
 many more were admitted to the same privi- 
 lege. Since our arrival here in June 1824, 
 104 heathens have been baptized." 
 
 Having reached the period when the four 
 Moravian settlements in Greenland were in 
 
 successful operation, their subsequent history 
 must be noticed more briefly. The charac- 
 teristic zeal and earnest piety of these brethren 
 have never been known to abate, and from 
 year to year they have met with a degree of 
 encouragement most cheering to their own 
 hearts, and blessed in its results to the people 
 for whose spiritual good they have toiled 
 through more than 120 years. 
 
 One of the severest trials which these mis- 
 sionaries have had to endure, has been the 
 repeated and long continued interference of 
 the Danish government, forbidding the con- 
 verted Greenlanders to dwell in communities 
 near the Mora^n settlements. It has been 
 impossible in these circumstances to watch 
 over and instruct them in a proper manner, 
 for since the converts have increased and 
 spread over a wider surface, the missionaries 
 and their assistants have not been numerous 
 enough to follow them into the various and 
 often distant places, where they have been 
 compelled to reside. Still, it is a remarkable 
 and most gratifying fact, that the converts 
 have generally been steadfast, and that apos- 
 tacies have been of comparatively rare occur- 
 rence. 
 
 The injurious and dishonorable conduct of 
 the government, to which they are prompted 
 by commercial cupidity and national jealousy, 
 has led the Moravian brethren to consider the 
 importance of raising up native teachers, who, 
 on giving evidence of piety, might act as assist- 
 ant missionaries in the districts to which the 
 converted natives are. driven. 
 
 Accordingly in 1851 a school was established 
 at New Herrnhut, for training native assist- 
 ants, and strong hopes are entertained that 
 this will in a measure repair the evils which an 
 unrighteous course of legislation has produced. 
 In their journal for 1852, the missionaries em- 
 ploy the following language of hope and 
 cheerfulness : — 
 
 "However we may deplore the circum- 
 stances referred to, (the dispersion) we will 
 not lose courage nor quit our post, but wc will 
 trust in the help of the Lord. Nor will we be 
 too much disheartened by the order lately re- 
 ceived from the Board of Trade, in Denmark, 
 to baptize and receive no more heathen, but 
 to direct them to the Danish mission. This 
 proposition, however indicative of an unfriend- 
 ly spirit, has reference chiefly to Fredericks- 
 thai, the most southern of our stations, since 
 heathen (probably descendants of the ancient 
 Normans) are found in any considerable num- 
 ber, only on the east coast, a coast almost in- 
 accessible to us on account of the ice. From 
 that quarter the congregation at Fredericks- 
 thai has hitherto had a considerable increase, 
 while such as came only on a visit, and could 
 not remain, took with them what they had 
 heard, and assisted in spreading the Gospel." 
 In July, 1852, on the occasion of administer- 
 ing the sacrament of the Lord's Supper at 
 
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 505 
 
 Liclitenau, bo many of the out-dwellers came 
 together for the enjoyment of this sacred sea- 
 son, that the number of communicants amount- 
 ed to 237. 
 
 The present state of the mission, at the four 
 Moravian settlements in Greenland, will ap- 
 pear from the following 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 SE-ITLEMENTS. 
 
 +5 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 "Ha 
 
 
 1733 
 1758 ' 
 1774 
 1824 
 
 3 
 3 
 3 
 3 
 
 202 
 161 
 268 
 211 
 
 423 
 
 Liclitenfels 
 
 382 
 
 
 703 
 
 Fredericsthal 
 
 493 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 842 
 
 2001 
 
 
 
 Labrador. — On the 17th of May, 1752, 
 four Moravian brethren sailed from Lon- 
 don for Labrador, and on their arrival in a 
 fine bay, the same year, they fixed upon a spot 
 which they intended should be the place of 
 their future settlement. But after the lapse of 
 a few weeks the vessel proceeded farther to the 
 northward, with the design of opening a com- 
 mercial intercourse with the natives of the 
 coast ; and as the Esquimaux were fearful of 
 venturing on board on account of the guns, a 
 company of five mariners went among them in 
 an unarmed boat, accompanied by Christian 
 Erhardt, a member of the Moravian church, 
 who, in his voyages to Greenland had obtained 
 some knowledge of the language, and sup- 
 posed he could mak-e himself understood on the 
 present occasion. But neither Erhardt nor 
 his companions ever returned ; and as the 
 captain had no means of sending in search of 
 them, he made his way back to the mission- 
 aries, whom he had left behind, and requested 
 their assistance in working the ship back to 
 Europe. As the best of his men had been 
 lost, and there was no other method of accom- 
 plishing the voyage, they acceded to his re- 
 quest, and thus the mission was for a time 
 abandoned. 
 
 In the spring of 1764, Jens Haven, who had 
 previously labored as a missionary in Green- 
 land, sailed from England, with the hope of 
 conveying the blessings of the Gospel to the 
 inhabitants of Labrador. lie did not how- 
 ever proceed farther than Newfoundland, 
 though he found there some Esquimaux chiefs, 
 whom he addressed in language which they 
 could perfectly understand. 
 
 In May, 1765, Jens Haven sailed again for 
 Labrador, taking w4th him C. L. Drachart, 
 formerly one of the Danish missionaries in 
 Greenland, and two other brethren. They 
 now penetrated farther into the interior of the 
 country, and on their return to the coast they 
 
 had an opportunity of addressing several hun- 
 dreds of the natives, who seemed to listen with 
 interest to the truths of the Gospel. As to 
 the doctrine of depravity, however, they 
 thought it might be true in respect to foreign- 
 ers, but not in respect to themselves. No per- 
 manent settlement was made at this time, al- 
 though land was purchased of the natives for 
 that purpose. 
 
 In 1769, George IIL presented 100,000 
 acres of land to the Moravian brethren, to aid 
 them in commencing a mission on the coast of 
 Labrador. A society was also formed in 
 England the same year, in furtherance of this 
 object. In May, 1770, the indefatigable Jens 
 Haven, taking with him nine brethren, sailed 
 again for Labrador, further to explore the 
 coast, and if possible fix on a place for a settle- 
 ment. They purchased a piece of land of the 
 natives for that purpose, and returned again to 
 England to make preparations for entering 
 upon their work. Accordingly in the spring 
 of 1771, a company of 14 persons, under the 
 direction of Mr. Haven, proceeded to Labra- 
 dor, and took possession of the spot formerly 
 purchased, and gave it the name of 
 
 Nain. — This place is on the east coast of 
 Labrador, in N. lat. 55°, and is so intensely 
 cold in winter, that rum placed in the open 
 air freezes like water, and rectified spirits in a 
 short time become as thick as oil. The breth- 
 ren at once commenced the erection of a 
 mission-house, the frame and materials for 
 which they had brought with them from Eng- 
 land, and by great exertions it was completed 
 before the setting in of winter. They could, 
 however, obtain but few of the necessaries of 
 life ; and as much delay was experienced in 
 getting supplies from England, they began to 
 look forward to all the distresses of a famine. 
 But in season to prevent this extremity, and 
 at a moment when they had only two pieces 
 of meat and a few berries left, a vessel arrived 
 from England, bringing j;he needed relief. 
 
 The conduct of the Es'quimaux towards the 
 missionaries was uniformly friendly, from their 
 first arrival. In former times, no European 
 could have passed a night among these sav- 
 ages without hazarding hisi life ; but now the 
 missionaries, regardless of the inclemency of 
 the season, traveled across the ice and snow to 
 visit them in their winter houses, and were 
 hospitably entertained for several days and 
 nights together. These visits were often re- 
 turned ; and in consequence of the friendly in- 
 tercourse thus opened, the natives not only 
 asked the advice of the brethren in all difficult 
 cases, but even chose them as umpires in their 
 disputes, and invariably submitted to their ar- 
 bitration. They were also in a mood to listen 
 with attention to the preaching of the Word, 
 and at times they seemed to be deeply im- 
 pressed ; still they were savages, habituated to 
 the gratification of the most brutal passions, and 
 always ready with some excuse for their sins. 
 
506 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 In 1752, a year aflcr the Bottlement of the 
 mittion, a native nanuHl Anauke, was induced 
 to attend ujwn the instructions of the mission- 
 aries, and althouffh he hatl been a ferocious and 
 desperate character, he was so much impressed 
 that ho came and pitched his tent near the 
 minion house. lie removed to his winter 
 hoosc after a few months, but his anxiety con- 
 tinued, and he visited the missionaries again, 
 and sjHjnt a few days with them, desiring fur- 
 ther instruction. From this time the brethren 
 heard nothing of him for more than a year, 
 when his wife came to Nain and stated that An- 
 auke had died, calling on the name of the Lord 
 Jesus. From the time that he was seized with 
 his last sickness he prayed fervently, and ex- 
 
 Sressly stated that he had no wish to live, but 
 esired to depart that he might be with Christ. 
 He would not permit one of the necromancers, 
 called Angekoks, to come near him, but com- 
 mitted himself unreservedly into the hands of 
 the great Physician. After his decease, this 
 person was invariably spoken of by the natives 
 as " the man whom the Saviour took to him- 
 self." As many of the heathen residing in the 
 vicinity of Nain appeared remarkably atten- 
 tive to the Gospel, and expressed the most 
 Erofound reverence for the name of Jesus, the 
 rethren resolved to select a few of the most 
 serious, and form them into a class of catechu- 
 mens, in order to prepare them for baptism, 
 and ultimately for helpers in the missionary 
 work. At the same time they resolved upon 
 the erection of a chapel, capable of containing 
 some hundreds of persons, as the apartment in 
 the mission house had become too small to 
 contain the congregation. 
 
 Okkak, — In the summer of 1775 two of the 
 missionaries, Messrs. Haven and Jensen, set 
 out with the design of commencing a new set- 
 tlement at a place called Okkak, about a hun- 
 dred and fifty miles north of Nain. They 
 found it to be an eligible spot for a mission, 
 being abundantljr fiynished with wood and 
 fresh water, contiguous to an excellent haven, 
 and surrounded by a numerous population of 
 heathen. They therefore purchased the land 
 of the natives, and in the spring of 1776 the 
 missionaries took up their residence here and 
 began to preach the glad tidings of salvation to 
 the natives. They met with little success at 
 first, but at the end of three years they had 
 baptized 38 of the natives, besides ten others, 
 who, as catechumens, were receiving particular 
 instruction. 
 
 Hop€(laie.—lnl'i82 the brethren proceeded to 
 form a third settlement, at a place called Hope- 
 dale, some distance to the south of Nain. This 
 was the place reconnoitered by Erhardt and 
 his companions in 1852, but who, instead of 
 accomplishing their wishes, were inhumanly 
 murdered by the Indians. For several years 
 the brethren at this place met with little en- 
 couragement, and were inclined to give over 
 the enterprise, when at length the word took 
 
 effect, and Hopedale became the scene of an 
 awakening which extended to the other settle- 
 ments, and constrained the missionaries to ex- 
 claim. " What hath God wrought ? " 
 
 In 1790 an epidemic broke out in Labrador, 
 and raged for several months with great sever- 
 ity, carrying off a great number of the natives. 
 It was a source of great trial to the brethren, 
 that some of the converts, even under this ca- 
 lamity, resorted to their old heathenish prac- 
 tices for the purpose of averting the disease. 
 Most of them, however, were soon convinced 
 of their folly and sin, and returned to the mis- 
 sionaries with the most humble confessions. 
 
 The month't)f December, 1800, was made 
 painfully memorable by the death of a devoted 
 brother at the Hopedale station, Rev. J. W. 
 Reiman. He went out one morning with the 
 design of procuring some fresh provisions, by 
 shooting, and was never afterwards seen or 
 heard of, although immediate and long-contin- 
 ued search was made for him. 
 
 At the commencement of 1804 the mission- 
 aries at the several stations in Labrador were 
 much disheartened on account of the little suc- 
 cess that attended their labors. It had long 
 been a subject of regret, that the instructions 
 given to the Esquimaux during the winter, 
 when they resided near the settlements, were 
 forgotten during the summer excursions, when 
 they associated with their heathen countrymen, 
 and relapsed into many of their old practices. 
 In the spring of this year, however, the breth- 
 ren were gratified to find that the converts had 
 been preserved from falling into sin and had 
 also made important advances in knowledge 
 and humility. They appeared unusually se- 
 rious, and a peculiar unction attended their 
 conversation and prayers, and many who had 
 before shown only an outward respect for reli- 
 gion were awakened, and led earnestly to in- 
 quire for the way of salvation. The religious 
 interest, or revival, thus commenced at Hope- 
 dale, soon began to manifest itself at Nain, 
 where it was specially promoted by the lemark- 
 able conversion of a young man named Siksi- 
 gak ; his wife had been converted, and he had 
 formed the purpose of putting her away and 
 marrying another who was friendly to his 
 superstitions. Arriving at the house of his 
 mother, who had also become a Christian, just 
 at the season of the evening devotion, he was 
 much struck with what he saw and heard, but 
 still nothing could dissuade him from abandon- 
 ing his wife. The next day a special prayer- 
 meeting was held for his conversion, during 
 which his mother besought the Lord in a spirit 
 of great earnestness, for the conversion and 
 salvation of her son. Almost immediately 
 upon this the young man became convinced of 
 the error of his ways, and was subdued under 
 the power of the Gospel. He exhibited an 
 entire change of spirit and conduct, and boldly 
 proclaimed to his companions at Nain the 
 preciousness of that word which had proved 
 
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 607 
 
 the power of God to his soul. Many others 
 were astonished at this change, and led to con- 
 fess their sins with penitential tears. The in- 
 telligence of these things reached Okkak, and 
 proved the means of a similar awakening there. 
 Even many of the Esquimaux who resided far 
 north of Okkak, but who occasionally passed 
 that way, were struck with astonishment at 
 what they saw and heard, and were led to come 
 and settle near the missionaries. This work 
 of grace continued several years, bringing in 
 many of the children, as well as the adult na- 
 tives. 
 
 Early in the summer of 1811 two of the mis- 
 sionaries undertook the perilous task of explor- 
 ing the northern coast, with a view to the 
 formation of a settlement in that quarter. 
 They embarked in a two masted shallop, owned 
 by one of the converts, named Jonathan, who, 
 though a chief of his nation at Hopedale, 
 readily engaged in the arduous service. He 
 w^as a man of superior understanding and great 
 courage, and when his countrymen represented 
 to him the danger of his undertaking, he re- 
 plied, "When I hear people talk about the 
 danger of being killed, I recollect that the love 
 of Jesus induced him to submit to death for 
 us ; and therefore it would be no great matter 
 if we were to lose our lives in his service, 
 should that be his pleasure concerning us." 
 They proceeded with great difficulty and peril, 
 through regions of ice, to the desert regions 
 west of Cape Chudleigh, where they discovered 
 two places suitable for a missionary settlement. 
 One of these was a verdant spot, overgrown 
 with shrubs, near the mouth of a river, to which 
 they gave the name of George's river, in honor 
 of his Britannic majesty ; and the other was sit- 
 uated in what they called Unity Bay, near the 
 estuary of the Koksoak, or Sand river, which 
 is nearly seven hundred miles distant from Ok- 
 kak. They found the land level and dry, wat- 
 ered by several rivulets, and producing a vari- 
 ety of trees, plants, and flowers. The natives 
 in this region had never before seen a Euro- 
 pean, and were at first rather reserved, but 
 after receiving a few trifling presents they be- 
 came familiar, and not only listened attentively 
 to what their visitors had to say, but expressed 
 a strong desire to have them settle there. After 
 exploring the surrounding country sufficiently, 
 the party started on their return, and reached 
 Okkak in October, having been absent about 
 five months, and performed a voyage of between 
 twelve and thirteen hundred miles. No settle- 
 ment, however, has yet been formed in that 
 region. 
 
 On the 9th of August, 1820, the missionaries 
 at Naiu had the satisfaction of seeing the new 
 ship, called the Harmony, come to anchor in 
 their bay, just fifty years after the first vessel 
 arrived there with fourteen brethren and sis- 
 ters on board. They expressed their joy by 
 hoisting two small flags, and a white one on 
 which some of the sisters had formed the num- 
 
 ber 50 with a red ribbon, and surrounded it 
 with a wreath of laurel. Their small cannons 
 were also discharged and answered by the guns 
 of the ship, and the Esquimaux fired their mus- 
 kets as long as their powder lasted. Some 
 tunes exj)ressive of thanksgiving were also 
 played on wind instruments, which, altogether, 
 made a suitable impression on the minds of the 
 converts, and gave them some idea of a jubilee 
 rejoicing. The missionaries explained to them 
 the whole thing, and after listening with pro- 
 found attention they exclaimed, " Yes ; Jesus 
 is worthy of thanks ! Jesus is worthy of thanks, 
 indeed ! " 
 
 In further noticing this joyful occasion, the 
 missionaries say, "In the public services of 
 the day, a spirit of joy and thanksgiving pre- 
 vailed throughout the whole congregation, and 
 the baptism of two adults tended greatly to 
 solemnize the festival. We praised the Lord 
 with heart and voice for all the wonders he 
 had wrought in behalf of the mission in Lab- 
 rador, during half a century ; in which he had 
 led, preserved, and blessed us abundantly. 
 His mighty arm had protected us in many 
 dangers, and the preaching of his cross had 
 been attended with power and with the demon- 
 stration of his own Spirit, so that many souls 
 had thereby been brought into his kingdom. 
 An account of the commencement of the mis- 
 sion, translated into the Esquimaux language, 
 was communicated to the congregation, and 
 heard with great attention and astonishment. 
 They were indeed surprised at the recital of 
 what had been done for so many years, with a 
 view to their benefit." 
 
 The jubilee of the mission was also cele- 
 brated in the other settlements with due solem- 
 nity, and many of the Esquimaux afterwards 
 testified that it had been a most important and 
 blessed season to their souls ; as they had been 
 led to consider more seriously than ever before, 
 what great things the Lord had done for them, 
 in making them acquainted with himself and 
 his glorious salvation. 
 
 About this time, portions of the New Tes- 
 tament were translated and printed in the Es- 
 quimaux language, a work from which very 
 important benefits appear to have resulted. 
 The following particulars have been given, in 
 illustration of the gratitude which was excited 
 in the minds of the natives, by the kind and 
 repeated donations of the British and Foreign 
 Bible Society. " Several of our Esquimaux 
 at Nain, having been informed of the nature 
 and aim of the Bible Society, began, of their 
 own accord, to collect seal's blubber, by way 
 of making up a small contribution towards the 
 expenses of that society. Some brought whole 
 seals, or half a seal, or pieces, according to 
 their ability. Others brought portions of 
 blubber in the name of their children, request- 
 ing, with the most afiecting expressions, that 
 their little offerings might be accepted. Hav- 
 ing been told that in some parts of the world, 
 
508 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND. 
 
 poor" 
 
 oooTorti fW«n among Uio heathen, who were 
 t»»<>M thcv, had cheerfully contributed 
 irils the furtherance of the Gos- 
 pti, lined, " How long have we heard 
 
 Uie pli-iisiiiit and comfortable words respecting 
 Jesus C'hrigt, our Saviour, and how many books 
 have ice received treating of him, and yet we 
 have never known or considered whence they 
 came. Wo have, indeed, sometimes observed 
 among ourselves, that so many books freely 
 bestowed upon us must cost a great deal some- 
 where ; but we never knew till now that even 
 noor people have contributed their little sums 
 for our instruction and comfort We are in- 
 deed poor, yet we may occasionally bring 
 eomo blubber, that othere who are as ignorant 
 OS we were formerly, may receive the same 
 Gospel which has been so sweet to our souls, 
 and may thereby be taught to find the way to 
 Jesus." " By these spontaneous declarations," 
 says the missionary, " a great impression was 
 made upon our people. Each would bring 
 something, when they heard how desirous other 
 nations were to hear the word of God ; and 
 they now begged me to send their contribu- 
 tions to those generous friends who printed the 
 Scriptures for them, that more heathen might 
 be presented with a book so much more pre- 
 cious than any thing else in the world." 
 
 A letter written at Naiu, August 10, 1823, 
 says, " Many are the instances which we might 
 adduce as proofs, that the word of the cross is 
 indeed the power of God unto salvation to all 
 them that hear and believe." Having related 
 many striking facts, he added, "During the 
 last winter we perceived with great gratitude 
 the traces of renewed spiritual life among our 
 dwir Esquimaux. The schools and daily wor- 
 ship are well attended, the scholars show an 
 eagerness to learn, and at the examination they 
 all afforded us much pleasure. During the 
 last }-Qa.r three adults and seven children were 
 baptized; five were admitted to the Lord's 
 Supper ; four were received into the congrega- 
 tion, and one departed this life. The number 
 of inhabitants m this settlement at present 
 is 181." ^ 
 
 Letters of equal encouragement were written 
 from the other settlements during the same 
 year. The number of inhabitants at Okkak, 
 m 1830, was estimated by the missionaries at 
 385, of whom 314 were members of the con- 
 gregation. The population at Hopedale, at 
 the same date, consisted of 179 persons, of 
 whom 56 were communicants, 7 candidates for 
 admission to the Lord's table, 21 baptized, but 
 not yet communicants, and 80 children. 
 
 In 1829, the congregations in Hopedale and 
 Nain were visited by a malignant disorder, 
 which carried off great numbers of the society. 
 In four weeks upwards of 150 lay ill at Nain, 
 and their situation was dcploralilc indeed. In 
 many of the tents all thp families lay in a help- 
 less state, nor could any one give the other so 
 much as a drop of water. " Our greatest com- 
 
 fort," says a missionary at this time, " was the 
 state of mind of those who departed this life. 
 They all declared that they rejoiced at the 
 prospect of soon seeing Him, face to face, who, 
 by his sufferings and death, had redeemed 
 them from the power of sin and the fear of the 
 grave." 
 
 Hebron. — In 1830 a fourth settlement was 
 formed at a place called Hebron, about 90 
 miles north of Okkak. It is the most northern 
 station on the coast of Labrador. During this 
 year 500 copies of the Psalms were distributed 
 at the several stations. 
 
 One of the sorest trials which the mission- 
 aries at this penod, and subsequently, had to 
 endure, was the influence exerted on the natives 
 by the Southland traders. By mingling in 
 the society of these unprincipled and mercenary 
 nien, the converts were many of them seduced 
 into vicious practices, and led far away from 
 the simplicity of the Gospel. Some of them 
 returned again with penitent confessions, but 
 the pernicious example of these traders has had 
 a sensible effect on the missions. 
 
 In 1837 the brethren completed the revisal 
 of the Esquimaux version of the prophetic 
 Scriptures, and sent it to England for publica- 
 tion. 
 
 The year 1848 was one of great joy and 
 thanksgiving to the brethren at Hebron ; for, 
 after years of earnest and apparently fruitless 
 effort, they had the satisfaction of seeing the 
 heathen coming to them, one after another, 
 till, in the course of a few weeks, 81 had found 
 their way to the settlement, raising the num- 
 ber of souls under the care of the brethren at 
 that place to 336. During this year the Es- 
 quimaux version of the book of Proverbs was 
 forwarded to the Bible Society in England to 
 be printed. 
 
 Within the last year or two, new explorar 
 tions have been made in the north of Labra- 
 dor, and considerable bodies of Esquimaux, 
 speaking a language easily understood, have 
 been found. But as yet no settlement has been 
 formed in that distant and dreary region. 
 
 In Labrador, as in Greenland, missionary 
 operations have been attended Irom the first 
 with peculiar vicissitudes, both of a joyful and 
 a painful nature. This has resulted, in great 
 measure, from the severity of the climate, 
 which at intervals renders it nearly or quite 
 impossible to obtain food, subjecting the peo- 
 ple to all the horrors of famine, to which is 
 superadded often the ravages of pestilence. 
 But it has happened generally at such times, 
 that the missionaries have had stores from 
 Europe, with which in some measure to relieve 
 the natives, and by this means, and a tender 
 and watchful care of the sick and the dying, 
 the brethren have secured the gratitude and 
 confidence of the people, and gained a more 
 ready access to their hearts and consciences. 
 It has ever been and must be a serious draw- 
 back on these missions also, that the congre- 
 
LAC-QUI-PARLE— LEW-CHEW. 
 
 509 
 
 gations are obliged to spend the warm months 
 away from the settlements, in quest of provi- 
 sions for the winter. They are thus deprived 
 of instructions, and subjected to many tempta- 
 tions. But as a mitigation of this evil it is to 
 be gratefully considered, that in their disper- 
 sion the converts often carry the news of a 
 Saviour to the heathen at a distance, and bring 
 in many to the settlements who otherwise 
 never would have heard of a missionary, or of 
 the way of salvation. 
 
 On the whole, therefore, while the trials of 
 the missionaries have been great and peculiar, 
 the results of missionary labor in those frozen 
 and inhospitable regions have been happy and 
 encouraging to a remarkable degree. 
 
 The present state of the missions at the four 
 stations in Labrador, is indicated in the fol- 
 lowing 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 SETTLEMENTS. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 *3 
 
 !3 
 
 pi 
 
 Nain 
 
 1771 
 1776 
 
 1782 
 1830 
 
 4 
 4 
 4 
 3 
 
 84 
 
 176 
 
 59 
 
 75 
 
 366 
 
 Okkak ; 
 
 410 
 
 Hopedale 
 
 234 
 
 HebroQ , 
 
 347 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 394 
 
 1357 
 
 
 
 
 Re 
 
 V. E 
 
 D. Mo 
 
 ORB. 
 
 LAO-QUI-PARLE : Once a station of the 
 Am. Board among the Sioux Indians. 
 
 LAGOS : A large, well-built, and populous 
 town, situated on a small island at the mouth 
 of a lagoon in the Bight of Benin, West Africa, 
 about 36 miles east of Badagry. It is accessi- 
 ble to vessels drawing ten or eleven feet of 
 water, and has a water communication far into 
 the interior, and for hundreds of miles along 
 the coast. It is a great commanding point, 
 from whence Christianity may go forth into 
 the interior. The coast station of the Yoruba 
 mission of the Church Missionary Society has 
 been removed from Badagry to Lagos. 
 
 LAHAIXA : A town on the Island of 
 Maui (S. I.), which is rapidly increasing in 
 commercial importance. In the year 1844, 
 300 ships visited its harbor. — A station of the 
 American Board. 
 
 LAHAINALUNA : Upper Lahaina, a sta- 
 tion of the American Board in the Sandwich 
 Islands, on the north-east of Maui. 
 
 LAHOR : The chief city of the Punjaub, 
 Northern India, a station of the Presbyterian 
 Board. 
 
 LA POINTE : A station of the American 
 Board among the Ojibwas. 
 
 LAUNCESTON : A station of the Wes- 
 leyau Missionary Society in Van Dieman's 
 Land. 
 
 LEFAASALELEAGA : A station of the 
 
 London Missionary Society on the island of 
 Savaii, one of the Samoan group. 
 
 LEGUAN: A beautiful island in the 
 mouth of the Essequibo river, containing 22 
 sugar estates. A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 LEICESTER MO CTNTAIN: Station of 
 the Church Missionary Society in the Moun- 
 tain District of Sierra Leone, South Africa, • 
 about three miles from Freetown. 
 
 LEKATLOISTG: Station of the London 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, on the 
 Hart river, among a branch of the Batlapi 
 nation ; one missionary, 300 communicants. 
 
 LEONE : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society on the island of Tutuila, one 
 of the Samoan group. 
 
 LEOPOLD : A town of liberated Africans 
 and station of the Church Missionary Society 
 in the parish of St. Peter, Sierra Leone, W. 
 Africa, a little south of Freetown. 
 
 LEPA : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, on the island of Upolu, one of 
 the Samoan group. 
 
 LETTY: One of the Banda Islands, a 
 group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 LE ULUMAEGA : A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society on the island of Upolu, 
 one of the Samoas. 
 
 LEW-CHEW, or LOO-CHOO : The king- 
 dom of Lew-Chew consists of the island bear- 
 ing this name, the various small islands lying 
 around it, with the entire Madjicosimah group 
 on the south-west, the whole number being 36. 
 The island of Lew-chew is about 60 miles long 
 and from 12 to 15 wide ; and it is nearly equi- 
 distant from Japan and China. Coral reefs 
 line the shores ; and in some places they seem 
 to have been thrown up by volcanic agency, 
 or to have been raised so as to form ledges 
 along the beach. The climate is one of the 
 most delightful and healthy in this region of 
 the world. The vegetation partakes more of 
 the tropics than the adjacent coasts of China. 
 
 Cities and Villages. — Napa, or Nafa, lies on 
 the river, the mouth of which is known as 
 Napa-kiang ; and it stretches inland from the 
 beach for more than a mile, most of the houses 
 being in view from the anchorage. Shui, or 
 Shudi, is the residence of the court, and is 
 prettily situated on the ridge and side of a hill, 
 about three miles from Napa, the two being 
 connected by a broad paved road, in some 
 places elevated above the marsh with great 
 labor. Shui is a well-built town ; and the 
 stream which runs down the hill, adds greatly 
 to its appearance. The waters are collected 
 into pools and tanks for the convenience of the 
 people, and its banks are connected by stone 
 bridges of great durability ; while the houses 
 are scattered along the steep sides, intermixed 
 with ledges of stone and trees in a most pictu- 
 resque manner. The palace is a collection of 
 large buildings, inclosed and defended by a 
 
610 
 
 LEW-CHEW. 
 
 stone mix of great solidity. The buildings 
 
 fl thciiMcivcBaro of an ordinary description; but 
 
 tli> t!;g!»ts of stone 8tc'|>s, the ornamented tri- 
 
 uwvLys, and the paved court-yards, with 
 
 I ircca and arbors, exhibit some skill. 
 
 irects of Napa and Shui are partly 
 
 maoiuiiunizeil, with open gutters at their sides ; 
 
 some of them are wide enough for carriages. 
 
 The road between these two cities is well 
 
 paved ; but elsewhere the common highways 
 
 are rough, stony, and painful to the feet ; and 
 
 they seem to have had no mending since they 
 
 were made. The markets arc held in the 
 
 squares and corners of the streets, and present 
 
 only a miserable assortment of the commonest 
 
 necessaries of life. 
 
 The villages are often prettily situated ; but 
 all of them exhibit proofs of the poverty and 
 oppression of their inhabitants. 
 
 The People. — In stature the natives of Lew- 
 chew are below their neighbors ; but they are 
 compactly built and well-proportioned. In 
 general the people are healthy, though their 
 countenances indicate the depressing effect of 
 unremitted labor. The serious aspect of the 
 Lew-chewans strikes a visitor as soon as he 
 lands. Groups of women, with children around, 
 are seen along the highways. The wrinkled, 
 grimmed, and care-worn countenances of these 
 poor creatures offer a melancholyproof of their 
 toil and exposure, and the low position which 
 they hold in society. 
 
 The color of the Lew-chewans is a pleasing 
 reddish-olive tint, presenting a lighter or dark- 
 er shade, according to exposure. In general 
 however, it is darker than that of the Chinese. 
 
 Products of t/ie Soil. — The greatest part of 
 the |)opulation is engaged in agriculture ; and 
 the fields show abundant evidence of the un- 
 ceasing toil bestowed upon them, in which the 
 women take a large share ; but the productions 
 of Lew-chew are less varied than those of 
 China or Japan. Timber and fuel are sup- 
 plied from the forests in the northern part of 
 the island, among which the camphor and tal- 
 low-tree are found. 
 
 Dwellings.— The arrangement of a Lew- 
 chewan dwelling is very simple, it being fitted 
 only for a warm climate, and so open that in 
 the latitude of 26^ north it must often prove 
 an indifferent shelter. The roof is supported 
 by a double row of posts, on its sides, about 
 four feet apart ; and beams extend across to 
 assist in upholding the roof in the centre. 
 These beams and the rows of joists running 
 across, as well as the inner of the two on the 
 outside, are provided with grooves, in which 
 panels slide, so as to form, when closed, the 
 sides of the house and the division of the rooms. 
 The floor is elevated about two feet above the 
 ground ; and it is usually covered with stuflFed 
 mats an inch thick, on which are sometimes 
 spread felt carpets. The space between the 
 outside posts forms a porch, sheltered from the 
 rain. In unpleasant weather sashes, covered 
 
 with oiled or thin paper, are slid along the in- 
 side grooves, imperfectly supplying the place 
 of glass, and furnishing a twilight to the, in- 
 mates, who warm themselves with braziers of 
 charcoal. The porch serves many purposes ; 
 and parts of it are partitioned off in tiie rear 
 of the houses ; so that the whole establishment 
 is under one roof, and can be thrown into one 
 room. No chairs or tables arc seen in the 
 houses, all persons eating and sleeping upon 
 soft mats. A few low stands are used for 
 writing-desks. The mats and felted carpets 
 harbor an abundance of fleas ; and musquitoes 
 annoy the inmates. But houses of the better 
 sort are cleanly.*- 
 
 The houses are usually placed within inclo- 
 sures, the walls of which are six or seven feet 
 high, and surmounted with plants, completely 
 concealing the house. The entrance to each 
 yard is' usually at the end of a short lane nin- 
 ning up from the street ; but no passer-by can 
 look within. 
 
 Dress. — The dress of the Lew-chewans con- 
 sists of loose robes, not unlike night-gowns, 
 lapping over in front, and secured by a girdle. 
 The capacious bosom thus made is usually 
 pretty well filled with a variety of papers, 
 books, and other articles, so as to give the 
 wearer a corpulent appearance. The feet are 
 protected by grass sandals, fastened by a strap 
 passing between the first and second toe. The 
 women are always modestly dressed. The men 
 wear two hair-pins of brass or white copper to 
 secure their hair, which is done up in a coil 
 on the top of the head, with a bow above the 
 coil, through which the large pin is thrust. 
 Much time is daily spent in arranging and 
 oiling this trosseau. One of the pins has an 
 ornamental end, like a flower, nearly an irfch 
 broad, which always points forward. The 
 other is not much unlike a skewer, four or five 
 inches long, and thrust in sideways. Females 
 collect their hair in a knot on the side of the 
 head, where the ends are kept from falling 
 over the shoulders by a skewer. All married 
 women tattoo or color the back of their hands 
 and fingers blue. Neither sex wear any head- 
 dress ; but official rank is denoted by an oblong 
 flat-topped cap, covered with red, yellow, pur- 
 ple or variegated silk, the last being the badge 
 of the highest. In rainy, or cold weather, an 
 overcoat of thick cotton, forming a comforta- 
 ble defence, is worn by the gentry. 
 
 Language. — The language of these islanders 
 is a dialect of the Japanese, differing so great- 
 ly, however, that the people of the two coun- 
 tries cannot very readily understand each 
 other. 
 
 The Arts of Life. — Workshops are found in 
 various places, occupying favorable positions 
 near the markets ; and as their fronts are open 
 to the street, all the operations of the workmen 
 can easily be seen. The mechanical arts are 
 at a low point among the Lew-chewans, judg- 
 ing from these shops, in which one sees tools 
 
LEW-CHEW. 
 
 511 
 
 and manipulations strikingly resembling those [ and between February 1843 and Doc. 1845, 
 
 more than £1,000 were raised for tlie purpose 
 of sending the Gospel to them, and £700 more 
 in 1846 ; and a Board of Trustees was appoint- 
 ed to manage the affairs of the mission. Dr. 
 Bettelheim, a converted Jew, a physician, and 
 a learned man, with the sanction of the bishop 
 of London, was sent out in Sept. 1845, and 
 arrived at Lew-Chew in January, 1846. 
 
 He was met on board the vessel which con- 
 veyed him by a French Catholic missionary, 
 who greeted him with a cordial welcome. 
 Fearin^g that permission to settle would be de- 
 nied him, he effected a landing with his wife 
 and his effects, by getting into the native 
 boats that came out to visit the ship. The 
 authorities, however, refused to give him leave 
 to remain, pleading poverty and scarcity of 
 food ; and he was requested to give up his de- 
 sign of stopping, and to embark on the vessel 
 that brought him. But this he declined to do, 
 returning a good present for an answer. 
 
 After the vessel had sailed, he was invited 
 to go and look at a house intended for his 
 residence, but finding it low and damp, he de- 
 clined it, and was afterwards shown to the 
 temple, an old, but spacious and pleasantly 
 situated wooden building, which was offered 
 him on condition that the keeper of the idols 
 should reside in the house, the idols being 
 screened off by a sliding partition ; and ho 
 accepted it. But three guard stations, with 
 five men in each, were arranged near the house, 
 under pretence of protection, but really for 
 espionage. 
 
 For about a year he was able to carry on 
 missionary operations, maintaining a service 
 in his own house with his servants, and preach- 
 ing to the people as he met them in the streets. 
 Crowds gathered around him wherever he 
 raised his humble pulpit, upon a stone, or on 
 the corner of a street, in the market, in the 
 roads and lanes, or elsewhere. Wherever he 
 halted, there the passers-by stopped, and all 
 the people in the neighborhood came out to 
 hear him. The stalls were idle, sellers and 
 buyers forgot their trade, while apparently en- 
 gaged in a higher business. " I have seen," 
 says Dr. B., " the coolies lay down their bur- 
 dens and quietly listen ; laborers lean their 
 heads on the handles of their rural tools, and 
 rest in pensive attention ; thoroughfares were 
 obstructed, and roads and open places rendered 
 impassable from the masses of the people 
 crowded in the space around me ; none forbid- 
 ding, none driving them away, much less pre- 
 venting their assembling." 
 
 But suddenly all was changed. It was re- 
 ported that the king was dead; but Dr. B. 
 thought it was but a feint to justify the ofiicers 
 in_ changing their course. Immediately all 
 things assumed a new aspect. On the very day 
 which he supposed to be the day of the king's 
 burial, he was assaulted with stones and sticks 
 in the open road, and his life endangered. Ilia 
 
 of the Chinese, 
 
 Religion. — The religion of the Lew-chewans 
 partakes of that of their two neighbors, from 
 whom they have derived most of their civiliza- 
 tion. They have ancestral worship, the ritual 
 of which is mainly taken from the Chinese ; 
 from whom the adoration paid to Confucius is 
 also derived. The temples are numerous. They 
 are among the best structures in the island, 
 affording lodging-places for travelers within 
 their precincts, as well as dwellings for the 
 priests. The latter possess but little influence 
 in the government ; but they seem to receive 
 a good support from devotees. 
 
 Government. — The government is a heredi- 
 tary monarchy ; and the political institutions, 
 like those of China, are founded on the writ- 
 ings of Confucius ; who is highly revered here, 
 as well as in Japan, as a wise and safe guide. 
 The kingdom has been under the sway of the 
 princes of Satzuma for more than two centu- 
 ries. The present hereditary sovereign of the 
 kingdom is a minor, about thirteen years old ; 
 and the administration of affairs is nominally 
 in the hands of an officer called " tsung-li 
 kwan," or general superintendent, usually 
 known as the regent, assisted by three others, 
 called " pu-ching," or treasurers, one for each 
 of the prefectures into which the island is 
 divided. No soldiers or arms of any kind are 
 seen in the streets. The power of the govern- 
 ment seems to be maintained by means of a 
 system of espionage, in which the gentry act 
 as policemen, their duty being to mark every 
 thing which is done by the meanest person. 
 The servile fear which the system has caused 
 in the mind of the lowest beggar, rendering 
 him suspicious of his neighbors and kindred, 
 stands in lieu of the actual presence of t-he 
 officer. 
 
 Foreign Policy. — The Lew-chewans, situated 
 between the powerful empires of China and 
 Japan, have consulted their safety by a sys- 
 tem of strict non-intercourse ; and their gentle 
 disposition has led them to exhibit kindness to 
 all who ha^e been cast on their shores, or 
 have visited their ports, prompted in a measure 
 too by the conviction that kindness had no re- 
 prisals to fear. For a long time they were 
 able to maintain their independence by pay- 
 ing homage to their neighbors ; but, in 1609, 
 the Prince of Satzuma, who rules in the south- 
 WesLern corner of Kiu-siu, compelled their 
 sovereign to go to his capital, Kagosima, and 
 the subjects to pay him tribute and receive 
 his tax-gatherers. — S. Wells Williams, in 
 Missionary Herald for June, 1854, abridged. 
 
 . MISSION. 
 The kind hospitality of the Lew-Chew peo- 
 ple to British and American vessels which 
 touch at their islands, or were wrecked on 
 their coasts, excited a deep interest in their I 
 behalf among the officers of the British navy ; | 
 
612 
 
 LIBERIA. 
 
 appool to the (rorcrnin(*nt wag only met by a 
 denial of the assault Soon after, the people, 
 who n?cd to crowd around him whenever he 
 went into the street, now ran from him : and 
 whenever he passed throagli a street, all #e 
 riioj* were el{)S!eil, and tlic doors and windows 
 of the hcuLs'cs closed. " First there was a bus- 
 tle, a runninc: here and there, a rattling and 
 clappiiiif of shutters, doors, and windows, as if 
 a devil incnmatehad come in their way j green 
 
 Socers deserted their stalls, laborers ceased 
 eur work, and crews left their boats ; women 
 dragged their children in-doors in such haste 
 ond fright as made them scream out when 
 they saw mo again far off. Often the noise, 
 confusion, and bewilderment rose to such a 
 pitch that I was not always free from fear my- 
 self, and almost dreaded to walk out." 
 
 AH his appeals to the government were in- 
 effectual. It seemed to be a concerted, sys- 
 tematic movement on the part of the authori- 
 ties to drive him from the country ; and the 
 people, being held under an oppressive despot- 
 ism, were compelled to act according to their 
 orders. This course of incessant annoyance 
 was continued, with increasing rigor up to the 
 time of his writing a letter to Kev. Dr. Peter 
 Parker, of China, which was published at' 
 Canton in 1850, from which this statement is 
 derived. 
 
 We learn from recent intelligence that Dr. 
 Bettelheim has succeeded in maintaining his 
 
 f)Osition at Lew-Chew; and a layman, after 
 aboring seven years in London as a city mis- 
 sionary, has been sent to his assistance. The 
 visit of the American squadron has operated 
 favorably ; and the prospects of the mission 
 are brightening. Three persons have received 
 baptism in Napa ; and another is a candidate 
 for the same privilege at Shuy. 
 
 An appeal has been issued by the committee 
 having charge of this mission, for the men and 
 the means of a speedy enlargement. " The 
 Lord," it is said, " seems to be preparing an 
 open door for entering Japan ;" and " the mar 
 eninery and materials for a future mission in 
 that kingdom are in preparation at Lew- 
 Chew." 
 
 LIBERIA : A republic on the western coast 
 of Africa. Its civilized population, consisting 
 of free colored people and emancipated slaves 
 from the United States, and their descendants, 
 native Africans rescued from sKare traders, and 
 a few other natives who have become civilized, 
 may be estimated at about 10,000. Its native 
 population, entitled by treaties to protection 
 and the means of civilization, and to all the 
 privileges of citizenship when civilized, are 
 supposed to be two or three hundred thousand. 
 
 Oovernment.— The government consists of a 
 president and vice-president, elected once in 
 two years, a senate and house of representa- 
 tives, chosen by the people, a judiciary, secre- 
 taries of the necessary departments, and other 
 executive officers, appointed by the president 
 
 and senate. None but persons of color can 
 hold office, hold laud, or be citizens. 
 
 The territory has been purchased, at various 
 times, by the American Colonization Society, 
 and the emigrants, with few exceptions, sent 
 out at its expense. The government was ad- 
 ministered at first wholly, and afterwards in 
 part, by officers appointed by that Society, till 
 the growth of the colony and the extent of its 
 commercial relations required the establishment 
 of an independent government, which could 
 form commercial treaties with the several powers 
 of Europe. By advice of the Society, there- 
 fore, the colony proclaimed its independence 
 August 24, 184^7 ; and the government, under 
 its present constitution, was organized at the 
 commencement of the succeeding year. It has 
 been recognized by the principal nations of 
 Christendom. 
 
 Education. — ^The laws of the republic require 
 a free school in every settlement, and pro- 
 vide for raising money to defray the expense. 
 At present, however, the whole educational 
 establishment, including the primary schools 
 required by law, are supported by various mis- 
 sionary societies in the United States, and a 
 full account of them will be given in connec- 
 tion with the several missions. In addition to 
 these the legislature has incorporated a college, 
 and given it a valuable tract of one hundred 
 acres, on the north bank of the St. Paul's, 
 about twelve miles from Monrovia. For its es- 
 tablishment and support, funds are held by the 
 Trustees of Donations for Education in Libe- 
 ria, incorporated by the Legislature of Massa- 
 chusetts. 
 
 The provisions for religious instruction and 
 worship, like those for education, are connected 
 with the several missions, and to a great ex- 
 tent supported by societies in the United 
 States. 
 
 Extent. — ^The name Liberia, however, has a 
 wider application. The whole country known 
 by that name extends along the western coast 
 of Africa, from Manna Point, lat. 7^ 25' N., 
 long. 120 34' W., to the river San Pedro, lat. 
 4° 44' N., long. 6° 37' W. The entire lenglih 
 of its searcoast is about 520 miles. Of this 
 coast about 390 miles, extending from Manna 
 Point on the north-west, to Grand S esters, 
 belongs to the republic of Liberia. The re- 
 mainder of the coast, extending about 130 miles 
 to the river San Pedro, the extreme eastern 
 boundary, belongs to Maryland in Liberia. 
 Its civilized settlements were planted by the 
 Maryland Colonization Society. Its govern- 
 ment has always been entirely distinct from 
 that of the republic. It has this year, 1854, 
 passed from its colonial state to that of nation- 
 al independence. These two republics intend 
 to unite under one government. In respect to 
 their religious interests, they are already united, 
 and may be considered as one. The territory, 
 having been purchased of numerous small tribes, 
 extends inland as far as the rights of the sev- 
 
^<^ Of THl 
 
 3SI7ERSITT: 
 
LIBERIA. 
 
 613 
 
 eral tribes extended; in some places, sixty 
 miles, in others, only fourteen. From Grand 
 Cape Mount to Grand Sesters, 286 miles, it 
 averages about forty-five miles in width, and 
 contains 12,870 square miles, or 8,236,800 
 acres. If the rem.ainder averages twenty miles 
 in width, which is a low estimate, the whole 
 contains 17,270 square miles, or 11,052,800 
 acres. It is nearly all susceptible of cultiva- 
 tion ; and it is a low estimate of its fertility to 
 say, that every cultivated acre will, on an aver- 
 age, furnish the necessaries of life for one in- 
 habitant. For procuring luxuries or acquiring 
 wealth, they would need other employments, 
 or larger farms. Settled as densely as Sierra 
 Leone, it would contain 1,740,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Liberia is every where well watered by 
 numerous small streams, but has no very large 
 rivers. Sand-bars at the mouths of the rivers 
 prevent the entrance of large vessels ; and, at 
 about twenty miles from the coast, their navi- 
 gation is obstructed by rapids. Here is the 
 base of the mountain range which divides the 
 waters of the Atlantic from those which flow 
 into the Niger, the great river of Central 
 Africa. From this range, spurs and detached 
 elevations run down between the rivers, in 
 some places quite to the coast, forming, as at 
 Cape Mount and Cape Mesurado, bold pro- 
 montories. According to the best information 
 yet obtained, the summit of this range, beyond 
 which the waters flow eastward and north- 
 eastward into the Niger, cannot be more than 
 150 or 200 miles from the coast. 
 
 Harbors. — ^The coast is deficient in natural 
 harbors ; but in several places, good harbors 
 might probably be constructed at a moderate 
 expense. The whole coast, however, is one 
 continuous roadstead, where, at any season of 
 the year, ships may lie at anchor within a mile 
 or two of the shore, and landing-places for 
 boats occur as often as once in five or ten miles. 
 
 Productions. — The productions are those of 
 other tropical countries. Rice is the principal 
 grain. It is grown on uplands, without irri- 
 gation. Yams, sweet potatoes, cassada, and 
 other esculent roots, are easily raised, as are 
 oranges, bananas, and other tropical fruits. 
 Cofiee is indigenous, of several varieties, in- 
 cluding the Mocha, as are also several varieties 
 of cotton. Indigo is a troublesome weed. 
 Another native production is the Malaguette 
 pepper, or " Grains of Paradise," from the 
 abundance of which, the coast was formerly 
 known as " the Grain Coast." Sugar-cane, 
 ginger, and arrow-root, are easily cultivated. 
 Palm-oil is made in large quantities, and cam- 
 wood and ivory are brought from the interior 
 for exportation. The waters furnish fish abun- 
 dantly, and of good quality. The domestic ani- 
 mals for food are bullocks, of small size and lit- 
 tle value for the yoke, goats, swine, and poultry. 
 
 Climate. — The climate is a healthy one for 
 its native population ; as is evident from their 
 well-developed, vigorous forms, their usual free- 
 33 
 
 dom from disease, and the age to which they 
 live. It must, of course, be adapted to the 
 constitutions of their descendants, in propor- 
 tion as they retain the constitutional peculiar- 
 ities of their ancestors. Foreigners, however, 
 from temperate climates, whatever may be 
 their ancestry, must undergo an acclimating 
 fever, within a few weeks after their arrival. 
 To this rule, the exceptions are too few to be 
 of any account. The fever is sometimes vio- 
 lent, and even fatal ; but in most cases, where 
 the constitution was previously unimpaired, it 
 is not severe, and yields readily to judicious 
 treatment ; and in many, it is very slight, not 
 even confining the patient to his house for a 
 single day. White men never become per- 
 fectly acclimated ; though, with prudence and 
 occasional visits to their native air, they have 
 been able to live and labor usefully for five, 
 ten, and even twenty years. Visitors may 
 avoid the fever by spending their nights on 
 board their ships, half a mile, or even less, 
 from the shore. 
 
 Native Inhabitants. — Liberia belongs to that 
 division of Africa, called Nigritia by the 
 Latin geographers ; Belad-es-Sudan — that is, 
 the Land of the Blacks — by the Arabs ; and 
 Guinea by the Portuguese. These names are 
 unknown to the natives, and the last is of un- 
 known origin. It extends eastward across the 
 continent, north of the equator, even into the 
 valley of the Nile. In its inhabitants, the 
 form, features, complexion, and all the charac- 
 teristics of the negro, are most perfectly de- 
 veloped. They appear as slaves on some of 
 the oldest monuments of ancient Egypt. They 
 were carried as slaves across the Great 
 Desert, and sold to the Carthaginians. They 
 have always been hunted and seized as slaves 
 by the Arab, Moorish, and mixed races on the 
 Great Desert and its southern border. After 
 the discovery of the western coast by the Por- 
 tuguese, they were bought and carried as slaves, 
 first to Europe, and afterwards to the West 
 Indies and the American continent. This last 
 calamity, however, has fallen with almost equal 
 weight on the Zingian or Zambezan races, 
 south of the equator. So far as is known, 
 they have always been divided into numerous 
 small tribes, ignorant of letters, and with but 
 slight knowledge, if any, of some of the sim- 
 plest arts of civilization. A large majority — 
 a well-informed writer supposes five-sixths — of 
 them are slaves. Wives are bought, worked 
 as slaves, and sold, according to each man's 
 ability and caprice. Favorite wives, and other 
 slaves, sometimes in great nufnbers, are killed 
 in sacrifice on the death of a king. Slaves 
 are sometimes killed, to give solemnity to_ the 
 ratification of a treaty. In some of the tribes, 
 cannibalism is occasionally practised ; but to 
 a less extent, probably, than in some of the 
 Zingian tribes farther south. 
 
 Religion. — See Africa, Western. 
 
 Discovery. — The first discovery of this coast 
 
514 
 
 LIBERIA. 
 
 of which tre have any authcutic account, was 
 maclc by Piixlro ile Cintra, in 1462. He was 
 in the imnlovmcnt of the King of Portugul, 
 to whom ro'iH; Martin V. had given all the 
 territories ho might discover, from Cape Bo- 
 jwior to the East Indies, to be conquered and 
 "recovercil to Christ and his church." The 
 natives had never seen ship? before. The few 
 that came off to him, 16 miles beyond Cape 
 Mcsurado, in canoes carrying two or three 
 each, were naked, had some wooden darts and 
 small knives, two targets and three bows, rings 
 about their cars and one in the nose, and 
 teeth, which seemed to be human, strung 
 about their necks. It does not appear that he 
 carried away any of them as slaves, though 
 that practice had been followed by most ex- 
 plorers on the west coast of Africa, since it was 
 first commenced by Antonio Gonzales, in 1440. 
 
 For nearly a century and a half the Portu- 
 guese were masters of this coast. They had 
 forts or trading houses at numerous points, of 
 which Gallinas, Cape Mount, Cape Mesurado, 
 Junk river, Sesters and Sangwin seem to have 
 been the most important. 
 
 Siave Trade.— The slave trade to the West 
 Indies was commenced in 1503, and encour- 
 aged by edicts of Ferdinand V. of Spain, in 
 1511, and of Charles V., in 1515. From that 
 time forward, procuring slaves from the na- 
 tives and selling them to the Spaniards, was a 
 principal branch of their business. Their in- 
 fluence was so predominant, that before 1600 
 the Portuguese had become the language in 
 which business was usually transacted, and 
 was generally understood by natives who had 
 dealings with foreigners. 
 
 The Pope's Grant not recognized. — ^The Eng- 
 lish and Dutch, being Protestants, cared 
 nothing for the Pope's grant to Portugal ; and 
 the French soon learned to disregard it, claim- 
 ing that they had discovered the coast and 
 traded at Sesters before the Portuguese, and 
 even as early as 1346. The English took the 
 lead. In 1553, having already made two voy- 
 ages to Morocco, Thomas Windham, though 
 the Portuguese had threatened him and his 
 crew with death, visited the whole coast from 
 the river Sesters to Benin. In 1554, Captain 
 John Lok, with three ships, reached Cape 
 Mesurado, sailed along the coast to Benin, 
 and brought home " certain black slaves," the 
 first, so far as we know, ever seen in England. 
 In 1588, the English "African Company" 
 was incorporated for the more vigorous prose- 
 cution of commerce in this region. The Por- 
 tuguese did what they could, and hired the na- 
 tives to do what they could, to resist these 
 encroachments. They destroyed the ships of 
 the intruders, and killed or enslaved their crews. 
 But by 1604 they were driven from all their 
 posts, from Cape Mesurado to Cape Palmas ; 
 and a few years later, the Dutch had posses- 
 sion at Cape Mount, and the English at Sierra 
 Leone. The Portuguese, however, did not 
 
 wholly quit the country. Being driven from 
 the coast, some of them, with their mulatto 
 descendants, retired inland, and endeavored, 
 with some success, to monopolize the trade be- 
 tween the interior and the coast, and were gra- 
 dually lost by umalgamation with the natives. 
 
 Portuguese Missions. — Of the missionary 
 labors of the Portuguese while in possession 
 of the coast, we have no particular informa- 
 tion ; but, as the Pope gave them the country 
 for that purpose ; as they had chapels and 
 priests at all their settlements ; as we have 
 accounts of their efforts and success at Sierra 
 Leone and other places ; and as they are said, 
 when driven from the coast, to have built 
 chapels and tiled to make converts in the 
 interior, there can be no doubt that some such 
 labors were performed. From them the na- 
 tives probably first received the idea of a Crear 
 tor, whose existence they admit, though they 
 never worship him. The word " fetish," by 
 which they designate a consecrated post or 
 any object of their superstitious reverence, is 
 derived from a Portuguese word, signifying a 
 charm, such as witches are supposed to use. 
 From the same source, they may nave received 
 the term '* devil," which they apply to the dis- 
 guised chief of certain nocturnal orgies. These 
 are the only remnants of their religious influ- 
 ence, which even conjecture can now detect. 
 
 Character and Injiuence of Traders — Slave 
 Trade. — The character of the traders to this 
 coast, whether Portuguese, French, English or 
 Dutch, appears to have been, with very few 
 exceptions, of the worst kind. Many of the 
 English and Dutch were " interlopers," trading 
 there in violation of the laws of their own 
 countries, and indeed of all laws whatever. 
 From about 1600, pirates began to mingle 
 with them, and the crews of traders sometimes 
 joined the pirates, and often copied their ex- 
 amples. The slave trade raged with increas- 
 ing violence. Not only were slaves bought 
 of the natives, and wars excited for the pur- 
 pose of making slaves for the market, but 
 negroes were seized indiscriminately and car- 
 ried off, whenever it could be done without too 
 much danger. The custom of "panyaring," 
 that is, alluring an individual beyond the 
 reach of protection, and then seizing him or 
 her as a slave, became common ; and the ne- 
 gro trader who was employed to panyar his 
 countryman one day, was sometimes panyared 
 himself the next. From 1688 to 1697, the 
 power of the " buccaneers " in the West In- 
 dies was broken, and they were dispersed. 
 They spread themselves over the whole Atlan- ' 
 tic and Indian Oceans, and in Western Africa, 
 for about 30 years, were one of the strongest 
 powers. Besides other places, they several 
 times plundered Sierra Leone, which was one 
 of their favorite resorts. They held the bay 
 next south of that cape for seven years, till, in 
 1730, they were broken up by the French. 
 Meanwhile, the Genoese first, and then the 
 
LIBERIA. 
 
 515 
 
 French, obtained the exclusive privilege of 
 furnishing negro slaves for tlie Spanish colo- 
 nies. In 1713, the English government, by 
 the famous Assiento treaty, obtained it for the 
 South Sea Company for thirty years. What 
 multitudes were sold, and how profitably, may 
 be judged from the fact, that in 1739 England 
 sold out the remaining four years to Spain for 
 a hundred thousand pounds — nearly half a 
 million dollars. 
 
 Under such influences, the character and 
 temper of the natives became such that, in 
 1730, not a single European factory was in 
 operation on the whole coast of what is now 
 Liberia ; traders found it dangerous to go on 
 shore ; and trade was carried on by sailing 
 along the coast, and coming to anchor where 
 the natives, by building a fire, indicated that 
 they had slaves or other articles for sale. This 
 state of things seems to have continued, with 
 little change, to the close of that century. 
 The testimony concerning the character of the 
 slave trade, laid before the British Parliament 
 from 1791 to 1807, showed that in other parts 
 of Africa, slaves were collected and kept for 
 shipment in factories ; but on the " windward 
 coast," where Liberia now is, " every tree was 
 a factory," and ships stopped and traded wher- 
 ever a signal was made. 
 
 Origin and Histoi-y of the Colony. — About 
 the year 1770 the celebrated theologian, Rev. 
 Samuel Hopkins of Newport, R. I., began to 
 preach against slavery and the slave trade. 
 April 7, 1773, he called on his neighbor, Rev. 
 Ezra Stiles, afterwards President of Yale Col- 
 lege, for conversation on his design " to make 
 some negro ministers, and send them to Gui- 
 nea." There were two young natives of Africa 
 in his church, whom he wished to educate for 
 that purpose. Mr. Stiles thought there might 
 be some prospect of success if thirty or forty 
 were sent, and a society formed for the pur- 
 pose. They " left the matter to further 
 thought." August 31, 1773, they published 
 a circular, asking contributions for the educa- 
 tion of these young men. The plan was re- 
 ceived with favor by the ministers of Berkshire 
 County, Mass., by those of several counties in 
 Connecticut, and by the Presbytery of New 
 York. The young men left New York for 
 Princeton, to be educated, Nov. 21, 1774, and 
 three days after, bills were drawn on a gentle- 
 man in London for fifty pounds sterling, of 
 which thirty pounds were given by the Edin- 
 burgh Society for promoting Christian Knowl- 
 edge, and five pounds by some one in London ; 
 and assurances were received, both from Eng- 
 land and Scotland, that more would be given, 
 if needed. About as much more was raised in 
 America, besides one hundred dollars for which 
 Mr. Hopkins had, some years before, sold a 
 slave, and which he now devoted to this pur- 
 pose. 
 
 When the plan of connecting a colony with 
 the mission was first fully adopted, and how 
 
 far it was understood by contributors m Eng 
 land, Scotland, and America, is not known. 
 April 29, 1784, Mr. Hopkins says, it " has 
 been on foot for some time." This, it was 
 thought, would not only be for the benefit of 
 those who should return to their native coun- 
 try, but would do much to stop the slave trade, 
 and to introduce Christianity into Africa. 
 
 March 7, 1787, his friends knew that he had 
 been desirous to attempt such a settlement 
 " for years." He was glad to learn that " cer- 
 tain Friends and other Dissenters in Britain 
 have joined to carry this design into execu- 
 tion," on the plan, as he supposed, of " the late 
 Dr. Fothergill." Dr. William Thornton, a 
 native of Virginia, had been in Newport some 
 weeks, proposing to form such a settlement 
 with free blacks from New England. A num- 
 ber volunteered to go with him ; but the at- 
 tempt failed for want of funds, perhaps, be- 
 cause others thought, with Mr. Hopkins, that 
 Dr. Thornton, though " an honest man," was 
 " too flighty and unsteady to be the head " of 
 such an enterprise. 
 
 In that year, 1787, Granville Sharp and 
 other British philanthropists commenced the 
 colony at Sierra Leone, with some hundreds of 
 colored people from America, who had served 
 in the British army during the war of Inde- 
 pendence. After some reverses it has grown 
 to a colony of more than fifty thousand in- 
 habitants. 
 
 The same year, the Constitution of the 
 United States was formed, by which the seve- 
 ral States were deprived of the power of con- 
 tinuing the slave trade more than twenty years. 
 
 In 1789, Dr. Hopkins wrote to Granville 
 Sharp, to learn whether colonists from Ame- 
 rica could be received at Sierra Leone, and 
 also whether the character and government of 
 that colony were such that he could recom- 
 mend it. He was then acquainted with " a 
 number of religious blacks," who were ready 
 to form a church, with one of their own num- 
 ber as pastor, and to settle in Africa, to intro- 
 duce Christianity and civilization, and to re- 
 ceive others who might wish to emigrate. 
 In 1791 he wished the Emancipation Society 
 in Connecticut to embrace this object in its 
 charter. In a sermon against slavery and the 
 slave trade. May 17, 1793, and more fully in 
 its appendix, he urged almost precisely the 
 same plan of colonizing, which has since been 
 carried out. In 1799, in the last work he 
 ever published, he expressed the same desires, 
 and the same hopes that they would yet be re- 
 alized. 
 
 The emancipation of slaves and their colo- 
 nization in some part of America had been a 
 favorite idea of Mr. Jefferson, and others in 
 Virginia, as early as 1786, and probably ear- 
 lier. In the autumn of 1800, an extensive 
 and dangerous conspiracy was discovered 
 among the slaves in and around Richmond. 
 Unwilling to put so many to death for such a 
 
616 
 
 LIBERIA. 
 
 ^tho Homo of Delegates, December 31, 
 
 in secret newion, miuested the Governor to 
 correspond with tlie rresidcnt of the United 
 8Utc8 as to procuring hind out of the State, 
 to which they might bo removed. The corres- 
 pondence continued till 1805, and the plan 
 was 80 modified as to express a preference for 
 Africa as a place of a settlement, but without 
 sovereignty, and to include free blacks and 
 slaves who might be emancipated. The Pre- 
 sident, Mr. Jefferson, applied to the Sierra 
 Lcouc Company to receive the proposed colon- 
 ists, but was refused. 
 
 In 1807, Congress passed an act prohibiting 
 the importation of slaves after the end of that 
 year. Nearly all the States had prohibited it 
 many years before. Previous acts had forbid- 
 den American citizens to trade in slaves be- 
 tween foreign countries. The same year the 
 British government, moved by evidence of the 
 nature of the ti-ade, collected principally at 
 Sierra Leone, abolished the traffic by British 
 subjects. 
 
 About 1810, Samuel J. Mills and others, 
 theological students at Andover, began to col- 
 lect information concerning the colored people 
 of the United States, bond and free, and were 
 soon brought to the conclusion that, in the 
 words often used by Mills, " we must take care 
 of them, or they will ruin us." They endea- 
 vored to rouse attention to the subject by the 
 press, and by correspondence and conversation 
 with leading men. Mills thought of coloniz- 
 ing them north of the Ohio, but some of his 
 associates early saw that any colony on this 
 continent would soon be overrun by white 
 people, and would be a failure. This was one 
 principal object for which he afterwards re- 
 sided some time in New Jersey, whel-e he pro- 
 cured the establishment of the "African 
 school " at Parsippany. 
 
 About 1811, Captain Paul Cuffee, a colored 
 man of New Bedford, carried 38 colored emi- 
 grants to Sierra Leone, in his own vessel, and 
 thirty of them at his own expense. This 
 movement was to have been more extensive, 
 but it was stopped by the war of 1812. Ann 
 Mifflin, of the Society of Friends, in Pennsyl- 
 vania, advocated a colony in Africa. Her 
 views were communicated to Mr. Jefferson, 
 who expressed his warm approbation in 1811. 
 February 15, 1815, the Rev. Robert Finley, 
 D. D., of New Jersey, wrote to a friend, ask- 
 ing his opinion of an attempt to found a co- 
 lony of colored people on the coast of Africa. 
 In February, 1816, General Charles Fenton 
 Mercer, of the Virginia House of Delegates, 
 became acquainted with the proceedings of 
 that house in 1800-1805, and pledged himself 
 to renew the subject, if he should be re-elected 
 at the next session. He soon after communi- 
 cated the facts and his intention to two friends, 
 Elias B. Caldwell and Francis S. Key, of 
 Washington, who pledged their cooperation. 
 
 The same year, probably towards its close, 
 
 the first meeting preparatory to forming a Co* 
 Ionization Society, was holden at Princeton, 
 N. J., and was attended by most of the pro* 
 fesaors of the Theological Seminary and the 
 College. In December, Dr. Finley visited 
 Washington, and consulted with Elias B. 
 Caldwell, his brother-in-law, and Francis S. 
 Key, who encouraged him to call a public 
 meeting. The meeting was holden December 
 23. Meanwhile Gen. Mercer, yet unacquainted 
 with Dr. Finley, and ignorant of his plans, 
 redeemed his pledge. His resolution was in- 
 troduced to the House of Delegates on the 
 12th, sent to the Senate on the 14th, and 
 passed on the 23d. The Constitution of the 
 Society was adopted Dec. 28, 1816, and the 
 officers elected Jan. 1, 1817. Samuel J. Mills 
 was one of the original members, and Dr. Wil- 
 liam Thornton was a member of the Board of 
 Managers. 
 
 The society owed its origin, therefore, to the 
 union of the various influences which, in Rhode 
 Island, in Massachusetts, in New Jersey, in 
 Pennsylvania, and in Virginia, had been tend- 
 ing towards such a result for nearly half a 
 century. 
 
 In 1817, Samuel J.Mills and Ebenezer Bur- 
 gess were sent to Africa, to find a place for a 
 colony. They selected a place on Sherbro 
 Island, or the adjacent continent, near where 
 the Mendi mission now is. In visiting Paul 
 Cuffee, preparatory to this voyage. Mills took 
 a severe cold, from which he never recovered. 
 He died on his voyage home. 
 
 January 21, 1820, the first colonists, 89 in 
 number, embarked on board of the Elizabeth, 
 at New York. After an unsuccessful attempt 
 to settle on Sherbro Island, in which many 
 lives were lost, and an effort to purchase a 
 location in the Bassa country, which was de- 
 feated by the attachment of the natives to the 
 slave trade. Cape Mesurado was purchased, 
 December 15, 1821. The colonists arrived 
 January 7, and were landed on a low island in 
 the river, from which, in a few months, under 
 the conduct of Elijah Johnson, one of their 
 own number, who had been left as a temporary 
 Governor, they removed to the Cape. 
 
 Before this time, slave-traders had begun to 
 reestablish factories on the coast. In 1813, 
 though the trade had been abolished by act of 
 Parliament from the beginning of 1808, two 
 British subjects, Bostock and McQuinn, had 
 one on Cape Mesurado, and in June his Ma- 
 jesty's ship Thais sent 40 men on shore, who, 
 after a battle, in which one of their number 
 was killed, entered the factory and captured 
 its owners. The trade, however, still con- 
 tinued. 
 
 Missions in Liberia. — ^There had been one 
 attempt at missionary labor in this region. 
 Mr. John Brereton Cutes, with William Tam- 
 ba and William Davis, two converted natives, 
 the latter a Bassa, rescued from a slave-trader, 
 spent February, March and April, 1819, in a 
 
LIBERIA. 
 
 517 
 
 journey from Sierra Leone to the St. John's 
 river. At Sugury, near Grand Cape Mount, 
 a plot was laid to rob them, which only 
 amounted to stealings a hat, for which they fol- 
 lowed and arrested the wrong man, and had to 
 pay a fine of " three bars," or $2 25. At Little 
 Cape Mount, a plot was laid to rob and mur- 
 der Mr. Cates on his way to Cape Mesurado ; 
 but Tamba understood enough of the language 
 to detect it, and it was abandoned. On an 
 island in the Mesurado river, they were hospi- 
 tably entertained by John S. Mill, a mulatto 
 slave-trader who had been educated in Eng- 
 land. Mill had houses on the Cape, which he 
 sold when the Cape was purchased. August 
 25, 1824, he engaged as Secretary of the Col- 
 ony, under Governor Ashmun. He performed 
 the duties of the office well till September 30, 
 when, tired of civilized life, he returned to his 
 former habits, and nothing has since been 
 heard of him. At some places, especially 
 among the Bassas, the kingi? professed a will- 
 ingness to receive missionaries ; but Mr. Cates 
 thought that only white missionaries would 
 command respect enough to be successful. 
 He suffered much from the fever on his jour- 
 ney, and died in a few months after his return. 
 The first American missionary in Liberia 
 was Lot Cary, who had been a slave, and had 
 purchased himself and children for ^850. In 
 1815, more than a year before the Colonization 
 Society was formed, he took a leading part in 
 forming The African Missionary Society, in 
 Richmond, Ya. In five years that society had 
 raised about $700, which had been expended 
 in aiding missions in Africa. Having read 
 the report of Mills and Burgess, Cary resolved 
 to devote himself to the work. He resigned 
 the pastoral care of a Baptist church of nearly 
 800 members, and accepted that of a mission- 
 ary church, composed of himself and wife, 
 Colin Teage and wife and son Hilary, and 
 Joseph Langford and wife. Cary and Colin 
 Teage were appointed missionaries of the So- 
 ciety, embarked in February, and arrived in 
 Sierra Leone March 8, 1821. Here Cary 
 preached to such as could understand, and 
 started a mission among the Mandingoes. He 
 was one of the first that took possession of 
 Cape Mesurado. The absolute necessity for 
 his services as magistrate, physician and pas- 
 tor among the colonists, detained him from 
 systematic labor among the heathen, till his 
 death, by casualty, November 10, 1828. Yet, 
 before June, 1825, he had established at Mon- 
 rovia, a missionary school for native children ; 
 and about a year before his death, was enabled 
 to establish another near Grand Cape Mount. 
 Here, John Revey, afterwards a distinguished 
 Baptist preacher and Colonial Secretary at 
 Cape Palmas, was for a time the teacher ; and 
 one of his pupils, a few years afterwards, in- 
 vented the syllabic alphabet in which the Vey 
 language has been extensively written and 
 read for nearly 20 years. Cary was allowed. 
 
 before his death, to rejoice over a few conver- 
 sions from heathenism. 
 
 In March, 1825, and in May, 1827, Mr. 
 Ashmun, governor of the colony, issued earn- 
 est appeals for missions to be established in 
 Liberia ; not only for the good of the natives, 
 but as necessary to preserve the colonists them- 
 selves from subsiding into barbarism. His 
 first appeal reached the venerable Blumhardt, 
 of the Missionary Seminary, at Basle, in Swit- 
 zerland ; and, after some correspondence, five 
 young men commenced special preparations 
 for the mission. About the close of this year, 
 the Rev. Calvin Holton was ordained at 
 Beverly, Mass., as a missionary of the Baptist 
 Board to Liberia. He embarked at Boston, 
 January 4, 1826, in the brig Vine, with thirty- 
 four emigrants, mostly from Rhode Island. 
 Before embarkation, eighteen of them were 
 organized into a church, of which Newport 
 Gardner and Salmur Nubia, two of the native 
 Africans, whom Dr. Hopkius had selected in 
 their youth to be educated as missionaries, 
 were chosen deacons. This expedition proved 
 one of the most disastrous in respect to life 
 and health, ever sent to that country. Mr. 
 Holton lived only to July 23, yet he had al- 
 ready done much towards giving system to the 
 means of education, both among colonists and 
 natives. 
 
 Of the Swiss missionaries from the Basle 
 Seminary, Messrs. Handt and Sessing arrived 
 at Monrovia, December 21, 1827, and the 
 others a few months later. Mr. Wulff died 
 December 22, 1828. Sickness compelled Mr. 
 Hegele to leave, and Mr. Sessing Avas obliged 
 to accompany him. They arrived in England, 
 May 7, 1829. Mr. Handt left the service of 
 the Society, and commenced an independent 
 mission near Cape Mount. Only Mr. Kiss- 
 ling remained. Mr. Sessing soon returned 
 with his wife, Mr. Buhrer, Mr. Graner, and 
 Mr. Dietschy who was to reside, as secular 
 superintendent, in a house at Monrovia, be- 
 queathed to the mission by Gov. Ashmun ; 
 while the principal seat of missionary labor 
 was to be at Bassa Cove. They visited the 
 United States on their way, and attended pub- 
 lic meetings and received pecuniary aid in 
 Philadelphia, New York, and Boston. Messrs. 
 Sessing and Buhrer sailed early in Dec, and 
 the others a few weeks later, arriving at Mon- 
 rovia March 4, 1830. There Mr. Graner died, 
 May 12. Mr. Sessing remained for a time, 
 and opened an orphan school; but he soon 
 removed to the older colony of Sierra Leone, 
 Avhere, as he believed, the native mind was 
 better prepared to profit by missionary labors. 
 With his removal, the mission seems to have 
 been closed. Nothwithstanding its short du- 
 ration and many interruptions, its beneficial 
 influence is still felt. It did much to form 
 some of the best minds in Liberia, and some of 
 its native pupils are still useful missionary 
 laborers. 
 
51S 
 
 LICIITENFELS— LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 Of miwions robsequontly established, ac- 
 counts will he foiiiul under the head of Africa, 
 Western.— IIk\'. .Toskpii Tracy. 
 
 LUUITKXFKLS : The first station occu- 
 pioti bv the Moravians in tlic south of Grecn- 
 huxl. *It is situated on an island, about three 
 i.iil..- from the main ocean, and at an equal 
 tii>t;inee from the Danish factory at Fisher's 
 Bay. 
 
 LICHTf:NAU : A station of the United 
 Brethren in Greenland, four miles from Lich- 
 tcnfels. 
 
 LIFU : One of the New Hebrides, where 
 is a station of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 LISIIUAXI : A station of the Wesleyans 
 among the Griquas, Basutos, and Mantatees, 
 South Africa. 
 
 LITITZ: A station of the Moravians in 
 Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 Ll'lTLE BASSA : A village near Edina 
 in Liberia, and a station of the American 
 Baptist Mission among the Bassas on th^west- 
 ern ooust of Africa. 
 
 LIVERPOOL (Australia :) This town was 
 founded about 2G years ago by Gov. Macquar- 
 rie, and for some time its existence was only 
 indicated by a post, with the inscription, " This 
 is Liverpool." It now, however, speaks for it- 
 self; and though not situated in a very fertile 
 country, yet affording a route to the fine agri- 
 cultural and pastoral districts of Camden and 
 Argyle, it is a place of considerable bustle, 
 and daily increasing in importance. It is oc- 
 cupied by the Society for the Propagation of 
 the Gospel. 
 
 LODIANA : The principal station of the 
 Presbyterian Board in Northern India. The 
 city is situated on the river Sutlej, in lat. 30^ 
 55' N. and long. 75^ 48' E. It is 1,170 miles 
 north-west of Calcutta, and 115 south-east from 
 Labor. 
 
 LOMBOE : One of the lesser Sunda Is- 
 lands, in the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY: 
 The formation of the London Missionary Soci- 
 ety was one of the grandest enterprises of the 
 age. It had for its object, not the conversion 
 of the heathen to any particular form of 
 church order or government, but to send the 
 Gospel to the heathen, leaving it to the minds 
 of those whom God might " call into the fel- 
 lowship of his Son among them to assume for 
 themselves such form of church government as 
 to them .shall appear most agreeable to the 
 word of God." 
 
 In the year 1794, the minds of British Chris- 
 tians were turned towards the subject of mis- 
 sions by an Address to Evangelical Dissenters, 
 published in the London Evangelical Maga- 
 zine, which excited considerable interest, and 
 led to a meeting with a view to the formation 
 of a society, which was held on the 4th of 
 November. It consisted of "a small but 
 glowing and harmonious circle of ministers of 
 various connections and denominations." In 
 
 the month of January, 1795, an " Address to 
 Christian Ministers and all other Friends of 
 Christianity, on the subject of Missions to the 
 Heathen," was drawn up and sent as a circular 
 to various persons, in which it was proposed 
 that a meeting should be held in London the 
 ensuing summer for the purpose of organizing 
 a Missionary Society. 
 
 On the loth of January, a number of min- 
 isters convened in the city of London, and 
 " appointed a committee of correspondence to 
 collect the sentiments of their brethren in the 
 country relative to the great plan under con- 
 templation." .A circular letter addressed to 
 ministers was drawn up, acquainting them 
 with the plan and object of the proposed soci- 
 ety, and requesting them to communicate it to 
 their congregations, and to send delegates to 
 the general meeting. The time appointed for 
 the convention was the 2 2d, 23d, and 24th 
 days of September. On the evening preceding 
 the meeting, a consultation " was held by a 
 numerous and highly respectable assembly of 
 ministers friendly to the proposed institution. 
 Several interesting letters from ministers and 
 private Christians approving of the formation 
 of a society were read to the meeting, and an 
 address delivered by the Rev. Dr. Ilaweis of 
 Aldwinkle. The exercises were concluded with 
 prayer by the Rev. Rowland Hill, and the 
 assembly broke up with a feeling of delight 
 which, as has been justly remarked, " the 
 highest gratification of sensuality, avarice, 
 ambition, or party zeal could never have in- 
 spired." The following day the Rev. Dr. 
 Haweis delivered a highly animating discourse 
 from Mark xvi. 15, 16, to a large congregation 
 assembled at Spa-fields chapel. At the close of 
 the public exercises, a large number of minis- 
 ters and laymen formed themselves into a soci- 
 ety. In the evening a sermon was preached 
 by the Rev. G. Burder, and, on the three sub- 
 sequent days, successive meetings were held, in 
 different parts of the city, at which the cause 
 of missions was pleaded with solemnity and 
 earnestness. The effect of these meetings both 
 upon the ministers and people was most happy. 
 " The unanimity and fervor of the assembly in 
 entering upon this greatest of all schemes — 
 the evangelizing of the world — created bursts 
 of joy which nothing could express but tears. 
 The Christian world seemed to awake, as 
 from a dream, wondering that they could have 
 been so long asleep, while the "groans of a 
 dying world were calling upon them for the 
 Gospel of Jesus Christ. Another considera- 
 tion that rendered these seasons inexpressibly 
 delightful was the visible union of Christians 
 of all denominations ; who, for the first time, 
 forgetting their party prejudices and partiali- 
 ties, assembled in the same place, sang the 
 same hymns, united in the same prayers, and 
 felt themselves one in Christ." 
 
 The condition of membership in this Socie- 
 ty is, a subscription of a certain amount to its 
 
LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 619 
 
 funds. Its proceedings are conducted by a 
 Board of Directors, who hold monthly meet- 
 in^^s, in which the treasurer and secretaries, 
 ministers who are annual subscribers, and the 
 officers of auxiliaries are entitled to vote. 
 Committees are allowed, but their acts are not 
 valid till ratified at a monthly meeting ; and 
 the directors are not allowed to make an ex- 
 penditure exceeding £500 without calling a 
 general meeting of the subscribers. 
 
 Soon after the formation of the Missionary 
 Society, its members began to agitate the im- 
 portant question, " In what part of the world 
 they should commence their work of mercy ?" 
 The Rev. Dr. Haweis, who was one of the 
 founders of the Society, and among its most 
 liberal supporters, was requested to prepare a 
 '•_ Memorial " upon the subject, which was de- 
 livered at Surrey Chapel. In the course of 
 his address he says, "The field before us is 
 immense ! O that we could enter at a thou- 
 sand gates ! that every limb were a tongue, 
 and every tongue a trumpet, to spread the 
 joyful sound. Where so considerable a part of 
 the habitable globe on every side calls for our 
 efforts, and like the man of Macedonia cries, 
 ' Come over and help us,' it is not a little diffi- 
 cult to decide at what part to begin." He 
 then drew a comparison between the climates, 
 the governments, the language, and the reli- 
 gions of heathen countries, and concluded that 
 of all the " dark places of the earth " the 
 South Sea Islands presented the fewest diffi- 
 culties, and the fairest prospect of success. 
 
 Such was the interest excited by this dis- 
 course, and by the glowing representations 
 which had been made respecting the newly dis- 
 covered regions in the South Seas, that the 
 directors determined to attempt a mission to 
 these islands, and immediately began to raise 
 subscriptions, to examine and select mission- 
 aries, and to make preparations for the voyage. 
 At length a ship was purchased, and in Au- 
 gust, 1796, twenty-nine missionaries, several of 
 whom had wives and children, embarked at 
 London on board the Duff, commanded by 
 Captain James Wilson, who had retired sev- 
 eral years previous from the East India service, 
 but who now kindly offered to conduct the ad- 
 venturous voyage. On the 23d of September 
 they took their final leave of England. 
 
 The missions of this Society have since been 
 extensively prosecuted in the South Seas, West 
 Indies, South Africa, African Islands, China, and 
 India. The following summary statement will 
 show the extent of its operations : 
 
 Missionaries: in Polynesia, 32 ; China, 
 17 ; India, 47 ; Africa' and Mauritius, 
 43 ; West Indies, 20 ; total, (exclu- 
 sive of wives and children,) . . . 
 
 Native Teachers and Evangelists, . . 
 
 Churches 
 
 170 
 
 700 
 
 150 
 
 , 16,000 
 
 Day Schools 400 
 
 Members, (exclusive of Madagascar) 
 
 Scholars 30,000 
 
 Boarding schools 32 
 
 Pupils 849 
 
 Institutions for training native evan- 
 gelists 8 
 
 Students 150 
 
 Printing-presses 15 
 
 Translations. — The Scriptures have been 
 translated by the society's missionaries into 
 Chinese, Bengalese, Urdu, Teloogoo, Canarese, 
 Tamil, Goojurattee, Malayalim, Buriat, Tahi- 
 tian, Earotongan, Samoan, Sechuana, Mala- 
 gasy, 14 languages and dialects. The receipts 
 of the society for the year 1853, were £71,821 
 Is. 6d., of which £12,933 7s. 9d. were contrib- 
 uted at the missionary stations. The following 
 table exhibits the receipts of the society, for 
 periods of four years each, since 1815, (which 
 is the first year in which they published a 
 financial report, when the society possessed 
 funds to the amount of £39,790,) with the aver- 
 age annual receipts in each of these periods. 
 
 
 Amount 
 
 Average 
 
 Teriods. 
 
 for the Period. 
 
 Annual Receipts. 
 
 1815 to 1818 
 
 £80,109 
 
 £20,027 
 
 1819 " 1822 
 
 95,549 
 
 23,887 
 
 1823 " 1826 
 
 133,431 
 
 33,357 
 
 1827 " 1830 
 
 168,057 
 
 42,014 
 
 1831 " 1834 
 
 155.976 
 
 38,994 
 
 1835 
 
 57,895 
 
 67.895 
 
 1836 " 1839 
 
 300,191 
 
 75,047 
 
 1840 " 1843 
 
 377,467 
 
 94,366 
 
 1844 " 1847 
 
 344,013 
 
 86,003 
 
 1848 " 1851 
 
 292,422 
 
 73,105 
 
 1852 " 1853 
 
 144,599 
 
 72,299 
 
 
 £2,149,707 
 
 From this statement, it appears that the 
 aggregate of the Society's receipts, from dona- 
 tions and legacies, for 38 years, has been 
 £2,149,707 ; and that, during this period, the 
 contributions have been steadily rising in 
 amount, the average of annual receipts rising 
 from £20,000 to £94,000, with a slight de- 
 crease in the three last periods. This may be 
 taken as a fair index of the growth of the 
 missionary spirit with the large class of Chris- 
 tians who make this society tlie organ of their 
 missionary operations. But, in addition to- 
 the growth of the missionary spirit at home, 
 a fact is here developed of great importance 
 to all future missionary efforts, that nearly one- 
 fifth of the contributions of this society, the: 
 last year, came from its own missions. Here: 
 is a source of supply which is not to be over- 
 looked. It shows that, while, up to a certaia 
 point, the demands on the churches at home 
 must increase with the success of the missions^, 
 beyond that point they will diminish, by means, 
 of the supply created by success. 
 
 LONG KLOOF (LONG V" ALLEY) : A 
 station of the London Missionary Society in, 
 South Africa, commenced in 1840. This val 
 ley extends more than 100 miles, between a. 
 
520 
 
 LONSDALE— MADAGASCA R. 
 
 nmg^ of monntains on one sido and of high 
 
 gr-A ■ ■'■ II the other. It is celebrated for 
 It'^ ising from the number of springs 
 
 fout.u . ». i\ -Wierc to irrigate the soil. 
 
 LONSlKVLE: A station of the Ijondon 
 Missionary Society in Berbice. 
 
 LOO-Cl 1 00 : (See Lew-Chew.) 
 
 LOVKDALE: A station of the Free 
 Church of Scotland in South Africa, 60 miles 
 from Graham's Town. 
 
 LUCCA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 donary Society in Jamaica, \V. I. 
 
 LUSIGNAN : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society in Demarara, W. I. 
 
 MACAO : A Portuguese settlement in 
 China, situated on a small peninsula at the 
 south-eastern extremity of the large island of 
 Hingshan, between 60 and 70 miles south-east 
 of Canton. (See China.) 
 
 MACHIAN : One of the Molucca Islands 
 in the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 MADAGASCAR : A large island on the 
 eastern coast of Africa, containing an area 
 somewhat larger than Great Britain and Ire- 
 land. Its mineral productions are silver, iron, 
 slate, limestone, and coal. It produces, also, 
 many valuable articles of commerce, as sugar, 
 cotton, hemp, silk, indigo, tobacco, gum elas- 
 tic, copal, ebony, wax, &c. The island pos- 
 sesses many fine ports, from which considerable 
 trade is carried on with Mauritius and Bour- 
 bon, the Arabs from Muscat, and the Ameri- 
 cans. 
 
 ^ Populatim. — The great mass of the popula- 
 tion of Madagascar are of the Malay race ; 
 but with some mixture of negroes and Kaf- 
 fres. They are all of dark complexion, but 
 some more swarthy than others. The lan- 
 guage, which is nearly the same throughout 
 the island, is of Malay origin. The inhabit- 
 tants are industrious, intelligent, and semi-civ- 
 ilized. 
 
 Crovernment. — Madagascar does not appear 
 ever to have formed one kingdom, but to have 
 been occupied by independent tribes, to the 
 number of 20 or 30. The most powerful State 
 is the kingdom of Madagascar, situated about 
 200 miles from the eastern coast, in the cen- 
 tral part of the island, called the Hova coun- 
 try. The Hova tribe had risen from a very 
 limited possession of influence and power to 
 extensive authority under Andrianimpoinerina, 
 who had formed the ambitious project of sub- 
 jugating the whole country to his control. 
 He was succeeded by Radama, in the begin- 
 ning of this century, who inherited his father's 
 ambition, and succeeded in enlarging the 
 boundaries of his kingdom. He encourao-ed 
 the labors of the missionaries, and sought°to 
 civilize his subjects by establishing schools, 
 and sending some of them to Mauritius and 
 Europe ; in which he was favored with the 
 friendship and aid of Sir Robert Farquhar, 
 the Governor of Mauritius. He established an 
 .army, provided with fire-arms and horses, and 
 
 organized on the European system. But, in 
 1827, he visited the eastern coast of the 
 island, where he was feasted, and indulged in 
 habits of intemperance and irregularity, which 
 brought on him a fatal disease that terminated 
 his life the following year. The legitimate 
 heir to the throne was his sister's son, Rako- 
 tobe, a young man in the mission school, who 
 gave some hopeful indications of piety. But 
 Ranavalona, one of the wives of Radama, a 
 woman combining in herself the worst traits 
 of character of Jezebel, Athaliah, and bloody 
 Queen Mary, on hearing of the king's death, 
 sent for two military officers from her native 
 village, and promised, if they would devote 
 themselves to her interest, and secure to her 
 the throne, she would advance them to the 
 highest rank, and reward them with riches, 
 and exempt them from capital punishment 
 whatever crime they might commit. Having 
 first secured the favor of the gods by collusion 
 with the diviners, she succeeded in destroying 
 four officers of the late king, who declared that 
 he had named Rakotobe and his own daughter, 
 Raketaka, to succeed him. She soon after 
 took measures to destroy both these, their 
 mother, and a number of other relatives of 
 Radama, some of whom were starved to death, 
 and others openly speared. She afterwards 
 perfidiously murdered the principal actor in 
 her elevation to the throne, the reputed father 
 of her only son, to whom she had made such 
 promises before her accession. 
 
 Notwithstanding the immoral and bloody 
 character of this woman, she is as religious in 
 her way as Queen Mary, as weak and devoted 
 to her superstitions as her Roman Catholic 
 prototype. She has attempted to carry out 
 the design of her predecessor, in annexing the 
 whole island to her dominion, but in such a 
 way as tends rapidly to the depopulation of the 
 whole island. For years she has maintained a 
 standing army of from 20,000 to 30,000, and 
 these have been in the habit of going out on 
 predatory excursions, several thousands at a 
 time, desolating the villages, treacherously de- 
 stroying all the men after they have surren- 
 dered, and carrying captive the women and 
 children, treating them with the greatest cru- 
 elty, and selling them into slavery ; and in 
 these expeditions multitudes of the soldiers 
 perish every year. The people generally are 
 treated as the servants, not subjects of the gov- 
 ernment. The soldiers are compelled to serve, 
 and the bourgeois to work for the government 
 without pay, thus reducing themselves and 
 their families to starvation. So much of their 
 time is employed in the service of the Queen, 
 that they are obliged to neglect the cultivation 
 of the land, and hence they have suffered se- 
 verely by famine. Many have been unable, 
 for several months of the year, to obtain more 
 than one meal a day. And, what renders the 
 oppression the more infamous is, that they are 
 often employed, not in the necessary service of 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 521 
 
 the government, but in collecting fighting 
 bulls and dancing idiots, for the amusement of 
 this modern Jezebel. In consequence of this 
 oppression, hundreds and thousands of the peo- 
 ple have deserted the villages, and fled to the 
 forests ; and robbers and highwaymen have 
 fearfully increased. 
 
 Religion and Morals. — The natives of Ma- 
 dagascar have no just ideas of God. The 
 name which they give the Supreme Being lite- 
 rally signifies " Fragrant Priupe." They have 
 some idea of such a Being, but what pre- 
 cise notion is affixed to it, it is extremely diffi- 
 cult to ascertain. Their ideas of a future 
 state, and indeed their whole religious system 
 is indefinite, discordant, and puerile. It is a 
 compound of heterogeneous elements, borrow- 
 ed, in part, from the superstitious fears and 
 practices of Africa, the opinions of the ancient 
 Egyptians, and the prevalent idolatrous sys- 
 tems of India, blended with the usages of the 
 Malayan Archipelago. There are no public 
 temples in honor of any divinity, nor any 
 order of men exclusively devoted to the priest- 
 hood, but the keeper of the idols receives the 
 ofierings of the people, presents their requests, 
 and pretends to give the response of the god. 
 They worship also at the grave or tomb of 
 their ancestors. Some Jewish or Mohamme- 
 dan customs prevail, such as circumcision, the 
 division of time into weeks of seven days, ab- 
 stinence from swine's flesh, &c. Marriage is 
 general, but polygamy prevails, and conjugal 
 fidelity scarcely exists. 
 
 The Malagasy, though not naturally savage 
 and inhuman, have become dreadfully familiar 
 with blood, under the present reign. False- 
 hood, chicanery, avarice, deceit and sensuality 
 extensively prevail. But they have some re- 
 deeming qualities. Parents are devoted to 
 their offspring, and children are respectful to 
 their parents. There is much genuine hospi- 
 tality in the country, and warm and steady 
 friendships exist. They are prepared for im- 
 provement and for rapid advancement, under 
 favorable circumstances. 
 
 MISSION. 
 
 London Missionary Society. — This Society, 
 from the time of its formation, had an eye upon 
 Madagascar as a missionary field; and, in 
 1818, two married missionaries, Messrs. Jones 
 and Bevan, were sent out ; and having left their 
 families at Mauritius, they proceeded to Mad- 
 agascar, and found every encouragement for 
 commencing a mission. They returned to 
 Mauritius for their families, and again, early 
 in 1819, reached the coast of Madagascar. 
 But in a very short time Mr. and Mrs. Bevan 
 and Mrs. Jones, with their children, were re- 
 moved by death, and Mr. Jones was so disabled 
 by serious illness, as to be obliged to return to 
 Mauritius. They had landed on the coast dur- 
 ing the rainy season, the most sultry and un- 
 healthy portion of the year. 
 
 In 1820, the mission was recommenced by 
 Rev. D. Jones, at Tananarivo, the capital, in 
 the district of Ankova. This was in the in- 
 terior of the island, the most salubrious and 
 populous part of the country ; and the mission 
 was commenced with the express sanction of 
 Radama, the chief, or king as he styled himself. 
 From that time the mission proceeded without 
 interruption for fifteen years. In its early 
 stages it had to encounter the jealousy of the 
 natives, whose ideas of Europeans were associ- 
 ated with the slave trade ; and many of the 
 natives whose interests were involved in the 
 traffic opposed the proceedings of the king,*in 
 forming a treaty with Great Britain for its 
 suppression, and in encouraging the residence 
 of Europeans among them. And some of the 
 people imagined that the schools were nurseries 
 for making their children more valuable when 
 sold into slavery ; and some of them fancied 
 that their offspring were purchased by white 
 men as articles of food ! 
 
 For a considerable time, the efforts of the 
 missionaries were directed almost exclusively 
 to the instruction of the children in schools, 
 under the sanction of government. But two 
 facts in the history of this mission, show that 
 this was a mistaken policy : " One is, that the 
 majority of natives converted to a profession 
 of the Gospel, so as to afford credible evidence 
 of piety, consists of adults not trained in the mis- 
 sion schools, but impressed by the preaching of 
 the Gospel, or by conversation with those who 
 had received it. The other is, that most of 
 those who embraced the truth, voluntarily and 
 immediately commenced learning to read, how- 
 ever much engaged in secular business, or ad- 
 vanced in life." 
 
 During the first fifteen years of this mission, 
 the whole Bible was translated, corrected, and 
 printed in the native language, at the capital, 
 aided by the British and Foreign Bible Soci- 
 ety ; 20,000 tracts and 1000 copies of Russell's 
 Catechism were also printed. About 100 
 schools had been established, with 4000 schol- 
 ars ; and during that period 10,000 to 15,000 
 had received the benefit of instruction in these 
 schools. Two printing-presses were established 
 at the capital, by the London Missionary So- 
 ciety. A Malagasy and English dictionary 
 was published in two volumes. Two large 
 congregations were formed at the capital, and 
 nearly 200 persons applied for admission to the 
 church. Adult Bible classes were formed for 
 the regular and systematic study of the Bible. 
 Various preaching stations were visited every 
 Sabbath ; and the minds of multitudes had 
 become enlightened in regard to the truths of 
 Christianity, and had renounced the supersti- 
 tious customs of the country. Meetings for 
 prayer were held, convened and conducted by 
 the natives themselves. At a village about 
 60 miles from the capital, a small chapel had 
 been erected by the natives, chiefly through 
 the influence and exertions of a pious woman ; 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 and pablic worship, cliiefly for reading the 
 Scriptures and prayer, was held iu many dis- 
 tant parte of the country, conducted by those 
 who were formerly teachers or scholars in the 
 mittiou schools. 
 
 In addition to the missionaries a number of 
 artisans wore sent to Madagascar, in fulfilment 
 of the treaty between lladama and the British 
 Government, by whoso instruction habits of 
 thought, attention, industry, and application, 
 wore generated, a spirit of inquiry fostered, and 
 a general advancement in civilization secured. 
 Besides these influences much good was accom- 
 plished by the religious exertions of these pious 
 missionary artisans, who embraced suitable op- 
 portunities for communicating religious as well 
 as secular knowledge. The female members 
 of the mission also accomplished much good, 
 by instructing the native women. 
 
 Numerous causes were operating to produce 
 an extensive change iu the minds, manners, 
 habits, and institutions of the people ; but in 
 tliat change, the Madagascar government did 
 not sympathize. They looked upon it from 
 the beginning with a jealous eye ; and, fearing 
 its progress, they determined to crush it. It 
 is believed that this feeling was indulged by 
 Radama himself. His successor, the queen, 
 tliough possessing a masculine will, has never 
 shown anj' indication of superior intelligence. 
 She is slightly acquainted with the elements 
 of reading and writing. But she never availed 
 herself of the opportunity of becoming familiar 
 with the instructions of European teachers. 
 She has always been strongly attached to the 
 superstitions of the country, and cherished a 
 veneration for the national gods. Her acces- 
 sion to the throne was publicly attributed to 
 the gods, and she necessarily felt bound to sus- 
 tain their authority. One of the hereditary 
 guardians of the principal idol, Rainiharo, was 
 appointed, as it was pretended, by the com- 
 mand of the idol, to remain with the queen. 
 Two parties were formed at court; the idol 
 party, of whom this man was the head, and 
 the party who sought to extend education, and 
 to carry out and enlarge the measures of Rad- 
 ama, which consisted of Andriamihiaja and 
 his friends. But, in about two years after the 
 accession of the queen, the idol party prevailed, 
 and Andriamihiaja, as already stated, was mur- 
 dered. 
 
 ^ The idolatrous party represented the mis- 
 sionaries and teachers as having some political 
 designs, and so wrought upon the jealousies 
 and fears of the queen to prejudice her against 
 them. The first indication of this was mani- 
 fested in an abrupt order for Rev. D. Griffiths 
 to leave the country, on the ground that the 
 period of five years, to which his permission to 
 remain extended, had expired. Similar mea- 
 sures were pursued with regard to other mis- 
 sionaries. Towards the close of 1831, the per- 
 mission which had previously been given for 
 the administration of baptism and the Lord's 
 
 Supper was recalled. The next year, slaves 
 were prohibited learning to read and write. 
 This was believed to have been done because 
 many free people were in the habit of purchas- 
 ing slave children, to place in the schools in- 
 stead of their own, certain towns and villages 
 being required to furnish a given number of 
 children for the schools ; and parents were un- 
 willing to place their children where they 
 might so soon be drawn off to the army and 
 perish. 
 
 In the fall of 1834, a circumstance trans- 
 spired, which tended still further to prejudice 
 the mind of the queen against Christianity, 
 and to hasten the crisis. A middle-aged man, 
 a keeper of an idol, had experienced iu 1 832 a 
 succession of calamities, which rendered him 
 melancholy ; and meeting with a native Chris- 
 tian, who conversed with him on the subject 
 of religion, a deep impression was made on his 
 mind ; and, disregarding the advice of the 
 native Christian to seek further instruction, he 
 immediately set about preaching to the inhab- 
 itants of his native village, telling them of the 
 day of judgment, the resurrection, and of the 
 happy time when all men would receive Chris- 
 tianity, and live in peace with one another. 
 He imagined himself raised up for a reformer, 
 and professed to receive immediate revelation 
 from God ; and very soon he began to mix the 
 worship of his old idol with that of the true 
 God, probably with the hope of conciliating 
 the queen. In the course of two years, he had 
 gained 200 followers. In 1834, this man sent 
 to the queen that he had an important mes- 
 sage for her. His message was received by 
 Rainiharo, the principal officer, who was in- 
 formed that this man's followers were very 
 numerous. This roused the jealousy of the 
 government, and the whole party was sum- 
 moned to the capital. When they arrived, 
 they stated that they had a message from God 
 to the queen, to the effect that she was to be 
 the sovereign of all the world ; that the dead 
 would rise, and the living never die ; that all 
 would then live peaceably and happily, for 
 there would be an end put to the ordeal of 
 tangena, divination, murder, wars, and conten- 
 tion ; and they offered to forfeit their heads, if 
 these things were false, " for," said they, " God 
 has told us these things, and God cannot lie." 
 After an examination of two or three days, the 
 man, with three of his principal followers, was 
 condemned to death, and led to the north end 
 of the town, and put head downwards in a 
 rice-pit, and boiling water poured on them ; 
 after which, the pit was closed upon them, and 
 filled up with earth. A number more of the 
 party were cruelly put to death, and the rest 
 were sold into slavery and their property con- 
 fiscated ; which yielded a profit of several 
 thousand dollars to the queen, officers, and 
 judges, thus giving them a taste for plunder. 
 The queen and her advisers being ignorant of 
 the principles of Christianity, it was natural 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 523 
 
 that they should identify this fanatical sect 
 with the Christians ; and hence the occurrence 
 tended greatly to their prejudice. 
 
 Prejudice was further excited by the indis- 
 cretion of some young converts, who under- 
 took to be teachers of others before they had 
 themselves become fully acquainted with the 
 principles of Christianity. The statements 
 made by native converts were also misunder- 
 stood and misrepresented. In the beginning 
 of 1835, a native, addressing a small congre- 
 gation at the capital, was overheard to say 
 that ere long God would punish all the work- 
 ers of iniquity, and reward those who had 
 loved and served him. The expressions were 
 reported to the queen, and she ordered spies 
 to be sent next time to bring a fuller report. 
 The subject was the resurrection, and the 
 speaker said, " All must rise, and God alone 
 will be the judge. Every one in this country 
 will be raised and judged then." It was re- 
 ported to the queen that he had said the in- 
 habitants of her country alone would be judged 
 by God in that day. " It is false !" cried the 
 queen. " Other sovereigns are allowed to judge 
 their people as they please, and am I alone to 
 be prohibited ? If so, God indeed is partial. 
 Besides, how should they know that God will 
 raise the dead ?" After this, a young man, a 
 native convert, who held a meeting at some 
 distance from the capital, had given offence to 
 the people, by working on Saturday, their 
 sacred day, and speaking disrespectfully of 
 their idol. In revenge, they accused him to 
 the queen ; but instead of punishing him, she 
 ordered the ordeal of tangeua to be adminis- 
 tered, by which he was declared innocent. 
 Having retired to a private village a few days, 
 according to the usual custom, he came up to 
 town in a public procession, which, being 
 joined by a number of the native Christians, 
 dressed in white robes, was much larger than 
 on ordinary occasions. The queen happened 
 to see the procession, and inquired what it 
 meant. She was informed that it was the 
 young man's procession whom she had ordered 
 to pass the ordeal, and that the persons dressed 
 in white were native Christians. " You would 
 be surprised," they added, " at the love of these 
 
 Eeople for one another ; when any one of them 
 appens to be in distress, they all feel dis- 
 tressed, and when any one is happy, they are 
 all happy ; when any are poor or destitute, 
 they form a society to assist them ;" meaning 
 that they collect money of one another to 
 afford relief. " I am indeed surprised," replied 
 the queen, " to see such things in my country. 
 Was it not I who ordered him to take the 
 ordeal, and why do they now make such an 
 exhibition, as if they had overcome an enemy ? 
 All this is intended for me, I suppose." 
 
 These circumstances created so much pre- 
 judice in the mind of the queen, as to prepare 
 her to receive any charges that might be 
 brought against the whole body of the Chris- 
 
 tians. The officer who had accused this young 
 man in the first instance, felt piqued at his 
 acquittal, and hearing that the queen was dis- 
 pleased with the procession, determined to 
 bring an accusation against the whole body of 
 the Christians. And, in order to get some- 
 thing upon which to found an accusation, he 
 went to one of their meetings, where he heard 
 a slave addressing the congregation, from 
 Josh. 34 : 14, 15, exhorting them to forsake 
 the gods which their fathers had served, and to 
 serve Jehovah and Jesus Christ. He then 
 represented to the queen that there were in 
 and around the capital certain people who 
 were seeking to change the customs of the 
 country, who despised the idols, and divina- 
 tions, and all the customs of their forefathers ; 
 entering into a league with the English, hold- 
 ing meetings in the night, and urging all pre- 
 sent to serve Jehovah and Jesus Christ ; and 
 he supposed that Jehovah was the first king 
 of England, and Jesus Christ the second, and 
 that the idols they were urged to forsake were 
 the queen and her successors. " Besides," said 
 he, " these meetings are carried on by slaves. 
 We cannot see the end of these things ; but 
 we fear that these people, who have become so 
 friendly with the English, will attempt to 
 transfer the kingdom of the queen to them." 
 Such a communication was well calculated to 
 arouse the suspicious temper of the queen ; 
 and she burst into tears, and then swore that 
 she would put a stop to these things, and that 
 with the shedding of blood. And soon after- 
 wards she ordered the judges to convene the 
 people at the capital, on Sunday, March 1. 
 The previous Sabbath she had ordered the 
 sewing women, (the women whom the female 
 missionaries had taught to sew,) to meet in the 
 court yard to sew for her. Passing by them, 
 she said, with a contemptuous sneer, " You had 
 better go and ask permission of the Europeans 
 to come and sew for me on the Sabbath. You 
 observe the day like the English ; I do not. 
 You had better go and ask their permission." 
 In the evening of the same day, as she was re- 
 turning home from a bull-fight, passing the 
 chapel and hearing the singing, she said, 
 " These people will not leave off till some of 
 their heads are taken from their shoulders." 
 The next Tuesday, orders were given to pro- 
 cure a list of all the houses where prayer-meet- 
 ings were held, and the names of all the bap- 
 tized persons. The queen was astonished at 
 their numbers, and swore that she would put 
 to death the owners of the houses. She ap- 
 peared now exceedingly violent against the 
 Christians. One of her officers, named Eain- 
 ingatabe, rose and said that though she might 
 think proper to destroy him, he could not re- 
 frain from speaking his mind ; and he entreated 
 her to consider well what she proposed to do 
 to these people ; for he had for years had op- 
 portunity to observe their conduct, and he as- 
 sured her that he had seen none more upright, 
 
594 
 
 MADAGASCAR. 
 
 diligent, fiuthfnl and trustworthy. Besides 
 tliis, he said they were the most intelligent 
 people in the country ; and if she put one of 
 thfin to di-ath she would bo the loser, and 
 would l>o sorrv for it. After a long pause, the 
 queen saitl, "I thank you for your advice. I 
 lave indeed a father and a mother in vou : 
 vou do not conceal from me what you think 
 will be of service to the kingdom. We shall 
 coasidcr well what to do with them." Andria- 
 nisa then rose up and said he very highly ap- 
 proved of the advice that had been given, and 
 added that almost all the new things that had 
 been introduced for the good of the country, 
 had bwn introduced by the English ; and that 
 if any who had been placed under the instruc- 
 tion of the Europeans should be put to death, 
 it would be a reproach to the queen's country. 
 The queen had also summoned some of the 
 head people from other districts, to give their 
 opinion as to putting to death one or two of 
 the most active Christians in each district. 
 They did not hesitate to express their disap- 
 probation of such a measure. 
 
 On Thursday, the missionaries received a 
 letter from the queen, forbidding them to 
 teach Christianity to the natives, but allowing 
 them to teach the arts and sciences. To this 
 they replied, remonstrating against the order, 
 but without effect. The rest of the week was 
 a time of great excitement among all parties. 
 At length the day of the dreaded assembly 
 came, and the people flocked in from all quar- 
 ters, amid the parade of troops and the roar 
 of artillery. After the meeting had been 
 opened with pompous addi esses, the queen 
 sent a message, couched in the style of oriental 
 bombast, in which she called on all who had 
 been baptized, or who had attended places of 
 Christian worship, to come and accuse them- 
 selves, threatening with death all who re- 
 fused, and forbidding the performance of 
 Christian worship, or changing the customs of 
 the country. 
 
 ^ Many of those who had attended on Chris- 
 tian worship, and among others, the twelve 
 principal teachers, came forward, and accused 
 themselves, and made their submission ; but 
 others remained faithful, and boldly told the 
 persons appointed to receive confessions, " We 
 aid no evil, and intended none to the queen or 
 her kingdom, in our prayers and our observ- 
 ance of the Sabbath. We prayed to the 
 Ood of Heaven to prosper her reign." Being 
 asked how many times they had prayed and 
 worshiped God, they said they could not tell. 
 '« We always," said they, " prayed before going 
 to our work in the morning, and before going 
 to sleep in the evening, also before and after 
 eating, and often at other moments in the 
 course of the day." A man of considerable 
 influence froni a distant district, being asked 
 how many times he had prayed, said he could 
 not tell, but that for the last three or four 
 years he had not spent a single day without 
 
 -offering prayer several times a day, but that 
 he asked for nothing injurious to any one. 
 The judges asked him to givo them a specimen 
 of his prayer, which he did in the presence of 
 the multitude. He said he confessed his sins 
 before God, implored his forgiveness, and 
 asked for help to enable him to live without 
 sinning, that he might be holy and prepared 
 for heaven. The same blessings he asked for 
 his family and friends, for the queen, and for 
 all her subjects. " I asked all these things," 
 said he, " in the name of Jesus Christ, for we 
 sinners can receive nothing from God but 
 through his Son Jesus Christ, who died for 
 sinners." The judges acknowledged that his 
 prayers were good, but as the queen did not 
 approve of such things, they ought not to be 
 done in her country. 
 
 During this time of trial a small company 
 of the converts met for prayer at midnight, 
 every night in the week, and many of them 
 said they had never before enjoyed so much in 
 drawing near to God. Among these was an 
 ofiBcer of high rank, who had never before de- 
 clared himself as a Christian. When asked 
 by a friend why he joined the Christians at 
 this time, he replied that he perceived so much 
 injustice in the proceedings of the government, 
 that he determined to join the injured party, 
 and that after having united with them in 
 these meetings, he had felt so much pleasure 
 in their company that he resolved to take 
 their God as his God, and their people as his 
 people. And as to accusing himself, he had 
 determined not to do it until convinced that 
 he had done wrong in attending the meetings. 
 His wife has since become a convert, and the 
 refugees who fled to England were greatly in- 
 debted to him and his wife for having conceal- 
 ed them for some time in his house. 
 
 During the following week many reports 
 were circulated, and apprehensions entertained 
 that some would be put to death. It was ex- 
 pected that the final result would be announced 
 on the expiration of the week, but it was the 
 policy of the government to keep the people in 
 suspense, that they might fear the worst. The 
 people were summoned again on the 9th, and 
 the queen sent another bombastic and threat- 
 ening communication, in which she reduced 
 the rank of those officers of the government 
 who had been at the meetings, which punish- 
 ment was received by them with the most de- 
 grading servility. The number thus reduced 
 was not less than 400. 
 
 In the course of the second week in March, 
 orders were issued that all persons who had 
 received any books from the Europeans should 
 deliver them up, and not conceal even a leaf, 
 on pain of death ; and orders were sent to all 
 the outposts to collect in the books, some of 
 which had been carried 300 miles from the ca- 
 pital. The books were delivered up by the 
 Christians, with great grief, but it is supposed 
 that many were retained and concealed. After 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 525 
 
 the books -vrere all collected, the queen ordered 
 four officers to examine them, and ascertain if 
 any of them were free from obnoxious expres- 
 sions. The twelve senior teachers were called 
 )n to read them to the officers. As the Bible 
 ivas the largest book, it was taken first. They 
 'ound no fault with the first verse ; but as the 
 word darkness occurred in the second, they 
 said that the queen did not like darkness, and 
 therefore the book was condemned. The hymn 
 book was taken next, and that was condemned, 
 because the word Jehovah was found in it. 
 rhen several tracts and catechisms were ex- 
 amined, but in all these the words " Jesus 
 Christ," « Jehovah," <' darkness," " hell," " Sa- 
 tan," or "resurrection" occurred, and they 
 tvere condemned. After the verdict had been 
 pronounced upon all that had been printed in 
 the Malagasy language, the examination of 
 books in other languages commenced. A He- 
 brew Bible was first taken, of which the read- 
 er knew about as little as the hearers, but he 
 pretended to read it off with fluency ; yet as it 
 (vas incomprehensible to the officers they pro- 
 nounced against it. The English and French 
 books, with a few Latin and Greek, shared 
 the same fate. These were afterwards sent 
 back to the missionaries as European property, 
 but while in the hands of the government, 
 they were kept in an old unoccupied building, 
 where the rats were so plenty that it was 
 feared the books would be devoured by them ; 
 and the soldiers were directed to provide cats, 
 and keep them on the spot, and a weekly al- 
 lowance was made from the royal treasury to 
 provide meat for the canine guards. 
 
 The missionaries continued to impart instruc- 
 tion and comfort to the native Christians, up 
 to the time of their departure, in 1836. 
 The number of converts had gradually in- 
 creased, notwithstanding the difficulties under 
 which they labored, and the dangers to which 
 they were exposed. The Lord's Supper was 
 administered in private, and several were bap- 
 tized. They increased in spiritual knowledge, 
 even more than they had done before the per- 
 secution arose. A strong bond of union was 
 formed among them, which continues to the 
 present day. Before the missionaries left, they 
 supplied each one with a copy of the Bible, 
 some of whom walked more than a hundred 
 miles to obtain it. A sick man, who had not 
 been able to leave his house for five months, 
 traveled sixty miles, and when he received the 
 Bible, he pressed it to his bosom, saying, 
 " This contains the words of eternal life ; it is 
 my life, and I will take as much care of it as 
 of my own life." He has since been compelled 
 to leave his home, and take refuge in the for- 
 ests, for his adherence to the faith. Before the 
 departure of the missionaries, they translated 
 the Pilgrim's Progress into Malagasy; and 
 eight copies were written out by the native 
 Christians, and left in their hands ; and it has 
 proved a great comfort and blessing to them. 
 
 The London Tract Society afterwards printed 
 1000 copies, which were sent to them. 
 
 The missionaries remained till they had 
 completed the translation and printing of the 
 whole Bible, when they came to the conclusion 
 to leave, as they were forbidden to impart re- 
 ligious instruction, and their presence only 
 excited the jealousy of the queen, and increas- 
 ed the rigors of the persecution. Messrs. 
 Freeman, Cameron, Chick, and Kitching left 
 Madagascar in June, 1835 ; and Messrs. Johns 
 and Baker remained another year, to see if 
 any changes were likely to take place favora- 
 ble to the prosecution of the mission. That 
 was a year of suspense, anxiety, and pain to 
 them. The servants of the missionaries who 
 left were subjected to the murderous ordeal of 
 tangena, and two of them died. The infant 
 of another was suffocated the day after its 
 birth, by order of the queen, because it was 
 born on a " fatal day." The oppressions of 
 the government became more and more cruel. 
 The Sabbath was purposely desecrated by 
 public works and amusements. Yice, disease, 
 and poverty increased at a fearful rate. Grad- 
 ually the faithful became known to the mis- 
 sionaries and to each other. Sometimes a 
 recognition took place by a reference to Jer. 
 38 : 15, which was answered by the following 
 verse. After some time the native Christians 
 began to hold secret meetings at their own 
 houses, at the houses of the missionaries, and 
 on the summits of solitary mountains. At 
 length, after leaving 70 complete Bibles, and 
 several boxes of psalters, Testaments, spelling 
 and hymn books, catechisms and tracts, chiefly 
 buried underground, Messrs. Johns and Baker, 
 sorrowfully and in great depression of mind, 
 left Madagascar, and arrived at Mauritius in 
 September, 1836. 
 
 Just before they set out from the capital, the 
 storm burst out afresh, and its earliest object * 
 was Rafaravavy. She had been a convert be- 
 fore the suppression of Christianity. Before 
 her conversion, she had been so devoted to 
 idolatry that, when there was not a meal of 
 rice in the house, the money required to pur- 
 chase it was paid to the support of idol wor- 
 ship. But when she embraced Christianity, 
 she became one of the most zealous converts. 
 She took one of the largest houses in the cap- 
 ital, for the purpose of maintaining a prayer- 
 meeting ; and she did much to secure the 
 attendance of others on the means of grace. 
 A short tin?e before the missionaries left, she 
 was accused by three of her servants of read- 
 ing the Bible and praying on the Sabbath, 
 with nine of her companions ; and the charge 
 was received, though it was contrary to law to 
 receive an accusation from slaves against their 
 masters. As they did not return home, her 
 father, who was a heathen, went after them 
 and put them in irons. But they were released 
 by the interference of Eafaravavy, by whom 
 they were addressed with so much earnestness 
 
5S6 
 
 MADAGASCAR. 
 
 that ahe found reason to hope they had become 
 new creatures The nuke informed her father 
 of the nccustttion, and advised him to persuade 
 hiT to accuse lierself, and make known her 
 companions. She readily acknowledged to 
 him that she prayed, but steadily refused to 
 betray her associates. The queen, on hearing 
 of the case, was in a great rage, and gave 
 orders to put her to death immediately ; but, 
 OS lur father had rendered great service to the 
 government, some influential persons at court 
 persuadetl her to a more lenient course. 
 
 While these things were in progress, Rafar- 
 ava^7 contrived to reach Mr. Johns's house just 
 before he left. It was about 3 o'clock in the 
 morning. She was fully expecting to be put 
 to death. The interview was afl'ecting on 
 both sides. Mrs. Johns remarks, " I shall 
 never forget the serenity and composure she 
 displaved while she related to me the consola- 
 tion she enjoyed in pleading the promises, and 
 in drawing near to God in prayer." The 
 queen decided to spare her life ; but fined her 
 to the amount of half her property, and half 
 her own value, if sold into slavery. Soon 
 after, she found that she was very narrowly 
 watclied by her father and friends ; and she 
 determined to sell her house in the capital, and 
 purdiase one in a retired spot in the suburbs. 
 The little band continued to meet, sometimes at 
 her house, sometimes at the house of one of 
 her friends, and sometimes on a mountain. 
 
 The number of those confiding in each 
 other as Christians now rapidly increased ; 
 and many coming from Vonizongo made 
 Rafaravavy's house their home while at the 
 capital. In the early part of 1837, Mr. Johns 
 wrote from Mauritius to some of the Christians 
 at the capital, intimating his intention of vis- 
 iting Tamatave in the course of the season. 
 Rasomaka (Joseph) and others were deputed 
 to meet him. They left their friends in peace 
 and tranquillity. They carried with them a 
 number of letters from the native Christians. 
 The following extract from a joint letter of 
 the whole band will show the spirit that ani- 
 mated them : 
 
 " When we consider our guilt and pollution, 
 and the evil that dwells in our hearts, then 
 we soon faint ; but when we remember and 
 reflect upon the mercy of God and the redemp- 
 tion there is in Jesus, and when we call to 
 mind the promises, then our hearts take confi- 
 dence, and we believe that Jesus can cleanse 
 us and bring us to heaven ; and when we meet 
 there, we will tell you all that has befallen us 
 by the way while yet here on earth. By the 
 strength of God we shall go forward, and not 
 fear what may befall us ; but we will go in 
 the power of the Lord, and if accused by the 
 people, we will still go straight forward, for we 
 know that if we deny him before men, Jesus 
 will deny us before his Father. All the Chris- 
 tians are teaching others to read. There are 
 ten with one friend, six with another, four with 
 
 another, and so the number is quietly aug- 
 menting. The Bibles that were left in our 
 possession have all been circulated, and many 
 are wishing to obtain complete copies." 
 
 Some time after the departure of those who 
 had been deputed to meet Mr. Johns at 'J'ama- 
 tave, he heard that persecution had broken out 
 afresh ; and afterwards he received a letter in- 
 forming him that fourteen of the Christians 
 had been apprehended, and sold into slavery. 
 It afterwards appeared, that while the brethren 
 were at Tamatave, two women had entered a 
 complaint against ten of the Christians, with 
 the hope of getting a share of their property. 
 Rafaravavy w*as immediately apprehended, and 
 the next day all the rest of the ten, except 
 Rasomaka, who had not yet returned from 
 Tamatave, and Rafaralahiandrianisa, from Von- 
 izongo, who was saved, because his accusers 
 did not know his name. Some time inter- 
 vened before sentence was pronounced ; and 
 Rafaravavy was frequently examined and im- 
 portuned to disclose her companions. But 
 while she freely confessed that she prayed to 
 God who made all things ; and whatever the 
 queen might be pleased to do with her, she 
 confessed that she had done this, but steadily 
 refused to implicate others. 
 
 Paul, another of the accused, when the oflB- 
 cers came to apprehend him, said, " I have 
 certainly prayed to the God who created me 
 and supported me, and who made all things, to 
 make me a good man ; to bless the queen and 
 give her real happiness, both in this world and 
 that which is to come; to bless the officers 
 and judges, and all the people, and to make 
 them so good that there might be no more 
 highwaymen and liars in the country; and 
 that God would make all the people wise and 
 good." This discreet answer had some effect 
 upon the officers ; and some of them said they 
 saw no harm in all that ; and one said, " Let 
 us do nothing rashly, lest we should advise the 
 queen to shed innocent blood." But another 
 said, " The queen has forbidden any to pray to 
 Jehovah, and they have done it ; and, having 
 despised the command of the queen, are guilty." 
 
 The government. was a fortnight consider- 
 ing what punishment to inflict on the accused. 
 On the fourteenth day, the people in the mar- 
 ket were summoned, and received a message 
 from the queen to go and seize the property 
 of Rafaravavy. She knew nothing of the order, 
 till some of the people came rushing into her 
 house, almost out of breath, and began to seize 
 and carry away whatever they could lay their 
 hands on ; and, in a very short time, every thing 
 she had was carried away, and her house pulled 
 down, and the materials carried oflT. She was 
 then ordered to follow four of the Tsiarondahy, 
 the class employed in putting criminals to death. 
 She expected to be immediately put to death. 
 She went on, repeating to herself, " Lord Jesus, 
 receive my spirit," and feeling that she had 
 done with the body. She was followed by 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 527 
 
 several native Christians, who encouraged and 
 comforted her. But instead of going directly 
 to the place of execution, they turned aside 
 into a house by the way, and put heavy irons 
 on her, the queen having ordered her to be 
 put to death before daylight the next morn- 
 ing. But that night a fire burst out in the 
 capital, burnt down many houses, and created 
 so much confusion, that the queen's order was 
 neglected. The fire occasioned a good deal of 
 remark. Many said it seemed like a judg- 
 ment from heaven, on account of the persecu- 
 tion of the Christians ; and it was thought to 
 have had some effect upon the superstitious 
 fears of the queen herself. 
 
 The rest of the company were divided among 
 the officers, Paul being put in irons and placed 
 in a separate house. At length, the judgment 
 of the queen was given, in a public assembly, 
 that they should be reduced to perpetual sla- 
 very, so that their friends should never be allow- 
 ed to redeem them. 
 
 Easalama, when deceitfully told that all the 
 rest had informed of her companions, was in- 
 duced to mention the names of several, who 
 had not yet been impeached ; and when she after- 
 wards ascertained that she had been the means 
 of their apprehension, she was deeply grieved. 
 During her confinement as a prisoner she was 
 overheard to express her astonishment that the 
 people of God should be treated in this man- 
 ner, and to say, " I was not afraid, but rather 
 rejoiced that I was counted worthy to suffer 
 affliction for believing in Jesus ; I bad hope 
 of the life in heaven." This was reported to 
 the judges, and she was put in irons and cruelly 
 beaten. Referring to the information she had 
 given of her companions, she said, " My life 
 shall go for them." She was ordered for exe- 
 cution the next morning, and in the mean time, 
 put in irons, which forced the extremities to- 
 gether, and put the whole body in an excru- 
 ciating position. Being led to the place of 
 execution the next morning, she expressed her 
 joy that she had received the knowledge of the 
 truth, and continued singing hymns on the 
 way. On reaching the fatal spot, and having 
 received permission to kneel down and pray, 
 she calmly committed her spirit into the hands 
 of the Lord Jesus, and while thus engaged was 
 pierced through the heart by the spears of the 
 executioners ; and her body was left to be de- 
 voured by the dogs. 
 
 As soon as the two brethren had returned 
 from Tamatave, they also were apprehended, 
 their goods confiscated, and they and their 
 wives reduced to slavery. They were divided 
 among the officers of government, and treated 
 in the most cruel aud brutal manner, the ob- 
 ject apparently being to make their condition 
 as uncomfortable and wretched as possible ; 
 all which they bore with Christian meekness 
 and resignation. 
 
 Eafaravavy was kept in irons for five months, 
 expecting all the while to be led out for execu- 
 
 tion. It was supposed that the regard the 
 government entertained for her father was the 
 means of saving her life. Her friends did all 
 they could to alleviate her sufferings, visiting 
 her as often as they durst, taking with them 
 Christian books and reading to her, the guards 
 remaining outside ; and they were not a little 
 encouraged to find her sustaining her afflictions 
 so cheerfully. Her conversation with the 
 guards and with other persons who visited her, 
 was so discreet and edifying as to produce a 
 very favorable impression upon their minds. 
 When asked if she was not sorry that she had 
 brought this trouble on herself, she replied, 
 " How can I be sorry for the pardon of my sins, 
 and asking God to bless me and make me for 
 ever happy ? " She was at length sold into sla- 
 very, but, as it was supposed by design, she fell 
 into the hands of a distant relation of hers, who 
 treated her kindly, allowing her to go and come 
 as she pleased, provided she punctually finished 
 her work. During this time she was visited 
 by her husband, a colonel in the army, who, 
 hearing of her condition, had obtained liberty 
 to spend a few months at the capital. The 
 other Christians who had been sold into slav- 
 ery, had been in the habit of meeting for pray- 
 er and religious conversation at the house of 
 a young man named Rafaralahy, who had built 
 a house for the purpose a short distance from 
 the village where he resided. After being re- 
 leased, she found out the little band and united 
 herself with them. But they were soon dis- 
 covered, and Eafaralaby was put to death, and 
 all who had met at his house, so far as they 
 could be discovered, were apprehended. This 
 was brought about by the perfidy of a man 
 named Rafiakarana, who had received Chris- 
 tian instruction and baptism, and appeared 
 zealous for the truth, but had apostatized on 
 the suppression of Christianity, and become 
 openly vicious. Rafaralahy having formerly 
 received instruction from him, conversed with 
 him, and thinking he had gained him, received 
 him into partnership, and disclosed to him the 
 facts respecting the meetings of the Christians ; 
 but his kindness was requited by being cruelly 
 betrayed. Those who had not been apprehend- 
 ed before, were dealt with more leniently ; but 
 Rafaravavy, Paul, Joseph, and others who had 
 been accused before, having nothing to expect 
 but death, they were advised by their Christian 
 friends to seek safety by flight. But they 
 knew not where to go. At first, they thought 
 of attempting to go to a neighboring province 
 which was at war with Madagascar. But the 
 dangers and difficulties in the way appeared 
 insurmountable. Three of the company were 
 concealed for several months in a forest near 
 the capital, and fed by a friend in the city, 
 until his means were exhausted. Others of the 
 party, including the women, wandered about, 
 from one village to another, concealed some- 
 times in houses, sometimes in pits, and in bogs, 
 the country meanwhile being filled with sol- 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 dien in iearch of them. At length Mr. Johns 
 li«ying visitetl Tamntavc, took measures to rauke 
 It inown through the country that he was there ; 
 and the refugees sent one of their number to as- 
 certain whether they could not escape by sea ; 
 and a plan was arranged between him and a 
 friend at Tamatavc, who held a post of influence, 
 to effect the object A party of them immediate- 
 ly ?et out for Tamatave, where, after enduring 
 iniiidible hardships, and experiencing many 
 hair-breadth escapes, the^ arrived in safety, 
 and embarked for Mauritius. Six of them, 
 Eafarava^7, (Mary,) Razafy, (Sarah,j wife of 
 Andrianilaina, Andrianomanana, (Simeon,) 
 Rosoamaka, (Joseph,) Ratrarahamba, (David,) 
 and Adriauisa, (James,) soon after embarked 
 for England, where they arrived in May, 1839, 
 and received the sympathies and friendship of 
 British Christians. Six more remained at 
 Mauritius, Andrianilaina, thehusband of Sarah, 
 separating from his wife and remaining behind, 
 with the hope of being able to render aid to the 
 Christians in Madagascar. 
 
 At the time of the martyrdom of Rafaralahy, 
 an eminently pious young woman was appre- 
 hended and sold into perpetual slavery. Her 
 husband had previously divorced her, and her 
 father had disowned her ; and her relations, 
 preferring that she should die rather than dis- 
 grace them, procured her trial by the tangena, 
 under the effects of which she perished. Many 
 of the Christians who had effected their escape 
 from the capital, but not out of the country, 
 have continued to suffer innumerable hardships 
 and difficulties ; and it is supposed that many 
 of them have perished through extreme fa- 
 tigue, hunger, nakedness, disease, and anxiety. 
 
 At length, under the pretext of fearing that, 
 if brought to the capital for trial, they might 
 practice sorcery upon her, the queen issued or- 
 ders to her soldiers to put the Christians to 
 death at once, wherever they might be found, 
 ^y <Ji?giDg a pit, tying them by the hands and 
 feet, thrusting them head downwards into the 
 pit, and pouring boiling water on them till 
 they perished. Murder by the ordeal of tan- 
 gena was proceeding on a large scale. On 
 one occasion, it was administered to 600, 500 
 of whom perished. 
 
 The manner in which these Christians have 
 borne their trials, and met the terrors of mar- 
 tyrdom, is worthy of apostolic times. When 
 brought to the final test, not one of them has 
 renounced the Saviour's name, from the terrors 
 of martyrdom. Nominal professors, indeed, in 
 great numbers, hastened to purge themselvas, 
 on the first breaking out of persecution ; but 
 none of those who adhered to their profession 
 havo been led to renounce it by the terrors of 
 martyrdom. 
 
 But one great lesson forces itself upon our 
 attention. ITie connection of the Madagascar 
 mission with the native government has proved 
 one of the greatest impediments to its success ; 
 and shows beyond question, what appears evi- 
 
 dent also in other missions, that the more en- 
 tirely disconnected missions are from all polit- 
 ical or governmental alliances, the less embar- 
 rassments they will meet with, and the moro 
 successful they will be. Christianity does not 
 need the support of the state, and when allied 
 with it, will always find itself oppressed. 
 
 The injustice and cruelty of the infatuated 
 queen continued to rage with increased vio- 
 lence and fatal success. Many of her people 
 sought a sanctuary on the tops of the moun- 
 tains, or in the caves of the wilderness, where 
 they might enjoy liberty of mind, and hold fel- 
 lowship with each other and with God. In 
 June, 1840, ^sixteen of them determined to 
 seek under British protection in Mauritius, the 
 liberty of conscience which they could not 
 enjoy in their native land. But they were dis- 
 covered on their journey to the coast, and con- 
 ducted back to the capital. Two of them 
 escaped on the way ; five were condemned to 
 perpetual slavery ; and nine were doomed to 
 die, and, after being led up in front of the 
 deserted mission house, they were conducted to 
 the place of execution, ^d, while kneeling 
 down, were speared to death. 
 
 The following year, as appears by letters 
 from some of tlie native Christians, 3,000 per- 
 sons had been subjected to the ordeal of tan- 
 gena at Ponizongo. But, amid these fiery tri- 
 als they were sustained by the gracious pre- 
 sence and faithful promises of the Saviour, 
 and not one of those accounted believers had 
 proved traitor and denied Christ. 
 
 In January, 1842, four of the six Malagasy 
 refugees who had visited England, returned to 
 Mauritius with the hope of being able to ben- 
 efit their people. Joseph and Mary were 
 comfortably settled on Minow Island, a few 
 miles from the western coast of Madagascar, 
 where they were usefully employed among their 
 own people. David was employed at Grand 
 Bay, Mauritius, in the instruction of the Mala- 
 gasy apprentices, and James was employed as 
 interpreter on board a British vessel. 
 
 On the 1st of May, 1842, Rev. David Jones, 
 one of the oldest surviving members of the 
 Madagascar mission, died of paralysis, at Port 
 Louis, on the island of Mauritius. 
 
 During this year, five new victims were 
 added to the glorious company of martyrs ; 
 and there was no abatement, but rather an 
 increase in the suspicion and cruelty of the 
 queen and her government. 
 
 In 1843, Mr. Johns, another of the Society's 
 devoted missionaries, met his death on the 
 island of Nosibe, on the north-eastern coast of 
 Madagascar, having been driven by the French 
 authorities, at the instigation of a Catholic 
 priest, from the island of Nosimitsio, where, 
 in connection with the two Malagasy Chris- 
 tians, Joseph and Mary, he was attempting to 
 establish a mission. 
 
 In 1847, the report of the society says, that 
 though still persecuted, the native Christians 
 
MADAGASCAR. 
 
 52^ 
 
 of this afiBicted island continue to increase 
 and multiply. 
 
 By the blessing of God bestowed on the 
 labors of a young and zealous convert, named 
 Eamaka or Easalasala, there had been a great 
 awakening, and 100 new converts had been 
 added to their number ; and among them was 
 Eakotondrama, only son of the queen, and 
 heir presumptive to the throne. Five months 
 after his conversion, the queen issued orders 
 for the apprehension of all the new converts 
 whose names had been reported to the govern- 
 ment, 21 of whom were condemned to die. 
 The young prince, then only 17 years old, no- 
 bly came forward, and used his influence to 
 save their lives, in which he was successful. 
 Nine of them, however, were obliged to sub- 
 mit to the ordeal of tangena, one of whom 
 died ; four escaped ; and the rest were sen- 
 tenced to slavery, three of whom were imme- 
 diately redeemed by their friends, the prince 
 contributing largely towards the object. He 
 l^as continued to afford the persecuted follow- 
 ers of Christ the most conclusive evidence that 
 he is a faithful brother in the Lord. In defi- 
 ance of the laws, he assembled with them for 
 worship in their places of retreat ; and when 
 their lives or liberties were in danger, he em- 
 ployed all the means in his power to warn them 
 of impending danger, and effect their rescue. 
 The prime-minister, addressing the queen, 
 said, " Madam, your son is a Christian ; he 
 prays with the Christians, and encourages them 
 in this new doctrine. We are lost if your 
 Majesty do not stop the prince in this strange 
 way." " But," replied the queen, " he is my 
 son — my only — my beloved son! Let him do 
 what he pleases ; if he wishes to become a 
 Christian, let him ! He is my beloved son." 
 It is thus that the " earth helps the woman." 
 God, in this instance, makes use of the natural 
 affections of this cruel woman to protect his 
 people. But in a still more striking manner 
 did he turn the heart of this same prime-min- 
 ister. Being informed of a meeting of Chris- 
 tians at the capital, he sent his nephew to take 
 down their names. The nephew went and 
 informed them of the object of his visit, and 
 begged them to break up and go home, which 
 they did. He then returned to his uncle, who 
 inquired, "Where is the list?" "There is 
 none," he replied. " Why have you disobeyed 
 my orders ?" the uncle again inquired. " Young 
 man, your head must fall, for you show that 
 you also are a Christian." " Yes," he replied, 
 " I am a Christian ; and if you will, you may 
 put me to death, for I must pray." At these 
 words the cruel man's feelings gave way, and 
 he exclaimed, " Oh, no, you shall not die ;" and 
 there the matter ended. Still the persecution ; 
 
 woods ; and even there they were not safe 
 from the government spies. 
 
 In 1850, a new persecution broke out witli 
 great violence. Nearly 2,000 were summoned 
 to the capital to answer for the offence of wor- 
 shiping the only true God, and believing- 
 in his Son. Three of the most distinguished 
 for rank and devotedness were sentenced to be 
 burnt to death ; and three times while their 
 bodies were consuming, the rain descended in 
 torrents, and extinguished the fires. Ten 
 others were thrown from a precipice near tho 
 city, and dashed in pieces. The prince now 
 interposed, at the risk of his life, and boldly- 
 withstood the prime-minister, who was the 
 author of this cruelty. 
 
 The native converts, in a letter describing 
 this scene, say, " At the moment the first four 
 sufferers were brought to the stake, a rainbow 
 of an immense size, and forming a triple arch, 
 stretched across the heavens. One end of it 
 appeared to rest on the posts to which the 
 martyrs were tied; the rain, the meanwhile 
 falling in torrents. The multitudes were struck 
 with terror and amazement, and many of them 
 took to flight." In a letter requesting Bi- 
 bles, the following direction is given : " Put 
 them in the bottom of cases or small casks, — • 
 put some iron bars over them, and fill up with 
 bottles or eatables." 
 
 In reviewing the history of the Madagascar 
 mission, it presents one of the most remarka- 
 ble instances of the power of the Gospel on. 
 record. From the commencement of the mis- 
 sion, in 1819 to 1828, the society sent out 
 fourteen laborers, consisting of six ordained 
 missionaries, two missionary printers, and six 
 missionary artizans. We have already given 
 the results of the first 15 years of the mission, 
 up to the time when the persecution com- 
 menced. 
 
 For seventeen years the same oppressive 
 policy was continued. Many hundreds were 
 degraded and impoverished ; hundreds moro 
 doomed to slavery ; not less than one hundred 
 have been put to death, and a large number 
 are still suffering exile, bonds and degradation. 
 Yet, during this time of trial there has been 
 an astonishing increase in numbers. As be- 
 fore stated, there were at the capital about 
 200 church members. It is now impossible to 
 obtain an accurate statement of the number 
 of Christians on the island ; yet it has been 
 ascertained, from reliable authority, that there 
 are now in the capital and the immediate vi- 
 cinity, 1,000 persons known to each other, and 
 mutually recognized as the disciples of Christ, 
 who meet regularly on the Sabbath and at 
 other times, for the worship of God and the 
 administration of the ordinances. Besides 
 
 did not cease. Christians continued to be! these, there are known to be cousiderablo 
 despoiled of their goods, confined in chains, or j numbers in other places. The Christians com 
 sold into slavery. And those who escaped i prise among them some of the most intelligent 
 could only meet for worship in the night, or in and reputable men in the community. _ Many 
 solitary caverns, or in the deep recesses of the j of them hold offices of great responsibility, 
 34 
 
530 
 
 MADAGASCAR. 
 
 of their ability, integrity, and known 
 wf^rOi. It is suppased that their Christianity 
 livotl at. on account of the value of their 
 r«j. And, among tiie converts are the 
 heir to the throne and the nephew to the prime- 
 minister, the most bitter persecutor of the 
 Christians. 
 
 In January, 1853, the society received in- 
 telligence that the government had been com- 
 raittetl to the young prince, and that the son 
 of the late prime-minister had succeeded to his 
 father's office ; that the persecution had been 
 suspended, and the restrictions upon foreign 
 intercoui-sc removed. In consequence of this 
 intelligence, they issued an appeal to the Chris- 
 tian public for funds to recommence the mis- 
 sion, which was liberally responded to, and 
 about £9,000 were raised, as the Madagascar 
 fund. As a preparatory measure, the society 
 resolved to send Rev. Mr. Ellis, in company 
 with Mr. Cameron, one of the former mission- 
 aries, to visit Madagascar, and ascertain the 
 true state of things on the island. These gen- 
 tlemen reached I'amatave on the 18th of July, 
 1853, and were kindly received by the queen's 
 officers. From that place they dispatched a 
 letter to the queen, asking leave to make, a 
 visit of friendship and good-will to the capital, 
 and to converse on such subjects as they thought 
 would tend to the good of the kingdom. After 
 15 days, they received a courteous answer from 
 the government, containing kind inquiries 
 after the former missionaries; but advising 
 thein, as there was much public business, re^ 
 quiring considerable time, to return to the 
 other side of the waters, lest they should be 
 overtaken with the sickly season. They re- 
 garded the answer as by no means unfavorable. 
 ^ While remaining at Tamatave, the deputa- 
 tion obtained all the information they could, 
 in respect to the actual state of things. They 
 learned that the rumor that the government 
 had been put into the hands of the prince was 
 incorrect. The death of the prime-minister, 
 Rainiharo, however, was confirmed; and it 
 was stated that the prince was first officer of 
 the palace, and the son of the late prime-min- 
 ister, (reported a Christian,) through the influ- 
 ence of the prince, had been appointed com- 
 mander-in-chief of the army. It appeared, 
 however, that there were two great parties in 
 the kingdom, of nearly equal influence ; the 
 one favorable to education, improvement, and 
 Christianity; and the other opposed to all 
 innovation, and determined to uphold the su- 
 perstitions and ancient customs of the country. 
 At the head of the former party was the young 
 pnnce, And some others holding the highest 
 offices of the government. At the head of the 
 latter was a nephew of the queen, cousin of the 
 young prince, a shrewd, ambitious, daring 
 man, of considerable business talent and large 
 property, leagued with the patrons and sup- 
 porters of the idols and their keepers, ot r][xi- 
 nation and tangena, and of slavery and oerced 
 
 labor. It was said that no efforts were spared 
 by this chief and his party to prevent the ac- 
 cession of the young prince, lliey represented 
 him to the queen as unacquainted with the 
 business of government, and bewitched by the 
 Christians. This was supposed to be the 
 queen's own opinion ; and she was said to be 
 indignant at the Christians for taking advan- 
 tage, as she considered it, of his youth and in- 
 experience, to draw him over to their party. 
 Still, the prince was firm ; both he and his 
 wife were members of the church, and true 
 and constant friends to the most afflicted and 
 suffering of the persecuted flock. He is repre- 
 sented as of an amiable disposition and honor- 
 able character, and possessmg the intelligence 
 and cultivation of an English gentleman. . He 
 is respectful and attentive to his mother, spends 
 much time with her, and she is said to be ex- 
 ceedingly fond of him. There was, however, 
 a most formidable conspiracy against his life } 
 and the queen had taken the strictest mea- 
 sures to guard him from danger. Just before 
 Messrs. Ellis and Cameron left the island, an 
 officer of considerable rank and long service 
 stated that the queen had resolved to retire 
 from the government, and was making prepa- 
 rations for the coronation of the prin'ce, who 
 was to be constituted sole ruler of the country. 
 Should this prove true, a great change may 
 soon be expected in the whole aspect of things 
 in Madagascar. But if, on the contrary, the 
 other party should gain the ascendancy, there 
 would not only be a great destruction of hu- 
 man life, but a revival of the persecutions 
 against the Christians, in all probability more 
 violent and cruel than any yet witnessed. The 
 rival of the prince was the chief instigator in 
 the last persecution ; and he is the" only one 
 now who ventures to accuse the Christians to 
 the queen, all others being deterred by the 
 fear that the prince may remember it here- 
 after. But this man pursues them with unre- 
 lenting hatred. 
 
 Mr. Cameron makes the following statement 
 respecting the young prince : " He is consid- 
 ered a decided Christian. In protecting the 
 Christians and meliorating the sufferings of 
 the persecuted, his efforts are eminently suc- 
 cessful. His personal property is reduced, 
 through his liberality, to less than $1,000, and 
 that of his cousin, Ramonja, son of the late 
 prime-minister, to less than ^3,000. He is a 
 person of intellect and good sense, and employs 
 much of his time in visiting the Christians, 
 and conversing privately with them, but is 
 cautious about frequent attendance upon their 
 meetings." 
 
 MADEIRA : An island lying off the west- 
 ern coast of Africa, between lat. 32° 22' and 
 330 10' N. and long. 17° 30' and 16° 20' W., 
 belonging to Portugal. It is about 60 miles 
 long and 20 broad, and consists of one im- 
 mense mountain, rising 5,000 feet above the 
 sea, on the summit of which is an excavation. 
 
MADEIRA. 
 
 531 
 
 supposed to have been the crater of a volcano. 
 The various branches of this mountain are 
 separated by narrow glens, the sides of which 
 are thinly covered with soil, but nevertheless 
 fully reward the cultivation they receive. 
 The lower slopes are covered with vines ; the 
 higher declivities Avith the chestnut and pine 
 trees. The importance of Madeira is derived 
 solely from its vineyards, producing annually 
 about 20,000 pipes of wine, 15,000 of which 
 are exported. The sugar-cane is cultivated on 
 a small scale. The poorer classes chiefly sub- 
 sist on the eddoe-root, sweet potatoes, and 
 chestnuts. The island abounds with beautiful 
 scenery, and its different elevations afford every 
 variety of temperature. 
 
 Under the new constitution, promulgated in 
 1836, the islands of Madeira and Porto Santo 
 were included in one district. At that time, 
 these islands contained 45 parishes, 24,674 
 families, and 115,447 inhabitants ; 108 families 
 and 324 souls being English, and the remain- 
 der consisting, according to Conder, of a mixed 
 race, sprung principally from Portuguese and 
 Moors, with some sprinkling of English blood ; 
 though Com. Wilkes says there is little if any 
 mixed blood among them. There are about 
 5,000 proprietors of the soil, of whom no more 
 than 650 live on their rents ; and there are 
 about 400 who receive government salaries. 
 Mendicants are numerous. The native inhab- 
 itants are meagre, sallow, and short-lived, which 
 is attributed to their want of wholesome food, 
 a life of drudgery and exposure to great vicis- 
 situdes of climate, and to a total disregard 
 of cleanliness. They are infected with a spe- 
 cies of itch, which they regard as incurable. 
 In this connection, the following description of 
 the mode of expressing the juice of the grape, 
 on this island, given by Commodore Wilkes, 
 may not be uninteresting to the lovers of " Old 
 Madeira." " On our approach, w^e heard a 
 sort of song, with a continued thumping ; and 
 on entering the rude shed where the men were 
 employed, we saw six men stamping violently 
 in a vat of six feet square by two feet deep, 
 three on each side of a huge lever beam, their 
 legs bare up to the thighs. On our entrance, 
 they redoubled their exertions, till the perspi- 
 ration fairly poured from them. After the 
 grapes had been sufficiently stamped, and the 
 men's legs well scraped, the pulp was made 
 into the shape of a large bee-hive, secured by a 
 rope made of the young twigs of the vine, and 
 the lever being used for a press, the juice flows 
 off and is received in tubs." 
 
 Funchal, the chief town of Madeira, has_ a 
 very pleasing appearance from the sea, and its 
 situation in a kind of amphitheatre, formed by 
 the mountains, adds to its beauty. The con- 
 trast of the white buildi'iigs and villas, with 
 the green mountains, forms a picture which is 
 much heightened by the bold, quadrangular 
 Loo Rock, with its embattled summit com- 
 manding the harbor in the foreground. — Con- 
 
 defs Dictionary of Geography ; U. S. Exploring 
 Ezpedition^hj Com. Wilkes, Yol. I. p. 6. 
 
 The Roman Catholic church is the establish- 
 ed religion of Madeira, and no other is tole- 
 rated. 
 
 MISSI^. 
 
 Scotch Free Church. — The mission, which 
 was ultimately taken up by the Scotch Church, 
 was the result of the private labors of Dr. Kal- 
 ley, a Scotch physician, to benefit the native 
 population. For most of the facts contained 
 in the following sketch we are indebted to the 
 Memoir of Rev. W. Hewitson. In iho begin- 
 ning of his intercourse with the people, Dr. Kal- 
 ley met few who had ever seen a Bible, or who 
 seemed to know that the New Testament was 
 written by men, the companions of Jesus 
 Christ. In 1839, a few persons began to man- 
 ifest a desire to read and hear the word of 
 God ; and in 1840 this interest increased, and 
 many adults went to school that they might 
 learn to read the Bible. This interest con- 
 tinuing to increase, in 1841 it attracted the 
 notice of the Government at Lisbon, who or- 
 dered it to be suppressed. But the popular 
 feeling was such, that, for the time, the order 
 was not executed. 
 
 In 1842, people came in large numbers to 
 hear the Scriptures read and explained, many 
 of them walking 10 or 12 miles, and climbing 
 over mountains 3000 feet high. The meetings 
 were held in the open air, a part of the time, 
 on a ridge, between two valleys, on the east 
 and west, a lofty mountain rising on the south. 
 The numbers varied from 1000 to 5000. The 
 people sat in a clear space near the house 
 which Dr. K. occupied, and all around was 
 covered with trees clustered with grapes. In 
 some places, the general topics of conversation 
 were, the word of God, the one sacrifice for 
 sin, the free salvation, &c., and the hymns of 
 the Sabbath were heard through the week in 
 the fields and vineyards. 
 
 The manner in which this work commenced 
 was remarkable. The gratuitous medical aid 
 which Dr. K. rendered the people, induced many 
 to visit him, and to regard him as a friend. He 
 took the opportunity to converse with them 
 about the disease of their souls, and direct 
 them to the true remedy, the Great Physician, 
 advising them to read the Bible, and explain- 
 ing and enforcing its truths as he had oppor- 
 tunity. Many of them followed his advice, 
 and while searching the Scriptures appear to 
 have been truly taught of God. Some read 
 the Scriptures for some time without perceiv- 
 ing that they condemned Popery ; but when 
 they perceived that masses, penance, purga- 
 tory, &c., were inconsistent with the One Sacri- 
 fice, they were alarmed, and consulted their 
 priests, and by this means were exposed to 
 persecution. This led them to further exa- 
 mination, confirmed them in the truth, and 
 prepared them for heavier suffering. Upwards 
 
5S3 
 
 MADEIRA. 
 
 of! 000. Mwcon the ages of 15 and 30, lenrn- 
 
 t\1 ' " ■ ■ Scriptures intelligently, and were 
 
 tl to searclj for themselves. 
 
 i.ii, >..... a work could not go on long with- 
 out attracting the attention of the ecclesias- 
 tical authoritii^. A pastoral letter was issued, 
 denouncing the Bible as "a book from hell," 
 and thrcatcning all who should read it with 
 excomnuinication. Then a letter was address- 
 ed to the registrar of each parish, directing 
 him to summon before him the teachers of all 
 the schools established in the parish, by Dr. 
 K alley, both male and female, and charge 
 them in the presence of witnesses, " not to 
 teach anj' livnig being;" and, in case they 
 should disobey the charge, to cause them to 
 be arrested. Two of the converts having par- 
 taken of the Lord's Supper in the Presbyterian 
 church at Funchal, were formally excommu- 
 nicatetl, and all persons forbidden to hold com- 
 munication with them, or to " give them fire, 
 water, bread, or any other thing that may be 
 necessary for their support ;" or to pay them 
 their debts ; or to support them in any case be- 
 fore the courts ; under pain of the greater 
 excommunication. 
 
 In January, 1843, the civil governor com- 
 manded Dr. K. to abstain from speaking to 
 the Portuguese on the subject of religion. 
 But as the command was arbitrary and illegal 
 it was disobeyed. After that, the governor 
 issued a proclamation, forbidding the people 
 to visit Dr. K.'s nouse ; and on Sabbaths and 
 holidays, the police were stationed in the roads 
 at his doors, to enforce the order. Many were 
 beaten or taken to jail for disobedience. One 
 wealthy gentleman, indignant at the priestly 
 attack on civil liberty, came on purpose to 
 have the case tried. He was prosecuted, and 
 the legal authorities decided that no citizen 
 could be hindered from entering any house, if 
 he had the consent of the owner. The people 
 continued to come, but came early to avoid 
 the police. Tlie officers also came earlier and 
 earlier, till at last they came at four o'clock in 
 the morning ; and after that, many of the peo- 
 ple came on Saturday night, and remained 
 over the Sabbath to worship God and hear 
 the truth. 
 
 At length, a prosecution was commenced 
 against Dr. K. ; but the judge, after examining 
 into the case, decided that his proceedings did 
 not violilte any existing law of Portugal, and 
 dismissed the prosecution. But, the judge 
 having left the island, Dr. K. was arrested 
 again, and refnsed bail, on the ground that 
 the crimes laid to his charge were punishable 
 with death ! The jailor acted as a spy, and 
 warned the people not to visit him, and took 
 down the names of those who did, and ex- 
 pressly forbade any singing or reading the 
 Bible in the prison. The British Judge Con- 
 servator, with other officials, visited the prison 
 searched for Testaments, and carried away one 
 or two that he found among the prisoners, 
 
 which were never returned. But they did not 
 search the doctor's rooms, where was a large 
 supply of the Scriptures ; and the colporteurs 
 continued to come for supplies, which they 
 took away and sold as before. On the Sab- 
 bath from 70 to 100 persons visited him by 
 threes ; and as the cathedral was near the jail, 
 the Komanists showed their zeal by spitting 
 on the heretics, who showed their spirit by 
 praying for their persecutors. 
 
 The bishop now issued a letter stating that 
 there was scarcely a verse in the Old Testa- 
 ment or the New, in the Bibles circulated on 
 the island, but jyhat was adulterated. To an- 
 swer this charge, Dr. K. caused the Bible thus 
 circulated to be carefully compared with the 
 authorized version, and the result certified and 
 posted np in the streets, showing the falsity 
 of the bishop's assertions ; and at length a 
 newspaper arrived from Lisbon, containing 
 a royal mandate, sanctioning the circulation 
 of the very same edition. 
 
 In January, 1844, Dr. Kalley was released 
 from prison, and resumed his operations, the 
 police being employed around his doors as 
 before ; the attendance on his services being 
 about 600 on the Sabbath, and 30 on week 
 day evenings. In the summer of that year one 
 of the converts, Mrs. Maria Joaqnima Alves, 
 was snatched from her family of seven children, 
 one of them an infant, and committed to prison. 
 But she remained firm, and was often heard 
 praising the Lord that she was counted worthy 
 to suffer shame for his sake. After sixteen 
 months she was brought to trial before the 
 Supreme Court on a charge of apostasy, heresy, 
 and blasphemy. But she was tried only on the 
 last charge, the specification being, that she 
 had refused to acknowledge that the consecrat- 
 ed wafer is the real body and real blood, 
 and the human soul and divinity of the Lord 
 Jesus Christ, and that she had also refused to 
 adore it. 
 
 The Judge asked her, whether she believed 
 this dogma, and she, knowing that her life or 
 death depended upon her answer, calmly replied, 
 "J do 7wt believe it." The Judge immediately 
 rose, and pronounced sentence of death upon 
 her. This sentence was afterwards commuted 
 by the court at Lisbon, on account of a techni- 
 cal error, but with the instruction that, if she 
 had been tried upon all the charges, the sentence 
 of death must have been executed ! 
 
 No effort was now spared by the persecutors 
 to inflame the public mind. Assassination was 
 openly proposed in the public papers, as an 
 easy way to be freed from annoyance ; the 
 free use of the cudgel was recommended ; and 
 even a repetition of St. Bartholomew's day, or 
 the Sicilian vespers, was hinted at. Some of 
 the converts w^re cruelly beaten ; others were 
 stoned ; houses were set on fire, and some of 
 them burned down ; and for these injuries all 
 redress was refused. Families were denied any 
 place to bury their dead except the public 
 
MADEIRA. 
 
 533 
 
 highway ; and when so buried the bodies were 
 taken up and burned under the inspection of 
 the police. 
 
 In the September following, fifty soldiers 
 were quartered upon a portion of the parish of 
 Antonio de Serra, and allowed to plunder and 
 perpetrate every cruelty. Twenty-two of the 
 most respectable men and women were taken 
 to Funchal in a vessel, and cast into prison 
 among the most depraved and degraded, with- 
 out any allowance of food. Friends, both 
 English and Portuguese, sent them food, but it 
 was refused admission. Still, they were not only 
 patient and resigned, but happy. The streets 
 around the jail resounded with their hymns of 
 praise. But this was soon forbidden, although 
 obscene songs suog by other prisoners were not 
 prevented. They were driven to mass at the 
 point of the bayonet, and forced to kneel. 
 After twenty months' imprisonment, they were 
 brought to trial before a jury of their own 
 countrymen, and acquitted. Still they were 
 not allowed to return to their plundered homes 
 till they would pay the jail fees ! 
 
 Dr. Kalley now perceiving that he was like- 
 ly to be brought to trial, and expelled from 
 the country, though contrary to law, was desi- 
 rous of avoiding such a result, and therefore 
 sailed for Loudon. Lord Aberdeen, Secretary 
 of Foreign Affairs, demanded damages of the 
 Portuguese government for Dr. K.'s false im- 
 prisonment, and to compromise the matter, it 
 was agreed that all proceedings against him 
 should be dropped, and he returned to Madei- 
 ra. But not many days after his arrival a 
 warrant was issued for his apprehension, in 
 direct violation of the promises made by the 
 Portuguese government. 
 
 But Dr. K. having been warned by Lord 
 Aberdeen, that he would not be protected by 
 the British government against any attempts 
 on the part of the Portuguese government to 
 remove him from the Island, if he permitted 
 Portuguese subjects to assemble in his house 
 for the reading of the Scriptures, he thought 
 proper to resign the work into other hands. 
 
 Kev. W. H. Hewitson had, without Dr. Kal- 
 ley's knowledge, been appointed in Scotland to 
 labor in Madeira ; and meeting with Dr. K. 
 at Lisbon, he returned with him, and entered 
 into the work with zeal, yet with prudence, 
 avoiding unnecessary publicity. 
 
 In March, 1845, Mr. Hewitson administered 
 the Lord's Supper in secret to 34 Portuguese 
 converts. More might have been admitted, 
 but there was not room for them. Not a few 
 in different parts of the island were being 
 taught to read the Scriptures ; and those 
 already converted were not slack in comforting 
 one another and doing good to souls still in 
 darkness. Many of them, through reading 
 and prayer, had become intelligent members 
 of society, and able to give a clear and distinct 
 " reason of the hope that was in them." Some 
 of them seemed to be altogether free from 
 
 doubts and fears, and to be filled with joy and 
 peace in believing. 
 
 But it was soon found that the meetings 
 were attracting the attention of the priests 
 and the authorities, and they were given up. 
 The people now waited on Mr. Hewitson indi- 
 vidually, or two or three at a time ; and their 
 hungering and thirsting after instruction in 
 the Scriptures was remarkable and affecting. 
 In this way, Mr. IT. was usually engaged with 
 different parties or individuals, for a great por- 
 tion of the day ; and those who waited on his 
 instructions grew rapidly in knowledge and 
 grace. After a course of instruction, Mr. H. 
 received them one by one into the Christian 
 church. At his first communion, twenty-two 
 were admitted, and at the second, thirty. 
 Some of them had made much progress in 
 grace and holiness, and their greatest joy was 
 to see the work spreading, and new converts 
 coming into the fold; though they had nothing 
 before them but the prospect of suffering for 
 Christ's sake. Mr. H. took the lease of a 
 house in a retired place, where he intended to 
 live and hold meetings. But soon the police 
 began to watch about it, and he was forced 
 again, for a time, to discontinue his meetings, 
 though he met a few persons at a time in pri- 
 vate houses. 
 
 On the 10th of May, a man and a woman 
 were put in prison for teaching their neighbors 
 to read the Bible. Soon after this, at a dinner 
 party, the Bishop of Madeira declared exter- 
 minating warfare against the Bible, and said 
 he was determined to put down all dissent 
 from the Koman Catholic church. The per- 
 secution which the converts had to endure in 
 private from relations and neighbors, was 
 growing fiercer and fiercer. Yet they were 
 willing and even glad to suffer persecution for 
 Christ's sake. 
 
 In June, Mr, H. moved into his house, and 
 held small meetings in it almost daily. Though 
 the authorities were seeking grounds for a 
 prosecution against him, they could, as yet, 
 find none. Before this time, he had baptized 
 several children ; and the suspicion of it going 
 abroad, produced great excitement ; in conse- 
 quence of which, about 20 persons conspired 
 together to assassinate Dr. Kalley. Notices 
 were posted on the church doors, requiring all 
 to confess to the priest, or attend church, 
 within ten days, under pain of imprisonment. 
 About this time, after an im[)risonment of 
 more than two years, Maria Joaquima wiis re- 
 leased. 
 
 In August, Mr. H. was visited by a public 
 notary, who warned him to discontinue meet- 
 ings in his house with Portuguese subjects, for 
 religious purposes, under pain of being pro- 
 ceeded with, and handed over to the judicial 
 power. But he contiimcd to hold meetings, 
 under cover of the night, till a serious illness 
 interrupted his labors. After his recovery, he 
 organized a theological class, in order to qual- 
 
584 
 
 MADEIRA. 
 
 ify them to act as catochists, cxi)cctin^, liim- 
 sdf, soon to be obligcnl to leave the isluiid. 
 This class was CDiiiposod of fifteen or sixteen 
 of thowj who had nuido the greatest advance- 
 ment in spiritual knowledge, some of whom 
 came from the distance of twelve or fifteen 
 miles. One of them was the father-in-law of 
 one of the principal judges of the island. The 
 regularity of then* attendance, and the earnest- 
 ness of their attention, were highly gratifying. 
 
 Under date of Dec. 17, 1845, Mr. II. writes 
 that 28 persons were imprisoned for the crime 
 of meeting one Sabbath evening for reading 
 the word of God, and prayer*. The usual prac- 
 tice in such cases, he said, was, fii-st to prepare 
 the sentence in writing, and afterwards to go 
 through the empty forni of trying the case, 
 and hearing the evidence. A family of three 
 persons, hearing that they were to be prose- 
 cuted for not going to confession, escaped to 
 Demarara. 
 
 Under date of Feb. 6, 1846, Mr. H. says : 
 "The people are hungering for the word. Some 
 of them say to me occasionally, * When shall 
 wc come, for we are very hungry ? ' On the 
 26th of February, he wrote, that he had heard 
 it intimated that the civil governor had charged 
 one of the judges to proceed against him ; and 
 expecting soon to be compelled to leave, he 
 Bet about preparing the people for his absence. 
 He administered the communion to 87, while 
 about* 100 more were ready for examination. 
 His theological class he kept up from Decem- 
 ber to April, till he had gone over all the 
 leading doctrines and duties of Christianity ; 
 and in the beginning of May he left, intend- 
 ing after a few months to return to his flock. 
 Soon after, the persecution burst forth with 
 fury. On the 2d of August, 30 or 40 converts 
 were assembled in the house of an English 
 family, to hear a pastoral letter from Mr. 
 Hewitson, when one of the canons of the 
 cathedral church mustered a ruffian mob and 
 appeared at the gate as the people were about 
 to retire, ready to attack them. The first per- 
 son who came out was Arsenio Da Silva, who 
 had been conducting the worship. The canon 
 thrust m his fivce an image, and bade him kiss 
 It and adore his God, knocking off his hat, and 
 abusing him with foul language. With great 
 difficulty he escaped with three or four others, 
 who came out behind him. The females took 
 refuge in the kitchen. The house was besieged 
 by the mob, at the instigation of the canon 
 and several other priests, till towards midnight, 
 when they smashed in the doors and windows, 
 and rushed into the apartments of the lady of 
 the house, who was an invalid. After search- 
 ing for some time, they found the Portuguese, 
 and began to beat and otherwise maltreat 
 them, when the police and soldiers entered, 
 and asked them by what authority they had 
 entered the house, when they declared that 
 they did not care for authority or law. They 
 had befjre said there were no laws for Calvin- 
 
 ists. Two of them were arrested and sent to 
 prison. 
 
 About 2 o'clock on the morning of Sabbath, 
 August 9th, as Dr. K alley was escorting a 
 friend to his own house, he overheard the 
 guard of soldiers, which had been 8(;nt at his 
 request to protect him, in familiar conversa- 
 tion with persons disguised in masks, one of 
 whom was sharpening a large knife, prepara- 
 tory, as he said, to " the killing on tlie mor- 
 row." This convinced him that there was no 
 safety for him but in flight ; and, disguising 
 himself as a country peasant, he hastened to 
 the house of a Jlriend. 
 
 About noon, after the services were over in 
 the church, groups of people were seen in the 
 streets, talking with evident delight of the 
 work of the day. At last a rocket rose hiss- 
 ing in the air. It was the signal for proceed- 
 ing. " Those who are in that house," said one 
 of the people in the hearing of Mrs. Kalley, 
 as she was escaping in disguise through the 
 street, " would need to be sure of salvation." 
 At length a dense mass surrounded the house. 
 The ringleaders rushed in, the mob watching 
 till their benefactor should be brought forth. 
 Chagrined to find that he had escaped, they 
 committed his library to the flames, and has- 
 tened away in search of him. 
 
 By this time, Dr. Kalley, disguised in female 
 attire, and concealed in a hammock, was escap- 
 ing for his life to the bay. As the bearers, 
 attended by Mr. Tate, were hurried along, 
 the cry was raised, " Kalley ! Kalley !" The 
 infuriated mob catching the cry, and raising 
 three cheers, ran towards the pier. As they 
 reached it, the hammock had just been lowered 
 into the boat, and in a few minutes it was 
 alongside the steamer, the hammock swung on 
 deck, and Dr. Kalley was safe. The whole 
 beach teemed with the ruffian crew. 
 
 The removal of Dr. Kalley was the signal 
 for all manner of cruelty and oppression. 
 Many of the converts immediately fled to the 
 mountains, where they were hunted down like 
 wild beasts. When discovered in their hiding 
 places, they were mercilessly beaten, to extort 
 from them the promise that they would go to 
 confession. One man was brutally murdered, 
 and several women sustained fatal injuries. 
 About a hundred fled on board an emigrant 
 ship, with the design of removing to some 
 other land. Many of these humble disciples 
 manifested a spirit of devoted attachment to 
 the truth, of simple steadfast faith in Jesus, 
 and of patience in the midst of great tribula- 
 tion. 
 
 An English resident, who had been obliged 
 to take refuge on board the ship that was to 
 take two hundred of them to Trinidad, wrote 
 to Mr. Hewitson, " The sound of the hymns is 
 very sweet, as it rises from the hold. They 
 never speak against their persecutors. They 
 only mention them with pity. Sometimes 1 
 overhear them in prayer, praying for their 
 
MADEBLI— MAGEZZIN. 
 
 635 
 
 enemies, and for those who have turned back 
 againto the Casas d'idolatria. They have all 
 been in hidings on the mountains, their houses 
 broken up and pillaged ; and many of them 
 have nothing left but the clothes they wear." 
 
 A woman Wiis taken out of her house, beat- 
 en till she was seemingly dead, then dragged 
 down and thrown on the graves of the Pro- 
 testants, buried on the roadside. She revived 
 again, and was carried by the police to the 
 hospital. Alter dressing her broken arm, 
 they ordered her to " confess," which she re- 
 fused ; in consequence of which she was taken 
 to the police station, where she remained all 
 day in a hammock. 
 
 Two hundred sailed on the 22d of August, 
 for Trinidad ; 350 soon followed, and others 
 went afterwards, increasing the number to 
 800 in all. 
 
 Dr. Kalley, spea,king of the converts, says, 
 they were begotten of God, by his word of 
 truth ; they grew by the sincere milk of it ; it 
 was sweeter to them than honey, more pre- 
 cious than gold ; the w^ords of Jesus were 
 spirit and life to them. They enjoyed peace 
 through his blood. Sometimes the expression 
 of their attachment to him was very striking, 
 and their sympathy and affection for each 
 other truly brotherly. Their enemies witness- 
 ed changes upon them, which appeared very 
 strange and unaccountable, especially when 
 they persecuted them. The gentleness and 
 patience, the love and joy, of the sufferers, con- 
 founded even their persecutors, some of whom 
 were reported to have used expressions like 
 these : " We call these people ugly names, 
 and they don't answer back ; we spit upon 
 them, and they don't get angry ; we beat them, 
 and they seem pleased ; we break open their 
 houses and destroy their property, and they 
 are happy ; we put them in jail, and they sing : 
 we can't make them unhappy." 
 
 Mr. Da Silva, already mentioned, was a 
 man of wealth and distinction ; but he was 
 obliged to forsake all, even his wife and chil- 
 dren. He was afterwards ordained pastor of 
 the exiles at Trinidad, where he died, after 
 having witnessed the departure of a portion 
 of them for the United States. 
 
 Mr. Hewitson, after remaining some time in 
 Scotland, to recruit his health, visited the 
 exiles at Trinidad, and labored for some time 
 among them, preaching the Gospel, and seek- 
 ing to establish them in the faith. After his 
 return to Scotland, another missionary was 
 appointed by the Free Church to labor among 
 the exiles, who has since followed them to 
 their settlement in Illinois. 
 
 Mr. Hewitson, on visiting his flock at Trin- 
 idad, says of them, " Though a few of the 
 Portuguese in Trinidad have, under the pow- 
 erful influence of new temptations, declined 
 somewhat in spirituality of mind, yet I have 
 discovered no good ground for suspecting the 
 sincerity of any whom I was accustomed to 
 
 regard in Madeira as having the things which 
 accompany salvation. A considerable num- 
 ber seem to be truly desirous of growing in 
 grace, light and holiness. The elders and 
 deacons have been faithful and exemplary." 
 
 The Portuguese converts of Madeira are 
 among the martyrs of the nineteenth century. 
 They furnish a remarkable instance of the 
 power of God attending the simple ministry 
 of the word. The facts in this case show t«iat 
 there is no want of power in the Gospel, pro- 
 perly applied, for the conversion of the world. 
 They furnish also, a living testimony to the 
 changeless, persecuting spirit of Popery ; and 
 to see the identity of " Pope and Pagan," we 
 need only compare the persecutions in Madeira 
 with those of Madagascar. 
 
 As evidence that the blessed work is still in 
 progress, we notice the recent arrival of a ves- 
 sel at New York from Madeira, bringing 158 
 more religious exiles, on their way to the colo- 
 ny in Illinois. 
 
 MADEBLI: A town of the Bassas in 
 Western Africa, situated on the Mechlin river, 
 about 20 miles from its mouth. It has been 
 a seat of the African mission of the American 
 Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
 MADRAS : The capital of the British 
 possessions in the south of India, in lat. 13c 
 5' iST. and long. 80° 81' E. ; for two centuries 
 the seat of Jesuit Missions in llindostan. 
 The population has recently been estimated at 
 630,000, of whom 530,000 are Hindoos, 80,000 
 Mohammedans, and 20,000 Europeans or de- 
 scendants of Europeans. It is fortified to the 
 north and west by a wall, having five gates, 
 and on the south by Fort St. George. It is 
 occupied by the Society for the Propagation 
 of the Gospel, the London Missionary Society, 
 the Church Missionary Society, the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society, the Church of Scotland, 
 the American Board, and the Free Church of 
 Scotland. (See Hindostan.) 
 
 MADURA : A city of Southern Hindos- 
 tan, 136 miles north-east from Cape Comorin, 
 and 210 miles south-west from Madras, and. 
 contains a population of 50,000. The district 
 of Madura has a population of 1,300,000.- 
 The city itself is encircled by w^alls, and may 
 be emphatically termed a city of temples.. 
 The largest, as described by Mr. Hoisington,. 
 missionary of the Board, in 1834, has at least 
 10,000 massive pillars of stone, presenting on; 
 every side, in full relief, curiously wrought 
 images of every description — men. women,, 
 children, beasts, and creatures of the wildest 
 fancy. This vast palace, covering ground suf- 
 ficient almost for the site of a town, is in a. 
 dilapidated state, and the immense wealth that, 
 existed at the period of its construction has* 
 departed. Madura is the city of the ancient ' 
 Tamil kings, and the seat of Brahminicar 
 pride in this part of India. The _ American. 
 Board commenced its mission here in 1834. 
 
 MAGEZZIN : A Karen village on the^ 
 
586 
 
 MAHE— MASULIPATAM. 
 
 confines of Arrocan, in Burmah, and an out- 
 station of one of the Karcu missions of the 
 American Baptist Union. 
 
 MALTA : An island in the Mediterranean, 
 60 miles from Cicily, probably the ancient 
 lielita, where Paul was shipwrecked. Pop. 
 70,000. A mission was commenced here by 
 the I^ndou Missionary Society in 1811, and 
 continued for several years. In 1815, Rev. 
 William Jowett was sent to Malta by the 
 Church Missionary Society, where he re- 
 mained several years. In 1822, the Ameri- 
 can Board established a printing press in 
 Malta, under the direction of Rev. Daniel 
 Temple and Mr. lloman Ilallock, which was 
 removed to Smyrna, Dec. 23, 1833. (See p. 
 126). The Church Missionary Society have 
 a college there. (See p. 633.) 
 
 MALCOM PETH : A temporary health 
 station of the American Board upon the 
 Ghauts, towards the south of Hindostan. 
 
 MALLIGAUM : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society, 150 miles north-east of 
 Bombay. 
 
 MAMRE : Station of the United Brethren, 
 in South Africa, on the Beka river. 
 
 MANEPY: A parish in the district of 
 Jaffna, Ceylon, 4>i miles N.W. of Jaffnapatam, 
 and 4 from Batticotta : a station of the Ame- 
 rican Board. 
 
 MANDAHASALIE : In Southern Hin- 
 dostan, and one of the most recent stations of 
 the American Board, in connexion with the 
 Madura mission. 
 
 MA U BEE : A Karen village in the Bas- 
 sein province of Southern Burmah, near Arrar 
 can, and an out-station of the Bassein mission 
 of the American Baptist Union. 
 
 MANGAIA, or MANAIA : One of the 
 Herv-ey Islands, having a station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society. 
 
 MAXGALORE : A station of the Basle 
 Missionary Society, in the province of Canara, 
 440 miles S. S. E. of Bombay. 
 
 MANUA : One of the Samoa Islands, cir- 
 cular in form, and so elevated as to be visible 
 at the distance of 40 or 50 miles. The inha- 
 bitants are regarded as a conquered people, 
 and are despised and oppressed by the inhabit- 
 ants of other islands. London Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 MAXOXO : One of the Samoan Islands ; 
 a station of the London Missionary Society. 
 Though small, it has obtained a kind of po- 
 litical supremacy over the whole group of these 
 islands. 
 
 MANAARGOODY : A station of the 
 Wesley an Missionary Society in Southern In- 
 ^ia. 
 
 MANEROO : An extensive district in 
 A Qstralia, on the south side of Murrunbidgee 
 river, with a wide-spread pastoral population. 
 Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. 
 
 MANTI : One of the Hervey islands ; 
 
 about 15 miles in circumference. Population, 
 300. 
 
 MAPUMULO : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board in South Africa, among the Zulus, 
 near Port Natal. 
 
 MARE : One of the New Hebrides, where 
 is a station of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 MARAETAI: A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New Zealand, on the 
 cast coast, at the mouth of the river Waikato. 
 
 MARSOVAN : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Armenians, situated in 
 Northern Asia Minor, not far from the Black 
 Sea, S. E. from Samsoou. 
 
 MARTABAN : A province in Southern 
 Burmah, annexed to the British dominions, in 
 part in 1826, and in part in 1852. The city 
 is near the mouth of the Salwen river, and is 
 a seat of the missionary operations of the 
 American Baptist Union. 
 
 MARONITES : A sect of Eastern Chris- 
 tians, who follow the Syrian rites, and are sub- 
 ject to the Pope ; their principal habitation 
 being on Mount Libanus, between the Ansar 
 rians to the north and the Druses to the south. 
 According to Mosheim, the sect had its origin 
 among the Monothelites, who, having been 
 condemned by the Council of Constantinople, 
 found a refuge on Mount Lebanon, which, at 
 the time, formed an asylum for vagabonds of 
 all sorts. About the conclusion of the seventh 
 century they were called Maronites, after 
 Maro, their first bishop. They retained the 
 opinions of the Monothelites until the twelfth 
 century, when they abandoned them, and were 
 admitted into the church of Rome. The na- 
 tion is divided into two classes, the common 
 people and the sheikhs. (See SJieikh.) They 
 live dispersed in the mountains, in villages, 
 hamlets, and even detached houses. The whole 
 nation consists of cultivators, living frugally, 
 with many enjoyments and few wants. Though 
 dependent on the Pope, they continue to elect 
 a head under the title of Batrak, or patriarch 
 of Antioch. Their priests marry, but must 
 not marry widows, nor marry a second time. 
 They say mass in Syriac, which they do not 
 understand ; but the Gospel is read in Arabic, 
 and the communion administered in both kinds. 
 They have about 200 convents for men and 
 women, of the order of St. Anthony. There 
 are Maronites, however, in Syria, who regard 
 the church of Rome with aversion and abhor- 
 rence. 
 
 MARQUESAS ISLANDS : A group of 
 islands extending from 7^ to 10° S. lat. and 
 1380 to 140° W. long. They contain two 
 clusters, of five each. 
 
 MASULIPATAM : A town in the presi- 
 dency of Madras, and capital of a district of 
 the same name on the Coromandel coast, 230 
 miles N. N.E. of Madras. It is very exten- 
 sive, and for a Hindoo town tolerably well 
 built. It stands on the only part of the Coro- 
 mandel coast which is not beat by a heavy 
 
MATAH— MAURITIUS. 
 
 537 
 
 Burf. It is the residence of the district col- 
 lector aud judge. Population of the district 
 in 1822, 454 754 persons. Church Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 MATAH : A Karen village in Tenasserim, 
 Burmah, and an out-station of the Tavoy mis- 
 sion of the American Baptist Missionary 
 Union. 
 
 MATURA : A town in the southern extre- 
 mity of Ceylon, 82 miles S. E. of Columbo. 
 Population, 3,000 ; surrounded by populous 
 villages. The Matura priests are famed for 
 their knowledge of the Pali literature. The 
 people are generally poor, ignorant, and super- 
 stitious, and addicted to the disgusting practice 
 of devil-dancing. A station of the Wesley- 
 ans, and also of the Gospel Propagation So- 
 ciety. 
 
 MATANTU : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on Savaii ; one of the 
 Samoa islands. 
 
 MAUI : One of the Sandwich Island group, 
 lying to the IS". E. of Hawaii, being about 48 
 miles in length, 29 in its widest part, with a 
 surface of about 600 square miles. The Ame- 
 rican Board have five stations on this island. 
 
 MAULMAIN : One of the Tenasserim pro- 
 vinces in British Burmah. The capital city 
 bears the same name, and is situated on the 
 Salwen river, twenty-five miles from its mouth. 
 It is the seat of two missions — one for Bur- 
 mans, and the other for Karens — of the Amer- 
 ican Baptist Union ; and has hitherto been 
 the residence of most of the American Baptist 
 missionaries in Burmah. Dr. Judson resided 
 here the greater part of the time from 1827 to 
 the period of his death. 
 
 MAUPITI : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society in the Society Islands. 
 
 MAURITIUS, or, ISLE OF FRANCE : 
 An island in the Indian Ocean, belonging to 
 Great Britain, situated between 19° 58' and 
 20- 32' South latitude, 70 or 80 miles N.E. of 
 the Isle of Bourbon, and 500 E. of Madagas- 
 car. It is an irregular oval, about 36 miles 
 long, by 18 to 27 broad ; area, about 500,000 
 acres. The population in 1832 consisted of 
 13,000 whites, 26,000 free colored people, and 
 89,000 slaves, now freemen. Its appearance 
 is in the highest degree picturesque and beau- 
 tiful. There are several ranges of mountains 
 in different parts of the island, from which 
 flow numerous small rivers and streams. The 
 whole coast is surrounded by reefs of coral, 
 with the exception of a few openings through 
 which vessels approach the shore. The capi- 
 tal is Port Louis, on the north-west side of the 
 island, population 1830, 26,000. The ther- 
 mometer in Mauritius generally ranges from 
 79 to 88 degrees. The soil requires but little 
 labor to cultivate, and is particularly favor- 
 able to the sugar-cane ; but most of the fruits 
 of the temperate zones liave been introduced 
 and naturalized. It came into the possession 
 of the English in 1810, by conquest from the 
 
 French. It has several small dependencies, the 
 chief of which are the Seychelles Islands, about 
 900 miles north of Mauritius. 
 
 Lihabitarits.—Amoug the colored people of 
 Mauritius, there are at present supposed to be 
 about 5000 natives of Madagascar. 1'he great 
 majority of the Europeans, both at Mauritius 
 and the Seychelles, are Roman Catholics. 
 
 MISSION. 
 London Missionary Society. — This Soci- 
 ety sent out Mr. Le Brun, in 1814, who arrived 
 at Mauritius in June of that year, and opened 
 a school for the French children at Port Louis, 
 and engaged in the circulation of the Scrip- 
 tures and tracts. In the following year, he 
 had gathered a small congegation, amid much 
 opposition, and in connection with which was 
 a prosperous Sunday-school of 50 children. 
 He was countenanced by the Governor, who 
 wrote to the Directors of the Society in 1816, 
 expressing his approbation of Mr. Le Brun's 
 labors, and stating that he had succeeded in 
 inducing the free colored population to attend 
 upon his instructions. In 1818, he had suc- 
 ceeded in organizing 25 persons into a Chris- 
 tian Society at Port Louis. He was also em- 
 ployed by Gov. Farquhar in the religious in- 
 struction of two brothers of a principal chief 
 of Madagascar. In the following year he had 
 gathered a church of 20 members, and six 
 more were candidates for admission. Two of 
 the converts he had appointed to preach in 
 the suburbs of Port Louis. An auxiliary 
 Missionary Society had been formed at that 
 place, the proceeds of which were to be appli- 
 ed to the support of the Madagascar Mission. 
 The inhabitants of Mauritius manifested a 
 strong inclination to cast aside their super- 
 stitions. In 1820, Mr. Jones, a missionary 
 under appointment to Madagascar, spent a 
 portion of the year in the instruction of Mr. 
 Telfair's slaves at Belombre, with great suc- 
 cess. Mr. Telfair wrote to the Directors that 
 a general spirit of religious feeling pervaded 
 all classes of the numerous population on his 
 plantation ; and that there had been a propor- 
 tionate improvement in their conduct and in- 
 dustry. The school was continued after Mr. 
 Jones left, and many of the slaves learned to 
 read. In 1821, the church at Port Louis had 
 increased to 34, and the year following to 43. 
 Mr. Le Brun continued his labors amid many 
 obstacles, both from the superstitions of the 
 people, and the opposition to the instruction 
 of slaves. His church continued to increase, 
 and he extended his efforts to several places 
 around. But in 1832 his health failed ; and, 
 assigning the care of his flock to pious friends, 
 he visited the Cape of Good Hope, with the 
 hope of recruiting his health ; but there he 
 experienced a severe attack, and was obliged 
 to return to England. The work wliieh he 
 had commenced and continued for 18 ycai-s, 
 against much bitter opposition and persecu- 
 
588 
 
 MAURITnJ&-MAVELICARE. 
 
 tion, had been successful beyond liis expecta- 
 tion, l^ublic woi-sliip had been maintained in 
 several diflbrent places ; the slaves had been 
 instructctl ; day and Sabbath-schools had been 
 niaiutaincd ; a churyh had been gathered of 
 about 00 mcmbera, two of whom were en- 
 gaged in preaching the Gospel. The state of 
 the island being peculiarly unfavorable to the 
 successful prosecution of missionary labor, the 
 Directors did not think it desirable to resume 
 the mission ; but Mr. Lc Brun, after spending 
 some time in Europe, returned on his own ac- 
 count to Mauritius, and took the pastoral 
 charge of the people among whom he had 
 formerly labored. 
 
 In 183G, when the missionaries were driven 
 from Madagascar, Mr. Johns was instructed to 
 remain at Mauritius, devoting himself to the 
 instruction of the natives of Madagascar, whom 
 he found on the island ; and also to embrace 
 every opportunity of keeping up a communi- 
 cation with Madagascar. And Rev. D. Jones, 
 who had been a few years in England, re- 
 turned to Mauritius, to make himself useful 
 there, and await the changes at Madagascar. 
 Two schools were established for Malagasy 
 children, consisting of 52 boys and 23 girls. 
 Public worship was maintained by them and 
 Mr. Le Brun, in French and English. The 
 door was at this time open for the instruction 
 of all classes of the people of color. In Octo- 
 ber, 1837, Mr. Baker removed to Piton, 12 
 miles from Port Louis, where he was employing 
 the press for the difiusion of the Gospel and 
 promoting the cause of education. 
 ^ In 1845, Mr. Le Brun reported a strong re- 
 ligious movement among the people at Port 
 Louis ; and the 200 free sittings in his chapel 
 ■were insufficient for the accommodation of the 
 negroes, who attended on the Sabbath. An 
 adult Sunday-school of 80 to 100 persons had 
 been formed, consisting of Malagasy, Africans, 
 Malays, and Creoles. 
 
 Before Mr. Johns's death, he had purchased 
 a piece of land at Moka, 12 miles from Port 
 Louis, intending to form a settlement of the 
 Christian refugees from Madagascar. After 
 his death, Mrs. Johns, with the assistance of 
 Mr. Le Brun, proceeded to carry out his plan. 
 She afterwards returned to England, and the 
 station was committed to the charge of a son 
 of Mr. Le Brun, who soon gathered a congrega- 
 tion of more than 100 Malagasy, and on the 
 1st of January, 1845, he formed a church of 
 seren members ; and there were many earnest 
 inquirers. With Ramiadina and Rafaralahy, 
 both men of decided piety, he commenced a 
 course of theological instruction. At the same 
 time, they were appointed to labor at an out- 
 station, in the neighboring mountains. Mrs. 
 Le Brun had established a promising Malagasy 
 school of 55 children. In the year 1847, six 
 new members were added to the church at 
 Moka, and there was a class of eight inquirers. 
 Mr. Le Brun this year established another out- 
 
 station, among several villages of Malagasy, at 
 a place called La Nouvelle Decouvertc. I'he 
 people came with carts and donkeys for Ra- 
 miadana and his wife, the native teachers, and 
 bore them away with joy. GO or 70 of them 
 commenced meeting for public worship on the 
 Sabbath. The^^^ proposed to build a place of 
 worship at their own expense, and a woman 
 gave a piece of ground for the chapel and a 
 house for the teacher. And adults as well as 
 children commenced learning to read. On 
 Christmas day, 1848, the new chapel was ded- 
 icated by Mr. Lo Brun, in the presence of a 
 crowded assembly. 
 
 In 1851 Mr. Peter Le Brun was appointed 
 to the station at Moka, and Mr. J. J. Le Brun 
 joined his father, in the pastoral office at Port 
 Louis, especially for the purpose of taking 
 charge of the theological instruction of some 
 young men, natives of Madagascar, with the 
 view of their becoming evangelists in their 
 fatherland. 
 
 The latest intelligence from this mission is 
 contained in letters from Mr. J. J. Le Brun, 
 dated Port Louis, June 21,1852, and from Mr. 
 Peter Le Brun, dated Moka, Aug. 25, 1852. 
 Mr. J. J. Lc Brun says the people at Port 
 Louis are sick of popery, and are everywhere 
 asking for the pure doctrines of the Christian 
 faith. The Bible is in great demand. At all 
 the stations and out-stations, there is an in- 
 crease of numbers, and many inquirers are 
 coming to a saving knowledge of the truth. 
 Mr. Peter Le Brun says the mission at Moka 
 has made decided progress, both in numbers, 
 and in moral and spiritual improvement. On 
 the 21st of August, 1852, a new and commo- 
 dious place of worship was opened at this sta- 
 tion, and near the same time, 18 were added 
 to the church. 
 
 The Malagasy refugees, numbering about 
 500, residing at Mauritius, have continued to 
 share in the oversight of the Messrs. Le Brun ; 
 and it is believed that many of them will be 
 raised up to be the future instructors of their 
 countrymen in Madagascar. 
 
 The latest reports from these missions do not 
 give the statistics. The following table gives 
 the present number of stations and missionar 
 ries ; but the number of church members at 
 Port Louis is taken from the report of 1850, 
 and at Moka the number has been collected 
 from reports of additions from time to time, 
 and may not from that cause be perfectly ac- 
 curate. 
 
 stations. 
 
 Missionaries. 
 
 Church members. 
 
 Port Louis, 
 Moka, 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 140 
 33 
 
 Total, 
 
 173 
 
 MAYELICARE : A large and populous 
 town, near the foot of the Ghauts, and much 
 shut out from European intercourse. Popula- 
 tion of the district, about 270,000. The pago- 
 
MEIGNAPOORAM— MICRONESIA. 
 
 539 
 
 das are numerous, and there are 21 Syrian 
 churches within a few miles of the town. 
 
 MEIGNAPOOEAM : A station of the 
 Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly 
 district, India. 
 
 MEKUATLING : Station of the French 
 Protestants in South Africa, four or five days' 
 journey N. W. of Morija. 
 
 MELBOURNE : The metropolis of Aus- 
 tralia. In 1838, it contained but three houses 
 deserving the name. It is now a large place. 
 It is occupied by the Wesleyans and the Soci- 
 ety for the Propagation of the Gospel. 
 
 MERGUI : The name of a city and a pro- 
 vince in British Burmah. The city is on one 
 of the branches of the Tenasserim river, and is 
 a station of the Tavoy mission of the Ameri- 
 can Baptist Union. 
 
 METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH, 
 MISSIONS OP : See Missionary Society of 
 tlie Methodist Episcopal Church. 
 
 MEXICO : This country exhibits at the 
 present time, a striking exemplification of the 
 legitimate tendencies of unmitigated Roman- 
 ism. After the revolution which separated 
 Mexico from the mother country, a republican 
 constitution was adopted, after the model of 
 our own, with the important exception, that 
 the Church of Rome was made the established 
 religion, and no other was tolerated. The 
 
 Eriests have borne rule from the beginning, 
 aving unlimited resources at their command ; 
 yet the people continue in abject ignorance, 
 misruled by demagogues, and constantly con- 
 vulsed by internal dissensions and revolutions, 
 demonstrating, beyond a doubt, the utter in- 
 compatibility of Romanism and a republican 
 form of government. At present, so far as we 
 can ascertain, there is little if any opening for 
 missionary efibrts in that miserable land. The 
 present government appears to be sold to the 
 priests. Yet, in the unsettled state of affairs, 
 we cannot tell what a day may bring forth ; 
 and it is to be hoped that the increasing inter- 
 course of the people of Mexico with those of 
 the United States, since the conclusion of the 
 late war, may be preparing them for the re- 
 ception of the Gospel, when the way shall be 
 opened for its introduction. 
 
 MICHIPOCOTON : An Indian town on 
 the northern shore of Lake Superior, formerly 
 a station of the Ojibwa mission of the Ameri- 
 can Baptist Union. 
 
 MICRONESIA : The name Micronesia is 
 derived from the Greek Blikros, small, and 
 Nesion, a little island, signifying a region of 
 small islands or islets. It is applied to a por- 
 tion of the Central Archipelago, Pacific Ocean, 
 including the Kingsmill Group. As this term 
 is of recent application, it is not generally laid 
 down on the maps, nor very well defined. The 
 Kingsmill Group lies on both sides of the 
 equator, and consists of 15 principal islands, 
 all coral, densely covered with cocoanut groves, 
 having a population of about 50,000. They 
 
 are governed by independent kings, have a 
 limited intercourse with each other, are resorted 
 to by whalers, and occupied by a company of 
 English traders, vi^ho export annually more 
 than 1200 barrels of cocoanut oil from Pitt's 
 Island alone. 
 
 Population. — The natives of these islands 
 lead a life of indolence. The cocoanut, which 
 everywhere abounds, supplies their few wants 
 with little labor. Their chief employment is 
 the manufacture of cocoanut oil, which is now 
 a source of great profit to the few traders, and 
 might bring a large revenue to the people. 
 They also make an excellent kind of molasses 
 from the cocoanut sap. From this tree almost 
 every thing which they eat, drink, wear, live 
 in, or use in any way, is obtained. The people 
 are divided into three classes, chiefs, landhold- 
 ers, and slaves. They live in small communi- 
 ties, regarding the oldest of their number as a 
 kind of patriarch. Polygamy is common. 
 They are hospitable, and ready to share the 
 last morsel with the needy. In each town is 
 a ** stranger's house," where travelers find a 
 temporary home. Some of these are large, 
 and serve as council chambers and places of 
 amusement. Their religion scarcely deserves 
 the name. They have, so far as is at present 
 known, no idols and no priests. They have a 
 loose system of spirit-worship — veneration for 
 the spirits of the dead — but their confidence 
 in it is weakened. When one dies, the body 
 is placed upon mats, in the centre of the house, 
 and rubbed with cocoanut oil till the flesh is 
 gone ; and then the bones are placed in the 
 loft or thrown into the sea. A stone is placed 
 near the house, as a resting place for the spirit, 
 and offerings are made to it twice a year. 
 The tabu system has little force. They have 
 but few traditions, and cannot be said to be 
 very superstitious. 
 
 MISSION. 
 
 American Board . — The mission to Micro- 
 nesia had its origin, in part at least, in the 
 belief of some of the officers of the A. B. C. 
 F. M. that something of this kind was needed, 
 more fully to develop the benevolence and 
 strengthen the Christian character of the 
 Sandwich Islands Christians. Nov. 18th, 1851, 
 Rev. Benjamin G. Snow and Rev. Luther H. 
 Gulick, M. D., with their wives, sailed from 
 Boston for the Sandwich Islands, and on the 
 17th of January, 1-852, Rev. Albert A. Stur- 
 gess and wife followed them. Dr. Gulick was 
 born at the Islands, his father having been 
 long a missionary there. The Hawaiian Mis- 
 sionary Society had been already formed in 
 May, 1851, and was expected to cooperate with 
 them in commencing a mission in Micronesia. 
 The first company arrived at Honolulu, March 
 29th, and great interest was at once awakened. 
 The churches contributed with very great lib- 
 erality to their missionary society, and, by the 
 end of its first year, §5,000 had come into the 
 
540 
 
 MINISTERIAL EDUCATION. 
 
 treasory from Hawaiian sources. It was then 
 proposed to pureluuse a vessel for the new mis- 
 sion, antl more than half the cost was raised 
 ftt Honolulu alone.' Two natives were wanted, 
 at first, Ui be connected with the mission, and 
 seven oflers of service were soon received. A 
 toncher. Daniela Opunui, and a deacon, Berita 
 Kaaikaula, both trom the second church in 
 Honolulu, were selected, with their wives. 
 
 The company sailed from Honolulu, July 
 15th, accompanied by liev. E. W. Clark, Sec- 
 retary of the Hawaiian Missionary Society, 
 Rev. Mr. Kekela, native pastor of one of the 
 churches, and a brother of Dr. Gulick. They 
 reached Pitt's Island, latitude 3^ 20' N., and 
 longitude 172^ 57' E., of the Kingsmill group, 
 on the 5th of August. These islands are of 
 the low, coral formation, and it was thought 
 best to form the mission on one of the high 
 islands. On the 22d of August they reached 
 Strong's Island, 600 miles north of west from 
 Pitt's Island. Obtaining the cordial assent of 
 the king, who, with some of his people, had 
 obtained some knowledge of the English lan- 
 guage from traders, it was arranged that Mr. 
 Snow and the teacher, Opunui, should estab- 
 lish themselves there. The whole company, 
 however, proceeded together to Ascension 
 Island, or Bonabe, 300 miles distant, latitude 
 7° K. Here a station was selected for 
 Dr. Gulick, Mr. Sturges and Kaaikaula, and 
 they landed, Sept. 20th, under apparently 
 favorable circumstances, encouraged by the 
 king, and by a young man whose official title 
 is Nanakin, and who seemed to have secured 
 the full control of state afiairs. Resident 
 foreign traders also encouraged the formation 
 of the mission, of one of whom a house was 
 hired. Others of the company now returned 
 to Strong's Island, where Mr. and Mrs. Snow, 
 with their Hawaiian fellow-laborers, were cor- 
 dially welcomed by the king, on the Cth of 
 October, to their future home. 
 
 On the 13th of November, Mr. Snow took 
 possession of a house built for him by the king 
 and chiefs, and on the second Sabbath in De- 
 cember, he held his first public service with 
 the natives. At the close of the first year, 
 (Oct. 1853,j this service had been regularly 
 sustained, the congregations varying from 75 
 to 150. The king used his influence to secure j 
 the attendance of the people, and was always ' 
 present himself, — with his wife and family, — a '' 
 very attentive listener. He had sent his young- ! 
 est son, a bright boy about ten years of age, j 
 to reside with Mr. Snow. A school of about | 
 30 boys and girls manifested much interest in i 
 learning to read and spell. But the mission 
 company had been deeply afflicted by the 
 death of Opunui, in August. Other trials, 
 too, had been experienced, such as have so 
 often and so sorely afflicted missionaries on j 
 the islands of the Pacific. In many instances, I 
 the deportment and the kindness of captains 
 of vessels and other foreigners had been most ' 
 
 cheering ; but one vessel had been at the 
 island, with plenty of brandy and othor 
 liquors, producing great evil ; and about the 
 close of the year, the presence of several ves- 
 sels occasioned an outbreak of licentiousness 
 which had been exceedingly trying. 
 
 Messrs. Sturges and Gulick commenced 
 their labors in behalf of the people of Ascen- 
 sion Island, among the Kittle tribe. But, in 
 June, 1853, Dr. Gulick removed to the Metar 
 lanim tribe, at Shalong Point, the landward 
 extremity of Taman Island, which lies in the 
 mouth of Metalim harbor, and is about four 
 miles in circumference. He had previously 
 visited the tribe, secured the protection of the 
 chief, and built a house. In July, he had 
 opened a school, some of his pupils being 
 adults, and three of them chiefs. They seemed 
 to have the entire confidence of the rulers, who 
 afforded them complete protection. Their 
 families had been remarkably healthy, but 
 they had been afflicted with the loss of a 
 friend, Mr. Lewis Corgat, a trader who had 
 shown them great kindness, and of whom they 
 had some hope that he was a true Christian. 
 They had two of his children in their families, 
 whom they hoped to bring up for usefulness. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 
 ll 
 
 j 
 
 9 
 Pi 
 
 Apcension Island 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 "T 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 30 
 80 
 
 Shalong Point 
 
 Strong's Island 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 MINISTERIAL EDUCATION : In eve- 
 ry effort, looking to the spread of the Gospel 
 among men, reference must always be had 
 to the Christian ministry. In Christ's great 
 plan for the recovery of our lost world, the 
 ministry is made to hold a fundamental place, 
 and this institution can never be set aside, or 
 even lightly regarded, without the most inju- 
 rious consequences. Any serious deficiency in 
 this respect, paralyzes the whole movement of 
 the church, in her great contest with the pow- 
 ers of evil. Hence it is, that the most far- 
 seeing minds in every age of the church have 
 given special thought to this subject. No 
 question with them has been more vital than 
 this — how shall a sufficient number of men, of 
 the right stamp of character, be sought out 
 and fitted for the responsible work of the 
 Christian ministry ? 
 
 We shall not now attempt any general his- 
 tory of this subject, as it stands connected 
 with the growth and prosperity of the church 
 at large. Our object will be simply to give 
 some brief account of the methods by which 
 the ministry has hitherto been supplied in this 
 
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION. 
 
 541 
 
 country, and more especially to set forth the 
 present condition of this interest among the 
 different religious denominations of our land. 
 
 The early ministers in this country -yvere, 
 almost without exception, men who had been 
 educated and trained for their work, in the old 
 world ; and in the great majority of casts they 
 had filled the pastoral office before coming 
 hither. The intolerance and persecution which 
 drove from their homes so large a portion of 
 these early emigrants, would be likely to bear, 
 with peculiar severity, upon non-conforming 
 ministers ; and hence it was, that so large a 
 number of persons of this class were found in 
 the early settlements. 
 
 At no period has this country been bettef 
 supplied with religious teachers than during 
 the first few years after these settlements be- 
 gan. It has been estimated that there was in 
 the New England colonies, twenty years after 
 the landing at Plymouth, a graduate of Oxford 
 or Cambridge college, for every 240 inhabit- 
 ants. A few of these graduates were employ- 
 ed in the civil administration of the colonies, 
 but most of them were in the ministry. 
 
 But as the population of the country in- 
 creased, and as an adequate supply of ministers 
 from abroad could not be depended upon, the 
 thoughts of good men began to turn toward 
 some method for raising up, on these shores, 
 a supply of Christian teachers. In the year 
 163G, the foundations of Harvard College were 
 laid, amid much sacrifice and self-denial, with 
 special reference to this sacred interest. From 
 this time forward, as new churches were plant- 
 ed, or as the early ministers passed away by 
 death, the ministerial office was supplied, in 
 great measure, from among the graduates of 
 the infant college. More than half of its gra- 
 duates, during the first century of its existence, 
 entered into the labors of the ministry. Cotton 
 Mather, in his Magnalia, has given us a list of 
 the churches in the New England colonies, 
 for the year 1696, with their ministers, by 
 which it appears that there were then 129 
 churches, having 116 pastors, of whom 101 
 were graduates of Harvard College. In the 
 year 1692, the College of William and Mary, 
 Ya., was founded, and in 1700 Yale College, 
 in Ct. To these three institutions the churches 
 for a long time were wont to look for a sup- 
 ply of educated ministers. For almost fifty 
 years no other college was added to the list. 
 In 1746, the College of New Jersey, at Prince- 
 ton, was founded, and from that time forward 
 colleges have been springing up, numerously 
 in all parts of the land. In the year 1800, 
 we had 24 institutions bearing this name, and 
 now the number has increased to 120. It 
 must be confessed, however, that many of these 
 institutions are hardly deserving of the name, 
 though some of the smallest of them aspire to 
 be called universities. Still they have, to a 
 very great extent, been founded lor the prima- 
 ry purpose of training up ministers of the 
 
 Gospel for the several denominations to which 
 they belong. Of these institutions the Bap- 
 tists have the control of 24 ; the Methodists of 
 10 ; the Episcopalians of 7, and the Catholic? 
 of 9. The controlling influence in almost ah 
 the rest is Congregational or Presbyterian. 
 
 Until the beginning of the present century, 
 the cause of ministerial education had but a 
 slow growth. There was a sure, but at no 
 time a rapid advance. From the early periods 
 of the country. New England has borne a, 
 very prominent part in the work of raising up 
 ministers ; and the following table will show 
 at a glance, the progress made in this cause, 
 in New England, down to the year 1800. Thf 
 table dates from near the time of the found- 
 ing of Harvard College, and exhibits the num- 
 ber of ministers who have come forth from 
 the N. E. colleges, arranged in periods of ten 
 years : — 
 
 
 Ministers 
 
 
 Ministers. 
 
 From 1540-1650 
 
 . . 22;Trom 1720-1730 
 
 . . .195 
 
 " 1650-1660 
 
 . . 37 
 
 " 1730-1740 
 
 . . .195 
 
 ' ' 16G0-1670 
 
 . . 31 
 
 " 1740-1750 
 
 . . .176 
 
 " 1670-1680 
 
 . . 28 
 
 ' ' 1750-1760 
 
 . . .178 
 
 " 1680-1690 
 
 . . 35 
 
 " 1760-1770 
 
 ... 224 
 
 " 1690-1700 . 
 
 . . 72 
 
 " 1770-1780 
 
 . . .219 
 
 " 1700-1710 . 
 
 . . 95 
 
 " 1780-1790 
 
 . . .264 
 
 " 1710-1720 . 
 
 . . 99 
 
 " 1790-1800 
 
 . . .310 
 
 Soon after the beginning of the present cen- 
 tury, a new and decided impulse was imparted 
 to the whole cause of ministerial education. 
 The population of the country, which until 
 then had been found mostly along the Atlan- 
 tic shores, began to pour westward, and take 
 possession of the vast territories which had 
 been kept r^ady for its reception. About the 
 same time, too, the Foreign Missionary enter- 
 prise was started, creating an additional de- 
 mand for Christian laborers. A new sense of 
 responsibility was enkindled in the church to- 
 ward the perishing millions of the heathen 
 world. These causes conspired to produce a 
 greatly increased activity in the work of bring- 
 ing forward candidates for the sacred office. 
 Under the pressure which was then felt upon 
 this subject, the American Education Society 
 was formed, in the year 1815, which very soon 
 began to lend a powerful aid for the further- 
 ance of this great work. The evidence of this 
 progress may be distinctly seen, by continuing 
 the table which we have given above, down to 
 the year 1840. This table is confined, as be- 
 fore, to the New England colleges. 
 
 Ministers. 
 
 From 1800-1810 427 
 
 " 1810-1820 635 
 
 " 1820-1830 965 
 
 " 1830-1850 1077 
 
 This table, however, gives only a very par- 
 tial idea of the advance which has actually been 
 made since the beginning of the present century. 
 Most of the large New England colleges were 
 already in existence before the close of the last 
 century, while, since that time, in other parts 
 of the country, colleges have sprung up in great 
 
542 
 
 MINISTERIAL EDUCATION. 
 
 numbers. As already stated, there were in the 
 year 1800, but 24 colleges in the whole conn- 
 try, and now the number has increased to 120. 
 Almost all these institutions have been contri- 
 buting, according to their degree, to the ranks 
 of the ministry. 
 
 There is still another item, in this enumera- 
 tion, which ought not to be overlooked. The 
 two largest religious denominations in our land, 
 the Methodists and the Baptists, the former 
 numbering 12,484 churches, and the latter 
 9,G59, have to a very great extent, been sup- 
 plied with ministers, whose names are not found 
 m the catalogues of our colleges or theological 
 schools. And yet it must be confessed that the 
 ministry, in both these denominations, has been 
 remarkably efficient and useful. It has carried 
 the Gospel, with its life-giving powcr,araong the 
 moving masses of our population, which might 
 otherwise have been sadly neglected. Though, 
 as was inevitable, there have been many things 
 •exceptionable in connection with a ministry of 
 this sort, yet we may say with Paul, " Christ 
 is preached, and therein we rejoice, yea and 
 will rejoice." It is very greatly to the credit 
 of these two denominations, that as the country 
 grows older, and as their first rough work is 
 done, they are turning their attention more 
 and more to the great enterprise of rearing up 
 an educated ministry. The Baptists already 
 have some 24 colleges and 10 theological 
 schools in different parts of the land, devoted to 
 this work, and in many of the older portions 
 of the country, their ministry, for dignity and 
 culture, holds a most honorable position. The 
 Methodists, though somewhat later in the pro- 
 cess, are also giving earnest attention to this 
 subject. They already number 10 colleges, 
 some of them of a very efficient character. In 
 the department of distinct theological study 
 they have as ^et done but little. Thej^ have 
 one theological school, the " Biblical Institute," 
 at Concord, N. H., recently formed, which is 
 understood to be working very successfully. 
 In the absence, however, of theological schools, 
 the candidates for the ministry, in the Metho- 
 dist Church, are now for the most part carried 
 through a process of training, the details of 
 which we cannot stop minutely to describe, 
 but which serves as a partial substitute for a 
 regular course of theological study. 
 
 The growth of theological schools in this 
 country even among those denominations which 
 have given most attention to thorough minis- 
 terial education, has been of comparatively re- 
 cent date. In earlier times, the candidate for 
 the ministry, after he had closed his course of 
 college study, was accustomed to reside for a 
 season with some settled pastor, where he could 
 enjoy the benefit of books and conversation, 
 and could accustom himself also to the practi- 
 cal business of the ministry. This course of 
 training had its advantages and its disadvan- 
 tages. It gave the student an ample opportu- 
 nity to understand the details of the pastoral 
 
 work, but in the department of intellectual and 
 biblical training it was far less efficient than 
 the present method. In many cases too it was 
 unfavorable to breadth and liberality of senti- 
 ment. The teacher, especially if he was a man 
 of decided force of intellect, was apt to impress 
 his opinions, theological and practical, too 
 bodily upon the mind of the pupil. In this re- 
 spect, a theological seminary, with its several 
 teachers and its diverse studies, and with the 
 influence derived from the intercourse of stu- 
 dents among themselves, is far more- favorable 
 to completeness of education. 
 
 The oldest theological seminary in the coun- 
 try is that at Andover, Mass., which was found- 
 ed in the year 1807. The next in order is 
 the seminary at Princeton, founded in 1812. 
 Others soon followed, and now the number has 
 increased to 44. The number of students con- 
 nected with these seminaries in 1853 was not 
 far from 1650. The three largest are the semi- 
 nary at Princeton, the Union Seminary in New 
 York city, and the seminary at Andover. 
 
 In our estimate of the progress of the 
 cause of ministerial education in this country, 
 as seen in connection with the colleges, we 
 brought the reckoning down to the year 1840. 
 About this time a reaction commenced, which 
 has extended itself, to a greater or less de- 
 gree, throughout all the religious denomina- 
 tions in the land, and which is now beginning 
 to excite no little apprehension. JNotwith- 
 standing the very rapid growth of our popula- 
 tion, and the prosperous condition of the 
 country, in respect to almost all forms of sec- 
 ular enterprise, there has almost everywhere 
 been an actual retrograde as regards this 
 sacred interest. A few statistics will show 
 how the case stands better than any general 
 statements. 
 
 Let us take, in the first instance, the four 
 Congregational seminaries of New England, 
 Andover, Bangor, East Windsor, and New 
 Haven. The number who completed their 
 education in these four institutions 
 
 In 1840 was 81 
 
 "1841 " 81 
 
 "1842 " 68 
 
 "1843 " 82 
 
 "1844 " 54 
 
 "1845 " 71 
 
 "1846 " 70 
 
 In 1847 was 64 
 
 "1848 " 57 
 
 "1849 " 67 
 
 "1850 " 62 
 
 "1851 " 49 
 
 "1852 " 58 
 
 «'1853 " 45 
 
 In Lane Seminary, the course of events has 
 been somewhat different during the period of 
 time contemplated in the above tables, but on 
 the whole discouraging. In this seminary, 
 the number completing their education 
 
 In 1840 was 15 
 
 1841 
 1842 
 1843 
 1844 
 1845 
 1846 
 
 rn 1847 was 
 
 26 
 
 "1848 " 
 
 .. 28 
 
 "1849 " 
 
 14 
 
 "1850 " 
 
 13 
 
 "1851 " 
 
 "1852 " 
 
 10 
 
 8 
 
 "1853 " 
 
 8 
 
 Take, again, the operations of the two New 
 
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION. 
 
 543 
 
 ■ School Presbyterian Semiuaries in the State 
 of Kew York, Union and Auburn. Although 
 the Union Seminary in New York city has 
 continued to prosper, the Seminary at Auburn 
 has materially declined, so that if we take 
 their joint labors, there has been no increase 
 upon the field where they operate. The num- 
 ber completing their course of study in these 
 two seminaries, 
 
 In 1840 was 89 
 
 "1841 " 57 
 
 "1842 " 42 
 
 "1843 " 42 
 
 "1844 " 41 
 
 " 1845 " 37 
 
 "1846 " 43 
 
 In 1847 was 49 
 
 "1848 " 89 
 
 "1849 " 43 
 
 "1850 " 41 
 
 "1851 " 44 
 
 " 1852 " 46 
 
 "1853 " 36 
 
 The candidates for the ministry in connec- 
 tion with the Old School Presbyterian Church, 
 as given in the " Home and Foreign Record " 
 for February last, since the year 1844, range 
 as follows : — 
 
 In the year 1844 244 
 
 " " 1845 257 
 
 " " 1846. ...... 255 
 
 " " 1847 258 
 
 " " 1848 246 
 
 In the year 1849 250 
 
 " " 1850 241 
 
 " " 1851 254 
 
 " " 1852 267 
 
 " " 1853 240 
 
 This table, it will be noticed, does not give 
 the number who have closed their studies in 
 these years, as in the previous tables. It in- 
 cludes all the theological students who are con- 
 nected with the Old School seminaries. And 
 although there is little actual retrograde, yet 
 in a denomination numbering almost 3,000 
 churches, and rapidly extending, it is but a 
 meagre number of candidates for the sacred 
 office. In connection with this table, the 
 " Record " says, " The statistics of our candi- 
 dates for the ministry summon the church to 
 the mercy-seat, with an urgency of appeal 
 which no intelligent and zealous Christian will 
 resist." 
 
 The statistics now given, though they do 
 not cover the whole field, may doubtless be 
 taken as a fair indication of the tendencies of 
 the times in respect to the cause of ministerial 
 education. It is exceedingly difficult, in re- 
 gard to several of the religious denominations 
 of the country, to present the results, year by 
 year, as in the above tables, because so many 
 of their candidates for the ministry are not 
 found in their public institutions. Through- 
 out the Congregational and Presbyterian 
 fields, we may ascertain very accurately how 
 the matter stands, by studying the catalogues 
 of the theological schools. But the general 
 statements which are made on this subject in 
 the • publications of almost all the religious 
 bodies of the land, give ample proof that this 
 downward tendency is well nigh universal. 
 
 The following table, made up in part from 
 the census of 1850, and in part from statistics 
 gathered still later by the several religious 
 bodies to which they refer, is designed to give 
 a complete view, as far as possible, of the re- 
 
 ligious state of the country in respect to the 
 number of churches and ministers : 
 
 Churches. Ministers. 
 
 Methodist 12,484 10,280 
 
 Baptist 9,659 7,430 
 
 Presbyterian 4,639 3,765 
 
 Congregational 1,971 1,687 
 
 Episcopal 1,350 1,650 
 
 Roman Catholic 1,411 1,421 
 
 Lutheran 1,205 663 
 
 Christian 607 498 
 
 Quaker 715 
 
 Universalist 494 . 
 
 Moravian 331 . 
 
 German Reformed 260 273 
 
 Dutch Reformed 296 809 
 
 Unitarian 244 202 
 
 Mennonite 400 260 
 
 Jewish 31 
 
 Swedcnborg 15 
 
 OtherSects 1,857 
 
 While in some of the smaller of these bo- 
 dies there seems to be an adequate supply of 
 ministers, in most of them, and especially in 
 the large denominations, there is a very serious 
 deficiency. There is doubtless a considerable 
 number of ministers, who are not included in 
 this reckoning. The colleges of the country, 
 founded as they are upon religious principles, 
 and with primary reference to the raising up 
 of ministers, have always supplied themselves 
 with teachers, mainly from the ministerial 
 ranks ; and a large number of men are in this 
 way withdrawn from the pastoral office. The 
 religious press of the country, also, absorbs no 
 small number of those who have once been 
 settled in the ministry, yet in both these sta- 
 tions it is deemed highly important to have 
 men of this class, so that this may be regarded 
 as a part of the regular demand. Not a few 
 also are temporarily out of employment, and 
 their names may not appear in the statistics of 
 the denominations to which they belong ; but, 
 after making all due allowances, it cannot, we 
 think, be doubted that there is already a real 
 deficiency in the ministerial supply. The 
 especial cause for alarm, however, is with refer- 
 ence to the future. The tendency, at present 
 is clearly downward, and unless this is soon 
 arrested, it will entail upon the churches the 
 most serious consequences. 
 
 The Foreign Missionary enterprise has 
 now become one of such growing magnitude 
 as to demand a considerable number of men, 
 efficiently to carry on its operations. The calls 
 in behalf of this work were never more press- 
 ing than now. Although the number of or- 
 dained ministers employed by the several For- 
 eign Missionary Boards in this country is not 
 large, as compared with the number of minis- 
 ters in the home field, yet it is one most im- 
 portant and growing item in the demand made 
 upon the churches in this country for ministe- 
 rial education. 
 
 The amount of agency exerted by education 
 societies in this country in the work of train- 
 ing up men for the ministry, may be judged 
 of by reference to the following items : The 
 
6U 
 
 MIRUT— MISS. SOC. OF THE METH. EPISCOPAL CHURCH. 
 
 American Education Society, (including the 
 
 Earcnt society at Boston, and its Presbyterian 
 ranches,) since its formation, in the year 
 1815, has raised and expended in the work of 
 ministerial education not far from $1,300,000. 
 It has afforded aid to 4500 young men in their 
 course of etlucation for the ministry. The 
 amount raisetl by this society for the year 
 ending April 30, 1854, was 838,914, and the 
 number of young men assisted for the same 
 year was 432. 
 
 The A. B. C. F. M. since its formation has 
 sent out into the great foreign mission field, 
 not far from 325 ordained ministers. Of these 
 140 have been beneficiaries of the American 
 Education Societjr. About one-third of the 
 Congregational mmisters of New England at 
 the nresent time were aided in their Education 
 by this society, while more than one-third of 
 that large body of men who have labored so 
 eflBciently in connection with the Home Mis- 
 sionary Society, were raised up in the same way. 
 
 The Board of Education of the Presbyterian 
 Church (Old School,) has since its formation 
 furnished aid to about 2200 young men. How 
 many of these men have been employed in 
 Foreign and Home missionary service, we have 
 no means at hand for determining. The 
 amount raised by this Board, from year to 
 year, for the purposes of ministerial education, 
 IS not far from $35,000, and the number of 
 young men now assisted yearly, is but little 
 less than 400. 
 
 There is also an Education Society in con- 
 nection with the Baptist churches, which has 
 rendered efficient aid in the same great work, 
 but the exact details we cannot give. 
 
 ^ In view of the facts thus set forth, it is ob- 
 vious_ that the churches of this country are 
 drawing near to a time of serious embarrass- 
 ment, unless the most speedy and efficient 
 measures are employed to change the present 
 tendencies. There is an earnest call upon all 
 the friends of Christ to look above, to the great 
 Lord of the harvest, entreating him, " that he 
 would send forth laborers into the harvest." — 
 Eev. I. N. Tarbox. 
 
 MIRUT, or MEEROOT: Capital of a 
 district of the same name in Northern Hindos- 
 tan, 30 miles north-east of Delhi. It is the 
 residence of a revenue collector and judge, and 
 the head- quarters of a military force of 20,000 
 men, of whom about 3,000 are Europeans. 
 The Church Society have a mission there. 
 
 MIRZAPORE : A large and flourishing 
 town in the province of Allahabad, and dis- 
 trict of Mirzapore, situated on the south side 
 of the Ganrjcs, about 30 miles W. S.W. of Be- 
 nares. It IS one of the largest inland trading 
 towns, and has long been the grand mart fo'r 
 cotton. The population is supposed to be 
 about 60,000, and that of the whole district 
 1,000,000. The London Missionary Society 
 commenced its labors there in 1838. The city 
 was then comparatively new, and occupied 
 
 much the same position in regard to trace and 
 commerce, as Benares did with respect to re- 
 ligion. 
 
 MISSIONARY SOCIETY OF THE 
 METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH: 
 This Society was organized in the city of New 
 York, April 5, 1819, the following persona 
 being chiefly instrumental in its formation, viz., 
 Messrs. Freeborn Garretison, Samuel Merwin, 
 Joshua Smile, Thomas Mason, Laban Clarkj 
 Seth Crowell, Samuel Howe, Thomas Thorp, 
 and Nathan Bangs. Four of this venerable 
 band still linger among us, to witness, after 35 
 years, the growing efficiency of the enterprise 
 they were the honored instruments of inaugu- 
 rating. The General Conference, at Baltimore, 
 in 1820, fully endorsed the Society, and adopt- 
 ed it as one of the institutions of the church. 
 
 The Society embraces, by its constitution, 
 both foreign and domestic missions. The terms 
 of membership are, the annual contribution of 
 f 2 to its funds, or the contribution of $20 at one 
 time constitutes a member for life. The officers, 
 (except the corresponding secretary, who is ap- 
 pointed by the General Conference, and a vice- 
 president from each of the annual conferences,) 
 are elected by the Society, but must be mem- 
 bers of the Methodist Episcopal Church. The 
 Corresponding Secretary is under the direction 
 and control of the Board of Managers. Thia 
 Board consists of 32 managers chosen by the 
 Society, together with the president, vice-pres- 
 idents, secretaries, and treasurer ; and all or- 
 dained Methodist ministers, who are members 
 of the Society, are ex-oflficio members of the 
 Board of Managers. Each annual conference 
 has an auxiliary ; and auxiliaries and donors 
 are allowed to designate the mission to which 
 their contributions shall be applied. The an- 
 nual conferences are divided into mission dis- 
 tricts, with effective superintendents, and a 
 committee of one from each district, appointed 
 by the bishop, constitutes a General Missionary 
 Committee. This committee meets annually 
 in the city of New York, with the Board of 
 Managers, for fixing the amount to be drawn, 
 and in the division of it between the foreign 
 and domestic missions. This committee, also, 
 in concurrence with the Board of Managers 
 and at least two of the bishops, determine what 
 fields shall be occupied or continued as foreign 
 missions, the number of persons to be employ- 
 ed, and the amounts to be appropriated to 
 each. The same committee also determines the 
 amount for which each bishop may draw for 
 domestic missions in those conferences over 
 which he presides. But in the interim ihe 
 Board of Managers, with the bishop in charge 
 of the work proposed, may adopt a new field, 
 or provide for any unforseen emergency, not 
 exceeding $5,000. The General Committee 
 are amenable to the General Conference, to 
 whom they are required to make full reports of 
 their proceedings. There are also eleven 
 standing committees, and rules and regulations 
 
MISS. SOC. OF THE METH. EPISCOPAL CHURCH. 
 
 545 
 
 prescribing the duties of officers, regulating 
 the salaries of missionaries, &c. The Mission- 
 ary Board holds their regular meetings on the 
 third Wednesday of each month, at the com- 
 mittee rooms, in the city of New York. 
 
 The Society was incorporated by the Legis- 
 lature of the State of New York, in 1839, 
 which authorized it to hold property ; and 
 another act was passed in 1850, by which it 
 was authorized to receive legacies. 
 
 The mode of proceeding in raising funds for 
 the support of missions, the reader will find 
 fully described in the article on HoxME Missions, 
 under the head of Methodist Home Missions. 
 The moneys appropriated are paid out to the 
 missions under the direction of the Board, and 
 the accounts and vouchers are returned to the 
 treasurer by the superintendent of each mission. 
 For the right use of the moneys appropriated, 
 the Board is responsible. 
 
 When a foreign mission is authorized, the 
 bishop having charge of foreign missions for 
 the time being appoints the missionary or mis- 
 sionaries, making his selection from the whole 
 body of the ministry in the whole church. One 
 of the missionaries so appointed is made super- 
 intendent of the mission, and bears the same 
 relation to it, as far as circumstances will per- 
 mit, as a presiding elder to his district. Thus 
 each mission is instantly organized on the 
 organic principle of the church which originates 
 it ; namely, the principle of a responsible super- 
 intendent. The spiritual and disciplinary ad- 
 ministration of each foreign mission is under 
 the supervision of the bishop, aided by the 
 Corresponding Secretary ; but the estimates 
 for the salaries and other expenses of the mis- 
 sion are under the supervision and management 
 of the Board of Managers. Thus the spiritual 
 affairs of the mission are committed to the 
 bishops and its pecuniary interests exclusively 
 to the Board. If, when a foreign mission goes 
 into operation, the missionaries shall find 
 it expedient to institute schools, or employ 
 helpers or colporteurs, the authority of the 
 Board must be had expressly, both as respects 
 the persons, their salaries, and the objects con- 
 templated. This places the responsibility of 
 appointing the missionaries upon the bishops, 
 who from their general acquaintance with the 
 whole ministry in the church, and their facili- 
 ties for ascertaining the character and fitness of 
 any minister, can put their hands on the pro- 
 per men ; and the action of the bishop in mak- 
 ing the appointments is wholly independent of 
 the pecuniary considerations involved. He 
 selects the man ; the Board provides the means 
 to meet the expenses ; and yet the Board is 
 restricted from going beyond the general ap- 
 propriation or credit allowed by the General 
 Missionary Committee for each particular mis- 
 sion for the year. 
 
 In all this movement for making appropria- 
 tions, raising missionary funds, and instituting 
 and carrying on missions at home and abroad, 
 35 
 
 there is but one regular office under pay of the 
 society for salary, and this is the Corresponding 
 Secretary, who is required to give his whole 
 time to the work. He is allowed a clerk in 
 the office, to keep the records, to take charge 
 of business matters in his absence, and to at 
 tend to out-door business. In like manner the 
 Treasurer is allowed a clerk, to keep the books 
 and attend to the proper business of the trea- 
 sury; but the Treasurer receives no pay for 
 his own services. 
 
 Notwithstanding the favorable reception 
 which this society received at its inauguration 
 in 1819, yet, at its anniversary in 1820, the 
 amount of money reported was only $823 04. 
 The amount expended was $85 76. The next 
 year the amount reported was $2,328 76 ; and 
 the expenditure $407 37. Indeed it then seem- 
 ed more difficult to expend than to collect, 
 though the collections were sufficiently small. 
 So difficult was it to diffuse the missionary 
 spirit among the ministers and members of the 
 church, that the bishops seemed afraid to select 
 and appoint missionaries, and to draw on the 
 treasury, so that from the time of its organiza- 
 tion to the year 1832, a balance in the trea- 
 sury was reported each year, though the great- 
 est amount for any one year was but $14,176 11. 
 From that time, however, — which was the year 
 the Liberia Mission commenced — it has gra- 
 dually increased in its resources, and enlarged 
 the boundaries of its operations by taking in 
 new fields of missionary labor, until in the year 
 1840, the receipts amounted to $135,521 94, 
 and the expenditures to $146,498 58; while 
 last year the income was $339,072 06, and the 
 disbursements $288,506 88, with $50,000 in 
 the treasury Jan. 1, 1854, to meet the demands 
 on the society for the quarter ending March 31. 
 The annual income has more than doubled 
 itself during the past twelve years. 
 
 Besides those noticed under the head of 
 Home Missions, the Society has established 
 Missions in Africa, CJmia, South America, and 
 among the North American Indians, particular 
 notices of which will be found under the appro- 
 priate heads. They have also in contemplation 
 missions to Turkey and Hindostan, for which 
 $12,500 have been appropriated. 
 
 Up to 1831, the Methodist Episcopal Church 
 had no foreign missions except to the North 
 American Indians. That year, through the 
 efforts of Rev. Dr. True, the Young Men's 
 Methodist Missionary Society was formed at 
 Boston, in order to enter upon the missionary 
 work in foreign countries, and soon after com- 
 menced the mission to Africa ; and the same 
 year the Board sent a missionary to Africa. 
 The Young Men's Society afterwards became 
 an auxiliary of the Board. The first mission- 
 ary prayer-meetings held by the Methodists of 
 New England were suggested by the Young 
 Men's Society, 
 
 The Methodist Episcopal denomination in the 
 United States, according to the last census, has 
 
546 
 
 MISS. SOC. OF THE METH. EPISCOPAL CHURCH. 
 
 12,464 cluirch wlificcs, valued at ^14,036,076, 
 with an ag.trroffate accommodation for 4,209,333 
 persons. With this array of numbers and 
 wealth, it may be asked why they have not done 
 more in the work of foreign missions ? To this 
 question it may be answered that, seventy-five 
 years ago next Christmas-day, the Methodist 
 Episcopal Church in the United States had no 
 organized existence. The church was organized 
 in the city of Baltimore in 1784. Previous 
 to that time, there were about 13,000 Method- 
 ists scattered over this country and the Cana- 
 das, with only about 100 licensed preachers, 
 scarcely a dozen of them ordained, and proba- 
 bly not a single church edifice. The work of 
 the church, from its first organization, was 
 essentially missionary ; but it had first to form 
 a body from the materials immediately around 
 it, before it could command the resources for 
 carrying the Gospel to distant lands. The 
 first 30 or 40 years after their organization 
 was employed in the work of acquiring a com- 
 munion of their own. Then symptoms of ma- 
 turity began to manifest themselves ; and the 
 want of the institutions and arrangements of 
 well-organized and established communions 
 began to be felt and expressed. Hence, cir- 
 cuits began to yield up their towns as stations ; 
 city churches, which had been associated as 
 circuits began to separate into distinct charges; 
 conferences began to feel the need of schools 
 and academies, and colleges, for the people 
 born within their congregations or acquired 
 from without. The Church in her growth had 
 arrived at that state when these institutions 
 necessarily arose within her limits, if she 
 meant to maintain herself in the execution of 
 her mission. And some thirty years ago she 
 entered formally into the modern missionary 
 enterprise, by the formation of the Missionary 
 Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church. 
 Her first formal missionary efforts were neces- 
 sarily directed to her home work, and she did 
 not enter upon the foreign work until Pro- 
 vidence called her to establish a mission in 
 Liberia, in Africa. Thus growing first by 
 spreading among the people, and advancing 
 into new countries, and then coming to matu- 
 rity by beginning to grow vigorously and 
 rapidly within herself, she, within a few years 
 past, has become conscious of her mature and 
 permanent existence in the land, and of her 
 responsibilities and duties aa a Church. Taking 
 the whole body of Methodists in the United 
 States, they have grown in 70 years from 
 13,000 to 1,200,000 members, besides the many 
 hundreds that have died during that time. 
 Thus the condition of the Methodist Church 
 since its organization has been one of unparal- 
 leled growth and expansion ; and its whole 
 attention and strength have been employed in 
 advancing to its present maturity. But, 
 having gained that maturity, it is now called 
 to wider and more vigorous action in the 
 foreign field. 
 
 In the year 1843— the year before the divi< 
 sion of the Church — the number of foreign 
 missionaries was about 60 ; with 5,085 mem- 
 bers, of whom 3,851 wore Indians. The amount 
 collected that year Avas $109,452, and the 
 amount expended $145,035 ; leaving a balance 
 against the Society of $35,583. 
 
 After the division, the Missionary Society 
 of the Methodist Episcopal Church South, 
 was formed, its operations being conducted 
 independently upon the same general principles 
 as the original Society. 
 
 In 1846, one year after the division was con- 
 summated, the statistics (for Indians and Af- 
 rica, as before,) stood thus : 
 
 Mission's 
 
 Meth. E. Church 27 
 
 " " South.. 33 
 
 Memb's. Income. Expend. 
 1,448 $89,6i?8 $65,444 
 3,632 73:667 not stated 
 
 Totals 60 5,080 $163,195 
 
 In 1854, they stood as follows : — 
 
 Methodist Epis. Church 
 
 Methodist Epis. Church South. 
 
 United 
 
 Increase in eight years 
 
 2,412 
 4,232 
 
 $228,427 
 168,031 
 
 $233,263 
 
 The income and expenditure of the Mission- 
 ary Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church 
 from the time of its organization, April 5, 
 1819, to January 1st, 1854 : — 
 
 Receipts. Expenditures. 
 
 In 1820 $ 823.04 $ 85.76 
 
 "1821 2,328.76 407.87 
 
 "1822 2,547.39 1,781.40 
 
 "1823 5,427.14 3,740.22 
 
 "1824 3,589,92 4,996.14 
 
 "1825 4,140.16 4,704.21 
 
 "1826 4,964.11 5,510.85 
 
 "1827 6,812.49 7,379.42 
 
 "1828 6,245.17 8,106.18 
 
 From 1829 to 1838 (inclusive). 498,497.49 466,638.23 
 
 " 1839 to 1848 " .1,106,123.84 1,604,62132 
 
 In 1849 106,196.09 102,939.90 
 
 "1850 107,835.73 100,989.63 
 
 "1851 133,317.41 131,663.40 
 
 "1852 154,858.08 158,031.42 
 
 Eight months, ^^g^g ^09 ,641. 12 
 
 ending Jan. 1, 
 
 lAl854 228,427.27 288,506.88 
 
 Total, from April, 1819, to \ 52, 481, 794. 38 $2,389,803.83 
 January, 1854 j ' ' 
 
 Income of the Missionary Society of the 
 Methodist Episcopal Church South, from the 
 first year of their separate organization : — 
 
 For the year ending M^y, 1846 $ 68,529 
 
 i' " " " 1847 72,697 
 
 u u u u 1848 62,613 
 
 <t " " " 1849 65,496 
 
 (1 " " " 1850 85,973 
 
 a " " " 1851 113,801 
 
 u <« " " 1852 123.163 
 
 a " " " 1853 166.901 
 
MITIARO— MORETON BAY. 
 
 547 
 
 For the year ending May, 1854 $168,031 
 
 $927,203 
 Add the contrib. of the Method. E. Church. .2,481,794 
 
 And we have the sum of $3,408,997 
 
 coutributed by the members of tlie Methodist 
 E. Church, for Home and Foreign Missions, 
 during the past 34 years. 
 
 In the address of the venerable Dr. Bangs, 
 at the opening of the new Missionary Rooms, 
 in New York, he stated, that from a close 
 and anxious investigation, he was satisfied that, 
 up to that time there had been at home and 
 abroad, at least 60,000 persons converted to 
 God through the instrumentality of this soci- 
 ety, since its organization. To God be all the 
 glory. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW OP FOREIGN MISSIONS. 
 Methodist Episcopal Church. 
 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 "1 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 Day 1 Sunday 
 
 1 
 
 Xi 
 
 1 
 1 
 eg 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 In Africa 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 25 
 
 1 
 
 29 
 47 
 
 19 
 11 
 30 
 
 1410 
 1227 
 2637 
 
 27 
 
 9 
 
 36 
 
 640 
 304 
 944 
 
 16 
 13 
 
 29 
 
 839 
 
 
 
 American Indians 
 
 Totals 
 
 292 
 1131 
 
 
 
 Mdhodist Episcopal Church South. 
 
 In China 
 
 1 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 56 
 
 6 
 
 28 
 
 34 
 
 
 4232 
 4232 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 34 
 34 
 
 
 American Indians .... 
 Totals 
 
 1394 
 13Q4 
 
 Totals, both churches. 
 
 
 81 
 
 30 
 
 6869 
 
 36 
 
 944 
 
 63 
 
 2525 
 
 Among the Indians both churches have 
 several manual labor schools and four or five 
 seminaries, not included in the above statistics. 
 The Church South has 490 pupils in her 
 superior schools. — Authorities : Bangs and 
 Strickland's Histories of the Missions of the 
 Methodist E. Church; the Annual Reports of 
 both societies ; the Christian Advocate ; and 
 Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 MITIARO : A small island in the South 
 Seas, belonging to the Hervey Islands. Pop. 
 100. A station of the London Missionary 
 Society, with one native teacher. 
 
 MOA : One of the Banda Islands, a group 
 of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 MOGRA HAT : A station of the Gospel 
 Propagation Society, 32 miles south-east of 
 Calcutta, and 12 from Barripore. 
 
 MOKA : A station of the London Mission- 
 ary Society on the Mauritius, about 12 miles 
 from Port Louis. Moka is well adapted as a 
 Bite for a permanent mission station. It occu- 
 pies the centre of a large Malagasy village, 
 and two other populous villages lie a few 
 miles from it. The land is capable of a high 
 
 state of cultivation. The station was esta- 
 blished for the benefit of the Malagasy refu- 
 gees. (See Mauritius.) 
 
 MOKAU : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand, on the west 
 side of the island. 
 
 MOLOKAI : One of the smaller of the 
 Sandwich Islands group, lying to the north- 
 east of Maui, 40 miles long by 7 broad, broken 
 by numerous deep ravines, with little level 
 land ; on which is a station of the American 
 Board. 
 
 MOLLAH : A spiritual and judicial officer 
 among the Turks, who has civil and criminal 
 jurisdiction over towns or whole districts, and 
 is therefore a superior judge, under whom are 
 the cadis or inferior judges. 
 
 MOMBAS : Station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in East Africa, situated on a 
 small island at the mouth of the Tuaca river, 
 near the coast of Zanzebar, in lat. 4^ S. It 
 has the finest harbor on the coast. 
 
 MONGHIR : A celebrated town and for- 
 tress in the province of Bahar, situated on the 
 south side of the Ganges, and distant from 
 Calcutta about 300 miles. Population 30,000. 
 Occupied by the English Baptists as a station 
 in 1816. 
 
 MONROVIA : The capital of the republic 
 of Liberia, so called in honor of the late Pre- 
 sident Monroe. It is a place of growing com- 
 mercial importance, occupied as a mission by 
 the American Baptist Missionary Union. 
 
 MONTEGO BAY: A station of the Wes- 
 leyans in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 MONTROSE : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society in Demerara, W. I. 
 
 MONTSERRAT : A fruitful and pleasant 
 island, about 20 miles south-east of Antigua, 
 agreeably diversified with hills and vales, with 
 streams of water and a generous soil. Pop. 
 10,000. Society for Propagating the Gospel. 
 
 MONOPHYSITES : A general name 
 given to all those sects in the Levant who own 
 but one nature in Christ, and who maintain 
 that the divine and human nature of Jesus 
 Christ were so united as to form but one na- 
 ture. They are also called Jacobites, after 
 Jacob Baradaeus, who restored the sect after 
 it had been suppressed by the emperor Justin. 
 They are divided into two parties, one Afri- 
 can, under the jurisdiction of the patriarch of 
 Alexandria, the other Asiatic, at the head of 
 whom is the patriarch of Antioch. 
 
 MONASTERY : A convent built for the 
 reception of monks, mendicant friars and nuns. 
 
 MOOLKY : A station of the Basle Mission- 
 ary Society, in the province of Canara. Hin- 
 dostan. 
 
 MORANT BAY : A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 MORETON BAY : An extensive grazing 
 district in Australia, occupied by the Soci- 
 ety for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign 
 Parts. 
 
548 
 
 MORETY— MOSUL. 
 
 MORETY : Ono of the Molucca Islands, in 
 the IndiuQ Archipelago. 
 
 MO III AH: A station of the United Breth- 
 ren, on the Is^lund of Tobago, W.I. 
 
 MOlllJA : station of the French Protest- 
 ants in South Africa, 160 miles east of Cale- 
 don, among the Bassoutos ; commenced 1833. 
 Inhabitants, 4.000. In connexion with this 
 station arc 280 villages, of 12,000 inhabitants, 
 which, being divided into 28 districts, are 
 placotl under the instruction of the word of 
 God by native teachers. 
 
 MORLEY : A station of thef Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society in Kafifraria, South Africa. 
 
 MOSUL : A walled city of Mesopotamia, 
 in N. lat. 36^ 20' 17" ; E. Ion. 43° 10' 17". 
 It stands on the western bank of the Tigris, 
 where the high land, that generally lies some 
 distance back, comes down to the river. This, 
 at its narrowest point, is 305 feet broad, and 
 is crossed by a bridge restin^^ on 21 boats, 
 which, during the season of hij^h water, when 
 the river is sometimes a mile wide, is detached 
 from the opposite shore, and lies idle along the 
 western bank. The average breadth of the 
 river between Mosul and Bagdad, at its ordi- 
 nary height, is 200 yards. 
 
 Directly opposite Mosul, and about three- 
 fourths of a mile distant, lie the ruins of an- 
 cient Nineveh. These were first accurately 
 surveyed by Claudius J. Rich, Esq., in 1820 ; 
 and in 1843, Mons. P. E. Batta led the way in 
 their excavation. His remarkable discoveries 
 at Khorsabad have been followed by the bril- 
 liant achievements of Hon. A. H. Layard, at 
 Nimrood, Khoyunjuk and other points in 
 Assyria and Mesopotamia. 
 
 The population of Mosul was at one time 
 estimated to be more than 100,000, but does 
 not now probably exceed one-third of that 
 number, if it amounts to that. 8,000 of the 
 inhabitants are nominally Christians ; the rest 
 are Mohammedans, with the exception of 
 about 150 families of Jews. 
 
 The nominal Christians belong mostly to 
 three sects, viz. : Chaldeans, i. e. Nestorians, 
 who acknowledge the Pope; Jacobites, and 
 papal Syrians, who are seceders from the Ja- 
 cobites. Of these sects the Chaldeans are by 
 far the most numerous. A few Armenians 
 and others reside in the city, l)ut not enough 
 to deserve a separate mention. 
 
 The Arabic is the prevailing language in 
 Mosul, both among Moslems and Christians ; 
 but besides this, Kurdish is used by those who 
 belong to that race, or have much intercourse 
 with it. Turkish is the government language, 
 and is spoken by those who transact business 
 with the authorities ; and Fellahi, a dialect of 
 the modern Syriac, similar to that used by the 
 Nestorians, in Kurdistan and Persia, is the 
 language of the Christian villages around Mo- 
 sul, though it is not much used among the 
 Christians of the city. 
 
 The climate of Mosul is very hot, the ther- 
 
 mometer averaging 67.80 Fahr. for the entire 
 year. In summer it rises to 115° or 117° in 
 the shade, and in winter does not usually sink 
 below 30^. At one time during the heat of 
 summer, the average temperature of 35 conse- 
 cutive hours was I02o. But owing to the ex- 
 treme dryness of the air, the city is considered 
 healthy, notwithstanding so high a tempe- 
 rature. 
 
 The principal crops in the vicinity are wheat 
 and barley. Rice is brought from the valleys 
 of Kurdistan, while its mountain sides supply 
 the city with fin abundance of the finest grapes. 
 Figs come mostly from the mountains of Sin- 
 jar, in Mesopotamia. Palm trees flourish in 
 the plain near Mosul to some extent. The 
 olive grows in the gardens ; also pistachio 
 nuts and other fruits. Beets, turnips, the Qg^ 
 plant, melons, cucumbers, and other vegetables 
 are abundant ; but barmia (hibiscus esculen 
 tus) — called in the United States okra — may 
 be said, par excellence, to be the vegetable of 
 the region. 
 
 The missionary field of which Mosul is the 
 centre extends from Mardin to Bagdad and 
 includes within its boundaries Jebel Tour, the 
 stronghold of the Jacobites, which covers an 
 area of 1400 square miles, the whole region of 
 the Yezidees extending from Jebel Singar on 
 the west as far east as Sheikh Adi on the bor- 
 ders of Kurdistan ; a large part of the country 
 of the mountain Nestorians, and almost the 
 whole of the Chaldeans living within the limits 
 of the Turkish empire. Telkeif, one of their 
 largest villages, about 9 miles from Mosul, ton- 
 tains 5,000 inhabitants, and Elkosh 3,000 more. 
 It is estimated that more than 40,000 nomi- 
 nal Christians in the valley of the Tigris speak 
 the Fellahi. Some of the villages to the east 
 of Mosul are inhabited principally by the Ja- 
 cobites. 
 
 The diplomatic emissaries of Rome have 
 been in this region for centuries, not preaching 
 the Gospel, but straining every nerve to induce 
 the oriental churches to acknowledge the Pope, 
 and whenever they have succeeded they have 
 only removed the people further from Gospel 
 influences, though the change eifected has not 
 been so radical as to remove all danger of re- 
 turn to a purer faith ; a result which their 
 tyrannical measures in some instances favors 
 rather than retards. 
 
 The Rev. Horatio Southgate, sent out by the 
 American Episcopal Church, visited Mosul in 
 1838, on his tour of exploration through Tur- 
 key and Persia. But the first Protestant mis- 
 sionaries who resided here were Dr. A. Grant 
 and Rev. A. K. Hinsdale, who occupied this 
 as an outpost of their mission to the mountain 
 Nestorians, in 1841. Rev. C. C. Mitchell had 
 died on the way at the village of Mushtafia, near 
 Mardin, June 27th. Mrs. Mitchell lived to 
 reach Mosul, but died there July 12, 5 days 
 after her arrival ; when Mr. and Mrs. H. were 
 themselves prostrated by disease. Thus was 
 
MOSUL. 
 
 549 
 
 the mission baptized in suffering at the outset. 
 On Mr. Hinsdale's recovery nothing but his 
 ignorance of the Arabic prevented his laboring 
 at once among the Jacobites, who, hard press- 
 ed by the Papists, were eager for instruction. 
 Providence at this time sent to his aid a Jacob- 
 ite ecclesiastic from Malabar, who, educated in 
 the English College at Cottayan, was on his 
 way to be ordained bishop by the Patriarch 
 at Mardin. He preached the Gospel in the 
 churches and had much religious intercourse 
 with the people. On the 12th of November, 
 1842, Rev. Thomas Laurie and wife joined the 
 mission ; but on the 17th of the following 
 month Mr. Hinsdale was called to his rest, 
 leaving the mission even weaker than it was 
 before. 
 
 The massacre of the Nestorians, in 1843, 
 turned the attention of the missionaries more 
 exclusively to Mosul, and " a great door and 
 effectual was opened to them, but there were 
 many adversaries." The opposition, however, 
 did not originate so much among the people 
 themselves as from men who came from Chris- 
 tian lands, with the avowed purpose of oppos- 
 ing the labors of evangelical Protestants. 
 Yet, notwithstanding all, the truth was made 
 known, and agitation only stimulated investi- 
 gation. One man at least gave delightful evi- 
 dence that he was taught of God, and others 
 were intellectually convinced, if not savingly 
 converted. But the trials of the mission were 
 not yet over. On the morning of December 
 16, death removed Mrs. Laurie from among 
 them ; and on the 24th of April, 1844, the 
 little band was again bereaved in the loss of 
 Dr. Grant, the pioneer of the enterprise ; but 
 not till the Rev. Azariah Smith, M.D., had 
 been sent to minister to his last hours, and aid 
 the survivors by his practical faith and devot- 
 ed spirit. The early history of this mission 
 would thus seem to be little more than a record 
 of the death of its members ; but the field was 
 so full of promise that the survivors would not 
 have left it, nor would the Board have recall- 
 ed them, but for the published intention of the 
 American Episcopalians to occupy the field. 
 Yielding to their prior claim, the missionaries 
 reluctantly turned away from this interesting 
 field on the 22d of October, 1844. 
 
 But the intentions of the Episcopal church 
 were never carried out, and for 5 years Mosul 
 received only brief visits at distant intervals 
 from Rev. Messrs. Bowen and Sandreczki, 
 English missionaries to the Jews in Bagdad. 
 The report of the piety of the solitary disciple 
 left there, led to the visit of Messrs. Perkins 
 and Stocking, in May, 1849 ; and on the 22d 
 of November following. Rev. J. E. Ford, of 
 Aleppo, came, and remained till April 10th, 
 1850 ; and before he left, the Rev. D. W. 
 Marsh entered on his labors (March 20) in 
 very encouraging circumstances. Rev. W. 
 F. Williams and family joined him May 16, 
 1851, and on November 3, a little church of 8 
 
 members was formed, which we hope is only 
 the germ of better things to come. Rev. 
 Henry Lobdell, M.D., joined the mission May 
 8, 1852, and the latest accounts, though they 
 tell the usual tale of persecution from the pa- 
 pistSjleagued with the civil government, yet indi- 
 cate a preparation for an extensive reformation, 
 which may take place at no very distant day. 
 The political power of the nominal Christians 
 in this region is much less than that of the 
 larger communities nearer the capital. The 
 Mohammedans, too, are much more accessible 
 than elsewhere, and both these things encour- 
 age us to hope that there are glad tidings soon 
 to issue from Mosul, to all who love the king- 
 dom of our Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 For more extended notices, see Missionary 
 Herald, 1839, seq. ; Rich's Narrative of a Resi- 
 dence in Kurdistan; Laurie's Dr. Grant and 
 the Mountain Nestorians, &c., &c. — Rev. T. 
 Laurie. 
 
 Present Condition and future prospects of the 
 Assyrian Mission — Rev. Mr. Marsh to the author. 
 — " The field of the Assyrian mission includes 
 the city of Diarbekir on the north with some 
 40.000 inhabitants, Mardin with 20,000, Jezi- 
 rah with 7,000, Mosul with 45,000, Arhil with 
 perhaps 10,000, and Bagdad with its 60 or 
 70,000. It includes a population of some 
 70,000 Christians, (beside a much larger Mos- 
 lem population,) of whom about 35,000 are of 
 Jacobite, 20,000 of Nestorian, and 15,000 of 
 Armenian origin. But from these three sects 
 large numbers have become papal — say of the 
 Nestorians 17,000, of the Armenians 5,000, 
 and of the Jacobites 3,000, making the papal 
 element over one-third. Of course these num- 
 bers are only approximate, but they agree very 
 nearly with the best authorities, though based 
 upon a separate estimate. The strengtli of the 
 Jacobites is in Jebal Tour, or between Mardin 
 and Jezirah, near the middle of the field. The 
 strength of the papal Nestorians is upon the 
 plain east of Mosul ; that of the Armenians of 
 our field at Mardin and Diarbekir. There are 
 some Jacobites in the whole field, but almost 
 no Armenians in the southern part and almost 
 no Jacobites in the northern. 
 
 " Stations are established at Diarbekir and 
 Mosul, undoubtedly the best points for the 
 present. Churches have been formed at each 
 of these places, consisting now at Mosul of 12 
 members, at Diarbekir of 11. The average 
 attendance for a few months past at the fullest 
 Sabbath service has been at Diarbekir over 
 100, and here over 30. There is a flourishing 
 school for boys at Diarbekir, and also one for 
 girls, so promising that we have applied for a 
 female teacher from America. There are in 
 the schools at Mosul over 80 learning to read. 
 There are schools also at Plince, near Diarbe- 
 kir, and at Nahcrwan and Jezirah. 
 
 " At Diarbekir the great present want is a 
 force upon the spot to cherish the little church 
 and to guide and encourage the work. We 
 
l)i>0 
 
 MOSUL. 
 
 have been obliged to abandon that station 
 with little present prospect of occupation be- 
 fore at least next spring. I do not believe 
 that a more promising point was over tempo- 
 rarily abandoned by missionaries of the Ame- 
 rican Board. It will be supplied with native 
 belpei's who will sustain preaching, but it 
 needs at least three missionaries. The occa- 
 sion of leaving that point has been detailed in 
 letters to the rooms to which you doubtless 
 have access. The station remained half man- 
 ned till the health of Mrs. Dunmore failed, and 
 should Mr. AValker be hh alone there a simi- 
 lar result must inevitably ensue. It should 
 be borne in mind that in these interior sta- 
 tions we are cut off from the refreshment of 
 occasional intercourse with travelers, and at 
 Diarbekir there is no consular protection. 
 We need the prayers of Christians that mis- 
 sionaries ma}^ be supplied for and protected 
 171 Diarbekir. 
 
 '• So long as stations are half manned, the 
 work must be expected to languish ; and all 
 Western Asia is half manned. All the mem- 
 bers sympathize, for, whatever may be the 
 division into missions, we are one body in 
 Christ. So long as the Armenians are neg- 
 lected and left to perish, while calling to 
 American Christians for help, we are left un- 
 heard to plead from a greater distance for 
 wants less obvious, requiring a more vigorous 
 exercise of faith. 
 
 "The great want at Mosul and for the As 
 Syrian field is a seminary for young men to 
 train up preachers, to awaken mind, to pre- 
 vent the waste of sending to Beirut, where, by 
 the distance from his house, in case a boy turns 
 out ill, the evil is greatly increased. For this- 
 we have urged the sending out of additional 
 missionaries. But how shall they get here ? 
 They have a gauntlet to run. When Dr. Lob- 
 dell came, the wants of Aintab were so ex- 
 ceedingly pressing, that a petition and most 
 urgent entreaties were used by the natives to 
 detain him there. We are glad that that rob- 
 bery of our field was not consummated. Had 
 Dr. Lobdell knoAvn that the Committee at 
 home would acquiesce in his stay there, he 
 would have remained. I only allude to this 
 to show that the apathy of the American 
 church, in leaving that great Armenian field 
 without any adequate supply of laborers, crip- 
 ples us. We want the attention of American 
 Christians drawn to their suicidal policy of 
 neglecting vast immortal interests, whose mo- 
 mentous issues eternity alone can compute. 
 How many a wealthy family is being ruined, 
 especially in its younger branches, by the 
 hoarded manna ! How many I know person- 
 ally, training up children in the worship of 
 mammon, bowing down to the golden calf ! 
 Alas ! though that manna would be bread of 
 life to many famishing ones here, it comes not ! 
 We want, and must have for the success of our 
 work, the sober, prayerful attention of Chris- 
 
 tians to the feebleness of their efforts. For 
 want of one more man, in raising the timbers 
 of a house, the joists and beams lell back, and 
 crushed many of those toiling their utmost. 
 Is it Avisc — is it prudent, to leave a lew labor- 
 ers to die with over-work ? 
 
 " The occupation of Mardin is desirable. CX' 
 ccedingly desirable, provided we have faith. 
 Some Christians seem to think that we are to 
 wait till Satan comes crouching to us, laying 
 down his arms, and offering us the keys of his 
 strongholds. lie has been forced to this in 
 some cities of Western Asia ; but shall we 
 leave, these oilier cities till they throw down 
 their battlements and urge us in ? Faith is 
 the great u-ant, that the kingdom of heaven 
 may suffer violence and the violent take it by 
 force. We want such a mighty moral move- 
 ment behind us, that we shall feel that we are 
 borne on to new efforts as by some silent gulf- 
 stream flowing from our native land. If 
 America were only enlisted for our success, 
 and following us with eager wishes, as gen- 
 erals and soldiers were followed to the h-alls of 
 Montezuma, then they would not withhold 
 their reinforcements, nor that best of all gifts, 
 their prayers. 
 
 " As to the future prospects of our work, my 
 impression is, that if this effort making in 
 Western Asia/a?? now, a century will not see 
 it renewed under such promising auspices. 
 If it fail, it can only be from the storms of low^- 
 ering war, which seems not at all probable, or 
 from the dcadness of the American church. 
 Were the American church now to call us 
 back, old Assyrian kings would break the 
 silence of ages and rise like muflBed Samuels 
 to reproach us. The very stones would cry 
 out. 
 
 " Ultimately, these efforts cannot fail. Un- 
 less God's promises are a fable, — unless Chris- 
 tianity is a delusion, and God himself a being 
 indifferent and neglectful of his creatures, this 
 preaching of his Gospel cannot return void. 
 With rapt anticipation we watch the great 
 changes bursting upon the world — the opening 
 seals of the vision of the church militant and 
 millenial. The day seems at hand for Moslems 
 to accept (yhrist. At our dispensary we shun 
 not to point them to the great Physician. 
 They listen with respect to that now, for which 
 our blood would redden these streets, were they 
 what they were twenty years since. Their 
 spirit is broken ; they expect the downfall of 
 their religion. Their expectation upon this 
 point is in advance of the Christian church. 
 It is not for mortal man to be wise upon what 
 God has scaled ; but we wait in hope. Hope 
 thrills in our hearts and rises to full assurance. 
 Let the cannons roll on ; let swords gleam and 
 drip, and the spears and chariots of war. The 
 King of many crowns is marching forth. We 
 expect the fall of distant Rome ; and that fall 
 will make freemen of her slaves here. Our 
 hearts anticipate glad things. We rejoice in 
 
MOTEER— NATAL. 
 
 551 
 
 the God of our salvation. With sincere es- 
 teem, your brother in Christ, 
 
 "DwiGHT W. Marsh. 
 
 "Mosul, Jfai/ 8, 1854." 
 
 MOTEER : One of the Molucca Islands, 
 in the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 MOTITO : A station of the French Pro- 
 testants among the Bechuanas of South Af- 
 rica, 9 miles south-west of Old Lattikoo, and 
 about 19 miles from the frontier of the colony. 
 It has five out-stations. Rev. J. Fredoux, the 
 missionary at this station, has married the sec- 
 ond daughter of Rev. Robert Mofiat, of the 
 Kuruman. 
 
 MOUNT COKE : A station of the Wes 
 leyans in Kaffraria. 
 
 MOUNT VAUGHA-N : A station of the 
 Episcopal Board, at Cape Palmas, West Af- 
 rica. 
 
 MOUNT ZION : A station of the Amer- 
 ican Board among the Cherokee Indians. 
 
 MUFTI :^ The chief of the ecclesiastical 
 order, or primate, of the Mussulman religion. 
 The authority of the mufti is very great in the 
 Ottoman empire ; for even the Sultan himself, 
 if he will preserve any appearance of religion, 
 cannot, without first hearing his opinion, put 
 any person to death, or so much as inflict any 
 corporeal punishment. When the mufti comes 
 into his presence, the grand seignior himself 
 rises up before him. Yet the grand seignior 
 appoints him to office, and the honors paid to 
 him have become little more than form. If 
 the Sultau does not like his decision, he dis- 
 misses him and appoints another. 
 
 MUSSULMAN : A professor of the re- 
 , ligion of Mohammed. 
 
 MUTTRA : A celebrated city, of great 
 antiquity, situated on the western bank of the 
 Jumna, about 30 miles N.N.E. from Agra, 
 and 80 miles S.S.E. from Delhi. Population, 
 80,000, of whom about one-eighth are Moham- 
 medans. Mr. Philips, of the English Baptist 
 Mission, removed to this place in 1844. 
 ^ MYNPURIEj A station of the Presbyte- 
 rian Board in Northern India, 40 miles west 
 of Futtehgurh. 
 
 MYSORE : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, and capital of a province of 
 the same name, in Southern Hindostan, near 
 the western coast, to the north-west of Ma- 
 dura. It is also occupied by the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 NAGERCOIL : A town in Southern 
 India, in the Travancore district, a little 
 north-west of Cape Comorin. A station of the 
 London Missionary Society. 
 
 NAGPORE : A large town in the pro- 
 vince of Gundwana, the capital of the Boonsla 
 Mahrattas, lat. 20° 9' N., long. 19° 11' E. 
 It is elevated 4,104 feet above the sea, and in 
 the hot season, has a decided advantage over 
 other stations, the niglit being almost invaria- 
 bly cool and pleasant ; and in the winter sea- 
 son, it is so cool as sometimes to produce hoar 
 
 frost and ice. Population in 1825, 115,000 
 A station of the Free Church of Scotland. 
 
 NAIN : A station of the United Brethren 
 in Labrador. 
 
 NANKING : The capital of the Kiang 
 su province, and former capital of the Chinese 
 empire, situated on the southern banks of the 
 Yangtsz-kiang, in lat. 32° N., and long. 119^ 
 E. (See China.) 
 
 NAMAQUALAND : See Africa, South- 
 ern. 
 
 NARSINGDARCHOKE : A station of 
 the Baptist Missionary Society in Bengal. 
 
 NASSAU : The capital of the island of 
 New Providence, W. I., and the seat of gov- 
 ernment. It is situated on the north side of 
 the island. A station of the Baptist Mission- 
 ary Society, and also of the Society for Pro- 
 pagating the Gospel. 
 
 _ NASSUCK : A large town and place oi' 
 pilgrimage on the Godavery, principally in- 
 habited by Brahmins. Population in 1820, 
 30,000. Near Nassuck, the seat and centre 
 of Brahminism in the Deccan, are extensive 
 Buddhist excavations, which extend round a 
 high conical hill, five miles from the town, with 
 many Buddhist figures and inscriptions, with- 
 out the slightest Hindoo vestiges. Church 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 NATAL : The colony of Natal lies in the 
 S. E. part of the continent of Africa, betAveen 
 the latitudes of 31° 31', and 28= south. It is 
 bounded on the north by the river Tukela, 
 which divides it from the country of the Ama- 
 zulu ; on the south by the river Umzimkulu, 
 separating it from the territory of the Ama- 
 ponda ; on the east by the Indian Ocean ; and 
 on the west by the Quathamba range of moun- 
 tains. Its length is about 180 miles, and its 
 width 125 miles. The white population of 
 Natal at present, November 1853, is estimated 
 at 10,000 ; most of whom have immigrated 
 from England since 1845. The colored popu- 
 lation, Zulus (or Zulu KaSres, as they are some- 
 times called), is about 120,000. Most of them 
 are remnants of tribes which originally occu- 
 pied this territory, but were conquered and 
 dispersed by the tyrant Chaka. When the- 
 British established their authority in Na- 
 tal, multitudes, from all sides, returned to the 
 land of their nativity for protection. Most,, 
 however, have come from the country of the- 
 Amazulu within a few years past, and the 
 number of refugees is increasing. Natal, for 
 several years past, has been in a state of quiet 
 and safety, though apprehensions have been, 
 entertained by some that Umpandi, the present. 
 King of Amazulu, would invade the colony.. 
 These fears, for the most part, are now laid^ 
 aside ; for Umpandi, with his present force is-, 
 unable to cope with the Dutch Boers who are- 
 settling, without his permission, in the north- 
 ern part of his territory. So numerous have 
 been the refugees from his dominion, that it is. 
 doubtful whether the tyrannical chief can mus- 
 
552 
 
 NATAL. 
 
 ter more than 50,000 warriors. Uliiku, the 
 king of the Amaponda, is more pacific than 
 meet of the Kaflre chiefs, and endeavors to 
 live on good terms with his white neighbors. 
 He is far more powerful than Umpandi, and 
 commands an army of 80,000 fighting men. 
 The natives of Natal are split up into numer- 
 ous petty tribes, each tribe having a chief of 
 its own, who, however, is amenable to British 
 authority. Constant jealousies and animosities 
 exist among these tribes, and nothing but fear 
 of the English Government prevents them from 
 destroying each other. The greater part of 
 the natives in this colony dwell on locations 
 assigneil them by Government, and over each 
 location is placed a white magistrate, to keep 
 order, to collect the annual tax, which is seven 
 shillings per hut, settle their numerous disputes, 
 &c. When cases presented by the natives are 
 not satisfactorily settled by the magistrates, 
 they have the privilege of appealing to the 
 Lieut. Governor of the colony. 
 
 Natal Harbor. — The coast is skirted by a 
 dense " bush," or forest of thorn trees, vines, 
 and brambles, and the monotony of the scene 
 is relieved only by the mountains of silvery 
 spray which indicate the mouths of the nu- 
 merous rivers. The only elevated and striking 
 object is the bluff, a rocky promontory, desig- 
 nating the entrance to the port. At its foot 
 is a great sand bar, the dread of all comers to 
 Natal, and the chief barrier to the prosperity 
 of the colony. The people of Natal are 
 exerting themselves to construct a break- 
 water far enough into the sea, not only to 
 break the violence of the waves, but to check 
 the drifting of the sand into the harbor. ' 
 
 D' Urban. — An hour's walk or ride from the 
 harbor, in an ox wagon, through the sand, 
 brings one to the only seaport town in this 
 colony, which is called D 'Urban, in honor of 
 Sir Benjamin D'Urban. The streets of this 
 town which were laid out by the Dutch at right 
 angles, are wide and convenient for trading 
 with large wagons, but intolerably sandy. 
 Many of the houses are one story high, and 
 made of « wattle and daub "—that is, long 
 sticks woven together between posts and plas- 
 tered with mud. ITie roofs are thatched with 
 long grass. Some nice brick buildings are 
 now going up, and the appearance of the 
 place is rapidly improving. The Wcsleyans, 
 the largest religious society in Natal, have 
 here two houses of worship, one for the whites, 
 and one for' the colored population. The 
 Episcopalians, the Congregationalists, the 
 Baptists, and the Roman Catholics have also 
 their sanctuaries. New churches for the troops 
 are about to be erected, at an expense of £10,- 
 1)00. The people of D'Urban are mostly mer- 
 chants and mechanics. But few among them 
 are wealthy. Some of the oldest residents in 
 the colony, who occupy farms, are agricultur- 
 ists or graziers, possess large herds of cattle, 
 and are in comfortable circumstances. The 
 
 Natal Bay abounds in fish, with which the 
 market of D'Urban is supplied ; and there is 
 no lack of good beef, pork, mutton, venison, 
 and fowls. D'Urban suffers for the want of 
 good water. All that is suitable for drinking 
 is brought in hogsheads from the Uniqui 
 river, which is about three miles distant, or 
 caught from the roofs of the houses when it 
 rains. The water of the wells is brackish, 
 and induces cutaneous diseases. This deficien- 
 cy of good water, it is supposed, may be rem- 
 edied by turning the Uniqui river across the 
 long flat on which the town is built. The ex- 
 periment will doubtless be made if Natal con- 
 tinues to prosper. D'Urban is a place of 
 great importance, as all the trade with the 
 tribes on the northern borders of Natal passes 
 through it, and most of the trade with the 
 Dutch farmers over the Quathamba Moun- 
 tains, and beyond the Orange river, amount- 
 ing to many thousands of pounds. 
 
 Two weekly newspapers are published in 
 D'Urban, and are well conducted. There is 
 also a day school for children, supported by 
 government. Intemperance and horse-racing 
 are quite prevalent. 
 
 Pietermaritzburg. — The town next in import- 
 ance to D'Urban in Natal, is Pietermaritz- 
 burg, or Petermauritzburg, as it is sometimes 
 spelled, the capital of the colony. It is about 
 50 miles from D'Urban, situated in a large 
 valley nearly surrounded by high hills, and 
 presents a beautiful appearance. Its streets, 
 like those of D'Urban, are laid out at right 
 angles, are broad, and shaded on each side by 
 large and beautiful trees. Water, which 
 never fails in the driest season, is conducted 
 through the streets on each side, from which 
 every house may be supplied, and every garden' 
 irrigated. The Lieut. Governor of the colo- 
 ny, his Secretary, and other chief officers of 
 Government, have their residence at this place. 
 Extensive barracks have been erected for 
 British soldiers, and part of a regiment is 
 quartered in them. 
 
 The Episcopalians, Presbyterians, Indepen- 
 dents, Wesleyans and Catholics have their 
 houses of worship. A large and flourishing 
 school is supported by Government. Three 
 papers are published, the " Independent," 
 " Government Gazeteer," and " Witness for 
 the People." The morals of this place are far 
 in advance of those in D'Urban, and for health- 
 fulness of climate and beauty of appearance, 
 it is not surpassed by any locality in the col- 
 ony. 
 
 The trade of Pietermaritzburg is principally 
 with the Dutch farmers who come from beyond 
 the Quathamba Mountains, some ten days' 
 journey with the ox wagon, and exchange 
 their ivory, wheat, and wool for groceries, 
 clothing, &c. 
 
 Scenei-y — Climate — Prospects of the Colony. — 
 Natal is preeminent for the beauty of its land- 
 scapes. Along the coast, the surface is for 
 

NATAL— NESTORIANS. 
 
 663 
 
 the most part level ; but inland, at the dis- 
 tance of about 15 miles, rugged in the extreme. 
 A chain of high table lands extends the whole 
 length of the colony, intersected by numerous 
 rivers which have worn deep chasms to the 
 low country. During June and July (the 
 winter months) the natives burn off the long 
 grass, and the hills and valleys assume a dark 
 and mournful aspect. But in September and 
 October the rain descends copiously, and the 
 whole country is covered, as if by magic, 
 with a carpet of green. The scenery is then 
 truly magnificent. Natal is acknowledged to 
 be one of the healthiest places in Africa. 
 The tops of the Quathamba Mountains are 
 supposed to afford a cooling medium for the 
 hot winds which come from the interior, and 
 hence Natal is exempt from that debilitating 
 atmosphere which is the scourge of other 
 warm climates. The Natal climate is mild 
 and temperate, the atmosphere delightfully 
 clear, and those noxious vapors which prove 
 so unfavorable to health and longevity at De- 
 lagoa Bay, on the Gaboon and Zanzibar coasts, 
 are here unknown. During the summer, the 
 heat is seldom so great as to render out-of- 
 door labor oppressive ; and in winter, it is 
 rarely cold enough to render a fire necessary. 
 It is the united testimony of foreign residents, 
 that this colony is remarkably free from those 
 diseases which are common in their father- 
 lands. In no English colony exist in a greater 
 degree the elements of prosperity, viz., abun- 
 dance and cheapness of labor, fertility of soil, 
 plenty of food, healthfulness of climate, &c. 
 Natal is yet in its infancy. It is but recently 
 that the tide of immigration has turned to- 
 wards its shores. But from what has been 
 already seen of the production of sugar, cot- 
 ton, rice, coffee, indigo, wheat, barley, and 
 corn, of her' wool growing districts, and her 
 animal market, it is reasonable to conclude 
 that the increasing exports will give an im- 
 petus to trade and industry, and thus the 
 colony will ere long be filled with Europeans. 
 — Rev. Josiah Tyler, missionary to the Zulus, 
 abridged from the Puritan Recorder. 
 
 NAVIGATORS' ISLANDS : See Samoa. 
 
 NAZARETH : One of forty native Chris- 
 tian villages, formed in Tinnevelly by the Nar 
 tive Philanthropic Society, in order to shelter 
 converts from persecution. Also, a station of 
 the Moravians in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 NEGAPATAM : A town in the Madras 
 Presidency, and district of Tanjore, the resi- 
 dence of the British collector for the district, 
 situated on the shore of the Bay of Bengal, 
 162 miles south by east from Madras. The na- 
 tive town is extensive and irregular, and on its 
 north side there is a remarkable ruin of very 
 massive brick masonry, about 80 feet high, 
 called by mariners the Chinese Pagoda. It is 
 supposed to have been a Jain temple. A sta- 
 tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 NEGOMBO : A town on the west coast of 
 
 Ceylon, 20 miles north from Colombo. A sta- 
 tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 NEGROES : The term Negro is the Span- 
 ish and Portuguese word for black. The Ne- 
 gro race inhabit that portion of the continent 
 of Africa which 'commences at the Great Des- 
 ert of Sahara, extending southerly to about 
 20° of south latitude, and embracing both the 
 eastern and western coasts of the continent. 
 
 The skin and eyes of the Negro are black ; 
 hair black and woolly ; skull compressed later- 
 ally and in front ; forehead low, narrow, and 
 slanting ; cheek bones prominent ; jaws nar- 
 row and projecting ; upper front teeth oblique ; 
 chin receding ; eyes prominent ; nose broad, 
 thick, flat ; lips very thick ; palms of the 
 hands and soles of the feet flat ; knees turned 
 in, toes turned out. The stature and physical 
 strength are equal to the European. Many of 
 them have made considerable progress in the 
 useful arts and cultivation. 
 
 It has been said that no Negro nation ever 
 possessed a literature, or had the ingenuity to 
 invent an alphabet, and until recently this was 
 probably true ; but the missionaries of the 
 Church Missionary Society have discovered a 
 tribe in Western Africa, named Vei, which 
 possess a well-constructed written language, 
 with books, the invention of one of their num- 
 ber still living, which presents a case as re- 
 markable as that of the invention of the Cher- 
 okee alphabet. Among the Negro race there 
 is a great variety, greater, perhaps, than 
 among any other family. For accounts of the 
 civil, social, and religious condition of the 
 Negro race, and of missions among them, see 
 Western Africa, Gaboon, Fernando Po, 
 YoRUBA, and Liberia. 
 
 NELLORE : A station of the Church of 
 England Mission, in the northern part of Cey- 
 lon, about two miles from the town of Jaffna. 
 Also, a large city near the northern extremity 
 of the Carnatic in Bengal — the principal sta- 
 tion of the Teloogoo Mission of the American 
 Baptist Union. 
 
 NELSON : A town in New Zealand, situ- 
 ated at the bottom of Tasman's Bay, on the 
 northern shore of the middle island, with a 
 population of 2,100 inhabitants. The town is 
 extremely pretty, situated on a small plain sur- 
 rounded by lofty hills. The climate is delight- 
 ful. It is a station of the Church Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 NENGENENGE : Station of the Ameri- 
 can Board at the Gaboon, West Africa. 
 
 NESTORIANS : Nestorius, from whom 
 comes the name Nestorians, was a native of 
 Syria, and a presbyter of the church at Anti- 
 och, " esteem.ed and celebrated," says Neander, 
 " on account of the rigid austerity of his life 
 and the impressive fervor of his preaching." 
 He was made patriarch of Constantinople, a. d. 
 428. Possessed of an honest and pious zeal, he 
 was wanting probably in that prudence and 
 moderation by which his zeal should have been 
 
554 
 
 NESTORIANS. 
 
 governed ; and while his intemperate efforts to 
 Bupprees various heresies j)rovoked, liis ungimrd- 
 ed langungc hiid him open to the attiicks of 
 some who were jealous of his iiitiueucc, or a&- 
 pircd to his position. Cyril of Alexandria 
 became his fierce antagonist, and Nestorius 
 waa stxiu himself accused of heresy ; first, in 
 denying that Marv was the mother of God, 
 and second, in holding that there were two 
 persons as well as two natures in Christ. lie 
 denied both the charges, as they were brought 
 against him ; but he was deposed by the third 
 general council at Ephesus, a. d. 431, and was 
 banished first to Arabia, and then to Lj'bia, 
 and finally died in Upper Egypt. His friends 
 denied the fairness of his trial, and the justice 
 of his condemnation, and his opinions were 
 "Warmly defended, especially among his coun- 
 trymen in the East. The flourishing school for 
 the education of divines at Edessa, in Mesopo- 
 tamia, to which many Persian youth resorted, 
 became eminently the seat from which the sect 
 extended into Persia. This school was broken 
 up on account of its Nestorianism by the em- 
 peror Zeno, in 489, but the consequence was 
 only the transfer of the school to Nisibis, where 
 it could fully develop itself under the Persian 
 government, and where for many years, Bar- 
 sumas, a zealous Nestorian, had been bishop. 
 Having now its principal seat in Persia, the 
 sect was fostered by the rivalry existing be- 
 tween the governments of Persia and Constan- 
 tinople, and on the death of the archbishop of 
 Seleucia, a. d. 496, Babaeus (or Babacus) a 
 Kestoriun, was chosen his successor. He de- 
 clared himself Patriarch of the East, and held 
 a synod, or council, a. d. 499, at which the 
 whole Persian church professed itself as belong- 
 ing to the Nestorian party. 
 
 From A. D. 485 to a. d. 640 the Nestorians 
 "were under Persian authority, generally favor- 
 ed, but sometimes persecuted. From .640 to 
 1257 they were subject to Arabian caliphs. 
 In 1258, on the taking of Bagdad by the 
 grandson of Gengis Khan, the power was trans- 
 ferred to the Tartars. The patriarchs resided 
 at Seleucia until a. d. 762, when Bagdad be- 
 coming the capital of the Saracenic empire ; it 
 became also the seat of the patriarchs, who 
 now took the title of patriarch of Babylon and 
 Bagdad. ^ 
 
 " The Nestorians," says Mosheim, (Ec.Hist., 
 vol. I. p. 93,) " after they had obtained a fixed 
 residence in Persia, and had located the head 
 of their sect at Seleucia, were as successful as 
 they were industrious in disseminating their 
 doctrines in the countries lying without the 
 Roman empire. It appears from unquestion- 
 al)le documents, still existing, that there were 
 numerous societies in all parts of Persia, in 
 India, in Armenia, in Arabia, in Syria, and in 
 otiRi- countries, under the jurisdiction of the 
 patriarch of Seleucia during this (the 6th) cen- 
 tury." Of the 7th century he says, (Ec. Hist., 
 vol. I. p. 499,) " The Christian religion was, in 
 
 this century, diffiised beyond its former bounds, 
 both in the eastern and western countries. 
 In the east, the Nestorians, with incredible 
 industry and perseverance, labored to propa- 
 gate it from Persia, Syria, and India, among 
 the barbarous and savage nations inhabiting 
 the deserts and the remotest shores of Asia. In 
 
 f)articular, the vast empire of China was en- 
 ightened, by their zeal and industry, with the 
 light of Christianity." 
 
 At this time, from the 5th to the 9th cen- 
 tury, the Nestorians had schools, some of which 
 were quite celebrated, designed especially, 
 though not exclusively, for the education of 
 ecclesiastics. " Previous to the overthrow of 
 the caliphs, the Nestorians had become widely 
 extended. They occupied, almost to the ex- 
 clusion of other Christian sects, the region 
 which forms the modern kingdom of Persia, in 
 all parts of which they had churches. They 
 were numerous in Armenia, Mesopotamia, and 
 Arabia. They had churches in Syria and in 
 the island of Cyprus. They had churches 
 among the mountains of Malabar in India. 
 They had numerous churches in the vast re- 
 gions of Tartary, from the Caspian sea to 
 Mount Imaus, and beyond, through the greater 
 part of what is now known as Chinese Tartary, 
 and even in China itself. The names of twen- 
 ty-five metropolitan sees are on record, which 
 of course embraced a far greater number of 
 bishoprics, and still more numerous societies or 
 churches." 
 
 But at this time Christianity, as exhibited 
 in the lives of its professors, had lost not a 
 little of its purity and its power ; and even if 
 we suppose the Nestorians to have been more 
 correct in doctrine and more Christian in life 
 than other sects, there can be no reason to be- 
 lieve that they published the pure Gospel, or 
 that they exhibited, generally, the light of a 
 holy life. Of the tenth century Mosheim says, 
 "All are agreed that in this century the state 
 of Christianity was everywhere most wretched, 
 on account of the amazing ignorance, and the 
 consequent superstition and debased morals of 
 the age, and also from other causes." Early in 
 the eleventh century a Mogul prince, in Cathay, 
 (the northern part of China) was converted to 
 Christianity by the Nestorians, and perhaps, 
 taking the name of John upon bis baptism, he 
 was called Presbyter John, or Prester John. 
 Under this name his successors became widely 
 known and celebrated. The last of this race 
 of Christian kings — Christian, with their sub- 
 jects, in name, doubtless much more than in 
 reality — was slain by Gengis Khan, about the 
 year 1202. Gengis, who had a Christian wife, 
 the daughter of Prester John, and several of 
 his successors, appear in some measure to have 
 favored the Christians, of whom numerous 
 bodies were still scattered over all northern 
 Asia and China. In the mean time, however, 
 Mohammedanism had been gaining not only 
 in Persia, but upon all the countries west of »! 
 
NESTORIANS. 
 
 555 
 
 Mount Imaus where the Nestorians commenced 
 their missionary labors. After*the descendants 
 of Gcngis had extended their conquests and a 
 branch of the family had overthrown the Ara- 
 bian caliph and destroyed Bagdad, one of them 
 became a Mohammedan and engaged in a bit- 
 ter persecution of the Christians. About the 
 close of the fourteenth century the sword of 
 Tamerlain completed the overthrow of the 
 western Tartar churches, and Nestorian Chris- 
 tianity was fully crushed in the principal seat 
 of its life and power. A little earlier than 
 this, in 1369, the descendants of Gengis Khan 
 were expelled from China by a revolt of the 
 native Chinese ; about the same time Romish 
 missionaries wore banished, and the Nestorians, 
 though permitted to remain, suffered under 
 inauspicious circumstances, and their numbers 
 gradually diminished. Still a metropolitan 
 was sent to China in 1490, and some bishops 
 in 1502. But when papal missions were resum- 
 ed in China, in the sixteenth century, the 
 missionaries stated that they could find no 
 distinct traces of Christianity in the empire. 
 Thus the Nestorian church, once so extended, 
 whose missions in Central Asia Avere continued 
 from an early period to the sixteenth century, 
 has been crushed at its centre, by Mohamme- 
 dan power, and has gradually died out in more 
 distant regions, in great measure, doubtless, be- 
 cause of its want of true Christian vitality. For 
 three centuries past it has been shut out mostly 
 from the Christian world, and degraded in its 
 political, social, intellectual, and moral condi- 
 tion. During this period defections have 
 taken place from time to time, growing out of 
 dissentions among themselves and the efforts 
 of the Jesuits, and a considerable part of the 
 Nestorians have submitted to the Pope of 
 Rome. These are governed by a patriarch 
 appointed by the Pope, and constitute what is 
 called the Chaldean church. The orthodox 
 Nestorians, if this title may be thus used, are 
 reduced to a moderate number, perhaps 80,000, 
 about 40,000 inhabiting the plain of Oroomiah, 
 in the western part of Persia, and about the 
 same number the Koordish mountains between 
 Persia and Turkey. Their patriarch, Mar 
 Shimon, resides in the mountains. 
 
 The mountain districts inhabited by the 
 Nestorians of Koordistan are exceedingly wild 
 and rugged ; in some cases almost inaccessible. 
 Having but small patches of arable land the 
 people subsist mostly from their flocks, and are 
 miserably poor. In the rudeness, wildness, and 
 boldness of their character they resemble their 
 Koordish neighbors. 
 
 The city of Oroomiah, the ancient Theharma, 
 the reputed birth-place of Zoroaster, is situated 
 on a beautiful, fertile plain, about 40 miles in 
 length, and in its broadest portion 20 miles 
 wide. The staple productions of this plain 
 are wheat, rice, cotton, tobacco, and the vine. 
 It abounds also in a great variety of fruits, 
 and has naturally one of the finest climates ; 
 
 yet artificial causes, particularly the means 
 used to irrigate the fields and gardens, pro- 
 ducing not only a great amount of evaporar 
 tion, but numerous pools of stagnant water, 
 make it unhealthy, particularly to foreigners. 
 The city contains a population of about 
 25,000, of whom less than 1000 are Nestorians, 
 but the Nestorians are numerous in the vil- 
 lages of the plain, and most of them are em- 
 ployed in the cultivation of the soil. The 
 number of this people on the plain, Mr. Per- 
 kins gave in 1843 as between thirty and forty 
 thousand. These " partake much, in their 
 manners, of the suavity and urbanity of the 
 Persian character. By the side of their rude 
 countrymen from the mountains, though ori- 
 ginally from the same stock, they appear like 
 antipodes." 
 
 As Christians, up to the time when mission- 
 ary operations were commenced among them, 
 a few years since, the Nestorians, though they 
 might have a name to live, were dead. Their 
 religious belief and practices were more sim- 
 ple and scriptural than those of other Oriental 
 Christian sects. They abhorred all image 
 worship, auricular confession, the doctrine of 
 purgatory, and many other corrupt dogmas 
 and practices of the Papal and Greek churches. 
 Though not free from errors and superstitions, 
 their doctrinal tenets were generally correct, 
 and the Scriptures were fully acknowledged as 
 of supreme authority. But " the life and power 
 of Christianity had departed. Scarcely a symi> 
 tom of spiritual vitality remained." They clung 
 with great tenacity to the forms of their reli- 
 gion. Many of them would rather die than 
 violate their periodical fasts, which are very 
 numerous, covering nearly half the whole year. 
 Yet, even their most intelligent ecclesiastics 
 seemed to have hardly any idea of the mean- 
 ing of regeneration. Lying and profaneness 
 seemed universal, and intemperance existed to 
 a fearful •extent. " Education was at an ebb 
 almost as low as vital religion. None but 
 their ecclesiastics could read at all, and but 
 very few of them could do more than merely 
 repeat their devotions in an unknown tongue, 
 while neither they nor their hearers knew any 
 thing of the meaning." There was among 
 them little if any thing that could be called 
 preaching ; their public services consisting of 
 chanting the Scriptures and their prayers in 
 ancient SjTiac, a language which but few of 
 the priests, and none of the people, under- 
 stand. Yery little attempt had been made to 
 reduce the vernacular language of the Nesto- 
 rians to writing, and the printing-press was 
 unknown among them. What few books they 
 had, and they were very few, were manuscripts 
 in the ancient Syriac, a dead language. 
 
 The canons of the Nestorian church require 
 celibacy in all the episcopal orders of the clergy, 
 i. e. all from the bishop up ; lower orders may 
 marry. They reckon nine ecclesiastical orders, 
 viz., sub-deacon, reader, deacon, priest, arch- 
 
566 
 
 NESTORIANS. 
 
 deacon, bishop, metropolitan, -catholokos, and 
 patriarch ; but two or three of these are now 
 little more than nonjinal. Monasteries and 
 iMiiMiits do not exist among them. **They 
 ;.o relics such as are common in the 
 ;, of Rome," says Mr. Badger {Nestorians 
 and their Kitmi, Vol. II. p. 136), yet " they 
 believe the remains of the martyrs and saints 
 to be endowed with supernatural virtues ;" and 
 they invoke the virgin and the saints, asking 
 for their prayers to Christ. They have no 
 pictni'es or images in their churches, and are 
 much opposed to the use of them. The only 
 symbol among them is a plain Greek cross, 
 which they venerate highly. The sign of the 
 cross is used in baptism and in prayer ; a cross 
 is engraved over the low entrances of their 
 churches, and kissed by those who enter, and 
 the priests carry with them a small silver 
 cross, which is often kissed by the people. — 
 Missionary Hcrold for August, 1838 ; Dr. 
 Grant's Nestorians; Mosham and Neandefs 
 Church Histoi-y ; Badger's Nestorians and their 
 Ritual, Vol. II. pp. 132-6. 
 
 MISSION. 
 
 Anericax Board. — In the spring of 1830, 
 Rev. Messrs. Smith and D wight, while on an ex- 
 ploring missionary tour, in accordance with in- 
 struct ioi>s which had been given them by the 
 Prudential Committee of the A. B. C. F. M., 
 visited the Nestorians. They found it not safe to 
 attempt to penetrate the Koordish mountains, 
 but spent a lew days at Oroomiah, and became 
 much interested in the condition of the Nesto- 
 rian church, and satisfied that a favorable open- 
 ing for missionary effort was there presented. 
 Their report led to the formation of the mission. 
 In Januarv, 1833, soon after the report was pre- 
 sented to the Prudential Committee, Mr. Justin 
 Perkins, then a tutor in Amherst College, was 
 appointed to commence the mission. In the 
 instructions given to him the main object of 
 the mission was defined to be to bring about 
 a change which would " enable the Nestorian 
 church, through the grace of God, to exert a 
 commanding influence in the spiritual regener- 
 ation of Asia." Considering the past history 
 of that church, its present state, and the char- 
 acter of the people embraced in it, it was 
 hoped that, brought again to a fuller knowl- 
 edge ot the truth, and to feel the regenerating 
 and sanctifying power of truth attended by the 
 influences of the Spirit, the members of that 
 church would again become, not only them- 
 selves true disciples of Christ and heirs of life, 
 but efficient laborers in the great work of 
 building up the Redeemer's kingdom through- 
 out the w orld. 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Perkins sailed from Boston 
 Sent. 21, 1833. Tlic Committee had not been 
 able as yet to find a physician for the mission, 
 and it was not thought best to delay their de^ 
 parture on that account, as Mr. Perkins could, 
 while waiting for a colleague at Constantino^ 
 
 pie, avail himself of facilities which he might 
 there find for acquiring the language of the 
 Nestorians. They reached Constantinople on 
 the 21st of December, and on the 17lh of May 
 following, feeling constrained, without waiting 
 longer for associates, to proceed on their way, 
 they sailed for Trebizoud, the port on the 
 Black Sea from wliich their land journey 
 must commence. They left this place on the 
 16th of June ; but, owing to the incursions 
 of Koordish robbers upon the Turkish fron- 
 tiers, they w-ere much detained and annoyed on 
 their journey, were obliged to take a circuit- 
 ous route throngh Russian provinces, and did 
 not reach Tabreez until the 28th of August. 
 Sir John Campbell, British ambassador at 
 Tabreez, to whom Mr. Perkins had written, 
 stating their detentions and perplexities, sent 
 a courier to meet them, and also a kind of lit- 
 ter borne by mules, for the accommodation of 
 Mrs. Perkins (who had been brought by hard- 
 ships into a critical state of health,) with a 
 supply of provisions. The next day, August 
 21st, they were also met by Dr. Reach, the 
 physician of the British embassy, whose kind 
 regard for their welfare had brought him about 
 sixty miles, that he might render them assist- 
 ance. 
 
 As no European resided at Oroomiah it was 
 not thought prudent for Mr. Perkins to pro- 
 ceed there until he should be joined by an asso- 
 ciate, and he resolved to remain at l^abreez. 
 Anxious, however, to be making all possible 
 progress in acquiring the modern Syriac lan- 
 guage, he went to Oroomiah in October, ac- 
 companied by Rev. Mr. Haas of the Basle Mis- 
 sionary Society, who was residing at Tabreez, 
 to procure a teacher. He obtained Mar (bish- 
 op) Yohannan to return with him to Tabreez 
 as his teacher, and the bishop took, as his 
 " servant " and companion, priest Abraham, an 
 intelligent young man, who became from the 
 first one of the most valuable native helpers in 
 the mission. 
 
 On the 11th of May, 1835, Dr. Grant, leaving 
 a large and lucrative practice, and a circle ot 
 warm friends at Utica, N. Y., sailed from Bos- 
 ton with his wife to join this mission. They 
 reached Tabreez Oct. 15. After resting a few 
 days Dr. Grant proceeded to Oroomiah to make 
 arrangements. Comfortable houses were soon 
 provided, and on the 20th of November, Mr. 
 Perkins arrived with his wife and Mrs. Grant. 
 The first missionaries to the Nestorians had 
 now reached their destination, and their com- 
 ing was greeted by the people with great cor- 
 diality. Dr. Grant's professional character 
 served to secure the favor of the Persian gov- 
 ernor, and the Nestorian bishops and priests 
 at once gave them their cordial co-operation 
 in the prosecution of their missionary labors, 
 regarding them not as rivals, but as coadjutors 
 with them in a necessary work of instruction 
 and improvement among the people. A school 
 was soon projected for educating teachers and 
 
NESTORIANS. 
 
 557 
 
 other native helpers, to be taught by priest 
 Abraham under the supervision of Mr. Perkins. 
 It was commenced on the 18th of Jan., 1836, 
 with seven pupils from the city, and the next 
 day 11 boarding scholars were received from 
 abroad. Among the pupils were three deacons 
 and one priest. It is a singular fact that these 
 new favors conferred upon their Christian sub- 
 jects excited the jealousy of the Mohammedans, 
 who resentfully asked, "Arc we to be passed 
 by ?" and to quiet their minds Dr. Grant was 
 obliged to devote a few hours each day to 
 teaching a school of Mussulman boys. 
 
 In presenting some view of the subsequent 
 history aad the success of the mission thus 
 commenced, a topical and not a chronological 
 arrangement will be followed. The subjoined 
 table will show what laborers have been sent 
 from the United States to the mission, who of 
 these laborers have deceased, and who have 
 returned to their native land. Mr. Merrick 
 accompanied Dr. Grant to Tabrecz in 1835, to 
 commence an experimental mission among the 
 Mohammedans of Persia. He resided some 
 years at Tabreez, but no such promise of use- 
 fulness was found as to warrant the continu- 
 ance of a distinct mission, and in 1841 he re- 
 moved to Oroomiah. In 1845 he returned to 
 the United States. 
 
 MISSIONARY LABORERS FROM THE UNITED STATES 
 WHO HAVE BEEN CONNECTED WITH THE NES- 
 TORIAN MISSION. 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 i 
 s 
 
 Rev. Justin Perkins, D.D 
 
 1833 
 1833 
 1835 
 1835 
 1335 
 1837 
 1837 
 1837 
 1837 
 1839 
 1839 
 1840 
 1840 
 1841 
 1841 
 1841 
 1841 
 1842 
 1842 
 1843 
 1843 
 1843 
 1843 
 1847 
 1847 
 1847 
 1849 
 1849 
 1849 
 1851 
 1851 
 1851 
 1852 
 1852 
 
 1842 
 1842 
 1840 
 
 1845 
 1846 
 1846 
 1853 
 1853 
 1845 
 1845 
 
 1847 
 
 1843 
 1843 
 1841 
 
 1849 
 
 
 Mrs. Charlotte B. Perkins 
 
 1844 
 1839 
 
 1854 
 
 1842 
 
 1841 
 1841 
 
 1843 
 
 1848 
 
 1854 
 
 Asahel Grant, M.D 
 
 Mrs. Grant 
 
 Rer. James L. Merrick 
 
 Rev. Albert L. Halladay 
 
 Mrs. Halladay 
 
 Rev. William R. Stocking 
 
 Mrs. Jerusba. E. Stocking 
 
 Rev. Willard Jones 
 
 Mrs. Jones 
 
 Austin H. Wright, M.D. . . , 
 
 Edward Breath (Printer) 
 
 Rev. Abel K. Hinsdale 
 
 Mrs. Hinsdale 
 
 1846 
 1848 
 
 1851 
 
 Rev. Colby C. Mitchell . . . 
 
 Mrs. Mitchell 
 
 Rev. Thomas Laurie 
 
 
 Rev. David T. Stoddard 
 
 Mrs. Stoddard 
 
 Miss Fidelia Fisk 
 
 t 
 
 
 Miss Cath'ne E. Myers (Mrs. Wright) 
 Rev. Joseph G. Cochran 
 
 Mrs. Cochran 
 
 Miss Mary Susan Rice 
 
 Rev. George W. Coan 
 
 Mrs. Coan 
 
 Mrs. Sarah A. Breath 
 
 Mrs. Sophia D. Stoddard 
 
 Rev. Samuel A, Rhea 
 
 Miss Martlia A. Harris 
 
 Rev. Edward H. Crane 
 
 Sirs. Crane 
 
 
 Object aimed at. — Cooperation of Ecclesiastics. 
 — From the commencement of the mission 
 there has been reason to hope that pure r(^- 
 gion might be revived in the small Nestorian 
 community without seriously disturbing the 
 existing ecclesiastical constitution. The mis- 
 sionaries have not sought to form a new Chris- 
 tian community, but to bring individuals, both 
 among the ecclesiastics and the common people, 
 to a full and saving knowledge of the truth, 
 hoping that such a change might be brought 
 about by the grace of God as should cause the 
 forsaking of false doctrines, so far as such were 
 held, the laying aside of whatever was super- 
 stitious or unscriptural, and the establishing of 
 a pure church upon existing foundations. It 
 seemed at least best to make the experiment, 
 and to leave the question as to the necessity or 
 propriety of forming new churches to be de- 
 cided by time and providential circumstances. 
 There has been the more reason, and the 
 more encouragement, for pursuing such a 
 course, from the fact that many of the leading 
 ecclesiastics, so far from setting themselves in 
 opposition to the missionaries and to their in- 
 structions, as has been done so generally among 
 ' the Armenians and the Greeks, have been de- 
 cidedly friendly, and in not a few instances 
 have earnestly cooperated in every effort to 
 elevate and evangelize the people. The four 
 bishops on the plain. Mar Yohannan, Mar Elias, 
 Mar Joseph, and Mar Gabriel, exhibited friend- 
 liness, and a disposition to favor the objects of 
 the mission from the first, and the missionaries 
 early made it an object of special attention to 
 instruct and benefit these and other ecclesias- 
 tics. The four bishops named were placed in 
 the relation of boarding pupils to the mission, 
 and for several years the three first received 
 daily instruction in a theological or Bible class, 
 forming, with some priests and other promising 
 young men, the first class in the seminary. 
 They were also soon employed as native help- 
 ers to the mission, and as early as 1841 Mr. 
 Perkins speaks of some of the ecclesiastics as 
 " enlightened, and we trust really pious." 
 " They not only allow us to preach in their 
 churches, but urge us to do so ; and are for- 
 ward themselves in every good word and 
 work." It is an important fact that through 
 the schools which have been established, almost 
 the entire education of ecclesiastics is now in 
 the hands of the missionaries. 
 
 British and Russian protecticm — Kindness of 
 British officials. — The kindness of Sir John 
 Campbell to Mr. Perkins has been already 
 mentioned. In 1835, at the suggestion of the 
 Et. Hon. Henry Ellis, British Ambassador to 
 Persia, the missionaries asked and obtained 
 from him English protection, and the ambas- 
 sador and his suite ever extended to them all 
 possible kindness. When the English embassy 
 was withdrawn from Persia, with a prospect 
 of war in 1839, the missionaries applied for 
 protection to the Russian consul-general at 
 
658 
 
 NESTORIANS. 
 
 Tabrceat, who clioorfully gftve them passports, 
 and took other uunisurea to insure their safety, 
 9d for many years Kussiau protection was 
 cxtonthnl to them. In 1851, at the suggestion 
 of Mr. i^tovens, British Consul at Tabreez, Bri- 
 tijjh protection wjis again solicited, and at once 
 ffrantixl. Tlic many instances in which Mr. 
 Stevens has manifested the kindest interest in 
 the welfare of the missionaries, and has ren- 
 dered them assistance, can here only be alluded 
 to, but arc worthy of most grateful notice, as 
 ore also the self-sacrificing and earnest efforts 
 made in behalf of suffering native helj)ers of 
 the mission during recent difficulties in the 
 mountains, by Col. Williams, British Commis- 
 sioner for settling the boundary between Tur- 
 key and Persia. Persian officers, also, have 
 often manifested much readiness to afford pro- 
 tection and prevent violence and wrong from 
 rosing ecclesiastics, Jesuit or jSTestorian, as 
 at times from rude and abusive Moham- 
 medans. 
 
 The Press — Translating. — When the mis- 
 sionaries commenced their labors at Oroomiah 
 they at once felt the want of a press and a 
 printer. Very few books were to be found 
 among the people, and these were in a lan- 
 guage not understood. Excepting the Psalms, 
 the mission had discovered in 1838 but one 
 copy of the Old Testament Scriptures, and 
 that was in three or four separate volumes, 
 the property of different individuals. The 
 British and Foreign Bible Society had printed 
 the Gospels in the Nestorian character, but 
 scarcely more than one copy of the Acts and 
 of the Epistles could be found, and none of the 
 Book of Revelations in that character. Much 
 delay, however, was experienced in finding a 
 winter. At last, on the 21st of July, 1840, 
 Mr. Breath sailed from Boston, taking with 
 him an iron press, constructed of so many 
 pieces that it could be transported on horse- 
 back from Trebizond to Oroomiah. He reached 
 Oroomiah, Nov. 17th, and the press was im- 
 mediately put in operation, exciting great in- 
 terest among both Nestorians and Mohamme- 
 dans. 1 ,600 volumes, and 3,600 tracts, amount- 
 ing in all to 510,400 pages, were reported as 
 having been printed in 1841. In 1843 a new 
 foot of type, cut and cast expressly for the 
 mission, modeled after the best Syriac manu- 
 scripts, was forwarded from the United States. 
 The printing, up to the close of the year 1850, 
 had amounted to 6,228,200 pages. Probably 
 more than 2,000,000 of pages have been print- 
 ed since that time. 
 
 ^ On the 15th of February, 1836, the mis- 
 sionaries commenced the great work of trans- 
 lating the Bible into the modern Syriac, the 
 spoken language of the Nestorians. In 1846 
 an edition of the New Testament, with the an- 
 cient and the modern Syriac in parallel co- 
 lumns, was carried through the press. Near 
 the close of 1852, the whole Bible was printed 
 in a language which the people could under- 
 
 stand. The Old Testament has been printed 
 like the New, with the ancient and modern 
 languages in parallel columns, and thus the 
 living and life-giving Word of God is going 
 abroad among the people in an attractive Ibrni, 
 and " in their own tongue wherein they were 
 born," though a few years since, that was not 
 a written language. Bunyan's Pilgrim's Pro- 
 gress also, Baxter's Saint's liest, and other 
 valuable religious books are given to the peo- 
 ple. For the last three or four years a month- 
 ly paper, " The Rays of Light," has been pub- 
 lished, containing a great amount and variety 
 of valuable reading matter. Thus a literature 
 has been already created for the Nestorians. 
 Small, indeed, as yet, if we except the Bible, 
 which alone is not small ; but of immense va- 
 lue, and steadily increasing. 
 
 Schools. — In the mean time the schools estab- 
 lished have been raising up a community of 
 readers. Mention has already been made of 
 the opening of a seminary for the education 
 of native teachers and preachers, on the 18th 
 of January, 1836. The next Sabbath the pu- 
 pils requested permission to attend the English 
 worship of the mission, and this they continued 
 to do with much interest. For some years 
 this seminary was, of course, in an incipient 
 state, giving instruction only in the elements 
 of knowledge ; but it had from the first, dea- 
 cons, and priests, and bishops among the pu- 
 pils, and was gradually rising in its character 
 as a literary institution. There were 50 pupils 
 in 1838. Early in 1841 the school was re- 
 organized and improved ; the qualifications for 
 admission were raised ; the primary depart- 
 ment was excluded, and a better system of 
 instruction was introduced. The two teachers 
 were " deacons from the mountains," and were 
 " among the best scholars of the nation." The 
 number of pupils was thus for a time dimin- 
 ished, but soon increased to more than the for- 
 mer number. In 1845 it was again entirely 
 re-organized, with the design to " reduce its 
 numbers, make the instruction more systematic 
 and thorough, and exert a stronger religious 
 influence over the pupils ;" and in 1846 it was 
 removed from Oroomiah to Seir, the health 
 retreat of the mission. It has exerted a great 
 influence for good, and has been highly esteem- 
 ed by the people — the desire to obtain admis- 
 sion having been often very great. In 1852, 
 the report gives 40 as the number of students 
 " of whom 30 are hopefully pious." Regular 
 instruction in theology is now given to the 
 most advanced class. One of the pupils " is 
 designed to succeed the present bishop of the 
 largest ^cese in Oroomiah ; several are from 
 mountain districts, and one from Bootan, in 
 the extreme western part of the field." 
 
 In March, 1838, a female boarding-school 
 was commenced in the mission premises. A 
 few girls had previously been in the seminary, 
 and in some village schools, already commenc- 
 ed, but the idea of female education was 
 
NESTORIAKS. 
 
 559 
 
 strange to tlie Kestorians, and until about 
 this time the missionaries had not ventured to 
 commence a school exclusively for girls, fear- 
 ing it might excite prejudice. Now the Nes- 
 torians had become acquainted with them, had 
 learned to confide in them, and seemed fully 
 prepared to sustain such a measure. The ec- 
 clesiastics connected with their families, were 
 active in recommending it, and the mission- 
 aries at once looked upon this female school, 
 in which there were some 16 girls, as one of 
 the most hopeful departments of their work. 
 Since 1843, this school has been under the 
 care of Miss Fidelia Fisk, from Shelburn 
 Mass., who has shown herself eminently fitted 
 for the place, and has been eminently useful in 
 it. Miss Rice, from Lincoln, Mass., has been 
 for several years associated with Miss Fisk. 
 Though a few years since, it was a novelty, 
 and considered as disgraceful to teach ISTesto- 
 rian females ; now, " an examination of this 
 female seminary draws together all the princi- 
 pal men and women of the Nestorian commu- 
 nity, who sit and listen with unwearied interest 
 for two days together." There were 42 pupils 
 in 1852, and Mr. Stoddard " doubts whether 
 he ever attended an examination of greater 
 excellence " than that of this institution. 
 Both this and the male seminary have been 
 repeatedly favored with large measures of the 
 special influences of the Holy Spirit. 
 
 The first village free school of which notice 
 is found in connection with the mission, was 
 commenced about August, 1836, at Ada, the 
 residence of Mar Yoosuph (Joseph) about 15 
 miles from the city. Three months after it 
 was commenced, Mr. Perkins visited it, and 
 says : " It now numbers about 40 children, 
 and is as well regulated as any school I ever 
 visited." It was attended by girls as well as 
 boys-i— " a great novelty among the Nesto- 
 rians." This school, and others which began 
 now to be formed, were collected, and taught 
 by those who had been under the instruction 
 of the missionaries in the seminary. In 1837 
 there were tliree free schools. In 1841 there 
 were 17, in 16 different villages. The number 
 rapidly increased, and in 1843 there were 40 
 schools in 36 villages, with 635 male and 128 
 female pupils, and 56 teachers, of whom 22 
 were priests and 26 deacons. In June, 1844, 
 it was judged best, from circumstances grow- 
 ing out of the opposition of the patriarch to 
 the mission, and other difficulties, to dismiss 
 all the schools, but they were again commenc- 
 ed in October, 1845, in compliance with the 
 earnest wishes of both ecclesiastics and peo- 
 ple. The character of these village free 
 schools has been improving ; the Bible is the 
 prominent text book, and their influence is 
 great and most happy. In April, 1851, Mr. 
 Stocking, who had then the superintendence of 
 the schools, reported 45 schools, with 871 pu- 
 pils, of whom 203 were females. The teach- 
 ers, with but few exceptions, had been mem- 
 
 bers of the seminary ; many of them were 
 hopefully pious, and all were regarded as 
 evangelical in sentiment. In June, 1853, the 
 number of schools had increased to 78. 
 
 About the first of January, 1840, a regular 
 school was commenced for Mussulman boys, 
 aad soon numbered 10 promising boys and 
 young men as pupils, but it does not seem to 
 have been long sustained. 
 
 Preaching — Native Helpers. — The preach- 
 ing service on the mission premises at Oroomi- 
 ah, on the Sabbath, was attended by the pu- 
 pils of the two seminaries, from the commence- 
 ment of these institutions. The missionaries 
 had preached also extensively in their village 
 schools, during the week, but they were taken 
 quite by surprise, when in February, 1838, 
 Mar Yohannan, requested Mr. Perkins to go 
 into their church every Sabbath and feast 
 days, and preach the Uospel to the people, 
 stating, that he and other priests had often 
 spoken on the subject, and unanimously desir- 
 ed that he Avould do so. The invitation was 
 complied with, at first with some reluctance, 
 as they had not supposed that ecclesiastics and 
 people were yet ready for such a measure. — 
 [Perkins' " Residence in Persia," p. 333.) 
 
 A jugular Sabbath service by the mission- 
 aries,lin a Nestorian church, in Oroomiah, 
 does not appear, however, to have been com- 
 menced until March, 1840. {Missionary He- 
 rald, 1840, p. 493.) At this time, to meet the 
 wishes of such as could not find seats at the 
 mission house, inquiry was made for a private 
 house, in which they might hold a service. 
 But deacons, and priests, and three bishops, 
 who were consulted, all insisted that the ser- 
 vice should be in the church. There would be 
 no jealousy, they said. " Do you think," ask- 
 ed Mar Yohannan, " that we do not know 
 lambs from wolves ?" The missionaries had 
 before preached at times in different churches 
 in the city and villages, at the request of the 
 officiating bishop or priest ; but now this work 
 seemed fairly commenced, and calls for preach- 
 ing multipled. Within a short time those 
 who were able to use the language, preached 
 usually three times each on the Sabbath, to as 
 many different congregations, in villages, some 
 miles apart. There were 7 regular preaching 
 stations before the close of the year. A great 
 door for usefulness was thus opened, and it has 
 not been closed. The missionaries have entire 
 access to the people on the plain, preaching in 
 their churches, wherever they can go. 
 
 But the Gospel is now preached among the 
 people not by the missionaries only. When 
 the mission was commenced, the ecclesiastics 
 were not preachers, and their public religious 
 services were not preaching services. But 
 bishops and priests have been pupils in the 
 schools, and bishops and priests have felt the 
 force of truth, — have become new creatures in 
 Christ Jesus, and are now, in some cases, zeal- 
 ous and impressive preachers. And some 
 
660 
 
 NESTORIANS. 
 
 yoang men who have been educated at the 
 Bominwy, and have become apuarently devoted 
 Christians, have been ordained bv the bishops 
 of their clmrch, and are thus fully introduced 
 into the work of the ministry. In 1844, five 
 intelli"ent native preachers aided the mission- 
 aries in maintaiuing " preaching, more or less, 
 ot a score of places." The patriarch has at 
 times opposed, and some of the bishops, in 
 1837, prohibited the pious helpers of the mis- 
 sion from preaching in their dioceses ; but, to 
 a great extent, the whole field is, and has been, 
 open to them, and among them are some who 
 make extensive tours, not only on the plain, 
 but in the mountain districts, as zealous and 
 able evangelists. At a meeting of the mis- 
 sion, in September, 1851, a plan was devised, 
 by which it was hoped the Gospel would soon 
 be carried to all the Nestoriaus of Persia. 
 For the mouth ending January 16, 1852, there 
 were reported 29 places where there had been 
 at least one preaching service each Sabbath, 
 and in several of these places two or three ser- 
 vices. In 13 other villages there had been 
 preaching once or ofteuer within the month. 
 Seven of the native helpers of the mission are 
 now regularly employed as preachers, and 
 others, though they have other emplo¥nieut, 
 preach every Sabbath, and at other f|imes. 
 ** The line of demarcation between an evange- 
 lically reformed church and a mere dead Chris- 
 tianity, is becoming more and more distinct." 
 Mar Yohannan boldly discards many customs 
 of the church, and seems disposed, as do the 
 native helpers of the mission and those who 
 have been educated in the schools, to go on 
 with the work of reformation. 
 
 Opposition from Papists and the Patriarch. — 
 The missionaries have not prosecuted their 
 work without meeting with obstacles and 
 trials, as well as with encouragements. Jesu- 
 its and others of the Romish church, whose 
 missionaries have so often, for many centuries, 
 tried to induce the Nestorians to come under 
 allegiance to the pope, were not idle after the 
 American missionaries commenced their labors. 
 In 1837, a Roman Catholic bishop, from Sal- 
 mas, came to Oroomiah, professing to have a 
 large sum of money to aid Nestorians who 
 would join his church. Other emissaries of 
 Rome followed, and earnest efforts were made 
 to undermine the influence of the mission, and 
 secure among the people the ascendancy of 
 popery. Such, however, were the folly and 
 rashness of the proceedings of French Jesuits 
 among the Armenians of Isfahan and Tabreez, 
 that, in 1842, they were expelled from Persia, 
 and an order was passed by the government, 
 prohibiting all proselyting from one Christian 
 sect to another. Remaining quiet for a while, 
 some of the Jesuits soon made their way to 
 the province of Oroomiah, and recommenced 
 their proselyting career among the Nestorians, 
 with even greater zeal and assurance than they 
 had before used, resorting to the most unprin- 
 
 cipled and hazardous expedients, which led to 
 their second expulsion. The French govern- 
 ment sent an envoy to Pei-sia to obtain per- 
 mission for them to return. Failing in this, 
 every effort was made to procure the banish- 
 ment of the American missionaries, on the 
 ground that they, too, were violating the law, 
 in making proselytes. It seemed necessary 
 that Messrs. Perkins and Stocking should go 
 to Teheran, in November, 1844, to counteract 
 the influence which was exerted ; and, for a 
 considerable time, much solicitude was felt ; 
 but, aided by the kind offices of the Russian 
 ambassador, the missionaries and their friends 
 satisfied the government that the charges 
 against thera were not true, and they were 
 permitted to remain. In 1851, an edict of 
 toleration was promulgated by the Persian 
 government, granting equal protection to all 
 Christian subjects, and permitting them to 
 change their religion or denomination at their 
 pleasure. Of course, the Papists are again 
 active, and will do what they can. It is as- 
 cribed by the people to the influence of the 
 mission, that their efforts have been, as yet, so 
 unsuccessful, and, as they have now truth, and 
 light, and piety, to meet, it is not to be sup- 
 posed that they can now do what they might 
 once have done. 
 
 The Nestorian patriarch, Mar Shimon, re- 
 siding in a region almost wholly inaccessible, 
 had never been visited by any of the mission- 
 aries until Dr. Grant penetrated the mountain 
 districts in 1839. He was cordially received, 
 and was, for more than a month, the guest of 
 the patriarch, who then urged that schools 
 and missionary labor should be commenced in 
 the mountains. Up to this time, the Nestori- 
 ans of Koordistan had been, in their mountain 
 fastnesses, as they were called, independent; 
 but in 1843, determined hostilities were com- 
 menced against them by Koordish chiefs, en- 
 couraged by the Turks, which resulted, after 
 some months of terrible warfare, in their en- 
 tire subjugation. The patriarch fled to Mosul, 
 and some of his brothers escaped to Oroomiah. 
 Here, in necessitous circumstances, they threw 
 themselves upon the hospitality of the mission- 
 aries, and when the hospitality afforded was 
 more limited than were their desires, and they 
 were informed that no more could be done for 
 theni, they attempted to coerce by opposition. 
 In the mean time, an influence hostile to the 
 mission had been successfully exerted on the 
 patriarch himself at Mosul, and he sustained 
 his brothers in their course. By such influ- 
 ences, some of the higher ecclesiastics at Oroo- 
 miah were led also into more or less decided 
 opposition, for a time. In June, 1844, it was 
 thought best, in view of the difficulties thus 
 brought about, to dismiss all the village 
 schools. As the male seminary needed re-or- 
 ganization, the necessity for dismissing this 
 also was not so much regretted ; but when, in 
 the course of the summer, it became necessary. 
 
NESTORIANS. 
 
 561 
 
 as was then supposed, to disband the female 
 seminary, " the tears and sobs of the pupils 
 told, more expressively than language could 
 have done, the bitterness of their hearts." 
 The missionaries could not restrain their tears, 
 and the stoutest Nestorians who were standing 
 by were melted. Both seminaries were, how- 
 ever, soon reopened. Ecclesiastics and others, 
 who were for a time led to oppose by the pa- 
 triarch and his family, were again cooperating 
 with the mission with apparent cordiality in 
 October of this year, (1844,) and not long 
 after, the brothers of the patriarch were them- 
 selves apparently wishing to regain their 
 standing with the missionaries. 
 
 In June, 1847, the patriarch, distrusting the 
 motives of the Turkish government, by which 
 he had been invited to visit Constantinople, 
 fled from Mosul to Oroomiah. Two of his 
 brothers then there. Deacon Isaac and Deacon 
 Dunka,liad now been. Deacon Isaac especially, 
 for two years, apparently decided friends of 
 the mission, and for some mouths the patriarch 
 himself put on the appearance of friendliness ; 
 but in April, 1846, he took the stand of open 
 and decided opposition. Not satisfied to use 
 persuasion only, and not content with ecclesi- 
 astical interdicts, he employed the most abusive 
 language towards the pious Nestorians, threat- 
 ening imprisonment and the bastinado. His 
 servants and Koords, instigated by him, re- 
 sorted to violence ; and some of the pious 
 native helpers of the mission were cruelly 
 abused. During these troubles, Mr. Stevens, 
 the British consul at Tabreez, exerted himself 
 in the most efficient manner for the protection 
 of the mission. Through his influence mainly, 
 the Persian government interfered decidedly, 
 in September, to put a stop to the violence of 
 the patriarch and his most active instruments. 
 In these difficulties, the prominent Nestorian 
 ecclesiastics did not hesitate to oppose the 
 course of their own patriarch, the head of 
 their church, giving their sympathy and co- 
 operation to the mission. In 1849 the patri- 
 arch returned to the mountains. There he has 
 remained, sometimes making professions of 
 friendship ; but instigating, probably, to the 
 opposition which has been made to recent 
 efforts to plant a permanent missionary station 
 in the mountain district of Gawar. His influ- 
 ence, especially with the Nestorians of the 
 plain, has been greatly diminished, as the influ- 
 ence of the truth has increased among the 
 people. 
 
 Revivals. — In January, 1844, this mission 
 was favored with some tokens of the special 
 presence of the Holy Spirit. A few, mostly 
 young men of promise, who had long been 
 members of the seminary, or in some way con- 
 nected with the mission, gave cheering evi- 
 dence that they had passed from death to life. 
 In the summer of 1845 there was an interest- 
 ing state of religious feeling at Geog Tapa, the 
 largest Nestorian village on the plain, which 
 36 
 
 has since been greatly favored. The first 
 great revival, however, commenced in Jan- 
 uary, 1846. The first instances of hopeful 
 conversion were in the female seminary, but 
 in a short time, many in both seminaries were 
 inquiring what they should do to be saved. 
 The feeling became general and very deep, 
 continuing for many months in the seminaries, 
 and extending to many not connected with 
 these institutions. John and Moses, two 
 young men, native helpers of the mission, 
 labored with deep interest and much solicitude 
 among the people of Geog Tapa, of which 
 place it was said in March, by Dr. Perkins, " a 
 great work in the conversion of souls is in 
 progress." Not far from 50 persons in this 
 village, besides pupils in the two seminaries 
 from the village, were hopeful subjects of 
 renewing grace during the progress of this 
 work. In the two seminaries there were 
 believed to be also now about 50 truly pious 
 youth, many of whom manifested great interest 
 in efforts for the conversion of others. In the 
 village of Seir, where the male seminary was 
 located, there was much interest, and within a 
 few months it was stated that hopefully pious 
 persons were to be found in not less than 
 eleven villages on the plain. The work ex- 
 tended also, in some measure, to the mountain 
 districts. Deacon Guergis, " an untamed 
 mountaineer," came to visit his daughter, who 
 had become hopefully a Christian in the female 
 seminary, and was soon himself bowing with 
 penitence and faith, before the cross of Christ. 
 Eeturning to his mountain home, he exerted 
 at once a most happy influence. Others from 
 the mountains were hopefully converted at 
 Oroomiah, and during the year several excur- 
 sions were made in mountain districts, by 
 members of the mission and native helpers ; 
 especially " the young evangelist, John," who 
 made extensive missionary tours, with happy 
 results. Thus did light break in soon after the 
 difficulties with the papists and with the brothers 
 of the patriarch ; '' whose powerful influences 
 from without and from within had combined 
 to embarrass, and, if possible, to destroy the 
 mission." Eight months after the commence- 
 ment of this work, not less than 150 hopeful 
 converts in all were reckoned, including seve- 
 ral ecclesiastics. Early in 1847, the female 
 seminary again experienced a work of grace, 
 when it was hoped that 9 others of the pupils 
 were " born again." Again, in 1849, follow- 
 ing the night of darkness occasioned by the 
 bitter opposition of the patriarch in 1848, a 
 precious revival was experienced, commencing, 
 as in 1846, in the two seminaries in January, 
 and extending, as then, to Geog Tapa and 
 many other Nestorian villages. During this 
 work. Mar Yohannan and Deacon Isaac, the 
 friendly brother of the patriarch before men- 
 tioned, were both, it was hoped, truly born of 
 God. Another work of grace was enjoyed in 
 1850, commencing, as before, in the seminaries- 
 
662 
 
 NESTORIANS. 
 
 and extending itself abroad. Though not as 
 powcrrul as the revival of the i)reviou8 year, it 
 had all the marks of a true work of the Spirit, 
 and quite a number, before inipeiiitcnt, were 
 hopefully rciiewetl, while Christians were 
 greatly quickenetl. In 1851, also, there were 
 uidicatlous of the sixjcial presence of the 
 Spirit at about the same period ; and in 
 liUirch, 1853, Dr. Perkins speaks of a " pre- 
 cious refreshing from the presence of the Lord, 
 which has been in delightful progress in our 
 male seminary, and in the village of Seir, dur- 
 ing most of the past mouth." Few modern 
 missions have been more favored mi\\ such 
 tokens of God's presence, than this mission to 
 the Ncstorians. A few years since, none 
 could be found among the people who gave 
 evidence of piety ; now, hundreds are heirs of 
 the grace of life. ' 
 
 EjJ'orts for the Mountain Nestorians, — In 
 1837 the Prudential Committee of the Ameri- 
 can Board said, in their annual report, " The 
 Committee look with great interest to the day 
 when a branch of this mission shall exist 
 among the independent Nestorians. Among 
 these fierce mountaineers the life of the mis- 
 sionary might be in some peril, but sanctified 
 t)y grace they would make excellent soldiers of 
 the cross." It having become obvious that 
 Dr. Grant could not endure the climate of 
 Oroomiah, instructions were sent to him to 
 commence, if possible, a station on the western 
 side of the Koordish mountains, in the hope 
 that from there access might be gained to the 
 mountains themselves. These instructions he 
 received in Feb. 1839, about one month after 
 he had been called to bury his wife. His own 
 wish was to attempt to enter the mountains 
 from Persia ; but overruled in this he started 
 on the first of April for Erzrum, where he ex- 
 pected to meet Mr. Homes, of the Armenian 
 mission, who was to be his temporary associ- 
 ate. Learning that Mr. Homes would not 
 meet him at Erzrum, he went to Constantino- 
 ple, and there finding that Mr. H. could not 
 at once be spared from that station, with cha- 
 racteristic energy he proceeded alone to Meso- 
 potamia, it being undei-stood that he should 
 remain at or near Diarbekir until his associate 
 should join him. He reached Diarbekir May 
 30, and " found the public mind in a state of 
 suspense and expectation, like the calm which 
 precedes an overwhelming storm." The Turk- 
 ish army had been defeated by the Koords, 
 who were now in a state of commotion, and a 
 reign of violence and anarchy at once com- 
 menced. He was joined by Mr. Homes on the 
 3d of Jnly» and they proceeded together to 
 Mardin. Here they were in great danger, and 
 once very narrowly escaped with their lives, 
 during a popular tumult. Finding themselves 
 beset with dangers, and learning also that there 
 •were no Nestorians on the west side of the 
 mountains, as there seemed hardly any hope of 
 doing good in that vicinity, after remaining 
 
 two months, Mr. Homes escaped in disguise to 
 Diarbekir, and returned to Constantinople. 
 Dr. Grant resolved to spare no effort to obtain 
 access to the mountain tribes, and proceeded 
 to Mosul, 200 miles distant on the Tigris, where 
 he arrived Sept. 20. Here he found the coun- 
 try more quiet. On the 7th of October he left 
 the city, and in a few days was in the heart of 
 the mountain region of Central Koordistan. 
 Riding a hardy mule, and when even a mule 
 could not traverse the steep and broken moun- 
 tains, going on foot, he visited the Nestorians, 
 by whom he was cordially received ; spent a 
 month with the patriarch, and proceeded 
 through the country of the Ilakary Koords, by 
 way of Salraas, to Oroomiah, where he arrived 
 on the 7th of December. He was now pre- 
 pared to urge the immediate commencement 
 of missionary effort in the mountains, and re- 
 gretted exceedingly that he could not at once 
 enter upon labors there. In May, 1840, he 
 again crossed the mountains with his little son, 
 four years of age, accompanied by Mar Yohan- 
 nan and Mar Yoosuph, on his way to the 
 United States. He reached Boston Oct. 3. 
 
 January 18, 1841, Rev. Messrs. Hinsdale 
 and Mitchell, with their wives, sailed from 
 Boston for the field among the then indepen- 
 dent Ncstorians. Dr. Grant followed on the 
 1st of April, hoping to overtake them. Learn- 
 ing at Constantinople that they would proba- 
 bly be detained at Aleppo by the disturbed 
 state of the country on the route which they 
 had designed to take, he determined to go by 
 way of Trebizond and Erzrum. From Erz- 
 rum he went to Yan, and from there took the 
 shortest route to the country of the Nestori- 
 ans, and on the 8th of July he was at Jula- 
 merk, the residence of the patriarch, by whom 
 he was again cordially received. Messrs. 
 Hinsdale and Mitchell left Aleppo on the 28th 
 of May, to go by way of Diarbekir and Mar- 
 din to Mosul. On the journey, which was too 
 late in the season for traversing the hot plains 
 of Mesopotamia, Mr. Mitchell was attacked 
 with a fever and died on the 27th of June. 
 Mrs. Mitchell, overcome by fatigue and grief, 
 also died on the 12th of July, a few days after 
 reaching Mosul. Mr. and Mrs. Hinsdale both 
 suffered much from fatigue, watching, and ex- 
 posure, and greatly needed assistance. Dr. 
 Grant, hearing of these trying circumstances, 
 hastened to Mosul, where his arrival, on the 
 25th of August, was most seasonable, as Mr. 
 Hinsdale was then suffering from a dangerous 
 relapse of fever. 
 
 In the spring of 1842, hostilities having 
 arisen between the Turks and the Koords of 
 Amadieh, it was not safe to attempt going 
 into the mountains. Dr. Grant however passed 
 to Oroomiah by way of Ravendoose. Mr. 
 Stocking started to go with him from Oroo- 
 miah to the mountains, but was taken sick at 
 Salmas, on the way, and obliged to return. 
 Dr. Grant, however, having obtained assurance 
 
NESTORIANS. 
 
 663 
 
 of protection from the Hakary chiefs, the con 
 fidonce of one of whom, Nooroolah Bey, he had 
 gained three years before, for the fourth time 
 determined to traverse the wild fastnesses of 
 Koordistan, without a missionary associate, 
 but accompanied by Mar Yoosuph. Finding 
 the patriarch at an encampment of one of the 
 maleks of Tyary, where he had taken refuge, on 
 a mountain summit overlooking the Zab, they 
 descended together to Ashita, where arrange- 
 ments were made for a missionary station. 
 The war on the west side of the mountains 
 being ended, Mr. Hinsdale left Mosul the last 
 of September, and arrived at Ashita in ten 
 days, where he was welcomed by the people 
 with all cordialityi In November he returned 
 to Mosul, and was soon taken sick of typhus 
 fever. Dr. Grant came to his relief, but on 
 the 26th of December he rested from his labors. 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Laurie left the United States 
 for this mission July 29th, 1842, and reached 
 Mosul November 11th. Eemaining at Mosul 
 for the winter, in April, 1843, Messrs. Laurie 
 and Grant went to the new station at Ashita, 
 where it was hoped a mission-house would be 
 in readiness for the removal of the females in 
 June. A school was opened, with 20 pupils, 
 and the patriarch seemed as cordial as ever. 
 Mr. Laurie's impressions in regard to the field 
 as one for present cultivation, were not, how- 
 ever, altogether favorable. 
 
 About this time it became obvious that the 
 Turkish government was not willing that mea- 
 sures should just then be taken to elevate the 
 mountain Nestorians, as they wished to bring 
 them under subjection to the Sultan. At least 
 they were not willing to grant firmans, en- 
 gaging the protection of the government, to 
 other laborers who were on their way to the 
 field, if they were going as missionaries to this 
 people. A storm was gathering which soon 
 burst upon the poor Nestorians with terrible 
 efiect. The Koords commenced hostilities in 
 June. Dr. Grant fearlessly visited the hostile 
 chiefs, Bader Khan Bey of the Buhtan Koords, 
 and Nooroolah Bey, or Noor Ali Bey, of the 
 Hakary Koords, who made no secret of their 
 designs, but promised protection to the mission 
 property at Ashita. The scenes which now 
 commenced, and continued with intervals of 
 comparative quiet for several months, were 
 fearful in the extreme. Thousands of the Nes- 
 torians, men, women and children, were mas- 
 ,sacred, often with horrible tortures; others 
 were taken to a terrible captivity, and others 
 fled. Their villages were utterly destroyed, 
 and what remained of the people in central 
 Koordistan were entirely subdued, and reduced 
 to a state of yet deeper poverty and wretched- 
 ness than they had known before. 
 
 The devoted Dr. Grant, who had so often 
 gone, as few men could have done with impu- 
 nity, and gaining favor, among wild mountain- 
 eers and savage Koords, was now about to rest 
 from his labors. He died at Mosul, on the 
 
 24th of April, 1844. Mrs. Laurie had pre- 
 ceded him to the grave, in Dec. 1843. Doctor 
 Azariah Smith joined the company at Mosul, 
 in March, 1844, and the following summer 
 Messrs. Laurie and Smith once more explored 
 the mountain district of Tyary, looking upon 
 a scene of painful desolation. The Prudential 
 Committee, in view of all the discouraging 
 circumstances of the case, now forwarded defi- 
 nite instructions to discontinue this branch of 
 the Nestorian mission, and in October the 
 three who remained of the missionary company 
 left Mosul ; Dr. Smith and Mrs. Hinsdale to 
 join the mission to the Armenians, and Mr. 
 Laurie, the Syrian mission. Good had been 
 done at Mosul, and in 1849 missionary opera- 
 tions were resumed there, under favorable cir- 
 cumstances, but not with special reference to 
 the Nestorians. That city is now the centre 
 of what is called the Assyrian mission. (See 
 Mosul) 
 
 In May, 1846, Dr. Wright, from Oroomiah, 
 visited Bader Khan Bey, at the request of the 
 emir himself, who wished the benefit of his 
 professional services. He was accompanied by 
 Mr. Breath and the Nestorian deacon Tamu. 
 They found the Nestorians in the districts 
 which had been ravaged, again slowly collect- 
 ing flocks and herds and resuming the cultiva- 
 tion of the soil ; but another scene of slaughter 
 and rapine from the Koords soon followed, re- 
 ducing them again to deep destitution. At 
 length, in 1847, the Turks conquered the 
 Koords and garrisoned the mountains, subject- 
 ing both Koords and Nestorians to taxation. 
 
 Repeated excursions have been made during 
 the past few years, to some of the mountain 
 districts, by the missionaries at Oroomiah, and 
 more frequently and more extensively by some 
 of the devoted Nestorian helpers of the mis- 
 sion, some of whom are natives of these dis- 
 tricts. In 1851, a station was taken by 
 Messrs. Coan and Rhea, with three native help- 
 ers, in the district of Gawar, among the moun- 
 tains, about 70 miles N. W. from Oroomiah. 
 Much opposition has been experienced, and 
 unwearied eSbrts have been made to drive 
 them away, instigated, doubtless, by those 
 high in office in the Nestorian church, with 
 the patriarch at their head, and too willingly 
 joined in by the local Turkish authorities. 
 Deacon Tamu, one of the native helpers, upon 
 an utterly groundless charge of murder, was 
 seized in July, 1852, and kept a prisoner at 
 Van, until Septemljer, 1853. His Christian 
 deportment during all his trials, is worthy of 
 great praise. The station has been maintain- 
 ed with increasing promise of usefulness ; and 
 in the autumn of 1853, Messrs. Coan and 
 Rhea made a preaching tour among the Nes- 
 torians of Koordistan, going to Mosul, and 
 visiting Ashita, the place where a station was 
 commenced in 1843. They urge that effort 
 should now be again commenced, without de- 
 lay, on the west side of the mountains, by at 
 
564 
 
 >Jb;6TUKlANS. 
 
 least two missionnrios, hcl loving tliat the field 
 is now o|>en. and tliat if it be not occupied, 
 the enemy, from Home, will sow tares. — See 
 Pkrkixs' " liesidaice in Persia;" Grant's 
 « Noftoriatis, or the Lest Dibcsf Laurie's " Dr. 
 Grar.t and the Mountain Nestorians /" The 
 Reports of the A. B. C. F. M., and the Mis- 
 nonary Herald.— Bey. I. R. Worcester. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS 
 AND OCT-STATIONS. 
 
 Oroomiah.. 
 
 Gawar 
 
 GeogTapa. 
 Ardishai... 
 
 Totals 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ji 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 i 
 
 e 
 
 !"> 
 
 
 ®. 
 
 * 
 
 § 
 
 ^ 
 
 .)i 
 
 i 
 
 S 
 
 
 |1 
 
 >5 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 10 
 
 2 
 
 80 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 2 
 76 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 80 
 
 78 
 
 PRESENT STATE AND FUTURE PROSPECTS OP THE 
 MISSION. LETTER FROM REV. DR. PERKINS. 
 
 Oroomiah, May 16, 1854. 
 
 My dear Sir : — Xour favor of January 1 
 was received a few days ago. I had before 
 seen notices of your contemplated enterprise, 
 and rejoiced in view of it. The work you 
 propose is exceedingly desirable and import- 
 ant, and judging from the fruits of your pen, 
 which I have from time to time been so much 
 favored as to receive, through our common 
 
 friends, Mr. and Mrs. , I am happy in 
 
 the belief that this great undertaking is fortu- 
 nate in having fallen into your hands. With 
 all my heart, I wish you the fullest success. 
 
 You request me to give you a sketch of the 
 
 f resent aspect of our field and mission. This 
 will now briefly do with pleasure ; but owing 
 to the pressure of missionary duties, it must be 
 very brief ; which, however, is the less to be 
 regretted, as our Reports to the Prudential 
 Committee of our Board, to which you doubt- 
 less have access, Lave at all times been ample. 
 ^ Our mission Press has given to the Nesto- 
 rians the entire Bible, in both the ancient and 
 modem Syriac ; and an edition of the New 
 Testament, in the modern language only, is 
 just completed. Into this language, which, as 
 Tou will recollect, was first reduced to writing 
 by oar mi.ssion, we have also introduced many 
 valuable books besides the Holy Scriptures, 
 as Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress, Baxter's 
 Saint's Rest, the Dairyman's Daughter, the 
 Young Cottager, the Shepherd of Salisbury 
 Plain, and other tracts, and many school 
 books ; and we are now printing a third edi- 
 tion of our hymn book, the first edition of 
 which consisted of only four hymns, attached 
 to a small spelling book, while the present edi- 
 tion contains about two hundred hymns. Our 
 monthly periodical, entitled " The Rays of 
 Lighl," holds steadily on its way, having en- 
 
 tered on its fifth year. It is an exceedingly 
 interesting auxiliary in our schools and among 
 the people, each monthly number embracing a 
 spice of matter in the various departments of 
 religion, education, science, missionary intelli- 
 gence, juvenile instruction, miscellanies, and 
 poetrif. 
 
 It IS impossible for any statement or descrip- 
 tion to convey an adequate impression of the 
 blessed influence of the press among this peo- 
 ple, in whose vernacular tongue, twenty-one 
 years ago, not a syllable of printed or written 
 matter existed. 
 
 Passing frwn the press to our scliools, we 
 meet with correspondnig phenomena. Where 
 but a single small school existed, and that not 
 worthy of the name, when our mission was 
 commenced, we have had more than seventy 
 village schools in operation, during the past 
 winter ; differing, of course, in the compara- 
 tive competency and fidelity of their teachers, 
 and corresponding progress of the pupils, but 
 all contributing to multiply readers of the 
 Holy Scriptures and other good books, and 
 operating as important centres of evangelical 
 light and influence. 
 
 Among our most interesting and promising 
 labors are those of oiu" male and female semi- 
 naries — the former under the care of Messrs. 
 Stoddard and Cochran, and the latter under 
 the care of Misses Fisk and Rice. I do not 
 believe these two institutions of learning are 
 surpassed, in the order, industry, and improve- 
 ment of the pupils, and especially in their re- 
 ligious training, by any seminaries on the face 
 of the globe. They each contain about forty- 
 five pupils, the present year, the most of whom 
 are hopefully pious. The male seminary is 
 soon to graduate a class of twenty, the largest 
 class that has ever left it at one time. The in- 
 fluence of the pious pupils and graduates of 
 both these seminaries, on their people, is alike 
 blessed and incalculable. 
 
 During the few past years, Sabbath-schools 
 have been multipled among the Nestorians, 
 and with very happy effect. In these schools 
 many adults have learned to read, and thus 
 been qualified to go right to the fountain of 
 God's word, for themselves, and draw from 
 thence the waters of salvation. Here, as else- 
 where, the Sabbath-school is found to be. a 
 very efficient and precious instrumentality in 
 the diffusion of Scripture knowledge, and in 
 preparing the minds and hearts of men for the 
 saving work of the Holy Spirit. 
 
 Last in order of means employed, but first 
 in importance, I may mention the preaching 
 of the Gospel. Under all the pressure of our 
 other arduous labors, we endeavor to keep 
 fresh in mind the cardinal truth in the work of 
 missions, that it hath pleased God, by the fool- 
 ishness of preaching, to save them that be- 
 lieve. The clerical members of our mission, 
 unless sick, or otherwise providentially pre- 
 vented, preach at least twice on the Sabbath, 
 
NESTORIANS. 
 
 665 
 
 or conduct religious services, tantamount to 
 preaching, either at the stations or abroad 
 among the villages, and more or less during 
 the week. And we have now many able and 
 faithful Nestorian fellow-laborers, from Mar 
 Yohannan and Mar Ellas, down to graduates 
 of our seminary, engaged in the same way, 
 some of them itinerating, and others at out- 
 stations. And few are the Nestorians in Per- 
 sia who do not thus have the Gospel brought 
 to their villages, if not to their doors, at fre- 
 quent intervals, a great many of them every 
 Sabbath, and hundreds every day. 
 
 The pious Nestorians are also doing some- 
 thing in the line of missionary effort. For 
 several successive years they have united with 
 us in sending Nestorian missionaries to the 
 district of Bootan, on the river Tigris, about 
 300 miles westward from Oroomiah. To give 
 a missionary character to this ancient church, 
 once so celebrated for its missionary efforts 
 has ever been the strong desire of our hearts : 
 and it possesses good materials for that pur- 
 pose. 
 
 But while Paul may plant and Apollos 
 water, it is God who giveth the increase. You 
 have doubtless been made familiar with the 
 unspeakably precious revivals with which our 
 tield has been graciously visited in former 
 years. The present year, the Lord has again 
 mercifully visited this missionary vine. The 
 recent work of grace here has been more quiet 
 in its progress than some previous revivals ; 
 but I believe not less pure and pervading in 
 its influence, nor less hopeful in its results. A 
 precious harvest has thus been gathered, the 
 present year, in our two seminaries, in the 
 large village of Geog Tapa, and to some ex- 
 tent in smaller villages. 
 
 This refreshing from the presence of the 
 Lord is the more interesting at this time, from 
 the ominous political aspects that lower in 
 these Eastern lands. We have in this visita- 
 tion a most comforting pledge that God has 
 not forgotten to be gracious to our Zion, and 
 that he will not forsake his missionary ser- 
 vants and the holy cause in which they are 
 engaged, " though the earth be removed, and 
 the mountains be carried into the midst of the 
 
 Under the operation of these various mis- 
 sionary means, and especially under the re- 
 peated showers of heavenly grace with which 
 our field has been visited, it would be strange 
 if evangelical light and truth were not making 
 rapid progress among the Nestorians. Such 
 is the fact ; and the result is that the pious, 
 and many of the enlightened who are not 
 pions, are casting off the senseless and unscrip- 
 tural doctrines and practices with which their 
 worship had been more or less encumbered, 
 and rapidly verging toward the Gospel stand- 
 ard. Hitherto we have, as you are aware, la- 
 bored in the Nestorian church without " let or 
 hindrance." How Ions- we shall continue thus 
 
 to labor in the church, we still leave for the 
 Lord to decide, ever endeavoring carefully to 
 watch and implicitly to follow the guidance of 
 his hand. 
 
 The members of our mission are all severely 
 worked. It cannot be otherwise ; but eight 
 in number, as we are, with the great amount 
 of labor we have constantly on our hands, in 
 the departments of preparing matter for the 
 press, printing, education, and preaching the 
 Gospel. We need more reapers, and the har- 
 vest must suffer for the want of them, especial- 
 ly as the vigor of youth and manhood is 
 departing from some of us. 
 
 Among the obstacles to the progress of the 
 Gospel here, the efforts of the wily French 
 Papists to lead astray the Nestorians should be 
 mentioned as the most serious. No means are 
 too low or too iniquitous for them to adopt ; 
 and among an ignorant and corrupt people, it 
 would be strange if such means and motives, 
 constantly pursued, and shamelessly and dog- 
 gedly urged on their mercenary feelings, in 
 their low state of morals, did not meet with a 
 measure of success. In view of the corrupt- 
 ing and destructive efforts of these unprinci- 
 pled emissaries of Rome, we often feel like 
 uniting our cry with that of the witnesses 
 under the altar, " Lord, how long ?" 
 
 Our mission station in the wild Koordish 
 mountains is manfully occupied by Messrs. 
 Rhea and Crane. They greatly need the ser- 
 vices and the influence of a physician in that 
 self-denying field. Their labors are gradually 
 becoming more and more extended in those 
 dark regions, and we have every reason to 
 hope that the day is not distant when the 
 handful of corn thus lodged in the top of the 
 mountains shall shake like Lebanon ; the light 
 there kindled, mingling with that rising from 
 the plain, and both unitedly blazing upward 
 and onward to aid in the illumination of be- 
 nighted Central Asia. 
 
 I have alluded to the warlike aspects in 
 eastern lands. As yet, Persia perseveres in 
 refusing to declare war against Turkey, 
 though long and strongly urged to do so ; and 
 we hope that, in the good providence of God, 
 the Shah will continue to maintain this neu- 
 tral ground. Should there be a rupture be- 
 tween Turkey and Persia, our position would 
 of course be disturbed, and more or less un- 
 safe, near as we are situated to the boundary 
 of these two empires, and that boundary in- 
 fested with hordes of bloody Koords. But it 
 is always safe to trust in the Lord. We know 
 that the cause of missions is infinitely dearer 
 to him than it can be to us, and we will trust 
 that He who rides on the whirlwind will direct 
 the storm. I am, dear sir, with much respect, 
 very truly yours, J. Perkins. 
 
 NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SO- 
 CIETY : The Netherlands Missionary Society 
 was established in December, 1797, at Rotter- 
 dam, through the instrumentality of Dr. Van- 
 
566 
 
 NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 dor Kemp. Tliis remarkable man, after his 
 appointment by the Ix)nclon Missionary Society 
 to South Africa, visited his native country to 
 aottle ins affairs. There he translated into 
 Dutch and published an address of the direc- 
 tors of the London Missionary Society to the 
 relijriiujs j)Oople of Holland, which led eventu- 
 ally to the establishment of the " Netherlands 
 M iWionary Society." The founders of the soci- 
 ety having been principally ministers and 
 inhabitants of Rotterdam, the chief seat of 
 the Netherlands Missionary Society has re- 
 mained at that place. The members of the 
 society belong principally to the established 
 church, which is Presbyterian in its form of 
 government, and Calvinistic in its doctrine. 
 Thope ministers who have imbibed Neologian 
 sentiments, take scarcely any interest in it, 
 nor in anything connected with missionary 
 work, thereby confirming the often-made ob- 
 servation, that the orthodox, evangelical faith 
 is that which alone produces true and disinter- 
 ested love to God and zeal for his glory, and 
 prompts men to exert themselves actively and 
 perseveringly in promoting the spiritual and 
 eternal welfare of their fellow-creatures. The 
 General Synod, however, of the Dutch Church 
 has no control over the missionaries nor over 
 the funds collected for missionary undertak- 
 ings. But all the missionaries sent out by the 
 society are examined and ordained at the 
 Hague by a committee of ministers appointed 
 for that purpose by the General Synod from 
 among its members. The parish churches are 
 everywhere freely granted for missionary meet- 
 ings and other missionary purposes. The so- 
 ciety is supported by regular monthly and 
 annual subscriptions, and by donations and 
 legacies ; but no list of subscribers is ever 
 published. The principal supporters of the 
 society belong to the poorer and middle class- 
 es ; few of the great and wealthy being found 
 willing to assist the good cause. A body of 
 directore, both lay and clerical, is annually 
 chosen from among the subscribers, who man- 
 age the affairs of the society. 
 ^ Wherever there are clergymen members of 
 tne society, the monthly prayer-meeting on the 
 first Monday of the month is publicly and 
 regularly held in the parish churches. In 
 some places it is very well attended, 1,000 and 
 even 2,000 sometimes being present in the 
 large towns. The directors publish monthly a 
 report of the most interesting missionary 
 events which have come to their knowledoe 
 during the mouth, which is always read at the 
 meeting, the officiating minister interspersing 
 it with suitable remarks. 
 
 Tlu; annual general meeting takes place in 
 July, and is held in the Cathedral Church of 
 Rollmlam, which can accommodate between 
 three and four thousand people, and is gener- 
 ally fiikd on the occasion. Pious laymen and 
 clergymen from almost every part of Holland 
 attend. A report of the proceedings of the 
 
 year is read and a missionary sermon preached ; 
 but speeches are never made. 
 
 The society has its foreign secretary, who 
 corresponds with the missionaries on official 
 topics. But, in addition to this, every one of 
 the leading directors chooses one of the mis- 
 sionaries he may like best, and becomes his 
 particular and regular correspondent, and also 
 his advocate and that of his station at the 
 Board. This arrangement has proved very 
 useful to the Netherlands Missionary Society, 
 and most advantageous both to the directors 
 and the missionaries. 7'he society has a col- 
 lege of its o\^h, at Rotterdam, for the instruc- 
 tion, theological and scientific, of the candidates 
 for the missionary work. Of these, the small- 
 est proportion generally are Dutch, whilst the 
 greater number are Germans and Swiss. 
 
 At first the funds of the society were too small 
 to admit of its sending missionaries to foreign 
 lands, and that it might not be idle, various 
 plans were formed and carried into execution 
 for doing good at home, especially by the pub- 
 lication and distribution of religious books, the 
 establishment of Sunday-schools, visiting pri- 
 sons and hospitals, and assisting some congre- 
 gations to sustain ministers. In such courses 
 of labor the society M^ent on till the year 1800, 
 when they began to hope they might enter on 
 the field toward which their eye was originally 
 turned. 
 
 In a short time their funds increased rapidly. 
 Numbers of young men also offered their ser- 
 vices as missionaries, several of whom after 
 having gone through a proper course of instruc- 
 tion, were ready to occupy any field that might 
 be pointed out to them in the heathen world. 
 The political circumstances of the country, the 
 subjugation of Holland by France with the con- 
 sequent loss of its colonies, rendered it imprac- 
 ticable for the directors to send these young 
 men abroad themselves ; they therefore entered 
 into a friendly agreement with the London 
 Missionary Society, which engaged to send 
 them forth under its auspices, and selected first 
 South Africa as the most suitable sphere for 
 them, owing chiefly to their being acquainted 
 with the Dutch, which language is generally 
 understood and spoken by the Hottentots and 
 other tribes. For many years afterwards, 
 nearly all the missionaries whom the London 
 Missionary Society sent to that part of the 
 world, were young men they had obtained from 
 Holland. 
 
 In 1804 the London Missionary Society sent 
 Messrs. Vos, Erhardt, and Palm, three mission- 
 aries transferred to them by the Netherlands 
 Missionary Society, to the island of Ceylon, 
 encouraged by the accounts they had received 
 of the vast numbers of natives who professed 
 themselves Christians, but who were now -in a 
 great measure destitute of religious instruction. 
 The first-named of these missionaries was greatly 
 thwarted in his efforts among the natives by the 
 English government, instigated it is said by the 
 
NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 567 
 
 Dutch consistory of tne island wliom he had 
 oifended by his faithfulness and zeal. In 
 consequence, he was soon compelled to leave 
 the country. Messrs. Palm and Erhardt con- 
 tinued at Ceylon until their death, which hap- 
 pened several years ago, and were successfully 
 employed in the superintendence of schools and 
 the pastoral care of two churches to which they 
 had been appointed by government. It does 
 not seem that they were able to accomplish 
 much among the heathen. 
 
 About the year 1812, the directors of the 
 Netherlands Missionary Society, anxious to 
 exert themselves for the benefit of the former 
 Dutch settlements in the East, transferred again 
 for that purpose three missionaries to the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society ; for Holland being as 
 yet under French rule, and Java and the East- 
 • ern Islands being occupied by the British, it 
 was not practicable for the Netherlands Soci- 
 ety then to undertake that mission directly. 
 These three missionaries were superior men 
 and thoroughly qualified for their work. They 
 were the Rev. Messrs. Kam, Supper, and Bruck- 
 ner. These brethren were at the outset of 
 their career exposed to considerable difficulties 
 and dangers ; for the French government hav- 
 ing strictly prohibited their leaving the country 
 for England, they were compelled to assume 
 the attire of traveling mechanics, and in this 
 disguise, succeeded, after having had many 
 narrow escapes from the French gendarmes, 
 to reach Christiana in Norway, from whence 
 they embarked for London. This place they 
 left for Java in the commencement of 1813. 
 On their arrival at Batavia they separated, 
 Mr. Supper having been appointed to that 
 capital, Mr. Bruckner to Samarang, and Mr. 
 Kam to the Molucca islands. Mr. Supper died 
 not long after his arrival, and Mr. Bruckner, 
 (who is still living and actively employed in 
 the translation of the Scriptures and other 
 missionary duties,) joined the Baptist Mission- 
 ary Society. 
 
 Mr. Kam fixed his residence at Amboyna. 
 and met there what his heart so greatly longed 
 for — a naost extensive field of labor. There 
 are in the Eastern Archipelago thousands of 
 Malay native converts who embraced Chris- 
 tianity during the dominion and by the exer- 
 tions of the old Dutch East India Company. 
 In propagating Christianity in those parts, 
 there is nothing which the Dutch aimed more 
 at than to furnish the inhabitants with the 
 Holy Scriptures. As early as 1733, the whole 
 Bible in Malay and several parts of the sacred 
 writings in other dialects of the East, were 
 translated and published by order, and at the 
 expense of the Dutch government, and widely 
 disseminated throughout the islands. It is 
 true, however, that the best means to promote 
 the conversion of the natives, were not always 
 used, nor the best motives always held out, 
 neither was sufficient caution always exercised 
 in receiviua* candidates into the church. 
 
 In 1814, Holland having resumed its inde- 
 pendence, and received back its colonies, the 
 directors of the Netherlands Missionary Soci- 
 ety deemed it time to pursue operations for 
 the future, directly, and without the interven- 
 tion of other societies. They placed their 
 Missionary Seminary upon a more regular foot- 
 ing, and in 1819 sent out five young men 
 trained in it to join Mr. Kam, who meanwhile 
 had been appointed by the Netherlands Mis- 
 sionary Society one of its foreign directors. 
 
 These young men, after having obtained 
 some knowledge of the native language at 
 Amboyna, were placed in various islands, as 
 Celebes, Ceram, Ternate, Banda and Timor, and 
 have been since from time to time reinforced by 
 fresh arrivals of laborers from Holland, the 
 ^Netherlands Society viewing at present that 
 part ofthe world as its principal sphere of action. 
 In July, 1833, the zealous missionary Kam 
 died, at the age of sixty-three years, from over 
 exertion, occasioned by an extensive mission- 
 ary tour he had made. He was a most active 
 and devoted servant of the Lord. Until his 
 death, he continued twice or thrice in the 
 year, in a small brig of his own, which he 
 managed himself with the assistance of a few 
 native lascars, to travel in that burning clime 
 for several months together, from island to 
 island, exposed to storms and dangers of vari- 
 ous kinds. On such occasions, he often added 
 to his duties of a preacher of the Gospel those 
 of a peace-maker among the native tribes, and 
 was the means of preventing much bloodshed. 
 As Schwartz had been on the continent of In- 
 dia by the British government, so was he fre- 
 quently employed by the Netherlands govern- 
 ment in allaying disturbances and quelling 
 rising rebellions among their Malay subjects, 
 in which endeavors he seldom failed. His 
 judicious views of things, good temper, perfect 
 integrity, and the holiness of his life, rendered 
 him greatly respected by the chiefs of the East- 
 ern Islands, and made the humble missionary 
 a far more successful instrument in maintain- 
 ing peace among them, than large bodies of 
 troops could ever have been. 
 
 The Netherlands Society twenty-five or thir- 
 ty years ago, made an attempt to contribute 
 to the evangelization of the Chinese, and sent 
 out the celebrated Mr. Gutzl.aff and some other 
 missionaries, for that express purpose. 
 
 In the year 1822, the Netherlands Society 
 sent a missionary (the Rev. Mr. Yix.) to the 
 Dutch colony of Surinam, in Guiana, who has 
 labored there ever since (not without fruit,) 
 among the negro slave population. His church: 
 amounts to about 700 members. The society 
 has another missionary in the West Indies,, 
 stationed at the island of Curaqao, who is era- 
 ployed much like Mr. Vix. 
 
 In 1820, the late Dr. Yos, being on a visit 
 to Holland, called the attention of the directoi-s 
 to the destitute state of the Hindoos in a spir-i- 
 itual point of view, upon which they resolvedL 
 
ff68 
 
 NEVIS— NEW BRUNSWICK. 
 
 OD OOHUDMoiiig two missions in these parts, one 
 tX OhioBorah in Bengal, and the other ut Pulicat 
 on the coast of Coronmndel, both of which 
 l^aoes belong then to the Dutch government. 
 ttev. A. F. Lacroix was anpoiuted to the for- 
 mer, and the Rev.Mr. Kindlingor, a most pious 
 •od dvvotod man, who, up to hia twenty-fourth 
 year had been a bigoted Roman Catholic, to 
 the hitter. Dr. Vos and G. Herklots, Esq., of 
 Chinsiirah, had, previous to their departure 
 from Holland, been elected foreign directors of 
 the society. 
 
 Mr. Kindlinger on his arrival at the station, 
 had great difficulties to contend with on ac- 
 count of the exceedingly degraded state of the 
 native Christians, great numbers of whom he 
 met at Pulicat and the vicinity. These had 
 cmbracetl Christianity through the instrumen- 
 tality of the old German missionaries who had 
 preceded Schwartz audjiad been more than a 
 quarter of a century without teachers and with- 
 out instruction. By patient endeavors, how- 
 ever, he succeeded in course of time in collect- 
 ing a numerous and regular congregation, es- 
 tablished several schools, and spent much of 
 his time in preaching to the heathen. In 1823, 
 he was joined by two other laborers from Hol- 
 land, the Kev. Messrs. Irion and Winckler, the 
 former of whom remained with him at Pulicat, 
 and the latter was stationed at Sadras, a small 
 Dutch settlement near the seven pagodas be- 
 tween Madras and Pondicherry. 
 
 In 1825, the Dutch settlements on the conti- 
 nent of India having been ceded to the British 
 government in exchange for its possessions on 
 the island of Sumatra, the directors of the 
 Netherlands Society informed their mission- 
 aries that circumstances would not permit 
 them to continue their missions in those settle- 
 ments, and left them free either to proceed to 
 the Eastern Archipelago to join their brethren 
 there — or, if they preferred, to connect them- 
 selves with any one of the English societies 
 laboring in India. All four, having already 
 at the expense of much time and labor, attain- 
 ed a knowledge of the native languages and 
 the native customs and habits, felt unwilling 
 to relinquish so great an advantage, and there- 
 fore deemed it their duty to accept of the lat- 
 ter proposal ; in consequence of which Messrs. 
 Kindlinger and Winckler joined the Church 
 Missionary Society. Mr. Irion joined the 
 Society for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign 
 Paris; and Mr. Lacroix connected himself 
 with the London Missionary Society, which 
 made an end to the Dutch mission in these 
 parts. 
 
 The receipts of the Society for 1850 were 
 about 837,000. The iastitution for training 
 missionaries at Rotterdam is continued. At 
 that time, the Society had 17 stations in the 
 Indian Archipelago, manned by 19 missionaries, 
 besides having furnished a large number of 
 missionaries for other societies. 
 
 NEVIS : A small, but beautiful and fer- 
 
 tile island in the "West Indies. A station of 
 the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 NEW-BARMEN : A station of the Rhen- 
 ish Missionary Society in South Africa, 200 
 miles north-east of Schepnmansdorf. 
 
 NEWASSE : A station of the American 
 Board in Hindostan, connected with the Ah- 
 mednuggur mission. 
 
 NEW-HEBRIDES : A group of islands 
 in Western Polynesia, or Australasia, where 
 the London Missionary Society have eight sta- 
 tions. Erromanga, one of this group, is the 
 place of the tragical death of the martyr mis- 
 sionary, Williams. Population, 150,000. 
 
 NEWERA ELLA: A station of the 
 Gospel Propagation Society in Ceylon. 
 
 NEWVILLE : A Karen village, in the 
 northern part of Maulmain province, in Bur- 
 mah, and an out-station of the Alaulmain 
 Karen Mission of the American Baptist 
 Union. 
 
 NEW-RABBAY : Station of the Church 
 Missionary Society among the Wonicas, in 
 East Africa, situated on the coast, a short dis- 
 tance W.N.W. of Mombas. 
 
 NEW-AMSTERDAM: The capital of 
 Berbice, situated 50 miles up the Berbice 
 river. It is a pleasant town, intersected with 
 canals, and a considerable portion of ground 
 attached to each house. It is occupied by the 
 Society for Propagating the Gospel. 
 
 NEW-HERRNHUT : The first station 
 occupied by the Moravians in Greenland. 
 Also, a station of the same on the island of 
 St. Thomas, W. I. 
 
 NEW-HOLLAND: See Australia. 
 
 NEW-PROVIDENCE : One of the Bar 
 hama Islands, about 25 miles long and nine 
 broad, and considerably in advance of the 
 other islands in cultivation. Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 NEW-BRUNSWICK : One of the pro- 
 vinces of British America. The latest census 
 was taken in 1851. The population was at 
 that time 193,800 ; but no religious statistics 
 are given in this important public document, 
 and there are no denominational records, from 
 which the numbers, character, and condition 
 of the Christian community can be accurately 
 ascertained. The following items have been 
 collected from documents under date of 1854. 
 The number of Catholic clergy is almost the 
 same as in Nova Scotia, and the circumstances 
 would appear to indicate that the proportion 
 of Catholics to Protestants in New Brunswick 
 must be greater than in Nova Scotia. 
 
 Cliurch of England. — 1 bishop, 1 archdea- 
 con, and 5 clergymen. 
 
 Church of Scotland. — 1 synod, 2 presbyteries, 
 8 ministers, 11 congregations, and several mis- 
 sionary stations. 
 
 Reformed Presbyterian Church of Ireland. — 
 2 ministers and 1 missionary. 
 
 Wesleyan Methodists. — 30 ministers, 22 con- 
 gregations, and 2 supernumeraries, besides 3 
 
r^HIVBRSITr] 
 
NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 569 
 
 ministers employed as principal and teachers 
 of Sackville Academy. 
 
 Baptists. — 2 associations, 52 ministers, and 
 7 licentiates. 
 
 Free Christian Baptists. — 16 ministers and 2 
 missionaries. 
 
 Congregationalists. — 3 ministers. 
 
 Rev. J. Bayne. 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND : Two extensive and 
 beautiful islands in the Southern Pacific, 
 stretching from latitude 34° 30' to 47° 20' 
 south, and from 167° to 178° east longitude, 
 being nearly 900 miles long and over 700 broad ; 
 together with a small one to the south, called 
 Stewart's Island. New-Zealand is distinguished 
 for its rich and varied scenery, and for every 
 thing which naturally strikes the eye as beau- 
 tiful or sublime. Some of the mountains in 
 the northern island rise more than 14,000 feet 
 above the level of the sea ; their sides covered 
 with forest timber ; their summits girt with 
 clouds or capped with snow ; and their whole 
 appearance strikingly rich and grand. The 
 country is remarkably hilly and broken, the 
 hills being studded with caves, deep, dark, and 
 frightful. New-Zealand has several large and 
 noble lakes. The Thames is the principal 
 river ; the others being mostly insignificant 
 streams. The forests are so extensive and so 
 dense, that no sound from without disturbs the 
 traveler ; and yet no beasts of prey infest these 
 retreats to put him in fear. New-Zealand has 
 a number of harbors, which are visited for 
 supplies by a vast number of whaling vessels. 
 
 The northern island is divided into fourteen 
 districts, viz. : Kaitaia, Bay of Islands, Thames, 
 Tauranga, Rotorua, Bay of Plenty, East Cape, 
 Poverty Bay, Wairoa, Entry Island, Taranake, 
 Waikato, Kaipara, and Hokianga. 
 
 Climate. — The climate of NeW-Zealand is 
 temperate, salubrious, and congenial to Euro- 
 pean constitutions. North of the Thames 
 snows are unknown, and frosts are off the 
 ground by nine o'clock in the morning. Dur- 
 ing six months of the year, the country is ex- 
 posed to heavy gales of wind and tremendous 
 falls of rain. The spring and autumn are de- 
 lightfully temperate. Spring commences the 
 middle of August, summer in December, au- 
 tumn in March, and winter in July. 
 
 Soil and Productions. — These islands afford 
 almost every variety of soil, which produces 
 wheat, barley, maize, beans, peas, and various 
 grasses in abundance. Most of the trees are 
 evergreens, and vegetation is scarcely ever sus- 
 pended. 
 
 Inhabitants. — When first discovered, the 
 New-Zealanders were a savage and barbarous 
 people. When a child was born, it was wrap- 
 ped in a coarse cloth, and laid in a verandah 
 to sleep ; and in a few hours, the mother pur- 
 sued her ordinary work in the field. The child 
 suffered much ; and if its mother did not fur- 
 nish it nourishment enough, it must perish. 
 Large holes were slit in the ear, and a stick. 
 
 half an inch in diameter, thrust through. 
 When five days old, the child was carried to a 
 stream of water, and either dipped or sprinkled, 
 and a name given to it ; and a priest mum- 
 bled a prayer, the purport of which was said 
 to be, an address to some unknown spirit, pray- 
 ing that he may so influence the child that he 
 may become cruel, brave, warlike, troublesome, 
 adulterous, murderous, a liar, a thief, disobe- 
 dient, in a word, guilty of every crime. After 
 this, small pebbles, about the size of a pin's 
 head, were thrust down its throat, to make its 
 heart callous, hard, and incapable of pity. 
 The ceremony w(is concluded with a feast. 
 
 The system of tahu, or consecration, com- 
 mon to the Pacific isles, nowhere prevailed to 
 a greater extent than at New-Zealand. (See 
 Tabu.) 
 
 With the New-Zealander, superstition took 
 the place of medical skill. When a person 
 had a pain in the back, he would lie down and 
 get another to jump over him and tread on him 
 to remove the pain. A wound was bruised 
 with a stone, and afterwards held over the 
 smoke. In internal acute diseases the patient 
 sent for a priest, lay down, and died. 
 
 Dreams and omens were much regarded, and 
 had great influence over their conduct. On 
 important occasions, when several tribes were 
 going to war, an oracle was consulted, by set- 
 ting up sticks to represent the different tribes, 
 and watching the wind to see which way the 
 sticks would fall, in order to determine which 
 party would be victorious. But the person 
 performing the ceremony, by a little juggling, 
 could determine the question as he pleased. 
 The belief in witchcraft, also, almost univer- 
 sally prevailed, and was productive of all the 
 suspicion, cruelty, and injustice which generally 
 accompany it among a barbarous and super- 
 stitious people. Polygamy was allowed to 
 any extent ; being the fruitful source of jeal- 
 ousy, strife, and murder. Marriages were 
 generally confined within the tribe. The peo- 
 ple were affectionate, but desperate and re- 
 vengeful when roused to anger. For an un- 
 civilized people, they were industrious. Their 
 food consisted of a variety of vegetables, and 
 some kinds of animal food. They were war- 
 like, and ate their enemies killed in war ; and 
 prisoners who were not killed and eaten were 
 reduced to slavery. The heads of their ene- 
 mies were preserved as trophies of victory. 
 They formerly preserved the heads of their 
 friends, and kept them with religious strictness. 
 
 Tattooing was practised, and was made a 
 much more painful operation than in the other 
 Pacific Isles. The operation was performed 
 with a small rough chisel, with which an in- 
 cision was made by a blow with a mallet, the 
 chisel being first dipped in coloring matter 
 made of the root of flax, burnt to charcoal, 
 and mixed with water, the stain of which is 
 indelible. The flax is cultivated extensively 
 in New Zealand, of which they make gar 
 
670 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 ments, nets, and lines. The houses of tlic bet- 
 ter class were snug and warm, ornamented 
 with carvctl work. They were built of bul- 
 rushes, lined with the leaves of the palm tree, 
 noatJj platted together. They were about IG 
 by 10 feet, and four or five feet high. The 
 entrance was by a low sliding door, and there 
 was one window 9 by 6 inches, with a sliding 
 sbuttor. Their houses were without furniture, 
 and their cooking utensils a feWStones. Their 
 villages were scattered over a large plot of 
 ground without any order or arrangement. 
 
 Religion, — The New-Zealandcrs, though re- 
 markably superstitious, had no gods that they 
 worshiped, nor anything to represent a being 
 whom they called god. They imagined that it 
 was a great spirit (Atua) who thundered ; but 
 all their thoughts of him were those of fear 
 and dread. Sickness, they supposed, was 
 brought on by him, coming in the form of a 
 lizard, entering the sido, and preying on the 
 vitals. Hence they used incantations over the 
 sick, threatening to kill and eat their deity, or 
 to burn him to a cinder, unless he should 
 come out. Their idea of iViro, the evil spirit, 
 was more in accordance with the Scriptural 
 idea of the Evil One. They believed in a fu- 
 ture state ; but their ideas of it were vague 
 and sensual ; and as they supposed all the 
 functions of life were there performed, slaves 
 were killed upon the death of a chief, that 
 they might follow and attend upon him ; and 
 widows often put themselves to death that 
 they might accompany their departed hus- 
 bands. 
 
 mSSION. 
 
 _ Church Missionary Society. — The atten- 
 tion of the Church Missionary Society was di- 
 rected to New-Zealand, by Rev. Saml.Marsden, 
 senior chaplain to the colony of New South 
 Wales, and they sent out three missionaries to 
 labor under the direction of Mr. Marsden, who 
 arrived at New-Zealand towards the close of 
 1814, and commenced a station at Rangihona, 
 on the N. W. side of the Bay of Islands. But 
 for a long time they were treated with taunts 
 and jeers and threatenings, while their message 
 was neither understood nor regarded, and they 
 were subjected to great privations, from want 
 of shelter, food and companions. But an influ- 
 ential chief named Hongi, visiting England and 
 returning loaded with presents, the mission- 
 aries rose in the estimation of the natives, and 
 ■ were beloved and protected by the chiefs. 
 The station was afterwards removed to Ta- 
 puna, on the other side of the hill ; and on the 
 arrival of a reinforcement, another station was 
 commenced at Kerikeri, near which was a 
 large native village, occupied by Hongi and 
 his people. But it was with great difficulty 
 that they could form a school, or secure at- 
 tendance on public worship. When the Sab- 
 bath bell caught their ears, they would run 
 away, and employ themselves in fishing, or 
 
 some of their native sports. Sometimes they 
 would come into the chapel dressed in the 
 most fantastic style, and at other times, na- 
 ked ; and in the middle of the service they 
 would start up with the cry, " That's a lie I 
 that's a lie ! Let us all go." 
 
 Another station was commenced at Paihia, 
 in 1823, on the south side of the Bay of 
 Islands, where the people were in an exceeding- 
 ly wild and uncontrollable state. 
 
 The mission was reinforced from to time, 
 and a schooner was built to ply between the 
 mission and Port Jackson, in order to furnish 
 supplies. She was lost in 1828, but another 
 was built, and launched in May, 1830, called 
 Tlie Messenger. 
 
 Schools were commenced at Paihia, in 1823, 
 and at the same time the missionaries began 
 to visit the natives in the neighborhood, for 
 religious instruction. In 1824, those instruc- 
 tions were blessed to the conversion of the 
 chief Waitangi, who was baptized under the 
 name of Christian Rangi ; and by June 1831, 
 20 adults were baptized at this station, with 
 10 children. 
 
 For 15 years the natives had steadily refused 
 to allow any one to reside near their villages, 
 in the interior. But having become convinc- 
 ed that the missionaries were their friends, in 
 1830 a station was commenced at Waimate, 
 the centre of a large district in the interior, 
 to which roads have been cut by the natives 
 to their residences, for thirty-five miles, and 
 chapels have been erected in most of the nu- 
 merous villages in this district, capable of 
 holding 150 to 200 persons, in which services 
 are regularly held on the Sabbath, by assistant 
 missionaries, and they are occasionally visited 
 by the resident clergyman ; schools have also 
 been established in these villages, with the 
 sanction of the chiefs. Four schools are in 
 operation at Waimate. 
 
 In January, 1834, a settlement was formed 
 at Kaitai, at the earnest solicitation of the 
 chiefs and people of the Rarawa tribes, in the 
 vicinity of the North Cape ; and another 
 subsequently at Puriri, south of the Bay of 
 Islands. 
 
 Although the missionaries labored at these 
 stations under great discouragements, for 
 many years, yet after mastering the language 
 and acquiring the confidence of 4^e natives, 
 the usual results of the introduction of the 
 Gospel into pagan lands began to be seen. 
 One of them, Rev. Mr. Yate, in speaking of 
 this change in 1835, says, « Instead of the 
 noisy merriment, the blustering excitement to 
 mischief, which used to prevail on the Sab- 
 bath, all is peace. Sabbath-schools in many 
 of the native villages are established, and 
 regularly carried on ; work of every descrip- 
 tion is laid aside ; Christian worship is punc- 
 tually attended ; and the day as strictly re- 
 garded as in any well-regulated village in 
 ' England. In this, I am speaking of the Chris- 
 
NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 671 
 
 tianized villages in the interior ; not of those 
 in connection with the shipping ; in which, as 
 the sailors on that day have frequently liberty 
 to go on shore, the holy day is made a season 
 of far greater iniquity than any other." 
 
 A report of the Waimate station for 1832, 
 stated that the chapel was every Sabbath 
 crowded to excess ; that the natives rejoiced at 
 the approach of every Sabbath ; and that the 
 preached word had its effect upon many of the 
 hearers. On the 4th of May, 1834, just before 
 embarking for Xew South Wales, to superin- 
 tend the printing of some translations, Mr. 
 Yate baptized four chiefs, and several other 
 persons ; and on the 8th of June, he baptized 
 38 adults, the greater portion of them chiefs. 
 They had been candidates for many months. 
 The next Sabbath they were admitted to the 
 communion. Mr. Yate gives an account of the 
 deaths of several heathens, who met death in 
 darkness and horror of mind, one of them, a 
 chief, declaring, with his last breath, that he was 
 " going to hell ;" and a number of native Chris- 
 tians, who had died in peace and comfort, in 
 the faith of the Gospel. He also publishes a 
 number of letters, which he received from the 
 converts, which were full of affection and pious 
 feeling, expressive of a deep insight into their 
 own hearts, and a simple faith in Christ. 
 
 At this stage in the progress of the mis- 
 sion, the natives manifested a strong desire for 
 knowledge ; and though their facilities for in- 
 struction were small, yet a great many of 
 them had learned to "read. And, captives 
 from distant tribes, having been sold into 
 slavery, had attended the mission-schools ; and 
 by some means gaining their liberty, they had 
 carried the knowledge thus acquired to their 
 distant homes, and taught it to their friends. 
 
 A great change had been effected by the 
 Gospel in the domestic character of those who 
 had embraced it. Polygamy was diminish- 
 ing, and husbands and Avives did not quarrel 
 as formerly. The inhuman practices of former 
 times were Jseing suppressed. It was once the 
 custom for the relations of a chief to kill one 
 or more slaves at his death, to wait upon him 
 in the world of spirits ; but, when the great 
 chief Hongi died, not one was slain. The tabus 
 and other superstitions, also, were falling into 
 disuse. And industry, regularity, and a desire 
 to make improvements in their land, their 
 habits and customs, were on the increase among 
 the great body of the people. Mr. Yate gives 
 the following speech of a chief to his people, 
 who seems to have caught a correct idea of 
 the power and influence of the Gospel : " What," 
 he inquired, " what are these missionaries come 
 to dwell with us for ? They are come to break 
 in two our clubs, to blunt the points of our 
 spears, to draw the bullets from our muskets, 
 and to mak^ this tribe and that tribe to love 
 one another, and sit as brothers and friends. 
 'J'hen let us give our hearts to listening, and 
 we shall dwell in peace." 
 
 The following incident shows how the leaven 
 works when it once finds its way to the heathen 
 mind : Two of the missionaries, as they were 
 traveling to a new and distant part of the 
 island, rested on the Sabbath, and collected an 
 assembly of natives to hear the Gospel. They 
 commenced by singing a hymn ; and, to their 
 astonishment, the whole congregation joined 
 with them. The responses also were correctly 
 given. They afterwards found three boys who 
 had lived for some time in the mission family, 
 who had acted as their teachers. 
 
 In December, 1837, a Koman Catholic 
 bishop and two priests landed in New-Zea- 
 land, and located themselves in the midst of 
 the Wesleyan mission. Thus it is that the 
 Church of Kome follows the track of Pro- 
 testant missionaries, like an evil spirit, to 
 counteract the good work. In 1839, they had 
 eight priests and two catechists ; but one 
 chief is represented as having become more 
 deeply attached to the missionaries, being dis- 
 gusted with what he had seen and heard of 
 the Papists. 
 
 In January, 1839, the Bishop of Australia 
 visited the mission ; and in ' a letter to the 
 committee, he bears the following testimony to 
 the character of the missionaries, and the re- 
 sults of their labors : " I must offer a very 
 sincere and willing testimony to their main- 
 taining a conversation such as becomes the 
 Gospel of Christ. Their habits of life are 
 devotional. They are not puffed up with self- 
 estimation, but appear willing to learn as well 
 as apt to teach. And among themselves they 
 appear to be drawn together by a spirit of 
 harmony, prompted by that Spirit of which 
 love, gentleness, and goodness are the most de- 
 lightful fruits. 
 
 " At every station which I personally visit- 
 ed, the converts were so numerous as to bear 
 a considerable proportion to the entire popula- 
 tion ; and I was informed that the same was 
 true at other places. In most of the native 
 villages in which the missionaries have a foot- 
 ing, there is a building set apart for religious 
 worship. In these buildings generally, but 
 sometimes in the open air, the Christian classes 
 were assembled before me. The gray-haired 
 man and aged woman took their places to read 
 and undergo examination among their descend- 
 ants of the second and third generations. The 
 chief and the slave stood side by side, with 
 the same holy volume in their hands, and ex- 
 erted their endeavors each to surpass the other 
 in returning proper answers." 
 
 The bishop states that the native population 
 is rapidly diminishing, even more so than dur- 
 ing their savage warfare — a fact for which he 
 is at a loss to account. 
 
 The activity of the natives in teaching their 
 countrymen, and in building places of worship, 
 forms an important feature of this mission. 
 Mr. Williams states, June 3, 1839, that on 
 his visit to the East Cape, he found three na- 
 
673 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 live teachers actively engaged, and that the 
 degree of attention paid to them by the na- 
 tives generally was astonishing. At one place 
 they found a chupol, CO by 28 feet, which had 
 been erectinl by the natives, and a congrega- 
 tion of fiOO assembled in it on the Lord's day. 
 At another place, where no missionary had 
 ever been, they foond the natives assembling 
 for Christian worship, in a regular and order- 
 ly manner. 
 
 The following account of a native prayer- 
 meeting, is related by Mr. Brown, in a letter 
 dated July 21, 1838 : " After evening service 
 I found that a few natives had met to hold a 
 prayer-meeting. They commenced by sing- 
 nig a hymn. A native then engaged in 
 prayer. That was followed by reading a chap- 
 ter.' Another hymn was sung; and after an 
 address by a native, the meeting was closed by 
 another extemporaneous prayer," 
 
 In relation to general improvement, it is 
 stated that at this time (1839) the missiona- 
 ries had introduced among these savages agri- 
 culture and gardening ; the use of the spade, 
 the plow, and the mill; cattle, sheep, and 
 horses ; built houses and chapels ; cut roads 
 through forests ; built bridges, &c., changing 
 a country from a wild and savage state to a 
 condition of incipient civilization. In all the 
 14 districts of the island, Christian congre- 
 gations had been gathered, with an aggre- 
 gate attendance on public worship of 8,760, 
 and 233 communicants ; and the entire Scrip- 
 tures had been translated and printed in the 
 native tongue. But so rapid was the in- 
 crease of interest, that in a letter dated May 5, 
 1840, Rev. W. Williams says that the popula- 
 tion as a body professed Christianity ; that the 
 number attending public worship had increased 
 to 27,000 ; that the baptisms could not be less 
 than 2,000 ; and the number of communicants 
 during this short period had more than dou- 
 bled. 
 
 In 1841, the British Government made New- 
 Zealand an independent colony, and appointed 
 Captain Hobson Governor. 
 
 In September, 1840, Mr. Williams gives a 
 most encouraging view of the state of things 
 in the Eastern District. He says his parish 
 extends two degrees and a half; that almost all 
 the people are inquiring after the truth ; and 
 that more than 8,000 assemble regularly for 
 worship. 
 
 Iq 1841, New-Zealand was erected into an 
 Episcopal see ; and Rev. G. A. Selwyn, D.D., 
 was consecrated bishop at Lambeth, England.* 
 In June of the same year, the first mission- 
 ary meeting in New-Zealand was held at Kai- 
 taia, attended by 500 natives and a number of 
 Europeans. The resolutions were each moved 
 by a European and seconded by a native. 
 Several of the native addresses were appropri- 
 ate and striking. The amount of the contri- 
 bution taken on the occasion was £46 5s. 
 
 The good work in the Eastern District pro- 
 
 so rapidly, that in July, 1841, the 
 communicants had increased in that district 
 alone to 878, among whom were included a 
 large proportion of the leading chiefs. The 
 whole fabric of the old superstitions was gone, 
 the idols cast away, weapons of war laid aside, 
 and petty quarrels settled by arbitration. 
 
 In the Western District, in September, 1839, 
 two young chiefs traveled 500 miles with a re- 
 quest for missionaries from their father, a noted 
 chief and warrior at Kapiti, an island in 
 Cook's Straits. To the astonishment of the 
 missionaries, it was found that they could read 
 well ; and from their statements it appeared 
 that, in many villages, the Lord's day was ob- 
 served, public worship regularly held, and 
 great numbers were anxious for instruction ; 
 and all this was the result of the labors of one 
 native, named Matahau, who had gone there 
 of his own accord, and was actively engaged 
 in diffusing a knowledge of the Gospel. 
 
 The zeal of the native converts for the con- 
 version of their countrymen has been remark- 
 able. In many parts of the country where the 
 missionaries have journeyed over ground never 
 before trodden by Europeans, they have been 
 astonished to find chapels built, some of the 
 natives able to read, and many in the habit of 
 assembling for worship. Mr. Ashwell says 
 that in a tour of 400 miles, in every village he 
 found some one who could read, and in all but 
 one of them he found the Testament. 
 
 In their report for 1843, the committee say, 
 " The blessing of God continues to be vouch- 
 safed in a marked degree to the labors of the 
 missionaries and native teachers, and the cir- 
 culation of the Scriptures. Within the last 
 four years, the number of natives who have 
 embraced Christianity has increased from 2,000 
 to 35,000." And although they do not speak 
 confidently of the saving conversion of the 
 great mass of them, yet they say there is every 
 reason to entertain the hope that not a few of 
 this multitude have truly embraced the Gos- 
 pel. War and cannibalism had almost, if not 
 entirely, ceased ; ancient superstitions had 
 been forsaken ; and many were making rapid 
 progress in spiritual knowledge. Dr. Sinclair, 
 surgeon of the British Navy, who visited New- 
 Zealand at the end of 1841, gives the follow- 
 ing testimony : 
 
 " By means of the well-directed labors of 
 the missionaries, the natives have become ex- 
 emplary Christians, and now show an intellec- 
 tual capacity which strikes with surprise every 
 one who goes among them. Perhaps no peo- 
 ple in the history of mankind has been so 
 completely changed, in their religious and 
 moral condition, as these natives have been, 
 in such a short time, and more particularly by 
 such a small number of men, and by such 
 peaceful means. Frequently have I heard a 
 Christian native, when asked to buy or sell on 
 the Lord's day, or break any other' command- 
 ment, make the decided answer, ' No — me mis- 
 
NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 573 
 
 sionar ;' and that v/hen the temptations were 
 great." 
 
 The new bishop arrived at Auckland, May 
 30, 1842, where he was received with demon- 
 strations of joy by the inhabitants. And, in 
 his letters to the society, he confirms the state- 
 ments already made respecting the progress of 
 the Gospel. The committee say, in 1844, that 
 they can speak with increased confidence of 
 the extent to which the Gospel has spread 
 among the natives of New-Zealand, and the 
 essential change which it has produced in all 
 their moral habits. The message of salvation 
 had been conveyed to nearly, or quite, all the 
 settlements on the northern island ; and in 
 many places unvisited by the missionaries, the 
 Gospel was read and public worship main- 
 tained. War had almost entirely ceased ; and 
 where it had occurred lately, it had been car- 
 ried on in a very mitigated form. Theft and 
 lihirder were of rare occurrence. The bishop 
 states that, among the Christian natives, he 
 had met with the most pleasing instances of 
 the natural expression of the deep and earnest 
 feelings of religion. 
 
 The bishop rented the mission farm at 
 Waimate, and commenced a collegiate estab- 
 lishment for the training of candidates for the 
 ministry. 
 
 The following incident, related by Rev. C. 
 P. Davis, and which occurred in 1844, shows, 
 in a very striking manner, the power of the 
 Gospel to tame the most savage tribes. He 
 entered a village belonging to two Christian 
 chiefs, Perika and Noa, and found them sur- 
 rounded by their armed followers, engaged in 
 prayer, expecting an attack from Ripa, a chief 
 who had made an unjust demand of them, 
 with which they refused to comply. They had 
 a white flag raised over their heads, as a token 
 of their desire for peace. Mr. Davis went out 
 to meet Ripa and his party, whom he found 
 naked and their faces painted red, listening to 
 addresses urging them to vengeance and 
 slaughter. Noa walked between the two pur- 
 ties, telling the enemy that they were acting 
 contrary to the word of God ; and that, while 
 his party were not afraid of them, they were 
 restrained by the fear of (^d. Ripa and his 
 party were but 20, while tro Christian party 
 were 100. After many speeches on both 
 sides, one of Ripa's men, in brandishing his 
 hatchet, accidentally hit Noa's head. As soon 
 as his men saw the blood flowing, every man's 
 musket was leveled. In another moment 
 Ripa's whole party would have fallen ; but the 
 wounded chief sprang forward, and exclaimed, 
 " If you kill Ripa, I will die with him ; " and 
 then throwing his own body as a shield over 
 Ripa, saved him from destruction. Peace was 
 then made between the two parties, and there 
 was great rejoicing. " Some years ago," says 
 Mr. Davis, " the very sight of blood would 
 have been a signal for a dreadful slaughter." 
 
 In the year 1845, the mission was seriously 
 
 interrupted by a collision between some of the 
 natives in the northern district and the British 
 forces, which led to a serious war for some 
 time, some of the natives ranging themselves 
 on one side and some on the other, and thus 
 threatening a general civil war. Some of the 
 stations in the northern district were broken 
 up and destroyed. But the natives engaged in 
 this outbreak, though not generally professing 
 Christianity, were very far from manifesting 
 the savage cruelty which formerly character 
 ized their warfare. In a number of engage- 
 ments, the natives were victorious ; but the 
 governor states that, in these circumstances, 
 European troops would not have behaved bet- 
 ter, or shown less vindictiveness. Their for- 
 bearance towards European settlers, especially 
 the missionaries, was remarkable. Yet, the 
 effects of the war upon missionary operations, 
 and upon the religious condition of the Chris- 
 tian natives, were lamentable in the extreme. 
 Such was the demoralizing influence of the 
 example of the British soldiers at "Waimate 
 upon the natives with whom they came in 
 contact, that some of them had given up even 
 attending upon Christian, ordinances, and 
 others had shown great lukewarmness. And, 
 in many instances, those Christian natives who 
 took part with the heathen against the Eng- 
 lish, relapsed into heathenism. 
 
 However, Rev. 0. Hadfield, under date of 
 March 8, 1847, writes : " I certainly have a 
 much stronger conviction of the reality of the 
 hold that religion has upon the professing na- 
 tives, since the late disturbances, than I had 
 previously. Last winter, while war was going 
 on in the neighborhood, Governor Gray visited 
 Waikanae on the Lord's Day, and attended 
 the native church and school. It was con- 
 ducted by a native catechist, Levi Te Ahu, 
 a man who has conducted himself invariably 
 in the most Christian manner, ever since his 
 conversion, seven years ago. On his return to 
 Wellington, the governor came to me, and ex- 
 pressed himself as altogether astonished that 
 such a change could have taken place in a 
 barbarous people in so short a time. I believe 
 that (Christianity is extending itself in New 
 Zealand." 
 
 At a missionary meeting of native teachers, 
 held at Wanganui the day after Christmas, 
 four of them offered themselves as missionaries 
 to a heathen tribe at war with the English. 
 On the 6th of February, 1847, they set out on 
 their mission. Knowing that it was at the 
 risk of their lives, they went directly to the 
 hostile chiefs, preached to them the Gospel, 
 and endeavored to dissuade them from their 
 warfare ; but on their way to the third, they 
 were waylaid and murdered. Rev. Mr. Taylor 
 soon after visited the tribe by whom this mur- 
 der was committed, and had an interview with 
 the chief. After a number of addresses on 
 both sides, an agreement was made between 
 Mr. Taylor, in behalf of the tribe to whom the 
 
674 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 murdered men belonged, and the chief of the 
 tribe to whom the murderers belonged, that 
 they should make peace with each other ; Mr. 
 T. assuring the latter that, as the former were 
 Christians, they would not seek revenge. But 
 he found some difficulty in restraining the 
 Christian tribes, they were so indignant at the 
 baseness of the act. Two other native teach- 
 ers offered to go on a mission to the same 
 tribe. One of them being dissuaded by his 
 friends, replied : " What if a canoe be upset 
 at sea ? Will it hinder all other canoes from 
 going to sea for fishing, lest they likewise 
 should be upset ? I shall go to Taupo, because 
 the object is good — to make peace." He did 
 go, with his associate, and they were well re* 
 ceived. 
 
 In 1849. an institution was commenced by 
 Rev. Mr. Burrows at the Waimate station, for 
 training up native teachers. The institution 
 opened with five pupils, and the hope was en- 
 tertained that it would prove a great blessing 
 to the mission. 
 
 To show the rapid growth of Christianity 
 in these islands, we give the following table, 
 showing the number of communicants in the 
 eastern district, from the year 1840, when the 
 church consisted entirely of natives who came 
 from the Bay of Islands, principally as 
 teachers. 
 
 1840 . . 
 
 . 29 
 
 1845 . 
 
 . 1484 
 
 1841 . . 
 
 . 133 
 
 1846 . 
 
 . 1668 
 
 1842 . . 
 
 . 451 
 
 1847 . 
 
 . 1960 
 
 1843 . . 
 
 . 675 
 
 1848 . 
 
 . 2054 
 
 1844 . . 
 
 . 946 
 
 1849 . 
 
 . 2893 
 
 Here we have illustrated the fact seen in al- 
 most all missionary history, that while during 
 the first years of a mission the results are 
 scarcely perceptible, and the prospects discour- 
 aging, yet, when the Gospel fairly gets a lodg- 
 ment in the minds of a people, however des- 
 perate their case might seem, its progress will 
 be rapid and powerful. After 20 years' labor 
 in New-Zealand, the number of communicants 
 reported was but 8, and they were all at one 
 station ; but here is an increase in ten years, 
 in one district, from 29 to 2,893 ! 
 
 The Committee, in the report for 1852, state 
 that the native population of New-Zealand is' 
 estimated at from 80,000 to 120,000 ; that 
 more than three-fourths of these are Protestant 
 Christians, and that those connected with Ro- 
 manists do not exceed 5,000. The rest refuse 
 to join any Christian party, though they have 
 laid aside, for the most part, their heathen prac 
 tices. The number of natives connected with 
 the missions of this society may be estimated 
 at 50,000, and of communicants between 5,000 
 and 6,000. And every one who is admitted to 
 the Lord's table undergoes a strict examina- 
 tion, in presence of their native teachers and 
 neighbors. 
 
 Since the appointment of the Bishop of New- 
 
 Zealand, the mission has been put under the 
 direction of a Central New-Zealand Commit- 
 tee, with the bishop at its head. 
 
 The Church Missionary Record for October, 
 1853, contains the following general view of 
 this mission. On the 8th of August, 1822, 
 Rev. William Williams, now Archdeacon of 
 New-Zealand, received his instructions, on his 
 departure for the mission. On the 6th of Au- 
 gust, 1853, the archdeacon's son. Rev. Leonard 
 Williams, received the instructions of the com- 
 mittee on his departure for the same mission. 
 The instructions delivered Aug. 8, 1822, ex- 
 pressly stated that there was not a single Chris- 
 tian convert among the natives of New-Zea- 
 land. At the present moment, the remnant of 
 heathenism among them is so small as not to 
 interfere with their being pronounced a Chris- 
 tian people. A corresponding influence has 
 been exerted on their native character. Can- 
 nibalism is extinct, and the sanguinary spirit 
 that gladly availed itself of every pretext to 
 break forth in deeds of blood is laid. The 
 New-Zealanders have exchanged the spear 
 and club for the plowshare and the reaping- 
 hook ; and tribes which once wasted the dis- 
 tricts of their neighbors, are diligently em- 
 ployed in cultivating their own. Christian 
 Sabbaths and Christian ordinances are gene- 
 rally observed over the island, and this national 
 profession is inclusive of a large proportion of 
 genuine godliness. If it be asked by what 
 means this change has been accomplished, we 
 answer, by the preaching and teaching of 
 " Jesus Christ and him crucified ;" and God's 
 promised blessing on the same. The work has 
 been a rapid one. Fifteen years back, the 
 main portion of the island was lying in un- 
 broken heathenism. 
 
 The following statement, taken from a recent 
 number of the " Australian and New-Zealand 
 Gazette," shows what has been done in a single 
 district : 
 
 " Fourteen years ago the natives of Otaki 
 were among the most dreaded classes of New- 
 Zealand. Their leaders were Rauperaha and 
 Rangihaiata, par excellence, the two most blood-, 
 thirsty men in the whole islands ; men whose 
 whole lives were Uterally spent in shedding 
 blood, and as literally in drinking it, for both 
 were determined cannibals, and gloried in what 
 is now the shame of their followers. 
 
 " Mark the scene at Otaki at this day. The 
 natives have built a church 80 feet long, 36 
 feet wide, and 40 feet high. Its principal 
 beam they dragged 12 miles from the depth 
 of their forests, the choicest tree therein. The 
 pillars were brought from the same spot, and 
 with the same amount of labor. The church 
 is lighted with lanced-shaped windows, four of 
 which occupy the east end. The railing of 
 the communion table is elaborately carved by. 
 the natives, and those who know what their 
 skill in carving is will bear us out in saying 
 that the tabernacle work of many-^aai English 
 
NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 575 
 
 church is greatly inferior to that of the native 
 church at Otaki. For the ground on which 
 the church stands, the natives are indebted to 
 the former cannibal, Te Kauperaha, who died 
 a Christian. 
 
 " On the south side of the church stands the 
 school, equally substantial with the church 
 itself, and larger than the school in Welling- 
 ton. The instruction here given is equal to 
 that given in country places in England ; in 
 one respect superior, for the natives are taught 
 music, of which they are exceedingly fond, 
 " looking forward to the music lesson as a 
 regular treat." Their teacher may not be a 
 Costa, but he is a native who has become 
 sufficiently skilled in the art, as taught at the 
 Bishop's College, to become the instructor of 
 others. 
 
 " But the native boys are widely scattered ; 
 and, therefore, on the west side of the church, 
 stands a boarding-house for the boys attending 
 the school. The dining-hall — native work too 
 —is 50 feet by 25, and 15 feet high. The 
 building contains dormitories for 100 children, 
 who will be received in this establishment, 
 educated, clothed and fed. On the north side 
 of the church will stand a similar building for 
 native girls. The cost of this was defrayed by 
 the natives, who have also erected the whole, 
 with the assistance of an English carpenter. 
 
 " The school possesses a valuable estate, given 
 by the old cannibal chiefs. Of this estate 60 
 acres are cleared and thoroughly drained ; 20 
 acres are cropped with wheat, and another 
 portion with potatoes. The establishment 
 already numbers 70 head of cattle, four iron 
 plows, and four teams of oxen ; the lads being 
 the plowmen. Portions of the estate are let 
 to other natives, who pay their rent in pro- 
 duce, and pasture on the estate 200 head of 
 cattle, and 70 horses. The cost of all the 
 buildings is between £5,000 and £6,000, of 
 which the government has, at different times, 
 contributed £2,000 ; the remainder, as well 
 as materials and labor, has been found by the 
 natives themselves. 
 
 " One of the most enterprising patrons of 
 this establishment is the former savage Rangi- 
 
 haiata himself, who has survived Te Rauperaha, 
 his partner in the wholesale slaughter of his 
 species. What this slaughter was may be 
 judged by one instance. Where the Canter- 
 bury settlement now stands, 30 years ago stood 
 a large pah, peopled by a numerous and happy 
 population. An English ruffian, for hire, car- 
 ried the above chiefs and their forces in the 
 hold of his vessel to the present Lyttelton. On 
 the pretence of trade the natives were thrown 
 off their guard and became an easy prey to 
 Te Kauperaha and his followers, who did not 
 leave a man alive. The women were carried 
 into slavery or eaten. 
 
 " On the voyage back the ship's coppers were 
 used for cooking human joints, the people 
 being slain on board as they were wanted. 
 The ruffian commander of the English vessel 
 admitted this. Yet from those very chiefs 
 mentioned as the leaders of this fearful slaugh- 
 ter, and from their followers, have sprung the 
 Otaki church and schools. 
 
 " Many of our readers will remember Pira- 
 hawau, long the guest of Mr. Halswell, at Ken- 
 sington. That man was, when a youth, one 
 of the perpetrators of the horrible massacre we 
 have just spoken of. He was, while with Mr. 
 Halswell, educated at the British and Foreign 
 School, through the influence of Dr. Hodgkin, 
 and is now a pioneer of civilization in the re- 
 sponsible post of chief of the native police in 
 the Wellington district. The above progress 
 of civilization among savages is unparalleled in 
 history ; but those savages far surpass all 
 others in intellectual character. Despite the 
 former cruelties of the race toward each other, 
 it would be difficult to find a New-Zealander 
 of the superior caste — for there are two dis- 
 tinct races — upon whose features it is not un- 
 mistakably stamped that he is one of * nature's 
 gentlemen.' The inferior caste are the abori- 
 gines of the islands, who have little in common 
 with their superiors beyond their cunning at 
 a bargain." 
 
 The following table gives the statistics of 
 the mission, as they appeared in the report of 
 the society for 1853 ; 
 
 NAMES OF MISSION- 
 ARY DISTRICTS. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 Lay Teachers and other 
 Helpers. 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 s 
 6 
 
 
 1 
 .9 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 European. 
 
 Native. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 .S 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 Northern District 
 Middle District . 
 Eastern District . 
 Western District . 
 
 Totals .... 
 
 1814 
 1834 
 1839 
 1839 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 5 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 30 
 
 53 
 
 134 
 
 215 
 
 8 
 
 624 
 1247 
 3534 
 1622 
 
 136 
 391 
 423 
 124 
 
 8 
 
 87 
 18 
 
 89 
 
 43 
 
 380 
 
 155 
 
 287 
 
 5,357 
 2,080 
 
 21 
 
 21 
 
 7 
 
 3 
 
 432 
 
 8 
 
 7027 
 
 1074 
 
 33 
 
 43 
 
 880 
 
 155 
 
 7,624 
 
•76 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 Socntrr fob Propaoattno the Gospel in 
 FoRBiQN Parts. — This Society's first mission- 
 ny to New-Zealand was sent out in 1839. 
 Eight are now maintained by an annual grant 
 of £1,000, placiHl at the disposal of the bishop. 
 Since the anpointment of the bishop, the soci- 
 ety has paid £7,000 to meet an equal amount 
 given by the New-Zealand Company for the 
 permanent endowment of the church. This 
 grant has been the means of endowing three 
 chaplains in perpetuity. 
 
 AVbslkya.n Missionary Society.— In the 
 rear 1819, the Wesleyan Missionary Society 
 had a young man (^Ir. Samuel Leigh) station- 
 ed at New South Wales. Having suffered in 
 his healtli, he was advised bv Mr. Marsden to 
 visit New-Zealand, which he did. He became 
 acquainted with the missionaries, who had 
 been introduced by Mr. Marsden ; saw the 
 natives, and witnessed many horrible scenes of 
 cannibalism ; and was so affected with the ap- 
 pearance of things as to cherish an ardent desire 
 to commence a Wesleyan mission in the 
 country. The excellent brethren of the 
 Church of England supported and encouraged 
 him in his project. He returned home to 
 England ; obtained the sanction and authority 
 of the executive committee ; and in 1821 re- 
 turned with Mrs. Leigh for New-Zealand. 
 
 At the request of one of the most influential 
 chiefs, Mr. Leigh determined to fix his resi- 
 dence at Alercwy Bay, near the river Thames, 
 but this design was frustrated by the outbreak 
 of a war, in consequence of which, he and his 
 excellent wife were under the necessity of re- 
 maining for some time at the Church Mission- 
 ary settlement, where they employed them- 
 selves in acquiring the language and instruct- 
 ing the natives, as they had opportunity. 
 
 Mr. Leigh's simplicity, coui-age and hardi- 
 hood eminently fitted him for the work to 
 which he was called ; but mere natural resources 
 would have utterly failed in such scenes. He 
 had faith in his Divine Master, and in his gra- 
 cious declaration, " Lo, I am with you alway, 
 even unto the end of the world." And this 
 was his strength and stay when human forti- 
 tude and endurance would have utterly failed 
 him. He dared their pointed muskets ; stood 
 undaunted while clubs were sometimes whirled 
 around his head and spears were thrust close 
 by his side, and felt that he only lived from 
 hour k) hour, as sustained by the invisible pow- 
 er of God. He mingled with the people in 
 their villages and huts ; bartered with them 
 for animal food, having been four months with- 
 out any ; conversed with them in the most fa- 
 miliar manner, and endeavored to Avin their 
 confidence as well as sound the depth of their 
 superstitions. At length he was joined by 
 the brethren Turner and White, and the 
 whole mission party proceeded to Wangaroa, 
 on the north-cast coast, and north of the Bay 
 of Islands, Mhere they were received with ap- 
 parent kindness by the chief, George. This 
 
 George was a very notorious person. In the 
 year 1809 he had cut off the crew and passen- 
 
 §ers of the " Boyd," a fine ship of five hun- 
 red tons burden ; on which occasion, at least 
 seventy persons were murdered and feasted 
 upon by the blood-thirsty savages, and the 
 ship was burnt down to the water's edge. 
 From this time George had a lurking fear of 
 the Europeans, though for selfish purposes he 
 wished to have traffic with them, even to the 
 extent of encouraging, in some degree, their 
 settlement in the country. But the vaguo 
 idea of a possible retribution overtaking him, 
 made him distrustful, overbearing, and violent; 
 and the missionaries, while endeavoring to 
 I erect their temporary dwelling by the aid of 
 hired native labor, were subjected to end- 
 less trouble and annoyance. He came and 
 drove the natives away ; used ill-language to 
 Mr. Turner ; threatened to level the house to 
 the ground, and said it was his ; but all this 
 turbulence was to obtain some gift or gratuity. 
 Afterwards three spades were forcibly taken 
 away by some of his people. Others came in 
 canoes, with fencing timber for sale, which Mr. 
 Turner bought of them, making payment in 
 various articles of hardware, though almost be- 
 wildered by their violence and vociferation. 
 Another of the chiefs brought a pig for which 
 he had previously received payment ; but he 
 demanded to be paid again. Mr. Turner did 
 not yield at first, but afterwards gave him an 
 iron pot, which he coveted, when he claimed 
 another article also. This was refused, and he 
 fell into a violent passion, dashed the pot to 
 pieces, followed Mr. Turner, who was leaving 
 him, and with all the rage of a fiend pointed 
 his musket twice to shoot him, but was re- 
 strained by an invisible hand. However, he 
 pushed Mr. Turner very roughly about, until 
 Mr. Hobbs, the assistant missionary came up. 
 He charged them with the design of making 
 the New-Zealanders slaves ; and said, the only 
 thing they gave him was Karakia (" prayers,") 
 upon which he poured the greatest contempt. 
 He did not want to hear about Christ ; he 
 wanted muskets, powder, tomahawks, tobacco, 
 and the like. He then went back to the house, 
 and threatened to kill Mrs. Turner and the ser- 
 vants ; saying, he would serve the whole mis- 
 sion family as his people had served the crew 
 of the " Boyd." The maid screamed with ter- 
 ror, but Mrs. Turner preserved her composure; 
 and when the excited savage had taken seve- 
 ral articles from the mission store, she took 
 them back from him with calm resolution, and 
 felt her mind kept in peace, being stayed 
 on God. After a while the storm ceased, but 
 such scenes often occurred during their first 
 month's residence at Wangaroa, One morn- 
 ing the missionaries heard that the heads of 
 an adjacent tribe had killed one of their own 
 slaves, and were preparing to eat the body. 
 Mr. Turner went down to the place, and found 
 the chiefs sitting round the fire, and apparently 
 
NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 577 
 
 glad to see him. After the usual salute he 
 Avent towards the fire, aud found to his horror 
 a humau being laid at length, and roasting be- 
 tween two logs. He told them that his heart 
 was very sore at such a sight ; aud as guilt and 
 shame were evidently depicted on their coun- 
 tenances, he made use of the opportunity se- 
 verely to rebuke this enormity, warning them 
 of the just judgments of Almighty God. 
 
 The natives, who disliked toil, could not be 
 induced, even in their most friendly moods, to 
 build a school-house ; and therefore the mis- 
 sionaries were content for a while, in their 
 fine climate, to collect the people and their 
 children in the open air, and there teach them 
 letters, catechisms, prayers, and hymns. Nor 
 were their efforts fruitless; for many of the 
 New-Zcaianders have dated their first impres- 
 sions from these primitive exercises. Towards 
 the end of 1824 the mission premises were 
 pretty well completed. They stood upon a 
 jutting point of laud on the south side of a 
 beautiful vale, through which ran a fine ser- 
 pentine river of fresh water, before emptying 
 itself beyond into a safe and commodious har- 
 bor. The vale was bounded by hills and 
 mountains of almost every size and form, gen- 
 erally covered with excellent pines, many of 
 which were from 60 to 100 feet to the lowest 
 branch, and from three to six feet in diameter. 
 The soil of the valley was exceedingly rich. 
 The missionaries, having purchased the land, 
 had built a good wooden house, with brick 
 chimney — the bricks having been made on 
 the premises, and the lime obtained by cal- 
 cining cockle-shells. They cleared about three 
 acres of ground, enclosed it with a log fence, 
 sowed it with wheat and barley, and likewise 
 set out a good garden with vegetables and fruit 
 trees : all these were for the mission families. 
 Besides this the missionaries had, with their 
 
 own hands, at two of the principal villages, the task of exacting satisfaction for the death 
 
 natives of the Bay of Islands, which was after- 
 wards rescued and conducted out to sea by 
 two of the missionaries. The natives were 
 apprehensive of retribution from other English 
 vessels, and this made them jealous of the mis- 
 sionaries. The chief, George, was now dan- 
 gerously ill, and likely to die. His father had 
 been killed in the affair of the Boyd ; and it 
 was reported that George had requested the 
 natives of Hokianga, in case of his death, to 
 come and strip the Wangaroa Wesleyan mis- 
 sionaries of every thing they possessed, if not 
 to kill them, as utu, or " payment," for the death 
 of his father, for which he said he had never 
 received satisfaction. The death of a chief is 
 a^ day of reckoning, when all the quarrels of 
 his life have to be avenged. These sources of 
 uneasiness made the more wicked natives very 
 overbearing and annoying. They broke over 
 the mission fence and committed petty de- 
 predations on the property ; and on being rear 
 soned with, proceeded to acts of violence against 
 Mr. Turner and his assistants, assaulting him 
 with spears, and menacing his life. But God 
 protected him. 
 
 _ The Church missionaries evinced the live- 
 liest sympathy with their Wesleyan brethren ; 
 and with true Christian love, the Rev. Messrs. 
 Williams and Kemp came over, and urged 
 that at least Mrs. Turner and the little ones 
 should be removed to one of their settlements 
 for a season. They were removed accord- 
 ingly to Mr. Kemp's, at Kerikeri, where they 
 received every kindness and attention ; but 
 nothing could induce Mr. Turner and his fel- 
 low-laborers to forsake their posts. For a 
 time their circumstances were most critical ; 
 but they endured hardness as good soldiers, 
 and repaid evil with good ; till at length the 
 old chief, George, sunk under his malady, and 
 died. The people upon whom had devolved 
 
 raised buildings to the honor and service of 
 God, and for the purposes of his worship. By 
 this time the natives began to listen with at- 
 tention ; the children were learning to read in 
 their own language ; and Mrs. Turner's girls 
 began to make progress in needle-work. The 
 little settlement was visited by Messrs. Bemut 
 and Tyerman, the deputation of the London 
 Missionary Society, by whom the brethren 
 were greatly cheered. The missionaries had 
 been instrumental in quelling an outbreak of 
 jealousy on the part of the natives in their 
 ship, while she was lying off the shore, and 
 thereby saving their lives. Prospects of use- 
 fulness seemed to be opening in a very pleas- 
 ing manner, when, all at once, a dark cloud 
 gathered around them. A fresh series of na- 
 tive outbreaks took place, which ended in the 
 total destruction of the mission premises and 
 property ; and the suspension for a while of 
 the mission itself. 
 
 About this time an English ship, the Mer- 
 cury, had been taken and plundered by the 
 37 
 
 of his father, according to his last will, assem- 
 bled to deliberate, and for that purpose ap- 
 proached the mission pr&mises ; but, after they 
 had spent some time in mutual conference, 
 they agreed to accept the blood of a bird as a 
 sufficient compensation. One of the party 
 then jumped over into the mission premises, 
 bore off a duck, and killed it as a sacrifice to 
 the manes of the chief's father. Mrs. Turner 
 and the children now returned to Wangaroa, 
 and it was hoped all would be well ; but very 
 soon far worse troubles arose. The valley of 
 Wangaroa was suddenly invaded by Shungee, 
 one of the most sanguinary New-Zealand 
 chieftains. On the 4th of January, 1827, 
 while the mission family were engaged in do- 
 mestic worship, they received intelligence of 
 his approach. For several days all was alarm 
 and confusion. Canoes began to drop down 
 the river, bearing the natives to the various 
 scenes of conflict. Early on the morning of 
 the 10th a party of natives were descried by 
 the servant, approaching the missioo-house- 
 
578 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 The missionaries hod hardly time to put on 
 their clothes, when twenty savages, armed 
 with muskets, spears, hatchets, &c., entered 
 the mission-ground, and were proceeding to- 
 wanls tiic house. It was demanded of them 
 what they wanted. Oro, the chief, said, " We 
 are come to make a fight ; your chief has fled, 
 your [>eople have left the place, you will be 
 stripped of all your property before noon; 
 therefore instantly begone." At the same time 
 he gave orders to his party to commence the 
 woHc of spoliation. They fired several guns 
 as a signal, and others came and joined them. 
 Mr. Turner began to prepare for quitting 
 the place, thouj^h he lingered to the last ex- 
 tremity, from his reluctance to leave a spot 
 upon which he had bestowed so much labor 
 and care. The native youths who had been 
 under the instruction of the missionaries were 
 much alarmed, and urged a speedy departure, 
 begging that they might be allowed to accom- 
 pany the family. At 6 o'clock in the morn- 
 ing, when all hope of remaining in safety was 
 extinct, the sorrowful and affrighted household 
 began to move, saving scarcely anything from 
 the wreck but the clothes they wore, and a 
 change or two for the children. The company, 
 apart from the native young people, consisted 
 of Mr. and Mrs. Turner, three children, the 
 youngest of whom was an infant five weeks 
 old ; Luke Wade, the assistant, and his wife ; 
 Mr. Hobbs, and Miss Davis, a young lady 
 from the Church settlement of Paihia, who 
 had come to spend a few weeks on a visit. 
 Their flight was most perilous, through scrub 
 and fern, drenched with heavy dew, and 
 obliged to ford the river with the helpless 
 children in their arms. Behind were blood- 
 thirsty savages, who were only restrained from 
 murder by their selfish fears ; and all around 
 were hovering hostile parties, who, from vari- 
 ous motives, were quite ready to exterminate, 
 in this time of excitement, the mission house- 
 hold ; but, looking to God for help and deliv- 
 erance, the fugitives directed their steps to- 
 ward Kerikeri, the nearest Church settlement. 
 As they went on they were met by one of their 
 own principal men, and also a very friendly 
 old chief, iVare Nui, from the Bay of Islands. 
 To the latter Mr. Turner made his appeal for 
 help and protection, to which he immediately 
 responded, and all the group moved on under 
 his guidance. Twice more they crossed the 
 river, and on turning a sharp bend of the 
 channel, all at once they came upon a formid- 
 able body of fighting natives from the Hokian- 
 ga, orderly, compact, and ready for action, 
 variously armed, but chiefly with muskets and 
 bayonets. They were headed by several chiefs, 
 the principal of whom was Patuone, lono 
 known to be most friendly to Europeans. He 
 caught a glance of the missionaries, and loudly 
 called upon his people to stop. He then in- 
 vited them to sit down, and came with several 
 of his principal companions and rubbed noses 
 
 with the fugitives in token of friendship and 
 good-will. After some words of explanation 
 between the several chiefs, they iormcd a 
 guard around the mission party, and then 
 commanded the armed band to march forward 
 to the other side of the river ; thus another 
 peril was passed. The travelers then plunged 
 mto the woods. Soon after they were met by 
 a party from Paihia, consisting of the Rev. 
 H. Williams, Messrs. Davis, Richey, and a 
 dozen natives. The Apostle Paul at " the 
 Appii Forum and the Three Taverns," could 
 hardly have paore fervently thanked God and 
 gladly taken courage, than the Wesleyan mis- 
 sionaries here. From these excellent persons, 
 and at Kerikeri, where they soon arrived, they 
 received every kindness that sympathy and 
 Christian brotherhood could suggest. On 
 Thursday, Jan. 17, they removed to the Paihia 
 settlement, where they remained until the cap- 
 tain of the ship " Rosanna," hearing of the 
 disasters of the mission party, most kindly 
 offered them a passage to Sydney ; and thus 
 they removed to the colcoy, and for a while 
 the mission was suspended. While they were 
 sheltered at Paihia, the Hokianga party, whom 
 they had met on the 10th, proceeded to Wan- 
 garoa, came in conflict with the plunderers at 
 the mission-house, who belonged to Shungee's 
 people, drove them away with savage fury, 
 and seized upon the remainder of the booty 
 themselves ; burned the house and barn, with 
 the wheat crop in straw, to ashes ; killed the 
 cattle, goats, and poultry ; and, worst of all, 
 the body of Mrs. Turner's infant child, which 
 had died and been buried there, they dug up 
 for the purpose of obtaining the blanket or 
 wrapper in which they supposed the tender 
 babe had been buried, and left the cherished 
 remains of this little one to moulder on the sur- 
 face amid the other monuments of this sad and 
 desolating outbreak. 
 
 Pattione, the chief who interposed on be- 
 half of Mr. Turner's family, and shielded them 
 from native violence as they fled from Wan- 
 garoa, seems never to have been easy at the 
 removal of the W&sleyan missionaries. To- 
 wards the latter end of the year 1827, he ear- 
 nestly invited them to return ; and they, not 
 wishing to entertain the thought of finally 
 abandoning the country, very willingly accept- 
 ed the invitation ; and in January, 1828, we 
 find them establishsd at Mangungu, on the 
 river Hokianga, in Patuone's district. This 
 locality was selected in mutual council with 
 the Church missionaries, and purchased and 
 paid for to the satisfaction of the natives. The 
 soil was suitable for the production of such 
 articles as were needed ; and a vessel of 500 
 tons might lie opposite within 100 yards of the 
 premises. 
 
 So far this mission had been one of sorrow 
 and discouragement. Ten years of hard toil 
 and danger had been passed through, and 
 much money expended, and yet up to the year 
 
NEW ZEALAND. 
 
 579 
 
 ^ 
 
 1830, there seemed to be no visible results. 
 But the faith of the missionaries was unshak 
 en, and they were resolved to persevere. We 
 now come to a turn of affairs. The Gospel 
 day began to dawn, and the glorious light has 
 been brightening ever since. During the year 
 just mentioned, the natives had narrowly 
 watched the brethren, keenly scrutinized their 
 temper and conduct, and become convinced 
 that they were real friends, who only sought to 
 do them good. They now began to hear in- 
 struction with great attention, and to renounce 
 their superstitions. One of the missionaries 
 writes. May 26th, 1834 : " On the preceding 
 Sabbath the native chapel was crowded to ex- 
 cess, and great numbers had to sit outside, all 
 panting for the Word of Life. Such was the 
 desire to get there in the evening, that they 
 almost trampled on each other, and some of 
 them had come in canoes from places forty 
 miles distant, and anxiety for salvation ap- 
 peared to possess a great proportion of this in- 
 teresting multitude. Their earnest singing, 
 prayers, attention to their classes, and other 
 ordinances of religion, left no doubt on the 
 minds of the missionaries as to their sincerity. 
 In reverential behavior in the house of God 
 they were a pattern even to Europeans ; al- 
 most every Saturday some eminent stranger 
 would arrive, in order to be ready for worship 
 on the Sabbath, and would there profess his 
 attachment to Christianity ; wherever mission- 
 aries went on errands of mercy to the sur- 
 rounding villages, the natives were all ready 
 to receive them ; and it was manifest that a 
 glorious work was breaking forth in New- 
 Zealand." 
 
 Several chiefs and other natives had declar- 
 ed in favor of Christianity. Tawai and Mitt, 
 the former one of the most celebrated and suc- 
 cessful warriors in the land, with some old 
 gray-headed cannibals, were sitting "at the 
 feet of Jesus," anxious to learn and ready to 
 do the will of God. Various alterations had 
 now taken place in the mission establishment. 
 Mr. Hobbs had been removed by the com- 
 mittee for a while, to the Friendly Islands, to 
 strengthen the work there. But Mr. Whitely 
 and Mr. Wallis, with their wives, had been 
 sent out to New-Zealand to join in occupying 
 those gracious openings which now seemed so 
 numerous and promising ; and these were 
 joined in 1836 by Mr. N. Turner, who retm-n- 
 ed from Van Dieman's land to the scene of his 
 former labors and sufferings. In 1836 and 
 1837, Mr. and Mrs. Woon and Mr. and Mrs. 
 Buller were respectively appointed. A print- 
 ing-press was employed, under the manage- 
 ment of Mr. Woon, in supplying the mission 
 with books for circulation. 
 
 At this time native teachers were extensive- 
 ly employed, so far as their gifts and graces 
 qualified them for the work, initiating mission- 
 ary operations in the interior and along the 
 coast. They were visited by the brethren at 
 
 the head stations of Mangunga, Newark and 
 Kaipara, as often as possible, and were thus 
 more fully instructed in the way of the Lord. 
 No less than five deputations came to Man- 
 gunga and Kaipara, from the south, to request 
 missionaries, bearing tidings that the natives 
 had already built themselves several chapels, 
 and begun regularly to assemble and worship 
 God, according to their best knowledge. 
 
 In 1839, an attempt was made to pass 
 through the British Parliament a measure for 
 the colonization of New-Zealand. The mis- 
 sionaries of the Church and Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Societies, believing that some of the 
 provisions in this measure would compromise 
 the character of England, by violating the in- 
 dependence of the New-Zealanders, and prove 
 detrimental to the labors of the missionaries, 
 earnestly entreated the committees of those 
 societies to petition the Parliament against 
 that bill. 
 
 In 1840, the Wesleyan Society sent six ad- 
 ditional missionaries to New-Zealand, in the 
 missionary ship Triton, to strengthen the older 
 stations, and to answer some of those calls for 
 new stations. 
 
 The Rev. John Bumhy was one of this rein- 
 forcement. Having been eminently useful in 
 home circuits, he offered himself for the mis- 
 sionary work ; and in March, 1839, landed in 
 New-Zealand, where he labored with great 
 zeal, diligence and enterprise, until June 26, 
 1840, when he was drowned by the upsetting 
 of a canoe in the Bay of Thames. His mis- 
 sionary career was short, but laborious and 
 self-denying. He was the first Wesleyan min- 
 ister whose life had fallen a sacrifice in the 
 New-Zealand mission. 
 
 When the New-Zealand mission was com- 
 menced at Wangaroa, there was no written or 
 printed book in that language. In a compar- | 
 atively short period, however, the missionaries 
 were able to hold conversations with the peo- 
 ple, and to form schools for the instruction of 
 the children ; and they were cheered by the 
 effects of their labors soon becoming apparent 
 among both young and old. In 1842, the fol- 
 lowing works had issued from the mission •^ 
 press : 5,000 Scripture lessons ; 3,000 copies 
 of an elementary school-book ; 6,700 cate- 
 chisms, and prayers and hymns. At this pe- 
 riod, the missionaries occupied 13 stations; 
 there were 3,259 persons in church-fellowship, 
 and 4,000 children in the schools. The Brit 
 ish and Foreign Bible Society had also sent 
 out 15,000 copies of the New-Zealand Testa- 
 ment from England. However, neither the 
 liberality of friends at home, nor the labors of 
 the mission press, could keep pace with the 
 progress of the natives, and the increasing de- 
 mand for teachers and books. The natives 
 were also rapidly adopting the manners and 
 habits of civilized life. Many of the chiefs 
 appeared dressed like gentlemen, and sup- 
 ported the character by their behavior. 
 
580 
 
 NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 Al>out the mifldlo of 1842, the Rev. Dr. 
 iSWtryii nrrivcMl as Bishop of New-55ealaucl. 
 Aa no was known to possess " High Church 
 principles," the missionaries, especially the 
 WcsU'vuns, foreboded evil from the possible 
 riso of new controversies in the infant commu- 
 nity. These forebodings were too soon real- 
 irod ; for the bishop began to teach and en- 
 force the doctrines of baptismal regeneration 
 and apostolical succession, as understood and 
 explained by the High Church party ; thereby 
 casting discredit upon all ministers not epis- 
 copaliy ordained, and by implication denying 
 the validity especially of the pastoral acts of 
 the Wesleyan missionaries. This was a seri- 
 ous hindrance to the work of God. The mis- 
 sionaries of the Wesleyan Society and the 
 Church brethren had labored together hither- 
 to, in the utmost harmony and love ; and it 
 was with the greatest reluctance that the Wes- 
 leyan missionaries were compelled to act on 
 the defensive, against the hostility of that 
 church which the bishop represented. The 
 Great Head of the Church had put his seal 
 upon their labors, and they could turn to 
 thousands of converted New-Zealanders, res- 
 cued from cannibalism and sin, and say, " Ye 
 are our epistles." As the Wesleyan flock was 
 disturbed and scattered by these dissensions, 
 the Rev. H. H. Hanson Turton, at Taranaki, 
 deemed it his duty to address a spirited, yet 
 Christian remonstrance to Dr. Selwyn on the 
 subject, in_ three letters, published some time 
 afterward in one of the country newspapers. 
 There was no great amount of sympathy with 
 this exclusivism, however, in the colony gen- 
 erally; and as mutual difficulties multiplied, 
 Dr. Selwyn acquired juster views of the Wes- 
 leyan cause, and these ill-judged and divisive 
 proceedings were gradually abated ; not, how- 
 ever, without Weakening that blessed bond of 
 attachment and respect which had formerly 
 united both societies. 
 
 On the 30th of March 1842, the Rev. John 
 Waterhouse, of Hobart Town, the General Su- 
 perintendent, was summoned to his eternal 
 rest His last sickness was brought on by 
 exposure to the heavy rains of Van Dieman's 
 Land ; but his death was eminently edifyin"- 
 and triumphant. ° 
 
 In Kaipara, two circumstances of a most 
 gratifying character have lately transpired, 
 both illustrating the value of Christian missions. 
 On occasion of the distressing shipwreck of a 
 vessel belonging to the French navy, nearly 
 200 persons were cast naked and destitute upon 
 the shores of New-Zealand, about thirty miles 
 to the north of Kaipara Heads. They con- 
 structed temporary huts upon the beach, and 
 sent out a party in quest of help, which, 
 after two days, fell in with a few natives from 
 Okaro, who received them kindly, and encour- 
 aged them to send for the main body of sufferers 
 to refresh themselves at the Christian village. 
 Accordingly they came, and received from a 
 
 people, who a few years before would hare 
 murdered and perhaps eaten them, a kind and 
 Christian welcome. The Union Jack was 
 hoisted on the approach of the party, and the 
 houses, the blankets, and the provisions of the 
 natives were placed at their service for about 
 ten days, until arrangements could be made 
 for their removal. For this hospitality they 
 neither asked nor desired a recompense : but 
 the Lieutenant-Governor of New-Zealand, 
 knowing how largely their winter stores had 
 been encroached upon by this unexpected de- 
 mand, gave theiji his high commendation, and 
 a handsome present likewise. It is hoped and 
 believed that the unfortunate Frenchmen would 
 carry with them to Tahiti a practical lesson of 
 the value of Protestant missionary labors. 
 
 Nor is it only for the bodies of their fellow- 
 men that these newly reclaimed savages have 
 learned to care. Concern for their own souls 
 has taught them the value of the souls of 
 others ; and their own exx)erience of Gospel 
 blessings has made them solicitous for the 
 evangelization of the world. Few missionary 
 documents possess a higher interest for the 
 thoughtful mind than a narrative forwarded 
 by Mr. Bullers, of a missionary meeting held 
 at this place. About 300 natives were as- 
 sembled. The Lord's Supper was celebrated 
 on the Lord's day, and a love-feast on Tuesday 
 morning concluded the services. Monday was 
 occupied by the missionary meeting, at which 
 16 native speakers bore their testimony to the 
 value of the Gospel, and urged on their breth- 
 ren the duty and privilege of contributing to 
 the Missionary Society. A collection of £13 
 bore witness that they did not plead in vain. 
 But the true value of the meeting must not be 
 estimated by the collection. The strong sense, 
 the cogent arguments, the clear perception of 
 Christian duty, the union of purpose, and the 
 grateful acknowledgment of their obligations 
 to British Christians, which marked the pro- 
 ceedings of the meeting, gave to it a high im- 
 portance, both as a trophy of the past and a 
 pledge of the future. 
 
 In 1845 and 1846, the gracious spirit of 
 awakening that spread over all the Wesleyan 
 stations in the South Sea, visited also the 
 stations in New-Zealand ; and a great exten- 
 sion of the Redeemer's kingdom was the con- 
 sequence. The Wesleyan Institution for train- 
 ing a native ministry was established in 1844, 
 making the second of these institutions in 
 New-Zealand. And about the same time, a 
 college and seminary were also established at 
 Auckland, the capital, for the purpose of edu- 
 cating the children of the missionaries who 
 are stationed in Australia, New-Zealand, and 
 the islands of the South Sea. 
 
 Neat and commodious chapels were raised 
 in all the peopled localities around the princi- 
 pal stations, and thus those stations became 
 circuits, as in England ; native young men, in 
 great numbers, as soon as their piety and in- 
 
NEW-ZEALAND. 
 
 581 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 •SJBlOipg 
 
 pm? sjaqtnan 
 Suipupui 'diqs 
 -ioj^\^ 3!T<int[ uo 
 
 rt £ =3 a 
 
 •saxag 
 
 q;oq JO SJCB^oqag 
 
 -iCt}(j JO jaqiunf^ 
 
 •siooqog 
 
 -Av-r\ TO .ir)()uuis- 
 
 •soxag q;oq 
 
 JO SJ'8ioqDS-q;T]q 
 
 -qBgjo jaqoinx 
 
 •siooqDg-mxjq 
 -qiJg JO jaquin Kj 
 
 •diqsjaqiuai^ 
 
 JOJ IBIJ^L up 
 
 saaquiajij qoanqQ 
 p3:^ip.).iooY pun 
 IXnj'jo Jtaquin^ 
 
 Z< 
 
 
 
 •2§S 
 
 •B^UTrjsissY 
 
 pUB SaTIUUOlSSlH 
 
 SaDT3Id[-Sniq3T38JJ 
 
 J8q:)0 JO J9qam^ 
 
 •spduqo 
 JO joqum^ 
 
 iOOOOOOOOOC5>0 
 
 gOOOOOOOOO-^I-IOCDOm 
 «£)©tOC500t'*vOOCl-<MOOi.'5 00 
 _^ «, „ ._ ^ ■" ■» -^ O U5 i-( r-( CO 
 
 1 CC lO O ■<* I 
 
 (■<* |^^(^^(^^ i-i < 
 
 lOOOOOOOOOO! 
 I C: Its o> O O C-i I- cc ic I 
 
 1 C^ 00 iOiO Tj< , 
 
 < <M o «o o in 
 
 ■ (T 1 o o o oo 
 
 1 CC OS •<* O >0 T-1 r 
 
 CO CO o o o iffl ( 
 
 (M O O C^ 
 
 ■*05(MC^COrHi-liOCOC>?COr-( 
 
 r-iTji CO (N CO rH 
 
 t- US •»!< 01 Oi Oi lO US ^ iffl CO r-l CO • IM IN 
 
 ioeo®oia>o-<i<iM'<*t-rH050»0(N 
 
 o 
 
 r^ £3 ^ 
 
 
 (NconSirs 
 
 C5 © t-I (N CO' ■ 
 
 53 eg .= 
 
 telligence were of an order to warrant sucli an 
 arrangement, were sent forth. among their hea- 
 then countrymen, to lead them to the know- 
 ledge of the truth. An awful earthquake 
 which happened in Wellington, October 14, 
 1848, destroying some lives and much property, 
 was the means, in the Divine hand, of greatly 
 deepening the serious impressions. 
 
 Such are the present results and aspect of 
 the New-Zealand mission. It is a territory 
 that has been won for Christ by the united 
 exertions of the Weslcyan and Church of Eng- 
 land missionaries. To the Wesleyans espo 
 cially, it has been a sphere of unparalleled toil, 
 carried on for 33 years, at the cost of several 
 thousands a year, and yet yielding glorious 
 fruit. The fields are " white unto the harvest," 
 and Christian reapers are filling their arms 
 with the sheaves. 
 
 It yet remains to be seen whether the abo- 
 rigines will be borne down and lost under the 
 surging tide of colonial immigration, or whe- 
 ther they will stand like a rock amid it all. 
 Native tribes have generally disappeared where 
 mere aggressive or commercial colonization 
 has taken place ; but here, where cupidity has 
 received a check, where the clear lines of right 
 have been revealed, where the native mind has 
 been elevated, and the trading spirit overawed 
 by a more than usual amount of Christian in- 
 fluence and appliances, the results may prove 
 more cheering. Wise and experienced men, 
 such as the senior missionaries, give it as their 
 opinion, that the slave population of Xew- 
 Zealand, the lowest in the physical scale, will 
 die ofif and become extinct ; while the chieftain 
 families, changed in their habits, and raised by 
 religion and educational training, will be pre- 
 served and increase, partly, and for a while, as 
 a separate people,* and then perhaps, ultimately, 
 as commingled with the Europeans of the 
 country. 
 
 Their euphonious but poor language is now 
 impressed with great Gospel conceptions, with 
 words that shall stir the hearts of generations 
 yet to come. With them the Sabbath is " a 
 delight and honorable ;"' and, notwithstanding 
 the number of those who still '' walk according 
 to the course of the world," there is nothing to 
 hinder the ordinary progress of the Gospel 
 through this fine and interesting country, or to 
 prevent it from becoming a fair, prosperous, 
 and Christian land. — Barreifs Life of Bumby ; 
 Wesleijan Notices, and Annual Kevorts. — Kev. 
 W. Butler. 
 
 GENERAL TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 SOCIETIES. 
 
 * No returns. 
 
 Cliurch MijJ*. See. . 
 Weslevan Miss. Soc. 
 
 
 T.ri 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 III 
 
 i 
 
 si 
 
 
 •21 
 
 = «^,lj^t. 
 
 c2" 
 
 31 
 
 440 
 
 7,0-27 
 
 16 
 
 20 
 
 ii4 
 
 4,316 
 
 37 
 
 51 
 
 464 
 
 11,343 
 
 7.724 
 6;719 
 
 14 443 
 
Ob: 
 
 NEYOOR-N. A. INDIANS. 
 
 NEYOOR : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, at the southern extremity of 
 Hindostan, in tlio Travancore district. 
 
 NO ATA KG AX : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on the island of Rarotonga, 
 one of the Hervey Islands. 
 
 NU A HANTANG : A station of the Wes- 
 levan Missionary Society in Sierra Leone. 
 
 'NGAMO'J'U : A station of the Wesleyans 
 in New-Zealand. 
 
 NICOMEDIA : An out-station of the 
 American Board among the Armenians, situ- 
 ated at the head of a gulf bearing the same 
 name, stretching out from the eastern extrem- 
 ity of the sea of Marmora, about 50 miles 
 east of Constantinople. It was formerly the 
 capital of Bythinia, and was also the residence 
 of Constantine, and several of his successors, 
 at least during a part of each year. Here 
 Dioclesian also held his court, when he issued 
 his first edicts against the Christians, and here 
 the horrid work of persecution first began. 
 Population 30,000 ; of which 6,000 are Arme- 
 nians. 
 
 NINE : One of the New Hebrides, where 
 is a station of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 NINGPO : One of the five ports in China 
 open to European and American commerce, 
 situated in lat. 29o 55' N., and long. 121° 22' 
 E., on the river Min, about 12 miles from the 
 sea. Several societies have missions there. 
 (See Chma.) 
 
 NINA TUBU-TABA (KEPPEL'S IS- 
 LAND) : One of the remote out-islands of 
 the Friendly Isles, occupied by the Wesleyans 
 with native teachers. 
 
 NINA-FO-OU (SAVAGE ISLAND) : 
 This island is about 130 miles from Keppel's 
 Island. It is a cinder island, every portion of 
 it bearing marks of fire, Jt is occupied by 
 native teachers, as a station of the Wesleyan 
 Societv. 
 
 NISBET BATH : The seat of an exten- 
 sive district in Namaqualand, South Africa, 
 occupied by a mission of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS : The 
 American Indians of this day may be divided 
 into two classes, — those who are now partially 
 civilized, and live in a somewhat settled state, 
 and those who are yet savage. They are all 
 the remnants of once powerful nations. Some 
 of them are found in the western part of the 
 State of New York, some in Michigan, but 
 the larger portion of them live in the territory 
 west of the Mississippi river, known as the 
 " Indian reservation," a territory lying west of 
 the States of Arkansas and Missouri, between 
 Red river on the south, and Platte river on 
 the north, being about 500 miles in length from 
 north to south, and about three hundred miles 
 in breadth from east to west. Here are col- 
 lected together the remnants of the Chickasaws, 
 Choctaws, Creeks, Seminoles, Cherokees, Osa- 
 ges, Wyandots, Putawatomies, Weas, Pianke* 
 
 shaws, Peorias, Kaskaskias, Ottawas, Chippe- 
 ways, Shawnecs, Kansas, Delawares, Kickapoos, 
 lowas. Foxes and Sacs, Otocs, and Missouries. 
 Immediately north of the reservation, the Oma- 
 has, and some other tribes have an uncertain 
 abode. And as we look up to the Minnesota, 
 and to the north and west of that territory, we 
 shall find the Sioux, the Ojibwas, and others. 
 And further west, to the Rocky mountains, and 
 over that barrier to Oregon, and then to Cali- 
 fornia, and out through the northern and west- 
 ern parts of Texas, we shall encounter many 
 savage tribes -where property and life would 
 not yet be safe. Most of the Indian tribes 
 now living on tUte reservation, once lived east 
 of the Mississippi river, and some of them in 
 the Atlantic States. It was supposed that the 
 interests of these States demanded their remo- 
 val, and it was urged, and finally carried by 
 the General Government. It w^s a hard case, 
 and the right of it has been very justly ques- 
 tioned. It has, however, been overruled for 
 good. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 Presbyterian Board. — An Indian Mission, 
 under direction of the Presbyterian Church, was 
 commenced in 1833, by the" Western Foreign 
 Missionary Society," and established among the 
 Weas, a small band, of not over two or three 
 hundred persons, who occupied a part of the re- 
 servation, near its northern boundary. The Rev. 
 Joseph Kerr, and the Rev. Wells Bushnell, and 
 their wives, with several teachers, both male and 
 female, labored here in a faithful and self-deny- 
 ing manner, and much good was accomplished. 
 But another denomination established a mission 
 in a small kindred tribe near by, and it was 
 thought expedient to relinquish this. At the 
 present time the Board of Foreign Missions of 
 the Presbyterian Church have missions among 
 the Chickasaws, Choctaws, Creeks, and Semi- 
 noles, who occupy the southern part of the re- 
 servation ; the lowas and Sacs, near the north- 
 ern part ; the Omahas and Otoes, in the vicinity 
 of Council Bluffs, on the Missouri river ; and 
 some bands of the Chippewas and Ottawas, on 
 the Grand and Little Traverse Bays, in Michi- 
 gan. The Iowa and Sac Mission is the oldest 
 on this list,Jiaving been established in 1835. 
 At that time the lowas numbered about 1100 
 souls, and the Sacs about 500. They have 
 decreased since that, owing principally to 
 intemperance, which has grown upon them from 
 their intercourse with the whites, from whom 
 they are separated only by the Missouri river. 
 Still the missionaries have prosecuted their 
 work among this people, and done good, though 
 in the face of great discouragements. The 
 language of the lowas was reduced to writing 
 in 1843, when a grammar was prepared, por- 
 tions of the Scriptures translated, a hymn-book, 
 and some elementary works prepared and pub- 
 lished. It is deemed however most expedient 
 to teach the natives English at once, and thus 
 give them access to the whole range of our 
 
[TJITIVBRSITT] 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 583 
 
 literature. In 1846 a boarding--school was 
 established, which continues in operation. 
 
 Next in date is the mission among the 
 Chippewa and Ottawa tribes, in the State of 
 Michig-an. This mission was commenced in 
 1838, by the Rev. Peter Dougherty. A church 
 was organized in 1843, to which over thirty 
 natives have been admitted. Two stations are 
 now occupied by this mission, one at Great 
 Traverse bay, where a small boarding-school is 
 established, and the other at Little Traverse 
 bay, where there is a flourishing day-school. A 
 further notice of this mission will be found at 
 the conclusion of this article. 
 
 The mission among the Creek Indians was 
 next established, and was commenced in 1842, 
 by the Rev. Robert M. Loughridge. The 
 Creek Indians number over 20,000 souls, and 
 the district of country which they occupy lies 
 in the Indian Territory, directly west of the 
 State of Arkansas, between the Choctaw dis- 
 trict on the south, and the Cherokee on the 
 north. Missionaries had been sent among this 
 people in former years, by different societies, 
 but their labors not being altogether accept- 
 able they left the country, and for several 
 years no missionary had resided in the Creek 
 nation. Mr. Loughridge spent some months 
 in 1841 and 1842, in visiting the leading 
 chiefs of the nation, explaining fully his object, 
 and securing their confidence and coopera- 
 tion. The result was a written agreement 
 signed by both parties, in which the chiefs 
 agreed on their part to allow him and others 
 free access to the people, to teach them, and to 
 preach the Gospel, granting lands for all ne- 
 cessary mission premises, &c., Mr. Loughridge 
 I engaging for himself and others, that they 
 ! would not interfere with the government schools, 
 nor with the national affairs. Mr. Loughridge 
 then returned, and in the early part of 1843, 
 went on with his wife. He was most cordially 
 received by the natives, and was soon settled in 
 his new home. A church was organized in 
 January, 1845, and a boarding-school was 
 established in the same year. A second station 
 was formed in 1848, and a large building 
 erected for a boarding-school. The whole mis- 
 sionary work in the Creek nation is in success- 
 ful progress. 
 
 The mission among the Choctaws is next in 
 date. The Choctaw people are perhaps more 
 like a Christian nation than any other Indian 
 tribe. Missions were commenced among them 
 by the American Board in 1818, while they 
 were living east of the Mississippi river, and 
 one of their early missionaries, the Rev. Al- 
 fred Wright, a Presbyterian, has but recently 
 ' gone to his rest. The progress of civilization 
 among the Choctaws, though somewhat hin- 
 dered for a time by their removal, has advanced 
 until tUey have now a regular civil government, 
 a written constitution and laws, courts of jus- 
 tice, and schools. The mission of the Presby- 
 terian Board to this nation grew out of an 
 
 ofTer by their National Council to transfer to 
 the Board an important school called " Spen- 
 cer Academy," which was established in 1842, 
 and the transfer was effected in the summer of 
 
 1845. In the spring of the next year a mis- 
 sionary and his wife, with one female teacher, 
 commenced operations there. In 1847, a 
 church was organized there, and both church 
 and school are in successful operation. 
 
 The mission among the Otoes and Omahas 
 stands next in date. The Otoes are divided 
 into six bands, and number about 1,160. The 
 Omahas number about 100 less. It was in 
 
 1846, when the Rev. Edmund McKinney and 
 his wife removed from the Iowa station to the 
 vicinity of Council Bluflfs, on the Missouri 
 river, and commenced a school for the children 
 of these tribes, w-ith some scattering Pawnees, 
 Puncas, and half breeds. A building for the 
 mission premises was completed in 1848. It is 
 yet the day of small things with this mission, 
 but not on that account to be despised. 
 
 A mission among the Seminoles was com- 
 menced in 1848, and is an off-shoot from the 
 Creek mission, in which territory the Semi- 
 noles now reside. Mr. Loughridge visited this 
 tribe in 1846, and the experiment of a mission 
 was attempted. There are many obstacles in 
 the way, especially as this feeble remnant of a 
 once powerful and warlike tribe consider them- 
 selves more deeply injured by the white man 
 than most others. At the same time, they 
 have no school funds, and are generally poor 
 and discouraged. One fact, however, is pecu- 
 liarly encouraging : one missionary teacher, 
 Mr. John D. Bems, is himself a Seminole In- 
 dian, and has been laboring among his people 
 faithfully for several years. 
 
 The Chickasaw mission is the last that has 
 been planted among the Indians by the Pres- 
 byterian Board. This mission was resolved 
 upon in 1849, but did not go into operation 
 until 1852. Two stations in this tribe are oc- 
 cupied, but the results can hardly be looked 
 for at this early day. 
 
 The complete returns of these Indian mis- 
 sions, as stated in the Report of 1854, are : — 
 8 ministers of the Gospel ; 58 male and female 
 assistant missionaries, of whom four are na- 
 tives — teachers, farmers, the wives of mission- 
 aries, &c. ; 96 communicants ; and 517 schol- 
 ars, mostly in boarding-schools. 
 
 For the support of these missions, the sum 
 of $43,457 was expended in the year ending 
 May 1, 1853, a part of which was on account 
 of the buildings for the Chickasaw and Otta- 
 wa boarding-schools. The sum of $23,240 j 
 was received from the government in aid of 
 the schools, being mostly moneys apipropriated 
 to this object by the Indians, out of their an- 1 
 unities. This leaves a little more than $20,000 
 as the amount furnished by the Presbyterian 
 Church to the cause of missions among the 
 Indians. 
 
 The foregoing narrative shows that the 
 
584 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 bowrding-school system has been largely adoptr 
 ed in these missions. It is a system that has 
 some drawbacks, and yet greater advantages. 
 It involves a considerable expenditure of 
 money, for buildings, the support of teachers, 
 food and clothing of scholars. This consider- 
 ation will always prevent the establishment of 
 such schools in all tribes alike. Some of the 
 tribes are very poor ; others are not willing to 
 appropriate their annuities for this or any other 
 good object. No part of the missionary work, 
 moreover, requires so large an amount of care 
 and labor, on the part both of the missionaries 
 and of the executive officers of the Board, in 
 providing supplies of every kind for large 
 families, living far in the interior of the west- 
 ern wilderness. It is no light matter to fur- 
 nish all the different kinds of food, clothing, 
 and domestic service required by a household 
 of 150 inmates, at a place far distant from 
 markets, stores, and the usual conveniences of 
 civilized life. Nor is it a small thing to keep 
 all the accounts of such purchases, with a 
 voucher for every item, however minute. Yet 
 with all this complex and difficult labor, and 
 with the more serious discouragements of the 
 impaired health of many engaged in the work, 
 and of too frequent changes of scholars and 
 teachers, the system of boarding-school instruc- 
 tion is nevertheless attended with the greatest 
 benefit to the Indians — making it well worthy 
 of adoption, as a part of missionary agency. 
 The scholars in these institutions are trained 
 up under Christian influence, instruction, and 
 example. They live in the missionary house- 
 hold, and are clothed, plainly but comfortably, 
 after our fashion. The boys are taught to 
 work in the garden and on the farm ; the girls 
 to knit, sew, and attend to the common duties 
 of housekeeping. They are taught the Eng- 
 lish language, and the usual branches of com- 
 mon-school learning. They are assembled 
 morning and evening at family worship, and 
 on the Sabbath they unite together in the ser- 
 vices of the sanctuary. Thus they are in 
 training for the duties of life under the hap- 
 piest circumstances. Many of them have al- 
 ready become the subjects of divine grace. A 
 few are already looking to the work of the 
 Christian ministry; some are already, and 
 otliers probably will be teachers ; others still 
 will occupy posts of influence in their respec- 
 tive tribes, as magistrates or council-men. The 
 boys wili grow up to revere the laws and in- 
 stitutions of civilized society ; the girls, to ex- 
 ert a hallowed influence in the domestic circle 
 as Christian daughters, wives and mothers. In 
 all this we see principles or elements of civili- 
 zation of a high order — the beginnings of a 
 Christian life in the wilderness — the desert 
 blossoming as the rc«e. 
 
 The happy influence of these missions on the 
 Indians may be shown by an example. Fifteen 
 .yea»6 ago, the Rev. Peter Dougherty, on leav- 
 ing the seminary at Princeton, went among the 
 
 Chippewa and Ottawa Indians in the neighbor- 
 hood of Grand Traverse Bay, on Lake Michi- 
 gan, lie found them living in a sad condition, 
 dwelling in small bark huts or wigwams, poor- 
 ly clad, and deriving a precarious subsistence 
 from fishing, making sugar from the maple 
 tree, and the ailtivation of little fields of Indian 
 corn by the women. They were exposed, more- 
 over, to the pernicious arts of the whisky-trader, 
 who reaped the greater part of their small an- 
 nuities. They were thus fast traveling on the 
 road to extinction. 
 
 Mr. Dougherty mingled freely with this poor 
 people, and gained their confidence and good- 
 will, lie built a small log-cabin for himself 
 and another for a school-house, doing most of 
 the work with his own hands. He then taught 
 the children during the week, and preached to 
 as many as could be collected on the Sabbath. 
 After some months he returned to his friends 
 on a short visit, and was accompanied back by 
 his wife, who did not hesitate at the call of 
 duty, to exchange the comforts of refined Chris- 
 tian society for a home among the children of 
 the forest. Gradually an impression was made 
 on the minds of the Indians. One family after 
 another was induced to build small cabins of 
 rough logs, near the dwelling of their mission- 
 ary ; little fields were opened and fenced ; fruit 
 trees were planted, and vegetables raised in 
 the gardens. A suitable church building was 
 erected, with a swee1>toned bell to call the wor- 
 shipers to the house of God. Tfte unwonted 
 sight of a Christian village appeared on the 
 shores of the bay. 
 
 The means of grace administered in this hum- 
 ble village were followed by the influences of 
 the Holy Spirit ; hopeful conversions among 
 his Indian congregation oteercd the heart of 
 the missionary. A church was organized in 
 1843, and to its communion, at different times, 
 over thirty of the Indians have been admitted 
 after receiving Christian baptism. Some of 
 these have finished their earthly course, in the 
 enjoyment of a good hope through grace, and 
 they are now at rest with Jesus. Surely no 
 doubt can be entertained as to the benign in- 
 fluence of this work of faith and labor of love. 
 Its fruits are beautiful here, and in the world 
 of glory they will be forever perfect. 
 
 The christianization of these Indians was fol- 
 lowed by their civilization. Of this a marked 
 proof is now to be mentioned. The land occu- 
 pied by the settlement on Grand Traverse Bay 
 had been ceded by the Indians in former years 
 to the Government, and, being a reservation, 
 it was not yet in market. Mr. Dougherty's 
 Indians, as they may be called, in distinction 
 from the unevangelized part of the same bands, 
 were now anxious to obtain land for permanent 
 possession and improvement, so that they might 
 have a settled dwelling-place, and leave the 
 fruits of their labor to their children. 
 
 They were the more encouraged to desire 
 this, by the wise and liberal legislation of 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 685 
 
 the State of Michigan, giving to the Indians 
 the rights of citizenship. After long con- 
 sideration by the Indians and their mission- 
 ary, and no small degree of attention on the 
 part of the Executive Committee of the Board, 
 including repeated references to the Indian De- 
 partment at Washington, it was eventually 
 deemed best that they should remove from 
 their first settlement, purchase small tracts of 
 land on the other side of the bay, and thus be- 
 gin life anew. They had carefully husbanded 
 their small annuities and earnings, and some 
 of them were able, in 1852, to purchase little 
 tracts of forty, sixty, or eighty acres each, to 
 which they have now removed, and they are 
 hard at work clearing their lands, and putting 
 up their houses. 
 
 It is gratifying to add, that they were most 
 anxious to have their benefactor accompany 
 them to their new abode. A memorial was 
 sent by them to the Committee, signed by a 
 large number, requesting that Mr. Dougherty 
 might be transferred to their new settlement. 
 
 He is now there, pursuing his work under new 
 and more hopeful circumstances. It has be- 
 come expedient to form a small boarding-school, 
 as the families are now at considerable dis- 
 tances apart ; and two more stations have been 
 occupied on Little Traverse Bay, where inter- 
 esting day-schools are supported. 
 
 This narrative exemplifies the working of 
 our Indian missions, and shows clearly the re- 
 sult to which they directly tend. Their aim 
 is to save the Indians for this life and the life 
 to come. They promote their civilization, and 
 thus fit them to become eventually incorpo- 
 rated with the other inhabitants of this coun- 
 try, — who can have a better right to be en- 
 rolled as native citizens under our government ? 
 And they point their minds to that life and 
 immortality which the Uospel alone brings to 
 light. What has been accomplished among 
 these bands of Chippewas and Ottawas, is pre- 
 cisely what we hope to sec accomplished among 
 all the Indian tribes. — Rev. J. (treenleaf, and 
 Lowrie's Manual of Missions. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 Choctaws 
 
 Creeks 
 
 Chickasaws 
 
 Sesonoles 
 
 lowAS AND Sacs. .... 
 Otoesaxd Omabas.. 
 Cmp'WAS & Ottawas 
 
 Names of Stations. 
 
 Spencer Academy 
 
 Kowetah 
 
 Tallahassee 
 
 Wapanucka 
 
 Boggy Depot 
 
 Little River,or Oak-ridge, 
 
 Iowa ', 
 
 Bellevue , 
 
 Grand Traverse 
 
 Little Traverse 
 
 Middle Village 
 
 Totals 
 
 1846 
 1842 
 1849 
 1849 
 1852 
 1848 
 1835 
 1846 
 1838 
 1852 
 1853 
 
 Missionaries and Assistant 
 Missionaries. 
 
 Ministers. 
 
 Lay Teachers and 
 others, 
 
 18 37 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 Scholar.^. 
 
 
 Boarding. 
 
 Day. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 S 
 
 t 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 d 
 
 ^ 
 
 e 
 
 ^ 
 
 C5 
 
 & 
 
 * 
 
 100 
 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 30 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 
 * 
 
 
 25 
 
 25 
 
 40 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 80 
 
 
 ., 
 
 100 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 
 ,. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 26 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 32 
 
 23 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 40 
 
 96 
 
 •• 
 
 
 15 
 35 
 
 15 
 
 30 
 
 239 
 
 208 
 
 35 
 
 517 
 
 American Baptist Missionary Union. — 
 The history of these missions is so blended 
 with the changing fortunes and declining des- 
 tiny of the Indian race, that it can be fully 
 narrated only with considerable difficulty, and 
 at a length greater than is compatible with 
 the limits of this sketch. These missions were 
 formerly established in portions of the country 
 from which the Indians have long since disap- 
 peared, and are now, with a single exception, 
 concentrated in that territory lying westward 
 of the states of Missouri and Arkansas, which 
 is the home appointed by the American gov- 
 ernment for the feeble remnants of this once 
 powerful race. 
 
 In the autumn of 181 7, Eev. Isaac McCoy 
 was appointed by the Board of Managers of 
 
 the General Convention, a missionary among 
 the Indians, at that time scattered in great 
 numbers over many of the states and along the 
 entire western frontier of the United States. 
 In accordance with the instructions he received, 
 he repaired to Fort AVayne, in Indiana, on the 
 banks of the Wabash, then one of the remotest 
 settlements of the West. In the region lying 
 around this military establishment were the 
 Miamies, the Kickapoos, the Putawatomies, 
 and the Ottawas — tribes speaking substantially 
 the same language, and existing in the same 
 social condition. In the relations then exist- 
 ing between the two races, he found these 
 people exceedingly averse to everything be- 
 longing to white men. After_ many perecver- 
 ing efibrts he was able to conciliate their good 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 will, and by the end of the year to collect a 
 small school of native children to bo boarded 
 and instruetetl in his own family. In 1820 the 
 Bchool contained 48 ^iuynh, and had become 
 instruiutiitiil in esUblishinpf relations of confi- 
 dnir.' liitween the missionary and several 
 ihiris of tliu tribes. In 1822 the station was 
 rt iiiovod 200 miles westward to the borders of 
 Michigan, to a spot situated far from any set- 
 tlement of white men, and which now received 
 the name of Carey, in honor of the celebrated 
 Kuglish missionary at Serampore. Two as- 
 sistantij were now added to the mission, and 
 the school was the means of gathering a little 
 community in which the arts of civilized life 
 began to be practiced, and the influences of 
 Christianity were exerted. The members of 
 the church were now 30 or 40 in number, 
 many of whom were Indians, and the public 
 woi'ship maintained by the missionaries often 
 drew together large companies of the Puta- 
 watomies, who alone had hitherto evinced any 
 interest in the agencies of the mission. 
 
 The Ottawas, who had opposed the efforts 
 of the missionaries, soon began to relax their 
 hostility. Two pupils from that time were 
 sent to the school at Carey, and their chief, 
 Noonday, offered a tract of 600 or 700 acres 
 of laud to the mission, in case a missionary 
 could be sent to the settlements of his people 
 on the Grand river. The proposal was ac- 
 cepted, and a new station established, which 
 was conducted for a year by different members 
 of the mission at Carey ; but in 1826, on the 
 ai-rival of other missionaries, Mr. McCoy tem- 
 porarily removed his family to the new settle- 
 ment, and immediately founded a school and 
 the other agencies usually connected with a 
 mission for the improvement of the natives. 
 This station received the name of Thomas, and 
 in 1827 it was placed by the Board umler the 
 charge of Rev. Leonard Slater, who Was ap- 
 pointed for this purpose, and Mr. McCoy re- 
 turned to Carey. This station, however, was 
 already beginning to decline, and the Puta- 
 watomics, who had offered that field of the ear- 
 liest missionary effort, entirely disappointed the 
 hopes which had been cherished in their be- 
 half. They yielded to the corrupting influ- 
 ences of the white men who came to them, 
 ceded thtir hinds to the government, and ceased 
 to practice the rudiments of civilization which 
 they had learned from the missionaries. In 
 these circumstances, in 1829, Mr. McCoy and 
 his associates removed to Thomas, leaving only 
 a single missionary. Rev. Mr. Simerwell, to 
 teach the school and preach to the church at 
 Carey. 
 
 The Ottawas at this time presented a much 
 more inviting field of philanthropic labor. 
 Their chiefs were more intelligent, and their 
 settlements were further removed from the re- 
 gions occupied by white men. In the summer 
 of 1830, the station was composed of five mis- 
 Bionaries, a superintendent of the farm, and I 
 
 six female assistants, who were engaged in in- 
 structing the Indians around them in the doc- 
 trines of Christianity, and the rudiments of 
 useful knowledge. But the labors of the mis- 
 sion were at this time too much directed to 
 the mere outward improvement of the people, 
 and its members soon felt the importance or 
 addressing themselves more directly to their 
 religious welfare. For this purpose new pro- 
 minence was given to the daily religious wor- 
 ship, and the services of the Sabbath, so that 
 the character of the jicople began to improve, 
 and in 1832 several of them gave evidence of 
 piety, and were received into the church by 
 baptism. Among these earliest converts was 
 Noonday, the chief of the tribe who had in- 
 vited the missionaries to come among them, 
 and who now attempted to unite the people in 
 an association for preventing the sale of whis- 
 ky, and for promoting the morals of the settle- 
 ments. Every year witnessed improvements 
 in their condition, and the enlargement of the 
 church and the mission. Eight Indian youths 
 were sent to the Academy at Hamilton, N. Y., 
 to receive a fuller education, and the prospects 
 of the tribe began to brighten. But the set- 
 tlements of the white men were gradually ap- 
 proaching their remote domain, and already 
 beginning to exert upon them their unfailing 
 mischievous influence. In 1836, their territory 
 having become covered with English settle- 
 ments, was ceded to the government of the 
 United States, and the mission was removed to 
 Richland, about 50 miles south of Thomas. 
 Here Mr. Slater continued to reside, though 
 the great body of the Ottawas had long since 
 migrated to tlie Indian territory beyond the 
 Mississippi. A small settlement, however, re- 
 mained till near the close of 1853, who then 
 joined their brethren, and the property of the 
 mission has been sold and the services of Mr. 
 Slater discontinued, at his own request. 
 
 The improvement of the Indian race had 
 early engaged the attention of the government 
 of the United States. Special appropriations 
 had been made, and different plans had been 
 recommended by successive presidents, and 
 various schemes had been devised by philan- 
 thropic citizens in their behalf. At length, in 
 1819, a bill Avas passed by Congress, placing 
 at the disposal of the president the sum of 
 $10,000, as an annual appropriation for their 
 instruction and civilization. The schools at 
 Thomas and Carey had from the beginning 
 been supported by moneys derived from the 
 government, and in accordance with the plan 
 adopted by the president for disbursing the 
 $10,000, the Board in 1825 began to receive 
 a portion of this appropriation, which, varying 
 with the amount of service which has been 
 rendered, they have continued to receive to the 
 present time. 
 
 In 1828, the Board appointed Rev. Abel 
 Bingham to establish & mission among the Ojib- 
 was at Sault de Ste. Marie, an ancient French 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 587 
 
 settlement, about 15 miles south-east of Lake 
 Superior. The president, in accordance with 
 what was now the settled policy of the govern- 
 ment, had placed at their disposal the sum ap- 
 propriated for this tribe, and Mr. Bingham 
 immediately commenced a school with fifty 
 scholars, and began to preach in English at 
 the neighboring garrison, and through an in- 
 terpreter to the Indians of the settlement. 
 Suitable houses were soon erected for the ac- 
 commodation of the members of the mission 
 and the boarding-school ; a temperance society 
 was formed, a church was constituted ; and, in 
 1830, two persons were baptized. Others, 
 both in the Indian and the English congrega- 
 tions, soon became decided and active Chris- 
 tians, whose good influence was felt in the im- 
 proved morals and social habits of the commu- 
 nity. Early in 1832 special meetings were 
 held at frequent intervals by the members of 
 the mission, which were also attended by other 
 ministers in the neighborhood, and which con- 
 tributed largely to the religious instruction 
 and benefit of the people. Forty persons were 
 soon afterwards baptized, and added to the 
 church of Mr. Bingham, of whom eleven were 
 Indians ; the others being principally officers 
 and soldiers of the neighboring garrison. 
 Among them were Dr. Edwin James and Mr. 
 Cameron, and Skegud, an Ojibwa chief, the 
 two latter of whom were subsequently assist- 
 ants in the missions. Dr. James also had trans- 
 lated the New Testament into the Ojibwa lan- 
 guage, with which he had long been familiar, 
 and after a careful revision it was printed, in 
 1833, at Albany, under the direction of the 
 translator. At this time also Messrs. Meeker 
 and Merrill were appointed missionaries of the 
 Board, and passed some time at Sault de Ste. 
 Marie, but were afterwards removed — Mr. and 
 Mrs. Merrill and a female assistant, to the 
 Otoos, and Mr. and Mrs. Meeker to Thomas, 
 and afterwards to Shawanoe in the Indian ter- 
 ritory beyond the Mississippi. 
 
 But the station at Sault de Ste. Marie soon 
 began to suffer from the presence of immoral 
 and unprincipled traffickers, and from the wan- 
 dering habits of the Indians. The pious sol- 
 diers of the garrison were removed to a distant 
 post, and the school and congregation were 
 both greatly reduced in consequence of the 
 intrigues of Eoman Catholic priests, who had 
 come into the settlement. Messrs. Bingham 
 and Cameron, however, still continued their 
 labors, and made frequent excursions to other 
 native settlements, and soon established a sub- 
 ordinate station at Tikuamina bay, which was 
 placed under the charge of Shegud, the con- 
 verted chief already mentioned. Mr. Cameron, 
 who was ordained in May 1837, visited Michi- 
 pocotou, an Indian town in Upper Canada, on 
 the shore of LakelSuperior. He repeated his 
 visit in Successive seasons, baptizing several 
 Indians, whom he at length formed into a 
 church, which, in 1842, numbered thirty mem- 
 
 bers. The station, however, did not long 
 thrive, in consequence of the changing habits 
 of the people, and it was, after a few years, 
 entirely abandoned, and Mr. Cameron return- 
 ed to St. Mary's. This latter station also has 
 been gradually declining for several years, 
 while that at Tikuamina bay has become more 
 important. 
 
 In the year 1821, the Board assumed the 
 general care of the mission established by the 
 Hamilton Missionary Society, among the Sene- 
 ca, Tuscarora and Oneida Indians, in the re- 
 moter counties of New York. This mission was 
 conducted in three separate stations, which at 
 length were reduced to two, but both of them 
 gradually declined in the waning fortunes of 
 the race, and have since become extinct. 
 
 AVe have thus far sketched those missions of 
 the Board which were established among the 
 tribes of the north. Similar missions were 
 also planted in the south, among the Chero- 
 kees and Creeks, in the States of North Caro- 
 lina, Georgia, and Alabama. Of these mis- 
 sions, that among the Cherokees has been 
 attended with a degree of interest and success, 
 that has placed it at some periods of its history 
 among the foremost Baptist missions of the 
 country. It was established in 1817, when the 
 territory of the tribe embraced a large tract 
 lying on the borders of the States of North 
 Carolina, Georgia, and Tennessee. The Chero- 
 kees were already beginning a career of civili- 
 zation, and by being more widely separated 
 from the settlements of white men, had main- 
 tained an independent national existence. 
 They had, in former years, been visited by 
 Moravian missionaries, and by agents of the 
 Presbyterian Synod of Tennessee, by whose in- 
 fluence much good had been accomplished. In 
 1817 also the mission of the American Board 
 of Commissioners was commenced among the 
 Cherokees, and a few months later, Eev. 
 Humphrey Posey was appointed the first mis- 
 sionary of the Baptist General Convention, as 
 the society was then styled. In consequence 
 of much time being spent in journeys of explo- 
 ration, and the selection of a suitable locality, 
 the labors of the missionary were not begun 
 till the spring of 1820, when Mr. Posey, with 
 a few assistants, went to reside at Valley 
 Towns, on the banks of the Hiwassee river, 
 just within the State of North Carolina. The 
 station was commenced, in accordance with 
 the views at that time prevailing, by enclosing 
 a large piece of ground of eighty acres, as a 
 mission farm, which was supplied with the 
 necessary implements and stock. Buildings 
 were soon erected ; a school of 50 children was 
 opened for instruction in the Scriptures and in 
 the lessons of useful knowledge. In the fol- 
 lowing year a second station was commenced 
 at Tinsawattee, a settlement sixty miles sAth 
 of Valley Towns, where was already residing a 
 missionary, supported by the Sarepta Baptist 
 Association in Georgia. In September of the 
 
588 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 ?am<» year, Rev. Thomas Roberta was appoin1> 
 
 [HTiiitendent of the mission, and several 
 
 i-s for the schools and artizans lor the 
 
 ; and the workshop were added to its sta- 
 
 ;ind under the influence of their arrange- 
 
 iii. ..Us, the Indians made evident progress in 
 
 the arts and morals of civilized life. 
 
 Among the members of the mission at Val- 
 ley Towns at this time, was Mr. Evan Jones, 
 who, with his wife, had, for several years, been 
 engaged in the instruction and management of 
 the schools. lu 1825 he was ordained as pas- 
 tor of the church at Valley Towns, and soon 
 after, on the resignation of Mr. Koberts, was 
 appointed superintendent of the mission. He 
 soon had the happiness of seeing several of his 
 former pupils settled around him, as heads of 
 Christian families, and illustrating the virtues 
 of a well-ordered society. In 1826, the civil 
 organization of the tribe having been altered, 
 a new code of laws was adopted, and their 
 progress, as a people, was greatly promoted. 
 Their language had already been reduced to 
 writing, by George Guess, one of their own 
 people. Many hymns were composed in it, in 
 the singing of which the natives especially de- 
 lighted ; and in 1825, the New Testament was 
 translated according to the alphabet of Guess, 
 by David Brown, a Cherokee of superior edu- 
 cation. A printing-press was soon purchased 
 by the council, and in 1828 the " Cherokee 
 Phoenix" was published weekly, both in Che- 
 rokee and in English. The New Testament 
 and the hymns were also printed. 
 
 But the labors of the mission were thus far 
 devoted too much to the civilization and social 
 improvement of the nation, and by the direc- 
 tion of the Board, the missionaries now began 
 to give themselves more fully to the work of 
 preaching the Gospel to the people, and lead- 
 ing them to repentance and faith in Jesus 
 Christ. The mission farm and its kindred ar- 
 rangements were gradually abandoned, and 
 the attention of the Indians was directed espe- 
 cially to the claims of the Gospel, with results 
 that fully justified the wisdom of the change. 
 A religious awakening soon commenced, which 
 spread widely through the nation, and continu- 
 ed for several years to exert its beneficial in- 
 fluence upon the character of the people. Mr. 
 Jones established new out-stations, and organ- 
 ized new churches, and at the close of 1833 
 the mission numbered 200 communicants, 
 three-fourths of whom had been baptized in 
 the three preceding years. Many of these In- 
 dian converts were men of superior intelligence 
 and standing in the tribe, and two of them 
 subsequently became respected and useful 
 ministers of the Gospel. These were Oganaya 
 and Kaneeka, who adopted the names of John 
 "WickliSe and Jesse Bushyhead. The latter 
 }u4J gained his knowledge of Christianity from 
 the Bible alone, and apart from all other in- 
 struction, had become a Christian of the firm- 
 est &ith and the loftiest character. Both he 
 
 and "Wickliffe wore ordained to the ministry in 
 
 1833, and became pastors of churches at dif- 
 ferent stations, where, for many years they de- 
 voted their efforts to promoting the religious 
 welfare of their own people. 
 
 The station at Tinsawattee was never equal 
 in importance to that of Valley Towns. It 
 was under the faithful superintendence of Rev. 
 Mr. O'Briant ; but the Indians in that district 
 declined in numbers ; and at length in 1831, 
 at the recommendation of the United States 
 government, they removed to the territory 
 which had .been assigned them, beyond the 
 Missisippi. Mr. O'Briant accompanied them,' 
 but he soon after died ; and though his place 
 was supplied by others, this mission was aban- 
 doned in 1836, and the remaining missionaries 
 removed to Shawanoe. 
 
 From the year 1822 a mission had also been 
 established among the Indians known as the 
 Creek nation, in the St?ites of Georgia and 
 Alabama. The attention of the Convention 
 was called to the wants of these people, and 
 the establishment of a mission recommended 
 by Governor Rabun, of Georgia, — also by Rev. 
 Messrs. Mercer and Moscly, eminent clergy- 
 men of the same state. In 1822, Rev. Lee 
 Compere, of South Carolina, was appointed to 
 commence the mission at Withington, on the 
 borders of Alabama. But the Creeks were 
 far less civilized than the Cherokees, and ^vere, 
 withal, sadly degraded by the unprincipled 
 traders who came among them in great num- 
 bers, to teach them the vices of civilized life. 
 Troubles were also arising between them and 
 the government of the United States, and they 
 were constantly exposed to depredations from 
 their white neighbors, which provoked the 
 fiercest passions of their savage natures. In 
 this condition of the Creek nation, it was im- 
 possible that the mission should accomplish 
 any high success. A school was maintained 
 for a few years, and a small band of Creeks 
 were baptized ; but in 1829 a large part of the 
 nation migrated beyond the Mississippi, and 
 Mr. Compere withdrew from the service of the 
 Board. 
 
 In 1830, John Davis, a former member of 
 the school at Withington, who had accompa- 
 nied his people in their removal westward, was | 
 appointed a missionary, and immediately began 
 his labors as a preacher. Two years later, 
 Rev. Daniel Lewis was sent to the mission, the 
 chief station of which received the name of 
 Ebenezer. He soon organized a church, com- 
 posed of those who had been baptized in Ala- 
 bama, and those who had been more recently 
 instructed in the Gospel by John Davis. The 
 school was well attended, and a weekly con- 
 gregation of three hundred Creeks was assem- 
 bled for public worship. Mr. Davis was sub- 
 sequently ordained, and in the autumn of 
 
 1834, the mission was placed under the care, of 
 Rev. David RoUin, who, with two assistants, 
 went to reside among the Creeks. In 1836, a 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 589 
 
 second station was establisned at Canadian 
 Creek, and an attempt was made to prepare a 
 Creek version of the New Testament. But 
 the passions of the tribe were too easily in- 
 flamed to admit of much social progress, or of 
 any settled and uniform modes of life. Many 
 of the chiefs were opposed to the introduction 
 of Christianity among the people, and the 
 nation soon became distracted with tumults, 
 which threatened the safety of the mission- 
 aries. Mr. Rollin and his associates accord- 
 ingly withdrew to Shawanoe, and the mission 
 was broken up. It was afterwards resumed 
 by Rev. Messrs. Kellam and Mason, who main- 
 tained the government schools and kept to- 
 gether the churches ; but in 1840 they were 
 obliged to leave the nation, on account of 
 threatened violence. The churches, however, 
 continued to be visited by members of other 
 missions in the Indian Territory, until 1843, 
 when Rev. Eber Tucker, lately a government 
 teacher among the Choctaws, was appointed 
 missionary among the Creeks. In the course 
 of two years, he baptized more than a hundred 
 of the tribe ; and the church, at the end of 
 that period, numbered 250 members, of whom 
 many were African slaves owned in the nation. 
 In 1845, Mr. Tucker abandoned the mission, 
 on account of the sickness of his family, and it 
 subsequently passed into the hands of the 
 American Indian Mission Association. 
 
 In May, 1830, the bill for removing the In- 
 dians from their lands within the states to the 
 territory of the United States beyond the Mis- 
 sissippi, passed the national Congress. This 
 measure had been early advocated by Mr. 
 McCoy, and repeatedly commended to the 
 government by the General Convention, as the 
 best mode of relieving them from the evils to 
 which they were exposed within the jurisdic- 
 tion of the states. Many of them had already 
 consented to remove, and other portions were 
 .only waiting for some definite arrangements to 
 be made by the government. But the Chero- 
 kees in Georgia, and other tribes in the neigh- 
 boring states, claimed to be each an indepen- 
 dent people, occupying lands which had been 
 repeatedly guarantied to them by treaties with 
 the United States. It was while this claim 
 was still a subject of angry dispute between 
 the Cherokees and the State of Georgia, that 
 the bill for removing the Indians became a 
 law of the land. It provided for an equitable 
 exchange of the lands of the Indians ; for 
 their removal at the public expense ; their full 
 indemnification for the losses they might sus- 
 tain, and their entire support for one year 
 after their arrival in the territory which was 
 set apart for them, beyond the western borders 
 of the states of Arkansas and Missouri. The 
 act imposed on them a virtual necessity, and 
 was ultimately carried into execution by the 
 troops of the United States, under the com- 
 mand of Major-General Scott. Several other 
 tribes, seeing the necessity which they could 
 
 not escape, acceded to the terms of the govern- 
 ment, and exchanged their lands for portiona 
 of the new domain. Not so the Cherokees. 
 They clung to the promises of the government, 
 and to the guaranties of their treaties. At 
 length, however, on the submission of a por- 
 tion of them, the President of the United 
 States felt obliged to compel their removal by 
 the array of military force. It was commenced 
 in the summer of 1838 by the enforced depart- 
 ure of 3,000 of the tribe ; but the remainder 
 having obtained permission from General 
 Scott to remain till the sickly season of sum- 
 mer was over, removed of their own accord, 
 in companies of about a thousand each, under 
 the conduct of leaders of their own selection. 
 It was to them a season of unprecedented 
 national calamity and humiliation. They 
 were, in a great degree, a civilized and Chris- 
 tian people, and they felt with the keenest sen- 
 sibility the pressure of the iron power which 
 tore them from their ancient seats, and the 
 graves of their dead. But, amidst all their 
 deep afflictions, the religious influence which 
 had begun to show itself some years before, 
 still continued to be experienced among them. 
 In 1835, not less than 300 had been baptized, 
 and during the protracted period of their ad- 
 versity, and, even on their sorrowful march 
 to the western territory, they manifested a re- 
 ligious sensibility, and developed a religious 
 faith, which not only sustained them in all 
 their sufferings, but awoke a thrill of sympathy 
 in every pious heart throughout the land. 
 Among the persons chosen to conduct the 
 several parties of the migrating nation, M-ere 
 Rev. Messrs. Jones and Bushyhead, and it 
 often happened that their evening encamp- 
 ments resounded with the prayers and hymns 
 of devout assemblies, engaged in the worship 
 of God ; and the streams which they crossed 
 were sometimes consecrated by the holy rite 
 of Christian baptism. 
 
 In this manner were the Cherokees removed 
 to their present home in the Indian Territory. 
 The missionaries went with them in their long 
 and wearisome journey, and did all in their 
 power to alleviate their sufferings, and breathe 
 into them the spirit of cheerful Christian resig- 
 nation. The interests of the mission, though 
 they had suffered a serious shock in the changes 
 which had befallen the nation, yet soon revived 
 on the arrival of the Cherokees in their new 
 home, and in a little time its labors again were 
 prosecuted with their wonted regularity. At 
 the close of 1839, Mr. Jones returned to 
 the States, and visited the managers at Boston. 
 In the course of his visit, he narrated in the 
 cities of the east the sufferings of the Chero- 
 k(^es, and the spirit with which they had 
 endured them, and made the public more fully 
 acquainted with the progress they had made 
 in the knoAvledge of the Gospel, and the arts of 
 civilized life. His narratives awakened new in- 
 terest in the prosperity of the mission, and on 
 
(»0 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 Ub return in 1841, he resumed his labors with 
 Bew seal and ciicoura^oment. He found that 
 during the eighteen months of his absence, 
 
 rirds of two hundred had been added to 
 churches — a number which was soon 
 increased by the baptism of nearly 100 more. 
 The wilderness was blooming with the industry 
 and care of the people, and the Cherokees 
 became pioneers and exemplars to the other 
 tribes that occupied the territory. 
 
 There were at this period within the terri- 
 tory nine missions of the Board, embracing in 
 all twenty-four missionaries and assistants, 
 and twelve native preachers. Most of them 
 were of recent origin, and some were little 
 more than government schools, placed by the 
 President of the United States under the direc- 
 tion of the Board for the benefit of the several 
 tribes among whom they were established. 
 This number of laborers was soon increased by 
 additions to the Cherokee mission, and the 
 missionaries and teachers stationed among the 
 Shawanocs, Ottowas, Putawatomies and Dela- 
 wares, were in 1841 united in a single mission, 
 the principal seat of which was at Shawanoe, 
 with a subordinate station in each of the 
 tribes. At Shawanoe there had been a press 
 since 1833, at which the Gospel of Matthew, 
 together with many Christian hymns and 
 school-books had been printed, and from which, 
 for several years, had been issued a weekly 
 newspaper, called the " Shawanoe Sun." Since 
 then other school books, and other portions of 
 the Xew Testament have been added to the 
 number. In 1842, the operations of a portion 
 of the mission were suspended for a time, in 
 consequence of the jealousy and threatened vio- 
 lence of the Indians. At about the same time 
 also, it was visited by Eev. J. S. Bacon, D. D., 
 a member of the Board, who had been appointed 
 to visit the several missions in the Indian Ter- 
 ritory. Dr. Bacon extended his observations 
 and inquiries to all the leading tribes in the 
 territory, and his report to the Board contrib- 
 uted largely to their information respecting 
 the condition of the people, the influence of 
 the missions, and the modes in which they should 
 be conducted. Since that time the labors of the 
 mission have been conducted without inter- 
 ruption, though amidst the unceasing decline 
 of the Indian race in all the tribes with which 
 it is connected — a decline which of necessity 
 spreads its shadows not only over the prospects 
 of the people, but also over the agencies that 
 are employed for their improvement. At 
 Shawanoe, Mr.' and Mrs. Barker with one na- 
 tive assistant, and, within the past two years 
 Miss Doty, a teacher, have conducted the 
 station. The church numbers thirty-one mem- 
 bers. At Delaware, the church has also thirty- 
 one members, and is under the charge of the 
 Eev. J. G. Pratt, who, with Mrs. Pratt, Miss 
 E. S. Morse, Miss E. P. Gookin, and one native 
 assistant, has also the entire charge of the 
 schools, and all the interests of the mission in 
 
 the Delaware tribe. At Ottawa, the statioi 
 is under the charge of Rev. G. Meeker, whc 
 with his wife and one native assistant, is en 
 ployed among the Ottawa people. The churc' 
 here numbers forty members. Around eac 
 of the stations, the natives are making grat: 
 fying progress in morals and the arts of civi 
 ized life. The members of the churche 
 maintain an exemplary Christian charactei 
 and for some years past have made considers 
 ble contributions for the support of the mis 
 sion. Each year, also, witnesses additions t 
 their numbers, and an increase of intelligenc 
 among the children of the schools. 
 
 The only other mission of the Union now re 
 maining in the Indian territory is that amonj 
 the Cherokees — a mission which from its con 
 mencement, while the Cherokee nation wer 
 still in the State of Georgia, has been signall 
 blessed of heaven, and has been productive c 
 the most gratifying results in the civilizatioi 
 and religious improvement of the people. It 
 principal seat is at Cherokee, which is thre 
 miles west of the boundary of Arkansas, an< 
 its operations are extended over a district oc 
 oupied by the tribe, of forty miles in extent t- 
 the west, the south, and the north. Since 184i 
 the mission has been furnished with a pres 
 and printing establishment, which until rt 
 cently was under the care of Mr. H. Uphan 
 a printer by trade, who retired from the sei 
 vice of the Board in 1851. In addition t 
 Rev. E. Jones, the faithful friend of the native 
 who has remained with them through all thei 
 disasters, the mission was strengthened in 184; 
 by the arrival of Rev. W. P. Upham, and thes 
 two are now its only managers. They have 
 however, employed at different periods a num 
 ber of intelligent and educated Cherokees a 
 assistants and coadjutors in their labors, an( 
 these have in most instances proved themseive 
 eflBcient and faithful in carrying forward th( 
 work of the Gospel. The translation of th( 
 New Testament was completed by Mr. Jonei 
 in 1847, and some books of the Old Testamen 
 have been translated by other members of th( 
 mission. School books have been prepared ii 
 large numbers, and the Pilgrim's Progress hai 
 been translated and extensively circulatee 
 among the people of the nation, everywher< 
 awakening the deepest interest, and producing 
 the most beneficial results. In 1844 Mr. Up 
 ham established the " Cherokee Messenger," i 
 periodical which has been continued by mem 
 bers of the mission, or by natives of the tribe 
 The people have occasionally been distractec 
 by civil feuds, — some of them having their ori- 
 gin in questions and events connected witl 
 their removal from Georgia — which have some- 
 times affected the interests of the mission, bul 
 its course has been one of unusual prosperity, and 
 its agencies have conferred inestimable benefits 
 on the Cherokee nation. The national council 
 has adopted a liberal policy in the administra- 
 tion of its public affairs, and its enactments 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 591 
 
 and decrees have for a considerable period 
 been such as become a civilized and Christian 
 people. Its school system is in advance of 
 those of some of the neighboring States, 
 / and the schools of the mission are no longer 
 j needed, except for religious instruction. The 
 churches which, on the migration of the 
 /Cherokees in 1839, contained 500 members, 
 Jin 1849 numbered upwards of 1200. They 
 very nearly support the institutions of the Gos- 
 pel by their own contributions, and have often 
 sent liberal sums to the treasury of the Mission- 
 ary Union. In 1854 their contributions to this 
 treasury amounted to $409, and it is believed 
 that were the missionaries now withdrawn, the 
 churches would still go on in maintaining the 
 faith of the Gospel, and spreading it more 
 widely among the people. The mission is now 
 established at five stations, Cherokee, Dela- 
 ware Town, Dsiyohee, Taquohee, and Flint, 
 and at eight out-stations. Its missionaries are 
 Rev. Messrs. E. Jones and W. P. Upham, who 
 v/ith their families reside at Cherokee, while 
 the native assistants are distributed among the 
 other stations or out-stations of the mission. 
 
 The only mission of the Union now remain- 
 ing among the Indians east of the Mississippi, 
 is that among the Ojibwas, near Lake Supe- 
 rior. Its origin and early progress have al- 
 ready been narrated. It has from the begin- 
 ning been under the charge of Eev. Abel 
 Bingham, assisted for many years past by Rev. 
 G. D. Cameron, Its stations still continue to be, 
 as they have long been, at Sault de Ste. Marie 
 and Tikuamina bay, with an out-station at 
 Michipicoton, in Upper Canada. A flourish- 
 ing school is maintained at Tikuamina bay, 
 which contains, by the latest reports, sixty- 
 nine pupils, and the church numbers twenty- 
 one members. The Ojibwa tribe, however, is 
 constantly diminishing in numbers, and must 
 soon either be removed to the western terri- 
 tory, or be merged in the tide of popula^on 
 that is advancing from the east, and a few 
 more years must terminate the existence of 
 the mission. And even in the Indian terri- 
 tory itself— the domain which the government 
 solemnly set apart as the perpetual home of 
 these ancient masters of the whole land — the 
 horizon of the future is shutting darkly and 
 gloomily upon the fortunes of the Indian race. 
 Already have the guarantees to which they 
 trusted been set aside, and the titles which 
 they fondly thought would be valid for ever, 
 are about to be extinguished by the legislation 
 of Congress, and the lands for which they 
 abandoned their ancient seats in the States of 
 the East are about to be merged in the terri- 
 tories of Nebraska and Kansas, to which the 
 tide of emigration is rapidly rolling. The des- 
 tiny of this once powerful race is one of the sad- 
 dest in the annals of mankind, and happy will 
 it be, if, before their final extinction, they shall 
 find in the Gospel of the Son of God a solace 
 and a balm for all the mighty wrongs which 
 
 they have been forced to endure at the hands 
 of the American people. 
 
 Statistics of Indian Missions for 1854. 
 Ojibwa Mmion.-~2 stations, 2 out-stations, 
 
 2 missionaries, 1 female assistant, 1 native 
 assistant, 1 church, 21 members ; 1 boarding- 
 school, 6 pupils ; 2 day-schools, 74 pupils ; 
 total, 3 schools, 80 pupils. 
 
 Shawonoe Mission.~3 stations, 3 mission- 
 aries, 5 female assistants, 2 native assistants, 
 
 3 churches, 100 members ; 2 boarding-schools, 
 45 pupils. 
 
 Cherokee Mission.— fi stations, 8 out-stations, ^^ 
 2 missionaries, 2 female assistants, 6 native 
 assistants, 10 churches, 1,250 members; 1 
 boarding-school, 85 pupils. 
 
 Total— 3 missions, 10 stations, 10 out-sta- 
 tions, 7 missionaries, 8 female assistants, 9 
 native preachers and assistants, 14 churches, 
 1,371 church-members, 4 boarding-schools, 136 
 pupils; 2 day-schools, 74 pupils; total 6 
 schools, and 210 pupils.— Prof. W. Gammell. 
 
 Missionary Society of the Methodist 
 Episcop.\l Church. — This Society was led by 
 a very peculiar providence to undertake the 
 missionary work among the Indians. JoJm 
 Steward, a free colored man, who was born and 
 bred in JPowhattan county, Va., was converted, 
 and became a member of the Methodist Episco- 
 pal Church. Though of slender education, jet 
 he became deeply impressed with a conviction 
 that it was his duty to call sinners to repent- 
 ance ; and, at the same time, his mind appear- 
 ed to be drawn somewhere in a north-west 
 direction, he hardly knew where, among a 
 people to whom he was a stranger. So strong 
 were his convictions on this subject, that, 
 though unauthorized by any body of Chris- 
 tians, he arose, forsook all, and went alone and 
 unprotected; crossed the Muskingum river, 
 directing his way sometimes through a wilder- 
 ness without any road ; nor did he suffer him- 
 self to be diverted from his purpose, though 
 many with whom he fell in company by the 
 way endeavored to dissuade him from it, until 
 he arrived at Pipe Town, on Sandusky river, 
 where a tribe of the Delaivare Indians resided. 
 
 He was conducted to one of the Indian 
 cabins, and seated. Finding, however, that they 
 understood but little of his language, he could 
 attract but little attention by his conversation. 
 They were moreover preparing for one of their 
 dances, and did not like to be diverted from it 
 by the arrival of a stranger, but commenced 
 their barbarous exercises with such energy and 
 violence, that poor Steward thought they were 
 about to kill him. Finding, however, Uiat his 
 fears were groundless, as soon as they desisted 
 from their dance, he pulled out his hymn-book 
 and commenced singing. Profound silence 
 reigned in the assembly while Steward pro- 
 ceeded with the hymn. And when lie ceased, 
 one said, in English, " Sing more." He com- 
 plied, and then asked if they could furnish 
 
592 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 him \fith an intoriiretcr ; when an old Dela- 
 ware, named Lyons, was produced, and Stew- 
 ard delivered to them a discourse on the sub- 
 ject of religion, to which they listened with 
 attention ; and, at the close of it, they pre- 
 pared lor their guest an entertainment, after 
 which, he rctircKl to rest. 
 
 Thinking he had discharged his duty here, 
 it was his intention to visit some friends in 
 Tennessee. In the morning the people wished 
 him to remain another day ; but a secret im- 
 pulse seemed to urge him to proceed still fur- 
 ther to the north-west ; and so, disregarding 
 his own inclinations to visit his friends, and 
 the solicitations of the people, he traveled on 
 to the house of the United States sub-agent of 
 Indian Affairs, at Upper Sandusky. 
 
 At first suspecting Steward to be a runaway 
 slave, Mr. Walker questioned him very closely. 
 But Steward related to him his first experience 
 of the grace of God, his subsequent impres- 
 sions, and the way in which he had performed 
 his journey and come among them. Tlie art- 
 less and unaffected manner in which he nar- 
 rated the dealings of God with him, soon re- 
 moved the scruples from Walker's mind, and 
 he gave him encouragement, directed him to 
 the house of Jonathan Pointer, a colored man, 
 who had been taken prisoner in his youth by 
 the Wyandots, and who had learned to speak 
 their language with ease and fluency. When 
 Jonathan learned the object of Steward's visit, 
 he endeavored to dissuade him from his enter- 
 prise, telling him he need not attempt to do 
 that which many great and learned men had 
 failed in accomplishing before him ; Steward, 
 however, would not be diverted from his pur- 
 pose without a thorough trial, and the same 
 day, with the reluctant consent of Jonathan, 
 he attended a feast with him. A large num- 
 ber of Indians were assembled, and the feast and 
 dance were conducted as usual, with great mirth 
 and hilarity. Permission being granted at the 
 close of the amusements, Steward, by the aid 
 of Jonathan, as interpreter, delivered a dis- 
 course on the subject of Christianity ; dwell- 
 ing principally on its experimental effects upon 
 the heart and life. They listened with pro- 
 found attention, and then gave them their 
 hand in. token of hosintality to a stranger. 
 He made an appointment for a meeting the 
 next day, at the house of Jonathan, but how 
 surprised and disappointed was he to find, in- 
 stead of a large assembly, only one old woman. 
 Kot disheartened, however, at this, Steward 
 imitating the conduct of his Master at Ja- 
 cob's well, preached the Gospel as faithfully as 
 if ther« had been hundreds present to hear 
 him. The next day his congregation was in- 
 creased by the addition of one old man, and 
 these two soon became converts. 
 
 The next day being Sabbath, 8 or 10 assem- 
 bled in the council-house, who seemed much 
 affected under his sermon, and a work of grace 
 commenced, which terminated in the conver- 
 
 sion of many. This was in the month of No- 
 vember, 1816. Steward continued his labors, 
 visiting the families from cabin to cabin, talk- 
 ing, singing, and praying with them, and 
 preaching to them on the Sabbaths, in the 
 council-house. Very s6on large crowds flock- 
 ed to the meetings, and such was the deep con- 
 cern manifested, that for a season they almost 
 entirely neglected their secular affairs. This 
 gave occasion for the mercenary traders re- 
 siding among them to speak reproachfully of 
 Steward, and accuse him of being instru- 
 mental of starving the Indians, by preventing 
 them from hunting. But it was very manifest 
 that the true reason of their opposition was, 
 that "their craft was in danger." Yet, al- 
 though they threatened him with imprison- 
 ment, he persisted in his preaching. One of 
 his greatest difficulties was with his interpre- 
 ter. Being unaffected with the truth, though 
 he interpreted faithfully whatever Steward 
 delivered, he would often add, " so he says ; 
 but I do not know whether it is so or not, nor 
 do I care ; all my mind is to interpret faith- 
 fully what he says. You must not think that 
 I care whether you believe it or not." The 
 word, however, took effect, and at length 
 Jonathan himself, wicked and thoughtless as 
 he had been, yielded to the power of truth, 
 and was afterwards apparently hearty in the 
 work. 
 
 The greater part of the Wyandots had been 
 under tlie instruction of some Roman Catholic 
 missionaries ; they had embraced the Eomaii 
 Catholic religion, and had become attached ta~ 
 its superstitions and unscriptural ceremonies, 
 without any visible reformation of manners, or 
 any saving influence of Divine grace upon 
 their hearts. These things added to the diffi- 
 culties with which Steward had to contend. 
 While the heathen party were offended at 
 having the religion of their fathers called in 
 que^ion, those who had become attached to 
 the idle ceremonies of the Church of Home 
 felt themselves abused by being told that the 
 worship paid to the Virgin Mary and to saints 
 and angels was rank idolatry. Truth, however, 
 triumphed over all opposition, and gained the 
 ascendancy in the hearts of some of these 
 savages. 
 
 The following circumstance contributed 
 not a little in its results, to confirm the wav- 
 ering faith of such as doubted of Steward's 
 sincerity, as well as to confound many of his 
 open enemies : — When he so boldly denounced 
 the peculiarities of the Church of Rome, and 
 taught doctrines so different from what they 
 had been taught by the Romish priests, they 
 concluded that there must be a discrepancy 
 between his Bible and that used by the priests. 
 To decide this question, it was by mutual 
 agreement submitted to Mr. Walker, the sub- 
 agent. He accordingly appointed a day for the 
 examination. Steward and the chiefs appear- 
 ed before him. Many being present of both 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 593 
 
 parties, and all deeply interested in the issue, 
 a profound silence reigned in the assembly. 
 Mr. Walker carefully examined the Bible and 
 hymn book used by Steward, while all eyes 
 ■were fixed upon him. The Christian party 
 gazing with intense interest, hoping for a re- 
 suit favorable to their desires, and the others 
 no less anxious to be confirmed in their op- 
 position to Steward and his party. At length 
 the examination closed. Mr. Walker inform- 
 ed the assembly that the only difference be- 
 tween the Bible used by Steward and the one 
 used by the Koraan priests was, that the 
 former was in the English language, and the 
 latter was in the Latin ; and 'as to the hymn- 
 book, he informed them that the hymns it 
 contained were all good, the subjects having 
 been taken from the Bible, and that they 
 breathed the spirit of religion. His decision 
 therefore was, that the Bible was genuine, 
 and the hymns good. On hearing this deci- 
 sion, the countenances of the Christian party 
 instantly lighted up with joy, and their very 
 souls exulted in God their Saviour, while the 
 opposers stood abashed. During the whole 
 transaction Steward sat calm and tranquil, 
 fixing his eye upon the assembly with an af- 
 fectionate regard, as if fully conscious that 
 truth and innocence would triumph. 
 
 Being foiled in this unrighteous attempt to 
 interrupt the progress of the work of reforma- 
 tion, they next objected to Steward that he 
 had no authority from any body of Christians 
 to preach. To this Mr. Walker replied by 
 asking them whether he had ever performed 
 the rite of matrimony or of baptism. Being 
 answered in the negative, he told them that 
 there was no law, either of God or man, vio- 
 lated, as any one had a right to talk about 
 religion, and try to persuade others to embrace 
 it. He then dismissed the assembly, who 
 " had great reasoning among themselves con- 
 cerning these things." Steward, however, was 
 permitted to prosecute his labors with but lit- 
 tle opposition for about three months, when he 
 proposed leaving them for a season, and gave 
 them a farewell discourse in the council- 
 house, when such was their attachment to 
 him, there was a universal weeping. Promis- 
 ing to return to them " when the corn should 
 shoot," he made a journey to Marietta. Dur- 
 ing his absence they continued their meetings 
 for singing, prayer, and exhortation, and re- 
 ligion prospered, so that on his return at the 
 appointed time he was hailed by the Chris- 
 tian party with cordiality and great joy. 
 
 Steward, in trying to introduce Christianity, 
 had to encounter the usual difficulties with 
 these people — their idolatry, their traditional 
 customs, their belief in witches, their scatter- 
 ed and migratory condition, their wars, their 
 ignorance, and their prejudices against the 
 white man. He felt them most sensibly among 
 the Wyandots. He, however, persevered in 
 his work, and God blessed his labors. But 
 38 
 
 though a number of them had received the 
 Gospel, strong efforts were made by the Pagan 
 and Popish parties to oppose the work. Yet, 
 confiding in God and in the goodness of his 
 cause, he persevered in his labors. It was 
 some time, however, before opposition ceased. 
 Two chiefs especially, Mononcue and Bloody 
 Eyes, manifested particular opposition to the 
 Gospel. With a view to obviate the objec- 
 tions against him, for want of proper authority 
 to preach the Gospel, after laboring among 
 them for two years with considerable success, 
 assisted occasionally by a colored man from 
 Mad River Circuit, and by Moses Hinckle, Jr., 
 Steward obtained a license as a local preacher 
 at a quarterly conference held at Urbana in 
 March, 1819, and was appointed a missionary 
 to Upper Sandusky. His excessive labors, 
 together with the numerous privations he was 
 called to suffer, with his fastings and watch- 
 ings, had in the year 1821 induced various 
 afflictions of body, and no doubt laid the foun- 
 dation of his premature death. With a view 
 to afford him aid in his work, several local 
 preachers volunteered their services, and were 
 instrumental of much good. At the Ohio 
 Conference, held in Cincinnati, August 7, 1819, 
 the Eev. James B. Finley was appointed to 
 the Lebanon District, which included the San- 
 dusky mission, of which he took the over- 
 sight. 
 
 On the 13th and 14th of November, at a 
 quarterly meeting held for the Mad Eiver Cir- 
 cuit, 42 miles from Upper Sandusky, about 60 
 of the natives, among whom were four of the 
 chiefs, JBetween-the-logs, Mononcue, Hicks, and 
 Scuteash, attended with their families, together 
 with two interpreters, Jonathan Pointer and 
 Armstrong, both of whom were happy in the 
 love of God. It seems notwithstanding the 
 former opposition of two of these chiefs to the 
 Gospel of Jesus Christ, that through the pa- 
 tient and indefatigable labors of Steward and 
 those who assisted him in the work, they had 
 yielded to the power of truth and grace, and 
 were now heartily engaged in building up the 
 good cause. Between-the-logs was one of the 
 chief councilors of the nation — a man of strong 
 powers of mind, and of great eloquence and 
 influence. Mononcue was grave, dignified, de- 
 liberate in counsel, with a charming voice, and 
 a commanding eloquence. The others, though 
 somewhat inferior to these, were much respect- 
 ed by their people and compeei-s. The con- 
 version of such men to the Christian cause 
 could not but have a most happy influence in 
 favor of the mission. 
 
 The mission was continued as a regular ap- 
 pointment, and increased in prosperity ; many 
 of the chiefs embraced religion ; several of 
 them subsequently became preachers, and la- 
 bored with great zeal and success among their 
 brethren. A mission-school was established 
 in the Wyandot Ecserve, mainly supported by 
 the general government, which in its treaty 
 
594 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 with the tribe reserved a certain portion of 
 •4aDd for this purpose. 
 
 Some time during the war 1820, reports 
 had reached a portion of the Wyandot tribe who 
 were living near Fort Maiden, iu Canada, of the 
 great change wrought among their brethren in 
 Sandusky. They were visited by two native 
 preachers, who made known to them, " in their 
 own tongue, the wonderful work of God." 
 Several were converted, and a mission was 
 subsequently established among them. The 
 labors of John Sunday,, a converted native, 
 were of great service in this good work. The 
 missions in Canada, however, were all conveyed 
 to the Canada Conference in 1828. 
 
 In 1826, being a period of about ten years 
 after the commencqpient of the mission, 303 
 had become members of the church. In the 
 mission school there were 77 scholars acquiring 
 a knowledge of the English language, and 
 being instructed in the useful arts. In 1830, 
 a branch was added to this mission, composed 
 of Wmndots and Shawnecs, on the Huron 
 river, in Michigan, and continued to prosper 
 for several years. An interesting revival of 
 religion was enjoyed by the Wyandots during 
 the fall of 1837, and many were added to the 
 church. From this time to the period when 
 the Wyandot nation determined to sell their 
 lands to the general government, and remove 
 beyond the Mississippi, nothing occurred of 
 any special interest. Preachers were regularly 
 sent, and mission schools were sustained. By 
 the treaty, all the missionary improvements 
 which had been made were appraised and paid 
 for by the government, the avails of which 
 were to go into the treasury of the Missionary 
 Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church. 
 They accordingly removed to their new home 
 in the west, many of them carrying their 
 religion with them. After the separation of 
 the southern conferences from the Methodist 
 Episcopal Church, and the organization of a 
 separate and distinct ecclesiastical connection, 
 the Wyandots falling within the range of that 
 jurisdiction, they were supplied with preachers 
 by the Church South. 
 
 The next mission was established in 1822, 
 among the Creek Indians, entitled the Asbury 
 mission. This tribe resided in the bounds of 
 the States of Alabama and Georgia. Another 
 mission was commenced among the Mohawks 
 on Grand river. Upper Canada, who occupied 
 a reservation of land, 60 miles in length and 
 12 in breadth, on each side of the river. 
 
 In 1823, an interesting revival of religion 
 eommenced under the labors of Rev. Messrs. 
 Torrey and Crawford, Methodist ministers, a 
 very interesting account of which is to be 
 found in the annual report for the year 1823. 
 A number of Mississaugas were brought into 
 the mission-house and baptized. They after- 
 wards removed to the Credit river. Several 
 Ch?ppeu'ays were also subjects of this work. 
 An interesting incident is connected with the 
 
 introduction of the Gospel among the Missis- 
 saugas. In 1801, the Rev. Joseph Sawyer 
 was holding a quarterly meeting at the house 
 of Mr. Jones. Mrs. Jones, who was a Mohawk 
 princess, presented herself for Christian bap- 
 tism, and, with her husband, united with the 
 church. Their son, an Indian youth, was at 
 the same time solemnly dedicated to the Lord 
 in baptism, and while the minister was con- 
 cluding the ceremony with a prayer, he most 
 fervently besought the Lord to make that 
 youth the first fruits of a harvest of souls 
 among that.people. The father of the youth, 
 having embraced Christianity, and being in 
 possession of two wives, he married the Mo- 
 hawk princess, renounced the mother of the 
 boy, who was a Mississauga, and turned her 
 away from his tent. The boy followed his 
 mother to the woods, and remained with the 
 Mississauga tribe in the wilderness until he 
 was twelve years of age, when he entered an 
 English school, where he made rapid progress 
 in the language, and was soon able to converse 
 fluently in English. With a ready knowledge 
 of both languages, he was made an interpre- 
 ter, became a convert to Christianity, and was 
 called to preach the Gk)spel to his countrymen. 
 His young and ardent spirit urged him to pro- 
 claim the glad tidings of salvation to his kin- 
 dred and friends. His clear and rich experi- 
 ence in the things of God, announced in strains 
 of simple eloquence, subdued and melted their 
 hearts ; and many were brought through his 
 ministrations to the foot of the cross. That 
 prayer was heard, and that mother, like Ha- 
 gar driven out into the wilderness, was not for- 
 gotten nor forsaken of God. The labors of 
 this remarkable youth were wonderfully owned 
 and blessed of God. The great change which 
 was wrought among the Mississauga Indians, 
 was followed by the most blessed results on 
 other fragments of the same tribe. An addi- 
 tional number of 22, who professed faith in 
 Christ, and were baptized in the year 1826, 
 were formed into a class at Bellville, Upper 
 Canada. Their subsequent deportment gave 
 evidence of a radical change. 
 
 In 1827, a new mission was commenced 
 among another branch of the Mississaugas, 
 residing on Snake and Yellow Head Islands, in 
 Upper Canada. They spoke the Chippeway 
 language, and were about 600 in number. A. 
 Sabbath-school was established among them ; 
 they were supplied with a missionary ; and so 
 successful was the mission that in 1829 there 
 were 350 that had renounced heathenism, and 
 become members of the church, and 100 of 
 their children were regularly taught in the 
 schools. 
 
 In the year 1822, a mission was commenced 
 by the Methodist Episcopal Church among the 
 Cherokee Indians, who inhabited a tract of 
 country included in the States of Georgia and 
 North Carolina on the east, Alabama on the 
 west, and that part of Tennessee south of He* 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 595 
 
 wasse and Tennessee rivers, comprising ten 
 millions of acres. The work of God among 
 tlie Cherokees was so great that in 1828 the 
 number of converts had increased to 800 ; and 
 the number of missionaries employed was in- 
 creased to seven. The white missionaries were 
 greatly assisted by the services of a young con- 
 verted Cherokee, who acted as interpreter. In 
 1832, the Cherokees were removed beyond the 
 Mississippi ; and the faithful, self-denying mis- 
 sionaries accompanied them to their distant 
 home. In 1846, this Indian mission was em- 
 braced in the limits of the Church South. In 
 1825, the Mississippi Conference established a 
 mission among the Cherokees, under the su- 
 perintendence of the Eev. William Winans ; 
 and the Rev. Wiley Ledbetter was appointed 
 the missionary. For three years this mission 
 gave but little promise, and fears were enter- 
 tained that it would be necessary to abandon 
 it altogether ; but just at the darkest period of 
 its history the star of hope and promise arose. 
 A camp-meeting was held in the month of 
 August, 1828, and the Lord poured out his 
 Spirit, and his work revived ; and multitudes, 
 among whom were four captains, were con- 
 verted and joined the church. At another 
 camp-meeting, held a few months afterward, a 
 great number of Indians united with the 
 church. From this time the work progressed, 
 till, in the year 1830, the number reported as 
 in communion with the church, was 4,000. 
 All the principal men of the nation, chiefs and 
 captains, were members of the church. Three 
 missionaries, three interpreters, and three school 
 teachers were connected with the mission. 
 
 /A proposition made by the general govern- 
 ment to the Choctaws, in regard to their re- 
 moval west of the Mississippi, cast a gloom 
 over the mission about this period. In the 
 midst of great division of sentiment and con- 
 flict of feeling, at a council, held in the month 
 of March, the nation succeeded in obtaining a 
 majority of votes to sell the land, and accord- 
 ingly made arrangements for removal. The 
 Rev. Mr. Tally accompanied the emigrants to 
 their new and"^ distant home, in the vicinity of 
 the Rocky Mountains. In 1831, 500 had ar- 
 rived at the Choctaw mission west, most of 
 whom were members of the church. The re- 
 movals became so extensive that the old mis- 
 sion east was nearly broken up. In 1836, 
 there were reported 960 members, an English 
 school, and ten Sabbath-schools, taught by na- 
 tive teachers in the Choctaw language, con- 
 taining 373 scholars. There were two white 
 missionaries, five native preachers, three ex- 
 horters, twenty class leaders, and five stewards. 
 I At the general council of the natives an act 
 * was passed, providing for the establishment of 
 seven literary institutions within their national 
 limits. Two of these. Fort Coffee Academy and 
 Nunnawaya Acaderny, w^ere placed under the 
 supervision of the Methodist Church, with an 
 annual appropriation to the former of $6,000, 
 
 and to the latter of $6,500. The Rev. William 
 II. Goodc was appointed to take charge of 
 Fort Coffee Academy, and the Rev. Wesley 
 Browning of the Nunnawaya Academy. The 
 Indian Mission Conference having been formed, 
 the Choctaw mission was embraced as one of 
 its districts. The Choctaw mission, by the 
 plan of separation, passed into the jurisdiction 
 of the Church South in 1846. 
 
 A mission was established among the Pvta- 
 watomies, a small tribe in the vicinity of Fort 
 Clark, on Fox river, in the year 1823. The 
 Rev. Jesse Walker was appointed missionary, 
 and a school was established. In 1837, up- 
 wards of one hundred Putawatomies were con- 
 verted, and joined the church among the Kick- 
 apoos. 
 
 In 1829 the Oneida mission commenced. A 
 young Mohawk, who had been converted in 
 Upper Canada, prompted by a love for souls, 
 came amoog them, and in a short time, 100 
 made a profession of faith in the Redeemer. 
 Through the influence of the Oneida Chris- 
 tians, a work of grace was commenced among 
 the Onondagas, a neighboring tribe, twenty- 
 four of whom were converted, and became 
 members of the church. The Oneida mission, 
 in 1835, was reported as enjoying a state of 
 prosperity, having been blessed with a revival. 
 This mission extended its labors among the 
 Menominee and Kewawenon Indians, and was 
 successful in establishing churches and schools 
 among them. The whole number of church 
 members, — including the mission above speci- 
 fied, and those in the Green Bay district, — 
 amounted to 788. The number of mission- 
 aries was 15. There were 9 week-day schools, 
 with 9 superintendents ; 23 teachers, 267 schol- 
 ars, and 280 volumes in the library. These 
 missions have continued to prosper, down to 
 the present time. 
 
 In 1830, an effort was made by the Missouri 
 Conference to introduce the Gospel among the 
 Shawnee and Kansas Indians. In 1841, the 
 mission reported 130 members, and was repre- 
 sented as prosperous. These missions also 
 passed under the supervision of the Methodist 
 Episcopal Church South. 
 
 In 1830, a mission was established among 
 the Iroquois, including the tribe of the KicJca- 
 poos within the bounds of the Illinois Confer- 
 ence. A prophet had risen up among them, 
 who acknowledged the true God, and was zeal- 
 ously engaged in instructing the people in 
 religion. His religious notions were mixed up 
 with much that was superstitious. He, how- 
 ever, afterwards embraced Christianity, and 
 became useful among his brethren in promot- 
 ing their temporal and spiritual welfare. In 
 1834, the Kickapoo mission was reported to 
 have 230 members, and a school consisting of 
 24 native children. 
 
 The Peoria mission was organized in 1833, 
 and 40 natives were received into the church. 
 The report for 1835 states that the missioa 
 
596 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 had doublctl its numbers, and the mission 
 school wiw pros|>erin«^. 
 
 A missit)ii was established among the Sioux, 
 Winjickii^s, and Chippewai/s, by the Kev. 
 Alfml IJronson, who, in 1834, went out on an 
 exphirin;? tour through the regions bordering 
 on the Mississippi. The same year, the South 
 Indian missionary district, in the Arkansas 
 Conference, Koon Town, Oothcalooga, and 
 Valley Town, were visited with a powerful re- 
 vival, and 120 natives were added to the 
 church. 
 
 In 1845, the following statement was given 
 of the numbers of church members in the va- 
 rious districts included in the Indian Confer- 
 ence : 
 
 Kansas River District 700 
 
 Cherokee District 2,057 
 
 Choctaw " 800 
 
 Rock River Conference .... 130 
 
 Michigan Conference 338 
 
 Oneida " 90 
 
 Holston " 109 
 
 Mississippi " 115 
 
 Total 4,339 
 
 The most of these Indian missions having 
 fallen within the jurisdiction of the Church 
 South, in 1847 there were but nine Indian 
 missions, 15 missionaries, and 778 church 
 members left to the Methodist E. Church. 
 In connection with these missions, there were 
 nine week-day schools, embracing 200 pupils ; 
 8 Sabbath-schools, 9 superintendents, 23 teach- 
 ers, 267 scholars, and 287 volumes in the 
 library. 
 
 Missionary Society of the Methodist E. 
 Church South. — Full three-fourths of all the 
 Indian missions of the Methodist E. Church, 
 lay within the jurisdictional limits of the 
 Church South, at the time when the Church 
 was divided in 1844. The Kansas, Cherokees, 
 Choctaws and some others falling over to the 
 Church South, the Oneidas, Onondagas, Ojib- 
 was, and others remaining with the Methodist 
 E. Church. During the past year, a portion 
 of the Cherokee mission has again come under 
 the supervision of the Methodist E. Church 
 The Church South having taken up her share 
 of the Indian missions, has pursued her duty 
 to these sons of the forest with a commenda- 
 ble zeal. In 1848, encouraged by the liberal 
 assistance of the U. S. Government, the Board 
 of missions of the Church South, greatly en- 
 larged the means of education through their 
 Indian missions ; and thej^ were privileged to 
 see a growing prosperity in all departments of 
 this portion of their labors. Last year the 
 Rev. J. C. Robinson, Superintendent of the 
 Chickasaw ]Manual Labor Academy, paid a 
 visit to the Caddoes, and tried to introduce the 
 Gospel among this remnant of their nation. 
 The work of this church among the Indians, 
 
 constitutes a regular Conference, with the ex- 
 ception of the Echota mission, which is within 
 the bounds of the Holston Conference. Their 
 work among these people bears a very com- 
 pact aspect, and seems formed on a model 
 which ought to work well. They have a regular 
 Conference, several of the members of which 
 are Indians ; and a Missionary Society, with 
 male and female seminaries, and many day 
 and Sunday-schools in vigorous and very suc- 
 cessful operation. God has given them some 
 noble specimens of living Christianity among 
 these people, 'and every provision seems to be 
 made for a wide diffusion of the Gospel among 
 them, and the tribes which lie adjacent to the 
 scAes of those missions. 
 
 The Kansas District was detached from the 
 "Indian Mission Conference," by the General 
 Conference of the Church South in 1850, and 
 was attached to the St, Louis Annual Confer- 
 ence. The Kansas district now embraces the 
 Shawnee, Delaware, Wyandot and Kickapoo 
 missions, and also the Fort Leavenworth Man- 
 ual Labor, and the Kansas schools. This dis- 
 trict is under the superintendence of the Rev. 
 J. T. Peery. There are six missions within 
 the bounds of this district, with 263 members, 
 and 405 children in the schools, and 135 pupils 
 in the two seminaries. The Echota mission 
 is situated among the North Carolina Chero- 
 kees, in the north-western corner of that State. 
 The Holston Conference established missions 
 among this people ; and although there is but 
 one missionary (Rev. Ulrich Keener,) laboring 
 among them, yet such has been the divine 
 blessing upon this one agent of the Board, 
 that last year he was able to report 200 mem- 
 bers of the church, 60 children in the school, 
 five or six conversions, and 22 admitted on 
 trial. 
 
 The Indian Mission Conference in the " far 
 west," embraces the larger portion of the 
 Indian missions of this church. This Confer- 
 ence is situated in the Indian Territory, in lat. 
 340 N., and long. 97° W. We believe the 
 Chickasaw station in this territory, is the most 
 distant of any of the missionary stations, until 
 we reach the Pacific coast. The seminary at 
 this place is very efficient, and boards and edu- 
 cates 120 pupils. The Indian Mission Confer- 
 ence contains three districts, the Cherokee, 
 Creek, and Choctaw. The last report of this 
 Conference with a letter from the presiding 
 bishop, will give the reader a good general 
 impression of this most interesting field of 
 missionary labor. The report states that 
 general good health has prevailed through 
 the mission during the year 1853, and then 
 gives a view of the religious condition of the 
 different districts. The Cherokee district has 
 five circuits, with five white, and seven native 
 preachers. The number of church members is 
 1,518 ; showing an increase from the last year 
 of 130. 
 
 Christianity has made, and is still making a 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 59T 
 
 powerful impression upon the Cherokee people. 
 About thirty years since, Richard Neatly, the 
 first Methodist missionary sent to the Chero- 
 kees, entered upon this work ; since then, thou- 
 sands of precious souls have been " translated 
 from the power of darkness into the kingdom 
 of God's dear Son ;" and while hundreds of 
 these have died and are now in heaven, others 
 are being converted, and ministers have been 
 raised up, who " count not their lives dear 
 unto themselves," and are preaching the Gos- 
 pel " with the Holy Ghost sent down from 
 Heaven." The Creek district comprises five 
 circuits and one school. There have been, dur- 
 ing the past year, five white, and four native 
 missionaries. They number 728 church mem- 
 bers, showing an increase of 100 over the past 
 year. A great and effectual door is now open 
 in this nation, and almost every town and 
 neighborhood are inviting the missionaries to 
 enter and preach to them " the unsearchable 
 riches of Christ." The Choctaw district con- 
 tains five circuits and seven academies. There 
 are eight white and six native preachers. 
 Number in society 1,533 ; making an increase 
 over last year of 166. This work is now in 
 good condition, and bids fair to yield a rich 
 harvest of immortal souls. 
 
 The late Chickasaw Council made an ap- 
 propriation of $1,000 for the purpose of ex- 
 tending the buildings of the Bloomfield Acade- 
 my, in the Chickasaw nation, so as to accom- 
 modate 45 scholars. 
 
 We add some interesting extracts from a 
 letter of Bishop Andrew, who presided at the 
 Jast session of the Indian Mission Conference : 
 " Yan Buren, Ark., Nov. 5, 1853. 
 
 " Dear Brother — I bought a little carriage 
 and a pair of ponies in St. Louis, shipped 
 them up the river, and at the close of the Mis- 
 souri Conference, started for the Creek agency, 
 the seat of the Indian Conference. A heavy 
 ride of about 450 miles brought me to that 
 place the evening before the Conference be- 
 gan. The agency is located 12 miles beyond 
 Fort Gibson, not far from the Arkansas river. 
 The situation is handsome, commanding an 
 extensive prairie view. The weather is good, 
 and the site I should judge a healthy one. 
 ' Colonel Garrett, the United States agent, we 
 found a gentlemanly man, who seems disposed 
 to do all in his power to promote the improve- 
 ment and happiness of the Indians ; and I am 
 glad to record that he seems to be quite popu- 
 lar with both Indians and whites. The Creeks 
 are steadily improving, and manifest great in- 
 terest in having their children educated. 
 
 " The schools in the Indian Conference are, 
 I think, with a slight exception, doing well. 
 We greatly need some dozen good zealous 
 preachers — white men — to travel in this Con- 
 ference. We have a number of good native 
 brethren, and might have more ; but these, 
 though valuable assistants, yet, with some few- 
 exceptions, are not well prepared to govern 
 
 the church, and very few Indians have the 
 energy and enterprise necessary for the work 
 of church extension. The Indians themselves 
 greatly prefer white men to teach them, and 
 there are many neighborhoods, and they are 
 constantly increasing, in which the people all 
 understand English, and prefer to hear preach- 
 ing in English. This process must steadily 
 progress, until that language is spoken univer- 
 sally, and the sooner the result is accomplished 
 the better ; for never till then will the Indiana 
 be generally enlightened, converted, and pros- 
 perous. Meanwhile, for the sake of the old 
 people, translations of the Scriptures and ele- 
 mentary works in the native dialects will be 
 important. But our grand aim is, to lead the 
 young into an entire abandonnient of the lan- 
 guage, and whatever is distinctly Indian ; for 
 after all the sentimentalism of poets and tour- 
 ists, there is very little which belongs to the 
 original 
 taining. 
 
 " The Conference closed on Tuesday even- 
 ing, and on Wednesday, in company with Bro- 
 thers iMcAlister and Harrell, I left on my way 
 to Tulip, the seat of the Arkansas Conference.. 
 I visited, on the way, the interesting Choctaw 
 schools at Fort Coffee and New Hope, num-j 
 bering about 50 each. They seem to be doing 
 well. I preached here last night, aHd to-mor- 
 row expect, God willing, to dedicate our new 
 church at Fort Smith, and then away for Tu- 
 lip. Yours, very affectionately, 
 
 " James 0. Andrew." 
 
 Exclusive of the lately established mission 
 among the Cherokees in Arkansas, the follow- 
 ing are the best statistics we can find of the 
 Indian missions of the Methodist Episcopal 
 Church : 
 
 CONFERENCES. 
 
 Missouri 
 
 Wisconsin 
 
 Black River 
 
 Oneula — Oneidas 
 
 " Ononda^jas 
 
 Michigan — Notoway Indians . . 
 " Kazicr Mission 
 
 " Janesville " 
 
 " Saut St. Marie " 
 
 " Kewawenon " 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 
 tc 
 
 
 ■c 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?• 
 
 ■ir 
 
 
 •g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 144 
 
 60 
 
 
 1 
 
 las 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2P 
 
 11 
 
 
 1 
 
 25 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 44 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 176 
 
 50 
 
 
 1 
 
 205 
 
 6 
 
 
 2 
 
 183 
 
 15 
 
 
 2 
 
 60 
 
 12 
 
 
 1 
 
 47 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 17 
 
 1051 
 
 176 
 
 l§ 
 
 The Church South have 30 missions among 
 the Indians, 28 missionaries, 4,232 members, 
 35 churches, 34 Sabbath-schools, 1,394 schol- 
 ars. 9 manual labor schools, and 4S0 pupils. 
 
 Total for both churches— 44 missions, 46 
 missionaries, 5,359 members, and 1 ,884 schol- 
 ars. — Authorities: Bangs and Strickland's 
 Histories of the Missions of the Methodist Epis- 
 copal Church; the Missionary Advocate and 
 Annual Reports.— Bex. W. Butler. 
 
598 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 Wksletan Missionary Society.— The In- 
 dian missions in Upper Canada arose, in the 
 providence of Goci, from the labors of the 
 Aletliodist Episcopal Church among the abori- 
 gines within the United States. Some time 
 during the year 1820, reports had reached a 
 portion of the "Wyandot tribe, living near 
 Fort Maiden, in Canada, of the great change 
 which had taken place among their brethren 
 at Sandusky. Two native preachers also vis- 
 ited them, and the result was the establish- 
 ment of a mission among them. In 1832, 
 there were nine missionary stations among the 
 natives of Upper Canada, all of which were 
 reported as in a prosperous state. They were 
 located at Graj>e Island, River Credit, Lake 
 Simcoe, Rice Lake, Grand River, Macdurk, 
 Munccu Town, Carnard, and Bay Quinte. In 
 each tliere was a missionary and a school 
 teacher. Mackinaw and Lcegeeng were also 
 occasionally visited by native tcac-ners. Chris- 
 tian instruction was given to 2,000 adult Indi- 
 ans, and in 11 schools there w^ere about 400 
 youth. The labors of John Sunday, an Indian 
 preacher, and of another Indian preacher, 
 refer Jones, were of great service in the estab- 
 lishment and carrying on of these missions. 
 
 In 1828, the Methodist Episcopal Church 
 entrusted these missions to the care of the 
 Canadian Conference ; and that conference, 
 in 1833,^laced them under the fostering care 
 of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. And 
 the following year, the committee in London 
 sent out Rev. J. Stinson to take the general 
 superintendency of them. He soon visited 
 each station, and was able, to transmit to the 
 committee a very encouraging report of their 
 condition. He found no less than 1,200 of 
 the native Indians, chiefly Chippeum/s, united 
 in church fellowship, and by their consistent 
 conduct, as well as by their progress in the 
 arts and enjoyments of settled and civilized 
 life, they strikingly manifested the great 
 change which had taken place among them. 
 2,000 of their children were under a course of 
 educational and Scriptural instniction. Six 
 missionaries were sent out by the Wesleyan 
 Society in 1834. And in the report some 
 time after, the following pleasing testimony is 
 rendered to the efficiency of these Christian 
 labors : " The Indian missions are eminently 
 owned of God, and furnish the most undoubted 
 evidence of the tendency of the Gospel to dif- 
 fuse the blessings of civilization, in connection 
 with those spiritual and everlasting benefits 
 which it is destined to communicate to all the 
 nations of the earth. Hundreds of these once 
 wretched wanderers have been raised from the 
 lowest state of degradation to sit together in 
 heavenly places in Christ Jesus, and are living 
 in such a state of peace and purity as affords 
 the most delightful evidence of the reality of 
 the outward and spiritual change which they 
 have experienced. It is, indeed, the Lord's 
 doings, and it is marvellous in our eyes. That 
 
 form of paganism which once enthralled them 
 has given place to Christianity ; and the In- 
 dian who spurned all human restraint and 
 control, bows his neck to the authority of 
 Christ, and meekly carries the burden which 
 the Redeemer has placed upon his shoulder. 
 A state of brutal ignorance has been broken 
 •up by the force of evangelical truth ; and 
 minds from which all that tends to elevate 
 human nature was utterly secluded, have been 
 enriched, not only with the knowledge of let- 
 ters, but with the saving knowledge of God, 
 and of his Son Jesus Christ, our Lord. Hab- 
 its of intemperance, indolence and irregular- 
 ity, have been succeeded by sobriety, industry, 
 and order. ' The songs of Zion ' are now 
 sung in those jforests where, for ages, the war- 
 cry of the savage, and the growling of wild 
 beasts, were the only sounds that were heard. 
 Instead of lodging in the wretched wigwam, 
 and depending for a scanty subsistence upon 
 their success in hunting and fishing, the con- 
 verted Indians occupy comfortable houses near 
 the River Credit, and at other stations, and 
 these are surrounded with gardens and fields, 
 which they themselves cultivate." 
 
 Exertions had been made during a period 
 of forty years, to educate and civilize the 
 Mohawk tribe of the Six Nations, established 
 on the banks of the Grand river, and some of 
 them had been taught to read and write ; 
 but, instead of any improvement having been 
 effected in their moral and social state, they 
 w^ere more vicious and degraded in their habits 
 than the neighboring heathen tribes, who were 
 entirely ignorant of letters. Yet, as soon as 
 these half-educated, but ferocious and depraved, 
 Mohawks embraced the Gospel, they became 
 the happy subjects of a change as extraordinary 
 and salutary as that which had been experi- 
 enced by their converted brethren of the 
 Chippeway, and other tribes of Indians. 
 Thus, while every attempt (and many such 
 have been tried,) to improve the condition of 
 the Indians by merely human expedients, has 
 invariably and signally failed, the " Gospel of 
 the grace of God," in the hands of mission- 
 aries, and applied by the Holy Ghost, has tri- 
 umphed among them, and " created them 
 anew in Christ Jesus unto good works." 
 
 The labors of the six missionaries sent out 
 by the Committee in 1834, were greatly owned 
 and blessed of God, and they were enabled to 
 report most pleasing statements of their suc- 
 cess. An increased attention was given to 
 education, and also to the qualifying of native 
 teachers to preach the word of life to their 
 fellow-countrymen. In 1835 a whole tribe of 
 pagan Indians had been converted at the River 
 St. Clair, an event so extraordinary and unex- 
 pected that His Excellency Sir John Colborne 
 remarked to one of the missionaries that, " after 
 the gracious effects produced by the Gospel on 
 the wretched Indians of St. Clair, there was 
 no room left to doubt that all the tribes in 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 599 
 
 British North America may be converted to 
 the faith of Christ." This excellent man, then 
 Lieutenant-Governor of Upper Canada, proved 
 himself a true friend to the Indians. He had 
 several small villages built expressly for them, 
 with comfortable houses and good gardens for 
 their occupation. Mr. Stinson, on entering 
 one of these comfortable cottages one day, was 
 met at the door by the father of the family, 
 and while the tears of gratitude ran down his 
 face, he remarked, " When I came here, nine 
 years ago, I was a poor drunken Indian. I 
 had nothing but one dirty blanket ; but now,"* 
 pointing to the various articles of furniture 
 and provision in the room, " now I have all 
 these good things that you see ; and, what is 
 best of all, I have the love of Christ in my 
 heart." 
 
 In 1836, the missions not only maintained 
 their ground, but also made considerable in- 
 roads into the territories of Satan, and pagan- 
 ism was forced to retire a considerable dis- 
 tance before the bold and rapid advances of 
 Christianity. The mission schools also were 
 in a good state, and this year some of the more 
 advanced pupils were sent to the academy at 
 Cazenovia, N. Y., there to gain that addi- 
 tional information and training which would 
 fit them to be useiiil as instructors of their 
 countrymen. 
 
 About the same period it also pleased God 
 to crown the patient labors of the native teach- 
 ers employed among the Tuscarora and Onon- 
 daga Indians with considerable success. Many 
 of these pagans had been awakened, and turned 
 to the Lord, among whom were two of their 
 principal chiefs. The Onondagas were ex- 
 ceedingly intemperate and wretched, as well as 
 strongly addicted to the worship of idols, the 
 war-dance, and other abominations, and had 
 long withstood the zealous efforts made by 
 their converted brethren to turn them from 
 the error of their ways. But among these 
 stones did God raise up children unto Abra- 
 ham. 
 
 Shahwundias, otherwise John Sunday, a 
 converted chief of the Chippeway tribe, and an 
 assistant-missionary among his people, during 
 the year 1837, made a visit to England. He 
 attended the anniversary missionary meetings 
 of some of the principal auxiliaries through 
 that kingdom, and by his artless and Scrip- 
 tural account of his conversion and Christian 
 experience, and of the progress of the Gospel 
 among the Indians, he was the means of 
 greatly increasing the zeal of the friends of 
 Indian missions. The Committee, in conduct 
 ing these missions, have been constantly tried 
 and annoyed by the selfish and wicked designs 
 of many unprincipled traders among these 
 tribes ; men who have habitually used all the 
 means in their power to deceive, pollute, and 
 rob the Indians with whom they had inter- 
 course. But in the midst of these and other 
 afflictive circumstances, our Indian brethren 
 
 have been sustained and encouraged in the 
 path of improvement. God raised them up 
 friends and protectors, who from time to time 
 warded off the evils which beset them. But, 
 about this time, a new difficulty arose, which 
 was likely to produce a most unfavorable in- 
 fluence. It was the want of a title deed of 
 their reservations. They justly feared that at 
 some future period, those small portions of ter- 
 ritory, which constitute all that remains to 
 them of the vast possessions of their fathers, 
 would be wrested from them, and that they 
 and their children would thus be deprived of 
 the fruits of their industry. The Committee 
 of the Wesleyan Missionary Society pressed 
 the matter on the attention of the Colonial 
 Department of the British Government, in 
 consequence of which, and of other representa- 
 tions on the subject from the missionaries and 
 chiefs, a dispatch was addressed by the Colo- 
 nial Secretary to the Lieutenant-Governor of 
 Upper Canada, on this subject, which was pro- 
 ductive of the best results. Yery valuable aid 
 was rendered in accomplishing this result by 
 Lieutenant-Colonel Sir Aug. d'East. A variety 
 of circumstances, however, which occurred 
 about that time, endangered the advantages 
 thus gained, and it was found necessary by the 
 Committee, if they would save these missions, 
 to make another special effort on their behalf. 
 Accordingly, the visit of the Kev. Dr. Alder, 
 one of the missionary secretaries to Canada, 
 about this period, had a special reference to 
 these Indian missions. Besides the insecurity 
 of their titles, the annual grant promised by 
 the British Government to this society, as a 
 fixed charge on the casual and territorial rev- 
 enue of the upper province, to enable the Com- 
 mittee to support and extend their Indian and 
 other missions in that colony, had been with- 
 held ; and the Committee felt it to be a duty 
 which they owed to the society to urge their 
 claim to a part at least of the arrears due to 
 them, and the punctual payment of the grant, 
 at the rate fixed by Lord Glenelg, for the fu- 
 ture. These and other matters of importance 
 were brought under the notice of the colonial 
 government during the visit of Dr. Alder, by 
 the kind and active interference of Sir George 
 Arthur ; and the representations which were 
 made were attended with much success. £1400 
 were received from the colonial treasury by 
 Mr. Stinson, and several plans for the benefit 
 of the Indians engaged the earnest attention 
 of the head of the Indian Department. The 
 results of these exertions were soon witnessed in 
 the peace and contentment with which the In- 
 dians applied themselves to the improvement 
 of their holdings ; in the increased attention 
 which they paid to the instructions of the mis- 
 sionaries, and in the efforts which they made 
 for the education of their children. 
 
 In 1838, Kah-ke-waquonaby or Peter Jones, 
 a missionary and chief, visited England, and 
 performed a similar service for the missions 
 
600 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 to that accomplished by Shahwumlias, some 
 time before. The tribe, of which the latter 
 is the nritu'inal chief, remove<l about this time 
 from their lormt-r residence at Grape Island, 
 to a tract of land near Rice Lake, which was 
 laid out in farms of 50 acres each, to which 
 were attached snug cottages and gardens. All 
 of these Indians profess Christianity ; no ves- 
 tige of paganism remaining among them. 
 Their number is 214. In 1839, a new and ex- 
 tensive field of labor and usefulness was open- 
 ed to this society in that part of north-western 
 America, known as the " Territories of the 
 Hudson's Bay Company." In the southern por- 
 tion of this territory there was an Indian po- 
 Sulation of over 10,000. In the northern 
 epartment, extending north and west from 
 the height of land wdich divides the waters 
 that flow into Lake Superior and the St. Law- 
 rence from those that fall into the tributaries 
 of the Mississippi, to the high land that di- 
 vides the waters which fall into the Polar Sea 
 from those that flow into Hudson's Bay, and 
 in a westerly direction from Hudson's Bay to 
 the Rocky Mountains — there is an Indian po- 
 pulation of 100,000. To these long-neglected 
 children of the forest the way was opened in 
 consequence of arrangements into which the 
 committee of this society had entered with 
 the governor and committee of the Hudson's 
 Bay Company, who made them most libe- 
 ral offers of assistance to commence these mis- 
 sions. For the missionaries which this society 
 might send, whether married or single, the 
 Company agreed to provide board and lodg- 
 ing, interpreters, servants, and the means of 
 conveyance from place to place, free of all ex- 
 pense to the society. And in addition to this, 
 the governor and company generously contri- 
 buted £100 toward the passage of the first 
 missionaries to be sent out. In March, 1840, 
 Rev. Messrs. Barnley, Mason, and Bundle 
 sailed for this trying and extensive field of toil, 
 and on their arrival were joined by that expe- 
 rienced and successful laborer in the work of 
 Indian evangelization, the Rev. James Evans. 
 The stations they occupied were Michipiciton, 
 Moose Fyrt, Norway House, Lac la Pluie, and 
 Rocky Mountain House. In this immense field 
 they itinerate from the longitude of Moose 
 Factory, on the shores of Hudson's Bay, back 
 N. W., by Lake Winnipeg, to Edmonton 
 and the Rocky Mountains, a distance of more 
 than 2000 miles from east to west, in a lati- 
 tude as high as that of Labrador. 
 
 The general superintendent of these scatter- 
 ed missions, in one round of visitation, has 
 sometimes been from home more than three 
 months, traveling by snow shoes, dog-carriage, 
 &c., during which time he has passed over 
 about 6,000 miles. Situated as these missions 
 are, it is hardly to be expected that they can 
 present large statistics for a long time to come, 
 inasmuch as from the scattered and migratory 
 •condition of the Indians, the missionaries can 
 
 do little more than visit and preach for a few 
 days, and then pass on, perhaps from 1 00 to 
 300 miles to the next post, there to do tho 
 same, and so on, all round. For these 200,000 
 Indians this is the only evangelical agency em- 
 ployed, and should this be withdrawn, they 
 would be left in total darkness, or to the super- 
 stitions of popery. In this distant sphere of 
 labor the missionaries are of course widely 
 scattered, being from 400 to 1,500 miles sepa- 
 rated from each other, with no opportunity for 
 a personal interview, and no facilities for cor- 
 ■espondence, save twice in the year; and of 
 these they are by absence from home, and other 
 causes, sometimes unable to avail themselves. 
 A verv efficient agent in this miasion is Thomas 
 Hassel, an educated Indian. He can speak 
 English, French, Creek, and Chippewayan — 
 the latter being his native language. He has 
 been very useful as a school teacher and in- 
 terpreter. Another Indian, Peter Jacobs, has 
 done good service as a preacher. In 1845 
 there were 11 classes, containing 121 members, 
 all of whom gave good evidence of piety. But 
 this was only a part of the membership under 
 the care of the missionaries, it being almost 
 impossible from the isolated and scattered con- 
 dition of the work in these regions, to obtain 
 anything like complete statistics of them. 
 
 The Wesleyan missions among the Indians 
 in Upper Canada continue to prosper. Schools 
 have been established, and translations effected 
 into the Mohawk, the Oneida, the Ojibwa, and 
 the Munsey languages. Much is being ac- 
 complished for the elevation of these people 
 by means of industrial schools, particularly 
 those at Alnwick and Mount Elgin ; and a 
 great deal more might be done were the pecu- 
 niary means at the disposal of the Society. 
 It is very affecting to read the appeals fre- 
 quently made to the missionaries by tribes in 
 their vicinity, who are uttering the Macedoni- 
 an cry. As an apt illustration of the anxiety 
 of the people to receive instruction, Mr. 
 McDougall reports the following speech of a 
 chief of the Garden River band of Indians, 
 which was addressed to him before leaving his 
 station to attend the Canadian Conference : 
 
 " Black Coat, I want to say a few words. I 
 want to say them strong- We want you to 
 repeat them to the Big Black Coat, and to the 
 black coats assembled in council. The Indi- 
 ans down south have fathers and mothers. We 
 are orphans. The Great Spirit has done a 
 great deal for them ; he has given them a rich 
 country. He has also sent them missionaries, 
 who have been parents to them. The great 
 Woman Chief (the Queen of England) has 
 been a mother to them. She has assisted their 
 missionary in building large schools among 
 them, and in teaching them how to work. 
 They are not poor ; they have plenty of kind 
 friends. Not so with us; we are orphans — 
 we who live on the north shore of Huron and 
 Superior. The Great Spirit has not given us 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 601 
 
 •SJBloqOg 
 
 
 
 
 puB sjaquiajt 
 
 Q 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 Suipnpui 'diqa 
 
 o 
 
 « 
 
 -JOii ojiqnj no 
 
 (O 
 
 
 « 
 
 s^uupua^^V JO -0^ 
 
 
 
 
 £o . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 •^ 
 
 •<* 
 
 •§$^^ 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 S 0^1 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 : : 
 
 : 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 l^^'S 
 
 ;! 
 
 • 
 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 •saxag 
 
 
 
 
 qpq JO SJBXoqos 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 -jf^d JO J9qain^ 
 
 
 
 
 •siooqDg 
 
 
 
 
 -£va JO jaqran^j 
 
 
 
 
 •saxag moq 
 
 
 
 
 JO BJBioqDS-M^Bq 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -qBg JO jaqumsj 
 
 
 
 
 •siooqDs-xu^!q 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -qBS JO jaqumK 
 
 
 
 
 •diqsjaqmaj^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 joj iijij^ii no 
 
 
 ' ' 
 
 '"' 
 
 •sjaquiajii qoaniio 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 § 
 
 pa;ipajODV pnB 
 
 00 
 
 
 nnj JO JoqumM 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 of 
 
 } 
 
 ll 
 
 ^ 
 
 I-f 
 
 « 
 
 b ■ 
 11 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 •^•3^' 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 J^l 
 
 
 •* 
 
 ■<*< 
 
 52; 
 
 ^-1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ S 
 
 
 
 
 •'S 
 
 ^i-S 
 
 
 
 
 •s^. 
 
 «^l 
 
 
 
 
 S5| 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 1|l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 i~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 rC <i 
 
 e^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 ■* 
 
 m 
 
 S^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 •s^nB^STSsv 
 
 o 
 
 (M 
 
 (N 
 
 pu^B sajJBuoissTi^i 
 
 
 
 
 •saoB^j^-auiqoBajj 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 laqjo JO jaqranj^ 
 
 
 
 
 •siadBq.) 
 
 , 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 JO aaqoin^i 
 
 
 
 
 AL OR 
 STATIONS 
 
 cui'i-a. 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 crJ 1-3 pH 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ " 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 & o p5 
 
 c3 
 
 H 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 6 
 
 \% 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 i ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 w 
 
 a rich country ; the missionary has not taught 
 us the white man's religion; no teacher has 
 been sent us, nor school- house built for u?. 
 We are poor. We have no kind great fathers 
 or mothers to protect us ; we are worse than 
 our forefathers were many years ago. Our 
 forests were full of wild animals — deer, bear, 
 beaver, &c. ; but the white man came and in- 
 duced us to kill off all our furs. He biiought 
 his steamboats and large nets, and drove the 
 fish from our shores. We are poor, and we are 
 becoming more so every year. Xow we want 
 you to say to the big black coats that we ask 
 them to help us. We want them very much. 
 We want our sons and daughters to understand 
 paper, and to learn to work. Tell them that 
 we live in a very large country, and that there 
 are a great many of us. Tell them about this 
 place, that it lies between Huron and Superior ; 
 that the land is good ; that we raise potatoes, 
 oats, turnips, &;c., and all sell for a great price ; 
 but that the Indian knows little about making 
 gardens. Tell them we ask for a school like 
 the one some of us saw at Alnwick, when we 
 went to Moneyaung (Montreal) three years 
 ago. We are willing to give some of the best 
 of our land for a farm, and assist in building 
 the houses ; but we must have white man to 
 teach us the way." — Authorities : . Wesleyan 
 Missionary Notices and Annual Reports.— -W. 
 Butler. 
 
 American Board. — At the anniversary of 
 the American Board, in Sept. 1816, measures 
 were reported preparatory to the establish- 
 ment of a mission among the Cherokee In- 
 dians, located chiefly within the bounds of the 
 State of Georgia. In January, 1817, Rev. 
 Mr. Kingsbury arrived at Chickamaiiga, in 
 the Cherokee nation, and commenced prepa- 
 rations for an establishment there. In March 
 following he was joined by the Rev. Messrs. 
 Hall and Williams, with their wives. Before 
 the close of the year they were joined by other 
 missionaries, and the name of the station was 
 changed to Brainerd, in honor of that devoted 
 missionary. This place is situated one mile 
 N. of the 35th parallel of latitude, and seven 
 miles S. E. of the Tennessee river ; consequent- 
 ly in that part of the Cherokee country, which 
 falls within the limits of Tennessee. It is 
 about 250 miles from Augusta, Ga. At the 
 close of about a year they had a mission-house, 
 a school-house, and 45 acres of cultivated land. 
 Forty-seven Cherokee children were under a 
 successful course of instruction. 
 
 In 1818, a mission was commenced among 
 the Choctaws, by the Rev. Messrs. Kingsbury 
 and Williams, from the Brainerd station. The 
 place selected for the station was called Eliot, 
 situated within the bounds of the State of 
 Mississippi, near the Yazoo river, and 400 
 miles W. S. W. of the Brainerd station, in the 
 Cherokee nation. In August of that year they 
 felled the first tree on the mission ground, and 
 in the following April they had erected eleven 
 
602 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 log dwellings, a mill-house, stable, store-house, 
 and several outbuildings. They had also clear- 
 ed 35 acree of good land, and enclosed it with 
 a substantial fence, besides enclosing gardens 
 and yarils for cattle, and constructing several 
 roads and bridges. In this work they were 
 assisted by the Choctaws, who had never be- 
 fore been instructed in any such arts. Mean- 
 while, they had preaching every Sabbath, at- 
 tende'd by a number of natives, and some half- 
 bree<ls, and negroes. During this year some 
 
 f)rclrniiuary steps were taken towards estab- 
 ishing a mission among that portion of the 
 Cherokee nation who had removed to the 
 Arkansas, on the west side of the Mississippi 
 river, and also among the Chickasaws, whose 
 country lay partly between that of the Chero- 
 kees and Choctaws. 
 
 The report of the Board for 1820 speaks of 
 the conversion of several natives among the 
 Cherokees at Brainerd, and of the gathering of a 
 church of 20 members, including 3 or 4 negroes. 
 Particular mention is made of Catharine Brown 
 and her brother David, two Cherokee converts 
 of great promise. Having occasion to visit 
 their father, who was sick, David read and ex- 
 plained to him the Bible, and maintained 
 family worship, and also conversed freely with 
 their friends and neighbors, warning them to 
 flee from the wrath to come. Several were 
 thus led to inquire for the way of truth. 
 
 The station at Eliot, among the Choctaws, 
 is reported this year, 1820, after an existence 
 of two years, as having eight commodious log- 
 cabins, a mill-house, and a blacksmith's and 
 joiner's shop ; a lumber-house, granary, and 
 stable ; more than two hundred neat cattle, 
 teams of oxen, and horses ; wagons, carts, 
 plows, and other implements of husbandry, 
 sufficient for a large plantation. The import- 
 ance of these things to a tribe entirely savage, 
 till the missionaries went among them, and 
 without the least knowledge of agriculture, 
 will be readily understood. They had also a 
 school of seventy or eighty youths, male and 
 female, taught in the elementary branches, and 
 in agriculture and domestic labor. It was a 
 most encouraging fact, that the Choctaw 
 chiefs, from the first, manifested the most 
 friendly disposition towards the mission. They 
 contributed for the support of the mission- 
 school ^2,000 a year for sixteen years, from 
 each of the three districts of their nation, 
 making §6,000 a year, or a total of $96,000. 
 This large sura was their proportion of the 
 proceeds of land sold to the United States 
 government. Such a gift, freely made, shows 
 a surprising appreciation of the importance of 
 education, among a people, till lately, ignorant 
 of every thing but the simple arts of fishing 
 and hunting. 
 
 In January, 1821 , Dr. Elizur Butler, phy- 
 sician, and Rev. William Potter, arrived at 
 Brainerd, as mis.sionaries among the Chero- 
 kees. The mission had been extended, and 
 
 was to embrace 3 out-stations, viz., Taloneney, 
 Chatooga, and Creckpath. In connection 
 with Creckpath is mentioned one of the most 
 remarkable displays of Divine grace which 
 the history of missions ailbrds, viz. : the con- 
 version of the entire family of Mr. John 
 Brown, consisting of eight persons. The con- 
 version of Catharine and David Brown, and 
 their visit to their sick father, have already 
 been mentioned. The father was converted, 
 and subsequently the mother, a son's wife, and 
 three sisters of Catharine. Thus a whole fa- 
 mily emerged in a short time from pagan 
 darkness into the light of the glorious Gospel. 
 
 The Choctaw mission was strengthened 
 during this year, by the arrival of several ad- 
 ditional laborers. Besides the station at 
 Eliot, three others, viz., at Mayhew, 100 miles 
 east from Eliot, the Six Towns, and the French 
 Camps, were commenced. Ilev. Dr. Worces- 
 ter, corresponding secretary of the Board, 
 died this year, while on a visit to the Choctaw 
 missions. 
 
 /"In 1822 there were 218 Cherokee children 
 in the school at Brainerd, rapidly improving 
 in their studies, and in various departments of 
 industry. The oldest class of girls sustained, 
 it was said, a better examination than most 
 girls of the same age who have attended school 
 constantly from their early years. Several of 
 the most promising scholars had become pious, 
 and others were anxiously inquiring the way 
 of salvation. 
 
 Rev. Mr. Butrick, of the Cherokee mission, 
 reported this year, 1822, considerable progress 
 in the acquisition of the language. He found 
 it " very artificial and complicated, evincing, 
 beyond a doubt, that it was once spoken by a 
 highly-cultivated people." Mr. B. had made 
 translations into Cherokee of several portions 
 of the Scriptures, a summary of Christian doc- 
 trines and duties, and several hymns for pub- 
 lic worship. 
 
 The report for 1823 shows an extension of 
 the Cherokee mission; three* new stations 
 having been occupied, viz., Hightower, 80 miles 
 S. S. E. from Brainerd ; Willstown, 50 miles 
 S. W. from Brainerd ; and Haweis, GO miles 
 south from Brainerd. In connection with the 
 Creckpath station, is noticed this year the 
 death of Catharine Brown. She had been an 
 ornament to religion since joining the church 
 in 1818, and died a happy death. An impor- 
 tant and solemn transaction occurred this year 
 — the admission to the church of four brothers, 
 named Sanders, their mother, the wives of two 
 of the brothers, and one sister. These having 
 been baptized, proceeded to dedicate their 
 household to God in the same ordinance, to 
 the number of 21, some of them adults. Says 
 Mr. Hall, one of the missionaries, " It was a 
 melting scene ; scarcely was a dry eye in the 
 house. It was not without exertion that some 
 kept from weeping aloud. The aged mother 
 and the rest of the family appeared deeply af- 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 603 
 
 fected." Two or three other members of this 
 family were soon afterwards converted. 
 
 Many interesting facts are stated this year, 
 1823, by the missionaries among the Choc- 
 taws. In the school at Eliot were about 40 
 children, the greater part of whom could read 
 the Bible and write a legible hand. Some 
 were expert in translating from English into 
 Choctaw, and from Choctaw into English ; 
 others had made considerable progress in 
 arithmetic and in drawing maps. Messrs. By- 
 ingtou and Wright had made some progress in 
 reducing to form the elements of the Choctaw 
 language, assisted by Mr. David Folsom, who 
 had spent four years at the Foreign Mission 
 School at Cornwall, Ct. They had agreed 
 upon an alphabet, and assigned the powers of 
 the vowels, marks of accent, &c. To adopt a 
 uniform mode of spelling was extremely diffi- 
 cult, owing to the variations of speaking 
 among the natives, who used various letters 
 interchangeably, as b for m, and m for b, &c. 
 Some thousands of words, however, had been 
 collected, and Mr. Byington had acquired 
 some facility in speaking " this strange lan- 
 guage." 
 
 The Mayhew station experienced a severe 
 bereavement this year, in the death of Mrs. 
 Kingsbury. She was a woman of rare quali- 
 fications, and a devoted missionary. She had 
 left a father's house, abounding with, all the 
 comforts of a New England home, for the su- 
 perintendence of a large mission family, among 
 the ignorant and neglected children of the 
 forest ; yet she never once regretted her deci- 
 sion. C)n her death she only lamented that 
 she had not done more for Christ. 
 
 The station called French Camps, received 
 this year the name of Bethel. It is about 60 
 miles S. W. from Mayhew, and the same dis- 
 tance S. E. from Eliot. Another Choctaw sta- 
 tion was commenced about this time at a 
 place called Emmaus, 140 miles S. E. from 
 Mayhew, near the line which separates Missis- 
 sippi from Ajabama, and not far from the 
 white settlements of the south. Another sta- 
 tion was commenced at Yok-e-na Chu-ka-ma, 
 115 miles S. W. from Mayhew, aud 120 miles 
 N. W. from Mobile. 
 
 Two important laws were passed by the 
 Choctaw nation during the year '1823 ; one 
 was for the suppression of intemperance, and 
 the other related to infanticide. For a long 
 time the Choctaws had carried on a great 
 trade in *whisky. Those who could, paid mo- 
 ney for it, others gave cattle, clothes, blankets, 
 guns, and every species of property. Their 
 love of whisky exceeded all bounds, and 
 there were white people from the States, un- 
 principled and vile enough to furnish it to 
 them. The consequence was^ poverty, wretch- 
 edness, quarreling and murder filled the 
 country. The law passed by the chiefs near- 
 ly suppressed this great evil. f^ 
 
 The inhuman practice of infanticide had ex- 
 
 isted among the Choctaws from time immemo- 
 rial, though this fact was not known till the 
 missionaries went among them. A father or 
 mother, to get rid of the trouble or support of an 
 infant, would kill it by burying it alive, stamp- 
 ing on its breast, strangling it, or knocking 
 it on the head. This horrid custom the chiefs, 
 enlightened by missionary efforts, put an end 
 to by very stringent laws. The first punish- 
 ment under the new law was that of a woman 
 who had killed her infant by knocking it on 
 the head with a pine knot. She was tied to a 
 tree and whipped till she fainted ; and her hus- 
 band, who instigated the deed, was punished in 
 the same manner. 
 
 Supposed witchcraft was another cause of 
 much suffering to this people. They experi- 
 enced imaginary terrors from the apprehension 
 that evil spirits exerted a supernatural power 
 to do them harm,; and besides this, application 
 was often made to a conjurer that he would 
 designate a witch, and for some paltry fee he 
 would fix upon some person, generally a wo- 
 man, as the cause of the calamity complained 
 of. The devoted object was then hunted down 
 and slain, or obtained safety by flight. But 
 this evil disappeared as the light of the Gospel 
 increased. \ 
 
 The mission among the Cherokees on the \ 
 A.rkansas was now in successful operation. 
 The seat of the mission was at a place called 
 D wight, on the Illinois Creek, about four miles 
 north of the Arkansas, and nearly 500 miles, 
 following the course of the stream, from the 
 junction of this river with the Mississippi. / 
 There were at this station, in 1823, two mis- / 
 sionaries, two teachers, and one mechanic. 
 
 It may be proper to state here the reason 
 why some of the Cherokee tribe were found on 
 the other side of the Mississippi. In the first 
 place some of them wandered thither for the 
 purpose of hunting. Afterwards, as they grew 
 more numerous, a treaty was made with the 
 United States, by which these Indians ex- 
 changed their lands in Georgia and Tennessee, 
 for lands on the Arkansas river. This led to 
 a considerable migration, so that nearly one- 
 third of the Cherokee tribe removed to a place 
 700 miles west of the place of their nativity. 
 They were composed chiefly of that portion of 
 the Cherokees who were least inclined to look 
 with a favorable eye upon missions, schools, 
 and civilization, so that the prejudices to be 
 encountered among them were peculiarly 
 strong. A school was, however,. established, 
 and gradually the jealousy of the Indians gave 
 way, and they rejoiced in the education of their 
 children. As the system of education included 
 manual labor at agriculture, or the mecha- 
 nic arts, many objections were raised on this 
 ground, but the great utility of such arts was 
 at length seen, and opposition died away. 
 
 From the very commencement of missionary 
 labors among the North American Indians, 
 doubts were very extelisively entertained as to 
 
C04 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 the possibility of their conversion, or even civ- 
 ilization. Thev were looked upon as wild men, 
 savages, incorrigibly addicted to hunting, fish- 
 ing, and wars among themselves, and the at- 
 tempt to make them an agricultural, sober, 
 and Christian people, was regarded by manv 
 good men as liopeless. The common remark 
 was, " The Indian will be an Indian in spite of 
 all that can be done for him." This deep pre- 
 judice, however, gradually gave way before the 
 facts which were circulated through the reports 
 of the Board and other publications. In their 
 journal for 1823, the missionaries, alluding to 
 the prevailing impression, say, " We think it 
 would be impossible to show any substantial 
 reasons for thinking that the aborigines of 
 America are in a more hopeless state than the 
 inhabitants of Asia or Africa. That such a 
 belief is erroneous is incontrovertibly manifest, 
 from the labors of Eliot, the Mayhews, Brain- 
 erd, and the United Brethren." In noticing 
 these remarks the Board say, " Beyond all 
 reasonable doubt, divine truth is as likely to 
 be efficacious upon the heart of a Cherokee, 
 who has arrived at mature age, as upon any 
 other man who has grown up in ignorance and 
 Bin." 
 
 The above facts are important as showing 
 the peculiar embarrassments of the Board in 
 its early efforts among the Indian tribes of 
 this country. Missions to the Islander and 
 the Hindoo might be successful, but not those 
 to the red man of the forest. But the Board 
 and its missionaries had more faith, and pur- 
 sued their object with a steady purpose. 
 
 The Cherokee mission in 1823 and 1824 
 was marked by a steady progress, and the 
 Board were led to remark, in their review, that 
 the Cherokees were " making advances in civ- 
 ilization and a well regulated society. The 
 dwellings arc made more comfortable from 
 year to year, regular industry is more pursued, 
 laws are enacted and executed which restrain 
 from immorality and secure a respect for civil 
 government, and a desire for acquiring an 
 education is becoming more prevalent." 
 
 The Choctaw mission was enlarged this 
 year by the occupancy of several new stations. 
 Mr. Byington, Mr. Wright, and some other 
 members of the mission, were giving special 
 attention to the language, in order that they 
 might communicate religious instruction to 
 those who could not understand English. 
 AVhisky drinking had been very much dimin- 
 ished, and the whoop of a drunken Indian had 
 not been heard for some months. This change 
 had been effected in great measure by the 
 laws of the Choctaws themselves. A dreadful 
 mortality prevailed among this people during 
 1823 and 1824, and 2,000 are supposed to have 
 died in 18 months, which was about one-tenth 
 of the whole population. The prevalent dis- 
 ease was the measles. 
 / The mission among the Cherokees of the 
 ' Arkansas was more systematic and regular in 
 
 its operations than the others, owing to the fact 
 of its having but one station, that at I) wi ght. 
 The school contained GO scholars, and the mis- 
 sionaries say, " The number might be increased 
 to 100 or 150 within a few days, if we would 
 open our doors for their reception. 13ut our 
 limited resources forbid our enlarging the num- 
 ber." In their report this year the Board say, 
 " As the missionaries become more acquainted 
 with the state of this tribe, especially by hold 
 ing intercourse with the more aged, and mak- 
 ing inquiries respecting former times, they are 
 convinced that anciently the people had the 
 knowledge of the true God ; but a long period 
 must have elapsed since the glory departed 
 from them. In many instances the adult na- 
 tives have never heard of the immortality of 
 the soul. In others they entertain a vague 
 notion that the good and the bad go to differ- 
 ent places in the future world. But how it is 
 possible for a bad man to become good they 
 do not know. Indeed they have no clear idea 
 of what goodness or badness is, no just views 
 of sin, no idea of forgiveness, no conception of 
 a holy God or a universal Providence." 
 
 A highly favorable mention is made this \ 
 year of Mr. John Brown, a Choctaw who 
 joined the Foreign Mission School at Corn- 
 wall in 1820, and subsequently spent two years 
 at Andover, making at both places very rapid 
 progress in his studies. After lecturing to 
 crowded audiences in the principal cities of 
 the north on the condition of his nation, and 
 spending a season at Washington, he returned 
 to his countrymen and to his father's house, 
 near D wight, where he was received with ^ 
 much kindness and attention. 
 
 As the missions among the various tribes of 
 Indians begin to assume at this period a more 
 distinct and important, as well as complicated 
 character, in the reports and journals, and as 
 the number requiring notice is from time to 
 time increased, a separate and continued ac- 
 count of each down to the present time will, it 
 is thought, be a matter of convenience to the 
 reader, and this method will be hereafter 
 adopted. In pursuance of this plan, we take 
 up, as first in the order of time. 
 
 T]ie Mission among the Cherokees. — The pro- 
 gress of the work from its commencement, in 
 January, 1817, down to 1824, has already 
 been briefly sketched. At the period last 
 named, we find the mission to the Cherokees 
 in the Southern States occupying seven sta- 
 tions, viz., Brainerd, Carmel, Creekpath, High- 
 tower, Willstown, Haweis, and Candy's Creek. 
 The geographical position of Brainerd, High- 
 tower, Willstown, and Haweis, has already 
 been designated. Carmel is within the char- 
 tered limits of Georgia, 62 miles from Brain- 
 ard, and 46 miles north-west of the Chatahoo- 
 chee river. Creekpath is within the State of 
 Alabama, four miles south of the Tennessee 
 river ; Hightower is in Georgia, 3.5 miles 
 S.S.W. of Carmel ; Willstown is in Alabama, 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 605 
 
 10 miles from the western line of Georgia, 
 and Candy's Creek is in Tennessee, 25 miles 
 N.E. of Brainerd. The number of laborers 
 at these seven stations at this period (1824,) 
 including missionaries, teachers, farmers, me- 
 chanics, and the wives of these several classes, 
 amounted to 30. 
 
 The number of scholars in the mission 
 schools among the Cherokees was less at this 
 period than in some former years, partly be- 
 cause more discrimination was used in takin^ 
 children into families. The good done was at 
 no tim^ greater. 
 
 It was in this year that the missionaries, 
 and the churches under their care at Brainerd, 
 Carmel, Hightower, and Willstown, were re- 
 ceived into the Union Presbytery of East 
 Tennessee. It was expected that this would 
 naturally increase the interest felt in missions 
 by the ministers and churches in the adjacent 
 new settlements. 
 
 Another event of importance to the mission 
 and to the whole Cherokee nation, was the 
 invention of a form of alphabetical writing 
 by George Guess. He was a Cherokee, and 
 could neither speak nor read English, yet he 
 became acquainted with a leading principle of 
 the English language, viz., that marks or cha- 
 racters can be made the symbols of sound, and 
 he conceived the notion that he could express 
 all the syllables of the Cherokee language by 
 separate characters. On collecting all the 
 syllables which, after long study and trial, he 
 could recall to memory, he found the number 
 to be 82. In order to express these, he took 
 the letters of our alphabet for a part of them, 
 and various modifications of our letters, with 
 some characters of his own invention, for the 
 rest. With these symbols he set about writ> 
 ing letters : and very soon a correspondence 
 was actually maintained between him and his 
 countrymen beyond the Mississippi, 500 miles 
 apart. This soon became a matter of great 
 interest, and yx)ung Cherokees traveled great 
 distances to be instructed in this new and 
 easy method of writing and reading. In three 
 days they were able to commence letter writ- 
 ing, and* return home to their native villages 
 prepared to teach others. Subsequently, 
 either Guess or some other person, discovered 
 four other syllables, making all the known 
 syllables of the Cherokee language 86. It is 
 a curious fact that all syllables in Cherokee 
 end with vowels. The same is true of the lan- 
 guage of the islanders of the Pacific Ocean. 
 But in the Choctaw language syllables often 
 end with consonants. 
 
 The mission among the Cherokees of the 
 Arkansas has, as already noticed, only the sta- 
 tion at Dwight, which is near the Arkansas 
 river, about 200 miles from its mouth in a 
 direct line, and 500 miles by the course of the 
 river. There were at this place, in 1824, 12 
 white persons, including two missionaries, a 
 teacher, a steward, a farmer, and a mechanic, 
 
 and their wives. There was a school for boys, 
 and one for girls, which were making very en- 
 couraging progress, and the missionaries ex- 
 pressed the opinion that many of the pupils 
 would not sufier by a comparison with scholars 
 of their age in any of the states. These chil- 
 dren were but a little while before wandering 
 in the forest, totally without mental and 
 moral cultivation. 
 
 In 1825, Eev. Samuel A. "Worcester and his 
 wife joined the mission at Brainerd, and, at 
 the same time, two farmers, with their wives 
 and a female teacher, went out to be employed 
 at different stations. The schools at Brainerd 
 were in a fine condition. As evidence of ca- 
 pacity in the Indian youth, it was stated that 
 a boy, ten years old, who had been in school 
 less than five months, not having previously 
 learned the English alphabet, was spelling in 
 words of three syllables, and had never missed 
 but a single word. To master in so short a 
 time a foreign language, and one so arbitrary 
 in its mode of spelling, indicates very unusual 
 quickness and strength of mind. The educar 
 tion of females was found to be of great assist- 
 ance in the work of civilization. At the 
 Willstown station, an important moral refor- 
 mation had taken place. When the first mis- 
 sionary came there, in 1823, the intemperate 
 use of ardent spirits was almost universal ; 
 but, now, intoxicating liquor was entirely dis- 
 used by a great majority of the people, and 
 riotous assemblages were unknown. 
 
 The knowledge of Guess's alphabet was in- 
 creasing, and many adults who had never 
 learnt the English letters, and never would, it 
 was thought, would immediately read the New 
 Testament, if printed and written in this char- 
 acter. As an evidence of the progress of civ- 
 ilization, the trial by jury was introduced this 
 year, and conducted with great solemnity. 
 The national council also appropriated money 
 for the establishment of a printing-press, with 
 English and Cherokee types, and for laying 
 the foundation of a public school. In aid of 
 these objects, Mr. Elias Boudinot visited the 
 northern states, and received liberal patron- 
 age. 
 
 As the Cherokees occupied portions of sev- 
 eral states, and the question of boundaries and 
 titles was one of great importance, the secre- 
 taries took occasion this year to state, in their 
 report, that the Indian titles were in no way 
 affected by the limits of different states, whe- 
 ther fixed by the states themselves, or by Con- 
 gress. The national authorities had uniformly 
 admitted that the tribes of Indians in North 
 America had a perfect right to the soil of 
 their ancestors, now in their own occupancy, 
 unless that right had been voluntarily relin- 
 quished for a good consideration. " When we 
 speak, therefore, of Indian territoiy, as lying 
 in the State of Tennessee, or in the State of 
 Georgia, it is not intended that the Indians 
 there residing are subject to the laws of the 
 
606 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 whites, or that the running of a line through 
 their country, or marking it upon a map, has 
 any efll'ct to impair their claims, or dispossess 
 them of their patrimonial inheritance. The 
 only way in which this inheritance can be 
 alienated, is by treaties fairly and honorably 
 made, and with the full assent of the present 
 owners." These remarks will enable the read- 
 er to judge, not only of the rights of the In- 
 dians, but of the manner in which those rights 
 were subsequently treated by the national gov- 
 ernment. It may be added, that large tracts 
 had already been sold by treaties, to the Uni- 
 ted States, and the territories which remained 
 to the Cherokees contained about 12,000 
 square miles, or 8,000,000 acres. About two- 
 thirds of this country lay in the north-west 
 corner of Georgia, one-fifth in the north-east 
 part of Alabama, one-tenth in the south-east 
 part of Tennessee, and a small portion in the 
 south-west corner of North Carolina. The 
 Cherokee population was supposed, in 1825, 
 to be about 14,000. They had already made 
 great advances in learning, and in agriculture 
 and mechanic arts. The national council met 
 annually for the exercise of legislative func- 
 tions, and government was administered ac- 
 cording to the usages of civilized countries. 
 A regular constitution, however, had not been 
 adopted, and in the summer of 1826 a council 
 was held, and a committee appointed to draft 
 a constitution. Measures were also taken this 
 year at Boston, to prepare types in the pecu- 
 liar character invented by Guess, and to pro- 
 vide a printing-press for the nation. 
 
 In the autumn of 1827, Mr. David Greene 
 was appointed to visit all the missionary sta- 
 tions among the Indians in the south-western 
 and western parts of the United States, which 
 service he performed, — traveling 6,000 miles, 
 inspecting 30 stations, and reaching Boston in 
 July, 1828. His report, so far as it related to 
 the Cherokees, authorized the statement, that 
 nearly all the adult population, and in the 
 tribe at large more than half, were actually 
 capable of reading their own language, a fact 
 almost incredible, but for the facilities afforded 
 by the alphabet of Guess. There was a won- 
 derful improvement, also, in regard to houses, 
 dress, style of living, industry, &c. ; the men 
 being found upon well-cultivated farms, and 
 the women spinning and weaving cotton, and 
 providing garments of their own manufacture. 
 More than 500 children had been taught in 
 the mission schools, and 160 communicants 
 belonged to the churches of the seven stations. 
 This was justly considered by the Board and 
 the missionaries very great and encouraging 
 progress to have been made in ten years,°and 
 it ought to have silenced forever the objection 
 that the Indians could not be civilized and 
 Christianized. Rarely, if ever, has missionary 
 labor been productive of greater results, within 
 \ the same period, in any heathen country. 
 jj^- In 1828, Mr. Worcester occupied a new sta- 
 
 tion at New Echota, not far from Braincrd 
 and devoted himself chiefly to the translation 
 of the Scriptures, and the preparation of reli- 
 gious books and tracts. A printing-press had 
 been put in operation at this place, at the ex- 
 pense of the Cherokees. 
 
 Among the Cherokees of the Arkansas, dur- 
 ing the few years just noticed, operations were 
 continued with general success. At Dwight 
 a house of worship had been erected, and there 
 was no family in which some were not hope- 
 fully pious. , Within 25 miles of this place 
 there was a population of 1,200, not including 
 the whites, and stated preaching was main- 
 tained in various neighborhoods among these 
 people. Schools were sustained, and the 
 progress made in education, husbandry, &c., 
 was similar to that among the Cherokees in 
 the southern states. A United States agent, 
 Major Duval, residing near Dwight, declared 
 to the corresponding secretary, that a single 
 school for girls at that place, had done more 
 to improve the condition of the Indians, than 
 all the sums of money expended by the gov- 
 ernment, in furnishing them with implements 
 of husbandry, and annual distributions of 
 clothing. 
 
 In 1829, we find the Cherokees possessed of 
 a regularly organized civil government, and of 
 a written language, unlike any other that ever 
 existed, and yet complete, by the use of which 
 adults could learn to read their native tongue 
 in ten, five, and even three days ; and this lan- 
 guage the invention of an uuinstructed Cher- 
 okee ! For a considerable time this mission 
 had attracted special attention, both because 
 it was the first mission of the Board to the 
 American Indians, and because of the success 
 which had attended it. But now the eyes of 
 America and of many people in Europe began 
 to be directed with new interest to this tribe, 
 on account of the measures which were in 
 contemplation for their removal. The Chero- 
 kees themselves began to be in great fear and 
 anxiety lest they should be driven from the 
 lands received from their fathers, and con- 
 strained to migrate to a country for which 
 they had no attachment, and which, in their 
 view, would be only a resting-place for a few 
 years, when they would be again driven off, 
 dispersed, and destroyed. 
 
 In September of this year the nation waa 
 deprived of one of its most useful and valued 
 men, Mr. David Brown. He became pious in 
 1820, acquired his education at the north, and 
 traveled much in the United States, receiving 
 everywhere the esteem and affection of the 
 people. He had been much engaged in public 
 business, but at the time of his last illness was 
 studying with a view to preach the Gospel. 
 He was the fifth member of the same family 
 who had died in the triumphs of the Christian 
 faith. 
 
 In 1830, we find the Cherokee nation in an 
 increasingly troubled and distracted state. A 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 607 
 
 treaty for their removal had already been 
 formed between the United States government 
 and leading men of the tribe, in opposition, 
 however, to a large majority of the Chero- 
 kees. The subject was engrossing the atten- 
 tion of Congress and of the nation, and it 
 seemed a fitting time for the secretaries to re- 
 cord publicly their views of the subject, as it 
 related to the Oherokees ; and accordingly, 
 in their report of this year, they said, " What- 
 ever may be thought of some questions relat- 
 ing to this matter, the following points are 
 indisputable, viz., that treaties in existence 
 between the United States and the Cherokee 
 nation guarantee the inviolability of the Cher- 
 okee territory and of the Cherokee govern- 
 ment ; that the words in which these engage- 
 ments are expressed are perfectly plain, not 
 admitting of doubt or cavil ; and that these 
 words express what was the real meaning of 
 the parties at the time, and what was under- 
 stood to be the meaning by both parties for 
 more than forty years. It is true, also, that 
 the Cherokces conceive themselves to have a 
 perfect right to their own country, and that 
 they are unwilling to leave it. The few who 
 have consented to emigrate, have done so from 
 the apprehension that all would be compelled 
 to remove, and that those who remained lon- 
 gest would be in the most unfavorable circum- 
 stances." In March of the same year, Mr. 
 Worcester wrote a letter on the subject of the 
 advancement of the Cherokees in civilization, 
 and their feelings with regard to a removal, 
 and addressed it to a member of the Cherokee 
 deputation at Washington. It was printed by 
 the Senate, and appended to a report from the 
 War Department. It gave a fair and candid ac- 
 count of the actual condition of the Cherokees, 
 and may be found in the Herald of May, 1830. 
 Amid all .these disturbances, public religious 
 meetings were held at all the stations as usual, 
 and the schools and printing-press were kept 
 in operation. At tiie beginning^ of 1831 
 there were eight churches, embracing in all 
 219 members, at the stations occupied by 
 this mission, of whom 167 were Cherokees, 
 and the remainder were of African descent, 
 or white persons residing in the nation. The 
 number of scholars in all the schools was 150, 
 which was less than usual, the school at Brain- 
 erd having been broken up by the burning of 
 their school-house. A Cherokee Sunday-school 
 Union had been organized, embracing six 
 schools, eight teachers, and 113 scholars. 
 During the year, the mission had also printed 
 1,400 copies of the Cherokee hymn-book, 
 1,000 copies of the Gospel of Matthew, and 
 3,000 copies of a tract of twelve pages, con- 
 sisting of extracts from the Old and New 
 Testaments. These had all been prepared by 
 Mr. Worcester, assisted by Elias Boudinot, 
 who was at the same time editor of a well- 
 conducted and useful paper, called the " Cher- 
 okee Phoenix." 
 
 At the period just named, fourteen years 
 from the commencement of the mission, tho 
 secretaries could say, " The mass of the peo- 
 ple, in their dress, houses, furniture, agricultu- 
 ral implements, manner of cultivating the 
 soil, raising stock, providing for their families, 
 and in their estimate of the value of an edu- 
 cation, will not suffer by a comparison with 
 the whites in the surrounding settlements. 
 The mass of the people have externally em- 
 braced the Christian religion. Intemperance, 
 the bane of the Indian as well as the white 
 man, has been checked ; the laws of the na- 
 tion rigorously exclude intoxicating liquors 
 from all public assemblies ; and numerous so- 
 cieties for the promotion of temperance have 
 been organized." But in spite of these im- 
 provements and these laws, the secretaries 
 were obliged to add, in their report for 1831, 
 that " the nation has been made to experience 
 nearly all the political and domestic evils with 
 which, for two or three years, they had been 
 threatened. Their government has been nearly 
 prostrated; their council has been forbidden 
 to assemble ; their laws have been declared 
 null and void, and their magistrates prohibited, 
 under severe penalties, from enforcing them ; 
 intoxicating liquors have been introduced with- 
 out restraint ; their country has been traversed 
 by armed troops ; their property has been 
 plundered, their persons arrested and imprison- 
 ed ; the land which they know is theirs by im- 
 memorial possession, and which has been guar- 
 anteed to them by numerous and perfectly ex- 
 plicit treaties, has been claimed by others, and 
 surveyed, and they themselves threatened with 
 immediate ejectment. These and other vexa- 
 tions and sufferings to which they have been 
 subjected, have filled the nation with anxiety 
 and alarm." In this condition of discourage- 
 ment, and almost of despair, some, as was to 
 be expected, gave themselves up to idleness 
 and intemperance, and ceased to cultivate fields 
 and erect buildings, not knowing who should 
 possess 'them. The future was all dark, for if 
 they could not hold their present countrythey 
 could be secure of no resting-place, however it 
 might be secured to them by solemn treaties. 
 The Board had already addressed a memorial 
 to Congress on this subject, the preparation of 
 which was the last official act of the Corres- 
 ponding Secretary, Rev. Dr. Cornelius. It was 
 referred to the Committee on Indian Affairs, 
 but was not known to produce any important 
 results. 
 
 In addition to all the other embarrassments 
 thrown in the way of the mission, and the dis- 
 tresses caused to 'the Cherokees, the missiona- 
 ries themselves began, in 1831, to be arrested 
 and imprisoned. In January of this year, the 
 missionaries at Carmel, Hightower, Ilaweis, 
 and New Bcho'ta, the four stations lying within 
 the territory claimed by Georgia, were served 
 with copies of a law, then just passed, declar- 
 ing, in substance, that all white men found 
 
608 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 within the State after the hrst of the following 
 March, without having taken an oath of alle- 
 
 S'ance to the State, would be imprisoned 
 the penitentiary at hard labor, for a terra 
 of not loss than four years. But there were 
 important and obvious reasons why the mis- 
 sionaries should not abandon the field ; and 
 they could not take the prescribed oath with- 
 out an admission that Georgia was right. 
 They therefore concluded to remain at their 
 posts and abide the consequences. They 
 I were unmolested till the 12th of March, when 
 a detachment of the Georgia guard, consist- 
 ing of twenty-six armed and mounted men, 
 proceeded to each of the four stations named, 
 and arrested three of the missionaries, viz., 
 Messrs. Proctor, Worcester, and Thompson. 
 The fourth, Mr. Buttrick, was absent. They 
 were taken to the head-quarters of the guard, 
 where they employed legal counsel, and 
 were set free by the judge of the Superior 
 Court of Gwinnet county, on the ground that 
 they were under the patronage of the United 
 States government, and were in such a sense 
 its agents that the laws of Georgia did not 
 apply to them. They therefore returned to 
 their stations, anticipating no further troubles 
 of this nature. 
 
 A correspondence was now held between the 
 Governor of Georgia and the President of the 
 United States, the result of which was a state- 
 ment by the president, that he did not consider 
 the missionaries as being in any sense agents 
 of the government. Upon this the mission- 
 aries received letters, informing them of their 
 exposure, and giving them ten days to remove 
 out of the State or take the required oath. 
 Messrs. Buttrick, Proctor and Thompson 
 thought it expedient to remove with their fa- 
 milies. Dr. Butler was arrested, but released 
 on account of sickness in his family, upon a 
 promise that he would deliver himself up at the 
 proper time. Mr. Thompson, who continued 
 to visit his station at Hightower, was subse- 
 quently arrested and treated in the most brutal 
 manner. Though seriously ill, and offering to 
 furnish himself a horse, he was compelled to 
 walk, and when he could walk no longer he 
 was thrust into a most offensive and uncomfort- 
 able wagon. At one time he was chained. 
 After being locked up in jail awhile he was 
 dismissed, and told to go where he pleased, but 
 no provision was made for his return. A 
 month later, Mr. Worcester and Dr. Butler 
 were again arrested, and subjected to cruelties 
 and indignities such as savages themselves 
 would scarcely inflict upon their captives. The 
 shocking and painful details of the treatment 
 which they received from the military, both 
 on the march and in the filthy and wretched 
 prison into which they were thrust, are given 
 at length in a letter written by Mr. Worces- 
 ter, and published in the annual report for 
 1831. They were finally taken out of the 
 hands of the military, and released, on giving 
 
 bonds to appear at the superior court of Gwin- 
 i>et countv, in September." On the 2.5th of 
 that montii they were tried, and Mr. Worcc*. 
 ter and Dr. Butler, with eight other white 
 men, one a missionary of the Methodist Epis- 
 copal church, were sentenced to four years 
 hard labor in the penitentiary. On arriving 
 at the door of the prison they were all of- 
 fered a pardon and release, on condition of 
 their removing from the State, or taking the 
 oath of allegiance to the laws of Georgia, 
 and all but two of them" accepted of these 
 humiliating. terms. Mr. Worcester and Dr. 
 Butler, believing that obedience to such laws 
 would be treason against God, conceded no- 
 thing, and were committed to the penitentiary. 
 
 Measures were taken to bring the matter 
 before the Supreme Court of the United 
 States, and a writ of error having been grant- 
 ed by the justices of that, court, the case was 
 brought up and ably argued, in February 1832, 
 by Messrs. Wirt and Sergeant in behalf of the 
 plaintiffs in error. The decision was pro- 
 nounced by Chief-Justice Marshall, on the 3d 
 of the following March. I't reviewed the 
 whole subject of Indian titles, the treaties 
 which had been made with the Indians, and 
 the recent laws of Georgia, which extended 
 the jurisdiction of the State over the Chero- 
 kee country, and these laws were pronounced 
 repugnant to the Constitution, to treaties, and 
 to the laws of the United States. The man- 
 date of the Court was immediately issued, 
 reversing and annulling the judgment of the 
 Superior Court of Georgia, and ordering that 
 all proceedings on the indictment against the 
 prisoners do forever cease, and that the prisoners 
 be, and hereby are dismissed therefrom. 
 
 But the Superior Court of Georgia refused 
 to obey the mandate, or to discharge the pris- 
 oners. A memorial to the President of the 
 United States was prepared by the counsel for 
 the prisoners, praying him to interpose his 
 authority for enforcing the decision of the 
 Court. Upon consultation, however, it was 
 thought inexpedient to present the memorial ; 
 neither was it thought advisable to prosecute 
 the case by a second appeal to the Supreme 
 Court ; for it was well understood, that though 
 that Court would sustain its own decision, the 
 President, (Andrew Jackson) was not inclined 
 to enforce it, and therefore the result would be 
 doubtful. Further, the missionaries had the 
 assurance of an unconditional release, provi- 
 ded they would desist from the attempt to 
 obtain that release by a military enforcement 
 of the decision of the Supreme Court. This 
 assurance came not from any solicitations on 
 their part. They made " no solicitation, no 
 overture, no compromise." But they were often 
 and earnestly solicited by persons in the confi- 
 dence of the Governor of Georgia, to desist 
 from the prosecution, and assured that if they 
 did so, they should not long remain in prison. 
 Even after they had given notice, as they did at 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 609 
 
 one time, of their intention to move the Supreme 
 Court for a further process, they were waited up- 
 on by two members elect of Congress, whose 
 names are given, and told officially, that they had 
 conversed with the Governor on the subject, 
 and knew his views, and that they might 
 regard it as certain, if they withdrew the suit, 
 that they would be discharged without any 
 concession, or condition, or even an applica- 
 tion to the Governor. These repeated pledges 
 induced the prisoners, by their counsel, to drop 
 all further proceedings, and on the 14th of 
 January, 1833, the keeper of the penitentiary 
 received a proclamation from the Governor of 
 the State, directing him to set Messrs. Wor- 
 cester and Butler at liberty. This he commu- 
 nicated to them forthwith, and discharged 
 them. They immediately returned to the sta- 
 tions which they had respectively occupied in 
 the Cherokee country, and resumed their mis- 
 sionary labors. 
 
 The reasons which determined the conduct 
 of these brethren from first to. last, were sta- 
 ted by them with great clearness and force, 
 and published in the report of the Board 
 for 1833. In the same report may be found 
 the decision and mandate of the Supreme 
 Court ; the reply of the Court of Georgia ; 
 the memorial of the Board, praying for the 
 protection of the missionaries, and several 
 other important documents relating to this 
 subject. 
 
 During the year and four months that 
 Messrs. Worcester and Butler were in prison, 
 they were permitted daily to read the Scrip- 
 tures, and pray with the prisoners confined in 
 the same building; and during the last six 
 months or more, Mr. Worcester preached once 
 every Sabbath to all the prisoners. A spirit 
 of inquiry was awakened, and many, it is be- 
 lieved, were savingly benefitted. 
 
 It is painful in the extreme to dwell upon 
 such facts as have been recorded in the preced- 
 ing pages ; and it seems scarcely credible that 
 they could have occurred in a country like 
 ours, and in an enlightened Christian State. 
 It is not surprising that missionaries should 
 occasionally fare thus at the hands of benight- 
 ed Brahmins, or proud Mussulmans, but that 
 in the United States, and within 25 years, 
 they should have been dragged from their 
 fields of labor by an armed soldiery, and treat- 
 ed like felons; under laws, too, enacted for 
 the very purpose of extinguishing Indian 
 claims, and getting possession of their lands, 
 in violation of treaties and of the Constitution, 
 and all this persisted in against the decision 
 of the highest judicial tribunal in the land, — 
 this is surprising and deeply humiliating ; and 
 it forms a chapter in our country's history, 
 which, for naked injustice, mercenary aims, 
 and bold contempt of national faith and honor, 
 is scarcely equaled by any of the public 
 wrongs and oppressions laid to her charge. 
 
 During the period of these troubles there 
 39 
 
 was no regular instruction at the four stations 
 within the limits of Georgia, and at the other 
 stations the work was prosecuted under great 
 disadvantages. Previous to the release of 
 Messrs. Worcester and Butler, the whole Chero- 
 kee country, lying within the chartered limits 
 of Georgia, had been surveyed and divided into 
 lots of 140 acres each, and distributed by lot- 
 tery among the citizens of that State. The 
 laws of Georgia had begun to be enforced, 
 counties had been organized, courts held, and 
 magistrates and civil officers appointed. In 
 this state of things, the Cherokees were divi- 
 ded on the question of ceding their lands by 
 treaty to the United States ; but whether they 
 did so or not, it had become evident to all that 
 they must remove, either peaceably or under 
 a despotism which they could not resist. In 
 the beginning of 1834, the number of white 
 settlers on the Indian lands was estimated to 
 outnumber the Indians themselves, and no art \ 
 was left untried by the whites to draw them 1 
 into intemperance and every kind of debauch- i 
 ery. The depression of morals was deplorable, 
 and yet not so general as might have been ex- 
 pected. Most of the influential men of the 
 nation manifested much firmness and dignity 
 of character, and remained the steadfast friends 
 of the mission, and of the intellectual and 
 moral improvement of these people. 
 
 After repeated negotiations and conferences 
 between the Indians and the government at 
 Washington, the details of which it is unneces- 
 sary to give here, a treaty was at length agreed 
 upon, Dec. 1835, by which the Cherokees 
 ceded the whole of the country which they 
 occupied, and consented to be removed to a 
 territory west of the Mississippi within two 
 years. For their lands, improvements, build- 
 ings, &c., they were to receive $500,000, and 
 $050,000 to defray the expenses of their re- 
 moval, and of sustaining them one year after 
 their arrival at their new homes. This treaty 
 was negotiated with the representatives of a 
 party or section of the Indians, and against it 
 Mr. Ross and his friends protested in all the 
 stages of its progress, as being unsatisfactory 
 in its provisions, made contrary to the will of 
 the nation, and with persons wholly unau- 
 thorized to transact such business. All at- 
 tempts to annul or improve it, however, failed, 
 and nothing remained but its rigid enforce- 
 ment. 
 
 The time allowed the Indians to remain ex- 
 pired on the 23d of May, 1838fand immedi- 
 ately after that day the military commenced 
 their operations. Families were taken from 
 their houses and farms, leaving their furniture, 
 fields and flocks as they were, unprotected, to 
 be possessed by they knew not whom, and were 
 marched under strong guards to camps selected 
 to be their starting places for a distant, and 
 to them a strange land. In June nearly the 
 whole tribe had been taken from their houses 
 to the camps, and some thousands were started 
 
610 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 off on their dreary march westward. Owing, 
 however, to the extreme heat of the season, 
 cniijjralion was soon suspended, and the great 
 body of the Indians remained till the coming 
 autumn. 
 
 On the Sabbath, Aug. 19, the Lord's Supper 
 was administered for the last time by the mis- 
 sionaries, to as many as could be collected at 
 Brainerd ; and early in October the Cherokee 
 people bid a mournful and reluctant adieu to 
 the country of which they had long and strenu- 
 / ously, but in vain, been etideavoring to retain 
 I possession. They were divided into fourteen 
 * companif^s, embracing nearly 16,000 persons. 
 ilTieir route lay through the States of Tennessee, 
 Kentucky, Illinois, Missouri, and Arkansas, a 
 distance of six or seven hundred miles, and all 
 the companies but one made this journey by 
 land, consuming from three and a half to five 
 and a half months on the way. Dwelling, as 
 they had, within the narrow limits of encamp- 
 ments for four months before starting, and 
 sheltered only by tents on the way, and much 
 of the time without adequate food or clothing, 
 \ it is not wonderful that great suffering and 
 I mortality were experienced among them. Ac- 
 I cording to the most careful estimates, there 
 J was an average of from 13 to 15 deaths a day 
 from the time they started, and by the time the 
 last company had reached its destination, be- 
 tween 4,000 and 5,000 persons had died, or more 
 than one-fourth of the whole population in the 
 space of ten months. This, it was admitted 
 jby the friends of the Cherokees and of the 
 'mission, resulted from the nature of the case, 
 and not from any unnecessary exposure or 
 bad treatment on the part of those who were 
 employed in carrying the deplorable measure 
 into effect. 
 
 The dissensions which prevailed among the 
 Cherokees before their removal were not less 
 ^ annoying in their new home. In June, 1839, 
 after the close of a council during which there 
 had been much party heat. Major Ridge, his 
 son, John Ridge, and Elias Boudinot, were 
 assassinated. They had taken a leading part 
 in the treaty of Dec. 1835, and fell victims to 
 the enmity awakened by that measure in the 
 minds of the opposing party. 
 , Omitting, for want of space, the details of 
 / re-settlemeht, and the re-organization of the 
 ( mission, we find them, in 1840, occupying four 
 stations, viz., Dwight, Fairfield, Park Hill, 
 and Honey Creek. Dwight, as already ex- 
 plained, is a4few miles north of the Arkansas 
 river, about 500 miles from its junction with 
 the Mississippi, or 200 miles in a straight line. 
 This had been the centre of missionary opera- 
 tions for several years among the Cherokees 
 who early removed to that country. The other 
 stations were at no great distance from this, 
 and there were in this field, in 1840, five mis- 
 sionaries, one physician, three male and fifteen 
 female assistants, two native preachers, and 
 one -native pi'intcr, making a total of 27. 
 
 Among the missionaries were Messrs. Worc^ 
 ter and Butler, and several others who had 
 labored in the old Cherokee country. 
 
 In 1841, when full returns began to be re- 
 ceived, there were five churches, and over 200 
 communicants. There were also five schools, 
 embracing 225 pupils. The school fund of the 
 Cherokees was sufficient to support teachers 
 and furnish books, stationery, &c., for eleven 
 public schools, and the system was ready to go 
 into operation as soon as teachers could be 
 procured. A mission press was in operation 
 at Park Hill, and a Cherokee almanac, an 
 edition of Cherokee laws, and the epistles of 
 John, had been printed. Large meetings had 
 been held for the promotion of temperance, 
 and about 1,000 of the Cherokees were living 
 in conformity to the temperance pledge. The 
 amount of printing executed at the mission 
 press in 1843, was reported to be 140,000 
 pages. The congregation at Fairfield erect- 
 ed this year a large and convenient house of 
 worship, the old one having become too 
 small. 
 
 In 1844 the mission press executed, in the 
 Cherokee language, the following works, viz. : 
 Acts of the Apostles, 5000 copies ; Gospel of 
 Matthew, 5000 copies ; Select Passages of 
 Scripture, 5000 cqiies ; Evils of Intoxicating 
 Drinks, 5000 ; a tract, Poor Sarah, 5000 ; 
 Christian Almanac, 1000 ; making a total of 
 26,000 copies, and of 1,586,000 pages. Be- 
 sides this, over 50,000 pages of various works 
 were executed in the Choctaw language. 
 
 During the years 1846, 1847, and 1848, no 
 very marked changes were reported. Party 
 strifes continued, and outrages on property and 
 life were prevalent, but they were not of such 
 a nature as to interrupt missionary labor at 
 either of the stations. The general sentiment 
 of the people was against the sale of intoxicat- 
 ing liquor, and some 3000 persons were en- 
 rolled as members of total abstinence societies. 
 The cause of education also has an upward 
 tendency, and two high schools, one for boys 
 and one for girls, were established, and the 
 necessary, buildings erected, at an expense of 
 fifteen or twenty thousand dollars each, all 
 which was defrayed by the Cherokees them- 
 selves. The structure of their alphabet afford- 
 ed great facilities in the acquisition of knowl- 
 edge, and the name of George Guess will ever 
 be held in grateful remembrance by the friends 
 of Cherokee learning. 
 
 In 1850 there were scattered over the terri- 
 tory occupied by the Cherokees, 22 free public 
 schools, besides a boarding-school at Dwight, 
 j three day schools, and the two high schools. 
 jThe communicants numbered 209, and the 
 'printing for the year amounted to 1,354,000 
 ' pages. 
 
 : The latest period to which definite informa- 
 tion has been received is 1853, and from the 
 ' reports of that date the following table is com- 
 piled : 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 611 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 i 
 
 L 
 
 II 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 1 
 
 < 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 a 
 S 
 S 
 
 
 Dwight 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 "i 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 48 
 8 
 69 
 50 
 42 
 
 05 
 
 Lees' Creek 
 
 41 
 
 Fairfield. 
 
 45 
 
 Park Hill 
 
 38 
 
 Honey Creek 
 
 
 Totals 
 
 149 
 
 
 
 In concluding this notice of the Cherokces, 
 it seems desirable to add the following edito- 
 rial passage, from the " Herald" of Sept. 1854 : 
 " The prospects of the Cherokees seem to have 
 brightened, in certain directions within the 
 past year. The committee employed Rev. 
 Marcus Palmer, M. D., formerly a missionary 
 of the Board among these Indians, to act as 
 
 I an itinerant during the winter and spring ; and 
 he says, in closing his labors, ' The Cherokee 
 
 j nation is increasing fast in numbers, wealth, 
 intelligence, and civilization. The public po- 
 litical mind is settled and calmed. The intem- 
 perance and frequent murders which now take 
 place, are the effects of the storm which years 
 since went by. The causes being removed, the 
 evils are evidently subsiding, and a better state 
 of things seems to be coming over the people.' 
 It must be confessed, however, that some clouds 
 still darken the horizon of this interesting peo- 
 ple. A powerful revival of religion is greatly 
 needed. If the influences of the Holy Spirit 
 shall be much longer withheld, the Christian 
 will have great occasion for solicitude and 
 fear." 
 
 Choctaws. — The events of this mission, from 
 its commencement in 1818 to 1824, have been 
 sufficiently noticed. . The Choctaws occupied 
 the central part of Mississippi, extending en- 
 tirely across the State, and numbering about 
 20,000. The nine stations occupied by the 
 mission were considerably dispersed, and were 
 supplied with missionaries, teachers, and farm- 
 ers, to such an extent as to carry the blessings 
 of religion, education, and the arts of agricul- 
 ture, to nearly all the people. 
 
 In 1827 a highly favorable report was made 
 of the schools. That at Eliot had 38 native 
 pupils, many of whom were studying geogra- 
 phy, arithmetic, and book-keepinj]f, besides at- 
 tending to writing and composition. Some 
 of them could answer 400 questions on the 
 maps of various countries, and could describe 
 the boundaries of the screral States. A similar 
 progress had been made in all the schools. In 
 the spring of this year there was considerable 
 religious interest atMayhew,.as the fruits of 
 which nine persons were admitted to the 
 church in June. The -whole number of chil- 
 dren instructed in tho Eliot school, from its 
 commencement to 1828, was 185. In the 
 
 Sabbath-school at Eliot this year, 7,732 verses 
 of Scripture and of hymns were committed to 
 memory by the boys, and 2,688 by the girls. 
 GR-eat improvements had been made within 
 four or five years in the cultivation of land 
 and the manner of living. The introduction 
 of whisky was, however, a great impediment 
 to civilization, leading to many vices, and often 
 to violence and bloodshed. \ 
 
 In 1829, the chief of one large district re- \ 
 solved to suspend the laws forbidding the im- 
 portation of whisky for two moons, and to 
 drink himself and permit others to drink with- 
 out restraint. For this abuse of power he was 
 removed from office, and a man appointed in 
 his place who favored the cause of morality 
 and religion. During this year there was a 
 more general attention to religion among the 
 Choctaws than at any former period. The 
 three chiefs of the nation took a very active 
 part in favoring religious inquiry, and in seve- 
 ral instances meetings of three or four days' 
 continuance were held at convenient places in 
 the wilderness. Many hundreds manifested 
 great anxiety to be instructed, and to become 
 experimentally acquainted with the Gospel, 
 and fifty or sixty native converts were added 
 to the churches. It was regarded as a won- 
 derful display of divine power and grace, and 
 was a subject of praise and joy both to the 
 missionaries and to the churches, which had 
 aided them in their work. At the same time 
 school-books and hymn-books, which had been 
 printed in Boston, in the Choctaw language, 
 were furnishing the elements of knowledge to 
 as many as were prepared to receive and use 
 them. In each of the three districts into 
 which the nation was divided, intemperance 
 received a powerful check, the laws against 
 whisky were rigidly enforced, the people were 
 better clothed, the lands were better tilled, 
 and in every respect the improvement was 
 very striking. \ 
 
 In the early part of 1830, the Choctaws be- • 
 gan to be seriously disturbed with the ques- 
 tion of their removal to a country west of the 
 Mississippi. In March of that year a treaty 
 was made between the Choctaw nation and 
 the government ; but it was not ratified, and 
 was of no effect. In the following September, a 
 deputation from the government visited the 
 Choctaws, and tried to persuade them to sell 
 their country, and remove across the Missis- 
 sippi river. The Choctaws, in council, ap- 
 pointed a committee of sixty, twenty from 
 each district, to consider the subject and make 
 a reply, and their report was unanimously 
 against making any treaty. Their report was 
 approved by the whole body of the nation 
 assembled ; and, supposing that the matter 
 was at an end, most of them returned to their 
 homes. ' The next day the commissioners for 
 the government assembled the few who re- 
 mained, and by various threats and promises 
 induced them to sign the treaty. When it 
 
612 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 was known by the people that their country 
 was sold, it produced a general feelin*,' of in- 
 dignation. A large majority of the captains 
 and warriors were strongly opposed to it, an^ 
 the chiefs who were instrumental in forming 
 the treaty were turned out of ofiBce, and others 
 elected in their places. 
 
 By the treaty the Choctaws ceded to the 
 United Stat<?s all their lands east of the Mis- 
 sissippi, and agreed to be removed to lands 
 provided for them west of the Arkansas ter- 
 ritory; one-half as soon as the fall of 1832, 
 and the remainder in one year from that date, 
 at the expense of the government ; food to be 
 furnished to them on the way, and for one year 
 after their arrival. No provision was made 
 in the treaty for refunding any part of the 
 money expended by the Board, in establishing 
 and sustaining the mission, amounting, since its 
 commencement, to more than ^60,000, besides 
 the labors of some 30 missionaries and assist- 
 ants, for 12 years. Besides, the missionaries 
 of the Board were expressly forbidden by the 
 commissioners, in writing, to be present at the 
 ^ treaty ground, though the presence of all other 
 persons was allowed. The treaty was ratified 
 
 Iat Washington, and its effects were sadly visi- 
 ble on the Choctaw nation, producing, as 
 among the Cherokees, distress and desponden- 
 cy among some ; idleness and intemperance 
 among others ; and extensive divisions and 
 confusion in all the affairs of the nation. 
 The influence of this state of things on reli- 
 gious meetings, schools, agriculture, and all the 
 
 I means used for the improvement of the people 
 
 \ was disastrous. 
 
 Many had been received to the churches as 
 the fruit of the late revival, and the whole 
 number of communicants in the spring of 
 1831, was estimated at 360, and the number of 
 baptized children at 244. The number of 
 scholars in all the schools was about 235 ; of 
 these, 144 were boys and 91 were girls ; 112 
 were full blood Choctaws, and 109 were mix- 
 ed ; 86 read in the New Testament, and 75 in 
 any English book; 37 used only Choctaw 
 books, and 165 both Choctaw and English ; 
 74 studied geography, 63 arithmetic ; 148 
 wrote ; 16 composed in Choctaw, 49 in Eng- 
 lish, and 24 in both languages. Besides 
 these, a large number of adults were taught 
 to read their own language with ease, and 
 many of them learnt to write. The Choc- 
 taw Sunday-school Union embraced 6 schools, 
 20 teachers and 180 scholars, of whom 7 had 
 been recently received into the church. The 
 Gospels of Luke and of John had been trans- 
 lated by Mr. Wright ; a work on Scripture 
 history had been prepared by Mr. Williams, 
 and printed, and other works were in a state 
 of forwardness. The missionaries at this pe- 
 riod were Rev. Cyrus Kingsbury and Rev. Cy- 
 rus Byington, assisted by 4 farmers, 2 teachers, 
 3 catechists, and the wives of the missionaries 
 and others. 
 
 Such was the general state of the mission at 
 the time of the treaty. Such was the degree 
 of elevation and forwardness which had been 
 secured by the thirteen years of missionary la- 
 bor which had been bestowed upon the Choc- 
 taw nation ; enough certainly to warrant the 
 belief that another such time of service in that 
 field, could it have been uninterrupted, would 
 have rendered that people in a high degree in- 
 telligent, civilized and Christianized. 
 
 The spring of 1832 found a large body 
 of the Chootaws on the other side of the 
 Mississippi. They had been removed, through 
 forests and swamps of 500 miles, during a 
 winter of great severity, and great suffering 
 had been endured ; men and women, the old 
 and the young, the decrepid and the sick, were 
 all included in this melancholy exodus from 
 the homes and improvements which they had 
 cherished ; and multitudes of them were poor- 
 ly clothed and fed ; bare-footed ; without shel- 
 ter, and in this condition often overtaken by 
 snow-storms in the dreary forests of that re- 
 gion. In crossing the swamps of the Missis- 
 sippi large numbers, with their horses, were 
 surrounded by the rising waters, from which 
 there was no possibility of escape. The cap- 
 tain of a steamboat who rescued one company 
 of Choctaws who had been six days in this pe- 
 rilous condition, said that he saw at least a 
 hundred horses standing, frozen dead in the 
 mud. Before the spring of 1833 the Choctaw 
 nation had all been removed to their new 
 homes, if homes these children of the forest 
 could be said to have on earth. 
 
 In their report for 1833, the Board say, 
 " Definite information respecting the number 
 of the Choctaws who have become settled in 
 their new country has not been received. It 
 is probably between 10,000 and 14,000. The 
 number of the whole tribe before their remov- 
 al commenced, was estimated at 18,000 or 
 20,0001 They generally appear to be satisfied 
 with their new country, and are laboring with 
 a good degree of vigor to prepare for them- 
 selves fiekls and comfortable residences, and 
 manifest considerable industry and public spi- 
 rit, though they have obviously suffered in 
 their habits and moral character by their ex- 
 posures to temptation while preparing to re- 
 move, and while on their long and hazardous 
 journey." 
 
 The new territory occupied by the Choc- 
 taws is situated between the Arkansas and 
 Red rivers, west of the State of Arkansas, with 
 Texas on the south, and the Seminoles and 
 Cherokees on the north. As several of the 
 missionaries removed with the Indians, they 
 began at an early day to locate the missions, 
 and in 1834 there were five stations, viz. : 
 Wheelock, Bethabara, Clear Creek, Bok Tukri 
 lo, and Cedron. These stations were all neat 
 Red river, or Little riv^r, a northern branch, 
 and not far from the south-western corner oi 
 Arkansas. The missionaries were Rev. Messrs.: 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 613 
 
 Kingsbury and Byington, Alfred Wright, 
 Loring S. Williams, and H. R. Wilson, the 
 latter also a physician. There were three 
 churches ; one at Wheelock, one at Bathabara, 
 and one at Bok Tuklo. The first had 71 mem- 
 bers, 60 of whom were professors of religion be- 
 fore their removal ; the second had 113 mem- 
 bers, and the third 23, The missionaries 
 preached as much as their impaired health 
 would allow, and there was some serious in- 
 quiry and a few hopeful conversions. Six or 
 eight schools for instruction in the Choctaw 
 language w^ere either opened or ready to go 
 into operation, but they were entirely inter 
 rupted by the sickness which broke out in the 
 preceding autumn, and prevailed to a fearful 
 extent. In some populous neighborhoods one 
 in every fifteen died, and not a child under a 
 year old was left. " The wretchedness of the 
 people, without suitable food, or medicine, or 
 nursing, was heart-rending, and altogether be- 
 yond description." In the summer and au- 
 tumn of 1834, sickness also prevailed to an 
 alarming extent, and the schools were suspend- 
 ed, and the mission families were almost wholly 
 taken up with the care of the sick and the dy- 
 ing. It was estimated that one in ten of the 
 members of the churches, many of them pro- 
 mising young persons, were hurried to the 
 grave. In the autumn of 1835, Eagle Town 
 and Pine Ridge were added to the sta- 
 tions, and occupied by Messrs. Byington and 
 Kingsbury. Each station had a school and a 
 competent teacher, and the whole number of 
 pupils was 365. A new church was formed in 
 1836, and the total membership was 225. 
 Several tracts in the Choctaw language were 
 printed, amounting, in all, to 30,500 pages. 
 From this period to 1840, no very important 
 changes occurred in the mission. 
 
 From May 1840 to May 1841, 85 persons 
 were admitted to the churches, more by far 
 than during any preceding year since the re- 
 moval of the Choctaws. The whole number 
 of members was now 314. The cause of tem- 
 perance had made considerable progress, and 
 in one district 300 were reported as having 
 signed the temperance pledge. In 1842, one 
 of the missionaries, who was with the Choc- 
 taws before their removal, wrote, — " I do not 
 hesitate to say that there never has been, since 
 I have been acquainted with this people, a 
 season of so much interest as the present. 
 Their crops were never better ; there never was 
 more peace and friendship ; there never was 
 less sickness ; and drunkenness has decreased 
 a hundred per cent, at least." In 1843 there 
 was an accession of more than a hundred to 
 the churches, the total membership amounting 
 to 459. The religious interest continued, and 
 in 1844 one of the missionaries writes, — " In 
 no year since the Choctaws came to this coun- 
 try, have we been permitted to witness greater 
 displays of the power and grace of God in 
 the salvation of sinners." Nearly 100 were 
 
 received by profession this year, and the mem- 
 bership increased to 546. Between 80 and 90 
 were added in 1845, and in 1846 the large 
 number of 218 were received, making the num- 
 ber of members 769. During this long season 
 of spiritual refreshing, increased attention was 
 paid to education, and to the printing of the 
 Scriptures and religious tracts. The four Gos- 
 pels had been printed, and 3,000 copies put in 
 circulation, besides other portions of the New 
 Testament, 
 
 The existence of slavery both among the \ 
 Choctaws and Cherokees had been a fact well 
 understood for many years, and the relation 
 of the missionaries and the mission churches 
 to this evil, had been a matter of increasing 
 solicitude to the friends of these missions. In 
 1848, Rev, Mr. Treat, Secretary of the Board, 
 visited these nations for the special purpose of 
 ascertaining the facts on this subject. His 
 inquiries related to the origin of slavery among 
 these tribes, its character, the number of slaves, 
 their treatment, laws relating to slavery, effects 
 of slavery, the influence of Christianity upon 
 it, and its prospective termination. In his re- 
 port to the Board, at its meeting in Boston, 
 Sept. 1848, he not only presented a full and 
 clear statement on the above points, but also 
 in regard to the policy of the missions, the 
 preaching of the Gospel in reference to slavery, 
 the instruction of slaveholding converts, the 
 admission of slaveholders to the church, the 
 treatment of slaveholders in the church, and 
 the employment of slave labor. This report, 
 drawn up with exceeding clearness and force, 
 was published in the Herald of October 1848, 
 together with an important correspondence 
 between Mr. Treat and the Choctaw and Cher- 
 okee missionaries on the same subject. 
 
 From these documents it appeared, that in 
 the Cherokee churches there were 24 slave- 
 holders, and in the Choctaw churches 38, and 
 that the number of slaves held by them was 
 considerably over one hundred. It also ap- 
 peared that the missionaries themselves em- 
 ployed slave labor in the cultivation of land, 
 sometimes hiring slaves, at other times buying 
 them, " with their own consent, and with the 
 understanding that they should be allowed to 
 work out the purchase money, and then be 
 free." For the reasons assigned by the mission- 
 aries in defence of this practice, and their feel- 
 ings in regard to it, the reader is referred to 
 the report as above. 
 
 Both the Cherokee and Choctaw nations had 
 made stringent laws for the protection of I 
 slavery, the Choctaws especially, enacting in / 
 1846* that any missionary or preacher, who 
 should be found " to take an active part in 
 favoring the principles and notions of the 
 most fatal and destructive doctrines of abo- 
 litionism," should be compelled to leave the 
 nation, and forever stay out of it ; and they 
 also enacted, that to teach a slave to road, 
 write, or sing, without the consent of the owner, 
 
614 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 should bo sufficient to couvict a person of abo- 
 lition principles. 
 
 Having made the needed investigations, 
 through its Secretary, in regard to the question 
 of slavery in these churches, and ascertained 
 the views of the missionaries ; and having dis- 
 tinctly stated the principles that would govern 
 its own action, the Board continued its support 
 of the Choctaw and Cherokee missions, in the 
 belief that divine Providence would indicate 
 from year to year such further measures as 
 ought to be adopted rela,tive to this delicate 
 and difficult subject. 
 
 During each year since the foregoing trans- 
 actions, there have been accessions to the Choc- 
 taw churches, and diligent attention h^ been 
 given to the schools, and to the printingnof the 
 Scriptures and of tracts. But these labors and 
 their results have been of so uniform a charac- 
 ter as not to require un extended notice, ex- 
 cept as they relate to the present condition of 
 the mission. The Herald for January 1854 
 reported 129 admissions to the churches dur- 
 ing the preceding year, and commended the 
 Choctaw government for its zeal in executing 
 its temperance laws. A *' high institution of 
 learning " had recently been established by a 
 Choctaw council, the course of study to be 
 such as is usually taught in the best female 
 institutions in the United States. In the 
 Herald for Sept. 1854, mention is made of 
 much seriousness at some of the stations, and 
 a few conversions. In the same number Mr. 
 Kingsbury writes, " In all the region of coun- 
 try where I labor, there is very little drinking ; 
 nor is there any other open vice, except that a 
 portion of the community do not regard the 
 Sabbath." 
 
 CHURCHES. 
 
 §§ 
 
 II 
 
 
 5 
 
 ll 
 
 Stockbridge 
 
 12 
 19 
 
 *2 
 
 'i 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 '2 
 
 8 
 
 141 
 
 Wheelock 
 
 266 
 
 Mount Zion 
 
 
 Pine Ridge 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 56 
 
 GoodWater 
 
 100 
 
 Good Land 
 
 350 
 
 Mayhew ' . 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 35 
 
 Mount Pleasant 
 
 70 
 
 Six Town 
 
 
 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 80 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 BOARDING SCHOOLS. 
 
 Good Water 
 Pine Ridge . 
 Norvvalk... 
 Wheelock . . 
 Stockbridge 
 
 Totals, 
 
 §£ 
 
 47 
 40 
 20 
 42 
 41 ! 
 
 196 
 
 The foregoing tables exhibit with tolerable 
 accuracy the present state of the Choctaw 
 mission churches and schools. 
 
 At the meeting of the Board in September 
 last, the Prudential Committee reported a state 
 of tilings in the Choctaw nation, which seemed 
 to call for special action. It appeared that the 
 Choctaw Council had recently enacted a law, 
 prohibiting the instruction of slaves, or the 
 children of slaves, at any school or academy, 
 by any person connected therewith ; and also 
 directing the expulsion from the nation of all 
 such persons, missionaries or teachers, as 
 should be found violating this statute. This 
 was simply re-affirming the old law of 1846, 
 before referred to, which, however, had so far 
 remained a dead letter that the missionaries 
 had continued to teach slaves and their child- 
 ren without interruption. The fresh promul- 
 gation of such a law indicated a determination 
 to enforce its requisitions, and the Prudential 
 Committee decided that the Board could not 
 conscientiously maintain its connection with 
 the Choctaw schools upon such conditions. 
 This decision was approved by the missiona- 
 ries, and was in exact accordance W'ith the 
 principles laid down in the well-known letter 
 of Mr. Treat, in 1848. See the Herald for 
 October of that year. 
 
 The subject, on being brought before the 
 Board at Hartford, was referred to a commit- 
 tee, who reported resolutions which, after an 
 animated and protracted discussion, were 
 adopted in the following form : 
 
 " Resolved, That the Board acknowledge, 
 with gratitude to God, the wisdom and fidelity 
 with which, so far as appears from the docu- 
 ments which have been submitted to them, the 
 Prudential Committee are advising and direct- 
 ing the missionaries among the Choctaws, in 
 conformity with the principles presented by 
 them in their correspondence with those mis- 
 sionaries, reported to the Board in 1848. 
 
 " Resolved, That the decision of the Pruden- 
 tial Committee, with the concurrence of the 
 missionaries, not to conduct the bparding- 
 .schools in the Choctaw nation, in conformity 
 with the principles prescribed by the recent 
 legislation of the Choctaw Council, meets the 
 cordial approbation of the Board. 
 
 " Resolved, That the commission given by 
 Christ to his disciples, to go and teach all na- 
 tions and to preach the Gospel to every crea- 
 ture, which is the warrant of Christian mis- 
 sions, is to be respected and obeyed in all the 
 operations and by all the missionaries of the 
 Board ; and that while our missionaries among 
 the Choctaws are allowed in fact to preach 
 the Gospel to all persons, of whatever com- 
 plexion or condition, as they have opportunity, 
 and to preach it in all its applications to hu- 
 man character and duty, they are to continue 
 patiently in the work." 
 
 These resolutions were understood and in- 
 tended as a full endorsement by the Board of 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 615 
 
 the principles of the letter just referred to, and 
 upon which the Committee had been acting for 
 six years, on their own responsibility. But 
 recent events seemed to demand that the Board, 
 in its corporate capacity, should assume this 
 responsibility, and this It did, in the form of 
 the above resolutions, which were adopted by 
 nearly a unanimous vote. 
 
 At the period of closing this article it re- 
 mains a doubtful question, whether the mis- 
 sionaries will be Allowed to preach the Gospel 
 among the Choctaws in the full and unqualified 
 manner required in the last of these resolutions, 
 or whether, being forbidden to do this, they 
 will retire from the field. 
 
 _ Osages. — The mission among the Osage In- 
 dians was commenced in 1820, by a Presbyte- 
 rian body, called the "United Foreign Mis- 
 sionary Society." At that period the Osage 
 tribe consisted of two divisions, located at a 
 considerable distance from each other, the one 
 called the Osages of the Neosho, and the other 
 the Osages of Missouri. The former dwelt 
 upon the Neosho, or Grand river, a northern 
 branch of the Arkansas, west of Missouri ; and 
 the latter occupied a territory in Missouri, 150 
 miles farther north. 
 
 The first station occupied by the above 
 named society was at Union, among the Osages 
 of the Neosho, on the west side of that river, 
 and about 20 miles from its mouth. In 1823 
 a farming settlement was formed at Hopeficld, 
 four miles from Union, the design of which 
 was to teach the Osages the arts and advan- 
 tages of agriculture. Many families settled at 
 this place, and the labor of the farm was car- 
 ried on with much courage and zeal ; but a 
 threatened war with other tribes alarmed them, 
 and some of them fled to Union for protection. 
 A year or two later the place was nearly ruined 
 by an inundation, which swept away all their 
 crops, houses, fences, and every movable thing. 
 At Union, meanwhile, a school was gathered, 
 very small at first, but increasing, till in 182G 
 it numbered 50 scholars. 
 
 Among the Osages of Missouri two stations 
 were formed, one at Harmony, near the west- 
 ern line of Missouri, on a branch of the Osage 
 river ; and one at Neosho, GO miles from Har- 
 mony. Some progress was made in teaching 
 the Indians, and especially in training them to 
 agricultural habits. But they were a migra- 
 tory tribe, accustomed to long hunting expe- 
 ditions, and not stationary more than four or 
 five months in the year, so that it was extremely 
 difficult to do them good. 
 
 In June, 1826, a union was formed between 
 the American Board and the United Foreign 
 Missionary Society, and from that period the 
 Board shared in the responsibility of the Osage 
 mission. But the peculiar habits of the Osages, 
 and their frequent intercourse with white tra- 
 ders, who exerted upon them a most corrupt- 
 ing influence, nearly baffled all attempts to 
 benefit them either in a spiritual or temporal 
 
 respect. The difficulty was further increased 
 by treaties formed at different times with the 
 United States, by which the Osages ceded 
 large portions of their territory, and were finally 
 removed to a considerable distance farther 
 west, and north of the Cherokee country. The 
 old stations were thus broken up, and the 
 Osage mission was abandoned. In view of 
 this result the Board say, in their report for 
 1836: 
 
 " A retrospect of the history of this mission 
 cannot be taken without awakening many pain- 
 ful emotions. Very few, if any of the adults 
 of the tribe have been induced to exchange 
 their savage and migratory habits for a civil- 
 ized jind industrious life ; or to substitute the 
 Chrfttian doctrines and practice for their ridi- 
 culous and absurd superstitions ; nor do they 
 seem to have been in any way benefitted as to 
 their character and condition. The number 
 of youths educated in their schools has been 
 comparatively small, and of this small number 
 few have given evidence that the Gospel, un- 
 der whose daily influence they sat for years, 
 has been to them the power of God unto sal- 
 vation ; while many have returned to their 
 friends and former manner of life, and become 
 as filthy and debased as those who never en- 
 joyed such advantages ; and not a few others 
 have been enticed away to sink into the low- 
 est depths of pollution and misery. The 
 amount of funds expended on the mission has 
 been great ; and so also has been the number 
 of laborers who have engaged in promoting it. 
 Not a few of these, after going through a 
 course of arduous service, have gone down to 
 the grave, the victims of disease and hardship ; 
 others, M'orn down by toil, and disheartened by 
 opposing difficulties, have retired from the field 
 with broken constitutions ; while the remnant, 
 after having labored with much fidelity and 
 patience nearly 15 years, have felt themselves 
 compelled to abandon the work, leaving the 
 Osages, with scarcely an exception, more mis- 
 erable and hopeless, both as to condition and 
 character, than they were when the mission 
 was commenced among them." 
 
 Notwithstanding this most deplorable and 
 discouraging result, circumstances encouraged 
 the hope, in some minds, that something might 
 be done to benefit the Osages, and during the 
 following year, measures were adopted for re- 
 establishing the mission. It seemed probable 
 that the tribe would be permitted to reniaia 
 upon their new territory, and many of them^ 
 particularly those who' had been connected., 
 with the agricultural establishment at Hope- 
 dale, manifested a disposition to abandon the 
 chase and cultivate the soil. Funds were also 
 expected from the sale of the old missioa 
 buildings and improvements, and the govern- 
 ment, agreeably to treaty, had furnished those 
 Osages who wished to engage in agriculture, 
 with farming implements, and aid in procuring 
 stock. Under these circumstances, Mr. Ke- 
 
016 
 
 NOPwTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 qua, who had labored mnch with this tribe, 
 visited their towns, in the autumn of 1836, and 
 selected a spot for a large agricultural colony, 
 on the western branch of the Neosho. He 
 had made considerable progress in preparing 
 the requisite buildings and other improvements, 
 and a preacher and school-teacher were expect- 
 ed to join him as soon as circumstances would 
 permit. But during the following summer, a 
 portion of the tribe began to manifest their 
 hostility to the enterprise, the cattle belonging 
 to the station were killed, and other property 
 seized ; the settlers themselves were threatened 
 and assaulted, and the chiefs justified these 
 savage acts. The annoyance became so great 
 that neither usefulness nor safety could be 
 hoped for, and Mr. Requa removed his effects 
 and left the Osage country. No mission has 
 since been attempted among them. 
 
 Chkkasaws. — The Chickasaw Indians origin- 
 ally occupied the northern portion of the State 
 of Mississippi, and numbered about 3,000. 
 The first mission among them was commenced 
 by the Synod of South Carolina and Georgia, 
 in 1821 ; but was transferred to the Board, in 
 December, 1827. The number of stations at 
 the time of the transfer was four, viz. : Mon- 
 roe, Tokshish, Martyn, and Caney Creek. 
 
 In 1827 there was an interesting revival at 
 Munroe, and it extended to the whole country 
 round, and continued many months. " People 
 came thirty or forty miles^ to inquire what 
 these things meant, and some of the most hope- 
 less, stubborn sinners, were the first subjects of 
 the work." Six were admitted to the church 
 at Munroe this year ; and in 1829 seventeen 
 were admitted to the church at Tokshish, and 
 25 children of believing parents were baptized. 
 Schools were taught at three of the stations, 
 the namber of scholars varying from 20 to 30. 
 Most of these children learned to read and 
 write, and many of tl/ ^ became acquainted 
 with geography and | besides acquiring 
 
 a knowledge of the Tl i language. During 
 
 the years 1828 and / .9, a great reformation 
 took place among Vtie Chickasaws, in regard 
 to the use of intoxicating liquors. The leading 
 men discountenanced and nearly prevented the 
 sale of whisky, and one of the missionaries 
 remarked that he had not seen an intoxicated 
 Indian for a year and a half. 
 . For two or three years previous to 1830, 
 /"the people had been agitated with the question 
 ^ of selling their lands to the United States, and 
 /emoving to a region west of the Mississippi. 
 frhe State of Mississippi extended its own laws 
 'over the Indians, which broke the force of 
 their temperance and other laws, and intemper- 
 ance with its associated vices prevailed through 
 the nation " like an overwhelming tide." In 
 the fall of 1830, a treaty was concluded with 
 the Chickasaws, by which they agreed to sell 
 their land and remove west of the Mississippi, 
 provided a country could be found for them 
 ^ith which they should be pleased. A delegation 
 
 was sent to explore the new country, and on 
 their return they reported in favor of a tract of 
 land lying between the Sabine and Red rivers, 
 in the province of Texas. But this report was 
 never acted upon, and the treaty was not rati- 
 fied. The Indians, therefore, still remained in 
 suspense, and in great despondency, the State 
 laws beginning to operate severely upon them, 
 and their intercourse with the whites leading 
 thera into temptation and moral debasement. 
 
 This state of things greatly interrupted mis- 
 sionary labor, and vet there was considerable 
 seriousness in the churches, and some who had 
 been excommunicated returned, and gave evi- 
 dence of sincere repentance. Two of the 
 schools were maintained with an average of 
 25 or 30 scholars. 
 
 In October, 1832, a new treaty was formed 
 by which the lands of the Chickasaws were to 
 be sold in the same manner as the public lands 
 of the United States, and the proceeds paid 
 over to them, out of which they were to pur- 
 chase a new country and remove themselves ; i 
 provided however, that if they could find no 
 new country that suited them, they might re- 
 main permanently on one-third of the territory j 
 held by thera, they being subject to the laws * 
 of the State of Mississippi. But they must 
 not remain settled together, on one compact 
 third of their country, but must be dispersed 
 over the whole of it. This arrangement greatly 
 aggravated the troubles of the Indians ; for 
 white intruders kept pressing upon them from 
 all quarters, harrassing them by vexatious law- 
 suits and depredations upon their property, 
 and introducing large quantities of liquor, 
 which was sold often at an enormous price. 
 " No less than 300 gallons of these liquors were 
 brought into the single neighborhood of 
 Tokshish, within a period of three months, 
 where a grocery for the sale of them had been 
 erected, near the house of God." The more 
 intelligent Indians complained and remonstrat- 
 ed without effect. 
 
 Some of the missionaries lingered on the 
 ground, endeavoring, against every disadvan- 
 tage, to keep up the churches and schools, 
 until 1834, when the mission was abandoned. ) 
 It had been provided in the treaty, that the 
 Indians might sell the reservations upon which 
 they rerfiained, and this fact attracted the at- 
 tention of purchasers, who entered the country 
 with money and whisky, and exerted a most 
 corrupting and ruinous influence throughout 
 the whole extent of the Indian settlements. 
 They were at first tempted with strong drink, 
 carried to every man's door ; and then excited 
 with the hope of making large gains by selling 
 their lands ; and when they received their pay- 
 ments, with characteristic improvidence, they 
 gave themselves up to idleness, gambling and 
 intoxication. They were thus rendered unfit 
 to receive instruction, and all hope of doing 
 them essential and permanent good was at an 
 end. The Chickasaws never removed in a { 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 Gir 
 
 body to a new territory, but have either mia- 
 gled with other tribes west of the Mississippi, 
 or wasted away under the State laws that were 
 extended over them. 
 
 Creeks. — The Board sustained a mission 
 among the Creek Indians from 1832 to 1836. 
 That portion of the tribe to which these labors 
 were directed, was located at that time in the 
 territory west of Arkansas, on both sides of 
 the Arkansas river. Their number was about 
 2,500. A much larger portion of this tribe, 
 some 18,000, resided on lands owned by them 
 in the State of Alabama, but with these the 
 Board had no connection. 
 
 The first and only missionaries which the 
 Board at any time had among the Creek Indi- 
 ans, were John Flemming and his wife, and 
 R. L. Dodge, physician. Mr. Flemming de- 
 voted himself with great zeal to the study of 
 the Creek language, which ho one had ever 
 before attempted to reduce to writing. He 
 found it an exceedingly embarrassing work, on 
 account of the numerous and difficult combina- 
 tions of consoqants ; but, with the aid of an 
 interpreter, he prepared an elementary book 
 in the language, containing also select portions 
 of Scripture, amounting to 100 pages, of which 
 
 500 copies were printed. A few hymns were Aut he was unacquainted with the Ottawa dia- 
 
 also prepared, to be sung at meetings 
 
 I't was found difficult, however, from the 
 first, to interest the Creeks in matters of reli- 
 gion, or of education. They were generally 
 indifferent or hostile to the missionaries and 
 their operations, and the difficulty was in- 
 creased by the efforts of the government to 
 dispossess them of their lands, and remove 
 them farther west. It was judged, also, that 
 their jealousy was awakened by the presence 
 among them of the missionaries of two other 
 religious denominations, viz., the Baptist and 
 the Methodist. The number attending reli- 
 gious meetings was at all times small, and it 
 was not found practicable to maintain a school 
 of any promise within their territory. 
 
 In the autumn of 1836, a number of the 
 Indians, including some of their chief men, for- 
 warded a petition to the United States' agent, 
 in their neighborhood, requesting that the mis- 
 sionaries and teachers of all denominations 
 might be removed from their territory. The 
 petition was instigated by white men residing 
 in the vicinity of the Creeks, and was accom- 
 panied by injurious and slanderous charges, 
 and, without affording the missionaries any 
 opportunity to examine or repel the allega- 
 tions, they were all directed immediately to 
 leave the Creek country. 
 
 As the Creeks of Alabama had, a little be- 
 fore this, been removed to their new country, 
 west of Arkansas, composing, with those al- 
 ready there, a body of from 15,000 to 20,000, 
 it was hoped that the mission might be re- 
 sumed among them with better prospects of 
 success, as soon as missionaries could be ob- 
 tained ; but, for reasons satisfactory to the 
 
 Board, no attempt of this kind has ever bocu 
 made. 
 
 Ottawas.— The Ottawa Indians, for whose 
 benefit a mission was commenced in 1822, oc- 
 cupied five small reservations in the north-west- 
 ern part of Ohio. They were but a remnant 
 of the tribe, and numbered only about 800 ; 
 and they were found in a very poor and de- 
 graded state, their great vice being an exces- 
 sive fondness for ardent spirits. 
 
 The mission was commenced at the above 
 date, by the Western Missionary Society, and 
 was transferred by them to the United For- 
 eign Missionary Society. The station was at 
 Maumee, about 30 miles from the mouth of 
 the Maumee river, which empties into the 
 upper end of Lake Erie. The care of the mis- 
 sion was subsequently assumed by the Ameri- 
 can Board, and was brought to a close in 1833. 
 
 A school was established at Maumee, which 
 in 1828 had 70 pupils, about 40 of whom re- 
 mained long enough to make useful acquisi- 
 tions. Seven of them became hopefully pious, 
 and persevered in their Christian course. A 
 good farm was opened at the station, and was 
 put under good cultivation. The missionary, 
 Mr. Yan Tassel, was untirius: in his labors. 
 
 lect, which no missionary had ever acquired, 
 and as he could find no good interpreter, he 
 could do little in the way of preaching. In 
 1830, a small church, formed several years pre- 
 vious, but much scattered, the Lord's Supper 
 not having been administered for six years, 
 was gathered and strengthened, and much se- 
 riousness prevailed. 
 
 During this year Mr. Van Tassel had so far 
 mastered the Ottawa language as to prepare 
 translations of the Lord's prayer and the ten 
 commandments, and also a few hymns and 
 spelling lessons, which were printed at Hudson, 
 Ohio. It was hoped that some of the Indians 
 would now learn to read their own language. 
 About this time, however, they were induced 
 to sell their lands lying in the State of Ohio, 
 amounting to about 50,000 acres ; but most 
 of them absolutely refused to accept of lauds 
 off'ered them by the United States, west of the 
 Mississippi, or to be removed to that country. 
 
 They were thus left without lands and with- 
 out a home, surrounded by white settlers and 
 exposed to every species of temptation, and in 
 the worst possible condition to be boneiitted 
 by missionary labors. Their only prospect 
 seemed to be an unsettled, wandering life, till 
 they should waste away and disappear. Their 
 mission was therefore discontinued. 
 
 The number of pupils connected with the 
 boarding school at Maumee, during the ten 
 years of its existence, was about 90. Nearly 
 half of these acquired an education sufficient 
 for the ordinary business of life. The church, 
 which was formed in 1823, had 26 members at 
 the time the mission was disbanded, including 
 the mission family. The congregations on the 
 
618 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 Sabbath, daring the last year, averaged about 
 80, and much seriousness prevailed, both among 
 the Indians and the white settlers, and fifteen 
 or twenty persons gave evidence of a change 
 of heart. It was never practicable, however, 
 to form a temperance society among the Otta- 
 was, and the intemperate and quarrelsome ha- 
 bits which generally prevailed among them, 
 were the occasion of much suffering, and a hin- 
 drance to all efforts for bettering their con- 
 dition. 
 
 Ojibwas. — ^The Ojibwav Indians, called also 
 Chippeways, are located near the south-west 
 shore of Lake Superior, and about the head 
 waters of the Mississippi river. The mission 
 among them was commenced in 1830, at the soli- 
 citation of gentlemen connected with the Amer- 
 ican Fur Company, who spent most of the year 
 at their trading posts in that quarter, and who 
 were well acquainted with Indiana in that re- 
 gion. During the first year the only person 
 employed was Mr. Frederic Ayer, a teacher 
 and catechist ; but in 1831 the Board sent out 
 Rev. Messrs. Hall and Boutwell, and the next 
 year they were joined by another company, 
 consisting of a mechanic and a teacher, with 
 their wives, and two female teachers. 
 
 They had now four stations, viz., La Pointe^ 
 Yellow Lake, Sandy Lake, and Leech Lake? 
 The first of these places is on an island in a 
 large bay, near the south-west part of Lake 
 Superior, and was a place of resort for large 
 numbers of Indians, besides about 200 who re- 
 sided there. Yellow Lake is 150 or 200 miles 
 south-west of La Pointe, and was, in 1832, the 
 residence of nearly 400 Indians. Sandy Lake 
 station, near the Mississippi river, had about 
 300 Indians residing near it ; and Leech Lake, 
 which communicated with the Mississippi by 
 one of its western tributaries, had an Indian 
 population of 700. Each of these stations was 
 near the post of one of the American fur 
 traders ; and though the number of Indians 
 was not large, other bands, scattered over that 
 vast region, were constantly passing and re- 
 passing, and often remaining a considerable 
 time for the purposes of traffic. 
 
 The circumstances supposed to favor this 
 mission, were the friendly disposition of most 
 of the men engaged in the fur trade ; the loca- 
 tion of the country, remote from the influence 
 of unprincipled white men ; and the determin- 
 ation of the agent and traders of the American 
 Fur Company that no intoxicating liquors 
 should be used in trade with the Indians. The 
 principal obstacles to be encountered were the 
 migratory and warlike character of the In- 
 dians ; the difficulty of supporting missionary 
 families in a region so remote and dreary ; and 
 the opposition of a few French Catholics from 
 Canada, engaged in the fur trade. 
 
 Schools were opened at an early period of 
 the mission at three of the stations, and the 
 number of pupils in them all in 1834 was be- 
 tween 40 and .50. A church was organized at 
 
 La Pointe in the summer of 1833, consisting 
 of 12 persons, including the mission families. 
 In July 1834, Mr. Ely, of the Sandy Lake 
 station, removed to Fon du Lac, at the west>- 
 ern extremity of Lake Superior, as affording a 
 more promising field of permanent missionary 
 labor. The missionaries had made so much 
 progress in the acquisition of the Ojibwa lan- 
 guage in 1835, as to prepare for the press 
 quite a number of books, among which were a 
 spelling-book, Gallaudet's Picture Reading and 
 Defining Boj^k, a selection of Stories, a treatise 
 on Natural History, and a book of hymns. 
 
 In 1836 the Yellow Lake station was re- 
 moved fifty miles south-west, to Pokegu- 
 ma Lake, where the soil was better, and fish 
 and game more abundant. During this year 
 there was an increased interest in hearing the 
 Gospel read and preaclied, and some of the 
 Indians manifested an anxious concern for 
 their salvation. Two Indians, a man and his 
 wife, were hopefully converted, and received to 
 the church. In 1837 the church at La Pointe 
 numbered nine, exclusive of the mission family, 
 and a new church of three adult Indians and 
 the mission family, was organized. The schools 
 were all in successful operation, and quite a 
 number of Ojibwas had learned to read well, 
 both in their own language and in English. 
 An increasing desire was manifested, especially 
 about Pokeguraa, to cultivate the soil, and 
 several Indians erected houses, with aid from 
 the mission, and raised good crops of potatoes. 
 It was found that the migratory habits of the 
 Ojibwas resulted more from ignorance and 
 poverty, than from any real attachment to 
 an unsettled hunter life. They knew not how 
 to enclose and cultivate farms, neither could 
 they obtain agricultural implements, seeds, and 
 furniture for dwellings, without aid. With 
 suitable assistance they seemed capable of 
 being brought up to civilized life, and to a 
 condition of intelligence and comfort. 
 
 In 1838, the mission family at Leech Lake 
 removed to Pokeguma, a change which it was 
 thought would give greater efficiency to the 
 mission. At this place there were six or eight 
 hopeful conversions during the year, and the 
 Sabbath was strictly observed by all the fa- 
 milies residing near the mission. The Gospel 
 of John and the Acts of the Apostles were 
 printed this year, and the Gospel of Matthew 
 was prepared for the press. In the autumn ol 
 the preceding year the Ojibwas concluded a 
 treaty with the United States Government, bj 
 which they ceded a large tract from the south- 
 ern portion of their country, the line beginning 
 at the 46th parallel of latitude on the Missis 
 sippi river, and extending through upper Lake 
 St. Croix to Lake Superior. The Indians 
 were to remove from all the country south o 
 the line, whenever the president of the Unitec 
 States should direct. The station at Poke 
 guma was within the ceded territory ; and thosi 
 Indians who had just begun to lead a settlec 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 619 
 
 and agricultural life, were in trouble and sus- 
 pense, anxiously inquiring what would become 
 of their houses and cultivated fields, if the pre- 
 sident should order their removal. 
 
 In 1839, one of the missionaries, after stat- 
 ing some encouraging facts, adds, " The mass 
 of the tribe, however, manifest very little de- 
 sire to improve their condition, wretched as it 
 is. Few are desirous to learn anything of the 
 Bible, and most of them seem to have the im- 
 pression that the white man's religion is not 
 made for them. They say they are a distinct 
 race, and tlie Great Spirit designed they should 
 be distinct. They live differently, and go to a 
 different place when they die." With these 
 views they could not be supposed to regard the 
 objects for which the missionaries were labor- 
 ing, as anything very desirable. 
 
 The vicinity of Fon du Lac was deserted by 
 the Indians in 1840 ; and as there was no 
 prospect that they would again make it a 
 place of resort, the station was discontinued. 
 Pokeguma and La Pointe were now the only 
 remaining stations, and the missionary force 
 consisted of two missionaries, three catechists 
 and teachers, and five female assistants. The 
 printing in Ojibwa, this year, embraced the 
 epistles of J.ohn and James, making 30 pages ; 
 a tract on the Atonement, 20 pages ; Peter 
 Parley's Geography, 139 pages, of which 500 
 copies were printed, making an aggregate of 
 94,000 pages ; and the whole amount printed 
 in the language was 70*7,000 pages, and 21,000 
 volumes. Most of this printing was done in 
 New England. 
 , For several years a hostile feeling had ex- 
 isted between the Ojibwas and their neigh- 
 bors, the Sioux, and frequent acts of savage 
 violence had been perpetrated. In the early 
 part of 841, the Sioux made an attack upon 
 the Christian Indians of Pokeguma, in de- 
 scribing which one of the missionaries says: 
 "War has desolated Pokeguma. On the 
 morning of the 24th of May, more than 100 
 Sioux fell upon our quiet settlement, and in 
 two short hours made it a scene of war and 
 death. The enemy bore away the scalps of 
 two interesting girls, one a scholar of our 
 school. They did not molest us, or injure 
 any of our property." Immediately after this 
 outbreak, the Ojibwas all fled from Pokeg- 
 uma. 
 
 In August, 1842, the mission was strength- 
 ened by the arrival of Messrs. Wheeler and 
 James, with their wives, and Miss Spooner. 
 Mr. and Mrs. James, however, were obliged, 
 by the impaired state of her health, to re- 
 turn to their friends, after being in the field 
 about a month. 
 
 In October, 1842, the superintendent of In- 
 dian Affairs in the north-west, Eobert Stuart, 
 Esq., met the Ojibwas at La Pointe, and ne- 
 gotiated a treaty with them, by which they 
 ceded to the United States the whole of their 
 lands lying on the south and south-west of 
 
 Lake Superior, and extending westerly to the 
 sources of the Mississippi river, except some 
 reservations, embracing a large tract about 
 Fon du Lac, and another about Sandy Lake. 
 It was not expected, however, that the Indians 
 would be dispossessed for many years, or that 
 any portion of the country would be occupied 
 by white settlers, except the mineral districts 
 on the southern shore of Lake Superior. By 
 the terms of this treaty, annuities in money, 
 goods, provisions, &c., were to be granted to 
 the tribe, amounting to $25,000 a year, for 
 25 years ; also $2,000 annually for schools ; 
 also $5,000 for the purchase of stock, agricul- 
 tural utensils, &c. ; $75,000 for liquidating 
 their debts to the traders ; and $13,000 for 
 gifts to the half-breeds — amounting, with the 
 annuities, to $768,000. Blacksmiths, carpen- 
 ters, and farmers were also to be furnished. 
 Between 3,000 and 4,000 Indians, including all 
 the most influential and intelligent chiefs, were 
 assembled at La Pointe on the occasion of this 
 treaty, and the whole transaction was charac- 
 terized by uprightness and fair dealing on the 
 part of the commissioner, and fully understood 
 and approved by the Indians. Much was done 
 to encourage the missionaries in their labors. 
 Religious meetings were held nearly every day 
 during the two or three weeks of the sitting 
 of the council, no business was transacted on 
 the Sabbath, and many of the Indians, influ- 
 enced by the example of the commissioner, 
 listened to the word of God, who had seldom 
 if ever heard it before. By this treaty it was 
 stipulated that the intercourse law, forbidding 
 the introduction of intoxicating liquors into 
 the Indian country, should be continued in 
 force over the ceded territory. 
 
 In the spring of 1843, the Indians who were 
 driven from Pokeguma by the hostile incur- 
 sions of the Sioux, and who had remained dis- 
 persed nearly two years, reassembled at that 
 place, and were joined by several families from 
 other bands. Here they fortified themselves, 
 and commenced their agricultural labors with 
 more diligence and energy than they had ever 
 before manifested. They also paid good at- 
 tention to public worship on the Sabbath, and 
 the members of the church were nmch quick- 
 ened. At the same time the Holy Spirit de- 
 scended upon the mission families at La Pointe, 
 and some of the Indians gave evidence of hav- 
 ing been savingly renewed. During this year 
 also the amount of reading matter in the Ojib- 
 wa language was much increased by the print ing 
 of the whole New Testament, the Peep of Day, 
 and an enlarged collection of hymns, making 
 in all 2,500 copies, and 910,000 pages. This 
 printing was done at the expense of the Amer- 
 ican Tract and Bible Societies, and of the 
 American Board. 
 
 An experiment of a year or two convinced 
 the missionaries that it would be impracticable 
 to maintain the station at Pokeguma with a 
 reasonable hope of success, and it was given 
 
620 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 up. A little subsequent to this, a degree of 
 uncertainty was thrown around the prospects 
 of the Ojibwas by tlio conversion of Wiscon- 
 sin territory into a State. A portion of the 
 tribe fell within the chartered limits of that 
 State, and what disposition would be made of 
 them was uncertain. The tide of emigration 
 was constantly rolling in upon them, and they 
 were in constant expectation that the presi- 
 dent would give the order for their removal. 
 But notwithstanding these dark prospects, 
 which for a series of years hung over the 
 Choctaws and the mission among them, they 
 have been preserved, though some of them 
 have removed a little further to the north and 
 west, and the mission has not been without 
 some visible fruits from year to year. 
 
 For the last two or three years only two sta- 
 tions have been maintained, viz., at Bad River 
 and Crow Wing. The latter, west of the 
 Mississippi, and near its northern extremity, 
 was given up on account of the war between 
 the Ojibwas and the Dakotas, the constant in- 
 troduction of ardent spirits, and the small num- 
 ber of Ojibwas residing in that quarter. The 
 former, on Lake Superior, was favorably no- 
 ticed in the Herald for September, 1854, the 
 missionary, Mr. Wheeler, saying, " The past 
 year has been one of progress among our peo- 
 ple. They were never more quiet, friendly, 
 industrious, or temperate, and they were never 
 more disposed to listen to truth. Our meet- 
 ings upon the Sabbath have been well attend- 
 ed. Never before have so many Indians come 
 so regularly to our religious services, and lis- 
 tened so attentively to the preached word. A 
 number of Indians, including three Indian 
 chiefs, have identified themselves with the 
 Christian party, and call themselves praying 
 Indians. I have seen but one Indian drunk 
 at Bad River for more than a year. A school 
 is maintained of about 50 pupils. The Indi- 
 ans the past year have planted more than ever 
 before, and have a prospect of a good crop." 
 The station was soon to be reinforced, and 
 hopes were entertained that much might yet 
 be done for the temporal and spiritual good of 
 the Ojibwas; but events of a discouraging 
 nature have occurred, and at the late meeting 
 of the Board in Hartford, notice was given of 
 the entire suspension of the mission. 
 
 Dahlias. — The American Board commenced 
 a mission among the Dakotas or Sioux in the 
 summer of 1835. The tribe, as then estimatr 
 ed, was one of the most powerful on the conti- 
 nent, embracing about 25,000 Indians, who 
 wandered, for hunting and fishing purposes, 
 through the extensive countiy lying between 
 the 43d and 49th degrees of north latitude, 
 and extending from the Mississippi to the Mis- 
 souri rivers. 
 
 The first missionaries were the Rev. Thomas 
 S. Williamson and Jedediah D. Stevens, with 
 their wives ; Alexander Huggens, farmer, and 
 his wife ; and Sarah Poage and I^ucy C. Ste- 
 
 vens, assistants. They selected for their sta- 
 tions Lake Harriet and Lac qui Parle, the 
 former five or six miles west of Fort Snelling, 
 which is on the west bank of the Mississippi, 
 near its junction with the St. Peters, and about 
 forty miles below the Falls of St. Anthony ; 
 and the latter on the St. Peters river, about 
 200 miles above its junction with the Missis- 
 sippi, or 400 following the course of the river 
 in a north-westerly direction from Lake Har- 
 riet. Mr. Williams, who was also a physician, 
 and Mr. Huggens and Miss Poage, remained 
 at Lake Harriet ; while the rest of the com- 
 pany proceeded to Lac qui Parle. The first 
 few years were chiefly occupied in preparing 
 suitable buildings for the mission families and 
 school, and in the study of the Dakota and 
 French languages, the latter being thought 
 important in order to communicate instruction 
 to the mixed French and Indian population 
 found at the trading posts and other places in 
 that region. The Dakota language was found 
 to be peculiarly destitute of a large class of 
 words which were indispensable in giving in- 
 struction on moral and religious subjects. As 
 illustrations, Dr. Williamson found that in 
 Dakota a " good heart " meant simply joy, and 
 a " bad heart " grief. A " hard heart " stood 
 for courage. Giving religious instruction in 
 such a language was a slow process. But the 
 word was not without efifect ; and in 1 838 
 churches had been formed at both the stations, 
 that at Lac qui Parle having received in all 16 
 members, and that at Lake Harriet a smaller 
 number. The school at the former station had 
 about 40 pupils, and that at the latter 10 or 
 15. The tribe suffered severely from the pre- 
 valence of the small-pox in the autumn of 1837, 
 and great numbers died in some localities. 
 Famine also prevailed to some extent, and the 
 Ojibwas were making frequent incursions into 
 the Dakota territory, destroying or stealing 
 horses and cattle, and often murdering the peo- 
 ple. These causes, altogether, operated to 
 discourage the people and retard the mission ; 
 yet the missionaries were mastering the lan- 
 guage, and drew increasing numbers within 
 the sound of the Gospel. Portions of the 
 Scriptures were also translated, including the 
 Gospel of Mark, and selections from other G os- 
 pels and the Acts, and from the Old Testament, 
 amounting in all to 107,500 pages. 
 
 In 1840, the Indians near Lake Harriet all 
 fled, through fear of their Ojibwa neighbors, 
 and the mission at that place was suspended. 
 At Lac qui Parle more progress was made 
 this year than in any preceding year. Three 
 preaching services were held each Sabbath, 
 two in Dakota and one in English, and the 
 hearers varied from 40 to 80. Four Indian 
 women were admitted to the church, and 16 
 children of the church members were baptized. 
 A Sabbath-school was opened early in the 
 year, which soon increased to over 30 pupils ; 
 and in the day-school there was an average of 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 621 
 
 30 or 40 scholars, and a total of 112. Print- 
 ing was also done to the amount of 173,000 
 pages. 
 
 In 1842, a house of worship was erected at 
 Lac qui Parle, with the aid of some of the 
 Indians. The monthly concert was held in 
 the Dakota language, attended by 40 or 50 
 Indians. It was estimated that 200 Indians 
 had attended the school, more or less, and that 
 about 100 had learned to read intelligently. 
 
 A new station was occupied in 1843 at Tra- 
 vers des Sioux, at the head of boat navigation 
 on the St. Peters, about 75 miles from its 
 junction with the Mississippi. In 1846 and 
 1847, two other stations were occupied, one 
 called Kaposia, on the west bank of the Missis- 
 sippi, a little below the St. Peters, and the 
 other Xapedan, on the St. Peters, 30 miles 
 from Fort 'Snelling. To these places mission- 
 aries and teachers were sent, at the earnest 
 solicitation of the Indians themselves, and it 
 
 was the first time that the Dakotas had ever 
 shown such an appreciation of missionary in- 
 struction and aid. The Indians residing around 
 the stations generally refrained from the use 
 of ardent spirits, and manifested an increasing 
 inclination to till the soil. About the same 
 time invitations came from several other Indi- 
 an villages, requesting that religious teachers 
 might come and reside among them ; but there 
 were none to send. 
 
 In the autumn of 1848, the committee, wish- 
 ing to make full proof of the Dakota mission, 
 sent out two more missionaries and their wives, 
 and new stations were formed at Prairievillo 
 and Red Wing, making six in all, one having 
 been given up. There M^ere now 8 missiona- 
 ries in this field, and 5 male and 14 female 
 assistants. The report for 1850 presented the 
 following statistics, which, as they are tiiore 
 full than any of a later date, are presented 
 here: 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 SCHOOIS. 
 
 CHUKCHEB. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 .a 
 
 .a 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 .2_. 
 
 1! 
 
 1 
 
 
 '3 
 
 a 
 
 n 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 li 
 
 ft 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 g 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 50 
 
 2 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 
 
 
 l§ 
 
 Lac qui Parle . 
 
 4 
 
 16 
 
 70 
 
 6 
 
 20 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 28 
 
 Travers des Sioux 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Prairieville . . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Oak Grove . . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 Kaposia .... 
 
 12 
 
 5 
 
 24 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 17 
 
 Red Wing . . . 
 
 Totals .... 
 
 12 
 
 6 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 31 
 
 2 
 32 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 54 
 
 30^ 
 
 27 
 
 144 
 
 11 
 
 32 
 
 57 
 
 6 
 
 In July, 1851, treaties were entered into be- 
 tween the Dakota Indians and the U. S. 
 Government, by which the Indians ceded a 
 large portion of their territory, only reserving 
 a tract about 150 miles long and 20 wide, in 
 the valley of the St. Peters. But the treaty in 
 this form was not ratified, the Senate refusing 
 to confirm the reservation, and merely permit- 
 ting the Dakotas to remain upon it during 
 the pleasure of the president. To these modi- 
 fied terms the assent of the Indians was subse- 
 quently obtained, and in 1853 they removed on 
 to the reservation. As all the stations but one 
 lay within the ceded territory, they were for- 
 saken of Indians, and of course given up. The 
 Herald, for September, 1854, notices the existr 
 ence of but two stations. Yellow Medicine and 
 New Hope, so that from the six flourishing 
 stations above mentioned, the mission was sud- 
 denly reduced to a very restricted condition, 
 thus furnishing another instance of the harrass- 
 ing and disastrous effects of the government 
 
 policy, in driving the Indians from their lands, 
 and compelling them to feel that they have no 
 resting place, and no security for any spot of 
 earth they may dwell upon, whether held by 
 permission or under the most solemn treaty 
 stipulations. To conduct missions successfully 
 among a people subject to such removals, liv- 
 ing in constant dread of government force, or 
 treachery, and rendered suspicious of the mo- 
 tives of white men, has been found extremely 
 difficult, and often impossible ; and hence the 
 frequent abandonment of Indian missions, after 
 vast expenditures of labor and money upon 
 them and the sacrifice of many precious lives 
 in efforts to sustain them. 
 
 As the Dakotas hold the territory they aro 
 upon at the pleasure of the president, tho 
 order for their removal to some other uncertain 
 abode may be looked for at any time, and, 
 therefore, great uncertainty attends the mis- 
 sion among them, both as to its usefulness and 
 permanency. 
 
622 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 Abenaqais. — This band of Indians is settled 
 at St. Francis, in Lower Canada, on tlie south 
 side of Lake St. Peters, about 60 miles below 
 Montreal. Their missionary and teacher, Pe- 
 ter Paul Osunkhirhine, is a native of this 
 tribe, and received a good English education 
 at Hanover, N. H., where he became hopefully 
 pious. He afterwards returned home, with the 
 hope of doing good to his people. Finding it 
 impracticable to teach them the English lan- 
 guage, he prepared an elementary book in 
 their own language, embracing a translation 
 of passages of Scripture, and some other useful 
 pieces. This book, with a small religious 
 tract, was printed at the expense of the Board 
 in 1830. With these he returned again to his 
 people, and having obtained the appointment 
 of schoolmaster from the Canadian govern- 
 ment, he opened a school, at the same time 
 holding meetings on the Sabbath, and endea- 
 voring, in other ways, to enlighten their be- 
 nighted minds. Many children and yout|i at- 
 tended his school, and even some adults learned 
 to read his books. Some who listened to his 
 religious instructions became serious and hope- 
 fully pious. This awakened the opposition of 
 the papists, who complained of him to the gov- 
 ernment, for interfering with the religion of 
 the Indians, and he was forbidden to hold 
 meetings, or in any manner to meddle with 
 their religious concerns. With this injunc- 
 tion he could not conscientiously comply, and 
 he was, therefore, much persecuted, and de- 
 prived of his salary from the government. He 
 then applied to the Committee of the Board, 
 for such an annual allowance as would furnish 
 him the means of subsistence, and enable him 
 to continue his labors among his people. This 
 was granted, and he has persevered in his self- 
 denying and important work to the present 
 time. 
 
 Osunkhirhine was licensed to preach in Jan- 
 uary, 1836, by the Champlain Presbytery, and 
 in the following June, he was ordained as an 
 evangelist to his native tribe. Upon this, the 
 opposition of the papal community was much 
 embittered, and efforts were made to get him 
 removed from the reservation, but the governor 
 refused to interfere. When he commenced his 
 labors, the whole tribe were ignorant and 
 bigoted papists. In 1837, more than .30 per- 
 sons attended his preaching, all of whom had 
 renounced the Romish church, in spite of the 
 most bitter persecution. From five to twenty 
 children were gathered into a school, accord- 
 ing as the people were at home or on their 
 hunting grounds, and three persons, including 
 the wife of Osunkhirhine, had joined the Pro- 
 testant church. In 1840, the church members 
 had increased to 27, and a prosperous school 
 of 23 pupils was in operation. 
 
 In the winter of 1841, President Lord, of 
 Dartmouth College, visited Osunkhirhine at 
 St. Francis, and in a subsequent statement, he 
 remarked :" The church now consists of 29 
 
 members, out of 300 souls, the number of the 
 tribe now resident at St. Francis. Osunkhir- 
 hine's labors are steady, and well adapted to 
 the condition of the people. His wife, a full- 
 blooded Indian, is remarkably interesting — a 
 model. I beg to commend the mission. Its 
 importance, I think, cannot be too highly ap- 
 preciated. Its relation to the French popula- 
 tion gives it its greatest importance. There 
 is hardly any other light between Montreal 
 and Quebec. The despised church at St. 
 Francis is hts witness along the great river." 
 
 In 1843, it was reported : " Five Indiana 
 have been received to the church on profession 
 during the last year, and the whole number 
 received since Mr. Osunkhirhine commenced 
 his labors, is 46, 41 of whom still survive, and 
 are members in good standing. The papal 
 priests are active, as heretofore, in opposmg 
 the progress of spiritual religion among the 
 Indians." In 1845 it was recorded : " Sixty- 
 six Indians, all converted from Romanism, and 
 hopefully renewed by the Spirit of God, have 
 been received to the church." The opposition 
 of the papal priests availed little. In 1846 it 
 was estimated that one-third of the 300 com- 
 posing the Abenaquis tribe, had become Pro- 
 testants, through the labors of this judicious 
 and devoted native missionary. 
 
 In June, 1851, Mr. Treat, one of the secre- 
 taries of the Board, was directed to visit the 
 Abenaquis tribe, which he found composing 
 " an irregularly-built village on the right bank 
 of the St. Francis, four miles from the St. 
 Lawrence. The population of the tribe is 
 three or four hundred, and in their general 
 appearance and habits of life, they compare 
 well with the Canadians around them. Mr. 
 Osunkhirhine has a plain but comfortable 
 church, erected partly at the expense of the 
 Board, in which he holds three services on the 
 Sabbath, and three meetings during the week." 
 
 The latest intelligence from this mission is 
 to January, 1854. The missionary continues 
 to labor with his usual fidelity, having been at 
 his post more than twenty years, and, though 
 contending still against papal influence, and 
 often tried by the delinquency of the converts, 
 he has a reasonable prospect of continuance 
 and usefulness. 
 
 Pawnees.— The Pawnee tribe, at the com- 
 mencement of the mission among them, in 
 1835, was divided into four bands ; Pawnee 
 Republicans, Pawnee Peeks, Pawnee Loups, 
 and Grand Pawnees, — amounting in all to 
 between 6,000 and 7,000 persons. They occu- 
 pied an extensive territory on both sides of 
 the Platte river, in Nebraska. The first mis- 
 sionary company consisted of Rev. John Dun- 
 bar, missionary, Benedict Satterlee, physician 
 and catechist, and Samuel Allis, assistant. 
 Owing to the wandering habits of these Indi- 
 ans, little could be done for several years in 
 the w^ay of systematic labor. Their head-quar- 
 ters were at Bellevue, the seat of the govern- 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 623 
 
 ment agency, and Messrs. Dunbar and Satter- 
 lee generally accompauied large bands of In- 
 dians in their long hunting excursions, with a 
 view both to acquire the language and to give 
 instruction, as opportunity was afforded. Mr. 
 Satterlee died on one of these tours, in a some- 
 what mysterious manner. 
 
 In 1840, these four bands appeared strongly 
 inclined to abandon the hunter life, and settle 
 in villages for the cultivation of the soil. The 
 tract of country selected for this purpose was 
 located on Council and Plumb creeks, on the 
 north side of Loup Fork, which empties into 
 Platte river. To this place the missionary 
 families removed in the spring of 1841. The 
 government, agreeably to certain treaty pro- 
 visions, had furnished the Indians with large 
 numbers of oxen, plows, &c., and they had 
 begun to plow and sow their farms with 
 great zeal and satisfaction. 
 
 In this early stage of their progress they 
 were destined to a terrible onset from a neigh- 
 boring hostile tribe. Early on a morning in 
 June, 1843, a strong party of Sioux came upon 
 one of the Pawnee villages by surprise, when 
 a course of fighting and plunder ensued which 
 lasted till mid-day, and resulted in killing 67 
 Pawnees, wounding twenty others, seizing 200 
 horses, and burning 20 out of 41 lodges of 
 which the village was composed. The value 
 of property lost was estimated at $8,000 or 
 $10,000. The Indians of this village were 
 scattered among the other bands, being fearful 
 of another attack should they attempt to re- 
 build the village ; and in all the villages agri- 
 cultural labor was greatly retarded by the con- 
 stant fear of hostile tribes. Meanwhile the 
 missionary brethren and sisters, amid many 
 agitating scenes, prosecuted their labors with 
 patience and hope ; and especially had they, 
 in 1846, accomplished an important work, in 
 the translation of the Gospel of Mark into the 
 Pawnee language. 
 
 In 1847 the missionaries, in view of the 
 frequent assaults made upon the Pawnees, and 
 the danger to which their own lives were ex- 
 posed, withdrew from the field, and the mission 
 has not since been resumed. 
 
 Oregon Indians. — After several exploring 
 expeditions among the Indians west of the 
 Rocky Mountains, the Board entered upon a 
 mission there in the autumn of 1836. Their 
 attention was directed to three tribes, embrac- 
 ing the Kayuses, among whom was the Waii- 
 latpu station ; the Nez Perses, among whom 
 were the Clear Water and Kamiah stations ; 
 and the Flat Heads, in whose neighborhood 
 was the Tshimakaiu station. These stations 
 were provided with suitable laborers, so that 
 in 1840 the whole force consisted of four mis- 
 sionaries, one physician, two male and six fe- 
 male assistants. They were not only kindly 
 received, but the Indians showed the utmost 
 eagerness to receive instruction ; and other 
 tribes, hearing that teachers had come into the 
 
 I country, sent pressing messages requesting that 
 jone or more might be sent to dwell amon^ 
 ' them. 
 
 The three tribes above named were anxious 
 also to engage in agriculture, and hundreds of 
 families settled near the mission stations, and 
 cultivated the ground so assiduously that in a 
 little time they had produced enough for their 
 comfortable subsistence. Their desire for re- 
 ligious instruction exceeded anything ever be- 
 fore met with among the North American In- 
 dians. "Among the Nez Perses," says the 
 report for 1840, "the congregation had in- 
 creased from such a number as could be accom- 
 modated in a small school house, to between 
 one and two thousand, many coming from the 
 adjacent bands. All seemed eager for religious 
 instruction, and it was believed that the Spirit 
 of the Lord was working on the hearts of many. 
 As many as 2,000 made a public confession of 
 sin, and promised to serve God. Doubtless , 
 many did this with a very imperfect idea of ' 
 what was involved in it, though not a few 
 were thought to give evidence of saving con- 
 version." A similar religious interest was 
 manifested among the Kayuses. 
 
 About this time the mission received, as a 
 donation from the Sandwich Island churches, 
 a small printing-press, with the requisite type 
 and furniture, with paper, &c., all estimated at 
 about $450. From the same source they re- 
 ceived the year before §80 in money, and ten 
 bushels of salt. The press was immediately 
 set up at Clear "V^iiter, and employed to print 
 an elementary school book of twenty pages. 
 The Indians were highly gratified with a book 
 in their own language, and new interest was 
 found to be imparted to the schools. In 1841 
 a second book was prepared and printed in the 
 Nez Perses language, and 800 copies printed, 
 making 41,600 pages. A saw mill and grist 
 mill were also put in operation at Clear "Water, 
 and a grain mill at Waiilatpu, all of which 
 afforded valuable aid to the mission families, 
 and encouraged a settled life among the In- 
 dians. 
 
 For the three or four succeeding years the 
 mission was attended with great apparent suc- 
 cess, not, however, without some serious defec- 
 tions among the Indians, and at times abusive 
 treatment from the younger and more savage 
 portion of the tribes. 
 
 In the autumn of 1847, however, a scene oc- 
 curred at the Waiilatpu station, among the 
 Kayuses, of the most tragical and distressing 
 character. Owing to the prevalence and ex- 
 treme fatality of the measles and dysentery, a 
 portion of the Indians became jealous of the 
 missionaries, and especially of Dr. Whitman, 
 who was stationed at Waiilatpu, supposing 
 that if they would they might use their super- 
 natural powers to stay the dreadful malady. 
 Some even pretended that Dr. W. was giving 
 them poison, in order to destroy their lives. 
 They therefore determined on revenge, and on 
 
624 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 the 29th of Nov., 1847, they fell upon the 
 "NVaiilatim station, and most cruelly massacred 
 Dr. "Whitman, his wife, and twelve other per- 
 sons. Of the latter, several were emigrants 
 from the States, and one was an assistant mis- 
 sionary. The details of this tragical affair 
 ore of a most heart-rending nature. They are 
 fully given in the " Herald " for July, 1848, by 
 Mr. Spalding, one of the missionaries, with an 
 account of his own wonderful escape. About 
 fifty women and children^ who were taken and 
 held as captives, were redeemed through the 
 agency of Mr. Ogden, chief factor of the Hud- 
 son Bay Company, after having suffered every 
 abuse and indignity for nearly a month. 
 
 In addition to the above-mentioned cause for 
 this outrage, it was believed to have been pro- 
 moted in some measure by the Romish priests, 
 from St. Louis, who had come into that region, 
 and who had been active in opposing the Pro- 
 testant missionaries. This suspicion was 
 strengthened by the fact that several children 
 of the murderers were baptized by one of these 
 priests, while yet the hands of their parents 
 were wet with the blood of their victims. It 
 was also known that the Catholic priest last 
 named was in the company of anindian who was 
 pui-suing Mr. Spalding with a loaded pistol, 
 with a view to murder him. From these and 
 other circumstances it is not difficult to deter- 
 mine the relation and agency of Romish priests 
 to this scene — one of the most savage and ap- 
 paling to be met with in all the annals of mis- 
 sionary adventure. 
 
 Within a short time after the massacre, all 
 the stations were abandoned, it not being con- 
 sidered safe for the mission families to remain.. 
 Some of the missionaries continued to labor 
 in Oregon, among the whites, but no mission 
 has since been attempted among the Indian 
 tribes. 
 
 Indians in New York. — The Indians in New 
 York are remnants of the " Six Tribes," and 
 reside at^he four following places, viz. : Tusca- 
 rora 
 Seneca, 
 
 miles s( 
 western, 
 places 
 Missionj 
 In 181 
 Maine, 
 caroras, 
 Indians, 
 
 .] 4 miles east of Niagara river ; 
 inc_ f,^, C0L.|^g^iQ . Cattaraugus, 30 
 
 f^' 
 
 ^t:Zi:,fi'^''j^^^s^^n}:iko^^ 
 
 ,«J^. The missions at these 
 I'erred by the United Foreign 
 
 irfere. 
 
 j.ky to the Board, in 1826. 
 IjJjj .. John Eliot, a young man from 
 , ^'ed upon his labors among the Tus- 
 rhere he found a population of 240 
 a church of 15 members ; a mission 
 house and farm worth $1,800, and a school, 
 which he immediately re-organized, with 30 
 scholars. In 1831, a revival of religion was 
 enjoyed at this place, and the church was in- 
 creased to 56 members. At this period for 
 the first time, the sanctity and obligations of 
 the marriage relation were acknowledged by 
 these Indians, and 21 children were baptized. 
 The people also began more strictly to regard 
 the Sabbath, and to be more temperate and 
 industrious. 
 
 At Seneca, a boarding-school was in opcrc 
 tion, which, in 1828, embraced 70 pupils ; als 
 a church of 49 members. In 1829, a ne\ 
 house of worship was dedicated, the money fo 
 which, — $1,700, had been subscribed by th 
 chiefs and young men of the tribe. Durin< 
 this year, also, the Gospel of Luke, the Sermoi 
 on the Mount, and about thirty hymns wer< 
 printed in the Seneca language. A revival o 
 religion was enjoyed at this station in 1831. 
 
 At Cattaraugus, there was special attentioi 
 to religion i« 1827, and a church of 12 mem 
 bers was organized. For several subsequen 
 years there was much attention to religion a 
 this place. 
 
 The station at Alleghany had enjoyed thi 
 services of a teacher several years, but hat 
 been without a missionary till 1829, when Mr 
 William Hall was ordained to that work. 
 
 In 1843, the whole number of Indians resid 
 ing in Western New York, was estimated ai 
 3,000, about three-fourths of whom were Sene 
 cas, and the remainder Tuscaroras, Onondagas 
 Cayugas, Oneidas, and Mohawks, remnants o 
 the once powerful Six Nations. They occu 
 pied five reservations, embracing about 110,00( 
 acres. A treaty had, a little before this, beer 
 concluded, by which a portion of their lands 
 were ceded to the United States, and this sub 
 ject caused much complaint and trouble. 
 
 The whole number of church members ai 
 this time was 234, of whom 49 were at Tusca 
 rora, 20 at Seneca, 51 at Cattaraugus, anc 
 114 at Alleghany. The number of pupils ir 
 the schools at these stations was estimated ai 
 200. The mission press at Seneca was em 
 ployed in printing various small works, and ir 
 1845, more than 52,000 pages were executed 
 In respect to agriculture and the comforts o 
 life, great good had been effected among th( 
 the Indians. One of the missionaries reportec 
 in 1848, " three times as much productive 
 labor as there was in 1832, and five times as 
 much provision obtained." 
 
 Of late years some changes have occurred 
 and the mission has been reported under twc 
 separate heads, viz., the Seneca mission, anc 
 the Tuscarora mission. The Seneca missioE 
 has 4 stations, 4 missionaries, 15 female as- 
 sistant missionaries, and one native assistant 
 In the two churches there are 169 members; 
 and in the 10 schools there are 310 pupils. 
 
 The Tuscarora mission has one station, one 
 out-station, one missionary, four female assist- 
 ant missionaries, and two native helpers. The 
 church has 96 members ; and the schools, ol 
 which there are two, have 70 scholars. 
 
 Under the labors of the missionaries, these 
 Indians have advanced to a high state of civ- 
 ilization, and, in respect to industrial, social, 
 and moral habits, they show a degree of im- 
 provement rarely excelled by those who have 
 been raised from a savage state. 
 
 Moravian Missions to North Americai* 
 Indians. — The labors of the Moravian breth- 
 
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS. 
 
 625 
 
 ren among tlie Indians of North America were 
 commenced as early as 1735. Their attention 
 was first directed to the Creek nation, but their 
 labors were soon interrupted by hostilities be- 
 tween the English and the Spaniards. Subse- 
 quently, during the 18th century, they estab- 
 lished missions at various points in the south- 
 ern and middle States, and they often had the 
 pleasure of seeing the Indians embracing the 
 truth, and even of witnessing some signal tri- 
 umphs of the Gospel.; but they were frequent- 
 ly compelled to abandon interesting fields, by 
 hostilities among neighboring tribes, and espe- 
 cially by the adverse events of the English and 
 French war, and the war of the revolution. 
 To follow them in the varied results of their 
 labors through this long period, would require 
 more space than can be allowed in the present 
 work. 
 
 Within the present century the Moravians 
 have had missions among the Delawares, the 
 Chippeways, the Creeks, the Cherokees, and 
 some smaller tribes, whom they have followed 
 in their voluntary or forced removals, quit- 
 ting their posts only when their continued 
 labors became fruitless or impossible. 
 
 At the present time their missions are con- 
 fined to two tribes : the Delawares, on the 
 Kansas river, where they have more than 350 
 Indians under religious instruction, and the 
 Cherokees, in their new western home, where 
 they have two stations, and about 120 com- 
 municants. The returns /rom these missions 
 are very incomplete, rendering it impossible to 
 give full statistics, or to state what are their 
 present prospects and means of usefulness. 
 
 Church Missionary Society. — The only 
 mission which the Church of England has 
 had among the North American Indians is 
 that among the Esquimaux, on Red river, 
 south of Lake Winnipeg and north of Minne- 
 sota. It was commenced in 1822 by Eev. J. 
 West, the Hudson Bay Company's chaplain, 
 on Red river. - In the course of a year or two, 
 a school-house and church were erected, and 
 considerable progress was made towards bring- 
 ing the i iidians under instruction. In 1823 
 Rev. D. T. Jones sailed from England for the 
 purpose of strengthening this mission, and in 
 1825 he was joined by the Rev. W. Cochran. 
 The progress of the mission at this date had 
 been such, that the school-house and church 
 were too small, and new and more commodious 
 ones were erected. In 1832 there were 3 sta- 
 tions, with each a church, and a total of 143 
 communicants. The number attending public 
 worship was 800, and the number gathered 
 into schools was 330. 
 
 At the present time, as nearly as can be as- 
 certained from the incomplete returns, there 
 are connected with the Red river mission 10 
 stations, 8 missionaries, 12 assistants, 8 of 
 whom are natives, 1733 attendants on public 
 worship, 507 communicants, 22 schools, and 
 724 pupils. The missionaries have acquired 
 40 
 
 the Indian language, so as to preach in it, and 
 they have translated portions of the New Tes- 
 tament, the church catechism, the marriage 
 service, and the communion and baptism'al 
 services. The language of these Indians, de- 
 nominated the Cree language, is said by the 
 missionaries to bear a strong aflBuity to the 
 Greek. 
 
 In the department of agriculture, consider- 
 able progress has been made. The Indians 
 build very comfortable houses, raise large 
 patches of barley, wheat, potatoes, &c., and 
 enjoy i^uch of social order and comfort. With- 
 in a short time Moose Lake has been occupied 
 as a station, under the labors of a pious Indian 
 who reads the New Testament well, and has 
 the entire confidence of the missionaries. — Rev. 
 E. D. MooRB. 
 
 Episcopal Board. — A mission was com- 
 menced at Green Bay, by the Missionary So- 
 ciety of the Protestant Episcopal Church in 
 the United States, in 1825, under the superin- 
 tendence of Rev. Mr. Nash, which was sus- 
 pended in 1827. In 1829, it was renewed, 
 under the superintendence of Rev. R. F. Codle, 
 by whom it was continued, under many em- 
 barrassments and difficulties, till 1837, when 
 treaties were entered into between the United 
 States and many of the north-western tribes of 
 Indians for their removal west of the Missis- 
 sippi. The unsettled condition of the tribes 
 around the mission, consequent upon these 
 treaties, and their subsequent removal, led to 
 the discontinuance of the mission. The results 
 of this mission are thus stated : About 270 In- 
 dian children enjoyed the benefits of the school, 
 some of whom have die8 in the faith of Christ, 
 and the comfortable assurance of a blessed 
 hereafter. Some are now adorning the doc- 
 trine of God our Saviom* by a life of consistent 
 piety. 
 
 Some time after the breaking up of this 
 mission. Bishop Kemper, accompanied by Rev. 
 Mr. Gregory, embraced a number of tribes in 
 a circuit, in a visit to the scattered members 
 of his diocese; and on the 2d of December, 
 1838, he consecrated a church at Duck Creek, 
 erected by the Oneidas with a portion of the 
 funds received from Government ; and in 1839, 
 Rev. Solomon Davis had charge of the church. 
 The department of Indian Missions was subse- 
 quently transferred to the Domestic Commit- 
 tee ; who proposed a plan for an Indian dio- 
 cese, with a missionary bishop, and considera- 
 ble effort was made to raise money to endow 
 the bishopric ; but as yet, the object has not 
 been accomplished. A mission has,_ however, 
 been commenced among the Chicktusaws, and 
 an appropriation has been made by the United 
 States Government toward sustaining a school 
 under the direction of the mission. 
 
 American Missionary As.sociation. — Ojib- 
 wa Mission.— Tins mission comprisi^ four sta- 
 tions, located at Red Lake, Cass Lake, Belle 
 Prairie and St. Josephs, Minnesota Territory ; 
 
626 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS— NOVA Si^TIA. 
 
 tho first three on the head waters of the Mis- 
 sissippi river, and the last on the North Red 
 river, where it enters the British possessions. 
 This is the only mission in all that region of 
 country. It was commenced under the patron- 
 age of the Western Evangelical Missionary 
 Society, in 1843, and afterwards transferred to 
 the American Missionary Association. The 
 Oiibwa (or Chippeway) Indians compose one 
 of the largest tribes in the United States, num- 
 bering some 30,000. They are divided into 
 small bands of from 200 to 500 souls; the 
 bands each having its own home, hunting- 
 ground and chief, all located from 25 to 100 
 miles apart. 
 
 At three of these stations, boarding-schools 
 are established, and the scholars are required 
 to engage in some kind of manual labor a por- 
 tion of each day. Churches containing native 
 converts have been formed at Red Lake and 
 Cass Lake. The other stations have been 
 commenced within the last two years. 
 
 When this mission commenced, the Indians 
 had no domestic animals, except dogs, and no 
 agricultural implements. They raised nothing, 
 but depended for subsistence on hunting and 
 fishing, wild rice and sugar ; and, being in a 
 poor country for game, they often suffered with 
 hunger, and sometimes resorted to the use of 
 human flesh to satisfy it. Now some of these 
 bands supply themselves abundantly with foo^, 
 
 and have to spare for their starving neighbor 
 of other bands. For this improvement the; 
 arc indebted to the instruction and example c 
 the missionaries, and the aid received from ther 
 in plowing their lands. — Rev. G. Whipple. 
 
 NAME OP STATION. 
 
 1^ 
 
 ■i. 
 II 
 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 il 
 
 1| 
 II 
 
 Red lAke...*. 
 
 1843 
 
 1846 
 1852 
 1852 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 2 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 3 
 2 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 2 
 * 
 
 12 
 
 on 
 
 Cass lAke 
 
 ^o 
 
 St. Josephs 
 
 7 
 
 BeUe Prairie 
 
 Totals 
 
 * 
 
 as 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Not 
 
 reported. 
 
 
 
 
 
 American Indian Mission Association.— 
 This society, the seat of whose operations is ii 
 Louisville, Ky., have four missions, ' locate( 
 among the Choctaws, Creeks, Weas, Pianke 
 shaws, Miaraies, and Putawatamies"; with si: 
 stations and eight out-stations ; 28 missiona 
 ries and assistants; 21 churches, with 130i 
 communicants ; 126 baptisms during the year 
 and 165 pupils in schools. This society reprc 
 sents a portion of/the Baptist denomination ii 
 the south-west. 
 
 GENERAL TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 socianES. 
 
 Presbyterian Board 
 
 American Baptist Union 
 
 Methodist PI Church North and South 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society .... 
 
 American Boardf ^ 
 
 American Missionary Association . . 
 
 Church Missionary Society 
 
 Moravians 
 
 American Indian Missionary Association 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 O-d 
 
 
 •s 
 
 H 5* 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 < a 
 
 1. 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 % 
 
 1 
 
 1835 
 
 11 
 
 8 
 
 55 
 
 3 
 
 
 96 
 
 
 1-817 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 14 
 
 1,371 
 
 6 
 
 1B19 
 
 44 
 
 46 
 
 
 
 
 5,359 
 
 
 1828 
 
 
 22* 
 
 
 28 
 
 
 2,003 
 
 13 
 
 1818 
 
 24 
 
 -21 
 
 73 
 
 15 
 
 19 
 
 1,669 
 
 26 
 
 1843 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 17 
 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 
 1822 
 
 10 
 4 
 
 8 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 
 507 
 
 22 
 
 
 6 
 
 28* 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 1,300 
 
 67 
 
 113 
 
 150 
 
 LG3 
 
 64 
 
 57 
 
 12,817 
 
 51' 
 '21( 
 
 188^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 711 
 
 3! 
 
 72^ 
 
 16{ 
 433] 
 
 Includes assLstants. f Statistics for 1853. 
 (See Appendix, p. 784) 
 
 NOVA SCOTIA : The province of Nova 
 Scotia is situated on the eastern side of the 
 continent of North America, between north 
 latitude 43^ 25' and 47°, and between west 
 longitude 43^ 40' and 66° 25'. It is one of 
 the provinces of British North America. It 
 was first colonized by the French, by whom it 
 was called Acadie, or Acadia. It was finally 
 ceded by France to Great Britain in 1713. 
 Its principal natural divisions are Nova Scotia 
 Proper and Cape Breton. Its area is about 
 
 18,600 square miles ; its population 276,11*; 
 according to the census of 1851. The reli 
 gious parties, when ranged under the two gen 
 eral divisions of Protestants and Catholics 
 stand thus : Protestants, 206,483 ; Romai 
 Catholics, 69,634. Of the Protestant churches 
 the more prominent are the Established Churcl 
 of England and Ireland ; the Presbytcriai 
 Church ; the Associate Baptist ; the Wesleyar 
 Methodist ; the Congregational ; and the Evan 
 gelical Lutheran. The religious statistics giver 
 
NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 627 
 
 in this article are to be understood as those of 
 1854, except where it is otherwise stated. 
 
 The Church op England is recognized by 
 the ancient laws of the province as the Estab- 
 lished Church. This legal recognition was ef- 
 fected in 1758, but though various civil enact- 
 ments, as to the limits of parishes, appointment 
 of^ church-wardens and vestrymen, were ob- 
 tained thereby, nothing beyond the mere name 
 of an establishment has for many years existed. 
 The permanent endowment of AVindsor Col- 
 lege, under the exclusive control of this church, 
 has been discontinued by the state ; so that, 
 in effect, the only privilege which remains of a 
 distinctive nature, is that the bishop retains 
 ex-officio a seat in the legislative council of the 
 province. _ There is much probability that this 
 offensive distinction will soon be removed, and 
 that then the name, as well as the*privileges of 
 an establishment, will be erased from the civil 
 statute book. The number of adherents to 
 this church in 1851 was 36,482. The list of 
 clergy for 1854 contains one bishop, one arch- 
 deacon, 65 ordained ministers, and two travel- 
 ing missionaries. These are located in 40 dif- 
 ferent towns and settlements. Four of the 
 clergy are connected with Windsor College, 
 and three with Halifax Grammar School : 
 two are retired from service, and one is an 
 agent for the Colonial Church and School 
 Society. Until recently, large annual remit- 
 tances for the support of the clergy and col- 
 lege professors, had been received from the 
 British Society for the Propagation of the 
 Gospel in Foreign Parts, and even, it is under- 
 stood, from grants of the Imperial Parliament 
 of Great Britain and Ireland. The foreign 
 aid is now greatly curtailed, and will, it is ex- 
 pected, in the course of a few years, altogether 
 cease. The effect of this change of policy has 
 been far from disastrous. A large portion of 
 the wealth of the province is found within the 
 pale of this dfcirch, and nothing is wanting to 
 secure permanent and growing prosperity but 
 the prudent management of its internal re- 
 sources. Already this has been tested in the 
 large endowment secured by subscription for 
 Windsor College, (£10,000,) and in the efforts 
 made to sustain in thorough efficiency the Di- 
 ocesan Society and the Foreign District of the 
 Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. 
 
 Presbyterian Church. — Under this head 
 are grouped the adherents of three distinct 
 churches, who, though holding the same stand- 
 ards, are yet quite independent in church gov- 
 ernment, if not really antagonistic in feeling 
 and pursuit. Their source of dispute, or 
 rather, ground of separation, depends entirely 
 upon their respective origin. They have all 
 descended from the Presbyterian Churches of 
 Scotland, and hold the distinctive principles of 
 what are there denominated. Kirk, Free 
 Church, and United Presbyterian. The old- 
 est, largest, and most influential of these bodies 
 in Nova Scotia is that which arose from the 
 
 two secession churches. Burgher and Anti- 
 burgher. A union was happily effected be- 
 tween the adherents of these, and of all the 
 Presbyterians then in Nova Scotia, in the 
 year 1817. Only one Presbyterian minister 
 remained aloof, and he was personally favor- 
 able, while his congregation being originally 
 independent, was unfavorable to this union. 
 The first Presbyterian missionaries arrived in 
 Nova Scotia in 1766, but no permanent locar 
 tion was made before 1771. 
 
 The first presbytery was formed in 1786, 
 under the designation of Presbytery of Truro. 
 Nine years afterwards, another was formed in 
 Pictou, and so designated. At the period of 
 the union above referred to, there were three 
 presbyteries, comprising in all 19 ordained 
 ministers, and 25 congregations. The great 
 difficulty all along experienced by this church, 
 has been the difficulty of obtaining an ade- 
 quate supply of ministers. 
 
 At first, and for many years, the only source 
 of supply was the parent churches in Scotland, 
 and the missionary spirit there and then exist- 
 ing was not so ardent as to overcome, with suf- 
 ficient readiness and frequency, the terrors of a 
 climate generally reputed, though falsely, as 
 vibrating between the extremes of heat and 
 cold. In 1816 a society was formed to pro- 
 cure the establishment of an academy for the 
 training of native youth, for the ministry and 
 other learned professions. The basis proposed 
 was sufficiently liberal to unite all dissenting 
 bodies, and the means of support was to be en- 
 dowment by the State. This effort was for a 
 time apparently successful, but never so much 
 so as to acquire the character of permanency. 
 Ultimately it became a bone of contention, in- 
 troduced bitter animosity and religious hate 
 into the surrounding community, and became 
 a watchword for political party, so as to form 
 an effectual hindrance to ecclesiastical union 
 on the part of the different Presbyterian bodies. 
 Eventually all connection with this institution 
 was abandoned by the Presbyterian Church 
 of Nova Scotia, and then it became a matter 
 of dire necessity with that church to provide 
 and maintain an educational institute out of 
 her own resources. Several years, however, 
 elapsed before this step was taken. In 1848 
 measures were initiated with a view to the 
 erection of a theological seminary, as prepara- 
 tory to the Divinity Hall. A professor of 
 philosophy was appointed, who for a time took 
 charge of the literary classes, as well as logic, 
 and natural and moral philosojihy. At pre- 
 sent, 1854, there are two professors in the se- 
 minary, one having charge of the classes in 
 languages, mathematics, and natural philoso- 
 phy ; the other logic and moral philosophy, 
 with other branches. In the Divinity Hall 
 there are two professors, to one is committed 
 biblical literature, to the other theology, sys- 
 tematic and pastoral. The literary and phi- 
 losophical classes have an annual session of 
 
628 
 
 NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 six months, and students are required to attend 
 three years in order to complete their curricu- 
 lum. The Divinity Hall remains in session 
 six weeks, and the lourso of study extends 
 over four veurs ; but as the Hall meets annu- 
 ally, immetliately after t'le seminary, the entire 
 com-se for students of divinity does not exceed 
 six yeai-s. A fixed standard of qualification 
 for entrance to the seminary has been estab- 
 lishetl, such as can be acquired at the general 
 schools and academies of the province, and 
 special i)rovisiou is ma(}e to admit students 
 who have received part of their training else- 
 where to such a standing in the seminary or 
 hall as their acquirements may be found, on 
 examination, to entitle them. 
 
 The Synod of the Presbyterian Church of 
 Nova Scotia meets annually on the last Tues- 
 day of June, and is the final court of judica- 
 ture — there being no ecclesiastical connection 
 with the Church in Scotland, either in regard 
 to pecuniary support or spiritual control. It 
 has now (in 1854) under its inspection three 
 presbyteries in Nova Scotia and one in Prince 
 Edward's Island. The presbytery of Pictou 
 includes 15 congregations ; of these 14 enjoy 
 a settled ministry, and one of these a collegiate 
 charge. There are various mission stations 
 within the bounds of this presbytery which 
 will soon be able to support, as they now re- 
 quire, the labors of a separate minister. One 
 member of this presbytery is located in Mera- 
 michi, New Brunswick, and is the only or- 
 dained minister of this connection now settled 
 in that province. The presbytery of Tours in- 
 cludes seven congregations, and at present all 
 are supplied with a settled ministry. Several 
 mission stations are in course of preparation 
 for the same position, and one of these is in 
 New Brunswick. The presbytery of Halifax 
 has within its bounds seven 'congregations. 
 Six are now under a stated pastorate. Mis- 
 sion stations are thus numerous and promising. 
 The presbytery of Prince Edward's Island con- 
 tains seven congregations, six ministers, and 
 several mission stations. In each of these 
 presbyteries there are congregations whose 
 local extent, number of adherents, pecuniary 
 resources, and prospect of increase are calling 
 aloud for division and subdivision : but the 
 supply of ministers is yet too scanty to admit 
 of compliance with a policy that would soon 
 double and redouble the eflSciency and spirit- 
 ual prosperity of the best portion of the Church. 
 At present there are but three ordained pro- 
 bationers, one retired minister who takes occa- 
 sional appointments, and four licentiates. The 
 business of the synod, during the interval of 
 its meetings, is conducted by four distinct 
 boards, one for the Home Mission supply, dis- 
 tributing supply of probationers according to 
 the wants of the several presbyteries, and as- 
 sisting such stations with the means of occa- 
 sional supplies, under the direction of the pres- 
 byteries in whose bounds these are placed ; a 
 
 second board, for the superintendence of the 
 Foreign Missionary operations of the church ; 
 a third, for the superintendence of the seminary 
 and hall, and a fourth for legally receiving and 
 appropriating the moneys of the church which 
 may be entrusted to their care. 
 
 The following statistics will afford some 
 idea of the pecuniary resources and numerical 
 strength of the P. C. N. S. : ordained minis- 
 ters, 38 ; licentiates, 4 ; self-sustaining congre- 
 gations, 34 ; homo mission stations, 6 ; supple- 
 mented congregations, 3 ; foreign mission sta- 
 tions, 1 ; adhering population, according to 
 census ^1851,) 28,767 in Nova Scotia ; the 
 population in Prince Edward Island not cor- 
 rectly ascertained, but not under 4,000, and in 
 New Brunswick 1,000. If to all this we add 
 2,000 for the church at Aneiteum, New Heb- 
 rides, we have a gross amount of adherents, 
 35,767 souls, who are depending for spiritual 
 oversight on the church. 31 congregations 
 return 5,369 communicants, 276 accessions. 
 According to the statistical tables and finan- 
 cial returns for 1854, the average salary paid 
 to each minister is supposed to be nearly 
 £130 currency, or £104 sterling. 
 
 This would yield a return in round \ ^a kqq a a 
 
 numbers of j- . . . . , 
 
 Home Mission rcceii)ts during same year.. 258 2 2>i 
 
 Foreign " " u n « _ 433 15 2 
 
 Synod Fund " " " ., 81 2 1>^ 
 
 Semin.ary Fund " " " .. 328 8>^ 
 
 Miscellaneous purposes, not strictly \ ^ 404 8 
 
 denominational j . . . . , 
 
 Total raised during year 1854 £8,005 7 9>^ 
 
 currency, or £6,404 6 3 sterling. 
 
 Additional funds under the care of the Educa- 
 tional Board' : 
 
 Theological Professorship, funded inter© ' t.. . £581 11 10 
 Various funds, bequests, &c., " " ... 1,500 4 6 
 
 Total £2,08116 4 
 
 currency, or £1,665 9 1 sterling. 
 
 Church of Scotland. — InWrder of date 
 the Church of Scotland is the next branch of 
 the Presbyterian Church in Nova Scotia. 
 For a long period very painful and injuri- 
 ous animosity existed between this body and 
 the Presbyterian church of Nova Scotia. 
 Shortly after the union of all the Presbyterians 
 in the province, in 1817, the strife commenced 
 and raged so long as the state-paid academy 
 of Pictou remained as a source of dispute. 
 Happily this has been removed, and the very 
 unseemly and destructive feuds which it en- 
 gendered, have to a great extent disappeared, 
 and feelings of friendship are now being che- 
 rished by ministers and people. This church 
 has all along depended for pecuniary support 
 and ministerial supply on the parent church in 
 Scotland. In 1824, the Glasgow Colonial So- 
 ciety was organized (in Scotland) with a view 
 to supply the Presbyterian population of the 
 colonies with ministers of the Church of Scot 
 land. At the disruption which took place ir 
 
NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 629 
 
 May, 1843, not fewer than 8 ministers left the 
 synod of Nova Scotia to fill up the breaches 
 at home. In 1844, this synod divided, a ma- 
 jority declaring- in favor of the Free Church, 
 and assuming the designation " Synod of No- 
 va Scotia, adhering to the Westminster stand- 
 ards." For several years a large proportion of 
 the congregations that had been deserted by 
 their ministers, remained vacant, but latterly 
 these have been to a considerable extent sup- 
 plied by new accessions from Scotland. The 
 synod now (1854) consists of 4 presbyteries. 
 There are, however, in all, but 9 ordained min- 
 isters, and 1 ordained missionary, and 4 cate- 
 chists. While the adhering population in 
 Nova Scotia alone was, in 1851, 18,867. It 
 will thus be seen that a very great deficiency 
 of pastoral oversight still exists. The greater 
 number of those ministers now in the field are 
 supported by the Home Church, so that this 
 church, as a whole, is far from self-sustain- 
 ing. 
 
 Free Church or Synod of Nova Scotia, 
 adherixg to the westminster standards. — 
 This body was formed in 1844, and consists 
 of the same number of presbyteries as the 
 body from which it was separated. It includes 
 a ministry, however, of 24, of whom 19 are 
 located in Nova Scotia, and 3 in Prince Ed- 
 ward's Island, one in Newfoundland, and one 
 in Bermuda, W. I. The adhering population 
 in Nova Scotia, in 1851, was found to number 
 25,820. A Free Church College for the lower 
 provinces of British North America is located 
 at Halifax, N. S., having 2 professors. Also 
 an academy, with a rector and 2 masters, 
 which is designed to prepare for the college. 
 Hitherto the supply and support of ministers 
 in this connection has greatly depended on the 
 resources of the Free Church of Scotland ; but 
 from the above institution, in connexion with 
 a Theological Hall, the native youth have been 
 trained, so that the first year's students have 
 advanced so far as to be licensed and located 
 in the different vacancies and mission stations 
 during the present year. 
 
 EeforxMed Presbyterian Church. — Three 
 congregations and 3 ministers. Adhering po- 
 pulation not accurately known. 
 
 Associated Baptist Churches. — The earli- 
 est efforts of this religious connectionin Nova 
 Scotia is nearly contemporaneous with those 
 of the Presbyterian Church. It has 54 settled 
 ministers, with an adhering population of 
 42,243. This population, however, includes 
 several distinct Baptist communities, whose 
 ministry amounts to 17 elders and 3 ministers. 
 The Associated Baptist Church is divided into 
 3 associations : Western, Central, and Eastern. 
 The Baptist Convention of Nova Scotia, New 
 Brunswick, and Prince Edward Island, meets 
 annually. In Nova Scotia their educational 
 institutions are located, consisting of a college 
 and academy. The college has now 3 profes- 
 sors, and connected with it is a theological in- 
 
 stitute, with 2 professors, who also hold chairs 
 in the college. The academy has two teach- 
 ers, a principal and master, with an assistant. 
 Some years ago this church sent a missionary 
 to the foreign field, but at present they do not 
 appear to have any one. They have, however, 
 a missionary to the Acadian French in Nova 
 Scotia. 
 
 Wesleyan Methodist Church. — Mission- 
 aries from this body visited North America as 
 early as 17G9. In 1786, missions were commenc- 
 ed in Nova Scotia. By the last census (1851) 
 it has an adhering population of 23,596, and in 
 1854, 31 ordained ministers. This list of min- 
 isters includes, however, 1 chairman and gene- 
 ral superintendent, 1 editor of a denominational 
 newspaper, and 4 supernumeraries. The semi- 
 nary under the care of this body, is situated on 
 the borders of the two provinces. New Bruns- 
 wick and Nova Scotia, and this suits in its 
 locality the wants of both denominational dis- 
 tricts. It has a principal, who is also one of 
 the professors, and a second professor ; a clas- 
 sical and French tutor and English teacher ; 
 also a chaplain, treasurer, and steward. The 
 students are boarded within the institution, 
 and recently a large addition has been made, 
 with a view to accommodate females with suit- 
 able board and education. 
 
 Congregational or Independent Church. 
 — The origin of this church in Nova Scotia 
 was quite as early as others already described, 
 but its progress has been very limited. It has 
 but 6 ministers and 2,639 adherents. A col- 
 lege with 2 professors, 1 of whom acts as 
 president, is placed under the sanction and 
 control of the Congregational Union of Nova 
 Scotia and New Brunswick. 
 
 Evangelical Lutheran Church. — This is 
 the only other religious body in Nova Scotia 
 worthy of distinct notice. Its adherents are 
 chiefly of German extraction, and number 
 4087. 
 
 Besides the denominational eflforts of each 
 of these evangelical bodies, they severally 
 unite in general schemes of benevolence and 
 Christian philanthropy. The Nova Scotia 
 Bible Society, and other auxiliaries of the 
 British and Foreign Bible Society enlist 
 the sympathies of all but the Baptists, and are 
 very generally supported. The Halifax Naval 
 and" Military 'Bible Society is in like maiiuer 
 dependent upon the Christian public, gene- 
 rally. The Micmac Missionary Society, while 
 its principal agent and missionary is Baptist, 
 meets with the countenance and support of all 
 cla'^ses. The Nova Scotia Sabbath Alliance 
 consists of the leading ministers and members 
 of all the leading Protestant denominations in 
 Halifax.— Rev. J. Bayne, o/P/rfott. 
 
 NOWGONG : A station of the American 
 Baptist Union in Assam. 
 
 NULLOOR : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society, in the Tiunevelly district, 
 India. 
 
630 
 
 OAHU— OLD CALABAR. 
 
 OATTU : One of the principal of the Sand 
 wirh Islands group. It is 25 miles W. N 
 W. of Molokai, the most romantic and fer 
 tile of the whole group, and the residence of 
 the King, and seat of government. It is 
 about 48 miles long and 23 wide. The Am 
 erican Board have seven stations on this 
 Island. 
 
 OCEANICA: A term somewhat indefi- 
 nitely applied to the islands of the Pacific 
 Ocean. (See South Sea Islands tmdi Indian 
 Archipelago.) ^ 
 
 O.TIBWAS : A tribe of North American 
 Indians, inhabiting the shores of Lakes Supe- 
 rior and Huron. (See North American In- 
 diaiifi.) 
 
 OKKAH: A station of the Moravians in 
 Labrador. 
 
 OLD TOWN : Station of the United Pres- 
 byterian Synod of Scotland, at the Old Cal- 
 abar, West Africa. 
 
 OLD CALABAR: Old Calabar lies in the 
 Bight of Biafra, near the sixth degree of 
 north latitude, and between the eighth and 
 ninth degrees of east longitude. The coast 
 there runs east and west. Standing oppo- 
 site the Old Calabar frith, you look directly 
 north. On your right hand are the Came- 
 roon mountains, rising to the height of 
 13,000 feet ; and further to the right, at the 
 distance of sixty miles, is the elevated and 
 beautiful island of Fernando Po ; and on 
 your left is an extensive level district, over 
 which a dense mist is often seen resting : — 
 that is the long-sought Delta of the Niger, a 
 vast morass, extending 200 miles along the 
 sea shore, and upwards of 250 miles inland, 
 channeled by numerous streams — the mouths 
 of that celebrated river, covered with man- 
 grove and palm-oil trees, and inhabited by 
 fierce and savage tribes, many of whom are 
 cannibals. Sail up the Old Calabar frith, a 
 distance of fifty miles, and you see two 
 large rivers flowing into it. The one on your 
 left hand is the Cross river, so called be- 
 cause it was supposed to communicate with 
 the Niger, and to be one of its mouths ; but 
 it was explored by Captain Becroft. in 1842, 
 a distance of 175 miles, and was found to be 
 an independent stream, more than a mile in 
 breadth, with a depth of from six to seven 
 fathoms, flowing from the east — a region yet 
 unexplored by Europeans — and having its 
 banks studded with towns and villages. En- 
 ter tlie river on your right hand, which is 
 the Old Calabar river, fully three-fourths of 
 a mile m width, and after ascending it about 
 eight miles, and passing a jutting head-land, 
 5'ou see upon the right bank a cluster of 
 towns. These are Duke Town, Ilenshaw 
 Town, Old Town, and seven miles up the 
 river, on the left bank, Creek Town, the 
 principal towns of Old Calabar, and the seat 
 of the mission of ihe United Presbyterian 
 Synod of Scotland. (See Africa, Western.) 
 
 These towns, with the country villages, con- 
 tain a population of 00,000 or 70,000. subject 
 to the sway of tlie King of Old Calabar, and 
 are accessible to missionaries. Each town 
 has its king or headman ; but the chief au- 
 thority is vested in Eyo Honesty, of Creek 
 Town. The population is divided into two 
 classes, freemen and slaves — the latter being 
 the great majority. Tliese are either em- 
 ploj-ed on the provision grounds, which are 
 at some distance from the towns, or in the 
 operations.of trade. The freemen are all en- 
 gaged in trade, and are mainly dependent 
 upon it for their support and influence. 
 Even the king, who has no revenue from his 
 subjects, carries on trade to a great extent, 
 is of active business habits, keeps regular ac- 
 counts, and owes all his power to the weight 
 of his character, and the wealth which he 
 has acquired from trading. The slaves are 
 generally treated with kindness ; and there 
 seems to be a process of internal emancipa- 
 tion, the children of the third generation 
 generally becoming free. It is a happy cir- 
 cumstance that persons have ceased to be ex- 
 ported as slaves from this district for a con- 
 siderable number of years. That horrid 
 traffic is totally suppressed in the Bight of 
 Biafra. This result is to be ascribed to the 
 beneficial influence of a growing trade, and 
 to the treaties made with the chiefs by the 
 British Government. The trade which is 
 carried on at Old Calabar, is chiefly in palm- 
 oil. The palm-oil is brought from the inte- 
 rior, and is exchanged for British goods. 
 The humanizing influence of legitimate com- 
 merce is becoming every year more obvious. 
 Not only has it enlarged the views of the 
 people, and to a certain degree improved 
 their manners ; enabled them to have com- 
 fortable houses, and to furnish them, in 
 many instances, with costly articles of Eu- 
 ropean manufacture ; but it has taught them 
 that it is for their interest to live at peace 
 with their neighbors. 
 
 The mode of government at Old Calabar 
 is, in the case of freemen, by common con- 
 sultation and agreement. They meet to- 
 gether in the palaver-house, talk over the 
 matter, and no measure can become law that 
 has not a majority of votes. The great dif- 
 ficulty which they feel is to keep in subjec- 
 tion their numerous slaves. This seems to 
 be managed chiefly by the aid of supersti- 
 tion. They have a secret institution, called 
 Egbo, much resembling the Oro of the Yor- 
 ubas, (See Yoruha). 
 
 Religion. — They believe in the existence 
 of God and of the devil, in a future state, 
 and in the immortality of the soul; but 
 their ideas on these subjects are dim and 
 confused, and have, by the wickedness of 
 the heart, and the malignant teaching of 
 Satan, been framed into a system of super- 
 stition, dark, cruel, and sanguinary. They 
 
ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS. 
 
 C31 
 
 regard one day of the week as a Sabbath, 
 they all practise circumcision, on festival 
 days they sprinkle the blood of the Egbo 
 goat, and they make a covenant of friend- 
 ship betvs'een parties that were at variance, 
 by putting on them the blood of a slain goat, 
 mixed with certain ingredients j things 
 which indicate the remains of the patriarchal 
 religion. Their personal worship, so far as 
 it has been ascertained, ma}^ be divided into 
 two parts ; that which is observed within 
 the house, and that which takes place in the 
 court-yard. The worship within the house 
 consists in adoring a human skull, stuck upon 
 the top of a stick, around the handle of 
 which a bunch of feathers is tied. This dis- 
 gusting object — their domestic idol — is said 
 to exist in every house in Old Calabar. The 
 worship in the court-yard is of this kind : in 
 the middle of the yard there is a bason of 
 water placed at the foot of a small tree, 
 which is planted for the purpose. This bason 
 is never emptied of its contents, but is once 
 a week filled with a fresh supply of water ; 
 and on the day when this is done, the second 
 day of the week, called God's day, they 
 " offer a fowl, or some other small thing of 
 that sort, which is tied by the foot to the 
 tree," and then they " pray to Basl Ebiim, 
 the great God, but without confession of 
 sin, and solely for temporal benefits." Witch- 
 craft exerts the same terrible influence here 
 as in other parts of Western Africa. 
 
 But the most desolating and sanguinary of 
 all their customs is the practice of sacrific- 
 ing human victims, for the benefit of deceased 
 persons of rank. Tnis horrid custom arises 
 from the belief that the future world cor- 
 responds to the present — that the same 
 wants are felt, the same relationships sus- 
 tained, and the same pursuits followed ; and 
 therefore, that the station and happiness of 
 a person depend upon the number of follow- 
 ers and slaves that are killed and sent after 
 him. The effect of this belief is, that in pro- 
 portion to the dignity of the departed, the 
 rank and power of the survivors, and the 
 warmth of affection which they cherish for 
 the deceased, is the number of victims that 
 are seized and immolated. Acquaintances 
 also testify their respect for the dead, and 
 sympathy with the sorrowing relations, by 
 destroying a few of their slaves. The agents 
 in this wholesale system of murder are the 
 nearest relations cf the deceased, who evince 
 their affection and their grief, by exerting 
 themselves to catch by force, by stratagem, 
 and by all manner of ways, and to destroy 
 as many of their fellow creatures as they 
 can. It is a season of terror. The slaves, 
 from whose ranks the victims are usually 
 taken, flee to the bush for shelter, the doors 
 of the houses are fastened, and every one is 
 afraid to go abroad. And when it is' con- 
 sidered that the funeral ceremonies continue 
 
 for four months, and that at the beginning 
 and especially at the close of this perTod 
 when the grand carnival, or make-devil, as 
 they call it, takes place, great exertions are 
 made to obtain victims, it will at once be 
 obvious that this is a practice which spreads 
 terror and mourning through every part of 
 the connnunity. It prevails in the greater 
 part of western Central Africa, and is 
 drenching the land with blood. 
 
 OLENDEBENK : Station of the Ameri 
 can Board at the Gaboon, West Africa. 
 
 OODOOVILLE: A populous parish of 
 Ceylon, in the district of Jaftna, 5 miles 
 north of Jaffnapatam. It stands on an ex- 
 tensive plain, covered with groves of pal- 
 m3'ra, cocoa-nut, and other fruit trees, in 
 which are many villages of natives, and, for- 
 merly, many idol temples. The American 
 Board have a station with a female boarding 
 school here. 
 
 OODOOPITTY: (Valverty) A station of 
 the American Board in Jaffna, Ceylon. 
 
 OOBFA : A prospective station of the 
 American Board among the Armenians : the 
 ancient Edessa, as is commonly supposed, 
 and also the Er of the Chaldees, the birth- 
 place of the patriarch Abraham : has a pop- 
 ulation of 7,000 Armenians and 4.000 Syrians. 
 OOTACAMUND : A health station, on the 
 Neilgherry Hills, Southern India. 
 
 OPOTIKI : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand, situated on 
 a plain, at the entrance of the river, on the 
 south-east side of the Bay of Plenty. Pop- 
 ulation about 1,300. 
 
 ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS, MISSIONS 
 TO : For accounts of missions at present ex- 
 isting, among the decayed churches of the 
 East, see Armenians, Nestoi^ians, Greece, Sy^ 
 ria, Mostd, Eg^ypt. Although it docs not en- 
 ter into the plan of this work to notice exten- 
 sively those missions, which have been prose- 
 cuted for a time, and then given up, 3-et there 
 have been operations of this kind in the East 
 which deserve some notice. Among these 
 is the mission of the Church Missionary So- 
 ciety to Abyssinia, for which see Abyssinia. 
 There are, also, several missions of recent 
 origin, which may be noticed more appro- 
 priately in a general article than under geo- 
 graphical heads. And there are certain gene- 
 ral principles, which apply to all these mis- 
 sions, which may be properly noticed in a 
 general article. The appointment of a mis- 
 sionary bishop to Jerusalem, by the govern- 
 ments of Great Britain and Prussia, had re- 
 ference not only to the Jews, but to Oriental 
 Christians ; but we have no sources of in- 
 formation which will enable us to give a 
 connected history of his operations. Tho 
 present incumbent, Bishop Gobat, the \yorthy 
 pioneer of the Abyssinian mission, will use- 
 his position to the best advantage for the. 
 furtjierance of evangelical labors among all 
 
632 
 
 ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS. 
 
 classes of the people. The Church Mission- 
 ary Society have a mission at Jerusalem, 
 consisting of two ordained missionaries, one 
 European lay secretary, and one native teach- 
 er. This mission was designed especially, 
 though not exclusively, to provide for the 
 instruction of Abyssinian pilgrims. Bishop 
 Gobat having been requested, both by the 
 king and the Abuna of Abyssinia, to take 
 charge of the Abyssinian convent at that 
 place. (See Africa East.) The report of 
 that society for 1853, states that "The expe- 
 rience of another year has confirmed the 
 committee in the wisdom of the course hith- 
 erto pursued by their missionaries, in making 
 an open protest against the errors of the 
 Oriental churches, and in receiving under 
 Christian instruction all who desire to hear 
 and embrace the truth of the Gospel. Events 
 render it each year more diflBcult for such 
 inquirers to continue in communion with 
 their own church. They have now political 
 liberty to enrol themselves on the civil regis- 
 ter of the local pachas as Protestants ; and 
 having done so, they claim the assistance 
 and protection of the Protestant churches, 
 and there appears no just ground on which 
 that claim can be refused. The committee 
 have great satisfaction in adding, that the 
 American Episcopal Church, at the late anni- 
 versary of their Board of Foreign Missions, 
 announced their entire adherence to these 
 views, after sixteen years' experience in mis- 
 sionary operations at Constantinople, upon 
 the opposite principle of co-operation with 
 the heads of the Oriental churches." 
 
 The mission at Constantinople, here al- 
 luded to, was commenced by the Rev. J. J. 
 Robertson, D. D., and Rev. Horatio South- 
 gate, under the direction of the Episcopal 
 Board of Missions, in 1839. It was designed 
 principally as a mission to the Greek Church ; 
 in the words of the annual report, " placing 
 our church in a position to be known and 
 recognized as a branch of the same Catholic 
 Church, and a friend. It is sought that its 
 missionaries should, if possible, be received 
 and sanctioned as the representative of their 
 church ; that a friendly intercourse should 
 be maintained, and every cause of needless 
 offence be avoided. The Greek Church is 
 to be approached as an Episcopal Church, 
 and its integrity preserved." 
 
 In connection with this mission, it was 
 designed also to establish a mission in Meso- 
 potamia, among the Jacobite Christians. 
 Mr. Southgate had made an exploring tour 
 in that region, and Mardin was selected as 
 the site of the mission. 
 
 In 1842, the Committee having determined 
 to discontinue the Constantinople mission, 
 and concentrate their efforts upon Mesopo- 
 tamia, directed Mr. Southgate to remove as 
 soon as practicable, either to Mardin or Mo- 
 sul, and appointed two new missionaries to 
 
 the same ikld. But Mr. Southgate viewing 
 his appoinnncnt as limited to Constantinople, 
 declined to accept the appointment to Meso- 
 potamia. 
 
 At the meeting of the Board in 1843, the 
 committee were directed to continue the 
 mission at Constantinople, and re-appoint 
 Mr. Southgate as missionary. One of the 
 missionaries appointed to Mesopotamia, Rev. 
 Mr. Taylor, on reaching Constantinople, 
 changed his views as to his field of labor, 
 and wished^ to remain at Constantinople; 
 but the committee refused to alter arrange- 
 ments which they considered definitely set- 
 tled. Mr. Southgate, after his return to 
 Constantinople, requested either that he 
 might be permitted to return to the United 
 States and present the cause to the churches, 
 or else that a colleague be sent him, with 
 authority to commence labor among the Ar- 
 menians, and that ^2,000 mission funds 
 should be allowed for the coming year, both 
 which the committee declined, chiefly for 
 want of means. But this decision was over- 
 ruled by the Board ; and the committee were 
 requested, so soon as funds could be raised 
 for the purpose, to establish a mission to the 
 Armenians, and also to grant Mr. Southgate 
 permission to visit the United States for the 
 purpose which he had proposed. In conse- 
 quence of which the Mesopotamia mission 
 was discontinued, and the whole operations 
 concentrated upon Constantinople. 
 
 Soon after the adjournment of the Board, 
 Mr. Southgate returned to the United States ; 
 and at the triennial session, his plans were 
 submitted to the Board, and resolutions were 
 passed, recommending to the general con- 
 vention the appointment of a bishop, appro- 
 priating for the mission to the Eastern 
 churches ^5,000 per annum, and directing 
 the addition of two missionaries to the sta- 
 tion. In accordance with this recommenda- 
 tion, Mr. Southgate was elected bishop, and 
 consecrated in October, 1844, as Missionary 
 Bishop of the Protestant Episcopal Church 
 of the United States, in the dominions and 
 dependencies of the Sultan of Turkey ; and 
 considerable sums of money w^ere raised to 
 sustain the mission. But the funds raised 
 specifically for this mission not being suflS- 
 cient to meet Bishop Southgate's views of 
 what was needed to carry on the mission, 
 and the committee not deeming it expedient 
 to appropriate the amount requested by him 
 from the general funds of the Board, Bishop 
 Southgate returned with his family to this 
 country, Nov. 6, 1849. On his arrival, the 
 committee " came unanimously to the con- 
 clusion that the removal of the missionary 
 bishop with his family, had closed the mis- 
 sion in Turkey." 
 
 At the triennial meeting of the Board in 
 1851, a resolution was passed, requesting 
 the foreign committee to " renew the mission 
 
ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS. 
 
 633 
 
 to the decayed churches in Asia Minor, in 
 the manner they shall deem most likely 
 to accomplish the best results." In obe- 
 dience to this resolution, the subject was 
 committed to Rev. Messrs. G. T. Bedell 
 and T. S. Winston, who made an elaborate 
 report, which was unanimously adopted by 
 the committee. This report goes into an 
 examination oi the two methods of conduct- 
 ing missions to these churches: (1) "at- 
 tempting their reformation through agencies 
 and means approved by their ecclesiastical 
 authorities, with the hope that the ecclesias- 
 tics would first become enlightened, and be 
 chief instruments in promoting the general 
 result;" and (2) seeking the same object 
 "by the usual means of diffusing a saving 
 knowledge of the Gospel among those who 
 are ignorant of it, or ' decayed ' in the ap- 
 preciation of its truth." 
 
 In regard to the first of these, they say, 
 "The foreign committee have entertained 
 but one view on the subject. Although at 
 the earnest representations of the mission- 
 ary, they acquiesced in the trial of the ex- 
 periment, yet from the first, they have con- 
 sidered it inadequate and impracticable. 
 The experience of the church," they continue, 
 " has proved that a reformation cannot be 
 effectual while confined to the clergy ; that 
 of the two classes, the laity arc the most 
 easily affected, and must be the instruments 
 of moving the clergy ; and that ecclesiastics, 
 as a body, very slowly acquiesce in a move- 
 ment to which self-interest and cherished 
 prejudices are so much opposed." 
 
 The committee proceed to review the his- 
 tory of the experiment at Constantinople, 
 made for 16 years, at an expenditure of 
 $45,000, and come to the conclusion that it 
 has produced no practical results, bej'ond 
 the translation of the Prayer Book, and a 
 few other translations, the benefits of which 
 if any are yet to be seen. They say, also, 
 that an experiment upon similar principles 
 was carried on by the Church Missionary 
 Society from 1815 to 1846, with a similar 
 result; and quote the following language 
 from the report of that society: "The So- 
 ciety's chief failures have been in its attempts 
 to establish missions among the ancient but 
 lapsed churches of the East. The hope 
 which was cherished, that the light of^ Di- 
 vine truth might be rekindled with compa- 
 rative ease among them, and through their 
 agency be transmitted to their heathen and 
 Mohammedan neighbors, has failed. Twice 
 were the missionaries of the society driven 
 out of the different districts of Abyssinia. 
 (See Abyssinia and Africa East.) They 
 were compelled, also, to withdraw from Asia 
 Minor, through the jealousy of the Greek 
 Church, as soon as their labors began to ex- 
 ercise a spiritual influence upon their schol- 
 ars in their mission schools. And the So- 
 
 ciety's establishment at ^falta was relin- 
 quished, after a trial of 25 years, as thcro 
 appeared no results sufficient to justify its 
 continuance. The Society also attempted, 
 for several years, to cooperate with the ec- 
 clesiastical authorities of the Syrian Christian 
 Church upon the Malabar coast of South In- 
 dia, in educational measures for the revival 
 of that ancient church; but the attempts 
 have failed." The committee also quote 
 Bishop Gobat, and Archdeacon Pratt, of 
 Madras, in corroboration of these views, 
 and remark : " We are forced to the conclu- 
 sion, that the effort to produce a restoration 
 of those churches, by acting through their 
 ecclesiastical authorities, or only in harmony 
 with them, and by their approbation, will, 
 in all probability, prove, as it haS always 
 provedj'a failure ; and therefore, that, in re- 
 newing the mission to these churches, the 
 plan heretofore pursued must be abandoned." 
 At the annual meeting of the Board to 
 which this report was made, it was resolved, 
 "That the subject of Eastern Missions be 
 still left in the discretion of the foreign com- 
 mittee, in accordance with the resolution 
 adopted at the last triennial meeting." 
 
 Nazareth. — The Church Missionary So- 
 ciety have a station at Nazareth, under the 
 care of Rev. F. A. Klein, who reports some 
 movement among the people towards re- 
 formation. The congregation consists of 
 180 to 200. 
 
 Jerusalem.. — Bishop Gobat, in his last 
 communication, says, "During the course of 
 last year, a goodly number of families and 
 individuals have joined our church, although 
 only 13 or 14 communicants are with us. 
 But all meet every Lord's day, and two or 
 three times during the week to hear the 
 word of God read and expounded, and to 
 pray together, with the help of the Arabic 
 version of the Liturgy." 
 
 Nahlous. — Bishop Gobat says the good 
 work is progressing here. A few Protes- 
 tants meet on the Lord's day and in the 
 week, for reading the word of God and 
 prayer. 
 
 Syra. — The Church Missionary Society 
 have a station at Syra, in charge of Rev. F. 
 A. Ilildner. He has a school of 284 pupils, 
 mostly girls. He holds service on Sundavs 
 in English and German, and some of the 
 people seem to be under the influence of di- 
 vine grace. 
 
 Smyrna.— Here, also, the Church Jlission- 
 ary Society have a station, under the direc- 
 tion of Rev. J. T. Welters, and a Greek 
 catechist. In his report for 1852, Mr. Wel- 
 ters says, "There are a few Greeks among 
 us, who have, I trust, been brought from 
 darkness to light." 
 
 Malta Protestant College.— A Protestant 
 college is maintained at Malta, of which the 
 
634 
 
 ORISSA. 
 
 eport of the Church Missionary Society for 
 1853 si)oak8 as being in a state of growing 
 prosperity. It comprises a school for youth, 
 and a chiss of adults under training for na- 
 tive teachers. It contains 80 well-behaved 
 boys and youths, from various countries, and 
 of dillerent complexions — Abyssinians, Sy- 
 rians and Persians, Moslems and Jews. Copts 
 and Greeks, Nestorians and Papists, are here 
 living in the atmosphere of the pure word 
 of God, of which some appear to have ex- 
 perienced the power during their stay here. 
 Bishop Gobat, speaking of a visit '^hich he 
 recently made to the institution, says: "I 
 could not refrain from tears of gratitude, 
 when I saw them all devoutly kneeling, 
 while an Italian, who but a few years ago 
 was a blind Papist, or one who was formerly 
 a blaspheming Jew, &c., was offering up a 
 prayer to God, in the name of Jesus Christ, 
 full of life and unction, for the outpouring of 
 the Spirit of God upon Israel, Italy, Turkey, 
 &c., each putting a peculiar emphasis upon the 
 country or the people with whom, by nature 
 and former habits, he was more particularly 
 connected." Great hopes are entertained 
 of this institution for furnishing missionary 
 laborers in the East. 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 V 
 
 IE 
 
 W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 u 
 
 -d 
 
 
 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 a 
 i 
 
 o 
 1 
 
 >. 
 
 
 1 
 
 ffl 
 
 h 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 ® 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 
 rt 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Palestine, 
 
 1851 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 G 
 
 2 
 
 65 
 
 12 
 
 77 
 
 Greece, 
 
 1828 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 3 
 
 18 
 
 266 
 
 284 
 
 Asia Minor, - - 
 
 1831 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 83 
 
 278 
 
 361 
 
 ORTSSA: A province of India, situated 
 near the head of the Bay of Bengal, on its 
 north-western shore, a short distance south- 
 west from Calcutta : bounded on the north 
 by Bengal, east by the Bay of Bengal, south 
 by the country of the Teloogoos, and west by 
 Nagopore. It is irregularly shaped, about 
 three hundred miles long, and two hundred 
 and forty wide. Its population is estimated 
 at about three millions. It is supposed that 
 the province was anciently much larger than 
 it is now, and that its sovereigns formerly 
 sustained a rank much above that of most 
 Hindoo rajahs, and that it was numbered 
 among the most powerful of the ancient In- 
 dian sovereignties. It was subjected in part 
 by the Mohammedans about 400 years ago, 
 and remained in an unsettled state till 1743. 
 At that time it was overrun by the Mahrat- 
 tas, who continued their plundering depreda- 
 tions till 1803, when they were expelled by 
 
 the English. Since that period, the British 
 have held absolute sway over the previously 
 long distracted country, and quiet has mostly 
 prevailed. Compared with the misrule and 
 oppression of the former reigning powers, 
 the policy of the present government is lib' 
 eral, and the political condition of the people* 
 is so much improved that most of them aro 
 better satisfied with their state than their 
 predecessors were with the rule of the na- 
 tive princes. Orissa is divided into three 
 civil districts, viz. : Pooree in the south. Cut- 
 tack in the centre, and Balasore on the 
 north. The sea-coast, which is the eastern 
 part of the province, is level and far more 
 populous than the central and western di- 
 visions, which are mountainous and covered 
 in many places with primeval forests, inhab- 
 ited by wild beasts, or men almost as un- 
 tamed and rude as they. The climate, soil, 
 productions, animals, insects, birds, reptiles, 
 and fish of Orissa are similar to those of 
 Bengal and other adjacent portions of Ilin- 
 dostan lying near the Tropic of Cancer. The 
 villages, houses, food, clothing, dress, litera- 
 ture, and trades of the Oriyas are also much 
 like those of the Bengalis and the people of 
 other large portions of India. 
 
 The population of Orissa consists of Hin- 
 doos, Mohammedans, Santals, and Bhumi- 
 jahs, the Hindoos constituting far the larger 
 number. The districts of Pooree and Cut- 
 tack are occupied by the English General 
 Baptist missionaries, the district of Balasore 
 being the site of the Freewill Baptist mis- 
 sion. This district lies on the west side of 
 the Bay of Bengal. It is about eighty miles 
 long, and on an average thirty or forty miles 
 wide, and contains about 500,000 inhabitants. 
 On its northern boundary lies a considerable 
 tract belonging to the province of Bengal, 
 which is inhabited by Oriyas. On the west 
 are several tributary states governed by na- 
 tive princes, which are peopled by Oriyas, 
 Santals, &c. These arc as numerous as the 
 inhabitants of the district of Balasore, so 
 that there are about one million souls de- 
 pendent on this Society for religious light 
 and influence. From its liability to inunda- 
 tion, the country is not much inhabited for 
 three or four miles inland from the sea. Be- 
 yond this low tract the plains are sufficiently 
 elevated for security, and are highly culti- 
 vated and densely populated. Farther in- 
 land the country becomes mountainous, 
 covered in part by forests, where are 
 found the scattered villages of the Oriyas, 
 Santals, and Bhumijas. " There are," says 
 Rev. 0. R. Bacheler, who has resided several 
 years in the town of Balasore, " three ver- 
 nacular languages spoken by the inhabitants 
 of the Balasore district. 1. The Oriya, one of 
 the Hindoo family of languages, derived 
 principally from the Sanscrit. This is spoken 
 by the greater part of the Hindoo population. 
 
OROOMIAH. 
 
 635 
 
 2. The Ilindostanee, derived principally from 
 the Arabic and Persian, and spoken by the 
 Mohammedans. 3. The Santal, with which 
 may be classed the Bhumija, they both being 
 dialects of the same language." 
 
 The Ori3*a contains many religious and 
 literary works, some translated from the 
 Sanscrit, and others original. Most of the 
 religious books are poetical, and some of 
 them possess a great degree of litcrar}^ 
 merit. Some of these works are very large, 
 the Puranas alone consisting of 1,600,000 
 lines ! The religion of the Hindoos in Oris- 
 sa, like their manners and customs, is similar 
 to that of multitudes of others of their race. 
 Caste in all its ruinous forms bears almost 
 unlimited sway in the province. They wor- 
 ship the same gods and observe the same 
 rites of most other Hindoos, and are equally 
 ignorant and superstitious. The religious 
 opinions and customs of the Mohammedans 
 are based on the Koran, though somewhat 
 modified by a long contact with heathenism. 
 They arc great bigots, and are probabl}- more 
 immoral and vicious than the Hindoos. 
 
 The Santals it is supposed were tlie abo- 
 rigines of the country, but were driven to 
 the mountainous regions by the Hindoos, 
 by whom they were conquered in some re- 
 mote period. They invariably live in the hilly 
 jungle. They subsist mostly by selling 
 wood, coal, and leaves to their neighbors ; 
 but they cultivate the soil to some extent. 
 In religion, language, manners and customs, 
 they are very different from the Hindoos, 
 and are much less influenced b}' caste. The 
 sun is the chief object of their worship, 
 which they believe is God, and to which 
 they sacrifice goats and chickens, at the 
 same time repeating a prayer composed for 
 such occasions. The departed spirits of 
 their fathers are sometimes adored, and they 
 are accustomed to worship their bullocks 
 annually. This is done out of gratitude to 
 the animals for bearing burdens during the 
 year. These people are without a regular 
 priesthood, temples, and a systematic re- 
 ligion. The master of a family officiates as 
 its priest, performing the customary rites 
 either in the house or un^r a tree. 
 
 The Santals say their race originated from 
 two ducks' eggs ; but their more immediate 
 origin is attributed to a drunken and incest- 
 uous intercourse, something like that of Lot 
 with his daughters. Strong drinks, music 
 and dancing are among their favorite enjoy- 
 ments. They are, however, a mild and inof- 
 fensive people. Unlike the Hindoos, they do 
 not burn their dead, but bury them. Their 
 complexion is nearly as dark as that of the 
 Africans, but their hair is straight. A few 
 oral songs and traditions constitute their 
 literature, but they have no written language 
 except that recently furnished by a mission- 
 ary of the Freewill Baptist Society, and 
 
 which none but a few who have bet'n taught 
 in the mission school can read. The lan- 
 guage sounds very sweet and musical when 
 spoken, and is remarkably regular, consider- 
 ing it has never been cultivated. As might 
 be expected, it is very barren in theological 
 terms. The women iningle with the men in 
 their labors and recreations, seem to be on 
 an equality with them, and are divested of 
 the squeamislmess of the Hindoo females. 
 At the age of sixteen or seventeen years the 
 Santals usually marry. The ceremony is 
 very simple and performed as follows : The 
 man puts some paint on the bride's head, 
 and she in return confesses herself his wife 
 by putting oil on his head. 
 
 The Bhumijas are next in importance to 
 the Santals. They are described by Rev. 
 jNIr. Bacheler as " a similar people, occupy- 
 ing the same portion of the district, speak- 
 ing a language strongly resembling the San- 
 tal, and, in most particulars, differing little 
 from them. The}' are considerably less nu- 
 merous than the former, and it is probable 
 that missionary effort among them also 
 would be eminently successful, could they 
 be brought under religious influence. There 
 are small portions of other tribes scattered 
 among those already mentioned, but they are 
 not sufficiently numerous to render a par- 
 ticular description necessary." 
 
 " The complexion of these different races 
 varies from a dark copper color to black. 
 Those whose occupation is mostly within 
 doors are rather lighter than those more ex- 
 posed. The hill tribes are darker than the 
 people of the plains. The hair is straight 
 and black, and worn long both by men and 
 women. The eyes are black, the lips thin, 
 nose prominent, foreheads elevated, the in- 
 tellectual faculties predominating. They 
 have an intellectual cast of countenance, 
 and are rather good-looking than otherwise." 
 
 OROOMIAH : A city of Persia, the an- 
 cient Thebanna, the reputed birth-place of 
 Zoroaster, situated on a beautiful fertile 
 plain, the seat of the Mission of the Ameri- 
 can Board to the Nestorians. On this plain 
 there arc about 300 villages, inhabited chiefly 
 by Nestorians, of whom there are about 
 20,000 in Oroomiah. (See Nestorians.) 
 
 OSHUNGA: Station of the American 
 Board in West Africa, at the mouth of the 
 Gaboon river. 
 
 OTAWAO : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society, near the Waipa river, in 
 New Zealand. 
 
 OTAHEITE : Same as Tahiii. (Sec South 
 Sea Islands.) 
 
 OZYUNGA : A station of the American 
 Board at the mouth of the Gaboon river. 
 West Africa. 
 
 PAARL: Station of the London Mission- 
 ary Society, in South Africa, 85 miles north- 
 east of Cape Town. 
 
PACALTSDORP— PAllSEEISM. 
 
 PACALTSDORP : Stntion of the London 
 Missionnry Society in South Africa, 245 
 miles east'of Cape Town. 
 
 PAGO-PAGO : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, on the Island of Tutuila, 
 one of the Samoan group. 
 
 PAGAN : A heathen, a Gentile, an idola- 
 tor. This word was originally applied to 
 the inhabitants of the country, who adhered 
 to idolatry after Christianity had been re- 
 ceived by the cities. So heathen signifies 
 the inhabitants of a heath or woods, and 
 Kaffre, in Arabic, signifies the inhabitants of 
 a hut or cottage, and one that does not re- 
 ceive Mohammedanism. 
 
 PAGODA : A house of idols. In India, 
 a temple in which idols are worshiped. It is 
 likewise applied to an image of some sup- 
 posed deit3^ Also a gold or silver coin cur- 
 rent in Ilindostan, varying in value from 
 $1.75 to ^2. 
 
 PAIHIA : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand, on the 
 south side of the Bay of Islands. 
 
 PALL AM : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in India. 
 
 PALAMCOTTAH: A station of the 
 Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevclly 
 District, India. 
 
 PALANKEEN, or PALANQUIN: A cov- 
 ered carriage used in India, China, &c., 
 borne on the shoulders of men, and in which 
 a single person is conveyed from place to 
 place. 
 
 PANNEIVILEI : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in India. 
 
 PANTURA : A village at the mouth of a 
 river of the same name, in Ceylon, a station 
 of the Church Missionary Society. 
 
 PANTHEISM: The doctrine that the 
 Universe is God. 
 
 P ANEI V AD ALI : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society, India. 
 
 PANDITERIPO : A parish in the Jaflfna 
 district of Ceylon, 9 miles north-west of 
 Jaffnapatam, where is a station of the Am- 
 erican Board. 
 
 PAPENO : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society on Tahiti, in the Southern 
 Pacific. 
 
 PAPAOA : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society on the Island of Tahiti, in 
 the Southern Pacific. 
 
 PAPEETE: A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on the Island of Tahiti, 
 in the South Sea. 
 
 P APARA : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. 
 
 PAPEURIRI : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. 
 
 PAPETOAI : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on Eimco, South Sea. 
 
 PARK HILL : A station of the American 
 Board among the Cherokee Indians. 
 
 PARAMARIBO: A considerable town. 
 
 situated at the mouth of the Surinam river. 
 Population 18,000 or 20,000. A station of 
 the Moravians. 
 
 PARSEEISM: The Parsees area some- 
 what numerous and influential sect in Ilin- 
 dostan, especially in the western part of the 
 country, and also in Persia. In Bombay and 
 vicinity they are estimated at about 75,000. 
 Their sacred writings, or scriptures, are con- 
 tained in the Zand-Avasta, or Zand Word, 
 which, however, the missionaries have never 
 found in a coHected form in the hands of the 
 Parsees. The Zand-Avasta consists of seve- 
 ral parts, as the Vandidad, which professes 
 to report the result of an interview of Zo- 
 roaster, the alleged founder of the sect, 
 with Hormazd, the supreme object of wor- 
 ship, the Yacna and Vispard, which are in- 
 terspersed with the Vandidad, and recited 
 along with it during the celebration of the 
 most extended service ; the Khurdah Avasta, 
 or minor liturgy j the Yacts, and other de- 
 tached pieces. 
 
 The Zand-Avasta is ascribed to Zoroaster, 
 who is said to have lived about 500 years 
 before Christ; but the testimonies of the 
 ancients respecting the epoch of Zoroaster 
 are very conflicting ; and besides, there is 
 no proof of even the existence of the Zand 
 writings till long after the above period, and 
 much less is there evidence that they were 
 written by such a person. Learned Euro- 
 peans of every shade of belief agree in pro- 
 nouncing the Zand-Avasta a spurious work. 
 Sir Wm. Jones, the " prince and pioneer of 
 modern orientalists," says it contains noth- 
 ing which corresponds with the character of 
 a philosopher and a legislator, and adds, that 
 " either Zoroaster had not common sense, or 
 he did not write the book which is attribu- 
 ted to him." Not only is it believed to be 
 a spurious work, but a production of com- 
 paratively modern times, and probably of 
 Persian origin. 
 
 According to the Zand-Avasta there are 
 two deities, Hormazd and Ahiram, the for- 
 mer the author of good, and the latter the 
 author of evil, but both of these are regard- 
 ed as derived beings, coetaneously produced 
 by Time. Writers f)n this subject have traced 
 a striking resemblance between this theory 
 and that of the ancient Manicheans, who also 
 ascribed good and evil to two distinct crea- 
 tors, corresponding somewhat in name to 
 those of the Parsees, and hence it is believed 
 that the latter derived their notions, in part 
 at least, from that heretical sect. 
 
 The Parsees are idolators, worshiping not 
 merely the good and evil deities, but almost 
 every thing that is named in heaven and 
 earth. The learned Dr. Wilson, long a mis- 
 sionary of the Church of Scotland at Bom- 
 bay, makes a literal translation of one sec- 
 tion of the Parsoe scriptures, in which the 
 devotee is taught to say, "I worship Hor- 
 
PARSEEISM. 
 
 637 
 
 mazd, the pure, master of purity. I wor- 
 ship Zoroaster, the pure, master of purity. 
 I worship the whole body of Hormazd. I 
 worship ail the long existences (the beings 
 which are to exist 12,000 years.) I worship 
 all the pure celestial and terrestrial Izads 
 (angels.) I worship all the fountains of 
 water, flowing and stationary. I worship 
 all the trees, and the trunks, and lofty 
 branches, and fruit. I worship the whole 
 earth. I worship the whole heaven. I wor- 
 ship all the stars, the moon, and the sun. I 
 worship the primeval lights. I worship all 
 the animals, both aquatic and terrene. I 
 worship all the mountains, the purely plea- 
 surable. I worship all the fires." 
 
 These are a few from the long catalogue 
 of objects, animate and inanimate, which the 
 Parsees are taught to worship. These ob- 
 jects are so jumbled together and confound- 
 ed as to produce the utmost distraction and 
 degradation in the mind of the worshiper. 
 " Thus," Dr. Wilson remarks, "he at one 
 moment calls upon Hormazd, at the next 
 upon his own ghost ; at one moment on an 
 archangel, at the next on a sturdy bull ; at 
 one time on the brilliant sun, the next on a 
 blazing fire ; at one moment on a lofty and 
 stupendous mountain, the next on a darksome 
 cave ; at one moment on the ocean, at the 
 next on a well or spring, &c." Not only are 
 all distinctions among the different objects 
 of worship referred to in the liturgical and 
 doctrinal works of the Parsees levelled, by 
 being confounded together in the most 
 strange and unnatural associations, but the 
 same result is brought about by the fact that 
 all the different objects of worship of what- 
 ever nature, have applied to them the same 
 terms expressive of respect, of worship, of 
 supplication, praise, exaltation, reverence, 
 glory, and benediction. It has been clearly 
 ascertained that the terms and objects of 
 worship which have been given as specimens, 
 are used by the Parsees, not to express civil, 
 but religious respect and honor, and further, 
 that they are used not with levity and indi- 
 ference, but in the most solemn forms of de- 
 votion which they possess. Another singular 
 ftict is, that the service of the inferior objects 
 occupies more space in the books of the Par- 
 sees, than that of the more exalted and com- 
 manding objects. It appears therefore that 
 the Parsees, worshiping as they do " gods 
 many and lords many,' are polytheists in 
 the most literal and degrading sense. 
 
 It must be evident from the number and 
 character of the objects xcorshiped by the 
 Parsees, that their ideas of personal respon- 
 sibility and guilt, of the method of salvation, 
 and of a future state, cannot be even an ap- 
 proximation to the scripture doctrine on 
 these subjects. They do, indeed, like all 
 idolators, believe in something called 
 guilt, and in some method of expiation ; but 
 
 how low and corrupting is that belief, and 
 how shocking and disgusting the services 
 and sacrifices offered for the soul. The 
 teachings of the Zand-Avasta on these sub- 
 jects occupy a large space, and cannot be 
 quoted here, but they are alluded to with 
 suflBcient distinctness by Dr. Wilson, when 
 he says, " The religious war with, and re- 
 lentless destruction of vermin ; the mending 
 of holes formed in the earth, through which 
 the devils are supposed to emerge from hell ; 
 the feeding of the hungry flame with grease 
 and fat and sweet smelling odors ; the mut- 
 tering and sputtering of prayers and praises 
 in an unknown tongue, to every object that 
 exists ; the disposal of corpses so as to pol- 
 lute the atmosphere rather than the earth ; 
 the solemn funeral of bones and hair and 
 nails; the drinking and sipping of cow's 
 urine at morn and eve as if it were the very 
 elixir of immortality ; the scrubbing and 
 rubbing of the body with various ablutions 
 for the expulsion of devils ; the frightening 
 and driving away of demons by noises ; the 
 introduction of dogs to survey the bodies of 
 the deceased and to prognosticate and guard 
 them from the assaults of Satan ; and many 
 other practices said to be enjoined by divine 
 authority and to be good and virtuous ac- 
 tions, do not certainly commend themselves 
 to the reason of many of those with whom 
 tyrant custom compels their observance." 
 
 The earth, fire, water, dogs, and some 
 other objects are deemed peculiarlj^ sacred ; 
 and hence the severe penalties attached to 
 the pollution or injury of cither of these ob- 
 jects. Thus, for instance, a person who 
 strikes a water dog is treated to 10,000 
 stripes ; and he must by way of atonement 
 cany 10,000 bundles of dry and the same 
 quantity of soft wood, to the fires of Hor- 
 mazd. He must furnish 10,000 barsams 
 (trees), and 10,000 zorsof pure hom (a kind 
 of tree) and its juice. He must kill 10.000 
 reptiles that creep on their bellies, 10,000 
 reptiles in the form of a dog, 10,000 turtles, 
 10,000 land frogs, 10,000 water frogs, 10,000 
 ants which drag the grain, 10,000 stinging 
 ants, 10,000 blood suckers, and 10,000 sting- 
 ing flies ; and he must take out 10.000 im- 
 pure stones from the ground. And these 
 are only a part of the penalty. 
 
 So numerous and confused are the rites, 
 ceremonies, superstitions, and penal regula- 
 tions of the Parsees, that to illustrate them 
 all would require a volume. They are in 
 general but little acquainted with tlieir sa- 
 cred writings, except by tradition and as in- 
 ferred from actual observances, though some 
 of them are quite intelligent, and able to de- 
 fend their svstem with a show of leanung 
 and ingenuity. An American missionary at 
 Bombay says of the Parsees, " They yield in 
 energy and influence to none. They are 
 more ready than any other class to adopt 
 
63S 
 
 PASL MALI h-PILGRlMAGE. 
 
 Buropcan custonw and opinions, and not a 
 few of them spoak and write the English 
 koguage with facility. They have several 
 fine temples in Bombay, and at the time of 
 sunrise and sunset they may be seen reading 
 and rt'poating their prayers, and addressing 
 their worsliip to the sun and to the sea. But 
 they are much less of a religious people than 
 the Hindoos. They are indeed zealous for 
 their religion, but are most ignorant of what 
 it really is, and their zeal apparently arises 
 rather from a sectional, national feeling, 
 than from their being imbued with any re- 
 ligious principle. They pride themselves on 
 being Parsees, and they are ready to defend 
 Parseeisra, whatever it may be. Among 
 them are found the bitterest opponents of 
 Christianity, who are familiar with the prin- 
 cipal writings of opposers, and who manifest 
 no little zeal in disseminating their infidel 
 views. Much use is made of the press for 
 this purpose." — Rkv. E. D. Moore. 
 
 PARIS PROTESTANT MISSIONARY 
 SOCIETY: This society was formed in 1822, 
 under the title of "Societe des Missions 
 Evangeliques de Paris." A meeting was 
 held for the purpose at the house of S. V. S. 
 Wilder, Esq., an American merchant, then 
 residing in Paris, which was attended by the 
 presidents of the Reformed and Lutheran 
 Consistories ; by other pastors, with lay 
 members of the two churches ; by various 
 foreign Protestants, then in Paris, among 
 whom were Rev. Daniel Wilson, Rev. S. S. 
 Wilson, and Rev. Jonas King, and by Messrs. 
 Cook and Croggon,.Wesleyan missionaries 
 then in France. One object of the So 
 ciety was declared to be, to enlighten the 
 public mind, through the press, as to the 
 character and importance of the dififerent 
 missions of Protestant Christians among the 
 heathen ; and another, to establish an insti- 
 tution for young persons recommended by 
 the different missionary societies, to whom 
 it might be necessary to study some of the 
 Oriental languages. 
 
 Rev. Jonas King, being then in Paris, and 
 having received an invitation from Rev. Mr. 
 Fisk, after the death of his associate. Rev. 
 Mr. Parsons, to join him in the mission to 
 the Iloly Land, the new society assumed, for 
 a given period, his support. The committee 
 issued an address, setting forth the object 
 of the society, and soliciting contributions. 
 They also established the Monthly Concert 
 of Prayer. 
 
 Subsequently, this society directed all its 
 efforts to Southern Africa, where their mis- 
 sions have been very energetically and suc- 
 cessfully prosecuted to the present time. 
 They have thirteen stations, among several 
 different tribes, with fourteen missionaries, 
 and a large number of native assistants, and 
 about thirteen hundred communicants. (See 
 Southern Africa.) 
 
 PAS0MALIE : A station of the Madura 
 mission in Southern Ilindostan, under the 
 care of the American Board. 
 
 PASIIA: In the Turkish dominions, a 
 viceroy, governor, or commander. 
 
 PASIIALTC : The jurisdiction of a Pasha. 
 PATNA: a city of much importance in 
 the presidency of Bengal, on the south side 
 of the Ganges, about 300 miles north-west 
 of Calcutta. The population is estimated at 
 nearly 400,000. Within the walls, the city 
 is not more than a mile and a half in length 
 by three-fouiths of a mile in breadth ; but 
 its suburbs extend nine miles along the 
 banks of the river, and two miles inland. 
 The English Baptists commenced a mission 
 here in 1811. 
 
 PATE A : A station of the Wesleyan Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand. 
 
 PATRIARCH: In the Oriental churches, 
 a dignitary superior to the order of arch- 
 bishops, 
 
 PATRIARCHATE: The office or juris- 
 diction of a patriarch. 
 
 PAUMOTU: A group, consisting of a 
 large number of low, small islands, in the 
 South Pacific, between 17° and 23° S. lati- 
 tude, and 139° and 145° W. longitude. 
 They have been called by several names, as 
 The Labyrinth, Pearl Islands, Pallisee Is- 
 lands. Dangerous Archipelago. 
 
 PE'DANG: A Dutch settlement on the 
 west coast of Sumatra. Camphor, benzoin, 
 and pepper, and a considerable quantity of 
 gold from the interior are collected here, 
 and sent to Batavia. It is a station of the 
 Baptist Missionary Society. 
 
 PEELTON : Station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, among the Kaffres in South 
 Africa, destroyed by the Kaffre war. 
 
 PEHIAKUR A : A station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society, on the north-west side 
 of Waikato harbor, New Zealand. 
 
 PEKING : The Northern Capital of China, 
 the residence of the imperial court, situated 
 in the Chihli province, in lat. 39° 54' N., and 
 long. 116° 27' E. (See China.) 
 
 PELL A: A station of the Rhenish Mission- 
 ary Society, in Little Namaqua, South Africa. 
 PERIACOOLUM : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board, belonging to the Madras mission, 
 in Southern Hindostan. 
 
 PHILIPOLIS: Station of the London 
 Missionary Society, in South Africa, among 
 the Bosjesmans, on the north side of Cradock 
 River, with out-stations. 
 
 PHILIPTON: The principal station of 
 the London Missionary Society, on Kat 
 River, South Africa. 
 
 PIETERMAURITZBURG : A Dutch set- 
 tlement, near Port Natal, Southern Africa. 
 
 PILGRIMAGE : A journey to some place 
 deemed sacred, undertaken with supersti- 
 tious veneration for the place or the relics 
 1 or other sacred things which it contains. 
 
PINE HIDGE— PRESByTERIAN BOARD. 
 
 6S9 
 
 PINE RTDGE: A station of the Ameri- 
 can. Board among the Choctaw Indians. 
 
 PIPLEE : A short distance from Pooree, 
 in Hindostan, and near the coast of the Bay 
 of Bengal, a place through which most of 
 the pilgrims pass in their annual journeys 
 to the great Juggernaut festival. The Gene- 
 ral Baptists of England established a mission 
 there in 1847. 
 
 PIRIE : Station of the Free Church of 
 Scotland in South Africa, about 20 miles 
 East of Burnshill. 
 
 PL AATBERG t A station of the Wesley- 
 ans in the Natal District, South Africa. 
 
 POINT PEDRO : The northernmost ex- 
 tremity of Ceylon, in lat. 9° 48' N., and 
 long. 80* 7/ E. A station of the Wesleyans. 
 
 POINT VENUS : A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society', on Tahiti. 
 
 POLYNESIA: The Alany Isles; a name 
 vaguely applied to numerous groups of Is- 
 lands in the Pacific Ocean. (See Sandwich 
 Islands, South Sea Islands, &c.) 
 
 PONTIANAK: A Dutch possession on 
 the west coast of Borneo, 12 miles from 
 the mouth of the Pontiana river, for some 
 time a station of the American Board. 
 
 POOHACOOTEE : A large village, about 
 50 miles north-east from Madura, within the 
 territory of the Tondiman rajah. The sta- 
 tion was transferred to the American Board 
 in 1845, by the Indian Church Missionary 
 Society of Madras. 
 
 POOTHACOTTAII: A town of Southern 
 Hindostan, 65 miles north-east from Madura. 
 Population, 10,000. The mission of the 
 American Board at Madras had a station 
 here, but transferred it to Madura in 1845. 
 In 1848 it was relinquished, owing to its 
 distance, and the inconvenience of superin- 
 tending it. 
 
 POONAH: A city in the province of 
 Arungabad, until 1818 the capital of the 
 Mahratta empire, about 30 miles east of the 
 Ghauts, 100 from Bombay, and 75 from the 
 nearest sea-coast. A station of the Free 
 Church of Scotland. 
 
 POOREE : A station of the General Bap- 
 tists in Orissa. 
 
 PORT ANTONIO : A station of the Wes- 
 leyans in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 PORT-AU-PLATT : A station of the 
 "Wesleyans in Hayti. 
 
 PORT MORANT : A station of the Wes- 
 leyans in Jamaica, "W". I. 
 
 PORT NATAL': (D'Urban,) the principal 
 port of the Natal District, South Africa. 
 
 PORT REPUBLICAN : A station of the 
 Wesleyans in Hayti. 
 
 PORT OF SPAIN: A station of the 
 United Secession Church in Trinidad. 
 
 PORT ELIZABETH : Station of the Lon- 
 don and Wesleyan Missionary Societies in 
 Algoa Bay, South Africa. The London Mis- 
 sioDary Society's labors at this station are 
 
 chiefly directed to the Fingoes, a considera- 
 ble portion of this tribe having been for 
 years settled at this place. There is also an 
 English congregation and a Sabbath-school. 
 
 PORT' LOKKOH: A native town in the 
 Timneh country, about 40 miles from the 
 colony of Sierra Leone, West Africa. In 
 point of population and geographical location, 
 it is a highly important position. It is the 
 thoroughftire of that part of the country, and 
 is visited by the natives of various countries 
 to the eastward. This is the site of the 
 mission of the Church Missionary Society 
 to the Timneh country. 
 
 PORT LOUIS : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, on the north-western side 
 of the Island of Mauritius, or the Isle of 
 France. It is the principal town and capital 
 of the Island, and contains a large propor- 
 tion of the whole population. Its population 
 is largely Roman Catholic, and, of course, 
 the missionary work meets with much oppo- 
 sition. (See Mauritius.') 
 
 PRATTVILLE : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I. 
 
 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MIS- 
 SIONS. — The foreign missionary work was 
 commenced by the Presbyterian Church in 
 the United States at an early date. The 
 Society for propagating Christian knoAvledge 
 in Scotland, which was formed in 1709, es- 
 tablished a Board of correspondents in New 
 York, in 1741, who appointed the Rev. Aza- 
 riah Horton, a member of the Presbytery of 
 New York, to labor as a missionary among 
 the Indians on Long Island.* His labors 
 extended through two or three years, though 
 the precise limit is not now known. The 
 second foreign missionary of the Presby- 
 terian Church was the justly celebrated Da- 
 vid Brainerd. He was licensed to preach 
 by an association of Congregational minis- 
 ters, assembled at Danbury, Conn., July 29, 
 1742, and spent about a year at an Indian 
 settlement not very far from Albany. On 
 June 12, 1744, he was ordained by the Pres- 
 bytery of New York, then meeting at New- 
 ark, N. J., and immediately commenced his 
 labors at the forks of the Delaware, on the 
 Susquehannah, and at Cross-weeks, near the 
 centre of New Jersey. After the death of 
 David Brainerd, in October, 1747, he was 
 succeeded by his brother, the Rev. John 
 Brainerd, a member of the same Presby- 
 tery, who labored faithfully and successfully 
 among the Indians for many years. These 
 three first missionaries to the heathen tribes 
 in this land, under the direction of the Pres- 
 byterian Church, maintained a correspond- 
 ence with the parent Society in Scotland, 
 and derived a portion of their support from 
 that country. Both Mr. Horton and David 
 
 * See Green's Hist. Sketch, page 37, and Rov. A. Ilor- 
 ton'9 Narrative, from June, 1742, to March, 1743, in 
 Prince's Christian History, VoL I. 
 
640 
 
 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. 
 
 Brainord received something like two hiin- 
 tlred dollars a year from this source. But 
 John Braiiicrd was supported principally, 
 If not wholly, bv contributions in the 
 Presbyterian churcnes here. In 17G3, the 
 Synod of New York ordered a collection 
 to Im? made in all their churches for the sup- 
 port of Indian missions, allowing Mr. Brain- 
 erd a salary of thirty pounds, giving the 
 same amount for the support of schools, and 
 voting sixty-five pounds for the support of 
 the Rev. Sampson Occimi, a native Indian, 
 a member of the Presbytery of Suffolk, on 
 Long Island, and at that time a missionary 
 among the Oneida Indians.* Three years 
 after this, in 1766, the Rev. Charles Beatty 
 and the Rev. George Duffield performed a 
 mission, under the appointment of the Synod 
 of New York, to the Indians on the Mus- 
 kingum river in Ohio ; and their report was 
 60 favorable that the Synod appointed two 
 others to labor in the same region. But 
 troubles arising between the Indians and the 
 frontier inhabitants, this mission was relin- 
 quished. After the death of Mr. John 
 Brainerd, in 1780, so many changes had oc- 
 curred among the Indians in consequence of 
 the revolutionary war, and other causes, that 
 the foreign missionary work was to a con- 
 siderable degree abandoned for several years. 
 It had been prosecuted by the Presbyterian 
 Church from the year 1741 to 1780, a period 
 of nearly 40 years, during which time at 
 least six faithful ministers had labored in 
 the field, besides schoolmasters, and some 
 other helpers. In the year 1796, the for- 
 eign missionary work was resumed in the 
 formation of the "New York Missionary 
 Society." This body was independent of 
 any presbyterial supervision, though it is 
 believed to have consisted principally of 
 membersj, ^f. the Presbyterian Church. A 
 considerable amount of funds was collected, 
 and three Indian missions were established, 
 viz. : among the Chickasaws, the Tuscaroras, 
 and the Senecas. In the following year, 
 1797, the "Northern Missionary Society" 
 was instituted. This, like its predecessor, 
 was an independent body, though composed 
 in part of Presbyterians. By this Society, 
 missions to the Indian tribes were prosecuted 
 for several years. But in the year 1800, the 
 General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church 
 took tip the work of foreign missions in a sys- 
 tematic manner. They appointed the Rev. 
 Mr. Chapman as a missionary on tlie north- 
 western frontier of the State of New York, 
 with reference to the wants of both the white 
 inhabitants and the Indian tribes ; and in the 
 year 1802, the General Assembly's standing 
 committee on missions addressed a circular 
 to all the Presbyteries under their care, 
 urging collections for the support of missions. 
 
 ♦ Green's Sketch, page 44. 
 
 and making inquiries for suitable candidates 
 to be employed. In the next year, 1803, a 
 suitable person was found. The Rev. Gideon 
 Blackburn offered himself for the work and 
 a mission was established among the Cher- 
 okee Indians, then residing within the 
 chartered limits of the State of Georgia, 
 where Mr. Blackburn prosecuted his mis- 
 sionary labors with zeal, activity, and 
 devotedness, for eight years, when his 
 health failed, and ho was constrained to 
 leave his post. The standing committee of 
 the Genera} Assembly intended to have 
 prosecuted this mission, but did not succeed 
 in finding a man to supply the place of Mr. 
 Blackburn, and subsequently the Rev. Mr. 
 Kingsbury, acting under the American Board, 
 established himself in the Cherokee country, 
 and a flourishing mission was built up. 
 
 Missions among the Indians were prose- 
 cuted by the General Assembly in various 
 directions from 1805 to 1818, and with some 
 encouraging results ; but in 1818, measures 
 were taken to unite the efforts of the Pres- 
 byterian, Reformed Dutch, and Associate 
 Reformed Churches, by forming one inde- 
 pendent Society, and a new body was accord- 
 ingly formed, called "The United Foreign 
 Missionary Society." This Society was in 
 active operation some six or seven years, 
 and all the existing missionary interests in 
 the Presbyterian Church were merged in it. 
 In the year 1826, it had under its care nine 
 missions, embracing 60 male and female mis- 
 sionaries, 250 children and youth under in- 
 struction, and more than 40 native converts 
 to the faith and hope of the Gospel.* About 
 that time the whole work was transferred to 
 the American Board, and the United Foreign 
 Missionary Society ceased its operations. 
 
 It was regretted by many Presbyterians 
 that the church of their preference should 
 not prosecute foreign missions under their 
 own distinctive name, and this feeling be- 
 came at length so deep that in the month of 
 November, 1831, the Synod of Pittsburgh 
 formed the "Western Foreign Missionary 
 Society." This Society was intended to 
 unite the efforts, not of that Synod alone, 
 but the efforts of all others who might 
 choose to unite with them. Operations 
 were immediately commenced and prose- 
 cuted by this Society, with varied success, 
 for six years, when, in June. 1837, a Board 
 of Foreign Missions was established by the 
 General Assembly, to which the Western 
 Foreign Missionary Society subsequently 
 transferred all their missions and funds. — 
 Rev. J. Greenleaf. 
 
 The following interesting account of the 
 manner in which this Board is organized, 
 and the principles upon which its operations 
 are conducted, is taken from Mr. Lowric's 
 " Manual of Missions ;" 
 
 * Greon's Sketch, page 59. 
 
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. 
 
 641 
 
 This Board consists of sixty ministers, 
 and as many laymen, whose term of oflBce is 
 four years. Its members are appointed by 
 the General Assembly, one-fourth part each 
 year. To them is " intrusted, with such di- 
 rections as may from time to time be given, 
 the superintendence of the foreign missionary 
 operations of the Presbyterian Church in 
 the United States of America ;" and they 
 are required to " make annually to the Gen- 
 eral Assembly a report of their proceedings ; 
 and submit for its approval such plans and 
 measures as may be deemed useful and ne- 
 cessary." The Board is, therefore, simply a 
 Standing Committee of the General Assem- 
 bly, and the title of Committee would have 
 more clearly indicated its relations to that 
 venerable court. For convenience in holding 
 certain real estate and in the transaction of 
 some kinds of business, a charter has been 
 obtained for the Board under a general law 
 of the State of New York, with the same 
 title precisely as designated by the General 
 Assembly, " Tlie Board of Foreign Missions 
 of the Presbyterian Church in the United 
 States of America." This charter is not a 
 close but an open one, and the members of 
 the incorporated body are the same persons, 
 and no others, who are appointed as mem- 
 bers of the Board by the General Assembly. 
 
 The Board appoints annually an Executive 
 Committee and the Executive Officers. On 
 these devolves the immediate charge of the 
 missionary work. T\'"eekly meetings are held 
 by the Committee, at which every thing re- 
 lating to the interests of the missionary 
 cause at home and abroad may be brought 
 under consideration. The selection of mis- 
 sionary fields, the appointment of mission- 
 aries, the kinds of labor in each country and 
 at each station, the measures suitable for 
 promoting an interest in thfe missionary 
 work among the churches at home, receive 
 continued and careful attention. Most of 
 these are matters of deep importance. They 
 require the exercise of eiilarged views and 
 the most sober judgment. A general ac- 
 quaintance with tlie missionary field, and 
 with the history of missions, and a particu- 
 lar knowledge of the missionary work under 
 the charge of the Board, are required for the 
 proper decision of questions that occur from 
 time to time. An application for funds to 
 build a missionary chapel, or a request for 
 appointment as a missionary or teach^, may 
 easily bring under consideration the whole 
 subject of the best method of expending 
 missionary funds, in view both of the exi- 
 gences of the various missions and the 
 amount of moneys at the disposal of the 
 Committee. 
 
 The appointment of missionaries is one of 
 the most important of these duties. In 
 making appointments the Committee must 
 rtiy very much on recommendations of pas- 
 
 4:1 
 
 tors, instructors, and others. They are 
 anxious to send forth only those who have 
 been called to this work by the Head of the 
 Church. As a part of the evidence of this 
 divine call, they must take into consideration 
 the qualifications of the applicant. His rep- 
 utation for piety, prudence, and zeal, his 
 talents and scholarship, his health and its 
 adaptation to particular climates, are all mat- 
 ters of great moment. Qualifications of a 
 superior class are greatly to be desired ; but 
 men of respectable talents, with good judg- 
 ment and habits of industry and energy, all 
 under the control of humble, loving, and de- 
 voted piety, may be very useful in most mis- 
 sionary fields. It may well be doubted 
 whether it is expedient to send out men 
 whose qualifications are not fully equal to 
 the average attainments of the ministers of 
 the churches in this country. A rule was 
 adopted by the Board, at the request of the 
 Executive Committee, that no ordained min- 
 ister should be sent to a foreign field, with- 
 out the recommendation of his Presbytery. 
 This places the responsibility of deciding on 
 the qualifications of missionaries, to a large 
 degree, on the Presbyteries ; and it should 
 go far to secure the right kind of men. But 
 the nature of the work itself, and the sacri- 
 fices which it involves, will always furnish 
 presumptive evidence that the brethren who 
 ofier as volunteers to engage in it are men 
 worthy of confidence and honor. 
 
 The missionaries become members of the 
 Presbyteries which have been organized in 
 their respective fields of labor, and all eccle- 
 siastical matters are transacted as is usual 
 in these church courts. "With these, the 
 Committee do not interfere, unless by Chris- 
 tian counsel at the request of the missiona- 
 ries. Financial and other business matters 
 are transacted with the mission^das, not as 
 Presbyteries, but as missions oriP^commit- 
 tees ; and as a general rule it is expedient 
 to leave local details as far as possible in 
 their hands. The general supervision must, 
 from the nature of the case, be reserved to 
 the Committee. This is particularly neces- 
 sary in the expenditure of the funds devoted 
 to missionary purposes. Estimates are sent 
 up, embracing the various kinds of work in 
 each mission — the sum desired for the sup- 
 port of missionaries and native assistants, 
 for building churches, chapels, or school- 
 houses, for schools, for the press, &c., being 
 separately stated. In forming these esti- 
 mates, the missions proceed upon the ex- 
 penses of the preceding year as a basis, with 
 such enlargement or diminution as may he 
 called for by their circumstances and pros- 
 pects. With estimates from all the missions 
 before them, the Committee then apportion 
 to eacljsuch part of the probable receipts of 
 the Bdftd as the wants of each mission ap- 
 pear to] require. The probable income to 
 
642 
 
 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. 
 
 be thus apportioned is itself a matter of es- 
 timate, foun(le<l upon the income of the prc- 
 rrdinj: vcar, and the hope of enlarged con- 
 f n! utio'ns l.y the churches to this cause. In 
 the- juoper fulfilment of their trust in these 
 financial matters, the Committee are called 
 to exercise their maturest judgment. Errors 
 or mistakes here would Involve the whole 
 work in serious difficulties. Were expendi- 
 tures to be authorized without a strict regard 
 to the probable means of payment, a debt 
 would soon be created, embarrassing alike to 
 friends at home and to the missionaries 
 abroad. On the other hand, it is no easy 
 matter to withhold aid which is urgently 
 solicited, and which the churches are so well 
 able to give. 
 
 The arrangements of the Board for the re- 
 ceipt and expenditure of the funds commit- 
 ted to its charge for the missionary work, 
 are thoroughly business-like and satisfactory. 
 Every donation, though as small in amount 
 as the widow's two mites, can be traced in 
 its course from the time it leaves its donor's 
 hands, and for every dollar expended a sat- 
 isfactory exhibit can be shown — all being on 
 record in books kept for the purpose. Vouch- 
 ers are preserved for all moneys expended. 
 It is believed that nothing has been at 
 any time lost through want of uprightness 
 or fidelity. Errors of judgment there may 
 have been, and a consequent injudicious ex- 
 penditure of money in some cases. To ac- 
 knowledge this is but to concede that the 
 Executive Committee and Officers are far 
 from being infallible in judgment. But it is 
 no small thing to be able to say, that in 
 twenty years, out of an expenditure amount- 
 ing altogether to more than a million and a 
 half of dollars, nothing has been lost through 
 want of fidelity on the part of those who 
 were chewed with its disbursement. The 
 further mCTit of economy in the administra- 
 tion of the funds of the Board may be justly 
 claimed, and is shown, among other ways, 
 by the low per centage of cost for executive 
 services. 
 
 In the transmission of moneys for the sup- 
 port of the missionary work abroad, differ- 
 ent methods are adopted for missions in 
 different countries. To the missions among 
 the Indian tribes, a large amount of •' sup- 
 plies"— various articles of clothing, grocer- 
 ies, books, &c.,— are forwarded. These can 
 be purchased at much lower rates in our 
 cities than in the Indian country. For articles 
 purchased in the neighborhood of these mis- 
 sionary stations, payments are commonly 
 made by drafts drawn by the Treasurer or 
 Superintendent of the mission on the Trea- 
 surer in New York. In the African missions, 
 particularly at Corisco, money is less conve- 
 nient than some kinds of merchandise, and 
 accordingly supplies are sentfrom this coun- 
 try. To the missions in India, Siam, and 
 
 China, supplies are seldom sent, and only 
 when ordered ; and money is remitted, com- 
 monly by letters of credit. The Treasurer 
 goes down into Wall street, and engages a 
 letter of credit for, say, five hundred pounds 
 sterling ; on which letter, bills of exchange 
 may be drawn, payable in London at four or 
 six months after sight. This letter of credit 
 is forwarded to the Treasurer of the mission, 
 find bills are sold by him at the prevailing 
 rates. The purchaser sends the bill to Lon- 
 don, where it arrives in some five or six 
 months aftef the time when it was obtained 
 in Wall street, and four or six months must 
 still elapse, after it is presented for accept- 
 ance by the parties on whom it is drawn, be- 
 fore it becomes payable by the Treasurer of 
 the Board, making altogether ten or twelve 
 months from its date in New York. As the 
 Board must in due time pay this draft, it has 
 been the good practice of the Committee to 
 authorize, at the time of engaging the letter 
 of credit, the investment upon ample securi- 
 ties of money bearing interest, so as to be in 
 no danger of not being prepared to take it 
 up when it becomes due. In this way, not 
 only is safety secured, but the interest gained 
 in the meantime on the money invested 
 serves to reduce the cost of the bill, or, in 
 other words, to diminish the expense of re- 
 mitting funds to the missions. When the 
 fluctuations of commerce, war, or any other 
 cause render it difficult to sell bills of ex- 
 change in India or China, it then becomes 
 necessary to send out silver. This must be 
 bought, sometimes at a premium, and it is 
 subject to expense for freight and insurance, 
 while on the voyage it is earning no interest j 
 so that this kind of remittance is seldom a 
 desirable one. 
 
 The business of the Board is transacted 
 mainly in the city of New York. This city 
 has become the chief foreign port of the 
 country, and possesses many advantages for 
 sending forth missionaries, remitting funds, 
 and foreign correspondence. No other city 
 in this country affords equal facilities for 
 these purposes. The decision to establish 
 the business head-quarters of the Board in 
 this city was therefore a measure of obvious 
 propriety. Almost the only drawback to the 
 desirableness of this location grows out of 
 the great cost of living in New York. This 
 renders a somewhat large outlay necessary 
 for the salaries of the Executive Officers. 
 The amount paid by the Board, however, has 
 thus far at no time equalled the actual ex- 
 penses incurred by them for their support. 
 
 The missions of the Board are eight in 
 number, viz. : to North American Indians ; 
 Western Africa; India; Siam; China; 
 Jews; and Papal Europe. The folIoAving 
 summary view will exhibit the progress and 
 present condition of these missions, as they 
 appear in the Report for 1854 : 
 
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OP MISSIONS. 
 
 643 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 Names of Stations. 
 
 1: 
 
 1 Missionaries and 
 Ass't Missionaries 
 
 1 
 a 
 
 30 
 25 
 
 5 
 4 
 
 32 
 
 96 
 
 40 
 33 
 41 
 
 114 
 
 19 
 24 
 
 14 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 97 
 5 
 
 45 
 
 47 
 
 266 
 2 
 
 30 
 4 
 34 
 
 512 
 
 Scholars. 
 
 
 Board'ng 
 
 Day. 
 
 i 
 
 100 
 25 
 80 
 
 100 
 
 26 
 40 
 42 
 34 
 40 
 30 
 
 617 
 
 78 
 28 
 
 18 
 65 
 
 179 
 
 249 
 159 
 
 90 
 250 
 395 
 
 718 
 220 
 168 
 463 
 100 
 120 
 
 2932 
 
 27 
 
 103 
 
 78 
 
 "isi 
 
 3836 
 
 Minist'rs 
 
 Lay Teachers 
 and others. 
 
 1 
 
 
 I 
 
 100 
 16 
 40 
 
 ^ 
 
 26 
 23 
 
 239 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 13 
 
 9 
 
 18 
 
 27 
 
 23 
 
 30 
 26 
 
 56 
 358 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 40 
 100 
 
 12 
 20 
 16 
 11 
 
 208 
 
 12 
 
 18 
 
 15 
 
 18 
 
 61 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 29 
 
 35 
 
 310 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 15 
 
 35 
 
 78 
 24 
 
 18 
 28 
 
 148 
 
 231 
 150 
 
 90 
 250 
 395 
 
 640 
 220 
 118 
 415 
 100 
 120 
 
 2729 
 
 67 
 23 
 
 90 
 3002 
 
 •i, 
 
 5 
 
 20 
 15 
 
 ~35 
 
 6 
 6 
 
 45 
 
 60 
 30 
 
 125 
 166 
 
 Ameri- 
 can. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 INDIAN TRIBES: 
 
 Spencer Academy 
 
 Kowetah 
 
 1846 
 1842 
 1849 
 1849 
 1852 
 1848 
 1835 
 1846 
 18S8 
 1852 
 1853 
 
 1842 
 1850 
 1847 
 1841 
 1850 
 
 1834 
 1836 
 1836 
 1848 
 1847 
 1849 
 1853 
 1838 
 1843 
 1846 
 1836 
 1852 
 1853 
 
 1840 
 
 1846 
 1844 
 1850 
 1852 
 
 1846 
 1850 
 1850 
 
 1844 
 
 1853 
 
 8 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 4 
 1 
 4 
 4 
 
 23 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 6 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 66 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 25 
 
 7 
 2 
 4 
 8 
 
 2 
 1 
 3 
 4 
 4 
 1 
 1 
 
 37 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 1 
 3 
 4 
 
 21 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 14 
 79 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 2 
 2 
 7 
 2 
 2 
 
 26 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 32 
 
 Creeks 
 
 Chickasaws 
 
 Tallahassee 
 
 Wapanuck:! 
 
 ^''^Sy Depot 
 
 Little River, or Oak-ridge 
 Iowa 
 
 lowAs AND Sacs 
 
 Otoes and Omaiias 
 
 Chippewas and Ottawas 
 
 AFRICA: 
 
 Bellevue 
 
 Grand Traverse 
 
 Little Traverse 
 
 Middle Village 
 
 Total of Indian Missions, 
 
 Kroo People 
 
 Kentucky 
 
 Sinoe 
 
 Settra Kroo 
 
 Near the Equator, 
 
 INDIA: 
 
 LODIANA . 
 
 Corifico • 
 
 Total of African Missions 
 Lodiana 
 
 
 
 Sabathu 
 
 Ambala 
 
 Jalandar . 
 
 
 Dehra 
 
 
 Agra 
 
 Mynpurie 
 
 
 Allahabad 
 
 Allahabad 
 
 SI AM: 
 
 CHINA. 
 
 Canton . - •-- 
 
 
 Banda 
 
 Total of India Missions, 
 Bangkok 
 
 
 NiNGPO 
 
 
 
 
 Chinese in California. 
 
 JEWS: 
 
 ROMANISTS: 
 
 San Francisco 
 
 Total of China Missions, 
 New York , 
 
 Philadelphia 
 
 Baltimore 
 
 Stations in France 
 
 Buenos ^lyres .-- 
 
 General Total 
 
 For offices, the liberality of a few friends, 
 in addition to the collections made in some 
 of the churches in 1842, has provided the 
 Mission House, in Centre street. The place 
 at first occupied as an office was a room in 
 the Brick Church Chapel, in partnership 
 with another benevolent institution. This 
 was soon found to be quite too confined a 
 place, and two rooms were taken on the 
 third floor of a building at the corner of 
 Broadway and Murray street. The growing 
 business of the Board and the inconvenience 
 of these rooms led to another change, and a 
 part of a house was rented in City Hall 
 Place, where the office was held for some 
 years. These rooms, however, were not 
 
 well suited to the use of the Board ; and the 
 plan of renting an office was found to be ex- 
 pensive, and attended with the risk of change 
 and other serious inconveniences. It is 
 therefore a most happy thing that a house 
 conveniently situated, well lighted, suffi- 
 ciently large, and planned for its special use, 
 is now owned by the Board. Its offices are 
 rent-free, and arc better suited to its pur- 
 poses than rented rooms at almost any cost. 
 In the Mission House, besides the Trea- 
 surer's and Secretaries' offices, there are 
 apartments for packing and storing goods to 
 be sent to the missions. These occupy the 
 basement story. When several missionary 
 families arc about to sail, their trunks, 
 
ou 
 
 PRESBYTEKIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS. 
 
 boxcR, parcels, articles of furniture, Ac, fill 
 up these apartinenta, often to an unconjfort- 
 »ble degree j and both the economy and the 
 eonvenience of these rooms become quite 
 apparent. To rent suitable places for such 
 purposes, when missionaries are preparing to 
 embark, would always be attended witli 
 much expense, and might often be found im- 
 practicable. 
 
 The rooms devoted to the Museum, in the 
 third story, contain a rare variety of idol 
 gods and goddesses, from India, Siam, China, 
 Africa, and other heathen countries, besides 
 numerous other objects of interest. This 
 collection is gradually increasing in extent 
 and value, and is worthy of attention by the 
 friends of missions. Visitors are admitted 
 at aiiy time, on application to the oflScers or 
 clerks in the House. 
 
 A large room is occupied by the Library. 
 The books here collected number about 2000 
 volumes, mostly relating directly or indi- 
 rectly to the work of missons. They in- 
 clude numerous translations of the Sacred 
 Scriptures, Dictionaries and Grammars of 
 foreign languages. Reports and periodicals 
 of missionary institutions, in bound volumes, 
 memoirs of missionaries, works on the In- 
 dians, on Africa, India, China, &c. They 
 form a collection of very considerable value, 
 and one which should be gradually enlarged. 
 
 A number of works by Chinese authors 
 occupy a recess in the same room. This is 
 probably the only library of the kind in 
 this country. It consists of about 1000 vol- 
 umes, of which 400 are but one work, " The 
 Tweuty-Four Histories ;" and another work, 
 "A Universal Encyclopaedia," with maps, 
 diagrams, and sketches, extends to 120 vol- 
 umes. '• The Five Classics" number 104 
 volumes, and a second series, under a simi- 
 lar title, contains 22 volumes. These are all 
 in octavo, as are works on botany, descrip- 
 tions of particular districts, accounts of 
 kings and emperors, dictionaries, &c.j be- 
 sides some works of smaller size. The 
 whole collection gives a striking view of the 
 extent of Chinese literature, and makes one 
 sigh over the strange language which ren- 
 ders its stores inaccessible to most readers. 
 Yet for reference these volumes may prove 
 of great service. They were collected by 
 the late lamented Mr. Olyphant, a merchant 
 in the China trade, for some years a most 
 valued member of the Executive Committee ; 
 and by his characteristic liberality they oc- 
 cupy a place in the Mission House Library. 
 
 In other rooms are kept the bound vol- 
 umes of letters received at the missionary 
 office. These are arranged according to date. 
 All from correspondents in this country are 
 classified under Domestic, and those from 
 the missionaries are placed under the head 
 of the Missions. Thus, the volume labeled, 
 " Domestic— January to June, 1853," in- 
 
 cludes the home letters received in those 
 months; and the volumes labeled, "India 
 Letters, Lodiana, 1847-51," contains the let- 
 ters from the Lodiana Mission in that time. 
 Each volume has an index, making reference 
 easy. There are upwards of sixty of these 
 thick volumes, and each year steadily in- 
 creases the number. In addition to these 
 are many volumes consisting exclusively of 
 letters relating to the Missionary Chronicle, 
 formerly published, and to the Foreign Mis- 
 sionary. The copies of letters sent from the 
 office fill several volumes more. And the 
 Treasurer's books of account, of various 
 kinds, form still another class, second to 
 none in their importance. A copy of every 
 letter with remittances of money to the mis- 
 sions, and every letter containing remittances 
 from the churches or individuals to the trea- 
 sury, will be found among these volumes. 
 
 The Receipts of the Board, and of the 
 AYestern Foreign Missionary Society, (de- 
 ducting the grants of the Bible and Tract 
 Societies, and the appropriations of the 
 TJ. S. Government for Indian schools,) from 
 the commencement of their operations to 
 the present time, as it appears from the fol- 
 lowing table, present a gratifying view of 
 the growth of the missionary spirit from 
 year to year. The financial year of the 
 Board terminates the first of May. 
 
 °t 
 
 rl833, 
 
 $6,431 
 
 Ps.2 
 
 1834, 
 
 . 16,296 
 
 |^< 
 
 1835, 
 
 17,677 
 
 ^1 
 
 1836, 
 
 . '. 19,123 
 
 1837, 
 
 22,832 
 
 
 fl838, 
 
 . 44,748 
 
 
 1839, 
 
 56,150 
 
 
 1840, 
 
 . 54,425 
 
 
 1841, 
 
 62,344 
 
 
 1842, 
 
 . 58,924 
 
 1 
 
 1843, 
 
 54,760 
 
 d 
 
 1844, 
 
 . 66,674 
 
 m 
 
 1845, 
 
 72,117 
 
 h 
 
 1846, 
 
 . 76,395 
 
 
 1847, 
 
 82,739 
 
 i 
 
 1848, 
 
 . 89,165 
 
 ^ 
 
 1849, 
 
 96,294 
 
 1 
 
 1850, 
 
 . 104,665 
 
 1 
 
 1851, 
 
 . 108,544 
 
 1852, 
 
 . 117,882 
 
 
 1853, 
 
 . 122,028 
 
 
 1854, 
 
 . 140,502 
 
 Total, 
 
 $1,490,795 
 
 PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH OF NOVA 
 SCOTIA, BOARD OF MISSIONS: This 
 Board was first organized on the 11th July, 
 1844, in consequence of an overture on the 
 subject of Foreign Missions by the Presby- 
 tery of Prince Edward Island. The move- 
 ment in Presbytery is understood to have 
 originated with Rev. John Geddie, who after 
 wards became the first missionary under the ' 
 
PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH OF NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 645 
 
 direction of the Board. Its members are 
 subject to the annual appointment of sj^nod, 
 but for the most part the same individuals 
 are re-appointed. At present, it consists of 
 eight clergymen and four laymen ; the Rev. 
 David Roy, New Glasgow, N. S., being Con- 
 vener, and Rev. James Bayne, Pictou, N. S., 
 Recording and Corresponding Secretary. 
 The Board meet as often as business re- 
 quires, at the call of the Convener, or their 
 own adjournment. The Secretary is instruct- 
 ed to correspond once in three months, and 
 at other times, as circumstances require. A 
 monthly periodical, called " The Missionary 
 Register," is issued under the care of the 
 Board, with a special view to disseminate 
 missionary intelligence. An annual report 
 of proceedings is laid before the synod, and 
 the minutes of the various meetings, during 
 each year, countersigned by the Moderator. 
 The following synodical instructions were 
 given to the Board at its first formation : 
 (1) That the Board be authorized to receive 
 the cooperation of the several ministers of 
 the church in making an appeal to all the 
 congregations of the body relative to the 
 object of their appointment, and in counten- 
 ancing and aiding an agency, if it be deemed 
 proper that one should be employed. (2) 
 That the Board do apply to such sources of 
 information as they may deem requisite for 
 the purpose of ascertaining the most elegible 
 field for their missionary operations, expenses 
 of outfit, passage, annual salary, &c. (3) 
 That when funds adequate to maintain a 
 missionary abroad shall be guaranteed by 
 the several congregations of the church, and 
 the Board shall feel themselves prepared to 
 negociate with candidates for such mission- 
 ary employment, proposals shall be made to 
 obtain offers from qualified persons willing 
 to volunteer their services for this purpose. 
 (4) That in treating with candidates, care- 
 ful attention be paid to their personal re- 
 ligion, doctrinal views, and missionary spirit. 
 Agreeably to these instructions the Board 
 took immediate steps to appeal for support, 
 and as far as possible obtain a guarantee of 
 annual contribution to a specific amount 
 from the Church at large. The result of this 
 appeal was that a yearly contribution of 
 £200 currency, was considered as an amount 
 that might confidently be depended upon. 
 It had been ascertained that £70 sterling, or 
 £84 currency, was sufficient for the support 
 of one missionary in Polynesia, and this 
 field was selected as the least expensive and 
 most healthful. September 26, 1845, the 
 Board met for the purpose of receiving ten- 
 ders of service from duly qualified persons, 
 when the Rev. John Geddie, of Cavendish 
 and New London, Prince Edward Island, 
 offered and was accepted. From the favor- 
 able aspect of continued and enlarged pecu- 
 niary support, the Board felt encouraged to 
 
 appoint a catechist as companion and assist- 
 ant to Mr. Geddie. This was happily ac- 
 complished so that the divine example of 
 sending out the disciples two by two was 
 followed to the letter. Mr. Isaac Archibald, 
 a native of Nova Scotia who had received a 
 liberal education, though not sufficient to 
 warrant his immediate licensure and ordina- 
 tion as a missionary in full standing, was 
 unanimously accepted, and duly appointed. In 
 the mean time Mr. Geddie, who was in a few 
 weeks loosed from his congregation, visited 
 the various congregations in his presbytery 
 with a view to deepen their interest in the 
 mission, by a series of farewell services. The 
 same course was pursued during the earlier 
 part of the following year throughout the 
 presbyteries of Nova Scotia, and was found 
 to produce a very happy effect. Mr. Geddie 
 devoted some months to the study of medi- 
 cine and also to the art of printing, with a 
 view to their future practice on the field of 
 foreign service. It was found very difficult 
 to select the particular island on which Mr. 
 Geddie should commence operations, as it 
 was not known which would be most acces- 
 sible to missionary effort. New Caledonia 
 was chiefly thought of, but Mr. G. was not 
 bound by any decision of the Board to 
 adopt it, unless circumstances were found 
 favorable. The New Hebrides group had 
 been surveyed by the martyr missionary 
 Williams, for the special occupation of the 
 parent church, (United Presbyterian, or as 
 it was then called the United Secession 
 Church of Scotland,) and at their expense. 
 It was felt to be exceedingly appropriate 
 that the Church in Nova Scotia should adopt 
 as their field what the Church at home could 
 not enter upon at that time. This arrange- 
 ment proved afterwards to be quite advan- 
 tageous, and was accordingly adopted. 
 Messrs. Geddie and Archibald, with their 
 wives and children, after a series of farewell 
 services in Pictou, Onslow, and Halifax, left 
 Nova Scotia Nov. 30, 1846. After a brief 
 sojourn in the United States, at Newbury- 
 port, where they were very kindly entreated 
 by the friends of the missionary enterprize, 
 they sailed for the Sandwich Islands, being 
 there also entertained, with Christian wel- 
 come, and sent on their way with the pray- 
 ers and offerings of the churches. They 
 found a safe and prosperous voyage to the 
 Samoan group, which is occupied by the 
 agents of the London Missionary Society, 
 with whom they spent a considerable period, 
 receiving the benefit of their experience as 
 to the manners and customs and language of 
 the tribe whose evangelization was considered 
 most suitable to the resources of the newly 
 arrived missionaries. After due deliberation 
 the island of Aneiteum, New Hebrides, was 
 selected for permanent location. In July, 
 1848, the mission families were conveyed 
 
646 
 
 PRIMITI V JJ METHODISTS— RANGOON. 
 
 thither and entered immediately upon their 
 allotted duties. Mr. Isaac Archibald re- 
 Biened his connection with the missiofii in 
 
 1850. Since that jMjriod the Board have had 
 one missionary and a few native teachers 
 under their charge. Very urgent appeals 
 have been made for additional assistance, but 
 up to the present year, (1854,) no favorable 
 answer has been returned, such as warrants 
 tlie expectation of immediate aid. One 
 young man of ardent missionary spirit, is 
 now in course of training, and will be sent 
 out by the John "Williams on her outward 
 voyage next year. Two additional mission- 
 aries are wanted, and if found, duly qualified, 
 would be sent immediately. The funds on 
 hand have always been adequate to the 
 wants of the mission, and exhibit now a 
 more flourishing condition than they have 
 ever presented. After defraying the neces- 
 sary expenses for the year there will be a 
 balance on hand of nearly £500. There is no 
 reason to fear that the resources of the 
 Church are quite equal to the maintenance 
 of four missionaries. At first, the salary of 
 the ordained missionary was £70 sterling, 
 but in 1850 it was raised to an equality with 
 the scale adopted by the London Missionary 
 Society, viz., £100 sterling, and £5 sterling 
 for each child. In addition to this, one of 
 the children has been for some years at 
 Walthanstow, England, along with the chil- 
 dren of the missionaries of that Society. 
 The expense for his education amounts to 
 £15 sterling per annum, and with extras 
 does not exceed £20. 
 
 The entire amount contributed to this 
 mission since 1846 probably exceeds, but 
 may be stated at, £3,000 currency or £2,400 
 sterling. The amount for the past year re- 
 ceived by the Treasurer is £424 currency, 
 or £339 sterling in money, and nearly £300 
 in mission goods. At present the Board has 
 but one mission, and one missionary, with 
 several native teachers, on Aneiteum and Fo- 
 tenna. New Hebrides. The church in Dec, 
 
 1851, contained 24 members and is situ- 
 ated at Aniligauhat, Aneiteum. There is 
 every probability that the number of con- 
 verts greatly exceeds this amount now. By 
 the latest date, Oct. 1853, it appears that the 
 entire island, with its 3,000 inhabitants, has 
 abandoned heathenish practices, and that the 
 district which had last given up its idols is 
 now exceedingly anxious to have Christian 
 instruction. (See South Sea Js/ancZ^.)— Rev 
 J. Bayne, of Pictou, N. S. 
 
 PRIMITIVE METHODIST FOREIGN 
 MISSIONARY SOCIETY: The Primitive 
 Methodists, (or "Ranters," as they are 
 sometimes called,) are a body of simple- 
 hearted and devoted Christians which arose 
 in England in 1810. In 1853, they reported 
 5C8 ministers, 108,920 members. Finding 
 themselves gaining strength, they organized 
 
 a foreign missionary society in March 1844, 
 adopting Canada, New Zealand and Australia 
 as their fields of labor. The Rev. J. Long, 
 and J. Wilson were the first missionaries 
 they sent to Australia. Since that time they 
 have strengthened this mission, and God has 
 honored them with considerable prosperity. 
 Their stations in Australia are Adelaide, 
 Mount Barker, Burra Burra, Sydney, Mor- 
 peth, Melbourne, and Geelong. The number 
 of missionaries is seven, and of members 
 under their care 535. The total number of 
 their forei^ missionaries throughout the 
 world, is 23 ; of whom 13 are in Canada, 7 
 in Australia, and 3 in New Zealand. Tho 
 whole number of members in their stations 
 is 2,374— W. B. 
 
 PROSPECT PENN : A station of the 
 London Missionary Society in Jamaica, 
 West Indies. 
 
 PROTESTANT EPISCOPAL CHURCH, 
 MISSIONS OF : (See Episcopal Board of 
 Missio7is.) 
 
 PUEN : A station of the London Mission- 
 ary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. 
 
 PUNA : A district on the western coast 
 of the Island of Hawaii, forming, in connec- 
 tion with Hilo, the Parish of Rev. Mr. Coan, 
 formerly a missionary of the American 
 Board, now pastor of the native church in 
 Hilo and Puna, by whom he is supported. 
 
 QUILON: A seaport town, in Southern 
 India, of considerable note in former times, 
 said to have been built A. D. 825. A station 
 of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 RAGGED ISLAND : One of the Baha- 
 mas j a station of the Baptist Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 RAIATEA: One of the Society Islands, 
 having a mission of the London Missionary 
 Societ}^ 
 
 RAIVAVAI : One of the Austral Islands, 
 and a station of the London Missionary So- 
 ciety. 
 
 RAJKOTE : A station of the Irish Pres- 
 byterian mission in India, on the Gulf of 
 Cambay, opposite to Surat. 
 
 RAJMUNDRY : A town in the Northern 
 Circars, India, — a station of the Hamburgh 
 North German Missionary Society. 
 
 RAJAH, or RAJA : In India, a prince. 
 Some of the Rajahs are said to be independ- 
 ent princes, and others are tributary to the 
 Mogul. 
 
 RAMREE : The capital of a district of tho 
 same name, 117 miles south from Arracan 
 town : A station of the American Baptist 
 Union. 
 
 RANGOON : The principal seaport of the 
 Burman dominions, situated on the north 
 bank of the Rangoon branch of the Irrawady. 
 Its extent along the river is about a mile, 
 and its breadth about 650 j^ards. It is en- 
 closed by a stockade of teak timber and 
 planks from ten to twelve feet high, having 
 
RHENISH MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 647 
 
 two gates on the northern face, and one on 
 each of the others. Pop. 40,000 to 50,000. 
 
 RANGIHONA: The first station occu- 
 pied by the Church Missionary Society in 
 New Zealand, on the north-east side of the 
 Bay of Islands. 
 
 RAROTONGA: The largest of the Her- 
 vey Islands group, in the South Pacific, 
 whei« is a mission of the London Mission- 
 ary Society. 
 
 RED RIVER : The Red River falls into 
 Lake Winnipeg. The settlement on this 
 river is about 50 miles in extent. Popula- 
 tion in 1843, 5,143, of whom 2,798 were Ro- 
 man Catholics, and 2,345 Protestants. The 
 Church Missionary Society have several 
 stations in this settlement. 
 
 REGENT'S TOWN: A town of liberated 
 Africans, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, 5 
 miles south south-east from Cape Town, in 
 a valley near the heights of the Sierra Leone 
 mountains. Its situation is romantic and 
 healthy. No less than 8 mountains, covered 
 with evergreen forests, rear their heads and 
 form a chain around the settlement. Streams 
 descend from the various clifis, and form a 
 large brook, which runs through the middle 
 of the town. On the banks is a meadow for 
 the cattle belonging to the settlement, which 
 is always green. In 1813, this spot, then un- 
 inhabited, was set apart for the reception of 
 negroes delivered from slave ships by the 
 English cruisers. In 1816, their number was 
 1,100, from 22 different tribes, barbarous to 
 an astonishing degree. (See Western Africa, 
 Church Missionary Society.) 
 
 REHOBOTH: A station of the Rhenish 
 Missionary Society, at the hot springs, in 
 Namaqualand, South Africa. 
 
 REWA : The second place in rank and 
 influence in the Feejee Islands. A station 
 of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 RHENISH MISSIONARY SOCIETY: 
 The following account of the Rhenish Mis- 
 sionary Society was given by Rev. L. Van 
 Rohden, Assistant Inspector of the Barmen 
 Missionarv Seminary, in the ^^Evangelical 
 Christendom" for Jan. 1851 : " The Rhenish 
 Missionary Society was founded in the year 
 1828. Three associations, those of Elberfeld, 
 Barmen and Cologne, united in the autumn 
 of the above year, that they might, with 
 common powers, send out missionaries to the 
 heathen world. The above three associa- 
 tions were soon joined by others, in the 
 Rhenish provinces and in Westphalia, having 
 the same objects in view. The associations 
 thus combined, which, up to the present 
 time, have been joined by about fifty other 
 small and large associations in Western and 
 Middle Germany, bear altogether the name 
 of the Rhenish Missionary Society. The 
 associations have appointed a committee, or, 
 as we call it, '' a deputation," consisting of 
 twelve individuals, the whole residing either 
 
 in Elberfeld or Barmen, who have the man- 
 agement of its affairs in their hands. They 
 hold, for this purpose, regular meetings once 
 a month, or oftener, in the mission-house. A 
 part of the correspondence is conducted by 
 the members of the deputation themselves ; 
 but the principal part of the business de- 
 volves on the inspectorof the mission-house. 
 Once a year, or even oftener, the deputation 
 summons delegates from all the combined 
 associations to a general assembly at Bar- 
 men ; lays before them a report of their 
 proceedings ; and adopts such resolutions as 
 may appear to be necessary for the exten- 
 sion and furtherance of the work. The gen- 
 eral assembly decides by a majority of votes. 
 
 "When the Rhenish Missionary Society 
 met in the autumn of 1828, one of the asso- 
 ciations composing it, viz., that of Barmen, 
 had already for three years established a 
 mission seminary ; and had published also 
 the Barmen Missionary Gazette, of which 
 20,000 copies were in circulation. The mis- 
 sion seminary had at the first for its object 
 to give young mechanics the necessar}^ in- 
 struction to qualify them for going out as 
 missionary assistants to the heathen. But 
 soon this plan was enlarged so far, that the 
 young men should be educated with a view 
 of becoming actual missionaries, who should 
 pass their theological examination here, and 
 should be ordained to go out as ministers to 
 the heathen ; only by way of exception are 
 they sent out without being ordained as 
 catechists, or even as assistants and mechan- 
 ics. The Rhenish Missionary Society under- 
 took, immediately after its foundation, the 
 direction of the Barmen mission seminary. 
 The Inspector and the pupils were placed 
 under its control. The first was a perma- 
 nent member of the deputation. Dr. Richter 
 was then the Inspector ; and he remained so 
 till the spring of 1847, when he suddenly 
 died. He was assisted by his brother W. 
 Richter, who died about two years before 
 him. His place was filled by the writer of 
 these lines, L. Von Rohden, and that of In- 
 spector by C. Wallman since 1848. 
 
 " The Rhenish Missionary Societ}'- supports 
 twenty-five stations, with several more out- 
 stations, in three different parts of the mis- 
 sion-field; viz., in South-eastern Africa, in 
 Borneo, and in China. It has sent out fifty 
 missionaries, who are, for the most part, 
 married, and of whom seven have alreadjr 
 died. The yearly income amounts to fronk 
 28,000 to 32,000 Prussian thalers, or from, 
 £3,150 to £3,600. It possesses a mission- 
 house, in which the pupils are educated, tea 
 at a time, and a small congregation and mis- 
 sion-chapel, near the mission-house, in which, 
 public worship is conducted by the pupil* 
 exclusively, under the direction of the In- 
 spector. Once a year missionary meetings, 
 are held in all the congregations connected. 
 
648 
 
 RIMATARA— SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 with the society, which have assumed the 
 character of public festivals. Once a month 
 missionary prayer meetings are held. Every 
 fortnight there appears a report of the 
 labors of our missionaries : and once a year 
 A general report is published." 
 
 Thus stood the affairs of the Society in 
 1851. It has just entered its twenty-sixth 
 yew. It now has twenty-five auxiliaries in 
 Rhenish Prussia, and thirteen in Westphalia ; 
 and many of these embrace other " special 
 and local unions." Nor is this all. Thuringia 
 furnishes four auxiliaries ; Nassau, Hesse 
 Darmstadt, Ac, three ; and there is one in 
 the United States. In 1850, its receipts had 
 risen to 39,000 thalers. Within the twenty- 
 five years, more than 500,000 thalers have 
 been expended for the spread of the Gospel. 
 As the result of its efforts in behalf of the 
 heathen, the Rhenish Missionary Society can 
 point to more than five thousand persons 
 who have received baptism, and to eighteen 
 hundred communicants. 
 
 RIMATAR A : One of the smallest of the 
 Austral Islands, and a station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society. 
 
 ROBBEN ISbAND: Hospital for Lepers, 
 off Table Bay, South Africa, occupied as a 
 station by the United Brethren, removed 
 from Heviel-en-Aarde. 
 
 ROCKBOOKAH : A station of the Ame- 
 rican Episcopal Board in West Africa, about 
 25 miles east of Cape Palmas, beyond the 
 limits of the Colony, being the capital of the 
 Bahboo tribe. 
 
 ROCK TOWN : Station of the United 
 Presbyterian Synod of Scotland, near the 
 mouth of the Old Calabar, West Africa. 
 
 ROCKTOWN ; A station of the American 
 Episcopal Missionary Society in West 
 Africa, south-west of Cape Palmas. 
 
 ROMA : One of the Banda Islands, a 
 group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 ROTORUA: Astationof the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New Zealand, on the Ro- 
 torua Lake, lat. Z^'^ W S. and longitude 
 
 ne*' E. 
 
 ROTTY : One of the Molucca Islands, in 
 the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 ROYAPOORUM: A station of the Ame- 
 rican Board, belonging to the Madras mis- 
 sion, in Eastern Hindostan. 
 
 RURUTU : A small island, of the Aus- 
 tral group, and a station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society. 
 
 SABATHA : A station of the Presbyterian 
 Board in Northern India, 110 miles north- 
 east from Lodiana, in the lower ranges of the 
 Himalaya mountains, at an elevation of about 
 4j000 feet above the sea. 
 
 SAFET : A town, formerly of consider- 
 able note, situated on a hill overlooking the 
 western coast of the Lake of Tiberias, 65 
 miles west of Damascus. It formerly con- 
 
 tained seven Jewish synagogues, and a sort 
 of university for the education of Jewish 
 rabbis. In the year 1759, the place was 
 nearly destroyed by an earthquake. It is 
 now a poor place. The Jews arc much op- 
 pressed. The London Jews' Society have a 
 station here. 
 
 SAFOTULOFAI : A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society, on the Island of 
 Savaii, one of the Samoas. It is a large and 
 important place. Population about 1,000. 
 
 SAHARANPUR : A town in the province 
 of Delhi, Northern India, 90 miles north- 
 east from the city of Delhi, and 130 south- 
 east from Lodiana. Its elevation above tho 
 sea is 1,073 feet. It is a large town, and 
 many of the houses are built of brick. The 
 Presbyterian Board (American) have a sta- 
 tion here. 
 
 S ALULUA : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, on the Island of Savaii, one 
 of the Samoan group. 
 
 SALEM : Chief town of a district of the 
 same name, in the province of Mysore, 
 India : a station of the London Missionary 
 Society. Also, a station of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society in South Africa, and of 
 the United Brethren m Surinam. 
 
 SALUAFATA : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, on the Island of Upolu. 
 SALONICA : {See Tfiessalonica.) 
 
 SAMANA: A station of the Wesleyan 
 Society in Hayti. 
 
 SAMARANG : A town and seaport on 
 the north coast of the Island of Java, near 
 the mouth of a river of the same name, 240 
 miles east south-east from Batavia. Popu- 
 lation about 20,000. A station of the Bap- 
 tist Missionary Society. 
 
 SAMOA: A group of Islands in the South 
 Pacific, between 10* and 20<=' S. lat. and 169^^ 
 and 174'' W. longitude, sometimes calle%!^ 
 Navigators' Islands, 8 in number, viz., Man- 
 ua, Orosenga, Ofu, Tutuila, Upolu, Manono, 
 Aborima, and' Savaii. Population, 160.000. 
 The London Missionary Society have a mis- 
 sion here. (See South Sea Islands.) 
 
 SANDOWAY :• A station of the Ameri- 
 can Baptist Union in Arracan. 
 
 SANGEER ISLANDS : A group of the 
 Moluccas, in the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 SANDALWOOD ISLAND: One of the 
 lesser Sunda Islands, in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS : The Sandwich 
 Islands, situated in the North Pacific Ocean, 
 about 20° N. lat. and 160* W. long., 
 were discovered by Capt. Cook in 1778. 
 They consist of a group of twelve volcanic 
 islands, (three or four of which are merely 
 uninhabited rocks. ) standing quite by them- 
 selves, and of very considerable commercial 
 importance. Hawaii is the largest, but 
 Oahu^ more central in the group, and hav- 
 ing a good harbor, is the seat of government 
 
'^"^ Of THl^^ 
 
 :UHIVBRSITr] 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 649 
 
 and the commercial centre. The islands are 
 estimated to contain something more than 
 6,000 square miles. The face of the country 
 is greatly diversified with hills and plains, 
 secluded valleys, deep ravines, lofty moun- 
 tains, and craters of immense volcanoes. In 
 the elevated interior of the Islands the cli 
 mate is cool. Rains are frequent in the in- 
 terior and on the windward side, and vege- 
 tation in many parts luxuriant ; but the low 
 lands of the leeward side of the islands are 
 mostly dry and barren. The native inhab- 
 itants belong to the same race with those of 
 most of the more easterly islands in the Pa- 
 cific. 
 
 Population. — The population was esti- 
 mated by Capt. Cook at 400,000; an esti- 
 mate, doubtless, greatly too large ; though, 
 from various causes, the people have been 
 rapidly wasting away since his visit. About 
 1840, a census not fully to be rehed upon, 
 showed the population to be not far from 
 108,000. 
 
 Social, Moral, and Religious Condition of 
 the People. — Before missionary operations 
 commenced, the people were, if not in the 
 lowest state of barbarism in which men 
 are ever found, yet certainly in a very low 
 state of intellectual, social, and moral de- 
 basement. With no written language, with 
 no comfortable dwellings, with very little 
 clothing, with the family constitution in 
 ruins, unmitigated licentiousness universal, 
 and every vile passion indulged without re- 
 straint ; the people "a nation of drunkards," 
 with no laws or courts of justice. " Society 
 was a dead sea of pollution, and many ships 
 visiting the islands were floating exhibitions 
 of Sodom and Gomorrah." The government 
 was wholly arbitrary ; the kings and chiefs 
 were considered owners of the soil, and the 
 people were slaves, with their property and 
 their lives subject to the will of those above 
 them. The people of all ranks were much 
 under the influence of superstitious fears, 
 and their religion, in connection with the 
 cruel rites of idol worship, was in a great 
 measure a tabu system ; i. e., a system of re- 
 ligious prohibitions and consecrations, which 
 had extended itself very widely, and had be- 
 come exceedingly burdensome under the di- 
 rection of priests and kings who used the 
 Rystem to accomplish their own purposes. 
 
 MISSION". 
 
 American Boakd. — Just as American 
 Christians were beginning to direct their at- 
 tention to the work of Christianizing hea- 
 then nations, two youths from the Sandwich 
 Islands, Opukahaia (Obookiah) and Hopu, 
 came in an American vessel to the United 
 States. They came from " a boys' notion," 
 but the hand of God was in it. Landing at 
 New York in 1809, they accompanied the 
 captain of the vessel to New Haven, Conn., 
 
 and soon attracted the notice and Christian 
 sympathy of some of the students of Yale 
 College, who began to give them instruction. 
 In 1816, they, with several others from the 
 Sandwich Islands, and others from various 
 portions of the heathen world, were gathered 
 into a " mission school " at Cornwall, Conn. 
 Opukahaia, having become hopefully a Chris- 
 tian, expressed deep sympathy for his hea- 
 then relations and nation, and a strong wish 
 that they might be evangelized. He, how- 
 ever, was not permitted to engage personally 
 in the work of preaching to them the Gospel, 
 as he ardently desired to do. He died in 
 Feb., 1818, before arrangements were made 
 for sending a mission to the Islands. But 
 he had not lived in vain. Extensive interest 
 had been awakened, and it had become ob- 
 vious that Christian missionaries would soon 
 be sent to his kindred according to the flesh. 
 
 In the summer of 1819, Hiram Bingham 
 and Asa Thurston, students in the theologi- 
 cal seminary at Andover, oflTered themselves 
 to the American Board for this service. 
 They were ordained at Goshen, Conn., Sept. 
 19. Others offered themselves as assistant 
 missionaries ; a mission church was organized 
 in the vestry of Park Street church, Boston, 
 Oct. 15th. The public instructions of the 
 Prudential Committee were given by the 
 Secretary, Rev. Dr. "Worcester, at Park Street, 
 the same evening, and on the 23d of the 
 same month, (Oct. 1819,) the company sailed 
 from Boston in the Brig Thaddeus, Capt. 
 Blanchard. Besides the two ordained mis- 
 sionaries and their wives, there were, as 
 members of the mission, Mr. Daniel Cham- 
 berlain, farmer. Dr. Thomas Holman, physi- 
 cian, Mr. Samuel Whitney, mechanic and 
 teacher, Mr. Samuel Ruggles, catechist, and 
 Mr. Elisha Loomis, printer and teacher, with 
 their wives, and John Honoree, Thomas Ho- 
 pu, and William Tennooe, natives of the Is- 
 lands who had been educated at Cornwall ; 
 in all, 17. George Tamoree, a son of one of 
 the Island chiefs, who had also been educated 
 at Cornwall, returned in the same vessel, but 
 not as a member of the mission. It may be 
 stated here that some of these natives of the 
 Islands did not render all that assistance 
 which it was hoped would be derived from 
 them in the operations of the mission. They 
 exhibited neither the intelligence nor the sta- 
 bility of character needed in teachers. Hopu, 
 however, acquired the epithet of " the faith- 
 ful," and Honoree appears to have been la- 
 borious and useful ; but Tennooe rapidly fell 
 into the immoral practices of his countrymen, 
 and was excluded from the church in 1820. 
 The mission was also yet more deeply pamed 
 by the unchristian conduct of Dr. Holman, 
 who was excommunicated in January, 1821. 
 
 In the instructions given to this band of 
 missionaries, who were going, emphatically, 
 to one of the " dark places of the earth," 
 
650 
 
 BANDWICII ISLANDS. 
 
 they wer« directed " to aim at nothinf;; short of 
 coTcring those ishinds with fruitful fields and 
 pleasant dwellinpfs, and schools and churches, 
 and raising up the whole people to an ele- 
 y»ted state of Christian civilization;" '"to 
 introduce, and get into extended operation 
 and inlluence among them, the arts, institu- 
 tions and usages of civilized life and soci- 
 ety ;" but, " above all, to convert them from 
 their idolatries, superstitions and vices, to 
 the living God." They were going to do a 
 great work, and God, wha had prepared the 
 way for their being sent, was also preparing 
 the way for their reception and for their 
 success. 
 
 Preparation for the Mission at the Islands. 
 — One of the most important of that series 
 of events by which the Sandwich Islands 
 were prepared to be a field of most success- 
 ful missionary operations, was the subjuga- 
 tion of the different islands about the com- 
 mencement of the present century, and the 
 union of all under one government. Several 
 distinct petty kingdoms had previously pre- 
 sented a scene of uninterrupted jealousy, 
 contention, and savage warfare ; but now 
 Kamehameha, of Hawaii, a man of great phy- 
 sical strength and mental energy, and of 
 many excellent qualities as a ruler, had sub- 
 dued all the other kingdoms. There was 
 one government only. What was permitted 
 in one island would be likely to be permitted 
 in all, and any changes which might take 
 place in customs, religion, or laws, would 
 readily become universal changes. 
 
 Capt. Vancouver, who visited the Islands 
 several times, in 1792, '93, and '94, gave the 
 king much good advice, as well as some val- 
 uable presents ; and before leaving, is re- 
 ported to have said to him: ''There is a God 
 above in heaven, and if you desire to wor- 
 ship him, when I return to England I will 
 entreat his majesty to appoint for you a 
 clergyman ; and when he comes you must 
 renounce your tabu system, which is false,— 
 there are no earthly deities." Kamehameha 
 died May 8, 1819, a few months before the 
 missionaries sailed from Boston. On his 
 death-bed. he requested an American, who 
 was present, to tell him about the religion 
 of the Bible and the Christian's God. He 
 obtained, however, no information, and died 
 without the knowledge which he sought, leav- 
 ing his son, Liholiho, Kamehameha II., to 
 succeed him. 
 
 Almost immediately, under Liholiho, an- 
 other event occurred, of great importance in 
 the wa^' of preparation for the Gospel :— the 
 renunciation of the tabu system and the old 
 idolatry. Kamehameha is said to have spo- 
 ken to his chiefs, during hia last sickness, of 
 throwing off the restraints of tabu when he 
 should recover. The testimony of foreigners 
 residing at the islands had been often given 
 agamst the system. They had also some- 
 
 times allured the people to acts which were 
 violations of tabu, and as no harm had fol- 
 lowed, — as the gods did not punish by death 
 or in any other way, — the force of supersti- 
 tious fears were lessened. The restrictions 
 of tabu were unnumbered, and often of the 
 most oppressive character, bearing, in many 
 things, as heavily upon the chiefs as upon 
 the common people, so that many motives 
 would urge to its violation. The chiefs pre- 
 sent at the death of the king are said to 
 have requested Kaahumanu, the one of his 
 wives who was specially looked to for direc- 
 tion, to suffer that occasion to be taken for 
 disregarding all former ceremonies, and re- 
 nouncing tabu. Kaahumanu however, did 
 not consent, but the license and intemperance 
 which followed the king's death, helped the 
 matter forward. That very day, many of 
 the common people and a few chiefs ate, 
 males and females together, a thing prohibit- 
 ed on pain of death, and a few days after, 
 most of the female chiefs partook of pro- 
 hibited food. Superstitious fears were grad- 
 ually swept away. Kaahumanu advised the 
 king, on the day of his coronation: ''Let us 
 henceforth disregard the restraints of tabu," 
 and within a short time, the dissolute Liho- 
 liho, first in the midst of drunken revels, 
 ate, drank, and smoked with female chiefs. 
 The people raised the cry, "The king has 
 violated tabu, there is no longer any re- 
 straint." Some, however, still resisted. 
 One chief, encouraged by the priests, raised 
 the standard of rebellion in support of the 
 old idolatry ; but he was subdued, — " the 
 army with idols was weak, the army with- 
 out idols was victorious," — and the work 
 was done ; the islands were without a reli- 
 gion, waiting for God's law. The people 
 demolished the temples of the false gods 
 that had enthralled them, and treated their 
 idols with contempt, throwing some into the 
 sea, and some into the fire. God had brought 
 about events before the missionaries reached 
 the Islands, which they could hardly have 
 supposed it possible that they should witness 
 until after years of toil. 
 
 Arrival and reception of the missionaries ; 
 first stations and labors. — The missionaries 
 welcomed their first view of the mountains 
 of Hawaii on the 30th of March, 1820, and 
 entered the harbor of Kailua on the 4th of 
 April, only a short time after the decisive 
 battle which had subdued the party support- 
 ing idolatry, and near the scene of that bat- 
 tle. They had already received intelligence, 
 from some of tiie ship's company who had 
 landed with a boat, of the surprising and 
 encouraging revolution which had been ef- 
 fected J but how they would be received they 
 could not tell. TJie missionary company 
 were introduced to the king, (who was then 
 at Kailua, with many of the chiefs,) gave 
 him the presents and the letter from the 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 651 
 
 Secretary of the Board, which were designed 
 for his father, and requested permission to 
 remain and establish themselves as teachers, 
 on different islands. They were received 
 with respect ; but an answer to their pro- 
 posal was not given until after a discussion 
 of several days. One difficulty was that 
 Vancouver had encouraged Kamehameha to 
 look for teachets from England, and they 
 doubted whether they ought to receive those 
 who were from another country ; but John 
 Young, an Englishman residing at the islands, 
 and who had been recommended to their 
 confidence by Vancouver, assured them that 
 missionaries from America were the same as 
 missionaries from England. On the 8th of 
 April, permission was given for them all to 
 remain one year at Kailua. They, however, 
 thought it better that a part of their number 
 should go to Oahu, and on the llth the king 
 consented to this. On the 12th, Mr. Thurs- 
 ton, Dr. Ilolman, Tennooe, and Hopu were 
 landed at Kailua, and the Thaddeus sailed 
 with the rest of the company for Honolulu, 
 on Oahu. Early in May the Thaddeus sailed 
 for Kauai, to return George Tamoree to his 
 father, and Messrs. Whitney and Ruggles ac- 
 companied him. The old chief received his 
 son with great joy and urged the missionary 
 laborers who were with him to remain. 
 After spending some weeks, and satisfying 
 themselves that a favorable opening was 
 prcvscnted there, they returned to Honolulu 
 to consult with their brethren, and in July 
 were stationed at Kauai. Thus three sta- 
 tions were commenced by the first band of 
 laborers, on three of the largest islands, 
 Hawaii the most south-easterl}'', Kauai the 
 most north-westerly, and Oahu, central, and 
 commercially the most important of the 
 group. 
 
 After establishing themselves in thatched 
 native huts of a single room, without floor, 
 ceiling or fixtures, and with simple openings 
 for doors and windows, one of the first ef- 
 forts of the missionaries was to collect 
 schools, composed both of children and 
 adults. The king, the chiefs, and the mem- 
 bers of their families were the first pupils. 
 As the native language had never been re- 
 duced to writing, instruction ^was of neces- 
 sity confined to the English, and the difficul- 
 ties were great. Much interest however was 
 awakened among the learners, though with 
 most it soon abated. AVithin three months, 
 the king could read, and within six months 
 several of the chiefs could both read and 
 write. In November of this yesLV the mis- 
 sion reported 4 distinct schools with 90 
 pupils, of difierent ages and rank. Religious 
 services of different kinds, and Sabbath 
 schools were also at once established, and 
 within a few months some of the missiona- 
 aries were addressing the people on religious 
 subjects in their own language, imperfectly 
 
 used of course. After residing about three 
 months at Kailua, Mr. Thurston preached a 
 formal sermon to the royal family, using 
 Hopu as an interpreter, from the words, " I 
 have a message from God unto thee." His 
 little audience kneeled in prayer before Je- 
 hovah. 
 
 Obstacles. — Wonderfully as God had pre- 
 pared the way before the missionaries, it yet 
 could not be otherwise than that they should 
 find themselves compassed with difficulties 
 and met by many and sore trials in their ef- 
 forts to evangelize a people so degraded. 
 There was the difficulty of communicating 
 with the people, and when the language was 
 learned so as to be spoken, there was still 
 the want of a written language, and of 
 books ; and there was the poverty of the 
 language, especially its want of terms which 
 would express correctly the sentiments and 
 doctrines of a pure religion. But far more 
 than all this there was the intellectual and 
 the moral debasement of the people, which 
 they themselves well termed their '• dark- 
 heartedness." When the missionaries first 
 looked upon the degradation and barbarism 
 of the half naked, lewd, and chattering sav- 
 ages as they came about the ship in their 
 canoes, some turned away from the sight 
 with shrinking and with tears, and others 
 were ready to ask, " Can these be human 
 beings ? can they be civilized and Christian- 
 ized? and can we take up our abode for life 
 with such a people ?" 
 
 But as if the character and the condition 
 of the natives did not present obstacles 
 enough to the successful prosecution of the 
 holy work for which these Christian laborers 
 had come, foreign residents at the islands, 
 from Christian lands, must bring in also, not 
 only all their vices, but their decided oppo- 
 sition. Most of the foreigners then at the 
 island, were sailors of the "baser sort," 
 some of whom had been put on shore by 
 masters of vessels, and some were deserters. 
 Such men, removed from all the restraints of 
 a Christian land and shut out almost entirely 
 from the observation of the virtuous, lived 
 in open and unblushing vice, as vile as the 
 heathen about them, and much more capable 
 of successfully opposing missionary effort. 
 There were some foreigners of a better class, 
 among traders and commercial agents, from 
 whom the missionaries received, more or less, 
 both of kind attention and of encouragement 
 in their work ; but for many years, the great 
 body both of foreign residents, and of sea- 
 faring men visiting the islands, exerted a 
 most pernicious influence, and were a source 
 of constant and most painful trial to the 
 Christian laborers. Nearly all the foreigners 
 at Kailua, when the missionaries first arrived, 
 used their influence to induce the king and 
 chiefs to send them away, asserting, among 
 other things, that they would soon make war 
 
652 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 upon them and take away^hcir lands. Ilero 
 the presence of missionary ladies was found 
 to be of g^reat service. "If they had come 
 to make war would they have brought their 
 delicate wives ?" said the chiefs. Foiled in 
 their efforts to prevent the landing of the 
 missionaries they looked forward to the end 
 of the year for which they had obtained per- 
 mission to remain, hoping then to secure 
 their banishment. But in this also they 
 were wholly unsuccessful. Before the year 
 expired the chiefs had become satisfied in 
 regard to the character and the objects of 
 their teachers, and instead of sending them 
 away were requesting them to send for more. 
 Reinforcements. — To sustain and carry for- 
 ward the effort to Christianize the islands, 
 additional laborers have been sent from time 
 to time. The table below will show at one 
 view the number of laborers of different 
 classes who have gone from the United 
 States (not including natives of the islands) 
 and the date of their arrival at the islands. 
 In regard to female helpers the table is not 
 quite full, 76 in all having been sent, nine of 
 whom went out unmarried. 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 < 
 •5 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 
 
 1820 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 1823 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 1828 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 1831 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1832 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 1833 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 1835 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 1837 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 1&41 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1842 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 1844 
 
 4 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 1848 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1849 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 -__. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 .27 
 
 72 
 
 
 ^ Of the laymen sent, seven have been phy- 
 sicians, and two have been employed specially 
 in managing the secular affairs of the mis- 
 sion. In April, 1822, Rev. Wm. Ellis, an 
 English missionary at the Society Islands, 
 came to Honolulu with Messrs. Tyerraan and 
 Bennet, designing to go from there to estab- 
 lish a mission at the Marquesas Islands. 
 Prevented from going as he had expected to 
 do, and finding that he could be very useful 
 at the Sandwich Islands in connection with 
 the American missionaries, ho was induced 
 to remain, and cooperated with affectionate 
 harmony in the labors of the mission until 
 obliged by the illness of Mrs. Ellis, to leave 
 for England in the autumn of 1824. 
 
 Position and injluence of the Chiefs.—ln 
 order to understand correctly many of the 
 facts connected with the history of this mis- 
 sion, the relative position of the chiefs and 
 the common people must be borne in mind. 
 
 The inhabitants of the Islands were " chiefs 
 and slaves," with a wide distance between 
 the two classes. The king was supreme, and 
 his word was law, not only in civil, but in 
 religious and all other matters ; and the 
 chiefs also were regarded by the people 
 generally with superstitious reverence and 
 awe, as something more than mortal. They 
 were accustomed, not to suggest and advise, 
 but to direct ; and their wishes, or advice, 
 had all the force of a command. The peo- 
 ple were accustomed to obey, and to look to 
 the chiefs for direction. Hence, in the esti- 
 mation of both chiefs and people, if any 
 change was to be introduced in laws, cus- 
 toms, or religion, the chiefs must take the 
 lead. "WTien the missionaries came, the king 
 and chiefs were not willing that the common 
 people should be taught to read till they had 
 first learned, and when some of the lower 
 chiefs and the common people began to think 
 favorably of the new religion, they consider- 
 ed it out of place for them first to make any 
 public profession ; they must wait " for the 
 king to turn." From this state of things 
 there resulted a kind of necessity for paying 
 much attention to the higher classes, endea- 
 voring to secure from them attention to 
 schools and preaching, and such a sanctioning 
 of the instruction given as would at least be 
 regarded by the people as permitting them to 
 follow it. From the same cause, when chiefs 
 of the highest rank did express their wish 
 that the people would learn to read, or 
 would attend on preaching, the wish was at 
 once regarded ; when they desired the peo- 
 ple to build school-houses, or houses of wor- 
 ship, it was done without hesitation, and 
 when they publicly professed their faith in 
 Christ, thousands of the people would read- 
 ily have done the same at once. It was not 
 easy to keep church and state distinct, where 
 civil and religious matters bad always been 
 united, and not always easy for either chiefs 
 or people to perceive the difference between 
 permitting a suitable religious liberty, and. 
 suffering an entirely unsuitable disobedience 
 to civil rulers. 
 
 In this connection it should be distinctly 
 stated, to the honor of both the missionaries 
 and the chiefs, that discipline in the churches 
 has been administered with impartiality. In 
 1835 a sister of the king was excommuni- 
 cated, and one of the older missionaries 
 writes in 1847 : " High chiefs have been dis- 
 ciplined as abundantly as any class of mem- 
 bers in our churches, and they are vastly 
 more docile under discipline than crooked 
 elders, deacons, and gentlemen of high stand- 
 ing in the United States." 
 
 First Four Years of Missionary Labor. — 
 The reception which the missionaries met a.t 
 the islands, the first stations taken, and the 
 first efforts to reach the people, have been 
 mentioned. The royal family left Kailua, 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 653 
 
 Hawaii, towards the close of the year 1820, 
 and early in 1821 went to Honolulu, on Oahu. 
 Such was now the state of things at Kailua 
 that the mission family was no longer con- 
 sidered safe at that place, and they also re- 
 moved to Honolulu in Dec, 1820, and Ha- 
 waii was left without missionary labor until 
 Nov., 1823, when Kailua was again occupied, 
 and the next year two other stations were 
 taken on the island. The interest at first 
 felt by chiefs and others in learning to read 
 in English, somewhat abated as the novelty 
 wore away, and in Dec, 1821, there were 
 but about 65 pupils. In the mean time, the 
 missionaries had given themselves diligently 
 to the difficult task of learning the native 
 language and reducing it to writing, and on 
 the first Monday in January, 1822, the first 
 sheet was printed in the Hawaiian language, 
 containing the first eight pages of a Ha- 
 waiian spelling-book. (Owing to the ex- 
 treme difficulty of ascertaining the exact 
 sounds of a language never before written, 
 and the best modes of expressing such 
 sounds, six months elapsed before the second 
 sheet was struck off.) 
 
 This introduction of printing awakened 
 much interest, and gave at once a new im- 
 pulse to schools. Several of the chiefs un- 
 dertook in earnest to learn to read and write 
 their own language. The king resumed his 
 studies in August, and on the 16th of the 
 month he wrote a letter, in a fair, legible 
 hand, to one of the chiefs of the Society 
 Islands. Kaahumanu and others of the 
 highest chiefs followed the example of the 
 king, and in September, the number of per- 
 sons under instruction was estimated at 500. 
 
 Religious instruction began to be given to 
 much better advantage. The spelhng-book 
 contained easy but important sentences of 
 Christian truth. The missionaries could in 
 some measure dispense with the aid of in- 
 terpreters in preaching. Mr. Ellis, who had 
 joined them, could readily make himself un- 
 derstood in the Hawaiian tongue, and some 
 natives of the Society Islands who had ac- 
 companied him, could very soon pray and 
 converse with the Sandwich Islanders in- 
 their own language. Many of the people 
 listened with interest to the Gospel, but 
 "waited for the king to turn." 
 
 The conduct of the king, Liholiho, was 
 one of the greatest obstacles with which the 
 missionaries were called to contend. He 
 was friendly to the mission, had sometimes 
 applied himself with characteristic energy to 
 learning to read and write ; advised others 
 to learn ; regretted that he had not more 
 perseverance ; and showed no resentment 
 when reproved by the missionaries for his 
 vices. But he was young, reckless and 
 profligate ; was naturally daring, and when 
 partially intoxicated was ready for any ad- 
 venture ; and a portion of the foreign resi- 
 
 dents, taking advantage of« his weaknesses, 
 made assiduous and persevering efforts to 
 keep him from the influence of the Gospel. 
 Even in the place of worship, means were 
 used to divert his thoughts ; and to prevent 
 his attendance on preaching, he was more 
 than once artfully seduced into intoxication, 
 against his own deliberate resolutions. 
 
 While some foreigners thus endeavored to 
 seduce the king, and many complained that 
 the preaching, which was regularly main- 
 tained, was too severe against sin and sin- 
 ners, others approved the preaching and sus- 
 tained the preachers. Chiefly at the ex- 
 pense of foreign residents, a grass house of 
 worship was erected at Honolulu, in 1821, 
 54 feet by 22, and calculated to hold 200 
 hearers. On the 15th of September, it was 
 publicly dedicated to the service of God. 
 
 The missionaries were much encouraged 
 and aided in their work in 1832, by the visit 
 of Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet, who had 
 been sent by the London Missionary Soci- 
 ety to visit their missions in the Pacific 
 They came with Captain Kent, who had in 
 charge a small schooner as a present from 
 the king of Great Britain to the king of the 
 Sandwich Islands, and their testimony in 
 favor of the missionaries, as well as the tes- 
 timony of natives of the Society Islands 
 who were with them, as to the happy results 
 of missionary labor in those islands, was of 
 great service. It was specially of service, 
 and providentially timely, from the fact that 
 foreigners, among other efforts to prevent 
 the success of the missionaries, and, if possi- 
 ble, to secure their banishment, had en- 
 deavored to persuade the king and chiefs 
 that the English government would be dis- 
 pleased if they tolerated the residence of 
 American teachers. Here now were men 
 from England, coming at the same time with 
 the ship which Vancouver had long before 
 encouraged Kamehameha to look for as a 
 present from the king of England, strongly 
 commending the missionaries to the confi- 
 dence of the king, |||d urging attention to 
 their instructions, ^fhe falsehood and base- 
 ness of the opposers was made clear. The 
 commander of a Russian exploring squadron 
 had previously, in Dec. 1821, heartily com- 
 mended the missionaries, sending from him- 
 self and his officers a generous donation to 
 aid them in their work. 
 
 In August, 1822, the first Christian mar- 
 riage, that of Thomas Hopu, took place at 
 the islands j and in October, 1823, two chiefs 
 of high rank, at their own request, were 
 publicly, at the house of God, on the Sab- 
 bath, "'like the people of Jesus Christ, joined 
 together as man and wife." The first Chris- 
 tian burial was that of a son of Mr. Bing- 
 ham, Jan. 19th, 1823. The services were 
 attended by the king and his principal chiefs. 
 A few days after, a relative of Liholiho, 
 
654 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 whom he callcdklstcr, died at Honolulu, and 
 at his request her funeral was conducted 
 with similar Christian scr\ices. In Febru- 
 ary of this year, the chiefs Iield a consulta- 
 tion respecting the Christian Sabbath, and a 
 crier was sent around at Honolulu, proclaim- 
 ing a law enjoining its observance. 
 
 May 31, 1823, a station was taken at La- 
 haina, on the island of Maui, at the request 
 of Keopuolani, the mother of the king, and 
 the higncst chief of the islands, who was 
 going to that place to reside. "She inter- 
 ested herself as a mother in seeing the mis- 
 sionaries comfortably located," and exerted 
 her great influence to induce the people to 
 respect them, and listen to their instructions. 
 A house of worship " of ordinary structure 
 and frail material" was soon erected there, 
 and dedicated on the 24th of August ; and 
 in Dec, a house was dedicated also at Kai- 
 lua, where labors had now been resumed. 
 Keopuolani was the first native baptized at 
 the Islands. She lived but a few months 
 after the station was taken at Lahaina, in 
 which she felt so deep an interest. Previ- 
 ous to her last sickness, she had given evi- 
 dence of conversion ; during that sickness 
 the evidence constantly brightened, and at 
 her request she received baptism a short 
 time before her death, which occurred on 
 the IGth of September. She had given strict 
 injunctions that no heathen customs should 
 follow her death or attend her funeral, and 
 her injunctions were in good measure regard- 
 ed ; though, but a short time before, the 
 death of such a chief would have been fol- 
 lowed, not only by horrid rites, but by a 
 scene of universal licentiousness and pillage. 
 It was expected now. Many natives fled to 
 the mountains, and foreigners prepared to 
 take refuge on board the ships, advising the 
 missionaries to do the same. "But not a 
 human victim was slaughtered ; not a hamlet 
 was burned, not a house was pillaged." Thus 
 had the mother of the king given her testi- 
 mony and the influence of her example, in 
 life and in death, in fa^ of the missionary 
 work, and thus was it made apparent that 
 already much good had been accomplished. 
 
 Regency of Kaahumanu.— On the 27th of 
 November, 1823, the king embarked for 
 England, prompted, probably, more by curi- 
 osity and a restless, roving disposition, than 
 by any better motive. He was accompanied 
 by his favorite wife, several chiefs, and a 
 Frenchman named John Rives. They reach- 
 ed London in May, 1824, received some at- 
 tention from statesmen, and visited places 
 of amusement, but saw little of religious 
 society. "Within a few weeks, the king and 
 queen were both attacked with measles, and 
 both died in July. 
 
 Before sailing, Liholiho had nominated his 
 young brother as his successor, in ca^o he 
 should not return, and left the government 
 
 in the hands of Kaahumanu, the favorite 
 wife of the conqueror Kamehamcha, and by 
 his appointment the prime minister of Liho- 
 liho. Kaahumanu was a woman of much 
 energy, decision, and strength of character ; 
 and though haughty and disdainful, and 
 sometimes tyrannical and cruel, was in 
 many respects well fitted for the emergency 
 in which she was placed. Her prime minis- 
 ter, not associate regent, was Kalanimoku. 
 At this time she stood entirely aloof from 
 religious influence, and looked down upon 
 the missionaries with contempt; but she 
 soon gave evidence of a great change of char- 
 acter, and in December, 1825, she became a 
 member of the church, with several other 
 persons of rank. Six months before, she, 
 with others, had made a public declaration 
 of faith in Christ and desire to join his peo- 
 ple. From the time of her hopeful conver- 
 sion, this remarkable woman became warm 
 in her attachment to the missionaries ; and 
 in the administration of the government she 
 manifested a strong desire to promote the 
 good of the people. In a female prayer- 
 meeting at Honolulu, she expressed her feel- 
 ings with earnestness and tears. Nor was 
 she content to speak alone. While giving 
 strict attention to all the affairs of govern- 
 ment, she began at once the work of " visit- 
 ing every island of the group, and almost 
 every village of each island ; encouraging 
 schools, introducing improvements, and ex- 
 horting the people to forsake their many 
 vices, and cleave to the pure religion which 
 had been brought to their shores." The 
 effect was very great. Not the king, indeed, 
 but the regent, had turned. Liholiho had 
 issued his proclamation against various crimes 
 and vices, and in favor of the Sabbath, with 
 little effect comparatively, for his example 
 did not show him to be sincere. Kaahumanu 
 gave to her proclamations and instructions 
 the force of her own consistent example, and 
 made it evident that she was deeply in ear- 
 nest. A great change among the people was 
 the immediate result, at least in outward de- 
 portment, and the way was in some measure 
 prepared for a true reformation of character. 
 The regent was not alone among the chiefs 
 in such efforts to do good. Several others, 
 of much influence, were already, hopefully, 
 true Christians, and still others gave their 
 support to the labors of the mission. In- 
 deed, as early as April, 1824, just as the 
 printing of 3,000 copies of elementary les- 
 sons in reading and spelling was finished, the 
 principal chiefs had called a meeting of the 
 people of Oahu, to proclaim, in a formal 
 manner, their united resolution to receive 
 instruction themselves, to observe the Sab- 
 bath, worship God, and obey his law, and 
 to promote true knowledge among the peo- 
 ple. After a public examination of the 
 schools, Kaahumanu eeleoted some of the 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 655 
 
 most forward of the pupils to teach in other 
 districts, and before the end of the year 
 1824, 50 natives were thus employed as 
 teachers, and at least 2,000 persons were said 
 to have learned to read ; but both the teach- 
 ing and the learning were, of course, in most 
 cases, of a very imperfect kind. This was 
 the commencement of a kind of native 
 school system which rapidly extended it- 
 self, and continued in operation without very 
 much change, for eight or ten years. Na- 
 tive houses were built for the purpose by 
 direction of the chiefs, and large numbers 
 of the people, a great majority being adults, 
 were collected in what were called schools, 
 and taught to read, and in many instances 
 to write their own language, by native teach- 
 ers who themselves knew, in most instances, 
 " this much, no more." But defective as 
 these schools were, they were much better 
 than nothing, and they were all that could 
 then be had. In 1831 there were reported 
 1100 schools, with near 53,000 learners, at 
 least one-third of whom could read with a 
 good degree of ease, many could write, and 
 a few had some knowledge of arithmetic. 
 
 Kapiolani. — iflfention should here be made 
 of another "honorable woman" — Kapiolani, 
 of the island of Hawaii. A woman of high 
 rank and of great influence, she united with 
 the church about the same time with Kaa- 
 humanu, and, like her, made it her great busi- 
 ness to induce the people to attend to the 
 instructions of the missionaries. Like her, 
 she made frequent extensive tours among the 
 people, exhorting them to forsake their sins, 
 and destroying every vestige of idolatry. 
 She became, also, a pattern to the people in 
 civilization. " She built a large framed 
 house, enclosed a yard, and cultivated flow- 
 ers, and in her dress, manners, and mode of 
 living appeared more like a Christian lady 
 than any ather high-born native of her day." 
 In December, 1824, that she might more 
 effectually destroy from among the people 
 any remaining fear of old divinities, she de- 
 termined to visit the great crater of Kilaua, 
 the reputed residence of Pele. The whole 
 mountain was a dreaded place. Its fire and 
 smoke, its frequent mutterings, and occa- 
 sional desolating eruptions, served to keep 
 alive the superstitious dread. Clinging even 
 to the feet of their chief, the people besought 
 her, with tears, not to go. Before reaching 
 the crater, she was met by a pretended 
 priestess, wild with rage, who warned her 
 to desist. But her purpose was fixed. 
 With calm dignity rebuking the pretensions 
 of the prophetess, she had her soon hum- 
 bled and calm, saying that the god had left 
 her, and she could not answer. Accompa- 
 nied -by one of the missionaries, and b)'' some 
 trembling native attendants, she descended 
 into the crater, and standing upon a ledge 
 500 feet below the top, with the lake of mol- 
 
 ten fire before her, she cast stones into the 
 fiery gulf, ate the sacred berries consecrated 
 to Pele, and called upon one of her attend- 
 ants to offer prayer and praise to the one 
 true God. The rock did not open under her 
 feet ; the hissing and bellowing gases did 
 not destroy her, and the boiling lava did not 
 rise to consume her. The people felt that 
 Pele was powerless, and Jehovah was God. 
 Visit of the British frigate Blonde, Lord 
 Byron. — While the influence of honored 
 chiefs, whose hearts God had touched, was 
 thus doing much to turn the tide of feeling 
 in favor of Christianity, another event oc- 
 curred, of much importance, tending to the 
 same result. The frigate Blonde, command- 
 ed by Lord Byron, which had been sent from 
 England with the remains of Liholiho and 
 the queen, and with the few survivors of the 
 natives who had attended them, reached 
 Honolulu on the 7th of May, 1824. At first 
 there was a burst of tumultuous feeling, but 
 the strength of heathenism was broken, and 
 Christian services took the place of cruel 
 pagan rites. In the evening, the crowd at- 
 tended at the chapel, to engage in religious 
 services. At the close of the meeting, Baki, 
 the chief of highest rank who had returned 
 from England, made some report of what he 
 had seen in a Christian country : of the in- 
 fluence of the Christian religion, as he sup- 
 posed, in giving so much wealth and power, 
 and of what the king of England had said, 
 urging that the people should attend to the 
 instructions of the missionaries. Lord By- 
 ron, during his stay of two months at the 
 islands, showed himself the decided friend 
 of the mission, thus adding the weight of his 
 influence to increase the favor with which 
 the Gospel and the American teachers were 
 beginning now to be received. On the 6th 
 of June a council of the chiefs was held, 
 to fix the succession in a formal manner. 
 Lord Byron attended, and aided by his ad- 
 vice. Everything was conducted in an ami- 
 cable and Christian manner, the rightful 
 claims of Kamikeaouli, the young brother of 
 Liholiho, about nine years of age, were fully 
 admitted, and it was resolved to acknow- 
 ledge and sustain him. Kaahumanu was 
 still to act as regent during his youth, and 
 he was to be put, for a time, under the in- 
 struction of the missionaries. It was gen- 
 erally felt by the chiefs and the people that 
 here was a triumph of the Gospel of peace, 
 since, had it not been for the influence of the 
 Gospel, that mere boy could never have been 
 king. 
 
 Various circumstances thus combined to 
 give strength to the religious influence of the 
 regent. The Spirit of God, which had 
 changed the hearts of chiefs, was present 
 also with the people, and some from time to 
 time gave pleasing evidence of a saving 
 change. The mission having been reinforced, 
 
650 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 more stations had been taken ; more houses 
 of worship were erected, and largo numbers 
 attended upon preachine, while schools of 
 some sort, were established at almost every 
 villa;?e throughout the group of islands. 
 " Thhigs as they were in the days of Kaa- 
 humanu," has long been a phrase well under- 
 stood at the islands. 
 
 Opposition from foreigners — Whale Ship 
 Daniel.— But all was not bright. Well 
 would it have been if all foreign vessels had 
 exerted as good an influence as the Blonde 
 and her commander. But the commanders 
 and the crews of merchant vessels, and 
 sometimes also of vessels belonging to the 
 navies of the United States and of Great 
 Britain, as well as of France, have disgraced 
 themselves, while they have thrown the 
 most serious obstacles in the way of mis- 
 sionary effort at these as well as at other is- 
 lands. On the 3d of Oct. 1825, the English 
 whale ship Daniel, Capt. Buckle, came to 
 anchor at Lahaina. The crew soon found 
 that a change had taken place since their 
 former visit to the islands. A law o{ the 
 chiefs had gone into operation, forbidding 
 females to visit ships for immoral purposes ; 
 and instead of the throng of native females 
 which they had expected to see, not one ap- 
 proached the vessel. Suspecting the cause, 
 they cursed the missionaries, and clenching 
 their fists, declared that they would have re- 
 venge ; and in spite of missionaries, and 
 chiefs, and laws, they would have the liber- 
 ties of former years. On the evening of the 
 5th some of the crew came to the house of 
 Mr. Richards, the missionary, insisting that 
 he should exert his influence to have the 
 law repealed, and threatening destruction to 
 his property, his life, and his family if he re- 
 fused. He firmly told them that he would 
 die rather than give any countenance to such 
 vile demands, and his wife, in feeble health, 
 and with her helpless little children around 
 her, assured them of her readiness to share 
 the fate of her husband in such a cause. The 
 men at last withdrew, and the house was 
 guarded through the night by natives. The 
 next day Mr. Richards wrote to the com- 
 manders of some American vessels, who 
 took no notice of his letter. He wrote also 
 to Capt. Buckle, asking him to control his 
 men, but he replied that the men were all on 
 shore determined not to return without wo- 
 men, and Mr. Richards had better give his 
 consent, when all would be quiet. On the 
 next day the men again landed, and, having 
 a black flag and armed with knives, they 
 presented themselves before the mission- 
 house to the number of about forty, de- 
 manding, with oaths and execrations, that 
 Mr. Riclxards should not resist their purpose. 
 Tlie chiefs, who had exercised all forbear- 
 ance, and had at first sent natives armed 
 only with clubs to defend the mission family, 
 
 satisfied that milder measures would not 
 answer, at length called out a company of 
 two hundred men armed with muskets and 
 spears. The mob was compelled to retire, 
 the law was sustained, and quiet restored. 
 From Lahaina the ship went to Honolulu, 
 where, aided by American sailors, the crew 
 engaged in similar outrages. 
 
 Schooner Dolphin. — The crews of whale 
 ships were not to be left alone in the unen- 
 viable notoriety secured by such proceed- 
 ings. The^armed schooner Dolphin, of the 
 United States navy, Lieutenant Percival 
 commander, came to Honolulu Jan. 14th, 
 1826, when the law against females visiting 
 ships had been in operation about three 
 months. The ten commandments also had 
 been translated and printed in the Hawaiian 
 language, and the chiefs had adopted them 
 as a basis of law and government. The mis- 
 sionaries had been instructed, as are all mis- 
 sionaries of the Board, to abstain from inter- 
 meddling with the afiairs of civil govern- 
 ment, that they might give rulers no occa- 
 sion for jealousy, and unreasonable men no 
 grounds for finding fault, and they had so 
 abstained. It was obvious however that the 
 religious instruction which they had im- 
 parted had given the chiefs new views of 
 right and duty, and had in this way led to 
 the enacting of such laws ; and foreigners 
 who did themselves intermeddle, in the most 
 objectionable way, accused the missionaries 
 of intermeddling and dictating laws, which 
 were to them offensive. Even the English 
 and American consuls violently opposed some 
 of the new laws, recommending a code 
 which should prohibit nothing but murder, 
 treason and theft. They even went to the 
 young king and told him that the regent and 
 chiefs had no right to make laws, but that 
 the right belonged to him alone. When the 
 Dolphin arrived, her commander at once 
 manifested his sympathy for those who were 
 thus endeavoring to prevent improvement in 
 the morals of the people, and in the laws ; 
 at least any improvement which should in- 
 terfere with their vices. He expressed his 
 disapprobation of the law which kept females 
 from going to the ships for purposes of in- 
 famy, and insisted upon the release of four 
 prostitutes then in custody for a violation of 
 the law. Imputing its existence to the in- 
 fluence of the missionaries, he threatened 
 violence against their houses and their per- 
 sons if it were not repealed. The chiefs be- 
 came alarmed, and repeatedly inquired of the 
 missionaries what would be the duty of the 
 people in case such threats were put in exe- 
 cution. They were assured that the com- 
 mander would not venture to injure them, as 
 he was responsible to the United States 
 Government, and when they still pressed the 
 inquiry, ." What shall we do in case your 
 houses are attacked ?" they were exhorted 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 657 
 
 in no case to resort to violence in their de- 
 fence. On the afternoon of the Sabbatli, 
 Feb. 26, when Mr. Bingham and several of 
 the chiefs were collected for religious worship 
 around the sick bed of the minister, Kalan- 
 imoku, six or seven sailors from the Dolphin, 
 armed with knives and clubs, entered the 
 room and demanded the repeal of the law, 
 threatening to tear down the house if it were 
 not repealed. After a scene of confusion, 
 during which they broke all the windows in 
 the front of the house, they were con- 
 strained to retire, when they directed their 
 course towards the house of Mr. Bingham. 
 The missionary, alarmed for his family, at- 
 . tempted to reach his house before them by 
 another way, but fell into their hands and 
 very narrowly escaped with his life, rescued 
 by the natives. The same evening, Lieut. 
 Percival, instead of restraining his crew, or 
 apologizing for the outrage, called on the 
 chiefs, and declared that the prohibition 
 should come off j that he was determined not 
 to leave the islands till the law was repealed. 
 Kalanimoku was confined by sickness, some 
 of the chiefs yielded to fear, and a conni- 
 vance at a breach of the law was the result. 
 " In the dusk of the evening of the next day, 
 a boat with females passed along the harbor, 
 and a shout arose among the shipping at the 
 glorious victory that had been achieved." 
 The Dolphin remained at the islands about 
 four months, and lef+ a most disastrous in- 
 fluence behind, when at last, she sailed. The 
 law was broken down for a time ; the flood- 
 gates of vice were opened ; and irreligion 
 and immorality had gained strength and 
 boldness which could not be overcome at 
 once. Similar scenes of violence and out- 
 rage were enacted by the crews of English 
 and American whale ships at Lahaina in 
 Oct. 1826. A mob of such sailors went to 
 the house of Mr. Richards with the declared 
 intention of taking his life. He was not at 
 home, and his house was guarded by the na- 
 tives ; but for some days they filled the place 
 with violence, pillaging the tents of the na- 
 tives and destroying their property. Here, 
 however, females were not obtained. The 
 Governor was absent, and the place was in 
 the charge of a female chief, who directed 
 the women to flee with her to the mountains, 
 which they did ; all the females from a town 
 of 4,000 native inhabitants, fleeing from the 
 violence and lust of sailors from Christian 
 lands ! Such are the sailors, and such the 
 foreign residents at the Sandwich Islands, 
 by whom so many basely false and slander- 
 ous reports against the missionaries have 
 been put in circulation. 
 
 United States Sloop of War Peacock- 
 Vindication of the Missionaries. — We gladly 
 turn from such scenes to look at the honor- 
 able conduct of a more honorable commander 
 in the navy of our country, \yithin the 
 42 
 
 same month in which these scenes were en- 
 acted at Lahaina, the United States sloop of 
 war Peacock, Capt. T. H. 0. Jones, arrived 
 at Honolulu, where it remained till January 
 1827. Hearing of the proceedings of Lieut. 
 Percival, and hearing also the many slander- 
 ous reports against the missionaries, Capt. 
 Jones kept himself uncommitted, until he 
 should be able to judge from a knowledge 
 of the facts. About this time the mission- 
 aries published a circular, stating the course 
 they had pursued, and some of the good re- 
 sults of their labors, denying the charges 
 brought against them, and challenging inves- 
 tigation. Opposing foreign residents, laying 
 hold of the word '• challenge," called a 
 meeting at which Capt. Jones and the other 
 officers of the Peacock were to be present, 
 and a hearing was to be had. Without de- 
 tailing the proceedings of the meeting, we 
 quote Capt. Jones' own opinion of the case 
 as he subsequently gave it to the public : — 
 " I own, I trembled for the cause of Chris- 
 tianity, and for the poor benighted islanders, 
 whenri saw, on the one hand the British 
 Consul backed by the most wealthy and 
 hitherto influential residents and ship- 
 masters in formidable array, and prepared as 
 I supposed, to testify against some half a 
 dozen meek and humble servants of the 
 Lord, calmly seated on the other, ready and 
 anxious to be tried by their bitterest ene- 
 mies, who on this occasion occupied the 
 quadruple station of judge, jury, witness, 
 and prosecutor. Thus situated, what could 
 the friends of the mission hope for or ex- 
 pect ? But what, in reality, was the result 
 of this portentous meeting, which was to 
 overthrow the mission, and uproot the seeds 
 of civilization and Christianity so extensively 
 and prosperously sown by them in every di- 
 rection, while in their stead, heathenism and 
 idolatry were to ride triumphantly through 
 all coming time ? Such was the object, and 
 such were the hopes of many of the foreign 
 residents at the Sandwich Islands in 1826. 
 What, I again ask, was the result of this 
 great trial ? The most perfect, full, complete, 
 and triumphant victory for the missionaries 
 that could have been asked by their most de- 
 voted friends. Not one jot or tittle — not one 
 iota derogatory to their character as men, 
 as ministers of the Gospel of the strictest 
 order, or as missionaries — could be made to 
 appear by the united efforts of all conspired 
 against them." 
 
 Further Outrages.— in Oct., 1827, the 
 crew of the English whale ship John Palmer, 
 Capt. Clark, at Lahaina, enticed several base 
 women on board. Hoapili, the Governor of 
 the island, demanded that they should be 
 ^ven up, but the Captain evaded and ridi- 
 ^led the demand, and when the Governor 
 detained him on shore insisting that it should 
 be complied with, he sent directions to his 
 
(;:>s 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 crow to fire npon the town if he should not 
 he relensed within an hour. He soon 
 promised however that the women shouhl be 
 iiont on shore if the Governor would release 
 him, and he wa3 released accordingly, but be- 
 fore the crew had learned this fact they dis- 
 chanrcil five cannon balls, all in the direc- 
 tion of Mr. Richard's house. The next day 
 the Captain sailed for Honolulu, basely dis- 
 regarding his promise to send the women on 
 shore. At that time Capt. Buckle, of the 
 Daniel, was again at Honolulu. The report 
 of his conduct at Lahaina two years before 
 had been sent to the United States and ex- 
 tensively published, and the published ac- 
 count had just returned to the islands. 
 The excitement was intense. There were 
 other captains and crews, and there were 
 foreign residents at Honolulu, with the 
 British Consul at their head, who sympa- 
 thized with Capt. B. Deeds which hereto- 
 fore they had supposed they could commit 
 at these far off islands in darkness, were 
 being brought to the light. The privilege of 
 wallowing in all pollution there, and return 
 ing with untarnished reputations to their 
 homes, they were likely to lose. Complaints 
 were bitter and threatenings were loud. 
 Some who had before sustained the mission- 
 aries now thought Mr. Richards had done 
 wrong in reporting the outrage. Even Boki 
 and John Young took this ground. Kaahu- 
 manu was for a time perplexed and troubled. 
 She sent for the principal chiefs at Lahaina, 
 and Mr. Richards, to repair to Honolulu, and 
 called a Council to consider whether it would 
 be right to give up Mr. Richards to the for- 
 eigners, or whether it was their duty to pro- 
 tect him. Before any decision was reached, 
 meeting a shrewd man of the common peo- 
 ple in whom she had confidence, David Malo, 
 kaahumanu asked him, " What can we do 
 for our teacher ? for even Mr. Young and 
 Boki say he was very guilty in writing to 
 America." After a few remarks, David 
 asked, " In what country is it the practice 
 to condemn the man who gives true inform- 
 ation of crimes committed, and let the crim- 
 inal go uncensured and unpunished ?" " No 
 where," she replied, and her resolution and 
 that of the chiefs was soon taken. Mr. 
 Richards had done no wrong ; he had told 
 only what they all knew to be true, and they 
 would protect him. The British Consul and 
 his party saw that they were defeated, and 
 when Mr. Richards was sent for to meet 
 them before the Council they hastily with- 
 drew- 
 
 Letter from the President of the United 
 States. — Before turning entirely from this 
 kind of foreign opposition, allusion must be 
 made to some other facts. Every effort was 
 made to prevent the enacting and the en- 
 forcement of wholesome laws. Especially 
 did many foreign residents and visitors pre- 
 
 tend to be themselves exempt from all obli- 
 gation to obey the laws, and threaten the 
 chiefs with the vengeance of their respective 
 governments if they should be punished for 
 violating them. The government was how- 
 ever gradually gaining strength and confi- 
 dence, and in 1829 a proclamation was is- 
 sued declaring that the laws of the country- 
 forbade murder, theft, licentiousness, retail- 
 ing ardent spirits. Sabbath-breaking and gam- 
 bling ; and that these laws were in force 
 equally against all residents at the islands, 
 both foreign and native. On the 14th of 
 October, just one week after this proclama- 
 tion was issued, the American sloop of war 
 Vincennes arrived at Honolulu. Her com- 
 mander, Capt. Finch, brought presents, and 
 a letter to the king from the President of 
 the United States. That letter, after con- 
 gratulating the king on the progress of civil- 
 ization and religion in his dominions, and re- 
 commending " earnest attention to the true 
 religion of the Christian's Bible," proceeded 
 to say : " The President also anxiously hopes 
 that peace, and kindness, and justice will 
 prevail between your people and those citi- 
 zens of the United States who visit your is- 
 land, and that the regulations of your gov- 
 vernment will be such as to enforce them 
 upon all. Our citizens who violate your 
 laws, or interfere with your regulations, 
 violate at the same time their duty to their 
 own government and country, and merit cen- 
 sure and punishment." The letter also ex- 
 pressed entire confidence in the missionaries, 
 and bespoke protection and favor for them 
 and for other American citizens who con- 
 ducted with propriety. Nothing could have 
 been more opportune. A kind Providence 
 had sent this decided sanction by a foreign 
 power of the course they were pursuing just 
 at the time when it was most needed to 
 strengthen the hands of the chiefs. 
 
 Papal Missionaries — French Outrages. — 
 It has been mentioned that John Rives, a 
 French adventurer, left the Islands with 
 Liholiho when he went to England. From 
 England, Rives went to France, and pretend- 
 ing to be the owner of large estates at the 
 Island, and to have great influence with the 
 king, he applied for priests to establish a 
 Catholic mission. In 1826, John Alexius 
 Augustine Bachelot was appointed, by the 
 Pope, Apostolic Prefect of the Sandwich 
 Islands. He arrived at Honolulu, July 7, 
 1827, with two other Romish priests and 
 four laymen. Disregarding the law which 
 required foreigners to obtain permission be- 
 fore landing, the priests and their company 
 landed privately. They were ordered to 
 leave, and the captain of the vessel was told 
 that as he had landed foreigners without per- 
 mission, he must take thern away. He, how- 
 ever, took his departure, leaving them on 
 1 shore, where they never obtained permission 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 659 
 
 to reside, but remained in disregard of law. 
 Boki, governor of Oahu, was disposed to 
 court the favor of foreigners, and was, as 
 early as this, manifesting some disposition 
 to resist, or at least disregard the authority 
 of the Regent. The priests immediately con- 
 nected themselves particularly with his party, 
 but even he never gave them permission to 
 remain, which, indeed, he had no authority 
 to do. They soon opened a chapel, and it 
 was at once reported that they worshiped 
 images. The young king went to see for 
 himself, and, as he thought, found the report 
 correct. The chiefs feared their old religion, 
 which they knew to be bad in all its tendency, 
 was about to be revived. English captains 
 told them of the influence of the Papal reli- 
 gion and Papal priests in Europe, and pre- 
 dicted that they would work evil there if 
 they were suffered to remain. They and 
 their adherents continued to identify them- 
 selves with the party of Boki, whose career 
 was one of intemperance, prodigality, and at 
 last rebellion. Collecting armed men and 
 ammunition in different places, he threatened 
 the life of the Regent and a revolution in 
 the government. Fortunately, in December, 
 1839, he embarked on a wild expedition in 
 search of sandal wood, and was lost at sea ; 
 but his wife Liliha, whom he had left as 
 governor of Oahu, continued to head the 
 disorderly party until in 1831, when a con- 
 spiracy seemed fast ripening, and she was de- 
 posed from her office. In the mean time, 
 there was much trouble with the Papists. 
 The priests countenanced and encouraged, in 
 their adherents, various violations of the 
 laws, until the natives were forbidden to 
 attend their services, and some were punished 
 for doing so. At length, in April, 1831, the 
 chiefs passed a formal order, requiring these 
 priests, whom they regarded as abettors of 
 rebellion and promoters of vice and distur- 
 bance, and who were residing there without 
 authority, to -leave the islands. They had 
 borne with them almost four years, and could 
 bear no longer. The priests, however, re- 
 sorted to various expedients to evade obe- 
 dience to the order, and in December the 
 government fitted out one of its own vessels 
 and sent them to California, with orders to 
 the captain to "land them safe on shore, 
 with every thing belonging to them, where 
 they might subsist." The banishment of 
 these priests, as well as preceding and sub- 
 sequent proceedings against the Catholics, 
 has often been attributed to the agency of 
 the American missionaries ; but both the 
 missionaries themselves and the Sandwich 
 Islands government have always denied the 
 charge, and there is ample evidence that the 
 missionaries have decidedl}' discountenanced 
 any thing which could be regarded as inter- 
 fering with religious liberty. 
 
 In September, 1836, another Papal priest 
 
 came to the Islands. He was forbidden to 
 remain ; but aided by the English Consul, 
 who claimed a residence for him as a British 
 subject, he evaded repeated orders to leave. 
 In March, 1837, two of the banished priests, 
 M. Bachelot and Mr. Short, returned from 
 California. They designed to land secretly 
 and conceal themselves for a time ; but they 
 were recognized and ordered to return on 
 board the vessel. Refusing obedience, after 
 much delay they were put on board by the 
 police, where they remained, in the harbor. 
 On the 8th of July, a British, and on the 
 10th, a French ship of war came into port. 
 The captains of these vessels interfering, an 
 arrangement was made by which the priests 
 were to be allowed to remain on shore until 
 they should have opportunity to go to some 
 other civilized country ; but in the mean time 
 they were not to be allowed to proselyte. On 
 the 24th of July, the French captain negotia- 
 ted a treaty with the king, in which it was 
 stipulated that the French should "go and 
 come freely" at the Islands, "and enjoy the 
 same advantages which subjects of the most 
 favored nation enjoy." This, of course, did 
 not secure the right of teaching a prohibited 
 religion. In October, Mr. Short left the is- 
 lands, and in November, M. Bachelot also 
 left, with another priest who had recently 
 arrived, and had been refused permission to 
 remain. On the 18th December, the govern- 
 ment issued an ordinance forbidding the 
 teaching '*' of the Pope's religion," and an- 
 nouncing that no teacher of that religion 
 would be allowed to reside a-t the islands. 
 Some persecution of Romanists followed; 
 but in June, 1829, under the influence of Mr. 
 Richards, who, at their earnest request, had 
 become the political teacher of the king and 
 chiefs, the king issued orders that no further 
 punishments should be inflicted upon ad- 
 herents of the Romish faith. 
 
 About three weeks after this order was 
 given, on the 9th of July, the French frigate 
 L'Artemise, Capt. Laplace, came to Honolulu. 
 A full account of the proceedings which fol- 
 lowed cannot be given here. The captain 
 immediately issued a manifesto, stating that 
 he had been sent out to put an end to the 
 ill-treatment which the French had received 
 at the islands, and demanding, among other 
 things, "that the Catholic worship should 
 be declared free ;" "that a site for a Catholic 
 Church should be given by the Government 
 at Honolulu," and that ^20,000 should be 
 deposited with him, by the king, as a guaran- 
 tee of his future conduct towards France. 
 These " equitable conditions " must be com- 
 plied with, and the treaty which accompanied 
 the manifesto must be signed at once, or he 
 should make immediate war upon the islands. 
 Offering protection, in case of hostilities, to 
 English and American residents, he expressly 
 excepted the "Protestant clergy." As the 
 
660 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 king was ahscnt, ho consented to wait for 
 his return until the 15th, before commencing 
 hostilities. The king not returning, the 
 ^20,000 was sent on board by the governor 
 of Oahu, on the 13th, and the treaty was 
 signed by the governor and the Premier. 
 On the IGth, the king returned, and was 
 compelled, almost at once, to sign it himself. 
 The most offensive articles were the fourth 
 and sixth: the fourth providing that no 
 Frenchman accused of crime should bo tried 
 except by a jury composed of foreign resi- 
 dents proposed by the French Consul ; and 
 the 6th declaring that French merchandize, 
 "and particularly wines and brandy," cannot 
 be prohibited, and shall not pay a duty higher 
 than five per cent., ad valorum. A law had 
 just before been enacted to promote tem- 
 perance, which excluded distilled spirits and 
 imposed a heavy duty on wines. This was 
 now effectually repealed ; the French Consul 
 at once engaged largely in the sale of intoxi- 
 cating drinks^ and intemperance rapidly in- 
 creased. Of course, numbers of Papal priests 
 soon arrived, and located themselves on dif- 
 ferent islands of the group. It was not, 
 however, to the advantage of Romanism 
 that it was thus forced upon the people, and 
 that in connection with brandy. The same 
 word in the native language, says Mr. Hunt, 
 now means a Frenchman^ a Papist, and 
 brandy. The priests have continued their 
 efforts to the present time with varying suc- 
 cess, sometimes interfering seriously with the 
 efforts of the Protestant missionaries and of 
 the government for the elevation of the peo- 
 ple, especially opposing the school laws, and 
 interfering with efforts to promote general 
 education ; but by no means gaining the con- 
 fidence of the better and more intelligent 
 classes of the community. For several years 
 their influence does not seem to have been 
 increasing, but rather diminishing. In 1852, 
 of 436 common schools, supporte-d by the 
 government, 92 were Papal, with 2,174 pupils. 
 In September, 1842, the French sloop of 
 war Erabuscade visited Honolulu, the captain 
 making most arrogant demands, designed to 
 secure the more free use of French intoxi- 
 cating liquors, and still greater facilities for 
 propagating the Papal faith. Providentially, 
 the king had recently sent a delegation to 
 the court of France, to adjust all difficulties, 
 80 that he could with good reason decline 
 negotiations with the commander, and that 
 without giving him a pretext for offering 
 violence. In 1846, treaties were negotiated 
 both with England and France, by which the 
 government of the islands was allowed to 
 impose any duties on wines and spirituous 
 liquors which should not be so high as " ab- 
 solutely to prohibit " their introduction. A 
 duty of five dollars a gallon was imposed, 
 against which the French Consul protested. 
 In August, 1849, Admiral Tromelin came to 
 
 Honolulu, and misled, as is believed, by M. 
 Dillon, who had been there as Consiil since 
 February, 1848, made demands upon tho 
 government utterly unreasonable and unjust, 
 having reference in great measure, as usual, 
 to French spirits and the Romanists. As 
 these demands were not complied with, ho 
 took possession of the fort, tho custom 
 house and the government offices by an 
 anned force, seized the king's yacht, which 
 he sent away as a prize, dismantled the fort, 
 and destroyed the arms, powder, &c. Tho 
 government abstained from all forcible re- 
 sistance ; but the representatives of Great 
 Britain and of the United States made a 
 formal protest against tho ungenerous pro- 
 ceeding. To complete the series of such 
 outrages on the part of the, French, in De- 
 cember, 1850, M. Perrin came to Honolulu 
 as Commissioner of tho French Republic, 
 presenting demands, which were mostly a 
 reiteration of those made the year before, 
 and prepared, it is supposed, again to uso 
 force. But in the kind providence of God, — 
 not by any previous arrangement or direction 
 from home, — the United States ship Vandalia, 
 Captain Gardner, came into port at the most 
 critical point of the negotiation, and the im- 
 pression that this vessel would resist any acts 
 of violence if appealed to by the native go- 
 vernment doubtless led the commissioner to 
 moderate his demands, and the islands were 
 saved, perhaps, from such a French protector- 
 ate as has been forced upon some other is- 
 lands in the Pacific Ocean. 
 
 Having thus presented a connected view 
 of difficulties thrown in the way of the 
 Christiauization of the islands by unprinci- 
 pled foreigners, of the forced introduction 
 of Roman Catholics, and the aggressions of 
 the French, it is time to return to the days 
 of Kaahuraanu, and consider more directly 
 the progress and results of the missionary 
 work. 
 
 Results of the first ten years of missionary 
 labor. — A few brief statements in regard to 
 the state of the mission, and results which 
 had been already reached in 1830, will show 
 that the first ten years of labor by the 
 American missionaries had accomplished 
 very much, over which they, and all friends 
 of their work, might well rejoice. Not only 
 had the language of the islands been reduced 
 to writing, but two printing-presses were in 
 operation at Honolulu, at which 387,000 cop- 
 ies in all, of twenty-two distinct books in 
 the native tongue, had been printed, amount- 
 ing to 10,287,800 pages. A large edition 
 of the Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and John, 
 had also been printed in the United States 
 for the mission, swelling the whole number of 
 pages in the Hawaiian language to 13,632,800. 
 Most of these pages were portions of the 
 Scriptures, or other strictly evangelical and 
 most important matter. Nine hundred na- 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 661 
 
 tive schools, for teaching the people to read, 
 were in operation, and about 45,000 scholars, 
 about 21,000 readers, and more than 3,000 
 writers, were reported. The government 
 had adopted the moral law of God as the 
 basis of its future administration, and recog- 
 nized the Christian rehgion as the religion 
 of the nation. Most of the higher chiefs 
 and rulers were members of the church of 
 Christ. Special laws against the grosser 
 vices, and also against retailing ardent spirits. 
 Sabbath breaking, and gambling, had been 
 enacted and were enforced, and the Christian 
 law of marriage was the law of the laud. 
 Decent houses for public worship had been 
 erected by the chiefs and people in very many 
 villages. Those at the several mission stations 
 were large : one at Kailua, 180 feet by 78, 
 and one at Honolulu, 196 by 63. At Lahaina, 
 the church was of stone, 98 feet long and 62 
 broad, with galleries ; " the most substantial 
 and noble structure in Polynesia." It would 
 Beat 3000 persons after the native manner. 
 The other churches were all thatched build- 
 ings. In these houses large congregations 
 assembled from Sabbath to Sabbath, or 
 when the missionary could attend, to listen 
 to the preaching of the Gospel. Churches 
 had been gathered at different stations, to 
 which there had been admitted 185 native 
 members at the close of the year 1829. 
 
 There were now connected with the mis- 
 sion, 11 ordained missionaries with 3 male 
 and 16 female associate laborers from the 
 United States. Six stations were occupied, 
 three on Hawaii, one on Maui, one on Oahu, 
 and one on Kauai. A third reinforcement 
 was about to join the mission. 
 
 Death of Kaahumanu. — Reaction against 
 Religion. — In 1827, the mission mourned the 
 death of Kalanimoku, the prime-minister of 
 Kaahumanu, often spoken of as joint regent 
 with her, whom foreigners called Pitt, and 
 whom the natives regarded as the " iron 
 cable" of their country. He gave satisfac- 
 tory evidence of preparation for a better 
 world. On the 5th of June, 1832, Kaahu- 
 manu also " fell asleep," and " the mission 
 and nation mourned as for a mother." She 
 had nominated Kinau or Kaahumanu II., a 
 pious daughter of Kamehameha I., to be her 
 successor, as regent, and had given affection- 
 ate and earnest parting counsels to the 
 young king. For a time sad reverses fol- 
 lowed her death. Kinau, though a consistent 
 Christian, had neither the dignity, the 
 strength of character, nor the influence of 
 Kaahumanu, and the king, inclined to dissi- 
 pation and led on by vicious foreigners, 
 broke over all restraints. Others followed 
 his example. Many schools were deserted ; 
 teachers relapstd into vice ; congregations 
 on the Sabbath were reduced; some 
 churches were burned ; in a few places hea- 
 then rites were revived, and opposing 
 
 foreigners predicted that the missionaries 
 would soon be banished. Early in 1833, the 
 king assembled the chiefs and people at Hon- 
 olulu, and declared the regency at an end. It 
 had been said that he would remove Kinau 
 from all authority, and appoint Liliha, the 
 unprincipled wife of Boki, as his premier. 
 This was hoped for and expected by the dis- 
 solute, but when the time came he shrunk 
 from such a step and named Kinau. When 
 asked by his companions why he had not 
 done as he intended, his significant reply 
 was, " Very strong is the kingdom of God." 
 The reverse had long been expected by the 
 missionaries, for religion had been too pop- 
 ular, and sustained too much by the in- 
 fluence of the chiefs ; but the crisis was al- 
 ready passed when the king named Kinau 
 as his principal agent, and the reaction in 
 favor of vice and idolatry was but temporary 
 and more apparent than real. 
 
 Progress. — Schools. — Additions continued 
 to be made to the mission churches from 
 year to year, and that great care was exer- 
 cised in receiving members must be obvious 
 from the fact, taken in connection with the 
 character of the people, that in 1835, of the 
 whole number who had been received from 
 the beginning (864) only 13 had been ex- 
 communicated, and that though the year of 
 reaction had passed. 
 
 The character of the first native schools 
 at the islands has been already spoken of. 
 The missionaries soon felt the great import- 
 ance of raising the qualifications of teachers, 
 and as early as 1830 commenced schools in 
 various places for this purpose, which were 
 instructed by themselves, or by females from 
 the United States. In 1831, a seminary was 
 commenced at Lahainaluna (Upper Lahaina) 
 for the education of teachers and other 
 helpers in the missionary work. The school 
 was first opened in a mere shed made of 
 poles and grass, but under the direction of 
 the teacher, Mr. Andrews, the scholars, most 
 of whom were adults, soon began the erec- 
 tion of a stone house, which was covered 
 with a thatched roof in 1832. The school 
 prospered, and its importance became more 
 and more obvious. Another teacher was as- 
 sociated with Mr. Andrews in 1834, and 
 about the same time a large permanent 
 building was commenced. In 1836 the 
 school became more distinctively a boarding 
 school for unmarried lads, and it has now, 
 for many years, been regarded as one of the 
 most important of the means in operation 
 for supplying the Sandwich Islands with 
 educated teachers and an educated native 
 ministry, " sending out streams of the best 
 influence to every part of the nation." In 
 1849, the support of this seminary was as- 
 sumed by the government of the islands. 
 
 A female seminary was commenced at 
 
662 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 school for bovs, at Ililo, on Hawaii, in 1839, 
 for both of wKich commodious buildings have 
 been erected. Quito a number of other 
 boarding and high schools of similar charac- 
 ter, some for boys and some for girls, have 
 been in operation at the islands, accomplish- 
 ing much good. In 1839, a family school for 
 young chiefs was opened at Honolulu, which 
 has been attended with much success. The 
 expenses of this institution have been paid 
 by the government for the last ten years. A 
 school for the education of the children of 
 the missionaries was commenced at Punahau, 
 on Oahu, in 1841, which has recently re- 
 ceived a charter from the government as a 
 collegiate institution. By these various 
 seminaries and select schools much has been 
 done to bring forward native teachers, who 
 are in good measure fitted for their work, 
 and the character of the schools has greatly 
 improved. The government of the island 
 has assumed the support and superintend- 
 ence of the common schools. In 1840, laws 
 were enacted requiring parents to send their 
 children to school, and providing for the 
 erection of school houses, and the support of 
 native teachers. These laws have since been 
 revised, and increased efficiency has been 
 given to the school system. In 1846, Mr. 
 Ricliards was appointed minister of public 
 instruction, and after his death, Mr. Arm- 
 strong, who had been long connected with 
 the mission, was induced, by the earnest so- 
 licitation of the government, to take the 
 same office. In no country probably are the 
 children more universally collected into 
 schools. The government expends near 
 $50,000 annually for purposes of education ; 
 of which between $25,000 and $30,000 is 
 for the support of common schools. 
 
 The Press — Churches — Great Revival. — 
 The first newspaper ever issued at the is- 
 lands was printed in February, 1834, at the 
 Lahainaluna Seminary, " The Hawaiiaji 
 Luminary:'' This was designed especially 
 for the members of the seminary, but a 
 semi-monthly paper designed for general 
 circulation, " The Hawaiian Teacher," was 
 commenced soon after at Honolulu, and in 
 183C, 3,000 copies were circulated. In 1847, 
 five periodicals were published at the islands. 
 Several printing-presses and a bindery are 
 now in operation, and most of the workmen 
 are natives. From the commencement, near 
 200,000,000 of pages have been printed at 
 the mission presses. "Besides the Bible 
 and a hynm-book, no mean library has been 
 translated and composed, consisting of re- 
 ligious, scientific and literary books of vari- 
 ous kinds." 
 
 As early as 1836, it began to be manifest 
 that the churches were fully recovering from 
 the depressing influence of the reaction 
 which followed the death of Kaahumanu. 
 At most of the stations there were tokens 
 
 of the special presence of the Holy Spirit. 
 In June, 1837, there were 15 churches on tho 
 islands, with 1,049 members in good stand- 
 ing, and during the remainder of the year 
 admissions were numerous. The churches 
 were gaining strength and influence ; there 
 was increasing preparation of mind among 
 the people at large to listen to preaching, 
 and to feel the force of truth, and about the 
 close of the year it seemed obvious that the 
 time had come for greater triumphs of the 
 Gospel than had yet been witnessed. Tho 
 labors of the missionaries, particularly in 
 the way of preaching, were increased, as in- 
 creasing feeling among the people called for 
 more effort, and at the general meeting of 
 the mission in June, 1848, it was found that 
 religion had been revived at every station j 
 about 5,000 persons giving evidence of true 
 conversion, had been added to the churches 
 since the last meeting, about 2,400 then 
 stood propounded for admission, and many 
 others were giving evidence of a change of 
 heart. The work continued, — a great work 
 of the Spirit of God, — and during the next 
 twelve mouths more than 10,000 persons 
 were added to the number of the professing 
 followers of Christ. In June, 1840, there 
 were 19 churches, with 18,451 members in 
 regular standing. 
 
 To suppose that all those who had been 
 brought during the progress of this " great 
 awakening" to give, for a time, satisfactory 
 evidence of a saving change, would continue 
 to give such evidence, would be to expect 
 far more from the ignorant and degraded na- 
 tives of these islands than is ever realized in 
 the most enlightened Christian nations. In 
 most cases the missionaries were very cau- 
 tious, and candidates for church fellowship 
 were kept many months on probation. Some 
 indeed, were probably too cautious ; but 
 some others erred upon the other extreme, 
 and at some stations there began to be ex- 
 perienced, in 1839, something of the reaction 
 which usually follows high excitement. It 
 is remarkable, however, that, if we except one 
 church to which the additions were very nu- 
 merous, it has been found necessary to ex- 
 clude so few of the thousands who were re- 
 ceived as the fruits of this revival. It is 
 also remarkable that no year has passed from 
 that time to this, during which there have 
 not been large additions to the churches, on 
 profession ; very few years in which the 
 number thus added has not considerably ex- 
 ceeded 1,000. Up to June, 1853, the whole 
 number of those who had been admitted to 
 the churches, on examination, from the origin 
 of the mission, was 38,544. Of these 11,782 
 had deceased. The number then in regular 
 standing was 22,236, more Ifhan one-fourth 
 part of the whole population of the islands. 
 
 Benevolence. — From the very commence- 
 ment of the mission the chiefs and people 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 have been accustomed to make efforts to 
 provide houses of worship and school houses, 
 and sometimes also for other purposes ; and 
 as the churches have increased, as civiliza- 
 tion has advanced, and the people have begun 
 to rise from their utter poverty, their benev- 
 olent efforts have greatly increased. With 
 the great revival in 1838 and '39 there came 
 an increase of effort worthy of notice. At 
 the general meeting in 1839, mention was 
 made of four large stone churches in pro- 
 cess of erection at as many different sta- 
 tions. Contributions iii money to the amount 
 of more than 8.000 were reported, mostly for 
 building churches and school houses. Four 
 churches had contributed towards the sup 
 port of their missionary pastors. In 1844, 
 the subject of fully supporting their own 
 pastors began to be agitated, and at least 
 two of the churches resolved to undertake 
 the work at once. Contributions to different 
 benevolent societies commenced early, and 
 have been greatly increased. In 1851, the 
 whole amount of contributions reported for 
 different objects was ^21,211, of which 
 $^5,608 was for the support of pastors, and 
 ^2,838 for the American Board of Commis- 
 sioners for Foreign Missions. In 1852, con- 
 tributions to the Hawaiian Missionary So- 
 ciety, now an independent body, amounted 
 to $4,981 ; and contributions io all objects 
 exceeded ^24,000. May it not be said that 
 " their deep poverty" hath " abounded unto 
 the riches of their liberality ?" 
 
 The importance of raising up a native min- 
 istry for the churches has long been felt by 
 the missionaries, and has been urged upon 
 their attention by th^officers of the Amer- 
 ican Board. But they have been cautious, 
 fearing to "lay hands suddenly" on those 
 who might not prove "faithful men." In 
 1842, there were but two regularly licensed 
 native preachers, with one other, who, though 
 not yet licensed, was entirely devoted to the 
 work of preaching. A very considerable 
 number, however, were employed in different 
 villages, as a subordinate class of religious 
 teachers. The first instance of the ordina- 
 tion of a native as the pastor of one of the 
 churches, occurred in December, 1849. In 
 1850, two others were ordained; there were 
 five other fully licensed native preachers, 
 and quite a number who had a qualified li- 
 cense to preach at out-stations. 
 
 Civilization — Government — Laws. — The 
 Christianization of the Hawaiians has ad- 
 vanced more rapidly than their civilization 
 and refinement, and school education more 
 rapidly than a knowledge of the mechanic 
 arts. Those, however, who saw the islanders 
 as they were in 1820, see now an advance in 
 civilization which is truly wonderful ; and 
 Christianity and common schools have laid 
 the foundation for a rabid advance in future. 
 
 In 1838, the king ai>d chiefs having endea- 
 
 vored in vain to procure from the United 
 States some suitable person of legal attain- 
 ments to become their adviser, requested 
 Mr. Kichards to become their teaclier in the 
 science of government and laws, their chap- 
 lain, and their interpreter in intercourse with 
 foreigners. He and his brethren thought it 
 his duty to comply with the request. Up 
 to this time, the government was an absolute 
 despotism. The chiefs were still the sole 
 proprietors of the soil, and the people were 
 virtually their slaves, though some laws had 
 been published, and the administration of 
 the government had been greatly meliorated. 
 In 1839, the first code of written laws was 
 published, prepared wholly by a native. In 
 1840, a constitution was adopted, and a new 
 code of laws soon took the place of the first. 
 Of their own accord, a king and chiefs, who 
 were absolute hereditary despots, had now 
 set limits to their own power, and given con- 
 stitutional liberty to their subjects, for their 
 good. In 1846, the different departments 
 of the general government were fully organ- 
 ized, and the organization of the judiciary 
 soon followed. The legislative power is 
 vested in a house of nobles, mostly heredi- 
 tary, and a house of representatives, elected 
 by the people. Substantial court houses 
 and prisons are being erected in different 
 districts. Honolulu has its " noble custom 
 house," its "costly court house," and its 
 '•splendid and convenient market house." 
 Roads and bridges are in process of construc- 
 tion in every part of the islands, for building 
 which the people are all taxed. And most 
 important of all, perhaps, the people are 
 rapidly becoming owners of the soil they 
 cultivate, a commission having been ap- 
 pointed several years since to investigate 
 claims and give titles, which " are not to be 
 disturbed or questioned," and which "are 
 intended to be as perfect and independent 
 titles to the soil as are enjoyed by the citi- 
 zens of any country in the world." 
 
 The laws are not a dead letter. Very 
 soon after they were first published, a high 
 chief murdered his wife. It was at once 
 predicted that justice would not reach one 
 of such rank ; but, to the surprise of foreign- 
 ers and the astonishment of the common 
 people, the chief was hung. Mr. Lee, the 
 present chief-justice of the Islands, testifies 
 that now " in no part of the world are life- 
 and property more safe." Yet, a few years- 
 since, this was a nation of thieves, robbers^ 
 and murderers. 
 
 Seizure of the Islands by Lord George- 
 Paulet — Independence acknowledged. — Re- 
 cord must be made of one more gross act of 
 aggression upon the rights of the Sandwich Is- 
 lands government and people. In February, 
 1843, Her Brittanic Majesty's ship Carysfort; 
 came to Honolulu. The commander. Lord, 
 George Paulet, at once opened a correspond- 
 
ee^ 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 ence with the king, conducted, on liis part, 
 in a style of shameless insolence, in which, 
 pretending to seek protection for British 
 subjects, and to support the position of 
 Mr. Simpson, to whom Mr. Charlton, now 
 going to England, had delegated the functions 
 of British Consul, he made demands which 
 could not be complied with, under threat of 
 an immediate bombardment of the town. 
 The king, having no alternative, surrendered 
 the government of the Islands, provisionally, 
 to Lord Paulet, at the same time protesting 
 against the justice of his demands, and ap- 
 pealing to the British Government, to which 
 he had already sent ministers, for redress. A 
 commission was appointed for the provisional 
 administration of the government, which pro- 
 ceeded at once to abrogate some of the 
 most important laws, and, among others, that 
 against fornication. The government was 
 in the hands of this commission for five 
 months, and they were months, at Honolulu, 
 - of vice and sorrow. In July, 1843, Rear- 
 Admiral Thomas, commander-in-chief of the 
 British forces in the Pacific, having learned 
 what had been done, came to Honolulu, and 
 at once restored the sovereignty to the king. 
 The English government, also, on learning 
 the proceedings of Lord Paulet, promptly 
 disavowed having authorized them, or giving 
 them any sanction. 
 
 Previous to these transactions, the king 
 had sent Mr. Richards and Haalilio, as com- 
 missioners, with full powers, to the United 
 Slates and different European governments. 
 They secured an acknowledgment of the 
 independence of the Islands by the United 
 States, Great Britain, France, and Belgium. 
 As has been previously mentioned, impor- 
 tant treaties were negotiated with England 
 and France in 1846. and in 1850 the United 
 States government entered into a treaty with 
 the Islands on a more liberal scale than any 
 which the Hawaiian government had been 
 before able to negotiate with leading Chris- 
 tian nations. 
 
 Decrease of Population.— li is a painful 
 fact that the native population of these Is- 
 lands is still diminishing. The reasons for 
 this are perhaps in part inexplicable, or at 
 least not now understood ; but doubtless a 
 vitiated national constitution, the fearful 
 •consequence of disease introduced by the 
 vices of foreign visitors, long before the in- 
 troduction of Christianity, has been a«romi- 
 nent cause. For many years, deaths were 
 many, and births few. Other causes are to 
 be found in the fact that there is neither suf- 
 ficient intelligence, nor sufficient preparation 
 in the way of home comforts, among the 
 people, to enable them to contend success- 
 fully with contagious and epidemic, or other 
 violent diseases now from time to time 
 introduced from abroad. In 1848-9, measles 
 and whooping cough, followed by diarrhcea 
 
 and influenza, passed over the Islands with 
 fearful fatality, carrying away about one- 
 twelfth part of the whole people. A census 
 taken in 1850, showed the population to bo 
 only about 84,000. Recently, the small-pox 
 has proved very fatal in some districts, but 
 its ravages have not been like those of the 
 measles. (See Report, 1849, p. 187.) 
 
 The Mission dissolved. — The missions of 
 the American Board, as other foreign mis- 
 sions, are never regarded as permanent insti- 
 tutions. Thejc are established and conducted 
 with reference to a definite end ; to plant tho 
 institutions of the Gospel, and to Christianize 
 the people, and prepare them to support, them- 
 selves. Christian institutions. The Hawaiian 
 nation has been Christianized. Much remains 
 to be accomplished for the more full civiliza- 
 tion of the people, and to bring them to a high- 
 er state of intellectual and social as well as re- 
 ligious cultivation ; but it is a Christian peo- 
 ple. One-fourth part of the whole people 
 are members of Protestant Christian church- 
 
 ; and the first article of the national con- 
 stitution, adopted by the chiefs in 1840, de- 
 clares that all the laws of the Islands shall 
 be in consistency with God's law. 
 
 In July, 1848, the Prudential Committee 
 of the American Board addressed a long 
 communication to the mission, designed to 
 bring about changes in the constitution of 
 the mission, and its ultimate separation from 
 the Board ; and thus a change in the mode 
 of affording needed assistance to the native 
 churches, and to educational institutions 
 adapted to the changed circumstances of the 
 people, while yet the continued residence of 
 the missionaries and oL their families at tho 
 islands should bo secured. In accordance 
 with propositions made, some of the mis- 
 sionaries very soon took a release from their 
 full connection with the Board ; others have 
 from time to time been doing the same, and 
 at the meeting of the mission in May, 1853, 
 the transition was completed, and the mis- 
 sion was merged in the Christian community 
 of the Islands. Its organization as a mis- 
 sion, under the direction of the Board, was 
 dissolved. 
 
 Much assistance must doubtless be ren- 
 dered, still, to this new and poor Christian 
 community ; but the churches at the Islands 
 are put forward to the leading position, and 
 are to take the leading responsibility in sup- 
 porting the Gospel institutions. It is ex- 
 pected that they will erect their own church 
 edifices, and support native pastors ; and aid 
 furnished in the support of foreign pastors, — 
 when this is necessary, — will be given on 
 the Home Missionary plan of making up de- 
 ficiencies, after the churches have done, in- 
 dividually, what they can. The Hawaiian 
 Missionary Society has become an indepen- 
 dent body, but will act to some extent as a 
 disbursing agent for the board. Various 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 665 
 
 other benevolent societies have been organ- 
 ized at the Islands, yet the pecuniary means 
 for accomplishing what is done for the newer 
 sections of our own land by Education, Col- 
 lege, Tract, and other benevolent institutions, 
 must obviously be furnished in good measure 
 Btill from the United States. 
 
 Substantially, the appropriate work of a 
 Toreign Missionary Society at the Sandwich 
 Islands has been done. A new nation has 
 been born into the family of Christian na- 
 tions. To bring about this "intellectual, 
 moral, religious, and social new creation of 
 the Hawaiian nation," the American Board 
 has expended ^817,383 ; the American Bible 
 Society, $41,500 ; and the American Tract 
 Society, $23,800: in all, $882,683:— less 
 than it costs to build one line-of-battle 
 
 STATISTICS OF THE 
 
 ship, 
 year. 
 
 and keep it in service for a single 
 
 The number of laborers, male and female, 
 sent to the Sandwich Islands by the Board, 
 is 145 : — 42 ministers, 7 physicians, 20 lay 
 helpers, and 76 females. Of these, 27 minis- 
 ters, 3 physicians, 9 of the other lay helpers, 
 and 42 females, are now at the Islands. 
 
 SUMMARY. 
 
 Foreign pastors and preachers, 24 
 
 Native pastors, 4 
 
 Ministers supported on the Home Missionary plan, 
 and reckoned among the missionaries of the 
 
 Board 13 
 
 Ministers supported wholly through the Board 3 
 
 Ministers not supported through the Board 8 
 
 Laymen supported wholly or in part through the Board 3 
 
 Laymen not supported through the Board 6 
 
 Females supported wholly or in part through the 
 
 Board 24 
 
 Females not supported through the Board 14 
 
 CHURCHES — 1853. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 THilo and Puna. 
 
 « Wairaea 
 
 ^ j Kohala 
 
 '%] Kailua 
 
 M Kealakekaa 
 
 ^ [Kau .— 
 
 fHana -. 
 Wailuku 
 Lahainaluna 
 Lahaina 
 Kaanapali-— . -- 
 
 MOLOKAI 
 
 r Honolulu, 1st — 
 
 Honolulu, 2d 
 
 tj I Ewa -. 
 
 Waianae 
 
 Waialua .. 
 
 Kahuku-... 
 
 Kaneohe . 
 
 Waioli 
 
 Koloa , 
 
 Waimea--- 
 
 10,614 
 6,268 
 1,853 
 2,770 
 3,018 
 1,488 
 
 990 
 
 1,224 
 
 3,404 
 2,267 
 1,981 
 
 382 
 
 1136 
 312 
 624 
 
 268 
 
 12 
 
 4,385 
 1,835 
 734 
 685 
 662 
 507 
 
 509 
 
 759 
 860 
 445 
 
 5,742 
 
 2,096 
 
 1,038 
 
 1,730 
 
 1,069 
 
 944 
 
 511 
 
 758 
 
 2,589 
 
 1,179 
 
 912 
 
 394 
 
 575 
 
 700 
 
 Total in churches reported, 
 
 1,544 3792 1880 286 5492 3Q7 11,782 499 103 224 22,236 675 13,3871 924 
 
 3,520 
 1,387 
 
 2,028 
 1,181 
 
 Teachers sent to the Marquesas Islands. — 
 Some account of what has been done at the 
 Sandwich Islands in connection with the 
 mission to Micronesia, will be found in the 
 account of the " Micronesian Mission ;" but 
 Bome notice should be taken here of a mis- 
 sion to the Marquesas Islands. In March, 
 1853, Matunui, the principal chief of Fatu- 
 hiva, one of the southern islands of the 
 Marquesas group, came in a whale-ship to 
 Lahaina, accompanied by a son-in-law, who 
 was a native of the Sandwich Islands. lie 
 had come thousands of miles to obtain mis- 
 sionaries to teach him and his people the 
 word of God. Desiring a white missionary 
 if he could be had, he would yet greatly pre- 
 fer Hawaiian teachers to none, and was 
 alTectiugly urgent to obtain those who would 
 return with him at an early da3^ "We 
 have," said he, " nothing but war, war, war 
 
 — fear, trouble, and poverty. "VYe are tired 
 of living so, and wish to be as you are here." 
 The case awdkened much interest among the 
 churches ; Hawaiian pastors and teachers 
 offered themselves for the service ; the peo- 
 ple were willing contributors to provide for 
 their outfit and support, and on the 16th of 
 June, two native pastors and two deacons, 
 with their wives, sailed for the Marquesas, 
 in a brig chartered for the purpose, at an 
 expense of $2,000. They were accompanied 
 by Rev. R. W. Parker, who would give them 
 advice and assistance in commencing their 
 work, and then return to the Sandwich 
 Islands. They reached Fatuhiva, (usually 
 called Magdalena on the charts,) on the 26th 
 of August, and were " received with much 
 joy by the natives." Only five days after 
 their arrival, a French brig, which had sailed 
 from Tahiti while they were detained at that 
 
666 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS. 
 
 island, anchored in the liarbor, and a Catho- 
 lic priest landed. The captain of the brig, 
 and the priest, in a long interview with Man- 
 tunui and other chiefs, claimed the islands 
 M the possessions of the French, and de- 
 manded that the Protestant teachers should 
 be sent back to the Sandwich Islands. The 
 chiefs, however, insisted that the land was 
 theirs, and that the Protestants must re- 
 main ; they wanted them, and not the Pa- 
 pists. After a few days, the brig left, taking 
 the priest, but leaving two Hawaiian Catho- 
 lic teachers, with the promise that in a few 
 months a French priest would come to re- 
 main. The Protestant missionaries were 
 soon established in a house belonging to 
 Matunui, and engaged in their work. Papal, 
 and probably French, opposition is to be ex- 
 pected ; but it may be hoped that God has 
 good things in store for a mission commenced 
 under circumstances so remarkable. — See 
 Reports and Publications of the American 
 Board; Jarvis^s, Dibble^s, and Bingham's 
 Histories^ and Hunt's " Pa^t and Present" 
 of the Sandwich Islands. — Rev. I. R. Wor- 
 
 CESTEK. 
 
 American Missionary Association. — 
 Rev. Mr. Green, who was originally a mis- 
 sionary of the Board, has been, for a num- 
 ber of years, connected with the American 
 Missionary Association. He has under his 
 care two churches, one at Makawao, and the 
 other at Keokea, the latter having a native 
 pastor, David Malo. Mr. Green has also 
 three or four native helpers. The whole 
 number of members in these churches is 
 750, residing at various places within an ex- 
 tensive district, and having a number of 
 different places of meeting. The Committee 
 say, in their last report : " The indications 
 of progress are very encouraging. More 
 than one hundred and eighty members have 
 been added to the church in Mr. Green's 
 field. The interest of his people in behalf 
 of the conversion of the world and the re- 
 lief of the enslaved is maintained, and, in 
 general, the members of the church, are dili- 
 gent and attentive readers of the Bible." 
 
 Present Condition and Future Prospects 
 of the Missionary Work in the Sandwich 
 Islands— Letter from Rev. Titus Coa?z.— The 
 following letter, addressed to the author, by 
 the pastor of the largest church in the 
 world, giving his impressions of the state 
 of things in this most remarkable field, can- 
 not fail of being read with deep interest : 
 HiLo, Hawaii, April 17, 1854. 
 
 My Dear Brother :— Yon ask my impres- 
 sions concerning the present condition and fu- 
 ture prospects of the missionary work at the 
 Sandwich Islands. It is impossible to do jus- 
 tice to the subject in one brief letter ; but allow 
 me to say, that I believe the Gospel has effected 
 a signal triumph on these shores. Savagism 
 has fled before it, never to return. Idola- 
 
 try^ in its grossest forms, has fallen, never to 
 rise again. Ignorance and superstition have 
 fled apace before its rising light. Not that 
 the people are remarkable for intelligence 
 and wisdom ; but they have made progress. 
 They are not where they were 35 years ago. 
 Most of them can read and write, and what 
 is more, their minds have been impercepti- 
 bly expanded by the silent and constant in- 
 flux of ideas from a world opening and mov- 
 ing around them. Like the man ascending 
 the mountain, their horizon is extending at 
 every step. The comforts and improvements 
 of civilization are multiplying here. All 
 men with eyes can see this, and all men of 
 candor confess it. Social relations are bet- 
 ter understood, and social obligations more 
 faithfully discharged than in former days. 
 Not that we are perfect, or near it ; but we 
 can report progress. The nation has expe- 
 rienced a great civil revolution, a political 
 emancipation, and this without rebellion and 
 without blood. Calmly, silently, but with 
 the energy of light, the Gospel has under- 
 mined, overthrown, and melted the ancient 
 despotism, and the temple of freedom is 
 now rising on its ruins. " Instead of the ca- 
 pricious, the selfish, the irresponsible, the 
 crushing will of despots, we now have con- 
 stitutional laws, the elective franchise re- 
 cognized, prerogatives limited, rights defined, 
 and life, limb, liberty, character, and the 
 fruits of physical and mental toil protected. 
 
 External morality is also more generally 
 practiced here than in most nations, or per- 
 haps, any nation. No where on earth are 
 life and property more secure. No where 
 may the people sleep with open doors, by 
 the wayside, or in the forests, with more 
 safety than here. No where may the travel- 
 er with more impunity encamp where night 
 overtakes him, lay his purse by his side, hang 
 his watch on a tree, and commit himself to 
 sleep. Natives often hang calabashes of 
 food, fish, clothing, and other things on the 
 limb of a tree by the wayside, and leave 
 them thus for days or weeks, until they re- 
 turn from an excursion. Open crimes are of 
 rare occurrence here. They increase, how- 
 ever, as a certain class of white men are in- 
 troduced. 
 
 As to "pure and undefiled religion" 
 among the people, we would speak with 
 modesty. God only knows the heart. Our 
 enemies say that in this, as in all good, we 
 have signally failed. We are sure that the 
 word of God has not been without effect — 
 that it has not returned void — that those 
 who have sown in tears have not reaped in 
 sadness — that those who have fought with 
 spiritual weapons have not beat the air. It 
 is our joy, and a part of our reward, to be- 
 lieve that many of the poor sons and daugh- 
 ters of Hawaii have been prepared unto 
 glory; that they now sing with the re 
 
SANDWICH ISLANDS— SAVAGE ISLAND. 
 
 667 
 
 deemed in heaven ; and that many now with 
 us are following in the steps of those who 
 through faith and patience, now inherit the 
 
 promises. This we believe, because God's 
 word and the fruits we see, warrant such 
 confidence. How many, or what proportion 
 of our church members are the true seed of 
 Abraham, we do not even conjecture. This 
 we leave for the disclosures of the final day. 
 That all of our converts are weak and child- 
 like, we confess ; while at the same time we 
 feel that many of them are better than our- 
 selves. We do not boast that in any one 
 thing we have attained or are perfect, but 
 we follow after. We are toiling up the hill, 
 and we may say, with all our defects — and 
 they are many — that no savage tribe ever 
 went so fast and so far, in 35 years, as the 
 Hawaiians. And the Gospel is the efficient 
 cause. Not that we overlook or undervalue 
 collateral agencies. These have been many 
 One class of facts has had a happy influence 
 in helping to elevate and to bless this peo- 
 ple, while another class has been decidedly 
 antagouistical. For whatever good has been 
 done, let God he praised. 
 
 As to the future prospects of our islands, 
 what shall we say ? Here, of course, our 
 knowledge is at fault. Our missionary ope- 
 rations are now in a transition state. As in 
 other respects, so also in this, old things 
 are passing away, and all things are 
 becoming new. The islands are adopted 
 into the great fraternity of Christian nations. 
 Henceforth we are no longer to be known as 
 foreign missionaries. Many of us are already 
 receiving our full support from the churches 
 over whom we are pastors. Others receive 
 support in part, the lack being supplied from 
 foreign sources. For years to come we may 
 need to call on the A. B, 0. F. M., and on 
 the Bible and Tract Societies, for special 
 grants to aid us in our work. But these aids 
 will be collateral. We are organizing inde- 
 pendent institutions in the land. Our 
 churches are settling their pastors, obtaining 
 charters, etc. We have our Missionary, 
 Bible, Tract, and other benevolent Societies, 
 to draw out, collect, and scatter over many 
 waters the beneficence of our churches. 
 Already the relative amount of those chari- 
 ties does not suffer by comparison, with the 
 gifts of more favored lands. In a word, we 
 consider the Church of Christ as planted 
 here, as having taken root, and as bearing 
 fruit. And as Christ said to his disciples, 
 that their ''' fruit should remain.^^ so we say 
 of these children of the kingdom. We are 
 sure that the Redeemer has a church here, 
 that it is founded on " The Rock,^^ and that 
 " the gates of hell shall not prevail against 
 it." But in saying this we do not affirm the 
 perpetuity of the Hawaiian race. This may, 
 and probably will, become extinct. The 
 
 moral power, feeble. Amidst the march of 
 men, the rush and the surges of a moving 
 world, they may be overwhelmed and lost. 
 Fleets of merchantmen, whalemen, and war- 
 ships, are scattering thousands of our vigor- 
 ous young men to all the winds of heaven. 
 Foreigners are pouring in upon us from every 
 point of the compass. Amalgamation is 
 fast taking place— new forms of disease have 
 swept off thousands to the tomb. The base 
 passions of many rile and reckless seamen, 
 like the consuming fires of hell, are destroy- 
 ing many in our sea-ports who should have 
 become the mothers and matrons of a rising 
 race. The English language is being learned 
 by many and coveted by most— and all 
 things combining, indicate the absorption or 
 extinction of the Hawaiians as a distinct 
 race, at no distant day. Let it be so— still 
 the islands will have a people, and God will 
 have a Church here. A crisis may be at 
 hand which will try men's souls. We shall 
 need the prayers, the sympathies, the coun- 
 sels, and the alms of the Church in older 
 lands. The cause of education must be sus- 
 tained here. We must have a college. We 
 must have teachers and evangelical ministers 
 — men of wise heads and holy hearts. Men 
 of self-denial, patience, zeal discretion, 
 and broad philanthropy. Our work is not 
 done. Probably our responsibilities were 
 never so great as at the present hour. All 
 things grow around us, and we need great 
 faith, firmness, and wisdom, lest all good be 
 swept away by the currents of passion and 
 of worldly and civil policy. Our joy and 
 our triumph are, that " The Lord reigns," 
 and his kingdom is safe. In Christian love, 
 Your friend and brother, 
 
 Titus Coan. 
 SAPAPALII: A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, on the island of Savaii, 
 one of the Samoan group. 
 
 SARON : A station of the Rhenish Mis- 
 sionary Society in South Africa, nearTulbagh. 
 S AS AC : One of the Lesser Sunda Islands, 
 in the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 SATTAUKOOLAM : A station of tho 
 Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly 
 District, Hindostan. 
 
 S ATARA : a city of Hindostan, and a sta- 
 tion of the Am. Board. It is 170 miles S. 
 E. of Bombay, and 50 miles from the western 
 coast. It is 2,320 miles above the level of 
 the sea, and its position is singularlv beau- 
 tiful. The population of the city is '32,000. 
 It was occupied as a station of the Bombay 
 mission till 1848, when it became a distinct 
 mission. 
 
 SAVAII : One of the Samoan Islands, on 
 Avhich the London Missionary Society have 
 four stations. 
 
 SAVAGE ISLAND : One of the Friendly 
 Islands, situated about 130 miles from Kep- 
 
 natives are few, and in physical, mental, and ^ pel's Island. It is a cinder island, produced 
 
668 
 
 BCHEPPMANNSDORF— SEAMEN. 
 
 by volcanic action. It is a remote island, 
 the landing dangerous. The London Mis- 
 sionary Society liavo a station liere, in charge 
 of native teachers. It has six chapels, one 
 of which is wholly built from the bread-fruit 
 tree. 
 
 SCIIEPPMANNSDORF : A station of the 
 Rhenish Missionary Society in Namaqualand, 
 South Africa, at Whalo Bay. 
 
 SEAMEN : The subjects of inquiry here 
 are three, viz. : 1. The number of persons 
 employed. 2. The origin and progress of 
 missionary efforts among them. 3. The re- 
 sults. — In ascertaining the number of per- 
 sons employed in connection with navigation 
 both on the sea and on the interior waters, 
 there will necessarily be a degree of uncer- 
 taintVj as a part of it cannot be known with 
 precision, there being no documents in exist- 
 ence to point it out, and an estimate is all 
 that we can obtain. But in other cases there 
 are authentic documents, on which we may 
 safely rely. This is the fact in relation to 
 British and American seamen. From the 
 latest document which could be consulted, 
 it is found that there are about 30,000 regis- 
 tered vessels in Great Britain, the measured 
 burthen of which is about 3,000,000 of tons. 
 These vessels are manned by about 170,000 
 sailors. To these there should be added 
 about 40,000, who are always in port look- 
 ing for ships, and between 50,000 and 60,000 
 engaged in the fisheries, and nearly 40,000 
 more in the Royal navy, making in all of 
 British sailors about 300,000. The number 
 of American seamen is correctly stated in 
 the last annual reports made to Congress by 
 the Secretary of the Treasury, and by the 
 Secretary of the Navy. They are as follows : 
 The measured burthen of American vessels 
 in the foreign trade is 3,230,590 tons, and 
 the number of their crews is 117,043. The 
 measured burthen of vessels in the coasting 
 trade is 2,008,021 tons, and the estimated 
 number of men in them is about one hundred 
 thousand. This is an estimate based on the 
 tonnage. It includes the vessels on the 
 lakes and rivers in the western country, 
 steamers as well as sail vessels. The mea- 
 sured burthen of the vessels engaged in the 
 fisheries is 175,205 tons, carrying about 
 22,000 men, making in all of American sea- 
 men in the foreign and coasting trade, and 
 the fisheries, 239,000 souls. And when we 
 add to these not far from ten thousand sea- 
 men in our national vessels, we shall have a 
 total of not less than two hundred and fifty 
 thousand men in American vessels for whose 
 salvation we should labor. The seamen of 
 Russia, Sweden, Denmark, the Dutch and 
 German States, of France, Spain, and Por- 
 tugal, are probably nearly or quite double 
 the number found in Great Britain and 
 America. Looking now up the Mediterra- 
 nean on the African coast, and away to the 
 
 eastern Archipelago, and thence to Turkey 
 and the Grecian Islands, we shall en- 
 counter a multitude of seafaring men ; and 
 then looking across the Atlantic to the 
 South American coast, both on its eastern 
 and western shores, we shall find multitudes 
 more, not yet counted, to be added to those 
 already estimated. And when we turn cast- 
 ward again, and passing the Cape of Good 
 Hope, stretch away toward India, and China, 
 and the eastern Islands, an almost innumer- 
 able multitude of seafaring men arc found 
 thronging the native vessels which fill those 
 seas. Putting the wholetogether, not much 
 short of three millions of men will bo found 
 floating upon the waters for whose salvation 
 every effort should be made. "VVe turn now, 
 2. To the origin and progress of mission- 
 ary efforts among feameti. — The first effort 
 known to have been made to benefit seamen 
 as a distinct class of men, took place in Lon- 
 don, in the year 1814. and under the follow- 
 ing circumstances : At an evening meeting, 
 a stranger was observed to enter the assem- 
 bly, and to sit weeping bitterly during the 
 sermon. When the service was closed, a 
 pious man, who had observed him. followed 
 him out, and asked him who he was. He 
 said he was a sailor, belonging to a collier 
 vessel, which then lay among others in the 
 Thames. On farther inquiry it was ascer- 
 tained that there were a few other seamen 
 belonging to those vessels who were also se- 
 rious minded men, and who were accustom- 
 ed to meet together occasionally and pray. 
 A few pious men from the shore sought op- 
 portunity to visit those vessels, and hold 
 prayer-meetings on board, until it became a 
 common thing, and as an appropriate name, 
 they called them " Bethel meetings," and a 
 flag was prepared to designate the vessel 
 where the meeting was held, which they de- 
 nominated the " Bethel Flag." It was a 
 piece of blue bunting, bearing the word 
 " Bethel" in white letters, having over it a 
 star, and under it a dove bearing an olive 
 branch. After about two years, preaching 
 was added, either on ship board, or in a 
 chapel near the water, and the commence- 
 ment of this was at London and New York, 
 at about the same time, yet without any 
 concert of action. It was in the j^ear 1816, 
 when the Rev. Ward Stafford was laboring 
 in New York as a city missionary, and car- 
 rying the Gospel to the destitute as he could 
 find them. In prosecuting this work he 
 placed his eye on the sailors, some thousands 
 of M'hom were visiting the port of New 
 York every year, and procuring a school 
 room, he commenced preaching to them. The 
 Mariner's Church in New York grew out of 
 this effort. In 1818, a similar meeting was 
 opened in Boston, by the Rev. Dr. Jenks, 
 and in the following year, 1819, the Rev. 
 
SEAMEN— SETTRA KROO. 
 
 669 
 
 men in Philadelphia. Efforts of the same 
 kind haye been made in other places, and 
 regular meeting^ have been established in 
 Portland, Baltimore, Richmond, Charleston, 
 Savannah, Mobile, and "New Orleans. In 
 some of the larger ports, different denomina- 
 tions have embarked in the cause, and are 
 carrying on the work, each under their own 
 flag, but harmoniously as against a common 
 enemy. Thus in Great Britain and the 
 United States, all the large ports are provi- 
 ded with mariners' churches, and the work 
 of promoting religion among seamen is very 
 judiciously carried on, under the patronage 
 of local societies. 
 
 About the year 1831, an advance was made 
 in this work by extending it to the inland 
 waters, and after various efforts to establish 
 Bethel meetings at some of the more im- 
 portant places on the line of the canals, 
 rivers, and lakes of the western country, a 
 large meeting was held at Syracuse, N. Y., 
 Aug. 11, 1833, which resulted in the forma- 
 tion of the "Boatmen's Friend Society." 
 Several local societies had been previously 
 formed, which, to some extent, were now 
 merged in this. After a year or two of 
 rather declining operations, a convention of 
 the friends of the cause was held at Buffalo, 
 in June, 1836, when the " American Bethel 
 Society" was formed, which took charge of 
 most, if not all of the Bethel operations on 
 the western waters. 
 
 The friends of seamen in the United 
 States having seen the permanent establish- 
 ment of mariners' churches in most of the 
 large ports on the Atlantic coast, and having 
 labored successfully in this department for 
 about ten years, began to consider the con- 
 dition of seamen in foreign ports, and the 
 importance of providing the preaching of 
 the Gospel for them there. This led to the 
 establishment of the " American Seamen's 
 Friend Society," in 1827, the grand object 
 of which is to provide and sustain chaplains 
 for seamen in every large foreign port, where 
 an open door can be found. In the prosecu- 
 tion of this work that society has stationed 
 chaplains at Canton, Havre, Marseilles, 
 Smyrna, Cronstadt, Stockholm, Gottenburg, 
 Rio Janeiro, Sandwich Islands, San Francis- 
 co, Havana, and some other smaller ports, 
 most of which remain to the present time. 
 
 The friends of seamen in Great Britain, 
 through a general organization styled " The 
 British and Foreign Sailors' Society," has 
 accomplished much for the benefit of seamen 
 in their own ports, though, as yet, but little 
 abroad. Such is a larief outline of the origin 
 and progress of the missionary efforts among 
 sailors up to the present day. These efforts 
 have involved a large outlay of money, but 
 the precise amount cannot be stated. We 
 turn to consider, 
 
 3. The results of these efforts. — We have 
 
 no means of counting the number of pious 
 seamen, were we so disposed. They are 
 scattered in almost every vessel that floats 
 upon the ocean ; but as a general remark, 
 proved by many facts, we feel safe in the 
 assertion that the character of seamen, as a 
 whole, is greatly improved since Bethel ef- 
 forts were commenced, and many vessels are 
 now found where the Sabbath is strictly ob- 
 served, and daily prayer is maintained ; 
 things almost unknown in former days. Tem- 
 perance has gained ground among sailors, 
 since the efforts for their benefit commenced, 
 quite as fast if not faster than among lauds- 
 men. Forty years ago it was thought 
 wholly impracticable to manage a vessel 
 without ardent spirits, and merchants would 
 almost as soon have thought of sending their 
 ships to sea without bread as without rum. 
 But that day has passed, and a large propor- 
 tion of vessels are now manned on temperance 
 principles, and " no rum," is put forward to 
 a prominent place on the shipping paper. 
 Marine temperance societies are common in 
 every port, bearing the names of many thou- 
 sands of pledged men, both oflScers and 
 common sailors. The immediate and very 
 natural result of temperance in seamen is 
 frugality, and a careful saving of their hard 
 earnings ; and an investigation of the various 
 Seamen's Savings Batfks, which are founded 
 in every large port, shows us that immense 
 sums have been there deposited by sailors 
 for use in future life. We have thus briefly 
 hinted at the several subjects of inquiry re- 
 specting seamen. The details may be found 
 in the twenty-five annual reports of the Am- 
 erican Seamen's Friend Society ; the annual 
 reports of the American Bethel Society ; the 
 twenty-five volumes of the Sailors' Maga- 
 zine ; the annual reports of the Secretary of 
 the Treasury, relating to commerce ; the an- 
 nual reports of the Secretary of the Navy ; 
 the annual reports of the British and Foreign 
 Sailors' Society j " Britannia," by the Rev. 
 John Harris ; the " Retrospect," by Rev. 
 R. Marks ; publications of Rev. G. C. Smith, 
 Rev. William Scoresby, and others. — Rev. 
 J. Greenleaf. 
 
 SEIR: A village near Oroomiah, Persia, 
 where the seminaries of the mission of the 
 American Board are located. 
 
 SERAMPORE : Formerly a Danish settle- 
 ment, in the province of Bengal, situated on 
 the west side of the Hooghl}^ river, about 12 
 miles above Calcutta. Population 15,000. 
 For many years, the principal station of tho 
 English Baptists in Bengal. 
 
 SEROOR : In Hindostan, 28 miles south- 
 west from Ahmednuggur. Pop. 6,500. Be- 
 came a station of the American Board in 1841. 
 
 SETTRA KROO : A station of the Am- 
 erican Presbyterian General Assembly's 
 Board on the western coast of Africa, about 
 halfway between Cape Palmos and Monrovia. 
 
670 
 
 SEVAGUNGA— SIAM. 
 
 SEVAGFNGA : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board in Soutliern Ilindostan, 25 miles 
 east of Madufa, and connected with that 
 mission. ^ 
 
 SEYCHELLES: A chister of small is- 
 lands, which lie nearly north from Madagas- 
 car. They are high and rocky, and little fit- 
 ted for any culture except cotton. Popula- 
 tion 4,000. They are famous for the produc- 
 tion of a palm not known in any other part 
 of the world. A station of the Society for 
 the Propagation of the Gospel. 
 
 SHALONG POINT: A station of the 
 American Board in Micronesia, on Taman 
 Island, a small island in the mouth of Me- 
 talim Harbor, Ascension Island. 
 
 SHANGHAI : A city in China, in latitude 
 3P 10' north and longitude 121^' 30' east, on 
 the "Wosung river, about 14 miles from its 
 mouth. (See China.) 
 
 SHAWANOE : A town in the Indian Ter- 
 ritory, and the seat of a mission of the Am- 
 erican Baptist Union for the Shawanoe and 
 other tribes. 
 
 SHEIKH : (pronounced Shehh or Shuhh) 
 means literally an old man, but besides being 
 used in that sense it is also employed as a 
 prefix to the names of respectable heads of 
 families like our "Mr." Somewhat like our M. 
 A. it is applied to sch^lmasters and learned 
 men. It is also the tme of the heads of the 
 Mohammedan sects as the Hhanafees, Mali- 
 kees, &c. But among the Bedaween it de- 
 notes the head of the tribe, and where seve- 
 ral Sheikhs unite together for greater secu- 
 rity, they choose a chief from among them- 
 selves who is called Sheikh el k'bir or Sheikh 
 el ShoyAkh. Sheikh el Islam is one of the 
 titles of the Grand Mufti of Constantinople, 
 who is the President of the College of the 
 Ulema, or professors of Mohammedan Law. 
 Shiekh is also the name of one of the orders 
 of priesthood among the Yezidees. and has 
 a like religious meaning among the Druzes. 
 
 SHILOH: Station of the United Brethren 
 in South Africa, on the Klipplaat river, 
 among the Tambookies and Hottentots. 
 
 SHWAYDOUNG: A town in Burmah 
 near Prome, and the seat of the Prome mis- 
 sion of the American Baptist Union. It is 
 one of the principal centres of Burman edu- 
 cation and religion, and has been styled the 
 " Oxford of Burmah." 
 
 SHWAYGYEEN: A city in Southern 
 Burmah, at the junction of the Shwaygyeen 
 and Sitang rivers. It is the seat of amission 
 of the American Baptist Union. 
 
 SIAM: Siam is a long, narrow country, 
 lying between Burmah and Cochin-China, 
 and extending from the Gulf of Siam to the 
 borders of China. It is watered by several 
 rivers and by numerous canals ; and as the 
 soil is generally quite fertile, it is capable of j 
 supporting a large population. Having been 
 distracted by wars, however, until within! 
 
 comparatively a modem period, tlie actual 
 number of inhabitants is estimated at not 
 more than from 3,000,000 ito 5,000,000. Of 
 these some hundred thousands are Cliinese, 
 and there are many Peguans, Burmese, 
 Shans, &c. This diversity among the inhab- 
 itants imparts the greater interest to Siam 
 as a sphere of missionarj'- labor. Some races 
 may be reached here who cannot be visited 
 in their own lands. Numerous Chinese, for 
 instance, from the island of Hainan, are now 
 living in Bangkok, who keep up a constant 
 intercourse with their own country ; and 
 through whom a Christian influence might 
 readily be exerted on the 1,500,000 inhabi- 
 tants of that island. 
 
 In Siam the inhabitants live chiefly on the 
 banks of rivers and canals, — a circumstance 
 worthy of being noted, as it renders them 
 easily accessible by missionaries in boats — 
 the common mode of traveling. The princi- 
 pal city is Bangkok, of which the population 
 is estimated at 300,000 ; it is situated on the 
 Meinam, about twenty-five miles from its 
 mouth. The people of this country are 
 hardly inferior in civilization to other nations 
 of South-eastern Asia. They carry on.vari 
 ous kinds of industrial occupation. Many 
 are able to read, and schools are commonly 
 connected with the wats, or places devoted to 
 temples and idolatrous worship, where edu- 
 cation is given without charge by some of 
 the priests ; yet the knowledge thus acquired 
 by the youth is little more than that of the 
 simplest kind. 
 
 Government. — The government of this 
 country is a despotism. The king is chosen, 
 however, on some basis of hereditary de- 
 scent, by the principal nobles, which must 
 give them influence in the administration of 
 public affairs. In no other country in the 
 East, and probably in no country in any part 
 of the world, is the influence of the king 
 more controlling over all the opinions and 
 conduct of his subjects ; the servility of all 
 classes is most abject, and is fitly shown by 
 the prostration, with the face to the ground, 
 of even the chief men when they appear in 
 the royal presence. 
 
 Religion. — The religion of the Siamese is 
 Budhism, which may be characterized as a 
 kind of atheistical idolatry ; for Budh, in his 
 most common form, Gotama, is not sup- 
 posed to take any concern in the affairs of 
 men. (See Budhism.) It is one of the rea- 
 sons for regarding Siam with special interest 
 as a missionary field, that it is the head- 
 quarters of this widely-spread system of 
 false religion, so far as this bad preeminence 
 can be assigned to any country. It is a re- 
 ligion held here in great honor. The king is 
 its subject ; the revenues of the kingdom 
 are to a large extent devoted to the wats, the 
 support of priests, processions in honor of 
 Gotama, and other religious ceremonies. 
 
SUM. 
 
 671 
 
 If Budh were dethroned in this country, his 
 downfall would doubtless be felt in other 
 parts of Asia. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 Presbyterian Board. — The mission es- 
 tablished by the Board in Siam was resolved 
 upon in 1839. It was formed at first with 
 reference to the Chinese rather than to the 
 Siamese. The door into China was not then 
 open, and missionary societies adopted the 
 policy of supporting stations among the 
 large numbers of Chinese emigrants who 
 were found in the neighboring countries. 
 The Rev. Robert W. Orr, one of the first 
 missionaries to the Chinese, whose station 
 was at Singapore, made a visit to Siam in 
 the autumn of 1838 3 and upon his favorable 
 report it was deemed expedient to form a 
 branch of the Chinese mission at Bangkok, 
 and also a mission to the Siamese at the same 
 place. The Rev. William P. Buell and his 
 wife, appointed to the latter mission, arrived 
 at Bangkok in August, 1840. A physician 
 and his wife were appointed to this field of 
 labor in 1841, and a minister and his wife in 
 1843. They were led, however, to proceed 
 to China instead of Siam, so that Mr. Buell 
 was not joined by any associate. After 
 learning the language, he was able to 
 preach the Gospel and distribute the Holy 
 Scriptures and other religious books, ex- 
 plaining them to the people. He was en- 
 couraged in his work ; but in 1844 he was 
 compelled to return to this Country by the 
 state of his wife's health. 
 
 In March, 1847, the Rev. Stephen Mattoon 
 and his wife, and Samuel R, House, M. D., 
 licentiate preacher, arrived at Bangkok ; and 
 in April, 1849, they were joined by the Rev. 
 Stephen Bush and his wife. These brethren 
 found ample employment in preaching and 
 distributing the Scriptures and religious 
 tracts. The medical labors of Dr. House 
 were of the greatest benefit to large num- 
 bers of patients ; while they brought many 
 persons within the reach of the Gospel, 
 whose attention could not otherwise have 
 been gairied ; and they also tended to con- 
 ciliate the confidence and good-will of per- 
 sons of all classes towards the missionaries. 
 
 The year 1850 was marked by vigorous 
 'abors in preaching and tract distribution in 
 Bangkok ; bj'- missionary tours to several 
 distant parts of the country, which were 
 made without hindrance, and afibrded many 
 opportunities of publishing the Gospel j by 
 the printing at the press of another mission 
 in Bangkok of 422.000 pages of books of 
 Scripture history ; and by faithful and suc- 
 cessful medico-missionary practice. This 
 year was also marked by a singular exigency 
 in the history of the mission, which for 
 months threatened its existence. 
 
 The missionaries had lived in houses for- 
 merly occupied by missionaries of the Ame- 
 
 rican Board. On relinquishing Siam as a 
 field of labor, the American Board trans- 
 ferred these houses to the American Associ- 
 ation, and it became necessary for the breth- 
 ren to seek other places of abode. After 
 long search and many disappointments, 
 they found it impossible either to purchase 
 or rent new quarters. The increasing bigo- 
 try of the king was the obstacle in their way. 
 He did not openly oppose their wishes, but 
 it was soon understood among his abject 
 people that he was unfriendly to foreign 
 teachers ; and no man was willing to sell or 
 lease real estate to those who at any hour 
 might be ordered out of the kingdom. Tiie 
 strange issue was apparently reached, that 
 Christian missionaries must withdraw from 
 a heathen land, where their life and liberty 
 were still safe, and where their labors might 
 be carried forward in many ways, solely for 
 the want of houses in which to live ! The 
 question had been viewed in every aspect ; 
 referred home to the Executive Committee ; 
 reconsidered after obtaining the sanction of 
 the Committee, given fully, but with deep 
 regret, to their removal to some new field of 
 labor— and still the necessity for this re- 
 moval appeared to be unavoidable. 
 
 Towards the end of the year matters grew 
 worse. The teachers of the missionaries 
 were arrested and thrown into prison, their 
 Siamese servants left them or were taken 
 away, and none of the people dared to hold 
 intercourse with them on religious subjects. 
 In the mean time prayer was oflered without 
 ceasing on their behalf, and in answer to the 
 requests of his people, God interposed for 
 the help of his servants, — but in a way not 
 expected by them. The king was attacked 
 with disease in January, 1851 ; and, though 
 he had the prospect of many years of life, ho 
 was cut down by death in April. 
 
 His successor, the present king, had much 
 intercourse with the missionaries before his 
 accession to the throne, and he has since 
 shown himself to be their friend. The diffi- 
 culty about a site for mission premises was 
 soon removed ; suitable houses have been 
 erected, and the work of the mission can 
 now be prosecuted with greater freedom than 
 at any former period. 
 
 The little company of missionaries have 
 since been called to meet with trials of a 
 different kind — to see their number dimin- 
 ished, instead of beiiig increased. Mrs. 
 Bush was removed by death in July, 1851. 
 Her last days were full of Christian peace 
 and joy, and her associates could say, that 
 " in the full possession of all her fiiculties, 
 without one cloud to separate between her 
 and a present Saviour, she went down into 
 the Jordan of death, singing Hallelujah, 
 in the triumph of victory. The Siamese 
 have lost in her a faithful, praying friend j 
 the mission, an exemplary fellow-laborer ; 
 
SIAM. 
 
 and her bereaved husband, an affectionate 
 and beloved companion." The health of 
 Mr. Bush afterwards gave way, and it be- 
 came necessary for hira to return to this 
 country, in 1853, for his recovery. He has 
 not yet become sufficiently restored to re- 
 turn to his field of labor. 
 
 "With the single exception of the embar- 
 rassment growing out of their small number, 
 the missionaries have reason to be much en- 
 couraged in their work and its prospects. 
 They are permitted to preach the Gospel in 
 stated services and by the way-side ; and 
 the Word has not been preached in vain. 
 Besides the testimony thereby held forth for 
 God and against idols, and the secret con- 
 victions and impressions of many hearers, 
 which may yet result in the open confession 
 of Christ before men, two hopeful converts 
 have been admitted to the church. They 
 are both Chinese, and one of them is a native 
 of Hainan. Their walk and conversation 
 are exemplary, and both of them are engaged 
 in efforts to make the Gospel known unto 
 their own people. Some .progress has been 
 made in giving the Scriptures to the Siamese 
 in their own tongue. The New Testament 
 and the books of Genesis and Exodus have 
 been translated by the missionaries of other 
 Boards ; but the translation will require re- 
 vision, and it may be expedient to make al- 
 together a new translation. Mr. Mattoon's 
 biblical scholarship and his knowledge of 
 Siamese will enable hifn to perform good 
 service in this work. Schools have been 
 opened on the mission premises, and a small 
 number of boarding-scholars are under daily 
 Christian instruction. It seems to be not 
 iinlikely that a Christian element may be 
 largely introduced into the education of 
 Siamese youth. The distribution of the 
 Scriptures in Bangkok and in the interior is 
 going forward, and many of the people are 
 not only able to read and willing to receive 
 Christian books, but give a cordial welcome 
 to the missionary, and have many inquiries 
 to make about this new religion. Mrs. Mat- 
 toon and the wives of the other missionaries 
 have been requested by the King to give in- 
 struction in English to some of the female 
 members of his family ; and they can in this 
 way bring before persons of the highest rank 
 —in Eastern countries commonly secluded 
 from intercourse with foreigners — the all- 
 important lessons of the Gospel of Christ. 
 These engagements are still in progress, and 
 may result in the greatest good to some of 
 the ladies of the royal family, and by their 
 means to many others in high and low sta- 
 tions. One of their pupils, a princess of 
 amiable disposition, who had given pleasing 
 attention to the instructions of the mission- 
 ary teachers, was suddenly removed by death. 
 Her serious interest in listening to the story 
 of the cross would lead us to hope that her 
 
 trust in her last hour may have been placed 
 in Jesus. 
 
 In connection with this brief sketch of 
 missionary labors, the character of the pre- 
 sent King of Siam should be taken into con- 
 sideration. He is a Budhist in his religious 
 profession ; and he is an absolute monarch. 
 He might on any day banish every mission- 
 ary from his kingdom. The Church must 
 ever remember that her dependence is not 
 on the kings of the earth, but on the God of 
 heaven. This being deeply felt, it is still 
 allowable to survey things future in the light 
 of present providences. Now he who, con- 
 trary to human expectation, has been ele- 
 vated to the throne of Siam, possesses a con- 
 siderable degree of Christian knowledge. lie 
 is a much more enlightened and liberal man 
 than his predecessor. He has learnt the 
 English language. He has paid some atten- 
 tion to the history of our country, probably 
 led to this by his acquaintance with Ameri- 
 can missionaries, and he is a warm admirer 
 of Washington. He is disposed to adopt the 
 improvements of western civilization. Ho 
 has under consideration the opening of a 
 ship-canal to connect the Gulf of Siam with 
 the Bay of Bengal — a measure which would 
 prove greatly favorable to commerce be- 
 tween India and China, and would bring his 
 hitherto secluded country out upon one of 
 the highways of the world. He is surround- 
 ed by the priests of Budh, but Christian 
 ministers are living at his capital, and their 
 wives are giving lessons of Christian truth 
 in his palace. Reasons of state policy may 
 commend Budhism to his pride, but the 
 Spirit of God may easily constrain his heart 
 to bow unto Him who is the King of kings 
 and the Lord of lords. The influence of the 
 king and court in Siam, is almost unbounded, 
 especially in religious matters. If the king 
 should embrace Christianity, a large part of 
 his subjects would follow his example. They 
 are in some degree prepared for this, by their 
 acquaintance with the general truths of the 
 Christian religion ; the circulation of the 
 Scriptures and Christian books, and other 
 labors of the missionaries, have been the 
 means of widely disseminating a knowledge 
 of the Gospel. It is, therefore, in the power 
 of one man, not only to make his own reign 
 an era in the history of his country, but to 
 lead his people from the wat to the church — 
 from a miserable paganism to the profession 
 of Christianity ; and if the Spirit of the 
 Lord were poured out from on high, we might 
 soon see in Siam " a nation born in a day." 
 •* The king's heart is in the hand of the Lord ; 
 as the rivers of water, heturneth it whitherso- 
 ever he will." — Lowrie's Manual of Missions. 
 
 American Baptist Mission in Siam. — 
 This mission was originally designed in part 
 for the native Siamese, and in part for the 
 Chinese who are found in Siam in great num- 
 
SUM. 
 
 673 
 
 bers, and who, until within a recent period, 
 were wholly inaccessible in their own coun- 
 try. It was commenced in March 1833, by 
 Rev. J. T. Jones, foi'mcrly of the mission in 
 Burmah, who with Mrs. Jones at that time 
 established his residence at Bangkok, the 
 capital of the kingdom. The city had at 
 former periods been visited by Rev. Mr. 
 Gutzlaff, of the Basle Missionary Society, 
 Rev. Mr. Abeel, of the American Board, and 
 quite recently by Rev. Mr. Trumlin, of the 
 London Missionary Society. They had, how- 
 ever, all abandoned the attempt to plant a 
 mission there, and the latter on his depart- 
 ture had written to the missionaries in Bur- 
 mah, urging them to send one of thoir num- 
 ber to Siam. It was by the appointment of 
 his brethren of the Burman mission, that Mr. 
 Jones first settled at Bangkok, and com- 
 menced his labors among the several races 
 composing its diversified population, the 
 most numerous of whom were the Chinese. 
 
 He was courteously received bv the public 
 personages to whom he became known, and 
 in a little time his house became the resort 
 of considerable numbers of Chinese, Bur- 
 mans, and Peguans. He found the Chinese 
 by far the most amiable and inquisitive, 
 but he understood neither their language, 
 nor the Siamese, and was in consequence 
 obliged to confine his teachings and conver- 
 sations to the Burman tongue, which, how- 
 ever, seems to have been comprehended by 
 others than the Burman population. He 
 baptized his first five converts in December, 
 1833. They were all Chinese, two of whom 
 had been instructed by Messrs. Gutzlaff and 
 Abeel. One of them was immediately ap- 
 pointed an assistant in the mission, to take 
 charge of a school for Chinese boys, and to 
 conduct public worship in Chinese on the 
 Sabbath. In 1835, Mr. Jones had acquired 
 sufficient familiarity with the language to 
 warrant his attempting a translation of the 
 Scriptures. He soon completed the Gospel 
 of Matthew, and a Catechism of the New 
 Testament, both of which he carried to Singa- 
 pore to be printed by the press of the mis- 
 sion of the American Board established there. 
 
 When Mr. Jones removed from Rangoon 
 to Bangkok, it was without the knowledge 
 of tlie Board of Managers. They, however, 
 wcra already directing their attention to that 
 country, and not only approved the steps 
 taken by Mr. Jones, by the advice of 
 his associates in Burmah, but deter- 
 mined immediately to send additional mis- 
 sionaries to be united with him. Accord- 
 ingly, Rev. William Dean, and Mrs. Dean, 
 were appointed by the Board in the summer 
 of 1834, and sailing in the following September, 
 arrived at Singapore in February, 1835, while 
 Mr. Jones was still there engaged in printing 
 the Gospel of Matthew. Both the mission- 
 iries remained here for several months for 
 43 
 
 the purpose of studying the Chinese lan- 
 guage ; here Mrs. Dean, a few weeks after 
 her arrival, was suddenly summoned away 
 by death. Mr. Dean accompanied Air. Jones 
 to Bangkok in June, 1835, and they com- 
 menced together the labors of the mission ; 
 the former more particularly among the 
 Chinese, and the latter among the Siamese. 
 In December of the same year, three other 
 Chinamen were baptized. But so strong 
 was the appetite for opium, and so general 
 its use among the Chinese, that several of 
 those who had been baptized were unable to 
 withstand the temptation, and fell away from 
 the faith which they professed. 
 
 In March, 1836, Mr. Jones had completed 
 the translation of the Acts of the Apostles, 
 and went a second time to Singapore to obtain 
 fonts of type both in Siamese and Chinese, 
 to be used with a press which had been for- 
 warded from America, and which was expect- 
 ed soon to arrive. It was while he was absent 
 on this excursion that there arrived at Singa^ 
 pore. Rev. Messrs. Davenport, Reed, and 
 Shuck, with their wives, together with the 
 expected press, and the necessary materials 
 for printing. Messrs. Davenport and Reed 
 soon went with Mr. Jones to Bangkok, the 
 former to be attached as preacher and print- 
 er to the Siamese, and the latter to be con- 
 nected with Mr. Dean in the Chinese de- 
 partment of the mission. Mr. Shuck re- 
 mained for the present in Singapore, with 
 the intention of establishing himself ulti- 
 mately either at Macao or at Canton. A 
 printing house was immediately built at 
 Bangkok, together with a substantial brick 
 building for a store-house, and the press was 
 set into immediate operation under the direc- 
 tion of Mr. Davenport, in printing books and 
 tracts both in Siamese and Chinese. Mr. Dean 
 occupied a floating house on the river, and 
 employed himself in conversing with visitors 
 and on Sundays in preaching to a congrega- 
 tion varying from thirty to fifty Chinese, 
 while Mr. Jones was occupied with translating 
 the Scriptures into Siamese, preparing tracts 
 and visiting the wais or places of worship 
 for the purpose of scattering the knowledge 
 of the Gospel among the people. The ladies 
 of the mission also were employed in teach- 
 ing such pupils as could be induced to attend 
 their instructions. The children, however, 
 were in many instances forbidden by their 
 parents to attend the schools, lest by so 
 doing their value would be diminished in 
 case their parents should wish to sell them 
 as slaves. 
 
 In 1834, the mission was visited by Rev. 
 Dr. Malcom, and its members, together with 
 those converts who still remained faithfu*,. 
 were organized into a church. Three othe 6 
 were added soon afterwards, and the labc s 
 of the mission, particularly among the Chi- 
 nese, continued to progress, until they were 
 
674 
 
 SUM. 
 
 sadly interrupted by a series of bereavements 
 which for a time paralyzed its energies. Mr. 
 Reed was taken away by death, in August, 
 1837 ; Mrs. Dean had already fallen a victim 
 to a fever ; Mr. Dean was now obliged to 
 withdraw for a period, in order to recruit 
 his failing health ; and early in 1838, Mrs. 
 Jones, a missionary of great excellence, 
 closed her valuable life at Bangkok. The 
 printing arrangements proved very defective 
 on account of the imperfection of the type, 
 and a type-foundry was established in the 
 summer of 1838, and at the same time a 
 second press was added to the property of 
 the mission. By these means the books of 
 the New Testament, which Mr. Jones was 
 rapidly tr.anslating, were printed in great 
 numbers, and with these a multitude of tracts 
 and other works prepared for circulation 
 among the people. 
 
 In June, 1839, Rev. Messrs. Slafter and 
 Goddard, arrived at Singapore, as a rein- 
 forcement of the mission in Siam. Mr. Slaf- 
 ter brought with him an additional press, and 
 went almost immediately to Bangkok, where 
 he became associated with Mr. Jones in the 
 Siamese department of the mission. He 
 speedily acquired the language, and gave 
 great promise of usefulness, but in 1841 he 
 fell a victim to disease before he had begun 
 his labors as a preacher. Mr. Goddard, who 
 was appointed to the Chinese department, 
 remained at Singapore studying the language, 
 until October, 1840, when he repaired to 
 Bangkok and entered upon the duties of his 
 post as an associate of Mr. Dean. In 1843, 
 Mr. Chandler, a machinist and type founder 
 connected with the mission at Maulmain, 
 went to reside at Bangkok. He became the 
 principal manager of the printing establish- 
 ment, and immediately interested himself in 
 introducing among the people a knowledge 
 of the mechanic arts. Prince Momfanoi in- 
 vited him to aid in building several kinds of 
 machinery after American models, and 
 evinced such deference for his Christian 
 principles that he directed his laborers to 
 abstain from work on Sunday. Much inci- 
 dental good was thus accomplished, though 
 it of course fell far short of the great objects 
 for which the mission was established. 
 
 Notwithstanding the fact that the mission- 
 aries in Siam have encountered none of the 
 hindrances usually interposed by the govern- 
 ments of oriental nations, it is also true that 
 they have been encouraged by comparatively 
 few religious fruits among the native Siamese. 
 They have translated the books of the New 
 Testament, and some of the Old, into the 
 language of the country. They have printed 
 and circulated very widely among the people 
 copies of the Scriptures and of religious 
 tracts. They have introduced the mechanic 
 arts, and have won the favor of several of 
 the princes and noblemen of the country, 
 
 but they have not thus far succeeded in per- 
 suading the people to accept the Gospel. 
 The native race of Siam is said to be com- 
 paratively stupid and less civilized than those 
 of the neighboring countries. They have 
 the Gospel, but they do not embrace it. They 
 acknowledge the superiority of Christ's re- 
 ligion, but they still remain indifferent to 
 it. Messrs. Jones and Chandler, with the 
 interruptions of occasional absence, were for 
 many years the principal laborers in this 
 department of the mission. The former, 
 though repeatedly prostrated by ill-health, 
 on account of which he twice returned to the 
 United States, died at Bangkok, September 
 13, 1851. He had been a missionary up- 
 wards of twenty years, and had passed 
 eighteen years in Siam. He had acquired 
 the language to a degree of unusual perfec- 
 tion, and had won the respect and confi- 
 dence of the king and the leading public per- 
 sonages of the country. He had written 
 many tracts and books in the Siamese lan- 
 guage, and had translated the entire New 
 Testament and parts of the Old Testament, 
 the former of which he had just revised for 
 the third time. These contributions to the 
 literature of Siam will remain forever, as 
 memorials of his well-spent and most labor- 
 ious life. 
 
 In 1849 the Siamese department of the 
 mission was strengthened by the arrival at 
 Bangkok of Rev. Samuel G. Smith, who 
 since the death of Mr. Jones has been the 
 only missionary whose work was preaching 
 the Gospel. Mrs. Jones and Miss Morse 
 conduct schools and render such other as- 
 sistance as may be in their power, while Mr. 
 Chandler has lately returned from a visit to 
 the United States, better supplied than ever 
 before with the means of printing, both in 
 Siamese and in Chinese. A few native 
 Siamese have been converted to Christianity, 
 and have been admitted to the Chinese 
 church, but as has been already intimated, 
 the spiritual results of this department of 
 the mission, after the lapse of twenty years, 
 in which it has not only encountered no op- 
 position, but has been received with decided 
 favor from the Government, appear thus far 
 to be unusually small. It may be, however, 
 that these have been only years of toilsome 
 preparation, and a period of sowing the seed 
 which shall yet spring up and yield an abun- 
 dant harvest. 
 
 The Chinese department of the mission at 
 Bangkok, however, has from the beginning 
 been attended with far more encouraging re- 
 sults. It was established at a period when 
 the Gospel was shut out from the countless 
 population of Chinese, and was designed to 
 accomplish for her wandering traffickers and 
 the emigrants from her shores what could 
 not be done for her people at home. The 
 only church at Bangkok has been composed. 
 
SIAM. 
 
 675 
 
 with few exceptions, of converted Chinamen, 
 who at first learned the Scriptures through 
 the Siamese translations of Mr. Jones. 
 From 1840, to the removal of Mr. Dean to 
 China in 1842, the mission was managed 
 principally by Rev. Messrs. Dean and God- 
 dard, and the former engaged in preparing 
 books and tracts and the latter in translating 
 the Scriptures, and both in preaching to the 
 people. In 1840, the members of the church 
 were nine in number, -and each year has wit- 
 nessed a gradual increase, until in 1853 they 
 were tliirty-five. In January, 1851, the mis- 
 sion suffered a severe loss in the destruction 
 of its buildings, and the entire property 
 which they contained, together with many 
 of the personal effects of the missionaries, 
 the whole amounting to not less than 
 ^12,000 to $15,000, a calamity from which 
 it has not even yet fully recovered. 
 
 It has already been stated that Mr. Shuck 
 with his family settled at Macao, a port 
 under the jurisdiction of the Portugese, in 
 1830, also for the purpose of laboring as a 
 missionary among the Chinese. He found 
 them, as at Bangkok, entirely accessible to 
 the preaching of the Gospel. In 1841, Rev. 
 Issachar J. Roberts, who had been residing 
 for some time at Macao under the direction 
 of a missionary society in the "Western 
 States, became associated with Mr. Shuck 
 under the patronage of the American Bap- 
 tist Missionary Union. Two or three Chinese 
 converts have been baptized at this station, 
 religious books and tracts have been circula- 
 ted very widely among the multitudes of 
 Chinese who frequent this mart of oriental 
 commerce, and the missionaries were looking 
 with the fondest hopes on the prospect that 
 was opening before them, when in 1841 their 
 labors for a time were wholly interrupted 
 by the breaking out of the war between 
 Great Britain and China, and the blockade 
 of the port of Macao. This was continued 
 till August 1842, when a treaty of perpetual 
 amity was concluded, by which the island of 
 Hongkong, at the mouth of Canton river, 
 was ceded to England, and the five ports of 
 Canton, Amoy, Fuhchau, Ningpo and Shang- 
 hai were opened to the commerce of Great 
 Britain and the residence of foreigners. 
 This most important event altered the rela- 
 tions of this ancient people to the rest of the 
 human race, and effectually severed the bar- 
 riers which have hitherto prevented the in- 
 troduction of the Gospel to the country. So 
 soon as the treaty was published, Messrs. 
 Shuck and Roberts from Macao, and Mr. 
 Dean from Bangkok, removed to China and 
 took up their residence at Hongkong ; 
 Messrs. Dean and Shuck at the new town 
 of Victoria, and Mr. Roberts in another part 
 of the island at Chek-chu. Mr. Goddard 
 remained at Bangkok prosecuting his accus- 
 tomed labors among the Chinese population 
 
 of that city till 1848, when he went to join 
 the mission in China. 
 
 Meanwhile at Bangkok both departments 
 of the mission were committed to the care 
 of the Siamese missionaries. Two out-sta- 
 tions were established, one at Teng-kia-chu, 
 and one at Bang-chang, both of which were 
 placed under the charge of native assistants. 
 In 1851, Rev. W. Ashmore and Mrs. Ash- 
 more arrived at Bangkok as missionaries to 
 the Chinese. Mr. Ashmore has now ac- 
 quired the language, and is prosecuting those 
 labors to which he was appointed. The 
 latest reports of the mission bear witness to 
 a somewhat more gratifying progress in 
 both its departments. The Siamese mission- 
 aries had before been often invited to the 
 palace of the king for the purpose of aiding 
 the monarch and some members of the royal 
 family in the study of English and the me- 
 chanic arts, and much incidental conversa- 
 tion had been held respecting the doctrines 
 of the Gospel. These interviews, while 
 they have been latterly declined by the mis- 
 sionaries, when proposed for the former ob- 
 jects, have become more frequent for the 
 latter object, and have led to the establish- 
 ment of a regular system of biblical instruc- 
 tion at the palace. The two ladies of this 
 department of the mission. Miss Morse and 
 Mrs. Smith, formerly Mrs. Jones, are also 
 constantly engaged in similar teaching either 
 at the mission school or in private. The 
 most friendly relations are still maintained 
 with the government, and even the Budhist 
 priests themselves in Siam, appear less per- 
 tinacious in their opposition to the new re- 
 ligion than in other countries in which Budh- 
 ism prevails. The Chinese church, which 
 is still the only one belonging to the mission, 
 numbers at present only twenty-six mem- 
 bers, nine having removed to China. In ad- 
 dition to this, and several Siamese who have 
 been baptized, but live away from Bangkok, 
 there were at recent dates eight additional 
 converts who were about to be baptized. 
 These are all Siamese. In February, 1854, 
 Rev. R. Telford and Mr. G. H. Chandler, the 
 printer, with their wives, sailed from the 
 United States for Siam ; Mr. Chandler hav- 
 ing been home on a visit for the benefit of 
 his health, and the improvement of his ar- 
 rangements for printing. Mr. Telford is ap- 
 pointed to the Chinese department of the 
 mission. When they arrive at their stations 
 the two departments will be nearly equally 
 supplied, though neither will possess a mis- 
 sionary force at all adequate to the work 
 which may be advantageously undertaken. 
 The prospects of the mission— though pros- 
 pects are often illusory — are thought to be 
 more encouraging than at any former period. 
 The mission is organized in one station at 
 Bangkok, and four out-stations in the towns 
 of the neighboring country. It embraces in 
 
676 
 
 SIBSAQAR— SIERRA LEONE. 
 
 the Siamese department Rev. S. G. Smith 
 and Mr. 0. II. Chandler, with their wives, 
 and Miss Morse a teacher, and in the Chi- 
 nese department Rev. Messrs. Ashmore and 
 Telford and their wives, and four native as- 
 sistants who are employed in both depart- 
 mcut.s. 
 
 STATISTICS FOR 1854. 
 
 1 station, 4 out-stations, 4 missionaries, 
 5 female assistants ; 9 missionaries and as- 
 sistants ; 4 native preachers and assistants ; 
 1 church, 35 members ; 2 boarding schools, 
 21 pupils ; 2 day-schools, 20 pupils ; total of 
 schools 4, and 41 pupils. — TV. Gammell. 
 
 American Board. — Messrs. Abeel and 
 Tomlin spent some time in Bangkok in 1831, 
 and again Mr. Abeel in 1832. Messrs. Robin- 
 son and Johnson, with their wives, arrived 
 July 23, 1834, and Doctor and Mrs. Bradley 
 on the 18th of July, 1835, with a printing- 
 press, and Siamese type. Mr. Caswell after- 
 wards joined the mission. The missionary 
 work was prosecuted here by the Board 
 until 1848 ; but without any marked results. 
 That year, in consequence of a change of 
 sentiment on the part of Doctor Bradley and 
 Mr. Caswell, a separation took place between 
 them and the Board. And, on the matter 
 coming up at the meeting of the Board, the 
 discontinuance of the mission was recom- 
 mended, and the Prudential Committee after- 
 wards took action accord ingl}'. Messrs. Brad- 
 ley and Caswell were afterwards received 
 under the care of the American Missionary 
 Association, and the mission premises were 
 transferred to that body. For a full account 
 of the causes which led to these results, the 
 reader is referred to the report of the Board 
 and of the Association for 1848. 
 
 American Missionary As sociation. — In 
 October, 1849, the Association sent out Doc- 
 tor Bradley, Rev. L. B. Lane, M. D., Prof. 
 J. Silsby, with their wives, who in due time 
 arrived at Bangkok, and entered upon the 
 missionary service. In 1853, the executive 
 committee authorized the opening of a new 
 station in Siam, and they speak hopefully of 
 the future prospects of the mission. The 
 present missionary force is two ordained mis- 
 sionaries, with their wives. 
 
 SIBSAGOR : A town in Assam, — one of 
 the stations of the Assam mission of the 
 Am. Baptist Union. 
 
 SIBERIA: See Tartary hnd Siberia. 
 
 SIERRA LEONE: A colonial establish- 
 ment of Great Britain, on the west coast of 
 Africa, consisting of a peninsula about 25 
 miles in length, north and south, washed by 
 the Atlantic on the north-west and south, 
 and partly bounded on the east by a bay 
 formed by the Sierra Leone river. The 
 population, consisting chiefly of liberated 
 slaves, amounted, in 1847, to 41,735. Free- 
 town, the capital, has 10,580 inhabitants. 
 
 The peninsula consists principally of a range 
 of conical mountains, from 2000 to 3000 feet 
 in height, surrounded by a belt of level 
 ground, from one to five miles in breadth. 
 The location, for Europeans or Americans, 
 is unhealthy, though not more so than the 
 French and Portuguese settlements in other 
 parts of Western Africa.' The chief charac- 
 teristic is its extreme humidity. More rain 
 fell there in two days of August, 1838, than 
 in Britain thipoughout the entire year. 
 
 This colony was founded in 1787. About 
 1200 free negroes, who, having joined the 
 royal standard in the war of the American 
 Revolution, took refuge, at the termination 
 of the contest, in Nova Scotia, were conveyed 
 to Sierra Leone, in 1792. To these were 
 added the Maroons from Jamaica : and since 
 the legal abolition of the slave trade, the 
 negroes taken in the captured vessels, and 
 liberated, have been carried to the wlony. 
 The constant influx of these poor heathen 
 Africans has materially tended to retard the 
 improvement of the colony. A large pro- 
 portion, however, are enjoying the means of 
 moral and religious instruction, under the 
 direction of the missionaries of the Church 
 and other missionary Societies. (See Africa, 
 Western, under the heads of Church Mission- 
 ary Society, and Wesleyan Missionary So- 
 ciety.) Many of the colored people brought 
 from Nova Scotia had there been converted, 
 under the labors of missionaries who were 
 associated with Lady Huntingdon. For 
 more than sixty years they have existed as 
 a distinct religious body, under the name of 
 the " Connection of the Countess of Hunting- 
 don." Simple faith and earnest prayerful- 
 ness have distinguished them from the be- 
 ginning, and sustained them under many and 
 heavy trials. They have now forty-eight 
 preachers and exhorters, and more than 
 fifteen hundred members in church fellow- 
 ship ; they have also eleven chapels and 
 several schools. Aid has seldom been re- 
 ceived by them from any quarter. They 
 have all along maintained a steadfast devo- 
 tion to the welfare of their countrymen. 
 Their attention has been directed to several 
 localities in and around the colony where the 
 people have no Christian teachers, and seve- 
 ral tribes have invited them to send them 
 teachers. By means of some assistance from 
 England, they have sent out two ministers 
 and several teachers, and it is expected that 
 others will speedily follow them. 
 
 Rev. E. J. Pierce, in a letter dated Jan- 
 uary 11, 1854, states that Rev. E. Jones, 
 principal of a seminary for the education of 
 young men for the ministry, has 16 students, 
 who read Hebrew quite as well as the ave- 
 rage of students in the senior class in our 
 own theological seminaries. They also read 
 the Greek Testament, and seemed to under- 
 stand the structure of the language. 
 
SOCIETY FOE THE PROPAGATION OP THE GOSPEL. 
 
 677 
 
 Freetown is the chief city of Sierra Leone ; 
 in which the Wesleyans have 17 chap- 
 els, 1 out-station for preaching, 5 mifisiona- 
 ries and assistants, 4 catechists, 27 day- 
 school teachers, 71 Sunday-school teachers, 
 67 local preachers, 4,213 church members, 
 256 on trial, 12 Sunday-schools, 665 scholars, 
 11 day-schools, 1400 day-scholars: 2,065 
 scholars in all ; number of attendants on 
 public worship, 7,534. The Baptists have 2 
 churches. 
 
 SIMLA: A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society among the hills, between 
 the Sutlej and Jumna, situated near Saba- 
 thoo, and elevated 7,200 feet above the level 
 of the sea. It is a sanatorium for invalids 
 from the plains of India, a retreat for the 
 civil and military officers, and a place of 
 fashionable resort. The number of English 
 houses is about 200. The country around it 
 contains a numerous population. 
 
 SIMAO: One of the Molucca Islands, in 
 the Indian Archipelago. 
 . SINGAPORE: A small island at the 
 southern extremity of the Malay peninsula, 
 including the town of the same name. In 
 1836, it contained a population of 29,984, of 
 whom 13,749 were Chinese settlers, and 
 9,632 Malays. The town of Singapore is 
 situated on the south side of the island. Its 
 central part is occupied with the dwellings 
 of the merchants, and the military canton- 
 ments. The Malay quarter is at the east, 
 and the principal Chinese commercial quar- 
 ter at the west extremity. The junks from 
 China bring annually a large number of Chi- 
 nese settlers. Most of the artizans, laborers, 
 agriculturists, and shopkeepers, are Chinese. 
 Singapore was occupied, for a number of 
 years before the opening of the Five Ports, 
 as a Chinese mission, by a number of differ- 
 ent societies ; but the missions there have 
 never been very productive. 
 
 SINDE : A station of the Church Mission- 
 ary Society, a little east of Bombay. 
 
 SINMAH : A town in the south of Arra- 
 can, on the confines of Burmah ; an out-sta- 
 tion of the Bassein mission of the American 
 Baptist Union. 
 
 SMYRNA : The principal city of Asiatic 
 Turkey. Of the cities of the seven churches 
 addressed in the Apocalypse, Smyrna alone 
 can be regarded as still flourishing. The 
 modern town, which has long been the em- 
 porium of the Levant, contains a mixed popu- 
 lation of about 120,000. It is a station of 
 the mission of the Am. Board to the Arme- 
 nians : also of the Church Missionary Society. 
 SOCIETY FOR THE PROPAGATION 
 
 native inhabitants of those countries. The 
 principal efforts of this Society, however, 
 have been directed to the British colonists, 
 rather than to the conversion of the heathen 
 in general ; and therefore it assumes more 
 the character of a Home than Foreign Mis- 
 sionary enterprise. Yet, the Society have 
 not been backward to embrace opportunities 
 of preaching the Gospel to the heathen. 
 Though occasional assistance in books and 
 money was given to Jamaica, Antigua, New- 
 foundland, and other islands, for fourscore 
 years, the great field of the Society's mis- 
 sionary labor was the continent of North 
 America. Shortly after the establishment 
 of the Society, missions were founded iu 
 Massachusetts, Connecticut, Rhode Island, 
 New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and 
 the Carolinas ; and the ministers who were 
 sent to take charge of them were the only 
 ministers of the Church of England in vast 
 districts. Among other missionaries of the 
 Society, the celebrated John Weslerj received 
 an appointment and allowance, in 1735, as 
 its first missionary in Georgia. It sulase- 
 quently extended its operations, and now 
 has missionaries in Canada, Nova Scotia, 
 Newfoundland, the West Indies, the East 
 Indies, South Africa, Seychelles, Australia, 
 Tasmania, and New-Zealand. The whole 
 number of missionaries now maintained by 
 the Society, in whole or in part, is 491. Be- 
 sides this, it supports 300 Divinity students, 
 catechists, and schoolmasters. The follow- 
 ing: table shows the location of the mission- 
 
 DIOCESE. 
 
 Nova Scotia. 
 
 Fredkrickton- 
 
 QCEBEO 
 
 Montreal 
 
 Toronto 
 
 Colony. 
 
 Nova Scotia 
 
 Cape Breton 
 
 Prince Edward's Island 
 
 New Brunswick 
 
 Canada East 
 
 Canada "West. 
 
 Rupert's Land iHudson's B'y Territory 
 
 Newfoundland Newfoundland 
 
 Labrador 
 
 Jamaica 
 
 Barbadoks- 
 
 Ahtigda 
 
 Guiana 
 
 Calcutta- 
 Madras 
 
 Bombay 
 
 Colombo 
 
 Cape Towk. 
 
 
 SiDNET 
 
 Newcastle 
 
 Melbourne 
 
 OF THE GOSPEL IN FOREIGN PARTS : | Adelaide 
 
 This Society received its charter from King! j^^^ Zealand. 
 
 Bermudiis- 
 Jamaica... 
 Bahamas— 
 
 William III., in 1701 ; its two great objects . Tasmania. 
 being, " to provide for the ministrations of \ rJ,^^^^^y^ d'Achuna. 
 the Church of England in the British Colo- j 
 nies, and to propagate the Gospel among the 1 
 
 Bengal 
 
 Madras 
 
 Bombay 
 
 Ceylon 
 
 Cape of Good Hope... 
 
 St. Helena 
 
 Now South Wales 
 
 New North Wales 
 
 Portrhilip 
 
 South Australia 
 
 Western Australia 
 
 New -Zealand 
 
 Van Dieraau's Land... 
 Seychelles — 
 
 Missionaries. 
 
 I 
 o 2 
 d § 
 
 12; I 
 
 63 
 40 
 26 
 42 
 121 
 1 
 
;678 
 
 SOCIETY ISLANDS— SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Of this number, 74, in Canada West, are 
 supported from the interest of the Clergy 
 Reserve Fund, and IC, in Nova Scotia, by a 
 Parliamentary grant. The following state- 
 ment shows the aggregate receipts in periods 
 of twenty years, the average annual receipts. 
 the receipts of 1849 and 1850, and the gene- 
 ral aggregate from the beginning : 
 
 Av'ge ann. rec'pts. 
 
 1769 to 1788, £82,299 £4,1M 
 
 1789 « 1808, 75,616 3,780 
 
 1809 « 1828, 386,749 19,337 
 
 1829 « 1848, 1,018,888 
 
 1849 67,489 
 
 1850 62,365 
 
 50,944 
 
 Grand Total, 1,093,406 
 
 These sums have been realized by annual 
 subscriptions, donations, legacies, collections, 
 dividends, Royal Letters for collections in 
 churches, and Parliamentary grants. 
 
 SOCIETY ISLANDS : A group of Is- 
 lands in the Southern Pacific, embracing 
 Huahine, Raiatea, Tahaa, Borabora, Maurua, 
 Tubai, Moupiha, and Fenuaura, having a 
 population of 10,000. 
 
 SOUTHERN BAPTIST CONVENTION, 
 Board of Missions : The Southern Baptist 
 Convention was organized in 1845, in conse- 
 quence of disagreement between the north- 
 ern and southern portions of the Baptist 
 churches on the subject of slavery, when a 
 separate Board of Missions was constituted 
 for the south. It held its first annual meet- 
 ing at Richmond, Va., June 10, 1846, on 
 which occasion its two first missionaries 
 were designated to China. It now has a 
 mission to China, with three stations ; and 
 a mission to Liberia, with thirteen stations. 
 It has also projected a mission to Central 
 Africa, the ground of which has been sur- 
 veyed by one of its missionaries. The whole 
 amount received by the Board, as appears 
 from its biennial reports, is $118,262 22, 
 being an annual average of $14,782 77. 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS: The islands 
 which lie in the Pacific Ocean, south of the 
 Equator, from their prominence in the mis- 
 sionary operations of the present century, 
 have become generally known as The South 
 Sea Islands. Under this designation, we 
 shall include, in this article, the following 
 
 § roups, being the field of operations in the 
 outh Sea, occupied by the London Mission- 
 ary Society, viz. : the Georgian, Society, Aus- 
 tral, Hervey, Navigators^ or Samoa, Pearl, 
 and Marquesas Islands ; and the Friendly 
 and Feejee Islands, by the Wesleyan Mission- 
 ary Society. 
 
 The Georgian' Islands are situated in 
 the South Pacific Ocean between 17" and 18° 
 south latitude, and 149"" and 153° west lon- 
 itude. The group contains six islands. 
 ahlti, Eimeo, Tabuaemanu, or Sir Charles 
 
 f. 
 
 Sander^s Island, Tetuaroa, Matea, and Mee- 
 tia. 
 
 Tahiti is the largest of these islands, and 
 sometimes gives name to the whole group. 
 
 Tahiti was visited by Captain Cook, and 
 from him received the name of Otaheite, but 
 Tahiti is the name given to it by the natives. 
 It consists of two peninsulas united by an 
 isthmus. The largest is nearly circular, and 
 about 20 miles in diameter. The smaller 
 one is oval,* about 16 miles long, and 8 
 broad. The circumference of the whole is- 
 land is 108 miles. The interior is mountain- 
 ous, but is surrounded by a border from 2 to 
 3 miles wide, of low, rich, level land, which 
 extends from the base of the mountains to 
 the sea. The population of Tahiti is esti- 
 mated at about 10,000. 
 
 Eimeo, or, as it is called by the natives, 
 Moorea, is situated about 2° west of Tahiti. 
 It is about 25 miles in circumference. The 
 other islands though equally elevated are of 
 smaller extent. 
 
 The Society Islands include Huahin' . 
 Raiatea, Tahaa, Borabora, Maurua, Tubal. 
 Moupiha, and Fenuaura. The population of 
 this group is supposed to be about 10,000. 
 
 The Austral Islands are Raivavai, or 
 High Island, Tubuai, Rurutu, Riraatara, and 
 Rapa. They are situated between 22° 27' 
 and 27° 36' south latitude, and 144° 11' and 
 150° 47' west longitude. The population is 
 about 1,000. 
 
 Raivavai is one of the most important is- 
 lands of this group. It is about 20 miles in 
 circumference, mountainous in the centre, 
 but has considerable low land. 
 
 Rapa is the most southerly of the Austral 
 Islands. The mountains are craggy, and 
 picturesque, and the land generally fertile. 
 
 Tubuai is a small island about 12 miles in 
 circumference and thinly peopled. 
 
 Rurutu and Ramatara are small, and but 
 little is known of either of them. 
 
 The Hervey Islands are situated be- 
 tween 19° and 21° south latitude, and 156^ 
 and 161° west longitude, and contain a pop- 
 ulation of 16,000 or 18,000. The largest and 
 most important island of the group is Raro- 
 tonga. This beautiful island remained un- 
 known until 1823. It was then discovered 
 by the Rev. Mr. Williams, an English mis- 
 sionary. It is a mass of mountains, many 
 of which are high, and remarkably romantic. 
 The island is about 30 miles in circumference, 
 and has several good harbors for boats. Its 
 population is about 7,000. 
 
 Mangaia is 20 or 25 miles in circumfer- 
 ence, and contains between 2,000 and 3,000 
 inhabitants. 
 
 Atiu is about 20 miles in circumference, 
 hilly, but not mountainous. It is a very ver- 
 dant island, and contains nearly 2,000 inhab- 
 itants. 
 
 Aitutaki is 18 miles in circumference, and 
 
Of TBI 
 
 Uiri7BRSIT>l 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 679 
 
 has a population of about 2,000. The land- 
 scapes on this island are rich and variegated. 
 
 Mauke is a small, low island, discovered 
 by Messrs. Williams and Bourne in 1823. 
 Its former population was considerable, but 
 when discovered it was so much reduced by 
 repeated wars that it numbered only 300. 
 
 Mitlaro is a still smaller island lying 20 
 miles north-west of Mauke. It has also been 
 nearly depopulated by famine and wars, so 
 that it contains not more than 100 inhabi- 
 tants. 
 
 Hervey^s Island is the one from which the 
 group takes its name, which was given by 
 Captain Cook, in honor of Captain Hervey. 
 
 The Navigators' or Samoa Islands are 
 situated between 10*^ and 20° south latitude, 
 and 169* and 174* west longitude, and con- 
 sist of eight islands, Manua, Orosenga, Ofu, 
 Tictuila, Upolu, Manono, Aborima, and 
 Savaii. 
 
 Manua is a small and almost uninhabi- 
 ted island, circular in form, and so elevated 
 as to be visible at a distance of 40 or 50 
 miles. 
 
 Orosenga and Ofu are two small islands, 
 separated from each other by a narrow chan- 
 nel. 
 
 Tutuila is about 50 miles west of Orosenga. 
 It is from 80 to 100 miles in circumference. 
 
 Upolu is between 150 and 200 miles in 
 circumference. The mountains on this is- 
 land are very high, and covered with verdure 
 to their summits. 
 
 Manono is about 5 miles in circumference, 
 and is attached to Upolu by a coral reef 
 
 Aborima is a small island about 2 miles 
 in circumference, situated half way between 
 Manono and Savaii. It received its name, 
 which signifies the hollow of the hand, from 
 its shape. It is supposed to be the crater of 
 an extinct volcano. 
 
 Savaii, the largest island of the group, is 
 about 250 miles in circumference. The 
 mountains are very high, and visible at a 
 distance of 600 or 700 miles. With the ex- 
 ception of the Sandwich Islands, this group 
 is the largest and most populous of the nu- 
 merous clusters in the Pacific at which mis- 
 sions have been commenced. Its population 
 is estimated at 160,000. 
 
 The Paumotu, or Pearl Islands, are sit- 
 uated between 17° and 23°. south latitude, 
 and 139° and 145° west longitude. The 
 group consists of a large number of small, 
 low islands. They have been called by differ- 
 ent names, as, the Labyrinth, the Pearl Is- 
 lands, Paumotu, the Palliser Islands, and the 
 Dangerous Archipelago. Some of the islands 
 have received the name of Crescent, Bow, 
 Harp, and Chain, which have been regarded 
 as indicative of their shape. The population 
 is 3,000 or 4,000. 
 
 The Marquesas Islands are situated 
 about 7° or 8° north of the Pearl Islands, 
 
 and extend from 7* to 10° south latitude, 
 and from 138° to 140° west longitude. They 
 consist of two clusters. The southern clus- 
 ter contains five islands. They were called 
 Marquesas by Alvaro Mendano, a Spanish 
 navigator, in honor of his patron. Marques 
 Mendoza, viceroy of Peru. The northern 
 group also consists of five islands, and as it 
 is distinct from the other cluster, it has 
 sometimes been called by another name. 
 Both groups, however, are usually designa- 
 ted by the common name Marquesas. The 
 geographical extent of the united groups is 
 inferior to that of the Georgian and Society 
 Islands, but the population is supposed to be 
 much greater. 
 
 Most of the South Sea Islands are sur- 
 rounded, at a distance of from one to two 
 miles from the shore, by a coral reef, or belt 
 of coral rock, several yards in width. 
 Against this reef the waves of the Pacific 
 are constantly dashing, and being impeded 
 in their course, rise from 10 to 14 feet above 
 the surface of the reef, and thus form a beau- 
 tiful liquid arch. From the outer edge, the 
 reefs shelve away underneath into deep hol- 
 lows. In landing from canoes, when the sea 
 is high, there is danger of upsetting, and 
 being forced by the violence of the waves 
 into these awful caverns, from which escape 
 would be impossible. The water within the 
 reef is placid and transparent, and at the 
 bottom may be seen coral of every shape and 
 color, among which fishes of various hues 
 and sizes are constantly sporting. In most 
 of these reefs there is an opening large 
 enough to admit vessels, through which a 
 stream of water enters the ocean. 
 
 The climate, though hotter than that of 
 Europe, is more temperate than in those 
 parts of South America whose latitude is 
 the same. Though the distance of the 
 groups from the equator is, on an average, 
 only 17°, they are surrounded by a vast ex- 
 panse of water, and enjoy almost daily a re- 
 freshing land and sea breeze. Still, the heat 
 in the low lands is constant, and often ex- 
 cessive. The changes, on the other hand, are 
 neither sudden nor violent, and the warmth 
 of the climate, though debilitating to Eu- 
 ropeans, occasions no inconvenience to the 
 natives. 
 
 The islands are for the most part hilly,^ 
 often mountainous, and on some of them the 
 mountains rise to an immense height. The 
 sides of the mountains are covered with ver- 
 dure, and at their bases are spread fertile and 
 luxuriant valleys. It would be difficult for 
 the strongest 'imagination to conceive an 
 earthly paradise more lovely than is to be 
 found in some portions of the South Seals- 
 hinds. Freed from the usual power of the 
 tropical heat, and fanned by the soft breezes 
 of a perpetual spring, these delightful 
 regions present to the eye extensive and 
 
682 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS 
 
 and vessels for washing their hands were 
 made of the cocoa-nut shell, and were often 
 beautiftilly carved. A piece of bamboo-canc 
 was their only substitute for a knife, but 
 this they used for a variety of purposes. 
 Like the American Indians, they obtained 
 fire by rubbing together two dry sticks. 
 Their principal agricultural instrument was 
 a short stick, and their only tools were an 
 adze of stone and chisels of bone. Their 
 cloth and mats were made by the women, 
 from the bark of trees. 
 
 Wars, at most of the islands, were fre- 
 quent and exceedingly destructive. At Iler- 
 vey's Island, they occurred so often, and 
 were so exterminating in their character, 
 that the whole population was at one time 
 reduced to about sixty. A few years after- 
 wards, when this island was visited by one 
 of the missionaries, it was found that by re- 
 peated combats this little remnant of the 
 former population had become smaller still, 
 so that five men, three women, and a few 
 children were the only survivors. When 
 preparations were to be made for war, every 
 thing else was neglected ; for war was con- 
 sidered the most important end of life, and 
 training for its successful pursuit was held 
 in the highest estimation. In time of war 
 all who were capable of bearing arms were 
 called on to join the forces of the chieftain 
 to whom they belonged, and the farmers 
 were obliged to render military service when- 
 ever their landlord required it. 
 
 War was seldom proclaimed hastily, and 
 the preparatory deliberations were frequent 
 and protracted. Great importance was at- 
 tached to the will of the gods. If they were 
 favorable, conquest was considered as sure ; 
 but if unfavorable, defeat, and perhaps death, 
 was certain. For the purpose of ascertaining 
 the decision of the gods, divination was em- 
 ployed, and in connection with it, offerings 
 were presented to the divinities invoked. Suc- 
 cess or failure was inferred from the appear- 
 ance of the animal offered, either before or af- 
 ter it was placed on the altar. The victorious 
 party pillaged the villages of their enemies, 
 cut down and destroyed all the bread-fruit 
 and cocoa-nut trees, and often left the island 
 almost uninhabited. The vanquished fled to 
 the mountains, where they were pursued by 
 their enemies, and sometimes overtaken and 
 slain. Those who eluded pursuit, took up 
 their residence in caves and dens of the 
 mountains, and sometimes became perfectly 
 wild. Captives taken in war were either 
 slain on the spot, or sacrificed to the gods. 
 On the day following the battle, the bodies 
 of the slain, having suffered the greatest in- 
 dignities, were offered to Oro, the god of 
 war. as an- acknowledgment of his assistance. 
 In connection with their wars, the natives 
 were accustomed to observe many ceremo- 
 nies, and to offer human sacrifices to Oro, 
 
 whom they Wished to preside over the army. 
 Various ceremonies and offerings to the gods, 
 together with divination, also accompanied 
 the making of peace. 
 
 Government. — Although there were many 
 points of resemblance in the government of 
 the different' clusters of islands in the South 
 Sea. there were also some peculiarities in 
 each. In the Society Islands, and in some 
 of the other groups, the government was 
 hereditary and despotic. The chiefs in the 
 island of Tongataboo were elected, and their 
 power limited. In the Marquesas and Navi- 
 gators' Islands, each tribe was governed by 
 its own chief, and was independent of every 
 other. In all the islands, the government 
 was interwoven with their system of idola- 
 try. The god and the king were generally 
 supposed to share the authority over man- 
 kind. Next in rank to the king was the 
 queen, who often governed a whole island. 
 Immediately on the birth of son to the 
 king, the infant was proclaimed sovereign, 
 and the father became a subject. lie, how- 
 ever, continued to transact business, but paid 
 the same homage to his son that he had be- 
 fore demanded for himself. The king and 
 queen, whenever they traveled by land, were 
 always carried on men's shoulders, and ac- 
 companied by a number of "sacred men, or 
 bearers," who relieved each other of their 
 burdens. The distinction between king and 
 people was strongly marked. Every thing 
 connected with the former, even the ground 
 on which he trod, was considered sacred, and 
 no person was allowed to touch either the 
 king or queen, on pain of death. The inau- 
 guration of the king took place some years 
 before he arrived at the age of twenty-one, 
 and this festival, although celebrated in a 
 magnificent manner, was marked with crimes 
 of the deepest dye. Each district had its 
 own chief, whose power in that district was 
 supreme. They had no regular code of laws, 
 nor any court of justice. The people avenged 
 their own injuries, and the chiefs punished 
 with death or banishment. Theft, although 
 common among them, was severely punished. 
 
 Religion. — The islanders generally, and es- 
 pecially the Samoans, had a vague idea of a 
 Supreme Being, whom they regarded as " the 
 Creator of all things, and the Author of their 
 mercies," called Tangaroa, or Taaroa. They 
 believed in a future state, but their ideas re- 
 specting it were vague and indefinite ; and 
 their notions of paradise were material and 
 sensual. Idolatry prevailed at most of the 
 islands. The inhabitants of several of them 
 worshiped their departed ancestors ; others, 
 birds and insects, while the greater part of 
 them had gods, the work of their own hands. 
 Their gods were nearly a hundred in number, 
 and every family of rank had its tutelar idol. 
 So great was their fear of the gods, that, to 
 avert their anger, they would not only devote 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 683 
 
 to them every valuable article they possessed, 
 but murder their fellow beings^ and offer 
 them to the god. The worship of the is- 
 landers consisted in prayers, offerings, and 
 the sacrifice of victims. Their prayers 
 were generally vain and useless repeti- 
 tions, addressed to the god in a loud and 
 unpleasant tone of voice. Their offerings 
 included "the fowls of the air, the fishes of 
 the sea, the beasts of the field, and the fruits 
 of the earth, together with their choicest 
 manufactures." Domestic altars, or those 
 erected near the corpse of a departed friend, 
 were small squares of wicker work. The 
 altars in the temples were usually eight or 
 ten feet high, and were ornamented with 
 plantain leaves, and covered with sacred 
 boughs. The animals, when presented alive, 
 received the sacred mark, and were allowed 
 to roam at liberty. When slain, great care 
 was taken that a bone should not be broken, 
 or the animal disfigured in any wa}^. The 
 atmosphere in the vicinity of the maraes was 
 frequently rendered offensive by the action 
 of the heat on the offerings of meat left on 
 the altar. In some of the islands, the in- 
 habitants inflict injuries on themselves, in 
 connection with their offerings. 
 
 Besides animals and fruits, human victims 
 were not unfrequently offered to the gods. 
 These barbarous rites commonly took place 
 in time of war, at great national festivals, or 
 the erection of temples, and during the ill- 
 ness of the king and chiefs. The victims 
 were generally captives taken in war, or 
 persons who had rendered themselves odious 
 to the king. At the request of the priest, a 
 stone was sent by the king to the chief of 
 the district where the person selected as a 
 victim resided. If the stone was received, 
 it was an indication that the requisition 
 would be complied with. Certain districts 
 were regarded as tabu, or devoted. From 
 these districts, and generally from families 
 where one victim had been previously taken, 
 another was demanded. When it was known 
 that any ceremonies were near, at which hu- 
 man sacrifices would be offered, the mem- 
 bers of the devoted families fled to the 
 mountains or caves, and remained till the 
 ceremonies were past. The victims were 
 generally unconscious of danger, till they 
 were seized, or stunned by a blow. Their 
 doom was then fixed, and their death certAin. 
 
 The account which has here been given 
 does not, however, apply to the religious 
 system of the natives of the Samoas, or 
 Navigators' Islands. They had neither tem- 
 ples nor altars, and practised none of the 
 barbarous rites that were observed at some 
 of the other groups. The form of supersti- 
 tion most prevalent at the Samoas was the 
 worship of the etu. This consisted of some 
 bird, fish, or reptile, in which they supposed 
 that a spirit resided. It was not uncommon 
 
 to see an intelligent looking chief praying to 
 a fly, an ant, or a lizard. 
 
 The islanders generally had both stated 
 and occasional seasons of worship. The lat- 
 ter were observed in times of national ca- 
 lamities, such as the desolation of war, or 
 the illness of their rulers. At the close of 
 war. they were accustomed to perform certain 
 ceremonies, the object of which was to purify 
 the land from the defilement occasioned by 
 the incursions of an enemy. In connection 
 with these ceremonies, prayers were offircd 
 to the gods, that they would cleanse the land 
 from pollution. It was then considered safe 
 to remain on the soil ; but if the ceremony 
 had been neglected, death would have been 
 anticipated. The illness of the king or chiefs 
 was supposed to have been owing to the dis- 
 pleasure of the gods, on account of some 
 offence committed either by them or the peo- 
 ple. Prayers, if offered frequently, were 
 supposed to avert anger and prevent death. 
 Costly offerings alwa5's accompanied their 
 prayers to the god, and the value of the gift 
 was in proportion to the rank of the chief. 
 Whole fields of plantains, and a hundred pigs 
 have often been presented to a god at once. 
 If recovery followed these ceremonies, the 
 gods were supposed to be pacified, but if 
 death ensued, they were considered as inex- 
 orable, and were destroyed. 
 
 Religious ceremonies were connected with 
 almost every event of their lives. An ubu, 
 or prayer, was offered before they ate their 
 food, when they tilled their ground, planted 
 their gardens, built their houses, launched 
 their canoes, cast their nets, and commenced 
 or concluded a journey. 
 
 Their " first fruits " were always present- 
 ed to the gods. At the close of the year 
 they observed a national festival, which was 
 considered as an annual acknowledgment to 
 the gods. A sumptuous banquet was pro- 
 vided, after which each individual visited his 
 family marae or temple, to ofter prayers for 
 the spirits of departed friends. Wi'tohcrafl 
 and sorcery were common among them. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 London Missionary Society. — Georgian 
 Islands.— In 1796, this Society purchased 
 the ship Duff, and sent her out under the 
 command of Capt. James Wilson, who had 
 retired from the East India service sovoral 
 years before, with twenty-nine mis-^ion.iries. 
 They left Portsmouth on the 23d of Septem- 
 ber, and arrived in safety at Tahiti on the 
 4th of March following. On their arnval, 
 seventy-four canoes, each carrying about 
 twenty natives, put off from the shore, and 
 rowed rapidly towards them. About ono 
 hundred of the natives came on board, and 
 began to dance and caper about the <leck in 
 the most frantic manner. When their aston- 
 ishment and delight had in some mcawire 
 
684 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Bubsulcd, many of them voluntarily left the 
 vessel, and others were sent away by a ven- 
 erable old man, a near relation of the royal 
 family, called Manne Manne. They after- 
 wards landed, and were presented by the 
 king with a house, built by his father for 
 Oapt. Blip^h— a spacious building, 108 feet 
 long and 48 wide. 
 
 The island had been visited by two Spanish 
 Catholic priests, in 1774, who resided about 
 ton months on the island, but effected nothing. 
 
 Captain Wilson, through the medium of a 
 Swede who acted as interpreter, informed 
 Otu, the king, of the object and design of the 
 voyage. The king received the communica- 
 tion with favor, and formally ceded the whole 
 district of Matavai to Captain Wilson and 
 the missionaries ; but the missionaries were 
 not expected to appropriate the land to their 
 own use to the exclusion of the original pro- 
 prietors. 
 
 The Duff now proceeded on her way to 
 the Friendly Islands, where ten missionaries 
 were landed. Captain Wilson then visited 
 the Marquesian Islands, and left one mis- 
 sionary there, after which he returned again 
 to Tahiti. He found all the missionaries in 
 good health, and learned with pleasure from 
 them that the natives continued to treat 
 them as friends, and that they had furnished 
 them with abundant supplies of food. On 
 the 4th of August, 1797, he sailed from Ma- 
 tavai, taking with him one of the mission- 
 aries, who expressed a desire to return ; and 
 on his arrival in England, the society ob- 
 served a day of public thanksgiving for the 
 success that had attended the voyage. This 
 day was kept on the first Monday of the 
 month, the same that has since been observed 
 as the Monthly Concert. Dr. Haweis preached 
 on the occasion, and such was the effect of 
 his appeal, that the very next day the Mis- 
 sionary Society passed a resolution to un- 
 dertake another voyage to the Pacific Ocean. 
 In the latter part of December, 1798, the 
 Duff sailed from England, under the com- 
 mand of Captain Thomas Robson, on her 
 second voyage, with a reinforcement of twen- 
 ty-nine missionaries. Ten of them were 
 married, five were ordained ministers, two 
 were acquainted with medicine and surgery, 
 and most of the others were botanists, agri- 
 culturists, and artisans. On the 13th of Feb- 
 ruary, 1799, a little less than two months 
 from the time of leaving England, the Duff 
 and all the missionaries on board were cap- 
 tured off Cape Frio by the Buonaparte, a 
 French privateer. They were taken to Monte 
 Video, where they remained several weeks. 
 The Captain of the privateer appears to have 
 been a kind-hearted man, and expressed 
 great sympathy for the missionaries, saying. 
 that if he had known who they were and the 
 "luse in which they were engaged, he would 
 ^^' ^iven five hundred pounds out 
 
 of his own pocket than to have met with 
 them. By his kindness the missionaries 
 were at length furnished with a passage to 
 Rio Janeiro. On their way to that port 
 they were again taken captive by a Portu- 
 guese frigate bound to Lisbon. During this 
 voyage, the missionaries suffered not only 
 from want of proper accommodations and 
 food, but from the inhuman conduct of the 
 Captain of the frigate. On their arrival at 
 Lisbon, September 22d, they were set at 
 liberty, and, with the exception of one of 
 their number who had died, returned to 
 England. 
 
 In the meantime, the king and chiefs con- 
 tinued friendly to the missionaries, and sup- 
 plied them liberally with such things as the 
 island afforded. Several of the missionaries 
 had been selected on account of their ac- 
 quaintance with the mechanic arts ; and the 
 surprise of the natives was great, on seeing 
 their tools, and the readiness with which 
 they were used, but particularly, in the work- 
 ing of iron. 
 
 While some of the missionaries were em- 
 ployed in making the natives acquainted with 
 the arts, others were diligently exploring the 
 adjacent country, and planting the seeds 
 which they had brought from Europe. They 
 all beganj. to apply themselves diligently to 
 the acquisition of the language, which proved 
 to be a most laborious undertaking. 
 
 In 1798, in consequence of attempting to 
 assist Captain Bishop, of the ship Nautilus, 
 in recovering two of his sailors, who had de- 
 serted with the ship's boat, four of the mis- 
 sionaries were seized by a party of natives, 
 who attempted to drown them j and it was 
 thought that the outrage was committed 
 with the sanction of Otu, the young king. 
 However, they were rescued by some of the 
 natives, and taken to Pomare, the old king ; 
 who, with his queen, treated them kindly, 
 restored several articles which had been 
 taken from them, and sent them home in his 
 own boat. But, in consequence of this oc- 
 currence, eleven of the missionaries, con- 
 sidering their lives in danger, determined to 
 leave the island, in the ship that was then 
 there. Pomare, with much persuasion, in- 
 duced Mr. and Mrs. Eyre, and five single mis- 
 sionaries to remain ; but the departure of the 
 remainder of the eleven crippled the mission 
 very much. Those who remained now deemed 
 it expedient to give up to Pomare their public 
 stores, and all the property they possessed, 
 together with the blacksmith's shop and the 
 tools. But, notwithstanding this precaution, 
 they were frequently alarmed by intelligence 
 that the mission-house was marked out for 
 destruction, and they were several times 
 plundered of valuable articles. Hostilities 
 also commenced in the district of Pare, in 
 consequence of the execution, by order of 
 Pomare, of two of the men who had so 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 cruelly treated the missionaries. The in- 
 habitants rose in arms to revenge their death • 
 and when peace was offered them, they re- 
 jected it. Pomare therefore attacked them 
 with a numerous force, drove them to the 
 mountains, killed fourteen of their number 
 and burnt forty or fifty houses. Otu, and 
 his father Pomare, not bemg on friendly 
 terms, Manne Manne, the chief priest, taking 
 Bides with Otu, formed a league with him to 
 deprive Pomare of all authority in Tahiti. 
 They made war upon the district of Matavai, 
 put the inhabitants to flight, and took pos- 
 session of the land. The triumph of the old 
 priest, however, was short. Pomare gave 
 private directions to Idia, the queen, to pro- 
 cure his assassination. At the earnest solici- 
 tation of his mother, Otu, though in the 
 3losest alliance with Manne Manne, con- 
 sented to his death. This event appeared to 
 anite in one interest Otu and his father, 
 rhe inhabitants of Matavai left their places 
 )f retreat, and having presented a peace- 
 >ffering, re-occupied their land. The mis- 
 sionaries resumed their attempts to instruct 
 ;he natives, but continued to meet with much 
 ;o discourage them, not only in the acquisi- 
 ;ion of the language, but from the insensi- 
 bility of the natives. 
 
 In November, 1799, the missionaries were 
 sailed to mourn over the death of Mr. Lewis, 
 me of their number. For some months pre- 
 vious to this event, his conduct had been 
 luch as to excite the fears of his brethren, 
 Lud lead them to feel the utmost solicitude 
 ■especting him. Soon after the departure 
 >f the Nautilus, he expressed his intention 
 ►f uniting in marriage with a native female, 
 mt as the missionaries considered her as an 
 dolatress, they endeavored to dissuade him 
 i-om it. Mr. Lewis, however, persevered in 
 lis determination, on account of which the 
 onnection that had subsisted between him 
 ,nd the other missionaries was dissolved, 
 le removed from the mission-house to an- 
 ither part of the district, but was still con- 
 tant in attendance on public worship, and 
 ndustrious in the cultivation of his garden. 
 U soon as the report of his death reached 
 he missionaries, they hastened to his house, 
 sphere they found his body, which presented 
 adi cations that he had been murdered, 
 loon after this the small band was again re- 
 uced, by the departure of Mr. Harris to 
 Jew South Wales ; but his place was sup- 
 lied, in the January following, by the return 
 f Mr. and Mrs. Henry from Port Jackson. 
 
 Until the year 1800, public worship was 
 eld in the mission house; but on the 5th 
 f March, of that year, the missionaries, with 
 tie assistance of several of the natives, com- 
 lenced the erection of a chapel. The mate- 
 tals were mostly furnished by the chiefs, 
 nd when it was nearly completed, Pomare 
 ent ajish as an offering to Jesus Christ, re- 
 
 685 
 
 questmg that it might be hung up in the new 
 chapel. This was the first building erected 
 in the South Sea Islands for the worship of 
 the true God. At the time of its completion 
 the missionaries indulged the hope of seeinc 
 It regularly filled with worshipere ; but the? 
 were obliged early in the year 1802, to i)ull 
 It down in order to prevent its affording 
 shelter to their enemies, or being set on fire. 
 The missionaries continued to labor among 
 the people, but without any apparent success. 
 Their situation was in many respects im- 
 proved, but their property was still exposed 
 to the thefts of the natives, and their feelings 
 constantly tried by the apathy of the de- 
 graded beings for whose benefit they were 
 making such sacrifices. 
 
 In the month of June, 1800, the mission- 
 aries were visited with a new and unexi^cted 
 affliction. Mr. Broomhall, who had for some 
 time evinced much coldness and indifference in 
 respect to religious things, at length avowed 
 that his sentiments had become entirely chang- 
 ed, and that he no longer believed in the im- 
 mortality of the soul, or the reality of a divine 
 influence on the mind. His companions en- 
 deavored to remove his skepticism ; but, fail- 
 ing in their efforts, they separated him from 
 their communion, and he soon afterwards left 
 the island. The brethren followed him with 
 their prayers, but for years received no ac- 
 count of him. At length he made himself 
 known to the Baptist missionaries at Seram- 
 pore, and conversed freely with them respect- 
 ing his state. He appeared deeply penitent, 
 renounced his erroneous sentiments, and pro 
 fessed his belief in the truths of the Christian 
 revelation. Shortly afterwards, ho embarked 
 on another vovage from which he never re- 
 turned, and nothing has since been heard of him. 
 In July, 1801, a reinforcement of eight mis- 
 sionaries arrived at Tahiti from England. 
 The number of missionaries now amounted to 
 thirteen, who were organized into a regular 
 body.with rules for the regulation of their pro- 
 ceedings. 
 
 In 1802, the missionaries who had been 
 longest on the island had acquired sp much of 
 the language as to be able to preach to the 
 natives in their tongue. f]arly in that year, 
 Messrs. Nott and Elder made the first rais- 
 sionarv tour of Tahiti, and in a little more 
 than thirty days preached in nearly every dis- 
 trict. The natives seemed interested in the 
 account of the creation, and asketl various 
 questions about Jehovah, and bis Son Jcsos 
 Christ. Some of them were much affected by 
 the exhibition of Jesus as the atonement for 
 sin, others said they desired to pray to the 
 true God, but were afraid to do so lest the 
 gods of Tahiti should destroy them.^ But at 
 this time a serious war broke out, in conse- 
 quence of the king having taken their national 
 idol, Oro, from the district of Atehuru, by 
 force ; which, for a time, interrupted the ope- 
 
686 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS 
 
 rations of the mission. For many ^cars the 
 misBlonarics were treated with ridicule and 
 contempt, and their hearts were often grieved 
 to see the same ignorance, superstition, and 
 orucltv, which they found on their arrival, still 
 prcvad among the heathen. Sometimes when 
 tliey had gone to every house in a village, and 
 the people had not only promised to attend 
 their meeting, but had actually set out with 
 them, they found on reaching the appointed 
 place, that only two or three had arrived there. 
 Those that came often brought with them dogs 
 or cocks, which they would set to fighting 
 outside the circle of persons to whom the mis- 
 sionaries were preaching. In addition to these 
 and similar trials, they were sometimes charg- 
 ed with being the authors of all the disasters 
 of the people, and especially with being the 
 cause of all the diseases which prevailed among 
 them, and which they supposed were brought 
 upon them by the influence of the foreigners 
 with their God. 
 
 In Sept. 1803, old King Pomare, who had 
 always been their friend, died. Before his 
 death he recommended them to the protection 
 of his son, Otu, who now assumed the name of 
 Pomare. Early in 1805, they had formed a 
 vocabulary of Tahitian words, and prepared a 
 catechism in the language. They had also 
 made considerable progress in the instruction 
 of the children. 
 
 The king had for some time applied himself 
 to writing, and had become so fond of using 
 his pen, and his progress was so rapid, that in 
 the beginning of 1807 he was able to address 
 a letter to the Missionary Society of London. 
 He first composed it in the Tahitian language, 
 and afterwards transcribed the English trans- 
 lation which was made for him. 
 
 In October of this year, Mr. Davies opened 
 a school for boys in a part of the mission- 
 house, and was so much encouraged that he 
 composed a spelling-book in the Tahitian lan- 
 guage, which was sent to England and printed. 
 Kear the close of 1807, the mission sustain- 
 ed a heavy loss in the death of Mr. Jefferson. 
 He was a man of ardent piety and great per- 
 severance, who for ten years had labored unre- 
 mittingly to bring the heathen to a knowledge 
 of the truth. ^ 
 
 ^ In November of the following year a rebel- 
 lion broke out, and the king was defeated. 
 The missionaries were compelled to leave the 
 island, their premises being destroyed, and all 
 their labor apparently lost. All of them, with 
 the exception of Mr. Nott, embarked the 
 first opportunity from Huahine, and arrived at 
 Port Jackson, New South Wales, in Febru- 
 ary, 1810, Mr. Nott remaining on the island 
 of Eimeo. But it was not long before they 
 received letters from King Pomare, expressing 
 the deepest sorrow at their absence, and in- 
 viting them to return as soon as possible. 
 And in the autumn of 1811, five of them re- 
 joined Mr. Nott, at Eimeo. They were receiv- 
 
 ed with ioy by the king. During their ab- 
 sence he had scrupulously observed the Chris- 
 tian Sabbath, and he now expressed the 
 deepest contrition on account of his past life. 
 He spent much of his time in reading and 
 writing and in earnest inquiries about God, 
 and the way of acceptance through Jesus 
 Christ. He had for some time past shown 
 contempt for the idols of his ancestors, and 
 expressed a desire to be taught a more excel- 
 lent way, that he might obtain the favor of 
 the true God. This change in the king's views 
 had been noticed by his subjects with the most 
 fearful apprehensions. They were powerfully 
 affected on one occasion, when a present was 
 brought him of a turtle, an animal which had 
 always been held sacred, and which it wag 
 customary to dress with sacred fire w ithin the 
 precincts of the temple, part of it being inva- 
 riably offered to the idol. The attendants 
 were proceeding with the turtle to the marae, 
 when Pomare called them back, audtold them 
 to prepare an oven to bake it, in his own kitch- 
 en, and serve it up, without offering it to the 
 idol. The people around were astonished, and 
 could hardly believe that the king was in a 
 state of sanity, or was really in earnest. The 
 king repeated his direction ; a fire was made, 
 the turtle baked, and served up at the next 
 repast. The people of the king's household 
 stood in mute expectation of some fearful visi- 
 tation of the anger of the god as soon as a 
 morsel of the fish should be touched. The 
 king cut up the turtle, and began to eat it, 
 inviting some that sat at meat with him to do 
 the same, but no one could be induced to 
 touch it, as they all expected every moment to 
 see him either expire or writhe in strong con- 
 vulsions ; and although the meal was finished 
 without any evil result, they carried away the 
 dishes with many expressions of astonishment, 
 confidently expecting that some judgment 
 would overtake him before the morrow. 
 Pomare now requested baptism, but the mis- 
 sionaries judged it expedient to defer it till he 
 received more instruction. 
 
 Soon after the return of the missionaries, 
 two chiefs arrived from Tahiti, and invited Po- 
 mare to return and resume his government in 
 that island. After his departure they were 
 cheered by the accounts which they received 
 from time to time of his efforts to enlighten 
 his subjects ; and one of the missionaries who 
 visited Tahiti, returned with the report that a 
 spirit of inquiry had been awakened among 
 some of the inhabitants of that island, and 
 that two of those whom they had formerly in- 
 structed, occasionally met to pray to God. 
 Messrs. Scott and Hayward were then sent to 
 visit Tahiti ; and the morning after their arri- 
 val they retired to the bushes near their lodg- 
 ings for meditation and prayer, when Mr. 
 Scott heard a native engaged in prayer in his 
 own mother-tongue. " It was the first native 
 voice in praise and prayer that he had ever 
 
iSOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 687 
 
 heard, and lie listened almost entranced with 
 the appropriate and glowing language of de- 
 votion employed, until his feelings could be 
 restrained no longer. Tears of joy started 
 from his gladdened eye, and rolled in swift 
 succession down his cheeks, while he could 
 scarcely forbear rushing to the spot, and clasp- 
 ing in his arms the unconscious author of his 
 ecstacy. The name of the native was Oito. 
 He had formerly been an inmate of the mission 
 family, and had there been instructed in the 
 knowledge of the true God. 
 
 Since the return of the king to Tahiti, Oito 
 had been with him occasionally, and some re- 
 marks from him had awakened convictions of 
 sin. Having no one to direct him, and not 
 knowing how to obtain relief, he applied to 
 Tuahine, who had for a long time lived with 
 the missionaries. Tuahine was in a state of 
 mind similar to that of Oito. Their conversa- 
 tion strengthened their impressions, and they 
 resolved to retire to the valleys for meditation 
 and prayer. This course at first excited ridi- 
 cule, but, after a time, several young persons 
 united with them, and this little band, without 
 any missionary to guide them, agreed to re- 
 frain from the worship of their idols, and from 
 the evil practices of their country, and to ob- 
 serve the Sabbath day, and to worship Jeho- 
 vah only. 
 
 Tuahine afterwards became a valuable as- 
 sistant to the missionaries, not only as a teach- 
 er in the schools, but also in translating the 
 Scriptures into the native language. He sub- 
 sequently accompanied one of the missionaries 
 to Eaiatea, and was appointed deacon in the 
 native church there, a station which he con 
 tinned to fill till his death, in 1827. He was 
 nuch respected by the people, and died in the 
 enjoyment of the consolations of the Gospel, 
 it the age of forty-five. 
 
 After making the tour of the island, Messrs, 
 i5Cott and Hayward returned to Eimeo, taking 
 Fvith them Tuahine and Oito, that they might 
 ittend the school which had been opened 
 here. At a meeting held at Eimeo, after the 
 ledication of a new chapel, in July, 1813, 
 M natives declared that they had already cast 
 iway their idols, and desired that their names 
 night be written down as th6se who were 
 ietermined to worship the true God. To this 
 lumber 11 others w^re soon added, among 
 vhom were Taaroarii, a young chief of Hua- 
 line, and Matapuupuu, the chief priest of 
 Eluahine, who had long been one of the prin- 
 cipal supporters of idolatry in that island, 
 rhe missionaries held frequent meetings with 
 hem, for the purpose of explaining to them 
 he doctrines of revelation, and uniting with 
 ;hem in social worship. They had the satis- 
 action of hearing some of the new converts 
 ead in prayer, and were surprised and gratified 
 vith their fluency and fervor, as well as the 
 ippropriateness of their language. 
 On one of Mr. Scott's visits to the residence 
 
 of Taaroarii, to preach to his people, Patii, 
 the priest of Papetoai, expressed his intention 
 of bringing out his idols the day following, 
 and publicly burning them. In the forenoon 
 of the next day, the preparations were made ; 
 and the^ews spreading, multitudes assembled 
 to witness what they considered a daring act 
 of impiety. 
 
 A short time before sunset Patii appeared, 
 and ordered his attendants to apply fire to the 
 pile. This being done, he hastened to the 
 sacred depository of his gods, brought them 
 out, and laid them down on the ground. They 
 were small carved wooden images, rude imita- 
 tions of the human figure ; or shapeless logs 
 of wood, covered with finely braided and curi- 
 ously wrought cinet, of cocoanut fibres, and 
 ornamented with red feathers. Patii tore off 
 the sacred cloth in which they were enveloped, 
 stripped them of their ornaments, which he 
 cast into the fire ; and then, one by one, threw 
 the idols themselves into the crackling flames, 
 sometimes pronouncing the name and pedigree 
 of the idol, and expressing his omu regret at 
 having woi-shiped it, — at others, calling upon 
 the spectators to behold their inability even to 
 help themselves. 
 
 The example of Patii produced the most 
 decisive effects on the priests and people. 
 Many in Tahiti and Eimeo, emboldened by hia 
 example, not only burnt their idols, but de- 
 stroyed their maraes. Patii himself became a 
 pupil of the missionaries, and his subsequent 
 life evinced the sincerity of his profession of 
 Christianity. 
 
 On the 5th of October, 1813, the native 
 Christians for the first time united with their 
 teachers in observing the Monthly Concert of 
 Prayer. The names of 50 who had renounced 
 idolatry were now recorded, and the number 
 of those who attended public worship was so 
 great, that it was found necessary to enlarge 
 their place of meeting. The deportment of 
 those who professed to have been converted 
 was most encouraging. They were punctual 
 and regular ip their observance of the outward 
 ordinances of religion, in social meetings for 
 prayer, and in seasons of retirement for private 
 devotion. 
 
 King Pomare, not being successful in recov- 
 ering his authority at Tahiti, in the autumn 
 of 1814, returned to Eimeo, with a large num- 
 ber of followers, all of whom professed to be 
 Christians. And so rapid was the progress of 
 divine truth among the natives, that, at the 
 close of 1814, no less than 300 hearers regu- 
 larly attended the preaching of the GosjmjI, 
 and about 200 were constantly receiving in- 
 struction in the different schools. 
 
 But the success of Christianity awakened 
 the jealousy of the priests, and of those chiefs 
 who adhered to idolatry, and a persecution 
 broke out against the native Christians. One 
 young man was shot at and wounded ; another 
 was seized while in a retired spot for devotion, 
 
088 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 carried off, and sacrificed to their gods 1 The 
 chiefe of several districts on Tahiti entered 
 into a conspiracy to exterminate the Chris- 
 tians ; on liearing of which, they fled to Eimeo. 
 But, on being invited by the rebel chiefs to 
 return to Eimeo, Pomare and his people ac- 
 companied them, and an apparent reconcilia- 
 tion wiis effected. But, on the Sabbath, as the 
 king and his people were at worship, they 
 were attacked, and an obstinate engagement 
 followed, in which the king was victorious, 
 and the pagan party completely routed. The 
 king, however, would not allow his men to fol- 
 low up the victory, according to their former 
 customs, to take vengeance on their enemies, 
 but said, " It is enough." 
 
 At the close of the battle, the king directed 
 a number of his people to proceed to the tem- 
 ple in which Oro, the great national idol, was 
 deposited, and to destroy the temple, altar, 
 idols, and every vestige of idolatry. In the 
 evening of the same day, Pomare and the 
 chiefs invited the Christians to assemble, and 
 render "thanks to God for the protection he had 
 afforded them. On this occasion, they were 
 joined by many who had, till then, been zeal- 
 ous worshipers of idols, but who now desired 
 to acknowledge Jehovah as the true God. 
 
 The party sent by the king to destroy the 
 god Oro proceeded to the temple at Tautira, 
 and, having brought out the idol, stripped it 
 of its sacred coverings and highly valued orna- 
 ments, and threw it contemptuously on the 
 ground. The altars were then broken down, 
 the temples demolished, and the sacred houses 
 of the gods, with all their appendages, com- 
 mitted to the flames. The temples, altars, and 
 idols, all around Tahiti, were soon after de- 
 stroyed in the same way. 
 
 Pomare was now by universal consent re- 
 stored to his government, and to supreme au- 
 thority in his dominions. His clemency, on 
 this occasion, made a strong impression on the 
 minds of the vanquished, who concluded that 
 it must be the new religion which had pro- 
 duced such a change, and unanimously ex- 
 pressed their determination to embrace it 
 themselves. "The family and district tem- 
 ples, and altars, as well as those that were 
 national, were demolished,— the idols destroyed 
 by the very individuals who had but recently 
 been so zealous for their preservation, and, in 
 a short time, there was not one professed idol- 
 ater remaining." The people were earnest in 
 inviting the missionaries to come and instruct 
 them in the knowledge of the Christian reli- 
 gion. Schools were established, and places for 
 public worship erected, the Sabbath was ob- 
 served, divine service performed, and infant 
 murder, with all the abominations of idolatry, 
 were discontinued. 
 
 As soon as possible after the battle, tidings 
 of the result were conveyed to Eimeo. The 
 missionaries were almost overcome with joy, 
 when they learned that the Christians were 
 
 safe, and hastened to render thanks to God, 
 with feelings which it would be impossible to 
 describe. " In that one year they reaped the 
 harvest of sixteen laborious seed-times, sixteen 
 dreary and anxious winters, and sixteen unpro- 
 ductive summers." A missionary from Eimeo 
 was soon despatched to Tahiti. On his arri- 
 val, he found the people so anxious to hear 
 about Jesus Christ, that they would often 
 spend the whole night in conversation and 
 inquiry on subjects connected with religion. 
 The schools everywhere greatly increased, and 
 hundreds wlio had been among the earliest 
 scholars, were now engaged in imparting to 
 others the knowledge they had received. 
 " Aged priests and warriors, with their spel- 
 ling-books in their hands, might be seen sit- 
 ting on the benches in the schools, by the side, 
 perhaps, of some smiling little boy or girl, 
 by whom they were now taught the use of let- 
 ters. Others might be often seen employed in 
 pulling down the houses of their idols, and 
 erecting temples for the worship of the Prince 
 of Peace, working in companionship and har- 
 mony with those whom they had so recently 
 met on the field of battle." 
 
 In 1816, Pomare sent most of his family 
 idols to the missionaries, to be either burnt or 
 scLt to England, " that the people might know 
 Tahiti's foolish gods." The idols were accord- 
 ingly sent to England, and deposited in the 
 Missionary Museum. In February of the fol- 
 lowing year, the mission was reinforced by the 
 arrival at Tahiti of the Rev. Mr. Ellis, who 
 expressed his astonishment at the change that 
 had taken place. Mr. Ellis had brought with 
 him from England a printing-press and types, 
 and at the request of the directors of the Mis- 
 sionary Society had learned the art of print- 
 ing. The curiosity of the natives to see the 
 printing-press brought persons from different 
 parts of the island, and also from Tahiti, to 
 look at this " wonderful machine." Hundreds 
 who had learned to read were still destitute of 
 a book. Some had written out the whole 
 spelling book on sheets of writing paper, 
 while others had written the alphabet on pieces 
 of cloth made from the bark of a tree. Po- 
 mare manifested a strong interest in the press, 
 and rendered much assistance in the erection 
 of the building for its accommodation. He 
 was allowed the privilege of setting the types 
 for the first alphabet, and of making the im- 
 pression of the first sheet that issued from the 
 press, which gave him great satisfaction. 
 
 The curiosity of the natives, excited by the 
 establishment of the printing-press, was not 
 easily satisfied. Pomare visited the printing- 
 oflSce almost every day ; the chiefs requested 
 to be admitted inside, and the windows, doors, 
 and every crevice through which they could 
 peep, were filled with people exclaiming, "Ber- 
 itanie ! fentm paari ; ' " 0, Britain, land of 
 skill," (or knowledge.) Multitudes from every 
 district in Eimeo, and many from other islands, 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 689 
 
 came to procure books and to see the machine 
 which performed such wonders. For several 
 ■weeks before the first portion of Scripture was 
 finished, the district of Afareaitu, in which the 
 printing-office was situated, resembled a public 
 fair. The beach was lined with canoes, the 
 houses of the inhabitants were filled to over- 
 flowing, and temporary encampments were 
 everywhere erected. The printing-office was 
 visited by such numbers of the strangers, that 
 they often climbed upon each other's backs, or 
 on the sides of the windows, so as to darken 
 the room. So anxious were the people to ob- 
 tain books, that they were constantly coming 
 from other islands, and many waited five or six 
 •weeks rather than return without them. Most 
 of those who received the books made them 
 their constant companions, and read them care- 
 fully and regularly, so that they became to 
 them the source of their highest enjoyment. 
 
 The greater portion of the inhabitants of 
 the Georgian Islands having embraced Chris- 
 tianity, the missionaries proposed to the king, 
 and to several of the leading chiefs, the plan 
 of forming an auxiliary missionary society, 
 which was at once approved by them, and the 
 13th of May, 1818, which was the anniver- 
 sary of the London Missionary Society, was 
 appointed for its organization. At sunrise, 
 the missionaries attended a meeting for prayer 
 in the English language. The natives, also, 
 held one among themselves at the same hour. 
 In the forenoon a sermon was preached in 
 English by one of the missionaries; in the 
 afternoon the services were entirely in the na- 
 tive language. Long before the appointed 
 hour, the chapel was crowded, and the meeting 
 was adjourned to a beautiful grove at a short 
 distance from the chapel. Chairs were pro- 
 vided for the king and chiefs, and a raised 
 stand, four or five feet from the ground, for Mr. 
 JSTott. The services commenced with singing 
 and prayer ; after which Mr. Nott delivered a 
 short and appropriate discourse from Acts 8 : 
 30, 31. At the conclusion, Poraare rose and 
 addressed the multitude, referring to their for- 
 mer habits, and to the wonderful change which 
 the Gospel had produced in their condition, 
 and showing their obligation to extend the 
 same blessing to others still in heathenish 
 darkness. He concluded by proposing the 
 formation of a Tahitian Misstonary Society, to 
 aid the London Missionary Society in sending 
 the Gospel to the heathen, and requested those 
 who approved the object to hold up their right 
 hands. Two or three thousand hands were 
 instantly raised. The constitution of the so- 
 ciety, previously prepared by the missionaries, 
 was then read ; a treasurer and secretaries were 
 chosen, and the people retired to their dwell- 
 ings with excited and happy feelings. 
 
 In 1817, the mission had been remforccd 
 
 with seven missionaries and their wives ; and 
 
 early in 1818 two of them, Messrs. Wilson and 
 
 Darling, removed to Tahiti, and commenced 
 
 44 
 
 their labors near the place from which the 
 missionaries had been obliged to fly in 1809. 
 New stations were also commenced in three 
 other districts on the island of Tahiti. 
 
 Pomare had for a long time been engaged 
 in preparing materials and erecting at Papaoa, 
 on the island of Tahiti, a chapel 712 feet in 
 length and 54 feet in width, llie roof was 
 supported by 36 massive pillars of the bread- 
 fruit tree, and the sides by 280 smaller ones. 
 The walls were composed of boards fixed per- 
 pendicularly in square sleepers, and were either 
 smoothed with a plane or polished by rul^bing 
 with coral and sand. The building contained 
 133 windows and 29 doors. The floor was 
 covered with long grass, and the area was 
 filled with plain but substantial' benches. 
 The rafters were bound with braided cord, 
 colored in native dyes, or covered with white 
 matting, the ends of which hung down several 
 feet from the upper part of the rafter, and ter- 
 minated in a broad fringe. The chapel con- 
 tained three pulpits, 260 feet apart, but with- 
 out any partition between. It was called the 
 Royal Mission Chapel, and was first opened for 
 divine service on the 11th of May, 1819. A 
 sermon was preached at the same time in each 
 pulpit, to an audience of more than 2,000 
 hearers. The encampment of the multitude 
 extended along the beach on each side of the 
 chapel to the distance of four miles. A long 
 aisle extended from one end of the chapel to 
 the other, crossed in an oblique direction by a 
 stream of water five or six feet wide. The 
 plan of so large a place of worship originated 
 entirely with the King, and the chapel was 
 erected by the united efforts of the chiefs and 
 people of Tahiti and Eimeo. When Pomare 
 was asked why he built so large a house, he 
 inquired "whether Solomon was not a good 
 king, and whether he did not build a house for 
 Jehovah superior to every edifice in Judea or 
 in the surrounding countries." 
 
 The first baptism at the islands took place 
 in 1819. and the king was the first subject. 
 The ceremony was performed on Sabbath, the 
 6th of June, m the new chapel, in the presence 
 of 4,000 or 5,000 people. The exercises were 
 conducted by Messi-s. Bicknell aud Henry, two 
 missionaries who had arrived in the Duff more 
 than 22 years before. This public prufes-sion 
 of religion by Pomare was followed by the 
 baptism of many of the converts. 
 
 As the people had now embraced Christian- 
 ity, they were desirous that their civil aud ju- 
 dicial proceedings should be in acconlanco 
 with the principles of the Christian r^V ' 
 The missionaries, at the re<jui>st of 1* 
 assisted him and his chief-- •■■ <"•■"■:" 
 of laws. On the 13th of ^; 
 large number of people from 
 were assembled at the ann'w 
 sionary society ; after the i 
 opened with i)raycr, the ki I t'X- 
 
 plained the laws, and aftti d the 
 
690 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 chiefs if they assented to them. They replied, 
 •* We heartily agree to them." Then address- 
 ing the people, the king desired them, if they 
 approved of the laws, to signify it by holding 
 up their right hands. Thousamla of arms were 
 immediately raised. The meeting was then 
 closed with prayer by Mr. Henry. The laws 
 were subsequently printed on a large sheet of 
 paper, and sent to every chief and magistrate 
 throughout the islands, and posted up m most 
 of the public places. After the promulgation 
 of the new laws, two or three slight insurrec- 
 tions occurred, but they were easily quelled ; 
 and their authority firmly established. 
 
 In the islands of Tahiti and Eimco, Chris- 
 tian churches were formed early in 1820, which, 
 though small at first, gradually increased in 
 numbers. 
 
 An interesting change had now taken place 
 in the Georgian Islands, and the efifects of the 
 Christian religion were becoming more and 
 more apparent. The appearance of the mis- 
 sionary station at Burder's Point, in Tahiti, is 
 thus described by Mr. Ellis, who visited it in 
 April, 1821 : " Newly planted gardens and 
 enclosures appeared in every direction ; several 
 good houses were finished ; some were plaster- 
 ed and thatched, while only the frames of others 
 were completed. A school-house and chapel 
 had been erected. The latter was neatly 
 finished with a gallery, the first built in the 
 South Sea Islands. The congregation on the 
 Sabbath consisted of about five hundred, who 
 were generally attentive. Here, as in other 
 stations, the singing forms an interesting part 
 of the worship. The female voices are usually 
 clear and distinct, but those of the men rather 
 inclined to harshness." 
 
 With the introduction of Christianity into 
 the Georgian Islands, a striking change took 
 place in the habits of the natives. The females, 
 who had until this time been treated with con- 
 tempt or cruelty, and regarded as fit only for 
 the^ most menial offices, now began to assume 
 their proper station in society. 
 
 When the missionaries first went there, they 
 .were annoyed with the thievish propensities of 
 the natives ; but, after this change, Mr. Ellis, 
 who had resided at Eimeo more than a year, 
 remarked : " Although we had no lock, and 
 for a long time no bolt, on our door, and though 
 sometimes the door was left open all night, yet 
 we do not know that a single article was stolen 
 from us hy the natives, during the eighteen 
 months we resided among them." 
 
 The observance of the Sabbath was so 
 marked as to attract the attention of the offi- 
 cers of vessels, which visited the islands. A 
 ship arrived at Tahiti on Friday. It was soon 
 thronged with natives, who offered fowls, fruit, 
 and vegetables for sale. On the following day 
 the traffic was continued, but on the third, to 
 the astonishment of all on board, no individual 
 -Came near the ship. The reason afterward 
 iissigned was, that it was the Sabbath. On 
 
 Monday the intercourse was resumed again, as 
 briskly as before. 
 
 In 1821, two laymen were sent out for the 
 purpose of teaching the natives the useful arts ; 
 and they learned to manufacture cotton cloth, 
 and to make lathes, looms, and spinning- 
 wheels. 
 
 While these things were taking place at 
 Tahiti and Eimeo, similar events were occur- 
 ring at Tabuaemanu, another of the Georgian 
 Islands. Having heard that the people of the 
 Huahine had destroyed their idols, they re- 
 solved to do the same. In 1818, Mr. Davis, 
 while on a voyage to Tahiti, being driven out 
 of his course, spent nine weeks on Tabuaemanu, 
 instructing the natives, and when he left them, 
 appointed two of the best informed to teach 
 the rest. In 1819, nearly all the inhabitants, 
 with their chief, removed to Huahine, to re- 
 ceive religious instruction. The next year 
 they returned to their own island. 
 
 Mr. Barff visited this island in 1822, and 
 found the inhabitants living together in great 
 harmony, and diligently endeavoring to im- 
 prove in knowledge. Those who had been 
 received, while at Huahine, as candidates for 
 baptism, continued to act consistently with 
 their profession, and frequently met together 
 to exhort each other to love and good works. 
 During his stay at Tabuaemanu, Mr. Barff 
 baptized fifty-four adults, and thirty children. 
 Two native teachers from the church at Hua- 
 hine were appointed to labor among them, and 
 on the departure of Mr. Barff nearly all the 
 inhabitants placed themselves under their in- 
 struction. In 1823, a church of thirty-one 
 members was formed at this station, to which 
 thirty-five more were added in 1825. In 1833, 
 Mr. Barff found the outward appearance of 
 the settlement greatly improved by the erec- 
 tion of houses built after the European man- 
 ner, with neat and well cultivated gardens. 
 The judicious labors of the native teachers 
 had been followed with the divine blessing, 
 and order, harmony, and industry prevailed. A 
 new chapel had also been built, and dedicated 
 to the worship of God. In 1836, the church 
 had increased to ninety members, and there 
 were in the school seventy-six children. AU 
 the adults were under instruction, and most of 
 them had learned to read the Scriptures. 
 
 Near the close of the year 1821, the mission 
 in the Georgian Islands experienced a heavy 
 bereavement in the decease of the king Pomare 
 II. He was the first convert, and proved a 
 steady friend of the missionaries ; but towards 
 the close of his life he contracted a fondness 
 for spirituous liquors, which proved a snare to 
 him. On his death-bed, being reminded of 
 the number and magnitude of his sins, and di- 
 rected to Jesus Christ, he replied, " Jesus Christ ■ 
 alone," and shortly after expired. He wasj 
 succeeded by his son, Pomare HI,, only four 
 years old, who was crowned with Christian cere-i 
 monies. He lived, however, but about a year I 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 C91 
 
 and a half, and was succeeded by a daughter of 
 his father, who was afterwards married to the 
 yonug chief Tahaa, to whom her father had 
 given his own name. 
 
 In March 1824, the South Sea Academy 
 was established at Eimeo, by the Deputation 
 from the Missionary Society, the primary do- 
 sign of which was to furnish a suitable educa- 
 tion to the children of the missionaries. Na- 
 tive children also of piety and talent had 
 access to its advantages, and it was intended 
 as preparatory to a seminary for training native 
 pastors. 
 
 In 1829, nineteen years after the natives be- 
 came Christians, the Rev. Mi*. Stewart visited 
 the Georgian Islands, as chaplain of the United 
 States' frigate Vincennes. After giving an 
 account of the schools, and the public services 
 on the Sabbath, he adds, " A single glance 
 around was sufficient to convince the most 
 skeptical observer of the success and benefit 
 of missions to the heathen ; for it could not 
 be made without meeting the plainest demon- 
 stration, that such can be rescued from all the 
 rudeness and wildness of their original condi- 
 tion, can be brought to a state of cleanliness 
 and modesty in their personal appearance, can 
 be taught to read and write ; for many, be- 
 sides the intelligent and familiar use of the 
 Scriptures and their hymn-book, took notes in 
 pencil of the sermon delivered ; in a word, can 
 be transformed into all that civilization and 
 Christianity vouchsafes to man." 
 
 In 1835, there was an awakening, and the 
 houses of the missionaries were thronged with 
 those who desired to be instructed in the way 
 of life. Some of these were wild men and 
 women from the mountains ; but among those 
 who desired admission to the church were the 
 queen, her husband, and her mother. In Dec. 
 of this year, the translation of the Scriptures 
 was completed, and Mr. Nott went to Eng- 
 land to superintend the printing, as well as to 
 recover his health. In 1836, there were, in 
 Tahiti, nearly two thousand natives in church 
 fellowship ; two- thirds of the people could 
 read ; a great number of them had learned to 
 write ; and the schools and chapels were well 
 attended. 
 
 An attempt was made in 183G to introduce 
 Catholic priests into the Georgian Islands, but 
 the queen refused them permission to remain, 
 and ordered them to depart in the same vessel 
 in which they came. But Mr. Mocrenhaut, 
 the American consul, received them, and 
 placed them in a house where they locked 
 themselves in. The officers of the queen, how- 
 ever, lifted off the roof, and took them out by 
 force, and put them on board the ship. In 
 1837, a second attempt was made by an Ame- 
 rican ship, from Boston, commanded by Capt. 
 Williams, who undertook to force two Catho- 
 lic priests upon the queen, in which he was 
 aided by the American consul. Because she 
 would not receive them, he demanded $2,000 
 
 damages, and threatened to send a man-of-war 
 to enforce the demand. The queen wrote a 
 letter to President Van Bureu, complaining of 
 the conduct of Mr. Moerenhaut, and the presi- 
 dent promptly removed him, and appoinfbd 
 Samuel R. Blackley in his room. 
 
 Mr. Moerenh«ut, however, was rewarded for 
 his^eal in behalf of the Catholics, with the 
 French Consulate. The Frencli frigate, Ve- 
 nus, was ordered to proceed from the South 
 American station to punish the insults offered at 
 Tahiti to the subjects of His Most Christian 
 Majesty. The captain, on his arrival, ordered 
 the queen to send on board his frigate 
 $2,000 ; to write to the king of France an 
 humble letter of apology ; and to permit all 
 French subjects to reside on the island, on tho 
 most favorable terms. The deck of the frigate 
 having been cleared for action* these requisi- 
 tions, as well as some others, were enforced by 
 threats of the immediate destruction of the 
 town ; and the queen was obliged to borrow 
 the money to meet this unexpected demand. 
 
 Captain Harvey, master of a whaling vessel 
 who visited Tahiti, in May, 1839, gives the 
 following testimony to the good effects of mis- 
 sionary labor on the island: — "This is the 
 most civilized place that I have been at in the 
 South Seas ; it is governed by a queen, daugh- 
 ter of old Pomare, a dignified young lady, 
 about 25 years of age. They have a good 
 code of laws ; no spirits whatever are allowed 
 to be landed on the island ; therefore the sail- 
 ors have no chance of getting drunk, and are 
 all in an orderly state, and work goes on pro- 
 perly. It is one of the most gratifying sights 
 the eye can witness on a Sunday in their 
 church, which holds about 5,000, to see tho 
 queen near the pulpit, and all her subjects 
 around her decently appareled, and in seem- 
 ingly pure devotion. I really never felt such 
 a conviction of the great benefit of missionary 
 labors before. The attire of the women is as 
 near the English as they can copy." 
 
 Such was the state of things in these islands, 
 previous to the introduction of the French pro- 
 tectorate, which has been the means of opening 
 the floodgates of iniquity, and of embarrassing 
 and finally breaking up the mission. This 
 measure appears to have been brought about, 
 through the combined influence of rurasellera 
 and Catholic priests. It is stated in the report 
 for 1843, that the French and American Con- 
 suls had determined to break through all re- 
 strictions ; and in spite of law, they had openly 
 forced the sale of spirits. " I have seen more 
 drunkenness," says a missionary, " at Eimeo, 
 the last six months, than in seven years before." 
 The first French outrage was committed, as 
 already stated, in consequence of the Queen's 
 refusing to permit two Catholic priests to re- 
 main on the island, in the cxcrci.se of her un- 
 doubted right of sovereignty. This was in Au- 
 gust, 1838. In April, '39, the Artcmise, another 
 French frigate, put into Papeete for ftjpairs ; 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 and nftcr receiving tho aid of the natives, and 
 the kind hospitality of tho ^'overnment, for 
 three inontlis, tlie.sc acts of kindness were re- 
 p^d by obliging the queen to abrogate the 
 law excluding Papists from settling on the 
 island, under threat of overturning her govern- 
 ment. In Ma^, 1842, Tahiti was visited by 
 the French ship of war, LAuhe, under* the 
 command of Capt. Dubuset, wlio compelled the 
 queen to disband her police force, because the 
 commander of a French whaler had been put 
 in confinement for drunkenness and riot. On 
 the first of September, of tlie same year, the 
 French ship of war, Reine Blanche, of CO guns. 
 Admiral A. Dupetit Thouars, arrived at Pa- 
 peete, with professions of peace. After a few 
 days, the queen, who was at Eimeo, daily ex- 
 pecting confinement, with the principal chiefs, 
 were invited to come to Papeete, that the Ad- 
 miral might pay his respects to them. The 
 principal chiefs came and dined on board, on 
 the 8th, it being understood that a meeting or 
 conference was to be held the next day. The 
 same evening, the British vice-consul and the 
 American consul were notified of probable 
 hostilities. During the night, a secret meeting 
 was held between the French and four princi- 
 pal chiefs, at which the latter were induced to 
 sign a document, addressed to the Admiral, 
 soliciting the protection of the French, osten- 
 sibly leaving the internal afiairs of the govern- 
 ment in the hands of the queen, and stipulat- 
 ing for the freedom of religion and the protec- 
 tion of the English missionaries ; but leaving 
 all afifairs concerning foreign governments, 
 foreign residents, port regulations, &c., with 
 officers appointed by the French government ; 
 thus, in reality, nullifying the stipulation con- 
 cerning the English missionaries. The Admi- 
 ral demanded the queen's signature to this 
 surrender of her sovereignty, or a fine of 
 $10,000 for alleged injuries ; and if she did not 
 comply with one or the other of these demands 
 in 24 hours, he threatened to plant the French 
 flag and capture the island. The queen signed 
 the docuinent just one hour before the firing 
 was to have commenced. A supreme council 
 of three Frenchmen was appointed, from whom 
 there was no appeal but to the king of France ; 
 and a proclamation was issued, threatening 
 with banishment from the island, any person 
 who should, by word or deed, prejudice the 
 people against the French government. Un- 
 der such laws, we can see how easy it would 
 be, at &nj time, to find a pretext for annoying 
 the missionaries. ITiis gross outrage called 
 forth protests and ex-pressions of sympathy 
 from most of the Protestant Missionary Socie- 
 ties in Great Britain and on the continent of 
 Europe, as well as of the American Board ; 
 and appeals were made by the Directors of the 
 Society to the Governments of France and 
 Great Britain. 
 
 On the 15th of January, 1843, Tahiti was 
 visited by the British frigate Talbot, Sir Tho- 
 
 ma.s Thompson, Captain, by whom a meeting 
 was convened of the queen and principal chiefs, 
 at which the French and American Consuls 
 were present, to confer upon the changes that 
 had taken place. By request of the queen, the 
 meeting was opened with prayer. A letter 
 was read from the British Admiral, expressing 
 the sympathies of the Queen of England to- 
 ward Queen Pomare ; and, in answer to inqui- 
 ries, the principal chiefs of each district declared 
 that Queen Pomare was their only sovereign ; 
 that they desired to bo on friendly terms with 
 all nations, but that, if she required aid of any 
 nation, it was her intention to seek it of Great 
 Britain. And even the chiefs who signed the 
 request for French protection declared that 
 they did not desire the aid of the French, but 
 that they signed the request because they were 
 teased to do so. 
 
 On the 2d of November, following. Admiral 
 Dupetit Thouars paid a second visit to Papeete, 
 with three men of war, and demanded the re- 
 moval of the emblem of the queen's sove- 
 reignty from the national colors, which she re- 
 solutely refused to do ; whereupon the gallant 
 Admiral declared that she had ceased to reign, 
 and took possession of the island in the name of 
 the king of the French. The queen issued her 
 proclamation, ordering her subjects to offer no 
 resistance. The British Consul struck his flag, 
 and protested against these proceedings. The 
 French government refused to sanction this 
 act ; but the French Protectorate still remained, 
 to the lasting disgrace of that nation. The 
 French authorities, allying themselves with the 
 most unprincipled portion of the chiefs, have 
 been able to secure the passage of laws, pur- 
 porting to come from a native legislative body, 
 to suit their own nefarious designs, and sub- 
 versive even of the original conditions of theii 
 own proposing. 
 
 These events were followed by continued acti 
 of aggression, on the part of the French; 
 which, notwithstanding the remonstrances of 
 the missionaries, and the commands of the 
 queen, led to resistance on the part of the na/- 
 tives; and the fairer portions of the island 
 were desolated by the French. 
 
 Early in the year 1844, Queen Pomare took 
 refuge from the insults and hostility of the 
 French on board a British vessel, where she 
 remained six months, and afterwards sailed ic 
 the Carysfoot to Kaiatea. On the 2d ot 
 May, Rev. Henry Nott, one of the missionaries 
 who first landed at Tahiti, in 1796, was called 
 to his rest, and on the 30th of June, Rev. 
 T. S. McKean was accidentally shot by one of 
 the native soldiers. A number of stations 
 were at this time broken up, and others re- 
 duced very low, and several of the mission- 
 aries returned to England. 
 
 The French continued to exercise full sove- 
 reignty, till January, 1845, when, in conse- 
 quence of instructions from government, this 
 ' claim was nominally abandoned, but one of 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 693 
 
 the most corrupt and unprincipled of the 
 chiefs was named " liegent," and affairs were 
 carried on in tlie queen's name, though really 
 by the French ; and many arbitrary regular 
 tions were introduced, among which was one, 
 changing the Sabbath from Sunday to Mon- 
 day ; and another prohibiting the missionaries 
 to travel in the island without a passport. 
 
 In 1845, the French attempted to introduce 
 the protectorate at the Society Islands, where 
 they met with a decided resistance, in conse- 
 quence of which they blockaded some of the 
 ports. But subsequently the independence of 
 these islands was guaranteed by the French 
 and English governments ; yet the latter, to 
 the surprise and grief of good men, acknowl- 
 edged ihe protectorate of the French in the 
 Georgian Islands. 
 
 In 1846, in revenge for an attack by the 
 natives on Papeete, Governor Bruat drove 
 them into the mountains, and destroyed every 
 vestige of civilization and fertility in the 
 country below. Every house was leveled, and 
 every tree cut down and burnt. And while 
 the better portion of the natives were thus 
 hewed down, those who submitted to French 
 rule were seduced into the vices of the invad- 
 ers, and intemperance and licentiousness pre- 
 vailed in their most loathsome forms. 
 
 In December, 1846, the patriot forces of 
 Tahiti, seeing no possibility of successful re- 
 sistance, surrendered to the French ; the queen 
 returned, and an attempt was made to resusci- 1 Hitl'aa* 
 tate the mission. In 1849 the new French 
 governor under the Republic arrived, and at 
 first he appeared friendly to the missionaries, 
 but afterwards he employed his authority and 
 influeni;e to prevent the natives repairing their 
 houses of worship, or making contributions 
 for the diffusion of the Gospel ; and from one 
 district, where there were two Catholic priests, 
 they were entirely excluded, lest there should 
 be controversy about religion ! But amid all 
 these troubles the Tahitiau churches received 
 nui^erous ac^^essions, and exhibited progressive 
 improvements in Christian character ; 109 
 members were added to the church at Papaoa, 
 in six months, and 134 at Papeete ; and the 
 queen has maintained her Christian character 
 throughout, in these most trying circum- 
 stances. 
 
 The missionaries continued to be subjected 
 to the harrassing interfei'cnce of the French 
 authorities, while an influence was exerted by 
 the latter upon the natives, exceedingly preju- 
 dicial to good morals and social order. At 
 length, in 1852, a law was enacted, removing 
 the choice of pastors from the members of the 
 churches to the principal chiefs. The mission- 
 aries of the London Missionary Society were 
 likewise denied the privilege allowed by others 
 of preaching the Gospel in their own houses. 
 The missionaries regarding this as a violation 
 of treaty stipulations with Great Britain, as 
 well as of every principle of religious liberty. 
 
 retired from tho island, leaving Mr. Howe in 
 charge of the mission property and of the 
 theological seminary at Papeete. A number 
 of native pastors, educated at this seminary, 
 had, however, previously been ordained, and 
 several of the superammatcd missionaries ro- 
 mained at different places, where the churches 
 had native pastors. 
 
 It will readily be perceived that the state of 
 confusion into which this group of islands has 
 been thrown by these outrages and oppressive 
 proceedings must have proved disastrous to the 
 missionary work. It has certainly been the 
 means of the dissolution of morals, the destruo- 
 tion of good order, and of strengthening every 
 evil influence. And yet the work of God has 
 not been destroyed. The following table will 
 show the state of the churches before the giv- 
 ing up of the mission : — 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Tahiti. 
 
 Papeete 
 
 Paiiaoa 
 
 Papeno 
 
 Point Venus 
 
 Biinnauia 
 
 Tiarci.... 
 Paponriri. 
 Tautira... 
 Puea 
 
 EWGO. 
 
 Papetoai . . 
 Afareaitu . 
 
 Totals. 
 
 is 
 
 
 370 
 
 The returns in regard to schools and attend- 
 ance on public worship are very incomplete. 
 The number of communicants is probably be- 
 low the fact, the churches having been much 
 scattered during tht^sc trials. At Bunaauia, 
 there was an extensive awakening in 1850, 
 which was much accelerated by Mr. Darling's 
 farewell sermon, on his deuarture for England, 
 and which resulted in the addition to the 
 church of about 80. An institution for rais- 
 ing up a native ministry has been maintained 
 for many years at Papeete, which promises to 
 supply native pastors for tliese churchc-i. Five 
 of them were called to the pastoral offurc in 
 1851, and 8 more were in the institution, 
 making good progress in tlieir studies. 
 
 Society is/aju/i-.—When the missionaries were 
 obliged to flee from Tahiti in 1808, they si)cnt 
 sometime atlluahine; and in 1814, Mcsssrs. 
 Nott and Ilay ward made a second visit, and 
 were welcomed, and their iiLstructi-— --<.—<? 
 to with serious attention. Aft. 
 Wilson and Pomare, while sailing : •, 
 
694 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 were driven to Huahine, where they spent 
 three nioutlis iu preaching the Gospel and per- 
 suading the natives to abandon their idols. In 
 June, 1818, Messrs. Davies, Williams, Ors- 
 mond and Ellis, accompanied by a number of 
 the priucinal chiefs of Eimeo, sailed from that 
 bland to lluahine for the purpose of establish- 
 ing a mission there. On lantling, the mission- 
 aries found that, with one or two exceptions, 
 the natives had renounced idolatry, and, in 
 
 frofession at least, had become Christians, 
 nfanticide, and some of the most degrading 
 vices had been discontinued. The people, 
 however, were not yet fully acquainted with 
 tlie nature of Christianity, and were only 
 partially under the influence of its moral re- 
 straints. The outward change which had 
 taken place was owing to the example and 
 eflbrts of Tamatoa, the king of Raiatea, and 
 certain other chiefs who had been with him 
 at Tahiti and Eimeo. Soon after his return, 
 Tamatoa publicly renounced his idols and de- 
 clared himself a believer in Jehovah and Je- 
 sus Christ. Several of the chiefs and a num- 
 ber of the people followed his example. Here, 
 however, as in Tahiti, the idolatrous chiefs and 
 inhabitants resorted to arms in defence of the 
 gods. Exasperated at the destruction of Oro, 
 their grcatnational idol,theydetermined to make 
 war upon the Christians and to put them all to 
 death. Having erected a house, and enclosed 
 it with the trunks of cocoanut and bread-fruit 
 trees, they resolved to thrust the Christians 
 into it, and burn them alive. Tamatoa sent 
 frequent overtures of peace, but the invariable 
 reply was, " There is no peace for god-burners, 
 until they have felt the effects of the fire which 
 destroyed Oro." The attack was made by the 
 idolaters in canoes, early iu the morning, while 
 the Christians . were at prayers. AVhile the 
 idolaters were landing, the Christians rushed 
 to the shore, and extended their little army as 
 far as it would reach. The boldness of this 
 movement filled the assailants with consterna- 
 tion. After a short resistance, they threw 
 away their arms and fled for their lives, ex- 
 pecting to meet with the same barbarous 
 treatment which they would have inflicted had 
 they been the conquerors. Perceiving, how- 
 ever, that those who had fallen into the hands 
 of the Christians sustained no injury, they 
 came forward and threw themselves on the 
 mercy of the victors. As the prisoners were 
 conducted into the presence of the chief, a 
 herald who stood by his side, shouted, " Wel- 
 come ! welcome ! you are saved by Jesus, and 
 the influence of the religion of mercy which 
 we have embraced !" When the chief who 
 had led the heathen party was taken, and con- 
 ducted, pale and trembling, into the presence 
 of Tamatoa, he exclaimed, " Am I dead ?" 
 His fears were, however, soon dissipated by 
 the reply, " No, brother ; cease to tremble ; 
 you are saved by Jesus !" The Christians 
 soon prepared a feast for them, consisting of a 
 
 hundred baked pigs, and a large quantity of 
 bread-fruit. J3ut so overcome were the prison- 
 ers by the kindness with which they were 
 treated, that but few of them were able to par- 
 take of the food. One of them rose from the 
 table, and declared his determination never 
 again to worship the gods who could not pro- 
 tect them in the hour of danger. " We were," 
 said he, " four times the number of the praying 
 people, yet they have conquered us with the 
 greatest ease. Jehovah is the true God. Had 
 we conquered them, they would at this moment 
 have been burning in the house we made strong 
 for the purpose. But instead of injuring us, 
 or our wives or children, they have prepared 
 for us this sumptuous feast. Theirs is a reli- 
 gion of mercy. I will go and unite myself to 
 this people." A similar feeling seemed to 
 pervade the whole company. That very night 
 they bowed their knees, and united with the 
 Christians in returning thanks to God for the. 
 victory he had given them. On the following 
 morning, the Christians and the heathen joined 
 their eflbrts to demolish the gods and maraes, 
 and three days after the battle every vestige 
 of idolatn^ was destroyed. 
 
 The inhabitants of Tahaa, Borabora, and 
 Huahine soon followed the example of the Ra- 
 iateans, demolishing their temples and burning 
 their gods. A number of the chiefs and peo- 
 ple of Borabora and Raiatea visited Maurua, 
 the most westerly of the Society Islands, and 
 succeeded in persuading the inhabitants to de- 
 stroy their temples and idols. The reign of 
 idolatry in this group was now at an end. In 
 one year the system of false worship, which 
 had so long prevailed, was abolished, and most 
 of the people adopted the external forms of 
 Christianity. 
 
 Soon after the arrival of the missionaries at 
 Huahine, Tamatoa, king of Raiatea, visited 
 them, in order to persuade some of them to 
 remove to these islands ; and Messrs. Williams 
 and Threlkeld accompanied him to Raiatea. 
 Immediately on the introduction of the 6^os- 
 pel, the natives began to lay aside their "idle 
 habits, and to cultivate the arts of civilized 
 life. They began the cultivation of cotton 
 and sugar-cane ; and in October, 1818, they 
 followed the example of the Tahitians in the 
 formation of a missionary society. The mis- 
 sionaries soon acquired a BufiBcient knowledge 
 of the language to preach to the natives, of 
 whom they had large and attentive congrega- 
 tions. A flourishing school was also sustained. 
 
 A carpenter's shop had been erected, the 
 forge was in daily operation, and a large place 
 of worship was building. The missionaries 
 had erected dwellings for themselves, the frame- 
 work of which was of wood, wattled, and plas- 
 tered with lime made of coral. " It was my 
 determination when I left England," says Mr. 
 Williams, " to have as respectable a dwelling 
 as I could erect, for the missionary does not go 
 to barbarize himself, but to civilize the hea- 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 695 
 
 then. He ought not therefore to sink down to 
 their standard, but to elevate them to his." 
 
 A house similar to that of Mr. AVillianis' 
 was soon after built for Tamatoa, which was 
 the first of the kind erected for their own 
 abode by any of the natives of the South Sea 
 Islands. A plastered house was soon after fin- 
 ished on the island of Huahine, in the district 
 of Fare. The success of the individuals who 
 had built houses encouraged others to follow 
 their example, and the settlements in the Lee- 
 ward Islands soon began to assume a new 
 aspect. The people of these islands were also 
 occupied in building chapels for the worship 
 of God. The edifice erected for this purpose 
 in Raiatca was more than one hundred feet 
 in length and forty-two feet in width. It 
 was completed and opened for divine service 
 early in the year 1820, when upwards of 2,400 
 inhabitants of that and the adjacent islands 
 assembled within its walls. By the ingenuity 
 of the missionaries, it was subsequently fur- 
 nished with a rustic set of chandeliers, the 
 frames of which were of light wood and opaque 
 cocoanut shells. The chapel in Huahine, 100 
 feet long and 60 wide, was also finished and 
 opened in May of this year. The walls were 
 plastered within and without, and the windows 
 closed with sliding shutters. All classes had 
 cheerfully united in the work, and the king of 
 the island, with his son, a youth of seventeen, 
 were daily employed in directing the laborers 
 or using the plane and chisel themselves. 
 
 The old chapel was converted into a school- 
 house, and two other buildings were afterwards 
 erected, one for the boys' school and the other 
 for the girls'. Schools were also established 
 in the other islands of the group, and the 
 improvement of the pupils became daily more 
 and more perceptible. The same eagerness to 
 obtain books was manifested here as in the 
 Windward Islands, and nothing could exceed 
 the delight with which the treasure was re- 
 ceived by those who were so fortunate as to 
 obtain one. And the same general improve- 
 ment was manifest in the people as has been 
 described at the Georgian Islands, in the adoi> 
 tiou of the dress and habits of civilization. 
 But in no respect was the change in the South 
 Sea Islanders more apparent than in their 
 manner of spending the Sabbath. It was cus- 
 tomary for those who resided at a distance to 
 repair to the settlement before the Sabbath. 
 On a Saturday afternoon, parties from every 
 direction were seen approaching the missionary j 
 station, either by sea or by land. The shore 
 was lined with canoes, and the encampment of 
 natives along the beach presented a scene of 
 bustling activity. Their food for the Sabbath 
 was all prepared on Saturday, and carefully 
 placed in baskets. Their calabashes were filled 
 with fresh water, their fruit was gathered, and 
 bundles of the broad hibiscus leaf were collect- 
 ed to serve instead of plates. The dwellings 
 of the natives appeared more than usually neat 
 
 and clean, and at an early hour the prepara- 
 tions for the Sabbath were completed. No 
 visits were made on the Sabbath, and no com- 
 pany entertained ; nor was any fire kindled 
 except in case of sickness. This strict observ- 
 ance of the Sabbath was never directly enjoin- 
 ed by the missionaries. It was no doubt partly 
 attributable to the example of their teachers, 
 but with many it was probably the result of 
 impressions left on their minds by their former 
 superstitious system. While they were hea- 
 then, their religion consisted in a great mea- 
 sure in the strict observance of sacred days, 
 and the pur.ctilious performance of ceremonies. 
 But some of them were actuated by conscien- 
 tious Christian motives. 
 
 The private devotions of the natives on the 
 Sabbath were finished by sunrise; and soon 
 after that time the greater part of the inhabit- 
 ants assembled for their weekly prayer-meeting. 
 Often 600 or 800 were present. The meeting 
 was generally conducted by a native, one per- 
 haps who had formerly been an idolatrous 
 priest. The singing of a hynm, and the read- 
 ing of a portion of Scripture, were followed by 
 prayers of the most appropriate and touching 
 character. At eight o'clock, the children as- 
 sembled in the Sabbath-school, where they 
 remained an hour. They were then conducted 
 to the chapel, each class walking in ])airs with 
 its teacher. A particular portion of the cha- 
 pel was assigned to the Sabbath-school schol- 
 ars, and here they all quietly seated themselves, 
 waiting for the commencement of public wor- 
 ship. In the afternoon they again assembled 
 in the schools to read the Scriptures, and to 
 repeat hymns and the catechism. They were 
 also questioned as to their recollection 'of the 
 morning sermon, and it was often surprising 
 to see the readiness with which they would 
 repeat not only the text, but the divisions, and 
 often the leading thoughts of the discourse. 
 At the close of the school the afternoon wor- 
 ship was held. A weekly lecture was also de- 
 livered, which was always well attended. A 
 sea captain, who was present at one of these 
 meetings, says, "The most perfect order reigned 
 the whole time of the service. The devout 
 attention which these poor people paid to what 
 was going forward, and the earnestness with 
 which they listened to their teacher, would 
 shame an English congregation." 
 
 A meeting was held every week for the in- 
 struction of those who wished to make a pnb- 
 lie profession of religion ; basides which there 
 were occasional meetings for convei>atiou. At 
 these the natives inquired the meaning of dif- 
 ferent passages of Scripture, and a>ked <»ll.er 
 questions on miscellaneous subjects. 
 
 The baptism of the first converts in the So- 
 ciety Islands took place in Huahine. in Sep- 
 tember, 1819. Mahine, the principal chief of 
 the island, was among the number. 'I'he name 
 of every individual was formerly dej«eriptivc of 
 some event or quality, and many of them were. 
 
696 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 signilicant of son^jibing blasphemous, idola- 
 trous, or impure. ^Thcse the niissionaries ad- 
 vised the people to renounce, and select those 
 by wliich iu future they wished to be called. 
 Script unil names were in general chosen by 
 the adults for themselves and their children. 
 After the first baptism, an address, on the na 
 turc of the ordinance and the duties of those 
 who received it, was printed and widely cir- 
 culated, apparently with good effect. The 
 weekly meeting for those who desired baptism 
 was continued, and, after the first administra- 
 tion of this rite, the number of those attending 
 it was greatly increased. Many, who had 
 previously been indifferent to religion, now 
 seemed in earnest to obtain it, and not only in 
 Huahine but in the other missionary stations, 
 a general desire to obtain the favor of God 
 seemed to prevail among the people. " Often," 
 says Mr. Ellis, " have we been aroused at break 
 of day, by persons coming to inquire what 
 they must do to be gaved." Many, who at that 
 time were awakened and professed conversion, 
 have ever since given evidence of being actu- 
 ated by Christian principle ; but some having 
 been baptized, were disposed to rest satisfied 
 without making greater attainments. It there- 
 fore became necessary for the missionaries to 
 lengthen the terra of probation, and in some 
 instances persons have been candidates more 
 than two years. 
 
 This first awakening in the Society Islands 
 occurred in the years 1819 and 1820. Early 
 in May, 1820, the first Christian church in this 
 group was organized at Huahine, and on the 
 following Sabbath 16 persons, who gave evi- 
 dence of a saving change, united for the first 
 time with the missionaries in the commemora- 
 tion of the death of Christ, in the presence of 
 several hundreds, who by their thoughtful and 
 serious countenances evinced how deeply they 
 were affected by it. The annual meeting of 
 the Missionary Society in Huahine was held 
 soon after the formation of the church. The 
 subscriptions amounted to between 3,000 and 
 4,000 gallons of oil, besides cotton and other 
 articles. In February of the following year, 
 four of the converts, who had long been con- 
 sistent Christians, were set apart to the office 
 of deacons, and proved valuable assistants to 
 the missionaries. So general had the interest 
 in religious things become, that wherever the 
 people were collected, religion was the topic 
 of conversation. The houses of the missiona- 
 ries were sometimes thronged at day-break by 
 those whose minds were distressed, and often, 
 after they had retired to rest, some would 
 ccrae to their doors and beg for instruction. 
 A great change had taken place in these once 
 degraded islanders. The aged and the sick, 
 who had formerly been treated with the great- 
 est neglect and cruelty, were now nursed with 
 care by their relatives and children. In some 
 of the islands, benevolent societies were formed 
 .among the natives, for the purpose of building 
 
 houses for the poor, and supplying with food 
 and clothing the sick who had no friends to 
 take care of them. Besides this, they were 
 visited by persons who read the Scriptures and 
 prayed with them, so that their last days were 
 cheered by the precious consolations of the 
 (Gospel. Parental restraint and discipline be- 
 gan also to receive attention. The mothers 
 endeavored to influence their children and gain 
 their affection by kindness. The fathers some- 
 times resorted to harsher measures. 
 
 But there were some young men who did 
 not relish the restraints which Christianity had 
 imposed upon them ; and they entered into a 
 conspiracy to murder the missionaries and 
 overturn the government. They w^ere, how- 
 ever, detected, and the chiefs held a meeting 
 and determined to put the ringleaders to 
 death. But the missionaries interceded for 
 their lives, and, after a whole day's discussion, 
 the chiefs yielded. In the course of conversa- 
 tion, the chiefs inquired what the English 
 people would do in such circumstances, and 
 were informed that in England there were es- 
 tablished laws, by which all offenders were 
 tried before judges appointed for the purpose. 
 They then wished to know what judges and 
 laws were, and when the subject was explained 
 to them, they said, " Why cannot we have the 
 same ? " A temporary judge was then ap- 
 pointed, by whom the criminals were tried, 
 and the ringleaders sentenced to four years 
 banishment on an uninhabited island. 
 
 A code of laws was soon after prepared by 
 the missionaries, and recognized by the chiefs 
 and people of Raiatea. It was publicly pro- 
 claimed in May, 1820. At a national assem- 
 bly, held in Huahine in May, 1821, a code of 
 laws similar to that adopted in llaiatea was 
 promulgated in that island also, under the 
 authority of the queen, the governor, and the 
 chiefs. These laws met with the approbation 
 of the people ; but there were a number of 
 dissolute young men, who did not relish the 
 restraints which these laws imposed on their 
 appetites and passions. The practice of tat- 
 tooing, on account of its connection with idol- 
 atry and with certain vices, had been prohib- 
 ited. It was discovered that 46 young men 
 had been marking themselves, not from any 
 desire to ornament their persons, but from im- 
 patience of the restraint of law. They were 
 publicly tried, and sentenced to build a certain 
 quantity of stone work, as a punishment. A 
 day or two afterwards, it was discovered that 
 Taaroarii, the king's son, a youth about eight- 
 teen years of age, had also been tattooed. 
 This was considered as evidence of a determi- 
 nation to oppose his father, and produced a 
 strong sensation among the people. The 
 father, a venerable old man, was deeply agi- 
 tated by a struggle between affection and 
 duty. The latter prevailed, and his son was 
 brought to trial. His punishment was the 
 same as that of the others. In the month of 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 697 
 
 August, he withdrew from the place of punish- 
 ment, with a number of the culprits, to Parea, 
 in the northern part of the island. There 
 they were joined by the son of the king of 
 Eaiatea, a young man twenty-six years of age, 
 and by a large party of associates. These 
 proceedings seemed to indicate that a formid- 
 able rebellion was about to break out. A 
 Eublic council of the chiefs and people was 
 _ eld, and, after several interesting and affect- 
 ing speeches, it was determined that kindness 
 should be mingled with decision. An armed 
 force was sent, with orders to reason with the 
 malcontents, and invite them to return to 
 their duty, and to resort to arms only in case 
 of resistance. The insurrection was quelled 
 without violence. The rebels surrendered and 
 were brought back as captives. Two days 
 after, they were tried and sentenced to public 
 labor, with police officers to guard them. On 
 the evening after the trial, the weekly service 
 was thronged by great numbers of the people, 
 and their attention was directed to the history 
 of Absalom's rebellion. The turbulence of these 
 disaffected young men having been repressed 
 without any bloodshed, the supremacy of the 
 laws was firmly and permanently established. 
 
 Slight insurrections, similar to that which 
 was excited in Huahine, occurred in Tahaa 
 and some of the other islands ; but, since the 
 introduction of Christianity, peace has pre- 
 vailed for a much longer period than was ever 
 before known. Their love for peace is ex- 
 
 Eressed in terms like the following : " Let our 
 ands forget how to lift the club or throw the 
 spear. Let our guns decay with rust, we do 
 not want them ; though we have been pierced 
 with balls or spears, if we pierce each other 
 now, let it be with the word of God.^ How 
 happy are we now ; we sleep not with our 
 cartridges under, our heads, our muskets bv 
 our sides, and our hearts palpitating with 
 alarm. AVe have the Bible, we know the 
 Saviour, and if all knew him, if all obeyed 
 him, there would be no more war." 
 
 In 1821, Taaroarii, the king's only son, died, 
 as he had lived, without the Christian hope, 
 much to the grief of his aged father. 
 
 During the year 1837, the most happy 
 effects were observable in the improved moral 
 state of the people at Huahine. Numbers 
 came forward and offered themselves as candi- 
 dates for baptism ; nearly all of whom were 
 from that class who had lived in the practice 
 of the most debasing vices. A considerable 
 addition was also made to the church, chiefly 
 from among the young. The schools were 
 better attended by adults and children than in 
 former years, and a desire for knowledge, par- 
 ticularly for religious knowledge, was much 
 increased among all classes. At Borabora, 
 also, a great interest in religious things was 
 manifested, and in 1838, more than 100 mem- 
 bers were admitted to church-fellowship. 
 
 In February, 1839, the mission at Huahine 
 
 sufitained a great loss in the death of Mahine, 
 the chief of that island. He was nearly 80 
 years of age, and, from the time when he be- 
 came a Christian, he had been a steady, active, 
 and consistent member of the chnrch. For 
 several years he had been a deacon, an<! '• • ' 
 discharged the duties of that office with 
 faithfulness. He showed a sincere and .-' 
 attachment to the missionaries, and on several 
 occasions hazarded his life in defence of the 
 truth which they preached. In the pro-^'.cct 
 of death, he was calm and composed. In i ; >! y 
 to one who asked him how he felt, ho Mid, 
 " Christ is my resting-place ; the fear of dr-.if h 
 is removed ; I have taken leave of all things 
 here, and am waiting and praying for the Lord 
 to take me." 
 
 Since that time, the mission to these islands 
 has been subject to various vicissitudes of de- 
 cline and advancement. Their proximity to 
 the Georgian group has subjected them to the 
 injurious influence of the excitement created 
 by the French outrages ; and they have not 
 been unmolested, the attempt hanng been un- 
 successfully made to subject them to the Pro- 
 tectorate. There has, however, on the whole, 
 been a steady advancement of the work. In 
 1851, all the stations were reported in a pros- 
 perous condition. But in 1852, owing to tlie 
 tyranny of the queen of Huahine, she was de- 
 posed, and the chief Teururai, a mild man, 
 and a member of the church, was chosen in 
 her place. A young man nanunl Otare, who 
 had been one of the principal agents in bring- 
 ing about this change, was appointe<l prime 
 minister, and several of his relations were ap- 
 pointed to offices of trust. These men sought 
 the repeal of the laws prohibiting licentious- 
 ness and the use of ardent spirits. This led to 
 a civil war, in which, however, Teururai was 
 victorious, and the laws sustaincKl. Yet, amid 
 this confusion, the church members generally 
 adorned their profession. Raiutea, also, the 
 same year, was afflicted with a civil war, aris- 
 ing out of a quarrel between the king and one 
 of his principal chiefs. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Huahine 
 
 llaiatea. 
 
 Tahaa 
 
 Borabora and Maupiti 
 
 Totals.. 
 
 
 100 
 
 I 
 
 240 
 
 4ao 
 
 676 
 
 Hervey Islands.— In 1821, two natives ^ 
 set apart with appropriate religious scmoa, 
 at the Society Islands, and scut to Aitutaki. 
 
698 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Mr. Williams accompanied them, who found 
 the natives exhibiting in their manners all the 
 features of savage life. Mr. Williams related 
 to the chief, to his astonishment, what had 
 transpired on the other islands, and the teach- 
 ei-s were kindly received, with promises of pro- 
 tection. For some time, however, they labored 
 in great discouragement, suffering much from 
 the j)ersecution of the natives. But, while the 
 old chief was engaged in an idolatrous feast of 
 several weeks' continuance, his daughter was 
 taken dangerously ill. Offerings were imme- 
 diately presented to the gods ; and to induce 
 them to restore the child to health, their favor 
 was invoked from morning till evening. The 
 disease, however, increased, and the girl died. 
 The old chief, incensed at the ingratitude of 
 the gods in requiting his zeal with such un- 
 kindness, determined at once to abandon them, 
 and the next day sent his son to set fire to his 
 marae. Two other maraes near it took fire 
 and were also consumed. On the Sabbath, 
 after the death of the chiefs daughter, the 
 people of several districts brought their idols 
 to the teachers, and professed themselves wor- 
 shipers of Jehovah. Others followed their 
 example, and at the close of the week there 
 was not a professed idolater on the island. 
 Fifteen months after the arrival of the teach- 
 ers at Aitutaki, a general meeting of the in- 
 habitants was convened at the request of 
 Papeiha. In an address to the assembly, he 
 spoke of the immense labor they had formerly 
 bestowed in the erection of their maraes and 
 in the worship of their gods, and exhorted 
 them to let their " strength, devotedness, and 
 steadfastness in the service of the true God far 
 exceed." He then proposed that all the maraes 
 in the island should be burned, and the idols 
 be brought to him that he might send them 
 to Raiatea, and also that they should immedi- 
 ately commence building a house for the wor- 
 ship of Jehovah. To both these proposals the 
 multitude assented. At the close of the meet- 
 ing, a general conflagration of the maraes took 
 place, and on the following morning not a sin- 
 gle temple remained The whole population 
 then came in procession, district after district, 
 the chief and the priest leading the way, and 
 the people following them, leaving their re- 
 jected idols, which they laid at the teachers' 
 feet, and received in return copies of the (los- 
 pels and elementary books. The missionaries 
 at Raiatea, hearing of the success of the native 
 teachers at Aitutaki, resolved to visit them, 
 and to attempt the introduction of the Gospel 
 into every island of that group. In July, 1823, 
 Messrs. Bourne and Williams, with six natives 
 who had been solemnly set apart as teachers, 
 sailed from Raiatea, and after a pleasant pas- 
 sage of five days, arrived at Aitutaki. A 
 number of canoes filled with men crowded 
 around the vessel, saluting the missionaries 
 with such expressions as these : " Good is the 
 Word of God ; it is now well with Aitutaki ! 
 
 The good word has taken root at Aitutaki." 
 The teachers soon came on board, and inform- 
 ed Mr. AVilliams of the destruction of the idols 
 and temples, and added that the Sabbath was 
 regarded as a sacred day, that all the people 
 attended divine service, and that family prayer 
 was very general throughout the island. 
 
 Soon after, Messrs. Williams and Bourne, 
 with two native teachers and several natives of 
 Rarotongo set sail for that island ; and after 
 six or eight days' fruitless search for it, they 
 landed at Maugaia ; where, after being receiv- 
 ed in a friendly manner, the native teachers 
 were stripped of every thing they had, and 
 obliged to reembark. A few months after- 
 wards, two other native teachers went to the 
 island, and found the people prepared to receive 
 them ; a fatal epidemic having broken out, 
 which they attributed to the anger of God for 
 their treatment of the teachers. Though meet- 
 ing with opposition for some time, the Gospel 
 was ultimately successful at this island. When 
 Mr. Williams left Maugaia, after his first visit 
 in 1823, he proceeded to Atiu, where two na- 
 tive teachers had been sent two or three 
 months before. He found them in a most 
 pitiable condition. They had been stripped 
 by the natives of all their property, had suffer- 
 ed exceedingly from hunger, and become very 
 much disheartened by their want of success. 
 The chief came on board, where he met a na- 
 tive convert, who astonished him by relating 
 what had taken place, in the burning of idols, 
 in Aitutaki ; and Mr. Williams commented 
 upon what is said by David and Isaiah in re- 
 ference to idols, by which the mind of Roma- 
 tane was powerfully impressed ; especially by 
 the words, " With part thereof he roasteth 
 roast and is satisfied ; and the residue thereof 
 he maketh a god, and worshipeth it, and 
 prayeth unto it, and saith, Deliver me, for thou 
 art my god." The effect of this striking pass- 
 age of Scripture on the mind of the heathen 
 chief, was powerfully expressed by the language 
 in which it was uttered. There are in that 
 language two words, similar in sound but ex- 
 pressing opposite ideas, moa and noa, the for- 
 mer meaning sacred, and the latter profane or 
 common. All that pertains to the gods is the 
 superlative of moa, and all that relates to food 
 the superlative of noa. The chief now saw, for 
 the first time, the folly of making a god and 
 cooking food from the same tree, thus uniting 
 two opposite extremes, the moa and the noa. 
 For some time he appeared lost in wonder. At 
 length he retired, and spent the whole of the 
 night in conversation with the Aitutakians 
 about the wonderful truths he had heard, fre- 
 quently rising up and stamping with astonish- 
 ment that he should have been so long deluded. 
 His idol gods he determined never again to wor- 
 ship. "Eyes, it is true," said he, " they have, but 
 wood cannot see ; ears, they have, but wood 
 cannot hear." He expressed a determination 
 to demolish his maraes, to burn his idols, and 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 699 
 
 to commence immediately the erection of a 
 house for the worship of Jehovah. Leaving 
 Atiu, Mr. AVilliaras sailed in search of the two 
 small islands Mitiaro and Mauke, taking with 
 hira the newly converted Romatane, who was 
 king of those islands also. On arriving at 
 Mitiaro, the king had an interview with the 
 resident chief of the island, to whom he stated 
 that the object of his visit was to exhort him 
 and his people to burn their maraes, and aban- 
 don the worship of their false gods. He wished 
 also that they would place themselves under 
 the instruction of a Christian teacher, and 
 convert the house they were erecting for him- 
 self into a house of prayer. The people listened 
 with astonishment, and inquired if the gods 
 would not all be enraged and strangle them. 
 " No," replied the king, " it is out of the pow- 
 er of the wood, that we have adorned and called 
 a god, to kill us." 
 
 Sailing from Mitiaro, Mr. "Williams proceed- 
 ed to Mauke, where he found the people wait- 
 ing on the shore to welcome their king. The 
 first words of Romatane were, " I am come to 
 advise you to receive the word of Jehovah, the 
 true God, and to leave with pua teacher and his 
 wife who will instruct you. Let us destroy our 
 maraes, and burn all the evil spirits with fire : 
 never let us worship them again. They are 
 wood, which we have carved and decorated, 
 and called gods. Here is the true God and 
 his word, and a teacher to instruct you. The 
 true God is Jehovah, and the true sacrifice is 
 Lis Son Jesus Christ." The people listened 
 with astonishment, but said that as the king 
 assured them it was a " good word " which he 
 brought, they would receive it. It was deter- 
 mined to leave here a native teacher with his 
 wife, to whom the king presented a new house 
 which had been erected for himself, and com- 
 mending them to the care of the chief, he re- 
 turned to the vessel and shortly afterwards de- 
 parted. These islands were afterwards visited, 
 and found to have wholly abandoned idolatry, 
 and to have adopted the habits of Christian 
 people. 
 
 The Gospel had now been introduced into 
 five of the Hervey Islands, but Rarotonga, the 
 largest island of the group, remained undiscov- 
 ered. Mr. Williams inquired of Romatane if 
 he had ever heard of it, and learning from this 
 chief the direction in which it lay, he determined 
 to go again in search of it. He sailed on this 
 vovage in 1823, and after having been so long 
 tossed about by contrary winds as to be on the 
 point of giving up all hope of accomplishing 
 his object, he was at last delighted with the 
 sight of the lofty mountains and beautiful val- 
 leys of this lovely island. A boat was soon sent 
 on shore with Papeiha, another teacher, and one 
 of the Rarotongans whom Mr. AVilliams had 
 found at Aitutaki. Meeting with a favorable 
 reception, they immediately stated to the peo- 
 ple who gathered around them in great num- 
 bers, the object of their visit. Having in- 
 
 formed them of the renunciation of idolatrv at 
 the other islands of that group, the teaeficrs 
 proposed to the natives that they also should 
 receive Christian instruction, and become ac- 
 quainted with the way of salvation through 
 Jesus Christ. The proposition was agreed to, 
 and ;Makea the king came on board to conduct 
 the teachers to the shore. He was intro<hiced 
 to his own people who had come with Mr. 
 Williams, among whom was his cousin. Early 
 the next morning the teachers and their wives 
 canne off to the vessel in a most pitiable con- 
 dition, and related the sad treatment which 
 they, and especially the females, had received 
 during the night. A powerful chief who had 
 conquered the principal part of the island had 
 heard of their arrival, and had come with a 
 large retinue to take away one of the female 
 teachers, for the purpose of making her his 
 wife. He had already nineteen wives, and the 
 teacher was to be the twentieth. 
 
 Tapaireu, the cousin of Makea, was a per- 
 son of much influence, and to her exertions 
 the preservation of the females was owing. 
 Discouraged by the roughness of their rcce^>- 
 tion, the teachers would have abandoned this 
 field of labor had not Papeiha, when the chiefs 
 expressed a desire that they should stay, offered 
 to remain alone on the island on condition that 
 his friend Tiberio should be sent from Raiatea 
 to his assistance. This was readily promisetl, 
 and Papeiha, after taking leave of his friends, 
 got into a canoe and went on shore carrying 
 nothing with him but the clothes he wore, his 
 native Testament, and a bundle of elementary 
 books. 
 
 Papeiha was conducted to the house of Ma- 
 kea, and was followed by an immense crowd, 
 one of whom cried out, " I'll have his hat ; " 
 another, " I'll have his jacket ; " a third, " I'll 
 have his shirt." Before they were able to 
 carry their threats into execution, they were 
 met by the chief, who, addressing Papeiha, 
 said, " Speak to us, man ! that we may 
 know the business on which you have come." 
 The teacher replied that he had come to in- 
 struct them in the knowledge of the true God, 
 and the way of salvation through Jesus Christ, 
 that they might burn their idols as the inhal>- 
 itants of Tahiti and other islands had done. 
 The multitude cried out with surprise and kor- 
 iror, "What! burn the gods! Wh'nt gotls 
 I shall we then have, and what shall we do with- 
 ' out the gods ? " 
 
 After five months, Tiberio, Rapeiha's friend, 
 arrived, and they visited together all the c'-< f- 
 on the island, explaining to them the ]' 
 pies of Christianity. Carrying this phn: 
 effect, at some places they were kindly tr> 
 at others ridiculed, while from some tin ;. 
 rowly escaped with their lives. A few 
 after their return to the station, a pnest ■ , 
 to the teachers and expressed a del 
 to burn his idols, and requested i- 
 place his son, a boy of ten years of ..._^ . «....-.. 
 
700 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 their care, lest the gods in their anger should 
 destroy hira. Leaving the child with the 
 teachorn, he returned homo, and next morning 
 came bending under the weight of the god he 
 vraa bringing to be burned. A crowd follow- 
 ed, calling him a madman, but he persisted in 
 his resolution to embrace Christianity, and 
 threw hi3 idol at the teachers' feet. One of 
 the teachers brought a saw to cut it up, but 
 03 soon as the people saw the instrument ap- 
 plieil to the head of the god, they became 
 frightened and ran away. In a short time 
 they returned, and in the presence of an im- 
 mense multitude the first rejected idol of Ra- 
 rotonga was committed to the flames. So 
 great an eflcct was produced on the minds of 
 the jwople by this event, that in less than ten 
 days after it occurred 14 idols were destroyed. 
 Immediately afterwards the chief Tinomana 
 sent for the teachers, and informed them that 
 after much deliberation he had concluded to 
 embrace Christianity, and to place himself 
 under their instruction. He therefore wished 
 to know what was the first step towards be- 
 coming a Christian. Being told that he must 
 desitroy his maraes and burn his idols, he in- 
 stantly replied, " Come with me and see them 
 destroyed." The temple was immediately set on 
 fire, and was soon consumed, together with the 
 sacred pieces of wood with which it was deco- 
 rated. The idols were then brought and laid 
 at the feet of the teacher, who, having dis- 
 robed them, threw them into the fire. Some of 
 the people were much enraged with the chief, 
 and called him a fool and a madman for burn- 
 ing his gods. The women became frantic with 
 gi'ief, and made loud and doleful lamentations. 
 But notwithstanding this excitement, an im- 
 pression was made in favor of the new religion, 
 and in the course of a few days all the idols 
 in the district were brought to the teachers for 
 their disposal. From this time the destruction 
 of the gods and maraes went on rapidly through- 
 out the island. Among the last of the chiefs 
 to renounce his idols was the king. Though 
 many still adhered to their superstitious, 
 the supremacy of idolatry was now at an end. 
 Through the influence of the teachers, a chapel 
 600 feet in length was built for the worship of 
 the true God, in the erection of which the peo- 
 ple were all anxious to assist. When the first 
 Eost was laid, Tinomana was requested by the 
 ing to implore the blessing of God ; and in 
 order that all might see and hear, the chief 
 climbed up into a tree and oficred an appro- 
 priate prayer. While this chapel was build- 
 ing, Rarotonga was visited by Messrs. Tycr- 
 man and Bennet, who found that the whole 
 
 {)opulation had renounced idolatry. One year 
 ater Mr. Bourne preached to large congrega- 
 tions in Rarotonga, and baptized many con- 
 verts. Of the progress of the Gospel in this 
 island he observes, " Much has been said con- 
 cerning the success of the Gospel in Tahiti and 
 the Society Islands, but it is not to be compar- 
 
 ed with its progress in Rarotonga. In Tahiti, 
 European missionaries labored for 15 long 
 years before the least fruit appeared. But two 
 years ago Rarotonga was hardly known to exist, 
 was not marked in any of the charts, and wo 
 spent much time in traversing the ocean in 
 search of it. Two years ago the Rarotongana 
 did not know there was such good news as the 
 Gospel. And now I scruple not to say that 
 their attention to the means of grace, their 
 regard to family and private prayer, equals 
 whatever has been witnessed at Tahiti and the 
 neighboring islands. And when we look at 
 the means, it becomes more astonishing. Two 
 native teachers, not particularly distinguished 
 among their own countrymen for intelligence, 
 have been the instruments of effecting this 
 wonderful change, and that before a single 
 missionary had set his foot upon the island." 
 
 The heathen party at Rarotonga, though 
 comparatively small, was sufficiently numerous 
 to annoy the Christians, and at last the per- 
 sonal injuries inflicted on the converts to the 
 new religion led to a conflict between the two 
 parties. In this battle the Christians con- 
 quered. Having led their captives to the sea- 
 side, the victorious chiefs, instead of putting 
 them to death, ordered them not to be injured, 
 and advised them to embrace Christianity, in 
 order that peace and happiness might be estab- 
 lished. The prisoners replied that they were 
 now convinced of the superior power of Jeho- 
 vah and of the merciful character of the Chris- 
 tians, and that they would therefore unite 
 with them in the worship of the true God. 
 On the following day they demolished all their 
 maraes and brought their idols to the teachers. 
 
 The island was soon after visited by Mr. 
 Williams and Mr. and Mrs. Pitman. A cha- 
 pel was built, well plastered, capable of con- 
 taining nearly 3,000 people, without a single 
 nail or any iron work. The people were at- 
 tentive to instruction. Their anxiety to under- 
 stand the truths of the Gospel, and their punc- 
 tual attendance on public worship, were very 
 encouraging. Previous to the commencement 
 of public worship on the Sabbath, the people 
 met in classes of 10 or 12 families, and a par- 
 ticular portion of the sermon was assigned to 
 each person, which he was to bring away. 
 One said, " Mine shall be the text, and all that 
 is said in immediate connection with it;]' an- 
 other, " I will take care of the first division ;" 
 and a third, " I will bring home the particu- 
 lars under that head." After public worship 
 the classes met again, and after singing and 
 prayer, one among them began the examina- 
 tion by inquiring, " With whom is the text T' 
 and proposed a variety of questions respecting 
 its meaning. He then proceeded to other parts 
 of the discourse, till the whole sermon had 
 passed in review, and to such habits of atten- 
 tion were the people trained, that a sentiment 
 of importance was rarely omitted. A code of 
 laws was established, and the difficult subject 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 701 
 
 of polygamy was disposed of, by requiring the 
 converts, from the king down, to select one 
 of their wives, and then be united in marriage 
 to her in public. Wc think the Gospel rule 
 would explicitly require that the first wife 
 should be retained, and all the others discarded. 
 
 The last visit which Mr. Williams made to 
 Earotonga was in 1834. The contrast be- 
 tween the appearance of the inhabitants at 
 this time and on his first visit is thus stated : 
 ** When I found them in 1823, they were igno- 
 rant of the nature of Christian worship ; and 
 when I left them in 1834, 1 am not aware that 
 there was a house in the island where family 
 prayer was not observed every morning and 
 every evening." 
 
 During the year 1838, several native con- 
 Terts were removed by death. Their last days 
 were full of hope and joy, and afforded to sur- 
 viving friends abundant consolation in the be- 
 lief that the exchange was their eternal gain. 
 In this year also great additions were made 
 to the churches at Earotonga. The spirit of 
 inquiry seemed to be general, and the lives of 
 very many testified that they had become sin- 
 cere Christians. 
 
 One of the missionaries, in a letter from 
 Earotonga dated January 14, 1840, stated that 
 a meeting was regularly held in the chapel at 
 Arorangi, to give opportunity for persons to 
 express their feelings and to exhort one an- 
 other to diligence and love in the work of the 
 Lord. At one of these meetings an old man 
 who was a candidate for church fellowship, 
 said that he had lived during the reign of four 
 kings. " During the first we were continually 
 at war. During the second we were overtaken 
 with a severe famine, and all expected to per- 
 ish. During the third we were conquered, and 
 became the prey of two other settlements. 
 But during the reign of this third king we 
 were visited by another King— a good King 
 —a powerful King— a King of love— Jesus 
 the Lord from heaven. He has gained the 
 victory ; he has conquered our hearts ; we are 
 all his subjects ; therefore we now have peace 
 and plenty in this world, and hope soon to 
 dwell with him in heaven." 
 
 In 1841, the directors record with satisfac- 
 tion the progress of their missions in these 
 islands. In Earotonga, the largest of the 
 group, they say the Christian churches present- 
 ed a most impressive and animating abject, 
 both as to numbers and character ; and the 
 social and moral character of the population, 
 a few years previous loathsome and terrific, 
 was then pure and peaceful. One of the most 
 consistent members of the church, and an ac- 
 tive evangelist, was, in the days of his youth, 
 a cannibal. An institution was commenced 
 about this time at Avarua, for the training of 
 native missionaries, in which young men are 
 instructed in Christian theology and other 
 branches of useful knowledge. ^ . , , 
 
 In 1843, the directors say that in the islands 
 
 forming the Hervey Group, the people gener- 
 ally evince a sincere attachment to the Gos- 
 pel. " The entire aspect of society is changed 
 from the savage to the civilized ; and misery, 
 strife, and bloodshed have given place to the 
 comforts and amenities of social life, l^lnea- 
 tion is generally sought for, and the membcT3 
 of the church adorn their profession ; and the 
 entire Bible is now translated into the Earo- 
 tonga dialect," 
 
 Since that time the work has been advanc- 
 ing with a steady progress from year to year. 
 In 18.51, there was a general awakening at 
 three of the stations, affecting about 300 per- 
 sons, most of whom gave evidence of a saving 
 change. 
 
 Since 1846, the institution for training na- 
 tive evangelists and teachers at Avarna, has 
 sent forth 15 men and 9 women to occupy dif 
 ferent spheres of missionary labor. 
 
 On the 24th of Au^st, the churches on the 
 island of Earotonga held a meeting at Nga- 
 tangaia, where 700 communicants united in 
 the celebration of the Lord's Supper, and 
 among them were the captain and part of the 
 crew of the missionary ship, the John Wil- 
 liams. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW, 
 
 1853. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
 6^ 
 
 « 
 
 !!■ 
 
 ^.2 
 
 1 
 
 (2 
 
 1 
 
 Rarotonoa, 
 
 Ngatangaia, 
 
 Avarua, >-3 stations. . 
 
 3 
 
 24 
 
 700 
 
 206 
 
 8 
 
 800 
 
 Arorangai,.., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Aitutaki* 
 
 1 
 
 '^0 
 
 461 
 
 ■32 
 
 's 
 
 850 
 
 Mauiraia 
 
 Totals 
 
 6 
 
 94 
 
 1281 
 
 238 
 
 6 
 
 1660 
 
 • 1851. 
 
 Samoan or Navigators' Is/awrfs.—These^ is- 
 lands were visited by a French vessel, in 17S7, 
 when several of the party were treacherously 
 murdered ; and this act created such an im- 
 pression of their treachery and ferocity, that 
 for many years they seem not to have been 
 visited by any vessel from any part of the ci- 
 vilized world. 
 
 The idea of introducing the Gospel mt- • 
 group appears to have originated witl 
 Williams, who, in 1824, formetl the 1 . 
 making a voyage to the Jsavigntors' 1! 
 But the great distance of this grcnii (n 1: ly 
 2,000 miles) from Eaiatca, the ftTonous cha- 
 racter of its inhabitants, and in the i yont of 
 his death the desolate condition of hi> Mitt' 
 and children at so great a distnnco from 1 !i r 
 home and friends, naturally r- 
 liams unwillin-' that her bus) 
 on such an undertaking. At u^yi^i... ;;••"*» 
 she gave her " full concurrence,' and Mr. » il- 
 
702 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Hams began to tlcvi^i' the means for carrying 
 his plan into execution. Having no vessel 
 suitable for such a voyage, he attempted to 
 build one, and with the assistance of the na- 
 tives completed it in about three months. In 
 tlie prosecution of this work, the ingenuity 
 and skill of Mr. W. was put to the test. 
 
 It was indispensable to its accomplishment 
 that he should have a pair of smith's bellows, 
 as well as certain tools for working in iron, 
 which were not to be found in Rarotonga. 
 Having killed, for the sake of their skins, 3 of 
 the 4 goats on the island, he constructed, with 
 much difficulty, a tolerable bellows. But 
 when the rats had left nothing more of his 
 new apparatus than the naked boards, all 
 hope of accomplishing his object in the ordi- 
 nary way was removed. Unwilling, however, 
 to relinquish his purpose, he persevered in his 
 eflforts, and at last hit upon a novel expedient 
 to " raise the wind." It occurred to him that 
 as w^ater is thrown by a pump, air might be 
 projected on the same principle. With two 
 boxes eighteen inches square and four feet 
 high, fitted with valves and levers, and worked 
 by 8 or 10 natives, he contrived to procure 
 such a succession of blasts as answered all his 
 purposes in the building of his vessel. A stone 
 was substituted for an anvil, and a pair of car- 
 penter's pincers for tongs. With very little 
 iron, without a saw, without oakum, or cord- 
 age, or sail cloth, he succeeded in launching a 
 vessel sixty feet in length and eighteen in 
 breadth, of seventy or eighty tons burthen. 
 It was named "The Messenger of Peace." 
 The trees were split with w^edges, and for 
 adzes the natives used small hatchets. The 
 bark of the hibiscus was twisted into ropes, 
 and native mats quilted for sails, and the rud- 
 der was constructed of " a piece of a pickaxe, 
 a cooper's adze, and a large hoe." 
 
 ^ In the vessel so constructed, Messrs. Wil- 
 liams and Barflf, with 7 native teachers, sailed 
 from Raiatea for the Navigators' Islands, on 
 the 24th of May, 1830. They proceeded first 
 to Tongataboo, where they found Fauea, a 
 chief of one of the Navigators' Islands, who 
 stated that he was related to the most influen- 
 tial families there ; that he had been eleven 
 years absent from his home, and that he was 
 now desirous of returning. Having heard 
 that the Messenger of Peace was on a voyage 
 to these islands, and that the object of the 
 missionaries was to convey the Gospel to his 
 countrymen, he offered, if they would take him 
 with them, to use all his influence with his re- 
 latives and the chiefs to induce them to receive 
 the teachers kindly, and attend to their instruc- 
 tions. After spending a fortnight at Tonga- 
 taboo, the missionaries and the chief, Fauea, 
 sailed for the Navigators' Islands. They had 
 not been long at sea, when Fauea came and 
 seated himself by the side of Mr. Williams, 
 and said that he had been thinking of the 
 
 great work which the missionaries had under- 
 
 taken, and though he had no doubt that t'lO 
 chiefs and people would gladly receive them, ho 
 feared opposition from a person called Tamalai n- 
 ga,in whom the spirit of the gods dwelt, and who 
 was a terror to all the inhabitants. He ('ei- 
 ther added, that if he forbade it, the people 
 would be afraid to place themselves uiuln- 
 Christian instruction. After a protracted voy- 
 age, the beautiful island of Savaii was <l(s- 
 cried in the distance. As soon as the vessel 
 reached the shore a number of natives came 
 off in their canoes, and welcomed Fauea to 
 his native land. After some conversation the 
 chief inquired " Where is Tamafainga ? " 
 " Oh ! " replfed the people, " he is dead, lie is 
 dead ! he was killed 10 or 12 days ago." Al- 
 most frantic with joy at this information, 
 Fauea leaped about the deck, shouting, " The 
 devil is dead ! the devil is dead I our work is 
 done ; the devil is dead ! " 
 
 On the first Sabbath after their arrival, 
 canoes came off to the vessel, bringing articles 
 for barter. Fauea informed the people that 
 the ship was e vaa lotu, or a praying ship, and 
 that as it was le asosa, a sacred day, they could 
 not trade with them until the morrow. This 
 information surprised them, but Fauea col- 
 lecting a circle around him on the deck of the 
 ship, stated the object of the missionaries in 
 coming among them, informed them that a 
 number of islands had embraced Christianity, 
 and specified some of the advantages which 
 the inhabitants were deriving from this new 
 religion. " Can the religion of these foreigners 
 be any thing but wise and good ?" said thei 
 chief to his countrymen. " Let us look at themj 
 and then at ourselves ; their heads are covered, 
 while ours are exposed to the heat of the sun 
 and the wet of the rain. Their bodies are 
 clothed all over with beautiful cloth, while we 
 have nothing but a bandage of leaves around 
 our waists ; they have clothes upon their very 
 feet, while ours are like the dog's. Look at 
 their axes, their scissors, and their other prop- 
 erty, how rich they are !" This address was 
 listened to with great interest by the natives, 
 who crowded around the speaker, and with 
 outstretched necks and gaping mouths care- 
 fully caught the words as they fell from his 
 lips. 
 
 While Fauea was thus employed on board 
 the vessel, his wife,' who had gone on shore 
 with the teachers and their wives, was equally 
 diligent in describing to the natives the won- 
 ders she had seen, and the value of the religion 
 which was now brought to their island. When 
 food was offered, she stood up and asked a 
 blessing in the presence of the assembled mul- 
 titude. Malietoa, the king, though engaged 
 in a war, to avenge the death of Tamafainga, 
 received them kindly, and declared that it was 
 the happiest day of his life. 
 
 In October, 1832, Mr. Williams sailed from 
 Rarotonga on a second visit to the Samoas. 
 The first island that appeared in sight was 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 703 
 
 Manua, the most easterly of the group. As; 
 the vessel approached the shore, a number of 
 canoes put off and advanced towards it. In ! 
 one of them a native stood up, and shouted, ! 
 " "We are sons of the Word, we are sons of j 
 the Word ; we are waiting for a falau lotu, a 
 religious ship, to bring us some people whom 
 they call missionaries, to tell us about Jesus 
 Christ." One of the chiefs came on board, 
 and finding that the vessel was a " religious 
 ship," appeared highly delighted, and asked for 
 a missionary. On being informed that there 
 ■was but one, and that he was intended for 
 Manono, he manifested great regret, and beg- 1 
 ged to be supplied as soon as possible. 
 
 The vessel next touched at Tutuila, where it 
 was immediately surrounded by a number of 
 canoes, filled with savage men, anxious to ob- 
 tain powder and muskets. The missionaries 
 did not land here, but passed along the coast 
 to a district called Leone, where a person 
 came on board, and introduced himself as a 
 " son of the Word." He informed Mr. Wil- 
 liams that about fifty persons in his district 
 had embraced Christianity and erected a place 
 worship, and that they were waiting his arri- 
 val. The heathen party arranged themselves 
 along the beach, and presented rather a form- 
 idable appearance. Mr. Williams supposing 
 his life might be in danger, desired the natives 
 to cease rowing and unite with him in prayer. 
 The chief who stood in the centre of the as- 
 sembled multitude perceiving that the mission- 
 aries were afraid to land, directed the people 
 to sit down, and wading into the water, ad- 
 dressed Mr. W. with " Son, will you not come 
 on shore? will you not land amongst us?" 
 Mr. W. replied that he had heard that the 
 inhabitants of that bay were exceedingly sav- 
 age, and that he did not know that he should 
 trust himself among them. " Oh !" replied the 
 chief, " we are not savages now, we are Chris- 
 tians." " Where did you hear of Christianity ?" 
 asked Mr. W. " Oh I" he exclaimed, " a great 
 chief from the white man's country, named 
 Williams, came to Savaii about twenty moons 
 ago, and placed there some tamafai-lotu (work- 
 ers of religion,) and several of our people who 
 were there, began on their return to mstruct 
 their friends, many of whom have become sons 
 of the Word." Then pointing to a group of 
 persons sitting apart from the rest, each of 
 •whom had a piece of white native cloth tied 
 round his arm, he added, " These are the Chris- 
 tians, and they are distinguished from their 
 heathen countrymen by the cloth which you 
 see upon their arms." Mr. Williams then in- 
 formed him that he himself was the " great 
 chief" he had spoken of, and that he had car- 
 ried the " workers of religion" to Savaii about 
 twenty moons before. On hearing this, the 
 chief made a signal to the multitude, who in- 
 stantly sprang from their seats, rushed to the 
 sea, seized the boat and carried both it and Mr. 
 W. to the shore. Amoamo, the chief, conducted 
 
 Mr. W. to the Christians, by one of whom he 
 was informed that a chapel had been built, 
 and that service was performed every Sabbath 
 day. " And who," asked Mr. Williams, " con- 
 ducts the worship ?" " I do," said he, " I take 
 my canoe, go down to the teachers, get some 
 religion, w-hich I bring carefully home, and 
 give to the people ; and when tliat is gone, I 
 take my canoe again and fetch some more. 
 And now you are come, for whom we have 
 been so long waiting ! Where's our teacher ? 
 give me a man full of religion, that I may not 
 expose my life to danger by going so long a 
 distance to fetch it." On hearing that he 
 could not be supplied with a teacher, he was 
 affected almost to tears, and would scarcely 
 believe it, for he imaginetl that the vessel was 
 full of them. Mr. AV. inquired of the chief if 
 he had become a worshiper of Jehovah. He 
 replied that he had not, but added, " If you 
 will give me a worker of religion to teach me, 
 I will become a believer immediately." It 
 w'as with sincere regret that Mr. Williams left 
 this little band without a missionary to teach 
 them, and returned to the ship to prosecute 
 his voyage. He found there a party of natives 
 from an adjoining district who were waiting 
 to present a request that he would pay them a 
 visit. The chief assured Mr. Williams that he 
 and nearly all his people were Christians, and 
 that they had erected a spacious place of wor- 
 ship in imitation of the one at Savaii, and that 
 he was daily engaged in teaching his people 
 what he had himself been taught. Seeing that 
 Mr.AV. was inclined to doubt his statements, 
 he placed his hands before him in the form of 
 a book, and recited a chapter out of the Tahi- 
 tian primer, after which he said, " I^et us 
 pray," and kneeling down upon the deck, he 
 repeated the Lord's prayer in the Tahitian 
 language. The next day Mr. W. reached 
 Upolu, when natives from various parts of the 
 island approached the vessel, saying that they 
 were " sons of the Word,", and that they were 
 waiting for a " religion ship " to bring them 
 missionaries. 
 
 When Mr. Williams reached Manono, the 
 chief, Matetau, whom he had seen on his first 
 visit to this island, came off to the ship and 
 inq^ljpd with great earnestness, " Where's my 
 mis^nary?" Te-ava and his wife, the native 
 teachers who had been set apart for this sta- 
 tion, were then introduced to him. He seized 
 them with delight, and exclaimed, " Good, very 
 good, I am happy now I" After a hasty visit 
 to this island, Mr. Williams proceeded to S» 
 vaii, where he was received by the teachers 
 and people with many expressions of joy. They 
 informed him that Mahetoa, his brother, the 
 principal chiefs, and nearly all the inhabitants 
 of the settlement, had embraced Chriiitiamtv, 
 and that the body of the people wore only 
 awaiting his arrival to follow their example. 
 The next day he addrcsseti about 700 persons 
 in the chapel. He was followed by one of tho 
 
704 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 native teachers, who was succee<leJ by Malie- 
 toa, who ileclared that it was his inteiitiou to 
 " give his whole soul to the word of Jehovah, 
 and to employ his utmost eudeavoi-s that it 
 might speedily encircle the land in which he 
 dwelt." 
 
 During his stay at Savaii, Mr. Williams 
 learned from the teachers many interesting 
 
 Sarticulars respecting the introduction of the 
 lospel into the island, and especially its recep- 
 tion by Malietoa and his family. A short 
 time previous to the day fixed upon for the 
 opening of the new chapel, the king called to- 
 gether his family, and stated that he was about 
 to fulfil his promise and become a worshiper 
 of Jehovah. His sons replied that if it was 
 good for him it was also good for them, and 
 that they also would receive the Gospel. But 
 to this he objected, saying tliat the gods would 
 be enraged with him for abandoning them, and 
 endeavor to destroy him, " and perhaps," added 
 he, " Jehovah may not have power to protect 
 me against the effects of their anger. I will 
 therefore try the experiment of becoming his 
 worshiper, and if he can protect me you may 
 with safety follow my example ; but if not, I 
 only shall fall a victim to their vengeance — 
 you will be safe." The young men unwillingly 
 consented to wait a month or six weeks ; but 
 the third week their patience became exhaust- 
 ed, and going to their father they stated that 
 he had tried the experiment long enough, and 
 as no evil had befallen him, they would imme- 
 diately follow his example. Not only his sons, 
 but all his relatives, and nearly all his people, 
 abandoned their heathen worship. In connec- 
 tion with this renunciation of their old reli- 
 gion, a singular ceremony was observed. Eve- 
 ry chief of note at the Samoa Islands had his 
 etu, in which the spirit of the gods was sup- 
 posed to reside. This etu was some species of 
 bird, fish, or reptile, and if any one of that 
 class was cooked and eaten, the etu was con- 
 sidered so entirely desecrated that it could 
 never again be regarded as an object of reli- 
 gious veneration. The etu of Malietoa's sons 
 was a fish called anae. On the day appointed, 
 a large party of friends and relatives were in- 
 vited to partake of the feast. A nuinj^r of 
 anae were dressed, and a portion laid Wfore 
 each individual, who with feai* and trembling 
 ate of the sacred food. The superstitious fears 
 of the young men were so much excited lest 
 they should be punished with death for their 
 presumption, that on returning from the feast 
 they drank a large dose of cocoanut oil and 
 salt water, to prevent the effects which they 
 feared might follow. The people who were 
 spectators of this feast, expected that those 
 who partook of it would fall down dead sud- 
 denly, but seeing no harm happen to them they 
 changed their minds, and said that Jehovah 
 was the true God. The result of this experi- 
 ment produced a decided change in favor of 
 Christianity, and induced many of the people 
 
 to place themselves under the instruction of 
 the teachers. 
 
 Having completed the object of his voyage, 
 and visited all the islands of the Samoa group, 
 Mr. W. returned to his family with feeliflgs of 
 gratitude and joy. In less than twenty months 
 an entire change had taken place in the habits 
 and character of the Samoans. Chapels had 
 been built in all the islands, and every where 
 the people seemed waiting to receive instruc- 
 tion. The desire of the chiefs and people of 
 this group to receive English missionaries, was 
 communicated by Mr. Williams to the Direc- 
 tors of the Missionary Society, and in Novem- 
 ber, 1835, six missionaries, five of whom were 
 accompanied by their wives, sailed from Lon- 
 don for the Navigators' Islands. 
 
 The last accounts from this group of islands 
 is of the most interesting and encouraging 
 character. Mr. Heath estimates that there 
 are now on the island of Upolu 20,000 persons 
 who have embraced Christianity. On Manono 
 all the inhabitants, consisting of about 2,000, 
 are professedly Christians. At Savaii- thera 
 are from 12,000 to 13,000 converts. On Tu- 
 tuila there are 6,000, and several hundreds on 
 the smaller islands. AYhat a contrast with 
 the condition of the natives in 1830, when the 
 heralds of salvation first visited their shores I 
 " Then, their beautiful country was ' burned 
 with fire ;' rapine, murder, cannibalism, crimes 
 and horrors at which the heart sickens, gene- 
 rally prevailed ; now, with wonder and grati- 
 tude the messengers of mercy exclaim, ' Behold 
 how good and pleasant a thing it is for breth- 
 ren to dwell together in unity.' And this 
 change, as great as it is blessed, has been 
 effected within the short space of ten years. 
 Truly may we exclaim, ' What hath God 
 wrought. 1' " 
 
 In"l843, there were some painful defec- 
 tions among the members of the churches at 
 Savaii and Palauli ; and this was followed _bv 
 a disturbance between two villages, which 
 threatened to embroil the whole group in a; 
 general war. In November, 1843, the party 
 at Sapapalii declared open war against the 
 inhabitants of Palauli. The missionary and 
 members of the church at the former place 
 used every means in their power to turn the 
 war party from their evil course, without effect. 
 When the attack was made, the people of Pa- 
 lauli, unwilling to shed blood, fled to the dis^ 
 trict beyond, while the invaders wasted the 
 plantations, cut down the bread-fruit and 
 cocoanut trees, killed and devoured the do- 
 mestic animals, and burnt or removed every 
 house in the district, except the chapel and 
 the houses of the missionaries. On the return 
 of the party, they began to persecute the mem- 
 bers of the church, and threatened to burn 
 their houses and drive them from their lands. 
 But, out of 430 members, there was a defec- 
 tion, during these trying times, of but about 
 35. This war continued to distract the coun- 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 705 
 
 try and disturb the operations of the mission- 
 aries, for several years ; producing the most 
 disastrous results, desolating many fertile dis- 
 tricts. And yet, God overruled it for good, 
 as it led many of those opposed to the war to 
 seek an asylum at the station, and thus in- 
 creased the attendance upon the word. Mr. 
 McDonald wrote, in 1849, that there were 
 nearly 400 candidates for admission to the 
 church. This war was not brought to a close 
 till April, 1851, when a battle was fought, 
 which resulted in the complete triumph of the 
 injured party ; but such was the influence of 
 Christianity upon the victors, that not a single 
 act of retributive vengeance was perpetrated 
 upon the vanquished, though their provocations 
 were very aggravated. The missionaries say 
 that the means they have used to restore peace 
 and harmony have commended themselves to 
 all, and convinced them that they were their 
 friends. Yet, the war had produced a very 
 demoralizing effect, and led to the revival of 
 heathen customs. 
 
 The Samoan Seminary at Malua, forms one 
 of the most interesting features of the mission. 
 In the course of seven years from its com- 
 mencement, this institution had under its in- 
 struction 53 teachers, 34 women, wives of 
 teachers, and 50 boys ; many of whom are now 
 employed in the missionary work. And, to a 
 considerable extent, it has been a self-sup- 
 porting institution. In 1852, there were in the 
 institution 4 Erromangans, 4 natives of Sav- 
 age Island, 4 from Fate, 1 from New Caledo- 
 nia, 1 from Clarence Island, 18 Samoan youths, 
 and 36 teachers, with their wives and children, 
 making 146 in all. 
 
 The Papists have made a descent upon these 
 islands, but as yet have been unable to obtain 
 a footing. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW, 1853. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Savah : 
 Lafaasaleleaga 
 
 Matautu 
 
 Sapapalii 
 
 Salulua 
 
 Upolu : . . . . 
 
 Apia 
 
 Fasitootai. . . 
 
 Malua 
 
 Ulemoega . . . 
 Taluafata . . . 
 
 Talealili 
 
 Lepa (1848) . 
 
 Manoko:. 
 
 TUTUILA :. 
 Pago-Pago 
 Leone 
 
 ^}r 
 
 Manxja:. 
 Totals . 
 
 22 
 
 34 
 
 120 
 
 2141 
 
 10 
 
 Several stations, where charcbes existed be- 
 fore the war, are not mentioned in the latest 
 reports, and probably have been broken up ; 
 ^nd some of the stations noticed above have a 
 number of out^tations. Near Lcpa, for in- 
 stance, there are 40 villages, with a population 
 of 15,000. It is impracticable, from the im- 
 perfect returns, to ascertain the number of 
 native teachers, or to distinguish between 
 teachers and preachers. The number is un- 
 doubtedly much larger than apj>ears in the 
 table. So also in regard to the schools, many 
 of the stations only reporting the number of 
 scholars, not of schools. 
 
 Austral Islands. — In 1821, a fatal epidemic 
 prevailed at Rurutu, and Aiiura, a young chief, 
 with some of his companions, fled from the 
 island, and remained for some time at Tubuai, 
 about 100 miles distant. On their return 
 they were drifted about for 3 weeks, and after 
 the loss of some of their crew, they landed at 
 Maurua, the most westerly of the Society Is- 
 lands. Here they were shown the demolished 
 temples, prostrate altars, and broken idols, 
 and informed that the inhabitants of these 
 islands had become worshipers of Jehovah, 
 the one living and true God. They immedi- 
 ately determined to proceed to Borabora, to 
 see the missionaries, and from this place they 
 went to Raiatea. They were filled with won- 
 der at what they saw. 
 
 On the Sabbath they were conducted to the 
 chapel, and beheld with astonishment the as- 
 sembled multitude. The songs of praise in 
 which the people joined, and the sermon from 
 one of the missionaries, excited the deepest in- 
 terest in their minds. They were at once con- 
 vinced of the superioritv of the Christian re- 
 ligion, and desired to be instnicted in the 
 knowledge of the true God. They became 
 pupils in the school, and soon learned to read 
 and spell correctly. Auura was exceedingly 
 diligent in learning, and made very rapid pro- 
 gress. In a little more than three months he 
 was able to read and write well, and had com- 
 mitted to memory the greater part of the cate- 
 chism. Having publicly renounced their 
 idols and professed themselves worshipers of 
 Jehovah, the strangers became anxious to re- 
 turn to their own island, that they might carry 
 to their countrymen the knowledge of the true 
 God and of his Son Jesus Christ. An oppor- 
 tunity occurring for them to go in a vessel 
 bound for England, Auura and his friends, 
 were delightcnJ with the prosjwct of returning 
 to their country, but they ob^ectetl to going to 
 their "land of darkness without a light ia 
 their hand." Hastening to the missionaries, 
 the chief earnestly requested them to send in- 
 structcrs to his native land. On assembling 
 the people and inquiring who among them. 
 would go, two of the native deacons, Mahar 
 mene and Puna, came forward and said, " ller» 
 are we ; send us." Every member of tha 
 church at Raiutea brought something as a 
 
 45 
 
ro9 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 testimony of hia affection, which they present- 
 ed to tlie tcftchers. The mi.«siouarics Bupplied 
 them with elementary books and a few copies 
 of the Gospel in the Tahitian language, from 
 which their own does not essentially dificr. 
 Thus equipped, the Raiatcan Christians em- 
 barked on the 6th of July, 1821, with Auura 
 and his friends, and on the third day after 
 their departure arrived at Rurutu, where 
 Auura was welcomed by the remnant of his 
 countrymen. The tidings of his return soon 
 bpread through the island, and the whole popu- 
 lation came to offer their congratulations. On 
 the night of his arrival, Auura conveyed his 
 own idol on board the ship in which he had 
 returned, and on the following day convened a 
 meeting of his countrymen. The little band 
 of Christians entered the assembly, and Auura 
 demanding attention, informed them of the 
 incidents of his voyage, and the islands he had 
 visited, and of the 'knowledge he had obtained 
 respecting the true God, the destiny of man, 
 and the means of happiness in a future state. 
 He declared that the god whom they worship- 
 ed was the foundation of all deceit, that their 
 idols were mere images, and their priests im- 
 postors. He therefore proposed to his country- 
 men to follow his example by renouncing their 
 false religion, and adopting that which would 
 lead to immortality. The priests opposed this 
 startling proposition, but the king and chiefs 
 replied, " We will receive the word of life ; 
 we will burn the evil spirits ; let every thing 
 made by our hands as an object of worship be 
 totally charred in the fire." An aged man, 
 who had listened to Auura with deep interest, 
 arose and said, " Behold you say, Auura, 
 that we have souls ; till now, we never knew 
 that man possessed a soul." The chief then 
 introduced the two missionaries from Raiatea; 
 stated their object in coming to Rurutu, and 
 recommended them to the kind attentions of 
 the people. The missionaries then briefly ad- 
 dressed the meeting, and concluded by recom- 
 mending to the chiefs to provide an entertain- 
 ment the next day of a number of kinds of 
 food which were considered as sacred, and of 
 which it was thought a female could not par- 
 take without instant death. The feast was 
 accordingly prepared, and Auura, his wife and 
 friends, with the Raiatean Christians, unitedly 
 partook of the sacred food. The chiefs and 
 people stood around, expecting to see those 
 who had thus openly violated the law of the 
 gods, either fall into convulsions or expire in 
 agony. But when they saw that no harm be- 
 fel them, they simultaneously exclaimed, " The 
 priests have deceived us," and hastening to 
 their temples, they hurled the idols from the 
 places they had so long occupied, burnt to the 
 ground their sacred buildings, and then pro- 
 ceeded to the demolition of every marae in 
 the island. 
 
 In October, 1822, the island was visited by 
 Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet, who found the 
 
 results of a little more than one year's exertion 
 surprising. Many had learned to read, and 
 some to write. The teachers had erected neat 
 plastered dwellings for themselves, and under 
 their direction the people had built a chapel 
 eighty feet long and thirty-six feet wide. The 
 railing around the table, in front of the pulpit 
 and by the side of the stairs, was composed of 
 the handles of warriors' spears. " I'he people 
 here," says a missionary, " learn war no more, 
 but all submitting to the Prince of Peace, 
 have cast away their instruments of cruelty 
 with their idols." 
 
 In 1823, Rurutu was visited by Mr. Wil- 
 liams. He found that the industry and im- 
 provement of the people had been progressive. 
 " Many of the chiefs were dressed in European 
 clothing, and all were attired in the most de- 
 cent and becoming manner. In the house of 
 God, no congregation could have behaved 
 with more propriety. Not a vestige of idola- 
 try was to be seen, not a god was to be found 
 in the island." 
 
 In 1825, the Falcon, a large American ship, 
 commanded by Captain Chase, was wrecked at 
 Rurutu. The chief officer and crew remained 
 some time on the island, and the captain on 
 his departure left the following testimony with 
 the native teachers : " The natives gave us all 
 the assistance in their power, from the time 
 the ship struck to the present moment. The 
 first day, while landing the things from the 
 ship, they were put into the hands of the na- 
 tives, and not a single article of clothing was 
 taken from any man belonging to the ship, 
 though they had it in their power to have 
 plundered us of every thing. Since I have 
 lived on shore, myself, officers, and people 
 have received the kindest treatment from the 
 natives, for which I shall ever be thankful." 
 
 Captain Chase afterwards rewarded the na- 
 tives for their assistance, by giving them a 
 portion of the oil. They immediately formed 
 a native missionary society, and contributed a 
 considerable part of the oil in aid of ^e funds 
 of the Parent Society. It was afterwards sold 
 for £66, and the proceeds sent to the Society 
 in London. 
 
 In 1829, this island was again visited by Mr. 
 Williams, who found that the people, although 
 their teachers had left them, continued to ob- 
 serve all their religious services, and that Auura 
 officiated as minister. During the previous 
 year, they had contributed to the Missionary 
 Society 750 bamboos of cocoanut-oil. They 
 earnestly requested that another teacher might 
 be sent them, saying that " one-handed people 
 were very good, but that two-handed people 
 were much better." 
 
 On the return of Auura to his native island, 
 he found there a number of the inhabitants of 
 Rimatara. These followed the example of the 
 Rurutuans in destroying their idols and receiv- 
 ing Christian instruction. They shortly after- 
 ward sailed for their own island, and induced 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 707 
 
 many of tlieir countrymen to abandon their 
 idols and embrace Christianity. 
 
 In June, 1822, two native Christians were 
 sent from Borabora, to instruct the inhabitants 
 of Rimatara in reading, writing, and the first 
 elements of religion. These teachers labored 
 with so much diligence and success that, when 
 the island was visited by Mr. Williams in Oc- 
 tober, 1828, the inhabitants had renounced 
 their idols, and were living in harmony with 
 their teachers. A chapel had been erected 
 for the worship of the true God, which was 
 opened during Mr. Williams's visit. The fe- 
 males were neatly dressed in white native cloth, 
 with bonnets which the teachers' wives had 
 taught them to make. The entire population 
 were receiving instruction, and the school for 
 children contained one hundred and thirty 
 cholars. In 1825, Rimatara was visited by 
 Mr. Bourne, who was delighted with the ap- 
 pearance of the station, and in 1819, Pomare, 
 king of Tahiti, left a man on the island of 
 Raivavai, who, though ignorant and immoral 
 himself, undertook to teach the people ; and in 
 
 1821, when visited by Capt. Henry, they had 
 made such improvement of this poor instruc- 
 tion that the renunciation of idolatry had be- 
 come general throughout the land; and he 
 says of them, " The very quiet, devout, and 
 orderly manner in which they conducted them- 
 selves, not only in church but during the Sab- 
 bath, excited my highest admiration. They 
 sent a request for suitable teachers, and in 
 
 1822, three native missionaries were sent from 
 Eimeo. In 1826, a Christian church was 
 formed among this people, and sixteen persons, 
 after examination, were admitted to its privi- 
 
 The inhabitants of the neighboring island of 
 Tubuai, hearing that the people of Rurutu and 
 other islands had renounced their idols and 
 embraced Christianity, sent a deputation to 
 Tahiti, requesting teachers and books. Two 
 native teachers, with a supply of useful arti- 
 cles, embarked, in June, 1822, for the island of 
 Tubuai, accompanied by Mr. Nott. On arriv- 
 ing at Tubuai, they found the whole population 
 engaged in war and on the eve of a battle. 
 They went immediately to the king, acquainted 
 him with the design of their visit, and re- 
 quested that hostilities might be suspended. 
 The king expressed a willingness to accede to 
 their proposal, provided the consent of the op- 
 posing party could be obtained. A chief 
 having been despatched with a message of 
 peace, his proposal was receipted, and the next 
 morning, the two parties met, and peace was 
 concluded. The chiefs then embraced each 
 other, and the warriors, perceiving the recon- 
 ciliation of their leaders, dropped their imple- 
 ments of war, and rushing into each other s 
 arms, presented a scene of joy, far different 
 "rom the conflict in which they expected to be 
 engaged. The next day, the inhabitants of 
 Tubuai were invited to attend public worship. 
 
 when Mr. Nott delivered the first Christian dis- 
 course to which they had ever listened. In 
 1826, when this island was visited by Mr. Da- 
 vies, the profession of Christianity had become 
 general throughout the island, and the chiefs 
 and people were assisting the teachers in erecting 
 comfortable dwellings, and a substantial house 
 for public worship. 
 
 In the year 1825, Rapa was visited by a 
 vessel from Tahiti, which on its return earned 
 two of the inhabitants to that island, who were 
 astonished and delighted at the strange objects 
 presented to their notice. Having attended 
 the schools and places of public worship, and 
 learned the alphabet, they soon after returned 
 to their own island, accompanied by two Tahi- 
 tians, to whom the inhabitants became so much 
 attached, that they were invited by the chiefe 
 and people to reside among them permanently. 
 In January, 1826, two Tahitian teachers with 
 their wives, accompanied by a schoolmaster 
 and a mechanic, sailed from Tahiti for Rapa. 
 They carried with them not only spelling-books 
 and copies of the Tahitian translation of the 
 Scriptures, but also a variety of useful tools, 
 seeds, and plants, together with timber for a 
 chapel. Mr. Davies, one of the senior mission- 
 aries at Tahiti, accompanied the teachers to 
 their new station. The chiefs received them 
 with every mark of respect, and promised them 
 protection and aid. On the first Sabbath after 
 their arrival, Mr. Davies preached in the Tahi- 
 tian language to a number of the natives, who 
 seemed impressed with the services. This 
 island was visited in 1829 by two missionaries, 
 who found that four chapels, in which religious 
 instruction was statedly given, had been erected 
 at different stations. The people manifested 
 an increasing interest in religious things, and 
 their improvement exceeded the expectations 
 of their visiters. 
 
 TABULAR VIKW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Raiyavai 
 
 Tubuai 
 
 Rurulu 
 
 Rimatara 
 
 ToUla 
 
 Church 
 Members. 
 
 Additions re- 
 ported the 
 last jc*r. 
 
 40 
 36 
 36 
 
 47 
 
 11 
 
 19 
 7 
 
 159 
 
 37 
 
 The work has continued to be carried on by 
 native agency alone, except the occasional vis- 
 its of missionaries ; and, owing to their remote 
 situation, it is seldom that anv intelligence 
 is received from ihc mission. Mr. Rodgeijon 
 visited Raivavai and l\ibuai in 1838, and Mr. 
 Orsmond, Rurutu and Rimatara, in 1839; 
 when they observed many signs of improve- 
 ment. In May and June, 1846, they were 
 again visited by Mr. Barff; of Iluahme^o 
 was greatly encouraged by what he witnessed. 
 
m 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Peace aud purity prevailed among the native 
 believers ; and the native agents were faithful 
 and zt>alous in their work, and their labors ap- 
 peared to have been crowned witli the divine 
 olcssing. The population of these islands is 
 email, probably not exceeding 1,000. 
 
 Paumotu or Pearl Islands. — In the early part 
 of the reign of Pomare II., king of Tahiti, 
 many of the inhabitants of the Paumotu or 
 Pearl Islands fled to the Georgian Islands for 
 security during a war. They were protected 
 and hospitably entertained by Pomare, and 
 when the 'I'ahitians renounced idolatry, they 
 also cast away the idols they had brought with 
 them, and placed themselves under the instruc- 
 tion of the missionaries. In 1827, they re- 
 turned to their own islands, and immediately 
 after their arrival, Moorea, one of the number, 
 who had learned to read and had been hope- 
 fully converted, began to instruct his country- 
 men. He met with such success, that with 
 the exception of the inhabitants of one district, 
 the whole population agreed to renounce 
 heathenism. Moorea was subsequently charged 
 with having deceived his countrymen, in the 
 accounts he had given of the change at Tahiti, 
 and, to save his life, was obliged to leave the 
 island. But when the people afterwards be- 
 came convinced that they had accused him 
 falsely, they burnt their idols and demolished 
 their temples. Several hundreds of them soon 
 after sailed to Tahiti, a distance of three hun- 
 dred miles, for the purpose of obtaining books 
 and receiving instruction, and, before they left 
 the island, several of them were admitted to 
 Christian fellowship. Early in the year 1822, 
 Moorea and Teraa, another Christian native, 
 were publicly set apart as teachers, and soon 
 after sailed for Anaa, or Chain Island. 
 Shortly afterwards, a canoe from this island 
 arrived at Tahiti, bringing the pleasing intelli- 
 gence that the inhabitants were willing to re- 
 ceive Christianity ; that war, cannibalism, and 
 idolatry had ceased, and that a place of wor- 
 ship was building in every district. Two 
 other native teachers were afterwards sent to 
 these islands. 
 
 Mr. Orsmond visited Chain Island in 1839 ; 
 where he addressed congregations of 300 or 
 400, and formed a church of 43 members. 
 
 Marquesas Islands. — In 1797, Captain Wil- 
 son, after landing the missionaries at Tahiti 
 and Tongataboo, sailed for the Marquesas. 
 At Santa Christina he left Mr. Crook, who, 
 after residing on the island about a year, be- 
 came discouraged and returned to Tahiti. In 
 1825, Mr. Crook returned to Santa Christina 
 with two native teachers from Huahine, and 
 one from Tahiti. Ho found that some of the 
 inhabitants had destroyed their idols, but the 
 greater part were exceedingly rude, vicious, 
 and disorderly in their behavior, and strongly 
 attached to their superstitions. After remain- 
 ing about a month among them, Mr. Crook 
 left the native teachers under the protection of 
 
 a friendly chief. Their prospects of usefulness 
 were at lirst encouraging, but the wickedness 
 of the people was 80 great, and their conduct 
 so violent and alarming, that the Tahitians 
 (whom they threatened to kill and devour) 
 were obliged to return. They were succeeded 
 by others in 1826, who were obliged to leave 
 in 1828. In the following year, Messrs. Prit- 
 chard and Sampson visited the islands, but so 
 turbulent and repulsive was the conduct of the 
 natives, that they deemed the establishment of 
 a mission impracticable. In 1831, Mr. Dar- 
 ling, one of JLhe missionaries stationed at Ta- 
 hiti, visited the Marquesas, and in consequence 
 of his report, the Directors of the Missionary 
 Society, in 1833, sent two missionaries, Messrs. 
 Rodgerson and Stallworthy, to commence a 
 mission in those islands. Having been joined 
 at Tahiti by Mr. Darling and four Tahitians, 
 they were kindly received at Santa Christina 
 by lotete, the king, who promised to protect 
 them, and gave them half of his own house 
 for their residence. 
 
 These missionaries labored for a number of 
 years, in great discouragement, and at the peril 
 of their lives. In 1838, Mr. Rodgerson, com- 
 ing to the conclusion that he could not remain 
 there with his family, removed to Raiatea ; 
 Mr. Stallworthy continuing his labors alone. 
 In August, 1838, two Roman Catholic mis- 
 sionaries from the Popish College at Valpa- 
 raiso were brought to the island by the French 
 frigate La Venus. Mr. Stallworthy made 
 strong objections to their settling at any sta- 
 tion where missionaries had been placed by the 
 London Missionary Society, but without effect. 
 The chief having received several presents from 
 the captain of the frigate, cordially received 
 the priests, and gave them a piece of land for 
 a garden. He, however, evinced an unshaken 
 attachment to the missionary who resided on 
 the island, but the people showed the same 
 indifference to the Gospel which they had al- 
 ways done. Early in the following year seven 
 more Romish missionaries arrived at Santa 
 Christina, and established themselves in va- 
 rious parts of the island. The imposing cere- 
 monies connected with their worship, their in- 
 sinuating manners, and their skill in operating 
 on the self-interested motives of the people 
 have not been without effect. 
 
 This mission was continued, in the face of 
 great discouragement, and without any visible 
 fruit, till 1841, when the missionaries, Messrs. 
 stallworthy and Thompson, abandoned the 
 field, and removed to Tahiti. The group has 
 since been seized by the French ; but the 
 Romish missionaries have been no more suc- 
 cessful than the Protestants. Native teachers 
 have recently been sent from the Sandwich 
 Islands. (See Sandwich Islands.) 
 
 New Hebrides. — 31r. Williams's last Voyage 
 and Death. — After seventeen years of unremit- 
 ted toil, the illness of both Mr. and Mrs. Wil-' 
 liams obliged them, in 1833, to leave the- 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Y09 
 
 Islands. In June of the following year, they 
 arrived in England. His own health and that 
 of Mrs. Williams having been recruited by the 
 voyage, and by a residence of four years in 
 England, Mr. W. became anxious to return to 
 the scene of his former labors. The plan pro- 
 posed by him was to undertake an exploring 
 voyage among tha groups situated between 
 the Navigators' Islands and New Guinea, and 
 to place on them native teachers. For the 
 prosecution of this object, it was deemed advi- 
 sable to purchase a ship which should be ex- 
 clusively devoted to missionary purposes. And 
 for this purpose an appeal was made to Chris- 
 tians in England, which was speedily responded 
 to in a very generous manner. The interest 
 which Mr. Williams' narrative excited through- 
 out England, seconded by his personal repre- 
 sentations, was so great that he found easy ac- 
 cess to the hearts and the charities of those 
 whom he addressed. 
 
 A sum more than sufficient for the purchase 
 of a ship was soon raised, and the Directors of 
 the Missionary Society purchased the Camden, 
 a vessel of two hundred tons burthen. Every 
 arrangement for the safety of the vessel and the 
 comfort of the passengers was made as soon 
 as possible, and on the 4th of April, 1838, 
 a meeting was held in London, at which Mr. 
 and Mrs. Williams and ten other missionaries, 
 one of whom was -Mr. John Williams, Jun., 
 received their parting instructions. The meet- 
 ing was one of intense interest. On the 11th 
 of April, 1838, these missionaries embarked, 
 being escorted to the vessel by an immense 
 crowd of the friends of missions, who followed 
 them with their prayers. . 
 
 After visiting the Navigators', Georgian, 
 and Society Islands, Mr. Williams, in conform- 
 ity with his original plan, proceeded to visit 
 the New Hebrides. He was accompanied by 
 Captain Morgan, Mr. Cunningham, vice-consul 
 for the South Sea Islands, and Mr. Harris, 
 who was intending to go as a missionary to 
 the Marquesas. 
 
 On the 19th of November, 1839, this apos- 
 tle of the Pacific unfurled the banner of peace 
 on the island of Tanna, one of the New Heb- 
 rides group, where the barbarous people show- 
 ed him no little kindness, and received the 
 Christian teachers from Samoa gladly. In the 
 evening, having recorded his gratitude to God, 
 who had done such great things for them, he 
 assembled with his beloved companions for the 
 solemn exercise, which Captain Morgan so 
 appropriately styles their " family prayer," and 
 Mr. Harris, in the orderly course of their 
 Scripture reading, read the 15th chapter of the 
 first Epistle to the Corinthians— the sublime 
 record of the believer's triumph over death ! 
 
 The next day thev proceeded to Erromanga, 
 another island of the same group. The natives 
 appeared quite different from those of the other 
 islands, being more rude and barbarous in their 
 behavior. They were at first averse to holding 
 
 any intercourse with the strangers, but having 
 received presents of fish-hooks and beads, they 
 brought the missionaries some cocoanuts. They 
 were still, however, exceedingly shy. Think- 
 ing that they had gained the confidence of the 
 natives, they all went on shore. While Capt. 
 Morgan stopped to see the boat safely anchor- 
 ed, the missionaries walked up tli'e beach. 
 The captain soon followed them, but had not 
 gone far before the boat's crew called tf) him 
 to come back. He looked round and saw Mr. 
 Williams and Mr. Cunningham running to- 
 wards the sea, the former closely pursued by a 
 native. Captain Morgan immediately return- 
 ed to the boat, from which he saw a native 
 strike Mr. Williams, who had just reached the 
 water. The beach was stony and steep, and 
 in consequence of the blow, Mr. Williaiy • ' ■" 
 backward to the ground. Other nativi 
 came up, one of whom struck him with :i 
 and another pierced his body with sevt-ral 
 arrows. Mr. Harris was also overtaken and 
 shared the same fate. Captain Morgan made 
 several attempts to obtain the bodies, but nei- 
 ther of them could be procure<l. The natives 
 seeing the boat approaching the shore for this 
 purpose, attacked the persons remaining in it, 
 and left one of their arrows sticking in its side. 
 
 The news of this sad event reached England 
 a few days before the annual meeting of the 
 Missionary Society. The particulars respect- 
 ing it were communicated to the asscnil)ly, 
 and resolutions passed by the Society expres:?- 
 ing the deepest sympathy with the bereaved 
 families of their lamented missionaries. A 
 subscription was soon after commenced in aid 
 of Mrs. Williams and her children, and a hand- 
 some sum was raised and appropriated to their 
 use. 
 
 On the 1st of February, 1840, the British 
 ship Favorite sailed from Svdney to search for 
 the remains of Messrs. Williams and Harris. 
 The expedition was accompanied by Mr. Cun- 
 ningham, and a Samoan chief to act as inter- 
 preter. At Erromanga they had an interview 
 with the natives, and by means of presents 
 and threats obtained from them part of the 
 bones of the two missionaries. The vessel 
 then sailed for the Samoivs, where the recover- 
 ed bones were interred, amid the respect fuLro 
 grets of the officers of the Favorite, and the 
 tears of their brethren, and of hundre<ls of Sa- 
 moans, who remembered Mr. Williams as the 
 first herald of salvation to their shore?. 
 
 After the death of Mr. Williams, Mr. Heath 
 of the Samoa mission was re<[ueste<l by Ins 
 
 brethren to make an exploring v<\' •■' ''"' 
 
 Camden. He visited the New II. 1 
 
 left native teachers at four of the i 
 of which was Erromanga, the very ialaml uq 
 which the missionaries were nmrdorH. 
 
 One object which Mr. Will" " i view 
 
 in his last voyage to the S" ';inds, 
 
 was the establishment of a coli. -v i -i iiie ed- 
 ucation of native teachers. The mi-ssionaries 
 
no 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 at the diflR?rent stations entered fully into his 
 plans respecting it, and one was immediately 
 commenced at Rarotonga, which soon num- 
 bered eleven students. A large piece of ground 
 on which to erect the building, was purchased 
 of tlio king, and there is every reason to hope 
 that the institution will posper. 
 
 Mciisrs. Turner and Nisbet, having been ap- 
 pointed to this mission, arrived at Tanna on 
 the 30th of June, 1842, and having assembled 
 the principal chiefs, and made known their ob- 
 ject, were kindly received, with assurances of 
 protection ; and on the following Sabbath 
 they held the firet religious ^rvice, and preached 
 to over 200 people. They soon found, how- 
 ever, that the character of the people was de- 
 praved and cruel in the extreme, and that they 
 were distracted with internal division and 
 strife. The natives with whom they were im- 
 mediately located, manifested some attach- 
 ment to them ; but by all others they were re- 
 garded with distrust and hatred. More than 
 once their destruction was secretly attempted. 
 At length the chiefs in the interior, under pre- 
 text that a fatal disease which prevailed, was 
 to be attributed to their arts, demanded their 
 expulsion from the island. This was resisted 
 by their few adherents, and led to a savage 
 war, which compelled the missionaries to quit 
 the island in their small open boat. They 
 were driven back, where death in its most 
 horrid form seemed inevitable. But a merci- 
 ful Providence prepared them an ark. Just 
 as they were entering the harbor, an American 
 vessel appeared ofi Tauna, in which they em- 
 barked for the Navigators' Islands. 
 
 In the Isle of Pines, where native teachers 
 were stationed in 1840, the result was still 
 more tragical. In 1842, the crew of the brig 
 Star, being treated with apparent friendship, 
 went on shore to cut timber, when they were 
 treacherously murdered and devoured by the 
 natives. After which the Samoan teachers, 
 after assisting to tow the vessel ashore, were 
 murdered at the command of the chief. This 
 was done, however, not from opposition to the 
 teachers or to what they taught, but as an act 
 of revenge for the outrages previously commit- 
 ted among them by European and American 
 traders. This is believed also to have been 
 the cause of the death of the lamented Wil- 
 liams. The visits of these trading vessels 
 have been marked by robbery and murder. 
 The natives, on one occasion, having offered 
 some resistance to these outrages, they were 
 attacked with deadly weapons, many of them 
 slain, and others, having taken refuge in a 
 cave, were suffocated by fire at its mouth. The 
 immediate cause of the death of these native 
 teachers is supposed to have been that some 
 traders presented them with forged letters from 
 missionaries, directing them to assist in pro- 
 moting the objects of the traders, thereby ex- 
 citing the jealousy of the people against them. 
 
 In 1845, the' mission at the New Hebrides 
 
 was renewed. Messrs. Murray and Turner luibi- 
 ed at Tainia with 15 native teachers, where tin y 
 were most cordially welcomed and kindly tnnt 
 ed by the inhabitants. I'hey left four mw 
 teachei-s at this island, and two native evuiiL;^- 
 lists at Nina; aftor which they proceeded to 
 Erromanga ; but, from the appearance of tin; 
 natives, they came to the conclusion that tlic 
 island was still closed against the Gospel, and 
 did not land. They next proceeded to Sand- 
 wich Island, a beautiful island about 50 niili; 
 from Erromanga, teeming with a population 
 of noble aspect and gentle manners, wli< lu 
 they introduoed four native evangelists, wlm 
 were received with hearty good will by chii i: 
 and people. They also left teachers at two of 
 the New Caledonia group ; but at the lai',u<; 
 island of New Caledonia they found things in 
 such a state from the influence of Matuku, 
 chief of the Isle of Pines, that they thouiilit 
 proper to withdraw the native teachers Vvlio 
 were there before. 
 
 The last intelligence from the Western Poly- 
 nesian Islands was obtained by a visit of Kc'w 
 Messrs. Murray and Sunderland, of the ►'-^m.- 
 moa mission, in 1852. They took with tlicia 
 five native teachers, with their wives, from tlic 
 Ilervey Islands, two unmarried teachers IVoik 
 Samoa, four natives of Savage Island, lour 
 Erromangaus, and four P'atese, who having 
 been for years under Christian instruction at 
 Samoa, were now returning to carry the Gos- 
 pel to their native isles. In nearly all tlio 
 islands they found an extraordinary change in 
 the sentiments and habits of the people had 
 taken place since the previous voyage of tlic 
 John Williams ; and large numbers had re- 
 nounced idolatry and put themselves und( r 
 Christian instruction. Commodious places 
 worship and dwellings for teachers had 1h 
 erected, congregations and schools gather' 
 and a few were hopeful candidates for chur. 
 fellowship. 
 
 Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia. — 
 Aneiteum is an island of the New Hebrid - 
 group, situated, according to Captain Coo':. 
 in lat. 20O 3' S., and long. 170° 4' E. It L 
 about 30 or 35 miles in circumference, u 
 contains a population of 3,000 souls. Its i 
 terior appearance is pleasing and rather ii:: 
 posing, rising to the height of 2,000 feet abo, . 
 the level of the sea, and presenting an inter- 
 esting variety of mountain and valley, large 
 tracts of low land in some parts of the coast, 
 and a bold shore in others ; high land and 
 deep ravines running to a great distance 
 inland ; well wooded and watered, having 
 streams of considerable size, and valuable tim- 
 ber, available for almost any purpose. The 
 soil is not remarkably rich in general, though 
 in some parts it appears very fertile. The na-J 
 tives of Aneiteum are very low in civilization,,] 
 and their moral and social condition, like thai 
 of all other heathen tribes, is such that it cai 
 not fully be brought out to light. They 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 711 
 
 not live together, like the Eastern Polynesians, 
 in regular villages. In language, in color, in 
 manners and customs, in religion, in almost 
 every thing that distinguishes one race of men 
 from another, they differ from the eastern 
 tribes. They are generally of small stature, 
 very dark, slender, and lacking in the spirit 
 and energy which characterize adjacent tribes ; 
 yet there are some fine-looking people among 
 them, and the mental capabilities of many of 
 them are of a very fair order. They are not 
 destitute of ingenuity, as appears from their 
 ornaments, their war weapons, their planta- 
 tions, &c. War was very frequent among 
 them before the introduction of the Gospel. 
 Cannibalism is found in all the islands of the 
 New Hebrides group. One of the most re- 
 volting practices found on Aneiteum, and one 
 which appears to be confined to this island, is 
 the strangling of widows. Till very lately, 
 an old woman was scarcely to be seen on the 
 island. Even since the English missionaries 
 have been located there, as many as 11 widows 
 have been known to be strangled within a sin- 
 gle year. The monstrous deed is done by the 
 brother of the woman, if she have a brother, 
 and when that is not the case, by some other 
 relative or friend. The idea of the people is, 
 that the soul of the wife should accompany 
 that of her husband to the other world. It is 
 remarkable that the greatest difficulty in re- 
 moving this practice, has all along arisen from 
 the widows themselves. What an amazing 
 hold must their religious belief have upon their 
 minds ! Here is one of the very strongest in- 
 stincts of our nature — the love of life, fairly 
 overmatched by it. Something, however, is 
 to be attributed to other than religious influ 
 ences. It would be considered disgraceful not 
 only to the party herself, but to the whole 
 family to which she belongs, were she to con- 
 tinue to live. How potent is public opinion 
 even among savages ! Of late years, this inhu- 
 man practice has received an extensive check, 
 and, as the last heathen district has abandoned 
 idolatry and besought the aid of missionary 
 teachers, it may now be said, to have almost 
 ceased to exist. From what has been said, it 
 will be seen that the people of Aneiteum be- 
 lieve in a future state of existence. They be- 
 lieve in gods many and lords manv. They 
 have gods of the sea and gods of the bush ; 
 and among themselves are men who pretend 
 to have, and are believed to have, power over 
 diseases, over the sea, the winds, thunder, rain 
 &c. They make a difference between the 
 future abode of the righteous and the wicked ; 
 but their hell lacks, and their heaven abounds 
 with such sensual gratifications as they most 
 prize on earth. It docs not appear that the 
 island was much visited prior to the introduc- 
 tion of the Gospel. That important event 
 
 a footing, and introducing Christian teachcra. 
 This was a work of no small difficulty. The 
 people were in a state of pure barbarism ; 
 they were shy and suspicious of the mission- 
 aries, and the missionaries had no confidence 
 in them. It was by the aid of an individual, 
 himself a savage, atid chief of a nelghborinaf 
 island, that communication was held with the 
 natives, and they were induced to receive tho 
 teachers. The names of these teachers, who 
 began the work of evangelization, were Tavita 
 (David) and Fuatieve. They were natives of 
 the island of Savaii, Samoan group. During 
 the early years of the mission, no visible im- 
 pression was made. The teachers passed 
 through great hardships and difficulties. One 
 of them, with his wife, died, after a short 
 course of service. The mission was sustained 
 by a reinforcement from Tanna,sent by Messrs. 
 Turner and Nisbet, of the London ^lissionary 
 Society, who were on the island at the time. 
 Apolo (Apollos,) and Simeona, (Simeon,) 
 who were thus introduced, labored usefully on 
 the island for several years. It was not till 
 
 1845, that any visible success was obtained. 
 In April of that year the island was visited. 
 The teachers had suffered severely from scarci- 
 ty of food, frequent attacks of illness, the un- 
 kindness of the natives, &c. They had, how- 
 ever, been sustained under all their trials, and 
 enabled not only to keep their ground, but to 
 make a little advancement. A few of the na- 
 tives had attended for some time on their in- 
 structions, and one man had decidedly attached 
 himself to them, and had acted towards thera 
 with great kindness. Up to this time, only 
 one station had been occupied, viz., Ipeki, on 
 the north-west side of the island. Now, ope- 
 rations were commenced at another part 
 Two teachers were placed at Aniligauhat, 
 where is the principal harbor. After this 
 visit, the prospects of the mission were again 
 overcast, and when the island was visited in 
 
 1846, about twelve months after, it appeared 
 as if it must be abandoned altogether. ITie 
 teachers had, from various causes, siiffere<l so 
 severely, and their labors had been so unpro- 
 ductive, that they were greatly discouraged, 
 and were ready to give up in despair. Two of 
 them, however, were induced to stay, and thus 
 the door was kept open till it was possible to 
 locate English missionaries. In July, 1848^ 
 the Rev. John Geddie and a catcchist from 
 Nova Scotia, N. A., and the Rev. Thomas 
 Powell, from Samoa, were placed on the 
 island. Aniliganhat was thought the most 
 eligible place at which to commence their 
 labors, and they accordingly scttKnl there. 
 Difficulties and trials, similar to those which 
 had been encountered by the teachers, were 
 experienced by the missionaries, and a consid- 
 
 took place in March, 1841. On the 20th of 
 that month, the London Missionary Society, 
 by thcir^zealous agents, succeeded in obtaining 
 
 erable time passed before any marked impres- 
 sion was made. In July, 1849, the mission 
 wi#vi8ited, and slight symntoms of an im- 
 proved state of things had begun to appear. 
 
71S 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 A tnudl pluiered chni)cl had been erected, 
 aod ft plawoed dwelling-hoiise. Services were 
 beiltf wgttlftrly cooductwl by the teachers in 
 UMBftUve Uogiittge, and, though the attend- 
 aaoe on these was both small and irregular, 
 yet a little progreas was being made. Five or 
 six individaalB nad begun to exhibit symptoms 
 of An awakeninff interest in the truths of reli- 
 rioiL The night was passed; the morning 
 had dawned. r»^ew troubles, however, awaited 
 the mission ; circumstances led to the separa- 
 tion from it of the catechist, and Mr. Powell 
 returned to Samoa, Thus, Mr. Geddie was 
 left to struggle, single-handed, with the great 
 and formidable difficulties through which the 
 misBion was destined to pass. It is found, in 
 the history of missions, that the most severe 
 trials do not generally occur till the Gospel 
 begins to take effect. So long as all remains 
 in the stillness of spiritual deatli, the mission- 
 ary is ffenerally permitted to carry on his 
 work wiUi comparatively little molestation ; 
 but when the power of divine truth begins to 
 be felt on the heart, and decided symptoms of 
 spiritual life show themselves, then it is found 
 tnat the Ijord of missions did not say in vain, 
 " Suppose ye that I am come to give peace on 
 the earth ? I tell you, nay ; but rather divi- 
 sion." It was thus with the Aneiteura mis- 
 sion. The opposition encountered in its early 
 years was trifling, compared with what it had 
 to pass through after the truth of God actually 
 took hold of the hearts of men. When that 
 was the case, parties among the heathen, gen- 
 erally official characters, whose craft was in 
 danger, and other parties also besides the na- 
 tives, whose proceedings and pursuits were 
 incidentally interfered with by the new reli- 
 gion, were greatly enraged against the faithful 
 missionary and his adherents ; and many and 
 formidable were the combinations entered 
 into, and the attempts made, to rid themselves 
 altogether of his unwelcome presence. In 
 one instance, the infatuated heathen vented 
 their rage on one of their own countrymen. 
 They entrapped and killed a young man, 
 named Wmevai. Thus, martyr blood has 
 flowed on Aneiteum. The mission property 
 and lives of the mission family were seriously 
 endangered by incendiarism. On this subject, 
 Mr. Geddie says : " We often look back on 
 those days of trial with trembling and with 
 thankfulness to God. This hostility to the 
 mission seemed to have reached its crisis in 
 1851, when an attempt was made on my own 
 life and that of my lamily, by setting fire to 
 my house at midnight ; but the arm of the 
 Ix)rd was stretched out for our protection, and 
 no harm was permitted to befall us. The ex- 
 citement which that act caused among the 
 Christian party was very great, and it required 
 all the influence that I possessed among them 
 to control it. The enemies of the cause of 
 God were then convinced that the trutl^ad 
 taken a stronger hold of the hearts of the na- 
 
 [ tives than they had expected, and if they op- 
 posed it by violent means, it must be at their 
 peril. The last exciting event occurred about 
 two years ago, (August, 1852,) wlien the 
 heathen district of Anau-un-sc contemplated 
 an attack on the people of a Christian village. 
 The Christian party from all parts of the island 
 assembled at the hostile district, with a view 
 to reason with the heathen and warn them. 
 The meditated attack was abandoned, and all 
 parties rettirned peaceably to their homes. 
 We have ever 'since been permitted to labor 
 without interruption or harm." 
 
 The trutlis of the Gospel first took decided 
 hold on a few individuals in the immediate 
 neighborhood of the missionary. Among them 
 were five or six men adapted to be useful to 
 their countrymen. These were employed by 
 the missionary to assist in diffusing the truths 
 of the Gospel in such ways as they were able. 
 In the warmth and zeal of their first love they 
 went forth to beseech their fellow-countrymen 
 to turn from the vanities and abominations of 
 pagan idolatry and embrace the pure and holy 
 religion of the Bible. Astonishing results fol- 
 lowed their labors in connection with those of 
 the missionary. A spirit of inquiry was awa- 
 kened, large numbers abandoned heathenism 
 and embraced Christianity, and a goodly num- 
 ber there is reason to believe became anxious 
 inquirers after salvation. Hcath6n worship 
 and heathen practices were extensively aban- 
 doned, and a series of changes commenced 
 which have already led to tlie most beneficial 
 results, and promise to continue till every ves- 
 tige of heathenism be swept away, and the re- 
 ligion of Jesus fill the island with its own 
 blessed fruits. The Rev. A. W. Murray and 
 Rev. J. P. Sunderland of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, visited the island in June,, 
 1852, and again in company with Rev. W.' 
 (jrill, in December of the same year. Mr. Mur- 
 ray had several times visited it before, and 
 knew it as it was while the reign of heathen- 
 ism was unbroken. He had it before his mind 
 as it was under that reign, and though he had 
 heard something of a change being in progress, 
 his expectations were not highly raised. Let 
 the reader judge of the grateful surprise, w^hen, 
 on approaching the shore, instead of a crowd 
 of naked, wondering, rude, suspicious savages, 
 with long hair and painted bodies, and armed 
 with clubs, spears, and other weapons, he found 
 a company of quiet, orderly people, all more 
 or less clothed, with confiding, affectionate 
 countenances, long hair, and other marks of 
 heathenism almost entirely gone, and not a 
 weapon of war to be seen — all pressing forward, 
 each eager to be foremost in giving the most 
 cordial welcome. The visiters did not need to 
 be told that a mighty change was in progress, 
 and all they saw and heard during their stay 
 in the island tended to confirm their first im- 
 pressions. A large number, probably about 
 half the population of the island, had efabraced 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 713 
 
 Christianity. The services and schools were 
 being attended by large numbers ; many had 
 learned to read, and hundreds were striving 
 with the utmost diligence to do so. A moral 
 change, moreover, was in progress, corHCspond- 
 ing to the great external one that was every- 
 where visible. A considerable number were 
 professedly seeking the salvation of their souls, 
 and some among them had, according to the 
 opinions of the missionaries, really found the 
 pearl of great price. Mr. Geddie was waiting 
 the arrival of the John Williams, that he might 
 constitute a Christian church. Accordingly 
 it was the high privilege of the deputation to 
 witness the baptism of 11 of the natives of 
 Aneiteum on the Sabbath following, and to 
 unite with them in commemorating the Sa- 
 viour's dying love. The occasion was one of 
 the deepest and most hallowed interest. It was 
 an era not only in the history of Aneiteum, 
 but of the entire group to which it belongs. 
 The work is now fairly begun. God has un- 
 mistakably afiBxed the seal of his approbation 
 and given a pledge of ultimate and complete 
 success. In December, 1852, the little church 
 had increased to the number of 24, and every 
 thing indicated a healthy and advancing 
 state. 
 
 The Eev. John Inglis, a missionary from the 
 Eeformed Presbyterian Church of Scotland, 
 who had been several years in New-Zealand, 
 had joined the mission. Mr. Inglis had been 
 about six months on the island, and Mr. Ged- 
 die and he were most harmoniously and zeal- 
 ously prosecuting their interesting and delight- 
 ful work. These esteemed brethren are con- 
 templating great things. In addition to plans 
 now in operation, they are about to commence 
 an institution for the training of native teach- 
 ers to assist them in carrying forward and ex- 
 tending their operations in Aneiteum, and also 
 on the neighboring islands. This is to be at 
 Ipeki, under the care of Mr. Inglis. Mr. Ged- 
 die is at Aniligauhat ; and in addition to his 
 other duties, manages the printing department. 
 Thus Aneiteum is fully embraced, and if the 
 lives and health of the devoted and excellent 
 men who occupy it are continued, we may an- 
 ticipate the happiest results, not to Aneiteum 
 alone, but also to the extensive region beyond. 
 They expect a reinforcement from their re- 
 spective churches, ere a great while, and when 
 that arrives, they will. Providence permitting, 
 extend their operations to the neighboring 
 islands. Under date October 1, 1853, Mr. 
 Geddie writes to the effect, that the church 
 erected at his station about 15 months pre- 
 viously, and in dimensions 62 feet by 25, was 
 found quite too small, and an enlargement was 
 contemplated to be made in the course of a 
 few mouths. A mission house of stone, 56 by 
 19, with a room attached to the rear 19 by 13, 
 has taken the place of the former temporary 
 and incommodious building. The attendance 
 at both stations is on the increase, and the 
 
 hearts of the missionaries are cheered with the 
 most attractive prospects. 
 
 The home churches are earnestly at work in 
 their efforts to send additional laborers, and it 
 is gratifying to know, that while there are few 
 found to respond to the call, " Who will go 
 for us ?" there has never yet been found any 
 difficulty to defray most liberally all necessary 
 expenditure. Besides the annual salaries of 
 the missionaries, funds to a large amount have 
 been raised for boats and other contingencies. 
 Last year, and the earlier part of the present 
 year, the free-will offerings of the church in 
 Nova Scotia, in clothing and other supplies, ad- 
 ditional to the necessary expenditure, amounted 
 to £400, a sum more than equal to the salary 
 of two missionaries. The Synod, at its recent 
 meeting, instructed the Board of Foreign Mis- 
 sions to secure, if possible, the services of two 
 additional missionaries, besides the present 
 candidate for the same field now engaged in 
 preparatory study. Should their efforts be 
 successful in procuring this large accession to 
 the mission staff, the island of Aneiteum will 
 soon become the centre of a very widely ex- 
 tended scene of missionary effort. It is pre- 
 sumed that the Reformed Presbyterian Church 
 in Scotland, whose zealous agent, Mr. Inglis, 
 has within so short a period exercised great 
 and permanent influence on the prospects of 
 the mission, will soon secure a similar rein- 
 forcement. The churches in Sydney, New 
 South Wales, have raised £2,000 for the per- 
 manent support of two missionaries on the 
 same group ; and as there are peculiar facili- 
 ties of communication between Australia and 
 the New Hebrides, the amount of effective aid 
 from that prosperous colony is capable of great 
 extension. — Rev. J. Bayke, of Fidou, N. S. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW OF WESTERN POLYNESIA. 
 
 ISLANDS. 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 2 
 3 
 2 
 3 
 1 
 3 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 
 Lilu 
 
 Mare 
 
 Toka 
 
 
 Totals 
 
 2 
 
 21 S 
 
 A 
 
 
 Owing to the difficulty of access to these 
 islands, several years frequently elapse between 
 the communications received from them, and 
 hence the returns must be very imperfect. 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society.— The mis- 
 sions of the Wesleyans in the South Seas are 
 situated in the Friendly Islands and neighbor- 
 ing groups, and also in the Feejee Islands ; the 
 
711 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 miarion was begun in 1622, and the 
 faUter in 1836. 
 
 P^imdh Ji/<mA.— The Friendly or Tonga 
 Uaadi aro ntoatcd in the Pacific between lat. 
 180 Md MO g., and long. 173o and 176° W. 
 Th€y coDiist of three scijarate groups, which 
 wn Mid to contain more than 150 islands. 
 Fifteen of Uicm rise to a considerable height, 
 thirty-five arc moderately elevated, and the 
 rest arc low. The most southern group, the 
 Tongataboo Islands, were discovered by Tasman 
 in 1 643. Tonga, the hirgest of them is about 20 
 milro long and 12 wide, in its broadest part. 
 The highest part of Tonga, the little mount of 
 Nukualofa, on which a chapel stands, rises about 
 60 feet above the sea. The surface of the 
 isUind generally is only a few feet above the 
 level of the ocean. The central group, called 
 the Habai Islands, is composed of a consider- 
 able number of small islands. The most popu- 
 lous of them is Lefuka, about 8 or 9 miles long 
 and 4 broad. ITiese islands are very fertile. 
 The most northern group is formed by the 
 Havau Islands, which are somewhat larger and 
 higher than the Habai Islands. The island 
 of Vavau, which is a fine island, is about 36 
 miles in circumference ; its surface is uneven, 
 and, on the northern side, rises to a consider- 
 able elevation. 
 
 Tlie clwiate of the Friendly Islands is humid, 
 and the heat rather oppressive, rising frequent- 
 ly to 980 in the shade. Much rain falls pe- 
 riodically. The trade-winds are noti constant, 
 and westerly winds occasionally blow in every 
 season, which, from their variable character, 
 have obtained from the natives the name of 
 " foolish winds." 
 
 These islands are remarkable for their fer- 
 tility, and the variety of their vegetable pro- 
 ductions. Ewa is so fruitful as to be desig- 
 nated the granary of "Tongataboo." The 
 island of Tongataboo, which is nearly a dead 
 level, with the exception of a few hillocks, 30 
 or 40 feet high, has a rich and fertile vegetable 
 mould, which is not composed of sand, as in 
 the other coral islands. The Friendly Islands 
 abound in tropical fruits and productions. 
 Ilie inhabitants of these islands belong to the 
 Baroc general stock, and resemble those of the 
 other South Sea Islands, already described. 
 The population is estimated by missionaries 
 at about 50,000. 
 
 Their political constitution is despotism, sup- 
 ported by a hereditary aristocracy. In one 
 view, however, the government may be con- 
 sidered as a kind of family compact ; for the 
 persons holding offices and titles address one 
 another by the names of father, son, uncle, and 
 grandfather, without any reference to kindred. 
 Their ranks are, kine, chiefs, matabooles, tooas, 
 and tamaiocihs, or slaves. The matabooles 
 Tank next to the chiefs, and are a sort of min- 
 ivers. They arc always looked up to as men 
 of experience, and superior information. The 
 sons and brothers of matabooles assist at pub- 
 
 lic ceremonies, under the direction of the mata- 
 booles. The matabooles attend to the good 
 order of society, and look to the morals of the 
 younger chiefs, who are apt to run into ex- 
 cesses, and oppress the lower orders. They 
 are much respected by all classes. The com- 
 monalty are called Tooas. 
 
 The present king of these islands is an ex- 
 empliiry Christian, and a preacher of the Gos- 
 pel. The inhabitants are in a transition state. 
 A new order of things is springing up. Club 
 arbitration, wlbich formerly prevailed, has been 
 laid aside ; a code of laws has been framed ; 
 governors are appointed to the different groups, 
 and courts of justice instituted. 
 
 The first attempt to introduce Christianity 
 into the Friendly Islands was made in the year 
 1797, when Captain Wilson of the " Duff," 
 left ten mechanics at Hihifo, a town on Ton- 
 gataboo, in the capacity of missionaries. After 
 having resided together some time, they sepa- 
 rated, for the purpose of being more exten- 
 sively useful. The chief under whose protec- 
 tion they resided, was murdered by his own i 
 brother, and the island involved in a sangui- j 
 nary and desolating war. Three of them were 
 murdered by the natives ; the others were 
 obliged to take refuge among the rocks and 
 dens of the island. They were plundered of 
 their property, stripped of their clothing, and 
 subjected to various kinds of insult. When 
 the strife terminated, the missionaries endea- 
 vored to support themselves by hard labor. 
 The natives, however, having stolen every 
 thing they possessed, it was with great diffi- 
 culty they succeeded in constructing a forge. 
 When this was accomplished the thievish in- 
 habitants brought the articles they had stolen, 
 in order to have them manufactured into some 
 other form that pleased them better. In 1800 
 an English ship arrived among the islands, the 
 captain of which offered the distressed mission- 
 aries a passage to New South Wales ; and 
 they being utterly destitute, and having but 
 little prospect of usefulness among the natives, 
 gladly accepted the proposal. For 20 years 
 after this, no missionaries visited these islands. 
 The Eev. Walter Lawry, of the Wesleyan 
 Missionary Society, arrived at Tongataboo in 
 August, 1822. He was kindly received by the. 
 people, and for a time well treated. Like his 
 predecessors, however, he experienced but lit- 
 tle encouragement. The natives received him 
 as the harbinger of soldiers who would shortly 
 come to kill them, and seize their island ; and 
 consequently treated him with suspicion. In 
 1823 he was obliged to remove to the colony 
 of New South Wales, on account of domestic 
 circumstances. In 1825, the Rev. Messrs. John 
 Thomas and John Hutchinson were appointed 
 to Tongataboo, where they arrived in June, 
 1826. They fixed their residence at Hihifo, 
 where they erected a substantial dwelling- 
 house, and commenced the study of the lan- 
 guage and the instruction of the people. They 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 715 
 
 also met with great opposition and with little 
 success. 
 
 In the year 1827 they were reinforced by the 
 arrival of Eev. Nathaniel Turner, Rev. Wil- 
 liam Cross, and Mr. AVeiss. They found at 
 Nukualofu, one of the chief towns of the 
 island, two native teachers from Tahiti, who 
 had been some time employed in that locality, 
 preachinj^ to the people in the Tahitian lan- 
 guage. They had erected a chapel, and 240 
 persons attended their teaching. 
 
 In January, 1830, Mr. Thomas proceeded 
 to Lifuka, the chief of the Habai Islands. On 
 his arrival he found that the king Taufaahau 
 had renounced idolatry, and acknowledged Je- 
 hovah as the true God, and that the houses 
 that were formerly held sacred were used as 
 common dwellings. The chief had visited 
 Tonga a few months before, and on his return 
 he was accompanied by a young man and his 
 wife, who had been baptized, as teachers. Im- 
 mediately on his arrival, Mr. Thomas began to 
 preach to the natives. He also opened schools 
 both for males and females, which were well 
 attended, chiefly by adults. They were taught 
 principally by the natives themselves. Such 
 as had learned a little taught others what they 
 knew. The king and others of the chiefs at- 
 tended, and stood up in the same ring with 
 their people, to be catechized every morning. 
 
 Mr. Thomas, after being some months in the 
 Habai Islands, baptized a number of the na- 
 tives, among whom was Taufaahau, the king. 
 He and his people erected a large building for 
 public worship, which was usually attended by 
 great numbers of the natives, there being gen- 
 erally from a thousand to fifteen hundred per- 
 sons present. The king was very zealous in 
 bringing over the people from idolatry, and 
 youDg and old, rich and poor, masters and ser- 
 vants, might now be seen renouncing the wor- 
 ship of idols, and turning to the true God. 
 Among others was Tamaha, a female chief of 
 the highest rank, who had been regarded as a 
 deity, and was one of the pillars of the popu- 
 lar superstition.— ikfe^;?. Mag. 1832, p. 144 ; 
 Miss. kot. Vol. YII., p. 513. 
 
 Idolatry also received a heavy blow in the 
 island of Yavau. Three years before, Finau 
 the king appeared anxious for a missionary, 
 but afterwards he acted the part of a perse- 
 cutor, and was mad on his idols. The king of 
 the Habai Islands, and some of his people 
 had, however, gone on a visit to Vavau, with 
 24 canoes, and the missionaries wrote a friend- 
 ly letter to Finau. The king of Habai ex- 
 horted him to turn to God, and put away his 
 lying spirits, and he at length yielded, saying, 
 " Well, I will ; and I will spend the Sabbath 
 with you, in worshiping your God." He then 
 gave orders to his servants to worship Jeho- 
 vah, and to set on fire the houses of the idols. 
 These orders were promptly obeyed. Some of 
 the houses of the idols were taken by the 
 people for their own use ; others, to the num- 
 
 ber of 18, were burnt to the ground, and their 
 gods in them. Some, however, were much 
 alarmed at these proceedings ; but a thousand 
 people at least, it was supposed, joined with 
 the king in renouncing idolatry. They showed 
 great eagerness to hear about the new reli- 
 gion. The Habai people had no rest from 
 them day nor night. Wlien they had done 
 with one company another would come for in- 
 struction, and thus they were kept constantly 
 employed. 
 
 In March, 1831, Messrs. Nathaniel Turner, 
 J. Watkin, and W. Woon, three new mission- 
 aries, arrived at Nukualofa, in Tongataboo, 
 the last of whom was a printer. Hitherto the 
 missionaries had had great trouble in writing 
 out books for the natives ; but now a press 
 was established, at which 'wfere printed large 
 editions of several school-books, select passages 
 of Scripture, hymn-books, catechisms, and 
 other useful works. The people were greatly 
 delighted, and not a little surprised when they 
 first saw the press in operation. Thousands of 
 these little books were in a short time circu- 
 lated, and were read by them with great inte- 
 rest. The desire for books was very great, 
 and the missionaries, availing themselves of 
 this, did not think it advisable to give them 
 generally gratuitously. But the people were 
 so poor that many found it diflBcult to purchase 
 them. The missionaries were greatly assisted 
 by a host of native helpers, not only teachers 
 of schools but class-leaders, exhorters, and even 
 local preachers. The overthrow of idolatry 
 and the reception of Christianity in the various 
 islands was in fact efiected very much tlirough 
 the instrumentality of the natives themselves. 
 In the schools were some thousands of scholars, 
 of whom a large portion were adults, and 
 about one-half females. Several hundreds of 
 the natives, both male and female, were em- 
 ployed as teachers, among whom were some 
 of the most influential of the chiefs, and their 
 wives. Many of the females, besides learning 
 to read, were taught to sew by the wives of 
 the missionaries, and it was truly surprising to 
 see the rapidity with which they acquired this 
 useful art, and the neatness of their work. 
 There was a great desire among them to adopt 
 the style of dress worn by English women. 
 The religious instruction communicated by 
 the natives contributed essentially to the over- 
 throw of idolatry, not only in their own and 
 neighboring islands, but even in islands at a 
 great distance. One day the missionaries in 
 Vavau observed three canoes approaching the 
 shore, which proved to be from the island of 
 Nina-Fo-ou, 300 miles distant, where no mis- 
 sionaries had ever visited. Some of the Va- 
 vau converts, however, had been there, and 
 such was the effect of their statements that the 
 whole of the inhabitants had cast away their 
 idols. One of their visitors they had detained 
 to afford them further instruction. 
 
 In July, 1834, a powerful religious move 
 
716 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 OMBt bwAD in Yvna, which qnickly extended 
 to tbo whole of the Habai Islands, and after- 
 wank, though in • lc« degree, to the Tonga 
 trhap. Tboowwds of the natives had before 
 been nominally Christians ; yet, the number 
 who gtte erideneo of true conversion was not 
 oonsrambla; Now, hundreds of men, women, 
 and childran, iucludinif some of the principal 
 chiefc, might be seen m deep distress, weepmg 
 alood and ciylng to God for mercy. Often as 
 •oon as the service commenced, the cries of 
 the people began. Many trembled as if thoy 
 were about to be judged at the bar of God. 
 For a time, the people laid aside their ordinary 
 employments, and gave themselves up entirely to 
 rdigious exercises. The missionaries went 
 aboat among them, imparting instruction, and 
 pointing them t^ Christ, and many of them 
 soon found peace in believing. The work was 
 not confined merely to the principal islands, 
 bat spread, like fire among stubble, through 
 the whole of them. In a short time, every 
 island had caught the flame : everywhere the 
 people were earnestly seeking the Lord, or re- 
 loicuig because they had found him. This re- 
 ligious movement was followed by a remark- 
 able reformation of manners. Among other 
 sins, polygamy was now abandoned ; marriage 
 became general ; and they were more decent 
 and mcdost in their apparel, many of them 
 dressing in the English style. They set a high 
 value on the means of grace. They kept the 
 Sabbath with remarkable strictness, resting 
 from labor ; and employing the whole day in 
 the public and private exercises of religion. 
 They also maintained morning and evening 
 worship every day. In their^)rayers there was 
 an affectionate simplicity. Their former hatred 
 of each other was now exchanged for love. 
 The missionaries had great pleasure in laboring 
 among a people so affectionate in their disposi- 
 tions, BO attentive to their instructions, and so 
 tractable in their manners. To assist the reader 
 in iudging of the character of the work, we 
 shall here give a few extracts from the letters 
 of the missionaries : 
 
 " On Tuceday, July 27th," says Mr. Turner 
 of Vavau, " we believe that not fewer than 
 1000 souls were converted; not now from 
 dumb idols only, but from the power of Satan 
 unto God. For a week or two we were not 
 able to hold the schools, but had prayer meet> 
 ings six times a day. We could not speak five 
 minutes before all were in tears, and numbers 
 prostrated before the Lord, absorbed in deep 
 concern about salvation. Frequently their 
 words were, * Praise the Lord ! I never knew 
 Jesus until now, now I do know him, he has 
 taken away all my sins ; I love Jesus Kalaise: 
 Some were so filled with joy that they could 
 not contain themselves, but cried out for ' hearts 
 to praise the Lord.' Tliis has not been like the 
 dew descending upon the tender herb, but as 
 the sprnig-tide, or as the overflowing of some 
 mighty river ; all the mounds of sin have been 
 
 swept awav ; the Lord has bowed the whole 
 island to his sway. We have to hold two 
 prayer meetings daily. We have ascertained 
 that the total number in society, is 306G : and 
 the number converted, for the most part, with- 
 in the past six weeks, is 2262." 
 
 " In the morning," says Mr. Tucker, of the 
 Habai Islands, " we repaired to the house of 
 prayer as soon as it was light. The Lord made 
 * the place of his feet glorious,' the stout-hearted 
 began to tremble, there was a mighty shaking 
 among the dry .bones. As soon as service be- 
 gan, the cries of the people commenced — what 
 a solemn but joyful sight to behold ! One thous- 
 and or more individuals bowed before the Lord, 
 weeping at the feet of Jesus, and praying in 
 agony of soul ! I never saw such distress, 
 never heard such cries for mercy, or such con- 
 fessions of sin before. These things were uni- 
 versal, from the greatest chiefs in the land to 
 the meanest individuals, and of both sexes, old 
 and young. The Lord heard the sighing of the 
 prisoners, he bound up many a broken-hearted 
 sinner in that meeting, and proclaimed liberty 
 to many a captive. We were engaged nearly 
 the whole day in this blessed work. I attended 
 four services and witnessed hundreds of precious 
 souls made happy by a sense of the Saviour's 
 love, on that day and the preceding evening. 
 We have not yet received an account from all 
 the islands of those who have obtained peace 
 with God during this revival, but from the num- 
 ber already brought in by the leaders, we be- 
 lieve that upwards of 2000 were converted to 
 God in the course of a fortnight." — Miss. No- 
 tices, Vol. YIII., p. 149. 
 
 Not the least remarkable of the converts 
 was Taufaahau, the king both of the ITabai 
 and Yavau Islands, and who, at his baptism, 
 was called George, while his queen was named 
 ClmrloUe. They both adorned their Christian 
 profession, and were truly zealous, devoted per- 
 sons. They both met classes and superintended 
 schools. The king is a very excellent local 
 preacher, and never, sought to be preferred be- 
 fore others, but went wherever he was sent, 
 fulfilling his appointments with the greatest 
 cheerfulness. Mr. Tucker, having one day in 
 the course of conversation, stated his views on 
 the subject of slavery, and mentioned the 
 emancipation of the negroes in the W^est In- 
 dies, he (King George,) said several of his ser- 
 vants were slaves, having been given to him by 
 his father and other chiefs ; but that he would 
 liberate them that very day. In the evening, 
 he accordingly called them all together and set 
 them at liberty. The scene was very affecting. 
 He told them of the many evils which were 
 practised among them during the reign of 
 neathenism, and spoke of the love and mercy 
 of God, in sending the Gospel to them with all 
 its attendant blessings. He told them how 
 much he loved them, and then said, " You are 
 no longer slaves : you are your own masters, 
 and may go and reside where you please." 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 717 
 
 They all burst into tears and wept aloud ; the 
 king himself and his queen could not refrain 
 from tears. Two of them begged to be allow- 
 ed to live and die with him ; but he would not 
 consent to their remaining as slares. " If you 
 wish," said he, " to reside a little longer with 
 us, well ; if you desire to go and dwell in any 
 other island, just please yourselves." — Miss. 
 Not. Vol. VIII. p. 315, 317, 320. 
 
 The missionaries were indebted to the king 
 for the erection of a very large chapel in 
 Habai. It was 110 feet by 45 inside, and was 
 expected to be capable of holding all the in- 
 habitants of the island. It was probably the 
 largest and most elegant building ever erected 
 in the Friendly Islands, and was a fine monu- 
 ment of the zeal and good taste of the king. 
 It was built in little more than two months, 
 and for several weeks there were about a thou- 
 sand people engaged in the work. Most of 
 the chiefs were employed in plaiting kafa or 
 cinet, while the common people did the heavier 
 work. The pillars and other timber used in 
 the frame work were brought from other 
 islands. The labor was regularly divided 
 among the inhabitants of the whole group, 
 and each party tried to excel the others in 
 their workmanship. As they had no nails the 
 timbers were fastened with kafa, made of the 
 fibres of the cocoa-nut husks, and dyed black, 
 red, and other colors. These colors they in- 
 terweave with almost mathematical accuracy, 
 which makes their work appear to great ad- 
 vantage. The king gave several beautifully 
 carved spears which were left to him by his 
 predecessors, and had often been used in war, 
 to be converted into rails for the communion- 
 table, and two beautifully carved clubs, which 
 were formerly worshiped as gods, were now 
 fixed at the bottom of the pulpit-stairs. 
 
 At the opening of the chapel, the natives 
 assembled in great numbers from all the islands, 
 on many of which the sick and aged only were 
 left. On this occasion, the king delivered a 
 very appropriate sermon from Solomon's prayer 
 at the dedication of the temple. King George 
 is one of nature's noblemen : he is six feet 
 four inches high, well made, with an intelli- 
 gent and benevolent countenance. 
 
 Commander Wilkes, of the " United States' 
 Exploring Expedition," describes his late re- 
 ception by the Friendly Islanders in terms of 
 great interest. He says, " On the morning of 
 the 24th, I landed at Nukualofa with all the 
 officers that could be spared from other duties. 
 We were received on the beach by Mr. Tucker, 
 one of the missionaries, and were at once sur- 
 rounded by a large number of natives. It was 
 impossible not to be struck with the great 
 diflerence between these people and those we 
 had left in New-Zealand ; nothing of the mo- 
 rose and savage appearance, so remarkable 
 there, was seen. Here all was cheerfulness 
 and gayety ; all appeared well fed, and well 
 formed, with full faces and muscles. The number 
 
 of children particularly attracted our notice, 
 in striking contrast with the New-Zealand 
 group, where but a few were seen. We wait^ 
 ed some minutes for King George. When he 
 made his appearance, I could not but admire 
 him ; he is upwards of six feet in height, ex- 
 tremely well proportioned and athletic; his 
 limbs are rounded and full ; his features regu- 
 lar and manly, with a fine open countenance, 
 and sensible face ; all which were seen to the 
 greatest advantage. He at once attracted all 
 eyes ; for, on approaching, every movement 
 showed that he was in the habit of command- 
 ing those about him. With unassuming dig- 
 nity he quietly took his seat." 
 
 King George is now about fifty years old. 
 He was converted during the great revival in 
 Tonga, in July and August, 1834. He suc- 
 ceeded to the sovereignty of all the islands in 
 1845. He has thrown the whole weight of his 
 influence in favor of Christianity. Mr. Lawry 
 says, " What God declares to be wrong, he 
 causes to be refrained from, or punished when 
 done; but religion, in all its operations, he 
 leaves, where God leaves it, between God and 
 the conscience." 
 
 In February, 1835, Mr, Peter Turner, accom- 
 panied by some of the natives, sailed from 
 Vavau for NiuarTubu-tabu, or Keppel's Island, 
 about 170 miles distant. After the arrival of 
 Mr. Turner, a work similar to that which had 
 lately occurred in the Habai and Vavau 
 Islands, commenced here. Mr, Turner remain- 
 ed on the island between three and four months. 
 He baptized 514 adults and 200 children, 
 united the former into a Methodist Society, 
 and married 240 persons, while in the schools 
 there were 557 scholars, male and female, old 
 and young. He now left them under the care 
 of the native teachers. Mr. Thomas, on a sub- 
 sequent visit to the islands of Niua-Tubu-tabu 
 and Niua-fo-ou, baptized 778 adults and 403 
 children, forming, with those previously bajv 
 tized, the greater part of the population. 
 
 In 1836, auxiliary Missionary Societic>s were 
 formed in the islands of Habai and Vavau. 
 Great numbers of the natives were present at 
 the meetings for their formation, and their 
 speeches were deeply interesting. The con- 
 trasts which they drew between their past and 
 present condition, were affecting. The sub- 
 scribers were very numerous, and included per- 
 sons of all ages, and of all ranks, from the king 
 down to the poorest of the i)eof)le. In the 
 absence of a circulating metlium, their con- 
 tributions consisted chiefly of articles of native 
 manufacture. The most valuable of these were 
 fine mats, which many of the chiefs presented. 
 A few gave pigs, many gave native cloth, 
 some native fish-hooks, others oils, yams, ar- 
 row-root, tortoise-shell, baskets, ornaments, 
 &c. The king was particularly zealous in 
 carrying on these auxiliary societies, and on 
 one occasion he and his queen gave a dona- 
 tion of ten sovereigns, which had been received 
 
ns 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 by King Ooorg« m » present from the captain 
 oTao EnfflUi war sliip. 
 
 Ib Maich, 1889, King George promulgated, 
 b A krM aaembly of the chiefs and ])eople, a 
 codb^Zmt, which had been drawn up for 
 thtir gorernmcnt, and appointed judges to 
 hnr and decide all cases of complaint which 
 tmtJkt triw among them. No one, whether 
 dSr or private person, was now to take the 
 law into nis own nand ; but must bring every 
 matter of importance before the iudges. It is 
 efideot, from the character of this code, that 
 the minionaries had some hand in its fornia- 
 tioii. And, although it may not be free from 
 defects, yet its adoption was an important 
 step in the progress of civilization, laymg the 
 foundation for the security of life and property, 
 and for the future improvement and happiness 
 of the people. 
 
 In longataboo, Christianity had made much 
 less progress than in Habai and Yavau Islands. 
 There b^thenism had all along maintained itself 
 in vigor, particularly in the district of Hihifo, 
 where the missionaries originally settled, but 
 which, after two or three years, they left in 
 consequence of the opposition they encoun- 
 tered. Tonga was, in fact, the centre of the 
 snperstition of the Friendly Isles. Its very 
 name, Tongataboo, or Tonga, the holy or con- 
 secrated, would seem to mark it out as a strong- 
 hold of the ancicut religion. ITiough many of 
 the natives, particularly at Nukualofa, em- 
 braced Christianitv, yet there were thousands 
 throughout the island who clung to idolatry, 
 and from time to time they manifested deter- 
 mined hostility to the Christians. 
 
 In June, 1840, the heathen chiefs of Tonga 
 broke out in rebellion. Capt. Croker, of the 
 British ship Favorite, happening to arrive just 
 at this time, united the force under his com- 
 mand to that of King George, in the hope of 
 bringing the quarrel to a speedy conclusion. 
 But he, with two of his ofiGcers, were killed, 
 and the first lieutenant and 19 men danger- 
 ously wounded. By this unfortunate occur- 
 rence the mission was broken up for a time, 
 bat was resumed again at the restoration of 
 pesfoe. 
 
 Of late years, Christianity has greatly ex- 
 tended itself in the Friendly Islands, notwith- 
 standing the opposition of heathenism and 
 popery. Quite lately the character and actions 
 of the Christian king of these islands has a1^ 
 tracted considerable public attention. Tonga, 
 the principal island, has been again the scene 
 of a rel)ellion, instigated by a few chiefs who 
 still adhere to heathenism. The rebels were 
 aided by Romish priests, who, for some years, 
 have had a settlement on the island. An ec- 
 clesiastic, said to he a bishop, was prominent 
 in the quarrel, and went in search of a French 
 ship of war to chastise King George. Fears 
 were excited that there might be a repetition. 
 Hi ^"<^"^'y Is^es, of those acts of despotic 
 tyranny practiced by the same power in Tahiti 
 
 a few years ago. In the interval many prayers 
 were offered up to God in behalf of King 
 George and his people. During the bishop's 
 absence, the British war ship Calliope, com- 
 manded by Sir E. Home, came into the harbor 
 of Tonga. Meanwhile King George's efforts 
 for suppressing the rebellion were successful ; 
 the rebels surrendered, and were magnani- 
 mously pardoned, and the war wsis brought to 
 a happy termination. The king by his for- ' 
 bearance and generosity, in the hour of tri- 
 umph, and by the practical wisdom of other 
 parts of his conduct, has eminently adorned 
 his Christian profession. The chiefs of the 
 fort called Houmd, having first notified their 
 intention to submit, a day was appointed to 
 receive this submission ; and as the custom of 
 the nation is to destroy the vanquished, the 
 missionaries thought it right to be present 
 at the ceremony, that they might intercede for 
 the captives, if needful. But their good oJBBces 
 were not required. The king caused it to be 
 proclaimed that he did not intend to take 
 irom these chiefs either their lives, their dig- 
 nity, or their lands, but that he " freely for- 
 gave them for the sake of lotu alone." The 
 clemency of Christianity, which thus shone so 
 conspicuously in the king's conduct towards 
 the rebels is the more marked when we re- 
 member that they had barbarously murdered 
 some of his own relatives, among the many 
 victims that fell into their hands. His con- 
 duct on this occasion won the hearts and alle- 
 giance of even his bitterest enemies. The 
 pardoned chiefs returned from the assembly to 
 the king's house, and that same night re- 
 nounced their heathenism, and at the family 
 altar of King George, for the first time in their 
 lives, they bowed their knees to the Lord Jo- 
 sus Christ. More than 100 persons followed 
 their example when Mr. West visited the fort 
 a few days afterward. On the 16th of August 
 the remaining fortress surrendered, and was 
 destroyed ; and mercy again triumphed in sav- 
 ing the lives of the vanquished. The Romish 
 priests who had persisted in remaining in it to 
 the last, notwithstanding the remonstrances 
 addressed to them both by the king and Sir 
 E. Home, escaped without injury, and their pro- 
 perty was saved from destruction by the per- 
 sonal exertions of the king and the baronet, 
 who went thrmigh the midst of burning houses 
 and falling trees to save their goods. Thus 
 did Providence guard this worthy king, and 
 reward his Christian courage and consistency 
 and mercy. Sir E. Home was surprised 
 and delighted, and afterwards said to one of 
 the missionaries, " I saw the noble and Chris- 
 tian conduct of King George. He can only 
 be compared to Alfred the Great, of blessed 
 memory. He is worthy of being called a king. 
 He is the greatest man in these seas." 
 
 These events took place in August, 1852. 
 In November, Sir E. Home returned in the 
 Calliope to the Friendly Isles, that he might 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 719 
 
 learn the result of the visit of the French 
 ship of war. He seemed very anxious that 
 no harm should happen to the Friendly Island- 
 ers or the kin<^. His visit was an occasion of 
 much joy to all parties. However, the French 
 ship had not arrived. But on the 12th of No- 
 vember, two days after Sir E. Home left Ton- 
 ga, the Moselle made her appearance. Her 
 commander, Captain Belland, was commis- 
 sioned by the Popish governor of Tahiti to 
 inquire into certain complaints lodged against 
 King George by the captain of a French 
 whaler, the Gustave of Havre-dc-Grace, and 
 also by the Bomish priests residing in Tonga. 
 The king obeyed the summons of thq captain, 
 and went on board the Moselle, taking with 
 him his state paper box, in which he had copies 
 of all his correspondence, especially that with 
 the Romish priests. This correspondence he 
 laid before the captain, who viewed the king 
 and his papers with astonishment. At the 
 close of their long interview, which lasted five 
 hours, and throughout which the king con- 
 ducted himself with the greatest Christian 
 propriety, the French captain expressed him- 
 self entirely satisfied, and stated to the king 
 that " the French government, through him, 
 acknowledged George as king of the Friendly 
 Islands ; and that the only condition he would 
 impose was that, if any Frenchman chose to 
 reside in his dominions, he should be protect- 
 ed, so long as he obeyed the laws ; and that if 
 any of the king's subjects chose to become 
 Roman Catholics they should be allowed to 
 do so." To these conditions the king agreed, 
 and the dreaded French war ship took her de- 
 parture, the captain declaring that he " had 
 seen and conversed with many chiefs in the 
 South Seas, but that he had not seen one to 
 be compared in knowledge and ability, in 
 courage and dignity, to George, the king of 
 the Friendly Islands." 
 
 And thus this man, who 29 years ago was a 
 savage, noted through the South Seas for his 
 bravery and fierceness of ilieposition, has be- 
 come " a wonder unto many" — a monument of 
 the enlightening and transforming power of 
 the Gospel of Christ. In 1844, he lost his 
 peace, and became a "backslider in heart;" 
 but it was only for a short time. Publicly, at 
 a love feast, he penitently acknowledged his 
 fall, and immediately found peace anew, and 
 ever since he has maintained a walk conform- 
 able to the Gospel. 
 
 The war, thus brought to a close, had an 
 unfavorable influence on the mission ; but 
 much is hoped for from the moral influence of 
 the events connected with its termination. In 
 the month of October a great council was 
 held, at which all the ruling chiefs were pres- 
 ent, and many important regulations were 
 enacted. The following extracts will speak 
 for themselves : " The system of tabu is abol- 
 ished. All slaves are hereby set at liberty ; 
 and no man is to keep a slave or other person 
 
 I in bondage. All persons are to dress modestly 
 and becomingly. All crime will be punished ; 
 and the laws already printed are to be en- 
 forced throughout the land. All children arc 
 to be sent to school, for on this depends the 
 future welfare of our nation." 
 
 In no other mission of the Wesleyans has so 
 large a number of native preaJicrs been raised 
 up to proclaim the Gospel to their country- 
 men as in this mission. Nearly 500 of the 
 Friendly Islanders are regularly licensed to 
 preach. In this great result, the institution 
 for training a native ministry has exerted an 
 important influence, and was early brought 
 into operation. 
 
 The printing-press also is worked with great 
 efficiency, and so is also their system of day 
 schools, in which arc nearly 8,000 children. 
 Altogether this mission is worthy to stand by 
 the side of that to the Sandwich Isles, as a 
 witness before the world of what the religion 
 of the cross can effect, even among a savage 
 people, in the short space of thirty years. 
 
 The Rev. Robert Young, the deputation 
 lately sent from London to visit these mis- 
 sions, has just returned, and in his report 
 bears the most delightful testimony to what 
 the religion of Christ has done for this peo- 
 ple. Among other things he says : " With 
 the exception of about 50 persons, the en- 
 tire population have embraced Christianity. 
 It is true they have not all felt its saving 
 power, yet they have all been more or less 
 benefited by its influence, and some thousands 
 of them have experienced its transforming 
 power, and are now, by the grace of God, 
 adorning the doctrine of God their Saviour. 
 There were many things that delighted me 
 during my visit to that interesting land. I 
 was pleased with the reverence of the people 
 for the Lord's day. On that day nothing is 
 heard or seen infringing upon its sacred right 
 If people are beheld coming from their habi- 
 tations, it is that they may go to the house of 
 the Lord and inquire in his holy temple. If 
 a canoe is seen in the offing, it is conveying a 
 local preacher to his appointment on some 
 distant island, that he may preach Jesus to 
 the people. If noises occasionally fall upon 
 the ear, they are not those of revelry and strife, 
 but son^ of praise and earnest prayer to the 
 God of heaven. I was also delignted with the 
 attention of the people to family worsltip. 
 That duty is strictly attended to, there being 
 very few families throughout the length and 
 breadth of these islands bearing the Christian 
 name where they have not a domestic altar on 
 which is presented the morning and evening 
 sacrifice. I was also pleased with their profi- 
 ciency in learning. Not less than 8,000 of 
 them can read the sacretl Scriptures, and 5,000 
 can write their own language, and some of 
 them very elegantly. I examined several 
 of our schools ; and many of the pupils, in 
 addition to reading and writing, had acquired 
 
780 
 
 SOUTH SBA ISLANDS. 
 
 a Tcry rwpccuii>io Knowledge of geography, 
 tfithmetic, natural history, aud some other 
 brandMi of learning. A few of them were 
 even makiitf attempts to master astronomy. 
 I had alio tSe pleasuro of examiuiug the stu- 
 dents of oar normal instituttou, and was 
 gitaUy delighted with their proficiency. 
 
 *• Tnongh as a nation they arc, after all, but 
 in a transition state, yet, iu point of truthful- 
 ntmt and honesty, and hospitality, and tcm- 
 peranee, and chastity, they might be placed in 
 noet advantageous contrast with the refined 
 and polite nations of the civilized world. 
 King George is a most decided and exemplary 
 Christian. I had the privilege of being with 
 him for nearly two months, and during that 
 period I never heard a foolish word drop from 
 bis lips, nor did I ever see anything in his 
 spirit or deportment inconsistent with the 
 most entire devotedness as a disciple of the 
 Lord Jesus Christ He is a local preacher, 
 and I heard him preach in Feejee a most in- 
 toresting, powerful, and effective sermon. On 
 his arrival in Sydney, to which place he ac- 
 companied Mr. Young, he attended a mission- 
 aiy meeting. It appears that some years ago 
 he gave to Mr. Rabone, a missionary in the 
 Friendly Islands, an idol god which ho and his 
 femily had been accustomed to worship. That 
 idol god had been preserved by Mr. Rabone, 
 who being at the mission in Sydney, showed 
 this to the king, and requested him to take it 
 with him to the meeting. King George did 
 so, and on the platform he held up the idol and 
 said, ' This is the thing which I and my family 
 were accustomed to worship.' Then holding 
 up first one hand and then the other, each of 
 wnich was minus two joints of the little finger, 
 he said, ' My father cut off these fingers and 
 offered them in sacrifice to this very thing.' 
 Bat the king had been amply revenged upon 
 his idol eods. On his embracing Christianity, 
 he had them all collected, and, to the indescri- 
 bable alarm of his people, he hanged the 
 whole fraternity of them in his kitchen, aud 
 left them dangling in evidence of their ina- 
 bility to save themselves or those who had put 
 their trust in them." 
 
 Feejee Islaiuh.— The Feejee Group is situated 
 about 360 miles north-west of the Friendly 
 Islands, between lat. 15^ 30' and 19^ 30', and 
 long. 177=> and 178o W. It comprises 150 
 islands, about 100 of which are inhabited. 
 The remaining islands are occasionally resorted 
 to by the natives for the purpose of fishing, and 
 taking the hiche-de-mer, or sea-slug. There are 
 also numerous reefe and shoals. Two are large 
 isUnds, stretching north-east and south-west, 
 nearly throughout the whole extent of the 
 group ; and are supposed to be each about 300 
 Ailes in circumference. This group of islands 
 comprises seven districts, and is under as many 
 pnncipal chiefs. All the minor chiefs, on the 
 different islands, are more or less connected or 
 subject to one of these, and as the one party 
 
 or the other prevails in war, they change mas- 
 ters. War is the constant occupation of the na- 
 tives aud engrosses all their time and thoughts. 
 The introduction of fire arms brought about a 
 great change of power. This happened in the 
 year 1809. A brig was wrecked on the reef 
 off Nairai, which had both guns and powder 
 on board. The crew, in order to preserve their 
 lives, showed the natives the use of the new in- 
 strument. They joined the Mbau people, in- 
 structed them in the use of the musket, and 
 assisted them m their wars. 
 
 The people are divided into a number of 
 tribes independent of, and often hostile to, each 
 other. In each tribe great and marked distinc- 
 tions of rank exist. The classes, which are 
 readily distinguished, are as follows : — 1, kings ; 
 2, chiefs ; 3, warriors ; 4, matanivanua, liter- 
 ally " Eyes of the land." They are the king's 
 messengers ; 5, slaves, (kaisL) The last have 
 nomiuallj^ little influence. 
 
 The climate of the different sides of the 
 islands may, as in all the Polynesian islands, be 
 distinguished as wet or dry, the windward side 
 being subject to showers, while to the leeward 
 it is remarkably dry, and the droughts are of 
 long continuance. The difference of tempera- 
 ture is, however, small. Earthquakes are not 
 unfrequent, generally occurring, iu the month of 
 February. Several shocks are often felt in a 
 single night. By observing the plants whose 
 flowera succeed each other, the natives are 
 guided in their agricultural occupations. 
 
 Next to war, agriculture is the most gene- 
 ral occupation of this people. To this they pay 
 much attention, and have a great number of 
 esculent fruits and roots, which they cultivate, 
 in addition to many spontaneous productions 
 of the soil. 
 
 The population of these islands has been es- 
 timated at 300,000. This computation, how- 
 ever, proceeds upon the supposition that the 
 interior of the islands is thickly inhabited, 
 which seems very doubtful. It is probable 
 that the number vomj be about 200,000. 
 
 The Feejeans are generally above the middle 
 height, and exhibit a great variety of figure. 
 The chiefs are tall, well-made, and muscular, 
 while the lower orders are meagre, from labo- 
 rious service and scanty nourishment. Their 
 complexion, in general, is between that of the 
 black and copper-colored races, although in- 
 stances of both extremes are to be met with, 
 indicating a descent from two different stocks. 
 They are inferior to the natives of Tonga in 
 beauty of person. In the Tonguese there is a 
 native grace combined with fine forms, and an 
 expression and carriage as if educated ; while 
 there is an air of power and independence in 
 the Feejeeans, that makes them claim attention. 
 They at once strike one as peculiar, and, unlike 
 other Polynesian natives, they have a great 
 deal of activity both of mind and body, which 
 may be ascribed, in some measure, to their con- 
 stant wars, and the necessity of their being 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 721 
 
 continually on the alert to prevent surprise. 
 They are much more intelligent than those of 
 other parts of Polynesia, and express them- 
 selves with great clearness and force. They 
 excel the inhabitants of Tonga in ingenuity, as 
 appears from their clubs and spears, which are 
 carved in a very masterly manner, neatly form- 
 ed, and ponderous ; cloth beautifully checkered ; 
 variegated mats ; earthen pots ; wicker-work 
 baskets, and other articles ; all of which have 
 a cast of superiority in the execution. 
 
 The faces of the greater number are long, 
 with a large mouth, good and well-set teeth, 
 and a well formed nose. Instances, however, 
 are by no means rare, of narrow and high fore- 
 heads, flat noses, and thick lips, with a broad, 
 short chin. Still, they have nothing about 
 them of the negro type. Their eyes are gener- 
 ally fine, being black and penetrating. The 
 expression of their countenances is usually rest- 
 less and watchful ; they are observing and 
 quick in their movements. Their hair is some- 
 what curly and rather disposed to be woolly. 
 Their whole external character, viewed gener- 
 ally, is fierce and warlike, rather than brave and 
 noble. For an account of their cannibal pro- 
 pensities, see Cannibals. 
 
 A feast frequently takes place among the 
 chiefs, to which each is required to bring a pig. 
 On these occasions, Tanoa, king of Mbau, from 
 pride and ostentation, always furnishes a human 
 body. A whale's tooth is about the price they 
 put on a human life, even when the party slain 
 is a person of rank. This is viewed by the re- 
 latives of the victim as a sufficient compensa- 
 tron. It is, therefore, not to be expected, that 
 a people who set so little value upon the lives 
 of their own countrymen should much regard 
 those of foreigners. Hence the necessity, while 
 holding intercourse with them, to be continually 
 guarded against their murderous designs, which 
 they are always meditating for the sake of the 
 property about the person, or to obtain the 
 body for food. Several instances are related of 
 crews of vessels visiting i^ islands, having 
 been put to death and eatenT 
 
 The pantheon of the Feejeeans contains many 
 deities. " Many of the natives," says Mr. Hunt, 
 in his Memoirs of Mr. Cross, " believe in the 
 existence of a deity called Ovb, who is con- 
 sidered the maker of all men ; yet different 
 parts of the group ascribe their origin to other 
 gods. A certain female deity is said to have 
 created the Vewa people ; and yet if a child 
 is born malformed it is attributed to an over- 
 sight of Ove." The god most generally known 
 next to Ove is Ndengei. He is worshiped in 
 the form of a large serpent, alleged to dwell in 
 a district under the authority of Mbau, which 
 is called Nakauvandra, and is situated near the 
 western end of V'iti-Levu. To this deity they 
 believe that the spirit goes immediately after 
 death for purification, or to receive sentence. 
 
 All spirits, however, are not believed to be 
 permitted to reach the judgment seat of Nden- 
 46 
 
 gei ; for, upon the road it is supposed that an 
 enormous giant, armed with a large axe, stands 
 constantly on the watch. With this weapon 
 he endeavors to wound all who attempt to 
 pass him. Those who are wounded dare not 
 present themselves to Ndengei, and are obliged 
 to wander about in the mountains. Whether 
 the spirit be wounded or not, depends not upon 
 the conduct in life ; but they ascribe an escape 
 from a blow to good luck. They have four 
 classes of gods besides their malicious deities. 
 
 The occasions on which the priests are re- 
 quired to ofliciate are usually the following : 
 to implore good crops of yams and taro ; on 
 going to battle ; for propitious voyages ; for 
 rain ; for storms, to drive boats and ships 
 ashore, in order that the natives may plunder 
 them ; and for the destruction of their enemies. 
 Their belief in a future state, guided by no 
 just notions of religious or moral obligation, is 
 the source of many abhorrent practices ; among 
 which are the custom of putting their parente 
 to death when they are advanced in years, sui- 
 cide, the immolation of wives at the funeral of 
 their husbands, and human sacrifices. (See 
 Human Sacrifices.) 
 
 Mbau, the metropolis and imperial city of 
 Feejee, is situated on a small island about two 
 miles in circumference. It contains nearly one 
 thousand inhabitants, most of whom are chiefs. 
 The houses are of a very superior description. 
 
 In October, 1835, Rev. Wm. Cross and D. 
 Cargill .proceeded from Vavau, one of the 
 Friendly Islands, to Lakemba, one of the Fee- 
 jee Islands. It was but a small island, being 
 only about 22 miles in circumference, and did 
 not contain above 1000 inhabitants. With a 
 view of ^certaining the disposition of the 
 chiefs ana people, it was agreed that the two 
 missionaries should go ashore in the boat. As 
 they approached the beach, many of the natives 
 were running hither and thither on the sand ; 
 and as they drew near the landing-place, nearly 
 200 men were standing at the distance of about 
 100 feet from it, some armed with muskets, 
 others with bayonets fastened to long sticks, 
 some with clubs and spears, others with bows 
 and arrows, their faces painted some jet black, 
 others red, some after one fashion, others after 
 another. This was rather a formidable array. 
 However, being told that the chief wished to 
 know who they were, and what they wanted, 
 the missionaries went on to his house, a large 
 building within a fortress, nearly a mile from 
 the shore. Having had their object exnlained 
 to him, he appeared friendly, gave them a 
 piece of laud on which to live, and built a tem- 
 porary dwelling for each of their families. 
 
 The missionaries soon began to preach to 
 the natives, and in a few months they luiptizcd 
 a number of them, some of whom had previ- 
 ously obtained a knowledge of divine truth in 
 the Friendly Islands. The Gospel silently 
 made its way among the people ; and every 
 week one or more turned their backs upon 
 
729 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 wiliin 
 
 Uoklrr. A deiiro to embrace the new reli- 
 fioo preraUed amoDg many of the iulmbitants 
 Sr lAkemba; bot thoy were afmid ojjonly to 
 deelaM themMlYei, as the chief, notwitlistand- 
 ittff hb flwt profesBion, tlireateriod and j)ersc^ 
 JxTu^] tlH.^> wlu» first einbruccd it. He himself 
 Iv a irilmtary chief, and appeared un- 
 • • ' I'lv step in favor of Christian- 
 , the mind of the more power- 
 ful clu... -. i j '"■ •* When Tauao," said he, 
 icferriog to one ''of the most renowned chiefs, 
 •• leads the way, I and all my people will em- 
 brace the new religion." 
 
 In the coarse of a few years, the missiona- 
 ries, with the aid of native teachers and preach- 
 ers, some of whom cumc from the Vavau 
 laiimK introduced the Gospel into various 
 otber islands of the Fecjee Group, beside La- 
 kemba,as Bewa, Vewa, Bua, Naudy, and some 
 others of le&j importance. Though in some 
 instances they had many difficulties to contend 
 with, yet, generally speaking, they met with 
 a favorable reception from the chiefe and 
 people. Their motives, however, for this kind 
 reception of the missionaries were very various, 
 and, in some instances, altogether of a secular 
 character. But the missionaries labored on, 
 trying to enter every open door, and sow " the 
 seed of the kingdom " even on Feejeean soil. 
 Nor did they toil in vain. In 1845 and the 
 following year, there was a religious movement 
 in the island of Vewa, which extended also to 
 others of the islands, similar to that at the 
 Friendly Islands, already described. " Busi- 
 ness, sleep, and food," says Mr. Hunt, in de- 
 scribing it, " were almost entirely laid aside. 
 We were at length obliged almost to force 
 some of the new converts to take ^methiug 
 for the sustenance of the body. Some of the 
 cases were the most remarkable I have ever 
 heard of ; yet only such as one might expect 
 the conversion of such dreadful murderers and 
 cannibals would be. If such men manifested 
 nothing more than ordinary feelings when they 
 repent, one would suspect they were not fully 
 convinced of sin. They literally roared for 
 hoars, through the discjuietude of their souls. 
 This frequently terminated in fainting from 
 exhaustion, which was the only respite some 
 of them had till they found peace. They no 
 sooner recovered their consciousness thau they 
 prayed themselves first into an agony, and 
 then again into a state of entire insensibility. 
 The results of this work of grace have been 
 most happy. The preaching of the word has 
 been attended with more power than before 
 the revival. Many who were careless and use- 
 less have become sincere and devoted to God. 
 The experience of most has been much im- 
 proved, and many have become by adoption 
 and regeneration the sons of God." 
 
 Says Mr. Wat.tford, " The people, old and 
 voung, chiefs and common people, were broken- 
 hearted before the Lord. The cries for mercy 
 drowned every other sound, and the struggling 
 
 and roaring for deliverance evinced indO' 
 scribable agony and bitterness of spirit. They 
 felt themselves great sinners, and their repent> 
 ance was deep and genuine. The joy of those 
 who were pardoned was as great as their dis- 
 tress had been. At some of our meetings the 
 feeling was overpowering, and the peoi)le fell 
 before the Lord, and were unable to stand, be- 
 cause of the glory." Perhaps the most remark' 
 able instance of the mercy of Heaven whicl 
 this revival witnessed, was the conversion of 
 chief, whose, name was Varin. He had lonj 
 acted as the human butcher of Seni, callet 
 " the Napoleon of Feejee." He was a man 
 a dreadful character. But by the faithfuj 
 warnings and instruction of the missionaric 
 his guilty conscience was aroused, and hil 
 haughty looks were humbled ; and now, likj 
 another Paul, he is preaching " the faith 
 once labored to destroy." 
 
 The missionaries continued to pursue theil 
 work in the midst of dangers, and scenes ol 
 blood and cruelty, which make the flesh cree| 
 at the bare recital, and were cheered to fine 
 that the Gospel was, even in Feejee, "the 
 power of God unto salvation to every one thai 
 believeth." God wonderfully protected thei 
 from every evil, and the little flocks which thej 
 have gathered have grown in grace, and ii 
 numbers far beyond the most sanguine anticid 
 pations of those who projected the mission^ 
 Mr. Young, who has just returned from Feejeei 
 bears the following testimony to the state o 
 things : " After visiting Lakemba and Vewa, 
 proceeded to Bau, the capital of the country 
 and doubtless the deepest hell upon earth, 
 Here I was shown six hovels in which 18 ha 
 man beings had recently been cooked, in ord€ 
 to provide a feast for some distinguished 
 stranger, and the remains of that horrid repasi 
 were still to be seen. I next went to one 
 the temples, at the door of which was a largi 
 stone, against which the heads of the victimi 
 had been dashed, previous to their being pro? 
 sented in the teiWe, and that stone still bor 
 the marks of Wood. I saw — but I pauses 
 There are scenes of wickedness in that countrj 
 that cannot be told. There are forms of caa 
 nibalism and developments of depravity thai 
 can never be made known. No traveler 
 whatever may be his character, could h 
 the hardihood to put on record what he wit 
 nesscd in that region of the shadow of deatl 
 I went to see Sakembow, the king of Feeje( 
 He received me with great politeness, atki 
 got up and handed me a chair ; and hil 
 queen knowing I was from England, at one 
 made me a comfortable cup of tea — a thinf 
 hardly expected in the palace of a canniba 
 king. Before I left, King George (of Yavaa 
 arrived at the palace, and I requested him 
 deal faithfully with Sakembow's conscience 
 and I believe he attended to my request, an( 
 did it with good effect, and I hope the frui 
 of that visit will be found after many days 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 728 
 
 •sJBloqos 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 pnB SJsquiaH 
 Suipnpnt 'diqs 
 -JOAV oiiqnj no 
 
 
 ?f 
 
 ^f n 
 
 i 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 4,000 
 850 
 410 
 600 
 
 . % i 
 
 s^uBpaenv JO -oij 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 er Of Scholars, 
 for those who 
 3th Sabbatli 
 day Schools. 
 
 1 
 
 2,307 
 2,560 
 3,061 
 
 00 
 
 3,168 
 350 
 280 
 270 
 
 * 
 
 4,068 
 11,996 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 « * « * 4 
 
 » » 
 
 
 al Numb 
 educting 
 attend b 
 nd Week- 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 » « 
 
 
 » • • 
 
 e' " 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •saxag 
 qioq JO SJBioqog 
 
 i 1 i « * 
 
 ► 1 
 
 ,168 
 350 
 280 
 270 
 
 • 
 
 ,068 
 ,996 
 
 -J^va }0 Jaquin^ 
 
 
 
 *~ 
 
 
 
 ri s 
 
 •S[ooqos 
 
 1-) <M r-l « 
 
 « 
 
 '^ 
 
 s s *- *- * 
 
 § 1 
 
 -ATJd JO laquin^ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 •saxag q>oq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JO SJBioqos-q;«q 
 
 
 ; 
 
 : : 
 
 
 : ; 
 
 
 '. '. \ \ * 
 
 : : 
 
 -<IBS JO jaqrani^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •Siooqos-qi^q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • * 
 
 •1 • 
 
 -qBg JO Jaqiunx; 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 1 ' 
 
 ■diqsaeqaiaH 
 
 4! 
 
 « 
 
 * « 
 
 « 
 
 » 
 
 g § S : • 
 
 r 1 s 
 
 JOJ IBIJX UQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 :» 1 s 
 
 •SJaqraaH qoJtiqo 
 
 I 1 1 i 1 
 
 > rH 
 
 o o o « 
 
 « t- 
 
 pa;ip9J03vyuB 
 
 3 S 
 
 g 
 
 r: S § f5 • 
 
 s s 
 
 ntij JO jaqoin^ 
 
 M ^- cT 
 
 
 
 
 (n" oT 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6-^ 
 i5 =* 
 
 g S g S 5 
 
 ' 1 
 
 • fi 
 
 g a o o ♦ 
 
 2 S 
 
 1 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 f 
 
 III 
 1^1 
 
 
 
 : : 
 
 
 : : 
 
 1 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 • . • • * 
 
 : : 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 iU 
 
 1 s 1 • 
 
 « 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 1 § S gJ • 
 
 B i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■«) 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 1^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 
 • r- 
 
 •c 
 
 00 
 
 H 
 
 o w to o • 
 
 8 S 
 
 ,4^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •s^uB^sissy 
 pnB saiaBuoisfeOT 
 
 (M 
 
 (M 
 
 m iH 
 
 - 
 
 o> 
 
 ■^H •»«< CO « rH 
 
 ;s §3 
 
 •BaoBii-SaxqoBaJj 
 
 <= 
 
 
 • •^ 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 
 ?3 ^ 
 
 J3q:^o JO jaqoin^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •siadBqo 
 
 § 
 
 a- 
 
 S *" 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 JP t- M M ♦ 
 
 S 2 
 
 JO jequini^ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gS| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •S 
 
 i^i 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 ego 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 J 
 i 
 
 5Z 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 .] 
 
 ji 
 
 1 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 « r, 
 
 >e 
 
 
 
 ^ w «• '#• "O 
 
 
1U 
 
 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 Bat notwithstanding the darkness nnd im- 
 plctv, and nln ond connilmlism in Fetjeo, a 
 great work it= Jx^ing effected in that countrj' 
 Ke fool bird* of ni{flit nre hastening away 
 •nd tJ»o Sun of Kii'htwusness is about to 
 orbc with majesty and (flory in that benight- 
 ed land. >tuch gocxl hna already been acconi- 
 pY^h.^i \\\' have 3,000 of the people in 
 cli !up; 4,000 in the schools; and 
 
 6,i'< attendants on the ministry. 
 
 We have 50 native teachers, who are valiant 
 for the truth, and who in different parts of 
 the land are making known the power of 
 Christ's galvation." Then the people in gene- 
 ra] are beginning to understand and to value 
 the character, the motives, and the objects of 
 the missionaries ; and the conviction gains 
 ground, even in the minds of the priests them- 
 eelves, that the idolatry of Feejee is doomed 
 to fall before the conquering religion of the 
 Son of God. Both in the Friendly Isles and 
 in Feejee, the printing-press is in active ope- 
 ration ; and bv the assistance of the British 
 and Foreign Bible Society, the natives of both 
 have been well supplied with the Word of God, 
 and this fact accounts for the failure of Popery 
 among the Wesleyan missions in Polynesia. 
 AcTHORiTiEs : Anmuil Revorts and Missionary 
 Noiius ; J. JlunCs Life of Mr. Cross ; Brown's 
 History of Missions, Vol. I. ; Missions in Ton- 
 pa and Feejee, by Walter Laiory, and Wilkes' 
 Vnited States Exploring Expedition. — Rev. W. 
 Bun.KR- 
 
 Temperance. — The introduction of spirituous 
 liquors into the South Sea Islands has proved 
 one of the greatest obstacles in the way of the 
 Gospel. The Tahitians were early taught by 
 some natives of the Sandwich Islands to distil 
 ardent spirits from the ti root, and they soon 
 acquired such a fondness for it, that no sacri- 
 fice was deemed too great by which the grati- 
 fication of their appetite might be secured. 
 "Whole districts frequently united to erect a 
 rode still, of which, at one time, there were on 
 Tahiti alone. 150. The first spirit that issued 
 from the still, on account of its being the 
 strongest, was called ao, and was carefully pre- 
 eerved and given to the chiefs. The less pow- 
 erful liquor which was subsequently obtained, 
 was distributed among the common people. 
 A temporary house was erected over the still, 
 where the men and boys assembled, and spent 
 several days in rioting and drunkenness, and 
 where they often practised the most atrocious 
 barbarities. When they were either preparing 
 a still or engaged in drinking, it was impossi- 
 ble to obtain from them the most common offi- 
 ces of hospitality. " Under the uurestrained 
 mflnence of their intoxicating draught, in 
 tiieir appearance and actions they resembled 
 demons more than human beings. Sometimes 
 in u deserted btill-house might be seen the 
 firagmenta of the rude boiler, and the other 
 appendages of the still, scattered in confusion 
 on the ground, and among them the dead and 
 
 I mangled bodies of those who had been mnr- 
 I dered with axes or billets of wood in the quar- 
 rels that had terminated their debauch." It 
 wtus not among themselves only that they quar- 
 reled ; vessels were sometimes seized, and their 
 crews murdered. The most daring acts of out- 
 rage and cruelty occurred from time to time, 
 and led the missionaries to feel that if these 
 immoralities were not suppressed, the most 
 disastrous consequences would ensue, not only 
 to the natives but to themselves. A meeting 
 of the missionaries was convened in 1831, for 
 the purpose of considering what could be done 
 to counteract the existing evils. Each one 
 made a report respecting his station, and 
 deeply lamented the comparative smallness of 
 his congregation and the little regard paid to 
 divine things. The cause which had operated 
 in producing so sad a change was sought for, 
 and it was found in the use of spirituous liquors 
 among the people. The formation of a Tem- 
 perance Society was proposed and agreed to 
 by the missionaries, who all resolved to use 
 their influence to induce the natives to engage 
 with them to abstain entirely from all ardent 
 spirits. Papers were immediately drawn up, 
 stating the object of the Society and signed 
 by the missionaries at each station. At Papa- 
 ra, a district on the island of Tahiti, the chief 
 Tati entered cheerfully into the plan, and in a 
 short time the society at that station number- 
 ed 360. " The vacant seats in the chapel be- 
 gan again to be filled, the schools were well 
 attended, and attention to religion revived ; 
 the happy state of things prior to the introduc- 
 tion of spirits re-appeared." The people were 
 so much delighted with this change, that they 
 called a meeting of the inhabitants of that dis- 
 trict, and agreed among themselves that they 
 would not trade with any vessel that should 
 bring ardent spirits to their shores. The chiefs 
 and people of other districts, seeing the favor- 
 able results of this measure at Papara, follow- 
 ed the good example. Soon after this the 
 "Parliament" met. Before proceeding to 
 business, the members sent a message to the 
 queen to know upon what principles they were 
 to act. She returned a copy of the New Tes- 
 tament, saying, " Let the principles contained in 
 that book be the foundation of all your proceed- 
 ings ;" and immediately they enacted a law to 
 prohibit trading with any vessel which brought 
 ardent spirits for sale. It was some months 
 after the formation of the Temperance Society 
 at Tahiti before it was joined by the queen 
 and her attendants. In March, 1834, a meet- 
 ing of the Irite Ture, or law-makers, was held 
 to prohibit the importation of spirits, at which 
 it was agreed that if any one was found to 
 have used even one glass, he should be tried, 
 and that if proved guilty he should suffer a 
 penalty, which was, for a native, ten hogs, and 
 for a foreigner, ten dollars, and banishment 
 from the country. Notwithstanding this pe- 
 nalty, the runaway seamen who were living at 
 
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS. 
 
 725 
 
 Tahiti, continually smuggled liquor on shore, 
 but whenever they were discovered their rum 
 was poured upon the beach. 
 
 In 1831, during the absence of Mr. Williams 
 from Raiatea, an unprincipled captain brought 
 a cask of spirits to the island, and sold it to 
 the natives. Encouraged by their chief, the 
 people gave way to almost universal dissipa- 
 tion. As the cask which had been imported 
 was sufficient only to awaken a desire for more, 
 they prepared stills and commenced the distil- 
 lation of spirits from the ti root. Mr. Wil- 
 liams, on his return, found the people in a 
 dreadful state. A meeting was immediately 
 called, which Mr. Williams attended, and reso- 
 lutions were passed that all the stills should be 
 destroyed. A. new judge was chosen, the laws 
 were re-established, and persons selected to go 
 round the island and carry the resolutions into 
 effect. In some districts they met with con- 
 siderable opposition, but they made repeated 
 circuits, and, in the course of a few months, 
 every still was demolished, and every still-house 
 burnt to the ground. A law was also enacted, 
 inflicting a heavy penalty on any one who 
 should be found engaged in the work of distil- 
 lation. A temperance society was soon after 
 formed at Eaiatea, which was joined by the 
 dissipated young chief, who said, in a letter to 
 Mr. Williams after his return to England, 
 " The spirits, about which your thoughts were 
 evil towards me, I have entirely done away 
 with, because my heart is sick of that bad 
 path, and I am now 'pressing towards the 
 mai-k for the prize of my high calling.' These 
 are now my thoughts, that God may become 
 my own God. This is really my wish. I am 
 commending myself to God and to the word of 
 his grace." 
 
 Daniel Wheeler, a member of the Society 
 of Friends, who visited these islands in 1834, 
 states that, though great efforts were made to 
 suppress the traffic, yet spirituous liquors were 
 introduced clandestinely, and in some of the 
 islands, produced most disastrous results. He 
 states, also, the disgraceful fact that much of 
 this traffic is carried on by American vessels, 
 many of them denominated " temperance 
 
 During the visit of the American Exploring 
 Expedition at the Fecjee Islands in June, 1840, 
 a series of commercial regulations were agreed 
 to by the principal kings and chiefs on the one 
 part, and Commodore Wilkes and some of his 
 officers on the other, the 6th article of which 
 is as follows : 
 
 " All trading in spirituous liquors, or land- 
 ing the same, is strictly forbidden. Any per- 
 son offending, shall pay a fine of twenty-five 
 dollars, and the vessel to which he belongs 
 shall receive no more refreshments. Any spir- 
 ituous liquors found on shore shall be seized 
 and destroyed." 
 
 If these untutored natives had been left to 
 themselves, they might have been saved from 
 
 this scourge. But one of the missionaries 
 writes, in 1841 : " We have had peace in the 
 islands for several years, and, for the last six or 
 seven, we have had but little drunkenness. 
 But, of late, the French and American consuls 
 have determined to break through all restric- 
 tions. I have seen more drunkenness at Eimeo 
 the last six months than in seven years before." 
 The establishment of the French Protectorate 
 at Tahiti has removed all restraints ; and the 
 chiefs at Kaiatea have followed the example 
 of the French, and given encouragement to 
 the traffic, which has exerted a most baneful 
 influence, upon the young people especially. 
 But it is gratifying to know that the members 
 of the church have, for the most part, escaped 
 the seductive influence. 
 
 GENERAL SUMMARY. 
 
 GROUPS OF 
 ISLANDS. 
 
 Georgian Islands. . . 
 
 Society Islands 
 
 Hervey Islands. . , . 
 Samoan Islands. . . . 
 Friendly Islands . . . 
 
 Austral Isbvnds 
 
 Feejee Islands 
 
 Western Polynesia. 
 Paumotu 
 
 *5 
 
 5 
 
 97 
 
 143 
 
 1,221 
 
 490 
 21 
 4 
 
 Totals 59 57 1,981 16,150 538 368 18,972 
 
 1,870 
 9t.)9 
 1,281 
 2,141 
 7,161 
 159 
 2,526 
 
 43 
 
 It 
 
 970 
 
 676 
 
 1.650 
 
 3,680 
 
 7,928 
 
 4,068 
 
 These returns are deficient in several impor- 
 tant points. The number of schools is not 
 given at half the stations, and at some of them, 
 the number of scholars is not given ; though 
 the latter item approximates somewhat to the 
 fact. The number of European missionaries 
 is correctly given from the latest reports ; but 
 the number of native helpers falls liir below 
 the truth. The returns, in regard to the num- 
 ber of church members, are full ; but some of 
 them are several years old, so that the number 
 here stated must fall somewhat below the fact. 
 Taken as it is, it furnishes a very encouraging 
 result, when compared with the labor bestowed 
 upon the missions. Here are 283 communi- 
 cants to each European laborer, which is 
 probably much more than the average among 
 us. And the results of the last year re]Jortcd, 
 show that the work is still progressing in aa 
 encouraging manner. Here is au increase on 
 an average of 10 to each missionary of the 
 London Society, that of the Wesleyans not 
 being given. 
 
 But the peculiar feature of this mission is, 
 that so much of the work has been accom- 
 plished by native agency. Here are 59 sta- 
 tions, and but 57 European missionaries; 
 while many of the stations embrace a largo 
 
796 
 
 SOUTH AMERICA. 
 
 of (mutations, served by natives. 
 
 And, on a large number of islands, there has 
 nerer beeo any labor but that of natives, with 
 the oecaskmal visit3 from missionaries. Insti- 
 lalionB for training native teachers and cvan- 
 gdkta, were establu^heii at an early period of 
 the miaBioo, at Avarua, on Karotonga, in the 
 Hertey Group ; at GriflBth's Town, on Eimeo, 
 in the Georgian Group ; at MaUm, on Upolu, 
 and Leone on Tutuila, in the Samoan Group. 
 There h, also, one or more sustained by the 
 Weelcyans. And these institutions have been 
 eonstantiv turning out teachers and evango- 
 liits. Although we cannot suppose them to 
 the high qualifications required for 
 offices in this country, yet they appear to 
 have labored with great zeal and success, and 
 generally to hav6 sustained an excellent char- 
 acter, both in view of the natives and of the 
 missionaries. 
 
 A missionary ship has been employed most 
 of the time, since tlie establishment of the mis- 
 sion, in furnishing supplies, and in making 
 Toyages among the islands for the purpose of in- 
 troducing the Gospel. The John Williams, the 
 ehip emploved for a number of years past, was 
 purchased by the contributions of children. 
 
 In all these islands, the languages have been 
 reduced to writing by the missionaries, and a 
 literature given them. The entire Scriptures 
 have been translated and printed in the lan- 
 jc of the Georgian, and also of the Ilervey 
 ids, and the New Testament, in Samoan ; 
 and many thousand copies of these, and of ele- 
 mentary books, have been printed and sold in 
 those islands. 
 
 Soon after the formation of churches in these 
 islands, the natives were encouraged to make 
 contributions for the missionary cause ;. and 
 the amount contributed for the last year re- 
 ported was £445. 
 
 Almost everv year, since the Gospel obtained 
 a foothold in these islands, there have been re- 
 ported, at some one or more of the different 
 statlong, such seasons as, among us, are tech- 
 nically termed Revivals, when a community 
 generally are simultaneously moved by the spe- 
 cial presence of the Holy Spirit, to an awaken- 
 ed and earnest attention to the great concerns 
 of the soul. And, in the wonderful events that 
 have transpired in this mission, has been lite- 
 rally fulfilled the prophetic declaration, " The 
 isles shall tcait for his /otf."— (For a portion 
 of this article, the author is indebted to a small 
 work entitled, " South Sea Islands," published 
 in Boston, by Tappan & Whittemore.) 
 
 SOUTH Al^feRICA : South America 
 covers an area of 6,500,000 English square 
 miles, its greatest length being 4,550 miles 
 and its greatest breadth 3,200. Three-fourths 
 of this area lie between the tropics, one-fourth 
 in the temperate zone. The long chains of the 
 Andre exercise great influence over the climate 
 of a large portion of the country. Two mil- 
 lions of square miles are fertilized by the Ama- 
 
 zon, and large tracts by the rivers Orinoco and 
 Plata. Prairies cover a large extent of coun- 
 try, and afford, during a part of the year, sus- 
 tenance to immense herds of horses and cattle. 
 The Pacific shore, the basin of the Orinoco, 
 the basin of the Amazon, the country watered 
 by the Plata, and Brazil, form five natural 
 divisions, comprehending the whole continent. 
 
 Brazil. — After the Russian Empire, China, 
 and the United States, this state has the most 
 extensive contiguous territory of any in the 
 world. It possesses more than 4,000 miles of 
 sea-coast, and the coast commerce of the coun- 
 try is second only to that of the United States. 
 The climate is remarkably even and healthy 
 for a tropical country, owing to the great ele- 
 vation of the whole empire. Until Dec. 1849, 
 the yellow fever was not known, and at Rio 
 Janeiro it was said, proverbially, that physi- 
 cians could not live. The fever seems now to 
 have left the country. In mineral and vegetable 
 productions, Brazil is exceedingly rich. Coffee, 
 sugar, cotton, furniture and dye-woods, india- 
 rubber, hides, and drugs, are the principal articles 
 for export. The coffee crop more than doubles 
 that of the rest of the world. The Chinese 
 tea-plant is quite extensively cultivated in some 
 of the southern provinces, also the matte. 
 Fruits and flowers abound, and the greater 
 part of the empire enjoys a perpetual summer. 
 
 History. — Brazil was discovered by the Por- 
 tuguese, under Cabral, in 1500. In 1530, it 
 was divided into captaincies, by the king of 
 Portugal. .T)e Souza entered the bay now 
 called Rio de Janeiro in January, 1531 ; and, 
 supposing it to be a river, named it the Rive)' 
 of January. The city founded a few years 
 after this discovery, was called San Sebastian, 
 a name now rarely used. Of the various early 
 colonies, that which possesses the most inter- 
 est, in a historical as well as missionary point 
 of view, is the French Protestant colony, sent 
 out in 1555, to Rio Janeiro, under the auspices 
 of the great and good Admiral Coligny. The 
 idea of building up a Protestant community on 
 the new-found and fertile shores, excited great 
 interest among the persecuted European re- 
 formers. Geneva sent two clergymen and 14 
 students to accompany the colonists. But the 
 enterprise seemed to be attended with misfor- 
 tunes at every step. Through the treachery 
 of Yillegagnon, the leader of the first expedi- 
 tion, the colony was soon broken up, and the 
 whole plan frustrated. ,Yarious colonies were 
 attempted by the French and Dutch ; but 
 finally the whole country of Brazil came under 
 the dominion of Portugal. In 1808, Brazil 
 became the residence of the Portuguese court, 
 Rio Janeiro being the capital. In 1822, un- 
 der Don Pedro I., it became an independent 
 empire. In 1823 an excellent constitution was 
 framed. The government is decentralized. Each 
 of the 21 provinces has its own governor 
 and legislature, besides which there is an im- 
 perial parliament, consisting of a Senate and 
 
SOUTH AMERICA. 
 
 727 
 
 House of Representatives. The emperor, now 
 Don Pedro Sogundo, is the oonstitutional head ; 
 a fine man, descended from the houses of Bra- 
 ganza and Hapsburg, and connected with the 
 Bourbon and Orleans families. The great 
 cities of the empire being situated on the sea- 
 coast, there is little narrow-mindedness and 
 bigotry prevalent among the people. All de- 
 nominations are free to worship God according 
 to the dictates of conscience. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 The American Seamen's Friend Society 
 have, for many years, maintained chaplains in 
 the cities of Brazil. The Methodist Episcopal 
 Church in .the United States have also, for a 
 considerable time, had a mission there. In 
 1833, the subject of a mission to South Amer- 
 ica came before the Missionary Board. 
 
 In 1834, an invitation was received from a 
 few pious persons in Buenos Ayres, and in the 
 hope of being useful to the Protestants of that 
 city, and of gaining a foothold in that land of 
 unmitigated Romani^, the committee resolv- 
 ed to obey the call. Accordingly, the Rev. 
 F. E. Pitts was sent out, and the next year 
 Rev. John Dempster (now President of the 
 Biblical Institute, Concord, N. H.,) was ap- 
 pointed to follow him. A congregation was 
 soon formed, and a church built ; and after 
 that a parsonage, and now there is a very 
 flourishing Society and Sabbath-school in that 
 city. In 1837, the Board sent out Rev. Dr. P. 
 Kidder and Rev. J. Spaulding. Much was 
 done by Dr. Kidder in the dissemination of 
 the Scriptures, which were everywhere gladly 
 received. Just as he was ready to commence 
 preaching in the Brazilian language, Mrs. Kid- 
 der died, and he was compelled to return with 
 his family of young children. The mission is 
 still continued, and all its expenses are borne 
 by the people. The present missionary is Rev. 
 D. D. Lares 
 
 The next missionary effort was made under 
 the joint auspices of the American Seamen's 
 Friend Society and the American and Foreign 
 Christian Union. Rev. J. C. Fletcher was 
 stationed at Rio, and labored between two and 
 three years, both among his own countrymen, 
 who flock to that port for purposes of commerce, 
 and among the natives. He found copies of 
 the Bible in the Portuguese language, which 
 had doubtless been given or sold by Dr. Kidder. 
 He found tracts especially useful ; and in the 
 city, in the foreign hospitals, and in the coun- 
 try, tracts and Bibles were always gladly re- 
 ceived. He there made journeys from 30 to 
 200 miles into the interior, always having with 
 him a supply of Bibles and tracts. In some 
 instances, he had discussions with the prR'sts, 
 some of whom were induced to receive the 
 Bible. One not only with joy received the 
 Word, but demanded Bibles and tracts, ibr dis- 
 tribution among his people. Mr. Fletcher heard 
 this priest read the Bible to his people iu their 
 
 own vernacular. The priests, as a general 
 thing, are ignorant, lazy, impure, and not very 
 devoted to their own religion. Infidelity pre- 
 vails among them, and an English Roman 
 Catholic priest, of Rio de Janerio, informed 
 Ex-Governor Kent, American Consul at Rio, 
 that a priest of his acquaintance died a few 
 years ago refusing the sacrament to the last. 
 Dr. Kidder found a few excellent priests, who 
 seemed to appreciate the Bible ; and one or 
 two were very desirous to see it introduced 
 into the schools of the empire. Sen. Feijo, 
 formerly regent of the empire, was once a 
 priest, and even a bishop ; but he wrote the 
 most powerful book against the celibacy of the 
 Brazilian priesthood and of the Romish clergy in 
 general, that has appeared from any other pen 
 either Romanist or Protestant. Through the 
 influence of Feijo, Montezuma, and other Bra- 
 zilian statesmen, this important step towards 
 breaking from Rome, i. e., the marriage of the 
 clergy, nearly became a law. There ie a great 
 deficiency of priests in Brazil, and for years 
 the presidents or governors of the different 
 provinces when delivering their messages, make 
 this the subject of much complaint. Some 
 parishes have been twenty years without a 
 priest, and the country is constantly increasing 
 in wealth and population. The priests are cor- 
 rupt and the people have very little of what 
 the French call religiosit'e. 
 
 An attempt was mado by some foreign 
 priests, to prevent Dr. Kidder from circulating 
 the Bible ; but their efforts made the Bible 
 more sought for. In 1846, an American gen- 
 tleman residing in one qf the southern pro- 
 vinces, received from the United States a 
 number of Portuguese Bibles, from the Ameri- 
 can Bible Society. Some foreign priests per- 
 suaded a few of the people to give up these, 
 and they were burned ; but the Brazilian priests 
 were indignant, and at a great festival, bor- 
 rowed a large gilt Bible, belonging to this 
 American gentleman, and bore it at the head 
 of one of their processions. During a part of 
 1852 and 1853, Mr. Fletcher was Secretary of 
 the U. S. Legation at Rio, and enjoyed unusual 
 facilities among the higher portion of the Bra- 
 zilians for promoting religion. He was begin- 
 ning to reap the advantage of such a position 
 for religious influence, when he was called away 
 by sickness in his family. During his residence 
 there, the yellow fever raged, and he Avas called 
 to witness many deaths among his country- 
 men, and also, to behold, in the midst of this 
 terrible pestilence, the spiritual birth of many. 
 
 The Roman Catholic religion in Brazil, has 
 been several times almost severed from the 
 authority of the Pope. It is characterized by 
 great indifference in its devotees, and by great 
 theatrical splendor on festival occasions — the 
 only occasions, except funerals, when the 
 churches are full. Mr. Fletclier says : " I 
 have seen the Romish Church in France, Ger- 
 many, and Italy ; but in show, glitter, and the- 
 
m 
 
 SOUTH AMERICA— SUNDAY SCHOOLS. 
 
 •trieal cflbct. nrazil takw the loud. The slave 
 trade in Hnudl wa* formally put down by 
 BriUrii cruixers lu IHSO. Slavery will soon be 
 done »wav with, (thouph nearly two-lhirds of 
 
 tbepoiM* ' ■ Un'oause eolor is not 
 
 i^qif^lir ability. Some of the 
 
 Moffii'- • •• rs nnicnt, civil and mili- 
 taiT, tw tingeti with African blood. On the 
 whole, there is no part of the Roman Catholic 
 world, Mcent the Uniteil Sates and England, 
 where missionary labors are so unimpeded, 
 or where they would be better rewarded.— 
 The press is entirely free. There are three or 
 four Knglish chaplains in the coast cities. 
 Railroads are being built, and other indications 
 of progress are manifest. 
 
 "In 1852 and 1853, treaties were made by 
 the United States, through our ministers, Hon. 
 Meeers. Sehenck and Pendleton, with the repub- 
 lics of Untf^tay, the Argentine Confedei-atioii, 
 and Paraguay (so long shut up), and clauses 
 permitting Protestant worship and the burial 
 of the Protestant dead, were insisted on and 
 agreed to. 
 
 '* Patagonia is still heathen ground, and so 
 fttr as known, the inhabitants have very few 
 religious rites and no idols. The Teerra del 
 Fugians are sunk very low in barbarism, though 
 the few that I saw in the straits of Magellan 
 apiKaretl as capable of elevation as our North 
 American Indians." An attempt was made 
 in 1850 and 1851, by some English mission- 
 aries, to labor among them ; the sad account 
 of whose sufferings and death from starvation, 
 has appeared in the newspapers. 
 
 " Chili," continues Mr. Fletcher, " is the most 
 peaceful, and perhaps the most flourishing of 
 the Spanish-American republics. But, at the 
 present time, the priests' party rule. There is 
 no freedom of opinion in religious matters. 
 The press is muzzled ; the Bible in the Spanish 
 language is forbidden to be circulated. Out 
 <^ Valparaiso, the Protestant dead are buried 
 like do^. Such abject devotion to the Church 
 of Rome docs not exist even in Rome itself, as 
 I hare witnessed among the Chilians at Val- 
 paraiso. Rev. David Turnbull labored there 
 a namber of years, as a mi.«sionary of the Ame- 
 rican and Foreign Christian Union ; but he 
 now has a regularly organized church of his 
 own. Rev. Air. "Williams, formerly of the 
 Presbyterian church at Uniontown, Pa., is 
 now laboring in Chili for the American and 
 Foreign Christian Union, and has a flourishing 
 school of Chilian youth, who are also under 
 Gospel influences. Mr. Turnbull also has a 
 successful school for young ladies, taught by 
 Mrs. T. and his sister. Chili is progressino- 
 rapidly in material improvements, railroads, 
 mining, &c." 
 
 Peru and Bolivia are both bigoted in the 
 extreme, and nothing has been done bejond 
 individual effort 
 
 ^ew Grenada. — In this state, a few years 
 ago, religious liberty was proclaimed, and the 
 
 Jesuits were banislud, giving the Pope a great 
 deal of trouble. Still, however, the priestly 
 party is very strong, and the recent overturn- 
 ing of the constitutional government has given 
 great pain to all lovers of civil and religious 
 liberty. All the South American governments, 
 with the exception of Brazil, have had bloody 
 revolutions. The influence of the Americans 
 on the Isthmus of Panama, which belongs to 
 New Grenada, has been felt throughout the 
 whole republic. The American Seamen's 
 Friend chaplain, at Panama, Rev. Mr. Ravel, 
 has done something toward distributing the 
 Spanish Scriptures and tract,s. Rev. Mr. 
 Mont Salvatge, a converted Spanish monk, 
 has recently been sent to New Grenada, by 
 the American and Foreign Christian Union. 
 
 Venezuela. — This country has been almost 
 constantly involved in revolutions, and is now 
 under the government of two tyrants, the 
 brothers Monagas. An agent of the Ameri- 
 can Bible Society is now at work there. 
 
 Guiana. — For the missions in British and 
 Dutch Guiana, see West Indies. 
 
 Aborigines. — The aboriginal tribes of South 
 America still exist in large numbers. Thou- 
 sands of them are still in heathenism ; but by 
 far the greater part are very loosely connected 
 with the Church of Rome. In the N. E. portion 
 of the continent are the " Arromack " Indians, 
 for whom a portion of the Bible has been 
 translated. But these tribes, as to Protestant 
 missions, constitute an almost unbroken field. 
 
 SPANISH TOWN : The seat of govern- 
 ment of the island of Jamaica, W. I. It is 
 very pleasantly situated in the interior of the 
 island, 16 miles from Kingston. A station of 
 the Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 ST. EUSTATIUS : (See West Indies.) 
 
 ST. KITTS, or ST. CHRISTOPHER'S : 
 (See West Indies.) 
 
 ST. THOMAS : (See West Indies.) 
 
 ST. VINCENT : (See West Indies.) 
 
 STELLENBOSCH : A station of the Rhen- 
 ish Missionary Society in South Africa. 
 
 STRONG'S ISLAND : An island in Mi- 
 cronesia, where is a station of the American 
 Board. 
 
 SUGANA : A station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society on the Island of Upolu, one of 
 the Samoan group. 
 
 SUMATRA : (See " Indian Archipelago.") 
 
 SUNDAY-SCHOOLS : The institution of 
 Sunday-schools was inaugurated by an humble 
 layman, a little more than seventy years ago ; 
 and it has been mainly conducted and sustained 
 by laymen since that time, and has proved itself 
 a powerful adjunct to the ministry and church 
 of Christ. God has blessed it with wonderful 
 success, and we may safely expect it has far 
 greater blessings in store for our race. Said 
 the late venerable Dr. A. Alexander, " Al- 
 though this method of teaching the young and 
 ignorant is so simple, yet it deserves to be 
 ranked second to no discovery of our age. I do 
 
SUNDAY-SCHOOLS. 
 
 729 
 
 not know that the beneficence of Providence 
 has been more manifest in anything that has 
 occurred in our day, than in the general in- 
 stitution of Sunday-schools. Other benevo- 
 lent institutions provide the means of religious 
 instruction ; but the Sunday-school tnakes the 
 application of them." Says Dr. Drew, of Eng- 
 land, most eloquently — " Honor rest upon our 
 age. A wonderful machinery has sprung up 
 into existence from humble and feeble sources. 
 God gave the word, and since that blessed 
 hour a million of teaching men and women 
 arose on Sabbath mornings to tell infancy of 
 Jesus, and to lead with loving hand the poor 
 man's child onward on Zion's road. In human 
 history no institution of man holds such an honor- 
 ed place. The unpaid, untiring, and unceasing 
 efforts of Sunday-school love, are of the kind- 
 est, strongest and most effective doings of 
 modern times. How do such teachers aid the 
 responsibilities of parents ; relieve and gladden 
 the pastor's heart ; bring Christ and all Christ's 
 truth to warm young hearts, and captivate list- 
 ening ears, and penetrate earth's dark places, 
 led by the light of their own Bible, and cheered 
 by the faith of their Christ-sustained souls." 
 
 The followmg interesting account of the 
 origin of the first Sabbath-school is from the 
 graphic pen of Mr. Lancaster, to whom it was 
 communicated by Mr. Raikes when far ad- 
 vanced in life. " He said," observes Mr. L., 
 " about the year 1782 he had taken a garden 
 and wanted a gardener. He went to the out- 
 skirts of the city of Gloucester to hire one ; 
 and while waiting for the man, he was greatly 
 disturbed by a troop of wretched, noisy boys, 
 who interrupted him while conversing with the 
 man's wife. He anxiously inquired the cause 
 of those children being thus miserably neg- 
 lected and depraved. * sir,' said the woman, 
 * if you were here on a Sunday, you would pity 
 them indeed. They are then much more nu- 
 merous, and a hundred times worse — it is a 
 very hell upon earth. We cannot read our Bible 
 in peace for tJiem.' It was this affecting an- 
 swer which moved every feeling within him. 
 He immediately asked, * Can nothing be done 
 for these poor children ? Is there any body 
 near that will take them to school on a Sun- 
 day ?' He was answered there was a person 
 who kept a school in the lane who perhaps 
 might do it. At this important moment, 
 while revolving the matter in his mind, the 
 
 this, instead of going to bed, he directly wrote 
 a paragraph and had it inserted in his news- 
 paper, the Gloucester Journal, Nov. 3, 1783, 
 in which he described the good effects of the 
 Sunday-schools already in operation, and re- 
 commended their extension over the country. 
 This paragraph was copied into many other 
 papers, and in consequence he had applications 
 from all parts of the empire; an answer to 
 which he published in his paper. The result 
 was, that the dormant zeal of many was called 
 into action, and the establishment of these 
 schools proceeded throughout the nation with 
 the rapidity of lightning. 
 
 " Sept. 7, 1785, a society for the support and 
 encouragement of Sunday-schools in the differ- 
 ent counties of England was formed in lion- 
 don. This society engaged the cooperation of 
 the Bishops of Salisbury and Landaff, the 
 Deans of Canterbury and Lincoln, and other 
 distinguished persons, and was the means of 
 greatly advancing the cause. 
 
 " Before his death, which took place in 1811, 
 Mr. Raikes had accounts of the establishment 
 of similar schools in various parts of the coun- 
 try, embracing no less than 300,000 children. 
 Well might he say, ' I can never pass by the spot 
 where the word try came so powerfully into my 
 mind, without lifting up my hands and Iieart 
 to /leaven, in gratitude to God, for having put 
 such a thought into my heart.'/' 
 
 The schools were at first conducted by 
 hired teachers, who were paid thirty-three cents 
 a Sabbath. This entailed a load of pecuniary 
 difficulty upon the plan. The Sunday-school 
 society alone expended, during the first 16 
 years of its existence, no less than £4,000 ster- 
 ling in the salaries of teachers. Gratuitous 
 instruction was an astonishing improvement 
 upon the system, laying a solid basfls for its 
 efficiency, and ensuring its succe^. 'J'he exact 
 time when this was first introduced was not 
 k\iown, nor where it commenced ; but about 
 the year 1800 this plan became very general. 
 The institution of Sunday-schools was now 
 become universal throughout England. Every 
 city and every town had warmly espoused the 
 cause ; and on July 13, 1803, the London 
 Sunday-school Union was formed, which gave 
 the cause an additional impulse. 
 
 Scotland, as early as 1797, entered spiritedly 
 into this good work, enrolling 34 schools that 
 year, and the next year adding 20 more. 
 
 word 'try' Afas so powerfully impressed on I Wales, at a very early period, entered with 
 his mind as to decide him at once to action, eagerness into the scheme, and adorned her 
 
 He went and entered into treaty with the 
 school-mistress to take a number of these poor 
 destitute children. Here was the first Sabbath- 
 school Britain ever saw. 
 
 " When two years had elapsed after the 
 commencement of the first school, on retiring 
 to rest one evening, Mr. Raikes began to con- 
 sider that his schools had now been fully tried, 
 and that it was time for the public good that 
 they should be made generally known. On 
 
 romantic and picturesque valleys with nume- 
 rous asylums for the instruction of the poor. 
 And the necessity of supplying these schools 
 with Bibles, suggested the idea and letl to iho 
 formation of the British and Foreign Jiible 
 Society. So great was the progress of Sun- 
 dav-schools in Wales, that in three years 177 
 schools were established, containing more than 
 8,000 children. 
 The Sunday-school system was introduced 
 
m 
 
 SUNDAY-SCHOOLS. 
 
 Into IrtUuid in 1793 ; but its progr^ was not 
 r»pid until the forniatiou of the Uiberinan 
 82nda^6ohool Society, in Dublin, in 1809. 
 In April, 1B15, there were 252 schools, con- 
 taining inore than 25,000 children, under the 
 earo of this institution. Since that time the 
 Bonber of schools has been greatly augmented. 
 The first adult Sunday-school wa.s planted by 
 Mr. Charles, upon the mountains of Wales, in 
 themmmer of 1811. 
 
 The first Sunday-school in Asia was cstab- 
 Ikhed by the Wcsleyan missionaries in Ceylon, 
 June 4, 1815, and gained them great favor in 
 the eyes of tlie people. In the Annual Re- 
 port of the London Sunday-school Union, May 
 1, 1818, they give us an account of Sabbath- 
 schools in successful operation in Bordeaux 
 and La Garde, near Montauban, France ; also 
 in Holland, in Rotterdam and Zeist ; also in 
 Sidney, Richmond, and seven other places men- 
 tioned in New South Wales, and further cheer- 
 ing accounts from the cause in Ceylon. 
 
 Tint Sunday-schools in t/ie United States. — 
 The Sunday-school Repository of August, 
 1818, states that the first Sunday-school in the 
 city of New York (and it is believed in this 
 country,) was instituted in 1791, and incorpo- 
 rated in 1796. Its object was to instruct chil- 
 dren to read and write, gratuitously, who were 
 unable to go to school during the week ; but 
 their instructions were carried on by means of 
 hired teachers, and their design did not extend 
 to the religious instruction of the scholars. In 
 the Sunday-school Teachers' Magazine for 
 1824, it is stated that Mr. and Mrs. Bethune 
 had spent part of the years 1801 and 1802 in 
 Great Britain, where they had observed the 
 progress Sunday-schools were then making in 
 that couijtry ; and on their return, they con- 
 versed on the subject with their pious and ex- 
 cellent mother, Mrs. Isabella Graham of New 
 York, who resided with them, and it was deter- 
 mined that as soon as possible they would try 
 to introduce them here. Accordingly, in the 
 autumn of 1803, these three Christian philan- 
 thropists opened the first Sabbath-school in this 
 city, for religious and catechetical instruction, 
 at their men expense, at the house of Mrs. Leech 
 in Mott Street, which was attended by about 
 forty male and female scholars; and their 
 
 Sinctaality of attendance was rewarded on 
 onday mornings, by frequent donations of 
 tracts, shoes 4;c., to a considerable amount. 
 Mrs. Graham and Mr. and Mrs. Bethune then 
 established two other Sabbath-schools in other 
 parts of the city ; which they attended every 
 afternoon during the summer, and during the 
 winter between the services of the churcb,°when 
 they brought their provisions with them from 
 their residence in Greenwich, as there was no 
 time to return to dinner. Mrs. Graham opened 
 the first adult school at Greenwich, on the se- 
 cond Sabbath of June, 1814, only about two 
 months before her departure from this scene of 
 active benevolence to her promised rest It 
 
 was not until 1809, however, that churches or 
 public bodies began to institute and patronize 
 Sabbath-schools in this country. The first 
 school on this plan, was probably one organized 
 August 22, 1809, in the city of Pittsburgh, 
 Pa., which met for the first time, on the first 
 Sabbath of September, in the jury room of 
 the Court House. It was regularly organized 
 under an excellent constitution, and was attend- 
 ed by 240 children and adults. This school 
 was formed without a knowledge of the mode 
 of organization in Europe, and coincided in its 
 
 f>rincipal features with the schools now estab- 
 ished. In 1811 a similar school was established 
 in Philadelphia, under the auspices of the Rev. 
 Robert May, a missionary of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society, who does not appear to have 
 had any knowledge of the school at Pittsburgh. 
 In 1813, a school was established by a gentle- 
 man in Albany, and continued for some time. 
 In the autumn of 1814 a school was establish- 
 ed in Wilmington, Delaware. In April, 1815, 
 schools were commenced in the Northern Liber- 
 ties of Philadelphia, which in a few months 
 contained 500 scholars. In 1816 they began 
 to be generally introduced. 
 
 The citizens of New York claim the honor 
 of forming the first society for the regular or- 
 ganization and conduct of Sabbath-schools. 
 The first proposition for the formation of the 
 Female Union Society, for the promotion of 
 Sabbath-schools, was made by the benevolent 
 ladies of the several denominations in this 
 city, assembled by public invitation on the 
 24th of January, 1816. On the 12th of Febru- 
 ary following, the gentlemen of New York, as- 
 sembled by public notice, adopted measures for 
 the formation of a similar society for boys : 
 and on the 26th of that month, the New York 
 Sunday-school Union Society was instituted. 
 Schools were immediately established ; and 
 during the first year, more than 6000 scholars 
 were entered in their schools. 
 
 About this time Sunday-schools multiplied 
 rapidly all over the United States. In May, 
 1824, the American Sunday-school Union was 
 formed in the city of Philadelphia. This So- 
 ciety has been doing, as rapidly as means have 
 been furnished, a great work for our country in 
 exploring its waste places, establishing schools 
 everywhere, and publishing and circulating a 
 juvenile literature of great value and extent 
 Its operations during the past year embrace the 
 organization of 2,012 new schools, containing 
 not less than 60,000 children, with 8000 volun- 
 tary teachers in them ; besides encouraging 
 and aiding 2,961 other schools, and putting in- 
 to circulation about 50,000 dollars worth of 
 Sunday-school publications. The whole mis- 
 sionary work above referred to, cost ^20,071 68 
 for the work done, or at the rate of ^36 50 per 
 month ; $284 37x for their expenses ; being, 
 in the aggregate, $1 50 per day, or 75 cents a 
 day less than the wages for which the dressers 
 of brown stone are said to have lately " struck" 
 
SUNDAY-SCHOOLS. 
 
 731 
 
 in Philadelpliia, This Society hag already 
 published, and is now circulating^ a catalogue 
 of 872 bound volumes of choice juvenile reli- 
 gious books, and an assortment of other Sab- 
 bath-school requisites. It also publishes the 
 Sunday-school Journal, a serai-monthly paper 
 for teachers, and the Youths' Penny Gazette, 
 every other Aveek for scholars. The latter has 
 a circulation of 135,000. The sales during 
 the year ending March, 1854, amounted io 
 $172,041 30, or an average of 1,720,000 18mo 
 volumes of 120 pages each. 
 
 The General Protestant Episcopal S. S. Union. 
 — Froni the Annual Report of this Society, for 
 1853, it appears that it is quite rapidly increas- 
 ing in means and influence. In 1851, its dona- 
 tion and collection list was reported as only 
 $28 15, while in 1853 the amount had run up 
 to $1,375 95. Its list of Sunday-school books 
 numbers about 224 volumes, and receipts from 
 cash sales in the Depository, $20,793 82. 
 This society embraces the denomination in the 
 U. S., and is located in the city of New York. 
 
 The Sunday-school Union of the Metliodist 
 Episcopal Church. — This Society has its head 
 quarters in the Methodist Book Room, 200 
 Mulberry-street, New York. It reported in 
 1852 in the different states, 9,074 S. Schools ; 
 98,031 officers and teachers ; 504,679 scholars ; 
 1,402,010 volumes in libraries ; 7,213 Bible 
 classes ; 45,632 scholars in infant classes ; 100,- 
 584 S. S. Advocates taken ; 13,242 conver- 
 sions; and expenses of schools $69,094 00. 
 Raised for the S. S. Union, $7,258. It has an 
 , extensive list of excellent juvenile books and 
 tracts, and is constantly adding valuable works 
 to its catalogue. 
 
 The American Baptist Publication Society 
 reports 103 Sunday-school books on its ca- 
 talogue, while three years ago it had only 28. 
 The society is more largely engaged in pub- 
 lishing and selling books and tracts for gene- 
 ral purposes, and the Sunday-school publica- 
 tions are mingled with other sales. 
 
 The New England Sabbath-school Union 
 is an organization in connexion with the Bap- 
 tist denomination in New England, and has 
 its centre of operations in the city of Boston. 
 They have issued the past year 30 reprints, 
 28,000 copies, and 12 new books. They also 
 issue the " Young Reaper," which has a month- 
 ly circulation of 16,000 copies. The entire 
 receipts of the society for the past year were 
 $1,803. It has increased its schools about 50 
 per cent, within the year, and has encouraging 
 prospects for the future. 
 
 Tlie Massachusetts Sabbath-school Society is 
 the Sabbath-school publication society for the 
 Congregational denomination throughout the 
 country. It has received an act of incorpora- 
 tion from the Legislature of Massachusetts, and 
 its capital for its publishing operations was 
 raised some years ago by the friends of the 
 cause, in the vicinity of Boston, where it is 
 located. 
 
 Of late that society has made vigorous and 
 praise-worthy exertions towards extending it« 
 Sabbath-school missionary laboi-s and libraries 
 among the destitute of the West. The ra- 
 pid demand for Sabbath-schools and a whole- 
 some juvenile literature has made the co- 
 operation of this society on an enlarged 
 scale, both timely and grateful to the public 
 The society has published 658 bound volumes, 
 for the libraries. It has also an extensive 
 series of Scripture questions, of which many 
 hundred thousand copies have been circulatecl. 
 Its juvenile paper, the " Well-spring," has an 
 extensive circulation, and is, we believe, the 
 only Sabbath-school paper that is published 
 weekly. From the annual report of 1853, it 
 appears that its sales of books amounted to 
 $23,872 17, the last year, and its donations and 
 legacies were $2,910 95. 
 
 Every city and almost every county in our 
 States has a Sunday-school Union, but un- 
 fortunately they have lost the habit of report- 
 ing regularly to the parent society, so that it 
 is impossible to give with accuracy the' extent 
 of our Sunday-school efforts in the United 
 States. We, however, know the numbers in 
 our cities and some of the counties, and from 
 these we have made an estimate that approxi- 
 mates as nearly as our resources and judgment 
 enables us to do. The result is, we think, all 
 the Sunday-schools of our country contain at 
 the present time not less than 1,800,000 chil- 
 dren, with a noble army of 200,000 voluntary 
 unpaid teachers and ofiBcers. Great Britain 
 includes in her schools, it is estimated, not less 
 than 2,000,000 children, and 200,000 volun- 
 tary teachers — a noble army of 400,000 in 
 these kindred countries, who, with ceaseless 
 energy, are making a vigorous onset upon Sa- 
 tan's kingdom. (Rev. Mr. McClure estimates 
 the children in our Sunday-schools at 3,000,000. 
 See United States.) 
 
 Mission Schools. — The original Sabbath- 
 school of Robert Raikes was preeminently a 
 Mission school ; and for many years, both in 
 England and this country the Sabbath-school 
 effort was mostly of this character. In both 
 countries the earliest efforts were confmcil to 
 paid teachers, and the teachers or teachings 
 were not always of a strictly religion^ charac- 
 ter. Soon, however, the Sabbath-school enter- 
 prise found its lioine and resting-place among 
 the churches ; and the tendency of things of 
 late years has been to gradually relinquish the 
 mission schools, and remain satisfiiHl with 
 teaching the children of the churclio.-?, and such 
 others as could conveniently be brought into 
 company and association with them. Some 
 noble exceptions in different parta of our 
 country ought here to be named, among which 
 stands preeminently the New York Sunday- 
 school Union, and its enterprising and devoted 
 officers and teachers. Besides some 125 
 church Sabbath-schools, this Union embraces 
 between 50 and 60 mission schools, with about 
 
783 
 
 SURAT— SUTTEE. 
 
 1,500 teaeben and 10,000 scholars. About 
 ooo-foorth of these schools were formed in 
 18&S, »od their present efforts arc dcsij,'ned to 
 incraun the uiunl)cr still more rapidly in fu- 
 turv«. Thw union comprises members and 
 churches of 20 different denominations, or 
 thatk'S of denominations, and is well adapted 
 to reach the destitute by ita combined influ- 
 ence. About 20 mission schools are also in 
 MCOOKful oi)eration in Brooklyn. Some of 
 thcM schools have been in operation more 
 than thirty years, and they can refer to their 
 well-trainwl children now standing at the 
 bead of the professions. Many are in the 
 Christian ministry, some of whom are mission- 
 aries of the cross, in pagan lands, and one or 
 two are presidents of colleges. Whole neigh- 
 borhoods of the lowest classes are every year 
 iu a measure purified and elevated by the in- 
 fluence of these mission schools. The personal 
 intemjurse of intelligent, refined and Christian 
 teachers and visitors, with even the most pol- 
 luted and criminal, has the happiest effect in 
 restraining, and now and then of saving. The 
 most bitter hostility against the upper classes 
 is thus checked and changed, so that the great 
 book of remembrance alone can reveal how 
 much the privileged classes are indebted to 
 such teachers for the safety of persons and 
 proprty. The poor emigrant melts into tears 
 of joy as he witnesses the first act of kindness 
 in this strange land, in the approach of the 
 gentle teacher for his children. Said one old 
 man recently, " I thought there was no religion 
 in America until you came and led my chil- 
 dren to the Sunday-school." And said a poor 
 Catholic woman with a bursting heart, " Oh, 
 you Protestants are kinder than the Catholics." 
 There is imperative need everywhere of Chris- 
 tiaua turning their attention and labors more 
 in the direction of this mission school move- 
 ment. 
 
 In all our principal cities, and even in our 
 country towns, there are multitudes of chil- 
 dren, whose religious instruction is neglected. 
 Their Sabbaths are spent in idleness and vice, 
 Olid they are rapidly preparing for their ap- 
 peaiuncc in our criminal courts, gaols and pe- 
 nitentiaries. The Sabbath-school is almost 
 the only instrumentality that can reach them. 
 Its success in reclaiming and saving them has 
 often been tested ; and it must occupy a pro- 
 minent place in any system of measures that 
 may be adopted for the evangelization of our 
 great cities.— R. G. Pardee, Esq. 
 
 SUUAT: A large and populous town on 
 the south bank of the Tuptee river, 177 miles 
 north of Bombay. It is the head-tjuartcrs of 
 a considerable military force, the residence of 
 the British collector, judge, &c., and the chief 
 tribunal for the entire presidency of Bombay. 
 The London Missionary Society had a station 
 at this place from 1813 to 1845. 
 ^ SUUI : Capital of the district of Birbhum 
 m the province of Bengal, 130 miles X.X.W. 
 
 from Calcutta. Station commenced by tho 
 English. Baptists in 1818. 
 SURINAM : (See West Indies.) 
 SUTTEE : The name given in India to a 
 woman who immolates herself on the funeral 
 pile of her husband, and denotes that she is 
 considered true and faithful to liini. The term 
 is also applied to the horrid rite itself. The 
 origin of the practice is supposed to have been 
 the voluntary sacrifice of a widow, who was 
 inconsolable for the loss of her husband, her 
 affection for Che deceased making life a bur- 
 den ; the Brahmins taking advantage of the 
 novelty and admiration it excited to recom- 
 mend the practice as most meritorious and 
 productive of good effect to the souls of the 
 widow, her husband, and the surviving friends, 
 in order to turn it to their own advantage. 
 W. Ewcn, Esq., superintendent of police in 
 the lower provinces of Bengal Presidency, was 
 of the opinion that the widow can rarely be 
 considered voluntary in the sacrifice. Few 
 widows, he says, would ever think of sacrific- 
 ing themselves, unless overpowered with force 
 and persuasion, very little of either being suf- 
 ficient to overcome the physical or mental 
 powers of Hindoo females. A crowd of hun- 
 gry Brahmins represent to her that, by becom- 
 ing a Suttee, she will remain so many years 
 in heaven, rescue her husband from hell, and 
 purify the family of her father, mother, and 
 husband ; while, on the other hand, disgrace 
 in this life, and continual transmigration into 
 the body of a female animal will be the 
 certain consequence of this refusal. In this 
 state of confusion, a few hours quickly pass, 
 and the widow is burnt before she has had time 
 even to think on the subject. 
 
 The details of this practice have often been 
 given in our missionary periodicals. We need 
 not repeat them here. But the extent to 
 which this abomination has been carried, and 
 the terrible sufferings which it has occasioned, 
 will appear from the fact that, in ten years, 
 from 1815 to 1825, no less than 5,997 widows 
 were thus immolated. For a long time the 
 Suttee was winked at by the British govern- 
 ment in India. Dr. Scuddersays that in 1819, 
 when he first went to India, no order had been 
 issued against it. In 1828, a society was 
 formed at Coventry, England, called the Hu- 
 man Sacrifice Abolition Society, the object of 
 which was to effect, by appeals to British hu- 
 manity and justice, the abolition of widow- 
 burning, infanticide, and other superstitious 
 murders in India. In their report for 1834, 
 they state that the Suttee was abolished in tho 
 Bengal Presidency in 1829, and in the other 
 Presidencies the following year. In 1848, 
 Dr. Scudder stated that the practice still pre- 
 vailed in the native States of Meywar, Yotah, 
 Marvvar, Beekaneir, Kishengur, Ulwar, and 
 Boondce, a portion of the country larger than 
 New-England. He says Suttees are rooted in 
 the affections of the people ; as an evidence of 
 
[UFIVBRSIXr] 
 
3'sfXongitoae Ja^ troTg Crggnw.ch 
 
SWAN RIVER-SYRIA. 
 
 733 
 
 which, he states that the Rajah of Ihallawar 
 issued a proclamation denouncing any one 
 who should assist at a widow-burning. He 
 soon after died, and the first victim after his 
 proclamation was his own widow. But he 
 says that, whenever a province is taken 
 possession of by the British government, the 
 Suttee is immediately abolished; and that 
 government is exerting its influence with the 
 native kings to secure its entire abolition ; in 
 consequence of which some of them are issu- 
 ing their orders against it. — The Suttee's Cry 
 to Britain, by J. Beggs ; 3Iiss. Her., Sept., 
 1834, p. 347, and March, 1848, p. 90. 
 
 SWAN RIVER : A settlement in Austra- 
 lia, on the river of this name, occupied by the 
 Wesley an Societv. 
 
 SYDNEY : The capital of Australia. It 
 is situated upon a cove which opens from the 
 spacious basin of Port Jackson. The town is 
 built upon the head of the cove, on a rivulet 
 which falls into it, and in a valley between two 
 opposite ridges. The best houses are of white 
 free-stone, or brick plastered, and have a light, 
 airy appearance. Population about 8,000. It 
 is occupied by the Wesleyans and the Propa- 
 gation Society. 
 
 SYRIAN CHRISTIANS : Called also St. 
 Thomas's Christians. They inhabit the intc^ 
 rior of Malabar and Travancore, in the S.W. 
 part of Hindostan. They extend from N. to 
 S. 150 or 200 miles, and in breadth 40 or 50. 
 Between 50 and 60 churches belong to this 
 ancient branch of the Christian church, which 
 has preserved the Syi'iac Scriptures, in manu- 
 script, from Christ and the Apostles, and, un- 
 connected with the rest of the Christian 
 world, has stood for ages amid the darkest 
 scenes of wickedness, idolatry, and persecution. 
 The tradition among them is, that the Gospel 
 was planted in Hindostan by the apostle 
 Thomas. Landing at Cranganore, or Chen- 
 ganoor, from Aden in Arabia, he was well re- 
 ceived by Masdeus, king of the country, whose 
 son, Zuzan, he baptized, and afterwards or- 
 dained deacon. After continuing some time 
 at Cranganore, he visited the coast of Coro- 
 mandel, and preached the Gospel at Melapoor, 
 and finally at St. Thomas's Mount, near Mad- 
 ras, where he was put to death. His tomb 
 long remained an object of veneration. Dr. 
 Buchanan entertained a decided opinion that 
 we have as good authority to believe that the 
 apostle Thomas died in India, as that the apos- 
 tle Potor died at Rome. 
 
 That Christians existed in India in the second 
 century, is a fact fully attested. The bishop 
 of India was present and signed his name at 
 the Council of Nice, in 325. The next year, 
 Frumentius was consecrated to that office by 
 Athanasius of Alexandria, and founded many 
 churches in India. In the fifth century, a 
 Christian bishop from Antioch, accompanied 
 by a small colony of Syrians, emigrated to 
 India and settled on the coast of Malabar. 
 
 The Syrian Christians enjoyed a succession of 
 bishops, appointed by the patriarch of Anti- 
 och, from the begininng of the third century 
 till thoy were invaded by the Portuguese. 
 They still retain the Liturgy, anciently used 
 in the churches of Syria, and employ in their 
 public worship the language spoken by our Sa- 
 viour in the streets of Jerusalem. 
 
 The first notices of this people in modern 
 times are found in the Portuguese histories. 
 In 1503, there were upwards of 100 Christian 
 churches on the coast of Malabar. As soon 
 as the Portuguese were able, they compelled 
 the churches nearest the coast to acknowledge 
 the supremacy of the Pope; and, in 1599, 
 they burnt all the Syriac and Chaldaic booka 
 and records on which they could lay their 
 hands. The churches which were thus sub- 
 dued, are called the Syro-Roman Christians, 
 and, with the converts from other tribes, form 
 a population of nearly 150,000. Those in the 
 interior would noUgubmit to Rome ; but after 
 a show of union for a time, fled to the moun- 
 tains in 1653, hid their books, and put them- 
 selves under the protection of the native 
 princes, by whom they have been kept in a 
 state of depression. These are called the Sy- 
 rian Christians. About 10,000 persons, with 
 53 churches, separated from the Catholics; 
 but in consequence of the corrupt doctrines 
 and licentious manners of their associates, they 
 have fallen from their former estate, and very 
 few traces of the high character which they 
 once possessed can now be discovered. Their 
 number was estimated in 1825 at about 50,- 
 000. (See Hindostan.) — Chapin's 3Iissionary 
 Gazetteer. 
 
 SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND.— 
 Throughout the Old and New Testaments 
 there is a frequent reference to Syria, a coun- 
 try which has been subject first to one conquer- 
 or and then to another, and made the bloody 
 theatre on which ambition and tpanny have 
 displayed their fiercest energies. The Chal- 
 dees, the Pei-sians, the Romans, the Saracens, 
 the Mohammedans, were successively its mas- 
 ters. In 1517, the Sultan of Turkey took pos- 
 session of Syria, and his successors held sway 
 there without interruption till 1832, when 
 Ibrahim Pasha fought his way into the coun- 
 try, and brought it under the dominion of 
 Egypt. In 1841, with the aid of the European 
 powers, Syria was again restored to Turkey, 
 and ic is still subject to the Sultan, though u 
 dark uncertainty hangs over its future dt^tiny. 
 
 In the south-west "part of Syria, with the 
 Dead Sea and the river Jordan on the right, 
 and the Mediterranean Sea on the left, lies 
 Palestine, or the Holy Land, which has l)een 
 the scene of those great events which involvr 
 the destinies of mankind. Of the present con 
 dition of Svria and Palestine so much ha.v !» , r 
 said by modern writers, that it is unnecf>^:u7 
 to go into particulars here. But as there Is a 
 constant reference in the missionary lecorda to 
 
T84 
 
 SYBIA AND THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 the If ^y ^ g rdigioaB sects which occupy thci 
 ooantiT, some statistics on this subject may be 
 of we to the reader, in the riglit understanding ; 
 of the succeeding pages. From the statements 
 of a »l»ioDnrv, as hite aa 1840, who had en- 
 joyed uonsual iucilitifs for obtaining correct in- 
 'fonnatioD, the following facts are gatliered. 
 
 The i>opultttion of Syria, including Palestine 
 m41 Lebanon, does not vary nmch from one 
 niillioQ and a quarter. Of this population, in- 
 cluding the wandering tribes, the following is 
 a tolerably correct division. 
 
 666,000 
 
 11m ADtioeh or Orthodox Greeks 240,000 
 
 M ^y«M.»— """ 
 
 Otfk Ptfiai* 
 
 Jew. 
 
 Metewaliet, a sect of Uoslems. 
 Axmixtem and Ismayeleea. . . . 
 Anwnians and other sects... 
 
 180,000 
 40,000 
 
 100,000 
 30,000 
 25,000 
 
 200,000 
 
 The Moslems are spread over the whole 
 country, except Lebanon q^ the large moun- 
 tainous r^ions of the Ansaireea, in both which 
 districts they are so few as scarcely to merit 
 attention. The orthodox Greeks extend to 
 every part of Syria and Palestine. The Druses 
 occupy Lebanon, and particularly the southern 
 half of it The Ansaireea and Ismayeleea oc- 
 cupy the large and fertile region north of Tri- 
 poli, and spread over mountain and plain all 
 the way round the head of the sea to Tarsus 
 and the plain of Adona. The Maronites re- 
 side chiefly in Lebanon, while about 2,000 are 
 found in Aleppo, a few in Damascus, and small 
 communities in other places. The Greek Pa- 
 pists are confined chiefly to Aleppo, Damascus, 
 Beirut, Sidon, and different villages in Leba- 
 non, and a few in the Haouran. The Arme- 
 nians reside chiefly in Jerusalem and Aleppo. 
 They increase along the southern frontier of 
 S; ri.i. The Jews, who are chiefly Spanish, 
 ■ iiun, and Polish, are confined mostly to 
 J:;\i.-idem, Hebron, Tiberias, Damascus, and 
 Aleppo. Small communities are found in some 
 of the other cities. Small Arab tribes occupy 
 portions of nearly all the great plains in Syria 
 and Palestine, but chiefly along the eastern 
 frontier and in the Haouran. There is a sect 
 called Yezzidecs, worshipers of the devil, but 
 they are few, and occupy the extreme north- 
 east frontier. 
 
 Tlie Drt^es.— This sect, though not the most 
 numerous, yet holds a very conspicuous place. 
 They derive their name from Mohammed Eben 
 Ismael, surnamed El Drusi, who came from a 
 foreign country, and became a follower of 
 Hakem, the supposed founder of the sect in 
 the eleventh century. 'ITie Druses acknowl- 
 edge seven law givers : Adam, Noah, Abra- 
 ham, Moses, Jesus, Mohammed, and Said. 
 They believe in ten incarnations of God, the 
 last and most important being that in the per- 
 son of Hakem. Thev call Hakem the creator 
 of heaven and earth, the onlv God worthy 
 of reverence in heaven, and the only Lord on 
 
 earth. " He is one, the only one, who knows 
 no consort and no number. He neither begets 
 nor is begotten. He does what he will and as 
 he will. He tears down and builds up. He 
 lifts up and throws down. He says to all 
 things, be ; and they are. He is the begin- 
 ning and the end of all things. He is the be- 
 ginning . and the end, the powerful, the excel- 
 lent, the victorious. I am, he says, the foun- 
 dation of religion, the way, the Lord of the 
 resurrection and the new life, &c." This Ha- 
 kem, they bdievc, will appear again in human 
 form, at the judgment, to give to every man 
 according to his desert. The time of his com- 
 ing is pointed out to be when kings rule with 
 unlimited power, and Christians get the supe- 
 riority over the Moslems. At the judgment 
 those who are called Muwahhidin, i. e. Unita- 
 rians, in opposition to Polytheists and Chris- 
 tians, will be rewarded, and all apostates pun- 
 ished. There are two classes of Druses, viz., 
 the Akkal, or the learned and initiated ; and 
 the Jahal, or the ignorant and uninitiated. 
 The initiated are very strict in regard to food, 
 not eating with strangers ; in regard to mar- 
 riage, not marrying out of their own order ; 
 and in the use of oaths, using only the expres- 
 sion, " I have said it." They form a sort of 
 sacred or aristocratic order, and perform the 
 ceremonies of their religion in secret. From 
 them is taken the imam, the spiritual or eccle- 
 siastical head of the Druses. The uninitiated, 
 comprehending the greater part of the Druses, 
 and even the emir himself, who is not permitted to 
 interfere in matters of religion, are very differ- 
 ent as to religion and religious usages. They 
 make no distinctions of meats, drink wine, 
 marry wives out of their own sect, and wear a 
 variegated dress. They conform to the reli- 
 gion which happens to predominate. With 
 the Mohammedans they are Mohammedans ; 
 with the Christians they are Christians. This 
 conduct is said to be commanded them in their 
 sacred books, in order to conceal the fact that 
 they belong to a particular sect. This class 
 of the Druses are exceedingly ignorant and 
 degraded, knowing but little about God, and 
 still less about the Saviour ; yet they are teach- 
 able, and not being subject to ignorant and 
 bigoted priests, they have been found more 
 ready to receive the Gospel than the nominal 
 Christians of Syria. 
 
 Missions op the Ameeican Board. — Rev. 
 Messrs. Levi Parsons and Pliny Fiske, em- 
 barked at Boston, Nov. 3, 1819, for what was 
 then denominated the mission to Palestine, 
 and on the 15th of the following January, they 
 entered the harbor of Smyrna. In December 
 of the same year, Mr. Parsons embarked for 
 Jerusalem, where he arrived in March — the 
 first Protestant missionary who had entered 
 that field with a view of making it the centre 
 of his own evangelical operations. He had, 
 however, scarcely surveyed his field, when dis- 
 ease undermined his constitution, and he em- 
 
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 735 
 
 barked for Alexandria, where he died, Febru- 
 ary 10, 1822. Ill April, 1823, Mr. Fiske en- 
 tered Jerusalem, accompanied by Rev. Jonas 
 Kiug. They spent some time in explorations 
 in and around the holy city, and in excursions 
 to Lebanon and other places, meanwhile dis- 
 tributing Scriptures and tracts, and studying 
 the prevailing language. In November, 1823, 
 Rev. William Goodell and Rev. Isaac Bird, 
 with their wives, arrived at Beirut. As this 
 city holds a conspicuous place in the history of 
 the Syrian mission, a particular description of 
 it seems desirable. Soon after their arrival 
 the missionaries wrote : 
 
 " Beirut is pleasantly situated at the foot of 
 Mount Lebanon, on the western side of a large 
 bay, in latitude 33° 49' N. and long. 35o 50' 
 E. It has a fertile soil, and is abundantly fur- 
 nished with good water from spring that flow 
 Irom the adjacent hills. The houses are built 
 of mud, and of a soft, crumbling stone, and are 
 dark, damp, and inconvenient. The streets are 
 narrow and dirty, and during the winter are 
 seldom dry. They were once paved, in a slov- 
 enly manner with stones of irregular shape, 
 which are now wide apart, and simply furnish 
 stepping stones in rainy weather. The filth of 
 the city, together with its dampness in winter 
 and its heat in summer, renders it a very un- 
 desirable place for a family. Ships are forced 
 to lie at anchor at the eastern extremity of the 
 bay, about two miles from the city. The port 
 is choked up with sands, and with some of the 
 pillars of granite, which remain as almost the 
 only relics of the ancient magnificence of the 
 place. On the north and north-west Beirut is 
 entirely open to the sea, and at no great dis- 
 tance to the east is Lebanon, which stretches 
 far to the north and to the south. Nearer to 
 the city on the south, is a large and beautiful 
 plain, varied by small hills, covered with olive, 
 palm, orange, lemon, pine, and mulberry trees, 
 and enlivened by numerous cottages. From 
 the terrace? of the house we occupy wo can 
 count more than 200 of these cottages, scatter- 
 ed here and there among the trees. Besides 
 three large mosques and several smaller ones, 
 the city contains a Roman Catholic, a Maron- 
 ite, a Greek, and a Catholic Greek church." — 
 {See Beirut.) 
 
 In view of this beginning of Protestant mis- 
 sions in a quarter of the world the most inter- 
 esting and sacred, the Board say in their re- 
 port for 1824 : " In Jerusalem, the ancient 
 capital of the visible Church, the standard of 
 truth and righteousness has been erected, it is 
 hoped, never more to be permanently removed. 
 Among the mountains of Lebanon, the Gospel 
 has been proclaimed to Druses, Maronites, Sy- 
 rians, and Greeks. Jordan and the Dead Sea 
 have heard the sound, and Bethlehem, Caper- 
 naum, and Nazareth. In that most interest- 
 ing portion of the world, the light of life, after 
 having been for ages quite extinguished, has 
 been rekindled — and by whom ? The mission- 
 
 aries of the Board — thanks unto our merciful 
 {jtod for the unmerited privilege— have been 
 among the first and principal instruments. A 
 great crowd of witnesses upon earth, and 
 doubtless many more on the heights of the 
 heavenly Zion, contemplate this enterprise." 
 A prominent feature in the mission for the first 
 few years, was the determined and systematic 
 opposition to the circulation of the Bible, 
 made by the Romish church ; and not to the 
 Bible only, but to the preaching of the Gospel, 
 the establishment of schools, and the diffusion 
 of knowledge generally. In spite of the op- 
 position, however, a school was established 
 and continued at Beirfit, and the Scriptures 
 were put into the hands of many, notwithstand- 
 ing a proclamation from the Grand Signior 
 forbidding their distribution. In the fall of 
 1825, Mr. King left the mission, having engag- 
 ed in it only for a limited period. About the 
 same time a severe loss was sustained in the 
 death of Mr. Fj^ . He had been preparing 
 an Arabic ancfflEnglish dictionary, which it 
 was necessary now to commit to other hands. 
 
 As the missionaries became acquainted with 
 the language of the country, so as to converse 
 with the people freely, and engage in contro- 
 versy with the patriarchs and others, a spirit 
 of religious inquiry was awakened, and the ex- 
 citement became general ; so that the time of 
 Mr. Bird, and often that of Mr. Goodell, was 
 demanded night and day to converse with men 
 and women from different places, who were 
 convinced of the rottenness of their old system, 
 and wished to become acquainted with a more 
 excellent way. As the work went on, the op 
 position of rulers, both ecclesiastical and civil, 
 became more violent, threatening decrees were 
 fulminated, and in some instances the most 
 cruel forms of persecution were resorted to. 
 Among the objects of this persecution was' 
 Asaad Shidiak, who had been Mr. King's 
 teacher in Arabic and Syriac, and who was 
 one of the most intelligent men on Mount 
 Lebanon. He was a Maronite Roman Cath- 
 olic, had been much acquainted with the 
 bishop of Beirut, and with the Maronite patri- 
 arch, and on his showing a strong tendency 
 towards evangelical religion, he was threat- 
 ened with immediate excommunication, if he 
 did not cease from his connection with the 
 " Bible men." To avoid this evil he was ad- 
 vised to retire for a season to Iladet, in the 
 hope that the opposition would subside. In 
 this retirement his mind became still more 
 serious and determined, and on his return to 
 Beirilt he was resolved to risk whatever ob- 
 loquy and violence might come upon him. 
 The suspicion that he was heretical made it 
 necessary for him to give up a marriage con- 
 tract into which he had entered ; and he pre- 
 ferred this sacrifice rather than shut himself 
 out from the means of access to the truth. In 
 January, 1826, the patriarch sent his own 
 brother to call upon Asaad, to urge him to an 
 
786 
 
 STRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 iotflrricw, and though warned by the mission- 
 •rici of the dangers to which ho would be cx- 
 poMd, ho compliiHl with the request, and went 
 tothe convent of J)er Alma, where he met the 
 Mtrimrch, and had many conversations with 
 him. The topics upon which Asaad insisted, 
 were the necessity of a spiritual religion, in 
 distinction from modes and form ; the suffi- 
 . of the Scriptures ; and the absurdity of 
 _r the l*o|)C to be infallible. The patri- 
 ..s !ii;,'hly displeased with these bold sen- 
 i;. i.;^. aiKJ uttered, first, cruel threats, and 
 il ,M(I honor, promotion, money, &c. 
 
 '1 -f Beirut was present at several of 
 
 til. 'IIS, and threatened Asaad's life in 
 
 the U)u6l angry and violent manner. 
 
 After an absence of seven weeks, he return- 
 ed to Beirut, and wrote a history of what had 
 transpired. The document was published in 
 the Missionary Herald, and indicated great 
 talents, a sincere love of the truth, and the 
 spirit of a mart^T in its de^ce. As soon as 
 Asaad's mother, brothers, and other relations 
 heard of his return, they flocked around him, 
 and besought him to leave the missionaries. 
 Against the urgent entreaties of the brethren, 
 be accompanied four of his relatives home, in 
 the belief that it would be safe, and that he 
 should do some good by the visit. In about a 
 fortnight some of his relatives took him by 
 force, and carried him to the convent of Der 
 Alma, and delivered him np to the patriarch, 
 bv whose order he was removed to Cannobeen, 
 about 50 miles from Beirut. There he suffered 
 imprisonment, chains, stripes, and revilings. 
 To those who delivered him up, he said that if 
 he had not read the Gospel he never should 
 have known how to explain their conduct ; 
 but there he learned that " the brother shall 
 deliver up the brother to death, and a man's 
 foes shall be those of his own household." For 
 several months he was beaten dally, and hav- 
 ing made an unsuccessful attempt to escape, a 
 heavy chain was put around his neck, and the 
 other end fastened to the wall. The common 
 people were encouraged to visit him and spit 
 ID his face, and otherwise insult him, with a 
 riew to shame him and break his spirit. His 
 mother and one or two of his brothers, finding 
 how cruelly he was treated, relented, and ear- 
 nestly sought his release. One who visited 
 him declared that he had been beaten till his 
 body was of the color of blue cloth. In the 
 midst of his suflerings he wrote a kind letter 
 to the missionaries, but not having an oppor- 
 tunity to send it, the patriarch discovered it, 
 and both he and othei-s beat him severely on 
 this account. For many months intelligence 
 was received of Asaad's condition, and though 
 his sufferings knew no abatement, the hope 
 was entertained that his deliverance would in 
 some way be effected. But at length communi- 
 cation was cutoff, a dreadful uncertainty hun 
 over his fate, and the sad conclusion was forced 
 upon the missionaries that he had died in the 
 
 hands of his unrelenting tormentors. N^othing 
 has ever occurred to relieve this painful ap- 
 prehension. The piety and constancy of Asa- 
 ad Shidiak were regarded as very extraordi- 
 nary. His pride of talents and of authorship, 
 his reverence for his former tutors, patrons, 
 and ecclesiastical superiors, and all his previ- 
 ous habits of thinking and a,cting, were opposed 
 to his joining the missionaries and yielding to 
 the authority of the Scriptures. To these 
 were added the anathemas of the Church, the 
 revilings of friends, the malice of a bigoted 
 and bloody priesthood, and the horrors of a 
 long imprisonment under chains and stripes^ 
 till his vigorous frame became one mass o^ 
 suffering ; while, on the other hand, deliver- 
 ance, honor, emoluments, all that wealth and 
 power could offer, awaited him in case of his 
 recantation. That under these circumstances 
 Asaad should have adhered with unwavering 
 firmness to the Gospel and the religion of 
 Christ, must certainly bo regarded as a sur- 
 prising triumph of Christianity over the natu- 
 ral inclinations of the heart, and over the prin- 
 cipalities and powers of this world. With 
 propriety did the Board ask, " How many are 
 there among ourselves, with all our means of 
 knowledge and all the strength of confirmed 
 religious principle, who could assure them- 
 selves that, in such a fearful controversy, they 
 should stand like Asaad Shidiak, calm and 
 unruffled amid the war of angry passions, de- 
 prived of every earthly support, and looking 
 through tears, yet with* a resolute eye, to hea- 
 ven as his home, and to Christ as his only de- 
 liverer?" A brother of this first martyr^ 
 Pharez Shidiak, also embraced the truth, and 
 was pursued with the same persecuting spirit, 
 but saved himself from the fate of Asaad by 
 a timely escape to Malta. After the occur- 
 rence of these two cases, the Maronite patri- 
 arch issued a proclamation to be read in all 
 the Maronite churches, strictly forbidding all 
 connection with the missionaries, in the way of 
 buying or selling, borrowing or lending, giv- 
 ing or receiving, attending schools or teaching 
 them, or rendering any service, on pain of the 
 loss of office and the great excommunication. 
 The patriarch admitted that the missionaries 
 were "unwearied in their efforts;" that they 
 went about " manifesting a zeal in compassion- 
 ating their neighbors ;" that they " opened 
 schools and supplied instructions, all at their 
 own expense," &c. The Greek Catholics man- 
 ifested a similar hostility, though they were 
 less inclined to persecute ; and the Mohamme- 
 dans were ready to pursue every professor of 
 Christianity with inexorable vengeance. Thus 
 it became evident in the early history of the 
 mission, that those who would follow Christ, 
 must be prepared, like the primitive Christiana 
 on the same soil, to seal their testimony with 
 their blood. The people might turn from one 
 form of nominal Christianity to another, and 
 embrace the Greek, or Greek Catholic, or 
 
SYRIA AM) THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 737 
 
 Maronite, or Latin faith, -without giving 
 oflfence ; but to be Christians indeed, and take 
 the word of God as their only rule of failh, 
 was to incur the wrath of bishops and patri- 
 archs, and required the spirit of a Christian 
 hero. Along with these violent persecutions 
 came political and warlike agitations, and all 
 the schools which had been organized at Bei- 
 rut, Tripoli, and elsewhere, had to be given 
 up. In May, 1828, the missionaries removed 
 from Beirut to Malta. Their reasons for this 
 step were the prospect of war, which soon 
 after commenced, the difficulty of holding 
 communication with other places, and the in- 
 security which was felt after the removal of 
 the British consul. After an absence of two 
 years, during which they devoted themselves 
 to the study of the various languages of 
 the east, the missionaries, learning that the 
 English consul had again taken up his resi- 
 dence at Beirilt, returned to that place. On 
 entering that city, they were saluted with 
 kindness by the people, but the priests were 
 disturbed, and soon the papal thunders began 
 again to roar in the churches. The mission- 
 ary work proceeded, however, without material 
 interruption, except by the ravages of the 
 plague, which prevailed through Syria, Arme- 
 nia, and Persia, in 1831. ' In 1832, the mission 
 sustained a severe loss in the death of Gregory 
 Wortabed, an early and distinguished convert, 
 concerning whom full accounts may be found 
 in the Missionary Herald of that and previous 
 dates. The reply of Mr. Bird to the Bishop 
 of Beirut, in 1833, received special attention, 
 and served to awaken a spirit of inquiry among 
 the people. About the same time a press was 
 established in Beirut, to be superintended by 
 the Kev. Eli Smith, under the general direc- 
 tion of the mission. 
 
 Syria and the Holy Land were now under 
 the government of the viceroy of Egypt, and 
 embraced the four pashalics of Aleppo, Tripoli, 
 Damascus, and Acre. Beirut, being the prin- 
 cipal port of commerce, was assuming increased 
 importance as a missionary station, while ex- 
 plorations were made in Damascus, Tripoli, 
 Sidon, and other large towns, with a view to 
 the occupancy of new fields. The system of 
 Bchools was yet in its infancy, the missionaries 
 not having been in circumstances to give to 
 this subject the necessary attention. In their 
 report for 1834 the Committee of the Board 
 say, " They are not aware that any material 
 change has taken place in the character and 
 condition of the people at large, in consequence 
 of the establishment of the mission. But the 
 impression is said to have been extensively re- 
 moved, which had been given by the Jesuits in 
 former years, that the Protestants have no re- 
 ligion, no priesthood, no churches, &c. The 
 bigotry, intolerance, unreasonableness, and 
 worldly-mi ndedness of the papal priests have 
 also been brought to light, by their opposition 
 to the Scriptures and schools, and it is thought 
 47 
 
 that image worship is growing unpopular in 
 the vicinity of Beirut. Among the inhabitants 
 of that place now living, the missionaries reck- 
 on bfit four native converts. A fifth hopeful 
 convert is teaching a school at Tripoli. The 
 number admitted to communion from the com- 
 mencement of the mission is seven, not includ- 
 ing the lamented Asaad Shidiak, nor Jacob, a 
 young Armenian, who died giving evidence of 
 repentance and faith in Christ." Correspond- 
 ing with the date of the foregoing, is a joint 
 statement by the missionaries, in which they 
 speak of the insufficiency, in that country at 
 least, of the mere circulation of the Scriptures. 
 Many copies had been distributed from Alep- 
 po to Hebron and Gaza, and after ten or twelve 
 years' use of them, not a single soul had, to their 
 knowledge, been by this means brought to a 
 sense of sin, and converted to God. " Not," 
 they say, " that the word of God has taken no 
 effect ; not that it has done no good ; but we 
 state a fact, and from it we draw the conclu- 
 sion that other efforts ought to be connected 
 with Bible distribution." The missionaries at 
 Beirut in 1835, were Eli Smith, Isaac Bird, 
 and William M. Thompson, with the wives of 
 the two latter, and Eebecca W. Williams, 
 teacher. A class of ten young men were un- 
 der instruction in geography, astronomy, and 
 the English language, and three other schools 
 were taught by natives, the whole number of 
 pupils being 140. Besides these a female 
 school had been opened by the female members 
 of the mission, assisted by the widow of the 
 lamented Gregory Wortabed, and eighteen pu- 
 pils were in attendance. For this school a 
 building had been erected on the mission pre- 
 mises, by the avails of a subscription among 
 foreign residents. The measure met wi^ no 
 opposition. 
 
 Jerusalem was at this date the centre of a 
 great tumult among the people, the mountain- 
 eers of Palestine having suddenly risen in gene- 
 ral rebellion against the government of Egypt. 
 That government, however, maintained its su- 
 premacy, and the whole country of Syria, un- 
 der the sway of the Pacha of Egypt, was soon 
 disarmed and quiet. In 1836 the Committee, 
 in surveying this field, were able tp say, •' Al- 
 most every change opens the door still wider 
 for missionary work. Lebanon is completely 
 open. Missionaries can go where they please. 
 The Druse population in particular have been 
 rendered accessible to the truth. They are fre- 
 quently seen at the chapel of the mission." At 
 Jerusalem, Mr. Whiting found much encour- 
 agement in the distribution of books and tracts 
 among the pilgrims who visited the Uoly City 
 from all quarters. A school was also in opera- 
 tion there, and a few Moslem girls were learn- 
 ing to read and sew. The island of Cyprus 
 having been thoroughly explored, a mission 
 was commenced there in 1836, by Messrs. 
 Pease, J. L. ITiompson, and Daniel Ladd. The 
 number of Greek Christians on the island was 
 
m 
 
 SYRU AND THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 Cftimated »t 70,000, and there did not appear 
 to be aqy obtUde io the way of spreading the 
 GcmmI 10009 them. The death of Mrs. Smith, 
 in copeeoococe of exposures bv shipwreck, on 
 her wiy to Smvrno with her husband, was u 
 ■erioas looi to the mission ; Mr. Smith also lost 
 •t the nine time, the vahiablc manuscript of a 
 Journal, which he had kept during a tour 
 through the Uaouran, and the models of Arabic 
 lettm which he had procured for the cutting 
 of a new font of t^-pe in that language. The 
 Utter he was able afterwards to replace. The 
 
 Kinting in 1836, at the Beirfit press, all in Ara- 
 c, was as follows, viz. : A Hymn Book, 24 
 iMges, 200 copies ; Watts' Catechism, 16 pages, 
 1^^ copies ; Elements of Arabic Grammar, 
 168 pages, 1000 copies ; Dairyman's Daughter, 
 96 pages, 2000 copies ; making a total of 380,800 
 pages. Besides this there were struck off from 
 the lithographic press 200 copies of the Arabic 
 alphabet, for the schools ; and 2000 copies of 
 Chn-sostom on reading the Holy Scriptures. 
 
 llie year 1838, and a part of the following 
 year were spent by Mr. Smith in an exploring 
 tour with Dr. Robinson, through Arabia and 
 Syria. The results of these observations are 
 well known to the public. There were 6,642 
 books and tracts distributed from Beirut sta- 
 tion in 1838, amounting to 490,629 pages. 
 The larger portion of this work was effected by 
 a native employed for the purpose. The people 
 manifested an unexpected eagerness to receive 
 books. The ecclesiastical rulers of every de- 
 prce made fierce opposition, but very many of 
 the people received the books in open defiance 
 of patriarchs and bishops. • 
 
 It was a highly interesting fact, recorded in 
 1839, that several papal priests, from different 
 parts of the country, all of them strangers to 
 each other, were so enlightened and so evan- 
 gelical in sentiment, as to become disgusted 
 with popery and anxious to escape from it. 
 TbiB and the preceding year were also signal- 
 laed by an extraordinary religious excitement 
 among the Druses. The extent and effects of 
 this awakening, and the spirit in which it was 
 met by the civil and ecclesiastical powers, 
 forms an exceedingly interesting chapter in the 
 history of the Syrian mission ; but for the par- 
 ticulars refetence must be had to the journals 
 of the missionaries published in the Herald. The 
 books and tracts distributed from Beirut during 
 the y^ 1839, amounted to 3,543. Of these 103 
 were Bibles, 264 Testaments, 419 Psalters, and 
 2,i5< smaller poHions of the Scriptures. A 
 large and convenient chapel was built at Bei- 
 rut, in which were held two services in the 
 Arabic language, one soon after sunrise, the 
 other m the afternoon . Between these services 
 was one in English at the American Consulate, 
 and a Sabbath^chool was conducted in the 
 natrve chapel. 
 
 The free school contained upwards of 56 
 scholars, and the attendance was full and regular 
 •throughout the year. The school at Tripoli 
 
 already mentioned as under the care of a na- 
 tive, had about 30 scholars. 
 
 In the autumn of 1840, Beirut was bom» 
 barded by Turkey and her allies, and the mis- 
 sionaries fled, some to Jerusalem, and others 
 to Larnica in Cyprus. The houses and other 
 property of the mission were nnharnicd. In 
 the summer of 1841, the war having ended in 
 placing the government under Turkish rule, 
 the missionaries returned to Beirfit and re- 
 sumed their labors. About the same time a 
 printer from Boston, with an improved font of 
 Arabic type, and Rev. Eli Smith, who had 
 been spending a little time in America, joined 
 the mission. The whole missionary force at 
 Beirut, on being collected at this period, con- 
 sisted of Messrs. Smith, W. M. 'J'hompson, 
 Nathaniel A. Keyes, Samuel Wolcott, L. 
 Thompson, missionaries, and their wives ; Mr. 
 Yan Dyck, physician ; a printer ; and five na- 
 tive assistants. At Jerusalem there were two 
 missionaries, Messrs. Whiting and Sherman, 
 with their wives, and one native assistant ; and 
 at a station on Mount Lebanon, called B'ham- 
 dAn, there was a missionary and a physician. 
 The country, however, was not quiet, for the 
 war that had transferred the government from 
 the dominion of Mohammed Ali to that of the 
 Sultan, was followed by a civil war, in which 
 the Maronites and Druses of Mount Lebanon 
 contended for the ascendancy. It was in fact 
 a war of the Druses against the Papists, who 
 had provoked it, and ended in the complete 
 triumph of the Druses. In view of this con- 
 stant disturbance and change, Mr. Smith wrote, 
 in January, 1842, "There is an evil, a great 
 evil, in being thus beaten about by these po- 
 litical surges, and we try to avoid them all in 
 our power, and seek the stillest waters we can 
 find. Yet our minds are never free from anxi- 
 ety, looking out for what may come next. 
 And besides this, we are excessively troubled 
 to give our friends at home proper and correct 
 accounts of our labors and prospects. One of 
 the brethren, in giving reasons for not writing 
 home more full accounts, remarked that he 
 could not get the world here to stand still long 
 enough to describe it. So it is — we write 
 home now an account of our labors and pros- 
 pects, with propositions for money and men to 
 do this or that, and before our letter reaches 
 the United States, some revolution has taken 
 place which materially alters our plans, and 
 we want to do something very different from 
 the thing proposed." Four months later Mr. 
 Smith wrote, that the power of the Maronite 
 patriarch, which had always presented the 
 greatest obstacle to missionary labor, appeared 
 to be broken ; that wherever they went they 
 had free access to the Druses, and that an im- 
 pulse had been extensively given in favor of 
 schools. And yet, he adds, " The Turkish au- 
 thorities have taken such a course, that their 
 designs remain wholly unknown ; and what 
 will be the result of the present position of 
 
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 739 
 
 things Te feel entirely unable to conjecture." 
 In spite ^f these perplexities ten schools were 
 maintained, nine at Beirut and one at Jerusa- 
 lem, containing an aggregate of 287 pupils, 
 and the printing during the year 1841 amount- 
 ed to 636,000 pages, half of which were por- 
 tions of the Scriptures. In their report for 
 
 1843, the Prudential Committee say, " During 
 the past year a good house for a permanent 
 establishment has been obtained at Abeih, a 
 mountain village about 15 miles southward of 
 Beirut, facing the sea, sufficiently elevated to 
 render it a safe and healthy residence the whole 
 year, central with regard to the Druse people, 
 with 1000 or 1500 inhabitants, and villages in 
 all directions around it. The mission has also 
 gained much experience during the few years 
 past, made many favorable acquaintances, dis- 
 semmated mucn evangelical truth, done aaray 
 no small amount of prejudice, and conquered 
 one of the most difficult and important lan- 
 guages of the world — the Arabic — spoken by 
 60,000,000 people, it being the sacred lan- 
 guage of the vast Moslem nation." The sta- 
 tion at Jerusalem was reported this year as 
 having been suspended, the missionary, Mr. 
 Whiting, having joined Mr. Thompson and 
 Dr. Van Dyck at Abeih. 
 
 In 1844, soon after the visit of Dr. Anderson 
 and Dr. Hawes to the Syrian mission, the 
 committee say, " Besides the large and rapidly 
 increasing population of Beirut, Lebanon is 
 terraced and planted from the profoundest 
 depths of her numerous valleys up to the dizzy 
 summits of her majestic hills, and more than 
 200,000 hard-working mountaineers reside in 
 her romantic valleys and hamlets. Here the 
 members of the mission may abide, and travel, 
 and teach, and preach, and distribute the word 
 of life ; and here it is the present intention of 
 the committee, in following out the apparent 
 leadings of Providence, to combine and con- 
 centrate the power and resources of the mis- 
 sion. The people are divided into different 
 sects, but they are essentially ojae race, the 
 Arab, by whatever name called ;'with a com- 
 mon language, the Arabic, spoken just as it is 
 written, and the same as in ancient times ; and 
 the manners, customs, and social condition 
 throughout are substantially the same." In 
 connection with these statements of the com- 
 mittee, the report for this year contains a 
 document of extraordinary interest, drawn up 
 by the mission while Drs. Anderson and Hawes 
 were on the ground, which gives a description 
 of the Arabic race, and an impression of the 
 importance of this mission, as being the only 
 one aspecially to that race, which every one 
 should examine who would fully appreciate this 
 mission. We regret that our limits will not 
 allow us to give the document entire. The 
 reader is referred to the report of the Board for 
 
 1844, where it may be found in full. 
 
 At Abeih, two rooms in the house occupied 
 by ^h\ Thompson were arranged for a tem- 
 
 porary chapel, and an Arabic service was 
 kept up twice every Sabbath. Between the 
 services an interesting Sabbath-school was 
 held. The shyness and reserve of the people 
 wore oft' as they became acquainted. The ad- 
 verse portions of the Druses and Maronites, 
 both of whom resided in the village, began to 
 consult the missionaries in their mutual diffi- 
 culties, ancl Mr. Thompson had more friendly 
 intercourse with the Maronite priesthood dur- 
 ing the first summer of his residence at Abeih 
 than during all his previous missionary life. 
 
 The years 1844 and 1845 were distinguished 
 by a sudden and wonderful Protestant move- 
 ment at Hasbeiya, a village at the foot of 
 Mount Hermon, containing a population of 
 about 4000, composed of Greek Arabs. Maro- 
 nites, Greek Catholics, Jews and Druses. In 
 February, 1844, the brethren of Beirut were 
 visited by a party of about 50 men of the 
 Greek Arabs of Hasbeiya, who declared their 
 intention to become Protestants, and asked for 
 ministers and teachers. After much conversa- 
 tion with them, it was agreed that a native 
 assistant should be sent to them, and that if 
 his report of their case was favorable, the mis- 
 sionaries would visit them. The intelligence 
 proved of so interesting a character, that in 
 May, Messrs. Smith and Whiting proceeded 
 to Hasbeiya, when they were convinced that 
 they had been too slow to credit the sincerity 
 of these professed Protestants. They amount- 
 ed to about 150 men, besides women and 
 children, and among them were some of the 
 most respectable men in the village, and a 
 large proportion of enterprizing young men. 
 Some of them had made considerable improve- 
 ment in Christian knowledge, having received 
 many of the works of the mission, both from 
 Beirut and Jerusalem, and heard much of the 
 character and doctrines of the missionaries. 
 That they were sincere in their determination 
 to adhere to the Protestant faith, and to take 
 the Bible alone for their guide, the missionaries 
 could not doubt. Their separation from the 
 Greek church appeared to be entire, and even 
 the Greeks acknowledged that there was a de- 
 cided improvement in their character ; t^at 
 the profane had left ofif swearing ; that the 
 drunkard had abandoned his cups, and that 
 the Lord's day was carefully observed for reli- 
 gious improvement. Schools were established 
 among them, and the field seemed white for 
 the harvest. In June, one month later, ano- 
 ther missionary visited Hasbeiya, and wrote : 
 "The Protestants hold out and increase in 
 numbers. They are increasing in knowledge 
 also ; some of them quite rapidly. The school 
 has 40 or 50 scholars, and we must establish 
 another soon." In July Mr. Whiting wrote : 
 " We cannot but feel much anxiety for this 
 little band of Protestants, imperfectly instruct- 
 ed as they are, but up to this time, although 
 very strong eflbrts have been made to induce 
 them to return to the Greek church, they have, 
 
740 
 
 SYRU AND THE UOLY LAND. 
 
 with Terr fcw cxceptioni*. reraained firm in 
 their adbereaoe to the truth." At about the 
 f ^^m^ jjate, Mr. Smith, in describinj? their first 
 SabbAth in Hasbeiya, said, '• How stranj^e and 
 exciting our oircunistanoes. It seemed ahnost 
 ftdraini. Hero we were, in this wild corner 
 of S\Tia, always peculiarly lawless, and now 
 entirx'lv withmit a jrovcrnment. Befoit; us was 
 a consideral ' :;ition, broup^ht up in the 
 
 pTti*< and •! superstitions of the 
 
 t:- ' •'••• ,;. ,.,.. .,ww abandoning", and with 
 - almost miraculous, all their faste 
 .1 ilioir image and saint worship, and 
 
 u : i ;; :i.r If'xl with US aft«r the simple forms 
 01 i'r ; -tuutism, yet not a hand was raised 
 to molest \n, and we went through our worship 
 witli as much quiet and security as if we had 
 been in the luwrt of New England." 
 
 It 8con Dccame evident, however, that this 
 little body of Protestants was to expect no 
 protection from the government, .and that 
 their enemies were aware of this, and had de- 
 termined on using violence. In view of the 
 storm which was about to burst upon them, 
 and the fiery trials through which they must 
 pass, the whole company of the Protestants 
 assembled at Mr. Smith's house on a Sabbath 
 evening, for the purpose of entering into a 
 solemn covenant to stand by each other to the 
 last. In describing this scene, Mr. Smith 
 says : " The step was entirely of their own sug- 
 cttstion, and I knew nothing of it until they 
 had begun to assemble. Being all collected, 
 they drew up a covenant engagemont in the 
 following terms : — * We whose names are here- 
 to subscribed, do covenant together before 
 God and this assembly, and pledge om'selves 
 upon the Holy Gospel, that we will remain 
 leagued together in one faith ; that we 
 will not forsake this faith, nor shall any se- 
 parate us from each other while we are in 
 this world ; and that we will be of one hand 
 and one heart in the worship of God, accord- 
 ing to the doctrines of the Gospel. In God 
 18 our help.' Each one took this covenant 
 aeporately, standing by the table, and laying 
 h- ■ '• " ' "Jon the Bible, as it was rCad to him. 
 names were subscribed on the spot, 
 u- . :.- ...xt day the number was increased to 
 seventy-six, all adult males. The affecting so- 
 lemnity of this scene I leave you to imagine. 
 I have been many years a missionary, and have 
 witnessed a great variety of heart>thrilling 
 events, but this is one of the last that I shaU 
 forget." In a day or two after this solemn 
 trauaaction, the persecution broke out with 
 great violence, and to escape the murderous 
 hands of their enemies the Protestants fled to 
 Abcih, as their only place of safety. They 
 remained there till October, wlifen learning 
 that the unfriendly emir had been deposed, 
 and that another governor had been appoint- 
 ed, with express instructions to restore the Pro- 
 testants to their houses; they returned to 
 Huabeiya. The quici, however, was of short 
 
 duration, for by some means the new governor 
 was soon removed, and a son of the former 
 governor appointed in his place, so that the 
 poor Protestants were again at the mercy of 
 their enemies. They were publicly insulted 
 and beaten in the streets ; their houses were 
 attacked and much injured, and no Protestant 
 could appear in the streets without being 
 stoned. It required more courage, faith and 
 love for the truth than these brethren had air 
 tained, to stand firm in such circumstances, 
 and the result was, say the committee, " That 
 the poor persecuted people, since it had not 
 ple£ised God yet to give them fully the martyr 
 spirit, yielded the case in despair, and one after 
 another made peace with the authorities of the 
 Greek church." It was believed, however, 
 that they did not fully conform to the rites of 
 the Greek church, but were allowed consider- 
 able liberty ; and one of the Protestants, in 
 writing to the missionaries, in January, 1845, 
 said, " We meet together and have prayers as 
 often as we have opportunity. Thanks to 
 God, the faith of the brethren increases ; but 
 we are thirsting to hear your prayers and spi- 
 ritual instructions again. You are never out 
 of our minds a moment. We pray for grace 
 to wait for that privilege with patience." 
 Thus the door was closed in Hasbeiya for the 
 present, but in circumstances which left a 
 strong conviction that it would be opened 
 again ere long, and that God would yet com- 
 plete the work which he had so signally be- 
 gun. 
 
 In the spring of 1845, Lebanon was again 
 disturbed with civil war. It was a struggle 
 for political ascendancy between the Maronites 
 and Druses, and after twenty days' fighting in 
 different sections of the mountains, the Maron- 
 ites were defeated, and driven out of nearly all 
 the Druse quarter of Lebanon. As the Maro- 
 nites w^ere bigoted adherents of the Romish 
 church, and the most bitter opponents the 
 missionaries had ever met with in Lebanon, 
 their loss of power at this time had an impor- 
 tant bearing on the mission. In describing 
 this event, Mr. Thompson wrote : " Again the 
 Maronite patriarch has sunk under disappoint- 
 ment. He died a few days ago. Moreover, 
 that party in Hasbeiya who opposed us and 
 stoned our people, has been driven out of tho 
 place by the Druses, and great numbers of 
 them killed. The whole combination is com- 
 pletely broken up and dispersed." Mr. Smith, 
 in writing on this subject has the following 
 very striking comments on the death of the 
 patriarch : — " I cannot conclude without al- 
 luding to the death of the old Maronite patri- 
 arch. What a lesson does that event, in such 
 circumstances teach us ! After having mar- 
 tyred that faithful witness, Asaad Shidiak, 
 caused «the Bible often to be burned, had 
 missionaries insulted and stoned, and boasted 
 that he had at last left no place open for 
 them to enter the mountains, he finds him- 
 
SYRIA AND THE UOLY LAND. 
 
 741 
 
 self stripped of all bis power ; missionaries 
 
 established permaueatly in the midst of his 
 flock, and his own favorite bishop constrained 
 to give orders for their protection ; and finally 
 he sinks himself under his disappointment, 
 and dies. How signally has the blood of 
 the martyred Asaad been avenged upon him, 
 even in this life." 
 
 ^ At Beirut and Abcih the labors of the mis- 
 sionary brethren had suffered but slight inter- 
 ruptions during the troubles in Mount Lebanon 
 and in Hasbeiya. In 184:7, there appeared at 
 Beirut evidence that evangelical principles 
 were spreading with increased rapidity. Most 
 of those who attended upon the preaching of 
 the missionaries openly avowed their evan- 
 gelical sentiments, in the face of violent oppo- 
 sition. More than fifty young men of the 
 papal church refused to confess for more than 
 a year, and this they regarded as a final renun- 
 ciation of popery. At Abeih, about thirty 
 adults were in attendance on the Arabic ser- 
 vice, and stated preaching was maintained in 
 four of the neighboring villages. There was 
 evidence of the special influences of the Holy 
 Spirit on many minds. 
 
 In April, 1848, a station was commenced at 
 Aleppo, and Messrs. W. A. Benton and J. A. 
 Ford were appointed as missionaries to that 
 place. Mr. Smith, who accompanied the 
 brethren to their station, describes the people 
 as intelligent; social, inquisitive, and not so 
 nmch afraid as elsewhere of changing sects. 
 The Arab Christian population was the largest 
 and most intelligent to be found in any place 
 in Syria. 
 
 An important event of this year was the 
 formation of a purely native church. Previ- 
 ous to this the native converts had joined the 
 mission church, composed in part of mission- 
 ary families. The petition for a church to be 
 composed only of converted natives, origuated 
 with the natives themselves, and is a document 
 of considerable length and of great interest. 
 (See Annual Report for 1848, or Herald for 
 August 1848. The latter contains also the 
 constitution and discipline of the new 
 church.) 
 
 In November, 1848, a new mission was 
 commenced at Tripoli, and Messrs. David M. 
 Wilson and Horace Foot were stationed at 
 that place. They met with vigorous and de- 
 termined opposition at the outset, and it was 
 with difficulty that they procured houses in the 
 city. At the beginning of the year 1849 there 
 were four common schools in connection with 
 the station at Beirut, and five in connection 
 with that at Abeih, with an aggregate of 210 
 male and 55 female pupils. Tiiere was also a 
 school 
 one 
 
 printing during the precednig yei 
 ed to 1,010,000 pages, and the total amount 
 
 ceeding with the translation of the Bible into 
 
 naie ana ao lemaie pupiis. i nurc wits uisu u 
 chool at Tripoli, containing 20 scholars, and 
 »ne at Hasbeiya, containing 70 pupils. The 
 )rintinGr durino; the preceding year had amountr 
 
 the Arabic lanj^uage, aided by Butrus Bistany, 
 one of the native brethren. Special interest 
 was awakened in the beginning of this year 
 by a learned Greek Catholic of Damascus who 
 had become fully convinced of the errors of 
 his church, and had openly declared himself a 
 Protestant. He stated that for about six 
 years his conscience had been troubling him ; 
 that he had embraced infidel views, but by 
 reading books furnished him by the mission- 
 aries, and by convereation with Mr. Smith and 
 others, he had been led to take a decided stand 
 on the subject of religion. An open profes- 
 sion of his sentiments brought on a discussion 
 between him and his patriarch ; and, as Mr. 
 Meshakah, the individual in question, waa 
 esteemed the most intelligent native layman in 
 the country, and the patriarch the most learn- 
 ed eccksiastic, attention from all quarters was 
 directed to this controversy. Mr. Meshakah 
 also immediately prepared a treatise in Arabic, 
 addressed to his countrymen and friends, the 
 object of which was to explain to them the 
 reasons of his secession from the Catholic 
 church, and to set forth proofs of the corrup- 
 tion of the doctrines and practices of that 
 {church. This book produced a great sensa- 
 tion. 
 
 The printing during the year 1849 amounted 
 to 1,934,000 pages. The mission had two 
 fonts of beautiful Arabic typo, of difTorent 
 sizes, cast in Syria, under the supervision of 
 Mr. Hurter, printer for the mission, at Beirut. 
 Up to this time there had been but one mis- 
 sion church — that at Beirut, and the number 
 of members was 27. Ten of these were from 
 the Greek church, four were papal Greeks, four 
 Maronites, five Armenians, three Druses, and 
 one a Jacobite Syrian. In the latter part of 
 1850 there was an outbreak of Turkish vio- 
 lence at Aleppo, resulting in terrible scenes of 
 violence and blood, and subjecting the nominal 
 Christians to serious disadvantages. (For full 
 accounts of these scenes see Missionary Herald 
 for February and April, 1851.) 
 
 The report for 1851 includes Hasbeiya 
 among ita regular stations. For several years 
 the missionaries liad paid frequent visits to 
 that place, and had held frequent correspond- 
 ence with leading men of the Protestant com- 
 munity ; but no missionary had been perma- 
 nently stationed there. The time liaving come, 
 as was believed, for carrying on the work tliero 
 in a more systematic manner, Messrs. Thomp- 
 son and Van Dyck were designated to that 
 field; and, in July, a church was formed at 
 Hasbeiya, composed of 16 native brethren. 
 The necessary officers were chosen, and Mr. 
 Thompson was requested to act as pastor till 
 one from their own number should be raiseti ap. 
 But it was a church planttnl in the midst of 
 enemies, and persecution still awaited it. Bo- 
 
 priated from the commencement of the mission | fore the close of 1851 the government ceased 
 75,765,800 pages. Mr. Smith was pro- ' to have any control over that region, and anar- 
 
748 
 
 gnUA AND THE HOLY LAND. 
 
 d^ set in, robbers inrcstcd tho roads, and 
 property and life were at tho mercy of law- 
 Mi and mftraadiog bands of {K'ople. This con- 
 dition of things continuc^l through most of 
 1852 and 1853, and of course had a most dis- 
 tttroos eflfect apon the church at Ilasbcija. 
 It was oAen impossible for tiic missionaries or 
 the natire assistants to visit the people in 
 MfetT. Nor could the people assemble for 
 voruip without danger. At a communion 
 season, in 1853. the Protestants came fully 
 armed, and stacked their guns, and hung their 
 swords in the court of the chapel, forcibly re- 
 minding the missionaries of scenes often wit- 
 nessed m the carlv planting of churches among 
 the 8avr.gC3 of tue American wilderness. It 
 was hardly to be expected that the Gosj)el 
 would achieve nxany triumphs amid such dis- 
 orders and tumults ; and it is even more than 
 could liave been anticipated, to hear the mis- 
 sionaries say, as they do, in the Herald for 
 July, 1853, " We are thankful that none of 
 the members of the church have been terrified 
 into submission ; nor indeed have any of the old 
 and established members of the congregation 
 yielded to the pressure. The number who at- 
 tend public worship, however, is sensibly re- 
 duced ; and these absorbing social troubles 
 have sadly distracted all minds, and diminish- 
 ed that earnest zeal which has at other times 
 been so encouraging a feature of our work at 
 Hasbeiya." 
 
 At the last accounts, civil war was again 
 peudfng, and seemed almost inevitable; and 
 yet It was evident to those on the ground, that 
 neither war nor persecution could drive the 
 Gospel from Hasbeiya, nor prevent its progress 
 among a people who had begun to be enlight- 
 ened and quickened by its power. The latest 
 intelligence from Beirut is that found in the 
 Herald for August, 1854. The native church 
 has 26 members, 8 having been recently dis- 
 missed and formed into a church at Abeih. 
 " Most of the members," say the missionaries, 
 ^ give evidence of sincere piety, and are lead- 
 ing upright and aseful lives. The church has 
 Mnt 1,000 piastres to assist the British and 
 Foreign Bible Society in their special effort to 
 furnish^ a million of New Testaments for 
 China." Mr. Smith was progressing rapidly 
 with the work of translating the Scriptures 
 into Arabic, having completed the Pentateuch, 
 and the New Testament as far as 2 Corinth- 
 ians. As an evidence of the capabilities of 
 the mission press at Beirut the brethren say 
 "We have been able to print an Algebra, and 
 have now in hand an edition of the Pentateuch, 
 with references, using all the varieties of letters 
 found in Algebras, and reference Bibles in 
 English. The whole has been created since 
 183.5, the fonts of type all having been made 
 by Mr. Hallock, either in Smyrna or in the 
 UniWd States, after improved models furnished 
 by members of the mission. We have finished 
 prmting during the year, a new edition of the 
 
 Scripture spelling-book ; Dr. Van Dyck's Al- 
 gebra ; a sermon on the second commandment ; 
 an Arabic grammar ; Meshakah on Skepticism, 
 besides some broad sheets ; and we now have 
 in the press, Schneider on Rites and Ceremo- 
 nies, and a new edition of the Psalter, making 
 in all 1,083,000 pages." There had been is- 
 sued from the depository during the year 5,008 
 books and tracts, of which 725 were disposed 
 of in Beirut, 923 were sent to Sidon, 1,073 to 
 the raountaio, 242 to Tripoli, 313 to Aleppo, 
 76 to Mosul, 71 to Damascus, 100 to Jerusa- 
 lem, 20 to Alexandria, and 306 to Bombay. 
 The primary school at Beirut had about 75 
 pupils. The female seminary was in a pros- 
 perous condition. Some of the studies pur- 
 sued were, Watts on the Mind ; Church His- 
 tory, in Arabic ; an abridged work on Moral 
 Philosophy ; besides which the girls had read 
 the whole of D'Aubigne's History of the Re- 
 formation, aud other history, with Mrs. De 
 Forest in an evening class, the atlas being al- 
 ways open before them. A Sabbath afternoon 
 service, in Arabic, was kept up, ihe congrega- 
 tions varying from 60 to 120. The excited 
 state of men's minds in regard to political mat- 
 ters and the prevailing wars, had turned away 
 the thoughts of many from spiritual things ; 
 and it was remarked as a serious evil also, that 
 for at least one-third of the year there must be 
 a virtual suspension of labor at Beirut, owing 
 to the absence of the missionaries among the 
 mountains during the hot season. Repeated 
 trials have shown this absence to be necessary. 
 A good report is made of the little church at 
 Abeih, in the Herald for May, 1854. The 
 chapel was kept open during the year, and the 
 average attendance was about 50. There was 
 an increasing demand for free schools among 
 the Druses. Six of these schools were already 
 in operation on the mountains, and in them all 
 a large amount of religious instruction was com- 
 municated. At Aleppo a church had been or- 
 ganized with six members, all of whom gave evi- 
 dence that they were living branches of the 
 true vine. Little had been done for education in 
 Aleppo. They are an ignorant people. Though 
 the largest, wealthiest, and most intelligent 
 community of nominal Christians in Syria, 
 there is not a common school in the city that 
 deserves the name, and scarcely a person com- 
 petent to teach his native tongue correctly. 
 Yet a large and increasing number were intel- 
 lectually convinced of the truth, and many 
 were anxious for evangelical instruction. Some 
 females were concerned for the salvation of 
 their souls. The brethren say, " We feel that 
 we can now work to advantage, having a hold 
 upon the consciences of men." 
 
 Mr. Thompson, the only missionary stationed 
 at Sidon, reports favorably of that station.' 
 In the Herald, May, 1854, he says : " Our chapel j 
 has not been closed for a single Sabbath dur- 
 ing the year. Our Protestants carry theu*; 
 faith and zeal wherever they go, and make 
 
 edjB 
 
 "J 
 
TABU— TAMLOOK. 
 
 743 
 
 very successful laborers among their country- 
 men. Our congregations arc now fuller than 
 they ever were before, and the attention has 
 been marked and solemn." During the last 
 half of the year, the school in Sidon was quite 
 full. In many places around, there were im- 
 portant openings for schools, but there was a 
 want of competent teachers. Among the 
 places visited by Mr. Thompson was Tyre, 
 where he found many anxious to extricate 
 themselves from the yoke of the priesthood, 
 and form a Protestant community. The same 
 was true of Alma, a village higher up in the 
 mountains, where an important individual had 
 become a Protestant, and had sustained him- 
 self against all opposition, though he was en- 
 tirely isolated, and had never seen an Ameri- 
 can missionary. He was led to embrace evan- 
 gelical sentiments, by the perusal of a single 
 book from the press at Beirut, which was 
 sent him by a friend. Acre was also found to 
 present a favorable opening, and a missionary 
 was much needed there. Tripoli is regarded 
 by the missionaries at that station, Messrs. 
 Wilson and Foot, as a promising field of labor, 
 — as much so as any in Syria, although the 
 congregation has hitherto been small, and the 
 school was last year broken up by the Greeks. 
 
 Besides the regular stations, there are four 
 out-stations, where considerable labor is per- 
 formed. These are B'hamdun, Bhawara, Kefr- 
 Shima, and Ibel. 
 
 The Syrian mission, as now constituted, em- 
 braces Beirut, Abeih, Hasbeiya, Sidon, Tripoli, 
 and Aleppo, with the out-stations. The mis- 
 sionary force employed consists of 11 mission- 
 aries, 1 physician, 1 printer, 13 female assistant 
 missionaries, 4 native preachers, and 1 native 
 helper. The state of the schools connected 
 with the mission is presented in the following 
 table : 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Beirut 
 
 Abeih 
 
 Hasbeiya and Sidon . 
 
 Tripoli 
 
 Aleppo 
 
 OUT-STATIOXS. 
 
 B'hamdun 
 
 Bhawara 
 
 Kefr-Shima 
 
 Ibcl 
 
 Totals. 
 
 Rev. E. D. Moore. 
 
 TABU : A term used in the Sandwich 
 
 Islands, and other islands in the Pacific, to 
 
 denote a kind of religious interdiction, of very 
 
 powerful and extensive operation. With places 
 
 and persons that were tabued, all intercourse 
 was prohibited. The term was also used to 
 indicate any thing sacred or devoted. There 
 were tabued or sacred day.s, when it was death 
 to be found in a canoe. Pork, bananifs, cocoa- 
 nuts, and certain kinds of fish, were tabued to 
 women, and it was death for them to cat these 
 articles of food. Another tabu forbade men 
 and women eating together ; so that a man 
 must build an eating-house for himself and 
 another for his wife, and have separate ovens 
 for their food. Anything of which a man 
 made an idol, was tabu to him. If he mado 
 his idol of the native apple tree, then the 
 apple tree was tabu to him. Birds, fowls, 
 beasts, fish, and stones, were objects of wor- 
 ship, and whoever made any of these his 
 god, they were tabu for him. 'So, too, of arti- 
 cles of food, which were employed as offerings 
 to idols ; they were afterwards tabu to tho 
 offerer. If a king died, the whole district was 
 tabu, and his heir went to another. 
 
 TABLE MOUNTAIN : Station of the 
 American Board among the Zulus, in South 
 Africa, near Port Natal. 
 
 TABOO : A station of the American 
 Episcopal Board in West Africa, about 40 
 miles to the leeward of Cape Palmus. 
 
 TAHAA : One of the Society Islands, and 
 a station of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 TAHITI : 'Jlie largest Island of the Geor- 
 gian Group, in the South Seas. 
 
 T ALUAFATA : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society, on the Island of Upolu, 
 one of the Samoan group. 
 
 TALAPOINS : Priests or friars of the 
 Siamese, and other Eastern nations. They re- 
 side in convents, which are square enclosures, 
 in the centre of which stands a temple, and 
 round it the cells of the talapoins, like so many 
 tents in a camp. There are likewise female ta- 
 lapoins, who live under the same regulations as 
 the men, and in the same convents. They have 
 likewise nens, or young talapoins, who wait on 
 the old ones, and receive their education. from 
 them. Each convent is under the direction of 
 a superior, whom they call a sancrat. These 
 priests subsist wholly upon the sins and the liber- 
 ality of the people ; for they undergo a course 
 of penance for the iniquities of such as bestow 
 upon them their charitable benevolence. They 
 are indulgent and hospitable to strangers ; and 
 there are two lodges on each side of the en- 
 trance to their cells, which are wholly reserved 
 for the accommodation of their gui^tv^. They aro 
 under an indispensable obligation to live single :. 
 and those who offend against chivstity are subject 
 to be burnt at the stake. — Broughtons Diet, 
 
 TAMAKTIA : A station of the Wesleyan 
 Society in Kaflraria, South Africa. 
 
 TAMTAM : A large flat drum used by the 
 Hindoos. 
 
 TAMLOOK : A town about 35 miles S. 
 W. from Calcutta, head-quarters of an agency 
 for the government manufacture of salt, whicL 
 
744 
 
 TARTARY AND SIBERIA. 
 
 b pNptnd bj filtration Trom the mud uf the 
 HoogSiy river, ami is cstct'raed of i)cculiar 
 talM bv tho Himloos, as being extracted^ on 
 the bttiit of the holiest branch of the Gau- 
 ges. It iiit a station of the Society for the 
 Propa^tioM of the Gospel. 
 
 TAN' ' " * ■ "\'0: The capital of Madagas- 
 cm-, f f the mission of the Lou- 
 don Mi^- y • '^it^ty. It is situated in the 
 
 Interior of the island, in the district of An- 
 kont, the most populous and salubrious part 
 of the country. 
 
 TAN GEN A : An ordeal administered in 
 Madagascar to determine the guilt or iuno- 
 eraoe of aperson suspected of witchcraft or 
 sorcery. The accusctl is first made to cat a 
 hearty meal of rice ; after whicli, three pieces 
 of the skin of a fowl, killed for the occasion, 
 aro swallowed ; and then an emetic is adrain- 
 istered, coasisting of the tangcna nut. If the 
 three pieces are returned from the stomach, 
 the party is declared innocent, and he is led 
 np by his friends to his village with much 
 pomp and ceremony. If the skin is not thrown 
 np, ne is declared guilty, and immediately 
 denmtched with a club, unless a slave, in 
 which case he is sent to some distant part of 
 the country and sold. They are, however, 
 sometimes thrown into the under-ground rice 
 granaries, and scalded to death with boiling 
 water. This ordeal is likewise often resorted 
 to when persons are accused of other offences, 
 Ds a trial of guilt or innocence. It is some- 
 times administered to large numbers at the 
 same time. It forms one of the most cruel 
 and^ destructive of the heathen superstitions. 
 A similar ordeal, though varying in form, is in 
 nse generally among the different tribes of 
 West Africa, 
 
 TANNA : An island of the New Hebrides 
 Group, on which is a station of the London 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 TAOUISTS : A religious sect among the 
 Chinese. (See China.) 
 ^ TAPUN A : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in the Bay of Islands, New- 
 Zealand. 
 
 TAQUOHEE : An Indian town among 
 the Cherokees in the Indian Territory ; a star 
 tion of the Cherokee mission of the American 
 Baptist Union. 
 
 TARTARY AND SIBERIA: Tartary 
 is the name given to that immense region ex- 
 tending almost entirely across Asia from the 
 Caspian Sea to the Eastern Ocean ; but the 
 name is only partially recognized within these 
 limits. Many parts of it are bordered and 
 even pervaded by chains of mountains ; and 
 large cities, cultivated spots, and fixed socie- 
 ties, here and there occur. It contains also 
 sandy deserts of considerable extent. Still, 
 the predominant characteristic is that of im- 
 mense plains or steppes, covered with herbage 
 ^re or less abundant, and occupied by wan- 
 "denng and pastoral tribes, whose camps, like 
 
 moving cities, pass continually to and fro ovor 
 its surface. The extensive chain of the Altai 
 mountains separates the whole of Mongolia or 
 Eastern Tartar^, from Siberia, and another 
 long chain divides it from Thibet. There is 
 also a transverse range of mountains, called the 
 Beloor or Bolor mountains, connecting the 
 wc^stcrn extremities of these two boundary 
 chains together, of a peculiarly lofty and rug- 
 ged character, and affording only two narrow 
 and diflScult passes by which to penetrate into 
 Eastern Tartftry or Mongolia. A considerar 
 ble number of rivers, descending from these 
 high mountain ranges, traverse the great up- 
 land plain of Independent Tartary, but unable, 
 across so many barriers, to reach any of the 
 surrounding oceans, they expand into large 
 interior salt lakes, two of which, the Caspian 
 and Aral, are entitled by their magnitude to 
 the appellation of seas. The irrigation pro- 
 duced by these seas breaks the continuity of 
 the desert, and on their banks are situated the 
 most fertile and populous tracts, and the most 
 powerful states of Western Tartary. 
 
 Bokhara, or Bucharia, is an extensive table 
 land, very imperfectly explored, but, according 
 to Ilumboldt, much more fertile than the rest 
 of Tartary. The cotton, the vine, and the 
 mulberry are, in many parts, cultivated. It 
 has also valuable mines of precious stones. 
 The other more northerly table land of Tar- 
 tary, Mongolia, is much more bleak and un- 
 congenial. It yields in its best tracts only 
 pasturage, and includes large expanses of sandy 
 and saline deserts. 
 
 But that portion usually called Russian 
 Tartary is almost the only spot, on this widely- 
 extended tract, that has been the scene of mis- 
 sionary labor. It is situated between the Cas- 
 pian and Black Seas, and appears to hold out 
 the advantages of a genial climate, and a tho- 
 roughfare between more populous countries, 
 which render it desirable as a field of mission- 
 ary operations. 
 
 The province of Orenburgh forms the link 
 between European and Asiatic Russia. Tar- 
 tars compose its chief population ; but many 
 of them have been trained to regular and in- 
 dustrious habits by the Russians, in their 
 mines and other works. The country is capa- 
 ble of every kind of culture, but is mostly 
 cavered with rich pastures. 
 
 To the south of the lofty range of the Cau- 
 casian mountains is Georgia, a region pro- 
 fusely gifted both with richness and beauty. 
 It is fertilized by numerous mountain streams, 
 and clothed with magnificent forests of beech, 
 ash, chestnut, oak, and pine ; while the ground 
 is covered with vines, growing wild, in vast 
 profusion. In this province are Teflis and 
 Shusha, each having been, at different times, 
 missionary stations. This country has been 
 the seat of continual wars and commotions, 
 and was, about two centuries ago, wrested 
 from Persia by Russia. Its population, rcduo- 
 
TARTARY AND SIBERIA. 
 
 745 
 
 ed by war and other causes, does not much 
 exceed 300,000. 
 
 The most northern regions of Asia present 
 an ahnost unbounded expanse of frozen forest 
 desert. Some of the plains of the southern 
 borders of Siberia are covered with pastures ; 
 but, as we proceed to the northern boundaries 
 of the bleak shores of the frozen ocean, human 
 life, with the means of its support, becomes more 
 and more deficient. But those regions abound 
 in animals producing the richest furs ; and the nu- 
 merous rivers furnish abundance of fish, which 
 form the principal part of the food of the 
 scanty, wandering tribes ; and all the western 
 districts of Asiatic Russia, which border on the 
 Ural mountains, contain valuable mines of 
 gold, silver, copper, and precious stones. 
 
 Selinginsk, which for twenty yeai-s was a 
 station of the Loudon Missionary Society, for 
 the Tartars of the Buriat-Moogolian race, is a 
 small town on the frontiers of Siberia and Chi- 
 nese Tartary, south-east of Lake Baikal, and 
 "was built by the Russians, to facilitate their 
 route up the river Selinga, as far as Kiachta, 
 on the Chinese frontier. All the towns of Si- 
 beria are chiefly of Russian origin, and are 
 built to facilitate trade and the collection of 
 revenue. The native inhabitants of these 
 thinly peopled and desolate regions prefer liv- 
 ing a rude and wandering life iu tents or mov- 
 able huts. 
 
 The two leading races among the various 
 tribes inhabiting this immense region, are the 
 Mongols and Turks. The first have complex- 
 ions of a dark yellow tint, broad, square, flat 
 faces, thick lips, and small eyes inclining down- 
 wards, and scanty hair. The Turks are a much 
 handsomer people, with a rich profusion of 
 hair, broad foreheads, and clear ruddy com- 
 plexions. The Circassian females are famed 
 for their great beauty, fine forms, and delicate 
 complexion. The daughters of all above the 
 rank of slaves are exempt from degrading or 
 oppressive labor, and occupy themselves in 
 sewing, embroidery, or plaiting straw. The 
 face is carefully shaded from the sun, their feet 
 are protected by a wooden shoe, and their 
 hands by gloves. Their food consists chiefly 
 of milk and pastry. But their condition is a 
 sad one ; for their parents invariably sell their 
 daughters to the highest bidder. Georgia, and 
 still more Circassia, have been distinguished 
 for the athletic strength of their men, and the 
 beauty of their women, and hence they have 
 been iu great request as domestic slaves all 
 over the Turkish empire. 
 
 'J'he Tartars do not, like the shepherds of a 
 civilized country, lead their flocks through r(> 
 mote and sequestered valleys, and spend their 
 time m peaceful seclusion. They move from 
 place to place, usually in large bodies, for war 
 or plunder. Their government has a strong 
 tendency towards despotism, which is increased 
 by the superstition incident to a barbarous 
 people, whose creeds are accommodated to a 
 
 system of absolute power. Under the charac- 
 ter of Mohammedan mullohs, or Budhist lamas, 
 many of the princes of Asia both preach and 
 rule. In Bokhara, the former sovereign raisfvl 
 himself from a low rank to that high staiiMii, 
 solely by his eminence as a mulloh, or Mohani- 
 medun doctor, and by his rigid observance of 
 the austerities enjoined in that religion. In 
 those parts of Tartary where Mohammedan- 
 ism prevails, the Koran is enforced, not only 
 as a sacred, but as a civil code. According 
 to its rules, justice is administered and the 
 revenue collected ; and conformably to its pre- 
 cepts, a tenth part of the revenue is bestowed 
 in alms. 
 
 Nearly the whole territory of Mount Cau- 
 casus, and the country north and west of the 
 Caspian Sea, own the sovereignty of Ru->ia. 
 On the borders of Persia, where the Ru :,.s 
 must court the natives as their allies agaiiiit 
 that power, they are obliged to allow the Tar- 
 tars the unrestrained exercise of their national 
 propensities. The vast plains on every side of 
 Astiachan are continually travei-sed by Cal- 
 mucks, Nogays, Kubans, and other Tartar 
 tribes, whose internal affairs are administered 
 by khans or rulers, who collect and transmit 
 such scanty tribute as can be drawn from the 
 flocks and herds of their vassals. It is only in 
 the more northern provinces of Oufa and oVen- 
 berg, where cities with a civilized population 
 and extensive mining establishments have been 
 formed, that Russia has been able to mould 
 the people into that uniform subjection which 
 prevails in other parts of her Euroi)can and 
 Asiatic territory. 
 
 In the mountainous regions of Circassia and 
 Caucasus, the distinctions of birth and rank 
 are observed with all the strictness of highland 
 pride. Under the prince are the nobles, who 
 exercise almost absolute sway over their vas- 
 sals. These are of two kinds, the bondsmen, 
 who cultivate the soil, and the armed retainers, 
 who attend the nobles to the field, either for 
 war or for prey. The life led by the nobles is 
 one constant round of war and feasting, hunt- 
 ing and jollity. On state occasions, they are 
 attired iu splendid robes, while their food and 
 furniture are of the most plain and homely de- 
 scription. Their drink is a fermented liquor 
 called Aoumws, made from mare's milk, of whii h 
 they are very fond. It supplies the place of 
 wine, which is prohibited by the Koran. All 
 Tartar tribes are addicted to habits of plun- 
 der ; and if a stranger enters their territory, 
 except under the protection of one of their 
 chiefs, he is sure to be enslaved. The Russians 
 have never yet been able to subdue the Cir- 
 cassians. The most she can do is to hold mil- 
 itary occupation of the leading petitions. 
 
 The kingdoms of Kiva and Bok!' - '■"^"' n 
 
 kind of oases in the midst of the v.; f 
 
 Turcomani, which is the name gi s 
 
 whole region as far as the Caspian and the 
 Aral. 
 
746 
 
 TARTARY AND SIBERIA- 
 
 TV pombikm of Ttftary, including Mon- 
 CoUa •DalUncborla, is estimated at about 
 logOOO/XK). The immense region of Siberia 
 tmhneta 6,000,000 square miles, and is coni- 
 noied to coDtnin father more than 5,000,000 
 taikftbitant«. This scanty population consists 
 of two distinct portions, the foreign rulers, and 
 the mtin tribes. The Russian inhabitants 
 tn eompoeed of the unfortunate exiles, >vho 
 ■!« btDisbed to those desolate wilds for some 
 icti or fancied offence against the State, the 
 conricts, who work in the mines, and the ofiB- 
 C9B stationed at the different Russian towns 
 thTODghoot Siberia, to collect the furs and 
 skins, as tribute or tax to the emperor. There 
 wn likewise the dignitaries of the church and 
 the inferior clergy connected with the estab- 
 Ushnent Each of the four large provinces, 
 Tobolsk, Tomsk, Irkutsk, and Okkotsk, has 
 its archbishop and patriarch, who reside en- 
 tirely in the towns. Of the native Siberian 
 races, those which occupy the whole of the 
 southern frontier arc of Tartar origin ; and 
 until conquered by Russia, they held supreme 
 sway in Siberia- The people inhabiting the 
 fioathern and eastern shores of Lake Baikal 
 are the Buriats, a division of the Mongolians. 
 ITic authority of Russia has suppressed the 
 system of plunder which used to prevail among 
 these people. The Samoyedes and Tungusi 
 races inhabit the northern coasts, and these 
 are unlike the Tartars, both in their persons 
 and habits. They lead a wandering life, their 
 sole employment being hunting and fishing. 
 Their dress is composed chiefly of skins. 
 
 Religiot}. — All the eastern regions of Tar- 
 tary acknowledge the supremacy of the Grand 
 Lama, and hold the Shaman doctrine, which is 
 a modification of Budhism. The nations in- 
 habiting Western and Independent Tartary 
 are devoted to the Mussulman creed. Under 
 the Budhist system of religion, the various 
 little tribes of eastern Asia have minor lamas, 
 who hold a mixed temporal and spiritual juris- 
 diction oyer the people, and in Tartary this 
 form of idolatry seems combined with magic 
 and sorcer}*, and many similar modes of terri- 
 fvin;^ and deluding the ignorant wanderers of 
 the desert 
 
 Burchan is the name of the Calmuc idols, 
 and most of their gods are supposed to have 
 
 > ■ ■'T:al beings, who, after passing through 
 
 ; rent degrees of transmigration, have 
 
 ■- 'd themselves to the dignity of the 
 
 p' r.ii ; >:. I,y great deeds and extreme sufferings. 
 
 i i.c ii luihitants of the Tartar villages near 
 Afitrachau are Mohammedans, and there are 
 also many Persians, professing the same faith, 
 residing in this country, for trade. 
 
 That race of Mongolian Tartars called Bu- 
 riats, inhabiting the southern shores of Lake 
 Baikal, as far as the Chinese frontier, are wor- 
 Aipers of the Grand Lama; but they have 
 iramerons other objects of worship. Their 
 worship abounds in burdensome and disagree- 
 
 able ceremonies, but is accompanied with no 
 sanguinary rites. A portion of the people pro- 
 fess Shamanism, which is supposed to be the 
 most ancient religion of the country. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 United Brethren, — In ITG.'), five Brethren 
 from Ilernhutt in Silesia, were appointed to 
 undertake a mission to the wandering Tartar 
 tribes in Asiatic Russia, and settled at Sarcp- 
 ta, not far from Georgeisk, one of the chief 
 Russian towns, between the Caspian and Black 
 Seas, on the road from St. Petersburg to Per- 
 sia. They ransomed some of the Tartars from 
 slavery, and preached the Gospel to all whose 
 attention they could gain, conforming, in some 
 respects, to the Tartar mode of life. They 
 translated the Gospel and several tracts into 
 Calmuc. They met with very little success, 
 till 1815, when a little flock of Calmuc Tar- 
 tars came out from among their heathen coun 
 trymen, and joined their congregation. In 
 1823, their congregation had increased to 300. 
 About this time, the emperor refused to grant 
 them permission to baptize their converts, 22 
 in number, under an old law which forbids the 
 conversion and baptism of the heathen, unless 
 it be done by the Russian Greek clergy ! But 
 the Emperor Alexander gave them permission 
 to preach and distribute the Scriptures. Very 
 valuable assistance was at this time 'rendered 
 not only to the Moravian mission, but also to the 
 Scotch and London Society's missions, by the 
 Russian Bible Society, whose interests the Em- 
 peror and the pious Galatzin warmly promoted. 
 This society was at the expense of printing the 
 Scriptures in modern Russ, Mongolian, and a 
 portion of them in Turkish Tartar, after they 
 had been translated into these languages by the 
 missionaries of these societies. 
 
 Scottish Missionary Society. — This society 
 commenced a mission in 1802, at Karsass, in 
 Asiatic Russia. They obtained from the Rus- 
 sian Government, a grant of land consisting of 
 14,000 acres, with certain immunities attached, 
 and they seem to have obtained greater privi- 
 leges than the Moravians, for liberty was given 
 to their converts to " emlDrace the religion of 
 the colony, and become members of it." They 
 also had the privilege of giving passports to 
 the members of their congregation to settle in 
 other parts of the empire. In consequence of 
 these privileges, probably, the Scotch mission- 
 ary settlement continued in existence longer 
 than any other missionary establishment in 
 Tartary. Native youths, slaves to the Circas- 
 sians and Cuban Tartars, were redeemed by the 
 Scotch missionaries and placed in schools, 
 where they acquired the Turkish and English 
 languages, the principles of Christianity, and 
 several useful arts. In 1805, a printing-press 
 was sent out to Karass, and the New Testa- 
 ment was printed in Turkish, and tracts in the 
 Tartar language. In 1814, they extended their 
 missionary efforts to Astrachan and Orenberg; 
 
TARTARY AND SIBERIA. 
 
 747 
 
 and at the former place, another printing-press 
 was established, which printed the Tartar New 
 Testament and other books, which were carried 
 into Pe)-sia by the numerous merchants trading 
 from that country with Russia. One of their 
 Tartar converts, named John Abercrombie. 
 was for many years printer to the London Mis- 
 sionary Society at Selinginsk. In 1817 they 
 issued 4000 tracts and 5000 Testaments. 
 These found their way, by means of Mohamme- 
 dan merchants and pilgrims, and even Brah 
 mins and Jews, to Bagdad, Persia, Bokhara, 
 and even to China. A Tartar prince of the 
 Crimea, called the Sultan of Katagherry, ap- 
 pears to have been the first fruits of their mis- 
 sionary labor. Walter Buchanan, a Circas- 
 sian, was the next. He faithfully served the 
 Scottish or Edinburgh Society, for many years, 
 at Orenburgh, in Russian Tartary. 
 
 In 1822, the Scotch colony was joined by 
 several German missionaries, sent out by the 
 Basle Institution, some of whom settled in 
 Tartary, and others proceeded to Teflis and 
 Shusha, in Georgia, to labor among the Arme- 
 nians. 4 
 
 In 1823, Mirza Mohammed Ali, son of a 
 Mohammedan judge, was employed by the mis- 
 sionaries at Astrachan, as a teacher ; and in 
 consequence of the discussions which he had 
 with the missionaries, his faith in Moham- 
 medanism was shaken ; and, after a short time, 
 in the face of the opposition of friends, he cor- 
 dially embraced Christianity. The Greek arch- 
 bishop proposed that he should be admitted 
 into that church by baptism ; but he wrote a 
 petition to the Emperor Alexander, through 
 Prince Galatzin, asking to be allowed to re- 
 ceive baptism from those who had been the 
 instruments of his conversion, which request 
 was instantly granted. He was, therefore, ad- 
 mitted to the church, in the presence of Greeks 
 and Turks, Persians and Frenchmen, Germans 
 and Armenians, the service being in English, 
 Turkish, and Persian. But he was afterwards 
 treated with great harshness by the Russian 
 government of the Caucasus, being compelled, 
 in 1825, to enter the Russian service, and or- 
 dered to refrain from interfering or coopera^ 
 ting in any missionary work. In consequence 
 of this and other restrictions imposed upon 
 them by the Russian government, both the 
 Scotch and the Moravian Missionary Societies 
 relinquished their missions, though with the 
 greatest regret ; but the settlement at Karass 
 continued to be occupied several years longer. 
 
 A great revolution also took place about this 
 time in Russia with regard to the Bible Society. 
 This institution, under the fostering care of 
 the Emperor Alexander, had pursued a distin- 
 guished career, and promised to supply the 
 Word of Life not only to the Russian popula- 
 tion, but to the heathen and Mohammedans. 
 A powerful opposition, however, was raised 
 against it in 1825, the year that Alexander 
 died ; in consequence of which, Prince Galat- 
 
 zin retired from office, and resigned his station as 
 Minister of Religion. Its secretary, M. Papoff, 
 was put upon his trial in the criminal court, for 
 allowing a book to be published, in which were 
 some reflections considered unfavorable to the 
 doctrine of the Greek church, in relation to the 
 Virgin Mary ! It had been intended that the 
 missionaries at Astrachan should be employed 
 by the Bible Society to print a new and correct 
 edition of Henry Mart.'VTi's Persian New Tes- J 
 tament, and the types had been ordered from St. * 
 Petersburgh ; but this work was now stopped, 
 and the missionaries were told that their Tar- 
 tar version of the Old Testament would have 
 to be submitted to three archbishops of the 
 Greek church ; so that, when they had com- 
 pleted the translation, it was doubtful whether 
 it would bo allowed to be published. All these 
 causes, together with the growing indifference 
 of the native tribes, combined to cause tlie 
 Scotch and United Brethren's Societies to 
 withdraw their missionaries in 1825. 
 
 London Missionary Society. — This society 
 undertook a mission to Selinginsk, in Siberia, 
 in 1819. When the missionaries had finished 
 the translation of the Gospel of Matthew, the 
 first printed edition was sent to the governor 
 of Irkutsk, to distribute among the Tartars on 
 the shores of Lake Baikal; 'but the Calmuc 
 Tartar character being different from that 
 which the Buriat tribes had retained, the books 
 were not generally understood by these people. 
 But two of their nobles were found who could 
 decipher the character, and were able to read 
 and explain its contents. This so astonished 
 the Buriat chiefs and the head lama, that each, 
 among his own people, made a collection 
 amounting to £550, which they sent to the 
 Russian Bible Society, begging to have the 
 Gospel of Matthew, and, if possible, other 
 books of the New Testament, translated into 
 their own dialect, and printed in a character 
 which they could read. The two Buriat nobles 
 who had interpreted the former edition, were 
 sent for, and repaired to St. Petersburgh to 
 undertake the work. As they proceeded with 
 their work, they became deeply interested, and 
 frequently came to Rev. Mr. Schmidt to in- 
 quire the meaning of passages. When they 
 had completed the 23a chapter of Jfatthew, 
 they came to him, and declared that they had 
 resolved to renounce their former superstitions, 
 and embrace the Christian faith. He warned 
 them of the trials they would have to encoun- 
 ter, but they replied : " If is our firm determi- 
 natibn to be followers of Jesus, and to share 
 in his reproach, if that be our lot ; though we 
 hope'that such trials may not befall us soon, on 
 account of our weakness in the faith." One of 
 them died at Sarcpta, in October, 1822. 
 
 In 1838, the mission is thus mentioned in 
 the Society's report : " Shagdur and Tekshee, 
 two of the native converts, conduct the daily 
 Mongolian worship with much propriety, dur- 
 ing Mr. Stallybross's visit to England. The 
 
748 
 
 TASJtfANIA. 
 
 ffirb* »chool at Khodon makes satisfactory 
 
 jir, The boys arc ten in number. At 
 
 () ,11 issorrounded bv anumbcr of 
 
 U . who have been brought under 
 
 the in:h'a-iKX' of relii,'ion, and whose chief de- 
 riri' L< to impart to their countrymen the bkvs- 
 inpt they so highly prize." The whole of the 
 OKI Tistament was translated into Mongolian, 
 
 ' ■ • ': and some of the Gospels had 
 iiid circulated. 
 
 11, the mission was suppressed by 
 ,1 : the Russian Synod, the reason 
 
 |: , • that the mission, in relation to 
 
 tJiat form of Cliristianity already established 
 in the Ru.ssian empire, did not coincide with 
 the views of the church and the government." 
 The missionaries wrote, concerning the aban- 
 donment of this mission : " It is painful to bid 
 adieu to the scenes where we have spent so 
 many vcars, and to the people of whom, we 
 trust, tue first fruits Iiave been gathered unto 
 Christ. They arc living evidences that we 
 have not labored in vain, and earnests of the 
 abundant harvests to be expected when the 
 word of God shall have free course, and be 
 glorified in this land. — Missionary Guide Book. 
 
 We may judge, from these examples, what 
 will be the fate of our missions in Turkey, 
 should Russia sutcecd in her present crusade. 
 
 TASMANIA, or VAN DIEMAN'S 
 LAND: An island, lying at the southern 
 cxtremitv of New Holland, between 40° 42' 
 and 430 43- g. Jat. ; and 145° 31' and 148° 
 22' K. long., reckoned to contain 27,192 
 square miles. In general it is composed of al- 
 ternate hill and dale, and even the nigh dowMis 
 are generally fit for cultivation and pasture. 
 The chief lines, both of mountain and river, 
 run from north to south, through the eastern 
 part of the colony. Table 'Mountain, the 
 most elevated hill m the island, nearly over- 
 hangs the southern settlement of Hobart 
 Town, rising to the height of 3,936 feet. Al- 
 though the country is productive, and but a 
 nnaH portion of it is occupied Ijy British co- 
 lonists, the aboriginal inhabitants have en- 
 tirely disappeared. In consequence of the in- 
 ces^nt mutual hostility which subsisted be- 
 tween them and the colonists, the whole of 
 them were hunted out, and removed in the 
 year 183.5. to Flinder's Island, in Bass's Straits, 
 wli ' • (Table remnant still reside. They 
 in; 1), Init in 1842, were reduced to 
 
 51. ..... ^ i.ad been only 14 children born in 
 
 8 years. 
 
 MISSION. 
 
 Wesletaw Missionary Society. The 
 
 Wesley an Mi.ssionary Society began opera- 
 tions ill Tasmania in the year 1820, at a time 
 when there was but one minister of any pcr- 
 raasion in the whole island. That year the 
 committee in London directed Mr. Carrosso 
 to proceed from New South Wales and com- 
 mence a mission there ; but he failing to reach 
 
 the island, and Mr. ITorton being then on hia 
 way to New South Wales, was directed to re- 
 main in Tasmania. At that period the state 
 of .society in the island was most deplorable. 
 The aboriginal inhabitants, greatly reduced in 
 number, wandered about in wretchedness, con- 
 stantly exposed to the hostility of the white 
 settlers. The white population, made up of 
 convicts and settlers, then amounted to about 
 8,000 jxjrsons. And on Mr. ITorton's commenc- 
 ing his efforts, he thus describes the mor^l 
 condition of t\ie place where he was appoints 
 ed to labor : " Adultery and drunkenness, 
 and blasphemy arc sins which prevail to an 
 awful extent among all classes, associated 
 with idleness, dishonesty, malice, quarreling, 
 and misery. Almost every tongue has learned 
 to swear, and among the lower classes every 
 hand to steal. The houses are surrounded by 
 fierce dogs, to guard them against nocturnal 
 depredations ; and yet when thieves are de- 
 tected in the act of plundering, thev seldom 
 resist, but scamper off as fast as they can. 
 Indeed a vigilant and active police prevents 
 thcLfrequent perpetration of very daring deeds 
 of outrage. Before we arrived, there was 
 only one Protestant minister, a clergyman of 
 the established church, whose labors were al- 
 most wholly confined to Hobart Town, and one 
 Catholic priest, who had been but a few months 
 in the colony. The out-settlements were there- 
 fore left without the public ordinances of reli- 
 gion. Thus Satan enjoyed an undisturbed 
 reign. When we landed in this country, we 
 were not a little surprised and pleased to find 
 a Wesleyan Methodist Society already formed, 
 and a chapel in a state of preparation. There 
 are about 20 who very regularly attend class, 
 and appear to be sincere inquirers ; some of 
 whom have found peace with God." 
 
 The mission was soon strengthened by ano- 
 ther missionary. The missionaries received 
 every encouragement from the governor of the 
 colony, who showed himself laudably anxious 
 for the moral benefit of all classes of the popu- 
 lation. In 1827 he applied to the committee 
 for two more missionaries to be sent out ; their 
 passage, together with an annual allowance 
 toward their support, having been voted from 
 the public funds. 
 
 But the labor in such a mission field as Tas- 
 mania is one of no ordinary difficulty, especi- 
 ally that portion of it employed among the 
 convicts. These unhappy creatures, while suf- 
 fering the punishment of their crimes, retain 
 the vicious habits and daring disregard of the 
 laws of God and man, which have been the 
 occasion of their banishment to those distant 
 lands. And yet among these children of crime 
 and sorrow the missionaries have labored with 
 very considerable success. One of them gives 
 it as his opinion, that out of ,50 criminals exe- 
 cuted within six years, many of them had been 
 snatched " as brands from the burning," and 
 shared with " the dying thief" in the kingdom 
 
;^S^ 
 
 Of Tsn 
 
 TJHIVBRSITT] 
 
;#... 
 
 •^,r 
 
 a 
 
 '->^. 
 
 ^u. 
 
 Stufaft 
 
 iatn 
 
 XmrmtTrn 
 
 ^J^m 
 
 -yifit/t 
 
 
 3t 
 
 ,^' 
 
 ./ 
 
 "^^. 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 € f€|. 
 
 I? .^^ 
 
 iW 
 
 1f^: 
 
 Kirtrox 
 
 ^^" 
 
 .7 .. '■>>>,-•■ M /,>vf?/v/>//«; 
 
 w 
 
 B" 
 
 2^* 
 
 HruiJIaZera) 
 fDiumj 
 
 ^ria. 
 
 s ^ JO o jsr z c ^i 
 
 or 
 
 
 (^mz^^ Therwmcvs\ 
 
 SK 
 
 TliESSALONICA 
 
 oil 
 
 S A L O N I C A 
 
 nud 
 
 
 •N.SiJ* of AIJJe« 
 
 ■-{irissa 
 
TATT^OING—TENASSERIM. 
 
 749 
 
 of a compassionate Saviour. The missionaries 
 gave what attention they could to scliools, for 
 the education of the young ; but they had to be 
 held in the evening, and to be taught, at least 
 in part, by the more educated criminals. The 
 prisoners generally seem to have entertained 
 toward the missionaries feelings of respect and 
 affection. This may be partly accounted for 
 from the fact, that usually the only words of 
 kindness which cheered their bitter lot, fell 
 from the lips of these men of God. In 1832, 
 the government requested the appointment of 
 an additional missionary for the new penal set- 
 tlement of Port Arthur, and the Rev. Mr. 
 Butters was sent out to supply that post. At 
 this period the number of members had risen 
 to 163, and 283 children were in the schools. 
 Many of these had been among the most 
 guilty and abandoned of mankind. Many 
 even of the scholars had already been trained 
 and graduated at the school of vice, and had 
 arrived at early maturity in depravity and 
 guilt. In this class of men the colonial gov- 
 ernment had found it necessary to make dis- 
 tinctions ; the most hardened and incorrigible 
 being separated from the rest, and placed 
 under severe discipline in the penal settlements 
 or condemned stations in Tasmania. Among 
 those thus " twice dead," the Wesleyan mis- 
 sionaries were appointed to labor ; and such 
 were the results of the Gospel over the hearts 
 and conduct of many of these outcasts, that 
 successive governors of this colony have gi-ate- 
 fully acknowledged the importance of the ser- 
 vices rendered by the missionaries. In 1837, 
 four additional missionaries were sent out to ex- 
 tend its operations. The mission was farther 
 enlarged in 1839, when the statistics stood 
 thus : 9 missionaries ; 570 church members, 
 and 922 scholars. The Rev. John Water- 
 house became central superintendent of the 
 missions in Australia and Polynesia, in 1839. 
 In the discharge of his official duties he per- 
 formed long and perilous journeys, both by 
 sea and land, while visiting the various stations 
 under his care. On one of these journeys in 
 Tasmania he was much exposed to heavy 
 rains, the result of which waa a protracted ill- 
 ness, which at length ended his vahiable life. 
 The excellent financial measures which he and 
 others introduced into these missions have re- 
 lieved the missionary society from the respon- 
 sibility of their maintenance and now this por- 
 tion of the mission field has become nearly, 
 if not quite, self-supporting. 
 
 The gold discoveries in Australia have ra- 
 ther retarded the prosperity of this mission dur- 
 ing the past three years. An extensive^ emi- 
 gra-tion took place, which affected every circuit 
 more or less. Yet, under all these disadvan- 
 tages, the district has sustained itself during 
 the past year by the help of its own contingent 
 fund ; the missionaries in general report very 
 favorably of the spiritual state of the mem- 
 bers who have remained at home, and encour- 
 
 age themselves with the hope of future im- 
 provement.— Rev. W. Butler. 
 
 
 TABULAR 
 
 VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 CENTRAL 
 OR PRINCIPAL 
 
 1- 
 
 
 1 
 
 l' 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 STATIONS 
 
 i- = 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 . 
 
 i Y> 
 
 :^ 
 
 
 
 ORcmcurrs. 
 
 If 
 
 II 
 
 
 II 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Hobart-Town... 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 10 
 
 361 
 
 .Ifll 
 
 1500 
 
 New Norfolk.. . 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 ?3 
 
 104 
 
 250 
 
 CarapbcII-Town. 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 37 
 
 55 
 
 "50 
 
 I-aunceston .... 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 3S 
 
 A 
 
 104 
 
 30fi 
 
 1100 
 
 J-ongford 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 6 
 
 72 
 
 f)5 
 
 450 
 
 Westbury 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 47 
 
 4? 
 
 300 
 
 Oatlands 
 
 
 • • 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 26 
 
 6 
 
 150 
 
 Totals 
 
 39 6 
 
 3 
 
 114 
 
 24 750 
 
 1159l400o| 
 
 TATTOOING : A process of marking the 
 human body with various figures, by stained 
 lines, practiced by the natives of the Pacific 
 islands before the introduction of Christianity 
 among them, and still practiced by the pagan 
 tribes. Until a young man is tattooed, he is 
 considered in his minority. He need not 
 think of marriage, and he is constantly ex- 
 posed to taunts and ridicule, as being poor and 
 of low birth, and as having no right to speak 
 in the society of men. But as soon as he is 
 tattooed, he passes into his majority, and con- 
 siders himself entitled to the respect and pri- 
 vileges of mature years. "When a youth, 
 therefore, reaches the age of sixteen, he and 
 his friends are all anxiety that ho should be 
 tattooed. He is then on the out-look for the 
 tattooing of some neighboring chief, with 
 whom he may unite. On these occasions, six 
 or a dozen young men may be tattooed at one 
 time ; and for these there may be four or five 
 tattooers employed. Tattooing is a regular 
 profession, just as house-building, and well 
 paid. (See New-Zealand, p. 5G9.) 
 
 TAUTIRA : A station of the ly^ndon Mis- 
 sionarv Society on Tahiti, South Sea. 
 
 TAURANGA : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New-Zealand, on the 
 Bay of Plenty. 
 
 TAVOY : A province and a city in Bur- 
 mah annexed to the possessions of the East 
 India Company by the treaty of Yaudaboo 
 in 1826. The city is the seat of a mission of 
 the American Bapti.st Union. The entire dis- 
 trict has been brought in some degree under 
 the influence of its operations. 
 
 TELLTCHERRY : A station of the Basle 
 Missionary Society, on the Malabar coast, in 
 the western part of Southern Hindostan, 126 
 miles from Seringapatam. 
 
 TELOOGOO: A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in Southern India, on the 
 eastern coast, and some distance north of 
 Madras. 
 
 TENASSERIM: The name of a large 
 
i50 
 
 TERNATE^-TRBBIZOND. 
 
 rivff ia Bvmfth, and also applied to the three 
 proTiDces of Maulmain, Tavoy, and Mergui, 
 •Boeied to the territory of the British Kiist 
 JnAltk Company by tlie treaty of Yaudaboo in 
 
 : N' ATE : One of the Molucca Islands, 
 Hi hi.linn Arrhipolago. 
 
 IIIAirv I'.ASSIOU: A station of the 
 FrtULh rrott'stantd in South Africa, on a 
 bmnrh of the river Kaledon. 
 
 THKOPOLIS : A station of the London 
 Musionary Society in South Africa, 550 miles 
 iMt of Gape Town. 
 
 THESSALONICA, (called by the Turks 
 Sdanik, and by the French Salonica) is situated 
 at the head of the gulf of Salonica (ancient 
 Sintu Tkermaicus^ a branch of the ^-Egean Sea. 
 It is about 175 railes north of Athens and 300 
 west of Constantinople. It is, as in Paul's da^, 
 the chief city of Macedonia, being its mam 
 sea-port, and next to Constantinople, the chief 
 port of European Turkey. It has a population 
 of 60.000 or 70,000, of whom perhaps 15,000 
 are Turks, 15,000 Greeks, 30,000 Jews (in- 
 cluding 5,000 Mohammedan Jews), and a few 
 thousand Bulgarians, Wallachians, Albanians, 
 &C., tc 
 
 In 1849, the A. B. C. F. M. established a 
 mission among the Jews of this city. It con- 
 sisted at first of Messrs. Maynard and Dodd, 
 with their wives, of whom the former died in 
 a few months, and his widow returned to this 
 country. Mr. and Mrs. Dodd were subse- 
 quently joined by Messrs. Parsons and Morgan 
 with their wives. Mrs. Morgan also died in a 
 few months and Mr. Morgan afterwards mar- 
 ried Mrs. Sutphen, widow of a missionary. 
 The members of the mission suffered much 
 from sickness, especially from fever and ague, 
 which is prevalent in Macedonia ; and at the 
 present (July 1854) they are all absent from 
 their stations : Messrs. Parsons and Morgan in 
 Smyrna, laboring among the Jews there, and 
 Mr. Dodd in America, expecting to return 
 soon. 
 
 It is hoped that hereafter both stations 
 may bo occupied, and that in Thessalonica a 
 more favorable residence may be secured, and 
 better health enjoyed. 
 
 Thessalonica is the most important literary 
 centre of the Jews in the east, and a foothold 
 there gained will be valuable. The Jews there 
 arc peculiarly sociable and accessible to mis- 
 sionary influence. The missionaries have met 
 with encouragement in their work. There 
 have been a few cases of hopeful conversion 
 among Jews and Mussulmans. Many others 
 seem convinced, intellectually, of the truth, 
 though yet unrenewed, and of a still larger 
 circle the prejudices* are broken ; their esteem, 
 and sometimes affection, is won, and they lie 
 open to the influence of the truth. The field 
 is hopeful.— Rev. E. M. Dodd. 
 
 THUGS : (See Hindostan, Dr. Scudder's 
 Letter.) 
 
 TIABEI : A station of the London Mia* 
 sionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea. 
 
 TIDMANTON : Out-station to Kat River 
 station, of the London Missionary Society in 
 South Africa, formerly Blinkwater. 
 
 TIDOR : One of the Molucca .Islands, in 
 the Indian Archipelago. 
 
 TILLIPALLY : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board in Ceylon, about 10 miles north of 
 Jaffuapatam. 
 
 TIMOR : A group of the Molucca Islands 
 in the Indian- Archipelago. 
 
 TIMORLAUT : One of the Banda Islands, 
 a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 TINNEVELLY : A district in the South- 
 ern Carnatic, South India, and an important 
 field of missionary operations. 
 
 TIRUMUNGALUM : A station of the 
 Am. Board, about 12 miles S. W. of Madura, 
 in Southern Hindostan, and belonging to that 
 mission. 
 
 TIRUPOOVANUM : A station of the 
 Am. Board, in Southern Hindostan, 8 or 10 
 railes S. E. of Madura, and belonging to that 
 mission. 
 
 TOBAGO : (See West Indies.) 
 
 TOKA : One of the New Hebrides, where 
 is a station of the London Missionary So- 
 ciety. 
 
 TONGATABOO : One of the Friendly 
 Islands, a station of the Wcsleyan Society. 
 
 TOUNGOO : A large city in Southern 
 Burmah, 100 miles above Shwaygyeen on the 
 Sitang river. It is in territory which was 
 annexed to British Burmah in 1852, and is the 
 seat of a mission for both Burmans and Ka- 
 rens, of the Am. Baptist Union. 
 
 TRANQUEBAR: A settlement formed 
 by the Danes, on the Coromandel coast, in 
 1616. It is 145 miles S. by W. from Madras. 
 The town, and a small adjoining territory, 
 were ceded to the Danish crown in 1621, on 
 payment of an annual tribute of 2,000 crowns 
 to the rajah of Tanjore. The Danish govern- 
 ment have recently relinquished Tranquebar ; 
 and the British collector has removed there 
 from Negapatam. This was the scene of the 
 early Danish missions in India. The mission 
 is now supported by the Lutheran Missionary 
 Society at Dresden. 
 
 TRAY AN CORE : The southern extremity 
 of Hindostan, between 10° and 11° N. lat. 
 It is about 140 miles in length, by 40, the ave- 
 rage breadth. The population is not far from 
 1,000,000. The principal part of the popula- 
 tion consists of Brahmins and Nairs ; there 
 are also many Mohammedans. The missions 
 in Travancore are those of the London Society, 
 the Church Society, and the Church of Scot- 
 land's mission to the Jews. 
 
 TREBIZOND : A station of the American 
 Board, situated near the south-eastern extre- 
 mity of the Black Sea, and supposed to be the 
 precise spot where XenopJwn, with his retreat- 
 
TREVANDER Ail— TURKEY. 
 
 751 
 
 ing army, first touched the sea. It has about 
 15,000 inhabitants, 1,250 of whom are Arme- 
 nians. Its chief importance as a missionary 
 station, arises from the fact of its being the 
 principal sea-port of ancient Armenia, and its 
 consequent influence over the proper country 
 of the Armenian race. 
 
 TEEVANDER AM : A station of the Lon- 
 don Missionary Society, in the Travancore dis- 
 trict, Southern India, near Cape Comorin. 
 
 TRICHONOPOLY : A large fortified town, 
 capital of a district of the same name, situated 
 on the Cavery, 186 miles south-west of Madras. 
 Population, exclusive of troops, estimated at 
 74,000. Society for the Propagation of the 
 Gospel. 
 
 TRICHOOR : A large town 50 miles north 
 of Cochin, a station of the Church Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 TRINCOMALEE : A town on the N. E. 
 coast of Ceylon, 150 miles N. E. of Colombo, 
 having one of the finest harbors in the world. 
 A station of the Wesleyan Society. 
 
 TRINIDAD : (See West Indies.) 
 
 TSHICKSOO: A Karen village in the 
 district of Tavoy, in Burmah, and an out-sta- 
 tion of the Tavoy mission of the American 
 Baptist Union. 
 
 TUBUAI : One of the Austral Islands, and 
 a station of the London Missionary Society. 
 
 TULBAGH : Station of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society in South Africa, 75 miles 
 north-east of Cape Town. AJso of the Rhen- 
 ish Society. 
 
 TURANGA: A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New-Zealand, situated 
 on Poverty Bay. 
 
 TURKEY: The dominion of the Grand 
 Turk, or Sultan, extends over territory situated 
 in Asia, Africa, and Europe, and lying be- 
 tween the 20th and 45th degrees of north 
 latitude, the 10th and 47th of east longitude. 
 The countries composing this empire are, for 
 the most part, rich in natural resources, and 
 have been the seats of mighty empires and re- 
 publics, which at various times have exercised 
 a controlling influence on the world's history. 
 The entire territory covers a surface of about 
 210,000 square miles, including the tributary 
 provinces of Moldavia, Wallachia, Servia, 
 Egypt, Tripoli and Tunis. 
 
 Turkey in Europe, by ^nature formed to be 
 the garden of the world,'ha3 become a wilder- 
 ness, from the devastations of war and the op- 
 pressions of government. It. is l^unded on 
 the east by the Black Sea, the Bosphorus, and 
 the Sea of Marmora ; on the south by the 
 Dardanelles and Archipelago. The climate 
 is, for the most part, temperate ; the surface of 
 the country is varied with mountains and well- 
 watered plains. The unusually large extent of 
 sea-coast, and the number of good harbors, 
 afford every facility for commercial operations. 
 The Danube carries steam navigation into the 
 neart of the country. Constantinople, or 
 
 Istamboul, including its suburbs, is situated 
 upon both sides of the channel which separates 
 Europe from Asia, numbers about 1 ,000.000 
 inhabitants, and commands the Euxine and 
 the Levant. Turkey might long ago have 
 shared the fate of Poland, had the powers of 
 Europe dared to deliver Constantinople, the 
 key city, into the hands of any one of their 
 number. Moldavia, Wallachia, and Servia 
 are tributary principalities, over which the 
 Sultan has now but little power. 
 
 Turkey in Asia includes the countries be- 
 tween the Sea of Marmora, the Euxine, and 
 Russian Asia, on the north, and Arabia on 
 the south ; between Russian Asia and Persia 
 on the east, and the Mediterranean and Archi- 
 pelago on the west. Within its boundaries lio 
 the Holy City, the ancient seats of power, and 
 fountain-heads of learning, and Turkistan, 
 from whence came the savage tribe who have 
 given their name to a great empire, and iden- 
 tified it with the faith of Mohammed. Many 
 wealthy and thriving cities exist among 
 the old ruins, supported by the Asiatic com- 
 merce which passes to Europe through these 
 countries. Among these are Brusa, Sjinrna, 
 Trebizond, Erzriim, Bagdad, Tripoli, Damas- 
 cus. Manufactures of steel and cloths are car- 
 ried on prosperously in several towns. 
 
 Turkey in Africa consists of the tributary 
 countries of Egypt, Tunis, and Tripoli. The 
 universal prevalence of Mohammedanism in 
 these countries tends to preserve tlie political 
 union with Turkey, the stronghold of their 
 faith. 
 
 Population. — By the table annexed, it will 
 be seen that, in European Turkey the Moham- 
 medans, although the dominant race, do not 
 constitute a third part of the population. 
 They hold the fortresses and important towns, 
 but Greeks, Bulgarians, Armenians, &c., form 
 the mass of the population. The European 
 Turks preserve their original character of a 
 military colony : 
 
 EUROPEAN TURKEY (rUMKLIA.) 
 
 Thrace 1,800,000 
 
 Bulgaria 4,000,000 
 
 iloMavia 1,400,000 
 
 Wallachia 2,600,000 
 
 Bosnia and Herzegowina 1,400,000 
 
 Rumelia 2,600,000 
 
 ^^en•ia 1,000,000 
 
 Ishinds of the Archipelago 700,000 
 
 15,600,000 
 
 ASIATIC TURKEY (aNADOI.U.) 
 
 Asia Minor 10,700.000 
 
 Syria, Mesopotamia and Kurdi.stan. . . 4,460,000 
 Arabia (Mecca, Medina Habeeh) 900,000 
 
 19,060,000 
 
 AFRICAN TURKEY (OARB.) 
 
 EgjT>t 2,000,000 
 
 TripoU, Feuaii, Tunis 1,800,000 
 
 8,800,000 
 86,360,000 
 
DiTiding the population into races 
 tribet, Um> rvult is as follows : 
 
 TURKEY. 
 
 and 
 
 lUCDOS 
 TUKSl 
 
 IbEotoii*. 
 
 In Ada. 
 
 In Africa. 
 
 Total 
 
 OltMWM.. 
 
 MmmutkM 
 AiMato... 
 
 Jwrt 
 
 nrtofi.... 
 
 Ttukoauu 
 
 };J!5:!5S 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 '400.000 
 
 70.000 
 MO^OOO 
 
 •• 
 .. 
 
 10,700,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 100,000 
 
 obb.ooo 
 
 235,000 
 
 25,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 90,000 
 
 «,80b,000 
 
 .. 
 
 ■■ 
 •• 
 
 11,800,000 
 7,200,000 
 4,000,000 
 1,500,000 
 2,000,000 
 2,400,000 
 170,000 
 230,000 
 4,700,000 
 
 235,000 
 
 26,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 90,000 
 
 TotMiM... 
 
 18,500,0001 16,050,000| 3,800,000 
 
 35,350,000 
 
 Taking the population according to religious 
 creeds, the result is : 
 
 CRKEDe. 
 
 In Europe. 
 
 InABia. 
 
 In Africa. 
 
 Total. 
 
 UAhom'd'n 
 Greeks and 
 AnnenUiu 
 
 BoB-ath. 
 
 J«Wi 
 
 TbUU... 
 
 3,800,000 
 
 11,370,000 
 
 260,000 
 
 70,000 
 
 12,950,000 
 
 2,360,000 
 
 640,000 
 100,000 
 
 3,800,000 
 
 20,550,000 
 
 13,730,000 
 
 900.000 
 
 170,000 
 
 15,500,000 
 
 16,050,000 
 
 3,800,000 
 
 35,350,000 
 
 There are now, also, more than 2,000 in the 
 Protestant community lately organized, and a 
 great number, particularly among the Arme- 
 nians, who have embraced Protestant senti- 
 ments. Protestantism is likely to have a rapid 
 jprowth, and become an element of great power 
 m the future of Turkey. 
 
 The Ecclesiastico Political Character' of the 
 Turkish Government, and its bearing upon the 
 rnti'htion of the different Religious Classes of its 
 Subjects. — The Turkish Government is, in spirit, 
 • theocracy. Its legislation is derived from 
 foor sources ; the word of God, i. e., the Ko- 
 ran ; the Sunna, word of the prophet, the sen- 
 tences of the four grand Imams, the fathers of 
 %lamism ; and the laws of the reigning sove- 
 reign, representative of the prophet. Moham- 
 med aimed at being the founder of a new state, 
 and the Koran was declared to be, as it now is, 
 
 *' ••■•' ■■■'1 religious code of the Mussulmans. 
 
 il are the proper subjects of the Sul- 
 il-beloved children. Unbelievers are 
 his enemies. Unable to carry out the principle of 
 intolerance, the Sultan still recognizes the Mus- 
 sulmans as his more immediate and privileo-ed 
 snbjects. lie tolerates and grants privile'o-es 
 to certain incorporated bodies of unbelievers, 
 and recognizes his Christian subjects only as 
 
 T"''"' - "f some one of the existing Christian 
 
 s. in which every individual must 
 1 1. Each of these bodies, excepting 
 
 the FruUatants, has a Patriarch at its head, 
 who becomes responsible to the Sultan for the 
 
 whole. Every trade, moreover, is incorporated 
 under the direction of a committee, who grant 
 licenses to tradesmen, journeymen and appren- 
 tices, and are responsible to the head of their 
 community. In the early years of the Arme- 
 nian mission, this power, in the possession of the 
 patriarch, enabled him to inflict intolerable per- 
 secutions upon the missionary converts. They 
 could not withdraw from the community, with- 
 out rebelling against the civil law of the coun- 
 try. They were finally excommunicated, were 
 unable to obtain licenses to trade, had their 
 property taken from them with no means of 
 recovery, and were only preserved from starva- 
 tion by the charity of foreign residents and 
 Mussulmans. 
 
 On the 15th of November, 1847, after long- 
 continued exertions on the part of Sir Strat- 
 ford Canning, carried forward by Lord Cow- 
 ley, his successor to the British Embassy, an 
 imperial decree was issued, recognizing native 
 Protestants, as constituting a separate and in- 
 dependent community in Turkey. 
 
 Reforms in the Turkish Body-folitic. — For 
 more than three centuries Turkey was the ter- 
 ror of her European neighbors. Her armies 
 were as well disciplined and equipped as those 
 of other nations, while their fanatic devotion 
 to their religion, inseparably united as it was, 
 with the civil power, and their intense hatred 
 of unbelievers, rendered them almost irresistible. 
 So long as the zeal and valor of individual 
 combatants decided the day, the Turkish ar- 
 mies retained supremacy. But while civiliza- 
 tion was advancing in the surrounding Chris- 
 tian nations, and martial tactics were studied 
 and practised, there was no advance, but rather 
 a retrogression, in Turkey. Toward the latter 
 part of the seventeenth century the Turkish 
 power was at its zenith ; from that time, it be- 
 gan to decline. The Janissaries became alarm- 
 ingly powerful, audacious and overbearing. 
 While there was no progress made in the art 
 of war, the Ottoman people gradually degene- 
 rated, and lost much of their original native 
 valor. 
 
 Reform was commenced in 1789, by Sultan 
 Selim. Prejudice and ignorance, on the part 
 of his subjects, were obstacles almost insuper- 
 able to the introduction of measures which 
 would tend to place Turkey on a level with her 
 neighbors. An army was formed by Selim on 
 the European plan, and various governmental 
 reforms were introduced. These new measures 
 were considered as sacrilegious by the body ol 
 Mussulman subjects, and a revolt of the Jan- 
 issaries deposed Selim from his throne. 
 
 Mahmoud, successor of Selim, was disposed 
 to continue the reforms commenced by that 
 monarch, but was, for a long time, kept in 
 check by the Janissaries. At length, on the 
 14th of June, 1826, they were carried oflF by a 
 general massacre, and the Sultan was free to 
 pursue his plans of reform. The red cap and 
 trowsers were substituted for the turban and 
 
TUTUILA— UNITED STATES. 
 
 753 
 
 loose robes. Women were allowed greater 
 freedom. The Christians and Franks received 
 new privileges and protection. The army was 
 increased, the power of the Pashas limited, fo- 
 reign officers, mechanics and engineers employ- 
 ed, and the navy renovated and enlarged. A 
 medical college was also instituted, and quaran- 
 tine laws introduced. These reforms were not 
 appreciated nor understood by the people. 
 They were contrary to the genius of Moham- 
 medanism, encountered the stern opposition of 
 the priesthood, and were carried forward with 
 great difficulty. Their first effect was to weaken 
 the power of the empire, and from a succession 
 of untoward events, it seemed, at the death 
 of Sultan Mahmoud, in 1839, to be on the verge 
 of destruction. His son Abdul Medjid, ascend- 
 ing the throne at the early age of 17, however 
 persevered in the same line of policy ; and on 
 the 3d November, of that year, the celebrated 
 Hatti Scheriff was proclaimed in Gul Hane, 
 a park within the limits of the Seraglio, to the 
 assembled grandees of the empire, and in the 
 
 fresence of the ambassadors of foreign powers, 
 n this extraordinary document the new sove- 
 reign, unsolicited by his people, but constrain- 
 ed by the necessity of circumstances, limited 
 his own authority, guaranteed to every subject 
 security of life and property, ordained an equal 
 and fair system of taxation, ordered a regular 
 method of drawing the conscription for the 
 army and fixed the period of service ; did away 
 with the confiscation of the property of crimi- 
 nals and visiting punishment on innocent re- 
 latives; promised better administration of jus- 
 tice, and placed Mohammedans, Christians, 
 Jews, and Pagans, on the same footing, as re- 
 garded civil rights and the law. Changes so 
 great and opposed to Mohammedan feeling and 
 usage, were, of course, but imperfectly execut- 
 ed, and the tanzimat or "new regulations," 
 can be made a reality only by gradual steps of 
 enforcement. The government, however, has 
 entered upon the right path, and under the in- 
 fluences from abroad which must control^ it, is 
 moving onward in it. The action taken in be- 
 half of the Protestants, the guarantees given 
 recently to the Western Powers, and the fir- 
 mans addressed to the Christian and Jewish 
 communities, are events of the happiest signi- 
 ficance in reference to the cause of civilization, 
 of religious freedom, and of true Christianity in 
 Turkey. 
 
 TUTUILA : One of the Samoan Islands on 
 which the Londpn Missionary Society have 
 two stations. 
 
 TUMBOO : A village beautifully situated 
 near the sea, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, 
 about H miles from Kent. Church Mission- 
 ary Society. 
 
 UAWA : A station of the Church Mission- 
 ary Society in New-Zealand, 36 miles north of 
 Turanga. 
 
 UITENHAGE: A town and district in 
 
 South Africa, occupied by the London Mis- 
 
 48 
 
 sionary Society, and the Society for the Pro- 
 pagation of the Gospel. The district is pas- 
 toral and agricultural, lying chiefly between 
 the Chantoos and Bushman's rivers. In the 
 neighborhood of the town, it is of extreme fer- 
 tility, and has been known to yield from 80 to 
 90 returns of wheat. The town is regularly 
 built, each house having behind it an •llotment 
 of garden ground ; and the water from a spring 
 in the vicinity has been laid along the princi- 
 pal street, furnishing an abundant supply for 
 all. Fruit and vegetables are successfully cul- 
 tivated, and sold in market at Port Elizabeth. 
 The interior trade is carried on through Gra- 
 ham's Town. 
 
 ULAH : A Karen town in the district of 
 Mergui, in Burmah, on the Tenasserim river, 
 an out-station of the Tavoy mission of the Am. 
 Baptist Union. 
 
 ULEMOEGA : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on the island of Upolu, one 
 of the Samoan Group. 
 
 UMLAZI : A station of the American 
 Board in South Africa, 12 miles south-west of 
 Umlazi river, containing 100,000 Zulus. 
 
 UMPUKANI : A station of the Glasgow 
 African Society, among the Grequas, Basutos, 
 and Mantatees, South Africa. 
 
 UMSUNDUZI : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Zulus in South Africa, 
 near Port Natal. 
 
 UMTWALUMI : A station of the Ameri- 
 can Board among the Zulus, near Port Natal, 
 in South Africa. 
 
 UxMVELO : A station of the London Mia- 
 sionary Society in South Africa, formerly 
 called Botman's Kraal. 
 
 UMVOTI : A station of the American 
 Board in South Africa, about 40 miles north 
 of Port Natal, on the Umvoti river. It is a 
 most delightful site for a mission, well-watered 
 and wooded, with good arable and pasture 
 grounds, so that several thousands of natives 
 might live within a short distance of the mis- 
 sionary's residence. 
 
 UPOLU ; One of the Samoan Islands, on 
 which the London Missionary Society bave9 
 seven stations. 
 
 USSA : Danish Akra, occupied by the Ger- 
 man Missionary Society. 
 
 Ul^UMAORO : A station of the London 
 Missionary Society on the east side of the 
 island of Ilaiatea, situated on an open bay. 
 
 UVEA : One of the Friendly Islands, tXxo 
 most remote in the district of Ilabai, occu- 
 pied by the Wesleyans. A Romish bishop, 
 two priests, and an old friar have taken up 
 their residence here, and done much mischief, 
 by kindling up a religious war and setting the 
 people to destroy one another. 
 
 UNITED STATES : I. Extetit of Terri- 
 torj/.— Inl819,the territory belonging to the 
 United States included not less than 2,300,000 
 square miles. Since then, at different times, 
 another million has been acquired by varioua 
 
754 
 
 UNITED STATES. 
 
 trwUci. Th« prwent area of our " real estate " 
 It aboot 3,300.000 nqoare inile.<<, and there is 
 Uw prtifpect of further annexations. Within 
 afingle generation, the star-spangled flag has 
 moviHl nonlhwanl, from the " still St. Mary's 
 river." on the confines of Georgia, to the Sunken 
 Floritlion kvv^ ; and westward to the Rio Bra- 
 ro, on the furthest Texian border ; and beyond 
 that, soaftwurd and westward still, to the Rio 
 Uila and the Californian gold coast. The 
 bannertHl eagle, which, till of late, fluttered 
 only on the Atlantic breezes, has sped her 
 flight across the " Father of Waters," and over 
 the nigged sierras or saws of the Rocky Moun- 
 tains, and now hovers in proud supremacy on 
 the gales of the Pacific, and " the stretching 
 oot of his wings filleth the breadth of the land." 
 Neither the empire of Rome nor even that of 
 Alexander spread so far. The sun is more 
 than two hours and a half in rising to the view 
 of all oar people, and bringing morning to the 
 whole lanti. Refore the denizens of San Fran- 
 cisco have eaten their breakfast, their fellow- 
 citizens of Eastport are beginning to think of 
 their dinners. From north to south, " as the 
 wild goose flies," in passing from his summer 
 retreats among the Canadian lakes, to his win- 
 ter (juarters on the Mexican Gulf, the poor 
 bird must wing an aerial journey of 1500 miles 
 ere he is safe from the guns of our sportsmen. 
 An indented coast-line, meandering through 
 more than 30,000 miles, affords numerous har- 
 bors for the purposes of commerce ; and these 
 still further favored by even a greater number 
 of miles of inland communication by those 
 natural canals, our noble navigable rivers. 
 Nearly the whole of this vast area is within 
 eas^ reach of water conveyance. 
 
 It was said by the cynical Randolph, that 
 Washington is "a city of magnificent dis- 
 tances;" and, in this respect, our national 
 caoital is a fit type of the great country whose 
 political interests centre there. The mind, 
 which can traverse any space with the quick- 
 neas of thought, is bewildered in wandering 
 orer this vast domain. And as for the body, 
 there be few indeed, even in our huge " travel- 
 ^ig community," with its restless ramblings, 
 who have so much as set foot in each one of 
 onr States and organized Territories. Out of 
 oar country there could be carved 38 such 
 kingdoms as Great Britain, and 16 such em- 
 pires as France. The possession of land has 
 ever been regarded as one of the grand ele- 
 ments of national greatness, wealth, and power. 
 
 II. Physical Resources.— Of these we can 
 catch but a hasty glimpse. With a country, 
 of which portions are buried for half the year 
 in ice and snow, while other portions have 
 never seen so much as a snow-flake ;— a coun- 
 try where the rivers— those liquid roads of 
 commerce, roll in paths of a thousand miles,— 
 •."^o^try affording every variety of climate, 
 jwdmg in teeming exuberance almost every 
 ■Kftil vegetable product, and whose mines of 
 
 up with a people who know how to find 
 use them ; — with such a country, and sucl: 
 
 the most valuable metals are beyond exhaus* 
 tion, — a country stored with the endless treas* 
 ures of the forest and the quarry, — a country 
 endowed with such resources, and fast filling 
 
 and 
 untry, and such re- 
 sources, it is impossible we should not heap up 
 riches, and rapidly rise to that eminence of 
 moral and political power, which amplitude of 
 material means secures. Take a few items 
 from the census returns of 1850. 1'he an- 
 nual crop of 'only one of the cereals, Indian- 
 corn, reached the inconceivable amount of 
 600,000,000 of bushels ; the yield of wheat 
 was 100,000,000 bushels; that of cotton, 
 1,000,000,000 of pounds. A very large pro- 
 portion of the soil is of the richest kind } 
 though this is of the less consequence, as, by 
 the help of modern science, and agricultural 
 chemistry, the poorest soils can be made per- 
 manently fertile. As to mineral wealth, we 
 have already ascertained 218,000 square miles 
 of coal-formation, equal to twenty-seven States 
 like Massachusetts. Not less than 1,100 
 cubic miles of this fuel are deposited beneath 
 the surface of our soil ; and one of these cubic 
 miles, at the present rate of consumption, 
 would last 1,000 years; so that a million of 
 years would not exhaust the stock. Of iron, 
 so far as utility is concerned, the most precious 
 of the metals, there are vast deposits every- 
 where in the Mississippi valley, along the cen- 
 tral axis of the country.' Some of them are 
 prodigious. There is a mountain in Missouri 
 500 feet in height, and miles in circuit, almost 
 wholly composed of iron. The abundance of 
 it is even greater in the region of Lake Supe- 
 rior; and it is also richly, though less pro- 
 fusely, scattered over the Atlantic slope. The 
 lead formations in the great central valley oc- 
 cupy 3,000 square miles, annually yielding 
 more than 20,000 tons. The copper deposits 
 in the wide regions of the north-west are still 
 more extensive, affording thousands of tons 
 every year, though the exploration is but just 
 begun ; and some of the Southern States are 
 found to be still richer in this metal. To say 
 nothing of silver, zinc, and other metS,ls used in 
 the economy of civilized life, gold is found all 
 along the eastern slope from Texas to Canada, 
 in many places profitably mined ; while, on 
 our Pacific slope, it is so lavishly diffused, that 
 there is enough to reward the industry, and 
 excite the greed, of generations to come. 
 
 III. Commerce. — The internal traffic is be- 
 yond all computation. Its statistics are too 
 huge to be meddled with. The active transfer 
 of property to and from all portions of the 
 land, and the exchange of values in crude and 
 manufactured articles, employ and reward an 
 inconceivable amount of industry and capital. 
 To say nothing of the traction on common 
 roads, illimitable for extent and ramification, 
 and of the freightage on our immense system 
 of railways and canals, the tonnage of the 
 
UNITED STATES. 
 
 755 
 
 steamboats occupied with our inland trade is 
 more than 400,000 tons. 
 
 Our foreign trade is also conducted upon 
 an enormous scale, employing above 4,000,000 
 of shipping in the transportation of above 
 400,000,000 in value of imports and exports. 
 Our sails are courting every breeze that blows, 
 and seeking every shore. Our sinuous coast 
 affords abundance of bays and harbors for 
 these floating bridges and ferries of the sea. 
 The winds and the waves are wafting to us the 
 commodities of the world. Our merchant- 
 princes and maritime adventurers are con- 
 tinually extending the range and magnitude 
 of their enterprizes. 
 
 lY. Population. — Since the revolution, when 
 it was but little more than 3,000,000, it has 
 swelled, at the last census, in 1850, to more 
 than 23,000,000. At each decennial census, 
 since 1790, it has been found that the increase 
 has been at a rate so surprisingly uniform, that 
 we can safely estimate its increase for future 
 periods. By the year 1875, it will be close 
 upon 50,000,000, and will far exceed 100,000,- 
 000 by the end of the nineteenth century. 
 Even then, it will not be a densely peopled 
 country, being capable of sustaining a far 
 greater population than that. We have now, 
 on the average, but seven inhabitants to each 
 square mile of territory. In Great Britain, 
 there are 223 to the square mile. If this coun- 
 try becomes only one half as populous, we shall 
 have 350,000,000. As yet, but one-fourteenth 
 part of our land is occupied at all. But the 
 immigration from all parts of the world brings 
 half a million every year to fill the vacant 
 space ; while, in the same time, even a larger 
 number is born upon the soil. Thus, our wide- 
 gpfead territory is rapidly rescued from the 
 dominion of savage nature, and is replenished 
 with a population intelligent and active, brave 
 and free, full of the republican spirit, glowing 
 with patriotic fire, and waxing bold aS to their 
 country's glorious destiny, and the part she is 
 yet to act in propagating among the nations a 
 nobler system of political and social life. 
 
 V. Public Works. — The old historic empires 
 fell to pieces, like uncemented masses of ma- 
 sonry, by their weight. Their magnificent 
 capitals, the seat of power and the heart of 
 government, could not, with their mightiest 
 throbbings, send out and draw back a quick 
 and healthful circulation through their remoter 
 members. But this fatal difficulty is quite 
 remedied for us, by those modern means of 
 inter-communication, whereby the pulsing life- 
 blood of our grand confederation is carried in 
 full vigor to the most distant bounds of our 
 sovereignty. Cheap postage keeps up a con- 
 stant ripple along the innumerable mail-routes, 
 whose branching veins run, like a vascular net- 
 work, over the whole body politic. The aggre- 
 gate of mail-service under contract for the pre- 
 sent year is more than 200,000 miles. 24,000 
 miles of telegraph-wires, like a vital nervous 
 
 system, with its numerous ganglionic centres, 
 carry instant sensibility to every chief limb 
 and member ; so that all parts of the nation 
 are touched at once by the same sympathies, 
 and excited by the same volitions. 15,Qpo 
 niilcs of completed railroad, and as many nwi-e 
 in the course of construction, like iron sinews 
 of vast strength and wondrous flexibility, are 
 linking joint with joint ; and, compacting the 
 whole by that which every joint supplicth, are 
 giving to the huge body corporate a ready 
 command over all its movements and resources. 
 On land and water, the steam-power, with hot 
 breath, inflates the lungs with vital energy, 
 and breathes through all the nation an ani- 
 mating principle, which puts vigor into every 
 muscle, and sharpens every sense. For all the 
 practical purposes of locomotion, and inter- 
 course and business interests, and political 
 efficiency and military operation, this country, 
 notwithstanding its recent prodigious annexa- 
 tions of territory, is not one-tenth as large as 
 it was thirty years ago. Quick as her growth 
 has been, still more rapid is the diffusion of 
 her working power, and the concentration of 
 her governing capacity. 
 
 VI. Geographical Position. — The oceans 
 which for ages separated this continent, and 
 hid its existence from the rest of the world, 
 have now become broad and easy highways of.* 
 intercourse with all nations. Nearly every 
 pagan, papal, and Mohammedan land' on the 
 face of the earth may be reached by lines of 
 communication almost direct, drawn from our 
 eastern, western, or southern ports. Along 
 these lines of marine travel immigration is 
 pouring in its thousands and tens of thousands, 
 while our people are passing out by the same 
 lines, scattering themselves everywhere in pros- 
 ecuting all the great material, intellectual, and 
 religious interests of life. Our country pre- 
 sents one front to the civilization of Europe 
 and the degradation of Africa, and another 
 front to the barbaric wealth of Asia and the 
 luxuriant isles of the southern seas, and offers 
 to mediate among them all. On her north 
 flank, she lifts a mighty arm of warning and 
 menace against the aggressive despotism of 
 Russia ; and on her southern side, she is be- 
 ginning to stretch out a hand of help towards 
 the distracted governments and the sweeping 
 solitudes of the other American continent 
 The four corners of the heavens seem to be 
 bending towards her, to lift her to the highest 
 sphere of moral and political influence over all 
 the globe. Her very location on the map of 
 the world seems to mark her out as " the 
 glory of all lands," " an eternal excellency, a 
 joy of many generations." 
 
 VII. Peculiar character of the veopU, — 
 Prominent and offensive as its faults may 
 sometimes be, we find in the very genius 
 of the people strong elements of national 
 power and influence in the world. It is 
 said, that the most fertile soils are made by 
 
756 
 
 UNITED STATES. 
 
 tin commlxtnro of oarths obtained by the 
 tfUnbUnK of dUR'n-"' ^ --'-^ '>f rock. And 
 the dUfcwot ncoB d ''J? Ji'ther their 
 
 1^ wfttotaandveii , nits, have bleDd- 
 
 td tin mow active trait.s of their several na- 
 Uooalitioi in a now and highly- energetic and 
 praclical type of the human kind. When the 
 Edored Lafayette made his triumphal pro- 
 gfCM through this country in 1825, he was 
 aiked by the governor of Massachusetts, what 
 Bnt* ■■ ' •*■" old world we most resembled? 
 •Til > expected, that in one of his 
 
 ncii: . . : <ompliment8 he would liken us 
 to his own " Iwautiful France ;" but the smil- 
 ing veteran replied : " Sir, tlie American is an 
 Englishman reinforced!" To the original 
 Anglo-Saxon stock, with the old British har- 
 dihood and steadiness stimulated by freer scope 
 for activity, there is an in-wrought re-inforce- 
 ment of the more mobile and versatile spirits 
 of other Kuropean races. Puritan, Covenant- 
 er, Uuguenot, Hollander, and many more, have 
 mixed their firmness, their vivacity, their piety 
 and other active ingredients in our national 
 composition. Our people have a wondrous 
 talent for self-government and social organiza- 
 tion anywhere, and at the shortest notice. So 
 completely is the government the offspring of 
 the public sentiment and will, that if the mat- 
 ter were to be put to the vote to-morrow, not 
 a thousand ballots among millions would be 
 cast in favor of any essential change in the 
 form of government. Such a government has 
 no need of any standing armv to maintain it 
 at home, and we have never had one for that 
 pnrpoee. Where, on the face of the earth, is 
 there a form of government so firmly and 
 safelv established as ours ? It is wonderful to 
 aee the peaceful party revolutions, which, even 
 after the most violent political agitations, are 
 80 calmy acquiesced in, at our great periodic 
 elections. The power of the nation is trans- 
 ferred to new hands at the bidding of a mar 
 jority of one vote, as quietly as at that of a 
 million. In all the settled parts of the country, 
 the authority of the law and the magistracy is 
 acquiesced in by the native population, with- 
 out a thought of resistance, and without a 
 show of force. All the mobs and popular tu- 
 mults which have occurred in the Atlantic 
 States for the last half century, if taken to- 
 gether, would not equal for violence the famous 
 "no-popery mob," headed by Lord George 
 Gordon, at London, in 1780. 
 
 Our nation has proved itself able thus far, 
 by the Divine blessing, to absorb and assimi- 
 taU a vast amount of foreign immigration. It 
 abounds in inventive talent, in the faculty of 
 adaptation to circumstances, in practical effi- 
 ciency, and in tireless industry. As such a 
 people advance in wealth and industry, it 
 must roll an enormous weight into the " ba- 
 lance of power," among the nations of the 
 earth. The popular voice uttered from this 
 contment, will, ere long, speak in tones of de- 
 
 cision in the arbitrament of the great political 
 questions which agitate the world. May it 
 be a voice of truth and love, as well as power ! 
 
 VIII. Education. — The statistics of this 
 subject are so great iis to crowd themselves 
 out of the narrow space that could be afforded 
 here. We have 160 colleges and theological 
 seminaries, all but 14 of them Protestant ; and 
 with very few exceptions, and these not infi- 
 del, under decidedly evangelical auspices. 
 They have 20,000 students under more than 
 1,000 professors'" In at least 12 of the States, 
 the public school system, which offers gratui- 
 tous instruction to every child, is established 
 by law. In many of these States it is all but 
 impossible to find an adult native of either sex 
 who cannot read and write. This system of 
 free schools is constantly rising in efficiency, in 
 importance, and in public estimation. It is 
 spreading into the States contiguous ; and it 
 can hardly be, in course of time, but it will 
 be adopted in all. In the new States of the 
 West there are reservations of the public lands 
 set apart for this object, which will form a 
 most munificent endowment. In the Sunday- 
 schools sustained by different branches of the 
 church, 3,000,000 of children and youth are 
 taught '• the first principles of the oracles of 
 God." It is a most gratifying fact, that this 
 immense array of means for the right training 
 of " young America " is almost wholly ad- 
 ministered by men of high moral feeling, and 
 generally of strong religious prinpiple. But 
 even this mighty enginery for mental discipline 
 will not suffice for the safety of our country, 
 unless true religion shall keep pace with its 
 progress, and guide it to right results. 
 
 IX. Religion. — The grand idea of full reli- 
 gious liberty is to leave religion entirely to it- 
 self, except so far as it may be necessary to 
 protect it from violence. This idea was early 
 introduced, and in time won complete ascendan- 
 cy. It has now few enemies, unless it may be 
 among the more bigoted part of the adherents 
 to the Romish hierarchy. We have now ra- 
 ther more than 12 Protestants to every Papist, 
 and this majority is ever increasing. The 
 spirit of Popery is so contrary to the spirit of 
 our people, and of their history and institu- 
 tions, that Eomanism would rapidly dry up 
 but for the streams of immigration running 
 over from so-called Catholic Europe. Their 
 best-informed ecclesiastics represent that one- 
 half of all the children born in this country, 
 fall off from their communion. So, too, infi- 
 delity, which has never been very prevalent in 
 this country, has been on the wane ever since 
 the beginning of this century, among the in- 
 born population ; and like Popery, depends 
 mostly for its continuance on foreign impor- 
 tation. 
 
 The supporting of religion on the voluntary 
 system has worked well. Never, since the 
 primitive age of the martyrs, has there been 
 an experiment so successful and instructive. 
 
UNITED STATES. 
 
 757 
 
 Nothing tries the strength of this system more 
 thoroughly than the building of churches to 
 meet the growing wants of the people. And 
 yet the careful estimates of Dr. Baird show- 
 that more than 3,000,000 of dollars are ex- 
 pended for this purpose alone in each year. 
 The last census proves that there were then 
 over 36,000 church edifices by actual enumer- 
 ation ; and also that in these there were al- 
 most 14,000,000 of sittings, sufficient, if these 
 buildings were located as the population is, to 
 accommodate nearly two-thirds of it, which is 
 quite as much as could be in attendance at one 
 time. The amount thus voluntarily invested 
 in church-property was over $86,000,000 in 
 1850 ; and, by this time, can be little, if at all, 
 short of $100,000,000. By careful estimates, 
 it is found that during the last year above nine 
 millions of dollars were expended in the cur- 
 rent expenses of the churches, such as the sus- 
 tentatiou of ministers, &c. ; three millions 
 more in the erection of new houses of worship ; 
 and two millions and a half in the various 
 missionary and benevolent operations of all 
 denominations ; making in all a self-imposed 
 tax of not far from fifteen millions of dollars 
 for the support of the Gospel, and the spread 
 of its institutions. So much for leaving the 
 Gospel to its own vital resources, and to the 
 blessing of Him, who gave it to make men 
 liberal and free like Himself. These expendi- 
 tures have not been in vain. God has made 
 them, as we shall see, of great effect in pro- 
 moting the spiritual welfare of the nation. 
 Yet, the sum so expended the last year, great 
 as it seems in the aggregate, is not burthen- 
 some by any means. It is but one dollar upon 
 every four hundred of the valuation of im- 
 proved lands, or one quarter of one per cent. 
 It is but one dollar upon every sixty of the 
 valuation of only the agricultural products of 
 the country for the same year. 
 
 In the first fifty years of this century, the 
 population of the United States increased a 
 little less than fourfold and a half. During the 
 same time, as appears by their several statis- 
 tics, the number of members in the various 
 churches called Evangelical, has increased 
 nearly tenfold. That is to say, the church 
 membership has increased more than twice as 
 fast as the population. If these rates of in- 
 crease shall continue the same for the next 
 fifty years, the whole adult population of the 
 United States must be included in these 
 churches before the century is ended. Where 
 is there in the world another field which can 
 show such wonderful religious prosperity ? " It 
 is the Lord's doing ; and it is marvelous in our 
 eyes !" 
 
 X. Pauperism and Crime.— In the year end- 
 ing June 1st, 1850, the whole number who re- 
 ceived aid as paupers in the United States was 
 135,000. These were less than one in a hun- 
 dred of the free population ; and of these above 
 68,000, or more than half, were foreigners. 
 
 The native paupers were not two-fifths of one 
 per cent, in the population. This indicat*.^ 
 that there is an abundance of the means of 
 subsistence here ; and that this ought to take 
 away from the inducement to commit crimes 
 against property. The whole number of per- 
 sons convicted of crime during the year above- 
 mentioned, was about 27,000. This is a gad 
 array ; and such a host of culprits may seem 
 to indicate a low standard of morality. But, 
 happily for the reputation of our country, it is, 
 found that 14,000 of these malefactors are 
 foreign-born ; so that there are eight times as 
 many criminals from our foreign, as from our 
 native, population, in proportion to the num- 
 ber of each. Very many of the native criminals 
 are the children of foreign-born parents, and 
 ought to be classed with those who trained 
 them. Our stock, both of paupers and crimi- 
 nals, would be admirably small, were it not 
 for the constant supplies with which we are 
 furnished by the nations of the old world. 
 
 Most of the European immigrants, (seven- 
 eighths of them.) settle in the free States ; and 
 hence the larger proportion of poverty and 
 crime to be found in those States. The im- 
 migrants are also prone to locate themselves 
 in the large cities of the free North and West, 
 whose alms-houses and jails are almost wholly 
 filled by the imbecility and demoralization of 
 the lower orders of European society. Thus, 
 in one of the largest cities of New Jersey, it 
 was found, last year, that all the inmates of the 
 poor-house were Irish ; and of a larger num- 
 ber who received outrdoor relief, all were 
 foreigners but two. Of 4,000 charged with 
 minor offences before the city police, only 80 
 were native Americans. 
 
 The prospects of our large cities would be 
 gloomy indeed, were it not for the moral ener- 
 gy of the resident natives, and their prompt- 
 ness to aid in the execution of the laws. There 
 is also at work among them a vast amount of 
 organized benevolent effort, working with 
 silent and unrecognized power, but with the 
 noblest results, for tiie relief of the miserable, 
 the instruction of the ignorant, the reclaiming 
 of the profligate, and the prevention of crime. 
 Numerous voluntary associations for these 
 purposes, besides the various churches, are en- 
 gaged in these objects with remarkable wis- 
 dom and zeal ; and the ramifications of their 
 influence reach all parts of the mass of suflfer- 
 ing, ignorance, and vice. 
 
 The temperance reform, which began here 
 some 25 or 30 years ago, has wrought its won- 
 ders ; and, ere this, would have won what 
 might be called a complete victory, but for the 
 resistance it meets from the Irish and Gerniana 
 among us. Already several of the States 
 have adopted and rigorously enforced a system 
 of prohibitory legislation, aiming at the en- 
 tire suppression of the traffic in intoxicating 
 liquors as a beverage. Other Statt^s are on 
 the point of adopting the same protective 
 
758 
 
 UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS. 
 
 polky against this prolific source of penary 
 
 Amoog the means by which it has pleased 
 QodmaJnly to sustain the spiritual lire and 
 ■oral health of this great and growing nation, 
 tiM hiffbeat place must be as8igne<l to what 
 ■re oafled " revivals of religion." The nnmcr- 
 kal statistics of these can only be tabled by 
 veeording angels, and fully published at the 
 JMlnieit dav. But the men among us best 
 miSified to judge of their power, extent, and 
 inutB, do not hi>sitate to speak of them as the 
 nlration of America. — Rev. A. W. McClure. 
 
 UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS: 
 Early in the hi.story of the Moravian Brethren 
 they were baptized with the missionary spirit. 
 Count Zinzondorf, having resigned his civil 
 dignities and become a minister of the Breth- 
 ren's Church, devoted himself, with his whole 
 estate, to the diffusion of the Gospel, in con- 
 nection with that church. Having been, 
 through false accusations, banished from Sax- 
 ony, on receiving the elector's order to quit the 
 kingdom, he made the following characteristic 
 rvmark, which contains the germe of the future 
 missionary history of the Moravian Church : 
 • Now we must collect a Congregation of Pil- 
 grims, and train laborers to go forth into all 
 
 THE WORLD, AND PREACH ChRIST AND HIS SAL- 
 
 TATio.v." " Viewing the Brethren's Church as 
 a society revived by the Lord, for the special 
 purpose of diffusing the Gospel throughout the 
 world, Zinzendorf considered himself solemnly 
 pledcred to see to it, that this, its destination, 
 should be carefully attended to, and, as far as 
 possible, faithfully executed. When banished 
 from Saxony, he saw no other way for obtain- 
 ing the proposed end, than by having, besides 
 his own family, those persons constantly about 
 him who were under preparation for service in 
 the church. These were occasionally joined 
 by missionaries who had returned from pagan 
 conntries, and by Brethren, who had come 
 back from their deputations to different parts 
 of Christendom, and who mostly remained 
 with the Count, till they resumed their former 
 employment, or received new appointments. 
 These persons constituted the Congregation of 
 Pilgrrims, which, strictly speaking, was never 
 stationary ; for, whenever the Count changed 
 his place of residence, the greater part of the 
 company followed him. Special attention was 
 paid to the design of their Institution ; and 
 for tills purpose, days and even weeks were 
 sometimes occupied in conferences, for deliber- 
 ating on subjects bearing on the enlargement 
 of Christ's kingdom." 
 
 When the refugees on Count Zinzendorf's 
 estates, scarcely amounting to" GOO persons— 
 where they bad themselves just found rest from 
 soffering. and were beginning to build a church 
 and habitations, where there had previously 
 been a wilderness, — the missionary spirit was 
 sent down upon them with such constraininrr 
 mflueuce. that within the short period of ten 
 
 years, they had sent missionaries to St. Tho- 
 mas and St. Croix in the West Indies, to 
 Greenland, to the Indians in North and South 
 America, to Lapland, to Tartary, to Algiers, 
 to Western Africa, to the Cape of Good Hope, 
 and to Ceylon ; as they did subsequently to 
 others of the West India Islands, to Persia, to 
 Egypt, to Labrador, and to India. In several 
 of these countries, their attempts to Christian- 
 ize and civilize have proved unsuccessful. In 
 some instances the missionaries sent out never 
 reached the pfaces of their destination ; and 
 in others, the political state of the country, to 
 which they went, rendered their immediate re- 
 turn an imperious duty ; and in several cases, 
 they were compelled to relinquish their benev- 
 olent designs, after years of patient perseve- 
 rance and heroic fortitude, spent in fruitless 
 endeavors to impress the wretched natives with 
 the importance of the Gospel. Going forth as 
 hardy pioneers, who penetrate the thickest 
 forest, unrestrained by dangers and privations, 
 their eaxlier missionaries submitted to the most 
 painful sacrifices in order to communicate the 
 blessings of the Gospel to the heathen. 
 
 The missions of the United Brethren in for- 
 eign countries had their origin in a Providen- 
 tial circumstance, which directed the attention 
 of the Brethren to the condition of slaves in 
 the West Indies. Count Zinzendorf being in 
 Copenhagen in 1731, some of his domestics be- 
 came acquainted with a black man named An- 
 thony, who told them of the sufferings of the 
 slaves on the island of St. Thomas, and of their 
 earnest desire to be instructed in the way of 
 salvation. The Count was deeply affected by 
 the statements of AntlK)ny, and on his return 
 to Herrnhut mentioned them to his congrega- 
 tion. The zeal of the Brethren was awakened 
 for the conversion of the heathen, and they de- 
 termined, at whatever cost, to send a mission to 
 the slaves, in whose condition they had become 
 so deeply interested ; and in the following year 
 two brethren sailed for the Danish Islands. 
 And such was their devotion to the work that, 
 having heard that they could not otherwise 
 have access to the slaves, they went with the 
 determination of submitting to be themselves 
 enslaved, that they might have the opportunity 
 of teaching the poor captive Africans the way 
 of deliverance from the bondage of sin and 
 Satan. Although this sacrifice was not re- 
 quired of them, they still maintained them- . 
 selves by manual labor, under a tropical sun, 
 employing every opportunity for conversing 
 with the heathen. A similar zeal characterized 
 the first missionaries to Greenland, in 1733. 
 While at Copenhagen, Count Pless, who was 
 much interested for them, asked them how 
 they intended to procure a livelihood in Green- 
 land ? Unacquainted with the situation and 
 climate of the country, the missionaries replied, 
 " By the labor of our hands, and God's bless- 
 ing ;" adding, that they would build a house, 
 and cultivate a piece of land., not wishing to 
 
UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS. 
 
 769 
 
 be burdensome to any one. Being told, there 
 was no wood fit for building in that desolate 
 region, they said : " In that case we will dig a 
 hole in the earth, and lodge there." So suc- 
 cessful has this mission been, that nearly the 
 whole of the Greenland population in the 
 neighborhood of the settlements has been con- 
 verted to Christianity. 
 
 The following short notice of the Doctrine 
 and Constitution of the Moravian Brethren's 
 Church, as far as they affect the missions, may 
 not be misplaced here. It is the constant aim 
 of their missionaries to make known " Christ 
 and Him crucified." Their motto is: "To 
 humble the sinner, to exalt the Saviour, and to 
 promote holiness." 
 
 The internal regulations are the same in 
 every mission. Such heathen as from the hear- 
 ing of the Gospel, or the private conversations 
 of the missionaries, are led to serious reflec- 
 tions, and desire their names to be put down, 
 for further instruction, are called new people, 
 and reckoned to the class of catechumens. If 
 they remain steadfast in their resolutions to 
 forsake heathenism, and desire baptism, they 
 are considered as candidates for that ordinance ; 
 and after previous instruction, are baptized. 
 If their conduct proves consistent with their 
 professions, they at length become candidates 
 for the communion, and finally communicants. 
 When the number of converts is very large, 
 assistants are chosen, who have particular dis- 
 tricts assigned them, in which they visit the 
 people, attend to the poor, the sick and infirm, 
 and are occasionally employed to hold meet- 
 ings, and to preach at the outposts. 
 
 The external regulations vary in the differ- 
 ent missions. Among free heathen, as in Green- 
 land, North America, South Africa, &c., most 
 of the converts live together in regular settle- 
 ments, and thus enjoy the advantages of vari- 
 ous regulations for promoting their progress in 
 spiritual knowledge, and in civilization, which 
 regulations are impracticable in missions 
 among slaves. 
 
 Church discipline is exercised without re- 
 spect of persons ; and consists according to 
 the nature of the offence, either in exclusion 
 from the meetings of the baptized, or in sus- 
 pension from the Lord's Supper, or in total 
 separation from the church. 
 
 The general superintendence of the missions 
 is vested in the synods of the church. But, as 
 these are convened only occasionally, the el- 
 ders' conierence has the oversight of the mis- 
 sion. The missionary service is in the strictest 
 sense, voluntary. Any person desirous of en- 
 gaging in it, makes known his wishes to the 
 directors; and if, after being informed of the 
 difficulties and dangers attending the life of a 
 missionary, his resolution remains fixed, he is 
 considered a candidate for the service. Should 
 he eventually feel any reluctance, he is at full 
 liberty either to accept or decline any proposal 
 or call, which may be oflered him. 
 
 The Brethren's Church has no penuanent 
 fund for the missions. They are maintained 
 by voluntary contributions collected mostly at 
 stated times in their congregations ; and also 
 by the many female, young men's, and juvenile 
 missionary societies in the church. Not able, 
 however, to raise one half of the sum annually 
 required, friends, and societies in other Chris- 
 tian communities have hitherto been most 
 liberal in their donations. 
 
 The Moravians now have 17 settlements and 
 congregations on the continent of Europe, with 
 46 home mission stations. The aggregate 
 number of persons in these congregations is 
 5,900. They have institutions of learning in 
 Nisky, Gnadenbcrg, Gnadenfrey, Neusalz, Neu- 
 wied, Koenigsfcld, and Zeyst. There is also a 
 high-school at Nisky, and a college for train- 
 ing candidates for the ministry at (inadenfeld. 
 In Great Britain and Ireland, they have 34 
 settlements and congregations, with six home 
 mission stations in Ireland, and a membership 
 of 5,000. They have institutions for the edu- 
 cation of youth at Fulneck, Gomesal, Mirfield, 
 Ockbrook, Bedford, Tytherton and Gracehill. 
 In the United States, they have 28 settlements 
 and congregations, with home missionary sta- 
 tions in Philadelphia, Green Bay, Sturgeon 
 Bay, among the Norwegians, New York, Olney, 
 and Kichland. Their institutions of learning 
 in the United States are at Nazareth, Bethle- 
 hem, Litiz, and Salem. 
 
 They now have missions in Greenland, Lor 
 brador, Danish West India Islands, Jamaica, 
 Antigua, St. Kitts, Barbadoes, Tobago, Suri- 
 nam, South Africa, Australia, and the North 
 American Indians. 
 
 Missions have been undertaken by the Bre- 
 thren, at various periods, and abandoned as 
 unsuccessful, in Lapland, in Siberia, among 
 the Jews in Amsterdam, among the gypsies ; in 
 Guinea, in Egypt, in Tranquebar, in Ceylon, 
 in Persia, in the AV'est Indies, and in South 
 America. 
 
 The following table exhibits the present 
 state of their missions : 
 
 
 
 Uission 
 
 6 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 
 
 anes. 
 
 •5 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 .1 
 
 « 
 
 
 1 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 .1 
 
 0. 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 
 i 
 
 S 
 
 & 
 
 >; 
 
 d 
 
 & 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 £ 
 
 Danish W.I. . 
 
 15 
 
 10 
 
 10,087 
 
 
 
 
 
 1782 
 
 Greenland.. .. 
 
 
 14 
 
 9 
 
 2,054 .. 
 
 
 
 .. 
 
 1738 
 
 N. A. IndiiiUi. 
 
 
 g 
 
 7 
 
 491 .. 
 
 
 ,. 
 
 .. 
 
 1734 
 
 Surinam 
 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 18,831 .. 
 
 
 
 
 17S& 
 
 Soutli Africa. 
 
 
 27 
 
 •27; 0,6''0 1882 2210 
 
 1733 
 
 6«» 
 
 ITM 
 
 Jamaica 
 
 la 
 
 18 
 
 i7!ia,;ui .. 
 
 
 .. 
 
 .. 
 
 17M 
 
 Antigua 
 
 Barbadoes . . . 
 
 
 10 
 6 
 
 9 8,0 Jl 
 6 3.198 
 
 '• 
 
 
 •• 
 
 
 1766 
 17«6 
 
 Labrador 
 
 
 17 
 
 11 1,326 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 1770 
 
 St. Kitts 
 
 
 6 
 
 5 4.045 
 
 
 
 , . 
 
 .. 
 
 1777 
 
 Tobago 
 
 
 8 
 
 8j 2,io:j 
 
 
 
 
 17M 
 
 Nicaragua..., 
 
 
 8 
 
 ll 20 
 
 
 
 
 nm 
 
 Australia 
 
 
 2 
 
 .. .. 
 
 
 
 IMfl 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 -^—. 
 
 — — 
 
 TotaU 
 
 7--IJ50 
 
 !3l -0,047 lf«*(-"«lOj 1738 6985 
 
 
reo 
 
 AIAhKTY— WAIROA. 
 
 Tb« whole namlxT of missionurics employed 
 by the United Brethrfn, from Uie eommence- 
 
 ment .-'•'- rations, is 1947,-1100 males 
 
 uid ' C43 of these have died in 
 
 fH.. I. V : 9 of whom have deceased 
 
 during service, 11 on the 
 
 . 2 on the way home ; 22 met 
 
 •viuiclv end, mostly by shipwreck ; 
 
 •U'red bv the Esquimaux in Lab- 
 
 r ' >y the Indians near Gnaden- 
 
 1 <vc shot or burned to death 
 
 ou luv :,;....>.w^ ,. in North America. 
 
 That 80 small a body of Christians should 
 h«Te accomplished so much missionary labor, 
 18 truly wonderful. Yet, the fact does but 
 show what might be done by the whole Pro- 
 tft^tjint Church, were they to enter upon the 
 work of evangelizing the world, with the same 
 WDgleucss of purpose and spirit of consecration 
 which have, from the beginning, distinguished 
 this little baud of brethren. 
 
 We have no means of ascertaining the ag- 
 gTt^te receipts of the United Brethren's Mis- 
 sions from their commencement. We give 
 the income of several years, which will enable 
 the reader to judge of the average receipts : 
 
 1848 £12,442 
 
 1M9 11,043 
 
 1860 14,026 
 
 1862 13,061 
 
 Ayeragefor four years, £12,640. 
 
 The London Association in aid of the Missions 
 of the United Brethren, which has existed for 
 thirty-six years, contributes to their funds be- 
 tween £4,000 and £5,000 annually, which is 
 included in the amounts above stated. Con- 
 sidering the extent of the Brethren's opera- 
 tions, it seems unaccountable that they should 
 be able to maintain them with so small an ex- 
 
 Senditure. They have, however, been con- 
 acted, 80 far as practicable, on the self-sus- 
 taining principle. Their missions are " settle- 
 ments," containing farmers and artizans, who 
 live on lands belonging to the mission, and, by 
 their labor, contribute to its support. With 
 so small a body, possessing such slender means, 
 this plan appears to have been a matter of ne- 
 cessity, like that of Paul's laboring with his 
 hands while preaching to the heathen. But, 
 with the wealth now in the possession of the 
 Protestant churches, it must be the height of 
 injustice to send a man to preach the Gospel 
 to the heathen " at his own charges ; " as it is, 
 ateo, the poorest economy to employ men capa- 
 ble of doing missionary work, iu laboring for 
 their own bread.— //o/mes's History of the Mis- 
 nom of the United Brethren ; Moravian Mis- 
 nonary Alias. 
 
 VALVERTY (OODOOPITTY) : A sta. 
 
 tion of the American Board in Ceylon. 
 
 ^f J;\^iKMAN'S LAND : See Tasmania. 
 
 V AKAN Y : A station of the American 
 
 «»rd in the Jaffna district, Ceylon, a little' 
 
 •east of Oodooville. 
 
 VARTABED: A religious teacher, or 
 
 doctor of divinity, amon^ the Armenians. 
 This degree is conferred with the solemnities 
 of ordination, and those who receive it are 
 appealed to in all religious debates. They 
 preach in the churches, reconcile differences, 
 and exert themselves to maintain the Arme- 
 nian creed. They are supported by the volun- 
 tary contributions of their hearers, and of 
 those who apply to them for the decision of 
 any religious question. 
 
 VEDAS : The sacred books of the Hin- 
 doos, believed to be revealed by God, and 
 called immortal. They are considered as the 
 fountain of all knowledge, human and divine. 
 They are four in number, the principal part 
 being that which explains the duties of man in 
 methodical arrangement. The fourth book 
 contains a system of divine ordinances. — Asi- 
 otic Researches. 
 
 VEWA : A small island, about 3 miles in 
 circumference, in the Feejee group, having 
 every, variety of hill and dale in miniature. 
 It is nearly covered with bread-fruit trees and 
 eve, a kind of chestnut, the flowers of which 
 have an odor like the violet, that fills the 
 whole island with its fragrance. Population, 
 150. Wesleyan Missionary Society. 
 
 VICTORIA : The chief city of Hong- 
 Kong, China, situated in lat. 22° 16' N., and 
 long. 1140 8' E. (See China.) 
 
 VIZAGAPATAM: A station of the 
 London Missionary Society, situated on the 
 eastern coast of Hindostan, in the Northern 
 Circars, about 500 miles south-west of Calcutta, 
 and north-east of Madras about the same dis- 
 tance. 
 
 WADAGAUM : A town in Hindostan, 
 30 miles south of Ahmednuggur, — became 
 a station of the American Board in 1845. 
 
 WADESVILLE : A Karen village, near 
 Tavoy, in Burmah, named for Rev. Dr. Wade, 
 the missionary. It is an out-station of the 
 Tavoy Mission of the American Baptist Union. 
 
 WAGENMAKER VALLEY : See Wel- 
 lington. 
 
 WAIALUA : A station of the American 
 Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. 
 
 WAIANAE : A station of the American 
 Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu. 
 
 WAIMEA : One of the three first stations 
 of the American Board at the Sandwich 
 Islands, situated on the north-west coast of 
 Kaui. Also, an interior station on the island 
 of Hawaii. 
 
 WAIKANAE : A station of the Church 
 Missionary Society in New-Zealand. 
 
 WAIOLI : A station of the American 
 Board, in the Sandwich Islands, on the island 
 of Kauai. 
 
 WAIROA : A station of the Church Mis- 
 sionary Society in New-Zealand, situated on 
 the shore of Hawke Bay. It is a very pretty 
 station, with a beautiful river winding through 
 an extensive plain, and communicating with a 
 chain of inland lakes. 
 
Hi 
 
 n 
 
^^ 0? thb"^^^ 
 TJITIVBRSITTl 
 
WELLINGTON— WEST INDIES. 
 
 761 
 
 WELLINGTON: Formerly, WagenmaJcer 
 Valley: Station of the Freuch Protestant 
 Society in South Africa, 30 miles north-east of 
 Cape Town. Inhabitants, 7,000 or 8,000 free 
 neg-roes, with many descendants of French 
 Huguenot refugees. Also a station of the 
 Church Missionary Society in New-Zealand, 
 having a European population of 2,500. 
 
 WELSH CALVINISTIG METHODIST 
 FOREIGN MISSIONARY SOCIETY :— 
 The Welsh Calvinistic Methodists arose during 
 the revival of religion in England under Wes- 
 ley and Whitefiefd ; chiefly from the devoted 
 labors of Howell Harris, Esq., of Trcvecca, in 
 Brecknockshire. Having obtained peace with 
 God himself, he began a course of missionary 
 labt)r in his native Wales, then sunk down in 
 formalism and impiety. He visited from house 
 to house, and preached in the open air to thou- 
 sands, who were drawn by the novelty of the 
 scene and the burning zeal of the preacher. 
 God owned his word, and great numbers began 
 to be aroused to seek after God ; and, when 
 they had obtained, " like precious faith " in 
 Christ Jesus, they joined their efforts to those 
 of their ^ beloved teacher, and thus the work 
 spread like fire among the dry stubble. In a 
 few years, Mr. Harris had established 300 so- 
 cieties or churches in South Wales. Several 
 clergymen of the Episcopal Church joined 
 themselves to him, and the great work operated 
 like the Reformation in Scotland, or Wesley- 
 anism in England. Mr. Harris and his asso- 
 ciates itinerated through the country, so that 
 in 1742 he had 10 clergymen, and nearly 50 
 lay preachers helping him. In the mean time, 
 North Wales began to be aroused in a similar 
 manner. The Rev. Thomas Charles of Bala, 
 afterwards one of the founders of the British 
 and Foreign Bible Society, was, towards the 
 dlose of this century, a prominent instrument 
 in this great work of God. In 1811, the socie- 
 ties formed themselves into an independent con- 
 nection with 4 polity similar to the English Wes- 
 ieyans, but differing from them, as their name 
 imports, in some doctrinal views. In 1853 they 
 had 207 ministers, 234 local preachers, and 
 58,577 members. 
 
 Previous to 1840, the Welsh Calvinistic Me- 
 thodists, operated through the London Alission- 
 arij Society ; but, in May of that year, an as- 
 sociation was formed among them for sending 
 missionaries to the heathen, and in November 
 following, a mission was commenced in the 
 north-east part of Bengal among the Kassias, 
 a hill tribe. Besides this mission, they have 
 a mission station in Brittany, south of France 
 — the language of that country being a sister 
 dialect of the Welsh. The Bretons themselves 
 are a branch of the Welsh nation. The Cal- 
 vinistic Methodists have also a mission to the 
 Jews, which is now served by the Rev. John 
 Mills. The General Secretary of this society 
 is the Rev. J. Roberts, 12 Huskisson-st., Liver- 
 pool, England. — Prize Essay Jctliro ; Census of 
 
 Religioits Worship in England and Wales, by 
 H. Mann Esq.; and Annual Reports.— Hkv! W. 
 
 liUTLFR 
 
 WEST INDIES AND GUIANA : We 
 
 have connected Guiana with the West Indies 
 because they are thus connected in missionary 
 operations. The following table, which ex- 
 hibits a list of the West India Islands, with 
 the date of settlement, population, &c., is taken, 
 with some modification, from the '• Missionary 
 Guide Book," published in London in 1846. 
 The author of that work gives as his authority 
 as to the population of the British Islands, 
 Murray's Encyclopedia of Geography." 
 
 TSI,A\D3. 
 
 to 4J 
 
 "si 
 
 "3:3 
 1-^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 BRmsH. 
 Barbadoes 
 
 1624 
 16-23 
 1628 
 1632 
 1650 
 1665 
 1660 
 1628 
 1670 
 1632 
 1769 
 1763 
 1763 
 1783 
 1797 
 1803 
 1612 
 
 1492 
 
 1492 
 1493 
 
 1632 
 1636 
 
 16- 
 16— 
 1733 
 
 1781 
 1785 
 
 120,000 
 23,492 
 
 9,250 
 33,726 
 
 3,080 
 380,000 
 
 7,731 
 13,920 
 
 4,643 
 
 7,119 
 19,375 
 26,633 
 23,642 
 18,718 
 43,678 
 16,320 
 
 8,720 
 
 830,000 
 
 432,000 
 100,000 
 
 114,000 
 
 96,413 
 
 12,000 
 
 900 
 
 6,080 
 
 2,430 
 
 31,387 
 
 6,000 
 20,000 
 1,600 
 8,600 
 
 8,000 
 
 66,000 
 
 15,667 
 
 9,226 
 
 23,360 
 
 2,300 
 
 265,290 
 
 4,318 
 
 9,078 
 
 2,127 
 
 6,126 
 
 11,664 
 
 18,114 
 
 19,009 
 
 7,734 
 
 17,639 
 
 10,328 
 
 3,314 
 
 600,000 
 
 198,000 
 20,000 
 
 112,000 
 
 87,207 
 
 10,000 
 
 600 
 
 4,500 
 2,250 
 29,164 
 
 16,000 
 ■7,300 
 
 4,000 
 
 
 Nevis 
 
 Antigua 
 
 Anguilla 
 
 Jamaica 
 
 Virgin Isles 
 
 Tobago 
 
 Honduras 
 
 Montserrat 
 
 Dominica 
 
 St. Vincent's 
 
 
 
 Trinidad 
 
 St. Lucia 
 
 Bermudas 
 
 LVDKPEXDEXT. 
 
 Hayti or St. Domingo 
 
 Spanish. 
 Cuba 
 
 Porto ^co 
 
 Frkxch. 
 Guadaloupe 
 
 Martinique 
 
 Marigalante 
 
 Deseada 
 
 DA.V1SH. 
 
 St. Thomas 
 
 St. Jan 
 
 St. Croix 
 
 Dfltai. 
 St. Martin 
 
 St. Eustatia 
 
 Saba 
 
 Curacoa 
 
 SwEDisn. 
 St. Bartholomew 
 
 
 Totals ■.. 
 
 
 2,377,227 
 
 1,449,682 
 
 
 JTie Bermudas. — These are a UQnieroua clus- 
 ter of small islands, in the Atlantic Ocean, ex- 
 tending about 45 miles from south-west to 
 north-east, and having their northern point in 
 long. 630 28' W., and lat. 32^ 34' N. St 
 George's, the principal island, is about sixteen 
 miles long, and three in breadth. The inhab- 
 itants are chiefly engaged in shipping and 
 trade. 
 
 Bahamas. — The Bahama Islands are the 
 
m 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 of the "West Indies, extending 
 •long th« coMt or Florida towards Cuba. 
 They arc 400 in number, most of them mere 
 Ipcks. About 14 of them arc large; Bahama, 
 the princii>al one, being 63 by 9 miles. They 
 e^}oy a mild, equable, and delightful climate. 
 The inhabiiants are chiefly employed in fishing 
 nnd wrecking. 
 
 Jamaica is oval-shaped, 160 miles long by 45 
 broftd. lUi scenery is magnificent and delight- 
 ftil It is reckoned as one of the most roman- 
 tic and highly diversified countries in the 
 world. The Blue Mountains, an elevated 
 ridge, towering in some places nearly 8,000 
 feet above the sea, run through the island 
 from east to west 
 
 Hat^i is a very fine island, lying between 
 Jamaica and Porto Rico, 450 miles long by 
 110 in width. In the centre rises the lofty 
 range of the Cibao mountains, the highest 
 peak of which is 9,000 feet. These mountains 
 are covered with vegetation nearly to their 
 summits, from which descend numerous streamsj 
 that unite in four rivers, which render the 
 plains below exceedingly fertile. This island 
 was settled about the middle of the 16th cen- 
 tury by a daring band of French buccaneers, 
 The French revolution, in 1791, which pro- 
 claimed universal equality, produced a con 
 test between the white and free colored popu 
 lation ; and while they were contending, the 
 slaves rose and drove out or massacred 
 both classes, and became possessors of the 
 French part of the island. Since that time, 
 the island has been the scene of successive 
 revolutions ; and at the present time, the 
 French part is governed by a black empe- 
 ror, and the Spanish part is an independent 
 republic. 
 
 St. Thomas lies in lat. 18° 22' N. and long. 
 640 60' W., and is 18 miles in circumference, 
 having considerable trade. 
 
 St. Eustatius consists almost entirely of the 
 sloping sides of one high conical hill, termi- 
 nating in a rocky summit, but it is productive, 
 and cultivated with care. 
 
 St. Kitts or St. Cliristophefs is peculiarly 
 ragged and mountainous, but the plain along 
 the sea shore surpasses in richness and beauty 
 the other islands. 
 
 ^ Nevis b a small but beautiful and fertile 
 iriand, consisting of one conical mountain, 
 about 20 miles in circumference. 
 
 AtUigua is about 21 miles in length, nearly 
 the same in breadth, and 50 in circumference. 
 John's Town, the capital, is admired for the 
 agreeableness of its situation and the regula- 
 rity of its buildings, and is a favorite place of 
 resort 
 
 Montserrat is about 9 miles in length, and as 
 many in breadth, about twenty miles south- 
 JW8t of Antigua; a beautiful and pleasant 
 
 _ BarbaJoes is about 22 miles in length, by 14 
 in breadth ; its rich plantations being diversi- 
 
 fied with gentle hills, which present a dtflight- 
 ful landscape. 
 
 St. Vincent's is a very beautiful island, about 
 24 miles long and 18 broad, and contains the 
 only active volcano on these islands. It is 
 said to contain small remnants of the aborigi- 
 nal race, mingled with the negroes. 
 
 Grenada is about 20 miles in length by 10 
 at its greatest breadth. It is mountainous, 
 abounding with streams and rivulets. 
 
 Tobago is a small but fertile and beautiful 
 island. The heat of its southerly situation is 
 tempered by breezes from the surrounding 
 ocean, while, at the same time, it appears to 
 be out of the track of those hurricanes which 
 have desolated so many of the other islands. 
 
 Trinidad is separated from the coast of 
 South America by a strait. It is a fertile 
 island, in extent next to Jamaica. 
 
 British Guiana lies on the coast of South 
 America, and includes Essequibo, Demerara, 
 and Berbice, or all the maritime tract between 
 the river Coventen, the western limit of Su- 
 rinam and the frontier of Spanish Guiana, at 
 Cape Nassau. 
 
 Surinam, on the coast of Guiana, consti- 
 tutes the most important of the Dutch western 
 possessions. They have, of late, made very 
 considerable efforts for improvement, and it is 
 rising in importance. 
 
 In/iabitants. — When Columbus first discov- 
 ered the New World, he found the whole con- 
 tinent and every island thickly peopled by dif- 
 ferent classes of Indians. But within a few 
 years after the discovery of the West India 
 Islands, these native races had, for the greater 
 part, perished. Millions of them had been 
 swept from the earth or sent to work in the 
 mines of South America, where they sunk into 
 a premature grave, the victims of avarice and 
 cruelty. When the Spaniards found how rdr 
 pidly the aboriginal population perished under 
 the system of forced labor which they had in- 
 troduced, they resorted to the expedient of im- 
 porting negro slaves from Africa, and their 
 example was soon followed by the Portuguese, 
 Dutch, French, and English. At the present 
 time, the population of Guiana and the West 
 Indies consists of three descriptions of people : 
 whites, mixed races, and negroes. The whites, 
 or Europeans, chiefly British, consist partly of 
 proprietors, superintending the cultivation of 
 their own lands, and partly of agents and 
 overseers. The negroes have always formed 
 by far the largest portion of the population. 
 Since the 1st of August, 1834, they have en- 
 joyed a state of freedom in the British portion 
 of the West Indies. As the negroes are of 
 African origin, we must refer to Africa for a 
 description of their native character and 
 habits. 
 
 MISSIONS. 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society. — Antigua* 
 —Nathaniel Gilbert, Esq., the speaker of ' 
 
 gucum 
 
 1 
 
yji^ Of THE 
 
 'UBJVBRSITTl 
 
WEST INDIES. 
 
 763 
 
 House of Assembly in Antigua, coming to 
 England for the recovery of his health, was 
 led to attend the ministry of Mr. Wesley, 
 which he found to be the power of God to the 
 salvation of his soul. Happy in the enjoy- 
 ment of the Divine favor, and full of holy zeal, 
 he returned to Antigua in the year 1760, 
 where he began to teach Christianity to the 
 African slaves, many of whom, by the bless- 
 ing of God upon his labors, were made the 
 Lord's free men. Nearly 200 persons were 
 united in fellowship under his superintendence. 
 While thus usefully and honorably employed, 
 (though encountering bitter hostility,) he was 
 removed by death, and the flock he had ga- 
 thered were left " as sheep without a shep- 
 herd,"' yet they were not finally forsaken. 
 John Baxter, of the royal dock yard at Chat- 
 ham, who had been connected with the Metho- 
 dist society about 12 years, and had also for 
 some time been a class-leader and a local 
 preacher, was sent out by the government as a 
 shipwright. He collected the remains of the 
 society, and writing to Mr. Wesley under date 
 of April 2d, 1778, he says : "The work that 
 God began by Mr. Gilbert is still remaining. 
 The black people have been kept together by 
 two black women, who have continued praying 
 and meeting with them. I preached to about 
 30 on Saturday night and Sunday morning, 
 and in the afternoon to about 400 or 500. 
 The old members desire that I would inform 
 you, that you have many children in Antigua, 
 whom you never saw." 
 
 For about eight years he continued his la- 
 bors, working in the dockyard for his support. 
 About 2,000 were united together in religious 
 society ; when he was at length relieved by 
 the arrival of missionaries. In 1786, Dr. Coke, 
 having embarked for Nova Scotia with three 
 missionaries, two of whom were destined for 
 North America, and one for the West Indies ; 
 after being tossed about for a long time by the 
 winds and waves, and nearly suffering shipwreck, 
 they were obliged to put in to the West Indies, 
 and were carried directly to Antigua. Land- 
 ing on Christmas day, they met Mr. Baxter, 
 as he was going to conduct public worship. 
 They embraced each other with a joyous sur- 
 prise; and the Doctor that day occupied Mr. 
 Baxters pulpit, and administered the Lord's 
 Supper to the people. He remained about six 
 weeks in the West Indies, and while there had 
 an offer of a salary of £500 to remain in Anti- 
 gua ; but he was too intent upon the spread of 
 Christ's religion in the world, to confine his 
 labors to one place. He visited several of the 
 islands, and having fixed Mr. Warrener at An- 
 tigua, Mr. Clarke at St. Vincent's, and Mr. 
 Bammet at St. Christopher's, he sailed for the 
 American continent. From this time the 
 Wesleyan mission in the West Indies was car- 
 ried on with increasing success. 
 
 1'he mission in Antigua appears to have en- 
 joyed for many years an almost uninterrupted 
 
 prosperity. Such was the importance attached 
 to it by the authorities of the island, that in 
 the year 1795, when they dreaded arj attack 
 from the French, the missionary was requested 
 to organize a military corps from the members 
 of his society to assist in defending the island. 
 This request was promptly responded to by 
 both the missionary and his people : but hap- 
 pily the French never came. In 1826, this 
 mission met with a most melancholy loss, all 
 the missionaries, with part of their families, 
 13 in all, having perished at sea. This sad 
 event occurred as the mission party were re- 
 turning from a district meeting, which was 
 held in St. Christopher's. They encountered 
 a storm, and as they were approaching Anti- 
 gua, their vessel was thrown upon the breakers 
 and broken, and they were precipitated into the 
 sea. Some of the party were left clinging to 
 the >vreck for two days and nights, but none 
 but Mrs. Jones was saved. 
 
 In 1839, Rev. Mr. Codman wrote from An- 
 tigua : " The number of members in our so- 
 cieties is now some thousands more than when 
 I came, (1826) and the scholars have more than 
 doubled. Nor must the great number who 
 have died in the Lord be forgotten. 1 should 
 think, that five or six thousand have left the 
 church militant for the church triumphant. 
 The work is prospering in several islands, es- 
 pecially Antigua. In the island of St. Kitt's 
 the attendance at all our chapels is increased, 
 and some of them have been enlarged, and new 
 ones built." 
 
 In the year 1843, a violent earthquake visit- 
 ed the island of Antigua, by which, with 
 scarcely an exception, every edifice constructed 
 of stone was left a heap of ruins. Out of nine 
 Wesleyan meeting houses, only one escaped 
 without serious damage. This sad event, how- 
 ever, did not essentially retard the prosperity 
 of the mission. It has still gone on increasing 
 in numbers and influence. In 1853, the num- 
 ber of church members in connection with the 
 Methodist mission on this Island, amounted to 
 2,472.— See Rep. Meth. Miss. Soc. -1853, p. 106. 
 
 St. VincenVs District.— In January, 1787, Dr. 
 Coke and three of the Brethren visit<:d St. Vin- 
 cent's ; and Rev. Mr. Clarke remained, encour- 
 aged by the promise of several planters, ^h^^r 
 their houses should always be open to n 
 him, and their negroes ever ready to iv. 
 his instructions. His congregations were large, 
 and his exertions appeared to be crowned with 
 considerable success, yet he was not without 
 opposition. But for several years it was con- 
 fined to some lawless individuals who on one 
 occasion broke into the chnpel, dcfacetl the 
 benches, and stole the Bible and hung it on tho 
 public gallows. And at length, the arm of au- 
 thority was itself turned against the missiou. 
 In December, 1792, the Assembly, with the 
 view of rooting out the Methodists from the 
 island, passed a law, that no person except the 
 rectors of the parishes should preach without a 
 
764 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 UoetHe ; and that no individual sliould receive 
 » license ouUl ho had resided at lea.st twelve 
 nootbson ttte Wand— a clause admirably cal- 
 caliit«(i to haiufth tbe Metbodistij from among 
 
 .- V ! ;: :. 'ins would ncvcr consent 
 
 r. in order to have liber- 
 ..i liie end of that period for 
 ullor all, would probably be 
 ; ! 1 1,0 first olfonce, the culprit was 
 
 to be punished by a fine of £18, or by impris- 
 onment ; for tlie second, bv such corporeal pun- 
 iimcnt as the court sliould think proper ; and 
 bv iMinislimcnt from the island ; and to crown 
 ' ' if he returned from banishment, he 
 c jK'nalty of death! In justice to 
 ill general it may be well to say that 
 ! V were hostile to the law. But, the 
 1 iiuth after the passage of the law, 
 
 Mr. L^mb, the missionary, preached as usual. 
 lie was apprehended, and on refusing to pay 
 th»» fine, was thrown into prison. Wlien the 
 pt'riod of his imprisonment had expired he was 
 released, but it was a release only to silence or 
 volunlary banishment. He preferred the lat- 
 ter, and retired from St. Vincent's. The 
 law, however, was in force only for a short 
 time, beinjr disallowed by the kin^.as contrary 
 to the principles of toleration, which were now 
 an established part of the British Constitution. 
 In 1794, Messrs. Thomas Owens and James 
 Alexander were sent to renew the mission. 
 Before this, the members of the Methodist So- 
 ciety amounted to about 1,000 ; but soon after 
 its passage, they were reduced nearly one half. 
 Many now returned from their wanderings, and 
 the congregations began to increase ; but the 
 spirit of hostility was rather smothered than 
 gubdued. In March, 1797, a mob, headed by 
 a magistrate, attacked the Methodist chapel, 
 threw down the railings, broke the lamps, pull- 
 ed down the communion rails, and tore the 
 Bible in pieces and scattered them on the 
 ground. About a year after an attempt was 
 made uix»n the lives of the missionaries. Their 
 hoase was broken open at the dead of night, 
 and some ruffians armed with cutlasses, entered 
 the slti'ping apartments, turned up the bed and 
 searched for them in every corner. Happily 
 the mi^-jiouaries, anticipating the attack, had 
 taken refuge for the night at the dwelling of a 
 friend. 
 
 ir. ti,f. year 1841, a young man, who was 
 ' a knowledge of the truth through 
 n, hearing of the sad mortality at- 
 tending the agents of the Methodist Missionary 
 Society in South Africa, offered himself as a 
 missionary to that land, where he is now ac- 
 tively laboring. 
 
 Trinidad and Demerara. — During the past 
 few years thousamls of immigrants have been 
 iiitrudnr. ,1 Iiiti. TiMtiidad and Demerara, from 
 1, for whose religious iu- 
 •^ . .11 Missionary Society has 
 endeavored lo make provision. This emigra- 
 tion has had an unfavorable effect on the mis- 
 
 sion, and preceded as it was, by a reduction of 
 wages, it led several of the church members to 
 leave, while the newly arrived immigrants from 
 Africa, with few exceptions, only tended to 
 demoralize the people by their heathenish 
 practices. It is very much questioned too, 
 whether the church members from Sierra 
 Leone were much improved in their temporal 
 circumstances, by emigrating to Trinidad ; but 
 it is certain, that there is no comparison be- 
 tween the two countries as to religious advan- 
 tages. In,. Trinidad the greater number of 
 Wesleyan emigrants from Sierra Leone were 
 placed beyond the reach of their own mission- 
 aries, or any other Protestant ministers ; and 
 were thus exposed to the temptations of joining 
 in the barbarous practices of their heathen 
 countrymen, or of being led astray by the delu- 
 sions of Popery. 
 
 A review of missionary operations in Deme- 
 rara, during the past thirty years, gives rise to 
 the most grateful recollections. The mission- 
 ary during the first year of labor in that colony, 
 was often denounced as " an execrable wretch 
 who ought to be put out of the world," and 
 himself and his people frequently suffered per- 
 secution. At a public meeting, held only 20 
 years since, all the leading persons in the colony 
 unanimously resolved, that the Court of Policy 
 be forthwith petitioned to expel all the mis- 
 sionaries from the colony, and a law be ]i;i-id 
 prohibiting the admissionof missionary pii a cli- 
 ers into the colony for the future. But in 1 .^15, 
 the principles and designs of the mission i;ries 
 had been so well ascertained and so hfghly a|> 
 predated, that all the leading persons in the 
 colony, including the Governor, have cordially 
 and liberally subscribed towards the erection 
 of a new Wesleyan chapel. 
 
 About the year 1850, various causes ex( i -ed 
 an adverse influence on the missions in Di rue- 
 rara. Emigration from India, Africa, and 
 Madeira, introduced classes of persons siml: in 
 gross superstition and wickedness. IJiiiisb 
 Guiana witnessed during this year the erec- 
 tion of the swinging-pole ; and human Ij* ings 
 have been suspended from it, to the wild ad- 
 miration of the wretchedly deluded Hindoo, 
 and to the agonized mortification of the Chris- 
 tian. Many thousands of the Creole laborers 
 have withdrawn from the cultivation of the 
 estates, and have retreated to the backwoods 
 and river districts above the Falls. This 
 painful state of things has furnished a new 
 motive for effort on the part of the missionaries. 
 " The countrv," they write, " is becoming daily 
 more missionary in its character, and more 
 difficult of moral cultivation ; it, therefore, 
 commends itself to the truest sympathies ol 
 the Committee." An important opportunity 
 for effecting extensive good is presented on 
 this island, by the esse of some thousands of 
 emigrant coolies. These persons have lately 
 applied to the missionaries for instruction in 
 their own language ; and Eev. Mr. Bickford 
 
^^ or tbtk"^^ 
 
 [WIVBRSITr] 
 
WEST INDIES. 
 
 765 
 
 sent home to the Committee a document drawn 
 up by one of them, Samuel Johnson, who had 
 been baptized, and who felt intensely for the 
 moral and spiritual improvement of his wretch- 
 ed countrymen. This document was accom- 
 panied by a request for a returned East India 
 missionary to labor among them. The Com- 
 mittee immediately sent out a supply of Tamil 
 Scriptures and tracts; and, in 1852, Rev. J. 
 E. S. Williams was sent to labor among them, 
 thus carrying the Gospel to 5,000 heathens. 
 
 The work of the mission at Georgetown and 
 Essequibo proceeds in an encouraging man- 
 ner, upwards of 60 having been added to the 
 Society, and the congregation enlarged by 
 African emigrants ; 36 of whom have been 
 baptized, and 52 are on the schoolmaster's 
 roll-book. 
 
 In 1853, the missionary to the coolies visited 
 many of the estates where they were employed, 
 and many of them called on him for instruc- 
 tion ; and he had received much encourage- 
 ment from the interest manifested in his work 
 by official persons and others, in the colony ; 
 but no special results are reported among the 
 coolies. 
 
 The number of church members in this mis- 
 sion, in 1853, was 4,813. 
 
 ,S^. Eustatius.—ln 1787 Dr. Coke visited this 
 island; but in consequence of the jealousy of 
 the Dutch government, he was not allowed to 
 preach to the negroes. However, he employed 
 himself in instructing small companies, in the 
 house of a free black, with whom he lodged 
 In December, 1788, he again visited the island, 
 and notwithstanding persecution, the Method- 
 ist Society numbered, before his departure, no 
 less than 258. He preached once ; but next 
 morning received a message from the governor 
 forbidding it, under severe penalties. He left 
 the island, and afterwards went to Holland to 
 endeavor to secure from the Dutch government 
 the toleration of the Methodists in St. Eusta- 
 tius ; but his application was unsuccessful. In 
 1810, two Methodist missionaries waited upon 
 the governor of St. Eustatius, which had lately 
 been captured by the British, and obtained 
 liberty from him to establish a mission. They 
 experienced considerable hostility at first, but at 
 length triumphed over all opposition. The 
 
 Iking of Holland, to whom the island has been 
 restored, has ordered a grant of 600 guilders 
 annually to be made to the mission. The 
 tranquillity they now enjoy forms a striking 
 contrast to the intolerance of former years. 
 The congregations are large ; and many of the 
 white people, as well as the negroes, hear the 
 Word with great attention. In 1853, the num- 
 ber of church members was 315. 
 
 Barbacloes.— In December, 1788, Dr. Coke 
 and Mr. Benjamin Pearce visited Barbadoes ; 
 and, having obtained liberty to instruct the 
 slaves on several plantations, Mr. Pearce re- 
 mained, and commenced his labors with great 
 energy and zeal. But he soon experienced 
 
 violent opposition on the ground that he was 
 disseminatmg among the negroes notions in- 
 compatible with their condition as slaves. 
 Repeated attempts were made bv the mob to 
 interrupt the meetings for worship, in which 
 they conducted in the most violent and out- 
 rageous manner. Mr. Pearce applied to a 
 magistrate for redress, who heard his state- 
 ment with apparent indignation at the rioters, 
 issued warrants against several of them, and 
 promised to do him justice. But when the 
 outrage had been clearly proved, the magis- 
 trate gave this extraordinary decision : " The 
 offence was committed against Almighty God : 
 It therefore does not belong to me to panish 
 it !" Mr. Pearce was left, with all his expenses 
 to pay, a prey to a lawless mob, at once the 
 scorn and pity of his foes. This emboldened 
 the rioters, and they again attacked the chapel, 
 and attempted an assault upon Mr. Pearce ; 
 but on his appealing again to the law, the 
 magistrate reprimanded them, and ordered 
 them to pay the expense of the proceedings. 
 But persecution did not cease. Soon after- 
 ward the rioters attacked his dwelling with 
 stones during his absence, and struck his wife 
 with violence. 
 
 In 1791, he was succeeded by Mr. Lamb, 
 who, on his arrival, found the prejudices of the 
 planters so far dispelled, that he had access to 
 more estates than he was able to visit. Pei-se- 
 cution had now nearly ceased, but it had given 
 place to a settled contempt for divine things. 
 But in October, 1823, intelligence was received 
 I that an insurrection had broken out among 
 the slaves in Jamaica, and the Methodist mis- 
 sionaries were accused of being accessory to 
 it, by teaching sedition under pretence of giv- 
 ing instruction. This intelligence raised a 
 storm of wrath against the mission, and everv 
 indignity was heaped on the missionary. A 
 moh^assembled and tore down the chapel, and 
 Mr. Shrewsbury's life being in danger, he 
 left the island and went to St. Vincent's. 
 
 These outrages led to a censure upon the in- 
 habitants of the island from the British House 
 of Commons ; and to relieve themselves of the 
 odium, 94 of the principal men signed a de- 
 claration, expressing their regret at the occur- 
 rence, and their concurrence in the sentiments 
 of the House. But when another missionary. 
 Mr. Raynor, was sent to the island in 1826, 
 placards were posted up on the day of his land- 
 ing, calling upon the mob to tar and feather 
 him, and the president refused him a license to 
 preach. Yet, afterwards, he proceeded in his 
 work without molestation. A new chap^ was 
 erected, the prejudice against the Methodists 
 subsided, and a prosperous mission was estab- 
 lished. 
 
 Virgin Islands.— In January, 1<89, Dr. 
 Coke, with other brethren, visited Tortola, 
 and, finding a prospect of usefulness, Mr. 
 Haramet remained and soon collected a largo 
 society. On the arrival of other preachers, 
 
m 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 thCf tttfloded their labors to Spanish Town, 
 •nd Htffirj of the other isUna which are scat- 
 tered up tiKl down in that vicinity, and, hkc 
 •oUtary rocks, lift up their heads above the 
 wmvet. 1^ several o! these they i)aid frequent 
 Tkits In open boats, at the risk of health and 
 lilk in orfc to preach to the few forgotten 
 thnilies who inhabited them. The governor 
 of the island, on a threatened invasion by the 
 French, solicited the superintendent of the 
 nission, Mr. Turner, to place himself at the 
 bend of the negroes, as he was unwilling to 
 trust them with arms under the command of 
 any person of less influence. As there was no 
 other means of defending the island, Mr. Tur- 
 ner considered it his duty to comply with the 
 request But, happily, the French abandoned 
 their design and withdrew their squadron. In 
 December, 1805, a most brutal outrage was 
 committed on Mr. Brownell, one of the mis- 
 sionaries in Tortola, by a mob, by which he 
 came near losing his life, in revenge for an al- 
 lied publication of his in England, respect- 
 ing the morals of the people of the island. 
 
 Before the commencement of this mission, 
 every species of wickedness prevailed among 
 the negroes, and among others, a lascivious 
 dance, called camsen, in which all manner of 
 iniquity was practised, and a pretended inter- 
 course was carried on with the spirits of de- 
 parted friends, who directed them to seek re- 
 venge of injuries they (the spirits) had received 
 during life ; and the scene begun in mirth 
 often ended in blood. But, since the Gospel 
 entered, these superetitious practices have 
 been abandoned. The church in Tortola, in 
 1853, numbered 1,604 
 
 Jamaica. — Dr. Coke visited Jamaica in 
 1789, and was received with such extraordi- 
 nary kindness, as to encourage him to com- 
 mence a mission, and, soon after, Mr. Hammet 
 was appointed to Kingston. But he fery 
 soon met with violent opposition and abuse 
 from the white people ; his meetings were dis- 
 turbed, and attempts made to burn and to tear 
 down his chapel ; and when he sought legal 
 redress, ihe culprits were acquitted against the 
 clearest testimony, and the grand jury declared 
 the missionaries and their chapels to be nui- 
 sances I ITie prejudice, however, after a time, 
 subsided, and they were allowed to labor in 
 peace for a number of years. But the storm 
 again burst forth, and raged with greater fury 
 than before. The Legislative Assembly of 
 Jamaica, in 1802, passed an act that no per- 
 son, unless duly qualified by the laws of that 
 island and of Great Britain, should preach or 
 teach in meetings of negroes, or people of color, 
 under the severest penalties. The Methodist 
 ministers, being regularly licensed in England, 
 did not consider themselves endangered by this 
 arbitrary law. Mr. Campbell continued to 
 preach as usual at Kingston, and met with no 
 interruption; but, on preaching at Morant 
 Bay, he was seized and imprisoned. On his 
 
 release, he obtained license at Kingston, but, 
 on returning to Morant Bay, he was again 
 persecuted, and believing his usefulness at an 
 end, he left his flock at Kingston in charge of 
 Mr. Fish, and returned to England. But the 
 king of England refused to sanction this in- 
 tolerant law ; and after two years, they were 
 permitted to resume their meetings. But, in 
 1807, the Common Council of Kingston passed 
 a law of similar import, but of a still more 
 stringent character, which forbade unlicensed 
 preaching ,or exhorting, and all meetings 
 earlier than six in the morning, or later than 
 sunset in the evening, which completely cut off 
 the slaves from public worship. And, not 
 long after, one of the missionaries was sen- 
 tenced to a month's imprisonment, because a 
 newly-arrived missionary had sung a new tune 
 in meeting! The Legislative Assembly, in 
 the mean time, passed an act equally cruel and 
 intolerant, by which a complete stop was put 
 to the labors of the Methodists in Jamaica. 
 
 These unrighteous laws coming before the 
 home government, were immediately repudi- 
 ated ; and the king, to prevent the repetition 
 of such shameful proceedings, issued a general 
 order to the governors of the West Indies, 
 commanding them, on no pretence whatever, 
 to give their assent to any law relative to re- 
 ligion, until they had first transmitted a draft 
 of the bill to England, and received the royal 
 assent. This greatly enraged the Assembly, 
 and led to violent proceedings, in consequence 
 of which, the governor fDuke of Manchester) 
 immediately dissolved tne assembly. It was 
 not, however, till the mouth of December, 
 1815, that the missionaries obtained permis- 
 sion to resume their public labors. Mr. John 
 Shipman obtained a license, and immediately 
 began to preach again in Kingston, after the 
 chapel had been shut, with one short interval, 
 for more than eight years. Other missionaries 
 obtained similar licenses, and, having divided 
 the island into districts, they proceeded in 
 their labors with increased energy and zeal. 
 They now received more invitations from 
 planters to preach on their estates than they 
 had ever done before. Their congregations 
 greatly increased, and their societies were aug- 
 mented to an extent unknown in any other 
 island. 
 
 In 1824, the spirit of opposition again broke 
 out, in consequence of the House of Commons 
 having taken some incipient steps towards the 
 extinction of slavery. The missionaries were 
 accused of being agents of the African Insti- 
 tution, and every effort was made to blacken 
 their characters and send them away from the 
 island. The Assembly again passed a law, 
 which, though it left Roman Catholic and 
 Jewish teachers at liberty, cut off the Metho- 
 dists from their public duties. Under this act, 
 one of the missionaries was imprisoned ; and, 
 instigated by an inflammatory sermon preached 
 by the rector of the parish against the Metbo- 
 
WEST INDIES. 
 
 767 
 
 fiistg, a company of militia attacked the resi- 
 dence of the missionaries, and left seven balls 
 iti the walls of the house, though none of the 
 inmates were injured. 
 
 Two others, Messrs. Whitehouse and Orton, 
 
 were imprisoned in a filthy cell, at Montego 
 
 f>ay, on a charge of preaching without a 
 
 license for that parish ; but on being brought 
 
 ixifore the chief-justice, they were discharged, 
 
 and the lieutenant-governor. Sir Thomas 
 
 Keane, dismissed from office the two magis- 
 
 '•ates who had committed them. Another 
 
 :'ve act was passed by the Assembly similar 
 
 the rejected ones, and approved by the gov- 
 
 iior. Earl Belmore, notwithstanding the in- 
 
 ructions of the king to the contrary ; but it 
 
 was promptly disallowed by the home govern- 
 
 ^ncnt. 
 
 In December, 1831, an insurrection broke 
 out on the north side of the island, in the par- 
 '~'i of St. James's, and quickly extended to 
 elawney, Hanover, Westmoreland, St. Eliz- 
 'cth, and partially to Manchester, Port- 
 id, and St. Thomas in the east. It does 
 ■t appear to have been the design of the 
 slaves to take the lives of the white people, 
 their object being simply to obtain their free- 
 dom, which they erroneously supposed had 
 been granted by the king, but was withheld by 
 the local authorities. A violent outcry was 
 now raised against all missionaries, particularly 
 the Baptists and Methodists, as if they had 
 been the cause of it. Without trial, without 
 evidence, they were proclaimed guilty, and a 
 violent outcry was raised for summary mea- 
 sures to be taken with them. Some of the 
 missionaries were arrested, but as nothing 
 could be proved against them, they were dis- 
 charged. Immediately after the suppression 
 of the insurrection, associations were formed 
 throughout the island, the object of which 
 was to expel from the country all ministers 
 except those of the established church. The 
 proceedings af these associations were of the 
 most violent character. A mob was raised, 
 the chapel of St. Ann's Bay was destroyed, 
 and the missionaries hung in effigy, and every 
 indignity offered them. 
 
 During these persecutions, the societies in 
 various places were left without pastoral care, 
 and the congregations without public worship, 
 the missionaries not being allowed to exercise 
 their ministry. Meanwhile, Earl Mulgrave 
 arrived as governor of the island, and showed 
 Ills determination to maintain the cause of re- 
 ligious liberty, and to protect the missionaries 
 in ihe enjoyment of their rights and privileges. 
 In January, 1833, 13 months from the com- 
 mencement of the disturbances, a royal pro- 
 clamation was issued in Jamaica for putting 
 down the lawless colonial church unions, and 
 maintaining religious toleration. This was 
 accompanied by a circular, requiring the 
 prompt obedience and cooperation of the ma- 
 gistrates in enforcing it. It was now decided 
 
 by the grand court that the toleration laws of 
 England were applicable to Jamaica; yet, 
 notwithstanding this and the governor's pro- 
 clamation, one of the magistrates, on Mr. 
 Greenwood's applying for license according to 
 the provisions of the toleration act, behaved 
 in such a violent manner that Mr. G. was 
 obliged to retire from the court, to save him- 
 self from personal injury. But, in consequence 
 of the energetic course of the governor, the 
 missionaries were, after some time, allowed to 
 carry on their labors without molestation. 
 
 On Friday, the 1st of August, 1834, slavery 
 was abolished in the West Indies, in conform- 
 ity with an act passed the preceding year by 
 the newly reformed Parliament of Great Bri- 
 tain — a memorable event, mainly brought 
 about by missionary labor and suffering. A 
 graphic description of the inauguration of 
 freedom at the Wealeyan chapel at Kingston 
 is given by Bev. H. Bleby, but our limits will 
 not allow us to give it at length. A sermon 
 was preached the night before, by the mission- 
 ary ; after which the whole assembly knelt in 
 prayer, and remained on their knees till the 
 town clock struck the hour of midnight, when 
 thousands of voices joined in the shout, ''Glory 
 be to God! we free! we free !'^ Free scope was 
 then given to the general outburst of joy ; after 
 which a hymn of praise was sung, a prayer 
 offered, and the crowd dismissed with the ben- 
 ediction. 
 
 The emancipation of the negroes was quick- 
 ly followed by very important changes. The 
 Sabbath was observed with hallowed strict- 
 ness. Nothing was to be seen on that day but 
 decently-dressed people going to and from 
 their places of worsnip ; congregations were 
 increased and multiplied ; old chapels were en- 
 larged, and new ones erected. Education was 
 also greatly extended. A great change took 
 place also in the public opinion of Jamaica as 
 to the Methodist missionaries. Formerly no 
 names were too vile, no treatment too bad for 
 them ; even their chapels were shut up or 
 razed to the ground as public nuisances. Yet 
 within five years after the late insurrection, 
 the House of Assembly of Jamaica made a 
 grant of £500 to aid in the erection of a Me- 
 thodist chapel in Kingston ; and in the discus- 
 sion of the subject the highest eulogiums were 
 pronounced on the usefulness of the Wesleyan 
 missionaries. The Common Council of King8» 
 ton and several of the parochial vestries fol- 
 lowed the example of the Assembly, and made 
 grants for similar purposes. Yet, though at 
 first the prospects of the mission seemed to 
 brighten, after a few years they grew worse. 
 Many of the colored people purchased small 
 lots of land, sometimes in the mountains, built 
 cottages, and cultivated the ground for their 
 living. Many left their old homes and sought 
 employment elsewhere, often at a distance from 
 the house of God. Many grew worldly-mind- 
 ed, made money the great object of their pur- 
 
7^ 
 
 •ait, and iought for happiness in earthly things. 
 Boneeren rvturniHl to their vile heathenish 
 nmctica, which it was hoiKxi tlicy had utterly 
 
 Til 1 B53. the number of church members in 
 
 tion with the Jamaica mission was 
 
 a considerable decrease from former 
 
 (or in 1844 they amounted to 26,585. 
 
 a ions of the missionaries are no longer 
 
 coi.tiiieil to the chief town, but are to be found 
 
 in all p&rts of the island, both in the towns 
 
 and in the country places. 
 
 Bermudas.— lu 1779, Mr. John Stephenson 
 commenced a fnission on Somer's Island where 
 he had to encounter the prejudices of the 
 whites and the heathenish superstitions of the 
 blacks ; the latter of whom he found under 
 the slavish dominion of witchcraft, as it 
 prerails in Africa, and for a description of 
 which, and the bondage under which its vic- 
 tims are held, the reader is referred to the 
 article on IVestem Africa. It appears that a 
 particular species of charm called Obi, was 
 made and sold at these islands, and was sup- 
 posed by the negroes to have great power. It 
 was to a people sunk under such superstitions 
 that Mr. S. came ; but it was not long before 
 the Gospel began to exert its influence. Yet 
 this was no sooner manifested, than the hos- 
 tility of the whites was aroused. Laws were 
 passed similar to those in Jamaica, and Mr. 
 S. was imprisoned six months in the common 
 iail, by which his health was so impaired that 
 he was recalled, and the island was left without 
 a missionary for six years. In April, 1808, Mr. 
 Joshua Marsden proceeded from New Bruns- 
 wick to Bermuda, but found the society gather- 
 ed by Mr. S. dispersed. He obtained permission 
 from the governor to preach, but he met with 
 no very great success. In 1853, the number of 
 chorch members in connection with the mis- 
 sion in this island amounted to 445. 
 
 Bahama Islands.— In October, 1800, Mr. 
 William Turton arrived at New Providence, 
 where he obtained permission to preach ; and 
 though a law had previously been enacted, 
 prohibiting the instruction of the slaves, he 
 was attended by considerable congregations, 
 and snccecded in raising a small society. 
 Other missionaries havig afterwards arrived, 
 they extended their labors to Eleuthera, Har- 
 bour Island, Abaco, and others of the Baha- 
 mas. On some of these their prospects were 
 highly encouraging ; their congregations were 
 large, attentive, and respectable, and a great 
 reformation followed their labors. But in 
 1816, the legislature passed an act prohibiting, 
 UDder severe penalties, meetings for Divine wor- 
 mip earlier than sunrise and later than sunset, 
 thus deprivinff the slaves of the privilege of 
 attending. Many of the negroes came to the 
 mL^-vionaries in tears, lamenting the loss of 
 their religious privileges. It was truly affecfc- 
 1k^ ^?a ^^'*^ ^^^l>ath morning to see some of 
 theoldes* members ascending a neighboring 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 hill to see whether the sun was risen, before 
 they durst begin to sing the praises of their 
 Creator. After a few years, however, the le- 
 gislature retraced its steps, and repealed the 
 restrictions which it had laid upon the poor 
 negroes. In 1853, the members of the Me- 
 thodist Society in the Bahama Islands were as 
 follows : — 
 
 New Providence, . . .810 
 
 Eleuthera, 804 
 
 Harbour Island, . . . 538 
 
 Abaco and Andres Island, . . 264 
 Turk's Island . . .378 
 
 Total, . . 2,800 
 St. Domingo. — Having been previously in- 
 formed by the secretary of state of the repub- 
 lic of Hayti, that Protestant missionaries would 
 not only be tolerated but welcomed, Messrs. 
 John Brown and James Catts sailed from 
 England for Portrau-Prince, in November, 
 1816. They soon gathered a numerous con- 
 gregation at the capital, and in the country 
 they were uniformly treated with kindness and 
 respect. The inhabitants, indeed, were ex- 
 tremely ignorant, wicked, and superstitious ; 
 yet, in a short time a number of them appear- 
 ed to be impressed with divine things, and 
 were formed into a society. By the govern- 
 ment they were treated with great condescen- 
 sion and kindness. President Boyer mani- 
 fested the greatest readiness to encourage and 
 promote their plans, particularly in regard to 
 the education of youth. Tet, after a residence 
 of about two years in St. Domingo, they were 
 obliged to withdraw from the island, in conse- 
 quence of the tumultuous opposition of the po- 
 pulace. But on their departure. President 
 Boyer not only expressed himself highly satis- 
 fied with their conduct, but transmitted a do- 
 nation of £500 to the society. The constitu- 
 tion of Hayti recognized the church of Rome 
 as tbe religion of the state, but tolerated all 
 others. It may be questioned, however, whe- 
 ther the principle of toleration was at all un- 
 derstood ; practically, at least, the Methodists 
 enjoyed, nothing like religious freedom. The 
 small society that the missionaries had collect- 
 ed were, after their departure, greatly perse- 
 cuted chiefly through the influence of the Ca- 
 tholic priests over the ignorant people, in 
 which, however, they were too much seconded 
 by some persons of high rank. They could 
 only meet by stealth, and in small companies ; 
 and when assembled for worship, they were 
 sometimes assaulted by the populace with 
 stones and other missiles. On one occasion, a 
 number of them were seized by the police, and 
 carried to prison, and on being brought before 
 the chief judge, they were prohibited by him, 
 in the name of the president, from meeting to- 
 gether. " No one," said he, " can hinder you 
 from worshiping God as you please ; but let 
 every one abide at home ; for as often as 
 you are found assembled you shall be put in 
 
WEST INDIES. 
 
 769 
 
 prison ; and if you unhappily persist, I have re- 
 ceived orders to disperse you everywhere." 
 Several wished to reply, but he refused to hear 
 them, saying, " It is not from me ; it is not 
 my fault ; these are orders given to me." 
 There is reason to apprehend that these were 
 the orders of President Boyer. Yet the poor 
 people continued to meet. In 1834, John Tin- 
 dall was sent to Hayti ; 'other missionaries fol- 
 lowed, and settled at Port-au-Prince, Cape 
 Haytien and Samand. Their congregations 
 ■were generally small, and they had no great 
 encouragement in their labore. There was 
 reason to believe that numbers saw the absurd- 
 ities of the Eomish church, but ignorance, 
 superstition, and vice maintained their domin- 
 ion over the great mass of the population. 
 Notwithstanding the unsettled state of afifairs, 
 arising from changes in the government and 
 war with the Spanish part of the island, the 
 principle of religious toleration has made 
 marked progress. In 1853, the number of 
 church members in connexion with the mission 
 in this island amounted to 429. 
 
 Other missions. — Besides the missions already 
 noticed, the Methodists established others in 
 St. Christophers, Nevis, Grenada, St. Bartho- 
 lomew, St. Thomas, St. Martins, Anguilla, 
 Montserrat, Tobago, and Honduras, the present 
 state of which will be seen in the tabular view. 
 In 1853, the African, Creole, and Asiatic 
 church members in connection with the Wes- 
 leyan missions in the West Indies, amounted to 
 over 48,000 souls ; and other general results of 
 the mission will be seen in the tabular view. 
 
 Though in the preceding account of particu- 
 lar missions we have given a few illustrations 
 }f the nature and difficulties of missionary labor 
 n the West Indies in the days of slavery, we 
 ihall here add, in conclusion, a remark or two 
 )f general application to the whole of these mis- 
 ions. It was a great disadvantage to the ne- 
 oes, that the Lord's day was assigned them 
 , their masters to cultivate the grounds al- 
 ^wed them in lieu of provisions, and that the 
 ^ular market throughout the West Indies 
 we on that sacred day, when the chief towns 
 jdiibited all the noise and bustle of petty com- 
 .erce. After breakfast, on one Sabbath, a 
 river or overseer accompanied the slaves to 
 e negro fields, where they spent the Sabbath 
 iling all day under a burning sun. On the 
 llowing Lord's day, they went to market to 
 A\ the produce of their grounds and to pur- 
 hase such articles as they were not allowed by 
 leir masters, and they closed the day in drink- 
 iff, dancing, and debauchery. Such was a 
 abbath in the West Indies. The Christian 
 aves had to perform the same work as the 
 thers, unless, as in some cases, their masters 
 llowed them the Saturdays for that purpose. 
 bey went to market in the forenoon, and from 
 lence to the chapel. It was no uncommon 
 hing to see the chapel yard covered with bas- 
 ets, while their owners were attending wor- 
 49 
 
 ship. The missionaries did not, however, as 
 was insinuated, excite complaint among the 
 slaves on this subject. They were no doubt 
 grieved at the profanation of the Sabbath, and 
 the beneficial effects of their labors were mate- 
 rially counteracted by it ; but they accommo- 
 dated themselves to the circumstances of the 
 slaves, seized upon the broken fragments of 
 their time, and made the best improvement of 
 them they were able. 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 
 
 
 PRINCIPAL 
 
 CTATIGNS OR 
 
 CIRCUITS. 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 79 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 .5 
 
 & 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 9 
 § 
 
 I! 
 
 
 10 
 
 13 
 4 
 4 
 9 
 1 
 1 
 2 
 2 
 9 
 
 32 
 
 61 
 6 
 
 13 
 9 
 
 16 
 7 
 6 
 
 15 
 6 
 
 11 
 8 
 8 
 7 
 4 
 2 
 3 
 
 13 
 6 
 
 10 
 9 
 6 
 8 
 3 
 8 
 7 
 
 i; 
 
 391 
 
 7 
 1 
 3 
 3 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 6 
 6 
 6 
 7 
 9 
 4 
 4 
 29 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 2 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 1 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 C 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 2.472 
 
 '916 
 
 404 
 
 1,608 
 
 3,687 
 
 315 
 
 100 
 
 367 
 
 831 
 
 1,604 
 
 2,380 
 
 2,433 
 
 '671 
 
 807 
 
 1,086 
 
 1,549 
 
 468 
 
 649 
 
 3,045 
 
 3,210 
 
 767 
 
 824 
 
 965 
 
 1,007 
 
 466 
 
 657 
 
 669 
 
 712 
 
 1,233 
 
 2,056 
 
 473 
 
 1,133 
 
 1,511 
 
 607 
 
 772 
 
 659 
 
 636 
 
 491 
 
 830 
 
 646 
 
 816 
 
 447 
 
 367 
 
 638 
 
 249 
 
 15 
 
 878 
 
 180 
 
 166 
 
 20 
 
 41 
 
 22 
 
 15 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 18 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 10 
 12 
 7 
 6 
 
 }^ 
 
 6 
 6 
 
 80 
 6 
 4 
 2 
 2 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 2 
 6 
 4 
 1 
 6 
 6 
 2 
 2 
 
 1 
 4 
 
 2 
 9 
 3 
 8 
 8 
 6 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 4 
 1 
 8 
 
 1,706 
 
 260 
 
 321 
 
 810 
 
 1,780 
 
 151 
 
 63 
 
 90 
 
 352 
 639 
 671 
 253 
 290 
 850 
 
 1,436 
 380 
 440 
 
 1,700 
 414 
 210 
 210 
 115 
 264 
 
 126 
 176 
 92 
 156 
 160 
 113 
 128 
 270 
 120 
 209 
 
 190 
 96 
 507 
 279 
 860 
 191 
 410 
 208 
 
 328 
 800 
 148 
 88 
 201 
 
 9,000 
 
 2,360 
 
 1,000 
 
 6,000 
 
 9,260 
 
 1,000 
 
 500 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,000 
 
 3,550 
 
 4,580 
 
 6,020 
 
 1,620 
 
 1,600 
 
 2,200 
 
 2,300 
 
 1,403 
 
 1,759 
 
 9,500 
 
 7,500 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,000 
 
 600 
 
 600 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,100 
 
 1,832 
 
 2,066 
 
 1,000 
 
 1.500 
 
 3,000 
 
 900 
 
 1,000 
 
 1.000 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,600 
 
 l.OOC 
 
 1.860 
 
 1,700 
 
 1,400 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,800 
 
 '986 
 
 80 
 
 1,210 
 
 600 
 
 600 
 
 140 
 
 MO 
 
 400 
 
 Dominica 
 
 Montserrat 
 
 Nevis 
 
 St. Kitts 
 
 St. Eustatius 
 
 St. Bartholomew. .. 
 St. Martins 
 
 Anguilla 
 
 Tortola 
 
 Kingstown 
 
 Biabou 
 
 Grenada 
 
 Trinidad 
 
 
 Georgetown 
 
 Mahaica 
 
 Victoria ....... 
 
 Barbadoes 
 
 Kingston 
 
 Montego Bay 
 
 Spanish Town 
 
 Morant Bay 
 
 Guy's Hill 
 
 Grateful HiU 
 
 St. Ann's Bay 
 
 Beechamville 
 
 Bath & Port Morant. 
 
 Port Antonio 
 
 Clarendon 
 
 Mount Ward 
 
 Brown's Town 
 
 Yallahs 
 
 Mount Fletcher 
 
 Linstead 
 
 Manchioneal 
 
 Belize & Charibtown 
 
 New Providence 
 
 F^euthera, 1 
 
 Eleuthera, 2 
 
 Harbour Island 
 
 Abaco 
 
 Androa Island 
 
 Turk's Island 
 
 Port-au-Prince 
 
 Port-au-Plaat 
 
 Cape Haytien 
 
 Cayes 
 
 Totals 
 
 ue 
 
 48,689 
 
 259 
 
 18,247 
 
 1124Q6 
 
 There was in general no such thing as mar- 
 riage, in the common sense of the word, among 
 the slaves in the West Indies. They herded 
 
770 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 toMtlia> like the beasta of the field, without 
 Mj ceremony. Some lived tojrothcr many 
 toan ; others «ooo parted, and each chose a 
 new mate Promiscuous intercourse was com- 
 moo, mod the planters, when they made the 
 tttempt, found thcinaelves utterly unable to 
 brenk it Marriage, however, was uniformly 
 introduced bvthe Methodist missionaries among 
 the convert;^'; but with respect to this they had 
 many difficulties to encounter. They were fre- 
 qnentJy at a loss to know which was the pro- 
 per husband or wife. A female, for instance, 
 wished to become a member of the society ; 
 but the man with whom she lived was not the 
 first to whom she had been united. She had 
 lived with many others, and the person with 
 whom she was originally connected had in like 
 manner had many more women since he left 
 hex ; and perhaps was living at that time with 
 one by whom he had children. Sometimes the 
 missionaries were content with an engagement 
 on the part of the woman that she would abide 
 with the man with whom she lived when she 
 joined the society. At other times, they acted 
 to the best of their judgment in selecting the 
 person whom they thought most proper. 
 
 Though we have given several instances of 
 the hostility of the white inhabitants of the 
 West Indies to the labors of the Methodists, it 
 would be an act of great injustice both to the 
 planters and to the missionaries, did we neglect 
 to mention, that such feelings were by no means 
 universal. Jn some of the colonies, there were 
 not only no persecuting laws, but they were 
 greatly encouraged, both by the local govern- 
 ment and by the owners of the slaves. Even 
 in those islands where they met with persecu- 
 tion, they had many friends among the plant- 
 ers and others of the white inhabitants. Some 
 built chapels on their estates, others subscribed 
 handsomely to their erection in the neighbor- 
 hood. There was scarcely a place of worship 
 of any size in the West Indies, in the building 
 of which the gentlemen of the island did not 
 anist by their contributions, or in some other 
 form. Subscriptions of £10, £20, £50, and 
 £100 for such purposes, indicate both the rank 
 in life, and the sentiments of the contributors. 
 Even in Jamaica, where the reputed dark and 
 dangerous fanaticism of the Methodists was 
 detected with more than ordinary sagacity, the 
 most liberal assistance was afforded. In other 
 islands, planters, merchants, members of colo- 
 nial assemblies, presidents, chief-judges, gover- 
 nors, not only subscribed to the erection of 
 chapeh?, but in some instances paid regular 
 stipends to the missionaries, as a remuneration 
 for their services in instructing their slaves 
 In several of the islands indeed the proprietors 
 Of estates, and other inhabitants, were so fully 
 satisfied with the conduct of the missionaries 
 and so sensible of the political as well as moral 
 and religious advantages resulting from their 
 labors, that they defrayed entirely the ordinary 
 expenses of the mission. Since the abolition 
 
 of slavery, the views of the white people in tho 
 West Indies in reference to the Methodist mis* 
 sionaries have been greatly changed ; and it 
 is probably now matter of wonder to many, 
 that any hostility should ever have been mani- 
 fested to so zealous, laborious, and useful a 
 body of men. — Marsden's Missionary Narrative; 
 Brown's Historij of Missions ; Jackson's Cente- 
 nary of Methodism ;' Duncan's Mission to Ja- 
 maica ; Memorials of Miss. Labor in W. Indies, 
 by Moister. — Kev. W. Butler. 
 
 American Missionary Association. — /a- 
 maica. — Tlfe mission to Jamaica is occupied 
 mainly with labor in behalf of the emancipated 
 colored people of Jamaica. It was commenced 
 by five Congregational ministers, who sailed 
 from New York in the fall of 1839. They 
 went to Jamaica with the expectation of 
 receiving a plain support from the eman- 
 cipated people themselves ; but in this they 
 were disappointed, and as there was then no 
 missionary society in the United States that 
 could undertake the support of a mission there, 
 they were reduced to circumstances of distress- 
 ing privation. A committee was formed of 
 gentlemen residing in New York and New 
 England, called the West I^idia Missimary Com- 
 mittee, who received and forwarded contribu- 
 tions for this mission, but without undertaking 
 its support. In 1847 the mission was trans- 
 ferred to the American Missionary Association, 
 under whose care it remains. In 1843, the 
 missionaries formed a Congregational Associar 
 tion, under the name of the " Jamaica Congre- 
 gational Association ; " and the mission is now 
 known in the island as the " American Con- 
 gregational Mission." 
 
 TABULAR VIEW. 
 
 STATIONS. 
 
 Brainerd, including Mr. ) 
 Patience's school. ... J 
 
 Good Hope (an out-station) 
 
 Oberlin.... 
 
 Eliot 
 
 Rock River (out-station) . . 
 
 Union, including Hermi- ) 
 tageand Chesterfield j 
 
 Devon Pen 
 
 Providence 
 
 Brandon (out-station) 
 
 Golden Vale 
 
 Totals 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •f^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 .2 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 ■7. 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 < 
 
 1 
 
 <1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 
 ;S 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 1839 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 133 
 
 176 
 
 1853 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 80 
 
 1839 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 44 
 
 68 
 
 1842 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 80 
 
 63 
 
 1863 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 5il 
 
 1839 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 66 
 
 90 
 
 1839 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 44 
 
 69 
 
 1844 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 4(1 
 
 70 
 
 1861 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 22 
 
 
 1851 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 14 
 
 80 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 8 
 
 433 
 
 716 
 
 For the purpose of leading the people to 
 take more interest in the education of their chil- 
 dren, and to accustom them to responsibility 
 
rx^CSt THH """^^ 
 
WEST INDIES. 
 
 771 
 
 in the conduct of the schools, the missionaries 
 formed a voluntary school association in 1852. 
 Two of the directors of each school are chosen 
 from among the people of the station, and as- 
 sociated with the missionaries and teachers in 
 the general management of the school. With 
 the results of this plan, after two jears' trial, 
 the teachers are well pleased.— -Ekv. G. Wiup- 
 
 PLE. 
 
 Moravian Missions.— Danish W. 1. Islands. 
 —The first Moravian missionaries to the West 
 Indies, were Leonhard Dober, " the potter," and 
 David Nitschmann " the carpenter. " Their at- 
 tention was first directed to this field by a ne- 
 gro, who stated that he had a sister in the 
 island of St. Thomas, who, with many of her 
 enslaved companions, desired to be instructed 
 in the way of salvation, and earnestly implored 
 the God of heaven to send some one who was 
 capable of giving them religious instruction. 
 In the hope of being of some service to these be- 
 nighted people, these young men, laymen, of 
 the occupations above named, set out from 
 Herrnhut, in Denmark, with only six dollars 
 each in his pocket, and arrived at St. Thomas 
 on the 13th of December, 1732. The next 
 year two companies, one consisting of 18 and 
 "■■"'. other of 11 persons, sailed from Europe, 
 
 any of whom fell victims to the insalubrity 
 ■A the climate. In 1736, three persons were 
 baptized. In 1738 a negro named Mingo was 
 1>aptized, and became a zealous assistant. 
 Through his preaching an awakening took 
 : 1 ice over the whole island. But the planters 
 
 ; iosed the work, and persecuted and impris- 
 
 d the missionaries. Count Zinzendorf, how- 
 
 r, who unexpectedly arrived in the island, 
 
 cured their liberation. In 1741, 90 persons 
 
 re baptized at a plantation called New 
 
 rrnhut. Princess plantation, in the island 
 
 St. Croix, became a permanent station in 
 
 ")1. A church was erected in Friedensthal, 
 _.. Croix, in 1755, and this became the princi- 
 pal station in the Danish islands. The place 
 was destroyed by a hurricane in 1772. Bethany, 
 in the island of St. Jan, was occupied as a sta- 
 tion in 1754 ; and in 1782, Emmaus, in the 
 same island, became a station. Friedensfield, 
 ti St. Croix, became a missionary settlement in 
 1805. In 1832, a centenary jubilee was held, 
 lud the important and encouraging fact was 
 •eported, that during that period 37,000 souls 
 liad been baptized in the Danish islands. The 
 S'ear 1848 was rendered memorable by the i» 
 mrrection of slaves in St. Croix, and by the 
 iraancipation of the negroes in all the Danish 
 sles. 
 
 In the three Danish islands, St. Thomas, St. 
 Jroix, and St. Jan, there are at the present 
 ime 8 stations, 35 laborers, 9,398 converts, 
 )f whom 2,892 are communicants. 
 
 Jamaica. — The Moravian brethren com- 
 
 nenced a mission in this island in 1754, en- , , • ., - r o* 
 
 jouraged by several of the planters, who pre- ground was purchased m the town ol bU 
 ented them an estate called Carmel. In one John's, and a place of worship was erected for 
 
 year the Sabbath congregation numbered 
 700 persons, and 26 had been baptized. In 
 1804, fifty years from the date of the mission, 
 Ifce brethren observe: "Though we cannot 
 exult in an abundant in-gathering of souls, 
 which these fifty years have produced, or even 
 over our present prospects, yet we have suffi- 
 cient cause of gratitude to the Lord for having 
 preserved a seed in Jamaica. From the be- 
 ginning of this mission to the present time, 
 938 negroes have been baptized." 
 
 In 1824, a serious insurrection broke out in 
 the island; and in 1831, another still more 
 general and bloody. To this last outbreak the 
 slaves were provoked, say the missionaries, 
 " by inhuman treatment, instigated also by 
 hearing of the sympathy which their lot had 
 excited in England and its parliament." 
 Much hatred was excited against the missions, 
 and several churches of different denominations 
 were broken up. In 1834, a system of eman- 
 cipation was commenced, but complete liberty 
 was not granted till 1838. " From that time," 
 say the brethren, " our mission in Jamaica has 
 prospered greatly. Our six churches were 
 over-crowded. At the church in Fairfield, 
 which contains 800 sittings, above 2,000 per- 
 sons sought admittance. It was therefore ne- 
 cessary to keep two meetings, either at the 
 same time or in succession. The schools were 
 equally over-crowded. The souls under our 
 care numbered 8,000. New preaching places 
 were established, and many school-houses were 
 erected." In 1842, an institution for training 
 native teachers was established. In 1850, the 
 souls under the care of the mission at the se- 
 veral stations, was estimated at 13,000. 25 
 elementary schools were in active operation, 
 under the superintendence of the missionaries. 
 
 The Moravian Church Miscellany for May, 
 1851, contains a review of the Jamaica mia- 
 sion, representing it as comprising 13 stations, 
 at the west end of the island, each station con- 
 sisting of various buildings — a church, a 
 school- house, and a dwelling-house, with out- 
 offices. With each station a congregation is 
 connected, living within a circle, tne diameter 
 of which is, in most cases, about 20 miles. 
 Besides the principal stations, there are 17 
 school-houses and out station schools, making 
 the number of churches 13, and of schools 30. 
 The number of negroes in connexion with 
 these churches anwuuted, at the above date, to 
 13,388, young and old. Many white families 
 also regularly attended the churches. Theae 
 statements are not essentially modified by any 
 later returns. 
 
 Antigua. — The brethren's mission was com- 
 menced in this island in 1756. It originat<^ 
 with the missionaries at St Thomas, and the 
 first missionary was from that place. Little 
 interest was excited in the minds of the ne- 
 groes, however, till 1761, when a piece of 
 
77» 
 
 tiMMgrocs. In 1772, a religious awakening 
 ■pratd over the island. A desire for religious 
 inBtnictioo was increased among the slaves, 
 and in 1775 the attendants on pul)lic worship 
 Dombered 2,000, and from 10 to 20 were bap- 
 tised aimoet every month. The converts were 
 tabject to many temptations and troubles, 
 toda a8 famine, sickness, persecution, depreda- 
 tk>D8, and the excitements consequent upon the 
 taking of the island by the French ; yet the 
 cause was firm and progressive, so that after 
 the restoration of jxjace, in 1783, 60 adults 
 were received into the church at St. John's, 
 in one day, and in a year 700 were added to 
 the congregations. The missionaries preached 
 on different plantations, and one native assist- 
 ant built a house of worship at his own ex- 
 pense, to seat 400 persons. Many of the 
 planters saw that the effects of the Gospel 
 upon the slaves was highly beneficial, and 
 when any of them were refractory, they sent 
 them to the missionaries for reproof, instead of 
 administering corporeal punishment. But others 
 were decidedly hostile, and would punish their 
 slaves severely for attending on the means of 
 grace. One negro was compelled to give his 
 own wife fifty lashes, because she had sought 
 the protection of the local authorities. At 
 another time, an aged female negro was un- 
 mercifully whipped and put in irons, from ha- 
 tred to her religion, and the next day she was 
 chained to two negroes, and dragged' towards 
 the field to work, but died on the way. Amidst 
 these persecutions the church in Antigua re- 
 sembled the burning bush. In spite of oppo- 
 sition, the word of the Lord continued to run 
 and be glorified, and the two congregations, 
 in 1788, numbered more than 6,000 ; and so 
 many new doors were opened for preaching the 
 Gospel, that the missionaries were thankful to 
 find useful assistants in many of the converts, 
 who visited the sick, gave advice, and minister- 
 ed in many ways, though they were not employ- 
 ed in preaching. 
 
 In 1796, a third station was formed ; the 
 names of the three stations being St. John's, 
 Grace Hill, and Grace Bay. In 1810, they 
 commenced a school on the Lancasterian plan, 
 at St. John's, with 80 scholars, which soon in- 
 creased to 700, who made surprising progress 
 in learning. In 1812, owing to the dryness of 
 the season and the war with America, provi- 
 sions became dear and scarce, and famine and 
 disease prevailed, which carried off more than 
 200 of the congregation at St. John's. In 1817, 
 the brethren commenced a fourth station, at a 
 place called Newfield, for which the colonial 
 government presented them with ten acres of 
 land, £1,000 towards the erection of buildings, 
 and an annual grant of £300 for their support! 
 Two other stations were added, Cedar Hall, 
 and Mount Joy, and large congregations were 
 collected. In 1823, they celebrated the 50tH 
 anniversary of the opening of the church at 
 St. John's, when it appeared that there had 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 been baptized and received into the church in 
 that time, 16,099 negroes, young and old. 
 Among a people so ignorant and oppressed, 
 however, some allowance must be made for 
 spurious conversions. In 1826, the mission in 
 Antigua Wiis strengthened by the arrival of 
 several brethren from Europe. The number 
 of slaves receiving instruction at this period, 
 wjis 14,823. Bible and missionary societies 
 were formed among the negroes in 1832 ; and 
 in 1834, unconditional emancipation was pro- 
 claimed in the island, the negroes being consider- 
 ed sufficiently advanced in knowledge and intel- 
 ligence to render such a measure safe and pro- 
 per. In 1838, Lebanon, the sixth station, was 
 begun, and 1839, Gracefield was commenced 
 in the north. A training school was opened 
 at Cedar Hall, in 1847, but the buildings wore 
 destroyed by a hurricane the next year. They 
 have been rebuilt, and the institution is in a 
 flourishing condition. There are not so many 
 under the instruction of the missionaries in 
 Antigua at the present time as there were a 
 few years ago, owing chiefly, as is supposed, 
 to the increase of churches of other denomi- 
 nations ; still the number as last reported, 
 amounted to about 8,000. 
 
 St. Kitt's. — A mission was begun in this 
 island in 1777, at Basseterre. In a year or 
 two a general interest was awakened among 
 the negroes, which continued, with some inter- 
 ruptions, so that in 1790 the Gospel was 
 preached on upwards of 50 plantations. In 
 1800 the number of converts was estimated at 
 about 2,000. A second station, Bethesda, was 
 formed in 1820 ; and in 1832 a third was be- 
 gun at Bethel, From this time the activity of 
 other missionary societies increased, and many 
 who had attended the Moravian meetings fell 
 off, and joined congregations nearer and more 
 convenient. Estridge, a fourth station, was 
 commenced in 1845. 
 
 Barbadoes. — The Brethren entered upon a 
 mission in this island in 1765. The first con- 
 vert was baptized in 1768 ; but there has been 
 no such general desire for the word of God as 
 in many of the other West India islands. Two 
 stations were established, one at Sharon, in 
 1794, and one at Mount Tabor, in 1826. In 
 
 1831, both these stations were destroyed by a 
 hurricane, and upwards of 4,000 souls perished 
 in the island. These stations were rebuilt in 
 
 1832, when the congregations numbered about 
 1100. A congregation was established at 
 Bridgetown in 1836, and another at Clifton 
 Hill, in 1841, making four stations, which are 
 still occupied with a good degree of success. 
 
 Tobago. — The Moravians have had a mission 
 in this island since 1787. At several different 
 times it has been suspended, but resumed again, 
 and it still exists, as one of the many proofs of 
 the blessing of God on missionary perseverance. 
 There are two stations, Montgomery and 
 Moriah. 
 
 Dutch Guiana. — Into this field two of the 
 
WEST INDIES 
 
 773 
 
 Brethren entered in 1733. One of their lead- 
 ing objects was to carry the Gospel to the 
 Arawacks, a numerous Indian tribe in that 
 part of Surinam called Rio de Berbice. Their 
 first station was at Pilgerlmt, on the river 
 Wironje, a tributary of the Berbice. At the 
 end of ten years the mission was favored with 
 the presence and labors of Theophilus Solomon 
 Schumann, called " the gifted apostle of the 
 Arawacks." By his great talents and " won- 
 derful combination of wisdom and firmness," 
 he was enabled, under God, to triumph over 
 the opposition of the whites, and 300 converts 
 crowned his labors. But in 1757 difficulties 
 of every description, among which were fam- 
 ine and epidemics, thickened around, and 
 almost dispersed this little flock. By removals 
 they sought a more peaceful abode, and much 
 might be related of the heroic perseverance of 
 the Moravian brethren in these primeval for- 
 ests. In 1700 Schumann was called from his 
 labors on earth. The work was continued by 
 other missionaries, though amid appalling diffi- 
 culties and discouragements. Station after 
 station was invaded and burnt by the Bush 
 Negroes, and the converts dispersed, and finally, 
 in 1808, the mission among the South Ameri- 
 can Indians, after existing 70 years,was brought 
 to a close. 
 
 A mission among the negro slaves in Suri- 
 nam, was commenced in 1735, at Parimaribo 
 as head-quarters. The missionaries went out 
 with licenses for several trades, by which they 
 supported themselves. The first convert in 
 Parimaribo was baptized in 1776, and the first 
 church was erected in 1778. From 1799 to 
 1816 the colony was a scene of frequent wars 
 between the Dutch and the English, but the 
 mission was at no time entirely interrupted. 
 In 1821 the " Harmony of the Gospels," was 
 translated into Negro-English, and was heartily 
 welcomed by those who were able to read. In 
 1828 the brethren opened a new church in Pari- 
 maribo, with a congregation of 2,260. The most 
 respected inhabitants formed a society, which 
 still renders valuable assistance to the mission. 
 In 1830 Berg en Dal, on the Surinam, 90 miles 
 from Parimaribo, was opened as a preaching 
 place. During this year the British and Foreign 
 Bible Society printed the Negro-English New 
 Testament for the Surinam mission. It had pre- 
 viously existed only in manuscript. Several 
 new stations have been formed, but the largest 
 and most important is still at Parimaribo, 
 where the congregation, in 1850, numbered 
 5,500 souls. The other negroes under the care 
 of the mission are scattered over several hun- 
 dred plantations. The Brethren have also a 
 mission among the Bush, or Free Negroes, on 
 the upper Surinam, a country which can be 
 reached only by dangerous voyages in sma 1 
 canoes up the streams, the navigation of which 
 is rendered extremely perilous by cataracts. 
 The heat is extreme, and the climate fatal to 
 most Europeans. Into this region two of the 
 
 Brethren penetrated in 176o. One of them 
 died in two months, the other labored 12 years, 
 and was the means of bringing a few souls to 
 accept the Gospel invitation. New Bambey, 
 a station some miles lower down the river, was 
 established in 1785, for a company of 20 ne- 
 groes. Considerable desire was manifested for 
 several years in the interior of the country, to 
 hear the Gospel, but sickne&s and death among 
 the missionaries proved a great hindrance to 
 their labors. In 1813 the congregation in New 
 Bambey numbered 50, but there was little vi- 
 tality among them, and the field was relinquish- 
 ed ; it was afterwards resumed, but owing to 
 the death of missionaries, was given up again 
 in 1848. 
 
 English General Baptists. — Jamaica. — 
 The Baptists entered upon their mission in Ja- 
 maica in 1814. The first station was at Fal- 
 mouth, where a school was opened, and preach- 
 ing commenced on the Sabbath, attended by 
 both negroes and white people. Two more mis- 
 sionaries arrived the next year, and settled at 
 Kingston. Encouraged by early indications of 
 success, the society pressed forward its work, in- 
 creasing the number of laborers and forming 
 new stations, till, at the annual meeting of the 
 missionaries in Falmouth, in April, 1831, the 
 following tabular statement was presented : 
 
 C11UKC3IES. 
 
 Kingston, Queen-street 
 Hanover " 
 
 Yallahs 
 
 Spanish Town 
 
 Montego Bay 
 
 Gurney's Mount 
 
 Falmouth .... 
 
 Anotta Bay 
 
 Charles Town 
 
 Port Maria 
 
 Ora Cabessa 
 
 Brae Head 
 
 Mount Charles 
 
 Ol<l Harbor 
 
 Hayes Savanna 
 
 Crooked Spring 
 
 Port Royal 
 
 St. Ann's Bay 
 
 Ocho Rios 
 
 Savanna la Mar 
 
 Fuller's Field 
 
 Rio Bueno 
 
 Stewart's Town 
 
 Lucea — 
 
 TotaLj. 
 
 50 
 
 S & 
 
 383 393 1941 IWl 10,838 
 
 2,037 
 
 769 
 
 103 
 
 1,036 
 
 1,572 
 
 125 
 
 8S5 
 
 510 
 
 112 
 
 410 
 
 45 
 
 36 
 
 319 
 
 265 
 
 257 
 
 723 
 
 202 
 
 52 
 
 89 
 
 83 
 
 22 
 
 128 
 
 108 
 
 60 
 
 The mission continued to prosper, and the 
 churches had at no time been in a better con- 
 dition than when the act of emancipation was 
 carried into effect, in 1838. Yet, those who 
 were unfriendly to this act, and wished to 
 make its results appear to the worst advan- 
 tage, raised numerous reports against the mis- 
 
774 
 
 WEST INDIES. 
 
 sionarles, and sought in every way to embar- 
 rass their operations. This led Sir Lionel 
 Smith to make some explicit statements in 
 their defence. In reply to an address from 
 the Baptist brethren, he said, " On my assum- 
 ing tiie ffovernment of this colony, I strongly 
 expressed mv reliance on the whole body of 
 niisstionaries, in their high integrity of purpose, 
 and in their loyal principles. You more than 
 realizLKl all the benefits I expected from your 
 ministry, by raising the negroes from the men- 
 tal degradation of slavery to the cheering obli- 
 gations of Christianity, and they were thus 
 taught that patient endurance of evil, which 
 has so materially contributed to the general 
 tranquillity. Even with the aid of a vicious 
 and well paid press, both in England and 
 Jamaica, the enemies of your religion have 
 never dared go to the proof of their audacious 
 accusations against you." After alluding to 
 the peaceful working of emancipation, and the 
 disappointment of those who had predicted 
 violence and blood, the governor added, " The 
 admirable conduct of the peasantry in such a 
 crisis, has constituted a proud triumph to the 
 cause of religion ; and those who contributed 
 to enlighten them in their moral duties, through 
 persecutions, insults, and dangers, have deserved 
 the regard and esteem of the good and the just 
 in all Christian countries." This was said 
 after one year of freedom had passed away. 
 The returns made from the respective mission 
 churches in 1839, evinced that the work of 
 God continued to advance in an encouraging 
 degree. A nett increase of 2,617 members 
 had taken place during the preceding year, 
 and the whole number of members was 21,337. 
 There were also over 20,000 inquirers. A 
 large increase was reported in the number of 
 pupils receiving instruction in the schools. 
 The day-schools contained 5,413, the evening- 
 schools 577, and 10,117 were taught on the 
 Sabbath, making a total of 16,117 scholars. 
 As a further proof of the rapid growth of those 
 habits and feelings which are the best security 
 for the social welfare of a community, the mis- 
 sionaries had solemnized 1,942 marriages dur- 
 ing the year. In 1841, the number of church 
 members had increased to 27,706. At the 
 association of the Baptist mission churches, 
 held in Kingston. January, 1842, the ministers 
 unanimously resolved, as an appropriate com- 
 memoration at once of the day of freedom and 
 the jubilee of the mission, to detach themselves 
 from the funds of the parent society after the 
 first of August ensuing. From this period, the 
 churches in Jamaica, although continued with 
 no \cis efficiency than before, are not formally 
 reported as mission churches. 
 
 Bahamas. — A mission to the Bahama Islands 
 was commenced by the General Baptists in 
 1834. ITie missionaries established themselves 
 at N»ew Providence, and in two years they had 
 extended their labors to Andros Island, Eleu- 
 thera, Exuma, Rum Key, Crooked Island, For- 
 
 tune's Island, and Turk's Island. Connected 
 with the churches at these places there were 
 490 members, 217 having been added during 
 the preceding year. This field has been steadily 
 and perseveringly cultivated, and has yielded 
 much precious fruit. In 1850, Mr. Littlewood 
 wrote, " We have six native agents, assisted 
 by their wives, exclusive of 140 Sabbath-school 
 teachers. Their work is divided between 45 
 churches, 1,475 members, 3,045 attendants on 
 public worship, and 1,226 scholars, the fruit of 
 whose labors is evidenced in the steady acces- 
 sion to our churches, and in the increased 
 knowledge and piety of the people." Mr. Lit- 
 tlewood, speaking of his field of labor, says : 
 " Imagine an expanse of water spread out be- 
 fore you some 500 miles, studded with sea-girt 
 isles, varying from 100 miles by 40, to bare 
 rocks of 100 yards in circumference. Amidst 
 these islands I am continually navigating, 
 where the ocean is frequently as smooth as a 
 mirror, or as often lashed into a foam by the 
 tempest." The members of these churches are 
 represented as, for the most part, very poor, 
 but as humble and consistent Christians. 
 
 Trinidad.— In 1842 the attention of the So- 
 ciety was directed to this island, only about 
 one-tenth of whose 80,000 inhabitants are 
 white people. Mr. Cowen, the first mission- 
 ary, described the people as in an awful state 
 of destitution and spiritual ignorance, and 
 nothing to encourage missionary operations 
 except the existing necessity. In 1846 the 
 Secretary of the Society visited Trinidad, at 
 which time the number of evangelical minis- 
 ters on the island was eight, and the attend- 
 ance upon day-schools about one in twenty. 
 The great body of the people were Roman 
 Catholics ; and, by popery and slavery com- 
 bined, the energy of the people had been de- 
 stroyed, and the finer features of the negro 
 character nearly obliterated. The Secretary 
 says, " We have two groups of stations in 
 Trinidad, one of which is in and around the 
 port of Spain, the other about 20 miles to the 
 south, in and around the Savanna Grande. 
 Since 1843 two small chapels of wood have 
 been built near the port of Spain, in one of 
 which a school of 90 scholars is taught. An- 
 other chapel has been built about three miles 
 distant, close to the sea, in the midst of a con- 
 siderable population. About 20 miles north 
 of the port of Spain, Mr. Cowen has three sta- 
 tions, where he labors with much self-denial." 
 In 1850 the missionary wrote with expressions 
 of grief : " What with rum-drinking, supersti- 
 tion, and something like paganism, the cause 
 of the Lord Jesus makes little progress in 
 Trinidad." He added, however, that increas- 
 ed attention was being paid to the cause of 
 education ; that thousands of religious tracts 
 were in circulation, and that during the pre- 
 ceding year more than a thousand copies of 
 the Scriptures had been distributed. The 
 number of communicants, as last reported, was 
 
WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 80 ; schools, 8 ; teachers, 12 ; scholars, 181 ; 
 all under tke superintendence of one mis- 
 sionary. 
 
 Honduras.~Th\s island has been the scene 
 of missionary operations by the English Bap- 
 tists since 1822 ; but their labors have been 
 quite restricted, and no very full reports of a 
 recent date have been received. The largest 
 number of communicants reported at any one 
 time was 132 ; schools, 9 ; scholars, 227. 
 
 Church Missionary Society.— This Soci- 
 ety commenced a mission in the island of An- 
 tigua in 181.5, another in Jamaica in 1826, 
 and one in Trinidad in 1836. Later still, a 
 good work has been begun and carried on in 
 British Guiana. In Jamaica, as last reported, 
 the Society had five stations, viz., Siloah, 
 PrattvUle, Chichester, Rural Hill, and Church 
 Hill. At Siloah the house of worship, which 
 YTBS adapted to seat 850 persons, was crowded 
 with a congregation of about 1,000. The 
 communicants numbered 312, and there were 
 114 candidates. In two schools there were 
 218 scholars. The Prattville station had 279 
 communicants ; one day-school, with 138 chil- 
 dren, and one Sunday-school, with 230 scholars, 
 At Chichester there was a congregation of 
 450, of whom 105 were church-members, and 
 39 candidates. Of the other two stations no 
 definite account is given. Little, if anything, 
 is at present done by the Society in Antigua 
 and Trinidad. In British Guiana considerable 
 attention has been paid to schools, and though 
 the number of scholars is not large, their pro- 
 ficiency is remarkable. The highest class 
 read the Old and New Testaments, and study 
 general and church history, and geography, 
 besides learning hymns, catechism, and por- 
 tions of Scripture. 
 
 Society for the Propagation of the 
 Gospel. — This Society has missions in Barba- 
 does, Grenada, Tobago, and British Guiana. 
 In Barbadoes they commenced operations as 
 early as 1818, and they have now eight or 
 nine stations, and as many missionaries. Cod- 
 rington College, an important institution of 
 this Society, has been in operation since 1829, 
 and has supplied the West Indian Church with 
 upwards of sixty clergymen. In Grenada the 
 Society has but one missionary ; also one in 
 Tobago. In Essequibo, Pomeroon, and Do- 
 marara, belonging to British Guiana, there are 
 five or six missionaries. 
 
 London Missionary Society. — The London 
 Missionary Society commenced a mission in 
 Jamaica in 1834 ; and at later periods it has 
 established miss'ions in Dcmerara and Bcrbico. 
 The latest reports received are to 1851, when 
 the Society had in Jamaica 12 chapels or sta- 
 tions, 8 missionaries, and over 800 commu- 
 nicants. In Demarara there were 7 chapels, 
 5 missionaries, 4 teachers, 1,000 communicants, 
 and 550 scholars. In all, 19 missionaries, 4,000 
 communicants, and 3,000 scholars. 
 United Scotch Presbyterian Church. — 
 
 775 
 
 ,r ^\ 
 
 on.<» 
 
 the 
 Lucca, Port 
 
 This Church has taken charge ■ 
 
 till lately maintained by the S. . 
 
 ary Society. They are in Jam; 
 
 following places, viz., IJampden 
 Maria, Cornwall, Carron Hall, Gi-een iHland. 
 Brownsville, and Rose Hill. Their statistics 
 are not given.— Rev. E, I). Moore. 
 
 Baptist Free Mi.ssion SoriKTT.— This So- 
 ciety, which is organized on anti-slavery prin- 
 ciples, and has its seat of operations iu Utica. 
 rs. Y., has had a mission for a number of ycarg 
 in successful operation in Hayti ; with 1 mi«. 
 sionary, 3 female assistants, 1 native paator, 
 and 4 native teachers. 
 
 general tabular view. 
 
 Wesleyans 
 
 English Baptists 
 
 Church of England 
 
 London lILssiooary i?oc. 
 
 Moravians 
 
 Scotch Presbyterians . . 
 American Miss. Asso.. 
 
 Totals. 
 
 18,003* 
 f96 
 
 4,000 
 17.000 
 
 3,900 
 
 92,494 
 
 ^ 
 
 18,247 
 
 753 
 
 348 
 
 3,000 
 
 3, 000 
 613 
 
 15,861 
 
 IU40fi 
 
 59,596 
 
 17-i,001 
 
 • Includes the churches not now aided by the Sk>c2«ty. 
 
 WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIE- 
 TY.-— Methodism has often been complimented 
 as being " essentially missionary in its charac- 
 ter." This is true in a higher sense than is 
 generally understood. Indeed, the very origin 
 of the system can be traced to a high and 
 devoted missionary spirit. The founder of 
 Methodism was a missionary before he was 
 an evangelical Methodist, having gone forth in 
 1735 in the service of the Sociely/or Propa- 
 gating the Gospel in Foreigii Parts, as a mis- 
 sionary to the North American Indians. His 
 subsequent conversion to God wa<* accom- 
 plished through the honored iib' "ty 
 of a Moravian missionary, Peter n 
 
 on his way to his field of Iab(/r 
 
 heathen. And almost prophetic wn 
 words of Wesley, when parted from tiii^ ,;.■ 
 voted missionary, who had bwn to him a 
 father in the Gospel : " what a work hath 
 God begun since his coming into England ! 
 Such an one as shall never come to an end till 
 
 heaven and earth pass away. " V • *^ft y-two 
 
 years from that time as an - achor 
 
 he nobly acied up to the ."^i • hoscn 
 
 motto : " The World is my Parish. ' During 
 this period, such " full proof of his ministry 
 ditl lie make, that he generally delivered two, 
 and frequently, three or four sermons every 
 day ; and traveled about 4,500 miles every 
 year, chiefly on horseback. And so wonder- 
 fully did God own his great missiocnry plant. 
 
776 
 
 WESLEY AN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 •nd eflbrts, that, at his death, the work had 
 mntA through all parts of Great Britain and 
 MaimI (where there were 300 itinerants, 
 1 !-"•> ' I preachers, and 80,000 members, in 
 t .) and also into the Isle of "Wight, 
 
 iu... .... i .0 of Man, and the Channel Islands, 
 
 through the United States, the West Indies, 
 Oaoada, and Newfoundland. 
 
 We might almost say that Mr. Wesley's 
 missionary spirit was hereditary. His father, 
 Rev. Samuel Wesley, felt deeply for the hea- 
 then, and about the beginning of the eight- 
 eenth century we find him in correspondence 
 with one of the English prehites, projecting a 
 mission to Hindostan on a ma{«nificent scale, 
 and even oflFering himself to take a part in it 
 as a missionary. Mrs. Susannah Wesley, also, 
 the gifted mother of John Wesley, shared the 
 missionary ardor of her husband. During Mr. 
 Wesley's absence in London, attending the 
 Convocation, she read the journals of the mis- 
 sionaries sent out by the Danish Society to 
 Trauqucbar ; and so powerful was the effect 
 produced upon her mind, that she gave herself 
 anew in covenant to God, and resolved in fu- 
 ture to be more devoted to his service. She 
 began to labor systematically with her child- 
 ren, and then with her husband's parishioners, 
 assembling them together on the Sabbath eve- 
 nings, during the long months of her husband's 
 absence, and giving them religious instruction ; 
 and pleading, in justification of this unusual 
 step for her as a woman, the example of the 
 Tranquebar missionaries. Much good was 
 accomplished by her eflbrts, and she imbued 
 her children with her own spirit ; and perhaps 
 it may be seen in the light of eternity, that the 
 missionary ardor of the followers of Wesley 
 owes much to the mother of the founder of 
 Methodism. 
 
 The Contingent Fund, instituted by Mr. 
 John Wesley as early as 1756, was designed by 
 him to be the means of sustaining the home 
 missions of Methodism in Great Britain and 
 Ireland. But the work soon began to spread 
 beyond the ability of a home mission agency 
 to manage. One step after another led the 
 Methodists onward until they reached the pa- 
 gan world ; and it soon became apparent that 
 a foreign missionary organization was needed 
 to take charge of the spreading work of God. 
 
 The first mission beyond the limits of Great 
 Britain, undertaken by the early Methodists, 
 was that to the North American colonies. In 
 the minutes for 1769, we find Mr. Wesley ask- 
 ing in the Conference, "Who are willing to 
 go to America as missionaries ?" Two breth- 
 ren immediately rose and offered themselves, 
 Richard Boardman and Joseph Pilmoor. But 
 there was no foreign missionary fund ; and Mr. 
 Wesley proposed that they should take up a 
 collection among themselves, and £70 were 
 contributed on the spot. This was the first 
 Methodist missionaiy collection ever made; 
 ADd as the whole number of preachers at that 
 
 time was but 110, and only about half of these 
 usually attended Conference, this collection 
 would probably average nearly ^7 each from 
 this company of poor itinerants. Of this sum 
 £20 was appropriated to pay the passage of 
 the missionaries, and the remainder was given 
 thera to assist in the erection of the first Me- 
 thodist meeting-house in America. Other mis- 
 sionaries were sent out afterwards, but in a 
 short time this portion of the work assumed 
 the independent position of the Methodist E. 
 Church ; and being able to provide for her 
 own necessities, ceased to be regarded a3 a 
 mission of the parent community. 
 
 But the missionary spirit which Mr. Wesley 
 had evoked, soon called into existence opera- 
 tions too extensive for the superintendence of 
 one man, even of Mr. Wesley's versatile pow- 
 ers ; and in this emergency, God sent to his 
 aid Rev. Dr. Coke. The friendship between 
 these men began Aug. 13, 1776 ; and after 
 traveling through the home work of Metho- 
 dism, and visiting America to organize the 
 Methodist Episcopal Church, in 1784, Dr. 0. 
 became General Superintendent of Methodist 
 missions. He traveled extensively through 
 Great Britain, making collections for their 
 support, soliciting subscriptions from wealthy 
 individuals, wherever he coiild gain access, and 
 selecting suitable men for the work. He also 
 maintained a regular correspondence with the 
 missionaries. From the time of Mr. Wesley's 
 death, in 1791, to the year 1811, under his 
 active and vigilant superintendence, the mis- 
 sionaries among the Africans in the West In- 
 dies, and those in British North America, 
 were increased from 21 to 43, besides 11 em- 
 ployed in the Irish mission among the neglect- 
 ed papists ; and the members in society in 
 these foreign stations were increased from 
 6,525 to 13,382. After the Conference of 
 1786, Dr. Coke sailed in company with three 
 brethren for Halifax ; but Providence drove 
 the vessel to Antigua. He distributed the 
 missionaries among the islands, and thus began 
 the Wesleyan missions to the West Indies. 
 He returned to England, and spent the next 
 18 months in visiting the principal towns, 
 begging for the missions with unabated zeal ; 
 and at the close of the Conference of 1788, he 
 sailed again with another detachment of mis- 
 sionaries for other islands among the West 
 Indies. He again returned home, and having 
 sent out several more missionaries, he once 
 more started with another band of devoted 
 men for the West Indies, in October, 1790. 
 As the missions multiplied abroad, the Con- 
 ference in England relieved Dr. Coke of a part 
 of his labor, by establishing an annual mis- 
 sionary collection in all their chapels, to sup- 
 port this growing and blessed work. 
 
 In the next ten years the Doctor paid four 
 more visits to America, to extend and strength- 
 en the work already begun. At the Conference 
 of 1813, though then in his 67th year, he ex- 
 
WESLEYAN mSSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 777 
 
 pressed an earnest desire to proceed to the 
 East Indies to establish a mission there. Eight- 
 een times had he crossed the Atlantic for mis- 
 sionary purposes ; yet his godly ardor was un- 
 abated. Some of his brethren attempted to 
 dissuade him from his purpose ; but, after hear- 
 ing their arguments, he burst into tears, and 
 exclaimed, " If you will not let rac go, you 
 will break my heart !" His brethren withdrew 
 their opposition ; and, accompanied by seven 
 missionaries. Dr. Coke embarked for the cast 
 in December, 1813. But on the 3d of May 
 following, his spirit suddenly returned to God : 
 he was found dead in his cabin. Thus ended 
 the life and labors of this estimable man, 
 whose name will ever be remembered in hon- 
 orable association with the history of the 
 Wesley an Missionary Society. 
 
 The Wesleyan Home Missions may be con- 
 sidered to have commenced when Mr. Wesley 
 instituted "the Contingent Fund" for their 
 support in 1756, 98 years ago. The Foreign 
 Missions of Methodism were commenced by 
 Mr. Wesley in 1769, when he sent missionaries 
 to America. In the year 1784 he planted a 
 mission in the Isle of Jersey; and in 1785 he 
 sent out seven missionaries to establish mis- 
 sions in Nova Scotia, Newfoundland, and in the 
 Island of Antigua. The next year he sent 
 additional help to these missions, and also oc- 
 cupied Guernsey. In 1787 he sent missionaries 
 to St. Vincent's, St. Christopher's, and St. Eusta- 
 titis, and also strengthened the mission in the 
 Norman Isles. In 1788 he appointed five 
 more missionaries for the West Indies. The 
 work continued to spread, and in 1789 Domin- 
 ica:, Barbadoes, Saba, Tortola, and Santa Cruz 
 were added to the list of Wesleyan missions. 
 Mr. Wesley sent out two more missionaries the 
 next year to the West Indies, and he added 
 Jamaica to the list of stations, and also ap- 
 pointed a committee of nine preachers to take 
 the management of those missions. This 
 closed Mr. Wesley's connection with the early 
 missions of Methodism. A few months after 
 this Conference he was called to his reward. 
 The statistics of the Wesleyan Foreign Mis- 
 sions at the Conference before Iiis death were 
 as follows : The fields occupied were the Nor- 
 man Isles, Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and 
 the West Indies. The number of missionaries 
 wa.s 23, and of members 5848 ; of whom 498 
 were French, 350 were mulattoes, and 4377 
 were negroes. The same year that witnessed 
 the death of Wesley, witnessed also the death 
 of the first missionary who fell in the service 
 of this society. Robert Cambcll died of putrid 
 fever in the Island of St. Vincent's. Upon 
 Dr. Coke now devolved the management of the 
 Wesleyan missions. To assist him, however, 
 the Conference appointed a committee of 
 finance and advice, consisting of all the minis- 
 ters of the connection resident for the time 
 being in London, and by them all missionaries 
 sent out were to be examined, and all accounts 
 
 to be submitted to their inspection, and corre- 
 spondence to be maintained with them. 'I'hia 
 Conference sent out three more missionaries to 
 the West Indies, and also projected a mission 
 in France, William Mahy being appointed to 
 this latter service the next year. 
 
 In the " Minutes of the Conference " of 1792 
 we first find Africa on the list of the Wesleyan 
 missionary stations. Sierra Leone being the 
 part occupied. 
 
 The Conference of 1793 established a geno 
 ral collection to be made in all their congrega- 
 tions for the support of the missions. During 
 the next five or six years, notwithstanding the 
 commotions throughout their connection on 
 account of some questions of discipline, as well 
 as the disturbed condition of the political 
 world. Dr. Coke and the Conference continued 
 their care of the missions already planted, and 
 gave them what enlargement they could. In 
 the minutes for 1796 we find the names of A. 
 Murdoch and W. Patten set down as mission- 
 aries to the Foulah country in Africa, to which 
 service they were solemnly set apart by the 
 Conference. In 1799 the Rev. G. Whitfield 
 was appointed treasurer for the Foreign Mis- 
 sions ; and Gibraltar was added to the list of 
 stations. In the minute? for that year occurs 
 the following entry : " We in the fullest man- 
 ner take these missions under our own care, 
 and consider Dr. Coke as our agent." The 
 Conference also requested Dr. C. to draw up a 
 statement of the work of God carried on b^ 
 their missions, for circulation, and took addi- 
 tional steps to give greater efficiency to their 
 missionary work. At the next Conference a 
 body of rules was compiled for the regulation 
 of the Foreign Missions ; and authority was 
 given to Dr. Coke to send a missionary to 
 Gibraltar, and another to Madras. In 1804 
 Mr. Hawkshaw was sent to Demerara, in South 
 America. At this time the number of mem- 
 bers in the Foreign Missions was 15,846. The 
 first missionary secretary (Mr. Entwistle) was 
 appointed this year, Dr. Coke being general 
 superintendent, and Mr. Loraas treasurer, each 
 of these officers being amenable to the Mis- 
 sionary Committee, consisting of all the Lon- 
 don preachers ; so that the whole apparatus 
 necessary for the guidance of the missions took 
 form as the necessity arose. 
 
 In 1813 the Conference yielded to Dr. Coke's 
 solicitations for the establishment of a mission 
 in the East. Of the seven missionaries ap- 
 pointed for Asia and South Africa, it was in- 
 tended that three of them should be stationed 
 at Ceyl&n, one at Java, one at the Cape of Good 
 Hope, and the others to be placed where Dr. 
 Coke might think best and as Providence 
 opened the way. The result will be seen in 
 the history of the Ceylon mission. 
 
 The Conference of 1814 strongly recom- 
 mended "the immediate establishment of a 
 Methodist Missionary Society in every district 
 where it had not already been done. They 
 
778 
 
 WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 
 
 dto appointed two secretaries for the Foreign 
 M3»ion<(. in connection with llic General Mis- 
 fliouu: f ! tec in London, and designated 
 rigl-; 1 missionaries, three to Ncw- 
 
 Hmuii"."", . .. o to Demarara, one to Canada, 
 and two to Australia. The missionary income 
 W«B ascertained as having amounted this year 
 to £12,177. ^ , ^ . ^ 
 
 At Dr. Coke's death, there was no sufficient 
 organization to direct the operations of the dif- 
 ferent missions, and to provide the means of 
 their support and extension. And, when all 
 of a sudden they found themselves deprived of 
 bis services, the preachers and people awoke 
 from their supineness and keenly felt the neces- 
 sity of some combined effort to maintain the 
 ground that had been gained. 
 
 In this state of anxious inquiry, the Rev. 
 Geo. Morley, then superintendent of the Leeds 
 circuit, suggested the formation of a missionary 
 society in that town. This was done ; and a 
 new impulse was thus given to the work through- 
 out the connection. Other places, in swift suc- 
 cession, followed the example of Leeds, till 
 the Methodist congregations, from the Land's 
 End to the Tweed, caught the sacred flame. 
 Collectors offered their services in all direc- 
 tions ; the hearts of the people were every- 
 where impressed and opened to the state of the 
 heatlien, and the communication of authentic 
 missionary intelligence ; and money was from 
 year to year poured into the sacred treasury 
 beyond all former precedent. At the same 
 time missionaries have continued willingly to 
 offer themselves even for the most hazardous 
 and difficult stations; and doors of entrance 
 are almost every year opened in the most un- 
 expected quarters. 
 
 The Wesleyan Missionaries, ministers of the 
 connexion, are 454 in number. They are as- 
 sisted by catechists, local preachers, assistants, 
 superintendents of schools, schoolmasters and 
 scnoolmistresses, artizans, &c. ; of whom 698 
 are employed at a moderate salary, and 8,494 
 afford tncir services gratuitously. These mis- 
 sionaries and their assistants are preaching the 
 Gospel, and communicating instruction by 
 schools and otherwise, in 35 different languages : 
 In Europe in the Irish, Welsh, French, Italian, 
 Spanish, German, and Swedish ; in Africa, in 
 the Akra, Yoruba, Grebo, Mandingo, Nama- 
 qua, Kaffi-e, Dutch, Sesuto, and Sechuana ; in 
 Asia, in the Tamil, Portuguese, Singalese, 
 Dutch, Canarese, Sanscrit, Bengalese, Kassia, 
 Teloogoo, and Chinese ; in Australia and Poly- 
 nesia they use the Maori, the Tongan, and the 
 Feejcean; and in America they employ the 
 Spanish, Chippewayan, Mohawk, Ojibwa, Onei- 
 da and Muncey languages. Six or seven of 
 these are used through the medium of inter- 
 preters ; but the rest have all been mastered 
 by the missionaries, and are the medium of in- 
 struction. Many of them have been for the first 
 time reduced to a written form by the mission- 
 aries, who have compiled grammars and dic- 
 
 tionaries ; and into them all the Holv Scrip- 
 tures are translated, and have been placed in 
 the hands of the people. 
 
 In addition to over 1,700 day and Sunday- 
 schools, and several farm and industrial-schools, 
 the Wesleyan Missionary Society sustains a 
 few Normal institutions and some seminaries, 
 where a superior education is imparted. These 
 are situated at Colombo, Jaflna, Auckland, 
 Tonga, Mount Coke, and Westmoreland. — 
 Theological institutions, for training a native 
 ministry, are in very efiBcicut operation at Ton- 
 ga, Sierra Leone, Macarthy's Island, Jaffna, 
 Auckland, Graham's Town, and the Feejee 
 Islands. The number of students last year was 
 about 100. 
 
 The Society's missionary printing establish- 
 ments are doing a noble work. They are lo- 
 cated at Bangalore, (India,) Kaffraria,I)'Urban, 
 Plaatburg and Graham's Town, (Africa,) Jaff- 
 na, (Ceylon,) and the Tonga and Feejee Islands. 
 
 " Th^ Field " in which the Wesleyan mis- 
 sionaries are employed, as already shown, is 
 emphatically " the world." 
 
 Results. — These have already been stated; 
 but they will appear more distinctly in the fol- 
 lowing summary, as given in the report for 
 1853: 
 
 No. of Circuits, 361 
 
 Chapels, 1,099 
 
 Other preaching places, 1,887 
 
 Missionaries and Assistants, . . . 465 
 
 Subordinate paid agents, .... 698 
 
 Do., unpaid, 3,494 
 
 Full and accredited church members, 108,286 
 
 Sabbath-schools, 868 
 
 Sabbath scholars, 54,737 
 
 Day schools, 795 
 
 Day scholars, 42,172 
 
 Attendants on public worship, 362,347 ; of 
 whom 149,802 are Anglo-Saxons, and 212,545 
 are of other races. Of the church members in 
 these missions, 32,070 are British and Irish ; 
 1,815 are German, French, Swiss, and Spanish ; 
 1,711, Asiatic ; 4,046, Australian ; 8,971, Po- 
 lynesian ; 53,831, African and Creole ; and 
 1,980 N. A. Indians. 
 
 But, besides what appears in these statistics, 
 the Wesleyan missions have set off mature and 
 large portions of their work in independent 
 positions, which no longer appear in the re- 
 ports as missions. 
 
 Income. — We present below the income of 
 the society in periods of four years, with the 
 annual average of each : 
 
 From 1814 to 1817 £50,760 average £12,440 
 
 " 1818 " 1821 114,358 " 28,589 
 
 " 1822 « 1825 143,283 " 35,820 
 
 " 1826 " 1829 206,256 <' 51,564 
 
 " 1830 " 1833 216,658 " 54,164 
 
 " 1834 " 1837 316,781 " 63,942 
 
 " 1838 " 1841 384,644 " 96,161 
 
 " 1842 " 1845 422,810 " 105,702 
 
 " 1846 " 1849 442,090 " 110,522 
 
 " 1850 " 1853 424,390 " 106,097 
 
 1864 114,498 
 
 Total in 41 years, £2,836,528 
 
WETTER— WITCHCRAFT. 
 
 779 
 
 This exhibits a regular growth of the mission- 
 ary fund,increasingat every period,from £12,000 
 to £106,000, and from £12,177 in 1814, to 
 £114,498 in 1854.— Jackson's Centenary of 
 Methodism; Aider's Weslei/an Missions; Coke's 
 Life; Minutes of Annual Cmiferences ; Notices 
 and Reports.— IXey. W. Butlkr. 
 
 WETTER : One of the Banda Islands, a 
 group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 WHAMPOA : A city in China, on the 
 Pearl river, 14 miles below Canton, being the 
 anchorage for foreign shipping. (See China.) 
 WILBERFORCE : Town of liberated 
 Africans, in the parish of St. Paul, Sierra 
 Leone, West Africa. Station of the Church 
 Missionary Society. 
 
 WITCHCRAFT: "The practices of 
 witches ; sorcery ; enchantments ; intercourse 
 with the devil ; power more than natural." — 
 Webster. " A supernatural power, which per- 
 sons were formerly supposed to obtain posses- 
 sion of, by entering into a compact with the 
 de\\l."—Buck. " The pretended or supposed 
 possession of supernatural power, in conse- 
 quence of an alleged compact made with the 
 devil ; the object of which was eitlier to pro- 
 cure advantages to the persons thus endowed, 
 or their friends, or to do evil to their enemies. 
 That persons supposed to be possessed of super- 
 natural endowments, in consequence of a com- 
 pact made wilh Satan, or who pretended to 
 such endowments, have existed, is an opinion 
 that has more or less obtained in every age." 
 — Edinburgh Encyclopedia. 
 
 There certainly can be no question of the 
 fact that persons have existed who were sup- 
 posed to possess, or who pretended to possess, 
 such powers. Whether the witchcraft forbid- 
 den in the Bible was real or pretended, is a 
 question on which learned men are not agreed. 
 The writer last quoted, says : " Before the 
 Christian era, and at that time, the arch-enemy 
 of mankind was, undoubtedly, for wise pur- 
 poses, allowed powers, and held a visible inter- 
 course with our species, which have long been 
 denied him." But, whether the witches and 
 wizards denounced in Scripture, were real or 
 pretended, their strict prohibition will appear 
 to have been equally wise and necessary, when 
 we consider what, terrible consequences have 
 always and everywhere followed the delusion. 
 It is important, however, to observe with this 
 writer, that " the modern witch is a consider- 
 ably different personage from any we read of 
 in the Bible." The ancient witches seem to 
 have been somewhat similar to our modern 
 fortune-tellers, for " they made great gain by 
 their divination ;" and we may add, also, like 
 our modern " dairvoyants" and " spiritual me- 
 diums," and the African /rf/sAwen also, instead 
 of the innocent persons whom they accuse of 
 witchcraft. Witchcraft was universally bc^ 
 lieved in Europe till the sixteenth century, and 
 even maintained its ground with tolerable firm- 
 
 ness till the seventeenth. Tlic latest witchcraft 
 phrensy was in New England, in 16(52. when 
 the execution of witches became a calamity 
 more dreadful than the sword or pt^tilence. 
 Ihe following description of the supposed cha- 
 racter of the modern witch is given by the 
 writer, in the Edinburgh Encyclopedia : •• This 
 compact (with the devil) was not reckoned va- 
 lid, until it had been written out with blood 
 taken from the vein of the person who thus 
 resigned his life to the service of Satan. The 
 individual who in this wav became a witch, 
 gave up to him soul and body, and at death ho 
 necessarily went to the regions of horror and 
 despair. The devil, on his side, guaranteed 
 that the persons who thus sold themselves to 
 him, should want for nothing they desired in 
 this world ; that they should be avenged upon 
 their enemies ; that they should have the pri- 
 vilege of inflicting disease on whomsoever they 
 wished; and that, in short, their power of 
 doing evil should be very great, if not unlimit- 
 ed. To accomplish this purpose, a familiar 
 spirit, or gnome was given them by Satan, 
 which was ready to attend them at a call, and 
 was entirely subservient to their will. The 
 witches could assume any shape they chose, 
 and transport themselves through the air with 
 unspeakable rapidity, on a broomstick, or nut- 
 shell, or any such article, for any purpose, par- 
 ticularly to attend meetings of witches, at 
 which the devil himself always presided." 
 
 The reader need not be reminded how un- 
 scriptural and absurd is the idea of the pes- 
 session of such power by any human being ; 
 but it is easy to see how the belief in the ex- 
 ercise of such power by perscns regarded as 
 witches, should produce the terrible effects de- 
 scribed in the witchcraft excitements of the 
 16th century ; or that a similar idea, in the 
 mind of an ignorant and superstitions heathen, 
 should hold him in such terrible bondage as 
 that described by missionaries and tourists. Bat 
 it k a noticeable fact, that the belief in witch- 
 craft has always disappeared with the progre« 
 of civilization, education, and true religion. 
 
 The belief in witchcraft, however, is not con- 
 fined to barbarous tribes. Ilindostnn. which 
 lays some claim to civilization aivl '.■,;,,„ jg 
 overrun by profes.«:ors of those n an- 
 
 tations, called Mantras, and of t ! sci- 
 
 ences generally. The greater part of the crooi 
 accidents in life are attributed to this canae. 
 For the first twelve months, a ITind(X) mother 
 carefully conceals her child, lest the evil cjre 
 should fall upon it. A highly resoectaMe 
 Hindoo landholder at Saugor, named Baboo 
 Bight, refused to sell one of these men a piece 
 of land ; whereupon, the |nan vowed to comuro 
 the Baboo's life away in a year. He fixed 
 himself on a plain near the Baboo's land, and 
 every night kept up his incantations, the fire 
 blazing away in his earthen pot After wmd 
 time, the Baboo became ill, his appetite beiof 
 gone, and he having become restless aod fefor* 
 
780 
 
 WITCnCRAFT— WORLD. 
 
 iflh. He af!bct«(l lo tmit the man's incanta- 
 tions with contempt ; but they were evidently 
 Bppermost in his mind. A low, destructive 
 fijver insinuated itself into his system, and, 
 before the twelve months were ended, he 
 j{^ evidcotly the result of a Buperetitious 
 
 few.' 
 
 The terrible influence of the belief in witch- 
 craft, among the natives of Southern and 
 Western Africa, are thus described by Rev. 
 John licighton Wilson, formerly a missionary 
 of the American Board at Gaboon, now one of 
 the Secretaries of the Prcsbyt<5rian Board ; 
 and the reader will observe how the African 
 idea of the power of witches corresponds with 
 the foregoing description of the opinions, which 
 formerly prevailed in both Old and New Eng- 
 land : 
 
 " This idea, or belief, is of such long stand- 
 ing, of such constant recurrence, and so inti- 
 mately interwoven with all their actions, their 
 projects, their rejisouings, and their specula- 
 tions, that it seems to form an essential part 
 both of their mental and moral constitution. 
 It ascribes to those supposed to possess this 
 mysterious and hateful art, power not only 
 over the health and lives, but over the property 
 and fortunes of all around them. Every event 
 in life, if adverse or calamitous, is ascribed to 
 this malignant agency. Sickness, no matter 
 what its type or how contracted, the loss of 
 property, no matter by what means, or under 
 what circumstances of mismanagement, the 
 disappointment of cherished hopes, however 
 extravagant or unreasonable they may have 
 been ; the loss of friends by death ; are indis- 
 criminately ascribed to some one who is sup- 
 posed to exercise this mysterious power. A 
 death seldom occurs in one of their villages, 
 which is not atoned for by the life of some 
 one else. Other feelings than those of heart- 
 felt sorrow are awakened by the sound of the 
 death drum. It is the voice of the accuser 
 that sends a thrill of concern to every heart. 
 No one is exempt from the suspicion of having 
 caused that death. To fly from the scene of 
 anticipated danger, is a virtual confession of 
 the charge of guilt. Uprightness of character 
 and benevolence of heart afford no shield. The 
 intimacy of friendship and the endearment of 
 kindreil ties, are alike unavailing. Suspicion 
 may fasten upon the son as the cause of his 
 father's death, or upon the mother as the de- 
 stroyer of her own offspring. How the inhabi- 
 tants of Africa can have any repose at all, un- 
 der such a system, is a matter of surprise to all 
 who are familiar with their superstitious creed." 
 — Dccmonologie, by King James VI. ; Baxter's 
 World of Spirits ; Reginold Scot's Discovery of 
 Witclicraft ; Cotton MatJier, Hutchhison, and 
 Hawkins on Witchcraft; Recs' Cyclopedia; 
 Edinburgh Encyclopedia; MoffaVs Southern 
 Africa, and the Journals of Missionaries and 
 Tourists in Africa ; Spry's Modern India. Sec 
 also, Africa West. 
 
 WORLI> : We have furnished ample means 
 in this volume for ascertaining the religious 
 condition of the world. We give the follow- 
 ing general survey, which presents an approxi- 
 mation to the world's population, and the pro- 
 portion of different religions, and an enumera- 
 tion of Protestant missionaries and their con- 
 verts, as near as it can be obtained from mis- 
 sionary reports. 
 
 POPULATION. 
 
 Asia, including Pacific Isles (see Asia) . . . 762,806,493 
 
 Africa (Encydrypidia BrUannica) 100,000,000 
 
 Europe (see Europe) 262,300,000 
 
 America (Encyclopedia Britannica) 52,800,000 
 
 1,167,906,493 
 
 All attempts, however, to ascertain the pop- 
 ulation of the globe, are based to a great ex- 
 tent upon conjecture, as comparatively a small 
 portion of it has been determined by actual 
 census. Balbi makes the total population of 
 the earth 736,700,000 ; but, according to later 
 opinions, based on better acquaintance with 
 China, he underrates that kingdom about 200 
 millions. It is probable, however, as we inti- 
 mated in the article on Asia, that the above 
 estimate of that continent is too high ; and, 
 comparing all the estimates we have seen, we 
 are inclined to regard that which puts the pop- 
 ulation of the globe, in round numbers, at one 
 thousand millions, as probably near the truth. 
 The following estimate, with reference to reli- 
 gious profession, has been based upon that 
 number : 
 
 Christiana .... 200,000,000 
 
 Jews 14,000,000 
 
 Mohammedans 140,000,000 
 
 Heathen Idolaters 646,000,000 
 
 1,000,000,000 
 
 The following table will show something of 
 what has been done during the last half cen- 
 tury, for tbe evangelization of this vast multi- 
 tude : 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 § 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 .2 
 
 h 
 
 
 COUNTRIES. 
 
 .2 
 
 'Sx 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 II 
 
 Nomin 
 from 
 
 
 Asia 
 
 577 
 613 
 150 
 
 28.372 
 27,241 
 49.729 
 
 84,168 
 31.547 
 45.186 
 
 122,000 
 50.000 
 200,000 
 
 
 Africa . ... 
 
 
 Pacific Islands 
 
 
 West Indies 
 
 256 
 
 92,494 
 
 25.513 
 
 1,200,000 
 
 
 North America.. 
 
 177 
 
 13,653 
 
 4,331 
 
 
 
 Totals 
 
 1,673 
 
 211,389 
 
 190,745 
 
 1,572,000 
 
 
 This statement, though far from being com- 
 plete, exhibits a band of over 1,C00 mission- 
 aries, the results of whoso labors show over 
 200,000 members of mission churches, with 
 nearly the same number of scholars in Chris- 
 
 1 
 
Zi^ Ot THE 
 
 lOBITBRSITT] 
 
WUDALEY-YORUBA. 
 tian schools, and a nominally Christian 
 
 781 
 
 lation of not less than a million and a half, all 
 redeemed from heathenism in half a century. 
 But this gives but a very imperfect view of 
 the work accomplished. The foundations have 
 been laid deep and broad, for a rapid advance- 
 ment in the next 50 years. These mission- 
 aries are scattered throughout the world. 
 They have established Christian institutions ; 
 reduced barbarous languages to writing ; es- 
 tablished printing-presses ; and translated and 
 printed the Scriptures in almost every language 
 under heaven. Idolatry, Islamism, Romanism, 
 and every false religion, are trembling to their 
 foundations. And, whoever lives to the end of 
 this century, will see the wonderful works of 
 God in the earth. 
 
 WUDALEr : Forty miles north of Ah- 
 mednuggur, in Hindostan,— became a station 
 of the American Board in 1845. 
 
 WUPPERTHAL : A station and a mis- 
 sion colony of the Rhenish Missionary Society, 
 in South Africa, near Clanwilliam. 
 
 ^ YAVILLE : A Karen village in the pro- 
 vince of Tavoy, Burmah; an out-station of 
 the Tavoy Mission of the American Baptist 
 Union. 
 
 YORUBA, or YARRIBA : The Yoruba 
 country is situated some distance inland from 
 the Bight of Benin, between Dohomey on the 
 west, and the River Niger, or Quorra, on the 
 east and north-east, extending far into the 
 interior. This territory once formed one of 
 the most powerful kingdoms in Western 
 Africa, composed of a large number of pro- 
 vinces, having their separate governments, 
 and owning a sort of allegiance to one king. 
 But, about the year 1817 or 1818, a civil war 
 broke out, originating in a quarrel in the 
 market, between persons of different tribes, 
 about a cowrie's worth of pepper, in conse- 
 quence of which man rose against man, town 
 against town, tribe against tribe, the slave- 
 trade helping it on ; till, in a little more than 
 30 years, the country which travelers descrilv 
 ed as everywhere richly and carefully culti- 
 vated, was turned into a barren wilderness, 
 and the people, previously agricultural and 
 trading, mild in their manners, and hospita- 
 ble to traders, became brutal and ferocious, 
 from constant war, revengeful, thirsting for 
 blood, and ready to barter their fellow-men for 
 gold. From the broken fragments of 145 
 towns of this kingdom, chiefly of the Figba 
 province, destroyed about 1825, has arisen the 
 city of Abbeokuta, the location of the Yoruba 
 mission of the Church Missionary Society. 
 This city is situated on the bank of the river 
 Ogun, in latitude 7° 8', about GO miles from 
 Lagos. It stands in the midst of an immense 
 
 Elain, on the two highest of several detached 
 ills, which ascend gradually on the N. E., and 
 terminate in a bold and perpendicular bluff on 
 the N. and S. W., being surmounted by masses 
 of smooth gray granite. On the sloping sides, 
 
 and around the bases of these two hills, en- 
 closed within a wall and ditch of about 15 milea 
 m length, are the dwellings of 100,000 inhabit- 
 ants. The fugitives from tlie Gesolated vil- 
 lages fled to this spot, then a wilderness, making 
 the great rock Olumo their resting-place, tiU 
 at length the forests were cleared away, the 
 town arose ; and in 1829, they were joined by 
 Sodeke, a man of great parts,' who was choeen 
 their ruler. The town was called Abbeokuta, 
 from " Abbe," under, and " Okuta," a rock, 
 from its situation. But the people of the vari- 
 ous towns united at Abbeokuta, still have each 
 their governor, their judge, their captains of 
 various grades, and their court-house, ft)rming a 
 sort of federal government. But since the 
 death of Sodeke, they have had no general 
 ruler. 
 
 Every town in the Yoruba country has ita 
 market, where trade is carried on in the vari- 
 ous productions of the country. The people 
 are chiefly agricultural, and they cultivate 
 their fields with care and neatness. But they 
 have made considerable advances in the useful 
 arts, having their blacksmiths, tanners and 
 curriers, saddlers, shoemakers, rope-makers, pot- 
 ters, carpenters, architects, tailors, &c. 
 
 Religion. — The religion of the Yorubans is 
 a Polytheism, and they believe largely in de- 
 monology and witchcraft, divination, charms, 
 &c. They have no correct idea of the one 
 true God, but seek to fill up the void in their 
 minds by creations of the imagination. Dei- 
 ties, endless in variety, are conjured up, each 
 having his own peculiar sphere of action. 
 Thus they have gods of thunder, lightning, 
 air, earth, rocks, trees, water, rivers, brooks, 
 animals, &c. Tlie chief of these are, Sau- 
 go, the god of thunder, raised up by their 
 fears, and Ifa, the god of divination, the fruit 
 of their hopes. The worship of the former 
 begins on Thursday night, and is kept up till 
 Fridaj' morning, with noise, drumming, and 
 licentious dances. 
 
 Ifa, the god of divination, is consulted on 
 every undertaking. Palm'nuts are offered, by 
 means of which the oracle is consulted, by a 
 sort of lot. If the response is unfavorable, a 
 sacrifice must be made ; which put.« it in the 
 power of the priest to impose burdens on the 
 
 feople. If, for instance, a house is to be built, 
 fa must be consulted ; then the demon of the 
 ground must be propitiated : then fetishes or 
 charms must be brought, to keep away evil 
 spirits ; and thus the whole sj-stem becomes 
 burdensome and oppressive. 
 
 Ifa, the country of Rakanda, bordering ou 
 the Nile, said to be the birth-place or the 
 prophet Obbalofun, is the heatl quarters of 
 their religion. To this prophet, human sacri- 
 fices were offered on going to war. Such an 
 offering was made at Abbeoktita, but a few 
 years ago, and the practice still exitts In othw 
 towns, though there it is done away throagli 
 the influence of Christianity, Commodore 
 
789 
 
 YORUBA— ZULUS. 
 
 F^irbci hvring, in 1851, iodnoed the chicfe to 
 dgB A tictty for ever abolnhiog hnman eacri- 
 
 Bat. of ftll their saperrtitioiM, the Oro, (or 
 M it « called br diflerent tribes, the Egugun, 
 Egm, or MwrnbthJumbo,) exercises the meet 
 powcrAU ioflneooe npon the people. Although 
 the Torabaos have no distinct ideas of a lu- 
 tnre state, jet they appear to believe in the 
 iBUBortality of the sool. It is their universal 
 practice to pray to the spirits of their deceased 
 Mben. The Lgun is the supposed spirit of a 
 dead Bian, representing different parties de- 
 ceased, and called up for different purposes. 
 The part is acted by a man in masquerade, 
 clad in the most grotesque manner. The 
 spirit is supposed to dwell in a sacred grove, 
 called Igballo, in which there is a priest ; and 
 whoever wishes to raise the spirit, goes into 
 this grove, and after various mummeries and 
 incaDtations, the £gun makes his appear- 
 
 The system of Oro is intimately connected 
 irith the government as well as religion. It is 
 a secret society, bound together by solemn 
 oaths, into which no woman is allowed to 
 enter ; and if she witnesses its mysteries, either 
 by accident or design, she is instantly put to 
 death. By this means the women are kept in 
 sabjection. When Egun passes through the 
 streets, or Oro takes possession of the town, 
 the women run to the most obscure places, and 
 hide their faces till it has passed. Through 
 the influence of Oro, also, the whole machinery 
 of the government is carried on, and in its 
 name laws are passed, and their penalties exe- 
 cuted ; and in the latter case, the Oro is said 
 to have taken the culprit and eaten him up, 
 and no questions are asked. Mr. Hinderen 
 describes an execntion of this kind, the of- 
 fends being one of the wives of the king of 
 Ibadan, in which about 100 of these Eguns, ] 
 after dancing around the chiefs house, playing 
 with the woman's head, boiled it, and mixed 
 portions of it with their supper, and then car- 
 ried the polished slfuU about town sevotd days, 
 the whole ceremony lasting a week. 
 
 Population. — It would b^ impossible to as- 
 certain the numbers of the Yoruba people ; but 
 there yet remain many large and populous 
 towns, which have escaped tl^ general devas- 
 tation. The Church Missionary Society, in 
 their report for 1852, enumerate four towns, 
 within two or three days of Abbeokuta, with 
 an aggregate of 200,000 inhabitants, and to 
 the eastward, the territory of the Ijebus, con- 
 taining 160,000; and beyond these, many 
 more, to all of which the door is open for the 
 entrance of the Gospel, which we may hope is 
 destined, at no distant day, to put an end to 
 these dark and cruel superstitions. All these 
 tribes speak the same language, which will fa- 
 cilitate missionary operations. Many of them 
 have embraced ^lohammedanism, which shows 
 that they are not strongly entrenched in their 
 
 superstitions. For an account of tie Yoruba 
 missions, see Africa Western. 
 
 Z0HARITP:S : A sect of the Jews, who 
 reject the Talmud and the authority of the 
 rabbies, and follow the book Zohar. They arc 
 sprung from one Shabbathai Levi, who in the 
 middle of the 17th century appeared in Smyr- 
 na, as the Messiah. In Germany and Poland 
 they are called Hasidim or " pietists." In Tur- 
 key they go by the name of Dunmdis or " con- 
 verts," because they make an outward profes- 
 sion of Islamism, though they secretly cherish 
 the Jewish faith, and practice Jewish rites. 
 These latter are most numerous in Thessalonica, 
 where the missionaries of the A. B. C. F. M. 
 have their attention directed to them, and hope 
 that their conversion may be the door to that of 
 the Mussulmans. Their doctrines, founded upon 
 the Kabbala and the book Zohar, are mystical 
 and somewhat allied to Gnosticism. They pro* 
 fess faith in the Trinity, and soine of them ac- 
 knowledge Jesus of Nazareth as the Messiah, 
 in a sense. — Rev. E. M. Dodd. 
 
 ZULUS : A tribe in South Africa, inhabitr 
 ing an extensive territory in the vicinity of 
 Port Natal. The country of the Zulus is pre- 
 eminent for the beauty of its landscapes, the 
 fertility of its soil, and the healthiness of its 
 climate. The mountains, not large, are rather 
 tabular than conical in shape ; and when view- 
 ed from the sea, they rise, table above table, as 
 they recede in the distance, having the summit 
 and the sides, with the intervening plains, 
 covered with verdant groves, or thick shrub- 
 bery, or large fields of green grass. The whole 
 picture is diversified, with here and there a 
 river, or a dark and deep ravine, with fields of 
 Indian corn, or gardens of indigenous grain 
 and fruit 
 
 Climate. — ^The climate is one of the most 
 salubrious and agreeable in the world. In the 
 summer it is of course warm. In the winter 
 it is occasionally cool enough to make a fire 
 agreeable. But for the most of the year the 
 climate is such that one could hardly wish it 
 otherwise. 
 
 The People.— Id 1847, the natives within the 
 colony were estimated at- from 80,000 to 
 100,000, and they were continually increasing. 
 ITie whole number of the tribe is not known, 
 but it must be very large. 
 
 Physical Appearance. — ^The corporeal and 
 phrenological appearance of the natives is, in 
 many respects, highly interesting. The de- 
 graded condition and the employments of the 
 women are, indeed, unfavorable to their reach- 
 ing and preserving a proper stature and form. 
 Still, many of these, as well as the men, are 
 very regular in their features, symmetrical in 
 form, of a full chest and commanding stature. 
 The men stand, walk or run very erect, and 
 they have for the most part a high fojehead, 
 and an intelligent and expressive couhtenance. 
 A few feathers upon the head ; a profusion of 
 beads upon the neck and arms, and sometimes 
 
ZULUS-APPENDIX. 
 
 783 
 
 upon other parts of the body ; a small piece of 
 the skin of some animal about the loins ; and, 
 perhaps, a brass rin^ upon the wrist and a strap 
 covered with hair about the ankles, constitute 
 as much wearing apparel as most of the na- 
 lives are in the habit of using. 
 
 Du-ellmgs.—Theh houses are simple, small 
 and rude; hemispherical in shape, having a 
 diameter at the base of some eight or ten feet ; 
 being in height, at the centre and apex, only 
 four or five feet ; having but one aperture, and 
 that at the base, about two feet high, and made 
 to answer for doors, windows and chimney. 
 
 Langvxige.~The language of the Zulus ap- 
 pears to be very simple, and yet highly philo- 
 sophical in its structure ; and, with the excep- 
 tion of a few clicks, mellifluent and euphonic. 
 Moral Character. — Polygamy is practiced 
 here to a very great extent. The principal re- 
 straint upon it seems to be the number of cat^ 
 tie that a man can acquire to purchase his 
 wives. The marriageable daughter is counted 
 by the father as so many cattle, and disposed 
 of, not on the principle of affection or prefer- 
 ence, but to the highest bidder. From this 
 system come many evils ; so that an utter dis- 
 regard of all the principles of true fidelity 
 among those who are married, and of virtue 
 among those who are not, is as frequent as 
 it is surprising and sinful. It is one of the 
 chief obstacles against which the Gospel has 
 to contend. Lying and deception are as com- 
 mon as the truth. Cases of stealing from each 
 other are frequent. Murder is occasionally 
 committed, and creates but little excitement. 
 Dancing and singing impure songs are univer- 
 sal. Drinking intoxicating beer, taking snuflT, 
 and filthy conversation, are daily indulged by 
 all. Almost every thing relating to their man- 
 ner of life is very filthy, and tends to debase 
 and degrade. 
 
 Redeeming Qualities — Desire of Improvement. 
 — ^They are a brave and spirited, though not 
 a revengeful people. None of their number 
 have ever been kidnapped and reduced to sla- 
 very. Perhaps no nation in South Africa has 
 ever exhibited so much skill in military affairs, 
 and so much desire to rule as Chaka and Drn- 
 gaan and their people ; and the natives around 
 Port Natal are their immediate descendants. 
 
 They are a social people, fond of company 
 and conversation. When a woman begins to 
 harvest, she calls all her neighbors to help her. 
 In many things they exhibit skill, particu- 
 larly in making baskets and mats, shields and 
 spears. And, with a little instruction, they 
 will turn their hands to a variety of useful em- 
 ployments, to which they are unaccustomed. 
 They are an industrious people. It is not an 
 uncommon thing for a single wife to raise for 
 her husband some 50 or 60 bushels of corn in 
 a year. — Missionary Herald for 1847, pp. 399 
 to 403 ; Annual Report A. B. C. F. M. 1846, 
 p. 87, and 1850, p. 93. For Mission, see 
 South Africa. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Results of Md!sio.vaky Labor among thk In- 
 dians—Letter FROM Rev. Mb. Byington. 
 Stockbridge, CnocTAW Nation, ) 
 June 20, 1854. f 
 
 My Dear Brother — You say i" '•— - ' 'tcr 
 of Jan. 1 : " I should like to rec ,a 
 
 a letter conveying your imprcssio- ^re- 
 
 sent state and future prospects of the mission- 
 ary work among the Indians." I must confine 
 myself principally to the Choctaws, to whom 
 I was sent by the American Board in Septem- 
 ber, 1820. My impressions arc f ' ' in 
 regard to our missionary work, if 
 
 laborers of suitable qualification^ ...„^,, iLie 
 field. The blessing of God, I have hoped, 
 would attend our exertions here. I should 
 prefer to give you a few leading facts, rather 
 than to -offer bare opinions. The character of 
 the facts I wish to present will show you the 
 state of this nation (1) when existing without 
 the Gospel; (2) after having come to its 
 knowledge. I wish to put honor on the Gofr 
 pel of our Saviour, whenever it can properly 
 be done. 
 
 I. The state of this nation ieithovt the Gospd. 
 — This embraces the whole period of their ex- 
 istence, so far as we know, till within the mem- 
 ory of many now living. (1) They were with- 
 out God, and had no forms of religious wor- 
 ship, with reference to the true God, or any 
 false God. They were ignorant of the God of 
 the Bible. We had no false system of rclitrion 
 to oppose. (2) They had various supers! :• 
 
 as a belief in witches, conjurors, rain-n; 
 
 " doctors," ghosts, fairies, and the like. '1 bey 
 had a belief, to some extent, in an evil spirit 
 or being, and a good one. But all this was dim 
 indeed. (3) The value and immortality of the 
 soul were new subjects to them. Many said, 
 " When I die that is the end of me." How 
 true it is, that God only can instruct us about 
 himself as a Spirit, and about ourselves. (4) 
 The nation were ignorant of many things use- 
 ful to them in this life. How could it be 
 otherwise ? A little tribe, hemmed in at home, 
 for ages, through fear of hostile neighbors ; so 
 much so, that we find but few words in their 
 language borrowed from other tribes. They 
 had no books, no history, no science, no lawg, 
 nothing in writing. A few traditions existed 
 among them. Put your soul in Just their po> 
 sition, and what would it be ? Put your body 
 there also. (5) They had many wrong OMigei, 
 such as that women must perform all the bard 
 labor, that polygamy was right, that childrsB 
 could inherit nothing from their father or mo* 
 ther, that it was a disgrace for a warrior to 
 labor in the field, and right to destroy tiidr 
 own infants. (6) They were not only a natioB 
 of idle warriors, but of drunkards. Only one 
 man was named to the early miflBicniary who 
 would not get drunk. Men gloried in being 
 drunk as a proof of manhood. (7) They 
 
T84 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 poor indeed, at their homes, in all reBpocte. 
 ItwM rare to see a man who wore shoes, pan- 
 taloons, or a hat. It was rare to see a house 
 with a bed, table, or chairs, or to find at any 
 place good farmuig or mechanic tools, a good 
 CoQse or farm. Formerly there were no fences. 
 (8) They had no literature, but a branding-iron 
 for calves and colts, and pieces of cane slit up 
 and tietl in bundles, used in calling assemblies. 
 Each piece numbered a sleep. One was to be 
 drawn out and thrown awav on each morning, 
 till there was but one, which marked the day 
 of meeting. The chiefs could do nothing more 
 in calling councils. They had songs at dances, 
 and for the sick. However, the words which 
 were sung were few. (9) The murderer was 
 executed without a trial. He and his friends 
 looked for none. He made no attempt to es- 
 cape. He would not disgrace himself or fam- 
 ily by being a coward on such an occasion. 
 He dressed and adorned himself, painting his 
 face and breast, singing, dancing, and whoop- 
 ing, to show his bravery, and would point to 
 the place where the ball should enter his heart. 
 He was not sorry he had killed a man. Nor 
 were the warriors of his family sorry, if he 
 only died like a brave. His grave was dug, 
 and he lay down in it to see if it would J5t his 
 body. (10) They were exposed to diseases, 
 such as the measles and small pox, and knew 
 not how to treat them. They were wasting 
 away. Many were killed as witches, being 
 accused of causing death by their arts. (11) 
 They had no regular form of government, no 
 written constitution or laws. The chief's brave 
 called councils, which often proved to be times 
 and places of great drunkenness. 
 
 I will stop here, and ask from what region, 
 above or below, is any ray of light seen beam- 
 ing on these benighted men ? It is not neces- 
 sary to say there was then no Sabbath, no 
 church, no Christian school, and no followers 
 of the Saviour, among all the Choctaws at 
 that time. One colored man, a native of Af- 
 rica, who professed to be a disciple of the Lord, 
 was found after a while by the missionaries. 
 Now, here is one of the bays in the great Dead 
 Sea which sin has formed on efcrth. We en- 
 tered it wii;h the Bible. I must now speak of 
 the nation in its state, 
 
 II. After having come to a knowledge of the 
 Bible. — ^These evils have been gradually pass- 
 ing away, not entirely ; many still remain, and 
 there is much for us to do, that we may bear 
 onward, to a better consummation, the bless- 
 ings already received, as well as gain those 
 which are still promised. The improvements 
 made are, (1) The nation now knows the only 
 living and true God. He is acknowledged in 
 various ways, in their General Council, in their 
 courts, as well as in schools, families and 
 churches, and in regard to his Sabbath. (2) 
 Their cruel and base superstitions are passing 
 away. They have formed laws on these sub- 
 jects. (3) The soul of man, its worth, its na- 
 
 ture, are now widely known. (4) Knowledge 
 has greatly increased, through the schools, 
 books, newspapers, the post-office, and the 
 direct instructions of the different missionaries 
 and other agencies. (5) The warriors have 
 gone to work. They clear land and fence it, 
 and cultivate the same with horses and oxen. 
 This is a new era for the women, who stilL 
 help in the field and in other places. It is nowj 
 a disgrace to lead an indolent life. Marriage 
 between one man and one woman is regulated 
 by law. The descent of property is secured to 
 children. Infanticide is punished. (6) The 
 nation, as you know, have lived under the pro- i 
 visions of what is called the " Maine law ' for / 
 about 30 years. (7) The comforts of life have ' 
 increased a hundred fold, in food and raiment, 
 house and home. A legal fence must be ten 
 rails high. (8) They have a large number of 
 books in their own tongue, and many men and 
 women can read and write well in the English 
 language. They have educated chiefs, judges, 
 and ministers of the Gospel. (9) For murder 
 and other crimes there are special legal enact- 
 ments. Trial by jury is the right of such per- 
 sons. (10) They also have acquired much 
 knowledge about diseases and their most hope- 
 ful and approved remedies, and such as are 
 known to Americans. " Indian " doctoring 
 was no better than Indian farming, when they 
 planted corn without a fence, and without re- 
 garding " rows." (11) They have a regular 
 written constitution, and a national legislative 
 body which enacts laws. There is a judiciary 
 and an executive body. They have large pro- 
 visions for the education of their sons and 
 daughters, as the reports in the Missionary 
 Rooms will abundantly show. We have now 
 nine ministers in our Indian Presbytery, and 
 13 churches under its care. The members 
 amount to 1,275, and the contributions from 
 these churches, as reported at the last meeting 
 of Presbytery, amounted during a period of 
 about 20 months, to $2,431. The Methodist, 
 the Baptist, and the Cumberland Presbyterian 
 brethren all have churches in this nation, and 
 are all doing good in their various fields of 
 labor. You must make your own inferences 
 from these facts, of what the blessed Gospel 
 may be hoped to accomplish, even when preach- 
 ed by very imperfect men to "Indians." — 
 Enough is said to show what a people we found 
 when we brought the Gospel here, and what is 
 the nature of its influence on the red man's 
 heart and life. These facts I deem worthy of 
 record, that the infidel may be silent till he can 
 exhibit an example of greater and better suc- 
 cess, through other books in which he believes, 
 that political men may not attempt to legislate 
 the Indian from the earth, because he will not 
 become wise, and that the Church may go on 
 in this blessed work, till it is finished on earth, 
 and the fruits gathered in heaven. 
 Ever yours, 
 
 Cyrus Byingtov 
 
IIDEX 
 
 OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS 
 
 ABBEOKUTA, . 
 
 Abenaijuig, 
 
 AB7SSINIA, , . . ' 
 
 Inhabitants of . . 
 
 Language, 
 Government, . 
 Religion, 
 
 Conversion to Christianity, . 
 Papal Missions, 
 Mission of the Church Missionary Society, 
 Afareaitu, 
 AFRICA, 
 Map, .... 
 Geographical description, . 
 Progress of discovery. 
 Rivers, 
 
 Climate, People, Copts, 
 Nubians, Moors, Negroes, Foulahs, 
 Languages, Government, Industry, 
 Commerce, Slave Trade, 
 Religion, 
 
 MrssioNs, with tabular view, 
 AFRICA, EASTERN, . 
 Geographical Description, , 
 Mission — Church Hiss. Society, 
 AFRICA, SOUTHERN, . 
 Boundaries, Topography, 
 The Great Lake, 
 Climate, Native Population, . 
 Map, .... 
 Missions — Moravian, 
 
 Tabular View of Stations, . 
 Xondon Minsionary Society, 
 Tabular View of Stations, , 
 Wesleyan Jliasiojiary Society, 
 
 Tabular View of Stations, 
 Gospel Propagation Society, 
 Scotch Missions, 
 Glasgow African Society, . 
 French Protestant Missions, 
 Tabular View of Stations, . 
 American Board, 
 
 Tabular View of Stations, . 
 Bhenish Missionary Society, 
 Tabular View of Stations, . 
 Berlin Missionary Society, 
 General Tabular View, 
 AFRICA, WESTERN, . 
 Boundaries, Grand Divisions, 
 Physical Aspect, Rivers, 
 Map, .... 
 Climate, Inhabitants, Government 
 Social and Moral Condition, 
 Religious Belief, Superstitions, 
 Fetishism and Devil-worship. 
 Traditions, Funerals, 
 Missions, 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 
 Reverses for want of laborers. 
 Evils of connection with government. 
 Sierra Leone a nursery of missionaries 
 Education, Native Agency, 
 Translations, 
 
 Character and Ability of Natives 
 Calls for Instruction, 
 Missionary Tours, . 
 General Improvement, 
 Work of Grace, 
 Character of Converts, 
 Church Discipline, . 
 Remaining Superstitions, . 
 Desire for the Word of God, 
 Mlaiionary Spirit, . 
 
 60 
 
 7 
 
 7,622 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 8-9 
 
 10 
 11 
 11 
 11 
 11 
 11 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 16 
 16 
 16 
 17 
 17 
 
 17-18 
 18 
 20 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 22 
 22 
 27 
 27 
 86 
 86 
 
 48-44 
 45 
 45 
 47 
 47 
 49 
 60 
 54 
 55 
 67 
 57 
 68 
 63 
 58 
 68 
 63 
 59 
 09 
 60 
 60 
 64 
 &4 
 65 
 67 
 67 
 ft3 
 68 
 69 
 69 
 69 
 69 
 70 
 70 
 70 
 71 
 71 
 71 
 71 
 
 Timneh Mission, . 
 Yoruba Mission, . 
 Present State of the Missions 
 Tabular View, 
 English Baptist Mi»». Soc', 
 Wesleyan Miss. Soc, 
 I. Sierra Leone, . 
 II. Gambia District, 
 III. Cape Coast District, . 
 Tabular View, 
 
 Visit of Mr. Freeman to As'hantee, 
 American Baptist Missionary Union, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 Atnerican PresbyteHan JOMioru, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 American Board, . 
 United Pres. Synod of Scotland, 
 American Episcopal Mission, 
 Map of Cape Palmas, 
 Tabular View, 
 Metkodiit Episcopal Mission, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 Southern Bupti«t Convention, 
 Amer. MiM. Asso. Mendi Mission 
 
 Map of Mendi and Sherbro, 
 Basle Missionary Society, . 
 General Tabular View, 
 Ahmednuggur, , 
 Aintab, .... 
 Ak-Hissar, 
 
 Akra 
 
 Akroful, .... 
 Akropong, 
 
 Akyab, .... 
 Albany, .... 
 Alderville, 
 
 Aleppo, .... 
 Allahabad, . 
 
 Arobnla, .... 
 Amboyna, 
 America, 
 
 AMERICAN BOARD OP COM. FOR FOR. 
 Origin, history, Ac, . 
 Organization, mode of operation, Ac 
 Annual and aggregate receipts, 
 Financial embarrassments, . 
 
 MiSSIO.NS, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 AMERICAN BAITIST MISSIONARY UNION*. 
 
 Number of Missionarieii, missions, and sUUods, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 
 Receipts, 
 American and Foreign Christian Union, 
 American Missionary Association, 
 Amherst, 
 
 Amoy, .... 
 Aneltcum, 
 Annaroaboe, 
 Antigua, 
 Arabkir, 
 
 Arcot, .... 
 ARMENIANS, . 
 
 Armenia, boundariea and exteot. 
 
 History, 
 
 Map of Armenia and part of Asia Minor, 
 
 The Armenian Church, . . 
 
 Language and Literature, . 
 
 Population, . . . • 
 
 Character, . . • • 
 
 MinMion of M« Am«rieam Board, 
 Map of Constantinople aod YIeialtj, 
 Beginning of success, 
 Opposition, 
 
 101 
 
 11188.. 
 
 tAom 
 
 T) 
 
 n 
 
 74 
 74 
 74 
 75 
 75 
 73 
 80 
 84 
 8S 
 8< 
 
 n 
 
 9S 
 90 
 96 
 9T 
 98 
 96 
 108 
 lOt 
 108 
 104 
 104 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 108 
 110 
 111 
 111 
 113 
 119 
 118 
 114 
 114 
 118 
 IIT 
 117 
 ill 
 118 
 118 
 118 
 118 
 118 
 118 
 116 
 118 
 119 
 119 
 191 
 198 
 
 m 
 
 184 
 
 196 
 196 
 
 196 
 
786 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 . 180 
 
 . 180 
 
 . 181 
 
 . 181 
 
 . 181 
 
 . 182 
 
 . 182 
 
 . 183 
 
 . 133 
 
 . 183 
 
 . 183 
 
 . 184 
 
 . 185 
 
 . 185 
 
 . 187 
 
 . 187 
 
 . 187 
 
 . 18T 
 
 . 188 
 
 . 188 
 
 . 189 
 
 . 140 
 
 . 140 
 
 . 141 
 
 . 141 
 
 '. 142 
 
 , 143 
 
 , 146 
 
 , 146 
 
 ■■ of Annenlan prictU, . 186 
 
 _j of mlMloo preu from Malta to Smyrna, 125 
 
 Pint Monthly Concert in Torklih Language, . 126 
 OwUnnod raoeoM, ^^Hol 
 
 »Mrw of tht banker*, . •. •, ,' ^^^ 
 
 Brcaklof up of mluion high school and found- 
 
 lof of ScaUri College . 
 (hrtrthrow of the bankers' power, 
 ParMontioa begun by the patriarch, 
 The per«e«atora rebuked, . 
 Death of the Sultan, 
 
 Fire at Pera, .... 
 
 The truth apreadiog, 
 Day of fasting aod prayer, 
 Greek and Armenian patriarchs deposed, 
 Return of Sahakyan from banishment, . 
 Increase of inquirers, 
 Openini; of Seminary at Bcbek, . 
 Indications of a thorough reformation, . 
 Quarrel between the bankers and tradesmen, 
 Bemoval of the patriarch St e pan, 
 Special presence of the Holy Spirit, 
 Interference of Mr. Soutbgate, . 
 Progress of the work in the interior, 
 New impulse at Nicomedla, 
 Visit of Drs. Anderson and Hawes, 
 Appointment of Matteos patriarch, 
 Persecution rigorously renewed, . 
 Death of Mrs. Van Lennep, 
 Map of Aintab and Vicinity, 
 Burial refused to Protestants, 
 Kccleslastical position of the converts, . 
 The conrerts anathematized and excommuni 
 
 eated, 
 
 Other violent measures, .... 
 Interference of Sir Stratford Canning, . 
 Orders of the Sultan in favor of the Protestants 
 Attempts to break up the Bebek Seminary, . 146 
 Organization of the evangelical Armenian 
 
 Church, : 147 
 
 Ordination of a pastor, .... 147 
 Other churches formed, . . . .147 
 
 Anomalous position of the Protestants, . . 149 
 
 Second Protestant funeral, . . .149 
 
 Death of Pastor Khachadiiryan, . 150 
 
 Successor ordained, . . . .150 
 
 Two pupils licensed to preach, . . .150 
 
 Friendship of Lord Cowley, . .151 
 
 Ordination of Pastor at Adabazar, , • 151 
 
 Tabular View of stations, . . . .152 
 
 Great fire in Constantinople, . . .153 
 
 Failure of the patriarch's plans for the overthrow 
 
 of Protestant, and his removal from office, . 153 
 
 Present State of the Mission, . . .153 
 
 Amount of printing done by the Mission, . 154 
 
 Arracan, . .154 
 
 Ascension Island, . , .154 
 
 ASHANTEE 154 
 
 Extent of the kingdom, . . ,154 
 
 Domestic Slavery, Polygamy, . ,155 
 
 Koads, Uouses, Arts, Trade, Religion, . . 155 
 
 ASIA, 156 
 
 Geographical description, . , . .156 
 
 Races of People, . . .157 
 
 Religion, , . .158 
 
 Population, ..... 158 
 
 Tabular View of Missions, . . . .159 
 
 ASSAM, . . , ' . . . .160 
 
 Mission of the Am. Bap. Union, . . .160 
 
 Tabular View, . . .163 
 
 Athens, 163 
 
 Auckland, ...... 163 
 
 Austral Islands, ] \ 163 
 
 Australasia, 168 
 
 Australia, 164 
 
 Boundaries and Extent, . .164 
 
 Inhabitants, .... 164 
 
 MtssiOBS, [164 
 
 United Brethren, .... 164 
 
 WeeUyan MUa. Society , . .164 
 
 Tabular View, 16S 
 
 .>'*P. 164 
 
 Avj, 169 
 
 ?»dagry, 169 
 
 Baddagao 
 Bagdad, , 
 
 Bagdad 
 
 BAPTIST MISS. SOCIETY (Enrilsh). 
 
 Keceipts, . 
 
 Tabular View of Missions, 
 taale Miasicnary Society, 
 
 Bath, 171 
 
 Bassein, . . . . . . .171 
 
 Bassa Cove, . . . . . .172 
 
 Batavia 172 
 
 Bathurst, . . . . . .173 
 
 Batticaloa 172 
 
 Batticotta, 172 
 
 Beaufort, . . . . . .172 
 
 Beersheba, ...... 172 
 
 Belgaum, ...... 172 
 
 Belire 172 
 
 Bellary, 172 
 
 Benares, ...... 172 
 
 Berbico, . . . . . .172 
 
 Berea, ....... 172 
 
 Berhampore, ...... 172 
 
 Berlin Missionarfflociety, .... 172 
 
 Berlin Missionary Union for China, . . .172 
 
 Bermudas, . . . . . .172 
 
 Bethany, . . . . . .172 
 
 Bethabara, . . . . . .172 
 
 Bethel, 178 
 
 Bethftlsdorp, 173 
 
 Bethesda, 173 
 
 Bethulla, 173 
 
 Bettigherry, 173 
 
 Beulah, . . . . . . .173 
 
 Bexley, 173 
 
 Beirut, 178 
 
 Bhagalpur, . . . . . - . 178 
 
 Bhingar, . . . . . .178 
 
 BIBLE SOCIETIES, 173 
 
 Origin, . . . . . .173 
 
 Bible Societies existing before the American Bible 
 Society, . . . . . .174 
 
 Origin of American Bible Society, . . .174 
 
 Origin of American and Foreign Bible Society, . 175 
 Origin of American Bible Union, . . .175 
 
 Results, 175 
 
 Tabular view of receipts and appropriations, . J 76 
 Bombay, , . . . , . .176 
 
 BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES, . . .176 
 
 Religious Tract Society of London, . . 177 
 
 American Tract Society, . . . .177 
 
 Systematic distribution of Tracts, . . .178 
 
 Colportage, . . . , . .178 
 
 Foreign Distribution, . . . .180 
 
 Languages and dialects, . . . .180 
 
 Publications, 181 
 
 Tract House, . . . . . .181 
 
 Receipts and issues of American Tract Society in 
 
 29 years, 182 
 
 Presbyterian Board of Publication, . . 182 
 
 Methodist Book Concern, .... 183 
 American Baptist Publication Society, . . 183 
 
 Congregational Board of Publication, . . 183 
 
 List of Principal Book and Tract Societies, . 184 
 
 General increase of Religious Books, . . 184 
 
 BOOTAN, 185 
 
 Borneo, ...... 185,481 
 
 Brahma, . . . . . . .185 
 
 Brahmins, . . . , . .185 
 
 BRAHMINISM, 
 
 Ideas of God, .... .186 
 
 Character of gods, . . . . .186 
 
 Character of Priesthood, . . • .186 
 
 Religious Mendicants, . . . .186 
 
 Character of Worship, . . . .187 
 
 Hindoo notions of Sin, . . . .187 
 
 Ideas of Atonement, . . . . .187 
 
 Fate, Accountability, . . . .187 
 
 Notions of Futurity, . . . . .183 
 
 Ages of the world, . . - . .183 
 
 Caste, . 
 
 Dr. Allen's Testimony, 
 Superstitions, . 
 Cruelties of Brahminism, 
 Holy Days, 
 Holy Places, . 
 Degradation of Females, 
 Brahminism and Popery Compared, 
 The Remedy, 
 British Guiana, . 
 Brusa, . 
 BUDHISM, 
 Origin of Budhism, . 
 Doctrines of Budha, . 
 Sacred Books, 
 Modes of Worship, . 
 The Modern Priesthood, 
 
 190 
 190 
 391 
 193 
 192 
 198 
 198 
 198 
 194 
 194 
 194 
 194 
 196 
 193 
 197 
 
 1 
 
INDEX. 
 
 T87 
 
 Bungalow, 
 Burdwan, 
 
 Burisal .... 
 BURMA ir, 
 Topography, Population, 
 tSocial and Political Institutions, Arts, ic 
 Religion, 
 MapofBurmah, 
 
 Mission of the Am. Bap. Union, 
 Burmese War and persecution of missionaries, 
 Karens, 
 
 Christian villages formed, . 
 Visit of Dr. Malcolm, 
 Persecution of Christian Karens 
 Dr. Judson's visit to the U. S., 
 Separate organization of the Burman aad 
 
 Missions, 
 Return of Dr. Judson to Burmah, 
 Deputation from the Board, . 
 Summary View, 
 Bushmen, 
 Bussorah, 
 
 Cabalist, .... 
 Cairo, .... 
 Calcutta, .... 
 Caledon, .... 
 Callff, .... 
 Calpentyn, 
 
 Caltura, .... 
 Calicut, .... 
 Calmont, .... 
 Cameroons, 
 CANADA, 
 Early Settlement, 
 First Missions, 
 
 Endowments of Papal Institutions 
 Canada ceded to Great Britain, 
 English Missions, 
 Condition of the Episcopal Church 
 Statistics of different churches, 
 Canton, .... 
 CANNIBALS, . 
 Ancient cannibals, 
 Horrible practices among the South 
 and the Kookies in India, . 
 Cape Haytien, . 
 Gape Coast Town, 
 Canon, .... 
 Capuchins, 
 Cape Colony, 
 Cape Palmas, 
 <Cape Town, 
 Caravan, 
 Caravansary, 
 Carmelites, 
 Carnival, 
 Carthusian, 
 
 Carmel, .... 
 Caste, .... 
 Catholic, . ■:, • 
 
 Caunpoor, 
 
 Oavalla, .... 
 Gelestins, 
 Genobite, 
 OBYLON, 
 Geographical and Topographical Description 
 Population, ... 
 M1SS10S&— Portuguese Missions, 
 
 Government, Language, Arts, Religion, 
 London Missionary Society, 
 Snglinh Baptist Missionary Society, 
 American Board, . 
 Tabular Views, 
 Printing, 
 
 Medical Department, 
 Female Education, 
 Temperance, 
 Native contributions. 
 Present state of heathenism and prospects of 
 the Mission, 
 CJiurch Missionary Society, 
 Tabular View of stations, . 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, 
 Conversion of an Ava Priest, 
 Public contest with the priests 
 Tabular View, 
 General Tabular View, 
 Jhaldeans, 
 havagacherry, 
 )herrapoonge, . 
 
 . 19S 
 
 . 19S 
 
 . 198 
 
 . 198 
 
 . 198 
 
 . 198 
 
 . 193 
 
 . 198 
 
 . 199 
 
 . 200 
 201, 497 
 
 . 207 
 Karen 
 
 . 209 
 
 . 210 
 
 . 211 
 
 . 213 
 
 . 214 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 215 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 217 
 
 . 217 
 
 . 217 
 
 . 218 
 
 . 219 
 
 . 219 
 
 . 219 
 Islanders 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 221 
 
 . 222 
 183-189 
 
 . 222 
 
 Cherokee, 
 
 ChettingsviUe, ..'*'' 
 
 Chichacolc, ..'**' 
 
 CHINA, ...''** 
 
 Territorial extent. PoUtical DlTlsloni, Oompara-' 
 
 tive Dimensions, . . 
 
 Map, ....*'■ 
 Mountains, Desert of'Gobi, Rivers and Lakes * 
 Boundaries and Civil Divisions of China Proper ' 
 Chmale and Soil, Persons of the Chinese, . 
 Intellectual character, Population, History. Na- 
 tional works. Great Wall, Grand Canal. 
 <7i«<M, Peking, . . . \ 
 
 Canton, Wliampoa, Macao, Hong-Kong,' '. 
 
 Amoy, Fuhchau, Ningpo, . 
 Map of Fuhchau, . . . ' ' 
 
 Nanking, the Arts, Agriculture, 
 Productions, Commerce, • . '. ' 
 
 Pishing, Literary examinations. Classics, ! 
 Chinese Schools, Language, 
 Ability to read. . . 
 
 Industry and Frugality, Marriage, ! '. 
 
 Condition of Females, 
 Funerals and Burying Grounds, '. 
 Government, . . . . ' 
 
 Revenue and Disbursements, '. .' ] 
 
 Physical, Social, and Moral Condition, 
 Opium Trade and Opium Smoking, 
 Female Infanticide, ... 
 Tauists, •...!! 
 
 Confucianism, the ancient popular idolatry, 
 Missions, Ncetorian, ..... 
 Papal, '•..'.'. 
 
 London Missionary Society, 
 
 Tabular View, ...'.'. 
 
 American Board, ....'. 
 
 Interesting facts respecting the'orfgln'of the 
 
 rxan 
 244 
 844 
 S44 
 844 
 
 844 
 844 
 845 
 Ut 
 
 84« 
 
 84T 
 84S 
 849 
 880 
 
 vo 
 8S1 
 
 9M 
 S» 
 
 8M 
 886 
 
 SS6 
 856 
 
 856 
 855 
 25T 
 85T 
 258 
 
 sn 
 
 888 
 
 868 
 865 
 2T0 
 871 
 
 224 
 224 
 224 
 2.30 
 230 
 230 
 280 
 230 
 281 
 
 281 
 282 
 283 
 236 
 240 
 842 
 248 
 243 
 243 
 844 
 
 271 
 27T 
 27T 
 278 
 879 
 879 
 880 
 880 
 880 
 990 
 
 986 
 986 
 888 
 
 990 
 99S 
 99S 
 999 
 994 
 994 
 996 
 996 
 996 
 
 American Mission 
 Tabular View, 
 Southern Baptist Convention, . '. 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 
 
 Tabular View, .... 
 Amer. Seventh Day Baptist Society, 
 English Gen. Bap. Miss. Soe. 
 Miss Alderseif's Female Seminary, 
 Swedish Mi>>xion, 
 
 Free Ch. 0/ Scotland, . * 
 
 Amer. Episcopal Board, . 
 Presbyterian Board, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 Amer. Baptist Misnonary Union, 
 Metfwdist Episcopal Jfissions, 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, 
 Rhenish Jfiasionary Society. 
 Canton Baptist Miss. Society, 
 B'lsle Missionary Society, ... 
 General Tabular View, 
 
 Chinese Revolution, .... 
 
 Concluding Remarks, ... 
 
 Chinese Evangelical Society, ... 
 Chinese Evangelization Society, 
 
 Chinese Society (for supporting natire Erancellsts), 996 
 Chintadrepettah, . . ... 996 
 
 Chinsurab, .* . . . . S8f 
 
 Chittagong, ne 
 
 Chunar, ....... 996 
 
 Chundicully, ...... 996 
 
 Chumie, . .996 
 
 CHURCH OF ROME 896 
 
 Separation of the Kastern and Western Churches, 99T 
 The various rites, . . . .297 
 
 Support of the Clergy, . .997 
 
 Monastic Orders, ..... 298 
 CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF . .999 
 
 Missionary Societies, .... 800 
 
 Receipts, . .800 
 
 Missionary Stations, ..... 800 
 jFurope— Turkey— Greece, . . . .900 
 
 ^*ift— Turkey In Asia— Persia— India, . . 900 
 
 Further India, China, Corea, Mongol Tartary, 
 
 Manchuria, Thibet 901 
 
 East India Islands, Japan, .... 809 
 J/rica — Congo — Barbary— Egypt— Abyssinia- 
 Madagascar — other parts, . 809 
 Ooeanica, . .80$ 
 America— Spanish Missions, .809 
 Portuguese Missions — United States and Oanadas. 90t 
 Church lllll. . . .901 
 CHURCH MISSIONARY SOOirrr, . .901 
 Tabular View, Income, . . .904 
 
788 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 of MissioDs, 
 
 804 
 
 805 
 
 8<)& 
 805 
 
 . 805 
 . 805 
 14,805 
 . 806 
 
 806 
 
 lock, . 
 la, . 
 
 Imlore, 
 OUBberland Prea. Board 
 CutUck, . 
 Dacca, . 
 Damara Country, 
 Daijeeling, 
 UarlUtoD, 
 DarytoD, 
 Ded^aoiD, 
 Dataware, 
 Ddbi, . 
 Dharwar, 
 Ditp River, 
 Uindigul, . 
 Dlni^poor, 
 DroMs, . 
 Dnke Town, 
 D'Urban, 
 Dwight, . 
 Dyaaldorp, 
 
 £ARLY CURISTIAN MISSIONS, 
 Christianity essentially Missionary 
 Century //., Century III., . 
 Century IV., Missions to Ireland and Phosnicla, 
 Missions to Georgia, Persia, Armenia, Gaul, &c.. 
 Century V. St. Patrick's Mission to Ireland, 
 Nestorian Missions, .... 
 
 Conrerslon of the Picts— Baptism of Clovis, 
 
 Century VI., 
 
 Progress of Christianity in Wales and Cornwall, 
 Pope Gregory's Mission to Britain, 
 Austin's violent proceedings, 
 Columba's Mission to Scotland, . 
 Centuries VIJ. and VIIL, .... 
 
 Missions in Saxony and Germany, 
 Century /X— Missions among the Danes, Swedes, 
 Sclavonians, &c., ..... 
 
 Century jr., 
 
 CenturyXL, 
 
 Century XII., 
 
 Centuries XIII. and XIV., 
 
 The Waldenses, Albigenses, Wickllffe, . 
 Century XV., . . . . 
 
 Owaury jrr/.— The Reformation, 
 Mission to Lapland, . - . 
 
 Dutch Missions to the East, 
 Missionary Colonies In North America, . 
 Century XVIII., . . . 
 
 Society for the Propagation of the Gospel 
 Danish Missions, . . . . 
 
 Origin of Moravian Missions, 
 Missions of Wesley, Whltefield, Brainard, Ac, 
 Mission of Swartz, ; . . 
 
 Commencement of Modern Missions, 
 Lrtt of MisslonanWocietlcs, ., .. 881 
 
 Estimated progress of ChrTsUanity, each cen- 
 
 , ,^7, 882 
 
 East Cape, 883 
 
 Kbenezer, .... 
 
 Edina, 
 
 EOTPT— Boundaries, Population, Ac, 
 
 -church MiaeUmary So<deiy, 
 
 806 
 
 806 
 806 
 807 
 SOT 
 807 
 807 
 807 
 784 
 807 
 807 
 807 
 307 
 807 
 307 
 309 
 810 
 811 
 312 
 813 
 818 
 3i3 
 314 
 814 
 3 If. 
 316 
 817 
 817 
 
 818 
 319 
 321 
 822 
 
 . 325 
 . 326 
 825-827 
 . 327 
 . 828 
 
 830 
 331 
 881 
 
 833 
 833 
 
 EUot, 
 
 Emmaos, .... 
 
 *^oo» ..... 
 EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIONS, 
 
 Tabular Views of Missions and Receipts, 
 Enemanga, .... 
 
 Erarum, ..... 
 
 3.34 
 234 
 834 
 834 
 334 
 834 
 
 EUROPE— Area, Population, Languages, Indepen- 
 dent States, ..... 
 Religious Classification of the People, 
 Estimate of the Spiritual Condition of Europe, 
 m Condition of the Clergy, 
 
 (2) Estimate of the Sabbath, 
 
 (3) Religious Reading .... 
 
 (4) Family Worship, .... 
 
 (5) Discipline, (6) Social Meetings, 
 
 (7) Revivals and Conversions, 
 
 (8) Religious Education, .... 
 
 (9) Christian Union, (10) Missionary Laborts, 
 Means and men of the European Missionary So- 
 cieties, tabular view of, . 
 
 Greek and Roman Catholic Churches, 
 Agencies eniplo;j_ed to disseminate the Gospel in 
 Europe, ...... 
 
 (1) Common Schools, (2) Temperance, (8) 
 Preaching and distribution of tracts and books, 
 
 What may be done to evangelize Europe, . 
 Hindrances, (1) Union of Church and State, 
 
 (2) Social penalties attached to change of re- 
 ligion, ...... 
 
 (3) Literature, (4) Philosophy, (5) Popery, . 
 Present condition of the Roman Ilierarchy, con- 
 sidered as an aggressive power, . 
 
 Review of the European States, 
 
 (1) England, Scotland, and Ireland, 
 Churches and attendance in England,Scotland, 
 
 and Wales, ..... 
 
 (2) Holland, 
 
 (3) Scandinavia, (4) Belgium, (5) France, . 
 
 (6) Switzerland, ..... 
 
 (7) Italy, (8) Germany, .... 
 
 (9) Russia, ...... 
 
 (10) Spain and Portugal, (11) Greece and Ionian 
 Isles, ...... 
 
 (12) Turkey in Europe, .... 
 Methodist Jlissiati^ in Huropc, 
 
 Bodies engaged — Countries occupied. 
 
 Mode of operation — Success, 
 
 Switzerland, Germany, Sweden, . 
 
 Irish Methodist Home Missions, . 
 
 France, Italy, and Corsica, 
 
 Tabular Views, . . . .862 
 
 Fakir, 
 
 Fernando Po, ...... 
 
 Free Town, ...... 
 
 Free Church of Scotland Missions, 
 
 Free Will Baptist Foreign Missionary Society, 
 
 Friendly Islands, ..... 
 
 Furrackabad, ...... 
 
 Futtegurh, ...... 
 
 Gaboon, ....... 
 
 Genadendal, ...... 
 
 General Baptist Missionary Society, . 
 
 Geog Tapa, ...... 
 
 Georgian Islands, ..... 
 
 Ghi^zipoor, ...... 
 
 Glasgow Missionary Society, . . . . 
 
 Gorruckpore, ...... 
 
 Gossner's Missionary Society, .... 
 
 Gowhatti, ...... 
 
 Grahamstown, ...... 
 
 Graaf-Reinet, 
 
 GREECE, 
 
 Geographical Description, .... 
 Greek Church — difference between it and the 
 
 Latin, ...... 
 
 Missions— American Board, 
 
 American Episcopal Moard, 
 
 Am. Baptist Miss. Union, 
 Greegree, ...... 
 
 Grequa Town, ...... 
 
 Hadgee, ....... 
 
 Hawaii, ....... 
 
 Hervey Islands, ...... 
 
 Hierarchy, ...... 
 
 Hilo, 
 
 U IN DOST AN 
 
 Map of, . . , ". 
 
 Boundaries and Surface, Rivers and Lakes, Coast 
 
 and Climate, Native Population, . 
 Foreign Settlers, Religions, Languages, Literature, 
 Science, Arts, Agriculture, Physical and Intellec- 
 tual Character, British rule. 
 Missions, ...... 
 
 Am,erican Board, — Bombay, 
 
 Map of Western India, .... 
 
 Satara, ...... 
 
 887 
 887 
 888 
 888 
 883 
 888 
 888 
 88S 
 
 840 
 840 
 
 842 
 
 342 
 
 343 
 
 845 
 845 
 
 846 
 849 
 849 
 
 850 
 851 
 352 
 853 
 854 
 855 
 
 356 
 857 
 368 
 858 
 859 
 
 864 
 364 
 364 
 864 
 364 
 366 
 366 
 366 
 866 
 36S 
 
 368 
 869 
 869 
 370 
 870 
 870 
 871 
 871 
 
 871 
 871 
 875 
 
 875 
 878 
 378 
 378 
 378 
 378 
 379 
 379 
 379 
 879 
 
 879 
 
 881 
 
 332 
 8S2 
 885 
 8S6 
 
INDEX. 
 
 T89 
 
 District, 
 
 Hi- 
 
 Aiimednug{jur, Seroor, 
 Kolapoor, Madura, . * 
 
 Map of Southern India and Ceylon 
 Madras, . , . 
 
 Arcot, . . ' ' 
 
 Tabular View, . ] 
 
 Church Missionary /Society— Madr&B 
 Abdool Messech, . . , 
 
 Syrian Christians, . ,* ] 
 
 Names of Missionary Districts, .* 
 Wonderful movement in the Tinnevelly 
 Bombay, .... 
 
 Map of Bengal, 
 
 Calcutta and North India, 
 
 Benares, • . . .' 
 
 Birdwan, Krishnagur, . ' 
 
 Chuhar, Mirut, , . | 
 
 Agra, Jaunpore, Gorruckpore, Bhagulpiir 
 
 malaya, . 
 The Punjaub— Tabular View, 
 Society /or the Propagation of the Gospel, 
 Bishop's College, . , . 
 
 Cawnpore, Madras, 
 Tinnevelly, Bombay, 
 English Baptist Missionai'^y Society. 
 Notices of Stations, 
 Tabular View, 
 London Missionary Society, 
 Vizigapatam, 
 Madras, Cuddapah, 
 Belgaum, .... 
 
 Bellary, Bangalore, 
 Mysore, Saledi, Combaconum, 
 Coirabatoor, S. Travancore, 
 Calcutta, .... 
 
 Chinsurah, Berhampore, . 
 Benares, .... 
 
 Mirzapore, Sarat, Mahi-Kantha, Almora 
 Tabular View, . , . 
 
 Free Church of Scotland, . 
 Madras, Bombay, Poonah, Nagpoor, 
 Calcutta, .... 
 
 Irish Presbyterian Mission, 
 General Baptist Missionary Society, 
 Cuttack, Pooree, . . 
 
 ' Balasore, .... 
 
 British support of Idolatry, 
 Free Will Baptist Missionary Society, 
 Tabular View, 
 ' American Presbyterian Missions, 
 Map of Northern India, . 
 Organizatfon of a church at Lodiana, 
 Tabular View, 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 Welsh Calvinistia Methodist Missionary Society, 
 American Baptist Mission among the Teloogoos, 
 Basle Missionary Society, . 
 
 Tabular View, 
 Berlin a7id Leipsio Missionary Societies, 
 North German Missionary Society, 
 Gossner^s Missionary Society, 
 General Tabular View, 
 Letter from Rev. Dr. Scudder, . 
 Holapoor, .... 
 
 HOME MISSIONS, 
 Early Home Mission efforts. 
 Home Missionary Societies in New England, 
 Home Missions of the Presbyterian Church, 
 Average salaries of home missionaries, . 
 American Home Missionary Society, 
 Tabular View of receipts, expenditures, labors 
 and results, ..... 
 
 Methodist Home Missions, .... 
 
 Tabular Views, ..... 
 
 American Baptist Home Missionary Society, 
 Board Domestic Missions Protestant £plscopal 
 Church, ...... 
 
 Board of Missions Reformed Dutch Church, 
 General Tabular View, 
 Honolulu, .... 
 
 Hottentots, .... 
 
 Iluahine, .... 
 
 Human Sacrifices, 
 
 Idol, Idolatry, .... 
 
 Indians, ..... 
 
 INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO, 
 Nicobar and Andaman Islands, Sumatra 
 Java, Map, .... 
 
 Lesser Sunda Islands, 
 
 897, 400 
 398 
 
 898 
 401 
 401 
 401 
 402 
 403 
 405 
 
 . 406 
 . 407 
 . 407 
 . 407 
 . 408 
 . 409 
 . 409 
 417, 422 
 . 422 
 . 422 
 . 422 
 . 42-J 
 . 425 
 . 426 
 . 427 
 . 428 
 . 429 
 . 430 
 . 431 
 . 432 
 
 489 
 405 
 
 Moral CondiUoD, 4M 
 
 . W 
 
 201, 4»T 
 
 . 434 
 . 435 
 , 485 
 , 4-35 
 4.35 
 436 
 437 
 441 
 443 
 444 
 444 
 445 
 449 
 449 
 453 
 454 
 454 
 456 
 45S 
 458 
 458 
 459 
 459 
 459 
 465 
 465 
 465 
 466 
 467 
 46S 
 468 
 
 469 
 469 
 471 
 471 
 
 478 
 473 
 474 
 474 
 474 
 475 
 476 
 478 
 5S2 
 479 
 479 
 480 
 481 
 
 Borneo, 
 Celebes, 
 The Molufcas, 
 Philippine Islands, 
 Formosa, 
 INFANTICIDE, . 
 Among the ancients. 
 In the Pacific Isles, 
 In India and China, 
 JEWS, Missions to, 
 Number of. 
 In Abyssinia, . 
 Present social state. 
 Intellectual position, 
 Religious condition, . 
 Reasons for distinct misslona 
 London Jews' Society, 
 British Society, 
 
 Missions of Presbyterians in Oreat Britaia 
 Scottish Jews' Society, 
 American .Missions to Jews 
 American Society, 
 General Summary, . 
 Jacobites, 
 Jaffa, Jaffna, 
 Jaipur, . 
 Jains, 
 Jalna, 
 Jassore, . 
 Jaunpur, 
 
 Jesuits, . . * 
 
 Jooneer, 
 Juggernaut, 
 Jiyu or Jewjew, . 
 Kaffi-aria, 
 KAFFRES, 
 
 Government, People,Reb'irion3 and 
 Kandy, . 
 Karens, . 
 Kat River, 
 Kauai, 
 Kharput, . 
 Khundita, 
 Kingston, 
 Kiosk, 
 Kissor, . 
 Kissey, . 
 Rolobeng, 
 Kraal, . 
 Krishnagur, 
 Kamasi, . 
 Kuruman, 
 Kumiss, . 
 Kyouk Phyoo, . 
 
 LABRADOR AND GREENLAND, 
 Geographic:U Position, Climate, kc. 
 Map, .... 
 Description of the natives, . 
 Missio.Nd— Z>a«t«A Miesion in Greenland. 
 Moravian Mission, 
 Discouragements, . 
 First Conversion, , 
 Tabular View, 
 Labrador, . 
 Tabular View, 
 Lagos, 
 Lahaina, , 
 Lahalnaluna, 
 Lahor, . 
 
 LEW CHEW, or Loo Ohoo, 
 Cities and Villages, . 
 The People— Products— DweIUags—Dref»->Lan* 
 
 guagc — -irts. 
 Religion — Government— Foreign Policy, 
 Mission of Dr. Battclheim, . 
 LIBERIA— Government, Education, Extent, 
 Map of Liberia, ..... 
 
 Harbors— Productions— Native Inli:ibit.tnts— Dis- 
 covery. 
 The Pope's grant not recognised, 
 Portuguese Missions, . 
 Character and influence oftha slave- 
 Origin and History of the Colony, 
 Missions in Liberia, . 
 Lodiana, .... 
 LONDON MISSIONARY SOOaCTT, 
 Origin and Hi«tory, . 
 Mis.'^lonarlcs and Churcbet, . 
 Translations, . 
 Macao .... 
 
 411 
 
 486 
 
 4sr 
 
 487 
 
 10 
 
 480 
 
 481 
 481 
 
 487 
 487 
 487 
 
 48S 
 488 
 
 488 
 486 
 
 Ml 
 606 
 
 510 
 611 
 611 
 61S 
 618 
 
 .■)U 
 6UV 
 616 
 61 S 
 
 51S 
 .M» 
 619 
 
790 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 MADAeABOAR.. 
 
 PMVlAtlen, OoTtrnmcnt 
 Migioa M " 
 
 680 
 
 •Dd Morals, .081 
 
 .Londom MiMionant Socidy, . . C31 
 
 iMolU of flftMn jeara* labor, . .621 
 
 Oammoaeomentofporseoutlon, . . 622 
 
 Broakloff up of tb« Miuion, .625 
 
 lUrUrrtloai of Ratalama, and rlolent persecu- 
 tion of others, . .627 
 Oootioaed violeuce and bloodshed, . 62S, 629 
 Baeape of a party of conrerta, 
 tireat awakening, and conversion of the Queen's 
 son, ...... 
 
 Hrightentng Prospects, .... 
 
 MADKIKA 
 
 6«ograpbical Description, Oorerument, Ac, 
 MmSns— Scotch Frt« Church, 
 Oommeocement of a work of grace, under the 
 labors of Dr. Kalley, .... 
 
 Beginning of Persecution — Imprisonment of Dr. 
 
 Kalley 
 
 Departure of Dr. Kalley— his return with Mr. 
 Ilfwitson, ...... 
 
 Violent proceedings against the converts, . 
 Mr. Ilewitson leaves the Island, . . .684 
 
 Peril and escape of Dr. Kalley, . . . 634 
 
 Kscape of Converts to Trinidad, . . . 685 
 
 Ordination of Mr. Da Silva, . . . .685 
 
 Madras 685 
 
 Madura, . 
 Malta, . 
 
 Mutaban, Marsovan, . 
 Maronites, 
 
 MARQUESAS ISLANDS, 
 Mission to, 
 
 640 
 
 641 
 
 MAURITIUS, or Isle of France, 
 
 Mission of the London Missionary Society, 
 Methodist Kpiscopal Church, Missions of 
 Mexico, ....... 
 
 MICRONESIA— Situation, Extent, Population, Pro- 
 ductions, ...... 
 
 Mission of the American Board, 
 MINISTERIAL EDUCATION, 
 
 Tabular View of the number of ministers from New 
 England colleges, arranged in periods of 10 
 years, from 1540 to 18.M .... 
 
 Decrease of candidates for the ministry, . 642-643 
 
 View of the religious state of the country as to the 
 coniparative number of churches and ministers, 
 
 Education Societies, ..... 
 
 Mirut, 
 
 Mlraapore, ...... 
 
 MISSIONARY SOCIETY METHODIST EPISCOPAL 
 CHURCH, 
 
 Tabular Views, ..... 
 
 MOHAMMEDANS— In Abyssinia, . 
 
 In Turkey, ...... 
 
 In the world, ...... 
 
 Molokal, 
 
 MoUah 
 
 Momba4, . . , ... 
 
 Monrovia, . , . , ' , 
 
 Montscrrat, . . . . , 
 
 Monophysites, ..... 
 MOSUL— History of Mission, .... 
 
 Letter from Rev. Mr. Marsh, 
 Mufti 
 
 Muttra, ....,.! 
 
 Mynpuric, ••...! 
 
 Mysore, .......* 
 
 Nagpore, .....! 
 
 Nanking, ....... 
 
 Nassau, ..>..' 
 
 Nassack, 
 
 NaUl 
 
 Natal Harbor, D'Urban, Petermarltaburg, Scenery, 
 
 Climate 552 
 
 Negapatam, Negroes, ..... 553 
 Nellore, ...... 550 
 
 NESTORIANS '. ^^3 
 
 Map of the country of the Nestorians, . . 653 
 
 Nestorius and his followers, . . . .553 
 
 Missionary character of the Nestorians, . 654-555 
 Their doctrines and character at the commence- 
 ment of missionary operations among them, . 655 
 MUnon of the American Board, . . .556 
 
 Tabular View of mloslonaries, . . .557 
 
 Object aimed at- -cooperation of ecclftsiastics, 557 
 British and Russian protection, ."■*'. . 557 
 
 rAos 
 The Press, Translating, Schools, . . ., ISfiS 
 
 Preaching, Native Helpers, . . , &69 
 
 Opposition, ...... 660 
 
 Revivals, ...... 561 
 
 Efforts for the Mountain Nestorians, . . 562 
 
 Tabular View, . . . . .664 
 
 Letter from Rev. Dr. Perkins, . . .664 
 
 Netherlands Missionary Society, . . . 666 
 
 New Hebrides, . . . . . .668 
 
 New Brunswick, ..... 668 
 
 NEW ZEALAND, 569 
 
 Map of New Zealand and Tasmania, . . 569 
 
 Climate, soil and productions, inhabitants, . 569 
 
 Tattooing, . . . . . .669 
 
 Religion, ...... 670 
 
 MiamoKa— C /lurch Missionary Societp, . . 670 
 
 Discouragemetlts, ..... 670 
 
 Success, ...... 671 
 
 Native prayer meetings, general improvement, . 672 
 
 Power of the Gospel to tame savage tribes, . 678 
 
 Rapid growth of Christianity, . . . 674 
 
 Tabular View, . . . . .675 
 
 Society for Propagating the Gospel, . . 676 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, . . . 676 
 
 Tabular View, • . . . .681 
 
 General Tabular View, .... 681 
 
 Nicomedia, .... 
 
 Ningpo, ..... 
 
 NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS, 
 lUs&ioti^— Presbyterian Board, . 
 Map of Indian Territory, . 
 Tabular View, 
 Am. Bap. Miss. Union, 
 
 Statistics for 1854, . 
 Miss. Soc, Meth. Epis. Church, . 
 Mission begun by a colored man, . 
 Remarkable Success, 
 
 Missions among the Creeks, Snakes, Yellow- 
 heads, Cherokees, .... 
 
 Among the Choctaws, Putawatomies, Oneidas, 
 Shawnees, Kansas, Iroquois and Kikapoos, . 
 Tabular View, 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 American Board, . 
 General history of early Indian missions 
 Mission to the Cherokees, . 
 Invention of Cherokee Alphabet, . 
 Trouble with the authorities of Georgia, 
 Arrest, trial, and imprisonment of Messrs. Wor- 
 cester and Butler, 
 Removal of the Indians, . 
 Choctaws, .... 
 
 Tabular View, 
 
 Slavery and action of the Board thereon, 613 
 
 Osages, .... 
 
 Chickasaw, .... 
 
 Creeks, Oltawas, . 
 
 Ojibwas, .... 
 
 Dakotas, .... 
 
 Tabular Views, 
 
 Abeaaquis, Pawnees, 
 
 Oregon Indians, 
 
 Indians in New York, 
 
 Moravian Missions, 
 
 Church Missionary Society, 
 
 Episcopal Board, . 
 
 American dEssiotun'y Association, 
 
 Tabular View, 
 General Tabular View, 
 Letter from Uev. C. Byington, 
 NOVA SCOTIA— Boundaries and extent, 
 Church of England in N. S., . 
 Presbyterian Church, 
 Church of Scotland, . 
 Free Church of N. S. . 
 Reformed Pres. Church, 
 Baptist Churches 
 Wesleyan Methodists, 
 Evangelical Lutherans, 
 
 Oahu 
 
 Oceanica, .... 
 
 Ojibwas, ..... 
 Old Calabar, .... 
 OodooTille, .... 
 
 Oorfa, 
 
 ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS MISSIONS TO 
 Bishop Gobat and Church Missionary Society, . 631 
 Mode of conducting missions to decayed churches 
 in the East. 682 
 
 682 
 682 
 582 
 686 
 686 
 691 
 691 
 691 
 592 
 
 594 
 
 595 
 697 
 598 
 601 
 601 
 601 
 604 
 606 
 607 
 
 603 
 609 
 611 
 614 
 614 
 615 
 616 
 617 
 
 624 
 625 
 626 
 625 
 626 
 626 
 783 
 626 
 627 
 627 
 
 929 
 
 631 
 681 
 
INDEX. 
 
 791 
 
 Bishop Southgate, • . . . 
 
 Nazareth, Jerusalem, Nabloua, Syra, Smyrna. 
 MalU Prot. College, . . . 
 
 ORISSA, 
 
 Population— Santals and Bbumijas, 
 Oroomiab, .... 
 
 Pagan, ..... 
 Pagoda, ..... 
 Parseeism, 
 
 The Zand-Avasta— Idolatry of the Parsees, 
 Paris Protestant Missionary Society, . 
 Pasha, 
 Patna, 
 Patriarch, 
 Paumotu, 
 Pedang, . 
 Peking, . 
 Pilgrimage, 
 Polynesia, 
 Pontianak, 
 Poonah, . 
 Port Elizabeth, 
 Port Lokkoh, 
 Port Louis, 
 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OP MISSIONS, . 
 
 Mode of Organization, ' . . . 
 
 Mode of transacting business, 
 
 Tabular View of its Missions, 
 
 Mission House, ..... 
 
 Yearly Receipts, ..... 
 
 Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia Board of Mis- 
 sions, ....... 
 
 Primitire Methodist Foreign Missionary Society, 
 Puna, ....... 
 
 Rajah, 
 
 Rangoon, ...... 
 
 Rarotonga, ...... 
 
 Regent's Tov^, ...... 
 
 Rhenish Missionary Society, . . . . 
 
 Safet, ....... 
 
 Saharanpur, ...... 
 
 Samarang, ...... 
 
 SANDWICH ISLANDS— Geographical Description 
 and Map, ...... 
 
 Population — Social, moral and religious condition. 
 Mission — American Board, 
 Preparation at the Islands, Arrival and recep- 
 tion of the missionaries, 
 Obstacles, ...... 
 
 Reinforcements, Position and influence of chiefs, 
 
 four years' missionf-ry labor. 
 Regency of Kaahumanu, .... 
 
 Kapiolani— Visit of Lord Byron, . 
 Opposition from foreigners, WhaleshJp, Dolphin, 
 U. S. Sloop Peacock, Vindication of missionaries- 
 further outrages, ..... 
 
 Letter from the President of the United States, 
 Papal Missionaries, ..... 
 
 Results of first ten years' missionary labor, 
 Death of Kaahumanu, reaction, progress, schools, 
 The Press— Churches— Great Revival— Benevo- 
 lence, .... 
 
 Civilization — Government— Laws— Seiaure of the 
 Islands by Loi-d Paulet — ^Independence acknow- 
 
 Decrease of population, .... 
 
 The Mission dissolved, .... 
 
 Summary and Statistics, .... 
 
 Teachers sent to the Marquesas Islands, . 
 
 American Missionary Association, . 
 
 Letter from Rev, Titus Coan, 
 Satora, ....... 
 
 SEAMEN— Numbers, Origin and progress of missions 
 to, 
 
 Results, ...... 
 
 Serampore, Seir, ..... 
 
 Seroor, ....... 
 
 Settra Kroo, ...... 
 
 Sevagunga, ...... 
 
 Seychelles, ...... 
 
 Shanghai, ...... 
 
 Sheikh, 
 
 SIAM — Government, Religion, 
 
 Missions — Presbyterian Board, . 
 American Baptist Mission, 
 American Board and American MiiHonary 
 Association, ..... 
 
 Sierra Leone, ...... 
 
 Singapore, ...... 
 
 Smyrna, ....... 
 
 SOCIETY FOR PROPAQATLNQ THE GOSPEL IN 
 
 FOREIG.N PARTS, . ""'•**' ^ ^ 
 
 Average and total receipts in 81 years, 
 Society Islands, .... 
 Southern Baptist Convention, . 
 
 641 
 642 
 643 
 643 
 644 
 
 644 
 W6 
 646 
 646 
 646 
 647 
 647 
 647 
 643 
 648 
 643 
 
 64S 
 649 
 649 
 
 650 
 651 
 
 652 
 654 
 655 
 656 
 
 657 
 658 
 658 
 660 
 661 
 
 . 6C2 
 
 aw 
 w 
 
 697 
 
 701 
 701 
 705 
 705 
 7<>7 
 
 706 
 
 . 708 
 
 fr35 SOUTH SEA ISLANDS-GeographlcalDeK^pUon, <78 
 686 Map of Southern Pacific, . . . . «78 
 
 636 Productions, .....* nan 
 
 Inhabitants, Language, General Characteristics! 
 Tattooing, Dress, ..... 
 
 6S3 Mental Capacity, Marriage, .Moral Character, The 
 Arts, ••.... 
 
 "Wars, Government, Religion, . .* \ 
 
 Missions— ZoTK/ort Missionary Society, . 
 Georgian Islands, 
 Tabular View, ....'. 
 
 Society Islands, . . . . ' 
 
 Tabular View, • . . . . 
 
 Hervey Islands, • • . . ! 
 
 Tabular View, ..... 
 
 Samoan or Navigator's Islands, 
 
 Tabular View, . ..... 
 
 Austral Islands, ..... 
 
 Tabular View, ..'... 
 
 Paumotu or Pearl Islands, .... 
 
 Marquesas Islands ..... 
 
 New Hebrides— Mr. Williams's last voyage and 
 death, ...... 
 
 Pres. Ch. of Nova /Suo^a— Mission to New Hebrl- 
 
 tle 710 
 
 Description of the Island of Anelteum, . , 7io 
 
 Origin and History of the mission, . . .711 
 
 Tabular View of Western Polynesia, . . 713 
 
 Wesleyan Missionary Society, . . .718 
 
 Friendly Islands, . . . . .714 
 
 Feejeo Islands, ..... 720 
 
 Tabular View, . . . .723 
 
 Temperance, ...... 724 
 
 (Jeneral Tabular View, . . . .725 
 
 SOUTH AMERICA— Brasll, . . . .726 
 
 Missions, . . . . . .727 
 
 Sunday Schools, . . . . .729 
 
 Surat, . . . . . . .782 
 
 Suttee, . . . . . . .732 
 
 Sydney, ....... 783 
 
 Syrian Christians, . . . . .738 
 
 SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND, . . .783 
 
 Map of part of Syria, .... 783 
 
 Population — Numbers of different sects, . . 73* 
 
 Druses, ...... 784 
 
 Missions of the American Board, . . . 734 
 
 Wonderful movement at Hasbeiya . . 739 
 
 Tabular View, ..... 743 
 
 Tabu, . . . . .748 
 
 Talapoius, . . . . . .748 
 
 Tamtam, . . . .748 
 
 Tamlook, . . . . .748 
 
 Tananarivo, ...... 744 
 
 Tangeua, ...... 744 
 
 Taouists, ..... 260,744 
 
 TARTARY AND SIBERU, . . .744 
 
 Geographical Description, .... 744 
 
 Population — Religion, .... 744 
 
 MissiON»- United Brethren, SooUish Mit9. Soc. . 74« 
 
 Jjondon Missionary Society, . . . T4T 
 
 TASMANIA, or Van Dicman's Land, . .748 
 
 Map, 5<» 
 
 MlsHon of the Wedeyan Ml»$. 8oe. . 748 
 
 Tabular View, 749 
 
 Tattooing, M9,749 
 
 Tavoy, . . . . . .749 
 
 Tenasserira. ...... 749 
 
 THESSALOXICA, 750 
 
 Map of .... 751 
 
 Thugs, ...... 46\ 
 
 Tinnevelly, . . . • . . 7.V< 
 
 TouDgoo, . . . . . . T.-i 
 
 Travancore, . .... T.v^ 
 
 Trebizond, . . . . . IM 
 
 TURKEY, 751 
 
 Boundaries and extent, . .751 
 
 Turkey in Karope, . .751 
 
 Turkey in Asia. . . .751 
 
 Turkey in Africa, 751 
 
 Population tables, by coontries, .751 
 
 Population tables by races and creeds, . 79t 
 
 Ecclesiastico-Political Government, . 70t 
 
 Reforms, ...... TOt 
 
 Ultenhage. -^ . . . . . 78i 
 
 UNITED ST.Kim-Extent of Territory, . TM 
 
 <78 
 678 
 678 
 
T9S 
 
 INDKX 
 
 rAOK 
 
 nurile«l TMoorcet, Commerce, . 7M 
 
 itioa, Publte Works, Geographical position, 755 
 
 of people, . .755 
 
 BcUctea, 766 
 
 and Orlne, Temperance Reform, . 757 
 BEITHRIM'8 lOBSIONS, . .758 
 
 Tabular View, ' 769 
 
 London AMocIation in aid of, . . . 760 
 
 rartabed, 760 
 
 feda., 760 
 
 ViiMtapaUm, 760 
 
 WtnTofton. 7C1 
 
 nrelth Calrinislio Methodist Foreign Missionary 
 
 Society 761 
 
 mCST INDIES, 761 
 
 Table of population, . . .761 
 
 Description of the Islands, . . . 761-762 
 
 Mups, . . . . . 760,763,764,771 
 
 — ■ iOmionary Society, . 762 
 
 Tabular View, .... 
 
 Moravian JUUnions, .... 
 
 Sngllsh JiaptM Missions— T)ihn\a,r View, 
 
 Church Miiinionary Society^ 
 
 Soc.for the Prop, of the Gospel, . 
 
 London MLnsionary Society, 
 General Tabular View, 
 WE3LEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY, 
 
 Results, Income, .... 
 
 WITCllCRAPT, 
 
 WORLD— Population— Religions Sects— Table 
 
 Missions, ..... 
 YORUBA, 
 
 Map of, ..... 
 
 Qcographyt Religion, 
 
 Population, ..... 
 Zoharites, V . . . . 
 
 ZULUS— Climate, People, 
 
 Dwellings, language, moral character, 
 
 771 
 778 
 776 
 775 
 776 
 775 
 775 
 778 
 779 
 
 780 
 781 
 781 
 
 781 
 782 
 782 
 
 INDEX TO THE MAPS. 
 
 il ..k \ South of the Bqoator, . 
 
 . 10 
 
 AJ »cw, Southern, 
 
 . 22 
 
 Aftrfca, West, .... 
 
 . 68 
 
 Cape Palmas, .... 
 
 . 97 
 
 Bberbro and Mendi, . 
 
 . 104 
 
 Armenia and Part of Asia Minor, 
 
 . 119 
 
 Vicinity of Constantinople, . 
 
 . 125 
 
 AInub and Vicinity, . 
 
 . 140 
 
 Australia 
 
 . 164 
 
 Burmah, Slam, kc. 
 
 . 198 
 
 China, Part of, .... 
 
 . 244 
 
 Fuhchau 
 
 . 250 
 
 India, Missionary Map o^ 
 
 . 878 
 
 Western ludia. 
 
 . 885 
 
 Southern India ind Ceylon, 
 
 . 891 
 
 Bengal 
 
 . 401 
 
 Northern India, . . . . . 444 
 
 Indian Archipelago and Western Pacific Isles, . 48C 
 Labrador and Greenland, .... 498 
 
 Liberia, 512 
 
 Nestorians, Country of, .... 562 
 
 New Zealand, . . . . . .569 
 
 North American Indians, Territory of, . . 582 
 
 Sandwich Islands, ..... 648 
 
 South Sea Islands, . . . . .678 
 
 Syria, Part of, . . . . . .733 
 
 Tasmania, ...... 669 
 
 West India Islands — ^Jamaica, . . . 760 
 
 St. Kitts, Antigua, and Mosquito Coast, . . 763 
 
 Tobago and Barbadoes, .... 764 
 
 St. Thomas, St. Jan, St. Croix, Surinam, . . 771 
 Yoruba, 781 
 
 ^TJiriVBESITT] 
 
 vP 
 
RETURN TO: CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 198 Main Stacks 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 Home Use 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS. 
 
 Renewals and Recharges may be made 4 days prior to the due date. 
 Books may be renewed by calling 642-3405. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW. 
 
 lAM 1 A orifl? 
 
 
 
 JAN 1 4 lwl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FORM NO. DD6 
 50M 6-00 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 Berkeley, California 94720-6000